This version of the PTS Dictionary is (ultimately) derived from the digitized on-line version which is based on the 1921 Rhys Davids and Stede edition.
It was extracted from Digital Pali Reader by Ven. Nandiya, and some additional corrections and improvements have been made. Even a cursory glance will reveal that many errors remain. For example, the greek roots, almost unreadable even in the paper edition, are ascii-garbage. Some characters have been incorrectly digitized, but this is not common. If in doubt, check the paper edition.
the prep. ā shortened before double cons., as akkosati (ā + kruś), akkhāti (ā + khyā), abbahati (ā + bṛh) -Best to be classed here is the a- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of ā- (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single consonant instead of double). Thus anantaka (for ā-nantaka = nantaka ) Vv.807; amajjapa (for ā-majjapa = majjapa ) Ja vi.328; amāpaya (for āmāpaya = māpaya ) Ja vi.518; apassato (= passantassa) Ja vi.552.
(an- before vowels) neg. part. prefixed to (1 nouns and adjectives; (2) verbal forms, used like (1) whether part., ger., grd. or inf.; (3) finite verbal forms In compn. with words having originally two initial cons. the latter reappear in their assimilated form (e.g. appaṭicchavin). In meaning it equals na-, nir- and vi-. Often we find it opp. to sa-. Verbal negatives which occur in specific verb. function will be enumd. separately, while examples of neg. form. of (1) & (2) are given under their positive form unless the neg. involves a distinctly new concept, or if its form is likely to lead to confusion or misunderstanding ■ Concerning the combining & contrasting (orig. neg.); -a-(ā) in redupl. formations like bhavā-bhava see ā4.
Vedic a-, an-; Idg. *n̊, gradation form to *ne (see na2); Gr. ἀ, ἀν-; Lat. *en-, in-; Goth. Ohg. & Ags. un-; Oir. an-, in-
the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in pret., aor. & cond.; tenses; often omitted in ordinary prose. See forms under each verb; cp. also ajja Identical with this a- is the a- which functions as base of some pron. forms like ato, attha, asu etc. (q.v.).
Vedic a-; Idg. *e (loc. of pron. stem, cp. ayaṃ; orig. a deictic adv. with specific reference to the past, cp Sk sma); Gr. ἐ-; also in Gr. ἐκεϊ, Lat. equidem, enim.
the sound a (a-kāra ) Ja vi.328, Ja vi.552; Vv-a 279, Vv-a 307, Vv-a 311.
(a) the shoulder AN v.110; Snp 609. aṃse karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder Ja i.9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. ˚āsa in koṭṭhāsa and expln of aṃsa as koṭṭhāsa at DN-a i.312, also v.l. mettāsa for mettaṃsa at Iti 22) ■ atīt’aṃse in former times, formerly DN ii.224 Thig 314. mettaṃsa sharing friendship (with) AN iv.151 = Iti 22 = Ja iv.71 (in which connection Mil 402 reads ahiṃsā ) ■ Disjunctive ekena aṃsena… ekena aṃsena on the one hand (side)… on the other, partly… partly AN i.61. From this: ekaṃsa (adj.) on the one hand (only) i.e. incomplete (opp. ubhayaṃsa ) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp dvidhā ): see ekaṃsa ■ paccaṃsena according to each one’s share AN iii.38. puṭaṃsena with a knapsack for provisions DN i.117; AN ii.183; cp. DN-a i.288, with v.l. puṭosena at both passages.
-kūṭa “shoulder prominence”, the shoulder Vin iii.127; Dhp-a iii.214; Dhp-a iv.136; Vv-a 121 ■ vaṭṭaka a shoulder strap (mostly combd with kāyabandhana; vv.ll. ˚vaddhaka ˚bandhaka) Vin i.204 (T. ˚bandhaka); ii.114 (ddh); iv.170 (ddh); Vv 3340 (T. ˚bandhana, C. v.l. ˚vaṭṭaka); Dhp-a iii.452.
Vedic aṃsa; cp. Gr. ̓ ̈ωμος, Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm. us
point, corner, edge; freg. in combn with numerals, e.g. catur˚; four-cornered, chaḷ˚, aṭṭh˚ soḷas˚; etc. (q.v.) all at Dhs 617 (cp. Dhs-a 317). In connection with a Vimāna: āyat˚; with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 8415; as part of a carriage-pole Vv 642 (= kubbara-phale patiṭṭhitā heṭṭhima-aṃsā Vv-a 265).
see next
(f.) a corner, edge (= aṃsa2 Vv 782 (= aṃsa-bhāga Vv-a 303).
cp. Vedic aśri, aśra, aśani; Gr. α ̓́κρος pointed, α ̓́κρις, also ὀςύς sharp: Lat. ācer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lat. Wtb. under ācer
a thread Vin iii.224. -mālin, sun Sāsv 1.
cp. Sk. aṃśu (Halāyudha) a ray of light
(adj.) not made, not artificial, natural; ˚yūsa natural juice Vin i.206.
a + kaṭa
(nt.) the condition of not being shaken, stableness Mil 354.
abstr. fr. akampiya, grd. of a + kampati
(cp. agalu ) an ointment Ja iv.440 (akaluñ candanañ ca, v.l. BB aggaluṃ; C. expls as kālākaluñ ca rattacandanañ ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment); vi.144 (˚candana-vilitta; v.l. BB aggalu˚; ); Mil 338 (˚tagara-tālīsaka-lohita-candana ).
(adj.) pure, flawless, clear DN ii.244; Snp 476; Ja v.203.
a + kāca
(adj.) = akāca Vv 601. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkācin (= Sk. arka-arcin shining as the sun), but Vv-a 253 expls by niddosa, and there is no v.l. to warrant a misreading.
(adj. -n.) “not from the Kāsī-country” (?); official name of certain tax-gatherers in the king’s service Ja vi.212 (akāsiya-saṅkhātā rāja-purisā C.).
a + kāsika?
(adj.) 1. not doing one’s duty, doing what ought not to be done AN ii.67; Dhp 292; Mil 66; DN-a i.296.
2. ineffective (of medicine) Mil 151.
a + kicca + kāra
(adj.) not practical, unwise, foolish Ja iii.530 (˚rūpa = akattabba-rūpa C.); Mil 250.
a + kiriya
(adj.) not lazy, diligent, active, untiring SN i.47; SN v.162; Ja i.109; Mil 382.
a + kilāsu
at SN i.149 is probably faulty reading for akiñcana.
(adj.) see ku˚.
(adj.) not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast safe Vin i.11 (akuppā me ceto-vimutti) = SN ii.239; Vin ii.69; Vin iv.214; DN iii.273; MN i.205, MN i.298; SN ii.171; AN iii.119, AN iii.198; Mil 361.
a + kuppa, grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya Mvu iii.200
(f.) “state of not being shaken”, surety, safety; Ep. of Nibbāna Thag 364.
abstr. fr. last
Name of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow-wort MN i.429 (˚assa jiyā bowstrings made from that plant).
-nāla a kind of dress material Vin i.306 (vv.ll. agga & akkha˚).; -vāṭa a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin ii.154 (cp. akkha-vāṭa).
cp. Sk. arka
stepped upon, mounted on AN i.8; Ja i.71; Mil 152; Dhp-a i.200.
pp. of akkamati
to lament, wail, cry SN iv.206.
ā + kandati, krand
(nt.) going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to Ja i.62.
cp. BSk. ākramaṇa Jtm 3158
to tread upon, to approach, attack Ja i.7, Ja i.279; Thag-a 9 ■ to rise Vin iii.38 ■ ger akkamma Cp iii.72 ■ pp. akkanta (q.v.).
ā + kamati, kram
(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) being reviled, scolded, railed at Snp 366 (= dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto Snp-a 364); Ja vi.187.
2. (nt.) reviling, scolding, swearing at; in combn akkuṭṭha-vandita Snp 702 (= akkosa-vandana Snp-a 492) Thig 388 (expln Thag-a 256 as above).
pp. of akkosati
(adj.) confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened Ud 5 (akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika) See ākula.
= ākula
shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Snp 623; Mil 8 (+ paribhāsa ); Snp-a 492 Thag-a 256; Pv-a 243; Dhp-a ii.61.
-vatthu always as dasa a˚-vatthūni 10 bases of abuse 10 expressions of cursing Ja i.191; Snp-a 364, Snp-a 467; Dhp-a i.212; Dhp-a iv.2.
ā + kruś = kruñc, see kuñca & koñca2; to sound, root kr̥, see note on gala
(adj.) one who abuses, scolds or reviles, + paribhāsaka AN ii.58; AN iii.252; AN iv.156; AN v.317; Pv-a 251.
from last
to scold, swear at, abuse, revile Ja i.191; Ja ii.416; Ja iii.27; Dhp-a i.211; Dhp-a ii.44. Often combd with paribhāsati, e.g. Vin ii.296; Dhp-a iv.2; Pv-a 10 ■ aor. akkocchi Dhp 3; Ja iii.212 (= akkosi Dhp-a i.43. Der. wrongly fr. krudh by Kacc. vi.417 cp. Franke, Einh. Pāli-gramm. 37, and Geiger, P. Gr. § 164) ■ pp. akkuṭṭha (q.v.).
to krus see akkosa
the axle of a wheel DN ii.96; SN v.6; AN i.112; Ja i.109, Ja i.192; Ja v.155 (akkhassa phalakaṃ yathā; C.: suvaṇṇaphalakaṃ viya, i.e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle); Mil 27 (+ īsā + cakka), 277 (atibhārena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati: the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy); Pv-a 277 -akkhaṃ abbhañjati to lubricate the axle SN iv.177; Mil 367.
-chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle SN i.57; Mil 67. -bhagga with a broken axle Ja v.433 -bhañjana the breaking of the axle Dhp-a i.375; Pv-a 277.
Vedic akṣa; Av. aša; Gr. α ̓́ςων α ̔́μαςα ohariot with one axle); Lat. axis; Ohg. etc. ahsa, E. axle, to root of Lat. ago, Sk. aj
a die DN i.6 (but expld at DN-a i.86 as ball-game: guḷakīḷa ); SN i.149 = AN v.171 = Snp 659 (appamatto ayaṃ kali yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo ); Ja i.379 (kūṭ˚; a false player, sharper, cheat) anakkha one who is not a gambler Ja v.116 (C.: ajūtakara ). Cp. also accha3.
-dassa (cp. Sk. akṣadarśaka) one who looks at (i.e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin iii.47; Mil 114, Mil 327, Mil 343 (dhamma-nagare). -dhutta one who has the vice of gambling DN ii.348; DN iii.183; MN iii.170; Snp 106 (+ itthidhutta & surādhutta).; -vāṭa fence round an arena for wrestling Ja iv.81. (? read akka-).
Vedic akṣa, prob. to akṣi & Lat. oculus, “that which has eyes” i.e. a die; cp. also Lat. ālea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)
(adj.) (-˚) having eyes, with eyes Pv-a 39 (BB. rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on assumukha ). Prob. akkhaṇa is connected with akkha.
to akkhi
the collar-bone Vin iv.213 (adhakkhakaṃ ); y.216.
akkha1 + ka
wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune. There are 9 enumd at DN iii.263; the usual set consists of 8; thus DN iii.287; Vv-a 193; Sdhp 4 sq. See also khaṇa.
-vedhin (adj. n.) a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i.e. without losing time, expld as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaṇa = vijju). In var. combns; mostly as durepātin a. AN i.284 (+ mahato kāyassa padāletā ) ii.170 sq. (id.), 202; iv.423, 425; Ja ii.91 (expld as either avirādhita-vedhī or akkhaṇaṃ vuccati vijju: one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning) iii.322; iv.494 (C. explns aviraddha-vedhin vijju-ālokena vijjhana-samattha p. 497). In other combn at Ja i.58 (akkhaṇavedhin + vālavedhin); v.129 (the 4 kinds of archers: a., vālavedhin, saddavedhin & saravedhin).
In BSk. we find akṣuṇṇavedha (a Sanskritised Pāli form cp. Mathurā kṣuṇa = Sk. kṣaṇa) at Divy 58, Divy 100, Divy 442 (always with dūrevedha), where MSS. however read akṣuṇa˚; also at Lal 178. See Divy Index, where trsln is given as “an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark” (Schiefner gives “Streifschuss”).
Note. The explanations are not satisfactory. We should expect either an etym. bearing on the meaning “hitting the centre of the target” (i.e. its “eye”) (cp. E. bull’s eye), in which case a direct relation to akkha = akkhi eye would not seem improbable (cp. formation ikkhana or an etym. like “hitting without mishap”, in which case the expression would be derived directly from ak khaṇa (see prec.) with the omission of the neg. an-akkhaṇa in the meaning of “lightning” (Ja-a ii.91) is not supported by literary evidence.
a + khaṇa, BSk. akṣaṇa Avs i.291 = Avs i.332
(adj.) unhurt, without fault Mvu 19, Mvu 56 (C. niddosa ) ■ acc. akkhataṃ (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 8452 (paccāgamuṃ Pāṭaliputtaṃ akkhataṃ ) & Pv iv.111 (nessāmi taṃ Pāṭaliputtaṃ akkhataṃ ); see Vv-a 351; Pv-a 272.;
pp. of a + kṣan, cp. parikkhata1
(adj.) not decaying, in akkhayapaṭibhāna, of unfailing skill in exposition Mil 3, Mil 21.
a + khaya, kṣi
(adj.) constant, durable, lasting DN iii.86. As tt. for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning (DN i.88) it is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is expld by sikkhā (DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 477) pl. nt. akkharāni sounds, tones, words. citt’akkhara of a discourse (suttanta ) having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) AN i.72 = AN iii.107 = SN ii.267. Akkharāni are the sauce, flavour (vyañjana of poetry SN i.38. To know the context of the a˚ the words of the texts, is characteristic of an Arahant Dhp 352 (C. is ambiguous Dhp-a iv.70). Later: akkharaṃ a syllable or sound Pv-a 280 (called sadda in next line) akkharāni an inscription Ja ii.90; Ja iv.7 (likhitāni written), 489; vi.390, 407. In Grammar: a letter Kacc. 1.
-cintaka a grammarian or versifier Kp-a 17; Snp-a 16 Snp-a 23, Snp-a 321. cp. 466; Pv-a 120. -pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology DN i.88 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca Snp-a 447 = DN-a i.247 = AN iii.223 = Snp p.105. -piṇḍa “word-ball”, i.e. sequence of words or sounds Dhp-a iv.70 (= akkharānaṃ sannipāto Dhp 352).
Vedic akṣara
(f.) a game (recognising syllables written in the air or on one’s back). DN i.7; Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180. So expld at DN-a i.86. It may be translated “letter game”; but all Indian letters of that date were syllables.
(adj.) announced, proclaimed, told, shown AN i.34 (dur˚; ); ii.195; iv.285, 322; v.265 283; Snp 172, Snp 276, Snp 595, Snp 718.
pp. of akkhāti
one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story-teller SN i.11, SN i.191; SN iii.66; Snp 167.
to declare, announce, tell Snp 87 Snp 172; imper. akkhāhi Snp 988, Snp 1085; aor. akkhāsi Snp 251, Snp 504, Snp 1131 (= ācikkhi etc. Nd ii.465); fut. akkhissati Pv iv.163; cond. akkhissaṃ Snp 997; Ja vi.523 ■ Pass akkhāyati to be proclaimed, in phrase aggaṃ a. to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Mil 118 Mil 182 (also in BSk. agram ākhyāyate Mvu iii.390); ger akkheyya to be pronounced SN i.11; Iti 53 ■ pp. akkhāta (q.v.) ■ Intensive or Frequentative is ācikkhati.
ā + khyā, Idg. *sequ; cp. Sk. ākhyāti, Lat. inquam, Gr. ἐννέπω, Goth. saihvan, Ger. sehen etc. See also akkhi & cakkhu
(nt.) telling stories, recitation; tale, legend DN i.6 (= DN-a i.84: Bhārata-Rāmāyanādi ); iii.183; MN i.503; MN iii.167; Sdhp. 237 ■ preaching, teaching Nd i.91 (dhamm˚; ). The 5th Veda Ja v.450. (vedam akkhānapañcamaṃ; C: itihāsapañcamaṃ vedacatukkaṃ ) ■ The spelling ākhyāna also occurs (q.v.).
Sk. ākhyāna
(adj.) relating, narrating Ja iii.535; lokakkhāyikā kathā talk about nature-lore DN i.8; Mil 316.
(adj.) telling, relating, announcing SN ii.35; SN iii.7; Ja iii.105.
(nt.) the eye MN i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhīhi ); Snp 197, Snp 608; Ja i.223, Ja i.279; Ja v.77; Ja vi.336; Pv ii.926 (akkhīni paggharanti: shed tears, cp. Pv-a 123); Vv-a 65 (˚īni bhamanti, my eyes swim) cp. akkhīni me dhūmāyanti Dhp-a i.475; Dhp-a ii.26; Dhp-a iii.196 (˚īni ummīletvā opening the eyes); Sdhp 103, Sdhp 380 ■ In combn with sa- as sacchi & sakkhi; (q.v.). As adj. (-˚) akkha3 (q.v.).
-añjana eye ointment, collyrium Dhp-a iii.354. -kūpa the socket of the eye Ja iv.407. -gaṇḍa eye-protuberance, i.e. eye-brow (?) Ja vi.504 (for pamukha T.). -gūtha secretion from the eye Pv-a 198. -gūthaka id. Snp 197 (= dvīhi akkhicchiddehi apanīta-ttaca-maṃsasadiso a˚-gūthako Snp-a 248). -chidda the eye-hole Snp-a 248. -dala the eye-lid DN-a i.194; Thag-a 259; Dhs-a 378. -pāta “fall of the eye” i.e. a look, in mand˚ of soft looks (adj.) Pv-a 57. -pūra an eye-full, in akkhipūraṃ assuṃ (assu?) an eye full of tears Ja vi.191. -mala dirt from the eye Pv iii.53 (˚gūtha C.). -roga eye disease Dhp-a i.9.
to *oks, an enlarged form of *oqu, cp. Sk. īkṣate, kṣaṇa, pratīka, anīka; Gr. ο ̓́σσε, ω ̓́ψ (*Κύκλωψ), ὀφχαλμός, πρόσωπον; Lat. oculus, Ags. ēowan (= E eye wind-ow); Goth. augō. See also cakkhu & cp. akkha;2 ikkhaṇika
(-˚) (adj.) having eyes, with eyes Thag 960 (añjan˚; with eyes anointed); Dhp-a iv.98 (aḍḍh˚; with half an eye, i.e. stealthily); Sdhp 286 (tamb˚; red-eyed) -an˚; having no eyes Dhp-a i.11.
(nt.) the mesh of a net Ja i.208. -hāraka one who takes up a mesh (?) MN i.383 (corresp with aṇḍahāraka ).
cp. Sk. akṣa
see khitta.
(adj.) hit, struck, thrown Ja iii.255 (= ākaḍḍhita C.).
BSk ākṣipta Divy 363, pp. of ā + kṣip
(adj.) = akkhika Ja iii.190 (mand˚; softeyed); Vv 323 (tamb˚; red-eyed); Dhp-a i.11.
(adj.) not to be shaken, imperturbable Mil 21.
a + kṣubh, see khobha
(adj) = akkhobbha Ja v.322 (= khobhetun na sakkhā C.).
(f.) one of the highest numerals (1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers) Ja v.319; Ja vi.395.
= akkhobhiṇī
see khaṇḍa.
(adj.) not dug: see khāta.
barren-soil: see khetta ■ In cpd. ˚ññu the neg. belongs to the whole: not knowing a good field (for alms) Ja iv.371.
see gati ■ ˚gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing DN iii.228 (4: chanda˚ dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚; ); AN ii.18 sq., Ja iv.402; Ja v.98, Ja v.510; Pv-a 161.
medicine, drug, counterpoison Ja i.80 (˚harīṭaka ); Mil 121, Mil 302, Mil 319, Mil 334; DN-a i.67; Dhp-a i.215; Pv-a 198 (= osadhaṃ ).
Vedic agada; a + gada
(adj.) (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru “if it does not inconvenience you, if you don’t mind” (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av. SN i.94, SN i.229; SN ii.90) Vin i.25; Vin iv.17, DN i.51; Dhp-a i.39 ■ (b) disrespectful, irreverent (against gen.) DN i.89; Snp p.51.
cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu
fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum Vv 537 (aggalu = Vv-a 237 agalugandha ); Vv-a 158 (+ candana ). Cp. also Avs i.24 and akalu.
cp. Sk. aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebr. ahālīm (aloe), also in Gr. ἀλόη & ἀγάλλοξον
(nt.).
1. house or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opp. to anagāra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant). See anagāriyā ■ Thus freq. in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder (or layman, cp gihin ), with that of a religious wanderer (pabbajita) viz. (a.) kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati “to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of the home into the homeless state” DN i.60 etc. cp. Nd ii.172ii. See also SN i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaṃ nikkhanta ); MN ii.55 (agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā); Snp 274, Snp 805 (˚ṃ āvasati), and with pabbajita DN i.89, DN i.115, DN i.202, DN i.230; Pv ii.1317 ■ (b.) of a “rājā cakkavattin” compared with a “sambuddha”: sace agāraṃ āvasati vijeyya paṭhaviṃ imaṃ adaṇḍena asatthena… sace ca so pabbajati agārā anagāriyaṃ vivaṭacchado sambuddho arahā bhavissati “he will become the greatest king when he stays at home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life”, the prophesy made for the infant Gotama DN ii.16; Snp 1002, Snp 1003 ■ Further passages for agāra e.g. Vin i.15; DN i.102 (BB. has v.l. agyāgāra, but DN-a i.270 expl. as dānāgāra ); AN i.156, AN i.281; AN ii.52 sq. Dhp 14, Dhp 140; Ja i.51, Ja i.56; Ja iii.392; Dpvs. i.36.
2. anagāra (adj.) houseless, homeless; a mendicant (opp. gahaṭṭha Snp 628 = Dhp 404; Snp 639, Snp 640 (+ paribbaje ); Pv ii.25 (= anāvāsa Pv-a 80) ■ (nt.) the homeless state (= anagāriyā ) Snp 376. See also agga2.
3. ˚āgāra: Owing to freq. occurrence of agāra at the end of cpds. of which the first word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in āgāra. This form has been considered therefore as a proper doublet of agāra. This however is wrong. The long ā is simply a contraction of the short a at the end of the first part of the cpd. with the short a at the beginning of agāra Of the cpds. the most common are:- āgantuk˚; reception hall for strangers or guests SN iv.219; SN v.21 ■ itth˚ lady’s bower SN i.58, SN i.89 ■ kūṭ˚; a house with a peaked roof, or with gables SN ii.103. 263; iii.156; iv.186; v.43; AN i.230; AN iii.10, AN iii.364; AN iv.231; AN v.21. -koṭṭh˚; storehouse granary DN i.134 (cp. DN-a i.295); SN i.89. -tiṇ˚; a house covered with grass SN iv.185; AN i.101. -bhus˚; threshing shed, barn AN i.241. -santh˚; a council hall DN i.91; DN ii.147; SN iv.182; SN v.453; AN ii.207; AN iv.179 sq. -suññ˚; an uninhabited shed; solitude SN v.89, SN v.157, SN v.310 sq., 329 sq. AN i.241 (v.l. for bhusâgāra); iii.353; iv.139, 392, 437 v.88, 109, 323 sq.
cp. Sk. agāra, probably with the a-of communion; Gr. ἀγεἱρω to collect, ἀγορά market. Cp. in meaning & etym. gaha;1
(nt.) a small house, a cottage MN i.450; Ja vi.81.
fr. agāra
(adj.) 1. having a house, in eka˚, dva˚; etc. DN i.166 = AN i.295 = AN ii.206.
2. a householder, layman Vin i.17. f. agārikā a housewife Vin i.272. See also āgārika.
(adj.) one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Snp 376, Th i.1009; Ja iii.234 ■ f. agārinī a housewife Vv 527 (= gehassāmmī Vv-a 225) Pv iii.43 (id. Pv-a 194). Agariya = agarika
fr. agāra
, a layman MN i.504 (˚bhūta) ■ Usually in neg. anagāriyā (f.) the homeless state (= anagāraṃ as opp. to agāra (q.v.) in formula agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajita (gone out from the house into the homeless state) Vin i.15; MN i.16; MN ii.55, MN ii.75; AN i.49; DN iii.30 sq., 145 sq.; Snp 274, Snp 1003; Pv ii.1316; DN-a i.112.
(adj. n.) 1. (adj;) (a.) of time: the first, foremost Dpvs iv.13 (saṅgahaṃ first collection). See cpds ■ (b.) of space: the highest, topmost, Ja i.52 (˚sākhā) ■ (c.) of quality: illustricus, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin iv.232 (agga-m-agga) most excellent, DN ii.4: SN I.29 (a sattassa Sambuddha); AN ii.17 = Pv iv.347 (lokassa Buddho aggo [A: aggaṃ] pavuccati); Iti 88, Iti 89; Snp 875 (suddhi) Pv-a 5. Often combd. with seṭṭha (best), e.g. DN ii.15; SN iii.83, SN iii.264.
2. (nt.) top, point. (a.) lit.: the top or tip (nearly always-˚); as ār˚; point of an awl Snp 625 Snp 631; Dhp 401; kus˚; tip of a blade of grass Dhp 70; Sdhp 349; tiṇ˚; id Pv-a 241; dum˚; top of a tree Ja ii.155 dhaj˚; of a banner SN i.219; pabbat˚; of a mountain Sdhp 352; sākh˚; of a branch Pv-a 157; etc ■ (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of all etc. SN ii.29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain to the highest); Mvu 7, Mvu 26. Usually as-˚; e.g. dum˚; the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 (cp. Vv-a 161) dhan˚; plenty DN iii.164; madhur˚; SN i.41, SN i.161, SN i.237; bhav˚ the best existence SN iii.83; rūp˚; extraordinary beauty Ja i.291; lābh˚; highest gain Ja iii.127; sambodhi-y-agga highest wisdom Snp 693 (= sabbaññuta-ñāṇan Snp-a 489 the best part or quality of anything, in enumn of the five “excellencies” of first-fruits (panca aggāni, after which the N. Pañcaggadāyaka), viz. khettaggan rās˚ koṭṭh˚ kumbhi bhojan˚ Snp-a 270. sukh˚; perfect bliss Sdhp 243. Thus freq. in phrase aggaṃ akkhāyati to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent DN i.124; SN iii.156, SN iii.264; AN ii.17 (Tathāgato); Iti 87 (id.); Nd ii.517 D (appamādo); Mil 183.
3. Cases as adv.: aggena (instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.) by (id.) Vin ii.167. (aggena gaṇhāti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or from, foll. by tad eva “then”; cp agge), 294 (bhikkh˚ from alms); Vb 423 (vass˚ by the number of years). aggato (abl.) in the beginning Snp 217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken by its worth valued, esteemed Thig 386, Thig 394. agge (loc) 1. at the top AN ii.201 (opp. mūle at the root); Ja iv.156 (id.); Snp 233 (phusit˚ with flowers at the top: supupphitaggasākhā Kp-a 192); Ja ii.153 (ukkh˚); iii.126 (kūp˚).
2 (as prep.) from. After, since, usually in phrases yad˚ (foll by tad˚) from what time, since what date DN i.152; DN ii.206 & ajja-t-agge from this day, after; today DN i.85; MN i.528; AN v.300; Snp p.25 (cp. BSk. adyāgrena Avs ii.13) at the end: bhattagge after a meal Vin ii.212.
-aṅgulī the main finger, i.e. index finger Ja vi.404 -āsana main seat DN-a i.267. -upaṭṭhāka chief personal attendant DN ii.6. -kārikā first taste, sample Vin iii.80 -kulika of an esteemed clan Pv iii.55 (= seṭṭh˚ Pv-a 199). -ñña recognized as primitive primeval, DN iii.225 (porāṇa + ), AN ii.27 sq.; AN iv.246, Kv 341. -danta one who is most excellently self-restrained (of the Buddha Th i.354. -dāna a splendid gift Vin iii.39. -dvāra main door Ja i.114. -nakha tip of the nail Vin iv.221. -nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin i.229. -nikkhitta highly praised or famed Mil 343. -nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dpvs iv.5. -pakatimant of the highest character Ja v.351 (= aggasabhāva). -patta having attained perfection DN iii.48 sq. -pasāda the highest grace AN ii.34; Iti 87. -piṇḍa the best oblation or alms DN i.141; MN i.28; MN ii.204. -piṇḍika receiving the best oblations Ja vi.140. -puggala the best of men (of the Buddha Snp 684; Dhp-a ii.39; Sdhp. 92, 558. -purohita chief or prime minister Ja vi.391. -phala the highest or supreme fruit (i.e. Arahantship) Ja i.148; Pv iv.188; Pv-a 230 -bīja having eggs from above (opp. mūla˚), i.e. propagated by slips or cuttings DN i.5; DN-a i.81. -magga (adj. having reached the top of the path, i.e. Arahantship Thag-a 20. -mahesi the king’s chief wife, queen-consort Ja i.262; Ja iii.187, Ja iii.393; Ja v.88; Dhp-a i.199; Pv-a 76. -rājā the chief king Ja vi.391; Mil 27. -vara most meritorious best Dpvs vi.68. -vāda the original doctrine (= theravāda) Dpvs iv.13. -vādin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Thag 1142.
Vedic agra; cp. Av. agrō first; Lith. agrs early
(nt.) (only-˚) a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall dān˚; a house of donation, i.e. a public or private house where alms are given Ja iii.470; Ja iv.379, Ja iv.403; Ja vi.487; Pv-a 121; Mil 2. salāk˚; a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office Ja i.123, Vv-a 75.
a contracted form of agāra
(f.) pre-eminence, prominence, superiority Kv 556 (˚ṃ gata); Dpvs iv.1 (guṇaggataṃ gatā) ■ (adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority DN i.80; DN iii.224.
abstr. of agga
(nt.) the state or condition of being the first, pre-eminence Pv-a 9, Pv-a 89.
abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan
(adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence AN i.70, AN i.243.
see agalu. Aggala & Aggala
(f.) (also occasionally with l.) a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross-bar Vin i.290; DN i.89 (˚ṃ ākoteṭi to knock upon the cross-bar; a. = kavāṭa DN-a i.252); AN iv.359 (id.) SN iv.290; AN i.101 = AN i.137 = AN iv.231. (phusit˚; with fastened bolts, securely shut Thag 385 (id.); Vin iv.47; Ja v.293 (˚ṃ uppīḷeti to lift up the cross-bar.
2. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin i.290 (+ tunna) 392 (Bdhgh on MV viii.21, 1); Ja i.8 (+ tunna) vi.71 (˚ṃ datvā ); Vin iv.121.
-dāna putting in a gusset Ja i.8. -phalaka the post or board, in which the cross-bar is fixed (cp. ˚vaṭṭi) MN iii.95. -vaṭṭi = ˚phalaka Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148. -sūci bolting pin MN i.126.
cp. Sk. argala & argalā to; *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc. as in Ags. reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakṣati to protect Gr. ἀλέςω id., Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr.ἀρκέω = Lat. arceo, Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.
fire.
1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration Vin ii.120 (fire in bathroom); MN i.487 (anāhāro nibbuto f. gone out for lack of fuel); SN iv.185, SN iv.399 (sa-upādāno jalati provided with fuel blazes); Snp 62; Dhp 70 (= asaniaggi Dhp-a iii.71); Ja i.216 (sparks), 294 (pyre); ii.102 iii.55; iv.139; Vv-a 20 (aggimhi tāpanaṃ + udake temanaṃ) ■ The var. phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at AN iv.45: aggiṃ ujjāleti (kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbāpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other phrases are e.g. aggiṃ jāleti (kindle) Ja ii.44; gaṇhāti (make or take) Ja i.494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to Ja i.294; nibbāpeti (put out) Iti 93; Sdhp 552. aggi nibbāyati the f. goes out SN ii.85; MN i.487; Ja i.212 (udake through water); Mil 304. aggi nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. ˚nibbāna) Ja i.61; Mil 304. agginā dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to AN i.136, AN i.199; Pv-a 20. udar˚; the fire supposed to regulate digestion Pv-a 33; cp. Dial. ii.208, note 2; kapp˚uṭṭhān˚; the universal conflagration Ja iii.185; dāv˚; a wood or jungle fire Ja i.212; naḷ˚; the burning of a reed Ja vi.100; padīp˚ fire of a lamp Mil 47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire-god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jātaka commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagavā the Lord Agni e.g. at Ja i.285, Ja i.494; Ja ii.44. The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e.g. Ja i.285; Ja ii.43. Aggiṃ paricarati (cp. ˚paricāriyā) to serve the sacred fire Vin i.31 (jaṭilā aggī paricaritukāmā); AN v.263, AN v.266; Thig 143 (= aggihuttaṃ paric˚ Thag-a 136); Dhp 107; Ja i.494; Dhp-a ii.232 aggiṃ juhati (cp. ˚homa, ˚hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire AN ii.207; often combd. with aggihuttaṃ paricarati e.g. SN i.166; Snp p.79. aggiṃ namati & santappeti to worship the fire A; v.235. aggissa (gen.) paricāriko Ja yi.207 (cp. below ˚paricārika); aggissa ādhānaṃ AN iv.41.
3 (ethical, always-˚) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rāg˚, dos˚ moh˚; or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At SN iv.19; AN iv.41 sq. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are āhuneyy˚, gahapat˚, dakkhiṇeyy˚, kaṭṭh˚. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. DN iii.217; Iti 92, Vb 368. In late books are found others: ind˚; the fire of the senses Pv-a 56; dukkh˚ the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh˚; of the misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaṭisār˚; burning remorse Pv-a 60; sok˚; burning grief ib. 41.
Note. The form aggini occurs only at Snp 668 & 670 in the meaning of “pyre”, and in combn. with sama “like”, viz. aggini-samaṃ jalitaṃ 668 (= samantato jali taṃ aggiṃ Snp-a 480); aggini-samāsu 670 (= aggisamāsu Snp-a 481). The form agginī in phrase niccagginī can either be referred to gini (q.v.) or has to be taken as nom. of aggini (in adj. function with ī metri causa otherwise as adj. agginiṃ), meaning looking constantly after the fire, i.e. careful, observant, alert.
-agāra (agyâgāra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin i.24; Vin iv.109; DN i.101, DN i.102 (as v.l. BB for agāra); MN i.501; AN v.234, AN v.250. -khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire-brand SN ii.85; AN iv.128; Thig 351 (˚samākāmā); Ja iv.139; Ja vi.330; Pts i.125; Dpvs vi.37; Mil 304. -gata having become (like) fire Mil 302 ■ ja fire-born Ja v.404 (C; text aggijāta). -ṭṭha fire-place Ja v.155. -ṭṭhāna fire-place Vin ii.120 (jantāghare, in bathroom). -daḍḍha consumed by fire Dhp 136; Pv i.74 -dāha (mahā˚) a holocaust AN i.178. -nikāsin like fire Ja iii.320 (suriya). -nibbāna the extinction of fire Ja i.212 -pajjota fire-light AN ii.140 (one of the 4 lights, viz canda˚, suriya˚, a˚, paññā˚). -paricaraṇa (-ṭṭhāna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to Dhp-a i.199 -paricariyā fire-worship Dhp-a ii.232; Snp-a 291 (pāri˚) 456 -paricārika one who worship the fire aN v.263 (brāhmaṇa) -sālā a heated hall or refectory Vin i.25, Vin i.49 = Vin ii.210 Vin i.139; Vin ii.154. -sikhā the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile ˚ûpama, like a flaming fire Snp 703; Dhp 308; Iti 43, Iti 90 (ayoguḷa). -hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2), Vin i.33, Vin i.36 = Ja i.83; Vin i.246 = Snp 568 (˚mukha-yañña); SN i.166; Dhp 392; Snp 249, p. 79; Ja iv.211; Ja vi.525; Thag-a 136 (= aggi); Dhp-a iv.151 (˚ṃ brāhmaṇo namati). -huttaka (nt.) fire-offering Ja vi.522 (= aggi-jūhana C.). -hotta = ˚hutta Snp-a 456 (v.l. BB ˚hutta). -homa fire-oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni DN i.9 (= aggi-jūhana DN-a i.93).
Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini (q.v.) and aggini (see below)
(adj.) one who worships the fire Vin i.71 (jaṭilaka); DN ii.339 sq. (jaṭila); SN i.166 (brāhmaṇa).
aggi + ka
1. price, value, worth, Mil 244; Mvu 26, Mvu 22; Mvu 30, Mvu 76; Vv-a 77 ■ mahaggha (adj.) of great value Ja iv.138; Ja v.414; Ja vi.209; Pv ii.118. See also mahāraha. appaggha (adj.) of little value J. iv.139; v.414- anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, Ja v.484; cattari anagghāni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisīdanapallanka ādhāraka, pādapīṭhikā Dhp-a iii.120, Dhp-a iii.186. (adj.) priceless invaluable Ja v.414; Mvu 26, Mvu 25; Dhp-a iv.216 ■ agghena (instr.) for the price of Vin ii.52, cp. Bdhgh on p. 311 312.
2. an oblation made to a guest DN ii.240; Ja iv.396 = Ja iv.476.
-kāraka a valuator Ja i.124. -pada valuableness Ja v.473 (˚lakkhaṇaṃ nāma mantaṃ).
see agghati
(adj.) = aggha; worth, having the value of (-˚) Mvu 30, Mvu 77. an˚; priceless Mvu 30, Mvu 72.
(intr.) to be worth, to have the value of (acc.), to deserve Ja i.112 (satasahassaṃ; aḍḍhamāsakaṃ); vi.174, 367 (padarajaṃ); Dhp-a iii.35 (maṇin nâgghāma); Mvu 32, Mvu 28. Freq. in stock phrase kalaṃ nāgghati (nāgghanti) soḷasiṃ not to be worth the 16th part of (cp. kalā) Vin ii.156; SN i.233; Dhp 70; Vv 207 (nânubhoti Vv-a 104), 437; Ja v.284 ■ Caus. agghāpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on (acc.) Ja i.124; Ja iv.137, Ja iv.278; Mil 192; Mvu 27, Mvu 23. Cp. agghāpanaka & agghāpaniya.;
Sk. arghati, argh = arh (see arhati), cp. Gr. ἀλφή reward, ἀλφάνω to deserve
(adj.) (-˚) having the value of, equal to, worth Vin iv.226; Ja i.61 (satasahass˚), 112; DN-a i.80 (kahāpaṇ˚); Dhp-a iii.120 (cuddasakoṭi˚); Mvu 26, Mvu 22; Mvu 34, Mvu 87 ■ f. ˚ikā Ja i.178 (satasahass˚).
fr. *agghana, abstr. to agghati
(adj.) priceless, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Mil 192.;
in function & form grd. of agghati
a valuator, appraiser Ja i.124, Ja i.125; Ja v.276 (˚ika).
fr. agghāpana to agghāpeti, Caus. of agghati
(adj.) that which is to be valued, in ˚kamma the business of a valuator Ja iv.137.
grd. of agghāpeti, see agghati
(nt.) (-˚) an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning “string, garland” (cp. Sinhalese ägä “festoon work”) Mvu 19, Mvu 38 (pupph˚; ) 34, 73 (ratan˚; ) 34, 76 (dhaj˚; ); Dāvs i.39 (pupphamay˚; ); v.51 (kusum˚; ).
= agghiya
(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) valuable, precious, worth Ja vi.265 (maṇi); Dhp-a ii.41 (ratan of jewel’s worth); Mvu 30, Mvu 92.
2. (nt.) a respectful oblation Ja v.324 = Ja vi.516; Dpvs vi.65; vii.4.
grd. form from agghati
(nt.) evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune SN i.22; MN i.500 (roga gaṇḍa salla agha ); AN ii.128 (id.); Ja v.100; Thig 491; Sdhp 51 ■ adj. painful, bringing pain Ja vi.507 (agha-m-miga = aghakara m. C.). -bhūta a source of pain SN iii.189 (+ agha & salla).;
cp. Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.
(m. nt.) the sky, orig. the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space DN ii.12; SN v.45; Vv 161 (aghasi gama, loc. vehāsaṃ gama Vv-a 78); Ja iv.154; Dhs 638 (+ aghagata) Vb 84 (id.).
-gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs 638, Dhs 722; Vb 84. -gāmin moving through the atmosphere or space i.e. a planet SN i.67 = Mil 242 (ādicco seṭṭho aghagāminaṃ).
the etym. suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 200 (with ref. to MN i.500, which belongs under agha1) is untenable (to Sk. kha, as a-kha = agha, cp Jain Prk. khaha). Neither does the pop. etym. of Bdhgh offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaṭṭaniya is not strikeable Dhs-a 326 cp. Dhs. trsl. 194 & Ja iv.154 aghe ṭhitā = appaṭighe ākāse ṭhitā the air which does not offer any resistance) On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarikā aghā asaṃvutā andhakārā DN ii.12; SN v.454, and BSk. aghasaṃvṛta Mvu i.240, adj. dark Mvu i.41; Mvu ii.162; Lal 552
at Thag 321 may be read as agha-gata or (preferably) with v.l. as aggha-gataṃ, or (with Neumann) as agghaṃ agghatānaṃ. See also Mrs. Rh. D, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191.
a sort of wild animal Ja vi.247 (= aghāvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475.
to agha1?
(adj.) suffering pain, being in misery Snp 694 (= dukkhita Snp-a 489).
to agha1
= anga, sign, mark, brand Mil 79; ˚karana branding Ja iv.366, Ja iv.375. See also anketi.
(a.) a hook Ja v.322 Ja vi.218 (v.l. BB anga) ■ (b.) the lap (i.e. the bent position) or the hollow above the hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses (aṅkena vahati ) Vin ii.114; DN ii.19 (aṅke pariharati to hold on one’s lap or carry on one’s hips), 20 (nisīdāpeti seat on one’s lap) MN ii.97 (aṅkena vahitvā ); Thag 299; Ja i.262 (aṅke nisinna ); ii.127, 236; vi.513; Dhp-a i.170 (aṅkena vahitvā Pv-a 17 (nisīdāpeti ).
Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Gr.; ἀγκών elbow, α ̓́γκυρα = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul = E. angle
marked, branded Ja i.231 (cakkankitā Satthu padā); ii.185 (˚kaṇṇaka with perforated ears).
pp. of anketi
a shoot, a sprout (lit. or fig.) Ja ii.105; Ja vi.331 (Buddh ˚a nascent Buddha), 486; Dhs 617 (˚vaṇṇa); Mil 50, Mil 251 Mil 269; Sdhp 273; Mvu 15, Mvu 43.
cp. Sk. ankura, to anka a bend = a tendril etc.
a hook, a pole with a hook, used ■ (1) for plucking fruit off trees, a crook Ja i.9 (˚pacchi hook & basket); v.89 = vi.520 (pacchikhanitti˚), 529 (= phalānaṃ gaṇhanatthaṃ ankusaṃ) ■ (2) to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta Vin ii.196 (+ kasā); Ja vi.489; Thag-a 173 (ovādaṃ ankusaṃ katvā, fig. guide); Sdhp 147 (daṇḍ˚) ■ (3) Name of a certain method of inference in Logic (naya), consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Ne 2, Ne 4, Ne 127; Ne-a 208;- acc˚; beyond the reach of the goad DN ii.266 (nāga). See also ankusaka.
-gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an eleph. driver’s hook MN ii.94 (sippa). -gaha an elephant-driver Dhp 326.
Vedic ankuśa; to anc, see anka2
1. a crook for plucking fruit Ja iii.22.
2. an elephant-driver’s hook Ja iii.431.
-yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic Ja ii.68 (+ pacchi).
see anka2, cp. ankusa
to mark out, brand Ja i.451 lakkhaṇena); ii.399 ■ pp. aṅkita, q.v.
Denom. fr. anka1
a species of tree Alaṅgium Hexapetalum Ja vi.535. Cp. next.
dial. for ankura
= ankola Ja iv.440; Ja v.420.
(nt.) (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. ˚sambhāra); uttam˚aṅga the reproductive organ Ja v.197; also as “head” at Thag-a 209. Usually in cpds (see below, esp. ˚paccanga), as sabbaṅga-kalyāṇī perfect in all limbs Pv iii.35 (= sobhaṇa-sabbanga-paccangī Pv-a 189) and in redupln. aṅga-m-aṅgāni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below anga + paccanga) Vin iii.119; Vv 382 (˚ehi naccamāna); Pv ii.1210, 13, 18 (sunakho te khādati) ■ (2) (fig.) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e.g. uposath˚; the vows of the fast Ja i.50; bhavaṅga the constituents or the condition of becoming (see bhava & cp.; Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhaṅga (q.v.). Esp. with numerals: cattāri angāni 4 constituents AN ii.79 (viz. sīla, samādhi, paññā. vimutti and rūpa, vedanā saññā, bhava), aṭṭhangika (q.v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (Kp-a 85: aṭṭh’ angāni assā ti) navanga Buddha-sāsana see nava ■ (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality DN i.113 sq., 117 (iminā p˚ aṅgena by this quality, or in this respect, cp. below 4; DN-a i.281 expls tena kāra ṇena). In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body DN i.9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha-pādādisu yena kenaci evarūpena angena samannāgato dīghāyu… hotī ti… angasatthan = chiromantics DN-a i.92). Thus in combn. with samannāgata & sampanna; always meaning endowed with “good”, superior remarkable “qualities”, e.g. Ja i.3 (sabbanga-sampanna nagaraṃ a city possessing all marks of perfection); ii.207. In enumn. with var. numerals: tīhi angehi s. AN i.115 cattāri sotapannassa DN iii.227 = AN iv.405 sq.; pañcanga-vippahīno (i.e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see nīvaraṇa) and pañcanga-samannāgato (i.e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sīla-kkhandha, see kkhandha ii.A d) SN i.99 = AN i.161; AN v.15, AN v.29. Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin (viz. sujāta of pure birth, ajjhāyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirūpa handsome, sīlava of good conduct, paṇḍita clever) DN i.119, DN i.120. Eight qualities of a king DN i.137. Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) SN iii.83; Kp iv.10 = Kp-a 88; cp. MN i.446 (dasah’ angehi samannāgato rañño assājāniyo) ■ (4) (modally part, share, interest, concern; ajjhattikaṃ angaṃ my own part or interest (opp. bāhiraṃ the interest in the outside world). AN i.16 sq. = SN v.101 sq.; Iti 9. rañño angaṃ an asset or profit for the king MN i.446. Thus adv. tadaṅga (see also ta˚ i.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and tadaṅgena by these means, through this, therefore MN i.492; AN iv.411; Sdhp 455, Sdhp 456; iminā p˚ angena for that reason MN ii.168 ■ In compn. with verbs aṅgi˚; (angī˚) angigata having limbs or ports, divided DN-a i.313; cp samangi (-bhūta).
-jāta “the distinguishing member”, i.e. sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin i.191 (of cows); iii.20, 37, 205; Ja ii.359; Mil 124 -paccaṅga one limb or the other, limbs great and small MN i.81; Ja vi
20, used (a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv ii.1212 (= paripuṇṇa-sabbanga-paccangavatī Pv-a 158) Snp-a 383; Dhp-a i.390; Thag-a 288; Sdhp 83 fig. rathassa angapaccangan MN i.395; sabbanga-paccangāni all limbs Mil 148 ■ (b) distributively (cp. similar redupl. formations like chiddâvachidda, seṭṭhânu-seṭṭhi, khaṇḍākhaṇḍa cuṇṇavicuṇṇa) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like angamangāni above 1), piecemeal MN i.133 (˚e daseyya), 366; Ja i.20; Ja iv.324 (chinditvā). -paccaṅgatā the condition or state of perfect limbs, i.e. a perfect body Vv-a 134 (suvisuddh˚). -paccaṅgin having all limbs (perfect) DN i.34 (sabbanga-peccangī); Pv-a 189. -rāga painting or rouging the body Vin ii.107 (+ mukha˚) -laṭṭhi sprout, offshoot Thag-a 226. -vāta gout Vin i.205 -vijjā the art of prognosticating from marks on the body chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) DN i.9 (see expl at DN-a i.93); Ja i.290 (˚āya cheka clever in fortune-telling); ˚ânubhāva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body Ja ii.200; Ja v.284; ˚pāṭhaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. Ja ii.21, Ja ii.250; Ja v.458. -vekalla bodily deformity Dhp-a ii.26. -sattha the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DN-a i.92. -sambhāra the combination of parts Mil 28 = SN i.135; Mil 41 -hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests Ja vi.538.
Vedic anga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger-ring = Sk. angulīya. See also anka, anguṭṭha & angula
(nt.) an open space, a clearing, Vin ii.218; Ja i.109 (= manussānan sañcaraṇa-ṭṭhāne anāvaṭe bhūmibhāge C.); ii.243, 290 357; Dāvs i.27 ■ cetiy˚; an open space before a Chaitya Mil 366, DN-a i.191, DN-a i.197; Vv-a 254. rāj˚; the empty space before the king’s palace, the royal square Ja i.124 Ja i.152; Ja ii.2; Dhp-a ii.45.
-ṭṭhāna a clearing (in a wood or park) Ja i.249, Ja i.421 -pariyanta the end or border of a clearing Ja ii.200.
cp. Sk. angaṇa & ˚na; to anga?
a speck or freckle (on the face) AN v.92, AN v.94 sq. (+ raja) Usually in neg. anaṅgana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish clear, (of the mind) (opp. sângana Snp 279); DN i.76; MN i.24 sq.; 100 (+ raja); AN ii.211; Snp 517 (+ vigata raja = angaṇānan abhāvā malānañ ca vigamā… Snp-a 427), 622 = Dhp 125 (= nikkilesa Dhp-a iii.34); Dhp 236 Dhp 351; Pp 60; Ne 87.
prob. to anj, thus a variant of añjana, q.v.
a bracelet Ja v.9, Ja v.410 (citt˚; adj. with manifold bracelets).
cp. Sk. angada; prob. anga + da that which is given to the limbs
(adj.) wearing a bracelet Ja v.9.
to angada
(m. nt.) charcoal, burning coal, embers AN iii.97, AN iii.380, AN iii.407; Ja i.73; Ja iii.54, Ja iii.55; Ja v.488; Snp 668; Sdhp 32. kul˚; the charcoal of the family, a squanderer SN iv.324 (see under kula).
-kaṭāha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DN-a i.261. -kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes Dhp-a i.260; Dhs A 333; Vv-a 142. -kammakara a charcoal burner Ja vi.209. -kāsu a charcoal pit MN i.74, MN i.365; Thig 491; Ja i.233; Snp 396; Thag-a 288; Dhp-a i.442; Sdhp 208 -pacchi a basket for ashes Dhp-a iv.191. -pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya AN i.141; Mil 303; Pv-a 221 (˚āropaṇa); Sdhp 208 -maṃsa roast meat Mvu 10, Mvu 16. -masi ashes Dhp-a iii.309. -rāsi a heap of burning coal Ja iii.55.
Vedic angāra
(adj.) like charcoal, of red colour, Name of the planet Mars DN-a i.95; cp. Ja i.73.
cp. Sk. angāraka
a charcoal-burner Ja vi.206 (= angāra-kammakara p. 209).
(adj.) (burning) like coal, of brightred colour, crimson Thag 527 = Ja i.87 (dumā trees in full bloom).
to angāra
(-˚) (adj.) consisting of parts,-fold; only in compn. with num. like aṭṭh˚, duv˚ (see dve) catur˚, pañc˚ etc., q.v.
fr. anga
(adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts,-fold, see catur˚ & pacc˚ (under anga-paccangin) ■ f.; aṅginī having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Thig 297 (= Thag-a 226).
1. the thumb Vin iii.34; Mil 123; Pv-a 198.
2. the great toe Ja ii.92; Mvu 35, Mvu 43.
-pada thumb-mark AN iv.127 = SN iii.154. -sineha love drawn from the thumb, i.e. extraordinary love Pv iii.52 cp. Pv-a 198.
cp. Sk. anguṣṭha, see etym. under anga
= anguṭṭha Ja iv.378; Ja v.281; pād˚ the great toe SN v.270.
1. a finger or toe MN i.395 (vank’ angulaṇ karoti to bend the fingers, v.l. anguliṇ); AN iii.6 (id.); Ja v.70 (goṇ adj. with ox toes, expld. by C. as with toes like an ox’s tail; vv.ll. ˚anguṭṭha and ˚angulī).
2. a finger as measure, i.e. a finger-breadth, an inch Vin ii.294, Vin ii.306 (dvaṅgula 2 inches wide); Mvu 19, Mvu 11 (aṭṭh˚; ); Dhp-a iii.127 (ek˚; ).
-aṭṭhi (? cp. anga-laṭṭhi) fingers (or toes) and bones DN-a i.93. -aṅguli fingers and toes Dhp-a iii.214. -antarikā the interstices between the fingers Vin iii.39; Mil 180; Dhp-a iii.214.
Vedic angula, lit. “limblet” see anga for etym.
(nt.) a finger Ja iii.13 (pañc˚); v.204 (vaṭṭ˚ = pavāḷ˚ ankurasadisā vaṭṭangulī p. 207). See also pañcangulika. Anguli & Anguli;
= angulī
(thus always in cpds.) (f.) a finger AN iv.127; Snp 610; Ja iii.416 Ja iv.474; Ja v.215 (vaṭṭ˚ with rounded fingers); Mil 395; Dhp-a ii.59; Dhp-a iv.210; Snp-a 229.
-patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin iii.84 = Vin iv.110; DN i.91 = AN iv.343. -pada finger-mark AN iv.127 = SN iii.154. -poṭha snapping or cracking the fingers Ja v.67 -muddikā a signet ring Vin ii.106; Ja iv.498; Ja v.439, Ja v.467 -saṅghaṭṭana˚; = poṭha DN-a i.256.
Vedic angulī & ˚i; see anga
(nt.) an ornament for the finger, a finger-ring Ja ii.444 (= nikkha).
cp. Sk. angulīyaka that which belongs to the finger, Mhg. vingerlîn = ring; E. bracelet, Fr bras; thimble thumb etc.
(avj.) not fit for walking, not level or even Thag 1174 (magga).
a + cankama
(adj.) 1. without thought or intention, unconscious, unintentional Dhp-a ii.42.
2 without heart or feeling, instr. acittakena (adv.) heartlessly Ja iv.58 (C. for acetasā).
a + citta2 + ka
(adj.) not well thought of Mil 229.
a + citta2 + kata; cp. cittikāra
see cira & cp. nacira.;
(adj.-n.) one who is not clothed, esp. t. t. for an anti-Buddhist naked ascetic DN i.161, DN i.165; DN iii.6 DN iii.12, DN iii.17 sq.; SN i.78; Ja v.75.
a + cela
= acela DN i.166; DN iii.40; AN i.295; AN ii.206; AN iii.384 (˚sāvaka); Ja iii.246; Ja vi.229; Pp 55; Dhp-a iii.489.
1. a + c˚, e.g. accuta = a + cuta.
2. Assimilation group of (a) ati + vowel; (b) c + cons. e.g. acci = arci.
3rd sg. pret. of ati-gacchati (q.v. for similar forms) he overcame, should or could overcome Snp 1040 (expld. wrongly as pp. = atikkanta at Nd ii.10 and as atīta at Dhp-a iv.494); Dhp 414.
ati + agā
(adj.) beyond the reach of the goad DN ii.266 (nāga).
ati + ankusa
see atitarati.
to praise, honour, celebrate Dāvs v.66 (accayittha, pret.)-pp accita, q.v.
Vedic arcati, ṛc, orig. meaning to be clear & to sing i.e. to sound clear, cp. arci
(adj. & adv. ˚-) 1. uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual Ja i.223; Mil 413; Vv-a 71; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 125, Pv-a 266; Sdhp 288. 2. final, absolute, complete; adv. thoroughly SN i.130 (˚ṃ hataputtā’ mhi); iii.13 = AN i.291 sq.; AN v.326 sq. (˚niṭṭha ˚yogakkhemin); Kv 586 (˚niyāmatā final assurance; cp Kvu trsl. 340).
3. (˚-) exceedingly, extremely, very much AN i.145 (˚sukhumāla, extremely delicate), Mil 26 (id.); Snp 794 (˚suddhi = param ttha-accantasuddhi Snp-a 528); Thag 692 (˚ruci); Dhp 162 (˚dussīlya = ekanta Dhp-a iii.153).
ati + anta, lit. “up to the end”
(1) (temporal) lapse, passing; passing away end, death. Usually as instr. accayena after the lapse of, at the end or death of, after Vin i.25; DN ii.127 (rattiyā a.), 154 (mam˚ when I shall be dead); MN i.438 (temās˚ after 3 months); SN i.69; Snp. 102 (catunnaṃ māsānaṃ), p. 110 (rattiyā); Ja i.253 (ekāha-dvīh˚), 291 (katipāh˚ after a few days); Pv-a 47 (katipāh˚), 82 (dasamās˚), 145 (vassasatānaṃ) ■ (2) (modal) passing or getting over, overcoming, conquering, only in phrase dur-accaya difficult to overcome, of kāmapanka Snp 945 (= dur-atikkamanīya Snp-a 568), of sanga Snp 948: taṇhā Dhp 336; sota Iti 95 ■ (3) (fig.) going beyond (the norm) transgression, offence Vin i.133 (thull˚ a grave offence) 167 (id.); ii.110, 170; esp. in foll. phrases: accayo maṃ accagamā a fault has overcome me, i.e. has been committed by me (in confession formula) DN i.85 (= abhibhavitvā pavatto has overwhelmed me DN-a i.236); AN i.54; MN i.438 (id.); accayaṃ accayato passati to recognise a breach of the regulation as such Vin i.315; AN i.103 AN ii.146 sq.; ˚ṃ deseti to confess the transgression SN i.239 ˚ṃ accayato paṭigaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) the fault, i.e. to pardon the transgression, in confessionformula at DN i.85 = (Vin ii.192; MN i.438 etc.). In the same sense accaya-paṭiggahaṇa pardon, absolution Ja v.380 accayena desanaṃ paṭigaṇhāti Ja i.379; accayaṃ khamati to forgive Mil 420.
from acceti, ati + i, going on or beyond; cp. Sk. atyaya
(adj.) 1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too self-sure, overbearing, arrogant, proud SN i.239 (v.l. accayasara caused by prolepsis of foll. accaya); Ja iv.6 (atisara); Dhp-a iv.230 (= expecting too much).
2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of pañha a question) MN i.304; SN v.218 (v.l. SS for BB reading ajjhapara). Cp. accasārin.
[a form. fr. aor. accasari (ati + sṛ; ), influenced in meaning by analogy of ati + a + sara (smṛ) Not with Morris (J.P.T.S. 1889, 200) a corruption of accaya + sara (smṛ), thus meaning “mindful of a fault”]
(f.) overbearing, pride, selfsurity Vb 358 (+ māyā). Note. In id. p. at Pp 23 we read acchādanā instead of accasarā.
abstr. to accasara
aor 3. sg. of atisarati to go beyond the limit, to go astray Ja v.70.
fr. ati + sṛ;
(adj.) = accasara 1., aspiring too high Snp 8 sq. (yo nâccasārī, opp. to na paccasārī; expld. at Snp-a 21 by yo nâtidhāvi, opp. na ohiyyi).
aor 3 sg. of atiharati to bring over, to bring, to take Ja iii.484 (= ativiya āhari C.).
fr. ati + hṛ;
(˚-) too often Ja v.233 (˚saṃsagga; C. expls. ativiya abhiṇha).
ati + abhikkhaṇa
(adj. adv.) exerting oneself very or too much, with great exertion Vin i.182; Thag 638; Snp-a 21.
ati + āraddha
(adj.) too long AN iii.375.
ati + āyata
(adj.) out of time, viz. 1. irregular, extraordinary Ja vi.549, Ja vi.553.
2. urgent, pressing MN i.149 (karaṇiyan business) ii.112; Ja i.338; Ja v.17 ˚ṃ (nt. hurry Dhp-a i.18. See also acceka.
fr. accaya
to speak more or better, to surpass in talk or speech; to talk somebody down, to persuade, entice Vin iv.224, Vin iv.263; SN ii.204 sq.; Ja v.433 (v.l. BB ajjhārati), 434 (v.l. BB aghācarati for ajjhācarati = ajjhāvadati?).
ati + āvadati; or is it = ajjhāvadati = adhi + āvadati?
(adj.) very near, too near Pv-a 42 (na a. n’âtidūra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance).
ati + asanna
(adj.) very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible Ja iv.46 = Ja v.146 (= ati ahita C.) = vi.306 (id.).
ati + ahita
& (in verse); accī (f.) a ray of light, a beam, flame SN iv.290 (spelt acchi), 399; AN iv.103; AN v.9; Snp 1074 (vuccati jālasikhā Nd ii.11); Ja v.213; Mil 40; Thag-a 154 (dīp’) Sdhp 250.
Vedic arci m. & arcis nt. & f. to; ṛc, cp. accati
(f.) a flame MN i.74; SN ii.99.
fr. acci
honoured, praised, esteemed Ja vi.180.
pp. of accati
(adj.) flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Thag 527; Ja v.266; Ja vi.248; Vv 388.
fr. acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arciṣmant
(adj.) at Vin i.287 is expld. by Bdhgh as caturassa-kedāra-baddha (“divided into short pieces” Vin Texts ii.207), i.e. with squares of irrigated fields. The vv.ll. are acca˚ and acchi˚, and we should prefer the conjecture acchi-baddha “in the shape of cubes or dice”, i.e. with square fields.
= accibaddha?
to rise out (of), ger. accuggamma DN ii.38; AN v.152 (in simile of lotus).
ati + uggacchati
(adj.) 1. very high or lofty Mil 346 (giri); Vv-a 197; Dhp-a ii.65.
2. too high, i.e. too shrill or loud Ja vi.133 (sadda), 516 (fig. = atikuddha very angry C.).
ati + uggata
(adj.) very hot, too hot Snp 966; Nd i.487; Dhp-a ii.85, Dhp-a ii.87 (v.l. for abbhuṇha). See also ati-uṇha.
ati + uṇha
(adj.) immoveable; everlasting, eternal; nt. ˚ṃ Ep. of Nibbāna (see also cuta) AN iv.295, AN iv.327; Snp 204, Snp 1086 (= nicca etc. Nd ii.12); Dhp 225 (= sassata Dhp-a iii.321); Sdhp 47.
a + cuta
at Ja v.124 is to be read with v.l. as apaccupaṭṭhapeti (does not indulge in or care for).
at Ja iv.250 read accuppati, aor. 3rd sg. of accuppatati to fall in between (lit. on to), to interfere (with two people quarelling). C. expls. atigantvā uppati. There is no need for Kern’s corr. acchupati (Toev. s. v.).
(adj.) too full, too thick Vin ii.151.
ati + ussanna
= accāyika, special; ˚cīvara a spccial robe Vin iii.261; cp. Vin Texts i.293.
1. to pass (of time), to go by, to elapse Thag 145 (accayanti ahorattā).
2. to overcome to get over Mil 36 (dukkhaṃ) ■ Caus. acceti to make go on (loc.), to put on Ja vi.17 (sūlasmiṃ; C. āvuṇeti) but at this passage prob. to be read appeti (q.v.).
ati + eti fr. i
(adj.) too abundant, too plentiful (of riches), lit. plunged into AN iv.282, AN iv.287, AN iv.323 sq.
ati + ogāḷha
(nt.) too much water (opp. anodaka no water) Dhp-a i.52.
ati + udaka
(nt.) too much eating, greediness, lit. too much of a belly Ja iv.279 (C. ati-udara).
ati + udara
(adj.) clear, transparent Vin i.206 (˚kañjika); DN i.76 (maṇi = tanucchavi DN-a i.221) 80 (udakapatta), 84 (udaka-rahada); MN i.100; SN ii.281 (˚patta); iii.105 (id.); AN i.9; Ja ii.100 (udaka); Vv 7910 (vāri); DN-a i.113 (yāgu).
-odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus ponds) Vv 4411; 815; f. ˚odikā Vv 412 = 602.
cp. Sk. accha, dial., to ṛc (see accati), thus “shining”; cp. Sk. ṛkṣa bald, bare and Vedic ṛkvan bright Monier-Williams however takes it as a + cha fr. chad thus “not covered, not shaded”
a bear Vin i.200; AN iii.101; Ja v.197, Ja v.406, Ja v.416; Mil 23 Mil 149. At Ja vi.507 accha figures as Name of an animal, but is in expln. taken in the sense of accha4 (acchā nāma aghammigā C.). Note. Another peculiar form of accha is P. ikka (q.v.).
Vedic ṛkṣa = Gr. α ̓́ρκτος, Lat. ursus, Cymr. arth
= akkha2 (a die) see acci-bandha.
(adj.) hurtful, painful, bad Dhp-a iv.163 (˚ruja).
Ved. ṛkṣa
= accha2, a bear Ja v.71.
1. to sit, to sit still Vin i.289; AN ii.15; Iti 120 (in set carati tiṭṭhati a. sayati, where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati) Vv 741 (= nisīdati Vv-a 298); Pv-a 4.
2. to stay remain, to leave alone Thag 936; Ja iv.306.
3. to be behave, live Vin ii.195; DN i.102; SN i.212; Vv 112; Pv iii.31 (= nisīdati vasati Pv-a 188); Mil 88; Dhp-a i.424 In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus aggiṃ karitvā a. (= aggiṃ karoti) DN i.102; aggiṃ paricaranto a (= aggiṃ paricarati) DN-a i.270; tantaṃ pasārento a. (tantaṃ pasāreti) Dhp-a i.424 ■ Pot. acche Iti 110; aor acchi Vin iv.308; Dhp-a i.424.
Vedic āsyati & āste,; ās; cp. Gr. η ̈ ̔σται
(adj.) covered with, clothed in, fig. steeped in (c. loe.) Ja jii.323 (lohite a. = nimugga C.) At DN i.91 nacchanna is for na channa (see channa2) not fair, not suitable or proper (paṭirūpa).
pp. of acchādeti
(adj.) not frightened, undismayed, fearless Snp 42 (reading achambhin; Nd ii.13 expls. abhīru anutrāsi etc.); Ja vi.322 (= nikkampa C.). See chambhin.
a + chambhin
(f.) the snapping of the fingers the bringing together of the finger-tips: 1. (lit.) accharaṃ paharati to snap the fingers Ja ii.447; Ja iii.191; Ja iv.124, Ja iv.126 Ja v.314; Ja vi.366; Dhp-a i.38, Dhp-a i.424 ■ As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger-tips, a pinch Ja v.385; Dhp-a ii.273 (˚gahaṇamattaṃ); cp. ekacchara-matta Dhp-a ii.274.
2. (fig.) a finger’s snap, i.e. a short moment in ek˚acchara-kkhaṇe in one moment Mil 102, and in def. of acchariya (q.v.) at DN-a i.43; Vv-a 329.
-saṅghāta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short duration of time, a moment, ˚matta momentary only for one moment (cp. BSk. acchaṭāsanghāta Divy 142) AN i.10, AN i.34, AN i.38; AN iv.396; Thag 405; Thag 2, Thag 67 (expld at Thag-a 76 as ghaṭikāmattam pi khaṇaṃ angulipoṭhanamattam pi kālaṃ). -sadda the sound of the snapping of a finger Ja iii.127.
etym. uncertain, but certainly dialectical; Trenckner connects it with ācchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares Sk. akṣara (see akkhara); there may be a connection with akkhaṇa in akkhaṇa-vedhin (cp. BSk. acchaṭā Divy 555), or possibly a relation to ā + tsar, thus meaning “stealthily”, although the primary meaning is “snapping, a quick sound”
(f.) a celestial nymph MN i.253 (pl. accharāyo ii.64; Thig 374 (= devaccharā Thag-a 252); Ja v.152 sq (Alambusā a.) Vv 55 (= devakaññā Vv-a 37); Vv 172; 1811 etc.; Dhp-a iii.8, Dhp-a iii.19; Pv-a 46 (dev˚; ); Mil 169 Sdhp 298.
Vedic apsaras = āpa, water + sarati, orig; water nymph
(nt. or f.?) in ˚ṃ vādeti to make heavenly music (lit. the sounds of an accharā or heavenly nymph) AN iv.265.
fr. accharā2
(adj.-n..) wonderful, surprising strange, marvellous DN ii.155; MN i.79; MN iii.118, MN iii.125, MN iii.144 (an˚); SN iv.371; AN i.181; Mil 28, Mil 253; Dhp-a iii.171; Pv-a 121; Vv-a 71 (an˚). As nt. often in exclamations how wonderful! what a marvel! Ja i.223, Ja i.279; Ja iv.138 Ja vi.94 (a. vata bho); Dhp-a iv.51 (aho a.); Vv-a 103 (aho ti acchariyatthena nipāto). Thus freq. combd. with abbhutaṃ = how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension, e.g. DN i.2, DN i.60, DN i.206, DN i.210; DN ii.8; and in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā strange & wonderful things, i.e. wonderful signs, portents marvels, MN iii.118 MN iii.125; AN iv.198; Mil 8; also as adj. in phrase acchariyaabbhuta-(citta-)jātā with their hearts full of wonder and surprise Dhp-a iv.52; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 50 ■ See also acchera accheraka.;
cp. Sk. āścarya since Upanishads of uncertain etym ■ The conventional etym. of Pāli grammarians connects it with accharā1 (which is prob. correct & thus reduces Sk. āścarya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz. Dhammapāla: anabhiṇha-ppavattitāya accharāpaharaṇa-yoggaṃ that which happens without a moment’s notice, at the snap of a finger; i.e. causally unconnected (cp. Goth. silda-leiks in similar meaning) Vv-a 329; and Buddhaghosa: accharā-yoggan ti acchariyaṃ accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttan ti attho DN-a i.43
(nt.) covering, clothing Thag 698; Mil 279 ■ fig. protection, sheltering Ja i.307.
fr. acchādeti
(f.) covering, hiding, concealment Pp 19, Pp 23 ■ Note. In id. p. at Vb 358 we read accasarā for acchādanā. Is the latter merely a gloss?
= prec.
to cover, to clothe, to put on DN i.63 = Iti 75; Ja i.254; Ja iii.189; Ja iv.318; Pp 57; Pv i.105 (ger. acchādayitvāna); DN-a i.181 (= paridahitvā); Pv-a 49, Pv-a 50 ■ fig to envelop, to fill Ja vi.581 (abbhaṃ rajo acchādesi dust filled the air) ■ pp. acchanna (q.v.).
ā + chādeti1, Caus. of chad, cp. BSk. ācchādayati jīvitena to keep alive Avs, i.300; Divy 136 Divy 137
at SN iv.290 is faulty spelling for acci (q.v.).
(v.l. accheja) destroying (?) SN i.127. Is the reading warranted? Cp. acchecchi.
see chidda.
to remove forcibly, to take away, rob, plunder Vin iv.247 (sayaṃ a. to appropriate); Ja ii.422; Ja iii.179; Ja iv.343; Mil 20; Sdhp 122 ■ ger. acchinditvā Ja ii.422; Dhp-a i.349; Pv-a 241 (sayaṃ); & acchetvā MN i.434. Caus. ii. acchindāpeti to induce a person to theft Vin iv.224, Vin iv.247.
ā + chindati, lit. to break for oneself
(adj.) removed, taken away, stolen, robbed Vin iv.278, Vin iv.303; Ja ii.78 Ja iv.45; Ja v.212.
ā + chinna, pp. of acchindati
a certain species of tree (Hypanthera Moringa) Ja vi.535.
*Sk. akṣiba and akṣība
to procure or provide a hold, to insert, to put on or in Vin i.290 (aggaḷaṃ) ii.112.
ā + chupeti, Caus. of chupati
3rd sg. aor. of chindati “he has cut out or broken, has destroyed” (see also chindati 3) in combn. with taṇhaṃ MN i.122; SN i.12, SN i.23, SN i.127 (so read for acchejja); iv.105, 207. Iti 47; AN iii.246, AN iii.445; Dhp-a iv.70 (gloss acchindi, for acchidda pret. of Dhp 351). The v.l. at all passages is acchejji, which is to be accounted for on graphological grounds, ch & j being substituted in MSS. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) mistakes the form tries to explain acchejji as adj. = ati-ejin (ejā), acchecchi ati-icchin (icchā). The syntactical construction however clearly points to an aor.;
Sk. acchaitsīt
= a + chejja not to be destroyed, indestructible, see chindati.
(nt.) robbing, plundering Ja vi.544.
abstr. to acchindati
(adj.) = acchariya wonderful, marvellous SN i.181; Vv 8413 (comp. accheratara); Pv iii.51 (˚rūpa = acchariyasabhāva Pv-a 197); Sdhp 244, Sdhp 398.
(adj.) = acchera (acchariya) Ja i.279; Bv i.9 (pāṭihīraṃ).
a hegoat, a ram DN i.6, DN i.127; AN ii.207; Ja i.241; Ja iii.278 sq.v.241; Pp 56; Pv-a 80.
-eḷaka [Sk. ajaiḍaka] goats & sheep DN i.5, DN i.141; AN ii.42 sq., 209; Ja i.166; Ja vi.110; Pp 58. As pl. ˚ā SN i.76; Iti 36; Ja iv.363. -pada goat-footed MN i.134. -pāla goatherd in ˚nigrodharukkha (Npl.) “goatherds’ Nigrodha-tree” Vin i.2 sq. Dpvs i.29 (cp. Mvu iii.302). -pālikā a woman goatherd Vin iii.38. -lakkhaṇa “goat-sign”, i.e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. DN i.9 (expld. DN-a i.94 as “evarūpānaṃ ajānaṃ mansaṃ khāditabbaṃ evarūpānaṃ na khāditabban ti”). -laṇḍikā (pl.) goats’ dung, in phrase nāḷimattā a. a cup full of goats’ dung (which is put down a bad minister’s throat as punishment) Ja i.419; Dhp-a ii.70; Pv-a 282. -vata “goats’ habit”, a practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) Ja iv.318.
aja-pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat’s hoof; so also at Vism 161.
Vedic aja fr. aj (Lat. ago to drive), cp. ajina
a goat, pl. goats Vin ii.154 ■ f. ajikā Ja iii.278 & ajiyā Ja v.241.
a large snake (rock-snake?), Boa Constrictor Ja vi.507; Mil 23, Mil 303, Mil 364, Mil 406; Dhp-a iii.60. Also as ajakara at Ja iii.484 (cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64).
aja + gara = gala fr. *gel to devour, thus “goateater”
(adj.) of low birth Ja iii.19; Ja vi.100.
a + jacca
see jajjara. Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumara;
see jaddhu.
cummin-seed Vv-a 186.
Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajājī
(f.) a she-goat Ja iii.125; Ja iv.251.
(˚-) (nt.) not knowing, ignorance (of) Ja v.199 (˚bhāva); vi.177 (˚kāla).
a + jānana
(nt.) the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics DN i.167; Snp 1027; Ja i.12, Ja i.53; Ja iv.387; Ja v.407. kharājina a rough skin (as garment) MN i.343; SN iv.118; AN ii.207; Snp 249 (= kharāni a˚-cammāni Snp-a 291). dantājina ivory (q.v.).
-khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope’s hide DN i.167; SN i.117; AN i.240, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Vin i.306; Vin iii.34; Ja vi.569. -paveṇi a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin i.192; DN i.7 (= ajina-cammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇi DN-a i.87); AN i.181. -sāṭī a garment of skins (= ajina-camma-sāṭī Dhp-a iv.156) Dhp 394 = Ja i.481 = Ja iii.85.
Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats’ skin
aor 3rd sg. jayati, q.v. Ajiya = ajika
(see ajaka).
(nt.). a court, a yard Mvu 35, Mvu 3.
Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Gr. ἀγρός, Lat. ager, Goth. akrs = Ger. Acker, = E. acre
(nt.) indigestion Ja i.404; Ja ii.181, Ja ii.291; Ja iii.213, Ja iii.225.
a + jīraka
(adj.) - (a) not to be taken by force Kp viii.8 (cp. Kp-a 223). (b) not to be overpowered, invincible Snp 288; Ja v.509.
a + jeyya, grd. of jayati, q.v.
(adj.) not decaying, not growing old, permanent Ja vi.323. Ajja & Ajja
a + jeyya, grd. of jīyati, q.v.
(adv.) to-day, now Snp 75 Snp 153, Snp 158, Snp 970, Snp 998; Dhp 326; Ja i.279; Ja iii.425 (read bahutaṃ ajjā; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. as “food”); Pv i.117 (= idāni Pv-a 59); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 23; Mvu 15, Mvu 64. Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja-tagge, see agga3) from this day onward, henceforth Vin i.18; DN i.85; DN-a i.235.
-kālaṃ (adv.) this morning Ja vi.180; -divasa the present day Mvu 32, Mvu 23.
Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, a˚ being base of demonstr. pron. (see a;3) and dyā an old loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus “on this day”
(adj.) referring to the day, today’s, present, modern (opp. porāṇa ) Thag 552; Dhp 227; Ja ii.409 ■ dat. ajjatanāya for today Vin i.17; Pv-a 171 & passim.;
cp. Sk. adyatana
(f.) the present time, in ajjatañ ca this very day SN i.83 (v.l. ajjeva).
abstr. fr. ajja
to get, procure, obtain Ja iii.263 (?). pp. ajjita (q.v.).
Vedic arjati, ṛj, a variant of arh, see arahati
(adj.-n.) straight, upright (usually combd. with maddava gentle, soft) DN iii.213; AN i.94; AN ii.113; AN iii.248; Snp 250 (+ maddava) 292 (id.); Ja iii.274; Dhs 1339; Vb 359 (an˚); Snp-a 292 (= ujubhāva), 317 (id.).
cp. Sk. ārjava, to ṛju, see uju
(f.) straight forwardness, rectitude, uprightness Dhs 1339. (+ ajimhatā & avankatā).;
fr. prec.
obtained Sdhp 98.
pp. of ajjati
Name of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin iv.35; DN-a i.81 (all MSS. have ajjaka).
*Sk. arjaka
Name of a tree Pentaptera Tomentosa Ja vi.535 (nn).
*Sk. arjakarṇa
(adv.) this moonlight night Vin i.25; Vin iv.80.
haplology fr. ajja-juṇho; see juṇhā
the tree Pentaptera Arjuna Ja vi.535; Dhp-a i.105 (˚rukkha).
Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. ἀργός white, α ̓́ργυρος silver, Lat. argentum
Assimilation group of adhi + vowel.
he came to, got to, found, obtained experienced SN i.12 (vimānaṃ); Snp 225 (expld. at Kp-a 180 by vindi paṭilabhi), 956 (ratiṃ; expld. at Nd i.457 by adhigacchi); Iti 69 (jātimaraṇaṃ); Dhp 154 (taṇhānaṃ khayaṃ); Vv 327 (visesaṃ attained distinction; expld. at Vv-a 135 by adhigata); 5021 (amataṃ santiṃ; expld. Vv-a 215 by v.l. SS adhigañchi, T. adhigacchati).
adhi + agā 3rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q.v. for similar forms)
(adj.-n.), that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & ˚interior, personal, inwardly (opp.; bahiddhā bāhira etc outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. DN i.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhāna) 70 = AN ii.210; AN v.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkhaṃ niyakajjhattaṃ attano santāne ti attho DN-a i.183 cp. Dhs-a 169, Dhs-a 338, Dhs-a 361); SN i.70, SN i.169; ii..27 (kathaṃ kathī hoti is in inward doubt), 40 (sukhaṃ dukkhaṃ); iii.180 (id.) iv.1 sg. (āyatanāni), 139, 196; v.74 (ṭhitaṃ cittaṃ ajjhattaṃ susaṇṭhitaṃ suvimuttaṃ a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143, 263, 297, 390; AN i.40 (rūpasaññī), 272 (kāmacchanda etc.); ii.158. (sukhadukkhaṃ), 211; iii.86 (cetosamatha), 92 (vūpasantacitta); iv.32 (sankhittaṃ), 57 (itthindriyaṃ), 299 (cittaṃ), 305 (rūpasaññī), 360 (cetosamatha), 437 (vūpasantacitta); v.79 sq. 335 sq. (sati); Iti 39 (cetosamatha inward peace), 80, 82 94; Ja i.045 (chātajjhatta with hungry insides); v.338 (id.) Pts i.76 (cakkhu etc.); Dhs 161 (= attano jātaṃ Dhs-a 169), 204, 1044; Pp 59; Vb 1 sq. (khandhā), 228 (sati), 327 (paññā), 342 (arū’pasaññī) ■ adv. ˚ṃ inwardly personally (in contrast-pair ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā; see also cpd. ˚bahiddhā) AN i.284; AN ii.171; AN iv.305; AN v.61; Snp 917 (= upajjhayassa vā ā ācariyassa vā te guṇā assū ti Nd i.350).
-ārammaṇa a subjective object of thought Dhs 1047 -cintin thought occupied with internal things Snp 174, Snp 388 -bahiddhā inside & outside, personal-external, mutual interacting SN ii.252 sq.; SN iii.47; SN iv.382; Nd ii.15; Dhs 1049 etc. (see also bahiddhā). -rata with inward joy DN ii.107; SN v.263 = Dhp 362 = Ud 64 (+ samāhita); Thag 981; AN iv.312; Dhp-a iv.90 (= gocar’ ajjhatta-sankhātāya kammaṭṭhāna-bhāvanāya rata). -rūpa one’s own or inner form Vin iii.113 (opp. bahiddhā-rūpa & ajjh˚-bah˚ r.).; -saññojana an inner fetter, inward bond AN i.63 sq.; Pp 22 Vb 361. -santi inner peace Snp 837 (= ajjhattānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ santibhāva Snp-a 545; cp. Nd i.185). -samuṭṭhāna originating from within Ja i.207 (of hiri; opp. bahiddhā˚).
cp. Sk. adhyātma, cp. attā
(adj.), personal, inward (cp. Dhs trsl. 207 & Nd;1 346: ajjhattikaṃ vuccati cittaṃ) opp. bāhira outward (q.v.). See also āyatana ■ MN i.62; SN i.73 (˚ā rakkhā na bāhirā); iv.7 sq. (āyatanāni); v.101 (anga); AN i.16 (anga); ii.164 (dhātuyo); iii.400 (āyatanāni); v.52 (id.); Iti 114 (id.), 9 (anga); Kp iv. (= Kp-a 82); Ja iv.402 (bāhira-vatthuṃ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṃ gaṇhati); Dhs 673, Dhs 751; Vb 13, Vb 67, Vb 82 sq., 119, 131 392 sq.
ajjhatta + ika
S v.218: substitute v.l. accasara (q.v.).
(& Ajjhapatta) 1. having reached, approached, coming near to Ja ii.450 Ja vi.566 (p; C. attano santikaṃ patta).
2. having fallen upon, attacked Ja ii.59; Ja v.198 (p; C. sampatta )
3 attained, found, got Snp 1134 (= adhigacchi Nd2); Ja iii.296 (p. C. sampatta ); v.158 (ajjhāpatta; C. sampatta ).
adhi + ā + *prāpta
3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati to conquer, overpower, overcome SN i.240 (prohib. mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi); Ja ii.336. Cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati.;
3rd sg. aor. of adhibhāseti to address SN iv.117 (gāthāhi); Kp v. = Snp p.46 (gāthāya); Pv-a 56, Pv-a 90.
(3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati (q.v.) to overcome, conquer Iti 76 (dujjayaṃ a. he conquered him who is hard to conquer; v.l. ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi). Cp. ajjhabhavi.
(nt.) study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Mil 225. See also ajjhena.
adhi + i
3rd sg. aor. of ajjhodahati to put down Ja v.365 (= odahi, ṭhapesi C.). Kern, Toev s. v. proposes reading ajjhavādahi (= Sk. avādhāt).
Sk. adhyavadhāti
(adv.) at home, in one’s own house AN i.132 = Iti 109; AN ii.70.
adhi + agāre, loc. of agāra
1. to conduct oneself according to Vin ii.301; MN i.523; Mil 266.
2. to flirt with (perhaps to embrace) Ja iv.231 (aññam-aññaṃ) pp. ajjhāciṇṇa. See also accāvadati & aticarati.;
adhi (or ati?) + ā + car
1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Pārājika’s or Saṃghādisesa’s) Vin i.63 (see note in Vin. Texts, i.184.
2. flirtation Vin iii.128 (in the Old Cy as expln of avabhāsati).
3. sexual intercourse Ja i.396; Ja v.327 (˚cara v.l. for ajjhāvara); Mil 127 (an˚).
to adhi (ati?) + ā + car
habitually done Vin ii.80 sq., 301.
pp. of ajjhācarati
too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood MN ii.245 (+ adhipāṭimokkha).
adhi (ati?) + ā + jīv
to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (acc.) Vin iv.237. pp. ajjhāpanna (q.v.).
adhi + ā + pad
(f.) incurring guilt Dhs 299 (an˚).
abstr. to ajjhāpajjati
(nt.) teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Mil 225.
fr. Caus. ii. of ajjheti
(nt.) burning, conflagration Ja vi.311.
ā + jhāpana fr. kṣā
become guilty of offence DN i.245; DN iii.43; SN ii.270; AN iv.277, AN iv.280; AN v.178, AN v.181 an˚; guiltless, innocent Vin i.103; DN iii.46; SN ii.194, SN ii.269; AN v.181; Mil 401. For all passages except AN iv.277 AN iv.280, cp. ajjhopanna.
pp. of adhi + āpajjati
harassed, overpowered, tormented Pv-a 180 (khuppipāsāya by hunger & thirst).;
adhi + ā + pīḷita
excessive power, predominance Ja ii.357.
cp. Sk. adhyābhava
to predominate Ja ii.357.
adhi + ā + bhū, in meaning of abhi + bhu
(a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhāyaka Ja vi.209; Snp-a 192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious learned person DN i.88, DN i.120; DN iii.94; AN i.163; AN iii.223; Snp 140 (˚kula: thus for ajjhāyakula Fsb.); Thag 1171; Ja i.3 Ja vi.201, Ja vi.498; DN-a i.247.
cp. Sk. adhyāyaka, cp. ajjhayana
(& ˚rūha ) (adj.) growing up over, overwhelming AN iii.63 sq. = SN v.96; Ja iii.399.
to adhi + ā + ruh
(adj.) grown up or high over Ja iii.399.
pp. of adhi + ā + ruh
to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over SN i.221 = Ne 173 (ajjhottharati SA; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred Sayings i.285).
adhi + ārohati cp. atyārohati
see accāvadati.
surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue Ja v.322, Ja v.324, Ja v.326, Ja v.327 (expld at all passages by parisā ). Should we read ajjhācara? Cp. ajjhācāra.
fr. adhi + ā + var
one who inhabits DN i.63 (agāraṃ).
n. ag. to ajjhāvasati
to inhabit (agāraṃ a house; i.e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder DN ii.16; MN i.353; Vin iv.224; Ja i.50; Pp 57; Mil 348 ■ pp. ajjhāvuttha (q.v.).
adhi + ā + vas
inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin ii.210; Ja i.145; Ja ii.333; Pv-a 24 (˚ghara); fig. (not) occupied by Snp-a 566 (= anosita).
cp. Sk. adhyuṣita; pp. of ajjhāvasati
intention, desire wish, disposition, bent DN ii.224 (adj.: intent on, practising); Ja i.88, Ja i.90; Ja ii.352; Ja v.382; Dhs-a 314, Dhs-a 334; Pv-a 88, Pv-a 116, Pv-a 133 (adj. dān˚ intent on giving alms), 168 Sdhp 219, Sdhp 518. Freq. in phrase ajjhāsayānurūpa according to his wish, as he wanted Pv-a 61, Pv-a 106, Pv-a 128.
fr. adhi + ā + śri, orig. hanging on, leaning on, BSk. however adhyāśaya Divy 586
(f.) desire, longing Pv-a 127 (uḷār˚ great desire for c. loc.).
abstr. to ajjhāsaya
intent on, bent on Mil 361 (jhān˚). Cp. ajjhosita & nissita.;
pp. of adhi + ā + śri
requested, asked, invited Vin i.113 (an˚ unbidden); DN ii.289 (Buddhaghosa and text read ajjhitta); Snp p.218 (= ajjhesita Nd ii.16); Ja vi.292 (= āṇatta C.); Dhp-a iv.100 (v.l. abhijjhiṭṭha). See also an˚.
pp. of ajjhesati
to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Thig 474 (= sampaṭicchati Thag-a 285); Ja ii.403; Mil 300; pp. ajjhupagata (q.v.).
adhi + upa + gam
come to, obtained, reached AN v.87, cp. 210; v.187 sq.
pp. of ajjhupagacchati
(nt.) consent, agreement, justification Vin ii.97, Vin ii.104.
adhi + upa + gam
to take (food) to oneself Ja ii.293 (aor. ajjhupāhari = ajjhohari C.).
adhi + upa + hṛ; cp. upaharati
1. to look on AN i.257; Mil 275.
2. to look on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of AN iv.45 (kaṭṭh’aggi, has to be looked after); Pv-a 149 (sisaṃ colaṃ vā).
3. to look on indifferently to be indifferent to neglect Vin ii.78 = Vin iii.162, cp. Ja i.147; MN i.155 MN ii.223; AN iii.194, AN iii.435; Ja v.229; Dhp-a iv.125.
adhi + upa + ikṣ; cp. BSk. adhyupekṣati
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) care, diligence, attention Pts i.16; Pts ii.119; Vb 230 sq. Dhp-a iv.3.
abstr. from ajjhupekkhati
one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer caretaker SN v.69 (sādhukaṃ), 324 (id.), 331 sq. Vb 227.
n. ag. to ajjhupekkhati
to go to meet, to receive Ja iv.440.
cp. Sk. abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i
to be anxious about, to fret, worry Snp 948 (socati + ); expld at Nd i.433 by nijjhāyati, at Snp-a 568 by abhijjhati (gloss BB gijjhati).
Sk. ādhyāyati, Denom. fr. adhyāya
(nt.) study (esp. of the Vedas) MN iii.1; Ja ii.327 (as v.l. to be preferred to ajjhesanā); iii.114 (= japa); v.10 (pl. = vede) vi.201 = 207; Vb 353; Snp-a 314 (mant’).
-kujja (˚kūta v.l.?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Snp 242 cp. Snp-a 286.
Sk. adhyayana, see also ajjhayana
to request, ask, bid Dhp-a iv.18; aor. ajjhesi Vin ii.200; pp ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; (q.v.), with which cp. pariyiṭṭha & ˚esita.
adhi + iṣ; cp. BSk. adhyeṣate Divy 160
(f.) request, entreaty Vin i.6 = DN ii.38 = SN i.138; Ja ii.327 (better v.l. ajjhena).
see ajjhesati
requested, asked, bidden Nd ii.16 (= ajjhiṭṭha).
pp. of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiṭṭha
the open air, only in loc. ajjhokāse in the open Vin i.15; SN i.212; Dhp-a iv.100.
adhi + okāsa
plunged into, immersed; having entered MN i.457; SN i.201; Mil 348.
pp. of ajjhogāhati
(& ˚gāheti) to plunge into, to enter, to go into DN i.101 (vanaṃ), 222 (samuddaṃ); MN i.359, MN i.536; AN iii.75 AN iii.368; AN iv.356; AN v.133; Vin iii.18; Ja i.7; Nd i.152 (ogāhati + ); Mil 87 (samuddaṃ); 300 (vanaṃ) ■ pp. ajjhogāḷha (q.v.). Cp. pariyogāhati.
Sk. *abhyavagāhate; adhi (= abhi) + ava + gāh
to bring to Pv-a 148 (gāmaṃ), where we should read ˚ṭṭhapeti.
adhi + ava + ṭhapeti, Caus. of sthā
spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered Ja i.363 (ajjhottaṭa) 410; v.91 (= adhipanna); Dhp-a i.278; Pv-a 55; Dāvs v.5.
pp. of ajjhottharati
to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin i.111; Ja i.61, Ja i.72, Ja i.73; Mil 296, Mil 336; Dhp i.264; Pass. ˚tthariyati to be overrun with (instr.), to be smothered, to be flooded AN iii.92 = Pp 67; aor. ajjhotthari Vv-a 48 (gāmapadeso: was flooded). pp. ajjhotthata (q.v.).
adhi + ava + stṛ;
(?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q.v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosāna seems to be clearer and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosāna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old-standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v.l. to MN i.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB (= adhi-opanna). The MSS. of Nd ii.clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS substitution of p for s (see Nd ii.Introd. xix.). Besides this mixture of vv.ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv.ll. ajjhāpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosāna (q.v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhāpanna, from which it took the ā and p. Cp. also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts.
1. ajjhopanna as T. reading: MN i.162, MN i.173, MN i.369; AN i.74; AN ii.28 AN iii.68, AN iii.242; Md 75, 76; DN-a i.59; as v.l.: DN i.245. 2. ajjhosāna as v.l.: AN i.74 (C. expls. ajjhosāya gilitvā ṭhita); Nd ii.under nissita & passim; Ud 75, Ud 76 (ajjhosanna); DN-a i.59 (id.).
3. ajjhāpanna as T. reading DN i.245; DN iii.43, DN iii.46; SN ii.194, SN ii.270: iv.332 (ajjhapaṇṇa) AN v.178, AN v.181; Nd ii.under nissita; Mil 401; as v.l. MN i.162; AN iii.242; Ud 75, Ud 76.
to overcome, overpower, destroy Ja ii.80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.).
adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi˚
to crush down AN iv.191, AN iv.193.
adhi + ava + mṛd
stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) AN iii.57 sq (v.l. ajjhomuñcïta or ˚muccita better: sarīre attached to her body, clinging to her b.).
pp. adhi + ava + mūrch, cp. adhimuccita
to hang or hold on to (acc.), to cling to SN iii.137; MN iii.164 = Ne 179 cp. Sdhp 284 & 296.;
adhi + ava + lamb
= ajjhosāya, in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to SN iv.73; Thag 98, Thag 794.
to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. Fut. ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) MN i.328 (c. acc. paṭhaviṃ, better as ajjhesati). grd. ajjhositabha MN i.109 (+ abhinanditabba, v.l. ˚etabba); Dhs-a 5 (id.); ger. ajjhosāya (q.v.) pp. ajjhosita (q.v.).
adhi + ava + sayati, sā, to bind, pp. sita: see ajjhosita
(nt.) cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, DN ii.58 sq.; DN iii.289; MN i.498 (+ abhinandana); SN iii.187; AN i.66; AN ii.11 (diṭṭhi˚, kāma˚ + taṇhā). In combn. with (icchā) and mucchā at Nd ii.under chanda & nissita and taṇhā (see also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs 1059 of lābha (the expl;n. at Dhs-a 363, Dhs-a 370, from as to eat, is popular etym.) Ne 23 sq. (of taṇhā).
being tied to, hanging on, attached to only in phrase a. tiṭṭhati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy MN i.266; SN iv.36 sq.; 60, 71 sq.; Mil 69. See also ajjhosa.
ger. of ajjhosati, cp. BSk. adhyavasāya tiṣṭhati Divy 37, Divy 534
hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. loc.) SN ii.94 (+ mamāyita); AN ii.25 (diṭṭha suta muta + ); Nd i.75 Nd i.106, Nd i.163 = Nd ii.under nissita; Thig 470 (asāre = taṇhāvasena abhiniviṭṭha Thag-a 284); Pv iv.84 (mayhaṃ ghare taṇhābhinivisena abhiniviṭṭha Pv-a 267; v.l. BB ajjhesita SS ajjhāsita). -an˚; SN iv.213; SN v.319; Nd i.411; Mil 74 (pabbajita).
cp. Sk. adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + sā; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sk. śrita, also through likeness of meaning with esita; see ajjhāsita & ajjhesita
having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisaṃ maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook).
pp. of ajjhoharati
(nt.) = ajjhohāra 1. AN v.324; Ja vi.213.
(adj.) something fit to eat, eatable, for eating Ja vi.258; Dhp-a i.284.
grd. of ajjhoharati
to swallow, eat, take as food MN i.245; Ja i.460; Ja ii.293 Ja vi.205, Ja vi.213; Mil 366; Pv-a 283 (aor.)-pp. ajjhohaṭa (q.v.).
Sk. abhyavaharati; adhi (= abhi) + ava + hṛ;
1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin iv.233; Mil 176, Mil 366.
2. N of a fabulous fish (swallower”; cp. timingala) Ja v.462.
Sk. abhyavahāra
Ja i.417, read añchati (see next).
to pull, drag, pull along to turn on a lathe DN ii.291 (bhamakāro dīghaṃ a., where K has note: añjanto ti pi acchanto ti pi pātho) = MN i.56 (vv.ll. p. 532 acch˚ & añj˚); Thag 750 (añcāmi T., v.l aññāmi). Añchati should also be read at Ja i.417 for udakaṃ añcanti (in expln. of udañcanī pulling the water up from a well, q.v.), where it corresponds to udakaṃ ākkaḍḍhati in the same sentence.
in meaning = ākaḍḍhati, which latter is also the Sk. gloss (ākārṣayati) to the Jain Prk. aṃchāvei = añchati see Morris, J. P. T. S. 1893, 60
(adv.) [orig. imper. of añjati1; cp. Sk. anjasā (instr.) quickly, Goth. anaks suddenly, lit. with a pull or jerk pull on! go on! gee up! Ja i.192.
. See añja, añjaya, añjali, añjasa.
= Sk. ṛñjati, ṛjyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sk. ṛju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. ὀρέγω Lat. rego, rectus = erect. See also P. uju, añchati, ajjita ānañja-ānejja
to smear, anoint, paint SN ii.281; Ja iv.219 (akkhīni añjetvā, v.l. BB añcitvā). Caus. ii. añjāpeti Dhp-a i.21. pp. añjita (q.v.).
= Sk. añjayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. añji ointment, ājya butter; Lat. unguo to anoint, unguentum ointment; Ohg. ancho = Ger. Anke butter
(nt.) ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adj. anointed, smeary glossy, black (cp. kaṇha ii. and kāla1 note).
1. Vin i.203 (five kinds viz. kāḷ˚, ras˚, sot˚, geruka, kapalla) DN i.7, DN i.12; DN-a i.98 (khār˚); 284; Dhp-a iii.354 (akkhi eye-salve).
2. glossy, jet-black Ja i.194; Ja ii.369; Ja v.416. The reading añjana at AN iv.468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamattaṃ. See also pacc˚. In meaning collyrium box at Thig 413 (= añjana-nāḷi Thag-a 267); Dhp-a ii.25.
-akkhiha with anointed eyes Thag 960. -upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin i.203; Vin ii.112. -cuṇṇa aromatic powder Dhs-a 13. -nāḷi an ointment tube, collyrium box Thag-a 267. -rukkha Name of a tree (“black tree) Ja i.331. -vaṇṇa of the colour of collyrium, i.e. shiny, glossy, dark, black DN ii.18 (lomāni); Ja i.138 (kesā) 194; ii.369; Pv-a 258 (vana).
from añjati2
(f.) a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin i.203, Vin i.204; Vin ii.135; Vin iv.168; MN ii.65 = Thag 773.
fr. añjana
(f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin i.203; Vin ii.135; Ja iii.419.
(adj.) straight Ja iii.12 (vv.ll. ajjava & and ājjava better?) expl;d by C. as ujuka, akuṭila. See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for añjasa?
from añjati1
extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. E. to “tender” one’s respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (Vv-a 7: dasanakha-samodhāna-samujjalaṃ añjaliṃ paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) añjaliṃ paṇāmeti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin ii.188; DN i.118; Snp 352; Snp p.79 (b.) ˚ṃ paggaṇhāti to perform the a. salutation Ja i.54; Dhp-a iv.212; Vv-a 7, Vv-a 312 (sirasmiṃ on one’s head) Pv-a 93. (c.) ˚ṃ karoti id. Pv-a 178; cp. katañjali (adj. with raised hands Snp 1023; Ja i.17; Pv-a 50, and añjalikata id. Pv ii.1220. Cp. pañjali
-kamma respectful salutation, as above AN i.123; AN ii.180 AN iv.130; Vv 788, 8316; Dhp-a i.32. -karaṇīya (adj.) that is worthy of being thus honoured DN iii.5; AN ii.34; AN iii.36 AN iv.13 sq.; Iti 88.
cp. Sk. añjali, fr. añjati1
(f.) the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (expld at Vv-a 24 as dasanakha-samodhāna samujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇa-visiṭṭhānaṃ apacayānaṃ akāsiṃ).
= añjali
straight, straightforward (of a road) DN i.235; Ja i.5; Thig 99; Vv 5020 (cp. Vv-a 215); Vv-a 84 (akuṭila); Mvu 25, Mvu 5; Mil 217; Sdhp 328, Sdhp 595. Cp pañjasa.
Sk. āñjasa (?). Cp. ārjava = P. ajjava, see añjati1 & añjaya
smeared, anointed Ja i.77 (su-añjitāni akkhīni); iv.421 (añjit’akkha).
Sk. ankta & añjayita, pp. of añjeti
(pron.) another etc ■ A. By itself: 1. other not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp oneself) Vin iii.144 (aññena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route); Snp 459, Snp 789, Snp 904; Dhp 158 (opp attānaṃ), 165; Ja i.151 (opp. attano); ii.333 (aññaṃ vyākaroti give a diff. answer).
2. another one, a second nt. else, further Snp 1052 (= uttariṃ nt. Nd ii.17); else Ja i.294. aññaṃ kiñci (indef.) anything else Ja i.151. yo añño every other, whoever else Ja i.256.
3. aññe (pl. (the) others, the rest Snp 189, Snp 663, Snp 911; Dhp 43, Dhp 252 Dhp 355; Ja i.254 ■ B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. añña. añña the one … the other (… the third etc.); this, that & the other; some … some Vin i.15; Mil 40; etc. 2. reciprocative añño aññaṃ, aññamaññaṃ, aññoññaṃ one another, each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adj. in; sg.; cp Gr. ἀλλήλων, αλλήλους in pl.). (a.) añño aññaṃ Dhp 165 (b.) aññamañña (cp. BSk. añyamañya Mvu ii.436) as pron.: n’ālaṃ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā DN i.56 = SN iii.211. n’aññamaññassa dukkhaṃ iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Snp 148. daṇḍehi aññamaññaṃ upakkamanti (approach each other) MN i.86 = Nd ii.199 ˚ṃ agāravo viharati AN iii.247. dve janā ˚ṃ ghātayiṃsu (slew each other) Ja i.254. aññamaññaṃ hasanti Ja v.111 ˚ṃ musale hantvā Ja v.267. ˚ṃ daṇḍâbhigāṭena Pv-a 58 or adj.: aññamaññaṃ veraṃ bandhiṃsu (established mutual enmity) Ja ii.353; ˚ṃ piyasaṃvāsaṃ vasiṃsu Ja ii.153; aññamaññaṃ accayaṃ desetvā (their mutual mistake) Dhp-a i.57 or adv. dve pi aññamaññaṃ paṭibaddha citta ahesuṃ (in love with each other) Ja iii.188; or ˚- aññamañña-paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Pts ii.49, Pts ii.58. (c.) aññoñña (˚-) Ja v.251 (˚nissita); Dāvs v.45 (˚bhinna)
3. disjunctive añña… añña one… the other, this one… that one, different, different from aññaṃ jīvaṃ. aññaṃ sarīraṃ one is the soul… the other is the body i.e. the soul is different from the body DN i.157; MN i.430; AN v.193; aññā va saññā bhavissati añño attā DN i.187 Thus also in phrase aññena aññaṃ opposite, the contrary differently, contradictory (lit. other from that which is other) Vin ii.85 (paṭicarati make counter-charges); DN i.57 (vyākāsi gave the opposite or contradictory reply) Mil 171 (aññaṃ kayiramānaṃ aññena sambharati). anañña (1) not another, i.e. the same, self-same, identical MN i.256 (= ayaṃ) ■ (2) not anotber, i.e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Snp 65 (˚posin; opp. paraṃ) = Nd 4 cp. Nd ii.36 ■ (3) not another, i.e. no more, only, alone Snp p.106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti anaññā: and no other or no more, only two). See also under cpds.
-ādisa different Ja vi.212, ˚tā difference Pv-a 243 -khantika acquiescing in diff. views, following another faith (see khantika) DN i.187; MN i.487. -titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non-Buddhist.; DN iii.115; MN i.494, MN i.512; P ii.21, 32 sq., 119; iii.116 sq.; iv.51, 228 v.6, 27 sq.; AN i.65, AN i.240; AN ii.176; AN iv.35 sq.; Vin i.60; Ja i.93; Ja ii.415. -diṭṭhika having diff. views (combd. with añña-khantika) DN i.187; MN i.487. -neyya (an˚) not to be guided by somebody else, i.e. independent in one’s views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opp. para˚) Snp 55, Snp 213, Snp 364. -mano (an˚) (adj.) not setting one’s heart upon others Vv 115 (see Vv-a 58) -vāda holding other views, an˚ (adj.) Dpvs iv.24. -vādaka one who gives a diff. account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin iv.36. -vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent-minded Vin iv.269; Dhp-a iii.352, Dhp-a iii.381; ˚tā distraction, absentmindedness Dhp-a i.181. -saraṇa (an˚) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i.e. of independent, sure knowledge SN iii.42 = SN v.154. -sita dependent or relying on others Snp 825.
Vedic anya, with compar. suff. ya; Goth. anpar; Ohg. andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Gr. α ̓́λλος (α ̓́λjος), Lat. alius (cp. alter) Goth. aljis Ags. elles = E. else. From demonstr. base *eno, see na1 and cp. a3
(pron. adj.) one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mvu 38, Mvu 14.
añña + superl. suff. tama; see also aññatara
(pron. adj.) one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka as indef. article “a”. Very frequent, e.g. Snp 35, Snp 210; Iti 103; Dhp 137, Dhp 157; Ja i.221, Ja i.253; Ja ii.132 etc. devaññatara a certain god, i.e. any kind of god SN iv.180 = AN iv.461.
Sk. anyatara, añña + compar. suff. tara, cp. Lat. alter, Goth. anpar etc.
(adv.) somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) Ja i.291; Ja ii.154; Dhs-a 163; Dhp-a i.212; Dhp-a iii.351; Pv-a 45; Mvu 4, Mvu 37; Mvu 22, Mvu 14.
from añña = aññatra, adv. of place, cp. kattha, ettha
(adv.) elsewhere, somewhere else Ja v.252; Pv iv.162. In compn. also añña˚, e.g. aññatra-yoga (adj.) following another discipline DN i.187; MN i.487 ■ As prep. c. abl. (and instr.) but besides, except, e.g. a. iminā tapo-pakkamena DN i.168 kiṃ karaṇīyaṃ a. dhammacariyāya SN i.101; ko nu aññatram-ariyehi who else but the Nobles Snp 886 (= ṭhapetvā saññā-mattena Snp-a 555). -kiṃ aññatra what but, i.e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for DN i.90 (vusitavā-mānī k. a. avusitattā); SN i.29 (k. k. a adassanā except from blindness); Snp 206 (id.).
anya + tra, see also aññattha
(nt.) 1. change, alteration SN iii.37; SN iv.40; AN i.153; AN iii.66; Kv 227 (= jarā C, cp Kvu trsl. 55 n. 2); Mil 209.
2. difference Ja i.147; Iti 11.
3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin ii.2; SN iii.91; SN iv.329.
4. fickleness, change of mind, doubt wavering, MN i.448, MN i.457 (+ domanassa); Ja i.33 (cittaṃ) Pv-a 195 (cittassa).
aññathā + tta
(adv.) in a different manner, otherwise, differently SN i.24; Snp 588, Snp 757; Dhs-a 163; Pv-a 125, Pv-a 133. anaññathā without mistake Vv 4418; anaññatha (nt.) certainty, truth Pts ii.104 (= tatha).
-bhāva (1) a different existence AN ii.10; Iti 9 = Iti 94; Snp 729, Snp 740, Snp 752; (2) a state of difference; i.e. change alteration, unstableness DN i.36; SN ii.274; SN iii.8, SN iii.16, SN iii.42 Vb 379. -bhāvin based on difference SN iii.225 sq. SN iv.23 sq., 66 sq.; an˚ free from difference Vin i.36.
añña + thā
(adv.) part. of affirmation = surely, all-round absolutely (ekaṃsa-vacane nipāto DN-a i.111) only, at any rate DN i.91; DN ii.284; Snp 828 (na h’ aññadatth’ atthi pasaṃsa-lābhā, expld. Snp-a 541 as na hi ettha pasaṃsa-lābhato añño attho atthi, cp. also Nd i.168); Mil 133; Vv-a 58; Pv-a 97, Pv-a 114.
-dasa sure-seeing, seeing everything, all pervading DN i.18; DN iii.135, DN iii.185; AN ii.24; AN iii.202; AN iv.89, AN iv.105; Iti 15.
lit. aññad atthu let there be anything else, i.e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all everything, surely
(adv.) at another time, else, once SN iv.285; Ja v.12; Dhp-a iv.125.
añña + dā, cp. kadā, tadā, yadā
(f.) knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 n. 3 and Psalms of Brethren introd. xxxiii.) MN i.445; SN i.4 (sammad˚), 24 (aññāya nibbuta); ii.221; v.69, 129 (diṭṭh’eva dhamme) 133, 237; AN iii.82, AN iii.143, AN iii.192; AN v.108; Iti 39 sq., 53, 104; Dhp 75, Dhp 96; Kp vii.11; Mil 334 ■ aññaṃ vyākaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin i.183; SN ii.51 sq., 120; iv.139; v.222; Ja i.140; Ja ii.333. See also arahatta.
-atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv iv.114. -ārādhana the attainment of full insight MN i.479. -indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect DN iii.219; SN v.204; Iti 53; Pp 2; Dhs 362 Dhs 505, Dhs 552; Ne 15, Ne 54, Ne 60. -citta the thought of gnosis the intention of gaining Arahantship SN ii.267; AN iii.437 -paṭivedha comprehension of insight Vin ii.238. -vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Snp 1105, Snp 1107 (Nd ii.19: vuccati arahatta-vimokkho).
Sk. ājñā, = ā + jñā, cp. ājānāti
(nt.) ignorance; see ñāṇa 3 e.
a + ñāṇa
(nt.) ignorance Vin iv.144.
DemiName of aññāṇa
(adj.) ignorant, not knowing Dhp-a iii.106.
a + ñāṇin
known, recognised Snp 699. an˚; what is not known, in phrase anaññāta-ññassāmī’ t’ indriya the faculty of him (who believes): “I shall know what is not known (yet)” DN iii.219; SN v.204; Iti 53 Pp 2; Dhs 296 (cp. Dhs trsl.86); Ne 15, Ne 54, Ne 60, Ne 191.
-mānin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge one who imagines to be in possession of right insight AN iii.175 sq.; Thag 953.
pp. of ājānāti, q.v.
unknown, see ñāta.
a + ñāta
he who is not a kinsman Dhp-a i.222.
a + ñātaka, cp. Sk. ajñāti
(adj.) unknown, unrecognisable, only in phrase ˚vesena in unknown form, in disguise Ja i.14; Ja iii.116; Ja v.102.
DemiName of aññāta2
one who knows, a knower of DN ii.286; MN i.169; SN i.106 (dhammassa); Kv 561.
n. ag. to ājānāti
(adj.-n.) one who has complete insight Dhs-a 291.
-indriya (˚tāv’ indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs trsl. 150) and same loci as under aññindriya (see aññā).
from ājānāti
(adj.) desirous of gaining right knowledge AN iii.192. See ājānāti.
ā + jñātuṃ + kāma
reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of SN i.24; AN iii.41; Dhp 275, Dhp 411.
ger. of ājānāti, q.v. for detail
see añña B 2 c.
eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Snp 240; all MSS at 239 have asamāna. Snp-a 284 expls. by āhārayamāna.
Sk. aśnāna, ppr. med. of aśnāti, aś to eat
Name of a certain purgatory or Niraya AN v.173 = Snp p.126.
BSk. aṭaṭa (e.g. Divy 67), prob. to aṭ; roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd i.405 bottom
(adj.) roaming about, wild Ja v.105 (˚gāvī).
cp. Sk. aṭana, to aṭ;
(f.) a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin iv.168; Sām. Pās. on Pāc. 14 (quoted Min Pāt. 86 and Vin iv.357); Dhp-a i.234; Ja ii.387, Ja ii.425, Ja ii.484 supports of a seat. Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69 compares Marāthi aḍaṇī a three-legged stand. See also Vin Texts ii.53.
(adj.) solid, firm, strong, only in phrase; aṭaliyo upāhanā strong sandals MN ii.155 (vv.ll. paṭaliye & agaliyo) = SN i.226 (vv.ll. āṭaliyo & āṭaliko). At the latter passage Bdhgh. expl;s. gaṇangaṇ-ûpāhanā, Mrs. Rh. D. (Kindred Sayings i.291) trsls “buskined shoes”.
cp. Sk. aṭṭa & aṭṭālaka stronghold
(f.) 1. forest, woods Ja i.306; Ja ii.117; Ja iii.220; Dhp-a i.13; Pv-a 277. 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe Ja vi.55 (= aṭavicorā C.).
-rakkhika guardian of the forest Ja ii.335. -saṅkhepa at AN i.178 = AN iii.66 is prob. faulty reading for v.l. ˚sankopa “inroad of savage tribes”.
Sk. aṭavī: Non-Aryan, prob. Dravidian
a platform to be used as a watchtower Vin i.140; DN-a i.209.
cp. see aṭṭaka
lawsuit, case, cause Vin iv.224; Ja ii.2, Ja ii.75; Ja iv.129 (˚ṃ vinicchināti to judge a cause), 150 (˚ṃ tīreti to see a suit through); vi.336.
cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b
distressed, tormented afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Snp 694 (+ vyasanagata Snp-a 489 ātura); Thig 439 (= aṭṭita Thag-a 270), 441 (= pīḷita Thag-a 271); Ja iv.293 (= ātura C.); Vv 809 (attita upadduta Vv-a 311). Often-˚: iṇaṭṭa oppressed by debt MN i.463; Mil 32; chāt˚ tormented by hunger Vv-a 76; vedan˚ afflicted by pain Vin ii.61; Vin iii.100; Ja i.293; sūcik˚ (read for sūcikaṭṭha) pained by stitch Pv iii.23.
-ssara cry of distress Vin iii.105; SN ii.255; Ja i.265 Ja ii.117; Mil 357; Pv-a 285.
Sk. ārta, pp. of ardati, ṛd to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk. ārdra (= P. adda and alla); Gr. α ̓́ρδω to moisten α ̓́ρδα dirt. See also aṭṭīyati & aṭṭita
a platform to be used as a watchhouse on piles, or in a tree Vin i.173; Vin ii.416; Vin iii.322 Vin iii.372; DN-a i.209.
DemiName of aṭṭa1
at Vin ii.106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Bdhgh as aṭṭhāna? (cp. Bdhgh on p. 315).
a watch-tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (koṭṭhaka) Thag 863; Ja iii.160 Ja v.373; Mil 1, Mil 330; Dhp-a iii.488.
from aṭṭa
= aṭṭāla; Ja ii.94, Ja ii.220, Ja ii.224; Ja vi.390, Ja vi.433; Mil 66, Mil 81.
Sk. aṭṭālaka
(& occasionally; addita, e.g. Pv ii.62; Thig 77, Thig 89; Thag 406) pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Thag 157; Ja ii.436; Ja iv.85 (v.l. addhita); v.84; Vv-a 311; Thag-a 270 Mvu 1, Mvu 25; Mvu 6, Mvu 21; Dpvs i.66; ii.23; xiii.9; Sdhp 205. See remarks of Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 104, & 1887. 47.; Attiyati & Attiyati;
Sk. ardita, pp. of ardayati, Caus. of ardati see aṭṭa3
to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually combd. with harāyati, e.g. DN i.213 (+ jigucchati); SN i.131; MN i.423; Pv i.102 (= aṭṭā dukkhitā Pv-a 48) freq. in ppr. aṭṭiyamāna harayāmāna (+ jigucchamāna Vin ii.292; Ja i.66, Ja i.292; Iti 43; Nd ii.566; Pts i.159. Spelling sometimes addiyāmi, e.g. Thig 140 ■ pp. aṭṭita & addita.;
Denom. fr. aṭṭa3, q.v.
(nt.) fright, terror, amazement Dhp-a ii.179.
cp. Sk. ardana, to aṭṭiyati
num. card, eight, decl. like pl. of adj. in-a A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena: see cpds. ˚angula, ˚nakha, ˚pada, ˚pāda B. The number in subjective significance ■ (1) As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in meaning “a couple” aṭṭha matakukkuṭe aṭṭha jīva-k. gahetvā (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) Dhp-a i.213. sanghassa a salākabhattaṃ dāpesi Vv-a 75 = Dhp-a iii.104. a. piṇḍapātāni adadaṃ Vv 348. a. vattha-yugāni (a double pair as offering) Pv-a 232, a therā Pv-a 32 ■ The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is freq. applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (23). Thus a “royal” gift goes under the name of sabb-aṭṭhakaṃ dānaṃ (8 elephants, 8 horses 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars Dhp-a ii.45, Dhp-a ii.46, Dhp-a ii.71. In the same sense aṭṭh’ aṭṭha kahāpaṇā (as gift) Dhp-a ii.41; aṭṭh-aṭṭhakā dibbākaññā Vv 673 (= catusaṭṭhi Vv-a 290); aṭṭhaṭṭhaka Dpvs vi.56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a “couple” in the phrase satt-aṭṭha 7 or 8 = a couple e.g. sattaṭṭha divasā, a weck or so Ja i.86; Ja ii.101; Vv-a 264 (saṃvaccharā years) ■ (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus freq. as aṭṭha kahāpaṇā Ja i.483; Ja iv.138; Vv-a 76; Mil 291 ■ In distances: a karīsā Dhp-a ii.80; Dhp-a iv.217; Pv-a 258; a. usabhā Ja iv.142. (c.) in combn. with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of “a great many”, hundreds, thousands. Thus aṭṭha sataṃ 800, Snp 227. As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a-˚sata-sahassa-vibhava Dhp-a iv.7. But aṭṭhasata at SN iv.232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at Ja v.377 ■ aṭṭha sahassaṃ 8000; Ja v.39 (nāgā). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in combn. with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): (α) 80 (asīti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahāpurisa (see anuvyañjana), besides the 32 main signs (see dvattiṃsa) Vv-a 213 etc. Freq. as measure of riches, e.g. 80 waggon loads Pv ii.75; asīti-koṭivibhava Dhp-a iii.129; Pv-a 196; asīti hatth’ ubbedho rāsi (of gold Vv-a 66, etc. See further references under asīti ■ (β) The foll. are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 aṭṭhādasa (only MN iii.239: manopavicārā) & aṭṭhārasa (this the later form) Vv-a 213 (avenika-buddhadhammā: Bhagavant’s qualities); as measure Ja vi.432 (18 hands high of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: aṭṭhārasa koṭiyo or ˚koṭi, 18 koṭis Ja i.92 (of gold), 227; iv.378 (˚dhana riches); Dhp-a ii.43 (of people); Mil 20 (id.); a. akkhohini-sankhāsenā Ja vi.395. a. vatthū Vin ii.204 ■ 28 aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni Nd i.382; paṭisallāṇaguṇā Mil 140 ■ 38 aṭṭhatiṃsā Mil 359 (rājaparisā) ■ 48 aṭṭhacattārīsaṃ vassāni Snp 289 ■ 68 aṭṭhasaṭṭhi Thag 1217 ˚sitā savitakkā, where id. p. at SN i.187 however reads atha saṭṭhi-tasitā vitakkā); Ja i.64 (turiya-satasahassāni) 98 aṭṭhanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. iv.15; Snp 311 (rogā, a higher set than the original 3 diseases cp. navuti) ■ (2) As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aṭṭha denotes, like dasa (q.v.) a comprehensive unity. See esp. the cpds for this application. ˚aṃsa and ˚aṅgika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aṭṭha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp 8 X 8 under 1 a)-Ja v.409 (a. mangalena samannāgata of Indra’s chariot: with the 8 lucky signs); Vv-a 193 (aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaṃ manussabhāvaṃ: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: Ja iv.3 (aṭṭha petiyo, following after 4, then foll. by 8, 16, 32); Pv-a 75 (a. kapparukkhā at each point of the compass, 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language Dhp-a iv.3.
-aṃsa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry (see above B. 2), of a diamond DN i.76 = MN iii.121 (maṇi veḷuriyo a.); Mil 282 (maṇiratanaṃ subhaṃ jātimantaṃ a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimāna) Ja vi.127 = Ja vi.173 = Vv 782 (a. sukatā thambhā); Vv 8415 (āyataṃsa = āyatā hutvā aṭṭha-soḷasadvattiṃsādi-aṃsavanto Vv-a 339). Of a ball of string Pv iv.328 (gulaparimaṇḍala, cp. Pv-a 254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs 617. -aṅga (of) eight parts, eightfold, consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (see also next and above B 2 on significance of aṭṭha in this connection), in compn. with ˚upeta characterised by the eight parts (i.e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows, see sīla & cp. anga 2), of; uposatha the fast-day AN i.215; Snp 402 (Snp-a 378 expls. ekam pi divasaṃ apariccajanto aṭṭhangupetaṃ uposathaṃ upavassa) cp. aṭṭhanguposathin (adj.) Mvu 36, Mvu 84. In BSk. always in phrase aṣṭānga-samanvāgata upavāsa, e.g. Divy 398 Sp. Avs i.338, Avs i.399; also vrata Avs i.170. In the same sense aṭṭhangupeta pāṭihāriyapakkha (q.v.) Snp 402, where Vv 156 has ˚susamāgata (expld. at Vv-a 72 by pānāṭipātā veramaṇī-ādīhi aṭṭhah’ angehi samannāgata). ˚samannāgata endowed with the eight qualities (see anga 3), of rājā, a king DN i.137 sq., of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) DN ii.211; Ja i.95; Vv-a 217. Also in Buddh. Sk. aṣṭāngopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e.g. Sp. Avs i.149. -aṅgika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts embracing eight items (see above B 2); of the uposatha (as in prec. aṭṭhang’ uposatha) Snp 401; of the “Eightfold Noble Path” (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in BSk. as aṣṭāngika mārga, e.g. Lal 540, cp. aṣṭāngamārgadeśika of the Buddha, Divy 124, Divy 265); DN i.156, DN i.157 DN i.165; MN i.118; Iti 18; Snp 1130 (magga uttama); Dhp 191 Dhp 273; Thig 158, Thig 171; Kp iv.; Vin i.10; Nd ii.485; DN-a i.313; Dhp-a iii.402. -aṅgula eight finger-breadths thick eight inches thick, i.e. very thick, of double thickness Ja ii.91 (in contrast to caturangula); Mvu 29, Mvu 11 (with sattangula). -aḍḍha (v.l. aḍḍhaṭṭha) half of eight, i.e. four (˚pāda) Ja vi.354, see also aḍḍha1. -nakha having eight nails or claws Ja vi.354 (: ekekasmiṃ pāde dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ khurānaṃ vasena C.). -nava eight or nine Dhp-a iii.179. -pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., lit. having eight squares, i.e. on each side (DN-a i.85: ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assā ti), cp. dasapada DN i.6.
2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross-plaited (of hair) Thag 772 (aṭṭhāpada-katā kesā); Ja ii.5 (˚ṭṭhapana = cross-plaiting). -padaka a small square (1/8), i.e. a patch Vin i.297; Vin ii.150. -pāda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) Ja v.377 Ja vi.538; cp. Sk. aṣṭapāda = śarabha a fabulous eight-legged animal. -maṅgala having eight anspicious signs Ja v.409 (expld. here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs). -vaṅka with eight facets, lit. eight-crooked i.e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel Ja vi.388. -vidha eightfold Dhs 219.
Vedic aṣṭau, old dual, Idg. *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (see also nava); Av. ašta Gr. ὀκτώ, Lat. octo, Goth. ahtau = Ohg. ahto, Ger. acht E. eight
see attha.
(adj.)
1. eightfold Vin i.196 = Ud 59 (˚vaggikāni); Vv-a 75 = Dhp-a iii.104 (˚bhatta).
2 ˚ā (f.) the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aṭṭhamī), in phrase rattīsu antar’aṭṭhakāsu in the nights between the eighths, i.e. the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin i.31, Vin i.288 (see Vin Texst i.130n); MN i.79; AN i.136; Mil 396; Ja i.390.
3. ˚ṃ (nt.) an octad Vv 672 (aṭṭh eight octads = 64); Vv-a 289, Vv-a 290. On sabbaṭṭhaka see aṭṭha B 1 a. See also antara.
Sk. aṣṭaka
(num. ord.) the eighth Snp 107, Snp 230 (cp. Kp-a 187), 437 ■ f. ˚ī the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. aṭṭhakā) AN i.144; Snp 402; Vv 166 (in all three pass. as pakkhassa cātuddasī pañcadasī ca aṭṭhamī); AN i.142; Snp 570 (ito atthami scil. divase, loc.).
Sk. aṣṭama, see aṭṭha1
= aṭṭhama the eighth.
1. lit. Mil 291 (att˚ self-eighth).
2. as tt. the eighth of eight persons who strive after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotāpanna (q.v. Kv 243
251 (cp. Kvu trsl. 146 sq.); Ne 19, Ne 49, Ne 50; Pts ii.193 (+ sotāpanna).
(nt.) stand, post; name of the rubbing-post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares was let into the ground of a bathing-place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin ii.105, Vin ii.106 (read aṭṭhāne with BB; cp. Vin ii.315).
ā + ṭṭhāna
, in comb;n. with katvā: to make something one’s attha, i.e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā DN ii.204; MN i.325, MN i.445; SN i.112 sq. = 189, 220; v.76; AN ii.116; AN iii.163; Ja i.189; Ja v.151 (: attano atthikabhāvaṃ katvā atthiko hutvā sakkaccaṃ suṇeyya C.); Ud 80 (: adhikicca ayaṃ no attho adhigantabbo evaṃ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā C.); Sdhp 220 (˚katvāna).
= attha (aṭṭha) in compn. with kar & bhū, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti-kata (for citta˚) angi-bhūta (for anga˚); cp. the freq. combn. (with similar meaning) manasi-kata (besides manasā-k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combn. is restricted to the pp and der. (˚kata & ˚katvā). Other expl;ns. by Morris J. P. T. S 1886, 107; Windisch, M. & B. 100
(nt.) 1. a bone AN i.50; AN iv.129; Snp 194 (˚nahāru bones tendons); Dhp 149, Dhp 150; Ja i.70; Ja iii.26, Ja iii.184; Ja vi.448 (˚vedhin) Dhp-a iii.109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suśruta iii.5); Kp-a 49; Pv-a 68 (˚camma-nahāru), 215 (gosīs˚); Sdhp 46, Sdhp 103.
2. the stone of a fruit Ja ii.104.
-kaṅkala [Sk. ˚kankāla] a skeleton MN i.364; cp. ˚sankhalika. -kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) Ja v.406. -kalyāṇa beauty of bones Dhp-a i.387 -camma bones and skin Ja ii.339; Dhp-a iii.43; Pv-a 68 -taca id. Ja ii.295. -maya made of bone Vin ii.115 -miñjā marrow AN iv.129; Dhp-a i.181; Dhp-a iii.361; Kp-a 52 -yaka (T. aṭṭhīyaka) bones & liver SN i.206. -saṅkhalikā [B. Sk. ˚śakalā Sp. Avs i.274 sq., see also aṭṭhika˚] a chain of bones, i.e. a skeleton Dhp-a iii.479; Pv-a 152 -saṅghāṭa conjunction of bones, i.e. skeleton Vism 21; Dhp-a ii.28; Pv-a 206. -sañcaya a heap of bones Iti 17 Bdhd 87. -saññā the idea of bones (cp. aṭṭhika˚) Thag 18. -saṇṭhāna a skeleton Sdhp 101.
Sk. asthi = Av. asti, Gr. ο ̓́στεον, ο ̓́στρακον, ἀστράγαλος; Lat. os (*oss); also Gr. ο ̓́ζος branch Goth. asts
(nt.) 1. = aṭṭhi 1 a bone MN iii.92; Ja i.265, Ja i.428; Ja vi.404; Pv-a 41.
2 = aṭṭhi 2 kernel, stone Dhp-a ii.53 (tāl˚); Mvu 15, Mvu 42.
-saṅkhalikā a chain of bones, a skeleton AN iii.324 see also under kaṭaṭṭhika. -saññā the idea of a skeleton SN v.129 sq.; AN ii.17; Dhs 264.
fr. aṭṭhi
at Pv-a 180 (sūcik˚) to be read aṭṭita (q.v.) for aṭṭika.
see ṭhita.
undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered Ja ii.247 (= adhiṭṭhita C.).
ā + ṭhita
see atthika.
at Vin ii.266 is expld. by Bdhgh on p. 327 by gojanghaṭṭika, perhaps more likely = Sk. aṣṭhīlā a round pebble or stone.
(& addha) one half, half; usually in compn. (see below), like diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 (˚sata 150) Pv-a 155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note. aḍḍha is never used by itself, for “half in absolute position upaḍḍha (q.v.) is always used.
-akkhika with furtive glance (“half an eye”) Dhp-a iv.98 -aṭṭha half of eight, i.e. four (cp. aṭṭhaḍḍha) SN ii.222 (˚ratana); Ja vi.354 (˚pāda quadruped; v.l. for aṭṭhaḍḍha) -aḷhaka 1/2 an aḷhaka (measure) Dhp-a iii.367. -uḍḍha [cp Mahārāṣṭrī form cauṭṭha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half Ja i.82; Ja iv.180; Ja v.417, Ja v.420; Dhp-a i.87; Mvu 12, Mvu 53 -ocitaka half plucked off Ja i.120. -karīsa (-matta) half a k. in extent Vv-a 64 (cp. aṭṭha-karīsa). -kahāpaṇa 1/2 kahāpaṇa AN v.83. -kāsika (or ˚ya) worth half a thousand kāsiyas (i.e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin i.281 (kambala, a woollen garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts ii.195); ii.150 (bimbohanāni, pillows; so read for aḍḍhakāyikāni in T.); Ja v.447 (a˚- kāsigaṇikā for a-˚kāsiya˚ a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a˚-k˚-gaṇikā viya na bahunnaṃ piyā manāpā). -kumbha a half (-filled pitcher Snp 721. -kusi (tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross-seam Vin i.287. -kosa half a room, a small room Ja vi.81 (= a˚ kosantara C.). -gāvuta half a league Ja vi.55 -cūḷa (˚vāhā vīhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Mil 102, perhaps misread for aḍḍhāḷha (āḷha = āḷhaka, cp. AN iii.52) a half āḷha of rice. -tiya the third (unit) less half, i.e. two and a half Vv-a 66 (māsā); Ja i.49, Ja i.206, Ja i.255 (˚sata 250). Cp. next. -teyya = ˚tiya 2 1/2; Vin iv.117; Ja ii.129 (˚sata); DN-a i.173 (v.l. BB for ˚tiya); Dhp-a i.95 (˚sata) 279; Pv-a 20 (˚sahassa). -telasa [cp. BSk. ardhatrayodaśa twelve and a half Vin i.243, Vin i.247; DN ii.6 (˚bhikkhusatāni, cp. tayo B 1 b); Dhp-a iii.369. -daṇḍaka a short stick MN i.87 = AN i.47; AN ii.122 = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197 -duka see ˚ruka. -nāḷika (-matta) half a nāḷi-measure full Ja vi.366. -pallaṅka half a divan Vin ii.280. -bhāga half a share, one half Vv 136 (= upaḍḍhabhāga Vv-a 61) Pv i.115. -maṇḍala semi-circle, semi circular sewing Vin i.287. -māna half a māna measure Ja i.468 (m. = aṭṭhannaṃ nāḷinaṃ nāmaṃ C.). -māsa half a month, a half month a fortnight Vin iii.254 (ūnak˚); AN v.85; Ja iii.218; Vv-a 66. Freq. in acc. as adv. for a fortnight, e.g. Vin iv.117; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 55. -māsaka half a bean (as weight or measure of value, see māsaka) Ja i.111. -māsika halfmonthly Pp 55. -muṇḍaka shaven over half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mvu 6, Mvu 42. -yoga a certain kind of house (usually with pāsāda) Vin i.58 = Vin i.96, Vin i.107 Vin i.139, Vin i.239, Vin i.284; Vin ii.146. Acc. to Vin T. i.174 “a gold coloured Bengal house” (Bdhgh), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaṇṇa vankageha “like a Garuḷa bird’s crooked wing”, i.e. where the roof is bent on one side. -yojana half a yojana (in distance) Ja v.410; DN-a i.35 (in expln. of addhāna-magga); Dhp-a i.147 Dhp-a ii.74. -rattā midnight AN iii.407 (˚aṃ adv. at m.); Vv 8116 (˚rattāyaṃ adv. = aḍḍharattiyaṃ Vv-a 315); Ja i.264 (samaye); iv.159 (id.). -ratti = ˚rattā Vv-a 255, Vv-a 315 (majjhimayāma-samaya); Pv-a 155. -ruka (v.l. ˚duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin ii.134; Bdhgh expln. on p. 319: aḍhadukan ti udare lomarāji-ṭhapanaṃ “leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach”. -vivata (dvāra half open Ja v.293.
etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha
(adj.) rich, opulent, wealthy, well-to-do usually in combn. with mahaddhana & mahābhoga; of great wealth & resources (foll. by pahūta-jātarūparajata pahūta vittūpakaraṇa etc.). Thus at DN i.115, DN i.134, DN i.137; DN iii.163 Pp 52; Dhp-a i.3; Vv-a 322; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 78 etc. In other combn. Vv 314 (˚kula); Nd ii.615 (Sakka = aḍḍho mahaddhano dhanavā); DN-a i.281 (= issara); Dhp-a ii.37 (˚kula) Sdhp 270 (satasākh˚), 312 (guṇ˚), 540 sq. (id.), 561.
Sk. āḍhya fr. ṛddha pp. of ṛdh, ṛdhnote & ṛdhyate (see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr.; α ̓́λχομαι thrive, Lat alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power. See also āḷhiya
(adj.) wealthy, rich, influential Ja iv.495; Pv ii.82 (= mahāvibhava Pv-a 107).
(f.) riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp 316.
abstr. to aḍḍha
debt, only in neg. anaṇa (adj. free from debt Vin i.6 = SN i.137, SN i.234 = DN ii.39; Thig 364 (i.e. without a new birth); AN ii.69; Ja v.481 Thag-a 245.
Sk. ṛṇa; see etym. under iṇa, of which aṇa is a doublet. See also āṇaṇya
(adj.) small, minute, atomic, subtle (opp. thūla, q.v.) DN i.223; SN i.136; SN v.96 (˚bīja); Snp 299 (anuto aṇuṃ gradually); Ja iii.12 (= appamattaka); iv.203; Dhs 230, Dhs 617 (= kisa); Thag-a 173; Mil 361. Note aṇu is freq. spelt anu, thus usually in cpd. ˚matta.
-thūla (aṇuṃthūla) fine and coarse, small & large Dhp 31 (= mahantañ ca khuddakañ ca Dhp-a i.282), 409 = Snp 633; Ja iv.192; Dhp-a iv.184. -matta of small size, atomic least Snp 431; Vb 244, Vb 247 (cp. MN iii.134; AN ii.22) Dpvs iv.20. The spelling is anumatta at DN i.63 = Iti 118; Dhp 284; DN-a i.181; Sdhp 347. -sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i.e. residuum Kv 81, cp. Kv trsl. 66 n. 3.
Sk. aṇu; as to etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. under ulna. See also āṇi
(adj.) = aṇu Snp 146, Kp-a 246.
(nt.) 1. an egg Vin iii.3; SN ii.258; MN i.104; AN iv.125 sq.
2. (pl.) the testicles Vin iii.106.
3. (in camm˚) a water-bag Ja i.249 (see Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69).
-kosa shell of eggs Vin iii.3 = MN i.104; AN iv.126, AN iv.176. -cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder Ja iv.364 Ja iv.366. -ja 1. born from eggs SN iii.241 (of snakes); MN i.73; Ja ii.53 = Ja v.85; Mil 267.
2. a bird Ja v.189. -bhārin bearing his testicles SN ii.258 = Vin iii.100. -sambhava the product of an egg, i.e. a bird Thag 599. -hāraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles MN i.383.
Etym. unknown. Cp. Sk. aṇḍa
(nt.) = aṇḍa, egg Dhp-a i.60; Dhp-a iii.137 (sakuṇ˚).
(adj.) only used of vācā speech: harsh, rough, insolent MN i.286; AN v.265, AN v.283 AN v.293 (gloss kaṇṭakā); Ja iii.260; Dhs 1343, cp. Dhs-a 396.
Sk.? prob. an inorganic form; the diaeresis of caṇḍaka into c˚ aṇḍaka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. Dhs-a 396 and see Dhs trsl. 349, also Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aṭṭa3
(food, cereal). See passages under aparaṇṇa & pubbaṇṇa.;
(nt.) 1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah˚ cp. BSk. mahārṇava, e.g. Jtm 3175) MN i.134; SN i.214 SN iv.157 (mahā udak˚); Snp 173 (fig. for saṃsāra see Snp-a 214), 183, 184; Ja i.119 (˚kucchi), 227 (id.); v.159 (mah˚) Mvu 5, Mvu 60; Mvu 19, Mvu 16 (mah˚).
2. a stream, river Ja iii.521; Ja v.255.
Sk. arṇa & arṇava to; ṛ; ṛṇoti to move, Idg. *er to be in quick motion, cp. Gr. ο ̓́ρνυμι; Lat. orior Goth. rinnan = E. run; Ohg. runs, river, flow.
day, only as-˚ in apar˚, pubb˚, majjh˚, sāy˚, q.v.
Sk. ahna, day, see ahan
(adj.) not mixed with buttermilk Ja yi.21.
a + takka2
(nt.) falsehood, untruth DN i.3; Ja vi.207.
a + taccha2
(indecl.) adv. and prep of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning “on and further”, then “up to and beyond”. I. in abstr position adverbially (only as ttg.): in excess, extremely very (cp. ii.3) Ja vi.133 (ati uggata C. = accuggata T.) 307 (ati ahitaṃ C. = accāhitaṃ T.).
II. as prefix, meaning.
1. on to, up to, towards until); as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, pass on; atipāta “falling on to”; attack slaying atimāpeti to put damage on to, i.e. to destroy.
2. over beyond, past, by, trans-; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to pass beyond, surpass; atimaññati to put one’s “manas over, to despise; atirocati to surpass in splendour. (b. intr. atikkanta passed by; atikkama traversing; aticca transgressing; atīta past, gone beyond ■ Also with verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also sin, transgression (“going over”); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow abundance; atisāra stepping over, sin.
3. exceedingly, in a high or excessive degree either very (much or too (much); in nominal compn. (a), rarely also in verbal compn. see (b) ■ (a) with nouns & adj.: ˚āsanna too near; ˚uttama the very highest; ˚udaka too much water; ˚khippa too soon; ˚dāna excessive alms giving ˚dāruṇa very cruel; ˚dīgha extremely long; ˚dūra too near deva a super-god ˚pago too early; ˚bālha too much; ˚bhāra a too heavy load; ˚manāpa very lovely; ˚manohara very charming; ˚mahant too great; ˚vikāla very inconvenient ˚vela a very long time; ˚sambādha too tight, etc. etc. (b.) with verb: atibhuñjati to eat excessively.
III. A peculiar use of ati is its’ function in reduplication-compounds, expressing “and, adding further, and so on, even more, etc.” like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (ā), anu, ava, paṭi, vi (e.g. khaṇḍâkhaṇḍa seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi, chiddâvacchidda, angapaccanga cuṇṇavicuṇṇa). In this function it is however restricted to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide range of ā (q.v.), the only phrases being the foll. viz cakkāticakkaṃ mañcātimañcaṃ bandhati to heap carts upon carts, couches upon couches (in order to see a procession) Vin iv.360 (Bdhgh); Ja ii.331; Ja iv.81; Dhp-a iv.61 -devātideva god upon god, god and more than a god (see atideva); mānātimāna all kinds of conceit; vaṅkātivaṅka crooked all over Ja i.160 ■ IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pāli, where the corresp. expression in later Sk. shows abhi. See e.g. the foll. cases for comparison: accuṇha ati-jāta, ˚pīḷita ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati, ˚veṭheti.
Note The contracted (assimilation-) form of ati before vowels is acc- (q.v.). See also for adv. use atiriva, ativiya atīva.
sk. ati = Gr. ε ̓́τι moreover, yet, and; Lat. et and, Goth. ip; also connected with Gr. ατάρ but, Lat at but (= over, outside) Goth. appan
(adj.) too sour Dhp-a ii.85.
ati + ambila
a super-Arahant, one who surpasses even other Arahants Mil 277.
ati + arahant
(adj.) very powerful(?) Ja v.441 (˚bhesajja, medicin). Ati-unha
(adj.) too hot Pv-a 37 (˚ātapa glow). See also accuṇha (which is the usual form).
(adj.) by far the best or highest Vv-a 80.
too much water, excess of water Dhp-a i.52.
(adj.) only in loc. ˚e (adv.) too soon after sunrise, too early Vv-a 65 (laddhabhattatā eating too early).
to go past or beyond, see ger. aticca and pp. atīta.
ati + i
(pp.) more than done to, i.e. retaliated; paid back in an excessive degree AN i.62.
to pull too hard, to labour, trouble, drudge Vin iii.17.
ati + kaḍḍhati
(adj.) too black Vin iv.7.
ati + kaṇha
(adj.) very pitiful, extremely miserable Ja i.202; Ja iv.142; Ja vi.53.
ati + karuṇa
(ger.) pulling (right) through Ja v.173 (rajjuṃ, a rope, through the nostrils; v.l. BB. anti˚).
fr. atikassati ati + kṛṣ; Sk. atikṛṣya
in instr. atikālena adv. in very good time very early Vin i.70 (+ atidivā).
ati + kāla
passed beyond, passed by, gone by, elapsed; passed over, passing beyond, surpassing Ja ii.128 (tīṇi saṃvaccharāni); Dhp-a iii.133 (tayo vaye passed beyond the 3 ages of life); Pv-a 55 (māse ˚e after the lapse of a month), 74 (kati divasā ˚ā how many days have passed).
-mānusaka superhuman Iti 100; Pp 60; cp. BSk atikrānta-mānuṣyaka Mvu iii.321.
pp. of atikamati
(f.) transgressing, overstepping the bounds (of good behaviour), lawlessness Mil 122.
Der. abstr. fr. prec.
going over or further, passing beyond, traversing; fig. overcoming of, overstepping, failing against, transgression Dhp 191; Dhs 299; Pv-a 154 (katipayayojan˚), 159 (˚caraṇa sinful mode of life); Mil 158 (dur˚ hard to overcome); Sdhp 64.
Sk. atikrama
(adj.) exceeding Ja i.153.
atikkamaṇa + ka
(1) to go beyond, to pass over, to cross, to pass by. (2) to overcome, to conquer, to surpass to be superior to ■ Ja iv.141; Dhp 221 (Pot. ˚eyya overcome); Pv-a 67 (maggena: passes by). grd. atikkamanīya to be overcome DN ii.13 (an˚); Snp-a 568 (dur˚) ger. atikkamma DN ii.12 (surpassing); Iti 51 (māradheyyaṃ passing over), cp. vv.ll. under adhigayha; and atikkamitva going beyond, overcoming, transcending (J iv.139 (samuddaṃ); Pp 17; Ja i.162 (raṭṭhaṃ having left). Often to be trsl. as adv. “beyond”, e.g. pare beyond others Pv-a 15; Vasabhagāmaṃ beyond the village of V. Pv-a 168 ■ pp. atikkanta (q.v.).
ati + kamati
to make pass, to cause to pass over Ja i.151.
Caus. of atikkamati
(adv.) too soon Vin ii.284.
ati + khippa
(nt.) too much digging Ja ii.296.
ati + khaṇa(na)
(nt.) = prec. Ja ii.296.
(adj.) in cāpâtikhīṇa broken bow (?) Dhp 156 (expld. at Dhp-a iii.132 as cāpāto atikhīṇā cāpā vinimmuttā).
ati + khīṇa
(-˚) (adj.) going over, overcoming, surmounting, getting over Snp 250 (sanga˚); Dhp 370 (id.) Snp 795 (sīma˚, cp. Nd i.99), 1096 (ogha˚); Nd i.100 (atikkanta); Nd ii.180 (id.).
ati + ga
to go over, i.e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in pret. (aor. 3rd sg. accagā (q.v. and see gacchati 3) Snp 1040; Dhp 414 and accagamā (see gacchati 2) Vin ii.192; DN i.85; SN ii.205; DN-a i.236 (= abhibhavitvā pavatta). Also 3rd pl accaguṃ Iti 93, Iti 95.
ati + gacchati
to destroy, make perish, waste away Ja vi.211 (= atigālayati vināseti C. p. 215). Perhaps reading should be atigāḷheti (see atigāḷhita.
ati + gāḷeti, Caus. of galati, cp. Sk. vi-gālayati
(adj.) very tight or close, intensive Ja i.62. Cp. atigāḷhita.
ati + gāḷha 1
oppressed, harmed, overcome, defeated destroyed Ja v.401 (= atipīḷita C.).
pp. of atigāḷheti, Denom. fr. atigāḷha; cp. Sk. atigāhate to overcome
(adj.) very terrible or fierce Sdhp 285.
ati + ghora
(nt.) transgression Pv-a 159.
fr. aticarati
1. to go about, to roam about Pv ii.1215; Pv-a 57.
2. to transgress, to commit adultery Ja i.496. Cp. next.
ati + carati
one who transgresses, esp. a woman who commits adultery AN ii.61 (all MSS. read aticaritvā); iv.66 (T. aticarittā).
n. ag. of. aticarati
(f.) transgression, sin, adultery DN iii.190.
ati + cariyā
transgression Vv 158 (= aticca cāra Vv-a 72).
from aticarati
(adj. n.) transgressing, sinning, esp. as f. aticārinī an adulteress SN ii.259; SN iv.242; DN iii.190; AN iii.261; Pv ii.1214; Pv-a 151 (v.l. BB), 152; Vv-a 110.
from aticarati
(adj.) very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Mil 28.
ati + citra
(grd.) 1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Snp 519, Snp 529, Snp 531 Used adverbially = beyond, in access, more than usual exceedingly Snp 373, Snp 804 (= vassasataṃ atikkamitvā Nd i.120).
2. failing, transgressing, sinning, esp. committing adultery Ja v.424; Vv-a 72,
ger. of ati + eti, ati + i
to go on, only occurring in imper. aticchatha (bhante) “please go on, Sir”, asking a bhikkhu to seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing a gift in a civil way. [The interpretation given by Trenckner, as quoted by Childers, is from ati + iṣ “go and beg further on”. (Tr. Notes 65) but this would entail a meaning like “desire in excess”, since iṣ does not convey the notion of movement] Ja iii.462; Dhp-a iv.98 (T. aticcha, vv.ll. ˚atha); Vv-a 101; Mil 8 ■ Caus aticchāpeti to make go on, to ask to go further Ja iii.462. Cp. icchatā.
*Sk. ati-ṛcchati, ati + ṛ; cp. aṇṇava
a “super”-sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & colours Dhs-a 2.;
ati + chatta
(adj.) well-born, well behaved, gentlemanly Iti 14 (opp avajāta ).
ati + jāta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijāta
to pass over, cross, go beyond aor. accatari SN iv.157 = Iti 57 (˚āri).
ati + tarati
(adj.) very, or quite empty Sdhp 430.
ati + tuccha
(f.) extreme joy Ja i.207.
ati + tuṭṭhi
(adj.) beyond compare, incomparable Thag 831 = Snp 561 (= tulaṃ atīto nirupamo ti attho Snp-a 455).
ati + tula
(adj.) dissatisfied, unsatisfied Ja i.440; Dhp 48.
a + titta
(nt.) “that which is not a fordingplace”. i.e. not the right way, manner or time; as ˚wrongly in the wrong way Ja i.343; Ja iv.379; Ja vi.241; Dhp-a iii.347; DN-a i.38.
a + tittha
a guest, stranger, newcomer DN i.117 (= āgantuka-navaka pāhuṇaka DN-a i.288); AN ii.68; AN iii.45, AN iii.260; Ja iv.31, Ja iv.274; Ja v.388; Kp viii.7 (n’ atthi assa ṭhiti yamhi vā tamhi vā divase āgacchatī ti atithi Kp-a 222); Vv-a 24 (= āgantuka).
Sk. atithi of at = at, see aṭati; orig. the wanderer, cp. Vedic atithin wandering
(nt.) too generous giving, an excessive gift of alms Mil 277; Pv-a 129, Pv-a 130.
ati + dāna
(adj.) very cruel, extremely fierce Pv iii.73.
Sk. atidāruṇa, ati + dāruṇa
(f.) higher doctrine, super knowledge (?) Vin i.63 = Vin ii.4 (+ adhisīla; should we read adhi-diṭṭhi?)
ati + diṭṭhi
(adv.) late in the day, in the afternoon Vin i.70 (+ atikālena ); SN i.200; AN iii.117.
ati + divā
to give further explanation, to explain in detail Mil 304.
ati + disati
(adj.) too long, extremely long Ja iv.165; Pv ii.102; Vv-a 103 (opp. atirassa ).
ati + dīgha
great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering Pv-a 65; Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavāca Pv-a 15 ati belongs to the whole cpd., i.e. of very hurtful speech.
ati + dukkha
(adj.) very or too far Vin i.46; Ja ii.154; Pv ii.965 = Dhp-a iii.220 (vv.ll. suvidūre); Pv-a 42 (opp. accāsanna ).
ati + dūra
a super god, god above gods, usually Ep. of the Buddha SN i.141; Thag 489; Nd ii.307 (cp adhi˚); Mil 277. atidevadeva id. Mil 203, Mil 209. devātideva god over the gods (of the Buddha) Nd ii.307 a.
ati + deva
to beat a drum too hard Ja i.283; pp. atidhanta ibid.
ati + dhamati
oversatiation Ja ii.193.
ati + dhāta + ta
to run past, to outstrip or get ahead of SN iii.103; SN iv.230; MN iii.19; Iti 43; Mil 136; Snp-a 21.
ati + dhāvati 1
indulging too much in the use of the “dhonas”, i.e. the four requisites of the bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use or normal application of the requisites (expln. at Dhp-a iii.344, cp dhona) Dhp 240 = Ne 129.
ati + dhonacārin
to pass time AN i.206; Mil 345.
BSk. atināmayati, e.g. Divy 82, Divy 443; ati + nāmeti
to rebuke too much Ja vi.417.
ati + niggaṇhāti
(adj.) too low, only in phrase cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ Brahmaloko atinīcako the World is too narrow and Heaven too low (to comprehend the merit of a person, as sign of exceeding merit) Dhp-a i.310; Dhp-a iii.310 = Vv-a 68.
ati + nīcaka
to bring up to, to fetch, to provide with Vin ii.180 (udakaṃ).
ati + neti
(adj. too clever Dhp-a iv.38.
ati + paṇḍita
(f.) too much cleverness Dhp-a ii.29.
abstr. of atipaṇḍita
(nt.) too much alms-giving Pv ii.943 (= atidāna Pv-a 130).
ati + pa + dāna
too great a delay, excessive tarrying Ja i.64; Ja ii.93.
ati + p.
excess in liberality Dhp-a iii.11.
ati + pariccāga
to look for, catch sight of, discover MN iii.132 (nāgaṃ).
ati + passati; cp. Sk. anupaśyati
attack, only in phrase pāṇātipāta destruction of life, slaying, killing, murder DN i.4 (pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, refraining from killing, the first of the dasasīla or decalogue); DN-a i.69 (= pāṇavadha, pāṇaghāta); Snp 242; Kp ii. cp. Kp-a 26; Pv-a 28, Pv-a 33 etc.
ati + pat
(adj.-n.) one who attacks or destroys Snp 248; Ja vi.449 (in war nāgakkhandh˚ = hatthikkhande khaggena chinditvā C.); Pv-a 27 (pāṇ˚).
to destroy SN v.453; Dhp 246 (v.l. for atimāpeti, q.v.). Cp. paripāteti.
Denom. fr. atipāta
(adj.) too much beloved, too dear, too lovely Dhp-a v.70.
ati + pīṇita
pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed Ja v.401 (= atigāḷhita).
ati + pīḷita, cp. Sk. abhipīḍita
(adv.) too early, usually elliptical = it is too early (with inf. carituṃ etc.) DN i.178; MN i.84; AN iv.35.
cp. Sk. atiprage
tied to, coupled Ja i.192 = Vin iv.5.
pp. of atibandhati; cp. Sk. anubaddha
to tie close to, to harness on, to couple Ja i.191 sq ■ pp atibaddha q.v.
ati + bandhati; cp. Sk. anubandhati
(adj.) very thick Ja vi.365.
ati + bahala
(adj.) very great or strong Pv-a 178; nt. adv. ˚ṃ too much DN i.93, DN i.95; MN i.253.
ati + bāḷha
to drive away, to pull out Ja iv.366 (= abbāheti).
ati + bāheti, Caus. to bṛh1; cp. Sk. ābṛhati
a greater Brahma, a super-god Mil 277; Dhp-a ii.60 (Brahmuṇā a. greater than B.).
ati + brahmā
to shout out, roar, cry Ja v.361 (= mahāsaddaṃ nicchāreti).
ati + brūheti, bṛh2, but by C. taken incorrectly to brū; cp. Sk. abhi-bṛṇhayati
a very dear nephew Ja i.223.
ati + bh ■ p.
too heavy a load Mil 277 (˚ena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati).
ati + bhāra
(adj.) too heavily weighed, overloaded Vtn iv.47.
ati + bhārita
(adj.) too serious Dhp-a i.70.
to eat too much, to overeat Mil 153.
ati + bhuñjati
(nt.) overeating Mil 135.
ati + bhutta
to excel, overcome, to get the better of, to deceive Ja i.163 (= ajjhottharati vañceti C.).
ati + bhavati, cp. Sk. atibhavati & abhibhavati
to despise, slighten, neglect Snp 148 (= Kp-a 247 atikkamitvā maññati); Dhp 365, Dhp 366; Ja ii.347; Pv i.76 (˚issaṃ, v.l. ˚asiṃ = atikkamitvā avamaññiṃ Pv-a 37); Pv-a 36; Sdhp 609.
Sk. atimanyate; ati + man
(f.) arrogance, contempt, neglect Mil 122.
abstr. to prec., cp. atimāna
(adj.) very lovely Pv-a 77 (+ abhirūpa).
ati + manāpa
(adj.) very charming Ja i.60.
ati + manorama
(adj.) very charming Pv-a 46.
ati + manohara
(adj.) too slow, too weak Sdhp 204, Sdhp 273, Sdhp 488.
ati + manda
to favour too much, to spoil or fondle Ja ii.316.
ati + mamāyati, cp. Sk. atīmamāyate in diff. meaning = envy
(adj.) very or too great Ja i.221; Pv-a 75.
ati + mahant
high opinion (of oneself), pride, arrogance, conceit, MN i.363; Snp 853 (see expln. at Nd i.233), 942, 968; Ja vi.235; Nd i.490; Mil 289. Cp. atimaññanā.
Sk. atimāna, ati + māna
(adj.) DN ii.45 (thaddha + ); Snp 143 (an˚) 244; Kp-a 236.
fr. atimāna
to injure, destroy, kill; only in the stock phrase pāṇaṃ atimāpeti (with v.l. atipāteti) to destroy life, to kill DN i.52 (v.l. ˚pāteti) = DN-a i.159 (: pāṇaṃ hanati pi parehi hanāpeti either to kill or incite others to murder); MN i.404, MN i.516; SN iv.343; AN iii.205 (correct T. reading atimāteti; v.l. pāteti); Dhp 246 (v.l. ˚pāteti) = Dhp-a iii.356 (: parassa jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati).
ati + māpeti, Caus. of mī, mināte, orig. meaning “to do damage to”
(adj.) very talkative, a chatterbox Ja i.418; Dhp-a ii.70. atimukharatā (f. abstr.) ibid.
ati + mukhara
Name of a plant, Gaertnera Racemosa Vin ii.256 = MN i.32; Mil 338.
Sk. atimuktaka
(adj.) very soft, mild or feeble Ja i.262.
ati + muduka
(ati + yakkha] a sorcerer, wizard, fortuneteller Ja vi.502 (C.: bhūtavijjā ikkhaṇīka).
(adj.) one who asks too much Vin iii.147.
ati + yācaka
(f.) asking or begging too much Vin iii.147.
ati + yācanā
(adv.) late in the night, at midnight Ja i.436 (opp. atipabhāte).
ati + ratti; cp. atidivā
(adj.) too short (opp. atidīgha ) Vin iv.7; Ja vi.457; Vv-a 103.
ati + rassa
a higher king, the greatest king, more than a king Dhp-a ii.60; Mil 277.
ati + rājā
to be left over, to remain Sdhp 23, Sdhp 126.
ati + riccati, see ritta
(adj.) left over, only as neg. an˚; applied to food, i.e. food which is not the leavings of a meal, fresh food Vin i.213 sq, 238; ii.301 iv.82 sq., 85.
pp. of ati + rlc, see ritta
(ati-r-iva) see ativiya.
(adj.) surplus, too much; exceeding, excessive, in a high degree extra Vin i.255; Ja i.72 (˚padasata), 109; 441 (in higher positions); Mil 216; Dhs-a 2; Dhp-a ii.98.
-cīvara an extra robe Vin i.289. -pāda exceeding the worth of a pāda, more than a pāda, Vin iii.47.
Sk. atireka, ati + ric, rinakti; see ritta
(f.) excessiveness, surplus, excess Kv 607.
abstr. to prec.
to shine magnificently (trs.) to outshine, to surpass in splendour DN ii.208; Dhp 59; Pv ii.958 Mil 336 (+ virocati ); Dhp-a i.446 (= atikkamitvā virocati ); iii.219; Pv-a 139 (= ativiya virocati ).
ati + ruc
(adj.) very crooked Ja i.160 (vankâtivankin crooked all over; cp. ati iii.).
ati + vankin
to surpass, excel DN ii.267.
ati + vaṇṇati
passed beyond, surpassed, overcome (act. & pass.), conquered Snp 1133 (bhava˚); Nd ii.21 (= atikkanta, vītivatta); Ja v.84 (bhaya˚) Mil 146, Mil 154.
pp. of ativattati: Sk. ativṛtta
to pass, pass over, go beyond; to overcome, get over; conquer Vin ii.237 (samuddo velaṃ n’); SN ii.92 (saṃsāraṃ); iv.158 (id.) Iti 9 (saṃsāraṃ) = AN ii.10 = Nd ii.172a; Thag 412; Ja i.58, Ja i.280 Ja iv.134; Ja vi.113, Ja vi.114; Pv-a 276 ■ pp. ativatta (q.v.).
ati + vṛt, Sk. ativartate
one who insults or offends Ja v.266 (isīnaṃ ativattāro dharusavācāhi atikkamitvā vattāro C.).
Sk. *ativaktṛ, n. ag. to ati-vacati; cp. ativākya
one who overcomes or is to be overcome Snp 785 (svātivattā = durativattā duttarā duppatarā Nd i.76).
Sk. *ativartṛ, n. ag. to ati-vattati
(adj.) being under somebody’s rule, dependent upon (c. gen.) Dhp 74 (= vase vattati Dhp-a ii.79).
ati + vasa fr. vas
to rain down on, upon or into Thag 447 = Vin ii.240.
ati + vassati, cp. Sk. abhivarṣati
(nt.) abuse, blame, reproach Dhp 320, Dhp 321 (= aṭṭha-anariyavohāra-vasena pavattaṃ vītikkama-vacanaṃ Dhp-a iv.3) Ja vi.508.
ati + vac, cp. Sk. ativāda, fr. ati + vad
too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a gale, storm Mil 277.
ati + vāta
to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Mil 333 (vāyati; cp. abhivāyati ibid 385).
ati + vāyati
carrying, carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys i.e. a conductor, guide Thag 616 (said of sīla, good character); Ja v.433 ■ Cp. ativāhika.
fr. ati + vah, cp. Sk. ativahati & abhivāha
one who belongs to a conveyance, one who conveys or guides, a conductor (of a caravan Ja v.471, Ja v.472 (˚purisa).
fr. ativāha
(adj.) at a very inconvenient time, much too late DN i.108 (= suṭṭhu vikāla DN-a i.277).
ati + vikāla
to pierce, to enter into (fig.), to see through, only in phrase paññāya ativijjha (ger.) passati to recognise in all details MN i.480; SN v.226; AN ii.178.
Sk. atividhyati, ati + vyadh
(adv.) = ati + iva, orig. “much-like” like an excess = excessive-ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atīva (q.v.) ■ (2) ati + iva with epenthetic r: atiriva DN ii.264 (v.l. SS. atīva); Snp 679, Snp 680, Snp 683; Snp-a 486; (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva) = ativiya Ja i.61, Ja i.263; Dhp-a ii.71 (a. upakāra of great service); Pv-a 22, Pv-a 56, Pv-a 139.
Sk. atīva
(f.) Name of a plant Vin i.201; Vin iv.35.
Sk. ativiṣā
(adj.) too abundant, in ˚vākya one who talks too much, a chatterbox Ja v.204.
ati + vissaṭṭha
(adj.) very, or too confidential Ja i.86.
ati + vissāsika
(adj.) very famous, renowned Sdhp 473.
ati + vissuta
to wrap over, to cover, to enclose; to press, oppress, stifle Vin ii.101; Ja v.452 (-ativiya veṭheti piḷeti C.).
ati + veṣṭ; cp. Sk. abhiveṣṭate
(adj.) excessive (of time); nt. adv. ˚ṃ a very long time; excessively DN i.19 (= atikālaṃ aticiran ti attho DN-a i.113); MN i.122; Snp 973 (see expln. at Nd i.504); Ja iii.103 = Nd i.504.
ati + vela
(adj.) too much attached to worldly matters SN v.263.
ati + līna
(adj.) too wretched, very miserable Sdhp 409.
ati + lūkha
(adj.) too hairy, having too much hair Ja vi.457 (opp. aloma).
ati + loma
(˚cāra?) wandering about too much Mil 277.
ati + sañcāra
(adj.) too subtle Dhp-a iii.326.
ati + saṇha
(adj.) extremely peaceful Sdhp 496.
ati + santa1
(adj.) too tight, crowded or narrow Dhp-a i.310; Dhp-a iii.310 = Vv-a 68; cp. atinīcaka. f. abstr. atisambādhatā the state of being too narrow Ja i.7.
ati + sambādha
superiority, distinction, excellence, abundance Vv-a 135 (= visesa); Pv-a 86; Dāvs ii.62.
cp. Sk. atiśaya, fr. ati + śī
to surpass, excel; ger. atisayitvā Mil 336 (+ atikkamitvā).
ati + śī
(adj.) transgressing, sinning Ja iv.6; cp. atisāra.
fr. atisarati; cp. accasara
to go too far, to go beyond the limit, to overstep, transgress, aor. accasari (q.v.) Snp 8 sq (opp. paccasari; C. atidhāvi); Ja v.70 and atisari Ja iv.6. ger. atisitvā (for *atisaritvā) DN i.222; SN iv.94; AN i.145 AN v.226, AN v.256; Snp 908 (= Nd i.324 atikkamitvā etc.).
ati + sṛ;
(adv.) very late, late in the evening Ja v.94.
ati + sāyaṃ
going too far, overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin i.55 (sātisāra), 326 (id.); SN i.74; MN iii.237; Snp 889 (atisāraṃ diṭṭhiyo = diṭṭhigatāni Nd i.297; going beyond the proper limits of the right faith) Ja v.221 (dhamm˚), 379; Dhp-a i.182; Dhs-a 28. See also atisara.
fr. ati + sṛ; see atisarati. Cp. Sk. atisāra in diff. meaning but BSk. atisāra (sâtisāra) in the same meaning.
(adj.) very loose, shaky or weak AN iii.375.
ati + sithila
(adj.) too cold Dhp-a ii.85.
ati + sīta
(adj.) very cold Ja iii.55.
ati + sītala
(adj.) very pleased Sdhp 323.
ati + haṭṭha
to carry over, to bring over, bring, draw over Vin ii.209; Vin iv.264; SN i.89; Ja i.292; Ja v.347. Caus. atiharāpeti to cause to bring over, bring in, reap collect, harvest Vin ii.181; Vin iii.18; Mil 66; Dhp-a iv.77. See also atihita.
ati + hṛ;
brought over (from the field into the house), harvested, borne home Thag 381 (vīhi).
ati + hṛ; pp. of atiharati, hita unusual for hata, perhaps through analogy with Sk. abhi + dhā
(adj.) very poor or destitute AN iv.282, AN iv.287; AN iv.323 (opp. accogāḷha ).
ati + hīna
to despise Ja iv.331 (= atimaññati C.).
ati + hīḍ
(adj.-n.) 1. (temporal) past, gone by (cp. accaya 1) (a adj.; atītaṃ addhānaṃ in the time which is past SN iii.86; AN iv.219; AN v.32 ■ Pv ii.1212 (atītānaṃ, scil. attabhāvāuaṃ pariyanto na dissati); khaṇâtīta with the right moment past Dhp 315 = Snp 333; atītayobbana he who is past youth or whose youth is past Snp 110 ■ (b) nt the past: atīte (loc.) once upon a time Ja i.98 etc. atītaṃ āhari he told (a tale of) the past, i.e. a Jātaka Ja i.213 Ja i.218, Ja i.221 etc ■ SN i.5 (atītaṃ nânusocati); AN iii.400 (a eko anto); Snp 851, Snp 1112. In this sense very frequently combd. with or opposed to anāgata the future & paccuppanna the present, e.g. atītânāgate in past & future SN ii.58; Snp 373; Ja vi.364. Or all three in ster. combn. atīt’-anāgata-paccuppanna (this the usual order) DN iii.100 DN iii.135; SN ii.26, SN ii.110, SN ii.252; SN iii.19, SN iii.47, SN iii.187; SN iv.4 sq.; 151 sq.; AN i.264 sq., 284; ii.171, 202; iii.151; v.33; Iti 53 Nd ii.22; but also occasionally atīta paccuppanna anāgata e.g. Pv-a 100.
2. (modal) passed out of, having overcome or surmounted, gone over, free from (cp. accaya 2; SN i.97 (maraṇaṃ an˚ not free from death), 121 (sabbavera-bhaya˚); AN ii.21; AN iii.346 (sabbasaṃyojana˚); Snp 373 (kappa˚), 598 (khaya˚, of the moon = ūnabhāvaṃ atīta Snp-a 463); Thag 413 (c. abl.)
3. (id.) overstepping having transgressed or neglected (cp. accaya 3) Dhp 176 (dhammaṃ).
-aṃsa the past (= atīta koṭṭhāse, atikkantabhavesū ti attho Thag-a 233) DN ii.222; DN iii.275; Thig 314. -ārammaṇa state of mind arising out of the past Dhs 1041.
Sk. atīta, ati + ita, pp. of i. Cp. accaya & ati eti
(adj.-n.) not seeing the shore Ja i.46; Ja vi.440; also as atīradassanī (f.) Ja v.75 (nāvā). Cp. DN i.222.
a + tīra + dassin
(indecl.) very much, exceedingly Ja ii.413; Mvu 33, Mvu 2 etc.
ati + iva, see also ativiya
(adv.) hence, now, therefore SN i.15; MN i.498; Mil 87; Ja v.398 (= tato C.).
Sk. ataḥ
a class of jugglers or acrobats(?) Mil 191.
etym.?
that which has been taken up, assumed. atta-daṇḍa, he who has taken a stick in hand, a violent person, SN i.236; SN iv.117; Snp 630, Snp 935; Dhp 406. Attañjaha, rejecting what had been assumed, Snp 790. Attaṃ pahāya Snp 800. The opp is niratta, that which has not been assumed, has been thrown off, rejected. The Arahant has neither atta nor niratta (Snp 787, Snp 858, Snp 919), neither assumption nor rejection he keeps an open mind on all speculative theories See Nd i.82, Nd i.90, Nd i.107, Nd i.352; Nd ii.271; Snp-a 523; Dhp-a iv.180 for the traditional exegesis. As legal t. t. attādānaṃ ādīyati is to take upon oneself the conduct, before the Chapter, of a legal point already raised. Vin ii.247 (quoted v.91).
ā + d + ta; that is, pp. of ādadāti with the base form reduced to d. Idg *d-to; cp. Sk. ātta
see attan.
see upatta.
Sk. akta, pp. of añjati
(m.) & atta (the latter is the form used in compn.) ■ I Inflection. (1) of attan- (n. stem); the foll. cases are the most freq.: acc. attānaṃ DN i.13, DN i.185; SN i.24; Snp 132 Snp 451 ■ gen. dat. attano Snp 334, Snp 592 etc., also as abl AN iii.337 (attano ca parato ca as regards himself and others) ■ instr. abl. attanā SN i.24; Snp 132, Snp 451; Dhp-a ii.75; Pv-a 15, Pv-a 214 etc. On use of attanā see below iii.1 C ■ loc. attani SN v.177; AN i.149 (attanī metri causa); ii.52 (anattani); iii.181; MN i.138; Snp 666, Snp 756 Snp 784; Vb 376 (an˚) ■ (2) of atta- (a-stem) we find the foll. cases: acc. attaṃ Dhp 379 ■ instr. attena SN iv.54 ■ abl. attato SN i.188; Pts i.143; Pts ii.48; Vb 336.
Meanings. 1. The soul as postulated in the animistic theories held in N India in the 6th and 7th cent. B. C It is described in the Upanishads as a small creature, in shape like a man, dwelling in ordinary times in the heart It escapes from the body in sleep or trance; when it returns to the body life and motion reappear. It escapes from the body at death, then continues to carry on an everlasting life of its own. For numerous other details see Rh. D. Theory of Soul in the Upanishads JR A S 1899. Bt. India 251–255. Buddhism repudiated all such theories, thus differing from other religions. Sixteen such theories about the soul DN i.31. Seven other theories DN i.34. Three others DN i.186/7. A ʻsoulʼ according to general belief was some thing permanent, unchangeable, not affected by sorrow SN iv.54 = Kv 67; Vin i.14; MN i.138 See also MN i.233; MN iii.265, MN iii.271; SN ii.17, SN ii.109; SN iii.135; AN i.284; AN ii.164, AN ii.171; AN v.188; SN iv.400. Cp. ātuman, tuma puggala, jīva, satta, pāṇa and nāma-rūpa.
2. Oneself, himself, yourself. Nom. attā, very rare. SN i.71, SN i.169; SN iii.120; AN i.57, AN i.149 (you yourself know whether that is true or false. Cp. Manu viii.84. Here attā comes very near to the European idea of conscience. But conscience as a unity or entity is not accepted by Buddhism Snp 284; Dhp 166, Dhp 380; Mil 54 (the image, outward appearance, of oneself). Acc. attānaṃ SN i.44 (would not give for himself, as a slave) AN i.89; Snp 709. Acc. attaṃ Dhp 379. Abl. attato as oneself SN i.188; Pts i.143; Pts ii.48 Vb 336. Loc. attani AN i.149; AN iii.181; Snp 666, Snp 784 Instr. attanā SN i.57 = Dhp 66; SN i.75; SN ii.68; AN i.53 AN iii.211; AN iv.405; Dhp 165. On one’s own account, spontaneously SN iv.307; SN v.354; AN i.297; AN ii.99, AN ii.218; AN iii.81; Ja i.156; Pv-a 15, Pv-a 20. In composition with numerals attadutiya himself and one other DN ii.147; ˚catuttha with himself as fourth MN i.393; AN iii.36; ˚pañcama Dpvs viii.2; ˚sattama Ja i.233; ˚aṭṭhama Vv-a 149 (as atta-naṭṭhama Vv 3413), & ˚aṭṭhamaka Mil 291.;
anattā (n. and predicative adj.) not a soul, without a soul. Most freq. in combn. with dukkha & anicca-(1) as noun: SN iii.141 (˚anupassin); iv.49; v.345 (˚saññin); AN ii.52 = Pts ii.80 (anattani anattā; opp. to anattani attā the opinion of the micchādiṭṭhigatā sattā); Dhp 279; Pts ii.37, Pts ii.45 sq. (˚anupassanā), 106 (yaṃ aniccañ ca dukkhañ ca taṃ anattā); Dhp-a iii.406 (˚lakkhaṇa) ■ (2) as adj (pred.): SN iv.152 sq.; SN iv.166; SN iv.130 sq., 148 sq. Vin i.13 = SN iii.66 = Nd ii.680 Q 1; SN iii.20 sq.; 178 sq., 196 sq.; sabbe dhammā anattā Vin v.86; SN iii.133 SN iv.28, SN iv.401.
-attha one’s own profit or interest Snp 75; Nd ii.23; Ja iv.56, Ja iv.96; otherwise as atta-d-attha, e.g. Snp 284. -atthiya looking after one’s own needs Thag 1097. -ādhipaka master of oneself, self-mastered AN i.150. -adhipateyya selfdependence self-reliance, independence AN i.147. -ādhīna independent DN i.72. -ānudiṭṭhi speculation about souls SN iii.185; SN iv.148; AN iii.447; Snp 1119; Pts i.143; Vb 368; Mil 146. -ānuyogin one who concentrates his attention on himself Dhp 209; Dhp-a iii.275. -ānuvāda blaming oneself AN ii.121; Vb 376. -uññā self-humiliation Vb 353 (+ att-avaññā). -uddesa relation to oneself Vin iii.149 (= attano atthāya), also ˚ika ibid. 144. -kata self-made SN i.134 (opp. para˚). -kāma love of self AN ii.21; adj. a lover of “soul”, one who cares for his own soul SN i.75. -kāra individual self, fixed individuality oneself (cp. ahaṃkāra) DN i.53 (opp. para˚); AN iii.337 (id.) DN-a i.160; as nt. at Ja v.401 in the sense of service (self-doing”, slavery) (attakārāni karonti bhattusu). -kilamatha self-mortification DN iii.113; SN iv.330; SN v.421; MN iii.230. -garahin self-censuring Snp 778. -gutta selfguarded Dhp 379. -gutti watchfulness as regards one’s self, self-care AN ii.72. -ghañña self-destruction Dhp 164 -ja proceeding from oneself Dhp 161 (pāpa). -ñū knowing oneself AN iv.113, cp. DN iii.252. -(n)tapa self-mortifying self-vexing DN iii.232 = AN ii.205 (opp. paran˚); MN i.341 MN i.411; MN ii.159; Pp 55, Pp 56. -daṇḍa see atta1. -danta selfrestrained self-controlled Dhp 104, Dhp 322. -diṭṭhi speculation concerning the nature of the soul Nd i.107; Snp-a 523 Snp-a 527. -dīpa relying on oneself, independent, founded on oneself (+ attasaraṇa, opp. añña˚) DN ii.100 = DN iii.42; SN v.154; Snp 501 (= attano guṇe eva attano dīpaṃ katvā Snp-a 416). -paccakkha only in instr. ˚ena by or with his own presence, i.e. himself Ja v.119. -paccakkhika eye-witness Ja v.119. -paccatthika hostile to oneself Vin ii.94, Vin ii.96. -paṭilābha acquisition of a personality DN i.195 (tayo: oḷārika, manomaya, arūpa). -paritāpana self-chastisement, mortification DN iii.232 = AN ii.205; MN i.341; Pv-a 18, Pv-a 30. -parittā charm (protection) for oneself Vin ii.110. -paribhava disrespect for one’s own person Vb 353. -bhāva one’s own nature (1) person, personality individuality, living creature; form, appearance [cp. Dhs trsl. LXXI and BSk. ātmabhāva body Divy 70, Divy 73 (˚pratilambha), 230; Sp. Avs i.162 (pratilambha), 167 171] Vin ii.238 (living beings, forms); SN v.442 (bodily appearance); AN i.279 (oḷārika a substantial creature) ii.17 (creature); Dhp-a ii.64, Dhp-a ii.69 (appearance); Snp-a 132 (personality) ■ (2) life, rebirth AN i.134 sq.; AN iii.412; Dhp-a ii.68; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 15, Pv-a 166 (atītā ˚ā former lives). ˚ṃ pavatteti to lead a life, to live Pv-a 29, Pv-a 181. Thus in cpd. paṭilābha assumption of an existence, becoming reborn as an individual Vin ii.185; Vin iii.105; DN iii.231; MN iii.46; SN ii.255, SN ii.272, SN ii.283; SN iii.144; AN ii.159, AN ii.188 AN iii.122 sq ■ (3) character, quality of heart Snp 388 (citta Snp-a 374); Ja i.61. -rūpa “of the form of self” self-like only in instr. ˚ena as adv. by oneself, on one’s own account, for the sake of oneself SN iv.97; AN ii.120 -vadha self-destruction SN ii.241; AN ii.73. -vāda theory of (a persistent) soul DN iii.230; MN i.66; DN ii.58; SN ii.3 SN ii.245 sq.; SN iii.103, SN iii.165, SN iii.203; SN iv.1 sq., 43 sq., 153 sq. Pts i.156 sq.; Vb 136, Vb 375. For var. points of an “attavādic” doctrine see Index to Saṃyutta Nikāya. -vyābādha personal harm or distress self-suffering, one’s own disaster (opp. para˚) MN i.369; SN iv.339 = AN i.157; AN ii.179. -vetana supporting oneself, earning one’s own living Snp 24. -sañcetanā self-perception, self-consciousness (opp. para˚) DN iii.231; AN ii.159. -sambhava originating from one’s self SN i.70; AN iv.312; Dhp 161 (pāpa) Thag 260. -sambhūta arisen from oneself Snp 272 -sammāpaṇidhi thorough pursuit or development of one’s personality AN ii.32; Snp 260, cp. Kp-a 132. -saraṇa see ˚dipa. -sukha happiness of oneself, self-success Dpvs i.66, cp. ii.11. -hita personal welfare one’s own good (opp. para˚) DN iii.233; AN ii.95 sq. -hetu for one’s own sake, out of self-consideration Snp 122; Dhp 328.
Vedic ātman, not to Gr. αἀνεμος = Lat. animus, but to Gr. ἀτμός steam, Ohg. ātum breath, Ags. aepm
(adj.) belonging to the soul, having a soul, of the nature of soul, soul-like; usually nt. anything of the nature of soul MN i.138 = Kv 67; MN i.297 MN ii.263; SN iii.78 (yaṃ kho anattaniyaṃ whatever has no soul), 127; iv.54 = Nd ii.680 F; SN iv.82 = SN iii.33 = Nd ii.680 Q 3; SN iv.168; SN v.6; Nd ii.680 D. Cp. Dhs trsl. XXXV ff.
from attā
delighted pleased, enraptured DN i.3, DN i.90 (an˚); ii.14; AN iii.337 AN iii.343; AN iv.344; Snp 45 = Dhp 328 (= upaṭṭhita-satt Dhp-a iv.29); Snp 995; Nd ii.24 (= tuṭṭha-mano haṭṭha-mano etc.) Vv 14; Pp 33 (an˚); Mil 18; DN-a i.52; Dhp-a i.89 (an˚-dhātuka displeased); Pv-a 23, Pv-a 132; Vv-a 21 (where Dhpāla gives two explns, either tuṭṭhamano or sakamano).
atta1 + mano, having an up raised mind. Bdhgh’s expln. is saka-mano DN-a i.255 = attā + mano. He applies the same expln. to attamanatā (at Dhs 9, see Dhs trsl 12) = attano manatā mentality of one’s self
(f.) satisfaction, joy, pleasure, transport of mind MN i.114; AN i.276; AN iv.62; Pp 18 (an˚) Dhs 9, Dhs 86, Dhs 418 (an˚); Pv-a 132; Vv-a 67 (an˚).
abstr. to prec.
(adj.) without shelter or protection Ja i.229; Mil 148, Mil 325; Thag-a 285.
a + tāṇa
(also aṭṭha, esp. in combns mentioned under 3) (m. & nt.) 1. interest, advantage, gain; (moral) good blessing, welfare; profit, prosperity, well-being MN i.111 (atthassa ninnetar, of the Buddha, bringer of good); SN iv.94 (id.); SN i.34 (attano a. one’s own welfare), 55 (id. 86, 102, 126 = AN ii.46 (atthassa patti); SN i.162 (attano ca parassa ca); ii.222 (id.); iv.347 (˚ṃ bhañjati destroy the good or welfare, always with musāvādena by lying cp. attha-bhañjanaka); AN i.61 (˚ṃ anubhoti to fare well to have a (good) result); iii.364 (samparāyika a. profit in the future life); AN v.223 sq. (anattho ca attho ca detriment & profit); Iti 44 (v.l. attā better); Snp 37, Snp 58 (= Nd ii.26, where the six kinds of advantages are enumd. as att˚ par˚ ubhay˚, i.e. advantage, resulting for oneself for others, for both; diṭṭhadhammik˚ samparāyik˚ param gain for this life, for a future life, and highest gain of all, i.e. Arahantship); Snp 331 (ko attho supitena what good is it to sleep = na hi sakkā supantena koci attho papuṇituṃ Snp-a 338; cp. ko attho supinena te Pv ii.61) Pv-a 30 (atthaṃ sādheti does good, results in good, 69 (samparāyikena atthena) ■ dat. atthāya for the good for the benefit of (gen.); to advantage, often eombd. with hitāya sukhāya, e.g. DN iii.211 sq.; Iti 79 ■ Kp viii.1 (to my benefit); Pv i.43 (= upakārāya Pv-a 18), ii.129 (to great advantage). See also below 6.
Sometimes in a more concrete meaning = riches, wealth e.g. Ja i.256 (= vaḍḍhiṃ C.); iii.394 (id.); Pv iv.14 (dhanaṃ Pv-a 219) ■ Often as-˚: att˚; one’s own wellfare, usually combd. with par˚; and ubhay˚; (see above SN ii.29; SN v.121; AN i.158, AN i.216; AN iii.63 sq.; AN iv.134; Snp 75 (att-aṭṭha, v.l. attha Nd2), 284 (atta-d-attha); uttam˚; the highest gain, the very best thing Dhp 386 (= arahatta Dhp-a iv.142); Snp 324 (= arahatta Snp-a 332); param˚ id. Nd ii.26; sad˚; one’s own weal DN ii.141; MN i.4; SN ii.29; SN v.145; AN i.144; sāttha (adj.) connected with advantage beneficial, profitable (of the Dhamma; or should we take it as “with the meaning, in spirit”? see sāttha DN i.62; SN v.352; AN ii.147; AN iii.152; Nd ii.316.
2. need want (c. instr.), use (for = instr.) SN i.37 (˚jāta when need has arisen, in need); Ja i.254; Ja iii.126, Ja iii.281; Ja iv.1; Dhp-a i.398 (n’ atthi eteh’ attho I have no use for them) Vv-a 250; Pv-a 24 (yāvadattha, adj. as much as is needed sufficient = anappaka).
3. sense, meaning, import (of a word), denotation, signification. In this application attha is always spelt aṭṭha in cpds. aṭṭh-uppatti and aṭṭha-kathā (see below). On term see also Cpd. 4 ■ SN iii.93 (atthaṃ vibhajati explain the sense); AN i.23 (id.), 60 (nīt˚ primary meaning, literal meaning; neyy˚ secondary or inferred meaning); ii.189 (˚ṃ ācikkhati to interpret); Snp 126 (˚ṃ pucchita asked the (correct) sense, the lit. meaning), 251 (˚ṃ akkhāti); Thag 374; attho paramo the highest sense the ultimate sense or intrinsic meaning Iti 98, cp. Cpd. 6, 81, 223; Mil 28 (paramatthato in the absolute sense) Mil 18 (atthato according to its meaning, opp. vyañjanato by letter, orthographically); Dhp-a ii.82; Dhp-a iii.175 Kp-a 81 (pad˚ meaning of a word); Snp-a 91 (id.); Pv-a 15 (˚ṃ vadati to explain, interpret), 16, 19 (hitatthadhammatā “fitness of the best sense”, i.e. practical application), 71. Very frequent in Commentary style at the conclusion of an explained passage as ti attho “this is the meaning”, thus it is meant, this is the sense, e.g. DN-a i.65; Dhp-a iv.140, Dhp-a iv.141; Pv-a 33, etc ■ 4. Contrasted with dhamma in the combn. attho ca dhammo ca it (attha) refers to the (primary, natural) meaning of the word, while dhamma relates to the (interpreted) meaning of the text, to its bearing on the norm and conduct; or one might say they represent the theoretical and practical side of the text (pāḷi) to be discussed, the “letter” and the “spirit”. Thus at AN i.69; AN v.222, AN v.254; Snp 326 (bhāsitatthañ ca pāḷidhammañ ca Snp-a 333); Iti 84 (duṭṭho atthaṃ na jānāti dhammaṃ na passati: he realises neither the meaning nor the importance); Dhp 363 (= bhāsitatthañ c’ eva desanādhammañ ca); Ja ii.353; Ja vi.368; Nd ii.386 (meaning & proper nature); Pv iii.96 (but expld. by Pv-a 211 as hita = benefit, good, thus referring it to above 1) For the same use see cpds. ˚dhamma, ˚paṭisambhidā, esp in adv. use (see under 6) Snp 430 (yen’ atthena for which purpose), 508 (kena atthena v.l. BB for T attanā), Ja i.411 (atthaṃ vā kāraṇaṃ vā reason and cause); Dhp-a ii.95 (+ kāraṇa(; Pv-a 11 (ayaṃ h’ ettha attho this is the reason why).
5. (in very wide application, covering the same ground as Lat. res & Fr. chose): (a) matter affair, thing, often untranslatable and simply to be given as “this” or “that” SN ii.36 (ekena-padena sabbo attho vutto the whole matter is said with one word); Ja i.151 (taṃ atthaṃ the matter); ii.160 (imaṃ a. this); vi.289 (taṃ atthaṃ pakāsento); Pv-a 6 (taṃ atthaṃ pucchi asked it), 11 (visajjeti explains it), 29 (vuttaṃ atthaṃ what had been said), 82 (id.) ■ (b) affair, cause, case (cp. aṭṭa2 and Lat. causa) Dhp 256, Dhp 331; Mil 47 (kassa atthaṃ dhāresi whose cause do you support, with whom do you agree?). See also alamattha.
6. Adv. use of oblique cases in the sense of a prep.: (a) dat. atthāya for the sake of, in order to, for Ja i.254 dhan’ atthāya for wealth kim˚ what for, why?), 279; ii.133; iii.54; Dhp-a ii.82; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 78 ■ (b) acc. atthaṃ on account of, in order to, often instead of an infinitive or with another inf. substitute Ja i.279 (kim˚); iii.53 (id.); i.253; ii.128 Dpvs vi.79; Dhp-a i.397; Pv-a 32 (dassan˚ in order to see), 78, 167, etc ■ (c) abl. atthā Ja iii.518 (pitu atthā = atthāya C.) ■ (d) loc. atthe instead of, for Vv-a 10; Pv-a 33; etc.
anattha (m. & nt.) 1. unprofitable situation or condition mischief, harm, misery, misfortune SN i.103; SN ii.196 (anatthāya saṃvattati); AN iv.96 (˚ṃ adhipajjati) Iti 84 (˚janano doso ill-will brings discomfort); Ja i.63, Ja i.196 Pp 37; Dhs 1060, Dhs 1231; Sdhp 87; DN-a i.52 (anatthajanano kodho, cp. Iti 83 and Nd ii.420 Q2); Dhp-a ii.73; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 114, Pv-a 199.
2. (= attha 3) incorrect sense false meaning, as adj. senseless (and therefore unprofitable no good, irrelevant) AN v.222, AN v.254 (adhammo ca) Dhp 100 (= aniyyānad˚īpaka Dhp-a ii.208); Snp 126 (expld. at Snp-a 180 as ahitaṃ).
-akkhāyin showing what is profitable DN iii.187. -attha riches Ja vi.290 (= atthabhūtaṃ atthaṃ C.). -antara difference between the (two) meanings Mil 158. At Thag 374, Oldenberg’s reading, but the v.l. (also C. reading atthandhara is much better = he who knows the (correct) meaning, esp. as it corresponds with dhamma-dhara (q.v.). -abhisamaya grasp of the proficient SN i.87 (see abhisamaya). -uddhāra synopsis or abstract of contents (“matter”) of the Vinaya Dpvs v.37. -upaparikkhā investigation of meaning, (+ dhamma-savanna) MN iii.175; AN iii.381 sq.; AN iv.221; AN v.126. -uppatti (aṭṭh˚) sense meaning, explanation, interpretation Ja i.89; DN-a i.242 Kp-a 216; Vv-a 197, Vv-a 203 (cp. pāḷito) Pv-a 2, Pv-a 6, Pv-a 78; etc -kāma (adj.) (a) well-wishing, a well-wisher, friend, one who is interested in the welfare of others (cp. Sk. arthakāma e.g. Bhagavadgīta ii.5: gurūn arthakāman) SN i.140 SN i.197, SN i.201 sq.; AN iii.143; DN iii.164 (bahuno janassa a., hitakāmo); Ja i.241; Pv iv.351; Pv-a 25; Snp-a 287 (an˚). (b) one who is interested in his own gain or good, either in good or bad sense (= greedy) SN i.44; Pv-a 112. -kathā (aṭṭha˚) exposition of the sense, explanation, commentary Ja v.38, Ja v.170; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 71, etc. freq. in Name of Com. -kara beneficial, useful Vin iii.149; Mil 321 -karaṇa the business of trying a case, holding court giving judgment (v.l. aṭṭa˚) DN ii.20; SN i.74 (judgment hall?). -kavi a didactic poet (see kavi) AN ii.230. -kāmin = ˚kāma, well-wishing Snp 986 (devatā atthakāminī) -kāraṇā (abl.) for the sake of gain DN iii.186. -kusala clever in finding out what is good or profitable Snp 143 (= atthacheka Kp-a 236). -cara doing good, busy in the interest of others, obliging SN i.23 (narānaṃ = “working out man’s salvation”). -caraka (adj.) one who devotes himself to being useful to others, doing good, one who renders service to others, e.g. an attendant, messenger agent etc. DN i.107 (= hitakāraka DN-a i.276); Ja ii.87 Ja iii.326; Ja iv.230; Ja vi.369. -cariyā useful conduct or behaviour DN iii.152, DN iii.190, DN iii.232; AN ii.32, AN ii.248; AN iv.219, AN iv.364. -ñu one who knows what is useful or who knows the (plain or correct) meaning of something (+ dhammaññū) DN iii.252; AN iii.148; AN iv.113 sq. -dassin intent upon the (moral good Snp 385 (= hitânupassin Snp-a 373). -dassimant one who examines a cause (cp. Sk. arthadarśika) Ja vi.286 (but expld. by C. as “saṇha-sukhuma-pañña” of deep insight one who has a fine and minute knowledge). -desanā interpretation, exegesis Mil 21 (dhamm˚). -dhamma “reason and morality”, see above n0. 3. ˚anusāsaka one who advises regarding the meaning and application of the Law, a professor of moral philosophy Ja ii.105; Dhp-a ii.71 -pada a profitable saying, a word of good sense, text motto AN ii.189; AN iii.356; Dhp 100. -paṭisambhidā knowledge of the meaning (of words) combd. with dhamma of the text or spirit (see above n0. 3) Pts i.132; Pts ii.150 Vb 293 sq. -paṭisaṃvedin experiencing good DN iii.241 (+ dhamma˚); AN i.151; AN iii.21. -baddha expecting some good from (c. loc.) Snp 382. -bhañjanaka breaking the welfare of, hurting Dhp-a iii.356 (paresaṃ of others, by means of telling lies, musāvādena). -majjha of beautiful waist Ja v.170 (= sumajjhā C.; reading must be faulty there is hardly any connection with attha; v.l. atta) -rasa sweetness (or substance, essence) of meaning (dhamma˚, vimutti˚) Nd ii.466; Pts ii.88, Pts ii.89. -vasa “dependence on the sense”, reasonableness, reason, consequence cause DN ii.285; MN i.464; MN ii.120; MN iii.150; SN ii.202 SN iii.93; SN iv.303; SN v.224; AN i.61, AN i.77, AN i.98; AN ii.240; AN iii.72, AN iii.169 AN iii.237; Dhp 289 (= kāraṇa Dhp-a iii.435); Iti 89; Snp 297; Ud 14. -vasika sensible Iti 89; Mil 406. -vasin bent on (one’s) aim or purpose Thag 539. -vādin one who speaks good, i.e. whose words are doing good or who speaks only useful speech, always in combn. with kāla bhūta˚ dhamma˚ DN i.4; DN iii.175; AN i.204; AN ii.22, AN ii.209 Pp 58; DN-a i.76 (expld. as “one who speaks for the sake of reaping blessings here and hereafter”). -saṃvaṇṇanā explanation, exegesis Pv-a 1. -saṃhita connected with good, bringing good, profitable, useful, salutary DN i.189; SN ii.223; SN iv.330; SN v.417; AN iii.196 sq., 244; Snp 722 (= hitena saṃhitaṃ Snp-a 500); Pp 58. -sandassana determination of meaning, definition Pts i.105. -siddhi profit, advantage, benefit Ja i.402; Pv-a 63.
Vedic artha from; ṛ; arti & ṛṇoti to reach attain or to proceed (to or from), thus originally result (or cause), profit, attainment. Cp. semantically Fr. chose Lat. causa
(nt.) home, primarily as place of rest & shelter, but in P. phraseology abstracted from the “going home”, i.e. setting of the sun, as disappearance going out of existence, annihilation, extinction Only in acc. and as ˚-in foll phrases: atthaṅgacchati to disappear, to go out of existence, to vanish Dhp 226 (= vināsaṃ natthibhāvaṃ gacchati Dhp-a iii.324), 384 (parikkhayaṃ gacchati); pp. atthaṅgata gone home, gone to rest, gone, disappeared; of the sun (= set): Ja i.175 (atthangate suriye at sunset); Pv-a 55 (id.) 216 (anatthangate s. before sunset) fig. Snp 472 (atthagata). 475 (id.) 1075 (= niruddha ucchinṇa vinaṭṭha anupādi-sesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā nibbuta); Iti 58; Dhs 1038; Vb 195 -atthagatatta (nt. abstr.) disappearance Snp-a 409. -atthaṅgama (atthagama passim) annihilation, disappearance opposed to samudaya (coming into existence) and synonymous with nirodha (destruction) DN i.34, DN i.37, DN i.183; SN iv.327; AN iii.326; Pts ii.4, Pts ii.6, Pts ii.39; Pp 52; Dhs 165 Dhs 265, Dhs 501, Dhs 579; Vb 105. -atthagamana (nt.) setting (of the sun) Ja i.101 (suriyass’ atthagamanā at sunset DN-a i.95 (= ogamana) ■ attha-gāmin, in phrase uday’ atthagāmin leading to birth and death (of paññā): see udaya. -atthaṃ paleti = atthangacchati (fig.) Snp 1074 (= atthangameti nirujjhati Nd ii.28) ■ Also atthamita (pp. of i ) set (of the sun) in phrase anatthamite suriye before sunset (with anatthangamite as v.l. at both pass. Dhp-a i.86; Dhp-a iii.127 ■ Cp. also abbhattha.
Vedic asta, of uncertain etym.
pres. 2nd pl. of atthi (q.v.).
spread, covered, spread over with (-˚) Vin i.265; Vin iv.287; Vin v.172 (also ˚an); AN iii.50; Pv-a 141.
pp. of attharati
(nt.) reason, cause; only in abl. atthattā according to the sense, by reason of, on account of Pv-a 189 (-˚).
abstr. fr. attha1
a rug (for horses, elephants etc.) DN i.7.
fr. attharati
a covering Ja i.9; DN-a i.87 ■ f. ˚ikā a layer Ja i.9; Ja v.280.
= atthara
(nt.) a covering, carpet, cover, rug Vin ii.291; AN ii.56; AN iii.53; Mvu 3, Mvu 20; Mvu 15, Mvu 40 Mvu 25, Mvu 102; Thag-a 22.
fr. attharati
to spread, to cover, to spread out; stretch, lay out Vin i.254; Vin v.172; Ja i.199; Ja v.113; Ja vi.428; Dhp i.272 ■ pp. atthata (q.v.) ■ Caus. attharāpeti to caused to be spread Ja v.110; Mvu 3, Mvu 20; Mvu 29, Mvu 7; Mvu 34, Mvu 69.
ā + stṛ;
(adj.) full of benefit SN i.30; Thag 740; Mil 172.
cp. Sk. arthavant
spreading out Vin v.172 (see kaṭhina). atthāraka same ibid.; Vin ii.87 (covering).
cp. Sk. āstāra, fr. attharati
to be, to exist. Pres. Ind. 1st sg. asmi Snp 1120, Snp 1143; Ja i.151; Ja iii.55 and amhi MN i.429; Snp 694; Ja ii.153; Pv i.102; ii.82. 2nd sg. asi Snp 420; Ja ii.160 (’si); iii.278; Vv 324 Pv-a 4.
3rd sg. atthi Snp 377, Snp 672, Snp 884; Ja i.278 Often used for 3rd pl. (= santi), e.g. Ja i.280; Ja ii.2 Ja iii.55.
1st pl. asma [Sk. smaḥ] Snp 594, Snp 595; asmase Snp 595, and amha Snp 570; Ja ii.128. 2nd pl. attha Ja ii.128; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 74 (āgat’ attha you have come). 3rd pl. santi Snp 1077; Nd ii.637 (= saṃvijjanti atthi upalabbhanti); Ja ii.353; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 22-Imper. atthu Snp 340; Ja i.59; Ja iii.26 ■ Pot. 1st sg. siyā [Sk. syām] Pv ii.88, and assaṃ [Cond. used as Pot.] Snp 1120; Pv i.125 (= bhaveyyaṃ Pv-a 64).
2nd sg. siyā [Sk. syāḥ] Pv ii.87.
3rd sg. siyā [Sk. syāt] DN ii.154; Snp 325, Snp 1092 Nd ii.105 (= jāneyya, nibbatteyya); Ja i.262; Pv-a 13, and assa DN i.135, DN i.196; DN ii.154; AN v.194; Snp 49, Snp 143; Dhp 124, Dhp 260; Pv ii.324; 924.
1st pl. assu Pv-a 27. 3rd pl. assu [cp. Sk. syuḥ] Snp 532; Dhp 74; Pv iv.136 (= bhaveyyuṃ Pv-a 231) ■ Aor. 1st sg. āsiṃ [Sk. āsaṃ Snp 284; Pv i.21 (= ahosiṃ Pv-a 10); ii.34 (= ahosiṃ Pv-a 83).
3rd sg. āsi [Sk. āsīt] Snp 994.
3rd āsuṃ [cp. Sk. Perf. āsuḥ] Pv ii.321, 133 (ti pi pāṭho for su). Ppr. *sat only in loc. sati (as loc. abs.) Dhp 146; Ja i.150 Ja i.263, santa Snp 105; Nd ii.635; Ja i.150 (loc. evaṃ sante in this case); iii.26, and samāna (q.v.) Ja i.266; Ja iv.138.
-bhāva state of being, existence, being Ja i.222, Ja i.290 Ja ii.415; Dhp-a ii.5; Dhp-a iv.217 (atthibhāva vā natthibhāva vā whether there is or not).
Sk. asti, 1st sg. asmi; Gr. εἰμί ἐστί; Lat. sum-est; Goth. im-ist; Ags. eom-is E. am-is
(adj.) 1. (to attha1) profitable, good, proper. In this meaning the MSS show a variance of spelling either atthika or aṭṭhika or aṭṭhita; in all cases atthika should be preferred DN i.55 (˚vāda); MN ii.212 (aṭṭhita); AN iii.219 sq. (idaṃ atthikaṃ this is suitable, of good avail; T aṭṭhitaṃ, vv.ll. as above); Snp 1058 (aṭṭhita Nd ii.20 also aṭṭhita, which at this pass. shows a confusion between aṭṭha and a-ṭhita); Ja v.151 (in def. of aṭṭhikatvā q.v.); Pp 69, Pp 70 (T aṭṭhika, aṭṭhita SS; expld. by Pp AN v.4 by kalyāṇāya).
2. (to attha1 2) desirous of (-˚) wanting, seeking for, in need of (c. instr.) AN ii.199 (uday desirous of increase); Snp 333, Snp 460, Snp 487 (puññ˚), 987 (dhan˚ greedy for wealth); Ja i.263 (rajj˚ coveting a kingdom); v.19; Pv ii.228 (bhojan˚ in need of food); iv.11 (kāraṇ˚), 121 (khiḍḍ˚ for play), 163 (puññ˚); Pv-a 95 (sasena a. wanting a rabbit), 120; DN-a i.70 (atthikā those who like to). -anatthika one who does not care for, or is not satisfied with (c. instr.) Ja v.460; Pv-a 20; of no good Thag 956 (“of little zeal” Mrs. Rh. D.).
-bhāva (a) usefulness, profitableness Pp AN v.4. (b state of need, distress Pv-a 120.
cp. Sk. arthika
(adj.) one who wants something, one who is on a certain errand DN i.90 (atthikaṃ assa atthī ti DN-a i.255).
atthika + vant
(f.) state of being, existence, being, reality MN i.486; SN ii.17 (˚añ c˚ eva natthitañ ca to be and not to be); iii.135; Ja v.110 (kassaci atthitaṃ vā natthitaṃ vā jānāhi see if there is anybody or not); Dhs-a 394 ■ Often in abl. atthitāya by reason of, on account of, this being so Dhp-a iii.344 (idamatthitāya under this condition) Pv-a 94, Pv-a 97, Pv-a 143.
f. abstr. fr. atthi cp. atthibhāva
(adj.) (-˚) desirous, wanting anything; see mant˚, vād˚.
Vedic arthin
(adj.) (-˚) having a purpose or end SN iii.189 (kim˚ for what purpose?); AN v.1 sq. (id.), 311 sq.; Thag 1097 (att˚ having one’s purpose in oneself) 1274; Snp 354 (yad atthiyaṃ on account of what).
= atthika
(adv.) here; atra atra here & there Ja i.414 = Ja iv.5 (in expln. of atriccha).
Sk. atra
(adj.) [Sk. *ātma-ja, corrupted form for attaja (see attā) through analogy with Sk. atra “here”. This form occurs only in Ja and similar sources, i.e. popular lore born from oneself, one’s own, appl. to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd., viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka antevāsika p. Nd ii.448 ■ Ja i.135; Ja iii.103 = Nd i.504; Ja iii.181; Ja v.465; Ja vi.20; Mvu 4, Mvu 12; Mvu 13, Mvu 4; Mvu 36, Mvu 57.
(adj.) [the popular etym. suggested at Ja iv.4 is atra atra icchamāna desiring here & there; but see atricchā very covetous, greedy, wanting too much Ja i.414 = Ja iv.4 Ja iii.206.
(f.) great desire, greed, excessive longing, insatiability Ja iv.5, Ja iv.327.
Sk. *atṛptyā, a + tṛpt + yā, influenced by Desid. titṛpsati, so that atricchā phonetically rather corresponds to a form *a ■ tṛpsyā (cch = psy, cp. P. chāta Sk. psāta). For the simple Sk. tṛpti see titti (from tappati2). According to Kern, but phonetically hardly justifiable it is Sk. atīccha = ati + icchā “too much desire” with r in dissolution of geminated tt, like atraja for attaja See also atriccha adj. and cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 69
(f.) excessive lust J. iii.222.
see atricchā
(indecl.) copulative & adversative part. 1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning & continuation of a story: and, and also, or and then, now DN ii.2; DN iii.152, DN iii.199 (athāparaṃ etad avoca); MN i.435; Snp 1006, Snp 1007, Snp 1017; Snp p.126 (athâparaṃ etad avoca: and further, something else); Dhp 69 Dhp 119, Dhp 377; Ja ii.158; Pv ii.64; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 8 (atha na and not) 70.
2. after negative clauses: but MN i.430; Snp 990 Snp 1047; Dhp 85, Dhp 136, Dhp 387; Pv-a 68. Often combd. with other part., e.g. atha kho (pos. & neg.) now, and then but, rather, moreover Vin i.1; DN i.141, DN i.167, DN i.174; AN v.195; Pv-a 79, Pv-a 221, Pv-a 251. na-atha kho na neither-nor Pv-a 28. atha kho pana and yet DN i.139. atha ca pana on the other hand Ja i.279. atha vā or (after prec. ca) nor (after prec. na) Snp 134; Dhp 140, Dhp 271; Pv i.41; ii.14 athā vā pi Snp 917, Snp 921.
Sk. atha, cp. atho
(1) the Atharva Veda DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 447 (˚veda) ■ (2) one who is familiar with the (magic formulas of the) Atharvaveda Ja vi.490 (sâthabbaṇa = sahatthivejja, with the elephant-healer or doctor) See also āthabbaṇa.
Vedic atharvan; as regards etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under ater
(indecl.) copulative and adversative part.: and, also, and further, likewise, nay SN i.106; Snp 43, Snp 155, Snp 647; Dhp 151, Dhp 234, Dhp 423; Ja i.83; Ja ii.185 Ja iv.495; Iti 106; Kp viii.7; Pv iv.315; Pv-a 251 (atho ti nipātamattaṃ avadhāraṇ-atthe vā). Also combd. with other part., like atho pi Snp 222, Snp 537, Snp 985; Pv ii.320; Kp-a 166.
Sk. atho, atha + u
(adj.) (-˚) eating SN iv.195 (kiṭṭhâda eating corn); Ja ii.439 (vantâda = vantakhādaka C.).
to ad, see adeti, cp. ˚ga, ˚ṭha, ˚da etc.
(adj.) = ada Ja v.91 (purisâdaka man-eater).
(nt.) eating, food Ja v.374 (v.l. modana).
from adeti
(adj.) see dasā.
a kind of bird Ja iv.466.
prob. = adaṃsa, from ḍasati to bite, cp. dāṭhā tooth; lit meaning “toothless” or “not biting”
not seeing, without seeing Ja iv.192 (T. adaṭṭhā, v.l. BB na diṭṭhā, C. adisvā) v.219.
a + diṭṭhā, ger. of *dassati
(pp.) that which is not given, freq. in phrase adinn’ ādāna (BSk. adattādāna Divy 302 seizing or grasping that whieh is not given to one i.e. stealing, is the 2nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sīla (dasa-sīla see sīla ii.). Vin i.83 (˚ā veramaṇī); DN i.4 (= parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ corikā ti vuttaṃ hoti DN-a i.71); iii.68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq.; MN i.361; Iti 63; Kp ii., cp. Kp-a 26 ■ adinnādāyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattādāyika Divy 301, Divy 418) Vin i.85; DN i.138 Sdhp 78.
a + dinna
(or ādu ) (indecl.) part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 622 (= udāhu Vv-a 258 v.l. SS. ādu) = Pv iv.317 (ādu) = Dhp-a i.31 (T. ādu v.l. adu); Vv 631 (v.l. ādu); Ja v.330 (T. ādu, C. adu expld. on p. 331 fantastically as aduñ ca aduñ ca kammaṃ karohī ti). See also ādu.
perhaps identical with aduṃ, nt. of pron. asu
nt. of pron. asu.
(adj.) innocent Ja v.143 (= nirapa rādha C.); vi.84, 552. f. adūsikā Snp 312.
a + dūsaka
= adūsaka Ja v.220 (= anaparādha C.).
to eat. Pres. ind. ademi etc. Ja v.31, Ja v.92, Ja v.197, Ja v.496; Ja vi.106 pot. adeyya Ja v.107, Ja v.392, Ja v.493.
Sk. ādayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1st sg. admi = Gr. ε ̓́δω, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat
ginger Ja i.244 (˚singivera).
cp. Sk. ārdraka
(adj.) wet, moist slippery Ja iv.353; Ja vi.309; Mil 346.
-āvalepana “smeared with moisture”, i.e. shiny, glittering SN iv.187 (kūṭāgāra); MN i.86 = Nd ii.1996 (upakāriyo) See also addha2.
The reading allāvalepana occurs at Nd ii.40 (= SN iv.187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as “newly plastered.”
Sk. ārdra, from ṛdati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr. α ̓́ρδω to moisten, αἀρδα dirt; see also alla
3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a.
3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 1 b.
3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2 a. Adda & Addayana
at Vb 371 in def. of anādariya is either faulty writing, or dial. form or pop. etym. for ādā and ādāyana; see ādariya.
to be or get wet, fig. to be attached to Ja iv.351. See also allīyati.
v. denom. fr. adda
a mountain Dāvs ii.13.
Sk. ardri
(pp.) afflicted, smarted, oppressed Ja i.21; Ja ii.407; Ja iii.261; Ja iv.295 Ja v.53, Ja v.268; Thag 406; Mvu 1, Mvu 25; Pv-a 260; Sdhp 37, Sdhp 281.
see aṭṭita which is the more correct spelling
(num.) one half, half (˚-) DN i.166 (˚māsika); AN ii.160 (˚māsa ); Ja i.59 (˚yojana ); iii. 189 (˚māsa).
= aḍḍha, q.v.
(adj.) soiled, wet; fig. attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) MN ii.223 (na anaddhabhūtaṃ attānaṃ dukkhena addhabhāveti he dirties the impure self with ill); SN iii.1 (addhabhūto kāyo impure body) Ja vi.548 (˚nakha with dirty nails, C. pūtinakha).
= adda3, Sk. ārdra
(in cpds. addha˚; ) 1. (of space a path, road, also journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase Ja iv.384 = Ja v.137 (pathaddhuno paṇṇarase va cando, gen. for loc. ˚addhani, on his course in his orbit; expld. at iv.384 by ākāsa-patha-sankhātassa addhuno majjhe ṭhito and at v.137 by pathaddhagato addha-pathe gaganamajjhe ṭhito); Pv iii.31 (pathaddhani paṇṇarase va cando; loc. same meaning as prec., expld. at Pv-a 188 by attano pathabhūte addhani gaganatala-magge) This phrase (pathaddhan) however is expld. by Kern (Toev s. v. pathaddu) as “gone half-way”, i.e. on full-moon-day He rejects the expln. of C.
2. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present & future) in; tayo addhā three divisions of time (atita, anāgata, paccuppanna) DN iii.216; Iti 53, Iti 70. (b) in phrase dīghaṃ addhānaṃ (acc.) a very long time AN ii.1, AN ii.10 (dighaṃ a ddh ānaṃ saṃsāraṃ); Snp 740 (dīghaṃ addhāna saṃsāra); Dhp 207 (dīghaṃ addhāna socati) Ja i.137. gen. dīghassa addhuno Pv-a 148 (gatattā because a long time has elapsed), instr. dīghena addhunā SN i.78; AN ii.118; Pv-a 28.
-āyu duration of life AN ii.66 (dīghaṃ ˚ṃ a long lifetime -gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata Mvu ii.150], always combd. with vayo anuppatto sometimes in ster. formula with jiṇṇa & mahallaka; Vin ii.188; DN i.48 (cp. DN-a i.143); MN i.82; Snp p. 50, Snp p. 92; Pv-a 149. -gū [Vedic adhvaga] a wayfarer, traveller journeyman Thag 255 = SN i.212 (but the latter has panthagu v.l. addhagū); Ja iii.95 (v.l. patthagu = panthagu); Dhp 302.
Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning “stretch, length”, both of space & time ■ Cases:; nom. addhā, gen. dat. addhuno, instr. addhunā, acc. addhānaṃ loc. addhani; pl. addhā. See also addhāna
(adv.) part. of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really truly DN i.143; Ja i.19 (a. ahaṃ Buddho bhavissāmi) Ja i.66 (a. tvaṃ Buddho bhavissasi), Ja i.203, Ja i.279; Ja iii.340; Ja v.307, Ja v.410 (C. expln. differs) Snp 47, Snp 1057; Nd ii.30 = Pts ii.21 (ekaṃsa-vacanaṃ nissaṃsaya-vacanaṃ etc.) addhā hi Ja iv.399; Pv iv.15 2.
Vedic addhā, cp. Av. azdā certainty
(adj.) = adhaniya 2, lasting Ja v.507 (an˚).
(adj.) 1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Thag 529. 2. belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period lasting, enduring DN iii.211; Ja i.393 (an˚) Ja vi.71. See also addhaneyya.
fr. addhan
a sacrificing priest, Name of a class of Brahmins DN i.237 (brāhmaṇa).
Vedic adhvaryu fr. adhvara sacrifice
(nt.) same meaning as addhan but as simplex only used with reference to time (i.e. a long time, cp. Vv-a 117 addhānaṃ = ciraṃ). Usually in phrase atītaṃ (anāgataṃ etc.) addhānaṃ in the past (future etc.), e.g. DN i.200; SN i.140; AN v.32; Mil 126 (anāgatamaddhāne for ˚aṃ); Pv-a 75 (v.l. addhāne). dīghaṃ addhānaṃ Pv i.105. Also in phrase addhānaṃ āpādeti to make out the length of time or period, i.e. to live out one’s lifetime SN iv.110; Ja ii.293 (= jīvitaddhānaṃ āpādi āyuṃ vindi C).
-daratha exhaustion from travelling DN-a i.287. -magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road DN i.1, DN i.73, DN i.79; MN i.276 (kantār˚) DN-a i.35 (interpreted as “addhayojanaṃ gacchissāmī ti bhuñjitabban ti ādi vacanato addha-yojanam pi addhāna maggo hoti”, thus taken to addha “half”, from counting by 1/2 miles); Vv-a 40, Vv-a 292. Cp. also antarāmagga. -parissama “fatigue of the road”, i.e. fatigue from travelling Vv-a 305. -vemattatā difference of time or period Mil 285 (+ āyuvemattatā).
orig. the acc. of addhan, taken as nt. from phrase dīghaṃ addhānaṃ. It occurs only in acc. which may always be taken as acc. of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhāna would be superfluous were it not for later forms like addhāne (loc.) Mil 126; Pv-a 75 v.l. BB, and for cpds.
a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DN-a i.298 (= pathāvin), 270; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 127 (˚jana people travelling). Often combd. with kapaṇa beggar, tramp, as kapaṇaddhikā (pl.) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as ˚iddhika, q.v.), e.g. Ja i.6 (v.l. ˚iddhika 262; Dhp-a ii.26.
fr. addhan
at Pv ii.62 is to be corrected to aṭṭita (sic v.l. BB).
(adj.) (-˚) belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one who has performed his journey (= addhagata) Dhp 90.
fr. addhan
see dhuva.
see dubbha.
see dvejjhatā.
in cpds. like adhagga see under adho.
see dhamma.
(adj.) the lowest (lit. & fig.), the vilest, worst Snp 246; (narādhama), 135 (vasalâdhama); Dhp 78 (purisa˚) Ja iii.151 (miga˚); Ja v.394 (uttamâdhama), Ja v.437 (id.), Ja v.397 Sdhp 387.
Vedic adhama = Lat. infimus, superl. of adho, q.v.
(adj.) the lower Ja iii.26 (adharoṭṭha the l. lip).
Vedic adhara, compar. of adho
.
A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal up to, over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a) ■ (b) as place where (prep. c. loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over in; in addition to. Often simply deictic “here” (e.g. ajjhatta = adhi + ātman “this self here” (see C 1 b).
B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i.e. in loose compn. with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd, like ajjhā˚ (adhi + ā), adhippa˚ (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i.e. as 2nd part of a pref. cpd., like ā in paccā˚ (prati + ā), paryā˚ (pari + ā) or ava in paryava˚ (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud˚ (abhi ud), samud˚ (sam + ud). As such (i.e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning “over above, in addition quite, par excellence, super”-(adhideva a super-god, cp ati-deva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like E. up in “shut up, fill up, join up etc) esp. in double pref ■ cpds. (ajjhāvasati “to dwell here-in = āvasati “to dwell in, to inhabit”) (see C 2) ■ In the explns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far-fetchedly) interpreted by abhibhū “overpowering” see e.g. C. on adhiṭṭhāti & adhiṭṭhita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi → ati in adhikusala, ˚kodhita, ˚jeguccha, ˚brahmā adhi → abhi in adhippatthita, ˚pātcti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha. Cp. also ati iv.
C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either lit. or fig ■ (a); where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) “gone on to or into” = studied ajjhesita (adhi + esita) “wished for”; ˚kata “put to” i.e. commissioned; ˚kāra commission; ˚gacchati “to go on to & reach it” = obtain; ˚gama attainment; ˚gaṇhāti to overtake = surpass, ˚peta (adhi + pra + ita) “gone in to” = meant, understood; ˚pāya sense meaning, intention ˚bhāsati to speak to = address; ˚mutta intent upon ˚vacana “saying in addition” = attribute, metaphor, cp Fr. sur-nom; ˚vāsāna assent, ˚vāseti to dwell in, give in = consent ■ (b) where: ˚tiṭṭhati (˚ṭṭhāti) to stand by = look after, perform; ˚ṭṭhāna place where; ˚vasati to inhabit; ˚sayana “lying in”, inhabiting.
2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi-jeguccha very detestable; ˚matta “in an extreme measure”, ˚pa supreme lord; ˚pacca lordship ˚paññā higher, additional wisdom; ˚vara the very best ˚sīla thorough character or morality ■ (b) with verbs (in double pref ■ cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogāheti plunge into; ajjhoṭhapeti to bring down to (its destination) ˚otthata covered completely; ˚oharati to swallow right down. adhi + ā: ajjhappatta having reached (the end) ajjhapīḷita quite overwhelmed; ˚āvuttha inhabited; ˚ārūhati grown up over; ˚āsaya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen).; adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach obtain; ˚upeti to receive; ˚upekkhati “to look all along over” = to superintend adhi + pra: adhippattheti to long for, to desire.
Note. The contracted (assimilation-)form of adhi before vowels is ajjh- (q.v.).
Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a˚ + suffix-dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. ε ̓́ν χα “on this” = here, cp ο ̔́χι where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. δέ (toward) = Ohg. zuo, E. to
(adj.) exceeding, extraordinary, superior, Pp 35; Vv-a 80 (= anadhivara, visiṭṭha); DN-a i.141, DN-a i.222; Dpvs v.32 (an˚); Dhp-a iii.238 Kp-a 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp 337, Sdhp 447 ■ compar adhikatara Dhp-a ii.7; Dhp-a iii.176; nt. ˚ṃ as adv. extraordinarily Pv-a 86 (= adhimattaṃ). In combn. with numerals adhika has the meaning of “in addition, with an additional, plus” (cp. ādi + ādika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as ādika, i.e. preceding the noun-determination), e.g. catunahutâdhikāni dve yojana-sahassāni 2000 + 94 (= 294 000; Ja i.25; sattamāsâdhikāni sattavassāni 7 years and 7 months Ja v.319; paññāsâdhikāni pañca vassa-satani 500 + 50 (550) Pv-a 152. See also sâdhika.
fr. adhi; cp. Sk. adhika
(adj.) 1. commissioned with, an overseer, Pv ii.927 (dāne adhikata ṭhapita Pv-a 124).
2. caused by Mil 67 (kamma˚). 3. affected by something, i.e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Mil 144 (+ vimātijāta).
adhi + kata; cp. Sk. adhikṛta
(nt.) 1. attendance, supervision, management of affairs, administration Pv-a 209. 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence DN ii.59 (-˚: in consequence of); SN ii.41; SN v.19. Esp. acc. ˚ṃ as adv. (-˚) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of from MN i.410 (rūpâdhikaraṇaṃ); SN iv.339 (rāga˚); Mil 281 (mudda˚ for the sake of the royal seal, orig. in attendance on the r. s.). Kimâdhikaraṇaṃ why, on account of what Ja iv.4 (= kiṃkāraṇaṃ) yatvâdhikaraṇaṃ (yato adhi˚) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj. DN i.70 = AN i.113 = AN ii.16 = DN iii.225.
3. case, question cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enumd. at var. passages, viz. vivāda˚ anuvāda˚ āpatta kicca˚; “questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct of duties” Vin ii.88; Vin iii.164; Vin iv.126, Vin iv.238; MN ii.247. Often ref.: Vin ii.74; SN iv.63 = SN v.346 (dhamma˚ a question of the Dh.); AN i.53 (case), AN i.79; AN ii.239 (vūpasanta) AN v.71, AN v.72; Pp 20, Pp 55; Dhp-a iv.2 (˚ssa uppamassa vūpasama), adhikaraṇaṃ karoti to raise a dispute MN i.122 ˚ṃ vūpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin ii.261.
-kāraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin iv.230 (f. ˚ikā); AN iii.252. -samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enumd. at DN iii.254; MN ii.247; AN i.99; AN iv.144.
adhi + karaṇa
one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge AN v.164, AN v.167.
fr. adhikaraṇa
(f.) a smith’s anvil Ja iii.285; Dāvs iii.16 sq.; Dhs-a 263.
to adhikaraṇa 1, orig. meaning “serving, that which serves, i.e. instrument”
attendance, service, administration, supervision, management, help Vin i.55; Ja i.56 Ja vi.251; Mil 60, Mil 115, Mil 165; Pv-a 124 (dāna˚; cp. Pv ii.927); Dhp-a ii.41.
cp. Sk. adhikāra
(adj.) (-˚) serving as, referring to Vin iii.274 (Bdhgh).
to adhikāra
(f.) an executioner’s block Thig 58; cp. Thag-a 65 (v.l. kuḍḍanā, should prob. be read koṭṭana); Thag-a 287.
adhi + koṭṭanā or koṭṭana
(adj.) in ˚ā dhammā “items of higher righteousness” DN iii.145.
adhi + kusala
(adj.) very angry Ja v.117.
adhi + kodhita
to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; fig. to understand DN i.229 (vivesaṃ) MN i.140 (anvesaṃ n’ âdhigacchanti do not find); SN i.22 (Nibbānaṃ); ii.278 (id.); AN i.162 (id.) Dhp 187, Dhp 365; Iti 82 (santiṃ); Thig 51; Pp 30, Pp 31; Pv i.74 (nibbutiṃ = labhati Pv-a 37); iii.710 (amataṃ padaṃ). opt. adhigaccheyya DN i.224 (kusalaṃ dhammaṃ) MN i.114 (madhu-piṇḍikaṃ); Dhp 61 and adhigacche Dhp 368. ger. ˚gantvā DN i.224; Ja i.45 (ānisaṃse); and ˚gamma Pv i.119 (= vinditvā paṭilabhitvā Pv-a 60). grd. ˚gantabba Iti 104 (nibbāna). cond. ˚gacchissaṃ Snp 446. 1st aor. 3 sg. ajjhagā Snp 225 (= vindi paṭilabhi Kp-a 180) Dhp 154; Vv 327; 3 pl. ajjhagū Ja i.256 (vyasanaṃ); ajjhāgamuṃ SN i.12. 2nd aor. 3 sg. adhigacchi Nd i.457. pp. adhigata (q.v.).
adhi + gacchati
to surpass, excel SN i.87 = DN-a i.32; DN iii.146; SN iv.275; AN iii.33; Iti 19. Ger adhigayha Pv ii.962 = Dhp-a iii.219 (v.l. BB at both pass. atikkamma); & adhiggahetvā Iti 20 ■ pp. adhiggahīta (q.v.).
adhi + gaṇhāti
got into possession of, conquered, attained, found Ja i.374; Vv-a 135.
pp. of adhigacchati
(adj.-n.) one who has found or obtained Vv-a 296 (Nibbānaṃ).
fr. adhigata
attainment, acquisition; also fig. knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) DN iii.255; SN ii.139; AN ii.148; AN iv.22, AN iv.332; AN v.194; Ja i.406; Ne 91; Mil 133, Mil 215, Mil 358, Mil 362, Mil 388; Pv-a 207.
fr. adhigacchati
to make obtain, to procure Pv-a 30.
adhi + gameti, Caus. of gacchati
excelled, surpassed; overpowered, taken by (instr.), possessed Ja iii.427 (= anuggahīta C.); Ja v.102; vi.525 = 574; Iti 103; Mil 188 Mil 189; Sdhp 98.
pp. of adhigaṇhāti
only at SN iii.12, where v.l. is aviciṇṇa, which is to be preferred. See viciṇṇa.
(nt.) “higher thought”, meditation, contemplation, nsually in combn. with adhisīla and adhipaññā Vin i.70; DN iii.219; MN i.451; AN i.254, AN i.256 Nd i.39 = Nd ii.689 (˚sikkhā); Dhp 185 (= aṭṭha-samāpattisankhāta adhika-citta Dhp-a iii.238).
adhi + citta
(adj.) lofty-minded, entranced Thag 68 = Ud 43 = Vin iv.54 = Dhp-a iii.384.
adhi + ceto
learning, studying, learning by heart Ja iii.218, Ja iii.327 = Ja iv.301; Ja iv.184 (vede = adhīyitvā C.), 477 (sajjhāyitvā C.); vi.213; Mil 164.
ger. of adhi + eti, see adhīyati
(˚-) unsupported, uncaused fortuitous, without cause or reason; in foll. phrases ˚āpattika guilty without intention MN i.443; ˚uppatti spontaneous origin Dhs-a 238; ˚laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 8422 = Ja v.171 Ja vi.315 (expld. at Ja v.171 by ahetunā, at vi.316 by akāraṇena ˚samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous unconditioned DN i.28 = Ud 69; DN iii.33, DN iii.138; SN ii.22–23 (sukhadukkhaṃ); AN iii.440 (id.); Pts i.155; DN-a i.118 (= akāraṇa˚).
Sk. *adhṛtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dhṛ; cp. dhāra, dhāraṇa 3, dhāreti 4
(adj.) without a cause (for assumption) unreasonable, unlikely SN v.457.
= adhicca 2 in adj. function, influenced by, homonym abhabba
(nt.) intense scrupulous regard (for others) DN i.174, DN i.176.
adhi + jeguccha
(adj.) (-˚) bent on, given to, addicted to Ja v.427 (surā˚).
fr. adhiṭṭhāti
(adhiṭṭhahati) 1. to stand on Ja iii.278 (ger. ˚āya); Dhp-a iv.183 (ger ˚hitvā); fig. to insist on Thag 1131 (aor. ˚āhi).
2 to concentrate or fix one’s attention on (c. acc.), to direct one’s thoughts to, to make up one’s mind, to wish Vin i.115 (inf. ˚ṭhātuṃ), 297 (id.), 125 (grd. ˚ṭhātabba) Ja i.80 (aor. ˚ahi); iii.278; iv.134 (v.l. ati˚ C. expls. abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati); Dhp-a i.34; Dhp-a iv.201 (ger. ˚hitvā) Pv-a 23 (aor. ˚ṭhāsi) 171 (id.), 75 (ger. ˚hitvā). On adhiṭṭheyya see Cpd. 209, n. 2; 219, n. 1.
3. to undertake practice, perform, look after, to celebrate SN ii.17; AN i.115 sq.; Ja i.50; Pv-a 209 (ger. ˚ṭhāya) ■ pp. adhiṭṭhita (q.v.).
Sk. adhitiṣṭhati, adhi + sthā
(nt.) 1. decision, resolution, self-determination, will (cp. on this meaning Cpd. 62; DN iii.229 (where 4 are enumd., viz. paññā˚, sacca˚ cāga upasama˚); Ja i.23; Ja v.174; Pts i.108; Pts ii.171 sq., 207; Dhs-a 166 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 44).
2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias MN i.136; MN iii.31, MN iii.240; SN ii.17; SN iii.10, SN iii.135 SN iii.194 ■ As adj. (-˚) applying oneself to, bent on AN iii.363.
3. looking after, management, direction, power Mil 309 (devānaṃ); Pv-a 141 (so read for adhitaṭṭhāna) [ adiṭṭhāna as Pv-a 89, used as explanatory for āvāsa should perhaps be read adhiṭṭhāna in the sense of fixed permanent, abode].
fr. adhi + sthā
(adj.) (-˚) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma˚; Mvu 5, Mvu 175; Mvu 30, Mvu 98; kammanta˚ Dhp-a i.393.
(adj.) 1. standing on (c. loc.), esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330 (hemarathe a. = sakalaṃ ṭhānaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhita Vv-a 269) ■ (a) looked after, managed, undertaken governed Vin i.57; SN v.278 (sv’âdhiṭṭhita); Pv-a 141 (kammanta) ■ (b) undertaking, bent on (c. acc.) Snp 820 (ekacariyaṃ).
pp. of adhiṭṭhāti
a superior or supreme god, above the gods MN ii.132; AN iv.304; Snp 1148; Nd ii.307b, 422 a Cp. atideva.
adhi + deva
ruler, lord, master Ja ii.369; Ja iii.324; Ja v.393; Pv ii.86 (jan˚ king); Dāvs iii.52; Vv-a 314.
Sk. adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati
(adj.) (-˚) mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) AN i.150 (atta loka˚ dhamma˚).
fr. prec.
to come to, reach, attain AN iv.96 (anatthaṃ); pp. adhipanna.
adhi + pajjati
(f.) higher wisdom or knowledge, insight (cp. jhāna & paññā); usually in combn. with adhicitta & adhisīla Vin i.70; DN i.174; DN iii.219 (˚sikkhā); AN i.240; AN ii.92 sq., 239; iii.106 sq., 327 iv.360; Nd i.39 (id.); Pts i.20, Pts i.25 sq., 45 sq., 169; ii.11 244; Pp 61.
adhi + paññā
to fly past, vanish Ja iv.111 (= ativiya patati sīghaṃ atikkamati C.) ■ Caus. adhipāteti (q.v.) in diff. meaning. Cp. also adhipāta.
adhi + patati
(nt.) attack, pressing Thag-a 271.
fr. adhipatati
(n ■ adj.) 1. ruler, master Ja iv.223; Vv 811; Mil 388; Dhp-a i.36 (= seṭṭha). 2. ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vb 216 sq. (chandaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā making energy predominant); Dhs-a 125, Dhs-a 126 (atta˚ autonomous, loka heteronomous, influenced by society). See alṣo Dhs. trsl. 20 & Cpd. 60.
adhi + pati, cp. adhipa
(nt.) AN i.147; AN iii.33 = SN iv.275 is probably misreading for ādhipateyya.
desired, wished, begged for DN i.120.
pp. adhi + pattheti, cp. Sk. abhi + arthayati
gone into, affected with, seized by (-˚), a victim of (c. loc.) SN i.72 Thig 345 (kāmesu); Snp 1123 (taṇhā˚ = taṇhânugata Nd ii.32); Dhp 288; Ja iii.38, Ja iii.369; Ja iv.396; Ja v.91, Ja v.379 (= dosena ajjhotthaṭa); vi.27.
cp. Sk. abhipanna, adhi + pad
(nt.) the higher, moral, code Vin v.1 (pāṭim˚ + ); MN ii.245 (+ ajjhājīva).
adhi + pāṭimokkha
splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddhā˚; head-splitting Snp 988 sq., 1004, 1025 (v.l. Nd ii.˚vipāta).
adhipāteti
a moth Snp 964. Expld. at Nd i.484 as “adhipātikā ti tā uppatitvā khādanti taṃkāraṇā a. vuccanti”; Ud 72 (expld. by C. as salabhā).
from adhipatati = Sk. atipatati, to fly past, flit
(f.) a moth, a mosquito Nd i.484 (see adhipāta2).
fr. adhipāta2
to break, split Ja iv.337 (= chindati). At Ud 8 prob. to be read adhibādheti (v.l. avibādeti. T. adhipāteti).
Caus. fr. adhipatati, cp. Sk. abhipātayati & P. atipāteti
to flow, to trickle Thag-a 284.
adhi + ppa + gharati
3 sg. aor. of adhippagacchati to go to Ja v.59.
1. intention, wish desire SN i.124; SN v.108; AN ii.81; AN iii.363 (bhoga˚) v.65; Ja i.79, Ja i.83; Sdhp 62. As adj. (-˚) desiring Pv-a 226 (hass˚ in play = khiḍḍatthika).
2. sense, meaning conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Mil 148; Pv-a 8 Pv-a 16, Pv-a 48, Pv-a 131 (the moral of a story). -adhippāyena (instr. in the way of, like Pv-a 215 (kīḷ for fun).
adhi + ppa + i; Sk. abhiprāya
distinction, difference, peculiarity, special meaning MN i.46; SN iii.66; SN iv.208; AN i.267; AN iv.158; AN v.48 sq.
adhi + pāyosa
1. desired, approved of, agreeable DN i.120; DN ii.236; Vv-a 312, Vv-a 315.
2. meant, understood intended as Ja iii.263; Pv-a 9, Pv-a 80, Pv-a 120, Pv-a 164.
Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. adhippāya
(nt.) the fact of being meant or understood as, in abl. ˚ā with reference to, as is to be understood of Vv-a 13; Pv-a 52.
abstr. fr. adhippeta
to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud 8 (T. adhipāteti, v.l. avibādeti).
adhi + bādheti, cp. Sk. abhibādhayati
a superior Brahmā, higher than Brahmā MN ii.132.
adhi + Brahmā, cp. atibrahmā
to overcome, overpower, surpass SN iv.185 sq. (cp. adhibhū) AN v.248, AN v.282 (˚bhoti); Ja ii.336; V.30 ■ aor. adhibhavi Ja ii.80. 3. pl. adhibhaṃsu SN iv.185. See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabhū pp.; adhibhūta (q.v.).
adhi + bhavati, cp. Sk. & P. abhibhavati
to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhāsi Vin ii.195; SN i.103; SN iv.117; Snp p.87; Pv-a 56, Pv-a 90.
adhi + bhāsati
(adj.) (-˚) overpowering, having power over; master conqueror, lord SN iv.186 (anadhibhū not mastering. For adhibhūta the v.l. abhi˚ is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see abhibhū); Snp 684 (miga˚ v.l. abhi˚).
fr. adhi + bhū, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibhū
overpowered SN iv.186.
cp. adhibhū & adhibhūta
(adj.) extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. ˚ṃ extremely MN i.152, MN i.243; SN iv.160; AN ii.150; AN iv.241; Ja i.92; Pp 15; Mil 146, Mil 189 Mil 274, Mil 290; Pv ii.36 (= adhikataraṃ Pv-a 86); Dhp-a ii.85 cp. Pv-a 281.
adhi + matta of mā
(nt.) preponderance AN ii.150; Dhs-a 334 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 200).
abstr. fr. prec.
(n ■ adj.) (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Snp 692 (adhimanasā bhavātha). (adj.) directing one’s mind upon, intent (on) Ja iv.433 (= pasannacitta); v.29 (an˚; v.l. ˚māna).
adhi + mano
undue estimate of oneself MN ii.252; AN v.162 sq.
adhi + māna
(adj.) having undue confidence in oneself, conceited AN v.162, AN v.169, AN v.317; Dhp-a iii.111.
fr. adhimāna
1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. loc. SN iii.225; SN iv.185; AN iv.24, AN iv.145 sq., 460; v.17; Pp 63. 2. to become settled, to make up one’s mind as to (with loc.), to become clear about Vin i.209 (aor. ˚mucci); DN i.106; SN i.116 (pot. ˚mucceyya); Iti 43; DN-a i.275. 3. to take courage, to have faith Snp 559; Mil 234; DN-a i.214, DN-a i.316; Ja iv.272; Ja v.103; Dhp-a i.196; Dhp-a iii.258; Dhp-a iv.170. 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with loc of the body. A late idiom for the older anvāvisati. Ja iv.172; Ja v.103, Ja v.429; Dhp-a i.196; Dhp-a iii.258; Dhp-a iv.170. pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta ■ Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with loc.) SN v.409 (cittaṃ devesu a.).
Pass. of adhi + muc
(nt.) making up one’s mind, confidence Dhs-a 133, Dhs-a 190.
fr. adhi + muc
(pp.) [either adhi + muc or mūrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll ˚mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy-form ˚mucchita, cp. mucchati and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109 drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with loc.) MN ii.223 (an˚); SN i.113; Thag 732 (v.l. ˚muccita) 923 (cch), 1175; Ja ii.437 (cch); iii.242; v.255 (kāmesu ˚mucchita, v.l. ˚muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita.
one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence AN iii.165 (v.l. ˚mucchitā).
n. ag. of adhimuccati
(adj.) intent upon (-˚ or with loc. or acc.), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin i.183; AN v.34, AN v.38; Dhp 226; Snp 1071 Snp 1149 (˚citta); Nd ii.33; Ja i.370 (dān˚) Pp 26; Pv-a 134 (dān˚).
pp. of adhimuccati, cp. BSk. adhimukta. Avs i.8, Avs i.112; Divy 49, Divy 302 etc.
(f.) resolve, intention, disposition DN i.174; AN v.36; Pts i.124; Mil 161, Mil 169; Vb 340 Vb 341; DN-a i.44, DN-a i.103; Sdhp 378.
adhi + mutti
(adj.) inclined to, attached to, bent on SN ii.154, SN ii.158; Iti 70; Vb 339 sq. + tā (f. inclination DN i.2.
= adhimutta
firm resolve, determination, decision MN iii.25 sq.; Vb 165 sq., 425; Dhs-a 145, Dhs-a 264 See Dhs. trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95.
fr. adhi + muc
see adhīyati.
ascent, ascending; in dur˚; hard to ascend Mil 322.
fr. adhi + ruh
(nt.) designation, term, attrîbute, metaphor, metaphorical expression DN ii.62; MN i.113 MN i.144, MN i.460; AN ii.70, AN ii.124; AN iii.310; AN iv.89, AN iv.285, AN iv.340; Iti 15 Iti 114; Snp p.218; Ja i.117; Nd ii.34 = Dhs 1306 (= nāma sankhā paññatti etc.); Vb 6; Pv-a 63. See on term Dhs. trsl. 340.
-patha “process of synonymous nomenclature” (Mrs Rh. D.) DN ii.68; SN iii.71; Dhs 1306; Dhs-a 51.
adhi + vacana
to come on, proceed, issue, result SN i.101; AN ii.32.
adhi + vattati
(adj.) inhabiting, living in (c. loc.) Vin i.28; SN i.197; Ja i.223; Ja ii.385; Ja iii.327; Pv-a 17. The form adhivuttha occurs at Ja vi.370.
pp. of adhivasati
(adj.) superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 163 (an˚; unsurpassed, unrivalled; Vv-a 80 = adhika visiṭṭha).
adhi + vara
endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adj. in dur˚; difficult to hold out Thag 111.
fr. adhi + vas
(& ˚ika) (adj.) willing, agreeable, enduring, patient Vin iv.130; MN i.10, MN i.526; AN ii.118 AN iii.163; AN v.132; Ja iii.369 (an˚); iv.11, 77.
fr. adhivāsa
(nṭ.) 1 assent AN iii.31; Dhp-a i.33.
2. forbearance, endurance MN i.10; Ja ii.237 Ja iii.263; Ja iv.307; Ja v.174.
fr. adhi + vas
(f.) patience, endurance, Dhs 1342; Vb 360 (an˚).
abstr. fr. adhivāsana
1. to wait for (c. acc.) Ja i.254; Ja ii.352 Ja iii.277.
2. to have patience, bear, endure (c. acc.) DN ii.128, DN ii.157; Ja i.46; Ja iii.281 (pahāre); iv.279, 407; v.51 200; Vv-a 336, Vv-a 337.
3. to consent, agree, give in Vin i.17; DN i.109 (cp. DN-a i.277); SN iv.76; Dhp-a i.33; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 75 and freq. passim ■ Caus. adhivāsāpeti to cause to wait Ja i.254.
Caus. of adhivasati, cp. BSk. adhivāsayati in meaning of 3
a carrier, bearer, adj. bringing SN iv.70 (dukkha˚); AN i.6; Thag 494.
fr. adhi + vah; cp. Sk. abhivahati
(nt ■ adj.) carrying, bringing, bearing Snp 79; f. ˚ī Thag 519.
fr. adhi + vah
(nt.) = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i.e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to Ja v.254 (T. kāmādhivimuttitā, v.l. ˚muttata).
(nt.) = adhimokkha; being inclined to Dhs-a 261.
(f.) expression, saying, opinion; only in tt. adhivuttipada (v.l. adhimutti-p. at all passages) DN i.13 (expld. by adhivacana-pada DN-a i.103); MN ii.228; AN v.36.
adhi + vutti, fr. adhi + vac, cp. Sk. abhivadati
see adhivattha.
(nt ■ adj.) lying on or in, inhabiting Pv-a 80 (mañcaṃ).
fr. adhiseti
sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin iii.3; SN iii.153.
pp. of adhiseti
(nt.) higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta-sikkha, adhipaññā˚ adhisīla˚ Vin i.70; DN i.174; DN iii.219; AN iii.133; AN iv.25; Dhp-a i.334; Pv-a 207. See also adhicitta, sikkhā & sīla.;
adhi + sīla
to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dhp 41; Snp 671 (= gacchati C.)-pp. adhisayita.
adhi + seti
(adj.) (-˚) subject, dependent DN i.72 (atta˚ & para˚; ); Ja iv.112; DN-a i.217; also written ādhīna Ja v.350. See also under para.
cp. Sk. adhīna
& adhiyati to study, lit. to approach (cp adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin i.270; SN i.202 (dhammapadāni); Ja iv.184 (adhīyitvā), 496 (adhīyamāna); vi.458; Dhp-a iii.446 (adhīyassu) ■ ger. adhīyitvā Ja iv.75; adhiyānaṃ Ja v.450 (= sajjhāyitvā C.) & adhicca: see adhicca 2; pp. adhiyita DN i.96.
Med. of adhi + ; i, 1st sg. adhīye taken as base in Pāli
(adv.) just now, quite recently DN ii.208; Vin ii.185 (kālakata); Mil 155; Dāvs ii.94.
-āgata a new comer MN i.457; Ja ii.105. -ābhisitta newly or just anointed DN ii.227. -uppanna just arisen DN ii.208, DN ii.221.
Vedic adhunā
(nt.) irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations Ja iv.241.
a + dhura, see dhura 2
(adv.) below, usually combd. or contrasted with uddhaṃ “above” and tiriyaṃ “across”, describing the 3 dimensions ■ uddhaṃ and adho above and below marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddhaṃ and the 4 bearings; (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at SN i.122; SN iii.124; AN iv.167; with uddhaṃ & tiriyaṃ at Snp 150, Snp 537, Snp 1055, Snp 1068. Expl;d. at Kp-a 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd;2 155. For further ref. see uddhaṃ. The compn. form of adho before vowels is adh˚.
-akkhaka beneath the collar-bone Vin iv.213. -agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth Ja v.156 (+ uddh˚ expld. by uparima-danta C.). -kata turned down, or upside down Ja i.20; Ja vi.298. -gata gone by, past. Adv. ˚ṃ since (cp. uddhaṃ adv. later or after Ja vi.187 (ito māsaṃ adhogataṃ since one month ago) -gala (so read for T. udho˚) down the throat Pv-a 104 -mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin ii.78; MN i.132, MN i.234: Vv 161 (= heṭṭhā mukha Vv-a 78). -bhāga the lower part (of the body) MN i.473; Dhp-a i.148. -virecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha˚ of an emetic) DN i.12; DN-a i.98 (= adho dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ) Dhs-a 404. -sākhaṃ (+ uddhamūlaṃ) branches down (roots up, i.e. uprooted) Dhp-a i.75. -sira (adj.) head downward Ja iv.194. -siraṃ (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avaṃsiraṃ) Ja vi.298 (= siraṃ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho C.). -sīsa (adj.) head first, headlong Ja i.233; Ja v.472 (˚ka).
Vedic adhaḥ; compar. adharaḥ = Lat. inferus, Goth. undar, E. under, Ind. *n̊dher-; superl. adhamaḥ Lat. infimus
form of the neg. prefix a-before vowels. For negatives beginning with an˚ see the positive.
negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Thag 1089), anamatagga & anabhava;. See Vinaya Texts ii.113.
(adj.) uncalled, unbidden, unasked Vin i.113; Pv i.123 (T. anabbhita, v.l. anijjhiṭṭha Ja iii.165 has anavhāta; Thig 129 ayācita; Pv-a 64 expls. by anavhāta).
an + ajjhiṭṭha
to breathe Kp-a i.124 (in def. of bāla); DN-a i.244 (read ananti for aṇanti). Cp. pāṇa.
An, Vedic aniti & anati
the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adj. form anabhāvaṃ kata or gata. This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin iii.3 of bad qualities, at SN ii.63 of certain wrong opinions, at MN i.487; SN iv.62 = SN v.527 of the khandas, at MN i.331 of the Mental Intoxications (Āsavas) at AN iv.73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma AN i.135, of evil passions AN i.137, AN i.184, AN i.218; AN ii.214 of pride AN ii.41 of craving AN ii.249, of the bonds AN iv.8. In the supplement to the Dīgha (DN iii.326) and in the Itivuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhāvaṃ gameti, cause to perish is used of evil thoughts. Bdhgh (quoted Vin iii.267) reports as v.l. anubhāva. Cp. Nd i.90; and Nd ii.under pahīna.
ana + bhāva
(adj.) not restored, not to be restored Vin iv.242; Pv i.123 (where reading prob. faulty & due to a gloss; the id. p. at Thig 129 has ayācita & at Ja iii.165 anavhāta; Pv-a 64 expls. by anavhāta v.l. anabbhita).
an + abbhita
(f.) the state of not being erect, i.e. hanging down Ja v.156.
an + abbhuṇṇata + tā
(f.) absence of covetousness or desire DN iii.229, DN iii.269; Dhs 32, Dhs 35, Dhs 277.
an + abhijjhā
(adj.) not greedy or covetous DN iii.82; Pp 40.
an + abhijjhālū
(adj.) not desired Snp 40 (cp. Nd ii.38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita Vv-a 201).
an + abhijjhita
etc. see abhi˚ etc.
(adj.) not taking delight in Ja i.61 (naccâdisu).
an + abhirata
(f.) not delighting in, dissatisfaction, discontent DN i.17 (+ paritassanā); iii.289; Ja iii.395; DN-a i.111.
an + abhirati
(adj.) in anger Vin iv.236.
an + abhiraddha
(f.) anger, wrath DN i.3 (= kopass’etaṃ adhivacanaṃ DN-a i.52).
an + abhiraddhi
(adj.) not obtaining, unable to get or keep up DN i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DN-a i.268).
ppr. med. of an + abhisambhuṇāti
(adj.). Ep. of Saṃsāra “whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable”, i.e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon SN ii.178, SN ii.187 sq. = SN iii.149, SN iii.151 = SN v.226, SN v.441 (quoted Kv 29, called Anamatagga-pariyāya at Dhp-a ii.268) and Thig 495, Thig 6. Later references are Nd ii.664; Pv-a 166; Dhp-a i.11; Dhp-a ii.13, Dhp-a ii.32; Sdhp 505. [Cp. anāmata and amatagga and cp. the English idiom “world without end” The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Saṃyutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary (see e.g. , Woods, Yoga-system of Patañjali, 119) it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yogī, to understand the beginning and end of Saṃsāra].
ana (= a neg.) + mata (fr. man ) + aggā (pl.). So Dhammapāla (avidit-agga Thag-a 289); Nāṇakitti in Ṭīkā on Dhs-a 11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg Vin. Texts ii.114. Childers takes it as an + amata agga, and Jacobi (Erzähl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. § 251) as a + namat (fr. nam ) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavarāgra, doubtless by some mistake Weber, Ind. Str. iii.150 suggests an + āmrta, which does not suit the context at all
(adj.) being in consternation or distress, crying Ja iii.223 (˚kāle = ārodana-kāle C.).
according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 70 = ana-mha “unlaughing” with ana = an (cp. anabhāva anamatagga) and mha from; smi, cp. vimhayati = Sk vismayati
misfortune, distress Mil 277, usually combd. with vyasana (as also in BSk, e.g. Jtm 215; Vin ii.199; SN iv.159; AN v.156; Mil 292; Vv-a 327 Sdhp 362.
a + naya
(adj.) not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin i.10; DN iii.232 (˚vohāra, 3 sets of 4 the same at Vin v.125); Snp 664, Snp 782 (˚dhamma); Pp 13 ■ See ariya.
an + ariya, see also anāriya
(adj.) 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable MN i.455; Ja ii.326 = Ja iv.471.
2. dissatisfied, insatiate Ja v.63 (= atitta C.). 3. ˚ṃ kata dissatisfied, satiated, SN i.15 (kāmesu).
an + ala
(nt.) not eating, fasting, hunger DN iii.75 & in same context at Snp 311 (= khudā Snp-a 324).;
an + asana, cp. Sk. an-aśana
without eating, fasting Ja iv.371.
ger. of an + aśati
not grumbling Ja iii.27 (v.l. for anusuyyaṃ T.).
Sk. anasūyan, ppr. of an + asūyati
absence of abruptness Dhs 1341.
an + asuropa
(adj.) not grumbling, not envious Ja ii.192.
Sk. anasūyaka, cp. usūya
(adj.) either an-assaka or a-nassaka (q.v.).
(nt.) imperishableness, freedom from waste Ja iv.168.
a + nassana, naś; cp. Sk. naśana
(adj.) not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Snp 853 (sātiyesu a. = sātavatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhasanthavavirahita Snp-a 549).
an + assāvin; cp. assāva + āsava
(adj.) not consoling, discouraging not comforting MN i.514; SN ii.191.
an + assāsa + ika; cp. Sk. āśvāsana & BSk. anāśvāsika Divy 207
1st sq, pret. of anusūyati (= Sk. anvaśruvaṃ) I have heard MN i.393.
(adj.) not come yet, i.e. future. On usual combn. with atīta: see this. DN iii.100 sq., 134 sq. 220, 275; MN iii.188 sq.; SN i.5; SN ii.283; AN iii.100 sq., 400; Snp 318, Snp 373, Snp 851; Iti 53; Ja iv.159; Ja vi.364; Dhs 1039, Dhs 1416.
an + āgata
(nt.) not coming, not returning Ja i.203, Ja i.264.
an + āgamana
(f.) the state or condition of an Anāgāmin SN v.129, SN v.181, SN v.285; AN iii.82; AN v.108, AN v.300 sq. Snp p.140 = AN iii.143; Iti 1 sq., 39, 40.
anāgāmin + tā
(adj.-n.) one who does not return, a Never-Returner, as tt. designating one who has attained the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Saṃyojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship. So near is the Anāgāmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship, never returning to rebirth as a man But in the oldest passages referring to these 4 stages the description of the third does not use the word anāgāmin (DN i.156; DN ii.92; DN iii.107; MN ii.146) and anāgāmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (S iii.168, the anatta doctrine; SN v.200–2, the five Indriyas; AN i.64 AN i.120, cultivation of good qualities, AN ii.160; AN v.86, AN v.171, SN 149). We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons being called anāgāmin. Those are at SN v.177 and 178. The word there means one who has broken the lower five of the ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At DN ii.92 nine others, of whom eight are laymen, are declared after their death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life but they are not called anāgāmins. At Iti 96 there are only 3 stages, the worldling, the Anāgāmin, and the Arahant; and the Saṃyojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the Nikāya period the older wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Saṃyojana explanation the commentaries, so far as we know them, ignore any other. See Pts ii.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n; Cp. 69.
-phala fruition of the state of an Anāgāmin; always in combn. sotāpatti˚ sakadāgāmi˚ anāgāmi˚ arahatta˚ Vin i.293; Vin ii.240; Vin iv.29; DN i.229; DN ii.227, DN ii.255; SN iii.168 SN v.411; AN i.23, AN i.44; AN iii.272 sq.; AN iv.204, AN iv.276, AN iv.372 sq -magga the path of one who does not return (in rebirths Nd ii.569b.Anagara & Anagariya
an + āgāmin
see agāra & agāriyā.
freedom from anger or ill-will Vin ii.249.
an + āghāta
misconduct, immorality Ja ii.133; iii. 276; adj. anācārin Pp 57.
an + ācāra
(adj.) of inferior race, not of good blood MN i.367.
an + ājāniya
(a) (m) disrespect Pv-a 257 ■ (b.) (adj.) disrespectful Snp 247 (= ādaravirahita Snp-a 290).
an + ādara
(f.) want of consideration, in expln. of dovacassatā at Dhs 1325 = Vb 359 = Pp 30 (where reading is anādariyatā ).
abstr. fr. anādara
(nt.) disregard, disrespect Vin i.176; Vin iv.113 (where expld. in extenso); Dhs 1325 dug 20 = Vb 359.
fr. anādara
without taking up or on to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā C.).
ger. of an + ādiyati
(adj.) free from attachment (opp. sādāna) AN ii.10 = Iti 9 = Iti 109 = Nd ii.172a; Snp 620, Snp 741 Snp 1094; Nd ii.41 (where as nt. = taṇha); Dhp 352 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇa Dhp-a iv.70), 396, 406, 421.
an + ādāna
not taking up, not heeding Ja iv.352 (v.l. for T. anādiyitvā).
ger. of an + ādiyati
without assuming or taking up, not heeding Vin iv.120; Ja iv.352; Dhp-a i.41. See also ādiyati. Ananu-
ger. of an + ādiyati, Sk. anādāya
represents the metrically lengthened from of ananu(an + anu), as found e.g. in the foll. cpds.: ˚tappaṃ (ppr.) not regretting Ja v.492; ˚puṭṭha questioned Snp 782 (= apucchita Snp-a 521); ˚yāyin not following or not defiled by evil Snp 1071 (expld. at Nd ii.42 by both avedhamāna (?) avigacchamāna & by arajjamāna adussamāna); ˚loma not fit or suitable DN ii.273 (v.l. anu˚).
(adj.) not fallen into the way of (the hunter), escaped him MN i.174.
an + āpātha + gata
(adj.) unmarried (of a woman) Ja iv.178 (āpāda = apādāna C.; aññehi akata-pariggahā).
an + āpāda
see āpucchati.
(adj.) safe and sound Vv-a 351.
an + ābādha
(adj.) not affected by death, immortal Ja ii.56 (asusāna-ṭṭhāna C.); Dhp-a ii.99.
an + amata the ā being due to metrical lengthening
(˚-) without asking or being asked; in ˚kata unasked, unpermitted, uninvited Ja vi.226 ˚cāra living uninvited Vin v.132; AN iii.259.
an + āmanta
(adj.) free from illness, not decaying, healthy Vv 1510 (= aroga Vv-a 74), 177.
an + āmaya
(adj.) not touched, virgin-Vv-a 113 (˚khetta).
an + āmasita, pp. of āmassati
(adj.) not to be touched Ja ii.360 (C. anāmāsitabba).
grd. of an + āmassati, Sk. āmaśya
(nt.) nonexertion, not exerting oneself, sluggishness, indolence Ja v.121 (˚sīla = dussīla C.).
an + āyatana
(adj.) void of means, unlucky, unfortunate Vv 845 (= natthi ettha āyo sukhan ti anāyasaṃ Vv-a 335).
an + āya + sa, or should we read anāyāsa?
(adj.) free from trouble or sorrow, peaceful Thag 1008.
an + āyāsa
that which is without moil and toil Snp 745 (= nibbāna Snp-a 507).
an + ārambha
(adj.) one who fails, unsuccessful Vin i.70.
an + ārādhaka
(adj.) not Aryan, ignoble, Snp 815 (v.l. SS. anariya).
doublet of anariya
(adj.) without support (from above), unsuspended, not held Snp 173 (+ appatiṭṭha expld. at Snp-a 214 by heṭṭhā patiṭṭhâbhāvena upari ālambhāvena ca gambhīra).
an + ālamba
aversion, doing away with Vin i.10 (taṇhāya). Analhiya & Analhika;
an + ālaya
(adj.) not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually combd. with daḷidda MN i.450; MN ii.178 (v.l. BB. anāḷiya) AN iii.352 sq. (vv.ll. BB. anāḷhika), 384; Ja v.96.
an + ālhiya, Sk. āḍhya, see also addha2
(˚-) not shut; in ˚dvāratā (f.) not closing the door againṡt another, accessibility, openhand edness DN iii.191.
an + āvaṭa
(adj.-n.) one who does not return, almost syn. with anāgāmin in phrase anāvatti-dhamma one who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another, DN i.156 (cp. DN-a i.313); iii.132; Pp 16 sq., 62.
an + āvattin
(adv.) as long as the sun does not set, before sun-down Ja v.56 (= anatthangata-suriyaṃ C. cp. Sk. utsūra.
an + ava + sūra = suriya, with ava lengthened to āva in verse
(adj.-n.) uninhabited, an uninhabited place Vin ii.22, Vin ii.33; Ja ii.77.
an + āvāsa
etc. see āvikata.
(adj.) undisturbed, unstained, clean, pure DN i.84 (= nikkaddama DN-a i.226); iii.269, 270; Snp 637 (= nikkilesa Snp-a 469 = Dhp-a iv.192); Thig 369 (āvilacitta + ); Dhp 82, Dhp 413; Thag-a 251; Sdhp 479.
an + āvila
(adj.) not dwelt in DN ii.50.
an + āvuttha, pp. of āvasati
(adj.) fasting, not taking food SN iv.118. f. ˚ā [cp. Sk. anāśaka nt.] fasting, abstaining from food Dhp 141 (= bhatta-paṭikkhepa Dhp-a iii.77).
an + āsaka
(nt.) fasting Snp 249 (= abhojana Snp-a 292).
abstr. of anāsaka
(adj.) free from the 4 intoxications (see āsava) Vin ii.148 = Vin ii.164; DN iii.112; Snp 1105, Snp 1133; Dhp 94, Dhp 126, Dhp 386; Nd ii.44; Iti 75; Pp 27, Dhs 1101 Dhs 1451; Vb 426; Thag 100; Pv ii.615; Vv-a 9. See āsava and cp. nirāsava.
an + āsava
(adj.) not longing after anything Snp 369 (Snp-a 365 however reads anāsayāna & has anāsasāna as v.l. Cp. also vv.ll. to āsasāna. Expl;d by kañci rūpâdi-dhammaṃ nâsiṃsati Snp-a 365.
an + āsasāna
(adj.) being without food MN i.487; Snp 985.
an + āhāra
(f.) not throwing out or expelling Ja iii.22.
a + nikkaḍḍhanā
(adj.) not free from impurity, impure, stained Dhp 9 = Thag 969 = Ja ii.198 = Ja v.50; Dhp-a i.82 (= rāgâdīhi kasāvehi sakasāva).
a + nikkasāva, cp. nikasāva
(adj.) not dug into, not dug down, not deep Ja vi.109 (˚kūla; C. agambhīrā).
a + nikhāta, pp. of nikhanati
see nigha1 and īgha.
(f.) dispassion SN v.6; adj. ˚a without desires, not desiring Snp 707.
an + icchā
(nt.) immobility, steadfastness Pts i.15.
an + iñjana
(adj.) immoveable, undisturbed, unshaken Thag 386.
an + iñjita
see niṭṭhā2.
see niṭṭhita.
(f.) a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, “nonwoman” Ja ii.126 (compd with anadī a river without water interpreted by ucchiṭṭh-itthi).
an + itthi
in ˚ḷocana (with) faultless eyes Ja vi.265.
the compn. form of nindā
(adj.) blameless, faultless Ja iv.106 (˚aṅgin of blameless body or limbs).
a + nindita
not finding Thag 78 = Dhp 153 (= taṃ ñāṇaṃ avindanto Dhp-a iii.128).
ppr. of nibbisati, q.v.
(adj.) not winking, waking, watchful Dāvs v.26 (nayana).
Ved. animeṣa, cp. nimisati
(adj.) not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.112; Vin ii.287; DN iii.217.
a + niyata
(adj.) indefinite (as tt. g.) Vv-a 231.
pp. of a + niyameti
wind Ja iv.119 (˚patha air, sky); Mil 181; Vv-a 237; Sdhp 594.
from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. α ̓́νεμος wind; Lat. animus breath, soul, mind
(adj.) see nirankaroti.
a + nirākata
(adj.) without a personal ereator Thag 713.
an + issara
(adj.) not hard, not greedy, generous DN iii.47 (+ amaccharin; v.l. anussukin); Snp-a 569 (see under niṭṭhurin).
an + issukin, see also an-ussukin
(nt.) army, array, troops (orig. “front”, i.e. of the battle-array) Vin iv.107 (where expld. in detail); Snp 623 (bala˚ strong in arms, with strong array i.e. of khanti which precedes; cp. Snp-a 467).
-agga a splendid army Snp 421 (= balakāya senāmukha Snp-a 384). -ṭṭha a sentinel, royal guard DN iii.64, DN iii.148; Ja v.100; Ja vi.15 (“men on horseback”, horseguard); Mil 234, Mil 264. -dassana troop-inspection DN i.6 (aṇīka˚ at DN-a i.85, q.v. interpretation); Vin iv.107 (senābyūha + ).
Ved. anīka face, front, army to Idg. *ogu̯ (see), cp. Gr. ο ̓́μμα eye, Lat. oculus, see also Sk. pratīka and P. akkhi
see nigha1 and cp. īgha.
(f.) safety, soundness, sound condition, health AN iv.238; Mil 323 (abl. ˚ito).
an + īti
(adj.) free from injury or harm, healthy, secure Vin ii.79 = Vin ii.124 (+ anupaddava); iii.162; SN iv.371; Snp 1137 (ītī vuccanti kilesā etc. Nd ii.48); Mil 304.
fr. anīti
(adj.) not such and such, not based on hearsay (itiha), not guesswork or (mere) talk AN ii.26; Thag 331 (cp. MN i.520); Snp 1053 (= Nd ii.49, Nd ii.151); Ja i.456; Ne 166 (cp. Iti 28).
an + ītīha, the latter a cpd. der. fr. iti + ha = saying so and so, cp. itihāsa & itihītihaṃ
(indecl.) prep. & pref ■ A. As; prep. anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with acc. is superseded by the loc. Traces of use w. acc. may be seen in expressions of time like anu pañcāhaṃ by 5 days, i.e. after (every) 5 days (cp. ved. anu dyūn day by day); a. vassaṃ for one year or yearly; a. saṃvaccharaṃ id ■ (b) More freq. w loc. (= alongside, with, by) a. tīre by the bank SN iv.177 pathe by the way Ja v.302; pariveṇiyaṃ in every cell Vin i.80; magge along the road Ja v.201; vāte with the wind Ja ii.382.
B. As pref.: (a) General character. anu is freq. as modifying (directional) element with well-defined meaning (“along”), as such also as 1st component of pref ■ cpds. e.g. anu + ā (anvā˚), anu + pra (anuppa˚), + pari, vi, + saṃ ■ As base, i.e. 2nd part of a pref ■ cpd. it is rare and only found in combn sam-anu˚. The prefix saṃ is its nearest relation as modifying pref. The opp. of anu is paṭi and both are often found in one cpd. (cp. ˚loma ˚vāta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: “along towards” ■ (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; esp. with verbs denoting to go follow etc. E. g. ˚aya going after, connexion; ˚āgacch follow, ˚kkamati follow, ˚dhāvati run after, ˚patta received ˚parivattati move about after, ˚bandhati run after, ˚bala rear-guard, ˚bhāsati speak after, repeat, ˚vāda speaking after, blame, ˚vicarati roam about ˚viloketi look round after (survey), ˚saṃcarati proceed around etc ■ (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an aim, on to, over to, forward. Esp. in double pref ■ cpds (esp. with ˚ppa˚), e.g. anu-ādisati design for, dedicate ˚kankhin longing for, ˚cintana care for, ˚tiṭṭhati look after ˚padinna given over to, ˚pavecchati hand over, ˚paviṭṭha entered into, ˚pasaṃkamati go up to, ˚rodati cry for, ˚socati mourn for ■ II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling E. be-or Ger. be-, also Lat. ad-and con-Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. E. g. ˚kampā com-passion, ˚kiṇṇa be-set, ˚gaṇhāti take pity on, ˚gāyati be-singen, ˚jagghati laugh at, belaugh, ˚ddaya pity with ˚masati touch at, ˚yuñjati order along, ˚yoga devotion to, ˚rakkhati be-guard, ˚litta be-smeared or an-ointed, ˚vitakheti reflect over, ˚sara con-sequential; etc ■ (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. E. g. ˚kūla being to will ˚chavika befitting, ˚ñāta permitted, al-lowed, ˚mati con- sent, a-greement, ˚madati ap-preciate, ˚rūpa = con-form ˚vattin acting according to, ˚ssavana by hearsay, ˚sāsati ad-vise, com-mand etc ■ III. (a) (fig.) following after second to, secondary, supplementary, inferior, minor, after smaller; e.g. ˚dhamma lesser morality, ˚pabbajā discipleship ˚pavattaka ruling after, ˚bhāga after -share, ˚majjha mediocre, ˚yāgin assisting in sacrifice, ˚vyañjana smaller marks, etc.; cp. paṭi in same sense ■ (b) distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): ˚disā in each direction, ˚pañcāhaṃ every 5 days, ˚pubba one after the other ■ IV. As one of the contrasting (-comparative) prefixes (see remarks on ati & cp. ā;3) anu often occurs in reduplicative cpds. after the style of khuddânukhuddaka “small and still smaller”, i.e. all sorts of small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More freq. combns. are the foll.: (q.v. under each heading padânupadaṃ, pubbânupubbaka, ponkhânuponkhaṃ, buddhânubuddha vādânuvāda, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi ■ V. As regards dialectical differences in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq found in Pāli where the Sk. variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For P. anu = Sk. (Ved.) apa see anuddhasta; = Sk. abhi see anu-gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati; = Sk. ava see anu-kantati, ˚kassati2, ˚kiṇṇa ˚gāhati, ˚bujjhati ˚bodha, ˚lokin, ˚vajja.
Note (a) anu in compn. is always contracted to ˚ānu˚; never elided like adhi = ˚dhi or abhi = ˚bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahānubhāva), like ānupubbikathā (fr. *pubbānupubba˚), ānubhāva etc. We find ānu also in combn. with an-under the influence of metre ■ (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv˚.
Vedic anu, Av. anu; Gr. α ̓́νω to α ̓́να along, up; Av. ana, Goth. ana, Ohg. ana, Ags. on, Ger an, Lat. an (in anhelare etc.)
(adj.) subtile; freq. spelling for aṇu, e.g. DN i.223 Sdhp 271, Sdhp 346 (anuṃ thūlaṃ). See aṇu.
(adj.) striving after, longing for Ja v.499 (piya˚).
fr. anu + kāṅkṣ
to cut Dhp 311 (hatthaṃ = phāleti Dhp-a iii.484).
anu + kantati2
& ˚ika (adj.) kind of heart, merciful, compassionate, full of pity (-˚ or c. loc.) DN iii.187; SN i.105 (loka˚), 197; v.157; AN iv.265 sq.; Iti 66 (sabba-bhūta˚); Pv i.33 (= kārunika Pv-a 16), 53 (atthakāma, hitesin Pv-a 25), 88; ii.14 (= anuggaṇhataka Pv-a 69), 27; Thag-a 174; Pv-a 196 (satthā sattesu a.).
fr. anukampati
to have pity on, to commiserate, to pity, to sympathise with (c. acc.) SN i.82, SN i.206 SN v.189. Imper. anukampa Pv ii.16 (= anuddayaṃ karohi Pv-a 70) & anukampassu Pv iii.28 (= anuggaṇha Pv-a 181). Med. ppr. anukampamāna Snp 37 (= anupekkhamāna anugayhamāna Nd ii.50); Pv-a 35 (taṃ), 62 (pitaraṃ) 104 ■ pp. anukampita (q.v.).
anu + kampati
(nt.) compassion, pity Pv-a 16, Pv-a 88.
fr. last
(f.) compassion, pity, mercy DN i.204; MN i.161; MN ii.113; SN i.206; SN ii.274 (loka˚) iv.323; v.259 sq.; AN i.64, AN i.92; AN ii.159; AN iii.49; AN iv.139 Pp 35 ■ Often in abl. anukampāya out of pity, for the sake of DN iii.211 (loka˚ out of compassion for all mankind, + atthaya hitāya); Ja iii.280; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 147.
abstr. fr. anukampati
(adj.) compassioned, gratified, remembered, having done a good deed (of mercy Pv iii.230.
pp. of anukampati
(adj.) compassionate, anxious for, commiserating. Only in foll. phrases: hita˚; full of solicitude for the welfare of SN v.86; Snp 693; Pv iii.76 sabbapāṇa-bhūta-hita˚; id. SN iv.314; AN ii.210; AN iii.92 AN iv.249; Pp 57, Pp 68. sabba-bhūta˚; SN i.25, SN i.110; AN ii.9; Iti 102.
cp. anukampaka
to imitate, “to do after” AN i.212; Ja i.491; Ja ii.162; Dhp-a iv.197 ■ ppr. anukabbaṃ Vin ii.201 (mamâ˚) ■ Med. anukubbati SN i.19 = Ja iv.65. See also anukubba. On anvakāsi see anukassati 2.
anu + kṛ;
1. [Sk. anukaṛṣati] to draw after, to repeat, recite, quote DN ii.255 (silokaṃ).
2 [Sk. ava- kaṛṣati] to draw or take of, to remove, throw down, Thag 869 (aor. anvakāsi = khipi, chaḍḍesi C.).
anu + kassati, kṛṣ
(adj.) responding to love, loving in return Ja ii.157.
anu + kāma
imitation Dpvs v.39.
cp. anukaroti
(adj.) imitating Dāvs v.32.
strewn with, beset with, dotted all over Pv iv.121 (bhamara-gaṇa˚).
pp. of anu + kirati
(adj.) (-˚) “doing correspondingly” giving back, retaliating Ja ii.205 (kicca˚).
= Sk. anukurvat, ppr. of anukaroti
see anukaroti.
freq. spelling for anukūla.
(adj.) = anukula Sdhp 242 (iccha˚ according to wish).
(adj.) favourable, agreeable, suitable, pleasant Vv-a 280; spelt anukula at Sdhp 297, Sdhp 312.
-bhava complaisance, willingness Vva.71. -yañña a propitiative sacrifice DN i.144 (expld. at DN-a i.302 as anukula˚ = sacrifice for the propagation of the clan).
anu + kūla, opp. paṭikūla
not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. ˚anto Ja v.10; and pp. ˚ita without regret or in plenty Pv-a 13.
an + ukkaṇṭhati
(nt.) having no lack anything, being contented or happy Ja vi.4.
an + ukkaṇṭhana
1. order, turn, succession, going along; only in instr. anukkamena gradually, in due course or succession Ja i.157, Ja i.262, Ja i.290; Vv-a 157; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 35 etc.
2. that which keeps an animal in (regular step, i.e. a bridle MN i.446; Snp 622 (sandānaṃ saha˚).
to anukkamati
1. to follow, go along (a path = acc.) AN v.195; Iti 80 (maggaṃ).
2. to advance (not with Morris JP T S. 1886, 111 as “abandon”) SN i.24 Thag 194.
anu + kram
to throw out Cp xi.6 (vaṭṭaṃ).
anu + khipati
compensation Vin i.285.
anu + khepa, see anukkhipati
to dig after or further Ja v.233.
anu + khaṇati
(adj.) in cpd. khudda˚; whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin ii.287 = DN ii.154 = Mil 142; Mil 144.
anu + khuddaka
(-˚) (adj ■ suff.) following or followed by, going after, undergoing, being in or under standing under the influence of Snp 332 (vasa˚; in the power of), 791 (ejā˚; = abhibhūta Snp 527), 1095 (Māra vasa˚; = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd ii.507); Iti 91 (ejā˚; ) Ja iii.224 (vasa˚; = vasavattin C.); Mvu 7, Mvu 3.
fr. anu + gam
to go after, to follow, to go or fall into (w. acc.) Kp-a 223; Pv-a 141 (˚gacchanto) aor. ˚gamāsi Vin i.16, & anvagā Mvu 7, Mvu 10; Mvu 3rd pl anvagū Snp 586 (vasaṃ = vasaṃ gata Snp-a 461). Pass anugammati, ppr. anugammamāna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned with Ja i.53; Ja v.370. pp. anugata (q.v.).
anu + gacchati
(adj.) gone after, accompanied by, come to; following; fig. fallen or gone into, affected with (-˚), being a victim of, suffering MN i.16; DN iii.85 DN iii.173 (parisā); AN ii.185 (sota˚, v.l. anudhata); Ja ii.292 (samudda˚); v.369; Nd ii.32 (taṇhā˚); Pv-a 102 (nāmaṃ mayhaṃ a. has been given to me), 133 (kammaphala˚).
pp. of anugacchati
(f.) (-˚) following, being in the train of, falling under, adherence to, dependence on SN i.104 (vas˚ being in the power). Usually in cpd. diṭṭhānugati a sign (lit. belonging to) of speculation Vin ii.108; SN ii.203; Pp 33; Dhp-a iv.39.
fr. anu + gam
following after, only as adj. in dur˚ difficult to be followed Ja iv.65.
fr. anu + gam
(adj.) going along with, following, accompanying; resulting from, consequential on Kp viii.8 (nidhi a treasure acc. a man to the next world); Ja iv.280 (˚nidhi ); Mil 159 (parisā); Pv-a 132, Pv-a 253 (dānaṃ nāma ˚aṃ nidānan ti).
(adj.) following, attending on; an attendant, follower Snp-a 453 (= anuyutta).
fr. anugacchati
to sing after or to, recite (a magic formula or hymn) praise, celebrate DN i.104, DN i.238; Snp 1131 (anugāyissaṃ); Mil 120.
anu + gāyati
to plunge into, to enter (acc.) Sdhp 611.
anu + gāhati
to be greedy after, to covet Snp 769 (cp. Nd i.12); Ja iii.207; Ja iv.4 (= giddhā gathitā hutvā allīyanti C.). pp. ˚giddhā (q.v.). Cp. abhigijjhati.
anu + gijjhati
greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Snp 86 (anânu˚), 144, 952; Thag 580.
pp. of anugijjhati
(adj.) compassionate, ready to help Pv-a 42 ˚sīla.
cp. anuggaha
(adj.) compassionate, commiserating, helping Pv-a 69 (= anukampaka).
= anugganha
(nt.) anuggaha1 Dhs-a 403. Anu(g)ganhati
to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection DN i.53 (vācaṃ; cp. DN-a i.160: sārato agaṇhaṇto); Ja ii.74; Nd ii.50 (ppr. med ˚gayhamāna = anukampamāna); Pp 36; Pv-a 181 (imper. anuggaṇha = anukampassu). pp. anuggahīta (q.v.).
anu + gaṇhāti
“taking up”, compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit SN ii.11 SN iii.109; SN iv.104; SN v.162; AN i.92, AN i.114; AN ii.145; AN iv.167; AN v.70; Iti 12, Iti 98; Ja i.151; Ja v.150; Pp 25; Pv-a 145; Thag-a 104.
anu + grah
(adj.) not taking up Snp 912 (= na gaṇhāti Nd i.330).
an + uggaha
(& ˚ita) commiserated, made happy, satisfied MN i.457; SN ii.274; SN iii.91; SN iv.263; AN iii.172; Ja iii.428.
pp. of anuggaṇhāti
(adj.) helping, assisting SN iii.5; SN v.162; Mil 354 (nt. = help).
fr. anuggaha
not to unfasten or open (a door) Mil 371 (kavāṭaṃ).
an + ugghāṭeti
not shaking, a steady walk Ja vi.253.
an + ugghāta
(adj.) not shaking, not jerking, Ja vi.252; Vv 53 (read ˚ī for i); Vv-a 36.
fr. last
to smell, snuff, sniff up Mil 343 (gandhaṃ).
anu + ghāyati1
to follow (along) after, to go after DN i.235; MN i.227; Thag 481, Thag 1044; Caus ˚āpeti MN i.253, cp. Lal 147, Lal 3; Mvu i.350.
anu + cankamati
(nt.) sidewalk Ja i.7.
fr. anucankamati
to move along, to follow; to practice; pp. anuciṇṇa & anucarita; (q.v.)
anu + cariti
(-˚) connected with, accompanied by, pervaded with DN i.16, DN i.21 (vīmaṃsa˚ anuvicarita DN-a i.106); MN i.68 (id.); Mil 226.
pp. of anucarati
(pp.) 1. pursuing, following out, practising, doing; having attained or practised Vin ii.203 = Iti 86 (pamādaṃ); Ja i.20 (v.126); Thag 236 Thag 2, Thag 206; Dpvs iv.9.
2. adorned with, accompanied by connected with Ja iv.286.
pp. of anucarati
(nt.) thinking, upon, intention, care for Pv-a 164.
fr. anucinteti
to think upon, to meditate, consider SN i.203 (v.l. for anuvicinteti).
anu + cinteti
see anujjangin.
(& ˚ya) (adj.) “according to one’s skin”, befitting, suitable, proper, pleasing, fit for, Ja i.58, Ja i.62, Ja i.126, Ja i.218; Ja ii.5; Ja iv.137, Ja iv.138; Mil 358; Dhp-a i.203, Dhp-a i.390; Dhp-a ii.55, Dhp-a ii.56; Vv-a 68, Vv-a 78; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 26 (= kappiya), 66, 81, 286. anucchaviya at Vin ii.7 (an˚) iii.120 (id. + ananulomika); Mil 13.
anu + chavi + ka
(adj.) (food) that is not thrown away or left over; untouched, clean (food) Ja iii.257; Dhp-a ii.3 (vv.ll. anucciṭṭha).
see ucchiṭṭha
to laugh at, deride, mock DN i.91; DN-a i.258 (cp. sañjagghati ibid 256).
anu + jagghati
to run after, to hasten after, to follow Ja vi.452 (= anubandhati).
anu + javati
(adj.) “born after” i.e. after the image of, resembling, taking after; esp. said of a son (putta), resembling his father, a worthy son Iti 64 (atijāta + opp. avajāta); Thag 827 (fig. following the example of) 1279; Ja vi.380; Dhp-a i.129; Dāvs ii.66.
anu + jāta
1. to give permission, grant, allow Vin iv.225; AN ii.197; Pv iv.167; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 79 Pv-a 142.
2. to advise, prescribe Vin i.83; Vin ii.301: Snp 982. grd. anuññeyya that which is allowed AN ii.197; pp anuññāta (q.v.) Caus. anujānāpeti Ja i.156.
anu + jānāti
to live after, i.e. like (acc.), to live for or on, subsist by Ja iv.271 (= upajīvati, tassânubhāvena jīvitaṃ laddhaṃ (C.) ■ pp. anujīvata (q.v.).
anu + jīvati
(nt.) living (after), living, livelihood, subsistence, life Snp 836 (= jīvitaṃ Snp-a 545).
pp. of anujīvati
(adj.-n.) living upon, another, dependent; a follower, a dependant AN i.152; AN iii.44; Ja iii.485; Dāvs v.43.
fr. anujīvati
(adj.) not straight, crooked, bent, in cpds. ˚aṅgin (anujjangin) with (evenly) bent limbs, i.e. with perfect limbs, graceful f. ˚ī Ep. of a beautiful woman Ja v.40 (= kañcana-sannibha-sarīrā C.); vi.500 (T. anuccangī C. aninditā agarahitangī); ˚gāmin going crooked i.e. snake Ja iv.330; ˚bhūta not upright (fig. of citta Ja v.293.
an + ujju
= anujju Ja iii.318.
(nt.) meditation, reflection, introspection Mil 352 (˚bahula).
anu + jhāna
(adj.) permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained DN i.88; Ja i.92; Ja ii.353 Ja ii.416; Pv i.123 (na a. = ananuññāta at id. p. Thig 129 expld. at Pv-a 64 by ananumata); Pp 28; DN-a i.247 DN-a i.248, DN-a i.267; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 81.
pp. of anujānāti
(nt.) being permitted, permission Ja ii.353.
abstr. to anuññāta
(adj.) not rising, not rousing oneself, inactive, lazy Thag 1033.
fr. an + uṭṭhahati
to carry out, look after, practise do Ja v.121 ■ pp. anuṭṭhita (q.v.).
anu + ṭhahati = ˚thāti, see ˚tiṭṭhati
(adj.) one who does not rouse himself, not getting up, inactive Dhp 280 (anuṭṭhahanto avāyāmanto Dhp-a iii.409).
ppr. of an + uṭṭhahati
one without energy or zeal Snp 96 (niddāsīlin sabhāsīlin + ) Snp-a 169 (viriya-tejavirahita).
n. ag. to an + uṭṭhahati
(nt.) “the not getting up”, inactivity, want of energy Dhp 241 (sarīra-paṭijagganaṃ akaronto Dhp-a iii.347).
an + uṭṭhāna
practising, effecting or effected, come to, experienced, done DN ii.103; SN iv.200; AN iii.290 sq.; AN iv.300; Ja ii.61; Mil 198; Pv-a 132 (cp. anugata).
pp. of anuṭṭhati = anutiṭṭhati
to lick up with one’s saliva DN-a i.138.
formally Sk. anuṣṭobhati, but in meaning = *anuṣṭīvati; anu + ṭṭhubhati, the etym. of which see under niṭṭhubhati
v.l. at Snp-a 569, see niṭṭhurin.
to bite Ja vi.192.
anu + ḍasati
to burn over again, burn thoroughly, fig. to destroy, consume Ja ii.330; Ja vi.423. Pass ˚ḍayhati Ja v.426 ■ Also spelt ˚dahati, e.g. at SN iv.190 = SN v.53; Thig 488.
anu + ḍahati
(nt.) conflagration, burning up, consumption Ja v.271; Thag-a 287 (d).
fr. anuḍahati
(adj.) not raised, not elated, not haughty, humble Snp 702 (care = uddhaccaṃ nâpajjeyya Snp-a 492).
uṇṇata
to be sorry for, to regret, repent, feel remorse Ja i.113; Ja iv.358; Ja v.492 (ppr. an-anutappaṃ); Dhp 67, Dhp 314; Pv ii.942; Dhp-a ii.40. grd. anutappa to be regretted AN i.22, AN i.77; AN iii.294, and anutāpiya AN iii.46 (an˚).
anu + tappati1; Sk. anutapyate, Pass. of anutapati
anguish, remorse, conscience Vv 405 (= vippaṭisāra Vv-a 180); Dhs-a 384.
fr. anu + tāpa
(adj.) repenting, regretting Thig 57, Thig 190; Vv 21; Vv-a 115.
fr. anutāpa
grd. of anutappati, q.v.
to beat Ja ii.280.
anu + taḷeti
to look after, to manage, carry on Ja v.113 (= anugacchati) Pv-a 78.
anu + tiṭṭhati see also anuṭṭhahati
(adv.) along side or near the bank (of a river) Snp 18 (= tīra-samīpe Snp-a 28) Cp. anu A b.
anu + tīre, loc. of tīra
(adj.) “nothing higher”, without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed, excellent, preeminent Snp 234 (= adhikassa kassaci abhāvato Kp-a 193), 1003; Dhp 23, Dhp 55 (= asadisa appaṭibhāga Dhp-a i.423); Pv iv.35 2 (dhamma); Dhs 1294; DN-a i.129; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 5, Pv-a 6, Pv-a 18, etc.
an + uttara
(nt.) preeminence, superiority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutti˚; ) at DN iii.219, or of 6 (viz. dassana˚, savana˚ lābha˚, sikkhā˚, pāricariyā˚, anussata˚; ) at DN iii.250 DN iii.281; AN i.22; AN iii.284, AN iii.325 sq., 452; Pts i.5. Cp. MN i.235; AN v.37. See also ānuttariya.
abstr. fr. anuttara
(adj.) not (lying) open, not exposed; fig. unexplained, unclear Ja vi.247.
an + uttāna
(f.) wailing, crying, lamenting Nd i.167 (= vācāpalāpa vippalāpa etc.).
fr. anutthunāti
to wail, moan, deplore, lament, bewail DN iii.86; Snp 827 (cp. Nd i.167); Dhp 156; Ja iii.115; Ja v.346, Ja v.479; Dhp-a iii.133; Pv-a 60 (wrongly applied for ghāyati, of the fire of conscience).
anu + thunati (thunāti); anu + stan
(adj.) not terrified, at ease Thag 864.
an + utrāsin
an inferior Thera, one who comes next to the elder Vin ii.212 (therānutherā Th. & next in age).;
anu + thera
to concede, grant, admit, fut. anudassati Mil 276, Mil 375.
anu + dadāti
(to sympathise with) see under anuddā.
manifested Mil 119.
pp. of anudasseti
see anuḍahati.
pointed out, appointed, dedicated, nt. consecration, dedication Ja v.393 (anudiṭṭha asukassa nāma dassatī ti C.); Pv i.107 (= uddiṭṭha Pv-a 50).
pp. of anudisati
(f.) an “after-view”, sceptical view, speculation, heresy DN i.12; MN ii.228; SN iii.45 sq. Thag 754; Mil 325; DN-a i.103. attānudiṭṭhi (q.v.) a soul-speculation.
anu + diṭṭhi
to point out, direct, bid, address Pv-a 99 (aor. anudesi + anvesi) ■ pp. anudiṭṭha (q.v.).
anu + disati
(f.) an intermediate point of the compass, often collectively for the usual 4 intermediate points DN i.222; SN i.122; SN iii.124.
anu + disā
to explain Mil 227 (dhammâdhammaṃ).
anu + dīpeti
a person sent with another, a travelling companion Vin ii.19, Vin ii.295; Dhp-a ii.76, Dhp-a ii.78.
anu + dūta
see anvadeva.
(f.) sympathy with (-˚) compassion, kindness, favour, usually as par˚; kindness to or sympathy with other people SN ii.218; SN v.169 (T. anudayatā); AN iii.184; Iti 72; Vb 356.
abstr. to anuddayā
(& anudayā) (f.) compassion, pity, mercy, care Vin ii.196; SN i.204; SN ii.199; SN iv.323; AN ii.176 AN iii.189; Pp 35 (anukampā); Ja i.147, Ja i.186, Ja i.214; Pv-a 70 Pv-a 88, Pv-a 181 (= anukampā). In compn anudaya˚; e.g. ˚sampanna full of mercy Ja i.151, Ja i.262; Pv-a 66.
anu + dayā
(f.) = anuddayā Dhs 1056, where also the other abstr. formations anuddāyanā & anuddāyitattaṃ “care, forbearance & consideration”; Dhs-a 362 (anudayatī ti anuḍdā).
contracted form of anuddayā
to spoil, corrupt, degrade Vin iv.148 (expln. here in slightly diff. meaning = codeti vā codāpeti vā to reprove, scold, bring down); Iti 42 Usually in ster. phrase rāgo cittaṃ a. lust degrades the heart Vin iii.111; MN i.26; SN i.186; AN i.266; AN ii.126; iii. 393 sq ■ pp. anuddhasta (q.v.).
anu + dhaṃseti
(adj.) not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Snp 850 (= uddhacca-virahita Snp-a 549, cp. anuṇṇata); Iti 30; Dhp 363 (= nibbutacitta Dhp-a iv.93); Vv 648; Pp 59.
an + uddhata
(adj.) not proud Snp 952 (= anussukin Snp-a 569) see niṭṭhurin.
an + uddharin
(adj.) spoilt, corrupt, degraded MN i.462 (citta); AN ii.126 (id.).
anu + dhasta, pp. of anuddhaṃseti, cp. Sk. apadhvasta
1. in compn. with dhamma as dhammānudhamma to be judged as a redupl. cpd after the manner of cpds. mentioned under anu iv. meaning “the Law in all its parts, the dhamma and what belongs to it, the Law in its fullness”. For instances see dhamma C. iv. Freq. in phrase dh˚-ânudh˚ -paṭipanna “one who masters the completeness of the Dh.”, e.g. SN ii.18; SN iii.163; Iti 81; Pts ii.189.
2. conformity or accordance with the Law, lawfulness, relation, essence, consistency truth; in phrase dhammassa (c˚) anudhammaṃ vyākaroti to explain the truth of the Dh. Vin i.234; DN i.161; MN i.368, MN i.482; SN ii.33; SN iii.6; SN iv.51; SN v.7. See further MN iii.30; Snp 963 (cp. Nd i.481 for exegesis) Also in cpd. ˚cārin living according to the Dhamma living in truth SN ii.81, SN ii.108; AN ii.8; Dhp 20 (cp. Dhp-a i.158); Vv 317; Snp 69 (see Nd ii.51).
anu + dhamma
(f.) [abstr. to anudhamma) lawfulness, conformity to the Dhamma AN ii.46; Pts i.35, Pts i.36.
to hold up DN-a i.61 (chattaṃ), cp. Ja 1.53, dhariyamāna.
anu + dhāreti
to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue MN i.474; SN i.9; Dhp 85; Thag 1174; Mil 253, Mil 372.
anu + dhāvati
(adj.-n.) one who runs after SN i.9, SN i.117.
fr. anudhāvati
(-tire) along the bank of the river SN iv.177 should be read anu nadītīre (= anu prep. c. loc.; see under anu A).
to incline, bend (intrs.), give way Mil 372 (of a bow).
anu + namati
“leading along”, friendliness, courtesy, falling in with, fawning DN iii.254 (˚saṃyojana); AN iv.7 sq (id.) MN i.191; Dhs 1059; Vb 145; Ne 79; combd. w opp. paṭigha (repugnance) at Mil 44, Mil 122, Mil 322.
fr. anuneti
(nt.) fawning Dhs-a 362.
fr. anuneti
(adj.) nasal; as tt. g. the sound ṃ; in ˚lopa apocope of the nasal ṃ Vv-a 114 Vv-a 253, Vv-a 275, Vv-a 333.
anu + nāsā + ika
(adj.) led, induced SN iv.71; Snp 781.
pp. of anuneti
one who reconciles or conciliates Pts ii.194 (netā vinetā anunetā).
n. ag. fr. anuneti
to conciliate, appease, win over, flatter SN i.232 (ppr. anunayamāna); pp. anunīta (q.v.).
anu + neti
see anūpa.
to shake, move, to be unsteady Thag 191 = Ud 41.
anu + pakampati
not attacking, instr. ˚ena not by attack (from external enemies) Vin ii.195.
an + upakkama
(adj.) blameless, irreproachahle DN i.113; Vin iv.160; Snp p.115; DN-a i.281.
an + upak˚
to push oneself forward, to encroach on DN i.122 (= anupavisati DN-a i.290) ger. anupakhajja pushing oneself in, intruding Vin ii.88 (= antopavisati), 213; iv.43 (= anupavisati); MN i.151, MN i.469; SN iii.113; Vism 18.
anu + pa + khandati
to encroach, intrude Vin v.163.
den. fr. anupakhajja, ger. of anupakkhandati
to go or return into (c. acc.) DN i.55 (anupeti + ).
anu + pa + gacchati
not hurting Dhp 185 (anūpa˚; metri causa; expld. by anupahananañ c’eva anupaghātanañ ca Dhp-a iii.238).
an + upaghāta
(adj.) heaped up, accumulated Thag-a 56.
anu + pa + cita, pp. of anupacināti
not to observe or notice Ja v.339 (= anoloketi C.; v.l. anapaviṇāti).
an + upacināti
to laugh at, to deride, mock over AN i.198 (v.l. anusaṃ˚).
anu + pa + jagghati
to follow, accompany Ja iv.304. - pp. anupanna (q.v.).
anu + pad
(adv.) every five days Pv-a 139 (+ anudasāhaṃ).
anu + pañcā + ahaṃ
(f.) a supplementary regulation or order Vin ii.286; Vin v.2 sq.
anu + paññatti
(f.) succession; as adv. in order, successively DN-a i.277 (kathā = anupubbikathā) Dhp-a iii.340 (anupaṭipāṭiyā = anupubbena); Vism 244.
anu + paṭipāti
(adj.) setting out after, following, attacking Ja v.452.
anu + pa + ṭhita
1. to follow, go after, Ja vi.555 anupatiyāsi Subj.).
2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin iii.106 = MN i.364; SN i.23 (read ˚patanti for ˚patatanti = Dhp 221 (dukkhā); Thag 41 = Thag 1167 (of lightning). pp. anupatita (q.v.). Cp. also anupāta & anupātin;.
anu + patati
“befallen”, affected with, oppressed by (-˚) SN ii.173 (dukkha˚); iii.69 (id.); Snp 334 (pamāda˚).
pp. of anupatati
(nt.) the fact of being attacked by, being a victim of (-˚) Snp-a 339.
abstr. of anupatita
(anuppatta) (having) attained, received, got to (c. acc), reached DN i.87–111; ii.2; Iti 38; Snp 027, Snp 635; Dhp 386, Dhp 403; Pv iv.166; Pv-a 59 (dukkhaṃ), 242. In phrase addhagata vayo-anuppatta having reached old age, e.g. Vin ii.188; DN i.48; Snp p.. 50, 92; Pv-a 149.
pp. of anupāpuṇāti; cp. Sk. anuprāpta
(anuppatti) (f.) attainment, accomplishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal SN i.46, SN i.52.
anu + patti
at Ja v.302 should be read as anu pathe by the way at the wayside; anu to be taken as prep. c. loc. (see anu A). C. explns. as janghamagga-mahāmaggānaṃ antare.
1. the “afterfoot”, i.e. second foot a verse, also a mode of reciting where the second foot is recited without the first one Vin iv.15 (cp. 355); Mil 340 (anupadena anupadaṃ katheti).
2. (adj.) (following) on foot, at every, step continuous, repeated, in ˚dhamma-vipassanā uninterrupted contemplation MN iii.25; ˚vaṇṇanā word-by-word explanation Dhs-a 168. As nt. adv. ˚ṃ close behind, immediately after (c. gen.) Ja ii.230 (tassânupadaṃ agamāsi) vi.422. Esp. freq. in combn. padānupadaṃ (adv.) foot after foot, i.e. in the footsteps, immediately behind Ja iii.504; Ja vi.555; Dhp-a i.69; Dhp-a ii.38.
cp. Sk. anupadaṃ adv., anu + pada
(anuppadātar) one who gives, or one who sets forth, effects, designs DN i.4 (cp DN-a i.74); AN ii.209.
n. ag. of anupadeti
(anuppadāna) (nt.) giving, administering, furnishing, the giving of (-˚) DN i.12 (cp. DN-a i.98; both read anuppādāna); Ja iii.205; Mil 315.
anu + pa + dāna, cp. anupadeti
(anuppadinna) given, handed over, furnished, dedicated Pv i.512.
pp. of anupadeti
(anuppadeti) to give out, give as a present, hand over; to design, set forth, undertake SN iii.131 (Pot. anuppadajjuṃ); MN i.416 (Pot. anupadajjeyya see dadāti i.3); Mil 210 (˚deti). fut. ˚dassati (see dadāti i.1); DN iii.92; SN iv.303 (v.l. SS for T. anusarissati); AN iii.43; Snp 983. ger. ˚datvā Snp-a 35. inf ˚dātuṃ AN i.117. pp. ˚dinna (q.v.).
anu + pa + dadāti
(adj.) free from danger, uninjured, safe Vin ii.79 = Vin ii.124 (+ anītika); iii.162; Dhp 338; Dhp-a iv.48; Pv-a 250 (expln. for siva).
an + upaddava
to disregard, to heed not, to neglect Dhp-a iv.197; Vv-a 260.
an + upadhār˚
(adj.) free from attachment (see upadhi) Vin i.36 (anupadhīka); DN iii.112 (anupadhika opp. to sa-upadhika); Snp 1057 (anūpadhīka T. but Nd ii.anūpadhika. with ū for u metri causa).
an + upadhi + ka
, gone into, reached, attained Snp 764 (māradheyya˚).
pp. of anupajjati
(anuppa˚) to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to continue Mil 132 ■ Caus. ˚āpeti ibid.
anu + pa + bandhati
(anuppa˚) (f.) nonstopping, not ceasing Mil 132.
abstr. to prec.
(anuppa˚) (f.) continuance, incessance, Pp 18 = Vb 357 (in exegesis of upanāha).
abstr. fr. anupabandhati
(f.) giving up worldly life in imitation of another SN v.67 = Iti 107.
anu + pabbajjā, cp. BSk. anupravrajati Divy 61
(adj.) unattached, “aloof” SN i.181 (akankha apiha + ).
an + upaya
to walk round and round, to go round about (c. acc.) Vin iii.119; SN i.75 (ger. ˚gamma ); Snp 447 (aor. ˚pariyagā = parito parito agamāsi Snp-a 393); Ja iv.267.
anu + pari + gacchati
to run up & down or to move round & round (cp. anuparivattati) S.; iii.150 (khīlan).
anu + pari + dhāvati
to go round about, to go about, to wander or travel all over (c. acc.) Vin ii.111; SN i.102, SN i.124; Thag 1235 (˚pariyeti), 1250 (id. to search) Pv iii.34 (= anuvicarati); Mil 38; Pv-a 92 (˚yāyitvā ger.) 217.
auu + pari + yāti
(adj) going round, encircling, in ˚patha the path leading or going round the city DN ii.83 = SN iv.194 = AN v.195; AN iv.107.
adjectivised ger. of anupariyāti
to go or move round, viz. 1. to deal with, be engaged in, perform, worship Vin iii.307 (ādiccaṃ); DN i.240; Pv-a 97.
2. to meet Mil 204 (Devadatto ca Bodhisatto ca ekato anuparivattanti).
3. to move round & round, move on and on keep on rolling (c. acc.), evolve S.; iii.150 (anuparidhāvati + ) Mil 253 (anudhāvati + kāyan).
anu + pari + vṛt
(f.) (-˚) dealing with, occupation, connection with SN iii.16.
anu + parivatti
to surround, stand by, attend on (c. acc.) Vin i.338; MN i.153; Dhp-a 1.55.
anu + pari + vāreti
should be written anu pariveṇiyaṃ (“in every cell, cell by cell”), anu here functioning as prep. c. loc. (see anu A Vin i.80, Vin i.106.
anu + pariveṇiyaṃ = loc. of pariveṇi
to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. acc.) SN iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattati).
anu + pari + sakkati
(nt.) dealing with, interest in SN iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattana).
fr. anuparisakkati
to surround, enfold, embrace MN i.306.
anu + pari + harati
(adj.) unsmeared, unstained, free from taint MN i.319, MN i.386 (in verse); as ˚ūpalitta in verse of Sn & Dh: Snp 211 (= lepānaṃ abhāvā Snp-a 261), 392 468, 790, 845; Dhp 353.
an + upalitta
(adj.) blameless, without fault, Mil 391.
grd. of an + upavadati
(anuppa˚) (adj.) to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire (cakkaṃ) Mil 342, Mil 362; Snp-a 454. See also anuvattaka.
(anuppa˚) to keep moving on after, to continue rolling, with cakkaṃ to wield supreme power after, i.e. in succession or imitation of a predecessor SN i.191; Mil 362. See also anuvatteti.
anu + pa + vatteti, fr. vṛt
not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dhp 185 (anūpa˚ in metre; expld at Dhp-a iii.238 as anupavādanañ c’eva anupavādāpanañ ca “not scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling”); adj. ˚vādaka Pp 60, & ˚vādin MN i.360.
an + upavāda
(anuppa˚) entered, gone or got into, fallen into (c. acc.) Mil 270, Mil 318 sq., 409 (coming for shelter); Pv-a 97, Pv-a 152 (Gangānadiṃ a. nadī flowing into the G.).
pp. of anupavisati
(f.) the fact of having entered Mil 257.
abstr. to anupaviṭṭha
to go into, to enter Dhp i.290; Vv-a 42 (= ogāhati) ■ pp. ˚paviṭṭha (q.v.) Caus. ˚paveseti (q.v.).
anu + pa + visati
(anuppa˚) to give, give over to, offer up, present, supply Vin i.221 (˚pavacchati); DN i.74 (= pavesati DN-a i.218); ii.78; MN i.446 MN iii.133; AN ii.64; AN iii.26 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); Ja v.394; Snp 208 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); Snp-a 256 (= anupavesati); Pv-a 28.
see under pavecchati
to make enter, to give over, to supply Snp-a 256 (= ˚pavecchati).
anu + pa + vis, cp. BSk. anupraveśayati Divy 238
to go along up to (c. acc.) Pv-a 179.
anu + pa + saṃkamati
not to go to. not to approach Dhp-a ii.30 (+ apayirupāsati).
an + upasank˚
(f.) not stopping, incessance, continuance Pp 18 (but id. p. at Vb 357 has anusansandanā instead); cp. anupabandhanā.
an + upasaṇṭhapanā
(adj.) observing, viewing, contemplating Thag 420.
fr. anupassati
to look at, contemplate, observe Snp 477; Pts i.57, Pts i.187; Snp-a 505.
anu + passati
(f.) looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation SN v.178 sq., Snp p.140; Pts i.10, Pts i.20, Pts i.96; Pts ii.37, Pts ii.41 sq. 67 sq.; Vb 194. See anicca˚, anatta˚, dukkha˚.
abstr. of anupassati, cf. Sk. anudarśana
(-˚) (adj.) viewing, observing, realising SN ii.84 sq., SN v.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dhp 7, Dhp 253; Snp 255, Snp 728; Pts i.191 sq.; Vb 193 sq., 236; Sdhp 411.
fr. anupassati
thrown up, blown up Mil 274.
anu + pa + hata, pp. of anu + pa + han
(adj.) not destroyed, not spoilt Dhp-a ii.33 (˚jivhapasāda).
an + upahata
attack in speech, contest, reproach AN i.161 (vāda˚).
of anupatati
(adj.) 1. following, indulging in Ja iii.523 (khaṇa˚).
2. attacking, hurting Ja v.399.
fr. anupāta
(adv.) at the foot Vism 182 (opp. anusīsaṃ at the head).
anu + pāda
anupādāniya, anupādāya, anupādiyāna, anupādiyiṭvā see upādiyati. Anupadana & Anupadi;
ger. of an + upādiyati = anupādāya
see upādāna & upādi;.
having been lead to or made to reach, attained, found Mil 252.
pp. of anupāpeti
(anuppā˚) to reach, attain, get to, find SN i.105; ger. anuppatvāna Pv ii.924 (˚pāpuṇitvā Pv-a 123) ■ pp. anupatta (q.v.) ■ Caus anupāpeti (q.v.).
anu + pāpuṇāti
to make reach or attain, to lead to, to give or make find Ja vi.88; Cp. xi. 4 (aor anupāpayi ); Mil 276 ■ pp. anupāpita (q.v.).
Caus. of anupāpuṇāti
wrong means Ja i.256; Sdhp 405.
an + upāya
see upāyāsa.
(adj.) guarding, preserving Sdhp 474.
anu + pālaka
(nt.) maintenance, guarding, keeping Dpvs iii.2.
fr. anupāleti
to safeguard, warrant, maintain Mil 160 (santatiṃ).
anu + pāleti
(adj.) without shoes Ja vi.552.
an + upāhana
(anuppiya) (adj) flattering, plessant, nt. pleasantness, flattery, in ˚bhāṇin one who flatters I iii.185; Ja ii.390; Ja v.360; and ˚bhāṇitar id. Vb 352.
anu + piya
at Pv-a 161 is to be read anuppīḷan (q.v.).
to ask or inquire after (c. acc.) Snp 432, Snp 1113 ■ pp. anupuṭṭha (q.v.).
anu + pucchati
asked Snp 782 (= pucchita Snp-a 521).
pp. of anupucchati
(adj.) following in one’s turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin ii.237 (mahāsamuddo a˚-ninno etc.); DN i.184; Snp 511; Ja v.155 (regularly formed, of ūrū). Cases adverbially: anupubbena (instr.) by and by, in course of time, later, gradually Vin i.83; Dhp 239 (= anupaṭipāṭiyā Dhp-a iii.340); Pp 41, Pp 64; Ja ii.2, Ja ii.105; Ja iii.127; Mil 22; Pv-a 19. anupubbaso (abl. cp. Sk. anupūrvaśaḥ) in regular order Snp 1000. In compn. both anupubba˚ & anupubbi˚ (q.v.).;
-kāraṇa gradual performance, graded practice MN i.446 -nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular succession, i.e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are the same as those mentioned under ˚vihāra & are enum;d. as such at DN iii.266, DN iii.290; AN iv.409, AN iv.456; Pts i.35. -vihāra a state of gradually ascending stages by means of which the highest aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness These are 9 stages, consisting of the 4 jhānas, the 4 āyatanāni & as the crowning phrase “saññā-vedayitanirodha” (see jhāna1). Enumd. as such in var. places, esp at the foll.: DN ii.156; DN iii.265, DN iii.290; AN iv.410; Nd ii.under jhāna; Pts i.5; Mil 176. -sikkhā regular instruction or study (dhammavinaye) MN i.479; MN iii.1 (+ ˚kiriyā ˚paṭipadā).
anu + pubba
(adj.) = anupubba, in cpd. pubbānupubbaka all in succession or in turn, one by one (on nature of this kind of cpd. see anu B iv.) Vin i.20 (˚ānaṃ kulānaṃ puttā the sons of each clan, one by one).
(nt.) acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 (= anukūla kiriyā i.e. as it pleases Vv-a 280) cp. ānupubbatā. Anupubbi-katha
fr. anupubba
(f.) a gradual instruction, graduated sermon regulated exposition of the ever higher values of four subjects (dāna-kathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚) i.e. charity righteousness, the heavens, and the Path. Bdhgh. explains the term as anupubbikathā nāma dānânantaraṃ sīlaṃ sīlânantaro saggo saggânantaro maggo ti etesaṃ dīpana-kathā (DN-a i.277). Vin i.15, Vin i.18; Vin ii.156, Vin ii.192; DN i.110; DN ii.41; MN i.379; Ja i.8; Vv-a 66, Vv-a 197, Vv-a 208; DN-a i.308; Dhp-a i.6; Mil 228 ■ The spelling is frequently ānupubbikathā (as to lengthening of anu see anu Note (a)), e.g. at DN i.110; DN ii.41; MN i.379; Ja i.8; Mil 228.
anupubba + kathā, formation like dhammi-kathā
1. to concentrate oneself on, to look carefully AN iii.23.
2. to consider, to show consideration for, Nd ii.50 (ppr. ˚amāna = anukampamāna) ■ Caus. anupekkheti to cause some one to consider carefully Vin ii.73.
anu + pekkhati
(f.) concentration (of thought) Dhs 8, Dhs 85, Dhs 284, Dhs 372.
abstr. fr. anupekkhana, see anupekkhatī
to go into DN i.55 (+ anupagacchati) SN iii.207; DN-a i.165.
anu + pa + i
to send forth after Mil 36.
anu + pa + iṣ
see anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ.
(adj.) to be nourished or fostered Sdhp 318.
grd. of anu + puṣ
in all combns. of anu + ppa see under headings anupa˚.
(S iii.131) see anupadeti.
(˚uppāda, ˚uppādeti) see uppanna etc.
(adj.) not molested, not oppressed (by robbers etc.) not ruined, free from harm Ja iii.443 Ja v.378; Vv-a 351; Pv-a 161.
an + uppīḷa
(nt.) flashing through, pervading Mil 148.
anu + pharaṇa
to sprinkle, moisten, make wet Ja v.242 (himaṃ C. pateyya).
anu + phusīyati, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati, Caus. of pruṣ
at Pv-a 56 is faulty reading for anubandhati (q.v.).
following, standing behind (piṭṭhito) DN i.1, DN i.226.
pp. of anubandhati
bondage MN iii.170; Iti 91.
anu + bandh
to follow, run after, pursue Ja i.195; Ja ii.230; Ja vi.452 (= anujavati); Pv-a 56 (substitute for anubajjhanti!), 103, 155. aor. ˚bandhi Ja ii.154, Ja ii.353 Ja iii.504; Pv-a 260 (= anvāgacchi). ger. ˚bandhitvā Ja i.254 grd. ˚bandhitabba MN i.106 ■ pp. anubaddha (q.v.).
anu + bandhati
(nt.) that which connects or follows, connection, consequence Ja vi.526 (˚dukkha).
fr. anubandhati
(nt.) rear-guard, retinue, suite, in ˚ṃ bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Mil 125.
anu + bala
to remember, recollect Ja iii.387 (with avabujjhati in prec. verse).
anu + bujjhati, Med. of budh, cp. Sk. avabudhyate
(nt.) awakening, recognition Pts i.18 (bujjhana + ).
fr. anubujjhati
1. awakened (act. & pass.), recognised, conceived, seen, known DN ii.123 (˚ā ime dhammā); SN i.137 (dhammo vimalen’ ânubuddho ii.203; iv.188; AN ii.1; AN iii.14; AN iv.105; Snp-a 431. In phrase buddhānubuddha (as to nature of cpd. see anu B iv. either “fully awakened (enlightened)” or “wakened by the wake” (Mrs. Rh. D.) Thag 679 = Thag 1246.
2 a lesser Buddha, inferior than the Buddha DN-a i.40. Cp buddhānubuddha.
pp. of anu + bodhati
awakening; perception, recognition, understanding SN i.126 (?) = AN v.46 (anubodhiṃ as aor. of anubodhati?); Pp 21; Mil 233. Freq. in compn. ananubodha (adj.) not understanding, not knowing the truth SN ii.92; SN iii.261; SN v.431; AN ii.1; AN iv.105; Dhs 390 Dhs 1061; Vv-a 321 (= anavabodha) and duranubodha (adj. hard to understand, difficult to know DN i.12, DN i.22; SN i.136.
anu + budh
to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aor. anubodhiṃ AN v.46 (?) = SN i.126 (anubodhaṃ) ■ Caus. ˚bodheti to awaken, fig. to make see to instruct Ja vi.139 (˚ayamāna)-pp. anubuddha (q.v.).
anu + budh
(nt.) awakening, understanding, recognition Pts i.18 (bodhana + ).
fr. anubodhati
to go along, wander, follow, tread (a path) Ja iv.399 (maggaṃ = pabbajati C.).
anu + vraj
(adj.) subject to the will of another, obedient, faithful, devoted Ja iii.521 Ja vi.557.
Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata
see ubbill˚.
see anuvyañjana.
strengthened with (-˚), full of Pts i.167.
pp. of anubrūheti
to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. acc.), foster SN i.178 (anubrūhaye); MN iii.187 (id., so read for manu˚), Thig 163 (˚ehi); Cp iii.12 (saṃvegaṃ anubrūhayiṃ aor.); Ja iii.191 (suññāgāraṃ). Often in phrase vivekaṃ anubrūheti to devote oneself to detachment or solitude, e.g. Ja i.9 (inf ˚brūhetuṃ); iii.31 (˚brūhessāmi), Dhp 75 (˚brūhaye ˚brūheyya vaḍḍheyya Dhp-a ii.103) ■ pp. anubrūhita (q.v.) Cp. also brūhana.
brūheti
(f.) talking to, admonition, scolding Vin ii.88 (anuvadanā + ).
anu + bhaṇana
to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in experience DN i.129; DN ii.12 (˚bhonti); MN ii.204; AN i.61 (atthaṃ ˚bhoti to have a good result); Ja vi.97 (˚bhoma) Pv i.1011 (˚bhomi vipākaṃ); Pv-a 52 (˚issati = vedissati) Sdhf 290. Esp. freq. with dukkhaṃ to suffer pain, e.g Pv-a i.1110 (˚bhonti); Pv-a 43, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 79 etc. (cp. anubhavana) ■ ppr. med. ˚bhavamāna Ja i.50; aor. ˚bhavi Pv-a 75 (sampattiṃ); ger. ˚bhavitvā Ja iv.1; Pv-a 4 (sampattiṃ), 67 (dukkhaṃ), 73 (sampattiṃ); grd. ˚bhaviyāna (in order to receive) Pv ii.85 (= anubhavitvā Pv-a 109). Pass. anubhūyati & ˚bhavīyati; to be undergone or being experienced; ppr. ˚bhūyamāna Pv-a 8, Pv-a 159 (mayā a. anubhūta), 214 (attanā by him) & ˚bhavīyamāna Pv-a 33 (dukkhaṃ) ■ pp. anubhūta (q.v.).
anu + bhavati
(nt.) experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cf. Cpd. 229, 2321) Ne 28 (iṭṭhâniṭṭh-ânubhavana-lakkhanā vedanā “feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant”); Mil 60 (vedayita-lakkhaṇā vedanā anubhavana-lakkhaṇā ca); Pv-a 152 (kamma-vipāka˚). Esp. in combn. with dukkha˚; suffering painful sensations, e.g. at Ja iv.3; Mil 181; Dhp-a iv.75; Pv-a 52.
fr. anubhavati
a secondary or inferior part, (after-)share, what is left over Vin ii.167.
anu + bhāga
to be afraid of Ja vi.302 (kissa nv’ ânubhāyissaṃ, so read for kissânu˚).
anu + bhāyati
orig. meaning “experience, concomitance” and found only in cpds. as-˚, in meaning “experiencing the sensation of or belonging to, experience of, accordance with”, e.g. maha˚ sensation of greatness rājâ˚ s. belonging to a king, what is in accordance with kingship, i.e. majesty. Through preponderance of expressions of distinction there arises the meaning of anubhāva as “power, majesty, greatness, splendour etc.” & as such it was separated from the 1;st component and taken as ānubhāva with ā instead of a, since the compositional character had obliterated the character of the a. As such (ānubhāva abs.) found only in later language ■ (1) anubhāva (-˚): mahānubhāva (of) great majesty, eminence power SN i.146 sq.; SN ii.274; SN iv.323; Snp p.93; Pv ii.112 Pv-a 76. deva˚; of divine power or majesty DN ii.12; devatā˚; id. Ja i.168; dibba˚; id. Pv-a 71, Pv-a 110. rājā˚; kingly splendour, pomp DN i.49; Ja iv.247; Pv-a 279 etc. -anubhāvena (instr ■ ˚) in accordance with, by means of Ja ii.200 (angavijjā˚); Pv-a 53 (iddh˚), 77 (kamma˚), 148 (id.), 162 (rāja˚), 184 (dāna˚), 186 (puñña˚). yathānubhāvaṃ (adv.) in accordance with (me), as much as (1 can); after ability, according to power SN i.31; Vv 15 (yathābalaṃ Vv-a 25) ■ (2) ānubhāva majesty power magnificence, glory, splendour Ja v.10, Ja v.456; Pv ii.811 Vv-a 14; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 122, Pv-a 272. See also ānu˚.
fr. anubhavati
(f.) majesty, power SN i.156 (mahā˚).
= anubhāva + tā
to speak after, to repeat DN i.104; Mil 345; DN-a i.273.
anu + bhāsati
(having or being) experienced, suffered, enjoyed Pv-a ii.1218. nt. suffering, experience Ja i.254; Mil 78, Mil 80.
pp. of anubhavati
(nt.) the fact of having to undergo, experiencing Pv-a 103.
abstr. fr. ppr. Pass. of anubhavati
(-dassika) see anoma˚.
at Ja v.201 should be read anu magge along the road, by the way; anu here used as prep. c. loc (see anu A b).
1. to strike along, to stroke, to touch DN-a i.276 (= anumasati).
2. to beat, thresh fig. to thresh ont Ja vi.548; Mil 90 ■ Pass. anumajjīyati Mil 275 (cp. p. 428).
anu + majjati
(nt.) threshing out, pounding up (Dhs. trsl. 11), always used with ref. to the term vicāra (q.v.) Mil 62; Dhs-a 114; DN-a i.63, DN-a i.122.
abstr. fr. anumajjati
(adj.) mediocre, without going to extremes Ja iv.192; Ja v.387.
anu + majjha
to assent, approve, give leave Thag 72 ■ pp. anumata (q.v.).
anu + maññati
approved of, given consent to, finding approval, given leave DN i.99 (= anuññāta DN-a i.267); Ja v.399 (= muta); Mil 185, Mil 212, Mil 231, Mil 275; Pv-a 64 (= annuññāta).
pp. of anumaññati
(f.) consent, permission, agreement, assent, approval Vin ii.294, Vin ii.301, Vin ii.306; DN i.137 DN i.143; Dpvs iv.47, Cf. v.18; DN-a i.297; Vv-a 17, Pv-a 114.
from anumaññati
see aṇu˚.
to touch DN i.106 (= anumajjati DN-a i.276).
anu + masati
inference Mil 330 (naya + ), 372, 413; Sdhp 74.
fr. anu + man
a secondary friend, a follower. acquaintance Ja v.77.
anu + mitta
to observe draw an inference MN i.97; Pv-a 227 (˚anto + nayaṃ nento ). See also anumīyati.
cf. Sk. anumāti, anu + mināti from mi, Sk. minoti, with confusion of roots mā & mi;
to observe, conclude or infer from SN iii.36 Cp. anumināti.
Sk. anumīyate, Pass. of anu + mā, measure, in sense of Med.
(adj.) one who enjoys, one who is glad of or thankful for (c. acc.) Vin v.172; Pv-a 122; Sdhf 512.
fr. anumodati
to find satisfaction in (acc.), to rejoice in, be thankful for (c. acc.), appreciate, benefit from, to be pleased, to enjoy Vin ii.212 (bhattagge a. to say grace after a meal); SN ii.54; AN iii.50 (˚modanīya ) iv.411; Dhp 177 (ppr. ˚modamāna ); Iti 78; Pv ii.919 (dānaṃ ˚modamāna = enjoying, gladly receiving); 1,54 (anumodare = are pleased; pitisomanassajātā honti Pv-a 27); Ja ii.112; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 81, Pv-a 201) imper. modāhi ) Sdhp. 501 sq ■ pp. anumodita (q.v.).
anu + modati
(nt.) “according to taste”, i.e. satisfaction, thanks, esp. after a meal or after receiving gifts = to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving In latter sense with dadāti (give thanks for = loc.) karoti (= Lat. gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks) ˚ṃ datvā Pv-a 89; ˚ṃ katvā Ja i.91; Dhp-a iii.170, Dhp-a iii.172; Vv-a 118; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 47; ˚ṃ vatvā Vv-a 40 (pānīyadāne for the gift of water), 295, 306 etc. ˚ṃ karoti also “to do a favour” Pv-a 275. Cp. further Dhp-a i.198 (˚gāthā verses expressing thanks, benediction); ii.97 (Satthāraṃ ˚ṃ yāciṃsu asked his blessing); Pv-a 23 (˚atthaṃ in order to thank), 26 (id.), 121, 141 (katabhatta˚), 142; Sdhp 213, Sdhp 218, Sdhp 516.
fr. anumodati
enjoyed, rejoiced in Pv-a 77.
pp. of anumodati
(adj.) not out of mind, sane, of sound mind Mil 122; Sdhp 205.
an + ummatta
at AN v.22 is doubtful reading (v.l. anuyutta ). The meaning is either “inferior to, dependent on, a subject of, a vassal” or “attending on”. The explanation may compare Sk. anuyātaṃ attendance, in which latter case anu-yantṛ would be “an inferior ruler” and P. yanta would represent the n. a.g. yantā as a-stem. The v.l. is perhaps preferable as long as other passages with anuyanta are not found (see anuyutta 2).
anu + yā, cp. anuyāyin or Sk. yantṛ ruler [ yam
(adj) offering after the example of another DN i.142.
fr. anu + yaj
gone through or after, followed, pursued SN ii.105 (magga); AN v.236; Iti 29; Mil 217.
pp. of anuyāti
(& anuyāyati) 1. to go after, to follow Ja vi.49 (fut. ˚yissati), 499 (yāyantaṃ anuyāyati = anugacchati C).
2. to go along by, to go over, to visit Mil 391 (˚yāyati) ■ pp. anuyāta (q.v.). See also anusaṃyāyati
anu + yā
(adj.) going after, following, subject to (gen.) Snp 1017 (anânuyāyin); Ja vi.309; Mil 284.
cp. Sk. anuyāyin, anu + yā
(f.) (& ˚yuñjana nt.) application or devotion to (-˚) Mil 178; Vv-a 346 (anuyujjanaṃ wrong spelling?)
abstr. fr. anuyuñjati
1. to practice, give oneself up to (acc.), attend, pursue SN i.25, SN i.122 (˚yuñjan “in loving self-devotion” Mrs. Rh. D.); iii.154; iv.104, 175; Dhp 26 (pamādaṃ = pavatteti Dhp-a i.257), 247 (surāmeraya-pānaṃ = sevati bahulīkaroti Dhp-a iii.356); Pv-a 61 (kammaṭṭhānaṃ).
2. to ask a question, to call to account take to task Vin ii.79; Vv 335; ppr. Pass. ˚yuñjiyamāna Pv-a 192 ■ pp. anuyutta (q.v.) ■ Caus. anuyojeti “to put to”, to address, admonish, exhort Dhp-a iv.20.
anu + yuñjati
1. applying oneself to, dealing with, practising, given to, intent upon DN i.166, DN i.167; iii. 232 = AN ii.205 (attaparitāpan’ ânuyogaṃ a.); SN iii.153 SN iv.104; Snp 663 (lobhaguṇe), 814 (methunaṃ = samāyutta Snp-a 536), 972 (jhān˚); Pp 55; Pv-a 163 (jāgariya˚) 206.
2. following, attending on; an attendant, inferior vassal, in expression khattiya or rājā anuyutta a prince royal or a smaller king (see khattiya 3 b) AN v.22 (v l for T. anuyanta, q.v.); Snp 553 (= anugāmin, sevaka Snp-a 453).
pp. of anuyuñjati
1. application, devotion to (-˚), execution, practice of (-˚); often combd. with anuyutta in phrase ˚anuyogaṃ anuyutta = practisiṅg e.g. Vin i.190 (maṇḍan’ ânuyogaṃ anuyutta); DN iii.113 (attakilamath’ ânuyogaṃ a.); AN ii.205 (attaparitāpan’ ânuyogaṃ a.) ■ As adj. (-˚) doing, given to, practising (cp. anuyutta). DN i.5; DN iii.107; MN i.385; SN i.182; SN iii.239 SN iv.330; SN v.320; AN i.14; AN iii.249; AN iv.460 sq.; V. 17 sq. 205; Ja i.90 (padhān’ ânuyogakiccaṃ); Vv 8438 (dhamma˚) Mil 348; DN-a i.78, DN-a i.104.
2. invitation, appeal, question (cp. anuyuñjati 2) Mil 10 (ācariyassa ˚ṃ datvā).
Sk. anuyoga, fr. anu + yuj
(adj.) applying oneself to, full of application or zeal, devoted Pv-a 207.
anuyoga + vant
(adj.) applying oneself to, devoted to (-˚) Dhp 209 (atta˚ given to oneself, self-concentrated).
fr. anuyoga
(adj.) preserving, keeping up Ja iv.192 (vaṃsa˚; ); vi.1 (id.).
fr. anurakkhati, cp. ˚rakkhin
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) guarding, protection, preservation DN iii.225 sq.; AN ii.16 sq.; Ja i.133 Pp 12; Dpvs iv.24 (adj.); Vv-a 32 (citta˚); Sdhp 449.
abstr. fr. anurakkhati
to guard, watch over (acc.), preserve, protect, shield Snp 149; Dhp 327; Ja i.46; Pp 12-ppr. med.˚ rakkhamāna(ka) as adj. Sdhp 621.
anu + rakkhati
(f.) guarding, protection, preservation SN iv.323 (anuddayā a. anukampā).
= anurakkhaṇā
(adj.) guarding, preserving, keeping Ja v.24.
fr. anurakkhati
(adj.) in dur˚; difficult to guard Vin iii.149.
f. anurakkhati
illumined, brighterted, beautified Bv i.45 (byāmapabhā˚ by the shine of the halo); Vv-a 4 (sañjhātapa˚ for sañjhāpabhā˚).
pp. of anu + rañjeti, Caus. of rañj
(adj.) pp. of anu + rañj ] attached or devoted to, fond of, faithful Thig 446 (bhattāraṃ); Ja i.297; Mil 146.
to resound, to sound after, linger (of sound) Mil 63.
anu + ravati
(f.) lingering of the sound, resounding Mil 63.
abstr. fr. anuravati
(adv.) in secret, face to face, private MN i.27.
anu + raho
to conform oneself to, have a regard for, approve, to be pleased AN iv.158; Dhs A 362 ■ pp. anuruddha (q.v.).
Sk. anurudhyate, Pass. of anu + rudh
enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased SN iv.71, (anānuruddha).
pp. of anurujjhati
(adj.) suitable, adequate, seeming, fit, worthy; adapted to, corresponding, conform with (-˚ Ja i.91; Ja vi.366 (tad˚); Pv-a 61 (ajjhāsaya˚ according to his wish), 128 (id.) 78, 122, 130, 155; etc. Cp. also paṭirūpa in same meaning.
anu + rūpa
to cry after, cry for Ja iii.166 = Pv i.127 (dārako candaṃ a.).
anu + rodati
compliance, consideration satisfaction (opp. virodha ) SN i.111; SN iv.210; Snp 362; Dhs 1059; Vb 145; Dhs-a 362.
fr. anu + rudh
(f.) scolding, blame, accusation Vin ii.88 (spelt anullapanā; combd. with anuvadana & anubhaṇanā).;
anu + lapanā, lap
(adj.) anointed, besmeared Ja i.266; Pv-a 211.
cp. Sk. anulipta, pp. of anulimpati
to anoint, besmear, Mil 394 (˚limpitabba). Caus. ˚limpeti in same meaning Mil 169 and ˚lepeti Milm 169 (grd. ˚lepanīya to be treated with ointment) ■ pp. anulitta (q.v.).
anu + limpati
(nt.) anointing Mil 353, Mil 394.
fr. anulimpati
anointing Mil 152.
fr. anu + lip
(adj.) looking (up) at, seeing (-˚) MN i.147 (sīsa˚).
fr. anu + loketi, cp. Sk. & P. avalokin & anuviloketi
(adj.) “with the hair or grain”, i.e. in natural order, suitable, fit, adapted to, adaptable straight forward DN ii.273 (anānuloma, q.v.) SN iv.401; Pts ii.67, Pts ii.70; Dhp-a ii.208 ■ nt. direct order, state of fitting in, adaptation Mil 148.
-ñāṇa insight of adaptation (cp. Cpd. 66, 68) Dhp-a ii.208. -paṭiloma in regular order & reversed, forward backward (Ep. of paṭiccasamuppāda, also in BSk.) Vin i.1; AN iv.448.
Sk. anu + loma
(& ˚ya ) (adj.) suitable, fit, agreeable; in proper order, adapted to (-˚) Vin ii.7 (an˚) iii.120 (an˚ = ananucchaviya); iv.239; AN i.106; AN iii.116 sq.; Iti 103 (sāmaññassa˚); Snp 385 (pabbajita˚); Kp-a 243 (ananulomiya); Dhs-a 25; Sdhp 65.
fr. anuloma
to conform to, to be in accordance with Mil 372.
v. denom. fr. anuloma
(nt.) smallness, littleness, insignificance Vv-a 24.
abstr. fr. an + uḷāra
(adj.) to be blamed, censurable, worthy of reproach Snp p.78 (an˚ = anuvādavimutta Snp-a 396).;
grd. of anu + vadati, cp. anuvāda & Sk. avavadya
(adj.) 1. = anupavattaka (q.v.) Thag 1014 (cakka˚).
2. following, siding with (-˚) Vin iv.218 (ukkhittânuvattikā f.).
fr. anuvatteti
1. to follow, imitate, follow one’s example (c. acc.), to be obedient DN ii.244; Vin ii.309 (Bdhgh.); iv.218; Ja i.125, Ja i.300; DN-a i.288; Pv-a 19.
2. to practice, execute Pv iv.712 ■ Caus. ˚vatteti (q.v.).
Sk. anuvartati, anu + vattati
(nt.) complying with, conformity with (-˚), compliance, observance, obedience Ja i.367 (dhamma˚); v.78.
abstr. fr. anuvattati
(adj.) following, acting according to or in conformity with (-˚), obedient Ja ii.348 (f. ˚inī) iii.319 (id.); Dhp 86 (dhamma˚); Vv 155 (vasa˚ = anukūlabhāvena vattana sīla Vv-a 71); Dhp-a ii.161.
fr. anuvattati
= anupavatteti (q.v.) Thag 826 (dhammacakkaṃ: “after his example turn the wheel Mrs. Rh. D.).
anu + vatteti
to blame, censure, reproach Vin ii.80, Vin ii.88 ■ grd. anuvajja (q.v.).
Sk. ava˚; anu + vadati
(f.) blaming, blame, censure Vin ii.88 (anuvāda + ).
fr. anuvadati
to live with somebody, to dwell, inhabit Ja ii.421. Caus. ˚vāseti to pass, spend (time) Ja vi.296 ■ pp. ˚vuttha (q.v.).
anu + vasati
(adv.) for one rainy season; every rainy season or year, i.e. annually C. on Thag 24.
anu + vassa
(adj.) one who has (just) passed one rainy season Thag 24 (“scarce have the rains gone by” Mrs. Rh. D.; see trsl. p. 29 n. 2).
fr. anuvassaṃ
to say after, to repeat (words), to recite or make recite after or again DN i.104 (= tehi aññesaṃ vācitaṃ anuvācenti DN-a i.273); Mil 345 Cp. anubhāseti.
anu + Caus. of vac
a forward wind, the wind that blows from behind, a favourable wind; ˚ṃ adv. with the wind, in the direction of the wind (opp. paṭivātaṃ ) AN i.226 (˚paṭivātaṃ); Sdhp 425 (paṭivāta˚). In anuvāte (anu + vāte) at Ja ii.382 “with the wind, facing the w. in front of the wind” anu is to be taken as prep. c. loc & to be separated from vāte (see anu A b.).;
anu + vā to blow
only in connection with the making of the bhikkhus’ garments (cīvara) “weaving on, supplementary weaving, or along the seam”, i.e. hem, seam, binding Vin i.254, Vin i.297; Vin ii.177; Vin iv.121 (aggala + ); Pv-a 73 (anuvāte appabhonte since the binding was insufficient).
anu + vā to weave (?) in analogy to vāta from vā to blow
1. blaming, censure, admonition Vin ii.5 Vin ii.32; AN ii.121 (atta˚, para˚); Vb 376.
2. in combn. vādānuvāda: talk and lesser or additional talk, i.e. “small talk” (see anu B iv.) DN i.161; MN i.368.
-adhikaraṇa a question or case of censure Vin ii.88 sq.; Vin iii.164 (one of the 4 adhikaraṇāni, q.v.).
fr. anuvadatī, cp. Sk. anuvāda in meaning of “repetition”
(nt.) an oily enema, an injection Mil 353.
fr. anuvāseti
to treat with fragrant oil, i.e. to make an injection or give an enema of salubrious oil Mil 169; grd. ˚vāsanīya ibid.; pp. ˚vāsita Mil 214.
anu + vāseti, Caus. of vāsa3 odour, perfume
(adj.) dispersed over SN v.277 sq. (+ anuvisaṭa).
anu + vi + khitta, pp. of anu + vikkhipati
to take care of, regard, heed, consider Thag 109.
anu + vi + gaṇeti
to wander about, stroll roam through, explore DN i.235; Ja ii.128; Ja iii.188; Pv-a 189 (= anupariyāti) ■ Caus. ˚vicāreti to think over (lit. to make one’s mind wander over), to meditate ponder (cp. anuvicinteti); always combd. with anuvitakketi (q.v.) AN i.264 (cetasā), iii.178 (dhammaṃ cetasā a.) ■ pp. anuvicarita (q.v.).
anu + vi + carati
reflected, pondered over, thought out SN iii.203 (manasā); DN-a i.106 (= anucarita ).
pp. of anuvicāreti
meditation, reflexion, thought Dhs 85 (= vicāra ).
anu + vicāra, cf. anuvicāreti
one who examines, an examiner Mil 365.
fr. anu + vicināti
to think or ponder over, to meditate DN ii.203; SN i.203 (yoniso ˚cintaya, imper “marshall thy thoughts in ordered governance” Mrs. Rh. DN v.l. anucintaya); Thag 747; Dhp 364; Iti 82 (dhammaṃ ˚ayaṃ); Ja iii.396; Ja iv.227; Ja v.223 (dhammaṃ ˚cintayanto).
anu + vi + cinteti
having known or found out, knowing well or thoroughly, testing, finding out MN i.301, MN i.361 (v.l. ˚vijja ); AN ii.3, AN ii.84; AN v.88; Dhp 229 (= jānitvā Dhp-a iii.329); Snp 530 (= anuviditvā Snp-a 431) Ja i.459 (= jānitvā C.); iii.426; Pug. 49.
-kāra a thorough investigation, examination, test Vin i.236 (here spelt anuvijja ) = MN i.379 (= ˚viditvā C.) AN iv.185.
ger. of anuvijjati, for the regular from anuvijja prob. through influence of anu + i (anu-v-icca for anvicca) cf. anveti & adhicca; & see anuvijjati
one who finds out, an examiner Vin v.161.
fr. anuvijja, ger. of anuvijjati
to know thoroughly, to find out, to trace, to come to know; inf ˚vijjitiṃ Ja iii.506; ger. ˚viditvā Snp-a 431, also ˚vijja vicca; (see both under anuvicca); grd. ananuvejja not to be known, unfathomable, unknowable MN i.140 (Tathāgato ananuvejjo) ■ Caus. anuvijjāpeti to make some one find out Ja v.162 ■ pp. anuvidita (q.v.).
anu + vid, with fusion of Vedic vetti to know, and Pass. of vindati to find (= vidyate)
1. to pierce or be pierced, to be struck or hurt with (instr.) Ja vi.439–2. to be affected with, to fall into, to incur Dhp-a iii.380 (aparādhaṃ) ■ pp. anuviddha (q.v.).
anu + vyadh
to reflect, think, ponder over, usually combd with anuvicāreti DN i.119; DN iii.242; SN v.67 = Iti 107 (anussarati + ); AN iii.383.
anu + vi + takketi
found out, recognised; one who has found out or knows well Snp 528, Snp 530 (= anubuddha Snp-a 431). Same in B.Sk., e.g. Mvu iii.398.
pp. of anuvijjati
(adj.) pierced, intertwined or set with (-˚) Vv-a 278.
pp. of anuvijjhati
to act in conformity with, to follow (instruction) MN ii.105 = Thag 875; SN iv.199; Ja ii.98; Ja iii.357.
cf. Sk. anuvidhīyate & adj. anuvidhāyin; Pass. of anu + vi + dhā, cf. vidahati
(f.) acting according to, conformity with MN i.43.
abstr. fr. anuvidhīyati
to look round at, look over, survey, muster MN i.339; Snp p.140; Ja i.53; Mil 7 (lakaṃ), 21 (parisaṃ), 230.
anu + vi + loketi; B.Sk. anuvilokayati
an “after-evolution”, devolution; as part of a bhikkhu’s dress: a sub-vivaṭṭa (q.v.) Vin i.287 (vivaṭṭa + ).
anu + vivaṭṭa
(anu + visaṭa, pp. of anu + vi + sṛ; ] spread over SN v.277 sq.; Ja iv.102.
living with, staying, dwelling Ja ii.42 (cira˚); v.445 (id.).
pp. of anuvasati, cf. Sk. anūṣita
(adj.) in an˚ see anuvijjati. Anuvyanjana & anubyanjana;
(e.g. Vin iv.15; Ja i.12) (nt.) accompanying (i.e. secondary attribute, minor or inferior characteristic, supplementary or additional sign or mark (cf. mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇa) Vin i.65 (abl. anuvyañjanaso “in detail”); MN iii.126; SN iv.168; AN iv.279 (abl.); v.73 sq.; Pp 24, Pp 58; Mil 339; Vv-a 315; Dhs-a 400.
-gāhin taking up or occupying oneself with details taken up with lesser or inferior marks DN i.70 (cf. Mvu iii.52); iii.225; SN iv.104; AN i.113; AN ii.16, AN ii.152 sq.; Dhs 1345 (cf. Dhs trsl. 351).
anu + vyañjana
to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (acc.) MN i.209 (Bhagavantaṃ ˚itvā) Ja iv.214 (v.l. anuyāyitvā). See also anuyāti and anusaññāti.
anu + saṃ + yāyati
(adj.) yearly Dhp-a i.388 (nakkhattaṃ). Usually nt. ˚ṃ as adv. yearly, every year Ja i.68; Ja v.99. On use of anu in this combn. see anu A a.
anu + saṃv˚
to walk along, to go round about, to visit MN i.279; SN v.53, SN v.301; Ja i.202 Ja iii.502; Pv-a 279 (nagaraṃ) ■ pp. anusañcarita (q.v.).
anu + saṃ + carati
frequented, visited, resorted to Mil 387.
pp. of anusañcarati
to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pp 12.
anu + saṃ + ceteti
to go to, to visit, inspect, control ppr. med. ˚saññāyamāna Vin iii.43 (kammante); inf ˚saññātuṃ AN i.68. (janapade).
either anu + saṃ + jñā (jānāti) or (preferably) = anusaṃyāti as short form of anusaṃyāyati, like anuyāti → anuyāyati of anu + saṃ + yā, cf. Sk. anusaṃyāti in same meaning
sprinkled with (-˚), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma˚ magga = vippakiṇṇa Vv-a 36).
Sk. anusṛta, pp. of anu + sṛ;
instructor, adviser Ja iv.178 (ācariya + ). Cp anusāsaka.
n. ag. to anu + sās, cf. Sk. anuśāsitṛ & P. satthar
(f.) admonition, rule, instruction Ja i.241; Mil 98, Mil 172, Mil 186 (dhamma˚), 225, 227, 347.
Sk. anuśāsti, anu + śās, cp. anusāsana
to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at Mil 63 for anusandahati (anuravati + ; of sound) while at AN iv.47 the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati.
Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad
to direct upon, to apply to AN iv.47 sq. (cittaṃ samāpattiyā; so to be read with v.l. for anusandati) Mil 63 (but here prob. to be read as anusandati, q.v.).
anu + saṃ + dhā, cf. Vedic abhi + saṃ + dhā
(f.) application, adjusting Dhs 8 (cittassa).
= anusandhi
(f.) connection, (logical) conclusion, application DN-a i.122 (where 3 kinds are enumd., viz. pucchā˚, ajjhāsayā˚, yathā˚; ); Ne 14 (pucchato; Hard., in Index “complete cessation”?!). Esp. freq in (Jātaka) phrase anusandhiṃ ghaṭeti “to form the connection”, to draw the conclusion, to show the application of the story or point out its maxim Ja i.106; Ja i.308; Dhp-a ii.40, Dhp-a ii.47; etc.
fr. anu + saṃ + dhā
(f.) disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin ii.88 (under anuvādâdhikaraṇa).
anu + saṃ + pavankatā; is reading correct?
(see Kvu trsl. 234 n. 2 and Cpd. 172 n. 2). Bent, bias proclivity, the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of the cause or direction of the bias. So Sn 14 = 369, 545; MN iii.31; SN iii.130, SN iv.33, SN v.28 SN v.236; AN i.44; AN ii.157; AN iii.74, AN iii.246, AN iii.443. Or in the triplet obstinacy, prejudice and bias (adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā ) SN ii.17; SN iii.10, SN iii.135, SN iii.161; AN v.iii. Occasionally a source of the bias is mentioned. Thus pride at SN i.188 SN ii.252 ff., 275; iii.80, 103, 169, 253; iv.41, 197; AN i.132 AN iv.70 doubt at MN i.486-ignorance lust and hatred at SN iv.205, MN iii.285. At DN iii.254, DN iii.282; SN v.60; and AN iv.9. we have a list of seven anusaya’s, the above five and delusion and craving for rebirth. Hence-forward these lists govern the connotation of the word; but it would be wrong to put that connotation back into the earlier passages. Later references are Pts i.26, Pts i.70 ff., 123 130, 195; ii.36, 84, 94, 158; Pp 21; Vb 340, Vb 383 Vb 356; Kv 405 ff. Dpvs i.42.
anu + śī, seti Sk. anuśaya has a diff. meaning
dormant, only in combn. dīgharatta˚; latent so long Thag 768; Snp 355 Snp 649. Cp. anusaya & anusayin.;
pp. of anuseti, anu + śī
(adj.) DN ii.283 (me dīgharatta˚), “for me, so long obsessed (with doubts)”. The reading is uncertain.
fr. anusaya
to follow, conform oneself to SN iv.303 (phalaṃ anusarissati BB, but balaṃ anupadassati SS perhaps to be preferred) ■ Caus. anusāreti to bring together with, to send up to or against Mil 36 (aññamaññaṃ a. anupeseti).
anu + sṛ;
at SN ii.54 (āsavā na a.; v.l. anusayanti) & iv. 188 (akusalā dhammā na a.; v.l. anusenti) should preferably be read anusayati: see anuseti 2.
(adj.) having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of… SN iii.130; Kv 81, see aṇu˚.
(adj.) attached to one, i.e. inherent, chronic (of disease) MN ii.70 (ābādha, v.l. BB anussāyika) Dhp-a i.431 (roga).
fr. anusaya
“going along with”, following, conformity. Only in obl. eases (-˚) anusārena (instr. in consequence of, in accordance with, according to Ja i.8; Pv-a 187 (tad), 227; and anusārato (abl.) id. Sdhp 91.
fr. anu + sṛ;
(-˚) (adj.) following, striving after, acting in accordance with, living up to or after Freq. in formula dhammānusārin saddhānusārin living in conformity with the Norm & the Faith DN iii.254; MN i.142, MN i.479; SN iii.225; SN v.200 sq.; AN i.74; AN iv.10; Pp 15 ■ Cp. also SN i.15 (bhavasota˚); iv.128 (id.); Ja vi.444 (paṇḍitassa˚ = veyyāvaccakara C.); Sdhp 528 (attha˚).
fr. anu + sarati
see anusarati.
adviser, instructor, counsellor Ja ii.105; Mil 186, Mil 217, Mil 264. Cp. anusatthar.
fr. anusāsati
1. to advise, admonish, instruct in or give advice upon (c. acc.) to exhort to Vin i.83; DN i.135; DN ii.154; Dhp 77, Dhp 159 (aññaṃ); Ja vi.368; cp. i.103; Pv ii.68; Pv-a 148 ■ grd. anusāsiya Vin i.59; and ˚sāsitabba Dhp-a iii.99 ■ Pass ˚sāsiyati Vin ii.200; Mil 186.
2. to rule, govern (acc.) ādminister to (dat.) SN i.236 = Snp 1002 (paṭhaviṃ dhammenam-anusāsati, of a Cakkavattin); Ja ii.2; Ja vi.517 (rajjassa rajjaṃ C., i.e. take care of) DN-a i.246 (read ˚sāsantena) Pv-a 161 (rajjaṃ) ■ pp. anusiṭṭha (q.v.); cp. anusatthar anusatthi & ovadati.;
Vedic anuśāsati, anu + sās
(nt.) advice, instruction, admonition DN iii.107; AN i.292 (˚pāṭihāriya cp. anusāsanī); Mil 359.
Vedic anuśāsana, fr. anu + śās
(f.) instruction, teaching, commandment, order SN v.108; AN ii.147; AN iii.87 AN v.24 sq., 49, 338; Ja v.113; Thig 172, Thig 180; Pv iii.76 Thag-a 162; Vv-a 19, Vv-a 80, Vv-a 81.
-pāṭihāriya (anusāsani˚) the miracle of teaching, the wonder worked by the commandments (of the Buddha Vin ii.200; DN i.212, DN i.214; DN iii.220; AN i.170; AN v.327; Ja iii.323; Pts ii.227 sq.
fr. anusāsati, cp. anusāsana
to learn of somebody (gen.); to follow one’s example, to imitate Vin ii.201 (ppr. med. ˚amāna); SN i.235; AN iv.282, AN iv.286, AN iv.323; Snp 294 (vattaṃ, cp. RV iii.59, 2: vratena śikṣati), 934; Ja i.89; Ja ii.98; Ja iii.315; Ja v.334; Ja vi.62; Thag 963; Mil 61 ■ Caus anusikkhāpeti to teach [ = Sk anuśikṣayati] Mil 352.
Vedic anuśikṣati; anu + Desid. of śak
(adj.) studying, learning MN i.100; Dhp 226 (ahoratta˚ = divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna Dhp-a iii.324).
fr. anusikhati
(Vedic anuśiṣṭa, pp. of anusāsati] instructed, admonished, advised; ordered, commanded MN ii.96; Ja i.226; Pv ii.811; Mil 284, Mil 349.
to interweave Vin iii.336 (introd. to Sam. Pās.).
anu + sibbati, siv to sew
to hear; pret. anassuṃ [Sk. anvaśruvaṃ] I heard MN i.333.
anu + śru
to adorn, embellish, prepare Ja vi.76.
anu + sumbhati (sobhati); śubh or (Vedic) śumbh
reading at Ja iii.27, see anasuyyaṃ.
cp. Sk. anasūyaṃ
(adj.) not envious, not jealous Snp 325 (= usuyyāvigamena a. Snp-a 332); Ja ii.192 (v.l. anussuyyaka); v.112.
an + usuyyaka
1. an under-seṭṭhi (banker, merchant) Ja v.384 (see anu B iii. a.).
2. in redupl. cpd seṭṭhānuseṭṭhi (see anu B iv) “bankers & lesser bankers” i.e. all kinds of well-to-do families Ja vi.331.
anu + seṭṭhi
to “lie down with”, i.e. (1) trs. to dwell on, harp on (an idea) SN ii.65; SN iii.36; SN iv.208.
2. (of the idea) to obsess, to fill the mind persistently, to lie dormant & be continually cropping up. MN i.40, MN i.108, MN i.433; SN ii.54 (so read with SS for anusavanti ) iv.188; AN i.283; AN iii.246 Pp 32, Pp 48 ■ pp. anusayita (q.v.).
anu + seti. cp. Sk. anuśayate or˚ śete, from śī
to mourn for, to bewail Snp 851 (atītaṃ na a.; cp. Nd i.222); Pv i.127; ii.68; Pv-a 95.
anu + socati
(nt.) bewailing, mourning Pv-a 65.
abstr. fr. anusocati
in anusotaṃ (adv.) along the stream or current down-stream AN ii.12; Ja i.70 (opp. paṭisotaṃ against the stream); Pv-a 169 (Gangāya a. āgacchanto).
-gāmin “one who follows the stream”, i.e. giving way to ones inclinations, following ones will AN ii.5, AN ii.6 (opp paṭi˚); Sn. 319 (= sotaṃ anugacchanto Snp-a 330); Pp 62.
anu + sota, in ˚ṃ as adv. or acc. to expln. under anu A a.
(f.) remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of subjects to be kept in mind comprises six anussati-ṭṭhānāni, viz. Buddha˚, Dhamma˚, Saṅgha˚ sīla˚, cāga˚, devatā˚; i.e. proper attention to the Buddha the Doctrines, the Church, to morality, charity, the gods Thus at DN iii.250, DN iii.280 (cp. AN i.211); AN iii.284, AN iii.312 sq. 452; v.329 sq.; Pts i.28. Expanded to 10 subjects (the above plus ānāpāna-sati, maraṇa-sati, kāyagatā-sati upasamānussati ) at AN i.30, AN i.42 (cp. Lal. Vist 34). For other references see D i.81; SN v.67 = Iti 107 (anussaraṇa at latter pass.); AN iii.284, AN iii.325, AN iii.452. Pts i.48, Pts i.95, Pts i.186 Pp 25, Pp 60; Dhs 14, Dhs 23, Dhs 1350 (anussati here to be corr to asati, see Dhs. trsl. 351); Sdhp. 225, 231, 482. See also anuttariya (anussat-ânuttariya).
Sk. anusmṛti, fr. anu + smṛ; cp. sati
(adj.) [an + ussada without haughtiness Snp 624 (vv.ll. anusaddha & anussuda; Snp-a 467 expln. by taṇhā ussadâbhāva) = Dhp 400 (which pass. has anussuta; v.l K.B. anussada; Dhp-a iv.165 expls. with taṇhā-ussāvâbhāva vv.ll. ˚ussada˚); Iti 97 (vv.ll. anussata & anussara).;
(nt.) remembrance, memory, recollection Iti 107 (= anussati at id. p. SN v.67) Pv-a 25, Pv-a 29.
abstr. to anussarati
to remember, recollect, have memory of (acc.), bear in mind; be aware of DN ii.8, DN ii.53, DN ii.54 (jātito etc.); SN iii.86 sq. (pubbenivāsaṃ) v.67 (dhammaṃ a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassaṃ) AN i.25, AN i.164 (pubbenivāsaṃ), 207 (Tathāgataṃ, Dhammaṃ etc.); iii.285 (id.), 323 (nivāsaṃ), 418; v.34, 38, 132 199, 336 (kalyāṇamitte); Iti 82 (dhammaṃ), 98 (pubbenivāsaṃ); Ja i.167; Ja ii.111; Dhp 364; Pv i.59; Pp 60; Sdhp 580, Sdhp 587; DN-a i.257; Kp-a 213; Dhp-a ii.84; Dhp-a iv.95; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 53, Pv-a 69, Pv-a 79, Pv-a 107 ■ pp. anussarita (see anussaritar)-Caus anussarāpeti to remind someone, to call to mind Ja ii.147.
Vedic anusmarati, anu + smṛ;
one who recollects or remembers SN v.197, SN v.225 (saritar + ) AN v.25, AN v.28.
n. ag. to anussarita, pp. of anussarati
hearsay, report, tradition MN i.520; MN ii.211; SN ii.115; SN iv.138; AN i.26; Ja i.158 (with ref. to part. kira = annussav’atthe nipāto; so also at Vv-a 322, cf. anussavana); ii.396, 430 (id.); iv.441; instr. ˚ena from hearsay, by report AN ii.191 (cf. itihītihaṃ).
anu + sava fr. śru, cp. Vedic śravas nt.
(nt.) = anussava Pv-a 103 (kira -saddo anussavane, from hearsay).
anu + savana fr. śru
(adj.) “belonging to hearsay”, traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from hearsay MN i.520; MN ii.211. Cp. anussutika.
fr. anussava
one who proclaims or announces, a speaker (of a kammavācā) Vin i.74.
fr. anussāveti
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) a proclamation Vin i.317, Vin i.340; Vin v.170, Vin v.186, Vin v.202 sq.
fr. anussāveti
proclaimed, announced Vin i.103.
pp. of anussāveti
to cause to be heard or sound; to proclaim utter, speak out Vin i.103 (˚ssāviyamāna ppr. Pass.) ii.48 (saddaṃ a.) ■ pp. anussāvita.
anu + sāveti, Caus. of śru, cp. B.Sk. anuśrāvayati “to proclaim aloud the guilt of a criminal” Avs i.102; Avs ii.182
(adj.) free from greed Dhp 199; cf. anussukin v.l. DN iii.47, also anissukin and apalāsin.
an + ussuka
Vv-a 74 & anussukin Pp 23 = anussuka.
an + ussuk˚
(adj.) free from lust Dhp 400 (= ussāvâvena anussuta C.). See also anussada.
an + ussuta, ud + sṛ;
heard of; only in cpd. ananussuta unheard of SN ii.9; Pp 14.
anu + suta, pp. of śru
(adj.) according to tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from hearsay DN-a i.106, DN-a i.107.
fr. anu + śru, cp. anussavika
see anusuyyaka.
to laugh at, to ridicule DN-a i.256.
anu + hasati
to be held up over, ppr. anuhīramāna DN ii.15 (vv.ll. v.l. anubhiram˚ glosses B. K. anudhāriyam˚, cp. Trenckner, Notes 79).
for ˚hariyati, anu + hṛ;
(adj.) not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency Ja vi.273; Dpvs v.52; Mil 226; DN-a i.248 (+ paripūra, expld by anavaya). Anunaka = anuna
Vedic anūna, an + ūna
Dpvs iv.34.
(f.) completeness Cp iii.611.
abstr. fr. anūna
(adj.) watery, moist; watery land, lowland J. iv.358 (anopa T; anupa C. p. 359), 381 (˚khetta); Mil 129 (˚khetta).
Vedic anūpa, anu + ap: see āpa, orig. alongside of water
not killing, not murdering. Dhp 185 (= anupahananañ c’eva anupaghātanañ ca Dhp-a iii.238).
metrically for anupa˚
for anu˚ in metre Snp 1057, see upadhi.
(adj.) not bearing ill-will, not angry with Ja iv.463.
an + upanāhin, with ū metri causa
at Iti 122 is metric reading for anupama (see upama).
(adj.) free from taint, unstained, unsmeared Snp 211, Snp 392, Snp 468, Snp 790 Snp 845; Dhp 353; cf. Nd i.90 and Dhp-a iv.72.
an + upalitta, with ū in metre
not grumbling, not finding fault Dhp 185 (= anupavādanañ c’ eva anupavadāpanañ ca Dhp-a iii.238).
an + upavāda, with metrically lengthened u
(adj.) not rooted out, not removed or destroyed Thag 223 = Nd ii.974; Dhp 338 (= asamucchinna Dhp-a iv.48).
pp. of an + ūhaññati, ud + han
(adj.) (usually ˚-) not one, i.e. many, various; countlcss, numberless Iti 99 (saṃvaṭṭakappā countless aeons); Snp 688 (˚sākhā); Dhp 153 (˚jātisāra); Ja iv.2 Ja vi.366.
-pariyāyena (instr.) in many ways Vin i.16; Snp p.15 -rūpa various, manifold Snp 1049, Snp 1079, Snp 1082; Nd ii.54 (= anekavidha). -vidha manifold Nd ii.54; DN-a i.103 -vihita various, manifold DN i.12, DN i.13, DN i.178; Iti 98; Pp 55; DN-a i.103 (= anekavidha).
an + eka
(f.) doubt Nd ii.1.
an + ekaṃsā
(f.) uncertainty, doubtfulness Mil 93.
abstr. fr. anekaṃsa + kata
(adj.) free from desires or lust DN ii.157; Snp 920, Snp 1043, Snp 1101, Snp 1112; Iti 91 (opp. ejânuga Nd i.353 = Nd ii.55; Dhp 414 (= taṇhāya abhāvena Dhp-a iv.194), 422; Pv iv.135 (nittaṇha Pv-a 230).
an + ejā
(adj.) without fuel Ja iv.26 (= anindhana).
an + edha
(adj.) faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds. ˚gala free from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus expld. at DN-a i.282, viz. elagalana-virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning “having a pure or clear throat or, of vācā speech: “clearly enunciated” (thus Mrs. Rh. D at Kindred Sayings i.241) Vin i.197 = DN i.114 = SN i.189; AN ii.51, AN ii.97; AN iii.114, AN iii.195. Cp. also M Vastu iii. 322 ■ ˚mūga same as prec. “having a clear throat” i.e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled DN iii.265; Snp 70 (alālāmukha Snp-a 124), cp. Nd ii.259.
an + eḷa = ena, see neḷa & cp. BSk. eḍa (mūka); Vedic anena
(adj.) = aneḷa, pure, clear MN ii.5; Ja vi.529.
cp. BSk. aneḍaka, e.g. Avs. i.187, 243; Mvu i.339; Mvu iii.322
(f.) impropriety SN ii.194; Ja ii.86; Ja iv.381; Mil 343, Mil 401; DN-a i.169; Dhp-a iv.34; Sdhp 392, Sdhp 427.
an + esanā
is a frequent form of compn. an-ava, see ava.
(nt.) houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness SN v.24 = AN v.232 = Dhp 87 (okā anokaṃ āgamma). adj. homeless, free from attachment SN i.176; Dhp 87 (anālaya Dhp-a ii.162); Snp 966 (adj.; expld at Nd i.487 by abhisankhāra-sahagatassa viññāṇassa okāsaṃ na karoti & at Snp-a 573 by abhisankhāra-viññān;’ ādīnaṃ anokāsabhūta).
sārin living in a houseless state, fig. being free from worldly attachment SN iii.10 = Nd i.197; Snp 628 (= anālaya-cārin Snp-a 468); Ud 32; Dhp 404 (v.l. anokka˚) Dhp-a iv.174 (= anālaya -cārin); Mil 386.
an + oka
in anogha-tiṇṇa see ogha. Anojaka = anoja
Vv 354 (= Vv-a 161, where classed with yodhikā bandhujīvakā).
at DN i.91 is v.l. for anujagghati.
(f.) a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers Ja vi.536 (korandaka + ); usually in cpd. anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. Ja i.9 (˚dāma a garland of a flowers); vi.227 (id.); Dhp-a ii.116 (˚cangoṭaka).
*Sk. anujā
(nt.) recklessness, hardness DN iii.212; Iti 34 (ahirika + ); Pp 20; Dhs 365. Cp. anottāpin. Anottapin & Anottappin;
an + ottappa
(adj.) not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless DN iii.252, DN iii.282 (pp; ahirika); Snp 133 (p; ahirika + ); Iti 27, Iti 115 (anatāpin anottappin vv.ll. anottāpin); Pp 20, Pp 24.
fr. anottappa
(adj.) without water, dry Ja i.307; Dhp-a i.52; Sdhp 443.
an + udaka
(adj.) unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. ˚vasena universally thoroughly (with ref. to mettā) Ja i.81; Ja ii.146; Vv-a 97 (in general; opp. odissaka-vasena ). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 n. 1.
an + odissa + ka
not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping Dhp-a ii.136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending DN ii.17 = iii. 143; anonami-daṇḍa (for anonamiya˚) an inflexible stick Mil 238 (anoṇami˚ T, but anonami˚ vv.ll., see Mil 427).
an + onamati
see anūpa.
(adj.) (only ˚-) not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds.
-guṇa supreme virtue DN-a i.288. -dassika of superior beauty Vv 207, Vv-a 103 (both as v.l.; T. anuma˚); Vv 437. -dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) Ja i.228. -nāma of perfect name SN i.33 (“by name the Peerless” Mrs. Rh. D.) 235; Snp 153, Snp 177 (cp. Snp-a 200). -nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427 (= paripuṇṇa-viriyatāya a. Vv-a 284) -pañña of lofty or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha Snp 343, Snp 352 (= mahāpañña Snp-a 347); Thig 522 (paripuṇṇa-pañña Thag-a 296), Dhp-a i.31. -vaṇṇa of excellent colour Snp 686; Ja vi.202. -viriya of supreme exertion or energy Snp 353.
an + oma
to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattāni pāṇinā a. to rub over one’s limbs with the hand MN i.80, MN i.509; SN v.216.
anu + ava + majjati, mṛj
(adj.) having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Mil 319.
an + ora + pāra
not to stop, to continue Ja iii.487; Dhp-a iii.9 (ger. ˚itvā continually).
an + ava + ram
(nt.) absence of rain, drought Ja v.317 (v.l. BB for anvāvassa T.; q.v.).
an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarṣana
(adj.) sheltered from the rain, dry Vin ii.211; Vin iv.272; Ja i.172; Ja ii.50; Ja iii.73; Dhp-a ii.263; Thag-a 188.
an + ovassaka
(adj.) not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Snp 937 (= anajjhositaṃ Nd i.441 jarādīhi anajjhāvutthaṃ ṭhānaṃ Snp-a 566).
an + ava + sita, pp. of sā
1. end, finish, goal SN iv.368 (of Nibbāna); Snp 467; Ja ii.159. antaṃ karoti to make an end (of) Snp 283, Snp 512; Dhp 275, cp. antakara, ˚kiriyā ■ loc. ante at the end of, immediately after Ja i.203 (vijay˚).
2. limit, border edge Vin i.47; Dhp 305 (van˚); Ja iii.188.
3. side see ekamantaṃ (on one side, aside).
4. opposite side opposite, counterpart; pl. parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as “constituent, principle” (in tayo & cattāro antā; or does it belong to anta2 2. in this meaning Cp. ekantaṃ extremely, under anta2): dve antā (two extremes) Vin i.10; SN ii.17; SN iii.135. ubho antā (both sides) Vin i.10; SN ii.17; Ja i.8; Nd i.109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd i.52. As tayo antā or principles(?) viz. sakkāya, s ■ samudaya, s ■ nirodha DN iii.216, cp. AN iii.401; as cattāro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s ■ nirodhagāmini-paṭipadā at SN iii.157. Interpreted by Morris as “goal” (JP T S. 1894, 70) ■ Often pleonastically, to be expld as a “pars pro toto” figure, like kammanta (q.v.) the end of the work, i.e. the whole work (cp. E sea-side, country-side); vananta the border of the wood the woods Dhp 305; Pv ii.310 (expld by vana Pv-a 86 same use in BSk., vanânta e.g. at Jtm vi.21; cp. also grāmânta Avs. i.210); suttanta (q.v.), etc. Cp. ākāsanta Ja vi.89 & the pleonastic use of patha.; -ananta (n.) no end, infinitude; (adj.) endless, corresponds either to Sk anta or antya, see anta2.
-ānanta end & no end, or finite and endless, DN i.22; DN-a i.115. -ānantika (holding views of, or talking about finiteness and infinitude DN i.22 (see expln. at DN-a i.115) SN iii.214, SN iii.258 sq.; Pts i.155. -kara putting an end to (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhass’a (of the Buddha) MN i.48, MN i.531; AN ii.2; AN iii.400 sq.; Thag 195; Iti 18; Snp 32, Snp 337, Snp 539; Pp 71. In other combn. AN ii.163 (vijjāy’); Snp 1148 (pañhān’) ■ -kiriyā putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with ref. to dukkha SN iv.93; lt 89; Snp 454, Snp 725; Dhp-a iv.45 -gata = antagū Nd ii.436 (+ koṭigata). -gāhikā (f.), viz diṭṭhi, is an attribute of micchādiṭṭhi, i.e. heretical doctrine The meaning of anta in this combn. is not quite clear: either “holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)” viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo antā (thus Morris JP T S. 1884, 70), or “taking extreme sides, i.e. extremist”, or “wrong, opposite (= antya, see anta2) (thus Kern, Toev. s. v.) Vin i.172; DN iii.45, DN iii.48 (an˚) SN i.154; AN i.154; AN ii.240; AN iii.130; Pts i.151 sq. -gū one who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) AN iv.254, AN iv.258, AN iv.262; Snp 401 (= vaṭṭadukkhassa antagata); 539. -ruddhi at Ja vi.8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?). -vaṭṭi rimmed circumference Ja iii.159 -saññin being conscious of an end (of the world) DN i.22 cp. DN-a i.115.
Vedic anta; Goth. andeis = Ohg. anti = E. end; cp. also Lat. antiae forehead (: E. antler), and the prep anti opposite, antika near = Lat. ante; Gr. ἀντί & α ̓́ντα opposite; Goth., Ags. and; Ger. ant-; orig. the opposite (i.e. what stands against or faces the starting-point)
(adj.) 1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in neg. ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opp. antavant ); which may be taken as equal to anta1 (corresp. with Sk. anta (adj.) or antya; also in doublet anañca, see ākās’ânañca and viññāṇ’ânañca); DN i.23, DN i.34 = DN iii.224, DN iii.262 sq.; Snp 468 (˚pañña); Dhp 179, Dhp 180 (˚gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp Dhp-a iii.197); Ja i.178.
2. extreme, last, worst Ja ii.440 (C. hīna, lāmaka); see also anta1 4 ■ acc. as adv. in ekantaṃ extremely, very much, “utterly” Dhp 228 etc See eka.
Vedic antya
(nt.) the lower intestine, bowels mesentery Iti 89; Ja i.66, Ja i.260 (˚vaddhi-maṃsa etc.); Vism 258; Dhp-a i.80.
-gaṇṭhi twisting of the bowels, lit. “a knot in the intestines” Vin i.275 (˚ābādha). -guṇa [see guṇa2 = gula1 the intestinal tract, the bowels SN ii.270; AN iv.132; Kp iii. = Mil 26; Vism 42; Kp-a 57. -mukha the anus Ja iv.402. -vaṭṭi = ˚guṇa Vism 258.
Vedic āntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus, Gr. ε ̓́ντερα intestines
being at the end, or making an end, Ep. of Death or Māra Vin i.21; SN i.72; Thig 59 (expld by Thag-a 65 as lāmaka va Māra, thus taken anta2); Dhp 48 (= maraṇa-sankhāto antako Dhp-a ii.366) 288 (= maraṇa Dhp-a iii.434).
Vedic antaka
(adv.) even Vin iii.260; Vin iv.123; DN i.168; MN iii.127; AN v.195; Ja ii.129; DN-a i.170; Snp-a 35; Vv-a 155.
orig. abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaśah; cp. BSk. antaśah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning (“even”) Avs. i.314; Divy 161
(adj.). Primary meanings are “inside” and “in between” as adj. “inner”; in prep. use & in cpds. “inside, in between”. Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i.e. having a space between, different from; thus nt. antaraṃ difference.
I. (Adj ■ n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside Iti 83 (tayo antarā malā three inward stains); esp. as-˚ in cpds. āmis˚; with greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin i.303 dos˚; with anger inside, i.e. angry Vin ii.249; DN iii.237; MN i.123; Pv-a 78 (so read for des˚). Abl. antarato from within Iti 83. (b) in between, distant; dvādasa yojan antaraṃ ṭhānaṃ Pv-a 139 Pv-a 139.
2. In noun-function (nt.): (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 361 (pītantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = pītavaṇṇa uttariya Vv-a 116); Dāvs i.10 (dīp’ antara-vāsin living on the island) Dhp-a i.358 (kaṇṇa-chidd˚ the inside of the ear; Vv-a 50 (kacch˚ inner room or apartment). Therefore also “space in between”, break Ja v.352 (= chidda C.), & obstacle, hindrance, i. g. what stands in between: see cpds. and antara-dhāyati (for antaraṃ dhāyati) ■ (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i.e. occasion. As; interval in Buddhantaraṃ the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 191 etc. As time: Iti 121 (etasmiṃ antare in that time or at this occasion) Pv i.1011 (dīghaṃ antaraṃ = dīghaṃ kālaṃ Pv-a 52) Pv-a 5 (etasmiṃ antare at this time, just then). As occasion: Ja v.287; Pp 55 (eḷaka-m-antaraṃ occasion of getting rain). SN i.20, quoted DN-a i.34, (mañ ca tañ ca kiṃ antaraṃ what is there between me and you?) C. expls. kiṃ kāraṇā Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln. p. 256 “of me it is and thee (this talk)-now why is this”; Ja vi.8 (assa antaraṃ na passiṃsu they did not see a diff. in him).
3. Phrases antaraṃ karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intrs.), to hold aloof, lit. “to make a space in between” MN iii.14; J. iv.2 (˚katvā leaving behind); Pp A 231 (ummāraṃ a. katvā staying away from a threshold) also adverbially: dasa yojanāni a. katvā at a distance of 10 y. Pv-a 139 ■ (b.) to remove, destroy Ja vi.56 (v.l. BB. antarāyaṃ karoti).
II. In prep. use (˚-) with acc. (direction) or loc (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp III. use of cases). (a.) w. acc.: antaragharaṃ paviṭṭha gone into the house Mil 11 ■ (b.) w. loc.: antaraghare nisīdanti (inside the house) Vin ii.213; ˚dīpake in the centre of the island Ja i.240; ˚dvāre in the door Ja v.231; ˚magge on the road (cp. antarāmagge) Pv-a 109 ˚bhatte in phrase ekasmiṃ yeva a. during one meal Ja i.19; Dhp-a i.249; ˚bhattasmiṃ id. Dhp-a iv.12; ˚vīthiyan in the middle of the road Pv-a 96. ˚satthīsu between the thighs Vin ii.161 (has antarā satthīnaṃ) = Ja i.218.
III. Adverbial use of cases, instr. antarena in between DN i.56; SN iv.59, SN iv.73; Ja i.393; Pv-a 13 (kāl˚ in a little while, na kālantarena ib. 19). Often in combn. antarantarena (c. gen.) right in between (lit. in between the space of) Dhp-a i.63, Dhp-a i.358 ■ loc. antare in, inside of, in between (-˚ or c. gen. Kp-a 81 (sutt˚ in the Sutta); Dhp-a iii.416 (mama a.); Pv-a 56, Pv-a 63 (rukkh˚). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. gen. Kp-a 57; Dhp-a i.59 (vanasaṇḍassa a.) ■ abl. antarā (see also sep. article of antarā) in combn. antarantarā from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Snp p.107; Dhp-a ii.86; Dhp-a iv.191; Pv-a 272.
IV. anantara (adj.) having or leaving nothing in between i.e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining Ja iv.139; Mil 382 (solid; Dhp-a i.397; Pv-a 63 (tadantaraṃ immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), 97 (next in caste). See also abbhantara.
-atīta gone past in the meantime Ja ii.243. -kappa an intermediary kappa (q.v.) DN i.54. -kāraṇa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pp A 231 -cakka “the intermediate round”, i.e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the compass Mil 178. -cara one who goes in between or inside, i.e. a robber SN iv.173. -bāhira (adj.) inside & outside Ja i.125 -bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara-raṭṭha) Vin iii.47 -raṭṭha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince Ja v.135 -vāsa an interregnum Dpvs v.80. -vāsaka “inner or intermediate garment”, one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga & a.) Vin i.94 Vin i.289; Vin ii.272. Cf. next. -sāṭaka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarīya id.], under garment, i.e. the one between the outer one & the body Vv-a 166 (q.v.).;
Vedic antara, cp. Gr. ε ̓́ντερα = Sk. antra (see anta3), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante anto
“in between the shoulders”, i.e. the chest Ja v.173 = Ja vi.171 (phrase lohitakkho vihat’ antaraṃso ).
B.Sk. antarâṃsa; antara + aṃsa
(adj.) only in phrases rattisu antaraṭṭhakāsu and antaraṭṭhake hima-pātasamaye (in which antara functions as prep. c. loc., according to antara II. b.) i.e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i.e. the eighth day before & after the full moon: see aṭṭhaka;2) First phrase at Vin i.31, Vin i.288; Vin iii.31; second at MN i.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta-raṭṭhaka) AN i.136 (in nom.); Ja i.390; Mil 396.
antara + aṭṭhaka
(nt.) disappearance AN i.58 (saddhammassa); ii.147; iii.176 sq.; Mil 133; Dhs 645 Dhs 738, Dhs 871. Cp. ˚dhāyana.
fr. antaradhāyati
to disappear Snp 449 (˚dhāyatha 3rd sg. med.); Vv 8128 (id.); Ja i.119 = Dhp-a i.248; Dhp-a iv.191 (ppr. ˚dhāyamāna & aor. dhāyi) Pv-a 152, Pv-a 217, (˚dhāyi), 245; Vv-a 48 ■ ppr. antarahita (q.v.) ■ Caus. antaradhāpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy Ja i.147; Ja ii.415; Pv-a 123.
antara + dhāyati
(nt.) disappearance Dhp-a iv.191. (v.l. ˚adhāna).
fr. antaradhāyati
to go or step in between, ger. antaritvā (= antarayitvā) Ja i.218.
cp. denom. fr. antara
(adj.) 1. disappeared, gone, left DN i.222. MN i.487. Mil 18. Pv-a 245.
2 in phrase anantarahitāya bhūmiyā (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i.e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin i.47; Vin ii.209; MN ii.57.
pp. of antaradhāyati
(adv.) prep. (c. gen. acc. or loc.), pref. (˚-) and adv. “in between” (of space & time), midway, inside; during meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term see DA i.34 sq ■ (1). (prep.) c. acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B.Sk. antarā ca Divy 94 etc.) DN i.1 (antarā ca Rājagahaṃ antarā ca Nāḷandaṃ between R. and N.) ■ c. gen. & loc. Vin ii.161 (satthīnaṃ between the thighs, where id. p. at Ja i.218 has antara-satthīsu); AN ii.245 (satthīnaṃ. but v.l. satthimhi) ■ (2) (adv.) meanwhile Snp 291, Snp 694; Iti 85; Dhp 237 ■ occasionally Mil 251 ■ (3). (pref.) see cpds.
-kathā “in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation DN ii.1, DN ii.8, DN ii.9; SN i.79; SN iv.281; AN iii.167; Snp p.115; DN-a i.49 and freq. passim. -gacchati to come in between, to prevent Ja vi.295. -parinibbāyin an Anāgāmin who passes away in the middle of his term of life in some particular heaven DN iii.237; AN i.233; Pp 16 -magge (loc.) on the road, on the way Ja i.253; Mil 16; Dhp-a ii.21; Dhp-a iii.337; Pv-a 151, Pv-a 258, Pv-a 269, Pv-a 273 (cp. antara˚) -maraṇa premature death Dhp-a i.409; Pv-a 136. -muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167.
abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antarā.
(nt.) place where the trading goes on, bazaar Ja i.55; Ja vi.52; Mil 1, Mil 330; Dhp-a i.181.
antarā + paṇa “in between the shopping or trading”
obstacle, hindrance, impediment to (-˚); prevention, bar danger, accident to (-). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enumd. at Vin i.112, Vin i.169 etc., viz. rāja˚, cora˚ aggi˚, udaka˚, manussa˚, amanussa˚, vāḷa˚, siriṃsapa˚ jīvita˚, brahmacariya˚. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz rājā-caura-manuṣy-amanuṣya-vyāḍ-agny-udakaṃ ■ DN i.3 DN i.25, DN i.26; AN iii.243, AN iii.306; AN iv.320; Snp 691, Snp 692; Dhp 286 (= jīvit˚ Dhp-a iii.431); Ja i.62, Ja i.128; Kp-a 181; Dhp-a ii.52; Vv-a 1 = Pv-a 1 (hat˚ removing the obstacles -antarāyaṃ karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back prevent, destroy Vin i.15; Ja vi.171; Vism 120; Pv-a 20.
-kara one who causes impediments or bars the way an obstructor DN i.227; SN i.34; AN i.161; Pv iv.322.
antara + aya from i, lit. “coming in between”
(adv.) [dat. of antara or formation fr. antara + ger. of i ?) in the meantime Snp 1120 (cp Nd ii.58) antarā Snp-a 603.
(adj.) causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin i.94 = Vin ii.272; MN i.130; SN ii.226 Thag-a 288.
fr. antarāya
(adj.-n.) one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin iv.280 (an˚ = asati antarāye).
cp. antarāyika
(nt.) interior, interval Dāvs i.52; Dāvs iii.53 (nabh˚).
Sk antarāla
(adj.) “being in between”, i.e. - 1. intermediate, next, following: see an˚.
2. distant lying in between Pv-a 173 (aneka-yojan˚ ṭhāna). See also f. antarikā.
3. inside: see antarikā. -anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin ii.165, Vin ii.212 (ān˚); iv.234.
fr. antara
(f.) “what lies in between or near”, i.e.
1. the inside of Vin iv.272 (bhājan˚). 2. the neighbourhood, region of (-˚), sphere, compass Vin iii.39 (ur˚, angul˚); Ja i.265 (yakkhassa sīm˚ inside the yṡ sphere of influence).
3. interval, interstice Vin ii.116 (sutt˚ in lace); AN i.124 (vijj˚ the interval of lightning).
abstr. fr. antarika
(nt.) the atmosphere or air DN ii.15; AN iii.239; AN iv.199; Snp 222, Snp 688; Dhp 127; Mil 150 = Pv-a 104; Pv i.31 (= vehāyasa-saññita a Pv-a 14); Kp-a 166.
-ga going through the air AN i.215. -cara walking through the air Vin i.21; DN i.17; SN i.111; Ja v.267; DN-a i.110.
Vedic antarikṣa = antari-kṣa (kṣi ), lit. situated in between sky and earth
(ādj.) having an end, finite DN i.22, DN i.31, DN i.187; Pts i.151 sq.; 157; Dhs 1099, Dhs 1117, Dhs 1175; Mil 145. -anantavant endless, infinite AN v.193 (loka) See also loka.
anta1 + ˚vant
(indecl.) adv. & prep. c. gen.: opposite near Ja v.399 (tav’ antiṃ āgatā, read as tav’ anti-m-āgatā C. santikaṃ), 400, 404; vi.565 (sāmikass’ anti = antike C.)-Cp. antika.
Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. ἀντί, Goth. and; Ags. and-, Ger. ant-, ent-
(adj.-n.)
1. near Kp-a 217; nt. neighbourhood Kp viii.1. (odak˚); Ja vi.565 (antike loc. anti near).
2. [der fr. anta = Sk. antya] being at the end, final, finished, over SN i.130 (purisā etad-antikā, v.l. SS antiyā: men are (to me) at the end for that, i.e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons.
der fr. anti
(adj.) last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation thus in combn. with deha & sarīra;, the last body) DN ii.15; Dhp 351; Iti 50 (antimaṃ dehaṃ dhāreti), 53 (id.); Vv 512 Snp 478 (sarīraṃ antimaṃ dhāreti) 502; Mil 122, Mil 148; Vv-a 106 (sarīr’ antima-dhārin); Sdhp 278.
-dehadhara one who wears his last body Iti 101 (dhāra T, ˚dhara v.l.); Vv-a 163. -dhārin = prec. SN i.14, SN i.53 (+ khīṇāsava); ii.278; Iti 32, Iti 40; Snp 471. -vatthu “the last thing”, i.e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin i.121, Vin i.135, Vin i.167, Vin i.320. -sarīra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth SN i.210 (Buddho a˚-sarīro); AN ii.37; Snp 624; Dhp 352, Dhp 400; Dhp-a iv.166 (= koṭiyaṃ ṭhito attabhāvo).
Cp. superl. of anta
(pref.) near, inside, within; only in foll. cpds.: ˚pura (nt. “inner town”, the king’s palace, esp. its inner apartments i.e. harem [Sk. antaḥpura, cp. also P. antopura] Vin i.75, Vin i.269; AN v.81; Ja ii.125; Ja iv.472; Mil 1; Pv-a 23 Pv-a 81, Pv-a 280; ˚purikā harem woman Dhs-a 403; ˚vāsika one who lives in, i.e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin i.60; Vin iii.25; SN i.180; SN iv.136; Ja i.166; Ja ii.278; Ja iii.83, Ja iii.463; Pv-a 12; Vv-a 138; ˚vāsin ˚vāsika Vin iii.66; DN i.1, DN i.45, DN i.74, DN i.78, DN i.88, DN i.108, DN i.157; MN iii.116; DN-a i.36.
Sk. antaḥ, with change of-aḥ to-e, instead of the usual-o, prob. through interpreting it as loc. of anta
(indecl.) prep. inside, either c. acc. denoting direction = into, or c. loc. denoting place where = in. As prefix (˚-) in, within, inside, inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep c. acc. anto nivesanaṃ gata gone into the house Ja i.158 anto jālaṃ pavisati go into the net Dhp-a iii.175; anto gāmaṃ pavisati to go into the village Dhp-a ii.273; anto nagaraṃ pavisati Dhp-a ii.89; Pv-a 47 ■ (2) c. loc. anto gabbhe Ja ii.182; gāme Dhp-a ii.52; gehe Dhp-a ii.84 nadiyaṃ Ja vi.278; nivesane Ja ii.323; vasse in the rainy season Ja iv.242; vimānasmiṃ Pv i.101; sattāhe inside of a week Pv-a 55.
-koṭisanthāra “house of the Golden Pavement” Ja iv.113 -gadha (˚gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase ˚hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity Pv-a 10; Vv-a 12 -jana “the inside people”, i.e. people belonging to the house, the family (= Lat. familia) DN iii.61 (opp. to servants); AN i.152; Ja vi.301; DN-a i.300. -jāla the inside of the net, the net Dhp-a iv.41. -jālikata “in-netted”, gone into the net DN i.45; DN-a i.127. -nijjhāna inner conflagration Pv-a 18. -nimugga altogether immersed DN i.75; AN iii.26. -parisoka inner grief Pts i.38. -pura = antepura Ja i.262. -mano “turning ones mind inside”, thoughtful melancholy Vin iii.19. -bhavika being inside Mil 95 -rukkhatā being among trees Ja i.7. -vasati to inhabit live within SN iv.136. -vaḷañjanaka (parijana) indoorpeople Ja v.118. -vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval of the r. s.) Vv-a 66. -vihāra the inside of the V. Dhp-a i.50 (˚âbhimukhī turning towards etc.), -samorodha barricading within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta˚, cp. Dhs trsl. 311). -soka inner grief Pts i.38.
Sk. antaḥ; Av antarə Lat. inter, Oir. etar between, Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) inner, inside
a chain, fetter Vin i.108 = Vin iii.249 (tiṇ˚); DN i.245; Ja i.21 (˚ghara prisonhouse); Dhp-a iv.54 (˚bandhana).
cp. Sk. andu, andū & anduka
(adj.) 1. (lit.) blind, blinded blindfolded Ja i.216 (dhūm˚); Pv iv.148; Pv-a 3 ■ dark dull, blinding MN iii.151 (˚andhaṃ adv. dulled); Snp 669 (Ep. of timisa, like Vedic andhaṃ tamaḥ); Dhp-a ii.49 (˚vana dark forest).
2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing DN i.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (˚veṇi, reading & meaning uncertain); AN i.128; Thig 394 (= bāla Thag-a 258). See cpds. ˚karaṇa, ˚kāra, ˚bāla ˚bhūta.
-ākula blinded, foolish Vv 849 (= paññācakkhuno abhāvena Vv-a 337). -karaṇa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (fig.), confusing Iti 82 (+ acakkhukaraṇa) Mil 113 (pañha, + gambhīra). -kāra blindness (lit. fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin i.16; DN ii.12; AN i.56; AN ii.54; AN iii.233; Ja iii.188; Thag 1034; Dhp 146; Snp 763; Vv 214 (= avijj˚ Vv-a 106); Pp 30; Dhs 617; DN-a i.228; Vv-a 51, Vv-a 53, Vv-a 116, Vv-a 161; Pv-a 6; Sdhp 14, Sdhp 280 -tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S; v.443; Iti 84 (v.l. T. andhaṃ tamaṃ); Ja vi.247. -bāla blinded by folly, foolish dull of mind, silly Ja i.246, Ja i.262; Ja vi.337; Dhp-a ii.43, Dhp-a ii.89 Dhp-a iii.179; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 264. -bhūta blinded (fig.) mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant SN iv.21; AN ii.72; Ja vi.139 (spelled ˚būta); Dhp 59, Dhp 174 (= paññā-cakkhuno abhāvena Dhp-a iii.175). -vesa “blind form”, disguise Ja iii.418.
Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.), other etym. doubtful
“blind fly”, i.e. dark or yellow fly or gad-fly Snp 20 (= kāṇa-makkhikānaṃ adhivacanaṃ Snp-a 33).
fr. andha
(nt.) “eating”, food, esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṃsa (rice gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd i.372 = Nd i.495. Anna is spelt aṇṇa in combns apar’ aṇṇa and pubb’ aṇṇa. Under dhañña (Nd ii.314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubb’ aṇṇaṃ: sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu varaka, kudrūsaka) and boiled, prepared food (apar’ aṇṇaṃ sūpeyya curry). Snp-a 378 (on Snp 403) expls. anna by yāgubhattâdi ■ DN i.7; AN i.107, AN i.132; AN ii.70, AN ii.85, AN ii.203; Snp 82, Snp 240, Snp 403, Snp 924; Ja iii.190; Pp 51; Sdhp 106, Sdhp 214.
-āpa food & water Sdhp 100.; -da giving food Snp 297 -pāna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Snp 485, Snp 487; Pv i.52, 82; Kp-a 207, Kp-a 209; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 8 Pv-a 30, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 43.
Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat
in dur˚ see anvaya.
3rd sg. aor. of anukassati 2: drew out, removed, threw down Thag 869 (= khipi, chaḍḍesi C.).
(adj.) “according to the syltable”, syll. after syll., also a mode of reciting by syllables Vin iv.15, cp. 355. Cp. anupadaṃ.
anu + akkhara
3rd sg. aor. of anugacchati Mvu 7, Mvu 10. Also in assim. form annagā Ja v.258.
3rd pl. aor. of anugacchati SN i.39; Snp 586.
(adv.) every fortnight, twice a month MN ii.8; Vin iv.315 (= anuposathikaṃ) Dhp-a i.162; Dhp-a ii.25.
anu + aḍḍha + māsa
(adj.) according to the sense, answering to the matter, having scnse Thag-a 6 (˚saññābhāva).
anu + attha
(adv.) behind, after, later DN i.172; MN iii.172; SN v.1 (spelt anudeva); AN i.11; v. 214; Iti 34.
anva-d-eva with euphonic d.; like sammad-eva corresponding to Sk. anvag-eva
(n ■ adj.) 1. (n.) conformity, accordance DN ii.83 = DN iii.100; MN i.69 (dhamm˚ logical conclusion of) SN ii.58; DN iii.226 (anvaye ñāṇaṃ); Pv ii.113 (tassa kammassa anvāya, v.l. BB anvaya & anvāya; accordingly according to = paccayā Pv-a 147); Pv-a 228 (anvayato adv. in accordance).
2. (adj.) following, having the same course, behaving according to, consequential, in conformity with (-˚) DN i.46 (tad˚); MN i.238 (kāyo citt acting in conformity to the mind, obeying the mind) Snp 254 (an˚ inconsistent); Iti 79 (tass˚) ■ dur˚ spelt durannaya conforming with difficulty, hard to manage or to find out Dhp 92 (gati = na sakkā paññāpetuṃ Dhp-a ii.173); Snp 243, Snp 251 (= duviññāpaya Snp-a 287 dunneyya ibid. 293).
Vedic anvaya in diff. meaning; fr. anu + i, see anveti & anvāya
(f.) conformity, accordance MN i.500 (kāy˚ giving in to the body).
abstr. to anvaya
(adv.) every day, daily Dāvs iv.8.
anu + aha
1. to go along after, to follow, run after, pursue; aor. anvāgacchi Pv. iv.56 (= anubandhi Pv-a 260).
2. to come back again Ja i.454 (ger. ˚gantvāna) ■ pp. anvāgata (q.v.).
anu + ā + gacchati
having pursued, attained; endowed with Thag 63; Ja iv.385; Ja v.4.
pp. of anvāgacchati
to advise, dedicate, assign; imper. ˚disāhi Pv ii.26 (= uddissa dehi Pv-a 80); iii.28 (= ādisa Pv-a 181).
anu + ā + disati
(adj.) a tailoring term. Only at Vin i.297. Rendered (Vinaya Texts ii.232) by ʻhalf and halfʼ; that is a patchwork, half of new material half of old. Bdhgh’s note (see the text, p. 392) adds that the new material must be cut up.
derivation uncertain
to squeeze, wring Ja iii.481 (galakaṃ anvāmaddi wrung his neck; vv.ll. anvānumaṭṭi & anvāvamaddi; C. gīvaṃ maddi).
anu + ā + maddati
undergoing, experiencing, attaining; as prep. (c. acc.) in consequence of, through after DN i.13 (ātappaṃ by means of self-sacrifice), 97 (saṃvāsaṃ as a result of their cohabitation); Ja i.56 (buddhiṃ) 127 (piyasaṃvāsaṃ), 148 (gabbhaparipākaṃ). Often in phrase vuddhiṃ anvāya growing up, e.g. Ja i.278; iii. 126; Dhp-a ii.87.
ger. of anveti; cp. anvaya
(adj.-n.) following; one who follows, a companion DN iii.169; Nd ii.59; Ja iii.348.
fr. anvāya
to go up to, visit, ascend Ja iv.465 (aor. anvāruhi).
anu + ā + rohati
at Ja v.317 should be read with v.l. BB as anovassa absence of rain.
possessed (by evil spirits) SN i.114.
pp. of anvāvisati
to go into, to take possession of, to visit MN i.326; SN i.67; Mil 156 ■ pp. anvāviṭṭha (q.v.). Cp. adhimuccati.
anu + ā + visati
clung on to, befallen by (instr.), attached to AN iv.356 (v.l. anvāhata), cp. Ud 35 (anvāsanna q.v.) See also foll.
pp. of anu + ā + sañj, cp. anusatta = Sk. anusakta
(f.) being attacked by, falling a prey to (instr.), attachment to Dhp-a i.287 (in same context as anvāsatta AN iv.356 & anvāsanna Ud 35).;
abstr. fr. anvāsatta
endowed with, possessed of, attacked by, Ud 35 (doubtfull; v.l. ajjhāpanna) = AN iv.356 which has anvāsatta.
pp. of anu + ā + sad
to stream into, to attack, befall DN i.70; AN iii.99; Pp 20, Pp 58.
anu + ā + savati, sru
struck, beaten; perplexed Dhp 39 (˚cetasa).
pp. of anu + ā + han
to wander to (acc.) AN iv.374, AN iv.376 [BSk. same, e.g. Divy 68 etc.].
anu + ā + hiṇḍati
to follow, approach, go with Snp 1103 (= anugacchati anvāyiko hoti Nd ii.59); Dhp 1 (= kāyikaṃ… dukkhaṃ anugacchati Dhp-a i.24), 2, 71 124; perhaps at Pv ii.620 (with v.l. BB at Pv-a 99) for anvesi (see anvesati; expld. by anudesi = was anxious for, helped, instructed).
cp. anu + eti, from i
seeking, searching, investigation, MN i.140 (˚ṃ n’ âdhigacchanti do not find).
from next
to look, for search, seek SN i.112 (ppr. anvesaṃ = pariyesamāna C.); Cp iii.117 (ppr. anvesanto) ■ aor. anvesi [Sk. anveṣi fr. icchati] Pv ii.620 (? perhaps better with v.l. Pv-a 99 as anventi of anveti).
anu + esati
(adj.) striving after, seeking, wishing for Snp 965 (kusala˚).
anu-esin
see pubbanha, majjhanha, sāyanha. Cp. aha.
Vedic ahan
Well-defined directional prefix, meaning “away from, off” Usually as base-prefix (except with ā), & very seldom in comp;n. with other modifying prefixes (like sam, abhi etc.). 1. apa = Vedic apa (Idg. *apo): apeti to go away = Gr. α ̓́πειμι, Lat. abeo, Goth. afiddja; apeta gone away rid; ˚kaḍḍhati to draw away, remove; ˚kamati walk away ˚gacchati go away; ˚nidhāti put away (= ἀποτιχημι abdo); ˚nudati push away; ˚neti lead away; ˚vattati turn away (= āverto); ˚sakkati step aside; ˚harati take away. 2. apa = Vedic ava (Idg. *aue; see ava for details) There exists a widespread confusion between the two preps. apa & ava, favoured both by semantic (apa = away, ava = down, cp. E. off) & phonetic affinity (p softened to b, esp. in BB Mss., & then to v, as b → v is frequent, e.g. bya˚ → vya˚ etc.). Thus we find in Pāli apa where Vedic and later literary Sk. have ava in the foll. instances: apakanti, ˚kassati, ˚kirati, ˚gata, ˚cāra ˚jhāyati, ˚thaṭa, ˚dāna, ˚dhāreti, ˚nata, ˚nāmeti, ˚nīta ˚lekhana, ˚loketi, ˚vadati.;
Vedic apa; Idg. *apo = Gr. ἀπό, Av. apa, Lat. ab from *ap (cp. aperio); Goth. af, Ger. ab, Ags. E. of. A compar. form fr. apa is apara “further away”
to draw away, take off, remove DN i.180; DN iii.127; Dhp-a ii.86. Caus. apakaḍḍhāpeti Ja i.342; Ja iv.415; Mil 34 ■ Cp apakassati; & see pakattheti.;
apa + kaḍḍhati, cp. Sk. apa-karṣati
put off, done away, in ājīvik āpakata being without a living MN i.463 (the usual phrase being ˚apagata); Mil 279 (id.). At Iti 89 the reading of same phrase is ājīvikā pakatā (v.l. ā˚ vakatā).
pp. of apakaroti
(adj.) ungrateful Vin ii.199.
a + pa + kataññu
to cut off Thig 217 (gale = gīvaṃ chindati Thag-a 178; Kern, Toev. corrects to kabale a.).
apa + kantati, Sk. ava + kṛntati
to throw away, put off; hurt, offend slight; possibly in reading T. apakiritūna at Thig 447 (q.v.) ■ pp. apakata (q.v.). Cp. apakāra.
apa + karoti, cp. Sk. apakaroti & apakṛta in same meaning
to throw away, remove Snp 281 (v.l. BB & Snp-a ava˚; expld. by niddhamati & nikkaḍḍhati Snp-a 311) ■ ger.; apakassa Sn ii.198 = Mil 389. See also apakāsati. Apakara & ka;
Sk. apa-& ava-kaṛṣati, cp. apakaḍḍhati
injury, mischief; one who injures or offends Dhp-a iii.63; Sdhp 283.
cf. Sk. apakāra & apakaroti
at Vin ii.204 is to be read as apakassati and interpreted as “draw away, distract, bring about a split or dissension (of the Sangha)”. The v.l. on p. 325 justifies the correction (apakassati) as well as Bdhgh’s expln. “parisaṃ ākaḍḍhanti” ■ Cp. AN iii.145 & see; avapakāsati The reading at the id. p. at AN v.74 is avakassati (combd. w. vavakassati, where Vin ii.204 has avapakāsati) which is much to be preferred (see vavakassati).
at Thig 447 T (reading of C. is abhi˚) is explained Thag-a 271 to mean apakiritvā chaḍḍetvā throwing away, slighting, offending. The correct etym = Sk. avakirati (ava + kṛ2 to strew, cast out) in sense “to cast off, reject”, to which also belongs kirāta in meaning “cast off” i.e. man of a so-called low tribe. See also avakirati 2.
to go away, depart, go to one side Ja iii.27; Sdhp 294 ■ aor apakkami Pv iv.75; ger. apakkamitvā Pv-a 43, Pv-a 124 & apakkamma Pv ii.928.
cp. Sk. apakramati, apa + kram
to go away, turn aside Dhp-a i.401 (˚gantvā) ■ pp. apagata (q.v.).
apa + gam
1. gone, gone away from (c. abl.), removed; deceased, departed Iti 112; Pv-a 39 Pv-a 63 (= peta), 64 (= gata).
2. (˚-) freq. as prefix meaning without, lit. having lost, removed from; free from Vin ii.129 (˚gabbhā having lost her foetus, having a miscarriage); Ja i.61 (˚vattha without clothes); Pv-a 38 (˚soka free from grief), 47 (˚lajja not shy), 219 (˚viññāṇa without feeling) ■ Cp. apakata.
pp. of apagacchati
(adj.) not entering another womb, i.e. not destined to another rebirth Vin iii.3.
a + pa + gabbha
going away, disappearance Sdhp 508.
Sk. apagama
(apānga) the outer corner of the eye Ja iii.419 (asitâpangin black-eyed); iv.219 (bahi˚). Spelt avaṅga at Vin ii.267, where the phrase avangaṃ karoti i.e. expld. by Bdhgh. ibid p. 327 as “avangadese adhomukhaṃ lekhaṃ karonti”. According to Kern, Toev. 20 Bdhgh’s expln is not quite correct, since avanga stands here in the meaning of “a coloured mark upon the body (cp. PW. apānga).
Sk. apānga
falling off, diminution (opp. ācaya gathering, heaping up), unmaking, esp. loss (of wordliness) decrease (of possibility of rebirth Vin ii.2 = Vin iii.21 = Vin iv.213 cp. Ja iii.342; SN ii.95 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); AN iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. ācaya); Ja iii.342 (sekho ˚ena na tappati); Vb 106, Vb 319, Vb 326, Vb 330.
-gāmin going towards decrease, “making for the undoing of rebirth” (Dhs trsl. 82) AN v.243, AN v.277; Dhs 277 Dhs 339, Dhs 505, Dhs 1014; Vb 12, Vb 16 sq.; Ne 87 (cp. Kv 156).
fr. apa + ci
to honour respect, pay reverence DN i.91 (pūjeti + ); Ja iii.82. Pot. apace (for apaceyya, may be taken to apacināti 2; AN iv.245; Thag-a 72 (here to apacināti 1) ■ pp. apacita (q.v.).
fr. apa- ci, cp. cināti & cayati, with diff. meaning in Sk.; better expld. perhaps as denom. fr. *apacāya in meaning of apacāyana, cp. apacita
(nt.) honouring, honour, worship, reverence Ja i.220; Ja v.326; DN-a i.256 (˚kamma); Vv-a 24 (˚ṃ karoti = añjalikaṃ karoti); Pv-a 104 (˚kara, adj.), 128 (+ paricariya).
abstr. fr. apa + cāy, which is itself a der. fr. ci, cināti
(adj.) honouring, respecting Ja iv.94 (vaddha˚ cp. vaddhâpacāyin); Pv ii.7 8 (jeṭṭha˚); iv.324 (id.). In B.Sk. the corresp. phrase is jyeṣṭhâpacayaka.
fr. *apacāya, cp. B.Sk. apacāyaka Mvu i.198; Divy 293
(adj.) honouring, paying homage, revering Snp 325 (vaddha˚ = vaddhānaṃ apaciti karaṇena Snp-a 332) = Dhp 109; Ja i.47, Ja i.132, Ja i.201 Ja ii.299; Ja v.325; Mil 206; Sdhp 549.
fr. *apacāya; cp. apacāyika
falling off, fault, wrong doing Ja vi.375.
fr. apa + car, cp. Sk. apa & abhi-carati
honoured, worshipped, esteemed Thag 186; Ja ii.169; Ja iv.75; Vv 510 (= pūjita Vv-a 39); 3511 (cp. Vv-a 164); Mil 21.
pp. of apacayati or apacināti
(f.) honour, respect, esteem, reverence Thag 589; Ja i.220 Ja ii.435; Ja iii.82; Ja iv.308; Ja vi.88; Mil 180, Mil 234 (˚ṃ karoti) 377 (pūjana + ); Snp-a 332 (˚karaṇa). Cp. apacāyana.
Vedic apaciti in diff. meaning, viz. expiation
1. [in meaning of Sk. apacīyate cp. P. upaciyyati Pass. of upacināti] to get rid of, do away with, (cp. apacaya), diminish, make less SN iii.89 (opp. ācināti); Thag 807; Ja iv.172 (apacineth’ eva kāmāni = viddhaṃseyyatha C.). Here belong prob. aor 3rd pl. apaciyiṃsu (to be read for upacciṃsu) at Ja vi.187 (akkhīni a. “the eyes gave out”) and Pot. pres. apace Thag-a 72 (on v.40).
2. [ = apacayati] to honour esteem; observe, guard Vin i.264 (apacinayamāna cīvaraṃ (?) v.l. apacitiyamāna; trsl. guarding his claim is, Vin Texts); MN i.324 (see detail under apaviṇāti) Thag 186 (grd. apacineyya to be honoured); Ja v.339 (anapacinanto for T. anupacinanto, v.l. anapavinati) ■ pp. apacita (q.v.).
apa + cināti
offspring, child DN i.90 (bandhupāda˚ cp. muṇḍaka), 103 (id.); SN i.69 (an˚) Snp 991; DN-a i.254.
Vedic apatya nt.; der. fr. apa
(adj.) unseen; in instr. f. apaccakkhāya as adv. without being seen, not by direct evidence Mil 46 sq.
a + paṭi + akkha
(adj.) “neither after nor before”, i.e. at the same time, simultaneous Ja iii.295.
a + paccha + purima
(adj.) not giving up, greedy, miserly AN iii.76 (v.l. apānuta; C. expls. (a)vaḍḍhinissita mānatthaddha).
a + pajaha
(nt.) defeat Dh. 105.
pp. of apa + ji
to muse, meditate, ponder, consider MN i.334 (nijjhāyati + ); iii.14 (id.).
apa + jhāyati1; cp. Sk. abhi-dhyāyati
(adj.) = apañña, ignorant Dpvs vi.29.
to put aside, leave out, neglect Ja iv.308; Ja v.236.
Caus. fr. apa-tiṭṭhati, cp. Sk. apa + sthā to stand aloof
(adj.) [a + paṇṇaka; see paṇṇaka; Weber Ind. Str. iii.150 & Kuhn, Beitr. p. 53 take it as *a-praśna-ka certain, true, absolute MN i.401, MN i.411; AN v.85, AN v.294, AN v.296; Ja i.104 (where expld as ekaṃsika aviruddha niyyānika ).
(f.) certainty, absoluteness SN iv.351 sq.
abstr. of apaṇṇaka
only in khārāpatācch˚; (q.v.) a kind of torture.
(adj.) thrown away Dhp 149 (= chaḍḍita Dhp-a iii.112).
Sk. apāsta, pp. of apa + as2
2nd pl. pret. of pāpunāti (q.v.).
= avatthaṭa covered Thag 759.
see pattheti.
(nt.) 1. removing, breaking off, DN iii.88.
2. [ = Sk. avadāna cp. ovāda] advice, admonition instruction, morals Vin ii.4 (an˚ not taking advice) 7 (id.) MN i.96; AN v.337 sq. (saddhā˚) Thag 47.
3 legend, life history. In the title Mahāpadāna suttanta it refers to the 7 Buddhas. In the title Apadānaṃ, that is ʻthe storiesʼ, it refers almost exclusively to Arahants. The other, (older), connotation seems to have afterwards died out. See Dialogues ii.3 ■ Cp. also pariyāpadāna.
= Sk. apadāna
reference, testimony, witness Dhp-a ii.39.
fr apa + diś
to call to witness, to refer to, to quote Vin iii.159; Ja i.215; Ja iii.234; Ja iv.203; Mil 270; Dhp-a ii.39; Ne 93.
apa + disati
1. reason, cause, argument MN i.287 (an˚).
2. statement, designation Pv-a 8.
3. pretext Ja iii.60; Ja iv.13; Pv-a 154. Thus also apadesaka Ja vi.179.
cp. Sk. apadeśa
to observe, request ask Thag-a 16.
Caus. of apa + dhṛ; cp. Sk. ava-dhārayati, but also BSk. apadhārayati Divy 231
“bent away”, drawn aside, in ster. combn. abhinata + apanata (“strained forth & strained aside” Mrs Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 39) MN i.386; SN i.28.
pp. of apanamati
to go away Snp 1102 (apanamissati, v.l. apalām˚ & apagam˚; expld at Nd ii.60 by vajissati pakkhamissati etc ■ pp. apanata (q.v.) Caus. apanāmeti.
semantically doubtful
1. to take away, remove MN i.96 = AN i.198 (kathaṃ bahiddhā a. carry outside) Kp viii.4 (= aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ gameti Kp-a 220).
2 [ = Sk. ava-namati] to bend down, lower, put down Vin ii.208 (chattaṃ); SN i.226 (id.); Ja ii.287 (id., v.l. apanetvā) DN i.126 (hatthaṃ, for salute).
Caus. fr. apanamati
(& apanidheti) to hide, conceal Vin iv.123 (˚dheti ˚dheyya, ˚dhessati); Pv-a 215 (˚dhāya ger.) ■ pp. apanihita ■ Caus. apanidhāpeti to induce somebody to conceal Vin iv.123.
apa + ni + dhā, cp. Vedic apadhā hiding-place; Sk. apadadhāti = Gr. ἀποτἱχημι = Lat. abdo “do away”
concealed, in abstr. ˚ttaṃ (nt.) hiding, concealing, theft Pv-a 216.
pp. of apanidahati
taken away or off. removed, dispelled Pv-a 39.;
Sk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti & cp. also onīta = apanīta
to push or drive away, remove dispel; pres. apanudeti Mil 38. aor. apānudi Pv i.86 (= apanesi Pv-a 41); ii.314 (= avahari aggahesi Pv-a 86) Dāvs i.8. ger. apanujja DN ii.223. See also der. apanudana. Apanudana & Apanudana;
apa + nud, cp. Vedic apanudati & Caus. Sk. apanodayati
(nt.) taking or driving away, removal Vin ii.148; Ja i.94 (dukkha˚; ); Snp 252 (id.); Pv-a 114 (id.).
Sk. apanodana, fr. apanudati
remover, dispeller DN iii.148.
n. ag. fr. apanudati, Sk. apanoditṛ
to lead away, take or put away, remove Ja i.62, Ja i.138; Ja ii.4, Ja ii.155 (aor. apānayi) iii.26; Mil 188, Mil 259, Mil 413; Pv-a 41, Pv-a 74, Pv-a 198 (= harati) Sdhp 63 Pass. apanīyati SN i.176 ■ pp. apanīta (q.v.).
apa + nī
to drink from something Ja ii.126 (aor. apāpāsi). Apabbuhati & Apabyuhati;
apa + pibati
to push off, remove, scrape away AN iii.187 (apaviyūhitvā, vv.ll. ˚bbūhitvā); Ja i.265 (paṃsuṃ ) ■ Caus. ˚byūhāpeti to make remove or brush Ja iv.349 (paṃsuṃ ).
apa + vi + ūh
see apavyāma.
epilepsy Vin i.93. Cp. apasmāra.
Sk. apasmāra
(adj.) epileptic Vin iv.8, Vin iv.10, Vin iv.11.
cp. Sk. apasmārin
to go away Ja vi.183 (apāyāti metri causa; expld. by C. as apagacchati palāyati) ■ Caus. apayāpeti [Sk. apayāpayati] to make go drive away, dismiss MN iii.176; SN ii.119.
Sk. apayāti, apa + yā
(nt.) going away, retreat DN i.9 (opp. upa˚); DN-a i.95.
Sk. apayāna, fr. apayāti
(adj.) another, i.e. additional, following next, second (with pron. inflexion, i.e. nom. pl apare) DN iii.190 (˚pajā another, i.e. future generation) Snp 791, Snp 1089 (n’); Ja i.59 (aparaṃ divasaṃ on some day following); iii.51 (apare tayo sahāyā “other friends three” i.e. three friends, cp. similarly Fr. nous autres Franc˚ais) iv.3 (dīpa); Pv-a 81 (˚divase on another day), 226; with other part. like aparo pi DN iii.128 ■ nt. aparaṃ what follows i.e. future state, consequence; future Vin i.35 (nâparaṃ nothing more); Snp 1092 (much the same as punabbhava, cp. Nd ii.61). Cases adverbially; aparaṃ (acc. further, besides, also Ja i.256; Ja iii.278; often with other part like athāparaṃ & further, moreover Snp 974; and puna c’ aparaṃ Iti 100; Mil 418 (so read for puna ca paraṃ and passim; aparam pi Vism 9 ■ aparena in future DN iii.201 ■ Repeated (reduplicative formation) aparāparaṃ (local) to & fro Ja i.265, Ja i.278; Pv-a 198; (temporal) again and again, off & on Ja ii.377; Mil 132; Vv-a 271; Pv-a 176 (= punappunaṃ).
-anta (aparanta) = aparaṃ, with anta in same function as in cpds. vananta (see anta1 5): (a.) further away, westward Ja v.471; Mil 292 (janapada). (b.) future DN i.30 (˚kappika, cp. DN-a i.118); MN ii.228 (˚ânudiṭṭhi-thought of the future); SN iii.46 (id.). -āpariya (fr. aparâpara ever-following, successive, continuous, everlasting; used with ref. to kamma Ja v.106; Mil 108. -bhāga the future lit. a later part of time, only in loc. aparabhāge at a future date, later on Ja i.34, Ja i.262; Ja iv.1; Vv-a 66.
Vedic apara, der. fr. apa with compar. suffix-ra = Idg. *aporos “further away, second”; cp. Gr. ἀπωτέρω farther, Lat. aprilis the second month (after March, i.e. April). Goth. afar = after
(adv.) on the foll. day Vin ii.167; SN i.186; Mil 48.
Sk. apare-dyus
to sin or offend against (c. loc.) Vin ii.78 = Vin iii.161; Ja v.68; Ja vi.367; Mil 189; Pv-a 263 ■ pp. aparaddha & aparādhita; (q.v.).
Sk. aparādhyate, apa + rādh
(nt.) “the other kind of cereal”, prepared or cooked cereals, pulse etc. Opp. to pubbaṇṇa the unprepared or raw corn (= āmakadhañña Vin iv.265; Vin iii.151 (pubb˚ + ); iv.265, 267; AN iv.108, AN iv.112 (tila-mugga-māsā˚; opp. sāli-yavaka etc.); Nd ii.314 (aparaṇṇaṃ nāma sūpeyyaṃ); Ja v.406 (˚jā = hareṇukā pea); Mil 106 (pubbaṇṇa˚). See also dhañña & harita.;
apara + aṇṇa = anna
missed (c. acc.), gone wrong, failed, sinned (against = loc.) DN i.91, DN i.103, DN i.180; SN i.103 (suddhimaggaṃ); Thag 78; Snp 891 (suddhiṃ viraddha khalita Nd i.300); Pv-a 195.
pp. of aparajjhati
(adj.) not dependent or relying on others Vin i.12 (vesārajja-ppatta + ); DN i.110 (id.); MN ii.41; MN i.491; SN iii.83; DN-a i.278 (nâssa paro paccayo).
a + para + paccaya
(adj.) unconquered Snp 269; Ja i.71, Ja i.165.
Vedic aparājita; a + parājita
sin, fault, offence, guilt Ja i.264 (nir˚); iii.394; iv.495; Vv-a 69; Pv-a 87, Pv-a 116.
fr. apa + rādh
(adj.) guilty, offending, criminal Ja ii.117 (vāja˚); Mil 149 (issara˚) 189 (aparādhikatā).
fr. aparādha, cp. Sk. aparādhin
transgressed, sinned, failing Ja v.26 (so read for aparadh’ ito).
pp. of aparādheti, Caus. of apa + rādh; cp. aparaddha
(adj.) having no support Ja iii.386 (f. ˚ī; C. appatiṭṭhā appaṭisaraṇā).
a + parāyin, cp. parāyana
see apalāsin.
Sk. apalāpin “denying, concealing” different
to draw over to Vin i.85.
apa + lāḷeti
(adj.) not running away, steadfast, brave, fearless Nd ii.13 (abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin as expln. of acchambhin and vīra); Ja iv.296; Ja v.4 (where C gives variant “ apalāpinī ti pi pāṭho”, which latter has v.l. apalāsinī & is expl;d. by C. as palāpa-rahite anavajjasarīre p. 5). See also apalāsin.
a + palāyin
(adj.) either “not neglectful, pure, clean” (= apalāpin fr. palāsa chaff cp. apalāyin at Ja v.4), or “not selfish, not hard, generous (as inferred from combn. with amakkhin & amaccharin) or “brave, fearless, energetic” (= apalāyin) DN iii.47 cp. Pp 22. See palāsin.
apaḷāsin; but spelling altogether uncertain. There seems to exist a confusion between the forms apalāyin apalāpin & apalāsin, owing to freq. miswriting of s, y, p in MSS. (cp. Nd;2 introd. p. xix.). We should be inclined to give apalāsin, as the lectio difficilior, the preference. The expln. at Pp 22 as “yassa puggalassa ayaṃ paḷāso pahīno ayaṃ vuccati puggalo apaḷāsī” does not help us to clear up the etym. nor the vv.ll.
unobstructed, unhindered, free Ja iii.381 (˚bodha); Mil 388; Dhp-a iii.198.
a + palibuddha, pp. of pari + bṛh, see palibujjhati
(nt.) licking off, in cpd. hatthāpalekhana “hand-licking” (i.e. licking one’s hand after a meal, the practice of certain ascetics) M 177 (with v.l. hatthâvalekhana MN i.535; Trenckner compares BSk. hastapralehaka Lal 312 & hastâvalehaka ibid. 323), 412; Pp 55 (expld. at Pp A 231 as hatthe piṇḍamhe niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaṃ apalekhati).
apa + lekhana from likh in meaning of lih, corresponding to Sk. ava-lehana
to lick off Pp A 231 (hatthaṃ).
apa + lekhati in meaning of Sk. avalihati
in “so ’palepa patito jarāgharo” at Thig 270 is to be read as “so palepa˚”. Morris’s interpret. J.P.T.S. 1886, 126 therefore superfluous.
(nt.) permission, leave, in ˚kamma proposal of a resolution, obtaining leave (see kamma i.3; Vin ii.89; Vin iv.152.
fr. apaloketi
1. asked permission, consulted SN iii.5.
2. (nt.) permission, consent MN i.337 (Nāgâpalokitaṃ apalokesi).
3. (nt.) an Ep. of Nibbāna SN iv.370.
pp. of apaloketi; Sk. avalokita
(adj.) “looking before oneself”, looking at, cautious Mil 398.
Sk. avalokin
1. to look ahead, to look before, to be cautious, to look after MN i.557 (v.l. for apaciṇāti, where Ja v.339 C. has avaloketi); Mil 398. 2. to look up to, to obtain permission from (acc.), to get leave, to give notice of Vin iii.10, Vin iii.11; Vin iv.226 (anapaloketvā = anāpucchā), 267 (+ āpucchitvā); MN i.337; SN iii.95 (bhikkhusanghaṃ anapaloketvā without informing the Sangha); Ja vi.298 (vājānaṃ); Dhp-a i.67 ■ pp. apalokita (q.v.). See also apalokana & ˚lokin.;
BSk. ava-lokayati
completion, end, final delivery, Nibbāna; in phrase saggāpavagga Dāvs ii.62; Dāvs iii.75.
Sk. apavarga
to turn away or aside, to go away Ja iv.347 (v.l. apasakkati).
apa + vṛt, cp. Lat. āverto
to reproach, reprove, reject, despise DN i.122 (= paṭikkhipati DN-a i.290); SN v.118 (+ paṭikkosati).
apa + vadati
to carry or drive away; Caus. apavāheti to remove, give up Mil 324 (kaddamaṃ).
apa + vahati
at Pv iii.82 is to be read apaviddha (q.v.).
is probably misreading for apaciṇāti (see apac˚ 2). As v.l. at Ja v.339 (anapavinanto) for T. anupacinanto (expld. by avaloketi C.). Other vv.ll. are anuvi˚ & apavī˚ meaning “not paying attention”. The positive form we find as apavīṇati “to take care of, to pay attention to (c. acc.) at MN i.324, where Trenckner unwarrantedly assumes a special root veṇ (see Notes p. 781), but the vv.ll. to this passage (see M. i.557) with apavīṇāti and apacinati confirm the reading apaciṇāti, as does the gloss apaloketi.
thrown away, rejected, discarded, removed SN i.202; SN iii.143; Snp 200 (susānasmiṃ = chaḍḍita Snp-a 250); Thag 635; Dhp 292 (= chaḍḍita Dhp-a iii.452); Pv iii.82 (susānasmiṃ; so read for T. apaviṭṭha); Ja i.255; Ja iii.426; Ja yi.90 (= chaḍḍita C.). Sdhp 366.
pp. of apavijjhati, Vedic apa + vyadh
see appabbūhati.
see apaviṇāti (= apaciṇāti).
disrespect, neglect, in phrase apayvāmato (apaby˚) karoti to treat disrespectfully, to insult, defile SN i.226 (v.l. abyāmato; C. expls. apabyāmato karitvā abyāmato katvā); Kv 472 (vv.ll. asabyākato abyāto, apabyāto; Kvu trsl. 270 n. 1 remarks: “B trsl.: abyāsakato. The Burmese scholar U. Pandi, suggests we should read apabyākato, by which he understands blasphemously”; it is here combd. with niṭṭhubhati, as at Dhp-a ii.36); Dhp-a ii.36 (“want of forbearance” Ed. doubtful reading; vv.ll. appabyāyakamma & apasāma) For further detail see; apasavya.
apa + vyāma
to go away, to go aside Ja iv.347 (v.l. for apavattati); Vv-a 101; Pv-a 265 (aor ˚sakki = apakkami).
apa + sakkati
(adj.) right (i.e. not left), contrary Ud 50 (T. has niṭṭhubhitvā abyāmato karitvā; vv ll. are apabhyāmāto, abhyāmato & C. apasabyāmato) where C. expl;s. apasabyāmato karitvā by apasabyaṃ katvā “which latter corresponds in form but not in meaning to Sk. apasavyaṃ karoti to go on the right side” (Morris JP T S. 1886, 127) ■ See apavyāma.
apa + savya
putting down, blame, disparagement MN iii.230.
fr. apa + sad
blamed, reproached, disparaged SN ii.219; Snp-a 541.
pp. of apasādeti
1. to refuse, decline Vin iv.213, Vin iv.263; Ja v.417 (= uyyojeti).
2. to depreciate blame, disparage Vin iii.101; MN iii.230 (opp. ussādeti ) DN-a i.160 ■ pp. apasādita (q.v.).
Caus. of apa + sad
epilepsy, convulsion, fit Ja iv.84. Cp. apamāra.
Sk. apasmāra, lit. want of memory, apa + smṛ;
etc. see passati.
1. support, rest Thag-a 258.
2. bed, bolster, mattress, in kaṇṭak˚; a mattress of thorns, a bolster filled with thorns (as cushion for asceties) MN i.78; Ja i.493; Ja iii.235. -sāppassaya with a head rest Ja iv.299.
-pīṭhaka a chair with a head-rest Ja iii.235.
cp. Sk. apāśraya, fr. apasseti
(adj.) reclining on, in kaṇṭaka˚; one who lies on a bed of thorns (see kaṇṭaka) MN i.78; Ja iv.299 (v. l, kaṇḍikesayika); Pp 55.
fr. apassaya; cp. Sk. apāśrayin-˚
1. leaning against Ja ii.69 (tālamūlaṃ = nissāya ṭhita C.).
2. depending on, trusting in (c. acc. or loc.) Vv 101 (parâgāraṃ = nissita Vv-a 101); Ja iv.25 (balamhi = balanissita). See also avassita.
pp. of apasseti
to lean against, have a support in (acc.), to depend on.
1. (lit.) lean against Vin ii.175 (bhitti apassetabbo the wall to be used as a head-rest).
2. (fig.) mostly in ger. apassāya dependent upon, depending on, trusting in (loc. or acc or-˚) Vin iii.38; Ja i.214; Pv-a 189 ■ pp. apassita (q.v.) ■ See also avasseti.
Sk. apāśrayati, apa + ā + sri
(nt.) a rest, support, dependence MN iii.127 (˚ka); DN iii.224 (cattāri apassenāni); as adj caturāpassena one who has the fourfold support viz sankhāy’ ekaṃ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, vinodeti AN v.30.
-phalaka (cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 71) a bolsterslab head-rest Vin i.48; Vin ii.175, Vin ii.209.
fr. apasseti
one who takes away or removes, destroyer MN i.447 = Kv 528.
n. ag. to apaharati
taking away, stealing, robbing Ja ii.34.
Sk. apahāra, fr. apaharati
(nt.) = apahara Mil 195.
to take away, remove, captivate, rob Ja iii.315 (aor. apahārayiṃ); Mil 413; DN-a i.38.
apa + hṛ;
(f.) unfitness Mil 232 (v.l. apākatatta perhaps better).
a + pākaṭa + tā
(adj.) not in proper or natural shape, out of order, disturbed Dhp-a ii.7. Cp. appakāra.
a + pākata + ika
(adj.) westerly, backward, below SN iii.84; Iti 120 (apācīnaṃ used as adv. and taking here the place of adho in combn. with uddhaṃ tiriyaṃ; the reading is a conjecture of Windisch’s, the vv.ll. are apācinaṃ; apācini apāci & apāminaṃ, C. expl;s. by heṭṭhā).
Vedic apācīna; cp. apācaḥ & apāka, western; to Lat. opācus, orig. turned away (from the east or the sun) i.e. opposite, dark
(adj.) not open, sly, insidious Thag 940 (as v.l. for T. avāṭuka, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as “unscrupulous”, by Neumann as “ohne Redlichkeit”) Context suggests a meaning similar to the preceding nekatika, i.e. fraudulent. See also next.
a + pātu + ka (?), acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 7 der. fr. apaṭu not sharp, blunt, uncouth. This is hardly correct. See pātur
(adj.) = apāṭuka, i.e. sly, fraudulent Ja iv.184 (in context with nekatika; C. expls. apāṭubhāva dhanuppāda-virahita, in which latter virahita does not fit in; the pass. seems corrupt).
a + pātu + bha (?), at the only passage changed by Morris J.P. T. S. 1893, 7 to apāṭuka but without reason
(?) giving away in marriage Ja iv.179 (in expln. of anāpāda unmarried; reading should prob be āpāda = pariggaha).
apa + ā + dā
(adj.) not having feet, footless, creeping, Ep. of snakes & fishes Vin ii.110 = Ja ii.146 (where see expln.). Spelt apada(ka) at Iti 87 (v.l. apāda).
a + pāda + ka
(nt.) breathing out, respiration (so Ch.; no ref. in P. Cauon?) On Prāṇa & Apāna see G. W. Brown in J. Am. Or. Soc. 39, 1919 pp. 104–112. See ānāpāna.;
(nt.) “waterless state”, living without drinking water Ja v.243.
a + pānaka + ttaṃ
(adj.) guiltless, innocent f. ˚ikā Vv 314; 326.
a + pāpaka
(adj.) falling down into (c. acc.) Ja iv.234 (aggiṃ).
apa + ā + pata
(nt.) a key (to a door) Vin i.80; Vin iii.119; MN iii.127. See also avāpuraṇa. Apapurati & Apapunati;
fr. apāpurati
to open (a door) Vin i.5 (apāpur’ etaṃ Amatassa dvāraṃ: imper. where id. p. SN i.137 has avāpur˚, T., but v.l. apāpur˚) Vv 6427 (apāpuranto Amatassa dvāraṃ, expld. at Vv-a 284 by vivaranto); Iti 80 (apāvuṇanti A. dv. as T. conj. with v.l. apānuṃanti, apāpurenti & apāpuranti) ■ pp; apāruta (q.v.) ■ Pass. apāpurīyati [cp. BSk. apāvurīyati Mvu ii.158] to be opened MN iii.184 (v.l. avā˚) Ja i.63 (avā˚); Thig 494 (apāpuṇitvā). See also avāpurati.
Sk. apāvṛṇoti, apa + ā + vṛ; but Vedic only apa-vṛṇoti corresponding to Lat. aperio *apa-ṷerio. On form see Trenckner, Notes 63
taken away, stolen Ja iii.54.
pp. of apa + ā + bhṛ; cp. Vedic apa-bharati, but Lat. aufero to ava˚
“going away” viz.
1. separation, loss Dhp 211 (piya˚ = viyoga Dhp-a iii.276).
2. loss (of property) DN iii.181, DN iii.182; AN ii.166; AN iv.283; Ja iii.387 (atth˚).
3. leakage, out flow (of water) DN i.74; AN ii.166; AN iv.287.
4. lapse, falling away (in conduct) DN i.100.
5. a transient state of loss and woe after death. Four such states are specified purgatory (niraya), rebirth as an animal, or as a ghost, or as a Titan (Asura). Analogous expressions are vinipāta & duggati;. All combined at DN i.82; DN iii.111; AN i.55; Iti 12, Iti 73; Nd ii.under kāya; & freq. elsewhere ■ apāyaduggativinipāta as attr. of saṃsāra SN ii.92, SN ii.232; SN iv.158 SN iv.313; SN v.342; opp. to khīṇâpāya-duggati-vinipāta of an Arahant AN iv.405; AN v.182 sq ■ See also foll. pass.: MN iii.25 (anapāya); Snp 231; Thig 63; Ja iv.299; Pp 51; Vv-a 118 (opp. sugati); Pv-a 103; Sdhp 43, Sdhp 75 & cp niraya, duggati, vinipāta.;
-gāmin going to ruin or leading to a state of suffering Dhp-a iii.175; cp. ˚gamanīya id. Ps. i.94, ˚gamanīyatā Ja iv.499. -mukha “facing ruin”, leading to destruction (= vināsa-mukha DN-a i.268), usually as nt. “cause of ruin” DN i.101 (cattāri apāya mukhāni); iii.181, 182 (cha bhogānaṃ a˚-mukhāni, i.e. causes of the loss of one’s possessions); AN ii.166; AN iv.283, AN iv.287. -samudda the ocean of distress Dhp-a iii.432. -sahāya a spendthrift companion DN iii.185.
Sk. apāya, fr. apa + i, cp. apeti
(adj.) belonging to the apāyas or states of misery DN i.103; DN iii.6, DN iii.9, DN iii.12; Iti 42; Pv-a 60 (dukkha).
also as āpāyika (q.v.); fr. apāya
(adj.) going away Ja i.163 (aḍḍharattāv’apāyin = aḍḍharatte apāyin C.). -an˚; not going away, i.e. constantly following (chāyā anapāyinī, the shadow) Dhp 2; Thag 1041; Mil 72.
fr. apāya
(nt.) 1. the near bank of a river Ja iii.230 (+ atiṇṇaṃ, C. paratīraṃ atiṇṇaṃ).
2. (fig.) not the further shore (of life), the world here, i.e. (opp. pāraṃ Nibbāna) Snp 1129, Snp 1130; Nd ii.62; Dhp 385 (expld. as bāhirāni cha āyatanāni Dhp-a iv.141). See pāra & cp. avara.;
a + pāra
(adj.) that which cannot be achieved, unattainable Ja vi.36 (= apāpetabba).
grd. of paraneti + a˚
open (of a door) Vin i.7 = MN i.169 (apārutā tesaṃ Amatassa dvārā); DN i.136 (= vivaṭa-dvāra DN-a i.297); Ja i.264 (˚dvāra).
Sk. apāvṛta, pp. of apāpurati
a mechanism to stop a chariot, a safe guard “to prevent warriors from falling out” (C.) SN i.33 (Mrs Rh. D. trsl “leaning board”); Ja vi.252 (v.l. upā˚; Kern trsl. “remhout”, i.e. brake).
“a Vedic term for the hinder part of a carriage” Morris JP T S. 1886, 128; the “Vedic” unidentified
driven off or back, refuted, refused Snp 826 (˚smiṃ = apasādite vade Snp-a 541).
pp. of apa + hṛ;
(indecl.) both prep. & conj., orig meaning “close by”, then as prep. “towards, to, on to on” and as adv. “later, and, moreover”.
1 (prep. pref.) (a) prep. c. loc.:; api ratte later on in the night (q.v.)-(b) pref.: apidhāna putting on to; apiḷahati bind on to, apihita (= Gr. ἐπιχετός, epithet) put on to (q.v.).
2. (conj. & part.). (a) in affirmative sentences meaning primarily “moreover, further, and then, even”-(α) (single) prothetic: api dibbesu kāmesu even in heavenly joys Dhp 187; ko disvā na pasīdeyya api kaṇhâbhijātiko even an unfortunate-born Snp 563 api yojanāni gacchāma, even for leagues we go Pv iv.107 (= anekāni yojanāni pi g. Pv-a 270. Epithetic (more freq. in the form pi ): muhuttam api even a little while Dhp 106, Dhp 107 aham api daṭṭhukāmo I also wish to see Snp 685. Out of prothetic use (= even = even if) develops the conditional meaning of “if”, as in api sakkuṇemu (and then we may = if we may) Ja v.24 (c. = api nāma sakkuṇeyyāma see further under β app’eva nāma) ■ api-api in correlation corresponds to Lat. et-et Sk ca-ca, meaning both… and, and… as well as, & is esp. freq. in comb;n. app’ ekacce… app’ ekacce (and) some… and others i.e. some… others [not with Kern Toev. s. v. to appa! ] e.g. at DN i.118; Thig 216; Vv-a 208, etc. -app’ ekadā “morever once” = sometimes Vin iv.178; SN i.162; SN iv.111; Ja i.67; Dhp-a iii.303, etc ■ (β) (in combn with other emphatic or executive particles) api ca further, and also moreover DN i.96; Mil 25, Mil 47. -api ca kho moreover and yet, still, all the same Iti 89 (+ pana v.l.); Mil 20, Mil 239. -api ca kho pana all the same, never mind nevertheless Ja i.253. -api ssu so much so Vin ii.76 -app’ eva nāma (with pot.) (either) surely, indeed, yes I reckon, (or) I presume, it is likely that, perhaps Vin i.16 (surely); ii.85 (id.); cp. pi DN i.205 (sve pi upasaṃkameyyāma tomorrow I shall surely come along), 226 (siyā thus shall it be); MN i.460 = Iti 89 (moreover, indeed) Ja i.168 (surely) Vin ii.262 (perhaps) Ja v.421 (id., piyavācaṃ labheyyāma) ■ (b) in interrog ■ dubit. sentences as part. of interrog. (w. indic. or pot.) corresponding to Lat. nonne, i e. awaiting an affirmative answer (“not, not then”): api Yasaṃ kulaputtaṃ passeyya do you not see… Vin i.16; api samaṇa balivadde addasā have you not then seen… SN i.115; api kiñci labhāmase shall we then not get anything? Ja iii.26; api me pitaraṃ passatha do you then not see my father? Pv-a 38 ■ Also combd. with other interr. part. e.g. api nu J. ii.415.
Sk. api & pi; Idg. *epi *pi *opi; cp. Gr. ε ̓́πι on to, ο ̓́πι (ο ̓́πιχεν behind, ὀπίσσα back = close at one’s heels); Lat. ob. in certain functions; Goth. iftuma. The assimil. form before vowels is app˚; (= Sk. apy˚) See further details under pi.
(adj.) fatherless Ja v.251.
a + pitika
Pass. of apidahati to be obstructed, covered, barred, obscured Ja ii.158. See also pithīyati.
for apidhīyati; api + dhā
to put on (see api 1 b), to cover up, obstruct, Ja v.60 (inf. apidhetuṃ) pp. apihita, Pass. apithīyati, Der. apidhāna (q.v.).
api + dhā, cp. Gr. ἐπιτἱχημι
(nt.) cover, lid Vin i.203, Vin i.204; Vin ii.122. See apidahati.
Vedic apidhāna in same meaning
later in the night Ja vi.560.
read api ratte, see api 1 a
(nt.) counting up, repetition [Kern, Toev, s.v. gives der. fr. a + plāvana] Ne 15, Ne 28 Ne 54; Mil 37.
fr. api + lap
(f.) in the pass. at Dhs 14 = Nd ii.628 is evidently meant to be taken as a + pilāpana + tā (fr pilavati, plu ), but whether the der. & interpret. of Dhs A is correct, we are unable to say. On general principles it looks like popular etym. Mrs. Rh. D. translates (p. 16 “opposite of superficiality” (lit “not floating”); see her detailed note Dhs trsl. 16.
“to talk close by”, i.e. to count up, recite, or: talk idly, boast of Mil 37 (sāpatheyyaṃ).
api + lap
(adj.) at Vv 361 should be read as apiḷaddha (= Sk. apinaddha) pp. of apiḷandhati (apiḷandhati) “adorned with”, or (with v.l. SS) as apiḷandhana; Vv-a 167 expls. by analankata, mistaking the a of api for a negation.
(nt.) that which is tied on, i.e band, ornament, apparel, parure Vv 6410, 6418 (expld. inacurately at Vv-a 279 by; a-kāro nipātamattaṃ, pilandhanaṃ = ābhāraṇaṃ); Ja vi.472 (c. pilandhituṃ pi ayuttaṃ?). Apilahati & Apilandhati;
fr. apiḷandhati, also in shorter (& more usual) form; piḷandhana, q.v.
to tie on, fasten, bind together; to adorn oneself with (acc.) Ja v.400 (ger. apiḷayha = piḷandhitvā C.)-Cp. apiḷandhana & pp apiladdha.;
Sk. apinahyati, on n: ḷ see note on gala, & cp. guṇa: guḷa, veṇu: veḷu etc. On ndh for yh see avanandhati
(adj.) “unhankering (Mrs Rh. D.) SN i.181 (+ akankha; v.l. BB asita).
apihālu? a + piha, uncertain origin, see next. Morris J.P.I.S. 1886 takes it as a + spṛha
(adj.) not hankering, free from craving, not greedy SN i.187 = Thag 1218 (akuhako nipako apihālu); Snp 852 (+ amaccharin, expld. at Snp-a 549 as apihana-sīlo, patthanātanhāya rahito ti vuttaṃ hoti, thus perhaps taking it as a + pi (= api) + hana (fr. dhā, cp. pidahati & pihita) cp. also Nd ii.227).
a + pihālu, analysed by Fausböll Sn. Gloss. p. 229 as a-spṛhayālu, but Bdhgh evidently different (see below)
covered Ja iv.4.
pp. of apidahati
(f.) “not being a rotten egg,” i.e. normal state, healthy birth, soundness MN i.357.
a + pūti + aṇḍa + tā
(adj.) “not a question”, i.e. not to be asked Mil 316.
a + pucchā
(adj.) waiting for, looking for SN i.122 (otāra˚).
= apekkhā
1. to desire, long for, look for, expect Snp 435 (kāme n’âpekkhate cittaṃ), 773 (ppr. apekkhamāna); Ja iv.226 (id.); Dhs A 365. anapekkhamāna paying no attention to (acc.) Snp 59; Ja v.359. 2. [Sk. avīkṣate, ava + īkṣ; see avekkḥati] to consider refer to, look at, ger. apekkhitvā (cp. Sk. avīkṣya) with reference to Vv-a 13 ■ pp. apekkhita (q.v.).
Sk. apīkṣate, apa + īkṣ
(adj.) full of longing or desire, longing, craving Vin iv.214; SN iii.16; Thag 558; Ja v.453 (= sataṇha); Snp-a 76. Apekkha & Apekha
fr. apekkhā
(f.) attention, regard, affection for (loc.); desire longing for (c. loc.) SN i.77; SN iii.132; SN v.409 (mātā-pitusu) Vin iv.214; Snp 38 (= vuccati taṇhā etc. Nd ii.65; = taṇhā sineha Snp-a 76); Ja i.9, Ja i.141; Thag 558; Dhp 345 (puttesu dāresu ca = taṇhā Dhp-a iv.56); Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136 (= ālayakaraṇa-vasena apekkhatī ti apekkhā Dhs A 365, cp. Dhs trsl. 279). Freq. as adj. (-˚or in combn. with sa˚; and an˚; ), viz. Vin iii.90 (visuddha˚); SN i.122 (otara˚); sa˚ AN iii.258, AN iii.433; AN iv.60 sq.; an˚; without consideration regardless, indifferent SN v.164; AN iii.252, AN iii.347, AN iii.434; Snp 200 (anapekkhā honti ñātayo); Ja i.9. Cp. anapekkhin apekkhavant; also B.Sk. avekṣatā.
Sk. apekṣā, fr. apa + īkṣ. The spelling is either kkh or kh, they are both used promiscuously a tendency towards kh prevailing, as in upekhā, sekha
taken care of, looked after, considered Ja vi.142, Ja vi.149 (= olokita C.).
pp. of apekkhati
(adj.) considering, regarding, expecting looking for; usually neg. an˚; indifferent (against) = loc. SN i.16, SN i.77; SN ii.281; SN iii.19, SN iii.87; Snp 166 (kāmesu), 823 (id.), 857; Dhp 346. Cp. apekkhavant.
Sk. apekṣin, but B.Sk. avekṣin, e.g. Jtm 215; fr. apa + īkṣ
(adj.) gone away; (med.) freed of, rid of, deprived of (instr., abl. or ˚-) Dhp 9 (damasaccena); Pv-a 35 (dukkhato); usually ˚-in sense of “without,-less”, e.g. apeta-kaddama free from mud stainless Dhp 95; ˚vattha without dress Ja v.16; ˚viññāṇa without feeling, senseless Dhp 41; Thig 468; ˚viññāṇattaṃ senselessness, lack of feeling Pv-a 63.
pp. of apeti
(nt.) absence (of) Pv-a 92.
abstr. to apeta
to go away, to disappear DN i.180 (upeti pi apeti pi) Ja i.292; Snp 1143 (= n’ apagacchanti na vijahanti Nd ii.66) ■ pp. apeta (q.v.).
apa + i, cp. Gr. α ̓́πειμι, Lat. abeo, Goth. af-iddja
(f.) in combn. with amatteyyatā irreverence against father and mother DN iii.70 (cp. Dhp 332 & Dhp-a iv.34).
a + petteyyatā, abstr. fr. *paitṛya fatherly
(adj.) not to be drunk, not drinkable Ja vi.205 (sāgara).
a + peyya, grd. of pā
(nt.) a means of barring a door Vin ii.154 (Bdhgh. explns on p. 321: apesī ti dīghadārumhi khāṇuke pavesetvā kaṇḍaka-sākhāhi vinandhitvā kataṃ dvāra-tthakanakaṃ).
? of uncertain origin
(adj.) not being in service Vin ii.177.
ppr. fr. a + peseti (q.v.)
in app’ ekacce etc. see api.
(adj.) small, little, insignificant, often in the sense of “very little = (next to) nothing” (so in most cpds.); thus expld. at Vv-a 334 as equivalent to a negative part. (see appodaka) DN i.61 (opp. mahant, DN-a i.170 parittaka); Snp 713, Snp 775, Snp 805, Snp 896 (= appaka, omaka thoka, lamaka, jatukka, parittaka Nd i.306); Dhp 174; Ja i.262; Pp 39 ■ nt. appaṃ a little, a small portion, a trifle; pl. appāni small things, trifles AN ii.26 = Iti 102; AN ii.138; Dhp 20 (= thokaṃ eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam pi Dhp-a i.158), 224 (˚smiṃ yācito asked for little), 259.
-aggha of little value (opp. mahaggha priceless) Ja i.9 Pp 33; Dhp-a iv.184. -assāda [BSk. alpâsvāda, cp. Divy 224 = Dhp 186; alpa + ā + svād ] of little taste or enjoyment affording little pleasure (always used of kāmā Vin ii.25 = MN i.130 = AN iii.97 = Nd ii.71; Snp 61; Dhp 186 (= supina-sadisatāya paritta-sukha Dhp-a iii.240); Thig 358 (= Thag-a 244); Ja ii.313; Vism 124. -ātaṅka little (or no illness, freedom from illness, good health (= appābādha with which often combd.) [BSk. alpātanka & alpātankatā DN i.204 (+ appābādha); iii.166; AN iii.65, AN iii.103; Mil 14 -ābādha same as appātanka (q.v.) DN i.204; DN iii.166, DN iii.237; MN ii.125; AN i.25; AN ii.88; AN iii.30, AN iii.65 sq., 103, 153; Pv iv.144; ˚ābādhatā id. [cp. BSk. alpābādhatā good health AN i.38. -āyuka short lived DN i.18; Pv-a 103, also as ˚āyukin Vv 416. -āhāra taking little or no food, fasting MN ii.5; Snp 165 (= ekāsana-bhojitāya ca parimita-bhojitāya ca Snp-a 207), also as ˚āhāratā MN i.245; MN ii.5. -odaka having little or no water, dry Snp 777 (macche va appodake khīṇasote = parittodake Nd i.50); Vv 843 (+ appabhakkha expld. at Vv-a 334 as “appa-saddo h’ ettha abhāvattho appiccho appanigghoso ti ādisu viya”); Ja i.70; Dhp-a iv.12 -kasira in instr. ˚kasirena with little or no difficulty DN i.251; SN v.51; Thag 16. -kicca having few duties, free from obligations, free from care Snp 144 (= appaṃ kiccaṃ assā ti Kp-a 241). -gandha not smelling or having a bad smell Mil 252 (opp. sugandha). -ṭṭha “standing in little” i.e. connected with little trouble DN i.143; AN i.169. -thāmaka having little or no strength, weak SN iv.206. -dassa having little knowledge or wisdom Snp 1134 (see Nd ii.69 expld. by paritta-pañña Snp-a 605). -nigghosa with little sound, quiet, still, soundless (cp. Vv-a 334, as quoted above under ˚odaka) AN v.15 (+ appasadda); Snp 338; Nd i.377; Mil 371. -pañña, of little wisdom Ja ii.166; Ja iii.223 Ja iii.263. -puñña of little merit MN ii.5. -puññatā having little merit, unworthiness Pv iv.107. -phalatā bringing little fruit Pv-a 139. -bhakkha having little or nothing to eat Vv 843. -bhoga having little wealth, i.e. poor, indigent Snp 114 (= sannicitānaṃ ca bhogānaṃ āyamukhassa ca abhāvato Snp-a 173). -maññati to consider as small, to underrate: see separately. -matta little, slight, mean (usually as ˚ka; not to be confounded with appamatta2 AN iii.275; Ja i.242; also meaning “contented with little (of the bhikkhu) Iti 103 = AN ii.27; f. ˚ā trifle, smallness însignificance DN i.91; DN-a i.55. -mattaka small, insignificant trifling, nt. a trifle (cp. ˚matta) Vin 1, Vin 213; ii.177 (˚vissajjaka the distributor of little things, cp. AN iii.275 & Vin iv.38, Vin iv.155); DN i.3 (= appamattā etassā ti appamattakaṃ DN-a i.55); Ja i.167; Ja iii.12 (= aṇu); Pv-a 262 -middha “little slothful”, i.e. diligent, alert Mil 412 -rajakkha having little or no obtuseness DN ii.37; MN i.169 Sdhp 519. -ssaka having little of one’s own, possessing little AN i.261; AN ii.203. -sattha having few or no companious lonely, alone Dhp 123. -sadda free from noise quiet MN ii.2, MN ii.23, MN ii.30; AN v.15; Snp 925 (= appanigghosa Nd i.377); Pp 35; Mil 371. -siddhika bringing little success or welfare, dangerous Ja iv.4 (= mandasiddhi vināsabahula C.); vi.34 (samuddo a. bahu-antarāyiko) -ssuta possessing small knowledge, ignorant, uneducated DN i.93 (opp. bahussuta); iii.252, 282; SN iv.242; Iti 59; Dhp 152; Pp 20, Pp 62; Dhs 1327. -harita having little or no grass SN i.169; Snp p.15 (= paritta-harita-tiṇa Snp-a 154).
Vedic alpa, cp. Gr. ἀλαπάζω (λαπάζω) to empty (to make little), ἀλαπαδνός weak; Lith. alpnas weak alpstù to faint
(adj.) little, small, trifling; pl. few. nt. ˚ṃ adv. a little DN ii.4; AN v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Snp 909 (opp. bahu); Dhp 85 (appakā = thokā na bahū Dhp-a ii.160); Pv i.102 (= paritta Pv-a 48); ii.939; Pp 62; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 60 (= paritta). f. appikā Ja i.228 ■ instr. appakena by little, i.e. easily DN-a i.256. -anappaka not little, i.e. much, considerable, great; pl. many SN iv.46; Dhp 144; Pv i.117 (= bahū Pv-a 58); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 25 (read anappake pi for T. ˚appakeci; so also Kp-a 208).
appa + ka
(adj.) not of natural form, of bad appearance, ugly, deformed Ja v.69 (= sarīrappakāra-rahita dussaṇṭhāna C.). Cp. apākatika.
a + pakāra
little or not crowded, not overheaped AN v.15 (C. anākiṇṇa).
appa + kiṇṇa, although in formation also = a + pakiṇṇa
(adj.) unobtrusive, free from boldness, modest SN ii.198 = Mil 389, Snp 144, Snp 852 (cp Nd i.228 & Kp-a 232); Dhp 245.
a + pagabbha
1. (n.) discontent, dissatisfaction, dejection, sulkiness DN i.3 (= appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassitā ti appacayo; domanass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ DN-a i.52); iii.159; MN i.442; AN i.79, AN i.124, AN i.187; AN ii.203 AN iii.181 sq.; AN iv.168, AN iv.193; Ja ii.277; Snp p.92 (kapa dosa + appacaya); Vv 8331 (= domanassaṃ Vv-a 343) Snp-a 423 (= appatītaṃ domanassaṃ).
2. (adj.) unconditioned Dhs 1084, Dhs 1437.
a + paccaya
see in general under paṭi˚.
a + paṭi˚
(adj.) “not providing against”, i.e. not making good, not making amends for, destructive Ja v.418 (spelling here & in C. appati˚).;
a + paṭikārika
not to disturb, shake or break (fig.) Ja v.173 (uposathaṃ).
a + paṭikopeti
(adj.) not to be refused Ja ii.370. Appatigandhika & iya;
a + paṭikkhippa, grd. of paṭikkhipati
(adj.) not smelling disagreeable, i.e. with beautiful smell, scented odorous Ja v.405 (˚ika, but C. ˚iya; expld. by sugandhena udakena samannāgata); vi.518; Pv ii.120; iii.226.
a + paṭi + gandha + ika
(adj.) (a) not forming an obstacle, not injuring, unobstructive Snp 42 (see expld. at Nd ii.239; Snp-a 88 expls. “katthaci satte vā sankhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaññatī ti a.”) ■ (b) psychol. t. t. appld. to rūpa not reacting or impinging (opp. sappaṭigha) DN iii.217; Dhs 660, Dhs 756, Dhs 1090, Dhs 1443.
a + paṭigha
(adj.) at Pv ii.113 is faulty reading for sampatitacchavi (v.l.).
(adj) not having a counterpart, unequalled, incomparable Dhp-a i.423 (= anuttara).
a + paṭibhāga
(adj.) not answering back, bewildered, cowed down Vin iii.162; AN iii.57; ˚ṃ karoti to intimidate, bewilder Ja v.238, Ja v.369.
a + paṭibhāṇa
(adj.) matchless, incomparable, invaluable Thag 614; Mil 239.
a + paṭima fr. prep. paṭi but cp. Vedic apratimāna fr. prati + mā
(adj.) (a) not to be rolled back Snp 554 (of dhammacakka may however be taken in meaning of b.) ■ (b) irresistable Ja ii.245 (sīhanada). Note. The spelling with ṭ is only found as v.l. at Ja ii.245; otherwise as t.
a + paṭi + vattiya = vṛtya, grd. or vṛt
(nt.) non-obstruction, not hindering not opposing or contradicting AN i.50; AN iii.41; AN v.93 sq. adj. Ja i.326.
a + paṭivāṇa, for ˚vrāṇa, the guṇa-form of vṛ; cp. Sk. prativāraṇa
(f.) not being hindered, non-obstruction, free effort; only in phrase “asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivāṇitā ca padhānasmiṃ” (discontent with good states and the not shrinking back in the struggle Dhs trsl.358) AN i.50 AN i.95 = DN iii.214 = Dhs 1367.
abstr. from (ap)paṭivāṇa
(f.) non-hindrance, non-restriction, free action impulsive effort; only in stock phrase chando vāyāmo ussāho ussoḷhī appaṭivāṇī SN ii.132; SN v.440; AN ii.93 AN ii.195; AN iii.307 sq.; AN iv.320; Nd ii.under chanda C. [cp. similarly Divy 654].
almost identical w. appaṭivāṇitā, only used in diff. phrase
(adj.) not to be obstructed irresistible SN i.212 (appld. to Nibbāna; Mrs. Rh. D Kindred S. p. 274 trsls. “that source from whence there is no turning back”), Thig 55.
grd. of a + paṭi + vṛ; cp. BSk. aprativāṇiḥ Divy 655; Mvu iii.343
(adj.) “not shot through” i.e. unhurt Ja vi.446.
a + paṭi + viddha
(˚bhogin) (adj.) (not eating) without sharing with others (with omission of another negative: see Trenckner, Mil p.429, where also Bdhgh’s expln.) AN iii.289; Mil 373; cp. Mil trsl. ii.292.
a + paṭi + vibhatta
not observing or noticing Ja iv.4 (= apaccavekkhitvā anavekkhitvā C.).
ger. of a + paṭi + avekkhati
(f.) want of judgment Pp 21 = Dhs 1346.
a + paṭisankhā
(and ˚iya ) (adj.) 1. what cannot be put together again, unmendable irreparable (˚iya) Pv i.129 (= puna pākatiko na hoti Pv-a 66) = Ja iii.167 (= paṭipākatiko kātuṃ na sakkā C.). 2. incapable of reunion, not subject to reunion, i.e. to rebirth Ja v.100 (˚bhāva).
a + paṭisandhi + ka (ya)
(adj.) not having it’s equal, incomparable Ja i.94 (Baddha-sirī).
a + paṭi = sama; cp. BSk. apratisama Mvu i.104
(f.) want of deference Pp 20 = Dhs 1325.
a + paṭissavatā
(adj.) aimless, not bent on anything, free from desire, usually as nt. aimlessness combd. w. animittaṃ Vin iii.92, Vin iii.93 = Vin iv.25; Dhs 351 Dhs 508, Dhs 556. See on term Cpd. 67; Dhs trsl. 93, 143 cp. paṇihita.;
a + paṇihita
(adj.) 1. not standing still SN i.1.
2. without a footing or ground to stand on, bottomless Snp 173.
a + patiṭṭha
(& appaṭissa) (adj.) not docile, rebellious, always in combn. with agārava AN ii.20; AN iii.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 439. Appatissa-vāsa an unruly state anarchy Ja ii.352. See also paṭissā.
a + paṭi + ; śru
(adj.) dissatisfied, displeased, disappointed (cp. appaccaya) Ja v.103 (at this passage preferably to be read with v.l. as appatika = without husband, C. expls. assāmika), 155 (cp C. on p. 156); DN-a i.52; Snp-a 423.
a + patīta, of prati + i, Sk. pratīta
(adj.) not corrupt, faultless, of good behaviour Snp 662 (= padosâbhāvena a. Snp-a 478) Dhp 137 (= niraparādha Dhp-a iii.70).
a + paduṭṭha
(adj.) not to be destroyed Ja iv.344 (v.l. duppadhaṃsa).
= appadhaṃsiya, Sk. apradhvaṃsya
(& ˚iya) (adj.) not to be violated or destroyed, inconquerable, indestructible DN iii.175 (˚ika, v.l. ˚iya); Ja iii.159 (˚iya); Vv-a 208 (˚iya); Pv-a 117 (˚iya). Cp. appadhaṃsa.
grd. of a + padhaṃseti
(adj.) not violated, unhurt, not offended Vin iv.229.
pp. of a + padhaṃseti
(f.) [cp. Sk. arpaṇa, abstr. fr. appeti = arpayati from of ṛ; to fix, turn, direct one’s mind; see appeti application (of mind), ecstasy,fixing of thought on an object conception (as psychol. t. t.) Ja ii.61 (˚patta); Mil 62 (of vitakka); Dhs 7, Dhs 21, Dhs 298; Vism 144 (˚samādhi); Dhs-a 55, Dhs-a 142 (def. by Bdhg. as “ekaggaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇe appeti”), 214 (˚jhāna). See on term Cpd. pp. 56 sq., 68 129, 215; Dhs trsl. xxviii.10, 53, 82, 347.
(Appahoti) see pahoti.
to think little of, to underrate, despise Dhp 121 (= avajānāti Dhp-a iii.16; v.l. avapamaññati).
appa + maññati
(f.) boundlessness, infinitude, as psych. t. t. appld. in later books to the four varieties of philanthropy, viz mettā karuṃā muditā upekkhā i.e. love, pity, sympathy desinterestedness, and as such enumd. at DN iii.223 (q. v for detailed ref. as to var. passages); Pts i.84; Vb 272 sq.; Dhs-a 195. By itself at Snp 507 (= mettajjhānasankhātā a. Snp-a 417). See for further expln.Dhs trsl. p. 66 and mettā.
a + pamaññā, abstr. fr. pamāṇa = Sk. *pramānya
(adj.) see appa.
appa + matta
(adj.) not negligent, i.e. diligent, careful, heedful, vigilant, alert zealous MN i.391–92; SN i.4; Snp 223 (cp. Kp-a 169), 507 779 (cp. Nd i.59); Dhp 22 (cp. Dhp-a i.229); Thig 338 = upaṭṭhitasati Th A 239).
a + pamatta, pp. of pamadati
thoughtfulness, carefulness, conscientiousness, watchfulness, vigilance, earnestness, zeal DN i.13 (: a. vuccati satiyā avippavāso DN-a i.104); iii.30 104 sq., 112, 244, 248, 272; MN i.477 (˚phala); SN i.25 SN i.86, SN i.158, SN i.214; SN ii.29, SN ii.132; SN iv.78 (˚vihārin), 97, 125, 252 sq.; v.30 sq. (˚sampadā), 41 sq., 91, 135, 240, 250, 308 350; AN i.16, AN i.50. (˚adhigata); iii.330, 364, 449; iv.28 (˚gāravatā) 120 (˚ṃ garu-karoti); v.21, 126 (kusalesu dhammesu); Snp 184, Snp 264, Snp 334 (= sati-avippavāsa-sankhāta a. Snp-a 339); Iti 16 (˚ṃ pasaṃsanti puññakiriyāsu paṇḍitā) 74 (˚vihārin); Dhp 57 (˚vihārin, cp. Dhp-a i.434); 327 (˚rata = satiyā avippavāse abhirata Dhp-a iv.26); Dāvs ii.35; Kp-a 142.
a + pamāda
(freq. spelled appamāna ) (adj.) 1. “without measure”, immeasurable, endless, boundless unlimited, unrestricted all-permeating SN iv.186 (˚cetaso) AN ii.73; AN v.63; Snp 507 (mettaṃ cittaṃ bhāvayaṃ appāmāṇaṃ = anavasesa-pharaṇena Snp-a 417; cp. appamaññā) Iti 21 (mettā), 78; Ja ii.61; Pts ii.126 sq.; Vb 16, Vb 24 Vb 49, Vb 62, Vb 326 sq.; Dhs 182, Dhs 1021, Dhs 1024, Dhs 1405; Dhs-a 45 Dhs-a 196 (˚gocara, cp. anantagocara). See also on term Dhs trsl. 60.
2. “without difference”, irrelevant, in general (in commentary style) Ja i.165; Ja ii.323.
a + pamāṇa
(adj.) immeasurable, infinite, boundless MN i.386; SN v.400; AN i.266; Thag 1089 (an˚); Pp 35; Mil 331 Sdhp 338.
a + pameyya = Sk. aprameya, grd. of a + pra + mā
(f.) the state of not going on, the stop (to all that), the non-continuance (of all that Thag 767; Mil 326.
a + pavattā
see pasāda.
see appa.
(adj.) not given up, not renounced MN i.386; Iti 56, Iti 57; Nd ii.70 D1 Pp 12, Pp 18.
a + pahīna, pp. of pahāyati
(adj.) breathless, i.e. (1) holding one’s breath in a form of ecstatic meditation (jhāna) MN i.243; Ja i.67 [cp. BSk. āsphānaka Lal. v.314, 324; Mvu ii.124; should the Pāli form be taken as *a + prāṇaka?] (2) not holding anything breathing, i.e. inanimate, lifeless not containing life Snp p.15 (of water).
a + pāṇa + ka
(f.) of appaka.
(adj.) desiring little or nothing, easily satisfied, unassuming, contented unpretentious SN i.63, SN i.65; AN iii.432; AN iv.2, AN iv.218 sq., 229 v.124 sq., 130, 154, 167; Snp 628, Snp 707; Dhp 404; Pv iv.73; Pp 70.
appa + iccha from iṣ, cp. icchā
(f.) contentment, being satisfied with little, unostentatiousness Vin iii.21; DN iii.115; MN i.13; SN ii.202, SN ii.208 sq.; AN i.12, AN i.16 sq.; AN iii.219 sq., 448 iv.218, 280 (opp. mahicchatā); Mil 242; Snp-a 494 (catubbidhā, viz. paccaya-dhutanga-pariyatti-adhigama-vasena); Pv-a 73. As one of the 5 dhutanga-dhammā at Vism 81.
abstr. fr. prec.
(adj.) 1. fixed, applied, concentrated (mind) Mil 415 (mānasa) Sdhp 233 (citta).
2. brought to, put to, fixed on Ja vi.78 (maraṇamukhe); visappita (an arrow to which) poison (is) applied, so read for visap(p)īta at Ja v.36 & Vism 303.; Appiya & Appiyata
pp. of appeti, cp. BSk. arpita, e.g. prītyarpitaṃ cakṣuḥ Jtm 3169
see piya etc.
(adv.) see api 2 ax.
1. (*er) to move forward, rush on run into (of river) Vin ii.238; Mil 70.
2. (*ar) to fit in, fix, apply, insert, put on to (lit. & fig.) Vin ii.136 Vin ii.137; Ja iii.34 (nimba-sūlasmiṃ to impale, C. āvuṇāti) vi.17 (T. sūlasmiṃ acceti, vv.ll. abbeti = appeti & upeti C. āvuṇati); Mil 62 (dāruṃ sandhismiṃ); Vv-a 110 (saññāṇaṃ). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19, who defends reading abbeti at T. passages.
Vedic arpayati, Caus. of ṛ; ṛṇoti & ṛcchati (cp. icchati;2), Idg. *ar (to insert or put together, cp. also *er under aṇṇava) to which belong Sk. ara spoke of a wheel; Gr. ἀραρίσκω to put together, α ̔́ρμα chariot, α ̓́ρχρον limb, ἀρετή virtue; Lat. arma = E. arms (i.e. weapon) artus fixed, tight, also limb, ars = art. For further connections see aṇṇava
(adj.) of little power, weak, impotent SN ii.229; Mil 65; Sdhp 89.
acc. to Childers = Sk. *alpa + īśa + ākhya, the latter fr. ā + khyā “being called lord of little”; Trenckner on Mil 65 (see p. 422) says: “appesakkha & mahesakkha are traditionally expl;d. appaparivāra & mahāparivāra, the former, I suppose, from appe & sakkha (Sk. sākhya), the latter an imitation of it” Thus the etym. would be “having little association or friendship” and resemble the term appasattha. The BSk forms are alpeśākhya & maheśākhya, e.g. at Avs; ii. 153; Divy 243
to attain, reach, get Vism 350 (in etym. of āpo).
the contracted form of āpnoti, usually pāpuṇāti, fr. āp
see appa.
(adj.) unconcerned, living at ease, careless, “not bothering”, keeping still, inactive Vin ii.188; MN iii.175, MN iii.176; SN i.202 (in stock phrase appossukka tuṇhībhūta saṅkasāya “living at ease, given to silence, resigned” Mrs Rh. D. Dhs trsl. 258, see also J.P.T.S. 1909, 22); ii. 177 (id.); iv.178 (id.); Thig 457 (= nirussukka Thag-a 282); Snp 43 (= abyāvaṭa anapekkha Nd ii.72); Dhp 330 (= nirālaya Dhp-a iv.31); Ja i.197; Ja iv.71; Mil 371 (a tiṭṭhati to keep still); DN-a i.264.
appa + ussuka, Sk. alpotsuka, e.g. Lal. V. 509; Divy 41, Divy 57, Divy 86, Divy 159. It is not necessary to assume a hypothetic form of *autsukya as der. fr ussuka
(f.) inaction, reluctance, carelessness, indifference Vin i.5; DN ii.36; Mil 232; Dhp-a ii.15.
abstr. fr. prec.
(& apphuṭa) untouched, unpervaded not penetrated. DN i.74 = MN i.276 (pītisukhena).
Sk. *ā-sphṛta for a-sphārita pp. of sphar, cp. phurati; phuṭa & also phusati
(f.) Name of a kind of Jasmine Ja vi.336.
fr. appoṭeti to blossom
having snapped one’s fingers or clapped one’s hands Ja ii.311 (˚kāle).
pp. of apphoṭeti
to snap the fingers or clap the hands (as sign of pleasure) Mil 13, Mil 20. pp. apphoṭita.
ā + phoṭeti, sphuṭ;
not to be touched Mil 157 (trsl. unchangeable by other circumstances; Tr. on p. 425 remarks “aphusāni kiriyāni seems wrong, at any rate it is unintelligible to me”).
Sk. *aspṛśya, a + grd. of phusati to touch
(adj.) not weak, i.e. strong Ja iii.318.
a + pheggu + ka
not tied, unbound, unfettered Snp 39 (v.l. and Nd ii.abandha; expld- by rajju-bandhan’ ādisu yena kenaci abaddha Snp-a 83).
a + baddha
(n ■ adj.) not tied to, not a follower or victim of Iti 56 (mārassa; v.l. abaddha).
a + bandha
(adj.) without fetters or bonds, unfettered, untrammelled Snp 948, cp. Nd i.433.
a + bandhana
. Name of a cert. Purgatory, enumd. with many other similar names at AN v.173 = Snp p.126 (cp. aṭaṭa, abbuda & also Av Ś; i.4, 10 & see for further expl;n. of term Snp-a 476 sq.
of uncertain origin, prob. onomatopoetic
(adj.) not strong, weak, feeble Snp 1120 (= dubbala, appabala, appathāma Nd ii.73); Dhp 29 (˚assa a weak horse = dubbalassa Dhp-a i.262; opp. sīghassa a quick horse).
a + bala
T. reading at AN ii.39, evidently interpreted by ed. as ā + vraje, pot. of ā + vraj to go to, come to (cp pabbajati), but is preferably with v.l. SS to be read aṇḍaje (corresponding with vihangama in prec. line).
(adj.) without wounds Dhp 124.
a + vaṇa, Sk. avraṇa
(n ■ adj.) (a) (nt.) that which is not “vata” i.e. moral obligation, breaking of the moral obligation Snp 839 (asīlata + ); Nd i.188 (v.l. SS abhabbata; expld. again as a-vatta). Snp-a 545 (= dhutangavataṃ vinā ■ (b) (adj.) one who offends against the moral obligation, lawless Dhp 264 (= sīlavatena ca dhutavatena ca virahita Dhp-a iii.391; vv.ll. k. adhūta & abhūta; B abbhuta, C. abbuta).
a + vata, Sk. avrata
in uday˚ at Mil 393 stands for avyaya.
(& abbuhati) to draw off, pull out (a sting or dart); imper. pres. abbaha Thag 404; Ja ii.95 (v.l. BB appuha = abbuha; C. expls. by uddharatha) ■ aor. abbahi Ja v.198 (v.l. BB abbuhi), abbahī (metri causa) Ja iii.390 (v.l. BB dhabbuḷi = abbuḷhi) = Pv i.86 (which reads T. abbūḷha, but Pv-a 41 expls. nīhari) = Dhp-a i.30 (vv.ll. sabbahi, sabbamhi; gloss K. B abbūḷhaṃ) = Vv 839 (T. abbuḷhi; v.l. BB abbuḷhaṃ, SS avyahi; Vv-a 327 expls. as uddhari), & abbuhi AN iii.55 (v.l. abbahi, C abbahī ti nīhari), see also vv.ll. under abbahi ■ ger abbuyha Snp 939 (= abbuhitvā uddharitvā Nd i.419; v.l SS abbuyhitvā; Snp-a 567 reads avyuyha & expl;s. by uddharitvā); SN i.121 (taṇhaṃ); iii.26 (id.; but spelt abbhuyha) ■ pp. abbuḷha (q.v.) ■ Caus. abbāheti [Sk ābarhayati] to pull out, drag out Ja iv.364 (satthaṃ abbāhayanti; v.l. abbhā˚); Dhp-a ii.249 (asiṃ). ger. abbāhitvā (= ˚hetvā) Vin ii.201 (bhisa-muḷālaṃ) with v.l. BB aggahetvā SS abbūhitvā, cp. Vin i.214 (vv.ll. aggahitvā abbāhitvā). pp.; abbūḷhita (q.v.).
the first more freq. for pres., the second often in aor. forms; Sk. ābṛhati, ā + bṛh1, pp bṛḍha (see abbūḷha)
(nt.) pulling out (of a sting) Dhp-a iii.404 (sic. T.; v.l. abbūhana; Fausböll aḍahana glosses C. aṭṭhangata & aṭṭhangika, K. nibbāpana). See also; abbuḷhana and abbhāhana.
abstr. fr. abbahati
(nt.) [etym. unknown, orig. meaning “swelling”, the Sk. form arbuda seems to be a trsl. of P. abbuda 1. the foetus in the 1st & 2;nd months after conception the 2nd of the five prenatal stages of development, viz kalala, abbuda, pesi, ghana, pasākha Nd i.120; Mil 40 Vism 236.
2. a tumour, canker, sore Vin iii.294, Vin iii.307 (only in Samantapāsādikā; both times as sāsanassa a).
3. a very high numeral, appld. exclusively to the denotation of a vast period of suffering in Purgatory; in this sense used as adj. of Niraya (abbudo nirayo the “vast-period hell, cp. nirabbuda). SN i.149 = AN ii.3 (chattiṃsati pañca ca abbudāni); SN i.152 = AN v.173 = Snp p.126 (cp. Snp-a 476: abbudo nāma koci pacceka-nirayo n’ atthi, Avīcimhi yeva abbuda-gaṇanāya paccanokāso pana abbudo nirayo ti vutto; see also Kindred Sayings p. 190); Ja iii.360 (sataṃ ninnahuta-sahassānaṃ ekaṃ abbudaṃ).
4. a term used for “hell” in the riddle SN i.43 (kiṃsu lokasmiṃ abhudaṃ “who are they who make a hell on earth” Mrs Rh. D. The answer is “thieves”; so we can scarcely take it in meaning of 2 or 3. The C. has vināsa-karaṇaṃ.
(?) & Abbuhati see abbahati.
(nt.) the pulling out (of a sting), in phrase taṇhā-sallassa abbuḷhanaṃ as one of the 12 achievements of a Mahesi Nd i.343 = Nd ii.503 (eds. of Nd i.have abbūhana, v.l. SS abbussāna; ed. of Nd ii.abbuḷhana, v.l. SS abbahana, BB abbuhana). Cp. abbāhana.
fr. abbahati = abbuhati (abbuḷhati)
(adj.) drawn out, pulled (of a sting or dart), fig. removed destroyed. Most freq. in combn. ˚salla with the sting removed, having the sting (of craving thirst, taṇhā) pulled out DN ii.283 (v.l. SS asammūḷha); Snp 593, Snp 779 (= abbūḷhita-salla Nd i.59; rāgâdi-sallānaṃ abbūḷhattā a. Snp-a 518); Ja iii.390 = Vv 8310 = Pv i.87 = Dhp-a i.30 ■ In other connection: MN i.139 = AN iii.84 (˚esika = taṇhā pahīnā; see esikā); Thag 321; Kp-a 153 (˚soka).
Sk. ābṛḍha, pp. of a + bṛh1, see abbahati
(nt.) pulling out, removal, destroying Snp-a 518.
abstr. of abbūḷha
(& abbūhitta at Ja iii.541) pulled out, removed, destroyed Nd i.59 (abbūḷhita-sallo + uddhaṭa˚ etc. for abbūḷha); Ja iii.541 (uncertain reading; v.l. BB appahita, SS abyūhita; C. expls. pupphakaṃ ṭhapitaṃ appaggharakaṃ kataṃ; should we explain as ā + vi + ūh and read abyūhita?).
pp. of abbāheti Caus. of abbāhati
at Ja iii.34 & vi.17 is probably a mistake in MSS for appeti.
Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19
1.filled MN i.387 (paripuṇṇa + ); Dhp-a iv.182 (pañca jātisatāni a.).
2. [seems to be misunderstood for abbocchinna, a + vi + ava + chinna] uninterrupted constant, as ˚ṃ adv. in combn. with satataṃ samitaṃ AN iv.13 = AN iv.145; Kv 401 (v.l. abbhokiṇṇa), cp. also Kvu trsl. 231 n. 1 (abbokiṇṇa undiluted?); Vb 320.
3 doubtful spelling at Vin iii.271 (Bdhgh on Pārāj. iii.1, 3).
= abbhokiṇṇa, abhi + ava + kiṇṇa, cp. abhikiṇṇa
see abbokiṇṇa 2 and abbhochinna.
(adj.) not of legal or conventional status, i.e ■ (a) negligible, not to be decided Vin iii.91, Vin iii.112 (see also Kvu trsl. 361 n. 4) ■ (b) uncommon, extraordinary Ja iii.309 (v.l. BB abbho˚); v.271, 286 (Kern: ineffective).
a + vi + ava + hārika of voharati
(nt.). A (dense & dark) cloud, a cloudy mass AN ii.53; Vin ii.295 = Mil 273 in list of to things that obscure moon-& sunshine, viz.; abbhaṃ mahikā (mahiyā A) dhūmarajo (megho Miln), Rāhu. This list is referred to at Snp-a 487 & Vv-a 134. SN i.101 (˚sama pabbata a mountain like a thunder-cloud); Ja vi.581 (abbhaṃ rajo acchādesi) Pv iv.39 (nīl˚ = nīla-megha Pv-a 251). As f. abbhā at Dhs 617 & Dhs-a 317 (used in sense of adj. “dull” Dhs-a expls. by valāhaka); perhaps also in abbhāmatta.
-kūṭa the point or summit of a storm-cloud Thag 1064; Ja vi.249, Ja vi.250; Vv 11 (= valāhaka-sikhara Vv-a 12) -ghana a mass of clouds, a thick cloud Iti 64; Snp 348 (cp. Snp-a 348). -paṭala a mass of clouds Dhs-a 239 -mutta free from clouds Snp 687 (also as abbhāmutta Dhp 382). -saṃvilāpa thundering SN iv.289.
Vedic abhra nt. & later Sk. abhra m. “dark cloud”; Idg. *m̊bhro, cp. Gr. ἀφρἀφρο scum, froth, Lat. imber rain; also Sk. ambha water, Gr. ο ̓́μβρος rain, Oir ambu water
to speak against to accuse, slander DN i.161 = AN i.161 (an-abbhakkhātu-kāma); iv.182 (id.); Ja iv.377. Cp. Intens. abbhācikkhati.
abhi + ā + khyā, cp. Sk. ākhyāti
(nt.) accusation, slander, calumny DN iii.248, DN iii.250; MN i.130; MN iii.207; AN iii.290 sq. Dhp 139 (cp. Dhp-a iii.70).
fr. abbhakkhāti
covered (with) Thag 1068.
pp. of abhi + ā + chādeti
to anoint; to oil, to lubricate MN i.343 (sappi-telena); SN iv.177; Pp 56; Dhp-a iii.311; Vv-a 68 (sata-pāka-telena). Caus. abbhañjeti same Ja i.438 (telena ˚etvā); v.376 (sata-pāka-telena ˚ayiṃsu); Caus. ii. abbhanjāpeti to cause to anoint Ja iii.372.
abhi + añj
(nt.) anointing, lubricating, oiling; unction, unguent Vin i.205; Vin iii.79; Mil 367 (akkhassa a.); Vism 264; Vv-a 295.
fr. abbhañjati
(adj.) brought (to), procured, got, Ja vi.291.
ā + bhata + ika, bhṛ;
one who has thoroughly, left behind Ja v.376.
pp. of abhi + ati + kram, cp. atikkanta
emphatic of atīta in all meanings, viz. 1 passed, gone by SN ii.183 (+ atikkanta); nt. ˚ṃ what is gone or over the past Ja iii.169.
2. passed away, dead MN i.465; SN iv.398; Thag 242, Thag 1035.
3. transgressed, overstepped neglected Ja iii.541 (saṃyama).
pp. of abhi + ati + i, cp. atīta & atikkanta
(nt.) = attha2, only in phrase abbhatthaṃ gacchati “to go towards home”, i.e. setting; fig. to disappear, vanish MN i.115, MN i.119; MN iii.25; AN iv.32; Mil 305; pp. abhhattaṅgata “set”, gone, disappeared Dhs 1038 (atthangata + ) Kv 576.
abhi + attha2 in acc. abhi + atthaṃ, abhi in function of “towards” = homeward, as under abhi i.1 a; cp. Vedic abhi sadhasthaṃ to the seat R. V. ix. 21. 3
(f.) “going towards setting”, disappearance, death Ja v.469.
abstr. fr. abbhatta
to be much pleased at to show great appreciation of Vin i.196; DN i.143, DN i.190; SN iv.224; Mil 29, Mil 210; Dhp-a iv.102 (v.l. ˚ānu˚).
abhi + anu + modati
(nt.) (& ˚ā f.) being pleased, satisfaction, thanksgiving DN-a i.227; Vv-a 52 (˚ānu˚); Sdhp 218.
fr. abbhanumodati
(adj.) = antara, i.e. internal, inner, being within or between; nt. ˚ṃ the inner part, interior, interval (also as ˚-) Vin i.111 (satt˚ with interval of seven); AN iv.16 (opp. bāhira); Dhp 394 (id.); Thag 757 (˚âpassaya lying inside); Ja iii.395 (˚amba the inside of the Mango); Mil 30 (˚e vāyo jivo), 262, 281 (bāhir-abbhantara dhana) Dhp-a ii.74 (adj. c. gen. being among; v.l. abbhantare). Cases used adverbially: instr. abbhantarena in the meantime in between Dhp-a ii.59. loc. abbhantare in the midst of, inside of, within (c. gen. or-˚) Ja i.262 (rañño), 280 (tuyhaṃ); Dhp-a ii.64 (v.l. antare), 92 (sattavass˚); Pv-a 48 (= anto).
abhi + antara; abhi here in directive function = towards the inside, in there, with-in, cp. abhi i.1 a
(adj.-n.) intimate friend, confidant, “chum” Ja i.86 (+ ativissāsika), 337 (“insider”, opp. bāhiraka).
fr. abbhantara, cp. Sk. abhyantara in same meaning
(adj.) internal, inner (opp. bāhirima ) Vin iii.149; Ja v.38.
superl. formation fr. abbhantara in contrasting function
(adj.) not frowning, genial Vin iii.181 (but here spelt bhākuṭikabhākuṭika); DN i.116, cp. DN-a i.287; Dhp-a iv.8 (as v.l. T. has abbhokuṭika).
a + bhākuṭi + ka; Sk. bhrakuṭi frown
having arrived or come; (m.) a guest, stranger Vv 15 (= abhi-āgata, āgantuka Vv-a 24).
abhi + ā + gata
(nt.) coming arrival, approach Vin iv.221.
abhi + ā + gamana; cp. Sk. abhyāgama
slaughtering-place Vin iii.151 (+ āghāta).
abhi + āghāta
to accuse, slander, calumniate DN i.161; DN iii.248, DN iii.250; MN i.130, MN i.368, MN i.482 MN iii.207; AN i.161.
Intens. of abbhākkhāti
(nt.) coming back, rehabilitation of a bhikkhu who has undergone a penance for an expiable offence Vin i.49 (˚âraha), 53 (id.), 143 327; ii.33, 40, 162; AN i.99 ■ Cp. abbheti.
abhi + āyana of ā + yā (i)
(adj.) monstrous dreadful, enormous, “of the size of a large cloud (thus C. on SN i.205 & Ja iii.309) SN i.205 = Thag 652 (v.l. abbha˚ & abbhāmutta) = Ja iii.309 (v.l. ˚mutta).
abbhā + matta (?) according to the Pāli Com.; but more likely = Vedic abhva huge, enormous monstrous, with ā metri causa. On abhva (a + bhū what is contradictory to anything that is) cp. abbhuta abbhuṃ, and see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dubius
struck, attacked, afflicted SN i.40 (maccunā); Thag 448; Snp 581; Ja vi.26 Ja vi.440; Vism 31, Vism 232; DN-a i.140, DN-a i.147; Dhp-a iv.25.
abhi + ā + hata, pp. of han
(nt.) in udaka˚; the pulling up or drawing up of water Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh on Cullavagga v.16, 2, corresponding to udaka-vāhana on p. 122).
either = abbāhana or āvāhana
1. come back, rehabilitated, reinstated Vin iii.186 = Vin iv.242 (an˚).
2. uncertain reading at Pv i.123 in sense of “called” (an˚ uncalled), where id p. at Ja iii.165 reads anavhāta & at Thig 129 ayācita.;
pp. of abbheti
unprofitableness, idleness, nonsense Ja v.295 (= abhūti avaḍḍhi C.).
a + bhū most likely = Vedic abhva and P. abbhuṃ, see also abbhāmatta
(interj.) alas terrible, dreadful, awful (excl. of fright & shock) Vin; ii. 115 (Bdhgh. expls. as “utrāsa-vacanam-etaṃ”); MN i.448. See also abbhu & abbhuta;.
Vedic abhvaṃ, nt. of abhva, see expld. under abbhamatta. Not quite correct Morris JP T S. 1889, 201: abbhuṃ = ā + bhuk; cp also abbhuta
(nt.) drawing out, pulling, in daṇḍa-sattha˚ drawing a stick or sword Nd ii.5764 (cp abbhokkiraṇa). Or is it abbhuttīraṇa (cp. uttiṇṇa outlet).
abhi + ud + kṛ;
to sprinkle over, to rinse (with water) DN ii.172 (cakkaratanaṃ; neither with Morris JP T S. 1886, 131 “give up”, nor with trsl. of Ja ii.311 “roll along”); Ja v.390; Pv-a 75. Cp. abbhokkirati.
abhi + ud + kirati
to go forth, go out, rise into DN i.112, DN i.127; AN iii.252 (kitti-saddo a.) Pp 36. ger. ˚gantvā Ja i.88 (ākāsaṃ), 202; Dhp-a iv.198 aor. ˚gañchi MN i.126 (kittisaddo); Ja i.93 ■ pp. abbhuggata.
abhi + ud + gacchati
gone forth, gone out, risen DN i.88 (kitti-saddo a., cp. Dhp-a i.146: sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā uggato), 107 (saddo); Snp p.103 (kittisaddo).
pp. of abbhuggacchati
(nt ■ adj.) going out over, rising over (c. acc.) Pv-a 65 (candaṃ nabhaṃ abbhuggamanaṃ; so read for T. abbhuggamānaṃ).
fr. abbhuggacchati
(nt.) breathing out fire, i.e. carrying fire in one’s month (by means of a charm) DN i.11 (= mantena mukhato aggi-jala-nīharaṇaṃ DN-a i.97).
abhi + ud + jalana, from jval
(˚ṭṭhahati) to get up to, proceed to, DN i.105 (cankamaṃ).
abhi + ud + sthā
standing up, held up, erect Ja v.156 (in abbhuṇṇatatā state of being erect. stiffness), 197 (˚unnata; v.l. abbhantara, is reading correct?).
pp. of abbhunnamati
(adj.) (a) very hot Dhp-a ii.87 (v.l. accuṇha). (b) quite hot, still warm (of milk) Dhp-a ii.67.
ahhi + uṇha
(adj. nt.) terrifying, astonishing; strange, exceptional puzzling, extraordinary, marvellous, supernormal Described as a term of surprise & consternation (vimhay;’ āvahass’ adhivacanaṃ DN-a i.43 & Vv-a 329) & expl;d. as “something that is not” or “has not been before”, viz abhūtaṃ Thag-a 233; abhūta-pubbatāya abbhutaṃ Vv-a 191 Vv-a 329; abhūta-pubbaṃ DN-a i.43.
1. (adj.) wonderful marvellous etc. Snp 681 (kiṃ ˚ṃ, combd. with lomahaṃsana) Ja iv.355 (id.); Thig 316 (abbhutaṃ vata vācaṃ bhāsasi = acchariyaṃ Thag-a 233); Vv 449 (˚dassaneyya); Sdhp 345, Sdhp 496.
2. (nt.) the wonderful, a wonder, marvel SN iv.371, also in ˚dhamma (see Cpd.). Very freq. in combn. with acchariyaṃ and a part. of exclamation, viz acchariyaṃ bho abbhutaṃ bho wonderful indeed & beyond comprehension, strange & stupefying DN i.206; acch. vata bho abbh. vata bho DN i.60; acch. bhante abbh. AN ii.50 aho acch. aho abbh. Ja i.88; acch. vata abbh. vata Vv 8316 ■ Thus also in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā wonderful & extraordinary signs or things MN iii.118, MN iii.125; AN ii.130; AN iv.198; Mil 8; and in acchariya-abbhutacitta-jāta dumbfounded & surprised Ja i.88; Dhp-a iv.52; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 50.
-dhamma mysterious phenomenon, something wonderful supernormal; designation of one of the nine angas or divisions of the Buddhist Scriptures (see nava B 2; Vin iii.8; MN i.133; AN ii.103; AN iii.86, AN iii.177; Pp 43; Mil 344; Pv-a 2, etc.
*Sk. adbhuta which appears to be constructed from the Pāli & offers like its companion *āścarya (acchariya abbhuta see below) serious difficulties as to etym. The most probable solution is that P. abbhuta is a secondary adj ■ formation from abbhuṃ which in itself is nt. of abbha = Vedic abhva (see etym. under abbhāmatta and cp. abbhu, abbhuṃ & J.P.T.S. 1889, 201). In meaning abbhuta is identical with Vedic abhva contrary to what usually happens, i.e. striking, abnormal, gruesome horrible etc.; & that its significance as a + ; bhū (“unreal?”) is felt in the background is also evident from the traditional etym. of the Pāli Commentators (see below) See also acchariya
(nt.) a bet, a wager, only in phrase abbhutaṃ karoti (sahassena) to make a bet or to bet (a thousand i.e. kahāpaṇa’s or pieces of money) Vin iii.138; Vin iv.5; Ja i.191; Ja v.427; Ja vi.192; Pv-a 151; & in phrase pañcahi sahassehi abbhutaṃ hotu Ja vi.193.
= abbhuta1 in the sense of invoking strange powers in gambling, thus being under direct spell of the “unknown”
to bring towards, to fetch, to begin or introduce (a conversation) MN ii.132.
abhi + ud + ā + harati
to raise the voice, to utter Thig 402; DN-a i.61; Sdhp 514.
abhi + ud + īreti
to go out over, to rise AN ii.50, AN ii.51 (opp. atthaṃ eti, of the sun) ■ ppr. abbhuddayaṃ Vv 6417 (= abhi-uggacchanto Vv-a 280; abbhusayaṃ ti pi pāṭho).
abhi + ud + eti
to shake very much Vv 649 (= adhikaṃ uddhunāti Vv-a 278).
abhi + ud + dhunāti
resounding, resonant Thag 1065).
pp. of abhi + ud + nadati
to, spring up, burst forth DN ii.164 ■ pp. abbhuṇṇata (& ˚unnata), q.v.; Caus. abbhunnāmeti to stiffen, straighten out, hold up erect DN i.120 (kāyaṃ one’s body); AN ii.245 (id.); DN i.126 (patodalaṭṭhiṃ; opp. apanāmeti to bend down).
abhi, + ud + namati
marched against, attacked Vin i.342; MN ii.124.
pp. of abbhuyyāti
to go against, to go against, to march (an army) against, to attack SN i.82 (aor ˚uyyāsi) ■ pp. abbhuy y āta (q.v.).
abhi + up + yāti of yā
(adj.) zealous, showing zeal, endeavouring in (-˚) Pgdp 101. Abbhussakati & usukkati;
abhi + usūyā + ka
to go out over, rise above (acc.), ascend, freq. in phrase ādicco nabhaṃ abbhussakkamāno MN i.317; SN iii.156 = Iti 20 ■ See also SN i.65; SN v.44; AN i.242 (same simile); v.22 (id.).
abhi + ud + ṣvaṣk, see sakkati
(f.) instigation, incitement Vin ii.88.
abstr. fr. abhi + *utsahana, cp. ussāha
to rise; v.l. at Vv 6417 according to Vv-a 280: abbhuddayaṃ (see abbhudeti abbhussayan ti pi pāṭho.
abhi + ud + seti of śī
to rehabilitate a bhikkhu who has been suspended for breach of rules Vin ii.7 (abbhento) 33 (abbheyya); iii.112 (abbheti), 186 = iv.242 (abbhetabba)-pp. abbhita (q.v.). See also abbhāna.
abhi + ā + i
the open air, an open & unsheltered space DN i.63 (= alagganatthena a. viya DN-a i.180), 71 (= acchanna DN-a i.210), 89; MN iii.132; AN ii.210; AN iii.92; AN iv.437, AN v.65; Snp p.139 (˚e nissinna sitting in the open) Ja i.29, Ja i.215; Pp 57.
abhi + avakāsa
(adj.) belonging to the open air, one who lives in the open, the practice of certain ascetics. DN i.167; MN i.282; AN iii.220; Vin v.131, Vin v.193; Ja iv.8 (+ nesajjika); Pp 69; Mil 20, Mil 342. (One of the 13 Dhutaṃgas). See also Nd i.188; Nd ii.587.
-aṅga the practice or system of the “campers-out” Nd i.558 (so read for abbhokāsi-kankhā, cp. Nd i.188).
fr. abbhokāsa
see abbokiṇṇa.
pp. of abbhokirati
to sprinkle over, to cover, bedeck Vv 59 (= abhi-okirati abhippakirati), 3511 (v.l. abbhuk˚). Cp. abbhukkirati & abbhokkiraṇa; pp. abbhokiṇṇa see under abbokiṇṇa.
abhi + ava + kirati
spelling at Dhp-a iv.8 for abbhākuṭika.
(nt.) in naṭānaṃ a. “turnings of dancers” DN-a i.84 in expln of sobha-nagarakaṃ of DN i.6.
fr. abbhokirati
(besides abbocch˚; q.v. under abbokiṇṇa2 ) not cut off, uninterrupted, continuous Ja i.470 (v.l. abbo˚); vi.254, 373; Cp i.63; Mil 72 Vism 362 (bb), 391 (bb).
a + vi + ava + chinna
see abbo˚.
see avy˚.
(adj.) impossible, not likely, unable DN iii.13 sq., 19 26 sq., 133; Iti 106, Iti 117; Snp 231 (see Kp-a 189); Dhp 32; Ja i.116; Pp 13.
-ṭṭhāna a (moral) impossibility of which there are 9 enumd. among things that are not likely to be found in an Arahant’s character: see D iii.133 & 235 (where the five first only are given as a set).;
a + bhavya. The Sk. abhavya has a different meaning
(f.) an impossibility, unlikelihood Snp 232, cp. Kp-a 191.
abstr. fr. abhabba
(adj.) free from fear or danger, fearless, safe Dhp 258 ■ nt. abhayaṃ confidence, safety Dhp 317 cp. Dhp-a iii.491. For further refs. see bhaya.
a + bhaya
I. Meaning.
1. The primary meaning of abhi is that of taking possession and mastering, as contained in E. coming by and over-coming, thus literally having the function of (a) facing and aggressing = towards, against on to, at (see II. 1, a); and (b) mastering = over, along over, out over, on top of (see II. 1, b). 2. Out of this is developed the fig. meaning of increasing, i.e., an intensifying of the action implied in the verb (see III. 1) Next to saṃ-it is the most frequent modification preflx in the meaning of “very much, greatly” as the first part of a double-prefix cpd. (see III. 2), and therefore often seemingly superfluous, i.e., weakened in meaning, where the second part already denotes intensity as in abhi-vi-ji (side by side with vi-ji), abhi-ā-kkhā (side by side with ā-kkhā), abhi-anu-mud (side by side with anu-mud). In these latter cases abhi shows a purely deictic character corresponding to Ger. her-bei-kommen (for bei-kommen) E. fill up (for fill); e.g. , abbhatikkanta (= ati ˚ C.) abbhatīta (“vorbei gegangen”), abbhantara (“with-in” b-innen or “in here”), abbhudāharati, abhipūreti (“fill up”) etc. (see also II. 1, c).
II. Lit. Meaning.
1. As single pref.: (a) against to, on to, at-, viz., abbhatthangata gone towards home abhighāta striking at, ˚jjhā think at, ˚mana thinking on ˚mukha facing, turned towards, ˚yāti at-tack, ˚rūhati ascend ˚lāsa long for, ˚vadati ad-dress, ˚sapati ac-curse, ˚hata hit at. (b) out, over, all around: abbhudeti go out over ˚kamati exceed, ˚jāti off-spring, ˚jānāti know all over ˚bhavati overcome, ˚vaḍḍhati increase, ˚vuṭṭha poured out or over, ˚sandeti make over-flow, ˚siñcati sprinkle over (c) abhi has the function of transitivising intrs. verbs after the manner of E. be-(con-) and Ger. er-, thus resembling in meaning a simple Caus. formation, like the foll.: abhigajjati thunder on, ˚jānāti “er-kennen” ˚jāyati be-get, ˚tthaneti = ˚gajjati, ˚nadati “er tönen”, ˚nandati approve of (cp. anerkennen), ˚passati con-template, ˚ramati indulge in, ˚ropeti honour, ˚vuḍḍha increased, ˚saddahati believe in.
2. As base in compn. (2nd part of cpd.) abhi occurs only in combn. sam-abhi (which is however, of late occurrence and a peeuliarity of later texts, and is still more freq. in BSk.: see under sam-).
III. Fig. Meaning (intensifying).
1. A single pref. abhikiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚jalati shine forth, ˚jighacchati be very hungry, ˚tatta much exhausted, ˚tāpa very hot ˚toseti pleuse greatly, ˚nava quite fresh, ˚nipuṇa very clever, ˚nīla of a deep black, ˚manāpa very pleasant ˚mangaly very lucky, ˚yobbana full youth, ˚rati great liking, ˚ratta deep red, ˚ruci intense satisfaction, ˚rūpa very handsome (= adhika-rūpa C.), ˚sambuddha wide and fully-awake, cp. abbhuddhunāti to shake greatly (adhikaṃuddh˚ C.) ■ As 1st part of a prep ■ cpd. (as modification-pref.) in foll. combinations: abhi-ud (abbhud-˚ati, ˚anu, ˚ava, ˚ā, ˚ni, ˚ppa, ˚vi, ˚saṃ. See all these s. v. and note that the contraction (assimilation before vowel) form of abhi is abbh˚ ■ On its relation to pari see pari˚, to ava see ava˚.
IV. Dialectical Variation.-There are dial. variations in the use and meanings of abhi. Vedic abhi besides corresponding to abhi in P. is represented also by ati˚; adhi˚; and anu˚; since all are similar in meaning, and psychologically easily fused and confused (cp. meanings abhi = on to, towards; ati = up to and beyond; adhi up to, towards, over; anu = along towards). For all the foll. verbs we find in Pāli one or other of these three prefixes. So ati in ˚jāti, ˚pīḷita, ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati ˚veṭheti; also as vv.ll. with abhi-kīrati, ˚pavassati, ˚roceti cp. atikkanta-abhi˚ (Sk. abhikrānta); adhi in ˚patthita ˚pāteti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta, ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha (vice versa P. abhi-ropeti compared with Sk. adhiropayati); anu in ˚gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati.
prefix, Vedic abhi, which represents both Idg *m̊bhi, as in Gr. ἀμφί/ around, Lat. ambi, amb round about, Oir imb, Gall. ambi, Ohg. umbi, Ags. ymb, cp. also Vedic (Pāli) abhitaḥ on both sides; and Idg. *obhi, as in Lat ob towards, against (cp. obsess, obstruct), Goth. bi, Ohg Ags. bī = E. be-.
to desire after, long for, wish for SN i.140, SN i.198 (Nibbānaṃ); Ja ii.428; Ja iv.10, Ja iv.241; Vv-a 38, Vv-a 283; Thag-a 244 ■ pp. abhikaṅkhita. Cp. BSk abhikānkṣati, e.g. Jtm. p. 221.
abhi + kankhati
(f.) wishing, longing, desire DN-a i.242.
abhi + kankhana + tā
desired, wished, longed for Vv-a 201 (= abhijjhita).
pp. of abhikankhati
(adj.) cp. wishing for, desirous (of-˚) Thig 360 (sītibhāva˚).
1. strewn over with (-˚), adorned, covered filled Pv ii.112 (puppha˚).
2. overwhelmed overcome, crushed by (-˚) Iti 89 (dukkh˚ vv.ll. dukkhâtiṇṇa & otiṇṇa) = AN i.147 (which reads dukkhotiṇṇa). See also avatiṇṇa.
pp. of abhikirati
1. to sprinkle or cover over: see abhikiṇṇa 1.
2. [Sk. avakirati, cp. apakiritūna to overwhelm, destroy, put out, throw away, crush SN i.54; Thag 598; Thag 2, Thag 447 (ger. ˚kiritūna, reading of C for T. apa˚, expld. by chaḍḍetvā); Dhp 25 (˚kīrati metri causa; dīpaṃ abhikīrati = viddhaṃseti vikirati Dhp-a i.255 v.l. atikirati); Ja iv.121 (˚kīrati; dīpaṃ = viddhaṃseti C.) vi.541 (nandiyo m˚ abhikīrare = abhikiranti abhikkamanti C.); Dhp-a i.255 (inf. ˚kirituṃ) ■ pp. abhikiṇṇa see abhikiṇṇa 2.
Sk. abhikirati
to play (a game), to sport Mil 359 (kīḷaṃ).
abhi + kìḷati
resounding (with the song of birds) Pv ii.123 (cakkavāka˚; so read for kujita). Cp. abhinikūjita.
abhi + kūjita, pp. of kūj
(adj.-n.) (a) (adj.) lit. gone forward, gone out, gone beyond. According to the traditional expln. preserved by Bdhgh. & Dhp (see e.g. DN-a i.227 = Kp-a 114 = Vv-a 52) it is used in 4 applications: abhikkantasaddo khaya (+ pabbaniya Kp-a) sundar’-âbhirūpa-abbhanumodanesu dissati. These are: 1. (lit.) gone away, passed gone out, departed (+ nikkhanta, meaning khaya “wane”) in phrase abhikkantāya rattiyā at the waning of the night Vin i.26; DN ii.220; MN i.142. 2. excellent, supreme (sundara) Snp 1118 (˚dassāvin having the most exellent knowledge = aggadassāvin etc. Nd ii.76); usually in compar ˚tara (+ paṇītatara) DN i.62, DN i.74, DN i.216; AN ii.101; AN iii.350 sq.; AN v.140, AN v.207 sq.; DN-a i.171 (= atimanāpatara) 3. pleasing, superb, extremely wonderful, as exclamation ˚ṃ repeated with bho (bhante), showing appreciation (abbhânumodana) DN i.85, DN i.110, DN i.234; Snp p.15, Snp p.24, etc. freq 4. surpassing, beautiful (always with ˚vaṇṇa = abhirūpa Vin i.26; DN ii.220; MN i.142; Pv ii.110 = Vv 91 (atimanāpa abhirūpa Pv-a 71); Kp-a 115 (= abhirūpachavin) ■ (b) (nt.) abhikkantaṃ (combd. with and opp to paṭikkantaṃ) going forward (and backward), approach (and receding) DN i.70 (= gamaṇa + nivattana DN-a i.183) Vin iii.181; AN ii.104, AN ii.106 sq.; Vv-a 6.
pp. of abhikkamati, in sense of Sk. and also P. atikkanta
going forward, approach, going out Pv iv.12 (opp. paṭikkama going back); Dhp-a iii.124 (˚paṭikkama).
to go forward, to proceed, approach DN i.50 (= abhimukho kamati gacchati, pavisati DN-a i.151); ii.147, 256 (abhikkā muṃ aor.); Dhp-a iii.124 (evaṃ ˚itabbaṃ evaṃ paṭikkamitabbaṃ thus to approach & thus to withdraw) ■ pp; abhikkanta (q.v.).
Vedic abhikramati, abhi + kamati
(nt.) digging up of the ground MN i.143.
fr. abhikkhanati
(nt.) [abhi + *ikkhaṇa from īkṣ, cp. Sk. abhīkṣṇa of which the eontracted form is P. abhiṇha only as acc. adv. ˚ṃ constantly, repeated, often Vv 2412 (= abhiṇhaṃ Vv-a 116); Pv ii.84 (= abhiṇhaṃ bahuso Pv-a 107); Pp 31; Dhp-a ii.91.
to dig up MN i.142.
abhi + khaṇati
to throw Dāvs iii.60; cp. abhinikkhipati ibid. 12.
abhi + khipati
(a) to roar, shout, thunder, to shout or roar at (c. acc.) Snp 831 (shouting or railing = gajjanto uggajjanto Nd i.172); ger. abhigajjiya thundering Cp iii.108. (b) hum, chatter, twitter (of birds); see abhigajjin.
abhi + gajjati from garj, sound-root, cp. P. gaggara
(adj.) warbling, singing, chattering Thag 1108, Thag 1136.
fr. abhigajjati
(adj.) to be approached, accessible Pv-a 9.
grd. of abhigacchati
1. to be greedy for, to crave for, show delight in (c. loc.) Snp 1039 (kāmesu, cp. Nd ii.77).
2. to envy (acc.) SN i.15 (aññam-aññaṃ).
abhi + gijjhati
1. sung for. Only in one phrase, gāthābhigītaṃ, that which is gained by singing or chanting verses (Ger. “ersungen”) SN i.173; Snp 81 = Mil 228. See Snp-a 151.
2. resounding with filled with song (of birds) Ja vi.272 (= abhiruda).
pp. of abhigāyati, cp. gīta
(a) striking, slaying, killing Pv-a 58 (daṇḍa˚), 283 (sakkhara˚). (b) impact, contact Dhs-a 312 (rūpa˚ etc.).
Sk. abhighāta, abhi + ghāta
(adj.) dependent on the clearest consciousness. On the spelling see ābhic˚ (of jhāna) MN i.33, MN i.356; MN iii.11; SN ii.278; AN ii.23; AN v.132 (Spelt. ābhi˚ at MN i.33; AN iii.114; Vin v.136). See Dial. iii.108.
abhi + ceto + ika
to intend, devise, have in mind Ja iv.310 (manasā pāpaṃ).
abhi + ceteti
(adj.) covered with, bedecked or adorned with (-˚) Ja ii.48 (hema-jāla˚, v.l. abhisañchanna), 370 (id.); Snp 772 (= ucchanna āvuṭa etc. Nd i.24, cp. Nd ii.365).
abhi + channa
(adj.) desired Ja vi.445 (so read for abhijjhita ).
abhi + icchita, cp. Sk. abhīpsita
(adj.) of noble birth Ja v.120.
Sk. ābhijātya; abhi + jacca
occasional spelling for abhijāneti.
to wish for, strive after, pray for SN i.143 (read asmâbhijappanti & cp.; Kindred Sayings p. 180) = Ja iii.359 (= namati pattheti piheti C.); Ṣn 923, 1046 (+ āsiṃsati thometi; Nd ii.79 = jappati & same under icchati). Cp. in meaning; abhigijjhati.
abhi + jappati
(nt.) [doubtful whether to jappati or to japati to mumble, to which belongs jappana in kaṇṃa˚ DN-a i.97 in hattha˚; casting a spell to make the victim throw up or wring his hands DN i.11; DN-a i.97.
(f.) praying for, wishing, desire, longing Dhs 1059 = Nd ii.taṇhā ii. Dhs 1136.
abstr. fr. abhijappati, cp. jappā
(adj.) praying for, desiring AN III.353 (kāma-lābha˚).
fr. abhijappati
to shine forth, ppr. ˚anto resplendent Pv-a 189.
abhi + jalati
to be eager, active Snp 668.
abhi + javati
(adj.) of noble birth, well-born, SN i.69; Vv 293; Mil 359 (˚kulakulīna belonging to a family of high or noble birth).
abi + jāta
(f.) 1. Species. Only as t. t. in use by certain non-Buddhist teachers. They divided mankind into six species, each named after a colour DN i.53, DN i.54; AN iii.383 ff. (quoted DN-a i.162) gives details of each species. Two of them, the black and the white, are interpreted in a Buddhist sense at DN iii.250, MN ii.222 and Netti 158. This interpretation (but not the theory of the six species) has been widely adopted by subsequent Hindu writers.
2. Rebirth, descent, Mil 226.
abhi + jāti
(adj.) belonging to ones birth or race, born of, being by birth; only in cpd. kaṇhâbhijātika of dark birth, that is, low in the social scale DN iii.251; AN iii.348; Snp 563 = Thag 833; cp. Ja P T S. 1893, 11 in sense of “evil disposed or of bad character” at Ja v.87 (= kāḷaka-sabhāva C.).
fr. abhijāti
(f.) the fact of being born, descendency Vv-a 216.
abstr. fr. abhijāti
(nt. or m?) recognition, remembrance, recollection Mil 78. See also abhiññā.
Sk. abhijñāna
to know by experience, to know fully or thoroughly, to recognise know of (c. acc.), to be conscious or aware of DN i.143; SN ii.58, SN ii.105, SN ii.219, SN ii.278; SN iii.59, SN iii.91; SN iv.50, SN iv.324, SN iv.399; SN v.52 SN v.176, SN v.282, SN v.299; Snp 1117 (diṭṭhiṃ Gotamassa na a.) Ja iv.142; Pv ii.710 = ii.103 (n’ābhijānāmi bhuttaṃ vā pītaṃ) Sdhp 550; etc ■ Pot. abhijāneyya Nd ii.78a, & abhijaññā Snp 917, Snp 1059 (= jāneyyāsi Snp-a 592); aor. abhaññāsi Snp p.16 ■ ppr. abhijānaṃ SN iv.19, SN iv.89; Snp 788 (= ˚jānanto C.), 1114 (= ˚jānanto Nd ii.78b) abhijānitva Dhp-a iv.233; abhiññāya SN iv.16; SN v.392; Snp 534 (sabbadhammaṃ), 743 (jātikkhayaṃ), 1115, 1148; Iti 91 (dhammaṃ) Dhp 166 (atta-d-atthaṃ); freq. in phrase sayaṃ abhiññāya from personal knowledge or self-experience Iti 97 (v.l abhiññā); Dhp 353; and abhiññā [short form, like ādā for ādāya, cp. upādā] in phrase sayaṃ abhiññā DN i.31 (+ sacchikatvā); SN ii.217; Iti 97 (v.l. for ˚abhiññāya), in abhiññā-vosita perfected by highest knowledge SN i.167 SN i.175 = Dhp 423 (“master of supernormal lore” Mrs Rh. D in kindred S. p. 208; cp. also Dhp-a iv.233); Iti 47 Iti 61 = Iti 81, and perhaps also in phrase sabbaṃ abhiññapariññeyya SN iv.29 ■ grd. abhiññe y ya SN iv.29; Snp 558 (˚ṃ abhiññātaṃ known is the knowable); Nd ii.s.v. Dhp-a iv.233 ■ pp. abhiññāta (q.v.).
abhi + jñā, cp. jānāti & abhiññā
to beget, produce, effect, attain, in phrase akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ Nibbānaṃ a. DN iii.251; AN iii.384 sq At Snp 214 abhijāyati means “to behave, to be”, cp Snp-a 265 (abhijāyati = bhavati).
abhi + jāyati, Pass. of jan, but in sense of a Caus. = janeti
to wish to overcome, to covet Ja vi.193 (= jinituṃ icchati C). Burmese scribes spell ˚jigīsati; Thag 743 (“cheat”? Mrs Rh. D.; “vernichten” Neumann). See also abhijeti, and nijigiṃsanatā.
abhi + jigiṃsati
to be very hungry Pv-a 271.
abhi + jighacchati
(adj.) belonging to one’s livehood, forming one’s living Vin i.187 (sippa).
abhi + jīvana + ika
(f.) strenuousness, exertion, strong endeavour Ja vi.373 (viriyakaraṇa C.).
abhi + jīhanā of jeh to open ones mouth
to win, acquire, conquer Ja vi.273 (ābhi˚ metri causā).
abhi + jayati
to make clear, explain, illuminate Ja v.339.
abhi + joteti
(adj.) not to be broken, not to be moved or changed uninfluenced Ja ii.170; Dhp-a iii.189.
a + bhijjana + ka, from bhijja, grd. of bhid
(adj.) that which is not being broken up or divided. In the stock descrīption of the varieties of the lower Iddhi the phrase udake pi abhijjamāne gacchati is doubtful. The principal passages are DN i.78, DN i.212; DN iii.112, DN iii.281; MN i.34 MN i.494; MN ii.18; AN i.170, AN i.255; AN iii.17; AN v.199; SN ii.121; SN v.264 In about half of these passages the reading is abhijjamāno The various rcadings show that the MSS also are equally divided on this point. Bdgh. (Vism 396) reads ˚māne, and explains it, relying on Pts ii.208, as that sort of water in which a man does not sink. Pv iii.11 has the same idiom. Dhammapāla’s note on that (Pv-a 169) is corrupt. At DN i.78 the Colombo ed. 1904, reads abhejjamāne and tr. ʻnot dividing (the water)ʼ; at DN i.212 it reads abhijjamāno and tr. ʻnot sinking (in the water)ʼ.
ppr. passive of a + bhid, see bhindati
(f.), covetousness, in meaning almost identical with lobha (cp. Dhs. trsl. 22) DN i.70, DN i.71 (˚āya cittaṃ parisodheti he cleanses his heart from coveting; abhijjhāya = abl.; cp DN-a i.211 = abhijjhāto); MN i.347 (id.); DN iii.49, DN iii.71 sq. 172, 230, 269; SN iv.73, SN iv.104, SN iv.188, SN iv.322 (adj. vigat’âbhijjha) 343 (˚āyavipāka); AN i.280; AN iii.92; AN v.251 sq.; Iti 118 Nd i.98 (as one of the 4 kāya-ganthā, q.v.); Nd ii.taṇhā ii.1; Pp 20, Pp 59; Dhs 1136 (˚kāyagantha); Vb 195, Vb 244 (vigat’âbhijjha), 362, 364, 391; Ne 13; Dhp-a i.23; Pv-a 103, Pv-a 282; Sdhp 56, Sdhp 69 ■ Often combd with ˚domanassa covetousness & discontent, e.g. at DN iii.58, DN iii.77 DN iii.141, DN iii.221, DN iii.276; MN i.340; MN iii.2; AN i.39, AN i.296; AN ii.16, AN ii.152 AN iv.300 sq., 457 sq.; v.348, 351; Vb 105, Vb 193 sq -anabhijjhā absence of covetousness Dhs 35, Dhs 62 ■ See also anupassin, gantha, domanassa, sīla.
fr. abhi + dhyā (jhāyati1), cp. Sk. abhidhyāna
see abhijjhitar.
to wish for (acc.), long for, covet SN v.74 (so read for abhijjhati); ger. abhijjhāya Ja vi.174 (= patthetvā C.) ■ pp. abhijjhita.
cp. abhidyāti, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāyati
to wish for, covet (c. acc.). Snp 301 (aor abhijjhāyiṃsu = abhipatthayamāna jhāyiṃsu Snp-a 320).
Sk. abhidhyāyati, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāti
(& ˚u) (adj.) covetous DN i.139; DN iii.82; Ṣ ii.168; iii.93; AN i.298; AN ii.30, AN ii.59, AN ii.220 (an˚ + avyapannacitto sammādiṭṭhiko at conclusion of sīla); v.92 sq., 163, 286 sq. Iti 90, Iti 91; Pp 39, Pp 40.
cp. jhāyin from jhāyati1; abhijjhālu with ˚ālu for ˚āgu which in its turn is for āyin The B.Sk. form is abhidyālu, e.g. Divy 301, a curious reconstruction
v.l. at Dhp-a iv.101 for ajjhiṭṭha.
coveted, J. vi.445; usually neg. an˚ not coveted, Vin i.287; Snp 40 (= anabhipatthita Snp-a 85; cp. Nd ii.38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita Vv-a 201).
pp. of abhijjhāti
one who covets MN i.287 (T. abhijjhātar, v.l. ˚itar) = AN v.265 (T. ˚itar, v.l. ˚ātar).
n. ag. fr. abhijjhita in med. function
(adj.) (usually -˚) knowing, possessed of knowledge, esp. higher or supernormal knowledge (abhiññā), intelligent; thus in chalabhiñña one who possesses the 6 abhiññās Vin iii.88; dandh˚; of sluggish intellect DN iii.106; AN ii.149; AN v.63 (opp. khipp˚) mah˚; of great insight SN ii.139 ■ Compar. abhiññatara SN v.159 (read bhiyyo ˚bhiññataro).
Sk. abhijña
(f.) in cpd. mahā˚; state or condition of great intelligence or supernormal knowledge SN iv.263; V.175, 298 sq.
fr. abhiññā
(f.). Rare in the older texts. It appears in two contexts. Firstly, certain conditions are said to conduce (inter alia) to serenity, to special knowledge (abhiññā), to special wisdom, and to Nibbāna These conditions precedent are the Path (SN v.421 = Vin i.10 = SN iv.331), the Path + best knowledge and full emancipation (AN v.238), the Four Applications of Mindfulness (SN v.179) and the Four Steps to Iddhi (S. v.255) The contrary is three times stated; wrong-doing, priestly superstitions, and vain speculation do not conduce to abhiññā and the rest (D iii.131; AN iii.325 sq. and v.216) Secondly, we find a list of what might now be called psychic powers. It gives us 1, Iddhi (cp. levitation); 2 the Heavenly Ear (cp. clairaudience); 3, knowing others thoughts (cp. thought-reading); 4, recollecting one’s previous births; 5, knowing other people’s rebirths; 6, certainty of emancipation already attained (cp. final assurance) This list occurs only at DN iii.281 as a list of abhiññās It stands there in a sort of index of principal subjects appended at the end of the Dīgha, and belongs therefore to the very close of the Nikāya period. But it is based on older material. Descriptions of each of the six, not called abhiññās, and interspersed by expository sentences or paragraphs, are found at DN i.89 sq. (trsl. Dial. i.89 sq.); MN i.34 (see Buddh. Suttas, 210 sq.); AN i.255, AN i.258 AN iii.17, AN iii.280 = AN iv.421. At SN i.191; Vin ii.16; Pp 14, we have the adj. chaḷabhiññā (“endowed with the 6 Apperceptions”). At SN ii.216 we have five, and at SN v.282 SN v.290 six abhiññās mentioned in glosses to the text. And at SN ii.217, SN ii.222 a bhikkhu claims the 6 powers. See also MN ii.11; MN iii.96. It is from these passages that the list at DN iii. has been made up, and called abhiññās.
Afterwards the use of the word becomes stereotyped In the Old Commentaries (in the Canon), in the later ones (of the 5th cent. a.d.), and in medieval and modern Pāli, abhiññā, nine times out ten, means just the powers given in this list. Here and there we find glimpses of the older, wider meaning of special, supernormal power of apperception and knowledge to be acquired by long training in life aud thought. See Nd i.108, Nd i.328 (expln. of ñāṇa); Nd ii.s. v. and N0. 466; Pts i.35; Pts ii.156, Pts ii.189; Vb 228, Vb 334; Pp 14; Ne 19, Ne 20; Mil 342; Vism 373 Mvu xix.20; DN-a i.175; Dhp-a ii.49; Dhp-a iv.30; Sdhp 228 Sdhp 470, Sdhp 482. See also the discussion in the Cpd. 60 sp. 224 sq. For the phrase sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā and abhiññā-vosita see abhijānāti. The late phrase yath’ abhiññaṃ means ʻas you please, according to liking, as you likeʼ, Ja v.365 (= yathādhippāyaṃ yathāruciṃ C.). For abhiññā in the use of an adj. (˚abhiñña) see abhiñña.
fr. abhi + jñā, see jānāti
ger. of abhijānāti.
1. known, recognised Snp 588 (abhiññeyyaṃ ˚ṃ).
2. (well)-known, distinguished DN i.89 (˚kolañña = pākaṭa-kulaja DN-a i.252), 235; Snp p.115.
pp. of abhijānāti
grd. of abhijānāti.
(nt.) a great or deadly crime Only at Snp 231 = Kp vi.10 (quoted Kv 109). Six are there mentioned, & are explained (Kp-a 189) as “matricide parricide, killing an Arahant, causing schisms, wounding a Buddha, following other teachers”. For other relations & suggestions see Dhs trsl.267 ■ See also ānantarika.
abhi + ṭhāna, cp. abhitiṭṭhati; lit. that which stands out above others
(adv.) repeatedly, continuous, often MN i.442 (˚āpattika a habitual offender), 446 (˚kāraṇa continuous practice); Snp 335 (˚saṃvāsa continuous living together); Ja i.190; Pp 32; Dhp-a ii.239; Vv-a 116 (= abhikkhaṇa), 207, 332; Pv-a 107 (= abhikkhaṇaṃ). Cp. abhiṇhaso.
contracted form of abhikkhaṇaṃ
(adv.) always, ever SN i.194; Thag 25; Snp 559, Snp 560, Snp 998.
adv. case fr. abhiṇha; cp. bahuso = Sk. bahuśaḥ
to search for Dāvs v.4.
abhi + takketi
scorched (by heat), dried up, exhausted, in phrases uṇha˚ Vin ii.220; Mil 97, and ghamma˚ SN ii.110, SN ii.118; Snp 1014; Ja ii.223; Vv-a 40; Pv-a 114.
pp. of abhi + tapati
extreme heat, glow; adj. very hot Vin iii.83 (sīsa˚ sunstroke); MN i.507 (mahā˚ very hot) Mil 67 (mahābhitāpatara much hotter); Pv iv.18 (mahā˚ of niraya).
abhi + tāpa
hammered to pieces, beaten, struck Vism 231 (muggara˚).
abhi + tāḷita fr. tāḷeti
to stand out supreme, to excel, surpass DN ii.261; Ja vi.474 (abhiṭṭhāya = abhibhavitvā C.).
abhi + tiṭṭhati
(tuṇṇa). Overwhelmed, overcome overpowered SN ii.20; Pts i.129 (dukkha˚), 164; Ja i.407 Ja i.509 (˚tuṇṇa); ii.399, 401; iii.23 (soka˚); iv.330; v.268 Sdhp 281.
not as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 135, suggested fr. abhi + tud, but acc. to Kern, Toev. p. 4 fr. abhi + tūrv. (Cp. turati & tarati;2 and Ved. turvati) Thus the correct spelling is ˚tuṇṇa = Sk. abhitūrṇa. The latter occurs as v.l. under the disguise of (sok-)âhituṇḍa for ˚abhituṇṇa at M. Vastu iii.2
(indecl.) adv. case fr. prep. abhi etym.].
1. round about, on both sides Ja vi.535 (= ubhayapassesu C.) 539.
2. near, in the presence of Vv 641 (= samīpe Vv-a 275).
to please thoroughly, to satisfy, gratify Snp 709 (= atīva toseti Snp-a 496).
abhi + toseti
to roar, to thunder Ja i.330, Ja i.332 = Cp iii.107.
abhi + thaneti
to make haste Dhp 116 (= turitaturitaṃ sīghasīghaṃ karoti Dhp-a iii.4).
abhi + tarati2, evidently wrong for abhittarati
to praise Ja i.89; Ja iii.531; Dāvs iii.23; Dhp-a i.77; Pv-a 22; cp. abhitthunati.
abhi + thavati
(nt.) praise Th A 74.
fr. prec.
to praise Ja i.17 (aor abhitthuniṃsu); cp. thunati 2 ■ pp. ˚tthuta Dhp-a i.88.
abhi + thunati; cp. abhitthavati
(adj.) as attr. of sun & moon at MN ii.34, MN ii.35 is doubtful in reading & meaning; vv.ll. abhidosa & abhidesa Neumann; trsl. “unbeschränkt”. The context seems to require a meaning like “full, powerful” or unbroken unrestricted (abhijja or abhīta “fearless”?”) or does abhida represent Vedic abhidyu heavenly?
Only in the difficult old verse DN ii.107 (= SN v.263 = AN iv.312 = Nd 64 = Ne 60 = Divy 203) Aorist 3rd sg. fr. bhindati he broke.
(nt.) sight, appearance, show Ja vi.193.
abhi + dassana
in sabba˚ at Pv-a 78 is with v.l. BB to be read sabbapātheyyaṃ.
(˚-) the evening before, last night; ˚kālakata MN i.170 = Ja i.81; ˚gata gone last night Ja vi.386 (hiyyo paṭhama-yāme C.).
belonging to last night (of gruel) Vin iii.15; Mil 291. See ābhi˚.
to rush on, to assail Mvu 6, Mvu 5; Dāvs iii.47.
abhi + dru, cp. dava2
blow on or at AN i.257.
abhi + dhamati, cp. Sk. abhi˚ & api-dhamati
the “special Dhamma,” i.e., 1. theory of the doctrine, the doctrine classified, the doctrine pure and simple (without any admixture of literary grace or of personalities, or of anecdotes, or of arguments ad personam), Vin i.64, Vin i.68; Vin iv.144; Vin iv.344 Coupled with abhivinaya, DN iii.267; MN i.272.
2. (only in the Chronicles and Commentaries) name of the Third Piṭaka, the third group of the canonical books. Dpvs v.37; Pv-a 140. See the detailed discussion at DN-a i.15 DN-a i.18 sq. [As the word abhidhamma standing alone is not found in Sn or S or A, and only once or twice in the Dialogues, it probably came into use only towards the end of the period in which the 4 great Nikāyas grew up.]
-kathā discourse on philosophical or psychological matters, MN i.214, MN i.218; AN iii.106, AN iii.392. See dhammakathā.
abhi + dhamma
see ābhidhammika.
(adj.) firm, bold, in ˚māna firmminded Dhp p.81 (acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 135 not verified).
abhi + dhara
(adj.) “putting on”, designing, calling, meaning Pgdp 98.
abhi + dhāyin fr. dhā
to hold aloft Ja i.34 = Bv iv.1.
abhi + dhāreti
to run towards, to rush about, rush on, hasten Vin ii.195; SN i.209; Ja ii.217 Ja iii.83; Dhp-a iv.23.
abhi + dhāvati
(adj.) fr. abhidhāvati] “pouring in”, rushing on, running Ja vi.559.
bent, (strained, fig. bent on pleasure MN i.386 (+ apanata); SN i.28 (id.; Mrs. Rh. D “strained forth”, cp. Kindred S i.39). See also apanata.
pp. of abhi + namati
to resound, to be full of noise Ja vi.531. Cp. abhinādita.
abhi + nadati
to rejoice at, find pleasure in (acc.), approve of, be pleased or delighted with (acc. DN i.46 (bhāsitaṃ), 55 (id.), 158, 223; MN i.109, MN i.458; SN i.32 (annaṃ), 57, 14, (cakkhuṃ, rūpe etc.); AN iv.411 Thag 606; Dhp 75, Dhp 219; Snp 1054, Snp 1057, Snp 1111; Nd ii.82; Mil 25; DN-a i.160; Dhp-a iii.194 (aor. abhinandi, opp paṭikkosi) Vv-a 65 (vacanaṃ) ■ pp. abhinandita (q.v.). Often in combn. with abhivadati (q.v.).
abhi + nandati
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.), pleasure, delight, enjoyment DN i.244; MN i.498; Ja iv.397.
fr. abhinandati, cp. nandanā
only in an˚; not enjoyed, not (being) an object of pleasure SN iv.213 = Iti 38; SN v.319.
pp. of abhinandati
(adj.) rejoicing at, finding pleasure in (loc. or-˚), enjoying AN ii.54 (piyarūpa); esp. freq. in phrase (taṇhā) tatratatr’âbhinandinī finding its pleasure in this or that [cp. B.Sk. tṛṣṇā tatra-tatr’âbhinandinī Mvu iii.332] Vin i.10; SN v.421; Pts ii.147; Ne 72, etc.
fr. abhinandati, cp. nandin
to bend ■ pp. abhinata (q.v.).
abhi + namati
a dramatic representation Vv-a 209 (sākhā˚).
abhi + naya
resounding with (-˚), filled with the noise (or song) of (birds) Ja vi.530 (= abhinadanto C.); Pv-a 157 (= abhiruda).
pp. of abhinādeti, Caus. of abhi + nad; see nadati
(adj.) resounding with, full of the noise of (birds) Ja v.232 (of the barking of a dog) 304 (of the cuckoo); so read for ˚kuñjita T.). Cp. abhikūjita.
abhi + nikūjita
to go forth from (abl.), go out, issue Dhs A 91; esp. fig. to leave the household life, to retire from the world Snp 64 (= gehā abhinikkhamitvā kāsāya-vattho hutvā Snp-a 117).
abhi + nikkhamati
(nt.) departure, going away, esp. the going out into monastic life, retirement renunciation. Usually as mahā˚; the great renunciation Ja i.61; Pv-a 19.
abhi + nikkhamana
to lay down, put down Davs iii.12, 60.
abhi + nikkhipati
(f.) holding back Vin iii.121 (+ abhinippīḷanā).
abstr. fr. abhiniggaṇhāti
to hold back, restrain, prevent, prohibit; always in combn. with abhinippīḷeti MN i.120; AN v.230 ■ Cp. abhiniggaṇhanā.
abhi + niggaṇhāti
doubtful meaning. The other is expld by Bdhgh at DN-a i.120 as paripuṇṇ˚; and at 222 as avikal-indriya not defective, perfect sense-organ. He must have read ahīn˚ Abhi-n-indriya could only be expld as “with supersenseorgans”, i.e. with organs of supernormal thought or perception thus coming near in meaning to *abhiññindriya We should read ahīn˚ throughout DN i.34, DN i.77, DN i.186, DN i.195 DN ii.13; MN ii.18; MN iii.121; Nd ii.under pucchā6 (only ahīn˚).
vv.ll. at all passages for ahīnindriya
to bend towards, to turn or direct to DN i.76 (cittaṃ ñāṇa-dassanāya); MN i.234; SN i.123; SN iv.178; Pp 60.
abhi + ninnāmeti cp. BSk. abhinirṇāmayati Lal. V. 439
to lie down on Vin iv.273 (+ abhinisīdati); AN iv.188 (in = acc. + abhinisīdati) Pp 67 (id.).
abhi + nipajjati
to rush on (to) Ja ii.8.
abhi + nipatati
(-matta) destroying, hurting (?) at Vb 321 is expld. by āpātha-matta.
cp. Divy 125 śastrâbhinipāta splitting open or cutting with a knife
(nt.) [fr. abhi-ni-pāteti in daṇḍa-sattha˚; attacking with stick or knife Nd ii.5764.
(adj.) falling on io (-˚) Ja ii.7.
abhi + nipātin
(adj.) very thorough, very clever DN iii.167.
abhi + nipuṇa
to be produced, accrue, get, come (to) MN i.86 (bhogā abhinipphajjanti: sic) Nd ii.99 (has n’âbhinippajjanti) ■ Cp. abhinipphādeti.
abhi + nippajjati
at Ja vi.36 is to be read abhinippanna (so v.l. BB.).
at Dhs 1035, Dhs 1036 is to be read abhinibbatta.
(& ˚nipphanna ) produced, effected, accomplished DN ii.223 (siloka); Ja vi.36 (so read for abhinippata); Mil 8 (pph.).
abhi + nippanna, pp. of ˚nippajjati
(f.) pressing, squeezing, taking hold of Vin iii.121 (+ abhiniggaṇhanā).
abstr. to abhinippīḷeti, cp. nippīḷana
to squeeze, crush, subdue Vism 399; often in combn. with abhiniggaṇhāti MN i.120; AN v.230.
abhi + nippīḷeti
(f.) production, effecting DN ii.283 (v.l. ˚nibbatti).
abhi + nipphatti
to bring into existence, produce, effect, work, perform DN i.78 (bhājana-vikatiṃ) Vin ii.183 (iddhiṃ); SN v.156, SN v.255; Mil 39.
abhi + nipphādeti
reproduced, reborn AN iv.40, AN iv.401; Nd ii.256 (nibbatta abhi pātubhūta); Dhs 1035, Dhs 1036 (so read for˚ nippatta) Vv-a 9 (puññ’ânubhāva˚ by the power of merit).
abhi + nibbatta, pp. of abhinibbattati
to become, to be reproduced, to result Pp 51 ■ pp. abhinibbatta ■ Cp B.Sk. wrongly abhinivartate].
abhi + nibbattati
(f.) becoming, birth, rebirth, DN i.229; DN ii.283 (v.l. for abhinipphatti) SN ii.65 (punabbhava˚), 101 (id.); iv.14, 215; AN v.121; Pv-a 35.
abhi + nibbatti
to produce, cause, cause to become SN iii.152; AN v.47; Nd ii.under jāneti.
abhi + nibbatteti, caus. of ˚nibbattati
to be disgusted with, to avoid, shun, turn away from Snp 281 (T. abhinibbijjayātha, v.l. BB˚ nibbijjiyātha & ˚nibbajjiyātha, Snp-a expl;s. by vivajjeyyātha mā bhajeyyātha; v.l. BB. abhinippajjiyā) = AN iv.172 (T. abhinibbajjayātha vv.ll. ˚nibbajjeyyātha & ˚nibbijjayātha); ger. abhinibbijja Thig 84.
either Med. fr. nibbindati of vid for *nirvidyate (see nibbindati B), or secondary formation fr ger. nibbijja. Reading however not beyond all doubt
to break quite through (of the chick coming through the shell of the egg) Vin iii.3; MN i.104 = SN iii.153 (read˚ nibbijjheyyun for nibbijjeyyun-Cp. Buddh. Suttas 233, 234.
abhi + nibbijjhati
(f.) disgust with the world, taedium Ne 61 (taken as abhinibbhidā, according to expln. as “padālanā-paññatti avijj˚aṇḍa-kosānaṃ”), 98 (so MSS, but C. abhinibbidhā).
abhi + nibbidā; confused with abhinibbhidā
(adj.) perfectly cooled, calmed, serene, esp. in two phrases, viz. diṭṭha dhamm’ ābhinibbuta AN i.142 = MN iii.187; Snp 1087; Nd ii.83, and abhinibbutatta of cooled mind Snp 343 (= apariḍayhamāna-citta Snp-a 347), 456, 469, 783. Also at Sdhp. 35.
abhi + nibbuta
(f.) [this the better, although not correct spelling; there exists a confusion with abhinibbidā, therefore spelling also abhinibbidhā (Vin iii.4, C. on Ne 98) To abhinibbijjhati, cp. B.Sk. abhinirbheda Mvu i.272 which is wrongly referred to bhid instead of vyadh. the successful breaking through (like the chick through the shell of the egg), coming into (proper) life Vin iii.4; MN i.104; MN i.357; Ne 98 (C. reading). See also abhinibbidā.
(f.) speaking to, adressing, invitation MN i.331.
abstr. to abhinimanteti
to invite to (c. instr.), to offer to DN i.61 (āsanena).
abhi + nimanteti
(nt.) crushing, subduing, levelling out MN iii.132; AN iv.189 sq.
abhi + nimmadana
created (by magic) Vv 161 (pañca rathā satā; cp. Vv-a 79).
abhi + nimmita, pp. of abhinimmināti
to create (by magic), produce, shape, make SN iii.152 (rūpaṃ); AN i.279 (oḷārikaṃ attabhāvaṃ); Nd ii.under pucchā6 (rūpaṃ manomayaṃ); Vv-a 16 (mahantaṃ hatthi-rāja-vaṇṇaṃ) ■ pp. abhinimmita (q.v.).
abhi + nimmināti, cp. BSk. abhinirmāti Jtm 32; abhinirminoti Divy 251; abhinirmimīte Divy 166
(nt.) & ā (f.) fixing one’s mind upon, application of the mind Pts i.16, Pts i.21, Pts i.30, Pts i.69 Pts i.75, Pts i.90; Vb 87; Dhs 7, Dhs 21, Dhs 298 (cp. Dhs trsl. ii.19) See also abhiropana.
fr. abhiniropeti
to implant, fix into (one’s mind), inculcate Ne 33.
abhi + niropeti
to avoid, get rid of DN iii.113; MN i.119, MN i.364, MN i.402; SN v.119, SN v.295, SN v.318; AN iii.169 sq.; Iti 81.
abhi + nivajjeti
lit. to pour out in abundance, fig. to produce in plenty. Cp i.103 (kalyāṇe good deeds).
abhi + ni + vassati fr. vṛṣ
(adj.) “settled in”, attached to, clinging on Nd ii.152 (gahita parāmaṭṭha a.); Pv-a 267 (= ajjhāsita Pv iv.84).
abhi + niviṭṭha, pp. of abhi-nivisati
to cling to, adhere to, be attached to Nd i.308, Nd i.309 (parāmasati + ) ■ pp. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. also abhinivesa.
abhi + nivisati
“settling in”, i.e. wishing for, tendency towards (-˚) inclination, adherence; as adj. liking, loving, being given or inclined to DN iii.230; MN i.136, MN i.251; SN ii.17; SN iii.10 SN iii.13, SN iii.135, SN iii.161, SN iii.186 (saṃyojana˚ iv.50; AN iii.363 (paṭhavī˚ adj.); Nd ii.227 (gāha parāmasa + ); Pp 22; Vb 145; Dhs 381, Dhs 1003, Dhs 1099; Ne 28; Pv-a 252 (micchā˚), 267 (taṇhā˚); Sdhp 71 ■ Often combd. with adhiṭṭhāna e.g. SN ii.17; Nd ii.176, and in phrase idaṃ-sacc’ âbhinivesa adherence to one’s dogmas, as one of the 4 Ties see kāyagantha and cp. Cpd. 171 n. 5.
abhi + nivesa, see nivesa2 & cp. nivesana
to sit down by or on (acc.), always combd. with abhinipajjati Vin iii.29; Vin iv.273; AN v.188; Pp 67.
abhi + nisīdati
(pp.) escaped Thag 1089.
abhi + nissaṭa
(pp.) oppressed. crushed, slain Ja iv.4.
abhi + nihata
(pp.) led to, brought to, obliged by (-˚) MN i.463 = Mil 32 (rājā & cora˚); MN i.282; SN iii.93; Thag 350 = Thag 435 (vātaroga˚ “foredone with cramping pains” Mrs. Rk. D.); Pp 29; Mil 362.
pp. of abhi-neti
(adj.) very black, deep black, only with ref. to the eyes, in phrase ˚netta with deep-black eyes DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.167 sq. [cp. Sp. Avs i.367 Avs i.370 abhinīla-padma-netra]; Thig 257 (nettā ahesuṃ abbinīla-m-āyatā).
abhi + nīla
to drive away, put away, destroy, remove, avoid MN i.119 (in phrase āṇiṃ a. abhinīharati abhinivajjeti).
abhi + nis + han, cp. Sk. nirhanti
1. to take out, throw out MN i.119 (see abhinīhanati).
2. to direct to, to apply to (orig. to isolate? Is reading correct?) in phrase ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti DN i.76 (= tanninnaṃ tappoṇaṃ karoti DN-a i.220, DN-a i.224; v.l. abhini˚) Cp. the latter phrase also in BSk. as abhijñâbhinirhāra Avs ii.3 (see ref. & note Index p. 221); and the pp. abhinirhṛta (ṛddhiḥ) in Divy 48, Divy 49 to obtain? Ind.) 264 (take to burial), 542.
abhi + nīharati
being bent on (“downward force” Dhs trsl. 242), i.e. taking oneself out to, way of acting, (proper) behaviour, endeavour, resolve, aspiration SN iii.267 sq. (˚kusala); AN ii.189; AN iii.311; AN iv.34 (˚kusala) Ja i.14 (Buddhabhāvāya a. resolve to become a Buddha) 15 (Buddhattāya); Pts i.61 sq.; Pts ii.121; Ne 26; Mil 216; Dhp-a i.392; Dhp-a ii.82 (kata˚).
abhi + nīhāra, to abhinīharati; cp. BSk. sarīr’ âbhinirhāra taking (the body) out to burial, lit. meaning see note on abhinīharati
(adj.) one who has attained, attaining (-˚), getting possession of SN i.200 (devakañña˚).
fr. abhipatti
(pp.) hoped, wished, longed for Mil 383; Snp-a 85.
fr. abhipattheti
to hope for, long for, wish for Kp viii.10; Snp-a 320; Dhp-a i.30 ■ pp. abhipatthita (q.v.).
abhi + pattheti
to have regard for, look for, strive after AN i.147 (Nibbānaṃ); iii.75; Snp 896 (khema˚) 1070 (rattamahā˚) Nd i.308; Nd ii.428; Ja vi.370.
abhi + passati
to make fall, to bring to fall, to throw Ja ii.91 (kaṇḍaṃ).
abhi + pāteti
(adj.) dressed Mil 222.
abhi + pāruta, pp. of abhipārupati
to protect Vv 8421, cp. Vv-a 341.
abhi + pāleti
(pp.) crushed, squeezed Sdhp 278, Sdhp 279.
fr. abhipiḷeti
to crush, squeeze Mil 166. - pp. abhipīḷita (q.v.).
abhi + pīḷeti
Sk. abhipṛcchati] to ask Ja iv.18.
abhi + pucchati
to fill (up) Mil 238; Dāvs iii.60 (paṃsūhi).
abhi + pūreti
completely strewn (with) Ja i.62.
pp. of abhippakirati
to strew over, to cover (completely) DN ii.137 (pupphāni Tathāgatassa sarīraṃ okiranti ajjhokiranti a.); Vv-a 38 (for abbhokirati Vv 59). pp. abhippakiṇṇa (q.v.).
abhi + pakirati
to rejoice (intrs.); to please, satisfy (trs, c. acc.) MN i.425; SN v.312, SN v.330; AN v.112; Ja iii.530; Pts i.95, Pts i.176, Pts i.190.
abhi + pamodati
to hang down MN iii.164 (olambati ajjholambati a.).
abhi + palambati
to shed rain upon, to pour down; intrs. to rain, to pour, fall. Usually in phrase mahāmegho abhippavassati a great cloud bursts Mil 8 Mil 13, Mil 36, Mil 304; Pv-a 132 (v.l. ati˚); intrs. Mil 18 (pupphāni ˚iṃsu poured down) ■ pp. abhippavuṭṭha.
abhi + pavassati
(pp.) having rained, poured, fallen; trs. SN v.51 (bandhanāni meghena ˚āni) AN v.127; intrs. MN ii.117 (mahāmegho ˚o there has been a cloudburst).
fr. abhippavassati
(adj.) finding one’s peace in (c. loc.), trusting in having faith in, believing in, devoted to (loc.) Vin iii.43; DN i.211 (Bhagavati) SN i.134; SN iv.319; SN v.225, SN v.378; AN iii.237, AN iii.270, AN iii.326 sq.; Snp p.104 (brāhmaṇesu); Pv-a 54 (sāsand), 142 (id.). Cp. vippasanna in same meaning.
pp. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhiprasanna
faith, belief, reliance, trust Dhs 12 (“sense of assurance” trsl., + saddhā), 25, 96 288; Pv-a 223.
abhi + pasāda, cp. BSk. abhiprasāda Avs 12 (cittasyu˚) & vippasāda
to establish one’s faith in (loc.), to be reconciled with, to propitiate Thag 1173 = Vv 212 (manaṃ arahantamhi = cittaṃ pasādeti Vv-a 105).
Caus. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhiprasādayati Divy 68, Divy 85, pp. abhiprasādita-manāḥ Jtm 213 220
to stretch out Vin i.179 (pāde).
abhi + pasāreti, cp. BSk. abhiprasārayati Divy 389
to have faith in DN i.211 (fut. ˚issati) ■ pp. abhippasanna; Caus. abhippasādeti.
abhi + pasīdati
(nt.) attacking, fighting, as adj. f. ˚aṇī fighting, Ep. of Mārassa senā, the army of M. Snp 439 (kaṇhassa˚ the fighting army of k. = samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ nippothanī antarāyakārī Snp-a 390).
abhi + paharaṇa
to pervade Mil 251.
abhi + vyāpeti, cp. Sk. vyāpnoti, vi + āp
to eat (of animals) Vin ii.201 (bhinko pankaṃ a.).
abhi + bhakkhayati
defeat, humiliation Snp-a 436.
fr. abhibhavati
to overcome, master, be lord over, vanquish, conquer SN i.18, SN i.32, SN i.121 (maraṇaṃ); iv. 71 (rāgadose), 117 (kodhaṃ), 246, 249 (sāmikaṃ); Ja i.56 Ja i.280; Pv-a 94 (= balīyati, vaḍḍhati) ■ fut. abhihessati see abhihāreti 4 ■ ger. abhibhuyya Vin i.294; Dhp 328; Iti 41 (māraṃ sasenaṃ); Snp 45, Snp 72 (˚cārin), 1097, Nd ii.85 (= abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā, pariyādiyitvā); and abhibhavitvā Pv-a 113 (= pasayha), 136 ■ grd. abhibhavanīya to be overcome Pv-a 57 ■ Pass. ppr. abhibhūyamāna being overcome (by) Pv-a 80, Pv-a 103 ■ pp. abhibhūta (q.v.).
abhi + bhavati
(nt.) overcoming, vanquishing, mastering SN ii.210 (v.l. BB abhipatthana).
fr. abhibhavati
(f.) as an˚; invincibility Pv-a 117.
abstr. fr. abhibhavanīya, grd. of abhibhavati
(nt.) position of a master or lord, station of mastery. The traditional account of these gives 8 stations or stages of mastery over the senses (see Dial. ii.118; Exp. i.252), detailed identically at all the foll. passages, viz. DN ii.110; DN iii.260 (& 287) MN ii.13; AN i.40; AN iv.305, AN iv.348; AN v.61. Mentioned only at SN iv.77 (6 stations); Pts i.5; Nd ii.466 (as an accomplishment of the Bhagavant); Dhs 247.
abhibhū + āyatana
(nt.) enlightenment or delight (“light & delight” trsl.) Thag 613 (= tosana C.).
abhi + bhāsana fr. bhās
(n ■ adj.) overcoming, conquering, vanquishing, having power over, a Lord or Master of (-˚) DN iii.29; SN ii.284; Snp 211 (sabba˚), 545 (Māra˚, cp. Mārasena-pamaddana 561), 642 ■ Often in phrase abhibhū anabhibhūta aññadatthudasa vasavattin, i.e. unvanquished Lord of all DN i.18; DN iii.135 = Nd ii.276; AN ii.24; AN iv.94; Iti 122; cp DN-a i.111 (= abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhako’ ham asmīti).
Vedic abhibhū, fr. abhi + bhū, cp. abhibhavati
overpowered, overwhelmed, vanquished DN i.121; SN i.137 (jāti-jarā˚); ii.228 (lābhasakkāra-silokena); AN i.202 (pāpakehi dhammehi); Ja i.189; Pv-a 14, Pv-a 41 (= pareta), 60 (= upagata), 68, 77, 80 (pareta). Often neg. an˚; unconquered, e.g. Snp 934; Nd i.400; & see phrase under abhibhū.;
pp. of abhibhavati
(adj.) (very) fortunate, lucky, anspicious, in ˚sammatā (of Visākhā) “benedicted” blessed Vin iii.187 = Dhp-a i.409. Opp. avamangala.
abhi + mangala
(pp ■ ˚) adorned, embellished, beautified Mil 361; Sdhp 17.
abhi + maṇḍita
(adj.) desired, wished for; agreeable, pleasant C on Thag 91.
BSk. abhimata, e.g. Jtm 211; pp. of abhimanyate
(˚eti) & ˚mantheti 1. to cleave, cut; to crush, destroy MN i.243 (sikharena muddhānaṃ ˚mantheti); SN i.127; Dhp 161 (v.l. ˚nth˚); Ja iv.457 (matthako sikharena ˚matthiyamāno) Dhp-a iii.152 (= kantati viddhaṃseti).
2. to rub, to produce by friction (esp. fire, aggiṃ; cp. Vedic agniṃ nirmanthati) MN i.240.
abhi + math or manth, cp. nimmatheti
to crush SN i.102; AN i.198; Sdhp 288.
Sk. abhimardati & ˚mṛdnāti; abhi + mṛd
(adj.) having one’s mind turned on, thinking of or on (c. acc.) Thag 1122; Ja vi.451.
abhi + mano, BSk. abhimana, e.g. Mvu iii.259
(adj.) very pleasing Vv-a 53 (where id. p. at Pv-a 71 has atimanāpa ).
abhi + manāpa
see abhimatthati.
a bandit, bravo, robber Ja ii.199; DN-a i.152.
cp. Sk. abhimara slaughter
(adj.) facing, turned towards, approaching Ja ii.3 (˚ā ahesuṃ met each other). usually -˚ turned to, going to, inclined towards DN i.50 (purattha˚) Ja i.203 (devaloka˚), 223 (varaṇa-rukkha˚); ii.3 (nagara˚) 416 (Jetavana˚); Dhp-a i.170 (tad˚); ii.89 (nagara˚); Pv-a 3 (kāma˚, opp. vimukha), 74 (uyyāna˚) ■ nt. ˚ṃ adv. to towards Ja i.263 (matta-vāraṇe); Pv-a 4 (āghātana˚, may here be taken as pred. adj.); Dhp-a iii.310 (uttara˚).
abhi + mukha
to ask, beg, entreat Snp 1101, cp. Nd ii.86.
abhi + yācati
to go against (in a hostile manner, to attack (c. acc.) SN i.216 (aor. abhiyaṃsu, v.l. SS abhijiyiṃsu); Dhp-a iii.310 (aor. abhiyāsi as v.l. for T. reading pāyāsi; the id. p Vv-a 68 reads pāyāsi with v.l. upāyāsi).
Vedic abhiyāti in same meaning; abhi _ yā
to contend, quarrel with Ja i.342.
abhi + yujjhati from yudh
to accuse, charge; intrs. fall to one’s share Vin iii.50; Vin iv.304.
abhi + yuj
practice, observance Dāvs iv.7.
cp. abhiyuñjati
(adj.) applying oneself to, practised, skilled (an augur, sooth sayer) DN iii.168.
fr. abhiyoga
(nt.) much youthfulness, early or tender youth Thig 258 (= abhinavayobbanakāla Thag-a 211).
abhi + yobbana
to guard, protect Ja vi.589 (= pāleti C.). Cp. parirakkhati.
abhi + rakkhati
(f.) protection, guard Ja i.204 (= ārakkhā 203).
fr. abhirakkhati
(adj.) (-˚) found of, indulging in, finding delight in AN iv.224 (nekkhamma˚); v.175 (id.) Snp 86 (nibbāna˚), 275 (vihesa˚), 276 (kalaha˚); Ja v.382 (dāna˚); Pv-a 54 (puññakamma˚), 61 (satibhavana˚), 105 (dānâdipuñña˚).
pp. of abhiramati
(nt.) the fact of being fond of, delighting in (-˚) Ja v.254 (kāma˚).
abstr. fr. abhirata
(f.) delight or pleasure in (loc. or-˚) SN i.185; SN iv.260; AN v.122; Dhp 88. -an˚; displeasure discontent, distaste Vin ii.110; DN i.17 (+ paritassanā); SN i.185; SN v.132; AN iii.259; AN iv.50; AN v.72 sq., 122; Ja iii.395; DN-a i.111; Pv-a 187.
fr. abhi + ram
(adj.) very red Ja v.156; fig. very much excited or affected with (-˚) Snp 891 (sandiṭṭhirāgena a.).
abhi + ratta
(adj.) propitiated, satisfied AN iv.185 (+ attamana).
pp. of abhi + rādh
(f.) only in neg. an˚; displeasure, dislike, discontent AN i.79; DN-a i.52 (= kopass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ).
fr. abhiraddha
to sport, enjoy oneself, find pleasure in or with (c. loc.), to indulge in love Snp 718 Snp 1085; Ja i.192; Ja iii.189, Ja iii.393; Dhp-a i.119; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 61 Pv-a 145 ■ ppr. act. abhiranto only as nt. ˚ṃ in adv. phrase yathâbhirantaṃ after one’s liking, as much as he pleases after one’s heart’s content Vin i.34; MN i.170; Snp 53. ppr. med. abhiramamāna Ja iii.188, Pv-a 162 ■ pp abhirata (q.v.).
2nd Caus. abhiramāpeti (q.v.).
abhi + ram
(nt.) sporting, dallying, amusing oneself Pv-a 16.
fr. abhiramati
(nt.) causing pleasure to (acc.), being a source of pleasure making happy MN iii.132 (gāmante).
fr. abhiramāpeti, Caus2 of abhiramati
1. to induce to sport, to cause one to take pleasure Ja iii.393.
2. to delight, amuse, divert Ja i.61 ■ Cp. abhiramāpana.
Caus. II. fr. abhiramati
to shout ont Bv ii.90 = Ja i.18 (v.99)
abhi + ravati
having succeeded in, fallen to one’s share, attained Thag 259.
pp. of abhirādheti
(adj.) (-˚) pleasing, giving pleasure, satisfaction Ja iv.274 (mitta˚ = ārādhento tosento C.).
fr. abhirādheti
to please, satisfy, make happy Ja i.421; DN-a i.52 ■ aor. (pret.) abhirādhayi Vv 315 (= abhirādhesi Vv-a 130); Vv 6423 (gloss for abhirocayi Vv-a 282); Ja i.421; Ja iii.386 (= paritosesi C.) ■ pp abhirādhita.
abhi + rādheti
(f.) delight, longing, pleasure, satisfaction Pv-a 168 (= ajjhāsaya).
Sk. abhiruci, fr. abhi + ruc
(adj.) pleasing, agreeable, liked Ja i.402; Dhp-a i.45.
pp. fr. abhi + ruc
(adj ■ ˚) resounding with (the cries of animals, esp. the song of birds), full of the sound of (birds) Thag 1062 (kuñjara˚), 1113 (mayūra-koñca˚) Ja iv.466 (adāsakunta˚); v.304 (mayūra-koñca˚); vi.172 (id. = upagīta C.), 272 (sakunta˚; = abhigīta C.), 483 (mayūra-koñca˚), 539; Pv ii.123 (haṃsa-koñca˚; = abhinādita Pv-a 157) ■ The form abhiruta occurs at Thag 49.
Sk. abhiruta
(adj.) of perfect form, (very), handsome, beautiful, lovely Snp 410 (= dassaniya’ angapaccanga Snp-a 383); Ja i.207; Pp 52; DN-a i.281 (aññehi manussehi adhikarūpa); Vv-a 53; Pv-a 61 (abhikkanta). Occurs in the idiomatic phrase denoting the characteristics of true beauty abhirūpa dassanīya pāsādika (+ paramāya vaṇṇa-pokkharatāya samannāgata), e.g. Vin i.268; DN i.47, DN i.114, DN i.120; SN ii.279; AN ii.86, AN ii.203 Nd ii.659; Pp 66; Dhp-a i.281 (compar.); Pv-a 46.
abhi + rūpa
mounted, gone up to, ascended Ja v.217; Dhp-a i.103.
pp. of abhirūhati
(abhiruhati) to ascend, mount, climb; to go on or in to (c. acc.) Dhp 321; Thag 271; Ja i.259; Ja ii.388; Ja iii.220; Ja iv.138 (navaṃ); vi.272 (peculiar aor. ˚rucchi with ābhi metri causa; = abhirūhi C.); DN-a i.253 ■ ger. abhiruyha Ja iii.189; Pv-a 75, Pv-a 152 (as v.l. T. has ˚ruyhitva), 271 (nāvaṃ), & abhirūhitvā Ja i.50 (pabbataṃ) ii.128.
abhi + ruh
(nt.) climbing, ascending, climb Mil 356.
BSk. ˚rūhana, e.g. Mvu ii.289
1. to like, to find delight in (acc.), to desire, long for Ja iii.192; Ja v.222 (roceti); Vv 6423 (vataṃ abhirocayi = abhirocesi ruccitvā pūresi ti attho; abhirādhayi ti pi pāṭho; sādhesi nipphādesī ti attho Vv-a 282).
2. to please, satisfy, entertain gladden Vv 6424 (but Vv-a 292: abhibhavitvā vijjotati thus to no. 3).
3. v.l. for atiroceti (to surpass in splendour) at Vv 8112, cp. also no. 2.
abhi + roceti, Caus. of ruc
(nt.) concentration of mind, attention (seems restricted to Pts ii. only) Pts ii.82 (v.l. abhiniropana), 84, 93, 115 (buddhi˚), 142 (˚virāga), 145 (˚vimutti), 216 (˚abhisamaya). See also abhiniropana.
fr. abhiropeti
to fix one’s mind on, to pay attention, to show reverence, to honour Vv 377 (aor. ˚ropayi = ropesi Vv-a 169), 3710 (id.; = pūjaṃ kāresi Vv-a 172), 604 (= pūjesi Vv-a 253); Dāvs v.19.
abhi + ropeti, cp. Sk. adhiropayati, Caus. of ruh
(adj.) fixed, designed, inaugurated, marked by auspices Ja iv.1; DN-a i.18.
Sk. abhilakṣita in diff. meaning; pp. of abhi + lakṣ
(nt.) having signs or marks, being characterised, characteristics Dhs-a 62.
abstr. fr. abhilakkhita
to ascend, rise, travel or pass over (of the moon traversing the sky) Ja iii.364; Ja vi.221.
abhi + langhati
to hang down over (c. acc.) MN iii.164 = Ne 179 (+ ajjholambati); Ja v.70 (papātaṃ) 269 (Vetaraṇiṃ) ■ pp. abhilambita (q.v.).
abhi + lambati
(adj.) hanging down Ja v.407 (nīladuma˚).
pp. of abhilambati
talk, phrasing, expression Snp 49 (vācâbhilāpa making phrases, talking, idle or objectionable speech = tiracchanakathā Nd ii.561); Iti 89 (? reading abhilāpāyaṃ uncertain, vv.ll. abhipāyaṃ abhipāpāyaṃ abhisāpāyaṃ, abhisapāyaṃ, atisappāyaṃ. The corresp. passage SN iii.93 reads abhisapayaṃ: curse, and C. on Iti 89 expls. abhilāpo ti akkoso, see Brethren 376 n. 1); Dhs 1306 = Nd ii.34 (as exegesis or paraphrase of adhivacana combd. with vyañjana & trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as “a distinctive mark of discourse”); DN-a i.20, DN-a i.23, DN-a i.281; Dhs-a 51.
fr. abhi + lap
desire, wish, longing Pv-a 154.
Sk. abhilāṣa, abhi + laṣ
to cause to be inscribed Dāvs v.67 (cāritta-lekhaṃ ˚lekhayi).
Caus. of abhi + likh
(nt.) “smearing over”, stain, pollution Snp 1032, Snp 1033 = Ne 10, Ne 11 (see Nd ii.88 laggana “sticking to”, bandhana, upakkilesa).
abhi + lepana
great mass (?), superior force (?), only in phrase ˚ena omaddati to crush with sup. force or overpower MN i.87 = Nd ii.1996.
abhi + vagga
(nt.) deceit, fraud Dāvs iii.64.
abhi + vañc
rained upon Dhp 335 (gloss ˚vuṭṭha; cp. Dhp-a iv.45); Mil 176 Mil 197, Mil 286 ■ Note. Andersen P. R. prefers reading abhivaḍḍha at Dhp 335 “the abounding Bīraṇa grass”).
pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivuṭṭha
1. to increase (intrs.) DN i.113, DN i.195 (opp. hāyati); MN ii.225; AN iii.46 (bhogā a.); Dhp 24; Mil 374; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 133; Sdhp 288, Sdhp 523.
2. to grow over or beyond, to outgrow Ja iii.399 (vanaspatiṃ) ■ pp. abhivuḍḍha & ˚vuddha; (q.v.).
Vedic abhivardhati, abhi + vṛdh
(adj.-n..) increasing (trs.), augmenting; f. ˚ī Sdhp 68.
fr. abhivaḍḍhati
(f.) increase, growth Mil 94 ■ See also abhivuddhi.
cp. Sk. abhivṛddhi, fr. abhi + vṛdh
praised Dpvs i.4.
pp. of abhivanneti
to praise Sdhp 588 (˚ayi). - pp. abhivaṇṇita.
abhi + vanneti
1. to speak out, declare, promise Ja i.83 = Vin i.36; Ja vi.220.
2. to speak (kindly to, to welcome, salute, greet. In this sense always combd. with abhinandati, e.g. at MN i.109, MN i.266, MN i.458; SN iii.14 SN iv.36 sq.; Mil 69 ■ Caus. abhivādeti.
abhi + vadati
to salute respectfully, to honour, greet; grd. ˚vandanīya Mil 227.
abhi + vandati
(adj.) raining, fig. shedding, pouring ont, yielding Vv-a 38 (puppha˚).
fr. abhivassati
to rain, shed rain, pour; fig. rain down, pour out, shed DN iii.160 (ābhivassaṃ metri causa); AN iii.34; Thag 985; Ja i.18 (v.100 pupphā a. stream down); cp. iii.106; Mil 132, Mil 411. pp. abhivaṭṭa & abhivuṭṭha; (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. abhivassāpeti to cause (the sky to) rain Mil 132.
abhi + vassati from vṛṣ
(adj.) = abhivassaka Iti 64, Iti 65 (sabbattha˚).
(nt.) respectful greeting, salutation, giving welcome, showing respect or devotion AN ii.180; AN iv.130, AN iv.276; Ja i.81, Ja i.82, Ja i.218; Dhp 109 (˚sīlin of devout character, cp. Dhp-a ii.239); Vv-a 24; Sdhp 549 (˚sīla).
fr. abhivādeti
to salute, greet, welcome, honour Vin ii.208 sq.; DN i.61; AN iii.223; AN iv.173; Vv 15 (abhivādayiṃ aor. = abhivādanaṃ kāresiṃ vandiṃ Vv-a 24) Mil 162. Often in combn with padakkhiṇaṃ karoti in sense of to bid goodbye, to say adieu, farewell, e.g. DN i.89, DN i.125, DN i.225; Snp 1010 ■ Caus. II. abhivādāpeti to cause some one to salute, to make welcome Vin ii.208 (˚etabba).
Caus. of abhivadati
to blow through, to pervade Mil 385.
abhi + vāyati; cp. Sk. abhivāti
to hold back, refuse, deny Ja v.325 (= nivāreti C.).
abhi + vāreti, Caus. of vṛ;
to remove, to put away Bv x.5.
abhi + vāheti, Caus. of vah
(& vijināti ) to overpower, to conquer. Of ˚jayati the ger. ˚jiya at DN i.89, DN i.134 DN ii.16. Of ˚jināti the pres. 3rd pl. ˚jinanti at Mil 39 the ger. ˚jinitvā at MN i.253; Pp 66.
abhi + vijayati
to turn somebody’s mind on (c. acc.), to induce somebody (dat.) to (acc.) Vin iii.18 (purāṇadutiyikāya methunaṃ dhammaṃ abhiviññāpesi).
abhi + viññāpeti
“to go down to”, i.e. give in, to pay heed, observe Vin i.134 and in ster. expln. of sañcicca at Vin ii.91; Vin iii.73, Vin iii.112; Vin iv.290.
abhi + vitarati
higher discipline, the refinements of discipline or Vinaya; combd. with abhidhamma, e.g. DN iii.267; MN i.472; also with vinaya Vin v.1 sg.
abhi + vinaya
to find, get, obtain Snp 460 (= labhati adhigacchati Snp-a 405).
abhi + vindati
(adj.) most excellent, very distinguished DN-a i.99, DN-a i.313.
abhi + visiṭṭha
to send out, send forth, deal out, give DN iii.160.
abhi + vissajjati
confided in, taken into confidence MN ii.52 (v.l. ˚visaṭṭha).
abhi + vissattha, pp. of abhivissasati, Sk. abhiviśvasta
poured out or over, shed out (of water or rain) Thag 1065; Dhp 335 (gloss); Pv-a 29.
pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivaṭṭa
increased, enriched Pv-a 150.
pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuddha
grown up Mil 361.
pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuḍḍha
(f.) increase, growth, prosperity Mil 34.
Sk. abhivṛddhi, see also abhivaḍḍhi
: Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading at Ja v.452 for ati˚; which however does not agree with C expln. on p. 454.
1. to make known, to communicate Dāvs v.2, Dāvs v.11.
2. to know Ja vi.175 (jānāti C.).
abhi + Caus. of vid
having destroyed, removed or expelled; only in one simile of the sun driving darkness away at MN i.317 = SN iii.156; SN v.44 = Iti 20.
ger. of abhi + vihanati
see abhibyāpeti.
. Only in abhisaṃvisseyyagattaṃ (or-bhastaṃ or-santuṃ) Thig 466 a compound of doubtful derivation and meaning. Mrs. Rh. D., following Dhammapāla (p. 283) ʻa bag of skin with carrion filledʼ.
abhi + saṃvisati
to execrate, revile, lay a curse on Ja v.174 (˚saṃsittha 3rd sg. pret med. = paribhāsi C.)-aor. abhisasi Ja vi.187, Ja vi.505, Ja vi.522 (= akkosi C.), 563 (id.) ■ pp. abhisattha. Cp. also abhisiṃsati.
Vedic abhiśaṃsati, abhi + śaṃs
(f.) is doubtful reading at Vv 6410; meaning “neighing” (of horses) Vv-a 272, Vv-a 279.
? abhisaṃsati
(adj.) prepared, fixed, made up, arranged, done MN i.350; AN ii.43; AN v.343; Ja i.50; Nd i.186 (kappita + ); Pv-a 7, Pv-a 8.
abhi + sankhata, pp. of abhisankharoti
(& ˚khāreti in Pot.) to prepare, do, perform, work, get up Vin i.16 (iddh’ âbhisankhāraṃ ˚khāreyya); DN i.184 (id.); SN ii.40; SN iii.87 SN iii.92; SN iv.132, SN iv.290; SN v.449; AN i.201; Snp 984 (ger. ˚itvā having got up this curse, cp. Snp-a 582); Pv-a 56 (iddh’ âbhisaṃkhāraṃ), 172 (id.), 212 (id.) ■ pp. abhisaṅkhata (q.v.).
abhi + sankharoti
1. putting forth, performance, doing, working, practice: only in two combns., viz (a) gamiya˚; (or gamika˚) a heathenish practice Vin i.233; AN iv.180, & (b); iddha˚; (= iddḥi˚) working of supernormal powers Vin i.16; DN i.106; SN iii.92; SN iv.289; SN v.270 Snp p.107; Pv-a 56, Pv-a 172, Pv-a 212.
2. preparation, store accumulation (of kamma, merit or demerit), substratum state (see for detail sankhāra) SN iii.58 (an˚); Nd i.334 Nd i.442; Nd ii.s. v.; Vb 135 (puñña˚ etc.), 340; Dhs-a 357 (˚viññāna “storing intellect” Dhs trsl. 262).
abhi + sankhāra
(adj.) what belongs to or is done by the sankhāras; accumulated by or accumulating merit, having special (meritorious) effect (or specially prepared?) Vin ii.77 = Vin iii.160; Sdhp 309 (sa ˚paccaya).
fr. abhisankhāra
to throw together, heap together, concentrate Vb 1 sq., 82 sq., 216 sq. 400; Mil 46.
abhi + sankhipati
I. sticking to, cleaving to, adherence to Ja v.6; Ne 110 Ne 112; Dhs-a 129 (˚hetukaṃ dukkhaṃ) 249 (˚rasa).
fr. abhi + sañj, cp. abhisajjati & Sk. abhisanga
(adj.) cleaving to (-˚) Sdhp 566.
fr. abhisanga
to be in ill temper, to be angry, to curse, imprecate (in meaning of abhisanga 2) DN i.91 (= kodha-vasena laggati DN-a i.257) iii.159; Ja iii.120 (+ kuppati); iv.22 (abhisajji kuppi vyāpajji, cp. BSk. abhiṣajyate kupyati vyāpadyate. Avs i.286); v.175 (= kopeti C.); Dhp 408 (abhisaje Pot. kujjhāpana-vasena laggapeyya Dhp-a iv.182); Pp 30, Pp 36. See also abhisajjana & abhisajjanā.;
abhi + sañj; cp. abhisanga
(nt ■ adj.) only as adv. f. ˚nī Ep. of vācā scolding abusing, cursing AN v.265 (para˚). Cp. next.
abstr. fr. abhisajjati in meaning of abhisanga 2
(f.) at Snp 49 evidently means “scolding, cursing, being in bad temper” (cp. abhisajjati), as its combn. with vāc’ âbhilāpa indicates, but is expld. both by Nd ii.& Bdhgh. as “sticking to, cleaving, craving, desire” (= taṇhā), after the meaning of abhisanga. See Nd ii.89 & 107; Snp-a 98 (sineha-vasena) cp. also the compromise-expln by Bdhgh. of abhisajjati as kodha-vasena laggati (DN-a i.257).
abstr. fr. abhisajjati, cp. abhisajjana
(& ˚cayati) to accumulate, collect (merit) Vv 476 (Pot. ˚sañceyyaṃ = ˚sañcineyyaṃ Vv-a 202).
abhi + sañcināti
raised into consciousness, thought out, intended, planned MN i.350; SN ii.65; SN iv.132; AN v.343.
pp. of abhisañceteti
to bring to consciousness, think out, devise, plan SN ii.82 ■ pp. abhisañcetayita (q.v.).
abhi + sañceteti or ˚cinteti
(f.). Only in the compound abhi-saññā-nirodha DN i.179, DN i.184. The prefix abhi qualifies, not saññā, but the whole compound, which means ʻtranceʼ. It is an expression used, not by Buddhists, but by certain wanderers See saññā-vedayita-nirodha.
to heap up, concentrate Vb 1, Vb 2, Vb 82 sq.; 216 sq., 400; Mil 46 Cp. abhisaṅkhipati.
abhi + saññūhati, i.e. saṃ-ni-ūhati
1. (med.) streamed forth, come together Ja vi.56 (= sannipatita C.). 2. (pass.) approached, visited Vin i.268.
pp. of abhisarati, abhi + sṛ; to flow
cursed, accursed, railed at, reviled Ja iii.460; Ja v.71; Snp-a 364 (= akkuṭṭha); Vv-a 335.
pp. of abhisapati, cp. Sk. abhiśapta, fr. abhi + śap
cursed, accursed Thag 118 “old age falls on her as if it had been cursed upon her (that is, laid upon her by a curse). Morris JP T S. 1886 145 gives the commentator’s equivalents, “commanded worked by a charm”. This is a curious idiom. Any European would say that the woman herself, not the old age was accursed. But the whole verse is a riddle and Kern’s translation (Toev. s. v.) ʻhurried upʼ seems to us impossible.
pp. of abhisaṃsati
to have faith in, believe in (c. acc.) believe SN v.226; Thag 785; Pv iv.113, 125 (˚saddaheyya paṭiñeyya Pv-a 226); Ne 11; Mil 258; Pv-a 26 Dāvs iii.58.
abhi + saddahati, cp. Sk. abhiśraddadhāti, e.g. Divy 17, Divy 337
to burn out, scorch, destroy MN i.121.
ahhi + santāpeti, Caus. of santapati
outflow, overflow, yield, issue, result only in foll. phrases: cattāro puññ’ âbhisandā kusal’ âbhisandā (yields in merit) SN v.391 sq.; AN ii.54 sq. AN iii.51, AN iii.337; AN vi.245, & kamm’ âbhisanda result of kamma Mil 276 ■ Cp. abhisandana.
abhi + sanda of syad, cp. BSk. abhisyanda, e.g. Mvu ii.276
(nt.) result, outcome, consequence Pts i.17 (sukhassa).
= abhisanda
to put together, to make ready Thag 151; ger. abhisandhāya in sense of a prep. = on account of, because of Ja ii.386 (= paṭicca C.).
abhi + sandahati of saṃ + dhā
to make overflow, to make full, fill, pervade DN i.73, DN i.74.
abhi + sandeti, Caus. of syad
(adj.) overflowing, filled with (-˚), full Vin i.279 (˚kāya a body full of humours, cp. ii.119 & Mil 134) Ja i.17 (v.88; pītiyā); Mil 112 (duggandha˚).
pp. of abhisandati = abhi + syand, cp. Sk. abhisanna
to execrate, curse, accurse Vin iv.276; Ja iv.389; Ja v.87; Dhp-a i.42 ■ pp abhisatta.
abhi + sapati, of śap
(nt.) cursing, curse Pv-a 144 (so read for abhisampanna).
fr. abhisapati
“coming by completely”, insight into, comprehension, realization clear understanding, grasp, penetration. See on term Kvu trsl. 381 sq ■ Esp. in full phrases: attha˚; grasp of what is proficient SN i.87 = AN iii.49 = Iti 17, cp. AN ii.46 ariyasaccānaṃ a. full understanding of the 4 noble truths SN v.415, SN v.440, SN v.441 [cp. Divy 654: anabhisamitānāṃ caturnāṃ āryasatyānāṃ a.]; Snp 758 (sacca˚ = sacc’ âvabodha Snp-a 509); Mil 214 (catusacc˚); Sdhp 467 (catusacc˚) 525 (saccānaṃ); dhamm’ âbhisamaya full grasp of the Dhamma, quasi conversion [cp. dharm’ âbhisamaya Divy 200] SN ii.134; Mil 20, Mil 350; Vv-a 219; Pv-a 9 etc frequent; sammā- mān’ âbhisamaya full understanding of false pride in ster. phrase” acchecchi (for acchejji) taṇhaṃ vivattayi saññojanaṃ sammāmānâbhisamayā antam akāsi dukkhassa” at SN iv.205, SN iv.207, SN iv.399; AN iii.246, AN iii.444; Iti 47 cp. māna˚ SN i.188 = Thig 20 (tato mānâbhisamayā upasanto carissasi, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. 239 “hath the mind mastered vain imaginings, then mayst thou go thy ways calm and serene”); Snp 342 (expld. by mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaṃ Snp-a 344). Also in foll passages: SN ii.5 (paññāya), 104 (id.), 133 sq. (Abhisamaya Saṃyutta); Snp 737 (phassa˚, expld. ad sensum but not at verbum by phassa-nirodha Snp-a 509); Pts ii.215 Pp 41; Vv 1610 (= saccapaṭivedha Vv-a 85); DN-a i.32; Dhp-a i.109; Vv-a 73 (bhāvana˚), 84 (sacchikiriya˚); Dpvs i.31. -anabhisamaya not grasping correctly, insufficient understanding, taken up wrongly SN iii.260; Pp 21; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162 (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. “lack of coordination”).
abhi + samaya, from sam + i, cp. abhisameti & sameti; BSk. abhisamaya, e.g. Divy 200, Divy 654
to come to (understand) completely, to grasp fully, to master Kp-a 236 (for abhisamecca Snp 143).
abhi + sam + āgacchati, cp. in meaning adhigacchati
(adj.) belonging to the practice of the lesser ethics; to be practiced; belonging to or what is the least to be expected of good conduct, proper. Of sikkhā Vin v.181; AN ii.243 sq.; of dhamma MN i.469; AN iii.14 sq.; 422.
abhi + samācārika, to samācāra
(& ˚ekkhati), to behold, see, regard, notice J. iv.19 (2nd sg med. ˚samekkhase = olokesi C.) ■ ger. ˚samikkha ˚samekkha; [B.Sk. ˚samīkṣya, e.g. Jtm. p. 28, 30 etc. Ja v.340 (˚samikkha, v.l. sañcikkha = passitvā C.); 393 394 (= disvā C.).
abhi + sam + ; īks, cp. samikkhati
completely grasped or realised, understood mastered S; v.128 (dhamma a.), 440 (anabhisametāni cattāri ariyasaccāni, cp. Divy 654 anabhisamitāni c.a.) AN iv.384 (appattaṃ asacchikataṃ + ).
pp. of abhisameti, fr. abhi + sam + i, taken as caus. formation, against the regular form Sk.P. samita & B.Sk. abhisamita
(adj.) commanding full understanding or penetration, possessing complete insight (of the truth) Vin iii.189; SN ii.133; SN v.458 sq.
possess. adj ■ formation, equalling a n. ag. form., pp. abhisameta
to come by, to attain, to realise grasp, understand (cp. adhigacchati) Mil 214 (catusaccâbhisamayaṃ abhisameti). Freg. in comb;n. abhisambujjhati abhisameti; abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā, e.g. SN ii.25 SN iii.139; Kv 321 ■ fut. ˚samessati SN v.441 ■ aor ˚samiṃsu Mil 350; ˚samesuṃ SN v.415 ■ ger. ˚samecca (for ˚icca under influence of ˚sametvā as caus. form. Trenckner’s expln.Notes 564 is unnecessary & hardly justifiable) S; v.438 (an˚ by not thoroughly understanding) AN v.50 (samm’attha˚ through complete realisation of what is proficient); Snp 143 (= abhisamāgantvā Kp-a 236) and ˚sametvā SN ii.25; SN iii.139 ■ pp. abhisameta (q.v.).
abhi + sameti, sam + i; in inflexion base is taken partly as ordinary & partly as causative, e.g. aor ˚samiṃsu & ˚samesuṃ, pp. sameta: Sk. samita. Cp. B.Sk abhisamayati, either caus. or denom. formation, Divy 617 caturāryasatyāni a.
at Pv-a 144 is wrong reading for v.l. abhisapana (curse).
future lot, fate, state after death, future condition of rebirth; usually in foll phrases: kā gati ko abhisamparāyo (as hendiadys) ʻwhat fate in the world-to-comeʼ, DN ii.91; Vin i.293; SN iv.59 SN iv.63; SN v.346, SN v.356, SN v.369; Dhp-a i.221 ■ evaṃ-gatika evanabhisamparāya (adj.) “leading to such & such a revirn such & such a future state” DN i.16, DN i.24, DN i.32, DN i.33 etc (= evaṃ-vidhā paralokā ti DN-a i.108) ■ abhisamparāyaṃ (acc. as adv.) in future, after death AN i.48; AN ii.197; AN iii.347 AN iv.104; Pv iii.510 (= punabbhave Pv-a 200) ■ diṭṭhe c’eva dhamme abhisamparāyañ ca “in this world and in the world to come” AN ii.61; Pp 38; Mil 162; Pv-a 195 etc. (see also diṭṭha) ■ Used absolutely at Pv-a 122 (= fate).
abhi + samparāya
to become wideawake, to awake to the highest knowledge, to gain the highest wisdom (sammāsambodhiṃ) DN iii.135; Iti 121 aor. ˚sambujjhi SN v.433; Pv-a 19. In combn. abhisambujjhati abhisameti, e.g. SN ii.25; SN iii.139 ■ ppr. med ˚sambudhāna; pp. ˚sambuddha -Caus. ˚sambodheti to make awake, to awaken, to enlighten; pp. ˚bodhita.
abhi + sambujjhati
(nt.) = abhisambodhi Ja i.59.
(a) (pass.) realised, perfectly understood DN iii.273; SN iv.331; Iti 121 an˚; not understood MN i.71, MN i.92, MN i.114, MN i.163, MN i.240 ■ (b (med.) one who has come to the realisation of the highest wisdom, fully-awakened, attained Buddhahood, realising enlightened (in or as to = acc.) Vin i.1; DN ii.4; MN i.6 (sammāsambodhiṃ); SN i.68, SN i.138, SN i.139 & passim Pv-a 94, Pv-a 99.;
pp. of abhisambujjhati
(nt.) thorough realisation, perfect understanding SN v.433.
abstr. fr. abhisambuddha
(adj.) awaking realising, knowing, understanding Dhp 46 (= bujjhanto jānanto ti attho Dhp-a i.337).
formation of a ppr. med. fr. pp. abhsam + budh instead of abhisam + bujjh˚;
(f.) the highest enlightenment Ja i.14 (parama˚). Cp. abhisambujjhana and (sammā-) sambodhi.
abhi + sambodhi
(adj.) awakened to the highest wisdom Pv-a 137 (Bhagavā).
pp. of abhisambodheti, Caus. of abhi + sambujjhati
only in dur˚; hard to overcome or get over, hard to obtain or reach, troublesome SN v.454; AN v.202; Snp 429, Snp 701; Ja v.269, Ja vi.139, Ja vi.439. Abhisambhavati (bhoti)
fr. abhisambhavati
“to come up to”, i.e. to be able to (get or stand or overcome) to attain, reach, to bear AN iv.241; Thag 436; Nd i.471 Nd i.485; Ja iii.140; Ja v.150, Ja v.417; Ja vi.292, Ja vi.293, Ja vi.507 (fut. med ˚sambhossaṃ = sahissāmi adhivāsessāmi C.); Pts ii.193. ger. ˚bhutvā Thag 1057 & ˚bhavitvā Snp 52 (cp. Nd ii.85) ■ aor. ˚bhosi DN ii.232 ■ grd. ˚bhavanīya DN ii.210; Pts ii.193 ■ See also abhisambhuṇāti.
abhi + sambhavati
to be able (to get or reach); only in neg ppr. anabhisambhuṇanto unable DN i.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DN-a i.268); Nd i.77, Nd i.312.
considered to be a bastard form of abhisambhavati, but probably of diff. origin & etym.; also in Bh. Sk. freq.
(adj.) getting, attaining (?) DN ii.255 (lomahaṃsa˚).
fr. abhi + sam + bhū
attained, got Sdhp 556.
pp. of abhisambhavati
to cease, stop; trs. (Caus.) to allay, pacify, still Ja vi.420 (pp. abhisammanto for ˚śammento? Reading uncertain).
abhi + śam, Sk. abhiśamyati
retinue Ja v.373.
fr. abhi + sarati, of sṛ; to go
(adj) austere, stern, only in f. ˚ā (scil. kathā) AN iii.117 sq.; AN iv.352, AN iv.357; AN v.67.
abhi + sallekha + ika
(better ˚ssavati ?) to flow towards or into Ja vi.359 (najjo Gangaṃ a.).
abhi + savati, of sru
aor. of abhisaṃsati (q.v.).
to carry out, arrange; to get; procure, attain Ja vi.180; Mil 264.
abhi + sādheti
a curse, anathema SN iii.93 = Iti 89 (which latter reads abhilāpa and It A expls. by akkosa see vv.ll. under abhilāpa & cp.; Brethren 376 n. 1.) Thag 1118.
abhisapati
(f.) a woman who goes to meet her lover Ja iii.139.
Sk. abhisārikā, fr. abhi + sṛ;
to approach, to persecute Ja vi.377.
abhi + sāreti, Caus. of abhisarati
, to utter a solemn wish, Vv 8118 (aor. ˚sīsi. v.l. ˚sisi. Vv-a 316 expls. by icchi sampaṭicchi).
= abhisaṃsati, abhi + śaṃs. As to Sk. śaṃs → P. siṃs cp. āsiṃsati, as to meaning cp. nature of prayer as a solemn rite to the “infernals”, cp. im-precare
to sprinkle over, fig. to anoint (King), to consecrate AN i.107 (Khattiy’ âbhisekena Ja i.399 (fig. ˚itvā ger. ii.409 (id.); vi.161 (id.); Nd i.298; Mil 336 (amatena lokaṃ abhisiñci Bhagavā); Pv-a 144 (read abhisiñci cimillikañ ca… )-Pass. abhisiñcati Mil 359 ■ pp. abhisitta ■ Caus. abhiseceti.
abhi + siñncati fr. sic to sprinkle; see also āsiñcati & ava˚, Vedic only ā˚
1. sprinkled over, anointed Snp 889 (manasā, cp. N1 298); Mil 336 (amatena loka a.).
2. consecrated (King), inaugurated (more freq. in this conn. is avasitta), Vin iii.44; AN i.107 (Khattiyo Khattiyehi Khattiy’ âbhisekena a.); ii.87 (v.l. for avasitta also an˚).
pp. of abhisiñcati, Sk. ˚sikta
anointing, consecration, inauguration (as king) AN i.107 (cp. abhisitta) ii.87 read abhisek’-anabhisitto; Ja ii.104, Ja ii.352; Dhp-a i.350; Pv-a 74. Cp. ābhisekika.
fr. abhi + sic, cp. Sk. abhiṣeka
(nt.) = abhiseka, viz. (a) ablution, washing off Thig 239 & 245 (udaka˚) ■ (b) consecration Ja ii.353.
to cause to be sprinkled or inaugurated Ja v.26. (imper. abhisecayassu).
caus. of abhisiñcati
(f.) pursuit, indulgence in (-˚) Sdhp 210 (pāpakamma˚).
abhi + sevana fr. sev
(adj.) only neg. an˚; in formula atāṇo loko anabhissaro “without a Lord or protector MN ii.68 (v.l. ˚abhisaro); Pts i.126 (v.l. id.).
abhi + issara
1. (trs.) to gladden, please, satisfy SN iv.190 (abhihaṭṭhuṃ); AN v.350 (id.). 2. (intr.) to find delight in (c. acc.), to enjoy SN v.74 (rūpaṃ manāpaṃ); AN iv.419 sq. (T. reads ˚hiṃsamāna jhānaṃ v.l. ˚hisamāna).
abhi + haṃsati fr. hṛṣ
brought, offered, presented, fetched DN i.166 = Pp 55 (= puretaraṃ gahetvā āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ Pp A 231); Dhp-a ii.79.
pp. of abhiharati
. Only in praise abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreti, to offer having fetched up. MN i.224; AN v.350 AN v.352; SN iv.190, SN v.53, SN v.300. See note in Vinaya Texts ii.440.
ger. of abhiharati
hit, struck Pv-a 55.
pp. of abhihanati
(& ˚hanti) 1. to strike, hit Pv-a 258.
2. to overpower, kill, destroy Ja v.174 (inf. ˚hantu for T. hantuṃ) ■ pp. abhihata (q.v.).
abhi + ; han
1. to bring (to), to offer, fetch DN iii.170; Ja i.54, Ja i.157; Ja iii.537; Ja iv.421; DN-a i.272.
2 to curse, revile, abuse [cp. Sk. anuvyāharati & abhivyā˚ AN i.198 ■ Pass. abhihariyati Vv-a 172 (for abhiharati of Vv 3710; corresp. with ābhata Vv-a 172) ■ pp. abhihaṭa (q.v.) ■ Caus. abhihāreti 1. to cause to be brought to gain, to acquire DN ii.188 = DN ii.192 = DN ii.195 Thag 637; Ja iv.421 (abhihārayaṃ with gloss abhibhārayiṃ).
2. to betake oneself to, to visit, take to, go to Snp 414 (Paṇḍavaṃ ˚hāresi = āruhi Snp-a 383), 708 (vanantaṃ abhihāraye vanaṃ gaccheyya Snp-a 495); Thig 146 (aor. ˚hārayiṃ uyyānaṃ = upanesi Thag-a 138).
3. to put on (mail) only in fut. abhihessati Ja iv.92 (kavacaṃ; C. expls. wrongly by ˚hanissati bhindissati so evidently taking it as abhibhavissati).
4. At Ja vi.27 kiṃ yobbanena ciṇṇena yaṃ jarā abhihessati the latter is fut. of abhibhavati (for ˚bhavissati) as indicated by gloss abhibhuyyati.
abhi + harati, cp. Sk. abhyāharati & Vedic āharati & ābharati
bringing, offering, gift SN i.82; Snp 710; Ja i.81 (āsanâ).
fr. abhiharati
spurious reading at AN iv.419 for ˚haṃsati (q.v.).
(& ˚ṃ) neighing Vv 64;10 = Vv-a 279 (gloss abhihesana). See in detail under abhisaṃsanā.
for abhihesanā cp. P. hesā = Sk. hreṣā, & hesitaṃ
S i.50. Read abhigīta with SS. So also for abhihita on p. 51. ʻSo enchanted was I by the Buddha’s runeʼ The godlet ascribes a magic potency to the couplet.
see abhihiṃsanā.
see abhihāreti 3 & 4.;
(adj.) fearless Ja vi.193. See also abhida 1.
a + bhīta
(adj.) fearless DN-a i.250.
a + bhīru + ka
(adj.) groundless, unfounded, unsubstantial, Ja v.178; Ja vi.495.
a + bhumma
(adj.) not real, false, not true, usually as nt. ˚ṃ falsehood, lie, deceit Snp 387; Iti 37; instr abhūtena falsely DN i.161.
-vādin one who speaks falsely or tells lies Snp 661; Dhp 306 = Iti 42; expld. as “ariy’ ûpavāda-vasena alika-vādin” Snp-a 478; as “tucchena paraṃ abhācikkhanto Dhp-a iii.477.
a + bhūta
(adj.) not to be split or divided, not to be drawn away or caused to be dissented, inalienable Snp 255 (mitto abhejjo parehi) Ja i.263 (varasūra… ) iii.318 (˚rūpa of strong character abhijja-hadaya); Pp 30 (= acchejja Pp A 212); Mil 160 (˚parisā); Sdhp 312 (+ appadusiya); Pgdp 97 (˚parivāra).
grd. of a + bhid, cp. Sk. abhedya
1. friend, companion, fellow-worker, helper, esp one who gives his advice, a bosom-friend Iti 73; Ja vi.512 (sahajātā amaccā); Pv ii.620 (a ˚-paricārikā well-advising friends as company or around him). Freq. in combn. with mitta as mitt’ âmaccā, friends & colleagues DN iii.189–90; S 190 = AN ii.67; Pv-a 29; or with ñātī (ñāti-sālohitā intimate friends & near-relations), mittâmaccā ñātisālohitā Vin ii.126; Snp p.104 (= mittā ca kammakarā ca Snp-a 447); mittā vā amaccā vā ñātī vā sālohitā vā AN i.222; Pv-a 28; amaccā ñāti-sanghā ca AN i.152. 2. Especially a king’s intimate friend, king’s favourite confidant Ja i.262; Pv-a 73 (˚kula), 74 (amaccā ca purohito ca), 81 (sabba-kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahāmatta, pārisajja); usually combd. with pārisajjā (pl.) viz. DN i.136 (= piya-sahāyaka DN-a i.297, but cp. the foll. expln. of pārisajjā as “sesā āṇatti-karā”); Vin i.348; DN iii.64 (amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā); AN i.142 (catunnaṃ mahārājānaṃ a. pārisajjā) See on the question of ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 & Banerjea,; Public Administration in Ancient India pp. 106
120.
Vedic amātya (only in meaning “companion”), adj. formation fr. amā an adverbial loc ■ geName of pron. 1st person, Sk. ahaṃ = Idg. *emo (cp. Sk. m-ama), meaning “(those) of me or with me”, i.e. those who are in my house
a bud Ja v.416 (= makula C.).
etym.?
one who abstains from intoxicants, a teetotaler Ja ii.192.
a + majja + pāyaka, cp. Sk. amadyapa
(nt.) 1. The drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality, (cp BSk. amṛta-varṣa “rain of Ambrosia” Jtm 221).
2. A general conception of a state of durability & non-change a state of security i.e. where there is not any more rebirth or re-death. So Bdhgh at Kp-a 180 (on Snp 225) “na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati ti amatan ti vuccati”, or at Dhp-a i.228 “ajātattā na jiyyati na miyyati tasmā amatan ti vuccati” ■ Vin i.7 = MN i.169 (apārutā tesaṃ amatassa dvārā); Vin i.39; DN ii.39, DN ii.217, DN ii.241; SN i.32 (= rāgadosamoha-khayo), 193; iii.2 (˚ena abhisitta “sprinkled with A.”); iv.94 (˚assa dātā), 370; v.402 (˚assa patti); AN i.45 sq.; AN iii.451; AN iv.455; AN v.226 sq., 256 sq. (˚assa dātā); Ja i.4 (v.25); iv.378, 386; v.456 (˚mahā-nibbāna); Snp 204 Snp 225, Snp 228 (= nibbāna Kp-a 185); Thag 310 (= agada antidote); Iti 46 = Iti 62 (as dhātu), 80 (˚assa dvāra); Dhp 114, Dhp 374 (= amata-mahā-nibbāna Dhp-a iv.110); Mil 258 (˚dhura savanûpaga), 319 (agado amataṃ & nibbānaṃ amataṃ), 336 (amatena lokaṃ abhisiñci Bhagavā), 346 (dhamm;’ âmataṃ); DN-a i.217 (˚nibbāna); Dhp-a i.87 (˚ṃ pāyeti); Dāvs ii.34; Dāvs v.31; Sdhp 1, Sdhp 209, Sdhp 530, Sdhp 571.
-ogadha diving into the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) SN v.41, SN v.54, SN v.181, SN v.220, SN v.232; AN iii.79, AN iii.304; AN iv.46 sq., 317 387; v.105 sq.; Snp 635; Thag 179, Thag 748; Dhp 411 (amataṃ nibbānaṃ ogahetvā Dhp-a iv.186); Vv 5020. -osadha the medicine of Ambrosia, ambrosial medicine Mil 247 -gāmin going or leading to the ambrosia (of Nibbāna SN i.123; SN iv.370; SN v.8; AN iii.329; Thig 222. -dasa one who sees Amata or Nibbāna Thag 336. -dundubhi the drum of the Immortal (Nibbāna) MN i.171 = Vin i.8 (has ˚dudrabhi). -dvāra the door to Nibbāna MN i.353; SN i.137 = Vin i.5; SN ii.43, SN ii.45, SN ii.58, SN ii.80; AN v.346. -dhātu the element of Ambrosia or Nibbāna AN iii.356. -patta having attained to Ambrosia AN iv.455. -pada the region or place of Ambrosia SN i.212 (“Bourne Ambrosial” trsln. p. 274); ii.280; Dhp 21 (= amatassa adhigama -vupāyo vuttaṃ hoti Dhp-a i.228). -phala ambrosial fruit SN i.173 = Snp 80. -magga the path to Ambrosia Dhp-a i.94.
a + mata = mṛta pp. of mṛ; Vedic amṛta = Gr. ἀ μ(β)ροτ ο & ἀμβροσία = Lat. im-mort-a(lis
(adj.) belonging to Amṛta = ambrosial Snp 452 = SN i.189 (amatā vācā = amata-sadisā sādubhāvena Snp-a 399: “ambrosial”), 960 (gacchato amataṃ disaṃ nibbānaṃ, taṃ hi amatan ti tathā niddisitabbato disā cā ti Snp-a 572). Perhaps also at Iti 46 = Iti 62 (amataṃ dhātuṃ = ambrosial state or Amṛta as dhātu).
see amata1
(?) at Vv-a 111, acc. to Hardy (Index) “a precious stone of dark blue colour”.
(adj.) not knowing any bounds (in the taking of food), intemperate immoderate Iti 23 (bhojanamhi); Dhp 7 (id.); Pp 21.
a + matta + ˚ñu = Sk. amātrajña
(f.) immoderation (in food) DN iii.213; Iti 23 (bhojane); Pp 21; Dhs 1346 (bhojane) Dhs-a 402.
abstr. to prec.
(f.) irreverence towards one’s mother DN iii.70, DN iii.71.
from matteyyatā
a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin i.277; DN i.116; SN i.91, Ja i.99; Dhs 617; Mil 207; Dhs-a 319; Dhp-a i.13 (˚pariggahīta haunted); Pv-a 216 ■ Cp. amānusa.
a + manussa
(adj.) belonging to or caused by a spirit Vin i.202, Vin i.203 (˚âbādha being possessed by a demon).
fr. amanussa
(adj.) not egotistical, unselfish Snp 220 (+ subbata), 777; Ja iv.372 (+ nirāsaya); vi.259 (= mamāyana-taṇhā-rahita C.); Pv iv.134 (= mamaṃkāravirahita Pv-a 230); Mvu 1, Mvu 66, combd. with nirāsa (free from longing), at Snp 469 = Snp 494; Ud 32; Ja iv.303; Ja vi.259.
a + mama, geName of ahaṃ, pron. 1st person, lit. “not (saying: this is) of me”
(adj.) not mortal, not subject to death Thag 276; Snp 249 (= amara-bhāva-patthanatāya pavatta-kāya-kilesa Snp-a 291); Ja v.80 (= amaraṇa-sabhāva) 218; Dāvs v.62.
a + mara from mṛ;
(nt.) immortality Ja v.223 (= devatta C.).
abstr. fr. amara
(?) a kind of slippery fish, an eel (?) Only in expression amarā-vikkhepika eel-wobbler, one who practices eel-wriggling, fr. ˚vikkhepa “oscillation like the a. fish” In English idiom “a man who sits on the fence” DN i.24; MN i.521; Pts i.155. The expln. given by Bdhgh at DN-a i.115 is “amarā nāma maccha-jāti, sā ummujjana-nimmujjan-ādi vasena… gahetuṃ na sakkoti” etc. This meaning is not beyond doubt, but Kern’s expln.Toev. 71 does not help to clear it up.
(adj.) without stain or fault Ja v.4; Sdhp 246, Sdhp 591, Sdhp 596.
a + mala
(adj.) beardless Ja ii.185.
a + massu + ka
(adj.) born in the house, of a slave Ja i.226 (dāsa, so read for āmajāta, an old mistake, expld. by C. forcibly as “āma ahaṃ vo dāsī ti”!). See also āmāya.
amā + jāta; amā adv. “at home”, Vedic amā, see under amacca
(adj.) without a mother, motherless Ja v.251.
a + mātika from mātā
(adj.) non-or superhuman unhuman, demonic, peculiar to a non-human (Peta or Yakkha) Pv ii.1220 (kāma); iv.157 (as n.); iv.36 (gandha, of Petas) ■ f. ˚ī Dhp 373 (rati = dibbā rati Dhp-a iv.110); Pv iii.79 (ratti, love).
Vedic amānuṣa, usually of demons, but also of gods; a + mānusa, cp. amanussa
(adj.) “not of me” i.e. not belonging to my party, not siding with me Dhp-a i.66.
a + mama + ka, cp. amama
(adj.) not deceiving, open, honest Snp 941 (see Nd i.422: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā). Cp. next.
a + māyā
(adj.) without guile, not deceiving, honest DN iii.47 (asaṭha + ), 55 (id.), 237; Dhp-a i.69 (asaṭhena a.).
a + māyāvin, cp. amāya
(adj.) of boundless or immeasurable splendour Sdhp 255.
a + mita (pp. of mā ) + ā + bhā
one who is not friend, an enemy DN iii.185; Iti 83; Snp 561 (= paccatthika Snp-a 455); Dhp 66, Dhp 207; Ja vi.274 (˚tāpana harassing the enemies).
Vedic amitra; a + mitta
(f.) the condition of not being withered Ja v.156.
a + milāta + tā
base of demonstr. pron. “that”, see asu.
(adj.) not infatuated (lit. not stupified or bewildered), not greedy; only in phrase agathita amucchita anajjhāpanna (or anajjhopanna) DN iii.46; MN i.369; SN ii.194. See ajjhopanna.
a + mucchita
(adj.) not released, not free from (c. abl.) Iti 93 (mārabandhanā).
a + mutta
(adv.) in that place, there; in another state of existence DN i.4, DN i.14, DN i.184; Iti 99. Amulha-vinaya
pron. base amu + tra
“acquittal on the ground of restored sanity” (Childers) Vin i.325 (ix.6, 2); ii.81 (iv.5), 99 (iv.14, 27) iv.207, 351; MN ii.248.
(adj.) not dull. As n. absence of stupidity or delusion DN iii.214; Pp 25. The form amogha occurs at Ja vi.26 in the meaning of “efficacious, auspicious” (said of ratyā nights).
a + moha, cp. Sk. amogha
, the Mango tree, Mangifera Indica DN i.46, DN i.53, DN i.235; Ja ii.105 Ja ii.160; Vv 7910; Pp 45; Mil 46; Pv-a 153, Pv-a 187.
-aṭṭhi the kernel or stone of the m. fruit Dhp-a iii.207 Dhp-a iii.208. -ārāma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 795 Vv-a 305. -kañjika mango gruel Vv 3337 (= ambilakañjika Vv-a 147). -pakka a (ripe) mango fruit Ja ii.104 Ja ii.394; Dhp-a iii.207. -panta a border of mango trees Vv-a 198. -pānaka a drink made from mangoes Dhp-a iii.207 -piṇḍi a bunch of mangoes Ja iii.53; Dhp-a iii.207. -pesikā the peel, rind, of the m. fruit Vin ii.109. -potaka a mango sprout Dhp-a iii.206 sq. -phala a m. fruit Pv-a 273, Pv-a 274. -rukkha a m. tree Dhp-a iii.207; Vv-a 198 -vana a m. grove or wood DN ii.126; Ja i.139; Vv-a 305 -siñcaka one who waters the mangoes, a tender or keeper of mangoes Vv 797.
Derivation unknown. Not found in pre-Buddhist literature. The Sk. is āmra. Probably non-Aryan
(adj.) “womanish” (?), inferior, silly, stupid, of narrow intellect. Occurs only with reference to a woman, in combn. with bālā AN iii.349 (v.l. amma˚) v.139 (where spelt ambhaka with v.l. appaka˚ and gloss andhaka); v.150 (spelt ambhaka perhaps in diff. meaning).
-maddarī see next.
= ambakā?
a little mango, only in ˚maddarī a kiṇd of bird [etym. uncertain] AN i.188.
demiName of amba
(f.) mother, good wife used as a general endearing term for a woman Vin i.232; DN ii.97 (here in play of words with Ambapālī expld. by Bdhgh at Vin i.385 as ambakā ti itthiyikā).
Sk. ambikā demiName of ambī mother, wife, see P. amma & cp. also Sk. ambālikā f.
(nt.) the sky, Dāvs i.38; Dāvs iv.51; Dāvs v.32 ■ Note. At Ja v.390 we have to read muraja-ālambara, and not mura-jāla-ambara.
Vedic ambara circumference, horizon
(m ■ nt.) some sort of cloth and an (upper) garment made of it (cp. kambala) Vv 537 (ratt˚ = uttariya Vv-a 236).
etym. = ambara1 (?) or more likely a distortion of kambala; for the latter speaks the combn. rattambara = ratta-kambala ■ The word would thus be due to an erroneous syllable division rattak-ambala (ambara) instead of ratta-kambala
at Ja ii.246 (˚koṭṭhaka-āsana-sālā) for ambara1 (?) or for ambaka2 (?), or should we read kambala˚?.
the hog-plum, Spondias Mangifera (a kind of mango) Vin ii.17 (˚vana); DN-a i.271 (˚rukkha).
(adj.) sour, acid; one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka kasāya, madhura (see under rasa): thus at Mil 56. Another enumeration at Nd ii.540 & Dhs 629 ■ Ja i.242 (˚anambila), 505 (loṇ˚); ii.394 (loṇ˚); DN-a i.270 (˚yāgu sour gruel); Dhp-a ii.85 (ati-ambila, with accuṇha & atisīta).;
Sk. amla = Lat. amarus
(nt.) water Ja v.6; Nd i.202 (a. vuccati udakaṃ); Dāvs ii.16 ■ Cp. ambha.
-cārin “living in the water”, a fish Snp 62 (= maccha Nd ii.91). -sevāla a water-plant Thag 113.
Vedic ambu & ambhas = Gr. ο ̓́μβρος, Lat. imber rain; cp. also Sk. abhra rain-cloud & Gr.; ἀφρός scum: see P. abbha
(m. & nt.) “water-born”, i.e. 1. (m.) a fish SN i.52.
2. (nt.) a lotus Snp 845 (paduma Nd i.202); Dāvs v.46; Sdhp 360.
ambu + ja of; jan
“water-giver”, a cloud Dāvs v.32; Sdhp 270, Sdhp 275.
ambu + da fr. dā
(nt.) water, sea Dāvs iv.54.
see ambu
see ambaka.
(indecl.) part. of exclamation, employed: 1. to draw attention = look here, hey! hallo! Vin iii.73 (= ālapan’ âdhivacana); Ja ii.3; Pv-a 62.
2. to mark reproach anger = you silly, you rascal DN i.194; Iti 114; Ja i.174 (v.l. amho), 254; Mil 48.
fr. haṃ + bho, see bho, orig. “hallo you there”
(indecl.) endearing term, used (1) by children in addressing their mother = mammy, mother dear DN i.93; Ja ii.133; Ja iv.1, Ja iv.281 (amma tāta uṭṭhetha daddy, mammy, get up!); Dhp-a ii.87; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 74. (2) in general when addressing a woman familiarly good woman, my (good) lady, dear, thus to a woman Ja i.292; Pv-a 63; Dhp-a ii.44; to a girl Pv-a 6; to a daughter Dhp-a ii.48; Dhp-a iii.172 ■ Cp. ambakā.
voc. of ammā
(nt.) 1. a trough Ja v.297; Ja vi.381 (bhatt˚). 2. a certain measure of capacity Ja i.62; Ja ii.436 (taṇḍul˚). As ˚ka at Ja ii.117 (v.l. ampaṇaka); DN-a i.84.
of uncertain etym.; Sk. armaṇa is Sanskritised Pāli. See on form & meaning Childers s. v. and Kern,; Toev. p. 72
(f.) mother Ja iii.392 (gen. ammāya) ■ Voc. amma (see sep.).
onomat. from child language; Sk. ambā, cp. Gr. ἀμμάς mother, Oisl. amma “granny”, Ohg. amma “mammy”, nurse; also Lat. amita father’s sister & amāre to love
(nt.) a stone Snp 443 (instr. amhanā, but Snp-a 392 reads asmanā pāsāṇena).
-maya made of stone, hard Dhp 161 (= pāsāṇa˚ Dhp-a iii.151).
Sk. aśman, see also asama2
see atthi.
(f.) a cow (?) AN i.229. The C. says nothing. Amhakam, Amhe
etym. uncertain; Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 201 too vague
see ahaṃ.
Ja i.174 (v.l.).
see ayo.
(fr. i, go) 1. income, in aya-potthaka receipt book Ja i.2.
2. inlet (for water, aya-mukha ) DN i.74; AN ii.166, AN iv.287.
(pron.) demonstr. pron. “this, he”; f. ayaṃ; nt. idaṃ & imaṃ “this, it” etc. This pron. combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as˚; (ayaṃ in nom. m. & f.) & im˚; (id in nom. nt.).
I. Forms. A. (sg.) nom. m. ayaṃ Snp 235; Ja i.168, Ja i.279 f. ayaṃ [Sk. iyaṃ] Kp vii.12; Ja ii.128, Ja ii.133; nt. idaṃ Snp 224; Ja iii.53; & imaṃ Mil 46.; acc. m. imaṃ Ja ii.160 f. imaṃ [Sk. īmāṃ] Snp 545, Snp 1002; Ja i.280. gen. dat. m imassa Ja i.222, Ja i.279 & assa Snp 234, Snp 1100; Kp vii.12 (dat.); Ja ii.158; f. imissā Ja i.179 & assā [Sk. asyāḥ] Ja i.290; Dhp-a iii.172. instr. m. nt. iminā Ja i.279; Pv-a 80 & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā Snp 137; f imāya [Sk. anayā] Ja i.267. The instr. anena [Sk. anena is not proved in Pāli. abl. asmā Snp 185; Dhp 220; imasmā (not proved).; loc. m. nt. imasmiṃ Kp iii.; Ja ii.159 & asmiṃ Snp 634; Dhp 242; f. imissā Pv-a 79 (or imissaṃ?) & imāyaṃ (no ref.) ■ B.; (pl.) nom. m. ime Ja i.221; Pv i.83; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Snp 897 & imāyo Snp 1122; nt. imāni [ = Sk.] Vin i.84. acc. m. ime [Sk. imān Ja i.266; Ja ii.416; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Snp 429; Ja ii.160. gen. imesaṃ Ja ii.160 & esaṃ [Sk. eṣāṃ] MN ii.86, & esānaṃ MN ii.154; MN iii.259; f. also āsaṃ Ja i.302 (= etāsaṃ C.) & imāsaṃ; instr. m. nt imehi Ja vi.364; f. imāhi. loc. m. nt imesu [Sk. eṣu] Ja i.307.
II. Meanings (1) ayaṃ refers to what is immediately in front of the speaker (the subject in question) or before his eyes or in his present time & situation, thus often to be trsl;d. by “before our eyes”, “the present” “this here”, “just this” (& not the other) (opp. para) viz. atthi imasmiṃ kāye “in this our visible body” Kp iii. yath’ âyaṃ padīpo “like this lamp here” Snp 235; ayaṃ dakkhiṇā dinnā “the gift which is just given before our eyes” Kp vii.12; ime pādā imaṃ sīsaṃ ayaṃ kāyo Pv i.83 asmiṃ loke paramhi ca “in this world & the other” Snp 634, asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ kathaṃ pecca na socati Snp 185; cp. also Dhp 220, Dhp 410; Ja i.168; Ja iii.53 ■ (2) It refers to what immediately precedes the present of the speaker, or to what has just been mentioned in the sentence; viz. yaṃ kiñci vittaṃ… idam pi Buddhe ratanaṃ “whatever… that” Snp 224; ime divase these days (just gone) Ja ii.416; cp. also Vin i.84; Snp 429; Ja ii.128 Ja ii.160 ■ (3) It refers to what immediately follows either in time or in thought or in connection: dve ime antā “these are the two extremes, viz.” Vin i.10; ayaṃ eva ariyo maggo “this then is the way” ibid.; cp. Ja i.280. (4) With a touch of (often sarcastic) characterisation it establishes a closer personal relation between the speaker & the object in question & is to be trsl;d. by “like that such (like), that there, yonder, yon”, e.g. imassa vānarindassa “of that fellow, the monkey” Ja i.279; cp. Ja i.222, Ja i.307; Ja ii.160 (imesaṃ sattānaṃ “creatures like us”) So also repeated as ayañ ca ayañ ca “this and this”, “so and so” Ja ii.3; idañ c’ idañ ca “such & such a thing Ja ii.5 ■ (5) In combn with a pron. rel. it expresses either a generalisation (whoever, whatever) or a specialisation (= that is to say, what there is of, i.e. Ger. und zwar), e.g. yâyaṃ taṇhā Vin i.10; yo ca ayaṃ… yo ca ayaṃ “I mean this… and I mean” ibid.; ye kec’ ime Snp 381; yadidaṃ “i.e.” Mil 25; yatha-y-idaṃ “in order that” (w. pot.) Snp 1092. See also seyyathīdaṃ ■ (6) The geName of all genders functions in general as a possessive pron. of the 3rd = his, her, its (lit. of him etc.) and thus resembles the use of tassa, e.g. āsava’ ssa na vijjanti “his are no intoxications” Snp 1100; sīlaṃ assā bhindāpessāmi “I shall cause her character to be defamed” Ja i.290; assa bhariyā “his wife” Ja ii.158 etc. freq.
Sk. ayaṃ etc., pron. base Idg. *i (cp. Sk. iha), f. *ī. Cp. Gr. ἰν, μιν; Lat. is (f. ea, nt. id); Goth is, nt. ita; Ohg. er (= he), nt. ez (= it); Lith. jìs (he) f. jì (she).
(nt.) (a) “going”, road ■ (b) going to, goal SN v.167 (ekāyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct way), 185 (id.); DN-a i.313; Dāvs iv.40. See also eka˚.
Vedic ayana, fr. i
(nt.) ill repute, disgrace Mil 139, Mil 272; Dāvs i.8.
a + yasa, cp. Sk. ayaśaḥ
(& Ayyira) (n ■ adj.) (n.) ariyan nobleman, gentleman (opp. servant); (adj.) arīyan, well-born, belonging to the ruling race, noble, aristocratic gentlemanly Ja v.257; Vv 396 ■ f. ayirā lady, mistress (of a servant) Ja ii.349 (v.l. oyyakā); voc. ayire my lady Ja v.138 (= ayye C.).
Vedic ārya, Metathesis for ariya as diaeretic form of ārya, of which the contracted (assimilation) form is ayya. See also ariya
= ayira; cp. ariyaka & ayyaka; DN iii.190 (v.l. BB yy); Ja ii.313.
(nt.) iron. The; nom. ayo found only in set of 5 metals forming an alloy of gold (jātarūpa), viz ayo, loha (copper), tipu (tin), sīsa (lead), sajjha (silver AN iii.16 = SN v.92; of obl. cases only the instr. ayasā occurs Dhp 240 (= ayato Dhp-a iii.344); Pv i.1013 (paṭikujjita, of Niraya) ■ Iron is the material used κα ̓τἐςοξήν in the outfit & construction of Purgatory or Niraya (see niraya & Avīci & cp. Vism 56 sq.) ■ In comp;n. both ayo˚ & aya˚; occur as bases.
I. ayo˚:-kapāla an iron pot AN iv.70 (v.l. ˚guhala) Nd ii.304 iii. d.2 (of Niraya). -kūṭa an iron hammer Pv-a 284. -khīla an iron stake SN v.444; MN iii.183 = Nd ii.304 iii. c; Snp-a 479. -guḷa an iron ball SN v.283; Dhp 308; Iti 43 = Iti 90; Thig 489; DN-a i.84. -ghana an iron club Ud 93; Vv-a 20. -ghara an iron house Ja iv.492. -paṭala an iron roof or ceiling (of Niraya) Pv-a 52. -pākāra an iron fence Pv i.1013 = Nd ii.304 iii. d.1. -maya made of iron Snp 669 (kūṭa); Ja iv.492 (nāvā); Pv i.1014 (bhūmi of N.); Pv-a 43, Pv-a 52. -muggara an iron club Pv-a 55 -saṅku an iron spike SN iv.168; Snp 667.
II. aya˚:-kapāla = ayo˚ Dhp-a i.148 (v.l. ayo˚). -kāra a worker in iron Mil 331. -kūṭa = ayo˚ Ja i.108; Dhp-a ii.69 (v.l.). -naṅgala an iron plough Dhp-a i.223; Dhp-a iii.67 -paṭṭaka an iron plate or sheet (cp. loha˚) Ja v.359 -paṭhavi an iron floor (of Avīci) Dhp-a i.148. -saṅghāṭaka an iron (door) post Dhp-a iv.104. -sūla an iron stake Snp 667; Dhp-a i.148.
Sk. ayaḥ nt. iron & ore, Idg. *ajes-, cp. Av. ayah, Lat. aes, Goth. aiz, Ohg. ēr (= Ger. Erz.) Ags. ār (= E. ore).
(adj.) not to be conquered or subdued MN ii.24.
Sk. ayodhya
(n ■ adj.) (a) (n.) gentleman, sire, lord master Ja iii.167 = Pv-a 65; Dhp-a i.8 (ayyā pl. the worthy gentlemen, the worthies), 13 (amhākaṃ ayyo our worthy Sir); ii.95 ■ (b) (adj.) worthy, gentlemanly, honourable Vin ii.191; Dhp-a ii.94 sq ■ The voc. is used as a polite form of address (cp. Ger. “Sie” and E. address “Esq.” like E. Sir, milord or simply “you” with the implication of a pluralis majestatis; thus voc. proper ayya Ja i.221 Ja i.279, Ja i.308; pl. nom. as voc. ayyā in addressing several Ja ii.128, Ja ii.415; nom. sg. as voc. (for all genders & numbers); ayyo Vin ii.215; Ja iii.126, Ja iii.127 ■ f. ayyā lady mistress MN ii.96 (= mother of a prince); Dhp-a i.398 voc. ayye my lady Ja v.138.
-putta lit. son of an Ariyan, i.e. an aristocratic (young man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (lit.) said by a servant Ja iii.167; (b) lord master, “governor” Ja i.62 (by a servant); DN-a i.257 (sāmi, opp. dāsi-putta); Pv-a 145 (by a wife to her husband); Dhp-a ii.110; (c) prince (see W.Z.K.M. xii., 1898 75 sq. & Epigraphia Indica iii.137 sq.) Ja vi.146.
contracted form for the diaeretic ariya (q.v. for etym.). See also ayira
grandfather, (so also BSk., e.g. Mvu ii.426; Mvu iii.264) Ja iii.155; Ja iv.146; Ja vi.196; Pv i.84; Mil 284. ayyaka-payyakā grandfather & great grandfather; forefathers, ancestors Ja i.2; Pv-a 107 (= pitāmahā) ■ f ayyakā grandmother, granny Vin ii.169; SN i.97; Ja ii.349 (here used for “lady”, as v.l. BB); & ayyikā Thig 159 Vism 379.
demiName of ayya
the spoke of a wheel DN ii.17 (sahass’ âra adj with thousand spokes), cp. Mil 285; Ja iv.209; Ja vi.261; Mil 238; Dhp-a ii.142; Vv-a 106 (in allegorical etym of arahant = saṃsāra-cakkassa arānaṃ hatattā “breaker of the spokes of the wheel of transmigration”) = Pv-a 7 (has saṃsāra-vaṭṭassa); Vv-a 277.
Vedic ara fr. ṛ; ṛṇoti; see etym. under appeti & cp. more esp. Lat. artus limb, Gr.; α ̔́ρμα chariot, also P aṇṇava
(adj.) not to be guarded, viz. (1) impossible to watch (said of women folk) Ja ii.326 (a. nāma itthiyo); iii.90 (mātugāmo nāma a.) ■ (2) unnecessary to be guarded Vin ii.194 (Tathāgatā).
a + rakkhiya, grd. of rakkhati
(adj.) only in nt. “that which does not need to be guarded against”, what one does not need to heed, superfluous to beware of AN iv.82 (cattāri Tathāgatassa a˚ āni).
3 arakkheyyāni are enumd. at DN iii.217 (but as ārakkh˚, which is also given by Childers).
in form = arakkhiya
a wheel for raising water from a well Bdgh. on cakkavaṭṭaka at cv v.16, 2 (Vin ii.318). So read for T. arahatta-ghaṭi-yanta acc to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 30; cp. also Vin. Texts iii.112 ■ The 2rd part of the cpd. is doubtful; Morris & Aufrecht compare the modern Hindī form arhaṭ or rahaṭ “a well-wheel”.
Sk. araghaṭṭaka (so Halāyudha, see Aufrecht p. 138), dialect.
(adj.) free from dust or impurity SN iv.218 (of the wind); Vv 536 (= apagata-raja Vv-a 236).
a + raja
(nt.) forest DN i.71; MN i.16; MN iii.104; SN i.4, SN i.7, SN i.29, SN i.181, SN i.203 (mahā); AN i.60 (˚vanapatthāni); ii.252; iii.135, 138; Snp 39, Snp 53, Snp 119; Dhp 99, Dhp 329, Dhp 330; Iti 90; Vv 567; Pts i.176 [The commentators, give a wider meaning to the word Thus the O. C. (Vin iii.46, quoted Vism 72 & Snp-a 83 says every place, except a village and the approach thereto, is arañña. See also Vin iii.51; DN-a i.209; Pv-a 73; Vv-a 249; Ja i.149, Ja i.215; Ja ii.138; Ja v.70].
-āyatana a forest haunt Vin ii.201; SN ii.269; Ja i.173; Vv-a 301; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 78, Pv-a 141. -kuṭikā a hut in the forest a forest lodge SN i.61; SN iii.116; SN iv.116, SN iv.380; Dhp-a iv.31 (as v.l.; T. has ˚kuṭi). -gata gone into the forest (as loneliness) MN i.323; AN iii.353; AN v.109 sq., 207, 323 sq -ṭhāna a place in the forest Ja i.253. -vāsa a dwelling in the forest, a hermitage Ja i.90. -vihāra living in (the loneliness (of the forest) AN iii.343 sq.
Vedic araṇya; from araṇa, remote, + ya. In the Rig V. araṇya still means remoteness (opp. to amā at home). In the Ath V. it has come to mean wilderness or forest. Connected with ārād and āre, remote, far from
(& Āraññāka) (adj.) belonging to solitude or to the forest, living in the forest, fond of solitude, living as hermits (bhikkhū) MN i.214 (ā˚), 469 iii.89; SN ii.187, SN ii.202 (v.l. ā˚), 208 sq.; 281; AN iii.343 AN iii.391; AN iv.291, AN iv.344, AN iv.435; AN v.10. See also āraññaka.
arañña + ka
(nt.) the habit of one who lives in the forest, indulgence in solitude & sequestration a hermit’s practice, seclusion SN ii.202, SN ii.208 sq See also āraññakatta.
abstr. fr. araññaka
(adj.-n.). (adj. living in solitude, far from the madding crowd MN iii.237 (˚vibhanga-sutta); SN i.44, SN i.45; Ja i.340 (tittha˚?).
Vedic araṇa fr. *ara √ ṛ; which as abl. ārā is used as adv. far from, cp. P. ārakā. Orig. meaning “removed from, remote, far”. See also arañña
(nt.) quietude, peace Ne 55 (+ tāṇa), 176 (or as adj. = peaceful) Thag-a 134 (+ saraṇa); Vb 19 sq. (opp. saraṇa ). See saraṇa2.
-vihārin (or araṇā-vihārin) [to be most likely taken as araṇā˚, abl. of araṇa in function of ārakā, i.e. adv far from, away; the spelling araṇa would refer it to araṇa2 As regards meaning the P. Commentators expln. it as opp. of raṇa fight, battle, i.e. peacefullness, friendliness & see in it a syName of metta. Thus Dhammapāla at Pv-a 230 expl;s. it as “mettā-vihārin”, & in this meaning it is found freq. in BSk. e.g. Divy 401; Avs ii.131 (q. v for further ref. under note 3); Mvu i.165; Mvu ii.292. Cp also the epithet of the Buddhas raṇañjaha] one who lives in seclusion, an anchoret, hermit; hence a harmless, peaceful person AN i.24; Thig 358, Thig 360; Pv iv.133 (= Pv-a 230); Thag-a 244. Cp. Dhs trsl. 336. Arani & i
a + raṇa
(f.) wood for kindling fire by attrition, only in foll. cpds.: ˚potaka small firewood, all that is needed for producing fire, chiefly drill sticks Mil 53; ˚sahita (nt.) same Vin ii.217; Ja i.212 (ī); v.46 (ī); Dhp-a ii.246; ˚mathana rubbing of firewood Ja vi.209 ■ Note. The reading at Pv-a 211 araṇiyehi devehi sadisa-vaṇṇa is surely a misreading (v.l. BB ariyehi).
Vedic araṇī & araṇi fr.; ṛ;
(f.) dislike, discontent, aversion Snp 270, Snp 436, Snp 642, Snp 938; Dhp 418 (= ukkaṇṭhitattaṃ Dhp-a iv.225) Thig 339 (= ukkaṇṭhi Thag-a 239); Sdhp 476.
a + rati
a lotus, Nymphaea Nelumbo Dāvs v.62.
ara + vinda (?) Halāyudha gives as Sk. aravinda nt.
(adj.) (-˚) 1. worthy of, deserving, entitled to, worth Dhp 195 (pūjā˚); Pv ii.86 (dakkhiṇā˚); Vv-a 23 (daṇḍa˚ deserving punishment) Freq. in cpd. mahāraha [Sk. mahārgha] worth much, of great value, costly, dear Ja i.50, Ja i.58; Ja iii.83, etc. (see mahant).
2. fit for, apt for, suitable Pv-a 26 (paribhoga fit for eating).
Vedic arha of arh
to be worthy of, to deserve, to merit (= Lat. debeo) Snp 431, Snp 552 (rājā arahasi bhavituṃ); Ja i.262; Dhp 9, Dhp 10, Dhp 230; Pv iii.66 ■ ppr. arahant (q.v.). Cp. also adj. araha.
Vedic arhati, etym. uncertain but cp. agghati
(nt.) the state or condition of an Arahant, i.e. perfection in the Buddhist sense = Nibbāna (S iv.151) final & absolute emancipation Arahantship, the attainment of the last & highest stage of the Path (see magga & anāgāmin). This is not restricted by age or sex or calling. There is one instance in the Canon of a child having attained Arahantship at the age of 7. One or two others occur in the Comy Thag-a 64 (Selā) Pv-a 53 (Sankicca). Many women Arahants are mentioned by name in the oldest texts. About 400 men Arahants are known. Most of them were bhikkhus, but AN iii.451 gives the names of more than a score lay Arahants (cp DN ii.93 = SN v.360, and the references in Dial. iii.5 n4). Arahattaṃ is defined at SN iv.252 as rāga-kkhaya, dosa˚ moha˚. Descriptions of this state are to be found in the formulae expressing the feelings of an Arahant (see arahant ii.). Vin ii.254; DN iii.10, DN iii.11, DN iii.255; AN iii.34, AN iii.421 AN iii.430; AN v.209; Pp 73; Ne 15, Ne 82; DN-a i.180, DN-a i.188, DN-a i.191; Dhp-a ii.95; Dhp-a iv.193; Pv-a 14 ■ Phrases: arahattaṃ sacchikaroti to experience Arahantship Vin ii.74; DN i.229 arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti to attain or reach Arahantship (usually in aor. pāpuṇi) Ja ii.229 Thag-a 64; Dhp-a ii.49 (saha paṭisambhidāhi) 93 (id.); Pv-a 53, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 233 & freq elsewhere; cp. arahattāya paṭipanna DN iii.255; AN i.120 AN iv.292 sq., 372 sq.
-gahaṇa attainment of Arahantship Dhp-a i.8. -patta (& patti); one who has attained Ar. SN i.196; SN v.273; AN ii.157; AN iii.376; AN iv.235. -phala the fruit of Ar. Vin i.39 Vin i.41, Vin i.293; Vin iii.93; DN iii.227, DN iii.277; SN iii.168; SN v.44; AN i.23 AN i.45; AN iii.272; AN iv.276; Dhs 1017; Vb 326. -magga the Path of Ar. SN i.78; AN iii.391; DN-a i.224. -vimokkha the emancipation of Ar. Nd ii.19.
abstr. formation fr. arahat˚, 2nd base of arahant in compn.: see arahant iv.2
in ˚ghaṭi see araghaṭṭa.
(adj.-n.). Before Buddhism used as honorific title of high officials like the English ʻHis Worshipʼ; at the rise of Buddhism applied popularly to all ascetics (Dial. iii.3–6). Adopted by the Buddhisṭs as t. t for one who has attained the Summum Bonum of religious aspiration (Nibbāna).
I. Cases nom. sg. arahaṃ Vin i.9; DN i.49; MN i.245 MN i.280; SN i.169; see also formula C. under ii., & arahā Vin i.8, Vin i.25, Vin i.26; Vin ii.110, Vin ii.161; DN iii.255; Iti 95; Kp iv. gen. arahato SN iv.175; Snp 590; instr. arahatā SN iii.168; DN-a i.43; acc. arahantaṃ DN iii.10; Dhp 420; Snp 644 Loc. arahantamhi Vv 212 ■ nom. pl. arahanto Vin i.19; Vin iv.112; SN i.78, SN i.235; SN ii.220; SN iv.123; gen. arahataṃ Vin iii.1; SN i.214; Snp 186; Iti 112; Pv i.1112. Other cases are of rare occurrence.
II. Formulae. Arahantship finds its expression in freq occurring formulae, of which the standard ones are the foll.: A. khīṇā jāti vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ nāparaṃ itthattāya “destroyed is (re-) birth lived is a chaste life, (of a student) done is what had to be done, after this present life there is no beyond”. Vin i.14, Vin i.35, Vin i.183; DN i.84, DN i.177, DN i.203; MN i.139; MN ii.39; SN i.140; SN ii.51, SN ii.82, SN ii.95, SN ii.120, SN ii.245; SN iii.21, SN iii.45, SN iii.55, SN iii.68, SN iii.71, SN iii.90 SN iii.94, SN iii.195, SN iii.223; SN iv.2, SN iv.20, SN iv.35, SN iv.45, SN iv.86, SN iv.107, SN iv.151, SN iv.383; SN v.72 SN v.90, SN v.144, SN v.222; AN i.165; AN ii.211; AN iii.93; AN iv.88, AN iv.179, AN iv.302 AN v.155, AN v.162; Snp p.16; Pp 61, etc ■ B. eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto ʻalone, secluded, earnest zealous, master of himselfʼ DN i.177; DN ii.153 & continued with A: SN i.140, SN i.161; SN ii.21; SN iii.36, SN iii.74; SN iv.64 SN v.144, SN v.166; AN i.282; AN ii.249; AN iii.70, AN iii.217, AN iii.301, AN iii.376; iv. 235 ■ C. arahaṃ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anupatta-sadattho parikkhīṇa-bhava-saññojano sammad-aññā vimutto: DN iii.83, DN iii.97; MN i.4 MN i.235; SN i.71; SN iii.161, SN iii.193; SN iv.125; SN v.145, SN v.205, SN v.273, SN v.302; AN i.144; AN iii.359, AN iii.376; AN iv.362, AN iv.369, AN iv.371 sq., Iti 38. D. ñāṇañ ca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi akuppā me ceto-vimutti ayaṃ antimā jāti natthi dāni punabbhavo “there arose in me insight, the emancipation of my heart became unshake able, this is my last birth, there is now no rebirth for me: SN ii.171; SN iii.28; SN iv.8; SN v.204; AN i.259 AN iv.56, AN iv.305, AN iv.448.
III. Other passages (selected) Vin i.8 (arahā sītibhūto nibbuto), 9 (arahaṃ Tathāgato Sammāsambuddho), 19 (ekādasa loke arahanto), 20 (ekasaṭṭhi id.). 25 sq.; ii. 110, 161; iii.1; iv.112 (te arahanto udake kīḷanti); DN i.49 (Bhagavā arahaṃ), 144; iii.10, 255: MN i.245 (Gotamo na pi kālaṃ karoti: arahaṃ samaṇo Gotamo), 280; SN i.9, SN i.26, SN i.50 (Tathāgato), 78, 140, 161, 169, 175, 178 (+ sītibhūta), 208, 214, 235 (khīnāsavā arahanto); iii. 160 (arahā tissa?), 168; iv.123, 175, 260, 393; v.159 sq., 164, 200 sq.; AN i.22 (Sammāsambuddho), 27, 109 266; ii.134; iii.376, 391, 439; iv.364, 394; v.120; Snp 186, Snp 590, Snp 644, Snp 1003; Iti 95 (+ khīṇāsava), 112; Kp iv. (dasahi angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati: see Kp-a 88); Vv 212; i.217; Dhp 164, Dhp 420 (khīṇāsava + ); Pts ii.3 Pts ii.19, Pts ii.194, Pts ii.203 sq.; Pp 37, Pp 73; Vb 324, Vb 336, Vb 422; Pv i.11 (khettûpamā arahanto), 1112; iv.132.
IV. In compn. & der. we find two bases, viz. (1) arahanta˚ in; ˚ghāta the killing or murder of an Arahant (considered as one of the six deadly crimes): see abhiṭhāna; ˚ghātaka the murderer of the A.: Vin i.89, Vin i.136 Vin i.168, Vin i.320; ˚magga (arahatta˚?) the path of an A.: DN ii.144 ■ (2) arahat˚; in (arahad-) dhaja the flag or banner of an A.: Ja i.65.
V. See further details & passages under anāgāmin khīṇa, buddha. On the relationship of Buddha and Arahant see Dial. ii.1
3; iii.6. For riddles or word-play on the form arahant see M i.280; AN iv.145; DN-a i.146 = Vv-a 105, Vv-a 6 = Pv-a 7; Dhp-a iv.228; Dhs-a 349.
Vedic arhant, ppr. of arhati (see arahati), meaning deserving, worthy
an enemy Dāvs iv.1.
a + rāti, cp. Sk. arāti
an enemy ■ The word is used in exegesis & word expl;n, thus in etym. of arahant (see ref. under arahant v.); of bhūri Pts ii.197 ■ Otherwise in late language only, e.g. Sdhp 493 (˚bhūta). See also arindama & aribhāseti.;
Ved. ari; fr. ṛ;
not leaving behind, not giving up, i.e. pursuing earnestly Snp 69 (jhānaṃ = ajȧhamana Snp-a 123, cp. Nd ii.94).
ppr. med. of P. riñcati for ricyati
(adj.) unhurt Sdhp 279.
a + riṭṭha = Vedic ariṣṭa, pp of a + riṣ to hurt or be hurt
a kind of spirituous liquor Vin iv.110.
Sk. ariṣṭa, Name of a tree
(adj.) (a) unhurt; perfect DA 1,94 (˚ṃ ñāṇaṃ) ■ (b) [fr. ariṭṭha in meaning of “soap-berry plant”?] in phrase mahā ariṭṭhako maṇi SN i.104 “a great mass of soap stone” (cp. Rh. D. in J.R. A. S. 1895 893 sq.), “a shaped block of steatite” (Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S 130).
fr. ariṭṭha
(nt.) a rudder. Usually in combn. with piya (phiya) oar, as piyârittaṃ (phiy˚ oar & rudder, thus at SN i.103 (T. piya˚, v.l. phiya˚) AN ii.201 (piya˚); Ja iv.164 (T. piya˚, v.l. phiya˚); Snp 321 (piya + ; Snp-a 330 phiya = dabbi-padara, aritta = veḷudaṇḍa). Dhs-a 149.
Vedic aritra, Idg. *ere to row (Sk. ṛ; to move); cf. Gr. ἐρέσσω to row, ἐρετμός rudder, Lat. remus, Ohg ruodar = rudder; Ags. rōwan = E. row
a tamer of enemies, victor, conqueror Pv iv.315 (= arīnaṃ damanasīla Pv-a 251); Sdhp 276.
Sk. arindama, ariṃ + dama of dam
to denounce, lit. to call an enemy Ja iv.285. Correct to Pari˚ according to Fausböll (J v. corr.)
= ariṃ bhāseti
(adj.-n.) 1.; (racial) Aryan DN ii.87. 2. (social) noble, distinguished, of high birth.
3. (ethical) in accord with the customs and ideals of the Aryan clans, held in esteem by Aryans, generally approved Hence: right, good, ideal. [The early Buddhists had no such ideas as we cover with the words Buddhist and Indian Ariya does not exactly mean either. But it often comes very near to what they would have considered the best in each] ■ (adj.): DN i.70 = (˚ena sīlakkhandhena samannāgata fitted out with our standard morality); iii.64 (cakkavatti-vatta), 246 (diṭṭhi); MN i.139 (pannaddhaja) ii.103 (ariyāya jātiyā jāto, become of the Aryan lineage) SN ii.273 (tuṇhībhāva); iv.250 (vaddhi), 287 (dhamma) v.82 (bojjhangā), 166 (satipaṭṭhānā), 222 (vimutti), 228 (ñāṇa), 255 (iddhipādā), 421 (maggo), 435 (saccāni), 467 (paññā-cakkhu); AN i.71 (parisā); ii.36 (ñāya); iii.451 (ñāṇa) iv.153 (tuṇhībhāva); v.206 (sīlakkhandha); Iti 35 (paññā) 47 (bhikkhu sammaddaso); Snp 177 (patha = aṭṭhangiko maggo Snp-a 216); Dhp 236 (bhūmi), 270; Pts ii.212 (iddhi) -alamariya fully or thoroughly good DN i.163 = DN iii.82; AN iv.363; nâlamariya not at all good, object, ignoble ibid ■ (m.) Vin i.197 (na ramati pāpe); DN i.37 = (yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā etc.: see 3rd. jhāna) 245; iii.111 (˚ānaṃ anupavādaka one who defames the noble); MN i.17, MN i.280 (sottiyo ariyo arahaṃ); SN i.225 (˚ānaṃ upavādaka); ii.123 (id.); iv.53 (˚assa vinayo), 95 (id.) AN i.256 (˚ānaṃ upavādaka); iii.19, 252 (id.); iv.145 (dele see arīhatatta); v.68, 145 sq., 200, 317; Iti 21, Iti 108; Dhp 22, Dhp 164, Dhp 207; Ja iii.354 = Mil 230; MN i.7, MN i.35 (ariyānaṃ adassāvin: “not recognising the Noble Ones” Pv-a 26, Pv-a 146; Dhp-a ii.99; Sdhp 444 (˚ānaṃ vaṃsa). anariya (adj. & n.); not Ariyan, ignoble, undignified, low common, uncultured AN i.81; Snp 664 (= asappurisa Snp-a 479; Dhs-a 353); Ja ii.281 (= dussīla pāpadhamma C.) v.48 (˚rūpa shameless), 87; Dhp-a iv.3 ■ See also ñāṇa magga, sacca, sāvaka.
-āvakāsa appearing noble Ja v.87 ■ uposatha the ideal feast day (as one of 3) AN i.205 sq., 212 ■ kanta loved by the Best DN iii.227 ■ gaṇā (pl.) troops of worthies Ja vi.50 (= brāhmaṇa-gaṇā, te kira tāda ariyâcārā ahesuṃ tena te evam āha C.) ■ garahin casting blame on the righteous Snp 660 ■ citta a noble heart ■ traja a true descendant of the Noble ones Dpvs v.92 ■ dasa having the ideal (or best) belief Iti 93 = Iti 94 ■ dhana sublime treasure; always as sattavidha˚ sevenfold, viz. saddhā˚ sīla˚, hiri˚, ottappa˚, suta˚, cāga˚, paññā˚ “faith, a moral life, modesty, fear of evil, learning, self-denial, wisdom Thag-a 240; Vv-a 113; DN-a ii.34 ■ dhamma the national customs of the Aryans (= ariyānaṃ eso dhammo Nd i.71 Nd i.72) MN i.1, MN i.7, MN i.135; AN ii.69; AN v.145 sq., 241, 274; Snp 783; Dhs 1003 ■ puggala an (ethically) model person, Pts i.167; Vin v.117; Thag-a 206 ■ magga the Aryan Path- vaṃsa the (fourfold) noble family, i.e. of recluses content with the 4 requisites DN iii.224 = AN ii.27 = Pts i.84 = Nd ii.141; cp. AN iii.146 ■ vattin leading a noble life, of good conduct Ja iii.443 ■ vatā at Thag 334 should be read ˚vattā (nom. sg. of vattar, vac ) “speaking noble words”:- vāsa the most excellent state of mind habitual disposition, constant practice. Ten such at DN iii.269 DN iii.291 = AN v.29 (Passage recommended to all Buddhists by Asoka in the Bhabra Edict) ■ vihāra the best practice SN v.326 ■ vohāra noble or honorable practice. There are four, abstinence from lying, from slander, from harsh language, from frivolous talk. They are otherwise known as the 4 vacī-kammantā & represent sīla nos. 4
7. See DN iii.232; AN ii.246; Vin v.125 ■ saṅgha the communion of the Nobles ones Pv-a 1 ■ sacca, a standard truth, an established fact, DN i.189, DN ii.90, DN ii.304 sq.; iii277; MN i.62, MN i.184; MN iii.248; SN v.415 sq. = Vin i.10, Vin i.230. Iti 17; Snp 229, Snp 230, Snp 267; Dhp 190; Dhp-a iii.246; Kp-a 81, Kp-a 151 Kp-a 185, Kp-a 187; Thag-a 178, Thag-a 282, Thag-a 291; Vv-a 73 ■ sāvaka a disciple of the noble ones (= ariyānaṃ santike sutattā a Snp-a 166). MN i.8, MN i.46, MN i.91, MN i.181, MN i.323; MN ii.262; MN iii.134, MN iii.228 MN iii.272; Iti 75; Snp 90; Mil 339; Dhp-a i.5, (opp. putthujjana) ■ sīlin of unblemished conduct, practising virtue DN i.115 (= sīlaṃ ariyaṃ uttamaṃ parisuddhaṃ DN-a i.286) MN ii.167.
When the commentators, many centuries afterwards began to write Pali in S. India & Ceylon, far from the ancient seat of the Aryan clans, the racial sense of the word; ariya was scarcely, if at all, present to their minds Dhammapāla especially was probably a non -Aryan, and certainly lived in a Dravidian environment. The then current similar popular etmologies of ariya and arahant (cp. next article) also assisted the confusion in their minds. They sometimes therefore erroneously identify the two words and explain Aryans as meaning Arahants (Dhp-a i.230; Snp-a 537; Pv-a 60). In other ways also they misrepresented the old texts by ignoring the racial force of the word. Thus at Ja v.48 the text, speaking of a hunter belonging to one of the aboriginal tribes, calls him anariya-rūpa. The C. explains this as “shameless” but what the text has, is simply that he looked like a non-Aryan. (cp ʻfrankʼ in English).
Vedic ārya, of uncertain etym. The other Pāli forms are ayira & ayya
in phrase “arīhatta ariyo hoti” at AN iv.145 is wrong reading for arīnaṃ hatattā. The whole phrase is inserted by mistake from a gloss explaining arahā in the foll. sentence “ārakattā kilesānaṃ arīnaṃ hatattā… arahā hoti”, and is to be deleted (omitted also by SS).
(nt.) a wound, a sore, only in cpds.: ˚kāya a heap of sores MN ii.64 = Dhp 147 = Thag 769 (= navannaṃ vaṇamukhānaṃ vasena arubhūta kāya Dhp-a iii.109 = Vv-a 77); ˚gatta (adj.) with wounds in the body MN i.506 (+ pakka-gatta); Mil 357 (id); ˚pakka decaying with sores SN iv.198 (˚āni gattāni) ˚bhūta consisting of wounds, a mass of wounds Vv-a 77; Dhp-a iii.109.
Vedic aruḥ, unknown etym.
= aru; only in cpd. ˚ūpamacitto (adj.) having a heart like a sore (of a man in anger) AN i.124 = Pp 30 (expld at Pp A 212 as purāṇa-vaṇa-sadisa-citto “an old wound” i.e. continually breaking open).
the sun Vin ii.68 Vin iv.245; Ja ii.154; Ja v.403; Ja vi.330; Dpvs i.56; DN-a i.30. a. uggacchati the sun rises Ja i.108; Vv-a 75, & see cpds.;
-ugga sunrise Vin iv.272; SN v.29, SN v.78, SN v.101, SN v.442 (at all Saṃyutta pass. the v.l. SS is aruṇagga); Vism 49 -uggamana sunrise (opp. oggamanna). Vin iii.196, Vin iii.204 Vin iii.264; Vin iv.86, Vin iv.166, Vin iv.230, Vin iv.244; Dhp-a i.165; Dhp-a ii.6; Pv-a 109 -utu the occasion of the sun (-rise) Dhp-a i.165. -vaṇṇa of the colour of the sun, reddish, yellowish, golden Vism 123; Dhp-a i.1.3 = Pv-a 216. -sadisa (vaṇṇa) like the sun (in colour) Pv-a 211 (gloss for suriyavaṇṇa).
Vedic aruṇa (adj.) of the colour of fire, i.e. ruddy, nt. the dawn; of Idg. *ereu as in Sk. aruṣa reddish, Av auruša white, also Sk ravi sun; an enlarged from of Idg *reu as in Sk. rudhira, rohita red (bloody; see etym under rohita), Gr. ἐρυδρός, Lat. ruber.
the Rigveda Thag-a 206.
(adj.) without form or body, incorporeal, DN i.195 sq.; DN iii.240; Snp 755; Iti 62; Sdhp 228, Sdhp 463 Sdhp 480. See details under rūpa.
-āvacara the realm or world of Formlessness, Dhs 1281–1285; Pts i.83 sq., 101. -kāyika belonging to the group of formless beings Mil 317 (devā). -ṭhāyin standing in or being founded on the Formless Iti 62. -taṇhā “thirst for the Formless DN iii.216. -dhātu the element or sphere of the Incoporeal (as one of the 3 dhātus rūpa˚, arūpa˚ nirodha˚; see dhātu ) DN iii.215, DN iii.275; Iti 45. -bhava formless existence DN iii.216. -loka the world of the Formless Sdhp 494. -saññin not having the idea of form DN ii.110; DN iii.260; Exp. i.252.
a + rūpa
(adj.) = arūpa; DN i.31 (arūpī attā hoti: see DA i.119), 195; iii.111, 139; Iti 87 (rūpino va arūpino va sattā).
a + rūpin
(indecl.) exclam. of astonishment & excitement: he! hallo I say!, implying an imprecation: Away with you (with voc.) Ja i.225 (dāsiputta-ceṭaka); iv.391 (duṭṭha-caṇḍāla) DN-a i.265 (= re); Vv-a 68 (dubbinī), 217 (“how in the world”).
onomat. Cp. Sk. lalallā, Gr. λαλέω, Lat. lallo = E. lull, Ger. lallen & without redupl. Ags. holā Ger. halloh, E. lo. An abbrev. form of are is re. Cf. also alālā
freq. spelling for aḷa.
(adj.) enough, only in neg. anala insufficient, impossible MN i.455; Ja ii.326 = Ja iv.471.
alaṃ adv. as adj.
(indecl.) emphatic particle 1. in affirmative sentences: part. of assurance emphasis = for sure, very much (so), indeed, truly.; Note. In connection with a dat. or an infin. the latter only apparently depend upon alaṃ, in reality they belong to the syntax of the whole sentence (as dat. or inf. absolute) It is customary however (since the practice of the Pāli grammarians) to regard them as interdependent and interpret the construction as “fit for, proper” (= yuttaṃ Pāli Com.), which meaning easily arises out of the connotation of alaṃ, e.g. alam eva kātuṃ to be sure, this is to be done = this is proper to be done. In this sense (c. dat. it may also be compd. with Vedic araṃ c. dat ■ (a (abs.) only in combn. with dat. or inf. (see c. & Note above) ■ (b.) (˚-) see cpds ■ (c.) with; dat. or infin.: alaṃ antarāyāya for certain an obstacle MN i.130 (opp nâlaṃ not at all); alaṃ te vippaṭisārāya you ought to feel sorry for it Vin ii.250; alaṃ vacanāya one says rightly SN ii.18; alaṃ hitāya untold happiness Dhp-a ii.41 ■ ito ce pi so bhavaṃ Gotamo yojana sate viharati alam eva… . upasankamituṃ even if he were 100 miles from here (surely) even so (i.e. it is fit or proper even then) one must go to him DN i.117 (expld. at DN-a i.288 by yuttam eva = it is proper); alam eva kātuṃ kalyāṇaṃ indeed one must do good = it is appropriate to do good Pv ii.923 (= yuttaṃ Pv-a 122); alaṃ puññāni kātave “come, let us do meritorious works” Vv 4415 (= yuttaṃ Vv-a 191). 2. in negative or prohibitive sentences: part. of disapprobation reproach & warning; enough! have done with fie! stop! alas! (etc. see are) ■ (a) (abs.) enough: nâlaṃ thutuṃ it is not enough to praise Snp 217; te pi na honti me alaṃ they are not enough for me Pv i.63 ■ (b) with voc.: alaṃ Devadatta mā te rucci sanghabhedo “look out D. or take care D. that you do not split up the community Vin ii.198; alaṃ Vakkali kin te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena… SN iii.120 ■ (c) enough of (with instr.): alaṃ ettakena enough of this, so much of that Mil 18; alam me Buddhena enough for me of the Buddha = I am tired of the B. Dhp-a ii.34.
-attha (adj.) “quite the thing”, truly good, very profitable useful DN ii.231; MN ii.69 (so read for alamatta) AN ii.180; Thag 252; Ja i.401 (so read for ˚atta). -ariya truly genuine, right noble, honourable indeed, only in ˚ñāṇa-dassana [cp. BSk. alamārya-jñāna-darśana Lal v.309 Lal v.509] Vin i.9; AN iii.64, AN iii.430; AN v.88; Ja i.389 (cp. ariya) -kammaniya (quite or thoroughly) suitable Vin iii.187 -pateyya: see the latter. -vacanīyā (f.) a woman who has to be addressed with “alaṃ” (i.e. “fie”), which means that she ceases to be the wife of a man & returus into her parental home Vin iii.144, cp. 274 (Bdhgh’s expln.). -samakkhātar one who makes sufficiently clear Iti 107. -sājīva one who is thoroughly fit to associate with his fellow AN iii.81. -sāṭaka “curse-coat”, one who curses his waist-coat (alaṃ sāṭaka!) because of his having eaten too much it will not fit; an over-eater; one of the 5 kinds of gluttons or improper eaters as enumd. at Dhp-a iv.16 = Dhs-a 404.
Vedic araṃ. In meaning 1. alaṃ is the expanded continuation of Vedic araṃ, an adv. acc. of ara (adj.) suitable; fitly, aptly rightly fr. ṛ; Cp. aṇṇava, appeti ara. In meaning 2. alaṃ is the same as are
(& īka ) (adj.) unfortunate unhappy, of bad luck Vin iii.23; Ja iii.259.
a + lakkhika
(f.) bad luck, misfortune Thag 1123.
a + lakkhi
a kind of snake MN i.133 = DN-a i.21; Dhp-a iv.132 (˚camma, so read for T. alla-camma, vv.ll. alanda & alandu˚).;
Der. unknown. In late Sk. alagarda is a watersnake
(adj.) not stuck or attached Nd ii.107 (also alaggita); alaggamāna (ppr.) id. Dhp-a iii.298.
pp. of laggati
(nt.) not hanging on anything, not being suspended DN-a i.180.
a + laggana
1. “made too much”, made much of, done up, adorned, fitted out Dhp 142 (= vatthâbharaṇa-paṭimaṇḍita Dhp-a iii.83); Pv ii.36; Vv 11; Ja iii.392; Ja iv.60.
2. “done enough” (see alaṃ, use with instr.), only neg. analaṅkata in meaning “insatiate” SN i.15 (kāmesu).
pp. of alankaroti
(nt.) doing up, fitting out, ornamentation Ja i.60.
alaṃ + karaṇa, fr. alankaroti
(adj.) adorning, embellishing, decorating Dhp-a i.410.
fr. alankaraṇa
to make much of i.e. to adorn, embellish, decorate Ja i.60; Ja iii.189; vi. 368. ger. ˚karitvā Dhp-a i.410; Pv-a 74 ■ pp. alaṅkata ■ Caus. alaṅkārāpeti to cause to be adorned Ja i.52.
alaṃ + karoti, Vedic araṅkaroti
“getting up” i.e. fitting out, ornament, decoration; esp. trinkets, ornaments DN iii.190; AN iii.239; AN iii.263 sq.; Ja vi.368; Pv-a 23 Pv-a 46, Pv-a 70 (-˚ adj. adorned with), 74; Sdhp 249.
fr. alankaroti, cp. Vedic araṅkṛti
lac, a red animal dye Ja iv.114 (˚pāṭala); Dhp-a ii.174; Dhp-a iv.197.
Sk. alaktaka
see alagadda.
(adj.) not hanging down, not drooping, short Ja v.302; Ja vi.3 (˚tthaniyo not flabby: of a woman’s breasts cp. alamb’ ordhva-stanī Suśruta i.371).
a + lamba
(adj.) idle, lazy, slack, slothful, languid SN i.44, SN i.217; Snp 96 (= jāti-alaso Snp-a 170); Ja iv.30; Dhp 280 (= mahā-alaso Dhp-a iii.410). Opp. analasa vigorous energetic SN i.44; DN iii.190 (dakkha + ); Vin iv.211; Nd ii.141 (id.).
a + lasa
(f.) sloth, laziness; only in neg. analasatā zeal, industry Vv-a 229.
abstr. fr. alasa
(nt.) at SN i.43 is spurious spelling for ālassa idleness, sloth; v.l. BB ālasya.
(nt.) a firebrand AN ii.95 (chava˚ a burning corpse see chava); Ja i.68; Pp 36; Dhp-a iii.442.
Sk. alāta, related to Lat. altāre altar, adoleo to burn
(nt.) a gourd, pumpkin Dhp 149 (= Dhp-a iii.112; vv. ll alābu & alābbu).;
= alābu, with p for b: so Trenckner Notes 6216
a long white gourd, Cucurbita Lagenaris MN i.80 (tittaka˚), 315 (id.); Pv-a 47 (id.); Dhs-a 405 ■ See also alāpu.
Sk. alābū f.
not getting, loss, detriment Vin iii.77.
a + labhaka
(indecl.) “not saying lā lā” i.e. not babbling not dumb, in ˚mukha not (deaf & ) dumb Snp-a 124 (aneḷamūga of Snp 70).;
a + lālā interjection fr. sound root *lal, see etym. under are
(adj.) contrary, false, untrue SN i.189; Ja iii.198; Ja vi.361; Mil 26, Mil 99 ■ nt. ˚ṃ a lie, falsehood Dhp 264.
-vādin one who tells a lie, a liar Dhp 223 = Vv-a 69 (has alīka˚); Ja ii.4; Snp-a 478 (for abhūta-vādin Snp 661).
Sk. alīka
(f.) open mindedness, prudence, sincerity Ja i.366.
abstr. of alīna
(adj.) umoved, undisturbed Mil 383.
a + luḷita, pp. of lul
(adj.) not salted Ja iii.409; Vv-a 184.
a + loṇika
(adj.) not hairy (upon the body) Ja vi.457.
a + loma
(adj.) undisturbed, not distracted (by desires), not wavering: of firm resolution, concentrated Snp 65 (= nillolupa Nd ii.98; = rasavisesesu anākula Snp-a 118).
a + lola
(adj.) (only ˚-)
1. moist, wet MN iii.94 (˚mattikā -puñja a heap of moist clay; may be taken in meaning 2).
2 fresh (opp. stale), new; freshly plucked, gathered or caught, viz. ˚āvalepana seei → adda3; ˚kusamuṭṭhi freshly plucked grass AN v.234 = AN v.249; ˚gomaya fresh dung AN v.234; Dhp-a i.377; ˚camma living skin Vism 195; ˚tiṇa fresh grass DN-a i.77; Pv-a 40; ˚dārūni green sticks Ja i.318 ˚madhu fresh honey Dhp-a ii.197; ˚maṃsa-sarīra a body of living flesh Dhp-a ii.51 = Dhp-a iv.166; ˚rasa fresh-tasting Dhp-a ii.155; ˚rohita-maccha fresh fish Ja iii.333. 3. wet = with connotation of clean (through being washed), freshly washed, ˚kesa with clean hair Pv-a 82 (sīsaṃ nahātvā allakesa); usually combd. with allavattha with clean clothes (in an ablution; often as a sign of mourning) Ud 14, Ud 91; Dhp-a iv.220; or with odāta vattha (id.) Ja iii.425. ˚pāṇi with clean hand Pv ii.99 (= dhotapāṇi Pv-a 116). [For analla-gatta at SN i.183 better read, with ibid 169, an-allīna -gatta. For allacamma at Dhp-a iv.132 alagadda-camma, with the v.l., is preferable].
Vedic ārdra, to Gr. α ̓́ρδω moisten, α ̓́ρδα dirt
conversation, talk; only in cpd. ˚sallāpa conversation (lit. talking to & fro or together Ja i.189; Mil 15; Vv-a 96; Pv-a 86.
Sk. ālāpa; ā + lāpa
(?) only in cpd. (kāma-) sukh’ allik’ânuyoga given to the attachment to sensual joys Vin i.10; DN iii.113 DN iii.130; SN iv.330; SN v.421; Ne 110.
either from alla = allikaṃ nt. in meaning defilement, getting soiled by (-˚), or from allīyati = alliyakaṃ a der. fr. ger. alliya clinging to, sticking to. The whole word is doubtful.
(a) sticking to, adhering or adhered to, clinging MN i.80; AN v.187; Nd ii.under nissita (in form asita allīna upagata) ■ (b.) soiled by (-˚), dirtied AN ii.201. -anallīna “to which nothing sticks” i.e. pure, undefiled, clean SN i.169 (id. p. on p. 183 reads analla: see alla ). Cp. ālaya.
pp. of allīyati; Sk. ālīna
to cling to, stick to, adhere to (in both senses, good or bad); to covet ■ (a lit. kesā sīsaṃ allīyiṃsu the hair stuck to the head Ja i.64 khaggo lomesu allīyi the sword stuck in the hair Ja i.273-(b) fig. to covet, desire etc.: in idiomatic phrase allīyati (S iii.190 v.l.; T. ālayati) kelāyati vanāyati (S iii.190 v.l.; T. manāyati; MN i.260 T. dhanāyati, but v.l. p. 552 vanāyati) mamāyati “to caress dearly & be extremely jealous of” (c. acc.) at MN i.260 & SN iii.190. Ja iv.5; Ja v.154 (allīyituṃ, v.l. illīyituṃ); Dhs-a 364 (vanati bhajati a); pp. allīna-Caus. alliyāpeti [cp. Sk. ālāpayati, but B.Sk. allīpeti Mvu iii.144; pp. allīpita ibid. i.311; iii.408; pass. allīpīyate iii.127.] to make stick to to bring near to (c. acc. or loc.) Ja ii.325 (hatthiṃ mahābhittiyan alliyāpetvā); iv.392 (sīsena sīsaṃ alliyāpetvā).
ā + līyati, lī, līyate, layate
1. the claw of a crab MN i.234; SN i.123; Ja i.223, Ja i.505 (˚chinno kakkaṭako; T. spells ala˚); ii.342 iii.295;
2. the nails (of finger or toe) (?) in ˚chinna one whose nails are cut off Vin i.91.
etym. unknown
(adj.) only used with ref. to the eyelashes, & usually expl;d. by visāla, i.e. extended wide, but also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning etym. is as yet uncertain. Kern, (;Toev. s.v.) transls. by “bent, crooked, arched”. ˚akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) Ja i.306 (= visāla-netta C.); ˚pamha with thick eye-lashes Vv 357 (= bahala-saṃyata-pakhuma C.; v.l ˚pamukha); ˚bhamuka having thick eyebrows or ˚lashes Ja vi.503 (so read for ˚pamukha; C. expls by visāl-akkhigaṇḍa). Cp. āḷāra.
Is it the same as uḷāra?
in udak’ aḷhaka Vv-a 155 read āḷhaka.
(prefix) I. Relation between ava & o.; Phonetically the difference between ava & o is this, that; ava is the older form, whereas o represents a later development. Historically the case is often reversed-that is, the form in o was in use first & the form in ava was built up, sometimes quite independently, long afterwards.; Okaḍḍhati okappati, okappanā, okassati, okāra, okantati, okkamati ogacchati, odāta and others may be used as examples The difference in many cases has given rise to a differentiation of meaning, like E. ripe: rife, quash: squash Ger. Knabe: Knappe etc. (see below B 2) ■ A. The old Pāli form of the prefix is o. In same cases however a Vedic form in ava has been preserved by virtue of its archaic character. In words forming the 2nd part of a cpd. we have ava, while the absolute form of the same word has o. See e.g. avakāsa (-˚) → okāsa (˚-); avacara → ocaraka; avatata; avadāta; avabhāsa; avasāna ■ B 1. the proportion in the words before us (early and later is that o alone is found in 65" of all cases, ava alone in 24", and ava as well as o in 11". The proportion of forms in ava increases as the books or passages become later. Restricted to the older literature (the 4 Nikāyas are the foll. forms with o: okiri, okkanti, okkamati okkhipati, ogacchati, ossajati ■ (1) The Pāli form (o˚ shows a differentiation in meaning against the later Sanskrit forms (ava˚; ). See the foll.:
avakappanā harnessing: okappanā confidence;
avakkanti (not Sk.): okkanti appearance;
avakkhitta thrown down: okkhitta subdued;
avacara sphere of motion: ocaraka spy;
avatiṇṇa descended: otiṇṇa affected with love;
avaharati to move down, put off: oharati to steal.
(2) In certain secondary verb-formations, arisen on Pāli grounds, the form o˚ is used almost exclusively pointing thus to a clearly marked dialectical development of Pali Among these formations are Deminutives in ˚ka usually; the Gerund & the; Infinitive usually; the Causatives throughout.
II. Ava as prefix. ■ Meaning. (Rest:) lower, low (opp ut˚, see e.g. uccâvaca high & low, and below; iii. c) expld. as heṭṭhā (Dhp-a iv.54 under avaṃ) or adho (ibid 153; Snp-a 290) ■ (Motion:) down, downward, away (down), off; e.g. avasūra sun-down; adv. avaṃ (q.v. opp. uddhaṃ) ■ (a) lit. away from, off: ava-kantati to cut off; ˚gaṇa away from the crowd; ˚chindati cut off ˚yīyati fall off; ˚bhāsati shine out, effulge; ˚muñcati take off; ˚siṭṭha left over ■ down, out, over: ˚kirati pour down or out over; ˚khitta thrown down; ˚gacchati go down; ˚gāheti dip down; ˚tarati descend; ˚patita fallen down; ˚sajjati emit; ˚siñcati pour out over; ˚sīdati sink down ■ (b) fig. down in connection with verbs of emotion (cp. Lat. de-in despico to despise, lit. look down on), see ava-jānāti, ˚bhūta, ˚mānita, ˚vajja, ˚hasati away from, i.e. the opposite of, as equivalent to a negation and often taking the place of the neg. prefix a (an˚), e.g. in avajaya (= ajaya), ˚jāta, ˚mangala (= a˚) ˚pakkhin, ˚patta.
Affinities of ava.-(a) apa. There exists an exceedingly frequent interchange of forms with apa˚ and ava˚ the historical relation of which has not yet been thoroughly investigated. For a comparison of the two the BSk. forms are indispensable, and often afford a clue as to the nature of the word in question. See on this apa 2 and cp. the foll. words under ava: avakata, ˚karoti, ˚khalita, ˚anga ottappa, avattha, ˚nīta, ˚dāna, ˚pivati, ˚rundhati, ˚lekhati ˚vadati, ˚varaka, ˚sakkati, avassaya, avasseti, ˚hita, avāpurīyati avekkhati ■ (b) abhi. The similarity between abhi & ava is seen from a comparison of meaning abhi; ii. b and ava ii. a. The two prefixes are practically synonymous in the foll. words: ˚kankhati, ˚kamati, ˚kiṇṇa ˚khipati, ˚maddati, ˚rata, ˚lambati, ˚lekheti, ˚lepana ˚siñcati ■ (c) The contrary of ava is ut (cp. above ii.2) Among the freq. contrast-pairs showing the two, like E up & down, are the foll. ukkaṃsâvakaṃsa, uggaman-oggamana, uccâvaca, ullangheti-olangheti, ullittâvalitta; ogilituṃuggilituṃ onaman-unnamana. Two other combns. founded on the same principle (of intensifying contrast) are chiddâvacchidda and ava˚ in contrast with vi˚ in olambavilamba olugga-vilugga.
P. ava = Vedic ava & occasionally o Av. ava; Lat. au-(aufero = avabharati, aufugio etc.) Obg. u-; Oir. ō, ua. See further relations in Walde, Lat Wtb. under au
(adv.) the prep. ava in adv. use, down, downward; in C. often expld. by adho. Rarely absolute, the only passage found so far being Snp 685 (avaṃ sari he went down, v.l. avasari, expld. by otari Snp-a 486). Opp. uddhaṃ (above, up high). Freq. in cpd avaṃsira (adj.) head downward (+ uddhaṃpāda feet up) a position characteristic of beings in Niraya (Purgatory) e.g. SN i.48; Snp 248 (patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirā adhogata-sīsā Snp-a 290); Vv 5225 (of Revatī, + uddhaṃpāda); Pv iv.146; Ja i.233 (+ uddhapāda); iv.103 (nirayaṃ vajanti yathā adhammo patito avaṃsiro); Nd i.404 (uddhaṃpāda + ); Dhp-a iv.153 (gloss adhosira) ■ On avaṃ˚ cp further avakkāra, avākaroti, avekkhipati.
Vedic avāk & avāṃ
dragging down, detraction, abasement, in cpd. ukkaṃsāvak˚; lifting up & pulling down, raising and lowering rise & fall DN i.54.
fr. ava-karṣati; on ṃs: *rṣ cp. haṃsati: harṣati
(-˚) to wish for, strive after SN iv.57 (n’); Ja iv.371 (n’); V 340 (n’), 348 (n’ = na pattheti C).
ava + kankhati; cp. Sk. anu-kānkṣati
Ne 4 (avakaḍḍhayitvā). Pass.; avakaḍḍhati Ja iv.415 (hadayaṃ me a. my heart is weighed down = sokena avakaḍḍhīyati C; v.l. avakassati) ■ pp. avakaḍḍhita.
ava + kaḍḍhati, cp. avakassati & apakassati
pulled down, dragged away Dhp-a iii.195.
pp. of avakaḍḍhati
= apakata, v.l. at Iti 89.
cut, cut open, cut off Ja iv.251 (galak’ âvakantaṃ).
for *avakatta, Sk. avakṛtta; pp. of avakantati, see kanta2
(okk˚) to cut off, cut out, cut away carve-(ava: ) Ja iv.155 ■ pp. avakanta & avakantita;.
cp. Sk. avakṛntati, ava + kantati, cp. also apakantati
cut out Pv-a 213. Avakappana & okappana
pp. of avakantati
(f.) preparation, fixing up, esp. harnessing Ja vi.408.
ava + kappanā
“to put down”, to despise, throw away; only in der, avakāra & avakārin.; pp. avakata (q.v.) ■ See also avākaroti & cp. avakirati 2.;
Sk. apakaroti, cp. P. apa˚
to drag down, to draw or pull away, distract, remove ■ A; v.74 = Vin ii.204 (+ vavakassati).
cp. Sk. avakarṣati, ava + kṛṣ; see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati
(adv.) throwing away, scattering about Vin ii.214.
fr. avakāra
(adj.) (-˚) despising, degrading, neglecting Vb 393 sq. (an˚). Avakasa & okasa;
fr. avakāra
1. “appearance”: akkhuddâvakāso dassanāya not little (or inferior) to behold (of appearance) DN i.114; ariyāvakāsa appearing noble or having the app. of an Aryan Ja v.87; katâvakāsa put into appearance Vv 229.
2. “opportunity”: kata˚ given leave DN i.276; Snp 1030; anavakāsakārin not giving occasion Mil 383 ■ anavakāsa not having a chance or opportunity (to happen), impossible; always in ster. phrase aṭṭhānaṃ etaṃ anavakāso Vin ii.199; AN i.26; AN v.169; Pp 11, Pp 12; Pv-a 28.
ava + kāś to shine, cp. Sk. avakāśa
1. to pour down on, to pour out over; aor. avakiri Pv-a 86; ger. ˚kiritvā Ja v.144.
2. to cast out, reject, throw out; aor. avākiri Vv 305 = 485 (v.l. ˚kari; Vv-a 126 expls by chaḍḍesi vināsesi) ■ Pass. avakirīyati Pv iii.110 (= chaḍḍīyati Pv-a 174); grd. ˚kiriya (see sep.). See also apakiritūna. pp okiṇṇa.
ava + kirati
to be cast out or thrown away; rejectable, low, contemptible Ja v.143 (taken by C. as ger. = avakiritvā).
grd of avakirati
(adj.) face downward, head first, prone, bent over (opp. ukkujja & uttāna) Ja i.13 Bv ii.52; Ja v.295; Ja vi.40; Pv iv.108; Pv-a 178.
-pañña (adj.) one whose reason is turned upside down (like an upturned pot, i.e. empty) AN i.130; Pp 31 (= adhomukha-pañña Pp A 214).
ava + kujja, cp. B.Sk. avakubja Mvu i.29, avakubjaka ibid. 213; ii.412
(-˚) entered by, beset with, overwhelmed by (instr.) SN iii.69 (dukkha˚, sukha˚ and an˚).
pp. ofnext
(f.) entry, appearance, coming down into, opportunity for rebirth SN ii.66 (nāmarūpassa) iii.46 (pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ); Pp 13 (= okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo PugA 184); Kv 142 (nāmarūpassa); Mil 123 (gabbhassa).
fr. avakkamati
entering, appearance Ja v.330 (gabbhassa).
fr. avakkamati
to approach. to enter, go into or near to, to fall into, appear in, only in ger. (poetically) avakamma Ja iii.480 (v.l. apa˚).
ava + kamati fr. kram
throwing away, refuse, sweepings; only in cpd. ˚pātī a bowl for refuse, slop basin, ash-bin Vin i.157, Vin i.352; Vin ii.216; MN i.207; Dhp-a i.305.
Sk. avaskara faeces, fr. avaṃ + karoti
washed off, taken away from, detracted DN-a i.66 (v.l. apa˚).
pp. of avakkhaleti, Caus. of kṣal
1. [ = Sk. avakṣipta] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped thrown out, rejected. (ava: ) MN i.296 (ujjhita + ); DN-a i.281 (an˚), 289 (pinḍa); Pv-a 174 (piṇḍa). 2. [ = Sk. utkṣipta? thrown off, gained, produced, got (cp. uppādita), in phrase sed’ âvakkhitta gained by sweat AN ii.67; AN iii.45.
pp. of avakkhipati
to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig usually appld to the eyes = to cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning of “to keep under, to restrain, to have control over” (cp. also avakkhāyati), aor. ˚khipi DN-a i.268 (bhusaṃ, v.l. avakkhasi).
ava + khipati; cp. Sk. avakṣipati
(nt.) throwing down, putting down Ja i.163.
fr. avakkhipati
to come to, approach, visit (cp. Vedic avagacchati) Pv-a 87. Avaganda (-karaka)
ava + gacchati
(adj.) “making a swelling”, i.e. puffing out the cheeks, stuffing the cheeks full (when eating); only nt. ˚ṃ as adv. after the manner or in the way of stuffing etc. Vin ii.214; Vin iv.196.
ava + gaṇḍa˚
at Pv-a 222 is uncertain reading; the meaning is “known, understood” (aññāta Pv iv.111); perhaps we should read āvikata or adhigata (so v.l. BB). Avagahati & ogahati;
pp. of avagacchati
to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (acc. & loc.) Vism 678 (vipassanāvīthiṃ); Sdhp 370, Sdhp 383.
ava + gāhati
(adj.) (-˚) covering Sdhp 314.
fr. oguṇṭheti
hindrance, impediment, used at DN-a i.95 as syn. for drought (dubuṭṭhikā).
Sk. avagraha
see apanga.
(adj.) low, only in combn. uccāvacā (pl.) high and low, see ucca. KvuA 38.
der. fr. ava after the analogy of ucca → ut
(nt.) “non-word”, i.e. the wrong word or expression Ja i.410.
a + vacana
(-˚) (n ■ adj.) (a) (adj.) living in or with, moving in DN i.206 (santika˚ one who stays near, a companion); fig. dealing or familiar with, at home in AN ii.189 (atakka˚); iv.314 (parisā˚); Ja i.60 (tāḷa˚ one conversant with music, a musician see tāḷa1); ii.95 (sangāma˚); Mil 44 (id. and yoga˚) ■ (b) (n.) sphere (of moving or activity), realm plane (of temporal existence); only as t.t in kāmāvacara rupāvacara arūpāvacara or the 3 realms of sense-desires form and non-form: kāma˚; DN i.34 (˚deva); Dhs 431 (as adj.); rūpa˚; Pp 37; arūpa˚; Pp 38; Pts i.83, Pts i.84, Pts i.101; Dhs A 387; Pv-a 138, Pv-a 163; to be omitted in Dhs 1268, Dhs 1278.
ava + car, also BSk. avacara in same sense, e.g. antaḥpurâvacarā the inmates of the harem Jtm 210
(adj.-n.) 1. only in cpd. kāmâvacarika as adj. to kāmâvacara, belonging to the sphere of sense experiences, Sdhp. 254.
2. Late form of ocaraka, spy, only in C. on Thag 315 ff. quoted in Brethren 189, n 3. Occurs in BSk (Divy 127).
fr. avacara
(nt.) being familiar with, dealing with, occupation Ja ii.95.
fr. avacarati 1
2nd pret. of vac, in prohib form mā evaṃ avacuttha do not speak thus Ja vi.72; Dhp-a iv.228.
(-˚) (adj.) perforated, only in redupl. (intensive) cpd. chiddāvacchidda perforated all over, nothing but holes Ja iii.491; Dhp-a i.122. 284 319. Cp. chidda-vicchidda.
ava + chidda
(-˚) (adj) cutting off, as nt. ˚ṃ adv. in phrase kabaḷâvacchedakaṃ after the manner of cutting off mouthfuls (of food) Vin ii.214 Vin iv.196; cp. āsāvacchedika whose hope or longing has been cut off or destroyed Vin i.259.
ava + cheda + ka
defeat Dhp-a ii.228 (v.l. for T. ajaya).
ava + jaya, cp. apajita
(adj.) low-born, of low or base birth, fig of low character (opp. abhijāta) Snp 664 (= buddhassa avajātaputta Snp-a 479); Iti 63; Mil 359.
ava + jāta; cp. B.Sk. avajāta in meaning misborn, miscarriage
1. to deny Vin ii.85; AN iii.164 = Pp 65.
2. (later) to despise Dhp-a iii.16; Pv-a 175 (grd ˚jānitabba)-Of short stem-form ñā are found the foll grd. avaññeyya Pv-a 175, and with o˚: grd. oñātabba Pv-a 195; pp. avañāta, besides avaññāta.
ava + jñā
to be diminished, to be lost, be undone Ja i.313 (jitaṃ a; v.l. avajījy˚); Dhp 179 (jitaṃ a = dujjitaṃ hoti Dhp-a iii.197).
ava + jīyati; Sk. avajiryate
(adj.) low, inferior, blamable bad, deprecable Dhp 318, Dhp 319; Dhs 1160. More fig. in neg. form anavajja blameless, faultless DN i.70 (= anindita DN-a i.183); AN ii.26 = Iti 102; Snp 47 (˚bhojin carrying on a blameless mode of livelihood, see Nd ii.39), 263 (= anindita agarahita Kp-a 140): Pts ii.116, Pts ii.170; Pp 30, Pp 41, Pp 58; Sdhp 436. Opp. sāvajja.
Sk. avadya, seemigly a + vadya, but in reality a der. fr. ava. According to Childers = Sk. avarjya from vraj, thus meaning “not to be shunned, not forbidden” This interpretn is justified by context of Dhp 318, Dhp 319. The P. commentator refers it to ava + vad (for *ava-vadya in sense of to blame, cp. apavadati
(f.) [abstr. to prec.), only neg. an˚; blamelessness, faultlessness Pp 25, Pp 41; Dhs 1349.
(adj.) not to be killed or destroyed, inviolable Snp 288; Ja v.69; Ja vi.132.
grd of a + vadhati, Sk. vadhya, vadh
(adj.) not (even) tottering, i.e. unfit for any motion (esp. walking), said of crippled feet Ja i.214 = Cp iii.910.
a + vañcana from vañc
(adj.) despised, despicable Pv iii.113 (= avaññeyya avajānitabba Pv-a 175).
to avaññā
(f.) only as neg. an˚; the fact of not being despised inferior or surpassed, egotism, pride, arrogance Iti 72 Vb 350, Vb 356; ˚kāma (adj.) wishing not to be surpassed unvilling to be second, wanting to be praised AN ii.240 AN iv.1 sq.
ava + ñatti = Sk. *avajñapti, fr. ava + jñā
(f.) contempt, disregard, disrespect Ja i.257 (˚ya).
Sk. avajñā, fr. ava + jñā
(adj.) despised, treated with contempt Pv-a 135 (an˚); Sdhp 88, Sdhp 90.
pp. of avajānāti
(= vaṭ˚) see Vin Texts ii.347.
(nt.) position, standing place Ja i.508; Pv-a 286.
Sk. avasthāna
(ad.) “standing down” = standing up, firm, fixed, settled, lasting Thag 1140 Usually neg. an˚; unsettled, unsteady; not lasting, changeable Dhp 38 (˚citta; cp. Dhp-a i.308 cittaṃ thāvaraṃ natthi); Pv-a 87 (= na sassata not lasting for ever).
Sk. avasthita, ava + thita
(f.) steadiness, only as neg. an˚; unsteadiness, fickleness Thag-a 259.
abstr. fr. prec.
(f.) (firm) position, posture, steadfastness SN v.228; Dhs 11, Dhs 570.
Sk. avasthiti
(f.) “non-growth”, decay Dhp-a iii.335; C on AN iii.76 (cp. apajaha).
a + vaḍḍhi
(adj.) without a stalk Ja v.155.
a + vaṇṭa
blame, reproach, fault DN i.1 (= dosā nindā DN-a i.37); Iti 67; Pp 48, Pp 59.
a + vaṇṇa
(adj.) indescribable Ja v.282.
grd. of a + vaṇṇeti
see vataṃsaka.
stretched over, covered, spread over with Vv 643 (-˚); Vv-a 276 (chādita).
ava + tata, pp. of tan
to abide, linger, stand still. DN i.251 = SN iv.322 = AN v.299 (tatra˚); SN i.25 (v.l otiṭṭhati); Th. 1, 21; Ja ii.62; Ja iv.208 (aor. avaṭṭhāsi). pp. avaṭṭhita (q.v.). Avatinna & otinna;
ava + tiṭṭhati
fallen into, affected with (-˚), as ava˚; rare late or poetical form of o˚; e.g. Ja v.98 (issâ˚). See otiṇṇa.
pp. of otarati
aimless (of cārikā, a bhikkhu’s wandering, going on tour) AN iii.171 (C. avavatthika).
der. uncertain
thrown away Ja v.302 (= chaḍḍita C.).
Sk. apāsta, apa + āsta, pp. of as2
(nt.) setting in array, deploying (of an army) Ja ii.104 (of a robber-band), 336.
fr. avattharati
to strew, cover over or up Ja i.74 (˚amāna ppr.), 255 (˚itvā ger.); iv.84; Dāvs i.38 ■ pp. otthaṭa Cp. pariy˚.
ava + tharati, stṛ;
(nt.) = avattharaṇa DN-a i.274. Avatthu (& ka);
(adj.) groundless, unfounded (fig) Vin ii.241; Ja i.440 (˚kaṃ vacanaṃ). For lit meaning see vatthu.
a + vatthu
(= odāta) Dāvs iii.14 (metri causa).
see apadāna.
(adj.) stingy, niggardly Snp 774 (= Nd i.36 which expls. as follows: avaṃ gacchanti ti pi avadāniyā; maccharino pi vuccanti avadāniyā; buddhānaṃ vacanaṃ n’âdiyantī ti avadāniyā. Snp-a 516 condenses this expln. into the foll. avangamanatāya maccharitāya buddhâdīnaṃ vacanaṃ anādiyanatāya ca avadāniyā).
fr. avadāna cutting off; ava + dā2 to cut
(cleansing): see vodāpana.
(to deal out) only BSk pary˚ Divy 202.
to have pity on, to feel sorry for Ja iv.178 (bhūtānaṃ nâvadāyissaṃ, gloss n’ânukampiyaṃ).
denom. fr. avadā in same meaning as anuddā, to dā1: see dayati2
to burst, split open Ja vi.183 (= bhijjati C. see also uddīyati,
Sk. avadīryati, ava + ḍr1, ḍrṇāti, see etym. under darī
(-˚) (adj.) in the idiom udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjati, to eat one’s fill MN i.102; Thag 935. Vism 33 has udarāvadehaka-bhojana, a heavy meal.
ava + deha + ka but more likely direct fr. ava + dih
(nt.) calling attention to, affirmation, emphasis; as t.t. used by C’s in explanation of evaṃ at DN-a i.27; and of kho at Pv-a 11, Pv-a 18.
Cp. Sk. avadhāraṇa, fr. ava + dhṛ;
3 sg. aor. of vadhati ■ At Dhp-a ii.73 avadhi = odhi.
see oṇata.
(-˚) (f.) stooping, bending, bowing down, humiliation Mil 387 (unnat’âvanati).
fr. avanamati
(f.) bed or course of a river; earth, ground Dāvs iv.5.
Vedic avani
is a doubtful compd. of kassati, the combd. ava + pa occurring only in this word. In all likelihood it is a distortion of vavakassati (vi + ava + kassati), supplementing the ordinary apakassati. See meaning & further discussion under apakāsati-Vin ii.204 (apakāsati + ; v.l. avapakassati Bdhgh. in expln. on p. 325 has apapakāsati which seems to imply (a)vavakassati); AN iii.145 sq. (avapakāsituṃ).
ava + pa + kāsati = kassati, fr. kṛṣ
see opatta.
(-˚) (adj.) coming for a drink, drinking Ja i.163.
cp. avapivati
to drink from Ja i.163.
ava + pā, cp. apapibati
(-˚) to understand AN iv.96 = Iti 83 (n’avabujjhati); AN iv.98 (id.) Ja i.378 Ja iii.387 (interchanging with anubujjhati at the latter pass.).
Cp. BSk. avabudhyate
perception, understanding, full knowledge Snp-a 509 (sacca˚) ■ Neg. an˚; not awakened to the truth Vv 826 (= ananubodha Vv-a 319).
ava + bodha
(-˚) to realise, perceive, pay attention to Ja iii.151 nâva˚).
cp. Sk. avabodhati
Only in cpd. gambhīrāvabhāso DN ii.55, looking deep. Same cpd. at AN ii.105 Pp 46 has obhāsa.
later form of obhāsa
(-˚) (adj.) shining, shedding light on, illuminating Sdhp 14.
fr. avabhāsa
(-˚) shining with, resplendent Sdhp 590.
late form of obhāsita
to eat, to eat up Ja iii.272 (inf. ˚bhottuṃ), 273.
ava + bhuñjati
(adj.) “come down”, despised, low, unworthy MN ii.210.
ava + bhūta, pp. of ava + bhū
(adj.) of bad omen, unlucky, infaustus (opp. abhimangala); nt. bad luck, ill omen Ja i.372, Ja i.402; Ja ii.197; Ja vi.10 Ja vi.424; Dhp-a iii.123; Pv-a 261. Cf. next.
ava + mangala, ava here in privative function
to slight, to disregard, despise Dhp-a i.170; Pv-a 37, Pv-a 175; Sdhp 271 ■ pp. Caus avamānita.
Sk. avamanyate
(adj.) of bad omen, nt. anything importune, unlucky Ja i.446. Avamana & omana;
fr. avamangala
disregard, disrespect, contempt Ja ii.386; Ja iii.423; Ja v.384. Cp. next.
fr. ava + man, think
(nt.) = avamāna Ja i.22.
fr. avamāna
to despise Ja v.246. - pp. avamānita Pv-a 36.
Caus. of avamaññati
only in neg. anavaya.
limb, member, constituent, part Vv-a 53 (sarīra˚ = gattā). 168 201, 276; Pv-a 211 (sarīra˚ = gattā), 251 (mūl˚ the fibres of the root). As t. t. g. at Snp-a 397. In the commentaries avayava is often used where aṅga would have been used in the older texts.
Dern uncertain. Cp. mediaeval Sk. avayava
(-˚) to neglect, fail, spurn Thag 167; Ja iv.428 (v.l. ˚rujjh˚).
ava + rajjhati of rādh, cp. Sk. avarādhyate
1. Doubtful reading at Vin iv.181, apparently meaning ʻin revolt, out of handʼ (of slaves)
2. [late form of oruddha] restrained Sdhp. 592.
fr. avarundhati
subdued, expelled, banished Ja vi.575; Dpvs i.21 (Np).
avruddha + ka
to expel, remove, banish Ja vi.505 (= nīharati C.), 515 See also avarundhati.
Sk. aparundhati; ava + ruddhati of rudh
to put under restraint to put into one’s harem as subsidiary wife.
ava + rundhati. Only referred to by Dhp. in his Cy (Thag-a 271) on oruddha
. Only in late verse. To hang down. Pv ii.118; 102. Ger. avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35 cp. olubbha.
= olambati
(-˚) besmeared; in cpd. ullittāvalitta “smeared up & down” i.e. plastered inside & outside AN i.101.
Sk. avalipta, pp. of ava-limpati
to scrape off Vin ii.221 (v.l. apa˚).
ava + lekhati, likh, Sk. avalikhati
(nt.) (a) scraping, scraping off Vin ii.141 (˚pidhara), 221 (˚kaṭṭha). (b) scratching in writing down Ja iv.402, (˚sattha a chisel for engraving letters).
fr. avalekhati
(nt.) v.l. for apalekhana.
(-˚) (nt.) smearing, daubing, plastering MN i.385 (pīta˚); Snp 194 (kāyo taca-maṃs’ âvalepano the body plastered with skin & flesh).;
fr. ava + lip
(adj.) powerless Sdhp 290. Avasata & Osata;
a + vasa
withdrawn, gone away; one who has left a community & gone over to another sect, a renegade Vin iv.216, Vin iv.217 (= titthāyatanaṃ saṃkata).
Sk. apasṛta, cp. also samavasṛta, pp. of ava + sṛ;
to go down, to go away (to) Snp 685 (v.l. BB. T. avaṃsari).
ava + sṛ;
(-˚) (nt.) stopping ceasing; end, finish, conclusion Ja i.87 (bhattakicc-âvasāne at the end of the meal); Pv-a 76 (id.).
for osāna
stopping, end, finish Thig 12 (= avasānaṃ niṭṭhānaṃ Thag-a 19). But the id. p. at Dhp 218 has anakkhāte.
fr. avaseti
(-˚) (adj.) pouring over (act. & med.), overflowing Ja i.400 (an˚).
fr. osiñcati
(sic & not osiṭṭha) left, remaining, over SN ii.133; Ja i.138; Ja v.339; Vv-a 66 pl. avasiṭṭhā all who are left, the others Pv-a 165 (janā).
pp. of avasissati, Sk. avaśiṣṭa
(adj.) remaining, left Ja iii.311.
fr. avasiṭṭha
(-˚) besprinkled, anointed, consecrated, only in phrase rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto of a properly consecrated king (see also khattiya) DN i.69; DN ii.227; DN iii.64; Pp 56; DN-a i.182 (T. muddhâvassita v.l. ˚abhisitta); etc ■ See also abhisitta.
pp. of osiñcati
(adj.-n.) not having control over oneself, DN ii.275.
a + vasin fr. vaś
to be left over to remain, in phrase yaṃ pamāṇa-kataṃ kammaṃ na taṃ tatrâvasissati DN i.251; AN v.299 = SN iv.322; Ja ii.61 (see expln. on p. 62). Also in the phrases taco ca nahārū ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu sarīre upasussatu maṃsa-lohitaṃ MN i.481; AN i.50; SN ii.28, and sarīrāni avasissanti SN ii.83. With the latter phrases cp. avasussati.
Sk. avaśiṣyate; Pass. of ava + śis; but expld. by Kern, Toev. s. v. as fut of avasīdati
metri causa for avasi, a + vasi, aor. of vas4 to stop, stay, rest Ja v.66 (mā avasī).
to dry up, to wither; in later quotations of the old kāmaṃ taco ca nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasussatu (upasussatu sarīre maṃsalohitaṃ Ja i.71, Ja i.110; Sdhp 46. It is a later spelling for the older avasissatu see Trenckner (MN i.569) ■ fut. avasucchati (= Sk. *˚śokṣyati, fut. of Intens.) Ja vi.550 (v.l. BB ˚sussati; C. avasucchissati).
Sk. *ava-suṣyati of śuṣ
[ava + sūra; ava here in function of *avaṃs see ava ii].sundown, sunset, acc. ˚ṃ as adv. at or with sundown Ja v.56 (anāvasūraṃ metrically).
remainder, remaining part; only in cpds. an˚; (adj.) without any remainder i.e. fully, completely MN i.220 = AN v.347 (˚dohin); AN i.20 sq., 88; Snp 146; Pp 17; Dhs 363 Dhs 553; Snp-a 417 (˚pharaṇa); Pv-a 71 (˚ato, adv. altogether not leaving anything out); & sāvasesa leaving something over, having something left AN i.20 sq., 88; Pv iii.55 (jīvita˚ having still a little life left).
Sk. avaśeṣa, fr. ava + śiṣ, cp. avasissati
(adj.) remaining, left Snp 694 (āyu avaseso); Ja iii.19; Vb 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā) Pv-a 19 (avasesā ca ñātakā the rest of the relatives), 21 (avasesā parisā), 201 (aṭṭhi-tacamatt’ âvasesa-sarīra with a body on which nothing but skin & bones were left), 206 (aṭṭhi-sanghātamatt;’ âvasesa-sarīra) ■ nt. (as pred.) ˚ṃ what is left Pv-a 52 (app’ avasesaṃ); Kp-a 245 (n’ atthi tesaṃ avasesaṃ).
see prec.
(adj.) being left, overflowing, additional, more Ja i.400 (an˚); Dpvs iv.45.
fr. avasesa2
(adj.) against one’s will, inevitable Ja i.19 (˚bhāvin); v.319 (˚gāmitā). Usually as nt. ˚ṃ adv inevitably (cp. BSk. avaśyaṃ Divy 347; Avs i.209 etc. Ja iii.271; DN-a i.263; Sdhp 293.
a + vaś
(adv.) inevitably Dpvs ix.13.
see avassa
to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release (ava) Ja iv.425; Ja v.487 (aor. avassaji read for avissaji).
ava + sṛj, perhaps ud + sṛj = Sk. utsṛjati, although the usual Vedic form is avasṛjati The form ossajati puzzled the BSk. writers in their sanskritisation apotsṛjati = apa + ut + sṛj Divy 203
(nt.) not bleating Ja iv.251.
a + vassana, Sk. vāsana of vāś to bleat
support, help, protection, refuge Ja i.211; ii. 197; iv.167; Mil 160; Dhp-a ii.267; Dhp-a iv.198; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 113.
Sk. *avāśraya for the usual apāśraya, see P. apassaya1
outflow, effect, only neg. anassava no further effect Vin ii.89; MN i.93; MN ii.246; AN iii.334 sp.
ava + sava, Sk. ˚srava fr. sru to flow
to lean against, to depend on, find shelter in (loc.) Ja ii.80 (aor. avassayiṃ = vāsaṃ kappesiṃ C.). pp. avassita.
ava + ā + śri, for the usual *apāśrayati; see apasseti
(nt.) straining, filtering (?) Ja ii.288.
fr. ava + Caus. of sru to flow
depending on, dealing with Ja v.375. See apassita.
for apassita, Sk. apaśrita
(adj.) 1. (lit.) flowing out or down, oozing, leaking Ja iv.20.
2. (fig.) (cp. anvāssava & āsava) filled with desire lustful (opp.; anavassuta, q.v.) Vin ii.236; SN iv.70, SN iv.184 (an˚); AN i.261, AN i.262 (an˚); ii.240; iv.128, 201; Snp 63 (an˚); Pp 27, Pp 36; Dpvs ii.5 (T. reads avassita ). Neg. anavassuta: 1. not leaking, without a leak Ja iv.20 (nāvā = udaka-pavesan’ âbhāvena a. C.).
2. free from leakage, i.e. from lust or moral intoxication Dhp 39 (˚citta) Snp 63 (see expld. in detail at Nd ii.40); Snp-a 116 (kilesa-anvāssava-virahita).
Sk. *avasruta, pp. of ava + sru, cp. avassava
taken away, stolen Mil 46.
pp. of avaharati
(-˚) taking away, removal; theft Pv-a 47 (sāṭaka˚), 92 (soka˚).
fr. avaharati in both meanings
to steal Ja i.384; Pv-a 47 (avahari vatthaṃ), 86 (id., = apānudi) ■ pp. avahaṭa (q.v.).
ava + hṛ;
to laugh at, deride, mock Ja v.111 (aññamaññaṃ); Pv-a 178 ■ aor. avahasi Ja iv.413.
ava + has
taking, acquiring, acquisition Vin v.129 (pañca avahārā, viz. theyya˚, pasayha˚, parikappa˚ paṭicchanna˚, kusa˚).
fr. avaharati
to be left behind, to stay behind Ja v.340.
for ohīyati
only in phrase dhammā avāgat-amhā, we are fallen from righteousness, Ja v.82 (C. explains apāgata).
ava + ā + gacchati
1. to revoke, undo, rescind, not fulfill, spoil, destroy Ja iii.339 (avākayirā = avakareyya chindeyya C.); v.495, 500; vi. 280.
2. to give back, restore Ja vi.577 (= deti C.).
either ava + ā + karoti or avaṃ + karoti, the latter more probable. It is not necessary to take it with Kern, Toev. s. v. as Sk. apākṛṇoti, apa + ā + kṛ;
wrong by Hardy Vv-a Index for avakirati (q.v.).
see apāṭuka.
(nt.) a key SN iii.132; AN iv.374.
same as apāpuraṇa
to open (a door) Ja i.63; Ja vi.373.
same as apāpurati
(adj.) unobstructed, unhindered, free. Of a woman, not married Ja v.213 (= apetâvaraṇā, which read for ˚bharaṇā, apariggahitā C.).
a + vāvaṭa
(adj.) not hesitating, not wavering, not doubting Ja iv.310 (= anosakkamāna C.; Kern takes it at this passage as a + vikalpamāna, see Toev. s.v., but unnecessarily) vi.176 (= nirāsanka C.); Ja vi.273.
a + vi + kampamāna, ppr. med. of kamp
(adj.) unmoved, not shaking, steady Vv 5022 (= acala Vv-a 215).
fr. a + vi + kamp
(adj.) not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed Ja vi.226 (acchejja + ).
a + vikopin; fr. vi + kup
calmness, balance, equanimity DN iii.213; AN i.83; Pts i.94; Pts ii.228; Dhs 11, Dhs 15, Dhs 570.
a + vikkhepa
not to examine Vv-a 336.
a + vicāreti
at Ja v.434 read aviviccaṃ i.e. not secretly, openly.
a + viviccaṃ
not knowing, ignorant Ḍh 38, 60; Iti 103.
a + vijānaṃ
(f.) ignorance; the main root of evil and of continual rebirth (see paṭicca-samuppāda, cp. SN ii.6, SN ii.9, SN ii.12; Snp p.141 & many other passages) See on term; Cpd. 83 n. 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail; vijjā. avijjā is termed an anusaya (D iii.254, 282; SN iv.205, SN iv.208 sq., 212); it is one of the āsavā (Vin iii.4; DN i.84; DN iii.216; Iti 49; Dhs 1100, Dhs 1109), of the oghā (D iii.230, 276; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162), of the nīvaraṇāni (S ii.23; AN i.223; Iti 8; Dhs 1162, Dhs 1486), of the saṃyojanāni (D iii.254; Dhs 1131, Dhs 1460). See for various characterisatons the foll. passages: Vin i.1; Vin iii.3; DN iii.212 DN iii.230, DN iii.234, DN iii.274; MN i.54, MN i.67, MN i.144; SN ii.4, SN ii.26, SN ii.263; SN iii.47 SN iii.162; SN iv.256; SN v.52; AN i.8, AN i.285; AN ii.132, AN ii.158, AN ii.247; AN iii.84 sq. 414; iv.228; Iti 34 (yā kāc’ imā duggatiyo asmiṃ loke paramhi ca avijjāmūlakā sabbā icchā-lobha-sammussayā) 57, 81; Snp 199, Snp 277, Snp 729 (jāti-maraṇa-saṃsāraṃ ye vajanti punappunaṃ… avijjāy’eva sā gati), 730, 1026, 1033 (avijjāya nivuto loko); Dhp 243; Nd ii.99; Pp 21; Dhs 390 Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162; Dhp-a iii.350; Dhp-a iv.161 (˚paligha).
Sk. avidyā; fr. a + vid
(adj.) senscless, without feeling or consciousness, unfeeling Dhp-a i.6 (saviññāṇaka + ).
a + viññāṇa + ka
(adj.) = aviddasu.
(adj.) free from thought DN iii.219, DN iii.274; Thig 75 (“where reasonings cease” trsl.); Dhs 161 (“free from the working of conception” trsl.), 504 etc.
a + vitakka
(adj.) not far, near; usually in loc. ˚e as adv. near Sn. 147.
a + vidūra
(adj.) ignorant, foolish Snp 762 (= bāla Snp-a 509); Dhp 268 = Nd ii.514 (= aviññū Dhp-a iii.395); Pv-a 18 (so read for avindasu). Avinasaka (ika)
a + viddasu
(adj.) not causing destruction AN iii.38 (˚ika); Ja v.116 (= anāsaka C.).
a + vināsa + ka
(adj.) imperishable Dpvs iv.16.
a + vināsana
(adj.) not knowing how to decide Ja v.367.
a + vinicchaya + ñū
(adj.) unable to distinguish or to know Ja v.121 (= atīrento C.).
ppr. of a + vinibbhujati
(ad.) not to be distinguished, indistinct Ja iii.428 (˚sadda).
a + vinibbhoga
absence of change, steadfastness, endurance DN i.18; DN iii.31, DN iii.33 (˚dhamma); DN-a i.113 (= jarā-vasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato).
a + viparināma
absence of regret or remorse AN iii.46.
a + vippaṭisāra
(adj.-n.) thoughtfulness, mindfulness, attention; adj. not neglectful, mindful, attentive eager Vin v.216; Snp 1142 (cp. Nd ii.101: anussatiyā bhāvento); DN-a i.104 (appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso) Dhp-a iv.26 (appamāda = satiyā avippavāsa).
a + vippavāsa
(adj.) not contrary, unobstructed, free, without difficulties Dhp 406; Snp 365, Snp 704, Snp 854.
a + viruddha
(f.) absence or cesssation of growth Snp 235; Dhp-a i.245 (˚dhamma).
a + virūḷhi
absence of obstruction, gentleness MN ii.105 = Thag 875.
a + virodha
(nt.) = avirodha Ja iii.320, Ja iii.412; Ja v.378.
absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony DN iii.245; Snp 896 (˚bhūma Snp-a 557 or ˚bhumma Nd i.308, expld. as Nibbāna).
a + vivāda
(adj.) not deceiving, not lying DN i.4; DN iii.170; Pp 57; DN-a i.73.
a + visaṃvada + ka
(f.) honesty, faithfulness, uprightness DN iii.190.
abstr. fr. a + visaṃvāda
to keep one’s word, to be honest, to be true Ja v.124.
a + visaṃ + Caus. of vad
(f.) state of being undisturbed harmony, balance Ja vi.224 (C. avisaggata). Cp. avyagga.
a + visaggatā, v.l. viy˚, thus as a + viyagga, Sk. vyagra = ākula
at Ja v.117 according to Kern, Toev. s.v. corrupted from avisaye, i.e. towards a wrong or unworthy object, C. differently: avisare = avisaritvā atikkamitva; v.l. adhisare.
a + visaya, loc
(adj.) imperturbed Dhs 15, Dhs 24, Dhs 287, Dhs 570. (˚mānasata).
a + visāhaṭa
at Ja vi.79 is with Kern, Toev. s. v. better to be read avassaji (see avassajati).
(adj.) not to be given away, inalienable (cp. avebhangiya) Vin i.305 (˚ika for ˚iya); ii.170 (five such objects in detail); v.216 (+ avebh˚) Ja vi.568.
grd. of a + vissajjati
(adj.) not to be trusted, untrustworthy Ja iii.474.
a + visāsana + iya, ika
the world of the Aviha’s, i.e. the 12th of the 16 Brahmā-words, cp. Kindred Sayings 48 n. 3; Cpd. 139 ■ SN i.35, SN i.60; AN i.279; Pp 17. Avihimsa (Avihesa)
of uncertain etym.
(f.) absence of cruelty, mercy, humanity, friendliness, love DN iii.213, DN iii.215, DN iii.240 (avihesā); Snp 292 (= sakaruṇabhāva Snp-a 318); Iti 82 (˚vitakka).
a + vihiṃsā
(adj.) not harassing, not hurting DN iii.166 (but cp. Snp-a 318 avihesaka in same context) Mil 219.
a + viheṭhaka
in general see vī˚.
1. avīciniraya, one of the (great) hells (see niraya ), described in vivid colours at many passages of the Pāli canon, e.g at Vin ii.203 = Iti 86; Nd i.18, Nd i.347, Nd i.405 = Nd ii.304 iiid; Pts i.83; Dhs 1281; Ja i.71, Ja i.96; Ja iii.182; Ja iv.159; Dhp-a i.148; Pv-a 52; Snp-a 290; Sdhp 37, Sdhp 194; Pgdp 5 sq. etc etc.
2. disintegration, decay Vism 449 (a. jarā nāma).
B.Sk. avīci a + vīci (?) no intermission, or no pleasure (?), unknown, but very likely popular etym.
(˚-) adj.) without deficiency, in ˚buddhi complete knowledge Ja vi.297.
a + vekalla
to look at, to consider, to see Iti 33 (v.l. ap˚); Dhp 28, Dhp 50, Ja iv.6; Dhp-a i.259 (= passati).
B.Sk. avīkṣate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati, to which the BSk. av˚ corresponds
to jump, hop lit. to throw (a foot) down Ja iv.251 (= pacchimapāde khipati C.).
avaṃ + khipati, avaṃ here in form ave corresp. to avaḥ, cp. pure for puraḥ etc.
(adv.) certainly, definitely, absolutely, perfectly, expld. by Bdhgh. as acala (on DN ii.217), or as paññāya ajjhogahetvā (on Snp 229); by Dhp. as apara-paccaya-bhāvena (on Pv iv.125) ■ Usually in phrase Buddhe Dhamme Saṅghe avecca-pasādo perfect faith in the B., the Dhamma & the Sangha, e.g. at MN i.47; SN ii.69; SN iv.271 sq., 304 v.344, 405; AN i.222; AN ii.56; AN iii.212, AN iii.332, AN iii.451; AN iv.406 AN v.183; further at Pts i.161 (˚pasanna); Snp 229 (yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati); Pv iv.125.
Usually taken as ava + ger. of i (*itya), cp. adhicca & abhisamecca, but by P. grammarians as a vecca. The form is not sufficiently clear semantically B.Sk. avetya, e.g. Jtm. 210, is a Sanskritisation of the P. form
(adj.) not to be hurt or disturbed, inviolable unshakable, imperturbable Snp 322 (˚dhamma = akampanasabhāva Snp-a 331).
a + vedha, grd. of vidh (vyadh) to pierce, Sk. avedhya
(adj.) not to be divided or distributed Vin i.305. Cp. next.
fr. a + vi + bhanga
(nt.) that which is not to be divided, an inalienable possession; 5 such objects enumd. at Vin ii.171, which are the same as under avissajjiya (q.v.); v.129.
= avebhangika
(adj.) peaceable, mild, friendly Snp 150 (= veravirahita Kp-a 248); Sdhp 338 ■ ˚ṃ (nt.) friendliness kindness DN i.247 (˚citta); Dhp 5 (= khantimetta Dhp-a i.51).
a + vera
(adj.-n.) = avera Dhp 197, Dhp 258.
only in neg. an˚; unfulfilled, undone Thag 101.
reading uncertain, cp. avyosita
(ad) not bewildered, not confused SN v.66. Cp. avisaggatā.
a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra
(f.) state or condition of not being manifest or visible, concealment, hiding Dhp-a ii.38.
abstr. fr. avyatta
(adj.) not miserable, fortunate Ja iii.466 (= akilamāna C.).
a + vyatha, cp. Sk. vyathā misfortune
absence of loss or change, safety DN i.72 (instr. ˚ena safely); Mil 393 (as abbaya T.).
a + vyaya
(abyābajjha) (nt.) (act.) kindness of heart; (pass.) freedom from suffering (Ep. of Nibbāna Vin i.183 (avyāpajjh˚âdhimutta); Iti 31 (abyābajjh’ārāma).
a + vyapajjha or bajjha, a confusion between the roots bādh or pad
(abyābajjha) adj.) free from oppression or injury not hurting, kind DN ii.242 (avera + ), 276; MN i.90; Iti 16 = Iti 52 (sukhaṃ); Mil 410 (avera + ).
either a + *vyāpadya or more likely a + *vyābādhya
(adj.) free from desire to injure, free from malice, friendly, benevolent DN iii.82,83 (˚citta) AN ii.220 (id.); Pp 68 (id.) ■ Same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 105, Divy 302.
a + vyāpanna
absence of desire to injure, freedom from malice DN iii.215, DN iii.229, DN iii.240; Iti 82 (all MSS have aby˚); Dhs 33, Dhs 36, Dhs 277, Dhs 313, Dhs 1056.
a + vyāpāda
(adj.) at random, without discrimination, careless Ja i.496 (= avyatta C.).
a + vyāyata of yam
(adj.) not liable to loss or change, imperishable Ja v.508 (= avigacchanaka C.).
fr. avyaya
(adj.) not occupied, i.e. careless, neglectful, not worrying Vin iii.136; Nd ii.72 (abyāvaṭa for appossukka Snp 43); Ja iii.65; Ja vi.188. Mil 177 (abyā˚).
a + vyāvaṭa = Sk vyāpṛta
(adj.) untouched, unimpaired DN i.182 (˚sukha = kilesa vyāseka-virahitattā avyāseka DN-a i.183); Pp 59.
a + vy + āseka
not to bring or procure Ja v.80.
a + vy + āharati
(adj.) not having reached perfection, imperfect Thag 784 (aby˚).
a + vyosita, Sk. vyavasita
calling, name; adj. (-˚) called, having the name of Snp 684 (isi˚) 686 (Asit˚), 689 (kanhasiri˚), 1133 (Sace˚, cp. Nd ii.624).
fr. avhayati; cp. Sk. āhvaya “betting”
1. to call upon, invoke, appeal to DN i.244 (avhayāma imper.) Pv-a 164.
2. to call, call up, summon MN i.17; Ja ii.10 Ja ii.252 (= pakkosati); v.220 (avhayesi); vi.18, 192, 273 (avhettha pret.); Vv 331 (avheti).
3. to give a name to call, to address Snp-a 487 (= āmanteti ālapati) ■ pp avhāta (q.v.).
Sk. āhvayati, ā + hū or hvā
called, summoned Ja iii.165 = (an˚ = anāhuta ayāctia) = Pv i.123, cp. Pv-a 64. The id p. at Thig 129 reads ayācita.
pp. of avhayati
(nt.) - 1. begging, calling, asking Snp 710; Vism 68 (˚ânabhinandanā).
2. addressing, naming Snp-a 605 (= nāma).
fr. avhayati, Sk. āhvāna in diff. meaning
(nt.) calling to, asking, invocation, imploration DN i.11 (Sir-avhāyane, v.l. avhayana expld. at DN-a i.97 with reading Sirivhāyana as “ehi Siri mayhaṃ sire patiṭṭhāhī ti evaṃ sire Siriyā avhayanaṃ”) 244, 245 (v.l. avhāna).
cp. Sk. āhvayana
(adj.) calling, giving a name; (m.) one who gives a name Ja i.401 = Ja iii.234.
fr. avhaya
(adj.) bad Ja iv.435 = Ja vi.235 (sataṃ vā asaṃ acc. sg. with v.l. santaṃ…, expld- by sappurisaṃ vā asappurisaṃ vā C.); v.448 (n. pl. f. asā expld. by asatiyo lāmikā C.; cp. p. 446 v.319).
for asaṃ = asanto, a + santo, ppr. of as in meaning “good”
(adj.) unrestricted, open Ja vi.306.
pp. of + saṃvuṇati, cp. saṃvuta
absence of closing or restraint, no control Dhs 1345.
a + saṃvāra
(adj.) deprived of co-residence, expelled from the community Vin iv.213, Vin iv.214.
a + saṃvāsa
not finding, not knowing Thag 717.
ppr. a + saṃvindati
(adj.) not restrained Dhs 1345, Dhs 1347.
pp. of a + saṃvuṇāti, cp. saṃvata
(adj.) not mixed or mixing, not associating, not given to society MN i.a i.4; SN i.63; Snp 628 = Dhp 404 (= dassana-savana-samullāpa paribhogakāya-saṃsaggānaṃ abhāvena Snp-a 468 = Dhp-a iv.173).
a + saṃsaṭṭha
(adj.) = asaṃhāriya (?) Vin iv.272.
(adj.) not to be destroyed or shattered Iti 77; Thag 372; Nd ii.110.
grd. of a + saṃharati
(adj.) immovable, unconquerable, irrefutable Vin ii.96; SN i.193; AN iv.141 AN v.71; Snp 1149 (as Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. Nd ii.110); Ja i.62; Ja iv.283 (˚citta unfaltering); Dpvs iv.12.
= asaṃhāriya of saṃ + hṛ;
(adj.) impossible Ja v.362 (˚rūpa).
a + sakka; Sk. aśakya
(adj.) impossible, unable to Ja i.55; Kp-a 185 and passim.
grd. of a + sakkoti
(adj.) not stony, free from gravel or stones, smooth Ja v.168; Dhp-a iii.401 (opp. sasakkhara).
a + sakkhara
(f.) not a true Buddhist nun Vin iv.214.
a + sakyadhītā
bad quality, vice Sdhp 382 (˚bhāvin, the a˚ belongs to the whole cpd.). Asankita & iya;
a + sagguṇa
(adj.) not hesitating, not afraid, not anxious, firm, bold Ja i.334 (˚iya) v.241; Sdhp 435, Sdhp 541.
a + sankita, pp. of śaṅk
(adj.) not to be shaken; immovable; steady, safe (Ep. of Nibbāna) Snp 1149 (cp. Nd ii.106); Thag 649.
a + sankuppa, grd. of kup
(adj.) [a + sankusaka, which is distorted from Sk. sankasuka splitting, crumbling, see Kern, Toev. p. 18 not contrary Ja vi.297 (˚vattin, C. appaṭilomavattin, cp. Ja trsln.vi.143).
(adj.) incalculable, innumerable, nt. an immense period AN ii.142; Mil 232 (cattāri a.), 289; Dhp-a i.5, Dhp-a i.83, Dhp-a i.104.
a + sankheyya, grd. of saṃ- khyā
(adj.) not sticking to anything, free from attachment, unattached Thig 396 (˚mānasa, = anāsattacitta Thag-a 259); Mil 343. Cp. next.
a + sanga
(adj.) not sticking or stuck, unimpeded, free, quick Ja v.409.
fr. asanga, a + sangita, or should we read asangika?
(adj.) not true, false Ja v.399.
a + sacca
(adj.) not clinging, not stuck, unattached Snp 38, Snp 71 (cp. Nd ii.107) Dhp 221 (nāmarūpasmiṃ a. = alaggamana Dhp-a iii.298).
ppr. med. of a + sajjati, sañj
2nd sg. pret. med. of sajjati to stick or cling to, to hesitate Ja i.376. See sajjati.
non-repetition Dhp 241 (cp. Dhp-a iii.347).
a + sajjhāya
(adj.) unconscious, ˚sattā unconscious beings Name of a class of Devas DN i.28 (cp. DN-a i.118 and BSk. asaṃjñika-sattvāḥ Divy 505).
a + saññā
(adj.) unrestrained, intemperate, lacking self-control Iti 43 = Iti 90; Snp 662 = Dhp 307.
a + saññata, pp. of saṃ + yam
(adj.) unconscious DN i.54 (˚gabbhā, cp. DN-a i.163); iii.111, 140, 263; Iti 87; Snp 874.
a + saññin
(adj.) without guile, not fraudulent, honest DN iii.47, DN iii.55, DN iii.237; Dhp-a i.69.
a + saṭha
(adj.) not composed, unsettled, fickle Iti 62, Iti 94.
a + saṇṭhita
not being, not being good, i.e. bad, not genuine (cp. asa); freq., e.g. Snp 94 Snp 131, Snp 881, Snp 950; Dhp 73, Dhp 77, Dhp 367; Iti 69 (asanto nirayaṃ nenti). See also asaddhamma.
a + sat, ppr. of asti
(& Asanāti q.v.) to eat; imper. asnātu Ja v.376; fut. asissāmi Thag 223; Snp 970 ■ ppr. med asamāna Ja v.59; Snp 239. ger. asitvā Mil 167; & asitvāna Ja iv.371 (an˚). pp. asita (q.v.). See also the spurious forms asmiye & añhati; (añhamāna Snp 240), also āsita1.
Sk. aśnāti, aś to partake of, to eat or drink cp. aṃśa share, part
(adv.) heedlessly, unintentionally Ja iii.486.
instr. of a + sati
(adj.) not clinging or attached, free from attachment Snp 1059; Dhp 419; Nd ii.107, Nd ii.108; Dhp-a iv.228.
pp. of a + sajjati
(n. adj.) absence of a sword or knife, without a knife, usually combd. with adaṇḍa in var. phrases see under daṇḍa. Also at Thag 757 (+ avaṇa).
a + sattha
(adj.) incomparable, not having its like Dhp-a ii.89; Dhp-a iii.120 (˚dāna).
a + sadisa
(adj.) not believing, without faith DN iii.252, DN iii.282.
a + saddha
evil condition, sin, esp. sexual intercourse; usually mentioned as a set of several sins, viz. as 3 at Iti 85; as 4 at AN ii.47; as 7 at DN iii.252, DN iii.282; as 8 at Vin ii.202.
a + sat + dhamma, cp. asat & BSk. asaddharma
(nt.) stone, rock Ja ii.91; Ja v.131.
Vedic aśan(m)
(nt.) eating, food; adj. eating Ja i.472 (ghatâsana Ep. of the fire; v.64 (id.) Usually in neg. form anasana fasting, famine, hunger Snp 311 (= khudā Snp-a 324); DN-a i.139. See also nirasana.
cp. Sk. aśana of aś, cp. asati
(nt.) the tree Pentaptera Tomentosa Ja i.40 (as Bodhi-tree of Gotama); ii.91; v.420; vi.530.
Sk. asana
(nt.) an arrow MN i.82 = SN i.62. Cp. asani.
cp. Sk. asanā, to asyati to hurl, throw
to eat, to consume (food) Ja i.472; v. 64; vi.14 (Esb. note: read asnāti; C. paribhuñjati).
see asati
(f.) orig. a sharp stone as hurling-weapon thence in mythol. Indra’s thunderbolt thunder-clap, lightning Ja i.71, Ja i.167; Ja ii.154; Ja iii.323; Mil 277; Vv-a 83.
-aggi the fire of thunder, i.e. lightning or fire caused by lightning Dhp-a iii.71. -pāta the falling of the thunderbolt thunderclap, lightning DN-a i.280 (or should we read asannipāta?); Pv-a 45. -vicakka same as ˚pāta (?) SN ii.229 (= lābha-sakkāra-silokassa adhivacana); DN iii.44, DN iii.47. Asantasam & anto;
Vedic aśani in same meaning; with Sk. aśri corner, caturaśra four cornered (see assa), to Lat. ācer pointed, sharp, Gr. α ̓́κρος pointed, Ags. egl sting, Ohg ekka corner, point. Connected with this is Sk. aśan (see asana1 ). Cp. also aṃsa & asama;2
(adj.) fearless, not afraid Snp 71, Snp 74; Ja iv.101; Ja vi.306; Nd ii.109.
ppr. of a + santasati
(adj.) fearless, not trembling, not afraid Snp 850; Dhp 351; Nd ii.109; Dhp-a iv.70.
a + santāsin, cp. asantāsaṃ
not contented with, greedy, insatiate, unhappy Snp 108. Cp. next.
pp. of a + santussati
(f.) dissatisfaction, discontentment DN iii.214 (so read for tutth˚ = AN i.95.
abstr. fr. asantuṭṭhita = asantuṭṭha
dissociation, separation from society, seclusion Snp 207.
a + santhava
(f.) absence of joints, disconnected state Ja vi.16.
a + sandhi + tā
(adj.) not bent or bending Sdhp 417.
a + sannata
(adj.-n.) (act.) without enmity, friendly (med.) having no enemy or foe, secure peaceful DN ii.276; Snp 150 (= vigata-paccatthika, mettavihārin Kp-a 249); Thig 512.
a + sapatta = Sk. sapatna
(f.) without co-wife or rival in marriage SN iv.249.
a + sapattī
a low, bad or unworthy man MN iii.37; Snp-a 479 (= anariya Snp 664).
a + sappurisa, cp. asat
(adj.) unspotted DN ii.80 = DN iii.245.
a + sabala
(adj.) not belonging to the assembly-room, not consistent with good manners; impolite, vile, low, of base character Ja iii.527 (mātugāma); Dhp 77 = Ja iii.367 = Thag 994; Mil 221; Dhp-a i.256; Thag-a 246 (akkhi). Cp. next ■ Note. Both sabbha and sabbhin occur only in the negative form.
a + sabbha, i.e. *sabhya cp. sabhā & in meaning court: courteous, hof: hoflich etc.
Ja i.494, more freq. in cpds. as asabbhi˚; e.g.
-kāraṇa a low or sinful act Mil 280. -rūpa low common Ja vi.386 (= asādhu-jātika, lāmaka), 387 (= asabbhijātika), 414 (= apaṇḍita-jātika). Cp. prec.
see usabha.
Sk. ṛṣabha
(adj.) unequal, incomparable Ja i.40 (+ appaṭipuggala); Sdhp 578 (+ atula). Esp. freq. in cpd ˚dhura lit. carrying more than an equal burden, of incomparable strength, very steadfast or resolute Snp 694 (= asama-viriya Snp-a 489); Ja i.193; Ja vi.259, Ja vi.330.
a + sama
(nt.) stone, rock DN-a i.270, DN-a i.271 (˚muṭṭhika having a hammer of stone; v.l. BB. ayamuṭṭhika) Snp-a 392 (instr. asmanā).
the diaeretic form of Sk. aśman hurling stone, of whieh the contracted form is amha (q.v.); connected with Lat. ocris “mons confragosus”; Gr. α ̓́κμων anvil Lith. akmů̃ stone, see also asana1 (Sk. aśan stone for throwing) and asani
(nt.) lack of concord, disharmony Ja vi.516 (so read for asāmaggiya).
abstr. fr. a + samagga
at Pp 27 is to be read assamaṇa (q.v.).
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) lack of consideration SN iii.261; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162.
fr. a + sam + apekkhati
(adj.) not composed, uncontrolled, not firm Iti 113 (opp. susamāhita); Dhp 110, Dhp 111; Pp 35.
a + samāhita
(adj.) unsuccessful, without result, fruitless; f. ˚ikā Ja iii.252.
a + samijjhana + ka
(f.) misfortune, lack of success Ja vi.584.
a + samiddhi
(nt.) not coming together, not meeting, separation Ja v.233.
a + samosaraṇa
(adj.) not to be shaken, not to be moved Snp 229 (= kampetuṃ vā cāletuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyo Kp-a 185).
grd. of a + sampakampeti
(nt.) lack of intelligence DN iii.213; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162, Dhs 1351.
a + sampajañña
unable to solve or explain Snp p.92.
ppr. of a + sampāyati
(adj.) unobstructed Snp 150 (= sambādha-virahita Kp-a 248); Ja i.80; Thag-a 293.
a + sambādha
(nt.) disagreement, dissension Ja vi.517 (= asamaggiya C.).
a + sammodiya
absence of confusion DN iii.221 = Dhs 1366.
a + sammosa cp. B.Sk. asammoṣadharman Ep. of the Buddha; Divy 49 etc
(adj.) not under one’s own control, i.e. dependent DN ii.262; Ja i.337.
a + sayaṃ + vasiṃ
(adj.) impossible, insuperable Ja vi.337. Usually in cpd. ˚sāhin conquering the unconquerable, doing the impossible, acchieving what has not been achieved before Thag 536; Pv ii.922 (Angīrasa); Iti 32.
a + sayha, grd. of sah = Sk. asahya
(nt ■ adj.) not enduring, non-endurance, inability Ja iii.20; Pv-a 17.
a + sahana
(adj.) one who is without friends; who is dependent on himself Mil 225.
a + sahāya
see āsa.
(adj.) [a + sāta, Sk. aśāta, Kern’s interpretation & etymology of asāta at; Toev. s.v. p. 90 is improbable disagreeable Vin i.78 (asātā vedanā, cp. asātā vedanā M Vastu I 5); Snp 867; Ja i.288, Ja i.410; Ja ii.105; Dhs 152, Dhs 1343.
(adj.) not general, not shared, uncommon, unique Vin iii.35 Kp viii.9; Ja i.58, Ja i.78; Mil 285; DN-a i.71; Sdhp 589, Sdhp 592.
a + sādhāraṇa cp. asādhāraṇa Divy 561
(adj.) one who does not cook (a meal) for himself (a practice of ascetics) DN-a i.270.
a + sāma + pāka
(n. adj.) that which is not substance, worthlessness; adj. worthless, vain, idle Snp 937 (= asāra nissāra sārâpagata Nd i.409); Dhp 11, Dhp 12 (cp. Dhp-a i.114 for interpretation).
a + sāra
(adj.) unessential, worthless, sapless, rotten Thag 260; Ja ii.163 = Dhp-a i.144.
a + sāraka
(adj.) not excited, cool AN i.148 = Iti 119 (passaddho kāyo a.; v.l. assāraddha).
a + sāraddha
(nt.) absence of violence, meekness, peaceableness DN iii.147 (asāhase rata fond of peace); acc as adv. asāhasaṃ without violence, not arbitrarily Ja iii.319 instr. asāhasena id. Ja vi.280; Dhp 257 (= amusāvādena Dhp-a iii.382).
a + sāhasa
a sword, a large knife DN i.77 (= DN-a i.222); MN ii.99; AN i.48 = (asinā sīsaṃ chindante); iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaṃ); Ja iv.118 (asi sunisito), 184; v.45 (here meaning “sickle”), 475 (asiñ ca me maññasi, probably faulty for either “āsiñ ca me or “āsiñcam me”); Vism 201 (ñāṇâsi the sword of knowledge); Pv-a 253 (asinā pahaṭa).
-camma sword & shield Vin ii.192; AN iii.93; Ja vi.449 -tharu the hilt of a sword Dhp-a iv.66. -nakha having nails like swords Pgdp 29. -patta having sword-like leaves with swords (knives) for leaves (of the sword-leaf-wood in Niraya, a late feature in the descriptions of Purgatory in Indian speculative Theology, see e.g. Mārk-aṇḍeyapurāṇa xii.24 sq.; Mhbhārata xii.321; Manu iv.90; xii. 75; Scherman, Visionsliteratur pp. 23 sq.) Ja vi.250 (˚niraya); Pv-a 221 (˚vana); Sdhp 194. -pāsa having swords for snares (a class of deities) Mil 191. -māla (-kamma) sword-garland (-torture) Ja iii.178 (+ sīsaṃ chindāpeti); Dāvs iii.35. Preferable to interpretation “sword-dirt”, see māla (mālā). -lakkhana “swordsign”, i.e. (fortune -telling from) marks or a sword DN i.9; Ja i.455. -loma having swords for hair SN ii.257 cp. Vin iii.106. -sūna slaughter-house (so also B.Sk asisūnā Divy 10, Divy 15; see further detail under “kāma similes) Vin ii.26; MN i.130, MN i.143; AN iii.97. -sūla a swordblade Thig 488 (expld. at Thag-a 287 by adhikuṭṭanatthena i.e. with reference to the executioner’s block, cp. also sattisūla).
Vedic asi, Av. aṃhū Lat. ensis
(adj.) (-˚) having a sword, with a sword in phrase ukkhitt’asika with drawn sword, MN i.377; Ja i.393.
asi + ka
having eaten, eating; (nt.) that which is eaten or enjoyed, food MN i.57; AN iii.30, AN iii.32 (˚pīta-khāyita etc.); Pv-a 25 (id.); Ja vi.555 ˚(āsana having enjoyed one’s food, satisfied). Cp. āsita1.
Sk. aśita, pp. of *asati, Sk. aśnāti
(adj.) not clinging to, unattached, independent, free (from wrong desires DN ii.261 (˚âtiga); MN i.386; Thag 38, Thag 1242 (see Mrs Rh. D. in Brethren 404 note 2); Ja ii.247; Iti 97; Snp 251, Snp 519, Snp 593, Snp 686 (Asitavhaya, called the Asita i.e. the Unattached; cp. Snp-a 487), 698 (id.), 717, 957, 1065 (cp. Nd ii.111 & nissaya).;
a + sita pp. of *śri, Sk. aśrita
(adj.) black-blue, black MN ii.180 (˚vyābhangī); AN iii.5 (id.); Thig 480 (= indanīla Thag-a 286); Ja iii.419 (˚âpangin black-eyed); v. 302 Dāvs i.45.
Sk. asita; Idg. *ās, cp. Lat. āreo to be dry, i.e. burnt up; Gr. α ̓́ζω to dry; orig. meaning burnt, hence of burnt, i.e. black colour (of ashes)
(m. nt.) a sickle Ja iii.129; Ja v.46.
fr. asi
(num.) 80 (on symbolical meaning & freq. application see; aṭṭha1 B 1 c, where also most of the ref’s In addition we mention the foll.:) Ja i.233 (˚hattha 80 hands, i.e. 80 cubits deep); iii.174 (˚sahassa-vāraṇa-parivuta); vi.20 (vassasahassāni); Mil 23 (asītiyā bhikkhusahassehi saddhiṃ); Vīsm 46 (satakoṭiyo) Dhp-a i.14, Dhp-a i.19 (mahātherā); ii.25 (˚koṭi-vibhava). Cp. ạ̄sītika.
Sk. aśīti
(pron.) pron. dẹmonstr “that”, that one, usually combd. with yo (yaṃ), e.g. asu yo so puriso MN i.366; yaṃ aduṃ khettaṃ SN iv.315. nom. sg. m. asu SN iv.195; Mil 242; f. asu Ja v.396 (asū metri causâ); nt. aduṃ MN i.364, MN i.483; AN i.250. Of oblique cases e.g. amunā (instr.) AN i.250. Cp. also next.
Sk. asau (m.), adas (nt.); base amu˚ in oblique cases & derivation, e.g. adv. amutra (q.v.)
(pron ■ adj.) such a one, this or that, a certain Vin iii.87; Ja i.148; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 30, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 109, Pv-a 122 (˚ṃ gatiṃ gata).
asn + ka
(adj.) not clean, impure, unclean Snp 75 (˚manussā, see Nd ii.112); Pp 27, Pp 36; Sdhp 378, Sdhp 603.
a + suci
(nt.) impurity, unclean living, defilement Snp 243 (˚missita = asucibhāva-missita Snp-a 286.
abstr. fr. asuci
(adj.) impure, unpleasant, bad, ugly, nasty; nt. ˚ṃ nastiness, impurity. Cp. on term and the Asubha-meditation, as well as on the 10 asubhas or offensive objects Dhs. trsl. 70 and Cpd. 121 n. 6 ■ SN iv.111 (asubhato manasikaroti); v.320; Snp 341; Sdhp 368. -subhāsubha pleasant unpleasant, good & bad Snp 633; Ja iii.243; Mil 136.
-ānupassin realising or intuiting the corruptness (of the body) Iti 80, Iti 81; Dhp-a i.76. -kathā talk about impurity Vin iii.68. -kammaṭṭhāna reflection on impurity Dhp-a iii.425. -nimitta sign of the unclean i.e. idea of impurity Vism 77. -bhāvanā contemplation of the impurity (of the body) Vin iii.68. -saññā idea of impurity DN iii.253, DN iii.283, DN iii.289, DN iii.291. -saññin having an idea of or realising the impurity (of the body) Iti 93.
a + subha
a fallen angel, a Titan pl. asurā the Titans, a class of mythological beings. Dhpāla at Pv-a 272 & the C. on Ja v.186 define them as kāḷakañjaka-bhedā asurā. The are classed with other similar inferior deities, e.g. with garuḷā, nāgā, yakkhā at Mil 117; with supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, yakkhā at DN-a i.51. The fight between Gods & Titans is also reflected in the oldest books of the Pāli Canon and occurs in identical description at the foll. passages under; the title of devāsura-saṅgāma: DN ii.285; SN i.222 (cp. 216 sq.), iv.201 sq., v.447; MN i.253; AN iv.432 ■ Rebirth as an Asura is considered as one of the four unhappy rebirths or evil fates after death (apāyā; viz. niraya, tiracchāna-yoni, petā or pettivisaya, asurā), e.g. at Iti 93; Ja v.186; Pv iv.111 see also apāya ■ Other passages in general: SN i.216 sq (fight of Devas & Asuras); iv.203; AN ii.91; AN iv.198 sq. 206; Snp 681; Nd i.89, Nd i.92, Nd i.448; Dhp-a i.264 (˚kaññā) Sdhp 366, Sdhp 436.
-inda Chief or king of the Titans. Several Asuras are accredited with the rôle of leaders, most commonly Vepacitti (SN i.222; SN iv.201 sq.) and Rāhu (A ii.17, 53; iii.243) Besides these we find Pahārāda (gloss Mahābhadda) at AN iv.197. -kāya the body or assembly of the asuras AN i.143; Ja v.186; Thag-a 285. -parivāra a retinue of Asuras AN ii.91 -rakkhasā Asuras and Rakkhasas (Rakṣasas) Snp 310 (defined by Bdhgh at Snp-a 323 as pabbata-pāda-nivāsino dānava-yakkha-saññitā).
Vedic asura in more comprehensive meaning; connected with Av. ahurō Lord, ahurō mazdā˚; perhaps to Av. anhuš & Lat. erus master
anger, malice, hatred abruptness, want of forbearance Pp 18 = Vb 357; Dhs 418, Dhs 1060, Dhs 1115, Dhs 1341 (an˚); Dhs-a 396.
probably a haplological contraction of asura-ropa. On various suggestions as to etym. & meaning see Morris’s discussion at; JP T S. 1893, 8 sq. The word is found as āsulopa in the Asoka inscriptions
not wishing to hear or listen, disobedient Ja v.121.
ppr. of a + susūsati, Desid. of śru, cp. Sk. śuśrūṣati
see anasūyaka.
(adj.)
1. not brave, not valiant, cowardly Snp 439.
2. uncouth, stupid Ja vi.292 (cp. Kern Toev. p. 48).
a + sura1
(& Asekkha) (adj. n.) not requiring to be trained, adept, perfect, m. one who is no longer a learner, an expert; very often meaning an Arahant (cp B.Sk. aśaikṣa occurring only in phrase śaikṣâśaikṣāh those in training & the adepts, e.g. Divy 261, Divy 337; Avs i.269 Avs i.335; Avs ii.144) Vin i.62 sq.; Vin iii.24; SN i.99; DN iii.218, DN iii.219; Iti 51 (asekho sīlakkhandho; v.l. asekkha); Pp 14 (= arahant); Dhs 584, Dhs 1017, Dhs 1401; Kv 303 sq.
-muni the perfectly Wise Dhp-a iii.321. -bala the power of an Arahant, enumd. in a set of 10 at Pts ii.173, cp. 176.
a + sekha
(adj.) unmixed, unadulterated, i.e. with full and unimpaired properties, delicious, sublime, lovely MN i.114; SN i.213 (a. ojava “that elixir that no infusion needs Mrs Rh. D.) = Thig 55 (expld. as anāsittakaṃ pakatiyā ’va mahārasaṃ at Thag-a 61) = Thig 196 (= anāsittakaṃ ojavantaṃ sabhāva-madhuraṃ Thag-a 168); SN v.321; AN iii.237 sq. Mil 405.
a + secana + ka, fr. sic to sprinkle, cp. B.Sk. asecanaka-darśana in same meaning e.g. Divy 23 Divy 226, Divy 334
(f.) not practising, abstinence from Snp 259 (= abhajanā apayirupāsanā Kp-a 124).
a + sevanā
(adj.) not leaving a remnant, without a remainder, all, entire, complete Snp 2 sq., 351, 355, 500 1037 (= sabba Nd ii.113). As ˚-(adv.) entirely, fully completely Snp p.141 (˚virāga-nirodha); Mil 212 (˚vacana inclusive statement).
a + sesa
(adj.) leaving nothing over, having nothing left, entire, whole all Ja iii.153.
pp. of a + Caus. of śiṣ, see seseti & sissati
(adj.) free from sorrow Snp 268 (= nissoka abbūḷha-soka-salla Kp-a 153); Dhp 412 Thig 512.
a + soka, cp. Sk. aśoka
the Asoka tree, Jonesia Asoka Ja v.188; Vv 354, 359 (˚rukkha); Vism 625 (˚ankura); Vv-a 173 (˚rukkha).
Sk. aśoka
(adj.) not being a drunkard, abstaining from drink Ja v.116 ■ f. asoṇḍī AN iii.38.
a + soṇḍa
(nt.) [abstr. a + sota + ta, having no ears, being earless Ja vi.16.
to eat; imper asnātu Ja v.376.
Sk. aśnāti to eat, to take food; the regular Pāli forms are asati (as base) and asanāti
(nt.) stone, rock; only in instr. asmanā Snp-a 362.
Vedic aśman; the usual P. forms are amha and asama2
to trust, to rely on Ja v.56 (Pot. asmase).
spurious form for the usual assasati = Sk. āśvasati
(I am) see atthi.
the pride that says “I am”, pride of self, egotism (same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 210, Divy 314; Vin i.3; DN iii.273; MN i.139, MN i.425; AN iii.85; Pts i.26 Kv 212; Dhp-a i.237. Cp. ahaṃ asmi.
asmi + māna
1 sg. ind. pres. med. of aś to eat, in sense of a fut. “I shall eat” Ja v.397, Ja v.405 (C. bhuñjissāmi). The form is to be expld. as denom. formn. fr ■ āśa food, = aṃsiyati and with metathesis asmiyati. See also añhati which would correspond either to *aṃśyati or aśnāti (see asati ).
shoulder; in cpd. assapuṭa shoulder-bag, knapsack i.e. a bag containing provisions instr. assupuṭena with provisions. Later exegesis has interpreted this as a bag full of ashes, and vv.ll. as well as Commentators take assa = bhasma ashes (thus also Morris JP T S. 1893, 10 without being able to give an etymology). The word was already misunderstood by Bdhgh. when he explained the Dīgha passage by bhasmapuṭena sīse chārikaṃ okiritvā ti attho DN-a i.267. After all it is the same as puṭaṃsa (see under aṃsa1 ) ■ DN i.98, cp. AN ii.242 (v.l. bhasma˚); DN-a i.267 (v.l. bhassa˚).
for aṃsa1, q.v. for etym.
corner, point; occurs only in cpd. caturassa four-cornered, quadrangular, regular (of symmetrical form, Vin ii.316; Ja iv.46, Ja iv.492; Pv ii.119 Perhaps also at Thig 229 (see under assa3). Occurs also in form caturaṃsa under catur).
for aṃsa2 = Sk. aśra point, corner, cp. Sk. aśri, Gr. α ̓́κρος & ὀςύς sharp, Lat. acer
a horse; often mentioned alongside of and combd. with hatthi (elephant) Vin iii.6 (pañcamattehi assa-satehi), 52 (enumd. under catuppadā, quadrupeds with hatthi oṭṭha goṇa gadrabha & pasuka); AN ii.207 AN v.271; Snp 769 (gavâssa). At Th ii.229 the commentary explains caturassa as ʻfour in handʼ; but the context shows that the more usual sense of caturassa (see assa2 was probably what the poet meant; Dhp 94, Dhp 143, Dhp 144 (bhadra, a good horse), 380 (id.); Vv 203 (+ assatarī) Vv-a 78; Dhp-a i.392 (hatthi-assâdayo); Sdhp 367 (duṭṭh˚).
-ājāniya [cp. BSk. aśvājāneya Divy 509, Divy 511] a thoroughbred horse, a blood horse AN i.77, AN i.244; AN ii.113 sq., 250 sq.; iii.248, 282 sq.; iv.188, 397; v.166, 323; Pv-a 216 See also ājāniya ■ āroha one who climbs on a horse, a rider on horseback, Name of an occupation “cavalry” DN i.51 (+ hatthâroha; expld. at DN-a i.156 by sabbe pi assācariyaassavejja-assabhaṇḍādayo). -kaṇṇa Name of a tree, Vatica Robusta, lit. “horse-ear” (cp. similarly Goth. aíhva-tundi the thornbush, lit. horse-tooth) Ja ii.161; Ja iv.209; Ja vi.528 -khaluṅka an inferior horse (“shaker”), opp. sadassa. AN i.287 = AN iv.397. -tthara a horse cover, a horse blanket Vin i.192; DN i.7 -damma a horse to be tamed, a fierce horse, a stallion AN ii.112; ˚sārathi a horse trainer AN ii.112, AN ii.114; AN v.323 sq.; Dhp-a iv.4. -potaka the young of a horse, a foal or colt Ja ii.288. -bandha a groom Ja ii.98; Ja v.449; Dhp-a i.392. -bhaṇḍa (for ˚bandha? or should we read ˚paṇḍaka?) a groom or horse-trainer, a trader in horses Vin i.85 (see on form of word Kern, Toev. p. 35) -bhaṇḍaka horse-trappings Ja ii.113. -maṇḍala circus Vism 308, cp. MN i.446. -maṇḍalika exercising-ground Vin iii.6. -medha Name of a sacrifice: the horse-sacrifice [Vedic aśvamedha as Np.] SN i.76 (v.l. sassa˚); Iti 21 (+ purisamedha); Snp 303. -yuddha a horse-fight DN i.7 -rūpaka a figure of a horse, a toy horse Dhp-a ii.69 (+ hatthi-rūpaka). -lakkhaṇa (earning fees by judging the marks on a horse DN i.9. -laṇḍa horse-manure, horsedung Dhp-a iv.156 (hatthi-laṇḍa + ). -vāṇija a horsedealer Vin iii.6. -sadassa a noble steed of the horse kind AN i.289 = AN iv.397 (in comparison with purisa˚).
Vedic aśva, cp. Av. aspō; Gr. ι ̔́ππος, dial. ι ̔́κκος; Lat. equus; Oir. ech; Gall. epo-; Cymr. ep, Goth. aíhva; Os ehu; Ags. eoh
is gen. dat. sg. of ayaṃ, this.
3. sg. Pot. of asmi (see atthi ).
(-˚) with a horse, having a horse; an’ without a horse Ja vi.515 (+ arathaka).
assa3 + ka
(adj.) not having one’s own, poor, destitute MN i.450; MN ii.68; AN iii.352; Pts i.126 (v.l. asaka).
a + saka; Sk. asvaka
a mule Dhp 322; Dhp-a i.213; Dhp-a iv.4 (= vaḷavāya gadrabhena jāta); Ja iv.464 (kambojake assatare sudante; imported from Cambodia); vi.342 ■ f. assatarī a she-mule Vin ii.188; SN i.154; SN ii.241; AN ii.73; Mil 166 ■ assatarī-ratha a chariot drawn by she-mules Vv 203, 208 (T. assatarī ratā = 438; Pv i.111 (= assatariyutta ratha Pv-a 56); Ja vi.355.
Vedic aśvatara, aśva + compar. suffix tara in function of “a kind of”, thus lit. a kind of horse, cp. Lat matertera a kind of mother. i.e. aunt
the holy fig-tree, Ficus, Religiosa the tree under which the Buddha attained enlightenment i.e. the Bo tree Vin iv.35; DN ii.4 (sammā-sambuddho assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho); SN v.96; Ja i.16 (v.75 in word-play with assattha2 of v.79).
Vedic aśvattha, expld. in K Z i.467 as aśva-ttha dial. for aśva-stha “standing place for horses, which etym is problematic; it is likely that the Sk. word is borrowed from a local dialect.
encouraged, comforted AN iv.184 (v.l. as gloss assāsaka) Pts i.131 (loka an˚; v.l. assaka); Ja i.16 (v.79 cp. assattha1) vi.309 (= laddhassasa C.), 566.
pp. of assasati; cp. BSk. āsvasta Avs i.210
(adj.) without faith, unbelieving, Snp 663; Pp 13, Pp 20; Dhs 1327; Dhp-a ii.187.
a + saddhā
(nt.) disbelief SN i.25; AN iii.421 AN v.113 sq., 146, 148 sq., 158, 161; Vb 371; DN-a i.235 Sdhp 80.
a + saddhiya, in form, but not in meaning a grd. of saddahati, for which usually saddheyya cp. Sk. aśradheyya incredible
a hermitage (of a brahmin ascetic esp. a jaṭila) Vin i.24 = Vin iv.108; Vin i.26, Vin i.246; Vin iii.147; Snp 979; Snp p.104, Snp p.111; Ja i.315 (˚pada) v.75 (id.) 321. vi.76 (˚pada). The word is not found anywhere in the Canon in the technical sense of the later Sanskrit law books where “the 4 āśramas” is used as a t. t. for the four stages in the life of a brahmin priest (not of a brahmin by birth). See Dial. i.211–217.
ā + śram
not a true Samaṇa Vin i.96; Snp 282; Pp 27 (so read for asamaṇa); Pp A 207 ■ f assamaṇī Vìn iv.214.
a + samaṇa
resting place, shelter, refuge, seat DN-a i.67 (puññ˚). Cp. BSk. rājāśraya Jtm 3156; aśraya also in meaning “body”: see Avs. i.175 & Index; ii.223.
ā + sayati, śri
(adj.) loyal DN i.137; Snp 22, Snp 23, Snp 32; Ja iv.98; Ja vi.49; Mil 254; an˚; inattentive, not docile Dhp-a i.7.
ā + sunāti, śru
to flow Ja ii.276 (= paggharati C.). Cp. also āsavati.
ā + sru
(f.) not listening to, inattention MN i.168.
abstr. fr. assavana
(adj.) not pleasant to hear Sdhp 82.
a + savanīya
1. to breathe, to breathe out, to exhale Ja i.163; Ja vi.305 (gloss assāsento passāsento susu ti saddaṃ karonto); Vism 272. Usually in combn. with passasati to inhale, i.e. to breathe in & out, DN ii.291 = MN i.56, cp MN i.425; Ja ii.53, cp. v.36.
2. to breathe freely or quietly, to feel relieved, to be comforted, to have courage SN iv.43; Ja iv.93 assasitvāna ger. = vissamitvā c.); vi.190 (assāsa imper., with mā soci); med. assase Ja iv.57 (C for asmase T.; expld. by vissase), 111 (˚itvā).
3. to enter by the breath, to bewitch, enchant, take possession Ja iv.495 (= assāsa-vātena upahanati āvisati C.) ■ Caus assāseti ■ pp. assattha2. See also assāsa-passāsa.
ā + śvas, on semantical inversion of ā & pa see under ā;1 3
taste, sweetness, enjoyment, satisfaction DN i.22 (vedanānaṃ samudaya atthangama assāda etc.); MN i.85; SN ii.84 sq. (˚ânupassin), 170 sq.; iii.27 sq (ko rūpassa assādo), 62, 102; iv.8 sq., 220; v.193, 203 sq.; AN i.50 (˚ânupassin), 258, 260; ii.10; iii.447 (˚diṭṭhi Ja i.508; Ja iv.113, Snp 448; Pts i.139 sq., (˚diṭṭhi), 157 cp. i.1017; Pv iv.62 (kām˚); Vb 368 (˚diṭṭhi); Ne 27 sq.; Mil 388; Vism 76 (paviveka-ras’); Sdhp 37, Sdhp 51 See also appassāda under appa.
ā + sādiyati, svad
(f.) sweetness, taste, enjoyment SN i.124; Snp 447 (= sādubhāva Snp-a 393).
cp. assāda
to taste SN ii.227 (lābha-sakkārasilokaṃ); Vism 73 (paviveka-sukha-rasaṃ); Dhp-a i.318.
Denom. fr. assāda
v.l. at Iti 111 for asāraddha.
(adj.) only in an˚; not enjoying or finding pleasure, not intoxicated Snp 853 (sātiyesu a. sāta-vatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhā-santhava-virahita Snp-a 549) See also āsava.
ā + sru
1. (lit.) breathing, esp. breathing out (so Vism 272), exhalation, opp. to passāsa inhalation, with which often combd. or contrasted; thus as cpd. assāsa-passāsa meaning breathing (in & out), sign of life, process of breathing, breath DN ii.157 = SN i.159 Thag 905; DN iii.266; MN i.243; SN i.106; SN iv.293; SN v.330 SN v.336; AN iv.409; AN v.135; Ja ii.146; Ja vi.82; Mil 31, Mil 85 Vism 116, Vism 197 ■ assāsa in contrast with passāsa at Pts i.95, Pts i.164 sq., 182 sq.
2. (fig.) breathing easily, freely or quietly, relief, comfort, consolation, confidence MN i.64; SN ii.50 (dhamma-vinaye); iv.254 (param-assāsa-ppatta); AN i.192; AN iii.297 sq. (dhamma-vinaye); iv.185; Ja vi.309 (see assattha2); Mil 354; Pv-a 104 (˚matta only a little breathing space); Sdhp 299 (param˚), 313.
Sk. āśvāsa, ā + śvas
(adj. n.) 1. (cp. assāsa 1) having breath, breathing, in an˚; not able to draw breath Vin iii.84; Vin iv.111.
2. (cp. assāsa2) (m. & nt.) that which gives comfort & relief, confidence, expectancy Ja i.84; vi. 150. Cp. next.
fr. assāsa
(adj.) only in neg. an˚; not able to afford comfort giving no comfort or security MN i.514; MN iii.30; Ja ii.298 (= aññaṃ assāsetuṃ asamatthaṭāya na assāsika). Cp. BSk anāśvāsika in ster. phrase anitya adhruva anāśvāsika vipariṇāmadharman Divy 207; Avs. 139, 144; whereas the corresp. Pāli equivalent runs anicca addhuva asassata (= appāyuka) vipariṇāma-dhamma thus inviting the conjecture that BSk. āśvāsika is somehow distorted out of P. asassata.
fr. assāsa in meaning of assāsa 2, cp. assāsaka 2
(adj.) reviving, cheering up, consoled, happy SN iv.43 (an˚).
Sk. āśvāsin
to console, soothe, calm, comfort, satisfy Ja vi.190, Ja vi.512; Dhp-a i.13.
Caus. of assasati
(adj.) dependent on, relying, supported by (acc.); abiding, living in or on DN ii.255 (tad˚); Vv 5016 (sīho va guhaṃ a.); Thag 149 (janaṃ ev’ assito jano); Sdhp 401.
Sk. aśrita, ā + pp. of śri
(adj.) without splendour, having lost its brightness, in assirī viya khāyati Ne 62 = Ud 79 (which latter has sassar’ iva, cp. C. on passage l. c.).
a + sirī
(nt.) DN i.115, DN i.141; Dhp 67; Pp 56; DN-a i.284; Pv-a 39. -mocana shedding of tears Pv-a 18.
Vedic aśru, Av. asrū, Lith aszarà, with etym. not definitely clear: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under lacrima a tear Vin i.87 (assūni pavatteti to shed tears); SN ii.282 (id.); Dhp 74; Thig 496 (cp. Thag-a 289); Kp-a 65; Dhp-a i.12 (˚puṇṇa-netta with eyes full of tears); ii.98; Pv-a 125. -dhārā a shower of tears Dhp-a iv.15 (pavatteti to shed) -mukha (adj.) with tearful face [cp. BSk. aśrumukha e.g. Jtm 3116
is 3rd pl. pot. of atthi.
(indecl.) expletive part. also used in emphatic sense of “surely, yes, indeed” Snp 231 (according to Fausböll but preferably with P. T. S. ed. as tayas su for tay’ assu, cp. Kp-a 188); Vv 324 (assa v.l. SS) = Vv-a 135 (assū ti nipāta-mattaṃ). Perhaps we ought to take this assu3 together with the foll. assu4 as a modification of ssu (see su2 ). Cp. āsu.
Sk. sma
part. for Sk. svid (and sma?) see under su2. According to this view Fausbölls reading ken’ assu at Snp 1032 is to be emended to kena ssu.
(nt.) a tear Vin ii.289; Snp 691; Pv iv.53.
assu1 + ka
(adj.) one who has not heard, ignorant MN i.1, MN i.8, MN i.135; Dhs 1003, Dhs 1217, cp. Dhs trsl.258.
a + sutavant
(indecl.) exclamation of surprise, consternation, pain etc “ch! alas! woe!”. Perhaps to be seen in cpd. ˚kāmā miserable pleasures lit. “woe to these pleasures!”) gloss at Thag-a 292 for T. kāmakāmā of Thig 506 (expld. by C. as “ahā ti lāmaka-pariyāyo”). See also ahaha.
cp. Sk. aha & P. aho; Germ. aha; Lat. ehem etc.
(-˚) & Aho (˚-) (nt.) a day. (1); ˚aha only in foll. cpds. & cases:; instr. ekâhena in one day Ja vi.366; loc. tadahe on that (same) day Pv-a 46; acc. katipâhaṃ (for) some or several days Ja i.152 etc (kattpâha); sattāhaṃ seven days, a week Vin i.1; DN ii.14; Ja iv.2, and freq.; anvahaṃ daily Dāvs iv.8 ■ The initial a of ahaṃ (acc.) is elided after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ’haṃ how many days? SN i.7 ekâha-dvī ’haṃ one or two days Ja i.292; dvīha-tī ’han two or three days Ja ii.103; Vv-a 45; ekâha-dvī ’h’ accayena after the lapse of one or two days Ja i.253 ■ A doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which only occurs in phrases pubbanho & sāyanha; (q.v.); an adj. der. fr. aha is ˚ahika: see pañcâhika (consisting of 5 days) ■ (2) aho˚; in cpd. ahoratta (m. & nt.) [cp BSk. ahorātraṃ Avs.; i.209] & ahoratti (f.) day & night occurring mostly in oblique cases and adverbially in; acc. ahorattaṃ: MN i.417 (˚ânusikkhin); Dhp 226 (id.; expld. by divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna Dhp-a iii.324); Thag 145 (ahorattā accayanti); Ja iv.108 (˚ānaṃ accaye); Pv ii.131 (˚ṃ); Mil 82 (ena) ■ ahorattiṃ Dhp 387; Ja vi.313 (v.l. BB for T. aho va rattiṃ).
Vedic ahan & ahas
(prom.) proName of 1st person “I”. nom. sg. ahaṃ SN iii.235; AN iv.53; Dhp 222, Dhp 320; Snp 172, Snp 192, Snp 685, Snp 989, Snp 1054, Snp 1143; Ja i.61; Ja ii.159 ■ In pregnant sense (my ego, myself, I as the one & only i.e. egotistically) in foll. phrases: yaṃ vadanti mama. na te ahaṃ SN i.116, SN i.123; ahaṃ asmi “I am” (cp. ahaṃkāra below) SN i.129; SN iii.46, SN iii.128 sq.; SN iv.203; AN ii.212 AN ii.215 sq.; Vism 13; ahaṃ pure ti “I am the first” Vv 8450 (= ahamahaṃkārā ti Vv-a 351) ■ gen. dat. mayhaṃ Snp 431, Snp 479; Ja i.279; Ja ii.160, mama SN i.115; Snp 22, Snp 23 Snp 341, Snp 997; Ja ii.159, & mamaṃ SN i.116; Snp 253 (= mama C.), 694, 982 ■ instr. mayā Snp 135, Snp 336, Snp 557, Snp 982; Ja i.222, Ja i.279 ■ acc. maṃ Snp 356, Snp 366, Snp 425, Snp 936; Ja ii.159; Ja iii.26, & mamaṃ Ja iii.55, Ja iii.394 ■ loc. mayi Snp 559; Ja iii.188. The enclitic form in the sg. is me, & functions in diff. cases, as gen. (Snp 983; Ja ii.159), acc. (Snp 982), instr. (Ja i.138, Ja i.222), & abl ■ Pl. nom.; mayaṃ (we) Snp 31, Snp 91, Snp 167, Snp 999; Ja ii.159; Ja vi.365, amhe Ja ii.129, & vayaṃ (q.v.) ■ gen. amhākaṃ Ja i.221; Ja ii.159 & asmākaṃ Snp p.106 ■ acc. amhe Ja i.222; Ja ii.415; asme Ja iii.359 ■ instr. amhehi Ja i.150; Ja ii.417 & asmābhi Thag-a 153 (Ap. 132) ■ loc. amhesu Ja i.222. The enclitic form for the pl. is no (for acc. dat & gen.) see under; vayaṃ.
-kāra selfishness, egotism, arrogance (see also mamaṃkāra) MN iii.18, MN iii.32; SN ii.253; SN iii.80, SN iii.136, SN iii.169 sq.; SN iv.41 SN iv.197, SN iv.202; AN i.132 sq.; AN iii.444; Ud 70; Ne 127, and freq. passim.
Vedic ahaṃ = Av. azəm; Gr. ἐγώ(ν); Lat. ego; Goth. ik, Ags. ic, Ohg. ih etc.
1. exclamation of woe Ja iii.450 (ahahā in metre).
2. (nt. Name of a certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), lit. oh woe! AN v.173 = Snp p.126.
onomat. after exclamation ahahā: see aha1
absence of exultancy, modesty Ja iii.466 (= an-ubbillāvitattaṃ C.).
a + hāsa, cp. Sk. ahāsa & aharṣa
3rd sg. aor. of harati (q.v.).
a snake Vin ii.109; DN i.77; SN iv.198; AN iii.306 sq.; AN iv.320; AN v.289; Nd i.484; Vism 345 (+ kukkura etc.); Vv-a 100; Pv-a 144.
-kuṇapa the carcase of a snake Vin iii.68 = MN i.73; AN iv.377. -gāha a snake catcher or trainer Ja vi.192 -guṇṭhika (? reading uncertain, we find as vv.ll. ˚guṇḍika, ˚guṇṭika & ˚kuṇḍika; the BSk. paraphrase is ˚tuṇḍika Divy 497. In view of this uncertainty we are unable to pronounce a safe etymology; it is in all probability a dialectical; may be Non-Aryan, word. See also under kuṇḍika & guṇṭhika & cp. Morris in; J.P.T.S. 1886, 153 a snake charmer Ja i.370 (˚guṇḍ˚); ii.267; iii.348 (˚guṇḍ˚) iv.456 (T. ˚guṇṭ; v.l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚) 308 (T. ˚kuṇḍ˚, v.l. SS ˚guṇṭh˚), 456 (T. ˚guṇṭ˚; v.l. BB ˚kuṇḍ); vi.171 (T. ˚guṇḍ˚; v.l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚); Mil 23, Mil 305. -chattaka (nt.) “a snake’s parasol”, a mushroom DN iii.87; Ja ii.95; Ud 81 (C. on viii.5, 1). -tuṇḍika = ˚guṇṭhika Vism 304 Vism 500. -peta a Peta in form of a snake Dhp-a ii.63. -mekhalā “snake-girdle”, i.e. outfit or appearance of a snake Dhp-a i.139. -vātaka (-roga) Name of a certain disease (“snakewind-sickness”) Vin i.78; Ja ii.79; Ja iv.200; Dhp-a i.169 Dhp-a i.187, Dhp-a i.231; Dhp-a iii.437. -vijjā “snake-craft”, i.e. fortune-telling or sorcery by means of snakes DN i.9 (= sappa-daṭṭhatikicchana-vijjā c’ eva sapp’ avhāyana-vijjā ea “the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)” DN-a i.93).
Vedic ahi, with Av. aži perhaps to Lat. anguis etc., see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v.
(adj.) not injuring others, harmless, humane, SN i.165; Thag 879; Dhp 225; Ja iv.447.
fr. ahiṃsā
(f.) not hurting, humanity, kindness DN iii.147; AN i.151; Dhp 261, Dhp 270; Ja iv.71; Mil 402.
a + hiṃsā
(adj.-n.) not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness DN iii.246; Dhp 163; Snp 665, Snp 692; Mil 199 (˚kāma). Ahirika & Ahirika;
a + hita
(adj.) shameless, unscrupulous DN iii.212, DN iii.252, DN iii.282; AN ii.219; Dhp 244; Snp 133 (˚īka); Iti 27 (˚īka); Pp 19 (also nt. unscrupulousness) Dhs 365; Ne 39, Ne 126; Dhp-a iii.352.
fr. a + hirī
see discussed under abhinindriya.
1st sg. pret. of hotī (q.v.) I was Vv 826 (= ahosiṃ Vv-a 321).
(nt.) a hoarse & loud laugh Ja iii.223 (= danta-vidaṃsaka-mahā-hasita C.).
onomat.
(indecl.) exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in cpd. ahevana a dense forest (lit. oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i.e. how big it is) Ja v.63 (uttamāhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is not beyond doubt. C. on p. 64 expls. as “ahevanaṃ vuccati vanasaṇḍo”).
= aho, cp. aha1
(indecl.) exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed well; I say! for sure! Vv-a 103 (aho ti acchariy’ atthena nipāto); Ja i.88 (aho acchariyaṃ aho abbhutaṃ), 140. Usually combd. with similar emphatic particles, e.g. aho vata Dhp-a ii.85; Pv-a 131 (= sādhu vata); aho vata re DN i.107; Pv ii.94 5. Cp. ahe.
Sk. aho, for etym. see aha1
(nt.) an act or thought whose kamma has no longer any potential force: Cpd. 145. At p. 45 ahosikakamma is said to be a kamma inhibited by a more powerful one. See Buddhaghosa in Vism. Chap. xix.
ā
(indecl.) a frequent prefix, used as well-defined simple base-prefix (with rootderivations), but not as modification (i.e. first part of a double prefix cpd. like sam-ā-dhi) except in one case ā-ni-saṃsa (which is doubtful & of diff. origin, viz. from comb;n. āsaṃsa-nisaṃsa, see below 3b). It denotes either touch (contact) or a personal (close) relation to the object (ā ti anussaraṇ’ atthe nipāto Pv-a 165), or the aim of the action expressed in the verb ■ (1.) As prep. c. abl only in Ja in meaning “up to, until, about, near” Ja vi.192 (ā sahassehi = yāva s. C.), prob. a late development As pref. in meaning “forth, out, to, towards, at, on” in foll. applications:-(a) aim in general or touch in particular (lit.), e.g. ākaḍḍhati pull to, along or up; ˚kāsa shining forth; ˚koṭeti knock at; ˚gacchati go towards ˚camati rinse over; ˚neti bring towards, ad-duce; ˚bhā shining forth; ˚bhujati bend in; ˚masati touch at; ˚yata stretched out; ˚rabhati at-tempt; ˚rohana a-scending; ˚laya hanging on; ˚loketi look at; ˚vattati ad-vert; ˚vahati bring to; ˚vāsa dwelling at; ˚sādeti touch; ˚sīdati sit by ˚hanati strike at ■ (b) in reflexive function: close relation to subject or person actively concerned, e.g. ādāti take on or up (to oneself); ˚dāsa looking at, mirror ˚dhāra support; ˚nandati rejoice; ˚nisaṃsa subjective gain ˚bādha being affected; ˚modita pleased; ˚rakkha guarding ˚rādhita satisfied; ˚rāma (personal) delight in; ˚lingati embrace (to oneself); ˚hāra taking to (oneself) ■ (c) in
transitive function: close relation to the object passively concerned, e.g. āghātana killing; ˚carati indulge in; ˚cikkhati point ont, explain; ˚jīva living on; ˚ṇāpeti give an order to somebody; ˚disati point out to some one; ˚bhindati cut; ˚manteti ad-dress; ˚yācati pray to; ˚roceti speak to; siñcati besprinkle; ˚sevati indulge in ■ (d) out of meaning (a) develops that of an intensive-frequentative prefix in sense of “all-round, completely, very much” e.g. ākiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚kula mixed up; ˚dhuta moved about; ˚rāva shouting out or very much; ˚luḷati move about; ˚hiṇḍati roam about.
2. Affinities. Closely related in meaning and often interchanging are the foll prep. (prefixes): anu (˚bhati), abhi (˚saṃsati), pa (˚tapati) paṭi (˚kankhati) in meaning 1 a-c; and vi (˚kirati ˚ghāta, ˚cameti, ˚lepa, ˚lopa), sam (˚tapati, ˚dassati) in meaning 1 d. See also 3b.
3. Combinations: (a) Intensifying combns. of other modifying prefixes with ā as base anu + ā (anvā-gacchati, ˚disati, ˚maddati, ˚rohati, ˚visati ˚sanna, ˚hata), paṭi + ā (paccā-janati, ˚ttharati, ˚dāti, ˚savati), pari + ā (pariyā-ñāta, ˚dāti, ˚pajjati, ˚harati), sam + ā (samā-disati, ˚dāna, ˚dhi, ˚pajjati, ˚rabhati) ■ (b) Contrast-combns. with other pref. in a double cpd. of noun, adj or verb (cp. above 2) in meaning of “up & down, in & out to & fro”; ā + ni: āvedhika-nibbedhika, āsaṃsa-nisaṃsa (contracted to ānisaṃsa), āsevita-nisevita; ā + pa: assasatipassasati (where both terms are semantically alike; in exegesis however they have been differentiated in a way which looks like a distortion of the original meaning viz. assasati is taken as “breathing out“, passasati as “breathing in“: see Vism 271), assāsa-passāsa, āmoditapamodita, āhuna-pāhuna, āhuneyya-pāhuneyya; ā + paccā ākoṭita-paccākoṭita; ā + pari: ākaḍḍhana-parikaḍḍhana āsankita-parisankita; ā + vi: ālokita-vilokita, āvāha-vivāha āveṭhana-viniveṭhana; a + sam: allāpa-sallāpa: ā + samā āciṇṇa-samāciṇṇa.
4. Before double consonants ā is shortened to a and words containing ā in this form are to be found under a˚, e.g. akkamaṇa, akkhitta, acchādeti aññāta, appoṭeti, allāpa, assāda.
Vedic ā, prep. with acc., loc., abl., meaning “to, towards”, & also “from”. Orig. an emphatic-deictic part. (Idg. *ē) = Gr. ̓ ̈η surely, really; Ohg ■ ā etc., increment of a (Idg. *e), as in Sk. a-sau; Gr. εκεϊ (cp. a3) see Brugmann, Kurze Vergl. Gr. 464, 465
guṇa or increment of a˚ in connection with such suffixes as-ya,-iya,-itta. So in āyasakya fr. ayasaka; āruppa from arūpa; ārogya fr. aroga; ālasiya fr. alasa; ādhipacca fr. adhipati; ābhidosika fr. abhidosa etc.
of various other origins (guṇa e.g. of ṛ or lengthening of ordinary root a˚), rare, as ālinda (for alinda), āsabha (fr. usabha).
infix in repetition-cpds. denoting accumulation or variety (by contrast with the opposite, cp. ā1 3b), constitutes a guṇa-or increment-form of neg. pref. a (see a2), as in foll.: phalāphala all sorts of fruit (lit. what is fruit not fruit) freq. in Jātakas, e.g. ; i.416; ii.160; iii.127 iv.220, 307, 449; v.313; vi.520; kāraṇākāraṇāni all sorts of duties Ja vi.333; Dhp-a i.385; khaṇḍākhaṇḍa pêle-mêle Ja i.114; Ja iii.256; gaṇḍāgaṇḍa a mass of boils Dhp-a iii.297; cirāciraṃ continually Vin iv.261; bhavābhava all kinds of existences Snp 801, cp. Nd i.109; Nd ii.664; Thag 784 (˚esu = mahant-âmahantesu bh. C., see Brethren 305); rūpârūpa the whole aggregate Thag-a 285; etc.
to wish for, think of, desire; intend, plan, design Vin ii.244 (˚amāna); DN i.78, DN i.176; SN i.46; Snp 569 (˚amāna); Snp p.102 (= icchati Snp-a 436); Dhp-a i.29; Snp-a 229; Vv-a 149; Pv-a 229.
ā + kāṅkṣ, cp. kaṅkhati
f. longing, wish; as adj. at Thag 1030.
fr. ā + kāṅkṣ
to pull along, pull to (oneself), drag or draw out, pull up Vin ii.325 (Bdhgh. for apakassati see under apakāsati); iv.219; Ja i.172, Ja i.192, Ja i.417; Mil 102, Mil 135; Thag-a 117 (˚eti); Vv-a 226; Pv-a 68. Pass. ākaḍḍhiyati Ja ii.122 (˚amāna-locana with eyes drawn away or attracted); Mil 102; Vism 163; Vv-a 207 (˚amāna-hadaya with torn heart) ■ pp. ākaḍḍhita.
ā + kaḍḍhati
(nt.) drawing away or to, pulling out, distraction Vv-a 212 (˚parikaḍḍhana pulling about) Dhs-a 363; Mil 154 (˚parikaḍḍhana), 352 ■ As f Vin iii.121.
fr. ākaḍḍhati
pulled out, dragged along; upset, overthrown Ja iii.256 (= akkhitta2).
pp. of akaḍḍheti
(?) a possible reading, for the dürakantana of the text at Thag 1123, for which we might read durākantana
1. attire, appearance, Vin i.44 (an˚) = ii.213; Ja i.505.
2. deportment Dhs 713 (ā˚ gamanādi-ākāro Dhs-a 321).
-sampanna, suitably attired, well dressed, AN iii.78; Ja iv.542; an˚ sampanna, ill dressed, Ja i.420.
cp. Sk. ākalpa ā + kappa
shaking, trembling Mil 154 (˚hadaya).
pp. of ākampeti, Caus. of ā + kamp
a mine, usually in cpd. ratan-ākara a mine of jewels Thag 1049; Ja ii.414; vi. 459; Dpvs i.18 ■ Cp. also Mil 356; Vv-a 13.
cp. Sk. ākara
to draw along, draw after, plough, cultivate Nd i.428.
ā + kassati
“the (way of) making”, i.e. (1) state, condition Ja i.237 (avasan˚ condition of inhabitability); ii.154 (patan˚ state of falling, labile equilibrium) cp. paṇṇ˚ ■ (2) property, quality, attribute DN i.76 (anāvila sabb˚-sampanna endowed with all good qualities, of a jewel); ii.157 (˚varûpeta); Ja ii.352 (sabb˚ paripuṇṇa altogether perfect in qualities) ■ (3) sign, appearance form, DN i.175; Ja i.266 (chātak˚ sign of hunger); Mil 24 (˚ena by the sign of… ); Vv-a 27 (therassa ā. form of the Th.); Pv-a 90, Pv-a 283 (rañño ā. the king’s person) Sdhp 363 ■ (4) way, mode, manner, sa-ākāra in all their modes DN i.13 = DN i.82 = DN iii.111; Ja i.266 (āgaman˚ the mode of his coming). Esp. in instr. sg. & pl. with; num. or pron. (in this way, in two ways etc.): chah’ākārehi in a sixfold manner Nd ii.680 (cp. kāraṇehi in same sense) Ne 73, Ne 74 (dvādasah’ākārehi); Vism 613 (navah’ākārehi indriyāni tikkhāni bhavanti); Pv-a 64 (yen’ākārena āgato ten’ākārena gato as he came so he went), 99 (id.). (5) reason, ground, account DN i.138, DN i.139; Ne 4, Ne 8 sq. 38; Dhp-a i.14; Kp-a 100 (in expln. of evaṃ). In this meaning freq. with dass (dasseti, dassana, nidassana etc. in commentary style “what is meant by”, the (statement of) reason why or of, notion, idea Pv-a 26 (dātabb˚dassana), 27 (thoman˚-dassana), 75 (kāruññ ˚ṃ dassesi) 121 (pucchan˚-nidassanaṃ what has been asked); Snp-a 135 (˚nidassana).
-parivitakka study of conditions, careful consideration examination of reasons SN ii.115; SN iv.138; AN ii.191 Nd ii.151.
a + karoti, kṛ;
(nt.) appearance; reason, manner (cp. ākāra4) Ja i.269 (ākārakena = kāraṇena C.).
ākāra + ka
(adj.) having a reason, reasonable, founded MN i.401 (saddhā).
fr. ākāra
air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept see Cpd. 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etym. of ākāsa (fr. ā + kassati of kṛṣ ) at Dhs-a 325 see Dhs trsl. 178. DN i.55 (˚ṃ indriyāni sankamanti the sense-faculties pass into space); iii.224, 253, 262, 265; SN iii.207; SN iv.218 SN v.49, SN v.264; Ja i.253; Ja ii.353; Ja iii.52, Ja iii.188; Ja iv.154; Ja vi.126; Snp 944, Snp 1065; Nd i.428; Pv ii.118; Snp-a 110, Snp-a 152; Pv-a 93; Sdhp 42, Sdhp 464. -ākāsena gacchati to go through the air Pv-a 75 (āgacch˚), 103, 105, 162; ˚ena carati id. Ja ii.103; ˚e gacchati id. Pv-a 65 (cando) ■ Formula “ananto ākāso” freq.; e.g. at DN i.183; AN ii.184; iv. 40, 410 sq.; v.345.
-anta “the end of the sky”, the sky, the air (on ˚anta see anta1 4) Ja vi.89. -ānañca (or ānañca ) the infinity ef space, in cpd. ˚āyatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the “space-infinity-plane”, the sphere of unbounded space. The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4 (or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing beyond the fourth jhāna viz. (1) ākās˚, (2) viññāṇ’ānañc-āyatana (3) ākiñcaññ˚ (4) n’eva saññānâsaññ˚, (5) nirodha, (6) phala ■ DN i.34 DN i.183; DN ii.70, DN ii.112, DN ii.156; DN iii.224, DN iii.262 sq.; MN i.41, MN i.159.; iii. 27, 44; SN v.119; Pts i.36; Dhs 205, Dhs 501, Dhs 579, Dhs 1418 Ne 26, Ne 39; Vism 326, Vism 340, Vism 453; DN-a i.120 (see Nd ii.under ākāsa; Dhs 265 sq.; Dhs trsl. 71). As classed with jhāna see also Nd ii.672 (sādhu-vihārin). -kasiṇa one of the kasiṇ’āyatanas (see under kasiṇa) DN iii.268; AN i.41. -gaṅgā Name of the celestial river Ja i.95; Ja iii.344. -gamana going through the air (as a trick of elephants) Mil 201. -cārika walking through the air Ja ii.103. -cārin = ˚cārika Vv-a 6 -ṭṭha living in the sky (of devatā) Bv i.29; Mil 181 Mil 285; Kp-a 120; Snp-a 476. -tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace Snp-a 87. -dhātu the element of space DN iii.247; MN i.423; MN iii.31; AN i.176; AN iii.34; Dhs 638.
Sk. ākāśa fr. ā + kāś, lit. shining forth, i.e. the illuminated space
(nt.?) a game, playing chess ʻin the airʼ (sans voir) Vin ii.10 = DN i.6 (= aṭṭhapada-dasapadesu viya ākāse yeva kiḷanaṃ DN-a i.85).
(adj.) being in or belonging to the air or sky Ja vi.124.
ākāsa + ka
to shine Ja vi.89.
fr. ākāsa1
(nt.) state of having nothing, absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical t. t.; cp. below ˚āyatana & see Dhs trsl.74) ■ Snp 976, Snp 1070, Snp 1115 (˚sambhava, cp. Nd ii.116) Thig 341 (= akiñcanabhāva Thag-a 240; trsl. “cherish no wordly wishes whatsoëer”); Nd ii.115, see ākāsa Mil 342.
-āyatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ākāsa˚ DN i.35, DN i.184; DN ii.156; DN iii.224, DN iii.253, DN iii.262 sq.; MN i.41, MN i.165 MN ii.254, MN ii.263; MN iii.28, MN iii.44, SN iv.217; AN i.268; AN iv.40, AN iv.401; Pts i.36; Ne 26, Ne 39; Vism 333. See also jhāna & vimokkha.;
abstr. fr. akiñcana
1. strewn over, beset with, crowded, full of, dense, rich in (˚-) Vin iii.130 (˚loma with dense hair); SN i.204 (˚kammanta “in motley tasks engaged”) iv.37 (gāmanto ā. bhikkhūhi etc.); AN iii.104 (˚vihāro) iv.4; v.15 (an˚ C. for appakiṇṇa); Snp 408 (˚varalakkhaṇa = vipula- varalakkh˚ Snp-a 383); Pv ii.124 (nānā-dijagaṇ = āyutta Pv-a 157); Pp 31; Pv-a 32 (= parikiṇṇa) Sdhp 595 ■ Freq. in idiomatic phrase describing a flourishing city “iddha phīta bahujana ākiṇṇa-manussa” e.g. DN i.211; DN ii.147 (˚yakkha for ˚manussa; full of yakkhas i.e. under their protection); AN iii.215; cp. Mil 2 (˚jana-manussa).
2. (uncertain whether to be taken as above 1 or as equal to avakiṇṇa fr. avakirati 2) dejected base, vile, ruthless SN i.205 = Ja iii.309 = Ja iii.539 = Snp-a 383 At K. S. 261, Mrs. Rh. D. translates “ruthless” & quotes C. as implying twofold exegesis of (a) impure, and (b hard, ruthless. It is interesting to notice that Bdhgh explains the same verse differently at Snp-a 383, viz. by; vipula˚; as above under Snp 408, & takes ākiṇṇaludda as vipulaludda, i.e. beset with cruelty, very or intensely cruel, thus referring it to ākiṇṇa 1.;
pp. of ākirati
to strew over, scatter, sprinkle, disperse, fill, heap Snp 665; Dhp 313; Pv ii.49 (dānaṃ vipulaṃ ākiri vippakirati Pv-a 92); Mil 175, Mil 238, Mil 323 (imper. ākirāhi) Snp 383 ■ pp. ākiṇṇa.
ā + kirati
(nt.) the fact or state of being filled or heaped with Mil 173 (sakataṃ dhaññassa ā).
ākirita + tta; abstr. fr. ākirita, pp. of ākirati Caus.
v.l. at Kp-a 66 for āgilāyati.
(or ˚ā ?) an iguana Ja vi.538 (C. godhā; gloss amatt’ākuccā).
etym. unknown, prob. non-Aryan
to be hoarse Mil 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati).
onomat. to sound-root *kur = *kor as in Lat. cornix, corvus etc. See gala note 2 B and cp. kukkuṭa kokila, khaṭa etc., all words expressing a rasping noise in the throat. The attempts at etym. by Trenckner (Mil p.425 as Denom. of ākula) & Morris (;J.P.T.S. 1886 154 as contr. Denom. of ankura “intumescence”, thus meaning “to swell”) are hardly correct
(adj.) entangled, confused upset, twisted, bewildered Ja i.123 (salākaggaṃ ˚ṃ karoti to upset or disturb); Vv 849 (andha˚); Pv-a 287 (an˚ clear). Often reduplicated as ākulākula thoroughly confused Mil 117, Mil 220; Pv-a 56; ākula-pākula Ud 5 (so read for akkula-pakkula); ākula-samākula Ja vi.270. On phrase tantākula- jātā gulā-guṇṭhika-jātā see guḷā.
ā + *kul of which Sk ■ P. kula, to Idg *qṷel to turn round, cp. also cakka & carati; lit. meaning “revolving quickly”, & so “confused”
(adj.) entangled DN ii.55 (tant˚ for the usual tantākula, as given under guḷā).
fr. ākula
(adj.) in an˚; not to be confounded or upset Pv-a 118.
grd. of ā + *kulāyati, Denom. of kula
(-puppha) at Kp-a 60 (milāta˚) read (according to Index p. 870) as milāta-bakula-puppha. Vism 260 (id. p. however reads ākulī-puppha “tangle-flower” (?), cp. Ud 5 gāthā 7 bakkula, which is preferably to be read as pākula.
(nt.) beating on, knocking MN i.385; Mil 63, Mil 306; Dhs-a 144.
fr. ākoṭeti
(adj.) beating, driving, inciting, urging Ja vi.253 (f. ākoṭanī of paññā, expld. by “nivāraṇapatoda-laṭṭhi viya paññā koṭinī hoti” p. 254).
= ākoṭana1
1. beaten, touched, knocked against Ja i.303; Mil 62 (of a gong).
2. pressed beaten down (tight), flattened, in phrase ākoṭita-paccākoṭita flattened & pressed all round (of the cīvara) SN ii.281; Dhp-a i.37.
pp. of ākoṭeti
1. to beat down, pound, stamp Ja i.264. 2. to beat, knock, thrash Vin ii.217; Ja ii.274; Pv-a 55 (aññamaññaṃ); Sdhp 159.
3. Esp. with ref. to knocking at the door, in phrases aggaḷaṃ ākoṭeti to beat on the bolt DN i.89; AN iv.359; AN v.65; DN-a i.252 (cp. aggaḷa) dvāraṃ ā. Ja v.217; Dhp-a ii.145; or simply ākoṭeti Vv 8117 (ākoṭayitvāna = appoṭetvā Vv-a 316).
4. (intrs. to knock against anything Ja i.239 ■ pp. ākoṭita (q.v.) Caus. ii. ākoṭapeti Ja iii.361.
a + koṭṭeti, Sk. kuṭṭayati; BSk. ākoṭayati e.g. Divy 117 dvāraṃ trir ā˚, Cowell “break” (?); Avs. Index p 222 s. v.
a mouse or rat Pgdp 10.
Vedic ākhu, fr. ā + khan, lit. the digger in, i.e. a mole; but given as rat or mouse by Halāyudha
to come to or towards, approach, go back, arive etc.
I. Forms (same arrangement as under gacchati): (1 √ gacch: pres. āgacchati DN i.161; Ja ii.153; Pv iv.151fut. āgacchissati Ja iii.53; aor. āgacchi Pv ii.133; Pv-a 64 ■ (2) √ gam: aor. āgamāsi Pv-a 81, āgamā DN i.108; Ja iii.128, and pl. āgamiṃsu Ja i.118; fut. āgamissati Vv-a 3; Pv-a 122; ger. āgamma (q.v.) & āgantvā Ja i.151; Mil 14; Caus. āgameti (q.v.) ■ (3) √ gā: aor. āgā Snp 841; Pv i.123 (= āgacchi Pv-a 64) ■ pp. āgata (q.v.).
II. Mcanings: (1) to come to, approach, arrive DN i.108; Pv i.113; ii.133; Mil 14; to return, to come back (cp āgata) Pv-a 81, Pv-a 122 ■ (2) to come into, to result, deserve (cp. āgama2) DN i.161 (gārayhaṃ ṭhānaṃ deserve blame come to be blamed); Pv iv.151 (get to, be a profit to upakappati Pv-a 241) ■ (3) to come by, to come out to (be understood as), to refer or be referred to, to be meant or understood (cp. āgata 3 & āgama 3) Ja i.118 (tīṇi piṭakāni āgamiṃsu); Snp-a 321; Vv-a 3. See also āgamma.
ā + gacchati, gam
(1) come, arrived Mil 18 (˚kāraṇa the reason of his coming); Vv-a 78 (˚ṭṭhāna); Pv-a 81 (kiṃ āgat’attha why have you come here) come by got attained (˚-) AN ii.110 = Pp 48 (˚visa); Mvu xiv.28 (˚phala = anāgānuphala) -āgat’āgatā (pl.) people coming & going, passers by, all comers Pv-a 39, Pv-a 78, Pv-a 129; Vv-a 190 (Ep. of sangha). -sv’āgata “wel-come”, greeted hailed; nt. welcome, hail Thig 337; Pv iv.315, opp durāgata not liked, unwelcome, AN ii.117, AN ii.143, AN ii.153; iii. 163; Thig 337 ■ (2) come down, handed down (by memory, said of texts) DN i.88; Dhp-a ii.35; Kp-a 229; Vv-a 30; āgatāgamo, one to whom the āgama, or the āgamas, have been handed down, Vin i.127, Vin i.337; Vin ii.8; Vin iv.158; AN ii.147; Mil 19, Mil 21 ■ (3) anāgata not come yet i.e. future; usually in combn. with atīta (past) & paccuppanna (present): see; atīta and anāgata.
pp. of āgacchati
(f.) coming, coming back, return SN iii.53; Ja ii.172. Usually opp. to gati going away. Used in special sense of rebirth and re-death in the course of saṃsāra Thus in āgati gati cuti upapatti DN i.162; AN iii.54 sq. 60 sq., 74; cp. also SN ii.67; Pv ii.922 (gatiṃ āgatiṃ vā).
ā + gati
(m.) & Āgadana (nt.) a word; talk, speech DN-a i.66 (= vacana).
ā + gad to speak
one who is coming or going to come AN i.63; AN ii.159; Iti 4, Iti 95 (nom. āgantā only one MS, all others āgantvā). an˚; AN i.64; AN ii.160.
N. ag. fr. āgacchati
(adj.)
1. occasional, incidental Ja vi.358.
2. an occasional arrival, a new comer, stranger Ja vi.529 (= āgantuka-jana C.); Thag-a 16.
Sk. āgantu
(adj.-n.)
1. coming, arriving, new comer, guest stranger, esp. a newly arrived bhikkhu; a visitor (opp gamika one who goes away) Vin i.132, Vin i.167; Vin ii.170; iii. 65, 181; iv.24, AN i.10; AN iii.41, AN iii.366; Ja vi.333; Ud 25; Dhp-a ii.54, Dhp-a ii.74; Vv-a 24; Pv-a 54.
2. adventitions incidental (= āgantu1) Mil 304 (of megha & roga).; 3. accessory, superimposed, added Vism 195.
-bhatta food given to a guest, meal for a visitor Vin i.292 (opp. gamika˚); ii.16.
āgantu + ka; cp. BSk. āgantuka in same meaning as P. viz. āgantukā bhikṣavaḥ Avs i.87 Avs i.286; Divy 50
1. coming, approach, result, DN i.53 (āgamanaṃ pavattatī ti DN-a i.160; cp. Sdhp 249 dukkh˚).
2. that which one goes by, resource, reference source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of(?) the Pātimokkha, Vin ii.95 = Vin ii.249, or of the Four Nikāyas, DN-a i.1, DN-a i.2 (dīgh˚). A def. at Vism 442 runs “antamaso opamma-vagga-mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇaṇaṃ”. See also āgata 2, for phrase āgat’āgama, handed down in the Canon, Vin loc. cit. Svāgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv iv.133 (sv˚ = suṭṭhu āgat’āgamo, Pv-a 230); Mil 215. BSk. in same use and meaning, e.g. Divy 17, Divy 333, āgamāni = the Four Nikāyas
3. rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Snp 834 (āgamā parivitakkaṃ), cp. Davs v.22 (takk˚, discipline of right thought) Sdhp 224 (āgamato, in obedience to). 4. meaning, understanding, Kp-a 107 (vaṇṇ˚).
5. repayment (of a debt) J. vi.245.
6. as gram. tt. “augment”, a consonant or syllable added or inserted Snp-a 23 (sa-kār’āgama).
fr. ā + gam
(nt.) oncoming, arrival, approach AN iii.172; DN-a i.160; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 81; Sdhp 224, Sdhp 356. an˚; not coming or returning Ja i.203, Ja i.264.
fr. āgacchati, Sk. same
to cause somebody or something to come to one, i.e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin ii.166, Vin ii.182, Vin ii.212; DN i.112, DN i.113; SN iv.291; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 55. (2) to wait for, to welcome Vin ii.128 (ppr. āgamayamāna); MN i.161 (id.) Ja i.69 (id. + kālaṃ).
caus of agacchati
(adv.). With reference to (c. acc.), owing to, relating to; by means of, thanks to In meaning nearly synonymous with ārabbha, sandhāya & paṭicca (see K. S. 318 s. v.) DN i.229; Iti 71; Ja i.50 Ja vi.424; Kp viii.14 (= nissāya Kp-a 229); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 21 etc.
orig. ger. of āgacchati, q.v. under i.2 for form & under; ii.3 for meaning. BSk. āgamya in meaning after the Pāli form, e.g. Divy 95, Divy 405 (with gen.); Av Ś i.85, 210 etc.; Mvu i.243, Mvu i.313
found only in neg. form anāgāmitā.
(adj. n.) returning, one who returns, esp. one who returns to another form of life in saṃsāra (cp. āgati), one who is liable to rebirth AN i.63; AN ii.159; Iti 95. See anāgāmin.
ā + gāmin
(-˚) see agāra. Agaraka & ika;
(adj.-n.) (-˚) belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control over the house, keeping, surveying, in cpds.; koṭṭh˚ possessor or keeper of a storehouse Vin i.209; bandhan˚ prison-keeper AN ii.207; bhaṇḍ˚; keeper of wares, treasurer Pv-a 2 (see also bhaṇḍ˚) ■ (2) being in the house, sharing (the house), companion SN iii.190 (paṃsv˚ playmate).
cp. BSk. āgārika Divy 275, & agārika
(adj.) (ā + gāḷha 1; cp. Sk. samāgāḍhaṃ] strong, hard, harsh, rough (of speech), usually in instr. as adv āgāḷhena roughly, harshly aN i.283, 295; Pp 32 (so to be read for agāḷhena, although Pp A 215 has a˚, but expls. by atigāḷhena vacanena); instr. f. āgāḷhāya Vin v 122 (ceteyya; Bdhgh. on p. 230 reads āgaḷāya and expls. by daḷhabhāvāya). See also Ne 77 (āgāḷhā paṭipadā a rough path), 95 (id.; v.l. agāḷhā).
to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin ii.200; DN iii.209; MN i.354; SN iv.184; Kp-a 66 (hadavaṃ ā.). Cp. āyamati.
ā + gilāyati; Sk. glāyati, cp. gilāna
(nt.) guilt, offence, SN i.123; AN iii.346; Snp 522 = Nd ii.337 (in expln. of nāga as āguṃ na karotī ti nāgo); Nd i.201. Note. A reconstructed āgasa is found at Sdhp 294 in cpd. akatāgasa not having committed sin.
-cārin one who does evil, DN ii.339; MN ii.88; MN iii.163; SN ii.100, SN ii.128; AN ii.240; Mil 110.
for Vedic āgas nt.
anger, ill-will hatred, malice DN i.3, DN i.31; DN iii.72 sq.; SN i.179; Ja i.113; Dhs 1060, Dhs 1231; Vb 167, Vb 362, Vb 389; Mil 136; Vism 306; DN-a i.52; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 178. -anāghāta freedom from ill will Vin ii.249; AN v.80.
-paṭivinaya repression of ill-will; the usual enumn. of ā-˚ paṭivinayā comprises nine, for which see D iii.262 289; Vin v.137; AN iv.408; besides this there are sets of five at AN iii.185 sq.; Snp-a 10, Snp-a 11, and one of ten at Vin v.138. -vatthu occasion of ill-will; closely connected with ˚paṭivinaya & like that enum;d. in sets of nine (Vin v.137; AN iv.408; Pts i.130; Ja iii.291, Ja iii.404; Ja v.149; Vb 389; Ne 23; Snp-a 12), and of ten (Vin v.138; AN v.150; Pts i.130; Vb 391).
Sk. āghāta only in lit. meaning of striking, killing, but cp. BSk. āghāta in meaning “hurtfulness” at Mvu i.79; Avs ii.129; cp. ghāta & ghāteti
(nt.)
1. slaying, striking, destroying, killing Thag 418, Thag 711; death DN i.31 (= maraṇa DN-a i.119). 2. shambles, slaughter-house Vin i.182 (gav˚); AN iv.138; Ja vi.113.
3. place of execution Vin iii.151; Ja i.326 Ja i.439; Ja iii.59; Mil 110; Dhp-a iv.52; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 5.
ā + ghāta(na), cp. āghata which has changed its meaning
only in phrase cittaṃ a. (with loc.) to incite one’s heart to hatred against, to obdurate one’s heart. Sdhp. 126 = SN i.151 = AN v.172.
Denom. fr. āghāta, in form = ā + ghāteti, but diff. in meaning
to take in water, to resorb, to rinse Ja iii.297; Mil 152, Mil 262 (+ dhamati) ■ Caus. I. ācamcti (a) to purge, rinse one’s mouth Vin ii.142; MN ii.112; AN iii.337; Pv iv.153 (ācamayitvā = mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā Pv-a 241); Mil 152 (˚ayamāna) ■ (b) to wash off, clean oneself after evacuation Vin ii.221 ■ Caus II. ācamāpeti to cause somebody to rinse himself Ja vi.8.
ā + cam
(nt.) rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth DN i.12 (= udakena mukhasiddhi-karaṇa DN-a i.98); (b) after evacuation Ja iii.486.
-kumbhī water-pitcher used for rinsing Vin i.49, Vin i.52 Vin ii.142, Vin ii.210, Vin ii.222. -pādukā slippers worn when rinsing Vin i.190; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.222. -sarāvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin ii.142, Vin ii.221.
ā + camana of cam
(f.) absorption, resorption Nd i.429 (on Snp 945, which both in T. and in Snp-a reads ājava expld. by taṇhā in Nidd.). Note. Index to Snp-a (Pj iii.has ācāma.
fr. ā + cam
heaping up, accumulation, collection, mass (opp. apacaya ). See on term Dhs trsl. 195 & Cpd. 251, 252 ■ SN ii.94 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); AN iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. apacaya); Dhs 642, Dhs 685; Vb 319, Vb 326, Vb 330; Vism 449; Dhp-a ii.25.
-gāmin making for piling up (of rebirth) AN v.243 AN v.276; Dhs 584, Dhs 1013, Dhs 1397; Kv 357.
ā + caya
1. to practice, perform, indulge in Vin i.56; Vin ii.118; Snp 327 (ācare dhamma-sandosa-vādaṃ) 401; Mil 171, Mil 257 (pāpaṃ). Cp. pp. ācarita in BSk e.g. Av. SN i.124, SN i.153, SN i.213 in same meaning ■ pp āciṇṇa.
2. to step upon, pass through Ja v.153.
ā + aarati
(adj.-n.) treaching, f. ācarinī a female teacher Vin iv.227 (in contrast to gaṇa & in same sense as ācariya m. at Vin iv.130), 317 (id.).
fr. ā + car
a teacher (almost syn. with upajjhāya ) Vin i.60, Vin i.61, Vin i.119 (˚upajjhāya); ii.231; iv.130 (gaṇo vā ācariyo a meeting of the bhikkhus or a single teacher cp. f. ācarinī); DN i.103, DN i.116 (gaṇ˚) 238 (sattamâcariyamahāyuga seventh age of great teachers); iii.189 sq.; MN iii.115; SN i.68 (gaṇ˚), 177; iv.176 (yogg˚); AN i.132 (pubb˚); Snp 595; Nd i.350 (upajjhāya vā āc˚); Ja ii.100 Ja ii.411; Ja iv.91; Ja v.501; Pv iv.323, 351 (= ācāra-samācāra-sikkhāpaka Pv-a 252); Mil 201, Mil 262 (master goldsmith?) Vism 99 sq.; Kp-a 12, Kp-a 155; Snp-a 422; Vv-a 138. For contracted form of ācariya see ācera.
-kula the clan of the teacher AN ii.112. -dhana a teacher’s fee SN i.177; AN v.347. -pācariya teacher upon teacher, lit. “teacher & teacher’s teacher” (see ā1 3b DN i.94, DN i.114, DN i.115, DN i.238; SN iv.306, SN iv.308; DN-a i.286; Snp-a 452 (= ācariyo c’eva ācariya-ācariyo ca). -bhariyā the teacher’s fee Ja v.457; Ja vi.178; Dhp-a i.253. -muṭṭhi “the teacher’s fist” i.e. close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back, DN ii.100; SN v.153; Ja ii.221, Ja ii.250; Mil 144; Snp-a 180, Snp-a 368. -vaṃsa the line of the teachers Mil 148 -vatta serving the teacher, service to the t. Dhp-a i.92 -vāda traditional teaching; later as heterodox teaching sectarian teaching (opp. theravāda orthodox doctrine) Mil 148; Dpvs v.30; Mhbv 96.
fr. ā + car
a teacher Vin i.249; Vin iii.25, Vin iii.41; DN i.88 DN i.119, DN i.187; DN ii.112; MN i.514; MN ii.32; SN v.261; AN ii.170; iv. 310. See also sācariyaka.
ācariya + ka, diff. from Sk. ācariyaka nt. art of teaching
the scum or foam of boiling rice DN i.166; MN i.78; AN i.295; Ja ii.289; Pp 55; Vv-a 99 sq. Dhp-a iii.325 (˚kuṇḍaka).
Sk. ācāma
at MN ii.112 in imper. ācāmehi be pleased or be thanked(?) perhaps the reading is incorrect.
for ācameti? cp. Sk. ācāmayati, Caus. of ā + cam
way of behaving, conduct, practice, esp. right conduct, good manners; adj. (-˚) practising, indulging in, or of such & such a conduct ■ Snp 280 (pāpa˚); Ja i.106 (vipassana˚); ii.280 (˚ariya); vi.52 (ariya˚) Snp-a 157; Pv-a 12 (sīla˚), 36, 67, 252; Sdhp 441. -an˚ bad behaviour Vin ii.118 (˚ṃ ācarati indulge in bad habits) Dhp-a ii.201 (˚kiriyā). Cp. sam˚.
-kusala versed in good manners Dhp 376 (cp. Dhp-a iv.111). -gocara pasturing in good conduct; i.e. practice of right behaviour DN i.63 = Iti 118; MN i.33; SN v.187; AN i.63 sq.; AN ii.14, AN ii.39; AN iii.113, AN iii.155, AN iii.262; AN iv.140, AN iv.172 AN iv.352; AN v.71 sq., 89, 133, 198; Vb 244, Vb 246 (cp. Mil 368, Mil 370, quot. Vin iii.185); Vism i.8. -vipatti failure of morality, a slip in good conduct Vin i.171.
ā + car
(adj. n.) of good conduct, one who behaves well AN i.211 (anācārī viratā l. 4 fr. bottom is better read as ācārī virato, in accordance with v.l.).
fr. ācāra
(adj. n.) one who tells or shows Dhp-a i.71.
ā + cikkha + ka of cikkhati
to tell, relate, show, describe, explain DN i.110; AN ii.189 (atthaṃ ā to interpret); Pp 59; Dhp-a i.14; Snp-a 155; Pv-a 121, Pv-a 164 (describe) ■ imper. pres. ācikkha Snp 1097 (= brūhi Nd ii.119 & 455); Pv i.109; ii.81; and ācikkhāhi Dhp-a ii.27. aor. ācikkhi Pv-a 6, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 83 ■ ācikkhati often occurs in stock phrase ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati etc., e.g. Nd i.271; Nd ii.465; Vism 163 ■ attānaṃ ā. to disclose one’s identity Pv-a 89, Pv-a 100 ■ pp. ācikkhita (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. ācikkhāpeti to cause some body to tell Dhp-a ii.27.
Freq. of ā + khyā, i.e. akkhāti
(adj.-n..) telling, announcing Ja iii.444; Pv-a 121.
ā + cikkhana of cikkhati
shown, described, told Pv-a 154 (˚magga), 203 (an˚ = anakkhāta).
pp. of acikkhati
one who tells or shows Dhp-a ii.107 (for pavattar).
n. ag. fr. ācikkhati
accumulated; practised, performed Dhp 121 (pāpaṃ = pāpaṃ āciṇanto karonto Dhp-a iii.16). It may also be spelt ācina.
pp. of ācināti? or is it distorted from āciṇṇa?
practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in MN i.372 (kamma, cp. Mil 226 and the expln. of āciṇṇaka kamma as “chronic karma at Cpd. 144); SN iv.419; AN v.74 sq.; Ja i.81; DN-a i.91 (for aviciṇṇa at DN i.8), 275; Vism 269; Dhp-a i.37 (˚samāciṇṇa thoroughly fulfilled); Vv-a 108; Pv-a 54; Sdhp 90.
-kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary practice (?) Vin i.79; Vin ii.301; Dpvs iv.47; cp. v.18.
ā + ciṇṇa, pp. of ācarati
accumulated, collected, covered, furnished or endowed with Ja vi.250 (= nicita); Vv 411 Dhs-a 310. See also āciṇa.
pp. of ācināti
to heap up, accumulate SN iii.89 (v.l. ācinati); iv.73 (ppr. ācinato dukkhaṃ); Dhs-a 44 ■ pp ācita & āciṇa; (ācina) ■ Pass. ācīyati (q.v.).
ā + cināti
(& Āceyyati) to be heaped up, to increase, to grow; ppr. āceyyamāna Ja v.6 (= ācīyanto vaḍḍhanto C.).
Pass. of ācināti, cp. cīyati
is the contracted form of ācariya; only found in the Jātakas, e.g. Ja iv.248; Ja vi.563.
in kañcanācela-bhūsita “adorned with golden clothes” Pv ii.127 stands for cela˚.
is the contracted form of ājāniya.
see ācamā.
(adj.) understandable, only in cpd. durājāna hard to understand SN iv.127; Snp 762; Ja i.295 Ja i.300.
ā + jāna from jñā
(nt.) learning, knowing, understanding; knowledge Ja i.181 (˚sabhāva of the character of knowing, fit to learn); Pv-a 225.
ā + jānana, cp. Sk. ajñāna
to understand, to know, to learn DN i.189; Snp 1064 (˚amāna = vijānamāna Nd ii.120). As aññāti at Vism 200 ■ pp. aññāta. Cp. also āṇāpeti. Ajaniya (ajaniya)
ā + jānāti
(adj. n.) of good race or breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse (cp. assājāniya under assa3). (a) ājāniya (the more common & younger Pāli form): Snp 462, Snp 528, Snp 532; Ja i.178, Ja i.194; Dpvs iv.26; Dhp-a i.402; Dhp-a iii.49; Dhp-a iv.4; Vv-a 78; Pv-a 216 ■ (b) ājānīya: MN i.445; AN v.323; Dhp 322 = Nd ii.475 ■ (c ājañña = (mostly in poetry): Snp 300 = Snp 304; Ja i.181; Pv iv.154; purisājañña “a steed of man”, i.e. a man of noble race) SN iii.91 = Thag 1084 = Snp 544 = Vv-a 9; AN v.325. -anājāniya of inferior birth MN i.367.
-susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal MN i.445 (˚ûpamo dhamma-pariyāyo).
cp. BSk. ājāneya & Sk. ājāti birth, good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from ā + ; jan (to be born, i.e. well-born) it is by Bdhgh. connected with ā + jñā (to learn, i.e. to be trained). See for these popular etym. e.g. Ja i.181: sārathissa cittarucitaṃ kāraṇaṃ ājānana-sabhāvo ājañño, and Dhp-a iv.4: yaṃ assadamma-sārathi kāraṇaṃ kāreti tassa khippaṃ jānana samatthā ājāniyā ■ The contracted form of the word is ājañña
(f.) good breed Pv-a 214.
abstr. fr. ājāniya
a courtyard Mvu 35, Mvu 3.
= ajira with lengthened initial a
livelihood, mode of living, living, subsistence, DN i.54; AN iii.124 (parisuddha˚); Snp 407 (˚ṃ = parisodhayi = micchājīvaṃ hitvā sammājīvaṃ eva pavattayī Snp-a 382), 617; Pp 51; Vb 107, Vb 235; Mil 229 (bhinna˚); Vism 306 (id.); Dhs-a 390; Sdhp 342, Sdhp 375 Sdhp 392. Esp. freq. in the contrast pair sammā -ājīva; micchā-ā˚; right mode & wrong mode of gaining a living e.g. at SN ii.168 sq.; SN iii.239; SN v.9; AN i.271; AN ii.53, AN ii.240, AN ii.270 AN iv.82; Vb 105, Vb 246. See also magga (ariyaṭṭhangika).
-pārisuddhi purity or propriety of livelihood Mil 336 Vism 22 sq., 44; Dhp-a iv.111. -vipatti failure in method of gaining a living AN i.270. -sampadā perfection of (right livelihood AN i.271; DN-a i.235.
ā + jīva; Sk. ājīva
(& ˚ika) an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non-buddhist ascetics. On their austerities, practice & way of living see esp. Dhp-a ii.55 sq. and on the whole question A. L Basham, Hist. & Doctrines of the Ājīvikas,; 1951-(a) ājīvaka: Vin i.291; Vin ii.284; Vin iv.74, Vin iv.91; MN i.31, MN i.483; SN i.217; AN iii.276, AN iii.384; Ja i.81, Ja i.257, Ja i.390 ■ (b) ājīvika Vin i.8; Snp 381 (v.l. BB. ˚aka).
-sāvaka a hearer or lay disciple of the ājīvaka ascetics Vin ii.130, Vin ii.165; AN i.217.
ājīva + ka, orig. “one finding his living” (scil. in a peculiar way); cp. BSk. ājīvika Divy 393 Divy 427
(nt.) (or ājīvikā f.?) sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vb 379 (˚bhaya) Mil 196 (id.); Pv-a 274, and in phrase ājīvik’âpakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living MN i.463 = SN iii.93 (T. reads jīvikā pakatā) = Iti 89 (reads ājīvikā pakatā) = Mil 279.
fr. ājīva
(adj.-n.) having one’s livelihood, finding one’s subsistence, living, leading a life of (-˚) DN iii.64; AN v.190 (lūkha˚)
fr. ājīva
a kind of bird Ja vi.539 (= dabbimukha C.).
etym.? Cp. Sk. āṭi Turdus Ginginianus, see Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 148
is to be read for aṭaviyo (q.v.) at Ja vi.55.
= Sk. āṭavika
(f.) at Pp 18 & v.l. at Vb 357 is to be read; aṭṭhapanā (so T. at Vb 357).
see ānejja.
see ānaṇya.
(f.) order, command, ordinance, injunction Vin i.62; Kp-a 29; Pv-a 260; Sdhp 59, Sdhp 354.
ā + ñatti (cp. āṇāpeti), Caus. of jñā
(adj.) belonging to an ordinance or command, of the nature of an injunction Kp-a 29.
āṇatti + ka
(f.) order, command, authority Mil 253; DN-a i.289; Kp-a 179, Kp-a 180, Kp-a 194; Pv-a 217 Sdhp 347, Sdhp 576. rāj’āṇā the king’s command or authority Ja i.433; Ja iii.351; Pv-a 242. āṇaṃ deti to give an order Ja i.398; ˚ṃ pavatteti to issue an order Mil 189, cp āṇāpavatti Ja iii.504; Ja iv.145.
Sk. ājñā, ā + jñā
(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) giving an order Vism 303.
2. (n.) one who gives or calls out orders a town-crier, an announcer of the orders (of an authority Mil 147.
fr. āṇāpeti
(nt.) ordering or being, ordered, command, order Pv-a 135.
abstr. fr. āṇāpeti
to give an order, to enjoin, command (with acc. of person) Ja iii.351; Mil 147; Dhp-a ii.82; Vv-a 68 (dāsiyo), 69; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 81.
ā + ñāpeti, Caus. of ā + jānāti fr. jñā, cp. Sk. ājñāpayati
.
1. the pin of a wheel-axle, a linch-pin MN i.119; SN ii.266, SN ii.267; AN ii.32; Snp 654; Ja vi.253, Ja vi.432; Snp-a 243; Kp-a 45, Kp-a 50.
2. a peg, pin, bolt, stop (at a door) MN i.119; SN ii.266 (drum stick); Ja iv.30; Ja vi.432, Ja vi.460; Thag 744; Dhp i.39. 3. (fig.) (˚-) peg-like (or secured by a peg, of a door) small, little in ˚colaka a small (piece of) rag Vin ii.271 cp. i.205 (vaṇabandhana-colaka); ˚dvāra Thag 355; C khuddaka-dvāra, quoted at Brethren 200, trsl. by Mrs Rh. D. as “the towngate’s sallyport” by Neumann as “Gestöck” (fastening, enclosure) āṇi-gaṇṭhik’āhato ayopatto at Vism 108; DN-a i.199 is apparently a sort of brush made of four or five small pieces of flexible wood.
Vedic āṇi to aṇu fine, thin, flexible, in formation an n-enlargement of Idg. *olenā, cp. Ohg. lun, Ger. lünse Ags. lynes = E. linch, further related to Lat. ulna elbow Gr. ὠλένη, Ohg. elina, Ags. eln = E. el-bow. See Walde Lāt. Wtb. under ulna & lacertus
illness, sickness, disease MN i.437; SN iii.1; Snp 966 (˚phassa, cp. Nd i.486) Freq. in cpd. appātaṅka freedom from illness, health (cp. appābādha) DN i.204; DN iii.166; AN iii.65, AN iii.103; Mil 14 ■ f. abstr. appātaṅkatā MN i.124.
etym. uncertain; Sk. ātanka
(adj.) sick, ill Ja v.84 (= gilāna C.).
fr. ātanka
generic name for drums covered with leather on one side Dpvs xiv.14; Vv-a 37 (q.v. for enumn. of musical instruments), 96.
fr. ā + tan, pp. tata; lit. stretched, covered over
heated, burnt. scorched, dry Ja v.69 (˚rūpa = sukkha-sarīra C.).
ā + tatta1, pp. of ā-tapati
1. sun-heat Snp 52; Ja i.336; Dhs 617; Dpvs i.57; Vv-a 54; Pv-a 58.
2. glow, heat (in general Pv i.74; Sdhp 396.
3. (fig.) (cp. tapa2) ardour, zeal exertion Pv-a 98 (viriyā-tapa; perhaps better to be read ˚ātāpa q.v.). Cp. ātappa.
-vāraṇa “warding off the sun-heat”, i.e. a parasol sun-shade Dāvs i.28; Dāvs v.35.
ā + tapa
(f.) glowing or burning state, heat Sdhp 122.
abstr. of ātapa
to burn Ja iii.447.
ā + tap
(nt.) ardour, zeal, exertion DN i.13; DN iii.30 sq., 104 sq., 238 sq.; MN iii.210; SN ii.132 SN ii.196 sq.; AN i.153; AN iii.249; AN iv.460 sq.; AN v.17 sq.; Snp 1062 (= ussāha ussoḷhi thāma etc. Nd ii.122); Ja iii.447; Nd i.378; Vb 194 (= vāyāma); DN-a i.104.
Sk. *ātāpya, fr. ātāpa
glow, heat; fig. ardour, keen endeavour, or perhaps better “torturing mortification” Mil 313 (cittassa ātāpo paritāpo); Pv-a 98 (viriya˚) Cp. ātappa & ātāpana;.
ā + tāpa fr. tap; cp. tāpeti
(nt.) tormenting, torture, mortification MN i.78; AN i.296 (˚paritāpana); ii.207 (id.); Pp 55 (id.); Vism 3 (id.).
ā + tāpana
(adj.) ardént, zealous, strenuous, active DN iii.58, DN iii.76 sq., 141 (+ sampajāna), 221, 276; MN i.22 MN i.56, MN i.116, MN i.207, MN i.349; MN ii.11; MN iii.89, MN iii.128, MN iii.156; S 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; ii.21, 136 sq.; iii.73 sq.; iv.37, 48, 54 218; v.165, 187, 213; AN ii.13 sq.; AN iii.38, AN iii.100 sq.; iv. 29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; v.343 sq.; Snp 926 Nd i.378; Iti 41, Iti 42; Vb 193 sq.; Mil 34, Mil 366; Vism 3 (= viriyavā); Dhp-a i.120; Snp-a 157, Snp-a 503 ■ Freq. in the formula of Arahantship “eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto”: see arahant II. B. See also satipaṭṭhāna. Opp. anātāpin SN ii.195 sq.; AN ii.13; Iti 27 (+ anottappin).
fr. ātāpa, cp. BSk. ātāpin Avs i.233; ii. 194 = Divy 37; Divy 618
to burn, scorch; fig. to torment, inflict pain, torture MN i.341 (+ paritāpeti); SN iv.337; Mil 314, Mil 315.
ā + tāpeti
(nt.) great theft (?) AN i.93; iv. 63 sq. (v.l. ati˚ which is perhaps to be prcferred).
fr. ati + theyya
father MN i.449 (cp. Trenckner’s note on p. 567: the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of patois).
dialectical
self. nom. sg. ātumo Pv iv.52 (= sabhāvo Pv-a 259), ātumā Nd i.69 (ātumā vuccati attā), 296 (id.) & ātumāno Nd i.351; acc. ātumānaṃ Snp 782 (= attānaṃ Snp-a 521), 888, 918; loc. ātume Pv ii.1311 (= attani C.).
Vedic ātman, diaeretic form for the usual contracted attan; only found in poetry. Cp. also the shortened form tuman
(adj.) ill, sick, diseased; miserable, affected SN iii.1 (˚kāya); AN i.250; Snp 331; Vv 8314 (˚rūpa = abhitunna-kāya Vv-a 328); Ja i.197 (˚anna “food of the miserable”, i.e. last meal of one going to be killed; C. expls. as maraṇabhojana), 211 (˚citta); ii.420 (˚anna, as above); iii.201 v.90, 433; vi.248; Mil 139, Mil 168; Dhp-a i.31 (˚rūpa) Pv-a 160, Pv-a 161; Vv-a 77; Sdhp 507. Used by Commentators as syName of aṭṭo, e.g. at Ja iv.293; Snp-a 489. -anātura healthy, well, in good condition SN iii.1; Dhp 198.
Sk. ātura, cp. BSk. ātura, e.g. Jtm 3170
(nt.) the Atharva Veda as a code of magic working formulas, witchcraft, sorcery Snp 927 (v.l. ath˚, see interpreted at Nd i.381; expld. as āthabbaṇika-manta-ppayoga at Snp-a 564).
= athabbaṇa, q.v.
(adj. n.) one conversant with magic, wonder-worker, medicine-man Nd i.381; Snp-a 564.
fr. athabbana
to cause one to take, to accept, agree to MN ii.104; SN i.132.
Caus. of ādāti
consideration of, esteem, regard, respect reverence, honour Ja v.493; Snp-a 290; DN-a i.30; Dhs-a 61; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 61, Vv-a 101, Vv-a 321; Pv-a 121, Pv-a 123, Pv-a 135, Pv-a 278 Sdhp 2, Sdhp 21, Sdhp 207, Sdhp 560. -anādara lack of reverence, disregard disrespect; (adj.) disrespectful SN i.96; Vin iv.218; Snp 247 (= ādara-virahita Snp-a 290; DN-a i.284; Vv-a 219; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 5, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 257.
Sk. ādara, prob. ā + dara, cp. semantically Ger. ehrfurcht awe
(f.) = ādara, in neg. an˚; want of consideration Ja iv.229; Dhs 1325 = Vb 359 (in expln. of dovacassatā).
abstr. fr. ādara
(nt.) showing respect of honour; neg. an˚; disregard, disrespect Vin ii.220; AN v.146, AN v.148 Pp 20; Vb 371; miln 266.
abstr. fr. ādara
is gloss at Vv-a 216 for maddava Vv 5123; meaning: excitement, adj. exciting. The passage in Vv-a is somewhat corrupt, & therefore unclear.;
ā + dava2?
to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism 289 (samaṃ ā. = samādahati). Cp. sam˚ and ādhiyati.
ā + dahati1
to set fire to, to burn Ja vi.201, Ja vi.203.
ā + dahati2
taking up, taking to oneself Vin iv.120 (= anādiyitvā C.; cp. the usual form ādāya). Adati (Adadati)
ger. of ādāti from reduced base *da of dadāti 1b
to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; grd. ādātabba Vin i.50; inf. ādātuṃ DN iii.133 (adinnaṃ theyyasankhātaṃ ā.). ger. ādā & ādāya; (see sep.); grd. ādeyya, Caus. ādapeti (q.v.) ■ See also ādiyati & ādeti;.
ā + dadāti of dadāti base 1 dā
(nt.) taking up, getting, grasping, seizing; fig. appropriating clinging to the world, seizing on (worldly objects). (1) (lit.) taking (food), pasturing MN iii.133; Ja v.371 (& ˚esana) ■ (2) getting, acquiring, taking, seizing SN ii.94; AN iv.400 (daṇḍ˚); Pv-a 27 (phal˚); esp. freq in adinn˚; seizing what is not given, i.e. theft: see under adinna ■ (3) (fig.) attachment, clinging AN v.233, AN v.253 (˚paṭinissagga); Dhp 89 (id.; cp. Dhp-a ii.163); Snp 1103 (˚taṇhā), 1104 (˚satta); Nd i.98 (˚gantha); Nd ii.123, Nd ii.124 -an˚; free from attachment SN i.236 (sādānesu anādāno “not laying hold mong them that grip” trsl.); AN ii.10; Iti 109; Ja iv.354; Mil 342; Dhp-a iv.70 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇo). Cp. upa˚, pari˚.
ād + āna, or directly from ā + dā, base 1 of dadāti
having received or taken taking up, seizing on, receiving; freq. used in the sense of a prep. “with” (c. acc.) Snp 120, Snp 247, Snp 452; Ja v.13 Vb 245; Dhp-a ii.74; Snp-a 139; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 61 etc ■ At Vin i.70 the form ādāya is used as a noun f ādāyā in meaning of “a casually taken up belief” (tassa ādāyassa vaṇṇe bhaṇati). Cp. upa˚, pari˚.
ger. of ādāti, either from base 1 of dadāti (dā) or base 2 (dāy). See also ādiya
(adj.-n.) taking up, grasping, receiving; one who takes, seīzes or appropriates DN i.4 (dinn˚); AN iii.80; AN v.137 (sār˚); DN-a i.72.
fr. ā + dadāti base 2, cp. ādāya
a mirror Vin ii.107; DN i.7, DN i.11 (˚pañha mirror-questioning, cp DN-a i.97: “ādāse devataṃ otaretvā pañha-pucchanaṃ”), 80 ii.93 (dhamna’-ādāsaṃ nāma dhamma-pariyāyaṃ desessāmi) SN v.357 (id.); AN v.92, AN v.97 sq., 103; Ja i.504; Dhs 617 (˚maṇḍala); Vism 591 (in simile); Kp-a 50 (˚daṇḍa) 237; Dhp-a i.226.
-tala the surface of the mirror, in similes at Vism 450 Vism 456, Vism 489.
Sk. ādarśa, ā + dṛś, P. dass, of dassati1 2
= ādāsa Thig 411.
1. (m.) starting-point, beginning Snp 358 (acc. ādiṃ = kāraṇaṃ Snp-a 351); Dhp 375 (nom. ādi); Mil 10 (ādimhi); Ja vi.567 (abl. ādito from the beginning). For use as nt. see below 2 b.
2. (adj & adv.) (a) (˚-) beginning, initially, first, principal chief: see cpds ■ (b) (˚-) beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed to be familiar in its constituents to the reader or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i.e. and so on, so forth (cp. adhika); e.g. rukkha-gumb-ādayo (acc. pl. trees, jungle etc. Ja i.150; amba-panas’ ādīhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar kinds of fruit) Ja i.278; amba-labuj’ādīnaṃ phalānaṃ anto Ja ii.159; asi-satti-dhami-ādīni āvudhāni (weapous, such as sword, knife, bow & the like) Ja i.150 kasi-gorakkh’ ādīni karonte manusse Ja ii.128;… ti ādinā nayena in this and similar ways Ja i.81; Pv-a 30. Absolute as nt. pl. ādinī with ti (evaṃ) (ādīni), closing a quotation, meaning “this and such like”, e.g. at Ja ii.128 Ja ii.416 (ti ādīni viravitvā) ■ In phrase ādiṃ katvā meaning “putting (him, her, it) first”, i.e. heginning with, from… on, from… down (c. acc.) e.g. Dhp-a i.393 (rājānaṃ ādiṃ K. from the king down); Pv-a 20 (vihāraṃ ādikatvā), 21 (pañcavaggiye ādiṃ K.).
-kammika [cp. BSk. ādikarmaka Divy 544] a beginner Vin iii.146; Vin iv.100; Mil 59; Vism 241; Dhs-a 187. -kalyāṇa in phrase ādikalyāṇa majjhe-kalyāṇa pariyosāna-kalyāṇa of the Dhamma, “beautiful in the beginning, the middle the end” see references under dhamma C. 3 and cp. DN-a i.175 (= ādimhi kalyāṇa etc.); Snp-a 444; abstr. ˚kalyāṇatā Vism 4. -pubbaṅgama original Dpvs iv.26. -brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life DN i.189; DN iii.284; MN i.431; MN ii.125, MN ii.211; iii. 192; SN ii.75, SN ii.223; SN iv.91; SN v.417, SN v.438; f. ˚ikā Vin i.64 Vin i.68; AN i.231 sq. -majjhapariyosāna beginning, middle & end Mil 10; cp. above ādikalyāṇa.
Sk. ādi, etym. uncertain
(adj.) from the beginning, initial (see adhika); instr. ādikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time MN i.395, MN i.479; MN ii.213; SN ii.224; Ja vi.567. Cp. ādiya3.
ādi + ka
the sun SN i.15, SN i.47; SN ii.284; SN iii.156; SN v.44, SN v.101; AN i.242; AN v.22, AN v.263, AN v.266 sq.; Iti 85; Snp 550 Snp 569, Snp 1097 (“ādicco vuccati suriyo” Nd ii.125); Dhp-a iv.143; Sdhp 14, Sdhp 17, Sdhp 40.
-upaṭṭhānā sun-worship DN i.11 (= jīvikatthāya ādiccaparicariyā DN-a i.97); Ja ii.72 (˚jātaka; ādiccaṃ upatiṭṭhati p. 73 = suriyaṃ namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.). -patha the path of the sun, i.e. the sky, the heavens Dhp 175 (ākāsa Dhp-a iii.177). -bandhu “kinsman of the sun”, Ep of the Buddha Vin ii.296; SN i.186, SN i.192; AN ii.54; Snp 54 Snp 915, Snp 1128; Nd i.341; Nd ii.125b; Vv 425, 7810; Vv-a 116.
Vedic āditya
broken, split open SN iv.193 (= sipātikā with burst pod); cp MN i.306.
Sk. ādīrṇa, pp. of ā + dṛ; see ādiyati2
(nt.) state of being broken or split Pts i.49.
abstr. fr. ādiṇṇa
set on fire, blazing, burning Vin i.34; Kv 209 (sabbaṃ ādittaṃ); SN iii.71; SN iv.19, SN iv.108; AN iv.320 (˚cela); Snp 591; Ja iv.391; Pv i.85 (= paditta jalita Pv-a 41); Kv 209; DN-a i.264; Pv-a 149; Sdhp 599.
-pariyāya the discourse or sermon on the fire (lit. being in fllames) SN iv.168 sq.; Vin i.34; Dhp-a i.88.
ā + ditta1, Sk. ādīpta, pp. of ā + dīp
only at DN i.115 (T. reading ādīna, but v.l. S id. ādina, B p. abhinna) in phrase ādina-khattiya-kula primordial See note in Dial. i.148.
(adj.) grd. of admi, ad, Sk. ādya] edible, eatable AN iii.45 (bhojanāni).
in ˚mukha is uncertain reading at AN iii.164 sq. (vv.ll. ādeyya˚ & ādheyya), meaning perhaps “graspmouth”, i.e. gossip; thus equal to ger. of ādiyati1. Perhaps to be taken to ādiyati2. The same phrase occurs at Pp 65 (T. ādheyya˚, C. has v.l. ādheyya˚) where Pp A 248 explns. “ādito dheyyamukho, paṭhama-vacanasmiṃ yeva ṭhapita-mukho ti attho” (sticking to one’s word?) See ādheyya.
= ādika, instr. ādiyena in the beginning Ja vi.567 (= ādikena C.).
ger. of ādiyati.
to take up; take to oneself seize on, grasp, appropriate, fig. take notice of, take to heart, heed ■ pres. ādiyati A iij.46; Snp 119, Snp 156, Snp 633 Snp 785, Nd i.67; Nd ii.123, Nd ii.124; Ja iii.296: v.367 ■ pot ādiye Snp 400; imper. ādiya MN iii.133 (so read for ādissa?) ■ aor. ādiyi DN iii.65; AN iii.209, ādiyāsi Pv iv.148 (sayaṃ daṇḍaṃ ā. = acchinditvā gaṇhasi Pv-a 241) & ādapayi (Caus. formation fr. ādāti?) to take heed SN i.132 (v.l. ādiyi, trsl. “put this into thy mind”) ■ ger ādiyitvā Vin iv.120 (= ādā); Ja ii.224 (C. for ādiya T.) iii.104; iv.352 (an˚ not heeding; v.l. anāditvā, cp. anādiyanto not attending Ja iii.196); Dhp-a iii.32 (id.); Pv-a 13 (T. anādayitva not heeding), 212 (vacanaṃ anādiyitvā not paying attention to his word), ādiya SN iii.26 (v.l. an˚ for anādīya); Ja ii.223 (= ādiyitvā C.); see also ādiya2, & ādīya SN iii.26 (an˚). See also upādiyati & pariyādiyati;
ā + diyati, med. pass. base of dadāti4, viz. di˚ & dī˚; see also ādāti & ādeti
to split, go asunder, break Pts i.49. pp. ādiṇṇa. See also avadīyati. Cp. also upādiṇṇa.
ā + diyati, Sk. ādīryate, Pass. of dṛ; to split: see etym. under darī
(f.) in an˚; the fact of not taking up or heeding Snp-a 516.
abstr. formation ādiyana (fr. ādiya ger. of ādiyati) + ta
(a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to ■ (b) to dedicate (a gift, dakkhiṇaṃ or dānaṃ). pres. ind. ādisati DN i.213 = AN i.170 (tell or read one’s character); Snp 1112 (atītaṃ); Nd i.382 (nakkhattaṃ set the horoscope); Mil 294 (dānaṃ); pot. ādiseyya Thig 307 (dakkhiṇaṃ); Pv iv.130 (id. = uddiseyya Pv-a 228) & ādise Vin i.229 = DN ii.88 (dakkhiṇaṃ); imper. ādisa Pv-a 49 ■ fut. ādissati Thig 308 (dakkhiṇaṃ) Pv-a 88 (id.) ■ aor. ādisi Pv ii.28; Pv-a 46 (dakkhiṇaṃ); pl ādisiṃsu ibid. 53 (id.) & ādisuṃ Pv i.106 (id.) ■ ger ādissa Vin iii.127; Snp 1018; Pv ii.16 (dānaṃ), & ādisitvāna Thig 311 ■ grd. ādissa (adj.) to be told or shown MN i.12.
ā + disati
(adv.) from the beginning, i.e. thoroughly, absolutely DN i.180; MN iii.208.
orig. abl. of ādi, formed with ˚saḥ
at MN iii.133 is an imper. pres. meaning “take”, & should probably better be read; ādiya (in corresponsion with ādāna). It is not grd. of ādisati, which its form might suggest.
(adj.) blameworthy MN i.12; MA = garāyha.
at DN i.115 & S; v.74 (vv.ll. ādina, & abhinna) see ādina. See; diṇṇa.
(adj.) to be explained Mil 270.
grd. of ā + dīpeti
ablaze, in flames SN i.31 (loka; v.l. ādittaka) 108; Ja v.366; Dhp-a iii.32 (v.l. āditta).
pp. of ādīpeti, ā + caus. of dīp, cp. dīpeti
(indecl.) emphatic (adversative) part. (1) of affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather Ja iii.499 = Ja vi.443; Ja v.180; Ja vi.552 ■ (2) as 2nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udāhu… ādu (= kiṃ… udāhu Snp-a 350), viz. is it so… or Thag 1274 = Snp 354; Pv iv.317 = Dhp-a i.31; Ja v.384 Ja vi.382; without udāhu at Ja v.460 (adu). The close connection with udāhu suggests an expln. of ādu as a somehow distorted abbreviation of udāhu.
see also adu
to take, receive, get Snp 121 (= gaṇhāti Snp-a 179), 954 (= upādiyati gaṇhāti Nd;1 444); cp. i.43; Ja iii.103, Ja iii.296; Ja v.366 (= gaṇhāti C.; cp. ādiyati on p. 367) Mil 336.
a + deti, base2 of dadāti (day˚ & de˚), cp. also ādiyati
(adj.) to be taken up, acceptable, pleasant, welcome, only in phrase ˚vacana welcome or acceptable speech, glad words Vin ii.158; Ja vi.243; Mil 110; Thag-a 42. Adeva, Adevana
grd. of ādāti (q.v.)
lamenting, deploring, crying etc. in ster. phrase (explaining parideva or pariddava) ādevo paridevo ādevanā pari˚ ādevitattaṃ pari˚ Nd i.370 = Nd ii.416 = Pts i.38.
ā + div. devati
information, pointing out; as tt. g. characteristic, determination, substitute, e.g. kutonidānā is at Snp-a 303 said to equal kiṃ-nidānā, the to of kuto (abl.) equalling or being substituted for the acc case: paccatta-vacanassa to-ādeso veditabbo.
fr. ādisati, cp. Sk. ādeśa
(f.) pointing out, guessing, prophesy; only in phrase ˚pāṭihāriya trick or marvellous ability of mind-reading or guessing other peoples character Vin ii.200; DN i.212, DN i.213; DN iii.220; AN i.170, AN i.292; AN v.327; Pts ii.227. For pāṭihāriya is subsiituted ˚vidhā (lit. variety of i.e. act or performance etc.) at DN iii.103.
ā + desanā
(nt.)
1. putting up, putting down, placing, laying AN iv.41 (aggissa ādhānaṃ, v.l. of 6 MSS ādānaṃ).
2. receptacle MN i.414 (udak˚), cp. ādheyya. 3. enclosure, hedge Mil 220 (kaṇṭak˚ thorny brake, see under kaṇṭaka).
-gāhin holding one’s own place, i.e. obstinate (?) reading uncertain & interchanging with ādāna, only in one ster. phrase, viz. sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsin ādhāna-gāhin duppaṭinissaggin Vin ii.89; MN i.43, MN i.96; AN iii.335 (v.l. ādāna˚, C. expls by daḷhagāhin); DN iii.247 (adhāna˚).
ā + dhāna
1. a container, receptacle, basin, lit. holder AN iii.27; Ja vi.257.
2. “holding up”, i.e. support, basis, prop. esp. a (round) stool or stand for the alms-bowl (patta) Vin ii.113 (an˚ patto); MN iii.95; SN v.21; Ja v.202 ■ fig. SN v.20 (an˚ without a support cittaṃ); Vism 8, Vism 444.
3. (tt. g.) name for the loc. case (“resting on”) Snp 211.
ā + dhāra
(m. & nt.)
1. a stool or stand (as ādhāra;2) (always m., except at Ja i.33 where ˚āni pl. nt.) Ja i.33; Dhp-a iii.290 = Vv-a 220; Dhp-a iii.120 = Dhp-a iii.186 (one of the four priceless things of a Tathāgata, viz.: setacchattaṃ, nisīdanapallanko, ādhārako pādapīṭhaṃ).
2. a reading desk, pulpit Ja iii.235 Ja iv.299.
ā + dhāraka, or simply ādhāra + ka
(f.) concentration, attention, mindfulness Snp-a 290 (+ daḷhīkaraṇa), 398 (id.).
ā + dhāraṇatā
supported, held up Mil 68.
pp. of ā + dhāreti, cp. dhāreti1
to run towards a goal, to run after MN i.265 (where id. p. SN ii.26 has upadh˚); DN-a i.39. Freq. in combn. ādhāvati paridhāvati to run about e.g. Ja i.127, Ja i.134, Ja i.158; Ja ii.68.
ā + dhavati1
(nt.) onrush, violent motion Mil 135.
fr. ādhāvati
(& Ādhipateyya) (nt.) supreme rule lordship, sovereignty, power SN v.342 (issariy˚); AN i.62 (id.), 147, 212; ii.205 (id.); iii.33, 76; iv.252 sg.; Pv ii.959 (one of the ṭhānas, cp. ṭhāna ii.2b; see also D iii. 146, where spelt ādhipateyya; expld. by issariya at Pv-a 137); Ja i.57; Dāvs v.17; Vv-a 126 (gehe ā = issariya) The three (att˚, lok˚, dhamm˚) at Vism 14.
fr. adhi + pati + ya “being over-lord”; see also adhipateyya
shaken, moved (by the wind, i.e. fanned Vv 394 (v.l. adhuta which is perhaps to be preferred, i.e. not shaken, cp. vātadhutaṃ Dāvs v.49; Vv-a 178 expls. by saṇikaṃ vidhūpayamāna, i.e. gently fanned).
ā + dhuta1
(adj.) to be deposited (in one’s head & heart Pp A), to be heeded to be appropriated [in latter meaning easily mixed with; ādheyya, cp. vv.ll. under ādiya2 ]; nt. depository (ādhātabbatā ṭhapetabbatā Pp A 217) Pp 34 (˚ṃ gacchati is deposited); Mil 359 (sabbe tass’ ādheyya2 honti they all become deposited in him, i.e. his deposits or his property).
-mukha see ādiya2.
grd. of ā + dadhāti cp. ādhāna2
a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end SN ii.266; Ja ii.344; Dpvs xvi.14.
Sk. ānaka, cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 10
see ākāsa˚; and viññāṇa˚.
see ānejja.
(nt.) freedom from debt DN i.73; AN iii.354 (Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. anaṇa ); Nd i.160; Vism 44; DN-a i.3.
Sk. ānṛṇya, so also BSk. e.g. Jtm 3118; from a + ṛṇa, P. iṇa but also aṇa in composition, thus an-aṇa as base of ānaṇya
to trumpet (of elephants) Ja iv.233.
ā + nadati
(nt.) the mouth; adj. (-˚) having a mouth Sdhp 103; Pgdp 63 (vikaṭ˚).
Vedic āna, later Sk. ānana from an to breathe
(& ˚ya) without an interval, immediately following, successive Vin i.321; ii. 212; Pp 13; Dhs 1291.
-kamma “conduct that finds retribution without delay (Kvu trsl. 275 n. 2) Vin ii.193; Ja i.45; Kv 480; Mil 25 (cp. Dhs trsl. 267); Vism 177 (as prohibiting practice of kammaṭṭhāna).
fr. an + antara + ika
joy, pleasure, bliss, delight DN i.3; Snp 679, Snp 687; Ja i.207 (˚maccha Leviathan); vi.589 (˚bheri festive drum) DN-a i.53 (= pītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ).
Vedic ānanda, fr. ā + nand, cp. BSk. ānandī joy Divy 37
to be pleased or delighted Ja vi.589 (aor. ānandi in T. reading ānandi vittā, expld. by C. as nandittha was pleased; we should however read ānandi-cittā with gladdened heart). See also ānandiya.
ā + nandati
(adj.) joyful, friendly Thag 555; Ja iv.226.
fr. ā + nand
(adj ■. ) enjoyable, nt. joy, feast Ja vi.589 (˚ṃ acarati to celebrate the feast = ānandachaṇa C.).
grd. of ānandati
(f.) joy, happiness in cpd. ānandi-citta Ja vi.589 (so read probably for ānandi vitta see ānandati).
ā + nandī, cp. ānanda
(adj.) to be brought, in suvānaya easy to bring SN i.124 = Ja i.80.
ā + naya
see āneti.
(nt.) in haled & exhaled breath, inspiration & respiration S; v.132 311 sq.; Ja i.58; Pts i.162 (˚kathā); usually in cpd. ˚sati concentration by in-breathing & out-breathing (cp.; Man of Mystic 70) MN i.425 (cp. DN ii.291); iii.82; Vin iii.70; AN i.30; Iti 80; Pts i.166, Pts i.172, Pts i.185 (˚samādhi); Nd ii.466 B (id.); Mil 332; Vism 111, Vism 197, Vism 266 sq.; Snp-a 165. See detail under sati.
āna + apāna, cpds. of an to breathe
see āneti.
to make bend, to bend, to bring toward or under Ja v.154 (doubtful reading fut ānāmayissasi, v.l. ānayissati, C. ānessasi = lead to).
ā + nāmeti, Caus. of namati, which is usually spelt nameti
praise i.e. that which is commendable, profit, merit, advantage good result, blessing in or from (c. loc.). There are five ānisaṃsā sīlavato sīla-sampadāya or blessings which accrue to the virtuous enumd. at DN ii.86 viz. bhogakkhandha great wealth, kittisadda good report visārada self-confidence, asammūlho kālaṃ karoti an untroubled death, saggaṃ lokaṃ uppajjati a happy state after death ■ DN i.110, DN i.143; DN iii.132 (four), 236 (five) MN i.204; SN i.46, SN i.52; SN iii.8, SN iii.93 (mahā˚); v.69 (seven) 73, 129, 133, 237 (seven), 267, 276; AN i.58 (karaṇīye kariyamāne); ii.26, 185, 239, 243 (sikkhā˚); iii.41 (dāne) 248 (dhammasavane), 250 (yāguyā), 251 (upaṭṭhita-satissa) 253 sq. (sīlavato sīlasampadāya etc., as above), 267 (sucarite), 441; iv.150 (mettāya ceto-vimuttiyā), 361 (dhammasavane), 439 sq. (nekkhamme avitakke nippītike), 442 443 sq. (ākās’ānañcāyatane); vi., 106 (mahā˚), 311; Iti 28, Iti 29, Iti 40 (sikkhā˚); Snp 256 (phala˚), 784, 952; Ja i.9 Ja i.94; Ja v.491 (v.l. anu˚); Nd i.73, Nd i.104, Nd i.441; Kv 400; Mil 198; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 113; Pv-a 9 (dāna˚) 12, 64 (= phala) 208, 221 (= guṇa); Sdhp 263 ■ Eleven ānisaṃsas of mettā (cp. Pts ii.130) are given in detail at Vism 311 Vism 314; on another eight see pp. 644 sq.
ā + ni + saṃsa, BSk. distorted to anuśaṃsa
(nt.) “sit down”, bottom, behind MN i.80 = MN i.245; Ja iii.435 (gloss asata) Vism 251 = Kp-a 45 (˚ttaca), 252 (˚maṃsa).
a + sad
(nt.) incomparableness, excellency, supreme ideal DN iii.102 sq.; AN v.37.
see also anuttariya which as-˚ probably represents ānutt˚
fetched, brought (here), brought back adduced Ja i.291; Ja iii.127; Ja iv.1.
pp. of ānetī
metri causa for anupuṭṭha (q.v.).
(nt.) rule, regularity, order Thag 727 (cp. Mvu ii.224 ānupubbā).
abstr. fr. anupubba
(f.) (or ˚ta nt.?) succession; only in tt. g. padânu-pubbatā word sequence, in expln. of iti Nd i.140; Nd ii.137 (v.l. ˚ka).
fr. last
regulated exposition, graduated sermon DN i.110; DN ii.41 sq. MN i.379; Ja i.8; Mil 228; DN-a i.277, DN-a i.308; Dhp-a iv.199.
for anupubbi˚ representing its isolated composition form, cp. ānubhāva & see also anupubbi˚
greatness, magnificence majesty, splendour Ja i.69 (mahanto); ii.102 (of a jewel) v.491; Dhp-a ii.58.
the dissociated composition form of anubhāva, q.v. for details. Only in later language
and Ānañja immovability, imperturbability, impassibility The word is; n. but occurs as adj. at Vin iii.109 (ānañja samādhi, with which cp. BSk. ānijyā śāntiḥ at Avs i.199 ■ The term usually occurs in cpd ānejja-ppatta (adj.) immovable lit. having attained impassibility expld. by Bdhgh. at Vin iii.267 (on Pār. i.1, 6 as acala, niccala, i.e. motionless. This cpd. is indicated below by (p.) after the reference ■ The various spellings of the word are as follows:
1. ānejja DN i.76 (v.l. ānañja-p.) AN ii.184 (p.); iii.93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq. (p.); Nd ii.471 (v.l. aneja, ānañja) = Vb 137 (āneñja) Nd ii.569a (v.l. ānañja), 601 (v.l. anejja & aneñja); Pp 60 (p.); DN-a i.219 (v.l. BB āneñja).
2. ānañja Vin iii.4 (p.) (v.l. ānañca˚, anañja˚, ānañja˚; Bdhgh. ānejja p. 267), 109; Ud 27 (samādhi, adj. v.l. ānañca); Dhp-a iv.46. See also below cpd. ˚kāraṇa ■ A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is āṇañja at MN ii.229 (v.l. aṇañja aneñja, āneñja), 253, 254.
3. āneñja SN ii.82. (v.l. āṇañje, or is it āṇeñja?); DN iii.217 (˚âbhisankhāra of imperturbable character, remaining static, cp. Kvu trsl. 358); Nd i.90 (id.), 206, 442; Pts ii.206; Vb 135, Vb 340 Vism 377 (p.), 386 (sixteen˚ fold), 571; Ne 87, Ne 99. See also iñjati.
-kāraṇa trick of immovability, i.e. pretending to be dead (done by an elephant, but see differently Morris J P T S. 1886, 154) Ja i.415; Ja ii.325 (v.l. āṇañja, āneñca ānañca); iv.308; v.273, 310.
abstr. fr. an + *añja or *ejja = *ijja. The Sanskritised equivalent would be *iñjya or *iñgya of iṅg to stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *aṅg in Pāli, referring it to a base with ṛ (probably Sk. ṛj ṛñjati) in analogy to a form like Sk. ṛṇa = Pāli aṇa iṇa, both a & i representing Sk. ṛ. The form; añja would thus correspond to a Sk. *añjya (*añgya). The third P form ān-eñja is a direct (later, and probably re-instituted formation from Sk. iñjya, which in an interesting way became in BSk. re-sanskritised to āñijya (which on the other hand may represent āñejja & thus give the latter the feature of a later, but more specifically Pāli form) The editions of P. Texts show a great variance of spelling based on MSS. vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation
(f.) steadfastness Vism 330, Vism 386.
fr. āneñja
to bring, to bring towards, to fetch, procure, convey, bring back Snp 110; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 92. pot. 1st pl. ānema (or imper. 2nd pl ānetha MN i.371. fut. ānayissati SN i.124; Pv ii.65; Ja iii.173; Ja v.154 (v.l.),; ānessati Ja v.154. inf. ānayituṃ Pv ii.610, ger. ānetvā Pv-a 42, Pv-a 74. aor. ānesi Pv-a 3, & ānayi Pv i.77 (sapatiṃ) ■ pp. ānīta (q.v.) ■ Med. pass. ānīyati & āniyyati; DN ii.245 (āniyyataṃ imper. shall be brought); MN i.371 (ppr. ānīyamāna) ■ Caus. II. ānāpeti to cause to be fetched Ja iii.391; Ja v.225. Apa & Apo;
ā + neti
(nt.) water; philosophically t. t. for cohesion, representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahābhūta), viz. paṭhavī, āpo, tejo vāyo: see Cpd. 268 & Dhs trsl. 201, also below ˚dhātu. DN ii.259; MN i.327; SN ii.103; SN iii.54, SN iii.207; AN iv.312, AN iv.375; Snp 307, Snp 391 (˚ṃ), 392 (loc. āpe), 437 (id.); Ja iv.8 (paṭhavi-āpa-teja˚); Dhs 652; Mil 363 (gen. āpassa, with paṭhavī etc.); Sdhp 100.
-kasiṇa the water-device, i.e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 n.) DN iii.268; Ja i.313; Dhs 203 Vism 170; Dhp-a i.312; Dhp-a iii.214. -dhātu the fluid element the essential element in water, i.e. element of cohesion (see Cpd. 155 n. 2; Mystic 9 n. 2; Dhs trsl. 201, 242; DN iii.228, DN iii.247; MN i.187, MN i.422: Dhs 652; Ne 74. See also dhātu ■ rasa the taste of water AN i.32; Snp-a 6 -sama resembling water MN i.423.
Vedic ap & āp, f. sg. apā, pl. āpaḥ, later Sk. also āpaḥ nt ■ Idg.; *ap & *ab;, primarily to Lith. ùpé water, Old Prussian ape river, Gr. ̓*Λπία Name of the Peloponnesus; further (as *ab ) to Lat. amnis river Sk. abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water
(f.) river Ja v.452; Ja vi.518.
= āpagā
(f.) a river Thag 309; Snp 319; Ja v.454; Dāvs i.32; Vv-a 41.
āpa + ga of gam
to get into, to meet with (acc.); to undergo; to make, produce, exhibit Vin ii.126 (saṃvaraṃ); DN i.222 (pariyeṭṭhiṃ); Iti 113 (vuddhiṃ) Ja i.73; Pp 20, Pp 33 (diṭṭh’ânugatiṃ); Pv-a 29 (ppr. āpajjanto); Dhp-a ii.71-pot. āpajjeyya DN i.119 (musāvādaṃ) ■ aor. āpajji Ja v.349; Pv-a 124 (sankocaṃ); āpādi SN i.37; AN ii.34; Iti 85; Ja ii.293; Ja ii.3rd pl. āpādu DN ii.273 ■ ger. āpajjitva Pv-a 22 (saṃvegaṃ), 151. pp. āpanna (q.v.) ■ Caus. āpādeti (q.v.) ■ Note. The reading āpajja in āpajja naṃ Iti 86 is uncertain (vv. ll āsajja & ālajja). The id. p. at Vin ii.203 (CV. vii.4, 8 has āsajjanaṃ, for which Bdhgh, on p. 325 has āpajjanaṃ Cp. pariyāpajjati.
Sk. āpadyate, ā + pad
a bazaar, shop Vin i.140; Ja i.55; Ja v.445; Pv ii.322; Mil 2, Mil 341; Snp-a 440; Dhp-a i.317; Dhp-a ii.89; Vv-a 157; Pv-a 88, Pv-a 333 (phal˚ fruit shop), 215.
Sk. āpaṇa, ā + paṇ
a shopkeeper, tradesman Ja i.124; Mil 344; Vv-a 157; Dhp-a ii.89.
fr. āpaṇa
at Ja vi.17 is C. reading for apatacchika in khārāpat˚; (q.v.).
to fall on to, to rush on to Ja v.349 (= upadhāvati C.); vi.451 (= āgacchati C.); Mil 371.
ā + patati
(f.) an ecclesiastical offence (cp.; Kvu trsl. 362 n. 1), Vin i.103 (˚khandha), 164 (˚ṃ paṭikaroti) 322 (˚ṃ passati), 354 (avasesā & anavasesā); ii.2 sq. (˚ṃ ropeti), 59, 60 (˚pariyanta), 88 (˚adhikaraṇa), 259 (˚ṃ paṭikaroti); iv.344; DN iii.212 (˚kusalatā); AN i.84 (id.) 87; ii.240 (˚bhaya); Dhs 1330 sq. (cp. Dhs trsl. 346). anāpatti Vin iii.35.
˚vuṭṭhānatā forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250 (put before anāpatti).
Sk. āpatti, fr. ā + pad, cp. apajjati & BSk. āpatti, e. g, Divy 330
(adj.) guilty of an offence MN i.443; Vin iv.224. an˚; Vin i.127.
āpatti + ka, cp. BSk. āpattika Divy 303
in micchāpatha, dvedhāpatha as classified in Vb Ind. p. 441 should be grouped under patha as micchā˚ dvedhā˚.
in ˚jjhāyin Nd ii.3422 is read āpādaka˚; at Nd i.226, and āpātaka˚ at Vism 26.
(f.) accident, misfortune distress, DN iii.190; AN ii.68 (loc. pl. āpadāsu), 187; iii. 45; iv.31; Thag 371; Ja iv.163 (āpadatthā, a difficult form; vv.ll. T. aparattā, āpadatvā, C. aparatthā; expld. by āpadāya); v.340 (loc. āpade), 368; Pv-a 130 (quot.) Sdhp 312, Sdhp 554. Note. For the contracted form in loc. pl āpāsu (= *āpatsu) see *
Sk. āpad, fr. ā + pad, cp. āpajjati & BSk. āpad, e.g. in āpadgata Jtm 31;33
1. entered upon, fallen into, possessed of, having done Vin i.164 (āpattiṃ ā.); iii.90; DN i.4 (dayāpanna merciful); Nd ii.32 (taṇhāya).
2. unfortunate miserable Ja i.19 (v.124). Cp. pari˚. *Apa
pp. of āpajjati
(& *Āvā) (f.) misery, misfortune Ja ii.317 (loc. pl. āpāsu, v.l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu); iii.12 (BB āvāsu); v.82 (avāgata gone into misery, v.l. apagata, C apagata parihīna), 445 (loc. āvāsu, v.l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu) 448 (āvāsu kiccesu; v.l. apassu, read āpāsu). Note. Since *āpā only occurs in loc. pl., the form āpāsu is to be regarded as a direct contraction of Sk. āpatsu.
for āpadā, q.v.
life, lit. breathing, only in cpd. ˚koṭi the end of life Mil 397; Dāvs iii.93; adj. -koṭika MN ii.120; Vism 10.
ā + pāṇa
sphere, range, focus, field (of consciousness or perception; cp. Dhs trsl. 199), appearance AN ii.67; Ja i.336 Vb 321; Mil 298; Vism 21, Vism 548; DN-a i.228; Dhs-a 308 Dhs-a 333; Vv-a 232 (˚kāla); Dhp-a iv.85; Sdhp 356. Usually in phrase āpāthaṃ gacchati to come into focus, to become clear, to appear MN i.190; SN iv.160, or ˚ṃ āgacchati Vin i.184; AN iii.377 sq.; AN iv.404; Vism 125. Cp. ˚gata below.
-gata come into the sphere of, appearing, visible MN i.174 = Nd ii.jhāna (an˚ unapproached); Pv-a 23 (āpāthaṃ gata) -gatatta abstr. fr. last: appcarance Vism 617.
etym.? Trenckner, Mil p.428 says: “I suspect ā. to be corrupted from āpāta (cp. āpatati), under an impression that it is allied to patha; but it is scarcely ever written so”
(adj.) belonging to the (perceptual) sphere of, visible, in ˚nisādin lying down visible DN iii.44, DN iii.47. Cp. āpathaka.
fr. āpātha
(adj.-n.)
1. (adj.) producing, leading to (-˚) Vv-a 4 (abhiññ˚ catuttha-jjhāna).
2 (n.) one who takes care of a child, a protector, guardian AN i.62 = AN i.132 = Iti 110 (+ posaka) ■ f. āpādikā a nurse, foster-mother Vin ii.289 (+ posikā).
fr. ā + pad
(f.) a nursing woman, in an˚; not nursing, unmarried Ja iv.178.
short for āpādikā
aor. of āpajjati (q.v.).
to produce, make out, bring, bring into MN i.78; MN iii.248; SN iv.110 (addhānaṃ to live one’s life, cp. addhānaṃ āpādi Ja ii.293 = jīvit’addhānaṃ āpādi āyuṃ vindi C.); Snp-a 466 ■ Cp. pari˚
Caus. of āpajjati
(nt.) drinking; drinking party, banquet; banqueting-hall, drinking-hall Ja i.52 (˚maṇḍala); v.292 (˚bhūmi); Vism 399 (id.); Dhp-a i.213 (id., rañño).
fr. ā + pā
(adj.) drinking, one who is in the habit of drinking DN i.167.
āpāna + ka
(adj.) drinkable, fit for drinking or drinking with, in ˚kaṃsa drinking-bowl, goblet MN i.316; SN ii.110.
fr. āpāna, ā + pā
(adj.-n.) one suffering in an apāya or state of misery after death Vin ii.202 = Iti 85 (v.l. ap˚) Vin ii.205; DN i.103; AN i.265; Iti 42; Vism 16; Pv-a 60.
fr. apāya
to be in motion (in etym. of āpo) Vism 364.;
fr. ṛ; cp. appāyati & appeti
to enquire after, look for, ask, esp. to ask permission or leave; aor. āpucchi Ja i.140; Pv-a 110; grd. āpucchitabba Dhp-a i.6; ger. āpucchitvā Vin iv.267 (apaloketvā + ); Mil 29; Pv-a 111; āpucchitūna (cp. Geiger § 211) Thig 426; āpuccha Thig 416 & āpucchā [ = āpṛcchya, cp. Vedic ācyā for ācya], only in neg. form an˚; without asking Vin ii.211, Vin ii.219; Vin iv.165, Vin iv.226 (= anapaloketvā); Dhp-a i.81 ■ pp. āpucchita Vin iv.272.
ā + pucchati
to be filled, to become full, to increase Ja iii.154 (cando ā. = pūrati C.); iv.26, 99, 100.
a + pūrati
to cause to reach or obtain Ja vi.46. Cp. vy˚.
Caus. of āp, see appoti & pāpuṇāti
to feel, realise, attain to, reach; aor. āphusi Vv 169 (= adhigacchi Vv-a 84).
ā + phusati
tied, bound, bound up DN-a i.127; fig. bound to, attached to, in love with Dhp-a i.88; Pv-a 82 (Tissāya ˚sineha); Sdhp 372 (sineh, ˚hadaya).
pp. of ābandhati
(adj.) (being) tied to (loc.) Pv-a 169 (sīse).
ā + bandh, cp. Sk. ābandha tie, bond
(ā + bandhati, Sk. ābadhnāti, bandh ] to bind to, tie, fasten on to, hold fast; fig. to tie to, to attach to, Ja iv.132, Ja iv.289; Ja v.319, Ja v.338, Ja v.359 ■ pp. ābaddha.
(nt.)
1. tie, bond DN-a i.181 = Pp A 236 (˚atthena ñāti yeva ñāti-parivaṭṭo). 2. tying, binding Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa, of āpodhātu). 3. reins (?) or harness (on a chariot) Ja v.319 (but cp. C expln. “hatthi-assa-rathesu ābandhitabbāni bhaṇḍakāni” thus taking it as ā + bhaṇḍa + na, i.e. wares, loads etc.) With this cp. Sk. ābandha, according to Halāyudha 2 420 a thong of leather which fastens the oxen to the yoke of a plough.
fr. ā + bandh
affliction, illness, disease Vin iv.261; DN i.72; DN ii.13; AN i.121; AN iii.94, AN iii.143; AN iv.333, AN iv.415 sq., 440; Dhp 138; Pp 28 Vism 41 (udara-vāta˚) 95; Vv-a 351 (an˚ safe & sound) Snp-a 476; Sdhp 85 ■ A list of ābādhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuṭṭhānā semha˚, vāta˚, sannipātikā, utu-pariṇāmajā visama-parihārajā, opakkamikā, kammavipākajā (after Nd ii.304i.c., recurring with slight variations at SN iv.230; AN ii.87; AN iii.131; AN v.110; Nd i.17, Nd i.47; Mil 112, cp. 135). Another list of illnesses mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin ii., p. 351 ■ Five ābādhas at Vin i.71, viz. kuṭṭhaṃ gaṇḍo kilāso soso apamāro said to be raging in Magadha cp. p. 93 ■ Three ābādhas at DN iii.75, viz. icchā anasanaṃ jarā, cp. Snp 311 ■ See also cpd. appābādha (health) under appa.
ā + bādh to oppress, Vedic ābādha oppression
(adj.-n.) affected with illness, a sick person AN iii.189, AN iii.238; Nd i.160; Mil 302; DA 212; Dhp-a i.31; Pv-a 271 ■ f. ābādhikinī a sick woman AN ii.144.
fr. ābādha
afflicted, oppressed, molested Thag 185.
pp. of ābādheti, Caus. of ā + bādh
to oppress, vex, annoy, harass SN iv.329.
ā + Caus. of bādh, cp. ābādha
(adj.) turbid, disturbed, soiled Ja v.90.
Sk. āvila; see also P. āvila
brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken DN i.142; SN i.65; AN ii.71 AN ii.83; Iti 12, Iti 14 with phrase yathābhataṃ as he has been reared (cp. Ja v.330 evaṃ kicchā bhaṭo); Pv iii.5 (ratt˚ rattiyaṃ ā. Pv-a 199); Dhp-a ii.57, Dhp-a ii.81; Dhp-a iv.89; Vv-a 65 Cp. yathābhata.
pp. of ā + bharati from bhṛ;
(adj.) = ābhata; DN-a i.205 (v.l. ābhata).
(nt.) that which is taken up or put on, viz. ornament, decoration, trinkets DN i.104; Vv 802; Ja iii.11, Ja iii.31; Dhp-a iii.83; Vv-a 187.
Sk. ābharaṇa, ā + bhṛ;
to bring, to carry; ger. ābhatvā Ja iv.351.
ā + bhṛ;
(adj.-n.) shining, brilliant, radiant, Name of a class of gods in the Brahma heavens “the radiant gods”, usually referred to as the representatives of supreme love (pīti & mettā) thus at DN i.17; Dhp 200; Iti 15; Dhp-a iii.258 (˚loka). In another context at Vism 414 sq.
etym. uncertain; one suggested in Cpd. 138 n. 4 is ā + *bha + *sar, i.e. from whose bodies are emitted rays like lightning, more probably a combn. of ābhā + svar (to shine, be bright), i.e. shining in splendour
(f.) shine, splendour, lustre, light DN ii.12; MN iii.147 (adj ■ ˚); SN ii.150 (˚dhātu) AN ii.130, AN ii.139; AN iii.34; Mvu xi.11; Vv-a 234 (of a Vimāna v.l. pabhā); Dhp-a iv.191; Sdhp 286.
Sk. ābhā, fr. ā + bhā, see ābhāti
to shine, shine forth, radiate Dhp 387 (= virocati Dhp-a iv.144); Ja v.204. See also ābheti.
ā + bhā
to cultivate, pursue Pv ii.1319 (mettacittaṃ; gloss & v.l. abhāvetvā; expld. as vaḍḍhetvā brūhetvā Pv-a 168).
ā + bhāveti
splendour, light, appearance MN iii.215.
Sk. ābhāsa, fr. ā + bhās
(adj.) See abhicetasika. This spelling, with guṇa of the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is the more frequent.
(adj.) belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin iii.15 (of food; stale); MN i.170 (˚kālakata died last night); Mil 291.
abhidosa + ika
(adj.) belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the Abhidhamma Mil 17, Mil 341; Vism 93. As abhi˚ atKp-a 151; Ja iv.219.
abhidhamma + ika
to split, cut, strike (with an axe) SN iv.160 (v.l. a˚).
ā + bhindati
(adj.) belonging to the consecration (of a king) Vin v.129.
fr. abhiseka
to bend, bend towards or in, contract; usually in phrase pallaṅkaṃ ā˚; “to bend in the round lap” or “bend in hookwise”, to sit crosslegged (as a devotee with straightened back), e.g. at Vin i.24; DN i.71; MN i.56 (v.l. ābhuñjitvā), 219; AN iii.320; Pp 68; Pts i.176; Ja i.71, Ja i.213; Mil 289; DN-a i.58, DN-a i.210. In other connection Ja i.18 (v.101; of the ocean “to recede”); Mil 253 (kāyaṃ).
ā + bhujati, bhuj1
(nt.) crouching, bending, turning in, in phrase pallank’ābhujana sitting cross-legged Ja i.17 (v.91); Pv-a 219.
fr. ābhujati
(f.) Name of a tree, the Bhūrja or Bhojpatr Ja v.195 (bhūjapatta-vana C.), 405 (= bhūjapatta C.).
lit. the one that bends, prob. a poetic metaphor
to enjoy, partake of, take in, feel, experience Ja iv.456 (bhoge; Rh. D. “hold in its hood”?); Dhs-a 333.
ā + bhuj2, Sk. bhunakti
(nt.) partaking of, enjoying, experiencing Dhs-a 333.
fr. ābhuñjati
to shine Pv ii.126 (ppr. ˚entī); Vv 82 (˚antī, v.l. ˚entī; = obhāsentī Vv-a 50).
*ābhayati = ābhāti, q.v.
ideation idea, thought DN i.37 (= manasikāro samannāhāro DN-a i.122; cp. semantically āhāra = ābhoga, food); Vb 320; Mil 97; Vism 164, Vism 325, Vism 354; Dāvs 62; Kp-a 42 (˚paccavekkhana), 43 (id.) 68.
fr. ābhuñjati, bhuj2 to enjoy etc. The translators of Kvu derive it from bhuj1 to bend etc. (Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4) which however is hardly correct, cp. the similar meaning of gocara “pasturing”, fig. perception etc.
(indecl.) affirmative part. “yes, indeed, certainly” DN i.192 sq. (as v.l. BB.; T. has āmo); Ja i.115 Ja i.226 (in C. expln. of T. amā-jāta which is to be read for āmajāta); ii.92; v.448; Mil 11, Mil 19, Mil 253; Dhp-a i.10, Dhp-a i.34 Dhp-a ii.39, Dhp-a ii.44; Vv-a 69; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 22, Pv-a 56, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 93 etc.
a specific Pāli formation representing either amma (q.v.) or a gradation of pron. base amu˚ “that (see asu), thus deictic-emphatic exclamn. Cp. also BSk āma e.g. Avs i.36
(adj.) [Vedic āma = Gr. ὠμός, connected with Lat. amārus. The more common P. form is āmaka (q.v.) raw, viz. (a) unbaked (of an earthen vessel), unfinished Snp 443; (b) uncooked (of flesh), nt. raw flesh, only in foll. cpds.: ˚gandha “smell of raw flesh”, verminous odour a smell attributed in particular to rotting corpses (cp similarly BSk. āmagandha Mvu iii.214) DN ii.242 sq. AN i.280; Snp 241, Snp 242 (= vissagandha kuṇapagandha Snp-a 286), 248, 251; Dhs 625; and ˚giddha greedy after flesh (used as bait) Ja vi.416 (= āmasankhāta āmisa C.).
(adj.) raw, uncooked DN i.5 = Pp 58 (˚maṃsa raw flesh); MN i.80 (titta-kalābu āmaka-cchinno).
-dhañña “raw” grain, corn in its natural, unprepared state DN i.5 = Pp 58 (see DA i.78 for definition); Vin iv.264; Vin v.135. -sāka raw vegetables Vism 70. -susāna “cemetery of raw flesh” charnelgrove (cp. āmagandha under ama2), i.e. fetid smelling cremation ground Ja i.264, Ja i.489 Ja iv.45 sq.; Ja vi.10; Dhp-a i.176; Vv-a 76; Pv-a 196.
= āma2
touched, handled Ja i.98 (an˚); DN-a i.107 (= parāmaṭṭha); Sdhp 333.
Sk. āmṛṣṭa, pp. of āmasati; cp. āmasita
a formation resembling a circle, in phrase ˚ṃ karoti to form a ring (of people or a circle, to stand closely together MN i.225 (cp. Sk āmaṇḍalikaroti).
ā + maṇḍala + iya
in anāmata at Ja ii.56 is métric for amata.
(f.) earthenware, crockery; in ˚āpaṇa a crockery shop, chandler’s shop Vin iv.243.
ā + mattikā
(nt.) crushing Vv-a 311.
ā + maddana of mṛd
(adj ■ adv.) asking or asked, invited only as an˚; without being asked, unasked, uninvited Vin i.254 (˚cāra); AN iii.259 (id.).
either ger. of āmanteti (q.v.) or root der. fr. ā + mant, cp. āmantaṇā
(nt.) & ˚nā (f., also ˚ṇā ) addressing, calling; invitation, greeting Snp 40 (ep. Nd ii.128) ˚vacana the address-form of speech i.e. the vocative case (cp. Sk. āmantritaṃ id.) Snp-a 435; Kp-a 167.
from āmanteti
(adj.-n.) addressing, speaking to, conversing; f. ˚ikā interlocutor, companion, favourite queen Vv 188 (= allāpa-sallāpa-yoggā kīḷanakāle vā tena (i.e. Sakkena) āmantetabbā Vv-a 96).
fr. āmantana
(adj.) to be addressed Ja iv.371.
grd. of āmanteti
addressed, called, invited Pv ii.313 (= nimantita Pv-a 86).
pp. of āmanteti
to call, address, speak to, invite, consult Ja vi.265; DN-a i.297; Snp-a 487 (ālapati & avhayati); Pv-a 75, Pv-a 80, Pv-a 127 ■ aor. āmantesi DN ii.16; Snp p.78 (= ālapi Snp-a 394) & in poetry; āmantayi Snp 997; Pv ii.27; 37 (perhaps better with v.l. SS samantayi) ■ ger. āmanta (= Sk. *āmantrya) Ja iii.209 Ja iii.315 (= āmantayitvā’ C.), 329; iv.111; v.233; vi.511. pp. āmantita (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. āmantāpeti to invite to come, to cause to be called, to send for DN i.134 (v.l. āmanteti); Mil 149.
denom. of ā + *mantra
affliction, illness, misery; only as an˚; (adj.) not afflicted, not decaying, healthy well (cp. BSk. nirāmaya Aśvaghoṣa ii.9) Vin i.294; Vv 1510 (= aroga Vv-a 74); 177; 368; Ja iii.260, Ja iii.528; iv. 427; vi.23. Positive only very late, e.g. Sdhp 397.
etym.? cp. Sk. āmaya
emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin i.201, Vin i.278; Vin ii.149 (˚vaṇṭika pīthu); SN i.150; AN v.170; Snp p.125 (˚matti); Ja iv.363; Ja v.380 (as v.l. for T. āmala); Mil 11; Dhp-a i.319; Vv-a 7.
cp. Sk. āmalaka
(f.) āmalaka Vin i.30; MN i.456 (˚vana).
to touch (upon), to handle, to lay hold on Vin ii.221; Vin iii.48 (kumbhiṃ); Ja iii.319 (id.); AN v.263, AN v.266; Ja iv.67; Pts ii.209; Mil 306; Snp-a 400; Dhs-a 302; Vv-a 17 ■ aor. āmasi Ja ii.360; ger āmasitvā Vin iii.140 (udakapattaṃ) Ja ii.330; grd. āmassa Ja ii.360 (an˚) and āmasitabba id. (C.) ■ pp. āmaṭṭha & āmasita; (q.v.).
ā + masati fr. mṛś
(nt.) touching, handling; touch Vin iv.214. Cp iii.118; Mil 127, Mil 306; DN-a i.78.
fr. āmasati
touched, taken hold of, occupied Vv-a 113 (an˚ khetta virgin land).
pp. of āmasati
(adj.) “born in the house” (cp semantically Gr. ἰχαγενής → indigenous), inborn, being by birth, in cpd. ˚dāsa (dāsī) a born slave, a slave by birth Ja vi.117 (= gehadāsiyā kucchismiṃ jātadasī C.), 285 (dāsassa dāsiyā kucchimhi jātadāsā).
to be considered either a der. from amā (see amājāta in same meaning) or to be spelt amāya which metri causa may be written ā˚
receptacle of undigested food, i.e. the stomach Vism 260 Kp-a 59. Opp. pakkāsaya.
āma2 + āsaya, cp. Sk. āmāśaya & āmāśraya
(nt.?) a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DN-a i.87.
etym.?
(nt.); 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of “raw unprepared, uncultivated”; thus ˚khāra raw lye Vin i.206.
2. “fleshy, of the flesh” (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material, physical; generally in opposition to dhamma (see dhamma B 1. a. and also next no.) thus at MN i.12 (˚dāyāda); Iti 101 (id.); AN i.91 = Iti 98 (˚dāna material gifts opp. to spiritual ones); Dhs 1344 (˚paṭisanthāra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs trsl. 350).
3. food, esp. palatable food (cp. E. sweetmeat); food for enjoyment, dainties Vin ii.269 sq.; Ja ii.6; Mil 413 (lok˚); DN-a i.83 (˚sannidhi),
4. bait SN i.67 SN iv.158; Ja iv.57, Ja iv.219; Ja vi.416; DN-a i.270.
5. gain reward, money, douceur, gratuity, “tip” Pv-a 36, Pv-a 46; esp in phrase ˚kiñcikkha-hetu for the sake of some (little gain SN ii.234; AN i.128; AN v.265, AN v.283 sq., 293 sq.; Pp 29; Pv ii.83 (= kiñci āmisaṃ patthento Pv-a 107); Mil 93; Vv-a 241 (= bhogahetu).
6. enjoyment Pv ii.82 (= kāmāmise-laggacitto Pv-a 107).
7. greed, desire lust Vin i.303 (˚antara out of greed, selfish, opp. mettacitto); AN iii.144 (id.), 184 (id.); i.73 (˚garū parisā); Ja v.91 (˚cakkhu); Pts ii.238 (mār˚). See also cpds. with nir˚ and sa˚.
der. fr. āma raw, q.v. for etym ■ Vedic āmis (m.); later Sk. āmiṣa (nt.), both in lit. & fig. meaning
to put on, take up; to be attached to, cling to Dhs-a 305 ■ pp. āmutta (q.v.).
ā + mtic
having put on, clothed in, dressed with adorned with (always ˚-) DN i.104 (˚mālābharaṇa); Vin ii.156 = Vv 208 (˚maṇi-kuṇḍala); SN i.211; Ja iv.460; v. 155; vi.492; Vv 721 (= paṭimukka); 802 (˚hatthābharaṇa); Pv ii.951 (˚maṇikuṇḍala);J iv.183; Vv-a 182.
Sk. āmukta, pp. of ā + muc, cp. also BSk. āmukta jewel Divy 2, Divy 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later Pāli passages, e.g. at Pv-a 134. Semantically cp. ābharaṇa
(or Āmeḍita ) -(nt.) sympathy in ˚ṃ karoti to show sympathy (? so Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 106) DN-a i.228; Snp-a 155 (v.l. at DA āmeḍita).
Sk. āmreḍita fram ā + mreḍ, dialectical
= āma DN i.192, DN i.3.
that which pleases; fragrance, perfume Dāvs v.51.
Sk. āmoda, fr. ā + mud
(f.) rejoicing Dhs 86, Dhs 285.
fr. ā + mud
(adj.) rejoicing, glad SN i.100 (v.l. anu˚) = Iti 66; Vv 648 (= pamodamāna Vv-a 278); Ja v.45.
ppr. med. of āmodeti
pleased, satisfied, glad Ja i.17 (v.80); v.45 (˚pamodita highly pleased); Mil 346.
pp. fr. āmodeti
to please, gladden, satisfy Thag 649 (cittaṃ); Ja v.34 ■ pp. āmodita (q.v.).
Sk. āmodayati, Caus. of ā + mud
1. coming in, entrance MN iii.93. - 2. tax Ja v.113.
3. income, earning, profit, gain (opp vaya loss) AN iv.282 = AN iv.323; Snp 978; Ja i.228; Kp-a 38 (in expln. of kāya), 82 (in etym. of āyatana); Pv-a 130. 4. (āyā f.?) a lucky dice (“the incomer”) Ja vi.281.
-kammika a treasurer Dhp-a i.184. -kusala clever in earnings Ne 20. -kosalla proficiency in money making DN iii.220 (one of the three kosallas); Vb 325. -pariccāga expediture of one’s income Pv-a 8. -mukha (lit. entrance, inflow, going in DN i.74 (= āgamana-magga DA 1.78); MN ii.15; AN ii.166; (fig.) revenue income, money Snp-a 173.
Sk. āya; ā + i
1. (adj.) outstretched, extended, long, in length (with numeral) DN iii.73 (ñātikkhaya, prolonged or heavy?); MN i.178 (dīghato ā˚; tiriyañ ca vitthata); Ja i.77, Ja i.273 (tettiṃs’-angul’āyato khaggo); iii.438; Vv 8415 (˚aṃsa; cp. expln. at Vv-a 339) Snp-a 447; Dhs-a 48; Pv-a 152 (dāṭhā fangs; lomā hair) 185 (˚vaṭṭa); Sdhp 257.
2. (n.) a bow Ja iii.438.
-agga having its point (end) stretched forward, i.e. in the future (see āyati) Iti 15, Iti 52. -paṇhin having long eye-lashes (one of the signs of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.17 DN iii.143. -pamha a long eye-lash Thig 384 (= dīghapakhuma Thag-a 250).
Sk. āyata, pp. of ā + yam, cp. āyamati
(adj.)
1. long. extended, prolonged, kept up, lasting Vin ii.108 (gītassara); AN iii.251 (id.) Ja i.362.
2. sudden, abrupt, instr. ˚ena abruptly Vin ii.237.
= āyata
(nt.)
1. stretch, extent, reach, compass region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position, occasion (corresponding to Bdhgh’s definition at DN-a i.124 as “samosaraṇa”) DN iii.241, DN iii.279 (vimutti˚); SN ii.41, SN ii.269; SN iv.217 SN v.119 sq., 318. sq.; AN iii.141 (ariya˚); v.61 (abhibh˚ q.v.) Snp 406 (rajass˚ “haunt of passion” = rāgādi-rajassa uppatti-deso Snp-a 381); Ja i.80 (raj˚). Freq. in phrase araññ˚; a lonely spot, a spot in the forest Ja i.173; Vv-a 301; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 54.
2. exertion, doing, working, practice performance (comprising Bdhgh’s definition at DN-a i.124 as paññatti), usually -˚, viz. kamm˚; Nd i.505; Vb 324 Vb 353; kasiṇ˚; AN v.46 sq., 60; Pts i.28; titth˚; AN i.173 AN i.175; Vb 145, Vb 367; sipp˚; (art, craft) DN i.51; Nd ii.505 Vb 324, Vb 353; cp. an˚; non-exertion, indolence, sluggishness Ja v.121.
3. sphere of perception or sense in general, object of thought, sense-organ & object; relation order ■ Cpd. p. 183 says rightly: “āyatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense-organs (the mind being regarded as 6th sense) and sense objects” ■ These āyatanāni (relations, functions reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikāni) and outer (bāhirāni), and comprise the foll.: (a) ajjhatt˚;: 1. cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghāna nose, 4. jivhā tongue, 5. kāya body, 6. mano mind (b) bāh˚;: 1. rūpa visible object, 2. sadda sound, 3 gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phoṭṭhabba tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object ■ For details as regards connotation & application see Dhs trsl. introduction li sq. Cpd. 90 n. 2; 254 sq ■ Approximately covering this meaning (3) is Bdhgh’s definition of āyatana at DN-a i.124 as sañjāti and as kāraṇa (origin & cause i.e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations). See also Nd;2 under rūpa for further classifications-For the above mentioned 12 āyatanāni see the foll. passages: DN ii.302 sq.; DN iii.102, DN iii.243; AN iii.400 AN v.52; Snp 373 (cp. Snp-a 366); Pts i.7, Pts i.22, Pts i.101, Pts i.137; ii. 181, 225, 230; Dhs 1335; Vb 401 sq.; Ne 57, Ne 82 Vism 481; Thag-a 49, Thag-a 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at SN i.113, SN ii.3; SN iv.100, SN iv.174 sq.; Iti 114; Vb 135 sq., 294 Ne 13, Ne 28, Ne 30; Vism 565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Ne 69; of 4 at DN ii.112, DN ii.156; of 2 at DN ii.69 ■ Here also belongs ākās’ ānañc’ āyatana, ākiñcaññ˚ etc. (see under ākāsa etc. and s. v.), e.g. at DN i.34 sq., 183; AN iv.451 sq.; Vb 172, Vb 189, Vb 262 sq.; Vism 324 sq ■ Unclassified passages: MN i.61; MN ii.233; MN iii.32, MN iii.216, MN iii.273; SN i.196; SN ii.6 SN ii.8, SN ii.24, SN ii.72 sq.; SN iii.228; SN iv.98; SN v.426; AN i.113, AN i.163, AN i.225 AN iii.17, AN iii.27, AN iii.82, AN iii.426; AN iv.146, AN iv.426; AN v.30, AN v.321, AN v.351, AN v.359 Nd i.109, Nd i.133, Nd i.171, Nd i.340; Ja i.381 (paripuṇṇa˚); Vb 412 sq. (id.).
-uppāda birth of the āyatanas (see above 3) Vin i.185 -kusala skilled in the ā. MN iii.63. -kusalatā skill in the spheres (of sense) DN iii.212; Dhs 1335. -ṭṭha founded in the sense-organs Pts i.132; Pts ii.121.
Sk. āyatana, not found in the Vedas; but freq. in BSk. From ā + yam, cp. āyata. The pl. is āyatanā at SN iv.70 ■ For full definition of term as seen by the Pāli Commentators see Bdhgh’s expln at DN-a i.124, DN-a i.125, with which cp. the popular etym. at Kp-a 82 “āyassa vā tananato āyatassa vā saṃsāradukkhassa nayanato āyatanāni” and at Vism 527 “āye tanoti āyatañ ca nayatī ti ā.”
(adj.) belonging to the sphere of (some special sense, see āyatana 3) SN iv.126 (phass niraya & sagga).;
fr. āyatana
(f.) “stretching forth”, extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in acc. āyatiṃ (adv.) in future Vin ii.89, Vin ii.185; Vin iii.3; Snp 49; Iti 115 (T. reads āyati but cp. p. 94 where T. āyatiṃ, v.l. āyati) Ja i.89; Ja v.431; DN-a i.236.
fr. ā + yam, cp. Sk. āyati
(adj.) future SN i.142.
fr. last
(f.) a tube, waterpipe Vin ii.123.
of āyataka
.
1. striving, active, ready, exerted Ja v.395 (˚mana = ussukkamana C.). 2. striven after, pursued Ja i.341.
3. dependent on Vism 310 (assāsa-passāsa˚); Ne 194; Sdhp 477, Sdhp 605.
Sk. āyatta, pp. of ā + yat
(f.) at Dhs-a 259 and Vism 26 is a grammarian’s construction, abstracted from f. abstr. words ending in ˚āyanā, e.g. kankhā → kankhāyanā, of which the correct expln. is a derivation fr. caus ■ formation kankhāyati → kankhāy + a + nā. What the idea of Bdhgh. was in propounding his expln. is hard to say, perhaps he related it to i and understood it to be the same as āyāna.
?
to stretch, extend, stretch out, draw out Mil 176, usually in ster. phrase piṭṭhi me āgilāyati tam ahaṃ āyamissāmi “my back feels weak, I will stretch it” Vin ii.200; DN iii.209; MN i.354; SN iv.184; Ja i.491. Besides this in commentaries e.g. Ja iii.489 (mukhaṃ āyamituṃ).
ā + yam
(adj.) made of iron SN ii.182; AN iii.58; Dhp 345; Ja iv.416; Ja v.81; Vv 845 (an˚ cp. the rather strange expln. at Vv-a 335).
Sk. āyasa, of ayas iron
(nt.) dishonour, disgrace, bad repute AN iv.96; Ja v.17; Vv-a 110; usually in phrase ˚ṃ pāpuṇāti to fall into disgrace Thag 292; Ja ii.33 = Ja ii.271; Ja iii.514..
Bdhgh on AN iv.96 explains it as ayasaka + ya with guṇa of the initial, cp. ārogya
(adj.) lit. old, i.e. venerable; used, either as adj. or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some standing (cp. the semantically identical thera ). It occurs usually in nom. āyasmā and is expld. in Nd by typical formula “piya-vacanaṃ garu˚, sagārava-sappaṭissâdhivacanaṃ”, e.g. Nd i.140, Nd i.445; Nd ii.130 on var. Sn loci (e.g. 814, 1032, 1040, 1061, 1096) ■ Freq. in all texts, of later passages see Snp-a 158; Pv-a 53, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 63 Pv-a 78 ■ See also āvuso.
Sk. āyuṣmant, the P. form showing assimilation of u to a
sacrificial fee, gift; (m.) recipient of a sacrifice or gift (deyyadhamma) Snp 486 (= deyyadhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhāna-bhūta Snp-a 412); Thag 566; Ja vi.205 (˚vatthu worthy objact of sacrificial fees).
ā + yāga of yaj
(adj.-n.) one who begs or prays, petitioner Mil 129.
fr. ā + yāc
1. to request, beg, implore, pray to (acc.) Vin iii.127; DN i.240; Pv-a 160.
2. to make a vow, to vow, promise AN i.88; Ja i.169 = Ja v.472; Ja i.260; Ja ii.117 ■ pp. āyācita (q.v.).
ā + yāc, cp. Buddh. Sk. āyācate Divy 1.
(nt.)
1. asking, adhortation, addressing (t. t. g. in expln. of imperative) Snp-a 43, Snp-a 176 Snp-a 412.
2. a vow, prayer AN i.88; AN iii.47; Ja i.169 = Ja v.472.
fr. āyācati
vowed, promised Ja i.169 (˚bhattajātaka N.).
pp. of āyācati
gone to, undertaken Sdhp 407.
pp. of āyāt.; cp. BSk. āyāta in same meaning at Jtm 210
to come on or here, to come near, approach, get into SN i.240; Snp 669; Snp p.116 (= gacchati Snp-a 463); Ja iv.410; pv ii.1212 (= āgacchati Pv-a 158); Dhp-a i.93 (imper. āyāma let us go) ■ pp. āyāta.
ā + yāti of yā
(nt.) coming, arrival: see āyanā.
fr. ā + yā to go
1. (lit.) stretching, stretching out, extension Vin i.349 = Ja iii.488 (mukh˚). 2. (appl.) usually as linear measure: extension, length (often combd. with and contrasted to vitthāra breadth or width & ubbedha height), as n. (esp. in abl. āyāmato instr. āyāmena in length) or as adj. (-˚): Ja i.7, Ja i.49 (˚ato tīṇi yojanasatāni, vitthārato aḍḍhatiyāni); iii.389; Mil 17 (ratanaṃ soḷasahatthaṃ āyāmena aṭṭhahatthaṃ vitthārena) 282 (ratanaṃ catuhatth’āyāmaṃ); Vism 205 (+ vitth˚) Khb 133 (+ vitthāra & parikkhepa); Vv-a 188 (soḷasayojan˚), 199 (˚vitthārehi), 221 (˚ato + vitth˚); Pv-a 77 (+ vitth˚), 113 (id. + ubbedha); Dhp-a i.17 (saṭṭhi-yojan˚).
fr. ā + yam, see āyamati
trouble, sorrow, only neg. an˚; (adj.) peaceful, free from trouble AN iv.98; Thag 1008.
cp. Sk. āyāsa, etym.?
(nt.) life, vitality, duration of life, longevity DN iii.68, DN iii.69, DN iii.73, DN iii.77; SN iii.143 (usmā ca); iv.294; AN i.155; AN ii.63, AN ii.66 (addh˚); iii.47 iv.76, 139; Snp 694, Snp 1019; Iti 89; Ja i.197 (dīgh˚); Vv 555 (cp. Vv-a 247 with its definition of divine life as comprising 30 600 000 years); Vism 229 (length of man’s āyu = 100 years); Dhs 19, Dhs 82, Dhs 295, Dhs 644, Dhs 716; Sdhp 234, Sdhp 239, Sdhp 258 ■ Long or divine life, dibbaṃ āyu is one of the 10 attributes of ādhipateyya or majesty (see ṭhāna ) thus at Vin i.294; DN iii.146; SN iv.275 sq.; AN i.115; iii. 33; iv.242, 396; Pv ii.959 (= jīvitaṃ Pv-a 136).
-ūhā see āyūhā. -kappa duration of life Mil 141; Dhp-a i.250. -khaya decay of life (cp. jīvita-kkhaya) DN i.17 (cp. DN-a i.110); iii.29. -pamāṇa span or measure of life time DN ii.3; AN i.213, AN i.267; AN ii.126 sq.; AN iv.138 AN iv.252 sq., 261; v.172; Pp 16; Vb 422 sq.; Snp-a 476 -pariyanta end of life Iti 99; Vism 422. -saṅkhaya exhaustion of life or lifetime Dpvs v.102. -saṅkhāra (usually pl. ˚ā) constituent of life, conditions or properties resulting in life, vital principle DN ii.106; MN i.295 sq.; SN ii.266; AN iv.311 sq.; Ud 64; Ja iv.215; Mil 285; Vism 292; Dhp-a i.129; Pv-a 210. Cp. BSk. āyuḥ-saṃskāra Divy 203.
Vedic āyus; Av. āyu, gradation form of same root as Gr. αἰών “aeon”, αἰέν always; Lat. aevum, Goth aiws. Ohg. ēwa, io always; Ger. ewig eternal; Ags. āē eternity, ā always (cp. ever and aye)
(-˚) (adj.) -being of life; having a life or age AN iv.396 (niyat˚); Vv-a 196 (yāvatāyukā dibbasampatti divine bliss lasting for a lifetime). Esp. freq in combn. with dīgha (long) and appa (short) as dīghāyuka AN iv.240; Pv-a 27; appāyuka AN iv.247; Pv-a 103 both at Vism 422. In phrase vīsati-vassasahass’āyukesu manussesu at the time when men lived 20 000 years DN ii.5–12 (see Table at Dial. ii.6); Dhp-a ii.9; Pv-a 135 dasa-vassasahass’āyukesu manussesu (10 000 years) Pv-a 73; cattāḷīsa˚ Dhp-a i.103; catusaṭṭhi-kapp’āyukā subhakiṇhā Vism 422.
fr. āyu
(adj.) = āyuka; in appāyukin short lived Vv 416.
fr. āyu
(adj.)
1. connected with, endowed, furnished with Thag 753 (dve pannaras’āyuta due to twice fifteen); Snp 301 (nārī-varagaṇ˚ = ˚saṃyutta Snp-a 320); Pv ii.124 (nānā-saragaṇ˚ ˚yutta Pv-a 157).
2. seized, conquered, in dur˚; hard to conquer, invincible Ja vi.271 (= paccatthikehi durāsada C.).
Sk. ayuta, pp. of ā + yu, yuvati
1. yoked, to connected with, full of Pv i.1014 (tejas’āyuta T., but Pv-a 52 reads ˚āyutta and explns. as samāyutta); Pv-a 157 (ākiṇṇa of Pv ii.124).
2. intent upon, devoted to SN i.67.
Sk. āyukta; pp. of ā + yuj
(adj.-n.) one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer Ja i.230 (˚vesa); iv.492; Dhp-a i.101, Dhp-a i.103, Dhp-a i.180.
āyutta + ka
is the Vedic form of the common Pāli form āvudha weapon, and occurs only spuriously at DN i.9 (v.l. āvudha).
(adj.) advanced in years, old, of age Thag 234.
fr. āyu
(adj.) having life or vitality Pv-a 63 (āyusmāviññāṇa feeling or sense of vitality; is reading correct?).
Sk. āyuṣmant; see also the regular P. form āyasmant
(adj.) connected with life, bringing (long) life AN iii.145 dhamma).
Sk. *āyuṣya
(adj.) keen, eager, active Mil 207 (+ viriyavā).
fr. āyūhati
lit. to push on or forward aim at, go for, i.e. (1) to endeavour, strain, exert oneself SN i.1 (ppr. anāyūhaṃ unstriving), 48; Ja vi.35 (viriyaṃ karoti C.), 283 (= vāyamati C.) ■ (2) to be keen on (w. acc.), to cultivate, pursue, do Snp 210 (karoti Snp-a 258); Mil 108 (kammaṃ ūyūhitvā), 214 (kammaṃ āyūhi), 326 (maggaṃ) ■ pp. āyūhita (q.v.).
ā + y + ūhati with euphonic y, fr. Vedic ūhati, ūh1, a gradation of vah (see etym. under vahati). Kern’s etym. on Toev. 99 = āyodhati is to be doubted, more acceptable is Morris’ expln. at J.P.T.S. 1885, 58 sq. although contradictory in part.
(adj.-n..)
1. endeavouring, striving, Pts i.10 sq., 32, 52; ii.218; Vism 103, Vism 212, Vism 462, Vism 579 f. āyūhanī Dhs 1059 (“she who toils” trsl.) = Vb 361 Nd ii.taṇhā 1. (has āyūhanā).
2. furtherance, pursuit DN-a i.64 (bhavassa).
fr. āyūhati
f. life, lifetime, only in ˚pariyosāna at the end of (his) life Pv-a 136, Pv-a 162; Vv-a 319.
āyu + ūhā
to cause somebody to toil or strive after Dhs-a 364.
Caus. II. fr. āyūhati
busy, eager, active Mil 181.
*Sk. ā + ūhita, pp. of ūh
1. binding, bandage Vin ii.135; Vv 3341; Vv-a 142 (˚paṭṭa).
2 yoke Dhs 1061 (avijj˚), 1162.
3. ornament, decoration Nd i.226; Ja iii.447 (˚vatta, for v.l. ˚vanta?).
4. occupation devotion to, pursuit, exertion DN i.187; Dhp 185 (= payoga-karaṇa Dhp-a iii.238).
5. (t. t.) obligation guarantee(?) Snp-a 179 ■ Cp. sam˚.
Sk. āyoga, of ā + yuj; cp. āyutta
(nt.) warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. gen.); occurring only in pop. etym. of arahant at AN iv.145; Dhp-a iv.228; DN-a i.146 = Vv-a 105, Vv-a 106 = Pv-a 7; cp. Dhs-a 349.
*ārakāt + tvaṃ
(adv.) far off, far from, away from, also used as prep. c abl. and as adj. pl. keeping away from, removed, far Vin ii.239 = AN iv.202 (sanghamhā); DN i.99, DN i.102 (adj. 167; MN i.280 (adj.) SN ii.99; SN iv.43 sq.; AN i.281; Iti 91; Ja i.272; Ja iii.525; Ja v.451; Mil 243; Vv-a 72, Vv-a 73 (adj + viratā).
Sk. ārāt & ārakāt, abl. form. fr. *āraka, see ārā;2
watch, guard, protection, care DN ii.59; DN iii.289; SN iv.97, SN iv.175, SN iv.195; AN ii.120; AN iii.38; iv. 266, 270, 281 (˚sampadā), 322 (id.), 400; v.29 sq.; Ja i.203; Ja ii.326; Ja iv.29 (˚purisa); v.212 (˚ṭṭhāna, i.e. harem) 374 (˚parivāra); Pp 21 (an˚), 24; Mil 154; Vism 19 (˚gocara preventive behaviour, cautiousness); Snp-a 476 (˚devatā); Kp-a 120 (id.), 169; Dhp-a ii.146; Pv-a 195 Sdhp 357, Sdhp 365.
ā + rakkha
a guard, watchman Ja iv.29.
fr. ārakkha
see arakkheyya.
(nt.) the point of an awl, the head of certain arrows having the shape of an awl, or an arrow of that kind (see Halayudha p. 151) AN i.65; Snp 625, Snp 631; Dhp 401 Dhp 407; Vism 306; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iv.181.
ārā + agga; Sk. ārāgra of ārā an awl, a prick
by means of hammering, slashing or beating (like beating a hide) Snp 673 (gloss ārajayārajayā fr. ā + *rañj or *raj ) ■ Snp-a 481 explns. the passage as follows: ārajayārajayā; i.e. yathā manussā allacammaṃ bhūmiyaṃ pattharitvā khīlehi ākoṭenti, evaṃ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāḷetvā ekam ekaṃ koṭiṃ chinditvā vihananti, chinnachinnakoṭi punappuna samuṭṭhāti; āracayāracayā ti pi pāṭho, āviñjitvā (v.l. BB āvijjhitvā) āviñjitvā ti attho ■ Cp. ārañjita.
ā + racayā a ger. or abl. form. fr. ā + *rac, in usual Sk. meaning “to produce”, but here as a sound-root for slashing noise, in reduplication for sake of intensification. Altogether problematic
(adj.) belonging to solitude or the forest, sequestered; living in the forest, fond of seclusion, living as hermits (bhikkhū). Freq. spelt araññaka (q.v.) ■ Vin i.92 (bhikkhū); ii.32, 197, 217 (bh.) 265 (bh.); MN i.214; AN iii.100 sq., 219; iv.21; v.66; Ja iii.174 (v.l. BB. a˚); Mil 342; Dhp-a ii.94 (vihāra).
fr. arañña + ka
(nt.) the habit of sequestration or living in solitude MN i.214; MN iii.40; AN i.38.
abstr. fr. āraññaka, see also araññakatta
(adj.) = āraññaka Vin iii.15; AN i.24; Pp 69; Vism 61, Vism 71 (where defined); Mil 341.
furrowed, cut open, dug up, slashed torn (perhaps also “beaten”) MN i.178 (hatthipadaṃ dantehi ārañjitaṃ an elephant-track bearing the marks of tusks, i.e. occasional slashes or furrows).
in form = Sk. *ārañjita, ā + pp. of rañjayati, Caus. of rañj or raj, but in meaning different. Perhaps to rac (as *racita) to furnish with, prepare, or better still to be regarded as an idiomatic Pāli form of soundroot *rac (see āracayā˚) mixed with rañj, of which we find another example in the double spelling of āracayā (& ārajayā) q.v.
leaving off, keeping away from, abstaining Ja iv.372 (= virata); Nd ii.591 (+ virata paṭivirata).
Sk. ārata, pp. of ā + ram, cp. ārati
(f.) leaving off, abstinence Vv 639 (= paṭivirati Vv-a 263); in exegetical style occurring in typ. combn. with virati paṭivirati veramaṇī, e.g. at Nd ii.462; Dhs 299.
Sk. ārati, ā + ram
(nt.?) time, period (orig. affected, tinted with), only in cpd. vassāratta the rainy season, lent Ja iv.444; Dāvs ii.74.
Sk. cp. ārakta, pp. of ā + raj
(adj.) begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm AN i.148 (āraddhaṃ me viriyaṃ Iti 30; Pv-a 73 (ṭhapetuṃ began to place) 212 (gantuṃ). Cp. ārādhaka 1.
-citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled DN i.176; MN i.414; SN ii.21; Snp p.102; Snp-a 436. Cp. ārādheti 1 -viriya (adj.) strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin i.182; DN iii.252, DN iii.268, DN iii.282, DN iii.285; AN i.24; Snp 68, Snp 344; Iti 71 (opp. hīna-viriya); Nd ii.131; Pts i.171; Thag-a 95. Cp viriyārambha; f. abstr. ˚viriyatā MN i.19.
pp. of ā + rabh
(indecl.)
1. beginning undertaking etc., in cpd. ˚vatthu occasion for making an effort concern, duty, obligation DN iii.256 = AN iv.334 (eight such occasions enumd).
2. (prep. with acc.) lit. beginning with, taking (into consideration), referring to concerning, with reference to, about DN i.180; AN ii.27; Iti 103 (senāsanaṃ ā.); Snp 972 (upekhaṃ; v.l. ārambha C. uppādetvā); Pv i.41 (pubbe pete ā.); Dhp-a i.3; Dhp-a ii.37; Pv-a 3 (seṭṭhiputta-petaṃ ā.), 16, and passim.
ger. of ārabhati2 in abs. function; cp. Sk. ārabhya meaning since, from
to kill, destroy MN i.371 (pāṇaṃ).
not with Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 202 fr. rabh and identical with ārabhati2, but with Kern, Toev. s. v identical with Sk. ālabhate, ā + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirārambha
to begin, start, undertake, attempt SN i.156 (ārabbhatha “bestir yourselves”) = Mil 245 Thag 256 (bh.); Pp 64 (bh.); viriyaṃ ārabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself (cp. ārambha) AN iv.334. aor. ārabhi Dhp-a ii.38 & ārabbhi Pv-a 35 ■ ger ārabbha, see sep ■ pp. āraddha (q.v.).
ā + rabhati, Sk. ārabhati & ārambhati, ā + ; rabh
1. attempt, effort, inception of energy (cp. Dhs trsl. 15 & K. S. p. 318 giving C. def. as kicca, karaṇīya, attha, i.e. 1. undertaking duty, 2. object) SN i.76 (mah˚); v.66, 104 sq. (˚dhātu) iii.338 (id.), 166 (˚ja; T. arabbhaja, v.l. ārambhaja to be preferred) = Pp 64; Mil 244; Net 41; Dhs-a 145 -viriyārambha (cp. āraddha-viriya) zeal, resolution, energy Vin ii.197; SN iv.175; AN i.12, AN i.16.
2. support, ground object, thing Ne 70 sq., 107; an˚; unsupported, independent Snp 743 (= nibbāna Snp-a 507). Cp. also nirambha upārambha, sārambha.
Sk. ārambha in meaning “beginning”, fr ā + rabh (rambh) cp. ārabhati
(nt.) primary meaning “foundation”, from this applied in the foll. senses: (1 support, help, footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means of achieving what is desired, i.e. basis of operation, chance Snp 1069 (= ālambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd ii.132); Pv i.41 (yaṃ kiñc’ ārammaṇaṃ katvā) ārammaṇaṃ labhati (+ otāraṃ labhati) to get the chance SN ii.268; SN iv.185 ■ (2) condition, ground, cause, means esp. a cause of desire or clinging to life, pl. ˚ā causes of rebirth (interpreted by taṇhā at Nd i.429), lust Snp 474 (= paccayā Snp-a 410), 945 (= Nd i.429); Kp-a 23; Dhp-a i.288 (sappāy˚); Pv-a 279 ■ (3) a basis for the working of the mind & intellect; i.e. sense-object, object of thought or consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of “relation” it is closely connected with āyatana (see āyatana3), so that it sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Cpd. 3 distinguishes a 5 fold object viz. citta, cetasika, pasāda-& sukhuma-rūpa, paññatti nibbāna. See on term especially; Cpd. 3, 14; Dhs trsl. xli..& 209 ■ A 1. sq.; iv.385; Snp 506; Pts i.57 sq. 84 (four ā.); ii.97, 118, 143; Dhs 1 (dhamm˚ object of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim; Vb 12, Vb 79, Vb 92 Vb 319, Vb 332 (four); Ne 191 (six); Vism 87 sq., 375 (˚sankantika), 430 sq. (in var. sets with ref. to var. objects) 533; Dhs-a 48, Dhs-a 127; Vv-a 11, Vv-a 38 ■ rūpārammaṇa lit dependence on form, i.e. object of sight, visible form especially striking appearance, visibility, sight DN iii.228; SN iii.53; AN i.82; Ja i.304; Ja ii.439, Ja ii.442; Pv-a 265. ārammaṇaṃ karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one’s concern (cp. Pv i.41, above 1)-ārammaṇa -kusala clever in the objects (of meditation SN iii.266; ā˚ -paccayatā relation of presentation (i.e. of subj. & obj.) Ne 80 ■ (4) (-˚) (adj.) being supported by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon Pv-a 8 (nissay˚), 98 (ek˚); Vv-a 119 (buddh˚ pīti rapture centred in the Buddha).
cp. Sk. ālambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh (see rabhati)
(adj.) metri causa for araha deserving Ja vi.164.
(nt.) only in pl. gihīnaṃ ārahāni, things proper to laymen, DN iii.163.
(f.) an awl; see cp āragga. Perhaps a der. of ārā is āḷakā (q.v.).
Sk. ārâ; *ēl “pointed”, as in Ohg. āla = Ger. ahle, Ags. āēl = E awl; Oicel. alr
(indecl.) far from, remote (from) (adv. as well as prep. with abl.) Snp 156 (pamādamhā), 736; Dhp 253 (āsavakkhayā; Dhp-a iii.377 expls. by dūragata); Ja ii.449 (jhānabhūmiyā; = dūre ṭhita C.) v.78 (saṃyame; = dūrato C.). See also ārakā.
-cāra [in this combn. by Kern, Toev. s. v. unecessarily expld. as ārā = ārya; cp. similar phrases under ārakā] a life remote (from evil) AN iv.389. -cārin living far from evil leading a virtuous life DN i.4; MN i.179; MN iii.33; AN iii.216, AN iii.348; AN iv.249; AN v.138, AN v.205; DN-a i.72 (= abrahmacariyato dūra-cārin).
Vedic ārād, abl. as adv.; orig. a root der. fr. *ara remoteness, as in Sk. araṇa foreign & araṇya solitude q.v. under araṇa;1 and arañña
(adj.-n.) 1. [perhaps for *āraddhaka because of analogy to āraddha of ā + rabh ] successful accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin i.70 (an˚ one who fails); MN i.491; MN ii.197 = AN i.69; Mil 243; SN v.19; AN v.329 (in correlation with āraddhaviriya).
2. pleasing, propitiating Mil 227; Vv-a 220 (˚ikā f.).
fr. ā + rādh
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) (either fr. ā + rādh or ā + rabh, cp. ārādhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment DN ii.287 (opp. virādhanā failure); MN i.479 MN ii.199; AN v.211 sq.; Ja iv.427.
(adj.) to be attained, to be won; successful Vin i.70 (an˚); Ja ii.233 (dur˚).
grd. fr. ārādheti
pleased Sdhp 510.
pp. of ārādheti; Sk. ārādhita, but BSk. ārāgita, e.g. Divy 131, Divy 233
1. to please, win favour propitiate, convince Ja i.337 (dārake), 421, 452; ii.72 (manusse); iv.274 (for ābhirādheti T.); Vism 73 (ārādhayanto Nāthassa vana-vāsena mānasaṃ); Dhp-a ii.71; Dāvs iii.93 (ārādhayi sabbajanaṃ); Mil 352. In older literature only in phrase cittaṃ ārādheti to please one’s heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate DN i.118 sq., 175 (but cp āraddha-citta to ārabhati); MN i.85, MN i.341; SN ii.107; SN v.109; Ja ii.372; Mil 25.
2. to attain, accomplish, fulfill succeed SN v.23 (maggaṃ), 82, 180, 294; It iii. (v.l. ārām˚); Snp 488 = Snp 509. Cp. ārādhaka 1 ■ pp. ārādhita (q.v.) ■ See also parābhetvā.
Caus. of ā + rādh, in meaning 2 confused with ārabhati. In BSk. strangely distorted to ārāgayati; freq in Divy as well as Avs
1. pleasure, fondness of (-˚), delight, always as adj. (-˚) delighting in, enjoying finding pleasure in (usually combd. with rata, e.g. dhammārāma dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) SN i.235 SN iv.389 sq. (bhav˚, upādān˚); AN i.35, AN i.37, AN i.130; AN ii.28 (bhāvan˚); Iti 82 (dhamm˚); Snp 327 (id.; expld. by Snp-a 333 as rati and “dhamme ārāmo assā ti”); Pp 53 (samagg˚) Vb 351.
2. a pleasure-ground, park, garden (lit sport, sporting); classified at Vin iii.49 as pupph˚ and phal˚ a park with flowers or with fruit (i.e. orchard) def. at Dhp-a iii.246 as Veḷuvana-Jīvak’ ambavan’ ādayo i.e. the park of Veḷuvana, or the park belonging to Jīvaka or mango-groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin ii.109; DN i.106; Dhp 188; Vv 795 (amb˚ garden of mangoes); Vv-a 305 (id.); Pv ii.78 (pl. ārāmāni = ārām’ ûpavanāni Pv-a 102) ■ (b) (in special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Sangha for the benefit of the bhikkhus where they meet & hold discussions about sacred secular matters; a place of recreation and meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst the many ārāmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is that of Anāthapiṇḍika (Jetavana; see Ja i.92
94) DN i.178; Vin iv.69; others more frequently mentioned are e.g. the park of Ambapālī (Vin i.233); of Mallikā (DN i.178) etc ■ Vin i.39, Vin i.140, Vin i.283, Vin i.291; Vin ii.170; Vin iii.6, Vin iii.45, Vin iii.162 Vin iv.85; AN ii.176; Dpvs v.18.
-pāla keeper of a park or orchard, gardener Vin ii.109; Vv-a 288. -ropa,-ropana planter, planting of pleasuregroves SN i.33; Pv-a 151. -vatthu the site of an Ārāma Vin i.140; ii. 170; iii.50, 90.
Sk. ārāma, ā + ram
(f.) see ārāmika.
(f.) pleasure, satisfaction AN ii.28; AN iii.116; Vb 381; Mil 233.
abstr. fr. ārāma 1
(adj.) 1. (to ārāma 1) finding delight in, fond of (c. gen.) (or servant in general?) Mil 6 (sanghassa trsl. at the service of the order).
2. (to ārāma 2) belonging to an Ārāma, one who shares the congregation, an attendant of the Ārāma Vin i.207 sq. Vin ii.177 (& ˚pesaka), 211; iii.24; iv.40; v.204; AN ii.78 (˚samaṇuddesa); iii.109 (id.), 275 (˚pesaka); Ja i.38 (˚kicca Vism 74 (˚samaṇuddesa) ■ f. ārāmakiṇī a female attendant or visitor of an Ārāma Vin i.208.
fr. ārāma
cry, sound, noise Dāvs iv.46.
cp. Sk. ārāva, fr. ā + ru
in anāriya at Snp 815 is metric for anariya (q.v.).
(nt.) weeping, crying, lamenting Mil 357.
orig. pp of ā + rud
(adj.) formless, incorporeal; nt. formless existence DN iii.275; MN i.410 cp. 472; iii.163; SN i.131 (˚ṭṭhāyin); ii.123; AN iv.316; Iti 61; Snp 754; Ja i.406; Dhs 1385 (cp. trsl. 57); Vism 338; DN-a i.224; Snp-a 488, Snp-a 508; Sdhp 5, Sdhp 10; the four Vism iii, 326 sq.
fr. arūpa as ā (= a2)-*rūpya
to climb, ascend, go up or on to Snp 1014 (aor. āruhaṃ); Sdhp 188; ger. āruhitvā Snp 321 āruyha Ja vi.452; Snp 139 (v.l. abhiruyha); Iti 71. Caus. āropeti (q.v.).
ā + ruh
see ārogya.
1. ascended, mounted, gone up, gone on to iv.137; Ja vi.452 (T. āruḷha); Vism 135 (nekkhamma-paṭipadaṃ an˚); Vv-a 64 (magga˚); Pv-a 47 (˚nāva), 56 (hatthi˚).
2. come about, effected, made done Pv-a 2, Pv-a 144 (cp. BSk. pratijñām ārūḍha having taken a vow Divy 26).
3. (of an ornament) put on (to), arrayed Ja vi.153, Ja vi.488.
pp. of āruhati
see āroha.
(f.) freedom from illness, health Mil 341.
abstr. fr. a + roga + tā
(nt.) absence of illness, health DN i.11; DN iii.220 (˚mada), 235 (˚sampadā); MN i.451 (T. ārūgya, v.l. ārogya), 508, 509; SN ii.109; AN i.146 (˚mada); ii.143; iii.72; v.135 sq.; Snp 749, Snp 257 = Dhp 204 = Ja iii.196; Nd i.160; Vism 77 (˚mada pride of health); Pv-a 129, Pv-a 198; Sdhp 234.
abstr. fr. aroga, i.e. ā (= a2) + roga + ya
(nt.) announcement Dhp-a ii.167.
fr. ārocāpeti, Caus. of āroceti
(Caus. II. of āroceti] to make some one announce, to let somebody know, usually in phrase kālaṃ ā. Snp p.111; Ja i.115, Ja i.125; Dhp-a ii.89; Pv-a 141.
announced, called Vin ii.213 (kāla).
pp. of āroceti
to relate, to tell, announce, speak to address DN i.109, DN i.224; Pv ii.89 (aor, ārocayi); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 13 (aññamaññaṃ anārocetvā not speaking to each other), 81 274 & freq. passim ■ pp. ārocita; Caus. II. ārocāpeti (q.v.).
ā + roceti, Caus. of ruc; cp. BSk. ārocayati Sp. Avs i.9 etc.
(nt.) crying, lamenting AN iii.268 sq.; Ja i.34; Dhp-a i.184; Dhp-a ii.100.
fr. ā + rud, cp. āruṇṇa
(nt.) “putting on to”, impaling Mil 197 (sūl˚), 290 (id.).
fr. āropeti
1. produced, come forward, set up Pv-a 2.
2. effected, made SN iii.12; Pv-a 92 Pv-a 257.
3. put on (to a stake), impaled Pv-a 220 (= āvuta).
pp. of āropeti
.
1. to make ascend, to lead up to (w. acc.) Pv-a 76 (pāsādaṃ), 160 (id.)
2. to put on, take up to (w. acc. or loc.) Pv ii.92 (yakkhaṃ yānaṃ āropayitvāna); Pv-a 62 (sarīraṃ citakaṃ ā.), 100 (bhaṇḍaṃ sakaṭesu ā.).
3. to put on, commit to the care of entrust, give over to (w. loc.) Ja i.227; Pv-a 154 (rajjaṃ amaccesu ā.).
4. to bring about, get ready, make Pv-a 73, Pv-a 257 (sangahaṃ ā. make a collection); Snp-a 51, Snp-a 142. 5. to exhibit, tell, show, give SN i.160 (ovādaṃ); Mil 176 (dosaṃ); Dhp-a ii.75 (id.)
6. vādaṃ āropeti to refute a person, to get the better of (gen.) Vin i.60; MN ii.122; SN i.160 ■ pp. āropita (q.v.).
Caus. of āruhati
(-˚)
1. climbing up, growth, increase, extent, in cpd. ˚pariṇāha length & circumference SN ii.206; AN i.288; AN ii.250; AN iv.397; AN v.19; Ja iii.192; v. 299; vi.20; Vb 345 (˚māna + pariṇāha-māna); Snp-a 382.
2. one who has climbed up, mounted on, a rider usually in cpd. ass˚ & hatth˚; horse-rider & elephantrider SN iv.310; AN ii.166 = AN iii.162 (T. ārūha); iv.107; Dhs-a 305.
3. outfit, possession (or increase, as 1? Snp 420 (vaṇṇ˚).
fr. ā + ruh
(nt.) climbing, ascending; ascent Ja i.70; Ja vi.488; Mil 352; Vism 244; Pv-a 74. Alaka-manda
fr. ā + ruh
at Vin ii.152 is of uncertain reading and meaning (“open to view”? or “not having pegs” āḷaka?) vv.ll. āḷakamanta & ālakamandāra; Bdhgh on p. 321 explns. āḷakamandā ti ekangaṇā manussâbhikiṇṇā i.e. full of a crowd of people, Ch. quotes ālakamandā as “the city of Kuvera” (cp. Sk. alakā).
ālaya˚?
to (make) hang on to (loc.), to stick on, fasten to Vin ii.110 (pattaṃ veḷagge ālaggetvā).
ā + Caus. of lag
to address SN i.177, SN i.212; Ja v.201; Snp-a 42, Snp-a 347, Snp-a 383, Snp-a 394 (= āmantayi of Snp 997), 487 (avhayati); Pv-a 11, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 69.
ā + lapati
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) talking to, addressing, conversation Vin iii.73 (with ref. to exclam. “ambho”) Ja v.253 (˚ā); Vism 23 (˚ā); Snp-a 396; Pv-a 131 (re ti ā.).
fr. ā + lap
(f.) speaking to, conversing with, conversation MN i.331) (an˚).
abstr. fr. ālapana
anything to hang on, support SN i.53 (an˚ without support); Snp 173 (id. + appatiṭṭha); Ja iii.396; Mil 343; Sdhp 245, Sdhp 463.
Sk. ālamba, ā + lamb
to hang on to or up, to take hold of, to fasten to Vin i.28, Ja i.57; Ja vi.192; Vv 8448; Thag-a 34 ■ ālambeti id. Vv-a 32.
ā + lamb
(adj.-n..) (adj.) hanging down from, hanging up Ja iii.396; Ja iv.457; Snp-a 214 ■ (nt.) support, balustrade (or screen?) Vin ii.117 Vin ii.152 (˚bāha) Mil 126. Alambara & Alambara;
fr. ā + lamb, cp. ālamba
(nt.) a drum Vin i.15 (l); Ja ii.344 (ḷ); v.390 (l); Vv 5418 (ḷ).
Sk. āḍambara
(m. & nt.)
1. orig. roosting place, perch i.e. abode settling place, house Ja i.10 (geh˚); Mil 213; Dhp-a ii.162 (an˚ = anoka), 170 (= oka).
2. “hanging on”, attachment, desire, clinging, lust SN i.136 = Vin i.4 (˚rāma “devoted to the things to which it clings” K. S.) Vin iii.20, Vin iii.111; SN iv.372 (an˚); v.421 sq. (id.); AN ii.34, AN ii.131 (˚rāma); iii.35; Iti 88; Snp 177 (kām˚ = kāmesu taṇhā-diṭṭhi-vasena duvidho ālayo Snp-a 216), 535 (+ āsavāni), 635; Ne 121, Ne 123 (˚samugghāta); Vism 293 (id.) 497; Mil 203 (Buddh ˚ṃ akāsi?); Dhp-a i.121; Dhp-a iv.186 (taṇhā); Snp-a 468 (= anoka of Snp 366).
3. pretence pretext, feint [cp. BSk. ālaya Mvu iii.314] Ja i.157 (gilān˚) 438; iii.533 (mat˚); iv.37 (gabbhinī); vi.20, 262 (gilān˚).
cp. Sk. ālaya, ā + ; lī, līyate, cp. allīna & allīyati, also nirālaya
see allīyati.
(nt.) sloth, idleness, laziness SN i.43; DN iii.182; AN iv.59; AN v.136; Sdhp 567. Spelling also ālasya SN i.43 (v.l. BB); Vb 352; Mil 289, and ālasiya Ja i.427; DN-a i.310; Dhp-a i.299; Vv-a 43. Alana & Alana;
Der. fr. alasa
(nt.) a peg, stake, post, esp one to which an elephant is tied Ja i.415; Ja iv.308; Dhp-a i.126 (ḷ) where all MSS. have āḷāhana, perhaps correctly.
for ānāhana with substitution of l for n (cp. apilandhana for apinandh˚ and contraction of ˚āhana to ˚āna originally meaning “tying to” then the thing to which anything is tied
(m. or f.? a certain kind of fish Ja v.405.
Sk. āḷi
(f.) a dike, embankment Vin ii.256; MN iii.96; AN ii.166 (˚pabbheda); iii.28; Ja i.336; Ja iii.533, Ja iii.334.
Sk. ālī
in saccālika at SN iv.306 is sacc˚alika distortion of truth, falsehood SN iv.306.
to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing Ja i.71; Mil 51.
ā + likhati
a small drum Ja v.156 (suvaṇṇ˚-tala).
ā + ling
to embrace, enfold DN i.230; DN iii.73; Ja i.281; Ja iv.21, Ja iv.316, Ja iv.438; Ja v.8; Mil 7; Dhp-a i.101: Vv-a 260.
ā + liṅg
besmeared, stained Thag 737.
pp. of ālimpati; Sk. ālipta
(& Āḷinda) a terrace or verandah before the house-door Vin i.248; Vin ii.153; DN i.89; MN ii.119; SN iv.290 (ḷ); AN v.65 (ḷ); Ja vi.429; DN-a i.252; Dhp-a i.26; Dhp-a iv.196; Snp-a 55 (˚ka-vāsin; v.l. alindaka); Mvu 35, Mvu 3. As ālindaka at Ja iii.283.
Sk. alinda
Pass. of ālimpeti (q.v.).
(nt.) conflagration, burning, flame Mil 43.
for āḷimp˚ = Sk. ādīpana, see ālimpeti2
ignited, lit. AN iv.102 (v.l. ālepita).
pp. of ālimpeti2
to smear, anoint Vin ii.107; SN iv.177 (vaṇaṃ) ■ Caus II. ālimpāpeti Vin iv.316 ■ Pass. ālimpīyati Mil 74 & ālippati Dhp-a iv.166 (v.l. for lippati) ■ pp. ālitta (q.v.).
Sk. ālimpayati or ālepayati. ā + lip or limp
to kindle, ignite set fire to Vin ii.138 (dāyo ālimpetabbo); iii.85; DN ii.163 (citakaṃ); AN i.257; Dhp-a i.177 (āvāsaṃ read āvāpaṃ), 225; Pv-a 62 (kaṭṭhāni) ■ pp. ālimpita (q.v.).
for Sk. ādīpayati, with change of d to l over ḷ and substitution of limp for ḷīp after analogy of roots in ˚mp, like lup → lump, lip → limp
(nt.) a bulbous plant, Radix; Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) Ja iv.371 = Ja vi.578; Ja iv.373.
Sk. ālu & ˚ka; cognate with Lat. ālum & alium, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under alium
= ālu Ja iv.46 (C. for ālupa).
(adj.) susceptiblé of, longing for, affected with (-˚) Vin i.288 (sīt˚); DN-a i.198 (id.); Ja ii.278 (taṇh˚ greedy).
etym.?
(nt.) = āluka the edible root of Amorphophallus Campanulatus Ja iv.46 (= āluka-kaṇḍa C.).
the form āluva occurs at Ap 237.
etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests ālu-a → āluva → ālupa
breaking off, falling off (?) or forming into bits(?) Dhp-a ii.55 (˚gūtha).
reading not sure, to ālumpati or ālopa
to pull out, break off MN i.324.
ā + lup or lump, cp. ālopa
(adj. being in motion, confusion or agitation, disturbed, agitated Ja vi.431.
fr. ā + lul
to move here & there, ppr. med.; āluḷamāna agitated, whirling about Dhp-a iv.47 (T. ālūl˚; v.l. āḷul˚) confuse Dhs-a 375 Caus. āluḷeti to set in motion, agitate, confound Ja ii.9 Ja ii.33 ■ pp. āluḷita (q.v.).
ā + lul; Sk. ālolati, cp. also P. āloḷeti
agitated, confused Ja ii.101; Mil 397 (+ khalita).
pp. of āluḷeti
ointment, salve, liniment Vin i.274; Mil 74; Dhs-a 249.
cp. Sk. ālepa, of ā + lip
(nt.) anointing, application of salve DN i.7 (mukkh˚).
fr. ā + lip
seeing, sight (obj. & subj.), i.e.
1. sight, view, look SN iv.128 = Snp 763; AN iii.236 (āloke nikkhitta laid before one’s eye). anāloka without sight, blind Mil 296 (andha + ).
2. light AN i.164 (tamo vigato ā. uppanno) = Iti 100 (vihato); AN ii.139 (four lights, i.e. canda˚, suriya˚, agg˚, paññ˚, of the moon, sun, fire & wisdom); Ja ii.34; Dhs 617 (opp. andhakāra); Vv-a 51 (dīp˚).
3. (clear) sight, power of observation, intuition, in combn. with vijjā knowledge DN ii.33 = SN ii.7 = SN ii.105, cp. Pts ii.150 sq. (obhāsaṭṭhena, S A on ii.7).
4. splendour Vv-a 53; DvA 71.
-kara making light, bringing light, n. light-bringer Iti 108. -karaṇa making light, illumining Iti 108. -da giving light or insight Thag 3. -dassana seeing light, i.e. perceiving Thag 422. -pharaṇa diffusing light or diffusion of light Vb 334; Ne 89. -bahula good in sight fig. full of foresight AN iii.432. -bhūta light Ja vi.459 -saññā consciousness or faculty of sight or perception DN iii.223; AN ii.45; AN iii.93 -saññin conscious of sight i.e. susceptible to sight or insight DN iii.49; MN iii.3; AN ii.211; AN iii.92, AN iii.323; AN iv.437; AN v.207; Pp 69. -sandhi “break for the light”, a slit to look through, an opening a crack or casement Vin i.48 = Vin ii.209 = Vin ii.218; Vin ii.172 Vin iii.65; Vin iv.47; Ja iv.310; Pv-a 24.
ā + lok, Sk. āloka
(nt.) looking at, regarding DN-a i.194.
fr. ā + lok
(nt.) looking before, looking at, looking forward (opp. vilokitaṃ looking behind or backward), always in combn. ālokita-vilokita in ster. phrase at DN i.70 = e.g. AN ii.104, AN ii.106, AN ii.210; Pp 44, Pp 45, Pp 50 Vism 19; Vv-a 6; DN-a i.193 (ālokitaṃ purato pekkhanaṃ vil˚ anudisā p.).
pp. of āloketi
one who looks forward or before, a beholder DN-a i.194 (opp. viloketar).
n. ag. to āloketi
to look before, look at, regard, see DA i.193, 194 ■ pp. ālokita (q.v.).
Sk. ālokayati, ā + lok
a piece (cut off), a bit (of food) morsel, esp. bits of food gathered by bhikkhus DN i.5 = AN v.206; AN iii.176; AN ii.209; AN iii.304; AN iv.318; Thag 1055; Iti 18; Pv ii.17; Pp 58; Mil 231, Mil 406; Vism 106; DN-a i.80 (= vilopa-karaṇaṃ).
ā + lup, cp. ālumpati; BSk. ālopa, e.g. Avs i.173, Avs i.341; Divy 290, Divy 481
to break in, plunder, violate Thag 743.
ālopeti? ā + lopeti, Caus. of ālumpati
(adj.) getting or having, or consisting of pieces (of food) AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55.
ālopa + ika
confusion, uproar, agitation Dhp-a i.38.
fr. ā + luḷ, cp. āluḷati & āloḷeti
(f.) that which is stirred up, mud, in cpd. sītāloḷī mud or loam from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206.
a + luḷ
to confuse, mix, shake together, jumble SN i.175; Ja ii.272, Ja ii.363; Ja iv.333; Ja vi.331 Vism 105.
Caus. of āluḷati, cp. āluḷeti
(or ˚ā f.)
1. a thorn, sting, dart, spike used either as arrow-straightener Mil 418; Dhp-a i.288 or (perhaps also for piece of bone, fishbone) in making up a comb Vv-a 349 (˚sandhāpana = comb; how Hardy got the meaning of “alum” in Ind. to Vv-a is incomprehensible).
2 a peg, spike, stake or post (to tie an elephant to, cp. ālāna ). Cp ii.13. Alamba = alambara
Dimin of aḷa (?) or of ārā i.(?). See Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 158
Vv 189 = 5024. See ālambara.
(& ˚ika) (adj.-n.) dwelling in forests, a forest-dweller SN ii.235. As Np. at Vism 208.
= āṭavika
(adj.) at Ja v.81, Ja v.82 is corrupt & should with v.l. perhaps better be read; advāraka without doors. Cp Kern, Toev. 29 (ālāraka?). Ja v.81 has āḷāraka only.
(adj.) thick, massed, dense or crooked, arched (?), only in cpd. ˚pamha with thick eyelashes Vv 6411 (= gopakhuma Vv-a 279) Pv iii.35 (= vellita-dīgha-nīla-pamukha). Cp. alāra. Alarika & iya;
= aḷāra or uḷāra or = Sk. arāla?
(adj.-n.) a cook DN i.51 (= bhattakāraka DN-a i.157); Ja v.296 (bhattakāraka C.); 307; vi.276 (˚iya, C. ˚ika = sūpika) Mil 331.
Sk. ārālika, of uncertain etym.
(nt.) a place of cremation, cemetery DN i.55; Ja i.287 (here meaning the funereal fire) 402; iii.505; Pv ii.122; Vism 76; Mil 350; DN-a i.166; Dhp-a i.26; Dhp-a iii.276; Pv-a 92, Pv-a 161, Pv-a 163 (= sarīrassa daḍḍha-ṭṭhāna) ■ Note. For āḷāhana in meaning “peg, stake” see ālāna.
fr. ā + ḍah or dah, see dahati
at AN iii.352, AN iii.384 (an˚) is preferably to be read āḷhika, see āḷhaka.
(nt.) = āḷhaka; only at AN iii.52 (udak˚), where perhaps better with v.l. to be read as āḷhaka. The id p. at AN ii.55 has ālhaka only.
(m. & nt.) a certain measure of capacity, originally for grain; in older texts usually applied to a liquid measure (udaka˚). Its size is given by Bdhgh. at Snp-a 476 as follows: “cattāro patthā āḷhakāni doṇaṃ etc.”-udakāḷhaka SN v.400; AN ii.55 = AN iii.337; Vv-a 155 ■ In other connections at Ja i.419 (aḍḍh˚); iii.541 (mitaṃ āḷhakena dhañña-māpaka-kammaṃ kataṃ C.); Mil 229 (patt˚); Dhp-a iii.367 (aḍḍh˚).
-thālikā a bowl of the capacity of an āḷhaka Vin i.240; AN iii.369; Dhp-a iii.370 (v.l. bhatta-thālikā).
Sk. āḍhaka, fr. *āḍha probably meaning “grain”
(& āḷhika) (adj.) rich, happy, fortunate; only in neg. anāḷhiya poor, unlucky, miserable MN i.450; MN ii.178 (+ daḷidda) AN iii.352 sq. (so read with v.l. BB. ˚āḷhika for T ˚āḷika; combd. with daḷidda; v.l. SS. anaddhika); Ja v.96, Ja v.97 (+ daḷidda; C. na āḷhika).
fr. *āḷha, Sk. āḍhya, orig. possessing grain, rich in grain, i.e. wealth; semantically cp dhañña2
1. to go into, to or towards Ja iii.434; Ja iv.49, Ja iv.107.
2. to return, come back Ja v.24, Ja v.479.
ā + vajati, vraj
1. to reflect upon, notice, take in advert to, catch (a sound), listen Ja i.81; Ja ii.423; Ja v.3; Mil 106.
2. to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin i.286 (kumbhiṃ); Ja ii.102 (gloss āsiñcati) ■ Caus. āvajjeti (q.v.).
not with Senart M Vastu 377 = ava + dhyā, but = Sk. āvṛṇakti ā + vṛj, with pres. act. āvajjeti Sk. āvarjayati
(nt.) turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the mind ■ See discussion of term at Cpd. 85, 227 (the C. derive āvajjana fr. āvaṭṭeti to turn towards, this confusion being due to close resemblance of jj and ṭṭ in writing); also Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4 (on Kv 380 which has āvaṭṭanā), 282 n. 2 (on Kv 491 āvaṭṭanā) ■ Pts ii.5, Pts ii.120; Ja ii.243; Vb 320; Mil 102 sq.; Vism 432; DN-a i.271.
fr. āvajjati, cp. BSk. āvarjana in diff. meaning
bent, turned to, inclined; noticed, observed Mil 297; Vism 432 (citta); Sdhp 433.
pp. of āvajjeti cp. BSk. āvarjita, e.g. Divy 171; Itin 221
(nt.) inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Pts ii.27 sq.
abstr. fr. āvajjita
1. to turn over, incline, bend MN iii.96; Ja iv.56 (so read for āvijjhanto); DN-a i.10 (kāyaṃ). 2. to incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think heed, listen for. According to Cpd. 227 often paraphrased in C. by pariṇāmeti ■ Ja i.69, Ja i.74, Ja i.81, Ja i.89, Ja i.108, Ja i.200; Mil 297; Dhp-a ii.96; Pv-a 181 (= manasikaroti).
3 to cause to yield AN iii.27 (perhaps better āvaṭṭ˚). pp. āvajjita (q.v.).
Caus. of āvajjati
covered, veiled, shut off against, prohibited DN i.97, DN i.246; MN i.381 (˚dvāra); Ja vi.267. -anāvaṭa uncovered, unveiled, exposed, open DN i.137 (˚dvāra); iii.191 (˚dvāratā); SN i.55; Ja v.213; Pv iii.64; Mil 283. Cp. āvuta2 & vy˚.;
Sk. āvṛta, pp. of ā + vṛ;
(adj.-n.)
1. turning round, winding, twisting MN i.382; SN i.32 (dvi-r-ā˚ turning twice) Ja ii.217; Snp-a 439 (˚gangā).
2. turned, brought round changed, enticed MN i.381; Dhp-a ii.153.
3. an eddy whirlpool, vortex MN i.461 = AN ii.123 (˚bhaya); Mil 122 Mil 196, Mil 377.
4. circumference Ja v.337; Dāvs v.24; Dhp-a iii.184.
Sk. āvarta, ā + vṛt
in phrase ā. vivaṭṭati to turn forward & backward Vism 504.;
= āvattati
(nt.) turning, twisting; enticement, snare, temptation Ja iii.494; Dhp-a ii.153.
fr. ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa 2 and āvaṭṭanin
(f.) turning to (of the mind), adverting apprehending Kv 380, 491.
most likely for āvajjana. q.v. & see also Kvu trsl. 221, 282
(adj.) turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing MN i.375, MN i.381; AN ii.190; Ja ii.330 = Ja iv.471; DN-a i.250 ■ Cp. etymologically the same, but semantically diff. āvattanin.
fr. āvaṭṭana
(adj.-n.) only at MN i.91 in neg. an˚; not enticed by (loc.), i.e. kāmesu. Cp. āvattin.
fr. āvaṭṭa instead of āvaṭṭana
to turn round, entice, change convert, bring or win over MN i.375, MN i.381, MN i.383, MN i.505; AN iii.27; DN-a i.272.
ā + vatteti, Caus. of vṛt, cp. BSk. āvartayati to employ spells Divy 438
(adj.) gone away to, fallen back to, in phrase hīnāy’āvatta (see same phrase under āvattati MN i.460; SN ii.50; Ja i.206.
pp. of āvattati
(nt.) [Sk. āvarta, of ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa[ winding, turn, bent Ja i.70 (in a river); Ne 81 (v.l. āvaṭṭa?), 105 (˚hārasampāta).
(adj.) turning, in dakkhiṇ˚; turning to the right, dextrorsal DN ii.18; cp. dakkhiṇâvatta at DN-a i.259.
āvatta + ka
to turn round, come to, go back, go away to, turn to; only in phrase hīnāya āvattati to turn to “the low”, i.e. to give up orders & return to the world Vin i.17; MN i.460; SN ii.231; SN iv.191; Snp p.92 (= osakkati Snp-a 423); Ud 21; Pp 66; Mil 246. pp. āvatta (q.v.). Cp. āvaṭṭati.
ā + vattati, of vṛt
(adj.-n..) turning; turn, return Ne 113; Mil 251.
Sk. āvartana
(adj.) turning round or back Thag 16 (cp. āvaṭṭanin ).
fr. āvattana
(adj.-n.) returning, coming back, one who returns, in spec. meaning of one who comes back in transmigration, syn. with āgāmin (an˚), only in neg. anāvattin not returning, a non-returner, with ˚dhamma not liable to return at DN i.156; DN iii.132; SN v.346, SN v.357, SN v.376, SN v.406; MN i.91; DN-a i.313.
fr. āvatta, cp. āvaṭṭin in diff. meaning
(adj.) befitting, original, inherent (one of the 4 kinds of nomenclature) Vism 210 = Kp-a 107.
ā + vatthika
to give away, to offer, to deposit as a pledge Mil 279.
a + vap
(nt.) sowing, dispersing, offering,depositing, scattering Ja i.321.
fr. āvapati
(adj.) obstructing, keeping off from Ja v.325 (so to be read in ariya-magg-âvara).
fr. ā + vṛ;
(adj.-n.) shutting off, barring out withstanding; nt. hindrance, obstruction, bar Vin i.84 (˚ṃ karoti to prohibit, hinder); ii.262 (id.); DN i.246 (syName of pañca nīvaraṇāni); SN v.93 sq.; AN iii.63; Ja i.78 (an˚); v.412 (nadiṃ ˚ena bandhāpeti to obstruct or dam off the river); Snp 66 (pahāya pañc’ āvaraṇāni cetaso, cp Nd ii.379), 1005 (an˚-dassāviṇ); Pts i.131 sq.; Pts ii.158 (an˚) Pp 13; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; Vb 341, Vb 342; Mil 21 (dur hard to withstand or oppose) ■ dant˚ “screen of the teeth”, lip Ja iv.188; Ja vi.590.
fr. ā + vṛ; cp. āvarati; BSk. āvaraṇa in pañc’ āvaraṇāni Divy 378
(f.) keeping away from, withholding from AN iii.436.
abstr. fr. āvaraṇa
(adj.), MN i.273; an˚; not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct MN iii.3; Mil 157.
grd. fr. āvarati
to shut out from (abl.), hold back from, refuse, withhold, obstruct MN i.380 (dvāraṃ) Snp 922 (pot. ˚aye, cp. Nd i.368); DN-a i.235 (dvāraṃ) Dpvs i.38 ■ pp. āvaṭa and āvuta2 (q.v.).
ā + vṛ; cp. āvuṇāti
(f.) a row, range Ja v.69; DN-a i.140.
cp. Sk. āvalī & see valī
to live at or in, to inhabit, reside, stay MN ii.72; SN i.42; Snp 43, Snp 805, Snp 1134; Nd i.123, Nd i.127; Nd ii.133; Ja vi.317 ■ pp. āvuttha (q.v.).
ā + vas
dwelling-place, habitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin i.226 (˚âgāra restinghouse); iv.304 (= kavāṭabaddha); SN i.94, SN i.229; SN iv.329; Snp 287, Snp 672; Ja iv.396; Ja vi.425; Pp 51; Mil 279.
Sk. āvasatha, fr. ā + vas
(adj.) (-˚) bringing, going, causing Pv ii.924 (sukh˚); Vv 2211 (id); Dāvs ii.37; Pv-a 86 (upakār˚), 116 (anatth˚); Sdhp 15, Sdhp 98, Sdhp 206.
fr. ā + vah
to bring, cause, entail, give SN i.42 = Snp 181, Snp 182 (āvahāti sukhaṃ metri causā); Ja iii.169; v. 80; Snp 823; Nd i.302; Pv-a 6 ■ Pass. āvuyhati Vv-a 237 (ppr. ˚amāna ).
ā + vahati
(adj) (-˚) bringing, causing Thag 519; Snp 256.
= āvaha
(adj.-n.) one who brings Vv-a 114 (sukhassa).
= āvahana
(misery, misfortune) see avā.
a hole dug in the ground, a pit, a well DN i.142 (yaññ˚); Ja i.99, Ja i.264; Ja ii.406; Ja iii.286; Ja iv.46 (caturassa); vi.10; Dhp-a i.223; Vv-a 63; Pv-a 225.
etym.?
a potter’s furnace Dhp-a i.177 (read for āvāsa?), 178.
if correct, fr. ā + vā2 to blow with caus. p ■ Cp. JR A S. 1898, 750 sp.
warding off, protection, guard Ja vi.432 (yanta-yutta˚, does it mean “cover, shield”?). For cpd. khandh’āvāra see khandha.
Sk. āvāra, fr. ā + vṛ;
to ward off, hold back, bar, SN iv.298; Ne 99.
Sk. āvārayati, ā + Caus. of vṛ;
sojourn, stay, dwelling, living; dwelling-place, residence Vin i.92; DN iii.234; SN iv.91; AN ii.68, AN ii.168; AN iii.46, AN iii.262; Snp 406; Dhp 73 (cp. Dhp-a ii.77); Nd i.128; Ja vi.105; Dhs 1122; Pug, 15, 19, 57 Kp-a 40; Dhp-a i.177 (āvāsaṃ ālimpeti: read āvāpaṃ); Pv-a 13, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 36; Vv-a 113; Sdhp 247. -anāvāsa (n. & adj. uninhabited, without a home; an uninhabited place AN iv.345; Ja ii.77; Pv ii.333; Pv-a 80 (= anāgāra); Vv-a 46.
-kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different residence (within the same boundary) Vin ii.294, Vin ii.300, Vin ii.306 Dpvs iv.47, cp. v.18. -palibodha the obstruction of having a home (in set of 10 Palibodhas) Kp-a 39; cp Vism 90 sq. -sappāyatā suitability of residence Vism 127.
Sk. āvāsa; ā + vas
(adj.) living in, residing at home, being in (constant or fixed) residence, usually appld. to bhikkhus (opp. āgantuka) Vin i.128 sq.; Vin ii.15, Vin ii.170; iii. 65; v.203 sq.; MN i.473; AN i.236; AN iii.261 sq., 366; Ja iv.310; Pv iv.84 (= nibaddha-vasanaka Pv-a 267).
āvāsa + ika
taking in marriage, lit. carrying away to oneself, marriage DN i.99; Ja vi.363; Snp-a 273, Snp-a 448; Dhp-a iv.7 Often in cpd. ā˚ vivāha(ka) lit. leading to (one’s home & leading away (from the bride’s home), wedding feast DN iii.183 (˚ka); Ja i.452; Vv-a 109, Vv-a 157. (v.l. ˚ka).
ā + vah
(nt.)
1. = āvāha, i.e. marriage, taking a wife DN i.11 (= āvāha-karaṇa DN-a i.96).
2. “getting up, bringing together”, i.e. a mass, a group or formation, in senā˚ a contingent of an army Ja iv.91.
ā + vshana, of vah
(adv.) clear, manifest, evident; openly, before one’s eyes, in full view. Only in phrase āvi vā raho openly or secret AN v.350, AN v.353; Pv ii.716 = Dhp-a iv.21 (āvī v.l.), expld. at Pv-a 103 by pakāsanaṃ paresaṃ pākaṭavasana Otherwise in foll. cpds. (with kar & bhū ) ˚kamma making clear, evidence, explanation Vin ii.88 Vin iii.24; Pp 19, Pp 23; ˚karoti to make clear, show, explain DN iii.121; Snp 84, Snp 85, Snp 349; Ja v.457; Pp 57; Vv-a 79 Vv-a 150; ˚bhavati (˚bhoti) to become visible or evident, to be explained, to get clear Ja i.136; Vism 287 (fnt. āvibhavissati); Dhp-a ii.51, Dhp-a ii.82; bhāva appearance, manifestation DN i.78; AN iii.17; Ja ii.50, Ja ii.111; Vism 390 sq. (revelation opp. tirobhāva). Cp. pātur. Avijjhati (avinjati, avinchati)
Sk. āviḥ, to Gr. ἀίω to hear, Lat. audio (fr. *auizdiō) to hear
1. to encircle, encompass, comprise, go round, usually in ger. āvijjhitvā (w. acc.) used as prep round about, near Ja i.153 (khettaṃ), 170 (pokkharaṇiṃ) DN-a i.245 (nagaraṃ bahi avijjhitvā round the outer circle of the town). Ordinarily = go round (acc.) at Ja iv.59 (chārika-puñjaṃ).
2. [as in lit. Sk.] to swing round brandish, twirl, whirl round Vin iii.127 (daṇḍaṃ āviñji) MN iii.141 (matthena āviñjati to churn); Ja i.313; Ja v.291 (cakkaṃ, of a potter’s wheel); Snp-a 481 (T. āviñj˚, v.l. āvijjh˚; see āracaya˚); Dhp-a ii.277 (āviñchamāna T.; v.l. āsiñciy˚, āvajiy˚, āgañch˚).
3. to resort to, go to, approach incline to SN iv.199 (T. āviñch˚; v.l. avicch˚ āviñj˚); Ne 13.
4. to arrange, set in order Ja ii.406. 5. to pull (?) AN iv.86 (kaṇṇasotani āvijjeyyāsi, v.l. āvijj˚ āviñj˚, āvicc˚, āviñch˚; cp. Trenckner, Notes 59 āviñjati “to pull”) ■ pp. āviddha (q.v.).
ā + vijjhati of vyadh to pierce; thus recognised by Morris JP T S. 1884, 72 against Trenckner, Notes 59 (to piñj ) & Hardy Nett; Ind. = vicchāy
(so for āviñchana & āviñjana) (adj.-n.)
1. (āvijjhati 2) swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in; āvijjhana-rajju a loose, rope, esp. in mythology the swinging or whirling rope by which Sakka holds the world’s wheel or axis, in the latter sense at Dhp-a ii.143 (T. āviñch˚ (v.l. āvijj˚) = iii.97, 98 (where āviñjanaṭṭhāna for ˚rajju). Otherwise a rope used in connection with the opening & shutting of a door (pulling rope? Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148; Ja v.298, Ja v.299 (T. āviñj˚, v.l. āvicch˚ āvij˚).
2. (cp. āvijjhati 3) going to, approach, contact with Dhs-a 312 (˚rasa, T. āviñj˚, v.l. āviñch˚; or is it “encompassing”? = āvijjhati 1 ?); Vism 444 (āviñjanarasa).
3. (cp. āvijjhati 5) pulling, drawing along Vin iii.121 (= ākaḍḍhanā nāma).
fr. āvijjhati, lit. piercing through, i.e. revolving axis
(nt.) whirling round, that which spins round, the whirling-round wheel (or pole) of the world (cp. the potter’s wheel), the worldaxis Dhp-a ii.146 (T. āviñch˚).
fr. āvijjhati in meaning 2
whirling or spinning round, revolving; swung round, set into whirling motion Ja iv.6 (cakkaṃ = kumbhakāra-cakkam iva bhamati C.); v.291. What does an-āviddha at Pv-a 135 mean?
pp. of āvijjhati 2, cp. BSk. āviddha in meaning curved, crooked Av. SN i.87 Lal. V. 207
(adj.) stirred up, agitated, disturbed, stained soiled, dirty AN i.9; AN iii.233; Ja v.16, Ja v.90 (ābila); Nd i.488 (+ luḷita), 489; Thag-a 251; DN-a i.226. More frequent as anāvila undisturbed, clean, pure, serene DN i.76; SN iii.83; SN iv.118; AN i.9; AN iii.236; Snp 160; Dhp 82, Dhp 413; Ja iii.157; Mil 35; Vv-a 29, Vv-a 30; Thag-a 251.
is it a haplological contraction from ā + vi + lul to roll about?
to whirl round, to be agitated, to be in motion Mil 259 (+ luḷati).
fr. āvila or is it a direct contraction of ā + vi + lulati?
(nt.) confusion, disturbance, agitation Snp 967; Nd i.488.
abstr. fr. āvila
to approach, to enter Vin iv.334; Snp 936 (aor. āvisi); Ja iv.410, Ja iv.496; Vism 42.
ā + vīś
to weave, thus a confusion of the two roots, the latter being merged into the former to string upon, to fix on to (c. loc.), to impale Ja i.430 Ja iii.35; Ja v.145; Ja vi.105 ■ Caus. II. āvuṇāpeti Ja iii.218 (sūle) ■ pp. āvuta1 (q.v.), whereas the other pp. āvaṭa is the true derivative of ā + vṛ.
in form = *avṛṇoti, ā + vṛ; cp. āvarati, but in meaning = *āvayati, ā + vā
1. strung upon, tied on, fixed on to DN i.76 (suttaṃ); ii.13 (id.) AN i.286 (tantāvutaṃ web); Ja iii.52 (valliyā); vi.346 (suttakena); DN-a i.94 (˚sutta).
2. impaled, stuck on (sūle on the pale) Ja i.430; Ja iii.35; Ja v.497; Ja vi.105; Pv-a 217, Pv-a 220.
pp. of āvuṇāti in meaning of Sk. āvayati, the corresponding Sk. form being ā + uta = ota
(see āvuṇāti & āvuta;1) covered, obstructed, hindered Iti 8 (mohena); also in phrase āvuta nivuta ophuta etc. Nd i.24 (ṭ) = Nd ii.365 = DN-a i.59.
inhabited DN ii.50 (an˚); SN i.33.
pp. of āvasati
(nt.) an instrument to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. DN iii.219; MN ii.100; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; Snp 1008; Ja i.150; Ja ii.110; iii. 467; iv.160, 283, 437; Nd ii.on Snp 72; Mil 8, Mil 339; Dhp-a ii.2; Dhp-a iv.207; Snp-a 225, Snp-a 466 (˚jīvika = issattha). See also āyudha.
Vedic āyudha, fr. ā + yudh to fight
ppr. of āvuyhati (Pass. of āvahati), being conveyed or brought Vv-a 237 (reading uncertain).
(voc. pl. m.) friend, a form of polite address “friend, brother Sir”, usually in conversation between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the pl. of the verb, like bhavaṃ and bhavanto ■ Vin ii.302; DN i.151, DN i.157; DN ii.8; Snp-a 227; Dhp-a i.9; Dhp-a ii.93; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 208.
a contracted form of āyusmanto pl. of āyusman, of which the regular Pāli form is āyasmant with v for y as frequently in Pāli, e.g. āvudha for āyudha
(nt.) rolling up, winding up or round, fig. explanation Mil 28 (+ nibbeṭhana, lit rolling up and rolling down, ravelling & unravelling) 231 (˚viniveṭhana).;
ā + veṭhana, veṣṭ;
turned round, slung round or over Ja iv.383 sq. (v.l. āvedhita & āveḷita, C. expl;s. by parivattita).
pp. of āveṭheti, ā + veṣṭ; cp. āvedhikā
(adj) (-˚) special peculiar, separate Vin ii.204 (˚uposatha etc.); Ja i.490 (˚sangha-kammāni).
according to Trenckner, Notes 75 fr. ā + vinā “Sine quā non”, but very doubtful
(adj.) special, extraordinary, exceptional SN iv.239; AN v.74 sq.; Vism 268; Vv-a 112 (˚bhāva peculiarity, specialty), Kp-a 23, Kp-a 35.
fr. āveṇi; cp. BSk. āveṇika Avs i.14, Avs i.108; Divy 2, Divy 182, Divy 268, Divy 302
(adj.) = āveṇika Vin i.71; Ja iv.358; Ja vi.128.
piercing, hole, wound Ja ii.276 (v.l. aveddha; C. = viddha-ṭṭhāne vaṇa).
cp. Sk. āviddha, ā + pp. of vyadh
(adj. f. scil. pannā) piercing, penetrating; or ravelling, turning rolling up or round (cp. āvijjhati which is derived from ā + vyadh, but takes its meaning from āveṭheti), discrimination thinking over Ja ii.9 (+ nibbedhikā, v.l. for both ṭh).
ā + vedhaka of āvedha, vyadh, but confused with āveṭh˚ of ā + veṣṭ; cp. āveṭhana & nibbedhaka
(adj. & ˚ā f.)
1. turning round swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance, with reference to the rays of the Buddha at Ja i.12, Ja i.95, Ja i.501. 2. (f.) a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over the head Vv 36;2 (kañcan˚; = āveḷa-pilandhana VuA 167). See āveḷin.
not with Müller; P.Gr. 10, 30, 37 = Sk. āpīḍa, but fr. ā + veṣṭh to wind or turn round which in P. is represented by āveṭheti as well as āvijjhati ḷ then standing for either ḍh (ṭh) or dh (āvedha, q.v.) There may have been an analogy influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. āveḷita. Müller refers to āveḷā rightly the late dial. (Prk.) āmela
(ḷ?) turned round wound, curved Ja vi.354 (˚singika with curved horns v.l. āvellita).
pp. of ā + vell, cp. āveḷa & BSk. āviddha curved, crooked Avs i.87, Lal. V. 207
(adj.) wearing garlands or other headornaments, usually in f. ˚inī Ja v.409 (= kaṇṇālankārehi yuttā C.); Vv 302 (voc. āvelinī, but at id. p. 482 āveline) 323; Vv-a 125 (on Vv 302 expls. as ratana-maya-pupph’ āveḷavatī).
fr. āveḷā
(nt.) entrance; workshop; living-place, house Vin ii.117 (˚vitthaka, meaning?); MN ii.53; Pv ii.915.
fr. āvisati
contr ■ form of aṃsa in cpd. koṭṭhāsa part., portion etc.: see aṃsa1. Can we compare BSk. āsapātrī (see next).
food, only in cpd. pātarāsa morning food, breakfast Snp 387 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍapātass’ etaṃ nāmaṃ Snp-a 374); Dhp-a iv.211; see further ref under pātar; and pacchā-āsa aftermath SN i.74. Can we compare BSk. āsa-pātrī (vessel) Divy 246? Der. fr. āsa is āsaka with abstr. ending āsakattaṃ “cating”, food, in nānā˚ various food or na + anāsak˚) Snp 249. See also nirāsa, which may be taken either as nir + *āśa or nir + *āsā.
Sk. āśa
the adj. form of āsā (f.), wish, hope. See under āsā.
archaic 3rd sg. perf. of atthi to be, only in cpd. itihāsa = iti ha āsa “thus it has been”.
(adj.) hoping, expecting something, longing for AN i.108 = Pp 27 (expld. by Pp A 208 as “so hi arahattaṃ āsaṃsati patthetī ti āsaṃso”) Snp-a 321, Snp-a 336. Cp. nir˚.
of *āśaṃsā, see next
to expect, hope for, wish Pp A 208 (= pattheti). See also āsamāna.
for the usual āsiṃsati, ā + śaṃs
(f.) wish, desire, expectation, hope Ja iv.92 ■ Cp. nirāsaṃsa.
from ā + śaṃs
(adj.) full of expectation, longing, hankering after, Thig 273 (= āsiṃsanaka Thag-a 217 trsl. “cadging”).
fr. āsaṃsā
(adj.) belonging to food, having food, only in neg. an˚; fasting SN iv.118; Dhp 141 (f. ā fasting bhatta-paṭikkhepa Dhp-a iii.77); Ja v.17; Ja vi.63.
of āsa2
(nt.) having food, feeding, in an˚ fasting Snp 249 (= abhojana Snp-a 292).
abstr. fr. āsaka
to be doubtful or afraid, to suspect, distrust, Ja i.151 (pret. āsankittha), 163 (aor. āsanki); ii. 203; Snp-a 298 ■ pp. āsaṅkita (q v.),
ā + śaṅk
(f.) fear, apprehension, doubt, suspicion Ja i.338; Ja ii.383; Ja iii.533; Ja vi.350, Ja vi.370; Dhp-a iii.485; Vv-a 110 ■ Cp. sāsaṅka & nirāsaṅka;.
Sk. āśankā fr. ā + śaṅk
(adj.) suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Mil 173, Mil 372 (˚parisankita full of apprehension and suspicion); Dhp-a i.223; Vv-a 110 ■ Cp. ussaṅkita & parisaṅkita;.
pp. of āsankati
(-˚) (adj.) fearing, anxious, apprehensive Snp 255 (bhedā˚); Ja iii.192 (id.).
fr. āsankā
1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit Ja iv.11.
2. that which hangs on (the body), clothing garment, dress; adj. dressed or clothed in (-˚); usually in cpd. uttarāsaṅga a loose (hanging) outer robe e.g. Vin i.289; SN iv.290; Pv-a 73; VvÁ 33 (suddh˚), 51 (id.).
ā + sanga fr. sañj to hang on, cp. Sk. āsaṅga & āsakti
(adj.) hanging on, attached to Ja iv.11.
fr. āsanga
(indecl.)
1. sitting on, going to, approaching; allocated belonging to; sometimes merely as prep. acc “near” (cp. āsanna) Snp 418 (āsajja naṃ upāvisi he came up near to him), 448 (kāko va selaṃ ā. nibbijjāpema Gotamaṃ); Ja ii.95; Ja vi.194; Mil 271.
2. put on to (lit. sitting or sticking on), hitting, striking SN i.127 (khaṇuṃ va urasā ā. nibbijjapetha Gotamā “ye’ve thrust as ‘t were your breast against a stake. Disgusted, come ye hence from Gotama” trsl. p. 159; C. expls. by paharitvā which comes near the usual paraphrase ghaṭṭetvā) 3. knocking against or “giving one a setting-to”, insulting offending, assailing DN i.107 (ā. ā. avocāsi = ghaṭṭetvā DN-a i.276); AN iii.373 (tādisaṃ bhikkhuṃ ā.); Ja v.267 (isiṃ ā. Gotamaṃ; C. p. 272 āsādetvā); Pv iv.710 (isiṃ ā. āsādetvã Pv-a 266).
4. “sitting on”, i.e. attending constantly to, persevering, energetically, with energy or emphasis, willingly, spontaneously MN i.250; DN iii.258; AN iv.236 (dānaṃ deti); Vv 106 (dānaṃ adāsiṃ; cp. Vv-a 55 samāgantvā). See āsada, āsādeti, āsīdeti, āsajjana.
ger. of āsādeti, Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; Sk. āsādya
(nt.) “knocking against”, setting on, insult, offence Vin ii.203 (˚ṃ Tathāgataṃ an insult to the T.; quoted as such at Vv-a 55 where two meanings of ā. are given, corresponding to āsajja 1 & 3, viz. samāgama & ghaṭṭana, the latter in this quot.) = Iti 86 (so to be read with v.l.; T. has āpajja naṃ); SN i.114 (apuññaṃ pasavi Māro āsajjanaṃ Tathāgataṃ; trsl. “in seeking the T. to assail”); Ja v.208.
fr. āsajja in meaning of no. 3
to sit DN-a i.208; h. sg. āsi SN i.130. - pp. āsīna (q.v.).
from as
(a) lit. hanging on, in phrase kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one’s neck MN i.120; Ja i.5 ■ (b) fig. attached to, clinging to Ja i.377 (+ satta lagga); Thag-a 259 (an˚).
pp. of ā + sañj
accursed, cursed Ja v.446 (an˚).
pp. of ā + śap
(f.) attachment, hanging on (w. loc.), dependence, clinging Vin ii.156 = AN i.138; SN i.212; Snp 777 (bhavesu); Nd i.51, Nd i.221; Ne 12, Ne 128 ■ Cp nirāsattin.
ā + sañj
1. approach, dealing with, business with (acc.), concern, affair, means of acting or getting Vin ii.195 = Ja v.336 (mā kuñjara nāgam āsado); MN i.326 (metaṃ āsado = mā etaṃ āsado do not meddle with this, lit., be not this any affair); Ja i.414 (cakkaṃ āsado you have to do with the wheel interpreted as adj. in meaning patto = finding, getting) vi.528 (interpreted as ankusa a hook, i.e. means of getting something).
2. (as adj.) in phrase durāsada hard to sit on, i.e. hard to get at, unapproachable, difficult to attack or manage or conquer Snp p.107 (cp. Snp-a 451); Ja vi.272; Vv 5016 (= anupagamanīyato kenaci pi anāsādanīyato ca durāsado Vv-a 213); Mil 21; Dpvs v.21; vi.38; Sdhp 384.
ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsādeti
(nt.) sitting, sitting down; a seat, throne MN i.469; Vin i.272 (= pallankassa okāsa); SN i.46 (ek sitting alone, a solitary seat); AN iii.389 (an˚ without a seat); Snp 338, Snp 718, Snp 810, Snp 981; Nd i.131; Ja iv.435 (āsān ûdaka-dāyin giving seat & drink); v.403 (id.); vi.413; Dhp-a ii.31 (dhamm˚ the preacher’s seat or throne); Snp-a 401; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 141.
-ābhihara gift or distinction of the seat Ja i.81. -ūpagata endowed with a seat, sitting down Snp 708 (= nisinna Snp-a 495). -paññāpaka one who appoints seats Vin ii.305. -paṭikkhitta one who rejects all seats, or objects to sitting down DN i.167; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Pp 55. -sālā a hall with seating accommodation Vism 69; Dhp-a ii.65; Dhp-a iv.46.
from āsati
(?) eating Vism 116 (visam˚, cp. visam-āsita Mil 302). See, however, māsana.
(nt.) a small seat Vv 15.
āsana + ka
(adj.) having a seat; in ek˚; sitting by oneself Vism 69.
fr. āsana
(f.) an extra long chair, a deck-chair Vin i.192; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169, Vin ii.170; DN i.7 (= pamāṇâtikkant’ āsanaṃ DN-a i.86), 55 = MN i.515 = SN iii.307 (used as a bier) AN i.181; Ja i.108. See note at Dial. i.11.
fr. ā + sad
(f.) fr. āsandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin ii.149; Kp-a 44.
(adj.) near (cp. āsajja1), opp. dūra Ja ii.154; Dhp-a ii.91; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 243.
pp. of ā + sad, see āsīdati
(fr.) lit. “creeping on to”, doubt, mistrust, always combd. with parisappanā Nd3 1; Dhs 1004 (trsl. “evasion”, cp. Dhs trsl. p 116), 1118, 1235; DN-a i.69.
fr. + sṛp
(in compn.) a bull peculiar to a bull, bull-like, fig. a man of strong & eminent qualities, a hero or great man, a leader, thus in tār˚ Snp 687; nar˚ Snp 684, Snp 696; āsabha-camma bull’s hide Ja vi.453 (v.l. usabha˚).
-ṭṭhāna (as āsabhaṇṭhāna) “bull’s place”, first place distinguished position, leadership MN i.69; SN ii.27; AN ii.8 (C. seṭṭha-ṭṭhāna uttama-ṭṭhāna); iii.9; v.33 sq.; DN-a i.31; Kp-a 104.
the guṇa-and compn. form of usabha, corresponding to Sk. ārṣabha → ṛṣabha, see usabha
(adj.) bull-like, becoming to a bull, lordly, majestic, imposing, bold; only in phrase ˚ṃ vācaṃ bhāsati “speak the lordly word” DN ii.15, DN ii.82; MN iii.123j Ja i.53; DN-a i.91; cp. Dāvs i.28 (nicchārayi vācaṃ āsabhiṃ).
fr. āsabha
(adj.) wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 846 (kiṃ ā = kiṃ paccāsiṃ santo Vv-a 336); Pv iv.124 (= āsiṃsamāna patthayamana Pv-a 226).
ppr. of āsaṃsati or āsiṃsati, for the usual earlier āsasāna
1. abode haunt, receptacle; dependence on, refuge, support, condition SN i.38; Vin iii.151; Ja ii.99; Mil 257; Vv-a 60; Pv-a 210; jal˚ river Vv-a 47; Pgdp 80; adj. depending on, living in (-˚) Mil 317; Nd i.362 (bil˚, dak˚ etc.) See also āmāsaya, pakkāsaya.
2. (fig.) inclination, intention will, hope; often combd. & compared with; anusaya (inclination, hankering, disposition), e.g. at Pts i.133; Pts ii.158; Vb 340; Vism 140 (˚posana); Pv-a 197. Snp-a 182 (˚vipatti), 314 (˚suddhi), Kp-a 103 (˚sampatti) Cp. nirāsaya.
3. outflow, excretion Pv iii.53 (gabbh = gabbha-mala Pv-a 198); Vism 344.
ā + śī, cp. in similar meaning & derivation anusaya. The semantically related Sk. āśraya from ā + ; śri is in P. represented by assaya. Cp. also BSk. āśayataḥ intentionally in earnest Divy 281; Avs ii.161
to wish, desire, hope, intend Ja iv.291 (grd. āsāyana, gloss esamāna). See āsaya.
ā + śī; lit. “lie on”, cp. Ger. anliegen & Sk. āśaya = Ger. Angelegenheit
that which; flows (out or on to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C in Vin iv.110 (four kinds); B. on DN iii.182 (five kinds Dhs-a 48; Kp-a 26; Ja iv.222; Ja vi.9.
2. discharge from a sore, AN i.124, AN i.127 = Pp 30.
3. in psychology t.t. for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher things). Freedom from the “Āsavas” constitutes Arahantship, & the fight for the extinction of these āsavas forms one of the main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term see Cpd. 227. See also discussion of term āsava (= āsavantī ti āsavā) at Dhs-a 48 (cp Expositor pp. 63 sq). See also Cpd. 227 sq., & especially; Dhs trsl. 291 sq ■ The 4 āsavas are kām˚, bhav˚ diṭṭh˚, avijj˚; i.e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of life), speculation and ignorance ■ They are mentioned as such at DN ii.81, DN ii.84, DN ii.91, DN ii.94, DN ii.98, DN ii.123, DN ii.126; AN i.165 sq., 196 ii.211; iii.93, 414; iv.79; Pts i.94, Pts i.117; Dhs 1099, Dhs 1448 Nd ii.134; Ne 31, Ne 114 sq ■ The set of 3, which is probably older (kāma˚, bhava˚, avijjā˚) occurs at MN i.55; AN i.165; AN iii.414; SN iv.256; SN v.56, SN v.189; Iti 49; Vb 364 For other connections see Vin i.14 (anupādāya āsavehi cittani vimucciṃsu), 17, 20, 182; ii.202; iii.5 (˚samudaya ˚nirodha etc.); DN i.83, DN i.167; DN iii.78, DN iii.108, DN iii.130, DN iii.220, DN iii.223 DN iii.230, DN iii.240, DN iii.283; MN i.7 sq., 23, 35, 76, 219, 279, 445 (˚ṭhāniya); ii.22; iii.72, 277; SN ii.187 sq. (˚ehi cittaṃ vimucci); iii.45 (id.); iv.107 (id.), 20; v.8, 28, 410; AN i.85 sq. (vaḍḍhanti), 98, 165 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.) 187; ii.154 (˚ehi cittaṃ vimuttaṃ), 196; iii.21, 93 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; iv.13, 146 (˚pariyādāna end of the ā.), 161 (˚vighāta-pariḷāha); v.70 237; Thig 4, Thig 99, Thig 101 (pahāsi āsave sabbe); Snp 162 Snp 374, Snp 535 (pl. āsavāni), 546, 749, 915, 1100; Dhp 93 Dhp 253, Dhp 292; Nd i.331 (pubb˚); Vb 42, Vb 64, Vb 426; Pp 11 Pp 13, Pp 27, Pp 30 sq.; Mil 419; Dhs-a 48; Thag-a 94, Thag-a 173; Kp-a 26; DN-a i.224; Sdhp 1; Pgdp 65 (piyāsava-surā, meaning?).
Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the āsavas & to Arahantship following as a result are the foll. passages: (1); āsavānaṃ khaya DN i.156; SN ii.29 SN ii.214; SN iii.57, SN iii.96 sq, 152 sq; iv.105, 175; v.92, 203 220, 271, 284; AN i.107 sq., 123 sq., 232 sq., 273, 291 ii.6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; iii.69, 114, 131, 202, 306 319 sq.; iv.83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 36, 69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq.; Iti 49; Pp 27, Pp 62; Vb 334, Vb 344; Vism 9; DN-a i.224; cp. ˚parikkhaya AN v.343 sq. See also arahatta formula C ■ (2) khīṇāsava (adj. one whose Āsavas are destroyed (see khīṇa) SN i.13, SN i.48 SN i.53, SN i.146; SN ii.83, SN ii.239; SN iii.199, SN iii.128, SN iii.178; SN iv.217; AN i.77 AN i.109, AN i.241, AN i.266; AN iv.120, AN iv.224, AN iv.370 sq.; AN v.40, AN v.253 sq.; Pts ii.173; cp. parikkhīṇā āsavā AN iv.418, AN iv.434, AN iv.451 sq. āsavakhīṇa Snp 370 ■ (3) anāsava (adj.) one who is free from the āsavas, an Arahant Vin ii.148 = Vin ii.164; DN iii.112; SN i.130; SN ii.214, SN ii.222; SN iii.83; SN iv.128; AN i.81, AN i.107 sq., 123 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 87, 146; iii.19, 29, 114 166; iv.98, 140 sq., 314 sq., 400; AN v.10 sq., 36, 242 340; Snp 1105, Snp 1133; Dhp 94, Dhp 126, Dhp 386; Th i.100; Iti 75; Nd ii.44; Pv ii.615; Pp 27; Vb 426; Dhs 1101, Dhs 1451; Vv-a 9. Cp. nirāsava Thag-a 148 ■ Opp. sāsava SN iii.47 SN v.232; AN i.81 AN v.242; Dhs 990; Ne 10; Vism 13, Vism 438.
fr. ā + sru, would corresp. to a Sk. *āsrava, cp. Sk. āsrāva. The BSk. āśrava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pāli āsava, cp. Divy 391 & kṣīnāśrava
to flow towards, come to, occur, happen Ne 116.
ā + sru, cp. Sk. āsravati; its doublet is assavati
hoping wishing, desiring, longing for Snp 369 (an˚; Snp-a 365 however reads āsayāna), 1090; Thag 528; Ja iv.18 (= āsiṃsanto C.), 381; v.391 (= āsiṃsanto C.). See anāsasāna āsaṃsati, āsamāna & āsayāna.;
either grd. for *āsaṃsāna or contracted form of ppr. med. of āsaṃsati (= āsiṃsati) for *asaṃsamāna
(f.) expectation, hope, wish, longing, desire; adj. āsa (-˚) longing for, anticipating, desirous of Vin i.255 (˚avacchedika hope-destroying), 259; DN ii.206; DN iii.88; MN iii.138 (āsaṃ karoti); AN i.86 (dve āsā) 107 (vigat-āso one whose longings have gone); Snp 474 Snp 634, Snp 794, Snp 864; Ja i.267, Ja i.285; Ja v.401; Ja vi.452 (˚chinna chinnāsa C.); Nd i.99, Nd i.261, Nd i.213 sq; Vv 3713 (perhaps better to be read with v.l. SS ahaṃ, cp. Vv-a 172); Pp 27 (vigat˚ = arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāso Pp A 208) Dhs 1059 (+ āsiṃsanā etc.), 1136; Pv-a 22 (chinn˚ disappointed), 29 (˚âbhibhūta), 105; Dāvs v.13; Sdhp 78 Sdhp 111, Sdhp 498, Sdhp 609.
cp. Sk. āśaḥ f.
(f.) a fly’s egg, a nit MN i.220 sq.; AN v.347 sq., 351, 359; Ne 59; Ja iii.176.
cp. Mārāṭhi āsāḍī
- 1. to lay hand on, to touch, strike; fig. to offend, assail insult MN i.371; Ja i.481; Ja v.197; aor. āsādesi Thag 280 (mā ā. Tathāgate); ger. āsādetvā Ja v.272; Mil 100, Mil 205 (˚ayitvā); Pv-a 266 (isiṃ), āsādiya Ja v.154 (āsādiya metri causa; isiṃ, cp. āsajja3), & āsajja (q.v.); infin. āsāduṃ Ja v.154 & āsādituṃ ibid.; grd. āsādanīya Mil 205; Vv-a 213 (an˚).
2. to come near to (c. acc.), approach get Ja iii.206 (khuracakkaṃ). Asalha & Asalhi
Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsanna
(f.) Name of a month (JuneJuly) and of a Nakkhatta; only in compn. as Āsaḷha˚ Āsaḷhi˚, viz.; ˚nakkhatta Ja i.50; Snp-a 208; ˚puṇṇamā Ja i.63; Dhp-a i.87; Snp-a 199; Vv-a 66; Pv-a 137; ˚māsa Snp-a 378 (= vassûpanāyikāya purimabhāge A.); Vv-a 307 (= gimhānaṃ pacchimo māso).
Sk. āṣāḍha
(f.) Name of a creeper (growing at the celestial grove Cittalatā) Ja iii.250, Ja iii.251.
to pray for, expect, hope; confounded with śaṃs in āsaṃsati & āsiṃsati (q.v.) & their derivations ■ pp.; āsiṭṭha (q.v.). Asi & Asim
cp. Sk. āśāsati & āśāsti, ā + ; śās
3rd & 1;st sg. aor. of atthi (q.v.).
(adj.) wishing, aspiring after, praying for Mil 342.
fr. ā + siṃsati, cp. āsaṃsā
to hope for wish, pray for (lit. praise for the sake of gain), desire (w. acc.) SN i.34, SN i.62; Snp 779, Snp 1044, Snp 1046 (see Nd ii.135) Ja i.267; Ja iii.251; Ja iv.18; Ja v.435; Ja vi.43; Nd i.60; Mvu 30, Mvu 100; Vv-a 337; Pv-a 226 (ppr. āsiṃsamāna for āsamāna, q.v.).
Sk. āśaṃsati, ā + śaṃs, cp. also śās & āsāsati, further abhisaṃsati, abhisiṃsati & āsaṃsati
(adj.) hoping for something, lit. praising somebody for the sake of gain, cadging Thag-a 217 (for āsaṃsuka Thig 273).
fr. āsiṃsanā
(f.) desire, wish, craving Ja v.28; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136 (+ āsiṃsitatta). As āsīsanā at Ne 53.
abstr. fr. ā + śaṃs, cp. āsiṃsati
(adj.) to be wished for, desirable Mil 2 (˚ratana).
grd. of āsiṃsati
sohooled, instructed Pv-a 67, Pv-a 68.
pp. of ā + śikṣ, Sk. āśikṣita
to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin i.44; Vin ii.208; Ja iv.376; Vv 796 (= siñcati Vv-a 307); Pv-a 41 (udakena), 104, 213 (ger. ˚itvā). pp. āsitta (q.v.). Cp. vy˚.
ā + sic, cp. abhisiñcati & avasiñcati
wished or longed for Pv-a 104. *Asita
pp. of āsāsati, Sk. āśiṣṭa
“having eaten”, but probably māsita (pp. of mṛś to touch, cp. Sk. mṛśita, which is ordinarily in massita), since it only occurs in combns. where m precedes, viz. Ja ii.446 (dumapakkani-m-asita, where C reading is māsita & expl;n. khāditvā asita (v.l. āsita) dhāta) Mil 302 (visam-āsita affected with poison = visamāsita) Cp. also the form māsi(n) touching, eating at Ja vi.354 (tiṇa˚, expld. by C. as khādaka) ■ āsita at Ja v.70 is very doubtful, v.l. āsina & asita; C. expls. by dhāta suhita p. 73. *Asita
= asita1?
at Vv-a 276 is better read with v.l. SS bhāsita (-vādana etc.).
registered as such with meaning “performed” by Hardy in Index
sprinkled, poured out, anointed Ja v.87; Pp 31; Mil 286; Dhs-a 307; Dhp-a i.10; Vv-a 69.
pp. of āsiñcati, Sk. āsikta
(adj.) mixed, mingled, adulterated Vin ii.123 (˚ûpadhāna “decorated divan”?); Thag-a 61, Thag-a 168 (an˚ for asecanaka, q.v.).
āsitta + ka
(adj.) 80 years old MN ii.124; Ja iii.395; Snp-a 172.
fr. asīta
(m.) a certain plant MN i.80 = MN i.245 (˚pabba).
etym.? Cp. BSk. āsītakī Lal. V. 319
1. to come together, lit. to sit by DN i.248 (v.l. BB ādisitvā for āsīditvā, to be preferred?).
2. to come or go near, to approach (w. acc.), to get (to) AN iii.69 (āsīvisaṃ), 373 (na sādhurūpaṃ āsīde, should perhaps be read without the na); Ja iv.56.
3. to knock against, insult, offend attack Ja v.267 (Pot. āsīde = pharusa-vacanehe kāyakammena vā gbaṭṭento upagaccheyya C.) ■ pp. āsanna (q.v.). See also āsajja, āsajjana, āsada & Caus. āsādeti.;
cp. Sk. āsīdati, ā + sad
(adj.) sitting SN i.195 = Nd ii.136; Snp 1105, Snp 1136; Dhp 227, Dhp 386; Ja i.390; Ja iii.95; v. 340; vi.297; Dāvs ii.17.
pp. of ās, see āsati
to have one’s home, one’s abode or support in (loc.), to live in, thrive by means of, to depend on Mil 75 (kaddame jāyati udake āsīyati i.e. the lotus is born in the mud and is supported or thrives by means of the water).
etym. doubtful; Trenckner Mil p.422 = ā + śyā to freeze or dry up, but taken by him in meaning to thaw, to warm oneself; Müller, P. Gr. 40 same with meaning “cool oneself”; Morris’ J.P. T. S. 1884, 72 as ā + śrā or śrī to become ripe, come to perfection, evidently at fault because of śrā etc. not found in Sk. More likely as a Pass. formation to be referred to ā + śī as in āsaya, i.e. to abide etc.
Derivation uncertain. The BSk. āsīviṣa (e.g. Jtm 3161) is a Sanskritisation of the Pali. To suppose this to come from ahi + visa (snake’s poison) would give a wrong meaning, and leave unexplained the change from ahi to āsi] a snake Vin iv.108; SN iv.172; AN ii.110; iii. 69; Ja i.245; Ja ii.274; Ja iv.30, Ja iv.496; Ja v.82, Ja v.267; Pp 48; Vism 470 (in comp.); Dhp-a i.139; Dhp-a ii.8, Dhp-a ii.38; Snp-a 334, Snp-a 458, Snp-a 465; Vv-a 308.
see āsiṃsanā.
expletive particle = assu3 Ja v.241 (v.l. assu; nipātamattaṃ C. p.243).
3rd pl. aor. of atthi.
(& Āsumhati) to bring to fall, throw down or round, sling round Vin iv.263 Vin iv.265; Vv 5011 (˚itvāna); Ja iii.435 (aor. āsumhi, gloss khipi).
ā + śumbh to glide
to frequent, visit; to practise, pursue, indulge, enjoy AN i.10; Snp 73 (cp. Nd ii.94); Pts ii.93 (maggaṃ) ■ pp. āsevita.
ā + sev
(nt.) & āsevanā (f.)
1. practice, pursuit, indulgence in Vin ii.117; Pv-a 45.
2. succession repetition Dhs 1367; Kv 510 (cp. trsl. 294, 362); Vism 538.
fr. āsevati
frequented, indulged, practised, enjoyed Ja i.21 (v.141; āsevita-nisevita); ii.60; Sdhp 93, Sdhp 237.
pp. of āsevati
a perfect in meaning of pret. & pres. “he says or he said” he spoke, also spoke to somebody (w. acc.), as at Ja i.197 (cullalohitaṃ āha). Usually in 3rd person, very rarely used of 2nd person, as at Snp 839, Snp 840 (= kathesi bhaṇasi Nd 188, Nd 191).
3rd sg. āha Vin ii.191; Snp 790 (= bhaṇati Nd i.87), 888; Ja i.280; Ja iii.53 and freq. passim; 3rd pl āhu Snp 87, Snp 181; Dhp 345; Ja i.59; Snp-a 377, and āhaṃsu Ja i.222; Ja iii.278 and freq.
Vedic āha, orig. perfect of ah to speak, meaning “he began to speak”, thus in meaning of pres. “he says”
ger. of āhanati.
(adj.) 1. (cp. āharati1) to be removed, removable, in ˚pādaka-pīṭha & ˚mañca; a collapsible bed or chair, i e whose legs or feet can be put on & taken away at pleasure (by drawing out a pin) Vin ii.149 (cp. Vin Texts iii.164 n. 5); iv.40, 46 (def. as “ange vijjhitvā ṭhito hoti” it stands by means of a perforated limb), 168, 169.
2 (cp. āharati2) reciting, repeating, or to be quoted, recitation (of the Scriptures); by authority or by tradition MN iii.139; Dhs-a 9, & in cpds.; ˚pada a text quoted from Scripture), tradition Mil 148 (˚ena by reference to the text of the Scriptures); ˚vacana a saying of the Scriptures, a traditional or proverbial saying Ne 21 (in def. of suttaṃ).
grd. of āharati, corresponding to a Sk. *āhṛtya
brought, carried, obtained Vin i.121; Vin iii.53; DN ii.180 (spelt āhata); Ja iii.512 (gloss ānīta) Dāvs i.58.
pp. of āharati
struck, beaten, stamped; afflicted, affected with (-˚) Vin iv.236 = DN iii.238 (kupito anattamano āhata-citto); Vin i.75, Vin i.76; SN i.170 (tilak˚, so read for tilakā-hata, affected with freckles, C. kāḷa-setādi vaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagatta, K. S. p. 318); Ja iii.456; Sdhp 187, Sdhp 401.
pp. of āhanati
“one who is beaten”, a slave, a worker (of low grade) Vin iv.224 (in def. of kammakāra, as bhaṭaka + ā).
fr. āhata
to beat, strike, press against, touch ppr. āhananto Mil 21 (dhamma-bheriṃ); Dāvs iv.50. ger. āhacca touching MN i.493; Ja i.330; Ja vi.2, Ja vi.200; Snp 716 = uppīḷetva Snp-a 498; Vism 420 ■ pp. āhata (q.v.).
1st sg. fut. āhañhi Vin i.8; DN ii.72, where probably to be read as āhañh (= āhañhaṃ). See Geiger, P.Gr. § 153, 2.
ā + han
(nt.) beating, striking, coming into touch, “impinging” Vism 142 (+ pariyāhanana, in def of vitakka) = Dhs-a 114 (cp. Expos. 151); Vism 515 (id.).
fr. ā + han
(adj.-n.) to be taken; taking away; only in phrase acorāharaṇo nidhi a treasure not to be taken by thieves Mil 320; Kp viii.9; Kp-a 224; Sdhp 589.
fr. āharati
one who has to take or bring, a messenger Ja ii.199; Ja iii.328.
āharaṇa + ka
1. to take, take up, take hold of, take out, take away MN i.429 (sallaṃ); SN i.121; SN iii.123; Ja i.40 (ger. āharitvā “with”), 293 (te hattaṃ); Nd ii.540c (puttamaṃsaṃ, read āhāreyya?); Pv ii.310; DN-a i.186, DN-a i.188 DN-a i.2. to bring, bring down, fetch DN ii.245; Ja iv.159 (nāvaṃ v.l. āhāhitvā); v.466; Vv-a 63 (bhattaṃ); Pv-a 75. 3. to get, acquire, bring upon oneself Ja v.433 (padosaṃ) Dhp-a ii.89.
4. to bring on to, put into (w. loc.); fig & intrs. to hold on to, put oneself to, touch, resort to MN i.395 (kaṭhalaṃ mukhe ā.; also inf. āhattuṃ); Thag 1156 (pāpacitte ā.; Mrs. Rh. D. Brethren ver. 1156, not as “accost” p. 419, n.).
5. to assault, strike, offend (for pāhari?) Thag 1173.
6. (fig.) to take up, fall or go back on (w. acc.), recite, quote, repeat (usually with desanaṃ dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) Ja iii.383 (desanaṃ), 401; v.462 (vatthuṃ āharitvā dassesi told a story for example); Snp-a 376; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 39 (atītaṃ) 42, 66, 99 (dhamma-desanaṃ). See also payirudāharati. pp. āhaṭa (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. āhārapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take, to call or ask for Ja iii.88, Ja iii.342; Ja v.466; Pv-a 215.
ā + hṛ;
(adj.) “fetching”, fascinating, captivating, charming Vin iv.299; Thig 299; Thag-a 227; Vv-a 14, Vv-a 15, Vv-a 77.
fr. āharati
one who is to bring something Ja iii.328. Ahavana & Ahavaniya;
grd. of āharati
see under āhuneyya.
feeding, support, food, nutriment (lit & fig.). The term is used comprehensively and the usual enum;n. comprises four kinds of nutriment, viz. (1) kabaḷinkāra āhāro (bodily nutriment, either oḷāriko gross, solid, or sukhumo fine) (2) phassāhāro Name of contact, (3) manosañcetanā˚ Name of volition (= cetanā S. A. on ii.11 f.), (4) viññāṇ˚ of consciousness Thus at MN i.261; DN iii.228, DN iii.276; Dhs 71–73 Vism 341. Another definition of Dhammapāla’s refers it to the fourfold tasting as asita (eaten), pīta (drunk), khāyita (chewed), sāyita (tasted) food Pv-a 25. A synonym with mūla, hetu, etc. for cause, Yamaka, i.3; Yam. A (J.P.T.S. 1910
12) 54. See on term also Dhs trsl. 30 ■ Vin i.84; DN i.166; SN i.172; SN ii.11, SN ii.13, SN ii.98 sq. (the 4 kinds in detail); iii.54 (sa˚); v.64, 391; AN iii.51 (sukhass˚) 79, 142 sq., 192 sq.; iv.49, 108; v.52 (the four) 108, 113 (avijjāya etc.), 116 (bhavataṇhāya), 269 sq (nerayikānaṃ etc.); Snp 78, Snp 165, Snp 707, Snp 747; Nd i.25; Pts i.22 (the four) 122 (id.), 55, 76 sq; Kv 508; Pp 21, Pp 55; Vb 2, Vb 13, Vb 72, Vb 89, Vb 320, Vb 383, Vb 401 sq. (the four) Dhs 58, Dhs 121, Dhs 358, Dhs 646; Ne 31, Ne 114, Ne 124; Dhs-a 153 Dhs-a 401; Dhp-a i.183 (˚ṃ pacchindati to bring up food, to vomit); ii.87; Vv-a 118; Pv-a 14, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 112, Pv-a 148 (utu physical nutriment); Sdhp 100, Sdhp 395, Sdhp 406; AN v.136 gives ten āhāra opposed to ten paripanthā. -an˚; without food unfed MN i.487 (aggi); SN iii.126; SN v.105; Snp 985.
-ūpahāra consumption of food, feeding, eating Vin iii.136. -ṭhitika subsisting or living on food DN iii.211, DN iii.273; AN v.50, AN v.55; Pts i.5, Pts i.122. -pariggaha taking up or acquirement of food Mil 244 or is it “restraint or abstinence in food”? Same combn. at Mil 313. -maya “food-like” feeding stuff, food Ja iii.523. -lolatā greed after food Snp-a 35. -samudaya origin of nutriment SN iii.59.
fr. ā + hṛ; lit. taking up or on to oneself
the state of being food. In the idiom āhārattaṇ pharati; Vin i.199, of medicine, ʻto penetrate into food-nessʼ, to come under the category of food Mil 152, of poison, to turn into food. [According to Oldenberg (Vin i.381) his MSS read about equally ˚attaṃ and ˚atthaṃ. Trenckner prints ˚atthaṃ, and records no variant (see p. 425)].
āhāra + tta
to take food, eat, feed on SN ii.13; SN iii.240; SN iv.104; AN i.114, AN i.295; AN ii.40, AN ii.145, AN ii.206; iv. 167; Nd ii.540c (āhāraṃ & puttamaṃsaṃ cp. SN ii.98).
Denom. fr. āhāra
(-˚) (adj.) only in pañcāhika every five days (cp. pañcāhaṃ & sattāhaṃ) MN iii.157.
der. fr. aha2
to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w. acc.) Vin i.203 (senāsana-cārikaṃ), 217; ii. 132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṃ); iv.62; Ja i.48 Ja i.108, Ja i.239; Nd ii.540b; Pv iii.229 (= vicarati Pv-a 185) Vism 38, Vism 284 (aṭaviṃ); Vv-a 238 (tattha tattha); Pv-a 143.
ā + hiṇḍ, cp. BSk. āhiṇḍate Divy 165 etc.
put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a fire), blazing Snp 18 (gini = ābhato jalito vā Snp-a 28). See sam˚.
pp. of ā + dhā
3rd pl. of āha (q.v.).
(f.) oblation, sacrifice; veneration, adoration MN iii.167; SN i.141; Thag 566 (˚īnaṃ paṭiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts); Ja i.15; Ja v.70 (id.) Vv 6433 (paramâhutiṃ gato deserving the highest adoration); Snp 249, Snp 458; Kv 530; Snp-a 175; Vv-a 285.
Vedic āhuti, ā + hu
= āhuti, in āhuna-pāhuna giving oblations and sacrificing Vv-a 155; by itself at Vism 219.
(adj.) sacrificial, worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful DN iii.5, DN iii.217 (aggi); AN ii.56, AN ii.70 (sāhuneyyaka), 145 sq. (id.); iv.13, 41 (aggi); Iti 88 (+ pāhuneyya); Vv 6433 (cp. Vv-a 285). See def. at Vism 219 where expld. by “āhavanīya” and “āhavanaṃ arahati” deserving of offerings.
a grd. form. fr. ā + hu, cp. āhuti
(adj.) according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 73 “crowded up, blocked up, impassable Vin i.79; Vin iv.297; Vism 413 (˚ṃ andha-tamaṃ).
I.
doubtful or āhuṇḍ˚?
in i-kāra the letter or sound i Snp-a 12 (˚lopa), 508 (id.).
a bear Ja vi.538 [ = accha C.).
Sk. ṛkṣa, of which the regular representation is P. accha2
(?) at Vin ii.151 (+ kasāva) is trsl. by “slime of trees”, according to Bdhgh’s expln. on p. 321 (to C. V. vi.3, 1), who however reads nikkāsa.
uncertain as regard meaning & etym.
(nt.) seeing Vism 16.
fr. īkṣ
a fortuneteller Vin iii.107; SN ii.260; Ja i.456, Ja i.457; Ja vi.504.
fr. īkṣ to look or see, cp. akkhi
to look Ja v.153; Thag-a 147; Dhs-a 172.
fr. īkṣ
(nt.) movement, gesture, sign Ja ii.195, Ja ii.408; Ja vi.368, Ja vi.459.
pp. of ingati = iñjati
(indecl.) part. of exhortation lit. “get a move on”, come on, go on, look here Snp 83, Snp 189, Snp 862, Snp 875 = Snp 1052; Ja v.148; Pv iv.57; Vv 539 (= codan’atthe nipāto Vv-a 237); Vv-a 47; Dhp-a iv.62.
Sk. anga prob. after P. ingha (or añja, q.v.); fr. iñjati, cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 84
coal, embers, in inghāḷakhu Thig 386 a pit of glowing embers (= angāra-kāsu Thag-a 256). The whole cpd. is doubtful.
according to Morris J.P. T.S. 1884, 74 = angāra, cp. Marāthī ingala live coal
see iti.
(-˚) (adj.) wishing, longing, having desires, only in pāp˚ having evil desires SN i.50 SN ii.156; an˚ without desires SN i.61, SN i.204; Snp 707; app id. Snp 628, Snp 707.
the adj. form of icchā
(-˚) (adj.) wishing, desirous, only in nt. adv. yad-icchikaṃ (and yen˚; ) after one’s wish or liking MN iii.97; AN iii.28.
fr. iccha
to wish, desire, ask for (c. acc.), expect SN i.210 (dhammaṃ sotuṃ i.); Snp 127, Snp 345, Snp 512, Snp 813, Snp 836; Dhp 162, Dhp 291; Nd i.3, Nd i.138, Nd i.164; Nd ii.s. v.; Pv ii.63; Pp 19; Mil 269, Mil 327; Snp-a 16, Snp-a 23, Snp-a 321; Kp-a 17; Pv-a 20 Pv-a 71, Pv-a 74; Pot. icche Dhp 84; Snp 835; Pv ii.66 & iccheyya DN ii.2, DN ii.10; Snp 35; Dhp 73, Dhp 88; ppr. icchaṃ Snp 826 Snp 831, Snp 937; Dhp 334 (phalaṃ) aor. icchi Pv-a 31 ■ grd icchitabba Pv-a 8 ■ pp. iṭṭha & icchita; (q.v.). Note. In prep ■ cpds. the root iṣ2 (icchati) is confused with root iṣ1 (iṣati, eṣati) with pp. both ˚iṭṭha and ˚iṣita Thus ajjhesati, pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk. parīcchati), pp. pariyiṭṭha pariyesita.;
Sk. icchati, iṣ, cp. Av. isaiti, Obulg. iskati, Ohg. eiscōn, Ags. āscian = E. ask; all of same meaning “seek wish”
see aticchati & cp.; icchatā.
Sk. rcchati of ṛ, concerning which see appeti
(-˚) (f.) wishfulness, wishing: only in aticchatā too great wish for, covetousness, greed Vb 350 (cp. aticchati, which is probably the primary basis of the word); mah˚ & pāp˚; Vb 351, Vb 370.
abstr. fr. icchā
(nt.) desiring, wish Ja iv.5; Ja vi.244.
fr. iṣ2, cp. Sk. īpsana
(f.) wish, longing, desire DN ii.243; DN iii.75; SN i.40 (˚dhūpāyito loko), 44 (naraṃ parikassati) AN ii.143; AN iv.293 sq.; 325 sq.; v.40, 42 sq.; Snp 773 Snp 872; Dhp 74, Dhp 264 (˚lobha-samāpanna); Nd i.29, Nd i.30; Pp 19; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; Vb 101, Vb 357, Vb 361, Vb 370; Ne 18 Ne 23, Ne 24; Asl. 363; Dhs-a 250 (read icchā for issā? See Dhs trsl.100); Snp-a 108; Pv-a 65, Pv-a 155; Sdhp 242, Sdhp 320.
-āvacara moving in desires MN i.27 (pāpaka); Ne 27 -āvatiṇṇa affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Snp 306. -pakata same Vin i.97; AN iii.119, AN iii.191, AN iii.219 sq. Pp 69; Mil 357; Vism 24 (where Bdhgh however takes it as “icchāya apakata” and puts apakata = upadduta) -vinaya discipline of one’s wishes DN iii.252, AN iv.15 AN v.165 sq.
fr. icchati, iṣ2
wished, desired, longed for Ja i.208; Dhs-a 364; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 53, Pv-a 64 (read anicchita for anijjhiṭṭha which may be a contamination of icchita & iṭṭha), 113 127 (twice).;
pp. of icchati
to have a good result, turn out a blessing. succeed prosper, be successful SN i.175 (“work effectively trsl.; = samijjhati mahapphalaṃ hoti C.); iv.303; Snp 461 Snp 485; Ja v.393; Pv ii.111; ii.913 (= samijjhati Pv-a 120) Pot. ijjhe Snp 458, Snp 459; pret. ijjhittha (= Sk. ṛdhyiṣṭha Vv 206 (= nippajjittha mahapphalo ahuvattha Vv-a 103). pp. iddha. See also aḍḍha2 & aḍḍhaka. Cp. sam˚.;
Vedic ṛdhyate & ṛdhnoti; Gr. α ̓́λχομαι to thrive, Lat. alo to nourish, also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) success, carrying out successfully Pts i.17 sq., 74, 181; ii.125, 143 sq., 161, 174 Vb 217 sq.; Vism 266, Vism 383 (˚aṭṭhena iddhi); Dhs-a 91 Dhs-a 118, Dhs-a 237.
fr. ijjhati
to shake, move, turn about, stir DN i.56; SN i.107 SN i.132, SN i.181 (aniñjamāna ppr. med. “impassive”); iii.211 Thag 42; Thag 2, Thag 231; Nd ii.s. v. (+ calati vedhati); Vism 377; DN-a i.167 ■ pp. iñjita (q.v.).
Vedic ṛñjati (cp. P. ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda), and as aṅg in Sk. anga = P. añja & ingha Vedic pali-angati to turn about. See also ānejja & añjati;1
(f.) & ˚aṃ (nt.) shaking, movement, motion Snp 193 (= calanā phandanā Snp-a 245); Ne 88 (= phandanā C.). an˚; immobility, steadfastness Pts i.15 Pts ii.118.
fr. iñj, see iñjati
shaken, moved Thag 386 (an˚). Usually as nt. iñjitaṃ shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation MN i.454; SN i.109; SN iv.202; AN ii.45; Snp 750, Snp 1040 (pl. iñjitā), 1048 (see Nd ii.140); Dhp 255; Vb 390. On the 7 iñjitas see J.P. T.S. 1884, 58.
pp. of iñjati
(nt.) state of vacillation, wavering, motion SN v.315 (kāyassa).
abstr. fr. iñjita nt.
(adj.) pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iṭṭha kanta manāpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) DN i.245; DN ii.192; MN i.85; SN iv.60, SN iv.158, SN iv.235 sq.; SN v.22, SN v.60, SN v.147; AN ii.66 sq.; AN v.135 (dasa, dhammā etc., ten objects affording pleasure); Snp 759; It. 15; Vb 2, Vb 100, Vb 337 ■ Alone as nt. meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, happiness at Snp 154 (+ aniṭṭha); Ne 28 (+ aniṭṭha); Vism 167 (id.); Pv-a 116 (= bhadraṃ), 140. -aniṭṭha unpleasant disagreeable Pv-a 32, Pv-a 52, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 116 ■ See also pariy˚ in which iṭṭha stands for eṭṭha. Itthaka (Itthaka)
pp. of icchati
(f.)
1. a burnt brick a tile Vin ii.121 (˚pākara a brick wall, distinguished fr silāpakāra & dāru˚); Ja iii.435, Ja iii.446 (pākār iṭṭhikā read ˚aṭṭhakā); v.213 (rattiṭṭhikā); Vism 355 (˚dārugomaya) Pv-a 4 (˚cuṇṇa-makkhita-sīsa the head rubbed with brickpowder i.e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika x.5 piṣṭa-cūṛn’âvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ’haṃ paśūkṛtaḥ with striking equation iṣṭaka → piṣṭa). 2. pl. (as suvaṇṇa˚) gold or gilt tiles used for covering a cetiya or tope Dhp-a iii.29, Dhp-a iii.61; Vv-a 157.
BSk. iṣṭakā, e.g. Divy 221; from the Idg. root *idh → *aidh to burn, cp. Sk. idhma firewood inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edhaḥ fuel; Gr. ἀίχω burn, α ̔ϊχος fire-brand; Lat. aedes, aestas & aestus more especially Av. ištya tile, brick
in ˚khagga-dhāra at Ja vi.223 should be read iddha.
(nt.) debt DN i.71, DN i.73; AN iii.352; AN v.324 (enumd. with baddha, jāni & kali); Snp 120; Ja i.307; Ja ii.388, Ja ii.423; Ja iii.66; Ja iv.184 (iṇagga for nagga?) 256; v.253 (where enumd. as one of the 4 paribhogas viz. theyya˚, iṇa˚, dāya˚, sāmi˚); vi.69, 193; Mil 375; Pv-a 273, Pv-a 276, iṇaṃ gaṇhāti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism 556; Snp-a 289; Pv-a 3 ■ iṇaṃ muñcati to discharge a debt Ja iv.280; Ja v.238; ˚ṃ sodheti same Pv-a 276; labhati same Pv-a 3.
-apagama absence of debt Thag-a 245. -gāhaka a borrower Mil 364. -ghāta stricken by debt Snp 246 (iṇaṃ gahetva tassa appadānena iṇaghāta). -ṭṭha (with iṇaṭṭa as v.l. at all passages, see aṭṭa) fallen into or being in debt MN i.463 = SN iii.93 = Iti 89 = Mil 279 -paṇṇa promissory note Ja i.230; Ja iv.256. -mokkha release from debt Ja iv.280; Ja v.239. -sādhaka negotiator of a loan Mil 365.
Sk. ṛṇa, see also P. an-aṇa
one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor SN i.170; Ja iv.159, Ja iv.256; Ja vi.178; Thag-a 271 see also dhanika); Pv-a 3 ■ (2) a debtor Vin i.76; Nd i.160.
fr. iṇa
gone, only in cpd. dur-ita gone badly, as nt. evil, wrong Davs i.61; otherwise in compn. with prep., as peta, vīta etc.
pp. of eti, i
(adj.) other second, next; different Dhp 85, Dhp 104, Dhp 222; Ja ii.3; Ja iii.26 Ja iv.4; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 83, Pv-a 117. In repetition cpd. itarītara one or the other, whatsoever, any Snp 42; Ja v.425 Nd ii.141; Mil 395; Kp-a 145, Kp-a 147; acc. itarītaraṃ instr.; itarītarena used as adv. of one kind or another in every way, anyhow [cp. BSk. itaretara M Vastu iii. 348 and see Wackernagel Altind. Gram. II. Ś 121 c.] Ja vi.448 (˚ṃ); Dhp 331 (˚ena); Vv 841 (text reads itritarena v.l. itaritarena, expld. by itaritaraṃ Vv-a 333).
Ved. itara = Lat. iterum a second time; compar. of pron. base *i, as in ayaṃ, etaṃ, iti etc.
(adj.) freq. spelling for ittara (q.v.).
(indecl.) emphatic deictic particle “thus”. Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style (poetry), the latter more familiar in conversational prose. The function of “iti” is expld. by the old Pāli C. in a conventional phrase, looking upon it more as a “filling” particle than trying to define its meaning viz ■ itī ti padasandhi padasaṃsaggo padapāripurī akkharasamavāyo etc.” Nd i.123 = Nd ii.137. The same expln. also for iti’ haṃ (see below iv.)-I. As deictic adv. “thus, in this way” (Vism 423 iti = evaṃ pointing to something either just mentioned or about to be mentioned: (a) referring to what precedes Snp 253 (n’eso maman ti iti naṃ vijaññā), 805; Iti 123 (ito devā.. taṃ namassanti); Dhp 74 (iti bālassa sankappo thus think the-foolish), 286 (iti bālo vicinteti); Vv 7910 (= evaṃ Vv-a 307); Vv-a 5 ■ (b) referring to what follows DN i.63 (iti paṭisañcikkhati); AN i.205 (id.)-II. As emphatic part. pointing out or marking off a statement either as not one’s own (reported) or as the definite contents of (one’s own or other’s) thoughts. On the whole untranslatable (unless written as quotation marks), often only setting off a statement as emphatic, where we would either underline the word or phrase in question, or print it in italics, or put it in quot. marks (e.g. bālo ti vuccati Dhp 63 = bālo vuccati).
1. in direct speech (as given by writer or narrator), e.g. sādhu bhante Kassapa lābhataṃ esā janatā dassanāyā ti. Tena hi Sīha tvaṃ yeva Bhagavato ārocehī ti. Evaṃ bhante ti kho Sīho… . DN i.151.
2. in indirect speech: (a) as statement of a fact “so it is that” (cp. E. “viz.”, Ger. “und zwar”), mostly untranslated Kp iv. (arahā ti pavuccati); Ja i.253 (tasmā pesanaka-corā t’ eva vuccanti); iii.51 (tayo sahāyā ahesuṃ makkato sigālo uddo ti); Pv-a 112 (ankuro pañca-sakaṭasatehi… aññataro pi brāhmaṇo pañca-sakaṭasatehī ti dve janā sakata-sahassehi… patipannā) ■ (b) as statement of a thought “like this”, “I think”, so, thus Snp 61 (“sango eso” iti ñatvā knowing “this is defilement”), 253 (“neso maman” ti iti naṃ vijaññā), 783 (“iti’ han” ti) 1094 (etaṃ dīpaṃ anāparaṃ Nibbānaṃ iti naṃ brūmi I call this N. ), 1130 (aparā pāraṃ gaccheyya tasmā “Parāyanaṃ” iti) ■ III. Peculiarities of spelling. (1) in combn. with other part. iti is elided & contracted as follows icc’ eva, t’ eva, etc ■ (2) final a, i, u preceding ti are lengthened to ā, ī, ū, e.g. mā evaṃ akatthā ti Dhp-a i.7 kati dhurānī ti ibid; dve yeva dhurāni bhikkhū ti ibid. IV. Combinations with other emphatic particles: + eva thus indeed, in truth, really; as icc’ eva Pv i.119 (evam eva Pv-a 59); t’ eva Ja i.253; Miin 114; tv’ eva Ja i.203; Ja ii.2. -iti kira thus now, perhaps, I should say DN i.228, DN i.229, DN i.240. -iti kho thus, therefore DN i.98, DN i.103 DN iii.135. iti vā and so on (?), thus and such (similar cases Nd i.13 = Nd ii.420 A1. -iti ha thus surely, indeed Snp 934, Snp 1084 (see below under ītihītihaṃ; cp. Snp-a Index 669: itiha? and itikirā); Iti 76; DN-a i.247, as iti haṃ at Snp 783 (same expln. at Nd i.71 as for iti). -kin ti how Ja ii.159.
-kirā (f.) [a substantivised iti kira] hearsay, lit. “so I guess” or “I have heard” AN i.189 = AN ii.191 sq. = Nd ii.151. Cp. itiha. -bhava becoming so & so (opp. abhava not becoming) Vin ii.184 (˚abhava); DN i.8 (ip = iti bhavo iti abhavo DN-a i.91); AN ii.248; Iti 109 (id.); syn. with itthabhava (q.v.). -vāda “speaking so & so”, talk, gossip MN i.133; SN v.73; AN ii.26; It iii.35. -vuttaka (nt. [a noun formation fr. iti vuttaṃ] “so it has been said” (book of) quotations, “Logia”, Name of the fourth book of the Khuddaka-nikāya, named thus because every sutta begins with vuttaṃ h’ etaṃ Bhagavatā “thus has the Buddha said” (see khuddaka and navanga) Vin iii.8; MN i.133; AN ii.7, AN ii.103; AN iii.86, AN iii.177, AN iii.361 sq.; Pp 43, Pp 62 Kp-a 12. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares the interesting BSk. distortion itivṛttaṃ. -hāsa [ = iti ha āsa, preserving the Vedic form āsa, 3rd sg. perf. of atthi] “thus indeed it has been”, legendary lore, oral tradition, history usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase itihāsa-pañca-mānaṃ padako veyyākaraṇo etc. DN i.88 = (see DA i.247); AN i.163; AN iii.223; Snp 447, Snp 1020 Cp. also Mvu i.556 ■ hītiha [itiha + itiha] “so so” talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc. (cp itikirā & anītiha. Nd;2 spells ītihītiha) MN i.520; SN i.154; Snp 1084; Nd ii.151.
Vedic iti, of pron. base *i, cp. Sk. itthaṃ thus, itthā here, there; Av. ipa so; Lat. ita & item thus Cp. also P. ettha; lit. “here, there (now), then”
(indecl.) adv. of succession or motion in space & time “from here”. “from now”. (1) with ref. to space: (a) from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in opp. to the “other” world) Iti 77; Snp 271 (˚ja. ˚nidāna caused or founded in or by this existence attabhāvaṃ sandhāy’ āha Snp-a 303), 774 (cutāse), 870 (˚nidāna), 1062 (from this source, i.e. from me), 1101; Pv i.57 (ito dinnaṃ what is given in this world); i.62 (i.e. manussalokato Pv-a 33); i.123 (= idhalokato Pv-a 64); Ne 93 (ito bahiddhā); Pv-a 46 (ito dukkhato mutti) ■ (b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c’ ito here and there Pv-a 4, Pv-a 6; and ito vā etto vā here & there Dhp-a ii.80 ■ (2) with ref. to time from here, from now, hence (in chronological records with num. ord. or card., with ref. either to past or future) (a) referring to the past, since DN ii.2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago); Snp 570 (ito aṭṭhame, scil. divase 8 days ago Snp-a 457; T. reads atthami); Vv-a 319 (ito kira tiṃsa-kappa-sahasse); Pv-a 19 (dvā navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (id.), 78 (pañcamāya jātiyā in the fifth previous re-birth) ■ (b) referring to the future, i.e. henceforth in future, from now e.g. ito sattame divase in a week Vv-a 138; ito paraṃ further, after this Snp-a 160 Snp-a 178, Snp-a 412, Snp-a 549; Pv-a 83; ito paṭthāya from now on, henceforward Ja i.63 (ito dāni p.); Pv-a 41.
Vedic itaḥ, abl ■ adv. formation fr. pron. base *i, cp. iti, ayaṃ etc.
(sometimes spelt itara ) (adj.)
1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief unstable MN i.318 (opp. dīgharattaṃ); AN ii.187; Ja i.393 Ja iii.83 (˚dassana = khaṇika˚ C.), iv.112 (˚vāsa temporary abode); Pv i.1111 (= na cira-kāla-ṭṭhāyin anicca vipariṇāma-dhamma Pv-a 60); DN-a i.195; Pv-a 60 (= paritta khaṇika).
2. small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean MN ii.47 (˚jacca of inferior birth); AN ii.34; Snp 757 (= paritta paccupaṭṭhāna Snp-a 509); Mil 93, Mil 114 (˚pañña of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in BSk. itvaṛa, e.g. Divy 317 (dāna).
Vedic itvara in meaning “going”, going along, hence developed meaning “passing” fr. i
(f.) changeableness Mil 93 (of a woman).
fr. ittara
(indecl.) here, in this world (or “thus, in such a way”) only in cpd. ˚bhāv’ aññathā-bhāva such an (i.e. earthly existence and one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form” (cp. itibhāva & itthatta Snp 729, Snp 740 = Snp 752; Iti 9 (v.l. itthi˚ for iti˚) = AN ii.10 = Nd ii.172a; Iti 94 (v.l. ittha˚). There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sk. itthā & itthaṃ Sk. itthaṃ (see next).;
the regular representative of Vedic ittha here, there, but preserved only in cpds. while the Pāli form is ettha
(indecl.) thus, in this way DN i.53, DN i.213; Dāvs iv.35; Dāvs v.18.
-nāma (itthan˚) having such as name, called thus, socalled Vin i.56; Vin iv.136; Ja i.297; Mil 115; Dhp-a ii.98 -bhūta being thus, of this kind, modal, only in cpd. ˚lakkhaṇa or ˚ākhyāna the sign or case of modality, i.e. the ablative case Snp-a 441; Vv-a 162, Vv-a 174; Pv-a 150.
adv. fr. pron. base ˚i, as also iti in same meaning
(nt.) [ittha + *tvaṃ, abstr. fr. ittha. The curious BSk. distortion of this word is icchatta M Vastu 417 being here (in this world), in the present state of becoming, this (earthly) state (not “thusness” or “life as we conceive it”, as Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. i.177; although a confusion between ittha & itthaṃ seems to exist, see ittha); “life in these conditions” K. S. ii.17; expld. by itthabhāva C. on SN i.140 (see K. S. 318) ■ See also freq formula A of arahatta ■ DN i.18, DN i.84; AN i.63; AN ii.82, AN ii.159 AN ii.203; Snp 158; Dhs 633; Pp 70, Pp 71; DN-a i.112.
(nt.) state or condition of femininity, womanhood, muliebrity Dhs 633 (itthi-sabhāva Dhs-a 321). Itthi & Itthi
itthi + *tvaṃ abstr. fr. itthi
(f.) woman female; also (usually as-˚) wife. Opp. purisa man (see e.g. for contrast of itthi and purisa Ja v.72, Ja v.398; Ne 93; Dhp-a i.390; Pv-a 153) ■ SN i.33 (nibbānass’ eva santike) 42, 125 (majjhim˚, mah˚), 185; AN i.28, AN i.138; AN ii.115, AN ii.209 AN iii.68, AN iii.90, AN iii.156; AN iv.196 (purisaṃ bandhati); Snp 112, Snp 769 (nom. pl. thiyo = itthi-saññikā thiyo Snp-a 513); Ja i.286 (itthi doso), 300 (gen. pl. itthinaṃ); ii.415 (nom. pl. thiyo) v.397 (thi-ghātaka), 398 (gen. dat. itthiyā), v.425 (nom pl. itthiyo); Vb 336, Vb 337; DN-a i.147; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 44, Pv-a 46 Pv-a 67, Pv-a 154 (amanuss˚ of petīs); Sdhp 64, Sdhp 79 ■ anitthi a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, an unfaithful wife Ja ii.126 (= ucchiṭṭh˚ C.); kul’-itthi a wife of good descent Vin ii.10; AN iii.76; AN iv.16, AN iv.19; dahar a young wife Ja i.291; dur˚ a poor woman Ja iv.38. Some general characterisations of womanhood: 10 kinds of women enumd. at Vin iii.139 = AN v.264 = Vv-a 72 viz. mātu-rakkhitā, pitu˚, mātāpitu˚ bhātu˚, bhaginī˚ ñāti˚, gotta˚, dhamma˚, sarakkhā, saparidaṇḍā; see Vin iii.139 for expln.-S i.38 (malaṃ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); Ja i.287 (itthiyo nāma āsa lāmikā pacchimikā); iv. 222 (itthiyo papāto akkhāto; pamattaṃ pamathenti); v. 425 (sīho yathā… tath’ itthiyo); women as goods for sale SN i.43 (bhaṇḍānaṃ uttamaṃ); Dhp-a i.390 (itthiyo vikkiṇiya bhaṇḍaṃ).
-agāra (-āgāra) as itthā̆gāra women’s apartment, seraglio Vin i.72; Vin iv.158; SN i.58, SN i.89; Ja i.90; also coll. for womenfolk women (cp. Ger. frauenzimmer) DN ii.249; Ja v.188 -indriya the female principle or sex, femininity (opp. puris indriya) SN v.204; AN iv.57 sq.; Vism 447, Vism 492; Dhs 585, Dhs 633 Dhs 653 et passim. -kathā talk about women DN i.7 (cp. DN-a i.90). -kāma the craving for a woman SN iv.343. -kutta a woman’s behaviour, woman’s wiles, charming behaviour coquetry AN iv.57 = Dhs 633; Ja i.296, Ja i.433; Ja ii.127, Ja ii.329 Ja iv.219, Ja iv.472; Dhp-a iv.197. -ghātaka a woman-killer Ja v.398. -dhana wife’s treasure, dowry Vin iii.16. -dhutta a rogue in the matter of women, one who indulges in women Snp 106; Ja iii.260; Pv-a 5. -nimitta characteristic of a woman Dhs 633, Dhs 713, Dhs 836. -pariggaha a woman’s company, a woman Nd i.11. -bhāva existence as woman womanhood SN i.129; Thig 216 (referring to a yakkhinī cp. Thag-a 178; Dhs 633; Pv-a 168. -rūpa womanly beauty AN i.1; AN iii.68; Thig 294. -lakkhaṇa fortune-telling regarding a woman DN i.9 (cp. Dhp-a i.94, + purisa˚); Ja vi.135. -liṅga “sign of a woman”, feminine quality, female sex Vism 184; Dhs 633, Dhs 713, Dhs 836; Dhs-a 321 sq. -sadda the sound (or word) “woman” Dhp-a i.15. -soṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Snp 112.
Vedic stri, Av. strī woman, perhaps with Sk. sātuḥ uterus fr. Idg. ˚sī to sow or produce, Lat. sero Goth. saian, Ohg. sāen, Ags. sāwan etc., cp. also Cymr hīl progeny, Oir. sīl seed; see J. Schmidt, K. Z. xxv.29. The regular representative of Vedic strī is P. thī, which only occurs rarely (in poetry & comp;n.) see thī
(f.) a woman Vin iii.16; DN ii.14; Ja i.336; Vv 187; Sdhp 79. As adj. itthika in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women Vin ii.256 (kulāni bahuttikāni appapurisakāni rich in women & lacking in men); SN ii.264 (id. and appitthikāni ). Ida & Idam
fr. itthi
(indecl.) emphatic demonstr. adv. in local, temporal & modal function, as (1) in this, here:; idappaccayatā having its foundation in this, i.e. causally connected, by way of cause Vin i.5 = SN i.136; DN i.185; Dhs 1004 Dhs 1061; Vb 340, Vb 362, Vb 365; Vism 518; etc ■ (2) now, then which idha is more freq.) DN ii.267, DN ii.270, almost syn. (for with kira ■ (3) just (this), even so, only: idam-atthika just sufficient, proper, right Thag 984 (cīvara); Pp 69 (read so for ˚maṭṭhika, see Pp A 250); as idam-atthitā “being satisfied with what is sufficient” at Vism 81 expld. as atthika-bhāva at Pp A 250. idaṃsaccābhinivesa inclination to say: only this is the truth, i.e. inclination to dogmatise, one of the four kāya-ganthā, viz abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṃ˚ (see Dhs 1135 & Dhs trsl.304); DN iii.230; SN v.59; Nd i.98; Ne 115 sq.
nt. of ayaṃ (idaṃ) in function of a deictic part.
(indecl.) now Dhp 235, Dhp 237; Kp-a 247.
Vedic idānīṃ
in flames, burning, flaming bright, clear Ja vi.223 (˚khaggadharā balī; so read for T. iṭṭhi-khagga˚); Dpvs vi.42.
pp. of iddhe to idh or indh, cp. indhana & idhuma
(a) prosperous, opulent, wealthy DN i.211 (in idiomatic phrase iddha phīta bahujana of a prosperous town); AN iii.215 (id.); Ja vi.227 Ja vi.361 (= issara C.), 517; Dāvs i.11 ■ (b) successful satisfactory, sufficient Vin i.212 (bhattaṃ); iv.313 (ovādo).
pp. of ijjhati; cp. Sk. ṛddha
. There is no single word in English for Iddhi, as the idea is unknown in Europe. The main sense seems to be ʻpotencyʼ.
1. Pre-Buddhistic; the Iddhi of a layman The four Iddhis of a king are personal beauty, long life good health, and popularity (D ii.177; MN iii.176, cp. Ja iii.454 for a later set). The Iddhi of a rich young noble is 1. The use of a beautiful garden, 2. of soft and pleasant clothing, 3. of different houses for the different seasons 4. of good food, AN i.145. At MN i.152 the Iddhi of a hunter is the craft and skill with which he captures game; but at p. 155 other game have an Iddhi of their own by which they outwit the hunter. The Iddhi, the power of a confederation of clans, is referred to at DN ii.72. It is by the Iddhi they possess that birds are able to fly (Dhp 175).
2. Psychic powers. including most of those claimed for modern mediums (see under Abhiññā ). Ten such are given in a stock paragraph. They are the power to project mind-made images of oneself; to become invisible; to pass through solid things, such as a wall; to penetrate solid ground as if it were water; to walk on water; to fly through the air; to touch sun and moon; to ascend into the highest heavens (DN i.77, DN i.212; DN ii.87, DN ii.213 DN iii.112, DN iii.281; SN ii.121; SN v.264, SN v.303; AN i.170, AN i.255; AN iii.17 AN iii.28, AN iii.82, AN iii.425; AN v.199; Pts i.111; Pts ii.207; Vism 378 sq., 384; DN-a i.122). For other such powers see S i.144; iv.290 v.263; AN iii.340.
3. The Buddhist theory of Iddhi. At DN i.213 the Buddha is represented as saying: ʻIt is because I see danger in the practice of these mystic wonders that I loathe and abhor and am ashamed thereofʼ. The mystic wonder that he himself believed in and advocated (p. 214) was the wonder of education. What education was meant in the case of Iddhi, we learn from MN i.34; AN iii.425, and from the four bases of Iddhi, the Iddhipādā. They are the making determination in respect of concentration on purpose, on will, on thoughts & on investigation (D ii.213; MN i.103; AN i.39, AN i.297; AN ii.256; iii. 82; Pts i.111; Pts ii.154, Pts ii.164, Pts ii.205; Vb 216). It was ar offence against the regulations of the Sangha for a Bhikkhv to display before the laity these psychic powers beyond the capacity of ordinary men (Vin ii.112). And falsely to claim the possession of such powers involved expulsion from the Order (Vin iii.91). The psychic powers of Iddhi were looked upon as inferior (as the Iddhi of an unconverted man seeking his own profit), compared to the higher Iddhi, the Ariyan Iddhi (D iii.112; AN i.93; Vin ii.183). There is no valid evidence that any one of the ten Iddhis in the above list actually took place. A few instances are given, but all are in texts more than a century later than the recorded wonder. And now for nearly two thousand years we have no further instances Various points on Iddhi discussed at Dial. i.272, 3; Cpd. 60 ff.; Expositor 121. Also at Kv 55; Pts ii.150; Vism xii; Dhp-a i.91; Ja i.47, Ja i.360.
-ānubhāva (iddhånu˚) power or majesty of thaumaturgy Vin 31, Vin 209, Vin 240; iii.67; SN i.147; SN iv.290; Pv-a 53 -ābhisaṅkhāra (iddhåbhi˚) exercise of any of the psychic powers Vin i.16, Vin i.17, Vin i.25; DN i.106; SN iii.92; SN iv.289; SN v.270 Snp p.107; Pv-a 57, Pv-a 172 Pv-a 212. -pāṭihāriya a wonder of psychic power Vin i.25, Vin i.28, Vin i.180, Vin i.209; Vin ii.76, Vin ii.112, Vin ii.200; DN i.211, DN i.212; DN iii.3, DN iii.4, DN iii.9, DN iii.12 sq., 27; SN iv.290; AN i.170 AN i.292; Pts ii.227. -pāda constituent or basis of psychic power Vin ii.240; DN ii.103, DN ii.115 sq., 120; iii.77, 102 127, 221; MN ii.11; MN iii.296; SN i.116, SN i.132; SN iii.96, SN iii.153 SN iv.360; SN v.254, SN v.255, SN v.259 sq., 264 sq., 269 sq., 275, 285; AN iv.128 sq., 203, 463; v.175; Nd i.14, Nd i.45 (˚dhīra), 340 (˚pucchā); Nd i.s. v.; Pts i.17, Pts i.21, Pts i.84; Pts ii.56, Pts ii.85 sq., 120 166, 174; Ud 62; Dhs 358, Dhs 528, Dhs 552; Ne 16, Ne 31, Ne 83; Dhs-a 237; Dhp-a iii.177; Dhp-a iv.32. -bala the power of working wonders Vv-a 4; Pv-a 171. -yāna the carriage (fig.) of psychic faculties Mil 276. -vikubbanā the practice of psychic powers Vism 373 sq. -vidhā kinds of iddhi DN i.77, DN i.212; DN ii.213; DN iii.112, DN iii.281; SN ii.121; SN v.264 sq., 303; AN i.170 sq., 255; iii.17, 28, 82 sq., 425 sq.; v.199; Pts i.111; Pts ii.207; Vism 384; DN-a i.222. -visaya range or extent of psychic power Vin iii.67; Ne 23.
Vedic ṛddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pali ijjhati
(-˚) (adj.) the compn. form of addhika in cpd. kapaṇ-iddhika tramps & wayfarers (see kapaṇa), e.g. at Ja i.6; Ja iv.15; Pv-a 78.
(-˚) (adj.) possessed of power, only in cpd. mah-iddhika of great power, always combd. with mah-ānubhāva, e.g. at Vin i.31; Vin ii.193; Vin iii.101; SN ii.155; MN i.34; Thag 429. As mahiddhiya at Ja v.149 See mahiddhika.
iddhi + ka
(adj.)
1. (lit.) successful, proficient, only in neg. an˚; unfortunate, miserable, poor Ja vi.361. 2. (fig.) possessing psychic powers Vin iii.67; Vin iv.108; AN i.23, AN i.25; AN ii.185; AN iii.340; AN iv.312; Snp 179; Ne 23 Sdhp 32, Sdhp 472.
fr. iddhi
(indecl.) here in this place, in this connection, now; esp. in this world or present existence Snp 1038, Snp 1056, Snp 1065; Iti 99 (idh ûpapanna reborn in this existence); Dhp 5, Dhp 15, Dhp 267, Dhp 343 Dhp 392; Nd i.40, Nd i.109, Nd i.156; Nd ii.145, Nd ii.146; Snp-a 147; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 71. -idhaloka this world, the world of men Snp 1043 (= manussaloka Nd ii.552c); Pv-a 64; in this religion Vb 245. On diff. meanings of idha see Dhs-a 348.
Sk. iha, adv. of space fr. pron. base *i (cp. ayaṃ, iti etc.), cp. Lat. ihi, Gr. ἰχα γενής, Av. ida
fire-wood - Tela-kaṭāha-gāthā, p. 53, J.P.T.S. 1884.
Sk. idhma, see etym. under iṭṭhakā
[Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz. *Idg. *eid to shine, cp. Lat. īdūs middle of month (after the full moon), Oir. ēsce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. xxxi.316 sq. connects Indra with Lat. neriosus strong Nero).
1. The Vedic god Indra DN i.244; DN ii.261, DN ii.274; Snp 310, Snp 316, Snp 679, Snp 1024; Nd i.177.
2. lord, chief, king Sakko devānaṃ indo DN i.216, DN i.217; DN ii.221, DN ii.275; SN i.219 Vepɔcitti asurindo SN i.221 ff. manussinda, SN i.69, manujinda Snp 553, narinda, Snp 863, all of the Buddha, ʻchief of menʼ; cp. Vism 491. [Europeans have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the Nikāyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken god of war. See the passages collected in Dial. ii.294 298. The idiom sa-Indā devā, DN ii.261, DN ii.274; AN v.325 means ʻthe gods about Indra, Indra’s retinueʼ, this being a Vedic story. But Devā Tāvatiṃsā sahindakā means the T. gods together with their leader (D ii.208
212; SN iii.90; cp. Vv 301) this being a Buddhist story].
-aggi (ind’ aggi) Indra’s fire, i.e. lightning Pv-a 56 -gajjita (nt.) Indra’s thunder Mil 22. -jāla deception DN-a i.85. -jālika a juggler, conjurer Mil 331. -dhanu the rainbow DN-a i.40. -bhavana the realm of Indra Nd i.448 (cp. Tāvatiṃsa-bhavana). -liṅga the characteristic of Indra Vism 491. -sāla Name of tree Ja iv.92.
1. Np. (see Dict. of names), e.g. at Pv ii.957; Pv-a 136 sq.
2. (-˚) see inda 2.
dimin. fr. inda
. “Indra’s post”; the post, stake or column of Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let into the ground at the entrance of a house DN ii.254 (˚ṃ ūhacca, cp. Dhp-a ii.181); Vin iv.160 (expld. ibid. as sayani-gharassa ummāro, i.e. threshold) SN v.444 (ayokhīlo + ); Dhp 95 (˚ûpama, cp. Dhp-a ii.181) Thag 663; Ja i.89; Mil 364; Vism 72, Vism 466; Snp-a 201; DN-a i.209 (nikkhamitvā bahi ˚ā); Dhp-a ii.180 (˚sadisaṃ Sāriputtassa cittaṃ), 181 (nagara-dvāre nikhataṃ ˚ṃ).
inda + khīla, cp. BSk. indrakīla Divy 250, Divy 365, Divy 544; Avs i.109, Avs i.223
see hindagū.
a sort of insect (“cochineal, a red beetle”, Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Thag 13; Vin iii.42; Ja iv.258; Ja v.168; Dhp-a i.20 Brethren p. 18, n.
inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector
a sapphire Ja i.80; Mil 118; Vv-a 111 (+ mahānīla).
inda + nīla “Indra’s blue”
(f.) the Coloquintida plant Ja iv.8 (˚ka-rukkha).
inda + vāruṇa
(nt.) the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stellata or Cassia Fistula Ja v.92 (˚ī-samā ratti); vi.536; Vv 451 (= uddālaka-puppha Vv-a 197).
etym.?
(nt.) A. On term: Indriya is one of the most comprehensive & important categories of Buddhist psychological philosophy & ethics meaning “controlling principle, directive force, élan, δύναμις” in the foll. applications: (a) with reference to sense-perceptibility “faculty, function”, often wrongly interpreted as “organ”; (b) w. ref. to objective aspects of form and matter “kind, characteristic, determinating principle, sign mark” (cp. woman-hood, hood = Goth. haidus “kind form”); (c) w. ref. to moods of sensation and (d) to moral powers or motives controlling action, “principle, controlling” force; (e) w. ref. to cognition & insight “category”. Definitions of indriya among others at Dhs-a 119; cp Expositor 157; Dhs trsl. lvii; Cpd. 228, 229.
B. Classifications and groups of indriyāni. An exhaustive list comprises the indriyāni enumd under A a-e, thus establishing a canonical scheme of 22 Controlling Powers (bāvīsati indriyāni), running thus at Vb 122 sq. (see trsl. at Cpd. 175, 176); and discussed in detail at Vism 491 sq (a. sensorial) (1) cakkh-undriya (“the eye which is a power”, Cpd. 228) the eye or (personal potentiality of vision, (2) sot-indriya the ear or hearing, (3) ghān˚; nose or smell, (4) jivh˚; tongue or taste, (5) kāy˚; body-sensibility, (6) man˚; ) mind; (b. material) (7) itth˚; female sex or femininity, (8) puris˚; male sex or masculinity (9) jīvit˚; life or vitality; (c. sensational) (10) sukh˚ pleasure, (11) dukkh˚; pain, (12) somanasa˚; joy, (13 domanass˚; grief, (14) upekh˚; hedonic indifference (d moral) (15) saddh˚; faith, (16) viriy˚; energy, (17) sat˚ mindfulness, (18) samādh˚; concentration, (19) paññ˚ reason; (e. cognitional) (20) anaññāta-ñassāmīt˚; the thought “I shall come to know the unknown”, (21) aññ˚ (= aññā) gnosis, (22) aññātā-v˚; one who knows ■ Jīvitindriya (no. 9) is in some redactions placed before itth (no. 7), e.g. at Pts i.7, Pts i.137 ■ From this list are detached several groups, mentioned frequently and in various connections no. 6 manas (mano, man-indriya) wavering in its function, being either included under (a) or (more frequently) omitted, so that the first set (a) is marked off as pañc’ indriyāni, the 6th being silently included (see below). This uncertainty regarding manas deserves to be noted. The foll. groups may be mentioned here viz 19 (nos. 1–19) at Pts i.137; Pts i.10 (pañca rūpīni; pañca arūpīni) at Ne 69; three groups of five (nos 1
5, 10
14, 15
19) at DN iii.239, cp. 278; four (group d without paññā, i.e. nos. 15
18) at AN ii.141; three (saddh˚, samādh˚, paññ˚, i.e. nos. 15, 18, 19) at AN i.118 sq. Under aṭṭhavidhaṃ indriya-rūpaṃ (Cpd. 159) or rūpaṃ as indriyaṃ “form which is faculty” Dhs 661 (cp trsl. p. 204) are understood the 5 sensitives (nos. 1
5) the 2 séx-states (nos. 7, 8) and the vital force (no. 9) i.e. groups a & b of enum;n.; discussed & defined in detail at Dhs 709
717, 971
973 ■ It is often to be guessed from the context only, which of the sets of 5 indriyāni (usually either group a or d) is meant. These detached groups are classed as below under C. f ■; Note. This system of 22 indriyāni reflects a revised & more elaborate form of the 25 (or 23) categories of the Sānkhya philosophy, with its 10 elements, 10 indri, īni & the isolated position of manas.;
C. Material in detail (grouped according to A a-e (a) sensorial: (mentioned or referred to as set of 5 viz B. nos. 1
5): MN i.295: SN iii.46 (pañcannaṃ ˚ānaṃ avak kanti), 225; iv.168; AN ii.151 (as set of 6, viz. B. nos 1
6): MN i.9; SN iv.176; SN v.74, SN v.205, SN v.230; AN i.113; AN ii.16 AN ii.39, AN ii.152; AN iii.99, AN iii.163, AN iii.387 sq.; AN v.348. Specially referring to restraint & control of the senses in foll. phrases: in driyāni saṃvutāni SN ii.231, SN ii.271; SN iv.112; pañcasu ˚esu saṃvuto Snp 340 (= lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhaṃ pi vuttaṃ yeva hoti, i.e. the 6th as manas included, Snp-a 343) ˚esu susaṃvuta Thig 196 (= mana-chaṭṭhesu i˚ suṭṭhu saṃvutā Thag-a 168) indriyesu guttadvāra & guttadvāratā DN iii.107; SN ii.218; SN iv.103, SN iv.112, SN iv.175; AN i.25, AN i.94, AN i.113 AN ii.39; AN iii.70, AN iii.138, AN iii.173, AN iii.199, AN iii.449 sq.; AN iv.25, AN iv.166; AN v.134; Iti 23, Iti 24; Nd i.14; Vb 248, Vb 360; DN-a i.182 (= manachaṭṭesu indriyesu pihita-dvāro hoti), i. vippasannāni SN ii.275; SN iii.2, SN iii.235; SN iv.294; SN v.301; AN i.181; AN iii.380. ˚ānaṃ samatā (v.l. samatha) AN iii.375 sq. (see also f. below ˚āni bhāvitāni Snp 516 (= cakkh’ ādīni cha i. Snp-a 426) Nd ii.475 B8 ■ Various: SN i.26 (rakkhati), 48 (˚ûpasame rato); iv.40, 140 (˚sampanna); v.216, 217 sq. (independent in function, mano as referee); Ps. i.190 (man˚); Vb 13 (rūpa), 341 (mud˚ & tikkh˚) 384 (ahīn˚) ■ (b); physical: (above B 7
9) all three: SN v.204; Vism 447; itthi˚ & purisa˚ AN iv.57; Vb 122, Vb 415 sq.; puris˚ AN iii.404; jīvit Vb 123, Vb 137; Vism 230 (˚upaccheda = maraṇa). See also under itthi, jīvita & purisa ■ (c); sensational (above B 10
14): SN v.207 sq. (see Cpd. 111 & cp. p. 15), 211 sq.; Vb 15, Vb 71; Ne 88 ■ (d) moral (above B 15 19): SN iii.96, SN iii.153; SN iv.36, SN iv.365 sq.; SN v.193 sq., 202, 219 (corresponding to pañcabalāni), 220 sq. (and amata), 223 sq. (their culture brings assurance of no rebirth), 227 sq (paññā the chief one), 235, 237 (sevenfold fruit of), AN iv.125 sq., 203, 225; v.56, 175; Pts ii.49, Pts ii.51 sq., 86 Nd i.14; Nd ii.628 (sat˚ + satibala); Kv 589; Vb 341 Ne 15, Ne 28, Ne 47, Ne 54. Often in standard combn. with satipaṭṭhāna sammappadhāna. iddhipāda, indriya, bala, bojjhanga magga (see Nd ii.s. v. p. 263) DN ii.120; Vin iii.93, Pts ii.166 & passim. As set of 4 indriyāni (nos. 16; 19) at Ne 83 ■ (e) cognitional (above B 20
22) DN iii.219 = SN v.204 (as peculiar to Arahantship); Iti 53; Pts i.115; Pts ii.30 ■ (f) collectively, either two or more of groups a-e, also var. peculiar uses: personal; esp physical faculties. SN i.61 (pākat˚), 204 (id.); iii.207 (ākāsaṃ ˚āni sankamanti); iv.294 (vipari-bhinnāni); AN iii.441 (˚ānaṃ avekallatā). magic power AN iv.264 sq. (okkhipati ˚āni). indriyānaṃ paripāko (moral or physical) over-ripeness of faculties SN ii.2, SN ii.42; AN v.203; Nd ii.252 (in def. of jarā); Vb 137. moral forces Vin i.183 (˚ānaṃ samatā + viriyānaṃ s. as sign of Arahant); ii.240 (pañc˚). principle of life ekindriyaṃ jīvaṃ Vin iii.156; Mil 259. heart or seat of feeling in phrase ˚āni paricāreti to satisfy one’s heart Pv-a 16, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 77. obligation, duty, vow in phrase ˚āni bhinditvā breaking one’s vow Ja ii.274; Ja iv.190.
D. Unclassified material DN i.77 (ahīn˚); DN iii.239 (domanass˚ & somanass˚; ) MN i.437 (vemattatā), 453 (id.); ii. 11, 106; iii.296; SN iii.225; SN v.209 (dukkh˚, domanass˚) AN i.39, AN i.42 sq., 297; ii.38 (sant˚), 149 sq.; iii.277, 282; Pts i.16, Pts i.21, Pts i.88, Pts i.180; Pts ii.1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143 145, 110, 223; Nd i.45 (˚dhīra), 171 (˚kusala), 341 (pucchā); Dhs 58, Dhs 121, Dhs 528, Dhs 556 (dukkh˚), 560, 644. 736 Ne 18 (sotāpannassa), 28 (˚vavaṭṭhāna), 162 (lok’uttara) Vism 350 (˚vekallatā); Sdhp 280, Sdhp 342, Sdhp 364, Sdhp 371, Sdhp 449, Sdhp 473.
E. As adj. (-˚) having one’s senses, mind or heart as such & such SN i.138 (tikkh˚ & mud˚); iii.93 (pākat˚) v.269 (id.); AN i.70 (id) & passim (id.); AN i.70 (saṃvut˚ 266 (id.), 236 (gutt˚); ii.6 (samāhit˚); 8n 214 (susamāhit˚ his senses well-composed); Pv-a 70 (pīṇit˚ joyful or gladdened of heart).
F. Some compounds: -gutta one who restrains & watches his senses SN i.154; Dhp 375. -gutti keeping watch over the senses, self-restraint Dhp-a iv.111. a paropariya, b paropariyatta & c paropariyatti (˚ñāṇa) (knowledge of what goes on in the senses and intentions of others a Ja i.78; b AN v.34, AN v.38; b Pts i.121 sq., 133 sq.; ii.158, 175 b Vb 340, Vb 342; c SN v.205; c Ne 101. See remark under paropariya. -bhāvanā cultivation of the (five, see above Cd) moral qualities Vin i.294 (+ balabhāvanā) MN iii.298. -saṃvara restraint or subjugation of the senses DN ii.281; MN i.269, MN i.346; SN i.54; AN iii.360; AN iv.99; AN v.113 sq., 136, 206; Nd i.483; Ne 27, Ne 121 sq; Vism 20 sq.
Vedic indriya adj. only in meaning “belonging to Indra”; nt. strength, might (cp. inda), but in specific pāli sense “belonging to the ruler”, i.e. governing, ruling nt. governing, ruling or controlling principle
(nt.) firewood, fuel Ja iv.27 (adj. an˚ without fuel aggi); v.447; Thag-a 256; Vv-a 335; Sdhp 608. Cp. idhuma.
Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha1
(adj.) menial; a retainer, in the phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā (kiṇhā) bandhupādāpaccā DN i.90 (v.l. SS imbha T. kiṇhā, v.l. kaṇhā), 91, 103; MN i.334 (kiṇhā, v.l. kaṇhā). Also at Ja vi.214. Expld. by Bdhgh. as gahapatika at DN-a i.254, (also at Ja vi.215).
Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants
(nt.) barren soil, desert Ja vi.560 (= niroja C.) Cp. īriṇa.
Vedic iriṇa, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under rarus
to move, to wander about stir; fig. to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment MN i.74, MN i.75; SN i.53 (dukkhaṃ aticca iriyati); iv.71; AN iii.451; AN v.41; Snp 947, Snp 1063, Snp 1097; Thag 276; Ja iii.498 (= viharati); Nd i.431; Nd ii.147 (= carati etc.); Vism 16; DN-a i.70.
fr. īr to set in motion, to stir, Sk. īrte, but pres. formation influenced by iriyā & also by Sk. iyarti of; ṛ (see acchati & icchati;2); cp. Caus. īrayati (= P. īreti) pp. īrṇa & īrita. See also issā
(f.) way of moving on, progress, Dhs 19, Dhs 82, Dhs 295, Dhs 380, Dhs 441, Dhs 716.
fr. iriyati
(f.) movement, posture, deportment MN i.81; Snp 1038 (= cariyā vatti vihāro Nd ii.148); Iti 31; Vism 145 (+ vutti pālana yapana).
-patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriyāpathas or postures, viz. walking, standing, sitting, lying down (see Pts ii.225 & DN-a i.183). Cp. BSk. īryāpatha Divy 37 ■ Vin i.39; Vin ii.146 (˚sampanna); Vin i.91 (chinn˚ a cripple); SN v.78 (cattāro i.); Snp 385; Nd i.225, Nd i.226; Nd ii.s. v.; Ja i.22 (of a lion) 66, 506; Mil 17; Vism 104, Vism 128, Vism 290, Vism 396; Dhp-a i.9 Dhp-a iv.17; Vv-a 6; Pv-a 141; Sdhp 604.
cp. from iriyati, BSk. īryā Divy 485
the Rig-veda Dpvs v.62 (iruveda); Mil 178; DN-a i.247; Snp-a 447.
(f.) = illī Ja v.259; Ja vi.50.
fr. illī, cp. Sk. *īlikā
(f.) a sort of weapon, a short one-edged sword Ja v.259.
cp. Vedic ilībiśa Np. of a demon
v.l. for allīyituṃ at Ja v.154.
(indecl.) part. of comparison: like, as Dhp 1, Dhp 2, Dhp 7, Dhp 8, Dhp 287, Dhp 334; Ja i.295; Snp-a 12 (opamma-vacanaṃ). Elided to ‘va, diaeretic-metathetic form viya (q.v.).
Vedic iva & va
a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, “Master DN i.96 (kaṇho isi ahosi); SN i.33, SN i.35, SN i.65, SN i.128, SN i.191, SN i.192 SN i.226 sq., 236 (ācāro isīnaṃ); ii.280 (dhammo isinaṃ dhajo) AN ii.24, AN ii.51; Vin iv.15 = Vin iv.22 (˚bhāsito dhammo); Iti 123; Snp 284, Snp 458, Snp 979, Snp 689, Snp 691, Snp 1008, Snp 1025, Snp 1043, Snp 1044 Snp 1116 (dev˚ divine Seer), 1126, Nd ii.149 (isi-nāmakā ye keci isi-pabbajjaṃ pabbajitā ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā jaṭilā tāpasā) Dhp 281; Ja i.17 (v.90: isayo n’ atthi me samā of Buddha) Ja v.140 (˚gaṇa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv ii.614 (yama-niyam’ ādīnaṃ esanatthena isayo Pv-a 98); ii.133 (= jhān’ ādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ esanatthena isi Pv-a 163); iv.73 (= asekkhānaṃ sīlakkhandh’ ādīnaṃ esanatthena isiṃ Pv-a 265); Mil 19 (˚vāta) 248 (˚bhattika); DN-a i.266 (gen isino); Sdhp 200, Sdhp 384. See also mahesi.
2. (in brahmanic tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of the Vedic hymns (brāhmaṇānaṃ pubbakā isayo mantānaṃ kattāro pavattāro), whose names are given at Vin i.245; DN i.104, DN i.238; AN iii.224, AN iv.61 as follows: Aṭṭhaka Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi) Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu.
-nisabha the first (lit. “bull”) among Saints, Ep. of the Buddha Snp 698; Vv 167 (cp. Vv-a 82). -pabbajjā the (holy) life of an anchoret Vism 123; Dhp-a i.105; Dhp-a iv.55; Pv-a 162. -vāta the wind of a Saint Mil 19; Vism 18 -sattama the 7th of the great Sages (i.e. Gotama Buddha as 7th in the sequence of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana & Kassapa Buddhas) MN i.386; SN i.192; Snp 356; Thag 1240 (= Bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena Snp-a 351); Vv 211 (= buddha-isinaṃ Vipassi-ādīnaṃ sattamo Vv-a 105). Isika (isika)
Vedic ṛṣi fr. ṛṣ. Voc. ise Snp 1025; pl. npm. isayo, gen. isinaṃ SN ii.280 & isīnaṃ SN i.192; etc. inst. isibhi Thag 1065–1.
(f.) a reed DN i.77, cp. DN-a i.222; Ja vi.67 (isikā).
Sk. iṣīkā
(nt.) rishi-ship DN i.104 (= isi-bhāva DN-a i.274).
abstr. fr. isi
to bear ill-will, to be angry, to envy Ja iii.7; ppr. med. issamānaka Sdhp 89, f. ˚ikā AN ii.203 ■ pp. issita (q.v.).
denom. fr. issā. Av. areṣyeiti to be jealous, Gr. ε ̓́ραται to desire; connected also with Sk. arṣati fr. ṛṣ to flow, Lat. erro; & Sk. irasyati to be angry = Gr.; *ἄρης God of war, ἀρἀρη; Ags. eorsian to be angry
(nt. m.)
1. (nt.) archery (as means of livelihood & occupation) MN i.85; MN iii.1; SN i.100 (so read with v.l.; T has issatta, C. explns. by usu-sippaṃ K. S. p. 318); Snp 617 (˚ṃ upajīvati = āvudha jīvikaṃ Snp-a 466); Ja vi.81 Sdhp 390.
2. (m.) an archer Mil 250, Mil 305, Mil 352, Mil 418.
cp. Sk. iṣvastra nt. bow, fr. iṣu (= P. usu) an arrow + as to throw. Cp. P. issāsa ■ Bdhgh in a strange way dissects it as “usuñ ca satthañ cā ti vuttaṃ hoti” (i.e. usu arrow + sattha sword, knife) Snp-a 466
an archer Mil 419.
issattha + ka
lord, ruler, master, chief AN iv.90; Snp 552; Ja i.89 (˚jana), 100, 283 (˚bheri); iv.132 (˚jana); Pv iv.67 (˚mada) Mil 253 (an˚ without a ruler); Dhs-a 141; DN-a i.111; Pv-a 31 (gehassa issarā); Sdhp 348, Sdhp 431.
2. creative deity, Brahmā, DN iii.28; MN ii.222 = AN i.173; Vism 598.
Vedic īśvara, from īś to have power, cp. also P. īsa
rulership, mastership, supremacy, dominion (Syn. ādhipacca) DN iii.190; SN i.43, SN i.100 (˚mada) v.342 (issariy-âdhipacca); AN i.62 (˚ādhipacca); ii.205 249; iii.38; iv.263; Snp 112; Dhp 73; Ud 18; Pts ii.171 Pts ii.176; Ja i.156; Ja v.443; Dhp-a ii.73; Vv-a 126 (for ādhipacca Pv-a 42, Pv-a 117, Pv-a 137 (for ādhipacca); Sdhp 418, Sdhp 583.
fr. issara
(f.) mastership, lordship Sdhp 422.
fr. issariya
(f.) jealousy, anger, envy, ill-will DN ii.277 (˚macchariya); DN iii.44 (id.); MN i.15; SN ii.260; AN i.95, AN i.105 (˚mala), AN i.299; AN ii.203; AN iv.8 (˚saññojana), AN iv.148, AN iv.349, AN iv.465; AN v.42 sq., AN v.156, AN v.310; Snp 110; Ja v.90 (˚âvatiṇṇa) Pv ii.37; Vv 155; Pp 19, Pp 23; Vb 380, Vb 391; Dhs 1121 Dhs 1131, Dhs 1460; Vism 470 (def.); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 87; Dhp-a ii.76; Mil 155; Sdhp 313, Sdhp 510.
-pakata overcome by envy, of an envious nature SN ii.260; Mil 155; Pv-a 31. See remarks under apakata & pakata.;
Sk. īrṣyā to Sk. irin forceful, irasyati to be angry, Lat. īra anger, Gr. *ἄρης God of war; Ags. eorsian to be angry. See also issati
(f.) in issammiga (= issāmiga) Ja v.410, & issāmiga Ja v.431, a species of antelope, cp Ja v.425 issāsiṅga the antlers of this antelope.
cp. Sk. ṛśya-mṛga
(& Issāyitatta) = issā Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhs 1121; Vism 470.
abstr. formations fr. issā
an archer Vin iv.124; MN iii.1; AN iv.423 (issāso vā issās’ antevāsī vā); Ja ii.87 Ja iv.494; Mil 232; DN-a i.156.
Sk. iṣvāsa, see issattha
an archer, lit. one having a bow Ja iv.494 (= issāsa C.).
Sk. iṣvāsa in meaning “bow” + in
being envied or scolded, giving offence or causing anger Ja v.44.
pp. of īrṣ (see issati); Sk. īrṣita
(adj.) envious, jealous Vin ii.89 (+ maccharin); DN iii.45, DN iii.246; MN i.43, MN i.96; SN iv.241; AN iii.140, AN iii.335; AN iv.2; Dhp 262; Ja iii.259; Pv. ii.34 Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhp-a iii.389; Pv-a 174. See also an˚.
fr. issā, Sk. īrṣyu + ka + in
(indecl.) adv. of place “here” Snp 460.
ī.
Sk. iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha (q.v.)
(?) confusion, rage badness Snp-a 590 (in expln of anigha). Usually as an˚ (or anigha), e.g. Ja iii.343 (= niddukkha C.); v.343. Iti & Iti
doubtful as to origin & etym. since only found in cpd. anīgha & abs. only in exegetical literature. If genuine, it should belong to; ṛgh Sk. ṛghāyati to tremble rage etc. See discussed under nigha1
(f.) ill, calamity, plague, distress, often combb. with & substituted for upaddava cp. BSk. ītay’ opadrava (attack of plague) Divy 119.; Snp 51; Ja i.27 (v.189); v.401 = upaddava; Nd i.381 Nd ii.48, Nd ii.636 (+ upaddava = santāpa); Mil 152, Mil 274 Mil 418. -anīti sound condition, health, safety AN iv.238; Mil 323.
Sk. īti, of doubtful origin
(adj.) connected or affected with ill or harm, only in neg. an˚.
fr. īti
a doublet of itiha, only found in neg. an˚.
(adj.) such like, such Dhs-a 400 (f. ˚ī); Pv-a 50, (id.) 51.
Sk. īdṛs, ī + dṛś, lit. so-looking
(nt.) barren soil, desert DN i.248; AN v.156 sq.; Ja v.70 (= sukkha-kantāra C.); vi.560; Vv-a 334.
= iriṇa, q.v. & cp. Sk. īriṇa
1. set in motion, stirred, moved, shaken Vv 394 (vāt’erita moved by the wind); Ja i.32 (id.); Vv 6420 (haday’erita); Pv ii.123 (malut’erita); Pv-a 156 (has erita for ī˚); Vv-a 177 (calita).
2. uttered, proclaimed, said Dāvs v.12.
pp. of īreti, Caus. of īr, see iriyati
lord, owner ruler Ja iv.209 (of a black lion = kāḷa-sīha C.); Vv-a 168 f. īsī see mahesī a chief queen. Cp. also mahesakkha.
fr. iś to have power, perf. īśe = Goth. aih; cp. Sk. īśvara = P. issara, & BSk. īśa, e.g. Jtm 31;81
a pole Ja ii.152; Ja vi.456 (˚agga the top of a pole).
dimiName of īsā
(adv.) a little, slightly, easily MN i.450; Ja i.77; Ja vi.456; DN-a i.252, DN-a i.310; Vv-a 36; Vism 136 Vism 137, Vism 231, īsakam pi even a little Vism 106; Sdhp 586.
nt. of īsaka
(f.) the pole of a plough or of a carriage SN i.104 (nangal’ īsā read with v.l. for nangala-sīsā T.) 172, 224 (˚mukha): AN iv.191 (rath˚); Snp 77; Ja i.203 (˚mukha); iv.209; Ud 42; Mil 27; Snp-a 146; Vv-a 269 (˚mūlaṃ = rathassa uro).
-danta having teeth (tusks) as long as a plough-pole (of an elephant) Vin i.352; MN i.414; Vv 209 = 439 (ratha-īsā-sadisa-danto); Ja vi.490 = Ja vi.515.
Vedic īṣā
(adj.) having a pole (said of a carriage) Ja vi.252.
fr. īsā
to endeavour, attempt, strive after Vin iii.268 (Bdhgh. Ja vi.518 (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 112); DN-a i.139; Vv-a 35.
Vedic īh, cp. Av. īžā ardour, eagerness, āziš greed
(f.) exertion, endeavour, activity, only in adj. nir-īha void of activity Mil 413.
U.
fr. īh
the sound or syllable u, expld. by Bdhgh at Vism 495 as expressing origin (= ud).
exaltation, excellence, superiority (opp. avakkaṃsa) DN i.54 (ukkaṃs-âvakkaṃsa hāyana-vaḍḍhana DN-a i.165); MN i.518; Vism 563 (id.) Vv-a 146 (˚gata excellent), 335 (instr. ukkaṃsena par excellence exceedingly); Pv-a 228 (˚vasena, with ref. to devatās; v.l. SS okk˚).
fr. ud + kṛṣ see ukkassati
(adj.) raising, exalting (oneself), extolling MN i.19 (att˚; opp. para-vambhin); Ja ii.152. Cp sāmukkaṃsika.
fr. ukkaṃsa
to exalt, praise MN i.498; Ja iv.108 ■ pp. ukkaṭṭha ■ ukkaṃseti in same meaning MN i.402 sq. (attānaṃ u. paraṃ vambheti); AN ii.27; Nd ii.141.
ud + kṛṣ, karṣati, lit. draw or up, raise
(f.) raising, extolling, exaltation, in att˚ self-exaltation, self-praise MN i.402 (opp para-vambhanā); Nd ii.505 (id.).
abstr. of ukkaṃsati
(adj.)
1. exalted, high, prominent, glorious, excellent, most freq. opp. to hīna in phrase hīna-m-ukkaṭṭha-majjhime Vin iv.7; Ja i.20 (v.129), 22 (v.143); iii.218 (= uttama C.). In other combn. at Vism 64 (u. majjhima mudu referring to the 3 grades of the Dhutangas); Snp-a 160 (dvipadā sabbasattānaṃ ukkaṭṭhā); Vv-a 105 (superl. ukkaṭṭhatama with ref. to Gotama as the most exalted of the 7 Rishis) Sdhp 506 (opp. lāmaka).
2. large, comprehensive great, in ukkaṭṭho patto a bowl of great capacity (as diff. from majjhima & omaka p.) Vin iii.243 (= uk. nāma patto aḍḍhālhak’ odanaṃ gaṇhāti catu-bhāgaṃ khādanaṃ vā tadūpiyaṃ vā byañjanaṃ).
3. detailed, exhaustive specialised Vism 37 (ati-ukkaṭṭha-desanā); also in phrase ˚vasena in detail Snp-a 181.
4. arrogant, insolent Ja v.16.
5. used as nom at Ja i.387 in meaning “battle conflict” ■ an˚; Vism 64 (˚cīvara).
-niddesa exhaustive exposition, special designation, term par excellence Dhs-a 70; Vv-a 231; Pv-a 7. -pariccheda comprehensive connotation Snp-a 229, Snp-a 231, Snp-a 376.
pp. of ukkaṃsati
(f.) superiority, eminence, exalted state Ja iv.303 (opp. hīnatā).
abstr. fr. ukkaṭṭha
boiled up, boiling, seething AN iii.231 & 234 (udapatto agginā santatto ukkaṭṭhito, v.l. ukkuṭṭhito); Ja iv.118 (v.l. pakkudhita = pakkuṭhita, as gloss).
for ukkaṭhita, ud + pp. of kvath, see kaṭhati & kuthati
to long for, to be dissatisfied
to fret Ja i.386 (˚māna); iii.143 (˚itvā); iv.3, 160; v.10 (anukkhaṇṭhanto); Dhs-a 407; Pv-a 162 (mā ukkaṇṭhi v.l. ukkaṇhi, so read for T. mā khuṇḍali) ■ pp. ukkaṇṭhita (q.v.). Cp. pari˚.
fr. ud + kaṇṭh in secondary meaning of kaṇṭha neck, lit. to stretch one’s neck for anything; i.e. long for, be hungry after, etc.
(f.) emotion, commotion DN ii.239.
fr. ukkaṇṭhati
(f.) longing, desire; distress, regret Ne 88; Pv-a 55 (spelt kkh), 60, 145, 152.
fr. ukkanṭḥ˚
(f.) longing, dissatisfaction Thag-a 239 (= arati).
fr. ukkanṭḥ˚
(f.) = ukkaṇṭhi, i.e. longing, state of distress, pain Ja iii.643.
abstr. fr. ukkaṇṭhita
dissatisfied, regretting, longing, fretting Ja i.196; Ja ii.92, Ja ii.115; Ja iii.185; Mil 281; Dhp-a iv.66, Dhp-a iv.225; Pv-a 13 (an˚), 55, 187.
pp. of ukkaṇṭhati
(adj.) having the ears erect (?) Ja vi.559.
ud + kaṇṇa
(ad.) a certain disease (? mange) of jackals SN ii.230, SN ii.271; S. A. ʻthe fur falls off from the whole bodyʼ.
ut + kaṇṇa + ka lit. “with ears out” or is it ukkandaka?
to cut out, tear out, skin Vin i.217 (˚itva); Ja i.164; Ja iv.210 (v.l. for okk˚); v.10 (ger ukkacca); Pv iii.94 (ukkantvā, v.l. BB ukkacca); Pv-a 210 (v.l. SS ni˚), 211 (= chinditvā).
ud + kantati
only in pl.; vermin, Vin i.211 = Vin i.239. See comment at Vin. Texts ii.70.
etymology unknown
(nt. adv.), in jhān˚ & kasiṇ˚, after the method of stepping away from or skipping Vism 374.;
(or okk˚; which is v.l. at all passages quoted) to step aside, step out from (w. abl.), depart from AN iii.301 (maggā); Ja iii.531; iv. 101 (maggā); Ud 13 (id.); DN-a i.185 (id.). Caus. ukkāmeti; Caus. II. ukkamāpeti Ja ii.3.
ud + kamati from kram
(nt.) stepping away from Vism 374.
fr. ukkamati
in phrase ukkala-vassa-bhañña SN iii.73 = AN ii.31 = Kv 141 is trsld. as “the folk of Ukkala, Lenten speakers of old” (see Kvu trsl. 95 with n. 2). Another interpretation is ukkalāvassa˚, i.e. ukkalā + avassa, one who speaks of, or like, a porter (ukkala = Sk utkala porter, one who carries a load) and bondsman MN iii.78 reads Okkalā (v.l. Ukkalā)-Vassa-Bhaññā all as N. pr.
*avaśya˚
see uklāpa.
to become depraved, to revoke(?) Mil 143.
= ukkilissati? ud + kilissati
(f.) 1. firebrand, glow of fire, torch DN i.49, DN i.108; SN ii.264; Thig 488 (˚ûpama) Ja i.34 (dhamm-okkā); ii.401; iv.291; v.322; Vism 428 Thag-a 287; DN-a i.148; Dhp-a i.42, Dhp-a i.205; Pv-a 154. Esp as tiṇ˚ firebrand of dry grass MN i.128, MN i.365; Nd ii.40Ie Dhp-a i.126; Sdhp 573.
2. a furnace or forge of a smith AN i.210, AN i.257; Ja vi.437; see also below ˚mukha. 3. a meteor: see below ˚pāta.
-dhāra a torch-bearer Snp 335; Iti 108; Mil 1. -pāta “falling of a firebrand”, a meteor DN i.10 (= ākāsato ukkānaṃ patanaṃ DN-a i.95); Ja i.374; Ja vi.476; Mil 178 -mukha the opening or receiver of a furnace, a goldsmith’s smelting pot A i.257; Ja vi.217 (= kammār’uddhana C.), 574; Snp 686; Dhp-a ii.250.
Vedic ulkā & ulkuṣī, cp. Gr.; α ̓́φλας (= λαμπρ ̈ως torch Hesychius), vελξάνος (= Volcanus); Lat. Volcanus Oir. Olcān, Idg. *ṷI̊q to be fiery
(f.) enlightening, clearing up, instruction Vb 352 (in def. of lapanā, v.l. ˚kāpanā). Note Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Vism p.115 & Sk. uddīpana in same sense. Def. at Vism 27 (= uddīpanā).;
fr. ukkāceti, ud + *kāc, see ukkācita
enlightened, made bright (fig.) or cleaned, cleared up AN i.72, AN i.286 (˚vinīta parisā enlightened & trained).;
pp. either to * kāc to shine or to kāceti denom. fr. kāca1
to bale out water, to empty by means of buckets Ja ii.70 (v.l. ussiñcati).
according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 112 a denom. fr. kāca2 a carrying pole, although the idea of a bucket is somewhat removed from that of a pole
to cause to step aside Ja vi.11.
Caus. of ukkamati
dung, excrement Ja iv.485, otherwise only in cpd. ukkāra-bhūmi dung-hill Ja i.5, Ja i.146 (so read for ukkar˚), ii.40; iii.16, 75, 377; iv.72, 305 Vism 196 (˚ûpama kuṇapa); Dhp-a iii.208. Cp. uccāra.
fr. ud + kṛ; “do out”
to “ahem”! to cough, to clear one’s throat Vin ii.222; Vin iv.16; MN ii.4; AN v.65; aor. ukkāsi Ja i.161, Ja i.217 ■ pp. ukkāsita.
ud + kāsati of kas to cough
(f.?) at Vin ii.106 is not clear. Vin Texts iii.68 leave it untranslated. Bdhgh’s expln. is vattavaṭṭi (patta˚? a leaf? Cp. SN iii.141), prob. = vaṭṭi (Sk varti a kind of pad). See details given by Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 113, who trsls. “rubber, a kind of pad or roll of cotton with which the delicate bather could rub himself without too much friction”.
doubtful
coughed, clearing one’s throat, coughed out, hawking DN i.89; Bv i.52 (+ khipita) ˚sadda the noise of clearing the throat DN i.50; Ja i.119; Dhp-a i.250 (+ khipita˚).
pp. of ukkāsati
dug up or out DN i.105; Ja iv.106; Mil 330; DN-a i.274 (= khāta).
pp. of ud + kṛ; dig2
to take the dirt out, to clean out DN-a i.255 (dosaṃ); Snp-a 274 (rāgaṃ v.l. BB. uggileti).
Caus. of ud + klid, see kilijjati
(adj.) set up, upright, opp. either nikkujja or avakujja AN i.131; SN v.89 (ukkujj’âvakujja) Pp 32 (= uparimukho ṭhapito C. 214).
ud + kujja
(˚eti) to bend up, turn up, set upright Vin i.181; Vin ii.126 (pattaṃ), 269 (bhikkhuṃ) mostly in phrase nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya “(like) one might raise up one who has fallen” DN i.85, DN i.110; DN ii.132, DN ii.152 Snp p.15 (= uparimukhaṃ karoti DN-a i.228 = Snp-a 155).
Denom. fr. ukkujja
(nt.) raising up, setting up again Vin ii.126 (patt˚).
fr. ukkujjati
a special manner of squatting. The soles of the feet are firmly on the ground, the man sinks down, the heels slightly rising as he does so, until the thighs rest on the calves, and the hams are about six inches or more from the ground. Then with elbows on knees he balances himself. Few Europeans can adopt this posture, & none (save miners) can maintain it with comfort, as the calf muscles upset the balance. Indians find it easy, & when the palms of the hands are also held together upwards, it indicates submission. See; Dial. i.231 n. 4 ■ Vin i.45 (˚ṃ nisīdati); iii.228; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Pp 55; Vism 62, Vism 104 Vism 105 (quot. fr. Papañca Sūdanī) 426; Dhp-a i.201, Dhp-a i.217 Dhp-a ii.61 (as posture of humility); iii.195; iv.223.
-padhāna [in BSk. distorted to utkuṭuka-prahāṇa Divy 339 = Dhp 141] exertion when squatting (an ascetic habit DN i.167; MN i.78, MN i.515; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Ja i.493; Ja iii.235 Ja iv.299; Dhp 141 (= ukkuṭika-bhāvena āraddha-viriyo Dhp-a iii.78).
fr. ud + *kuṭ = *kuñc, as in kuṭila & kuñcita; lit. “bending up”. The BSk. form is ukkuṭuka, e.g. Av SN i.315
(f.) shouting out, acclamation Ja ii.367; Ja vi.41 Bv i.35; Mil 21; Vism 245; Dhp-a ii.43; Vv-a 132 (˚sadda).
fr. ud + kruś, cp. *kruñc as in P. kuñca & Sk. krośati
an osprey Ja iv.291 (˚rāja), 392.
see ukkuṭṭhi & cp. BSk. utkrośa watchman (?) Divy 453
(adj.) sloping up, steep, high (opp. vikkūla) AN i.35 sq.; Vism 153 (nadi); Snp-a 42. Cp. utkūlanikūla-sama Lal. V. 340.
ud + kūla
(nt.) crookedness, perverting justice taking bribes to get people into unlawful possessions (Bdhgh.) DN i.5; DN iii.176; SN v.473; AN ii.209, AN v.206; DN-a i.79 = Pp A 240 (“assāmike sāmike kātuṃ lañcagahaṇaṃ”).
fr. ud + * kuṭ; to be crooked or to deceive, cp. kujja & kuṭila crooked
(adj.) belonging to the perversion of justice Vin ii.94.
fr. ukkoṭana
to disturb what is settled, to open up again a legal question that has been adjudged Vin ii.94, Vin ii.303; Vin iv.126; Ja ii.387; DN-a i.5.
denom. fr. *ukkoṭ-ana
(˚lī) (f.) a pot in which to boil rice (& other food) Ja i.68, Ja i.235; v. 389, 471; Pp 33; Vism 346 (˚mukhavaṭṭi), 356 (˚kapāla in comp.); Dhp-a i.136; Dhp-a ii.5; Dhp-a iii.371; Dhp-a iv.130; Pp A 231; Vv-a 100. Cp. next.
der. fr. Vedic ukha & ukhā pot, boiler; related to Lat. aulla (fr. *auxla); Goth. auhns oven
(f.) = ukkhali. Thig 23 (= bhatta-pacanabhājanaṃ Thag-a 29); Dhp-a iv.98 (˚kāla); Dhs-a 376.
(?) in ukkhasataṃ dānaṃ, given at various times of the day (meaning ἑκατόμβη?) SN ii.264 (v.l. ukkā). Or is it to be read ukhāsataṃ d. i.e. consisting of 100 pots (of rice = mahā danaṃ?). S A: paṇītabhojana-bharitānaṃ mahā-ukkhalinaṃ sataṃ dānaṃ. Cp. ukhā cooking vessel Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.38) Kern, Toev. under ukkhā trsl. “zeker muntstuck”, i.e. kind of gift.
can it be compared with Vedic ukṣan?
besmeared, besprinkled Ja iv.331 (ruhir˚, so read for ˚rakkhita). Cp. okkhita.
pp. of ukṣ sprinkle
taken up, lifted up, t.t. of the canon law “suspended” Vin iv.218; Ja iii.487.
-˚āsika with drawn sword MN i.377; SN iv.173; Ja i.393; Dhs-a 329; Vism 230 (vadhaka), 479. -paligha having the obstacles removed MN i.139; AN iii.84; Dhp 398 = Snp 622 (= avijjā-palighassa ukkhittatāya u. Snp-a 467; Dhp-a iv.161). -sira with uplifted head Vism 162.
pp. of ukkhipati
(adj.-n.) a bhikkbu who has been suspended Vin i.97, Vin i.121; Vin ii.61, Vin ii.173, Vin ii.213.
fr. ukkhitta
. To hold up, to take up Ja i.213; Ja iv.391: vi.350; Vism 4 (satthaṃ); Pv-a 265. A t. t. of canon law, to suspend (a bhikkhu for breach of rules) Vin iv.309; Pp 33. -ukkhipiyati to be suspended Vin ii.61. Caus. II. ukkhipāpeti to cause to be supported Ja i.52; Ja ii.15, Ja ii.38; Ja iii.285, Ja iii.436 ■ pp. ukkhitta, ger. ukkhipitvā as adv. “upright” Vism 126.
ut + khipati, kṣip
(nt.) 1. pushing upwards Ja i.163.
2. throwing up, sneering Vism 29 (vācāya).
fr. ud + kṣip
spit out, thrown off, in phrase moho (rāgo etc) catto vanto mutto pahino paṭinissaṭṭho u. Vin iii.97 = Vin iv.27.
pp. of ud + kheṭ; or *khel, see kheḷa
(adj.-n.) (adj.) throwing away Dhp-a iv.59 (˚dāya a throw-away donation, tip) ■ (m. lifting up raising Ja i.394 (cel˚); vi.508; DN-a i.273; dur˚ hard to lift or raise Sdhp 347.
fr. ud + kṣip
(adj.) throwing (up); ˚ṃ (acc.) in the manner of throwing Vin ii.214 = Vin iv.195 (piṇḍ˚).
fr. ukkhepa
(nt.) suspension Ja iii.487.
fr. ud + kṣip
(f.) throwing up, provocation, sneering Vb 352 = Vism 23, expld. at p. 29.
= last
(adj.) referring to the suspension (of a bhikkhu), ˚kamma act or resolution of suspension Vin i.49, Vin i.53, Vin i.98, Vin i.143, Vin i.168; Vin ii.27, Vin ii.226, Vin ii.230, Vin ii.298: AN i.99. Uklapa (ukkalapa)
ukkhepana + iya, cp. BSk. utkṣepanīyaṃ karma Divy 329
(adj.) - 1. deserted Ja ii.275 (ukkalāpa T.; vv.ll. uklāpa ullāpa).
2. dirtied, soiled Vin ii.154, Vin ii.208, Vin ii.222; Vism 128; Dhp-a iii.168 (ukkalāpa).
cp. Sk. ut-kalāpayati to let go
(adj.) mighty, huge, strong fierce, grave, m. a mighty or great person, noble lord DN i.103; SN i.51 = Vv-a 116 (uggateja “the fiery heat”) Ja iv.496; Ja v.452 (˚teja); vi.490 (+ rājaputtā, expld. with etymologising effort as uggatā paññātā by C.); Mil 331; Dhp-a ii.57 (˚tapa); Sdhp 286 (˚daṇḍa), 304 (id.). Cp. sam˚. As Np. at Vism 233 & Ja i.94.
-putta a nobleman, mighty lord SN i.185 (“high born warrior” trsl.); Ja vi.353 (= amacca-putta C.); Thag 1210.
Vedic ugra, from ukṣati, weak base of vakṣ as in vakṣana, vakṣayati = Gr. ἀvέςω, Goth. wahsjan “to wax”, also Lat. augeo & P. oja
= uggamana, in aruṇ-ugga sunrise Vin iv.272.
to rise, get up out of (lit. & fig.) Thag 181; aruṇe uggacchante at sunrise Vv-a 75; Pv iv.8; Vism 43, ger. uggañchitvāna Mil 376 ■ pp uggata (q.v.).
ud + gam
to shout out Nd i.172.
ud + gajjati
to take up, acquire, learn [cp. BSk. udgṛhṇāti in same sense, e.g. Divy 18 Divy 77 etc.] Snp 912 (uggahaṇanta = uggahaṇanti = uggaṇhanti Snp-a 561); imper. uggaṇha Ja ii.30 (sippaṃ); uggaṇhāhi Mil 10 (mantāni); ger. uggayha Snp 832 Snp 845; Nd i.173 ■ Caus. uggaheti in same meaning Sdhp 520; aor. uggahesi Pv iii.54 (nakkhatta-yogaṃ = akari Pv-a 198); ger. uggahetvā Ja v.282, Vv-a 98 (vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ); infin. uggahetuṃ Vv-a 138 (sippaṃ to study a craft) ■ Caus. II. uggaṇhāpeti to instruct Ja v.217; Ja vi.353 ■ pp. uggahita (q.v.). See also uggahāyati ■ A peculiar ppr. med. is uggāhamāna going or wanting to learn DN-a i.32 (cp. uggāhaka ).
ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti
come out, risen; high, lofty, exalted Ja iv.213 (suriya), 296 (˚atta), 490; v.244; Pv iv.14 (˚atta one who has risen = uggata-sabhāva samiddha Pv-a 220); Vv-a 217 (˚mānasa); DN-a i.248; Pv-a 68 (˚phāsuka with ribs come out or showing, i.e. emaciated for upphāsulika). Cp. acc˚.
pp. of uggacchati
in all Pv. readings is to be read uttatta˚; thus at Pv iii.32; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 188.
at Ja vi.590 means a kind of ornament or trinket, it should prob. be read ugghaṭṭana [fr. ghaṭṭeti lit. “tinkling”, i.e. a bangle.
rising up Sdhp 594.
fr. ud + gam; Sk. udgama
(˚na) (nt.) going up, rising; rise (of sun & stars) DN i.10, DN i.240; SN ii.268 (suriy˚); Ja iv.321 (an˚), 388; Pv ii.941 (suriy˚); DN-a i.95 (= udayana); Dhp-a i.165 (aruṇ˚); ii.6 (id.); Vv-a 326 (oggaman˚) Pv-a 109 (aruṇ˚). Cp. ugga2 & uggama.;
fr. ud + gam
(adj) (-˚)
1. taking up, acquiring, learning Vism 96 (ācariy˚), 99 (˚paripucchā), 277 (kananaṭṭhānassa).
2. noticing, taking notice, perception (as opp. to manasikāra) Vism 125, Vism 241 sq neg. an˚ Snp 912 (= gaṇhāti Nd i.330). Cp. dhanuggaha.
fr. ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti
(nt.) learning, taking up, studying Pv-a 3 (sipp˚). As uggaṇhana at Vism 277.
fr. uggaṇhāti
to take hold of, to take up Snp 791 (= gaṇhāti Nd i.91) ■ ger. uggahāya Snp 837.
poetic form of uggaheti (see uggaṇhati), but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. representing Ved. udgṛbhāyati
taken up, taken, acquired Vin i.212; Ja iii.168 (˚sippa, adj.), 325; iv.220; vi.76; Vism 241. The metric form is uggahīta at Snp 795, Snp 833, Snp 1098 Nd i.175 = Nd ii.152 (= gahita parāmaṭṭha).
pp. of uggaṇhāti
one who takes up, acquires or learns AN iv.196.
n. ag. to ugganhāti, Caus. uggaheti
spitting out, vomiting, ejection Vism 54; DN-a i.41; Kp-a 61.
ud + gṛ; or *gḷ to swallow, see gala & gilati; lit. to swallow up
(adj.-n.) one who is eager to learn Ja v.148 [cp. Mvu iii.373 ogrāhaka in same context].
fr. ud + gṛh, see uggaṇhāti
see uggaṇhāti.
to vomit up (“swallow up”) to spit out Ud 14 (uggiritvāna); DN-a i.41 (uggāraṃ uggiranto). Cp. BSk. prodgīrṇa cast out Divy 589.
Sk. udgirati, ud + gṛ2; but BSk. udgirati in meaning to sing, chant, utter, formation fr. gṛ2 instead of gṛ1, pres. gṛṇāti; in giraṃ udgirati Jtm 3126 ■ The by-form uggirati is uggilati with interchange of I̊ and ṛ roots *gr̥ & *gI̊, see gala & gilati
to lift up, carry Vin iv.147 = Dhp-a iii.50 (talasattikaṃ expld. by uccāreti) Ja i.150 (āvudhāni); vi.460, 472. Cp. sam˚.
cp. Sk. udgurate, ud + gur
= uggirati1, i.e. to spit out (opp. ogilati) MN i.393; SN iv.323; Ja iii.529; Mil 5; Pv-a 283.
(nt.) a neckband to hold a basket hanging down Ja vi.562 (uggīvañ c’âpi aṃsato = aṃsakūṭe pacchi-lagganakaṃ C.).
ud + gīva
to rub Vin ii.106. - pp. ugghaṭṭha (q.v.).
ud + ghṛṣ, see ghaṃsati1
(adj.) striving, exerting oneself; keen, eager in cpd ˚ññū of quick understanding AN ii.135; Pp 41; Ne 7–9, 125; DN-a i.291.
pp. of ud + ghaṭati; cp. BSk. udghaṭaka skilled Divy 3, Divy 26 and phrase at Mvu iii.260 udghaṭitajña
to open, reveal (? so Hardy in Index to Nett) Ne 9; ugghaṭiyati & ugghaṭanā ibid. Ugghatta (Ugghattha?)
ud + ghaṭati
knocked crushed, rubbed against, only in phrase ughaṭṭa-pāda foot-sore Snp 980 (= maggakkamaṇena ghaṭṭa-pādatala etc Snp-a 582); Ja iv.20 (ṭṭh; expld. by uṇha-vālukāya ghaṭṭapāda); v.69 (= raj okiṇṇa-pāda C. not to the point).
should be pp. of ugghaṃsati = Sk. udghṛṣṭa, see ghaṃsati1, but taken by Bdhgh. either as pp. of or an adj. der. fr. ghaṭṭ, see ghaṭṭeti
to ooze Thag 394 = Dhp-a iii.117.
ud + kṣar
(nt.?) that which can be removed, in ˚kiṭikā a curtain to be drawn aside Vin ii.153 (cp. Vin Texts iii.174, 176). Ch s. v. gives “rope & bucket of a well” as meaning (kavāṭaṃ anugghāṭeti). Cp. ugghaṭanā.
fr. ugghāṭeti
opened Mil 55; Dhp-a i.134.
pp. of ugghāṭeti
to remove, take away, unfasten, abolish, put an end to Vin ii.148 (tālāni), 208 (ghaṭikaṃ); iv.37; Ja ii.31; Ja vi.68; Mil 140 (bhava-paṭisandhiṃ), 371; Vism 374 ■ Caus. II. ugghāṭāpeti to have opened Ja v.381.
for ugghaṭṭeti, ud + ghaṭṭ but BSk. udghāṭayati Divy 130
shaking, jolting; jolt, jerk Vin ii.276 (yān˚); Ja vi.253 (an˚); Dhp-a iii.283 (yān˚).
ud + ghāta
(f.)
1. shaking, shock Vv-a 36.
2. striking, conquering; victory, combd. with nighāti Snp 828; Nd i.167; Snp-a 541; Ne 110 (T. reads ugghāta˚).
fr. ud + ghāta
struck, killed AN iii.68.
pp. of ugghāteti, denom. fr. udghāta
(f.) proclamation DN-a i.310.
abstr. fr. ugghoseti, cp. ghosanā
to shout out, announce, proclaim Ja i.75; Dhp-a ii.94; Pv-a 127.
ud + ghoseti
(adj.) high (opp. avaca low) DN i.194; MN ii.213; AN v.82 (˚ṭhāniyaṃ nīce ṭhāne ṭhapeti puts on a low place which ought to be placed high); Pv iv.74 (uccaṃ paggayha lifting high up = uccataraṃ katvā Pv-a 265); Pp 52 Pp 58; DN-a i.135; Pv-a 176.
-āvaca high and low, various, manifold Vin i.70, Vin i.203; Ja iv.115, Ja iv.363 (= mahaggha-samaggha C. p. 366); Snp 703, Snp 714, Snp 792, Snp 959; Dhp 83; Nd i.93, Nd i.467; Vv 121 (vividha Vv-a 60); 311. -kulīnatā high birth AN iii.48 (cp. uccā˚).
For udya, adj. formation from prep. ud above, up
(adj.) high Vin ii.149 (āsandikā a kind of high chair).
fr. ucca
(nt.) height Ja iii.318.
fr. ucca = Sk. uccatvaṃ
heaping up, heap, pile, accumulation Dhp 115, Dhp 191, Dhp 192; Vv 4711 827 (= cetiya Vv-a 321); Dhp-a iii.5, Dhp-a iii.9; Dhs-a 41 (pāpassa). -siluccaya a mountain Thag 692; Ja i.29 (v.209) vi.272, 278; Dāvs V.63.
fr. ud + ci, see cināti; Sk. uccaya
(˚-) (adv.) high (lit. & fig.), raised, in foll. cpds.;
-kaṇerukā a tall female elephant MN i.178. -kāḷārikā id. MN i.178 (v.l. ˚kaḷārikā to be preferred). -kula a high noble family Pv iii.116 (= uccā khattiya-kul-âdino Pv-a 176). -kulīnatā birth in a high-class family, high rank MN iii.37; Vv-a 32. -sadda a loud noise DN i.143, DN i.178; AN iii.30. -sayana a high bed (+ mahāsayana) Vin i.192; DN i.5, DN i.7; cp. DN-a i.78.
cp. Sk. uccā, instr. sg. of uccaṃ, cp. paścā behind, as well as uccaiḥ instr. pl ■ In BSk. we find ucca˚ (uccakulīna Avs iii.117) as well as uccaṃ (uccaṃgama Divy 476). It is in all cases restricted to cpds.
discharge, excrement, faeces Vin iii.36 (˚ṃ gacchati to go to stool); iv.265, 266 (uccāro nāma gūtho vuccati); Dhp-a ii.56 (˚karaṇa defecation); uccārapassāva faeces & urine DN i.70; MN i.83; Ja i.5; Ja ii.19.
Ud + car
(f.) lifting up, raising Vin iii.121.
fr. uccāreti
1. uttered, let out Pv-a 280 (akkharāni).
2. lifted, raised Thag-a 255.
pp. of uccāreti
to lift up, raise aloft Vin iii.81; Vin iv.147 = Dhp-a iii.50; MN i.135 ■ pp. uccārita (q.v.).
ud + cāreti, Caus. of car
a maw-worm Vin iii.38, Vin iii.112; Ja ii.146.
etym.?
to select, choose, search, gather, pick out or up Vin i.73; Vin ii.285 (aor. uccini); Ja iv.9; Pv iii.2 4 (nantake = gavesana-vasena gahetvāna Pv-a 185); Dpvs iv.2.
ud + cināti
the hip, the lap Vin i.225; MN i.366; AN i.130 (˚pañña); Ja i.5, Ja i.308; Ja ii.412; Ja iii.22; Ja iv.38 Ja iv.151; Pp 31; Vism 279; Dhp-a ii.72.
Sk. utsanga, ts → cch like Sk. utsahate → BSk. ucchahate see ussahati
(nt.) rubbing the limbs, anointing the body with perfumes shampooing DN i.7, DN i.76; at the latter passage in combn. anicc˚-dhamma, of the body, meaning “erosion, decay” and combd. with parimaddana abrasion (see about detail of meaning Dial. i.87); thus in same formula at MN i.500; SN iv.83; Ja i.146 & passim; AN i.62; AN ii.70 (+ nahāpana); iv.54, 386; Iti 111; Thig 89 (nahāpan˚); Mil 241 (˚parimaddana) 315 (+ nahāpana); DN-a i.88.
ut + sād, Caus. of sad, sīdati, cp. ussada
to rub the body with perfumes Ja vi.298; Mil 241 (+ parimaddati nahāpeti); DN-a i.88.
fr. ut + sād, see ucchādana
left, left over, rejected, thrown out; impure, vile Vin ii.115 (˚odakaṃ); iv.266 (id.); Ja ii.83 (bhattaṃ ucchiṭṭhaṃ akatvā), 126 (˚nadī impure; also itthi outcast), 363; iv.386 (˚ṃ piṇḍaṃ), 388; vi.508; Mil 315; Dhp-a i.52; Dhp-a ii.85; Dhp-a iii.208; Pv-a 80 (= chaḍḍita), 173 (˚bhattaṃ). At Ja iv.433 read ucch˚ for ucciṭṭha ■ an˚ not touched or thrown away (of food) Ja iii.257; Dhp-a ii.3 ■ See also uttiṭṭha & ucchepaka;.
pp. of ud + śiṣ
(fr. ucchiṭṭha) = ucchiṭṭha Ja iv.386; Ja vi.63, Ja vi.509.
to break up, destroy, annihilate SN v.432 (bhavataṇhaṃ), AN iv.17 (fut. ucchecchāmi to be read with v.l. for T. ucchejjissāmi); Snp 2 (pret. udacchida), 208 (ger. ucchijja); Ja v.383; Dhp 285. Pass. ucchijjati to be destroyed or annihilated, to cease to exist SN iv.309; Ja v.242, Ja v.467; Mil 192; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 130 (= na pavattati), 253 (= natthi) ■ pp. ucchinna (q.v.).
ud + chid, see chindati
broken up, destroyed SN iii.10; AN v.32; Snp 746. Cp. sam˚.
pp. of ucchindati
sugar-cane Vin iv.35; AN iii.76; AN iv.279; Mil 46; Dhp-a iv.199 (˚ūnaṃ yanta sugar-cane mill), Pv-a 257, Pv-a 260; Vv-a 124.
-agga (ucch˚) top of s. c. Vism 172. -khaṇḍikā a bit of sugar-cane Vv 3326. -khādana eating s. c. Vism 70 -khetta sugar-cane field Ja i.339; Vv-a 256. -gaṇṭhikā a kind of sugar-cane, Batatas Paniculata Ja i.339; Ja vi.114 (so read for ˚ghaṭika). -pāla watchman of s ■ c. Vv-a 256 -pīḷana, cane-pressing, Asl. 274. -puṭa sugar-cane basket Ja iv.363. -bīja seed of s ■ c. AN i.32; AN v.213. -yantra a sugar-mill Ja i.339. -rasa s ■ c. juice Vin i.246; Vism 489; Vv-a 180 -vāta, Asl. 274. -sālā, Asl. 274.
Sk. cp. Vedic Np. Ikṣvāku fr. ikṣu
breaking up, disintegration, perishing (of the soul) Vin iii.2 (either after this life, or after kāmadeva life, or after brahmadeva life) DN i.34, DN i.55; SN iv.323; Nd i.324; Mil 413; Ne 95, Ne 112, Ne 160; DN-a i.120.
-diṭṭhi the doctrine of the annihilation (of the soul) as opp. to sassata-or atta-diṭṭhi (the continuance of the soul after death) SN ii.20; SN iii.99, SN iii.110 sq; Pts i.150, Pts i.158 Nd i.248 (opp. sassati˚); Dhs 1316; Ne 40, Ne 127; Snp-a 523 (opp. atta˚). -vāda (adj.) one who professes the doctrine of annihilation (ucchedadiṭṭhi) Vin i.235; Vin iii.2; DN i.34, DN i.55; SN ii.18; SN iv.401; AN iv.174, AN iv.182 sq.; Nd i.282; Pp 38. -vādin = ˚vāda Ne 111; Ja v.244.
fr. ud + chid, chind, see ucchindati & cp. cheda
(adj.) cutting off, destroying; f. ˚anī Ja v.16 (surā).
fr. ud + chid
(adj.) an adherent of the ucchedavāda Ja v.241.
(nt.) leavings of food MN ii.7 (v.l. uccepaka with cc for cch as ucciṭṭha: ucchiṭṭha). The passage is to be read ucchepake va te ratā. A diff. connotation would be implied by taking ucchepaka = uñchā, as Neumann does (Majjhima trsl.2ii.682).
= ucchiṭṭhaka in sense of ucchiṭṭhabhatta
(adj.) straight direct; straightforward, honest, upright DN iii.150 T. ujja) 352 (do.) 422, 550; Vv 187 (= sabba-jimha-vanka-kuṭilabhāv’âpagama-hetutāya u. Vv-a 96); Pp 59; Vb 244 (ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya); Vism 219 (uju avanka akuṭila) DN-a i.210 (id.), Kp-a 236; Dhp-a i.288 (cittaṃ ujuṃ akuṭilaṃ nibbisevanaṃ karoti); Vv-a 281 (˚koṭi-vanka); Pv-a 123 (an˚).
-aṅgin (ujjangin) having straight limbs, neg. an˚ not having straight limbs, i.e. pliable, skilful, nimble, graceful Ja v.40 (= kañcana-sannibha-sarīra C.); vi.500 (T anuccangin = anindita-agarahitangin C.). -gata walking straight, of upright life MN i.46; AN iii.285 sq. (˚citta) v.290 sq.; Snp 350 (ujju˚), 477 (id.); Dhp 108 (ujju˚, see Dhp-a ii.234 for interpretation). -gāmin, neg. an˚ going crooked, a snake Ja iv.330. -cittatā straightness, unwieldiness of heart Vb 350. -diṭṭhitā the fact of having a straightforward view or theory (of life) Mil 257. -paṭipanna living uprightly DN i.192; SN iv.304; SN v.343; Vism 219 -magga the straight road DN i.235; Vin v.149; Iti 104; Ja i.344 Ja vi.252; Dhp-a ii.192. -bhāva straightness, uprightness Snp-a 292, Snp-a 317; Pv-a 51. -bhūta straight, upright SN i.100, SN i.170 SN ii.279; SN v.384, SN v.404; AN ii.57; AN iv.292; Ja i.94; Ja v.293 (an˚) Vv 3423 (see Vv-a 155); Pv i.1010 (= citta-jimha-vankaKutīla-bhāva-karānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena ujubhāvappatta Pv-a 51). -vaṃsa straight lineage, direct descendency Ja v.251. -vāta a soft wind Mil 283. -vipaccanīka in direct opposition DN i.1; MN i.402; DN-a i.38.
Vedic ṛju, also ṛjyati, irajyate to stretch out: cp. Gr. ὀρέγω to stretch; Lat. rego to govern; Goth ufrakjan to straighten up; Ohg. recchen = Ger. recken E. reach; Oir. rēn span. See also P. ajjava
(adj.) straight, direct, upright MN i.124; SN i.33 (ujuko so maggo, the road to Nibbāna) 260 (citta); iv.298; v.143, 165; Ja i.163; Ja v.297 (opp khujja); Dhp-a i.18 (˚magga); Sdhp 321. -anujjuka crooked not straight SN iv.299; Ja iii.318.
uju + ka
(f.) straightness, rectitude Dhs 50, Dhs 51 (kāyassa, cittassa); Vism 436 sq.
abstr. fr. ujuka
(f.) straight(forward)ness, rectitude Dhs 50, Dhs 51.
abstr. of uju
to laugh at, deride, mock, make fun of Vin iii.128; Thig 74 (spelt jjh = hasati Thag-a 78); AN iii.91 (ujjh˚, v.l. ujj˚) = Pp 67 (= pāṇiṃ paharitvā mahāhasitaṃ hasati Pp A 249).
ud + jagghati
hard, barren soil; a very sandy and deserted place DN ii.146 (˚nagaraka, trsl. “town in the midst of a jungle”, cp. Dial. ii.161); Ja i.391; Vv 855 (= ukkaṃsena jangala i.e. exceedingly dusty or sandy dry); Pv ii.970 (spelt ujjhangala, expld. by ativiya-thaddhabhūmibhāga at Pv-a 139); Vism 107. Also in BSk. ujjangala e.g. Mvu ii.207.
ud + jangala
(adj.) blazing, flashing; bright, beautiful Ja i.220; Dāvs ii.63.
ud + jval, see jalati
to blaze up, shine forth Vin i.31; Vv-a 161 (+ jotati) ■ Caus. ujjāleti to make shine, to kindle Vin i.31; Mil 259; Vism 428; Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.14, read dīpāṃ ujjālayiṃ); Vv-a 51 (padīpaṃ).
ud + jalati, jval
(adj.) “running up”, in cpd. ujjav-ujjava a certain term in the art of spinning or weaving Vin iv.300, expld. by “yattakaṃ patthena (patthana?) añcitaṃ hoti tasmi takkamhi vedhite”.
ud + java
to go up-stream Vin ii.301.
ud + javati
instr. fem. of ujjavanaka used as adv. up-stream, lit “running up” Vin ii.290 Vin iv.65 (in expln. of uddhaṃgāmin, opp. ojavanikāya).
ud + javanaka, q.v.
to give up, let go; imper. ujjaha SN i.188; Thig 19; Snp 342.
ud + jahati
see uju & ujuka;.
light, lustre Ja i.183 (˚kara); Mil 321.
ud + * jot of jotati, Sk. uddyotate
illumined Dāvs v.53.
pp. of ujjoteti, ud + joteti
see ujjagghati.
(f.) loud laughter Vin ii.213, cp. iv.187.
fr. ujjagghati, spelling varies
1. to forsake, leave, give up Ja vi.138; Dāvs ii.86.
2. to sweep or brush away Ja vi.296 ■ pp. ujjhita (q.v.).
Sk. ujjhati, ujjh
(f.) irritation, discontent AN iv.223, AN iv.467 (v.l. ujj˚) cp. ujjhāna.
fr. ud + jhāyati1, corresponding to a Sk. *ud-dhyāti
(nt.)
1. taking offence, captiousness Dhp 253 (= paresaṃ randha-gavesitāya Dhp-a iii.377); Mil 352 (an˚-bahula).
2. complaining, wailing Ja iv.287.
-saññin,-saññika irritable SN i.23; Thag 958; Vin ii.214 cp. iv.194; Dpvs ii.6; Dhp-a iii.376 (˚saññitā irritability).
ud + jhāna1 or jhāna2?
(nt.) stirring up, provoking Ja v.91 (devat˚), 94 (˚kamma).
fr. ud + jhāyati1 or jhāyati2 to burn, to which jhāpeti to bring to ruin etc.? cp. ujjhāna
(adj.) one who stirs up another to discontent Vin iv.38.
fr. ujjhāpana
to harass, vex, irritate MN i.126; SN i.209 (“give occasion for offence”); Vin iv.38 (cp. p. 356); Ja v.286; Pv-a 266.
Caus. of ujjhāyati
to be irritated, to be annoyed or offended, to get angry, grumble; often in phrase ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti expressing great annoyance Vin i.53, Vin i.62, Vin i.73; Vin ii.207; Vin iv.226; SN i.232 passim ■ SN i.232 (mā ujjhāyittha); Ja ii.15; Dhp-a ii.20 aor. ujjhāyi Ja i.475; Dhp-a ii.88; inf. ujjhātuṃ Ja ii.355. Caus. ujjhāpeti (q.v.).
ud + jhāyati1 or perhaps more likely jhāyati2 to burn, fig. to be consumed. According to Müller P. G pp. 12 & 42 = Sk. ava-; dhyā, but that is doubtful phonetically as well as semantically
destitute, forsaken; thrown out, cast away MN i.296 (+ avakkhitta); Thag 315 (itthi); 2 386 (cp. Thag-a 256 vātakkhitto viya yo koci dahano) Dhp 58 (= chaḍḍita of sweepings Dhp-a i.445); Ja iii.499 Ja v.302; Ja vi.51. Uncha & Uncha
pp. of ujjhati
(f.) anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning SN ii.281; AN i.36; AN iii.66 sq., 104; Vin iii.87; Snp 977; Thig 329, Thig 349; Ja iii.389; Ja iv.23, Ja iv.28, Ja iv.434, Ja iv.471 (˚ya, dat. phalâphal’atthāya C.); Thag-a 235, Thag-a 242. Cp. samuñchaka.
-cariyā wandering for, or on search for gleaning, Ja ii.272; Ja iii.37, Ja iii.515; Ja v.3; DN-a i.270; Vv-a 103; Thag-a 208 -cārika (adj.) going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tāpasā Snp-a 295 (cp. DN-a i.270, DN-a i.271). -patta the gleaning-bowl, in phrase uñchāpattāgate rato “fond of that which has come into the gl. b.” Thag 155 = Pv iv.73 (= uñchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate āhāre rato Pv-a 265; trsld. in Psalms of Brethren “contented with whatever fills the bowl”). aññāt˚, marked off as discarded (goods) SN ii.281, so S A.
Sk. uñcha & uñchana, to; uñch. Neumann’s etym. uñchā = E. ounce, Ger. unze (Majjhima trsl.2ii.682) is incorrect, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under uncia
to gather for sustenance, seek (alms), glean Vism 60 (= gavesati).
fr. uñch
(f.) contempt Vin iv.241; Vb 353 sq. (att˚).
= avaññā (?) from ava + jñā, or after uññātabba?
(adj.) to be despised, contemptible, only in stock-phrase “daharo na uṇṇātabbo na paribhotabbo” SN i.69; Snp p.93; Snp-a 424 (= na avajānitabbo, na nīcaṃ katvā jānitabbo ti). In same connection at Ja v.63 mā naṃ daharo [ti] uññāsi (v.l. maññāsi) apucchitvāna (v.l. ā˚).
grd. fr. ava + jñā (?)
at Vin ii.131 is doubtful reading (see p. 318, v.l. uḍḍhetvā), and should perhaps be read uḍḍetvā (oḍḍetva, see uḍḍeti), meaning “putting into a sling, tying or binding up”.
one who scares away (or catches?) crows (kāk˚) Vin i.79 (vv.ll. uṭṭhe˚, uḍḍe˚, uḍe˚). See remarks on uṭṭepeti.
in phrase kāke u. “to scare crows away” (or to catch them in snares?) at Vin i.79. Reading doubtful should probably be read uḍḍepeti (? Caus. of uḍḍeti oḍḍeti, or of uḍḍeti to make fly away). The vv.ll. given to this passage are uṭṭeceti, upaṭṭhāpeti, uḍḍoyeti. See also; uṭṭepaka.
see vo˚. Utthahati & Utthati;
to rise, stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or exert oneself, to be active, pres.; uṭṭhahati Pp 51 ■ pot. uṭṭhaheyya SN i.217; as imper. uttiṭṭhe Dhp 168 (expld. by uttiṭṭhitvā paresaṃ gharadvāre ṭhatvā Dhp-a iii.165, cp. Vin Texts i.152) ■ imper. 2nd pl. uṭṭhahatha Snp 331; Snp 2nd sg. uṭṭhehi Pv ii.61; Ja iv.433 ■ ppr uṭṭhahanto MN i.86; SN i.217; Ja i.476 ■ aor. uṭṭhahi Ja i.117; Pv-a 75 ■ ger. uṭṭhahitvā Pv-a 4, Pv-a 43, Pv-a 55 Pv-a 152, & uṭṭhāya Snp 401 ■ inf. uṭṭhātuṃ Ja i.187. Note. When uṭṭh˚ follows a word ending in a vowel and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony, e.g. gabbho vuṭṭhāsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin ii.278; āsanā vuṭṭhāya arising from his seat, Vism 126. See also under vuṭṭhahati ■ pp uṭṭhita; Caus. uṭṭhāpeti ■ Cp. pariyuṭṭhāti.
ud + sthā see tiṭṭhati & uttiṭṭhati
exerting oneself, rousing oneself; an˚; sluggish, lazy Dhp 280 (= ayāyāmanto Dhp-a iii.409); cp. anuṭṭhahaṃ SN i.217.
ppr. of uṭṭhahati
one who gets up or rouses himself, one who shows energy SN i.214; AN iv.285, AN iv.288, AN iv.322; Snp 187; Ja vi.297. -an˚; one who is without energy SN i.217; Snp 96.
n. ag. of ut + ṣṭhā, see uṭṭhahati
(nt.)
1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opp. sayana & nisīdana lying or sitting down) DN ii.134 (sīha-seyyaṃ kappesi uṭṭhāna-saññaṃ manasikaritvā); Dhp 280 (˚kāla); Ja i.392 (an˚-seyyā a bed from which one cannot get up); Vism 73 (aruṇ-uṭṭhānavelā time of sunrise) Dhp-a i.17.
2. rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as adj. (-˚) producing Ja i.47 (kapp˚) vi.459; Mil 326 (dhaññ˚ khettaṃ atthi).
3. “rousing” exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry often syn. with viriya MN i.86; AN i.94; AN ii.135 (˚phala) iii.45 (˚viriya), 311; iv.281 (˚sampadā); Iti 66 (˚adhigataṃ dhanaṃ earned by industry); Pv iv.324; Pp 51 (˚phala) Mil 344, Mil 416; Thag-a 267 (˚viriya); Pv-a 129 (+ viriya) -an˚; want of energy, sluggishness AN iv.195; Dhp 241. Note. The form vuṭṭhāna appears for uṭṭh˚ after a vowel under the same conditions as vuṭṭhahati for uṭṭhahati (q.v.) gabbha-vuṭṭhānaṃ Ja i.114. See also vuṭṭh˚; and cp. pariy˚.
fr. ut + ṣṭhā
(-˚) (adj.)
1. giving rise to yielding (revenue), producing Ja i.377, Ja i.420 (satasahass˚); iii. 229 (id.); v.44 (id.). Cp. uṭṭhāyika.
2. energetic Ja vi.246.
fr. uṭṭhāna
1. to make rise, only in phrase aruṇaṃ (suriyaṃ) u. to let the sun rise, i.e. wait for sunrise or to go on till sunrise Ja i.318; Ja vi.330 Vism 71, Vism 73 (aruṇaṃ).
2. to raise Ja vi.32 (paṭhaviṃ). 3. to fit up Ja vi.445 (nāvaṃ).
4. to exalt, praise DN-a i.256.
5. to turn a person out Dhp-a iv.69 ■ See also vuṭṭhāpeti.
Caus. ii. of utthahati
(adj.) “getting-up-ish”, i.e. ready to get up, quick, alert active, industrious; f. ˚ikā Thig 413 (= uṭṭhāna-viriyasampannā Thag-a 267; v.l. uṭṭhāhikā)
adj. formation fr. uṭṭhāya, ger. of uṭṭhahati
(adj.) yielding, producing Ja ii.403 (satasahass˚).
= uṭṭhānaka
(adj.) getting up DN i.60 (pubb˚ + pacchā-nipātin rising early & lying down late).;
adj. form. fr. uṭṭhāya, cp. uṭṭhāyaka
(adj.) = uṭṭhāyaka Ja v.448; f. ˚ikā AN iii.38 (v.l. ˚āyikā) iv.266 sq.
for uṭṭhāyaka after analogy of gāhaka etc.
1. risen, got up Pv ii.941 (kāl˚); Vism 73.
2. arisen, produced Ja i.36; Mil 155.
3. striving, exerting oneself, active Ja ii.61; Dhp 168; Mil 213. -an˚; SN ii.264; Pts i.172 ■ Cp. pariy˚. Note. The form is vuṭṭhita when following upon a vowel see vuṭṭhita & uṭṭhahati;, e.g. paṭisallāṇā vutthito arisen from the seclusion DN ii.9; pāto vuṭṭhito risen early Pv-a 128.
pp. of uṭṭhahati
(nt.) burning up, conflagration Pp 13 (˚velā = jhāyana-kālo Pp A 187) Kp-a 181 (T. uḍḍahanavelā, v.l. preferable uḍḍayh˚).
fr. uḍḍayhati, see uddahati
to burn up (intrs.) Kp-a 181 (uḍḍaheyya with v.l. uḍḍayheyya, the latter preferable) Usually in Pass. uḍḍayhati to be burnt, to burn up (intrs.) SN iii.149, SN iii.150 (v.l. for ḍayhati); Ja iii.22 (udayhate); v.194. fut. uḍḍayhissati Ja i.48.
ud + ḍahati
ensnared (?), bound, tied up SN i.40 (= taṇhāya ullanghita C.; trsld. “the world is all strung up”).
pp. of uḍḍeti2
to fly up MN i.364 (kāko maṃsapesiṃ ādāya uḍḍayeyya; vv.ll. ubbaḍaheyya, uyya dayeyya); Ja v.256, Ja v.368, Ja v.417.
ud + ḍeti to fly. The etym. is doubtful, Müller P. Gr. 99 identifies uḍḍeti1 & uḍḍeti;2 both as causatives to ḍī. Of uḍḍeti2 two forms exist, uḍḍ˚ & oḍḍ˚, the latter of which may be a variant of the former, but with specialisation of meaning (“lay snares”), it may be a cpd with ava˚ instead of ud˚. It is extremely doubtful whether uḍḍeti2 belongs here, we should rather separate it & refer it to another root, probably; lī, layate (as in allīna, nilīyati etc.), to stick to, adhere, fasten etc. The change l → ḍ is a freq. Pāli phenomenon. Another Caus. II. of the same root (ḍī?) is uṭṭepeti
(a) to bind up, tie up to, string up Vin ii.131 (so read for uṭṭitvā, v.l. uḍḍhetvā) ■ (b) to throw away, reject Pv-a 256 (chaḍḍayāmi gloss) ■ pp. uḍḍita.
see discussion under uḍḍeti1
(-˚) (num. ord.) the fourth, only in cpd. aḍḍhuḍḍha “half of the fourth unit”, i.e. three & a half (cp; diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 and aḍḍha-teyya 2 1/2) Ja v.417 sq. (˚āni itthisahassāni); Mvu xii.53.
the apocope form of catuttha = uttha, dialectically reduced to uḍḍha under the influence of the preceding aḍḍha
(nt.) & Uṇṇā (f.)
1. wool AN iii.37 = AN iv.265 (+ kappāsā cotton) Ja ii.147; Snp-a 263 (patt˚).
2. hair between the eyebrows Snp 1022, & in stock phrase, describing one of the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa, bhamuk;’antare jātā uṇṇā odātā etc. DN ii.18 = DN iii.144 = DN iii.170 = Snp-a 285. Also at Vism 552 in jāti-uṇṇāya.
-ja in uṇṇaja mukha Ja vi.218, meaning “rounded swelling” (C. expls. by kañcan’ādāso viya paripuṇṇaṃ mukhaṃ). -nābhi (either uṇṇa˚ or uṇṇā, cp. Vedic ūrṇavābhi, ūrṇa + vābhi from Idg. *ṷebh to weave as in Lat. vespa = wasp, of which shorter root in Sk. vā ) a spider, lit. “wool-i.e. thread-weaver”, only in combn. with sarabū & mūsikā at Vin ii.110 = AN ii.73 = Ja ii.147 (= makkaṭaka C).
Sk. ūrṇa & ūrṇā; Lat. lāna wool; Goth. wulla; Ohg. wolla = E. wool; Lith. vilna; Cymr gwlan (= E. flannel); Gr. λ ̈ηνος, also ου ̈ ̓λος = Lat. vellus (fleece) = Ags. wil-mod
(adj.) raised, high, fig. haughty (opp. oṇata) AN ii.86; Snp 702 (an˚ care uddhaccaṃ n’āpajjeyya Snp-a 492); Pp 52 (= ucca uggata Pp A 229). Cp. unnata.
pp. of uṇṇamati, Sk. unnata
(f.) haughtiness Snp 830; Nd i.158, Nd i.170; Dhs 1116, Dhs 1233. Cp. unnati.
fr. uṇṇamati
loftiness, height, haughtiness Dhs 1116, Dhs 1233. Cp. unnama.
fr. uṇṇamati
to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited Snp 366, Snp 829, Snp 928; Nd i.169; Ja vi.346 inf. uṇṇametave Snp 206. Cp. unnamati.
ud + nam
(f.) a woollen dress Vin ii.108.
Sk. aurṇī fr. aurṇa woollen, der. of ūrṇa
(adj.-n.) hot, as adj only in phrase uṇhaṃ lohitaṃ chaḍḍeti to spill hot blood, i.e. to kill oneself Dhp-a i.95; otherwise in cpds. abs. only as nt. “heat” & always in contrast to sītaṃ “cold” Vin ii.117 (sītena pi uṇhena pi); DN ii.15 (opp sīta); MN i.85; AN i.145 = AN i.170 = Ja v.417 (sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā tiṇaṃ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā); Snp 52, Snp 966 (acc ˚); Nd i.486 = Nd ii.677 (same as under sita); Ja i.17 (v.93); Mil 410 (megho uṇhaṃ nibbāpeti); Pv-a 37 (ati˚).
-ākāra appearance of heat, often in phrase (Sakkassa paṇḍu-kambala-sil’āsanaṃ uṇhākāraṃ dassesi, of Sakka’s throne showing an appearance of heat as a sign of some extraordinary event happening in the world, e.g. Ja i.330 Ja v.92; Dhp-a i.17, and passim. -odaka hot water Vv-a 68 -kalla glowing-hot embers or ashes Ja ii.94 (so read for ˚kalala); iv.389 (˚vassa, rain of hot ashes, v.l. ˚kukkuḷavassa). -kāla hot weather Vin ii.209.
Vedic uṣṇā f. to oṣati to burn, pp. uṣṭa burnt, Sk. uṣṇa = Lat. ustus; cp. Gr. ευὤ, Lat. uro to burn Ags. ysla glowing cinders, Lith. usnis nettle
(nt.) hot state, heat Vism 171.
abstr. fr. uṇha
a turban DN i.7; DN ii.19 = DN iii.145 (˚sīsa cp. Dial. ii.16); Ja ii.88; Mil 330; DN-a i.89; Dhs-a 198. Ut(t)anda
Sk. uṣṇīṣa
see uddaṇḍa.
(m. & nt.)
1. (lit. (a) (good or proper) time, season: aruṇa-utu occasion or time of the sun(-rise) Dhp-a i.165; utuṃ gaṇhāti to watch for the right time (in horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarīraṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpeti “to cause the body to take season”, i.e. to refresh the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. Ja iii.527; DN-a i.252 ■ (b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism 128. There are usually three seasons mentioned, viz. the hot, rainy and wintry season or gimha vassa & hemanta; AN iv.138; Snp-a 317. Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at Ja v.330 & vi.524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil. utunā in the wintry season SN v.51 ■ (c) the menses Snp-a 317; Ja v.330 (utusinātāya read utusi nhātāya; utusi loc. as expld. by C. pupphe uppanne utumhi nahātāya).
2 (applied in a philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opp. kamma), physical order: see Asl. 272 f.; Dialogues II, 8, n.; Kvu trsln. 207; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhism p. 119 f., Cpd. 161, Dhs trsln. introd. xvii; & cp. cpds So in connection with kamma at Vism 451, Vism 614; Ja vi.105 (kamma-paccayena utunā samuṭṭhitā Veraraṇī); perhaps also at Mil 410 (megha ututo samuṭṭhahitvā).
-āhāra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs trsln. 174) Pv-a 148. -ūpasevanā seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Snp 249 (= gimhe ātapa-ṭṭhāna-sevanā vasse rukkha-mūla-sevanā hemante jalappavesa-sevanā Snp-a 291). -kāla seasonable favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; Vin ii.173. -ja produced by the seasons or by physical change Mil 268 (kamma˚ hetu˚, utu˚); Vism 451. -nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Mil 268. -pamāṇa measure of the season, i.e. the exact season Vin i.95. -pariṇāma change (adversity) of the season (as cause of disease) SN iv.230; AN ii.87; AN iii.131; AN v.110; Mil 112, Mil 304; Vism 31. -parissaya danger or risk of the seasons AN iii.388. -pubba festival on the eve of each of the (6) seasons Ja vi.524 -vāra time of the season, ˚vārena ˚vārena according to the turn of the season Ja i.58. -vikāra change of season Vism 262. -veramanī abstinence during the time of menstruaīion Snp 291 (cp. Snp-a 317). -saṃvacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, pl. ˚ā the seasons DN iii.85; AN ii.75; SN v.442. The phrase utusaṃvaccharāni at Pv ii.955 is by Dhammapāla taken as a bahuvrīhi cpd., viz cycles of seasons & of years, i.e. vasanta-gimh ādike bahū utū ca citta-saṃvacchar;’adi bahūni saṃvaccharāni ca Pv-a 135. Similarly at Ja v.330 (with Cy). -sappāya suitable to the season, seasonable Dhp-a 327. -samaya time of the menses Snp-a 317.
Vedic ṛtu special or proper time, with adj. ṛta straight, right, rite, ṛti manner to Lat. ars “art”, Gr.δαμαρ(τ), further Lat. rītus (rite), Ags. rīm number; of *ar to fit in, adjust etc. q.v. under appeti
(-˚) (adj.) seasonable, only in cpd. sabbotuka belonging to all seasons, perennial DN ii.179; Pv iv.122 (= pupphupaga-rukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukkhāvaha Pv-a 275); Sdhp 248.
utu + ka
(f.) a menstruating woman Vin iii.18; Vin iv.303; SN iv.239; AN iii.221, AN iii.229; Mil 127. an˚; AN iii.221, AN iii.226.
formed fr. utu like bhikkhunī fr. bhikkhu
speaking badly or spoken of badly i.e. of bad repute AN ii.117, AN ii.143; AN iii.163; Kp viii.2 Kp-a 218.
pp. of vac, Sk. ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only as dur˚.
(adj.) “grainy”, i.e. having too many rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp atikilinna too thin or liquid) Ja i.340; Ja iii.383 (id.) iv.44 (id.).
ud + taṇḍula
heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure Ja vi.574 (hemaṃ uttattaṃ agginā); Vv 8417; Pv iii.32 (˚rūpa so read for uggata˚, reading correct at Pv-a 188 ˚singī) Pv-a 10 (˚kanaka, T. uggatta˚); Mhbv 25 (id.).
ud + tatta1, pp. of ud + tap, Sk. uttapta
frightened, faint Vin iii.84. See uttasta & utrasta;.
= utrasta, is reading correct?
(adj.) “ut-most”, highest, greatest, best Snp 1054 (dhammaṃ uttamaṃ the highest ideal = Nibbāna for which seṭṭhan Snp 1064; cp. Nd ii.317); Dhp 56; Nd i.211; Nd ii.502 (in paraphrase of mahā combd. with pavara) Kp-a 124; Dhp-a i.430: Pv-a 1, Pv-a 50 ■ dum-uttama a splendid tree Vv 393; nar˚ the best of men Snp 1021 (narāsabha of 996); pur˚ the most magnificent town Snp 1012; puris˚ the noblest man Thag 629, Thag 1084; nt. uttamaṃ the highest ideal, i.e. Arahantship Ja i.96.
-aṅga the best or most important limb or part of the body, viz. (a) the head Vin ii.256 = MN i.32 = AN iv.278 (in phrase uttamange sirasmiṃ); Ja ii.163; also in cpd ˚bhūta the hair of the head Thig 253 (= kesa-kalāpa Thag-a 209, Thag-a 210) & ˚ruha id. Ja i.138 = Ja vi.96 (= kesā C.) (b) the eye Ja iv.403; (c) the penis Ja v.197. -attha the highest gain or good (i.e. Arahantship Snp-a 332) Snp 324; Dhp 386, Dhp 403; Dhp-a iv.142; Thag-a 160. -adhama most contemptible Ja v.394, Ja v.437. -guṇā (pl.) loftiest virtues Ja i.96. -purisa Iti 97 & -porisa the greatest man (= mahāpurisa) Dhp 97 (see Dhp-a ii.188). -bhāva the highest condition, state or place Dhp-a ii.188 (˚ṃ patto = puris’ uttamo).
superl. of ud˚, to which compar. is uttara. See etym. under ud˚
(f.) highest amount, climax, limit DN-a i.169 (for paramatā).
abstr. fr. uttama
(adj.) compar. of ud˚, q.v. for etym.; the superl. is uttama]
1. higher, high, superior, upper, only in cpds., Ja ii.420 (musal˚ with the club on top of him? Cy not clear, perhaps to uttara2); see also below.
2 northern (with disā region or point of compass) DN i.153; MN i.123; SN i.224; Pv-a 75. uttarāmukha (for uttaraṃmukha) turning north, facing north Snp 1010.
3. subsequent following, second (˚-) Ja i.63 (˚āsāḷha-nakkhatta). 4. over, beyond (-˚): aṭṭh’utara-sata eight over a hundred i.e. 108; Dhp-a i.388 ■ sa-uttara having something above or higher, having a superior i.e. inferior DN i.80 (citta), ii.299; MN i.59; SN v.265; Vb 324 (paññā); Dhs 1292, Dhs 1596; Dhs-a 50 ■ anuttara without a superior unrivalled, unparalleled DN i.40; SN i.124; SN ii.278; SN iii.84; Snp 179. See also under anuttara.
-attharaṇa upper cover Ja vi.253. -ābhimukha facing North DN ii.15. -āsaṅga an upper robe Vin i.289; ii. 126; SN i.81; SN iv.290; AN i.67, AN i.145; AN ii.146; Dhp-a i.218; Pv-a 73; Vv-a 33 = Vv-a 51. -itara something higher, superior DN i.45, DN i.156, DN i.174; SN i.81; Ja i.364; Dhp-a ii.60; Dhp-a iv.4 -oṭṭha the upper lip (opp. adhar˚) Ja ii.420; Ja iii.26; iv. 184. -chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa˚ a carpet with awnings or canopy above it) DN i.7; AN i.181; AN iii.50 -chadana = ˚chada DN ii.187; Dhp-a i.87. -dvāra the northern gate Ja vi.364. -dhamma the higher norm of the world (lok˚), higher righteousness DN ii.188 (paṭividdha-lok’uttara-dhammatāya uttama-bhāvaṃ patta). -pāsaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin ii.120 = Vin ii.148 -pubba north-eastern Ja vi.518. -sse (v.l. ˚suve) on the day after tomorrow AN i.240.
(adj.) crossing over, to be crossed, in dur˚; difficult to cross or to get out of SN i.197 (not duruttamo); Mil 158; and in cpd. ˚setu one who is going to cross a bridge Mil 194 (cp. uttara-setu).
fr. uttarati
(nt.) bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Thag 418; Ja i.195. In BSk. uttaraṇa only in sense of crossing, overcoming, e.g. Jtm 31 8 (˚setu). Cp. uttara.
fr. uttarati
1. to come out of (water) Vin ii.221 (opp. otarati); Ja i.108 (id.).
2. to go over, to flow over (of water), to boil over Mil 117, Mil 118, Mil 132 Mil 260, Mil 277.
3. to cross over, to go beyond MN i.135 aor. udatāri Snp 471 (oghaṃ).
4. to go over, to overspread Ja v.204 (ger. uttariyāna = avattharitvā C.) ■ pp otiṇṇa (q.v.) ■ Caus. uttareti (q.v.). Uttari (-) & Uttarim
ud + tarati1
(adv.) out, over, beyond; additional moreover, further, besides ■ (1) uttariṃ: DN i.71; MN i.83 MN iii.148; SN iv.15; Snp 796 (uttariṃ kurute = uttariṃ karoti Nd ii.102, i.e. to do more than anything, to do best, to esteem especially); Ja ii.23; Ja iii.324; Mil 10 (ito uttariṃ anything beyond this, any more) Dhp-a iv.109 (bhaveti to cultivate especially; see vuttari); Vv-a 152 ■ uttariṃ appaṭivijjhanto not going further in comprehension, i.e. reaching the highest degree of comprehension, Vism 314 referring to Pts ii.131, which is quoted at Mil 198, as the last of the 11 blessings of mettā ■ (2) uttari˚; in foll. cpds.
-karaṇīya an additional duty, higher obligation SN ii.99; SN iii.168; AN v.157 = AN v.164; Iti 118. -bhaṅga an extra portion, tit-bit, dainties, additional or after-meal bits Vin ii.214; Vin iii.160; Vin iv.259; Ja ii.419; Dhp-a i.214 sa-uttaribhanga together with dainty bits Ja i.186, cp. 196 (yāgu) -bhaṅgika serving as dainties Ja i.196. -manussa beyond the power of men, superhuman, in cpd. ˚dhamma an order which is above man, extraordinary condition, transcendental norm, adj. of a transcendental character, miraculous overwhelming Vin i.209; Vin ii.112; Vin iii.105; Vin iv.24; DN i.211; DN iii.3, DN iii.12, DN iii.18; MN i.68; MN ii.200; SN iv.290, SN iv.300 SN iv.337; AN iii.430; AN v.88; Dhp-a iii.480. -sāṭaka a further i.e. upper or outer garment, cloak, mantle Ja ii.246; Dhp-a iv.200; Pv-a 48, Pv-a 49 (= uttarīyaṃ).
compn. form of uttara, cp. angi-bhūta uttāni-karoti etc.
(adj.) transcending, superior, superhuman Ne 50.
fr. uttara
(nt.)
1. state of being higher. Cp iii.35; neg. an˚ state of being unsurpassed (lit. with nothing higher), preeminence; see anuttariya.
2. an answer, rejoinder Dhp-a i.44 (karaṇ˚-karaṇa).
abstr. fr. uttara; uttara + ya = Sk. *uttarya
(nt.) an outer garment, cloak Pvi.103 (= uparivasanaṃ uparihāraṃ uttarisāṭakaṃ Pv-a 49); Dāvs iii.30; Thag-a 253.
fr. uttara
only in Caus. uttāseti to impale, q.v.
identical in form with next
1. to frighten Ja i.47 (v.267). - to be alarmed or terrified Vin i.74 (ubbijjati u. palāyati) iii.145 (id.); Ja ii.384; Ja vi.79; ppr. uttasaṃ Thag 863; uttasanto Pv ii.23 ■ See utrasati. Caus. uttāseti (q.v.). pp. uttasta & utrasta (q.v.). Cp. also uttanta.;
ut + tasati2
(adj.-n..) frightening, fear Ja i.414 (v.l. for uttasta).
fr. ud + tras, cp. uttāsana
frightened, terrified, faint-hearted Ja i.414 (˚bhikkhu; v.l. uttasana˚).
pp. of uttasati2; usual form utrasta (q.v.)
(adj.)
1. streched out (flat), lying on one’s back, supine Vin i.271 (mañcake uttānaṃ nipajjāpetvā making her lie back on the couch) ii.215; Ja i.205; Pv iv.108 (opp. avakujja); Pv-a 178 (id.) 265.
2. clear, manifest, open, evident [cp. BSk. uttāna in same sense at Av. SN ii.106] DN i.116; SN ii.28 (dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito); Ja ii.168 (= pākaṭa); v.460; Pv-a 66, Pv-a 89, Pv-a 140, Pv-a 168 ■ anuttāna unclear, not explained Ja vi.247 ■ The cpd. form (˚-) of uttāna in combn. with kṛ & bhū is uttānī˚ (q.v.).
3. superficial, “flat”, shallow AN i.70 (parisa); Pp 46.
-mukha “clear mouthed”, speaking plainly, easily understood DN i.116 (see DA i.287); Dhp-a iv.8. -seyyaka “lying on one’s back”, i.e. an infant MN i.432; AN iii.6 Thag 935; Mil 40; Vism 97 (˚dāraka).
fr. ut + tan, see tanoti & tanta
(adj.)
1. (= uttāna1) lying on one’s back Ja vi.38 (˚ṃ pātetvā); Dhp-a i.184.
2. (uttāna2) clear, open DN ii.55; MN i.340 = Dhp-a i.173.
fr. uttāna
(˚-) open, manifest etc., in ˚kamma (uttāni˚) declaration, exposition, manifestation SN v.443 Pp 19; Vb 259, Vb 358; Ne 5, Ne 8, Ne 9, Ne 38 ■ ˚karaṇa id Snp-a 445 ■ ˚karoti to make clear or open, to declare show up, confess (a sin) Vin i.103; SN ii.25, SN ii.154; SN iii.132 SN iii.139; SN iv.166; SN v.261; AN i.286; AN iii.361 sq.
the compn. form of uttāna in cpds. with kṛ & bhū cp. BSk. uttānī-karoti Mvu iii.408; uttānī-kṛta Avs i.287; Avs ii.151
to heat, to cause pain, torment Ja vi.161.
Caus. of uttapati
crossing, passing over, ˚setu a bridge for crossing (a river) SN iv.174 = MN i.134 cp. uttara2.
fr. ud + tṛ; as in uttarati
pulled out, brought or moved out Ja i.194.
pp. of uttāreti
(nt.) the fact of having or being brought or moved out Ja i.195.
abstr. fr. uttārita
to make come out, to move or pull out Ja i.194; Snp-a 349 ■ pp. uttārita (q.v.).
Caus. of uttarati
terror, fear, fright DN iii.148; SN v.386; Mil 170; Pv-a 180.
Sk. uttrāsa, fr. ud + tras
(nt.) impalement Ja ii.444; Snp-a 61 (sūle).
fr. uttāseti2
(adj.) showing fear or fright, fearful SN iii.16 sq.
uttāsa + vant
impaled Pv iv.16 (= āvuta āropita Vv-a 220); Ja i.499; Ja iv.29.
pp. of uttāseti2
to frighten, terrify Ja i.230, Ja i.385; Ja ii.117.
Caus of uttasati, ud + tras, of which taṃs is uttāseti2 is a variant
to impale AN i.48; Ja i.230, Ja i.326; Ja ii.443; Ja iii.34 Ja iv.29 ■ pp. uttāsita (q.v.). Cp. uttāsana.
cp. Sk. uttaṃsayati in meaning to adorn with a wreath; ud + taṃs to shake, a variation of tars to shake tremble
“alms which one stands up for, or expects” left over, thrown out Vin i.44 (˚patta); Thag 1057 (˚piṇḍa); 2, 349 (˚piṇḍa = vivaṭadvāre ghare ghare patiṭṭhitvā labhanaka-piṇḍa Thag-a 242); Ja iv.380 (˚piṇḍa; C similarly as at Thag-a; not to the point); 386 (˚piṇḍa ucchiṭṭhaka piṇḍa C.); Mil 213, Mil 214.
= ucchiṭṭha? Cp. ucchepaka. By Pāli Cys. referred to uṭṭhahati.
see uṭṭhahati.
(adj.) in uttiṇaṃ karoti to take the straw off, lit. to make off-straw; to deprive of the roof MN ii.53. Cp. next.
ud + tiṇa
drawn out, pulled out, nt. outlet, passage Ja ii.72 (paṇṇasālāya uttiṇṇāni karoti make entrances in the hut). Or should it be uttiṇa?
pp. of uttarati
frightened, terrified, alarmed Vin ii.184; SN i.53, SN i.54 (an˚); Snp 986; Mil 23; Dhp-a ii.6 (˚mānasa); Pv-a 243 (˚citta), 250 (˚sabhāva).
pp. of uttasati, also cp. uttasta
terror Ja ii.8 (citt˚).
= uttāsa
(adj.) terrified, frightened, fearful, anxious SN i.99, SN i.219 ■ Usually neg. an˚ in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin without fear, steadfast & not running away SN i.99; Thag 864; Nd ii.13; Ja iv.296; Ja v.4; Mil 339. See also apalāyin.
fr. *Sk. uttrāsa = P. uttāsa
prefix in verbal & nominal comb;n. One half of all the words beginning with u˚ are combns. with ud˚, which in compn. appears modified according to the rules of assimilation as prevailing in Pāli ■ I. Original meaning “out in an upward direction”, out of, forth; like ummujjati to rise up out of (water), ujjalati to blaze up high; udeti to come out of & go up; ukkaṇṭha stretching one’s neck out high (cp. Ger. “empor”); uggilati to “swallow up” i.e. spit out ■ The opposites of ud-are represented by either ava or o˚; (see under II. & IV. & cp. ucc-âvaca uddhambhāgiya: orambhāgiya), ni (see below) or vi (as udaya: vi-aya or vaya) ■ II. Hence develop 2 clearly defined meanings, viz. (1) out, out of, away from-˚aṇha (“day-out”); ˚agga (“top-out”); ˚āgacchati; ˚ikkhati look out for, expect; ˚kantati tear out; ˚khitta thrown off; ˚khipati pick out; ˚gacchati come out; ˚gamaṇa rising (opp. o˚); ˚gajjati shout out; ˚gilati (opp. o˚); ˚ghoseti shout out; ˚cināti pick out; ˚chiṭṭha thrown out; ˚jagghati laugh at, cp. Ger. aus-lachen ˚tatta smelted out; ˚tāna stretched out; ˚dāleti tear out; ˚dhaṭa lifted out, drawn out; ˚disati point out to; ˚drīyati pull out; ˚pajjati to be produced; ˚patti & ˚pāda coming out, origin, birth ˚paṭipatiyā out of reach; ˚paḷāseti sound out; ˚phāsulika “ribs out”; etc. etc ■ (2) up (high) or high up, upwards on to (cp. ucca high, uttara higher)-: ˚kujja erect (opp. ava˚); ˚kūla sloping up (opp. vi˚); ˚khipati throw-up, ˚gaṇhāti take up; ˚chindati cut up; ˚javati go up-stream, ˚javana id. (opp. o˚); uñña pride; ˚thāna “standing up” ˚ṭhita got up; ˚tarati come out, go up (opp. o˚); ˚nata raised up, high (opp. o˚); ˚nama e-levation ˚nāmin raised (opp. ni˚); ˚patati fly up; etc. etc ■ III More specialised meanings (from elliptical or figurative use) are: (1) ud˚ = without, “ex-”, e.g. unnangala “outplough” = without a plough; uppabbajita an ex-bhikkhu. (2) ud˚ = off, i.e. out of the way, wrong, e.g. uppatha a wrong road, ummagga id ■ (3) ud˚ = out of the ordinary, i.e. exceedingly, e.g. ujjangala extremely dusty uppanduka very pale; uppoṭheti to beat hard ■ IV Dialectical variations & combinations ■ (1) Owing to semantic affinity we often find an interchange between; ud˚; and ava˚; (cp. E. break up = break down, grind up or down, tie up or down), according to different points of view. This wavering between the two prefixes was favoured by the fact that o always had shown an unstable tendency & had often been substituted for or replaced by ū, which in its place was reduced to u before a double consonant, thus doing away with the diff. between; ū & u; or o & u;. For comparison see the foll.: ukkamati & okk˚ uññā: avañña; uddiyati: odd˚; uḍḍeyya oḍḍ˚; uppīḷeti opīḷ˚; etc., & cp. abbhokirati → abbhukkirati ■ (2) the most freq. comb;ns. that ud˚ enters into are those with the intensifying prefixes abhi˚; and sam˚; ; see e.g. abhi ud (= abbhud˚) + gacchati, ˚jalati; ˚ṭhāti; ˚namati etc. sam + ud + eti; ˚kamati; ˚chindati; ˚tejeti; ˚pajjati etc.
Vedic ud-; Goth. ūt = Ohg. ūz = E. out, Oir. ud-; cp. Lat. ūsque “from-unto” & Gr.; υ ̔́στερος = Sk. uttara
(indecl.) disjunctive part. “or” either singly, as at Snp 455, Snp 955, Snp 1090; Ja v.478 (v.l. udāhu); Nd i.445 (expld. as “padasandhi” with same formula as iti, q.v.); Pv ii.1216 (kāyena uda cetasā); or combd. with other synonymous particles, as uda vā at Snp 193, Snp 842, Snp 1075; Iti 82 = Iti 117 (caraṃ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṃ nisinno uda vā sayaṃ walking or standing, sitting or lying down); Kp-a 191 ■ See also udāhu.
Sk. uta & u, with Lat. aut (or), Gr.; α ̔ϋτι (again), αὐτάρ (but, or), Goth. auk = Ger. auch to pron base ava˚ yonder, cp. ava ii.
(˚-) water, wave. In cpds. sometimes the older form udan˚ is preserved (like udañjala, udaññavant), but generally it has been substituted by the later uda˚ (see under udakaccha, udakanti, udakumbha, udapatta udapāna, udabindu).
Vedic udan (nt.), also later uda (but only ˚-), commonly udaka, q.v.
(nt.) water Vin ii.120, Vin ii.213; DN ii.15 (˚assa dhārā gushes or showers of w.); Dhp 80 Dhp 145; Ja i.212; Pv i.57; Pp 31, Pp 32; Mil 318; Vv-a 20 (udake temanaṃ aggimhe tāpanaṃ); Dhp-a i.289; Dhp-a iii.176, Dhp-a iii.256; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 70 ■ Syn. ambu, ela, jala etc. The compn. form (-˚) is either ūdaka (āsanûdaka-dāyin Ja iv.435) or ˚odaka (pādodaka water for the feet Pv-a 78) odaka occurs also in abs. form (q.v.), cp. also oka Bdgh.’s kaṃ = udakaṃ, tena dāritan: kandaran ti is a false etymology; DN-a i.209.
-aṇṇava water-flood MN i.134. -āyatika a water-pipe Vin ii.123. -āḷhaka a certain measure of water, an āḷhaka of w. SN v.400; AN ii.55 = AN iii.337; Vv-a 155. -ūpama resembling water, like water AN iv.11 (puggala). -ogāhana plunging into water Ja iii.235. -ogha a water flood Vv-a 48. -orohaka descending into water, bathing; Name of a class of ascetics, lit. “bather” MN i.281; SN iv.312; AN v.263. -orohaṇa plunging into water, taking a bath, bathing DN i.167; SN i.182; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Ja iv.299; Pp 55 -kalaha the “water dispute” Dhp-a iii.256. -kāka a water crow Ja ii.441. -kicca libation of water, lit. water-performance; cleansing, washing DN ii.15. -kīḷā sporting in the w. Ja vi.420. -gahaṇasāṭaka bathing-gown Ja v.477 -ghaṭa a water pitcher Pv-a 66. -cāṭi a water jar Dhp-a i.52. -ṭṭhāna a stand for water Vin ii.120. -tumba a water vessel Ja ii.441; DN-a i.202; Dhp-a ii.193. -telaka an oily preparation mixed with water Vin ii.107. -dantapoṇa water for rinsing the mouth & tooth-cleaner Vin iii.51; Vin iv.90, Vin iv.92, Vin iv.233; Ja iv.69. -daha a lake (of water DN i.45. -doṇikā a water-tub or trough Vin ii.220. -dhārā a shower of water Pts i.125; Ja iv.351. -niddhamana a water spout or drain Vin ii.120, Vin ii.123; Dhp-a ii.37. -nibbāhana an aquaduct Mil 295. -paṭiggaha receiving or accepting water Vin ii.213. -patta a waterbowl Vin ii.107; DN i.80; SN iii.105. -puñchanī a towel Vin ii.122 -posita fed or nourished by water Vv-a 173. -phusita a drop of water SN ii.135. -bindu a drop of w. Iti 84 (v.l. for udabindu); Pv-a 99. -bubbula a w. bubble AN iv.137 Vism 109, Vism 479 (in comp.). -bhasta devoid of water Thag-a 212 (for anodaka Thig 265). -maṇika a water-pot Vin i.227; MN i.354; AN iii.27; Mil 28; Dhp-a i.79. -mallaka a cup for w. AN i.250. -rakkhasa a water-sprite Dhp-a iii.74 -rahada a lake (of w.) DN i.74, DN i.84; AN i.9; AN ii.105; AN iii.25; Snp 467; Pp 47. -rūha a water plant Vv 356. -lekhā writing on w. AN i.283 = Pp 32 (in simile ˚ûpama like writing on w.; cp. Pp A 215). -vāra “waterturn”, i.e. fetching water Dhp-a i.49. -vāraka bucket SN ii.118 -vāha a flow of water, flowing w. Ja vi.162. -vāhaka rise or swelling (lit. carrying or pulling along (of water) overflowing, flood AN i.178. -vāhana pulling up water Vin ii.122 (˚rajju). -sadda sound of water Dhs 621 -sarāvaka a saucer for w. Vin ii.120. -sāṭaka = sāṭikā Ja ii.13. -sāṭikā “water-cloak”, a bathing-mantle Vin i.292; Vin ii.272; Vin iv.279 (= yāya nivatthā nhāyati C.); Dhp-a ii.61 (T. ˚sāṭaka). -suddhika ablution with water (after passing urine) Vin iv.262 (= mutta-karaṇassa dhovanā C.).
Vedic udaka, uda + ka (see uda2), of Idg. *ṷed, *ud, fuller form *eṷed (as in Sk. odatī, odman flood odana gruel, q.v.); cp. Sk. unatti, undati to water, udra = Av. udra = Ags. otor = E. otter (“water-animal”) Gr. υ ̔́δωρ water (“hydro”), υ ̔́δρα hydra (“water-animal”) Lat. unda wave; Goth. watō = Ohg. wazzar = E. water Obulg. voda water, vydra otter
watery soil, swamp Ja v.137.
uda + kaccha
a water jug Ja i.20; Dhp 121, Dhp 122; Pv i.129.
uda + kumbha
(adj.) topmost, high, lofty Thag 110; fig. elated, exalted, exultant joyful, happy DN i.110 (˚citta); Snp 689 (+ sumana), 1028 (id.); Pv iv.155 (attamana + ); iv.58 (haṭṭha + ); Mil 248; Dhp-a ii.42 (haṭṭha-pahaṭṭha udagg-udagga in high glee & jubilant); Vism 346 (id.); Sdhp 323. See also der. odagya.
ud + agga, lit. “out-top”, cp. Sk. udagra
(f.) exaltation, jubilation, glee Sdhp 298.
abstr. fr. udagga
in udaggihuttaṃ the fire prepared (for sacrifice) Ja v.396 (uda-aggihuttaṃ C. wrongly), lit. “the sacrifice (being) out”
= ud + aggi + hutta, cp. Vedic agnihotra
(nt.) an open place Ja i.109.
ud + angaṇa1; Kern unnecessarily changes it to uttankana “a place for digging for water” see Toev. p. 96
3rd sg. praet. of ucchindati to break up Snp 2, Snp 3 (˚ā metri causa).
(nt.) a bucket for drawing water out of a well Dhp-a i.94.
fr. ud + añc, see añchati
(adj.-n.) draining, pulling up water f. ˚ī a bucket or pail Ja i.417 (f. ˚ī).
ud + añcanin to añc see añchati
in ˚ṃ kīḷati a water-game: playing with drops of water (?) Vin iii.118 (Bdhgh. udañjalan ti udaka-cikkhallo vuccati p. 274)
udan + jala see uda2
(adj.) rich in water, well-watered Ja v.405 (= udaka-sampanna C.).
udan = uda(ka) + vant
day-break, dawn, sunrise Ja v.155.
ud + aṇha
3rd sg aor. of uttarati to cross over Snp 471 (oghaṃ).
(adj.) elevated, high, lofty, clever Ne 7, Ne 118, Ne 123 (= uḷārapañña C.).
Sk. udātta
the sea, ocean SN i.67; Iti 86; Snp 720; Ja v.326; Ja vi.526; Thag-a 289; Vv-a 155 (“udakaṃ ettha dhīyatī ti udadhi”); Sdhp 322, Sdhp 577.
uda + dhi, lit. water-container
for ud, and patta, pp. of pat, for patita? Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as udak-prāpta, risen, flying up sprung up Ja iii.484 (= uppatita C.); v.71 (= uṭṭhita C.).
a bowl of water, a water-jug, ewer MN i.100; SN v.121; AN iii.230 sq., 236 v.92, 94, 97 sq.
uda + patta; Sk. udapātra
3rd sg. aor. of uppajjati to arise, originate, become DN i.110, DN i.180, DN i.185; SN ii.273; Iti 52, Iti 99; Snp-a 346, Snp-a 462.
a well, a cistern Vin i.139; Vin ii.122; MN i.80; AN iv.171; Ja iii.216; Ud 78; Pv ii.78; ii.925; Mil 411; Vism 244 (in simile) DN-a i.298; Vv-a 40; Pv-a 78.
uda + pāna lit. “(place for) drinking water”; cp. opāna, which in the incorrect opinion of Pāli Commentators represents a contracted udapāna
see udapatta.
a drop of water MN i.78; Snp 812; Dhp 121, Dhp 122, Dhp 336; Iti 84 (v.l. udaka˚); Nd i.135; Snp-a 114; Dhp-a ii.51.
uda + bindu
aor. 3rd sg. of ubbadhati to destroy, kill Snp 4 (= ucchindanto vadhati Snp-a 18).
ud + vadh
3rd sg. Pot. of ubbahati to draw out, tear out, remove Thag 158; Snp 583 (= ubbaheyya dhāreyya (?) Snp-a 460); Ja ii.223 (udabbaheyya C.); vi.587 (= hareyya C.); aor. udabbahi Vin iv.5.
ud + bṛh1, see also abbahati
rise, growth; increment, increase; income, revenue, interest AN ii.199; Pts i.34; Vv 847 (dhan’atthika uddayaṃ patthayāna = ānisaṃsaṃ atirekalābhaṃ Vv-a 336); 8452; Dhp-a ii.270; Pv-a 146 (ulār vipāka), 273 (˚bhūtāni pañca kahāpaṇa-satāni labhitvā with interest); Sdhp 40, Sdhp 230, Sdhp 258 ■ See also uddaya.
-attha rise and fall, birth & death (to attha;2) MN i.356; SN v.197 sq., 395; AN iii.152 sq.; AN iv.111, AN iv.289, AN iv.352; AN v.15 AN v.25. -atthika desirous of increase, interest or wealth (cp above Vv 847 dhan’atthika) AN ii.199. -bbaya (ud-aya vy-aya) increase & decrease, rise & fall, birth & death up & down DN iii.223; SN i.46 = SN i.52 (lokassa); iii.130; AN ii.90; iii. 32; iv.153; Iti 120; Vism 287; Pts i.54; Thag-a 90 -vyaya = ˚bbaya SN iv.140; AN ii.15 (khandhānaṃ); Dhp 113, Dhp 374 (khandhānaṃ, see Dhp-a iv.110). Udayam & Udayanto;
fr. ud + i, cp. udeti
ppr. of udeti (q.v.).
(nt.) going up, rise DN-a i.95.
fr. ud + i
(nt.)
1 the belly, stomach DN ii.266; Snp 78, Snp 604, Snp 609, Snp 716; Ja i.146, Ja i.164, Ja i.265; Mil 213; Pv-a 283; Kp-a 57, Kp-a 58; Dhp-a i.47 (pregnant); Sdhp 102.
2. cavity, interior, inside Dāvs i.56 (mandir-odare) -ūnūdara with empty belly Thag 982; Mil 406, Mil 407 cp. ūna.
-aggi the fire of the belly or stomach (i.e. of digestion Kp-a 59; Snp-a 462; Pv-a 33; -āvadehakaṃ (adv.) bhunjati to eat to fill the stomach, eat to satiety, to be gluttonous MN i.102; AN v.18; Thag 935; Vism 33. -paṭala the mucous membrane of the stomach Vism 359 (= sarīr˚abbhantara 261); Snp-a 248; Kp-a 55, Kp-a 61. -pūra stomachfilling Vism 108. -vaṭṭi “belly-sack”, belly Vin iii.39 Vin iii.117; Vism 262 where Kp-a reads ud. paṭala). -vāta the wind of the belly, stomach-ache 9Ja i.33, Ja i.433; Vism 41 (˚ābādha); Dhp-a iv.129.
Vedic udara, Av udara belly, Gr. υ ̔́στερος = Lat. uterus belly, womb; Lith. védaras stomach, See also Walde, Lat. Wtb. under vensica
(nt.) the stomach Kp iii. (cp. Kp-a 57); Vism 258, Vism 358. Cp sodariya.
fr. udara
2nd sg. pot. of ud + assayati Ja v.26 (meaning to instal, raise?), expld. by C. as ussayāpesi (?) Reading may be faulty for udāsase (?).
ā + śri, cp. assaya
a water-carrier Ja ii.80.
uda + hāraka
(adj.) going for water Vv 509.
fr. udahāra fetching of water, uda + hṛ;
to come to completion DN-a i.288. Cp sam.
ud + ā + gacchati
(nt.)
1. “breathing out”, exulting cry, i e. an utterance, mostly in metrical form, inspired by a particularly intense emotion, whether it be joyful or sorrowful (cp. K. S. p. 29 n. 2) DN i.50 DN i.92; SN i.20, SN i.27, SN i.82, SN i.160; AN i.67; Ja i.76; Pp 43, Pp 62 Ne 174; Pv-a 67; Sdhp 514 ■ The utterance of such an inspired thought is usually introduced with the standing phrase “imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi” i.e. breathed forth this solemn utterance [Cp. BSk. udānaṃ udānayati Divy 99 etc.], e.g. at Vin i.2 sq., 12, 230, 353; DN i.47; DN ii.107 (udāna of triumph); SN iii.55; Mvu xix.29; DN-a i.140; Ud. 1 passim; Snp-a 354 (“the familiar quotation about the sakyas”). Occasionally (later) we find other phrases, as e.g. udānaṃ pavatti Ja i.61; abhāsi Vin iv.54; kathesi Ja vi.38.
2. one of the angas or categories of the Buddhist Scriptures: see under nava & aṅga; ■ Cp. vodāna.
fr. ud + an to breathe
uttered, breathed forth, said Dhp-a iv.55.
pp. of udāneti
to breathe out or forth, usually in phrase udānaṃ udānesi: see under udāna1. Absolutely only at Ja iii.218.
denom. f. udāna, cp. BSk. udānayati
at Ja v.255 is uncertain reading (v.l. udapatvā, C. explns. reading udapatvā by uppatitvā = flying up) perhaps we should read udapatta flew up, pret. of ud pat = Sk. *udapaptat (so Kern, Toev. s. v.).
at DN-a i.266 (udāyissati fut.) is hardly correct; DN i.96 has here udrīyissati (q.v.), which belongs to darati to break, tear etc., udāyati could only belong to dāyāti meaning to cut, mow, reap. but not to split etc. DN-a i.266 explns. udāyissati with bhijjhissati. The difficulty is removed by reading udrīyissati. To v.l. undriyati cp. ˚undriya for ˚uddaya (dukkh˚ for dukkhudraya see udraya). We find udāyati once more at Vism 156 in expln. of ekodi where it is evidently meant for udeti (Caus. = uṭṭhapeti).
(adj.) raised, sublime noble, excellent Dāvs iii.4 (samussit-odāra-sitātapattaṃ) DN-a i.50 (˚issariya); Sdhp 429, Sdhp 591.
Sk. udāra, of which the usual P. form is ulāra (q.v.). Cp. BSk. audāra & audārika.
retired, desisting Ja v.158 (= udāvattitva nivattitva C).
pp. of udāvattate, ud + ā vattati
(adj.) indifferent, passive, neutral Dhs-a 129.
ud + āsīna, pp. of ās to sit; lit. sit apart, be indifferent
uttered, spoken; called, quoted Pp 41.
pp of udāharati
(nt.) example, instance Ja iii.401 (˚ṃ āharitvā dassento), 510; Mil 345; Snp-a 445; Vv-a 297.
fr. udāharati
to utter, recite. speak. Snp 389; Ja iii.289; DN-a i.140 (see udāhāra) ■ pp udāhaṭa (q.v.) Cp. pariy˚.
ud + ā + hṛ;
utterance, speech DN-a i.140 (˚ṃ udāhari = udānaṃ udānesi); Pp A 223,
fr. udāharati
(indecl.) disjunctive-adversative particle “or”, in direct questions DN i.157; DN ii.8; Snp 599, Snp 875, Snp 885; Ja i.20, Ja i.83; Vv-a 258 (= ādu); Pv-a 33, Pv-a 51; Mil 10 ■ The first part of the question is often introduced with kiṃ, while udāhu follows in the second (disjunctive) part, e.g. kin nakkhattaṃ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiṃ karissasi Vv-a 63; kiṃ amhehi saddhiṃ āgamissasi udāhu pacchā will you come with us or later? Dhp-a ii.96: See under kiṃ ■ Often combd with other expletive particles, e.g. udāhu ve Snp 1075, Snp 1077; udāhu no Snp 347; eva… no udāhu (so… or not) DN i.152; (ayaṃ) nu kho-udāhu (ayaṃ) is it (this)-(this) Vism 313.
uta + āho, cp. P. uda & aho and Sk. utāro
(or udī ) is artificial adj. formn. fr. udeti, meaning “rising, excelling”, in expln. of ekodi at Vism 156 (udayatī ti udi uṭṭhapetī ti attho).
1. to look at, to survey. to perceive Vin i.25 (udiccare, 3sd. pl. pres. med.) Ja v.71, Ja v.296; Vv 8121 (aor. udikkhisaṃ = ullokesiṃ Vv-a 316); Dāvs ii.109; Sdhp 308.
2. to look out for, to expect Ja i.344; Vv-a 118.
3. to envy Mil 338.
ud + īkṣ, Sk. udīkṣate
one who looks for or after DN iii.167.
n. ag. of udikkhati
(adj.) “rising”, used in a geographical sense of the N. W. country, i.e. north-westerly, of north-western origin (cp. Brethren 79, Mil trsln. ii.45 n. 1) Ja i.140, Ja i.324 Ja i.343, Ja i.373; Mil 236 ■ See also uddiya.
apparently an adjectivised ger. of udeti but distorted from & in meaning = Sk. udañc, f. udīcī northern the north
3sd. pl. pres. med. of udikkhati (q.v.).
risen, high, elevated Mil 222; (˚odita); Dāvs iv.42; Sdhp 14 (of the sun 442 (˚odita).
pp. of ud- i, see udeti
spoken, proclaimed, uttered Vuttodaya 2 (quoted by Childers in Khuddaka-pātha ed 1869, p. 22).
pp. of vad, see vadati
(nt.) utterance, saying Ja v.237; Dhs 637, Dhs 720; Mil 145.
fr. udīreti
uttered Ja iii.339; Ja v.394 = Ja v.407.
pp. of udīreti
1. to set in motion, stir up, cause Ja iii.441 (dukkhaṃ udīraye Pot. udīreyya C.); v.395 (kalahaṃ to begin a quarrel).
2. to utter, proclaim, speak, say SN i.190; Snp 632 (pot. ˚raye bhāseyya Snp-a 468); Dhp 408 (giraṃ udīraye = bhāseyya Dhp-a iv.182); Ja v.78 (vākyaṃ); Pass. udīyati (uddiyyati = Sk. udīryate) Thag 1232 (nigghoso).
ud + īreti, cp. in meaning īrita
(adj.) straight, upright, in ˚mano straight-minded DN iii.167, DN iii.168 (= uju˚ in v.l. and expln. by C.).
= *ṛtu? cp. utu & uju
(m. & nt.) a mortar Vin i.202 (+ musala pestle); Ja i.502; Ja ii.428; Ja v.49; Ja ii.161, Ja ii.335; Ud 69 (m; + musaḷa); Dhp-a ii.131 (˚sala); Vism 354 (in comp.). The relation between udukkhala and musala is seen best from the description of eating at Vism 344 and DN-a i.200, where the lower teeth play the role of ud. the upper teeth act as m., while the tongue takes the part of a hand. On this passage & other connections as well as etym. see Morris; J.P.T.S. 1893, 37.
Sk. ulukhala
(f.) part of a door (threshold?) Vin ii.148 (+ uttara-pasaka lintel of a door).
fr. udukkhala
the glomerous fig tree, Ficus Glomerata DN ii.4; Vin iv.35; AN iv.283 (˚khādika), 283 (id.), 324 (id.); Snp 5; Dhp-a i.284; Snp-a 19; Kp-a 46, Kp-a 56; Vv-a 213. Cp. odumbara.
Sk. udumbara
(ud + eti of i to go] to go out or up, to rise (of the sun), to come out, to increase Asl. 169; Vism 156 (eko udetī ti ekodi); Ja ii.33; Ja iii.324; ppr. udayaṃ Iti 85 (ādicco), & udayanto Pv-a 154 (udayante suriye = sole surgente) ■ pp.; udita (see udita1). Cp. udicca & udi.;
an aquatic animal, the otter (?) Childers s. v. doubts the identity of this creature with the regular otter, since it lives in the jungle. Is it a beaver-Vin i.186 (˚camma otter-skin, used for sandals); Cp i.102 (˚pota); Ja iii.51 sq., 335. The names of two otters at Ja iii.333 are Gambhīra-cārin and Anutīra-cārin.
Vedic udra, to uda2 water, lit. living in water; Cp. Gr. υ ̔́δρος “hydra”; Ohg. ottar = Ags. otor = E. otter Lith. ûdra = Obulg. vydra otter
water, in passage amakkhito uddena, amakkhito semhena, a. ruhirena i.e. not stained by any kind of (dirty) fluid DN ii.14; MN iii.122.
for uda2?
a kind of building (or hut), in which the sticks stand out (?) Nd i.226 = Nd ii.976 (uṭanda = Vism 25 (v.l. BB uṭṭanda).
ud + daṇḍa
gain, advantage, profit Vv 847 (see udaya); Ja v.39 (satt˚-mahāpaduma of profit to beings?).
a (metric?) variant of udaya
in compounds dukkh˚; and sukh˚. see udraya.
[ = udda + lomin beaver-hair-y ] a woollen coverlet with a fringe at each end DN i.7 (= ubhato dasaṃ uṇṇā-may’ attharaṇaṃ; keci ubhato uggata-pupphaṃ ti vadanti DN-a i.87); AN i.181. See however uddha-lomin under uddhaṃ.
to show, reveal, point out, order, inform, instruct DN ii.321 sq.; MN i.480 (read uddassessāmi for conjectured reading uddisissāmi?) ii.60 (v.l. uddiset˚) AN iv.66.
ud + dasseti, Caus. of dassati1
(nt.) a group of Suttas, used throughout the Vinaya Piṭaka with ref. to each Khandhaka, in the Saṃyutta, the Anguttara and other books (cp. Mil 407) for each group of about ten Suttas (cp. Dhs-a 27). The Uddāna gives in a sort of doggerel verse, at the end of each group the titles of the Suttas in the group. It may then be roughly rendered “summary”. If all the Uddānas were collected together, they would form a table of contents to the whole work ■ Otherwise the word has only been found used of fishes “macchuddāna” (so Ja ii.425; Dhp-a ii.132). It then means a group of fish placed apart for for sale in one lot. Perhaps a set or a batch would meet the case.
fr. ud + dā, dayati to bind: see under dāma
foundation of a wall, in stock phrase daḷh˚; etc. DN iii.101; SN v.194 = also at Ja vi.276 (= pākāra-vatthu C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. refers it to Sk. ud-vapati to dig out, and translates “moat, ditch”. The meaning “wall” or “mound” however harmonises quite well with the der. fr. “digging”, cp. E. dike → Ger. Teich. See also uddāma 2.
*udvāpa
(adj.) having a wall or embankment SN ii.106 (v.l. uddhā˚); C. expls. as apato uggatattā Ja iv.536 (so read with v.l. for T. uddhā pavatta; C expls. as tīra-mariyādā-bandhana).
fr. uddāpa
1. (adj.) “out of bounds”, unrestrained, restless Dāvs v.56 (˚sāgara).
2. (n.) wall, enclosure (either as “binding in” protecting or as equivalent of uddāpa fr. ud + vam “to throw up” in sense of to throw up earth, to dig a mound = udvapati) in phrase aṭṭāla-uddāma-parikhâdīni watchtowers enceintes, moats etc. Dhp-a iii.488.
fr. ud + dā as in uddāna, see dāma
some wild animal Ja v.416 (reading uncertain, expln. ditto).
?
= uddālaka, only as Np. Ja iv.298 sq.
the Uddāla tree, Cassia Fistula (also known as indīvara), or Cordia Myxa lit. “uprooter” Vv 67 (= vātaghātako yo rājarukkho ti pi vuccati Vv-a 43); Ja iv.301 (˚rukkha), 440; v.199 (vātaghātaka C.), 405; vi.530 (so read for uddh˚); Vv-a 197 (˚puppha = indīvara); Pv-a 169.
fr. ud + dal, see dalati
(adj.) referring to destruction or vandalism, tearing out Vin iv.169.
fr. uddālana → ud + dāleti
to tear out or off Vin iv.170; SN iv.178.
ud + dāleti, Caus. of dal, see dalati
1. pointed out, appointed, set out, put forth, proposed, put down, codified MN i.480 (pañha); Snp p.91 (id. = uddesa-matten’ eva vutta, na vibhangena Snp-a 422); Snp-a 372.
2. appointed, dedicated Ja v.393 (an ˚ṃ pupphaṃ = asukassa nāma dassāmī ti); Pv-a 50; Kp-a 138.
pp. of uddisati
(adj.) northern, northwestern (i.e. Nepalese) Ja iv.352 (˚kambala) in expln. of uddiyāna [Sk udīcīna?]. See udicca & cp. Morris in; J.P.T.S. 1889 202, and last not least Lüders in K. Z. 1920 (vol. 49) 233 sq. The word is not sufficiently cleared up yet.
Sk. udīcya?
to propose, point out, appoint, allot Dhp 353, cp. Dhp-a iv.72; Mil 94 (satihāraṃ) fut. uddisissati MN i.480 (ex conj., is probably to be changed to uddassessati, q.v.).
2. to specify Pv-a 22 (aor. uddisi), 25 (= nīyādeti, dadāti), 27 ■ Pass. uddissati to show oneself, to be seen Pv iii.212, and uddissiyati Pv-a 46 ■ pp. uddiṭṭha (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. uddisāpeti (q.v.) ■ ger. uddissa (q.v.)
ud + disati
1. to make recite Vin i.47 = Vin ii.224; Vin iv.290.
2. to dedicate Pv-a 35 (v.l. ādisati ).
Caus. II. of uddisati
(indecl.)
1. indicating, with signs or indications Ja iii.354 = Mil 230.
2. prep w. acc.: (a) (lit.) pointing to, tending towards, towards to Pv-a 250 Suraṭṭha-visayaṃ) ■ (b) (appld.) with reference to, on account of, for, concerning Pv-a 8 (pete), 17 (= ārabbha), 49 (ratanattayaṃ), 70 (maṃ), 146.
-kata allotted to, specified as, meant for (cp. odissa & odissaka) Vin i.237 (maṃsa); ii.163; DN i.166 = AN i.295 = Pp 55 (viz. bhikkhā); MN i.77; Kp-a 222; Ja ii.262, Ja ii.263 (bhatta).
orig. ger. of uddisati
(nt.) dedication Pv-a 27, Pv-a 80.
fr. uddissa
(f.) explanation, reasoning, argument Vism 27 (for ukkācanā). Uddiyati, Uddiyana
fr. ud + dīpeti
ete. see udrī˚.
vomit, spouting out, eruption Vism 261 (where id. p. at Kp-a 61 reads uggāra) ˚ṃ dadāti to vomit Vin i.277.
Sk. udreka, ud + ric
(adj.) spouting, ejecting MN ii.39 (maṇika; perhaps better to be read with v.l. as udañjanika = udañcanika fit for drawing up water).
uddeka + ana + ika
1. pointing out, setting forth, proposition, exposition, indication, programme MN iii.223 (u. uddiṭṭha), 239; SN iv.299; Snp-a 422.
2. explanation SN v.110 sq.; sa-uddesa (adj.) with (the necessary) expln. point by point, in detail, DN i.13, DN i.81; DN iii.111; AN iii.418; Iti 99; Nd ii.6171.
3. samaṇuddesa one marked as a Samaṇa, a novice (cp. sāmaṇera) DN i.151; MN iii.128; AN iv.343; uddesa-bhatta special or specified food Vin i.58 = Vin i.96, cp. ii.175, propounding, recitation, repetition Vin i.50 = Vin ii.228 (uddesena paripucchāya ovādena by recitation questioning & advice); ii.219 (˚ṃ dadāti to hold a recitation + paripucchaṃ d); AN iv.114 (+ paripucchā) v.50 sq. (pañho, u. veyyākaraṇaṃ); Nd ii.3852 (+ paripucchā); Ja i.116; Mil 257 (+ paripucchā). ek’uddesa a single repetition Vin iii.47; AN iii.67, AN iii.180; Mil 10, Mil 18.
fr. uddisati
(adj.) assigning, defining, determining, in bhatt˚ one who sorts out the food Vv-a 92.
fr. uddesa
(adj. nt.)
1. indicating, referring to, respecting, defining; (nt.) indication, definition DN ii.100 (mam ˚bhikkhusangho); Mil 159 (id.); Kp-a 29. Esp. as-˚ in phrase aṭṭha-vass’ uddesika-kāla the time referring to (or indicating) the 8th year, i.e. at the age of 8; Pv-a 67; soḷasa-vass˚; MN i.88; Ja i.456; Vv-a 259 In the same application padesika (q.v.).
2. memorial Ja iv.228 (cetiya).
fr. uddesa
(adj.) “bubbling up”, only adv. ˚ṃ in cpd. pheṇ˚; (paccamāna) boiling) under production of scum (foam) MN iii.167; AN i.141; Ja iii.46; Mil 357.
fr. ud + dih, see deha
shed, stable (?) Vin i.140; Vin ii.278; Vin iii.200; Vin iv.223.
Derivation uncertain. Cp. Müller P. Gr. 42
(adj.) in phrase uddhehi vatthehi in rich, lofty clothes Ja iv.154 (of a devatā passage may be corrupt).
possibly a combn. of aḍḍha2 & uddhaṃ; or should we read aḍḍh˚ or vuḍḍh˚?
(& Uddha˚) (indecl.) DN iii.237; SN v.69, SN v.201, SN v.205, SN v.237 SN v.285, SN v.314, SN v.378; AN i.233; AN ii.134; AN iv.14 sq., 73 sq., 146 380; v.120; Dhp 218; Th ii.12; Pp 17; Ne 190; Dhp-a iii.289; lit. up-stream at Ja iii.371.
nt. of adj. *uddha = Sk. ūrdhva high; to Idg. *ared (h) as in Lat. arduus steep or *ured as in Sk. vardhate to raise, Gr. ὀρχός straight high up, on top, above (adv. & prep.) ■ On uddhaṃ in spatial, temporal, ethical & psychological application see in detail Nd;2 155 ■ I. (adv.).-A. (of space) up aloft, on top, above (opp. adho) Vin iii.121; Kp-a 248 (= upari) ■ In contrast with adho (above → below DN i.23, DN i.153, DN i.251; Vism 176 (u. adho tiriyaṃ expld.) DN-a i.98 (see also adho) ■ Esp. with ref. to the points of the compass as “in zenith” (opp. adho “in nadir”) e.g. at DN i.222 (“straight up”); Iti 120; Ja i.20. B. (of time) in future, ahead, hence Snp 894; Nd i.303 (u vuccati anāgataṃ) ■ II. (prep. with abl. & instr.).; A. (of space) in phrase uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā (above the soles & below the scalp) DN ii.293, DN ii.294; DN iii.104; AN iii.323; AN v.109 ■ B. (of time after, hence Pv i.1012 (u. catūhi māsehi after 4 months catunnaṃ māsānaṃ upari Pv-a 52); Pv-a 147 (sattahi vassa satehi u., meaning here 700 years ago, cp. ito in similar application, meaning both past & future), 148 (sattāhato u. after a week; uttari v.l. BB.) ■ In cpds uddha˚ & uddhaṃ˚ (see below). The reading udhogalaṃ at Pv-a 104 is to corrected to adho˚ ■ III.; Note (cp Trenckner, Notes 60). In certain cases we find ubbhaṃ for uddhaṃ. Notice the foll.: ubbhaṃ yojanaṃ uggato Ja v.269; ubbhaṭṭhako hoti “standing erect” DN i.167; MN i.78; ubbhamukhu “mouth (face) upwards”, turned upwards SN iii.238; Mil 122. (1) uddha˚; in: -gāmin going upwards SN v.370 sq cchiddaka (-vātapānā) (windows) having openings above Dhp-a i.211. -pāda heels upwards either with adhosira (head down) AN iv.133, or avansira Vv 5225 (v.l.); Ja i.233. -mukha turned upwards, adv. ˚ā upwards or backwards (of a river) Mil 295 (Gangā u. sandati; in same context ubbha˚ Mil 122). -lomin “having hair on the upper side”, a kind of couch or bed (or rug on a couch Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169. So is prob. to be read for uddalomī (q.v.). -virecana action of an emetic (lit. throwing up) (opp. adho-virecana of a purgative) DN i.12 (= uddhaṃ dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ DN-a i.98); Dhp-a iii.126; Snp-a 86 -suddha clean on top Vin ii.152 ■ (2) uddhaṃ˚; in -āghātanika an after-deather, a teacher who maintains that the soul exists after death DN i.31, cp. DN-a i.119 -pāda feet up (& head down) Vv 52;25 (v.l. uddha˚) -bhāgiya belonging to the upper part (opp. oram˚): see saṃyojana. -virecana v.l. BB. at Snp-a 86 for uddha˚ -sara(ṃ) (adv.) with raised or lofty voice, lit. “sounding high” Snp 901, see Nd i.315. -sota (adj.) one who is going upwards in the stream of life [cp. BSk. ūrdhvasrotaḥ Mahāvy § 46
to fly out or up (of dust) Vv 784 na tatth’ uddhaṃsati rajo; expld. by uggacchati Vv-a 304 ■ pp uddhasta (q.v.).
ud + dhaṃsati, in lit. meaning of dhvaṃs, see dhaṃsati
(adj.)
1. standing on end (lit. with raised point). bristling, of the hair of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.18 = DN iii.144, DN iii.154.
2. prominent, conspicuous Ja iv.345 (˚rājin having prominent stripes, of a lion). 3. pointing upwards (of the lower teeth, opp. adhagga point-downwards) Ja v.156 (= heṭṭhima-danta C.). 4. lofty, beneficial (of gifts) AN ii.68 (dakkhiṇā); iii.46 (id.) see also uddhaggika.
uddha + agga
(adj.) [cp. uddhagga) aiming at or resulting in a lofty end, promoting spiritual welfare, beneficial (of gifts) DN i.51 = DN iii.66; SN i.90; AN iii.259; DN-a i.158.
(nt.) over-balancing, agitation, excitement distraction, flurry (see on meaning; Dialogues i.82; Dhs trsln. 119; Cpd. 18, 45, 83). AN i.256, AN i.282; AN iii.375, AN iii.421 AN iii.449; AN iv.87; AN v.142, AN v.145, AN v.148; DN iii.234; SN v.277 sq. DhSA 260; Snp-a 492 (in sense of “haughtiness”? for Snp 702 uṇṇata); Nd i.220, Nd i.501; Pts i.81, Pts i.83; Pts ii.9, Pts ii.97 sq. 119, 142, 145, 169, 176; Pp 18, Pp 59; Dhs 427, Dhs 429 (cittassa), 1159, 1229, 1426, 1482; Vb 168, Vb 369, Vb 372 Vb 377; Vism 137, Vism 469 (= uddhata-bhāva); Sdhp 459. Together with kukkucca “flurry or worry” u. is enumd. as the 4th of the 5th nīvaraṇa’s and as the 9th of the 10 saṃyojana’s (q.v.), e.g. at DN i.71, DN i.246; DN iii.49, DN iii.234, DN iii.269 DN iii.278; SN i.99; AN i.3; AN iii.16; AN v.30; Nd ii.379; Dhs 1486.
substantivised ger. of ud-dharati, ud + dhṛ; cp. uddhaṭa & uddhata. The BSk. auddhatya shows a strange distortion. BSk. uddhava seems to be also a substitute for uddhacca
(adj.) upright, honest MN i.386 (v.l. for pannadhaja).
uddhaṃ + ja
1. pulled out Ja ii.26.
2. pulled out destroyed, extirpated, in phrase˚ dāṭha with its fangs removed (of a snake) Ja i.505; Ja ii.259; Ja vi.6.
3. cut off or out Mil 231 (uddhaṭ-uddhaṭe ālope whenever a piece is cut off).
4. drawn out, lifted out, raised Ja i.143 sass˚kāle at the time of lifting the corn; v.49 (˚paṃsu) Cp. uddhaṭa -bīja castrated Ja ii.237.
pp. of uddharati2; see also uddhata, uddhita & uddhacca
.
1. lifted up, raised risen, high (of the sun, only in this special phrase u aruṇo) Vin ii.236; Ud 27 (vv.ll. uggata & uddhasta).; 2. unbalanced, disturbed, agitated, shaken SN i.61 (+ unnaḷa “muddled in mind & puffed up” trsl.), 204 (id. v.112 (līnaṃ cittaṃ uddhataṃ c.), 114 = Vism 133, Vism 269; AN ii.23; AN iii.391; AN v.93 sq., 142, 163; Iti 72; Thig 77 (so read with v.l., T. has uddhaṭa; Thag-a 80 explns. as nān’ ārammaṇe vikkhitta-citta asamāhita); Nd ii.433 (+ avūpasanta-citto); Pp 35 (= uddhaccena samannāgata Pp A 217). -an˚; well balanced, not shaken, calm, subdued MN i.470; AN ii.211; AN v.93 sq., 104; Snp 850 (= uddhaccavirahita Snp-a 549); Dhp 363 (= nibbutacitto Dhp-a iv.93) Ja v.203; Vv 648 ■ See also ubbhata.
pp. of uddharati1; as to its relation to uddhaṭa see remarks under uddhacca
(nt.) an oven Ja i.33, Ja i.68, Ja i.71, Ja i.346; Ja ii.133, Ja ii.277; Ja iii.178, Ja iii.425 Ja v.385, Ja v.471; Ja ii.218 (kammār˚), 574; Snp p.105; Mil 118 Mil 259; Vism 171, Vism 254; Dhp-a i.52, Dhp-a i.224; Dhp-a ii.3; Dhp-a iii.219 (˚panti); iv.176.
*ud-dhvana, fr. ud + dhvan instead of dhmā, for uddhamana (*uddhmāna Sk.), see dhamati
false doctrine Dpvs v.19.
ud + dhamma
(nt.)
1. taking up, lifting, raising Mil 307 (sass˚-samaya the time of gathering the corn; to uddharati 1. but cp. in same meaning uddhaṭa from uddharati 2). DN-a i.192.
2. pulling or drawing out (cp. uddharati 2) Vin iii.29. See also ubbahati2.
abstr. fr. uddharati
1. (in this meaning confused with ubbharati from bṛh, cp. interchange of ddh & bbh in uddha: ubbha, possibly also with; bṛh see abbahati and cp. ubbahati1). (a) to raise, rise, lift up hence: to raise too much, overbalance, shake etc.: see pp uddhata (*udbhṛta) & cp. uddhacca & uddharaṇa ■ (b) to take up, lift, to remove, take away DN i.135 (baliṃ uddhareyya raise a tax); MN i.306 (hiyaṃ); Ja i.193 (aor. poet. udaddhari = uddharitvā kaḍḍhitvā pavaṭṭesi C.); Vv-a 157 ■ Caus uddharāpeti Vin ii.180, Vin ii.181; Ja vi.95.
2. to pull out draw out (syn. with abbahati, q.v. for comparison) DN i.77 (ahiṃ karaṇḍā uddhareyya, further on ahi k. ubbhato Pv-a 115 (= abbahati); imper. uddharatha Ja ii.95 (for abbaha); Dhp 327 (attānaṃ duggā); aor. uddhari Ja iii.190 (ankena); cond. uddhare Thag 756; ger. uddharitvā DN i.234 Nd i.419; Snp-a 567; Dhp-a iv.26; Pv-a 139, & (poet.) uddhatvā Ja iv.406 (cakkhūni, so read for T. laddhatvañ cakkhūni akkhīni uddharitvā C.) ■ pp. uddhaṭa & ubbhata;.
ud + dharate of dhṛ;
īn an˚; Snp 952 see under niṭṭhurin.
see uddhasta.
attacked, perhaps “spoilt” (smothered!) in combn. with pariyonaddha (covered) at AN i.202 (T. uddhaseta expld. by upari dhaṃsita C.); ii.211 (vv.ll. uddhasotā for ˚etā & uddhaṃso) ■ Registered with; an˚; as anuddhasta in Index vol. to A, should however be read as anuddhasta (q.v.). Cp. also viddhasta.
pp. of uddhaṃseti, see dhaṃsati & cp. anuddhaṃ seti
(& ubbhāra in Vin.; e.g. ii.255, cp. 256 where ubbhata unterchanges with uddhāra) 1. taking away, withdrawal, suspension, in kaṭhin˚; (q.v. Vin i.255 sq.; Vin iii.262; Vin iv.287; Vin v.177 sq.
2. a tax levy, debt, in phrase ˚ṃ sodheti (so read for sādheti loc cit.) to clear up a debt Ja ii.341; Ja iii.106; Ja iv.45, Ja iv.247 uddhāra-sodhana (v.l. sādh˚) the clearance of a debt Ja ii.341.
3. synopsis or abstract Dpvs v.37 (atth˚ of the meaning of the Vin.); Snp-a 237 (atth˚ + pad˚).
fr. uddharati1
at Ja vi.530 is to be read uddālaka.
pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, removed Ja vi.237 (˚pphala = uddhaṭa-bīja C.).
a by-form of uddhaṭa
to shake Vv-a 279.
ud + dhunāti
(adj.) swollen, bloated, risen (of flour) AN i.140; Snp 200 (of a corpse); Snp-a 100 sq., 171; DN-a i.114. Cp. next.
pp. of uddhumāyati
(adj.) swollen, bloated, puffed up MN i.88 (of a corpse; + vinīlaka); Vism 178, Vism 193 (id.) Ja i.164 (udaraṃ ˚ṃ katvā), 420 (˚nimitta appearance of being blown up); Mil 332; Dhp-a i.307. See also subha & asubha.;
-saññā the idea of a bloated corpse AN ii.17; Dhs 263; Mil 331; cp. Dhs trsln. 69.
prec. + ka
(nt.) swollen condition Vism 178.
abstr. fr. uddhumāta
to be blown up, to swell up, rise; aor. ˚āyi Ja iii.26; Vv-a 76; ger. ˚ājitvā Ja ii.18; Dhp-a i.126 ■ pp uddhumāta & ˚āyita; (q.v.).
ud + dhmā, see dhamati & remarks on uddhacca
(nt.) puffing, blowing or swelling up Ja iv.37.
fr. uddhumāyati
(adj.) like blowing or swelling up, of blown-up appearance MN i.142 sq.
cp. uddhumāyita
swollen, bloated, puffed up Vv-a 218.
pp. of uddhumāyati
to eat MN i.306 (upacikā bījaṃ na udrabheyyuṃ; vv.ll. on p. 555: udrah˚ udah˚, udāh˚, uddhah˚, uṭṭhah˚; udraheyyun ti khādeyyuṃ C. (udrabhāsane, Dhātum.)) ■ Note. The Dhātupāṭha 212, and the Dhātu-mañjūsā, 311, explain udrabha by adane, eating.
? doubtful in form & etym.
(& Uddaya) (-˚) [perhaps a bastard form of uddaya = udaya yielding etc. The BSk. usually renders P. dd by dr. If so, then equal to adaya & uddaya;1 coming forth, result, consequence. Usually in foll. two phrases: dukkh˚; (yielding pain) & sukh˚; (giving pleasure) e.g. as dukkh˚; at MN i.415; Ja iv.398; Ja v.119 (v.l. ˚indriya); Pv i.1110 (so read for T. ˚andriya, cp. undriyati as v.l. for udāyati); Pts ii.79 (kammaṃ); as sukh˚; at Ja v.389 (v.l. ˚indriya); Dhp-a ii.47 (˚uddaya). Both dukkh & sukh˚ at Ps; i.80. Besides these in foll. combns.: kaṭuk causing bitterness Ja v.241; sa˚ with (good or evil) consequences SN ii.29; MN i.271.
(& Uddīyati) to burst, split open, break, fall to pieces Vin i.148 (vihāro udriyati); ii.174 (id); iv.254 (i); DN i.96 (˚īyissati bhijjhissati DN-a i.96, so read for udāyati); SN i.113, SN i.119. Udriyana & Uddiyana;
cp. Sk. ud dīryate, Pass of ud + dṛ; dṛṇōti, and P. darati & dalati; see also avadīyati which may be a Sanskritised oddīyati for uddīyati
(nt.) breaking or splitting open, bursting Ja i.72; Dhp-a ii.7 (˚sadda), 100 (paṭhavī-uddīyana-sadda; vv.ll. uddri˚, udri˚).
fr. udrīyati
a rat Vin i.209; Vin ii.148, Vin ii.152; Vin iii.151; Ja i.120; Mil 23, Mil 363. Spelt undūra at Vism 62.
etym ?
in phrase pīti-vegen;’unna “bubbling up with the excitement of joy” overflowing with joy Mvu 19, Mvu 29 (expld. by uggatacitta i.e. lofty, exalted C.) ■ It may however be better more in keeping with Pāli word-formation as well as with meaning & interpretation to explain the word as ud na, taking ˚na as abs. (base)-form of; nam, thus lit. “bent up”, i.e. raised, high, in meaning of unnata. Cp. the exactly similar formation, use & meaning of ninna ninnata. Thus unna / ninna would correspond to unnata / ninnata.;
pp. of ud, unatti & undati, see udaka
a species of perfume Ja vi.537 (gloss kuṭantaja).
etym.?
(adj.) in phrase ˚ṃ karoti, according to Morris JP T S 1887, 120 “to make an up-ploughing, to turn up etc.”, but more aptly with C. on Ja vi.328 to make “out-plough” (not “up-plough”) in sense of out-of-work i.e. to make the people put their ploughs (or work in general) away and prepare for a festival; to take a holiday A typical “Jātaka”-phrase; Ja i.228; Ja ii.296, Ja ii.367; iii. 129, 414; iv.355; vi.328; Dhp-a iii.10.
ud + nangala, on meaning of ud in this case see ud
raised, high, lofty, in high situation (opp. oṇata) Pv iv.66 (= sāmin Pv-a 262); Ja i.71; ii369; vi.487; Mil 146, Mil 387; DN-a i.45 See also unnaḷa.
pp. of unnamati. Besides this form we find uṇṇata in fig. special meaning, q.v.
(f) rising, lifting up, elevation Mil 387 (˚avanati).
fr. unnamati; cp. uṇṇati
to resound, shout out, roar Ja i.110; Ja ii.90; Ja iii.271, Ja iii.325; Mil 18; aor. unnadi Ja i.74; Mil 13 ■ Caus. unnādeti (q.v.).
ud + nadati
rising ground, elevation, plateau Kp vii.7 = Pv i.57 (thala unnata-padesa Pv-a 29); Mil 349; DN-a i.154.
fr ud + nam; cp. also uṇṇama in fig. meaning
to rise up, ascend Mil 117 (oṇamati + ); Vism 306 ■ Caus unnāmeti (q.v.) ■ pp. unnara & uṇṇata; (q.v.). Unnala & Unnala;
ud + namati, see uṇṇamati in fig. meaning
(adj.) showing off, insolent, arrogant, proud, haughty in phrase uddhata unnaḷa capala MN i.32; SN i.61 = SN i.204 (trsld. as “muddled in mind, puffed up, vain”, expld. as uggata-nala uddhaṭa-tuccha-māna K. S. 318); AN i.70, AN i.266 AN ii.26; AN iii.199, AN iii.355, AN iii.391; Iti 113 (+ asamāhita); Dhp 292 (+ pamatta; expld. as “māna-naḷaṃ ukkhipitvā caraṇena unnala” Dhp-a iii.452); Thag 634; Pp 35 (= uggatanaḷo tuccha-mānaṃ ukkhipitvā ti attho PugA 217).
Bdhgh. has ud + nala; but it is either a dissimilated form for *ullala (n → l change freq. cp. P. nangala → lāngala; nalāṭa → lalaṭa) from ud + lal to sport, thus meaning “sporting, sporty, wild” etc.; or (still more likely) with Kern, Toev. s. v. a dial. form of unnata P. uṇṇata, although the P. Commentators never thought of that. Cp. with this the BSk. unnata in same stock phrase uddhata unnata capala Mvu i.305, and the Marathic Prk. mula = Sk. mṛta, Pischel, Gr. § 244 To these may be added P. celakedu → cetakedu Ja vi.538
(f.) flattering, tying or pushing oneself on to somebody, begging Vism 27.
ud + nah, see nayhati
shout, shouting Ja ii.405.
fr. ud + nad
(adj.) shouting out; resounding, noisy, loud, tumultuous Vin iii.336; DN i.95, DN i.143, DN i.178; Ja ii.216.
fr. ud + nad
to make resound Ja i.408 (paṭhaviṃ), ii.34.
Caus. of unnadati
(adj) raising or rising; in combn. with ninnāmin raised & bent, high & low AN iv.237 (of cultivated land).
ud + nam in Caus. form
(unn˚) to raise Dhs-a 5; written uṇṇameti (with a for ā before mutes & liquids at Snp 206 (inf. uṃṇametave).;
Caus. of unnamati
[Vedic upa; Av. upa on, up; Gr. ὑπό under, ὑπέρ over; Lat. sub fr. *(e)ks-upo; Goth. uf under & on; Ohg ūf = Ags. up = E. up; Oir. fo under. See also upari prefix denoting nearness or close touch (cp. similarly ā) usually with the idea of approach from below or rest on top, on, upon, up, by ■ In compn. a upa is always contracted to upa, e.g. devūpaṭṭhāna, lokûpaga, puññûpatthambhita-Meanings: (1) (Rest): on upon, up-˚kiṇṇa covered over; ˚jīvati live on (cp. anu˚); ˚tthambhita propped up, sup-ported; ˚cita heaped up, ac-cumulated ˚dhāreti hold or take up; ˚nata bent on; ˚nissaya foundation; ˚nissita depending on etc ■ (2) (Aim): (out up to (the speaker or hearer); cp. the meanings developed out of this as “higher, above” in upara, upari, upama Lat. superus, supremus E. g. ˚kaḍḍhati drag on to; ˚kappati come to, accrue; ˚kappana ad-ministering; ˚kāra service to; ˚kkhata administered; ˚gacchati go to, ap-proach (cp. upâtigacchati); ˚disati ad-vise; ˚dhāvati run up to ˚nadati to sound out; ˚nikkhamati come out up to; ˚nisevita gone on to or after; ˚neti bring on to; etc ■ (3 (Nearness): close by, close to, near, “ad-”; e.g. ˚kaṇṇaka close to the ear; ˚cāra ap-plication; ˚ṭṭhāna at-tending ṭṭhita ap-proached; ˚tiṭṭhati stand by, look after; ˚dduta urged; ˚nāmeti place close to; ˚nibandhati tie close to ˚nisīdati sit close to or down by ■ (4) (Intensive use) quite, altogether, “up”; e.g. ˚antika quite near; ˚chindati cut up ■ (5) (Diminutive use as in Lat. subabsurdus Gr. ὑπόλευκος whitish; Oir. fo-dord; Cymr. go-durdd murmur): nearly, about, somewhat, a little, secondary by-, miniature, made after the style of, e.g. ˚aḍḍha about half; ˚kacchaka like a little hollow; ˚kaṇḍakin (= ˚paṇḍukin? whitish); ˚deva a minor god; ˚nibha somewhat similar to; ˚nila bluish; upapurohita minor priest uparajja viceroyalty; upalohitaka, uparopa; ˚vana a little forest. etc. Note. The nearest semantie affinity of upa is ā˚.
(-˚) found only in combn. kulūpaka where second k stands for g. through assimilation with first k. Only with ref. to a bhikkhu = one who frequents a certain family (for the purpose of getting alms), a family friend, associate Vin i.192, Vin i.208; Vin iii.84; SN ii.200 sq.; AN iii.258 sq.; Nd ii.3851; Pv iii.85; Pv-a 266 ■ f. kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; Vin iv.66 ■ Sporadic in gayhūpaka (for ˚ûpaga) at Ja iv.219.
for ˚upaga
(˚-) only in combn. with ˚antare lit. “in between the hips or loins or arm-pits” in 3 phrases (cp. Kern, Toev. ii.140 s. v.), viz. upakacchantare katvā taking (it) between the legs Ja i.63, Ja i.425 khipitvā throwing (it) into the armpits Ja v.211 & ṭhapetvā id. Ja v.46.
upa + kacchā2
(1) [ = upa + kaccha1 + ka] like an enclosure adj. in the form of a hollow or a shelter Ja i.158 (2) [ = upa + kacchā2 + ka] like the armpit, a hollow usually the armpit, but occasionally it seems to be applied to the hip or waist Vin iii.39; Vin iv.260 (pudendum muliebre); Mil 293; Ja v.437 (= kaccha2).
upa + kacchā + ka, cp. Sk. upakakṣa in diff. meaning
(adj.) approaehing, near Ja iv.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha-majjhantikā till nearly noon). Usually in foll. two phrases: upakaṭṭhe kāle when the time was near, i.e. at the approach of meal time Vin iv.175; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 294; and upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya as Lent was approaching Vin i.253; Pv-a 42; Vv-a 44. Cp. vūpakaṭṭha ■ loc. upakaṭṭhe as adv. or prep. “near, in the neighbourhood of” Nd ii.639 (= santike); Dāvs v.41 (so read for upakaṇṭhe).
pp. of upa + karś to draw up or near to
to drag or pull on to (w. dat.), or down to DN i.180 (+ apakaḍḍhati); iii.127 (id.); MN i.365; SN i.49; SN ii.99; Dhp 311 (nirayāya = niraye nibbattapeti Dhp-a iii.484).
upa + kaḍḍhati, cp. upakaṭṭha
at Dāvs v.41 is to be corrected to upakaṭṭha.
(Pv ii.113) see under uppaṇḍukin.
(˚-) lit. (spot) near the ear, only in oblique cases or in der. ˚ka (q.v.) Thag 200 (upakannamhi close to the ear, under the ear).
upa + kaṇṇa
(adj.) [upa + kaṇṇa + ka) by the ear, being at or on the ear of somebody, only in loc. as adv. upakaṇṇake secretly Vin i.237; Vin ii.99; Vin iv.20, Vin iv.271; SN i.86; AN iii.57; Snp-a 186; and in cpd. ˚jappin one who whispers into the ear (of another), spreader of reports AN iii.136. Cp. kaṇṇajappaka & kaṇṇajappana.;
intrs.) to be beneficial to (w. dat.), to serve, to accrue SN i.85; Pv i.44 (= nippajjati Pv-a 19); i.57 (petānaṃ); i.104 (= viniyujjati Pv-a 49) Ja v.350; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 29 (petānaṃ), 27 (id.), 241; Sdhp 501, Sdhp 504.
upa + kappati
(nt.) profit Pv-a 29 (dān˚), 49 (an˚).
fr. upakappati
(adj.) profitable Ja i.398; Dhp-a ii.133.
fr. upakappana
(nt.) help, service, support; means of existence, livelihood DN ii.340; AN ii.86; Ja i.7; Pv-a 60 (commodities), 133 (˚manussa, adj. suitable, fit) Sdhp 69. In general any instrument or means of achieving a purpose, viz. apparatus of a ship Ja iv.165; tunnavaya˚ a weaver’s outfit Ja ii.364; dabb˚; fit to be used as wood Vism 120; dān˚; materials for a gift Pv-a 105 (so read & cp. upakkhaṭa); nahān˚; bathing requisites Vv-a 248 vitt˚ luxuries AN v.264 sq., 283, 290 sq.; Pv-a 71.
fr. upa + kṛ;
to do a service, serve, help, support Thig 89 (aor. upakāsiṃ = anugaṇhiṃ santappesiṃ Thag-a 88) ■ pp. upakkhaṭa (q.v.).
upa + karoti
service, help, benefit, obligation, favour DN iii.187 sq.; Vv-a 68; Pv-a 8 Pv-a 18 (˚āya hoti is good for); Sdhp 283, Sdhp 447, Sdhp 530. bahūpakāra (adj.) of great help, very serviceable or helpful SN iv.295; Pv-a 114. upakāraṃ karoti to do a favour, to oblige Pv-a 42, Pv-a 88, Pv-a 159 (kata); katûpakāra one to whom a service has been rendered Pv-a 116.
-āvaha useful, serviceable, doing good Pv-a 86.
fr. upa + kṛ; cp. upakaraṇa
(adj.) serviceable, helping, effective Ja v.99; Vism 534 ■ f. upakārikā 1. benefactress helper Ja iii.437.
2. fortification (strengthening of the defence) on a city wall DN i.105, see DA i.274 & cp parikkhāra; MN i.86 (= Nd ii.1996).
3. (philosophy) cause (that which is an aid in the persistence or happening of any given thing) Tikapaṭṭhāna i.11
fr. upakāra
(adj.-n.) a benefactor Ja iii.11; DN-a i.187; Sdhp 540 Sdhp 546.
fr. upakāra; cp. ASk. upakārin Jtm. 3142
strewn over with (-˚), covered Vv 351 (rucak˚, so read for rājak˚; expld by okiṇṇa Vv-a 160).
pp. of upakirati
(f.) implement, ornament Ja v.408.
fr. upa + kr
to sing to (of birds) Ja iv.296 (kūjantaṃ u. = replies w. song to the singing) ■ pp upakūjita (q.v.).
upa + kūjati
(-˚) resounding, filled with the hum or song of (birds) Ja iv.359; Pv-a 154.
pp. of upakūjati
embankment, a river’s bank, riverside Ja vi.26 (rukkh’ûpakūlaje the trees sprung up at its bank).
upa + kūla
used of the nose in old age Thig 258 (jarāya paṭisedhikā viya says the commentary Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 74 trsls. obstructed; Mrs Rh. D. in “Sisters” takes it for upakūḷita and trsls. seared and shrivelled. So also Ed. Müller JR A S. 1919. 538 This is probably right; but Oldenberg, Pischel and Hardy all read upakūlita.
derivation uncertain
singed, boiled, roasted Ja i.405 (“half-roasted” = aḍḍhajjhāmaka C.) See also upakūsita.
pp. of kūḍ, a variant of kuth, kvathati
at Ja ii.134 is perhaps faulty for ˚kūḷita, which is suggested by C. expln. “kukkule jhāmo” and also by v.l. ˚kuṭhita (for kuṭṭhita boiled, sweltering, hot). The variant (gloss) ˚kūjita may have the same origin, viz ˚kūḷita, was however interpreted (v.l. BB.) by ˚kupita (meaning “shaken, disturbed by fire”).
see uppakka.
1. attacked by (-˚) Mil 112.
2. attacking, intriguing or plotting against (loc. DN-a i.140.
pp. of upakkamati
(1) lit. (a) going to, nearing, approach (-˚) Vv-a 72 ■ (b) attack Vin ii.195; Mil 157; DN-a i.69, DN-a i.71 ■ (2) applied (a) in general: doing acting, undertaking, act SN i.152 = Snp p.126 ■ (b) in special: ways, means, i.e. either good of helpful means expedient, remedy Snp 575; Mil 151, Mil 152; or bad or unfair means, treachery, plotting Thag 143; Ja iv.115 (punishment); Mil 135, Mil 176.
fr. upa + kram
to go on to, i e. (1) to attack MN i.86 = Ud 71 ■ (2) to undertake Vin iii.110, Vin iii.111 ■ (3) to begin Vin iv.316; DN-a i.318.
upa + kamati of kram
(nt.) going near to, attacking Ja iv.12.
fr. upa + kram
a buyer, hawker, dealer combd. with bhataka Dhp-a i.119 = Ud 23 (C. expls. by “yo kahāpaṇâdīhi kiñci kināti so upakkitako ti vuccati”) Pts ii.196 (? T. upakkhittaka).
fr. upa + krī to buy
soiled, stained, depraved, impure SN i.179; AN i.207 (citta) Vism 13.
pp. of upa + klid or kliś, cp. kilesa & next
anything that spoils or obstructs, a minor stain, impurity, defilement, depravity, Vin ii.295 (cp. Snp-a 487 & Vv-a 134 & see abbha); MN i.36, MN i.91; DN iii.42 sq., 49 sq., 201; SN v.92 sq. (pañca cittassa upakkilesā), 108, 115; AN i.10 (āgantuka), 207 (cittassa), 253 (oḷārika etc.); ii.53 (candima-suriyānaṃ samaṇa-brāhmaṇānaṃ), 67; iii.16 (jātarūpassa, cittassa), 386 sq.; iv.177 (vigatā); v.195; Pts i.164 (eighteen); Pp 60; Dhs 1059 Dhs 1136; Ne 86 sq., 94, 114 sq.; Sdhp 216, Sdhp 225 (as upaklesa). Ten stains at Vism 633.
fr. upa + kliś
blamed, reproached, censured, faulty DN i.113 (an˚); Snp p.115 (id.); Ja iii.523; DN-a i.211.
pp. of upakkosati
censure, reproach Ja vi.489.
fr. upa + kruś
to scold, reprove, blame DN i.161; Ja iii.436, Ja iii.523; Ja iv.81, Ja iv.317, Ja iv.409. Upakkhata & ta;
upa + kosati
done as a favour or service, given, prepared, administered DN i.127 (= sajjita DN-a i.294); Pv ii.84 (= sajjita Pv-a 107); Ja vi.139; Mil 156.
pp. of upakaroti
to stumble, trip DN ii.250; MN ii.209; AN iii.101; Ja iii.433.
upa + khalati
(nt.) stumbling, tripping Vism 500.
fr. prec.
at Pts ii.196 see upakk˚.
lit. upper (side of the) trunk, back, shoulder Ja iv.210 (= khandha C.).
upa + khandha
(always as ˚ûpaga) (adj.)
1. going to, getting to, reaching, in phrases kāy˚, SN ii.24; ākās’ānañc’ āyatan˚ etc. Pts i.84; kāy˚ SN ii.24; brahmalok˚ Pv ii.1319 yathākamm˚ DN i.82.
2. coming into, experiencing, having as vikappan˚ according to option Vin iv.283; phal˚ bearing fruit, & pupph˚ having flowers, in flower Pv-a 275.; 3. attached to, belonging to, being at Ja i.51 (hatth˚) Vv-a 12 (id. + pādûpaga).
4. in phrase gayh˚; lit. “accessible to the grip”, acquisition of property, theft Ja iv.219 (T. gayhûpaka); Mil 325; Dhp-a ii.29; Pv-a 4.
upa + ga
1. to come to, go to, approach, flow to (of water) DN ii.12; Pv-a 12 (vasanaṭṭhānaṃ), 29, 32 (vāsaṃ) 132; ger. ˚gantvā Pv-a 70 (attano santikaṃ), & ˚gamma SN ii.17, SN ii.20.
2. to undergo go (in) to, to begin, undertake Snp 152 (diṭṭhiṃ anupagamma); Ja i.106 (vassaṃ); Pv-a 42 (id.); Ja i.200; niddaṃ upagacchati to drop off into sleep Pv-a 43 (aor. upagacchi MSS. ˚gañchi), 105, 128 ■ pp. upagata (q.v.).
upa + gacchati
(f.) taking up, keeping up. meditating Mil 37.
abstr. of upa + gṛh
to take up (for meditation) Mil 38.
upa + gaṇhāti
1. gone to, come, approached (intrs.) Snp 708 (āsan˚ = nisinna Snp-a 495) Pv-a 77 (santikaṃ), 78, 79 (petalokaṃ), 123.
2. undergoing coming or come under, overpowered, suffering Nd ii.under asita (= ajjhupagata in same conn. at AN v.187) Pv i.1110 (khuppipās˚); Pv-a 60 (= abhibhūta).
pp. of upagacchati
(nt.) approaching, going or coming to, undergoing, undertaking Vin ii.97 (+ ajjhupag˚) Ne 27; Vism 600; Pv-a 42 (vass˚).
fr. upa + gam
(adj.) going to, one who goes to (with acc.) Pv-a 168 (= ˚upaga).
fr. upagamana
flowing out, spat or slobbered out Ja v.471 (˚khelo; v.l. paggharita).
pp. of upagaḷati
(adj.) going to, undergoing, experiencing AN ii.6 (jāti jar˚).
fr. upa + gam, cp. ˚upaga
to embrace Ja i.346, Ja i.349; Ja ii.424; Ja iii.437; Ja v.157, Ja v.328, Ja v.384 ■ ger. upaguyha Ja vi.300.
upa + gūhati
scented, smelled, kissed Ja vi.543 (C. sīsamhi upasinghita).
pp. of next
to smell at, in sense of “to kiss” Ja v.328 (also inf. upagghātuṃ).
upa + ghrā, see ghāyati1
knocked or knocking against Ja i.26 (v.179).
pp. of upaghaṭṭeti
hurting, injuring, injury MN iii.237; SN ii.218; SN iv.323 sq.; AN iii.173; Thag 583; Mil 274, Mil 307, Mil 347; DN-a i.273. an˚; not hurting others, kindness Dhp 185.
fr. upa + (g)han, cp. ghāta
(nt.) hurting Dhp-a iii.237 (an˚).
fr. upaghāta
(adj.) injuring, offending Vin ii.13.
fr. upaghāta
(adj.) hurting, injuring Ja iii.523.
fr. upaghāta
heaping up, gathering, accumulation, heap. As t.t. with ref. to kamma “conservation”, with ref. to body & form “integration” (See discussion & defin. at; Cpd. 253; Dhs trsl. 195). DN i.76 (= odana = kummās’ûpacayo, see under kāya) Dhs 582, Dhs 642 (rūpassa u. = āyatanānaṃ ācayo), 864 Vb 147, Vb 151 sq.; Kv 520; Ne 113; Vism 449; DN-a i.220; Pv-a 198 (but v.l. paccayassa preferable).
fr. upa + ci, cp. caya & ācaya
to deal with, handle, use Ja vi.180 ■ pp. upaciṇṇa & upacarita; (q.v.).
upa + carati
practised, served, enacted, performed Mil 359, Mil 360.
pp. of upacarati
1. approach, access Vin ii.120, Vin ii.152; Vin iv.304; Ja i.83, Ja i.172; Dhs-a 328 (phal˚).
2. habit practice, conduct Vin ii.20 (dassan˚); Snp-a 140 (id.); Ja iii.280.
3. way, means application, use of (esp. of spells etc.) Ja iii.280 (mantassa); vi.180; Mil 153, Mil 154 (dur˚ an evil spell); Vv-a 127 (gram. t.t. kāraṇ˚).
4 entrance, access, i.e. immediate vicinity or neighbourhood of (-˚) Ja iv.182 (nagar˚); usually as gām˚; Vin i.109 Vin iii.46; Vin iv.230; Kp-a 77; Snp-a 83, Snp-a 179.
5. attention attendance Vin iv.272; Ja vi.180; Mil 154.
6. civility polite behaviour Ja ii.56; Ja vi.102.
7. On upacāra as philos, t.t. and its relation to appanā see Dhs trsln. 53 54; Cpd. 55; Mystic p. xi. Thus used of samādhi (neighbourhood-, or access-concentration, distinguishing it from appanā-samādhi) at Vism 85, Vism 126, Vism 144 and passim.
fr. upa + car
(f.) the termite or white ant Vin ii.113 Vin ii.148, Vin ii.152; Vin iii.151; MN i.306; Ja iii.320; Ja iv.331; Mil 363 Mil 392; Vism 62, Dhp-a ii.25; Dhp-a iii.15.
connected with Sk. upadīkā, although the relation is not quite clear. Attempts at explns. by Trencker Notes 62 (*utpādikā → upatikā → upacikā) & Kern,; Toev. p. 102 (upacikā = Vedic upajīka, this fr. upajihikā for ˚dihikā, vv.ll. upadehihā & upadīkā). It may however be a direct der. from upa + ; ci, thus meaning “making heaps, a builder”
used, frequented, known (as value) Ja vi.180.
pp. of upacarati
1. heaped up, accumulated, collected, produced (usually of puñña merit, & kamma karma) Snp 697; Kp-a 132; Snp-a 492; Vv-a 7, Vv-a 271, Vv-a 342; Pv-a 30, Pv-a 150.
2. built up, conserved (of the body Mil 232; DN-a i.220.
pp. of upacināti
(nt.) storing up, accumulation Dhs 431.
abstr. fr. upacita
1. to collect, heap up, accumulate (puññaṃ or pāpaṃ) Vv-a 254; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 241.
2. to concentrate pay attention Thag 199 (C. upacetuṃ for ocetuṃ T.); Ja v.339 (= oloketi) ■ Pass. upaciyyati Thag 807 ■ pp. upacita (q.v.).
upa + ci
(q.v.) “flying up” (= uppatitvā Pv-a 103) at Thig 248 (= Thag-a 205, where v.l. and gloss upecca & upacca, expl;d. by upanetvā), as well as at Pv ii.717 (= Pv-a 103 where read upaccha; & gloss upacca & upecca).;
3rd sg. pret. of upâtigacchati (q.v.) to escape, pass, go by; to overcome Snp 333 (mā upaccagā = mā atikkami Snp-a 339) = Thig 5 (= mā atikkami Thag-a 12); Snp 636, Snp 641, Snp 827 (= accagā atikkanta Nd i.167); Dhp 315, Dhp 412, Dhp 417 (= atikkanta Dhp-a iv.225); Bv ii.43 ■ pl. upaccaguṃ SN i.35; AN iii.311.
upa + ati + agā of gam
(?) in phrase “akkhīni upacciṃsu” at Ja vi.187 is probably faulty for apaciyiṃsu aor. of apaciyyati, Pass of apacināti (cp. upaciyyati → upacināti) “the eyes failed” lost power, went bad; cp. apacaya falling off, diminution If not this reading we should suggest upacchijjiṃsu from upacchindati “were destroyed”, which however is not quite the sense wanted.
to break up or off, to destroy, interrupt, to stop Snp 972 (pot. ˚chinde); Ja iv.127; Nd i.502; Thag-a 267; Pv-a 31 (kulavaṃso upacchijji aor. pass.); Vism 164, Vism 676 (bhavangaṃ).
upa + chindati
cut off, interrupted Ja i.477; Mil 306.
pp. of upacchindati
to throw at MN i.364 (vv.ll. ˚chumbh˚, ˚cubh˚).
upa + chubhati from kṣubh or chubh, see chuddha, khobha, nicchubhati, nicchodeti
breaking or cutting off, destruction, stoppage, interruption MN i.245, MN i.327 (pāṇ murder); Ja i.67; Mil 134 (paveṇ˚ break of tradition Pv-a 82 (kulavaṃs˚); Dhp-a i.152 (āhār ˚ṃ karoti to prevent fr. taking food); DN-a i.136, DN-a i.159.
fr. upa + chid
(adj.-n.) destroying, breaking off, stopping, interrupting Ja i.418 (vacan˚); iv.357; DN-a i.69 (jīvit’ indriy˚); Vv-a 72 (id.).
fr. upaccheda
to learn, acquire or have knowledge of (w. gen. or instr.), to know Vin i.272 (saṃyamassa); ii.181 (gharāvās’atthena); AN i.50 (dvinnaṃ dhammānaṃ upaññāsin) ■ fut. upaññissati (& upaññassati; Snp 716) Snp 701, Snp 716 (= upaññayissati kathayissati Snp-a 498); Ja v.215 ■ pp. upaññāta (q.v.).
upa + jānāti
to live on (w. acc.), to depend on, to live by somebody, to be supported by (acc.) DN i.228; SN i.217; Snp 612 sq.; Thag 943; Ja iii.309, Ja iii.338 Ja iv.271 (= anujīvati); Pv ii.950 (Ankuraṃ u. ti taṃ nissāya jīvanti Pv-a 134); Mil 231.
upa + jīvati
(adj.) Sdhp 501 (see next).
= upajīvin
(-˚) (adj.-n.) living on, subsisting by AN ii.135 (phal˚); Snp 217 (para-datt˚), Ja i.227 (vohār˚); iv.380; Pp 51; Mil 160 (Satth˚); Vv-a 141 (sipp˚). f. upajīvinī in rūp˚ (itthi) a woman earning her living by her beauty (i.e. a courtesan) Mil 122; Pv-a 46; cp. kiliṭṭha-kamm˚ gaṇikā Pv-a 195.
fr. upa + jīv
(nt.) stake at game Ja vi.192.
upa + jūta
see next.
a spiritual teacher or preceptor, master. Often combd. with ācariya e.g. Vin i.119; Nd i.350; the ācariya being only the deputy or substitute of the upajjhāya. Vin i.45, Vin i.53, Vin i.62, Vin i.120; iv. 130; SN i.185; AN ii.66, AN ii.78; AN iii.69; Snp-a 346; Dhp-a ii.93; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 230 ■ A short form of upajjhāya is upajjha, found in the Vinaya, e.g. at Vin i.94; Vin iii.35 with f. upajjhā Vin iv.326.
Vedic upādhyāya, upa + adhi + i, līt. “one who is gone close up to”
found out, learnt, known Vin i.40; Ja v.325, Ja v.368; AN i.61.
pp. of upajānāti
pained, terrified; overcome, overwhelmed Ja vi.82 (visavegena). Upatthapeti & tthapeti;
upa + aṭṭita, from ard, see aṭṭita
1. to provide, procure, get ready, put forth, give Vin ii.210; DN ii.19; MN i.429; Ja i.266; Ja iv.2; Ja v.218; Pp 59, Pp 68; Mil 15, Mil 257, Mil 366 (pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ), 397; DN-a i.270; Sdhp 356.
2. to cause to be present Vin i.45; SN i.170; Pv iv.170.
3. to cause to be waited on or to be nursed AN v.72 (gilānaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ vā upaṭṭhāpetuṃ vā).
4. to keep (a servant) for hire Vin ii.267. 5. to ordain Vin i.62, Vin i.83. Upatthahati & tthati;
Caus. II. of upaṭṭhahati
1 (trs.) to stand near or at hand (with acc.), to wait on attend on, serve, minister, to care for, look after, nurse (in sickness) Vin i.50, Vin i.302; Vin iv.326; MN iii.25; SN i.167; AN iii.94; AN v.72; Snp 82 = Snp 481 (imper. ˚ṭṭhahassu); Ja i.67 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahamāna), 262 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahanto); iv.131; v.396 Dpvs ii.16; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 20 ■ aor. upaṭṭhahi Pv-a 14, Pv-a 42 Pv-a 82 ■ inf. upaṭṭhātuṃ AN v.72; Pv-a 20 ■ ger. upaṭṭhahitvā Pv-a 76 ■ grd. upaṭṭhātabba Vin i.302; Pv-a 20 ■ pp. upaṭṭhita (q.v.).
2. (intrs.) to stand out or forth, to appear, to arise, occur, to be present MN i.104 sq.; AN iv.32; Ja iv.203 (mante anupaṭṭhahante since the spell did not occur to him); v.207; Mil 64; Thag-a 258. aor. upaṭṭhāsi Ja i.61; Ja iv.3; Pv-a 42 ■ Caus. I. upaṭṭheti; Caus. II. upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti; (q.v.) ■ Pass upaṭṭhīyati Ja iv.131 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhiyamāna), & upaṭṭhahīyati AN iii.94 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahiyamāna).
upa + sthā, cp. upatiṭṭhati
a servitor, personal attendant, servant, “famulus” Ānanda was the last u. of Gotama Buddha (see D i.206 Thag 1041 f.; Thag-a in Brethren loc. cit.; Vin i.179 (Sāgato u.), 194; ii.186; iii.66; iv.47; DN i.150 (Nāgita) SN iii.113; AN i.121; AN iii.31, AN iii.189; Ja i.15, Ja i.100 (a merchant’s) ii.416; Pp 28; Dhp-a ii.93; Vv-a 149; Pv-a 211 ■ agg˚ main follower, chief attendant DN ii.6; gilān˚; an attendant in sickness, nurse Vin i.303; AN i.26; saṅgh˚; one who looks after the community of Bhikkhus Vin i.216; AN i.26 AN iii.39 ■ dupaṭṭhāka & supaṭṭhāka; a bad (& good) attendant Vin i.302.
-kula a family entertaining (or ministering to) a thera or a bhikkhu, a family devoted to the service of (gen. Vin i.83 (Sāriputtassa), 213; iii.62, 66, 67; iv.283, 286; Vv-a 120.
fr. upa + sthā, cp. BSk. upasthāka Mvu i.251, and upasthāyaka Divy 426; Avs. i.214; ii.85 112.
(nt.)
1. attendance, waiting on, looking after, service, care, ministering AN i.151, AN i.225; Snp 138; Ja i.226, Ja i.237, Ja i.291; Ja ii.101; Ja iv.138; Ja vi.351; Pts i.107; Pts ii.7 sq., 28, 230; Pv-a 104, Pv-a 145 (paccekabuddhassa), 176; Vv-a 75 (ther˚); Sdhp 560.
2. worship (divine) service DN iii.188 sq. (˚ṃ gacchati); Pv-a 122. Buddh˚; attendance on a Buddha Pv-a 93; Thag-a 18. 3. a state room Ja iii.257.
-sambhāra means of catering, provisions Pv-a 20. -sālā hall for attendance, assembly room, chapel [cp. BSk upasthāna-śālā Divy 207] Vin i.49, Vin i.139; Vin ii.153, Vin ii.208; iii. 70 (at Vesālī); iv.15, 42; DN ii.119 (at Vesālī); SN ii.280 SN v.321; AN ii.51, AN ii.197; AN iii.298; Dhp-a i.37, Dhp-a i.38; Dhp-a iii.413.
fr. upa + sthā
(nt.) attendance, service Vin iv.291.
fr. upa + sthā
1. furnished provided, served got ready, honoured with Snp 295 (˚asmiṃ yaññasmiṃ) Ja v.173 (annena pānena); Pv i.52 (= sajjita paṭiyatta Pv-a 25); ii.98 (= payirupāsita Pv-a 116); Pv-a 132. 2. come, come about, appeared, arrived; present, existing Snp 130 (bhattakāle upaṭṭhite when mealtime has come) 898; Dhp 235; Mil 274; Pv-a 124 (dānakāle ˚e). 3. standing up (ready), keeping in readiness MN i.77; AN ii.206; Snp 708 (= ṭhito C.); Pv ii.953 (ready for service serving, waiting upon cp. Pv-a 135.
-sati with ready attention, one whose attention is fixed concentrated Vin i.63; DN iii.252, DN iii.282; SN iv.186; AN iii.251; Pp 25.
pp. of upaṭṭhahati or upatiṭṭhāti, cp. BSk. upasthita Divy 281, Divy 342
to make serve or attend; sakkaccaṃ u. (with acc.) to bestow respect (upon) Vin iv.275. fut. ˚essati Vin iv.291. to place, fix (parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā) Vibh. 244.
Caus. of upaṭṭhahati
to be burnt up Mil 277.
upa + ḍayhati
(adj.-n..) half Vin i.281 (˚kāsina); ii.200 (˚āsana); Ja iii.11 (˚rajja); Vism 320 (˚gāma); Dhp-a i.15 Dhp-a i.205 (˚uposathakamma); ii.85; Kp-a 239 (˚gāthā); Snp-a 298; Vv-a 38, Vv-a 61, Vv-a 120; Pv-a 209, Pv-a 276.
upa + aḍḍha, used abs. whereas aḍḍha only in compn., cp. also BSk. upārdha Divy 86, Divy 144 Divy 514; AvS i.211, 240
to be vexed or tormented Ja v.90; Dhs-a 42.
upa + tappati1)
vexation, trouble Vism 166.
fr. upa + tap
(nt.) vexation, tormenting, torture Ja iv.13; Thag-a 243.
upa + tāpana
(adj.) causing pain, molesting Ja ii.224.
fr. upatāpa
to cause pain, to vex, torment, harass Ja ii.178, Ja ii.224; Ja iv.11; Dhs-a 42 (vibādhati + ).
upa + tāpeti
lit. “to stand by”, to look after, to worship Pv iii.118; Ja ii.73 (ādiccaṃ = namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.); Mil 231 (ger ˚tiṭṭhitvā); Ja v.173 (˚tiṭṭhate). pp. upaṭṭhita (q.v.).
upa + sthā, cp. upaṭṭhahati, ˚ṭṭhāti etc.
smeared, spread over MN i.343; Ja i.399.
upa + akta, pp. of añj
- 1. stiff Vin iii.37 (angāni).
2. supported or held up by, resting on, founded on, relying on Thag 1058, Thag 1194 Thag 2, Thag 72 (yobbanena); Ja i.47 (v. 267: mettābalena); v. 121 301; Kv 251 (cakkhu dhamm˚ “when it is the medium of an idea”); Ne 117; Mil 110 (kāruñña-bal˚).
upa + thaddha, pp. of upatthambhati
1. a support, prop, stay Mil 355, Mil 415, Mil 417; Sdhp 565.
2. relief, ease Vin iii.112.
3. encouragement Ja v.270; Dhp-a i.279.
fr. upa + stambh
(adj. nt.) [fr. upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining Dhs-a 153.
(nt.) = upatthambha Mil 36; Ja i.447; DN-a i.124; Thag-a 258; Vism 279.
propped up, supported, sustained Ja i.107; Mil 36; DN-a i.234; Pv-a 117 (puñña-phal˚), 148 (utu-āhārehi u.).
pp. of upatthambheti
to make firm, shore up, support, prop up Ja i.127 [ppr ˚ayamāna), 447; DN-a i.113; Dhp-a iii.73 (˚ayamāna ppr.). pp. upatthambhita.
upa + thambheti, Caus. of thambhati
a (floor) covering, carpet, rug DN i.103 (rath˚); Ja ii.126 (pabbat˚); ii.534.
fr. upa + stṛ;
a cushion Ja vi.490, Ja vi.513.
for upadheyya, see Trenckner, Notes 6216
one who shows Pp 49 (where upadhaṃsita is to be corrected to upad˚, as already pointed out by Morris J P T S. 1887, 126. The word seems to be a crux to commentators, philologists and translators, like upadaṃseti. Kern, Toev. s. v. keeps to the reading upah˚, tries to connect it with Sk. dharṣati & trsl;s. “one who confirms”. The Pp A leaves the word unexplained).
n. ag. fr. upadaṃseti
to cause to appear, to manifest MN ii.120; SN i.64, SN i.65 (of gods, to become resplendent, to show divers colour-tones); AN ii.84 = AN iii.139 = AN iii.264 = Pp 49 (to show pleasure); Th i.335, to bring forth (a goad, and so incite, urge on); Vin iv.309.
= upadasseti with ˚aṃs˚ for ˚ass˚ like dhanseti = Sk. dharṣayati, haṃsa = harṣa etc. only in poetical passages
(upa + dasseti, Caus. of drś, cp. also upadaṃseti] to make manifest, to show Mil 276, Mil 316, Mil 347.
to put down, supply, furnish, put on; give, cause, make Vin iv.149; DN ii.135 (vippaṭisāraṃ); AN i.203 (dukkhaṃ); Mil 109, Mil 139, Mil 164, Mil 286 Mil 383. grd. pass. ˚dahātabba to be given or caused Vin ii.250 = AN iii.197 (vippaṭisāra). Cp. upadhi.
upa + dahati1
(adj.) (-˚) giving, bestowing Sdhp 319.
fr. upa + dā
pointed out, put forth, specified Mil 144 (pañha).
pp. of upadisati
to point out, show, advise, specify Ja v.457 (sippaṃ); Mil 21 (dhamma-maggaṃ) ■ pp upadiṭṭha (q.v.).
upa + disati
to be seen (open), to be shown up, to be found out or discovered Snp 140 (pres. upadissare = ˚nti Snp-a 192).
upa + dissati
a secondary, lesser, minor god Pv-a 136.
upa + deva, on use of upa in this meaning see upa 5
pointing out, indication, instruction, advice Pv-a 26 (tadupadesena read for tadupād˚; Kp-a 208 differs at id. p.); Kp-a 100; Sdhp 227.
fr. upadisati
lit. rushing on; accident, misfortune, distress, oppression SN ii.210; AN i.101; Snp 51; Dhp 338 (an˚); Dhp-a i.16; Sdhp 267, Sdhp 398.
upa + dava2 of dru
to annoy, trouble DN-a i.213 ■ pp. upadduta (q.v.).
fr. upa + dru
overrun, oppressed, annoyed, overcome, distressed Vin ii.170; Vin iii.144, Vin iii.283; SN ii.210 SN iv.29; Ja i.26, Ja i.61, Ja i.339; Ja ii.102; Ja iv.324, Ja iv.494; Pv ii.108 Vism 24 (= apakata); Mil 279; Vv-a 311 (aṭṭita + ) Pv-a 61. an˚; unmolested Pv-a 195; anupaddutatta state of not being molested Vv-a 95. Upadhamsitar & Upadhamseti;
pp. of upaddavati
at Pp 49 is to be read upad˚; (q.v.).
(adj. nt.) “putting under”, i.e. (1) a pillow, cushion DN i.7; SN ii.267 = Mil 366 (kaḷingar˚); SN iii.145; AN i.137, AN i.181; AN iii.50; Ja iv.201; Ja v.506 (tamb˚ = ratt˚ C.); (2) imposing, giving causing Dhp 291 dukkh˚).
fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati
to suppose, think, reflect Dhp-a i.239 (should be corrected to upadhāreti ).
f. upa + dhā
(nt.) [fr. upa + dhṛ; ) “receptacle”, milk-pail DN ii.192; AN iv.393; Ja vi.503. See kaṃs˚. Kern, Toev. i. 142 proposes corruption fr. kaṃs’ûpadohana, which latter however does not occur in Pali.
(f) calculation Vv-a 7.
cp. upadhāraṇa
considered, reflected upon Dhp i.28; sûpadh˚ Mil 10; dûpadh˚ Vin iv.275.
pp. of upadhāreti
(Caus. of upa + dhṛ; cp. dhāreti 3] 1. “to hold or take up” (cp. semantically Lat. teneo = E. tenet) to reason out, conclude, reflect, surmise, know as such such, realise Ja i.338; Dhp-a i.28, Dhp-a i.41; Dhp-a ii.15, Dhp-a ii.20, Dhp-a ii.37, Dhp-a ii.96 Dhp-a iv.197 (an˚); Vv-a 48, Vv-a 200 (an˚), 234, 260 (an˚), 324; Pv-a 119 (for jānāti).
2. to look out for (acc.) Ja iii.65; Ja vi.2.
to run up to or after, fall upon, surround Vin ii.207; Vin iv.260 (pp. ˚dhāvita); SN i.185; SN ii.26 (aparantaṃ); Thag 1209; Mil 209; Vv-a 256; Pv-a 154, Pv-a 168, Pv-a 173 (for padhāvitā).
upa + dhāvati 1
1. putting down or under, foundation basis, ground, substratum (of rebirth) SN i.117, SN i.124 SN i.134, SN i.186; AN ii.24 (˚sankhaya); iii.382 (id.); iv.150 (˚kkhaya); Iti 21, Iti 69; Snp 364, Snp 728 (upadhī-nidānā dukkha = vaṭṭa-dukkhaṃ Snp-a 505), 789, 992; Nd i.27, Nd i.141; Nd ii.157; Vb 338; Ne 29; Dhp-a iv.33 ■ (2) clinging to rebirth (as impeding spiritual progress), attachment (almost syn. with kilesa or taṇhā, cp. nirupadhi & anupadhi) S A. = pañcakkhandhā, SN ii.108. At MN i.162 (cp. Snp 33 = SN i.6 = SN i.107) wife and children, flocks and herds silver and gold are called upadhayo. upadhi is the root of sorrow ib. 454; SN ii.108; Snp 728 = Snp 1051 Th i.152 and the rejection of all upadhis is Nibbāna DN ii.36. (cp. SN i.136; SN iii.133; SN v.226; AN i.80; MN i.107 = MN ii.93; Vin i.5, Vin i.36 = Ja i.83 = Mvst ii.444; Iti 46 Iti 62); DN iii.112 calls that which has upadhi ignoble (non-Aryan). At SN i.117 = Divy 224 upadhi is called a bond (saṃgo). Cp. opadhika ■ The upadhis were later systematized into a set of 10, which are given at Nd ii.157 as follows: 5 taṇh’ upadhis (taṇhā, diṭṭhi, kilesa kamma, duccarita), āhār-upadhi, paṭigh˚, catasso upādinnā dhātuyo u. (viz. kāma, diṭṭhi, sīlabbata, attavāda; see D iii.230), cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni u., cha viññāṇa-kāyā u. Another modified classification see at Brethren p. 398. Upadhika (Upadhika)
fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati & BSk. upadhi Divy 50, Divy 224, Divy 534
(adj.) (-˚) having a substratum, showing attachment to rebirth, only in cpds. an˚ free from clinging Vin i.36; Snp 1057, & nir˚; id. SN i.141.
fr. upadhi
(nt.) a cushion Ja vi.490 (for upatheyya, q.v.).
cp. upadhāna
to perform a dance DN ii.268.
upa + naccati
inclined, bent, prone Pv-a 190.
pp. of upanamati
to resound (with song) Pv iii.34 (= vikūjati Pv-a 189).
upa + nadati
scorned, grumbled at Vin ii.118.
pp. of upanayhati, see naddha & nandhati
to bear enmity towards, to grumble at (with loc.) aor. upanandhi Vin ii.118 (tasmiṃ); iv.83; Mvu 36, Mvu 117.
a secondary der. fr. upanandha, pp. of upanayhati
to be bent on, strive after Ja iii.324 (= upagacchati C.) ■ pp. upanata; Caus upanāmeti (q.v.).
upa + namati
(nt.) tt. for the minor premiss, subsumption (see Kvu trsl. 11; Mil 154; Ne 63; Dhs-a 329 (so read with v.l. for ˚najana).
fr. upa + ni; cp. naya & nayana
1. to come into touch with Iti 68 = Ja iv.435 (pūtimacchaṃ kusaggena, cp. Dhp-a i.45).
2. to bear enmity towards (loc.), to grudge scorn Dhp 3, Dhp 4 ■ pp. upanandha (for ˚naddha) ■ See also upanandhati.
upa + nayhati
(f.) & ˚nayhitatta (nt.) are syn. for upanāha (grudge, ill-will) in exegesis at Pp 18 = Pp 22, whereas id p. at Vb 357 reads upanahanā upanahitattaṃ (with v.l. upanayihanā & upanayihitattaṃ).;
brought up to, placed against DN ii.134.
pp. of upanāmeti
1. to bend over to, to place against or close to, to approach, bring near DN ii.134; SN i.207; Thag 1055; Snp p.48 (= attano kāyaṃ Bhagavato upanāmeti); Ja i.62; Ja v.215; Snp-a 151.
2. to offer, to present Ja iv.386; Ja ii.5; Mil 210, Mil 373; Pv-a 274-pp. upanāmita (q.v.). [cp. BSk. upanāmayati to hand over Divy 13, Divy 14, Divy 22].
Caus. of upanamati
(-˚) (adj.)
1. referring to, belonging to in cpd. att˚; ref. to oneself Vin iii.91; Vism 27.
2. beginning, in phrase vass’ūpanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, period for entering on Lent (cp. BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, Divy 489 & see also upakaṭṭha and vassa) Vin i.253; AN i.51 (divided into 2 parts first & second, or purimikā & pacchimikā); Ja iii.332; DN-a i.8; Dhp-a i.203; Dhp-a iii.438; Vv-a 44; Pv-a 42.
fr. upa + nī
ill-will, grudge, enmity MN i.15; AN i.91, AN i.95, AN i.299; AN iv.148, AN iv.349, AN iv.456; AN v.39, AN v.41 sq., 209 310; Pp 18 = Vb 357 (pubbakālaṃ kodho aparakālaṃ upanāho Mil 289.
fr. upa + nah, see upanayhati, same in BSk.; e.g. at Mvu ii.56.
(adj.-n.) one who bears ill-will, grudging, grumbling, finding fault Vin ii.89; MN i.95; DN iii.45; SN ii.206; SN iv.241; AN iii.260, AN iii.334; AN v.123, AN v.156; Snp 116; Thag 502; Ja iii.260 (kodhana + ); Pp 18; Vb 357 ■ Opp. an˚; not being angry (loc.) DN iii.47; SN ii.207; SN iv.244; AN v.124 sq.; Ja iv.463.
fr. upanāha
to go out, to come out (up to somebody) Thig 37; Thig 169; Ja iii.244; Pv i.101 (aor. ˚nikkhami; imper. ˚nikkhamassu).
upa + nikkhamati
laid down (secretly), placed by or on top SN v.457; Ja vi.390; Mil 80 ■ m. a spy Ja vi.394 (˚purisa).
upa + n˚
a spy Ja vi.409 (˚manussa), 431 (id.), 450 (id.).
= prec.
(upa + n˚] to deposit near, to lay up Vin i.312; SN ii.136 sq.; Mil 78, Mil 80; Ne 21, Ne 22; DN-a i.125 ■ pp. upanikkhitta (q.v.).
(nt.) putting down (near somebody), putting in the way, trap Vin iii.77.
fr. ˚nikkhipati
“putting near”, depositing;
1. appld. to the course of memory, association of ideas Mil 78, Mil 80; cp. ˚nikkhepana SN ii.276
2. deposit, pledge Ja vi.192, Ja vi.193 (= upajūta).
fr. upa + nis + kṣip
to rub up against, to crush (close) up to Dhp-a i.58.
upa + ni + ghaṃsati1
(nt.) meditation, reflection, consideration only in two phrases: ārammaṇa˚ & lakkhaṇa˚ with ref. to jhāna Ja v.251; Dhp-a i.230; Dhp-a iii.276; Vv-a 38, Vv-a 213. Cp. nijjhāyana.
upa + nijjhāna1
to meditate upon, consider, look at, reflect on Vin i.193 (“covet”); ii.269; iii. 118; DN i.20; AN iv.55; Mil 124; Vism 418 ■ pp upanijjhāyita (q.v.).
upa + nijjhāyati
meditation, reflection Mil 127; Vism 418.
for ˚nijjhāna
considered, looked at, thought over or about Snp p.147 (= diṭṭha, ālokita Snp-a 508).
pp. of ˚nijjhāyati
(f.) comparison Nd ii.158 (= upamā; should we read upanidhāya?).
abstracted from upanidhāya or direct formation fr. upa + ni + dhā ?
(indecl.) comparing in comparison, as prep. w. acc. “compared with” MN i.374; MN iii.177 (Himavantaṃ pabbatarājānaṃ); SN ii.133 (mahāpaṭhaviṃ), 262; v.457 (Sineru-pabbata-rājānaṃ) AN iii.181 sq.; AN iv.253 sq. (dibbasukhaṃ); Thag 496 (kammaṃ); Ja ii.93; DN-a i.29, DN-a i.59, DN-a i.283.
ger. of upa + nidahati of dhā
(f.)
1. deposit, pledge Vin iii.51.
2. comparison, in phrase upanidhiṃ na upeti “does not come into comparison, cannot be compared with” MN iii.177; SN ii.263; SN v.457 (so read for upanidhañ); Ud 23.
upa + ni + dhā, cp. nidhi
to lie down close to or on top of (acc.) Vism 269; Ja v.231.
upa + ni + pad
see upanibandhati.
1. tied on to Mil 253, Mil 254.
2. closely connected with, close to Vin iii.308 (Samanta Pāsādikā).
3. attached to DN-a i.128.
pp. of ˚nibandhāti
1. close connection, dependence Vism 19 (˚gocara).
2. (adj ■ ˚) connected with, dependent on Vism 235 (jīvitaṃ assāsa-passāsa˚ etc).
upa + ni + bandh
to tie close to, to bind on to, attach MN iii.132; Mil 254, Mil 412 ■ Pass. upanibajjhati to be attached to Snp 218 ■ pp. ˚nibaddha (q.v.).
upa + n˚
(adj. nt.) (adj.) closely connected with DN i.46; DN-a i.128; (nt.) tie, fetter, leash Mil 253.
upa + n˚
come out, produced DN-a i.247.
upa + nibbatta
(adj. somewhat like (-˚) MN i.58 = AN iii.324 (sankha-vaṇṇa˚); Ja i.207 (= sadisa C.) v.302 (tāla˚).
upa + nibha
to return Snp 712; Ja iv.417; Ja v.126.
upa + n˚
(f.)
1. cause, means DN ii.217, DN ii.259; MN iii.71 (samādhiṃ sa-upanisaṃ); SN ii.30
32 (S A. = kāraṇa, paccaya); v.25; AN i.198; AN iii.20, AN iii.200 sq. 360; iv.99, 336, 351; v.4 sq., 313 sq.; Snp 322 (= upanissaya Snp-a 331); p. 140 (= kāraṇa, payojana Snp-a 503) Dhp 75 (cp. Dhp-a ii.102 aññā nibbānagāminī paṭipadā). 2. likeness, counterfeit [ = Sk. upaniṣad = aupamye Pāṇini i.4, 79] Ja vi.470 (= paṭirūpaka C.).
if = Vedic upaniṣad, it would be fr. upa + ni + sad, but if, as is more likely, a contracted form of upanissaya, it would be fr. upa + ni + śri. The history of this word has yet to be written, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & Divy 530 svopaniṣad
to sit close to or down by DN i.95; AN iv.10; Ja ii.347; Pv iv.163 (ger. ˚sajja = ˚sīditvā Pv-a 242); Vism 269.
upa + nisīdati of sad
to pursue, follow, go up after, cling to (acc) MN i.306 ■ pp. upanisevita (q.v.).
upa + n˚
(adj.) going close after, following Ja v.399 [f. ˚ī.).
fr. upanisevati
gone on to, furnished with, sticking or clinging to, full of Ja v.302 (kakka˚).
pp. of upanisevati
basis, reliance, support, foundation, assurance, certainty; esp. sufficing condition or qualification for Arahantship (see long article in Childers s. v.); no 9 in the 24 paccayas, Tikapatthāṇa, Tikapaṭṭhāna i.1, a term only found in the Paṭṭhāna, the Jātaka & later exegetical literature Ja i.78, Ja i.508; Ja iv.96; Ja vi.70; Ne 80 Vism 19 (˚gocara), 535 (˚paccaya); Dhs-a 315 (id.); Dhp-a ii.33; Vv-a 98; Pv-a 38 (sotāpatti-phalassa), 55 (˚sampatti) Sdhp 265, Sdhp 320.
upa + ni˚
to depend or rely on (acc.) Mil 240 (attānaṃ) ■ ger. ˚nissāya (q.v.) ■ pp ˚nissita (q.v.).
upa + ni˚
(adv.) [ger. of upanissayati, cp. nissayati in same use & meaning) near, close by (with acc.); depending on, by means of (acc) MN ii.3; SN ii.269; Snp 867 (taṃ), 901 (tāpa˚), 978, Pv-a 9 (Rājagahaṃ), 67 (id.) Vv-a 63 (Rājagaha-seṭṭhiṃ “with”). Cp. BSk. upaniśritya also a ger. formation, in same meaning, e.g. at Divy 54 Divy 207, Divy 505.
dependent or relying on Snp 877; Nd i.283, Mil 245.
upa + ni˚
1. brought up to or into (mostly -˚) Thig 498; Snp 677 (niraye), 774 (dukkha˚), 898 (bhava˚); Ja iii.45 (thūṇa˚); iv.271 (dukkh˚); Nd i.38; Dhp 237 (˚yaya = atikkantavayo Dhp-a iii.337, advanced in age); Pv iv.110 (dukkha˚ made to suffer). an˚; Snp 846.
2. offered, presented Ja i.88; Pv-a 274, Pv-a 286. 3. brought to conclusion, brought to an end (of life) Ja v.375 (= maraṇa-santikaṃ u. C.).
4. bringing up (for trial), charging MN i.251 (vacanapatha, cp. upanīya). Upaniya (iyya, eyya)
pp. of upaneti
“bringing up” (for trial), charging, accusing DN i.107 (vadati, cp. DN-a i.276); AN i.172 (˚vācā); cp. upanīta 3.
ger. of upaneti
(adj.) somewhat dark-blue Ja v.168.
upa + nīla
to bring up to, conduce, adduce; to present, give Ja i.200; Mil 396; DN-a i.276; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 43 Pv-a 49, Pv-a 53, Pv-a 74 ■ Pass. upanīyati (˚niyyati)
1. to be brought (up to) Ja iv.398; ppr. ˚nīyamāna Ja i.200; Pv-a 5.
2. to be brought to conclusion, or to an end (of life) MN ii.68; SN i.2.
3. to be carried along or away AN i.155 ■ pp. upanīta (q.v.) ■ ger. upanīya (q.v.).
upa + neti
(adv.) near, before, in presence of Ja iv.337.
upa + anti
(adj.) nt. acc. ˚ṃ near Ja iv.337; Ja v.58 (with gen.); vi.418 (so read for ˚ā); loc. ˚e near or quite near Pv ii.915 (= samīpe gehassa Pv-a 120).
upa + antika
see uppaccati.
to get to, be reborn in (acc.) to originate, rise Vin iii.20 (nirayaṃ); AN iii.415; AN v.292 sq.; Snp 584; Iti 13 (nirayaṃ), 14 (sugatiṃ; v.l. upp˚), 67 (saggaṃ lokaṃ; v.l. upp˚); 43 = Dhp 307 (nirayaṃ); Dhp 126, Dhp 140; Pv i.107 (v.l. BB. udapajjatha = uppajja Pv-a 50); Pp 16, Pp 51, Pp 60; Ne 37, Ne 99, cp. Kv 611 sq. pp. upapannā (q.v.) ■ Caus. upapādeti & pp.; upapādita (q.v.).
doubtful whether a legitimate form as upa + pad or a diaeretic form of uppajjati = ud + pad. In this case all passages ought to go under the latter. Trenckner however (Notes 77) defends upa˚ & considers in many cases upp˚ a substitution for upa. The diaeresis may be due to metre, as nearly all forms are found in poetry The v.l. upp˚ is apparently frequent; but it is almost impossible to distinguish between upap˚ and upp˚ in the Sinhalese writing, and either the scribe or the reader may mistake one for the other
1. birth, rebirth, (lit. attainment) MN i.82; SN iii.53; SN iv.398; AN v.289 sq.; Snp 139, Snp 643, Snp 836; Dhp 419 (sattānaṃ); in var specifications as: deva˚ rebirth among gods Pv-a 6, Pv-a 81 devaloka˚ AN i.115; kāma˚ existence in the sensuous universe DN iii.218; Iti 94; arūpa˚ in the formless spheres Vb 172, Vb 267, Vb 296; rūpa˚, in the world of form Vb 171 sq., 263 sq.; 299; niraya˚ in Purgatory Pv-a 53. 2. occasion, opportunity (lit. “coming to”); object for in dāna˚ objects suitable for gifts AN iv.239 (where 8 enumd., see dāna).
-deva a god by birth (or rebirth) Vv-a 18; also given as uppatti-deva, e.g. at Kp-a 123. See detail under deva.
fr. upa + pad, cp. uppatti
(-˚) (adj.) belonging to a birth or rebirth; in peta˚ born as a Peta Pv-a 119 ■ Cp upapātika.
fr. upapatti
1. (-˚) possessed of, having attained, being furnished with Snp 68 (thāma-bala) 212, 322, 1077 (ñāṇa˚, cp. Nd ii.266b and uppanna-ñāṇa). 2. reborn, come to existence in (with acc.) SN i.35 (Avihaṃ, expld. by C. not quite to the point as “nipphattivasena upagata”, i.e. gone to A, on account of their perfection. Should we read uppanna?) AN v.68.
pp. of upapajjati
(nt.) = upaparikkhā Vv-a 232.
to investigate, ascertain, test, examine MN i.133, MN i.292, MN i.443; SN ii.216; SN iii.42, SN iii.140; SN iv.174; Ja i.489 Ja ii.400; Ja v.235; Mil 91, Mil 293; Dāvs v.27; Sdhp 539; Pv-a 60 (paññāya u. = ñatvā), 140 (= viceyya).
upa + pari + īkṣ; cp. BSk. upaparīkṣate Divy 5, Divy 230
(f.) investigation, examination Vin iii.314; MN ii.175 (attha˚); AN iii.381 sq.; AN iv.221; AN v.126; Dhs 16, Dhs 20 Dhs 292; Pp 25; Ne 8, Ne 42; DN-a i.171.
fr. upaparikkhati, cp. BSk. upaparīkṣā Divy 3 etc.
(adj.) investigating, reflecting, testing SN iii.61; AN iv.221 sq., 296, 328. Cp BSk. upaparīkṣaka Divy 212.
fr. upaparikkhati
= upapatti rebirth Vin iii.4; SN iv.59 (cut˚); Pp 50.
but der. fr. pat (cp. uppāda1 = ud + pat but uppāda2 = ud + pad ) with the meaning of the casual & unusual
(adj.) = opapātika i.e. rebirth without parents, as a deva DA on DN iii.107 Thag-a 207.
fr. upapāta but evidently mixed with uppāda1 and uppāda2, cp. upapajjati, upapatti & BSk upapāduka Av. SN ii.94, SN ii.95; Divy 523
accomplished Ja ii.236.
pp. of upapādeti, Caus. of upapajjati
to execute, perform Ja v.346.
Caus. of upapajjati
(f.) minor perfection Bv i.77 (opp. paramattha-pāramī); Dhp-a i.84.
upa + pāramī, cp. upa 5
grinding, powder, in añjan˚; powdered ointment (for the eyes) Vin i.203; Vin ii.112.
upa + piṣ
a minor or assistant priest Ja iv.304.
upa + purohita, see upa 5
at DN i.135 read uppīḷa (q.v.).
to touch; aor. upapphusi Ja v.417, Ja v.420.
upa + phusati, of spṛś
to swim or float to (acc.), in uncertain reading as aor. upaplaviṃ at Snp 1145 (dīpā dīpaṃ upaplaviṃ floatcd from land to land vv.ll. at Snp-a 606 uppalaviṃ & upallaviṃ; all MSS. of Nd ii.p. 54 & no. 160 write upallaviṃ). Perhaps we should better read; uppalaviṃ (or upallaviṃ) as diaeretic form for *upplaviṃ, aor. of uppilavati (or uplavati), q. v Expld. at Nd ii.160 by samupallaviṃ.
upa + plavati, cp. uppilavati
to go to, resort to, visit Thag 1052; Ja iv.270, Ja iv.295; Ja v.495 (= upagacchati C.); vi.43.
upa + vraj
see sam˚.
(nt.) expansion, increase, augmentation Vism 145; Dhs-a 117.
fr. upa + bṛh2, cp. BSk. upabṛṃhita Jtm 3195
(adj.) one who eats or enjoys Vism 555.
fr. next
to enjoy Ja iii.495; Ja v.350 (inf. ˚bhottuṃ)-grd. upabhogga ■ pp. upabhattu (q.v.).
upa + bhuj
enjoyed Dāvs iii.65.
pp. of upabhunjati
enjoyment, profit Vin iv.267; Ja ii.431; Ja iv.219 (v.l. paribhoga); vi. 361; Mil 201, Mil 403; Pv-a 49, Pv-a 220 (˚paribhoga); Dhp-a iv.7 (id.); Sdhp 268, Sdhp 341, Sdhp 547.
fr. upa + bhuj cp. upabhuñjati
(adj.) enjoying Mil 267.
fr. upabhuñjati
(adj.) to be enjoyed, enjoyable Mil 201.
Sk. upabhogya, grd. of upabhuñjati
(adj.) “coming quite or nearly up to” i.e. like, similar, equal DN i.239 (andha-veṇ˚); MN i.432 (taruṇ˚ a young looking fellow); AN iv.11 udak˚ puggala a man like water); Pv i.11 (khett˚ like a well cultivated field; = sadisa Pv-a 7); Pv-a 2, Pv-a 8 etc ■ Note. ūpama metri causa see ū˚ and cp. opamma & upamā.;
compar ■ superl. formation fr. upa, cp. Lat. summus fr. *(s)ub-mo
(f.) likeness, simile, parable, example (cp. formula introducing u. SN ii.114; MN i.148); Snp 705 (cp. Dhp 129, Dhp 130), 1137 (= upanidhā sadisaṃ paṭibhāgo Nd ii.158); Iti 114; Vism 341 Vism 478, Vism 512, Vism 582 sq., 591 sq.; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 112 (dhen˚); Snp-a 329, Snp-a 384; Sdhp 29, Sdhp 44, Sdhp 259.
-vacana expression of comparison (usually applied to part. evaṃ) Snp-a 13, Snp-a 472; Kp-a 185, Kp-a 195, Kp-a 208, Kp-a 212; Pv-a 25.
f. of upama in abstract meaning
(nt.) comparison, the 2nd part of the comparison Ja v.341; Vv-a 13.
fr. upa + mā
measured out, likened, like, comparable Thig 382 (= sadisa Thag-a 255).
pp. of caus. upa + mā
to measure one thing by another, to compare Ja vi.252; Vism 314 (˚metvā, read ˚netvā?).
upa + mā
(adj.) to be compared, that which is to be likened or compared, the 1st part of a comparison Vv-a 13.
grd. of upa + mā
approach, undertaking, taking up; clinging to, attachment, only as adj. (-˚) in an˚; (anûpaya metri causā) not going near, aloof, unattached SN i.141, SN i.181; SN ii.284; Snp 786, Snp 787, Snp 897 (cp. Snp-a 558); and in rūpūpaya (vv.ll. rūpupaya & rūpupāya “clinging to form” (etc.) SN iii.53 = Nd i.25 = Nd ii.570 (+ rup’ārammaṇa).
fr. upa + i, cp. upāya
to beg, entreat, pray to Ja vi.150 (divyaṃ).
upa + yācati
(nt.) begging, asking, praying, propitiation Ja vi.150 (= devatānaṃ āyācana).
of adj. upa + yācita + ka; pp. of yācati
to go to, to approach SN i.76; SN ii.118 (also Caus. ˚yāpeti ); Dpvs vi.69; Sdhp 579.
upa + yāti of yā
(nt.) nearing, approach, arrival DN i.10; DN-a i.94.
fr. upa + yā, cp. BSk. upayāna Jtm 3163
a crab Ja vi.530.
fr. upayāna
to combine, connect with; to use, apply; ppr. med. upayujjamāna Vv-a 245 (preferably be read as ˚bhuñjamāna, with reference to enjoying drink & food).;
upa + yuj
connection, combination; employment, application Ja vi.432 (nagare upayogaṃ netvā for use in the town? v.l. upabhogaṃ). Usually in cpd ˚vacana as tt. g. meaning either combined or condensed expression, ellipsis Snp-a 386; Kp-a 236; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 135 or the acc. case, which is frequently substituted for the foll. cases: sāmi-vacana Snp-a 127; Pv-a 102; bhumma Snp-a 140; Kp-a 116; karaṇa˚ Snp-a 148; sampadāna˚ Ja v.214; Snp-a 317; itthambhūta˚ Snp-a 441; nissakka˚ Ja v.498.
fr. upa + yuj
formed Thag-a 211; Sdhp 616.
pp. of upa + rac
(nt.) viceroyalty AN iii.154 (v.l. opa˚); Ja i.511; Ja iv.176; DN-a i.134.
upa + rajja, cp. uparaja
having ceased, desisting from (-˚), restraining oneself (cp. orata) Vin i.245 (ratt-ûparata abstaining from food at night = ratti-bhojanato uparata DN-a i.77); DN i.5 (id.); MN i.319 (bhaya˚); Snp 914 (virata etc. Nd i.337); Mil 96, Mil 307; Dhs-a 403 (vihiṃs˚).
pp. of uparamati
(f.) ceasing, resting; cessation MN i.10; SN iv.104; Mil 274.
fr. upa + ram
to cease, desist, to be quiet Ja iii.489; Ja v.391 (v.l. for upāramati, also in C.); Mil 152.
upa + ram
(f.) cessation Mil 41, Mil 44 (an˚).
cp. lit. Sk. uparama, to uparamati
noise Ja ii.2.
fr. upa + ru
a secondary or deputy king, a viceroy Ja i.504; Ja ii.316; Dhp-a i.392.
upa + rājā; see upa 5
(indecl.) over, above (prep. & prefix) 1. (adv. on top, above (opp. adho below) Vin iv.46 (opp. heṭṭhā) Ja vi.432; Kp-a 248 (= uddhaṃ; opp. adho); Snp-a 392 (abtimukho u. gacchati explaining paccuggacchati of Snp 442); Pv-a 11 (heṭṭhā manussa-saṇṭhānaṃ upari sūkara-s˚) 47 (upari chattaṃ dhāriyamāna), 145 (sabbattha upari upon everything).
2. (prep. w. gen) with ref. either to space = on top of, on, upon, as in kassa upari sāpo patissati on whom shall the curse fall? Dhp-a i.41; attano u. patati falls upon himself Pv-a 45; etissā upari kodho anger on her, i.e. against her Vv-a 68; or to time = on top of, after, later, as in catunnaṃ māsānaṃ upari after 4 months Pv-a 52 (= uddhaṃ catūhi māsehi of Pv i.1012) sattannaṃ vassa-satānaṃ upari after 700 years Pv-a 144. 3. (adv. in compn., meaning “upper, higher, on the upper or top side”, or “on top of”, if the phrase is in loc. case See below.
-cara walking in the air, suspended, flying Ja iii.454 -pāsāda the upper story of a palace, loc. on the terrace DN i.112 (loc.); Pv-a 105, Pv-a 279. -piṭṭhi top side, platform Vin ii.207 (loc). -bhaddaka Name of a tree [either Sk bhadraka Pinus Deodara, or bhadra Nauclea Cadamba after Kern, Toev. s. v.] Ja vi.269. -bhāga the upper part used in instr., loc or aor. in sense of “above, over beyond” Ja iv.232 (instr.). -bhāva higher state or condition MN i.45 (opp. adh˚). -mukha face upwards DN-a i.228; Pp A 214. -vasana upper garment Pv-a 49. -vāta higher than the wind, loc. on the wind Ja ii.11; or in ˚passe (loc.) on the upper (wind-) side Dhp-a ii.17. -visāla extended on top, i.e. of great width, very wide Ja iii.207 -vehāsa high in the air (˚-), in ˚kuṭī a lofty or open air chamber, or a room in the upper story of the Vihāra Vin iv.46 (what the C. means by expln. majjhimassa purisassa asīsa-ghaṭṭā “not knocking against the head of a middle-(sized) man” is not quite clear). -sacca higher truth Pv-a 66 (so read for upari sacca).
Vedic upari, der. fr. upa, Idg. *uper(i); Gr. υπερ, Lat. s-uper; Goth. ufar, Ohg. ubir = Ger. über E. over; Oir. for
(adj.) highest, topmost, most excellent Thag 910. Cp. next.
superl. formation fr. upari in analogy to seṭṭha
(adj) = upariṭṭha uparima Dhs 1016, Dhs 1300, Dhs 1401; Pp 16, Pp 17 (sañyojanāni = uddhaṃbhāgiya-sañyojanāni Pp A 198).
double-superl. formation after analogy of seṭṭha, pacchima & heṭṭhima: heṭṭhā
(adj.) uppermost, above, overhead DN iii.189 (disā); Ne 88. Cp. upariṭṭhima.
upari + ma, superl. formation
(adv.) above, on top, in compd. heṭṭh˚; below and above Vism 1.
fr. upari
to be stopped, broken, annihilated, destroyed DN i.223; Thag 145; Iti 106; Snp 724, Snp 1036, Snp 1110; Nd ii.159 (= nirujjhati vūpasammati atthangacchati); Mil 151; Sdhp 280. pp. uparuddha.
Sk. uparudhyate, Pass. of uparundhati
stopped, ceased Mil 151 (˚jīvita).
pp. of uparujjhati
to break up, hinder, stop, keep in check MN i.243; Ja i.358; Thag 143, Thag 1117; Snp 118 Snp 916 (pot. uparundhe, but uparuddhe Nd i.346 = uparuddheyya etc.); Mil 151, Mil 245, Mil 313 ■ ger. uparundhiya Thag 525; Snp 751; aor. uparundhi Ja iv.133; Pv-a 271 ■ Pass. uparujjhati (q.v.).
upa + rudh
grown again, recovered Ja iv.408 (cakkhu).
upa + rūḷha, pp. of ruh
to please (intrs.) Ja vi.64.
upa + ruc
1. to lament Ja vi.551 (fut ˚rucchati)
2. to sing in a whining tone Ja v.304.
upa + rud
obstacle; breaking up, destruction, end Ja iii.210, Ja iii.252; Pv iv.15; Mil 245, Mil 313.
fr. upa + rudh
(nt.) breaking up, destruction Snp 732, Snp 761.
fr. upa + rudh
to cause to break up; to hinder, stop; destroy Vin iii.73.
Caus of uparundhati
“little plant”, sapling Vin ii.154. See also next.
upa + ropa, cp. upa 5
= uparopa, sapling Ja ii.345; Ja iv.359.
a stone Dāvs iii.87.
Lit. Sk. upala, etym. uncertain
(f.) & ˚aṃ (nt.) discrimination SN iii.261 (an˚); Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 292, Dhs 1057; Pp 25; Vv-a 240.
upa + lakkhaṇa
to distinguish, discriminate Vism 172.
upa + lakṣay
acquired, got, found Ja vi.211 (˚bāla; v.l. paluddha˚); Sdhp 4, Sdhp 386.
pp. of upalabhati
(f.) acquisition; knowledge Mil 268; Vv-a 279.
fr. upa + labh
to receive, get, obtain to find, make out Mil 124 (kāraṇaṃ); usually in Pass. upalabbhati to be found or got, to be known; to exist MN i.138 (an˚); SN i.135; SN iv.384; Snp 858; Pv ii.111 (= paccanubhavīyati Pv-a 146); Kv 1, 2; Mil 25; Pv-a 87.
upa + labh
(nt.) talking over or down, persuasion; diplomacy, humbug DN ii.76; Mil 115, Mil 117.
fr. upa + lap
to persuade, coax, prevail upon, talk over, cajole Vin i.119; Vin iii.21; Ja ii.266; Ja iii.265 Ja iv.215; Pv-a 36, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 276.
Caus. of upa + lap
caressed, coaxed Sdhp 301.
pp. of upalāḷeti
.
1. to caress, coax, fondle, win over Ja ii.267; Vism 300; Sdhp 375.
2. to boast of, exult in Ja ii.151 ■ pp. upalāḷita (q.v.).
Caus. of upa + lal; cp. BSk. upalāḍayati Divy 114, Divy 503
to sound forth, to (make) sound (a bugle) DN ii.337 (for uppaḷāseti? q.v.).
upa + Caus. of las
to scratch, scrape, wound AN iii.94 sq. (= vijjhati C.).
upa + likh
smeared with (-˚), stained, tainted Thig 467 (cp. Thag-a 284; T. reads apalitta) Pp 56. Usually neg. an˚; free from taint, undefiled MN i.319, MN i.386; Mil 318; metri causa anūpalitta SN i.141 SN ii.284; Snp 211, Snp 392, Snp 468, Snp 790, Snp 845; Dhp 353 (cp. Dhp-a iv.7).
pp. of upalimpati
to be defiled; to stick to, hang on to Snp 547, Snp 812; Ja iii.66 (= allīyati C.); Mil 250, Mil 337.
Pass. of upalimpati
to smear, defile DN ii.18; Vin iii.312; Ja i.178; Ja iv.435; Mil 154 ■ Pass. upalippati, pp upalitta (q.v.).
upa + lip
defilement Ja iv.435.
fr. upa + lip
(adj. reddish Ja iii.21 (= rattavaṇṇa C.).
upa + lohita + ka, see upa 5
Snp 1145 see upaplavati.
(adj.) blameworthy SN iv.59, SN iv.60; AN ii.242. an˚; blameless, without fault SN iv.57 sq AN iv.82; Mil 391.
grd. of upavadati
(f.) blameworthiness SN iv.59 (an˚).
abstr. fr. upavajja
to describe fully Sdhp 487.
upa + vaṇṇeti
to come to pass, to take place Ja vi.58.
upa + vṛt
to tell (secretly) against, to tell tales; to insult, blame DN i.90; SN iii.125 (attā sīlato na upav.); AN ii.121 (id.); v.88; Ja ii.196; Pv-a 13.
upa + vad
(nt.) a kind of wood, miniature wood, park Ja iv.431; Ja v.249; Mil 1; Vv-a 170 (= vana), 344; Thag-a 201; Pv-a 102 (ārām˚), 177 (mahā˚).
upa + vana, see upa 5
.
1. to dwell in or at Ja iii.113; DN-a i.139.
2. to live (trs.); to observe, keep (a holy day); only in phrase uposathaṃ upavasati to observe the fast day SN i.208; AN i.142, AN i.144, AN i.205; Snp 402 (ger upavassa); Ja iii.444; Snp-a 199; Pv-a 209 ■ pp. upavuttha (q.v.). See also uposatha.
upa + vasiti
insulting, railing; blaming, finding fault Nd i.386; Pv-a 269; an˚; (adj.) not grumbling or abusing Dhp 185 (anûpa˚ metri causa).
fr. upa + vad
(adj.) blaming, finding fault, speaking evil of (gen.), generally in phrase ariyānaṃ u insulting the gentle Vin iii.5; AN i.256; AN iii.19; AN iv.178 AN v.68; Iti 58, Iti 99 ■ an˚; Pts i.115; Pp 60.
fr. upavāda
(adj. = upavādaka; in ariy˚; SN i.225; SN ii.124; SN v.266; Pv iv.339. an˚ MN i.360.
fr. upavāda
to blow on or towards somebody MN i.424; AN iv.46; Thag 544; Pv iii.66; Mil 97.
upa + vāyati
keeping a prescribed day, fasting, self-denial, abstaining from enjoyments [Same as uposatha; used extensively in BSk. in meaning of uposatha, e.g. at Avs i.338, Avs i.339; Divy 398 in phrase aṣṭânga-samanvāgataṃ upavāsaṃ upavasati] AN v.40 (? uncertain; vv.ll. upāsaka, ovāpavāssa, yopavāsa); Ja vi.508; Snp-a 199 (in expln. of uposatha).
fr. upa + vas, see upavasati
(adj.) (upa + vāsita] perfumed Pv-a 164 (for gandha-samerita).
(nt.) carrying away, washing away Snp 391 (sanghāṭi-raj-ûpa˚ = paṃsu-malādino sanghāṭirajassa dhovanaṃ Snp-a 375).
upa + vāhana
applying (one’s mind) to, discrimination DN iii.245 (domanass˚); MN iii.239; SN iv.232 (somanass˚ etc.); AN iii.363 sq.; AN v.134; Pts i.17; Dhp 8, Dhp 85, Dhp 284; Vb 381.
upa + vicāra; cp. BSk. upavicāra Divy 19, trsld on p. 704 in Notes by “perplexed by doubts” (?)
(f.) (adj.) about to bring forth a child, nearing childbirth MN i.384; Thig 218; Ud 13; Dāvs iii.38 Thag-a 197.
grd. formation of upa + vi + jan, cp. Sk. vijanya
to come near, to approach a person Ja iv.408; Ja v.377; aor. upāvisi Snp 415, Snp 418 (āsajja upāvisi = samīpaṃ gantvā nisīdi Snp-a 384).
upa + visati
the neck of a lute SN iv.197; Mil 53.
upa + vīṇā
covered (?) at Vv-a 8 in phrase “vettalatâdīhi upavītaṃ āsanaṃ” should prob. be read upanīta (vv. ll uparivīta & upajita); or could it be pp. of upavīyati (woven with)?
?
te be woven Ja vi.26.
Pass. of upa + vā2 to weave
celebrated, kept (of a fastday) AN i.211 (uposatha); Snp 403 (uposatha). Cp. uposatha.
pp. of upavasati
to invoke, call upon DN ii.259; SN i.168.
upa + ā + hū, cp. avhayati for *āhvayati
to live with somebody, to associate with (acc.) Ja i.152.
upa + saṃ + vas
(nt.) drawing together, bringing up to, comparison Vism 232 sq.; Ja v.186.
fr. upasaṃharati
1. to collect, bring together, heap up, gather Mil 132.
2. to dispose arrange, concentrate, collect, focus Vin iv.220 (kāyaṃ) MN i.436 (cittaṃ), 468 (cittaṃ tathattāya); SN v.213 sq. (id.) Dhs-a 309 (cakkhuṃ).
3. to take hold of, take care of, provide, serve, look after Mil 232.
upa + saṃ + hṛ;
taking hold of, taking up, possession, in devat˚; being seized or possessed by a god Mil 298.
fr. upa + saṃ + hṛ;
(adj.) accompanied by, furnished or connected with (-˚) DN i.152; MN i.37 MN i.119 (chand˚); SN ii.220 (kusal˚); iv.60 (kām˚), 79 (id.) Snp 341 (rāg˚), 1132 (giraṃ vaṇṇ˚ = vaṇṇena upetaṃ Nd2) Thag 970; Ja i.6; Ja ii.134, Ja ii.172; Ja v.361.
pp. of upa + saṃ + dhā
1. to go up to (with acc.), to approach come near; freq. in stock phrase “yena (Pokkharasādissa parivesanā) ten’ upasankami, upasankamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi”, e.g. Vin i.270; DN i.109; DN ii.1, and passim ■ aor. ˚sankami Pv. ii.210; Snp-a 130, Snp-a 140; Kp-a 116; Pv-a 88; ger. ˚sankamitvā Snp-a 140; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 12 Pv-a 19, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 88; ˚sankamma Snp 166, Snp 418, Snp 460, Snp 980, Snp 986; inf ˚sankamituṃ Pv-a 79 ■. 2. to attend on (as a physician), to treat Mil 169, Mil 233, Mil 353; DN-a i.7.
upa + saṃ + kram, cp. BSk. upasankramati Av. SN i.209
(nt.) going near, approach MN ii.176; SN v.67 = Iti 107; Pv-a 232.
fr. upasankamati
(adj.) to be prepared, produced or contracted Snp 849 (= ˚sankhātabba Snp-a 549; cp. Nd i.213).
grd of upa + sankharoti
1. attack, trouble, danger Vin i.33; AN i.101; Thig 353; Dhp 139 (where spelt upassaga, cp. Dhp-a iii.70); Mil 418.
2. (tt. g. prefix, preposition Ja ii.67 (saṃ), 126 (apa); iii.121 (ni pa); DN-a i.245 (adhi); Kp-a 101 (sa˚ and an˚); Pv-a 88 (atthe nipāto a particle put in metri causa, expln. of handa) Dhs-a 163, Dhs-a 405.
Sk upasarga, of upa + sṛj
(f.) stopping, causing to cease, settling Pp 18 (see also an˚; ).
fr. upa + sanṭḥapeti
calmed, composed, tranquil, at peace MN i.125; SN i.83, SN i.162; AN iii.394; Snp 848, Snp 919, Snp 1087, Snp 1099; Nd i.210, Nd i.352, Nd i.434; Nd ii.161; Dhp 201, Dhp 378; Mil 394; Dhp-a iii.260; Dhp-a iv.114; Pv-a 132 (= santa).
pp. of upa + śam, cp. upasammati
calm, quiet, appeasement, allaying, assuagement, tranquillizing Vin i.10; SN iv.331 = SN v.421 (in freq. phrase upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati; see nibbāna iii.7); DN i.50; DN iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 229 (as one of the 4 objects of adhiṭṭhāna, viz. paññā˚ sacca˚ cāga˚ upasama˚); MN i.67; MN iii.246; SN i.30, SN i.34 (sīlena), 46 citta-v-ûpasama), 48 55; ii.223, 277; iii.86 (sankhārānaṃ… v-ūpasamo) DN ii.157; SN i.158 (see vūpasama and sankhāra); (ariyaṃ maggaṃ dukkh˚-gāminaṃ); iv.62, 331; v.65 (avūpasama), 179 234 (˚gāmin), 378 sq.; AN i.3 (avūpasama), 30, 42; ii.14 (vitakk˚); iii.325 sq.; v.216, 238 sq.; Snp 257, Snp 724, Snp 735 Snp 737; Iti 18 (dukkh˚) 83; Dhp 205; Nd i.351; Ja i.97; Pts i.95; Mil 170, Mil 248; Vism 197 (˚ânussati); Sdhp 587 Cp. vi˚ (vū˚).
Sk. upaśama, upa + śam
to appease, calm, allay, assuage Snp 919; Thag 50 (pot. upasame = upasameyya nibbāpeyya Nd i.352) ■ pp. upasanta q.v.).
upa + śam in trs. meaning for usual sammati in intrs. meaning
(nt.) = upasama Thag 421; Sdhp 335 (dukkh˚).
to attain, enter on, acquire, take upon oneself usually in ger. upasampajja MN i.89; SN iii.8; AN iv.13; AN v.69; Dhs 160 (see Dhs-a 167) DN-a i.313; Snp-a 158 ■ pp. upasampanna (q.v.).
upa + sampajjati
(f.)
1. taking, acquiring; obtaining, taking upon oneself, undertaking DN ii.49; MN i.93; AN iii.65; Dhp 183 (cp. Dhp-a iii.236) Ne 44 (kusalassa).
2. (in special sense) taking up the bhikkhuship, higher ordination, admission to the privileges of recognized bhikkhus [cp. BSk. upasampad ˚padā Divy 21, Divy 281 etc.] Vin i.12, Vin i.20, Vin i.95, Vin i.146 and passim; iii.15; iv.52; DN i.176, DN i.177, DN i.202; SN i.161; AN iv.276 sq. & passim; Dhp-a ii.61 (pabbajjā + ); Pv-a 54 (laddh one who has received ordination), 179 (id.).
fr. upa + saṃ + pad
obtained, got, received; in special sense of having attained the recognition of bhikkhuship ordained [cp. BSk. upasampanna Divy 281] SN i.161; AN v.70; Vin iii.24; Vin iv.52, Vin iv.130; Mil 13.
pp. of upasampajjati
1. to attain to, obtain, produce Dhs-a 167 (= nipphādeti).
2. to admit to bhikkhuship, to ordain Vin iv.130, Vin iv.226, Vin iv.317 (= vutṭhāpeti); grd. ˚etabba Vin i.64 sq.; Vin iv.48; AN v.72.
Denom. fr. upasampadā
to embrace Ja v.297.
upa + sam + spṛś
to grow calm, to cease, to be settled or composed, to be appeased SN i.62, SN i.221; Dhp 100 sq.
Sk. upasamyati, upa + śam in intrs. function
(nt.?) “a robe worn over the left shoulder” (Hardy, Index to ed.) Vv-a 166 (v.l. upavasavya).
?
(adj.). striving after, longing or wishing for Mil 393 (āhār˚ Morris JP T S. 1884, 75 proposes reading upasinghaka).
fr. upa + siṃsati = śaṃs, cp. āsiṃsaka
(adj.) sniffing after Ja ii.339; Ja iii.144; Mil 393 (? see upasiṃsaka).
fr. upa + siṅgh
1. to sniff at SN i.204 (padumaṃ); i.455; Ja ii.339, Ja ii.408; Ja vi.336.
2. to sniff up Vin i.279 ■ Caus. āyati to touch gently Kp-a 136 Caus. II. apeti to touch lightly, to stroke Ja iv.407.
upa + siṅgh
scented, smelled at (loc.) Ja vi.543 (sisaṃhi, C. for upagghata).
pp. of upasinghati
to dry up MN i.481; Snp 433; Ja i.71.
upa + sussati
(nt.) sprinkling over, i.e. sauce Thag 842; Ja ii.422; Ja iii.144; Ja iv.371 (maṃs˚); vi.24. See also nandi˚ & maṃsa˚.;
fr. upa + sic
(f.) (a girl) who likes to be always near (her mother), a pet, darling, fondling Ja vi.64 (= mātaraṃ upagantvā sayanika C.).
Sk. upa + either śayanika of śayana, or sayaniya of śī
1. to practice, frequent, pursue Mil 355.
2. to serve, honour, Snp 318 (˚amāna). pp. upasevita (q.v.).
upa + sev
(f.) serving, pursuing, following, service, honouring, pursuit SN iii.53 = Nd i.25 Nd ii.570 (nand˚ pleasure-seeking); Iti 68 (bāl˚ & dhīr˚) Snp 249 (utu˚ observance of the seasons); Mil 351.
abstr. fr. upasevati
visited, frequented Pv-a 147 (for sevita).
pp. of upasevati
(adj.) (-˚) pursuing, following, going after AN iii.136 (vyatta˚); Mil 264 (rāj˚); Dhp-a iii.482 (para-dār˚).
fr. upasevati
to appear beautiful, to shine forth Thag 1080 ■ Caus. ˚sobheti to make beautiful embellish, adorn Vv 526; Ja v.132; Pv-a 153 ■ pp upasobhita (q.v.).
upa + śubh
embellished, beautified, adorned Pv-a 153, Pv-a 187; Sdhp 593.
pp. of upasobheti
see upasagga.
“thrown upon”, overcome, visited, afflicted, ruined, oppressed SN iv.29; AN iii.226 (udak˚); Ja i.61; Ja ii.239.
Sk. upasṛṣṭa, pp. of upa + sṛj
abode, resting home, dwelling, asylum SN i.32, SN i.33; Vv 684 Mil 160. Esp. freq. as bhikkhuni˚; or bhikkhun˚; a nunnery Vin ii.259; Vin iv.265, Vin iv.292; SN ii.215; Ja i.147, Ja i.428; Mil 124.
fr. upa + śri, cp. assaya & missaya
breathing Ja i.160.
upa + assāsa; upa + ā + śvas
(f.) listening to, attention SN ii.75; SN iv.91; Ja v.100; Mil 92.
fr. upa + śru
(adj.) one who listens, an eavesdropper Ja v.81.
fr. upassuti
(˚-)
1. spoiling, impairing, defiling Ja v.267 (manaṃ)
2. reducing, cutting short only in phrase upahacca-parinibbāyin “coming to extinction after reducing the time of rebirths (or after having almost reached the destruction of life”) SN v.70, SN v.201 sq. AN i.233 sq.; AN iv.380; Pp 17 (upagantvā kālakiriyaṃ āyukkhayassa āsane ṭhatvā ti attho Pp A 199); Ne 190 ■ The term is not quite clear; there seems to have existed very early confusion with upapacca → upapajja → uppajja, as indicated by BSk. upapadya-parinirvāyin, and by remarks of C. on Kv 268, as quoted at Kvu trsln. 158, 159.
ger. of upahanti
to be spoilt or injured Snp 584; Ja iv.14; Mil 26.
Pass. of upahanti
injured, spoilt; destroyed DN i.86 (phrase khata + upahata); SN i.238 (na sûpahata “not easily put out” trsl.); ii.227; AN i.161; Dhp 134; Ja vi.515; Mil 223, Mil 302; Dhp-a ii.33 (an˚).
The formula at DN i.86 (khata + upahata) is doubtful as to its exact meaning According to Bdhgh it means “one who has destroyed his foundation of salvation, i.e. one who cannot be saved. Thus at DN-a i.237: “bhinna-patiṭṭho jāto, i.e. without a basis. Cp. remarks under khata. The trsln at Dial. i.95 gives it as “deeply affected and touched in heart”: doubtful. The phrase upahaccaparinibbāyin may receive light from upahata.
pp. of upahanti
a bringer (of) MN i.447 sq.
Sk. *upahartṛ, n. ag. of upa + hṛ;
(& ˚hanati Ja i.454) to impair, injure; to reduce, cut short; to destroy, only in ger. upahacca; pp. upahata & Pass.; upahaññati (q.v.).
upa + han
(nt.)
1. presentation; luxury Ja i.231.
2. taking, seizing Ja vi.198.
fr. upa + hṛ;
to bring, offer, present AN ii.87; iii. 33; Dhp i.301, Dhp i.302; Ja v.477.
upa + hṛ;
bringing forward, present, offering, gift Vin iii.136 (āhār˚) AN ii.87; AN iii.33; AN v.66 (mett˚); Ja i.47; Ja iv.455; Ja vi.117; DN-a i.97.
fr. upa + hṛ;
to injure, hurt Vin ii.203; Ja iv.156.
upa + hiṃs
to come to, arrive at, reach, obtain, usually aor. upāgañchi Cp i.1010, pl. upāgañchuṃ Snp 1126; or upāgami Snp 426, Snp 685, pl. upāgamuṃ Snp 302, Snp 1126. Besides in pres. imper. upāgaccha Pv-a 64 (so read for upagaccha) ■ pp. upāgata.
upa + ā + gam
come to, having reached or attained Snp 1016; Pv-a 117 (yakkhattaṃ); Sdhp 280.
pp. of upāgacchati
thrown up, cast up, raised (of dust) Thag 675.
according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. upātta, pp of upa + ā + dā “taken up”; after Morris J.P. T. S. 1884 75 = uppāta “flying up”
to “go out over”, to surpass, overcome, only in 3rd sg. pret. upaccagā Snp 333, Snp 636, Snp 641, Snp 827; Thag 181; Thag 2, Thag 4; Ja i.258; Ja vi.182 & 3;rd pl. upaccaguṃ SN i.35; AN iii.311; Ja iii.201.
upa + ati + gacchati
to run on or in to Ud 72.
upa + ā + dhāvati
fallen into, a prey to (with loc.) Snp 495 (= nipanna with gloss adhimutta Snp-a 415).
pp. of upâtipajjati, upa + ā + pad
gone beyond, escaped from, free from (with acc.) SN i.143; AN ii.15; Snp 55, Snp 474, Snp 520 Snp 907; Ja iii.7, Ja iii.360; Fd1 322 = Nd ii.163. Cp. BSk. upātivṛtta in same sense at Mvu iii.281.
pp. of upâtivattati
to go beyond, overstep MN i.327; Snp 712 (v.l. for upanivattati); Ne 49. pp. upātivatta (q.v.).
upa + ati + vattati
(adv.) lit. “taking up”, i.e. subsisting on something else, not original, secondary derived (of rūpa form) Dhs 877, Dhs 960, Dhs 1210; Vism 275 Vism 444 (24 fold); Dhs-a 215, Dhs-a 299, Dhs-a 333, cp. Dhs trsln. 127 197 ■ Usually (and this is the earlier use of upādā as neg. anupādā (for anupādāya) in meaning “not taking up any more (fuel, so as to keep the fire of rebirth alive)”, not clinging to love of the world, or the kilesas q.v., having no more tendency to becoming; in phrases a. parinibbānaṃ “unsupported emancipation” MN i.148; SN iv.48; SN v.29; Dhp-a i.286 etc.; a. vimokkho mental release AN v.64 (A A: catuhi upādānehi agahetvā cittassa vimokkho; arahattass’etaṃ nāmaṃ); Vin v.164; Pts ii.45 sq.; a. vimutto DN i.17 (= kinci dhammaṃ anupādiyitvā vimutto DN-a i.109); cp. MN iii.227 (paritassanā).
shortened ger. of upādiyati for the usual upādāya in specialised meaning
(nt.) -(lit. that (material) substratum by means of which an active process is kept alive or going), fuel, supply, provision; adj. (-˚) supported by, drawing one’s existence from SN i.69; SN ii.85 (aggikkhandho ˚assa pariyādānā by means of taking up fuel); v.284 (vāt˚); Ja iii.342 sa-upādāna (adj.) provided with fuel SN iv.399; anupādāna without fuel Dhp-a ii.163. 2. (appld.) “drawing upon”, grasping, holding on, grip attachment; adj. (-˚) finding one’s support by or in clinging to, taking up, nourished by. See on term Dhs trsln. 323 & Cpd. 171. They are classified as 4 upādānāni or four Graspings viz. kām˚, diṭṭh˚, sīlabbat˚, attavād or the graspings arising from sense-desires, speculation belief in rites, belief in the soul-theory DN ii.58; DN iii.230; MN i.51, MN i.66; SN ii.3; SN v.59; Dhs 1213; Pts i.129; Pts ii.46 Pts ii.47; Vb 375; Ne 48; Vism 569 ■ For upādāna in var. connections see the foll. passages: DN i.25; DN ii.31, DN ii.33 DN ii.56; DN iii.278; MN i.66, MN i.136 (attavād˚) 266; SN ii.14, SN ii.17, SN ii.30 SN ii.85; SN iii.10, SN iii.13 sq., 101, 135, 167, 191; iv.32, 87 sq. 102 (tannissitaṃ viññāṇaṃ tadupādānaṃ), 390, 400 (taṇhā); AN iv.69; AN v.111 (upāy˚); Snp 170, Snp 358, Snp 546; Pts i.51 sq., 193; ii.45 sq, 113; Vb 18, Vb 30, Vb 67, Vb 79, Vb 119 Vb 132; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136, Dhs 1213, Dhs 1536 sq.; Ne 28 sq., 41 sq., 114 sq.; Dhp-a iv.194 ■ sa˚; full of attachment (to life) MN i.65; Vin iii.111; SN iv.102; an˚; unattached, not showing attachment to existence SN iv.399; Vin iii.111 Thag 840; Mil 32; DN-a i.98.
-kkhandha, usually as pañc’ upādāna-kkhandhā the factors of the “fivefold clinging to existence” [cp. BSk pañc’ u˚-skandhāḥ Avs ii.1681 & note] DN ii.35, DN ii.301 sq.; DN iii.223, DN iii.286; MN i.61, MN i.144, MN i.185; MN iii.15, MN iii.30, MN iii.114, MN iii.295; Pts ii.109 sq.; Vb 101; Vism 505 (khandha-pañcaka) See for detail khandha ii.B 2. -kkhaya extinction or disappearance of attachment SN ii.54; AN iii.376 sq.; Snp 475, Snp 743; Iti 75. -nidāna the ground of upādāna; adj founded on or caused by attachment Pts ii.111; Vb 135 sq -nirodha destruction of “grasping” Vin i.1 (in formula of paṭicca-samuppāda); SN ii.7; SN iii.14; AN i.177. -paccaya = ˚nidāna SN ii.5; SN iii.94; Snp 507, Snp 742.
fr. upa + ā + dā
(adj.) belonging to or connected with upādāna, sensual, (inclined to) grasping; material (of rūpa), derived. See on term Dhs trsln. 203, 322 ■ SN ii.84; SN iii.47; SN iv.89, SN iv.108; Dhs 584, Dhs 1219, Dhs 1538; Vb 12 sq., 30, 56, 119, 125, 319, 326.
fr. upādāna, for *upādānika → ˚aka
(adv.)
1. (as prep. with acc.) lit. “taking it up” (as such & such), i.e. (a) out of, as, for; in phrase anukampaṃ upādāya out of pity or mercy DN i.204; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 164 ■ (b) compared with alongside of, with reference to, according to DN i.205 (kālañ ca samayañ ca acc. to time & convenience); Dhp-a i.391; Vv-a 65 (paṃsucuṇṇaṃ); Pv-a 268 (manussalokaṃ) The same use of upādāya is found in BSk., e.g. at Divy 25, Divy 359, Divy 413; Avs i.255.
2. (ic same meaning application as upādā, i.e. in neg. form first & then in positivé abstraction from the latter) as philosophical term “hanging on to”, i.e. derived, secondary (with rūpa) Vb 12, Vb 67 etc.; Nd i.266. Usually as anupādāya “not clinging to”, without any (further) clinging (to rebirth) emancipated, unconditioned, free [cp. BSk. paritt-anupādāya free from the world Divy 655], freq. in phrase a nibbuta completely emancipated SN ii.279; AN i.162; iv. 290; besides in foll. pass.: Vin i.14 (a. cittaṃ vimuccati 182 (id.); SN ii.187 sq.; SN iv.20, SN iv.107; SN v.317; Dhp 89 = SN v.24 (ādānapaṭi-nisagge a. ye ratā); Dhp 414; Snp 363; Iti 94 (+ aparitassato).
ger. of upādiyati
= upādāna, but in more concrete meaning of “stuff of life”, substratum of being, khandha; only in combn. with ˚sesa (adj.) having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i.e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined SN v.129, SN v.181; AN iii.143; Iti 40; Vism 509. More frequently neg. an-upādi-sesa (nibbāna, nibbānadhātu or parinibbāna, cp. similarly BSk. anupādi-vimukti Mvu i.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material substratum Vin ii.239 (nibbāna-dhātu); DN iii.135; MN i.148 (parinibbāna); AN ii.120; AN iv.75 sq., 202, 313; Ja i.28, Ja i.55; Snp 876; Iti 39, Iti 121 (nibbāna-dhātu); Ps. i.101; Vism 509; Dhp-a iv.108 (nibbāna); Vv-a 164, Vv-a 165. Opp. saupādisesa AN iv.75 sq., 378 sq.; Snp 354 (opp. nibbāyi) Vism 509; Ne 92. See further ref. under nibbāna parinibbāna.;
the compn.-from of upādāna, derived fr. upādā in analogy to nouns in ˚a & ˚ā which change their a to i in comp;n. with kṛ & bhū; otherwise a n. formation fr dā analogous to ˚dhi fr. dhā in upadhi
grasped at, laid hold of; or “the issue of grasping”, i.e. material, derived, secondary (cp. upādā), see def. at Dhs trsln. 201, 324 ■ Dhs 585, Dhs 877, Dhs 1211, Dhs 1534 Vb 2 sq., 326, 433; Vism 349, Vism 451; an˚; Vin iii.113; Dhs 585, Dhs 991, Dhs 1212, Dhs 1535.
for ˚ādinna with substitution of ṇṇ for nn owing to wrong derivation as pp. from ādiyati2 instead of ādiyati1
(adj,) = upādiṇṇa Dhs-a 311, Dhs-a 315, Dhs-a 378; Vism 398.
to take hold of, to grasp, cling to, show attachment (to the world), cp. upādāna DN ii.292; MN i.56, MN i.67; SN ii.14; SN iii.73, SN iii.94, SN iii.135; iv. 168 (na kiñci loke u. = parinibbāyati); Snp 752, Snp 1103 Snp 1104; Nd i.444 (= ādeti); Nd ii.164. ppr. upādiyaṃ SN iv.24 = SN iv.65 (an˚) ■ ppr. med. upādiyamāna SN iii.73; Snp-a 409, & upādiyāna (˚ādiyāno) Snp 470; Dhp 20. ger. upādāya in lit. meaning “taking up” Ja i.30; Mil 184, Mil 338, Mil 341; for specialised meaning & use as prep see separately as also; upādā and upādiyitvā Vv-a 209; DN-a i.109 (an˚); Dhp-a iv.194 (an˚) ■ pp. upādiṇṇa (q.v.).
upa + ā + dā, see ādiyati1
1. cushion Ja vi.253.
2. supplement, ornament (?), in ˚ratha “the chariot with the outfit”, expld. by C. as the royal chariot with the golden slipper Ja vi.22.
fr. upa + ā + dhā
being furnished with a cushion Ja vi.252 (adj.).
fr. upāhi
approach; fig. way, means, expedient, stratagem SN iii.53 sq., 58; DN iii.220 (˚kosalla) Snp 321 (˚ññū); Ja i.256; Nd ii.570 (for upaya); Pv-a 20 Pv-a 31, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 45, Pv-a 104, Pv-a 161; Sdhp 10, Sdhp 12. 350, 385 ■ Cases adverbially; instr. upāyena by artifice or means of a trick Pv-a 93; yena kenaci u. Pv-a 113 ■ abl. upāyaso by some means, somehow Ja iii.443; Ja v.401 (= upāyena C.). anupāya wrong means Ja i.256; Sdhp 405; without going near, without having a propensity for SN i.181; MN iii.25.
-kusala clever in resource Ja i.98; Ne 20; Snp-a 274.
fr. upa + i, cp. upaya
(nt.) a means of (-˚) Vv-a 84 (paṭipajjan˚).
abstr. fr. upāya
(nt.) going to (in special sense), enterprise, offering, tribute, present Ja v.347; vi. 327; Mil 155, Mil 171, Mil 241; Sdhp 616, Sdhp 619.
fr. upa + i, cp. upāya
(a kind of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance unsettled condition MN i.8, MN i.144, MN i.363; MN iii.237; AN i.144, AN i.177, AN i.203 (sa˚); ii.123, 203; iii.3, 97, 429; Snp 542; Iti 89 = AN i.147 = MN i.460; Ja ii.277 (˚bahula); iv.22 (id.); Pp 30, Pp 36; Vb 247; Ne 29; Mil 69; Vism 504 (def.); DN-a i.121 ■ anupāyāsa peacefulness, composure serenity, sincerity DN iii.159; AN iii.429; Pts i.11 sq.
upa + āyāsa, cp. BSk. upāyāsa Divy 210, Divy 314.
to cease, to desist Ja v.391, Ja v.498.
upa + ā + ram
blamed, reprimanded, reproved AN v.230.
pp. of upārambhati
1. reproof, reproach, censure MN i.134, MN i.432; SN iii.73; SN v.73; AN i.199; AN ii.181; AN iii.175; AN iv.25; Vb 372.
2. (adj.) indisposed hostile Thag 360 sq.; DN-a i.21, DN-a i.263.
Sk. upārambha, upa + ālambhatc
to blame, reprimand, reproach MN i.432, MN i.433 ■ pp. upāraddha (q.v.).
Sk. upālambhate, upa + ā + labh
at Pv-a 276 read upalāpeti (q.v.).
3rd sg. aor. of upavisati (q.v.).
a devout or faithful layman, a lay devotee Vin i.4, Vin i.16 (tevāciko u.), 37, 139 195 sq.; ii.125; iii.6, 92; iv.14, 109; DN i.85; DN ii.105 DN ii.113; DN iii.134, DN iii.148, DN iii.153, DN iii.168, DN iii.172 sq., 264; MN i.29, MN i.467 MN i.490; SN v.395, SN v.410; AN i.56 sq.; AN ii.132 (˚parisā); iii.206 (˚caṇḍāla, ˚ratana); iv.220 sq. (kittāvatā hoti); Snp 376 Snp 384; Ja i.83; Pv i.104; Vb 248 (˚sikkhā); DN-a i.234; Pv-a 36, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 207 ■ f. upāsikā Vin i.18, Vin i.141 Vin i.216; Vin iii.39; Vin iv.21, Vin iv.79; DN iii.124, DN iii.148, DN iii.172, DN iii.264; MN i.29 MN i.467, MN i.491; SN ii.235 sq.; AN i.88; AN ii.132; AN v.287 sq.; Mil 383; Pv-a 151, Pv-a 160.
fr. upa + ās, cp. upāsati
(nt.) state of being a believing layman or a lay follower of the Buddha Vin i.37; SN iv.301; Vv 8421.
abstr. fr. upāsaka
lit. “to sit close by”, to go after, attend, follow, serve, honour, worship DN ii.287; AN i.162; Ja v.339, Ja v.371 (= upagacchati C.); Mil 418 (lakkhe upāseti fix his attention on the target).
3rd pl. pres. med upāsare AN i.162; Ja iv.417 (= upāyanti C.). Cp. payirupāsati ■ pp. upāsita & upāsīna; (q.v.). See also upāsaka, upāsana1.
upa + ās
(nt.) attendance, service, honour SN i.46 (samaṇ˚); Thag 239; Mil 115. Cp. payir˚.
fr. upāsati
(nt.)
1. archery Ja vi.448; usually in phrase katūpāsana skilled in archery MN i.82; SN ii.266; AN ii.48; Ja iv.211; Mvu 24, Mvu 1 ■ Mil 232 (˚ṃ sikkhitvā).
2. practice Mil 419.
3. in ˚sālā gymnasium training ground Mil 352.
fr. upāsati
see upāsaka; cp. payir˚.
honoured, served, attended S 1133, cp. Nd ii.165; Thag 179.
pp. of upāsati
sitting near or close to Ja v.336.
pp. of upāsati
struck, afflicted, hurt Ja i.414.
upa + āhata
(f.) a shoe, sandal Vin i.185; Vin ii.118, Vin ii.207 (adj. sa-upāhana), 208; SN i.226; Ja iv.173, Ja iv.223; Pv ii.49; Nd ii.226; Kp-a 45; Dhp-a i.381 (chatt ˚ṃ as nt? v.l. ˚nā); Pv-a 127, Pv-a 186. upāhanaṃ (or upāhanā) ārohati to put on sandals Ja iv.16; vi. 524; opp. omuñcati take off Vin ii.207, Vin ii.208; Ja iii.415; Ja iv.16 ■ Note. An older form upānad˚; (for upānadh = Sk. upānah) is seen by Kern in pānadûpama Ja ii.223, which is read by him as upānadûpama (v.l. upāhan-upama). See Toev. s. v. upānad.
with metathesis for upānahā = Sk. upānah f. or upānaha m.; but cp. BSk. upānaha nt. Divy 6
undergoing, going into, metri causa as ūpiya (-˚) and opiya, viz. hadayasmiṃ opiya SN i.199 = Thag 119; senûpiya Ja v.96 (v.l. senopiya; C. sayanûpagata). In tadūpiya the 2nd part upiya represents an adj. upaka fr. upa (see ta I. a), thus found at Mil 9.
ger. of upeti
(adj.) disinterested, resigned, stoical Vin iii.4; DN i.37, DN i.183; DN iii.113, DN iii.222, DN iii.245, DN iii.269, DN iii.281; SN v.295 sq., 318; AN iii.169 sq., 279; v.30; Snp 515 Snp 855, Snp 912; Iti 81; Nd i.241, Nd i.330; Pp 50, Pp 59; Dhs 163; Dhs-a 172.
fr. upekkhā
to look on, to be disinterested or indifferent Snp 911; Nd i.328; Ja vi.294.
upa + īkṣ
(f.) is commentator’s paraphrase for upekkhā (q.v.) Nd i.501 = Nd ii.166 Vb 230.
abstr. fr. upa + īkṣ
(adj.) = upekkhaka Ja v.403. Upekkha & Upekha
(f.) “looking on”, hedonic neutrality or indifference, zero point between joy & sorrow (Cpd. 66) disinterestedness, neutral feeling, equanimity. Sometimes equivalent to adukkham-asukha-vedanā “feeling which is neither pain nor pleasure”. See detailed discussion of term at Cpd. 229–232, & cp.; Dhs trsln. 39 ■ Ten kinds of upekkhā are enumd. at Dhs-a 172 (cp. Dhs trsln. 48; Hardy, Man. Buddhism 505) ■ D 138 (˚sati-parisuddhi purity of mindfulness which comes of disinterestedness cp. Vin iii.4; Dhs 165 & Dhs trsln;n. 50), 251 ii.279 (twofold); iii.50, 78, 106, 224 sq., 239, 245 (six ˚upavicāras), 252, 282; MN i.79, MN i.364; MN iii.219; SN iv.71 SN iv.114 sq., SN v.209 sq. (˚indriya); AN i.42; AN i.81 (˚sukha), 256 (˚nimitta); iii.185, 291 (˚cetovimutti); iv.47 sq., 70 sq. 300, 443; v.301, 360; Snp 67, Snp 73, Snp 972, Snp 1107, (˚satisaṃsuddha); Nd i.501 = Nd ii.166; Pts i.8, Pts i.36, Pts i.60, Pts i.167 Pts i.177; Pp 59 (˚sati); Ne 25, Ne 97 (˚dhātu), 121 sq.; Vb 12, Vb 15 (˚indriya), 54 (id.), 69, 85 (˚dhātu), 228, 324, 326 (˚sambojjhanga), 381 (˚upavicāra); Dhs 150, Dhs 153, Dhs 165 Dhs 262, Dhs 556, Dhs 1001, Dhs 1278, Dhs 1582; Vism 134 (˚sambojjhanga 5 conditions of), 148 (˚ânubrūhanā), 160 (def. & tenfold) 317 (˚bhāvanā), 319 (˚brahmavihāra), 325 (˚vihārin), 461; Snp-a 128; Sdhp 461.
fr. upa + īkṣ, cp. BSk. upekṣā Divy 483; Jtm 211. On spelling upekhā for upekkhā see Müller P. Gr. 16
furnished with, endowed with, possessed of Snp 402, Snp 463, Snp 700, Snp 722; Dhp 10, Dhp 280; Nd ii.s. v. Thag 789; Pv i.76 (bal˚); ii.712 (phal˚, v.l. preferable ˚upaga), iv.112 (ariyaṃ aṭṭhangavaraṃ upetan = aṭṭhahi angehi upetaṃ yuttaṃ Pv-a 243); Vism 18 (+ sam˚, upagata samupagata etc); Pv-a 7 ■ Note. The BSk. usually has samanvāgata for upeta (see aṭṭhanga).
pp. of upeti
to go to (with acc.), come to, approach, undergo, attain DN i.55 (paṭhavi-kāyaṃ an-upeti does not go into an earthly body), 180; MN i.486 (na upeti, as answer: “does not meet the question”); SN iii.93; Iti 89; Snp 209, (na sankhaṃ “cannot be reckoned as”) 749, 911 1074; 728 (dukkhaṃ), 897; Snp 404 (deve); Nd i.63; Nd ii.167; Dhp 151, Dhp 306, Dhp 342; Snp 318; Ja iv.309 (maraṇaṃ upeti to die), 312 (id.), 463 (id.); v.212 (v.l. opeti, q.v.) Thag 17 (gabbhaṃ); Pv ii.334 (saggaṃ upehi ṭhānaṃ); iv. 352 (saraṇaṃ buddhaṃ dhammaṃ); Ne 66; fut. upessaṃ Snp 29; Snp 2nd sg. upehisi Dhp 238, Dhp 348 ■ ger. upecca Vv 337; SN i.209 = Ne 131; Vv-a 146 (realising = upagantvā cetetvā vā); Pv-a 103 (gloss for uppacca flying up); see also upiya & uppacca ■ pp.; upeta.
upa + i
heaped up, abounding, comfortable Ja iv.471.
pp. of upa + ava + ci
. At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon’s waxing and waning, viz. 1st, 8th, 15th 23d nights of the lunar month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath. These days were utilized by the pre-Buddhistic reforming communities for the expounding of their views, Vin i.101. The Buddhists adopted this practice and on the 15th day of the half-month held a chapter of the Order to expound their dhamma, ib. 102 They also utilized one or other of these Up. days for the recitation of the Pāṭimokkha (pāṭimokkhuddesa), ibid. On Up. days laymen take upon themselves the Up. vows that is to say, the eight Sīlas, during the day. See Sīla The day in the middle of the month is called cātudassiko or paṇṇarasiko according as the month is shorter or longer The reckoning is not by the month (māsa), but by the half-month (pakkha), so the twenty-third day is simply aṭṭhamī, the same as the eighth day. There is an accasional Up. called sāmaggi-uposatho, “reconciliation-Up.”, which is held when a quarrel among the fraternity has been made up, the gen. confession forming as it were a seal to the reconciliation (Vin v.123; Mah. 42) ■ Vin i.111 Vin i.112, Vin i.175, Vin i.177; Vin ii.5, Vin ii.32, Vin ii.204, Vin ii.276; Vin iii.164, Vin iii.169; DN iii.60, DN iii.61, DN iii.145, DN iii.147; AN i.205 sq. (3 uposathas: gopālaka˚ nigaṇṭha˚, ariya˚), 208 (dhamm˚), 211 (devatā˚); iv.248 (aṭṭhanga-samannāgata), 258 sq. (id.), 276, 388 (navah angehi upavuttha); v.83; Snp 153 (pannaraso u); Vb 422; Vism 227 (˚sutta = AN i.206 sq.); Sdhp 439; DN-a i.139; Snp-a 199; Vv-a 71, Vv-a 109; Pv-a 66, Pv-a 201 ■ The hall or chapel in the monastery in which the Pāṭimokkha is recited is called uposathaggaṃ (Vin iii.66), or ˚āgāraṃ (Vin i.107; Dhp-a ii.49). The Up. service is called ˚kamma (Vin i.102; Vin v.142; Ja i.232; Ja iii.342, Ja iii.444; Dhp-a i.205) uposathaṃ karoti to hold the Up. service (Vin i.107 Vin i.175, Vin i.177; Ja i.425). Keeping the Sabbath (by laymen is called uposathaṃ upavasati (AN i.142, AN i.144, AN i.205, AN i.208 AN iv.248; see upavasati), or uposathavāsaṃ vasati (Ja v.177) The ceremony of a layman taking upon himself the eight sīlas is called uposathaṃ samādiyati (see sīlaṃ & samādiyati); uposatha-sīla observance of the Up. (Vv-a 71) The Up. day or Sabbath is also called uposatha-divasa (J iii.52).
Vedic upavasatha, the eve of the Soma sacrifice, day of preparation
(adj.)
1. belonging to the Uposatha in phrase anuposathikaṃ (adv.) on every U., i.e. every fortnight Vin iv.315.
2. observing the Sabbath fasting (cp. BSk. uposadhika Mvu ii.9); Vin i.58; iv. 75, 78; Ja iii.52; Vism 66 (bhatta); Dhp-a i.205.
fr. uposatha
(adj.) = uposathika, fasting Mvu 17, Mvu 6.
fr. upusatha
indexed at Ud iii.2 wrongly for upakkitaka (q.v.).
(adj.)
1. “boiled out”, scorched, seared, dried or shrivelled up; in phrase itthiṃ uppakkaṃ okiliniṃ okiriniṃ Vin iii.107 = SN ii.260; expld. by Bdhgh. Vin iii.273 as “kharena agginā pakkasarīra”.
2. “boiled up”, swollen (of eyes through crying) Ja vi.10.
fr. ud + pac, cp. Sk. pakva & see also uppaccati
flying up Thig 248 (see under upacca)); SN i.209 (v.l. BB. upecca, C. uppatitvā pi sakuṇo viya) = Pv ii.717 (= uppatitvā Pv-a 103) = Dhp-a iv.21 (gloss uppatitvā) = Ne 131 (upecca).
ger. of uppatati
in ppr. uppacciyamāna (so read for upapacciyamāna, as suggested by v.l. BB. uppajj˚) “being boiled out”, i.e. dried or shrivelled up (cp. uppakka 1) Ja iv.327. Not with Morris JP T S. 1887, 129 “being tormented”, nor with Kern, Toev. under upapacc˚ as ppr. to pṛc (*upapṛcyamāna) “dicht opgesloten”, a meaning foreign to this root.
ud + paccati, Pass. of pac
to come out, to arise, to be produced, to be born or reborn, to come into existence DN i.180; Snp 584; Pv ii.111 (= nibbattati Pv-a 71); Pv-a 8 (nibbattati + ), 9, 20, 129 (= pātubhavati); DN-a i.165. Pass. uppajjiyati Vin i.50 ■ ppr. uppajjanto Pv-a 5 Pv-a 21; fut. ˚pajjissati Pv-a 5 (bhummadevesu, corresp. with niraye nibbattissati ibid.), 67 (niraye); aor. uppajji Pv-a 21, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 66; & udapādi (q.v.) Vin iii.4; Ja i.81; ger ˚pajjitvā DN ii.157 = SN i.6, SN i.158 = SN ii.193 = Ja i.392 = Thag 1159; & uppajja Ja iv.24 ■ Caus. uppādeti (q.v.). pp. uppanna (q.v.). See also upapajjati and upapanna.
ud + pajjati of pad
(adj.-n..) coming into existence; birth, rebirth Pv-a 9 (˚vasena), 33 (id.).
fr. uppajjati
(adj.) (belonging to) coming into existence, i.e. arising suddenly or without apparent cause, in ˚bhaṇḍa a treasure trove Ja iii.150.
fr. uppajjana
one who produces or is reborn in (with acc.) DN i.143 (saggaṃ etc.).
n. ag. fr. uppajjati
lit. “out of reach”, i.e. in a distance Ja i.89; or impossible Vism 96 (ekapañho pi u. āgato nâhosi not one question was impossible to be understood). As tt. g. “with reference to the preceding”, supra Vism 272; Snp-a 124, Snp-a 128; Dhs-a 135 (T. ˚paṭipāṭika).
abl. of uppaṭipāṭi, ud + paṭipāṭi
(f.) ridiculing, mocking Mil 357; Vism 29; PugA 250 (˚kathā).
abstr. fr. ut + paṇd or unknown etym.
(adj.) “having become very pale” (?), or “somewhat pale” (?), with dubbaṇṇa in Khp, A 234, and in a stock phrase of three different settings, viz. (1) kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo upp˚ dhamani-santhata-gatto Vin i.276 Vin iii.19, Vin iii.110; MN ii.121; distorted to BSk. bhīto utp˚. kṛśāluko durbalako mlānako at Divy 334 ■ (2) kiso upp˚. Ja vi.71; Dhp-a iv.66 ■ (3) upp˚ dhamanisanth˚ Ja i.346; Ja ii.92 Ja v.95; Dhp-a i.367. Besides in a doubtful passage at Pv ii.112 (upakaṇḍakin, v.l. uppaṇḍ˚ BB.), expld. at Pv-a 72 “upakaṇḍakajāta”, vv.ll. uppaṇḍaka˚ and uppaṇḍupaṇḍuka˚.
redupl. intens. formation; ud + paṇḍu + ka + jāta; paṇḍu yellowish. The word is evidently a corruption of something else, perhaps upapaṇṇḍuka upa in meaning of “somewhat like”, cp. upanīla upanibha etc. and reading at Pv ii.113 upakaṇḍakin. The latter may itself be a corruption, but is expld. at Pv-a 72 by upakaṇḍaka-jāta “shrivelled up all over, nothing but pieces (?)”. The trsln. is thus doubtful; the BSk. is the P. form retranslated into utpāṇḍuka Divy 334, Divy 463, and trsld. “very pale”
to ridicule, mock, to deride, make fun of Vin i.216, Vin i.272, Vin i.293; iv. 278; AN iii.91 = Pp 67 (ūhasati ullapati + ); Ja v.288 Ja v.300; Dhp-a ii.29; Dhp-a iii.41; Pv-a 175 (avamaññati + ). Note. The BSk. utprāsayati at Divy 17 represents the P uppaṇḍeti & must somehow be a corruption of the latter (vv.ll. at Divy 17 are utprāśayati, utprāṇayati & utprāśrayati).;
ut + paṇḍ, of uncertain origin
to fly or rise up into the air; to spring upwards, jump up; 3rd sq. pret. udapatta [Sk *udapaptat] Ja iii.484 (so read for ˚patto, & change si to pi); ger. uppatitvā Ja iii.484; Ja iv.213; Pv-a 103, Pv-a 215; and uppacca (q.v.) ■ pp. uppatita (q.v.).
ud + patati
jumped up, arisen, come about Snp 1 (= uddhamukhaṃ patitaṃ gataṃ Snp-a 4), 591; Dhp 222 (= uppanna Dhp-a iii.301); Thag 371.
pp. of uppatati
(f.) coming forth, product, genesis, origin, rebirth, occasion AN ii.133 (˚paṭilābhikāni sanyojanāni); Vb 137 (˚bhava), 411; cp. Compendium, 262 f. (khaṇa); Mil 127 (˚divasa); Vism, 571 sq. (˚bhava 9 fold: kāma˚ etc.); Snp-a 46, Snp-a 159, Snp-a 241, Snp-a 254, Snp-a 312, Snp-a 445; Pv-a 144, Pv-a 215. On uppatti deva see deva and upapatti. See also aṭṭhuppatti, dānuppatti.
Vedic utpatti, ud + pad
a wrong road or course DN i.10 (˚gamana, of planets); SN i.38, SN i.43; Ja v.453; vi. 235; Dhp-a iii.356 (˚cāra).
Sk. utpatha, ud + patha
born, reborn, arisen, produced, DN i.192 (lokaṃ u. born into the world); Vin iii.4; Snp 55 ˚ñāṇa; see Nd ii.168), 998; Ja i.99; Pv ii.22 (pettivisayaṃ) Dhs 1035, Dhs 1416; Vb 12, Vb 17, Vb 50, Vb 319; Vb 327; Dhp-a iii.301; Pv-a 21 (petesu), 33, 144, 155 ■ anuppanna not arisen MN ii.11; not of good class DN i.97 (see DA i.267).
pp. of uppajjati
to leave the Order Dhp-a i.68; Pv-a 55 ■ pp. ˚pabbajita ■ Caus. uppabbājeti to turn out of the Order Ja iv.219; Dhp-a iv.195 ■ Caus II. uppabbajāpeti to induce some one to leave the Order Ja iv.304.
ud + pabbajati
one who has left the community of bhikkhus, an ex-bhikkhu Vv-a 319; Dhp-a i.311.
ud + pabbajita
the (blue) lotus; a waterlily. The 7 kinds of lotuses, mentioned at Ja v.37 are: nīla-ratta-set-uppala, ratta-seta-paduma, seta-kumuda kalla-hāra ■ DN i.75; DN ii.19; Vin iii.33 (˚gandha); Ja ii.443; Dhp 55; Vv 322; 354; Pv ii.120; iii.105; Dhp-a i.384 (nīl˚); iii.394 (id.); Thag-a 254, Thag-a 255; Vv-a 132, Vv-a 161. What is meant by uppala-patta (lotus-leaf?) at Vin iv.261?
Sk. utpala, uncertain etym.
“lotus-like”, Name of a hell (cp. BSk. utpala at Divy 67 etc.) AN v.173. See also puṇḍarika.
uppala + ka
(adj.-n.) having lotuses rich in l., only in f. uppalinī a lotus-pond DN i.75; DN ii.38; SN i.138; AN iii.26; Vv 322; DN-a i.219.
fr. uppala
to sound out or forth, to make sound Mil 21 (dhamma-sankhaṃ). Reading at DN ii.337 is upaḷāseti in same meaning.
ud + pra + las, cp. Sk. samullāsayati in same meaning
an insect, vermin SN i.170 (santhāro ˚ehi sañchanno “a siesta-couch covered by vermin swarm” trsld. p. 215 & note).;
fr. ud + paṭ; in meaning of “biting, stinging”
(nt.) pulling out, uprooting, destroying, skinning Ja i.454; Ja ii.283; Ja vi.238; Mil 166; Pv-a 46 (kes˚); Sdhp 140 (camm˚). Cp. sam˚.
fr. ud + paṭ;
(adj.) pulling up, tearing out, uprooting Ja i.303 (˚vāta); iv.333 (id.).
fr. uppāṭana
to split, tear asunder; root out, remove, destroy Vin ii.151 (chaviṃ to skin); MN ii.110 (attānaṃ); Thig 396 (ger. uppāṭiyā = ˚pāṭetvā Thag-a 259); Ja i.281 (bījāni) iv.162, 382; vi.109 (= luñcati); Mil 86; Dhp-a iii.206. Caus. uppāṭāpeti in pp. uppāṭāpita caused to be torn off Dhp-a iii.208. See also upphāleti.
Sk. utpāṭayati, Caus. uf ud + paṭ; to split, cp. also BSk. utpāṭayati nidhānaṇ to dig out a treasure Av Ś i.294
flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen DN i.9 (v.l. uppāta) Vism 30 (T. uppāta, v.l. uppāda) Snp 360; Ja i.374; vi. 475; Mil 178.
Sk. utpāta, ud + pat
coming into existence, appearance, birth Vin i.185; DN i.185; SN iii.39 (+ vaya) iv.14; v.30; AN i.152 (+ vaya), 286, 296; ii.248 (taṇh˚) iii.123 (citt˚ state of consciousness); iv.65 (id.); Dhp 182 Dhp 194; Ja i.59, Ja i.107 (sat˚); Vb 303 (citt˚), 375 (taṇh˚) Pv-a 10; Thag-a 282 ■ anuppāda either “not coming into existence” DN iii.270, MN i.60; AN i.286, AN i.296; AN ii.214, AN ii.249 AN iii.84 sq.; Pts i.59, Pts i.66; Dhs 1367; or “not ripe” DN i.12.
Sk. utpāda, ud + pad
(adj.) (-˚) producing, generating Pv-a 13 (dukkh˚). f. ˚ikā Dhp-a iv.109 (jhān’).
fr. uppāda2
(nt.) making, generating, causing Pv-a 71 (anubal˚ read for anubalappadāna?) 114.
fr. uppada2
(adj.) having an origin, arising, bound to arise Dhs 1037, Dhs 1416; Vb 17, Vb 50, Vb 74, Vb 92 and passim; Dhs-a 45.
fr. uppāda2
one who produces, causes or brings into existence, creator, producer MN i.79; SN i.191; SN iii.66; SN v.351; Mil 217.
n. ag. fr. uppādeti
1. to give rise to, to produce, put forth, show, evince, make DN i.135 MN i.162, MN i.185; Pp 25; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 19, Pv-a 59; Sdhp 539 cittaṃ u. to give a (temporary) thought to (with loc. Ja i.81; Mil 85; Dhp-a ii.89; Pv-a 3.
2. to get, obtain find Ja iv.2; Mil 140; Dhp-a i.90; Pv-a 121.
3 in lohitaṃ u. to draw (blood) Mil 214.
Caus. of uppajjati, ud + pad
(& Uplavati)
1. to emerge (out of water), to rise, float SN iv.313 (uplava imper.); Mil 80, Mil 379; Vv-a 47 (uplavitvā, v.l. uppalavitvā); DN-a i.256 (v.l. upari lavati).
2. to jump up frisk about, to be elated or buoyant Ja ii.97 (cp. Morris JP T S. 1887, 139); Mil 370 ■ See also upaplavati uplāpeti & ubbillāvita etc.;
Sk. utplavati, ud + plu, cp. utplutya jumping up, rising Sp. Avs i.209
(adj.) oppressing or oppressed: an˚; free from oppression, not hurt or destroyed DN i.135 (opp sa-uppīḷa; T. upapīḷa but v.l. upp˚); Ja iii.443; Ja v.378; Pv-a 161.
ud + pīḍ
pressed Ja vi.3.
pp. of uppīḷeti
1. to press (down) on to, to hold (tight to (with acc.), to cover up or close MN i.539 (piṭṭhi-pāṇiṃ hanukena); Ja i.483 (hatthena akkhīni); ii.245 (hatthikumbhe mukhaṃ); v.293 (aggalaṃ); Thag-a 188.
2. to stampede Vv-a 83 (paṭhaviṃ).
ud + pīḍ for ava + pīḍ, cp. uplāpeti = opilāpeti, & opīḷeti
to beat Pv-a 4.
ud + poṭheti
at Dhp-a i.309 remains to be explained, T. faulty.
to cut, rip or split open Vin i.276 (udara-cchaviṃ upphāletvā; v.l. uppāṭetvā, perhaps preferable).
Caus. of ud + phal
(adj.) “with ribs out”, i.e. with ribs showing emaciated, thin, “skinny” Pv ii.11 (= uggata-phāsuka Pv-a 68); iv.101 (MSS. uppā˚); Thag-a 133 (spelt uppā˚).
ud + phāsulikā for phāsukikā = phāsuka a rib
to immerse MN i.135 (vv.ll. upal˚ & opil˚); Ja iv.162 (fig. put into the shade, overpower; v.l. upal˚). See also opilāpeti ubbillāvita;.
Sk. avaplāvayati, Caus. of ava + plu, with substitution of ud for ava; see also uppilavati
(adj.) going out of its direction, going wrong (or upset?), in phrase; ubbaṭumaṃ rathaṃ karoti to put a cart out of its direction AN iv.191, AN iv.193.
ud + *vṛti (of vṛt ) + ma (for mā → mant); cp. Sk. udvṛtta & vṛtimant
to anoint, give perfumes (to a guest), to shampoo Ja i.87 (gandhacuṇṇena), 238 (id.); v.89, 438.
Caus. of ud + vṛt, as doublet of ubbatteti, cp. BSk. udvartayati Divy 12, Divy 36
misprint in Pp Index as well as at Pp A 233 for ubbhaṭṭhaka (q.v.).
to go upwards, to rise, swell Ja vi.486 (sāgaro ubbatti). See also next.
ud + vṛt
1. to tear out Ja i.199; Mil 101 (sadevake loke ubbattiyante); Dhp-a i.5 (hadayamaṃsaṃ) 75 (rukkhaṃ).
2. to cause to swell or rise Ja iii.361 (Gangāsotaṃ); iv.161 (samuddaṃ).
3. (intrs.) to go out of direction, or in the wrong direction Vism 327 (neva ubbaṭṭati na vivaṭṭati; v.l. uppaṭṭati); Dhp-a iii.155.
Caus. of ud + vṛt, of which doublet is ubbaṭṭeti; cp. also ubbaṭuma
to kill, destroy Snp 4 (praet. udabbadhi = ucchindanto vadheti Snp-a 18).
ud + vadhati
to hang up, strangle Vin iii.73 (rajjuyā); Ja i.504 (id.); iii.345; Thig 80; Vism 501; Vv-a 139, Vv-a 207 (ubbandhitu-kāmā in the intention of hanging herself).
ud + bandhati
(f.) fertile soil, sown field; fig. woman, wife Ja vi.473 (= orodha C.).
Sk. urvarā, Av. urvara plant
see ubbisati.
(adj.) (-˚) only in cpd. dur˚ hard to pull out, difficult to remove Thag 124, Thag 495 = Thag 1053.
fr. ud + vṛh, i.e. to ubbahati1
to pull out, take away, destroy Snp 583 (udabbahe pot. = ubbaheyya dhāreyya Snp-a 460); Thag 158; Ja ii.223 (udabbahe = udabbaheyya C.); iv.462 (ubbahe); vi.587 (= hareyya C.).
ud + bṛh or vṛh, see also uddharati
to carry away, take away, lift (the corn after cutting); only in Caus. II. ubbahāpeti to have the corn harvested Vin ii.180 = AN i.241 ■ Here belong uddhaṭa and uddharaṇa. Cp. also pavāḷha.
ud + vahati, although possibly same as ubbahati1, in meaning of uddharati, which has taken up meanings of *udbharati, as well as of *udbṛhati and *udvahati
oppressed, troubled, harassed, annoyed vexed Vin i.148, Vin i.353; Vin ii.119; Vin iv.308; Ja i.300; Vism 182 (kuṇapa-gandhena); Dhp-a i.343.
adj. pp. of ud + bāhati = vāh or more likely of ud + bādh
“to be dis-inhabited”, i.e. to be abandoned by the inhabitants Mvu 6, Mvu 22 (= chaḍḍīyati C.) ■ Cp. ubbisati.
Pass. of ubbāseti, ud + vas
(nt.) carrying, lifting, in ˚samattha fit for carrying, i.e. a beast of burden, of an elephant Ja vi.448.
fr. ubbahati2
(f.) a method of deciding on the expulsion of a bhikkhu, always in instr. ubbāhikāya “by means of a referendum”, the settlement of a dispute being laid in the hands of certain chosen brethren (see Vin Texts iii.49 sq. Vin ii.95, Vin ii.97, Vin ii.305; Vin v.139, Vin v.197; AN v.71; Mvu 4, Mvu 46.
orig. f. of ubbāhika, adj. fr. ubbāheti in abstr. use
to oppress vex, hinder, incommodate Ja v.417 sq.
hardly to be decided whether fr. ud + vāh (to press, urge), or bṛh or bādh; cp. uddharati 2
agitated, flurried, anxious Vin ii.184; SN i.53; Thag 408; Ja i.486; Ja iii.313; Mil 23, Mil 236, Mil 340 (an˚); Vism 54 (satat˚); Dhp-a ii.27 Thag-a 267; Sdhp 8, Sdhp 77.
Sk. udvigna, pp. of ud + vij
to be agitated, frightened or afraid Vin i.74 (u. uttasati palāyati); iii.145 (id.); SN i.228 (aor. ubbijji); Mil 149 (tasati + ), 286 (+ saṃviji) Vism 58 ■ Caus. ubbejeti (q.v.) ■ pp. ubbigga (q.v.).
Pass. of ud + vij
(f.) agitation, uneasiness DN-a i.111. Cp. ubbega.
abstr. fr. ubbijjati
(adj.) being outside the Vinaya, ex-or un-Vinaya, wrong Vinaya Vin ii.307; Dpvs v.19.
ud + vinaya
(v.l. uppilāva, which is prob. the correct reading] joyous state of mind, elation Ud 37. See next.
(according to the very plausible expln. given by Morris JP T S. 1887, 137 sq. for uppilāpita, pp. of uppilāpeti = uplāpeti d. under uppilavati ud + plu; with ll for l after cases like Sk. ālīyate → P allīyati, ālāpa → allāpa etc., and bb for pp as in vanibbaka = Sk. vanīpaka (*vanipp˚)] happy, elated, buoyant, ltt frisky; only in cpds. ˚atta rejoicing, exultancy, elation of mind DN i.3, DN i.37; Ja iii.466; Mil 183; DN-a i.53, DN-a i.122; and ˚ākāra id. Dhp-a i.237. At Vism 158 “cetaso ubbilāvitaṃ stands for ubbilāvitattaṃ, with v.l. BB uppilāvitaṃ. Cp Ja v.114 (ubbilāvita-cittatā).
elation, elated state of mind MN iii.159; ˚bhāva id. DN-a i.122; Sdhp 167. See next.
either a secondary formation fr. ubbilāvita, or representing uppilava (uppilāva) for upplava, ud + plu as discussed under ubbilāvita. The BSk. word udvilya Lal. V. 351, 357, or audvilya Divy 82 is an artificial reconstruction from the Pāli, after the equation of Sk dvādaśa → dial. P. bārasa, whereas the original Sk. dv is in regular P. represented by dd, as in dvīpa → dīpa *udvāpa → uddāpa. Müller’s construction ubbilla → *udvela rests on the same grounds, see P. Gr. 12.
“to be out home”, to live away from home Ja ii.76 ■ See also ubbāsīyati ■ pp. ubbisita (˚kāle) ibid.
better reading v.l. ubbasati, ud + vas
see uruḷhavant.
excitement, fright, anguish DN iii.148; later, also transport, rapture, in cpd (˚pīti); Vism 143; Dhs-a 124; PugA 226.
Sk. udvega, fr. ud + vij
(adj.) full of anguish or fear Ja iii.313 (= ubbegavant C.).
fr. ubbega
(adj.) agitating, causing anxiety Ja i.323, Ja i.504.
fr. ubbejeti
a terrifier, a terror to AN ii.109 (˚etar); iv.189 (id.); Pp 47, Pp 48 (= ghaṭṭetvā vijjhītvā ubbegappattaṃ karotī ti PugA 226).
n. ag. fr. ubbejeti
to set into agitation, terrify, frighten Mil 388 (˚jayitabba grd.); PugA 226.
Caus. of ud + vij
(nt.) an envelope, wrap Ja vi.508.
fr. ud + veṣṭ;
height, only as measure, contrasted with āyāma length, & vitthāra width Ja i.29 (v.219; asīti-hatth˚), 203 (yojana-sahass˚); Vv-a 33 (yojana˚) 66 (asīti-hatth˚), 158 (hattha-sat˚), 188 (soḷasa-yojan˚), 221 339; Pv-a 113. See also pabbedha.
ud + vedha of vyadh
to be moved, to shake (intrs.), quiver, quake Ja vi.437 (= kampati C.).
ud + vedhati = Sk. vyathate
(& Ubbha˚) (indecl.) up, over, above, on top Ja v.269 (ubbhaṃ yojanaṃ uggata); in cpds. like ubbhakkhakaṃ above the collar bone Vin iv.213; ubbhajānumaṇḍalaṃ above the knee Vin iv.213; ubbhamukha upwards SN iii.238; Mil 122.
a doublet of uddhaṃ, see uddhaṃ iii.
(adj.) standing erect or upright DN i.167; MN i.78, MN i.92, MN i.282, MN i.308, MN i.343; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Pp 55 (ubb˚; = uddhaṃ ṭhitaka PugA 233).
ubbha + ṭha + ka of sthā, prob. contracted fr. ubbhaṭṭhitaka
bundled up, fixed up, wrapped up, full Vin i.287.
pp. of ubbhaṇḍeti, ud + *bhaṇḍ, cp. bhāṇḍa
drawn out, pulled out, brought out, thrown out or up withdrawn Vin i.256 (kaṭhina, cp. uddhāra & ubbhāra) iii.196 (id.); DN i.77 (cp uddharati); MN i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhihi); Dhp 34 (okamokata u. = *okamokataḥ u.); Ja i.268; Pv-a 163.
pp. of uddharati with bbh for ddh as in ubbhaṃ for uddhaṃ; cp. ubbahati and see also the doublet uddhaṭa
birth, origination, production Pgdp 91 (dānassa phal˚). Cp. BSk. udbhāvanā Divy 184 (guṇ˚ 492 (id.).
ud + bhava
= uddhāra (suspension, withdrawal, removal) Vin i.255, Vin i.300; Vin v.136, Vin v.175; cp. Vin Texts i.19; ii.157.
to burst upwards, to spring up out of the ground, to well up; to sprout DN i.74 = MN iii.93 = MN iii.26; Ja i.18 (v.104); Dhp 339 (ger. ubbhijja uppajitvā Dhp-a iv.49); DN-a i.218 ■ pp. ubbhinna.
ud + bhid
(nt.) kitchen salt Vin i.202, cp. Vin Texts ii.48.
Sk. udbhida
(adj.) breaking or bursting forth, in cpd. ˚odaka “whose waters well up”, or “spring water DN i.74; MN i.276; DN-a i.218.
fr. ud + bhid
springing up, welling up Dhp i.218.
pp. of ubbhijjati
to bend up, to lift up (forcibly), ger. ˚itvā in meaning of “forcibly” Vin ii.222; Vin iii.40.
ud + bhuj
see ubho; cp. ubhato & ubhaya.;
(adv.) both, twofold, in both (or two) ways, on both sides usually ˚-, as ˚bhāgavimutta one who is emancipated in two ways DN ii.71; Dialogues ii.70, n. 1; MN i.477 (cp. 385 ˚vimaṭṭha); SN i.191; AN i.73; AN iv.10, AN iv.77; Png 14 73; Ne 190; ˚byañjanaka (vyañj˚) having the characteristics of both sexes, hermaphrodite Vin i.89, Vin i.136, Vin i.168 Vin iii.28; v. 222; ˚saṅgha twofold Sangha, viz. bhikkhu˚ bhikkhunī Vin ii.255; Vin iv.52, Vin iv.242, Vin iv.287; Mvu 3234. See further Vin ii.287 (˚vinaye); DN i.7 (˚lohitaka, cp. DN-a i.87); MN i.57 (˚mukha tied up at both ends), 129 (˚daṇḍakakakaca a saw with teeth on both sides), 393 (koṭiko pañho SN iv.323 (id.).
abl. of *ubha, to which ubhaya & ubho
(adj.) both, twofold Snp 547, Snp 628, Snp 712, Snp 1106, Snp 1107, Snp 801 (˚ante); Nd i.109 (˚ante) Ja i.52; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 24, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 51 ■ nt. ˚ṃ as adv. in combn. with ca c’ûbhayaṃ following after 2nd. part of comprehension) “and both” for both-and; and also, alike, as well Dhp 404 (gahaṭṭhehi anāgārehi c’ûbhayaṃ with householders and houseless alike); Pv i.69 ■ Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as fem. pl. of ubho (= duve Pv-a 86).
-aṃsa lit. both shoulders or both parts, i.e. completely thoroughly, all round (˚-) in ˚bhāvita thoroughly trained DN i.154 (cp. DN-a i.312 ubhaya-koṭṭhāsāya bhāvito).
*ubha + ya, see ubho
in both places, in both cases Vin i.107; AN iii.64; Dhp 15–17; Dhp-a i.29 (˚ettha), 30; Pv-a 130.
adv.) [Sk. ubhayatra, fr. ubhaya
(udj.) both; nom. acc. ubho SN i.87; AN iii.48 = Iti 16; Iti 43 = Snp 661 = Dhp 306; Snp 220 Snp 543, Snp 597; Dhp 74, Dhp 256, Dhp 269; Dhp 412; Nd i.109; Pv i.76 Ja i.223; Ja ii.3; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 82 (tā ubho) ■ ubhantaṃ both ends, both sides Snp 1042 (see Nd ii.169; Snp-a 588 expls. by ubho ante) ■ gen. ubhinnaṃ SN i.162; ii. 222; Ja ii.3 instr. ubhohi (hatthehi) Vin ii.256; Ja iv.142; loc. ubhosu Snp 778 (antesu); Ja i.264 (passesu; Pv-a 94 (hatthesu). Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as a nom. fem. (= duve Pv-a 86).
Sk. ubhau, an old remnant of a dual form in Pāli; cp. Gr. α ̓́μφω both, Lat. ambo, Lith. abū, Goth. bai Ohg. beide = E. both. To prep ■ adv. *amb, *ambi; see abhi & cp. also vīsati
1. an underground watercourse, a conduit, main MN i.171; AN ii.189; Ja vi.426, Ja vi.432; Snp-a 50 (“ummaggo paññā pavuccati”) Dhp-a i.252 (˚cora); ii.37 (v l. umanga); iv.104; Pv-a 44 (read with v.l. SS kummagga).
2. a side track, a wrong way, devious way SN i.193 (v.l. ˚manga) = Thag 1242; SN iv.195; AN iv.191.
ud + magga, lit. “off-track”
“out luck”, i.e. unlucky; or “one who has gone off the right path” Vin v.144.
ud + manga (?) or for ummagga, q.v. for vv.ll.
(adj.) out of one’s mind, mad SN v.447 (+ viceta); Ja v.386; Mil 122; Sdhp 88; Pv-a 40 (˚puggala read with v.l. SS for dummati puggala). Cp. next & ummāda.
-rūpa like mad, madly, insane Pv i.81; ii.62 (where Ja iii.156 has santaramāna).
ud + matta of mad
(adj.) = ummatta; Vin i.123, Vin i.321; Vin ii.60, Vin ii.80; Vin iii.27, Vin iii.33; AN iv.248; Vism 260 (reason for); Mil 277; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 93 (˚vesa appearance of a madman), 95. f. ummattikā Vin iv.259, Vin iv.265; Thag-a 111.
to rub something on (acc.) Vin ii.107 = Vin ii.266 (mukhaṃ).
ud + maddeti, Caus. of mṛd
to touch, take hold of, lift up Vin iii.121. Cp. next.
ud + masati of mṛś.
(f.) lifting up Vin iii.121 (= uddhaṃ uccāraṇā).
abstr. fr. ummasati
(f.) flax, only in cpd. ˚puppha the (azure) flower of flax MN ii.13 = AN v.61 (v.l. dammā˚ ummāta˚); DN ii.260; Thag 1068; Dhs-a 13. Also (m. Name of a gem Mil 118.
cp. Sk. umā
madness, distraction, mental aberration SN i.126 (˚ṃ pāpuṇeyya citta-vikkhepaṃ vā); AN ii.80 AN iii.119; AN v.169; Pp 69; Pv-a 6 (˚patta frantic, out of mind), 94 (˚vāta), 162 (˚patta).
ud + māda
(f.) (or ˚aṃ nt.) maddening Snp 399 (+ mohanaṃ = paraloke ummādanaṃ ihaloke mohanaṃ Snp-a 377); Thag-a 2, Thag-a 357 (cp. Thag-a 243).
abstr. fr. ummāda
- 1. a threshold Vin iv.160 (= indakhīla); Thig 410; Ja i.62; Ja iii.101; Vism 425; Dhp-a i.350.
2. a curb-stone Ja vi.11.
3. as uttar˚; (the upper threshold) the lintel Ja i.111; Dhp-a ii.5 (v.l. upari˚).
4. window-sash or sill Ja i.347; Ja iv.356.
according to Müller P. Gr. = Sk. udumbara (?)
(& Ummī) (f.) a wave Thag 681; Mil 346.
for the usual ūmi, cp. similar double forms of bhummi → bhūmi
to open one’s eyes Ja iii.96 (opp. nimisati; v.l. ummisati for ˚mīḷ˚?).
ud + misati
to urinate Vin i.78 (ūhanati + ).
ud + mih
to open one’s eyes Ja i.439; Ja ii.195; Ja iv.457; Ja vi.185; Mil 179, Mil 357 Mil 394; Vism 185, Vism 186; Dhp-a ii.28 (opp. ni˚); Vv-a 205, Vv-a 314.
Caus. of ud + mīl; opp. ni(m)mīleti
(nt.) a fire brand Vin iv.265; SN iv.92 (T. ummukka meaning “loosened”?); Ja ii.69 v.l. ˚kk), 404 (kk); iii.356.
Sk. ulmuka perhaps to Lat. adoleo, cp. also alāta firebrand; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. adoleo
to emerge, rise up (out of water) Vin i.180; SN iv.312; AN iv.11 sq; Ja ii.149, Ja ii.284; Ja iii.507 Ja iv.139; Pp 71; Mil 118; DN-a i.37, DN-a i.127; Pv-a 113.
ud + majj
(nt.) emerging Vism 175 (+ nimmujjana); DN-a i.115.
fr. ummujjati
(adj.) emerging AN ii.182.
ummujjamāna, ppr. med, of ummujjati, + ka
(f.) emerging, jumping out of (water), only in phrase ummujja-nimujjaṃ karoti to emerge & dive DN i.78; MN i.69; AN i.170; Ja iv.139; Ne 110; Vism 395 (= Pts ii.208).
fr. ummujjati
(adj.) “roots-out”, with roots showing, laying bare the roots Ja i.249 (˚ṃ karoti); Sdhp 452.
ud + mūla
(adj.) uprooting, laying bare the roots Ja i.303 (vāta).
= ummūla
to uproot, to root out Ja i.329.
Caus. fr. ummūla
to laugh out loud Ja ii.131 (= hasitaṃ karoti); iii.44; iv.197; v.299 (˚amāna hasamāna C.). Caus. umhāpeti Ja v.297.
Sk. *ut-smayate, ud + smi
(imper. 3rd. sg.) is v.l. BB. and C. reading at Ja vi.145, Ja vi.146 for dayassu, fly; probably for (i) yassu of yā to go.
to go out, to go away Ja ii.3, Ja ii.4 (imper. uyyāhi); iv.101 ■ Caus. uyyāpeti to cause to go away to bring or take out SN iv.312.
ud + yā
(nt.) a park, pleasure grove, a (royal) garden Ja i.120, Ja i.149; Ja ii.104; Ja iv.213 Ja v.95; Ja vi.333; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 74, Pv-a 76; Vv-a 7; Sdhp 7.
-kīḷā amusement in the park, sports Dhp-a i.220; Dhp-a iv.3 -pāla overseer of parks, head gardener, park keeper Ja ii.105, Ja ii.191; Ja iv.264 bhūmi garden ground, pleasure ground Ja i.58; Vv 6419; Pv ii.129; DN-a i.235.
Sk. udyāna, fr. ud + yā
exertion effort, endeavour Dhs 13, Dhs 22, Dhs 289, Dhs 571; Dhs-a 146.
Sk. udyama, ud + yam; P. uyyāma with ā for a, as niyāma → niyama; cp. BSk. udyama Jtm 210
to go away, depart, leave one’s house Dhp 91 (cp. Dhp-a ii.170) ■ pp. uyyutta ■ Caus uyyojeti (q.v.).
ud + yuj
(adj.) striving, busy (in a good or bad cause) Snp 247, Snp 248; Ja v.95.
ud + yuta
striving, active, zealous, energetic Ja i.232.
pp. of uyyuñjati
departure, approach of death Dhp 236 (cp. Dhp-a iii.335).
fr. ud + yuj
(nt.) inciting, instigation AN iv.233.
fr. uyyojeti
instigated Mil 228; Pv-a 105.
pp. of uyyojeti
1. to instigate Vin iv.235; Ja iii.265.
2. to dismiss, take leave of (acc.), send off let go Vin i.179; AN iii.75; Ja i.119 (bhikkhu-sanghaṃ) 293; iii.188; v.217; vi.72; Vism 91; Dhp-a i.14, Dhp-a i.15, Dhp-a i.398 Dhp-a ii.44; Vv-a 179; Pv-a 93 ■ pp. uyyojita (q.v.).
Caus. of uyyuñjati
(nt.) a plan of combat, sham fight Vin iv.107; DN i.6; AN v.65; DN-a i.85.
fr. ud + yudh
(m. nt.) & Uro (nt.)
1. the breast, chest ■ Cases after the nt. s ■ declension are instr. urasā Thag 27; Snp 609; & loc.; urasi Snp 255; Ja iii.148; iv. 118, also urasiṃ Ja iii.386 (= urasmiṃ C.). Other cases of nt. a-stem, e.g. instr. urena Ja iii.90; Pv-a 75; loc ure DN i.135; Ja i.156, Ja i.433, Ja i.447; Pv-a 62 (ure jāta; cp orasa) ■ Vin ii.105 (contrasted with piṭṭhi back); iv.129; Ja iv.3; Ja v.159, Ja v.202; Nd ii.659; Pv iv.108; Dhp-a iii.175; DN-a i.254; Dhs-a 321; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 66 ■ uraṃ deti (with loc.) to put oneself on to something with one’s chest fig. to apply oneself to Ja i.367, Ja i.401, Ja i.408; Ja iii.139, Ja iii.455 Ja iv.219; Ja v.118, Ja v.278.
2. (appld.) the base of a carriage pole Vv 6328 (= īsāmūla Vv-a 269).
-ga going on the chest, creeping, i.e. a snake SN i.69; Snp 1, Snp 604; Ja i.7; Ja iv.330; Ja vi.208; Vv 808; Pv i.121 (urena gacchati ti urago sappass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ Pv-a 63); Pv-a 61, Pv-a 67. -cakka an iron wheel (put on the chest), as an instrument of torture in Niraya Ja i.363, Ja i.414 -cchada “breast cover”, breast plate (for ornament) Vin ii.10; Ja iv.3; Ja v.215, Ja v.409; Ja vi.480; Thag-a 253. -ttāḷi beating one’s breast (as a sign of mourning & sorrow) MN i.86 MN i.136; AN ii.188; AN iii.54, AN iii.416; AN iv.293; Pv-a 39. -tthala the breast AN ii.174.
Sk. uras
a ram DN i.127; AN i.251 sq. AN ii.207; AN iv.41 sq.; Ja v.241; Pp 56; DN-a i.294; Dhp-a ii.6 See also orabbhika.
Sk. urabhra, with ulā & uraṇa to be compared with Gr.; ἀρήν wether, cp. Hom. εἰρος wool; Lat. vervex Ags. waru = E. ware (orig. sheepskins) = Ger. ware Here also belongs P. urāṇī
(f.) an ewe Ja v.241 (= urāṇikā C.); v.l. uraṇī & uraṇikā.;
or uraṇī?, f. of uraṇa, see urabbha
(adj.) [cp. Av. ravah space; Gr. εὐρυς wide; Lat. rūs free or wide space, field; Idg. *ru, *uer wide, to which also Goth. rūms space = Ags. rūm, E. room, Ger. raum wide, large; excellent, eminent Ja v.89; Mil 354; Sdhp 345, Sdhp 592 ■ pl. urū sands, soil Ja v.303.
(f.) freedom of the chest, free breathing, relief DN ii.269 (v.l. uruddhā perhaps preferable, for ura uddharana lifting or raising the chest).
ura + undā?
(adj.) large, bulky, immense; great big, strong. Only in one stock phrase “nāgo isādanto urūḷhavo” Vv 209, 439; Ja vi.488; of which variant n. ī ubbuḷhavā MN i.414 = MN i.450. The word is expld. at Ja vi.488 by “ubbāhana-samattha”; at Vv-a 104 (pl. urṳ̄ḷhavā) by “thāmajava-parakkamehi byūhanto (v.l. brahmanto) mahantaṃ yuddha-kiccaṃ vahituṃ samatthā ti attho”. The BSk. udviddha (Divy 7) may possibly be a corruption of ubbūḷha.
doubtful, prob. for urūḷhavant, with affix vant to a pp. formed with ud˚. The word is taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as ud-ūḷha of vah (with d for r). The well accredited (and older) variant ubbuḷhavā is expld. (see Kern, s. v.) as pp. of ud + bṛh2, cp. upabrūhana Perhaps we have to consider this as the legitimate form urūḷhava as its corruption. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 141 takes urūḷhavā as ud + rūḷha, pp. of ruh (with r. for rr = dr), thus “overgrown”
is a commentator’s invention; said to be = gacchati to go Vism 60 (in definition of paṃsu-kūla; paṃsu viya kucchita-bhāvaṃ ulatī ti paṃsu-kūlaṃ).
an owl Vin i.186 (˚camma, sandals of owl’s skin); iii.34; AN v.289 sq.; Ja ii.208, Ja ii.352 (as king of the birds); Mil 403; Dhp-a i.50 (kāka˚ crows & owls).;
-pakkha owls’ wings (used as dress) Vin i.305; DN i.167. -pakkhika dress of owls’ wings, or owl feathers AN i.241, AN i.296; AN ii.206; Pp 55 (= ulūka-pattāni ganthetvā kata-nivāsanaṃ Pp A 233).
Sk. ulūka; cp. Lat. ulucus & ulula owl, ululāre to howl, Ger. uhu; onomat. *ul, as in Gr. ὀλολύζω, Sk. ululi, Lith. ulůti
to leap up Ja iii.222 (udakato ˚itvā) ■ Caus. ullaṅgheti to make jump up (always with olangheti, i.e. to make dance up & down Vin iii.121; Ja v.434; Dhp-a iv.197 ■ pp. ullaṅghita (q v.).
ud + laṅgh, cp. BSk. prollanghya transgressing (= pra + ullangh˚) Divy 596
(f.) jumping up, lifting up, raising Vin iii.121; Ja iv.5 (˚samattha?).
abstr. fr. ud + laṅgh
being jumped on, set on C. on SN i.40 (see K. S. i.318) (for uḍḍita = taṇhāya ullanghita).
pp. of ullangheti
to call out, to talk to, lay claim to Vin i.97; Vin iii.105; Pp 67 (= katheti Pp A 249).
ud + lapati
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) calling out, enticing, laying claim to Vin iii.101; Thig 357; Mil 127; Thag-a 243 ■ ullapanā = uddhaṃ katvā lapanā Vism 27.
fr. ullapati
(adj.) only in acc. nt. ullahakaṃ used adverbially, in cpd. dant˚; after the manner of rubbing the teeth, by means of grinding the teeth MN iii.167. Seems to be a α ̔́πας λεγομένον.
?
is v.l. for uklāpa (q.v.).
(nt.) combing, scratching Vv-a 349; Thag-a 267.
fr. ud + likh
scratched, combed Vin i.254; Ja ii.92 (aḍḍhullikhitehi kesehi); Ud 22 (id. with upaḍḍh for aḍḍh˚); Vv-a 197.
pp. of ud + likh
to exhibit, show as a characteristic Vism 492.
Denom. of ud + linga
smeared; only in combn. ullittāvalitta smeared up & down, i.e. smeared all round Vin ii.117; MN ii.8; AN i.101, AN i.137; AN iv.231; Thag 737.
pp. of ud + lip
to take up, to help (with acc.), to save Vin ii.277; DN i.249.
ud + lup, cp. BSk. ullumpati Mahāvy § 268
(nt.) saving, helping; in phrase ˚sabhāva-saṇṭhita of a helping disposition, full of mercy DN-a i.177; Pv-a 35. Same as ullopana (q.v.).
fr. ullumpati
waved, shaken (by the wind); waving Ja vi.536.
pp. of ulloleti
doubtful in its meaning; occurs at Vin i.48 = Vin ii.209 as ullokā paṭhamaṃ ohāreti, trsl. Vin Texts by “a cloth to remove cobwebs”, but better by Andersen Pāli Reader as “as soon as it is seen”; at Vin ii.151 the translators give “a cloth placed under the bedstead to keep the stuffing from coming out”. See on term Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 31 ■ In cpd ulloka-paduma at Ja vi.432 it may mean “bright lotus” (lit. to be looked at) See ulloketi.
ud + lok˚
(adj.) looking on (to), looking out; in phrase mukh˚; looking into a person’s face; i.e. cheerful winning; or “of bright face”, with a winning smile DN i.60; DN-a i.59, DN-a i.168; Pv-a 219 (˚ika for ˚aka).
fr. ulloketi
looked at, looked on Ja i.253; DN-a i.193.
pp. of ulloketi
to look on to, look for, await Ja i.232 (ākāsaṃ), 253; ii.221, 434; DN-a i.153, DN-a i.168; Vv-a 316 ■ pp. ullokita (q.v.).
ud + lok˚, cp. loka, āloka & viloka
(nt.) = ullumpana Dhp-a i.309 (T. faulty; see remarks ad locum).
1. a wave Ja iii.228; Ja vi.394. - 2. commotion, unrest Ja iv.306, Ja iv.476.
fr. ud + lul
(f.) wavering, loitering (in expectation of something), greed Thag-a 243.
fr. ulloleti
to stroll or hang about, to wait for, expect Thag-a 243 ■ pp. ullulita.
denom. fr. ullola
(adj.) great, eminent, excellent, superb, lofty, noble, rich ■ Dhammapāla at Vv-a 10–11 distinguishes 3 meanings: tīhi atthehi ūḷāraṃ paṇītaṃ (excellent), seṭṭhaṃ (best), mahantaṃ (great) Vin iii.41 (˚bhoga); DN i.96; MN iii.38 (˚bhogatā); SN v.159; Snp 53, Snp 58, Snp 301; Nd ii.170; Ja i.399; Ja v.95; Vv 11 8426; Pv i.512 (= hita samiddha Pv-a 30); Vv-a 18 (˚pabhāva = mahānubhāva); Thag-a 173, Thag-a 280; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 6 Pv-a 7, Pv-a 8, Pv-a 25, Pv-a 30, Pv-a 43, Pv-a 58 and passim; Sdhp 26, Sdhp 260, Sdhp 416. Der. oḷārika (q.v.).
Vedic udāra, BSk. audāra
(f.) = uḷāratta Sdhp 254.
(nt.) greatness etc.; only neg. an˚; smallness, insignificance, inferiority Vv-a 24.
abstr. fr. uḷāra
a lunar mansion Mil 178.
Sk. uḍu, dialectical?
a ladle, a spoon Vin i.286; Ja i.120, Ja i.157; Ja iii.461; Mil 8; Dhp-a i.425; Dhp-a ii.3, Dhp-a ii.20; Dhp-a iv.75, Dhp-a iv.123.
dial.?
a raft, a float Vin i.230; Vin iii.63 (˚ṃ bandhati); Ja iv.2; Dhp-a ii.120.
dial.?
having entered, come in DN ii.274 (v.l. BK. upa˚).
= viṭṭha, pp. of viś, with prefixed u
a bull; often fig as symbol of manliness and strength (cp. nisabha) DN i.6 (˚yuddha bull-fight), 9 (˚lakkhaṇa signs on a b.), 127; Vin iii.39 (puris˚ “bull of a man”, a very strong man) AN i.188; AN ii.207; AN iv.41 sq., 376; v.347, 350; Snp 26 sq. 416, 646, 684; Dhp 422; Ja i.28 (v.203; ˚kkhandha broadshouldered), 336; v.99 (bharatûsabha); vi.136; Pp 56 Vism 153 (˚camma, in simile); Dhp-a i.396; Snp-a 226, Snp-a 333 Kp-a 144; Pv-a 163; Vv-a 85 ■ The compn. forms of usabha are āsabha, isabha (in nisabha) & esabha (q.v.) The relations between usabha, vasabha & nisabha are discussed at Snp-a 40.;
Vedic ṛṣabha; Av. aršan male, Gr. α ̓́ρσην, α ̓́ρρην masculine, to Idg. *eres & *rēs; to wet, sprinkle (with semen), as also in Sk. rasa juice, rasā wet, liquid, Lat rōs dew. A parallel root *ueres in Sk. varṣa rain, Gr ε ̓́ρση dew; Sk. vṛṣan & vṛṣabha bull
(nt.) a certain measure of length, consisting of 20 yaṭṭhis (see yaṭṭhi or 140 cubits Ja i.64 (eight), 70 (id.); ii.91; iv.17 (one) 142 (eight); Dhp-a i.108 (˚mattaṃ).
= usabha1, in special application (?)
(f.) (a certain) food Ja vi.80.
doubtful
(m. & nt.) the fragrant root of Andropogon Muricatum (cp. bīraṇa) Vin i.201; Vin ii.130 (˚mayā vijanī) SN ii.88 (˚nāḷi); AN ii.199 (id.); Dhp 337; Ja v.39; Thag 402 (˚attho).
Sk. uśīra
(m. & f) Sk. iṣu] an arrow Vin iii.106 (˚loma); DN i.9; MN i.86; MN iii.133; SN i.127; AN ii.117; AN iii.162; Ja iv.416 Ja vi.79, Ja vi.248, Ja vi.454; Mil 331, Mil 339; Snp-a 466; Pv-a 155.
-kāra an arrow-maker, fletcher MN ii.105; Dhp 80, Dhp 145 Thag 29; Ja ii.275; Ja vi.66; Dhp-a i.288.
(f.) heat Ja i.31 (= uṇha iii.55), 243; ii.433; Vism 172 (usuma-vaṭṭi-sadisa); DN-a i.186; Dhp-a i.225; Dhp-a ii.20.
the diaeretic form of Sk. uṣman, of which the direct equivalent is P. usmā (q.v.)
(adj.) envious, jealous Vin ii.190; Snp 318, Snp 325; Ja ii.192 (v.l. asuyy˚); v.114 ■ Note. The long vowel form usūyaka occurs in cpd. abbhusūyaka (q.v.). Spelling ussuyikā occurs at Vv 3321 (see Vv-a 147). Usuyyati & Usuyati;
fr. usuyyā
to be jealous or envious, to envy (with acc.) Vin i.242; Ja iii.27 (ppr. an-usuyyaṃ); Pv ii.320 (maṃ usūyasi = mayhaṃ issaṃ karosi Pv-a 87).
Sk. asūyati; fr. usuyā envy
(f.) & Usuyyitatta (nt.) are exegetical abstr. formations of usuyyā (q.v.). Dhs 1121; Pp 19. Usuyya & Usuya
(f.) envy, jealousy, detraction SN i.127 (ū); Snp 245 (u); Ja ii.193 (ū); iii.99 (ū; v.l. ussuyyā); Mil 402 (ū); Dhs 1121 (u); Vv-a 71 (u) Snp-a 332 (u).
Sk. asūyā
(f.) heat DN ii.335, DN ii.338; MN i.295; S ii. iii.143; iv.215, 294; v.212; Dhs 964; DN-a i.310 ■ In combn. with ˚kata it appears as usmī˚; e.g. at MN i.132, MN i.258.
-gata heated, belonging to heat Dhs 964; as tt. one who mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic Ja v.209 (samaṇateja C.; cp. BSk. uṣṇagata & uṣmagata Divy 166 Divy 240, Divy 271. 469, & see Kern’s mistakes at; Toev. s. v.).
see usumā
(adj.) superior, higher (opp. oma inferior) AN iii.359; Snp 860 (= Nd i.251 with spelling ossa), 954.
der. fr. ud = *ud-s(y)a, in analogy to oma fr. ava; but taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as an abbreviated ussada
to creep out or up to, to rise AN iii.241 sq.; Mil 260.
ud + sakkati, see sakkati
to endeavour Vism 437; Vv-a 95 (Caus. II. ussakkāpesi), 214.
by-form of ussukkati
(adj.) = ussankin AN iii.128; Dhp-a iii.485 (+ pari˚; cp. ā˚).
pp. of ud + śaṅk
(adj.) distrustful, fearful, anxious Vin ii.192.
fr. ud + śaṅk
(adj.) with ankles midway (?) in ˚pāda the 7th of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.17; DN iii.143, DN iii.154; DA explains: the ankles are not over the heels, but midway in the length of the foot.
ud + sankha
to dismiss, set free, take off, hurl AN iv.191.
ud + sṛj, cp. BSk. protsṛjati Divy 587
run away MN ii.65.
pp. of ud + sarati of sṛ; cp. saṭa for *sūta
: this word is beset with difficulties, the phrase satt-ussada is applied in all kinds of meanings, evidently the result of an original application & meaning having become obliterated satt˚ is taken as *sapta (seven) as well as *sattva (being), ussada as prominence, protuberance, fulness arrogance. The meanings may be tabulated as follows (1) prominence (cp. Sk. utsedha), used in characterisation of the Nirayas, as “projecting, prominent hells”, ussadanirayā (but see also below 4) Ja i.174; Ja iv.3, Ja iv.422 (pallankaṃ, v.l. caturassạṃ, with four corners); v.266 ■ adj prominent Thag-a 13 (tej-ussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi, or as below 4?).
2. protuberance, bump, swelling Ja iv.188 also in phrase sattussada having 7 protuberances, a qualification of the Mahāpurisa DN iii.151 (viz. on both hands, feet, shoulders, and on his back).
3. rubbing in, anointing, ointment; adj. anointed with (-˚), in candan˚ Ja iii.139; Ja iv.60; Thag 267; Vv 537; Dhp-a i.28; Vv-a 237.
4. a crowd adj. full of (-˚) in phrase sattussada crowded with (human beings) DN i.87 (cp. DN-a i.245: aneka-satta-samākiṇṇa; but in same sense BSk sapt- otsada Divy 620, Divy 621); Pv iv.18 (of Niraya = full of beings, expld. by sattehi ussanna uparûpari nicita Pv-a 221.
5. qualification, characteristic, mark, attribute, in catussada “having the four qualifications (of a good village)” Ja iv.309 (viz. plenty of people, corn, wood and water C.). The phrase is evidently shaped after DN i.87 (under 4). As “preponderant quality, characteristic” we find ussada used at Vism 103 (cf. Asl. 267) in combns. lobh˚, dos˚, moh˚, alobh˚ etc. (quoted from the “Ussadakittana”), and similarly at Vv-a 19 in Dhammapāla’s definition of manussa (lobh’ādīhi alobh’ādīhi sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā), viz. sattā manussa-jātikā tesu lobh’ ādayo alobh’ādayo ca ussadā.
6. (metaph.) self-elevation, arrogance, conceit, haughtiness Vin i.3; Snp 515, Snp 624 (an˚ = taṇhā-ussada-abhāvena Snp-a 467), 783 (expld. by Nd i.72 under formula sattussada; i.e. showing 7 bad qualities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc.), 855 ■ See also ussādana, ussādeti etc.
most likely to ud + syad; see ussanna
(adj.) over-full, overflowing AN iii.231, AN iii.234 (˚jāta, of a kettle, with vv.ll. ussuraka˚ & ussuka˚).;
fr. ussada 4
(adj.)
1. overflowing, heaped up, crowded; extensive, abundant preponderant, excessive, full of (˚-) Vin i.285 (cīvaraṃ u. overstocked; ii.270 (āmisaṃ too abundant); iii.286 Thig 444 (= upacita Thag-a 271); Ja i.48, Ja i.145 ˚kusalamūla); Dhp-a i.26 (id.); (lobho etc.) Asl. 267; Mil 223 (id.); Ja i.336 (kāla, fulfilled); iii.418; iv.140; Pv iii.51 (˚puñña, cp. Pv-a 197); Pv-a 71 (˚pabhā thick glow). Cp accussanna.
2. anointed Vv-a 237.
3. spread out wide Dhp-a ii.67 (mahāpaṭhavī u.), 72 (id.).
pp. of ud + syad, cp. abhisanna
(f.) accumulation, fulness, plenty Kv 467 (where Kvu trsln. p. 275 gives ussadattā); Vv-a 18, Vv-a 19.
abstr. fr. ussanna
in ˚vādika Vin iv.224 is a variant of usuyya˚; “using envious language, quarrelsome” ■ Another ussaya [fr. ud + śri, cp. Sk. ucchrita, P. ussita & ussāpeti meaning “accumulation” is found in cpd. samussaya only.
see udassaye.
to run out, run away Ja i.434 (imper. ussaratha); v.437 ■ pp. ussaṭa (q.v.) ■ Caus ussāreti (q.v.).
ud + sarati of sṛ;
feast, making merry, holiday Vin iii.249; Ja i.475; Ja ii.13, Ja ii.248; Vv-a 7, Vv-a 109 (˚divasa).
Sk. utsava
to be able, to be fit for, to dare, venture Vin i.47, Vin i.83; Vin ii.208; Vin iii.17; DN i.135; SN iv.308, SN iv.310; Mil 242; Vv-a 100 ■ Caus. ussāheti (see pp. ussāhita ).
ud + sah, cp. BSk. utsaha Jtm 215; utsahetavya Divy 494; utsahana Divy 490; ucchahate for utsahate Avs ii.21
throwing up on DN-a i.122.
fr. ussādeti
(nt.)
1. overflowing, piling up, abundance MN iii.230 (opp. apasādana).
2 (probably confused with ussāraṇa) tumult, uproar, confusion AN iii.91, AN iii.92 (v.l. ussāraṇa) = Pp 66 (= hatthiassarathâdīnaṃ c’eva balakāyassa ca uccāsadda-mahāsaddo Pp A 249).
to ussādeti, cp. ussādita
. [See ussāpita & ussārita under ussāpeti & ussāreti. There exists in Pāli as well as in BSk. a confusion of different roots to express the notion of raising, rising, lifting unfolding, viz.; sṛ, syad, śri, sad, chad. (See ussada ucchādana, ussādeti, ussāpeti, ussāreti)].
fr. ussādeti, BSk. ucchrāyita Divy 76, Divy 77, Divy 466
to be in abundance, to be over Vin ii.167.
Pass. med. of ussādeti, cp. ussada 4
1. to dismiss DN iii.128 [for ussāreti1]
2. to raise, cause to rise up on, haul up, pile up MN i.135; MN iii.230; AN iv.198, AN iv.201; Mil 187 Mil 250 ■ Pass. ussādiyati (q.v.) ■ pp. ussādita (q.v.).
denom. fr. ussada 1
(nt.) lifting up, raising, erecting, unfolding (of a flag or banner) AN iv.41; Nd ii.503 (dhamma-dhajassa).
fr. ussāpeti
lifted, raised, unfurled Mil 328 (dhamma-dhaja); Ja ii.219.
pp. of ussāpeti, cp. ussādita
to lift up, erect, raise, exalt Vin ii.195; AN iv.43; Ja ii.219; Ja iv.16; Ja v.95 (chattaṃ); Pv-a 75 (id.); Mil 21; Dhp-a i.3; Dhp-a iii.118 (kaṭṭhāni) ■ pp. ussāpita & ussita; (q.v.). See also usseti.
Caus. of ud + śri, cp. BSk. ucchrāpayati Av. SN i.384, SN i.386, SN i.387; SN ii.2
(nt.) procession, going or running about, tumult Dhp-a ii.7 (so read for ossāraṇā). Cp. ussādana.
fr. ussāreti
lifted out or up Vism 63 (samuddavīcīhi thale ussārita; v.l. ussādita).
pp. of ussāreti2
to cause to move back, to cause to go away or to recede Vin i.32, Vin i.46 (here a student, when folding up his master’s robe, has to make the corners move back a hand’s breadth each time. Then the crease or fold will change and not tend to wear through), 276; ii.237 (here the reading ussādeti may be preferred); Ja i.419; Ja iv.349; Ja v.347 ■ Caus. II. ussārāpeti Ja ii.290.
Caus. of ussarati
to cause to raise aloft (of a flag), to lift Ja v.319 (= ussāpeti) ■ pp. ussārita.
= ussādeti
hoarfrost, dew DN ii.19; Ja iv.120; Ja v.417; ˚bindu a dew drop AN iv.137; Pv iv.15; Snp-a 458; in comparisons: Vism 231, Vism 633.
either = Sk. avaśyāya, or to ud + sru
outflow, taint, stain (cp. āsava) Dhp-a iv.165 (taṇhā˚; v.l. ussada, to ussada 6).
fr. ud + sru
(nt.) proclamation (of a building as legal store house); in ˚antika within the proclaimed limit Vin i.239.
= ussāpana
see nirussāsa.
strength, power, energy; endeavour, good-will MN ii.174; SN v.440; AN i.147; AN ii.93, AN ii.195; AN iii.75, AN iii.307; AN iv.320; AN v.93 sq.; Mil 323 Mil 329 (dhiti + ) Vism 330; Sdhp 49, Sdhp 223, Sdhp 535, Sdhp 619; Snp-a 50; Dhp-a iii.394; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 106, Pv-a 166; Vv-a 32, Vv-a 48 ■ In exegetical literature often combd. with the quâsi synonym ussoḷhi e.g. at Nd ii.s. v.; Dhs 13, Dhs 22, Dhs 289, Dhs 571.
Sk. utsāha & utsaha, see ussahati
(f.) = ussāha Ne 8.
fr. ussahati cp. BSk. utsahana Divy 490
determined, incited, encouraged, urged Ja i.329; Vv-a 109; Pv-a 201 Cp. sam˚.
pp. of ussāheti, Caus. of ussahati
to bale out, exhaust Ja i.450, Ja ii.70; Ja iv.16; Mil 261.
ud + sic
(nt.) drying, baling out, raising water, exhausting Ja i.417.
fr. ussiñcati
erected, high SN v.228; Thag 424 (pannaddhaja); Ja v.386; Vv 8415; Vv-a 339. Cp. sam˚.
Sk. ucchrita, pp. of ud + sri, see ussāpeti
(nt.) the head of a bed, a pillow for the head Ja i.266; Ja ii.410, Ja ii.443; Ja iv.154; Ja v.99; Ja vi.32 Ja vi.37, Ja vi.56; Dhp-a i.184 (˚passe, opp. pāda-passe).
ud + sīsa + ka
(adj.)
1. endeavouring, zealous, eager, active SN i.15 (an˚ inactive) AN iv.266; Snp 298.
2. greedy, longing for Dhp 199 (an˚).
Sk. utsuka, also BSk. e.g. Jtm 3168
(adj.) = ussukin; only neg. an˚; free from greed Vv-a 74.
(adj.) greedy, longing; only neg. an˚ Pp 23.
fr. ussuka
(nt.) zeal, energy, endeavour hard work, eagerness Vin i.50; SN iv.288, SN iv.291, SN iv.302; Nd ii.s. v. Ne 29; Vv-a 147; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 135; Vism 90 (āpajjati) 644 (˚ppahānaṃ) ■ Cp. appossukka.
*utsukya fr. ussuka; cp. BSk. utsukya Divy 601 and autsukya Avs i.85
(f.) = ussukka Ay. 195.
to endeavour DN i.230. - Caus. II. ussukkāpeti to practice eagerly, to indulge in to perform Vv-a 95, Vv-a 98, Vv-a 243. See also ussakkati.
denom. fr. ussukka
(adj.) defiled, lustful (cp. āsava), only neg. an˚; free from defilement Dhp 400. Ussuya, Ussuyaka
pp. of ud + sru, cp. avassuta
, uss.
to dry up (intrs.) SN i.126; SN iii.149 (mahāsamuddo u.); Snp 985; Ja vi.195.
ud + sussati of śuṣ
(adj) “sun-out”, the sun being out; i.e. after sunrise or after noon, adverbially in ˚bhatta eating after mid-day, unpunctual meals AN iii.260, and ˚seyyā sleep after sunrise, sleeping late DN iii.184; Dhp-a ii.227. Besides as loc. adv. ussūre the sun having been up (for a long time), i.e. at evening Vin i.293; Vin iv.77; Ja ii.286, also in ati-ussūre too long after sunrise Vv-a 65; Dhp-a iii.305.
ut + sūra
to erect, raise, stand up Ja iv.302; aor. ussesi Ja vi.203 ■ Caus. ussāpeti; pp. ussita & ussāpita; (q.v.).
ud + śri
to draw on to oneself, to be friendly SN iii.89 (v.l. ussi˚) AN ii.214 sq. (opp. paṭisseneti); Pts ii.167 (ussi˚); Kvu i. 93 (reading ussineti + visineti). See also paṭiseneti.
denom. fr. ussena = ussayana, ud + śri (?)
(?) Vin ii.10 (for ussoḷh˚?); cp. ussoḷhikāya.
(adj.) nt. ussotaṃ as adv. “up-stream” Mil 117.
ud + sota
(f.) exertion MN i.103; SN ii.132; SN v.440; AN ii.93, AN ii.195; AN iii.307; AN iv.320; AN v.93 sq. Often comḅd. with ussāha (q.v.).
a by-form of ussāha fr. ud + sah, pp. *soḍha dialectical
(f.) belonging to exertion, only in instr. as adv. ussoḷhikāya “in the way of exertion” i.e. ardently, keenly, eagerly SN i.170 (naccati).
adj. of ussoḷhi
an owl (lit. “uhu”-maker) Ja vi.538 (= ulūka C.).
ū.
onomat. uhu + kara, see under ulūka
(f.) a louse Ja i.453; ii. 324; iii.393; v.298; Mil 11; Vism 445; Dhs-a 307 Dhs-a 319; Dhp-a iii.342; Vv-a 86.
is also used as linear measure (cp. Sk. yūkālikṣaṃ) Vb-a 343 (where 7 likkhā are said to equal 1 ūkā).
Sk. yūkā, prob. dialectical
at Ja i.290 in phrase “jimaṃ ūtagītaṃ gāyanto” read “imaṃ jūtagītaṃ g.”
(adj.) wanting, deficient less MN ii.73; Ja v.330; Dhp-a i.77; Dhp-a iv.210. Mostly adverbially with numerals = one less, but one, minus (one or two); usually with eka (as ekūna one less, e.g. ekūna-aṭṭhasataṃ (799) Ja i.57; ekūna-pañcasate Kp-a 91 ekūna-vīsati (19) Vism 287; eken’ūnesu pañcasu attabhāvasatesu (499) Ja i.167; also with eka in instr. as eken’ūnapañcasatāni (deficient by one) Vin ii.285; Kp-a 91; sometimes without eka, e.g. ūnapañcasatāni (499) Vin iii.284 ūnavīsati (19) Vin iv.130, Vin iv.148. With “two” less: dvīhi ūnaṃ sahassaṃ (998) Ja i.255 ■ anūna not deficient complete Pv-a 285 (= paripuṇṇa).
-udara (ūnudara, ūnūdara, ūnodara) an empty stomach adj. of empty stomach; ˚udara Ja ii.293; Ja vi.295; ˚ūdara
J vi.258; Mil 406; odara Snp 707; Dhp-a i.170. -bhāva depletion, deficiency Snp-a 463 (v.l. hānabhāva).
Vedic ūna; cp. Av. ūna, Gr. ε ̓ϋνις, Lat. vāpus, Goth. wans, Ags. won = E. want
(adj.) deficient, wanting, lacking Vin iii.81, Vin iii.254; Vin iv.263; Snp 721; Mil 310, Mil 311, (˚satta-vassika one who is not yet 7 years old), 414; Dhp-a i.79.
ūna + ka
(nt.) depletion, deficiency Vin ii.239; Ja v.450.
abstr. fr. ūna
at Dhp-a ii.93 stands for upāya.
see upiya & opiya;.
wave Mil 197 (˚vanka waterfall, cataract). Umi & Umi;
f. ūmi
(f.) a wave MN i.460 (˚bhaya); SN iv.157; SN v.123 (˚jāta); AN iii.232 sq. (id.); Snp 920; Ja ii.216; Ja iii.262 Ja iv.141; Mil 260 (˚jāta) ■ Note. A parallel form of ūmī is ummī.
Sk. ūrmi, fr. Idg. *ṷel (see nibbāna i.2); cp. Gr. ἐλύω io wind, ε ̔́λις wound; Lat. volvo to roll Ags. wylm wave; Ohg. wallan; also Sk. ulva, varutra valaya, valli, vṛṇoti. See details in Walde, Lat. Wtb under volvo
the thigh Snp 610; Vin ii.105 (in contrast with bāha); iii. 106; Ja i.277; Ja ii.275, Ja ii.443; Ja iii.82; Ja v.89, Ja v.155; Nd ii.659 (so read for uru); Vv 6413; DN-a i.135 = Vin ii.190.
-aṭṭhi(ka) the thigh bone MN i.58; MN iii.92; Ja i.428 (ūraṭṭhika); Kp-a 49, Kp-a 50 (ūraṭṭhi). -(k)khambha stiffening or rigidity of the thigh, paralysis of the leg (as symptom of fright) MN i.237; Ja v.23.
Vedic ūru; cp. Lat. vārus bow-legged, of Idg. *ṷā, to which also Ohg. wado = Ger. wade calf of leg
salt-ground; saline substance, always combd. with khāra SN iii.131 (˚gandha); AN i.209.
Sk. ūṣa
(adj.) saline SN iv.315; AN iv.237; Dhs-a 243 ■ nt. ˚ṃ a spot with saline soil Pv-a 139 (gloss for ujjhangala).
Sk. ūṣara, fr. ūṣa
see vy˚, sam˚.
(indecl.)
1. lifting up, raising or rising Ja iii.206.
2. pulling out, taking away, removing DN ii.254 (cp. Dhp-a ii.181); SN i.27 (v.l. for ohacca); Snp 1119 (= uddharitvā uppāṭayitvā Nd ii.171).
ger. of ūharati, ud + hṛ; (or ava + hṛ; cp. ohacca & oharati) for uddharati 1 & 2
(indecl.) soiling by defecation, defecating Ja ii.71 (= vaccaṃ katvā C.).
ger. of ūhanati2 = ūhadati
to be soiled; to be disturbed aor. ūhaññi Vin i.48; MN i.116; aor. also ūhani MN i.243.
Pass. of ūhanati1
1. lifted, risen, raised Vin iii.70; Ja v.403. 2. taken out, pulled out, destroyed Thag 223 = Nd ii.974 Thag 514; Dhp 338 (= ucchinna Dhp-a iv.48).
3. soiled with excrements Vin ii.222.
pp. of ud + hṛ; or dhṛ; thus for uddhaṭa as well as uddhata
disturbed MN i.116.
pp. of ūhanati1
to defecate Ja ii.355; Dhp-a ii.181 (so read with v.l. for T. ūhadayati).
for ūhanati2 (?) or formed secondarily fr. ūhacca or ohacca?
(nt.) reasoning, consideration, examination Mil 32 (“comprehension” trsl.; as characteristic of manasikāra); Vism 142 = Dhs-a 114 (“prescinding” trsl. as characteristic of vitakka).
fr. ūhanati?
to disturb, shake up, defile, soil MN i.243; Ja ii.73 ■ Pass. aor. ūhani: see ūhaññati ■ pp ūhata2 (q.v.). Cp. sam˚.
ud + han
1. to cut off, discharge, emit, defecate Vin i.78; Vin iii.227. 2. [prob. for ūharati, cp. ūhacca1] to lift up, to take away MN i.117 (opp. odahati). Cp. ohana in bimb ohana. ger. ūhacca2 (q.v.).
either ud + han or ava + han, cp. ohanati
only in forms of ger. ūhacca1 and pp. ūhata1 (q.v.).
for uddharati
to laugh at, deride, mock AN iii.91; Ja v.452 (+ pahasati); Pp 67 (= avahasati Pp A 249).
either ud or ava + has, cp. avahasati
(nt.) laughing, mocking Mil 127.
fr. ūhasati
(f.) life, only in cpd. āyūha lifetime Pv-a 136, Pv-a 162 (˚pariyosāna) ■ As Name of a river at Mil 70. Cp. BSk. ūhā in ūhāpoha Av. SN i.209, SN i.235.
E.
etym.?
(adj.-n.m.) one. Eka follows the pron. declension i.e. nom. pl. is eke (e.g. Snp 43, Snp 294, Snp 780 etc.)
1 “one” as number, either with or without contrast to two or more; often also “single” opp. to nānā various, many (q.v.). Very frequent by itself as well as with other numerals, ekangula one thumb Mvu 29, Mvu 11; Dhp-a iii.127; ekapasse in one quarter Dhp-a ii.52; ekamaccha a single fish Ja i.222. In enumeration: eka dve pañca dasa Dhp-a i.24. With other numerals: eka-tiṃsa (31) DN ii.2 ˚saṭṭhi (61) Vin i.20; ˚navuti (91) Dhp-a i.97; ˚sata (101; Dhp-a ii.14. Cp. use of “one less” in ekūna (see under cpds. & ūna).
2. (as predicative and adj.) one, by oneself, one only, alone, solitary AN iii.67 (ek-uddesa) Ja i.59 (ekadivasena on the one day only, i.e. on the same day); Dhp 395; Snp 35, Snp 1136 (see Nd ii.172a), ekaṃ ekaṃ one by one SN i.104 (devo ekaṃ ekaṃ phusāyati rains drop by drop), cp. ekameka.
3. a certain one, some one, some; adj. in function of an indefinite article = a one (definite or indefinite): ekasmiṃ samaye once upon a time Ja i.306; ekena upāyena by some means Ja iii.393 ekaṃ kulaṃ gantuṃ to a certain clan (corresp. with asuka Dhp-a i.45; ekadivasaṃ one day Ja i.58; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 67 Cp. Snp 1069 (see Nd ii.172b) ■ All these three categories are found represented in freq. cpds., of which the foll. are but a small selection.
-akkhi see ˚pokkhara. -agga calm, tranquil (of persons just converted), collected [cp. Buddh. Sk. ekāgra Jtm 3170] SN iv.125; AN i.70, AN i.266; AN ii.14, AN ii.29; AN iii.175 (˚citta), 391; Snp 341; Ja i.88; Ne 28, cp. Mil 139 -aggatā concentration; capacity to individualise; contemplation, tranquillity of mind (see on term Cpd. 16, 1785 237, 240) SN v.21, SN v.197, SN v.269 (cittassa); AN i.36; AN iv.40; Dhs 11 (cittassa); Vism 84. -aṅga a part, divisioh, something
belonging to Ja iii.308; Ud 69. -aṅgaṇa one (clear space Ja ii.357. -āgārika a thief, robber DN i.52, DN i.166; AN i.154, AN i.295; AN ii.206; AN iii.129; Nd i.416; Nd ii.304 iii.a. DN-a i.159 (= ekam eva gharaṃ parivāretvā vilumpanaṃ DN-a i.159). -āyana leading to one goal, direct way or “leading to the goal as the one & only way (magga MN i.63; SN v.167, SN v.185. -ārakkha having one protector or guardian DN iii.269; AN v.29 sq. -ālopika = ekāgārika DN i.166; AN i.295; AN ii.206. -āsana sitting or living alone MN i.437; Snp 718; Dhp 305; Ja v.397; Mil 342; Vism 60 (expld. with reference to eating, viz. ekāsane bhojanaṃ ekāsanaṃ, perhaps comparing āsana with asana2. The foll ˚āsanika is ibid. expld. as “taṃ sīlam assā ti ekāsaniko”) -āsanika one who keeps to himself Mil 20, Mil 216; Vism 69. -āha one day MN i.88; usually in cpd. ekâhadvîhaṃ one or two days Ja i.255; Dhp-a i.391. -āhika of or for one day DN i.166. -uttarika (-nikāya) is another title for Anguttarika-nikāya Mil 392. -ūna one less, minus one usually as 1st part of a numeral cpd., like ˚vīsati (20
1 = 19) Dhp-a i.4; ˚paññāsa (49) Ja iii.220; ˚saṭṭhi (59; Dhp-a iii.412; ˚pañcasatā (499) Dhp-a ii.204. See ūna-eka one by one, each, severally, one to each DN ii.18 (˚loma); iii.144 (id.), 157; Ja i.222; Dhp-a i.101 (ekekassa no ekekaṃ māsaṃ one month for each of us); ii.114; Vv-a 256; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 43. -ghana compact, solid, hard Dhp 81. -cara wandering or living alone, solitary SN i.16; Snp 166, Snp 451; Dhp 37. -cariyā walking alone, solitude Dhp 61; Snp 820. -cārin = ˚cara Mil 105. -cittakkhaṇika of the duration of one thought Vism 138. -cintin “thinking one thing (only)”, simple Mil 92. -thūpa (all in one heap, mixed up, together Ja v.17 (= sūkarapotakā viya C.). -doṇikā (-nāvā) a trough-shaped canoe with an outrigger Ja vi.305. -paṭalika having a single sole (of sandals, upāhanā) Vism 125. -paṭṭa single cloth (cp. dupaṭṭa) Vism 109. -padika (-magga) a small (lit. for one foot) foot-path Ja i.315; Ja v.491. -pala one carat worth (see pala) Vism 339. -passayika is to be read ek’apassayika (see under apa˚). -pahārena all at once Vism 418; Dhs-a 333. -piṭaka knowing one Piṭaka Vism 62 -puttika having only one son Kp-a 237. -purisika (itthi (a woman) true to one man Ja i.290. -pokkhara a sort of drum Ja vi.21, Ja vi.580 (C. explns. by ek-akkhi-bherī) -bījin having only one (more) seed, i.e. destined to be reborn only once SN v.205; AN i.233; AN iv.380; Ne 189 -bhattika having one meal a day AN i.212; AN iii.216; Ja i.91 -bhattakinī a woman true to one husband Ja iii.63. -rajja sole sovereignty Dhp 178; Pv-a 74. -rājā universal king Ja i.47 (of the Sun). -vāciya a single remark or objection Ja ii.353. -vāraṃ once Ja i.292; ˚vārena id. Dhp-a i.10. -sadisa fully alike or resembling, identical Ja i.291 -sama equal Ja vi.261. -sāṭa & sāṭaka; having a single vestment, a “one-rober” SN i.78 (˚ka); Ud 65.
Vedic eka, i.e. e-ka to Idg. *oi as in Av. aēva, Gr. ο ̓ϊος one, alone; and also with diff. suffix in Lat. ū-nus, cp. Gr. οἰνός (one on the dice), Goth. etc ains = E. one
(adj.) belonging to one shoulder, on or with one shoulder; only in phṛase ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsangaṃ karoti to arrange the upper robe over one shoulder (the left) Vin i.46; Vin ii.188 & passim.;
eka + aṃsa1
“one part or point”, i.e. one-pointedness, definiteness; affirmation, certainty absoluteness DN i.153; AN ii.46; Snp 427, Snp 1027; Ja iii.224 (ekaṃsatthe nipāto for “nūna”); Snp-a 414 (˚vacana for “taggha”) ■ Opp. an˚; Mil 225 ■ instr. ekaṃsena as adv. for certain, absolutely, definitely, inevitably DN i.122 DN i.161, DN i.162; MN i.393; SN iv.326; AN v.190; Ja i.150; iii. 224; Pv-a 11.
eka + aṃsa1 or better aṃsa2
(adj.) certain DN i.189, DN i.191; an˚; uncertain, indefinite DN i.191.
fr. ekaṃsa2
(f.) as neg. an˚; indefiniteness Mil 93.
abstr. fr. ekaṃsika
(adj.) single, alone, solitary Vin ii.212; Ja i.255; Ja ii.234; Ja iv.2 ■ f. ekikā Vin iv.229; Ja i.307; Ja iii.139.
eka + ka
(adj.) one, certain, definite DN i.162, AN i.8; often in pl ekacce some, a few DN i.118; AN v.194; Thig 216; Ja ii.129; Ja iii.126. See also app˚ under api.
der. fr. eka with suffix *tya, implying likeness or comparison, lit. “one-like”, cp. E. one-like = one-ly only
(adj.) single, not doubled (of cloth, opp. to diguṇa) Ja v.216 (˚vasana = eka-paṭṭa-nivattha).
fr. ekacca
(adj.) = ekacca SN i.199; Ja iv.259; acc. as adv. ˚ṃ once, single Vin i.289 (cp. Vin Texts ii.212).
(adv.) in the same place, in conjunction together Mil 144 (karoti), Kp-a 167; Snp-a 38.
fr. eka, cp. literary Sk. aikadhyaṃ, but BSk. ekadhyaṃ Mvu i.304
(adv.)
1. on the one side (opp. on the other) Ja iii.51; Ja iv.141. 2. together Ja ii.415; Ja iii.57 (vasanto), 52 (sannipatanti) 391; iv.390; Dhp-a i.18. ekato karoti to put together, to collect Vv-a 3. ekato hutvā “coming to one”, agreeing Dhp-a i.102, cp. ekato ahesuṃ Ja i.201.
abl. formation fr. eka, cp. Sk. ekataḥ
(nt.)
1. unity DN i.31.
2. loneliness, solitude, separation Snp 718; Thag 49; Mil 162; Ja vi.64; Vv-a 202 (= ekībhāva).
abstr. fr. eka
(f.) unity, combination, unification, concentration Ne 4, Ne 72 sq, 107 sq.
fr. ekatta
(adv.) once, definitely, specially Ja iii.105 (= ekaṃsena C.).
eka-d-atthu, cp. aññadatthu
(adv.) once, at the same time, at one time, once upon a time SN i.162; Snp 198; Dhp-a ii.41; Mil 213.
fr. eka
(adj.) one-sided, on one end, with one top, topmost (˚-) usually in function of an adv. as ˚-meaning “absolutely, extremely, extraordinary, quite” etc. 1. (lit.) at one end, only in ˚lomin a woollen coverlet with a fringe at one end DN i.7 (= ekato dasaṃ uṇṇāmay’ attharaṇaṃ keci ekato uggata-pupphan ti vadanti DN-a i.87) Vin i.192; Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169; AN i.181.
2. (fig.) extremely very much, in freq. combns; e.g. ˚kāḷaka AN iii.406; iv. 11; ˚gata SN v.225; AN iii.326; ˚dukkha MN i.74; SN ii.173 SN iii.70 (+ sukha); AN v.289; ˚dussīlya Dhp-a iii.153; ˚nibbida AN iii.83; AN iv.143; ˚paripuṇṇa SN ii.219; SN v.204; ˚manāpa SN iv.238; ˚sukha AN ii.231; AN iii.409; ˚sukhin DN-a i.119 etc.
Sk. ekānta
(adj.) with one in between, alternate Ja iv.195, ˚bhāvena (instr. adv.) in alternation alternately Vism 374; ekantarikāya (adv.) with intervals Vism 244.
eka + antarika
(adv.) on one side, apart, aside Vin i.47, Vin i.94 = Vin ii.272; DN i.106; Snp p.13 (expld. at Snp-a 140 as follows: bhāvana-puṃsaka-niddeso, ek’okāsaṃ ekapassan ti vuttaṃ hoti, bhummatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ) Snp 580, Snp 1009, Snp 1017; Ja i.291; Ja ii.102, Ja ii.111; Snp-a 314, Snp-a 456. Also in loc. ekamante on one side Dhp-a i.40.
eka + anta, acc. in adv. function, cp. BSk. ekamante Mvu i.35
(adj.) one by one, each AN v.173; Vv 782.
eka-m-eka, cp. BSk. ekameka Mvu iii.358
(adj.) of one kind, single, simple Vism 514; adv. ekavidhā singly, simply Vism 528.
eka + vidha
(adv.) singly, one by one Ja iii.224 (an˚).
Sk. ekaśaḥ
(adj.) alone, solitary Thag 541; Mil 398.
(num.) eleven Vin i.19 ■ num. ord. ekādasama the eleventh Snp 111, Snp 113.
Sk. ekādaśa
(adj) = ekākiya; instr. ekānikena as adv. “by oneself” Mil 402.
see ekaka.
being alone, loneliness, solitude DN iii.245; MN ii.250; AN iii.289; AN v.89, AN v.164; Vism 34; Snp-a 92, Snp-a 93; Dhp-a ii.103; Vv-a 202; DN-a i.253, DN-a i.309.
eka + bhāva, with ī for a in compn. with bhū
(adj.) concentrated attentive, fixed AN iii.354; Nd i.478. Usually in compn. with kṛ & bhū (which points however to a form ekoda with the regular change of a to i in connection with these roots!), as ekodi -karoti to concentrate MN i.116; SN iv.263; ˚bhavati to become settled SN iv.196; SN v.144; ˚bhūta concentrated Snp 975; ˚bhāva concentration, fixing one’s mind on one point DN i.37; DN iii.78, DN iii.131; AN i.254; AN iii.24 Vism 156 (expld. as eko udeti); Dhs 161 (cp. Dhs trsln. 46); Dhs-a 169; Ne 89.
most likely eka + odi for odhi, see avadhi2 & cp. avadahati, avadahana, lit. of one attention, limited to one point. Thus also suggested by Morris; J.P.T.S. 1885, 32 sq. The word was Sanskritised into ekoti, e.g. at Mvu iii.212, Mvu iii.213; Lal 147, Lal 439
(f.) motion, turbulence, distraction seduction, craving SN iv.64; Snp 791; Iti 91; Nd i.91, Nd i.353; Dhs 1059 (cp. Dhs trslu. 277); Vv-a 232 ■ aneja (adj. unmoved, undisturbed, calm, passionless SN i.27, SN i.141, SN i.159 SN iii.83; SN iv.64; AN ii.15; Nd i.353; Vv-a 107.
to iñj, q.v. and see ānejja. There is also a Sk. root ej to stir, move
see pariy˚; do. ˚eṭṭhi.
pp. of ā + iṣ
(f.) desire, wish, in combn. with gaveṭṭhi pariyeṭṭhi etc. Vb 353 = Vism 23, Vism 29 etc.
fr. eṭṭha, ā + iṣ, cp. Sk. eṣṭi
(f.) a kind of antelope, only two foll. cpds.: ˚jaṅgha “limbed like the antelope” (one of the physical characteristics of the Superman) DN ii.17; DN iii.143 DN iii.156; MN ii.136; SN i.16; Snp 165; ˚miga the eṇi deer Ja v.416; Snp-a 207, Snp-a 217.
etym.? dial.
D iii.157; Ja vi.537 sq., & Eṇeyyaka AN i.48; ii. 122; Ja v.155 Nd ii.604 = eṇi.
(pron. adj.) demonstr. pron. “this”, with on the whole the same meaning and function as tad only more definite and emphatic. Declined like tad Cases: nt. sg. etad (poetical-archaic form) AN ii.17; Snp 274, Snp 430, Snp 822, Snp 1087; Ja i.61, Ja i.279; & etaṃ (the usual form) Snp 51, Snp 207, Snp 1036, Snp 1115; Ja ii.159; pl. etāni Snp 52; Ja ii.159 ■ m. sg. esa Snp 81, Snp 416, Snp 1052; Ja i.279; ii. 159; Mil 18; Dhp-a i.18; & eso Snp 61, Snp 312, Snp 393; Ja vi.336; pl. ete Snp 188, Snp 760; Ja i.223 ■ f. sg. esā Snp 80 Snp 451; Ja i.307; pl. etā Snp 297, Snp 897; Ja ii.129 ■ Oblique cases: gen. dat. etassa Ja ii.159; f. etissā Ja iii.280; instr etena Snp 655; Ja i.222; pl. loc. etesu Snp 248, Snp 339, Snp 1055 f. etāsu Snp 607. Other cases regular & frequent.;
Vedic etad, of pron. base *e; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under equidem
(adv.) now, at present DN i.29, DN i.151, DN i.179, DN i.200; DN ii.3; Ja i.215 (opp. tadā) iii.82; vi.364 (instead of paccuppanna).
Sk. etarhi, cp. tarahi & carahi
(adj.) such, such like, of this kind DN ii.157; Snp 588, Snp 681, Snp 836; Pv i.94; iv.186 (= edisa yathā-vutta-rūpa Pv-a 243); Pv-a ii.71.
etad + disa, of dṛś, cp. Sk. etādṛśa
to go, go to, reach; often (= ā + eti) to come back, return Snp 364, Snp 376, Snp 666 (come); Ja vi.365 (return); ppr. ento Ja iii.433 (acc. suriyaṃ atthaṃ entaṃ the setting sun); imper 2nd sg. ehi only in meaning “come” (see separately) 3rd etu DN i.60; DN i.2nd pl. etha DN i.211; Snp 997; Ja ii.129; Dhp-a i.95 (in admission formula “etha bhikkhavo” come ye [and be] bhikkhus! See ehi bhikkhu) ■ fut. essati Ja vi.190, Ja vi.365, & ehiti Ja ii.153; Ja ii.2nd sg. ehisi Dhp 236 Dhp 369 ■ pp. ita (q.v.).
P. eti represents Sk. eti as well as ā-eti, i.e. to go and to come (here); with Sk. eti cp. Av. aeiti, Gr. ε ̓ϊσι Lat. eo, it; Goth. iddja went, Obulg. iti, Oir. etha
(adv.) there, here Pv i.56 (sic; cp. Kp-a 254 note).
= Sk. atra, see also ettha
(adj.) so much, this much, according to context referring either to deficiency or abundance, thus developing 2 meanings, viz. (1) just as much (& no more), only so little, all this, just this, such a small number, a little pl. so few, just so many DN i.117 (opp. aparimāṇa), 124; AN iv.114; Nd ii.304iii. (ettakena na tussati is not satisfied with this much); Vv 7912 (cp. Vv-a 307); Mil 10, Mil 18 (alaṃ ettakena enough of this much); Dhp-a i.90 (enough this much), 93, 399 (pl. ettakā); ii.54 (only one), 174 sq. Vv-a 233 (a little), 323 ■ ettakaṃ kālaṃ a short time (but see also under 2) Ja i.34; Dhp-a ii.20 ■ (2) ever so much (and not less), so much, pl. so many, ever so many, so & so many, such a lot AN iii.337; Ja i.207 (pl ettakā), 375 (nt. ettakaṃ); iii.80 (id.), 94 (˚ṃ dhanaṃ such great wealth); Mil 37 (pl.); Dhp-a i.392, Dhp-a i.396 (pl f. ettikā), 397, 398; ii.14, 89 (pl.), 241 (pl. so many) Vv-a 65 (dhanaṃ) ■ ettakaṃ kālaṃ for some time, such a long time (see also above, under 1) Dhp-a ii.62, Dhp-a ii.81 Dhp-a iii.318; Vv-a 330.
etta + ka, contrasting-comparative function, cp. tattaka
(adv.) from here, therefore SN i.185.
with double suffix for *atra-taḥ
(adv.) so far, to that extent, even by this much DN i.205, DN i.207; SN ii.17; Snp 478; Vv 556 (cp. Vv-a 248); Pv iv.167 Mil 14; DN-a i.80; Snp-a 4; Pv-a 243.
fr. etta = ettaka, cp. kittāvatā: kittaka
(adv.) orig. abl. of etad; from this, from it, thence, hence, out of here Snp 448, Snp 875; Ja i.223 (opp. ito), v.498; Pv i.11ii.104; Dhp-a ii.80 (ito vā etto vā here & there); Pv-a 103.
in analogy to ito fr. *et˚, as ito fr. *it˚
(adv.) here, in this place; also temporal “now”, & modal “in this case, in this matter” DN ii.12; SN v.375; Dhp 174; Snp 61, Snp 171, Snp 424 Snp 441, Snp 502, Snp 1037, & freq. passim.;
= Sk. atra, cp. etta
(adj.) such like, such Vv 373; Pv-a 69, Pv-a 243.
Sk. īdṛśa
= edisa Snp 313.
fuel, fire etc. Only in adj. neg. an˚ without fuel Ja iv.26.
Sk. edhaḥ, cp. idhma, inddhe; Gr. α ̓ϊχος, ἀίχω, Lat. aedes, Ohg. eit, Ags. ād funeral pile, etc. See idhuma iṭṭhaka
to prosper, succeed in, increase SN i.217 (sukhaṃ); Snp 298; Dhp 193; Ja i.223; Ja iii.151. sukh˚edhita at Vin iii.13 is better read as sukhe ṭhita as at Ja vi.219.
edh, cp. iddhati
(pron.) [fr. pron. base *ē̆, cp. e-ka; to this cp. in form & meaning Lat. ūnus, Gr.; οἰνός, Ohg. ein, Oir. ōin only used in acc. enaṃ (taṃ enaṃ) “him, this one, the same” Snp 583, Snp 981, Snp 1114; Dhp 118, Dhp 313; Ja iii.395; Nd ii.304 iii.b. See also naṃ.
(adj.) driving away, moving Ja iv.20 (˚vāta); ˚vattika a certain kind of torture MN i.87 = AN i.47 = AN ii.122 = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197.
fr. ereti
(nt.) Typha-grass Ja iv.88. As eragu (?) a kind of grass used for making coverlets Vin i.196 (eraka Bdhgh. on DN i.166).
fr. ereti
the castor oil plant Nd ii.680ii.; Ja ii.440. Cp. elaṇḍa.
dial.?
Name of Indra’s elephant Snp 379; Vv 4413; Vv-a 15.
moved, shaken, driven Ja iv.424; Vv 394, 424; Thag 104, Pv ii.123; Vism 172 (+ samerita) 342 (vāt˚ moved by the wind). Cp. īrita.
pp. of ereti
to move, set into motion, raise (one’s voice) MN i.21; Snp 350 (eraya imper.); Thag 209 (eraye); Ja iv.478 ■ pp. erita (q.v.).
= īreti (q.v.) Caus. of īr, Sk. īrayati
(nt.) salt(?) or water(?) in elambiya (= el˚ambu-ja) born in (salt) water Snp 845 (= ela-saññaka ambumhi jāta); Nd i.202 (elaṃ vuccati udakaṃ).
?
= eraṇḍa (?) MN i.124.
Name of a creeping vine Ja vi.536. Elaluka (Elaluka)
?
(nt.) a kind of cucumber(?) Vv 3329; Ja i.205; Ja v.37; Dhp-a i.278.
etym.?
(nt.) in eḷamūga deaf & dumb AN ii.252; AN iii.436; AN iv.226; Mil 20, Mil 251 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.71). A rather strange use and expln. of eḷamūga (with ref. to a snake “spitting”) we find at Ja iii.347, where it is expld. as “eḷa-paggharantena mukhena eḷamūgaṃ” i.e. called eḷamūga because of the saliva (foam?) dripping from its mouth, v.l. elamukha ■ Cp. neḷa & aneḷa;.
Sk. enas
a threshold (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 146) Vin ii.149 (˚pādaka-pītha, why not “having feet resembling those of a ram”? Cp. Vin Texts iii.165 “a chair raised on a pedestal”); DN i.166; AN i.295; AN ii.206. The word its meaning seems uncertain.;
?
a ram, a wild goat Snp 309; Vism 500 (in simile); Ja i.166; Pp A 233 (= urabbha) ■ f. eḷakā SN ii.228, eḷakī Thig 438, eḷikī Ja iii.481.
Sk. eḍaka
see aneḷa.
(f.) the plant Cassia Tora (cp. Sk. eḍagaja the ringworm-shrub, Cassia Alata, after Halāyudha), Ja iii.222 (= kambojī C.).
dial.?
in kāmāmis˚ at Pv-a 107 is to be read kāmāmise lagga˚.
(adv.) emphatic part “so, even, just”; very freq. in all contexts & comb;ns.
1. eva Ja i.61 (ajj’eva this veryday), 278 (tath’eva likewise); ii.113 (ahaṃ e just I), 154 (ekam e. just one), 160 (attano e. his very own).
2. eva often appears with prothetic (sandhi-)y as yeva, most frequently after i and e, but also after the other vowels and ṃ, cp. Ja i.293, Ja i.307; Ja ii.110, Ja ii.128, Ja ii.129 Ja ii.159; Ja iv.3; Ja vi.363.
3. After ṃ eva also takes the form of ñeva, mostly with assimilation of ṃ to ñ, viz. tañ ñeva Ja i.223; tasmiñ ñeva Ja i.139; ahañ ñeva Mil 40.
4 After long vowels eva is often shortened to va (q.v.).
-rūpa (1) such, like that Snp 279, Snp 280; Iti 108; Ja ii.352, etc ■ (2) of such form, beauty or virtue Ja i.294 Ja iii.128, etc.
Vedic eva
(adv.) so, thus, in this way, either referring to what precedes or what follows, e.g. (1) thus (as mentioned, expld. at Vism 528 as “niddiṭṭha-nayanidassana”) DN i.193 (evaṃ sante this being being so) 195 (id.); Vin ii.194 (evaṃ bhante, yes); Ja i.222; Pv ii.1312 evaṃ etaṃ, just so) ■ (2) thus (as follows) MN i.483 (evaṃ me sutaṃ “thus have I heard”) ■ Often combd. with similar emphatic part., as evam eva kho “in just the same way” (in final conclusions) DN i.104, DN i.199 DN i.228, DN i.237, DN i.239; in older form evaṃ byā kho (= evam iva kho) Vin ii.26; Vin iv.134 = DN-a i.27; evam evaṃ “just so” DN i.51; Snp 1115; evaṃ kho DN i.113; evam pi Snp 1134; evaṃ su DN i.104; etc. etc.
-diṭṭhin holding such a view MN i.484. -nāma having that name MN i.429.
Vedic evaṃ
see etad.
(adj.) = esin Snp 286.
to seek, search, strive for Snp 592 (esāno ppr. med.), 919; Dhp 131.
ā + iṣ1 with confusion of iṣ1 and iṣ2, icchati, see also ajjhesati, anvesati, pariyesati
(f.) desire, longing, wish DN iii.216, DN iii.270; MN i.79; SN v.54, SN v.139; AN i.93; AN ii.41; AN v.31; Vv-a 83; Pv-a 98, Pv-a 163, Pv-a 265. See also anesanā, isi & pariy˚;.
fr. esati
(f.) a surgeon’s probe MN ii.256.
fr. iṣ
(-˚) a by-form of usabha (q.v.), in cpd. rathesabha.
(nt.) & Esikā1 (f.) a pillar, post AN iv.106, AN iv.109. Freq. in cpd. ˚ṭṭhāyin as stable as a pillar DN i.14; SN iii.202, SN iii.211, SN iii.217; DN-a i.105.
a by-form of isīkā
desire, see abbūḷha.
(adj.) seeking, wishing, desiring SN ii.11 (sambhav˚); Ja i.87 (phal˚); iv.26 (dukkham˚); Pv ii.928 (gharam); Pv-a 132.
Sk. eṣin, of iṣ
come, come here Snp 165; Ja ii.159; vi. 367; Dhp-a i.49. In the later language part. of exhortation = Gr. α ̓́γε, Lat. age, “come on” Dhp-a ii.91; Pv-a 201 (+ tāva = α ̓́γεδή). ehipassika (adj.) [ehi + passa ika] of the Dhamma, that which invites every man to come to see for himself, open to all, expld. at Vism 216 as “ehi, passa imaṃ dhamman ti evaṃ pavattaṃ ehi-passavidhaṃ arahatī ti”, DN ii.217; DN iii.5, DN iii.227; SN i.9; SN iv.41, SN iv.272 SN v.343; AN i.158; AN ii.198. ehibhadantika one who accepts an invitation DN i.166; MN i.342; MN ii.161; AN i.295; AN ii.206 ehi bhikkhu “come bhikkhu!” the oldest formula of admission to the order Vin i.12; Vin iii.24; Dhp-a i.87; Ja i.82 f. ehi bhikkhunī Vin iv.214 pl. etha bhikkhavo Dhp-a i.95. ehibhikkhu-pabbajjā initiation into Bhikkhuship Snp-a 456. ehibhikkhubhāva-state of being invited to join the Sangha, admission to the Order Ja i.82, Ja i.86; Dhp-a ii.32; Snp-a 456. ehisāgata-(& svāgata-)vādin; a man of courtesy (lit. one who habitually says: “come you are welcome” DN i.116; Vin ii.11; Vin iii.181.
O.
imper. of eti
Initial o in Pali may represent a Vedic o or a Vedic au (see ojas, ogha, etc.). Or it may be guṇa of u (see oḷārika opakammika, etc.). But it is usually a prefix representing Vedic ava. The form in o is the regular use in old Pali; there are only two or three cases where ava for metrical or other reasons, introduced. In post-canonical Pali the form in ava is the regular one. For new formations we believe there is no exception to this rule. But the old form in o has in a few cases, survived. Though o; standing alone, is derived from ava, yet compounds with o are almost invariably older than the corresponding compounds with ava (see note on ogamana).
(nt.) [Vedic okas (nt.), fr. uc to like, thus orig. “comfort”, hence place of comfort, sheltered place, habitation The indigenous interpretation connects oka partly with okāsa = fig. room (for rising), chance, occasion (thus Nd i.487 on Snp 966: see anoka; Snp-a 573 ibid.; Snp-a 547: see anoka; Snp-a 573 ibid.; Snp-a 547: see below) partly with udaka (as contraction): see below on Dhp 34 Geiger (P. Gr. § 20) considers oka to be a direct contraction of udaka (via *udaka, *utka, *ukka, *okka). The customary synomym for oka (both lit. & fig.) is ālaya resting place, shelter, resort; house, dwelling; fig. (this meaning according to later commentators prevailing in anoka, liking, fondness, attachment to (worldly things) SN iii.9 = Snp 844 (okam pahāya; oka here is expld. at Snp-a 547 by rūpa-vatth’ ādi-viññaṇass’ okāso); SN v.24 = AN v.232 = Dhp 87 (okā anokam āgamma); Dhp 34 (oka-m-okata ubbhato, i.e. oka-m-okato from this & that abode, from all places, thus taken as okato, whereas Bdhgh. takes it as okasya okato and interprets the first oka as contracted form of udaka, water, which happens to fit in with the sense required at this passage, but is not warranted otherwise;
except by Bdhgh’s quotation “okapuṇṇehi cīvarehī ti ettha udakaṃ”. This quot. is taken from Vin i.253, which must be regarded as a corrupt passage cp. remarks of Bdhgh. on p. 387: oghapuṇṇehī ti pi pāṭho. The rest of his interpretation at Dhp-a i.289 runs: “okaṃ okaṃ pahāya aniketa-sārī ti ettha ālayo, idha (i.e. at Dhp 34) ubhayam pi labbhati okamokato udaka-sankhātā ālayā ti attho” i.e. from the water’s abode. Bdhgh’s expln. is of course problematic); Dhp 91 (okam okaṃ jahanti “they leave whatever shelter they have”, expld. by ālaya Dhp-a ii.170).
-cara (f. ˚carikā Ja vi.416; ˚cārikā MN i.117) living in the house (said of animals), i.e. tame (cp. same etym of “tame” = Lat. domus, domesticus). The passage MN i.117, MN i.118 has caused confusion by oka being taken as “water”. But from the context as well as from C. on Ja vi.416 it is clear that here a tame animal is meant by means of which other wild ones are caught. The passage at MN i.117 runs “ odaheyya okacaraṃ ṭhapeyya okacārikaṃ” i.e. he puts down a male decoy and places a female (to entice the others), opp. “ ūhaneyya o. nāseyya o.” i.e. takes away the male & kills the female; -(ñ)jaha giving up the house (and its comfort), renouncing (the world), giving up attachment Snp 1101 (= ālayaṃjahaṃ Snp-a 598; cp. Nd ii.176 with v.l. oghaṃjaha). -anoka houseless, homeless, comfortless, renouncing, free from attachment: see separately.
to drag away, remove Thig 444. See also ava˚. Okantati (okkant)
o + kaḍḍhati
to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve; pres. okantati MN i.129; Pv iii.102 (= ava˚ Pv-a 213); ger. okantitvā Ja i.154 (migaṃ o. after carving the deer); Pv-a 192 (piṭṭhi maṃsāni), & okacca Ja iv.210 (T. okkacca, v.l. BB ukk˚ C. expls. by okkantitvā) ■ pp. avakanta & avakantita;.
o + kantati, cp. also apakantati
to preface, arrange, make ready, settle on, feel confident, put (trust) in Vin iv.4; Pts ii.19 (= saddahati ibid. 21); Mil 150, Mil 234; DN-a i.243.
o + kappati
(f.) fixing one’s mind (on), settling in, putting (trust) in, confidence Dhs 12, Dhs 25, Dhs 96 Dhs 288; Ne 15, Ne 19, Ne 28; Vb 170.
o + kappanā
to fix one’s mind on, to put one’s trust in MN i.11; Mil 234 (okappessati).
o + kappeti
to shake, to wag, only in phrase sīsaṃ okampeti to shake one’s head MN i.108 MN i.171; SN i.118.
o + Caus. of kamp
to drag down, draw or pull away, distract, remove. Only in ger.; okassa, always combd. with pasayha “removing by force” DN ii.74 (T. okk˚); AN iv.16 (T. okk˚, v.l. ok˚) 65 (id.); Mil 210. Also in Caus. okasseti to pull out draw out Thig 116 (vaṭṭiṃ = dīpavaṭṭiṃ ākaḍḍheti Thag-a 117). [MSS. often spell okk˚; ].
o + kassati, see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati
only in stock phrase kāmānaṃ ādīnavo okāro sankileso DN i.110, DN i.148 (= lāmaka-bhāva DN-a i.277); MN i.115 MN i.379, MN i.405 sq.; MN ii.145; AN iv.186; Ne 42 (v.l. vokāra) Dhp-a i.6, Dhp-a i.67. The exact meaning is uncertain. Etymologically it would be degradation. But Bdhgh. prefers folly vanity, and this suits the context better.
o + kāra fr. karoti, BSk. okāra, e.g. M Vastu iii. 357
1. lit. “visibility”, (visible) space as geometrical term, open space, atmosphere, air as space DN i.34 (ananto okāso); Vism 184 (with disā pariccheda), 243 (id.); Pv-a 14 (okāsaṃ pharitvā permeating the atmosphere). This meaning is more pronounced in ākāsa.
2. “visibility”, i.e. appearance, as adj looking like, appearing. This meaning closely resembles & often passes over into meaning 3, e.g. katokāsa kamma when the k. makes its appearance = when its chance or opportunity arises Pv-a 63; okāsaṃ deti to give one’s appearance, i.e. to let any one see, to be seen by (dat. Pv-a 19.
3. occasion, chance, opportunity, permission consent, leave AN i.253; AN iv.449; Ja iv.413 (vātassa o. natthi the wind has no access); Snp-a 547 ■ In this meaning freq. in combn. with foll. verbs: (a) okāsaṃ karoti to give permission, to admit, allow; to give a chance or opportunity, freq. with pañhassa veyyā-karaṇāya (to ask a question), e.g. DN i.51, DN i.205; MN ii.142; SN iv.57. Vin i.114, Vin i.170; Nd i.487; Pv-a 222 ■ Caus. ˚ṃ karoti Vin ii.5, Vin ii.6, Vin ii.276; Caus. II. ˚ṃ kārāpeti Vin i.114, Vin i.170. katokāsa given permission (to speak), admitted in audience granted leave Snp 1031; Vv-a 65 (raññā); anokāsakata without having got permission Vin i.114 ■ (b) okāsaṃ yācati to ask permission MN ii.123 ■ (c) okāsaṃ deti to give permission, to consent, give room Ja ii.3; Vv-a 138. (d) with bhū: anokāsa-bhāva want of opportunity Sdhp 15; anokāsa-bhūta not giving (lit. becoming) an opportunity Snp-a 573. Elliptically for o. detha Yogāvacara’s Man. 4 etc.
-ādhigama finding an opportunity DN ii.214 sq.; AN iv.449. -kamma giving opportunity or permission Snp p.94 (˚kata allowed); Pv iv.111 (˚ṃ karoti to give permission) -matta permission Snp p.94. -loka the visible world (manussa-loka) Vism 205; Vv-a 29.
ava + kāś to shine
to be visible; Caus. okāseti to make visible, let appear, show SN iv.290.
ava + kāś
strewn over, beset by, covered with, full of Ja v.74, Ja v.370; Pv-a 86, Pv-a 189 (= otata of Pv iii.33).
pp. of okirati; BSk. avakīrṇa Divy 282; Jtm 3192
casting out (see the later avakirati2), only as adj ■ f. okirinī (okilinī through dialect. variation a cast-out woman (cast-out on acct of some cutaneous disease), in double combn. okilinī okirinī (perhaps only the latter should be written) Vin iii.107 = SN ii.260 (in play of words with avakirati1). Bdhgh’s allegorical expln. at Vin iii.273 puts okilinī = kilinnasarīrā, okiriṇī = angāraparikiṇṇa Cp. kirāta.
o + kiraṇa
1. to pour down on, pour out over MN i.79; aor. okiri Vin iii.107 = SN ii.260; Pv ii.38; Pv-a 82.
2. to cast-out, reject, throw out: see okiraṇa. pp. okiṇṇa (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. okirāpeti to cause to pour out or to sprinkle over Vism 74 (vālikaṃ).
o + kirati
see okiraṇa.
(adj.) lit. “having the top lowered”, with the head squashed in or down, i.e. of compressed & bulging out stature; misshapen, deformed, of ugly shape (Mrs. Rh. D trsls hunchback at SN i.94, pot-bellied at SN i.237; Warren Buddhism p. 426 trsls. decrepit). It occurs only in one stock phrase, viz. dubbaṇṇa dud-das(s)ika okoṭimaka “of bad complexion, of ugly appearance and dwarfed” at Vin ii.90 = SN i.94 = AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = AN iii.285 sq. = Pp 51. The same also at MN iii.169; SN i.237; SN ii.279; Ud 76.
o + koṭi + mant + ka. Ava in BSk., in formula durvarṇa durdarśana avakoṭimaka Sp. Avs i.280. Kern (note on above passage) problematically refers it to Sk. avakūṭara = vairūpya (Pāṇini v.2, 30). The Commentary on SN i.237 explns. by mahodara (fat-bellied as well as lakuṇṭaka (dwarf); Pp A 227 expls. by lakuṇṭaka only
coming on, approaching, taking place DN ii.12; Mil 299 (middhe okkante). See also avakkanta SN ii.174; SN iii.46.
pp. of okkamati
(f.) entry (lit. descent), appearance, coming to be. Usually in stock phrase jāṭi sañjāti o. nibbatti MN iii.249; SN ii.3; SN iii.225; Nd ii.257; Pp A 184 Also in gabbh˚ entry into the womb DN-a i.130.
fr. okkamati
(adj.) coming into existence again and again, recurring. Only as epithet of pīti, joy. The opposite is khaṇika, momentary Vism 143 = Dhs-a 115 (Expositor 153 trsls. “flooding”).
fr. okkanti
at Ja ii.448 is doubtful, v.l. okkantika. It is used adverbially: okkandikaṃ kīḷati to sport (loudly or joyfully). C. explns. as “migo viya okkandi-katvā kīḷati”; in the way of roaring(?) or frisking about(?), like a deer.
kand or kram?
lit. to enter, go down into, fall into. fig. to come on, to develop, to appear in (of a subjective state). It is strange that this important word has been so much misunderstood, for the English idiom is the same. We say ʻhe went to sleepʼ, without meaning that he went anywhere. So we may twist it round and say that ʻsleep overcame himʼ, without meaning any struggle. The two phrases mean exactly the same an internal change, or development, culminating in sleep. So in Pali niddā okkami sleep fell upon him, Vin i.15 niddaṃ okkami he fell on sleep, asleep, Dhp-a i.9; Pv-a 47 At Iti 76 we hear that a dullness developed (dubbaṇṇiyaṃ okkami) on the body of a god, he lost his radiance. At DN ii.12; MN iii.119 a god, on his rebirth, entered his new mother’s womb (kucchiṃ okkami). At DN ii.63 occurs the question ʻif consciousness were not to develop in the womb?ʼ (viññāṇaṃ na okkamissatha) SN v.283 ʻabiding in the sense of blissʼ (sukha-saññaṃ okkamitvā). See also Pp 13 = Pp 28 (niyāma okk˚, ʻhe enters on the Pathʼ). Caus. okkāmeti to make enter, to bring to SN iv.312 (saggaṃ) ■ pp. okkanta. See also avakkamati.
o + kamati fr. kram
(nt.) entering into, approaching, reaching MN iii.6; AN iii.108 (entering the path); also in phrase nibbānassa okkamanāya AN iv.111 sq., cp. 230 sq.
fr. okkamati
see ukkala.
see okassati.
to lie low, to be restrained (in this sense evidently confounded with avakkhipati) SN iv.144 sq. (cakkhuṃ etc okkhāyati).
ava + khāyati, corresp. to Sk. kṣeti fr. kṣi to lie
(adj.) low-lying, deep remote, only in one phrase, viz. udaka-tarakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā MN i.80, MN i.245.
fr. ava + khāyin fr. kṣi, cp. avakkhāyati; Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests relation to BSk. avakhāta of khan, and compares Lal. V. 319
besprinkled, bestrewn with (-˚) Thig 145 (candan˚ = candanânulitta Thag-a 137); Ja v.72 (so in v.l. T. reads okkita; C. explns. by okiṇṇa parikkita parivārita).
pp. of ava + ukkhati, Sk. avokṣita, fr. ukṣ to sprinkle
thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected; only in phrase okkhitta-cakkhu, with down-cast eyes, i.e. turning the eyes away from any objectionable sight which might impair the morale of the bhikkhu; thus meaning “with eyes under control” Snp 63, Snp 411, Snp 972; Nd i.498; Nd ii.177; Pv iv.344 (v.l. ukkh˚); Vv-a 6 ■ For further use & meaning see; avakkhitta.
pp. of okkhipati
to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld. to the eyes = cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning “keep under, restrain, to have control over” (cp. also avakkhāyati); aor. ˚khipi AN iv.264 (indriyāni); ger. ˚khipitvā Vin iv.18 (id.) ■ pp. avakkhitta & okkhitta; (q.v.).
ava + khipati; Sk. avakṣipati
to go down, sink down, recede; of sun & moon: to set DN i.240 (opp. uggacchati); AN iv.101 (udakāni og.). See also ava˚.
ava + gacchati
(adj.) separated from the troop or crowd, standing alone, Vin i.80; Ja iv.432 = (gaṇaṃ ohīna C.).
Vedic ogaṇa with dial. o for ava
(-˚) (adj.) immersed, merging into, diving or plunging into. Only in two main phrases viz.; Amatogadha & Nibbānogadha; diving into N. Besides these only in jagat’ogadha steeped in the world SN i.186.
Sk. avagāḍha; P. form with shortened a, fr. ava + gāh, see gādha1 & gāhati
(nt.) going down, setting (of sun & moon), always in contrast to; uggamana (rising), therefore freq.v.l. ogg DN i.10, DN i.68; DN-a i.95 (= atthangamana); Vv-a 326.
o + gam + ana; Sk. avagamana. That word is rather more than a thousand years later than the Pāli one. It would be ridiculous were one to suppose that the P. could be derived from the Sk. On the other hand the Sk. cannot be derived from the P. for it was formed at a time & place when & where P. was unknown, just as the Pali was formed at a time & place when & where Sk. was unknown. The two words are quite independent. They have no connection with one another except that they are examples of a rule of word-formation common to the two languages
(nt.) submersion ducking, bathing; fig. for bathing-place Snp 214 (= manussānaṃ nahāna-tittha Snp-a 265). See also avagāhana.
o + gahana fr. gāhati; Sk. avagāhana; concerning shortening of ā cp. avagadha
(adj.) immersed, entered; firm, firmly footed or grounded in (-˚), spelt ogāḷha Mil 1 (abhidhamma-vinay˚). Cp. BSk. avagādhaśrāddha of deep faith Divy 268. Cp. pariyogāḷha.
Sk. avagāḍha; ava + gādha2
(nt.) a firm place, firm ground, only in cpd. ogādhappatta having gained a sure footing AN iii.297 sq.
ava + gādha2
diving into; only in cpd. pariy˚. Ogahati (ogaheti)
fr. o + gah
to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (w. acc. or loc.). Pv ii.1211; Vv 61 (= anupavisati Vv-a 42), 392 (sālavanaṃ o = pavisati Vv-a 177). ogāheti Pv-a 155 (pokkharaṇiṃ) ger. ogāhetvā MN iii.175 (T. ogah˚; v.l. ogāhitvā); Pv-a 287 (lokanāthassa sāsanaṃ, v.l. ˚itvā). See also ava˚.
Sk. avagāhate; ava + gāhati
(nt.) plunging into (-˚) Pv-a 158.
fr. ogāhati
to swallow down (opp. uggilati) MN i.393 (inf. ogilituṃ) Mil 5 (id.).
o + gilati
covered or dressed (with) Vin ii.207; Pv-a 86 (v.l. okuṇṭhita).
pp. of oguṇṭheti, cp. BSk. avaguṇṭhita, e.g. Jtm 30
to cover, veil over, hide SN iv.122 (ger. oguṇṭhitvā sīsaṃ, perhaps better read as oguṇṭhitā v.l. SS. okuṇṭhitū) ■ pp. oguṇṭhita (q.v.).
o + guṇṭheti
to string together, wind round, adorn with wreaths, cover, dress Vin i.194 (Pass. ogumphiyanti; vv.ll. ogumbhiyanti ogubbiy˚, ogummīy˚, okumpiy˚); ii.142 (ogumphetvā).
ava + Denom. of gumpha garland
gone down, set (of the sun) Vin iv.55 (oggate suriye = atthangate s.), 268 (id. = ratt’ andhakāre); Thag 477 (anoggatasmiṃ suriyasmiṃ).
pp. of avagacchati: spelling gg on acct. of contrast with uggata, cp. avagamana. Müller P. Gr. 43 unwarrantedly puts oggata = apagata
1. (rare in the old texts) a flood of water Vv-a 48 (udak’ ogha); usually as mahogha a great flood Dhp 47; Vism 512; Vv-a 110; Dhp-a ii.274 = Thag-a 175.
2. (always in sg.) the flood of ignorance and vain desires which sweep a man down, away from the security of emancipation To him who has “crossed the flood”, oghatiṇṇo, are ascribed all, or nearly all, the mental and moral qualifications of the Arahant. For details see Snp 173, Snp 219, Snp 471 Snp 495, Snp 1059, Snp 1064, Snp 1070, Snp 1082; AN ii.200 sq. Less often we have details of what the flood consists of. Thus kāmogha the fl. of lusts AN iii.69 (cp. Dhs 1095, where o. is one of the many names of taṇhā, craving, thirst). In the popular old riddle at SN i.3 and Thag 15, Thag 633 (included also in the Dhp. Anthology, 370) the “flood” is 15 states of mind (the 5 bonds which impede a man on his entrance upon the Aryan Path, the 5 which impede him in his progress towards the end of the Path, and 5 other bonds: lust, ill-temper, stupidity, conceit, and vain speculation). Five Oghas referred to at SN i.126 are possibly these last. Snp 945 says that the flood is gedha greed and the avijjogha of Pp 21 may perhaps belong here. As means of crossing the flood we have the Path SN i.193 (˚assa nittharaṇatthaṃ); iv.257; v.59; It iii.(˚assa nittharanatthāya); faith SN i.214 = Snp 184 = Mil 36; mindfulness SN v.168, SN v.186; the island Dhp 25; and the dyke Thag 7; Snp 4 (cp. DN ii.89). 3. Towards the close of the Nikāya period we find, for the first time, the use of the word in the pl., and the mention of 4 Oghas identical with the 4 Āsavas (mental Intoxicants). See DN iii.230, DN iii.276; SN iv.175, SN iv.257; SN v.59, SN v.292, SN v.309; Nd i.57, Nd i.159; Nd ii.178 When the oghas had been thus grouped and classified in the livery, as it were, of a more popular simile, the older use of the word fell off, a tendency arose to think only of 4 oghas, and of these only as a name or phase of the 4 āsavas. So the Abhidhamma books (Dhs 1151 Vb 25 sq., 43, 65, 77, 129; Comp. Phil. 171). The Netti follows this (31, 114
24). Grouped in combn. āsavagantha-ogha-yoga-agati-taṇh’upādāna at Vism 211. The later history of the word has yet to be investigated. But it may be already stated that the 5th cent. commentators persist in the error of explaining the old word ogha used in the singular, as referring to the 4 Āsavas; and they extend the old simile in other ways. Dhammapāla of Kāñcipura twice uses the word in the sense of flood of water (Vv-a 48, Vv-a 110, see above 1).
-ātiga one who has overcome the flood Snp 1096 (cp Nd ii.180). -tiṇṇa id. SN i.3, SN i.142; Snp 178, Snp 823, Snp 1082 Snp 1101, Snp 1145; Dhp 370 (= cattāro oghe tiṇṇa Dhp-a iv.109) Vv 6428 (= catunnaṃ oghānaṃ saṃsāra-mah’oghassa taritattā o. Vv-a 284); 827; Nd i.159; Nd ii.179.
Vedic ogha and augha; BSk. ogha, e.g. Divy 95 caturogh’ ottīrṇa, Jtm 215 mahaugha. Etym. uncertain
(nt.) watering, flooding (?) MN i.306 (v.l. ogha).
(adj.) that which can be engulfed by floods (metaph.) Dhs 584 (cp. Dhs trsl. 308); Vb 12, Vb 25 & passim; Dhs-a 49.
fr. ogha(na)
in special meaning of one who makes himself at home or familiar with, an investigator, informant scout, spy (ocarakā ti carapurisā C. on Ud 66) ■ Thus also in BSk. as avacaraka one who furnishes information Divy 127; an adaptation from the Pāli ■ Vin iii.47 Vin iii.52; MN i.129 = MN i.189 (corā ocarakā, for carā?); SN i.79 (purisā carā (v.l. corā) ocarakā (okacarā v.l. SS) janapadaṃ ocaritvā etc.; cp. K. S. p. 106 n. 1) = Ud 66 (reads coiā o.).
fr. ocarati
to be after something, to go into, to search, reconnoitre, investigate, pry Vin iii.52 (ger. ˚itvā) M 1502 (ocarati); SN i.79 (˚itvā: so read for T. ocaritā C. explns. by vīmaṃsitvā taṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā). pp. ociṇṇa.
o + carati
gone into, investigated, scouted, explored SN i.79 = Ud 66 (reads otiṇṇa).
pp. of ocarati
gathered, picked off Ja iii.22; Ja iv.135, Ja iv.156; Sdhp 387. Ocinati (ocinati)
o + cita, pp. of ocināti1
1. to gather, pluck, pick off Dhp-a i.366; also in pp. ocita. 2. [ = Sk. avacinoti or ˚ciketi ava + ci2, cp. apacināti2 to disregard, disrespect, treat with contempt; pres. ocināyati (for ocināti metri causa) Ja vi.4 (= avajānāti C.).
= Sk. avacinoti, ava + ci1
see odīraka.
to cut off, sever Ja ii.388 (maggaṃ occhindati & occhindamāna to bar the way; v.l. BB ochijjati), 404.
o + chindati
(adj.) possessing strengthening qualities, giving strength MN i.480; SN i.212 (so read for ovajaṃ; phrase ojavaṃ asecanakaṃ of Nibbāna, trsld. “elixir”); Thig 196 (id. ojavantaṃ Thag-a 168); AN iii.260 (an˚ of food, i.e. not nourishing Dhp-a i.106.
fr. ojā; Vedic ojasvant in diff. meaning: powerful
(f.) richness in sap, strength giving (nourishing) quality Ja i.68 (of milk).
abstr. fr. ajavant
to give up, leave, leave behind, renounce, ger. ohāya DN i.115 (ñāti-sanghaṃ & hirañña-suvaṇṇaṃ) MN ii.166 (id.); Ja v.340 (= chaḍḍetvā C.); Pv-a 93 (maṃ). Pass. avahīyati & ohīyati;, pp. ohīna (q.v.) ■ See also ohanati.
o + jahati
(f.) strength, but only in meaning of strength-giving, nutritive essence (appl;d. to food) MN i.245; SN ii.87; SN v.162 (dhamm’); AN iii.396; Ja i.68; Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; Mil 156; Dhp-a ii.154 (paṭhav˚). See also def. at Vism 450 (referring to kabalinkār’āhāra. The compn. form is oja, e.g. ojadāna Ja v.243; ojaṭṭhamaka (rūpa) Vism 341.
Vedic ojas nt., also BSk. oja nt. Divy 105; fr. *aug to increase, as in Lat. auges, augustus & auxilium Goth. aukan (augment), Ags. ēacian; cp. also Gr. ἀέςω Sk. ukṣati & vakṣana increase
to conquer, vanquish, subdue Ja vi.222 (ojināmase).
Sk. avajayati, ava + ji
despised Mil 191, Mil 229, Mil 288.
pp. o + jānāti, see also avañāta
the lip AN iv.131; Snp 608; Ja ii.264; Ja iii.26 (adhar˚ & uttar˚ lower & upper lip) 278; v.156; Dhp-a i.212; Dhp-a iii.163; Dhp-a iv.1; Vv-a 11; Pv-a 260 Cp. bimboṭṭha.
Vedic oṣṭha, idg. *ō (u) s; Av. aosta lip; Lat. ōs mouth = Sk. āḥ Ags. ōr margin
. It is mentioned in two lists of domestic animals, Vin iii.52; Mil 32. At Ja iii.385 a story is told of an oṭṭhī-vyādhi who fought gallantly in the wars, and was afterwards used to drag a dung-cart. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 150 suggests elephant.
Vedic uṣṭra, f. uṣṭrī, buffalo = Ohg. Ags. ur, Lat. urus bison, aurochs. In cl. Sk. it means a camel
to spit out MN i.79, MN i.127.
cp. Sk. avaṣṭhīvati
thrown out, laid (of a snare) Ja i.183; Ja ii.443; Ja v.341; Thag-a 243.
pp. of oḍḍeti
to throw out (a net), to lay snares AN i.33 = Ja ii.37, Ja ii.153; Ja iii.184 and passim; Thag-a 243 ■ pp. oḍḍita (q.v.).
for uḍḍeti (?). See further under uḍḍeti
carried away, appropriated, only in cpd. sah-oḍhā corā thieves with their plunder Vism 180 (cp. Sk. sahoḍha Manu ix.270).
better spelling oḍha, pp. of ā + vah
bent down, low, inclined. Usually of social rank or grade, combd. with & opp. to; uṇṇata i.e. raised & degraded, lofty and low AN ii.86 = Pp 52 (= nīca lāmaka Pp A 229); Pv iv.66; Mil 387; DN-a i.45; Pv-a 29.
pp. of oṇamati
(instr.) to incline, bend down to, bow to (dat.) Mil 220, Mil 234 (oṇamati & oṇamissati), 400; DN-a i.112. Caus. oṇāmeti MN ii.137 (kāyaṃ) ■ pp. oṇata & Caus.; oṇamita.
o + namati
(nt.) bending down, inclining, bowing down to Mil 234.
fr. oṇamati
having bowed down, bowing down Mil 234.
pp. of oṇameti, Caus. of nam
(m. or f.) charge, only in cpd. oṇi-rakkha a keeper of entrusted wares, bailee Vin iii.47, Vin iii.53 (= āhaṭaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gopento).
cp. Vedic oṇi charge, or a kind of Soma vessel
see onīta.
(nt.) washing off, cleaning, washing one’s hands Vin ii.31 (Bdhgh. refers it to fig. meaning onojeti2 by explaining as “vissajjana gift, presentation).
fr. oṇojeti, Sk. avanejana
(with vowel assimilation o nij. Kern, Toev. ii.138, complementary to remarks s. v. on p. 5 explns. as assimil. onuj˚i.39; iv.156; AN iv.210 = AN iv.214 (oṇojesi aor.); Mil 236.
stretched over, covered, spread over with; Dhp 162 (v.l. otthata); Mil 307 (+ vitata) Dhp-a iii.153 (= pariyonandhitvā ṭhita). See also avatata & sam-otata;.
o + tata, pp. of tan
(adj.) going down, descending Ne 1, Ne 2, Ne 4, Ne 107.
fr. otarati
to descend, to go down to (c. acc.), to be-take oneself to. ppr. otaranto Vin ii.221 ■ aor otari Snp-a 486 (for avaṃsari); Dhp-a i.19 (cankamanaṃ) Pv-a 47 (nāvāya mahāsamuddaṃ), 75 ■ inf. otarituṃ Pp 65, Pp 75 (sangamaṃ) ■ ger. otaritvā Pv-a 94 (pāsādā from the palace), 140 (devalokato) ■ Caus. II. otarāpeti to cause to descend, to bring down to Ja vi.345 ■ pp otiṇṇa ■ Caus. I. otāreti. Opp. uttarati.
o + tarati
(adj.) clothed in rags, poor indigent Ja iv.380 (= lāmaka olamba-vilamba-nantakadharo C.).
of uncertain etym. perhaps *avatāryaka from ava + tṛ; or from uttāḷa?
(adj.) drying or dried (in the sun), with ref. to food Snp-a 35 (parivāsika-bhattaṃ bhuñjati hatth’otāpakaṃ khādati).
fr. otāpeti
to dry in the sun Vin ii.113; Vin iv.281; Mil 371 (kummo udakato nikkhamitvā kāyaṃ o. fig applied to mānasa).
o + tāpeti
1. descent to, i.e. approach to, access, fig. chance, opportunity otāraṃ labhati. Only in the Māra myth.He, the tempter, ʻgets his chanceʼ to tempt the Buddha or the disciples, MN i.334; SN i.122; SN iv.178, SN iv.185; Dhp-a iii.121. (avatāraṃ labhati Divy 144, Divy 145) ot˚ adhigacchati, to find a chance Snp 446. [Fausböll here translates ʻdefectʼ. This is fair as exegesis. Every moral or intellectual defect gives the enemy a chance. But otāra does not mean defect]. Ot gavesati to seek an opportunity, Dhp-a iii.21. Otārāpekkha watching for a chance, SN i.122. At one passage, AN iii.67 = AN iii.259, it is said that constant association leads to agreement, agreement to trust, and trust to otāra. The Com. has nothing. ʻCarelessnessʼ would suit the context o. gavesati to look for an opportunity Dhp-a iii.21, and otāraṃ labhati to get a chance SN i.122; SN iv.178, SN iv.185; MN i.334; Dhp-a iii.21 (gloss okāra & okāsa); cp. avatāraṃ labhati Divy 144, Divy 145 etc.
2. access, fig. inclination to, being at home with, approach, familiarity (cp. otiṇṇa and avacara adj.) AN iii.67, AN iii.259.
3. (influenced by ocarati2 and ociṇṇa) being after something, spying, finding out; hence: fault, blame, defect, flaw Snp 446 (= randha vivara Snp-a 393); also in phrase otārāpekkha spying faults SN i.122 (which may be taken to meaning 1, but meaning 3 is accredited by BSk. avatāraprekṣin Divy 322) Mrs. Rh. D. translates the latter passage by “watching for access”.
fr. otarati, BSk. avatāra. The Sk. avatāra is centuries later and means ʻincarnationʼ
to cause to come down, to bring down, take down Ja i.426; Ja iv.402; Ne 21, Ne 22; Dhp-a ii.81.
Caus. of otarati
1. (med.) gone down, descended Pv-a 104 (uddho-galaṃ na otiṇṇaṃ not gone down further than the throat).
2. (pass.) beset by (cp. avatāra 2), affected with, a victim of, approached by MN i.460 = AN ii.123 (dukkh’ otiṇṇa) = Iti 89 (as v.l.; T. has dukkhâbhikiṇṇa which is either gloss or wrong reading for dukkhâvatiṇṇa) MN ii.10; SN i.123 (sokâva˚), 137 (id.); Snp 306 (icchâvatiṇṇa affected with desire), 939 (sallena otiṇṇo = pierced by an arrow, expld. by Nd i.414 as “sallena viddho phuṭṭho”) Ja v.98 (issâva˚ = issāya otiṇṇa C.).
3. (in special sense affected with love, enamoured, clinging to, fallen in love with Vin iii.128 (= sāratto apekkhavā paṭibaddha-citto) AN iii.67, AN iii.259 (˚citta); Snp-a 322 (id.) ■ Note. otiṇṇa at SN v.162 should with v.l. SS be deleted. See also avatiṇṇa.
pp. of otarati; the form ava˚ only found in poetry as-˚ e.g. issâvatiṇṇa Ja v.98; dukkha˚, soka˚ etc. see below 2
(nt.) fear of exile, shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse. See on term and its distinction from hiri (shame) Dhs trsl. 20, also Dhs-a 124, Dhs-a 126; Vism 8, Vism 9 and the definition at Snp-a 181 Ottappa generally goes with hiri as one of the 7 noble treasures (see ariya-dhanā). Hiri-ottappa Iti 36; Ja i.129 hir-ottappa at MN i.271; SN ii.220; SN v.1; AN ii.78; AN iv.99 AN iv.151; AN v.214; Iti 34; Ja i.127, Ja i.206; Vv-a 23. See also hiri ■ Further passages: DN iii.212; MN i.356; SN ii.196 SN ii.206, SN ii.208; SN v.89; AN i.50, AN i.83, AN i.95; AN iii.4 sq., 352; iv.11 v.123 sq.; Pp 71; Dhs 147, Dhs 277; Ne 39 ■ anottappa (nt.) lack of conscience, unscrupulousness, disregard of morality AN i.50, AN i.83, AN i.95; AN iii.421; AN v.146, AN v.214; Vb 341, Vb 359, Vb 370, Vb 391; as adj. Iti 34 (ahirika + ).
-gāravatā respect for conscience, AN iii.331; AN iv.29 -dhana the treasure of (moral) self-control DN iii.163, DN iii.251 DN iii.282; Vv-a 113. -bala the power of a (good) conscience DN iii.253; Pts ii.169, Pts ii.176; Dhs 31, Dhs 102 (trln. power of the fear of blame).
fr. tappati1 + ud, would corresp. to a Sk. form *auttapya fr. ut-tapya to be regretted, tormented by remorse. The BSk. form is a wrong adaptation of the Pāli form, taking o˚ for apa˚, viz. apatrapya M Vastu iii. 53 and apatrapā ibid. i.463. Müller, P. Gr. & Fausböll Sutta Nipāta Index were both misled by the BSk. form as also recently Kern,; Toev. s. v.
to feel a sense of guilt, to be conscious or afraid of evil SN i.154; Pts ii.169, Pts ii.176; Pp 20, Pp 21; Dhs 31; Mil 171. Ottappin & Ottapin;
ut + tappati1
(adj.) afraid of wrong, conscientious, scrupulous (a) ottappin DN iii.252, DN iii.282; Iti 28, Iti 119 ■ (b) ottāpin MN i.43 sq.; SN ii.159 sq., 196 207; iv.243 sq.; AN ii.13 sq.; AN iii.3 sq., 112; iv.1 sq.v.123, 146. Anottappin bold, reckless, unscrupulous Pp 20 (+ ahirika). anottāpin at SN ii.159 sq., 195, 206; iv. 240 sq.; Snp 133 (ahirika + ).
fr. ottappa
1. spread over, veiled, hidden by (-˚) Mil 299 (mahik˚ suriya the sun hidden by a fog).
2. strewn over (with) Sdhp 246 (-˚). Otthata = Otthata
pp. of ottharati
, v.l. at Dhp 162 for otata.
(nt.) a kind of strainer, a filter Vin ii.119.
fr. of tharati
(nt.) spreading over, veiling Mil 299 (mahik˚).
fr. ottharati
to spread over, spread out, cover Mil 121 (opp. paṭikkamati, of water). See also avattharati.
o + tharati, Sk. root str
(nt.) water; abs. only at Ja iii.282 ■ an˚; without water, dried up Thig 265 (udaka-bhasta Thag-a 212). Cp. combn. sītodaka, e.g. MN i.376. See udaka.
-antika
1. neighbourhood of the water, a place near the water (see antika1) Kp viii.1, Kp viii.3 (gambhīre odakantike which Childers, Kh. trsln. p. 30, interprets “a deep pit” see also Kp-a 217 sq.).
2. “water at the end”, i.e. final ablution (see antika2), in spec. sense the ablution following upon the sexual act Vin iii.21; cp. odak-antikatā (f. abstr.) final ablution, cleansing Ja ii.126.
compn. form of udaka
(nt.) exultation, elation Nd i.3 = Nd ii.446 = Dhs 9, Dhs 86, Dhs 285, Dhs 373; Dhs-a 143 (= udaggasabhāva a “topmost” condition).
der. fr. udagga
(m. & nt.) boiled (milk-)rice, gruel Vin ii.214 (m.); DN i.76, DN i.105; SN i.82 (nāḷik˚); Dhp-a iv.17 (id.); AN iii.49; AN iv.231; Snp 18; Ja iii.425 (til˚ m.) Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; Pv-a 73; Vv-a 98; Sdhp 113. Combd. with kummāsa (sour milk) in phrase o-k-upa-caya a heap of boiled rice and sour milk, of the body (see kāya I.) also at MN i.247.
Sk. odana, to Idg.; *ud, from which also udaka, q.v. for full etym.
a cook Ja iii.49.
fr. odana
(adj.) belonging to rice-gruel, made of rice-gruel Vin iii.59 (˚ghara a ricekitchen); Vv-a 73 (˚surā rice-liquor).
fr. odana, cp. Sk. odanika
(f.) (adj.) [f. of uda + pattaka + in, i.e. having a bowl of water, Ep. of bhariyā a wife, viz. the wife in the quality of providing the house with water Thus in enumn. of the 10 kinds of wives (& women in general) at Vin iii.140 (expld. by udakapattaṃ āmasitvā vāseti) = Vv-a 73.
at Cp ii.48 = last. Odarika & ya;
(adj.) living for one’s belly, voracious, gluttonous Mil 357; Ja vi.208 (˚ya); Thag 101.
fr. udara
(nt.) stomach-filling MN i.461; Vism 71.
fr. odarika
1. to put down, to put in, supply MN i.117 (okacaraṃ, see under oka); ii.216 (agad’angāraṃ vaṇa-mukhe odaheyya); Thag 774 (migavo pāsaṃ odahi the hunter set a snare; Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 suggests change of reading to oḍḍayi, hardly justified); Ja iii.201 (visaṃ odahi araññe), 272 (passaṃ o to turn one’s flanks towards, dat.); Mil 156 (kāye ojaṃ odahissāma supply the body with strength).
2. (fig. to apply, in phrase sotaṃ odahati to listen DN i.230 Dāvs v.68 ■ pp. ohita.
o + dahati, fr. dhā
(nt.)
1. putting down, applying, application MN ii.216; heaping up, storing Dhp-a iii.118. 2. putting in, fig, attention, devotion Ne 29.
fr. odahati
(adj.).
Derivation unknown. The Sk. is avadāta, ava + dāta, pp. of hypothetical dā4 to clean, purify clean, white, prominently applied to the dress as a sign of distinction (white), or special purity at festivities, ablutions & sacrificial functions DN ii.18 (uṇṇā, of the Buddha) iii.268; AN iii.239; AN iv.94, AN iv.263, AN iv.306, AN iv.349; AN v.62; Dhs 617 = (in enumeration of colours); DN-a i.219; Vv-a 111. See also ava˚. -kasiṇa meditation on the white (colour) Vism 174 -vaṇṇa of white colour, white MN ii.14; Dhs 247. -vattha a white dress; adj. wearing a white dress, dressed in white DN i.7, DN i.76, DN i.104; Ja iii.425 (+ alla-kesa). -vasana dressed in white (of householders or laymen as opposed to the yellow dress of the bhikkhus) DN i.211; DN iii.118 DN iii.124 sq., 210; MN i.491, MN ii.23; AN i.73; AN iii.384; AN iv.217 [cp. BSk. avadāta-vasana Divy 160
(adj.) white, clean, dressed in white SN ii.284 (v.l. SS odāta); Thag 965 (dhaja).
fr. odāta
(adv.) only in neg. anodissa without a purpose, indefinitely (? Mil 156 (should we read anudissa?).
ger. of o + disati = Sk. diśati, cp. uddissa
(adj.) only in adv. expression odissaka-vasena definitely, in special, specifically (opp. to anodissaka-vasena in general, universally) Ja i.82; Ja ii.146; Vv-a 97. See also anodissaka & odhiso;.
fr. odissa
in odīrakajāta SN iv.193 should with v.l. be read ocīraka “with its bark off”, stripped of its bark.
= ava + cira + ka
(adj.) belonging to the Udumbara tree Vv 5016; cp. Vv-a 213.
fr. udumbara
fallen down, scattered MN i.124 = SN iv.176 (˚patoda; S reads odhasata but has v.l. odhasta).
Sk. avadhvasta, pp. of ava + dhvaṃsati: see dhaṃsati
(nt.) a place for putting something down or into a receptacle Vin i.204 (salāk˚, vy. ll. and gloss on p. 38 as follows: sālākāṭṭhāniya A, salākātaniya C, salākadhāraya B, salāk’odhāniyan ti yattha salākaṃ odahanti taṃ D E) ■ Cp. samodhāneti.
fr. avadhāna, ava + dhā, cp. Gr. ἀποχήκη, see odahati
putting down, fixing, i.e. boundary, limit, extent Dhp-a ii.80 (jaṇṇu-mattena odhinā to the extent of the knee, i.e. kneedeep); iv.204 (id.) ■ odhiso (adv.) limited, specifically Vb 246; Ne 12; Vism 309. Opp. anodhi MN iii.219 (˚jina), also in anodhiso (adv.) unlimited, universal general Pts ii.130, cp. anodissaka (odissaka); also as anodhikatvā without limit or distinction, absolutely Kv 208, and odhisodhiso “piecemeal” Kv 103 (cp. Kvu trsln. 762, 1271).
-suṅka “extent of toll”, stake Ja vi.279 (= sunkakoṭṭhāsaṃ C.).
from odahati, Sk. avadhi, fr. ava + dhā
(adj.) “according to limit”, i.e. all kinds of, various, in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Snp 60, cp Nd ii.526; Ja v.392 (id.).
fr. odhi
to shake off MN i.229; SN iii.155; AN iii.365 (+ niddhunāti); Pv iv.354 (v.l. BB ophun˚, SS otu˚) = Pv-a 256; Vin ii.317 (Bdhgh. in expln. of ogumphetvā of CV. v.11, 6; p. 117); Mil 399 (+ vidhunāti).
o + dhunāti
bound, tied; put over, covered Vin ii.150, Vin ii.270 sq. (˚mañca, ˚pīṭha); MN ii.64; Dhp 146 (andhakārena); Sdhp 182. See also onayhati.
pp. of onandhati
to bind, fasten; to cover up Vin ii.150 (inf onandhituṃ); Mil 261.
o + nandhati, a secondary pres. form constructed from naddha after bandhati → baddha; see also apiḷandhati
(adj.) bending down, stooping Dhp-a ii.136 (an˚).
fr. onamati
to bend down (instr.), stoop DN ii.17 (anonamanto ppr. not bending); iii.143 (id.); Vv 393 (onamitvā ger.) ■ pp. oṇata.
o + namati
(nt.) in compn. with ˚unnamana lowering & raising, bending down & up Dhp-a i.17.
abstr. fr. onamati
to tie down, to cover over, envelop, shroud Dhs-a 378 (megho ākāsaṃ o.)-pp. onaddha.
ava + nayhati
drawing over, covering, shrouding DN i.246 (spelt onaha); Mil 300; Dhs 1157 (= megho viya ākāsaṃ kāyaṃ onayhati).
fr. ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati
only found in one ster. phrase, viz. onīta-patta-pāṇi “having removed (or removing) his hand from the bowl” a phrase causing constructional difficulties & sometimes taken in glosses as “onitta˚” (fr. nij ), i.e. having washed (bowl and hands after the meal). The Cs. expln. as onīto pattato pāṇi yeva, i.e. “the hand is taken away from the bowl”. The spelling is frequently oṇīta, probably through BB sources. See on term also Trenckner, Notes 6624 cp. apa-nīta-pātra at M Vastu; iii.142. The expression is always combd. with bhuttāvin “having eaten” and occurs very frequently, e.g. at Vin ii.147: DN i.109 (= DN-a i.277, q.v. for the 2 explns. mentioned above MN ii.50, MN ii.93; SN v.384; AN ii.63; Snp p.111 (= pattato onītapāṇi, apanītahattha Snp-a 456); Vv-a 118; Pv-a 278.
in form = Sk. avanīta, but semantically = apanīta. Thus also BSk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti
, prob. for apaneti, see apaneti & pp.; onīta.
see oṇojeti.
(adj.) characterising a sensation of pain: attacking suddenly, spasmodic, acute; always in connection with ābādha or vedanā MN i.92, MN i.241; SN iv.230 = AN ii.87 = AN iii.131 = AN v.110 = Nd ii.304ic = Mil 112.
fr. upakkama
(adj.) “with wings off” i.e. having one’s wings clipped, powerless AN i.188 (˚ṃ karoti to deprive of one’s wings or strength; so read for T. opapakkhiṃ karoti).
o + pakkhin, adj. fr. pakkha wing, cp. similarly avapatta
see opavayha.
to fall or fly down (on), to fall over (w. acc.) Ja ii.228 (lokāmisaṃ ˚anto); vi.561 (˚itvā ger.) Mil 368, Mil 396 ■ pp. opatita.
o + pat
falling (down) Pv-a 29 (udaka; v.l. ovuḷhita, opalahita; context rcads at Pv-a 29 mahāsobbhehi opatitena udakena, but id. p. at Kp-a 213 reads mahāsobbha-sannipātehi).
pp. of opatati
(adj.) with leaves fallen off, leafless (of trees) Ja iii.495 (opatta = avapatta nippatta patita-patta C.).
o + patta, Sk. avapattra
(adj.) forming a substratum for rebirth (always with ref. to puñña, merit). Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885 38 as “exceedingly great”; the correct interpretation is given by Dhpāla at Vv-a 154 as “atta-bhāva-janaka paṭisandhi-pavatti-vipāka-dāyaka” ■ SN i.233 = AN iv.292; Vv 3421; Iti 20 (v.l. osadhika), 78.
fr. upadhi. BSk. after the P., aupadhika Divy 542
(adj.) leading to (Nibbāna) SN iv.41 sq., 272, 339; v.343; AN i.158; AN ii.198; DN iii.5; Vism 217.
fr. upaneti, upa + nī
in phrase ˚ṃ karoti at AN i.188 read opakkhiṃ karoti to deprive of one’s wings, to render powerless.
(adj.) having the characteristic of being born without parents, as deva Ne 28 (upādāna).
= opapātika
(adj.) arisen or reborn without visible cause (i.e. without parents), spontaneous rebirth (Kvu trsl. 2832), apparitional rebirth (Cpd. 1654, q.v.) DN i.27 DN i.55, DN i.156; DN iii.132, DN iii.230 (˚yoni), 265; MN i.34, MN i.73, MN i.287, MN i.401 sq., 436 sq, 465 sq.; ii.52; iii.22, 80, 247; SN iii.206 SN iii.240 sq., 246 sq.; iv.348; v.346, 357 sq., 406; AN i.232 AN i.245, AN i.269; AN ii.5, AN ii.89, AN ii.186; AN iv.12, AN iv.226, AN iv.399, AN iv.423 sq.; v. 265 sq., 286 sq., 343 sq.; Pp 16, Pp 62, Pp 63; Vb 412 sq. Mil 267; Vism 552 sq., 559; DN-a i.165, DN-a i.313. The C on MN i.34 explns. by “sesa-yoni-paṭikkhepa-vacanaṃ etaṃ” See also Pug. A 1, § 40.
fr. upapatti; the BSk. form is a curious distortion of the P. form, viz. aupapāduka Avs ii.89 Divy 300, Divy 627, Divy 649
(adj.) = opapātika, in phrase opapātiyā (for opapātiniyā?) iddhiyā at SN v.282 (so read for T. opapāti ha?) is doubtful reading & perhaps best to be omitted altogether.;
at Ja i.89 & Sdhp 93 (anopama) stands for ūpama, which metri causā for; upama.
(nt.) likeness, simile, comparison, metaphor MN i.378; Vin v.164; Mil 1, Mil 70, Mil 330; Vism 117, Vism 622; Thag-a 290.
fr. upama; cp. Sk. aupamya
viceroyalty is v.l. for uparajja. Thus at MN ii.76; AN iii.154.
(adj. n.) fit for riding, suitable as conveyance, state-elephant (of the elephant of the king) SN v.351 = Ne 136 (v.l. opaguyha C. explns. by ārohana-yogga); Ja ii.20 (SS opavuyha); iv. 91 (v.l. ˚guyha); vi.488 (T. opavuyha, v.l. opaguyha gajuttama opavayha = rāja-vāhana C.); DN-a i.147 (ārohanayogga opavuyha, v.l. ˚guyha); Vv-a 316 (T. opaguyha to be corrected to ˚vayha).
fr. upavayha, grd. of upavahati
(adj.) leading to quiet, allaying quieting; Ep. of Dhamma DN iii.264 sq.; AN ii.132.
fr. upa + sama + ika; cp. BSk. aupaśamika Avs ii.107; Mvu ii.41
(adj.) being near at hand or at one’s bidding (?) MN i.328.
fr. upasaya, upa + śī
to tear asunder, unravel, open Vin ii.150 (chaviṃ opāṭetvā).
ava + Caus. of paṭ; Sk. avapāṭayati
1. falling or flying down, downfall, descent Ja vi.561.
2. a pitfall Ja i.143; Dhp-a iv.211.
o + pāta fr. patati to fall, Vedic avapāta
to make fall, to destroy (cp. atipāteti), i.e. 1. to break, to interrupt, in kathaṃ opāteti to interrupt a conversation MN ii.10, MN ii.122, MN ii.168; AN iii.137 AN iii.392 sq.; Snp p.107.
2. to drop, to omit (a syllable Vin iv.15.
o + Caus. of pat
(nt.). Only in phrase opāna-bhūta (adj.) a man who has become a welling spring as it were, for the satisfaction of all men’s wants; expld. as “khata-pokkharaṇī viya hutvā” DN-a i.298 = Ja v.174 ■ Vin i.236; DN i.137; MN i.379; AN iv.185; Vv 654; Pv iv.160; Ja iii.142; Ja iv.34; Ja v.172; Vb 247; Mil 411; Vism 18; Vv-a 286; DA 1177, 298.
o + pāna fr. pivati. Vedic avapāna. The P. Commentators however take o as a contracted form of udaka, e.g. Bdhgh. at DN-a i.298 = udapāna
(adj.) acting as a support, supporting, helpful MN ii.113.
fr. upārambha
is metric for upiya undergoing, going into SN i.199 = Thag 119 (nibbānaṃ hadayasmiṃ opiya; Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. “suffering N. in thy heart to sink”, S A. hadayasmiṃ pakkhipitvā.
upa + ger. of i
to be immersed, to sink down SN ii.224 ■ Caus. opilāpeti (see sep.).
Sk. avaplavati, ava + plu
immersed into (loc.), gutted with water, drenched Ja i.212, Ja i.214.
pp. of opilāpeti
to immerse, to dip in or down, to drop (into = loc.) Vin i.157 = Vin i.225 = SN i.169 (C.: nimujjapeti, see K. S. 318) MN i.207 = MN iii.157; Dhp-a iii.3 (˚āpetvā; so read with vv.ll. for opīḷetvā); Ja iii.282 ■ pp. opilāpita.
Caus. of opilavati, cp. Sk. avaplāvayati
in “bhattaṃ pacchiyaṃ opīḷetvā” at Dhp-a ii.3 is with v.l. to be read opilāpetvā (gloss odahitvā), i.e. dropping the food into the basket.
is uncertain reading for opuñjeti.
or Opuñjana (nt.) heaping up, covering over; a heap, layer Dhp-a iii.296.
fr. opuñjeti
or ˚ati to heap up, make a heap, cover over with (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 153 trsls. “cleanse”) Vin ii.176 (opuñjati bhattaṃ) Ja iv.377 (opuñchetvā T., but v.l. opuñjetvā; gloss upalimpitvā); Dhp-a iii.296 (opuñchitvā, gloss sammajjitvā). Caus. opuñjāpeti in same meaning “to smear” Vin iii.16 (opuñjāpetvā; v.l. opuñchāpetvā).
o + puñjeti Denom. of puñja, heap
also as opuṇāti (Dh) to winnow, sift; fig. lay bare, expose Dhp 252 (= bhusaṃ opuṇanto viya Dhp-a iii.375); Snp-a 312 ■ Caus. opunāpeti [cp. BSk. opunāpeti Mvu iii.178] to cause to sift AN i.242; Ja i.447.
o + punāti fr. pū
bud, young flower Ja vi.497 (vv.ll. p. 498 opaṇṇa & opatta).;
o + puppha
to deposit, receive (syn. with osāpeti) SN i.236 (SA na… pakkhipanti) = Thig 283; Ja v.252 (T. upeti); in which Thig 283 has oseti (Thag-a 216, with expln. of oseti = ṭhapeti on p. 219) ■ aor opi Ja iv.457 (ukkhipi gloss); vi.185 (= pakkhipi gloss). ger. opitvā (opetvā?) Ja iv.457 (gloss khipetvā).
unless we here deal with a very old misspelling for oseti we have to consider it a secondary derivation from opiya in Caus. sense, i e. Caus. fr. upa + i. Trenckner Notes 77, 78 offers an etym. of ā + vapati, thus opiya would be *āvupiya, a risky conclusion, which besides being discrepant in meaning (āvapati = to distribute) necessitates der. of opiya fr. opati (*āvapati) instead of vice versā. There is no other instance of *āva being contracted to o Trenckner then puts opiya = ūpiya in tadūpiya (“conform with this”, see ta˚ Ia), which is however a direct derivation from upa = upaka, upiya, of which a superl formation is upamā (“likeness”). Trenckner’s expln. of ūpiya as der. fr. ā + vap does not fit in with its meaning to make go into (c. loc.)
covered, obstructed; always in combn. āvuta nivuta ophuṭa (oputa ovuta) DN i.246 (T. ophuta, vv.ll. ophuṭa & opuṭa); MN iii.131 (T. ovuṭa); Nd i.24 ovuṭa, v.l. SS ophuṭa); Nd ii.365 (ophuṭa, v.l. BB oputa; SS ovuta); DN-a i.59 (oputa) Snp-a 596 (oputa = pariyo-naddha); Mil 161 (ovuta).
a difficult, but legitimate form arisen out of analogy, fusing ava-vuta (= Sk. vṛta from vṛ; opp. *apāvuta P. apāruta) and ava-phuṭa (Sk. sphuṭa from sphuṭ; ). We should probably read ovuta in all instances
to bind, to tie on to Vin ii.116 (obandhitvā ger.).
o + bandhati
broken down, broken up, broken SN v.96 (˚vibhagga); AN iv.435 (obhagg’obhagga); Dhp-a i.58 (id.); Ja i.55 (˚sarīra).
o + bhagga, pp. of bhañj, Sk. avabhagna
to fold up, bend over, crease (a garment); only Caus. II. obhañjāpeti Ja i.499 (dhovāpeti + ). See also pp. obhagga.
o + bhañj
having taken away or off, only in cpd. ˚cumbaṭā with the “cumbaṭa” taken off, descriptive of a woman in her habit of carrying vessels on her head (on the cumbaṭa stand) Vin iii.140 = Vv-a 73 (Hardy: “a woman with a circlet of cloth on her head”?).
pp. of obharati
to carry away or off, to take off ■ pp. obhata.
ava + bharati, cp. Sk. avabharati = Lat. aufero
shine, splendour, light, lustre, effulgence; appearance. In clairvoyant language also “aura (see Cpd. 2141 with C. expln. “rays emitted from the body on account of insight”)-D i.220 (effulgence of light); MN iii.120, MN iii.157; AN ii.130, AN ii.139; AN iv.302; Iti 108 (obhāsakara); Pts i.114, Pts i.119 (paññā˚); ii.100, 150 sq. 159, 162; Vism 28, Vism 41; Pv-a 276 (˚ṃ pharati to emit a radiance); Sdhp 325. With nimitta and parikathā at Vism 23; Snp-a 497. See also avabhāsa.
from obhāsati
to shine, to be splendid Pv i.21 (= pabhāseti vijjoteti Pv-a 10) ■ Caus. obhāseti to make radiant or resplendent to illumine, to fill with light or splendour ■ pres. obhāseti Pv iii.115 (= joteti Pv-a 176); Mil 336; ppr obhāsayanto Pv i.111 (= vijjotamāna Pv-a 56) & obhāsento Pv ii.110 (= jotanto ekālokaṃ karonto Pv-a 71) ger. obhāsetvā SN i.66; Kp v. = Snp p.46; Kp-a 116 (ābhāya pharitvā ekobhāsaṃ karitvā) ■ pp. avabhāsita.
o + bhāsati from bhās, cp. Sk. avabhāsati
to speak to (inopportunely), to rail at, offend, abuse Vin ii.262; Vin iii.128.
ava + bhāsati fr. bhāṣ; Sk. apabhāṣati
(nt ■ adj.) shining Vv-a 276 (Hardy: “speaking to someone”).
fr. obhāsa, cp. Sk. avabhāsana
bending, winding, curve, the fold of a robe Vin i.46 (obhoge kāyabandhanaṃ kātabbaṃ).
o + bhoga from bhuj to bend
(adj.) lower (in position & rank), inferior, low; pl. omā AN iii.359 (in contrast with ussā superiors); Snp 860 (ussā samā omā superiors, equals, inferiors), 954; Snp-a 347 (= paritta lāmaka) ■ More freq. in neg. form anoma not inferior i.e. excellent.
Vedic avama, superl. formation fr. ava
(adj.) lower in rank, inferior; low, insignificant Nd i.306 (appaka + ); Ja ii.142; Dhp-a i.203.
oma + ka
touched SN i.13 = SN i.53 = Thag 39.
pp. of omasati
1. to rub Ja vi.262 (sarīraṃ omaddanto); Mil 220.
2. to crush, oppress MN i.87 = Nd ii.1996 (abhivaggena); Ja ii.95.
o + maddati from mṛd, BSk. avamardati Jtm 3133
1. (lit.) to touch Ja v.446.
2. (fig.) to touch a person, to reproach, insult Vin iv.4 sq ■ pp. omaṭṭha.
o + mas = Sk. mṛṣ
(f.) touching, touch Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā oropanā).
fr. omasati
disregard, disrespect, contempt Dhp-a ii.52 (+ atimāna) Cp. foll. & see also; avamāna.
fr. o + man, think. The Sk. avamāna is later
at Ja ii.443 we read ucce sakuṇa omāna meaning ʻOh bird, flying highʼ. With the present material we see no satisfactory solution of this puzzle. There is a Burmese correction which is at variance with the commentary “flying”, the v.l. BB is ḍemāna (fr. ḍī ). C. explns. by caramāna gacchamāna. Müller, P. Gr. 99 proposes to read ḍemāna for omāna.
(adj.) mixed, miscellaneous, various Ja v.37; Ja vi.224 (˚parisā). Cp. vo˚.
o + missaka
(adj.) cast off, second hand Vin i.187.
fr. + muc
to take off, loosen, release; unfasten, undo, doff DN i.126 (veṭhanaṃ as form of salute); Ja ii.326 Ja vi.73 (sāṭakaṃ); Vism 338; Pv-a 63 (tacaṃ); Vv-a 75 (ābhāraṇāni) ■ Caus. omuñcāpeti to cause to take off Vin i.273 ■ pp. omutta.
o + muc
released, freed, discharged, taken off Iti 56 (read omutt’assa Mārapāso for T. omukkassa m.).
pp. of omuñcati
to discharge urine, pass water MN i.79, MN i.127.
Sk. avamūtrayati, Denom. fr. mūtra, urine
to wish ill, to curse, imprecate Vin iii.137.
o + yāc, opp. āyācati
(adj.) below, inferior, posterior. Usually as nt. oraṃ the below, the near side, this world Snp 15; Vv-a 42 (orato abl. from this side) ■ Cases adverbially: acc. oraṃ (with abl. on this side of, below, under, within MN ii.142; Snp 804 (oraṃ vassasatā); Pv iv.335 (oraṃ chahi māsehi in less than 6 months or after 6 months; id. p. at Pv i.1012 has uddhaṃ); Pv-a 154 (dahato); instr. orena Ja v.72 abl. orato on this side Mil 210.
-pāra the below and the above, the lower & higher worlds Snp 1 (see Snp-a 13 = Nd;2 422b and cp. paroparaṃ); Mil 319 (samuddo anorapāro, boundless ocean) -pure (avarapure) below the fortress MN i.68 (bahinagare + ) -mattaka belonging only to this world, mundane; hence trifling, insignificant, little, evanescent Vin ii.85, Vin ii.203; Iti 85; DN i.3; MN i.449; AN iv.22; AN v.157, AN v.164; Vb 247 Ne 62; Dhp-a i.203; DN-a i.55.
compar. formation fr. ava; Vedic avara
(adj.) inferior, posterior Vin i.19; ii. 159; MN ii.47; Snp 692 (= paritta Snp-a 489; cp. omaka) Ja i.381.
ora + ka
1. delighted, satisfied, pleased Mil 210 (cp. abhirata).
2. desisting, abstaining from, restraining oneself Vv-a 72 (= virato; cp. uparata).
o + rata, pp. of ramati
one who kills sheep, a butcher (of sheep) MN i.343, MN i.412; SN ii.256; AN i.251; AN ii.207 = Pp 56; iii.303; Thig 242 (= urabbhaghātaka Thag-a 204) Ja v.270; Ja vi.111 (and their punishment in Niraya); Pp A 244 (urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā; urabbhe hanatī ti orabbhiko).
fr. urabbha. The Sk. aurabhrika is later & differs in meaning
to stay or be on this side, i.e. to stand still, to get no further Ja i.492 (oramituṃ na icchi), 498 (oramāma na pārema) Note. This form may also be expld. & taken as imper of ava + ramati (cp. avarata 2), i.e. let us desist, let us give up, (i.e. we shall not get through to the other side); -anoramati (neg.) see sep ■ On the whole question see also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 154 sq.
Denom. fr. ora instead of orameti
(Caus. II. of oramati] to make someone desist from Ja v.474 (manussa-maṃsā).
(adj.) being a share of the lower, i e this world, belonging to the kāma world, Ep. of the 5 saṃyojanāni (see also saṃyojana) DN i.156; DN iii.107, DN iii.108 DN iii.132; MN i.432; Iti 114; Pp 22; Ne 14; Snp-a 13; DN-a i.313 ■ Note. A curious form of this word is found at Thig 166 orambhāga-manīya, with gloss (Thag-a 158) oraṃ āgamanīya. Probably the bh should be deleted.
ora + bhāga + iya; BSk. avarabhāgīya, e.g. Divy 533
doubtful reading at AN v.149, meaning concerned with worldly things (?). The vv.ll. are oramitā, oravikā, oramato, oravi.
ora + n. ag. of vitarati?
(adj.) belonging to one’s own breast, self-begotten, legitimate; innate natural, own MN ii.84; MN iii.29; SN ii.221 (Bhagavato putto o. mukhato jāto); iii.83; Ja iii.272; Vv 5022; Thag-a 236 Kp-a 248; Pv-a 62 (urejāta + ).
Fr. ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa
the lower or lowest, the one on this side, this (opp. yonder) only in combn. orima-tīra the shore on this side, the near shore (opp. pāra˚ and pārima˚ the far side) DN i.244; SN iv.175 (sakkāyass’ adhivacanaṃ) = Snp-a 24; Dhs 597 Vism 512 (˚tīra-mah’ogha); Dhp-a ii.99.
superl. formation fr. ora, equivalent to avama
1. kept back, restrained, subdued AN iii.393.
2. imprisoned Ja iv.4. See also ava˚.
fr. orundhati. In meaning equalling Sk. aparuddha as well as ava˚
to get, attain, take for a wife ■ ger. orundhiya Ja iv.480 ■ aor. oruddha Thig 445 ■ pp. oruddha. See also avarundhati.
cp. Sk. avarundhate
obstruction; confinement, harem, seraglio Vin ii.290; Vin iv.261 (rāj’ orodhā harem-lady, concubine); Ja iv.393, Ja iv.404.
fr. orundhati; Sk. avarodha
(nt.) taking down, removal, cutting off (hair), in kes’ oropaṇa hair-cutting Dhp-a ii.53 (T. has at one place orohaṇa, v.l. oropaṇa).
abstr. fr. oropeti
to take down, bring down, deprive of, lay aside, take away, cut off (hair) Vv-a 64 (bhattabhājanaṃ oropeti)-ger. oropayitvā Snp 44 (= nikkhipitvā paṭippassambhayitvā Nd ii.181 apanetvā Snp-a 91); Ja vi.211 (kesamassuṃ).
Caus. fr. orohati; BSk. avaropayati
(nt.) descent, in udak’orohaṇânuyoga practice of descending in to the water (i.e. bathing Pp 55; Ja i.193; Mil 350.
abstr. fr. orahati
to descend, climb down DN ii.21; MN iii.131; Ja i.50; Mil 395; Pv-a 14 ■ Caus. oropeti (q.v.).
o + rohati
to make stick to, to put on, hold fast, restrain MN ii.178; AN iii.384 (vv.ll. oloketi olabheti, oketi); Thag 355.
Caus. of o + lag
restrained, checked Thag 356
Sk. avalagna, pp. of avalagati
(f.) bending down Vin iii.121 (= heṭṭhā onamanā).
fr. olaṅgheti
to make jump down, in phrase ullaṅgheti olaṅgheti to make dance up down Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197 (the latter has T. ullaggheti ol˚; but v.l. ullangheti ol˚).
Caus. of ava + laṅgh
(adj.) hanging down Vin iii.49; Ja iv.380 (˚vilamba).
fr. ava + lamb
(adj.-n.)
1. (adj.) hanging down Vv-a 32 (˚dāma).
2. (n.) (a) support, walking stick Ja iv.40 (hatth˚) ■ (b) plumb-line Ja vi.392.
see olambati
to hang down, hang on, to be supported by, rest on. The form in o is the older. Pres. avalambare Pv ii.118 (= olambamānā tiṭṭhanti Pv-a 77); ii.102 (= olambanti Pv-a 142); olambati MN iii.164 (+ ajjholambati); Ja i.194; Pv-a 46 ■ ger avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35 (= olambitva Pv-a 189 & olambetvā Ja iii.218. See also olubbha.
ava + lamb
an armchair, lit. a chair with supports Vin ii.142.
fr. olambati
to scrape off, cut off, shave off (hair) AN iii.295 (veṇiṃ olikhituṃ); Thag 169 (kese olikhissaṃ); 2, 88.
o + likh, cp. Sk. apalikhati
a dirty pool near a village MN iii.168; SN v.361; AN i.161; AN iii.389; Mil 220; Vism 343.
of unknown etym.: prob. Non-Aryan, cp. BSk. oḍigalla Saddh. P. chap. vi.
to stick, stick fast, adhere, cling to Iti 43; Ne 174 ■ pp. olīna (see avalīna).
o + līyate from lī
adhering, sticking or clinging to (worldliness), infatuated MN i.200 (˚vuttika); Ja vi.569 (anolīna-mānasa); Vb 350 (˚vuttikā); Mil 393 (an˚).
pp. of oliyate
adhering, infatuation Pts i.157; Dhs 1156, Dhs 1236.
fr. oliyati
breaking off, falling to pieces, rotting away MN i.80, MN i.245 (olugga-vilugga), 450 (id.) Vism 107 (id.).
pp. of olujjati
to break off, go to wreck, fall away SN ii.218 (v.l. ull˚) ■ pp. olugga.
Sk. avarujyate, Pass. of ava + ruj
holding on to leaning on, supporting oneself by (with acc.); most frequently in phrase daṇḍaṃ olubbha leaning on a stick e.g. MN i.108 (= daṇḍaṃ olambitvā C.; see M i.539); AN iii.298; Thig 27 (= ālambitvā); Vv-a 105. In other connections: SN i.118; SN iii.129; Ja i.265 (āvāṭa-mukha-vaṭṭiyaṃ); vi.40 (hatthe); Dhp-a ii.57 (passaṃ; gloss olambi) Vv-a 217, Vv-a 219.
assimil. form of olumbha which in all likelihood for olambya, ger. of olambati. The form presents difficulties See also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156
to strip off, seize, pick, pluck Vin i.278 (bhesajjan olumpetvā, vv.ll. ulumpetvā, oḷump˚ odametvā).
o + Caus. of lup
(nt.) looking, looking at, sight Sdhp 479 (mukhass’).
see oloketi
(adj.-n.) window Vin ii.267 (olokanakena olokenti, adv.).
fr. oloketi
to look at, to look down or over to, to examine, contemplate, inspect, consider Ja i.85, Ja i.108 (nakkhattaṃ); Pv ii.964; Dhp-a i.10, Dhp-a i.12 Dhp-a i.25, Dhp-a i.26; Dhp-a ii.96 (v.l. for T. voloketi); iii.296; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 5 Pv-a 74, Pv-a 124.
BSk. avalokayati or apaloketi
at Pv-a 110 is with v.l. BB to be read uḷāra.
(adj.) gross, coarse, material, ample (see on term Dhs trsl. 208 & Cpd. 159 n. 4) DN i.37, DN i.186 sq (attā) 195, 197, 199; MN i.48, MN i.139, MN i.247; MN ii.230; MN iii.16 MN iii.299; SN ii.275 (vihāra); iii.47 (opp. sukhuma); iv.382 (id.); v.259 sq.; AN iv.309 sq. (nimittaṃ obhāso); Ja i.67; Dhs 585, Dhs 675, Dhs 889; Vb 1, Vb 13, Vb 379; Vism 155 (˚anga) 274 sq. (with ref. to breathing), 450.
fr. uḷāra
(adj.) Sen. Kacc 390 belonging to a skiff (no ref. in Pāli Canon?); cp. BSk. olumpika M Vastu iii. 113 & oḍumpika ibid. 443.;
Deriv. unknown, BSk. olumpika and oḍumpika Mvu iii.113, Mvu iii.443. In the Śvet-Upan. we find the form uḍupa a skiff.
at SN i.212 read ojava.
obstructed, prevented Vin ii.255 = Vin iv.52; AN iv.277 (v.l. ovāda); also an˚; ibid.
o + vaṭa, pp. of vṛ; another form of ovuta = ophuta, q.v.
(nt.)
1. girdle, waistband MN ii.47; Ja iii.285 (v.l. ovaddhi˚); Vism 312; Dhp-a ii.37 Dhp-a iv.206; DN-a i.218 (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156: a kind of bag).
2. a bracelet Vin ii.106 (= vaḷayaṃ C.). 3. a patch, patching (˚karaṇa), darning (?) Vin i.254 (vv ll. ovaṭṭiya˚, ovadhita˚ ovadhīya˚); Ja ii.197 (v.l. ovaddhi˚) See also ovaddheyya (ava˚).
fr. ava + vṛt
to give advice, to admonish exhort, instruct, usually combd. with anusāsati ■ pres ovadati Vin iv.52 sq.; Dhp-a i.11, Dhp-a i.13; imper. ovadatu MN iii.267 ■ pot. ovadeyya Vin iv.52 (= aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadati); Snp 1051 (= anusāseyya) ■ aor ovadi Dhp-a i.397 ■ inf. ovadituṃ Vin i.59 (+ anusāsituṃ) ■ grd. ovaditabba Vin ii.5; and ovadiya (see sep.) ■ Pass. avadiyati; ppr. ˚iyamāna Pp 64 (anusāsiyamāna).
o + vadati. The Sk. avavadati is some centuries later and is diff. in meaning
(adj.) who or what can be advised, advisable Vin i.59 (+ anusāsiya); Vv 8436 (ovāda-vasena vattabbaṃ Vv-a 345).
grd. of ovadati
a process to be carried out with the kaṭhina robes. The meaning is obscure Vin i.254. See the note at Vin. Texts ii.154; Vin i.254 is not clear (see expln. by C. on p. 388). The vv.ll. are ovadeyya˚ ovadheyya ovaṭṭheyya˚.
to throw up, vomit Ud 78.
o + vam
(nt.) an inner room Vin i.217; MN i.253; Ja i.391 (jāto varake T. to be read as jāt’ovarake i.e. the inner chamber where he was born, thus also at Vv-a 158); Vism 90, Vism 431; Vv-a 304 (= gabbha).
Deriv. uncertain. The Sk. apavaraka is some centuries later. The Sk. apavaraka forbidden or secret room, Halāyudha “lying-in chamber”
forbidding, obstructing, holding back, preventing Thig 367 (v.l. ovadiyāna, thus also Thag-a 250 explained “maṃ gacchantiṃ avaditvā gamanaṃ nisedhetvā”). Ovassa & ka;
ger. of o + vṛ;
see anovassa(ka).
to rain down on, to make wet. - Pass. ovassati to become wet through rain Vin ii.121.
o + vassati
to carry down ■ Pass. ovuyhati Iti 114 (ind. & pot. ovuyheyya).;
o + vahati
advice, instruction, admonition, exhortation Vin i.50 = Vin ii.228; Vin ii.255 Vin iv.52; DN i.137 (˚paṭikara, function of a king); Ja iii.256 (anovādakara one who cannot be helped by advice, cp ovadaka); Ne 91, Ne 92; Dhp-a i.13, Dhp-a i.398 (dasavidha o.) Vv-a 345 ■ ovādaṃ deti to give advice Pv-a 11, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 15,
BSk. avavāda in same sense as P.
(adj.-n.) admonishing (act.) or being admonished (pass.); giving or taking advice; a spiritual instructor or adviser MN i.145; AN i.25; SN v.67; Iti 107 ■ anovādaka one who cannot or does not want to be advised, incorrigible Ja i.159; Ja iii.256, Ja iii.304; Ja v.314.
fr. ovāda; cp. BSk. avavādaka in same meaning, e.g. Divy 48, Divy 254, Divy 385
(adj.-n.) = ovādaka MN i.360 (anovādin).
fr. ovāda
to pierce through Vism 304.
ava + vyadh
see ophuta.
to be carried down (a river) Iti 114.
Pass. of ovahati
to draw back, move back DN i.230; Ja iv.348 (for apavattati C.); v.295 (an-osakkitvā) See also Trenckner, Notes p. 60.
o + sakkati fr. P. sakk = *Sk. ṣvaṣk, cp. Māgadhī osakkai; but sometimes confused with sṛp, cp P. osappati & Sk. apasarpati
to emit, evacuate Pv-a 268 (vaccaṃ excrement, + ohanati) ■ pp. osaṭṭha.
o + sṛj
having withdrawn to (acc.), gone to or into, undergone, visited MN i.176, MN i.469 (padasamācāro sangha-majjhe o.); ii.2 (Rājagahaṃ vass˚āvāsaṃ o.); Mil 24 (sākacchā osaṭā bahū). See also avasaṭa.
pp. of o + sṛ;
to make smooth, to smooth out, comb or brush down (hair) Vin ii.107 (kese); Ja iv.219 (id.).
o + saṇheti, denom. fr. saṇha
(nt.) see osadhī.
Vedic auṣadha
v.l. Iti 20 for opadhika.
(f.) remedy, esp. poultice, fomentation Ja iv.361.
fr. osadha
(f.). There is no difference in meaning between osadha and osadhī; both mean equally any medicine whether of herbs or other ingredients. Cp. e.g. AN iv.100 (bījagāma-bhūtagāmā… osadhi-tiṇavanappatayo) Pv ii.610 with Snp 296 (gāvo… yāsu jāyanti osadhā); DN i.12, cp DN-a i.98; Pv iii.53; Pv-a 86; Ja iv.31; Ja vi.331 (? trsln. medicinal herb). Figuratively, ʻbalm of salvationʼ (amatosadha) Mil 247. Osadhi-tārakā, star of healing. The only thing we know about this star is its white brilliance, SN i.65; Iti 20 = AN v.62; Vv 92; Pv ii.110; cp. Pv-a 71 Vism 412. Childers calls it Venus, but gives no evidence other translators render it ʻmorning starʼ. According to Hindu mythology the lord of medicine is the moon (oṣadhīśa), not any particular star.
Vedic avaṣa + dhī: bearer of balm, comfort, refreshment
(adj.) given out, exhausted, weak Mil 250 (˚viriya).
o + pp. of syad to move on
to draw back, give way Ja vi.190 (osappissati; gloss apīyati).
o + sṛp to creep
(adj.) of the nature of a resort, fit for resorting to, over-hanging eaves, affording shelter Vin ii.153. See also osāraka.
fr. osarati, osarana & osaṭa
(nt.)
1. return to, going into (acc.) visiting Ja i.154 (gāmantaṃ ˚kāle).
2. withdrawal distraction, drawing or moving away, heresy Snp 538 (ogahanāni titthāni, diṭṭhiyo ti attho Snp-a 434).
fr. avasarati
to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit MN i.176 (gāmaṃ etc.); ii.122 ■ pp. osaṭa. See also avasarati.
o + sṛ;
(nt.) stopping, ceasing; end, finish, conclusion SN v.79 (read paṭikkamosāna), 177, 344; Snp 938
fr. osāpeti
to put forth, bring to an end, settle, put down, fix, decide SN i.81 (fut. osāpayissāmi; vv.ll. oyayiss˚ and obhāyiss˚ Ud 66 (T. otarissāmi? vv.ll. obhāyiss˚, otāy˚ & osāy˚ C. paṭipajjissāmi karissāmi); Ja i.25 (osāpeti, v.l. obhāseti); Nd i.412 (in expln. of osāna); Vv-a 77 (agghaṃ o to fix a price; vv.ll. ohāpeti & onarāpeti) = Dhp-a iii.108 (v.l. osāreti). Cp. osāreti.
With Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 158 Caus. of ava + sā, Sk. avasāyayati (cp. P. avaseti, oseti), but by MSS & Pāli grammarians taken as Caus. of; sṛ;: sarāpeti contracted to sāpeti, thus ultimately the same as Sk. sārayati = P. sāreti (thus vv.ll.). Not with Trenckner, Notes 78 and Müller P. Gr. 42. Caus. of ā + viś to sling
shelter, outhouse Ja iii.446. See also osaraka.
fr. osarati
(f.)
1. restoration, rehabilitation reinstatement (of a bhikkhu after exclusion from the Sangha) Vin i.322; Mil 344.
2. procession (?) (perhaps reading should be ussāraṇā) Dhp-a ii.1 (T. oss˚).
fr. osāreti 3
restored, rehabilitated Vin iv.138.
pp. of osāreti 3
1. (with v.l. osāpeti, reading osāreti is uncertain) to stow away, deposit, put in, put away (see also opeti) Ja vi.52, Ja vi.67 (pattaṃ thavikāya o.).
2. to bring out, expound, propound, explain Mil 13 (abhidhammapiṭikaṃ), 203 (kāraṇaṃ), 349 (lekhaṃ to compose a letter).
3. (t.t.) to restore a bhikkhu who has undergone penance Vin i.96, Vin i.322, Vin i.340; Vin iv.53 (osārehi ayyā ti vuccamāno osāreti) ■ Pass. osāriyati Vin ii.61 pp. osārita (cp. osāraṇā ).
Caus. of o + sṛ; to flow
1. to pour out or down over, to besprinkle Vin ii.262; MN i.87 (telena); Pv i.85 (ppr osiñcaṃ = āsiñcanto Pv-a 41).
2. to scoop out, empty drain (water) Ja v.450 (osiñciyā, pot. = osiñceyya C.). pp. avasitta & ositta;.
o + siñcati
inhabited (by), accessible (to) Snp 937 (an˚). Cp. vy˚.
pp. of ava + sā
sprinkled, besprinkled Ja v.400. See also avasitta.
pp. of osiñcati
to settle down, to sink, run aground (of ships) SN iv.314 (osīda bho sappi-tela); Mil 277 (nāvā osīdati) ■ ger. osīditvā Ja ii.293 ■ Caus. II osīdāpeti Ja iv.139 (nāvaṃ).
fr. o + sad
(nt.) sinking Dhs-a 363.
fr. osīdati
see ussa.
see osakk˚.
relaxation, in cpd. sati-ossagga (for which more common sati-vossagga) relaxation of memory inattention, thoughtlessness Dhp-a iii.163 (for pamāda Dhp 167). See vossagga.
fr. ossajati
to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release DN ii.106 (aor. ossaji); Snp 270 = SN i.207; Thag 321; Ja iv.260 ■ pp. ossaṭṭha. See also avassajati.
o + sṛj send off
(nt.) release, dismissal, sending off DN-a i.130.
fr. ossajati
let loose, released, given up, thrown down DN ii.106; SN iii.241; Ja i.64; Ja iv.460 (= nissaṭṭha).
pp. of ossajati
sunk, low down, deficient, lacking Ja i.336 (opp. ussanna) Hardly to be derived from ava + syad.
pp. of osīdati for osanna, ss after ussanna
(nt.) outflow, running water MN i.189 (v.l. ossāvana & osavana). Cp.; avassava.
fr. ava + sru
only in cpd. bimb’ohana, see under bimba.
to defecate, to empty the bowels Pv-a 268 (+ osajjati).
ava + han, but prob. a new formation from Pass. avahīyati of hā, taking it to han instead of the latter
(nt.) lit. “taking away”, leading astray, side-track, deviating path Ja vi.525 (C.: gamana-magga) Cp. avaharaṇa.
fr. oharati
1. to take away, take down, take off SN i.27 (ger. ohacca, v.l. ūhacca); Pv ii.66 (imper ohara = ohārehi Pv-a 95); Dhp-a iv.56 (see ohārin). See also ava˚ ■ Caus. I. ohāreti (see avahārati); Caus. II oharāpeti in meaning of oharati to take down, to cut or shave off (hair) Ja vi.52 (kesamassuṃ); Dhp-a ii.53 (cp oropeti) ■ pp. avahaṭa.
o + hṛ; take
ger. of ojahāti.
see avahāra & cp.; vohāra.
(nt.) taking down, cutting off (hair) Ja i.64 (kesa-massu˚).
fr. ohāreti, cp. avaharaṇa
(adj.-n.) dragging down, weighty, heavy Dhp 346 (= avaharati heṭṭhā haratī ti Dhp-a iv.56).
fr. avaharati
1. to give up, leave behind, renounce (cp. ojahāti) Snp 64 (= oropeti Nd ii.183).
2 to take down (see oharati 1) Vin i.48; Pv-a 95.
3 to cut down, shave off (hair; see oharāpeti under oharati) Iti 75 (kesamassuṃ hair & beard, v.l. ohāyāpetvā); Pp 56 (id.).
Caus. of oharati
1. put down into, deposited Dhp 150.
2. put down, laid down, taken off relieved of, in phrase ohitabhāro (arahaṃ) (a Saint) who has laid down the burden: see arahatta iii. C.; cp. ˚khandhabhāra Dhp-a iv.168.
3. put down in, hidden, put away in (-˚) Snp 1022 = (kos’ohita).
4. (fig.) put down to applied to, in ohita-sota listening, attentive, intent upon (cp. sotaṃ odahati to listen) usually in phrase ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti; MN i.480; MN iii.201; SN v.96; AN iv.391 Vism 300 (+ aṭṭhiṃ katvā).
pp. of odahati; BSk. avahita (Jtm 210 e.g. ) as well as apahita (Lal. V. 552 e.g. )
(adj.-n.) one who is left behind (in the house as a guard) Vin iii.208; Vin iv.94; SN i.185 (vihārapāla).
fr. ohīyati, avahiyyati
having left behind Ja iv.432 (gaṇaṃ).
pp. of ojahāti
(ohiyyati) - 1. to be left behind, to stay behind Ja v.340 (avahīyati ohiyyati C.).
2. to stay behind, to fall out (in order to urinate or defecate); ger. ohīyitvā Vin iv.229; Dhp-a ii.21 (cp. ohanati). See also ohiyyaka.
ava + hīyati, Pass. of ha, see avajahāti
(f.) scorning, scornfulness Vb 353 (+ ohīḷattaṃ).
K.
ava + hīḷanā, of hīḍ
(pron. interr.) who?-m. ko f. kā (nt. kiṃ, q.v.); follows regular decl. of an atheme with some formations fr. ki˚, which base is otherwise restricted to the nt ■ From ka˚ also nt. pl. kāni (Snp 324, Snp 961) & some adv. forms like kathaṃ, kadā kahaṃ, etc.
1.; (a) ka˚;: nom. m. ko Snp 173, Snp 765, Snp 1024; Ja i.279; Dhp 146; f. kā Ja vi.364; Pv-a 41; gen. sg. kassa Mil 25; instr. kena; abl. kasmā (nt.) as adv. “why Snp 883, Snp 885; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 63, etc ■ (b) ki˚; (m. & f.; nt see kiṃ): gen. sg. kissa Dhp 237; Ja ii.104. ko-nāmo (of) what name Mil 14; Dhp-a ii.92, occurs besides kin-nāmo Mil 15 ■ kvattho what (is the) use Vv 5010 stands for ko attho ■ All cases are freq. emphasized by addition of the affirm. part. nu & su;. e.g. ko su’dha tarati oghaṃ (who then or who possibly) Snp 173; kena ssu nivuto loko “by what then is the world obstructed? Snp 1032; kasmā nu saccāni vadanti… Snp 885. 2. In indef. meaning combd with-ci (Sk. cid: see under ca 1 and ci˚): koci, kāci, etc., whoever, some (usually with neg. na koci, etc., equalling “not anybody”), nt kiñci (q.v.); e.g. mā jātu koci lokasmiṃ pāpiccho Iti 85; no yāti koci loke Dhp 179; n’âhaṃ bhatako ‘smi kassaci Snp 25; na hi nassati kassaci kammaṃ “nobody’s trace of action is lost” Snp 666; kassaci kiñci na (deti (he gives) nothing to anybody Vv-a 322; Pv-a 45 ■ In Sandhi the orig. d of cid is restored, e.g. app’ eva nāma kocid eva puriso idh’ agaccheyya, “would that some man or other would come here!” Pv-a 153. Also in correl. with rel. pron. ya (see details under ya˚) yo hi koci gorakkhaṃ upajīvati kassako so na brāhmano (whoever-he) Snp 612. See also kad˚.
Sk. kaḥ, Idg. *qṷo besides *qui (see ki˚ & kiṃ) & *qṷu (see ku˚). Cp. Av. ka-; Gr. πῃ, π ̈ως, ποϊος, etc.; Lat. quī; Oir. co-te; Cymr. pa; Goth hvas, Ags. hwā (= E. who), Ohg. hwër
1. bronze Mil 2 magnified by late commentators occasionally into silver or gold. Thus Ja vi.504 (silver) and Ja i.338; Ja iv.107 Ja vi.509 (gold), considered more suitable to a fairy king
2. a bronze gong Dhp 134 (Dhp-a iii.58).
3. a bronze dish Ja i.336; āpānīya˚ a bronze drinking cup, goblet MN i.316.
4. a “bronze,” i.e. a bronze coin worth 4 kahāpaṇas Vin iv.255, Vin iv.256. See Rhys Davids, Coins and Measures §§ 12, 22 ■ “Golden bronze” in a fairy tale at Vv 54 is explained by Dhammapāla Vv-a 36 as “bells.”-It is doubtful whether brass was known in the Ganges valley when the earlier books were composed; but kaṃsa may have meant metal as opposed to earthenware. See the compounds.
-upadahārana (n. a.) metal milk-pail (?) in phrase dhenusahassāni dukūla-sandanāni (?) kaṃsūpadhāraṇām DN ii.192; AN iv.393; Ja vi.503 (expld at 504). Kern (Toev. p. 142) proposes correction to kaṃs’ûpadohana (= Sk. kāṃsy’opodohana), i.e. giving milk to the extent of a metal pailful. -kaṇṭaka metal thorns bits of sharp metal, nails Ja v.102 (cp. sakaṇṭaka -kūta cheating with false or spurious metal DN i.5 (= DN-a i.79: selling brass plates for gold ones). -tāla bronze gong Dhp-a i.389; Dhs-a 319 (˚tāḷa); Vv-a 161 or cymbals Ja vi.277. 411. -thāla metal dish, as
distinguished from earthenware DN i.74 (in simile of dakkho nahāpako = AN iii.25) cp. DN-a i.217; Vism 283 (in simile); Dhp-a iii.57 (: a gong); DN-a i.217; Dhp-a iv.67 = Ja iii.224; reading at Mil 62 to be ˚tāla (see J.P.T.S. 1886, 122). -pattharika a dealer in bronze ware Vin ii.135. -pāti & pātī a; bronze bowl, usually for food: MN i.25; AN iv.393; Snp 14; Pv-a 274. -pūra full of metal Ja iv.107. -bhaṇḍa brass ware Vin ii.135 -bhājana a bronze vessel Vism 142 (in simile). -maya made of bronze Vin i.190; Vin ii.112; -mallaka metal dish e.g. of gold Ja iii.21. -loha bronze Mil 267.
cp. Sk. kaṃsa; of uncertain etym., perhaps of Babylonian origin, cp. hirañña
= kassati, see ava˚.
a saw Thag 445; Ja iv.30; Ja v.52; Ja vi.261; DN-a i.212; in simile ˚-ūpama ovāda MN i.129. Another simile of the saw (a man sawing a tree) is found at Pts i.171, quoted & referred to at Vism 280, Vism 281.;
-khaṇḍa fragment or bit of saw Ja i.321. -danta tooth of a saw, DN-a i.37 (kakaca-danta-pantiyaṃ kīḷamāna).
onomat. to sound root kr̥, cp. note on gala; Sk. krakaca
, the chameleon Ja i.442, Ja i.487; Ja ii.63; Ja vi.346; Vv-a 258.
a peak, summit, projecting corner SN i.100 (where satakkatu in Text has to be corrected to satakkaku: megho thanayaṃ vijjumālā satakkaku. Com. expln sikhara, kūṭa ) AN iii.34 (= AA 620~kūṭa). Cp. satakkaku & Morris,; J.P.T.S. 1891–93, 5.
Brh. kakud, cp. kākud hollow, curvature, Lat. cacumen, & cumulus
a dove, pigeon, only in cpds.:
-pāda dove-footed (i.e. having beautiful feet) Dhp-a i.119; f. pādī appl. to Apsaras, Ja ii.93; Dhp-a i.119; Mil 169.
see ku˚.
1. the hump on the shoulders of an Indian bull Ja ii.225; Ja vi.340. 2. a cock’s comb: see sīsa kakudha.
3. a king’s symbol or emblem (nt.) Ja v.264. There are 5 such insignia regis, regalia: s. kakudha-bhaṇḍa.
4. a tree the Terminalia Arjuna, Vin i.28; Ja vi.519; kakudharukkha Dhp-a iv.153. Note. On pakudha as twin-form of ka˚ see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 108.
-phala the fruit of the kakudha tree Mvu xi.14, where it is also said to be a kind of pearl; see mutta. -bhaṇḍa ensign of royalty Ja i.53; Ja iv.151; Ja v.289 (= sakāyura) The 5 regalia (as mentioned at Ja v.264) are vāḷavījanī uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā: the fan, diadem, sword canopy, slippers ■ pañcavidha-k˚ Pv-a 74.
cp. Sk. kakuda, and kaku above
a sediment deposited by oily substances, when ground; a paste Vin i.205 (tila˚), 255. Three kinds enumerated at J. vi.232: sāsapa˚ (mustard-paste), mattika˚ (fragrant earth-paste, cp. Fuller’s earth), tila˚ (sesamum paste). At DN-a i.88, a fourth paste is given as haliddi˚ used before the application of face powder (poudre de riz, mukha-cuṇṇa). Cp. kakku.
cp. Sk. kalka, also kalanka & kalusa
a kind of gem; a precious stone of yellowish colour Vv-a 111.
cp. Sk. karka
a large deer (?) Ja vi.538 (expld as mahāmiga).
a crab SN i.123; MN i.234; Ja i.222; Vv 546 (Vv-a 243, Vv-a 245); Dhp-a iii.299 (mama… kakkaṭakassa viya akkhīni nikkhamimsu, as a sign of being in love). Cp. kakkhaḷa.
-nala a kind of sea-reed of reddish colour, Ja iv.141 also a name for coral, ibid. -magga fissures in canals frequented by crabs, Dhs-a 270. -yantaka a ladder with hooks at one end for fastening it to a wall, Mvu ix.17. -rasa a flavour made from crabs, crab-curry Vv-a 243.
cp. Sk. karkaṭa, karkara “hard,” kankata “mail”; cp. Gr. καρκίνος & Lat. cancer; also B. Sk kakkaṭaka hook
a jungle cock used as a decoy Ja ii.162 purāṇa˚, ii.161; cp. dīpaka1 & see Kern,; Toev. p. 118 K˚-Jātaka, N˚ 209.
onomat, cp. Sk. kṛkavāku cock, Gr. κέρκας, κερκίς, Lat. querquedula, partridge; sound-root kr̥ see note on gala
(f.) roughness, harshness, deceitfulness, Pp 19, Pp 23.
(nt.) harshness, Pp 19, Pp 23.
a kind of creeper (˚jātāni = valliphalāni) Ja vi.536.
(adj.) rough, hard, harsh, esp. of speech (vācā para-kaṭukā Dhs 1343), MN i.286 = Dhs 1343; AN v.265 = AN v.283, AN v.293; Dhs-a 396 ■ akakkasa: smooth Snp 632; Ja iii.282 Ja v.203, Ja v.206, Ja v.405, Ja v.406 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1891–93, 13); akakkasanga with smooth limbs, handsome, Ja v.204.
Sk. karkaśa to root kr̥ as in kakkaṭaka
roughness Snp 328, Mil 252.
(and ˚uka ) a kind of cucumber Vv 3328 = eḷāluka Vv-a 147.
fr. karkaru
(Sk. karkāru, connected with karkaṭaka] 1. a pumpkin-gourd, the Beninkasa Cerifera Ja vi.536 kakkārujātāni = valliphalāni (reading kakkaru to be corr.).
2. a heavenly flower Ja iii.87, Ja iii.88 = dibbapuppha
to make the sound kak, to half choke Ja ii.105.
*kaṭ-kāreti to make kaṭ, see note on gala for sound-root kr̥ & cp. khaṭakhaṭa
a powder for the face, slightly adhesive, used by ladies, Ja v.302 where 5 kinds are enumd: sāsapa˚, loṇa˚, mattika˚, tila˚, haliddi˚.
cp. kakka = kalka
(?) Kp-a 38, spelt takk˚; at Vism 258.
see takkola.
1. rough, hard, harsh (lit. & fig.) Dhs 648 (opp.; muduka Dhs 962 (rūpaṃ paṭhavīdhātu: kakkhalaṃ kharagataṃ kakkhaḷattaṃ kakkhaḷabhāvo); Vism 349 (= thaddha) 591, 592 (˚lakkhaṇa); Dhp-a ii.95; Dhp-a iv.104; Mil 67, Mil 112; Pv-a 243 (= asaddha, akkosakāraka, opp. muduka ) Vv-a 138 (= pharusa).
2. cruel, fierce, pitiless Ja i.187 Ja i.266; Ja ii.204; Ja iv.162, Ja iv.427. Akakkhaḷa not hard or harsh smooth, pleasant Dhs-a 397. -˚vacata, kind speech ibid. (= apharusa ˚vācatā mudu˚; ).
-kathā hard speech, cruel words Ja vi.561. -kamma cruelty, atrocity Ja iii.481. -bhāva rigidity Dhs 962 (see kakkhala) MA 21; harshness, cruelty Ja iii.480. a˚ absence of hardness or rigidity Dhs-a 151.
kakkhaṭa, cp. Sk. karkara = P. kakkaṭaka
(f.) hardness, rigidity, Dhs 859; Vb 82; Ja v.167; Dhs-a 166 ■ akakkhaḷatā absence of roughness, pleasantness Dhs 44, Dhs 45, Dhs 324 Dhs 640, Dhs 728, Dhs 859; Dhs-a 151; Vv-a 214 (= saṇha).
abstr. fr. prec.
(nt.) hardness, roughness, harshness Vin ii.86; Vb 82; Vism 365; cp. M.Vastu i.166 kakkhaṭatva.
hardness, rigidity, roughness, Vb 350.
a heron MN i.364, MN i.429; Ja v.475.
-patta a heron’s plume Ja v.475.
Sk. kanka, to sound-root kn̊, cp. kinkiṇī & see note on gala
elephant’s trappings Vv-a 104 (= kappa).
= kaṃ or kiṃ + kṛta, to kiṇi, “the tinklings”
(nt.) a bracelet, ornament for the wrist Thig 259 (= Thag-a 211).
to same root as kanka
skeleton; only in cpd. atthi˚ Aṭṭhikankal’ ūpamā kāmā Vin ii.25; MN i.130, MN i.364; Ja v.210; Thag 1150 (˚kuṭika): aṭṭhikankalasannibha Thig 488 (= Thag-a 287; cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 75) aṭṭhikankala aṭṭhi-puñja aṭṭhi-rāsi SN ii.185 = Iti 17 (but in the verses on same page: puggalass’ aṭṭhisañcayo). Cp. aṭṭhisankhalikā Pv-a 152; aṭṭhika sankhalikā Ja i.433; aṭṭhi-sanghāṭa Thag 60.
Sk. kankāla & cp. śṛnkhala (as kaṇṇa → śṛnga), orig. meaning “chain”
a kind of soil or mould, of a golden or silver colour Mvu 32. 6 (see note on p. 355).
cp. Sk. kankuṣṭha
1. with loc.: to be uncertain, unsettled, to doubt (syn. vicikicchati with which always combined). Kaṅkhati vicikicchati dvīsu mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇesu DN i.106 is in doubt and perplexity about (Bgh’s gloss, patthanaṃ uppādati DN-a i.275, is more edifying than exact.) = Snp 107; na kankhati na vicikicchati SN ii.17 = SN iii.135; kankheyya vicikiccheyya SN ii.50, SN ii.54; SN iii.122; SN v.225 (corr. khankheyya!) 226; same with Satthari kankheyya dhamme sanghe˚ sikkhāya˚ AN iv.460 = AN v.17 = MN i.101 = Dhs 1004 cp. Dhs. 1118.
2. with acc.: to expect, to wait for, to look forward to. Kālaṃ k. to abide one’s time, to wait for death SN i.65 (appiccho sorato danto k. k. bhāvito (so read for bhatiko) sudanto); Snp 516 (id. with bhāvito sadanto); Iti 69 (id. bhāvitatto) ■ Ja v.411 (= icchati) vi.229 (= oloketi). pp. kaṅkhita SN iii.99; Snp 540 (+ vicikicchita); inf. kaṅkhituṃ SN iv.350 = SN iv.399 (+ vicikicchituṃ).
Sk. kāṅkṣ cp. śaṅk, Lat. cunctor
(nt.) doubting, doubt, hesitation MA 97; Dhs-a 259.
to be doubted SN iv.399.
grd. of kankhati
(f.) 1. doubt, uncertainty SN i.181; SN iii.203 (dukkhe k. etc.; cp. Nd ii.1); Snp 541, Snp 1149; ˚ṃ vinayati Snp 58, Snp 559, Snp 1025; k. pahīyati Pts ii.62; combd with vimati: DN i.105; DN iii.116; SN iv.327; SN v.161; AN ii.79 AN ii.160, AN ii.185; DN-a i.274; with vicikicchā: SN iv.350; Dhs. 425 Defined as = kankhāyanā & kankhāyitatta Nd;21; Dhs 425 (under vicikicchā). 3 doubts enumd at DN iii.217; DN iii.4 in passages with vimati (see above); 7 at Dhs 1004; Dhs 8 at Nd ii.1 & Dhs 1118; Dhs 16 at MN i.8 & Vism 518.
2. as adj. doubting, doubtful, in; akaṅkha one who has overcome all doubt, one who possesses right knowledge (vijjā), in combns akankha apiha anupaya SN i.181; akhila a. Snp 477, Snp 1059; Nd2i; cp. vitiṇṇa Snp 514; avitiṇṇa˚ Snp 249, Snp 318, Snp 320 (= ajānaṃ); nikkankha SN ii.84 (+ nibbicikiccha).
3. expectation SA 183-On connotation of k. in general see Dhs trsl. p. 115 n1.
-cchida removing or destroying doubt Snp 87. -cchedana the removal of d. Ja i.98; Ja iv.69. -ṭṭhāniya founded on d., doubtful (dhammā) DN iii.285; AN iv.152, AN iv.154 AN v.16; AA 689. -dhamma a doubting state of mind doubt DN ii.149; SN iv.350. -vitaraṇa overcoming of doubt Mil 233; Dhs-a 352, ˚visuddhi complete purification in consequence of the removal of all doubt DN iii.288; MN i.147; Ud 60; Vism 523; Bdhd 116 sq. -samaṅgin affected with doubts, having doubts Dhs-a 259.
cp. Sk. kānkṣā
to doubt, pp. Kaṅkhāyita Snp 1021.
Denom. fr. kankhā
(f.) + kaṅkhāyitatta (nt.) doubting and hesitation, doubtfulness, Nd ii.1; Dhs 425, Dhs 1004, Dhs 1118; Dhs-a 259.
(adj.) 1. doubting, wavering, undecided, irresolute DN ii.241; Snp 1148; Nd ii.185; combd with vecikicchin SN iii.99; MN i.18; AN ii.174; Snp 510–2. longing for Pgdp 106 (mokkha˚) ■ akaṅkhin not doubting, confident, sure (cp. akaṅkha ) DN ii.241; AN ii.175.
Sk. kānkṣin
(f.) the panic seed, Panicum Italicum; millet used as food by the poor (cp. piyangu); mentioned as one of the seven kinds of grains (see dhañña) at Vin iv.264; DN-a i.78 ■ Mil 267; Mvu 32, Mvu 30.
-piṭṭha millet flour, in ˚maya made of m. meal Ja vi.581. -bhatta a dish of (boiled) millet meal Vism 418 (in simile).
derivation unknown, prob. non-Aryan, cp. Sk. kangu
the hair (of the head), in ˚kalāpa a mass of hair, tresses Dāvs iv.51.
Sk. kaca, cp. kāñcī and Latin cingo, cicatrix
1. sweepings, dust, rubbish (usually in combn with chaḍḍeti and sammajjati ) Ja i.292 Ja iii.163; Ja iv.300; Vism 70; DN-a i.7; Dhp-a i.52; Snp-a 311–2. rags, old clothes SA 283 (= pilotikā).
-chaḍḍana throwing out sweepings, in ˚pacchi a dust basket, a bin Ja i.290. -chaḍḍanaka a dust pan Ja i.161 (+ muṭṭhi-sammjjanī). -chaḍḍani a dust pan Dhp-a iii.7 (sammajjanī + ). -chaḍḍikā (dāsī) a maid for sweeping dust, a cinderella Dhp-a iv.210.
to kaca?
(indecl.) indef. interrog. particle expressing doubt or suspense equivalent to Gr. α ̓́ν, Lat. ne, num, nonne: then perhaps; I doubt whether, I hope, I am not sure, etc. Vin i.158, Vin i.350; DN i.50 (k. maṃ na vañcesi I hope you do not deceive me), 106; SN iii.120, SN iii.125; Sn. 335, 354 p. 87; Ja i.103, Ja i.279; Ja v.373; Dhp-a ii.39 (k. tumhe gatā “have you not gone,” answer: āma “yes”); Pv-a 27 (k. tan dānaṃ upakappati does that gift really benefit the dead?), 178 (k. vo piṃḍapāto laddho have you received any alms?). Cp. kin ■ Often combd with other indef. particles, e.g. kacci nu Vin i.41; Ja iii.236 Ja vi.542; k. nu kho “perhaps” (Ger. etwa, doch nicht Ja i.279; k. pana Ja i.103 ■ When followed by nu or su the original d reappears according to rules of Sandhi kaccinnu Ja ii.133; Ja v.174, Ja v.348; vi. 23; kaccissu Snp 1045 Snp 1079 (see Nd ii.186).
Sk. kaccid = kad + cid, see kad˚
a kind of large shrub, the Caesalpina Digyna Ja vi.535 (should we write with BB kacchi˚?).
(nt.) 1. marshy land, marshes; long grass, rush, reed SN i.52 (te hi sotthiṃ gamissanti kacche vāmakase magā), 78 (parūḷha k-nakha-lomā with nails and hair like long-grown grass cp. same at Ja iii.315 & Sdhp 104); Ja v.23 (carāmi kacchāni vanāni ca); vi.100 (parūḷha-kacchā tagarā) Snp 20 (kacche rūḷhatiṇe caranti gāvo); Snp-a 33 (pabbata opp. to nadī˚, mountain, & river marshes). Kern (;Toev. ii.139) doubts the genuineness of the phrase parūḷha˚.
2. an arrow (made of reed) MN i.429 (kaṇḍo… yen’ amhi viddho yadi vā kacchaṃ yadi vā ropiman ti).
cp. Sk. kaccha, prob. dial.
(adj.) fit to be spoken of AN i.197 (Com. = kathetuṃ yutta). akaccha ibid.
ger. of kath
a kind of fig-tree DN-a i.81.
2. the tree Cedrela Toona Vin iv.35; SN v.96; Vism 183.
Pass. of katheti (ppr. kacchamāna AN iii.181).
2. Pass. of karoti.
(nt.) 1. interior, dwelling, apartment Vv-a 50 (= nivesa).
2. the armpit: see upa˚.
see kacchā2
a tortoise, turtle SN iv.177 (kummo kacchapo); in simile of the blind turtle (kāṇo k.) MN iii.169 = SN v.455; Thig 500 (cp J.P.T.S. 1907, 73, 174) ■ f. kacchapinī a female t Mil 67.
-lakkhaṇa “tortoise-sign,” i.e. fortune-telling on the ground of a tortoise being found in a painting or an ornament; a superstition included in the list of tiracchāna-vijjā DN i.9≈; DN-a i.94. -loma “tortoise-hair, i.e. an impossibility, absurdity Ja iii.477, cp. sasavisāṇa ˚maya made of t. hair Ja iii.478.
Sk. kacchapa, dial. fr. *kaśyapa, orig. Ep of kumma, like magga of paṭipadā
see hattha˚.
reed-basket, sling-basket, pingo, in -vāṇija a trader, hawker, pedlar Ja i.111.
see kaccha1
(f.) 1. enclosure denoting both the enclosing and the enclosed i.e. wall or room: see kacchantara.
2. an ornament for head & neck (of an elephant), veilings, ribbon Vv 21;9 = 699 (= gīveyyaka Vv-a); Ja iv.395 (kacchaṃ nāgānaṃ bandhatha gīveyyaṃ paṭimuñcatha). 3. belt loin-or waist-cloth (cp. next) Vin ii.319; Ja v.306 (= saṃvelli); Mil 36; Dhp-a i.389.
derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣā, Lat. cohus, incohare & see details under gaha;1
(f.) & kaccha (m. nt.); the armpit Vin i.15 (addasa… kacche vīṇaṃ… aññissā kacche ālambaraṃ); SN i.122 = Snp 449 (sokaparetassa vīṃā kacchā abhassatha); Iti 76 (kacchehi sedā muccanti sweat drops from their armpits); Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197 (thanaṃ dasseti k˚ṃ dass˚ nābhiṃ dass˚); Ja v.435 (thanāni k˚ āni ca dassayantī; expld on p. 437 by upakacchaka); vi.578. The phrase parūḷha-kaccha-nakhaloma means “with long-grown finger-nails and long hair in the armpit,” e.g. SN i.78.
-loma (kaccha˚) hair growing in the armpit Mil 163 (should probably be read parūḷha-k ■ nakha-l., as above).
Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣa & kakṣā, Lat. coxa, Ohg. hahsa
see kacci˚.
1. the plant Carpopogon pruriens, the fruit of which causes itch when applied to the skin Dhp-a iii.297 (mahā-phalāni).
2. itch, scab, a cutaneous disease, usually in phrase kacchuyā khajjati “to be eaten by itch (cp. E. itch → eat) Vin i.202, Vin i.296; Ja v.207; Pv ii.311 (cp. kapi˚); Vism 345; Dhp-a i.299.
-cuṇṇa the powdered fruit of Carpopogon pruriens causing itch Dhp-a iii.297. -piḷakā scab & boils Ja v.207.
Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kacchu, dial. for kharju: perhaps connected with khajjati, eating, biting
orig. burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn lamp-black or soot, used as a collyrium Vin ii.50 (read k. for kapalla, cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167).
Sk. kajjala, dial. fr. kad + jala, from jalati, jval
a kind of gem Mil 118 (vajira k. phussarāga lohitanka).
a kind of tree (dāsima˚) Ja vi.536 (expld as “dve rukkhajātiyo”). BB have koñcaka.
(nt.) gold AN iii.346 Thag 691 (muttaṃ selā va k.); Thig 266 (k˚ ssa phalakaṃ va); Vv-a 4, Vv-a 9 (= jātarūpa). Esp. freq. in cpds. = of or like gold.
-agghika a golden garland Bv X. 26. -agghiya id Bv v.29. -āveḷā id. Ja vi.49; Vv 362; Pv ii.127 (thus for ˚ācela); iii.93; Pv-a 157. -kadalikkhaṇḍa a g bunch of bananas Ja vi.13. -thūpa a gilt stupa Dhp-a iii.483; Dhp-a iv.120. -patimā a gilt or golden image or statue Ja vi.553; Vv-a 168. -paṭṭa a g. turban or coronet Ja vi.217. -patta a g. dish Ja v.377. -pallaṅka a gilt palanquin Ja i.204. -bimba the golden bimba fruit Vv 366 (but expld at Vv-a 168 by majjita-kpaṭimā-sadisa “like a polished golden statue”) -bubbula a gilt ornament in form of a ball Mvu 34, Mvu 74 -rūpa a g. figure Ja iii.93. -latā g. strings surrounding the royal drum Ja vi.589. -vaṇṇa of g. colour, gilt shining, bright Ja v.342 (= paṇḍara). -velli a g. robe girdle or waist cloth Ja v.398 (but expld as “k-rūpakasadisa-sarīra “having a body like a g. statue”), cp Ja v.306, where velli is expld by kacchā, girdle. -sannibha like g., golden-coloured (cp. k-vaṇṇa and Sk kanaka-varṇa Sp. Avs. i.121, 135, etc.), in phrase ˚taca “with golden-coloured skin,” Ep. of the Buddha and one of the 32 signs of a great man (mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇa) DN ii.17; DN iii.143, DN iii.159; MN ii.136; Mil 75; attr of a devatā Vv 302, 322; Vv-a 284; of a bhikkhu Snp 551 = Thag 821. -sūci a gold pin, a hair-pin of gold Ja vi.242.
Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kāñeana, either from khacati (shine = the shining metal, cp. kāca (glass) & Sk.; kāś ), or from kanaka gold, cp. Gr. κνηκός (yellow). P. kañcana is poetical
(adj.) golden Ja iv.379 (˚daṇḍa).
1. a closely fitting jacket, a bodice Vin i.306 = Vin ii.267; AN i.145; Dhp-a iii.295 (paṭa˚ṃ paṭimuncitvā dressed in a close bodice); Pv-a 63 (urago tacaṃ kañcukaṃ omuñcanto viya).
2. the slough of a snake (cp. 1) DN-a i.222.
3. armour, coat of mail Ja v.128 (sannāha˚); DN-a i.157 (of leather); Dāvs v.14
4. a case, covering, encasement; of one pagoda incasing another: Mvu i.42.
from kañc (kac) to bind, cp. Gr. κάκαλα fetter, Sk. kañcuka
Name of a class of Titans Pv-a 272 (kāḷa-k˚-bhedā Asurā; should we read khañjaka? Cp. Hardy Manual of Buddhism 59).
(nt.) sour rice-gruel Ja i.238 (udaka˚); Vv 3337 (amba˚), 435 (= yāgu Vv-a 186) Dhp-a i.78, Dhp-a i.288; Vv-a 99 (ācāma-k˚-loṇudaka as expln of loṇa-sovīraka “salty fluid, i.e. the scum of sour gruel”). Cp. next.
Sk. kāñjika
(nt.) = kañjika; Ja iii.145 (ambila˚); vi.365 (˚āpaṇa); Dhp-a ii.3; Dhp-a iv.164.
-teḷa a thick substance rising as a scum on rice-gruel used in straightening arrows Dhp-a i.288.
(f.) a young (unmarried woman, maiden, girl Pv i.111 ■ As emblem of beauty in simile khattiya-kaññā vā… pannarasa-vassuddesikā vā solasa-vassuddesikā vā… MN i.88; in combn khattiya-kaññā, brāhmaṇa-k˚, etc. AN ii.205 AN iv.128; Kisāgotamī nāma khattiya-k˚ Ja i.60; deva˚ a celestial nymph Ja i.61.
-dāna giving away of a girl in marriage Pgdp 85.
from kanīna young, compar. kanīyah, superl. kaniṣṭha; orig. “newly sprung” from *qen, cp. Gr. καινός, Vedic kanyā, Lat. re-cen(t)s, Ags. hindema “novissimus.” See also kaniṭṭha
a mat: see cpds. & kaṭallaka.;
-sara a reed: Saccharum Sara, used as medicine Dhs-a 78. -sāra (Dhp-a i.268) & sāraka a mat for sitting or lying on, made of the stalks of the screw-pine, Pandanus Furcatus Ja vi.474; Ja v.97; DN-a i.137; Dhp-a ii.183
Sk. kaṭa from kṛṇatti: to do wicker-work, roll up, plait; *gert, cp. Gr. κάρταλος, Lat. cratis = E. crate Goth. haurds, E. hurdle
another form of kaṭi (hip), only used in cpds.:
-aṭṭhika the hip-bone DN ii.296 = MN i.58, MN i.89 = MN iii.92 (as v.l.). Note. kaṭiṭṭhika at MN iii.92 and as v.l. at DN ii.296. -sāṭaka a loin-cloth Ja iv.248.
= kata in meaning of “original,” good (cp. sat); as nt. “the lucky die” in phrase kaṭaggaha (see below). Also in combn with su˚ & duk˚; for sukata & dukkata (e.g. Vin ii.289; Dhp-a iii.486; Dhp-a iv.150) and in meaning of “bad, evil” in kaṭana. Cp. also kali.
-ggaha “he who throws the lucky die,” one who is lucky, fortunate, in phrase “ubhayattha k.” lucky in both worlds, i.e. here & beyond Thag 462; Ja iv.322 (= jayaggaha victorious C.); cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 159. Also in “ubhayam ettha k.” SN iv.351 sq-Opposed to kali the unlucky die, in phrase kaliṃ gaṇhāti to have bad luck Ja vi.206 (kaliggaha = parājayasaṃkhāta, i.e. one who is defeated, as opp. to kaṭaggaha = jayasankhāta), 228, 282.
pp. of karoti
(m. nt.) anything circular, a ring, a wheel (thus in kara˚ Vin ii.122); a bracelet Pv-a 134.
see kaṭu˚.
= taṭataṭāyati to crush, grind, creak, snap PugA. i.34; Vv-a 121 (as v.l.); Vism 264. Cp. also karakarā.
a ladle, a spoon; expld by uḷunka Dhp-a iv.75, Dhp-a iv.123; by dabbi Pv-a 135. Used for butter Vv-a 68, otherwise for cooked food in general, esp. rice gruel ■ Vin ii.216; Ja i.454; Ja iii.277.
-gāha “holding on to one’s spoon,” i.e. disinclination to give food, niggardliness, stinginess Dhs-a 376 cp. Dhs trsl.300 n2. -gāhika “spoon in hand,” serving with ladles (in the distribution of food at the Mahādāna Pv-a 135. -parissāvana a perforated ladle Vin ii.118 -bhikkhā “ladle-begging,” i.e. the food given with a ladle to a bhikkhu when he calls at a house on his begging tour Thag 934; Mil 9; Dhp-a iv.123; as representing a small gift to one individual, opposed to the Mahādanā Pv ii.957; as an individual meal contrasted with public feeding (salāka-bhatta) Dhp-a i.379. -matta (bhatta “only a spoonful of rice” Mil 8; Dhp-a iv.75.
cp. on etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 163
(adj.) relating to spoons Vin ii.233.
(nt.) an evil deed AN iv.172 (v.l. = AA 744 kaṭanaṃ vuccati pāpakammaṃ).
from kaṭa, pp. of karoti
a puppet (pagliaccio), a marionette with some contrivance to make it dance Ja v.16 (dāru expld by dārumaya-yanta-rūpaka).
to kaṭa1
(f.) a cemetery; only in phrase kaṭasiṃ vaḍḍheti “to increase the cemetery” referring to dying and being buried repeatedly in the course of numerous rebirths, expld by susāna & āḷāhana Thag-a 291-vaḍḍhenti kaṭasiṃ ghoraṃ ādiyanti punabbhavaṃ Vin ii.296 = AN ii.54 = Thag 456 (where ācinanti (?) for ādiy˚), 575; Thig 502. Also in cpds. ˚vaḍḍhana Ja i.146; Ud 72 = Ne 174; ˚vaḍḍhita SN ii.178 sq. Nd ii.664.
prob. a contamination of kaṭa + sīva(thikā), charnel-house, under influence of foll. va (ḍḍh˚), cp Sk. kaṭa (?) a corpse
see kata i.3.
(m. nt.) a pot [in older texts only as-˚].
1. pot, vessel, vase, receptacle. udaka˚; Vin ii.122; ghaṭi˚; Vin ii.115; loha˚; Vin ii.170. ayo˚; (in simile “diva-santatte ayokaṭāhe”) MN i.453 = AN iv.138 gūtha˚; Vin iv.265; tumba˚; (a gourd used as receptacle for food) vin ii.114; alābu˚; Dhs-a 405 ■ Uncompounded only at Dpvs 92 (˚ka); Mvu 17, Mvu 47; Mvu 18, Mvu 24.
2. anything shaped like a pot, as the skull: sīsa˚; DN ii.297; MN i.58; Mil 197.
Sk. kaṭāha
hip, waist Vin iii.22, Vin iii.112; Nd ii.659; Ja iv.32; Mil 418. In cpds. also kaṭa (q.v.).
-thālaka a cert. bone on the small of the back Ja vi.509. -padesa the buttocks Ja iii.37. -pamāṇa (adj. as far as the waist Ja vi.593. -pariyosāna the end of the hips, the bottom Ja ii.275. -puthulaka (adj.) with broad hips, having beautiful hips Ja v.303 (in expln of soṇī puthulā). -bhāga the waist Ja iii.373. -bhāra a burden carried on the hip (also a way of carrying children) Vin ii.137; Vin iii.49. -sandhi the joint of the hip Mil 418, Vism 185. -samohita (adj.) fastened or clinging to the waist Ja v.206. -sutta a belt, girdle (as ornament) Pv-a 134. -suttaka a string or cord around the waist to fasten the loin-cloth Vin ii.271 also an ornamental waist-band, girdle Vin ii.107 (see Vin. Texts iii.69, 142, 348).
Sk. kaṭi, *(s)qṷel; orig. bending, curvature, cp. Gr. σκέλος hip, Lat. scelus crooked deed, Ger. scheel squint
(adj.) sharp, bitter, acid, severe
1. severe, sharp (fig.), of dukkha, vedanā, kāmā, etc MN i.10 = AN ii.143; Ja vi.115; Thig 451 (= Thag-a 281) SA 56 ■ painful, terrible, frightful (-appld to the fruits of evil actions and to the sufferings in Niraya: see kammapphala & niraya) Ja iii.519; Pv i.102, 111iv.18, 76 ■ bitter, or perhaps pungent of taste DhS 291; Mil 65, Mil 112; Ja iii.201.
2. (nt.) pungency, acidity bitterness DN ii.349 = Ja i.380; Thig 503 (pañca˚) Ja vi.509 ■ Note. Is k. to be written instead of kadukkha at Vv-a 316, where it explains maraṇa? Cp. Ja iii.201 tesaṃ taṃ kaṭukaṃ āsi, maraṇaṃ ten’ upāgamuṃ.
-udraya causing bitterness or pain Ja v.241, cp. dukkhudraya Ja v.119. -odaka a bitter draught Sdhp 159 -pabhedana (adj.) having a pungent juice exuding from the temples, said of an elephant in rut Dhp 324 (= tikhiṇamada Dhp-a iv.13). -pphala a kind of perfume made of the berry of an aromatic plant Ja ii.416 = Dhp-a iii.475 (kappūra-k˚-ādīni), cp. Sk. kakkolaka ■ (adj.) of bitter fruit Ja ii.106 (of the mango); SN i.57 = Ja iii.291 = Dhp 66 (of kamma); Pv i.1110 (id.). -bhaṇḍa (sg. & pl.) spices There are 4 enum;d at Ja iii.86: hingujīraka, singiveraka marica, pipphali; 3 at Vv-a 186 (as tikaṭuka, cp kaṭula): ajamoja, hingujīraka, lasuṇa; Pv-a 135; Dhp-a ii.131. -bhāva stinginess Dhs-a 376. -rohiṇī the black hellebore Vin i.201 (as medicine). -vipāka (adj. having a bitter result (of pāpa) Mil 206; compar. ˚tara SN ii.128. -sāsana a harsh command Ja vi.498.
Sk. kaṭu(ka), from *(s)qṷer to cut; cp. Sk. kṛṇoti (kṛṇtati), Lat. caro “cutlet.”-k. is almost exclusively poetical; usually expld in prose by aniṭṭha tikhiṇa, ghora (of niraya); often combd with khara opp. madhura, e.g. Pv-a 119
(f.) closeness, tightness close-fistedness, niggardliness. Expld as “the shrinking up of the heart,” which prevents the flow or manifestation of generosity. It occurs only in the stock phrase “vevicchaṃ kadariyaṃ k. aggahitattaṃ cittassa” in macchariya -passage at Nd ii.614 = Dhs 1122 = Pp 19, Pp 23 = Vb 357, Vb 371; and in the macchariya expln at Vism 470.
der. by Bdhgh. as kaṭuka + añcuka (añc), a popular etymology (Dhs-a 376). At Dhs 1122 and as v.l. K in Vb we have the spelling kaṭakancukatā (for kaṭakuñcakatā?), on which and ˚kuñcaka see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 159 sq. and Dhs. trsl. 300 n2-Morris’ derivation is kaṭa (kar ) + kañcuka + tā (kañcuka = kuñcaka to kuñc, to contract), thus a dern fr. kañcuka “bodice” and meaning “being tightened in by a bodice,” i.e. tightness. Although the reading kaṭukañc˚ is the established reading, the var lect. kaṭakuñc˚; is probably etym. correct, semantically undoubtedly better. It has undergone dissimilatory vowel-metathesis under influence of popular analogy with kaṭuka. With kuñcikatā cp. the similar expression derived from the same root: kuṇalī-mukha, of a stingy person Pv ii.928, which is expld by “sankucitaṃ mukhaṃ akāsi” (see kuñcita)
(nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness Mil 56, Mil 63.
(f.) artificiality, outward help, suggestion appl;d to sati Mil 78, Mil 79 (cp. Mil trsl. i.121 n and Mvu i.477).
from karoti; see Sk. kṛtrima & kuṭṭima; also kutta & kutti
(adj.) containing pungent substances (generally three: tekaṭula) Vin i.210 (yāgu), cp. tikaṭuka
Sk. kaṭura
(adj.) impure, defiled, in ˚kata AN i.280.
kaṭu viya?
a kind of creeper Ja vi.536 (perhaps read as next).
a flowering plant Ja vi.537 (= pupphagaccha). Cp. kaseruka.
ploughed, tilled Snp 80; Mil 255; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 62. a˚ untilled, unprepared Anvs 27. su˚ well-ploughed AN i.229; Mil 255.
Sk. kṛṣṭa, pp. of kasati, cp. kiṭṭha
(adj.) bad, useless: see kaṭṭhaka2. Only in cpds.; perhaps also in pakaṭṭhaka.
-aṅga pithless, sapless, of no value (of trees) Ja ii.163; Dhp-a i.144. -mukha “with the injurious mouth,” a kind of snake Dhs-a 300.
Sk. kaṣṭa
(nt.) 1. a piece of wood, esp. a stick used as fuel, chips, firewood SN i.168 = Snp 462; MN i.234 (+ kaṭhala); Pv-a 256 (+ tiṇa). In phrase “sattussada sa-tiṇa-kaṭṭh’ odaka sa-dhañña” (densely populated with good supply of grass, firewood, water, and corn) in ster. description of a prosperous place (cp. Xenophon’s πόλις οἰκουμένη εὐδαίμων καπόλις οἰκουμένη εὐδαίμων και μεγάλη) DN i.87, DN i.111, etc. Both sg (coll.) & pl. as “sticks” DN ii.341, esp. in phrase kaṭṭhaṃ phāleti to chop sticks Vin i.31; Snp p.104; Ja ii.144; Pv ii.951 (= Pv-a 135), or k˚ṃ pāteti (phāṭeti = phāleti See pāteti) MN i.21. Frequent also in similes: MN i.241 MN ii.93 = MN iii.95 (alla k.); MN iii.242 = SN ii.97 = SN iv.215 SN v.212 (dve k.); AN iii.6 (+ kaṭhala); iv.72 (+ tiṇa) i.124 = Pp 30, Pp 36 (+ kaṭhala).
2. a piece of stick used for building huts (wattle and daub) MN i.190. 3. a stick, in avalekhana˚; (for scraping) Vin ii.141, Vin ii.221 and in danta˚; a tooth-pick Vv-a 63, etc. (see danta)
4. (adj.) in cpds. = of wood, wooden.
-aggi wood-fire, natural fire AN iv.41, AN iv.45, enumerated last among the 7 fires. -atthaṃ for the purpose of fuel in phrase k. pharati to serve as fuel AN ii.95 = SN iii.93; Iti 90 = Ja i.482. -atthara a mat made of twigs (cp kaṭasāra) Ja v.197, also as -attharika (& ˚kā) Ja vi.21; Dhp-a i.135; f. at Ja i.9; Ja iv.329; Ja vi.57. -kaliṅgara chips and chaff Dhp-a iii.122 (cp. k-khaṇḍa). -khaṇḍa a piece of wood, splinter, chip, suggesting something useless trifling Dhp-a i.321 (as expln of niratthaṃ va kalingaraṃ) Thag-a 284 (as expln of chuṭṭho kalingaraṃ viya). -tāla a wooden key Vin ii.148 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.162) -tāḷa a w. gong Dhs-a 319. -tumba a w. vessel Vin i.205. -pādukā a wooden shoe, clog Vin i.188. -puñja a heap of w. AN iv.72; Ja ii.327. -phālaka wood-cutter Vism 413. -bhatin a wood-cutter Dpvs 20, 28, where given as a nickname of King Tissa. -mañcaka a wooden bed Mil 366. -maya wooden Vin i.203; Ja i.289 Ja v.435. -rūpa (& ˚ka) a w. figure, doll Ja i.287. -vāha a cartload of fire-wood SN ii.84. -vāhana riding on a faggot Ja i.136. -vipalāvita drifting wood Ja i.326 -hatthin a w. elephant, built by order of King Caṇḍapajjota to decoy King Udena (cp. the horse of Troy Dhp-a i.193. -hāraka (f. ˚ikā) gathering fire-wood, an occupation of poor people MN i.79; SN i.180; Ja i.134 Ja ii.412; iv. 148; v.417; Mil 331; Vism 120; Vv-a 173 -hārin = ˚hāraka Vin iii.41; Ja i.133 (title of Ja no.7 referred to at Dhp-a i.349).
Brh. kāṣṭha, cp. Ohg. holz
(m. nt.) a kind of reed Dhp 164; Dhp-a iii.156 (= velu-sankhāta-kaṭṭha).
to kaṭṭha3
(m. pl.) a kind of fairy DN ii.261
to kaṭṭha2
(nt.) a silken coverlet embroidered with gems DN i.7 = Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163; DN-a i.87 = AA 445.
Sk.?
1. to boil, to stew Bdhgh on Vin i.205 see Vin. Texts ii.57 n1, where pp. is given as kuthita Similarly Thig 504 (cp. Sisters 174 n4, but cp. Mil trs. ii.271 “distressed”; E. Müller, J.R.A.S. 1910 539).
2. to be scorched, pp. kaṭhita (= hot) Mil 323, Mil 325, Mil 357, Mil 397 ■ The pp. occurs as ˚kaṭṭhita ˚kuṭṭhita in cpds uk˚ pa˚ (q.v.). See also kuṭṭhita.;
Sk. kvathati; cp. Goth. hvapo scum, hvapjan to seethe. The Dhātumañjūsā (no. 132, ed. Andersen Smith) comments on; kaṭh with “sosāna-pākesu.” See also kuthati
gravel, pebble, potsherd Ja iii.225; Ja v.417; Vv-a 157; combd with sakkhara at DN i.84 = AN i.9, and in simile at AN i.253. As f. combd with kaṭṭha at AN i.124 = Pp 30, Pp 36; AN iii.6; as m. in same combn at Vism 261.
Sk. kaṭhara (˚la, ˚lla, ˚lya: all found in Av. S and Divy), to kṛṇāti; cp. khāṭi
gravel, potsherd Ja iii.227; Mil 34.
(adj.-n.). 1. (adj.) hard, firm, stiff Cp ii.2; Dhs 44, Dhs 45 (where also der. f. abstr. akaṭhinatā absence of rigidity, combd with akakkhalatā, cp Dhs-a 151 akaṭhina-bhāva); Pv-a 152 (˚dāṭha) ■ (fig. hard, harsh, cruel Ja i.295 = Ja v.448 (= thaddha-hadaya) adv. ˚ṃ fiercely, violently Mil 273, Mil 274.
2. (nt.) the cotton cloth which was annually supplied by the laity to the bhikkhus for the purpose of making robes Vin i.253 sq.; also a wooden frame used by the bh. in sewing their robes Vin. ii.115
117 ■ On the k. robe see Vin i.298 sq.; Vin iii.196 sq., 203 sq., 261 sq.; iv.74, 100, 245 sq. 286 sq.; v.15, 88, 119, 172 sq.; 218. Cp. Vin. Texts i.18; ii.148; iii.92.
-attharaṇa the dedication of the k. cloth Vin i.266 see next. -atthāra the spreading out, i.e. dedication of the k. cloth by the people to the community of bhikkhus On rules concerning this distribution and description of the ceremony see Vin i.254 sq.; Bv ix.7; cp. Vin v.128 sq., 205 -uddhāra the withdrawal or suspension of the five privileges accorded to a bhikkhu at the k. ceremony Vin i.255, Vin i.259; Vin iii.262; Vin iv.287, Vin iv.288; Vin v.177
179, cp. next & Vin. Texts ii.157, 234, 235. -ubbhāra = ˚uddhāra, in kaṭhinassa ubbhārāya “for the suspension of the k privileges” Vin i.255. -khandhaka the chapter or section treating of k., the 7th of the Mahāvagga of the Vinaya Vin ii.253
267. -cīvara a k. robe made of k cloth Bv ix.7. -dussa the k. cloth Vin i.254. -maṇḍapa a shed in which the bhikkhus stitched their k. cloth into robes Vin ii.117. -rajju string used to fix the k. cloth on to the frame Vin ii.116. -sālā = ˚maṇḍapa Vin ii.116.
Sk. kaṭhina & kaṭhora with dial. ṭh for rth; cp. Gr. κρατύς, κρατερός strong, κράτος strength; Goth. hardus = Ags. heard = E. hard. Cp also Sk. kṛtsna = P. kasiṇa
(adj.) referring to the kaṭhina cloth Vin v.61, Vin v.114.
1. to draw out, drag, pull, tug Ja i.193, Ja i.225, Ja i.265, Ja i.273 (khaggaṃ k. to draw the sword).
2. to draw in, suck up (udakaṃ) Ja iv.141.
3. to draw a line, to scratch Ja i.78, Ja i.111, Ja i.123; Ja vi.56 (lekhaṃ).
dialect. form supposed to equal Sk. karṣati, cp. Prk. kaḍḍhai to pull, tear, khaḍḍā pit, dug-out See also Bloomfield, J.A.O.S. xiv. 1921 p. 465.
(nt.). 1. pulling, drawing Mil 231. - 2. refusing, rejecting, renunciation, appl. to the selfdenial of missionary theras following Gotama Buddha’s example Mvu 12, Mvu 55.
(adj.) pulling, dragging Ja v.260.
the fine red powder between the husk and the grain of rice, huskpowder DN i.9 (˚homa), expld at DN-a i.93 by kuṇḍaka. (adj.) made of husk-powder or of finely broken rice, of cakes Ja i.423 (k-pūva = kuṇḍakena pakka-pūva)- akaṇa (adj.) free from the coating of red powder characteristic of the best rice Mvu 5, Mvu 30; Anvs 27 (akaṇaṃ karoti to whiten the rice). Cp. kākaṇa.
-bhakkha eating husk-powder, a practice of cert ascetics DN i.166 = MN i.78 = AN i.241≈.
Derivation uncertain, possibly connected with kana; positive of kanīyān = small; Vedic kaṇa
a sort of spear, lance Ja i.273; Ja ii.364 (like a spear, of a bird’s beak); Mil 339.
-agga the point of a spear Ja i.329 (like…, of a beak).
Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kaṇaya = kaṇapa
Nerium odorum, oleander, the flower of which is frequently used in the garland worn by criminals when led to the place of execution (cp Rouse, J. trsl. iv.119 and Mṛcchakaṭika X. beginning diṇṇa-kalavīla-dāme. See also under kaṇṭha) Vism 183 (n); Dhs-a 317; Snp-a 283; Vv-a 177; cp. next.
Sk. karavīra
= kaṇavīra Ja iii.61; Ja iv.191; Ja v.420; Ja vi.406.
(nt.) a porridge of broken rice, eaten together with sour gruel (bilanga-dutiya; always in this combn except at Ja v.230) Vin ii.77 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.9) SN i.90, SN i.91; AN i.145; AN iv.392; Ja i.228; Ja iii.299; Dhp-a iii.10; Dhp-a iv.77; Vv-a 222, Vv-a 298 (corr. bilanka; Hardy at Vv-a Index p. 364 expl. as “a certain weight“(?)).
-bhatta a meal of k. porridge Ja v.230.
(f.) 1. a small particle of broken rice (opp. taṇḍula a full grain) Ja vi.341, Ja vi.366 (˚āhi pūvaṃ pacitvā). 2. a small spot, a freckle, mole, in a˚; (adj. having no moles DN i.80, and sa˚; with moles DN i.80 (cp DN-a i.223).
cp. kaṇa
(m. nt.) & kaṇṇikāra Ja iv.440; Ja v.420; the difference stated at Ja v.422 is kaṇi˚ = mahāpupphā kaṇṇi˚ = khuddakapupphā)
1. (m.) the tree Pterospermum acerifolium Ja i.40; Ja v.295; Ja vi.269 Ja vi.537.
2. (nt.) its (yellow) flower (k- puppha ), taken metaphorically as typical emblem of yellow and of brightness. Thus in similes at DN ii.111 (= pīta) MN ii.14 (ṇṇ) = AN v.61 (ṇṇ); Dhp-a i.388; of the yellow robes (kāsāyāni) Ja ii.25; with ref. to the blood of the heart Vism 256; = golden Vv-a 65; Dhp-a ii.250 (v.l. ṇṇ).
-makula a k. bud Ja ii.83.
Sk. karṇikāra
(nt.) a helmet (?) Ja vi.397.
(m. f.) a young elephant Ja ii.342; Ja iv.49; Ja v.39, Ja v.50, Ja v.416; Ja vi.497; Dhp-a i.196 (v.l.) kareṇukā)-f. ˚kā MN i.178 ■ See also kareṇu.
Derivation uncertain, just possibly connected with kara, trunk. Sanskrit has kareṇu, but the medieval vocabularies give also kaṇeru
(cp. next) a thorn Mil 351.
1. a thorn Snp 845; Vin i.188; Ja v.102 Ja vi.105 (in description of the Vetaraṇī); cp. kusa˚
2. any instrument with a sharp point Sdhp 201. 3. a bone, fish-bone Ja i.222; in piṭṭhi˚; a bone of the spine DN ii.297≈ (see kaṭaṭṭhi); MN i.80 = MN i.245; Vism 271; Sdhp 102.
4. (fig.) an obstacle, hindrance nuisance (“thorn in my side”); Kv 572; enemy infestor; a dacoit, thief, robber DN i.135 (sa˚ and a˚, of the country as infested with dacoits or free from them, cp DN-a i.296); Ja i.186 (paṭikaṇṭaka, enemy); v.450; Thag 946; Dhp-a i.177 (akkhimhi); Vv-a 301.
5. (fig.) anything sharp, thorny, causing pain: of kāmā (passions SN iv.189, SN iv.195, SN iv.198; Ud 24; Kv 202; cp. sa˚ ■ Thus grouped, like saṃyojanāni, into 10 obstacles to perfection (dasa k.) AN v.134; as “bringing much trouble Ja iv.117. Often in standing phrase khāṇu-kaṇṭaka stumbling and obstruction AN i.35; Snp-a 334. As abstr kaṇṭakattaṃ hindrance at Vism 269 (sadda˚) ■ akaṇṭaka 1. free from thorns Ja ii.118; Ja v.260.
2. (fig. free from thieves, quiet, peaceful DN i.135; also not difficult, easy, happy, bringing blessings (of the right path) AN v.135; Vv 187; Vv-a 96 ■ sakaṇṭaka 1. having bones (of food) Ja iv.192, Ja iv.193.
2. (fig.) beset with thieves, dangerous DN i.135; thorny, i.e. painful, miserable (of duggati and kāmā) SN iv.195; Thig 352; Ja v.260 ■ Cp. also kaṇḍaka and nikkaṇṭaka.
-āpacita covered with thorns Ja vi.249 (cp. ˚ācita) -āpassaya (= kaṇṭak’ apāśraya) a bed made of an outstretched skin, under which are placed thorns or iron spikes; to lie or stand on such is a practice of certain naked ascetics DN i.167 = MN i.78≈. -āpassayika (adj to prec.) “bed-of-thorns-man” DN i.167≈. At Ja i.493 the reading is k-āpassaya, at iii.74 k-apassaya; at iii.235 the reading is kaṇṭhaka-seyyaṃ kappetha (should it be k-āpassaye seyyaṃ k˚?); DN i.167 reads kaṇṭhakā-passayika. -ācita covered with thorns Ja v.167. -ādhāna a thorny brake, a thorny hedge MN i.10 (k-dhāna; for dhāna = ṭhāna see dhāna & cp rāja-dhānī); AN i.35; Mil 220. -kasā a thorny whip used for punishment and torture Ja iii.41. -gahana a thorny thicket or jungle SN ii.228. -gumba a th. bush Ja i.208. -latā a th. creeper, the Capparis Zeilanica Ja v.175. -vaṭṭa a thorny brake or hedge MN i.448.
From kantati2 to cut. Brh. kaṇṭaka. Spelt also kaṇṭhaka
(f.) in cpd. ˚vāṭa a thorny fence (cactus hedge?) Vin ii.154.
1. throat AN iv.131; Ja v.448; Mil 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati, is hoarse); Pv-a 280 (akkharāni mahatā kaṇṭhena uccaritāni). The throat of Petas is narrow and parched with thirst: Pv-a 99 (k-oṭṭha-tālūnaṃ tassita), 180 (sūci˚ like a needle’s eye, cp. sūcicchidda v.l. sūcikaṭṭha “whose bones are like needles”), 260 (visukkha-k-ṭṭha-jivhā).
2. neck Vin i.15; Dhp 307 (kāsāva˚); Vv 6417 (expid at Vv-a 280 by gīvūpagasīsūpagādi-ābharaṇāni). Esp. in loc. kaṇṭhe round the neck, with ref. to var. things tied round, e.g. kuṇapaṃ k āsattaṃ AN iv.377; kuṇapaṃ k. baddhaṃ Ja i.5; k. mālā Ja i.166, Ja i.192; k. bandhanti vaḍḍhanaṃ Ja iii.226; with the wreath of karavīra flowers (q.v.) on a criminal ready for execution: rattavaṇṇa-virala-mālāya bandhakaṇṭha Pv-a 4 (cp. Avs i.102; Avs ii.182; karavīra-mālābaddha [sakta ii.182]-kaṇṭheguṇa).
-kūpa the cavity of the throat Mhbv 137. -ja produced in the throat, i.e. guttural Sāsv 150. -suttaka an ornamental string or string of beads worn round the neck Vin ii.106.
*qṷent from *qṷelt, primarily neck, cp. Lat. collus “the turner.” Syn. with k. is gīvā, primarily throat Brh. kaṇṭha
thorn, see kaṇṭaka.
Name of Gotama’s horse, on which he left his father’s palace Mhbv 25; spelt kanthaka at Ja i.54, Ja i.62 sq.
(m. nt.) 1. the portion of a stalk or cane between one knot and another; the whole stalk or shaft; the shaft of an arrow, an arrow in general MN i.429 (two kinds of arrows: kaccha & ropima, cp kaṇḍa-cittaka); Ja i.150; Ja ii.91; Ja iii.273; Ja v.39; Mil 44, Mil 73; Mvu 25, Mvu 89. As arrow also in the “Tell story of Culladhanuggaha at Ja iii.220 & Dhp-a iv.66. 2. a section, portion or paragraph of a book DN-a i.12 Pgdp 161.
3. a small portion, a bit or lump Dhp-a i.134 (pūva˚); Mvu 17, Mvu 35.
4. kaṇḍaṃ (adv.) a portion of time, for a while, a little Pgdp 36 ■ See also khaṇḍa, with which it is often confounded. Der upa- kaṇḍakin (adj.) (thin) like a stalk or arrow Pv. ii.113 (of a Petī).
-gamana the going of an arrow, i.e. the distance covered by an arrow in flight, a bow-shot Ja ii.334; cp kaṇḍu. -cittaka (Sk. kāṇḍa-citraka) an excellent arrow AN ii.202. -nāḷī a quiver Ja iii.220. -pahāra an arrow-shot, arrow-wound Mil 16 (ekena k-paharena dve mahākāyā padālitā “two birds killed with one stone”), 73. -vāraṇa (adj.) warding off arrows, appl to a shield Ja vi.592 (nt.); a shield Ja iv.366.
perhaps as *kaldno fr. *kalad to break, cp. Gr. κλαδαρός, Lat. clades, etc., Sk. kāṇḍa. See also khagga and khaṇḍa
= kaṇṭaka Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh.); AN iii.383; Bv xiii.29 ■ akaṇḍaka free from thieves, safe, secure Pv-a 161.
(f.) sinew, tendon Vin i.91, Vin i.322 (in cpd. kaṇḍara-cchinna one whose tendons (of the feet) have been cut); Kv 23, 31; Vism 253, Vism 254 (where Kp-a 49 reads miñja).
at Ja i.155 is misprint; read: kaṇḍam assa atthī ti kaṇḍī taṃ kaṇḍinaṃ.
(adj.) having a shaft inserted, appl. to the head of an arrow (salla) Ja i.155; (m.) an archer ibid.
(f.) the itch, itching, itchy feeling, desire to scratch Vin i.202, Vin i.296; Ja v.198; Vism 345. kaṇḍuṃ karoti to make or cause to itch Ja v.198; vineti to allay the itch, to scratch Ja v.199 ■ (fig.) worldly attachment irritation caused by the lusts, in “kaṇḍuṃ saṃhanti (as result of jhāna) AN iv.437.
-uppala a kind of lotus-blossom Dāvs iv.48; -paṭicchādi an “itch-cloth,” i.e. a covering allowed to the bhikkhus when suffering from itch or other cutaneous disease Vin i.296, Vin i.297; Vin iv.171, Vin iv.172. -rogin (adj. suffering from the itch Khus 105.
perhaps from *kanad to bite, scratch; cp. Sk. kandara, Gr. κναδάλλω to bite, κνώδων, κνώδαλον, etc., Sk kaṇḍu m. & f.
an arrow-shot (as measure), in sahassa-kaṇḍu sata-bheṇḍu Thag 164 = Ja ii.334 (but the latter: sata-bhedo), expld at Thag 164n by sahassakaṇḍo sahassa [sata?]-bhūmako, and at Ja ii.334 by sahassa-kaṇḍubbedho ti pāsādo satabhūmiko ahosi; in preceding lines the expression used is “sahassa-kaṇḍagamanaṃ uccaṃ.”
= kaṇḍa in compn
the itch, itchy feeling, irritation Ja v.198.
(kandūvati) 1. to itch, to be itchy, to be irritated, to suffer from itch Vin i.205; Vin ii.121; Ja v.198 (kaṇḍuvāyati) Dhp-a iii.297 (kaṇḍūvantī).
2. to scratch, rub, scrape AN ii.207; Ja vi.413; Pp 56.
Denom. fr. kaṇḍu. Sk. kandūyati
(nt.) 1. itching, itchy feeling Dhp-a i.440; cp. Dhātumañjūsā no. 416 kaṇḍūvana. 2. scratching, scraping MN i.508; Ja ii.249 (appl. to bad music).
fr. kaṇḍūvati
(nt.) a strip of cloth used to mark the kaṭhina robe, in ˚karaṇa Vin i.254, and ˚ka ibid. 290.
(nt.) the itch Ja v.69.
See kaṇḍuvana
(f.) a wicker-basket or stand Vin ii.114, Vin ii.143 (see Vin. Texts iii.86).
1. a corner, an angle Vin i.48, Vin i.286; Ja i.73; Ja iii.42 Ja v.38; Ja vi.519; Pv-a 74; Dhp-a ii.178; Dāvs ii.111- cīvara˚; the edge of the garment Vism 389. Freq. in cpd. catu˚; (catukkaṇṇa) four-cornered, square, as Ep of Niraya Nd ii.304iii = Pv i.1013 (expld by catu-koṇa) Also of cloth Vin ii.228; Ja i.426; Ja iv.250.
2. the ear Snp 608; Ja i.146, Ja i.194; Dhp-a i.390 (dasā˚). Freq. in phrase kaṇṇaṃ chindati (to cut off the ear) as punishment e.g. AN i.47 ■ loc. kaṇṇe in the ear, i.e. in a low tone, in a whisper Dhp-a i.166.
3. the tip of a spoon Ja i.347 ■ assakaṇṇa Name of a tree (see under assa3).
-alaṅkāra an ornament for the ear Ja v.409. -āyata (mutta) (a pearl) inserted in the lobe of the ear Ja ii.275 Ja ii.276. -kita (should it be kaṇha˚? cp. paṃsukita, malaggakita; kita = kata) spoiled, rusty, blunt Vin ii.115 (of needles); dirty, mouldy Vin i.48 (of a floor); ii.209 (of walls); stained, soiled Vin iv.281 (of robes). -gūthaka the cerumen, wax, of the ear, Vin ii.134; Snp 197; Ja i.146. -cālana shaking the ears Ja iii.99. -cūḷa the root of the ear Ja vi.488; as ˚cūlikā at Ja ii.276; Vism 255; Dhp-a iv.13. -chidda (nt.) the orifice of the ear, the outer auditory passage (cp. sūci-chidda eye of the needle Vin iii.39; Ja ii.244, Ja ii.261. -chinna one whose ears are cut off Vin i.322; Kv 31. -cheda cutting or tearing off of the ear Mil 197, Mil 290. -jappaka one who whispers into the ear, one who tells secretly, also a gossip Vin ii.98; sa˚; whispered into the ear, appl. to a method of taking votes ibid. Cp. upakaṇṇakajappin. -jappana whispering into the ear DN i.11; DN-a i.97. -tela anointing the ear with medicinal oil DN i.12 (expld at DN-a i.98 where reading is ˚telanaṃ). -nāsa ear & nose Ja ii.117; Mil 5 (˚chinna). -patta the lobe of the ear Ja v.463 As ˚panta at Thag-a 211. -pāli = ˚patta Thig 259 (expld by ˚panta). -piṭṭhī the upper part or top of the ear Dhp-a i.394. -puccha the “tail” or flap of the ear Sdhp 168. -bila orifice of the ear Vism 195. -bheri a sort of drum. Cp ix.24. -mala “ear-dirt,” ear-wax in ˚haraṇī, an instrument for removing the wax from the ear Vin ii.135. -mālā a garland from corner to corner (of a temple) Dāvs ii.111. -muṇḍa 1. (adj.) one whose ears have been shorn or clipped Pv ii.1218 (of the dog of Hell, cp. Pv-a 152 chinnakaṇṇa).
2. (˚ka) “with blunt corners,” Name of the first one of the fabulous 7 Great Lakes (satta-mahāsarā) in the Himavant, enumd at Ja v.415; Vism 416; DN-a i.164. -mūla the root of the ear, the ear in gen. Ja i.335; Ja iii.124; loc. fig in a low tone Dhp-a i.173; near, near by Dhp-a ii.8 (mama k.). -roga a disease of the ear Dhs-a 340. -vallī the lobe of the ear Mvu 25, Mvu 94. -vijjhana perforating the ear, ˚mangala the ceremony of ear-piercing Dhp-a ii.87; cp. mangala -vedha (cp. prec.) ear-piercing, a quasi religious ceremony on children Ja v.167. -sakkhali & ˚ikā the orifice or auditory passage of the ear Dhp-a i.148; Dhs-a 334 in which latter passage ˚ikaṃ paharati means to impinge on the ear (said of the wind); ˚ikaṃ bhindati (= bhindanto viya paharati) to break the ear (with unpleasant words) Dhp-a ii.178 (T. sankhaliṃ, v.l. sakkhaliṃ). -saṅkhali a small chain attached to the ear with a small ornament suspended from it Ja v.438 -sandhovika washing the ears AN v.202. -sukha 1 (adj.) pleasant to the ear, agreable DN i.4 = MN i.179, MN i.268 = AN ii.209≈; Mil 1; DN-a i.75 = Dhs-a 397;
2. (nt. pleasant speech Ja ii.187; Ja v.167; opp. kaṇṇa -sūla -sutta an ornamental string hanging from the ear Vin ii.143. -suttaka a string from corner to corner, a clothes-line Vin i.286. -sūla 1. a piercing pain (lit stake) in the ear, ear-ache Vv-a 243.
2. what is disagreeable to hear, harsh speech Dhs-a 397 (opp. ˚sukha).
-sota the auditory passage, the ear (+ nāsika-sotāni as ubho sotāni, i.e. heṭṭhā & uparimā) DN i.106 = Snp p.108; AN iv.86; Ja ii.359; Mil 286, Mil 357; Dhp-a ii.72.
Vedic karṇa, orig. not associated with hearing, therefore not used to signify the sense (sota is used instead; cp. akkhi → cakkhu), but as “projection” to *ker, from which also Sk. śṛṇga horn. Cp. Gr. κόρυς helmet; Lat. cornu & cervus = E. corner, horn & hart. Further related Sk. aśri (caturaśraḥ four-cornered), śaṣkuli auditory passage; Lat. ācer = Gr. α ̓́κρις, α ̓́κανος, ὀςύς; Ger. ecke; also Sk. śūla & P. koṇa
(& ˚ika) (adj.) having corners or ears (-˚); f. ˚ikā Vin ii.137; Ja ii.185 ■ kāḷa-kaṇṇika see under kāḷa.
fr. kaṇṇa
(adj.) having an (open) ear, i.e. clever, sharp Ja ii.261 (= kaṇṇachiddaṃ pana na kassaci n’atthi C.).
fr. kaṇṇa
(f.) 1. an ornament for the ear, in ˚lakkhaṇa: see below.
2. the pericarp of a lotus Ja i.152, Ja i.183; Ja v.416; Mil 361; Vism 124 (paduma˚); Vv-a 43.
3. the corner of the upper story of a palace or pagoda, house-top Ja i.201; Ja iii.146, Ja iii.318 Ja iii.431, Ja iii.472; Dhp-a i.77 (kūṭāgāra˚); DN-a i.43; Vv-a 304 Bdhd 92.
4. a sheaf in the form of a pinnacle Dhp-a i.98 ■ In cpds. kaṇṇika˚.
-baddha bound into a sheaf; fig. of objects of thoughts Dhp-a i.304. -maṇḍala part of the roof of a house J. iii.317; Dhp-a iii.66; Dhp-a vi.178. -rukkha a tree or log used to form the top of a house Ja i.201 = Dhp-a i.269 -lakkhaṇa the art of telling fortune by marks on ornaments of the ear, or of the house-top DN i.9 (= pilandhana-k˚ pi geha-k˚ pi vasena DN-a i.94).
cp. kaṇṇaka & Sk. karṇikā
see kaṇikāra.
(adj.) dark, black, as attr. of darkness, opposed to light, syn. with kāḷa (q.v. for etym.); opp. sukka. In general it is hard to separate the lit. and fig. meanings, an ethical implication is to be found in nearly all cases (except 1.). The contrast with sukka (brightness) goes through all applications with ref. to light as well as quality. I. Of the sense of sight: k-sukka dark & bright (about black white see nīla & seta), forming one system of coloursensations (the colourless, as distinguished from the red-green and yellow-blue systems). As such enum;d in connection with quasi definition of vision, together with nīla, pīta, lohita, mañjeṭṭha at DN ii.328 = MN i.509 sq = ii.201 (see also mañjeṭṭha) ■ II. (objective) 1. of dark (black), poisonous snakes: kaṇhā (f.) Ja ii.215 (= kāḷa-sappa C); ˚sappa Ja i.336; Ja iii.269, Ja iii.347; Ja v.446 Vism 664 (in simile); Mil 149; Pv-a 62; ˚sīsā with black heads AN iii.241 (kimī).
2. of (an abundance of smooth, dark (= shiny) hair (cp. in meaning E. gloom gloss = black: shiny), as Ep. of King Vasudeva Pv ii.61 syn. with Kesavā (the Hairy, cp. ̓*Απόλλων *Οὐλαϊος Samson, etc., see also siniddha-, nīla-, kāla-kesa) sukaṇha-sīsa with very dark hair Ja v.205, also as sukaṇha-kaṇha-sīsa Ja v.202 (cp. susukāḷa). ˚jaṭi an ascetic with dark & glossy hair Ja vi.507, cp. v.205 sukaṇhajaṭila. ˚añjana glossy polish Ja v.155 (expld as sukhumakaṇha-lom’ ācitattā).
3. of the black trail of fire in ˚vattanin (cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa-vartaniṃ agniṃ R. V. viii.23, 19) SN i.69 = Ja iii.140 (cp. iii.9); Ja v.63. 4. of the black (fertile) soil of Avanti “kaṇh-uttara black on the surface Vin i.195 ■ III. (Applied) 1. ˚pakkha the dark (moonless) half of the month during which the spirits of the departed suffer and the powers of darkness prevail Pv-a 135, cp. Pv iii.64, see also pakkha1 3.
2. attr. of all dark powers and anything belonging to their sphere, e.g. of Māra Snp 355 Snp 439 (= Namuci); of demons, goblins (pisācā) DN i.93 with ref. to the “black-born” ancestor of the Kaṇhāyanas (cp. Dhp i.263 kāḷa-vaṇṇa), cp. also kāḷa in ˚sunakha, the Dog of Purgatory Pv-a 152.
3. of a dark, i.e. miserable, unfortunate birth, or social condition DN iii.81 sq. (brāhmano va sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo). ˚abhijāti a special species of men according to the doctrine of Gosāla DN-a i.162; AN iii.383 sq. ˚abhijātika “of black birth,” of low social grade DN iii.251 = AN iii.384; Snp 563; cp. Thag 833 and J.P.T.S. 1893, 11; in the sense of “evil disposition” at Ja v.87 (expld as kāḷaka-sabhāva).
4. of dark, evil actions or qualities: ˚dhamma AN v.232 = Dhp 87; DN iii.82; Snp 967; Pp 30; Mil 200, Mil 337; ˚paṭipadā Ja i.105, and ˚magga the evil way AN v.244, AN v.278; ˚bhāvakara causing a low (re-)birth Ja iv.9 (+ pāpa-kammāni), and in same context as dhamma combd with ˚sukka at AN iv.33; Snp 526 (where kaṇhā˚ for kaṇha˚) Mil 37; ˚kamma “black action” MN i.39; ˚vipāka black result, 4 kinds of actions and 4 results, viz kaṇha˚, sukka˚, kaṇha-sukka˚, akaṇha-asukka˚; DN iii.230 = MN i.389 sq. = AN ii.230 sq.; Ne 232. akaṇha 1. not dark, i.e. light, in ˚netta with bright eyes, Ep of King Pingala-netta Ja ii.242 in contrast with Māra (although pingala-cakkhu is also Ep. of Māra or his representatives, cp. Ja v.42; Pv ii.41).
2. not evil i.e. good AN ii.230, AN ii.231 ■ atikaṇha very dark Vin iv.7 sukaṇha id. see above ii.2.
cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa, Lith. kérszas
(& sometimes; kaṭa ) done, worked, made. Extremely rare as v. trs. in the common meaning of E. make, Ger. machen, or Fr. faire (see the cognate kapp and jan, also uppajjati & vissajjati); its proper sphere of application is either ethical (as pāpaṃ, kusalaṃ kammaṃ: cp. ii.1 b) or in such combinations, where its original meaning of “built, prepared, worked out” is still preserved (cp. i.1 a nagara, and 2 a).
I. As verb-determinant (predicative).
1. in verbal function (Pass.) with nominal determination “done made” (a) in predicative (epithetic) position: Dhp 17 (pāpaṃ me kataṃ evil has been done by me), 68 (tañ ca kammaṃ kataṃ), 150 (aṭṭhīnaṃ nagaraṃ kataṃ a city built of bones, of the body), 173 (yassa pāpaṃ kataṃ kammaṃ)-(b) in absolute (prothetic) position, often with expression of the agent in instr. DN i.84 = DN i.177 = MN i.40 = Snp p.16 (in formula kataṃ karanīyaṃ, etc., done is what had to be done, cp. arahant ii.A.); Vin iii.72 (kataṃ mayā kalyāṇaṃ akataṃ mayā pāpaṃ); Pv i.55 (amhākaṃ katā pūjā done to us is homage) ■ So also in composition (˚-), e.g. (nahāpakehi) ˚parikammatā the preparations (being) finished (by the barbers) Ja vi.145 (tena) ˚paricaya the acquaintance made (with him Vv-a 24; Pv-a 4; (tattha) ˚paricayatā the acquaintance (with that spot) Vv-a 331; (tesaṃ) ˚pubba done before DN ii.75 = AN iv.17; (kena) Ja vi.575; ˚matta (made drunk Thag 199; (cira) ˚saṃsagga having (long) been in contact with, familiar Ja iii.63 (and a˚). 2. in adj (med-passive) function (kaṭa & kata); either passive made, or made of; done by = being like, consisting of or medio-reflexive: one who has done, having done also “with” (i.e. this or that action done) ■ (a) in pregnant meaning: prepared, cultivated, trained, skilled kaṭ-âkaṭa prepared & natural Vin i.206 (of yūsa) akaṭa natural ibid., not cultivated (of soil) Vin i.48 Vin ii.209; DN-a i.78, DN-a i.98; untrained Ja iii.57, Ja iii.58 ■ ˚atta selfpossessed disciplined Ja vi.296; ˚indiya trained in his senses Thag 725; ˚ūpāsana skilled, esp. in archery MN i.82; SN i.62; AN ii.48 = AN iv.429; SN i.99; Ja iv.211; Mil 352, ˚kamma practised, skilled Ja v.243; of a servant SN i.205 (read āse for ase), of a thief AN iii.102 (cp. below ii.1 a); ˚phaṇa having (i.e. with) its hood erected, of a snake Ja vi.166; ˚buddhi of trained mind clever Ja iii.58; a˚ ibid.; ˚mallaka of made-up teeth, an artificial back-scratcher Vin ii.316; a˚ not artificially made, the genuine article Vin ii.106; ˚yogga trained serviceable SN i.99; a˚ useless SN i.98. ˚rūpa done naturally, spontaneously Ja v.317 (expld by ˚jāniya ˚sabhāva); ˚veṇī having (i.e. with) the hair done up into a chignon Ja v.431; ˚hattha (one) who has exercised his hands, dexterous, skilful, esp. in archery MN i.82; SN i.62, SN i.98; SN ii.266; AN ii.48; Ja iv.211,; v.41; vi.448; Mil 353; Dhp-a i.358; a˚ unskilled, awkward SN i.98 su˚ well-trained Ja v.41 (cp. ˚upāsana), ˚hatthika an artificial or toy-elephant Ja vi.551 ■ (b) in ordinary meaning: made or done; ˚kamma the deed done (in a former existence) Ja i.167; Vv-a 252; Pv-a 10; ˚piṭṭha made of flour (dough) Pv-a 16 (of a doll); ˚bhāva the performance or happening of Ja iii.400; Mhbv 33 ˚saṅketa (one who has made an agreement) Ja v.436-(c) with adverbial determination (su˚, du˚; cp. dūrato puro, atta, sayaṃ, & ii.2 c): sukata well laid out, of a road Ja vi.293, well built, of a cart Snp 300 = Snp 304; Ja iv.395, well done, i.e. good AN i.102 (˚kamma-kārin doing good works). -dukkata badly made, of a robe Vin iv.279 (ṭ), badly done, i.e. evil AN i.102 (˚kamma kārin) sukata-dukkata good & evil (˚kammāni deeds) DN i.27 DN i.55 = SN iv.351; Mil 5, Mil 25. 3. as noun (nt.) kataṃ that which has been done, the deed ■ (a) absolute: Ja iii.26 (katassa appaṭikāraka not reciprocating the deed) v.434 (kataṃ anukaroti he imitates what has been done kat-ākataṃ what has been done & left undone Vin iv.211; katāni akatāni ca deeds done & not done Dhp 50 ■ (b); with adv. determination (su˚, du˚) sukataṃ goodness (in moral sense) Snp 240; Dhp 314 dukkataṃ badness Vin i.76; Vin ii.106; Dhp 314; dukkatakārin doing wrong Snp 664.
II. As noun-determinant (attributive) in composition (var. applications & meanings).
1.; As 1st pt. of compd: Impersonal, denoting the result or finishing of that which is implied in the object with ref. to the act or state resulting, i.e. “so and so made or done” or personal, denoting the person affected by or concerned with the act. The lit. translation would be “having become one who has done” (act.: see a), or “to whom has been done” (pass.: see b) ■ (a) medio-active Temporal: the action being done, i.e. “after.” The noun-determinates usually bear a relation to time, especially to meal-times, as kat-anna-kicca having finished his meal Dāvs i.59; ˚bhatta-kicca after the meal Ja iv.123; Pv-a 93; ˚purebhatta-kicca having finished the duties of the morning DN-a i.45 sq.; Snp-a 131 sq.; ˚pātarāsa breakfast Ja i.227; Dhp-a i.117, a before br. AN iv.64; ˚pātarāsa-bhatta id. Ja vi.349 ˚ānumodana after thanking (for the meal) Ja i.304 ˚bhatt’ānumodana after expressing satisfaction with the meal Pv-a 141. In the same application: kat-okāsa having made its appearance, of kamma Vv 329 (cp Vv-a 113); Pv-a 63; ˚kamma (-cora) (a thief) who has just “done the deed,” i.e. committed a theft Ja iii.34 Vism 180 (katakammā corā & akata˚ thieves who have finished their “job” & those who have not); Dhp-a ii.38 (corehi katakammaṃ the job done by the th.), cp above i.2 a; ˚kāla “done their time,” deceased, of Petas Ja iii.164 (pete kālakate); Pv-a 29, cp. kāla ˚cīvara after finishing his robe Vin i.255, Vin i.265; ˚paccuggamana having gone forth to meet Ja iii.93. ˚paṇidhāna from the moment of his making an earnest resolve (to become a Buddha) Vv-a 3; ˚pariyosita finished, ready, i.e. after the end was made Vv-a 250 ˚buddha-kicca after he had done the obligations of a Buddha Vv-a 165, Vv-a 319; DN-a i.2; ˚maraṇa after dying i.e. dead Pv-a 29; ˚massu-kamma after having his beard done Ja v.309 (see note to ii.1 b) ■ Qualitative: with ethical import, the state resulting out of action i.e. of such habit, or “like, of such character.” The qualification is either made by kamma, deed, work, or kicca, what can be or ought to be done, or any other specified action, as ˚pāpa-kamma one who has done wrong Dhp-a i.360 (& a˚); ˚karaṇīya one who has done all that could be done, one who is in the state of perfection (an Arahant), in formula arahaṃ khīṇ’āsavo vusitavā ohitabhāro (cp. above i.1 b & arahant; ii.A MN i.4, MN i.235; Iti 38; Mil 138; ˚kicca having performed his obligations, perfected, Ep. of an Arahant, usually in combn with anāsava SN i.47, SN i.178; Dhp 386; Pv ii.615 Thig 337, as adj.: kata-kiccāni hi arahato indriyāni Ne 20; ˚kiccatā the perfection of Arahantship Mil 339 ■ With other determinations: -āgasa one who has done evil Sdhp 294. -ādhikāra having exerted oneself one who strives after the right path Ja i.56; Mil 115 -āparādha guilty, a transgressor Ja iii.42. -ābhinihāra (one) who has formed the resolution (to become a Buddha) Ja i.2; Dhp-a i.135. -ābhinivesa (one) who studies intently, or one who has made a strong determination Ja i.110 (& a˚).; -ussāha energetic Sdhp 127 -kalyāṇa in passage kata-kalyāno kata-kusalo katabhīruttāṇo akata-pāpo akata-luddho (luddo) [: ˚thaddho It] akata-kibbiso having done good, of good character, etc. AN ii.174 = Vin iii.72 = Iti 25 = Dhs-a 383; Pv-a 174; also Pass. to whom something good has been done Ja i.137; Ja iii.12; Pv ii.99; akata-kalyāṇa a man of bad actions Iti 25; Pv ii.79. -kibbisa a guilty person MN i.39; Vin iii.72 (a˚), of beings tormented in Purgatory Pv iv.77; Pv-a 59. -kusala a good man: see ˚kalyāṇa -thaddha hard-hearted, unfeeling, cruel: see ˚kalyāṇa -nissama untiring, valiant, bold Ja v.243. -parappavāda practised in disputing with others DN-a i.117. -pāpa an evil-doer Iti 25; Pv ii.79 (+ akata-kalyāṇa); Pv-a 5 a˚: see ˚kalyāṇa. -puñña one who has done good deeds a good man DN ii.144; Dhp 16, Dhp 18, Dhp 220; Pv iii.52; Mil 129; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 176; a˚ one who has not done good (in previous lives) Mil 250; Vv-a 94. -puññatā the fact of having done good deeds DN iii.276 (pubbe in former births) AN ii.31; Snp 260, cp. Kp-a 132, Kp-a 230; Ja ii.114. -bahukāra having done much favour, obliging Dāvs iv.39. -bhīruttāṇa one who has offered protection to the fearful see ˚kalyāṇa. -bhūmikamma one who has laid the ground-work (of sanctification) Mil 352. -ludda cruel MN iii.165; a˚ gentle Ne 180; cp ˚kalyāṇa -vināsaka (one) who has caused ruin Ja i.467. -vissāsa trusting, confiding Ja i.389. -ssama painstaking, taking trouble Sdhp 277 (and a˚) ■ (b) medio-passive: The state as result of an action, which affected the person concerned with the action (reflexive or passive), or “possessed of, afflicted or affected with.” In this application it is simply periphrastic for the ordinary Passive ■ Note. In the case of the noun being incapable of functioning as verb (when primary), the object in question is specified by ˚kamma or ˚kicca, both of which are then only supplementary to the initial kata˚, e.g. kata-massu-kamma “having had the beard (-doing done,” as diff. fr. secondary nouns (i.e. verb-derivations) e.g. kat-âbhiseka “having had the anointing done ■ In this application: ˚citta-kamma decorated, variegated Dhp-a i.192; ˚daṇḍa-kamma afflicted with punishment (= daṇḍāyita punished) Vin i.76; ˚massu-kamma with trimmed beard, after the beard-trimming Ja v.309 (cp. Ja iii.11 & karana) ■ Various combinations:; katañjalin with raised hands, as a token of veneration or supplication Snp 1023; Thig 482; Ja i.17 = Bv 24, Bv 27; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 141; Vv-a 78. -attha one who has received benefits Ja i.378. -ānuggaha assisted, aided Ja ii.449; Vv-a 102. -ābhiseka anointed, consecrated Mvu 26, Mvu 6 -ūpakāra assisted, befriended Ja i.378; Pv-a 116. -okāsa one who has been given permission, received into audience, or permitted to speak Vin i.7; DN ii.39, DN ii.277; Snp 1030, Snp 1031 (˚âva˚); Ja v.140; Ja vi.341; Mil 95. -jātihiṅgulika done up, adorned with pure vermilion Ja iii.303 -nāmadheyya having received a name, called Ja v.492 -paṭisanthāra having been received kindly Ja vi.160; Dhp-a i.80. -pariggaha being taken to wife, married to (instr.) Pv-a 161 (& a˚).; -paritta one on whom a protective spell has been worked, charm-protected Mil 152 -bhaddaka one to whom good has been done Pv-a 116 -sakkāra honoured, revered Ja v.353; Mvu 9, Mvu 8 (su˚) -saṅgaha one who has taken part in the redaction of the Scriptures Mvu 5, Mvu 106. -sannāha clad in armour Dhp-a i.358. -sikkha (having been) trained Mil 353
2. As 2nd pt. of compd: Denoting the performance of the verbal notion with ref. to the object affected by it i.e. simply a Passive of the verb implied in the determinant with emphasis of the verb-notion: “made so & so, used as, reduced to” (garukata = garavita). (a) with nouns (see s. v.) e.g. , anabhāva-kata, kavi˚ kāla-vaṇṇa˚ (reduced to a black colour) Vin i.48 Vin ii.209, tāl’āvatthu˚, pamāṇa˚, bahuli˚, yāni˚, sankhār’ûpekkhā˚ etc ■ (b) with adjectives, e.g. garu˚, bahu˚-(c) with adverbial substitutes, e.g. atta˚, para (paraṃ˚), sacchi˚, sayaṃ, etc.
pp. of karoti
(nt.) a scrubber, used after a bath Vin ii.129, Vin ii.143; cp. Vin. Texts ii.318.
fr. kantati2
(adj.) lit. knowing, i.e. acknowledging what has been done (to one), i.e. grateful often in combn with katavedin grateful and mindful of benefits SN ii.272; AN i.87 = Pp 26; Vv 8127 Sdhp 509, Sdhp 524. akataññu 1. ungrateful SN i.225; Ja iii.26 (= kata-guṇaṃ ajānanto C.), 474; iv.124; Pv-a 116; Bdhd 81.
2. (separate akata-ññu) knowing the Uncreated, i.e. knowing Nibbāna Dhp 97, Dhp 383; Dhp-a ii.188; Dhp-a iv.139 ■ akataññu-rūpa (& ˚sambhava of ungrateful nature Ja iv.98, Ja iv.99.
cp. Sk. kṛtajña
(f.) gratefulness (defined at Kp-a 144 as katassa jānanatā) Snp 265; Ja i.122 (T. ˚nā v.l. ˚tā); iii.25; Pv ii.97; Vv-a 63; Sdhp 497, Sdhp 540. In combn with kataveditā SN ii.272; AN i.61; AN ii.226, AN ii.229 kataññū-kataveditā Ja iii.492. -akataññutā ungratefulness in combn with akataveditā AN i.61; AN iii.273; Ja v.419; as one of the 4 offences deserving of Niraya AN ii.226.
abstr. fr. last
(nt.) the doing of, performance of, only in abl. katattā DN ii.213; AN i.56; Ja iii.128; Dhs 431, Dhs 654; Snp-a 356; Dhp-a iii.154 Dhp-a iv.142. Used adverbially in meaning of “owing to, on account of” Mil 275; Dhs-a 262; Mvu 3, Mvu 40. -akatattā through non-performance of, in absence or in default of AN i.56; Pv-a 69, Pv-a 154.
abstr. fr. kata, cp. Sk. kṛtatvaṃ
(nt.) a bad deed, injuring, doing evil (cp. kaṭana) Ja iv.42 (yam me akkhāsi… katanaṃ kataṃ), cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1893, 15.
fr. kata
(adj.) which, which one (of two or more) Vin ii.89; MN i.7; Ja i.172; Mil 309; Pv-a 27. In some cases merely emphatic for ko, e.g. Vin i.30 (katamena maggena āgato?); DN i.197 (katamo so atta-paṭilābho?); Ja i.97; Snp 995; Mil 51 ■ instr katamena (scil. maggena) adv. by which way, how Mil 57, Mil 58.
cp. Vedic katama, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., in function = katara, cp antama → antara, Lat. dextimus → dexter
(adj.) which one (of a certain number, usually of two) Ja i.4; Pv-a 119 Often only emphatic for ko, e.g. Ja i.298 (kataraṃ upaddavaṃ na kareyya), and used uninflected in cpds. as katara-geha Ja iii.9; ˚gandhaṃ Ja vi.336; ˚divasaṃ Ja ii.251; ˚nagarato (from what city) Dhp-a i.390; ˚nāma (kataraṃnāma, adj.) (of what name) ibid ■ katarasmiṃ magge in which way, how? Ja iv.110.
Vedic katara, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., cp. Gr. πότερος, Lat. uter
(adj.) mindful, grateful SN i.225; Pp 26; Ja i.424; Ja ii.26.
kata + vedin, see kataññu
(f.) gratefulness: see kataññutā.
abstr. fr. last
(adj.-n.) one who has done (what could be done), used like katakicca to denote one who has attained Arahantship SN i.14; Mil 264.
secondary formation fr. kata
(indecl.) how many? Vin i.83 (k. sikkhāpadāni), 155; SN i.3 (˚sangâtiga having overcome how many attachments ), 70; Snp 83, Snp 960, Snp 1018; Pts ii.72; Mil 78; Dhp-a i.7, Dhp-a i.188; Pv-a 74.
interr. pron.; used like Lat. quot. Already Vedic.
(f.) 1. agreement, contract, pact Vin i.153 (T. kātikā ), 309; Ja vi.71; Mil 171, Mil 360–2. talking, conversation, talk (adhammikā k., cp kathikā & kathā) Ja ii.449 ■ katikaṃ karoti to make an arrangement or agreement Vin iii.104, Vin iii.220, Vin iii.230 Ja i.81; Ja iv.267; Dhp-a i.91; Vv-a 46. In cpds. katika˚; e.g. ˚vatta observance of an agreement, ˚ṃ karoti to be faithful to a pact Dhp i.8; ˚ṃ bhindati to break an agreement Ja vi.541; ˚saṇṭhāna the entering of an agreement Vin ii.76, Vin ii.208: iii.160.
to katheti or karoti?
(adj.) some, several; a few (in cpds. or in pl.) Ja i.230, Ja i.487; Ja iii.280, Ja iii.419; Ja iv.125 Ja v.162; Pv ii.920 (= appake only a few); Dhp-a i.94 (very few); Pv-a 46. In sg. little, insignificant Vv 5320 (= appikā f.). ˚vāre a few times, a few turns Ja v.132 Ja vi.52; Pv-a 135; Mhbv 3.
cp. Sk. katipaya
(adv.) (for) a few days Vin iii.14; Ja i.152, Ja i.298, Ja i.466; Ja ii.38 Ja iii.48; Ja iv.147; Mvu 7, Mvu 38; Pv-a 145, Pv-a 161; Vv-a 222 katipāhena (instr.) within a few days Mvu 17, Mvu 41; Dhp-a i.344; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 161. katipāh’accayena after (the lapse of) a few days Ja i.245; Dhp-a i.175; Pv-a 47.
katipaya + ahan, contracted, see aha2
, f. katimī in k. pakkhassa which (of many other) day of the half-month Vin i.117.
num. ord. fr. kati
(adj.) 1. (having) how many years, how old? Ja v.331.
2. (having had) how many rainy seasons (in the bhikkhu’s career) of how many years’ seniority? Vin i.86; Ud 59; Mil 28; Dhp-a i.37.
kati + vassa
(adj.) of how many kinds Vism 84.
kati + vidha, for Vedic katidhā
(adv.) for the sake of, on behalf of; with acc. maṃ k. Ja iv.14; with gen. maṃsassa k. Ja v.500.
loc. of kata
is represented in Pali by kanta2; katta being found only in cpd. pari˚.
pp. of kantati2; cp. Sk. kṛtta
(adj.) 1. to be done, to be made or performed; that which might or could be done Dhp 53; Ja i.77, Ja i.267; Ja v.362.
2. (nt.) that which is to be done, obligation, duty Thag 330; Ja ii.154; Ja v.402; Dhp-a i.211 ■ akattabba (adj.) not to be done Ja iii.131 Ja v.147; (nt.) that which ought not to be done Ja v.402 kattabb’ ākattabba to be done and not to be done Ja i.387. kattabba-yuttaka 1. (adj.) fit or proper to be done Dhp-a i.13.
2. (nt.) duty, obligation Ja iii.9 Ja vi.164; Dhp-a i.180; (the last) duties towards the deceased Ja i.431 ■ Cp. kātabba.
grd. of karoti
(nt.) task, duty Thag 330.
fr. last
(f.) fitness, duty, that which is to be done Ja ii.179 (iti-˚āya because I had to do it thus).
fr. kattabba
one who makes or creates, a maker, doer; in foll. construction. I. Dependent Either in verb-function with acc., as n. agent to all phrases with karoti e.g. pañhaṃ karoti to put a question, pañhaṃ kattā one who puts a question or in n. function with gen., e.g. mantānaṃ kattāro the authors of the Mantas, or in cpd. rāja-kattāro makers of kings ■ II. Dependent. as n. kattā the doer kattā hoti no bhāsitā he is a man of action, and not of words.
1. (indef.) one who does anything (with acc. AN i.103; AN ii.67; AN v.347, AN v.350 sq.; (with gen.) Ja i.378 Ja iii.136 (one who does evil, in same meaning at iii.26 C. akataññū, cp. J.P.T.S. 1893, 15: not to kṛt! ) iv.98 (expld as kata by C); v.258; Mil 25, Mil 296; Bdhd 85 sq.
2. an author, maker, creator DN i.18 (of Brahmā: issaro, k., nimmātā), 104 (mantānaṃ); AN ii.102; Dhp i.111.
3. an officer of a king, the king’s messenger Ja v.220 (= 225); vi.259, 268, 302, 313, 492 Note. At Ja v.225 & vi.302 the voc. is katte (of a-decl.) cp. also nom. ˚katta for ˚kattā in salla-katta.
4. as t.t.g. Name of the instr. case Vv-a 97; Kacc 136, 143, 277.
n. ag. fr. karoti, cp. Sk. kartṛ
(adj.) (only˚-) ˚daṇḍa a walking-stick or staff (of an ascetic) Vin i.188 Vin ii.76 = Vin ii.208 sq.; Vin iii.160; Ja i.9; Ja v.132; Ja vi.52, Ja vi.56, Ja vi.520 Vism 91, Vism 125, Vism 181. ˚yaṭṭhi = prec. Ja ii.441; DN-a i.207 DN-a iii.140. ˚ratha an old (?) chariot Ja iii.299. ˚suppa a winnowing basket Vin i.269 = Dhp-a i.174 (˚e pakkhipitvā sankāra-kūṭe chaḍḍehi). Kattari & i
cp. Sk. kṛtvan (?), in diff. meaning
(f.) scissors, shears Ja iii.298, with ref. to the “shears” of a crab, “as with scissors”: cp Vin. Texts iii.138 (see next).
to kantati2
(f.) scissors, or a knife Vin ii.134; Ja i.223.
fr. last
(f.) (& ˚kattika ) Name of a month (Oct ■ Nov.), during which the full moon is near the constellation of Pleiades It is the last month of the rainy season, terminating on the full moon day of Kattikā (kattika-puṇṇamā). This season is divided into 5 months: Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa Bhaddara (Poṭṭhapāda), Assayuja, Kattikā; the month Assayuja is also called pubba-kattikā, whereas the fifth K., is also known as pacchima-kattikā; both are comprised in the term k ■ dvemāsika. Bhikkhus retiring for the first 3 months of the Vassa (rainy season) are kattika-temāsikā, if they include the 4th, they are k ■ cātumāsikā. The full moon of Assayuja is termed k ■ temāsinī; that of Kattika is k ■ cātumāsinī. See Vinaya passages & cp. nakkhatta ■ Ne 143 (kattiko v.l. kattikā).;
-cātumāsinī see above Vin iii.263. -coraka a thief who in the month of K., after the distribution of robes attacks bhikkhus Vin iii.262. -chaṇa a festival held at the end of Lent on the full moon of pubba-kattikā and coinciding with the Pavāraṇā Ja i.433; Ja ii.372 Ja v.212 sq.; Mvu 17, Mvu 17. -temāsi (-puṇṇamā) (the full moon) of pubbakattikā Vin iii.261; Mvu 17, Mvu 1 (˚puṇṇamāsī). -māsa the month K. Ja ii.372; Mvu 12, Mvu 2 (kattike māse). -sukkapakkha the bright fortnight of K. Mvu 17, Mvu 64.
cp. Sk. kṛttikā f. pl. the Pleiades & BSk. karthika
1. base of inf. kattuṃ (of karoti), in compds ˚kamyatā willingness to do something Vb 208; Vism 320, Vism 385; Dhp-a iii.289; ˚kāma desirous to do Vin ii.226 ˚kāmatā desire to do or to perform Vism 466; Vv-a 43–2. base of kattar in compn.
(adv.) where? where to whither? Vin i.83, Vin i.107; Vin ii.76; DN i.223; Snp 487, Snp 1036; Ja iii.76; Pv ii.916; Dhp-a i.3 ■ k. nu kho where then where I wonder? DN i.215 sq., Pv-a 22 (with Pot. -katthaci(d) (indef.) anywhere, at some place or other Ja i.137; Ja v.468; wherever, in whatever place Mil 366; Pv-a 284; Kp-a 247; Ja iii.229; Ja iv.9, Ja iv.45; as katthacid eva J. iv. 92; Pv-a 173. Sometimes doubled katthaci katthaci in whatsoever place Ja iv.341 ■ na k. nowhere MN i.424; Mil 77; Vv-a 14.
-ṭhita fig. in what condition or state? DN ii.241 (corresp. with ettha); Ja iv.110. -vāsa in what residence Snp 412. -vāsika residing where? Ja ii.128, Ja ii.273.
der. fr. interr. base ka˚; (kad2), whereas Sk. kutra is der. fr. base ku˚; cp. kuttha
to boast Snp 783 (ppr. med. akatthamāna). Cp. pavikatthita.
cp. Sk. katthate, etym. unexpld
(n. ag. fr. katthati] a boaster Snp 930.
(adj.) boasting AN v.157 (+ vikatthin).
fr. katth
(?) a jackal, in ˚soṇā j. & dogs Ja vi.538 (for koṭṭhu˚).
(adv.) dubit. interr. part. 1. how; with ind. pres. Pv-a 6 (k. puriso paṭilabhati), or with fut. & cond. Ja i.222; Ja ii.159 (k. tattha gamissāmi); vi.500; Pv-a 54 (na dassāmi)
2. why for what reason? Ja iii.81; Ja v.506. Combined with -ca Vin i.114; Vin ii.83. -carahi DN ii.192. -nu &-nu kho; Vin ii.26, Ja iii.99; iv. 339; Nd ii.189, see also evaṃ nu kho. -pana DN ii.163. -su Nd ii.189. -hi Ja iv.339; Dhp-a i.432. -hi nāma Vin i.45; Vin ii.105; Vin iii.137; Vin iv.300 all in the same meaning; -ci (kathañci) scarcely, with difficulty Thag 456.
-kathā “saying how? how?” i.e. doubt, uncertainty unsettled mind (cp. kaṅkhā); expl. as vicikicchā dukkhe kankhā Nd ii.190; DN ii.282; Snp 500, Snp 866, Snp 1063 Snp 1088; Dhp-a iv.194; as adj. and at end of cpd. ˚-katha e.g. vigata˚ (in phrase tiṇṇa-vicikiccha… vesārajjappatta) DN i.110 = Vin i.12; tiṇṇa˚ (+ visalla) Snp 17 Snp 86, Snp 367. k-k-salla “the arrow of doubt” DN ii.283 (vicikicchā + ). -kathin having doubts, unsettled uncertain DN ii.287; MN i.8; Nd ii.191; Dhs-a 352; a˚; free from doubt, Ep. of Arahant (expld DN-a i.211: “not saying how and how is this?”); MN i.108; Iti 49; Snp 534 Snp 635, Snp 868, Snp 1064; in phrases tiṇṇa-vicikiccho viharati akathankathī kusalesu dhammesu DN i.71 = Pp 59 jhāyī anejo a˚ Dhp 414 (: Dhp-a iv.194) = Snp 638. -kara (adj.) how acting, what doing? k. ahaṃ no nirayam pateyyaṃ (“τί ποι ̈ων μακάριος ε ̓́σομαι”) Ja iv.339; Snp 376; Ja iv.75; Ja v.148. -jīvin leading what kind of life? Snp 181. -dassin holding what views? Snp 848 (see ˚sīla). -pakāra of what kind Vin i.358; Snp 241 (:kathappakāra). -paṭipanna going what way, i.e. how acting? DN ii.277, DN ii.279, DN ii.281. -bhāvita how cultivated or practised? SN v.119. -bhūta “how being,” of what sort, what like DN ii.139, DN ii.158; -rūpa of what kind MN i.218; AN i.249; AN iii.35; Ja iii.525. -vaṇṇa of what appearance, what like? DN ii.244. -vidha what sort of Ja v.95, Ja v.146; Dhs-a 305. -sameta how constituted Snp 873. -sīla of what character or conduct? how in his morality? Snp 848 (kathaṃdassī kathaṃsīlo upasanto ti vuccati).
cp. Vedic kathaṃ & kathā
(nt.) 1. conversing, talking Ja i.299; Ja iii.459; Ja vi.340.
2. telling i.e. answering solving (a question) Ja v.66 (pañha˚).
3. preaching Dhp-a i.7.
4. reciting, narrating Kacc. 130. Cp. kathita- akathana not talking or telling Ja i.420; Ja vi.424; not speaking fr. anger Ja iv.108; Dhp-a i.440.
-ākāra, in ˚ṃ karoti to enter into conversation with Ja vi.413. -samattha able to speak (of the tongue Ja iii.459; able to talk or converse with (saddhiṃ Ja vi.340. -sīla (one) in the habit of talking, garrulous Ja i.299; a˚ Ja i.420.
fr. kath, see katheti
(potsherd) spelling at Vism 261 for kaṭhala.
(metri causâ) = next, in the Uddāna at Vin ii.234
(nt.), always in combn pād’odaka pāda-pīṭha pāda-k˚: either a cloth to wipe the feet with after washing them, or a footstool Vin i.9, Vin i.47 Vin ii.22 sq., 210, 216. At Vv-a 8 however with pāda-pīṭha expld as a footstool (pāda-ṭhāpana-yoggaṃ dārukhaṇḍaṃ āsanaṃ). Bdhgh (on CV ii.1.1) expld pādapīṭha as a stool to put the washed foot on, pāda- kathalika as a stool to put the unwashed foot on, or a cloth to rub the feet with (ghaṃsana).
the meaning “bowl” seems to be preferable to Bdhgh’s forced interpretation as “towel.”
der. uncertain
(f.) 1. talk talking, conversation AN i.130; Pv-a 39. So in antarā˚ DN i.179; Snp p.107, Snp p.115; cp. sallāpa. Also in tiracchāna˚; low, common speech, comprising 28 kinds of conversational talk a bhikkhu should not indulge in enumd in full at DN i.7 = DN i.178 = DN iii.36 & passim (e.g. S; v.419: corr. suddha˚ to yuddha˚!; AN v.128 = Nd ii.192) ref. to at AN iii.256; AN v.185; Ja i.58; Pp 35. Similarly in gāma˚; Snp 922; viggāhikā k. AN iv.87; Snp 930. Ten good themes of conversation (kathā-vatthūni) are enumd at MN iii.113 = AN iii.117 = AN iv.357 = AN v.67; Mil 344 similarly dhammī kathā AN ii.51; AN iv.307; AN v.192; Snp 325 pavattanī k. AN i.151; yutta kathāyaṃ Snp 826; sammodanīyā k. in salutation formula s˚ṃ k˚ṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā DN i.52, DN i.108, etc.; AN v.185; Snp 419, pp. 86, 93 107, 116.
2. speech, sermon, discourse, lecture Vin i.203, Vin i.290 (˚ṃ karoti to discuss); AN iii.174; iv. 358 Freq. in anupubbi˚; a sermon in regular succession graduated sermon, discussing the 4 points of the ladder of “holiness,” viz. dānakathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚ (see anupubba) Vin i.15; AN iii.184; AN iv.186, AN iv.209, AN iv.213; Dhp-a i.6; Vv-a 66.
3. a (longer) story, often with vitthāra˚; an account in detail, e.g. Pv-a 19. bāhira˚ profane story Kp-a 48.
4. word, words, advice: ˚ṃ gaṇhāti to accept an advice Ja ii.173; Ja iii.424.
5 explanation, exposition, in aṭṭha˚; (q.v.), cp. gati Pts ii.72.
6. discussion, in ˚vatthu (see below) Mvu 5 Mvu 138. -dukkathā harmful conversation or idle talk AN iii.181; opp. su˚; AN iii.182. -kathaṃ vaḍḍheti “to increase the talk,” to dispute sharply Ja i.404; Ja v.412 ˚ṃ samuṭṭhāpeti to start a conversation Ja i.119; iv. 73-At the end of cpds. (as adj.) ˚kathā e.g. chinna Snp 711; ṭhita˚ DN-a i.73; madhura˚ Ja iii.342; Ja vi.255.
-ābhiññāṇa recollection due to speech Mil 78, Mil 79 -ojja (k˚-udya, to vad ) a dispute, quarrel Snp 825, Snp 828 -dhamma a topic of conversation DN-a i.43. -nigghosa the sound of praise, flattery Ja ii.350. -pavatti the course of a conversation Ja i.119; Dhp-a i.249; Mhbv 61 -pābhata subject of a conversation, story Ja i.252, Ja i.364 -bāhulla abundance of talk, loquacity AN iv.87. -magga narrative, account, history Ja i.2. -rasa the sweetness of (this) speech Mil 345. -vatthu 1. subject of a discourse or discussion, argument MN i.372; MN ii.127, MN ii.132 There are 10 enumd at AN iv.352, AN iv.357 (see kathā) and at Vism 19 as qualities of a kalyāṇa-mitta, referred to at AN v.67, AN v.129; Vism 127; Dhp-a iv.30. Three are given at DN iii.220 = AN i.197. ˚kusala well up in the subjects of discussion Vv-a 354.
2. Name of the fifth book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, the seven constituents of which are enumd at var. places (e.g. DN-a i.17; Mhbv 94, where Kvu takes the 3rd place), see also J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888 1896. -samuṭṭhāna the arising of a discussion Mvu 5 Mvu 138. -samuṭṭhāpana starting a conversation Ja i.119 Ja iii.278; Dhp-a i.250. -sampayoga conversational intercourse AN i.197. -sallāpa talk, conversation Vin i.77; DN i.89 sq., 107 sq.; ii.150; MN i.178; AN ii.197; AN v.188; Ud 40; Ja ii.283; Mil 31; DN-a i.276 (expld as kathanapaṭikathana); Dhp-a ii.91 (˚ṃ karoti) Vv-a 153.
fr. kath to tell or talk, see katheti; nearest synonym is lap, cp. vāc’ âbhilāpa & sallāpa
Caus. ii. of katheti (q.v.).
(f.) kettle, cooking pot; in daṇḍa˚ (a pot with a handle) Vin i.286 (v.l. kathālaka), and meda˚ AN iv.377; Dhp-a ii.179.
fr. kuth, to boil
(adj.) (-˚) relating, speaking, conversing about, expounding, in cpds. citta˚ Thig 449 (cp. citra-kathin); (a) tiracchāna˚; AN iv.153 dhamma˚; Ja i.148; Ja iii.342; Ja iv.2 (˚thera); vi.255 (mahā˚) as noun a preacher, speaker, expounder AN iii.174 Mvu 14, Mvu 64 (mahā˚).
fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathaka
(f.) agreement Dpvs 19, 22; see katikā.
fr. last?
said, spoken, related Ja ii.310; Ja iv.73; Ja v.493. su˚; well said or told J. iv.73. As nt. with instr. Ja iv.72 (tena kathitaṃ the discourse (given) by him).
pp. of katheti, cp. Sk. kathita
(adj.) (-˚) speaking; one who speaks, a speaker, preacher Ja i.148 (dhamma-kathikesu citrakathī); Mil 90, Mil 348 (˚seṭṭha best of speakers). See also kathaṃ-kathin.
cp. kathika
(v. den. fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathayate] aor. kathesi, inf. kathetuṃ & kathetave (Vin i.359); Pass. kathīyati & katheti (Mil 22, cp. Trenckner,; Notes 122); ppr Pass. kathīyamāna & kacchamāna (A.; iii.181); grd kathetabba, kathanīya & kaccha,
1. to speak, say tell, relate (in detail: vitthārato Pv-a 77). mā kathesi (= mā bhaṇi) do not speak Pv-a 16 ■ to tell (a story) J.; i.2; iv.137; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13.
2. to converse with J. vi.413; Pv-a 86 (= āmantayi).
3. to report, to inform Ja v.460.
4. to recite Dhp-a i.166.
5. to expound, explain, preach Ja i.30; Mil 131; Dhp-a i.88 Nd ii.s. v.
6. to speak about (with acc.) Vin ii.168
7. to refer to Ja i.307.
8. to answer or solve (a question) Ja i.165; Ja v.66 ■ Caus ii. kathāpeti to make say Mvu 24, Mvu 4 (aor. kathāpayi); Dhp-a ii.35; Kp-a 118.
[old form of interr. pron. nt., equal to kiṃ; cp. (Vedic) kad in kadarthaṃ = kiṃarthaṃ to what purpose orig. “what?” used adverbially; then indef. “any kind of,” as (na) kac(-cana) “not at all”; kac-cid “any kind of; is it anything? what then?” Mostly used in disparaging sense of showing inferiority, contempt, or defectiveness, and equal to kā˚; (in denoting badness or smallness, e.g. kākaṇika, kāpurisa, see also kantāra kappaṭa),; kiṃ˚, ku.˚; For relation of ku → ka cp. kutra → kattha & kadā.;
-anna bad food Kacc 178. -asana id. Kacc 178 -dukkha (?) great evil (= death) Vv-a 316 (expld as maraṇa, cp. kaṭuka).
(cp. Sk. kadamba] the kadamba tree, Nauclea cordifolia (with orange-coloured, fragrant blossoms J. vi.535, 539; Vism 206; Dhp-a i.309 (˚puppha) Mvu 25, Mvu 48 (id.).
(adj.) miserable Ja ii.136 (expld as lūkha, kasira).
(adj.) mean, miserly, stingy, selfish; usually expld by thaddhamaccharī (Pv-a 102; Dhp-a iii.189, Dhp-a iii.313), and mentioned with maccharī, freq. also with paribhāsaka SN i.34, SN i.96; AN ii.59; AN iv.79 sq.; Dhp 177, Dhp 223; Ja v.273; Snp 663; Vv 295. As cause of Peta birth freq. in Pv., e.g. i.93; ii.77; iv.148; Pv-a 25, Pv-a 99, Pv-a 236 ■ (nt.) avarice stinginess, selfishness, grouped under macchariya Dhs 1122; Snp 362 (with kodha).
cp. Sk. kadarya, kad + arya?
(f.) stinginess, niggardliness DN ii.243; Mil 180; Pv-a 45.
abstr. fr. last
(nt.) the plantain tree Kacc 335.
(f.)
1. the plantain, Musa sapientium. Owing to the softness and unsubstantiality of its trunk it is used as a frequent symbol of unsubstantiality transitoriness and worthlessness. As the plantain or banana plant always dies down after producing fruit, is destroyed as it were by its own fruit, it is used as a simile for a bad man destroyed by the fruit of his own deeds: SN i.154 = Vin ii.188 = SN ii.241 = AN ii.73 = Dhp-a iii.156; cp. Mil 166 ■ as an image of unsubstantiality Cp iii.24. The tree is used as ornament on great festivals: Ja i.11; Ja vi.590 (in simile), 592; Vv-a 31
2. a flag, banner, i.e. plantain leaves having the appearance of banners (-dhaja) Ja v.195; Ja vi.412. In cpds. kadali˚.
-khandha the trunk of the plantain tree, often in similes as symbol of worthlessness, e.g. MN i.233; SN iii.141 = SN iv.167; Vism 479; Nd ii.680 Aii.; Ja vi.442 as symbol of smoothness and beauty of limbs Vv-a 280 -taru the plantain tree Dāvs v.49; -toraṇa a triumphal arch made of pl. stems and leaves Mhbv 169; -patta a pl. leaf used as an improvised plate to eat from Ja v.4; Dhp-a i.59; -phala the fruit of the plantain Ja v.37.
Sk. kadalī
(f.) a kind of deer, an antelope only in ˚miga Ja v.406, Ja v.416; Ja vi.539; DN-a i.87; and ˚pavara-pacc. attharaṇa (nt.) the hide of the k. deer, used as a rug or cover DN i.7 = AN i.181 = Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169; sim DN ii.187; (adj.) (of pallanka) AN i.137 = AN iii.50 = AN iv.394.
(indecl.). interr. adv. when? (very often foll. by fut.) Thag 1091–1106; Ja ii.212; vi. 46; Dhp-a i.33; Pv-a 2 ■ Combd with-ssu Ja v.103, Ja v.215; Ja vi.49 sq -ci [cid] indef.
1. at some time AN iv.101.
2. sometimes Ja i.98; Pv-a 271.
3. once upon a time Dāvs i.30.
4. perhaps, may be Ja i.297; Ja vi.364. + eva kadācideva Vv-a 213; -kadāci kadāci from time to time, every now and then Ja i.216; iv. 120; Dhs-a 238; Pv-a 253. -kadāci karahaci at some time or other, at times AN i.179; Mil 73; Dhp-a iii.362. -na kadāci at no time, never SN i.66; Ja v.434; Ja vi.363; same with mā k Ja vi.310; Mvu 25, Mvu 113; cp. kudācana ■ kadāc -uppattika (adj.) happening only sometimes, occasional Mil 114.
Vedic kadā. Cp. tadā, sadā in Pali, and perhaps Latin quando
mud, mire, filth Nd ii.374 (= panka); Ja i.100; Ja iii.220 (written kadamo in verse and kaddemo in gloss); vi.240, 390; Pv-a 189 (= panka), 215; compared with moral impurities Ja iii.290 & Mil 35.; a˚; free from mud or dirt clean Vin ii.201, of a lake Ja iii.289; fig. pure of character Ja iii.290. kaddamīkata made muddy or dirty, defiled Ja vi.59 (kilesehi).
-odaka muddy water Vin ii.262; Vism 127. -parikhā a moat filled with mud, as a defence Ja vi.390; -bahula (adj.) muddy, full of mud Dhp-a i.333;
Derivation unknown. Sk. kardama
(nt.) gold, usually as uttatta˚; molten gold; said of the colour of the skin Bv i.59; Pv iii.32; Ja v.416; Pv-a 10 suvaṇṇa).
-agga gold-crested Ja v.156; -chavin of golden complexion Ja vi.13; -taca (adj.) id. Ja v.393; -pabhā golden splendour Bv xxiii.23; -vimāna a fairy palace of gold Vv-a 6; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 53; -sikharī a golden peak, in ˚rājā king of the golden peaks (i.e. Himālayas): Dāvs iv.30.
cp. Sk. kanaka; Gr. κν ̈ηκος yellow; Ags. hunig = E. honey. See also kañcana
(adj.) younger, youngest, younger born Vin iii.146 (isi the younger); Ja ii.6; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 54; esp. the younger brother (opp. jeṭṭha, ˚ka) Ja i.132; Dhp-a i.6, Dhp-a i.13; Mvu 9, Mvu 7; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 55. Combd with jeṭṭhaka the elder younger brothers Ja i.253; sabba-k. the very youngest Ja i.395. f. kaniṭṭhā the youngest daughter Dhp-a i.396-fig. later, lesser, inferior, in ˚phala the lesser fruit (of sanctification) Pv iv.188 ■ akaniṭṭha “not the smaller” i.e. the greatest, highest; in akaniṭṭhagāmin going to the highest gods (cp. parinibbāyin) SN v.237 SN v.285, etc. ˚bhavana the abode of the highest gods J. iii.487.
Sk. kaniṣṭha; compar. & superl.; see kaññā
(adj.) younger (opp. jeṭṭha) AN iv.93 = Ja ii.348; Dhp-a i.152; the younger brother Mvu 5, Mvu 33, Mvu 8, Mvu 10 Mvu 35, Mvu 49; Mvu 36, Mvu 116; -˚ikā and ˚akā a younger sister, Mvu 1, Mvu 49; Pv i.115 (better read for kaniṭṭhā).
(nt.) the more recent and therefore lower, less developed state (of sanctification) Dhp-a i.152.
(f.) a younger sister Mvu 7, Mvu 67.
(adj.) younger, less, inferior Kacc 122 (only as a grammarian’s construction not in the living language where it had coalesced with *kanyā = kaññā).
compar. of kan˚, Sk. kanīyaṃs
1. (adj.) in special sense an attribute of worldly pleasure (cp. kāma kāmaguṇā): pleasant, lovely, enjoyable; freq. in form iṭṭhā kantā manāpā, referring to the pleasures of the senses SN i.245; SN ii.192; SN iv.60, SN iv.158, SN iv.235 sq.; SN v.22, SN v.60, SN v.147; AN ii.66 sq.; MN i.85; Snp 759; Iti 15; Vb 2, Vb 100, Vb 337 bāla˚ (lovely in the opinion of the ignorant) Snp 399. DN ii.265; DN iii.227 (ariya˚); Ja iii.264; Ja v.447; with ref. to the fruit of action as giving pleasure: ˚phala Kv 35, 211; Pv-a 277 (hatthi-) k˚ pleasing to elephants; of manta Dhp-a i.163; of vīṇā Ja vi.255, Ja vi.262; Dhp-a i.163.
2. beloved by, favourite of, charming Ja vi.255, Ja vi.262; Dhp-a i.163.
3. (n.) the beloved one, the husband Ja vi.370 (wrongly written kan tena); of a precious stone Mil 118; Sdhp 608, cp. suriya˚, canda˚- kantā (f.) the beloved one, the wife Ja v.295; kantena (instr.) agreeably with kind words AN ii.213; Ja v.486 (where porisādassa kante should be read as porisādassak’ ante)-a˚ undesired, disagreeable, unpleasant, in same form as kanta, e.g. DN ii.192; in other combn Ja v.295 Vb 100; Ne 180; Pv-a 193 ■ akantena with unpleasant words AN ii.213 ■ kantatara compar. Ja iii.260.
-bhāva the state of being pleasant DN-a i.76; Vv-a 323.
Sk. kānta, pp. of kāmeti
cut cut out or off Thig 223 (˚salla = samucchinna-rāg’-ādisalla Thag-a 179) cp. katta & pari˚.;
pp. of kantati2, Sk. kṛtta. kanta is analogyform. after pres. kantati, regularly we should expect katta. See also avakanta. It may be simply misreading for katta, cp. Kern, Toev. under parikanta.
to plait, twist, spin, esp. suttaṃ (thread) Vin iv.300; Pv-a 75; Dhp-a iii.273; kappāsaṃ AN iii.295. Cp pari˚.
Sk. kṛṇatti, *qert, cp. kata, & Lat. cratis, crassus, E. crate
to cut, cut off Ja ii.53 (: as nik˚ in gloss, where it should be mūlāni kant˚); iii.185; vi.154; Dhp-a iii.152 (+ viddhaṃseti).
Sk. kṛṇtati; *(s)qert, to cut; cp. Gr. κείρω, to shear; Lat. caro, cena; Ohg. sceran, E. shear; see also kaṭu
(adj. n.) difficult to pass, scil. magga, a difficult road, waste land, wilderness, expld as nirudaka īriṇa Vv-a 334 (on Vv 843), combd with maru˚ Pv-a 99 and marukantāramagga Pv-a 112; opp. khemantabhūmi Usually 5 kinds of wilds are enumerated cora˚, vāla˚, nirudaka˚, amanussa˚, appabbhakkha Ja i.99; SA 324; 4 kinds at Nd ii.630: cora˚, vāla˚, dubhikkha˚ nirudaka˚. The term is used both lit. & fig (of the wilds of ignorance, false doctrine, or of difficulties hardship). As the seat of demons (Petas and Yakkhas freq. in Pv (see above), also Ja i.395. As diṭṭhi˚; in pass diṭṭhi-gata, etc. MN i.8, MN i.486, Pp 22 (on diṭṭhi vipatti).
-addhāna a road in the wilderness, a dangerous path (fig.)Thag 95~D i.73 = MN i.276; -paṭipanna a wanderer through the wilderness, i.e. a forester Ja iii.537. -magga a difficult road (cp. kummagga) Ja ii.294 (lit.); in simile SN ii.118. -mukha the entrance to a desert Ja i.99.
perhaps from kad-tarati, difficult to cross, Sk. (?) kāntāra
(adj.) (one) living in or belonging to the desert, the guardian of a wilderness, applied to a Yakkha Vv 8421 (= Vv-a. 341).
from kantāra
(adj.) spinning Pv-a 75 (sutta˚ itthiyo).
to kantati1
= kanta1 in a˚ unpleasant, disgusting Pv iii.41 (= Pv-a 193).
spun, (sutta) Vin iv.300.
Sk. kṛtta, pp. of kantati1
(adj.) Sk. kṛtta pp. of kantati2] cut off, severed, at Mil 240 better as kantita1, i.e. spun.
a tuberous root, a bulb, tuber, as radish, etc. Ja i.273; Ja iv.373; Ja vi.516; Vv-a 335; ˚mūla bulbs and roots (˚phala) DN i.101; a bulbous root Ja v.202.
Sk. kanda
to cry, wail, weep, lament, bewail Dhp 371; Vv 8312 Ja vi.166; Mil 11, Mil 148; freq. of Petas: Pv-a 43, Pv-a 160 Pv-a 262 (cp. rodati) ■ In kāmaguṇā pass. urattāḷiṃ k MN i.86 = Nd ii.s. v.; AN iii.54 (urattāḷī for ˚iṃ v.l.); in phrase bāhā paggayha k˚ Vin i.237; Vin ii.284; Ja v.267.
Sk. krandati to *q(e)lem; cp. Gr. καλέω, κέλαδος, Lat. clamor, calare, calendae, Ohg. hellan to shout
(nt.) crying, lamenting Pv-a 262
Sk. krandana
1. a cave, grotto, generally, on the slope or at the foot of a mountain Vin ii.76, Vin ii.146 used as a dwelling-place Thag 602; Ja i.205; Ja iii.172. 2. a glen, defile, gully DN i.71 = AN ii.210 = Pp 59; AN iv.437; Mil 36; expld at DN-a i.209 (as a mountainous part broken by the water of a river; the etym. is a popular one, viz. “kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ; tena dāritaṃ”) k-padarasākhā AN i.243 = AN ii.240; Pv-a 29.
Sk. kandara
Name of a plant with white flowers Ja iv.442 ■ makuḷa knob (?) of k. plant Vism 253 (as in description of sinews).
Name of esculent water lily, having an enormous bulb DN i.264.
(adj.) weeping, lamenting Dāvs iv.46; a˚ not weeping Ja iii.58. (n. nt.) crying, lamentation Ja iii.57; Mil 148.
pp. of kandati
(adj.) trickling down Ja v.445.
Sk. skanna
= kinnāma Ja vi.126.
(adj. n.) [Sk. kṛpaṇa from kṛp wail, cp. Lat. crepo; Ags. hraefn = E. raven. Cp. also Sk. kṛcchra
1. poor, miserable, wretched; a beggar; freq expld by varāka, duggata, dīna and daḷidda; very often classed with low-caste people, as caṇḍālā Pv iii.113 & pesakārā (Ud 4). Snp 818; Ja i.312, Ja i.321; Ja iii.199; Pv ii.914; iii.113, iv.52; DN-a i.298; Dhp-a i.233; Thag-a 178
2. small, short, insignificant AN i.213; Bdhd 84. (f. ˚ā a miserable woman Ja iv.285; -˚an (adv.) pitifully piteously, with verbs of weeping, etc. Ja iii.295; Ja v.499 Ja vi.143; a˚; not poor Ja iii.199;- ati˚; very miserable Pgdp 74. Der. ˚tā wretchedness Sdhp 315.
-addhikā pl. often with ˚ādi, which means samaṇabrāhmaṇa-k˚-vaṇibbaka-yācakā (e.g. DN i.137; Pv-a 78 beggars and wayfarers, tramps Ja i.6, Ja i.262, Dhp-a i.105, Dhp-a i.188 (written k˚-andhika); see also DA i.298 and kapaṇikā-iddhikā pl. (probably miswriting for ˚addh˚, cp Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 130) DN i.137; Iti 65; DN-a i.298 -itthī a poor woman Ja iii.448; -jīvikā in ˚aṃ kappeti to make a poor livelihood Ja i.312; -bhāva the state of being miserable Pv-a 274; -manussa a wretched fellow, a beggar Vism 343; -laddhaka obtained in pain, said of children Ja vi.150, cp. kiccha laddhaka; -visikhā the street or quarter of the poor, the slums Ud 4; -vuttin leading a poor life Pv-a 175.
(f.) a (mentally) miserable woman Thig 219; Thag-a 178; cp. kapaṇā; also as kapaṇiyā Ja vi.93.
at Vin i.203, is an error for kajjala, lamp-black, used in preparation of a collyrium (cp. J.P.T.S. 1887 167).
(nt.); 1. a bowl in form of a skull, or the shell of reptiles; see kapāla.
2. an earthenware pan used to carry ashes Ja i.8; Ja vi.66, Ja vi.75; Dhp-a i.288.
3. a frying pan (see cpds. & cp. angāra-kapalla) Snp 672.; -kapalla is only a variant of kapāla.
-pāti an earthen pot, a pan Ja i.347 = Dhp-a i.371 -pūva a pancake Ja i.345; Dhp-a i.367; Vv-a 123; Mvu 35, Mvu 67.
Sk kapāla; orig. skull, bowl, cp. kapola & Lat. caput, capula, capillus, Goth. haubi, E. head
1. a small earthen bowl Ja vi.59; Dhp-a i.224.
2. a frying pan Ja i.346.
(nt.)
1. a tortoiseor turtle-shell SN i.7 = Mil 371; SN iv.179; as ornament at DN-a i.89.
2. the skull, cp. kaṭāha in sīsakaṭāha. 3. a frying pan (usually as ayo˚, of iron, e.g. AN iv.70 Nd ii.304iii; Vv-a 335) Ja ii.352; Vv 845; Dhp-a i.148 (v.l. ˚kapalla); Bdhd 100 (in simile).
4. a begging bowl, used by certain ascetics SN iv.190; SN v.53, SN v.301; AN i.36; AN iii.225; Ja i.89; Pv-a 3.
5. a potsherd Ja ii.301.
-ābhata the food collected in a bowl AN i.36; -khaṇḍa a bit of potsherd Ja ii.301; -hattha “with a bowl in his hand,” begging, or a beggar, Thag 1118; Ja i.89; Ja iii.32 Ja v.468; Pv-a 3.
Sk. kapāla, see kapalla
1. a small vessel, bowl Ja i.425.
2. a beggar’s bowl Ja i.235; Dhp-a ii.26.
= kappāsa, q.v. Dāvs ii.39.
a monkey (freq. in similes) Snp 791; Thag 1080; Ja i.170; Ja iii.148, cp. kavi.
-kacchu the plant Mucuna pruritus Pv ii.310; ˚phala its fruit Pv-a 86; -citta “having a monkey’s mind, capricious, fickle Ja iii.148 = Ja iii.525; -naccanā Npl., Pv iv.137; -niddā “monkey-sleep,” dozing Mil 300.
Sk. kapi, original designation of a brownish colour, cp. kapila & kapota
a wild bird, possibly the francolin partridge Kv 268; Ja vi.538 (B.B. kapiñjara).
Derivation unknown. Sk. kapiñjala
the tree Thespesia populneoides Vin iv.35.
and ˚ttha
1. the tree Feronia elephantum, the wood-apple tree Ja vi.534; Vism 183 (˚ka); Mvu 29, Mvu 11
2. ˚ṃ (nt.) the wood apple Mil 189;
3. the position of the hand when the fingers are slightly and loosely bent in Ja i.237; kapitthaka SN v.96.
= kapiṭhana Ja ii.445; Ja vi.529, Ja vi.550, Ja vi.553; v.l. at Vism 183 for ˚itthaka.
(adj.) brown, tawny, reddish, of hair & beard Vv-a 222; ˚ā f. a brown cow Dhp-a iv.153.
Sk. kapila, cp. kapi
the lintel of a door DN ii.143 (cp. Rh.D. Buddh. Suttas p. 95 n1) -˚ka the cavity in a doorpost for receiving the bolt Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148 (cp. Vin Texts ii.106 n3).
Sk. kapiśīrṣa
1. (m.) a pigeon, a dove Ja i.243; Mil 403;
2. (f.) ˚i a female pigeon Pv-a 47; ˚ka (f. ˚ikā Mil 365) a small pigeon Ja i.244.
-pāda (of the colour) of a pigeon’s foot Ja i.9.
Sk. kapota, greyish blue, cp. kapi
the cheek Vism 263, Vism 362; Dhp-a i.194.
Sk. kapola, cp. kapalla, orig. meaning “hollow”
(adj. n.) anything made with a definite object in view prepared, arranged; or that which is fit, suitable, proper See also DN-a i.103 & Kp-a 115 for var. meanings-I; Literal Meaning.
1. (adj.) fitting, suitable, proper (cp. ˚tā) (= kappiya) in kappâkappesu kusalo Thag 251 ˚kovido Mvu 15, Mvu 16; Snp 911; as juice Mil 161. (-˚) made as, like, resembling Vin i.290 (ahata˚) Snp 35 (khaggavisāṇa˚); hetu˚ acting as cause to Snp 16; Mil 105 ■ a˚ incomparable Mvu 14, Mvu 65;
2. (nt.) a fitting, i.e. harness or trapping (cp. kappana) Vv 209 (Vv-a 104) ■ a small black dot or smudge (kappabindu) imprinted on a new robe to make it lawful Vin i.255; Vin iv.227, Vin iv.286: also fig. a making-up (of a trick) lesa˚ DN-a i.103; Vv-a 348 ■ II. Applied Meaning. 1. (qualitative) ordinance, precept, rule; practice manner Vin ii.294, Vin ii.301 (:kappati singiloṇa-kappo “fit is the rule concerning… ”); cp. Mvu 4, Mvu 9; one of the chalanga, the 6 disciplines of Vedic interpretation Vv-a 265;
2. (temporal) a “fixed” time, time with ref. to individual and cosmic life. As āyu at DN-a i.103 (cp.kappaṃ); as a cycle of time = saṃsāra at Snp 521, Snp 535 Snp 860 (na eti kappaṃ); as a measure of time: an age of the world Vin iii.109; Mil 108; Sdhp 256, Sdhp 257; Pv-a 21; Iti 17 = Bdhd 87 = SN ii.185. There are 3 principal cycles or aeons: mahā˚, asaṅkheyya˚, antara˚; each mahā consists of 4 asankheyya-kappas, viz. saṃvaṭṭa˚ saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ vivaṭṭa˚ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ AN ii.142; often abbreviated to saṃvaṭṭa-vivaṭṭa˚ DN i.14; Iti 15; freq in formula ekampijātiṃ, etc. Vin iii.4 = DN iii.51, DN iii.111; Iti 99. On pubbanta˚ & aparanta˚, past & future kappas see D; i.12 sq. paṭhama-kappe at the beginning of the world, once upon a time (cp. atīte) Ja i.207. When kappa stands by itself, a Mahā-kappa is understood DN-a i.162. A whole, complete kappa is designated by kevala˚ Snp p.. 18 = 46~125; Snp 517; also dīgha SN ii.181; Sdhp 257. For similes as to the enormous length of a kappa see S ii.181 & DN-a i.164 = Pv-a 254-acc. kappaṃ adv.: for a long time DN ii.103 = DN ii.115; Ud 62, quot. at DN-a i.103; Vin ii.198; Iti 17; Mil 108 mayi āyukappaṃ Ja i.119, cp. Mil 141. Cp. saṅkappa.
-ātīta one who has gone beyond time, an Arahant Snp 373. -āvasesaṃ (acc.) for the rest of the kappa, in kappaṃ vā k-âvasesaṃ vā DN ii.117 = AN iv.309 = Ud 62; Mil 140: -āyuka (one) whose life extends over a kappa Mvu v.87; -uṭṭhāna arising at or belonging to the (end of a) kappa: -aggi the fire which destroys the Universe Ja ii.397; Ja iii.185; Ja iv.498; Ja v.336; Ja vi.554; Vism 304 -kāla the time of the end of the world Ja v.244 ■ uṭṭhāna (by itself) the end of the world Ja i.4 = Vism 415; -kata on which a kappa, i.e. smudge, has been made, ref. to the cīvara of a bhikkhu (see above) Vin i.255; Vin iv.227 Vin iv.286; DN-a i.103; -(ñ)jaha (one) who has left time behind free from saṃsāra, an Arahant Snp 1101 (but expld at Nd ii.s. v., see also DA i.103, as free from dve kappā diṭṭhi˚ taṇha˚). -jāla the consumption of the kappa by fire, the end of a kappa Dpvs i.61. -ṭṭha staying there for a kappa, i.e. in purgatory in āpāyiko nerayiko atekiccho, said of Devadatta Vin ii.202, Vin ii.206; AN iii.402 ~iv.160; Iti 11~85. -ṭṭhāyin lasting a whole cycle of a vimāna Thag 1190. -ṭṭhika enduring for an aeon kibbisa (of Devadatta) Vin ii.198 = Vin ii.204; (cp. Vin. Texts iii.254) sālarukkha Ja v.416; see also ṭhitakappiṃ Pp 13. -ṭṭhitika id. Dhp-a i.50 (vera); Mil 108 (kammaṃ) (“sabbe pi magga-samangino puggalā ṭhita-kappino.” -ṭṭhiya- = prec. AN v.75; Ja i.172, Ja i.213; Ja v.33; Mil 109 Mil 214. ˚rukkha the tree that lasts for a kappa, ref. to the cittapāṭalī, the pied trumpet-tree in the abode of the Asuras Ja i.202; -nibbatta originated at the beginning of the k. (appl. to the flames of purgatory) Ja v.272 -parivaṭṭa the evolution of a k; the end of the world Dpvs i.59; -pādapa = ˚rukkha Mhbv 2; -rukkha a wishing tree, magical tree, fulfilling all wishes; sometimes fig. Ja vi.117, Ja vi.594; Vism 206; Pv-a 75, Pv-a 176, Pv-a 121; Vv-a 32 (where combd with cintāmaṇi); Dhp-a iv.208 -latā a creeper like the kapparukkha Vv-a 12; -vināsaka (scil. aggi): the fire consuming the world at the end of a k. Vism 414 sq.; (mahāmegho) Dhp-a iii.362; -samaṇa an ascetic acc. to precepts, an earnest ascetic Ja vi.60 (cp. samaṇa-kappa); -halāhala “the k-uproar,” the uproar near the end of a kalpa Ja i.47.
Sk. kalpa, see kappeti for etym. & formation
a barber, hairdresser, also attendant to the king; his other function (of preparing baths) is expressed in the term nahāpaka (Pv ii.937) or nahāpita (˚ā?) (DN-a i.157) Vin. i.344; ii.182; DN i.51 (= DN-a i.157, in list of various occupations); Ja i.60, Ja i.137 Ja iii.315; Pv ii.937; iii.14 (where expl. by nahāpita in the meaning of “bathed,” cp. expl. ad i.106) Dhp-a i.85 (˚vesa disguise of a barber), 342 (pasādhana˚ one who arranges the dress, etc., hairdresser).
-jātika belonging to or reborn in the barber class, in this sense representing a low, “black” birth Pv-a 176.
fr. kḷp, kappeti
a dirty, old rag, torn garment (of a bhikkhu) Thag 199.
kad-paṭa = ku-paṭa
(f.) fitness, suitability DN-a i.207.
abstr. fr. kappa
to be fit, seeming, proper, with dat. of person DN ii.162; Vin ii.263, Vin ii.294; Vin iii.36; Thag 488; Mvu 4, Mvu 11; Mvu 15, Mvu 16.
Pass. of kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpyate
(nt.) the act of preparing, fixing; that which is fixed, arranged, performed 1. kappanā (f.) the fixing of a horse’s harness harnessing, saddling Ja i.62;
2. (nt.) (-˚) procuring making: jīvika˚; a livelihood Ja iii.32; putting into order; danta˚ Ja i.321;
3. (adj.) (-˚) trimmed arranged with: nānāratana˚ Vv-a 35.
fr. kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpana
the elbow Vin iii.121 = Vin iv.221; Ja i.293, Ja i.297; Dhp-a i.48, Dhp-a i.394; Vv-a 206.
cp. Sk. kūrpara
1. the silk-cotton tree Ja iii.286; Ja vi.336.
2. cotton DN ii.141; AN iii.295; SN v.284; Ja i.350; Ja vi.41; comb. w. uṇṇa AN iii.37 = AN iv.265 = AN iv.268.
-aṭṭhi a cotton seed Dhp-a iii.71; -paṭala the film of the cotton seed Vism 446; Bdhd 66; -picu cotton SN v.284; Ja v.110, Ja v.343; Ja vi.184: -maya made of cotton Pv-a 77.
cp. Sk. karpāsa
(adj.) made of cotton DN ii.188, cp. AN iv.394; DN ii.351; Vin i.58 = Vin i.97 = Vin i.281; Ja vi.590; Pv ii.117. (nt cotton stuff Mil 267.
-paṇṇa the leaf of the cotton tree, used medicinally Vin i.201; -sukhuma fine, delicate cotton stuff DN ii.188; AN iv.394; Mil 105.
(f.) cotton Ja vi.537; Pv-a 146.
= kappāsa
(-˚) (adj.) 1. belonging to a kappa, in paṭhama˚ ■ kāla the time of thé first Age DN-a i.247 Vb 412 (of manussā); Vv-a 19 (of Manu); without the kāla (id.) at Ja i.222; as noun the men of the first Age Ja ii.352.
2. In cpds.… pubbanta˚ and aparanta the ika˚ belongs to the whole cpd. DN i.39 sq.; DN-a i.103 See also kappiya 2.
fr. kappa
1. prepared, arranged, i.e. harnessed DN i.49; Ja vi.268; i.e. plaited DN-a i.274; i.e. trimmed: ˚kesamassu “with hair & beard trimmed DN ii.325; SN iv.343; Ja v.173, Ja v.350; Ja vi.268; Vv 731. 2. getting procuring; as ˚jīvika a living Ja v.270 made ready, drawn up (in battle array) DN ii.189; DN ii.3. decorated with, adorned with Sdhp 247 ■ su˚; well prepared, beautifully harnessed or trimmed Vv 601.
pp. of kappeti
(adj.) 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) getting, procuring, acquiring (pañña˚) Snp 1090;
2. (cp kappa ii.1b) having a kappa (as duration), lasting a Cycle Pp 13; in Mahā˚ enduring a Mahākappa DN-a i.164 = Pv-a 254.
fr. kappa
(adj.) 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) according to rule, right, suitable, fitting, proper, appropriate (Pv-a 26 = anucchavika paṭirūpa) Ja i.392; DN-a i.9; Pv-a 25 Pv-a 141 ■ a˚; not right, not proper, unlawful Vin i.45 Vin i.211; Vin ii.118; Vin iii.20; (nt) that which is proper AN i.84; Dhs 1160;- a˚; ibid; -kappiyākappiya (nt) that which is proper and that which is not Ja i.316; DN-a i.78. 2. (cp. kappa ii.1b) connected with time, subject to kappa, i.e. temporal, of time, subject to saṃsāra; of devamanussā Snp 521; na + of the Muni Snp 914. In another sense (“belonging to an Age”) in cpd. paṭhama ˚-kāla the time of the first Age Ja ii.352 ■ a˚; delivered from time, free from saṃsāra, Ep. of an Arahant Snp 860 cp. Mil 49, Mil 50. See also kappika.
-ānuloma (nt.) accordance with the rule Ne 192 -kāraka “one who makes it befitting,” i.e. who by offering anything to a Bhikkhu, makes it legally acceptable Vin i.206; -kuṭī (f.) a building outside the Vihāra wherein allowable articles were stored, a kind of warehouse Vin i.139; Vin ii.159; -dāraka a boy given to the Bhikkhus to work for them in the Vihāra DN-a i.78 (v.l. BB ˚kāraka); -bhaṇḍa utensils allowable to the Bhikkhus Ja i.41; Dhp-a i.412. a˚; thing unauthorised Vin ii.169; a list of such forbidden articles is found at Vin i.192; -bhūmi (f.) a plot of ground set apart for storing (allowable) provisions Vin i.239 (cp. ˚kuṭi) -lesa [cp. Sk. kalpya] guile appropriate to one’s own purpose Vv-a 348; -saññin (a) imagining as lawful (that which is not) AN i.84; a˚; opp. ibid ■ ˚tā the imagining as lawful (that which is not) appl. to kukkucca Dhs 1160 a˚; opp. ibid.
fr. kappa
(nt.) = kappa in the dialect used by Makkhali Gosāla, presumably the dialect of Vesāli, DN i.54; DN-a i.164 (a Burmeṣe MS. reads kappi, and so do Pv iv.332; Pv-a 254).
(m. & nt.) camphor: (a) the plant Ja vi.537 ■ (b) the resinous exudation, the prepared odoriferant substance (cp. kaṭukapphala Ja ii.416 = Dhp-a iii.475; Mil 382; Dāvs v.50.
cp. Sk. karpūra
to cause to fit, to create, build, construct arrange, prepare, order.
I. lit. 1. in special sense: to prepare, get done, i.e. harness: Ja i.62; plait DN-a i.274, an offering (yaññaṃ) Snp 1043; i.e. to trim etc. MN ii.155; Ja i.223; Mvu 25, Mvu 64 Mvu 2, generally (to be translated according to the meaning of accompanying noun), to make, get up, carry on etc (= Fr. passer), viz. iriyāpathaṃ to keep one’s composure Th i.570; Ja v.262; Bdhd 33; jīvitaṃ: to lead one’s life Pv-a 3, Pv-a 4, Pv-a 13; divāvihāraṃ to take the noonday rest Mvu 19, Mvu 79; nisajjaṃ to sit down Vin iii.191; vāsaṃ, saṃvāsaṃ to make one’s abode DN ii.88; Snp 283; Pv-a 36, Pv-a 47 saṃvāsaṃ to have (sexual) intercourse with Ja iii.448 Mvu 5, Mvu 212; Pv-a 6; seyyaṃ: to lie down, to make one’s bed Pp 55 etc. (acelaka-passage = DN i.166).
II. fig. 1. in special sense: to construct or form an opinion, to conjecture, to think Snp 799; DN-a i.103–2. generally: to ordain, prescribe, determine Ja v.238 (= say vidahati)-Caus. II. kappāpeti to cause to be made in all senses of kappeti; e.g. Vin ii.134 (massuṃ k. to get one’s beard done); Ja v.262 (hatthiyānāni k. to harness the elephant-cars); DN-a i.147 (pañca hatthinikā-satāni k. harness the 500 elephants). Pass kappiyati in ppr. kappiyamāna getting harnessed Ja i.62.
Der. from kappa, cp. Sk. kṛpa shape, form; *qṷrep caus. from. fr. *qṷer = Sk. kr, karoti to shape, to make, cp. karoti
(adj.) variegated, spotted, striped; mixed, intermingled; in patches Vism 190. Of a cow (˚gāvī) Dhp-a i.71 (˚go-rūpa) ibid. 99; of a calf (˚vaccha Ja v.106; of a dog (˚vaṇṇa = sabala q.v.) Ja vi.107; of leprosy Ja v.69; of the shade of trees (˚cchāya, opp sanda˚) MN i.75; Ja iv.152; Dhp-a i.375.
-kucchi having a belly striped with many colours, of a monster Ja i.273; -kuṭṭha a kind of leprosy Ja v.69 -maṇi the cat’s eye, a precious stone, also called masāragalla but also an emerald; both are prob. varieties of the cat’s eye Vv-a 167, Vv-a 304.
cp. Sk. kabara
(m., nt.) a small piece (= ālopa Pv-a 70) a mouthful, always appl. to food, either solid (i.e. as much as is made into a ball with the fingers when eating) or liquid Vin ii.214; Iti 18 = Ja iii.409; Ja iv.93; Dhp 324; Mil 180, Mil 400; Bdhd 69; Dhp-a ii.65; Pv-a 39; Mvu 19 Mvu 74. Kabale kabale on every morsel Ja i.68; Mil 231 -sakabala appl. to the mouth, with the mouth full of food Vin ii.214; iv. 195 ■ Sometimes written kabala.
-āvacchedaka choosing portions of a mouthful nibbling at a morsel Vin ii.214; Vin iv.196.
cp. Sk. kavala BSk. kavaḍa Divy 290 (+ ālopa), 298, 470
(adj.) always in combn with āhāra, food “made into a ball,” i.e. eatable, material food, as one of the 4 kinds of food (see stock phrase k˚ āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā… at MN i.48; SN ii.11, SN ii.98 = DN iii.228, DN iii.276; Bdhd 135) Dhs 585, Dhs 646 (where fully described), 816; Mil 245; Vism 236, Vism 341 Vism 450, Vism 616; Bdhd 69, 74; DN-a i.120. Written kabalīkāra nearly always in Burmese, and sometimes in Singh MSS.; s. also Ne 114–118.
-āhāra-bhakkha (of attā, soul) feeding on material food DN i.34, DN i.186, DN i.195; -bhakkha, same AN iii.192 = AN v.336 (appl. to the kāmâvacara devas); DN-a i.120.
kabala in compn form kabalī˚ before kr & bhū; kabalin for kabalī˚
(f.) a bandage, a piece of cloth put over a sore or wound Vin i.205 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.58 n4).
cp. Sk. kavalikā
(nt.) a poem, poetical composition, song, ballad in ˚ṃ karoti to compose a song Ja vi.410 -karaṇa making poems DN-a i.95; and -kāra a poet Kh 21; Ja vi.410.
cp. Sk. kāvya
= kabba in cpds. ˚ālaṅkāra composing in beautiful verse, a beautiful poem in ˚ṃ bandhati, to compose a poem ibid.; and -kāraka a poet, ibid.
1. (nt.) going, proceeding course, step, way, manner, e.g. sabbatth’âvihatakkama “having a course on all sides unobstructed Sdhp 425; vaḍḍhana˚ process of development Bdhd 96 paṭiloma˚ (going) the opposite way Bdhd 106; cp. also Bdhd 107, 111. a fivefold kama or process (of development or division), succession, is given at Vism 476 with uppattik˚, pahāna˚, patipattik˚, bhūmik˚, desanāk˚ where they are illustrated by examples. Threefold applied to upādāna at Vism 570 (viz. uppattik˚ pahānak˚, desanāk˚)
2. oblique cases (late and technical) “by way of going,” i.e. in order or in due course, in succession: kamato Vism 476, Vism 483, Vism 497 Bdhd 70, 103; kamena by & by, gradually Mvu 3, Mvu 33 Mvu 5, Mvu 136; Mvu 13, Mvu 6; Dāvs i.30; Snp-a 455; Bdhd 88; yathākkamaṃ Bdhd 96.
3. (adj.) (-˚) having a certain way of going: catukkama walking on all fours (= catuppāda Pv i.113.
fr. kram, cp. Vedic krama (-˚) step, in uru˚, BSk. krama reprieve, Divy 505
a step, stepping, gait Ja v.155, in expln Ja v.156 taken to be ppr. med ■ See san˚.
(m., nt.) the waterpot with long spout used by non-Buddhist ascetics SN i.167; Ja ii.73 (= kuṇḍikā); iv.362, 370; vi.86, 525, 570 Snp p.80; Dhp-a iii.448-adj. kamaṇḍaluka [read kā˚; ? “with the waterpot” AN v.263 (brāhmaṇā pacchābhūmakā k.).
etym. uncertain
to walk (I) lit. 1. c. loc. to walk, travel, go through: dibbe pathe Snp 176; ariye pathe SN i.33; ākāse DN i.212 = MN i.69 = AN iii.17;
2. c. acc. to go or get to, to enter MN ii.18; Ja vi.107; Pv i.12 (saggaṃ)-(II) fig. 1. to succeed, have effect, to affect MN i.186; Ja v.198; Mil 198;
2. to plunge into, to enter into AN ii.144; AN ii.3. impers. to come to (c. dat) SN iv.283.
kram, Dhtp. expld by padavikkhepe; ppr. med. kamamāna SN i.33; Snp 176; Intens. cankamati.
(adv.) for what purpose, why? Ja iii.398 (= kimatthaṃ).
kaṃ atthaṃ
(adj.) (a) desirable, beautiful, lovely Ja v.155, Ja v.156; Mil 11; (b) pleasant, sweet (-sounding) DN ii.171; Ja i.96 ■ As nt. a desirable object SN i.22.
grd of kāmayati
(nt.) a lotus, freq. combd with kuvalaya; or with uppala Ja i.146; DN-a i.40, expld as vārikiñjakkha Pv-a 77. 1. lotus, the lotus flower, Nelumbium Ja i.146; DN-a i.40; Mhbv 3; Sdhp 325; Vv-a 43, Vv-a 181, Vv-a 191; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 77 ■ At Ja i.119, Ja i.149 a better reading is obtained by corr. kambala to kamala, at Ja i.178 however kamb˚ should be retained.
2. a kind of grass, of which sandals were made Vin. i.190 (s. Vin. Texts ii.23 n.)
3. f. kamalā a graceful woman Ja v.160;
-komalakarā (f.) (of a woman) having lotus-like (soft hands Mhbv 29; -dala a lotus leaf Vism 465; Mhbv 3 Bdhd 19; Dhs-a 127; Vv-a 35, Vv-a 38 ■ -pādukā sandals of k. grass Vin i.190.
(adj.) rich in lotus, covered with lotuses (of a pond) in kamalinī-kāmuka “the lover of lotuses,” Ep. of the Sun Mhbv. 3 (v.l. ˚sāmika perhaps to be preferred).
fr. kamala
(-˚) trembling, shaking; tremor DN-a i.130 (paṭhavi˚); Sdhp 401; a˚; (adj.) not trembling unshaken; calm, tranquil Sdhp 594; Mvu 15, Mvu 175.
fr. kamp
(adj.) shaking, one who shakes or causes to tremble Mil 343 (paṭhavi˚).
fr. kampa
to shake, tremble, waver Kh 6; Ja i.23; Snp 268 (expl. Kp-a 153: calati, vedhati) Bdhd 84 ■ Cp. anu˚, pa˚, vi˚, sam˚ ■ kampamāna (adj.) trembling Ja iii.161; agitated, troubled (˚citta Ja ii.337; a˚; not trembling, unhesitating, steadfast Ja vi.293.
kamp to shake Dhtp. 186: calane; p. pres. kampanto, kampaṃ, kampamāna; aor. akampi; caus kampeti; p. pres. kampetan Dpvs xvii.51; ger. kampayitvāna DN ii.108; Ja v.178
1. adj. causing to shake Dhp-a i.84, trembling Kacc 271; 2. (nt) (a) an earthquake Ja i.26 Ja i.47; (b) tremor (of feelings) Ja iii.163.
-rasa (adj.) “whose essence is to tremble,” said of doubt (vicikicchā) Dhs-a 259.
fr. kamp
(adj.) see vi˚.
fr. kampa
(adj.) in a˚; not to be shaken, immovable, strong Thig 195; Mil 386; (nt.) firmness said of the 5 moral powers (balāni) DN-a i.64.
grd. of kampati
(va.) at Thig 262 is to be corr. into kambu-r-iva (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76).
(m., nt.) 1. woollen stuff, woollen blanket or garment. From Ja iv.353 it appears that it was a product of the north, probably Nepal (cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 203); enumd as one of the 6 kinds of cīvaras together w. koseyya & kappāsika; at Vin i.58 = Vin i.96, also at AN iv.394 (s. ˚sukhuma); freq. preceded by ratta (e.g. DN-a i.40. Cp. also ambara2 and ambala), which shows that it was commonly dyed red; also as paṇḍu Snp 689; Bdhd 1 ■ Some woollen garments (aḍḍhakāsika) were not allowed for Bhikkhus: Vin i.281; Vin ii.174 see further Ja i.43, Ja i.178, Ja i.322; Ja iv.138; Mil 17, Mil 88, Mil 105; Dhp-a i.226; Dhp-a ii.89 sq. 2. a garment: two kinds of hair (blankets, i.e.) garments viz. kesa˚; and vāla˚; mentioned Vin i.305 = DN i.167 = AN i.240, AN i.295.
3. woollen thread Vin i.190 (expld by uṇṇā) (cp. Vin. Texts ii.23) Ja vi.340;
4. a tribe of Nāgas Ja vi.165.
-kañcuka a (red) woollen covering thrown over a temple, as an ornament Mvu 34, Mvu 74; -kūṭāgāra a bamboo structure covered with (red) woollen cloth used as funeral pile Dhp-a i.69; -pādukā woollen slippers Vin i.190; -puñja a heap of blankets Ja i.149; -maddana dyeing the rug Vin i.254 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.154); -ratana a precious rug of wool Ja iv.138; Mil 17 (16 ft. long 18 ft. wide); -vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of woollen fabric, i.e. red Ja v.359 (˚maṃsa); -silāsana (paṇḍu˚) a stone-seat, covered with a white k. blanket, forming the throne of Sakka Dhp-a i.17; -sukhuma fine, delicate woollen stuff DN ii.188 = AN iv.394; Mil 105; -sutta a woollen thread Ja vi.340.
cp. Sk. kambala
(adj.) having a woollen garment DN i.55; DN ii.150.
fr. kambala
(nt.) (a sort of) woollen garment Pv ii.117 (cp. Pv-a 77).
fr. kambala
1. a conch, a shell: saṇha-kambu-r-iva… sobhate su gīvā Thig 262 (for kampurī’va); s cpds.
2. a ring or bracelet (made of shells or perhaps gold: see Kern. Toev. s. v.) Ja iv.18, Ja iv.466 (+ kāyūra) Pv ii.127, iii.93 (= Pv-a 157, sankhavalaya) Vv 362 (= Vv-a 167 hatth’âlankāra), worn on the wrist, while the kāyūra is worn on the upper part of the arm (bhujâlankāra ibid.);
3. a golden ring, given as second meaning at Vv-a 167, so also expl. at Ja iv.18, Ja iv.130; Ja v.400.
-gīva (adj.) having a neck shaped like a shell, i.e. in spirals, having lines or folds, considered as lucky Ja iv.130 (= suvaṇṇālingasadisagīvo), cp. above 1 -tala the base or lower part of a shell, viz. the spiral part, fig. the lines of the neck Ja v.155 (˚ābhāsā gīvā expld on p. 156 as suvaṇṇālingatala-sannibhā); also the (polished) surface of a shell, used as simile for smoothness Ja v.204, Ja v.207; -pariharaka a wristlet or bracelet Vv-a 167.
cp. Sk. kambu, Halāyudha = śankha; Dhtp. saṃvaraṇe
gold or golden ornament (bracelet) Ja v.260, Ja v.261 (: kambussaṃ vuccati suvaṇṇaṃ).
fr. preceding
(adj.) coming fr. Kamboja Ja iv.464 (assatara).
(f.) N of a country Ja v.446 (˚ka raṭṭha); Pv ii.91 (etc.); Vism 332, Vism 334, Vism 336.
(m., nt.) the plant Cassia tora or alata Ja iii.223 (˚gumba = elagalāgumba; vv.ll. kammoja˚ & tampo˚ [for kambo˚]).;
meaning & etym. unexpl;d
(nt.) the doing, deed, work orig. meaning (see karoti) either building (cp. Lit kùrti, Opr. kūra to build) or weaving, plaiting (still in mālākamma and latā˚ “the intertwining of garlands and creepers”; also in kamma-kara possibly orig employed in weaving, i.e. serving); cp. Lat. texo, to weave = Sk. takṣan builder, artisan, & Ger. wirken orig. weben. Grammatically karman has in Pāli almost altogether passed into the-a decl., the cons forms for instr. & abl. kammā and kammanā gen. dat kammuno, are rare. The nom. pl. is both kammā and kammāni.;
I. Crude meaning. 1. (lit.) Acting in a special sense i.e. office, occupation, doing, action, profession. Two kinds are given at Vin iv.6, viz. low (hīna) & high (ukkaṭṭha) professions. To the former belong the kammāni of a koṭṭhaka and a pupphacchaḍḍaka, to the latter belong vāṇijjā and gorakkhā ■ Kamma as a profession or business is regarded as a hindrance to the religious life, & is counted among the ten obstacles (see palibodha). In this sense it is at Vism 94 expl;d by navakamma (see below 2a) ■ kassa˚; ploughing, occupation of a ploughman Vism 284; kumbhakāra˚; profession of a potter Ja vi.372; tunna˚; weaving Vism 122; Pv-a 161. purohita˚; office of a high-priest (= abstr n. porohiccaṃ) Snp-a 466; vāṇija˚; trade Sāsv. 40 ■ kammanā by profession Snp 650, Snp 651; kammāni (pl.) occupations Snp 263 = Kp v.6 (anavajjāni k. = anākulā kammantā Snp 262). paresaṃ k˚ṃ katvā doing other people’s work = being a servant Vv-a 299; sa˚ pasutā bent upon their own occupations DN i.135, cp. attano k˚-kubbānaṃ Dhp 217. kamma-karaṇa-sālā work-room (here: weaving shed) Pv-a 120.
2. Acting in general, action, deed, doing (nearly always-˚) (a) (active) act, deed, job, often to be rendered by the special verb befitting the special action like cīvara˚; mending the cloak Vv-a 250; uposatha˚ observing the Sabbath Vb 422; nava˚; making new renovating, repairing, patching Vin ii.119, Vin ii.159 (˚karoti to make repairs); Ja i.92: Vism 94, adj. navakammika one occupied with repairs Vin ii.15; SN i.179; patthita˚ the desired action (i.e. sexual intercourse) Dhp-a ii.49 kammaṃ karoti to be active or in working, to act nāgo pādehi k.k. the elephant works with his feet MN i.414; kata˚; the job done by the thieves Dhp-a ii.38 (corehi), as adj. kata˚ cora (& akata ˚cora) a thief who has finished his deed (& one who has not) Vism 180 also in special sense: occasion for action or work, i. e; necessity, purpose: ukkāya kammaṃ n’atthi, the torch does not work, is no good Vism 428. (b) (passive) the act of being done (-˚), anything done (in its result) work, often as collect. abstr. (to be trsld. by E. ending-ing): apaccakkha˚; not being aware, deception Vb 85 daḷhī˚; strengthening, increase Vb 357, Vism 122 citta˚; variegated work, mālā˚; garlands, latā˚; creeper (-work) Vism 108; nāma˚; naming Bdhd 83; pañhā˚ questioning, “questionnaire” Vism 6 ■ So in definitions niṭṭhuriya˚ = niṭṭhuriya Vb 357; nimitta˚ nimitta, obhāsa˚ = obhāsa (apparition → appearing) Vb 353 ■ (c) (intrs.) making, getting, act, process (-˚) Often trsl. as abstr. n. with ending-ion or-ment, e.g. okāsa˚; opportunity of speaking, giving an audience Snp p.94; pātu˚; making clear, manifestation Dhp-a iv.198 anāvi˚, anuttāni˚; concealment Vb 358; kata˚ (adj.) one who has done the act or process, gone through the experience Snp-a 355; añjali˚, sāmīci˚; veneration honouring (in formula with nipaccakāra abhivādana paccuṭṭhāna) DN iii.83 (≈Vin ii.162, Vin ii.255); AN i.123; AN ii.180 Ja i.218, Ja i.219.
3. (Specialised) an “act” in an ecclesiastical sense proceedings, ceremony, performed by a lawfully constituted chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.49, Vin i.53, Vin i.144, Vin i.318; Vin ii.70 Vin ii.93; Vin v.220 sq.; Khus J.P.T.S. 1883, 101. At these formal functions a motion is put before the assembly and the announcement of it is called the ñatti Vin i.56, after which the bhikkhus are asked whether they approve of the motion or not. If this question is put once, it is a ñattidutiyakamma Vin ii.89; if put three times, a ñatticatuttha˚ Vin i.56 (cp. Vin. Texts i.169 n2) There are 6 kinds of official acts the Sangha can perform: see Vin i.317 sq.; for the rules about the validity of these ecclesiastical functions see Vin i.312–333 (cp Vin T. ii.256
285). The most important ecclesiastical acts are: apalokanakamma, ukkhepanīya˚ uposatha tajjaniya˚ tassapāpiyyasikā˚ nissaya˚, patiññākaraṇīya˚ paṭipucchākaraṇīya˚ paṭisāraṇiya˚ pabbājaniya˚ sammukhākaraṇīya˚ ■ In this sense: kammaṃ karoti (w. gen.) to take proceedings against Vin i.49, Vin i.143, Vin i.317 Vin ii.83, Vin ii.260; kammaṃ garahati to find fault with proceedings gone through Vin ii.5; kammaṃ paṭippassambheti to revoke official proceedings against a bhikkhu Vin iii.145.
4. In cpds.:- -ādhiṭṭhāyaka superintendent of work inspector Mvu 5, Mvu 174; Mvu 30, Mvu 98; -ādhipateyya one whose supremacy is action Mil 288; -ārambha commencement of an undertaking Mvu 28, Mvu 21; -āraha (a) entitled to take part in the performance of an “act” Vin iv.153 Vin v.221; -ārāma (a) delighting in activity DN ii.77; AN iv.22; Iti 71, Iti 79; -ārāmatā taking pleasure in (worldly activity DN ii.78 = AN iv.22, cp. Vb 381; AN iii.116, AN iii.173 AN iii.293 sq., 330, 449; iv.22 sq., 331; v.163; Iti 71; āvadāna a tale of heroic deeds Ja vi.295; -kara or ˚kāra used indiscriminately. 1. (adj.) doing work, or active in puriso dāso + pubbuṭṭhāyī “willing to work DN i.60 et sim. (= DN-a i.168: analaso). AN i.145; AN ii.67; Vv 754; 2. (n.) a workman, a servant (a weaver? usually in form dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā Vin i.243; DN i.141 = Pp 56 (also ˚kārā); AN ii.208 AN iii.77, AN iii.172; Thig 340; Ja i.57. Also as dāsā pessā k˚kārā AN iii.37 = AN iv.265, AN iv.393, and dāsā k˚ kārā Vin i.240, Vin i.272; Vin ii.154; DN iii.191; SN i.92 ■ a handyman Ja i.239; Mil 378; (f) -ī a female servant Vin ii.267 ˚kāra Vin iv.224, kārī Dhs A98 = Vv-a 73 (appl. to a wife); -karaṇa 1. working, labour, service Ja iii.219; Pv-a 120; DN-a i.168; DN-a i.2. the effects of karma Ja i.146 -karanā and kāraṇā see below; -kāma liking work industrious; a˚ lazy AN iv.93 = Ja ii.348; -kāraka a workman, a servant DN-a i.8; Mvu 30, Mvu 42; Nd ii.427 a sailor Ja iv.139; -garu bent on work Mil 288; -ccheda the interruption of work Ja i.149; Ja i.246; Ja iii.270; -jāta sort of action Ja v.24 (= kammam eva); -dhura (m. nt. draught-work Ja i.196; -dheyya work to be performed duty AN iv.285 = AN iv.325; cp. Ja vi.297; -dhoreyya “fit to bear the burden of action” Mil 288 (cp. Mil. trsl. ii.140); -niketavā having action as one’s house or temple ibid.; -nipphādana accomplishing the business Ja vi.162; -ppatta entitled to take part in an eccles act Vin i.318; Vin v.221; -bahula abounding in action (appl. to the world of men) Mil 7; -mūla the price of the transaction Mil 334; -rata delighting in business DN ii.78; Iti 71; -vatthu objects, items of an act Vin v.116; -vācā the text or word of an official Act. These texts form some of the oldest literature and are embodied in the Vinaya (cp. Vin i.317 sq.; Vin iii.174, Vin iii.176 Vin iv.153, etc.). The number of officially recognized k is eleven, see J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896, 1907; k˚ṃ karoti to carry out an official Act Mvu 5, Mvu 207; Dhs-a 399 ■ ˚ṃ anussāveti to proclaim a k˚, to put a resolution to a chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.317; -vossagga difference of occupation Ja vi.216; -sajja (a) “ready for action,” i.e. for battle Ja v.232; -sādutā “agreeableness to work” Dhs-a 151 (cp. kammaññatā & kamyatā) -sāmin “a master in action,” an active man Mil 288 -sippī an artisan Vv-a 278; -sīla one whose habit it is to work, energetic, persevering Mil 288; a˚; indolent lazy Ja vi.245; a˚-ttaṃ indolence, laziness Mvu 23, Mvu 21 -hīna devoid of occupation, inactive Mil 288.
II. Applied (pregnant) meaning: doing, acting with ref. to both deed and doer. It is impossible to draw a clear line between the source of the act (i.e. the acting subject, the actor) and the act (either the object or phenomenon acted, produced, i.e. the deed as objective phenomenon, or the process of acting, i.e. the deed as subjective phenomenon). Since the latter (the act) is to be judged by its consequences, its effects, its manifestation always assumes a quality (in its most obvious characteristics either good or bad or indifferent), and since the act reflects on the actor, this quality is also attached to him. This is the popular, psychological view, and so it is expressed in language, although reason attributes goodness and badness to the actor first, and then to the act. In the expression of language there is no difference between: 1. the deed as such and the doer in character: anything done (as good or bad) has a corresponding source; 2. the performance of the single act and the habit of acting: anything done tends to be repeated; 3. the deed with ref. both to its cause and its effect: anything done is caused and is in itself the cause of something else. As meanings of kamma we therefore have to distinguish the foll. different sides of a “deed,” viz.
1. the deed as expressing the doer’s will, i.e. qualified deed, good or bad; 2. the repeated deed as expression of the doer’s habit = his character; 3. the deed as having consequences for the doer, as such a source qualified according to good and evil; as deed done accumulated and forming a deposit of the doer’s merit and demerit (his “karma”). Thus pāpakamma = a bad deed, one who has done a bad deed, one who has a bad character, the potential effect of a bad deed = bad karma. The context alone decides which of these meanings is the one intended by the speaker or writer.
Concerning the analysis of the various semantic developments the following practical distinctions can be made: 1. Objective action, characterized by time as past = done, meaning deed (with kata); or future = to be done, meaning duty (with kātabba). 2. Subjective action, characterized by quality, as reflecting on the agent. 3. Interaction of act and agent: (a) in subjective relation, cause and effect as action and reaction on the individual (individual “karma,” appearing in his life, either here or beyond), characterized as regards action (having results) and as regards actor (having to cope with these results): (b) in objective relation, i.e. abstracted from the individual and generalized as Principle, or cause and effect as Norm of Happening (universal “karma,” appearing in Saṃsāra, as driving power of the world), characterized (a) as cause, (b) as consequence, (c) as cause-consequence in the principle of retribution (talio), (d) as restricted to time.
1. (Objective): with ref. to the Past: kiṃ kammaṃ akāsi nārī what (deed) has this woman done? Pv i.92 tassā katakammaṃ pucchi he asked what had been done by her Pv-a 37, Pv-a 83, etc ■ with ref. to the Future: k kātabbaṃ hoti I have an obligation, under 8 kusītavatthūni DN iii.255 = AN iv.332; cattāri kammāni kattā hoti “he performs the 4 obligations” (of gahapati) AN ii.67.
2. (Subjective) (a) doing in general, acting, action deed; var. kinds of doings enum. under micchājīva DN i.12 (santikamma, paṇidhi˚, etc.); tassa kammassa katattā through (the performance of) that deed DN iii.156; dukkaraṃ kamma-kubbataṃ he who of those who act, acts badly SN i.19; abhabbo taṃ kammaṃ kātum incapable of doing that deed SN iii.225; sañcetanika k. deed done intentionally MN iii.207; AN v.292 sq. pamāṇakataṃ k. DN i.251 = SN iv.322. kataraṃ k˚ṃ karonto ahaṃ nirayaṃ na gaccheyyaṃ? how (i.e. what doing) shall I not go to Niraya? Ja iv.340; yaṃ kiñci sithilaṃ k˚ṃ… na taṃ hoti mahapphalaṃ… SN i.49 = Dhp 312 = Thag 277; kadariya˚ a stingy action Pv-a 25; k. classed with sippa, vijjā-caraṇa DN iii.156 kāni k˚āni sammā-niviṭṭha established slightly in what doings? Snp 324; (b) Repeated action in general, constituting a person’s habit of acting or character (cp kata ii.1. a.); action as reflecting on the agent or bearing his characteristics; disposition, character. Esp. in phrase kammena samannāgata “endowed with the quality of acting in such and such a manner, being of such and such character”: tīhi dhammehi samannāgato niraye nikkhitto “endowed with (these) three qualites a man will go to N.” AN i.292 sq.; asucinā kāyak˚ena sam˚ asucimanussā “bad people are those who are of bad ways (or character)” Nd ii.112; anavajja kāya-k˚ sam˚ AN ii.69 (cp. AN iv.364); kāya-kammavacī-kammena sam˚ kusalena (pabbajita) “a bhikkhu of good character in deed and speech” DN i.63; kāya… (etc.)-k˚sam˚ bāla (and opp. paṇḍita) AN ii.252 (cp. AN i.102, AN i.104); visamena kāya (etc.)-k˚ sam AN i.154 = AN iii.129; sāvajjena kāya (etc.)-k˚ sam˚ AN ii.135-kammaṃ vijjā ca dhammo ca sīlaṃ jīvitam uttamaṃ, etena maccā sujjhanti, na gottena dhanena vā SN i.34 = SN i.55; MN iii.262, quoted at Vism 3, where k is grouped with vipassanā, jhāna, sīla, satipaṭṭhāna as main ideals of virtue; kammanā by character, as opp to jaccā or jātiyā, by birth: Snp 136; Snp 164; Snp 599; nihīna manussā (of bad, wretched character) Snp 661; manāpena bahulaṃ kāya (etc.)-kammena AN ii.87 = AN iii.33, AN iii.131 and esp. with mettā, as enum. under aparihāniyā and sārāṇīyā dhammā DN ii.80; AN iii.288; mettena kāya (etc.)-kammena DN ii.144; DN iii.191; AN v.350 sq. (c) Particular actions, as manifested in various ways, by various channels of activity (k˚-dvārā), expressions of personality as by deed, word and thought (kāyena vācāya, manasā). Kamma κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν means action by hand (body) in formula vacasā manasā kammanā ca Snp 330, Snp 365; later specified by kāya-kamma, for which kāya-kammanta in some sense (q.v.), and complementing vacī-k˚ mano-k˚; so in foll. combns: citte arakkhite kāya-k˚ pi arakkhitaṃ hoti (vacī˚ mano˚ AN i.261 sq.; yaṃ nu kho ahaṃ idaṃ kāyena k˚ kattukāmo idaṃ me kāya-k˚ attabyādhāya pi saṃvatteyya… “whatever deed I am going to do with my hands (I have to consider:) is this deed, done by my hands likely to bring me evil?” MN i.415; kāya-(vacī-etc. kamma, which to perform & to leave (sevitabbaṃ and a˚) AN i.110 = AN iii.150; as anulomika˚ AN i.106; sabbaṃ kāya-k˚ (vacī˚ mano˚) Buddhassa ñāṇânuparivattati “all manifestation of deed (word & thought) are within the knowledge of Buddha” Nd ii.235; yaṃ lobhapakataṃ kammaṃ karoti kāyena vā vācāya vā manasā vā tassa vipākaṃ anubhoti… Ne 37; kin nu kāyena v˚ m dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ what evil have you done by body, word or thought? Pv ii.13 and freq.; ekūna-tiṃsa kāyakammāni Bdhd 49. (d) Deeds characterized as evil (pāpa-kammāni, pāpāni k˚, pāpakāni k˚; pāpakamma adj., cp. pāpa-kammanta adj.). pāpakamma: n’atthi loke raho nāma p˚ pakubbato “there is no hiding (-place) in this world for him who does evil” AN i.149 so p˚-o dummedho jānaṃ dukkaṭaṃ attano… “he afflicted with (the result of) evil-doing…” AN iii.354 p˚-ṃ pavaḍḍhento ibid.; yaṃ p˚-ṃ kataṃ sabban taṃ idha vedanīyaṃ “whatever wrong I have done I have to suffer for” AN v.301; pabbajitvāna kāyena p˚-ṃ vivajjayī “avoid evil acting” Snp 407; nissaṃsayaṃ p˚-ṃ… “undoubtedly there is some evil deed (the cause of this) i.e. some evil karma Pv iv.161 ■ pāpaṃ kammaṃ: appamattikam pi p˚ k˚ kataṃ taṃ enaṃ nirayaṃ upaneti “even a small sin brings man to N. AN i.249, tayā v’etaṃ p˚ k˚ kataṃ tvañ ñeva etassa vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedissasi “you yourself have done this sin you yourself shall feel its consequences” MN iii.180; AN i.139, na hi p˚ kataṃ k˚ sajju khīraṃ va muccati Dhp 71 = Ne 161; yassa p˚ kataṃ k˚ kusalena pithīyati so imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti “he will shine in this world who covers an evil deed with a good one” MN ii.104; Dhp 173 = Thag 872; p˚-ssa k˚-ssa samatikkamo “the overcoming of evil karma” SN iv.320; p˚ssa k˚ssa kiriyāya “in the performance of evil” MN i.372; p˚āni k˚āni karaṃ bālo na bujjhati “he, like a fool, awaketh not, doing sinful deeds” Dhp 136 = Thag 146; pāpā p˚ehi k˚ehi nirayaṃ upapajjare “sinners by virtue of evil deeds go to N.” Dhp 307; te ca p˚esu k˚esu abhiṇham upadissare Snp 140. -pāpakāni kammāni: p˚ānaṃ k˚ānaṃ hetu coraṃ rājāno gāhetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti “for his evil deeds the kings seize the thief and have him punished” AN i.48; ye loke p˚āni k karonti te vividhā kamma-kāraṇā karīyanti “those who do evil deeds in this world, are punished with various punishments” MN iii.186 = AN i.142; k˚ṃ karoti p˚ṃ kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā Snp 232 (= kh 190) similarly Snp 127; karontā p˚ṃ k˚ṃ yaṃ hoti kaṭukapphalaṃ “doing evil which is of bitter fruit” Dhp 66; SN i.57 = Ne 131; k˚ehi p˚ehi Snp 215 ■ In the same sense: na taṃ k˚ṃ kataṃ sādhu yaṃ katvā anutappati “not well done is that deed for which he feels remorse” SN i.57 = Dhp 67 = Ne 132; āveni-kammāni karonti (with ref. to sangha-bheda) AN v.74; adhammikakammāni AN i.74; asuci-k˚āni (as suggested by 5 and attributes: asuci, duggandha, etc.) AN iii.269; sāvajjakammāni (as deserving Niraya) (opp. avajja → sagga AN ii.237; kammāni ānantarikāni deeds which have an immediate effect; there are five, enumd at Vb 378. (e) deeds characterized as good or meritorious (kusala bhaddaka, etc.) taṃ k˚ṃ katvā kusalaṃ sukhudrayaṃ DN iii.157; puñña-kammo of meritorious (character SN i.143; kusalehi k˚ehi vippayuttā carati viññāṇacariyā Pts i.80; kusalassa k˚ssa katattā Vb 173 sq. 266 sq.; 297 sq.; kusala-k˚-paccayāni Bdhd 12; puññakamma merit, compd with kapparukkha in its rewarding power Vv-a 32 (cp. puññânubhāva-nissandena “in consequence of their being affected with merit Pv-a 58)-Cp. also cpds.: kamma-kilesa, k˚-ṭṭhāna k˚-patha; k˚lakkhaṇa k˚-samādāna.
3. (Interaction) A. in subjective relation; (a) character of interaction as regards action; action or deed as having results: phala and vipāka (fruit and maturing); both expressions being used either singly or jointly, either˚-or independt; phala: tassa mayhaṃ atīte katassa kammassa phalaṃ “the fruit of a deed done by me in former times Thag-a 270; Vv 479 (= Vv-a 202); desanā… k-phalaṃ paccakkhakāriṇī “an instruction demonstrating the fruit of action” Pv-a 1; similarly Pv-a 2; cp. also ibid 26, 49, 52, 82 (v.l. for kammabala). vipāka: yassa k˚ssa vipākena… niraye pacceyyāsi… “through the ripening of whatever deed will you be matured (i.e. tortured in N.” MN ii.104; tassa k˚ssa vipākena saggaṃ lokaṃ uppajji “by the result of that deed he went to Heaven SN i.92; SN ii.255; k-vipāka-kovida “well aware of the fruit of action,” i.e. of retribution Snp 653; kissa kvipākena “through the result of what (action)” Pv i.65; inunā asubhena k-vipākena Ne 160; k-vipāka with ref. to avyākata-dhammā: Vb 182; with ref. to jhāna ibid. 268, 281; with ref. to dukkha ibid. 106 k-vipāka-ja produced by the maturing of (some evil action, as one kind of ābādha, illness: AN v.110 = Nd ii.3041; same as result of good action, as one kind of iddhi (supernatural power) Pts ii.174 ■ vipāka (adj.). asakkaccakatānaṃ kammānaṃ vipāko the reaper of careless deeds AN iv.393; der. vepakka (adj.) in dukkha-vepakka resulting in pain Snp 537 ■ -phala + vipāka: freq. in form. sukaṭa dukkhaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko DN i.55 = DN iii.264 = MN i.401 = SN iv.348 = AN i.268 = AN iv.226 AN v.265, AN v.286 sq.; cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 8; nissanda-phalabhūto vipāko Thag-a 270; tiṇṇaṃ k˚ānaṃ phalaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ k-ānaṃ vipāko DN ii.186-(b) the effect of the deed on the doer: the consequences fall upon the doer, in the majority of cases expressed as punishment or affliction: yathā yathâyaṃ puriso kammaṃ karoti tathā tathā taṃ paṭisaṃvedissati “in whichever way this man does a deed, in the same way he will experience it (in its effect)” AN i.249; na vijjati so jagati-ppadeso yathā ṭhito muñceyya pāpa-kammā “there is no place in the world where you could escape the consequences of evil-doing” Dhp 127 = Mil 150 = Pv-a 104, cp. Divy 532; so the action is represented as vedaniya, to be felt; in various combinations: in this world or the future state, as good or bad, as much or little AN iv.382 the agent is represented as the inheritor, possessor, of (the results of) his action in the old formula: kammassakā sattā k-dāyādā k-yonī k-bandhū… yaṃ k˚ṃ karonti kalyānaṃ vā pāpakaṃ vā tassa dāyādā bhavanti MN iii.203 = AN iii.72 sq. = 186 = v.88~288 sq. (see also cpds.). The punishment is expressed by kammakaraṇa (or ˚kāraṇa), “being done back with the deed, or the reaction of the deed, in phrase kamma-karaṇaṃ kāreti or kārāpeti “he causes the reaction of the deed to take place” and pass, kamma-karaṇā karīyati he is afflicted with the reaction, i.e. the punishment of his doing. The 5 main punishments in Niraya see under kāraṇaṃ, the usual punishments (beating with whips etc.) are enumerated passim, e.g. MN iii.164, MN iii.181; and Nd ii.604. [As regards form and meaning Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 and 1893, 15 proposes kāraṇā f. “pain, punishment” fr. k̆ṛ̆ to tear or injure, “the pains of karma, or torture”; Prof. Duroiselle follows him, but with no special reason: the derivation as nt. causative-abstr. fr karoti presents no difficulty.]-ye kira bho pāpakāni k˚-āni karonti te diṭṭh’ eva dhamme evarūpā vividhā k-kāraṇā karīyanti, kim anga pana parattha! “Those who, as you know, do evil are punished with various tortures even in this world, how much more then in the world to come!” MN iii.181; MN iii.186 = AN i.142; sim k˚-kāraṇāni kārenti (v.l. better than text-reading SN iv.344; Sdhp 7; Nd ii.on dukkha. As k-karaṇaṃ saṃvidahiṃsu Ja ii.398; kamma-kāraṇa-ppatta one who undergoes punishment Vism 500. See also examples under 2d and MN i.87; AN i.47; Ja v.429; Mil 197.
B. in objective relation: universal karma, law of cause and consequence ■ (a) karma as cause of existence (see also d, purāṇa˚ and pubbe kataṃ k˚): compared to the fruitful soil (khetta), as substratum of all existence in kāma, rūpa, arūpa dhātu AN i.223 (kāmadhātu-vepakkañ ce kammaṃ nâbhavissa api nu kho kāmabhavo paññāyethā ti? No h’etaṃ… iti kho kammaṃ khettaṃ… ); as one of the 6 causes or substrata of existence AN iii.410; kammanā vattati loko kammanā vattati pajā “by means of karma the world goes on, mankind goes on” Snp 654; kamma-paccayā through karma Pv-a 25 (= Kh 207); k˚ṃ kilesā hetu saṃsārassa “k. and passions are the cause of saṃsāra (renewed existence)” Ne 113; see on k. as principle Pts ii.78; Pts ii.79 (ch. vii., kamma-kathā) MN i.372 sq.; Ne 161; Ne 180
182; k. as 3 fold: Bdhd 117; as 4 fold MN iii.215 and as cause in general Vism 600 (where enumd as one of the 4 paccaya’s or stays of rūpa, viz. k., citta, utu āhāra); Bdhd 63, 57, 116, 134 sq.; Vb 366; Mil 40 sq. as a factor in the five-fold order (dhammatā or niyama) of the cosmos: k˚-niyama DA. on D 11, 12; Dhs-a. 272; Cp. cpds.: kammaja (resulting from karma Bdhd 68, 72, 75; ˚-vātā, birth-pains i.e. the winds resulting from karma (caliṃsu) Dhp-a i.165; Dhp-a ii.262 k˚-nimitta Bdhd 11, 57, 62; k˚-sambhava Bdhd 66 k˚-samuṭṭhāna Vism 600; Bdhd 67, 72; see further cpds. below ■ (b) karma as result or consequence There are 3 kamma-nidānāni, factors producing karma and its effect: lobha, dosa, moha, as such (tīṇi nidānāni kammānaṃ samudayāya, 3 causes of the arising of karma) described AN i.134 = AN i.263 = AN iii.338 = Nd ii.517 so also AN v.86; AN v.262; Vb 208. With the cessation of these 3 the factor of karma ceases: lobha-kkhayā kamma-nidāna-saṃkhayo AN v.262. There are 3 other nidānāni as atīte anāgate paccuppanne chanda AN i.264 and 3 others as producing or inciting existence (called here kamma-bhava, consequential existence) are puñña, apuñña, ānejja (merit, demerit and immovability) Vb 137 = Nd ii.471 ■ (c) karma as causeconsequence: its manifestation consists in essential likeness between deed and result, cause and effect: like for like “as the cause, so the result.” Karma in this special sense is Retribution or Retaliation; a law, the working of which cannot be escaped (cp. Dhp 127, as quoted above 3 A (b), and Pv ii.717: sace taṃ pāpakaṃ kammaṃ karissatha karotha vā, na vo dukkhā pamutt atthi)-na hi nassati kassaci kammaṃ “nobody’s (trace, result of) action is ever lost” Snp 666; puññâpuñña-kammassa nissandena kanaka vimāne ekikā hutvā nibbatti “through the consequence of both merit and demerit” Pv-a 47; cp. Vv-a 14; yatth’ assa attabhāvo nibbattati tattha taṃ k˚ṃ vipaccati “wherever a man comes to be born, there ripens his action AN i.134 ■ correspondence between “light” and “dark” deeds and their respective consequence are 4 fold: kaṇha-kamma → kaṇha vipāka, sukka˚, kaṇhasukka akaṇha-asukka: DN iii.230 = MN i.389 = AN ii.230 sq.; so sakena kammena nirayaṃ upapajjati Nd ii.304iii k˚ -ānubhāva -ukkhitta “thrown, set into motion, by the power of k.” Pv-a 78; sucarita-k-ânubhavâvanibbattāni vimānāni “created by the power of their result of good conduct” Vv-a 127; k-ânubhāvena by the working of k. Pv-a 77; k˚ -vega -ukkhittā (same) Pv-a 284; yathā kamm -ūpaga “undergoing the respective consequences (of former deeds) affected with respective karma: see cpds., and cp. yathā kammaṃ gato gone (into a new existence) according to his karma Ja i.153 & freq.; see cpds.; k-sarikkhatā “the karma-likeness, the correspondence of cause and consequence: taṃ k-s˚ṃ vibhāventaṃ suvaṇṇamayaṃ ahosi “this, manifesting the karma-correspondence, was golden Vv-a 6; so also k-sarikkhaka, in accordance with their deed, retributionary, of kamma-phalaṃ, the result of action: tassa kamma-sarikkhakaṃ kammaphalaṃ hoti “for her the fruit of action became like action,” i.e. the consequence was according to her deed. Pv-a 206 Pv-a 284; Pv-a 258; as nt.: k-s˚ṃ pan’assa udapādi “the retribution for him has come” Dhp-a i.128; Ja iii.203; cp. also Mil 40 sq.; 65 sq.; 108 ■ (d) The working and exhaustion of karma, its building up by new karma (nava˚) and its destruction by expiration of old karma (purāṇa). The final annihilation of all result (˚kkhaya constitutes Arahantship. nava → purāṇa-kamma: as aparipakka, not ripe, and paropakka, ripe DN i.54 = SN iii.212; as pañca-kammuno satāni, etc. ibid.; kāyo… purāṇaṃ k˚ṃ abhisankhataṃ (“our body is an accumulation of former karma”) SN ii.65 = Nd ii.680 D; see also A ii.197; Pv iv.71; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 45; Ne 179; and with simile of the snake stripping its slough (porāṇassa k˚ssa parikkhīṇattā… santo yathā kammaṃ gacchati) Pv-a 63 ■ k˚-nirodha or ˚kkhaya: so… na tāva kālaṃ karoti yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ vyanti hoti “He does not die so long as the evil karma is unexhausted” AN i.141≈; nava-purāṇāni k˚āni desissāmi k˚-nirodhaṃ k˚-nirodha-gāminiñ ca paṭipadaṃ “the new and the old karma I shall demonstrate to you the destruction of k. and the way which leads to the destruction of k.” SN iv.132~A iii.410;… navānaṃ k˚ānaṃ akaraṇā setughātaṃ; iti k-kkhayā dukkhakkhayo… (end of misery through the end of karma AN i.220 = MN ii.214; same Pts i.55
57; cp. also AN i.263 Nd ii.411 (expl. as kamma-parāyaṇa vipāka-p˚: “gone beyond karma and its results,” i.e. having attained Nibbāna). See also the foll. cpds.: k˚-âbhisankhīsa ˚āvaraṇa, ˚kkhaya, ˚nibandhana.
-ādhikata ruled by karma, Mil 67, Mil 68; ˚ena by the influence of k. ibid. -ādhiggahita gripped by karma Mil 188, Mil 189; -ānurūpa (adj.) (of vipāka) according to one’s karma Ja iii.160; DN-a i.37; -ābhisaṅkhāra (3 B) accumulation of k. Nd ii.116, Nd ii.283, Nd ii.506. -ābhisanda in ˚ena in consequence of k. Mil 276, cp. J.P.T.S. 1886 146; -āraha see I.; -āyatana 1. work Vb 324, cp Mil 78; Mil 2. action = kamma Ja iii.542; cp. Ja iv.451, Ja iv.452 -āyūhana the heaping up of k. Vism 530; Dhs-a 267 Dhs-a 268; cp. k˚ṃ āyūhi Mil 214 and J.P.T.S. 1885, 58 -āvaraṇa the obstruction caused by k. AN iii.436 Pp 13 = Vb 341 (in defiName of sattā abhabbā: kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā, kiles˚, vipāk˚… ), Kv 341; Mil 154, Mil 155; Vism 177 (= ānantariya-kamma) -ūpaga in yatha kamm-ûpage satte: the beings as undergoing (the consequences of) their respective kamma (3B) in form. cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate… pajānāti (or passati) Vin iii.5 = DN i.82 = SN ii.122 (214) v.266 = AN iv.178 = AN v.13 (35, 200, 340) = Vb 344; abbreviated in MN iii.178; Nett. 178; see also similar Snp 587 Bdhd 111; -upacaya accumulation of k. Kvn A. 156 -kathā exposition of k.; chapter in Pts ii.98; -kāma (adj. desirous of good karma Thig 275; Pv-a 174; a˚ opp. inactive, indolent AN iv.92, Pv-a 174; -kiriyā -dassana (adj.) understanding the workings of k. Ja i.45; -kiliṭṭha bad, evil k. Dhp 15 (= Dhp-a i.129, expl. kiliṭṭha-k˚) -kilesa (2) depravity of action, bad works, there are 4 enumd at DN iii.181 = Ja iii.321, as the non-performance of sīla 1
4 (see sīla), equal to pāpa-kāya-k˚; -kkhaya (3 B) the termination, exhaustion of the influence of k. its destruction: sabba-k˚-kkhayaṃ patto vimutto upadhi-sankhaye SN i.134; as brought about by neutral indifferent kamma: DN iii.230 = AN ii.230 sq.; MN i.93; Dhs-a 89; -ja (3 B) produced by k. Ja i.52; as one mode of the origin of disease Mil 135; Nd ii.3041; appld. to all existence Mil 271; Vism 624 (kammajaṃ āyatanadvāra-vasena pākaṭaṃ hoti); appld to rūpa Vism 451 Vism 614; appl. to pains of childbirth (˚vātā) Ja i.52, Dhp-a i.165 a˚ not caused by k., of ākāsa and nibbāna Mil 268, Mil 271 -ṭṭhāna (2) 1. a branch of industry or occupation, profession said of diff. occupations as farmer, trader householder and mendicant MN ii.197; AN v.83. 2. occasion or ground for (contemplating) kamma (see ṭhāna ii.2. c.), kamma-subject, a technical term referring to the instruments of meditation, esp. objects used by meditation to realize impermanence. These exercises (“stations of exercise” Expos. 224) are highly valued as leading to Arahantship Dhp-a i.8 (yāva arahattaṃ kamma-ṭṭhānaṃ kathesi), 96; Pv-a 98 (catu-saccakamma-ṭṭhāna-bhāvanā meditation on the 4 truths and the objects of meditation). Freq. in phrase kammaṭṭhāne anuyutto (or anuyoga vasena) na cirass’eva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi: Ja iii.36; Sāsv 49; see also Ja i.7, Ja i.97 Ja i.182, Ja i.303, Ja i.414; Sdhp 493. These subjects of meditation are given as 38 at Dhs-a 168 (cp. Cpd. 202), as 32 (dvattiṃs’ ākāra-k˚) at Vism 240 sq., as 40 at Vism 110 sq. (in detail); as pañca-sandhika at Vism 277 some of them are mentioned at Ja i.116; Dhp-a i.221, Dhp-a i.336 Dhp-a iv.90 ■ ˚ṃ anuyuñjati to give oneself up to meditation Sāsv 151; Pv-a 61 ■ ˚ṃ uggaṇhāti to accept from his teacher a particular instrument of meditation Vism 277 sq. (also ˚assa uggaho & uggaṇhana); Kp-a 40; Dhp-a i.9, Dhp-a i.262; Dhp-a iv.106; Pv-a 42 ■ ˚ṃ katheti to teach a pupil how to meditate on one of the k˚ Dhp-a i.8, Dhp-a i.248 Dhp-a i.336; Pv-a 61 ■ ˚ṃ adāsi Dhp-a iv.106; ˚gaṇhāti Ja iii.246 Vism 89; ˚ācikkhana instruction in a formula of exercise Dhs-a 246; ˚dāyaka the giver of a k-ṭṭh˚ object, the spiritual adviser and teacher, who must be a kalyāṇamitta (q.v.), one who has entered the Path; Vism 89 Bdhd 89, 91, cp. Vism 241; -ṭṭhānika a person practising kammaṭṭhāna Vism 97, Vism 187, Vism 189; Dhp-a i.335; -tappana the being depressed on acct. of one’s (bad) karma Dhp-a i.150 ■ -dāyāda (3 A (b) and cp. ˚ssaka) the inheritor of k., i.e. inheriting the consequences of one’s own deeds MN i.390; Mil 65 = Dhs-a 66; -dvāra “the door of action,” i.e. the medium by which action is manifested (by kāya, vacī, mano) (s. 2b) Ja iv.14 KvuA 135; Dhs-a 82; Bdhd 8; -dhāraya name of a class of noun-compounds Kacc 166; -nānatta manifoldness of k. Dhs-a 64 (also-nānākaraṇa ib.); -nibandhana (3 B) bound to k. (: rathass’āṇī va yāyato, as the linchpin to the cart) Snp 654; -nibbatta (3 B) produced through k. Mil 268; Dhs-a 361; -nimitta the sign token of k. Dhs-a 411; -nirodha the destruction of k [see 3 B (d)]; -paccaya the ground, basis of karma Vism 538; KvuA 101; ˚paccayena by means of k Ja vi.105, Vism 538; (adj.) Ja v.271, Dhs-a 304; -paṭisaraṇa (a) having k. as a place of refuge or as a protector Ja vi.102; Mil 65; cp. Dhs-a 66; -paṭibāḷha strong by k. Mil 301; -pathā (2 b) pl. the ways of acting (= sīla q.v.), divided into kusala (meritorious, good) and akusala (demeritorious, evil) and classified according to the 3 manifestations into 3 kāya˚, 4 vācī˚, 3 mano˚ altogether 10; so at Vin v.138, SN ii.168, AN v.57, AN v.268 as kus˚ and akus˚ at DN iii.71, DN iii.269, DN iii.290; as 7 only at SN ii.167; as akus˚ only at AN v.54, AN v.266; Vb 391; Ne 43; Bdhd 129, 131; ˚ppatta having acquired the 10 items of (good) action Sdhp 56, Sdhp 57. -phala [3 A (a)] the fruit of k., the result of (formerly) performed actions Ja i.350; Vv-a 39, Pv-a 1, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 52; ˚-upajīvin 1. living on the fruit of one’s labour (ad I) Ja iv.160;
2. living according to the result of former deeds AN ii.135 -bandhu having k. as one’s relative, i.e. closely tied to one’s karma (see ˚ssaka) Thag 496; cp. Ja vi.100, etc -bala the power of k. Ja vi.108; Pv-a 82. -bhava [3 B (b)] karmic existence, existence through karma Vb 137; Dhs-a 37; -bhūmi 1. the place of work Ja iii.411; Ja iii.2. the ground of actions, i.e. the field of meritorious deeds Mil 229; -mūla (good) k. as a price (for long life, etc.) Mil 333, Mil 334, Mil 341; -mūlaka produced by k. Mil 134; -yoni having k. for matrix, i.e. as the cause of rebirth Mil 65; Dhs-a 66. -lakkhaṇa having k. as distinctive characteristic AN i.102 AA 370; -vagga name of section in Nipāta IV of Anguttara (Nos. 232
238) AN ii.230 sq.; -vavaṭṭhāna the continuance of k. Dhs-a 85; -vāda (a) holding to the view of (the power and efficacy of) k. SN ii.33 sq.; AN i.287 (+ kiriyavāda, viriyavāda); -vādin believing in k. DN i.115; Vin i.71; Ja vi.60; -vipāka [3 A (a)] the ripening of k., the result of one’s actions (see above Vb 106, Vb 182, Vb 268, Vb 281; as one of the four mysteries (acinteyyāni) of Buddhism at Mil 189 ■ ˚ja produced as a result of k.: DN ii.20; Mhbv 78; Pts ii.174, Pts ii.213; Mil 135; Vism 382 (appld to iddhi); concerning disease as not produced by k., see A v.110; Mil 134 Mil 135; AA 433, 556. -visuddhi meritorious karma Dhp 16 (= Dhp i.132); -visesa variety or difference of k Dhs-a 313; -vega the impetus of k. Pv-a 284; -sacca (adj.) having its reality only in k.; said of loka, the world AN ii.232. -samādāna (2) the acquisition of ways of acting, one’s character, or the incurring of karma either as micchādiṭṭhi˚ (of wrong views) or sammādiṭṭhi (conforming to the right doctrine), so in yathākamm-ûpaga passage (q.v.): DN iii.96; MN i.70; MN iii.178 MN iii.179; four such qualities or kinds of karma enum. at Ne 98; of Buddha’s knowledge as regards the quality of a man’s character: SN v.304; AN iii.417 sq.; Pts ii.174 Vb 338; -samārambha [3 B (a)] having its beginning in k.; said of loka, the world of men; with ˚ṭṭhāyin: lasting as long as the origin (cause) of k. exists AN ii.232 -samuṭṭhāna [3 B (a)] rising from k. Mil 127; Dhs-a 82 Kvn 100; -sambhava produced by k. Mil 127; -sarikkhaka [see above 3 B (c)] similar or like in consequence to the deed done Dhp-a iii.334 (˚vipāka). -sarikkhatā (do.) the likeness between deed and result; -sahāya “companion to the deed,” said of thought Dhs-a 323 -socana sorrowing for one’s (bad) deeds Dhp-a i.128 -(s)saka [3 A (b), q.v.] (a) one whose karma is his own property, possessed of his own k. MN iii.203, etc. (in phrase k., kamma-dāyāda, kamma-bandhu, etc.; cp Vism 301); Ja iv.128; Mil 65; DN-a i.37 = who goes according to his own karma (attano k˚ânurūpaṃ gatiṃ gacchanti, n’eva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena… ); der. ˚tā the fact that every being has his very own karma AN iii.186; Dhs 1366 Vb 324; ˚ta as adj.; qualifying ñāṇa, i.e. the knowledge of the individual, specific nature of karma Dhs 1366, Vb 328.
Vedic karman, work esp. sacrificial process. For ending ˚man = Idg. *men cp. Sk. dhāman = Gr.δημα, Sk. nāman = Lat nomen
(adj.) connected with, dependt on karma Mil 137 (a˚). Kammaniya, iya & kammanna;
fr. kamma
(adj.) “workable,” fit for work, dexterous, ready, wieldy. Often of citta “with active mind” in formula vigatūpakkilesa mudubhūta k˚ ṭhita ānejjappatta DN i.76, etc. = MN i.22 Pp 68; SN iii.232; SN v.92, SN v.233; AN i.9; Dhp-a i.289; Bdhd 101, expld at Vism 377 (˚iya). Further of citta (muduñ ca kammaññañ ca pabhassarañ ca) AN i.257 (reads ˚iyañ) = Vism 247; of upekhā and sati Nd ii.661 cp. Bdhd 104; of kāya & citta Bdhd 121. Said of a lute = workable, ready for playing AN iii.375 = Vin i.182 Of the body AN iv.335 ■ a˚; not ready, sluggish AN iv.333; Vism 146 ■ kammañña-bhāva the state of being workable, readiness, of kāya Dhs 46, of vedanā etc., Dhs 326, of citta Dhs-a 130, see next; a˚; unworkable condition Dhs-a 130.
(f.) workableness, adaptability, readiness, appl. to the wood of the sandal tree (in simile) AN i.9; said of kāya and citta in connection with kammaññattaṃ k˚bhāvo k˚mudutā: Dhs 46 Dhs 47 = Dhs 326 = Dhs 641 = Dhs 730; cp. Dhs 585; similar Bdhd 16, 20 71; Dhs-a 136, Dhs-a 151 (= kammasādutā) a˚; unworkableness inertness, unwieldiness, sluggishness Mil 300; Ne 86 Ne 108, cp. Dhs 1156, Dhs 1236; Dhs-a 255; expld as cittagelaññaṃ Dhs-a 377; as cetaso līnattaṃ Vb 373.
abstr. fr. prec.
1. doing, acting, working; work, business, occupation profession. paṭicchanna˚ of secret acting Snp 127 Vb 357; as being punished in Niraya AN i.60; SN iv.180 as occupation esp. in pl. kammantā: SN v.45 = SN v.135; Dhp-a i.42 (kammantā nappavattanti, no business proceeds all occupations are at a standstill); anākula Snp 262 = Kp v.5; abbhantarā k˚ uṇṇā ti vā, kappāsā ti vā as housework, falling to the share of the wife AN iii.37 = AN iv.365; khetta˚ occupation in the field AN iii.77; see also D i.71; MN iii.7; SN i.204; Mil 9, Mil 33 and below; as place of occupation: Snp p.13, Pv-a 62 Phrases: ˚ṃ adhiṭṭhāti to look after the business AN i.115; Pv-a 141; jahati give up the occupation SN iv.324; Pv-a 133; ˚ṃ payojeti to do or carry on business DN i.71; DN ii.175; DN iii.66, DN iii.95; AN iii.57; ˚ṃ pavatteti to set a business on foot Pv-a 42 (and vicāreti: Pv-a 93); ˚ṃ saṃvidahati to provide with work AN iv.269 = AN iv.272 Mvu vi.16.
2. deed, action in ethical sense kamma, character, etc., Kh 136 (k˚ = kamma); pāpa˚ doing wrong Pv iv.81; Pv iv.161; Ja vi.104 (opp. puñña˚) as specified by kāya˚ vacī ˚mano˚ AN v.292 sq.; Vv-a 130 (in parisuddha-kāya-kammantatā); dhammikā k˚ā MN ii.191; ākiṇṇa-k˚ (evam-) of such character SN i.204 kurūra-k˚ (adj.) of cruel character AN iii.383 = Pp 56 (in def. of puggalo orabbhiko); sammā˚; of right doing opp. micchā˚, as constituting one element of character as pertaining to “Magga” (: q.v.) DN ii.216; SN ii.168 SN v.1; AN iii.411; Bdhd 135; expl. as kāya-kamma (= sīla 1
3) at SN v.9 = Vb 105; Vb 235; as kāya-duccaritehi ārati virati… Vb 106.
-ādhiṭṭhāyika superintendent of work Dhp-a i.393 -ṭṭhāna: 1. the spot where the ceremonies of the Ploughing Festival take place Ja i.57; Ja i.2. the common ground of a village, a village bazaar Ja iv.306; -dāsa a farm-servant Ja i.468; -bheri the drum announcing the (taking up of) business Dhp-a iii.100; -vipatti “failure of action,” evil-doing AN i.270 opp. -sampadā “perfection of action, right-doing” AN i.271; -saṃvidhāna the providing of work DN iii.191 (one of the 5 duties of the gahapati).
Sk. karmānta; kamma + anta, cp. anta 14.
(adj.) 1. a business manager Ja i.227.
2. a labourer, artisan, assistant Ja i.377.
fr. kammanta
a smith, a worker in metals generally DN ii.126, AN v.263; a silversmith Snp 962; Dhp 239; Ja i.223; a goldsmith Ja iii.281; Ja v.282. The smiths in old India do not seem to be divided into black-, gold-and silver-smiths, but seem to have been able to work equally well in iron, gold, and silver, as can be seen e.g. from Ja iii.282 and Vv-a 250, where the smith is the maker of a needle. They were constituted into a guild, and some of them were well-to-do as appears from what is said of Cunda at DN ii.126; owing to their usefulness they were held in great esteem by the people and king alike Ja iii.281.
-uddhana a smith’s furnace, a forge Ja vi.218; -kula a smithy MN i.25; kūṭa a smith’s hammer Vism 254 -gaggarī a smith’s bellows SN i.106; Ja vi.165; Vism 287 (in comparison); -putta “son of a smith,” i.e. a smith by birth and trade DN ii.126; AN v.263; as goldsmith Ja vi.237, Snp 48 (Nd ii.ad loc.: k˚ vuccati suvaṇṇakāro) -bhaṇḍu (bhaṇḍ, cp. Sk. bhāṇḍika a barber) a smith with a bald head Vin i.76; -sālā a smithy Vism 413 Mvu 5, Mvu 31.
Vedic karmāra
1. variegated, spotted, blemished Ja v.69 (˚vaṇṇa), said of the spotted appearance of leprosy ■ fig. inconsistent, varying AN ii.187.
2. (nt. inconsistency, blemish, blot AN iv.55; Vism 51 ■ a˚ not spotted, i.e. unblemished, pure, said of moral conduct DN ii.80; AN ii.52; AN iii.36, AN iii.572; AN vi.54, AN vi.192 Bdhd 89.
-kārin in a˚; not acting inconsistently AN ii.187; cp ibid. 243. -pāda 1. (a) having speckled feet Ja v.475 (b) (m) one who has speckled feet, i.e. an ogre; also Name of a Yakkha Ja v.503, Ja v.511 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1909, 236 sq.).
Vedic kalmāṣa, which may be referred, with kalana, kaluṣa, kalanka and Gr. κελαινός to *qel fr. which also Sk. kāla black-blue, Gr. κηλάς, κηλίς; Lat. cālīgo & callidus
(adj.-n.) 1. (-˚) one who does or looks after; one whose occupation is of such & such a character:; āya˚; revenue-overseer, treasurer Dhp-a i.184 sabba˚; (always with ref. to amacca, the king’s minister one who does everything, the king’s confidant Vism 130; Pv-a 81 ■ On term ādi˚ beginner (e.g. Vism 241 see Cpd. 53, 129 n.2.
2. a merchant, trader, in jalapatha˚; and thalapatha˚; by sea & by land Ja i.121
3. a superintendent, overseer, manager Ja ii.305 (executioner of an order); vi.294; Mvu 30, Mvu 31.
4. one connected with the execution of an ecclesiastical Act Vin ii.5 (cp. p. 22); Bdhd 106.
fr. kamma
(adj.) (-˚) doing, performing, practising Ja vi.105; Sdhp 196, Sdhp 292.
fr. kamma, cp. kammaka
(adj.) (-˚) wishing for, desiring Dhs-a 365 (sādhu˚; v.l. ˚kāma); kamyā, abl. in the desire for, see next.
fr. kām
(-˚) in abl. function (of kamyā f. for kamyāya or kamya adj.?) in the desire for: SN i.143 = Ja iii.361 (expld by kāmatāya); Snp 854, Snp 929. Kamyata (-) & kammata
(Nd) wish, desire, longing for, striving after; with inf. or equivalent kathetu˚ Vv-a 18; muñcitu˚ (+ paṭisankhā) Pts i.60 Pts i.65; Bdhd 123; asotu˚, adaṭṭhu˚ and adassana˚ Vb 372. Esp. in definitions, as of chanda: kattu˚; Vb 208; Bdhd 20; of jappā: puñcikatā sādhu˚; Vb 351 Vb 361 = Dhs 1059; Nd ii.s. v. taṇhāii (: has the better reading mucchañci katā asādhu˚; v.l. pucchañci˚ both Vb and Dhs have sādu in text which should be corrected to asādhu˚; see detail under puñcikatā) of māna; ketu˚; Nd ii.505; Dhs 1116 = Dhs 1233; Vb 350 sq.; Bdhd 24; of lapanā: pāṭu˚ (v.l. cāṭu˚) Vb 246 Vb 352 ■ As abl. (= kamyā) in dassana˚ SN i.193 = Thag 1241; Snp 121 (expl. as icchāya Snp-a 179). Cp. kammaññatā & kamma-sādutā.;
fr. kām
purchase, buying AN iii.226 (+ vi˚).
-(a)kkaya, buying & selling Pv i.56 (see also Kp vii.6 and note). -vikkaya (kraya vikraya) buying selling, trade in ˚paṭivirata DN i.5 = AN ii.209 = AN v.205 Pp 58; DN i.64; SN v.473; Snp 929; Ja v.243; Khus 114; Dhp-a i.78; Pv-a 29 (= Kp-a 212).
fr. kri
to buy; Inf. ketuṃ Ja iii.282; cp. kiṇāti.
krī, perhaps connected with kṛ
a buyer, trader, dealer Mil 334.
fr. krī, cp. BSk. krayika Divy 505
a buyer Ja vi.110.
1. (adj.) (-˚) producing, causing, forming, making, doing, e.g. anta˚ putting an end to; pabhaṃ causing splendour; pāpa˚ doing evil; divā˚ & divasa the day-maker, i.e. the sun; kaṇhabhāva˚ causing a “black” existence (of pāpakamma) Ja iv.9; padasandhi˚ forming a hiatus Pv-a 52; vacana˚, etc. 2. (m) “the maker,” i.e. the hand Mvu 5, Mvu 255–256 30, 67. -atikaraṃ (adv.) doing too much, going too far Ja i.431; -dukkara (a) difficult to do, not easy, hard arduous SN i.7; SN iv.260; AN i.286; AN iv.31, AN iv.135; AN v.202 + durabhisambhavo Snp 429 Snp 701; Ud. 61; (n. nt.) something difficult, a difficult task AN i.286 (cp. iv.31) Ja i.395; Mil 121, dukkara-kārikā “doing of a hard task,” exertion, austerity MN i.93; Nd ii.262b. -sukara easy to do SN i.9; SN ii.181; Dhp 163; Ud 61; na sukaraṃ w. inf. it is not easy to… DN i.250; AN iii.52, AN iii.184 AN iv.334.
-kaṭaka (m. nt.) a hand-wheel, i.e. a pulley by which to draw up a bucket of water Vin ii.122; cp. Vin. Texts iii.112; -ja “born of kamma” in karaja-kāya the body sprung from action, an expression always used in a contemptible manner, therefore = the impure, vile, low body AN v.300; Ja i.5; Vism 287, Vism 404; DN-a i.113, DN-a i.217 DN-a i.221; Dhp-a i.10; Dhp-a iii.420; Dhs-a 403. karaja-rūpa Vism 326. -tala the palm of the hand Mhbv 6, 34 -mara “one who ought to die from the hand (of the enemy),” but who, when captured, was spared and employed as slave; a slave Ja iii.147, Ja iii.361; Ja iv.220; Dhp-a iii.487; -˚ānītā a woman taken in a raid, but subsequently taken to wife; one of the 10 kinds of wives (see itthi) Vin iii.140 (= dhajāhaṭā); -gāhaṃ gaṇhāti to make prisoner Ja i.355; Ja iii.361; -mita “to be measured with (two) hands,” in ˚majjhā, a woman of slender waist Ja v.219; Ja vi.457.
fr. kṛ;
1. Water-pot, drinking-vessel (= pānīya-bhājana Pv-a 251). It is one of the seven requisites of a samaṇa Vin ii.302. It is called dhammakaraka there and at ii. 118, 177. This means “regulation waterpot” as it was provided with a strainer (parissavana to prevent injury to living things. See also Mil 68; Pv iii.224; Pv-a 185.
2. hail (also karakā) Ja iv.167; Mil 308; Mvu xii.9.
-vassa a shower of hail, hail-storm Ja iv.167; Mil 308; Dhp-a i.360.
Etymology unknown. The Sanskrit is also karaka, and the medieval koṣas give as meaning, besides drinking vessel, also a coco-nut shell used as such (with which may be compared Lat. carīna, nutshell, keel of a boat; and Gr. κάρυα, nut.) It is scarcely possible that this could have been the original meaning. The coconut was not cultivated, perhaps not even known, in Kosala at the date of the rise of Pali and Buddhism.
(for kaṭakaṭā, q.v.) (adv.) by way of gnashing or grinding the teeth (cp. Sk. dantān kaṭakaṭāpya) i.e. severely (of biting) Ja iii.203 (passage ought to be read as karakarā nikhāditvā).
the tree Pongamia glabra, used medicinally Vin i.201; Ja vi.518, Ja vi.519.
cp. Sk. karañja, accord. to Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 176 the Dalbergia arborea
1. adj. (f. ī) (-˚) doing, making, causing, producing; as cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ (leading to clear knowledge) SN iv.331; SN v.97; Iti 83; and acakkhu etc. SN v.97; nāthā ˚ā dhammā AN v.23 (cp. v.89) and thera˚ AN ii.22; dubbaṇṇa˚ SN v.217; see also D i.245 MN i.15; SN v.96, SN v.115; AN iv.94; AN v.268; Mil 289. 2. (nt.) (-˚) the making, producing of; the doing, performance of (= kamma), as bali˚ offering of food = bali kamma) Pv-a 81; gabbha˚ Snp 927; pānujja Snp 256. 3. (abs.) (a) the doing up, preparing Ja v.400 Ja vi.270 (of a building: the construction) (b) the doing performance of, as pāṇâtipātassa k˚ and ak˚ (“commission and omission”); Dhp-a i.214; means of action Ja iii.92. (c) ttg. the instrumental case (with or without ˚vacana) Pv-a 33; Vv-a 25, Vv-a 53, Vv-a 162, Vv-a 174. -˚atthe in the sense of, with the meaning of the instrumental case Ja iii.98; Ja v.444; Pv-a 35; Vv-a 304; Dhs-a 48; Kacc 157–4. (-˚) state, condition; in noun-abstract function ˚ttaṃ (cp. kamma I.2) as nānā˚ (= nānattaṃ) difference MN ii.128; SN iv.294; Bdhd 94; kasi˚ ploughing Pv-a 66 kattabba˚ (= kattabbattaṃ) “what is to be done, i.e. duty Pv-a 30; pūjā˚ veneration Pv-a 30. sakkāra reverence, devotion Snp-a 284.
Note: in massu˚ and kamma˚ some grammarians have tried to derive k˚ from a root kṛ; to hurt, cut, torture (see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15), which is however quite unnecessary [see kamma 3 A (b), kataii 1 (b)]. Karaṇa here stands for kamma, as clearly indicated by semantic grounds as well as by Ja vi.270 where it explains kappita-kesa-massu, and Ja v.309 & Dhp-a i.253 where massukamma takes the place of ˚karaṇa, and Ja iii.314, where it is represented by massu-kutti (C.: massukiriya). Cp. also DN-a i.137 a˚ Negative in all meanings of the positive, i.e. the non-performing Ja i.131; Ja v.222; Ne 81; Pv-a 59; Dhs-a 127; non-undertaking (of business) Ja i.229; noncommission MN i.93; abstaining from Dhs 299. Cpd -uttariya (nt.) angry rejoinder, vehement defence Dhp-a i.44.
fr. kṛ; cp. Vedic karaṇa
1. adj. (a) that ought to be, must or should be done, to be done, to be made (= kātabbaṃ karaṇârahaṃ Kp-a 236) Vin i.58; DN i.3, cp. Mil 183; AN v.210; DN-a i.7. Often-˚ in the sense of “doing making,” as yathā kāma˚ SN ii.226; cp. iv.91, 159 “having business” bahu˚ DN ii.76; AN iii.116; SN ii.215 anukampa˚ Pv-a 61:-(b) done, in the sense of undoing i.e. overcome, undone DN ii.76 cp. Dial. ii.81 n
2. (m.) one who has still something left to perform (for the attainment of Arahantship, a sekha Ja iii.23
3. (nt.) (a) what ought to be done, duty, obligation affairs, business DN i.85; DN ii.68, DN ii.74 cp. AN iv.16; MN i.271; SN iii.168; SN iv.281 cp. Vin iii.12; Vin i.139; AN i.58; Snp 143; Snp p.32 (yan te karanīyaṃ taṃ karohi “do what you have to do”) ■ ˚ṃ tīreti to conclude a business Vin. ii.158; Ja v.298. Kataṃ ˚ṃ done is what was to be done, I have done my task, in freq. formula “khīṇā jāti vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ…” to mark the attainment of Arahantship DN i.84; DN ii.68 = DN ii.153; Thig 223; Vin i.14; Snp p.16; DN-a i.226, etc. See Arahant ii.C. There are 3 duties each of a samaṇa, farmer and householder enumerated at AN i.229; AN i.3 of a bhikkhu AN i.230-(b) use, need (with instr.): appamādena k˚ SN iv.125 cetanāya k˚ AN v.2, AN v.312; cp. Mil 5, Mil 78. akaraṇīya 1. (adj.) (a) what ought not to be done, prohibited AN i.58; AN iii.208 = DN-a i.235 ■ (b) incapable of being done (c. gen.) Iti 18 ■ (c) improper, not befitting (c. gen.) Vin i.45 = Vin i.216 = Vin iii.20; Pv-a 64 ■ (d) not to be “done,” i.e. not to be overcome or defeated DN ii.76; AN iv.113 ■ (e) having nothing to do Vin i.154. 2. (nt.) a forbidden matter, prohibition Vin ii.278 sa˚ 1. having business, busy Vin i.155;
2. one who has still something to do (in sense of above 2) DN ii.143 Thag 1045; DN-a i.9.
grd. of karoti
(f.) the fact that something has to be performed, an obligation Vin ii.89, Vin ii.93; sa˚ being left with something to do Mil 140.
abstr. fr. prec.
(m. nt.) 1. a basket or box of wicker-work Mvu 31, Mvu 98; Dāvs v.60; Dhp-a iii.18;
2. the cast skin, slough of a serpent DN i.77 (= DN-a i.222 ahi-kañcuka) cp. Dial. i.88.
cp. Sk. karaṇḍa, ˚ka, ˚ikā. The Dhātumañjūsā expls k. by “bhājanatthe”
a box, basket, casket, as dussa˚ MN i.215 = SN v.71 = AN iv.230 (in simile); SN iii.131 SN v.351 cp. Pp 34; Ja i.96; Ja iii.527; Ja v.473 (here to be changed into koraṇḍaka); DN-a i.222 (vilīva˚); Snp-a 11.
fr. last
a shrub Vism 183 (+ kanavīra).
etym.?
to cut, injure, hurt; in “karato kārayato chindato chedāpayato…” DN i.52 = MN i.516; SN iii.208.
cp. Sk. kṛntati
(˚tī) (f.) a superior kind of bean, the Dolichos catjang Ja vi.536 (= rājamāsa).
the trunk of an elephant; in karabhoru (k˚ + ūru) (a woman) with beautiful thighs Mhbv 29.
see Kara.
(karala) a wisp of grass (tiṇa˚) Dhp-a iii.38; Dhs-a 272.
the Indian cuckoo Ja vi.539.
cp. Sk. kala-kaṇṭha cuckoo, & kalavinka sparrow
same Ja v.204, Ja v.416; Vv 364; Vism 112, Vism 206; Vv-a 166, Vv-a 219.
-bhāṇin speaking like the cuckoo, i.e. with a clear and melodious voice, one of the mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇas DN ii.20 = DN iii.144 = DN iii.173 = MN ii.137, etc.; cp. Dial. ii.17 n and BSk. kalaviṅka-manojña-bhāṣin Sp. Av.Ś i.371 (Index p. 225, where references to Lalitavist. are given).
(˚iya) = prec. Ja vi.538.
1. the oleander, Nerium odorum. Its flower was used especially in garlands worn by delinquents (see kaṇṭha)
2. a kind of grass Ja iv.92. -patta a kind of arrow MN i.429.
cp. Sk. karavīra
(Sk. karhi, when? kar = loc. of pron. st. *quo = Lat. cur why, Goth. hvar, E. where), only in karaha-ci (karhi cid) at some time, generally preceded by kadāci DN i.17; DN ii.139; MN i.177, MN i.454; AN i.179; AN iv.101; Mil 73, Mil 76.
(adj.) “one who has a hand,” an elephant (cp. hatthin) Mvu 24, Mvu 34; Mvu 25, Mvu 68; Dāvs iv.2. In cpds. kari.
-gajjita the cry of the elephant, an elephant’s trumpeting Dāvs v.56; -vara an excellent elephant Mhbv 4, 143 Dāvs iv.2.
fr. kara
(adj.) bound up in filth, full of filth, disgusting; Ep. of the body Thag 1152 Kari here is abbrev. of karīsa2 (see note ad loc.).
= karīsa-paribaddha
(nt.) a square measure of land, being that space on which a karīsa of seed can be sown (Tamil karīsa) see Rhys Davids, Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon, p. 18; Ja i.94, Ja i.212; Ja iv.233, Ja iv.276; Vv-a 64.
(nt.) refuse, filth, excrement dung DN ii.293; Ja i.5; Vism 259, Vism 358 (in detail) Pv-a 87, Pv-a 258; Kp-a 59; mutta˚ urine and faeces AN i.139; Snp 835.
-magga the anus Ja iv.327; -vāca (nt.) a cesspool Ja iii.263 (= gūthakūpa); -vāyin, f. ˚inī diffusing an odour of excrement Pv-a 87.
cp. Sk. karīṣa, to chṛṇatti to vomit, cp. Lat ■ cerda in mūscerda, sūcerda
(f.) pity compassion. Karuṇā is one of the 4 qualities of character significant of a human being who has attained enfranchisement of heart (ceto-vimutti) in the 4 sentiments viz. mettā k.˚ upekhā muditā Freq. found in this formula with ˚sahagatena cetasā. The first two qualities are complementary, and Snp-a 128 (on Snp 73 explains k˚ as “ahita-dukkh-âpanaya-kāmatā,” the desire of removing bane and sorrow (from one’s fellowmen), whilst mettā is expl. as “hita-sukh-ûpanayakāmatā,” the desire of bringing (to one’s fellow-men) that which is welfare and good. Other definitions are “paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadayakampanaṃ karotī ti” Bdhd 21; “sattesu k˚ karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaṃ karuṇā cetovimutti” as expl. of avihiṃsa dhātu Vb 87; paradukkhāsahana-rasā Vism 318. K˚-sahagatena cetasā denotes the exalted state of compassion for all beings (all that is encompassed in the sphere of one’s good influence: see cātuddisa “extending over the 4 i.e. all, directions): DN i.251; DN iii.78, DN iii.50, DN iii.224; SN iv.296 SN iv.322, SN iv.351; SN v.115; AN i.183, AN i.196; AN ii.129, AN ii.184; AN iii.225 AN v.300, AN v.345; Ja ii.129; Nd ii.on Snp 73; Vb 273, Vb 280; Dhs 1258. The def. of karuṇā at Vism 318 runs “paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadaya-kampanaṃ karoti. Frequently referred to as an ideal of contemplation (in conn. w. bhāvanā & jhāna), so in “karuṇaṃ cetovimuttiṃ bhāveti” SN v.119; AN i.38; AN v.360; in k˚ cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulī-katā, etc. DN iii.248; AN iii.291 AN iv.300; in k˚-sahagataṃ saddhindriyaṃ AN i.42; unspecified SN v.131; AN iii.185; Ne 121, Ne 124; Pts i.8 k˚ + mettā Ne 25; k˚ + muditā Bdhd 16 sq., 26 sq. 29; ananta k˚ pañña as Ep. of Buddha Bdhd 1 karuṇaṃ dūrato katvā, without mercy, of the Yamadūtā messengers of Death Sdhp 287; mahā˚; great compassion Pts i.126, Pts i.133; -˚samāpatti a ʻgest,ʼ feat of great compassion: in which Buddha is represented when rising and surveying the world to look for beings to be worthy of his mercy and help DN ii.237; Ps. 1, 126 f Dhp-a i.26, Dhp-a i.367; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 195;
3. As adj. only in cpds. (e.g. ˚vācā merciful speech; neg. akaruṇa merciless Mhbv 85, & ati˚ very merciful Ja iv.142) and as adv. karuṇaṃ pitifully, piteously, mournfully, in k paridevati Ja vi.498, Ja vi.513, Ja vi.551; Cp ix.54; also in abl karuṇā Ja vi.466 ■ See also kāruñña.
-ādhimutta intent upon compassion DN ii.241, DN ii.242 -ānuvattin following the dictates of mercy Dāvs iii.46 -guṇaja originating in the quality of compassion Sdhp 570; -jala water of c., shower of mercy Mil 22; Mhbv 16; -jhāna meditation on pity, ecstasy of c. DN ii.237
39 -ṭṭhāniya worthy of c. Pv-a 72; -para one who is highest in compassion, compassionate Sdhp 112, Sdhp 345; -bala the power of c. Mvu 15, Mvu 61, Mvu 130; Sdhp 577; -brahmavihāra divine state of pity Vism 319. -bhāvanā consideration or cultivation of pity Vism 314 sq. -rasa the sweetness of c. Mhbv 16; -vihāra (a heart) in the state of c. Vism 324 (& adj. ˚vihārin); DN-a i.33; -sāgara an ocean of mercy Mhbv 7; -sītala “cool with c.” + hadaya whose heart is tempered with mercy Sdhp 33; DN-a i.1.
cp. Vedic karuṇa nt. (holy) action; Sk. karuṇā, fr. kṛ. As adj. karuṇa see under 3.
to feel pity for, to have compassion on Snp 1065 (˚āyamāna; expl. by Nd ii.as anuddayamāno anurakkh anuggaṇh˚ anukamp˚); Vb 273; Vism 314. Der. ˚āyanā compassionateness Vb 87 = Vb 273 (and ˚āyitattaṃ ibid.).
v. den. fr. karuṇā; cp. BSk. karuṇāyati Divy 105
a species of rice-plant of a ruddy colour Mil 252 (see Mil. trsl. ii.73).
(pl.) a class of Devas DN ii.260.
elephant, in cpd. -lolita resounding with the noise made by elephants, of a forest Thig 373.
metathesis for kaṇeru, q.v., cp. Sk. kareṇu
(f.) [fr. kareṇu) a female elephant Ja ii.343; Dhp-a i.196 (v.l. for kaṇeru).
in Childers the tree Capparis trifoliata, but see Brethren, p. 363, n. 2: musk-rose tree or “karer” Thag 1062; Ud 31; Ja v.405; Ja vi.534.
(f.) 1. a basin, cup, bowl, dish Ja i.243; Ja ii.363; Ja iii.225; Ja iv.67; Ja v.289, Ja v.290.
2. the skull (cp. kaḷopi On the form cp. Dial. i.227 n.) Ja vi.592.
(m.) a class of genii that formed one of the 5 guards of the devas against the asuras Ja i.204, associated with the nāgas (cp. Divy 218; and Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 22). As Name of Supaṇṇas (a kind of Garuḍas expld as “tesaṃ karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaṃ” by C on Ja i.204. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares BSk. karoṭapāṇayah a class of Yakṣas Mvu i.30.
1. a bowl, basin Ja iv.68; Dhp-a ii.131 (sappi˚).
2. the skull Ja vi.592; where it may be a helmet in the form of a skull.
fr. karoṭi1)
= karoṭika 2, Ja vi.593.
v. irreg.. Of the endless variety of forms given by grammarians only the foll. are bona fide and borne out by passages from our texts (when bracketed found in gram. works only): I. Act. 1. Ind. Pres karomi, etc. Snp 78, Snp 216, Snp 512, Snp 666 = Dhp 306 = Iti 42 Opt. kare Dhp 42, Dhp 43, pl. (kareyyāma) kareyyātha Snp p.101; or (sing.) kareyya (freq.), kareyyāsi Pv-a 11 kareyya Snp 920, Snp 923; kuriyā (= Sk. kuryāt) Ja vi.206 Ppr. karan Dhp 136, or karonto (f. karontī) Dhp 16, Dhp 116–2. Impf. (akara, etc.).
3. Aor. (akaṃ) akariṃ etc., 3rd sing. akāsi Snp 343, Snp 537, Snp 2nd pl. akattha Pv i.112; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 75; Pv-a 3rd pl. akariṃsu; akaṃsu Snp 882; Pv-a 74; without augment kari Dhp-a ii.59. Prohibitive mā(a)kāsi Snp 339, Snp 1068, etc.
4. Imper. karohi Snp p.32; Snp p.1062; karotha Snp 223; Kp-a 168.
5. Fut karissāmi, etc.; kassāmi Pv iv.139; kāsaṃ Ja iv.286 Ja vi.36; kāhāmi (in sense of I will do, I am determined to do, usually w. puññaṃ & kusalaṃ poetical only) Pv ii.113; Vv 33192; 2nd sing. kāhasi Snp 427, Snp 428; Dhp 154 Dhp 1st pl. kāhāma Pv iv.1011.
6. Inf. kātuṃ Pv-a 4, Pv-a 61 Pv-a 69, Pv-a 115, Kp vi.10, etc.; kattuṃ Vv-a 13; kātave Mvu 35, Mvu 29; Vv 4415 (= kātuṃ); kātuye Thig 418.
7. Pp kata, see sep.
8. Ger. katvā Snp 127, Snp 661, Snp 705, etc. katvāna (poet.) Snp 89, Snp 269, Pv i.13; karitvā see iv. II. Med. 1. Ind. pres. (kubbe, etc.) 3rd sing. kubbati Snp 168, Snp 811; Snp 3rd pl. kubbanti Snp 794; or 3rd sing kurute Snp 94, Snp 796, Snp 819; It. 67; Opt. (kubbe, etc.) 2nd pl. kubbetha Snp 702, Snp 719, Snp 917; Iti 87; or 3rd sing kayirā Snp 728 = Snp 1051; SN i.24; Dhp 53, Dhp 117; kayirātha (always expl. by kareyya) Dhp 25, Dhp 117; Iti 13; Pv i.1111 Kp-a 224; kubbaye Snp 943 ■ Ppr. (kurumāna, kubbāno karāno) (a)kubbaṃ Snp 844, Snp 913; (a)kubbanto Iti 86; f. (vi)kubbantī Vv 112; (a)kubbamāna Snp 777 Snp 778, Snp 897; (vi)kubbamāna Vv 331.
2. Impf. (akariṃ 2nd sing. akarase, etc.) 3rd sing. akubbatha Pv ii.1318 1st pl. akaramhase Ja iii.26, ˚a Dhp-a i.145.
3. Aor (none)
4. Imper. (2nd sing. kurussu, 3rd sing. kurutaṃ 2nd pl. kuruvho) 3rd sing. kurutaṃ (= Sk. kurutāṃ Ja vi.288.
5. Fut. (none). III. Pass. 1. Ind. pres (karīyati, etc.) kayirati Dhp 292 = Thag 635; Kp-a 168 and kīrati Thag 143. Ppr. (karīyamāna, kayīra˚). 2. Fut. kariyissati Vin i.107.
3. Grd. karaṇīya (q.v.), (kayya) kātabba Dhp-a i.338. IV. Caus. I (Denom. to kāra) kārayati = kāreti, in origin. meaning of build, construct, and fig. perform, exercise, rule wield (rajjaṃ): kārehi Pv-a 81 (of huts), kārayissāmi Pv ii.64 (of doll); kāressaṃ Ja v.297 (do.), akārayi Pv ii.1310; akārayuṃ Mvu iv.3; akāresi Mvu 23, Mvu 85 kāretuṃ Pv-a 74; kārayamāna Vv-a 9 (of chair); kāretvā (nāmaṃ) Pv-a 162; karitvā Snp 444 (vasiṃ) 674; 680 (vittiṃ); p. 97 (uttarāsangaṃ). V. Caus. II. Kārāpeti SN i.179; Pv-a 20; Aor. kārāpesi he had (= caused to be) erected, constructed Vin ii.159; fut. kārāpessāmi Mvu 20, Mvu 9; ger. kārāpetvā Pv-a 123; grd. kārapetabba Vin ii.134.
Meanings of karoti: 1. to build, erect Mvu 19, Mvu 36 Mvu 20, Mvu 9 (Caus.).
2. to act, perform, make, do Vin i.155; Ja i.24; Ja ii.153 (tathā karomi yathā na… I prevent cp. Lat. facio ne… ); iii.297; Pv i.88 = ii.619; Mvu 3, Mvu 1; Mvu 7, Mvu 22;
3. to produce Dhp-a i.172;
4. to write compose Ja vi.410; Pv-a 287;
5. to put on, dress Vin ii.277; Ja i.9;
6. to impose (a punishment Mvu 4, Mvu 14;
7. to turn into (with loc. or two acc. Ja ii.32; Mvu 9, Mvu 27;
8. to use as (with two acc. Ja i.113; Ja ii.24;
9. to bring into (with loc.) Ja v.454 Ja v.10. to place (with loc.) Ja v.274; (with acc. of the person Dhp 162. It is very often used periphrastically, where the trsln would simply employ the noun as verb, e.g. kathaṃ k˚ DN ii.98; kodhaṃ k˚ and kopaṃ k˚ to be angry Ja iv.22; Ja vi.257; cayaṃ k˚ to hoard up; corikaṃ k˚ to steal Vin i.75; taṇhaṃ k˚ (c. loc.) to desire Ja i.5 sītaṃ k˚ to cool DN ii.129 ■ It is often compd with nouns or adjectives with a change of final vowel to ī (i) uttāni˚ to make clear DN ii.105; pākaṭī˚, bahulī˚ muṭṭhī˚, etc. (q.v.). Cp. the same process in conn with bhavati ■ The meanings of karoti are varied according to the word with which it is connected; it would be impossible and unnecessary to give an exhaustive list of all its various shades. Only a few illustrations may suffice: aṃse k˚ to place on one’s shoulder Ja i.9; antarāyaṃ k˚ to prevent Ja i.232; ādiṃ k˚ (c. acc.) to begin with; nimittaṃ k˚ to give a hint DN ii.103; pātarāsaṃ k˚ to breakfast; mānasaṃ k˚ to make up one’s mind; mahaṃ k˚ to hold a festival DN ii.165; massuṃ k˚ to trim the beard Dhp-a i.253; musāvādaṃ k˚ to tell a lie Ja vi.401; rajjaṃ k˚ to reign SN i.218 vase k˚ to bring into one’s power Ja i.79; sandhiṃ k˚ to make an agreement Mvu 16; sinehaṃ k˚ to become fond of Ja i.190 ■ Similarly, cpd with adverbs: alaṃ k˚ to make much of, i.e. to adorn, embellish; dūrato k˚ to keep at a distance, i.e. keep free from Pv-a 17 Sdhp 287; purak k˚ (purakkharoti) to place before, i.e. to honour Pv iii.71 ■ Note phrase kiṃ karissati what difference does it make? (Cp. Ger. was macht’s) DN i.120 or what about… Ja i.152.
Sk. karoti, *qṷer to form, to build (or plait, weave? see kamma), cp. kar-man, Lith. kùrti to build, O.Tr. cruth form; Lat. corpus, with p-addition as Sk. kṛpa, kḷp = kṛp. Derived are kalpa → kappa kalpate → kappeti
(adj.) any indistinct and confused noise Mhbv 23 (of the tramping of an army); in -mukhara sounding confusedly (of the ocean) ibid. 18. Cp karakarā.
cp. Sk. kala
to utter an (indistinct) sound: pp. kalita Thag 22.
kal, kālayati
heap, stack (like a heap of wood? cp. kalingara) Mil 292 (sīsa˚).
cp. Sk. karaṇḍa piece of wood?
1. a squirrel Mil 368;
2. an (ornamental) cloth or mat, spread as a seat Ja vi.224; -nivāpa Name of a locality in Veḷuvana, near Rājagaha, where oblations had been made to squirrels DN ii.116; Vin i.137; Vin ii.105 Vin ii.290, etc.
the young of an elephant: see hatthi˚; and cp. kalāra.
cp. Sk. kalabha
(nt.) Name of a certain herb or plant (Convolv. repens?); may be a bulb or radish Ja iv.46 (= tālakanda), cp. p. 371, 373 (where C expls by tāla-kanda; gloss BB however gives latā-tanta); vi.578 See also kaḍamba & kaḷimba;.
-rukkha the Cadamba tree Ja vi.290.
cp. Sk. kalamba menispermum calumba, kalambī convolvulus repens
= kalamba, the C. tree Ja vi.535.
(f.) = kalambaka DN iii.87 (vv.ll. kaladukā, kalabakā) the trsln (Dial. iii.84) has “bamboo.”
(m. nt.) 1. mud Ja i.12, Ja i.73; Mil 125, Mil 324, Mil 346; Mhbv 150; Pv-a 215 (= kaddama); Dhp-a iii.61; Dhp-a iv.25- su˚; “well-muddied” i.e. having soft soil (of a field Mil 255.
2. the residue of sesamum oil (tela˚), used for embalming Ja ii.155.
3. in Embryology: the “soil,” the placenta SN i.206 = Kvu ii.494; Mil 125 Also the first stage in the formation of the foetus (of which the first 4 during the first month are k., abbuda pesi, ghana, after which the stages are counted by months 1
5 & 10; see Vism 236; Nd i.120; & cp. Mil 40).
4. the foetus, appl. to an egg, i.e. the yolk Mil 49 ■ In cpds with kar & bhū the form is kalalī˚.;
-gata (a) fallen into the mud Mil 325; -gahaṇa “mud thicket,” dense mud at the bottom of rivers or lakes Ja i.329; -kata made muddy, disturbed Vv 8431 (Vv-a 343); -bhūta = prec., AN i.9, cp. Ja ii.100; AN iii.233; Mil 35; -makkhita soiled with mud Dhp-a iii.61.
(nt.) 1. a pot, waterpot, dish, jar MN iii.141; Ja iv.384; Dāvs iv.49; Pv-a 162.
2. the female breasts (likened to a jar) Mhbv 2, 22.
cp. Vedic kalaśa
quarrel, dispute, fight AN i.170; AN iv.196, AN iv.401; Snp 862, Snp 863 (+ vivāda); Ja i.483 Nd ii.427; Dhp-a iii.256 (udaka˚ about the water) iv.219; Sdhp 135. ˚ṃ udīreti to quarrel Ja v.395 karoti id. Ja i.191, Ja i.404; Pv-a 13; vaḍḍheti to increase the tumult, noise Ja v.412; Dhp-a iii.255 ■ a˚; harmony accord, agreement SN i.224; mahā˚ a serious quarrel, a row Ja iv.88.
-ābhirata delighting in quarrels, quarrelsome Snp 276 Thag 958. -ṅkara picking up a quarrel Ja vi.45 -karaṇa quarrelling, fighting Ja v.413; -kāraka (f ■ ī quarrelsome, pugnacious AN iv.196; Vin i.328; Vin ii.1 -kāraṇa the cause or reason of a dispute Ja iii.151 Ja vi.336; -jāta “to whom a quarrel has arisen,” quarrelling disputing AN i.70; Vin i.341; Vin ii.86, Vin ii.261; Ud 67; Ja iii.149; -pavaḍḍhanī growth or increase of quarrels prolongation of strife (under 6 evils arising from intemperance) DN iii.182 = Dhs-a 380; -vaḍḍhana (nt. inciting & incitement to quarrel Ja v.393, Ja v.394; -sadda brawl, dispute Ja vi.336.
cp. Sk. kalaha, fr. kal
1. a small fraction of a whole generally the 16th part; the 16th part of the moon’s disk; often the 16th part again subdivided into 16 parts and so on: one infinitesimal part (see Vv-a 103; Dhp-a ii.63), in this sense in the expression kalaṃ nâgghati soḷasiṃ “not worth an infinitesimal portion of” = very much inferior to SN i.19; SN iii.156 = SN v.44 = Iti 20; AN i.166 AN i.213; AN iv.252; Ud 11; Dhp 70; Vv 437; Dhp-a ii.63 (= koṭṭhāsa) Dhp-a iv.74.
2. an art, a trick (lit. part, turn Ja i.163 ■ kalaṃ upeti to be divided or separated Mil 106; Dhp-a i.119; see sakala ■ In cpd. with bhū as kalī -bhavati to be divided, broken up Ja i.467 (= bhijjati). Cp. vikala.
Vedic kalā *squel, to Lat scalpo, Gr. σκάλλω, Ohg scolla, scilling, scala. The Dhtp. (no 613) expls kala by “sankhyāne.”
1. anything that comprises a number of things of the same kind; a bundle, bunch sheaf; a row, multitude; usually of grass, bamboo-or sugar-canes, sometimes of hair and feathers SN iv.290 (tiṇa˚); Ja i.158 (do.); 25 (naḷa˚), 51 (mālā˚), 100 (uppalakumuda˚); v.39 (usīra˚); Mil 33; Pv-a 257, Pv-a 260 (ucchu˚) 272 (veḷu˚); 46 (kesā), 142 (mora-piñja˚)
2. a quiver Vin ii.192; Iti 68; Ja vi.236; Mil 418; Pv-a 154, Pv-a 169
3. in philosophy: a group of qualities, pertaining to the material body (cp. rūpa˚) Vism 364 (dasadhamma˚ 626 (phassa-pañcamakā dhammā); Bdhd 77 (rūpa˚ 78, 120.
-agga (nt.) “the first (of the) bunch,” the first (sheaves) of a crop, given away as alms Dhp-a i.98 -sammasanā grasping (characteristics) by groups Vism 287, Vism 606, Vism 626 sq.
cp. Sk. kalāpa
1. a band, string (of pearls) Vin ii.315; Mvu 30, Mvu 67.
2. a bundle, group Ja i.239.
(adj.) having a quiver Ja vi.49 (acc. pl. ˚ine). f. kalāpinī a bundle, sheaf (yava˚) SN iv.201 SN ii.114 (naḷa˚).
fr. kalāpa
(nt.) a girdle, made of several strings or bands plaited together Vin ii.136, Vin ii.144, Vin ii.319;
cp. Sk. kalāpaka
a kind of pea, the chick-pea MN i.245 (kaḷāya); SN i.150; AN v.170; Snp p.124; Ja ii.75 (= varaka, the bean Phaseolus trilobus, and kālarāja-māsa); Ja iii.370; Dhp-a i.319. Its size may be gathered from its relation to other fruits in ascending scale at AN v.170 = SN i.150 Snp p.124 (where the size of an ever-increasing boil is described). It is larger than a kidney bean (mugga and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolaṭṭhi).
-matta of the size of a chick-pea SN i.150; AN v.170 Snp p.124 (ḷ); Ja iii.370; Dhp-a i.319.
to have a measure, to outstrip Ja i.163 (taken here as “trick, deceive”).
Denom. fr. kalā
in hatthi˚ at Ud 41, expld in C by potaka, but cp. the same passage at Dhp-a i.58 which reads kalabha undoubtedly better. Cp. kaḷārikā.
(m.) 1. the unlucky die (see akkha); “the dice were seeds of a tree called the vibhītaka… An extra seed was called the kali” (Dial. ii.368 n. DN ii.349; Ja i.380; Dhp 252 (= Dhp-a iii.375) at Ja vi.228 Ja vi.282, Ja vi.357 it is opposed to kaṭa, q.v.
2. (= kaliggaha an unlucky throw at dice, bad luck, symbolically as a piece of bad luck in a general worldly sense or bad quality demerit, sin (in moral sense) kaliṃ vicināti “gathers up demerit” Snp 658; appamatto kali… akkhesu dhanaparājayo… mahantataro kali yo sugatesu manam padosaye SN i.149 = AN ii.3 = AN v.171, AN v.174 = Snp 659 = Ne 132; cp. MN iii.170; AN v.324; Dhp 202 (= Dhp-a iii.261 aparādha).
3. the last of the 4 ages of the world (see ˚yuga).
4. sinful, a sinner Snp 664 (= pāpaka). 5. saliva, spittle, froth (cp. kheḷa) Thig 458, Thig 501; Ja v.134.
-(g)gaha the unlucky throw at dice, the losing throw symbolically bad luck, evil consequence in worldly moral sense (ubhayattha k˚ faring badly in both worlds MN i.403 = MN i.406; MN iii.170 (in simile). See kaṭaggaha -devatā (m. pl.) the devotees of kali, the followers of the goddess kali Mil 191 (see Mil trsl. i.266 n.) -(p)piya one who is fond of cheating at dice, a gambler Pgdp 68; -yuga (nt.) one of the 4 (or 8) ages of the world, the age of vice, misery and bad luck; it is the age in which we are Sāsv 4, 44, Vinl 281; -sāsana (nt. in ˚ṃ āropeti to find fault with others Vin iv.93, Vin iv.360.
cp. Sk. kali
(m. nt.) (BB ḷ) 1. a log, a piece of wood MN i.449, MN i.451; SN ii.268; Dhp-a iii.315; often in sense of something useless, or a trifle (combd with kaṭṭha q.v.) Dhp 41; Dhp-a i.321 (= kaṭṭhakhaṇḍa, a chip) Thig 468 (id.) as kaṭṭhakalingarāni Dhp-a ii.142.
2. a plank, viz. a step in a staircase, in sopāna˚ Vin ii.128, cp. sopāna-kaḷevara.
-ūpadhāna a wooden block used for putting one’s head on when sleeping SN ii.267; Mil 366; -kaṇḍa a wooden arrow Ja iii.273 (acittaṃ k˚: without feeling)
cp. Sk. kaḍankara & kaḍangara, on which in sense of “log” see Kern, Toev. s. v. kalingara
(m. nt.) the Laurus camphora, the Indian laurel Ja vi.537.
cp. Sk. kalinga & kalingaka
sounding indistinctly Thag 22.
pp. of kalati
muddy, dirty, impure; in ˚bhāva the state of being turbid, impure, obscured (of the mind) DN-a i.275.
cp. Sk. kaluṣa
see kaḷebara.
see kalla;
(f.) 1. the state of being sound, able, pliant Ja ii.12.
2. pleasantness, agreeableness, readiness, in a˚; opp. (appld to citta) Dhs 1156; Dhs-a 377 (= gilānabhāva).
(& kallāṇa) 1. (adj.) beautiful, charming; auspicious, helpful, morally good. Syn bhaddaka Pv-a 9, Pv-a 116) and kusala (S ii.118; Pv-a 9 Pv-a 122); opp. pāpa (SN i.83; MN i.43; Pv-a 101, Pv-a 116 and under ˚mitta). kata˚ = katûpakāra Pv-a 116 Appld to dhamma in phrase ādi˚ majjhe˚ pariyosāne˚ DN i.62 and ≈; SN v.152; Snp p.103; Vv-a 87; Vism 213 sq. (in var. applications); etc ■ As m. one who observes the sīlapadaṃ (opp. pāpa, who violates it) AN ii.222, cp k˚-mittā = sīlâdīhi adhikā Snp-a 341 ■ SN iv.303; SN v.2 SN v.29, SN v.78; AN iii.77; AN iv.361; Vin ii.8, Vin ii.95; Ja i.4; Mil 297-kata˚ (opp. kata-pāpa) of good, virtuous character, in phrase k˚ katakusala, etc. Iti 25, etc. (see kata ii.1 a) k˚ of kitti (-sadda) DN i.49 (= DN-a i.146 seṭṭha); SN iv.374 SN v.352; of jhāna (tividha˚) Bdhd 96, 98, 99; of mittā friends in general (see also cpd.) Dhp 78 (na bhaje pāpake mitte… bhajetha m˚ kalyāṇe), 116, 375 (= suddhâjīvin); Snp 338.
2. (nt.) (a) a good or useful thing good things Vin i.117; AN iii.109; cp. bhadraṃ. (b) goodness, virtue, merit, meritorious action Ja v.49 (kalyāṇā here nt. nom. in sense of pl.; cp. Vedic nt.) 492 ■ ˚ṃ karoti to perform good deeds SN i.72; AN i.138 sq.; Vin i.73; Pv-a 122 ■ (c) kindness, good service Ja i.378; Ja iii.12 (= upakāra), 68 (˚ṃ karoti). (d) beauty, attraction, perfection; enumd as 5 kalyāṇāni viz. kesa˚, maṃsa˚, aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚ i.e. beauty of hair, flesh, teeth, skin, youth Ja i.394; Dhp-a i.387.
-ajjhāsaya the wish or intention to do good Dhp-a i.9;- -ādhimuttika disposed towards virtue, bent on goodness SN ii.154, SN ii.158; Iti 70, Iti 78; Vb 341; -kāma desiring what is good AN iii.109; -kārin (a) doing good virtuous (opp. pāpa˚) SN i.227, cp. Ja ii.202 = Ja iii.158; Dhs-a 390; (m.) who has rendered a service Ja vi.182 -carita walking in goodness, practising virtue Vb 341 -jātika one whose nature is pleasantness, agreeable Ja iii.82; -dassana looking nice, lovely, handsome Snp 551 = Thag 821 (+ kañcanasannibhattaca); -dhamma (1) of virtuous character, of good conduct, virtuous Vin i.73; Vin iii.133; SN v.352; Pp 26; Iti 96; Pv iv.135 Mil 129; Dhp-a i.380; Ja ii.65 (= sundara˚), Pv-a 230 (= sundara-sīla); sīlavā + k˚ (of bhikkhu, etc.) MN i.334; SN iv.303; Pv-a 13 ■ k˚ena k˚atara perfectly good or virtuous AN ii.224 ■ (2) the Good Doctrine Dhp-a i.7 -˚tā the state of having a virtuous character AN ii.36 -pañña “wise in goodness” possessed of true wisdom Thag 506; Iti 97; -paṭipadā the path of goodness or virtue, consisting of dāna, uposathakamma & dasakusalakammapathā Ja iii.342; -paṭibhāṇa of happy retort, of good reply AN iii.58, cp. Mil 3; -pāpaka good and bad Ja v.238; Ja vi.225; Kv 45; (nt.) goodness and evil Ja v.493; -pīti one who delights in what is good Snp 969; -bhattika having good, nice food Vin ii.77 Vin iii.160 (of a householder); -mitta 1. a good companion a virtuous friend, an honest, pure friend; at Pp 24 he is said to “have faith, be virtuous, learned, liberal and wise”; MN i.43 (opp. pāpa˚); SN i.83, SN i.87 (do.); AN iv.30 AN iv.357; Pp 37, Pp 41; Ja iii.197; Bdhd 90; a˚; not a virtuous friend Dhs-a 247.
2. as t.t. a spiritual guide, spiritual adviser. The Buddha is the spiritual friend par excellence but any other Arahant can act as such SN v.3 Vism 89, Vism 98, Vism 121; cp. kammaṭṭhāna-dāyaka. -mittatā friendship with the good and virtuous, association with the virtuous SN i.87; such friendship is of immense help for the attainment of the Path and Perfection SN v.3 SN v.32; it is the sign that the bhikkhu will realize the 7 bojjhangas SN v.78 = SN v.101; AN i.16, AN i.83, it is one of the 7 things conducive to the welfare of a bhikkhu DN iii.212; AN iv.29, AN iv.282; Thig 213; Iti 10; Dhs 1328 = Pp 24 Vism 107 ■ a˚; not having a virtuous friend and good adviser Dhs-a 247. -rūpa beautiful, handsome Ja iii.82 Ja v.204; -vākkaraṇa, usually comb. with ˚vāca, of pleasant conversation, of good address or enunciation, reciting clearly DN i.93, DN i.115; AN ii.97; AN iii.114, AN iii.263; AN iv.279; Vin ii.139; Mil 21; DN-a i.263 (= madhura-vacana); a˚ not pronouncing or reciting clearly DN i.94. 122; -˚tā the fact of being of good and pleasing address AN i.38 -vāca, usually in form. k˚ k˚-vākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato DN i.114; AN ii.97; AN iii.114, AN iii.195, AN iii.263 AN iv.279; Vin ii.139; DN-a i.282; -sadda a lucky word or speech Ja ii.64; -sampavaṅka a good companion AN iv.357 (in phrase k˚-mitta k˚-sahāya k˚- s˚); Pp 37 -˚tā companionship with a virtuous friend SN i.87 -sahāya a good, virtuous companion AN iv.284; AN iv.357 Pp 37; cp. prec., -˚tā = prec. SN i.87; -sīla practising virtue, of good conduct, virtuous Thag 1008; Iti 96.
Vedic kalyāṇa
(adj.) good, virtuous DN-a i.226; Dhs-a 32.
fr. last
(f.) beauty, goodness, virtuousness Vism 4 (ādi); k˚ -kusala clever, experienced in what is good Ne 20.
abstr. fr. kalyāṇa
(adj.) (a) beautiful, handsome Vv iv.5 ■ (b) auspicious, lucky, good, proper Ja v.124; Ud 59 ■ (c) f. [cp. -ī Vedic kalyāṇī] a beautiful woman a belle, usually in janapada˚ DN i.193 = MN ii.40; SN ii.234; Ja i.394; Ja v.154.
fr. kalyāṇa
(adj.) 1. well, healthy, sound Vin i.291.
2. clever, able, dexterous Mil 48 Mil 87.
3. ready, prepared Ja ii.12, cp ■ citta.
4. fit proper, right SN ii.13 (pañha) ■ nt. kallaṃ it is proper befitting (with inf. or inf ■ substitute): vacanāya proper to say DN i.168, DN i.169; AN i.144; abhinandituṃ DN ii.69-kallaṃ nu [kho] is it proper? MN iii.19; SN iv.346; Mil 25 ■ a˚; 1. not well, unfit Thig 439, cp. Thag-a 270. 2. unbecoming, unbefitting DN ii.68; Ja v.394.
-kāya sound (in body), refreshed Vin i.291; -kusala of sound skill (cp. kallita) SN iii.265; -citta of ready, amenable mind, in form. k˚, mudu-citta, vinīvaraṇa˚, udagga˚ etc. DN i.110 = DN i.148 = DN ii.41 = AN iv.209 = Vin i.16 = Vin ii.156; Vv-a 53, Vv-a 286; Vv 5019 (= kammaniya-citta “her mind was prepared for, responsive to the teaching of the dhamma”); Pv-a 38. -cittatā the preparedness of the mind (to receive the truth) Ja ii.12 (cp citta-kalyatā) -rūpa 1. of beautiful appearance Thag 212,
2. pleased joyful (kalya˚) Snp 680, Snp 683, Snp 691; -sarīra having a sound body, healthy Ja ii.51; a˚-tā not being sound in body ill-health Vv-a 243.
cp. Sk. kalya
(m. nt.) ashes Ja iii.94 (for kalala), also in ˚-vassa a shower of ashes Ja iv.389.
(adj.) in a˚; unwell, indisposed Vin iii.62; Ja iii.464; Dhs-a 377.
fr. last
(f.) see kalyatā; -a˚; unreadiness, unpreparedness, indisposition (of citta), in expln of thīna Nd ii.290; Dhs 1156 = Dhs 1236 = Ne 86; Dhs-a 378; Ne 26. The reading in Nd ii.is akalyāṇatā, in Dhs akalyatā; follows akammaññatā.
the white esculent water lily Ja v.37; Dpvs xvi.19.
cp. Sk. kahlāra, the P. form to be expld as a diaeretic inversion kalhāra → kallahāra
(nt.) pleasantness, agreeableness SN iii.270, SN iii.273 (samādhismiṃ-˚kusala); AN iii.311; AN iv.34 (id.).
fr. kalla
a billow, in -˚mālā a series of billows Dāvs iv.44.
cp. Sk. kallola
= kalāya.
(adj.) always referring to teeth: with long, protruding teeth, of Petas (cp. attr. of the dog of the “Underworld” Pv-a 152: tikhiṇâyatakaṭhina-dāṭho and the figure of the witch in fairy-tales) Ja v.91 (= nikkhantadanto); vi.548 (= sūkara-dāṭhehi samannāgato p. 549); Pv ii.41 (= k˚-danto Pv-a 90).
cp. Sk. karāla projecting (of teeth), whereas kaḍāra means tawny
(f.) a kind of large (female) elephant M 1. 178 (so read with v.l. for kāḷ˚). Cp. kalāra.
fr. last, lit. with protruding teeth
= kalingara. Kalimb(h)aka
(cp. kaḍamba, kalamba) a mark used to keep the interstices between the threads of the kaṭhina even, when being woven Vin ii.116, Vin ii.317 (v.l. kaḷimpaka).
the top sprout of a plant or tree, esp. of the bamboo and cert. palm trees (e.g. coco-nut tree) which is edible Snp 38 (vaṃsa˚ = veḷugumba Nd ii.556 and p. 58) Thag 72; Ja i.74, cp. iii.179; vi.26; Mil 201 (vaṃsa˚) Vism 255 (vaṃsa˚-cakkalaka, so read for kalira˚ Kp-a 50 at id. passage reads kaḷīra-daṇḍa).
-(c)chejja (nt.) “the cutting off of the sprout,” a kind of torture Mil 193, cp. Miln. trsl. i.270 and kadalīccheda.
(: kale˚ and kalevara) (m. & nt.) 1. the body SN i.62 = AN ii.48; = iv.429 = MN i.82; Ja ii.437, Ja iii.96, Ja iii.244; Vism 49, Vism 230.
2. a dead body, corpse, carcass; often in description of death: khandhānaṃ bhedo k˚assa nikkhepo, DN ii.355 MN i.49 = Vb 137; Thig 467; Ja iii.180, Ja iii.511; Ja v.459 Mvu 2010; 3781; Pv-a 80. Cp. kuṇapa.
3. the step in a flight of stairs MN ii.92, cp. kalingara.
cp. BSk. kaḍebara Avs.; ii.26
(= khaḷopi) f. 1. a vessel, basin, pot: see cpds. - 2. a basket, crate (= pacchi Thag-a 219; Ja v.252) MN i.77 MN i.342; SN i.236 = Thig 283 (where osenti is to be corr. to openti); Ja v.252 ■ On the form of the word (= karoṭi? see Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 109 and Davids, Dial. i.227. kaḷopī (as khaḷopī) is expld at Pp A p. 231 as “ukkhalī, pacchi vā.”
-mukha the brim of a pan or cooking vessel DN i.166 = MN i.77 = MN i.342 = AN i.295 = AN ii.206 (kumbhi-m˚ + kaḷopim˚); -hattha with a vessel or basket in his hand AN iv.376.
(nt.) a mail, a coat of mail, armour DN ii.107 = Ud 64 (appld to existence); Thag 614 (of sīla); Ja iv.92, Ja iv.296; Mil 199, Mil 257; Vism 73.
-jālikā a mail-coat Mil 199.
cp. Sk. kavaca
(m. nt.) 1. the (headless) trunk of the body, endowed with the power of motion Vin iii.107; cp. SN ii.260 (asīsaka˚); Mil 292; Dhp-a i.314.
2. a headless dwarf, whose head has been crushed down into his body Ja v.424, Ja v.427 (cp. the story of Dhanu, the Rākṣasa who was punished by having his head and thighs forced into his body, Raghuvaṃsa xii.57).
cp. Sk. kavandha & kabandha
(m. nt.) 1. the panels of the door, the door proper, not the aperture Vin ii.114, Vin ii.120, Vin ii.207, Vin ii.208 (see Vin ii.148 for the description of a door) iv.269, 304 (˚baddha = āvasatha); Ja i.19; Nd ii.2351d; Vism 28 (˚koṇa doorcorner).
2. dvāra˚; a door-post Ja i.63; Ja ii.334; Pv-a 280.
3. a window Mvu ix.17 ■ ˚ṃ paṇāmeti to open the door Vin ii.114, Vin ii.120, Vin ii.207; ˚ṃ ākoṭeti to knock at the door DN i.88 (= DN-a i.252); Vin ii.208 ■ akavāṭaka (adj.) having no doors, doorless Vin ii.148, Vin ii.154 (v.l. for akkavāta Text).
-piṭṭha the panels and posts of a door; the door and the door-posts Vin i.47, Vin i.48 = Vin ii.208, Vin ii.218; -baddha “door-bound,” closed, secure Vin iv.292 (see also above).
= kavāṭa Vin ii.148; DN-a i.62 (nīvaraṇa˚).
a poet SN i.38; SN ii.267; Dāvs i.10; four classes enumd at AN ii.230 & DN-a i.95, viz. 1. cintā˚ an original p. 2. suta˚ one who puts into verse what he Las heard. 3. attha˚ a didactic p. 4. paṭibhāṇa˚ an improvisor
-kata composed by poets SN ii.267; AN i.72.
Vedic kavi
poetry; ballad, ode (cp. kabba) Ja vi.213, Ja vi.216.
-kāra a poet Ja vi.216.
cp. Vedic kavya wise; sacrificer
the elephant-apple tree, Feronia elephantum Ja v.38 (˚vana).
cp. kapittha
see kassaka.
(metathesis of sakaṭa, cp. Trenckner, Mil p.423) 1. (adj.) bad, nasty; bitter, acrid; insipid, disgusting AN i.72; Ja ii.96; Ja ii.159.
2. (m.) (a) fault, vice, defect MN i.281; Pts ii.87 ■ (b) leavings, dregs Vv-a 288 (v.l. sakaṭa) ■ (c) something bitter or nasty Ja ii.96; Ja v.18-(d) bitter juice Ja ii.105 (nimba˚) ■ sa˚; faulty wrong, bitter to eat, unpalatable Mil 119.
-odaka insipid, tasteless water Ja ii.97.
to till, to plough SN i.172, SN i.173 = Snp 80; Th i.531; Ja i.57; Ja ii.165; Ja vi.365 ■ kassate (3rd sing med.) Thag 530 ■ pp. kattha (q.v.) Caus. II. kasāpeti Mil 66, Mil 82; Dhp-a i.224.
kṛṣ or karṣ
(nt.) ploughing, tilling Ja iv.167; Ja vi.328, Ja vi.364; Vism 384 (+ vapana sowing).
anything worthless, rubbish, filth, impurity; fig. low passions SN i.166; Snp 281 = Mil 414 = AN iv.172; Vism 258 (maṃsa˚), 259 (parama˚).
-jāta one whose nature is impurity, in comb. brahmacāripaṭiñño antopūti avassuto k˚ SN iv.181; AN ii.240; AN iv.128, AN iv.201; Vin ii.236; Pp 27, Pp 34, Pp 36; Vism 57 (+ avassuta pāpa). ˚ka -jāta ibid. in vv.ll.
Derivation uncertain
(f.) a whip Vin i.99 (in Uddāna); MN i.87, etc.; Dhp 143; Mil 197 ■ -kasāhi tāḷeti to whip lash, flog as punishment for malefactors here, as well as in Niraya (see kamma-karaṇā) MN i.87 = AN i.47 AN ii.122, etc.; Pv-a 4 (of a thief scourged on his way to the place of execution); Dhp-a ii.39 (id.).
-niviṭṭha touched by the whip, whipped Dhp 144 (= Dhp-a iii.86); -pahāra a stroke with the whip, a lash Ja iii.178; -hata struck with the whip, scourged Vin i.75; Vin i.91 = Vin i.322; Sdhp 147.
Vedic kaśā
and Kasāva 1. a kind of paste or gum used in colouring walls Vin ii.151.
2. an astringent decoction extracted from plants Vin i.201, Vin i.277; Ja v.198.
3. (of taste), astringent DhS 629; Mil 65; Dhp-a ii.31. 4. (of colour) reddish-yellow, orange coloured Vin i.277
5. (ethical) the fundamental faults (rāga, dosa moha) AN i.112; Dhp 10; Vb 368. -a˚; faultless, flawless in akasāvattaṃ being without defect AN i.112 (of a wheel with -sa˚; ibid.); -sa˚; faulty Dhp-a i.82; -mahā˚; wicked Ja iv.387. In cpds. both forms, viz. (kasāya)-yoga an astringent remedy Ja v.198 (kasāva˚ ibid.); -rasa reddishyellow dye Ja ii.198; (kasāva)-odaka an astringent decoction Vin i.205; -gandha having a pungent smell Vin i.277; -rasa having an astringent taste ibid. -vaṇṇa of reddish-yellow colour ibid.
Derivation uncertain. The word first appears in the late Vedic form kaṣāya, a decoction distillation, essence; used figy of evil. The old Pali form is kasāva
(nt.) astringency Mil 56.
abstr. fr. kasāya
and Kasī (f.) tilling, ploughing; agriculture, cultivation MN ii.198; SN i.172, SN i.173 = Snp 76 sq. Vin iv.6; Pv i.56 (k˚, gorakkha, vaṇijjā); Pv-a 7 Sdhp 390 (k˚, vaṇijjā); Vv-a 63 ■ ˚ṃ kasati to plough to till the land Ja i.277; Vism 284.
-kamma the act or occupation of ploughing, agriculture Ja ii.165, Ja ii.300; Ja iii.270. -karaṇa ploughing, tilling of the field Pv-a 66; -khetta a place for cultivation, a field Pv-a 8 (kasī˚); -gorakkha agriculture and cattle breeding DN i.135; -bhaṇḍa ploughing implements Dhp-a i.307.
fr. kasāti
(adj.) entire, whole Ja iv.111, Ja iv.112.
Vedic kṛtsna
(nt.) one of the aids to kammaṭṭhāna the practice by means of which mystic meditation (bhāvanā, jhāna) may be attained. They are fully described at AN v.46 sq., 60; usually enumerated as ten [sāvakā dasa k˚-āyatanāni bhāventi] paṭhavī˚, āpo˚, tejo˚, vāyo˚, nīla˚, pīta˚, lohita˚ odāta˚, ākāsa˚, viññāṇa˚-that is, earth, water, fire air; blue, yellow, red, white; space, intellection (or perhaps consciousness) MN ii.14; DN iii.268, DN iii.290; Ne 89 Ne 112; Dhs 202; Pts i.6, Pts i.95; cp. Manual 49–52; Bdhd 4 90 sq., 95 sq ■ For the last two (ākāsa˚ and viññāṇa˚ we find in later sources āloka˚ and (paricchinn’) ākāsa Vism 110; cp. Dhs trsl. 43 n. 4, 57 n. 2; Cpd. 54, 202-Eight (the above omitting the last two) are given at Pts i.49, Pts i.143, Pts i.149 ■ See further Ja i.313; Ja iii.519; Dhs-a 186 sq. There are 14 manners of practising the kasiṇas (of which the first nine are: k˚-ânulomaṃ k˚-paṭilomaṃ; k˚-ânupaṭilomaṃ; jhānânulomaṃ; jh˚paṭi˚; jh˚-ânupaṭi˚; jh˚-ukkantikaṃ; k˚ ukk˚; jh˚k˚-ukk˚) Vism 374; cp. Bdhd 5, 101 sq., 104, 152. Nine qualities or properties of (paṭhavi-) kasiṇa are enumd at Vism 117 ■ Each k. is fivefold, according to uddhaṃ, adho, tiriyaṃ, advayaṃ, appamāṇaṃ; MN ii.15 etc ■ kasiṇaṃ oloketi to fix one’s gaze on the particular kasiṇa chosen Ja v.314; ˚ṃ samannāharati to concentrate one’s mind on the k. Ja iii.519.
-āyatana the base or object of a kasiṇa exercise (see above as 10 such objects) DN iii.268; MN ii.14; Pts i.28 etc.; -ārammaṇa = ˚āyatana Vism 427 (three, viz. tejo˚ odāta˚, āloka˚). -kamma the k. practice Ja i.141 Ja iv.306; Ja v.162, Ja v.193. -jhāna the k. meditation Dhs-a 413 -dosa fault of the k. object Vism 117, Vism 123 (the 4 faults of paṭhavī-kasiṇa being confusion of the 4 colours) -parikamma the preliminary, preparatory rites to the exercise of a kasiṇa meditation, such as preparing the frame, repeating the necessary formulas, etc. Ja i.8 Ja i.245; Ja iii.13, Ja iii.526; Dhs-a 187 ■ ˚ṃ katheti to give instructions in these preparations Ja iii.369; ˚ṃ karoti to perform the k-preparations Ja iv.117; Ja v.132, Ja v.427; Ja vi.68 -maṇḍala a board or stone or piece of ground divided by depressions to be used as a mechanical aid to jhāna exercise. In each division of the maṇḍala a sample of a kasiṇa was put. Several of these stone maṇḍalas have been found in the ruins at Anurādhapura. Cp Cpd. 54 f. 202 f. Ja iii.501; Dhp-a iv.208. -samāpatti attainment in respect of the k. exercise Nd ii.4668 (ten such).
Deriv. uncertain
(pp. of kasati) ploughed, tilled Anvs 44; -a˚; untilled ibid. 27, 44 ■ Cp. vi˚.
(adj.) miserable, painful, troubled wretched AN iv.283; Snp 574; Ja ii.136; Ja iv.113 = Ja vi.17; Pv iv.121 (= Pv-a 229 dukkha) ■ adv. kasirā (abl.) with difficulty Ja v.435; -kasirena (instr.) DN i.251; MN i.104; SN i.94; Vin i.195; Ja i.338; Ja iii.513. a˚; without pain easy, comfortable Ja vi.224 (= niddukkha); -lābhin obtaining without difficulty (f˚ inī AN iv.342) in formula akicchalābhī akasiralābhī etc. MN i.33; SN ii.278; AN i.184; AN ii.23, AN ii.36; AN iv.106; Ud 36; Pp 11, Pp 12.
-ābhata amassed with toil and difficulty (of wealth Ja v.435; -vuttika finding it hard to get a livelihood AN i.107 = Pp 51.
Probably fr. Vedic kṛcchra, the deriv. of which is uncertain
a plant, shrub Snp-a 284 (v.l. kaṃsīruka for kiṃsuka?) See also kaṭeruha.
etym. connected with Sk. kaseru backbone?
a husbandman, cultivator, peasant, farmer, ploughman DN i.61 (k˚ gahapatiko kārakārako rāsi-vaḍḍhako); AN i.241; AN i.229, AN i.239 (the three duties of a farmer); SN i.172 = Snp 76; iii.155 (v.l. for T. kasaka) iv. 314; Vin iv.108; Bdhd 96; DN-a i.170; often in similes, e.g. Pv i.11; ii.968 (likeness to the doer of good works); Vism 152, Vism 284, Vism 320. -vaṇṇa (under) the disguise of a peasant SN i.115 (of Māra).
fr. kasati
see ava˚, anu˚ (aor. anvakāsi), pari˚; otherwise kasati; cp. also kissati.
kṛṣ
fut. of karoti.
interr. adv. where? whither? Vin i.217; DN i.151; Snp p.106; Ja ii.7 Ja iii.76; Ja v.440 ■ k-nu kho where then? DN i.92; DN ii.143 DN ii.263.
cp. Vedic kuha; for a: u cp. kad˚.
1. A square copper coin MN ii.163; AN i.250; AN v.83 sq. Vin ii.294; iii. 238; Dhs-a 280 (at this passage included under rajataṃ, silver, together with loha-māsaka, dārumāsaka and jatu-māsaka); SN i.82; AN i.250; Vin ii.294 Vin iv.249; Ja i.478, Ja i.483; Ja ii.388; Mvu 3014. The extant specimens in our museums weigh about 5/6 of a penny and the purchasing power of a k. in our earliest records seems to have been about a florin ■ Frequent numbers as denoting a gift, a remuneration or alms, are 100,000 (J ii.96); 18 koṭis (Ja i.92); 1,000 (J ii.277, 431; v.128 217; Pv-a 153, Pv-a 161); 700 (J iii.343); 100 (Dhp-a iii.239) 80 (Pv-a 102); 10 or 20 (Dhp-a iv.226); 8 (which is considered socially, almost the lowest sum Ja iv.138; Ja i.483) A nominal fine of 1 k. (= a farthing) Mil 193 ■ ekaṃ k˚ pi not a single farthing Ja i.2; similarly eka-kahāpaṇen eva Vism 312 ■ Various qualities of a kahāpaṇa are referred to by Bdhgh in similes at Vism 437 and 515 Black kahāpaṇas are mentioned at Dhp-a iii.254 ■ See Rh. Davids, Ancient Measures of Ceylon; Buddh. India, pp. 100–102, fig. 24; Mil trsl. i.239.
-gabbha a closet for storing money, a safe Dhp-a iv.104 -vassa a shower of money Dhp 186 (= Dhp-a iii.240).
doubtful as regards etym.; the (later) Sk. kārṣāpaṇa looks like an adaptation of a dial. form
(nt.) Name of a torture which consisted in cutting off small pieces of flesh, the size of a kahāpaṇa, all over the body, with sharp razors MN i.87 = AN i.47, AN ii.122 cp. Mil 97, Mil 290, Mil 358.
(indecl.) interj. imitating the crow’s cry: kā kā Ja iv.72.
in composition, is assimilated (and contracted) form of kad˚ as kāpuppha, kāpurisa.
the crow; freq. in similes: SN i.124; Snp 448; Ja i.164. Its thievish ways are described at Dhp-a iii.352; said to have ten bad qualities AN v.149; Ja i.342; Ja iii.126; kākā vā kulalā vā Vin iv.40 ■ As bird (of the dead) frequenting places of interment and cremation, often with other carcass-eating animals (sigāla, gijjha) Snp 201; Pv-a 198 (= dhanka); cp. kākoḷa-In cpds. often used derisively ■ f. kākī Ja ii.39, Ja ii.150 Ja iii.431.
-āmasaka “touching as much as a crow,” attr. of a person not enjoying his meals Dhp-a iv.16; Dhs-a 404 -uṭṭepaka a crow-scarer, a boy under fifteen, employed as such in the monastery grounds Vin i.79 cp. 371 -opamā the simile of the crow Dhp-a ii.75. -orava “crow-cawing,” appld to angry and confused words Vin i.239, cp. iv.82; -olūka crows and owls Ja ii.351; Dhp-a i.50; Mhbv 15; -guyha (tall) enough to hide a crow (of young corn, yava) Ja ii.174; cp. J. trsl. ii.122 -nīḷa a crow’s nest Ja ii.365; -paññā “crow -wisdom, i.e. foolishness which leads to ruin through greed Ja v.255, Ja v.258; cp. vi.358; -paṭṭanaka a deserted village inhabited only by crows Ja vi.456; -pāda crow’s foot or footmark Vism 179 (as pattern); -peyya “(so full that a crow can easily drink of it,” full to the brim overflowing, of a pond: samatittika k˚ “with even banks and drinkable for crows” (i.e. with the water on a level with the land) DN i.244; SN ii.134 (do.); DN ii.89; MN i.435; AN iii.27; Ja ii.174; Ud 90; cp. note to J. trsl. ii.122; Pv-a 202. See also peyya. -bhatta “a crow’s meal,” i.e. remnants left from a meal thrown out for the crows Ja ii.149; -vaṇṇa “crow-coloured” Name of a king Mvu 2211; -vassa the cry of a crow Vin ii.17 -sīsa the head of a crow Ja ii.351; as adj.: having a crow’s head, appld to a fabulous flying horse DN ii.174 cp. Ja ii.129; -sūra a “crow-hero,” appl. to a shameless unconscientious fellow Dhp 244; Dhp-a iii.352; -ssaraka (having a voice) sounding like a crow Vin i.115.
onomat., cp. Sk. kāka; for other onomat. relatives see note on gala
to snore Vin iv.355; AN iii.299; Ja i.61, Ja i.160 (= ghurughurûpassāsa; cp. DN-a i.42 ghurû-ghurûpassāsī); i.318 vi.57; Mil 85; Vism 311.
derived by Fausböll fr. kās, to cough; by Trenckner fr. krath; by Childers & E. Müller fr.; kath should it not rather be a den. fr. kakaca a saw?
(nt.) a coin of very small value Sdhp 514.
kā (for kad˚) + kaṇa = less than a particle
(f.) = prec. Ja i.120, Ja i.419; Ja vi.346; DN-a i.212; Dhp-a i.391; Vv-a 77 = Dhp-a iii.108. From the latter passages its monetary value in the opinion of the Commentator may be guessed at as being 1/8 of a kahāpaṇa it occurs here in a descending line where each succeeding coin marks half the value of the preceding one, viz. kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha, pāda, māsaka, kākaṇikā, upon which follows mudhā “for nothing.”
-agghanaka “not even a farthing’s worth,” worth next to nothing Ja vi.346.
and Kākoḷa a raven, esp. in his quality as bird of prey, feeding on carrion (cp. kāka) Ja iii.246 (= vanakāka); v.268, 270 (gijjha k˚ ā ca ayomukhā… khādanti naraṃ kibbisakārinaṃ); vi.566.
-gaṇā (pl.) flocks of ravens Snp 675; VV5215 (= Vv-a 227).
Onomat. The Lit. Sk. has the same form
a glass-like substance made of siliceous clay; crystal Vin i.190; Vin ii.112 (cp Divy 503, kācamaṇi rock-crystal) ■ a˚; not of glass or quartz, i.e. pure, clear, flawless, appl. to precious stones DN ii.244 = Ja ii.418 (= akakkasa) Snp 476. In the same sense also Mvu i.164.
-ambha (nt.) red crystal Ja vi.268 (= rattamaṇi) -maya made of crystal, crystalline Vin i.190; Vin ii.112.
Der. unknown. The word first occurs in the Śat Br. & may well be non-Aryan
a pingo, a yoke, a carryingpole, usually made of bamboo, at both ends of which baskets are hung (double pingo). Besides this there is a single pingo (ekato-kājo) with only one basket and “middle” p. (antarā˚) with two bearers and the basket suspended in the middle Vin ii.137; Ja i.154; Ja v.13, Ja v.293 Ja v.295 sq., 320, 345; Pv-a 168.
-daṇḍaka the pole of a pingo DN-a i.41.
cp. Sk. kāca & kāja
(f.) balancing like carrying on a kāca, fig. deliberation, pondering Vb 352 = Vism 27.
fr. kāca2
(adj.), only neg. a˚; free from quartz, free from grit, flawless Vv 601 (= niddosa Vv-a 253).
fr. kāca1
= kāca2, i.e. carrying-pole MN iii.148; Ja i.9; Ja iii.325; Ja v.200; Dpvs xii.3; Mvu 5, Mvu 24; Dhp-a iv.232.
-koṭi the end of a carrying-pole Ja i.9; Ja v.200. -hāraka a pingo-bearer Dhp-a iv.128. Kata-kotacika
a low term of abuse, “pudendum virile & muliebre” Vin iv.7 (buddhagh iv.354: kātan ti purisa-nimittaṃ); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 89.
kāṭa + koṭacikā
(adj.) blind, usually of one eye, occasionally of both (see PugA 227) SN i.94; Vin ii.90; AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = Pp 51 (in expln of tamaparāyaṇa purisa); Thig 438; Ja i.222 (one-eyed); vi.74 (of both eyes); Dhp-a iii.71.
-kaccha Np. Sdhp 44; -kacchapa “the blind turtle in the well-known parable of a man’s chances of human rebirth after a state of punishment Thig 500 (= Thag-a 290); Mil 204; Dhs-a 60; cp. MN iii.169 = SN v.455.
cp. Sk. kāṇa
(adj.-n.) (grd. of karoti) that which ought to, can or must be done (see karoti) Ja i.264, etc. Also as kattabba Pv-a 30.
and Kātu˚; (in compn with kāma) inf. of karoti.
-kāma desirous of doing or making, etc. Mvu 3734 (a˚) Pv-a 115; -kāmatā the desire to do, etc. Ja iv.253; Ja v.364 See also kattu˚ in same combns.
is Vedic inf. of karoti Thig 418 (in Thag-a 268 taken as kātuṃ ayye!).
a kind of goose with grey wings Ja v.420; Vv-a 163.
cp. Sk. kādamba
made of Kadamba wood; also ˚ya for ˚ka; both at Ja v.320.
(nt.) a glade in the forest, a grove, wood Snp 1134 (= Nd ii.s. v. vanasaṇḍa); Thig 254 (= Thag-a 210 upavana); Ja vi.557; Sdhp 574.
cp. Sk. kānana
f. of konāma of what name? what is her (or your) name? Vin ii.272, Vin ii.273; Ja vi.338.
patron. f. of Kapila; the lady of the Kapila clan Thig 65.
(adj.) of or from Kapilavatthu, belonging to K. DN ii.165, DN ii.256; SN iv.182.
a low, vile, contemptible man, a wretch Vin ii.188; DN iii.279; SN i.91, SN i.154; SN ii.241 SN v.204; Thag 124, Thag 495; Ja ii.42; Ja vi.437; Pv ii.930 (Pv-a 125 = lāmaka˚); sometimes denoting one who has not entered the Path AN iii.24; Thig 189.
kad + purisa
(adj.) pigeon-coloured, grey, of a dull white, said of the bones of a skeleton DN i.55; Dhp 149 (= Dhp-a iii.112).
fr. kapota
(f.) a kind of intoxicating drink of a reddish colour (like pigeons’ fect) Vin iv.109, cp Ja i.360 (surā).
of doubtful origin, fr. kapota, but probably popular etym., one may compare Sk. kāpiśāyana, a sort of spirituous liquor Halāyudha 2, 175, which expresses a diff. notion, i.e. fr. kapi
(m. nt.) to desire cp. Lat. carus, Goth. hōrs, E whore.
1. Objective: pleasantness, pleasure-giving, an object of sensual enjoyment;
2. subjective: (a) enjoyment, pleasure on occasion of sense, (b) sense-desire. Buddhist commentators express 1 and 2 by kāmiyatī ti kāmo, and kametī ti kāmo Cpd. 81, n. 2. Kāma as sense-desire and enjoyment plus objects of the same is a collective name for all but the very higher or refined conditions of life. The kāma-bhava or-loka (worlds of sensedesire) includes 4 of the 5 modes (gati’s) of existence and part of the fifth or deva-loka. See Bhava. The term is not found analyzed till the later books of the Canon are consulted, thus, Nd i.1 distinguishes (1 vatthukāmā: desires relating to a base, i.e. physical organ or external object, and (2) kilesakāmā: desire considered subjectively. So also Nd ii.202, quoted Dhp-a ii.162; Dhp-a iii.240; and very often as ubho kāmā. A more logical definition is given by Dhammapāla on Vv 11 (Vv-a 11). He classifies as follows: 1. manāpiyā rūpādi-visayā.
2. chandarāga.
3. sabbasmiṃ lobha
4. gāmadhamma.
5. hitacchanda.
6. serībhāva i.e. k. concerned with (1) pleasant objects, (2) impulsive desire, (3) greed for anything, (4) sexual lust (5) effort to do good, (6) self-determination.
In all enumerations of obstacles to perfection, or of general divisions and definitions of mental conditions kāma occupies the leading position. It is the first of the five obstacles (nīvaraṇāni), the three esanās (longings), the four upādānas (attachments), the four oghas (floods of worldly turbulence), the four āsavas (intoxicants of mind), the three taṇhās, the four yogas; and k stands first on the list of the six factors of existence kāmā, vedanā, saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkha, which are discussed at AN iii.410 sq. as regards their origin difference, consequences, destruction and remedy. Kāma is most frequently connected with rāga (passion) with chanda (impulse) and gedha (greed), all expressing the active, clinging, and impulsive character of desire. The foll. is the list of synonyms given at various places for kāma-cchanda: (1) chanda, impulse; (2) rāga excitement; (3) nandī, enjoyment; (4) taṇhā, thirst (5) sineha, love; (6) pipāsā, thirst; (7) pariḷāha, consuming passion; (8) gedha, greed; (9) mucchā, swoon or confused state of mind; (10) ajjhosāna, hanging on, or attachment Nd1. At Nd ii.200; Dhs 1097 (omitting No. 8), cp. Dhs-a 370; similarly at Vism 569 (omitting Nos. 6 and 8), cp. Dhs 1214; Vb 375. This set of 10 characteristics is followed by kām-ogha, kāma-yoga kām-upādāna at Nd ii.200, cp. Vism 141 (kām-ogha ˚āsava, ˚upādāna). Similarly at DN iii.238: kāme avigata-rāga, ˚chanda, ˚pema, ˚pipāsa, ˚pariḷāha ˚taṇha. See also kāma-chanda below under cpds. In connection with synonyms it may be noticed that most of the verbs used in a kāma-context are verbs the primary meaning of which is “adhering to” or “grasping,” hence, attachment; viz. esanā (iṣ to Lat ira) upādāna (upa + ā + dā taking up), taṇhā (tṛṣ, Lat torreo = thirst) pipāsā (the wish to drink), sineha (snih, Lat. nix = melting), etc ■ On the other hand, the reaction of the passions on the subject is expressed by khajjati “to be eaten up” pariḍayhati “to be burnt, etc. The foll. passage also illustrates the various synonymic expressions: kāme paribhuñjati, kāmamajjhe vasati, kāma-pariḷāhena pariḍayhati, kāmavitakkehi khajjati, kāma-pariyesanāyā ussukko, AN i.68 cp. MN i.463; MN iii.129. Under this aspect kāma is essentially an evil, but to the popular view it is one of the indispensable attributes of bliss and happiness to be enjoyed as a reward of virtue in this world (mānussakāmā) as well as in the next (dibbā kāmā). See kāmāvacara about the various stages of next-world happiness Numerous examples are to be found in Pv and Vv where a standing Ep. of the Blest is sabbakāmasamiddha “fully equipped with all objects of pleasure, e.g. Pv i.105; Pv-a 46. The other-world pleasures are greater than the earthly ones: SN v.409; but to the Wise even these are unsatisfactory, since they still are signs of, and lead to, rebirth (kāmûpapatti, It (4): api dibbesu kāmesu ratiṃ so nâdhigacchati Dhp 187; rāgaṃ vinayetha mānusesu dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhu Snp 361 see also Iti 94 ■ Kāma as sensual pleasure finds its most marked application in the sphere of the sexual kāmesu micchācārin, transgressing in lusts, sinning in the lusts of the flesh, or violating the third rule of conduct equivalent to abrahmacariyā, inchastity (see sīla Pp 38, Pp 39; Iti 63, etc. itthi-kāmehi paricāreti “he enjoys himself with the charms of woman” SN iv.343 Kāmesu brahmacariyavā practising chastity Snp 1041 Kāmatthā for sexual amusement AN iii.229.
Redemption from kāma is to be effected by selfcontrol (saṃyama) and meditation (jhāna), by knowledge right effort and renunciation. “To give up passion” as a practice of him who wishes to enter on the Path is expressed by: kāmānaṃ pahānaṃ, kāmasaññānaṃ pariññā, kāma-pipāsānaṃ-paṭivinayo, kāmavitakkānaṃ samugghāto kāma-pariḷāhānaṃ vūpasamo Vin iii.111 ■ kāmesu (ca) appaṭibaddhacitto “uddhaṃsoto” ti vuccati: he whose mind is not in the bonds of desire is called “one who is above the stream” Dhp 218 cp. Thig 12 ■ tasmā jantu sadā sato kāmāni parivajjaye Snp 771 ■ yo kāme parivajjeti Snp 768 = Ne 69-nikkhamma gharā panujja kāme Snp 359 ■ ye ca kāme pariññāya caranti akutobhayā te ve pāragatā loke ye pattā āsavakkhayaṃ AN iii.69 ■ Kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññāpeti Gotamo MN i.84; cp. AN v.64 kāme pajahati: SN i.12 = SN i.31; Snp 704; kāmānaṃ vippahāna SN i.47 ■ ye kāme hitvā agihā caranti Snp 464-kāmā nirujjhanti (through jhāna) AN iv.410; kāme panudati Dhp 383 = SN i.15 (context broken), cp. kāmasukhaṃ analaṃkaritvā Snp 59 ■ kāmesu anapekkhin Snp 166 = Ś i.16 (abbrev.); SN ii.281; Snp 857 ■ cp rāgaṃ vinayetha… Snp 361. vivicc’ eva kāmehi aloof from sensuous joys is the prescription for all Jhāna-exercise.
Applications of these expressions:-kāmesu palāḷita AN iii.5; kāmesu mucchita SN i.74; kāmālaye asatta SN i.33; kāmesu kathaṃ nameyya SN i.117; kāmesu anikīḷitāvin SN i.9 (cp. kela); kittassa munino carato kāmesu anapekhino oghatiṇṇassa pihayanti kāmesu gathitā pajā Snp 823 (gadhitā Nd1) ■ kāmesu asaññata Snp 243 ■ yo na lippati kāmesu tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ Dhp 401 ■ Muni santivādo agiddho kāme ca loke ca anûpalitto Snp 845; kāmesu giddha DN iii.107; Snp 774; kāmesu gedhaṃ āpajjati SN i.73 ■ na so rajjati kāmesu Snp 161 ■ kāmānaṃ vasam upāgamum Snp 315 (= kāmānaṃ āsattataṃ pāpuniṃsu Snp-a 325); kāme parivajjeti Snp 768, kāme anugijjhati Snp 769.
Character of Kāmā. The pleasures of the senses are evanescent, transient (sabbe kāmā aniccā, etc. AN ii.177) and of no real taste (appāsādā); they do not give permanent satisfaction; the happiness which they yield is only a deception, or a dream, from which the dreamer awakens with sorrow and regret. Therefore the Buddha says “Even though the pleasure is great, the regret is greater: ādīnavo ettha bhīyyo” (see k-sukha). Thus kāmā as kālikā (needing time) SN i.9, SN i.117; aniccā (transitory) SN i.22; kāmā citrā madhurā “pleasures are manifold and sweet” (i.e. tasty) Snp 50; but also appassādā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā: quot. MN i.91 see Nd ii.71. Another passage with var. descriptions and comparisons of kāma, beginning with app’ assādā dukkhā kāmā is found at Ja iv.118. -atittaṃ yeva kāmesu antako kurute vasaṃ Dhp 48 ■ na kahāpaṇavassena titti kāmesu vijjati appasādā dukkhā kāmā iti viññāya paṇḍito “not for showers of coins is satisfaction to be found in pleasures-of no taste and full of misery are pleasures: thus say the wise and they understand” Dhp 186; cp. MN i.130; Vin ii.25 (cp. Divy 224)-Kāmato jāyatī soko kāmato jāyatī bhayaṃ kāmato vippamuttassa n’atthi soko kuto bhayan ti “of pleasure is born sorrow, of pleasure is born fear” Dhp 215. Kāmānam adhivacanāni, attributes of kāma are bhaya, dukkha, roga, gaṇḍa, salla, sanga, panka, gabbha AN iv.289; Nd ii.p. 62 on Snp 51; same, except salla gabbha: AN iii.310. The misery of such pleasures is painted in vivid colours in the Buddha’s discourse on pains of pleasures MN i.85 and parallel passages (see e.g. Nd ii.199), how kāma is the cause of egoism, avarice quarrels between kings, nations, families, how it leads to warfare, murder, lasciviousness, torture and madness Kāmānaṃ ādīnavo (the danger of passions) MN i.85 sq = Nd ii.199, quot. Snp-a 114 (on Snp 61); as one of the five anupubbikathās: K˚ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ AN iv.186, AN iv.209, AN iv.439 ■ they are the leaders in the army of Māra: kāmā te paṭhamā senā Snp 436 ■ yo evamvādī… n’atthi kāmesu doso ti so kāmesu pātavyataṃ āpajjati AN i.266 = MN i.305 sq.
Similes.-In the foll. passage (following on appassādā bahudukkhā, etc.) the pleasures of the senses are likened to: (1) aṭṭhi-kankhala, a chain of bones; (2) maṃsapesi, a piece of (decaying) flesh ■ (3) tiṇ’ukkā a torch of grass; (4) angāra-kāsu, a pit of glowing cinders ■ (5) supina, a dream; (6) yācita, beggings-(7) rukkha-phala, the fruit of a tree ■ (8) asisūna a slaughter-house ■ (9) satti-sūla, a sharp stake ■ (10) sappa-sira, a snake’s head, i.e. the bite of a snake at Vin ii.25; MN i.130; AN iii.97 (where aṭṭhisankhala); Nd ii.71 (leaving out No. 10). Out of this list are taken single quotations of No. 4 at DN iii.283; AN iv.224 = AN v.175; No. 5 at Dhp-a iii.240; No. 8 at MN i.144; No. 9 at SN i.128 = Thig 58 & 141 (with khandhānaṃ for khandhāsaṃ); No. 10 as āsīvisa (poisonous fangs of a snake) yesu mucchitā bālā Thig 451, and several at many other places of the Canon.
Cases used adverbially:- kāmaṃ acc. as adv. (a) yathā kāmaṃ according to inclination, at will, as much as one chooses SN i.227; Ja i.203; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 113, Pv-a 176; yena kāmaṃ wherever he likes, just as he pleases AN iv.194; Vv i.11 (= icchānurūpaṃ Vv-a 11)-(b) willingly gladly, let it be that, usually with imper. SN i.222; Ja i.233; Ja iii.147; Ja iv.273; Vv-a 95; kāmaṃ taco nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (avasussatu in J) sarīre upasussatu maṃsa-lohitaṃ “willingly shall skin, sinews and bone remain, whilst flesh and blood shall wither in the body” MN i.481; AN i.50; SN ii.28; Ja i.71, Ja i.110; -kāmasā (instr.) in same sense Ja iv.320; Ja vi.181; -kāmena (instr. do. Ja v.222, Ja v.226; -kāmā for the love of, longing after (often with hi) Ja iii.466; Ja iv.285, Ja iv.365; Ja v.294 Ja vi.563, Ja vi.589; cp. Mhv iii.18, 467. -akāmā unwillingly DN i.94; Ja vi.506; involuntarily Ja v.237.
˚kāma (adj.) desiring, striving after, fond of, pursuing in kāma-kāma pleasure-loving Snp 239 (kāme kāmayanto Snp-a 284); Dhp 83 (cp. on this passage Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 39
41); same expln as prec. at Dhp-a ii.156; Thig 506 ■ atthakāma well-wishing, desirous of good, benevolent Ja i.241; Ja v.504 (anukampakā + ) sic lege for attakāmarūpā, MN i.205, MN iii.155, cf. SN i.44 with ib. 75; AN ii.21; Pv iv.351; Vv-a 11 (in quotation) Pv-a 25, Pv-a 112; mānakāma proud SN i.4; lābhakāma fond of taking; grasping, selfish AN ii.240; dūsetu˚ desiring to molest Vin iv.212; dhamma˚ Snp 92; pasaṃsa˚ Snp 825 So frequently in comb. w. inf., meaning, willing to wishing to, going to, desirous of: jīvitu˚, amaritu˚ dātu˚, daṭṭhu˚, dassana˚, kātu˚, pattu˚, netu˚, gantu˚ bhojetu˚, etc. -sakāma (-adj.) willing Ja v.295. -akāma 1. not desiring, i.e. unwilling: MN ii.181; mayhaṃ akāmāya against my wish (= mama anicchantiyā) Pv ii.107, Ja v.121, Ja v.183, etc. 2. without desire, desireless passionless Snp 445. -nikkāma same Snp 1131.
-agga (nt.) the greatest pleasure, intense enjoyment MN ii.43; Vv 163 (= Vv-a 79, attributed to the Paranimmita-vasavattino-devā); -aggi the fire of passion Ja v.487; -ajjhosāna (nt.) attachment to lust and desire No. 10 in kāmacchanda series (see above); -ādhikaraṇa having its cause in desire MN i.85; SN i.74; -ādhimutta bent upon the enjoyment of sensual pleasures AN iii.168; Ja vi.159; -ānusārin pursuing worldly pleasures Ja ii.117 -andha blinded by passion Ud 76 = Thag 297;- ābhibhū overcoming passions, Ep. of the Buddha DN ii.274 -ābhimukha bent upon lust, voluptuous Pv-a 3; -āvacara “having its province in kāma,” belonging to the realm of sensuous pleasures. This term applies to the eleven grades of beings who are still under the influence of sensual desires and pleasures, as well as to all thoughts and conditions arising in this sphere of sensuous experience DN i.34 (of the soul, expld DA 120: cha k˚-devapariyāpanna); Ja i.47; Dhs 1, Dhs 431; Pts 1, Pts 84, Pts 85, Pts 101 Vb 324; Vism 88, Vism 372, Vism 452 (rūpa˚, arūpa˚, lokuttara) 493 (of indriyas), 574; Pv-a 138. -kamma an action causing rebirth in the six kāma-worlds Dhs 414, Dhs 418 Dhs 431; -devatā Pv-a 138 (+ brahmādevatā) and -devā the gods of the pleasure-heavens Ja i.47; Ja v.5; Ja vi.99; Vism 392; or of the kāmâvacara-devaloka Ja vi.586, -bhūmi and -loka the plane or world of kāma Pts i.83; Ja vi.99 see also avacara; -āvacaraka belonging to the realm of kāma Ja vi.99; Sdhp 254 (˚ika); -assāda the relish of sensual pleasures Pv-a 262; DN-a i.89, DN-a i.311; -ātura affected by passion, love-sick Ja iii.170; -ārāma pleasure-loving AN iv.438 (gihī k-bhogī, ˚ratā, ˚sammuditā); -ālaya, the abode of sensual pleasure (i.e. kāma-loka) SN i.33 = Snp 177; Snp 306; -āvaṭṭa the whirlpool of sensuality Ja ii.330; -āsava the intoxication of passion, sensuality lusts; def. as kāmesu kāma-chando, etc. (see above k-chando) Vb 364, Vb 374; Dhs 1097; as the first of four impurities, viz. k˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ at Vin iii.5 (the detachment from which constitutes Arahantship) Vb 373; Dhs 1096, Dhs 1448; as three (prec. without diṭṭhi˚) at Iti 49; Vb 364; cp. DN i.84; DN ii.81; DN iii.216; MN i.7; -itthi a pleasure-woman, a concubine Vin i.36; Ja i.83; Ja v.490; Ja vi.220; -upabhoga the enjoyment of pleasures Vv-a 79; -upādāna clinging to sensuality arising from taṇhā, as k˚ diṭṭhi˚ sīlabbata˚, attavāda DN iii.230; MN i.51; Vb 136, Vb 375; Vism 569; -ūpapatti existence or rebirth in the sensuous universe. These are three: (1) Paccupaṭṭhita-kāmā (including mankind four lowest devalokas, Asuras, Petas and animals) (2) Nimmāna-ratino devā, (3) Paranimmita-vasavattino devā DN iii.218; Iti 94. -ūpasaṃhita endowed with pleasantness: in formula rūpā (saddā, etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā k˚ rajaniyā “forms (sounds etc. = any object of sense), desirable, lovely, agreeable pleasant, endowed with pleasantness, prompting desires” DN i.245 = MN i.85; MN i.504; DN ii.265; MN iii.267; Vv-a 127. -esanā the craving for pleasure. There are three esanās: kāma˚, bhava˚, brahmacariya˚ DN iii.216 DN iii.270; AN ii.42; Vb 366; Iti 48; SN v.54; -ogha the flood of sensual desires AN iii.69; DN iii.230, DN iii.276; Vb 375 Vism 141; Dhs-a 166; Nd ii.178 (viz. kām˚, bhav˚ diṭṭh˚, avijj˚). -kaṇṭaka the sting of lust Ud 27 -kara the fulfilment of one’s desires Ja v.370 (= kāmakiriyā) -karaṇīya in yathā˚ pāpimato the puppet of the wicked (lit. one with whom one can do as one likes MN i.173; Iti 56; -kalala the mud of passions Ja iii.293 -kāra the fulfilment of desires Snp 351 = Thag 1271 -kārin acting according to one’s own inclination Thag 971; or acting willingly DN-a i.71; -koṭṭhāsa a constituent of sensual pleasure (= kāmaguṇa) Ja iii.382; Ja v.149; DN-a i.121; Pv-a 205; -kopa the fury of passion Thag 671 -gavesin, pleasure-seeking Dhp 99 = Thag 992. -gijjha Ja i.210 and -giddha greedy for pleasure, craving for love Ja iii.432; Ja v.256; Ja vi.245; -giddhimā, same Ja vi.525 -giddhin f. ˚inī same Mvu vi.3. -guṇā (pl.) always as pañca: the five strands of sensual pleasures, viz., the pleasures which are to be enjoyed by means of the five senses; collectively all sensual pleasures. Def. as cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā, etc. AN iii.411; DN i.245; DN ii.271 DN iii.131, DN iii.234; Nd ii.s. v.; Pts i.129; as manāpiyehi rūpâdīhi pañcahi kāma-koṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā DN-a i.121 where it is also divided into two groups: mānusakā and dibbā. As constituents of kāmarāga at Ne 28; as vana (desire) Ne 81 ■ In the popular view they are also to be enjoyed in “heaven”: saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjissāmi tattha dibbehi pañcahi k-guṇehi samappito samangibhūto paricāressāmī ti Vin iii.72; mentioned as pleasures in Nandana SN i.5; MN i.505; AN iii.40, AN iv.118 in various other connections SN iv.202; Vv 307; Pv iii.71 (˚ehi sobhasi; expl. Pv-a 205 by kāma-koṭṭhāsehi) Pv-a 58 (paricārenti); cp. also kāma-kāmin. As the highest joys of this earth they are the share of men of good fortune, like kings, etc. (mānusakā k˚ guṇā SN v.409; AN v.272, but the same passage with “dibbehi pañcahi k˚-guṇehi samappita…” also refers to earthly pleasures, e.g. SN i.79, SN i.80 (of kings); SN v.342 (of a Cakkavatti); AN ii.125; AN iv.55, AN iv.239; AN v.203; of the soul DN i.36; Vb 379; other passages simply quoting k-g as worldly pleasures are e.g. SN i.16 = Snp 171; SN i.92 SN iv.196. 326; AN iii.69 (itthirūpasmiṃ); DN i.60, DN i.104 Sdhp 261. In the estimation of the early Buddhists however, this bundle of pleasures is to be banned from the thought of every earnest striver after perfection their critique of the kāmaguṇā begins with “pañc’ ime bhikkhave kāmaguṇā…” and is found at various places, e.g. in full at MN i.85 = Nd ii.s. v.; MN i.454; MN ii.42 MN iii.114; quoted at MN i.92; AN iii.411; AN iv.415, AN iv.430, AN iv.449 AN iv.458. Other expressions voicing the same view are gedho pañcannaṃ k˚-guṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ AN iii.312 sq. asisūnā… adhivac˚ MN i.144; nivāpo… adhivac MN i.155; sāvaṭṭo… adhivac˚ Iti 114. In connection w. rata & giddha Pv-a 3; pahīna MN iii.295; gathita mucchita MN i.173; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ “Let not thy heart roam in the fivefold pleasures Dhp 371; cittassa vossaggo Vb 370; asantuṭṭha Vb 350. See also Snp 50, Snp 51, Snp 171, Snp 284, Snp 337. -guṇika consisting of fivefold desire, appl. to rāga SN ii.99; Ja iv.220; Dhs A.371; -gedha a craving for pleasure SN i.100 Thag-a 225; -cāgin he who has abandoned lusts Snp 719 -citta impure thought Ja ii.214; -chanda excitement of sensual pleasure, grouped as the first of the series of five obstacles (pañca nīvaraṇāni) DN i.156, DN i.246; DN iii.234 DN iii.278; AN i.231; AN iv.457; AN i.134 = Snp 1106; SN i.99; SN v.64 Bdhd 72, 96, 130; Nd ii.200, Nd ii.420A. Also as the first in the series of ten fetters (saṃyojanāni) which are given above (p. 31) as synonyms of kāma. Enumerated under 1
10 at Nd ii.200 as eight in order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 7, 9, 10 (omitting pipāsā and gedha) Vb 364; Dhs 1114 Dhs 1153; Nd ii.ad chandarāga and bhavachanda; in order 2, 3, 5, 9, 6, 7, 10, 4 at AN ii.10 ■ as nine (like above omitting gedha) at Vb 374; Dhs 1097 ■ as five in order: 1, 5, 9, 6, 7, (cp. above passage AN ii.10) at MN i.241 ■ as four in order: 1, 5, 9, 7 at SN iv.188 ■ as six nīvaraṇas (5 + avijjā) at Dhs 1170, Dhs 1486. See also DN i.246; DN iii.234, DN iii.269; Pts i.103, Pts i.108; Pts ii.22, Pts ii.26, Pts ii.44, Pts ii.169 Vism 141; Sdhp 459; -jāla the net of desires Thag 355 -taṇhā thirst after sensual pleasures; the first of the three taṇhās, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚ DN iii.216 DN iii.275; Iti 50; Vb 365 (where defined as kāmadhātupaṭisaṃyutto rāgo); Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136 (cp. taṇhā: jappāpassage); as the three taṇhā, viz. ponobbhavikā, nandirāga-sahagatā, tatratatr’ âbhinandinī at Vin i.10 Vb 101; as k-taṇhāhi khajjamāno k-pariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno MN i.504. See also DN ii.308; SN i.131; AN ii.11; Thig 140; Ja ii.311; Ja v.451; Mil 318. -da granting desires, bestowing objects of pleasure and delight; Ep. of Yakkhas and of Vessantara (cp. the good fairy) Ja vi.498, Ja vi.525; Mvu 19, Mvu 9; as sabba˚ Pv ii.138; -dada = prec. Pv ii.918; Pv-a 112; Ja vi.508; of a stone Mil 243, Mil 252; of Nibbāna Mil 321; Kp viii.10 esa devamanussānaṃ sabbakāmadado nidhi “this is the treasure which gives all pleasures to gods and men” -dukkha the pain of sensual pleasures Ja iv.118; -duha granting wishes, like a cow giving milk Ja v.33; Ja vi.214 f. ˚duhā the cow of plenty Ja iv.20; -dhātu “element of desire.” i.e. 1. the world of desire, that sphere of existence in which beings are still in the bonds of sensuality extending from the Avīci-niraya to the heaven of the Paranimmita-vasavatti-devas SN ii.151; Thag 181; also 2. sensual pleasures, desires, of which there are six dhātus, viz. kāma˚, vyāpāda, vihiṃsā˚, nekkhamma˚ avyāpāda˚, avihiṃsā˚, Vb 86; Ne 97; DN iii.215 Vb 363 (as the first three = akusaladhātus); Vb 404 See also DN iii.275; Thag 378; Ja v.454; Vism 486 (cp Vb 86). -nandī sensual delight (cp. ˚chanda) AN ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. -nidānaṃ acc. adv. as the consequence of passion, through passion, MN i.85, etc. (in kāmaguṇā passage); -nissaraṇa deliverance from passion, the extinction of passion Iti 61 (as three nissaraṇīyā dhātuyo), cp. AN iii.245; -nissita depending on craving Mil 11; -nīta led by desire Ja ii.214, Ja ii.215; -paṅka the mire of lusts Snp 945; Thig 354; Ja v.186, Ja v.256; Ja vi.230 Ja vi.505; Mhbv 3; -paṭisandhi -sukhin finding happiness in the association with desire MN iii.230; -pariḷāha the flame or the fever of passion MN i.242, MN i.508; SN iv.188; AN i.68 (pariḍayhati, khajjati, etc.); AN ii.11; Vin iii.20 Nd ii.374 (comd with ˚palibodha); Dhp-a ii.2; see also kāmacchanda passage. -pāla the guardian of wishes i.e. benefactor Ja v.221; -pipāsā thirst for sensuality MN i.242; AN ii.11, and under k˚-chanda; -bandha Ud 93 and -bandhana the bonds of desire Ja vi.28, also in the sense of k˚-guṇā, q.v.; -bhava a state of existence dominated by pleasures. It is the second kind of existence, the first being caused by kamma Vb 137 It rests on the effect of kamma, which is manifested in the kāma-dhātu AN i.223. It is the first form of the 3 bhavas, viz. kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚ Vin i.36; DN iii.216; AN iv.402; Vism 572. Emancipation from this existence is the first condition to the attainment of Arahantship: kāmabhave asatta akiñcana Snp 176, Snp 1059, Snp 1091 (expl. Snp-a 215: tividhe bhave alaggana); Bdhd 61 ˚parikkhīṇa one who has overcome the desire-existence Dhp 415 = Snp 639. -bhoga enjoyment of sensual pleasures gratification of desires SN i.74 (sāratta-˚esu giddhā kāmesu mucchitā); Thig 464; Iti 94 (-˚esu paṇḍito who discriminates in worldly pleasures) Ja ii.65; -bhogin enjoying the pleasures of the senses Vin i.203, Vin i.287; Vin ii.136, Vin ii.149; DN iii.124, DN iii.125; Mil 243 Mil 350, as Ep. of the kāmûpapatti-beings Iti 94; as ten kinds AN v.177; as bringing evil, being blameworthy SN i.78; cp. AN iv.281, AN iv.438; SN iv.333 sq.; AN iii.351; Thig 486; Ja iii.154. ye keci kāmesu asaññatā janā avītarāgā idha k-bhogino (etc.) AN ii.6, cp. ii.17. kāmabhogī kām’ārāmo kāmarato kāma-sammudita AN iv.439 -˚seyyā sleeping at ease, way of lying down, the second of the four ways of sleeping (kāmabhogīseyyā vāmena passena) AN ii.244; -bhojin = ˚bhogin Ud 65; -magga the path of sensuous pleasures Ja v.67; -matta intoxicated with sensuous pleasures Ja vi.231; -mucchā sensual stupor or languor SN iv.189; AN ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. (see kāmacchanda); -yoga application to sensuous enjoyment one of the four yogas, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚ avijjā˚ (cp. āsavā) AN ii.10; only the first two at Iti 95 cp. DN iii.230, DN iii.276; SN v.59; Dhs-a 166; -rata delighting in pleasures Ja v.255; -rati amorous enjoyment (as arati Thig 58 and 141; Ja i.211; Ja iii.396; Ja iv.107 ■ n’atthi nissaraṇaṃ loke kiṃ vivekena kāhasi bhuñjassu kratiyo mâhu pacchânutāpinī SN i.128. mā pamādam anuyuñjetha, mā kāmaratisanthavaṃ appamatto hi jhāyanto pappoti paramaṃ sukhan SN i.25 = Dhp 27 = Thag 884; -rasa the taste of love Ja ii.329; Ja iii.170; Ja v.451 -rāga sensual passion, lust. This term embraces the kāmaguṇā & the three rāgas: Dhs 1131, Dhs 1460 Ne 28; MN i.433 sq.; DN iii.254, DN iii.282; SN i.22; AN iii.411; SN i.13, SN i.53; SN iii.155; Thig 68, Thig 77; Pv-a 6; see also k-chanda passage. Relinquishing this desire befits the Saint: Snp 139 (˚ṃ virājetvā brahmalokûpago). As k-rāgavyāpāda Dhs 362; Snp-a 205; -rūpa a form assumed at will Vv-a 80, or a form which enjoys the pleasures of heaven Vb 426; -lāpin talking as one likes DN i.91 (= DN-a i.257 yadicchaka-bhāṇin); -lābha the grasping of pleasures, in ˚abhijappin AN iii.353; -loka the world of pleasures = kāmâvacara, q.v. Sdhp 233, Sdhp 261 -vaṇṇin assuming any form at will, Protean Ja ii.255 Ja iii.409 = Vv 33191; Ja v.157; Vv 163; Vv-a 80, Vv-a 143, Vv-a 146 -vasika under the influence of passions Ja ii.215; -vitakka a thought concerning some sensuous pleasure, one of the three evil thoughts (kāma˚ vyāpāda˚ vihiṃsā˚ DN iii.215, DN iii.226; MN i.114; AN i.68; Ja i.63; Ja iii.18, Ja iii.375 Ja iv.490; Ja vi.29; Iti 82, Iti 115; Vb 362; Mil 310; -vega the impulse of lust Ja vi.268; -sagga the heaven of sensuous beings, there are six q.v. under sagga Ja i.105 Ja ii.130; Ja iii.258; Ja iv.490; Ja vi.29, Ja vi.432; at all these passages only referred to, not enumd; cp. k-âvacara; -saṅkappa- bahula full of aspirations after pleasure AN iii.145, AN iii.259; DN iii.215; -saṅga attachment to passion Ud 75; -saññā lustful idea or thought; one of the three akusalasaññās (as vitakka) DN i.182; DN iii.215; MN ii.262; SN i.126 Vb 363; Thag 1039; virata k˚ āya SN i.53 = Snp 175 -saññojana the obstacle or hindrance formed by pleasures; ˚âtiga Ep. of Arahant, free of the fetters of lust AN iii.373 (+ kāmarāgaṃ virājetvā); -sineha love of pleasures Dhs 1097 (also as ˚sneha MN i.241; SN iv.188; AN ii.10); see k-chanda; -sukha happiness or welfare arising from (sensual) pleasure, worldly happiness valued as mīlha˚, puthujjana˚, anariya˚, and not worth pursuit: see kāmaguṇā, which passage closes: yaṃ ime pañca k-guṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati k-sukhaṃ AN iv.415; SN iv.225; varying with… somanassaṃ ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo MN i.85, MN i.92 etc ■ As kāma˚ and nekkhamma˚ AN i.80; as renounced by the Saint: anapekkhino k˚ ṃ pahāya Dhp 346; SN i.77; MN iii.230; Snp 59 (see Nd ii.s. v.). See also SN iv.208; MN ii.43; Thig 483; Vv 617; Ja ii.140; Ja iii.396 Ja v.428; kāmasukhallik’ ânuyoga attachment to worldly enjoyment SN iv.330; SN v.421; Vin i.10; DN iii.113 Ne 110; Vism 5, Vism 32; -sutta Name of the first sutta of the Aṭṭhakavagga of Sn; -seṭṭhā (pl.) a class of devas DN ii.258; -sevanā pursuit of, indulgence in, sensuous pleasure Ja ii.180; Ja iii.464; -sevin adj. to prec. Ja iv.118 -hetu having craving as a cause: in ādīnava-section foll. on kāmaguṇā MN i.86, etc., of wealth SN i.74 -hetuka caused by passion Thig 355 = Thag-a 243; Ja v.220, Ja v.225.
Dhtp (603) & Dhtm (843) paraphrase by “icchāyaṃ,” cp. Vedic kāma, kam = Idg. *qā
(adj.) only-˚ in neg. akāmaka unwilling, undesirous DN i.115; MN i.163; Vin iii.13; Ja iv.31 cp. kāmuka.
fr. kāma
(adj.) having a kamaṇḍalu (q.v.) SN iv.312 cp. AN v.263.
(f.) desire, longing, with noun: viveka˚… to be alone Pv-a 43; anattha˚ Ja iv.14 with inf. Pv-a 65 (gahetu˚); Ja iii.362 (vināsetu˚) Mvu 5, Mvu 260; Dhp-a i.91.
abstr. fr. kāma
(adj.) 1. having kāma, i.e. enjoying pleasure, gratifying one’s own desires in kāma-kāmin realizing all wishes; attr. of beings in one of the Sugatis the blissful states, of Yakkhas, Devas or Devaññataras (Pv i.33 = Pv-a 16), as a reward for former merit usually in combn with bhuñjāmi paribhogavant (Pv iv.346) or as “nandino devalokasmiṃ modanti kkāmino” AN ii.62 = Iti 112; Thag 242; Ja iii.154; Pv ii.115; Pv iii.116 (expl. “as enjoying after their hearts content all pleasures they can wish for”).
2. giving kāma, i.e. benevolent, fulfilling people’s wishes; satisfying their desires, in atthakāminī devatā Snp 986- akāmakāmin passionless, dispassionate Snp 1096 syName of vītataṇhā without desire (cp. Nd ii.4).
fr. kāma
(adj.-n.) desiring, loving, fond of; a sweetheart, lover Ja v.306; Mhbv 3.
cp. Sk. kāmuka
to desire, to crave, 1. to crave for any object of pleasure: Thag 93; Ja iii.154; Ja iv.167 Ja v.480;
2. to desire a woman, to be in love with DN i.241; MN ii.40; Ja ii.226; Ja v.425; Ja vi.307, Ja vi.326, etc. pp. kāmita in kāmita-vatthu the desired object Pv-a 119; Vv-a 122; grd. kāmitabba to be desired, desirable Pv-a 16 (v.l. for kañña, better), 73; Vv-a 127; and kāmetabba Ja v.156 (= kamaṇīya); ppr. (kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa Snp 766 (= icchamānassa, etc., Nd1) Ja vi.172 = Ne 69.
den. fr. kāma
group, heap, collection, aggregate, body ■ Definitions and synonyms ■ Snp-a 31 gives the foll. synonyms and similes of kāya: kuṭī, guhā (Snp 772), deha, sandeha (Dhp 148 = Thag 20), nāvā (Dhp 369), ratha (S iv.292) dhaja, vammīka (MN i.144), kuṭikā (Thag 1); and at Kp-a 38 the foll. def.: kāye ti sarīre, sarīraṃ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṃ vā kesādīnaṃ āyabhūtato kāyo ti vuccati.… It is equivalent to deha: SN i.27; Pv-a 10; to sarīra Kp-a 38; Pv-a 63, to nikāya (deva˚ DN iii.264; and cp. formula of jāti: sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti… Nd ii.257.
Literal meaning.
1. mahājana-kāya a collection of people, a crowd SN iv.191; SN v.170; Vv-a 78 ■ bala˚ a great crowd Snp p.105; Dhp-a i.193, Dhp-a i.398.
2. group or division: satta kāyā akaṭā, etc. (seven eternal groups or principles) DN i.56 = MN i.517 = SN iii.211 (in Pakudha Kaccāyana’s theory); with reference to groups of sensations or sense-organs, as vedanā-kāya, saññā˚, viññāṇa˚ phassa˚, etc. SN iii.60, SN iii.61; DN iii.243, DN iii.244; taṇhā DN iii.244; appl. to hatthi˚, ratha˚, patti˚, groups of elephants, carriages or soldiers SN i.72 ■ A good idea of the extensive meaning of kāya may be gathered from the classification of the 7 kāyas at Ja ii.91, viz. camma˚ dāru˚, loha˚, ayo˚, vāluka˚, udaka˚, phalaka˚, or “bodies” (great masses, substances) of skin, wood copper, iron, sand, water, and planks ■ Var. other combns: Asura˚ AN i.143; DN iii.7; Ābhassara˚ (“world of radiance”) DN i.17 = DN iii.29, DN iii.84; Deva˚ SN i.27, SN i.30; DN iii.264 (˚nikāya); dibbā kāyā AN i.143; Tāvatiṃsa DN iii.15.
Applied meaning.-I. Kāya under the physical aspect is an aggregate of a multiplicity of elements which finally can be reduced to the four “great elements, viz. earth, water, fire, and air (DN i.55). This “heap,” in the valuation of the Wise (muni), shares with all other objects the qualities of such elements and is therefore regarded as contemptible, as something which one has to get rid of, as a source of impurity. It is subject to time and change, it is built up and kept alive by cravings, and with death it is disintegrated into the elements. But the kamma which determined the appearance of this physical body has naturally been renewed and assumes a new form. II. Kāya under the psychological aspect is the seat of sensation (Dhs §§ 613 16), and represents the fundamental organ of touch which underlies all other sensation. Developed only in later thought Dhs-a. 311 cf. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Bud. Psy Ethics lvi. ff.; Bud. Psy. 143, 185 f.
I. (Physical).-(a) Understanding of the body is attained through introspection (sati). In the group of the four sati-paṭṭhānas, the foundations of introspection the recognition of the true character of “body” comes first (see Vb 193). The standing formula of this recognition is kāye kāyānupassī… contemplating body as an accumulation, on which follows the description of this aggregate: “he sees that the body is clothed in skin, full of all kinds of dirty matter, and that in this body there are hair, nails, teeth,” etc. (the enumeration of the 32 ākāras, as given Kp iii.). The conclusions drawn from this meditation give a man the right attitude. The formula occurs frequently, both in full and abridged, e.g. DN ii.293, DN ii.294; DN iii.104, DN iii.141; AN iii.323 = AN v.109; SN iv.111 = SN v.278; Vb 193, Vb 194 Ne 83, Ne 123; with slight variation: kāye asubhânupassī… AN iii.142 sq.; AN v.109 (under asubhasaññā) Iti 81; cp. kāye aniccânupassī SN iv.211; and kāyagatā sati ■ This accumulation is described in another formula with: ayaṃ… kāyo rūpī cātum(m)ahābhūtiko mātā-pettika-sambhavo odana-kummās’ upacayo etc. “this body has form (i.e. is material, visible) is born from mother and father, is a heap of gruel and sour milk, is subject to constant dressing and tending to breaking up and decay,” etc., with inferences DN i.55 = SN iii.207; SN ii.94; SN iv.194; SN v.282, SN v.370; DN i.76 DN i.209; MN i.144, MN i.500; MN ii.17; AN iv.386 = SN iv.83.
(b) Various qualities and functions of the material body. As trunk of the body (opposed to pakkhā and sīsa) SN ii.231; also at Pv i.83; as depending on nourishment (āhāra-ṭṭhitika, etc.) Sv.64; AN ii.145 (with taṇhā māna, methuna); as needing attention: see ˚parihārika. As saviññāṇaka, having consciousness AN iv.53; SN ii.252 = SN iii.80, SN iii.103, SN iii.136, SN iii.169; cp. āyu usmā ca viññānaṃ yadā kāyaṃ jahant’ imaṃ SN iii.143. As in need of breathing assāsa-passāsa SN v.330, SN v.336; as tired fatigued (kilanta-kāya) kilanta-kāyā kilanta-cittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti “tired in body, tired in mind these gods fall out of this assembly” (DN i.20; DN iii.32≈) in other connection Pv-a 43; see also kilanta. kāyo kilanto DN iii.255 sq.; = AN iv.332; SN v.317; MN i.116 jiṇṇassa me… kāyo na paleti Snp 1144; ātura-kāyo SN iii.1 (cittaṃ anāturaṃ); paripuṇṇa-k˚ suruci sujāto etc., with a perfect body (of the Buddha) Snp 548 Thag 818; cp. mahā-k˚ (of Brahmins) Snp 298. The body of a Buddha is said to be endowed with the 32 signs of a great man: Bhagavato kāye dvattiṃsa mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni… Snp p.107, cp. 549. The Tathāgata is said to be dhamma-kāyo “author and speaker of Doctrine,” in the same sense Brahma-kāyo “the best body” (i.e. of Doctrine) DN iii.84 (Dial. iii, 81).
(c) Valuation of physical body. From the contemplating of its true character (kāyânupassī) follows its estimation as a transient, decaying, and repulsive object-kāye anicc’ ânupassī SN iv.211 (and vay’ ânupassī nirodh’ ânupassī), so also asubhânupassī Iti 81 kāyañ ca bhindantaṃ ñatvā Iti 69; evaṃdhammo (i.e. a heap of changing elements) AN iii.324; aciraṃ vat ayaṃ kāyo paṭhaviṃ adhisessati chuddho apetaviññāṇo niratthaṃ va kaliṅgaraṃ Dhp 41. pittaṃ semhañ ca vamati kāyamhā Snp 198. As bahu-dukkho bahuādīnavo AN v.109; as anicca dukkha, etc. MN i.500; MN ii.17 kāyena aṭṭiyamānā harayamānā SN iv.62; SN v.320 dissati imassa kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi ādānam pi nikkhepanam pi SN ii.94 ■ This body is eaten by crows and vultures after its death: SN v.370. Represented as pūti˚; foul SN i.131; SN iii.120 ■ Bdhgh. at Vism 240 defines kāya as “catu-mahābhūtika pūti-kāya” (cp similar passages on p. 367: patthaddho bhavati kāyo pūtiko bhavati kāyo).
(d) Similes.-Out of the great number of epithets (adhivacanāni) and comparisons only a few can be mentioned (cp. above under def. & syn.): The body is compared to an abscess (gaṇḍa) SN iv.83 = AN iv.386; a city (nagara) SN iv.194; a cart (ratha) SN iv.292; an anthill (vammīka) MN i.144; all in reference to its consisting of the four fundamental elements, cp. also: pheṇ ûpamaṃ kāyaṃ imaṃ viditvā “knowing that the body is like froth” Dhp 46; kumbh’ ûpamaṃ kāyaṃ imaṃ viditvā nagar’ ûpamaṃ cittaṃ idaṃ ṭhapetvā Dhp 40 the body is as fragile as a water-pot.
(e) Dissolution of the body is expressed in the standard phrase: kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā…, i.e. after death… upon which usually follows the mention of one of the gatis, the destinies which the new kāya has to experience, e.g. DN i.82, DN i.107, DN i.143, DN i.162, DN i.245, DN i.247, DN i.252 DN iii.96, DN iii.97, DN iii.146, DN iii.181, DN iii.235; MN i.22; SN i.94; SN iii.241; Dhp 140; Iti 12, Iti 14; Ja i.152; Pv-a 27, etc., etc. Cp. also iv.
II. (Psychological).-As the seat of feeling, kāya is the fifth in the enumeration of the senses (āyatanāni) It is ajjhattika as sense (i.e. subjective) and its object is the tangible (phoṭṭhabba). The contact between subject and object consists either in touching (phusitvā or in sensing (viññeyya). The formulas vary, but are in essence the same all through, e.g. kāya-viññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā DN i.245; kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā DN iii.226, DN iii.250, DN iii.269; MN i.33; MN ii.42; SN iv.104, SN iv.112 kāyena phusitvā AN v.11; kāyo c’ eva phoṭṭhabbā ca DN iii.102. Best to be grouped here is an application of kāya in the sense of the self as experiencing a great joy the whole being, the “inner sense,” or heart. This realization of intense happiness (such as it is while it lasts), pīti-sukha, is the result of the four stages of meditation, and as such it is always mentioned after the jhānas in the formula: so imaṃ eva kāyaṃ vivekajena pīti-sukhena abhisandeti… “His very body does he so pervade with the joy and ease born of detachment from worldliness” DN i.73 sq. = MN i.277; AN ii.41 etc ■ A similar context is that in which kāya is represented as passaddha, calmed down, i.e. in a state which is free from worldly attachment (vivekaja). This “peace” of the body (may be translated as “my senses my spirits” in this connection) flows out of the peace of the mind and this is born out of the joy accompanying complete satisfaction (pamuditā) in attaining the desired end. The formula is pamuditassa pīti jāyati pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati DN iii.241, DN iii.288; SN iv.351; MN i.37; AN iii.21, AN iii.285; AN iv.176; AN v.3, AN v.333; Vb 227. Similarly: pamuditāya pīti jāyati, pītimanāya kāyo p˚ passadhakāyā sukhaṃ ved˚ Vin i.294 (c̣p. Vin. Texts ii.224: “all my frame will be at peace,” or “individuality”; see note) passaddhakāya-sankhāra mentioned at AN v.29 sq. is one of the ten ariya-vāsā, the noblest conditions. A quasi-analogy between kāya and kāma is apparent from a number of other passages kāya-chando-˚sneho-˚anvayatā pahīyati MN i.500; ajjhattañ ca bahiddha ca kāye chandaṃ virājaye Snp 203 kāye avigata-rāgo hoti (kāme, rūpe) DN iii.238 = AN iii.249; madhurakajāto viya kāyo SN iii.106; AN iii.69.
III. (Ethical).-Kāya is one of the three channels by which a man’s personality is connected with his environment & by which his character is judged, viz action, the three being kāya, vacī (vāca) and manas These three; kammantas, activities or agents, form the three subdivisions of the sīla, the rules of conduct Kāya is the first and most conspicuous agent, or the principle of action κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν, character in its pregnant sense.
Kāya as one of a triad.-Its usual combination is in the formula mentioned, and as such found in the whole of the Pāli Canon. But there is also another combination found only in the older texts, viz. kayenā vācāya uda cetasā: yañ ca karoti kāyena vācāya uda cetasā taṃ hi tassa sakaṃ hoti tañ ca ādāya gacchati SN i.93 yo dhammacārī kāyena vācāya uda cetasā idh eva nam pasaṃsanti pacca sagge pamodati SN i.102 ■ So also at AN i.63; Snp 232. Besides in formula arakkhitena kāyena a˚ vācāya a˚ cittena SN ii.231 = SN ii.271; SN iv.112. With su- and duccarita the combn is extremely frequent e.g. SN i.71, SN i.72; MN i.22, etc., etc. In other comb we have kāya-(v˚., m.˚) kamma, moneyya, soceyya, etc-k˚. v˚. m˚. hiṃsati SN i.165; saṃsappati AN v.289 sq. kāye (v˚. m˚.) sati kāya-sañcetanā-hetu uppajjati SN ii.39 sq.; The variations of k-in the ethics of the Dhamma under this view of k˚. v˚. m˚. are manifold, all based on the fundamental distinctions between good and bad, all being the raison d’être of kamma: yaṃ… etarahi kammaṃ karoti kāyena v. m. idaṃ vuccati navakammaṃ SN iv.132 ■ Passages with reference to good works are e.g. DN iii.245; AN i.151; AN v.302 sq.; (see also Kamma ii.2 b. c.) ■ With reference to evil SN iii.241, SN iii.247; AN i.201; kin nu kāyena vācāya manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ Pv ii.13 and passim. Assutavā puthujjano tīhi ṭhānehi micchā paṭipajjati kāyena v. m SN ii.151; pāpaṃ na kayirā vacasā manasā kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloke SN i.12 = SN i.31; yassa kāyena vācāya manasā n’atthi dukkaṭaṃ saṃvutaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi, tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ Dhp 391 = Ne 183. Kāyena saṃvaro sādhu sādhu vācāya saṃvaro manasā saṃvaro sādhu sādhu sabbattha saṃvaro Dhp 361 = SN i.73; Mil 399; ye ca kāyena v. m. ca susaṃvutā na te Māravasânugā na te Mārassa paccagū SN i.104; vācānurakkhī manasā susaṃvuto kāyena ca akusalaṃ na kayirā Dhp 281 = Ne 183.
Kāya as one of a dyad: vācā and kāya: SN i.172 (˚gutta) MN i.461 (rakkhita and a˚); Pv i.22 (˚saññatā and opp.); Vism 28 (k˚-vacī-kamma); Pv-a 98.
Kāya alone as a collective expression for the three: AN i.54; Dhp 259, Dhp 391; Snp 206, Snp 407; kāye avītarāgo MN i.101; AN iii.249; AN iv.461 sq.; ˚-samācāra SN v.354 kāyaṃ paṇidhāya Pts i.175; Vb 244 = Vb 252; bhāvita and a˚ MN i.239; AN i.250; AN iii.106 sq., cp.: kāya-ppakopaṃ rakkheyya, kāyena saṃvuto siyā kāyaduccaritaṃ hitvā kāyena sucaritaṃ care Dhp 231. Ahiṃsakā ye munayo niccaṃ kāyena saṃvutā Dhp 225.
Kāya in combn with citta: ṭhito va kāyo hoti ṭhitaṃ cittaṃ… SN v.74; anikaṭṭha-kāyo nikaṭṭha-citto AN ii.137; sāraddha-kāyo sankiliṭṭha-citto AN v.93 = AN v.95 AN v.97; bhāvita-kāyo, ˚sīlo, ˚citto, ˚pañño SN iv.111; AN iv.111; AN v.42 sq. Apakassa kāyaṃ apakassa cittaṃ SN ii.198. Kāya-citta-passaddhi, etc. Dhs §§ 29
51 In these six couples (or yugalas) later Abhidhamma distinguished kāya as = the cetasikas (mental properties or the vedanā, saññā and sankhārā khandhas), body being excluded. Cpd. 96. See also combn kilantakāya kilanta-citta under kilamati.
IV. (Various).-Kāyena (i.e. “visibly”) aññamaññaṃ passituṃ AN ii.61; as nānatta˚ and ekatta˚ at AN iv.39 = Nd ii.570. The relation between rūpa-kāya (= cātumahābhūtika), and nāma-kāya, the mental compound (= vedanā saññā, etc.) is discussed at Ne 77, Ne 78, and Pts i.183 sq., see also SN ii.24. K. is anattā, i.e. k. has no soul AN v.109; SN iv.166. n’âyaṃ kāyo tumhākaṃ n’āpi paresaṃ, purāṇaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ… “neither is this body yours, nor anyone else’s: it is (the appearance of) former karma” SN ii.64, SN ii.65 = Nd ii.680. Dissamānena kāyena and upaḍḍha-dissamānena SN i.156. Manomaya-kāya a body made by the mind (cp. Vv-a 10 and DN-a i.110, DN-a i.120, DN-a i.222) according to Bdhgh only at the time of jhāna SN v.282 sq.; manomaya pīti-bhakkha sayaṃpabha DN i.17 = Vv-a 10; manomayaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimmināya… DN i.77; m˚ sabbanga-paccangī DN i.34, DN i.77, DN i.186, DN i.195 ■ Under the control of psychic powers (iddhi): kāyena va saṃvatteti he does as he likes with his body, i.e. he walks on water, is ubiquitous, etc (yāva brahmalokā pi: even up to heaven) SN v.265; DN i.78 = AN i.170: see also S v.283, 284 ■ In the various stages of Saṃsāra; kāyaṃ nikkhipati he lays down his (old) body SN iv.60, SN iv.400; cp. SN iii.241 (ossaṭṭha-kāya) referring to continuous change of body during day and night (of a Petī) Pv ii.1211.
-aṅga a limb of the body, kāy’angaṃ vāc’angaṃ vā na kopenti: they remain motionless and speechless (ref. to the bhikkhus begging) Ja iii.354; Dhs-a 93, Dhs-a 240; -ānupassin in combn kāye kāyânupassī “realizing in the body an aggregate” DN ii.94, DN ii.100, DN ii.291 sq.; DN iii.58 DN iii.77, DN iii.141, DN iii.221, DN iii.276; MN i.56; AN i.39, AN i.296; AN ii.256; AN iii.449 AN iv.300, AN iv.457 sq.; SN iv.211; SN v.9, SN v.75, SN v.298, SN v.329 sq.; Vb 193 sq.; 236; see also above. Der.: ˚anupassanā Ps. i.178, 184; ii.152, 163, 232; ˚passita Nett. 123 -āyatana the sense of touch DN iii.243, DN iii.280, DN iii.290; Dhs 585, Dhs 613, Dhs 653, Dhs 783;- indriya same DN iii.239; Dhs 585 Dhs 613, Dhs 972; -ujjukatā straightness of body (+ citta˚, of thought) Dhs 53, Dhs 277, Dhs 330; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20 -ūpaga going to a (new) body SN ii.24; -kamma “bodily action,” deed performed by the body in contradistinction to deeds by speech or thought (see above DN i.250; DN iii.191, DN iii.245, DN iii.279; MN i.415; MN iii.206; AN i.104 AN iii.6, AN iii.9, AN iii.141 sq.; AN v.289; Thig 277; Pts ii.195; Dhs 981 Dhs 1006; Vb 208, Vb 321, Vb 366; Pp 41; Bdhd 69; Dhs-a 68 Dhs-a 77, Dhs-a 344. -kammaññatā wieldiness, alertness of the bodily senses included under nāmakāya Dhs 46, Dhs 277 Dhs 326. -kammanta = ˚kamma, in comb. ˚sampatti and ˚sandosa AN v.292, AN v.294, AN v.297; MN i.17. -kali “the misfortune of having a body” = this miserable body Thig 458, Thig 501; Thag-a 282, Thag-a 291; -kasāva bodily impurity or depravity AN i.112; -gata “relating to the body, always combined with sati in the same sense as ˚anupassin (see above) SN i.188; MN iii.92; AN i.44; Snp 340 (cp. Snp-a 343); Thag 468, Thag 1225; Ja i.394; Dhp 293 Ne 39; Dhp 299; Mil 248, Mil 336, Mil 393; Vism 111, Vism 197 Vism 240 sq. -gantha bodily tie or fetter (binding one to saṃsāra), of which there are four: abhijjhā, byāpāda sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṃ-saccâbhinivesa DN iii.230; SN v.59 = Dhs 1135 = Vb 374; cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs trsl. p. 304;- gandha spelling for ˚gantha at Ne 115 Ne 119; -gutta one who guards his body, i.e. controls his action (+ vacīgutta) SN i.172 = Snp 74; -gutti the care or protection of the body Vin i.295; Ja ii.162; -citta body and mind: ˚ābādha physical and mental disease Ja iv.166; see other combns above; -ḍāha fever Vin i.214; -tapana chastisement of body, curbing one’s material desires, asceticism Pv-a 98. -thāma physical strength Ja iii.114; -daratha bodily distress Ja v.397 Ja vi.295; -daḷha bodily vigour Vin ii.76, Vin ii.313; -dukkha bodily pain (+ ceto˚) MN iii.288; -duccarita misconduct by the body, evil deeds done through the instrumentality of the body (cp. ˚kamma) DN iii.52, DN iii.96, DN iii.111, DN iii.214; AN i.48; Dhp 231; Iti 54, Iti 58; Dhs 300, Dhs 1305; Bdhd 16, 20 -duṭṭhulla unchastity Thag 114; -dvāra the channel or outlet of bodily senses Ja i.276; Ja iv.14; Vv-a 73; Dhp-a iv.85; Bdhd 69; -dhātu the “element” of body, i.e. the faculty of touch, sensibility Dhs 613; Kv 12 -pakopa blameworthy conduct, misbehaviour (+ vacī˚ mano˚) Dhp 231 = Dhp-a 330; -pacālaka (nt.) shaking or swaying the body, “swaggering” Vin ii.213; -paṭibaddha 1. adj. (of the breath), dependent on, or connected with the body SN iv.293; attached or bound to the body Ja iii.377; Ja v.254; Ja v.2. m. an article of dress worn on the body Vin iii.123, Vin iv.214; -payoga the instrumentality or use of the body DN-a i.72 = Dhs-a 98 -pariyantika limited by the body, said of vedanā, sensation SN v.320 = AN ii.198; -parihārika tending or protecting the body DN i.71 = AN ii.209 = Pp 58; Vism 65 (cīvara); DN-a i.207; -pasāda clearness of the sense of touch or sense in general Dhs-a 306; Bdhd 62, 66, 74 cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 173n, 198n; -passaddhi serenity or quietude of the senses SN iv.125 (cp. iv.351 and above) v.66, 104; Dhs 40, Dhs 277, Dhs 320; Dhs-a 130; Bdhd 16, 19 29; -pāgabbhiya “body-forwardness” immodesty lasciviousness, gener. said of women Ja ii.32; Ja v.449 -pāgabbhiniya same Ja i.288; -pāguññatā good condition of the mental faculties, fitness of sense, opp. kāyagelañña apathy Dhs 46, Dhs 277, Dhs 326; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -phandita (nt.) bodily activity Ja iii.25 -baddha fastened to the body, appl. to robes DN-a i.207 -bandhana a girdle or waistband Vin i.46, Vin i.51; Vin ii.118 Vin ii.135, Vin ii.177, Vin ii.213, Vin ii.266; MN i.237; -bala physical strength Pv-a 30; -bhāvanā meditation or training with regard to action DN iii.219; MN i.237; cp. Mil 85; -macchera “body-selfishness,” pampering the body Thag 1033 -mudutā pliability of sense = ˚kammaññatā Dhs 44 Dhs 277, Dhs 324; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -muni a sage with regard to action Iti 56; -moneyya the true wisdom regarding the use of the body as an instrument of action Iti 56 Iti 67; DN iii.220; AN i.273; Nd ii.514; -ratha the “carriagelike” body Ja vi.253; -lahutā buoyancy of sense ˚muduta, same loci; -vaṅka crookedness of action AN i.112; -vikāra change of position of the body Ja iii.354 -vijambhana alertness Dhp-a iv.113; -viññatti intimation by body, i.e. merely by one’s appearance, appl chiefly to the begging bhikkhu Dhs 585, Dhs 636, Dhs 654, Dhs 844; Dhs-a 82, Dhs-a 301; Mil 229, Mil 230; Vism 448; Bdhd 69, 70 -viññāṇa consciousness by means of touch, sensory consciousness DN iii.243; Dhs 556, Dhs 585, Dhs 651, Dhs 685, Dhs 790; Mil 59; Vb 180; ˚dhātu element of touch-consciousness Dhs 560; Vb 88; Kv 12; -viññeyya to be perceived by the sense of touch (+ phoṭṭhabba, see above DN i.245; DN ii.281; DN iii.234; MN i.85, MN i.144; Dhs 589, Dhs 967 Dhs 1095; Vb 14; Kv 210; Mil 270; -vipphandana throbbing of the body, bodily suffusion, appld to ˚vinnatti Bdhd 69, 70; Dhs-a 323; -viveka seclusion of the body, hermitism Ja i.289; Dhs-a 165; -vūpakāsa ˚viveka DN iii.285 (+ citta˚ “singleness” of heart) -veyyāvacca menial duties Ja i.12; ˚kara a servant Ja ii.334; -veyyāvaṭika same Ja vi.418; Snp p.104; Dhp-a i.27; ˚kamma id. Ja v.317 (= veyyāvacca) Dhs-a 160; -saṃsagga bodily contact, sexual intercourse Vin iii.121, Vin iii.190; Ja vi.566; -sakkhin he who has realized and gained the final truth concerning the body (cp ˚anupassin) DN iii.105, DN iii.254; MN i.478 = Pp 14, Pp 29; MN ii.113; MN iii.45; AN i.74; AN i.118; AN iv.10, AN iv.451; AN v.23; Pts ii.52, Pts ii.62; Ne 190; Kv 58; Vism 93, Vism 387. -saṅkhāra the material aggregate, substratum of body Vin iii.71; SN ii.40; SN iii.125; SN iv.293; AN i.122; AN ii.158 AN ii.231; Pts i.184, Pts i.186; Vism 530. -saṅgaha control of body (+ citta˚) Ne 91; -sañcetanā (-hetu) ground (for the rise of), material, i.e. impure thoughts AN ii.157 Vism 530 (+ vacī˚, mano˚). -samācāra (good) conduct as regards one’s actions DN ii.279 (+ vacī˚) MN i.272 sq. MN ii.113; MN iii.45; SN v.354; AN iii.186 sq. -sampīlana crushing the body (of dukkha) Ne 29; -samphassa the sense of touch (see āyatana) DN iii.243; SN v.351; Dhs 585, Dhs 616, Dhs 651, Dhs 684; ˚ja arisen through touch or sensibility DN iii.244; Dhs 445, Dhs 558; -sucarita good conduct in action, as one of the three ˚kammāni (vacī˚, mano˚ DN iii.52, DN iii.96, DN iii.111, DN iii.169, DN iii.215; Iti 55, Iti 59, Iti 99, Dhs 1306 -suci purity of body, i.e. of action (+ vacī˚, ceto˚ AN i.273; Iti 55; -soceyya purification of body (+ vacī˚ mano˚) DN iii.219; AN i.271; AN v.264, AN v.266; Iti 55.
der. probably fr. ci, cinoti to heap up, cp. nikāya heaping up, accumulation or collection; Sk. kāya
(adj.) 1. belonging to the body, i.e. felt by the body (experienced by the senses), or resulting from the body, i.e. done by the body (= acted as opposed to spoken or thought). sukhaṃ physical happiness (opp. cetasika˚) SN v.209; AN i.81; dukkhaṃ DN ii.306; MN i.302 (opp. cetasikaṃ); kāyikaṃ (sc. dhammaṃ sikkhati to teach the conduct of body (opp. vācasikaṃ Vin ii.248. In comb. with vācasika also at SN i.190 Pp 21; Vism 18 (of anācara); Pv-a 119 (of saṃyama control) Shhp 55; Bdhd 26, 134; referring to diff. kinds of amusements Nd ii.219 = Snp-a 86. 2 ■ ˚ (of devas belonging to the company of-: ˚ DN i.220; gandhabba Pv-a 119. Kayura & Kayura;
fr. kāya
1. an ornamental bracket or ring worn on the upper arm (bāh’âlankāra Pv; bhuj˚ Vv) or neck (gīvāya pilandhana Ja iii.437); a bracelet or necklace Vin ii.106; Ja iii.437; Ja iv.92; Pv iii.93; Vv 362.
2. adj as sakāyura raṭṭha having the insignia “regis” Ja v.289 = Ja v.486.
see also keyūra, which is the only form in Sk.
(adj.) wearing bracelets Pv iii.91.
fr. last
secondary root of karoti, in denom. and intensive function in kāra, kāraka, kāraṇa, kārin, kāreti and their derivations.
1. abs. (a) deed, service, act of mercy or worship, homage: kāra-paṇṇaka Ja vi.24 (vegetable as oblation); appako pi kato kāro devûpapattiṃ āvahati “even a small gift of mercy brings about rebirth among the gods” Pv-a 6. -kāraka one who performs a religious duty DN i.61 (= DN-a i.170). (b) doing manner, way: yena kārena akattha tena k˚ pavattamānaṃ phalaṃ “as you have done so will be the fruit Pv-a 45.
2. (-˚) (a) the production or application of i.e. the state or quality of…: atta˚; one’s own state = ahaṃ kāra, individuality; para˚; the personality of others AN iii.337; citti˚; reflection, thought Pv-a 26; see e.g. andha˚; darkness, sak˚; homage, etc ■ balakkārena forcibly Pv-a 68 ■ (b) as ttg. the item, i.e. particle letter, sound or word, e.g. ma-kāra the letter m Pv-a 52; ca-kāra the particle ca Pv-a 15; sa-kāra the sound sa Snp-a 23 ■ (c) (adj.-n.) [cp. kara] one who does handles or deals with: ayakāra iron-smith Mil 331.
fr. kār-, cp. Vedic kāra song of praise, which is, however, derived fr. kṛ = kir to praise; also Vedic ˚kāra in brāhma˚, fr. kṛ;
(usually -˚) the doer (of): Vin ii.221 (capu-capu˚); sāsana˚ he who does according to (my) advice Snp 445 Bdhd 85 sq ■ f. kārikā: veyyāvacca˚ a servant Pv-a 65 (text reads ˚tā); as n. the performance of (-˚) service: dukkara-kārikā the performance of evil deeds SN i.103; Thig 413 (= Thag-a 267). -agga-kārikā first test, sample Vin iii.80.
(nt.) 1 ■ (a) a deed, action, performance, esp. an act imposed or inflicted upon somebody by a higher authority (by the king as representative of justice or by kamma MN iii.181; see kamma 11 3.A b.) as an ordeal, a feat or punishment: a labour or task in the sense of the 12 labours of Heracles or the labours of Hades. kāraṇaṃ kārāpeti “he makes somebody perform the task. Pass, kāraṇaṃ or kāraṇā karīyati. Thus as a set of five tasks or purgatory obligations under the name of pañcavidha-bandhana “the group of five” (not, as Warren trsl. p. 257 “inflict on him the torture called the fivefold pinion”), a means of punishment in Niraya (q.v. under pañca). Not primarily torture (Rh. Davids, Mil trsl. i.254, and others with wrong derivation from kṛṇtati). At Dhp-a iii.70 these punishments are comprehended under the term dasa-dukkhakāraṇāni (the ten punishments in misery); the meaning “punishment” also at Ja iv.87 (tantarajjukaṃ k˚ṃ katvā), whereas at Ja vi.416 k. is directly paraphrased by “maraṇa,” as much as “killing.” Often spelt karaṇa q.v.; the spelling kāraṇā (as f.) at Mil 185 seems to be a later spelling for kāraṇaṃ. See karaṇa for further reference ■ Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ajja kāressati “what task will he impose on me to-day?” AN v.324; as pañcavidhabandhana K˚ AN i.141, Pv-a 251, Nd ii.304iii ■ As adj. ˚kāraṇa in dāruṇa˚ “being obliged to go through the dreadful trial” Pv-a 221 ■ (b) duty obligation, in kāraṇ’ âkāraṇā (pl.) duties great and small Dhp-a i.385 Cp. also kāraṇaṃ karoti to try MN i.444 ■ (c) a trick (i.e. a duty imposed by a higher authority through training) Ja ii.325 (ānañja˚); Mil 201 (ākāsa-gamana˚) 2 ■ (a) acting, action as (material) cause: k˚-bhūta being the cause of… Pv-a 15 ■ (b) (intellectual cause, reason Mil 150; Dhp-a i.389; esp. as-˚: arodana the reason for not crying Pv-a 63; asocana˚ same, ibid 62; āgamana˚ the reason for coming (here) ibid. 81 106. = pariyatti, Dhp-a. 36. = attha, SA on i.215, Snp-a i.238-instr. kāraṇena by necessity, needs Pv-a 195 tena k˚ therefore ibid. 40-abl. kāranā by means of through, by (= hetu or nissāya) Pv-a 27; imasmā k therefore Pv-a 40; kāraṇaṭṭhā (expl. as attha-kāraṇā Nd2) for the purpose of some object or advantage Snp 75; opp. nikkāraṇā from unselfishness ibid ■ sakāraṇa (adj.) with good reason (of vacana) Pv-a 109.
in meaning 1 represented in later Sk. by kāraṇā f., in meaning 2 = Sk. kāraṇa nt., equivalent to prakṛti, natural form, constituent, reason, cause
the meaning ought to be “one who is under a certain obligation” or “one who dispenses certain obligations.” In usu˚ SN ii.257 however used simply in the sense of making: arrow-maker fletcher. Perhaps the reading should be ˚kāraka.
der. fr. prec.
chaff, offal, sweepings, fig. dirt, impurity: yava˚ AN iv.169 (chaff) samaṇa˚ ibid ■ In passage kāraṇḍavaṃ niddhamatha kasambuṃ apakassatha AN iv.172 = Snp 281 = Mil 414 trsld by Rh. Davids Mil trsl. ii.363 “get rid of filth put aside rubbish from you,” expl. Snp-a 311 by kacavara (q.v.). Rh. D’s note3 loc. cit. is to be modified according to the parallel passages just given.
of uncertain etym., cp. karaṇḍa
a sort of duck Vv 358 (expld as also by Halāyudha 2, 99 by kādamba, black goose).
cp. Sk. kāraṇḍava
(f.) confinement, captivity, jail, in ˚bhedaka cora a thief who has broken out of jail Vin i.75.
cp. Sk. kārā
a schemer, inventor Ja vi.333.
fr. kārāpeti
see kāreti.
made to do Ja vi.374.
pp. of kārāpeti, Caus. of karoti
see kāraka
= kārikā (performance); see pāripūri˚.
(-˚) (adj.) doing: yathāvādī tathākārī “as he says so he does” DN iii.135, Snp 357; see for examples the various cpds. as kamma˚, kibbisa˚, khaṇḍa˚, chidda˚ dukkaṭa˚, dvaya˚, paccakkha˚, pubba˚, sakkacca˚ sampajāna˚, etc.
(adj.) to be done, neg. akāriya to be undone, (not) to be made good Iti 18.
grd. of kāreti, Caus. of karoti
(nt.) compassion (usually with anudayā and anukampā) SN ii.199; AN iii.189; Vism 300; Pv-a 75; Sdhp 509.
fr. karuṇa
(f.) compassionateness SN i.138.
(adj.) compassionate, merciful Pv ii.113; Pv-a 16; Bdhd 49; often with mahā˚;: of great mercy Sdhp 330, Sdhp 557; so of the Buddha: mahākāruṇika nātha “the Saviour of great mercy” in introductory stanzas to Pv and Vv.
fr. karuṇa
(Causative of karoti), to construct, to build, etc.; pp. kārita; der. -kārāpaṇa the construction of (vihāra˚ Dhp-a i.416. For details see karoti iv.; see also kārāpaka & kārāpita.;
(and Kāḷa )-Preliminary. 1. dark (syn. kaṇha, which cp. for meaning and applications), black, blueblack misty, cloudy. Its proper sphere of application is the dark as opposed to light, and it is therefore characteristic of all phenomena or beings belonging to the realm of darkness, as the night, the new moon, death ghosts, etc ■ There are two etymologies suggestible both of which may have been blended since IndoAryan times: (a) kāla = Sk. kāla, blue-black, kālī black cloud from *qāl (with which conn. *qel in kalanka spot, kalusa dirty, kammāsa speckled, Gr. κελαινός, Mhg. hilwe mist) = Lat. cālidus spot, Gr. κηλίς spot and κηλάς dark cloud; cp. Lat. cālīgo mist, fog, darkness-(b) see below, under note ■ Hence. 2. the morning mist, or darkness preceding light, daybreak morning (cp. E. morning = Goth. maúrgins twilight Sk. marka eclipse, darkness; and also gloaming gleaming = twilight), then: time in general, esp. a fixed time, a point from or to which to reckon, i.e. term or terminus (a quo or ad quem) ■ Note. The definition of colour-expressions is extremely difficult. To a primitive colour-sense the principal difference worthy of notation is that between dark and light, or dull and bright, which in their expressions, however, are represented as complements for which the same word may be used in either sense of the complementary part (dark for light and vice versa, cp. E. gleam → gloom). All we can say is that kāla belongs to the group of expressions for dark which may be represented simultaneously by black, blue, or brown. That on the other hand, black when polished or smooth, supplies also the notion of “shining” is evidenced by kāḷa and kaṇha as well as e.g. by *skei in Sk. chāyā = Gr. σκιά shadow as against Ags. hāēven “blue” (E. heaven) and Ohg skīnan, E. to shine and sky. The psychological value of a colour depends on its light-reflecting (or light-absorbing) quality. A bright black appears lighter (reflects more light) than a dull grey, therefore a polished (añjana) black (= sukāḷa) may readily be called “brilliant.” In the same way kāla, combined with other colour-words of black connotation does not need to mean “black,” but may mean simply a kind of black i.e. brown. This depends on the semasiological contrast or equation of the passage in question. Cp. Sk śyāma (dark-grey) and śyāva (brown) under kāsāya That the notion of the speckled or variegated colour belongs to the sphere of black, is psychologically simple (: dark specks against a light ground, cp. kammāsa), and is also shown by the second etymology of kāla = Sk śāra, mottled, speckled = Lat. caerulus, black-blue and perhaps caelum “the blue” (cp. heaven) = Gr. κηρύλος the blue ice-bird. (On k → s cp. kaṇṇa → śṛṇga, kilamati → śramati, kilissati → ślis˚; etc.) The usual spelling of kāla as kāḷa indicates a connection of the ḷ with the r of śāra ■ The definition of kāḷa as jhām’ angārasadisa is conventional and is used both by Bdhgh. and Dhpāla: Dhs-a 317 and Pv-a 90.
1. Kāḷa, dark, black, etc., in enumn of colours Vv 221 (see Vv-a 111). na kāḷo samaṇo Gotamo, na pi sāmo: mangura-cchavi samano G. “The ascetic Gotamo is neither black nor brown: he is of a golden skin” MN i.246; similarly as kāḷī vā sāmā vā manguracchavī vā of a kalyāṇī, a beautiful woman at DN I.193 MN ii.40; kāḷa-sāma at Vin iv.120 is to be taken as dark-grey ■ Of the dark half of the month: see ˚pakkha, or as the new moon: āgame kāḷe “on the next new moon day” Vin i.176 ■ of Petas: Pv ii.41 (kāḷī f.); Pv-a 561 (˚rūpa); of the dog of Yama (˚sunakha Pv-a 151 ■ In other connn: kāḷavaṇṇa-bhūmi darkbrown (i.e. fertile) soil Vin i.48 = Vin ii.209.
-añjana black collyrium Vin i.203; -ānusārī black (polished?) Anusāri (“a kind of dark, fragrant sandal wood” Vin. Texts ii.51) Vin i.203; SN iii.156 = SN v.44; AN v.22; -ayasa black (dark) iron (to distinguish it from bronze, Rh. D., Mil trsl. ii.364; cp. blacksmith → silversmith) Mil 414, Mil 415; -kañjaka a kind of Asuras Titans DN iii.7; Ja v.187; Pv-a 272; -kaṇṇī “black-cared, as an unlucky quality. Cp iii.611; Ja i.239; Ja iv.189 Ja v.134, Ja v.211; Ja vi.347; Dhp-a i.307; Dhp-a ii.26; the vision of the “black-eared” is a bad omen, which spoils the luck of a hunter, e.g. at Dhp-a iii.31 (referring here to the sight of a bhikkhu); as “witch” Pv-a 272; Dhp-a iii.38, Dhp-a iii.181 as k-k. sakuṇa, a bird of ill omen Ja ii.153; -kaṇṇika prec.; -kabara spotted, freckled Ja vi.540; -kesa (adj. with glossy or shiny hair, by itself (kāḷa-kesa) rare e.g. at Ja vi.578; usually in cpd. susukāḷa-kesa “having an over-abundance of brilliant hair” said of Gotama This was afterwards applied figuratively in the description of his parting from home, rising to a new life, as it were, possessed of the full strength and vigour of his manhood (as the rising Sun). Cp. the Shamash-Saga which attributes to the Sun a wealth of shiny, glossy (= polished, dark) hair (= rays), and kāḷa in this connection is to be interpreted just as kaṇha (q.v.) in similar combinations (e.g. as Kṛṣṇa Hṛṣīkesa or Kesavā) On this feature of the Sun-god and various expressions of it see ample material in Palmer, The Samson Saga pp. 33–46 ■ The double application of su˚ does not offer any difficulty, sukāḷa is felt as a simplex in the same way as εὐπλοκαμός or duh˚ in combns like sudubbala Pv-a 149, sudullabha Vv-a 20. Bdhgh. already interprets the cpd. in this way (DN-a i.284 = suṭṭhu-k˚ añjana-vaṇṇa k˚ va hutvā; cp. kaṇh-añjana Ja v.155) Cp. also siniddha-nīla-mudu-kuñcita-keso Ja i.89, and sukaṇhakaṇha Ja v.202 ■ susukāḷakesa of others than the Buddha: MN ii.66. Modern editors and lexicographers see in susu˚ the Sk. śiśu young of an animal, cub, overlooking the semantical difficulty involved by taking it as a separate word. This mistake has been applied to the compound at all the passages where it is found, and so we find the reading susu kāḷakeso at MN i.82 = AN ii.22 = Ja ii.57; MN i.163 = AN i.68 = SN i.9, SN i.117; also in Childers’ (relying on Burnouf), or even susū k˚ at SN iv.111; the only passages showing the right reading susu-k˚ are DN i.115, MN i.463. Konow under susu J.P.T.S. 1909 212 has both. -kokila the black (brown) cuckoo Vv-a 57; -jallika (kāḷi˚ for kāḷa˚) having black drops or specks (of dirt) AN i.253; -daṇḍa a black staff, Sdhp 287 (attr. to the messengers of Yama, cp. Yama as having a black stick at Śat. Br. xi. 6, 1, 7 and 13); -pakkha the dark side, i.e. moonless fortnight of the month AN ii.18-˚ cātuddasī the 14th day of the dark fortnight Pv-a 55-˚ ratti a moonless night Vv-a 167; (opp. dosina r. -meyya a sort of bird Ja vi.539; -loṇa black (dark) salt Vin i.202 (Bdhgh. pakati-loṇa, natural salt); -loha “black metal,” iron ore Mil 267; -valli a kind of creeper Vism 36, Vism 183. -sīha a special kind of lion Ja iv.208. -sutta a black thread or wire, a carpenter’s measuring line Ja ii.405; Mil 413; also Name of a Purgatory (nivaya) Ja v.266. See Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76- 78 -hatthin “black elephant,” an instrument of torture in Avīci Sdhp 195.
2. Kāla time, etc. (a) Morning: kāle early Pv ii.941 (= pāto Pv-a 128), kālassa in the morning (geName of time), early Vv-a 256. Cp. paccūsa-kāle at dawn Dhp-a iii.242. Opposed to evening or night in kāḷena in the morning Pv i.63 (opp. sāyaṃ). Kāle juṇhe by day and by night Nd ii.631 ■ (b) time in general: gacchante gacchante kāle in course of time Dhp-a i.319 evaṃ gacchante kāle as time went on Pv-a 54, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 127 etc ■ kālaṃ for a time Vin i.176 (spelt kāḷaṃ); kañci kālaṃ some time yet Vv-a 288; ettakaṃ kālaṃ for a long time Pv-a 102 ■ kālena kālaṃ (1) from time to time Pv-a 151; Vv-a 255, Vv-a 276 ■ (2) continuously constantly AN iv.45; Pp 11 (+ samayena samayaṃ) DN i.74 (: but expld at DN-a i.218 by kāle kāle in the sense of “every fortnight or every ten days”). kāle in (all) time, always (cp. αἰεί) Snp 73 (expl. in Nd ii.by niccakāle under sadā; but at Snp-a 128 by phāsu-kālena “in good time”); -kāle kāle from time to time, or repeatedly Vv-a 352. See also cira˚, sabba˚ ■ (c) Time in special, either (1) appointed time, date, fixed time or (2) suitable time, proper time, good time, opportunity Cp. Gr. καιρίς and ὡρα; or (3) time of death, death. (1) Mealtime: Pv-a 25; Vv-a 6; esp. in phrase kālo bho Gotamo, niṭṭhitaṃ bhattaṃ “it is time, Gotama, the meal is ready” DN i.119 = DN i.226; Snp p.111; and in kālaṃ āroceti or ārocāpeti he announces the time (for dinner DN i.109, DN i.226; Snp p.111; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 141; Vv-a 173. -date: kālato from the date or day of…, e.g. diṭṭha˚ paṭṭhāya “from the day that she first saw her” Vv-a 206 gihī˚ paṭṭhāya “from the day of being a layman Pv-a 13. (2) proper time, right time: also season, as in utu˚; favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; Vin ii.173 kālaṃ jānāti “he knows the proper time” A iv.114; as cattāro kālā, four opportunities AN ii.140; yassa kālaṃ maññasi for what you think it is time (to go), i.e. goodbye DN i.106, DN i.189, etc. The 3 times of the cycle of existence are given at Vism 578 as past, present, and future ■ kāla˚; (adj.) in (due) time, timely Vism 229 (˚maraṇa timely death) ■ Opp. akāla (it is the) wrong time or inopportune DN i.205; akāla-cārin going (begging at the improper time Snp 386. akālamegha a cloud arising unexpectedly (at the wrong time) Mil 144- kāle at the proper time, with vikāle (opp.) Vin i.199 Vin i.200; Ja ii.133; Snp 386. akāle in the wrong season Vv-a 288. kālena in proper time, at the right moment AN ii.140; Snp 326, Snp 387 (= yutta kālena Snp-a 374) Pv i.53 (= ṭhitakālena Pv-a 26); Pp 50; Iti 42; Kp-a 144 (= khaṇena samayena). Cp. vikāla. (3) The day as appointed by fate or kamma, point of time (for death, cp. Vism 236), the “last hour,” cp. ἠμαρ, illa dies. So in the meaning of death appld not only to this earthly existence, but to all others (peta˚, deva˚, etc. as well, in phrase kālaṃ karoti “he does his time = he has fulfilled his time” Vin iii.80; Snp 343, Dhp-a i.70 and frequently elsewhere; cp ■ kata,-kiriyā ■ As death in kālaṃ kankhati to await the appointed time SN i.187; Snp 516 (cp. kankhati) and in dern kālika ■ Other examples for this use of kāla see under bhatta˚, yañña˚ vappa˚.
-antara interval, period: kālantarena in a little while Pv-a 13; na kālantare at once Pv-a 19; -kata (adj. dead Snp 586, Snp 590; in combn petā kālakatā “the Petas who have fulfilled their (earthly) time Snp 807; Pv i.57i.121. Also as kālaṅkata Pv ii.79; Vv 809; Vism 296 -kiriyā death (often combd with maraṇa) MN ii.108; AN i.22, AN i.77, AN i.261 (as bhaddikā, cp. AN iii.293); iv.320; Snp 694; Pv i.1012 (of a Petī who has come to the end of her existence); Dhp-a ii.36; Dhp-a iv.77. -gata = ˚kata Pv-a 29, Pv-a 40. -ññū knowing the proper time for… (c dat. or loc.) Snp 325; described at AN iv.113 sq.; as one of the five qualities of a rājā cakkavattī (viz. atthaññū dhamma˚, matta˚, k˚, parisa˚) AN iii.148; one of the seven qual. of a sappurisa, a good man (= prec. + atta˚ puggala˚) DN iii.252, DN iii.283; as quality of the Tathāgata DN iii.134 = Nd ii.276; Pp 50. -ññutā n. abstr. to prec AN ii.101; -(p)pavedana announcement of death (-time Thag 563 = Ja i.118 = Vism 389 = Dhp-a i.248. -bhojana in a˚ eating at the improper time SN v.470; -vādin speaking at the proper time, in formula kāla˚ bhūta˚ attha dhamma˚ vinaya˚ under sīla No. 7: DN i.4; DN iii.175; DN-a i.76; AN ii.22, AN ii.209; Pp 58; -vipassin considering the right moment, taking the opportunity Iti 41. -sataṃ (˚sahassaṃ, etc.) a hundred (thousand, etc.) times Vism 243.
(adj.) belonging to time, in time, as sabba-kālika always in time, cp. Gr. ὡραϊος Vv 392 with time, i.e. gradual, slowly, delayed SN i.117 = Nd ii.645; usually neg. akālika 1. not delayed, immediate, in this world, comb. with sandiṭṭhika SN ii.58; SN i.117 SN iv.41 = SN iv.339 = SN v.343;
2. subject to time, i.e. temporal vanishing Pv-a 87;
3. unusual, out of season Mil 114 (cp. akāla) ■ See also tāva-kālika.
fr. kāla 2
a kind of (shiny) sandal wood; so to be read for tālīsa at Vin i.203 (see note on p. 381).
(and Kālussiya ) (nt.) darkness obscurity DN-a i.95; Pv-a 124 (cakkhu˚); fig. (dosa˚ Vv-a 30.
der. fr. kalusa, stained, dirty see cognates under kammāsa and kāla
see kāla 1.
(adj.) black, stained; in enumeration of colours at Dhs 617 (of rūpa) with nīla, pītaka, lohitaka odāta, k˚, mañjeṭṭha; of a robe AN ii.241; f. kāḷikā Vv-a 103 ■ (nt.) a black spot, a stain, also a black grain in the rice, in apagata˚ without a speck or stain (of a clean robe) DN i.110 = AN iv.186 = AN iv.210 = AN iv.213; vicita˚ (of rice) “with the black grains removed” DN i.105; AN iv.231; Mil 16; vigata˚; (same) AN iii.49 ■ A black spot (of hair) Ja v.197 (= kaṇha-r-iva) ■ Fig. of character Dhp-a iv.172.
fr. kāḷa
see kaḷārika.
(nt.) 1. poetry, the making of poems, poetry as business. one of the forbidden occupations DN i.11 (= DN-a i.95 kabba-karaṇa)
2. poetry, song, poem (of suttanta) AN i.72 = AN iii.107.
-matta intoxicated with poetry, musing, dreaming SN i.110, SN i.196.
grd. fr. kāvyate fr. kavi poet cp. Sk. kāvya
a kind of reed, Saccharum spontaneum SN iii.137.
cp. Sk. kāśa
cough; in list of diseases under ābādhā AN v.110 = Nd ii.3041.
cp. Sk. kāsa
and Kāsāva (adj.) [Sk. kāṣāya from the Pāli; kāsāya prob. fr. Sk. śyāma or śyāva brown = Pāli sāma with kā = kad, a kind of, thus meaning a kind of brown i.e. yellow. See further under sāma and cp. kāla 1. Kāsāya as attr. of vatthāni, the yellow robes of the Buddhist mendicant, in phrase kāsāyāni v˚ acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitvā, describing the taking up of the “homeless state” DN i.60, DN i.61, DN i.63, DN i.115; MN ii.67; AN i.107; AN ii.208; AN iv.118, AN iv.274, AN iv.280; Pp 57; Nd ii.172. ˚vattha (adj.) with yellow robes Snp 64; cp ’nivattha Ja iii.179 (dressed in yellow, of the executioner see Fick, Soziale Gliederung p. 104 & cp. kāsāya-nivāsana Ja iii.41; kāsāviya Ja iv.447); Pv-a 20; ˚vāsin dressed in yellow Snp 487.
2. Kāsāva (vattha) the yellow robe (never in above formula) Vin i.287; SN iv.190 = SN v.53 = SN v.301; Dhp 9, Dhp 10 = Thag 969, Thag 970 = Ja ii.198 = Ja v.50; Mil 11. ˚kaṇṭhā (pl.) the “yellow necks those whose necks are dressed in yellow Dhp 307 (Dhp-a iii.480) = Iti 43; ˚pajjota glittering with yellow robes Vb 247; Mil 19.
a yellow robe Dhp-a ii.86.
fr. kāsāva
one who is dressed in yellow, esp. of the royal executioner (cp. kāsāya-vattha) Ja iv.447 (= cora-ghātaka C.).
fr. kāsāva
(adj.) belonging to the Kāsī country, or to Benares; in ˚uttama (scil. vattha) an upper garment made of Benares cloth Pv i.108; Ja vi.49 (where to be read kāsik’ uttama for kāsi-kuttama). ˚vattha Benares muslin AN i.248 AN iii.50; Pp 34; Mil 2; Dhp-a i.417; Vism 115.
cp. Sk. kāśika & in a diff. sense aḍḍha-kāsika
a hole; only in cpd. aṅgārakāsu a cinderhole, a fire-pit, usually understood as a pit of glowing cinders Ja i.232. Mostly found in similes e.g. SN iv.56, SN iv.188; Snp 396; Sdhp. 208; and in kāmā angārakās’ ûpamā metaphor AN iv.224 = AN v.175; see also kāma.
cp. Sk. karṣū, fr. kṛṣ
2nd. stem of interr. pron. (cp. ka˚ ku˚); 1. in oblique cases of ko (kaḥ), as gen. kissa. loc. kismiṃ & kiṃhi.; 2. in nt. kiṃ what? (cp. Gr. τί, Lat. quid; ending-m besides-d in kad, as Lat. quom, tum besides quod id).
3. in primary derivations, as kittaka, kīva (= Sk. kiyant) which stands in same relation to *qṷi as Lat. quantus to *qṷo; and in secondary derivations from kiṃ, as kiñci, kiñcakkha, kīdisa, etc.
1. as nt. subst. what? sotānaṃ kiṃ nivāraṇaṃ what is the obstruction? Snp 1032; kiṃ tava patthanāya what is it about your wish, i.e. what good is your wish? Vv-a 226; kim idaṃ this is what, that is why, therefore, Pv-a 11; often with su in dubitative question: kiṃ sū’ dha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭhaṃ what then, is the best treasure of man in this world? Snp 181 or with nu: kiṃ nu kho what is it then (in series evañ nu kho, na nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho) Nd ii.186 ■ Gen kissa of what? Pv i.91; ii.940 (= kīdisassa) and in kissa hetu on the ground of what i.e. why? Snp 1131; Pv ii.81 (= kiṃ nimittaṃ) ■ Instr. kena by what or how is it that: kena ssu nivuto loko Snp 1032 ■ Acc. kiṃ: kiṃ kāhasi what will you do? Snp 428; kiṃ āgamma kiṃ ārabbha on what grounds & for what reason? DN i.13 DN i.14, etc.; kiṃ nissita to what purpose Snp 1043 ■ Loc. kismiṃ in what or what about: kismiṃ vivādo “what is the quarrel about?” DN i.237; or kimhi, e.g. kimhi sikkhamāno in what instructed? DN ii.241 (corresponds to ettha = in this). The ṃ of kiṃ in Sandhi is either elided or contracted or undergoes the usual Sandhi changes ki ha = kiṃ ha Kp-a 78, kissa = kiṃ assa Snp 1032; kīdisa (q.v.) = kiṃ disa; kiñci (see below) = kiṃ cid; kiṃ va a little: see kittaka.
2. as interr. particle, introducing a question = Lat. nonne, Gr. α ̓́ν: kiṃ idāni pi dinne te labheyyuṃ? “Will they receive that which is given now?” Pv-a 22. So as disjunctive particle in comb with udāhu (whether-or): kiṃ-udāhu what (about this… or is it (otherwise), is it so… or is it not so (cp. πότερον η ̓́, Lat. utrum-an): kim imasmiṃ attabhāve pitaraṃ pucchasi udāhu atīte? “do you enquire about your father in this existence, or in a past one? Pv-a 38; kiṃ nakkhattaṃ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiṃ karissasi “Will you take a holiday or will you work?” Vv-a 63 ■ Very often modified and intensified by other exhortative particles: kiṃ aññatra (with abl.) unless (by), except for Snp 206 (see aññatra) kin nu kho why but why, why in the world? DN ii.131; Ja ii.159; Dhp-a ii.91. As kimo in kimo nu why then? Ja iii.373 Ja v.479 (= kim eva); kimu Sdhp 137; kim pana = nonne kim pana bhante addasa? “Have you not seen? DN ii.132; kim pana tvaṃ maññasi what then do you think = do you not think then, that?… Ja i.171 kim aṅga how much more or less, i.e. far more, or far less Mil 274 as kim aṅga pana why then? MN iii.181; Mil 23; Vism 233; kin ti how then? DN ii.74; kin ti te sutaṃ have you not heard? DN i.104; kintikaro kathankaro q.v.; kiñca (cp. kiñcâpi under kiñci) num-que, nonne; is it not that, rather Ja i.135 (expld in c. by garahatte ca anuggahatthe nipāto) ■ kiñci in comb. with yaṃ or yad: whatever; in other combn positive: some, neg.: na kiñci nothing; yad atthi kiñci whatever there is of… Snp 231; n’atthi kiñci there is nothing: see under atthi and kiñcana; kiñci n’atthi loke there is nothing in this world… Snp 1122. kiñcāpi whatever, however much: kiñcâpi te tattha yatā caranti “however much they endeavour in this Snp 1080; Ja i.147; Iti 114; Kp-a 187, Kp-a 190. Same as disjunctive conjunction with foll. pana: (= Lat. quamvis kiñcāpi hi… pana although… yet Dhp-a i.391; kiñcâpi with pot.… atha kho although-yet; it may be that-but SN i.72.
3. In composition (˚-) often implying doubt, uncertainty (“what is it, that is so & so?”), or expressing strangeness (: doubtful likeness), e.g. kinnara a kind of man (but not sure about it), a half-man kimpakka odd-looking or doubtful (poisonous) fruit kimpurisa a strange man (doubtful whether man or beast); cp. kiṃsuka.
-akkhāyin preaching what? in conn. with kiṃ vādin saying what? i.e. holding what views? AN i.62 -atthaṃ for what purpose Ja i.279. -atthiya to what purpose Ja iv.239; Mil 19; Vv-a 230; to any purpose, of any use SN v.171; -abhiñña having what name? Ja vi.126 -kara doing whatever (his duty), a servant, in k˚-patissāvin an obedient servant DN i.60 (cp. expln at DN-a i.168; AN iii.37; AN iv.265 sq.; Thag-a 252; -karaṇīya business occupation AN iii.113, AN iii.116, AN iii.258; AN v.24, AN v.90, AN v.338; -kāraṇā (abl. of kāraṇa) by reason of what, i.e. why? Pv-a 25; -kusalagavesin striving after that which is good MN i.163 = MN i.240; -jacca of what caste? Snp p.80; -nāma of what name? Mil 15, Mil 17; Dhp-a iii.397 (both konāma and kiṃnāma). -pakka strange or unknown (doubtful fruit, in ˚rukkha a tree with odd fruit (i.e. poisonous fruit, cp. Rām. ii.66, 6; Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it to be Strychnos nux vomica) Ja i.368. -purisa 1. a wild man of the woods Ja iv.254; Ja vi.272, Ja vi.497.
2. = kinnara (q.v.) AN i.77; Ja v.42, Ja v.416. f. kimpurisī Ja v.215 Ja v.216. -phala = ˚pakka, in ˚rukkha a tree with unknown (poisonous) fruit Ja i.271. -rukkha what kind of tree Ja v.203. -vādin holding what view? AN i.62; -samācāra (a) of what conduct, in comb. with; -sīla of what character Snp 324 (= Snp-a 331).
nt. of rel. pron. ka
Name of a tree (creeper), lit. “whatever-like,” or “what do you call it,” i.e. strange tree (see kiṃ su & kiṃ 3), pop. name for the Butea frondosa SN iv.193 (parable of the k.); Ja ii.265 (˚opama-jātaka) v.405; vi.536. Perhaps v.l. at Snp-a 284.
-puppha the (red) flower of the k. tree Vism 252 -vaṇṇa of the colour of the k. (flower) Ja i.73 (angārā ashes).
kiṃ + su + ka
(?) dense, thick (?) SS at SN iv.289 (for kuṭṭhita), said of the heat.
1. (m. the blue jay (J ii.350 k. sakuṇo).
2. (f.) a hen (or the female of the jay?), in simile fr. the Apadāna of a hen watching her egg Vism 36 (aṇḍaṃ anurakkhamānā) Ja iii.375 (rakkhati); cp. Snp-a 317 (kikī sakuṇikā aṇḍassa upari seti).
onomat. to sound-root kṛ; (see note on gala), cp. Sk. kṛka-vāku cock, after the cry of the bird
(m. nt.) a small bell Ja iv.362; Vv-a 12.
= kinkiṇika
(m. nt.) a small bell Ja iv.259, Ja iv.413; (suvaṇṇa˚); Vv 781 (= kinkiṇi Vv-a 303); Vin iii.42 (kinkiṇikā saddo).
-jāla a net or fringe of tinkling bells DN ii.183; Ja i.32; Dhp-a i.274.
onomat. formation fr. sound part. kiṇi, see note on gala
(nt.) 1. (adj.) that which ought to be done, that which is to be performed; nt something to do Dhp-a i.15. Defd as kātabban ti kiccaṃ kiñcid eva karaṇīyan ti Kp-a 218; kattabaṃ karaṇīyaṃ Dhp-a iii.452.
2. (nt.) (a) duty, obligation, service attention; ceremony, performance. The sg. is used collectively as pl ■ adj. (-˚) one who is under an obligation, etc., or to whom an obligation, etc., is due AN ii.67; Dhp 276, Dhp 293; Ja iii.26; Dhp-a i.5 ■ kattabbak˚-karaṇa “the performance of incumbent duties Pv-a 30; idaṃ me kiccaṃ akāsi “he has done me this service” Pv-a 29 ■ In special sense of the duties to the dead: ahaṃ tava pitu ˚ṃ karomi “I will do the last duty to your father” Pv-a 274 ■ a˚; that which is not (his) duty AN ii.67; Dhp 292, Dhp 293 ■ (b) (as philos. term function; rasa (essence) is either kicca r˚-or sampatti r function or property. Cpd. 13, 213, n. l.; Vism 162 (parivyatta˚ quite conspicuous f.), 264 (abbhañjana f. of lucubrating), 338, 493 (indriyānaṃ kiccaṃ), 547 (tad-ārammaṇa˚, bhavanga˚, cuti˚, etc.); kiccavasena by way of f. Abhdh ■ sangaha v.8, cp. Dhs. trsl. 132 (with ref. to Dhs-a 264); kiccato Vism 581 ■ appa˚; having few or no duties Snp 144 (cp. Kp-a 241 ■ ārāmika˚ duties of the Ārāma Ja i.38 ■ udaka˚; water-performance, ablution DN ii.15 ■ kata˚; one who has performed his duties or mission, i.e. an Arahant Snp 1105; Vv 531 (cp. Vv-a 231 ■ bahu˚; having many obligations, being very busy AN iii.116 sq ■ bhatta˚; meal DN-a i.45 sq. Pv-a 76; freq. in formula kata˚ (see kata), cp. kat-annakicca Dāvs i.59 ■ mata˚; funeral rites Pv-a 274 ■ sarīra˚ the duties of the body, i.e. funeral rites Pv-a 74). Note. In compn with kud˚ kicca appears as kuk-kucca (q.v.).
-ākiccā pl. (kicca + kicca, see Trenckner, Notes J.P.T.S. 1908, 127; cp. ṭhānāṭhāna, bhavābhava maggāmagga, phalāphala, etc.) duties of all kinds various duties: ativasā assu kiccākiccesu “they shall serve me in all duties” Dhp 74 (Dhp-a ii.78 = khuddakamahantesu karaṇīyesu “in small and great duties”) ˚esu yuttapayutto māṇavo (cp. a maid “of all work” Vv-a 298; ˚esu ussukā endeavouring to do all duties Snp 298 (but expld at Snp-a 319 as “zeal in what is to be done and what is not to be done,” taken as kicca akicca cp. akicca); -ādhikaraṇa settlement of the agenda at formal meetings of a chapter Vin ii.89 = Vin iii.164 Vin iii.168; Vin v.101 sq.; 150 sq.; See Vin Texts iii.45; -kara doing one’s duty SN i.91; Snp 676; -karaṇīyāni pl. = kiccākicca, various duties AN iv.87; -kārin = kiccakara AN iii.443.
grd. of karoti = Sk. kṛtya
(f.) duty Vin ii.89 (k˚ karaṇīyatā); Mil 42.
abstr. fr. last
1. (adj.) (a) distressed, in difficulty, poor, miserable, painful: kicchā vatâyaṃ idha vutti yaṃ jano passati kibbisakārī (miserable is the life of one who does wrong) Snp 676 = parihīnattha, in poverty Pv-a 220 (kicco = kiccho) ■ (b) difficult to obtain, hard troublesome Dhp 182 (kiccho manussapaṭilābho, Dhp-a 235 = dullabho).
2. (nt.) distress, misery, pain, suffering: kicchaṃ āpanno loko DN ii.30; SN ii.5; ˚ṃ vā so nigacchati “he gets into difficulties (i.e. becomes poor)” Ja v.330 (= dukkhaṃ nigacchati); Vism 314; Dhp-a i.80 ■ Oblique cases used adverbially: instr kicchena with difficulty Ja i.147, Ja i.191 (paṭijaggita) v.331 (id.) abl. kicchā id. Ja v.330 ■ akiccha (˚-) without difficulty, easily, in phrase akiccha-lābhin taking or sharing willingly (+ kasira-lābhin) MN i.33, MN i.354 = SN ii.278 = AN ii.23, AN ii.36; AN iii.31, AN iii.114.
-patta fallen into misery Pv iii.54 (= Pv-a 199 dukkhappatta) -vuttin living in misery, poor Pv ii.914 (= dukkhajīvita).
see kasira
to be troubled, to be wearied, to suffer Thag 962 (w. acc. of obj.); usually with kilamati: k˚ kāyo kilamati Thag 1073. Used in a play of words with vicikicchati by Bdhgh at Dhs-a 354 as “ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ asakkonto kicchati kilamati” and at Bdhd. 25 (on vicikicchā) as sabhāvaṃ vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamati.
v. denom. fr. kiccha, cp. Sk. kṛcchrāyate
(adj.-n..) only in neg. sentences: something, anything From the freq. context in the older texts it has assumed the moral implication of something that sticks or adheres to the character of a man, and which he must get rid of, if he wants to attain to a higher moral condition. Def. as the 3 impurities of character (rāga, dosa, moha at DN iii.217; MN i.298; SN iv.297; Vb 368; Nd ii.206b (adding māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, duccarita); as obstruction (palibujjhana), consisting in rāga, etc. at Dhp-a iii.258 (on Dhp 200). Khīṇa-saṃsāro na c’atthi kiñcanaṃ “he has destroyed saṃsāra and there is no obstruction (for him)” Thag 306. n’āhaṃ kassaci kiñcanaṃ tasmiṃ na ca mama katthaci kiñcanaṃ n’atthi “I am not part of anything (i.e. associated with anything), and herein for me there is no attachment to anything” AN ii.177. akiñcana (adj.) having nothing Mil 220 ■ In special sense “being without a moral stain,” def. at Nd ii.5 as not having the above (3 or 7) impurities. Thus freq. an attribute of an Arahant: “yassa pure ca pacchā ca majjhe ca n’atthi kiñcanaṃ akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇan” Dhp 421 = Snp 645, cf. Th i. 537 kāme akiñcano “not attached to kāma” as Ep. of a khīṇāsava AN v.232 sq. = 253 sq. Often combd with anādāna: Dhp 421; Snp 620, Snp 645, Snp 1094 ■ Akiñcano kāmabhave asatto “having nothing and not attached to the world of rebirths” Vin i.36; Snp 176, Snp 1059 ■ akiñcanaṃ nânupatanti dukkhā “ill does not befall him who has nothing” SN i.23 ■ sakiñcana (adj.) full of worldly attachment Snp 620 = DA 246.
kiṃ + cana, equal to kiṃ + ci, indef. pron.
(nt.) a trifle, a small thing: yaṃ vā taṃ vā appamattakaṃ Snp 121; Snp 131; PugA 210 (iii.4). āmisa-kiñcikkha-hetu “for the sake of a little gain” AN i.128 = Pp 29; at Pv ii.83 as āmisa-kiñci-hetu (but all vv.ll. B. have ˚kiñcakkha˚) “for some food” (expld at Pv-a 107 kiñci āmisaṃ patthento) ■ katā kiñcikkhabāvanā at SN iv.118 is evidently corrupt (v.l. ˚bhādhanā for bādhanā ).
-kamyatā in the desire for some little thing Snp 121 (cp. Snp-a 179: appamattake kismiñcid eva icchāya).
E. Mūller P. Gr. p. 35 expls kiñcid + ka
(m. nt.) a filament, esp. of the lotus SN iii.130; Ja i.60, Ja i.183; Ja v.39; Vv 221 ■ vāri˚ Pv ii.120 (= kesara Pv-a 77) in combn with kesara Vv-a 12, Vv-a 111, Vv-a 175.
cp. Sk. kiñjalka & remarks at Aufrecht; Halāyudha p. 186
only at Pv i.92,4, of clothes which are changed into missā kiṭakā, which is expl. at Pv-a 44 by kiṭakasadisāni lohapaṭṭasadisāni bhavanti “they become like (hot) copper plates.”
doubtful
at Vin ii.153 of ālinda, a verandah, said to be saṃsaraṇa˚ ugghāṭana˚ (a movable screen or a curtain that can be drawn aside) Vin Texts iii.174, 176.
growing corn, the crop on the ground, a cornfield AN iii.393 (in simile), cp. SN iv.195.
-āda eating corn AN iii.393. -ārakkha the guardian of the cornfield SN iv.196. -sambādha “when the corn is thick,” in ˚samaye near harvest-time MN i.115 (in simile) Ja i.143 (sassa-samaye + ), 338.
cp. Sk. kṛṣṭa kṛṣ
to tinkle; also spelt kiṇikiṇāyati Ja iii.315. See also kilikilāyati and cp. Sk. kiṭikiṭāyati to grind (one’s teeth) & Prk. kiḍikiḍiya (chattering) Weber,; Bhagavatī p. 289; also BSk. kaṭakaṭāyati Tal. Vist. 251. See taṭataṭayati & note on gala.;
= kinkiṇāyati, denom. fr. kinkiṇi, small bell
to buy Vism 318; pot. kiṇe Ja v.375; ger. kiṇitvā MN i.384; Ja i.92, Ja i.94; inf. kiṇituṃ Ja iii.282.
krī Vedic kriṇāti
(indecl.) a part., expressing the sound of a small bell: “tink” Dhp-a i.339 (v.l. kiri; see also kili and note on gala).
ferment, yeast; Vin ii.116; Vv-a 73.
cp. Sk. kiṇva
strewn, scattered, covered; only in compn with profixes: ā˚, o˚, ud˚, upa˚, pari˚, saṃ˚ see also appa˚.
pp. of kirati
(adj.) black; in the stock phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā k˚ bandhupādâpaccā DN i.90 = DN i.116; SN iv.117; MN i.334; MN ii.177; in a moral sense = bad, wicked, with nâlam-ariyā dhammā DN i.163.
see kaṇha; DN-a i.254 kiṇhā ti kaṇhā, kāḷakā ti attho
1. adorned: mālā˚ adorned with garlands Vin iii.249.
2. soiled, only in cpds kaṇṇa˚; said of a wall, also of the ground at Vin i.48 Vin ii.209; and paṃsu˚; soiled with dust Vin ii.121, Vin ii.174. Kitava & kitava
pp. of kṛ; with i for a, cp. kiraṇa for karaṇa. The Dhtp. expld by nivāsane
one who plays false; a cheat; adj. deceitful SN i.24; Ja v.116; Ja v.117 (a˚) ■ kitavā at Dhp 252 (= Dhp-a iii.375) in combn with saṭha also at Ja vi.228, where the connection with kaṭa is evident: kaṭaṃ Aḷāto gaṇhāti kiṭavā sikkhito yathā like one who is skilled in having the kaṭa, the lucky die. Expld at Dhp-a iii.375 as taken from fowling kitavāya attabhāvaṃ paṭicchādeti “he hides himself by means of a pretence” (behind sham branches).
= kaṭavā? cp. kaṭa
(pron. interr.) how much how great? nt. as adv.: to what extent? pl.: how many? Vin i.297; k˚ṃ antovassaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ “how much of the rainy season is left?” Vv-a 66; kittakā pana vo bhante parivāra-bhikkhū? “How many bhikkhus are in your retinue?” Ja i.32 ■ As indef.: a little; kittakaṃ jīvissāmi, Ja v.505; kittakaṃ addhānaṃ a short time Vv-a 117 (= kiṃva ciraṃ).
fr. kīva, cp. ettaka & BSk. kettaka (Mvu i.50); see Trenckner, Notes p. 134
(nt.) praise Pv-a 31, Pv-a 107.
f. kitteti
(adv.) to what extent? how far? in what respect? K˚ nu kho mahāpurisa hoti “in what respect is a man a great man?” Nd ii.502 B; k˚ nu kho paññavā ti vuccati? MN i.292. Kitti & Kitti
f. fame, renown, glory, honour, yaso ca kittī ca SN i.25; kittiñ ca sukhañ ca SN i.187; yaso kitti sukhañ ca AN ii.32 yaso kittī ca “fame and renown” Snp 817 (= Nd i.147, where appl. to the religious perfection attained by a samaṇa); Snp 185 (in the same sense) Vv-a 68 (bāhira˚-bhāva becoming known outside) yaso kitti Sdhp 234.
-sadda the sound of fame, praise, renown (thutighosa DN-a i.146) esp. appld to the Buddha, whose fame is heralded before him: Bhagavantaṃ Gotamaṃ evaṃ kalyāṇo k˚-saddo abbhuggato “the high reputation went forth over the world, concerning the Venerable Gotama”: (such is this Exalted One, Arahant, etc. DN i.49, DN i.87, DN i.115, DN i.116, DN i.236; SN iv.323, SN iv.374; SN v.352; AN i.57 AN i.180; AN iii.30, AN iii.39, AN iii.58, AN iii.253, AN iii.267; AN iv.80; etc. The same with reference to others: Mil 284. Appld to the good reputation of a man (of a kalyāṇamitta) at Pp 37; the opposite is pāpako kittisaddo, bad reputation: AN i.126 AN iii.269; Pp 36; -vaṇṇa praise, in ˚hara receiving or deserving praise DN iii.191; cp. ˚bhatā Nd i.147.
Vedic kīrti, *qer: cp. Gr. καρκαίρω, Ohg. hruod, hruom = Ger. ruhm; *qār: cp. Sk. kāru poet Gr. κ ̈ηρυς herald, Lat. carmen hymn of praise ■ The explns of Dhtp (579) & Dhtm (812) are; saṃsadde saṃsaddane;
(adj.) famous Vv-a 200.
fr. kitti
(pp. of kitteti] told Bdhd 124; su˚ well told Snp 1057.
(adj.). Cp. also kutta,-f. kittimā at Ja iii.70; Ja vi.508 is according to Kern, Toev. s. v. a misspelling for tittima.
cp. Sk. kṛtimā, der. fr. kṛti, karoti, in sense of kata i.2 (a) made up, artificial; clever, skilful Thag-a 227; Dhp-a 391 (of nāma); Vv-a 275 (of ratha cleverly constructed)
1. to praise, extol Pv-a 124, Pv-a 162;
2. to proclaim, announce, relate, tell; ppr. kittento praising Pv-a 159 ■ fut. kittayissati in sense of aor Vv 345 (= katheti Vv-a 151) ■ kittayissāmi I shall relate Snp 1053, Snp 1132. grd: kittanīya to be praised Pv-a 9 ■ aor. akittayi Snp 875, Snp 921 ■ pp. kittita.
v. den. fr. kitti
a little bird with a head like a man’s] Ja iv.106, Ja iv.254, Ja iv.438, Ja v.47, Ja v.456; Mil 267. Canda kinnara Np. Ja i.91, Ja vi.283, Ja vi.74. f. kinnarā Np. of a queen Ja v.437 sq., and kinnarī Thig 381 (cp. Thag-a 255), Ja ii.121 (matta-kinnarī viya), 230 iv.432 sq. Cp. kimpurisa.
kiṃ + nara, lit. what-man, see kiṃ 3
see under kiṃ.
(f.) & Kipillaka (nt.) an ant Snp 602 (kuntha˚) Dhp-a i.360; Ja iv.142 (kuntha˚); v.39 (tamba˚-˚āni) Mil 272 ■ kipillaka Ja i.487 (v.l. BB. for pillaka) iv.375 (tamba˚-puṭa); Dhp-a iv.134 (v.l. SS. for T pillaka) ■ Cp. kuntha & pipīlikā.;
Cp. Sk. pipīlikā, see Trenckner, Notes, p. 108
(nt.) wrongdoing, demerit, fault, usually with ˚ṃ karoti to do wrong Snp 246; Sdhp, 204; Ja iii.135 or ˚ṃ pasavati AN v.75; Vin ii.198. -kata˚; (adj.) having done wrong in akata-kalyāṇo, etc. AN ii.174 and ≈(see kalyāṇa and kata ii.1 a); MN i.39; Pv iv.77; Pv-a 59.
-kāraka1 = next Ja iii.14; -kārin, doing wrong Snp 665 sq.; Pv-a 58.
Ved. kilbiṣa, according to Grassmann to *kil as in kilāsa, thus originally “stain, dirt.” Buddh Sk. kilviṣa classed with aparādha at Mvyntp. 245 No 903
= kibbisa Sdhp 290.
m. a worm, vermin: setā kimī kaṇhasīsā AN iii.241; Mil 272; DN-a i.199 ■ As animal of death and putrefaction MN i.507; Ja i.146; Snp 201; esp with ref. to the punishment of Petas: Pv i.31; Thig 439; Pv-a 192; Sdhp 603. As glow-worm MN ii.34; MN ii.41 (with khajjopanaka); sālaka˚ a very minute insect Mil 312. In similes: Thag 1175 (kimī va mīlhasallitto); Vism 500, Vism 598. In cpd. kimi-kula the worm kind (genus worm) Mil 100; Vism 235; ˚gaṇa crowd of worms Vism 314.
Vedic kṛmi
(adj.) covered with worms Ja v.270.
from kimi
(& Kila) adv. 1. emphatic: really, truly, surely. (Gr. δή)
2. presumptive (with pres. or fut.) I should think one would expect.
3. narrative (with aor.): now, then, you know (Gr. δδε, Lat. at, G. aber). kira in continuous story is what “iti” is in direct or indirect speech. It connects new points in a narrative with something preceding, either as expected or guessed It is aoristic in character (cp. Sk. sma). In questions it is dubitative, while in ordinary statements it gives the appearance of probability, rather than certainty to the sentence. Therefore the definitions of commentators: “people say” or “I have heard”: kirasaddo anussavane: “kira refers to a report by hearsay” Pv-a 103; kira-saddo anussav’atthe Ja i.158; Vv-a 322 are conventional and one-sided, and in both cases do not give the meaning required at the specified passages. The same holds good for Ja i.158; Ja ii.430 (kirā ti anussavatthe nipāto).
1. mahantaṃ kira Bārāṇasirajjaṃ “the kingdom of B. is truly great Ja i.126; attā hi kira duddamo “self is difficult to subdue we know” Dhp 159; amoghaṃ kira me puṭṭhaṃ Snp 356 ■ na kira surely not Snp 840; Ja i.158.
2. esā kira Visākhā nāma “that I presume is the Visākhā (of whom we have heard) Dhp-a i.399; petā hi kira jānanti “the petas, I should say, will know” Pv ii.710 evaṃ kira Uttare? “I suppose this is so, Uttarā” Vv-a 69. evaṃ kira saggaṃ gamissatha “thus you will surely go to Heaven” Vv 828; “I hear” Dhp-a i.392.
3. atīte kira with aor. once upon a time… Pv-a 46, etc.; so kira pubbe… akāsi, at one time, you know, he had made… Ja i.125; sā kira dāsī adāsi now the maid gave her… Pv-a 46; cp. Ja i.195, etc.
Vedic kila
(nt.) 1. an occupation, place of work, workshop Ja iv.223. Cp. kita & kittima.; 2. [fr. kṛ; kirati to scatter, cp. pp. kiṇṇa] scattering effusion (of sun rays), effulgence Vv-a 169, Vv-a 199.
fr. kṛ; karoti to do
to scatter, strew; not found in simples, only in cpds. apa˚, abbhuk˚, abhi˚, ava˚ (o˚), pari˚, vi˚ See also pp., kiṇṇa2.
kīr
(& kirāṭa) a man of a tribe of junglemen, classed with dwarfs among the attendants of a chief DN-a i.148. See on the Kirāta as a mountain tribe Zimmer, Altindisches Leben p. 34. Cp. also apakiritūna & okirati;2, okiraṇa ■ A secondary meaning of kirāṭa is that of a fraudulent merchant, a cheat (see kirāsa & kerāṭika).;
prob. dial.
(adj.) false, fraudulent Ja iv.223 (= kerāṭika).
a by-form of kirāṭa
to be affected or moved Vism. 318. Kiriya, Kiriya & Kriya
Pass. of kirati or karoti
1. (n.)-(a) (-˚) action, performance, deed; the doing = fulfilment cp. ˚karaṇa, anta˚, making an end of, putting a stop to (dukkhassa) SN iii.149; SN iv.93; Snp 454, Snp 725 ■ kāla˚ “fulfilment of one’s time” i.e. death SN iii.122; Pv i.1012 Snp 694; Pp 17; kusala˚ performance of good actions SN i.101; SN v.456; dāna˚ the bestowing of gifts Pv-a 123 pāpa˚ commission of sin Pp 19 = Pp 23; puñña˚ the performance of good works SN i.87 = SN i.89 = AN iii.48; a Pv-a 54 mangala˚ celebration of a festival Pv-a 86 massu-kiriyā the dressing of the beard Ja iii.314 (cp m-karaṇa and kappanā); sacchi˚ realization, see s. v -akiriyā the non-performance of, omission, abstaining from (a˚ akaraṇa = veramaṇī) Ja iii.530; Vb 285. (b) an act in a special sense = promise, vow, dedication intention, pledge: Pv-a 18; justice: Mil 171; kiriyaṃ bhindati to break one’s vow Mil 206 ■ (c) philosophically: action ineffective as to result, non-causative an action which ends in itself (Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs. trsl. xciii.), inoperative (see Cpd. 19). In this sense it is grouped with kamma (cp. for relation kamma: kiriyā Ger. sache: ursache). Thus is the theory of Makkhali n’atthi kammaṃ, n’atthi kiriyaṃ n’atthi viriyan ti there is no karma, no after-effect and no vigour in this world AN i.286 (different at DN i.53); n’atthi kiriyā it does not matter MN i.405.
2. (adj.) (a) making no difference, indefinite; of no result, as def. of avyākatā dhammā Vb 106, Vb 182 = Vb 302 = Dhs 566 and 989 (manodhātu kiriyā neva kusalā nâkusalā na ca kammavipākā: indifferent, neither good nor bad and having no fruit of kamma), same of jhāna Vb 268 = Vb 281; Dhs-a 388 ■ (b) indecisive, in akiriyaṃ vyākaroti to give an indecisive answer, to reply evasively DN i.53 and≈
-pada (ttg.) the verb (i.e. that which supplies the action) Vv-a 315; -vāda (adj.) promulgating the (view of a) consequence of action, believing in merit and demerit, usually combd with kammavāda (q.v.) also ˚vādin: DN i.115 (of Gotama) AN i.62; Vin i.71; a˚; denying the difference between merit & demerit AN iv.174 = Vin i.234; Vin i.242, Vin iii.2; AN iv.180 sq.; SN iii.73 (+ natthikavāda); -vādin adj. to prec. AN i.62; -hetu being a cause of discrimination Dhs 1424 sq.
abstr. fr. karoti
(f.) the performance of (-˚), state of, etc. See sakkacca˚, sacchi˚, sātacca˚.
abstr. fr. last
(adj.) enveloped, adorned Pv iii.91 (= veṭhitasīsa).
see kili (the sound click).
(f.) a mat of fibre or rushes, matting Vism 327; also a screen, a fascine, hurdle, faggots; a crate, crating tassa gandhabbaṃ kilañjā-kaṇḍūvanaṃ viya hutvā… Ja ii.249; “his music was like the scraping of a mat” suvaṇṇa-kilañjā a gilt mat Ja iv.212. As a fascine used in making a road: Dhp-a i.442. as a screen (combd with chatta, fan) Pv-a 127; as faggots: Ja i.158; Mil 287; as a crate or basket, used by distillers: MN i.228 MN i.374 (soṇḍikā-kilañjā) (cp. the trsln under soṇḍa in J.P.T.S. 1909); to which is likened the hood of a snake SN i.106 (snake = māra).
tired, exhausted, weary, either with ˚kāya tired in body Pv-a 43; Vv-a 65 (indicating the falling asleep); or ˚citta tired in mind DN i.20 DN iii.32 (paduṭṭhacitta + , of the waning of the gods) or both ˚kāya-citta Pv iii.23; opp. akilanta-kāya-citta alert, vigorous; with sound body and mind.
pp. of kilamati
fatigue Ja v.397 (= kilantabhāva).
spelt klama, fr. klam
1. to go short of, to be in want of (instr.) Dhp-a ii.79; na piṇḍakena kilamati does not go short of food Vin ii.15, Vin ii.87; Vin iv.23 sq.
2. to weary, to be wearied, tired, fatigued; to be in trouble or in misery Pv-a 215 (to be incommodated) 277 (be in distress); fut. kilamissāmi Pv-a 76. Cp. pari˚ ■ pp kilanta.
Sk. klamati, a variation of śramati sri from sri to lean, cp. kilanta, as “sleepy,” and Lat. clīnāre clemens. To k → ś cp. kaṇṇa → śṛṇga, kilissati → śliṣyati, etc. The Dhtp (222) & Dhtm (316) paraphrase; kilam by gilāne.
tiredness, fatigue, exhaustion MN i.168; AN ii.199; SN i.136; as kāya˚, citta˚ SN v.128; as daratha˚ AN iii.238; Pv-a 23 as niddā˚ AN ii.48, AN ii.50.
fr. klam, in formation cp. samatha
worn out, tired, fatigued Pvii.83.
pp. of kilameti
to be tired or fatigued Ja i.115; ppr. kilamayanto DN i.52 ■ pp. kilamita.
denom. fr. kilama
a cutaneous disease, perhaps leprosy, enumd under the var. diseases (ābādhā together with kuṭṭha gaṇḍa k˚ sosa Vin ii.271; AN v.110 Nd ii.3041. Kilasika & iya;
cp. Sk. kilāsa
(adj.) afflicted with a cutaneous disease, a leper, in same combn as kilāsa, Vin i.93 Kv 31 (˚iya).
fr. last
exhausted, tired of (c. dat. or inf.) Vin iii.8; a˚; untiring in (c. dat. or acc.) SN i.47 SN v.162; Ja i.109; Mil 382.
fr. sram, cp. kilamatha. E Müller P. Gr. 38 = glāsnu, glā, cp. gilāna
(sometimes kila ) 1. indecl. the sound “click,” of the noise of a trap when shutting Ja i.243; Ja ii.363, Ja ii.397 (as “kilī”) ■ Also repeated “kilikilī ti” click, click Ja i.70.
2. as n. f tinkling, clicking, ticking (cp. kiṇi), in kiliṃ karoti to tinkle Ja v.203.
onomat. fr. sound-root kḷ
to tinkle Ja v.206; (freq. fr. kili or den. fr. kilikilā; cp. kilakilā “shouting for joy” Avs i.48 and in cpd. hāhākārakilakilā “shouting hā-hā and hail-hail” ibid. i.67 Mvu iii.312 and Divy 459). See also kiṇakiṇāyati Note.- Kil is one of the variations of the sound-imitating qel, which otherwise appears as qal, qul in Gr. κελ αδος, L. cal-are, Ohg. hell-an (cp. Sk. krandati?) also Gr.κλάζω, L. clango, Goth. hlahjan (“laugh”) and in Sk kolāhala, kokila, cp. cuculus (cuckoo) and perhaps Sk ululī, ulūka (owl), Gr. ὀλολύζω, L. ululare. See also the cognate qer under kitti.
denom. fr. kili with reduplication
to become heated, to get into a state of inflammation, to fester (of wounds) Vin i.205 (vaṇo kilijjittha festered); Snp 671 (gloss for kilissati, expld at Snp-a 481 by pūti hoti)-pp. kilinna. See also ukkiledeti (to clean out a stain, to “disinfect”).
med-pass. of kilid = Sk. klid, to be wet. prob. = śliṣ to stick to, and confounded with svid, cp. also kelana & khela. The meaning “to get wet, to be soiled” only in pp. kilinna ■ The Dhtm (199), however expls k. by parideva lament, to be in trouble, which is not quite in harmony with the meaning; it is more likely that in P. we have a confusion between klid kliś in a meaning which differs from Sk.
1. soiled, stained, impure; of gatta, limbs Ja i.129; of cīvara, cloak Bdhd 92; of vattha clothes Dhp-a ii.261; of pāvāra-puppha, mango blossom Kp-a 58 = Vism 258.
2. unclean, lustful (morally bad, in ˚kamma dirty pursuit, i.e. cohabitation Ja iv.190; Pv-a 195 (of a gaṇikā); together with kuthita Mil 250.
pp of kilissati
1. wet, usually with saliva and perspiration Vin iii.37; Ja i.61 (lālā˚), 164 (kheḷa˚) DN-a i.284 (assu˚); Vv-a 67 (seda˚).
2. The other meaning of kilid (to get inflamed) is to be found in kilinna-sarīra (adj.) with an inflamed body (i.e. suffering from a skin-disease), which is Bdhgh’s expln of okilinī see under okiraṇa.
pp. of kilijjati
1. to get wet, soiled or stained, to dirty oneself, be impure Iti 76 (of clothes, in the passing away of a deva) Thag 954 (kilisissanti, for kilissanti); Pts i.130. Kilisseyya Dhp 158 (expld as nindaṃ labhati) to do wrong Cp. pari˚.
Sk. kliśyati = kliś or śliṣ to adhere, cp. P. kheḷa and silesuma or semha, Sk. śleṣma, slime. Same root as Gr. λείμας snail; Ags. slīm slime. Another, specifically Pali, meaning is that of going bad, being vexed with ref. to a heated state. This lies at the bottom of the Dhtp. (445) & Dhtm. (686) expl;n by upatāpe.
(nt.) getting dirty, staining Ja i.8.
(and klesa ) 1. stain, soil, impurity, fig. affliction; in a moral sense, depravity, lust. Its occurrence in the Piṭakas is rare; in later works, very frequent, where it is approx. tantamount to our terms lower, or unregenerate nature, sinful desires, vices passions.
1. Kilesa as obstacle (see ˚āvaraṇa, ˚-sampayutta ˚-vippayutta, ˚pahāna) Pts i.33; Sdhp 455; bhikkhu bhinnakileso “one whose passions are broken up Vḅh 246, Pv-a 51; upasanta kileso “one whose passions are calmed” Pv-a 230; no ce pi jātu puriso kilese vāto yathā abbhaghanaṃ vihāne Snp 348; pariyodapeyya attānaṃ cittaklesehi paṇḍito SN v.24 = AN v.232, AN v.253 = Dhp 88. 2. Occurs in such combinations as kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd ii.487; kilesa + khandha: Pts i.69 Pts i.72; Pts ii.36, Pts ii.140; cp. Vb 44, Vb 68; kilesa + saṃsāra Pv-a 7 kammaṃ kilesā hetu saṃsārassa Ne 113, cp. 191. 3. kilesa also occurs in a series explanatory of taṇhā, in the stereotype combn of t., diṭṭhi, kilesa “clinging to existence, false ideas and lust” (see Nd ii.s. v. taṇhā v.).
4. In the same function it stands with rāga, viz rāga dosa moha kilesa, i.e. sensuality, bewilderment and lust (see Nd ii.s. v. rāga ii.), cp. Dhs 982, Dhs 1006. The grouping as dasa kilesa-vatthūni is: lobha dosa moha māna diṭṭhi vicikicchā thīnaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappaṃ Dhs 1548 = Vb 341; Vism 683; mentioned at Pts i.130 ■ These with the exception of the last two, are also grouped as aṭṭha k˚-vatthūni at Vb 385 ■ As three kilesas (past, present and future at Pts ii.217.
5. The giving up of kilesa is one of the four essentials of perfection: the recognition of evil the removal of its source (which is kilesa), the meditation on the Path, and the realization of the extinction of evil (see Nd ii.s. v. dukkha ii.). Kilesa in this connection interchanges with samudaya, as denoting the origin of evil; cp. samudayo kilesā Ne 191.
-āvaraṇa the obstacle of lust Vb 342 Pp 13 Vism 177; ˚āvaraṇatā id. AN iii.436; -kkhaya the destruction of lust Bdhd 81; -paripantha danger of lust Ja vi.57; -pahāna the giving up of worldly lust Vin iii.92 sq., Vin iv.25; Bdhd 129, 131; -puñja the heap of lusts; consisting of ten qualities, viz. the four āhārā (etc. four of each:), vipallāsā, upādānāni, yogā, gandhā āsavā, oghā, sallā, viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, agatigamanāni Ne 113, Ne 114; Ne 116 sq. -bhūmi the substratum or essence of lust Ne 2, Ne 192; there are four mentioned at Ne 161: anusaya˚, pariyuṭṭhāna˚, saṃyojana˚ upādāna˚; -māra death which is the consequence of sinful desire Dhp-a i.317 (in expl. of Māra); -vatthūni (pl.) the (10) divisions of kilesa (see above) Dhs 1229 Dhs 1548; Vism 20. -vinaya the discipline of lust Ne 22 -vippayutta free from lust (dhamma principles, to which belongs Nibbāna) Dhs 1555; -sampayutta connected or affected with lust Dhs 1554 (as 12 principles) Vb 18 = Vb 30 = Vb 44 = Vb 56, Vb 68, Vb 80, Vb 96, Vb 120, Vb 323.
from kilissati
to become soiled or stained (fig.): indriyāni kilesenti Sdhp. 364.
v. den. fr. kilesa
at Ja iii.49 taken as syName of loma, hair and used in sense of pharusa, shaggy, rough (in kiloma maṃsakhaṇḍa as simile for kiloma-vācā).
= next?
the pleura MN i.185 = Kp iii.Ne 77 = Vb 193; Ja iv.292; Mil 26. Discussed in detail at Vism 257, Vism 357.
= Sk. kloman, the right lung, cp. Gr. πλεύμων, Lat. pulmo
(adj.) lean, haggard, emaciated, opp. thūla fat (Vv-a 103). As Ep of ascetics Snp 165, Dhp 395 = Thag 243; esp. as Ep. of petas: Pv ii.113; Snp 426, Snp 585; Sdhp 101; Mil 303 For phrase kisa-dhamani-santhata see the latter.
Sk. kṛśa, perhaps to Lat. gracilis, slim
= kisa Vin i.36 = Ja i.83; f. kisikā Thig 27.
1. to get thin, to become exhausted, to waste, weary, worry Ja vi.495 (pret. mā kisittha C. mā kisā bhava).
2. [Pass. of kassati, kṛṣ ] see pari˚
den. fr. kisa
in neg. akissava at SN i.149 is doubtful in origin and meaning. The trsln gives “without wisdom.” Should we read akittima or akiñcana, as we suggested under a˚, although this latter does not quite agree with the sense required?
(nt.) a general term for insect Dhp-a i.187; usually in combn with paṭanga, beetle (moth? MN iii.168 (with puḷava); Snp 602; Ja vi.208; Mil 272 (˚vaṇṇa); Pv-a 67; Vism 115. kīṭa at Ja v.373 means a kind of shield (= cāṭipāla ? c.), the reading should prob. be kheṭa.
cp. Sk. kīṭa
(nt.) one or all kinds of insects Vin i.188.
bought Ja i.224 (˚dāsa a bought slave) ii.185.
pp. of kiṇāti
(interr. adj.) what like? of what kind? which? (cp. tādisa) Snp 836, Snp 1089 (= kiṃ saṇṭhita Nd2; Pv ii.63; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 51; Vv-a 76) ■ As Np. SN iv.193 ■ See also Kīrisa.
cp. Sk. kīdṛś = kiṃ dṛśa
a parrot Abhp 640 (cp. cirīṭi).
cp. Sk. kīra
= kīdisa Thig 385 (cp. Thag-a 256).
= a pin, a stake, see Khīla.
to play, sport, enjoy or amuse oneself Vin iv.112 (udake k. sport in the water); Pv ii.121 (= indriyāni paricarāmi Pv-a 77) DN ii.196; Ja v.38 Thig 147; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 77, Pv-a 189 ■ c. acc. to celebrate nakkhattaṃ Ja i.50; Vv-a 63; Pv-a 73; Thag-a 137 chaṇaṃ Dhp-a iii.100 ■ pp. kīḷita. Caus. II. kīḷāpeti to make play, to train Ja ii.267 (sappaṃ to train or tame a snake).
Sk. krīḍati
a plaything, a toy Thig 384 (with ref. to the moon).
fr. kīḷati
(f.) [fr. same) playing, sport, amusement Ne 18; Pv-a 67; Dhp-a iii.461 (nakkhatta˚ celebration).
f. play, sport, enjoyment; udakakīḷaṃ kīḷantī enjoying herself on the water Pv-a 189 ■ uyyāna˚ amusement in the park Dhp-a i.220 iv. 3; nakkhatta-kīḷaṃ kīḷati to celebrate a festival (i.e. the full moon when standing in a certain Nakkhatta) Vv-a 109, Thag-a 137; sāla-kīḷā sport in the sāla woods Ja v.38; kīḷādhippāyena in play, for fun Pv-a 215-Cp. kīḷikā.
-goḷa a ball to play with Vism 254. -goḷaka id Vism 256 (cp. Kp-a 53); Thag-a 255; -pasuta bent on play Ja i.58; -bhaṇḍaka (nt.) toy Mil 229 (= kīḷāpanaka MN i.266); -maṇḍala play-circle, children’s games, playground Ja vi.332; Dhp-a iii.146; -sālā playhouse Ja vi.332.
fr. krīḍ, cp. Sk. krīḍā
1. (nt.) a plaything, toy MN i.266, MN i.384; a list given at AN v.203.
2. (adj.) one who makes play Ja iv.308 (sappa˚ a snake-trainer, cp. sappaṃ kīḷāpeti Ja ii.267).
(f.) play, sport, amusement; always-˚, like kumāra˚ DN ii.196; uyyāna˚ (sport in the garden Ja iii.275; Ja iv.23, Ja iv.390; udaka˚ Thag-a 186.
played or having played, playing, sporting; celebrated (of a festival) AN iv.55 (hasitalapita˚); Pv-a 76 (sādhu˚) ■ (nt.) amusement, sport celebration MN i.229 (kīḷita-jātaṃ kīḷati). Cp. sahapaṃsu˚˚; see also keḷi & khiḍḍā.; Kivant & Kiva;
pp. of kīḷati
(interr. adj. and adv.) how great? how much? how many? and in later language how? (cp rel. yāva). As indef.: Kīvanto tattha bheravā “however great the terrors” Snp 959 ■ Kīva kaṭuka how painful? Pv-a 226; k˚-ciraṃ how long? Pj and Snp 1004 k˚-dīghaṃ same Snp p.126; k˚ dūre how far? Mil 16; Dhp-a i.386; k˚-mahantaṃ how big? Dhp-a i.29; Vv-a 325 k˚ bahuṃ how much? Dhp-a iv.193.
Sk. kiyant and kīvant; formed fr. interr. stem ki
(interr. adj.) of number: how much? how many? Kīvatikā bhikkhū how many Bhikkhus Vin i.117.
fr. last
(kud-and kum-) 3rd stem of interrog. pron. ka (on form and meaning cp. kad; = Lat.* qṷu in (qṷ)ubi, like katara 1. Kuto where from? whence? Dhp 62; k˚bhayaṃ whence i.e. why fear? Dhp 212 sq.; Snp 270, Snp 862; Pv ii.69; how? Ja vi.330; with nu whence or why then Snp 1049 (= kacci ssu Nd ii.s. v.). kut-ettha = kuto ettha Ja i.53 ■ na kuto from nowhere Snp 35, Snp 919; a-kuto id in akutobhaya “with nothing to fear from anywhere i.e. with no reason for fear SN i.192; Thag 510; Th 11 333; Snp 561 (modāmi akutobhayo); Pv ii.121 (id.) kuto-ja arisen from where? Snp 270 ■ ˚nidāna having its foundation or origin in what? Snp 270, Snp 864 sq.
2. Kudā at what time, when? (cp. kadā) Pp 27 indef. kudācanaṃ: at any time, na k˚ never Snp 221 (expl. by soḷasim pi kalaṃ Snp-a 277); Dhp 5, Dhp 210; Bdhd 125; gamanena na pattabbo lokass’ anto k˚ “by walking, the end of the world can never be reached” SN i.62.
3. Kuva, kva, where? Snp 970 (kuvaṃ & kuva) indef kvaci anywhere; with na: nowhere; yassa n’atthi upamā kvaci “of whom (i.e. of Gotama) there is no likeness anywhere” Snp 1137; cp. 218, 395; expld by Nd ii.like kuhiñci. kuvaṃ at DN iii.183.
4. Kutha (kudha) where? Ja v.485 (= kuhiṃ).
5. Kuhiṃ (= kuhaṃ, cp. Sk. kuha) where? whither Often with fut.: k˚ bhikkhu gamissati Snp 411; ko gacchasi where are you going? Pv ii.81; tvaṃ ettakaṃ divasaṃ k˚ gatā where have you been all these days Pv-a 6; Pv-a 13; Pv-a 42; indef. kuhiñci, anywhere, with na k˚ nowhere, or: not in anything, in: n’atthi taṇhā k˚ loke “he has no desire for anything in this world” Snp 496 Snp 783, Snp 1048 see Nd on 783 & 1048 = kimhici; Dhp 180.
(v.l. BB. kukkuṭhaka) a kind of bird Ja vi.539. Kern (Toev. s. v.) takes it to be Sk. kukkuṭaka, phasianus gallus.
a measure of length SN v.445 = AN iv.404, and in kukkukata Vin i.255 = Vin v.172 (cp however Vin. Texts i.154, on Bdhgh’s note = temporary).
cp. Sk. kiṣku?
“of the kukku-measure,” to be measured by a kukku. Of a stone-pillar, 16 k’s high SN v.445; AN iv.404 ■ akukkuka-jāta of enormous height (of a tree) MN i.233 = SN iii.141 (text: akukkajāta = iv.167; AN ii.200 (text: akukkuccakajāta ). Kern (Toev. s. v. kukka) takes it to mean “grown crooked, a˚ the opposite.
fr. kukku
1. bad doing, misconduct, bad character. Def. kucchitaṃ kataṃ kukataṃ tassa bhāvo kukkuccaṃ Vism 470 & Bdhd 24 ■ Various explanations in Nd ii.on Snp 1106 = Dhs 1160, in its literal sense it is bad behaviour with hands and feet (hattha-pada˚ Ja i.119 = DN-a i.42 (in combn with ukkāsita & khipitasadda); hattha˚ alone Ja ii.142.
2. remorse, scruple worry. In this sense often with vippaṭissāra; and in conn. w. uddhacca it is the fourth of the five nīvaraṇas (q.v.) Vin i.49; Vin iv.70; DN i.246; SN i.99; MN i.437; AN i.134 = Snp 1106; AN i.282; Snp 925; Nd ii.379; Dhp-a iii.483; Dhp-a iv.88; Sdhp 459; Bdhd 96 ■ na kiñci k˚ṃ na koci vippaṭissāreti “has nobody any remorse?” SN iii.120 = SN iv.46. The dispelling of scrupulousness is one of the duties and virtues of a muni: k˚ṃ vinodetuṃ AN v.72; k. pahāya DN i.71 = AN ii.210 = Pp 59; chinnakukkucca (adj.) free from remorse MN i.108; khīṇāsava k˚-vūpasanta SN i.167 = Snp 82 ■ akukkucca (adj.) free from worry, having no remorse Snp 850. Kukkuccaṃ kurute (c. gen.) to be scrupulous about Ja i.377; kariṃsu Dhp-a iv.88; cp. kukkuccaṃ āpajjati (expl. by sankati Ja iii.66.
kud-kicca
(adj.) conscientious (too) scrupulous, “faithful in little” Ja i.376; Vv-a 319.
to feel remorse, to worry AN i.85; Pp 26. Der. are kukkuccāyanā and ˚āyitatta = kukkucca in def. at Dhs 1160 = Nd ii.s. v.
denom. fr. kukkucca
= kukkucca Snp 972.
(Sk. kurkuṭa & kukkuṭa; onomatopoetic = Lat. cucurio, Ger. kikeriki) a cock Mil 363; Ja iv.58; Vv-a 163; f. kukkuṭī a hen Dhp-a i.48; Thag-a 255; in simile MN i.104 = MN i.357 = AN iv.125 sq., 176 sq. (cp. ˚potako).
-aṇḍa (kukkuṭ˚) a hen’s egg Vism 261. -patta the wing of a cock AN iv.47. -potaka a chicken, in simile MN i.104 = MN i.357 = AN iv.126 = AN iv.176. -yuddha a cock fight DN i.6; -lakkhaṇa divining by means of a cock DN i.9 -sampātika a shower of hot ashes (cock as symbol of fire) AN i.159 = DN iii.75, cp. Divy 316 and see Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 38; -sūkarā (pl.) cocks and pigs DN i.5; AN ii.209 = Pp 58; DN i.141; AN ii.42 sq.; Iti 36.
a dog. usually of a fierce character, a hound AN iii.389 AN v.271; Ja i.175 sq.; 189; Pv iii.79; Sdhp 90. In similes SN iv.198; MN i.364; AN iv.377 ■ f. kukkurinī Mil 67.
-vatika (adj.) imitating a dog, cynic MN i.387 (+ dukkara kāraka; also as k˚-vata, ˚sīla, ˚citta, ˚ākappa) DN iii.6, DN iii.7; Ne 99 (+ govatika; -saṅgha a pack of hounds AN iii.75.
Sk. kurkura, or is it ku-krura? Cp. kurūra
hot ashes, embers SN iii.177; Ja ii.134; Kv 208 cf. trans. 127; with ref. to Purgatory SN i.209; Ja v.143 (˚nāma Niraya); Sdhp 194; Pgdp 24.
-vassa a shower of hot ashes Ja i.73; Ja iv.389 (v.l.).
taken as variant of kukkuṭa by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 39; occurs also in BSk. as Name of a Purgatory e.g. Mvu i.6; Mvu iii.369, Mvu iii.455. The classical Sk. form is kukūla
1. the red powder of rice husks Vin ii.280 (see Bdgh ii.328: kukkusaṃ mattikaṃ = kuṇḍakañ c’eva mattikañ ca).
2. (adj.) variegated, spotted Ja vi.539 (= kaḷakabara 540; v.l. B. ukkusa).
(nt.) saffron Mil 382; Vism 241.
cp. Sk. kunkuma
(adj.) fidgety Ja v.435.
(nt.) noise, tumult Ja v.437 (= kolāhala).
(f.) a cavity, esp. the belly (Vism 101) or the womb; aṇṇava˚ the interior of the ocean i.119, 227; Ja v.416; jāla˚ the hollow of the net Ja i.210. As womb frequent, e.g. mātu˚ Ja i.149; DN-a i.224; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 111, Pv-a 195; as pregnant womb containing gabbha Ja i.50; Ja ii.2; Ja vi.482; Dhp-a ii.261.
-ḍāha enteric fever Dhp-a i.182; -parihārika sustaining, feeding the belly DN i.71 = Pp 58; -roga abdominal trouble Ja i.243; -vikāra disturbance of the bowels Vin i.301; -vitthambhana steadying the action of the bowels (digestion) Dhs 646 = Dhs 740 = Dhs 875.
Sk. kukṣiḥ, cp. kośa
contemptible, vile, bad, only in Coms Vv-a 215; in def. of kāya Kp-a 38 in def. of kusala Dhs-a 39; Vv-a 169; in def. of kukkucca Vism 470; in def. of paṃsu-kūla Vism 60.
Sk. kutsita, pp. of kutsāy
(adj.) pregnant Ja v.181.
fr. kucchi
in kujantā dīnalocanā Sdhp 166: to be bent, crooked, humpbacked?
or kujjati? see kujja
(adj.) only neg. a˚; not going crooked, in ratho akujano nāma SN i.33.
fr. kujati
(adj.) lit. “bent,” as nt kujjaṃ in ajjhena-kujjaṃ Snp 242 crookedness, deceit fraud (cp. Snp-a 286 kūṭa?). Cp. kujati & khujja, see also ava˚, uk˚, nik˚, paṭi˚, pali˚.;
Sk. kubja, humpbacked; √qub, Lat. cubare, Gr. κυφός, Mhg. hogger, humpback
to be angry with (dat.) AN i.283 = Pp 32, Pp 48; Vism 306; mā kujjhittha kujjhataṃ, “don’t be angry” SN i.240; mā kujjhi Ja iii.22; na kujjheyya Dh. 224; ger. kujjhitvā Pv-a 117, grd. kujjhitabba Pv iv.1.11
cp. Vedic krunhyate, fr. krudh
(adj.) angry = kodhana Vv-a 71; Pp A 215 (˚bhāva). Kujjhanā (f.) anger, irritation together with kujjhitattaṃ in defn of kodha Dhs 1060 Pp 18, Pp 22.
fr. kujjhati
(nt.) being angry at Dhp-a iv.182.
Caus. formation fr. kujjhati
(nt.) a crowing or trumpeting noise (in compounds only)- kāra cackling (of a hen) Thag-a 255; -nāda trumpeting (of an elephant) Ja iii.114.
kruñc, cp. Sk. krośati, Pali koñca, Lat. crocio, cornix, corvus; Gr. κρώςω, κραυγή; all of crowing noise; from sound-root k̥r, see note on gala
(f.) a key, Bdhgh on C. V. v.29, 2 (Vin ii.319) cp. tāla Vin ii.148; Vism 251 (˚kosaka a case for a key) DN-a i.200, DN-a i.207, DN-a i.252; Dhp-a ii.143.
(adj.) bent, crooked Ja i.89 (˚kesa with wavy hair) v.202 (˚agga: kaṇṇesu lambanti ca kuñcitaggā: expld on p. 204 by sīhakuṇḍale sandhāya vadati, evidently taking kuñcita as a sort of earring); of Petas, Sdhp 102.
pp. of kuñc or kruñc; cp. Sk. kruñcati, to be crooked, Lat. crux, Ohg. hrukki, also Sk. kuñcita bent
(m.) a hollow, a glen, dell, used by Dhpāla in expln of kuñjara at Vv-a 35 (kuñjaro ti kuñje giritale ramati and Pv-a 57 (kuṃ pathaviṃ jīrayati kuñjo suvāraṃ aticarati kuñjaro ti). -nadī˚; a river glen DN-a i.209.
(m.) an elephant Vin ii.195; MN i.229, MN i.375; SN i.157; Dhp 322, Dhp 324, Dhp 327; Ja v.336; Vv 51; Pv i.113; Dhp-a iv.4; Thag-a 252; Mil 245 ■ deva˚ chief of the gods Ep. of Sakka Vv 477; Ja v.158.
-vara a state elephant Vv-a 181. -sālā an elephant’s stable Dhp-a iv.203.
Deriv. unknown. The sound is not unlike an elephant’s trumpeting & need not be Aryan, which has hasti. The Sk. of the epics & fables uses both h˚ and k˚
a pitcher Vv 509; Ja i.120; Dhp-a ii.19, Dhp-a ii.261; Dhp-a iii.18. Kuṭa is to be read at Ja i.145 for kūṭa (antokuṭe padīpo viya; cp. ghaṭa). Note. Kuṭa at Dhs-a 263 stands for kūṭa3 sledge-hammer.
a cheat Pgdp 12; read kūtaka. So also in gāma kuṭaka SN ii.258.
a kind of root (Wrightia antidysenterica or Nericum antidysentericum), used as a medicine Vin i.201 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.45).
see paṭi˚ and cp. kūṭa1, koṭṭeti & in diff. sense kuṭṭa;1.
(v.l. S. kū˚; B. kulāvaka) a nest Ja iii.74; v.l. at Dhp-a ii.23 (for kuṭikā).
(f.) from kuṭī a little hut, usually made of sticks, grass and clay, poetical of an abode of a bhikkhu Vin iii.35, Vin iii.41, Vin iii.42 = Vv-a 10; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 81; Dhp-a ii.23. Cp. also tiṇa˚, dāru˚; arañña a hut in the woods SN i.61; SN iii.116; SN iv.380. Often fig. for body (see kāya). Thag 1 ■ As adj ■ ˚, e.g. aṭṭhakuṭiko gāmo a village of 8 huts Dhp i.313.
B. Sk. kuṭikā Av.Ś. ii.156
(also kuṭumbika) a man of property, a landlord, the head of a family, Ja i.68, Ja i.126, Ja i.169, Ja i.225; Ja ii.423; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 82. Kutumbiya-putta Np. Vism 48.
(adj.) bent, crooked (cp. kuj and kuc, Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15) Ja iii.112 (= jimha); Mil 297 (˚sankuṭila), 418 (of an arrow); nt. a bend, a crook Mil 351. -a˚; straight Vv 167 (-magga).
-bhāva crookedness of character Vism 466; Pv-a 51; Vv-a 84. -a˚; uprightness Bdhd 20.
(f.) crookedness, falseness, in a˚, uprightness of character Dhs 50, Dhs 51; Dhp-a i.173.
fr. kuṭila
(kuṭi˚) (f.) any single-roomed abode, a hut, cabin, cot, shed Vin iii.144 (on vehāsa-kuṭī see vehāsa Vin iv.46); Snp 18, Snp 19; Pv ii.28; Vv-a 188, Vv-a 256 (cīvara˚ a cloak as tent). See also kappiya˚, gandha˚, paṇṇa˚ vacca˚.
-kāra the making of a hut, in ˚sikkhāpada, a rule regarding the method of building a hut Ja ii.282; Ja iii.78 Ja iii.351; -dūsaka (a) destroying a hut or nest Dhp-a ii.23-purisa a “hut man,” a peasant Mil 147.
see kaṭukañcuka.
(nt.) family property & estates Ja i.122, Ja i.225; rāja˚ (and ˚kuṭumbaka) the king’s property Ja i.369 Ja i.439 ■ kuṭumbaṃ saṇṭhapeti to set up an establishment Ja i.225; Ja ii.423; Ja iii.376.
see kuṭimbika.
powder. Sāsapa˚ mustard powder Vin i.205; Vin ii.151 (at the latter passage to be read for ˚kuḍḍa, cp. Vin Texts iii.171), 205.
cp. koṭṭeti, kuṭ; to crush, which is expld by Dhtp (90, 555) & Dhtm (115, 781) together with; koṭṭ; by chedana; it is there taken together with kuṭ; of kūṭa1 which is expld as koṭilla
only found in cpds. ˚dārūni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism 354, and in kuṭṭa-rājā subordinate prince, possibly kuḍḍa˚ a wattle and daub prince SN iii.156 (v.l. kuḍḍa˚) = v.44 (v.l. kujja˚); cp. kuḍḍa˚ Ja v.102 sq., where expl. pāpa-rājā, with vv.ll. kuṭa and kūṭa. See also khujja and khuddaka-rājā.
of doubtful origin & form, cp. var. BSk. forms koṭṭa-rājā, koṭa˚ & koḍḍa˚, e.g. Mvu i.231
(nt.) (cp. kus; Sk. kuṣṭhā f.) leprosy Ja v.69, Ja v.72, Ja v.89; Ja vi.196, Ja vi.383; Vism 35 (+ gaṇḍa); DN-a i.260, DN-a i.261 DN-a i.272. The disease described at Dhp-a 161 sq. is probably leprosy. Cp. kilāsa. On var. kinds of leprosy see Ja v.69, Ja iv.196.
a kind of fragrant plant (Costus speciosus) or spice Ja vi.537.
hot, sweltering (of uṇha) SN iv.289 (v.l. kikita ); molten (of tamba, cp. uttatta) Pgdp 33. See also kathati kuthati, ukkaṭṭhita & pakkuṭṭhita.;
a leper MN i.506 (in simile); Thag 1054; Ja v.413; Ja vi.196; Ud 49; Dhp-a iii.255.
the pericarp or envelope of a seed (phala˚) Vv-a 344 (= sipāṭikā).
(f.). An axe, a hatchet Vin iii.144; SN iv.160, SN iv.167; MN i.233 = SN iii.141 AN i.141; AN ii.201; AN iv.171; Ja i.431; Dhp-a iii.59; Pv-a 277 Purisassa hi jātassa kuthārī jāyate mukhe “when man is born, together with him is born an axe in his mouth (to cut evil speech)” SN i.149 = Snp 657 = AN v.174.
cp. Sk. kuṭhāra, axe = Lat. culter, knife from *(s)qer, to cut, in Lat. caro, etc
an opening bud AN iv.117, AN iv.119.
for kusuma˚
a wall built of wattle and daub, in ˚nagaraka “a little wattle and daub town” DN ii.146, DN ii.169 (cp. Rh.D. on this in Buddh Suttas p. 99). Three such kinds of simply-built walls are mentioned at Vin iv.266, viz. iṭṭhakā˚ of tiles, silā of stone, dāru˚ of wood. The expln of kuḍḍa at Vism 394 is “geha-bhittiyā etam adhivacanaṃ. Kuḍḍa-rājā see under kuṭṭa). Also in tirokuḍḍaṃ outside the wall MN i.34 = MN ii.18; AN iv.55; Vism 394, and tirokuḍḍesu Kp viii1 = Pv i.51 ■ parakuḍḍaṃ nissāya Ja ii.431 (near another man’s wall) is doubtful; vv. ll S. kuḍḍhaṃ. B. kuṭaṃ and kuṭṭaṃ. (kuḍḍa-) pāda the lower part of a lath and plaster wall Vin ii.152 Note. Kuḍḍa at Vin ii.151 is to be read kuṭṭa. Kudda-mula
to kṣud to grind, cp. cuṇṇa
a sort of root Vin iii.15.
in eka˚ and dvi˚ having single or double walls Ja i.92.
(adj.) distorted bent, crooked, lame Pv ii.926 (v.l. kuṇḍa; cp Pv-a 123. kuṇita paṭikuṇita an-ujubhūta); Dhp-a iii.71 (kāṇa˚ blind and lame).
cp. kuṇi lame from *qer, to bend = Gr. κυλλός crooked and lame, Lat. curvus & coluber snake
a corpse, carcase, Vin iii.68 = MN i.73 = AN iv.377 (ahi˚, kukkura˚, manussa pūti˚); AN iv.198 sq.; Snp 205; Ja i.61, Ja i.146; Pv-a 15 Kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one’s neck MN i.120; Ja i.5; also Vin iii.68≈ ■ The abovementioned list of corpses (ahi˚, etc.) is amplified at Vism 343 as follows: hatthi˚, assa˚; go˚, mahiṃsa˚ manussa˚, ahi˚, kukkura˚. Cp. kaḷebara.
gandha smell of a rotting corpse Snp-a 286; Pv-a 32.
der. fr. kuṇa? cp. Sk. kuṇapa
in kuṇalīkata and kuṇalīmukha contracted, contorted Pv ii.9 26.28. (Hardy, but Minayeff and Hardy’s S.S. Kuṇḍalī˚), expld Pv-a 123 by mukhavikārena vikuṇitaṃ (or vikucitaṃ SS.) sakuṇitaṃ (better: sankucitaṃ) (cp. Sk. kuc or kuñc to shrink).
Name of a bird (the Indian cuckoo) Ja v.214 sq. (kuṇāla-jātaka). Kuṇāla-daha “cuckoo-lake,” Name of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant Vism 416.
the cuckoo Ja v.406 (= kokila).
fr. kuṇāla
(adj.) deformed, paralysed (orig. bent, crooked, cp. kuṇa) only of the arm, acc. to Pp AN iv.19 either of one or both arms (hands) Ja i.353 (expl. kuṇṭhahattha) Dhp-a i.376; Pp 51 (kāṇa, kuṇi, khañja); see khañja.
(or kuṇika) = kuṇa Pv-a 123, Pv-a 125 (or should it be kucita?). Cp. paṭi˚.
1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword) Dhp-a i.311 (˚kuddāla); Pp AN i.34 (of asi, opp tikkhina); ˚tiṇa a kind of grass Vism 353.
2. a cripple Ja ii.117.
cp. kuṇa and kuṇḍa
Pv ii.38 and kuṇḍita SN i.197, both in phrase paṃsu˚, according to Hardy, Pv-a p.302 to be corrected to guṇṭhita covered with dust (see guṇṭheti) The v.l. at both places is ˚kuṭṭhita. Also found as paṃsukuṇṭhita at Ja vi.559 (= ˚makkhita C; v.l. B B kuṇḍita).
a variant of guṇṭhita, as also found in cpd. palikuṇṭhita
(a) bent, crooked DN-a i.296 (˚daṇḍaka); Pv-a 181.
the red powder of rice husks (cp. kukkusa) Vin ii.151; Vin ii.280; Ja ii.289 (text has kuṇḍadaka) = Dhp-a iii.325 (ibid. as ācāma˚). Also used as toilet powder Dhp-a ii.261 (kuṇḍakena sarīraṃ makkhetvā) ■ sakuṇḍaka (-bhatta) (a meal) with husk powder-cake Ja v.383.
-aṅgārapūva pancake of rice powder Dhp-a iii.324 -kucchi in ˚sindhavapotaka “the rice-(cake-) belly colt” Ja ii.288; -khādaka (a) eating rice-powder Ja ii.288 (cp. Dhp-a iii.325); -dhūma, lit. smoke of red rice powder Ep. of the blood Ja iii.542; -pūva cake of husk-powder Ja i.422 sq.; -muṭṭhi a handful of rice-powder Vv-a 5; Dhp-a i.425; -yāgu husk-powder gruel Ja ii.288.
a ring esp. earring AN i.254 = AN iii.16; Ja iv.358 (su˚ with beautiful earrings); Dhp-a i.25. Frequent as maṇi˚, a jewelled earring Vin ii.156; SN i.77; MN i.366; Pv ii.950; sīha˚ or sīhamukha˚ an earring with a jewel called “lion’s mouth” Ja v.205 (= kuñcita), 438. In sāgara˚ it means the ocean belt Mil 220 = Ja iii.32 (where expl. as sāgaramajjhe dīpavasena ṭhitattā tassa kuṇḍalabhūtaṃ) Cp. also rajju˚ a rope as belt Vv-a 212 ■ kuṇḍalavatta turning, twisting round DN ii.18 (of the hair of a Mahāpurisa).
cp. kuṇḍa, orig. bending, i.e. winding
(adj.) wearing earrings SN iv.343; Ja v.136; Ja vi.478. su˚; Vv 731. Cp. Maṭṭha˚ Np Dhp-a i.25; Pv ii.5.
fr. kuṇḍala
in kuṇḍalī-kata contorted Pv ii.927. See kuṇalin and cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 14.
(f.) a pail or pot, in phrase kuṇḍipaddhana giving a pailful of milk Ja vi.504 (Kern Toev. s. v. compares phrase Sk. kāṃsy’ôpadohana proposes reading; kuṇḍ’ opadohana. See also kaṃsupadhāraṇa).
= kuṇḍikā
bending, in ahi-kuṇḍika (?) a snake charmer (lit. bender) Ja iv.308 (v.l. S. guṇṭhika) see ahi and catu-kuṇḍika bent as regards his four limbs, i.e. walking on all fours MN i.79; Pv iii.24 (expl. at Pv-a 181).
cp. kuṇḍa
(f.) a water-pot Ja i.8, Ja i.9, Ja ii.73 (= kamaṇḍalu), 317; v.390; Dhp-a i.92 (cp. kuṭa).
(adj.) eager, in sakutuka eagerness Dāvs iv.41.
(-puppha) Name of a flower Ja i.60.
(m. nt.) tumult, excitement; Dāvs v.22; Dhp-a iii.194 (v.l. kot˚). a˚; (adj.) unperturbed, not shamming Ja i.387 (expl. by avikiṇṇa-vaco of straight speech) See also kotūhala.
-maṅgala a festivity, ceremony, Nd ii.in expl. of anekarūpena Snp 1079, Snp 1082; -sālā a hall for recreation a common room DN i.179 = SN iv.398 = MN ii.2, cp. Divy 143.
see under ku˚.
(nt.) “being made up.” 1. Work The beginning of things was the work of Brahmā The use of kutta implies that the work was so easy as to be nearer play than work, and to have been carried out in a mood of graceful sport. DN iii.28–2. behaviour, i.e. charming behaviour, coquetry Ja ii.329, combd with līḷā (graceful carriage) Ja i.296 Ja i.433; and with vilāsa (charming behaviour) Ja ii.127 Ja iv.219, Ja iv.472; itthi˚ and purisa˚ AN iv.57 = Dhs 633 (expl. at Dhs-a 321 by kiriyā) ■ As adj. in kuttavāla well arranged, plaited tails DN i.105 (expld at DN-a i.274 as kappita-vāla; cp. kappita).
Der. fr. kattā = Sk. kṛtṛ as kṛttra = P. kutta, cp. Sk. kṛtrima artificial = P. kuttima, in caus ■ pass sense = kappita of kḷp )
1. nt. a woollen carpet (DN-a i.87 = as used for dancing-women), together with kaṭṭhissa and koseyya in list of forbidden articles of bedding DN i.7 = AN i.181 = Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163.
2. adj “made up,” pretending, in samaṇa-k˚ a sham ascetic Vin iii.68
71.
der. fr. kutta, that which is made up or “woven,” with orig. meaning of karoti to weave?
in kāsi-kuttama Ja vi.49 should be read as kāsik’uttama.
(f.) arrangement, fitting, trapping, harnessing Vin ii.108 (sara˚: accuracy in sound, harmony); Ja iii.314 (massu˚ beard-dressing, expld by massu-kiriyā. Here corresponding to Sk *kḷpti!) iv.352 (hattha˚, elephant trappings, cp. kappanā) v.215 (= karaṇa, cp. Sk. kalpa).
cp. kutta
S i.66 should be replaced by v.l. koṭṭhuka.
see under ku˚.
to cook, to boil: kuthanto (ppr) boiling (putrid, foul? So Kern, Toev, s. v. Ja vi.105 (of Vetaraṇī, cp. kuṭṭhita) ■ pp. kuthita.
Sk. kvathati cp. kaṭhati, kaṭhita, kuṭṭhita, ukkaṭṭhita & upakūḷita;2
(nt.) digestion Vism 345.
fr. kvath = kuth
1. boiled, cooked Thig 504; Kp-a 62; Vism 259 = Kp-a 58. Cp. vikkuthita. 2. digested Vism 345.
3. fig. tormented, distressed (perhaps: rotten, foul, cp. kilijjati = pūti hoti) Mil 250 (+ kiliṭṭha) ■ Cp. Vin. Texts ii.57 on Bdhgh’s note to MV vi.14, 5.
pp. of kuthati
a throng Ja iii.204.
(kud-assu) interj. to be sure, surely (c. fut.) AN i.107; Ne 87; Snp-a 103.
see under ku˚.
(ku-dāra) a bad wife Pv iv.147.
at Pv iv.147 & Pv-a 240 is spelling for kuṭhārikā.;
(f.) wrong belief Sdhp 86.
ku + diṭṭhi
a spade or a hoe (kanda-mūla-phalagahaṇ’atthaṃ DN-a i.269) Vin iii.144; Ja v.45; Dhp-a iv.218 Often in combn kuddāla-piṭaka “hoe and basket DN i.101; SN ii.88; SN v.53; AN i.204; AN ii.199; Ja i.225, Ja i.336.
= prec. Dhp-a i.266.
(adj.) angry AN iv.96 (and akkuddha iv.93); Pv i.77; Ja ii.352, Ja ii.353; Ja vi.517; Dhp-a ii.44. Nom. pl. kuddhāse Iti 2 = Iti 7.
pp. of kujjhati
a kind of grain Mil 267; also as kudrūsaka Vin iv.264; DN iii.71; Nd ii.314; DN-a i.78; Dhs-a 331.
a kind of bird, otherwise called adāsa Ja iv.466.
cp. Sk. kunta lance?
(f.) a curlew (koñca), used as homing bird Ja iii.134.
, only in combn kuntha-kipillaka (or ˚ikā) a sort of ant Ja i.439; Ja iv.142; Snp 602 (˚ika); Vism 408; Kp-a 189. Cp. kimi.
(nt.) the jasmine Dāvs v.28.
(f.) (kuṃ-nadī) a small river, a rivulet SN i.109; SN ii.32, SN ii.118; AN iv.100; Ja iii.221; Vism 231, Vism 416; DN-a i.58.
(kuṃ + patha) wrong path (cp. kummagga) Mil 390.
(adj.)
1. shaken, disturbed Thig 504 (by fire = Thag-a 292); Ja iii.344 (˚indriya). 2. offended, angry DN iii.238 = MN i.101 = AN iv.460 AN v.18; MN i.27; AN iii.196 sq.; Pv i.67. Often combd with anattamana “angry and displeased” Vin ii.189; DN i.3, DN i.90 (= DN-a i.255 kuddha) ■ As nt. kupitaṃ disturbance in paccanta˚; a disturbance on the borderland Ja iii.497; Mil 314; Pv-a 20.
pp. of kuppati
(adj.) shaking, unsteady, movable; AN iii.128 (˚dhammo, unsteady, of a pāpabhikkhu) Snp 784; of a kamma: a proceeding that can be quashed Vin ii.71 (also a˚). nt. kuppaṃ anger Vin ii.133 (karis sāmi I shall pretend to be angry) ■ akuppa (adj.) and akuppaṃ (nt.) steadfast, not to be shaken, an Ep. of arahant and nibbāna (cp. asankuppa); akuppa-dhammo Pp 11 (see akuppa). Akuppaṃ as freedom from anger at Vin ii.251.
ger. of kuppati
to shake, to quiver, to be agitated, to be disturbed, to be angry. aor. kuppi, pp. kupita, ger. kuppa, caus. kopeti AN iii.101 Sn. 826, 854; Pp 11, Pp 12, Pp 30. Of the wind Mil 135 of childbirth udaravāto kuppi (or kupita) Ja ii.393, Ja ii.433 paccanto kuppi the border land was disturbed Ja iv.446 (cp. kupita).
Sk. kupyate, *qup to be agitated, to shake = Lat. cupio, cupidus, “to crave with agitation,” cp semantically Lat. tremere → Fr. craindre
a kind of flower Ja vi.218 (C: mantālakamakula).
?
etc. see karoti ii.
brushwood or a small, and therefore unproductive, wood Snp 1134 (expl. Nd ii.by rittavanaka appabhakkha appodaka).
fr. kuṃ-vana
the pole of a carriage AN iv.191, AN iv.193; Vv-a 269, Vv-a 271, Vv-a 275. ratha˚ SN i.109, Vv 642 (= vedikā Vv-a) Der. (vividha-) kubbaratā Vv-a 276.
wrong thought, wrong view (cp. kudiṭṭhi) Bdhd 137.
a young boy, son Snp 685 sq. (kuhiṃ kumāro aham api daṭthukāmo: w. ref. to the child Gotama); Pv iii.52; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 41 (= māṇava) daharo kumāro MN ii.24, MN ii.44 ■ a son of (-˚) rāja˚ Pv-a 163; khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚ Bdhd 84; deva˚ Ja iii.392 yakkha˚ Bdhd 84.
-kīḷā the amusement of a boy Ja i.137; -pañhā questions suitable for a boy Kp iii.; -lakkhaṇa divination by means of a young male child (+ kumāri˚) DN i.9.
Vedic kumāra
1. m. a young boy, a youngster, kumārakā vā kumāriyo boys and girls SN iii.190. 2. nt. ˚ṃ a childish thing AN iii.114 ■ f. ˚ikā a young girl, a virgin Ja i.290 Ja i.411; Ja ii.180; Ja iv.219 (thulla˚); vi.64; Dhp-a iii.171.
-vāda speech like a young boy’s; SN ii.219.
(f.) a young girl Vin ii.10; Vin v.129 (thulla˚); AN iii.76; Ja iii.395 (daharī k˚); Pp 66 (itthī vā k˚ vā).
-pañha obtaining oracular answers from a girl supposed to be possessed by a spirit DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.97).
(nt.) a fish net Vin iii.63; Thag 297; Ja ii.238; Thag-a 243.
(nt.) 1. the white lotus Dhp 285; Vv 354 (= Vv-a 161); Ja v.37 (seta˚); Vism 174; DN-a i.139.
2. a high numeral, in vīsati kumudā nirayā AN v.173 = Snp p.126.
-naḷa a lotus-stalk Ja i.223; -patta (-vaṇṇa) (having the colour of) white lotus petals Ja i.58 (Ep. of sindhavā steeds); -bhaṇḍikā a kind of corn Mil 292; -vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of white lotus (sindhavā) Pv-a 74 -vana a mass of white lotuses Ja v.37.
1. a round jar, waterpot (= kulālabhājana earthenware Dhp-a i.317), frequent in similes, either as illustrating fragility or emptiness and fullness: AN i.130, AN i.131 = Pp 32; AN v.337; SN ii.83; Mil 414. As uda˚ waterpot Dhp 121; Ja i.20; Pv i.129
2. one of the frontal globes of an elephant Vin ii.195 (hatthissa); Vv-a 182 (˚ālankārā ornaments for these).
-ūpama resembling a jar, of kāya Dhp 40 (= Dhp-a i.317); of var. kinds of puggalā AN ii.104 = Pp 45 -kāra 1. a potter; enumerated with other occupations and trades at DN i.51 = Mil 331. Vin iv.7. In similes, generally referring to his skill DN i.78 = MN ii.18 Vism 142, Vism 376; Snp 577; Dhp-a i.39 (˚sālā). rāja˚ the king’s potter Ja i.121.
2. a bird (Phasianus gallus Hardy) Vv-a 163 ■ Cpds.: ˚antevāsin the potter’s apprentice DN i.78 = MN ii.18; -˚nivesana the dwelling of a potter Vin i.342, Vin i.344; SN iii.119; ˚pāka the potter’s oven SN ii.83; AN iv.102; ˚-putta son of a potter (cp. Dial. i.100), a potter Vin iii.41 sq. -kārikā a large earthen vessel (used as a hut to live in Bdhgh) Vin ii.143, cp. Vin. Texts iii.156; -ṭṭhānakathā gossip at the well DN i.8 = DN iii.36 = AN v.128; SN v.419, expld. at DN-a i.90 by udaka-ṭṭhānakathā, with variant udakatittha-kathā ti pi vuccati kumbha-dāsikathā vā; -thūṇa a sort of drum DN i.6 (expl. at DN-a i.84 caturassara-ammaṇakatāḷaṃ kumbhasaddan ti pi eke) DN iii.183; Ja v.506 (pāṇissaraṃ + ). -˚ika one who plays that kind of drum Vin iv.285 = Vin iv.302; -tthenaka of cora a thief, “who steals by means of a pot” (i.e. lights his candle under a pot (?) Bdhgh on Vin ii.256, cp. Vin Texts iii.325 “robber burglars”) only in simile Vin ii.256 = SN ii.264 = AN iv.278; -dāsī a slave girl who brings the water from the well DN i.168; Mil 331; Dhp-a i.401 (udakatitthato k˚ viya ānītā). -dūhana milking into the pitchers, giving a pail of milk (of gāvo, cows) Snp 309. Cp. kuṇḍi. -bhāramatta as much as a pot can hold Ja v.46; -matta of the size of a pot, in kumbhamattarahassangā mahodarā yakkhā, expln. of kumbhaṇḍā Ja iii.147.
for etym. s. kūpa and cp. Low Ger. kump or kumme, a round pot
1. m. a class of fairies or genii grouped with Yakkhas, Rakkhasas and Asuras SN ii.258 (k˚ puriso vehāsaṃ gacchanto); Ja i.204; Ja iii.147 (with def.); Mil 267; Dhp-a i.280; Pgdp 60.
2. nt. a kind of gourd Ja i.411 (lābu˚); v.37; (elāḷuka-lābuka˚); DN-a i.73; Dhp-a i.309 (placed on the back of a horse, as symbol of instability); the same as f. kumbhaṇḍī Vism 183 (lābu + ).
(f.) a large round pot (often combd with kaḷopī,) Vin i.49, Vin i.52, Vin i.286; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.210; Thig 283. loha˚ a copper (also as lohamaya k˚ Snp 670), in ˚pakkhepana, one of the ordeals in Niraya Pv-a 221. Also a name for one of the Nirayas (see lohakumbhī). Cp. nidhi˚.
-mukha the rim of a pot (always with kaḷopi-mukha DN i.166 and≈(see kaḷopī); Vism 328.
(kuṃ + bhīra?) a crocodile (of the Ganges) Ja i.216, Ja i.278; Dhp-a i.201; Dhp-a iii.362.
-bhaya the fear of the crocodile, in enumeration of several objects causing fear, at MN i.459 sq. = AN ii.123 sq.; Mil 196 = Nd ii.on bhaya ■ Thig 502; -rājā the king of the crocodiles Ja ii.159.
a kind of bird (“little crocodile”) Ja iv.347.
fr. kumbhīla
a tortoise SN iv.177 (+ kacchapa); MN i.143; Ja v.489; Mil 363, Mil 408 (here as land-tortoise cittaka-dhara˚).
Vedic kūrma
(and kumagga ) a wrong path (lit. and fig.) Mil 390 (+ kupatha); fig. (= micchāpatha) Dhs 381, Dhs 1003; Pp 22. Kummaggaṃ paṭipajjati to lose one’s way, to go astray. lit. Pv iv.35 Pv-a 44 (v.l. SS.); fig. Snp 736; Iti 117; Thig 245.
kuṃ + magga
junket, usually with odana, boiled rice. In formula of kāya (cātummahābhūtika etc., see kāya) DN i.76 = MN ii.17 and ≈; in enum. of material food (kabaḷinkārâhāra) Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875. Vin iii.15; Ja i.228; Vv 146 (= Vv-a 62 yava˚); Vv-a 98 (odana˚). In combn with pūva (cake) Dhp-a i.367; Pv-a 244.
Vedic kulmāṣa
(kuṃ + miga] a small or insignificant animal Mil 346.
a kind of flower Ja i.60 (˚puppha).
a shrub and its flower Vism 183 (see also kuravaka & koraṇḍaka). ˚leṇa Npl. Vism 38.;
cp. Sk. kuraṇṭaka blossom of a species of Amaranth
an osprey Ja iv.295, Ja iv.397 (= ukkusa); v.416; vi.539 (= seta˚).
Name of a tree, in ratta˚ Ja i.39 (= bimbijāla the red Amaranth tree).
= Sk. kuraṇṭaka Halāyudha, cp. kuraṇḍaka
a kind of antelope, in -miga the antelope deer Ja i.173 (k˚-jatāka); ii.153 (do.).
deriv. unknown. The corresponding Sk. forms are kulunga and kulanga
(v.l. kururū) a badly festering sore DN ii.242.
Name of one of the lost SS commentaries on the Vinaya, used by Buddhaghosa (cp. Vin. Texts i.258 ii.14).
vermillion in cuṇṇa, a bath-powder made from k. Ja iii.282; and ˚suttī a string of beads covered with this powder Vin ii.106 (cp. Bdhgh Vin ii.315 Vin. Texts iii.67).
(adj.) bloody raw, cruel, in ˚kammanta following a cruel (bloody occupation (as hunting, fishing, bird killing, etc. AN iii.383 = Pp 56 (expld. Pp A 233 by dāruṇa˚, also at Pv-a 181).
Sk. krūra, cp. Lat. cruor thick blood, Gr. κρέας (raw) flesh, Sk. kravih; Ohg. hrō, E. raw
= kurūra Pv iii.23.
(nt.; but poetic pl. kulā Pv ii.943 1. clan a high social grade, “good family,” cp. Gr. (doric) φυά, Goth. kuni. A collection of cognates and agnates, in sense of Ohg. sippa, clan; “house” in sense of line or descent (cp. House of Bourbon, Homeric γενέη). Bdhgh at Vism 91 distinguishes 2 kinds of kulāni, viz. ñātikulaṃ & upaṭṭhāka-kulaṃ.
1. AN ii.249 (on welfare and ill-luck of clans); Snp 144; Snp 711; Iti 109 sq. (sabrahmakāni, etc.); Dhp 193 ■ brāhmaṇa˚ a Brahmanic family AN v.249; Ja iv.411, etc.; vāṇija˚ the household of a trader Ja iii.82; kassaka˚ id. of a farmer Ja ii.109 purāṇaseṭṭhi˚ of a banker Ja vi.364; upaṭṭhāka˚ (Sāriputtassa) a family who devoted themselves to the service of S. Vin i.83; sindhava˚ Vv-a 280 ■ uccākula of high descent Pv iii.116, opp. nīca˚ of mean birth Snp 411 (cp. ˚kulīno); viz. caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚ etc. MN ii.152 = AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = AN iii.385 = Pp 51; sadisa a descent of equal standing Pv-a 82; kula-rūpa-sampanna endowed with “race” and beauty Pv-a 3, Pv-a 280
2. household, in the sense of house; kulāni people Dhp-a i.388; parakulesu among other people Dhp 73 parakule do. Vv-a 66; kule kule appaṭibaddhacitto not in love with a particular family Snp 65; cp. kule gaṇe āvāse (asatto or similar terms) Nd ii.on taṇhā iv ■ devakula temple Ja ii.411; rāja˚ the king’s household palace Ja i.290; Ja iii.277; Ja vi.368; kulāni bahutthikāni (= bahuitthikāni, bahukitthī˚ AN iv.278) appapurisāni “communities in which there are many women but few men” Vin ii.256 = SN ii.264 = AN iv.278; ñāti-kula (my) home Vv 3710 (: pitugehaṃ sandhāya Vv-a 171).
-aṅgāra “the charcoal of the family” i.e. one who brings a family to ruin, said of a squanderer SN iv.324 (text kulangāroti: but vv.ll. show ti as superfluous) printed kulanguro (for kul-ankuro? v.l. kulangāro kulapacchimako (should it be kulapacchijjako? cp vv.ll. at Ja iv.69) dhanavināsako Ja vi.380. Also in kulapacchimako kulagaro pāpadhammo Ja iv.69. Both these refer to an avajāta putta. Cp. also kulassa angārabhūta Dhp-a iii.350; Snp-a 192 (of a dujjāto putto) and kulagandhana; -itthi a wife of good descent together with kuladhītā, ˚kumārī, ˚suṇhā, ˚dāsī at Vin ii.10; AN iii.76; Vism 18. -ūpaka (also read as ˚upaka, ˚ûpaga; ˚upaga; for ûpaga, see Trenckner P.M. 62, n. 16; cp. kulopaka Divy 307) frequenting a family, dependent on a (or one & the same) family (for alms, etc.); a friend, an associate. Freq. in formula kulūpako hoti bahukāni kulāni upasankamati, e.g. Vin iii.131, Vin iii.135; Vin iv.20 ■ Vin i.192, Vin i.208; Vin iii.84, Vin iii.237 Vin v.132; SN ii.200 sq.; AN iii.136, AN iii.258 sq.; Pv iii.85; Vism 28; DN-a i.142 (rāja˚); Pv-a 266. f. kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; Vin iv.66; -gandhana at Iti 64 and kule gandhina at Ja iv.34 occur in the same sense and context as kulangāra in J ■ passages on avajāta-putta. The It-MSS. either explain k-gandhana by kulacchedaka or have vv.ll. kuladhaṃsana and kusajantuno. Should it be read as kulangāraka? Cp. gandhina; -geha clanhouse i.e. father’s house Dhp-a i.49. -tanti in kulatantikulapaveṇi-rakkhako anujāto putto “one who keeps up the line & tradition of the family” Ja vi.380; -dattika (and ˚dattiya ) given by the family or clan Ja iii.221 (˚sāmika); iv.146 (where Dhp-a i.346 reads ˚santaka) 189 (˚kambala); vi.348 (pati). -dāsī a female slave in a respectable family Vin ii.10; Vv-a 196; -dūsaka one who brings a family into bad repute Snp 89; Dhp-a ii.109 -dvāra the door of a family Snp 288; -dhītā the daughter of a respectable family Vin ii.10; Dhp-a iii.172; Vv-a 6; Pv-a 112; -pasāda the favour received by a family, ˚ka one who enjoys this favour AN i.25, cp. Snp-a 165, opp. of kuladūsaka; -putta a clansman, a (young) man of good family, fils de famille, cp. Low Ger. haussohn; a gentleman, man of good birth. As 2nd characteristic of a Brahmin (with sujāto as 1st) in formula at DN i.93 DN i.94≈; Vin i.15, Vin i.43, Vin i.185, Vin i.288, Vin i.350; MN i.85≈(in kāmānaṃ ādīnavo passage), 192, 210, 463; AN ii.249; Ja i.82 Ja vi.71; Iti 89; Vv-a 128; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 29; -macchariya selfishness concerning one’s family, touchiness about his clan DN iii.234 (in list of 5 kinds of selfishness); also to be read at Dhs 1122 for kusala˚; -vaṃsa lineage, progeny MN ii.181; AN iii.43; AN iv.61; DN-a i.256; expressions for the keeping up of the lineage or its neglect are: ˚ṭhapana DN iii.189; Pv-a 5; nassati or nāseti Ja iv.69; Vv-a 149; upacchindati Pv-a 31, Pv-a 82; -santaka belonging to one’s family, property of the clan Ja i.52; Dhp-a i.346 (where Ja iv.146 reads ˚dattika).
Idg. *qṷel (revolve); see under kaṇṭha, cakka and carati
pādaka “buttresses of timber” (Vin. Texts iii.174) Vin ii.152 (cp. Bdhgh. p. 321 and also Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 78).
a kind of vetch MN i.245 (˚yūsa): Mil 267; Vism 256 (˚yūsa).
a vulture, hawk, falcon, either in combn with kāka or gijjha, or both. Kāka + k˚ Vin iv.40; Snp 675 (= Snp-a 250); gijjha + k˚ Pv-a 198; gijjhā kākā k Vin iii.106; kākā k˚ gijjhā MN i.58; cp. gijjho kanko kulalo MN i.364, MN i.429.
a potter; only in -cakka a potter’s wheel Ja i.63; -bhājana a potter’s vessel Dhp-a i.316; Pv-a 274.
1. waste (?) Vin ii.292: na kulāvaṃ gamenti “don’t let anything go to waste.” Reading doubtful.
2. a cert. bird Ja vi.538.
(nt.) a nest DN i.91 (= DN-a i.257 nivāsaṭṭhanaṃ); SN i.8; SN i.224 = Ja i.203 (a brood of birds = supaṇṇapotakā); Ja iii.74 (v.l. BB), 431; vi.344; Dhp-a ii.22.
(adj.) belonging to a family, in agga˚; coming from a very good family Pv-a 199.
fr. kula
(?) in kata˚-kalāpaka a bundle of beads? Bdhgh Vin ii.315 (C.V. v.1, 3) in expln of kuruvindaka-sutti.
a bird Ja iii.541 (= sakuṇika 542). Cp. kulunka.
= kulika, in akulino rājāno ignoble kings Anvs. introd. (see J.P.T.S. 1886 p. 355, where akuliro which is conjectured as akulino by Andersen, Pāli Reader p. 1024).
= prec. in abhijāta-kula-kulīna descendant of a recognized clan Mil 359 (of a king); uccā˚ of noble birth, in uccākulīnatā descent from a high family SN i.87; MN iii.37; Vv-a 32; nīca˚ of mean birth Snp 462.
a crab, in kulīra- pādaka “a crab-footer,” i.e. a (sort of) bedstead Vin ii.149; Vin iv.40 (kulira), cp. Bdhgh on latter passage at Vin iv.357 (kuḷira˚ and kuḷiya˚): a bedstead with curved or carved legs; esp. when carved to represent animal’s feet (Vin. Texts iii.164).
a crab Ja vi.539 (= kakkaṭaka 540).
a cert. small bird Ja iii.478. Cp. kulinka.
a raft (of basket-work) (orig. meaning “hollow shaft,” cp. Sk. kulya, bone; Lat. caulis stalk, Gr.καυλός, Ohg. hol, E. hollow) Vin i.230; DN ii.89 (kullaṃ bandhati); MN i.134 (kullūpama dhamma).
(adj.) belonging to the family Ja iv.34 (˚vatta family custom).
fr. kula, Sk. kaula & kaulya, *kulya
crate, basket work, a kind of raft, a little basket Ja vi.64.
-vihāra (adj.) the state of being like one who has found a raft (?) Vin ii.304 (cp. Bdhgh uttānavihāra ibid. p. 330, and Vin. Texts iii.404: an easy life). More correct is Kern’s expln (Toev. s. v.) which puts kullaka in this combn = kulla2 (Sk. kauyla), thus meaning well-bred, of good family, gentlemanly. -saṇṭhāna consisting of stalks bound together, like a raft Ja ii.406–408 (not correct Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78). Cp. Kern Toev. i.154.
(ṃ) see ku-.
the (blue) water-lily, lotus, usually combd with kamala, q.v. Vv 354; DN-a i.50; Vv-a 161, Vv-a 181; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 77.
= koviḷāra Ja v.69 (v.l. B. ko˚).
1. the kusa grass (Poa cynosuroides) Dhp-a iii.484: tikhiṇadhāraṃ tiṇaṃ antamaso tālapaṇṇam pi; Dhp 311; Ja i.190 (= tiṇa); iv.140.
2. a blade of grass used as a mark or a lot: pātite kuse “when the lot has been cast” Vin i.299; kusaṃ sankāmetvā “having passed the lot on” Vin iii.58.
-agga the point of a blade of grass Pv-a 254 = DN-a i.164; Sdhp 349; kusaggena bhuñjati or pivati to eat or drink only (as little as) with a blade of grass Dhp 70; Vv-a 73 (cp. Udānavarga p. 105); -kaṇṭhaka = prec Pv iii.228; -cīra a garment of grass Vin i.305 = DN i.167 = AN i.240, AN i.295 = AN ii.206 = Pp 55; -pāta the casting of a kusa lot Vin i.285; -muṭṭhi a handful of grass AN v.234 AN v.249.
= prec. Vv 355 (= Vv-a 162).
(adj.) 1. (adj.) clever, skilful, expert; good, right, meritorious MN i.226; Dhp 44; Ja i.222 Esp. appl. in moral sense (= puñña), whereas akusala is practically equivalent to pāpa. ekam pi ce pāṇaṃ aduṭṭhacitto mettāyati kusalo tena hoti Iti 21; sappañño paṇḍito kusalo naro Snp 591, cp. 523; Pv i.33 (= nipuṇa). With kamma = a meritorious action, in kammaṃ katvā kusalaṃ DN iii.157; Vv iii.27; Pv i.1011 see cpds ■ ācāra-k˚ good in conduct Dhp 376; parappavāda˚ skilled in disputation Dpvs iv.19; magga˚ (and opp. amagga˚) one who is an expert as regards the Path (lit. & fig.) SN iii.108; samāpatti˚, etc. AN v.156 sq. sālittaka-payoge k˚ skilled in the art of throwing potsherds Pv-a 282 ■ In derivation k. is expld by Dhpāla & Bdhgh by; kucchita and salana, viz. kucchita-salanādi atthena kusalaṃ Vv-a 169; kucchite pāpadhamme salayanti calayanti kappenti viddhaṃsenti ti kusalā Dhs-a 39; where four alternative derivations are given (cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. lxxxii).
2. (nt.) a good thing, good deeds, virtue, merit, good consciousness (citta omitted; cp. Dhs-a 162, Dhs-a 200, etc.): yassa pāpaṃ kataṃ kammaṃ kusalena pithīyati, so imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti “he makes this world shine, who covers an evil deed with a good one” MN ii.104 = Dhp 173 = Thag 872; sukhañ ca k. pucchi (fitness) Snp 981; Vv 301 (= ārogyaṃ); DN i.24; Ja vi.367; Pv i.13 (= puñña) Pv-a 75; Mil 25 ■ In special sense as ten kusalāni equivalent to the dasasīlaṃ (cp. sīla) MN i.47; AN v.241 AN v.274. All good qualities (dhammā) which constitute right and meritorious conduct are comprised in the phrase-kusala-dhammā Snp 1039, Snp 1078, expld. in extenso Nd ii.s. v. See also cpd. ˚dhamma ■ Kusalaṃ karoti to do what is good and righteous, i.e. kāyena, vācāya manasā Iti 78; cp. Dhp 53; sabba-pāpassa akaraṇaṃ kusalassa upasampadā sacittapariyodapanaṃ etaṃ Buddhānusāsanaṃ DN ii.49 = Dhp 183; cp. Ne 43, Ne 81 Ne 171, Ne 186. Kusalaṃ bhāveti to pursue righteousness (together with akusalaṃ pajahati to give up wrong habits) AN i.58; AN iv.109 sq.; Iti 9 ■ akusala adj.: improper wrong, bad; nt.: demerit, evil deed DN i.37, DN i.163 bālo + akusalo Snp 879, Snp 887; = pāpa Pv-a 60, cp. pāpapasuto akatakusalo ib. 6. kusalaṃ & akusalaṃ are discussed in detail (with ref. to rūpâvacara˚ fivefold, to arūpâvacara˚ & lokuttara˚ fourfold, to kāmâvacara eight & twelvefold) at Vism 452
454 ■; kusalākusala good and bad MN i.489; SN v.91; Mil 25; Ne 161, Ne 192; Dhs 1124 sq ■ sukusala (dhammānaṃ) highly skilled DN i.180 (cp. MN ii.31).
-anuesin striving after righteousness Snp 965; cp kinkusalānuesin DN ii.151 and kinkusalagavesin MN i.163 sq.; -abhisanda overflow of merit (+ puñña˚) AN ii.54 sq.; AN iii.51; AN iii.337; -kamma meritorious action, right conduct AN i.104; AN i.292 sq.; Pts i.85; Pts ii.72 sq.; Pv-a 9, Pv-a 26 -cittā (pl.) good thoughts Vb 169
173, 184, 285 sq. 294 sq.; -cetanā right volition Vb 135; -dhammā (pl. (all) points of righteousness, good qualities of character SN ii.206; MN i.98; AN iv.11 sq.; AN v.90 sq.; 123 sq.; Pp 68, Pp 71; Vb 105; Pts i.101, Pts i.132; Pts ii.15, Pts ii.230; Vv-a 74 Vv-a 127; -pakkha “the side of virtue,” all that belongs to good character MN iii.77 (and a˚) with adj. ˚pakkhika SN v.91; -macchariya Dhs 1122 is to be corrected to kula˚ instead of kusala˚ (meanness as regards family cp. Nd ii.on veviccha; -mūla the basis or root of goodness or merit; there are three: alobha, adosa, amoha MN i.47, MN i.489 = AN i.203 = Ne 183; DN iii.214; Dhs 32, Dhs 313 Dhs 981; Vb 169 sq., 210; Ne 126. Cp. ˚paccaya Vb 169; ˚ropanā Ne 50; -vitakka good reasoning, of which there are three: nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiṃsā˚ DN iii.215; Iti 82; Ne 126; -vipāka being a fruit of good kamma Dhs 454; Vism 454 (twofold, viz ahetuka & sahetuka).; -vedanā good, pure feeling Vb 3 sq.; cp. ˚saññā and ˚sankhārā Vb 6 sq.; Ne 126 (three ˚saññā, same as under ˚vitakkā); -sīla good proper conduct of life MN ii.25 sq.; adj. ˚sīlin DN i.115 (= DN-a i.286).
cp. Sk. kuśala
(only-˚) skill, cleverness, accomplishment; good quality ■ lakkhaṇa˚ skill in interpreting special signs Vv-a 138; aparicita˚ neglect in acquiring good qualities Pv-a 67. For foll. cp Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs. trsl. pp. 345–348; āpatti˚ skill as to what is an offence; samāpatti˚ in the Attainments dhātu˚ in the Elements; manasikāra˚ proficiency in attention; āyatana˚ skill in the spheres; paṭiccasamuppāda˚ skill in conditioned Genesis; ṭhāna˚ and aṭṭhāna˚ skill in affirming (negating) causal conjuncture: all at DN iii.212 and Dhs 1329
1338; cp. AN i.84, AN i.94.
fem. abstr. fr. kusala
(nt.) one of the four cross seams of the robe of a bhikkhu Vin i.287; Vin ii.177; and aḍḍha˚ intermediate cross seam ibid. See Bdhgh’s note in Vin. Texts ii.208.
(adj.) indolent, inert, inactive. Expl. by kāma-vitakkādīhi vitakkehi vītināmanakapuggalo Dhp-a ii.260; by nibbiriyo Dhp-a iii.410; by alaso Pv-a 175, Often combd with hīnaviriya, devoid of zeal; Iti 27, Iti 116; Dhp 7, Dhp 112, Dhp 280; Mil 300, Mil 396. Also equivalent to alasa Dhp 112 combd with dussīla Mil 300, Mil 396; with duppañña DN iii.252 = DN iii.282; AN ii.227, AN ii.230; AN iii.7, AN iii.183, AN iii.433 ■ In other connections: MN i.43, MN i.471; AN iii.7 sq., 127; v.95 146, 153, 329 sq.; SN ii.29, SN ii.159, SN ii.206; Iti 71, Iti 102; Ja iv.131 (nibbiriya + ); Vism 132; Dhp-a i.69. The eight kusītavatthūni occasions of indolence, are enumerated at AN iv.332; DN iii.255; Vb 385 ■ akusīta alert, mindful careful Snp 68 (+ alīnacitto); Nd ii.s. v.; Sdhp 391.
Sk. kusīda; cp. kosajja
(f.) in a˚ alertness, brightness, keenness Vv-a 138.
abstr. fr. kusīta
(nt.) any flower Ja iii.394 (˚dāma); v.37; Pv-a 157 (= puppha); Vv-a 42; Dpvs i.4; Sdhp 246, Sdhp 595 Dāvs v.51 (˚agghika), fig. vimutti˚ the flower of emancipation Thag 100; Mil 399.
(adj.) in flower, blooming Vv-a 160, Vv-a 162.
(nt.) the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius, used for dying red Ja v.211 (˚rattavattha); vi.264 (do) Khus iv.2.
and kussobbha (nt.) a small pond, usually combd with kunnadī and appld in similes: SN ii.32 = AN i.243 = AN v.114; SN ii.118; SN v.47, SN v.63 SN v.395; AN ii.140; AN iv.100; Snp 720; Pv-a 29; DN-a i.58.
Sk. kuśvabhra
(adj.) deceitful, fraudulent, false, in phrase kuhā thaddhā lapā singī AN ii.26 = Thag 959; Iti 113 ■ akuha honest, upright MN i.386; Snp 957; Mil 352.
Sk. kuha; *qeudh to conceal, cp. Gr. κεύδω; Ags hȳdan, E. hide
deceitful, cheating; a cheat, a fraud, combd with lapaka DN i.8; AN iii.111 ■ AN v.159 sq.; Snp 984, Snp 987; Ja i.375 (˚tāpasa); Dhp-a iv.152 (˚brāhmaṇa); iv.153 (˚cora); Mil 310, Mil 357; Pv-a 13; DN-a i.91.
der. fr. prec.
(f.) 1. deceit, fraud, hypocrisy, usually in combn kuhana-lapana “deceit and talking-over” = deceitful talk DN i.8; AN iii.430; DN-a i.92; Mil 383; Nd ii.on avajja ■ MN i.465 = Iti 28, Iti 29; SN iv.118; AN v.159 sq.; Vism 23 Vb 352; Sdhp 375.
2. menacing Snp-a 582 ■ Opp akuhaka Snp 852 ■ Var. commentator’s derivations are kuhāyanā (fr. kuhanā) and kuhitattaṃ (fr. kuheti) to be found at Vism 26.
-vatthūni (pl.) cases or opportunities of deceit, three of which are discussed at Nd ii.on nikkuha, mentioned also at Vism 24; DN-a i.91 & Snp-a 107.;
abstr. fr. adj. kuhana = kuhaka
(nt.) (der. fr. kuha) a hole, a cavity; lit. a hidingplace Dāvs i.62.
see under ku˚.
(pl.) kuhali flowers Attanugaluvaṃsa 216.
only in pahaṃsīyati + k˚ “he exults and rejoices” at Mil 325 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.220, where printed kuhūyati).
to deceive DA 91; ger. kuhitvā deceiving Ja vi.212.
v. denom. fr. kuha
to sing (of birds; cp. vikūjati) Ja ii.439 Ja iv.296; Dāvs v.51 ■ pp. kūjita see abhi˚, upa˚.
kuj, expld with guj at Dhtp 78 by “avyatte sadde”
(nt.) a trap, a snare; fig. falsehood, deceit. As trap Ja i.143 (kūṭapāsādi); iv.416 (expln paṭicchannapāsa). As deceit, cheating in formula tulā˚ kaṃsa māna˚ “cheating with weight, coin and measure (DN-a i.78 = vañcana) DN i.5 = DN iii.176 = SN v.473 = MN i.180 = AN ii.209; AN v.205 = Pp 58. māna˚ Pv-a 278 ■ As adj. false, deceitful, cheating, see cpds ■ Note. kūṭe Ja i.145 ought to be read kuṭe (antokuṭe padīpo viya cp. ghaṭa).
-aṭṭa a false suit, in ˚kāra a false suitor Ja ii.2; Dhp-a i.353; -jaṭila a fraudulent ascetic Ja i.375; Dhp-a i.40 -māna false measure Pv-a 191; -vāṇija a false-trader Pv iii.42; Pv-a 191; -vinicchayikatā a lie (false discrimination) Pv-a 210. -vedin lier, calumniator Ja iv.177.
Dhtp 472 & Dhtm 526 expl.; kuṭ; of kūṭa1 by koṭille (koṭilye), cp. Sk. kūṭa trap, cp. Gr. παλεύω to trap birds
(m. nt.) -(a) prominence, top (cp. koṭi), in abbha ridge of the cloud Vv i.1 (= sikhara); aṃsa˚ shoulder clavicle, Vv-a 121, Vv-a 123 pabbata˚ mountain peak Vin ii.193; Ja i.73. Cp. koṭa ■ (b) the top of a house roof, pinnacle AN i.261; Vv 784 (= kaṇṇikā Vv-a 304) gaha˚ Dhp 154; Pv-a 55. Cp. also kūṭāgāra ■ (c) a heap, an accumulation, in sankāra˚ dust-heap MN ii.7; Pv-a 144 ■ (d) the topmost point, in phrase desanāya kūṭaṃ gahetvā or desanā kūtaṃ gaṇhanto “leading up to the climax of the instruction” Ja i.275, Ja i.393, Ja i.401 Ja v.151; Ja vi.478; Vv-a 243. Cp. arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto Ja i.114; arahattaphalena k. gaṇhiṃ Thag-a 99.
-aṅga the shoulder Vv 158 (= Vv-a 123). -āgāra (nt.) a building with a peaked roof or pinnacles, possibly gabled; or with an upper storey Vin i.268; SN ii.103 SN v.218; SN iii.156; SN iv.186; SN v.43, SN v.75, SN v.228; AN i.101, AN i.261 AN iii.10, AN iii.364; AN iv.231; AN v.21; Pv iii.17; 221; Vv 82 (= ratanamayakaṇṇikāya bandhaketuvanto Vv-a 50); Vv-a 6 (upari˚, with upper storey) v.l. kuṭṭhāgāra; Pv-a 282 (˚dhaja with a flag on the summit); Dhp-a iv.186. In cpds.:-˚ matta as big as an upper chamber Ja i.273; Mil 67; -˚sālā a pavilion (see description of Maṇḍalamāḷa at DN-a i.43) Vin iii.15, Vin iii.68, Vin iii.87; Vin iv.75; DN i.150; SN ii.103 = SN v.218; SN iv.186. -(n)gama going towards the point (of the roof), converging to the summit SN ii.263 SN iii.156 = SN v.43; -ṭṭha standing erect, straight, immovable in phrase vañjha k˚ esikaṭṭhāyin DN i.14 = DN i.56; SN iii.211 = MN i.517 (expl. DN-a i.105 by pabbatakūṭaṃ viya ṭhita); -poṇa at Vism 268 is to be read ˚goṇa: see kūṭa4.
Vedic kūṭa horn, bone of the forehead, prominence, point, *qele to jut forth, be prominent; cp Lat. celsus, collis, columen; Gr. κολωνός κολοφών; Ags holm, E. hill
(nt.) a hammer, usually as aya˚; an iron sledge hammer Ja i.108; or ayo˚; Pv-a 284; ayomaya˚; Snp 669 kammāra˚; Vism 254.
*qolā to beat; cp. Lat. clava; Gr. κλάω, κόλος, and also Sk. khaḍga; Lat. clades, procello; Gr. κλαδαρός. The expln of kuṭ3 at Dhtp 557 & Dhtm 783 is “āko ṭane”
(adj.) without horns, i.e. harmless, of goṇa a draught bullock Vin iv.5 = Ja i.192 (in play of words with kūṭa deceitful J. trsl. misses the point translates “rascal”). These maimed oxen (cows calves) are represented as practically useless & sluggish in similes at Vism 268, Vism 269: kūṭa-goṇa-(so read for ˚poṇa)-yutta-ratha a cart to which such a bullock is harnessed (uppathaṃ dhāvati runs the wrong way) kūṭa-dhenuyā khīraṃ pivitvā kūṭa-vaccho, etc., such a calf lies still at the post ■ Kūṭa-danta as Np. should prob. belong here, thus meaning “ox-tooth” (derisively (DN i.127; Vism 208), with which may be compared danta-kūṭa (see under danta).
Sk. kūṭa, not horned; *(s)qer to cut, mutilate, curtail, cp. Lat. caro, curtus; also Sk kṛdhu maimed The expln of kuṭ; as “chede,” or “chedane” (cutting at Dhtp 90, Dhtp 555; Dhtm 115, Dhtm 526, Dhtm 781 may refer to this kūṭa. See also kuṭṭa
(nt.) fraud, deceit, in combn with sāṭheyya vankeyya MN i.340; AN v.167.
der. fr. *kūṭya of kūṭa1, cp. in formation sāṭheyya
(m.). 1. a pit, a cavity akkhi˚; the socket of the eye MN i.80, MN i.245; Dhs-a 306 gūtha˚; a cesspool DN ii.324; Snp 279; Pv ii.316; Pp 36 miḷha˚; a pit for evacuations Pgdp 23, Pgdp 24; loma˚; the root of the hair, a pore of the skin DN-a i.57; Vism 262 Vism 360; also in na loma-kūpamattaṃ pi not even a hairroot Ja i.31; Ja iii.55; vacca˚; = gūtha˚ Vin ii.141, Vin ii.222. As a tank or a well: Ja vi.213; Vv-a 305.
2. the mast of a boat Ja iii.126; Mil 363, Mil 378. See next.
-khaṇa one who digs a pit Ja vi.213. -tala the floor of a pit Vism 362.
Vedic kūpa, orig. curvature viz. (a) interior = cavity, cp. Lat. cupa, Gr. κύπελλον cup; also Gr.κύμβη, Sk. kumbha ■ (b) exterior = heap, cp. Ags hēap, Ohg. heap, Sk. kūpa mast
= kūpa 1. Vism 361 (akkhi˚), 362 (nadītīra˚), 449 (id.); = kūpa. 2. Ja ii.112; Ja iv.17.
(nt.) a slope, a bank, an embankment. Usually of rivers: SN i.143 = Ja iii.361; AN i.162; Snp 977; Ja i.227; Mil 36: udapāna˚ the facing of a well Vin ii.122; vaccakūpassa k˚ the sides of a cesspool Vin ii.141. See also paṃsu˚, & cp. uk˚, upa˚ paṭi˚.;
Dhtp 271: kūla āvaraṇe
(nt.) in sukkha˚; boiled rice (?) Vin iv.86; Dhp-a ii.171.
Name of a tree Ja v.405. Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests misreading for koka Phoenix sylvestris.
?
expld by Buddhaghosa DN-a i.247 as “the science which assists the officiating priests by laying down rules for the rites, or by leaving them to their discretion” (so Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 116) In short, the ritual; the kalpa as it is called as one of the vedangas. Only in a stock list of the subject a learned Brahmin is supposed to have mastered DN i.88; AN i.163, AN i.166; Snp 1020; Mil 10, Mil 178. So in BSk; Avs ii.19; Divy 619.
deriv. unknown
MA 152 (on MN i.32) has “trained deceivers (sikkhitā kerātikā); very deceitful false all through”; iii.6 = AN iii.199.
deriv. unknown
Name of a flower Ja iv.482.
etym. uncertain
sign etc., see saṃ˚.
1. ray, beam of light splendour, effulgence Thag 64; which is a riddle on the various meanings of ketu.
2. flag, banner, sign perhaps as token of splendour Thag 64. dhamma-k˚ having the Doctrine as his banner AN i.109 = AN iii.149 dhūma-k˚; having smoke as its splendour, of fire, Ja iv.26; Vv-a 161 in expln of dhūmasikha.
-kamyatā desire for prominence, self-advertisement (perhaps vainglory, arrogance) Vism 469; Dhs 1116 (Dhs A. trs. 479), 1233 = Nd ii.505; Nd i.on Snp 829 (= uṇṇama);- mālā “garland of rays” Vv-a 323.
Vedic ketu, *(s)qait, clear; cp. Lat. caelum (= *caidlom), Ohg heitar, heit; Goth. haidus; E ■ hood, orig appearance, form, like
see kayati.
(adj.) having flags, adorned with flags Vv-a 50.
fr. ketu
(m. nt.) an irrigated field, prepared for ploughing, arable land in its first stage of cultivation: kedāre pāyetvā karissāma “we shall till the fields after watering them” Ja i.215; as square-shaped (i.e. marked out as an allotment) Vin i.391 (caturassa˚; Bdhgh on MV viii.12, 1); Ja iii.255 (catukkaṇṇa˚); surrounded by a trench, denoting the boundary (-mariyādā) Dhp-a iii.6 ■ Ja iv.167; Ja v.35; Pv-a 7 (= khetta). The spelling is sometimes ketāra (J iii.255 v.l.) see Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 112. Note. The prefix ke-suggests an obsolete noun of the meaning “water,” as also in kebuka ke-vaṭṭa; perhaps Sk. kṣvid, kṣvedate, to be wet, ooze? ke would then be k(h)ed, and kedara ked + dṛ; bursting forth of water = inundation; kebuka = kedvu(d)ka (udaka); kevaṭṭa = ked + vṛ; moving on the water, fisherman; (cp. Avs Index Kaivarta: name of an officer on board a trading vessel).
-koṭi top or corner-point of a field Vism 180.
water Ja vi.38 (= 42: k. vuccati udakaṃ). As nadī a river at Ja iii.91, where Seruma at similar passage p. 189.
on ke-see note to prec.
(nt.) a bracelet, bangle Dhp-a ii.220 (v.l. kāyura).
(adj.) wearing a bracelet Pv-a 211 (= kāyūrin).
(ger. of kayati) for sale Ja vi.180 (= vikkiṇitabba).
(adj.) deceitful, false, hypocritic Ja i.461 (expld by biḷāra); iv.220; iv.223 (= kirāsa) MA 152; Dhp-a iii.389 (= saṭha) ■ a˚ honest, frank Ja v.117 (= akitava, ajūtakara).
fr. kirāṭa
= prec. Ja iii.260 (˚lakkhaṇa); MA 152.
at Thag 1010 is to be corrected into keḷiyo (see keḷi2).
(f.) desire, greed, usually shown in fondness for articles of personal adornment: thus “selfishness” Vb 351 = DN-a i.286 (+ paṭikeḷanā ). In this passage it is given as a rather doubtful expln of cāpalla, which would connect it with kṣvel to jump, or khel to swing, oscillate, waver cp. expln Dhtp 278 kela khela = calane. Another passage is Nd ii.585, where it is combd with parikeḷanā and acts as syName of vibhūsanā.
fr. kilissati? or is it kheḷana?
to adorn oneself with (acc.), to fondle, treasure take pride in (gen.) MN i.260 (allīyati kelāyati dhanāyati mamāyati, where dhanāyati is to be read as vanāyati as shown by v.l. SN iii.190 & MN i.552); SN iii.190 (id.) Mil 73 ■ pp. keḷāyita.
Denom. fr. kīḷ in meaning “to amuse oneself with,” i.e. take a pride in. Always combd with mamāyati. BSk. same meaning (to be fond of) śālikṣetrāṇi k. gopāyati Divy 631. Morris. J.P.T.S. 1893, 16 puts it (wrongly?) to kel to quiver: see also keḷanā
(nt.) playfulness, unsettledness Vism 134 (opp. majjhatta), 317.;
fr. keḷāyati, cp. kelanā & keḷi
desired, fondled, made much of Ja iv.198 (expld with the ster. phrase kelāyati mamāyati pattheti piheti icchatī ti attho).
pp. of keḷāyati
(cp. Sk. kailāsa] Name of a mountain Bdhd 138.
(f.) 1. play, amusement, sport Pv-a 265 (= khiḍḍā); parihāsa merry play, fun Ja i.116.
2. playing at dice, gambling in ˚maṇḍala “circle of the game,” draught-board; ˚ṃ bhindati to break the board, i.e. to throw the die over the edge so as to make the throw invalid (cp. Cunningham Stupa of Bharhut, plate 45) Ja i.379.
fr. krīḍ to play, sport: see kīḷati
(f.) the meaning is not quite defined it may be taken as “attachment, lust, desire,” or “selfishness, deceit” (cp. kerāṭika & kilissati), or “unsettledness, wavering.”- keḷi-sīla of unsettled character unreliable, deceitful Pv-a 241. ˚sīlaka id. Ja ii.447 ■ pañca citta-keḷiyo = pañca nīvaraṇāni (kāmacchanda etc.), the gratifications of the heart Thag 1010 (corr. kelisā to keḷiyo!) ■ citta-keḷiṃ kīḷantā bahuṃ pāpakammaṃ katvā enjoying themselves (wrongly) to their heart’s content Ja iii.43. Cp. kāmesu a-ni-kīḷitāvin unstained by desires SN i.9, SN i.117.
either fr. kil as in kilijjati & kilissati, or fr.; kel, as given under keḷanā
fisherman DN i.45 (in simile of dakkho k˚) AN iii.31 = AN iii.342, cp. iv.91; Ud 24 sq.; Ja i.210; Dhp-a ii.132; Dhp-a iv.41; Pv-a 178 (˚gāma, in which to be reborn, is punishment, fishermen being considered outcast); cp. Ja vi.399 Name of a brahmin minister, also DN i.411 Name of Kevaḍḍha (?).
-dvāra Name of one of the gates of Benares, and a village near by Vv 197; Vv-a 97.
on ke-see kedāra
(adj ■ adv.) expression of the concept of unity and totality: only, alone; whole, complete; adv altogether or only
1. ˚ṃ (adv.) (a) only = just: k tvaṃ amhākaṃ vacanaṃ karohi “do all we tell you Pv-a 4 ■ only = but, with this difference: Vv-a 203 Vv-a 249 ■ k.… vippalapati he only talks Pv-a 93; and yet: “sakkā nu kiñci adatvā k. sagge nibbattituṃ” is it possible not to give anything, and yet go to heaven? kevalaṃ mano-pasāda-mattena only by purity of mind Dhp-a i.33; kevalaṃ vacchake balava-piyacittatāya simply by the strong love towards the babycalf Vism 313; (b) alone: k. araññaṃ gamissāmi Vv-a 260 ■ exclusive Mil 247 ■ na k.… atha kho not only… but also Vv-a 227.
2. whole, entire Snp p.108; Cp i.1019; Pv ii.63 (= sakala Pv-a 95); Vism 528 (= asammissa, sakala); Pv ii.63 (= sakala Pv-a 95). k. → akevala entire → deficient MN i.326. ˚ṃ entirely thoroughly, all round: k˚ obhāsenti Vv-a 282.
-kappa a whole kappa Snp p.. 18, 45, 125; Kp-a 115; Vv-a 124, Vv-a 255. -paripuṇṇa fulfilled in its entirety (sakala DN-a i.177) of the Doctrine; expld also at Ne 10.
cp. Lat. caelebs = *caivilo-b˚ to live by oneself, i.e. to live in celibacy, perhaps also, Goth hails, Ohg. heil, E. whole
(adj.) one who is fully accomplished, an Arahant; often with mahesi and uttamapurisa Defn sabbaguṇa-paripuṇṇa sabba-yoga-visaṃyutta Snp-a 153 ■ ye suvimuttā te kevalino ye kevalino vaṭṭaṃ tesaṃ natthi paññâpanāya SN iii.59 sq., i.e. “those who are thoroughly emancipated, these are the accomplished…”; kevalīnaṃ mahesiṃ khīṇ’ āsavaṃ Snp 82 = SN i.167 ■ k. vusitavā uttamapuriso Nd ii.on tiṇṇa = AN v.16 ■ with gen.: brahmacariyassa k. “perfected in morality” AN ii.23 ■ As Ep. of “brāhmaṇa Snp 519 = Nd ii.s. v.; of dhammacakka AN ii.9; see also Snp 490, Snp 595 ■ akevalin not accomplished, not perfected Snp 878, Snp 891.
fr. kevala
the hair of the head SN i.115 (haṭa-haṭa-k˚, with dishevelled hair) AN i.138 (palita-kesa with grey hair; also at Ja i.59) Snp 456 (nivutta˚), 608; Thag 169; Ja i.59, Ja i.138; Ja iii.393; Mil 26; Kp-a 42; Vism 353 (in detail). The wearing of long hair was forbidden to the Bhikkhus: Vin ii.107 sq.; 133 (cp. kesa-massu) ■ dark (glossy) hair is a distinction of beauty: susukāḷa-keso (of Gotama DN i.115; cp. kaṇha and kalyāṇa; Pv-a 26 ■ The hair of Petas is long and dishevelled Pv-a 56; Sdhp 103 it is the only cover of their nakedness: kesehi paṭicchanna “covered only with my hair” Pv i.102 ■ kesesu gahetvā to take by the hair (in Niraya) DN i.234 ■ kesaṃ oropeti to have one’s hair cut Vin ii.133.
-oropaṇa (-satthaka) (a) hair-cutting (knife), i.e. a razor Dhp-a i.431; -ohāraka one who cuts the hair, a barber Vism 413. -kambala a hair blanket (according to Bdhgh human hair) DN i.167 = AN i.240, AN i.295 = AN ii.206; Vin i.305 = MN i.78 = Pp 55; AN i.286. -kambalin wearing a hair blanket (of Ajita) DN i.55. -kalāpā (pl. (atimanohara˚) beautiful tresses Pv-a 46; -kalyāṇa beauty of hair Dhp-a i.387 ■ kārika hairdresser Vv 175 -dhātu the hair-relic (of the Buddha) Ja i.81; -nivāsin covered only with hair of Petas (: keseh’ eva paṭicchādita-kopīnā) Pv iii.16. ˚massu hair and beard; kappita-k˚-m˚ (adj.) with h. and b. dressed DN i.104; AN iv.94; Ja vi.268. Esp. freq. in form kesa-massuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati “to shave off hair & beard, dress in yellow robes and leave the home for the homeless state, i.e. renounce the world and take up the life of a Wanderer DN i.60, DN i.115; DN iii.60, DN iii.64, DN iii.76; AN i.107; AN iii.386; Iti 75; Pp 57; similarly AN ii.207 = Pp 56. -sobha the splendour or beauty of the hair Pv-a 46. -hattha a tuft of hair Pv-a 157; Vv-a 167.
Vedic keśa; cp. kesara hair, mane = Lat. caesaries, hair of the head, Ags. heord = E. hair
see kisa.
a mane, in -sīha a maned lion Ja ii.244; Snp-a 127.
filament of flowers, hairy structures of plants esp. of the lotus; usually of kiñjakkha Pv-a 77; Vv-a 12; Vv-a 111 ■ sa-kesarehi padumapattehi lotusleaves with their hairs Vv-a 32; nicula-k˚ fibres of the Nicula tree Vv-a 134.
-bhāra a sort of fan (cp. vāladhi and cāmara) Vv-a 278.
fr. kesa
having a mane, of a lion, also name of a battle-array (˚saṃgāmo) Dpvs i.7; cp. Avs i.56.
fr. kesara1
of rich hair, of beautiful hair. Ep. of King Vāsudeva (cp. kaṇha) Pv ii.62.
fr. last
(adj.) hairy, of mangoes Mil 334.
fr. kesa
see ka.
a wolf Ja vi.525; Nd i.13 = Nd ii.420; Mil 267 = Ja v.416. ˚vighāsa remainder of a wolf’s meal Vin iii.58.
not = Sk. koka, cuckoo
Name of a tree, Phoenix sylvestris: see keka.
cp. Sk. koka
(nt.) the (red) lotus AN iii.239 = Ja i.116.
cp. Sk. kokanada
the red lotus in ˚jāta “like the red lotus,” said of the flower of the Pāricchattaka tree AN iv.118.
the Indian cuckoo. Two kinds mentioned at Vv-a 57: kāḷa˚; and phussa˚ black and speckled k. As citra˚; at Ja v.416 ■ Vv 111, 588; Vv-a 132, Vv-a 163.
cp. Sk. koka a kind of goose, also cuckoo, with derivation kokila cuckoo; cp. Gr. κόκκυς, Lat. cuculus E. cuckoo
see saṃ˚.
fr. kuc
see ka.
(nt.) some kind of seat or settee, made of bark, grass or rushes Vin ii.149; Vin iv.40 (where the foll. def. is given: kocchaṃ nāma vāka-mayaṃ vā usīra-mayaṃ vā muñjamayaṃ vā babbaja-mayaṃ vā anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhaṃ hoti. Cp. Vin. Texts i.34; iii.165); Ja v.407 Also in list of 16 obstructions (palibodhā) at Mil 11.
(nt.) a comb (for hair-dressing) Vin ii.107; Vv 8446 (= Vv-a 349); Thig 254, Thig 411 (= Thag-a 267).
-kāra a comb-maker Mil 331 (not in corresp. list of vocations at DN i.51).
mail armour Ja iv.296 (= kavaca).
a rug or cover with long hair, a fleecy counterpane Vin i.281; Dhp-a i.177; Dhp-a iii.297 (pāvāra˚); Dāvs v.36 Often in expln of goṇaka (q.v.) as dīgha-lomaka mahākojava DN-a i.86; Pv-a 157.
the heron, often in comb;n with mayūra (peacock): Thag 1113; Vv 111, 358 Ja v.304; Ja vi.272; or with haṃsa Pv ii.123 ■ Expld as sārasa Vv-a 57; jiṇṇa˚ an old heron Dhp 155.
cp. Sk. krauñca & kruñc
= abbr. of koñca-nāda, trumpeting, in koñcaṃ karoti to trumpet (of elephants) Vin iii.109; Ja vi.497.
-nāda the trumpeting of an elephant (“the heron’s cry”) Ja i.50; Mil 76 (in etymol play with koñca); Vv-a 35. -rāva = prec. Dhp-a iv.70 -vādikā a kind of bird Ja vi.538.
not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 163 sq. to kruñc. (meaning to bend, cp. Lat. crux, E. ridge), but prob. a contamination of krośa, fr. krus to crow, and kuñja = kuñjara, elephant (q.v.). Partly suggested at Divy 251; see also expln at Vv-a 35, where this connection is quite evident.
belonging to a peak, in cpd. ˚pabbata “peak-mountain,” Npl. Vism 127 (write as K˚), 292.
fr. kūṭa2
pudendum muliebre, in conn. with kāṭa as a vile term of abuse Vin iv.7 (Bdhgh. koṭacikā ti itthinimittaṃ… hīno nāma akkoso).
(f.) the end-(a) of space: the extreme part, top, summit, point (cp. anta to which it is opposed at Ja vi.371): dhanu-koṭiṃ nissāya “through the (curved) end of my bow,” i.e. by means of hunting Ja ii.200; aṭṭhi-koṭi the tip of the bone Ja iii.26; cāpa a bow Vv-a 261; vema˚ the part of a loom that is moved Dhp-a iii.175; khetta˚ the top (end) of the field Snp-a 150 cankamana˚ the far end of the cloister Ja iv.30; Pv-a 79 ■ (b) of time: a division of time, with reference either to the past or the future, in pubba˚; the past (cp pubbanta), also as purima˚; ; and pacchima˚; the future (cp. aparanta). These expressions are used only of saṃsāra: saṃsārassa purimā koṭi na paññāyati “the first end, i.e. the beginning of S. is not known” Nd ii.664; Dhs-a 11; of pacchimā koṭi ibid ■ anamatagg âyaṃ saṃsāro, pubba˚ na paññāyati S’s end and beginning are unthinkable, its starting-point is not known (to beings obstructed by ignorance) SN ii.178 = SN iii.149 Nd ii.664 = Kv 29 = Pv-a 166; cp. Bdhd 118 (p.k. na ñāyati) ■ koṭiyaṃ ṭhito bhāvo “my existence in the past” Ja i.167 ■ (c) of number: the “end” of the scale, i.e. extremely high, as numeral representing approximately the figure a hundred thousand (cp Kirfel, Kosmographie. p. 336). It follows on satasahassāni Nd ii.664, and is often increased by sata˚ or sahassa˚, esp. in records of wealth (dhana) Snp 677; Ja i.227, Ja i.230, Ja i.345 = Dhp-a i.367 (asīti˚-vibhavo); Ja i.478; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 96; cp. also koṭisatā arahanto Mil 6, Mil 18-kahāpaṇa-koṭi-santhārena “for the price (lit. by the spreading out) of 10 million kahāpaṇas” Vin ii.159; Ja i.94 (ref. to the buying of Jetavana by Anāthapiṇḍika).
-gata “gone to the end,” having reached the end i.e. perfection, nibbāna. Nd ii.436; -ppatta = prec Nd ii.436; as “extreme” Ja i.67. -simbalī Name of a tree (in Avīci) Sdhp 194.
cp. Sk. koṭi & kūṭa;2
(adj.) 1. having a point or a top, with ref. to the human teeth as eka˚, dvi˚; ti˚, catu˚, or teeth with one, two, etc., points Vism 251.
2. having an end or climax SA on pariyanta (see KS. p. 320) āpāna˚; lasting till the end of life Mil 397: Vism 10. 3. referring to (both) ends (of saṃsāra), in ubhato˚ pañhā questions regarding past & future MN i.393 sq.
fr. koṭi
(adj.) aiming for an end or goal Ja vi.254 (cp. ākoṭana2).
fr. koṭi
(nt.) crookedness Dhtm 526; Abhp 859. As koṭilya at Dhtp 472.
fr. kuṭila
(nt.) a kind of cloth Ja vi.47 (coming from the kingdom of k.), 500 (spelt kodumb˚). -˚ka k ■ stuffs Mil 2.
cp. BSk. kauṭumba Divy 559
(?) breaking, asi-k˚ note on Vin iv.363 (for asikoṭṭha Vin iv.171?); ˚aṭṭhi at Vism 254 read koṭṭh˚.
1. grinding, crushing, pounding (grains) Ja i.475; ˚pacan’ ādi pounding and cooking, etc Dhp-a ii.261.
2. hammering or cutting (?) in dāru Ja ii.18; Ja vi.86 (maṃsa˚, here “beating,” T. spells ṭṭh) Cp. adhikuṭṭanā.
fr. koṭṭeti
(pp. of kotteti] beaten down, made even Vism 254, Vism 255.
a floor of pounded stones, or is it cloth? Dāvs iv.47.
1. to beat, smash, crush, pound Ja i.478 Ja vi.366 (spelt ṭṭh); Dhp-a i.25 (suvaṇṇaṃ) 165.
2. to make even (the ground or floor) Vin ii.291 (in making floors); Ja vi.332.
3. to cut, kill Snp-a 178 (= hanti of Snp 121); Dhp-a i.70 (pharasunā) ■ pp. koṭṭita ■ Caus koṭṭāpeti to cause to beat, to massage Vin ii.266; Ja iv.37 (ṭṭ the only v.l. B.; T. has ṭṭh).
cp. Sk. kuṭ; & kuṭṭa;1. Expld one-sidedly by Dhtp (91 & 556) as “chedane” which is found only in 3 and adhikuṭṭanā. The meaning “beat” is attributed by Dhtp (557) & Dhtm (783) to root; kuṭ3 (see kūṭa3) by expla “akoṭane.” Cp. also kūṭa4; ākoṭeti & paṭikoṭeti
(m. nt.) anything hollow and closed in (Cp. gabbha for both meanings) as
1. the stomach or abdomen Mil 265, Vism 357; Sdhp 257.
2. a closet, a monk’s cell, a storeroom MN i.332; Thig 283 (?) = Thag-a, 219; Ja ii.168. 3. a sheath, in asi˚ Vin iv.171.
-aṭṭhi a stomach bone or bone of the abdomen Vism 254, Vism 255. -abbhantara the intestinal canal Mil 67 -āgāra (nt.) storehouse, granary, treasury: in conn with kosa (q.v.) in formula paripuṇṇa-kosa-koṭṭhâgāra (adj.) DN i.134, expld at DN-a i.295 as threefold, viz dhana˚ dhañña˚ vattha˚, treasury, granary, warehouse Pv-a 126, Pv-a 133; -āgārika a storehouse-keeper, one who hoards up wealth Vin i.209; Dhp-a i.101; -āsa [ = koṭṭha + aṃsa] share, division, part; ˚koṭṭhāsa (adj.) divided into, consisting of. K. is a prose word only and in all Com. passages is used to explain bhāga: Ja i.254; Ja i.266 Ja vi.368; Mil 324; Dhp-a iv.; 108 (= pada), 154; Pv-a 58 Pv-a 111, Pv-a 205 (kāma˚ = kāmaguṇā); Vv-a 62; anekena k˚-ena infinitely Pv-a 221.
Sk. koṣṭha abdomen, any cavity for holding food, cp. kuṣṭa groin, and also Gr. κύτος cavity κύσδος pudendum muliebre, κύστις bladder = E. cyst chest; Lat. cunnus pudendum, Ger. hode testicle
a bird Ja vi.539 (woodpecker?).
Name of a plant, Costus speciosus (?) Ja v.420.
cp. Sk. kuṭṭha
(nt.) “a kind of koṭṭha,” the stronghold over a gateway, used as a store-room for various things, a chamber, treasury, granary Vin ii.153, Vin ii.210; for the purpose of keeping water in it Vin ii.121 = Vin ii.142; Vin ii.220 treasury Ja i.230; Ja ii.168 ■ store-room Ja ii.246; koṭthake pāturahosi appeared at the gateway, i.e. arrived at the mansion Vin i.291.;- udaka-k a bath-room, bath cabinet Vin i.205 (cp. Bdhgh’s expln at Vin. Texts ii.57); so also nahāna-k˚; and piṭṭhi-k˚; bath-room behind a hermitage Ja iii.71; Dhp-a ii.19; a gateway Vin ii.77; usually in cpd. dvāra-k˚; “door cavity, i.e. room over the gate: gharaṃ satta-dvāra-koṭṭhakapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ “a mansion adorned with seven gateways” Ja i.227 = Ja i.230, Ja i.290; Vv-a 322. dvāra-koṭṭhakesu āsanāni paṭṭhapenti “they spread mats in the gateways” Vv-a 6; esp. with bahi: bahi-dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvā “leading him out in front of the gateway” AN iv.206; ˚e thiṭa or nisinna standing or sitting in front of the gateway SN i.77; MN i.161, MN i.382; AN iii.30 ■ bala-k. a line of infantry Ja i.179 ■ koṭṭhaka-kamma or the occupation connected with a storehouse (or bathroom?) is mentioned as an example of a low occupation at Vin iv.6; Kern, Toev. s. v “someone who sweeps away dirt.”
the paddy-bird, as rukkha˚; Ja iii.25; Ja ii.163 (v.l. ṭṭ).
cp. Sk. koyaṣṭika
see kotthu.
at Ja ii.424 the v.l. khobheti (nāvaṃ) should be substituted. See also koṭṭeti.
1. a corner Vin ii.137; catu˚ = catu-kaṇṇa Pv-a 52;- ˚racchā crossroads Pv-a 24.
2. a plectrum for a musical instrument Mil 53.
cp. Sk. koṇa & also P. kaṇṇa
(v.l. B. koṇḍa) (?) a man of dirty habits Ja ii.209. 210, 212.
a cripple Ja ii.118. Konda-
damaka (?) Ja iv.389; also as v.l. B at Ja ii.209.
cp. kuṇḍa
a well-known gotta Ja ii.360.
(nt.) excitement, tumult, festival, fair Dāvs ii.80 esp. in ˚maṅgalaṃ paccāgacchati he visits the fair or show of… MN i.265; AN iii.439; ˚maṅgalika celebrating feasts, festive AN iii.206; Ja i.373; Mil 94 (cp. Mil trsl. i.143n: the native commentator refers it to erroneous views and discipline called kotūhala and mangalika)-(b) adj.: kotūhala excited, eager for, desirous of Mil 4; Dhp-a i.330.
-sadda shout of excitement Mil 301.
on formation cp. kolāhala; see also kutūhala
(koṭṭhalī?) a sack (?) Vin iii.189 = Vin iv.269.
a jackal DN iii.25, DN iii.26; MN i.334; Nd i.149 (spelt koṭṭhu); Ja vi.537 (˚sunā: expld by sigāla-sunakhā, katthu-soṇā ti pi pāṭho). kotthuka (and koṭṭhuka) = prec. SN i.66 (where text has kutthaka) Ja ii.108; Mil 23.
koṭṭhu Ja only: cp. Sk. kroṣṭu, of kruś
(nt.) a cross-bow MN i.429 (opp. to cāpa); Mil 351 (dhanu and k˚). ˚ka same Ja iv.433 (expld by dhanu).
cp. Sk. kodaṇḍa
see koṭumbara.
anger. Nearest synonyms are āghāta (Dhs. 1060 = Nd ii.576 both expositions also of dosa), upanāha (always in chain rāga, dosa, moha, kodha, upanāha) and dhūma (cp χυμός, Mhg. toûm = anger). As pair k. and upanāha AN i.91, AN i.95; in sequence kodha upanāha makkha paḷāsa etc. Nd ii.rāga 1.; Vb 357 sq.; Vism 53, Vism 107, Vism 306; in formula abhijjhā byāpāda k. upanāha MN i.36; AN i.299 = AN iv.148; cp. AN iv.456 = AN v.209; AN v.39, AN v.49 sq., 310 361. As equivalent of āghāta Dhs 1060 = Nd ii.576, cp Pp 18. In other combn: with mada and thambha Snp 245; kadariya Snp 362; pesuniya Snp 928; mosavajja Snp 866, Snp 868 (cp. SN i.169). Other passages, e.g. AN i.283; SN i.240; Snp 537, (lobha˚); Pv ii.37; Dhp i.52 (anattha-janano kodho); Pv-a 55, Pv-a 222 ■ kodha is one of the obstacles to Arahantship, and freedom from kodha is one of the fundamental virtues of a well-balanced mind ■ mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi “let not anger get the better of you” SN i.240; māno hi te brāhmaṇa khāribhāro kodho dhūmo bhasmani mosavajjaṃ etc. “anger is the smoke (smouldering) in the ashes” SN i.169 = Nd ii.576 ■ kodhaṃ chetvā cutting off anger SN i.41 = SN i.47 = SN i.161 = SN i.237; kodhaṃ jahe vippajaheyya mānaṃ “give up anger, renounce conceit Ja i.23 Ja i.25 = Dhp 221; kodhaṃ pajahanti vipassino: “the wise give up anger” Iti 2 = Iti 7; panuṇṇa-kodha (adj.) one who has driven out anger Snp 469; akkodhena jine kodhaṃ conquer anger by meekness Dhp 223 = Ja ii.4 = Vv-a 69. Yo ye uppatitaṃ kodhaṃ rathaṃ bhantaṃ va dhāraye tam ahaṃ sārathiṃ brūmi. “He who restrains rising anger as he would a drifting cart, him I call a waggoner” Dhp 222, cp. Snp 1 ■ akkodha freedom from anger, meekness, conciliation MN i.44; SN i.240 (with avihiṃsā tenderness, kindness); AN i.95; Dhp 223 = Ja ii.4 = Vv-a 69.
-ātimāna anger and conceit Snp 968. -upāyāsa companionship or association with anger, the state of being pervaded with anger (opp. akkodh˚) MN i.360, MN i.363 often compared with phenomena of nature suggesting swelling up, viz. “uddhumāyika” kodhupāyāsassa adhivacanaṃ MN i.144; “sa-ummī” Iti 114; “sobbho papāto” SN iii.109; -garu “having respect for” i.e. pursuing anger (opp. saddhammagaru) AN ii.46 sq., 84 -paññāṇa (adj.) knowing the true nature of anger Snp 96 (cp. Snp-a 170); -bhakkha feeding on, i.e. fostering anger, Ep. of a Yakkha SN i.238; -vinaya the discipline or control of anger AN i.91; AN v.165, AN v.167 (combd. with upanāha vinaya).
Vedic krodha fr. krudh, cp. kujjhati
(adj.); usually in combn with upanāhin, e.g. Vin ii.89; DN iii.45, DN iii.246; AN v.156, cp. Snp 116; SN ii.206 Pp 18 ■ k˚ kodhābhibhūta AN iv.94 sq.; k˚ kodhavinayassa na vaṇṇavādī AN v.165 ■ Used of caṇḍa Pv-a 83 ■ Cp. SN iv.240; MN i.42 sq., 95 sq.; Pv-a 82. akkodhana friendly, well-disposed, loving DN iii.159; SN ii.207; SN iv.243; MN i.42 sq., 95 sq.; Snp 19, Snp 624, Snp 850, Snp 941; Vv 155; Vv-a 69.
fr. kodha) having anger, angry, uncontrolled
a pennant, standard (cp. kunta) Ja vi.454; DN-a i.244; Snp-a 317.
at Ja vi.454 is expld by camma-kāra, thus “worker in leather (-shields or armour),” with der. fr konta (“satthitāya kontāya likhattā… ”), but reading and meaning are uncertain.
ill-temper, anger, grudge Vin ii.184 = Snp 6; Dhs 1060; with appaccaya (mistrust) MN i.27; almost exclusively in phrase kopañ ca dosañ ca appaccayañ ca pātukaroti (pātvakāsi) “he shows forth ill-temper malice and mistrust” (of a “codita” bhikkhu) DN iii.159; SN iv.305; MN i.96 sq., 250, 442; AN i.124, AN i.187 AN ii.203; AN iii.181 sq.; AN iv.168, AN iv.193; Ja i.301; Snp p.92. akopa (adj.) friendly, without hatred, composed Snp 499.
-antara (adj.) one who is under the power of ill-temper SN i.24.
fr. kup
(adj.) apt to arouse anger Ja vi.257.
fr. kopa
(nt.) a loin-cloth Ja v.404; Pv ii.323; Pv-a 172; Sdhp 106.
-niddaṃsanin “one who removes the loin-cloth,” i.e. shameless, impure DN iii.183.
cp. Sk. kaupīna
to set into agitation, to shake, to disturb: rājadhamme akopetvā not disturbing the royal rules Pv-a 161; Ja ii.366 = Dhp-a iv.88; kammaṃ kopetuṃ Vin iv.153 to find fault with a lawful decision kāyangaṃ na kopeti not to move a limb of the body see kāya. Cp. paṭi˚, pari˚, vi˚, saṃ˚.
caus. of kuppati
see kamala; Mhbv 29.
(adj.) juvenile, belonging to a youth or maiden: f. komārī a virgin AN iv.210.
-pati husband of a girl-wife Ja ii.120. -brahmacariyā (˚ṃ carati) to practise the vow of chastity or virginity AN iii.224; Thag-a 99. -bhacca Np. “master of the k˚-science,” i.e. of the medical treatment of infants (see note on Vin i.269 at Vin. Texts ii.174). As such it is the cognomen of Jīvaka DN i.47 (as Komārabhacca DN-a i.132); Vin i.71; Ja i.116; cp. Sdhp 351.
fr. kumāra
(and ˚ika) = prec. AN i.261; Ja ii.180 (dhamma virginity); of a young tree SN iv.160 ■ f. ˚ikā Ja iii.266.
(f.) moonlight; the full-moon day in the month Kattika, usually in phrase komudī catumāsinī Vin i.155, Vin i.176, sq.; DN i.47 (expld at DN-a i.139 as: tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti) or in phrase komudiyā puṇṇamāya Dhp-a iii.461.
fr. kumuda the white waterlily, cp. Sk. kaumudī
(m. nt.) 1. a bud Ja ii.265. - 2. a sheath Ja iii.282.
cp. Sk. koraka
(adj.) full of buds Vv-a 288.
fr. koraka
(adj.) affected, excitable, infatuated Nd i.226 = Nd ii.342 (v.l. kocaraka) = Vism 26 (v.l. korañjika).
fr. ku + raj or rañj, cp. rāga
a shrub and its flower Ja v.473 (˚dāma, so read for karaṇḍaka), vi.536; as Npl. in Koraṇḍaka-vihāra Vism 91.
= kuraṇḍaka
Np. as cognomen: the descendant of Kuru Ja ii.371 (of Dhanañjaya).
Sk. kauravya
(f.) a hen v.l. (ti vā pāḷi) at Thig 381 for turiyā. See also Thag-a 255 (= kuñcakārakukkuṭī).
(m. nt.) the jujube fruit MN i.80; AN iii.49 (sampanna-kolakaṃ sūkaramaṃsa “pork with jujube”); Ja iii.22 (= badara); vi.578.
-mattiyo (pl.) of the size of a j. truit, always comb w. kolaṭṭhi-mattiyo, of boils AN v.170 = Snp p.125, cp SN i.150; -rukkha the j. tree Snp-a 356; DN-a i.262; -sampāka cooked with (the juice of) jujube Vv 435 (= Vv-a 186).
Halāyudha ii.71 gives kola in meaning of “hog,” corrupted fr. kroḍa
going from kula to kula (clan to clan) in saṃsāra: AN i.233 = Pp 16; SN v.205; Ne 189 cp. AN iv.381; AN v.120.
der. fr. kula
(adj.) born of (good) family (cp. kulaja); as-˚, belonging to the family of… DN i.89; DN-a i.252; Mil 256 ■ khīṇa-kolañña (adj.) one who has come down in the world Vin i.86.
fr. kula
the kernel of the jujube, only in cpd. ˚mattiyo (pl.) SN i.150 = AN v.170 = Snp p.125 (with kolamattiyo) and ˚mattā Thig 498 = Thag-a 289; Dhp-a i.319.
at AN i.38 is composition form of kulaputta, and is to be combined with the foll ■ vaṇṇa-pokkharatā i.e. light colour as becoming a man of good family. Kern Toev. s. v. quite unnecessarily interprets it as “heroncolour,” comparing Sk. kolapuccha heron. A similar passage at Nd i.80 = Nd ii.505 reads kolaputtikena vā vaṇṇapokkharatāya vā, thus taking kolaputtikaṃ as nt, meaning a man of good virtue. The A passage may be corrupt and should then be read ˚puttikaṃ.
(and koḷamba Vv-a) a pot or vessel in general. In Vin always together with ghaṭa, pitcher: Vin i.208 Vin i.213, Vin i.225, Vin i.286; Ja i.33; DN-a i.58; Vv-a 36.
(nt.) (cp. also halāhala) shouting, uproar, excitement about (-˚), tumult, foreboding, warning about something, hailing. There are 5 kolāhalāni enumd at Kp-a 120 sq. viz. kappa˚; (the announcement of the end of the world, cp. Vism 415 sq.), cakkavatti˚; (of a worldking), buddha˚; (of a Buddha), maṅgala˚; (that a Buddha will pronounce the “εὐαγγέλιον”), moneyya˚ (that a monk will enquire of the Lord after the highest wisdom cp. Snp-a 490). One may compare the 3 (mahā-)halāhalāni given at Ja i.48 as kappa-halāhala, buddha˚ and cakkavatti˚, eka-kolāhalaṃ one uproar Ja iv.404; Ja vi.586; Dhp-a ii.96. See also Vin ii.165, Vin ii.275, Vin ii.280; Ja v.437; Dhp-a i.190; Pv-a 4; Vv-a 132.
(adj.) of the fruit of the jujube tree Ja iii.22, but wrongly expld as kula-dattika ph. = given by a man of (good) family.
fr. kola
(f.) well-bred, of good family Ja ii.348 (BB koleyyaka ).
(adj.) of good breed, noble, appld to dogs Ja i.175; Ja iv.437. Cp. kolīniyā, and Divy 165: kolikagadrabha a donkey of good breed.
(and kolāpa ) (adj.) 1. dry, sapless; always appld to wood, freq. in similes SN iv.161, SN iv.185; MN i.242; MN iii.95; Ja iii.495; Mil 151; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iv.166.
2. hollow tree Nd ii.40; Snp-a 355 (where Weber, Ind. Streifen v.1862, p. 429 suggests reading koṭara = Sk. koṭara hollow tree; unwarranted).
(or kolika?) (f.) adj. = kolaka, appl. to boils, in pīḷikoḷikā (itthi) having boils of jujube size Thig 395 (expl. at Thag-a 259; akkhidalesu nibbattanakā pīḷikā vuccati).
(adj.) one who is in the possession of right wisdom, with ref. either to dhamma, magga, or ariyasaccāni, closely related to medhāvin and paṇḍita SN i.146, SN i.194, SN i.196 (ceto-pariyāya˚); AN ii.46; MN i.1, MN i.7 MN i.135, MN i.300, MN i.310, MN i.433; Dhp 403 = Snp 627; Snp 484 (jātimaraṇa˚), 653 (kammavipāka˚); Pv i.1112; Vv 159 (= Vv-a 73), 6330 (= Vv-a 269); Mil 344; Sdhp 350- akovida ignorant of true wisdom (dhammassa) SN i.162; Snp 763; SN iv.287 = Nd ii.on attānudiṭṭhi.
ku + vid.
Bauhinia variegata; a tree in the devaloka (pāricchattaka koviḷāra: k-blossom called p. Vv-a 174) AN iv.117 sq.; Snp 44; Ja iv.29; Vv 381 Dhp-a i.270.
-puppha the flower of the K. tree Snp-a 354 (where the limbs of one afflicted with leprosy are compared with this flower).
cp. Sk. kovidāra
(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kośa and koṣa, cavity, box vessel, cp. Goth. hūs, E. house; related also kukṣi = P. kucchi any cavity or enclosure containing anything, viz. 1. a store-room or storehouse, treasury or granary AN iv.95 (rāja˚); Snp 525; Ja iv.409 (= wealth, stores); Ja vi.81 (aḍḍhakosa only half a house) in cpd ■ ˚ koṭṭhāgāra expld at DN-a i.295 as koso vuccati bhaṇḍāgāraṃ. Four kinds are mentioned: hatthī˚, assā˚, rathā˚, raṭṭhaṃ˚. 2. a sheath, in khura˚ Vism 251, paṇṇa˚ Kp-a 46. 3. a vessel or bowl for food: see kosaka.
4. a cocoon see-˚kāraka;
5. the membranous cover of the male sexual organ, the praeputium Ja v.197. The Com expls by sarīra-saṃkhāta k˚. See cpd. kosohita. Cp. also kosī.
-ārakkha the keeper of the king’s treasury (or granary AN iii.57; -ohita ensheathed, in phrase kosohita vatthaguyha “having the pudendum in a bag.” Only in the brahmin cosmogonic myth of the superman (mahā-purisa) DN iii.143, DN iii.161. Applied as to this item to the Buddha DN i.106 (in the Cy DN-a i.275, correct the misprint kesa into kosa) DN ii.17; Snp 1022 pp. 106, 107 Miln 167. For the myth see Dial iii.132
136. -kāraka the “cocoon-maker,” i.e. the silk-worm, Vin iii.224; Vism 251. -koṭṭhāgāra “treasury and granary” usually in phrase paripuṇṇa-k-k (adj.) “with stores of treasures and other wealth” Vin i.342; DN i.134; SN i.89; Mil 2; & passim.;
at Vv-a 349 is marked by Hardy, Index and trsld by scar or pock. It should be corrected to kesa, on evidence of corresp. passage in Thag-a 267 (cp. koccha).
1. a sheath for a needle Ja iii.282; - 2. a bowl, container, or vessel for food Ja i.349 (v.l. kesaka); MN ii.6, MN ii.7, (-˚āhāra adj. living on a bowl-full of food; also aḍḍha˚) Vism 263.
3. case for a key (kuñcikā˚) Vism 251.
fr. kosa
(nt.) idleness, sloth, indolence; expld at Vb 369 ■ Vin ii.2; SN v.277–280; AN i.11, AN i.16 AN ii.218; AN iii.375, AN iii.421; AN v.146 sq.; 159 sq.; AN iv.195; Dhp 241; Mil 351; Vism 132; Ne 127; Dhp-a iii.347 Dhp-a iv.85; Dhs-a 146; Snp-a 21.
From kusīta
= ka + samattha “who is able,” i.e. able, fit DN-a i.27.
(nt.) proficiency. There are 3 kinds mentioned at DN iii.220, Vb 325 & Vism 439 sq. viz.; āya˚, apāya˚; and upāya˚; ; at Dhs 16 = Dhs 20 = Dhs 292 Dhs 555 = Nd ii.ad paññā it is classed between paṇḍicca and nepuñña. See also Pp 25; Vism 128 sq. (appanā˚) 241 sq. (uggaha˚ & manasikāra˚), 248 (bojjhanga˚); Pv-a 63, Pv-a 99 (upāya˚).
der. fr. kusala
(f.) a kind of creeper Vv 474; Vism 256, Vism 260, Vism 359; Vv-a 200 ■ bīja the seed of the k. AN i.32 = AN v.212.
cp. Sk. kośātakī
= kosiya, an owl Ja v.120.
an owl Ja ii.353, cp. Np. Kosiyāyana Ja i.496. Biḷārakosika (and ˚kosiya) Ja iv.69.
(f.) a sheath DN i.77 = MN ii.17.
silk; silken material Vin i.58 = Mil 267; Vin i.192, Vin i.281; Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169; DN i.7, cp. AN i.181 (see DA i.87); AN iv.394; Pv ii.117; Ja i.43; Ja vi.47.
-pāvāra a silk garment Vin i.281; -vattha a silk garment Dhp-a i.395.
der. fr. kosa, cp. Sk. kauśeya silk-cloth and P. kosa-kāraka
(nt.) hypocrisy, deceit Ja ii.72; Ja iii.268; Ja iv.304; Dhp-a i.141.
fr. kuhana
(indecl.) is together with kuṇ registered as a part. of sound (“sadde”) at Dhtp 118 & Dhtm 173.;
Kh.
syllable & ending, functioning also as root, meaning “void, empty” or as n. meaning “space”; expld. by Bdhgh with ref. to dukkha as “khaṃ saddo pana tucche; tucchaṃ hi ākāsaṃ khan ti vuccati” Vism 494-In meaning “space, sky” in cpd. khaga “sky-goer (cp. viha-ga of same meaning), i.e. bird Abhp 624 Bdhd 56.
1. a sword (often with dhanu, bow) at DN i.7 (Dhp i.89 = asi) as one of the forbidden articles of ornament (cp. BSk. khaḍga-maṇi Divy 147, one of the royal insignia) ■ khaggaṃ bhandati to gird on one’s sword Pv-a 154, khaggaṃ sannayhati id. Dhp-a iii.75 ˚gāhaka a sword-bearer Mil 114; ˚tala sword-blade Mvu 25, Mvu 90.
2. a rhinoceros Ja v.406 (= gavaja)
416; vi.277 (˚miga), 538. In cpd. ˚visāṇā (cp. BSk khaḍgaviṣāṇa Divy 294 = Snp 36) the horn of a rh (: khagga-visāṇaṃ nāma khagga-miga-singaṃ Snp-a 65; Snp 35 sq. (Name of Sutta); Nd ii.217 (khagga-visāṇa-kappa “like the horn of the rh.” Ep. of a Paccekabuddha (cp. Divy 294, Divy 582), also at Vism 234.
Sk. khaḍga; perhaps to Lat. clades and gladius; cp. also kūṭa3
inlaid, adorned with, usually with jewels e.g. Vv-a 14, Vv-a 277; maṇi-muttâdi khacitā ghaṇṭā “bells inlaid with jewels, pearls, etc.” Vv-a 36; of a fan inlaid with ivory (danta-khacita) Vin iii.287 (Sam. Pās.) Suvaṇṇa-khacita-gajak’ attharaṇā “elephants’ trappings interwoven with gold” Vv-a 104; of a chair, inlaid with pearls Ja i.41; of a canopy embroidered with golden stars Ja i.57.
pp. of khac as root expld at Dhtm. 518 by “bandhana”
(adj.-n..) to be eaten or chewed, eatable, solid food, usually in cpd. -bhojja solid and other food, divided into 4 kinds, viz. asita, pīta, khāyita sāyita Pv i.52 (= Pv-a 25) Ja i.58; Mil 2. -bhājaka a distributor of food (an office falling to the lot of a senior bhikkhu) Vin ii.176 (= v.204); iv. 38, 155.
grd. of khajjati
(adj.) eatable, i.e. solid food (as ˚bhojjanāni opposed to yāgu Pv-a 23); (nt.) Ja i.186 (of 18 kinds, opp. yāgu); i.235 (id.); Mil 294 ■ ˚bhājaka prec.
fr. last
(= khādiyati, Pass. of khādati; Dhtm 93 bhakkhaṇa) 1. to be eaten, chewed, eaten up, as by animals upacikāhi Vin ii.113; suṇakhehi Pv iii.78; puḷavehi Ja iii.177; cp. Pv iv.52 (cut in two)
2. to be itchy to be irritated by itch (cp. E. “itch” = Intens. of “eat”) Ja v.198 (kh˚ kanduvāyati); Pv ii.39 (kacchuyā kh˚)
3. to be devoured (fig.), to be consumed to be a victim of: kāmataṇhāhi MN i.504; rūpena SN iii.87, SN iii.88 (khajjanīya-pariyāya, quoted Vism 479). ppr. khajjamāna Pv ii.15 (consumed by hunger & thirst).;
caterpillar Pgdp 48.
the fire-fly MN ii.34 = MN ii.41; Ja ii.415; Ja vi.330, Ja vi.441; Dhp-a iii.178; also khajjūpanaka Vism 412 (in simile). See Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908 59 & 79.;
cp. Sk. khadyota
(adj.) lame (either on one foot or both: PugA 227; Vin ii.90 = AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = Pp 51 (comb. with kāṇa and kuṇi); Thig 438 (+ kāṇa); Dhp-a i.376 (+ kuṇi).
cp. Sk. khañja, Dhtp 81: khañja gativekalye
to be lame Pv iii.228.
fr. khañja
(nt.) hobbling, walking lame Pv-a 185.
(khāṭ-kata, making khāṭ; cp. kakkāreti) the noise of hawking or clearing one’s throat: -sadda Vin i.188; Dhp-a iii.330; cp. khakkhaṭa (v.l. khaṭkhaṭa Divy 518 = utkāśanaśabda.
(f.) couch, bedstead MN i.450, MN i.451 (vv.ll. ka˚, khajj˚).
perhaps connected with Sk khaṭvā? uncertain
(m.) 1. (1) a (short), moment, wink of time; in phrase khaṇen’ eva “in no time” Pv-a 38.117; Sdhp 584 (etc.). Sdhp 584; khaṇo ve mā upaccagā “let not the slightest time be wasted Snp 333 = Dhp 315; cf. Th. ii.5 (cp. khaṇâtīta); n’ atthi so kh˚ vā layo vā muhutto vā yaṃ (nadī) āramati “there is no moment, no inkling, no particle of time that the river stops flowing” AN iv.137 (as simile of eternal flow of happening, of unbroken continuity of change); Vism 238 (jīvita˚), 473; (khaṇa-vasena uppād’ ādi-khaṇa-ttaya, viz. uppāda, ṭhiti, bhanga, cp. p. 431) Ja iv.128; aṭṭha-kkhaṇa-vinimmutto kh˚ paramadullabho: one opportunity out of eight, very difficult to be obtained Sdhp 4, Sdhp 16; cp. 45, 46.
2. moment as coincidence of two events: “at the same moment,” esp. in phrase taṃ khaṇaṃ yeva “all at once,” simultaneously with which syn. ṭhānaso Ja i.167, Ja i.253; Ja iii.276, Pv-a 19; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 35; tasmiṃ khaṇe Ja ii.154; Pv-a 67; Sdhp 17. 3. the moment as something expected or appointed (cp καιρός), therefore the right moment, or the proper time. So with ref. to birth, rebirth, fruit of action attainment of Arahantship, presence on earth of a Buddha, etc., in cpds.: cuti-kkhaṇo Bdhd 106; paṭisandhi˚ Pts ii.72 sq.; Bdhd 59, 77, 78; uppatti˚ Vb 411 sq.; sotāpattimagga˚ Pts ii.3; phala˚ Pts i.26 Bdhd 80; nikanti˚ Pts ii.72 sq.; upacāra˚ Bdhd 94 citta˚ id. 38, 95 ■ khaṇe khaṇe from time to time Dhp 239 (= okāse okāse Dhp-a iii.340, but cp. Comp. 161, n. 5) Buddhuppāda˚, Th ii.A, 12. akkhaṇa see sep. Also akkhaṇavedhin. -akkhaṇe at the wrong time inopportune Pv iv.140 (= akāle). On kh. laya, muhutta cp. Points of Contr. 296, n. 5.
-ātīta having missed the opportunity Snp 333 = Dhp 315 (= Dhp-a iii.489); -ññū knowing, realizing the opportunity Snp 325 (cp. Snp-a 333). -paccuppanna arisen at the moment or momentarily Vism 431 (one of the 3 kinds of paccuppanna: kh˚., santati˚, addhā˚) -paritta small as a moment Vism 238.
Derivation unknown. It has been suggested that khaṇa and the Sk. kshaṇa are derived from īkshaṇa (seeing) by process of contraction. This seems very forced; and both words are, in all probability, other than the word from which this hypothesis would derive them.
digging Ja ii.296. Cp. atikhaṇa.
fr. khaṇ
1. to dig (? better “destroy”; cp. Kern Toev. s. v.), dig out uproot Dhp 247, Dhp 337; Snp p.101; Ja ii.295; Ja iv.371, Ja iv.373 Sdhp 394. Also khanati & cp.; abhikkhaṇati palikkhaṇati.
2. [ = Sk. kṣanati] to destroy Vin ii.26 (attānaṃ); MN i.132 (id.) ■ pp. khata & khāta; (cp palikkhata).
fr. khan or khaṇ; Dhtp 179: anadāraṇe
(nt.) digging Mil 351 (pokkharaṇi˚).
fr. khaṇ
(adj.) unstable, momentary, temporary, evanescent, changeable; usually syn. with ittara, e.g. Ja i.393; Ja iii.83; Pv-a 60 ■ Vism 626 (khaṇikato from the standpoint of the momentary). Khaṇikā pīti “momentary joy” is one of the 5 kinds of joy, viz. khuddikā, khaṇikā, okkantikā, ubbegā pharaṇā (see pīti) Vism 143, Dhs-a 115.
-citta temporary or momentary thought Vism 289 -maraṇa sudden death Vism 229. -vassa momentary i.e. sudden rain (-shower) Ja vi.486.
fr. khaṇa
(nt.) evanescence, momentariness Vism 301.
fr. khaṇika
1. (adj.) broken, usually of teeth; Thig 260 (= Thag-a 211); Mil 342; Vism 51. 2. (m. nt.) a broken piece, a bit, camma˚ a strip of hide Vin ii.122; coḷa˚ a bit of cloth Pv-a 70; pilotika˚ bits of rags Pv-a 171; pūva˚ a bit of cake Ja iii.276;- akhaṇḍa unbroken, entire, whole, in -kārin (sikkhāya) fulfilling or practising the whole of (the commandments) Pv iv.343 and ˚sīla observing fully the sīla-precepts Vv 113 cp. Vism 51 & Bdhd 89.;
-ākhaṇḍa (redupl ■ iter. formation with distributive function) piece by piece, nothing but pieces, broken up into bits Vism 115. -ākhaṇḍika piece by piece, consisting of nothing but bits, in kh ˚ṃ chindati to break up into fragments AN i.204 (of māluvālatā); ii.199 (of thūṇā); SN ii.88 (of rukkha); cp. Vin iii.43 (dārūni ˚ṃ chedāpetvā); Ja v.231 (˚ṃ katvā). -danta having broken teeth, as sign of old age in phrase kh˚ palitakesa, etc “with broken teeth and grey hair” AN i.138 and ≈ Ja i.59, Ja i.79 (id.). -phulla [Bdhgh on Vin ii.160; khaṇḍa = bhinn’okāso, phulla = phalit’ okāso.] broken and shattered portions; ˚ṃ paṭisankharoti to repair dilapidations Vin ii.160 (= navakammaṃ karoti) 286; iii.287; AN iii.263; cp. same expression at Divy 22. a˚; unbroken and unimpaired fig. of sīla, the rule of conduct in its entirety, with nothing detracted Vv 8316 = Pv iv.176 (cp. akhaṇḍasīla) = Dhp-a i.32.
freq. spelt kaṇḍa (q.v.). Cp. Sk. khaṇḍa; expld at Dhtp 105 as “chedana”
to break, Dhp-a iv.14; pp. khaṇḍita broken, Pv-a 158 (-kaṇṇo = chinnakaṇṇo).
(f.) a broken bit, a stick, in ucchu˚ Vv 3326 (= ucchu-yaṭṭhi Dhp-a iii.315).
fr. khaṇḍa
(nt.) the state of being broken (of teeth), having broken teeth, in phrase kh˚ pālicca, etc., as signs of old age (see above) MN i.49 = DN ii.305; AN iii.196; Dhs 644 = Dhs 736 = Dhs 869; Dhp-a iii.123; in similar connection Vism 449.
to renounce, to remit, in vetanaṃ ˚etvā Ja iii.188.
v. denom. fr. khaṇḍa
1. dug up, uprooted, fig. one whose foundation (of salvation) has been cut off; in combn with upahata DN i.86 (= DN-a i.237); khataṃ upahataṃ attānaṃ pariharati “he keeps himself uprooted and half-dead” i.e. he continues to lead a life of false ideas AN i.105 = AN ii.4; opp. akkhataṃ anupahataṃ etc. AN i.89.
pp. of khanati
hurt, wounded; pādo kh˚ hoti sakalikāya “he grazed his foot” SN i.27 = Mil 134 Mil 179 ■ akkhata unmolested, unhurt Vv 8452 (= anupadduta Vv-a 351). See also parikkhata.
pp. of kṣan, to wound
damage, injury Vv-a 206, khatakaṃ dāsiyā deti “she did harm to the servant, she struck the s.” Or is it khalikaṃ? (cp. khaleti); the passage is corrupt.
fr. khata2
(nt.) rule, power, possession; only in cpds.:
-dhamma the law of ruling, political science Ja v.490 (is it khattu˚ = khattā˚?) -vijjā polity DN i.9, condemned as a practice of heretics. Bdhgh at DN-a i.93 explains it as nīti-sattha, political science (= ˚dhamma) See Rh. D. Dialogues i.18. -vijjavādin a person who inculcates Macchiavellian tricks Ja v.228 (paraphrased mātāpitaro pi māretvā attano va attho kāmetabbo ti “even at the expense of killing father and mother is wealth to be desired for oneself”), so also Ja v.240 -vijjācariya one who practises kh-˚vijjā ibid.; -vida (so read for ˚vidha) = ˚vijja (adj.) a tricky person, ibid (v.l. ˚vijja, better). Cp. Sk. kṣātra-vidya.
Sk. kṣatra, to kṣi, cp. Gr. κτάομαι, κτ ̈ημα, possession
attendant, companion, charioteer, the king’s minister and adviser (Lat. satelles “satellite” has been compared for etym.) DN i.112 (= DN-a i.280, kh˚ vuccati pucchita-pucchita-pañhaṃ vyākaraṇa-samattho mahāmatto: “kh˚ is called the King’s minister who is able to answer all his questions”) Buddhaghosa evidently connects it with katheti, to speak, respond = katthā; gādhaṃ k˚ AN ii.107 = Pp 43 v.l. for kattā (cp. Pp A 225).
Sk. kṣattṛ fr. kṣatra
pl. nom. also khattiyāse Ja iii.441. A shortened form is khatya Ja vi.397 ■ f. khattiyā AN iii.226–229, khattī DN i.193, and khattiyī. A member of one of the clans or tribes recognised as of Aryan descent. To be such was to belong to the highest social rank. The question of such social divisions in the Buddha’s time is discussed in Dialogues i.97
107 and it is there shown that whenever they are referred to in lists the khattiyas always come first. Khattiyo seṭṭho jane tasmiṃ DN i.199 = DN ii.97 = MN i.358 = SN i.153 SN ii.284. This favourite verse is put into the mouth of a god; and he adds that whoever is perfect in wisdom and righteousness is the best of all. On the social prestige of the khattiyas see further MN ii.150
157 iii.169; AN ii.86; SN i.71, SN i.93; Vin iv.6
10. On the religious side of the question DN iii.82; DN iii.93; MN i.149, MN i.177 MN ii.84; SN i.98. Wealth does not come into consideration at all. Only a very small percentage of the khattiyas were wealthy in the opinion of that time and place Such are referred to at SN i.15. All kings and chieftains were khattiyas DN i.69, DN i.136; DN iii.44, DN iii.46, DN iii.61; AN i.106 AN iii.299; AN iv.259. Khattiyas are called rājāno Dhp 294 quoted Netti 165.
-ābhiseka the inauguration of a king AN i.107, AN i.108 (of the crown-prince) = AN ii.87; -kaññā a maid of khattiya birth Ja i.60; Ja iii.394; -kula a khattiya clan, a princely house, Vin ii.161 (w. ref. to Gotama’s descent) iii.80; -parisā the assembly of the khattiyas; as one of the four parisās (kh˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚ samaṇa) at Vin i.227; AN ii.133; as the first one of the eight (1
4 as above, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiṃsa˚ Māra˚, Brahma˚) at MN i.72 = DN iii.260; -mahāsāla “the wealthy khattiya” (see above ii.1) DN iii.258, etc.; -māyā “the magic of the noble” Dhp-a i.166; -vaṃsa aristocratic descent DN-a i.267; -sukhumāla a tender, youthful prince (of the Tathāgata: buddha˚, kh˚) Dhp-a i.5.
der. fr. khatta = kṣatra “having possessions”; Sk. kṣatriya
(f.) a female khattiya, in series brāhmaṇī kh˚ vessī suddī caṇḍālī nesādī veṇī rathakārī pukkusī AN iii.229; similarly MN ii.33, MN ii.40.
in compn with numerals “times”: dvikkhattuṃ, tikkhattuṃ, etc.; twice, three times, etc.
Sk. ˚kṛtvah, cp. ˚kad
the tree Acacia catechu, in cpds. -aṅgārā (pl. embers of (burnt) acacia-wood Ja i.232; Pv-a 152 -ghaṭikā a piece of a ■ wood Ja iv.88; -tthambha a post of a ■ wood Dhp-a iii.206; -patta a bowl made of a ■ wood Ja v.389; -vana a forest of acacias Ja ii.162; -sūla an impaling stake of a ■ wood Ja iv.29.
Sk. khadira; Gr. κίσσαρος, ivy; Lat. hedera, ivy
see khaṇati.
(f.) a spade or hoe Vin i.270; Ja vi.520 = V.89 (+ ankusa).
to khan, cp. Sk. khanitra
possessed of meekness or gentleness; docile, manageable. Said of an elephant AN ii.116 = AN iii.161 sq. Khanti & Khanti
n. agent of khanti
f. patience, forbearance, forgiveness. Def. at Dhs 1341: khantī khamanatā adhivāsanatā acaṇḍikkaṃ anasuropo attamanatā cittassa Most frequent combinations: with mettā (love (see below); -titikkhā (forbearance): khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti Buddhā Dhp 184 = DN ii.49 = Vism 295; khantiyā bhiyyo na vijjati, SN i.226; cp. Dhp-a iii.237: titikkhā-sankhātā khantī;-avihiṃsā (tolerance): kh˚, avihiṃsā, mettatā anudayatā, SN v.169; -akodhana (forbearing, gentle Vv-a 71; -soraccaṃ (docility, tractableness) DN iii.213; AN i.94; also with maddava (gentleness) and s. as quality of a well-bred horse AN iii.248, cp. AN ii.113 and khantā -sovaccassatā (kind speech) Snp 266 (cp. Kp-a 148). See also cpds ■ Khantī is one of the ten paramitās Ja i.22 Ja i.23: cp. AN iii.254, AN iii.255 ■ In other connections: khantiyā upasamena upeta SN i.30; ativissuto Sdhp 473 anulomikāya kh˚iyā samannāgata (being of gentle and forbearing disposition) AN iii.437, AN iii.441; Pts ii.236 sq. Vb 340. See also AN iii.372; Snp 189, Snp 292, Snp 897, Snp 944. In scholastic language frequent in combination diṭṭhi khanti ruci, in def. of idha (Vbh 245), tattha (Nd2) diṭṭhi (Nd2), cp. Nd ii.151 and Vb 325 sq ■ akkhanti intolerance Vin iv.241 (= kopa); Vb 360 (in def as opp. of khanti Dhs 1341. q.v. above), 378.
-bala (nt.) the force of forbearance; (adj.) one whose strength is patience:… aduṭṭho yo titikkhati khantībalaṃ balānīkaṃ tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ Dhp 399 = Snp 623 ■ Dhp-a iv.164; Pts ii.171, Pts ii.176 -mettā forbearing love, in phrase kh˚-mettânuddayasampanna (adj.) one whose character is compassion and loving forbearance Ja i.151, Ja i.262; Pv-a 66 (+ yuttakāra) Vv-a 71 (in expln of akodhana); -suñña (nt.) the void of khanti Pts ii.183; -soracca (nt.) gentleness and forbearance SN i.100, SN i.222; AN ii.68; Ja iii.487; Dhp-a i.56 ˚e niviṭṭha “established in forbearance and meekness” AN iii.46 = DN iii.61.
Sk. kṣānti
(adj.) acquiescing in-, of such and such a belief, in añña˚; belonging to another faith combd with aññadiṭṭhika and aññarucika DN i.187; MN i.487.
fr. prec.
to jump, only in cpd. pakkhandati; given as root khand at Dhtm 196 with meaning “pakkhandana.”
skand
I. Crude meaning: bulk, massiveness (gross) substance. A. esp. used (a) of an elephant: the bulk of the body, i.e. its back SN i.95 vāraṇassa Ja iii.392; hatthi-khandha-vara-gata on the back of the state elephant Ja i.325; Pv-a 75. Also with ref. to an elephant (hatthināga) sañjāta˚ “to whom has grown bulk = a large back” Snp 53, expl. Snp-a 103 by susaṇṭhitakkhandho “well endowed with bulk.” (b) of a person: the shoulder or back: nangalaṃ khandhe karitvā SN i.115 appl. to Māra; Vism 100; Dhp-a iv.168 (ohita˚-bhāra the load lifted off his shoulder). -(c) of a tree: the trunk. rukkhassa Pv-a 114, also as rukkha˚; Ja i.324; tāla˚ the stem of a palm Pv-a 56 nigrodhassa khandhaja (see cpds.) SN i.207 = Snp 272 mūlaṃ atikkamma kh˚ ṃ sāraṃ pariyesitabbaṃ “one must go beyond the root and search the trunk for sweetness” SN iv.94 ■ (d) as t.t. in exegetical literature section, chapter, lit. material as collected into uniform bulk; freq. in postscripts to Texts and Commentaries See also khandhaka ■ B. More general as denoting bulk (-˚); e.g. aggi˚ a great mass of fire MN ii.34, MN ii.41; Ja iv.139; udaka˚ a mass of water (i.e. ocean) AN iii.336; SN iv.179; Ja i.324; Pv-a 62; puñña˚ a great accumulation of merit AN iii.336 = SN v.400; bhoga˚ a store of wealth AN v.84; Ja i.6; maṇi˚ an extraordinarily large jewel (possessing magic power) Ja ii.102 sq. -
II. Applied meaning.-A. (-˚) the body of, a collection of, mass, or parts of; in collective sense “all that is comprised under”; forming the substance of. (a) dukkha˚; all that is comprised under “dukkha,” all that goes to make up or forms the substance, the idea of “ill.” Most prominent in phrase kevalassa dukkhakhandhassa samudaya and nirodha (the origin destruction of all that is suffering) with ref. to the paṭiccasamuppāda the chain of causal existence (q.v.) Vin i.1; SN ii.95; SN iii.14; AN i.177; v. 184 & passim. Similarly samudaya Vb 135 sq. nirodha Ne 64; antakiriyā AN i.147; vyādhimaraṇatunnānaṃ dukkhakkhandhaṃ vyapānudi Thig 162 ■ (b) lobha˚; dosa˚ moha˚ the three ingredients or integrations of greed, suffering and bewilderment, lit. “the big bulk or mass of greed” (see also under padāleti), SN v.88 (nibbijjhati through the satta bojjhangā) ■ (c) vayo˚; a division of age, part of age, as threefold: purima˚, majjhima˚, pacchima Nd ii.in def. of sadā ■ (d) sīla (etc.) kh˚ the 3 (or 5 groups or parts which constitute the factors of right living (dhamma), viz. (1) sīla˚ the group dealing with the practice of morality; (2) samādhi˚ that dealing with the development of concentration; (3) paññā˚ that dealing with the development of true wisdom. They are also known under the terms of sīla-sampadā, citta˚ paññā˚ DN i.172 sq.; see sīla. -D i.206; Ne 64 sq.; 126 tīhi dhammehi samannāgato “possessed of the three qualities,” viz. sīla-kkhandhesu, etc. Iti 51; cp AN i.291; AN v.326. tīhi khandhehi… aṭṭhangiko maggo sangahito MN i.301; sīlakkhandhaṃ, etc. paripūreti “to fulfil the sīla-group” AN i.125; AN ii.20, AN iii.15 sq. These 3 are completed to a set of 5 by (4) vimutti the group dealing with the attainment of emancipation and (5) vimutti-ñāṇa-dassana ˚the group dealing with the realization of the achievement of emancipation. As 1–4 only at DN iii.229 (misprint puñña for paññā); cp AN i.125. As 5 at SN i.99 = AN i.162; SN v.162; AN iii.134 AN iii.271; AN v.16 (all loc. = SN i.99); Iti 107, Iti 108; Nd ii.under sīla.
B. (absolute) in individual sense: constituent element, factor, substantiality. More especially as khandhā (pl.) the elements or substrata of sensory existence, sensorial aggregates which condition the appearance of life in any form. Their character according to quality and value of life and body is evanescent fraught with ills & leading to rebirth. Paraphrased by Bdhgh. as rāsi, heap, e.g. Asl. 141; Vibh A 1 f.; cf B. Psy. 42. 1. Unspecified. They are usually enumerated in the foll. stereotyped set of 5: rūpa˚; (material qualities), vedanā (feeling), saññā (perception), saṅkhārā (coefficients of consciousness), viññāṇa (consciousness) For further ref. see rūpa; cp. also Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. pp. 40
56. They are enumerated in a different order at SN i.112, viz. rūpaṃ vedayitaṃ saññaṃ viññāṇaṃ yañ ca sankhataṃ n’ eso ‘ham asmi. Detailed discussions as to their nature see e.g. SN iii.101 (= Vb 1
61) SN iii.47; SN iii.86. As being comprised in each of the dhātus, viz. kăma˚; rūpa˚ arūpa-dhātu Vb 404 sq.
(a) As factors of existence (cp. bhava). Their rôle as such is illustrated by the famous simile: “yathā hi angasambhārā hoti saddo ratho iti evaṃ khandhesu santesu hoti satto ti sammuti” “just as it is by the condition precedent of the co-existence of its various parts, that the word ʻchariotʼ is used, just so it is that when the skandhas are there, we talk of a ʻbeingʼ” (Rh. D. (cp. Hardy, Man. Buddh. p. 425) SN i.135 = Mil 28 Their connotation “khandha” is discussed at SN iii.101 = MN iii.16: “kittāvatā nu kho khandhānaṃ khandhâdhivacanaṃ rūpaṃ (etc.) atītânāgatapaccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṃ,” etc.: i.e. material qualities are equivalent terms for the kh. What causes the manifestation of each kh.? cattāro mahābhūtā… paccayo rūpa-khandhassa paññāpanāya; phasso… vedana˚, saññā˚, sankhārā˚, etc. nāmarūpaṃ… viññāṇa˚: the material elements are the cause of rūpa, touch is that of vedanā, saññā sankhārā, name and shape that of viññāṇa (S iii.101); cp. MN i.138 sq., 234 sq. On the same principle rests their division in: rūpa-kāyo rūpakkhandho nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā “the material body forms the material factor (of existence), the individualized body the 4 immaterial factors” Ne 41; the rūpakkhandha only is kāmadhātu-pariyāpanno: Vb 409 the 4 arūpino kh˚ discussed at Pts ii.74, also at Vb 230 Vb 407 sq. (grouped with what is apariyāpanna)-Being the “substantial” factors of existence, birth & death depend on the khandhas. They appear in every new conjuncture of individuality concerning their function in this paṭisandhi-kkhaṇe; see Pts ii.72
76. Thus the var phases of life in transmigration are defined as-(jāti: ya tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi satta-nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo āyatanānaṃ paṭilābho Nd ii.on Snp 1052; cp. jāti dvīhi khandhehi sangahitā ti Vv-a 29; khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo jāti SN ii.3; Ne 29; khandhānaṃ nibbatti jāti Vism 199 ■ (maraṇaṃ: ) yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ… cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṃ maccu maraṇaṃ kālakiriyā khandhānaṃ bhedo kalevarassa nikkhepo MN i.49 = Vb 137 = SN ii.3, SN ii.42 ■ vivaṭṭa-kkhandha (adj.) one whose khandhas have revolved (passed away) i.e. dead SN i.121 = SN iii.123 ■ kh˚anaṃ udaya-vyaya (or udayabbaya) the rising and passing of the kh., transmigration Dhp 374 = Thag 23, Thag 379 = Iti 120 = Kp-a 82; Pts i.54 sq ■ (b) Their relation to attachment and craving (kāma): sattisūlûpamā kāmā khandhānaṃ adhikuṭṭanā SN i.128 = Thig 58, Thig 141 (Thag-a 65: natthi tesaṃ adhik˚?); craving is their cause & soil: hetupaṭicca sambhūtā kh. SN i.134; the 4 arūpino kh. are based on lobha, dosa, moha Vb 208. -(c) their annihilation: the kh. remain as long as the knowledge of their true character is not attained, i.e. of their cause & removal: yaṃ rūpaṃ, etc.… n’ etaṃ mama n’ eso ‘haṃ asmi na m’ eso attā ti; evaṃ etaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya passati; evaṃ kho jānato passato… ahankāramamankāra-mānânusayā na hontī ti SN iii.103-pañca-kkhandhe pariññāya SN iii.83; pañca-kkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā Thig 106. See also SN i.134 ■ (d) their relation to dhātu (the physical elements) and āyatana (the elements of sense-perception) is close, since they are all dependent on sensory experience. The 5 khandhas are frequently mentioned with the 18 dhātuyo & the 12 āyatanāni: khandhā ca dh˚ cha ca āyatanā ime hetuṃ paṭicca sambhūtā hetubhangā nirujjhare SN i.134; kh˚-dh˚-āyatanaṃ sankhataṃ jātimūlaṃ Thig 472; dhammaṃ adesesi khandh’ āyatana-dhātuyo Thig 43 (cp. Thag-a 49). Enumerated under sabba-dhammā Pts i.101 = Pts ii.230; under dhammā (states) Dhs 121, as lokuttara-kkhandhā, etc. Dhs 358 Dhs 528, Dhs 552 ■ khandhānaṃ khandhaṭṭho abhiññeyyo dhātūnaṃ dhātuṭṭho, etc. Pts i.17; cp. i.132; ii.121, 157 In def. of kāmâvacarā bhūmi Pts i.83. In def. of dukkha and its recognition Ne 57. In def. of arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd ii.on sankhāta-dhammā (“kh sankhātā,” etc.), on tiṇṇa (“khandha-(etc.) pariyante thitā”), & passim ■ (e); their valuation & their bearing on the “soul”-conception is described in the terms of na mama (na tumhākaṃ), anattā, aniccaṃ and dukkhaṃ (cp. upādānakkh˚ infra and rūpa) rūpaṃ (etc.)… aniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ, n’ eso ‘ham asmi, n ‘eso me attā “material qualities (etc. kh. 2
5) are evanescent bad, I am not this body, this body is not my soul” Vin i.14 = SN iv.382. n’ eso ‘ham asmi na m’ eso attā SN i.112; SN iii.103, SN iii.130 & passim; cp. kāyo na tumhākaṃ (anattā rūpaṃ) SN ii.65; Nd ii.680; and rūpaṃ na tumhākaṃ SN iii.33; MN i.140 = Nd ii.680 ■ rūpaṃ etc. as anattā: Vin i.13; SN iii.78, SN iii.132
134; AN i.284 AN ii.171; AN ii.202; cp. SN iii.101; Vin i.14 ■ as aniccaṃ SN iii.41, SN iii.52, SN iii.102, SN iii.122, SN iii.132 sq., 181 sq., 195 sq., 202
224 227; AN iv.147 (aniccânupassī dukkhânupassī); anicca dukkha roga, etc., Pts ii.238 sq.; Vb 324.
2. Specified as panc’ upādāna-kkhandhā the factors of the fivefold clinging to existence. Defined & discussed in detail (rūpûpadāna-kkhandha, etc.) SN iii.47; SN iii.86
88; also Vin i.10; SN iii.127 sq. Specified SN iii.58 SN iii.100 = MN iii.16; SN iii.114, SN iii.158 sq.; SN v.52, SN v.60; AN iv.458; Vism 443 sq (in ch. xiv: Khandha-niddesa), 611 sq. (judged aniccato etc.) ■ Mentioned as a set exemplifying the number 5 Kp iii.; Pts i.22, Pts i.122. Enumerated in var. connections SN i.112; DN iii.233; MN i.190; AN v.52; Kp iv. (expld Kp-a 82 = AN v.52); Mil 12 (var. references concerning the discussion of the kh. in the Abhidhamma) ■ What is said of the khandhas alone-see above 1 (a)-(e)-is equally applied to them in connection with upādāna. (a) As regards their origin they are characterized as chandamūlakā “rooted in desire, or in wilful desire” SN iii.100; cp. yo kho… pañcas’ upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo taṃ tattha upādānaṃ ti MN i.300, MN i.511. Therefore the foll. attributes are characteristic: kummo pañcann’ etaṃ upād˚ ānaṃ adhivacanaṃ MN i.144; bhārā have pañcakkh˚ā SN iii.26 pañcavadhakā paccatthikā pañcann’… adhivacanaṃ SN iv.174; pañc’ upād˚… sakkāyo vutto MN i.299; SN iv.259 ■ (b) their contemplation leads to the recognition of their character as dukkha, anicca, anattā: na kiñci attānaṃ vā attaniyaṃ vā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu SN iii.128; rogato, etc.… manasikātabbā pañc˚ SN iii.167; pañcasu upād˚esu aniccânupassī “realizing the evanescence in the 5 aggregates of attachment” AN v.109; same with udayavyayânupassī SN iii.130; AN ii.45, AN ii.90; AN iii.32; AN iv.153; and dhammânupassī MN i.61. Out of which realization follows their gradual destruction: pañc’… khandhānaṃ samudayo atthangamo assādo, etc. SN iii.31, SN iii.160 sq.; AN ii.45, AN ii.90 AN iv.153; Nd ii.under sankhārā. That they occupy a prominent position as determinants of dukkha is evident from their rôle in the exposition of dukkha as the first one of the noble truths: sankhittena pañc’upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā “in short, the 5 kh. are associated with pain Vin i.10 = MN i.48 = AN i.177 = SN v.421; Pts i.37, Pts i.39 Vb 101 & passim; cp. katamaṃ dukkham ariyasaccaṃ pañc’upād˚ ā tissa vacanīyaṃ, seyyathīdaṃ… SN iii.158 = SN v.425; khandhādisā dukkhā Dhp 202 (expl. Dhp-a iii.261).
3. Separately mentioned: khandhā as tayo arūpino kh˚ (ved˚, sañña˚, sankh˚) Dhp-a i.22; viññāṇa-kh˚ (the skandha of discriminative consciousness) in Def. of manas: manindriyaṃ viññāṇaṃ viññ˚-khandho tajjā manoviññāṇadhātu Nd ii.on Snp 1142 = Dhs 68.
-ādhivacana having kh. as attribute (see above SN iii.101 = MN iii.16; -āvāra a camp, either (1) fortified (with niveseti) or (2) not (with bandhāpeti), esp. in the latter meaning w. ref. to a halting place of a caravan (= khandhāvāra?) (1) Ja iv.151; Ja v.162; Dhp-a i.193, Dhp-a i.199. (2) Ja i.101, Ja i.332; Pv-a 113; Dhp-a ii.79. Said of a hermitage Ja v.35 ■ fig. in sīla-khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā “to settle in the camp of good conduct” DN-a i.244-ja (adj.-n.) sprung from the trunk (of the tree), i.e. a growth or parasite SN i.207 = Snp 272, expl. at Snp-a 304 khandhesu jātā khandha-jā, pārohānam etaṃ adhivacanaṃ -niddesa disquisition about the khandhas Vism (ch. xiv esp.) 482, 485, 492, 509, 558, 389. -paṭipāṭi succession of khandhas Vism 411 sq. -paritta protective spell as regards the khandhas (as Name of a Suttanta) Vism 414. -bīja “trunk seed” as one kind of var. seeds, with mūla˚ phaḷu˚ agga˚ bīja˚ at Vin v.132, & DN i.5, expld. DN-a i.81: nāma assattho nigrodho pilakkho udumbaro kacchako kapitthano ti evam-ādi -rasa taste of the stem, one of various tastes, as mūla khandha˚ taca˚ patta˚ puppha˚, etc. Dhs 629 = Nd ii.540. -loka the world of sensory aggregates, with dhātu-and āyatanaloka Pts i.122. -vibhaṅga division dealing with the khandhas (i.e. Vibh. 1 sq.) Mil 12 -santāna duration of the khandhas Vism 414.
Sk. skandha
division, chapter, esp. in the Vinaya (at end of each division we find usually the postscript: so & so khandhakaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ “here ends the chapter of… ”); in cpd. ˚vatta, i.e. duties or observances specified in the v. khandha or chapter of the Vinaya which deals with these duties Vism 12, Vism 101 (cp. Vin ii.231), 188.
fr. khandha
(adj.) having a (big) trunk, of a tree AN iii.43.
(adj.) (a) patient, forgiving. (b) enduring, bearing, hardened to (frost & heat, e.g. ), fit for ■ (a) kh. belongs to the lovable attributes of a bhikkhu (kh. rūpānaṃ, saddānaṃ, etc.; indulgent as regards sights, sounds, etc.) AN iii.113 = AN iii.138; the same applied to the king’s horse AN iii.282. Khamā paṭipadā the way of gentleness (and opp. akkhamā), viz. akkosantaṃ na paccakosati “not to shout back at him who shouts at you” AN ii.152 sq.; cp. Ne 77; classified under the four paṭipadā at DN iii.229. In combn. w vacana of meek, gentle speech, in vattā vacana˚ a speaker of good & meek words SN i.63; SN ii.282; Mil 380 cp. suvaco khamo AN v.24 sq., forgiving: Mil 207. (b) khamo sītassa uṇhassa, etc., enduring frost & heat AN iii.389 = AN v.132; addhāna˚ padhāna˚ (fit for) AN iii.30 ranga˚, anuyoga˚, vimajjana˚ MN i.385 ■ akkhama (adj.) impatient, intolerant, in combn dubbaca dovacassa karaṇehi dhammehi samannāgata SN ii.204 sq. AN ii.147 sq. With ref. to rūpa, saddā, etc. (see also above), of an elephant AN iii.156 sq ■ DN iii.229; Sdhp 95.
fr. kṣam
1. to be patient, to endure, to forgive (acc. of object and geName of person): n’ âhaṃ bhayā khamāmi Vepacittino (not do I forgive V. out of fear) SN i.221 SN i.222; aparādhaṃ kh. to forgive a fault Ja iii.394. khamatha forgive Dhp-a ii.254; khamatha me pardon me Mil 13; Dhp-a i.40.
2. (impers.) to be fit, to seem good; esp. in phrase yathā te khameyya “as may seem good to you; if you please” DN i.60, DN i.108; MN i.487 sabbaṃ me na khamati “I do not approve of” MN i.497 sq.; na khamati “it is not right” DN ii.67.
3. to be fit for, to indulge in, to approve of, in nijjhānaṃ khamanti MN i.133, MN i.480; cp. diṭṭhi-nijjhāna-kkhanti MN i.480 & AN i.189 ■ ppr. med. khamamāna Vin i.281 (uppaḍḍhakāsinaṃ kh˚) fit for, allowing of, worth, cp Bdhgh. note Vin Texts i.195 ■ grd. khamanīya to be allayed, becoming better (of a disease) Vin i.204; DN ii.99 ■ caus. khamāpeti to pacify, to ask one’s pardon, to apologize (to = acc.) Ja i.267; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 195; Dhp-a i.38, Dhp-a i.39; Dhp-a ii.75, Dhp-a ii.254 ■ to ask permission or leave (i.e. to say good-bye) Dhp-a i.14.
Dhtp 218: sahane, cp. Sk. kṣamate, perhaps to Lat. humus, cp. Sk. kṣāh, kṣāman soil; Gr. ξχών, ξαμαι
(nt.) long-suffering Mil 351; bearing, suffering Sdhp 202; and a˚ intolerance Bdhd 24.
(f.) forbearance and a˚ intolerance, harshness both as syName of khanti & akkhanti Dhs 1342 Vb 360.;
(f.) (a) patience, endurance. (b) the earth (cp. chamā & see khamati) Ja iv.8 (v.l. B. chamāya).
fr. ksam
(f.) asking for pardon Ja iv.389.
abstr. fr. khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati
1. prop, support, in; ˚kata “making a prop,” i.e. with his arms akimbo Vin ii.213 = Vin iv.188.
2. obstruction, stiffening, paralysis in ūru˚ “stiffening of the thigh” MN i.237 (through pain); Ja v.23 (through fear). See also chambheti thambha.;
Sk. khambha & sthambha
1. to prop, to support Thig 28 (but expl. at Thag-a 35 by vi˚, obstruct)
2. to obstruct, to put out, in pp khambhita (= vi˚) Nd ii.220, where it explains khitta. ger. khambhiya: see vi˚.
Caus. fr. prec ■ Sk. skambh, skabhnāti
waste, destruction, consumption decay, ruin, loss; of the passing away of night Vv-a 52 mostly in applied meaning with ref. to the extinction of passions & such elements as condition, life, & rebirth e.g. āsavānaṃ kh. Iti 103 sq., esp. in formula āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ upasampajja AN i.107 AN i.221 = DN iii.78, DN iii.108, DN iii.132 = Iti 100 and passim ■ rāgassa dosassa, mohassa kh. MN i.5; AN i.299, cp. rāga˚, dosa˚ moha˚, AN i.159; dosa˚ SN iii.160, SN iii.191; SN iv.250 ■ taṇhānaṃ kh. Dhp 154; sankhārānaṃ kh. Dh. 383; sabbamaññitānaṃ etc. MN i.486; āyu˚, puñña˚ Vism 502-yo dukkhassa pajānāti idh’ eva khayaṃ attano Snp 626 = Dhp 402; khayaṃ virāgaṃ amataṃ paṇītaṃ Snp 225-In exegesis of rūpassa aniccatā: rūpassa khayo vayo bhedo Dhs 645 = Dhs 738 = Dhs 872 ■ See also khīṇa and the foll. cpds. s. v.: āyu˚, upadhi˚, upādāna˚, jāti˚, jīvita˚ taṇha˚, dukkha˚, puñña˚, bhava˚, loka˚, saṃyojana sabbadhamma˚, samudda˚.
-ātīta (a) gone beyond, recovered from the waning period (of chanda, the moon = the new moon) Snp 598 -ānupassin (a) realizing the fact of decay AN iv.146 sq.v.359 (+ vayânupassin); -ñāṇa knowledge of the fact of decay MN ii.38 = Pp 60; in the same sense khaye ñāṇa Ne 15, Ne 54, Ne 59, Ne 127, Ne 191, cp. kvu 230 sq.; -dhamma the law of decay AN iii.54; Pts i.53, Pts i.76, Pts i.78.
Sk. kṣaya to kṣi, kṣiṇoti & kṣiṇāti; cp. Lat. situs withering, Gr. φχίσις, φχίνω, φχίω wasting. See also khepeti under khipati
1. (adj.) rough, hard, sharp; painful DN ii.127 (ābādha); Ja iii.26 (vedanā) Mil 26 (+ sakkhara-kaṭhala-vālikā), Pv-a 152 (loma, shaggy hair; cp. Np. Khara-loma-yakkha Vism 208) ■ ˚ka khara rough, stony Pv-a 265 (= thaṇḍila).
2. (m.) a donkey, a mule, in -putta, nickname of a horse Ja iii.278.
3. a saw Ja ii.230 (= kakaca C.); vi.261.
-ājina a rough skin, as garment of an ascetic Snp 249 (= kharāni ajina-cammāni Snp-a 291); Pp 56; -gata of rough constitution Dhs 962; also as khari-gata MN i.185; Vism 349 (= pharusa). -mukha a conch Ja vi.580. -ssara of rough sound SN ii.128.
cp. Sk. khara
water Ja iii.282.
Sk. kṣara
(nt.) roughness AN i.54; Pv-a 90 (in expln of pharusa).
fr. khara
1. corn ready for threshing, the threshing floor Nd ii.587; Vism 120; DN-a i.203 (khalaṃ sodheti).
2. threshing, mash, in ekamaṃsa-khalaṃ karoti “to reduce to one mash of flesh” DN i.52 = MN i.377 (+ maṃsa-puñja; DN-a i.160 = maṃsa-rāsi).
-agga the best corn for threshing Dhp-a i.98; Dhp-a iv.98 -kāla the time for threshing Dhp-a iv.98; -bhaṇḍ’agga the best agricultural implement for threshing Dhp-a i.98; Dhp-a iv.98; -bhaṇḍa-kāla the time for the application of the latter Dhp-a iv.98; -maṇḍala a threshing-floor Vism 123; Dhp-a i.266 (˚matta, as large as… ).
cp. Sk. khala
in -pāda at Ja vi.3 should probably be read kalanka˚ (q.v.).
to stumble; ger. khalitvā Thag 45; Mil 187; pp. khalita q.v. Cp. upa˚, pa˚.
Dhtp 260: kampane; Dhtm 375: sañcalane; cp. Sk. skhalati, cp. Gr. σφάλλω to bring to fall, to fail
a paste Vin ii.321 (:Bdhgh. on C.V. vi.3, 1 for madda).
(or khalikā f.) a dice-board, in khalikāya kīḷanti to play at dice (see illustr. in Rh. D. Buddh. India p. 77; Vin ii.10; cp. DN i.6 (in enumn of various amusements expl. at DN-a i.85 by jūta-khalika pāsaka-kīḷanaṃ). See also kali.
bald-headed AN i.138 (+ vilūna); Thig 255 (= vilūnakesa Thag-a 210).
Sk. khalati = Lat. calvus, bald; cp. khallāṭa
(adj. & n.) 1. faltering, stumbling wrong-doing, failure AN i.198; Nd i.300; Thig 261; Dhp-a iii.196 (of the voice; Thag-a 211 = pakkhalita) Ja i.78; Mil 94, Mil 408.
2. disturbed, treated badly Ja vi.375 ■ akhalita undisturbed Thag 512.
pp. med. of khalati, cp. Dhtp 611; Dhtm 406 khala = soceyye
either positive: indeed, surely, truly DN i.87; Snp p.103; Ja iv.391 (as khaḷu); Mvu vii.17; or negative: indeed not Vism 60 (= paṭisedhan’ atthe nipāto). -pacchābhattika (adj.) = na p˚: a person who refuses food offered to him after the normal time Vin v.131 = Vin v.193; Pp 69 Vism 61. See Com. quot. by Childers, p. 310.
indecl., usually contracted to kho, q.v.
only appld to a horse shaking, a shaker, racer (esp. as java AN i.287), fig. of purisa at Anguttara passages. Described as bold and hard to manage AN iv.190 sq.; as a horse which cannot be trusted and is inferior to an ājānīya (a thoroughbred AN v.166. Three kinds at AN i.287 sq. = AN iv.397 sq. In expl. of vaḷavā (mare) at Ja i.180 = sindhavakule ajāto khalunk’asso; as vaḷavā khaḷunkā Ja i.184 ■ Der khaluṅkatā in a˚, not shaking, steadiness Vv-a 278.
adj. fr. khala in caus. sense of khaleti, to shake. In formation = khalanga → khalanka → khalunka, cp kulūpaka for kulūpaga
lit. to wash (cp. pakkhāleti), slang for “to treat badly,” “to give a rubbing or thrashing (exact meaning problematic); only at Ja iv.205 = Ja iv.382: gale gahetvā khalayātha jammaṃ “take the rascal by the throat and thrash him” (Com. khalayātha khalīkāraṃ (i.e. a “rub,” kind of punishment pāpetvā niddhamatha = give him a thrashing & throw him out. v.l. at both passages is galayātha).;
Sk. kṣālayati of kṣal ?
in baddhā upāhanāyo shoes with heel-coverings (?) Vin i.186 (see Bdhgh. note on it Vin Texts ii.15). Also as khalla- baddhâdibhedaṃ upāhanaṃ at Pv-a 127 in expln of upāhana. Kern (Toev. s. v.) sees in it a kind of stuff or material.
bald, in -sīsa a bald head Dhp-a i.309. Der. khallātiya baldness, in khallātiyapetī the bald-headed Petī Pv-a 46 (where spelled khalātiya) and 67.
Sk. khalvāta, cp. khalita
only at SN v.421; cp. SN iv.330 (Dhammacakka-p-Sutta). It is a misreading. Read with Oldenberg Vin i.10, kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyoga (devotion to the passions, to the pleasures of sense). See kāmasukha and allika.
a pot, usually with kumbhī: DN i.167 (-mukha + kumbhi-mukha); Pp 55; Mil 107.
and khalopi, also kalopī, q.v. Cp. Trenckner Notes, p. 60, possibly = karoṭi
a stump (of a tree), a stake. Often used in description of uneven roads; together with kaṇṭaka thorns AN i.35; AN iii.389; Vism 261 (˚paharaṇ’ aggi), 342 (˚magga); Snp-a 334 ■ jhāma˚ a burnt stump (as characteristic of kālaka) SN iv.193 ■ nikhāta˚ an uprooted trunk DN-a i.73. Khāṇu-kondañña Name of a Thera Vism 380; Dhp-a ii.254.
also often spelled khānu; prob. = Sk. sthāṇu, corrupted in etym. with khaṇati, cp. Trenckner, Notes 58, n. 6
= khāṇu SN v.379 (avihata˚): Ja ii.18, Ja ii.154; Ja v.45 (loha-daṇḍa-kh˚ pins & stakes of brass); Mil 187 (mūle vā khāṇuke vā… khalitvā stumbling over roots stumps); Vism 381 = Dhp-a ii.254 (with ref. to the name of Khāṇu-kondañña who by robbers was mistaken for a tree stump); Vv-a 338 (in a road = sankuka).
(adj.) dug DN-a i.274 (= ukkiṇṇa), a˚ not dug Mil 351 (˚taḷāka). Cp atikhāta Ja ii.296.
Sk. khāta; pp. of khan
(nt.) eating, in -kāraṇa the reason of eating… Pv-a 37.
(adj.) eating (nt.) Vism 479; eating, living on (adj ■ ˚), an eater Ja iv.307; Pv-a 44; lohita-maṃsa˚ (of Yakkhas) Ja i.133, Ja i.266; camma˚ Ja i.176; gūtha˚ (of a Peta) Pv-a 266.
to chew, bite, eat devour (= Ger. fressen); to destroy ■ Pres. Dhp 240; Ja i.152 (sassāni); iii.26; Pv i.63 (puttāni, of a Petī) i.94 ■ kaṭṭhaṃ kh˚ to use a toothpick Ja i.80, Ja i.282, dante kh˚ to gnash the teeth Ja i.161 ■ santakaṃ kh to consume one’s property Dhs-a 135 ■ of beasts, e.g. Snp 201, Snp 675 ■ Pot. khādeyya Ja iii.26 ■ Imper. khāda Ja i.150 (maṃsaṃ); ii.128 (khādaniyaṃ); vi.367 (pūvaṃ); Pv-a 39, Pv-a 78 ■ Part. pres. khādanto Ja i.61 Ja iii.276 ■ Fut. khādissati Ja i.221; Ja ii.129 ■ Aor. khādiṃsu Pv-a 20 ■ Pass. ppr. khādiyamāna (cp khajjati) Pv-a 69 (taṇhāya) (expl. of khajjamāna). Inf. khādituṃ Ja i.222; Ja ii.153; Dhp-a iv.226 ■ Ger. khāditvā Ja i.266, Ja i.278 (phalāni); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 32 (devour) poetical khādiyā Ja v.464 (= khāditvā) ■ Grd. khāditabba Ja iii.52, and khādaniya (q.v.) ■ Pp. khādita (q.v.). Cp. pali˚.
Dhtp 155 “khāda bhakkhane”; cp. Sk. khādati, cp. Gr. κνώδων the barbed hook of a javelin, i.e. “the biter”; Lith. kándu to bite
(nt.) the act of eating (or being eaten) Pv-a 158 ■ adj. f. khādanī the eater Dpvs 238; khādana at Ja ii.405 is to be read as ni˚ (q.v.). Cp. vi˚.
hard or solid food, opp. to and freq, combd with bhojaniya (q.v.). So at DN ii.127; Ja i.90, Ja i.235; Ja iii.127; Sn. p 110; Mil 9, Mil 11 ■ Also in combn anna, pāna, kh˚ Snp 924 ii.49. By itself Ja iii.276 ■ piṭṭha˚ pastry Vin i.248.
grd. of khādati; also as khādanīya
(f.) food, in rāja˚ royal food Snp 831 (rājakhādāya puṭṭho = rājakhādanīyena rājabhojanīyena posito Nd i.171; where printed ˚khadāya throughout).
causing to be eaten (kind of punishment) Mil 197 (sunakhehi).
fr. khādāpeti
(Caus. ii. of khādati] to make eat Ja iii.370; Ja vi.335.
= khādaka, in aññamañña˚ SN v.456.
(adj.) eaten, or having eaten, eaten up, consumed Ja i.223; Ja ii.154; Pv-a 5 ■ A twin form of khādita is khāyita, formed prob. on analogy of sāyita, with which freq. combined (cp., however, Trenckner P.M. 57), e.g. Pp 59; Vism 258; Pv-a 25. Used as the poetical form Pv i.1211 (expl. Pv-a 158 = khādita) ■ Der. khāditatta (nt.) the fact of being eaten Ja i.176.
- ṭṭhāna the eating place, place of feeding Ja v.447.
pp. med. & pass. of khādati
, f. khādinī = khādaka Pv-a 31.
to seem to be, to appear like (viya) Ja i.279; aor. khāyiṃsu Ja i.61; ppr med. khāyamāna Ja iv.140; Pv-a 251. Cp. pakkhāyati.
pass. = Sk. khyāyate, khyā
see khādita; cp. avakkhāyika.
any alkaline substance, potash, lye. In combn with ūsa (salt earth) at SN iii.131 (-gandha) AN i.209 ■ Used as a caustic Pv iii.102; Sdhp 281. See also chārikā.
-āpatacchika a means of torturing, in enumn of var tortures (under vividha-kamma-kāranā kārenti) MN i.87; AN i.48 = AN ii.122 = Nd ii.604; Ja vi.17 (v.l. ˚ṭicch˚; C. has āpatacchika, v.l. paṭicchaka); Vism 500; Mil 197 Both A & Nd have v.l. kharāpaṭicchaka; -odaka an alkaline solution Vism 264, Vism 420; Dhp-a i.189; Pv-a 213 cp. khārodikā nadī (in Niraya) Sdhp 194.
Sk. kṣāra, pungent, saline, sharp to ksā, kṣāyati to burn, cp. Gr. ςηρός, dry; Lat. serenus, dry, clear seresco to dry
(adj.) sharp or dry, said of the buds of the Pāricchattaka AN iv.117 sq.
fr. khāra
(f.) a certain measure of capacity (esp. of grain, see below khārika). It is used of the eight requisites of an ascetic, and often in conn. with his yoke (kāja): “a khārī-load.”
-kāja Vin i.33 (cp. Vin Texts i.132); Ja v.204. -bhaṇḍa Dhp-a iii.243 (:kahaṃ te kh-bh˚ ko pabbajita parikkhāro) -bhāra a shoulder-yoke SN i.169; Ja iii.83; -vidha = ˚kāja SN i.78 = Ud 65; DN i.101. At Ud and D passages it is read vividha, but DN-a i.269 makes it clear: khārī ti araṇi-kamaṇḍalu-sūcâdayo tāpasa-parikkhārā; vidho ti kāco, tasmā khāribharitaṃ kācam ādāyā ti attho As Kern (Toev. s. v.) points out, ˚vidha is a distortion of vivadha, which is synonymous with kāja.
and khāri-
alkaline, in enumn of tastes (cp. rasa) at SN iii.87; Dhs 629 and ≈.
adj. to khāra
of the khārī measure, in vīsati˚ kosalako tilavāho AN v.173 = Snp p.126.
adj. of khārī
Caus. of khalati: see khaleti & vikkhāleti.;
at Thig 509 is to be read kāhinti (= karissanti Thag-a 293).
play, amusement, pleasure usually combd with rati, enjoyment. Var. degrees of pleasures (bāla˚, etc.) mentioned at AN v.203; var kinds of amusement enumerated at Nd ii.219; as expounded at DN i.6 under jūta-pamādaṭṭhāna. Generally divided into kāyikā & vācasikā khiḍḍā (Nd;2; Snp-a 86) Expl. as kīḷanā Snp-a 86, as hassādhippāya (means of mirth) Pv-a 226; sahāyakādīhi keḷi Pv-a 265. Cp Snp 926; Pv iv.121.
-dasaka “the decad of play,” i.e. the second 10 years of man’s life, fr. 11–20 years of age Vism 619. -padosika corrupted by pleasures DN i.19, DN i.20 = DN-a i.113 (v.l. padūsika); -rati play & enjoyment Snp 41, Snp 59; Vv 1612 327; Pv iv.72; Vism 619.
Vedic krīḍā, cp. kīḷati
thrown; cast, overthrown Dhp 34; rajo paṭivātaṃ kh˚, dirt thrown against the wind SN i.13, SN i.164 = Snp 662 = Dhp 125; Ja iii.203; ratti-khittā sarā arrows shot in the night Dhp 304 = Ne 11; acchi vātavegena khittā a flame overthrown by the power of the wind, blown out Snp 1074 (expld Nd ii.220 by ukkhittā nuṇṇā, khambhitā) in interpret. of khetta Pv-a 7 said of sowing: khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ ■ akkhitta not upset, not deranged, undisturbed in qualities required of a brahmin w. ref. to his genealogy: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto DN i.113 = Snp p.115, etc. Cp. vi˚.
-citta (a) one whose mind is thrown over, upset, unhinged usually combd with ummattaka, out of one’s mind Vin i.131, Vin i.321; Vin ii.64, etc.; Sdhp 88. Cp. citta-kkhepa.
pp. of khip, to throw Dhtp 479; peraṇe
(nt.) a throw, anything thrown over, as ajina˚ a cloak of antelope hide DN i.167 and ≈; or thrown out, as a fishing net (= kumina) eel-basket AN i.33 = AN i.287 Thig 357 (= Thag-a 243). Cp. khippa & vikkhepika.;
fr. ksip
to throw, to cast, to throw out or forth, to upset Snp p.32 (cittaṃ); Ja i.223 (sīsaṃ). 290 (pāsake); ii.3 (daḷhaṃ dalhassa: to pit force against force)-aor. khipi SN iv.2, SN iv.3 (khuracakkaṃ); Pv-a 87 (= atthāresi) ■ ger. khipitvā Ja i.202 ■ 1st caus. khepeti (perhaps to kṣi, see khaya) to throw in, to put in, to spend (of time): dīgham addhānaṃ khepetvā Ja i.137; Thig 168 (khepeti jātisaṃsāraṃ = pariyosāpeti Thag-a 159); Dhp-a i.102 (dvenavuti-kappe khepesuṃ) āyuṃ khepehi spend (the rest of) your life Pv-a 148 ger. khepayitvāna (saṃsāraṃ) Pv iv.332 (= khepetvā Pv-a 254). In this sense Trenckner (P. M. 76) takes it as corresponding to Sk. kṣāpayati of kṣi = to cause to waste. See also khepana.
2nd caus. khipāpeti to cause to be thrown Ja i.202; Ja iv.139 (jalaṃ). Cp also khepa.
Vedic kṣipati
(nt.) the act of throwing or the state of being thrown Ja i.290 (pasaka-k˚).
(f.) throwing up, provocation, mockery, slander Mil 357; Vb 352; cp. Vism 29.
fr. khipati
(nt.) sneezing expectoration Pv ii.23 (expl. Pv-a 80: mukhato nikkhantamala); Dhp-a i.314 (˚roga + kāsa, coughing).
-sadda the sound of expectorations DN i.50; Dhp-a i.250.
pp. of khipati = that which is thrown out; acc. to Trenckner Notes p. 75 for khupita fr. kṣu to sneeze; possibly a contamination of the two
(adj.): 1. quick, lit. in the way of throwing (cp. “like a shot”) Snp 350 (of vacana = lahu Snp-a).
2. a sort of fishing net or eel-basket (cp. khipa & Sk. kṣepaṇī) SN i.74 ■ nt. adv. khippaṃ quickly AN ii.118 = AN iii.164; Snp 413, Snp 682, Snp 998; Dhp 65, Dhp 137 Dhp 236, Dhp 289; Ja iv.142; Pv ii.84, 92, 1221, Pp 32 ■ Compar khippatara Snp p.126.
-ābhiññā quick intuition (opp. dandh˚; ) DN iii.106; Dhs 177; Ne 7, Ne 24, Ne 50, Ne 77, Ne 112 sq.; 123 sq.; Vism 138.
Vedic kṣipra to kṣip
to ill-treat, in ppr. khippamāna Vv 8444, expld at Vv-a 348 by vambhento, pīḷanto.
fr. kṣip
(m. nt.) waste or fallow land AN iii.248; fig. barrenness of mind, mental obstruction. There are five ceto-khilā enumd in detail at MN i.101 = AN iv.460; DN iii.238 (see under ceto); mentioned AN v.17; Snp-a 262 As three khilā, viz. rāga, dosa, moha at SN v.57; also with other qualities at Nd ii.9. In combn with paligha SN i.27 (chetvā kh˚ ṃ); khilaṃ pabhindati to break up the fallowness (of one’s heart) SN i.193; SN iii.134; Snp 973. akhila (adj.) not fallow, unobstructed, open-hearted cittaṃ susamāhitaṃ… akhilaṃ sabbabhūtesu Dii.261; SN iv.118; in combn with anāsava Snp 212; with akankha Snp 477, Snp 1059; with vivattacchada Snp 1147; cp. vigatakhila Snp 19.
cp. Sk. khila
hard skin, callosity Ja v.204 (v.l. kiṇa).
cp. Sk. kiṇa
destroyed, exhausted, removed, wasted, gone; in cpds. ˚-often to be translated “without.” It is mostly applied to the destruction of the passions (āsavā) & demerit (kamma). Khīṇā jāti “destroyed is the possibility of rebirth,” in freq. occurring formula “kh. j vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ nâparaṃ itthattāya,” denoting the attainment of Arahantship (See arahant ii, formula A) Vin i.35; DN i.84, DN i.177, DN i.203; MN ii.39; Snp p.16; Pp 61 etc. See expln at DN-a i.225; Snp-a 138 ■ khīṇaṃ mayhaṃ kammaṃ Ja iv.3, similarly khīṇaṃ purāṇaṃ navaṃ natthi sambhavaṃ Snp 235 (khīṇa = samucchinna Kp-a 194); pāpakamme khīṇe Pv-a 105. āsavakhīṇa one whose cravings are destroyed Snp 370, cp. 162.
-āsava (adj.) whose mind is free from the four mental obsessions, Ep. of an Arahant Vin i.183; MN i.145 MN ii.43; MN iii.30; DN iii.97, DN iii.133, DN iii.235; Iti 95; Snp 82, Snp 471, Snp 539 Snp 644; Dhp 89, Dhp 420; Pv-a 7 (= arahanto); cp. BSk kṣīṇāśrava Divy 542 ■ The seven powers of a kh.˚ (khīṇāsava-balāni) discussed at DN iii.283; Pts i.35; ten powers at Pts ii.173, Pts ii.176; cp. Vism 144 (where a kh. walks through the air). -punabbhava one in whom the conditions of another existence have been destroyed (= khīṇāsava) Snp 514, Snp 656; -bīja one who is without the seed (of renewed existence) (= prec.) Snp 235 (= ucchinna-bīja Kp-a 194); -maccha without fish (of a lake) Dhp 155; -vyappatha without the way of (evil speech (vyapp˚ = vācāya patho; expl. Snp-a 204 as na pharusavāco) Snp 158; -sota with the stream gone, i.e. without water, in macche appodake kh˚ Snp 777.
pp. of khīyati, Pass. to khayati
(nt.) DN-a i.225 & khīṇatā (f.) Dhp-a iv.228, the fact of being destroyed.
in -dhammaṃ āpajjati to fall into a state of mental depression Vin iv.151, Vin iv.154; AN iii.269 AN iv.374. See also remarks by Kern, Toev. s. v.
cp. khīyati2
to be exhausted, to waste away, to become dejected, to fall away from Vin iv.152; Ja i.290 (dhạna); Pv ii.942; 112; Pts i.94, Pts i.96 Pts ii.31 (āsavā); Bdhd 80 ■ ppr. khīyamāna Snp 434 Bdhd 19. aor. khīyi DN iii.93; grd. khīyitabba ibid see also khāya and khīyanaka. In phrase “ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti it seems to correspond to jhāyati2 [Sk. kṣāyati] and the meaning is “to become chafed or heated, to become vexed, angry; to take offence”; as evidenced by the combn with quâsi-synonyms ujjhāyati & vipāceti, both referring to a heated state, fig for anger (cp. kilissati). Thus at Vin ii.259 & passim See ujjhāyati for further refs.;
Sk. kṣīyate, pass. to khayati
(a) in combn with pācittiya a “falling away” offence (legal term denoting the falling away from a consent once given) (see khīya) Vin ii.94 Vin ii.100; Vin iv.38.
der. fr. khīya
(nt.) milk, milky fluid, milky juice Vin i.243; Vin ii.301; MN i.343 sq. = AN ii.207 = Pp 56; AN ii.95 (in simile with dadhi, navanīta, sappi, sappi-maṇḍa) DN i.201; Dhp-a i.98; enumd with dadhi, etc., as one constituent of material food (kabalinkāro ähāro) at Dhs 646 = Dhs 740 = Dhs 875 ■ Ja iv.138 (mātu kh˚); 140; Dhp 71 = Ne 161; Mil 41; Pv-a 198 (= sneha, milky juice); Vv-a 75; Dhp-a i.98 (nirudaka kh˚, milk without water) ■ duddha-khīra one who has milked Snp 18.
-odaka (nt.) milk-water or milk & water lit. Ja ii.104 Ja ii.106; fig. in simile khīrodakībhūtā for a samaggā parisā “a congregation at harmony as milk and water blend AN i.70; SN iv.225 = MN i.207, MN i.398 = AN iii.67, AN iii.104; -odana (nt.) milk-rice (boiled) Vv3324 (= Vv-a 147). -gandha the smell of milk Ja vi.357. -ghaṭa a pot of milk Mil 48; -paka drinking milk; sucking (of a calf: vaccho mātari kh˚) Dhp 284 (v.l. khīra-pāna); Dhp-a iii.424 -paṇṇin (m.) Name of a tree the leaves of which contain a milky sap, Calotropis gigantea MN i.429; -matta having had his fill of milk, happy (of a babe) SN i.108; -mūla the price of milk; money with which to buy milk Dhp-a iv.217; -sāmin master of the milk (+ dhīrasāmin Bdhd 62.
Sk. kṣīra
(f.) a milk-giving cow SN i.174.
a stake, post, bolt, peg Vin ii.116 (khīlaṃ nikhanitvā digging in or erecting a post) SN iii.150 (kh˚ vā thambha vā); iv.200 (daḷha˚ a strong post, Ep. of satī); Mvu 29, Mvu 49 ■ ayo˚; an iron stake AN i.141; SN v.444; Nd ii.304iii; Snp 28 (nikhāta, erected) Snp-a 479. Cp. inda˚.
-ṭṭhāyi-ṭhita standing like a post (of a stubborn horse AN iv.192, AN iv.194.
Sk. kīla & khīla
(adj.) having sticks or stumps (as obstacles), in a˚ unobstructed Ja v.203 (= akāca nikkaṇṭaka 206).
scorn Mil 357.
der. fr. khīḷeti
to scorn, deride, only in combn hīḷita khīḷita garahita (pp.) Mil 229, Mil 288; cp. khīḷana.
to kīḷ or to khila ?
(-˚) is doubtful second part of iṅghāḷa˚; (q.v.).
to scold, to curse, to be angry at, to have spite against DN i.90, DN-a i.256 (= ghaṭṭeti); Vin iv.7; Snp-a 357; Dhp-a iv.38 ■ pp. khuṃsita Dhp-a ii.75.
kruś ? Dhtp 625: akkosane; cp. Müller P.G. 52
(adj.) 1. humpbacked Ja v.426 (+ piṭhasappī); DN-a i.148 (in combn with vāmana kirāta); f. Dhp-a i.194, Dhp-a i.226.
2. small, inferior, in kh˚-rājā a smaller, subordinate king Sdhp 453.
either Sk kubja, of which khujja would be the older form (cp. Walde, Lat. Etym. Wtb. s. v. cubitum) or Sk. kṣudra (?) (so Müller, P.G. p. 52). See also the variant kujja & cp. kuṭṭa;2
at Pv-a 162 (mā kh.) is to be read ukkaṇṭhi.
hunger Snp 52 (+ pipāsā Nd;2 s. v. kh˚ vuccati chātako), 966; Pv i.64 (= jighacchā) ii.15 (+ taṇhā), 24; Pv-a 72. See khuppipāsā.
Sk. kṣudh & kṣudhā, also BSk. kṣud in kṣuttarṣa hunger & thirst Jtm p. 30
(adj.) small, inferior, low; trifling, insignificant; na khuddaṃ samācare kiñci “he shall not pursue anything trifling” Snp 145 (= lāmakaṃ Kp-a 243) kh˚ ca bālaṃ Snp 318. Opp. to strong Vv 3210 (of migā balavasena nihīnā Vv-a 136).
-ānukhuddaka, in ˚āni sikkhāpadāni the minor observances of discipline, the lesser & minor precepts Vin ii.287 = DN ii.154; Vin iv.143; AN i.233; cp. Divy 465; -āvakāsa in akhuddâvakāso dassanāya not appearing inferior, one of the attributes of a well-bred brahmin (with brahmavaṇṇī) DN i.114, DN i.120, etc. -desa, in ˚issara ruler of a small district Sdhp 348.
Vedic kṣudra
= khudda; usually in cpds. In sequence khuddaka-majjhima-mahā Vism 100. Of smaller sections or subdivisions of canonical books Vin v.145 sq (with ref. to the paññattis), see also below ■ catuppade kh˚ ca mahallake Snp 603. Khuddaka (m.) the little one, Mil 40 (mātā ˚assa).
-nadī = kunnadī, a small river Pv-a 154; -nikāya name of a collection of canonical books, mostly short (the fifth of the five Nikāyas) comprising the foll. 15 books: Khuddaka-Pāṭha, Dhammapada, Udāna, Itivuttaka Sutta-Nipāta, Vimāna-Vatthu, Peta-Vatthu Thera and Therī Gāthā, Jātaka (verses only), Niddesa Paṭisambhidāmagga, Apadāna, Buddha-Vaṃsa, CariyāPiṭaka. The name Kh-N. is taken from the fact that it is a collection of short books-short, that is, as compared with the Four Nikāyas. Anvs (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 35 Gvns (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 57; Pv-a 2, etc. -pāṭha Name of the first book in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -mañcaka a small or low bed Ja i.167; -rājā an inferior king Ja v.37 (+ mahārājā) Snp-a 121; cp. khujja & kuṭṭa; -vaggulī (f.) a small singing bird Dhp-a iii.223; -vatthuka belonging to or having smaller sections Vin v.114.
hunger & thirst: ˚āya mīyamāno MN i.85. Personified as belonging to the army of Māra Snp 436 = Nd ii.on visenikatvā. To be tormented by hunger & thirst is the special lot of the; Petas: Pv i.1110ii.22, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 37, Pv-a 58, etc.; Vism 501; Sdhp 9, Sdhp 101 Sdhp 507.
cp. khudā
see saṃ˚ & khobha. The root is given at Dhtp 206 & 435 as “khubha = sañcalane.”
the hoof of an animal Vv 6410 (of a horse = turagānaṃ khuranipāta, the clattering of a horse’s hoof Vv-a 279), cp. Sk. kṣura, a monkey’s claw Sp. Avs i.236.
khura-kāse MN i.446, read (with Neumann) for khura-kāye, “in the manner of dragging (kṛṣ ) the hoofs.”
Vedic khura
a razor Vin ii.134; SN iv.169 (tiṇha a sharp r.) Dhp-a ii.257.
-agga the hall of tonsure Pv-a 53; -appa a kind of arrow DN i.96; MN i.429 (+ vekaṇḍa); Vism 381. -kosa razor-sheath Vism 251, Vism 255. -cakka a wheel, sharp as a razor Ja iv.3; -dhāra 1. carrying razors, said of the Vetaraṇī whose waters are like razors Snp 674 (+ tiṇha dhāra); Ja v.269; Vism 163.
2. the haft of a razor or its case Snp 716 (˚ûpama); Vism 500; Dhp-a ii.257 -nāsa having a nose like a razor Ja iv.139; -pariyanta a disk as sharp as a razor, a butcher-knife DN i.52 (= DN-a i.160; khura-nemi khura-sadisa-pariyanta), cp. ˚cakka -māla Name of an ocean, in ˚samudda Ja iv.137; -mālī (f.) prec. ibid.; -muṇḍa close-shaven Vin i.344; Vv-a 207 Khuramuṇḍaṃ karoti to shave closely DN i.98; SN iv.344; AN ii.241; -bhaṇḍa the outfit of a barber, viz. khura khura-silā, khura-sipāṭikā, namataka Vin i.249; Vin ii.134 cp. Vin. Texts iii.138; -silā a whetstone Vin ii.134 -sipāṭikā a powder prepared with s. gum to prevent razors from rusting Vin ii.134. Khulukhulu-karakam
Vedic kṣura, to kṣṇu, kṣṇoti to whet, kṣṇotra whetstone; cp. Gr. ξναύω scrape, ςύω shave, Lat. novacula razor. The Pali Dhtp (486) gives as meanings “chedana & vilekhana”
(nt. adv.) “so as to make the sound khulu, khulu,” i.e. clattering or bumping about MN ii.138. Cp. ghuru-ghuru.
a shield: see kīṭa.
cp. Sk. kheṭaka
(nt.) 1. (lit.) a field, a plot of land, arable land, a site, DN i.231; SN i.134 (bījaṃ khette virūhati; in simile); three kinds of fields at SN iv.315, viz. agga˚ majjhima˚, hīna˚ (in simile); AN i.229 = AN i.239; AN iv.237 (do.); Snp 524; Ja i.153 (sāli-yava˚); Pv ii.968 = Dhp-a iii.220 (khette bījaṃ ropitaṃ); Mil 47; Pv-a 62; Dhp-a i.98. Often as a mark of wealth = possession, e.g. DN iii.93 in defn of khattiya: khettānaṃ patī ti khattiya. In the same sense connected with vatthu (field & farm cp. Haus und Hof), to denote objects of trade, etc DN i.5 (expld at DN-a i.78: khetta nāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ rūhati, vatthu nāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ rūhati “kh. is where the first crop grows and v. where the second.” A similar expln at Nd i.248, where khetta is divided into sāli˚, vīhi. mugga˚, māsa˚, yava˚ godhūma˚, tila˚, i.e. the pubbaṇṇāni, and vatthu expld ghara˚, koṭṭhaka˚, pure˚, pacchā˚, ārāma˚, vihāra without ref. to aṇṇa.) SN ii.41; Snp 769. Together with other earthly possessions as wealth (hirañña, suvaṇṇa Snp 858; Nd ii.on lepa, gahaṭṭha, etc. As example in definition of visible objects Dhs 597; Vb 71 sq ■ Kasī a tilled field, a field ready to bear Pv i.12, cp. Pv-a 8 jāti˚ “a region in which a Buddha may be born (Hardy, after Childers s. khetta) Pv-a 138. Cp. the threefold division of a Buddha-kkhetta at Vism 414 viz. jāti˚, āṇā˚, visaya˚.
2. fig. (of kamma) the soil of merit, the deposit of good deeds, which, like a fertile field, bears fruit to the advantage of the “giver” of gifts or the “doer” of good works. See dakkhiṇeyya˚ puñña˚ (see detailed expln at Vism 220; khetta here virūhana-ṭṭhāna), brahma˚ ■ AN i.162, AN i.223 (kammaṃ khettaṃ, viññāṇaṃ bījaṃ); iv.237; Iti 98; Vv-a 113. akhetta barren soil AN iii.384 (akhettaññu not finding a good soil); iv.418 (do.); Pv-a 137. Sukhetta a good soil, fertile land SN i.21; Pv-a 137; opp. dukkhetta SN v.379.
-ūpama to be likened to a (fruitful) field, Ep. of an Arahant Pv i.11; -kammanta work in the field AN iii.77 -gata turned into a field, of puññakamma “good work becoming a field of merit” Pv-a 136, Pv-a 191; -gopaka a field watcher Ja iii.52; -ja “born on one’s land,” one of the 4 kinds of sons Nd i.247; Nd ii.448; Ja i.135. -jina one unsurpassed in the possession of a “field” Snp 523, Snp 524 -pāla one who guards a field Ja iii.54; -mahantatā the supremeness of the field (of merit) Vv-a 108; -rakkhaka the guardian of a field Ja ii.110; -vatthu possession of land & goods (see above) DN iii.164; SN v.473 = AN ii.209; AN v.137; Pp 58; Pv-a 3; -sampatti the successful attainment of a field of (merit) Pv-a 198; Vv-a 102; see Vv-a 30, Vv-a 32 on the three sampattis, viz. khetta˚, citta˚ payoga˚; -sāmika the owner of the field Mil 47; Vv-a 311. -sodhana the cleaning of the field (before it is ploughed) Dhp-a iii.284.
Vedic kṣetra, to kṣi, kṣeti, kṣiti, dwelling-place, Gr. κτίζω, Lat. situs founded, situated, E. site; cp. also Sk. kṣema “being settled,” composure. See also khattiya. Dhammapāla connects khetta with kṣip trā in his expln at Pv-a 7: khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ tāyati… ti khettaṃ
(adj.) subject to fatigue, tired Vv-a 276 ■ As noun “fatigue” at Vism 71.
Sk. kheda fatigue, khedati; perhaps to Lat. caedo
(-˚) throwing, casting, Sdhp 42. Usually in citta-kkhepa loss of mind, perplexity Dhp 138 Cp. vi˚, saṃ˚.
cp. khipati
˚ the passing of, appld to time: āyu˚ Vv-a 311.
cp. khepeti
destroyed, brought to waste, annihilated, khepitatta (nt.) the fact of being destroyed destruction, annihilation, Dhp-a ii.163 (kilesavaṭṭassa kh.).
pp. of khepeti
see khipati.
1. (adj.) full of peace, safe; tranquil, calm DN i.73 (of a country) SN i.123 (of the path leading to the ambrosial, i.e. Nibbāna) i.189 = Snp 454 (of vācā nibbānapattiyā); MN i.227 (vivaṭaṃ amatadvāraṃ khemaṃ nibbānapattiyā “opened is the door to the Immortal, leading to peace, for the attainment of Nibbāna”) AN iii.354 (of ñāna) Iti 32; Snp 268 (= abhaya, nirupaddava Kp-a 153); Dhp 189 sq. Pv iv.33 (of a road = nibbhaya Pv-a 250); Vv-a 85. 2. (nt.) shelter, place of security, tranquillity, home of peace, the Serene (Ep. of Nibbāna). In general DN i.11 (peace, opp. bhaya); Snp 896 (+ avivādabhūmi) 953 ■ In particular of Nibbāna: SN iv.371; AN iv.455; Vv 5320 (amataṃ khemaṃ); Pts i.59. See also yoga Abl. khemato, from the standpoint of the Serene SN ii.109; Snp 414, Snp 1098; Nd ii.s. v. (+ tāṇato, etc.).
-atta one who is at peace (+ viratta) SN i.112 (= khemībhūtaṃ assabhāvaṃ SA). -anta security, in ˚bhūmi a peaceful country (opp, kantāra), a paradise (as Ep. of Nibbāna) DN i.73; Nd ii.on Satthā; Vism 303. -ṭṭhāna the place of shelter, the home of tranquillity Thig 350 (= Nibbāna Thag-a 242); -ṭṭhita peaceful, appeased, unmolested DN i.135; -dassin looking upon the Serene Snp 809; -ppatta having attained tranquillity (= abhayappatta, vesārajjappatta) MN i.72 = AN ii.9.
Vedic kṣema to kṣi, cp. khetta
(adj.) one who enjoys security or peace SN iii.13; Snp 145 (= abhaya Kp-a 244); Dhp 258.
phlegm, saliva, foam; usually with singhānikā mucus, sometimes in the sense of perspiration, sweat AN i.34; AN iv.137; Snp 196 (+ singh˚); Kp ii. = Mil 26 (cp Vism 263 in detail, & Kp-a 66); Ja i.61; Ja iv.23; Ja vi.367 Vism 259, Vism 343 (+ singhāṇikā), 362; Dhp-a iii.181; Dhp-a iv.20 Dhp-a iv.170; Pv ii.23 as food for Petas, cp. Av.S. i.279 (kheṭamūtropajīvinī; ii.113: kheṭavadutsṛjya); Pv-a 80 (= niṭṭhubhana).
-kilinna wet with exudation Ja i.164; -mallaka a spitting box, a cuspidor Vin i.48; Vin ii.175, Vin ii.209 sq. -siṅghānikā phlegm & mucus Dhp-a i.50.
Sk. kheṭa, cp. kṣveḍa and śleṣma, P. silesuma. See also kilid & kilis;, cp. ukkheṭita. On root khela see keḷanā; it is given by Dhtp 279 in meaning “calana. The latter (khela) has of course nothing to do with kheḷa
(Vin) & kheḷāsika (Dhp-a) an abusive term “eating phlegm” (?) [Müller, P.G. 30 = kheṭâtmaka Vin ii.188, cp. Vin. Texts iii.239; ˚vāda the use of the term “phlegm-eater,” calling one by this name Vin ii.189; Dhp-a 140. Cp. āpaka.? spittle-dribbler; “wind bag.”
an enclitic particle of affirmation & emphasis indeed, really, surely; in narration: then, now (cp kira); in question: then, perhaps, really. Def. as adhikār’ antara-nidassan’ atthe nipāto Kp-a 113 as avadhāraṇaṃ (affirmative particle) Pv-a 11, Pv-a 18 ■ A few of its uses are as foll.: abhabbo kho Vin i.17 pasādā kho DN ii.155. After pron.: mayhaṃ kho Ja i.279; ete kho Vin i.10; idaṃ kho ibid.; so ca kho Ja i.51; yo kho MN i.428 ■ After a negation: na kho indeed not Ja ii.111; no ca khv’ āssa AN v.195; mā kho Ja i.253 ■ Often combd with pana: na sakkhā kho pana “is it then not possible” Ja i.151; api ca kho pana Ja i.253; siyā kho pana DN ii.154 ■ Following other particles. esp. in aoristic narration: atha kho (extremely frequent); tatra kho; tâpi kho; api ca kho; evaṃ bhante ti kho; evaṃ byā kho Vin iv.134; Dhp i.27, etc-In interr. sentences it often follows nu: kin nu kho Ja i.279; atthi nu kho Ja iii.52; kahan nu kho Ja i.255.
before vowels often khv’; contr. of khalu = Sk. khalu
(m.) shaking, shock Vism 31, Vism 157; khobhaṃ karoti to shake Vv-a 35, Vv-a 36 Vv-a 278; khobha-karaṇa shaking up, disturbance Vism 474 See also akkhobbha.
cp. Vedic kṣubh kṣobhayati, to shake = Goth. skiuban Ger. schieben, to push, E. shove
adj. flaxen; nt. a linen cloth, linen garment, usually combd with kappāsika Vin i.58 Vin i.96, Vin i.281; AN iv.394; AN v.234 = AN v.249 (˚yuga); Ja vi.47, Ja vi.500; Pv ii.117; Dhp-a i.417.
-pilotikā a linen cloth Vin i.296.
G.
cp. Vedic kṣauma
adj., only as ending: going. See e.g. atiga, anuga, antalikkha˚, ura˚, pāra˚, majjha˚, samīpa˚ hattha˚. It also appears as ˚gu, e.g. in addha˚, anta˚ paṭṭha˚, pāra˚, veda˚ ■ dugga (m. & nt.) a difficult road Dhp 327 = Mil 379; Pv ii.78 (= duggamana-ṭṭhāna Pv-a 102); ii.925; Ja ii.385.
fr. gam
(nt.) the sky (with reference to sidereal motions); usually of the moon: g˚ majjhe puṇṇacando viya Ja i.149, Ja i.212; g˚ tale canda-maṇḍalaṃ Ja iii.365; cando g˚ majjhe ṭhito Ja v.137; cando gagane viya sobhati Vism 58; g˚ tale candaṃ viya Dhp-a i.372; g˚ tale puṇṇacanda “the full-moon in the expanse of the heavens Vv-a 3; g˚ talamagga the (moon’s) course in the sky Pv-a 188; etc. Of the sun: suriyo ākāse antalikkhe gaganapathe gacchati Nd ii.on Snp 1097. Unspecified: Ja i.57; Vism 176 (˚tal-âbhimukhaṃ).
1. roaring, only in f. gaggarī a blacksmith’s bellows: kammāra˚, in simile MN i.243
S i.106; Vism 287.
2. (nt.) cackling, cawing, in haṃsa˚; the sound of geese Ja v.96 (expl. by haṃsamadhurassara). Gaggarā as Name of a lake at Vism 208-See note on gala.
Vedic gargara throat, whirlpool. *gṷer to sling down, to whirl, cp. Gr. βάραχρον, Lat. gurges, gurgulio Ohg. querechela “kehle”
a whirlpool, eddy Ja v.405; according to Kern Toev. s. v. a sort of fish (Sk. gargaraka Pimelodus Gagora); as gaggalaka at Mil 197.
fr. gaggara
to whirl, roar, bellow, of the waves of the Gangā Mil 3 ■ cp. gaḷagaḷāyati.;
v. den. fr. prec.; cp. gurgulio: gurges, E. gargle & gurgle
a shrub, a bush, usually together with latā, creeper; rukkha, tree, e.g. Nd ii.235, id; Ja i.73; Mil 268; Vism 182 (described on p. 183). With dāya, wood AN iv.74 puppha˚ a flowering shrub Ja i.120; khuddaka˚-vana a wood of small shrubs Ja v.37 ■ Pv-a 274; Vv-a 301 (-gumba, brushwood, underwood); Dhp-a i.171 (-pothana-ṭṭhāna); iv.78 (-mūla).
not = Sk. kaccha, grass-land, as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 16. The passage Ja iii.287 stands with gaccha v.l. kaccha for gaccha at AN iv.74; g˚ for k˚ at Snp 20
. These three formations are represented in Pāli as follows (1) gacch˚, in pres gacchati; imper. gaccha & gacchāhi; pot. gacche (Dhp 46, Dhp 224) & gaccheyya; p.pres. gacchanto, med. gacchamāna; fut (2nd) gacchissati; aor. agacchi (Vv-a 307 v.l. agañchi) ■ (2) gam˚ in three variations; viz (a) gam˚, in pres. caus. gameti; fut. gamissati; aor 3 sg. agamā (Snp 408, Snp 976; Vv 797; Mvu vii.9), agamāsi & gami (Pv ii.86) 1. pl. agamiṃhase (Pv ii.310), pl agamuṃ (Snp 290), agamaṃsu & gamiṃsu; prohib. mā gami; ger. gamya (Ja v.31); grd. gamanīya (Kp-a 223) See also der. gama, gamana, gāmika, gāmin ■ (b gan˚, in aor. agañchi (on this form see Trenckner Notes, p. 71 sq ■ In n’āgañchi Ja iii.190 it belongs to ā + gam); pres ■ aor gañchisi (Snp 665); inf. gantuṃ ger. gantvā; grd. gantabba. See also der. gantar. (c) ga˚, in pp. gata. See also ga, gati, gatta.
3. gā˚ in pret. agā (Pv ii.322), 3rd pl. aor. agū (= Sk. ˚uḥ), in ajjhagū, anvagū (q.v.).
Meanings and Use: 1. to go, to be in motion, to move, to go on (opp. to stand still, tiṭṭhati). Freq in combn with tiṭṭhati nisīdati seyyaṃ kappeti “to go to stand, sit down & lie down,” to denote all positions and every kind of behaviour; Nd ii.s. v. gacchati. evaṃ kāle gacchante, as time went on Ja iii.52, or evaṃ g˚ kāle (Pv-a 54, Pv-a 75) or gacchante gacchante kāle Dhp-a i.319; gacchati = paleti Pv-a 56; vemakoṭi gantvā pahari (whilst moving) Dhp-a iii.176.
2. to go, to walk (opp. to run, dhāvati) Dhp-a i.389.
3. to go away, to go out, to go forth (opp. to stay, or to come āgacchati): agamāsi he went Pv ii.86; yo maṃ icchati anvetu yo vā n’ icchati gacchatu “who wants me may come, who does not may go” Snp 564; āgacchantānañ ca gacchantānañ ca pamāṇaṃ n’ atthi “there was no end of all who came & went” Ja ii.133; gacchāma “let us go” Ja i.263; gaccha dāni go away now! Ja ii.160 gaccha re muṇḍaka Vism 343; gacchāhi go then Ja i.151, Ja i.222; mā gami do not go away! Ja iv.2; pl. mā gamittha Ja i.263; gacchanto on his way Ja i.255, Ja i.278 agamaṃsu they went away Ja iv.3; gantukāma anxious to go Ja i.222, Ja i.292; kattha gamissasi where are you going? (opp. agacchasi) Dhp-a iii.173; kahaṃ gacchissatha id. Ja ii.128; kuhiṃ gamissati where is he going Snp 411, Snp 412.
4. with acc. or substitute: to go to, to have access to, to arrive or get at (with the aim of the movement or the object of the intention); hence fig to come to know, to experience, to realize ■ (a) with acc. of direction: Rājagahaṃ gami he went to R Pv ii.86; Devadaha-nagaraṃ gantuṃ Ja i.52; gacchām ahaṃ Kusināraṃ I shall go to K. DN ii.128; Suvaṇṇabhūmiṃ gacchanti they intended to go (“were going” to S. Ja iii.188; migavaṃ g. to go hunting Ja i.149; janapadaṃ gamissāma Ja ii.129; paradāraṃ g. to approach another man’s wife Dhp 246 ■ (b) with adverbs of direction or purpose (atthāya): santikaṃ (or santike) gacchati to go near a person (in gen.), pitu s. gacchāma Dhp-a iii.172; devāna santike gacche Dhp 224 santikaṃ also Ja i.152: ii.159, etc. Kathaṃ tattha gamissāmi how shall I get there? Ja i.159; Ja ii.159; tattha agamāsi he went there Ja ii.160. dukkhānubhavanatthāya gacchamānā “going away for the purpose of undergoing suffering” Ja iv.3; vohāratthāya gacchāmi I am going out (= fut.) on business Ja ii.133 ■ Similarly (fig.) in foll. expressions (op. “to go to Heaven,” etc. = to live or experience a heavenly life, op. next); Nirayaṃ gamissati Ja vi.368; saggaṃ lokaṃ g. Ja i.152; gacche pāram apārato Snp 1129, in this sense interpreted at Nd ii.223 as adhigacchati phusati sacchikaroti, to experience-Sometimes with double acc.: Bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi “I entrust myself to Bh.” Vin i.16-Cp. also phrases as atthangacchati to go home, to set, to disappear; antarā-gacchati to come between, to obstruct.
5. to go as a stronger expression for to be, i.e. to behave, to have existence, to fare (cp. Ger. es geht gut, Fr. cela va bien = it is good). Here belongs gati “existence,” as mode of existing, element, sphere of being, and out of this use is developed the periphrastic use of gam˚, which places it on the same level with the verb “to be” (see b) ■ (a) sugatiṃ gamissasi you will go to the state of well-being, i.e. Heaven Vin ii.195; Iti 77; opp. duggatiṃ gacchanti Dhp 317
319 maggaṃ na jānanti yena gacchanti subbatā (which will fall to their share) Snp 441; gamissanti yattha gantvā na socare “they will go where one sorrows not” Snp 445; Vv 514; yan ca karoti… tañ ca ādāya gacchati “whatever a man does that he will take with him SN i.93 ■ (b) periphrastic (w. ger. of governing verb) nagaraṃ pattharitvā gaccheyya “would spread through the town” Ja i.62; pariṇāmaṃ gaccheyya “could be digested” DN ii.127; sīhacammaṃ ādāya agamaṃsu “they took the lion’s skin away with them” Ja ii.110 itthiṃ pahāya gamissati shall leave the woman alone Ja vi.348; sve gahetvā gamissāmi “I shall come for it tomorrow” Mil 48.
Vedic gacchati, a desiderative (future) formation from *gṷem “I am intent upon going,” i.e. I go, with the foll. bases ■ (1) Future-present *gṷemskéti → *gaścati → Sk. gacchati = Gr. βάσκω (to βαινω). In meaning cp. i, Sk. emi, Gr. εἰμι “I shall go” & in form also Sk. pṛcchati = Lat. porsco “I want to know,” Vedic icchati “to desire.”-(2) Present *gṷemi̯o = Sk. gamati = Gr. βαίνω, Lat. venio, Goth. qiman, Ohg koman, E. come; and non-present formations as Osk kúmbened, Sk. gata = Lat. ventus; gantu = (ad) ventus-(3) *gṷā, which is correlated to *stā, in Pret. Sk ágām, Gr. ε ̓́βην, cp. β ̈ημα
an elephant Ja iv.494; Mil 2, Mil 346; Dhs-a 295 (appld to a kind of thought).
-potaka the young of an elephant Pv-a 152 ■ rājā the king of the elephants Mil 346.
Sk. gaja
= gaja, in gajakattharaṇa an elephant’s cover Vv-a 104.
to roar, to thunder, usually of clouds. Of the earth: Dāvs v.29; of a man (using harsh speech) Ja i.226; Ja ii.412 (mā gajji); Nd i.172 (= abhi˚); Ja iv.25 ■ Caus. gajjayati, ger. gajjayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā pavassati Iti 66.
Sk. garjati, cp. gargara & jarā roaring, cp. uggajjati Dhtp 76: gajja sadde
one who thunders, of a man in comparison with a cloud AN ii.102 = Pp 42.
n. agent fr. prec.
1. (a) in special sense: a meeting or a chapter of (two or three bhikkhus, a company (opposed both to sangha, the order & puggala, the individual) Vin i.58, Vin i.74, Vin i.195, Vin i.197 Vin ii.170, Vin ii.171; Vin iv.130, Vin iv.216, Vin iv.226, Vin iv.231, Vin iv.283, Vin iv.310, Vin iv.316, Vin iv.317 Vin v.123, Vin v.167 ■ (b) in general: a crowd, a multitude, a great many. See cpds.
2. as-˚: a collection of, viz. of gods, men, animals or things; a multitude, mass flock, herd; host, group, cluster ■ (a) deva˚ Ja i.203; Dhp-a iii.441; Pv-a 140 (˚parivuta); pisāca˚ SN i.33 tidasa˚ Snp 679 ■ (b) amacca˚ suite of ministers Ja i.264; ariya˚ troup of worthies Ja vi.50; naranarī˚ crowds of men & women Mil 2; dāsi˚ a crowd of servants Ja ii.127; tāpasa˚ a group of ascetics Ja i.140 (˚parivuta) bhikkhu˚ Ja i.212 (˚parivuta) ■ (c) dvija˚ Ja i.152 dija˚ Pv ii.124; sakuṇa˚, of birds Ja i.207; Ja ii.352; go˚ of cows AN i.229; AN v.347, AN v.359; Ja ii.128; kākola˚, of ravens Snp 675; bhamarā˚, of bees Ja i.52; miga˚ of beasts Ja i.150 ■ (d) taru˚ a cluster of trees Pv-a 154; tāra˚ a host of stars AN i.215; Pv ii.967; with ref. to the books of the Canon: Suttantika˚ & Ābhidhammika˚ Vism 93.;
-ācariya “a teacher of a crowd,” i.e. a t. who has (many) followers. Always in phrase sanghī ca gaṇī ca ganācariyo ca, and always with ref. either to Gotama DN i.116; MN ii.3; or to the 6 chief sectarian leaders, as Pūraṇa Kassapa, etc.: DN i.47, DN i.163; SN i.68; SN iv.398; MN i.198, MN i.227, MN i.233; MN ii.2; Snp p.91; cp. DN-a i.143. In general: Mil 4. -ārāma (adj.) & -ārāmatā in phrase gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇārāmataṃ anuyutto: a lover of the crowd AN iii.422 sq.; MN iii.110 = Nd ii.on Snp 54 -gaṇin the leader of many, Ep. of Bhagavā Nd ii.307 -(ṃ)gaṇupāhanā (pl.) shoes with many linings Vin i.185 Vin i.187; cp. Vin. Texts ii.14. See also Bdhgh. on aṭaliyo (q.v. under aṭala). -pūraka (adj.) one who completes the quorum (of a bhikkhus chapter) Vin i.143 sq. -bandhana in ˚ena dānaṃ datvā to give by co-operation to give jointly Dhp-a ii.160; -bhojana food prepared as a joint meal Vin ii.196; iv. 71; v.128, 135, 205; -magga in ˚ena gaṇetuṃ to count by way of batches Vin i.117 -vassika (adj.) through a great many years Snp 279 -saṅganika (adj.) coming into contact with one another Dhp-a i.162.
Vedic gaṇa; *ger to comprise, hold, or come together, cp. Gr. ἀγείρω to collect, ἀγορά meeting, Lat. grex flock, Sk. jarante “conveniunt” (see Wackernagel Altind. Gr. i.193). Another form of this root is grem in Sk. grāma, Lat. gremium; see under gāma
a counter, one skilled in counting familiar with arithmetic; an accountant, overseer or calculator. Enumd as an occupation together with muddika at DN i.51 (expl DN-a i.157 by acchidda-pāṭhaka); also with muddika and sankhāyika SN iv.376; as an office at the king’s court (together with amaccā as gaṇaka-mahāmatta = a ministerial treasurer) DN iii.64, and in same context DN iii.148 DN iii.153, DN iii.169, DN iii.171, DN iii.177; as overseer Vin iii.43; as accountant Mil 79, Mil 293; Vv-a 66.
fr. gaṇ, to comprise in the sense of to count up
(f.) = gaṇikā Vin iii.135–136, in purāṇa˚ a woman who was formerly a courtesan, & as adj. gaṇakī-dhītā the daughter of a courtesan.;
(f.) counting, i.e. 1. counting up, arithmetic, number Ja i.29; Vism 278 sq.; Mil 79; Vv-a 194. 2. counting, census, statistics; Tikap. 94; Ja i.35; Mil 4 (senā ˚ṃ kāretvā); Dhp-a i.11, Dhp-a i.34.
3. the art of counting arithmetics as a study & a profession, forbidden to the bhikkhus Vin i.77 = Vin iv.129 (˚ṃ sikkhati to study ar.) DN i.11 (expl. DN-a i.95 by acchiddaka-gaṇanā); MN i.85 MN iii.1 (˚ājīva); DN-a i.157. -gaṇana-patha (time-) reckoning, period of time Mil 20, Mil 116.
(f.) “one who belongs to the crowd,” a harlot, a courtesan (cp. gaṇakī) Vin i.231 (Ambapālī) 268, (do.) ii.277 (Aḍḍhakāsī); Ud 71; Mil 122; Dhp-a iii.104; Vv-a 75 (Sirimā); Pv-a 195, Pv-a 199 ■ Customs of a gaṇikā Ja iv.249; Ja v.134 ■ Cp. saṃ˚.
(f.) = gaṇanā, arithmetic Mil 3.
(adj.) one who has a host of followers, Ep. of a teacher who has a large attendance of disciples; usually in standing combn sanghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo (see above) Also in foll.: Snp 955, Snp 957; Dpvs iv.8 (mahāgaṇī), 14 (therā gaṇī); gaṇī-bhūtā (pl.) in crowds, combd with sanghā sanghī DN i.112, expld at DN-a i.280: pubbe nagarassa anto agaṇā bahi nikkhamitvā gaṇa-sainpannā ti. See also paccekagaṇin.
a large species of deer Ja v.406 (= gokaṇṇa).
1. to count, to reckon, to do sums Dhp 19; Ja vi.334; Mil 79, Mil 293 pp. gaṇita Snp 677; pass. gaṇīyati Sdhp 434; inf. (vedic gaṇetuye Bw. iv.28; caus. gaṇāpeti MN iii.1.
2. to regard, to take notice of, to consider, to care for Ja i.300 Ja iv.267.
denom. to gaṇa Dhtp 574: sankhyāne
(m.) 1. a knot, a tie, a knot or joint in a stalk (of a plant) Ja i.172; DN-a i.163; Dhp-a i.321 (˚jātaṃ what has be come knotty or hard) ■ diṭṭhi-gaṇṭhi the tangle of false doctrine Vv-a 297; anta-gaṇṭh-ābādha entanglement of intestines Vin i.275.
2. a (wooden) block Vin ii.110 (of sandal wood).
-ṭṭhāna (for gaṇṭhikaṭṭhāna?) the place of the block (i.e. of execution) Ja iii.538; (reads gaṇṭhi-gaṇṭi-ṭṭhāna) Vism 248 ■ bhedaka, in ˚cora “the thief who breaks the block” (or rope, knot?) Dhp-a ii.30.
Vedic granthi, to grem to comprise, hold together, cp. Lat. gremium, Sk. gaṇa & grāma, see also gantha
(f.) (freq. spelled gaṇḍikā, q.v.) = gaṇṭhi, viz. 1. a knot, a tie DN-a i.199 (catu-pañca-gaṇṭhik’āhata patta a bowl with 4 or 5 knots, similarly āṇi-gaṇṭhik’ āhata ayopatta Vism 108; but see āṇi); Dhp-a i.335 (˚jāta = gaṇṭhijāta knotty part), 394.
2. a block (or is it knot?) Vin ii.136 (? + pāsaka; cp. Vin. Texts iii.144) v.140. Esp. in phrase gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā Vin i.46 Vin ii.213, Vin ii.215, trsld at Vin. Texts iii.286 “fasten the block on (to the robe)” but at i.155 “tie the knots. Also in dhamma-gaṇṭhikā a block for execution Ja i.150 (v.l. gaṇḍikā).
3. Name of a plant Pv-a 127 ■ ucchugaṇṭhikā sugar cane: see ucchu.
-kāsāva a yellow robe which was to be tied (or which had a block?) Ja iv.446.
1. a swelling, esp. as a disease, an abscess, a boil. Freq. in similes with ref. to kāma and kāya. Mentioned with similar cutaneous diseases under kilāsa (q.v. for loci). As Ep. of kāya SN iv.83 = AN iv.386 of kāmā AN iii.310, AN iv.289; Nd ii.on Snp 51; also Thig 491 (= dukkhatā sūlaya Thag-a 288); SN iv.64 (= ejā) Snp 51, Snp 61 (v.l. for gaḷa); Ja i.293; Vism 360 (˚pilakā) Dhp-a iii.297 (gaṇḍ-ā-gaṇḍajāta, covered with all kinds of boils); iv.175; Pv-a 55. Cp. Av. SN ii.1681.
2. a stalk, a shaft, in Name of a plant-˚tindu-rukkha Ja v.99 and in der. gaṇḍikā & gaṇḍī, cp. also Av. SN ii.13312. 3. = gaṇḍuppāda in cpd. gaṇḍamattikā clay mixed with earth-worms Vin ii.151 (cp. Bdhgh. gaṇḍuppādagūtha-mattikā clay mixed with excrement of earthworms Vin. Texts iii.172).
-uppāda (lit. producing upheavals, cp. a mole) an earth-worm, classed as a very low creature with kīṭā puḷavā at MN iii.168; Ja v.210 (˚pāṇa); Dhp-a iii.361 (˚yoni) Snp-a 317.
a variation of gaṇṭha (-i), in both meanings of (1) swelling, knot, protuberance, and (2) the interstice between two knots or the whole of the knotty object i.e. stem, stalk
(adj.) having boils Sdhp 103.
Name of the tree, under which Gotama Buddha performed the double miracle; with ref. to this freq in phrase gaṇḍamba-rukkha-mūle yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā Ja i.77; Ja iv.263 sq.; DN-a i.57; Pv-a 137; Mil 349 Dāvs v.54. Also at Dhp-a iii.207 in play of words with amba-rukkha.
(f.)
1. a stalk, a shaft (cp. gaṇḍī) Ja i.474; Dhs-a 319 (of the branches of trees: g˚-ākoṭana-sadda)
2. a lump, a block of wood (more freq. spelling gaṇṭhikā, q.v.).
3. Name of a plant Vv 354 (= bandhujīvaka Vv-a 161).
-ādhāna the putting on of a shaft or stem, as a bolt or bar Vin ii.172; cp. Vin. Texts iii.213 and gaṇḍī; also ghaṭikā2.
a-n. formation from gaṇḍa or gaṇṭha, see also gaṇṭhikā
1. having swellings, in ure gaṇḍī (f.) with swellings on the chest, i.e. breasts Ja v.159 Ja v.202 (thane sandhāyâha 205).
2. having boils, being afflicted with a glandular disease (with kuṭṭhin kilāsin) Kv 31.;
adj. fr. gaṇḍa
(f.)
1. a shaft or stalk, used as a bar Ja i.237
2. a gong Dhp-a i.291 (gaṇḍiṃ paharati to beat the g.) ii.54, 244; gaṇḍiṃ ākoṭetvā Kp-a 251. Cp. AvS i.258 264, 272; ii.87, 95 & Divy 335, Divy 336. Also in gaṇḍisaññā “sign with the gong” Ja iv.306.
3. the executioner’s block (= gaṇḍikā or gaṇṭhikā) Ja iii.41.
= gaṇḍikā in meaning 1; prob. = Sk. ghaṇṭā in meaning 2
a mouthful Ja i.249 (khīra˚). Ganhati & Ganhati;
cp. Sk. gaṇḍūṣa
. The forms of the verb are from three bases, viz. (1); gaṇha- (Sk. gṛhṇā-); Pres.: ind. gaṇhāti (gaṇhāsi Pv-a 87) pot. gaṇheyya, imper. gaṇha (Ja i.159; Pv-a 49 = handa) & gaṇhāhi (Ja i.279). Fut. gaṇhissati; Aor gaṇhi. Inf. gaṇhituṃ (J iii.281). Ger. gaṇhitvā Caus. ganhāpeti & gāhāpeti.
2.; gahe- (Sk. gṛhī-) Fut. gahessati. Aor. aggahesi (Snp 847; Ja i.52). Inf gahetuṃ (Ja i.190, Ja i.222). Ger. gahetvā & gahetvāna (poet.) (Snp 309; Pv ii.3).
3. gah- (Sk. gṛh-): Aor aggahi. Ger. gayha & gahāya (Snp 791). Pass. gayhati Pp. gahita & gahīta. Cp. gaha, gahaṇa, gāha.;
Meanings: to take, take up; take hold of; grasp seize; assume; e.g. ovādaṃ g. to take advice Ja i.159 khaggaṃ to seize the sword Ja i.254
255; gocaraṃ to take food Ja iii.275; jane to seize people Ja i.253; dhanaṃ to grasp the treasure Ja i.255; nagaraṃ to occupy the city Ja i.202; pāde gāḷhaṃ gahetvā holding her feet tight Ja i.255; macche to catch fish Ja iii.52; mantaṃ to use a charm Ja iii.280; rajjaṃ to seize the kingdom Ja i.263 Ja ii.102; sākhaṃ to take hold of a branch Snp 791; Ja i.52 Very often as a phrase to be translated by a single word, as: nāmato g. to enumerate Pv-a 18; paṭisandhiṃ g. to be born Ja i.149; maraṇaṃ g. to die Ja i.151 mūlena g. to buy Ja iii.126; vacanaṃ g. to obey Ja iii.276 (in neg.). The ger. gahetvā is very often simply to be translated as “with,” e.g. tidaṇḍaṃ gahetvā caranto Ja ii.317; satta bhikkhū gahetvā agamāsi Vv-a 149.
Caus. gaṇhāpeti to cause to be seized, to procure, to have taken: phalāni Ja ii.105; rājānaṃ Ja i.264. Cp gāhāpeti.
Vedic grah (grabh), gṛhṇāti pp. gṛhīta to grasp. *gher to hold, hold in, contain; cp. Gr. ξόρτος enclosure, Lat. hortus, co-hors (homestead) Goth. gards (house); Ohg. gart; E. yard & garden. To this belong Vedic gṛha (house) in P. gaha˚, gihin, geha ghara, & also Vedic harati to seize, hasta hand
gone, in all meanings of gacchati (q.v.) viz. 1. literal gone away, arrived at, directed to (c. acc.), opp ṭhita: gate ṭhite nisinne (loc. abs.) when going standing, sitting down (cp. gacchati 1) DN i.70; opp āgata: yassa maggaṃ na jānāsi āgatassa gatassa vā Snp 582 (cp. gati 2). Also periphrastic (= gacchati 5 b) aṭṭhi paritvā gataṃ “the bone fell down” Ja iii.26 Very often gata stands in the sense of a finite verb (= aor. gacchi or agamāsi): yo ca Buddhaṃ… saraṇaṃ gato (cp. gacchati 4) Dhp 190; attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gato he went to his domicile Ja i.280; Ja ii.160; nāvā Aggimālaṃ gatā the ship went to Aggimālā Ja iv.139. 2. in applied meaning: gone in a certain way, i.e. affected, behaved, fared, fated, being in or having come into a state or condition. So in sugata & duggata (see below) and as 2nd part of cpds. in gen., viz.; gone; atthaṃ˚ gone home, set; addha˚ done with the journey (cp. gat-addhin); gone into: taṇhā˚ fallen a victim to thirst, tama˚ obscured, raho˚, secluded, vyasana˚ fallen into misery; having reached: anta˚ arrived at the goal (in this sense often combd with patta: antagata antapatta Nd2, 436, 612), koṭi˚ perfected, parinibbāna having ceased to exist. vijjā˚ having attained (right knowledge; connected with, referring to, concerning: kāya˚ relating to the body (kāyagatā sati, e.g. Vism 111, Vism 197, Vism 240 sq.); diṭṭhi˚ being of a (wrong) view sankhāra˚, etc ■ Sometimes gata is replaced by kata and vice versa: anabhāvaṃkata → anabhāvaṃ gacchati kālagata → kālakata (q.v.).
agata not gone to, not frequented: ˚ṃ disaṃ (of Nibbāna) Dhp 323; purisantaraṃ ˚ṃ mātugāmaṃ “a maid who has not been with a man” Ja i.290.
sugata of happy, blessed existence, fortunate; one who has attained the realm of bliss (= sugatiṃ gata, see gati), blessed. As np. a common Ep. of the Buddha Vin i.35; Vin iii.1; DN i.49; SN i.192; AN ii.147 et passim (see Sugata) ■ DN i.83; Snp 227 (see expl. Kp-a 183).
duggata of miserable existence, poor, unhappy, ill-fated, gone to the realm of miscry (duggatiṃ gata Pv-a 33, see gati) Pv i.62; ii.317; duggata-bhāva (poverty) Ja vi.366; duggat-itthi (miserable, poor Ja i.290; parama-duggatāni kulāni clans in utmost misery (poverty) Pv-a 176 ■ Compar. duggatatara Dhp-a i.427; Dhp-a ii.135.
-atta (fr. attā) self-perfected, perfect DN i.57 (expl by koṭippatta-citto DN-a i.168); cp. paramāya satiyā ca gatiyā ca dhitiyā ca samannāgata MN i.82; -addhin (adj of addhan) one who has completed his journey (cp addhagata) Dhp 90; -kāle (in gata-gata-kāle) whenever he went Ja iii.188; -ṭṭhāna place of existence Pv-a 38 = gamana in āgata-ṭṭhānaṃ vā: coming and going (lit. state of going) Ja iii.188; -yobbana (adj.) past youth, of old age AN i.138; Snp 98 = Snp 124.
pp. of gacchati in medio-reflexive function
a messenger Ja i.86.
1. = Sk. gat-ātman (see prec.).
2. = Sk. gatatvaṃ the fact of having gone Kp-a 183.
(f.) 1. going, going away, (opp. āgati coming) (both gati & āgati usually in pregnant sense of No. 2. See āgati); direction, course, career. Freq of the two careers of a Mahāpurisa (viz. either a Cakkavatti or a Buddha) DN ii.16 = Snp p.106; Snp 1001, or of a gihī arahattaṃ patto Mil 264, with ref. to the distinction of the child Gotama Ja i.56 ■ phassâyatanānaṃ gati (course or direction) AN ii.161; jagato gati (id. AN ii.15, AN ii.17; sakuntānaṃ g. the course, flight of birds Dhp 92 = Thag 92 ■ Opp. āgati Pv ii.922 ■ tassā gatiṃ jānāti “he knows her going away, i.e. where she has gone” Pv-a 6.
2. going away, passing on (= cuti opp. upapatti coming into another existence); course esp after death, destiny, as regards another (future existence AN i.112; DN ii.91; MN i.388 (tassa kā gati ko abhisamparāyo? what is his rebirth and what his destiny?); in combn āgati vā gati vā (= cutûpapatti) rebirth & death MN i.328, MN i.334. In defn of saṃsāra expld as gati bhavâbhava cuti upapatti = one existence after the other Nd ii.664; as gati upapatti paṭisandhi Nd ii.on dhātu (also as puna-gati rebirth) ■ The Arahant as being beyond Saṃsāra is also beyond gati yassa gatiṃ na jānanti devā gandhabba-mānusā Dhp 420 = Snp 644; yesaṃ gati n’ atthi Snp 499; and Nibbāna coincides with release from the gatis: gativippamokkhaṃ parinibbānaṃ Snp-a 368 ■ attā hi attano gati “everybody is (the maker of) his own future life Dhp 380; esā maccharino gati “this is the fate of the selfish” Pv iii.114; sabbagatī te ijjhantu “all fate be a success to you” Ja v.393; gato so tassa yā gati “he has gone where he had to go (after death)” Pv i.122. 3. behaviour, state or condition of life, sphere of existence element, especially characterized as sugati duggati, a happy or an unhappy existence. gati migānaṃ pavanaṃ, ākāso pakkhīnaṃ gati, vibhavo gati dhammānaṃ nibbānaṃ arahato gati: the wood is the sphere of the beasts, the air of the birds, decay is the state of (all) things, Nibbāna the sphere of the Arahant Vin v.149 = Snp-a 346; apuññalābho ca gatī ca pāpikā Dhp 310; duggati Ja i.28; avijjāy’ eva gati the quality of ignorance Snp 729; paramāya gatiyā samannāgato of perfect behaviour MN i.82; see also defn at Vism 237. 4. one of the five realms of existence of sentient beings (= loka), divided into the two categories of sugati (= Sagga, realm of bliss) & duggati (= Yamaloka apāya, realm of misery). These gatis are given in the foll. order: (1) niraya purgatory, (2) tiracchānayoni the brute oreation, (3) pittivisaya the ghost world (4) manussā (m-loka) human beings, (5) devā gods MN i.73; DN iii.234; AN iv.459; Nd ii.550; cp. SN v.474
77 Vism 552. They are described in detail in the Pañcagatidīpana (ed. L. Feer, J.P.T.S. 1884, 152 sq.; trsl. by the same in Annales du Musée Guimet v. 514
528) under Naraka-kaṇḍa, Tiracchāna˚, Peta˚, Manussa˚, Deva˚ Of these Nos. 1
3 are considered duggatis, whilst Nos. 4 and 5 are sugati. In later sources we find 6 divisions, viz. 1
3 as above, (4) asurā, (5) manussā (6) devā, of which 1
4 are comprised under apāyā (conditions of suffering, q.v.) or duggatiyo (see Pv iv.11 cp. Pv-a 103). These six also at DN iii.264 ■ lokassa gatiṃ pajānāti Bhagavā Snp 377 (gati = nirayādipañcappabhedaṃ Snp-a 368). The first two gatis are said to be the fate of the micchādiṭṭhino DN i.228, dve niṭṭhā DN-a i.249 (q.v. for var. appl. of gati) as well as the dussīlā (AN i.60), whilst the last two are the share of the sīlavanto (A. i.60).
-gata gone its course (of a legal enquiry, vinicchaya Vin ii.85 (cp. Vin Texts iii.26); Ja ii.1.
agati 1. no course, no access, in agati tava tattha there you have no access SN i.115.
2. = duggati, a wrong course. agatigamana a wrong course of life DN iii.133; AN i.72; AN ii.18 sq.; AN iii.274 sq.; Ja v.510; Pv-a 161. Technically the four agati-gamanāni are: chanda dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚ DN iii.228 (see also under chanda).
sugati (sometimes suggati after duggati e.g. Ja vi.224 a happy existence; a realm of bliss; the devaloka. Cp sugatin. Usually with gacchati (sugatiṃ) & gata “gone to Heaven” Vin ii.195; DN ii.202; Iti 77; Pv-a 65. In combn w. sagga loka (sugatiṃ, etc. uppajjati) DN i.143; AN i.97; Ja i.152. parammaraṇā sugati pāṭikankhā Iti 24; suggatiṃ gata Dhp 18; sugati pāpehi kammehi sulabhā na hoti “bliss is not gained by evil” Pv-a 87 = sugga & dibbaṭṭhāna Pv-a 89; sugati-parāyana sure of rebirth in a realm of bliss, ib.
duggati a miserable existence; a realm of misery (see above gati 4). Usually with gacchati (duggatiṃ gata reborn in a miserable state) or uppajjati DN i.82; AN i.97 AN i.138 (+ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ); ii.123; iii.3; iv.364; Dhp 17; Snp 141; Snp-a 192 (= dukkhappatti); Pv-a 87 Sakakammāni nayanti duggatiṃ, one’s own deeds lead to rebirth in misery, Dhp 240; with ref. to a Peta existence: Pv i.62; ii.16; 113; 317. Cp. duggata.
fr. gacchati; cp. Gr. βάσις, Lat. (in-) ventio, Goth. (ga-)qumps
(adj.) 1. going to, staying with, in bhikkhu˚ a person living with the bhikkhus Vin i.148.
2. leading to: yaṃ˚ what they lead to (of the 5 indriyas) SN v.230
3. having a certain gati, leading to one of the four kinds of rebirth: evaṃ˚ DN i.16 (w. ref. to one of the first 3 gatis: DN-a i.108); niyata˚ whose destiny is certain (w. ref. to sugati) and aniyata˚ whose destiny is uncertain (w. ref. to a duggati) Dhp-a iii.173.
(adj. = gatika) 1. going, i.e. having a certain course: sabbā nadī vankagatī “every river flows crooked” Ja i.289.
2. having a certain gati, fated destined, esp. in su˚ & dug˚: samparāye suggatī going to a happy existence after death Vin ii.162 = Ja i.219 saggaṃ sugatino yanti “those who have a happy fate (because of leading a good life) go to one of the Heavens” Dhp 126.
(adj.) of (perfect) behaviour, going right, clever (cp. gatatta under gata, & gati 3) MN i.82.
(nt.) the body, pl. gattāni the limbs. - As body: Vin i.47; SN i.169 = SN i.183 (analla˚ with pure bodies; anallīna˚ at 169, but v.l. analla˚); AN i.138; Snp 673 (samacchida˚ with bodies cut up); Pv i.112 (bhinna-pabhinna˚, id.); Pv-a 56 (= sarīra); 68 ■ As limbs: SN iv.198 (arupakkāni festering with sores) MN i.506 (id.); MN i.80 = MN i.246; Ja i.61 (lālākilinna˚); Snp 1001 (honti gattesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇā), 1017, 1019; Pv iii.91 (= sarīrâvayavā Pv-a 211); Mil 357 (arupakkāni).
Vedic gātra
(adj.) tied, bound, fettered; enslaved, bound to greedy for, intoxicated with (c. loc.). When abs. always in combn w. paribhuñjati and w. ref. to some object of desire (bhoga, lābha, kāmaguṇe). Usually in standing phrase gathita mucchita ajjhāpanna (ajjhopanna) “full of greed & blind desire.” In this connection it is frequently (by B MSS.) spelt gadhita and the editors of S, A, & Mil have put that in the text throughout With mucchita & ajjhāpanna: DN i.245; DN iii.43; MN i.162, MN i.173; SN ii.270; SN iv.332; AN v.178, AN v.181 Nd ii.on nissita C ■ c. loc.: Ja iv.371 (gharesu); DN-a i.59 (kāmaguṇesu). In other connections: ādānaganthaṃ gathitaṃ visajja Snp 794 (cp. Nd i.98); yāni loke gathitāni na tesu pasuto siyā Snp 940 ■ Ja iv.5 (= giddha); v.274 (gedhita for pagiddha); Pv-a 262 (gadhita as expln of giddha)-agathita (agadhita) not fettered (by desire without desire, free from the ties of craving (+ m˚, a˚ SN ii.194, SN ii.269; AN v.181; Mil 401 (trsl. Rh.D. ii.339 “without craving, without faintness, without sinking”).
pp. of ganthati to tie, cp. gantha, knot; Sk. grathita
speech, sentence Dhp i.66, DN-a i.66 f.; and on DN iii.135 (§ 28); gada at SN ii.230 (v.l.) in phrase diṭṭhagadena sallena is to be read diddhagadena s.
(and gaddūla) a leather strap SN iii.150; Ja ii.246; Ja iii.204; fig, in taṇhā-gaddūla “the leash of thirst,” Nd ii.on jappā (taṇhā) = Dhs 1059 = Vb 361, cp. Dhs-a 367.
(nt.) a small measure of space & time MN iii.127; SN ii.264 (˚mattam pi, SA “pulling just once the cow’s teat”) AN iv.395; Mil 110. See Trenckner P.M. 59, 60; Rh D. J.R.A.S. 1903, 375.
Derivation unknown; Sk. dadrūghna
a vulture; in gaddhabādhipubbo, of the bhikkhu Ariṭṭha, who had been a vulture trainer in a former life Vin ii.25 = Vin iv.218; MN i.130; see also Vin. Texts ii.377.
Vedic gṛdha; see gijjha
an ass, donkey Vin v.129; MN i.334; AN i.229; Ja ii.109, Ja ii.110; Ja v.453; DN-a i.163 ■ f. gadrabhī Ja ii.340.
-bhāraka a donkey load Ja ii.109; Dhp-a i.123 -bhāva the fact of being an ass Ja ii.110 ■ rava (-rāva) the braying of an ass ibid. & Vism 415.;
Vedic gardabha., Lat. burdo, a mule; see Walde Lat. Wtb., s. v.
see gathita.
“goer” in gantā hoti he will go, he is in the habit of going, combd w. sotā hantā khantā, of the king’s elephant AN ii.116 = AN iii.161; v.l. for gatā at MN ii.155.
n. agent of gacchati in the sense of a periphrastic future
(in BB often misspelt gandha)
1. a bond, fetter, trammel; always fig. and usually referring to and enumd as the four bodily ties, or knots (kāya˚, see under kāya): SN v.59 = Dhs 1135; DN iii.230; Nd i.98; Dhp-a iii.276; Dhp-a iii.4 kāyaganthā, viz., abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbataparāmasa idaṃsaccâbhinivesa; thus Nd i.98; Vism 683. In other conn. Snp 347, Snp 798, Snp 847, Snp 857, Snp 912; Nd ii.on jappā (taṇhā); Dhp 211; Pts i.129; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1472 Vb 18, Vb 24, Vb 55, Vb 65, Vb 77, Vb 117, Vb 120; Ne 31, Ne 54, Ne 114, Ne 124 (gandha); Sdhp 616 ■ chinna˚ (adj.) one who has cut the ties (of bad desires, binding him to the body) Combn w. anigha nirāsa SN i.12 (˚gandha), 23; w. asita anāsava Snp 219. Cp. pahīnamānassa na santi ganthā SN i.14. See also ādāna˚; cp. ganthaniya.
2. [only in late Pali, and in Sk.] composition, text, book (not with ref. to books as tied together, but to books as composed, put together. See gantheti 2).
-dhura the burden of the books, i.e. of studying the Scriptures, expld as one who knows by heart one, two or all Nikāyas. Always combd w. vipassanādhuraṃ the burden of contemplation Dhp-a i.8; Dhp-a iv.37; -pamocana the state of being released from, freed from the fetters of the “body” always w. ref.to Nibbāna SN i.210; AN ii.24; Iti 104, cp. 122; -pahīna (adj.) connected with or referring to the ganthas Dhs 1480; opp. vi˚ Dhs 1482.
fr. ganthati
1. to tie, knot, bind, fasten together: kathaṃ mittāni ganthati “how does he bind friends” SN i.214; Snp 185; mālaṃ ganthamāna tying a garland Vv 381 (ganthento Vv-a 173). Of medicines: to mix, to prepare Ja iv.361 ■ pp. ganthita tied, bound, fettered catūhi ganthehi g˚ Pts i.129 ■ grd. ganthaniya to be tied or tending to act as a tie (of “body”); expl. as ārammaṇa-karaṇa-vasena ganthehi ganthitabba Dhs-a 69; dhammā g˚ ā (“states that tend to be are liable to be ties” Buddh. Ps. p. 305; Expositor 64) Dhs 1141; Dhs 1478 In combn saññojaniya g˚ oghaniya (of rūpa) Dhs 584 = Vb 12; of rūpa-kkhandha Vb 65, of dasāyatanā ib. 77, dasindriyā ib. i.29, saccā g˚ and ag (= gantha-sampayutta & vippayuttā) ib. 117.
2. to put together, to compose: mante ganthetvā (v. l; gandhitvā ) Snp 302, Snp 306.
Vedic grath, granth, grathnāti, to *grem, cp. Lat. gremium; see also gaṇṭhi gathita gantha
(adj.) hard-studying Dhp-a i.156 (bhikkhu; cp. gantha-dhura).
fr. gantha 2
smell, viz.
1. odour, smell, scent in gen Ja iii.189; Dhp 54
56 = Mil 333; Dhs 605 under ghānâyatanāni); āma˚ smell of raw flesh AN i.280; DN ii.242; Snp 241 sq; maccha˚ the scent of fish Ja iii.52; muttakarīsa˚ the smell of faeces and urine AN iii.158; catujāti˚ four kinds of scent Ja i.265; Pv-a 127; dibba-g˚puppha a flower of heavenly odour Ja i.289.
2. odour smell in particular: enumerated as mūla˚, sāra˚ puppha˚, etc., SN iii.156 = SN v.44 = AN v.22; Dhs 625 (under ghandāyatanāni, sphere of odours). Specified as māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚ under tīṇi gandhajātāni AN i.225-puppha˚ Dhp 54 = AN i.226.
3. smell as olfactory sensation, belonging to the sphere (āyatanāni) of sense-impressions and sensory objects & enum. in set of the 12 ajjhatta-bāhirāni āyatanāni (see under rūpa with ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā “sensing smell by means of the olfactory organ” DN iii.102; DN iii.244 = DN iii.250 DN iii.269 = Nd ii.on rūpa; MN iii.55, MN iii.267; SN iv.71; Vin i.35 Defined at Vism 447. Also as gandhā ghānaviññeyya under kāmaguṇā MN ii.42; DN iii.234, etc. In series of 10 attributes of physical quality (-rūpa, etc.) as characteristic of devas DN iii.146; Pv ii.958; as sāra˚, pheggu˚ taca˚, etc. (nine qualities in all) in definition of Gandhabba-kāyikā devā SN iii.250 sq ■ In the same sense & similar connections: vaṇṇa-g˚-ras’ûpeto Dhp 49; Ja ii.106; gandhānaṃ khamo & akkhamo (of king’s elephant) AN iii.158 sq.; itthi˚, purisa˚ AN i.1, AN i.2; AN iii.68 in combn w. other four senses Snp 387, Snp 759, Snp 974. 4. perfume, prepared odorific substance used as a toilet requisite, either in form of an unguent or a powder. Abstinence from the use of kallaesthetics is stated in the Sīlas (DN i.8) as characteristic of certain Wanderers and Brahmins. Here gandha is mentioned together with mālā (flowers, garlands): DN i.5 = Kp ii.D i.7 (˚kathā); Vin ii.123; Snp 401; Ja i.50, Ja i.291; Pv-a 62. The use of scented ointment (-vilepana & ālepa see cpds.) is allowed to the Buddhist bhikkhus (Vin i.206); and the giving of this, together with other commodities, is included in the second part of the deyyadhamma (the list of meritorious gifts to the Sangha), under Nos. 5
14 (anna-pāna-vattha-yānamālā-gandhā-vilepana-seyy-âvasatha-padīpeyya): SN iii.252; Nd ii.523 = Iti 65. Out of this enumeration g˚-m˚-v˚-Pv ii.316; chatta-g˚-m˚-upāhanā Pv ii.49ii.936; m˚-g˚-v˚ kappūra-kaṭukapphalāni Ja ii.416. The application of scented ointment (gandhena or gandhehi vilimpati) is customary after a bath, e.g. Pv-a 50 (on Pv i.106); Ja i.254, Ja i.265; Ja iii.277. Var. kinds of perfumes or scented substances are given as g˚dhūpa-cuṇṇa-kappūra (incense, powder, camphor) Ja i.290; vāsa-cuṇṇa-dhūpanādi g˚ Kp-a 37. See also cpds
5. occurs as v.l. for gantha (book).
duggandha a disagreeable smell Dhs 625; ˚ṃ vāyati to emit a nasty odour Pv-a 14; as adj. having a bad smell, putrid Snp 205; Pv-a 15 (= pūtigandha), f ■ ā duggandhā pūti vāyasi “you emit a bad odour” Pv i.61 (= aniṭṭha˚). -sugandha an agreeable smell Dhs 625; as adj. of pleasant smell Ja iii.277; Sdhp. 246.
-āpaṇa a perfumery shop Ja i.290; ˚ika perfume seller Mil 344; -āyatana an olfactory sense-relation, belonging to the six bāhirāni āyatanāni, the objective sensations DN iii.243, DN iii.290; Dhs 585, Dhs 625, Dhs 655; -ārammaṇa bearing on smell, having smell as its object Dhs 147, Dhs 157, Dhs 365 Dhs 410, Dhs 556, Dhs 608; -ālepa (nt.) anointing with perfumes Vin i.206; -āsā “hunger for odours,” craving for olfactory sensations Dhs 1059; -odaka scented water Ja i.50; Ja ii.106; Ja iii.189; -karaṇḍaka a perfume-box SN iii.131; SN v.351; Pp 34; -kuṭī (f.) a perfumed cabin name of a room or hut occupied by the Buddha, esp that made for him by Anāthapiṇḍika in Jetavana (Ja i.92). Gotamassa g˚ Ja ii.416, cp. Avs ii.401 Dhp-a iv.203, Dhp-a iv.206; -cuṇṇa scented (bath-) powder Ja iii.277; -jāta (nt.) odour, perfume (“consisting of smell”). Three kinds at AN i.225 (māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚); enum. as candanādi Dhp-a i.423; in defiName of gandha DN-a i.77 ■ Dhp 55; -taṇhā thirst or craving for odours (cp. g˚-āsā) Dhs 1059 = Nd ii.on jappā; -tela scented oil (for a lamp) Ja i.61; Ja ii.104; Dhp-a i.205 -tthena a perfume-thief SN i.204; -dhātu the (sensory element of smell Dhs 585; Dhs 625. 707 (in conn. w. ˚āyatana); -pañcaṅgulika see sep.; -sañcetanā the olfactory sensation; together with ˚saññā perception of odours DN iii.244; AN iv.147; AN v.359; -sannidhi the storing up of scented unguents DN i.6 (= DN-a i.82).
Vedic gandha, from ghrā ghrāti to smell, ghrāna smell, & see P. ghāna. Possibly conn. w. Lat. fragro E. fragrant
see gandhina.
1. a musician, a singer Ja ii.249 sq.; Ja iii.188; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 137.
2. a Gandharva or heavenly musician, as a class (see ˚kāyika) belonging to the demigods who inhabit the Cātummahārājika realm DN ii.212; AN ii.39 (as birds); iv.200 (with asurā & nāgā), 204, 207; cp. SN iii.250 sq.; also said to preside over child-conception: MN i.265 sq.; Mil 123 sq.
-kāyika belonging to the company of the G. SN iii.250 sq.; Pv-a 119; -mānusā (pl.) G. & men Dhp 420; Snp 644; -hatthaka “a G ■ hand,” i.e. a wooden instrument in the shape of a bird’s claw with which the body was rubbed in bathing Vin ii.106, see Vin. Texts iii.67.
Vedic gandharva
(f.) music, song Ja ii.254; Vv-a 139; Mil 3; ˚ṃ karoti to make music Ja ii.249; Ja iii.188.
(adj.) belonging to the Gandhāra country (Kandahar) f. gandhārī in gandhārī vijjā Name of a magical charm DN i.213; at Ja iv.498 it renders one invisible.
(and ˚uja Pv ii.120; ii.121)
1. having perfume, fragrant, scentful, Ja i.266 (su˚); Pv ii.110 (= surabhigandha); ii.121 (sogandhiya); Vv-a 58 (read gandhikāgandhikehi).
2. dealing in perfume, a perfumer Mil 262 (cp. gandhin 2).
(adj.) 1. having a scent of, smelling of (-˚), i.e. candana˚ of sandal wood Ja iii.190; gūtha of˚ faeces Pv ii.315 (= karīsavāyinī Pv-a).
2. dealing with scents a perfumer Pv-a 127 (= māgadha; cp. gandhika 2).
in kule antimagandhina Ja iv.34 (expl. by sabbapacchimaka) and gandhana in kula-gandhana Iti 64 see under kula˚.
(adj.) proud, arrogant Ja ii.340 (˚bhāva = issariya); iii.264 (˚sabhāva = dittasabhāva); Sum. V. on DN iii.153 (= avamata).
1. interior, cavity (loc. gabbhe in the midst of: angāra˚ Ja iii.55); an inner room, private chamber, bedroom, cell. Of a Vihāra Vin ii.303; Vin iii.119; Vin iv.45; Vv-a 188; Vv-a 220 ■ Ja i.90 (siri˚ royal chamber); iii.276; Vv 785 (= ovaraka Vv-a 304); Dhp-a i.397; Mil 10, Mil 295. See also anto˚. 2. the swelling of the (pregnant) womb, the womb (cp kucchi). ˚ṃ upeti to be born Dhp 325 = Thag 17 Ne 34, Ne 129; ˚ṃ upapajjati to be born again Dhp 126 gabbhā gabbhaṃ… dukkaṃ nigacchanti from womb to womb (i.e. from birth to birth) Snp 278; gabbhato paṭṭhāya from the time of birth Ja i.290, Ja i.293. As a symbol of defilement g. is an ep. of kāma AN iv.289, etc
3. the contents of the womb, i.e. the embryo foetus: dasa māse ˚ṃ kucchinā pariharitvā having nourished the foetus in the womb for 10 months DN ii.14 dibbā gabbhā DN i.229; on g. as contained in kucchi foetus in utero, see Ja i.50 (kucchimhi patiṭṭhito) 134 ii.2; iv.482; MN i.265; Mil 123 (gabbhassa avakkanti); Dhp-a i.3, Dhp-a i.47; Dhp-a ii.261 ■ Pv i.67; Pv-a 31; gabbho vuṭṭhāsi the child was delivered Vin ii.278; itthi-gabbho & purisa˚ female & male child Ja i.51; gabbhaṃ pāteti to destroy the foetus Vin ii.268; apagatagabbhā (adj. having had a miscarriage Vin ii.129; mūḷha-gabbhā id. MN ii.102 (+ visatā˚); paripuṇṇa-gabbhā ready to be delivered Ja i.52; Pv-a 86; saññi˚ a conscious foetus DN i.54 = MN i.518 = SN iii.212; sannisinna-gabbhā having conceived Vin ii.278.
-avakkanti (gabbhe okkanti Nd ii.3041) conception DN iii.103, DN iii.231; Vism 499, Vism 500 (˚okkanti); this is followed by gabbhe ṭhiti & gabbhe vuṭṭhāna, see Nd;2; -āsaya the impurities of childbirth Pv iii.53 (= ˚mala) -karaṇa effecting a conception Snp 927; -gata leaving the womb, in putte gabbhagate when the child was born Pv-a 112; -dvāra the door of the bed-chamber Ja i.62; -pariharaṇa = next Vism 500; -parihāra “the protection of the embryo,” a ceremony performed when a woman became pregnant Ja ii.2; Dhp-a i.4; -pātana the destruction of the embryo, abortion, an abortive preparation Vin iii.83 sq.; Pv i.66 (akariṃ); Pv-a 31 (dāpesi); Dhp-a i.47 (˚bhesajja); -mala the uncleanness of delivery, i.e. all accompanying dirty matter Pv-a 80, Pv-a 173 (as food for Petas), 198; Dhp-a iv.215; -vīsa in ahañc’ amhi gabbhavīso “I am 20 years, counting from my conception” Vin i.93; -vuṭṭhāna (nt.) childbirth delivery Ja i.52; Dhp-a i.399; Dhp-a ii.261; -seyyā (f.) the womb; only in expressions relating to reincarnation as: na punar eti (or upeti) gabbhaseyyaṃ “he does not go into another womb,” of an Arahant Snp 29, Snp 152 Snp 535; Vv 5324; and gabbhaseyyaka (adj.) one who enters another womb Vb 413 sq.; Vism 272, Vism 559, Vism 560 Bdhd 77, 78.
Vedic garbha, either to *gelbh, as in Lat. galba, Goth. kalbo, Ohg. kalba, E. calf, or *gṷe bh, as in Gr.δελφύς womb, αδελφός sharing the womb, brother δέλφας young pig; cp. *gelt in Goth. kilpei womb. Ags cild, Ger. kind, E. child. Meaning: a cavity, a hollow or, seen from its outside, a swelling
(nt.) a cavern Snp 416 (giri˚); Vv 635 (giri˚).
Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. gahvara
(adj. f.) pregnant, enceinte Vin ii.268; SN iii.202; Ja i.151, Ja i.290; Ja iv.37; Pv i.66; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 82: Vv-a 110 (-bhāva); in combn g˚ pāyamānā purisantaragatā (pregnant, lactating & having had sex. intercourse AN i.295 = AN ii.206 = MN i.77, MN i.238, MN i.307, MN i.342 = Pp 55; with utunī anutunī (menstruating & having ceased to menstruate) AN iii.226 sq.
1. adj. going, able to go; going to, leading to; in vihangama going in the air Snp 221, Snp 606; Th i.1108; Ja i.216 (cp. gamana); aghasi˚ id. Vv 161 (= vehāsaṃ Vv-a 78); nabhasi˚ going on clouds Snp 687; nibbāna leading to N. SN v.11; dūraṃ˚ going far, hadayaṃ˚ going to one’s heart, q.v.
2. m. course, going to; in atthaṃ going home, going to rest, etc., q.v.
1. (nt.) the fact or the state of going, movement, journey, walk; (-˚) striving for, the leading of, pursuit AN ii.48 sq. (gamanena na pattabbo lokass’ anto = one cannot walk to the end of the world); Dhp 178 (saggassa going to heaven); Snp 40, Snp 691, cp. vāraṃ˚; Ja i.62; Ja i.216 (in expl. of vihaṃgama: (ākāse) gamanato pakkhī vihaṃ gamā ti vuccanti); 295; Pv-a 57 ■ pahiṇa˚ going on messages DN i.5, etc.; agati˚ wrong pursuit, ˚ṃ gacchati to pursue a wrong walk of life AN ii.18; Pv-a 161; magga tramping, being on the road Pv-a 43; saraṇa˚ finding shelter (in the Dhamma) Pv-a 49.
2. (adj.) (-˚) going or leading to, conducive to: nibbāna˚ maggo the Path leading to Nibbāna SN i.186; Dhp 289; duggati˚ magga the road to misery Thig 355; duggamana-ṭṭhānā (pl. inaccessible places Pv-a 102 (in expl. of duggā).
-antarāya an obstacle to one’s departure Ja i.62 -āgamana going & coming, rise and set Vv 83;6 (= ogamanuggamana Vv-a 326); Dhp-a i.80 (˚kāle); ˚sampanna senāsana a dwelling or lodging fit for going and coming, i.e. easily accessible AN v.15; Ja i.85; ˚ṃ karoti to go to and fro Vv-a 139. -kamma going away Dhp-a ii.81. -kāraṇa a reason for or a means to going, in ˚ṃ karoti to try to go Ja i.2; -bhāva the state of having gone away Ja ii.133; -magga (pleonastic) the way Ja i.202; Ja i.279; -vaṇṇa the praise of his course or journey Ja i.87.
(adj.; grd to gam ) 1. as grd. to gacchati: (a place where one) ought to go; in a˚ not to be gone to (+ ṭhāna) Vv-a 72.
2. as grd. to gameti: in bhogā pahāya gamanīyā (riches that have) to be given up (by leaving) Kp viii.8 (see expl. as Kp-a 223); Pv-a 87 (= kālikā, transient).
(and gamiya Ja i.87) (adj.) going away, setting out for a journey (opp. āgantuka coming back) appl. to bhikkhus only: Vin i.292 (˚ bhatta food for outgoing bh.); ii.170 (āgantuka˚), 211, 265; v.196; Ja vi.333 (āgantuka˚). See also under abhisankhāra. Cp. Av Ś i.87; Divy 50.
(adj.) being on a “gati,” only at Snp 587 in “aññe pi passe gamine yathākamm’ ûpage nare.”
to make go, to send, to set into motion, to cause to go Iti 115 (anabhāvaṃ to destroy) see under gacchati.
caus. of gacchati
(adj.) deep, profound, unfathomable, well founded, hard to perceive difficult ■ (a) lit. of lakes: Dhp 83; Pv ii.119 (= agādha) Pp 46; of a road (full of swamps) Ja i.196 ■ (b) fig of knowledge & wisdom: dhammo g. duddaso… MN i.487; SN i.136; Tathāgato g. appameyyo duppariyogāho MN i.487; parisā g. (opp. uttāna, shallow, superficial thoughtless) AN i.70; g. ṭhāna w. ref. jhāna, etc Pts ii.21; saddhamma g. Sdhp. 530; g. gūḷha nipuṇa Nd 342; lokanātho nipuṇo g. Pv-a 1; also w. nipuṇa Ja vi.355; Mil 234; Bdhd. 118, 137 ■ (nt.) the deep deep ground, i.e. secure foundation Snp 173; Kp viii.1 Kp viii.3 (see Kp-a 217).
-avabhāsa (adj.) having the appearance of depth or profundity, DN ii.55; SN ii.36; Pp 46 (+ uttāna), cp Pp A 226; -pañña one whose wisdom is profound Snp 176, Snp 230; Snp 627 = Dhp 403 (+ medhāvin) cp. Dhp-a iv.169 & see Ps; ii.192 for detailed explanation; -sita resting on depth (of soil), well-founded AN iv.237.
Vedic gambhīra & gabhīra
(f.) depth Dhp-a i.92.
abstr. fr. prec.
(adj.) of or belonging to the village, common, pagan (cp. Fr. villain), always combd with hīna, low & pagan Vin i.10 and ≈ (anta standard of life); AN iii.325 (dassana, view); DN iii.130 (sukhallikânuyoga, hedonist) Sdhp 254. Cp. pothujjanika
fr. gāma. Vedic gramya
(adj.) to be taken, to be seized, as nt, the grip, in gayhūpaga (adj.) for being taken up, for common use Snp-a 283 ■ (nt.) that which comes into one’s grasp, movable property, acquisition of property Dhp-a ii.29; Dhp-a iii.119; Pv-a 4. As gayhūpakaṃ at Ja iv.219.
grd. of gayhati; Vedic grāhya
(adj. = gayha) one who is to be taken (prisoner), in ˚niyyamāna id. SN i.143 = Ja iii.361 (expl. as karamaragāhaṃ gahetvā niyyamāna; cp. karamara).
to get seized, to be taken (see gaṇhāti); p.pres. gayhamāna being caught Dhp-a iii.175 (˚ka) ■ grd. gayha.
Pass. to gaṇhāti
(adj.) finding fault with, rebuking; in paṭhavī˚ āpa˚, etc., combd w. paṭhavī-jigucchaka, etc. (disgusted w. the great elements) MN i.327.
(nt.) reproof Vv-a 16, as f. ˚ṇā at Vism 29.
to reproach, to blame, scold, censure, find fault with: agarahiyam mā garahittha “do not blame the blameless” SN i.240; DN i.161 (tapaṃ to reject, disapprove of); DN iii.92, DN iii.93 (aor. garahi, grd. garahitabba); Snp 313, Snp 665; Mil 222 (+ jigucchanti); Pv-a 125, Pv-a 126; Sdhp. 382 ■ pp garahita blameworthy Dhp 30 (pamādo); Snp 313; Ja v.453; Mil 288 (dasa puggalā g.). agarahita blameless faultless Pv-a 89 (= anindita, 131) ■ See also gārayha & cp. vi˚.;
Vedic garhati Dhtp 340 nindāyaṃ
(f.) blame, reproach DN i.135 “stating an example,” see DA i.296; DN iii.92, DN iii.93; Snp 141; Ja i.10 (garahapaṭicchādanabhāva preventing all occasion for finding fault); 132 (garaha-bhaya-bhīta for fear of blame), 135 (garahatthe as a blame); Ne 184.
(adj.) blaming, censuring Snp 660 (ariya˚), 778 (atta˚), 913 (anatta˚); Mil 380 (pāpa˚).
1. adj. (a) lit. heavy, opp. lahu light, appl;d to bhāra, a load SN iii.26; Ja i.196 (= bhārika); vi.420; Dhp-a i.48; Sdhp 494 (rūpagarubhāra the heavy load of “form”). Compar. garutara (as against Sk. garīyaṃ Pv-a 191 ■ (b) fig. important, to be esteemed, valued or valuable AN iii.110 sq. (piya manāpa g. bhavanīya) c. gen. or-˚ bent on (often in sequence ˚garu, ˚ninna ˚poṇa, etc., e.g. Vism 135); pursuing, paying homage to, reverent; (or) esteemed by, honoured, venerated Satthugaru esteeming the Lord; Dhamma˚, Sanghe g. AN iii.331 = AN iv.28 sq.; dosa˚ SN i.24; kodha˚, saddhamma˚ (pursuing, fostering) AN ii.46 sq. = 84 sq. Sdhp 1 (sabba-loka˚ worshipped by all the world) Dpvs iv.12 ■ agaru (c. gen.) irreverent towards Snp p.51 (Gotamassa). Cp. garuka, gārava; also agaru agalu.
2. N. a venerable person, a teacher: garunaṃ dassanāya & sakāsaṃ Snp 325, Snp 326 (v.l. garūnaṃ to be preferred, so also Snp-a 332, Snp-a 333); garūnaṃ dārā Iti 36-garukaroti (for garuṃ k˚) to esteem, respect, honour usually in series sakkaroti g˚ māneti pūjeti Vin ii.162; MN i.31; DN i.91; AN iii.76; AN iv.276; Nd ii.334 (on namati) 530 (on yasassin); Pv-a 54. Expl. at DN-a i.256 by gāravaṃ karoti. -garukātabba worthy of esteem Pv-a 9 ■ garukāra (sakkāra g. mānana vandana esteem, honour, regard Pp 19 = Dhs 1121 ■ See also guru.
-upanissita (adj.) depending on a teacher, one being taught Pts ii.202; -ṭṭhāniya one who takes the place of a teacher AN iii.21, AN iii.393; Ne 8; Vism 344. -dhamma a rule to be observed. There are 8 chief rules enum at Vin ii.255 = AN iv.276, AN iv.280; see also Vin iv.51, Vin iv.315 Vin v.136. Taken in the sense of a violation of these rules Vin i.49 = Vin ii.226; Vin i.52, Vin i.143, Vin i.144; Vin ii.279; -nissaya in ˚ṃ gaṇhāti to take up dependency on a teacher, i.e. to consider oneself a pupil Vin ii.303; -saṃvasa association with a teacher Nd ii.235 Nd ii.4˚; Mil 408.
Vedic guru; Gr. βαρύς, Lat. gravis & brutus, Goth. kaurus
somewhat heavy.
1. lit. Ja i.134 (of the womb in pregnancy); Dhp 310; Mil 102. Usually coupled & contrasted with; lahuka, light: in def. of sense of touch Dhs 648; similarly w. sithila, dhanita dīgha, rassa Mil 344; DN-a i.177 (in expl. of dasavidha vyañjana).
2. fig. (a) heavy, grave, serious esp. appld to- āpatti, breach of regulations, offence (opp. lahuka Vin v.115, Vin v.130, Vin v.145, Vin v.153; Dhp 138 (ābādha, illness) appld to kamma at Vism 601 (one of the four kinds) nt. as adv. considerably Mil 92 (˚ṃ parinamati). (b) important, venerable, worthy of reverence Thig 368 (Satthu sāsana = garukātabba Thag-a 251); Mil 140 ■ (c)-˚ “heavy on,” bent on, attaching importance to: nahāna˚ fond of bathing Vin i.196; tadattha engaged in (jhāna) Nd ii.264; kamma˚ attributing importance to k. Nd ii.411; saddhamma˚ revering the Doctrine Sdhp. 520. Nibbāna-garuka Vism 117 (+ Nâdhimutta & N-pabbhāra).;
-āpatti a grievous offence, see above. As terasa g-˚ino at Mil 310.
from garu
(nt.) the fact of being honoured or considered worthy of esteem, honourableness AN v.164 sq.
. Name of a mythical bird, a harpy Pts ii.196 = Nd ii.235, Nd ii.3 q.; Vism 206; Vv-a 9 (= supaṇṇa) Dhp-a i.144.
Derivation uncertain. Sk. garuḍa, Lat. volucer winged, volo to fly
the throat Ja i.216, Ja i.264 Ja iii.26; Ja iv.494: i.194 (a dewlap); Pv-a 11, Pv-a 104.
-agga the top of the throat Sdhp 379; -ajjhoharaniya able to be swallowed (of solid food) Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875 -ggaha taking by the throat, throttling DN i.144 (+ daṇḍapahāra); -nāḷī the larynx Dhp-a i.253; Dhp-a ii.257 -ppamāṇa (adj.) going up to the neck Ja i.264 (āvāṭa) -pariyosāṇa forming the end of the throat Ja iii.126 -ppavedhaka (nt.) pain in the throat MN i.371; -mūla the bottom of the throat Pv-a 283. -vāṭaka the bottom (?) of the throat (oesophagus?) Vism 185, Vism 258.
Note.- gala with many other words containing a guttural + liquid element belongs to the onomatopoetic roots k̥l g̥l (k̥r g̥r), usually reduplicated (iterative), the main applications of which are the following:
1. The (sounding) throat in designation of swallowing, mostly with a dark (guttural) vowel: gulp, belch gargle, gurgle.
2. The sound produced by the throat (voice) or sound in general, particularly of noises or sounds either inarticulate, confused & indefinable or natural sounds striking enough; per se to form a sufficient means of recognition (i.e. name) of the animal which utters this sound (cuckoo, e.g. ). To be divided into:
A. palatal group (“light” sounds): squeak, yell giggle, etc., applied to-(a) Animate Nature: the cackling, crowing noise of Palmipeds & related birds reminding of laughter (heron, hen, cock; cp. P. koñca Lat. gallus)-(b) Inanimate Nature: the grinding nibbling, trickling, dripping, fizzing noises or sounds (P. galati, etc.).
B. guttural group (“dark” sounds): groan, growl howl, etc., appld to-(a) Animate N.: the snorting grunting noise of the Pachyderms & related quadrupeds (elephant, op. P. koñca, kuñjara; pig, boar)-(b) Inanimate N.: the roaring, crashing, thundering noises (P gaḷagaḷāyati, ghurughurāyati).
3. The sound as indicating motion (produced by motion):
A. palatal group (“sharp” sounds, characteristic of quick motion: whizz, spin, whirl): P. gaggaraka whirlpool Gr. κερκίς spindle, bobbin.
B. guttural group (“dull” sounds, characteristic of slow and heavy motion: roll, thud, thunder). Sometimes with elimination of the sound-element appld to swelling & fullness, as in “bulge” or Gr. σφαραγέω (be full).
These three categories are not always kept clearly separate, so that often a palatal group shifts into the sphere of a guttural one & vice versa ■ The formation of k̊l gI̊ roots is by no means an extinct process nor is it restricted to any special branch of a linguistic; family, as examples show. The main roots of Idg origin are the foll. which are all represented in Pāli (the categories are marked acc. to the foregoing scheme 1, 2A, 2B, 3): kal (2A): κλάζω, clango, Goth. hlahjan laugh; kār (2 A): κ ̈ηρυς, Sk. kāru (cp. P. kitti) cārmen; kel (2 A): κέλαδος, calo (cp. P. kandati) Ohg. hellan; ker (2 Aa): καρκαίρω, κόρκορος = querquedula = kakkara (partridge); kol (2 B): cuculus kokila (a); kolāhala and halāhala (b); kor (2 Ba) cornix (cp. P. kāka), corvus = crow = raven; Sk. krośati P. koñca ■ gṷel (1) Lat. gula, glutio, δέλεαρ; gṷer (1) βόρος, βιβρώσκω, Lat. voro, Sk. girati, Ohg querka; (3) βάραχρον (whirlpool) Sk. gargara: gel (1) Sk. gilati, Ohg. kela- gal (2 A): gallus (a) gloria (b); gar (2 Ab): γ ̈ηρυς, garrulus, Ohg. kara: gel (2 A) ξελιδών (a) hirrio (to whine), Ohg. gellan (b): ger (1) γαργαρίζω (gargle) Sk. gharghara (gurgling) (2 Aa) γέρανος = crane, Ger. krähen, Lat. gracillo (cackle); (2 Ba) Ohg. kerran (grunt), Sk. gṛṇāti (sing) (2 Ab) Sk. jarate (rustle); gur (2 Ba): γρύζω = grundio grunt; Lat. gurgulio; Sk. ghurghura.
With special reference to Pāli formations the foll list shows a few sound roots which are further discussed in the Dictionary s. v. Closely connected with Idg. k̊l gI̊ is the Pāli cerebral ṭ, tḥ, ḷ, ṇ, so that roots with these sounds have to be classed in a mutual relation with the liquids. In most cases graphic representation varies between both (cp. gala & gaḷa)-; kil (kiṇ) (2 Ab): kikī (cp. Sk. kṛka˚), kilikilāyati & kinkiṇāyati (tinkle) kili (click), kinkaṇika (bell); kur (2 B): ākurati to hawk to be hoarse; khaṭ; (1) khaṭakhaṭa (hawking) kākacchati (snore); (2 Aa) kukkuṭa (cock); gal (1) gala (throat) uggilati (vomit); (2 Ab) galati (trickle): (2 Ba Pk. galagajjiya (roar) & guluguliya (bellow); (2 Bb gaḷagaḷāyati (roar); gar (2 A); gaggara (roar & cackle cp. Sk. gargara to 3); (2 B); gaggarāyati (roar); (3) gaggaraka (whirlpool); ghar (1) Sk. gharghara (gurgling) (2 Ab) gharati (trickle), Sk. ghargharikā (bell); (2 Bb ghurughurāyati (grunt) ■ See also kakaca, kanka kankaṇa, cakora (cankora), cakkavaka, jagghati, ciṭiciṭāyati taṭataṭayati, timingala, papphāsa.
*gel to devour, to swallow = Lat. gula, Ohg. kela, cp. Sk. gala jalukā, and *gṷel, as Gr. δέλεαρ, cp. also Sk. girati, gilati Dhtp 262 gives as meaning of gal “adana.” This root gal also occurs at Vism 410 in fanciful def. of “puggala”; the meaning here is not exactly sure (to cry, shout?)
(nt.) throat Ja iii.481; Ja iv.251.
1. a drop, i.e. a fall: see gaḷāgala.
2. a swelling, a boil (= gaṇḍa Ja iv.494 (mattā gajā bhinnagaḷā elephants in rut, with the temple-swellings broken; expl. p. 497 by madaṃ gaḷantā); Snp 61 (? v.l. gaṇḍa).
3. a hook, a fishhook Snp 61 (?), expl. at Snp-a 114 by ākaḍḍhanavasena baḷiso.
gaḷāgaḷaṃ gacchati to go from drop to drop, i.e. from fall to fall, w. ref. to the gatis Ja v.453 (expl. by apāyaṃ gacchati).
same as gala, see note on prec.
to roar, to crash, to thunder; deve gaḷagaḷāyate (loc. abs.) in a thunderstorm, usually as deve vassante deve g˚; amidst rain and heavy thunder DN ii.132; SN i.106; AN v.114 sq (gala˚); Thag 189; Mil 116 (gaganaṃ ravati galag˚) Kp-a 163 (mahāmegha) ■ Gangā galagalantī the roaring Gangā Mil 122 (cp. halāhalasadda ibid.).
= gaggarāyati, see note on gala
(and galati) [Sk. galati, cp. Ohg. quellan to well up, to flow out; see note on gala and cp. also jala water 1. to drip, flow, trickle (trs. & intr.) Vin i.204 (natthu g.); MN i.336 (sīsaṃ lohitena gaḷati); Ja iv.497 (madaṃ) iv.3 (lohitaṃ g.); v.472 (do. v.l. paggharati); Pv iv.53 (assukāni g.).
2. to rain Thag 524 (deve gaḷantamhi in a shower of rain. Cp. gala-gaḷāyati).
3. to drop down, to fall Dhp-a ii.146 (suriyo majjhaṭṭhānato galito)-Cp. pari˚.
to drip, to drop, in assukāni g. to shed tears Snp 691.
denom. to gaḷa in sense of gaḷati 1
rough, in a˚ smooth Ja v.203, Ja v.206 (+ mudu & akakkasa); vi.64.
(f.). Name of a shrub (Cocculus cordifolius); in gaḷocilatā Dhp-a iii.110; a creeper. Cp. pūtilatā.
base of the N. go, a bull, cow, used in cpds. See gāv˚, go.
-akkha a kind of window Mvu 9. 15, 17; -āghātana slaughtering of cows Vin i.182 ■ âssa cows & horses Vin v.350; DN i.5~; Snp 769; -caṇḍa fierce towards cows Pp 47; -pāna milky rice pudding Ja i.33-(˚m)pati “lord of cows,” a bull Snp 26, Snp 27 (usabha).
furnished with netting (?) (Hardy in Index) Vv-a 276, of a carriage (= suvaṇṇajālavitata).
see gavaya.
(and gavaja) a species of ox, the gayal Ja v.406. (˚ja = khagga) Mil 149; Dhs-a 331.
Sk. gavaya, cp. gavala, buffalo
a tree-like creeper, in -pphala the fruit of a g. Snp 239 (= rukkhavalliphala Snp-a).
(adj. fr. next) looking for, seeking Ja i.176 (kāraṇa˚); ii.3 (aguṇa˚).
to seek, to search for, to wish for, strive after Dhp 146 (gavessatha), 153; Thag 183; Nd ii.2, Nd ii.70, Nd ii.427; Ja i.4, Ja i.61; Mil 326; Pv-a 187, Pv-a 202 (aor. gavesi = vicini); Bdhd 53 In Nd ii.always in combn esati gavesati pariyesati.
gava + esati. Vedic gaveṣate. Origin. to search after cows. Dhtp 298 = maggana tracking
search for Pv-a 185.
(adj.) seeking, looking for, striving after (usually -˚) DN i.95 (tāṇa˚, etc.); Dhp 99 (kāma˚), 245 (suci˚), 355 (pāra˚); Nd ii.503 (in expl. of mahesi, with esin pariyesin); Bdhd 59.
at Dhs-a 324 is to be corrected into dassetuṃ.
a house, usually in cpds. (see below). Ja iii.396 (= the layman’s life; Com. geha).
-kāraka a house-builder, metaph. of taṇhā (cp. kāya as geha) Dhp 153, Dhp 154 = Thag 183, Thag 184; Dhp-a iii.128 -kūṭa the peak of a house, the ridge-pole, metaph. of ignorance Dhp 154 (= kaṇṇika-maṇḍala Dhp-a 128) replacing thūṇirā (pillar) at Thag 184 in corresp passage (= kaṇṇikā Com.); -ṭṭha a householder one who leads the life of a layman (opp anagāra, pabbajita or paribbājaka) Vin i.115 (sagahaṭṭhā parisā an assembly in which laymen were present); SN i.201; AN iii.114, AN iii.116, AN iii.258; It. 112 (gharaṃ esino gahaṭṭhā) Dhp 404 = Snp 628; Snp 43 (gharaṃ āvasanto, see Nd ii.226 for explanation), 90, 134 (paribbājaṃ gahaṭṭhaṃ vā) 398, 487; Sdhp 375. -˚vatta a layman’s rule of conduct Snp 393 (= agāriyā paṭipadā Snp-a 376) -˚ka belonging to a layman; acting as a layman or in the quality of a l. AN ii.35 (kinkaraṇiyāni) iii.296 (brahmacariyā); -pati see sep.
see under gaṇhāti
“seizer,” seizing, grasping, a demon, any being or object having a hold upon man. So at SN i.208 where Sānu is “seized by an epileptic fit (see note in K.S. i.267, 268). Used of dosa (anger) Dhp 251 (exemplified at Dhp-a iii.362 by ajagara˚ the grip of a boa, kumbhīla˚ of a crocodile yakkha˚ of a demon). sagaha having crocodiles, full of e. (of the ocean) (+ sarakkhasa) Iti 57. Cp. gahaṇa & saṃ˚.;
Sk. graha, gaṇhāti, q.v. for etym.
(adj.) seizing, taking; acquiring; (n.) seizure, grasp, hold, acquisition Vism 114 (in detail) usually -˚: nāma˚-divase on the day on which a child gets its name (lit. acquiring a name) Ja i.199, Ja i.262 arahatta˚ Dhp-a i.8; dussa˚ Dhp-a ii.87; maccha˚ Ja iv.139; hattha˚ Ja i.294; byanjana˚-lakkhaṇa Ne 27 gahaṇatthāya in order to get… Ja i.279; Ja ii.352. amhākaṃ g˚ sugahaṇaṃ we have a tight grip Ja i.222, Ja i.223.
fr. gaṇhāti
(f.) the “seizer,” a supposed organ of the body dealing with digestion and gestation. Sama-vepākiniyā g˚ iyā samannāgata “endowed with good digestion” DN ii.177 = DN iii.166. Same phrase at Av Ś i.168, 172. Cp. Vedic graha. B. Psy. 59, 67.
Gahaṇika in phrase saṃsuddha -gahaṇika coming from a clean womb, of pure descent, in the enum. of the indispensable good qualities of a brahmin or a noble DN i.113, DN i.115, DN i.137 (gahaṇī expl. as kucchi DN-a i.281) AN i.163, AN iii.154, AN iii.223; Snp p.115. Ja i.2; duṭṭha-gahaṇika having a bad digestion Vin i.206.
1. adj. deep, thick, impervious, only in a˚ clear, unobstructed, free from obstacles Vv 187 (akanataka + ); Mil 160 (gahanaṃ a kataṃ the thicket is cleared).
2. nt. an impenetrable place, a thicket jungle, tangle ■ (a) 18 gahanāni at Ja v.46; usually appl. to grass: tiṇa˚ AN i.153 = AN iii.128 (+ rukkha˚); Mil 369; adj. tiṇagahanā obstructed with grass (of vihārā) Vin ii.138 ■ SN i.199 (rukkhamūla˚); Ja i.7, Ja i.158; Pv-a 5 (pabbata˚), 43; Vv-a 230 (vana˚) ■ (b) fig. imperviousness, entanglement, obstruction appl. to diṭṭhi, the jungle of wrong views or heresy (usually combd w. diṭṭhi-kantāra, the wilderness of d., see diṭṭhi) MN i.8, MN i.485; Pp 22; DN-a i.108. Of rāga˚, moha˚, etc., and kilesa˚ Nd ii.630 (in expl. of Satthā; rāgagahanaṃ tāreti); Dhp-a iv.156 (on Dhp 394) Vv-a 96 ■ manussa˚ MN i.340.
-ṭṭhāna a lair in the jungle Ja i.150, Ja i.253.
Sk. gahana, cp. also ghana
the possessor of a house, the head of the household pater familias (freq. + seṭṭhi).
1. In formulas (a) as regards social standing, wealth & clanship: a man of private (i.e. not official) life, classed w. khattiyā brāhmaṇā in kh˚-mahāsālā, wealthy Nobles, brahm˚mahāsālā do. Brahmins, gah˚-m˚ well-to-do gentry SN i.71; Nd ii.135; Dhp-a i.388 ■ kh˚-kula, br˚-kula g˚-kula the kh˚, etc. clans: Vin ii.161; Ja i.218. kh˚ amaccā, br˚, g.˚ DN i.136 ■ (b) as regards education mode of life ranking with kh˚, br˚, g.˚ and samaṇā Vin i.227; AN i.66; Nd ii.235, see also cpd ■ paṇḍita. 2. Other applications: freq. in combn brāhmaṇagahapatikā priests & yeomen: see gahapatika. In comb;n w. gahapatiputta (cp. kulaputta) it comprises the members of the g. rank, clansmen of the (middle class, and implies a tinge of “respectable people” esp in addresses. So used by the Buddha in enumerating the people as gahapati vā gah˚-putto vā aññatarasmiṃ vā kule paccājāto DN i.62; MN i.344. gahapatī ca gahapatāniyo householders and their wives AN ii.57. In sg the voc. gahapati may be rendered by “Sir” (Mil 17 e.g. and freq.), & in pl. gahapatayo by “Sirs” (e.g. Vin i.227; MN i.401; AN ii.57) ■ As regards occupation all resp. businesses are within the sphere of the g., most frequently mentioned as such are seṭṭhino (see below & cp. seṭṭhi˚ Vin i.16, but also kassaka, farmer AN i.229 AN i.239 sq.; and dārukammika, carpenter AN iii.391. Var duties of a g. enum. at AN i.229, AN i.239 ■ The wealth comfortably-living position of a g. is evident from an expression like kalyāṇa-bhattiko g. a man accustomed to good food Vin ii.77 = Vin iii.160 ■ f. gahapatānī Vin iii.211, Vin iii.213 sq., 259 (always w. gahapati); Dhp-a i.376 pl. gahapatāniyo see above ■ Note. The gen. sg. of gahapati is ˚ino (Ja i.92) as well as-issa (Vin i.16; DN iii.36).
3. Single cases of gahapatis, where g almost assumes the function of a title are Anāthapiṇḍika g. Vin ii.158 sq.; SN i.56; SN ii.68; AN ii.65; Ja i.92; Pv-a 16 Meṇḍaka g. Vin i.240 sq.; Citta SN iv.281 sq.; Nakulapitā SN ii.1 sq.; Potaliya MN i.359; Sandhāna DN iii.36 sq. Hāliddikāni SN ii.9 ■ See next.
-’aggi the sacred fire to be maintained by a householder interpreted by the Buddha as the care to be bestowed on one’s children & servants AN iv.45; see enum. under aggī at AN iv.41; DN iii.217; -cīvara the robe of a householder (i.e. a layman’s robe) Vin i.280 sq.; ˚dhara wearing the householder’s (private man’s robe (of a bhikkhu) MN i.31; AN iii.391 sq.; -necayika (always with brāhmaṇa-mahāsālā) a business man of substance DN i.136; DN iii.16 sq.; -paṇḍita a learned householder Cp. above 1 (b), together w. khattiya˚, etc MN i.176, MN i.396; w. samaṇa-brāhmaṇa˚ Mil 5; -parisā a company of gahapatis (together w. khattiya˚, etc., see above) Vin i.227; MN i.72; DN iii.260; -putta a member of a g. clan DN i.62, DN i.211; MN i.344; SN iii.48, SN iii.112; Pv-a 22 -mahāsāla a householder of private means (cp. above 1 a) usually in combn with khattiya˚, etc. DN iii.258; SN i.71; SN iv.292; AN ii.86; AN iv.239; -ratana the “householder-gem” one of the seven fairy jewels of the mythical overlord. He is a wizard treasure-finder (see ratana) DN ii.16, DN ii.176; Snp p.106. Cp. Rh.D. Dialogues etc. ii.206.
gaha + pati. Vedic gṛhapati, where pati is still felt in its original meaning of “lord,” “master, implying dignity, power & auspiciousness. Cp. Sk dampati = dominus = ;δεσπότης; and pati in P. senāpati commander-in-chief, Sk. jāspati householder, Lat hospes, Obulg. gospoda = potestas, Goth. brūp-faps bride-groom, hunda-faps = senāpati. See details under pati.
(adj.-n.) belonging to the rank or grade of a householder, a member of the gentry, a man of private means (see gahapati) DN i.61 (expl. as gehassa pati ekageha-matte jeṭṭhaka DN-a i.171); Nd ii.342; Pv-a 39 Often in combn w. khattiya & brāhmaṇa: AN i.66; DN iii.44, DN iii.46, DN iii.61; & often in contrast to brāhmaṇa only brāhmaṇa-gahapatika Brahmins & Privates (priests laymen, Rh.D.; Buddh. S. p. 258) MN i.400; AN i.110 It iii.; Ja i.83, Ja i.152, Ja i.267; Pv-a 22 ■ paṇṇika g˚ “owner of a house of leaves” as nickname of a fruiterer Ja iii.21; of an ascetic Ja iv.446.
(and gahīta Dhp 311) (adj.) seized. taken, grasped DN i.16; DN-a i.107 (= ādinna, pavattita) Ja i.61; Ja iv.2; Pv-a 43 (v.l. for text gaṇhita) ■ nt a grasp, grip Dhp-a iii.175 ■ gahitakaṃ karoti to accept Vv-a 260. -duggahīta (always ˚gahīta) hard to grasp MN i.132 sq.; AN ii.147, AN ii.168; AN iii.178; Dhp 311; Ja vi.307 sq.; sugahita (sic) easy to get Ja i.222.
-bhāva (cittassa) the state of being held (back) holding back, preventing to act (generously) Dhs-a 370 (in expln of aggahitattaṃ cittassa Dhs 1122 see under ā˚).
pp. of gaṇhāti
= gāthā, in ekaṃ me gāhi gāthakaṃ “sing to me only one little verse” Ja iii.507.
demiName of gāthā
(f.) a verse, stanza, line of poetry, usually referring to an Anuṭṭhubbaṃ or a Tuṭṭhubbaṃ, & called a catuppādā gāthā, a stanza (śloka) of four half-lines AN ii.178; Ja iv.395 Def. as akkhara-padaniya-mita-ganthita-vacanaṃ at Kp-a 117. For a riddle on the word see S i.38. As a style of composition it is one of the nine Angas or divisions of the Canon (see navanga Satthu sāsana). Pl gāthā Snp 429; Ja ii.160; gāthāyo Vin i.5, Vin i.349; DN ii.157 gāthāya ajjhābhāsati to address with a verse Vin i.36 Vin i.38; Kp v. intr ■ gāthāhi anumodati to thank with (these) lines Vin i.222, Vin i.230, Vin i.246, Vin i.294, etc ■ gāthāyo gīyamāna uttering the lines Vin i.38 ■ anantaragāthā the foll. stanza Ja iv.142; Snp 251; Ja i.280; Dhp 102 (˚sataṃ).
-abhigīta gained by verses SN i.167 = Snp 81, Snp 480 (gāthāyo bhāsitvā laddhaṃ Com. cp. Ger. “ersungen”) -āvasāne after the stanza has been ended Dhp-a iii.171 -jānanaka one who knows verses Anvs. p. 35; -dvaya (nt.) a pair of stanzas Ja iii.395 sq.; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 40; -pada a half line of a gāthā Dhp 101; Kp-a 123; -sukhattaṃ in order to have a well-sounding line, metri causā, Pv-a 33.
Vedic gāthā, on dern see gāyate
depth; a hole, a dugout AN ii.107 = Pp 43 (cp. PugA 225); Sdhp 394 (˚ṃ khaṇati). Cp. gāḷha2.
Sk. gāḷha pp. of gāh, see gāhati
adj. passable, fordable in a˚ unfathomable, deep Pv-a 77 (= gambhīra). nt. a iord, a firm stand, firm ground, a safe place: gambhīre ˚ṃ vindati AN v.202. ˚ṃ esati to seek the terra firma SN i.127; similarly: ˚ṃ labhati to gain firm footing SN i.47; ˚ṃ ajjhagā SN iv.206; ˚ṃ labhate Ja vi.440 (= patiṭṭhā). Cp. o˚, paṭi˚.
Sk. gāḷha firm Dhtp 167 “paṭiṭṭhāyaṃ” cp. also Sk. gādha, fordable & see gāḷha;1
to stand fast, to be on firm ground, to have a firm footing: āpo ca paṭhavī ca tejo vāyo na gādhati “the four elements have no footing DN i.223 = SN i.15 ■ Dhamma-Vinaye gādhati “to stand fast in the Doctrine & Discipline” SN iii.59 sq.
v. der. fr. gādha2
a collection of houses, a hamlet (cp. Ger. gemeinde), a habitable place (opp. arañña: gāme vā yadi vâraññe Snp 119), a parish or village having boundaries & distinct from the surrounding country (gāmo ca gāmupacāro ca Vin i.109 Vin i.110; Vin iii.46). In size varying, but usually small distinguished from nigama, a market-town. It is the smallest in the list of settlements making up a “state (raṭṭhaṃ). See definition & description at Vin iii.46 Vin iii.200. It is the source of support for the bhikkhus, and the phrase gāmaṃ piṇḍāya carati “to visit the parish for alms” is extremely frequent.
1. a village as such Vin i.46; Ārāmika˚, Pilinda˚ Vin i.28, Vin i.29 (as Ārāmikagāmaka & Pilinda-gāmaka at Vin iii.249); Sakyānaṃ gāme janapade Lumbineyye Snp 683; Uruvela˚ Pv ii.1318; gāmo nâtikālena pavisitabbo MN i.469; ˚ṃ raṭṭhañ ca bhuñjati Snp 619, Snp 711; gāme tiṃsa kulāni honti Ja i.199 ■ Snp 386, Snp 929, Snp 978; Ja ii.153; Ja vi.366; Dhp 47, Dhp 49; Dhs 697 (suñño g.); Pv-a 73 (gāme amaccakula); 67 (gāmassa dvārasamīpena) ■ gāmā gāmaṃ from hamlet to hamlet MN ii.20; Snp 180 (with nagā nagaṃ; expl. Snp-a 216 as devagāmā devagāmaṃ), 192 (with purā puraṃ); Pv ii.1318. In the same sense gāmena gāmaṃ Nd ii.177 (with nigamena n˚, nagarena n˚., raṭṭhena r˚., janapadena j˚.).
2. grouped with nigama, a market-town: gāmanigamo sevitabbo or asevitabbo AN iv.365 sq., cp. v.101 (w. janapadapadeso)-Vin iii.25, Vin iii.184 (˚ṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya) iv.93 (piṇḍāya pavisati); gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre DN i.237; MN i.488; gāme vā nigame vā Pp 66
3. as a geographical-political unit in the constitution of a kingdom, enumd in two sets: (a) gāma-nigamarājadhāniyo Vin iii.89; AN iii.108; Nd ii.271iii; Pv ii.1318 Dhp-a i.90 ■ (b) gāma-nigama-nagara-raṭṭha-janapada Nd ii.177, Nd ii.304iii (˚bandhana), 305 (˚kathā); with the foll. variations: g. nigama nagara MN ii.33
40; g nigama janapada Snp 995; Vism 152; gāmāni nigamāni ca Snp 118 (expld by Snp-a 178: ettha ca saddena nagarāni ti pi vattabbaṃ) ■ See also dvāra˚; paccanta˚ bīja˚; bhūta˚; mātu˚.
-anta the neighbourhood of a village, its border, the village itself, in ˚nāyaka leading to the village AN iii.189 ˚vihārin (= āraññaka) living near aN v. MN i.31, MN i.473; AN iii.391 (w. nemantanika and gahapati-cīvara -dhara)-Snp 710; -antara the (interior of the) village, only in t. t. gāmantaraṃ gacchati to go into the v. Vin ii.300 & in; ˚kappa the “village-trip-licence” (Vin. Texts iii.398) ib. 294, 300; cp. iv.64, 65; v.210; -ūpacāra the outskirts of aN v. Vin i.109, Vin i.110; defined at Vin iii.46 Vin iii.200; -kathā village-talk, gossip about v ■ affairs. Included in the list of foolish talks (+ nigama˚, nagara˚ janapada˚) DN i.7 (see expln at DN-a i.90); Snp 922. See kathā; -kamma that which is to be done to, or in a village, in ˚ṃ karoti to make a place habitable Ja i.199 -kūṭa “the village-fraud,” a sycophant SN ii.258; Ja iv.177 (= kūṭavedin); -goṇā (pl.) the village cattle Ja i.194; -ghāta those who sack villages, a marauder dacoit (of corā thieves) DN i.135; SN ii.188; -ghātaka (corā = ˚ghāta SN iv.173; Mil 20; Vism 484; nt. village plundering Ja i.200. -jana the people of the v. Mil 47-ṭṭhāna in purāṇa˚ a ruined village Ja ii.102; -dārakā (pl.) the youngsters of the v. Ja iii.275; f. -dārikā the girls of the v. Pv-a 67; -dvaya, in ˚vāsika living in (these) two vs. Pv-a 77; -dvāra the v. gates, the entrance to the v. Vin iii.52; Ja ii.110, Ja ii.301; cp. Pv-a 67-dhamma doings with women-folk (cp. mātugāma), vile conduct DN i.4≈(+ methuna) AN i.211; Ja ii.180 (= vasaladhamma); Vv-a 11; DN-a i.72 (= gāma-vāsīnaṃ dhamma?); -poddava (v.l. kāmapudava) a shampooer (? Vin. Texts iii.66; Bdhgh explains: kāmapudavā ti chavi-rāga-maṇḍanânuyuttā nāgarikamanussā gāmaṃ podavā ti pi pādho es’ ev’ attho, Vin ii.315; Vin ii.105; -bhojaka the village headman Ja i.199; Dhp-a i.69; -majjhe in the midst of the v. Ja i.199 Ja vi.332; -vara an excellent v. SN i.97; Ja i.138; -vāsin the inhabitant of aN v. Ja ii.110; Ja v.107; DN-a i.72; -saññā the thought of aN v. MN iii.104; -samīpe near aN v. Ja i.254 -sahassa a thousand parishes (80,000 under the rule of King Bimbisāra) Vin i.179; -sāmanta in the neighbourhood of aN v., near aN v. DN i.101; (+ mgama˚) -sīmā the boundary of the parish Vin i.110 (+ nigama˚) -sūkara a village pig Ja iii.393.
Vedic grāma, heap, collection, parish; *grem to comprise; Lat. gremium; Ags. crammian (E. cram) Obulg. gramada (village community) Ohg. chram; cp *ger in Gr. ἀγειρω, ἀγορά, Lat, grex.
1. = gāma Vin i.208; Ja i.199 (Macala˚), 253; iv.431 (cora˚); Pv-a 67 (Iṭṭhakāvatī and Dīgharājī) Dhp-a ii.25 (dvāra˚).
2. a villager Ja v.107 (= gāmavāsin).
-āvāsa an abode in a village Pv-a 12; Vv-a 291.
= gāmaṇi SN i.61; AN iii.76 (pūga˚).
(m.) the head of a company, a chief, a village headman Vin ii.296 (Maṇicūḷaka). Title of the G. Saṃyutta (Book VIII. of the Saḷāyatana-Vagga) SN iv.305 sq.; & of the G ■ Jātaka Ja i.136, Ja i.137 ■ SN iv.306 (Talapuṭa naṭa˚), 308 (yodhājīvo g.), 310 (hatthāroho g.), 312 (Asibandhakaputta), 330 (Rāsiya).
“the round of the ox,” like the oxen driven round & round the threshing-floor Thag 1143 ■ Cp gomaṇḍala (s.v. go).;
1. a governor of a village, overseer of a parish Vin i.179; AN iii.76, AN iii.78, AN iii.300 (in series w. raṭṭhika pettanika, senāpatika, pūgagamaṇika).
2. [to gam ] adj. going wandering, travelling (-˚) Ja ii.112.
to gāma
(adj.) f. ˚iṇī, in composition ˚gāmi˚ ■ (a) going, walking, lit.: sīgha˚ walking quickly Snp 381 ■ (b) leading to, making for, usually with magga or paṭipadā (gāminī), either lit. Pāṭaliputtagāmi-magga the road to P. Mil 17; or fig. of ways means connected w. one of the “gatis.” as apāya Dhp-a iii.175, udaya˚ paṭipadā SN v.361; nibbāna dhamma Snp 233; amata-gāmi-magga SN v.8; udayatthagāmiṇī paññā AN v.15; dukkhanirodha˚ paṭipadā Vin i.10; cp. ācaya˚ Dhs 584. 1013. Acc. ˚gāminaṃ khemaṃ Amata˚ MN i.508; brahmacariyaṃ: nibbān ogadha˚ Iti 28, Iti 29; dukkhûpasama˚ maggaṃ Snp 724; Dhp 191; niraya˚ maggaṃ Snp 277, Thag-a 243. Or ˚gāmiṃ Snp 233, Snp 381.
from gacchati, gam
(adj.) belonging to a village in sa˚; of the same v., a clansman SN i.36 = SN i.60 (+ sakhā).
a singer Pv-a 3 (naṭaka˚).
fr. next
to sing, to recite, often comb w. naccati to dance; ppr. gāyanto, gāyamāna & gīyamāna (Vin i.38); imper. gāhi (J iii.507); fut. gāyissati grd. gāyitabba. Vin ii.108 (dhammaṃ), 196 (gāthaṃ) Snp 682 (g˚ ca vādayanti ca); Ja i.290 (gītaṃ); iii.507 (naccitvā gāyitvā); Vism 121 (aor. gāyi); Pv-a 151 Cp. gāthā, gīta, geyya.
Vedic gai, gāyate
(nt.) singing Vv-a 315 (naccana + ).
(adj.) contemptible, low Vin iii.186; Vin iv.176 sq.; 242; v.149; MN i.403; AN ii.241 (kammaṃ pādaṃ gārayhaṃ mosallaṃ); Snp 141; Ne 52; Snp-a 192. a˚; not to be blamed Ja vi.200 (spelt aggarayha).
grd. of garahati
(m. and nt.) [cp. Sk. gaurava, fr. garu] reverence, respect, esteem; with loc. respect for reverence towards; in the set of six venerable objects Buddhe [Satthari], Dhamme, Sanghe, sikkhāya, appamāde paṭisanthāre Vin v.92 = DN iii.244. As 7 gāravā (the 6 + samānhi) in adj. a˚; and sa˚; at AN iv.84 (see below) DN iii.284; Snp 265; Vism 464 (atta˚ & para˚). Expl;d Kp-a 144 by garubhāvo; often in combn with bahumāna Pv-a 135 (= pūjā), sañjāta-g˚-bahumāna (adj. Pv-a 50; Vv-a 205. Instr. gāravena out of respect respectfully DN ii.155; Ja i.465. Appld to the terms of address bhante & bhaddante Pv-a 33, Pv-a 121, & āyasmā (see cpd. ˚adhivacana) ■; agārava (m. nt.) disrespect Vin v.92 (six: as above); Ja i.217; Pv-a 54 ■ As adj. in sagārava and agārava full of reverence toward (with loc.) & disrespectful; DN iii.244 (six g.); AN iv.84 (seven) MN i.469; combd with appatissa & sappatissa (obedient AN iii.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 340. Also in tibba-gārava full of keen respect (Satthu-garu Dhamma-garu Sanghe ca tibba-gārava, etc.) AN iii.331 = AN iv.28 sq.
-ādhivacana a title of respect, a reverential address Nd ii.466 (with ref. to Bhagavā), cp. sagārava sappaṭissâdhivacana Nd ii.130 (āyasmā).
later
reverence, respect, in Satthu˚, Dhamma˚, etc. AN iii.330 sq., 423 sq.; iv.29 (ottappa˚).
Der. fr. gārava
(adj.) 1. [cp. gādha1] strong, tight, close; thick. In phrase pacchābāhaṃ g˚ bandbanaṃ bandhati to pinion the arms tightly DN i.245; AN ii.241; Ja i.264; Pv-a 4. Of an illness (gāḷhena rogâtankena phuṭṭha) AN ii.174 sq.; appld to poison smeared on an arrow MN i.429 ■ gālhaṃ & gālhakaṃ (adv.) tightly Ja i.265, Ja i.291 ■ agāḷha (? prob. to be read āgāḷha ) (of vacana, speech, combd with pharusa) strong (?) Pp 32 (expl by Com. atigāḷha thaddha), cp. 2. and gaḷita. 2. [cp. gādha1 deep Ja i.155 (˚vedhin, piercing); Mil 370 (ogāhati). Cp. ajjhogāḷha, atigāḷha, ogāḷha, nigāḷhita pagāḷha.
cp. Sk. gāḍha
(f.) gen. sg. gāviyā (Pp 56 = AN ii.207); nom. pl. gāviyo (Snp-a 323; Vv-a 308); gen. pl. gāvīnaṃ Dhp-a i.396; Snp-a 323; Vv-a 308) ■ A cow Vin i.193; AN iv.418; Ja i.50; Ud 8, Ud 49; Vism 525 (in simile) Dhp-a ii.35; Vv-a 200.
see go
(nt.) a linear measure, a quarter of a yojana = 80 usabhas, a little less than two miles, a league Ja i.57, Ja i.59; Ja ii.209 Vism 118; Dhp-a i.396.
cp. Vedic gavyūti pasture land, district
(adj.) reaching a gāvuta in extent DN-a i.284.
see go.
1. (n.) seizing, seizure, grip (cp. gaha): canda˚ suriya˚ an eclipse (lit. the moon, etc., being seized by a demon) DN i.10 (= DN-a i.95: Rāhu candaṃ gaṇhāti). Esp. appld to the sphere of the mind obsession, being possessed (by a thought), an idea opinion, view, usually as a preconceived idea, a wrong view, misconception. So in defn of diṭṭhi (wrong views) with paṭiggāha & abhinivesa Nd;2 271iii (on lepa); Pp 22; Dhs 381 (= obsession like the grip of a crocodile Dhs-a 253), 1003; Vb 145, Vb 358. In the same formula as vipariyesa ggāha (wrong view), cp viparīta˚ Vv-a 331 (see diṭṭhi). As doubt & error in anekaṃ sa + g˚ in def;n of kankhā & vicikicchā Nd;2 1 Vb 168; ekaṃsa˚ & apaṇṇaka˚ certainty, right thought Ja i.97 ■ gāhaṃ vissajjeti to give up a preconceived idea Ja ii.387.
2. (adj.) act. holding: rasmi˚ holding the reins Dhp 222; dabbi˚ holding the spoons Pv ii.953 (= gāhaka Pv-a 135) ■ (b) med ■ pass. taken: jīvagāha taken alive, in ˚ṃ gaheti to take (prisoner) alive SN i.84 karamaragāhaṃ gaheti same Ja iii.361 (see kara).
fr. gaṇhāti
(adj.) f. gāhikā holding (-˚) chatta˚ Snp 688; Dāvs ii.119; katacchu˚ Pv-a 135; cāmarī˚ Ja vi.218 Cp. saṃ˚.
to immerse, to penetrate, to plunge into: see gādha & gāḷha; cp also avagadha ajjhogāhati, ogāhati, pagāhati.
Sk. gāhate but Dhtp 349 = viloḷana
(nt.) submersion, see avagahana, avagāhati & avagāhana.;
fr. last
in ekaṃsa-gāhavatī nibbici kicchā “doubtlessness consisting in certainty” Vv-a 85 in expld of ekaṃsika.
one who is made to take up, a receiver Vin ii.177 (patta˚).
fr. gāhāpeti
to cause to take; to cause to be seized or fetched; to remove. Aor, gāhāpesi Ja i.53; Ja ii.37; gāhāpayi Pv iv.142 ■ Ger. gāhāpetvā Ja i.166; Ja ii.127; Ja iii.281; Dhp-a i.62 (patta-cīvaraṃ) With double acc. mahājanaṃ kathaṃ g˚ made people believe your words Ja ii.416; cetake kasā g. made the servants seize their whips Ja iii.281. Cp. gaṇhāpeti.
caus. of gaṇhāti
Imper. pres. of gāyati Ja iii.507.
(-˚) = gahin, see anta˚.
(adj.) (-˚) grasping, taking up, striving after, ādhāna˚ DN iii.247; udaka˚ Ja i.5; piya˚ Dhp 209; nimitta˚ anubyañjana˚ etc.
to understand, to account for DN-a i.117.
v. denom. fr. gāha
(v.l. BB kinkamaka) a sort of ornament Ja vi.590.
1. (m.) a vulture. Classed with kāka, crow & kulala, hawk MN i.88; (kākā + ) 364 (in simile, with kankā & kulatā) 429 (do.); Snp 201 (kākā + ); Pv-a 198 (+ kulalā). It occurs also in the form gaddha.
2. (adj.) greedy, desirous of (-˚) kāma˚ Ja i.210 (cp. giddha); cp. paṭi˚.
-kūṭa “Vulture’s Peak” Np. of a hill near Rājagaha Vin ii.193; Dhp-a i.140; Pv-a 10 and passim -potaka the young of a vulture Vism 537 (in simile).
Vedic gṛdhra, cp. gijjhati
to desire, to long for, to wish: pp. gaddha & giddha. Cp. abhi˚, pali˚.; pp. (Pass.) gijjhita Thig 152 (= paccāsiṃsita Thag-a).
Sk. gṛdhyati, to Lat. gradior?
(f.) a brick, in ˚āvasatha a house of bricks, as N pl. “the Brick Hall” DN i.91; Vin i.232; MN i.205.
(adj.) greedy; greedy for, hankering after (with loc.) SN i.74 (+ kāmesu mucchita); ii.227; AN ii.2; AN iii.68; Snp 243 (rasesu), 774 (kāmesu); 809; Pv iv.62 (sukhe); Pv-a 3 (+ rata (= gadhita), 271 (āhāre = hungry; cp. giddhin). In series with similar terms of desire; giddha gathita (or gadhita) mucchita ajjhopanna Nd ii.369 (nissita); Snp-a 286. Cp. gathita ■ agiddha without greed, desireless controlled Iti 92 (+ vītagedha); Snp 210 (do), 845 Cp. pa˚.
pp. of gijjhati
(f.) greed, usually in cpds.: ˚māna greed & conceit Snp 328,; ˚lobha g. desire MN i.360, MN i.362 (also a˚ and giddhilobhin); Ja v.343 Der. giddhikatā (f. abstr. = Sk. gṛdhnutā) greed Vb 351 (v.l. gedhi˚).
cp. Sk. gṛdhyā or gṛdhnutā
(adj. fr. prec.) greedy, usually -˚ greedy for, desirous after Pv iv.107 (āhāra˚) f. giddhinī: gāvī vaccha Vin i.193; SN iv.181. Cp. also paligedhin.
(adj. fr. giddhi) greedy, full of greed Ja v.464 (rasa˚).
(poet.) fire AN iii.347 (mahāgini); Snp 18 Snp 19 (āhito → nibbuto: made → extinguished); Ja iv.26. Note. The occurrence of two phonetic representatives of one Vedic form (one by diaeresis & one by contraction is common in words containing a liquid or nasal element (l. r. n; cp. note on gala), e.g. supina & soppa (Sk svapna), abhikkhaṇa and abhiṇha (abhīkṣṇa), silesuma & semha (śleṣman) gaḷagaḷa & gaggara (gargara), etc.;
Vedic agni; this the aphetic form, arisen in a combn like mahāgni = mahā-gini, as against the usual assimilation aggi
I. (sg.) heat, in special application to the atmosphere: hot part (of the day or year), hot season, summer; a summer month. Always used in loc. as a designation of time. 1. of the day: Vv-a 40 (˚samaye; v.l. gimhānamāse).
2. of summer usually in combn w. and in contrast to hemanta winter: hemanta-gimhisu in w. & s. Dhp 286 (cp. gimhika for ˚isu). Mil 274; Dpvs i.55; Vism 231 (˚âbhitatta worn out by the heat); Sdhp 275 (˚kāle). In enumn w. other seasons: vasse hemante gimhe Nd ii.631 (sadā) vasanta gimhādika utū Pv-a 135.
3. of a summer month; paṭhamasmiṃ gimhe Snp 233 (see Kp-a 192 for expln)-II. (pl.) gimhā the hot months, the season of summer, in ˚naṃ pacchime māse, in the last month of summer MN i.79; SN iii.141; SN v.50, SN v.321; Vv 795 (= āsāḷhimāse Vv-a 307).
Vedic grīṣma
(adj.-n.) of summer, summerly, the summer season AN iv.138 (+ hemanta & vassa); Snp 233 (gimhānamāse); Vv-a 40 (v.l.). On terms for seasons in gen. cp. Mil trsl. ii.113.
orig. gen. pl. of gimhā = gimhānaṃ, fr. combn gimhāna(ṃ) māse, in a month of summer
(adj. fr. gimha) summerly, relating to the summer, for the summer Vin i.15; DN ii.21 (+ vassika & hemantika).;
utterance (orig. song, important utterance still felt as such in older Pāli, therefore mostly poetical), speech, words DN iii.174; Snp 350, Snp 632, Snp 690 Snp 1132; Dhp 408; Thig 316, Thig 402; Vv 5018 (= vācā Vv-a) Dhs 637, Dhs 720; Dhs-a 93; DN-a i.61 (aṭṭhangupetaṃ giraṃ) Ja ii.134.
Vedic gir & gēr, song; gṛṇāti to praise, announce gūrti praise = Lat. grates “grace”; to *ger or *gṷer, see note on gala
a mountain; as a rule only in cpds, by itself (poetical) only at Vism 206 (in enumn of the 7 large mountains).
-agga mountain top, in giraggasamajja Name of a festival celebrated yearly at Rājagaha, orig. a festival on the mountain top (cp. Dial. i.8 & Vin. Texts iii.71). Vin ii.107, Vin ii.150; Vin iv.85, Vin iv.267; Ja iii.538; Dhp-a i.89. The BSk version is girivaggu-samāgama Avs ii.24; -kannikā (f.) Name of a plant (Clitoria ternatea) Vism 173; Dhp-a i.383 (v.l. kaṇṇikā cp. Sk. ˚karnī;) -gabbhara = ˚guhā Snp 416; -guhā a mountain cleft, a rift, a gorge; always in formula pabbata kandara g˚, therefore almost equivalent to kandara, a grotto or cave Vin ii.146; DN i.71; MN i.269, MN i.274, MN i.346, MN i.440 = AN ii.210 = Pp 59 (as giriṃ guhaṃ); AN iv.437; expl. at DN-a i.210: dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antaraṃ ekasmiṃ yeva vā ummagga-sadisaṃ mahā-vivaraṃ; -bbaja (nt.) [Etym. uncertain, according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 79 to vaja “a pen,” cp Marāthī vraja “a station of cowherds,” Hindi vraja “a cow-pen”; the Vedic giribhraj˚ (RV. x.68. 1) “aus Bergen hervorbrechend” (Roth) suggests relation to bhraj, to break = bhañj = Lat. frango] = ˚guhā, a mountain cave or gorge, serving as shelter & hiding place Ja iii.479 (trsl. by Morris loc. cit. a hill-run, a cattle-run on the hills); v.260 (sīhassa, a lion’s abode) expld as kañcanaguhā ibid. (for kandara-guhā? cp. Kern Toev. p. 130). SN ii.185. Also N. for Rājagaha Snp 408 Dpvs v.5; in its Sk. form Girivraja, which Beal, Buddh Records ii.149 expls as “the hill-surrounded,” cp. ib ii.158 (= Chin. Shan-Shing), 161; see also Cunningham Ancient Geogr. 462. It does not occur in the Avadānas; -rājā king of the mountains, of Mount Sineru Mil 21, Mil 224; -sikhara mountain top, peak Vv-a 4; (kañcana˚, shining).
Vedic giri, Obulg. gora mountain
(pl.) in dhamma˚ & brahma˚, a name of certain theatrical entertainers Mil 191.;
to swallow to devour: mā Rāhu gilī caraṃ antalikkhe SN i.51 = Vv-a 116; mā gilī lohagulaṃ Dhp 371 ■ Ja iii.338; Mil 106-pp. gilita: gilitabaḷisa having swallowed the hook SN iv.159. Cp. ud˚, o˚, pari˚ ■ Caus. gilāpeti to make swallow Ja iii.338.
Vedic girati & gilati Dhtp 488: adane; cp. gala throat, Ohg. kela, E. gullet; see note on gala
(nt.) devouring, swallowing Mil 101.
fr. gilati
(adj.) sick ill Vin i.51, Vin i.53, Vin i.61, Vin i.92, Vin i.142 sq., 176, 302 sq.; ii.165 227 sq.; iv.88, etc.; SN v.80, SN v.81 (bāḷha˚ very ill); AN i.120 = Pp 27; AN iii.38, AN iii.143 sq.; AN iv.333; AN v.72 sq. Ja i.150; Ja ii.395; Ja iii.392; Pv-a 14; Vv-a 76.
-ālaya pretence of illness Ja vi.262. -upaṭṭhāka (f ■ ī) one who attends to the sick Vin i.92, Vin i.121 sq. 142 sq.; 161, 303, AN i.26; AN iii.143 sq.; -˚bhatta food for the attendant or nurse Vin i.292 sq.; -upaṭṭhāna tending or nursing the sick DN iii.191; -paccaya support or help for the sick Pv-a 144; usually with ˚bhesajja medicine for the sick in freq. formula of cīvarapiṇḍapāta˚ (the requisites of the bhikkhu): see cīvara; -pucchaka one who asks (i.e. enquires after) the sick Vin iv.88 = Vin iv.115 Vin iv.118; -bhatta food for the sick Vin i.142 sq.; 292 sq. 303; Vism 66. -bhesajja medicine Vin i.292 sq. -sālā a hall for the sick, hospital SN iv.210; AN iii.142 Vism 259.
Sk. glāna, glā to fade, wither, be exhausted, expld suitably by “hāsa-kkhaya” at Dhtp 439
(adj.) 1. ill (= gilāna) AN iii.142;
2. fit for an illness (bhesajja medicine) Mil 74.
: see āgilāyati.
only in agiha (adj.) houseless, homeless (= pabbajita, a Wanderer); poet. for anagāra Snp 456 Snp 464, Snp 487, Snp 497.
= gaha
(adj.-n.) a householder, one who leads a domestic life, a layman (opp. pabbajita & paribbājaka). Geu. sg. gihissa (D iii.147, 167) & gihino (D iii.174); n. pl. gihī; in cpds. gihī˚ & gihi˚; (usually the latter). gihī agāraṃ ajjhāvasantā AN i.49; gihī odātavasanā (clad in white robes as distinguished fr. kasāva-vasanā the yellowrobed i.e. bhikkhus) DN i.211; DN iii.117, DN iii.124, DN iii.210; MN i.340; MN iii.261; AN i.74 ■ Contrasted with pabbajitā AN i.69; DN iii.147, DN iii.167, DN iii.179. gihī dhaññena dhanena vaḍḍhati DN iii.165 ■ Other passages in general SN ii.120, SN ii.269; SN iii.11; SN iv.180, SN iv.300 sq.; AN ii.65; AN ii.69 (kāmabhogī); iv.438 (do.); DN iii.124 (do.); AN iii.211 (sambodhiparāyano); iv.345 sq.; DN iii.167 sq.; 171 sq.; 176 192; Snp 220, Snp 221, Snp 404; Dhp 74; Mil 19, Mil 264; Dhp-a i.16 (gihīniyāma); Sdhp 376, Sdhp 426; Pv-a 13 (gihīkālato paṭṭhāya from the time of our laymanship); Dhp-a ii.49 (id.).
-kicca a layman’s or householder’s duties Pv iv.142 (= kuṭumba-kiccāni Pv-a 240); -dhamma a layman’s duty AN iii.41; -parisā a congregation of laymen SN i.111; MN i.373; AN iii.184; -bandhanāni (pl.) a layman’s fetters Snp 44 (= Nd ii.228 puttā ca dāsī dāsā ca, etc.); -byañjanāni (pl.) characteristics of a layman, or of a man of the world (w. ref. to articles of dress & ornament Snp 44, Snp 64 (= Nd;2 229); Mil 11; -bhūta as a householder DN ii.196; -bhoga riches of a worldly man SN iii.93; Iti 90; -liṅga characteristic of a layman Dhp-a ii.61. -saṃsagga association with laymen AN iii.116, AN iii.258 -saṃyojana the impediments of a householder (cp. ˚bandhanāni) MN i.483; -sukha the welfare of a g. AN i.80.
fr. gaha, cp. gaha & geha; Sk. gṛhin
1. (pp.) sung, recited, solemnly proclaimed, enunciated: mantapadaṃ gītaṃ pavuttaṃ DN i.104 (cp. gira).
2. (nt.) singing, a song; grouped under vācasikā khiḍḍā, musical pastimes at Nd ii.219; Snp-a 86. Usually combd with nacca, dancing: AN i.261; Vv8110 as naca gītādi Ja i.61; Vv-a 131; referring to nacca-gīta-vādita, dancing with singing & instrumental accompaniment DN iii.183 (under samajja, kinds of festivities); Vv 324. Same with visūkadassana, pantomimic show at DN i.5≈(cp. DN-a i.77; Kp-a 36).
-rava sound of song Mvu vii.30; -sadda id. Ja iv.3; Dhs 621; Dhp-a i.15; -ssara id. Vin ii.108; AN iii.251; Ja iii.188.
pp. of gāyati
(nt.) & gītikā (f.) a little song Ja iii.507.
(f.) the neck Snp 609; Ja i.74 (˚ṃ pasāreti to stretch forth), 167 (pasārita˚) 207, 222, 265; iii.52; Vv-a 27 (mayūra˚), 157; DN-a i.296 (˚āya kuṇḍa-daṇḍaka-bandhana, as exhibition punishment): similarly in the sense of “life” (hinting at decapitation) Ja ii.300 (˚ṃ karissāmi “I shall go for his neck”); iv.431 = v.23 ■ Syn. kaṇṭha the primary meaning of which is neck, whereas gīvā orig. throat.
Sk. grīvā, to *gṷer to swallow, as signifying throat: see note on gala for etym.
(nt.) necklace, an ornament for the neck (orig. “something belonging to the neck,” cp. necklet, bracelet, etc.) Vin i.287; AN i.254 sq (= Vism 247, where gīveyya only); 257; iii.16; Ja iv.395 (gīveyya only); v.297; vi.590; Vv-a 104.
cp. Sk. graiveyaka
a kind of perfume Ja vi.537.
?
in jigucchati (Des. of gup = Sk. jugupsate) to detest, see s. v.
(f.) a plant (Abrus precatorius); the redness of its berries is referred to in similes; Dhp-a iv.133 (˚vaṇṇāni akkhīni). See also jiñjuka.
1. a string, a cord-(a) of a robe, etc., in (kāya-bandhanaṃ) saguṇaṃ katvā to make tight by tying with a knot Vin i.46 (Vin. Texts: “laying the garments on top of each other,” wrongly construed) ii.213 (trsln. “folding his garments”); cp. guṇaka. (b) of musical instruments Vin i.182 = AN iii.375 (vīṇā) ■ (c) of a bow, in aguna stringless Ja v.433 (dhanu). 2. (a strand of a rope as) constituent part ingredient, component, element; with numerals it equals-fold, e.g. pañca kāmaguṇā the 5 strands of kāma, or 5-fold craving (see kāma); ekaguṇaṃ once, diguṇaṃ twice Snp 714; diguṇaṃ nivāpaṃ pacitvā cooking a double meal Vv-a 63; catugguṇa fourfold, of a sanghāti DN ii.128; SN ii.221, cp. Rhys Davids, Dialogues ii.145 aṭṭhaguṇa (hirañña) Th. 2, 153; aneka-bhāgena guṇena seyyo many times or infinitely better Pv iv.19; sataguṇena sahassa˚ 100 and 1,000 times Pv-a 41; asankheyyena guṇena infinitely, inconceivably Mil 106 sataguṇaṃ sahassaguṇaṃ Vism 126.
3. (a part as quality, esp. good quality, advantage, merit Ja i.266 Ja ii.112; Ja iii.55, Ja iii.82 ■ lobha˚ Snp 663; sādhu˚ Snp 678 sīla˚ Ja i.213; Ja ii.112; Buddha˚ Ja ii.111; pabbajita Ja i.59.
-aggatā state of having the best qualities, superiority Dpos iv.1. -aḍḍha rich in virtue Sdhp 312, Sdhp 561 -upeta in khuppipāsāhi guṇûpeto as Pv-a 10 is to be read khuppipās’ âbhibhūto peto. -kathā “tale of virtue,” praise Ja i.307; Ja ii.2. -kittana telling one’s praises Pv-a 107, Pv-a 120. -guṇika in phrase tantākulajāta g-g-jāta at SN iv.158, see under guḷā-guṇṭhika.
Non-Aryan?
a ball, a cluster, a chain (?), in anta˚ the intestines; MN i.185-, Kh 11., cp. Kp-a 57 for expln ■ mālāguṇa a garland or chain (cluster of flowers Dhp 53 (but ˚guḷa at Ja i.73, Ja i.74). See guḷa3.
for which often guḷa with common substitution of ḷ for ṇ, partly due to dissimilation, as mālāguḷa → mālāguṇa; cp. Sk. guṇikā tumour: guḷa and gaḷa veḷu: veṇu, and note on gala
a woodworm Ja iii.431 (˚pāṇaka).
Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. ghuna
(adj.) having a knot at the end, thickened at the top (with ref. to kāyabandha, see guṇa 1a) Vin ii.136, cp. Vin. Texts ii.143.
to guḷa1, cp. guḷika?
(adj.) possessed of good qualities, virtuous Pv ii.971 (= jhān’ ādiguṇa-yutta); Pv-a 62 (mahā˚).
to guṇa1
(f.) a kind of armour Ja vi.449 (g. vuccate kavacaṃ C.); see Kern, Toev. p. 132.
of adj. guṇin, having guṇas or guḷas, i.e. strings or knots
(in meaning = guṇṭhita) one who is covered with or wrapped up in, only in ahi˚; a snake-trainer (like a Laocoon). See details under ahi or Ja ii.267; Ja iii.348 (text ˚guṇḍika); Ja iv.308 (ahi-kuṇḍika, v.l. SS guṇṭhika) iv.456 (text ˚guṇṭika; v.l. BB ˚kuṇḍika). Also in guḷā-guṇṭhika (q.v.).
covered over (?), see pāli˚.
to cover to veil, to hide; pp. guṇṭhita in paṃsu˚ covered with dust Pv ii.35 (in Hardy’s conjecture for kuṇṭhita, q.v.) Also in cpd. paliguṇṭhita obstructed, entangled Snp 131 (mohena) where v.l. BB kuṇṭhita. Cp. o˚.
cp. Sk. guṇṭhayati Dhtp (563) & Dhtm (793) give both roots; guṇṭh & guṇḍ as syName of veṭh
see guṇṭhika.
■ I. as pp. guarded, protected ■ (a) lit nagaraṃ guttaṃ a well-guarded city Dhp 315 = Thag 653 Thag 1005; Devinda˚ protected by the Lord of gods Vv 308-(b) fig. (med.) guarded, watchful, constrained guarded in, watchful as regards… (with loc. SN iv.70 (agutta & sugutta, with danta, rakkhita) AN iii.6 (atta˚ self-controlled); Snp 250 (sotesu gutto vijitindriyo), 971 (id. + yatacārin); Dhp 36 (cittaṃ). II. as n. agent (= Sk. goptṛ, cp. kata in kāla-kata kāḷaṃ kartṛ) one who guards or observes, a guardian in Dhammassa gutta Dhp 257, observer of the Norm (expl. Dhp-a iii.282: dhammojapaññāya samannāgata) cp. dhammagutta SN i.222.
-indriya one whose senses are guarded; with well-guarded senses Snp 63 (+ rakkhita-mānasāno; expl Snp-a: chassu indriyesu gopitindriyo); Nd ii.230; Vv 5015; Pv iv.132; -dvāra “with guarded doors” always in combn with indriyesu g-d. having the doors of the senses guarded, practising. self-control DN i.63≈(expld DN-a i.182 by pihita-dvāro), 70; SN ii.218; SN iv.103, SN iv.112 SN iv.119 sq., 175; Snp 413 (+ susaṃvuta); Pp 24. Cp. foll. -dvāratā (f. abstr. to prec.) in indriyesu g˚ self constraint, control over (the doors of) one’s senses, always combd with bhojane mattaññutā (moderation in taking food) DN iii.213; Iti 24; Pp 20, Pp 24; Dhs 1347; Pv-a 163 Opp. a˚; lack of sense-control DN iii.213; Iti 23; Dhs 1345.
Sk. gupta, pp. of gup in med. pass. sense, cp. gopeti
(f.) protection, defence, guard; watchfulness ■ (a) lit. of a city AN iv.106 sq ■ (b) fig. of the senses in indriyānaṃ gutti Dhp 375; Pp 24 (+ gopanā) Dhs 1348; Sdhp 341 (agutti); Vin iv.305; AN ii.72 (atta˚) also in pl.: guttīsu ussuka keen in the practice of watchfulness DN iii.148.
Vedic gupti
a guardian, one who keeps watch over, in nagara˚; the town-watchman, the chief-constable Pv-a 4; Mil 345.
fr. last
see ogumpheti.
1. a troop, a heap, cluster, swarm. Of soldiers Vin i.345; of fish (maccha˚) DN i.84 = MN i.279 = MN ii.22; AN i.9.
2. a thicket, a bush, jungle; the lair of an animal in a thicket (sayana˚ Ja iv.256) SN iii.6 (eḷagalā˚) Ja iii.52 (nivāsa˚, vasana˚); Vv-a 301 (gaccha˚ underwood); Ja i.149, Ja i.167; Ja ii.19; Ja iii.55; Ja iv.438; Vv-a 63, Vv-a 66 Cp. pagumba = gumba, in vana˚ Snp 233 (see Kp-a 192) veḷu˚ Thag 919 ■ Acc. gumbaṃ (adv.) thickly, in masses balled together Mil 117 (of clouds).
-antara thicket Vv-a 233.
Sk. gulma, *glem to *gel, to be thick, to conglomerate, cp. Lat. glomus (ball), globus, etc. See guḷa
(adj.) one of the troop (of soldiers) Vin i.345.
fr. gumba
1. adj. to be hidden, hidden in ˚bhaṇḍaka the hidden part (of the body Dhp-a iv.197.
2. (nt.) that which is hidden; lit. in vattha˚; hidden by the dress, i.e. the pudendum DN i.106; Snp 1022, etc. (see vattha), fig. a secret Mil 92 guyhaṃ pariguyhati to keep a secret AN iv.31; Nd ii.510.
ger. of guh = Vedic guhya
(adj.-n.) venerable, reverend, a teacher Vv-a 229, Vv-a 230 (˚dakkhiṇā a teacher’s fee); Pv-a 3 (˚janā venerable persons) Sdhp 227 (˚ûpadesa), 417.
a younger form of garu (q.v.); Sk. guru
to make into a ball, to conglomerate. Cp Sk. glauḥ ball; Gr. γλουτός; Ohg. chliuwa; Ger. kugel kloss; E. clot, cleat; also *gel with same meaning Sk. gulma.] tumour, gilāyu glandular swelling; cp. Lat glomus, globus; Ger. klamm; E. clamp, clump. A root guḷ is given by Dhtp 576,77 in meaning of “mokkha” a ball, in cpds. sutta˚ a ball of string (= Ohg. chliuwa DN i.54 = ; MN iii.95; Pv-a 145; ayo˚ an iron globe Dhp 308; DN-a i.84; loha˚ of copper Dhp 371; sela˚ a rockball i.e. a heavy stone-ball Ja i.147.
-kīḷā play at ball Dhp-a i.178; Dhp-a iii.455; Dhp-a iv.124. -parimaṇḍala the circumference of a ball, or (adj.) round globular, like a ball Pv-a 253.
Sk. guḍa and gulī ball, guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour; to *gleu.
(Non-Aryan?] sugar, molasses Vin i.210, Vin i.224 sq., 245 ■ saguḷa sugared, sweet, or “with molasses Ja vi.324 (saguḷāni, i.e. saguḷa-pūve pancakes).
-āsava sugar-juice Vv-a 73. -odaka s ■ water Vin i.226. -karaṇa a sugar factory ibid. 210. -pūvaka sweet cake Mvu 10. 3. -phāṇita molasses Vv-a 179.
a cluster, a chain (?), in maṇi˚; a cluster of jewels, always in simile with ref. to sparkling eyes “maniguḷa-sadisāni akkhīni” Ja i.149; Ja iii.126, Ja iii.184 (v.l. BB ˚guḷika); iv.256 (v.l. id.); mālā˚; a cluster, a chain of flowers, a garland Ja i.73, Ja i.54; puppha˚; id. Dh. 172 233.
for guṇa2, due to distance dissimilation in maṇiguṇa and mālāguṇa → maṇigula and mālāgula; cp similarly in meaning and form Ohg. chliuwa → Ger knäuel
(f.) a swelling, pimple, pustule, blight, in cpd. guḷā-guṇṭhika-jāta DN ii.55, which is also to be read at AN ii.211 (in spite of Morris, prelim. remarks to AN ii.4 whose trsln. is otherwise correct) = guḷā-gunṭḥita covered with swellings (i.e. blight); cp. similar expression at Dhp-a iii.297 gaṇḍāgaṇḍa (-jāta) “having become covered all over with pustules (i.e. rash).” All readings at corresp. passages are to be corrected accordingly, viz. SN ii.92 (guḷigandhika˚); iv.158 (guṇaguṇika˚); the reading at Dpvs xii.32, also v.l. SS at AN ii.211, is as quoted above and the whole phrase runs: tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajātā “entangled like a ball of string and covered with blight.”
to guḷa1
(adj.) like a chain, or having a chain, (nt. & f.) a cluster, a chain in maṇi a string of jewels, a pearl necklace Ja iii.184 (v.l. BB for ˚guḷa); iv.256; Vism 285 (+ muttā-guḷikā).
to guḷa3 = guṇa, cp. also guṇaka
(f.) a little ball SN v.462 (satta-kolaṭṭhi-mattiyo guḷikā, pl.) Thig 498 (kolaṭṭhimatta g˚ balls of the size of a jujube) cp. Thag-a 289.
to guḷa1; cp. Sk. guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour
(f. abstr. to gūhati) hiding, concealing, keeping secret Vb 358 (+ pariguhanā). Also as gūhanā, q.v.
(f.) a hiding place, a cave, cavern (cp kandara & see giriguhā); fig. the heart (in ˚āsaya) According to Bdhgh. (on Vin i.58, see Vin. Texts i.174 “a hut of bricks, or in a rock, or of wood.” Vin i.58 Vin i.96, Vin i.107, Vin i.239, Vin i.284; Vin ii.146; Vin iii.155; Vin iv.48 (cp. sattapaṇṇi-guhā); Snp 772, Snp 958; Ja ii.418; Ja vi.574; Vv 5016.
-āsaya hiding in the heart; or the shelter of the heart AN iv.98 (maccupāso + ); Ja v.367 (id.); Dhp 37 (cittaṃ see Dhp-a i.304).
Vedic guhā, guh, gūhati to hide (q.v.) Dhtp 337: saṃvaraṇa
(-˚) going, having gone (through), being skilled or perfected in. See addha˚, anta˚ chanda˚, dhamma˚, paṭṭha˚, pāra, veda˚.
fr. gam, cp. ˚ga
excrements, faeces, dung. As food for Petas frequently mentioned in Pv; (cp. Stede, Peta Vatthu 24 sq.), as a decoction of dung also used for medicinal purposes (Vin i.206 e.g. ). Often combn with mutta (urine): Pv i.91; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 78; DN-a i.198.
-kaṭāha an iron pot for defecation Vin iv.265. -kalala dung & mire Ja iii.393; -kīḷana playing with excrements Vism 531. -kūpa a privy (cp. karīsa) MN i.74; Snp 279; Pv ii.316; Pp 36; Ja vi.370; Vism 54. -khādaka living on faeces Ja ii.211 (˚pāṇaka) Pv-a 266; -gata having turned to dung Iti 90; -gandhin smelling of excrements Pv ii.315; -ṭṭhāna a place for excrementation Thag 1153; -naraka = foll. Vism 501; -niraya the mirepurgatory Vv-a 226; Sdhp 194; -pāṇa an insect living on excrement (= ˚khādakapāṇa) Ja ii.209, Ja ii.212; -bhakkha feeding on stercus MN iii.168; Pv-a 192; Dhp-a ii.61 -bhānin of foul speech AN i.128; Pp 29 (Kern, Toev. s. v. corrects into kūṭa˚?).
Sk. gūtha; probably to Lat. bubino, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.
“a sort of gūtha,” excretion, secretion, rheum, in akkhi˚; and kaṇṇa˚; (of eye & ear) Snp 197 (cp. Snp-a 248; Vism 345 sq.). Gulha & gulhaka;
(adj.) hidden, secret Vin ii.98 (gūḷha-ko salākagāho).
pp. of gūhati
to hide, to conceal. See paṭi˚, pari˚ ■ Caus. gūhayati Sdhp 189 (gūhayaṃ ppr.). Cp. gūḷha.
Sk. gūhati, pp. gūḍha; see guyha, guhā, etc.
(nt.) hiding, concealment Sdhp 65 (laddhi˚-citta).
(f.) = gūhanā (q.v.) Pug. 19. Cp. pari˚.
abstr. fr. gūhati
a ball for playing. The SS spelling is in all places bheṇḍuka, which has been taken into the text by the editors of J. and Dhs-a. The misspelling is due to a misreading of Singhalese bh → g; cp. spelling parābhetvā for parāgetvā ■ bheṇḍukena kīḷi Ja iv.30 bhūmiyaṃ pahata-bheṇḍuka (striking against the ground) Ja iv.30; Vism 143 (pahaṭa-citra˚) = Dhs-a 116 (where wrongly pahaṭṭha-citta-bheṇḍuka); Ja v.196 (citra-bh˚); Dhp-a iii.364.
greed. Its connection with craving and worldly attachment is often referred to. Kāmesu g˚ SN i.73; Snp 152; AN iii.312 sq. (gedho pañcann’ etaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ). gedhataṇhā SN i.15 (v.l. kodha˚); Snp 65, Snp 945, Snp 1098; Thig 352 Nd ii.231; Dhs 1059 (under lobha), 1136; Ne 18; Dhp-a i.366; Pv-a 107. -agedhatā freedom from greed Mil 276 ■ See also gedhi & paligedha.;
Vedic gṛdhyā, cp. gijjhati
a cave AN i.154 = AN iii.128 (the latter passage has rodha, cp. v.l. under gedhi).
= geha? Kern
greed, desire, jealousy, envy: gedhiṃ karoti (c. loc.) to be desirous after MN i.330 -gedhikata in ˚citta (adj.) jealous, envious, ibid. As gedhikatā (f.) vanity, greed, conceit Nd ii.585 (v.l. rodhigatā).
Sk. gṛdhi, cp. gedha
greedy, in gedhita-mano greedyminded Pv ii.82; as nt. greed, in der. gedhifatta (syn of gedhikatā) Nd ii.585.
pp. of gijjhati
(nt.) a certain style of Buddhist literature consisting of mixed prose & verse It is only found in the ster. enum of the Scriptures in their ninefold division, beginning suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ See under; navaṅga.
grd. of gāyati, Sk. geya
(nt.) & gerukā (f.) yellow ochre (Bdhgh suvaṇṇa˚ cp. Sk. kañcana˚ & svarṇa˚), red chalk used as colouring Vin i.203; Vin ii.151; AN i.210; Mil 133 (˚cuṇṇa). Freq. in ˚parikamma a coating of red chalk, red colouring Vin ii.117, Vin ii.151, Vin ii.172; ˚parikammakata “coated with red colouring” Vin i.48 Vin ii.218.
Sk. gairika
(nt.) sickness, illness DN ii.99; AN i.219; AN iii.298; AN iv.333 sq.; Vism 321, Vism 466, Vism 478.
n-abstr. fr. gilāna
(nt.) a dwelling, hut, house the household Ja i.145, Ja i.266, Ja i.290; Ja ii.18, Ja ii.103, Ja ii.110, Ja ii.155 Ja vi.367; Vism 593; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 62, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 82; fig. of kāya (body) Thag 184 = Dhp 154 ■ Appld to a cowshed at Mil 396.
-aṅgana the open space in front of the house Vv-a 6 -jana (sg. collective) the members of the household, the servants Pv-a 16, Pv-a 62, Pv-a 93; -jhāpana incendiarism Vism 326. -ṭṭhāna a place for a dwelling Dhp-a iii.307 -dvāra the house door Pv-a 61; -nissita (adj.) concerning the house, connected with (the house and worldly life Snp 280 (pāpiccha); Iti 117 (vitakka); cp ˚sita; -patana the falling of the house Ja iii.118. -pavesana (-mangala) (the ceremony of) entering a new hut Dhp-a iii.307; -piṭṭhi the back of the house Pv-a 78 -rakkhika keeping (in the) house, staying at home Vv-a 76 (dārakā); -vigata (nt.) the resources of the house, worldly means, riches Thig 327 (= upakaraṇa Thag-a 234); -sita (*śrita) = ˚nissita, connected with worldly life (opp. nekkhamma, renunciation). Of chandā & vitakkā (pl.) MN i.123; domanassa & somanassa (grief & pleasure) SN iv.232 = Mil 45; Vb 381; Dhs-a 194; dhammā, etc. SN iv.71; Vb 380; Ne 53.
Sk. geha = gṛha, to gṛh, gaṇhāti; cp. gaha, gihin, ghara; see also gedha2
(m ■ f.) a cow, an ox, bull, pl. cattle. For f. cp gāvī; see also gava˚ for cpds ■ Sg. nom. go (Snp 580 also in composition, cp. aja-go-mahisādi Pv-a 80 = pasū) gen. gavassa (MN i.429); instr. gavena, gāvena; acc gavaṃ, gāvan; abl. gavamhā, gavā (DN i.201 = AN ii.95 Pp 69); loc. gavamhi, gāvimhi (Snp-a 323), gave (Snp 310) ■ Pl. nom. gāvo (DN i.141; MN i.225; AN i.205 AN ii.42 sq.; Snp 20, Snp 296, Snp 307; Ja i.295); gen. gonaṃ AN ii.75 (cp. Vedic gonām), gavaṃ (J iv.172, cp. gavaṃ pati) gunnaṃ (AN i.229, AN ii.75; AN v.271; Ja i.194; Ja iii.112; Ja iv.223) instr. gohi (Snp 33); acc. gāvo (MN i.225; AN i.205; Snp 304; Dhp 19, Dhp 135); abl. gohi; loc. gosu, gavesu ■ See also gava, gavesati, goṇa.
-kaṇṭaka the hoof of an ox, in ˚haṭā bhūmi, trampled by the feet of cattle Vin i.195; AN i.136 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.34); -kaṇṇa a large species of deer Ja v.406 (= gaṇin) 416 (khagga + ); Dhs-a 331 (gavaya + ); cp. next -kāṇā (f.) = gokaṇṇa DN iii.38 = DN iii.53; -kula (nt.) a cow pen, a station of cattle SN iv.289; -gaṇa a herd of cattle MN i.220; AN i.229; Ja ii.127; Dhp-a i.175; Vv-a 311 -ghaṃsikā a cow-hide (?). Vin ii.117 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.98); -ghātaka one who kills cows, a butcher DN ii.294 (in simile); MN i.58, MN i.244, MN i.364 (˚sūnā, slaughter-house) SN ii.255; SN iv.56; AN iii.302, AN iii.380; Ja v.270; Vism 348 (in simile). -cara I. Lit. A. (noun-m.) pasture, lit. “a cow’s grazing,” search after food; fodder, food, subsistence (a) of animals: Ja i.221; Ja iii.26; Dhp 135 (daṇḍena gopālo gāvo pāceti gocaraṃ: with a stick the cowherd drives the cattle to pasture). Sīho gocarāya pakkamati “the lion goes forth for his huut” AN ii.33 AN iii.121; gocarāya gacchati to go feeding, to graze Snp 39; Ja i.243; gocare carati to go feeding, to feed Ja i.242. (b) metaph. of persons, esp. the bhikkhu: pucchitabba gocara (and agocara) “enquiries have to be made concerning the fitness or otherwise of his pasturage (i.e. the houses in which he begs for food)” Vin ii.208 samaṇo gocarato nivatto an ascetic returned from his “grazing” Pv iv.142: Similarly at Vism 127, where a suitable g ■ gama ranks as one of the 7 desiderata for one intent on meditation ■ B. (adj.) (-˚) feeding on or in, living in; metaph. dealing with, mixing with. vana living in the woods Pv ii.65; vāri˚ (in water) Snp 605 jala˚ (id.) Ja ii.158 (opp. thala˚). Vesiyā˚ (etc.) associating with v. Vin i.70 ■ II. Applied. A. (noun-m. or nt.) a “field” (of sense perception, etc.), sphere, object-˚ food for, an object of (a) psychologically indriyānaṃ nānāgocarāni various spheres of sense-perception SN v.218; sense-object (= ārammaṇaṃ) Pts i.180; Pts ii.97 Pts ii.150 sq.; Dhs-a 314, Dhs-a 315 (sampatta˚ physical contact with an object, gandha˚ smell-contact, i.e. sensation) indriya˚ Sdhp 365 ■ (b) ethically: ariyānaṃ gocare ratā “finding delight in the pasture of the good, walking in the ways of the good Dhp 22; vimokho yesaṃ gocaro “whose pasture is liberty” Dhp 92 = Thag 92 Esp. in phrase ācāra-gocara-sampanna “pasturing in the field of good conduct” DN i.63 = Iti 118; MN i.33; SN v.187 It. 96; analysed as Dvandva cpd. at Vb 246, Vb 247 but cp. pāpācāra-gocara Snp 280, Snp 282. This phrase (ācāra-gocara) is also discussed in detail at Vism 19 where 3 kinds of gocarā are distinguished, viz. upanissaya˚ ārakkha˚, upanibandha˚. So also in contrast w. agocara, an unfit pasture, or an unfit, i.e. bad sphere of life, in gocare & agocare carati to move in a congenial or uncongenial sphere AN iii.389; AN iv.345 sq. DN iii.58 = DN iii.77; SN v.147; Vb 246, Vb 247 (expl. w. vesiyā etc., cp. above = having bad associations) ■ B. (adj ■ ˚: belonging to, dependent on, falling to the share of eta˚ dependent on this MN i.319; sattasaddhamma˚ moving in the sphere of the seven golden rules SN iii.83 rūpa˚ to be perceived by sight Ja i.396; Nibbāna belonging to N. Sdhp 467. -˚kusala (adj.) skilled in (finding proper) food; clever in right living-˚ behaving properly in, exercising properly MN i.220 = AN v.347 (of a cowherd driving out his cattle); SN iii.266 sq. (samādhi˚); AN iii.311 (do.) v.352 sq. (w. ref. to cattāro satipaṭṭhānā); -˚gahaṇa the taking of food, feeding Ja i.242 -˚gāma a village for the supply of food (for the bhikkhus) Pv-a 12, Pv-a 42; -˚ṭṭhāna pasturage Ja iii.52; -˚pasuta intent on feeding Ja iii.26; -˚bhūmi pasturage, a common Dhp-a iii.60; -˚visaya (the sphere of) an object of sense SN v.218; Vb 319; -caraṇa pasturing Ja vi.335; -ṭṭha (nt.) [Sk. goṣṭha to sthā to stand; cp. Lat. stabulum stable; super-stes; Goth. awistr] a cow-stable, cow-pen MN i.79; Ja iv.223; -pa [Sk. gopa, cp. gopati] a cowherd herdsman Snp 18; Dhp 19; Ja iv.364 (a robber); Vism 166 (in simile); Dhp-a 157, f. gopī Snp 22, Snp 32; -pakhuma (adj.) having eyelashes like a heifer DN ii.18; DN iii.144 DN iii.167 sq.; Vv-a 162, Vv-a 279 (= āḷārapamha); -pada a cow’s footprint, a puddle AN iii.188; AN iv.102; Mil 287; also ˚padaka AN iii.188 v.l.; DN-a i.283; -pariṇāyaka leader of the cows, Ep. of a bull (gopitā + ) MN i.220, MN i.225; -pāla a cowherd (usually as ˚ka) Dhp 135; -pālaka = prec. Vin i.152, Vin i.243 sq.; MN i.79, MN i.115 sq., 220 = AN v.347; MN i.333; SN iv.181; AN i.205 (-˚uposatha); Mil 18, Mil 48; Vism 279 (in comparison); Dhp-a iii.59; -pitā “father (protector of the cows” = gavaṃ pati, Ep. of a bull MN i.220 (+ ˚pariṇāyaka); -pī f. of gopa, q.v.; -pura (nt.) [Sk. gopura] the gate of a city Ja vi.433; Mil 1, Mil 67, Mil 330; Bdhd 138; -balivadda in ˚nayena; in the expression gobalivadda (black-cattle-bull) i.e. by an accumulation of words Vv-a 258; -bhatta cows’ fodder Ja iv.67; -maṇḍala ox-beat, ox-round, Cp iii.151 (as gā˚), quoted Ja i.47 (cp. assa-m˚); Snp-a 39; also in phrase ˚paribbūḷha Snp 301 (expld by Snp-a 320 as goyūthehi parikiṇṇa) Ja vi.27; at MN i.79 however it means the cowherds or peasants (see note MN i.536: gopāladārakā or gāmadārakā to v.l. gāmaṇḍala) cp. gāmaṇḍala; -maya (m. nt. cowdung MN i.79; AN i.209, AN i.295; AN v.234, AN v.250, AN v.263 sq. Ne 23; Dhp-a i.377. -˚pāṇaka a coprophagan, dor beetle Ja ii.156; -˚piṇda a lump of cowdung Ja i.242 -˚bhakkha eating cowdung DN i.166≈; -māyu a jackal Pgdp 49; -mutta (and ˚ka) a precious stone of light red colour Vv-a iii; Dhs-a 151; -medaka = gomuttaka Vv-a 111.; -medha a cow sacrifice, in ˚yañña Snp-a 323 -yūtha a herd of cows Snp-a 322; Dhp-a i.323; -rakkhā (f.) cow-keeping, tending cattle, usually combd with kasī, agriculturing MN i.85; Pv i.56; Ja i.338; Ja ii.128; given as a superior profession (ukkaṭṭha-kamma) Vin iv.6 -ravaka the bellowing of a cow MN i.225; -rasa (usually pl.) produce of the cow, enumd in set of five, viz khīra, dadhi, takka, navanīta, sappi (milk, cream buttermilk, butter, ghee) Vin i.244; Dhp-a i.158, Dhp-a i.323 Dhp-a i.397; Vv-a 147; Snp-a 322; -rūpa (collect.) cattle Ja i.194 Ja iv.173; Mil 396 (bull); -lakkhaṇa fortune telling from cows DN i.9≈; -vaccha (khīra˚ & takka˚) Vism 28; -vatika [Sk. govratin] one who lives after the mode of cows, of bovine practices MN i.387; Ne 99 (cp. govata Dhs-a 355, and Dhs. trsl. p. 261); -vikattana (and ˚vikantana; Sk. vikṛntana) a butcher’s knife MN i.244 MN i.449; AN iii.380 Sdhp 381 (vikatta only); -vittaka one whose wealth is cattle Ja i.191; -vinda the supt. of cowherds AN iii.373; -sappi ghee from cow’s milk Vin iii.251; Dhs-a 320; -sālā cow-stable AN i.188; -siṅga a cow’s horn Vism 254. -sita mixed with milk Vv-a 179 -sīla = govatika Dhs-a 355; -sīsa (nt.) an excellent kind of sandal wood Pv-a 215 (cp. Sp. AvS i.67, 68, 109) -hanuka the jaw bone of a cow, in ˚ena koṭṭāpeti (koṭṭh˚ J) to massage with a cow’s jaw bone Vin ii.266; Ja iv.188; Ja v.303.
Vedic go, Lat. bos, Gr. βοϋς, Ohg. chuo, Ags. cū = E. cow
(goṭavisa Text) v.l. Ja vi.225, part of a boat, the poop (expl. ib. p. 226 by nāvāya pacchimabandho).
a medicinal seed Vin i.201.
Sk. gotravṛkṣa? Kern
an ox, a bullock SN iv.195 sq.; Ja i.194 Ja iv.67; Pv i.82; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 40; Vv-a 63 (for ploughing) DN-a i.163; Dhp-a iii.60. -˚sira wild ox Ja vi.538(= araññagoṇaka).
The Sanskrit goṇa, according to B. R., is derived from the Pali
= goṇaka2, in ˚santhata (of a pallanka), covered with a woollen rug Vv 818; Pv iii.117; (text saṇṭhita v.l. BB goṇakatthata, cp. next).
a kind of ox, a wild bull Ja vi.538 (arañña˚).
goṇa1
a woollen cover with long fleece (DN-a i.86: dīghalomako mahākojavo; caturangulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni) DN i.7≈; SN iii.144; Ja v.506; Pv ii.128 Thig 378 (+ tūlika); Thag-a 253 (= dīgha-lomakāḷakojava). -˚atthata spread w. a goṇaka-cover AN i.137 AN iii.50 = AN iv.394; cp. iv.94, 231 (always of a pallaṅka) See also goṇa2.
Sk. BSk. goṇika, cp. Pischel, Beitr. iii.236; also spelled gonaka
an ox-stall Vin i.240; cp. Vin. Texts ii.121. As gonisādi Vin iii.46.
(nt.) ancestry, lineage. There is no word in English for gotta. It includes all those descended, or supposed to be descended, from a common ancestor. A gotta name is always distinguished from the personal name, the name drawn from place of origin or residence, or from occupation, and lastly from the nick-name. It probably means agnate rather than cognate. About a score of gotta names are known They are all assigned to the Buddha’s time. See also Rh. D. Dialogues i.27, 195 sq ■ jāti gotta lakkhaṇa Snp 1004; gotta salakkhaṇa Snp 1018; Ādiccā nāma gottena, Sākiyā nāma jātiyā Snp 423; jāti gotta kula Ja ii.3; jātiyā gottena bhogena sadisa “equal in rank lineage & wealth” Dhp-a ii.218 ■ evaṃ-gotta (adj. belonging to such & such an ancestry MN i.429; MN ii.20, MN ii.33 kathaṃ˚ of what lineage, or: what is your family name DN i.92; nānā˚ (pl.) of various families Pv ii.916 ■ With nāma (name & lineage, or nomen et cognomen): nāmagottaṃ Vin i.93; Vin ii.239; DN i.92 (expl. at DN-a i.257 paññatti-vasena nāmaṃ paveṇi-vasena gottaṃ: the name for recognition, the surname for lineage); Snp 648; Vv 8445 (with nāma & nāmadheyya; expl. at Vv-a 348 Vv-a 349: nāmadheyya, as Tisso, Phusso, etc.; gotta, as Bhaggavo Bhāradvājo, etc.) ■ gottena by the ancestral name: Vin i.93; DN ii.154; Snp 1019; Dhp 393; gottato same Ja i.56. Examples: Ambaṭṭha Kaṇhāyana-gottena DN i.92; Vipassī Koṇḍañño g˚; Kakusandho Kassapo g˚ Bhagavā Gotamo g˚ DN ii.3; Nāgito Kassapo g˚ DN-a i.310 Vasudevo Kaṇho g˚ Pv-a 94.
-thaddha conceited as regards descent (+ jāti˚ dhana˚) Snp 104; -pañha question after one’s family name Snp 456; -paṭisārin (adj.) relying on lineage DN i.99 (cp. Dialogues i.122); AN v.327 sq.; -bandhava connected by family ties (ñāti˚ + ) Nd ii.455; -rakkhita protected by a (good) name Snp 315; Vv-a 72; -vāda talk over lineage, boasting as regards descent DN i.99.
Vedic gotra, to go
f. gottī protectress Ja v.329.
n. ag. to gopeti = Sk. goptṛ
“become of the lineage”; a technical term used from the end of the Nikāya period to designate one, whether layman or bhikkhu, who, as converted, was no longer of the worldlings (puthujjanā), but of the Ariyas, having Nibbāna as his aim. It occurs in a supplementary Sutta in the Majjhima (Vol. III. 256), and in another found in two versions, at the end of the Anguttara (A iv.373 and v.23). Defined at Pp 12, Pp 13 & Vism 138 amplified at Pts i.66–68, frequent in P (Tikap. 154 sq. 165, 324 etc.), mentioned at Vv-a 155. On the use of gotrabhū in medieval psychology see Aung, in Compendium 66
68. Comp. the use of upanissaya at Ja i.235-˚ñāṇa, PPA 184; Vism 673. Ā˚ Vism 683.
a kind of bird Ja vi.358.
(f ■ adj.) being able to be paired (of a young cow), or being with calf (?) Snp 26.
(f.) iguana, a large kind of lizard Vin i.215–16 (˚mukha); DN i.9≈(˚lakkhaṇa, cp. DN-a i.94); Ja ii.118; Ja iii.52; Ja iii.538; Dhp-a iii.420. As godha (m.) at Ja v.489. Dimin. golikā at Ja ii.147.
Sk. godhā
(f.) string of a lute Ja vi.580 (cp. RV. 8, 58, 9).
wheat (usually mentioned with yava, spelt) Mil 267; DN-a i.163; Snp-a 323. See dhañña.
a guardian, watchman DN-a i.148; cp. khetta˚.
(f.) protecting, protection, care, watchfulness (cp. gutti) Pp 24 (+ gutti) Dhs 1347; Mil 8, Mil 243.
(f.) a beam supporting the framework of a roof, shaped *Λ; fig. of old people, bent by age (see ˚vanka) Vin iii.65, Vin iii.81; SN ii.263; SN iii.156; SN v.43, SN v.228; MN i.80; AN i.261; AN iii.364; AN v.21; Vism 320; Dhp-a ii.190; Vv-a 188.
-gaṇā (pl.) a collection of beams, the rafters Vv 784 -bhogga (-sama) bent like a rafter (nārī) Ja iii.395 -vaṅka (gopānasi˚) as crooked as a rafter (of old people cp. BSk. gopānasī-vakra Avs ii.25n5) SN i.117; MN i.88; AN i.138.
(adj.) protected, guarded, watched (lit. & fig.) Ja vi.367; Mil 345; Snp-a 116 (˚indriya guttindriya); Sdhp 398.
pp. of gopeti
to watch, guard, pot. gopetha Dhp 315 ■ pp. gopita (q.v.).
Sk. gopayati, gup; cp. gutta, gottā
the ankle Vin iv.112; AN iv.102; Ja v.472; Dhp-a ii.80, Dhp-a ii.214; Snp-a ii.230.
Dem. of goppha = Sk. gulpha
an owner of cows SN i.6 = Snp 33, Snp 34.
Sk. gomin
see godhā1.
(adj.) like a cluster; in phrase massuṃ golomikaṃ kārāpeti “to have the beard trimmed into a ball-or cluster-shape Vin ii.134. Bdhgh’s expln “like a goat’s beard” (cp Vin. Texts iii.138) is based on pop. etym. go + loma ika “cow-hair-like,” the discrepancy being that go does not mean goat.
inverted diaeretic form fr. Sk. gulma = P. gumba: viz. *golmika → *golmika → golomika
a ball Thag-a 255 (kīḷā˚).
Gh.
(adj ■ suffix to ghan ) killing, destroying, see hanati ■ iṇagha at Snp 246 is v.l. SS for iṇaghāta. Cp. paṭi & see also ghana;2 & ghāta.;
to rub, crush, grind, SN ii.238; Ja i.190 (= ghasituṃ? to next?) 216; vi.331 ■ Caus ghaṃsāpeti to rub against, to allow to be rubbed or crushed Vin ii.266. Cp. upani˚, pari˚, & pahaṃsati;1. Pass. ghaṃsīyati (ghaṃsiyati) to rub (intr.), to be rubbed Vin i.204; Vin ii.112.
Sk. gharṣati, *ghṛṣ to *gher to rub or grind, cp. Gr. ξέραδος, ξερμάς, ξρίω, enlarged in Lat. frendo Ags. grindan to grind
to be pleased, to rejoice Ja iv.56 (v.l. ghasati). Cp. pahaṃsati2.
= haṃsati for Sk. haṛsati, see haṃsati
rubbing, in pāda-gh ˚ī a towel for rubbing the feet Vin ii.130.
in go˚, cow-hide (?) see go.
(f.) destruction (usually -˚) DN iii.67 (mūla˚); Ja i.176 (sakuṇa˚).
fr. hanati, han and ghan
(adj.-n.) killing, destroying (-˚) see atta˚.;
fr. Sk. ghana to han, cp. ghānya & hatya
a hollow vessel, a bowl, vase, pitcher. Used for holding water, as well as for other purposes, which are given under pānīya˚ paribhojana vacca˚ at Vin i.157 = Vin i.352 = MN i.207. In the Vinaya freq. combd with kolamba, also a deep vessel: i.209 213, 225, 286 ■ As water-pitcher: Ja i.52, Ja i.93 (puṇṇa˚) 166; Vv-a 118, Vv-a 207, Vv-a 244 (˚satena nhāto viya); Pv-a 66 (udaka˚), 179 (pānīya˚), 282 ■ In general: SN iv.196 For holding a light (in formula antoghaṭe padīpo viya upanissayo pajjalati) Ja i.235 (cp. kuṭa), Pv-a 38. Used as a drum Ja vi.277 (= kumbhathūna); as bhadda Sdhp 319, Sdhp 329.
-pamāṇa (adj.) of the size of a large pot Ja ii.104; Pv-a 55.
Non-Aryan?
(m. & f.) multitude, heap, crowd, dense mass, i.e. thicket, cluster. itthi˚ a crowd of women Ja iv.316 maccha˚ a swarm of fish Ja ii.227; vana˚ dense forest Ja ii.385; Ja iv.56; Ja v.502; Ja vi.11, Ja vi.519, Ja vi.564; brahma company of brahmins Ja vi.99.
Sk. ghaṭā; conn. with ganthati to bind together
1. a small jar (?) Vin ii.129, Vin ii.130 (combd w. kataka & sammajjanī); cp. Vin. Texts iii.130.
2. the capital of a pillar Ja i.32 (cp. kumbha).
Dem. of prec.
to apply oneself to, to exert oneself to strive; usually in formula uṭṭhahati gh˚ vāyamati MN i.86; SN i.267 (yamati for vāy˚); Pp 51; or yuñjati gh˚ vāy˚ Ja iv.131 ■ Sdhp 426, Sdhp 450.
Sk. ghaṭate, to granth, cp. ganthati. The Dhtp gives two roots ghaṭ; of which one is expld by “ghāṭane” (No. 554), the other by “īhāyaṃ,” i.e. from exertion (No. 98)
see Ghaṭṭana].
(f.) a small bowl, used for begging alms Thig 422 (= Thag-a 269: bhikkhā-kapāla).
to ghaṭa1
(f.) 1. a small stick, a piece of a branch a twig Ja i.331; Ja iv.87 (khadira˚); vi.331; Thig 499 (= khaṇḍa Thag-a 290). upadhānaghaṭikā Ja iii.179 (belonging to the outfit of an executioner); pāsa Ja ii.253 is a sort of magic stick or die (= pāsaka) 2. a game of sticks (“tip-cat” sticks Mil trsl. ii.32) DN i.6≈(DN-a i.85: ghaṭikā ti vuccati dīgha-daṇḍakena rassa daṇḍaka-paharaṇa kīḷā, tip-cat); Vin ii.10 Vin iii.181; MN i.266; AN v.203; Mil 229.
3. a stack of twigs SN ii.178, SN ii.4; (a stick used as) a bolt Vin ii.120 Vin ii.208; Vin iii.119; usually as sūci˚ a needle-shaped stick Vin ii.237 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.106); SN iv.290; Ud 52; Ja i.346. Cp. gaṇḍikādhāna.
to ghaṭa2, orig. meaning “knot,” cp. gantha & gaṇṭhi, also; gaṇḍa
connected, combined Vism 192.
pp. of ghaṭeti
(f.) a jar Dhp-a i.426. In cpds. also ghaṭi˚.
-odana rice boiled in a jar Dhp-a i.426; -kaṭāha a water pot, or rather a bowl for gathering alms (cp. ghaṭikā1 Vin ii.115 (= ghaṭi-kapāla Bdhgh); -kāra a potter Dhp-a i.380; Np. of a kumbhakāra SN i.35, SN i.60; MN ii.45 sq (= ˚suttanta, mentioned as such at Dhp-a iii.251); Ja i.43.
to ghaṭa1
1. to be connected or continued Dhp-a i.46 (paveṇī na gh.), 174.
2. to be obstructed Nd ii.102 (= virujjhati, paṭihaññati).
Pass. of ghaṭeti
to join, to connect, to unite Ja i.139; freq. in anusandhiṃ ghaṭetvā adding the connection (between one rebirth & another) Ja i.220, Ja i.308.
Denom. fr. ghaṭa2, cp. gantheti
see araghaṭṭa; meaning “rubbed, knocked against” in phrase ghaṭṭa-pāda-tala Snp-a 582 (for ugghaṭṭha) also at Vin iv.46 in def. of vehāsa-kuṭī (a cell or hut with air, i.e., spacious, airy) as majjhimassa purisassa a-sīsa-ghaṭṭā “so that a man of medium height does not knock his head (against the ceiling)”; of uncertain meaning (“beating”?) at Ja i.454 (v.l. for T. ghota).
(nt.) 1. combining, putting together, combination, composition Ja i.220; PA. 312, etc.
2. striking, fig. insulting (ghaṭṭana = āsajjana) Vv-a 55. To meaning “strike” cp. saṃghaṭṭana.
Sk. ghaṭana, to granth, cp. gantha
to strike, beat, knock against, touch; fig. to offend, mock, object to. (a) lit. MN ii.4 (jannukena; text reads ghatteti, v.l. ghaṭeti); Snp 48 (= saṃ˚ Nd ii.233); Ja i.218; Pv iv.109 (= paṭihaṃsati Pv-a 271); DN-a i.256 (= khuṃseti); Dhp-a i.251 ■ (b) fig AN iii.343; Snp 847 (cp. Nd i.208); Vism 18 ■ pp ghaṭṭita Pp 30, Pp 36; psychologically ghaṭṭayati = ruppati B or SN iii.86 ■ Pass. ghaṭīyati (q.v.) ■ Cp. āsajja and ugghāṭeti.
Sk. ghaṭṭayati
(f.) a small bell (cp. kinkanikā) Ja iv.215; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 37, Vv-a 279 (khuddaka˚). As ghaṇṭī at Vism 181.
(nt.) clarified butter Vv-a 326; Mil 41; Sdhp 201 (-bindu) With ref. to the sacrificial fire (fire as eating ghee, or being sprinkled w. ghee) ghatāsana; Ja i.472; Ja v.64, Ja v.446; Pv i.85 (ghatasitta).
Vedic ghṛta, ghṛ; to sprinkle, moisten
(a) (adj.) solid, compact, massive; dense, thick; in eka˚ of one solid mass (of sela, rock) Vin i.185 = Dhp 81 = Thag 643; Mil 386; AN iii.378, cp. ghanasela-pabbata Dhp-a i.74-gh. paṃsu Ja i.264, paṭhavī (solid ground) Ja i.74; Pv-a 75; palāsa (foliage) Pv-a 113; buddharasmiyo Ja i.12; ˚maṃsa solid, pure flesh Dhp-a i.80; ˚sāṭaka (thick cloth) Ja i.292; ˚sañchanna (thickly covered Pv-a 258; ˚suvaṇṇakoṭṭima Dhp-a iv.135; abbha˚ a thick cloud Snp 348 (cp. Snp-a 348) ■ (b) (m. the foetus at a certain stage (the last before birth the 4;th in the enum. of the foll. stages: kalala, abbuda pesī, gh.) SN i.206; Ja iv.496; Mil 40; Vism 236. The latter meaning is semantically to be explained as “swelling” & to be compared with Gr.; βρύω to swell and ε ̔́μβρυον = embryo (the gravid uterus).
Vedic ghana, cp. Gr. εὐχηνής?
a club, a stick, a hammer; in ayo˚ an iron club Vv-a 20. Also coll. term for a musical instrument played by striking, as cymbal, tambourine etc. Vv-a 37.
Vedic ghana to hanti (ghanti, cp. ghātayati), *gṷhen “strike,” cp. Gr. χείνω, φόνος, Lat. of-fendo Ags. gud, Ohg. gundea
a class of devas (cloud-gods?) Mil 191.
to ghana1 in meaning of “cloud” (Sk.)
heat; hot season, summer. Either in loc. ghamme Ja iv.172 (= gimha-kāle); Pv iv.53 ghammani (“in summer” or “by the heat”) SN i.143; Ja iii.360 (sampareta overcome by heat); Snp 353; Ja iv.239; Ja v.3 ■ Or. in cpd. with ˚abhitatta (ghammâbhitatta, overpowered by heat) MN i.74; DN ii.266; AN iii.187 sq.; Snp 1014 (cp. 353 ghammatatta); Mil 318; Vv-a 40; Pv-a 114.
Vedic gharma = Gr. χερμός, Lat. formus, Ohg. etc. warm; to *gṷher “warm,” cp. Sk. ghṛṇoti, hara Gr. χέρος, etc.
(nt.; pl. ˚ā Dhp 241, Dhp 302) a house AN ii.68; Snp 43 (gahaṭṭhā gharaṃ āvasantā), 337 (abl gharā), 889 (id. gharamhā); Ja i.290 (id. gharato) iv.2, 364, 492 (ayo˚); Pp 57; Mil 47. Combd with vatthu Pv-a 3, Pv-a 17 ■ sūcighara a needle-case Vv-a 251.
-ājira house-yard Vism 144 (where Dhs A 116 in id. passage reads gharadvāra). -āvāsa the household life (as contrasted with the life of a mendicant) Vin ii.180 (gharāvāsatthaṃ); AN ii.208; MN i.179, MN i.240, MN i.267 MN i.344; Snp 406 (cp. SN v.350); Ja i.61; Pv-a 61; -kapoṭa [Sk. gṛhakapota] the house-pigeon Mil 364, Mil 403 -golikā house or domestic lizard Ja ii.147. -dāsī a female house-slave Pv ii.321; -dvāra a house-door Ja iv.142; Dhs A 116; Pv-a 93; -bandhana the bonds of the house i.e. the establishing of marriage Dhp-a i.4; -mukha an opening in the house, the front of the house Nd ii.177; -mesin one who looks after the house, a pater familias, householder Snp 188; Iti 112 (gahaṭṭha + ) Ja vi.575; -sandhi a cleft or crevice in the house Pv-a 24 -sūkara a tame, domestic pig Dhp-a iv.16.
cp. gaha & geha
(˚-); in -˚dinnakābādha sickness in consequence of a poisonous drink (expl. as suffering fr. the results of sorcery) Vin i.206 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.60); -visa poison Pp 48; Dhp-a ii.38 -sappa a poisonous snake Dhp-a ii.256.
a drink (cp. gala) & garala poison
(f.) a house-wife Vin i.271; SN i.201; Pv iii.19 (= ghara-sāminī Pv-a 174); Dhp-a iii.209.
fr. ghara1
(adj.-n.) eating, an eater; in mahagghasa a big eater AN v.149 (of the crow); Dhp 325; Mil 288.
to eat Ja iii.210; ppr. ghasamāna Vin ii.201; Thag 749 ■ Cp ghasa, ghasta & ghāsa. See also jaddhu. Desid jighacchati.;
Vedic grasati & *ghasti, pp. grasta, cp. Gr.; γράω to gnaw, γράστις fodder, Lat. gramen grass
only in vanka˚ having eaten or swallowed the hook (cp. grasta-vanka) DN ii.266 (v-g˚ va ambujo); Ja vi.113.
pp. of ghasati = Sk. grasta
see saṃ˚; ghāṭana see ghaṭati.
(usually -˚) killing murdering; slaughter, destruction, robbery DN i.135 (gāma˚, etc. village robbery); setu˚ the pulling down of a bridge (fig.) Vin i.59, etc. (see setu); pantha highway robbery, brigandage, “waylaying” Ja i.253. Thig 474, Thig 493 (= samugghāta Com.); Snp 246 (ina˚) Vv-a 72 (pāṇa˚ + pāṇa-vadha & ˚atipāta). Cp. next vi˚; saṃ˚.
Sk. ghāta & ghātana; to han (ghan), strike, kill; see etym. under ghana2 & hanti
(adj ■ ˚) murdering, destroying, slaughtering Vin i.89 (arahanta˚), 136 (id.), 168 (id.); ii.194 (manussa˚); iv.260 (tala˚) Ja iv.366 (gāma˚ corā robbers infesting the village); v.397 (thī˚ = itthi˚); Pp 56 (maccha˚) ■ As noun: (m.) one who slays, an executioner: go˚ a bull-slaughterer MN i.244, etc. (see go) cora˚ an executioner or hangman Ja iii.41; Pp 56; Pv-a 5 ■ (nt.) brigandage, robbery, slaughtering gāmaghātakaṃ karoti Ja i.200.
(f. abstr. to ghātaka) murder Ja i.176 sq.
(adj.) killed, destroyed Thag-a 289; also in Der. ghātitatta (nt.) the fact of having killed Ja i.167. Cp. ugghātita.
pp. of ghāteti
(adj.-n.) killing; a murderer Ja i.168 (pāṇa˚); vi.67 (ghātimhi = ghātake).
(adj.) able to strike, able to pierce (of a needle), in ghana˚ going through hard material easily Ja iii.282.
tc kill, slay, slaughter Iti 22 (yo na hanti na ghāteti) Dhp 129, Dhp 405; Ja i.255; Mvu vii.35, Mvu vii.36 ■ aor. aghātayi Ja i.254; ger. ghātetvā Ja i.166 ■ Caus. ghātāpeti to have somebody killed Ja iv.124 ■ Cp. ghacca, ghātita āghāteti.
Denom. fr. ghāta, cp. Sk. ghātayati to han
(nt.) the nose; usually in its function as organ of smell = sense of smell (either in phrase ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyati: to smell an odour by means of the nose; or in ghana-viññeyyā gandhā odours which are sensed by the nose). In the enum. of the senses gh. is always mentioned in the 3rd place (after cakkhu & sota, eye & ear); see under rūpa. In this connection: Vin i.34; DN i.21, DN i.245 DN iii.102, DN iii.244 sq.; SN i.115; MN i.112, MN i.191; MN ii.42; Dhp 360 Pp 20; Mil 270; Vism 444 sq. (with defn) ■ In other connections: Pv ii.24 (ghāna-chinna, one whose nose is cut off).
-āyatana the organ of smell DN iii.243, DN iii.280; Dhs 585 Dhs 605, Dhs 608; -indriya the sense of smell DN iii.239; Dhs 585 etc. (as above); -dhātu the element of smell Dhs as above; -viññāṇa perception of smell Dhs 443, Dhs 608 Dhs 628; -samphassa contact with the sense of smell SN i.115; DN iii. & Dhs as above.;
Sk. ghrāṇa to ghrā, see ghāyati. On n for ṇ cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 81
to smell, always with gandhaṃ; ger. ghātvā SN iv.71, SN iv.74 or ghāyitvā Ja i.210 (jālagandhaṃ); iii.52 (macchagandhaṃ); Mil 347. Cp. sāyati & upagghāyati.;
Sk. ghrāti & jighrati, to; ghrā, cp. gandha
to be consumed, to be tormented by thirst Pv i.1110 (ghāyire = ghāyanti Pv-a 60 v.l. BB jhāyire & jhāynati) Mil 397.;
a variant of jhāyati
grass for fodder, pasturing: food Ja i.511 (˚ṃ kurute); Pv-a 173 (˚atthāya gacchati “go feeding”) Mostly in: -esana search for food (= gocara) SN i.141; Snp 711 ■ Cp. vi˚.
-chada (chāda & chādana) food & clothing, i.e. tending, fostering, good care (= posana) (act.) or being well looked after, well provided (pass.); chada: Pp 51 chāda: Ja i.94; AN i.107; AN ii.85; AN iii.385; chādana DN i.60; MN i.360; Vv-a 23, Vv-a 137; -hāraka one who fetches the fodder (food) Thag 910.
Vedic ghāsa, fr. ghasati, q.v. cp. Lat. gramen = grass
(nt.) = ghāsa; in -˚ṭṭhāna pasture (= gocara) Vv-a 218.
proclaimed, announced; renowned Ja i.50 (of festival) 425 (nakkhattaṃ); ii.248 (ussava); Pv ii.82 (dūra˚ of wide renown, world-famed of Bārāṇasī); Dhp-a iii.100 (chaṇe ghuṭṭhe when the fair was opened).
Sk. ghuṣṭa, pp. ghuṣ, see ghoseti & cp. saṃ˚
onomat. expression of snoring & grunting noise in -passāsa (& ˚in) snoring & breathing heavily, panting, snorting & puffing SN i.117 (of Māra); Ja i.160 (of sleeping bhikkhus gh˚ kākacchamānā breathing loud & snoring) Cp. next.;
gṛ-gṛ to; *gel or *ger, see note on gala
to snore Ja iii.538; Dhp-a i.307. Cp. Prk. ghurughuranti varāhā (grunting hogs) & ghurukkanti vagghā (roaring tigers).;
Denom. fr. prec.
a (bad) horse Ja vi.452.
cp. Sk. ghoṭaka, Halāyudha 2, 281
is read at Ja i.454, probably for ghaṭṭa; meaning is “striking, stroke,” combd with kasā, whip.
(adj.) terrible, frightful, awful Vin ii.147. Freq. as attr. of niraya (syn. with dāruṇa Pv-a 87, Pv-a 159, Pv-a 206) Pv i.1012; iv.18. Of an oath (sapatha Pv i.68; ii.1216 ■ ghorassara of a terrible cry (Ep. of an ass) Mil 363, Mil 365.
Vedic ghora, orig. meaning, wailing, howling, lamenting, to *gher, *ger, see note on gala & cp. ghuru A root; ghur is given by Dhtp 487 in meaning of “bhīma,” i.e. horrible ■ Rel. to Goth. gaurs, sad; Ohg gōrag, miserable; & perhaps Lat. funus, funeral. See Walde,; Lat. Wtb. s. v.
1. shout, sound, utterance Vin ii.155 (“Buddha”-ghosa); MN i.294; AN i.87, AN i.228 Snp p.106; Snp 696, Snp 698; Dhs 637, Dhs 720 (+ ghosa-kamma)
2. shouting, howling, wailing (of Petas) Pv iii.34iv.36, 338.
-pamāṇa to be measured (or judged) by one’s reputation AN ii.71 = Pp 53; also as pamāṇika Dhp-a iii.114 (in same context).
Vedic ghoṣa to ghus
(adj.) sounding, proclaiming, shouting out (-˚), in dhamma˚ praising the Law Ja ii.286; Satthu guṇa sounding the praise of the Master Dhp-a iii.114. As n Name of a deva (Gh. devaputta) Dhp-a i.173.
(f.) fame, renown, praise, in Māra˚ Ja i.71.
(adj.) full of sound, roaring Ja iii.189.
1. proclaimed, renowned, Pv-a 107 (= ghuṭṭha); Vv-a 31 (nakkhattaṃ). As Npl Ghositārāma Dhp-a i.53, Dhp-a i.161, Dhp-a i.208.
2. [n. ag. = ghositṛ cp. ghosaka] one who proclaims, advocates, or heralds in Np. Ghositaseṭṭhi Dhp-a i.187.
pp. of ghoseti
to proclaim, announce; cry aloud, wail, shout Ja ii.112; Ja iii.52; Pv ii.937 (= uggh˚); iv.63; pp. ghosita & ghuṭṭha (q.v.) ■ Caus.; ghosāpeti to have proclaimed Ja i.71.
C.
Denom. of ghosa, cp. Sk. ghoṣayati, caus. to ghuṣ
(indef. enchtic particle) 1. Indefinite (after demonstr. pron. in the sense of kiṃ = what about? or how is it? cp. kiṃ) = ever, whoever what-ever, etc. [Sk. kaśca, Gr. ὁς τε, Lat: quisque Goth. hvazuh] so ca whoever (see below 3), tañ ca pan amhākaṃ ruccati tena c’ amhā attamanā MN i.93; yañ ca kho… ceteti yañ ca pakappeti… whatever he thinks, whatever he intends… SN ii.65. As a rule the Pali form corresp. to Sk. kaśca is *kascid = koci & ci (cid) is the regular P. representative of the indefinite ca (cp. cana & api).
2.; Copulative or disjunctive according to the general context being positive or negative. (a) copulative: and, then, now: tadā ca now then, and then (in historical exposition) Ja iii.188 Most frequent in connecting two or three words, usually placed after the second, but also after the third: atthaṃ anatthañ ca Dhp 256; pubbâparāni ca Dhp 352 alaṃ etehi ambehi jambūhi panasehi ca Ja ii.160 ■ In the same sense added to each link of the chain as ca-ca (cp. Sk. ca-ca, Gr. τε τε, Lat. que que; also mixed with constituents of similar pairs as api-ca, cp. τε και) tuyhañ ca tassā ca to you and her (orig. this or whatever to you, whatever to her) = to you as well as to her Ja i.151. Often with the first member emphasized by eva: c’ eva, as well as: hasi c’ eva rodi ca he laughed as well as cried Ja i.167; maṃsena c’ eva phalāphalena ca with flesh as well as with all kinds of fruit Ja iii.127 subhaddako c’ eva supesalo ca Ja iii.82; c’ eva apace padūse pi ca waste and even defile Thag-a 72 (Ap v.40). (b) disjunctive: but (esp. after a negation): yo ca but who Thag 401; yadā ca but when (cp. tadā ca) Ja iii.128 In conditional clauses (cp. 3) combd with sace = but if on the other hand: sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasati… sace ca pabbajati agārā Snp 1003. With neg, na ca = but not: mahatī vata te bondi, na ca paññā tadūpikā (but your wisdom is not in the same proportion) Ja ii.160. 3. Conditional: if [ = Vedic ced, Lat. absque] DN i.186
207; ii.36, 57 (jāti ca not va); MN i.91; SN iii.66 (rūpañ ca attā abhavissa); AN i.58; AN v.87; Ja ii.110 (ciram pi kho khadeyya yavaṃ… ravamāno ca dūsayi: “he might have caten a long time, if he had not come to harm by his cry,” or “but”); iv.487; v.185, 216 (Sakko ca me varaṃ dajjā so ca labbhetha me varo: “if S. will give me a wish, that wish will be granted,” or: “whatever wish he will allow, that one will be fulfilled”); vi.206 208 ■ na ca (at the beginning of an interrog. phrase) if not SN i.190 (ahaṃ ca kho… pavāremi, na ca me Bhagavā kiñci garahati: if the Bh. will not blame me) For BSk. ca = ced see Avs ii.189, n. o.
Vedic ca adv. to rel. pron. *qṷo, idg. *que = Gr. τε, Lat. que, Goth ■ h. Cp. ka ki, ku
(adj.) disturbed; afraid, timid Dāvs iv.35, Dāvs iv.46.
Sk. cakita, cak
the francolin partridge (Perdix rufa) Ja v.416; Vv 358 Vv-a 163. See also cankora.
Sk. cakora to kol (kor), see note on gala
(nt.) I. Crude meaning: 1. a wheel (of a carriage) Dhp 1; Pv-a 65 (ratha˚); Mil 27.
2. a discus used as a missile weapon Ja i.74; Pgdp 36; cp khura˚ a razor as an instr. of torture.
3. a disc, a circle: heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni, forming the 2nd characteristic mark of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.17 DN iii.143; DN iii.149 ■ Ja ii.331; Mil 51.
4. an array of troops (under tayo vyūhā: paduma˚ cakka˚ sakaṭa˚ Ja ii.404 = Ja iv.343 ■ II. Applied meaning: 1. (a wheel as component part of a carriage, or one of a duad or tetrad = ) collection, set, part; succession; sphere region, cycle Vin i.330 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.281); iii.96 iriyāpatha˚ the 4 ways of behaviour, the various positions (standing, walking, sitting, lying down) DN-a i.249 Sdhp 604. sā˚, miga˚ the sphere or region of dogs wild animals Mil 178; cakkena (instr.) in succession Pv-a iii. cakkaṃ kātabbaṃ, or bandhitabbaṃ freq. in Yam. and Paṭṭh, “The cycle of formulated words is to be here repeated.”
2. (like the four wheels constituting the moving power of a carriage = ) a vehicle, instrument, means & ways; attribute, quality state, condition, esp. good condition (fit instrumentality) catucakka an instr. of four, a lucky tetrad, a fourwheeler of the body as expressing itself in the four kinds of deportment, iriyāpathas AN ii.32; SN i.16, SN i.63 (catucakkaṃ). In this sense generalized as a happy state consisting of “4 blessings”: paṭirūpadesa-vāsa, sappurisûpassaya atta-sammāpaṇidhi, pubbe-kata-puññatā AN ii.32; Ja v.114; mentioned at Pts i.84. Cp. also Snp 554 sq.; 684. Esp. pronounced in the two phrases dhamma-cakka (the wheel of the Doctrine, i.e. the symbol of conquering efficacy, or happiness implicated in the D.) and brahma-c˚ the best wheel, the supreme instrument, the noblest quality. Both with pavatteti to start & kcep up (like starting & guiding a carriage), to set rolling, to originate, to make universally known.; dhamma˚; e.g. SN i.191; AN i.23, AN i.101; AN ii.34, AN ii.120 AN iii.151; AN iv.313; Snp 556 sq.; 693; Ja iii.412; Pts ii.159 sq.; Pv-a 67 (see dhamma). brahma˚; MN i.71; SN ii.27; AN ii.9, AN ii.24; AN iii.9, AN iii.417; AN v.33; Vb 317 sq.; 344 (see brahma). Cp. cakkavattin (below) ■ Cp. vi˚.
-chinna (udaka) (water of a well) the wheel of which is broken Ud 83; -bhañjanin one who destroys a state of welfare & good Ja v.112 (patirāpadesavāsādino kusala-cakkassa bhañjanī C.); -bheda breaking peace or concord, sowing discord Vin ii.198; Vin iii.171; -yuga a pair of wheels Vv 832; -ratana the treasure of the wheel that is of the sun (cp. Rh. D. Buddh. Suttas p. 252 Dialogues ii.197, 102) DN ii.171; DN iii.59 sq., 75; Ja i.63 Ja ii.311; DN-a i.249. See also cakkavattin; -vaṭṭaka (nt. a scoop-wheel (a wheel revolving over a well with a string of earthen pots going down empty & coming up full, after dredger fashion) Vin ii.122; -vattin (cp dhammacakkaṃ pavatteti above) he who sets rolling the Wheel, a just & faithful king (rājā hoti c. dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto Snp p.106, in corresp. pass v. 1002 as vijeyya pathaviṃ imaṃ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena-m-anusāsati). A definition is given by Bdhgh. at DN-a i.249 ■ Three sorts of c. are later distinguished: a cakkavāla-c˚ a universal king, or cāturanta-c˚ (ruling over four great continents Snp p.106 Kp-a 227), a dīpa-c˚ (ruling over one), a padesa-c (ruling over part of one) Usually in phrase rājā cakka vattin: DN i.88; DN iii.156; DN iv.302; DN v.44, DN v.99, DN v.342; DN ii.16 DN ii.172; DN iii.59 sq., 75, 142 sq.; MN iii.65; AN i.76, AN i.109 sq. AN ii.37, AN ii.133, AN ii.245; AN iii.147 sq; 365; iv.89, 105; v.22; Kp viii.12 (˚sukha); Ja i.51; Ja ii.395; Ja iv.119; Vb 336; Pv-a 117; Vv-a 18; Sdhp 238, Sdhp 453; Dhp-a ii.135 (˚sirī)-˚gabbha Vism 126:-˚rajjaṃ kāresi Ja ii.311; -viddha (nt.) a particular form of shooting Ja v.130; -samārūḷha (adj.) having mounted the wheels, i.e. their carts (of janapadā) AN i.178; AN iii.66, AN iii.104.
Vedic cakra, redupl. formation fr. *quel to turn round (cp. P. kaṇṭha → Lat. collus & see also note on gala) = that which is (continuously) turning, i.e. wheel, or abstr, the shape or periphery of it, i.e. circle; Cakra = Gr. κύκλος, Ags. hveohl, hveol = wheel. The unredupl. form in Sk. carati (versatur), Gr. πέλομαι, πολεύω, πόλος (pole); Lat. colo, incolo; Obulg. kolo wheel, Oisl. hvel
a disc or tuft (?) Vism 255 (kaḷīra˚, where Kp-a 50 reads in same context kaḷīra-daṇḍa).
fr. cakka
(f.) drapery Vin ii.174.
a window blind, curtain Vin ii.148.
the ruddy goose (Anas Casarca Ja iii.520; Ja iv.70 sq. (Name of Ja No. 451); Pv ii.123; Mil 364, Mil 401 ■ f. cakkavākī Ja iii.524; Ja vi.189 = Ja vi.501.
Vedic cakravāka, cp. kṛkavāku, to sound root kṛ, see note on gala
(m. & nt.) a circle, a sphere, esp. a mythical range of mountains supposed to encircle the world; pl worlds or spheres Ja i.53, Ja i.203; Ja vi.330; Vism 205 (its extent), 207, 367, 421; Dhs-a 297; Dhp-a 11. 15; iii.498; in the trope “cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ brahmaloko atinīco” (= the whole world cannot hold it) to express immensity Dhp-a i.310; Vv-a 68.
-gabbha the interior of the C. sphere Ja iv.119; DN-a i.284; -pabbata (nt.) the C. mountains, “world’s end Ja iii.32; Ja vi.272; -rajja (nt.) the whole world, strictly speaking the whole region of a sphere Ja ii.392.
(nt.) [Vedic cakṣuḥ, etym. not clear, as redupl. perhaps to īks, akṣa eye, kṣạṇa moment, or as intens to cit, cp. cinteti, & see Walde,; Lat. Wtb. under inquam the eye (nom. sg. cakkhuṃ Vin i.34; SN i.115; MN iii.134 etc.) ■ I. The eye as organ of sense-(a) psychologically cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā “seeing visible object (shape with the eye” (Nd ii.on rūpa q.v.) is the defiName of this first & most important of the senses (cp. Pv ii.61 dakkhiṇa c. = the most valuable thing): the psychology of sight is discussed at DN-a i.194 sq., and more fully at Dhs 597 sq. (see Dhs-a 306 sq; Dhs trsl. 173 sq.); cp. cak khunā puriso ālokati rūpagatāni Nd ii.234. In any enumeration of the senses cakkhu heads the list, e.g. Vin i.34; DN i.21; DN ii.308, DN ii.336 sq.; DN iii.102, DN iii.225, DN iii.244 sq.; 269 Ne 28 ■ See rūpa. Also combd. with sota: MN i.318 MN iii.264; AN i.281 ■ cakkhusmiṃ haññati rūpehi SN iv.201 hata˚ AN i.129. passāmi naṃ manasā cakkhunā va “I see him with my mind as with my eye” Snp 1142 ■ Vin i.184; SN i.32, SN i.199; SN iv.123; Dhp 360; Ja iv.137; DN-a i.183; Ne 191. Vism 444 sq. As adj. (-˚) seeing, having or catching sight of: eka˚ (dvi˚) one-eyed (two˚) AN i.128 sq.; āmisa seeing an object of sensual enjoyment SN ii.226; SN iv.159; Ja v.91 (= kilesalola). acakkhu blind AN iii.250, AN iii.256; Pts i.129 ■ (b) ethically: as a “sense” belonging to what is called “body” (kāya) it shares all the qualities of the latter (see kāya), & is to be regarded as an instr. only i.e. the person must not value it by itself or identify himself with it. Subduing the senses means in the first place acquiring control over one’s eyes (cp. okkhitta cakkhu with down-cast eyes Snp 63, Snp 411, Snp 972; Pv iv.344; & indriyesu guttadvāra; ˚indriya). In this connection the foll passages may be mentioned: Vin i.34; DN i.70; SN iv.123 SN ii.244 (aniccaṃ, etc.); iii.255 (do.) iv.81, 128 (na tumhākaṃ); Pts I.132 (aniccatṭhaṃ). Numerous others see under rūpa ■ II. The eve as the most important channel of mental acquiring, as faculty of perception & apperception; insight, knowledge (cp. veda, ολδα to vid, to see). In connection with ñāṇa (γη ̈ωσις) it refers to the apperception of the truth (see dhamma-cakkhu): intuition and recognition, which means perfect understanding (cp. the use of the phrase jānāti passati “to know and to see” = to understand clearly). See e.g. SN ii.7–11, 105; iv.233; v.179; 258; 422 sq. Most frequently as dhamma˚; “the eye of the truth,” said of the attainment of that right knowledge which leads to Arahantship, in phrase virajaṃ vitamalaṃ dh-cakkhuṃ uppajjati Vin i.16; DN i.86, DN i.110; SN ii.134 sq.; SN iv.47 SN iv.107; SN v.467; AN iv.186; Pts ii.150 sq.; 162; Mil 16 Similarly paññā˚, Iti 52; ariya˚ MN i.510 ■ III. The eye as the instr. of supersensuous perception, “clear” sight clairvoyance. This is the gift of favoured beings whose senses are more highly developed than those of others and who through right cognition have acquired the two “eyes” or visionary faculties, termed dibba- cakkhu & buddha- cakkhu Iti 52; DN ii.38 resp. They are most completely described at Nd ii.235 (under cakkhumā), & the foll. categories of the range of application of cakkhu are set forth: 1.; maṃsa-cakkhu: the physical eye which is said to be exceptionally powerful & sensitive See Kv; iii.7 (trans. p. 149 ff.). Vism 428 (maṃsa 2 ñāṇa˚).
2. dibba-˚;: the deva-eye, the eye of a seer, all-pervading, & seeing all that proceeds in hidden worlds.; 3. paññā˚;: the eye of wisdom; he who knows all that can be known (jānaṃ passaṃ recognizing & seeing, i.e. of perfect understanding; cakkhubhūta ñāṇa˚ dhamma˚ brahma˚)
4. buddha˚;: the eye of a Buddha or of complete intuition, i.e. of a person who “sees the heart of man, of a being realizing the moral state of other beings and determined to help them on the Path to Right Knowledge
5. samanta˚;: (a summary account of Nos. 1
4, & in all Scripture-passages a standing Ep. of Gotama Buddha see below), the eye of all round knowledge, the eye of a Tathāgata, of a being perfected in all wisdom ■ Out of these are mentioned & discussed singly or in sets; (Nos. 1
5): Dhs-a 306; Snp-a 351; (Nos. 1
3:) Iti 52 = Kv 251 sq. (Iti 52 = Kv 254); (dibba:) Vin i.8, Vin i.288; Vin ii.183 Vin iii.5; DN i.82, DN i.162; iii. 52, iii. 281; MN i.213; SN i.144, SN i.196 SN ii.122, SN ii.213, SN ii.276; SN iv.240; SN v.266, SN v.305; AN i.165, AN i.256, AN i.281 sq.; AN iii.19, AN iii.29, AN iii.418; AN iv.85, AN iv.141, AN iv.178, AN iv.291; AN v.13, AN v.35, AN v.68, AN v.200, AN v.211, AN v.340; Ja iii.346; Pts i.114; Pts ii.175; Vb 344; Pv-a 5 ■ (paññā˚:) SN iv.292; SN v.467, AN i.35; Dhp-a iii.174, Dhp-a iii.175 ■ (buddha˚:) Vin i.6; SN i.138; Pts ii.33; Pv-a 61 ■ (samanta˚:) SN i.137 = Nd ii.2354; Snp 345, Snp 378 Snp 1063, Snp 1069, Snp 1090, Snp 1133; Pts ii.31 = Nd ii.2355.
-āyatana (either cakkh’ or cakkhv˚) the organ or sense of sight DN iii.243, DN iii.280, DN iii.290; Dhs 585, Dhs 653; -indriya (cakkhundriya) the organ of eye, faculty of vision DN i.70; DN iii.225, DN iii.239; AN i.113; Dhs 585, Dhs 597, Dhs 661, Dhs 830, Dhs 971 Vism 7; -karaṇa (always in combn w. ñāṇa-karaṇa) producing (right) insight (and knowledge) Iti 82 (of kusalavitakkā); f. ˚ī SN iv.331 (of majjhimā paṭipadā); Pts ii.147; -dada one who gives the eye (of understanding Thag 3; -dhātu the element of vision Dhs 597, Dhs 703, Dhs 817 -patha the range of vision; sight Ja i.65 = Dhp-a i.173; Ja i.146; Ja iv.189, Ja iv.378, Ja iv.403 (= cakkhūnaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ C.) Vv-a 119; -bhāta (+ ñāṇa˚) (adj.) one who has become the possessor of right understanding SN ii.255; SN iv.94; AN v.226 sq. -lola greed (or greedy) with the eye Nd ii.177; -viññāṇa consciousness by means of visual perception visual cognition Vin i.34; DN ii.308, DN ii.310 DN iii.243; Dhs 433, Dhs 556, Dhs 585, Dhs 589, Dhs 620; cp. Mrs. Rh. D Buddh. Psych. Eth. p. 177; Mil trsl. i.80, 89; -viññeyya (adj.) (i.e. rūpā) to be apperceived by the sense of sight Vin i.184; DN ii.281; DN iii.234; Dhs 589, Dhs 967, Dhs 1095 -samphassa contact with the sense of vision (usually with ˚ja: sprung from visual contact) (of vedanā feelings) Vin i.34; DN ii.308 sq.; DN iii.243; Pts i.5, Pts i.40, Pts i.136.
(adj.) having eyes, seeing (-˚), in dibba˚ AN i.23. 148 (see cakkhu iii.2) and a˚ blind DN i.191; SN iii.140 Nd 67.
(adj.) having eyes, being gifted with sight; of clear sight, intuition or wisdom possessing knowledge (cp. samantacakkhu) DN i.76 (one who knows, i.e. a connoisseur); cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhinti “those who have eyes to see shall see” (of the Buddha) DN i.85, DN i.110, etc ■ Vin i.16; SN i.27; AN i.116 AN i.124; AN iv.106; Dhp 273; Iti 108, Iti 115; DN-a i.221; Dhp-a iii.403; Dhp-a iv.85 ■ Esp. as Ep. of the Buddha: the Allwise SN i.121, SN i.134, SN i.159, SN i.210; Snp 31, Snp 160, Snp 992, Snp 1028, Snp 1116 Snp 1128; Vv 125 (= pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā Buddho Bhagavā Vv-a 60, cp. cakkhu iii.); Vv 8127.
cakkhu + mant
(adj.) in visama˚ squint-eyed. squinting Ja i.353; Ja vi.548.
= cakkhuka
(adj.) pleasing to or good for the eyes (opp. a˚) Vin ii.137, Vin ii.148.
Vedic cakṣuṣya
(a) walking up & down SN iv.104 ■ (b) the place where one is walking, esp. a terraced walk, cloister Vin i.15 Vin i.182; Vin ii.220; DN i.105; SN i.212; AN i.114; AN i.183; AN iii.29 AN iv.87; Ja i.17; Ja ii.273; Ja v.132 (cp. kattaradaṇḍa-passages).
Sk. cankrama & cankramā, fr. cankamati
to walk about, to walk up & down Vin i.15 Vin i.182; Vin ii.193, Vin ii.220; Vin iv.18; SN i.107, SN i.212; Pv-a 105 ■ Caus cankamāpeti Ja iii.9.
Intens. of kamati, to kram = Sk. cankramīti; cp. kamati
(nt.) 1. walking up & down SN ii.282; Dhp-a i.10.
2. a cloister walk (= cankama Vv-a 188. Usually ˚- ■ Vin i.139 (˚sālā); Ja iii.85 Ja iv.329; Pv-a 79 (˚koṭi the far end of the cloister).
fr. cankamati
(adj.) one who has the habit of walking about Mil 216 (ṭhāna˚ standing & walking).;
fr. cankama
the Greek partridge Vv 358 (cp. Vv-a 163); Ja vi.538.
cp. cakora
a hollow vessel, a bowl, cask MN i.142; Ja v.186 (in similes). As ˚ka Mil 365 (trsl. Mil ii.278 by “straining cloth”). Cp. cañcu “a box” Divy 131.
cp. Tamil canguvaḍa a dhoney, Anglo-Ind. ḍoni, a canoe hollowed from a log, see also doṇi
a casket, a box Ja i.65; Ja iv.257; Ja v.110, Ja v.303; Ja vi.369, Ja vi.534; Dhp-a ii.116; Dhp-a iii.101; Vv-a 33 Vv-a 158; Mvu iv.106; Anvs p. 35 Vism 173.
cp. cangavāra
(nt.) a quadrangular place, a square, courtyard; a place where four roads meet, a cross road Vin iii.151; Vin iv.271; Mil 1 (+ catukkasinghāṭaka), 330 (do.); Ja i.425 (˚raccha).
Sk. catvara, cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 56
(adj.) giving up, to be given up; in cpd. duc˚ hard to give up AN iii.50; Ja v.8. Cp. cāga.
1. to let loose, to emit, to discharge AN ii.33; Ja ii.342 (mutta karīsaṃ) fig. to utter (a speech) Ja v.362.
2. to abandon to give up, sacrifice (with loc. of person to whom Asuresu pāṇaṃ SN i.224 = Ja i.203) Dhp 290; Ja ii.205 Ja iii.211; Ja v.464; Ja vi.570 ■ pp. catta, q.v ■ grd. caja [Sk. tyajya] q.v.
Sk. tyajate, tyaj = Gr. σο βέω to scare away
(adj.) moving to & fro, trembling, unsteady Ja iv.498 (= calācala) Sdhp 317, Sdhp 598.
Intens. of cal = car, to move, with n instead of r in reduplication, cp. Sk. cañcūryate = carcarīti cañcala (= *carcara), Gr. γαργαλιζω & γαγγαλιζω to tickle; see also note on gala & cp. cankamati
(adj.) clever, skilled Mhbv 148. See catura.
Sk. catura
(adj.) fierce, violent; quick-tempered, uncontrolled, passionate Vin ii.194 (hatthī); DN i.90 (= māṇa-nissita-kopa-yutta DN-a i.256); SN i.176; SN ii.242; AN ii.109 = Pp 47 (sakagava˚); Ja i.450; Ja ii.210, Ja ii.349 Vism 343, Vism 279 (˚sota, fierce current), (˚hatthi); Dhp-a iv.9 (goṇa) 104; Sdhp 41, Sdhp 590, Sdhp 598 ■ f. caṇḍī MN i.126; Ja ii.443; Ja iii.259; Pv ii.34 (= kodhanā Pv-a 83). Compar. caṇḍatara SN ii.242 ■ In cpds. caṇḍi˚, see caṇḍikata & caṇḍitta.;
Sk. caṇḍa
(adj.) = caṇḍa; f. caṇḍikā Pv ii.35, & caṇḍiyā Ja iii.259 (= kodhaṇā).
a man of a certain low tribe, one of the low classes, an outcaste; grouped with others under nīcā kulā (low born clans) as caṇḍālā nesādā veṇā rathakārā pukkusā at AN i.107 = AN ii.85 = Pp 51 As caṇḍāla-pukkusā with the four recognized grades of society (see jāti & khattiya) at AN i.162 ■ Vin iv.6; MN ii.152; SN v.168 sq. (˚vaṃsa); AN iii.214, AN iii.228 (brāhmaṇa˚); iv.376; Ja iv.303; Pv-a 175; Mil 200 ■ f caṇḍālī AN iii.226; Pv iii.113; Dhp-a ii.25. See also pukkusa.
Vedic caṇḍāla
(nt.) a kind of amusement or trick DN i.6≈(= ayogulakīḷā play with an iron ball DN-a i.84).
(adj.) angry Vin iv.310.
cp. caṇḍa
(nt.) ferocity anger, churlishness Nd ii.313, Nd ii.576, Dhs 418, Dhs 1060, Dhs 1115 Dhs 1231; Vb 357; Dhp-a ii.227. Cp. caṇḍitta.
*caṇḍikya, of caṇḍika → caṇḍaka
(nt.) anger Dhs 418; Pp 18 = Pp 22. Cp. caṇḍikka.
(nt.) 1. a tetrad, a set of four, consisting of four parts: ˚pañcakajjhānā (pl.) the fourfold & the fivefold system of meditation Dhs-a 168; see cpds.
2. a place where four roads meet Ja vi.389; Mil 330 (see also below); esp. in phrase catukke catukke kasāhi tāḷeti (or is it “in sets of four” See Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 79) Ja i.326; Ja ii.123; Dhp-a iv.52.
3. a square (in a village) Mil 1, Mil 365; Ja ii.194 Ja v.459; Dhp-a 317.
-bhatta a meal for four bhikkhus Vin ii.77; Vin iii.160 -magga the 4 fold path Ne 113; -yañña (usually sabba catukka˚) a sacrifice consisting of (all) the four parts Ja iii.44, Ja iii.45; Pv-a 280; cp. Ja i.335. (Or is it the “cross-road sacrifice”?)
fr. catu = *catuka → *catukyaṃ
empty, shallow, little Nd ii.415 (˚pañña, with omakapañña lāmaka-p˚); Ja iv.441 (nadī = tuccha Com.).
origin. “consisting only of one quarter”?
(num. ord.) the fourth Snp 97 Snp 99, Snp 450; Ja iii.55; Ja vi.367; ˚ṃ (adv.) for the fourth time Dhp-a iii.174 ■ f. catutthī Snp 436; Vism 338 ■ See also (s.v. Aḍḍha) aḍḍhuḍḍha.
-bhatta food eaten only every fourth day Ja v.424 -magga “the fourth Path,” of Arahantship Dhp-a i.309 -mana (?) (nt.) name of the tongue, in so far as it forms the fourth vatthu (beside eyes, ears, nose) according to the gloss: Ja v.155; extremely doubtful.
Vedic caturtha, Idg. *queturto = Gr. τέτρατος, Lat. quartus, Ohg. fiordo
, catu˚ in composition; instr. catubbhi (Snp 229), catūhi (Snp 231) & catuhi; loc. catūsu (Ja i.262) catusu.
2. As; num. adv., catu˚ catur˚ in cpds catuddasa (14), also through elision & reduction cuddasa Pv-a 55, Pv-a 283, etc., cp. also cātuddasī. Catuvīsati (24) Snp 457; catusaṭṭhi (64) Ja i.50; Ja ii.193; Pv-a 74; caturāsīti (84) usually with vassa-sahassāni Ja i.137 Ja ii.311; Pv iv.77; Dhp-a ii.58; Pv-a 9, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 254, etc. See also cattārīsa (40).
-(r)aṃsa (= caturassa, having four edges, four-edged Dhs 617; Pv-a 189 (read ˚sobhitāya); -(r)aṅga (consisting of) four limbs or divisions, fourfold MN i.77; Ja i.390; Ja ii.190, Ja ii.192; Ja vi.169 (uposatha, cp. aṭṭhanga) Dpvs i.6; Sdhp 64; -(r)aṅgika = prec. Dhs 147, Dhs 157, Dhs 397 Kp-a 85; Sdhp 58; -(r)aṅgin (adj.) comprising four parts f. ˚inī, of an army consisting of elephants, chariots cavalry & infantry DN ii.190; Ja ii.102, Ja ii.104; Vism 146; Snp-a 225, Snp-a 353; Dhp-a iv.144; cp. Ja vi.275; -(r)aṅgula (adj.) measuring 4 fingers, 4 fingers broad or wide, Vin i.46; SN ii.178; Ja vi.534; Thag 1137; Vism 124. -(r)aṅgulika = prec. Thig 498 (-Thag-a, 290); -(r)anta see cātur˚; -(r)assa [catur + assa2] four-cornered, quadrangular regular Vin ii.310 (Bdhgh); Ja iv.46 (āvāṭa) 492 (sālā); v.49; Pv ii.119. Cp. caturaṃsa & next; -(r)assara (see last) with 4 sharp sides (of a hammer; ˚muggara Dhp-a i.126; -(r)ādhiṭṭhāna (adj.) one who has taken the four resolutions (see adhiṭṭhāna) MN iii.239; -(r)āpassena (adj.) endowed with the four apassena: lit. reclining on four AN v.29, AN v.30; DN iii.269, DN iii.270; -ussada (catussada) full of four, endowed with 4 things, rich in four attributes Ja iv.309 (expld. p. 311 as having plenty of people, grain, wood & water); iv.422 = 461 “with four pillows” (p. 422 has caturassada for caturussada which latter is also to be preferred to catussada, unless this is a haplology). In the same connection occurs satt-ussada (full of people) DN i.111 e.g. & Pv iv.18 (see satta). The formation “cattussada” has probably been influenced by “sattussada”; -(k)kaṇṇa (& ˚ka (a) with 4 corners Vin ii.137; Ja iii.255 ■ (b) “between four ears,” i.e. secret, of manta (counsel) Ja vi.391 -(k)kama walking with four (feet), quadruped Vv 648 Pv i.113; -kuṇḍika on all fours MN i.79; AN iii.188; DN iii.6; Pv iii.27 (cp. Pv-a 181); -koṇa four cornered crossed, in ˚raccha cross road Pv-a 24; -(k)khandha the four khandhas, viz. feeling, perception, synthesis & intellect (see khandha) Dhs-a 345; -(g)guṇa fourfold quadruple DN ii.135; SN i.27; Ja i.213; Vv-a 186; Sdhp 240; -cakka with four wheels SN i.16 = SN i.63 (said of the human body, see under cakka); -jāta of four sorts viz. gandha (perfume) having four ingredients Thag-a 72 (see next) -jāti of four kinds Ja i.265, Ja v.79; (gandha) These 4 ingredients of perfume are saffron, jasmine Turkish (tarukkha) & Greek incense (yavana); -jātiya (& ˚jātika) in ˚gandha prec. Ja iii.291; Ja iv.377; Pv-a 127; Mil 354; Ja i.178 (˚ka); -(d)disā (pl.) the 4 quarters of the globe SN i.167 = Snp p.79; DN i.251; may also be taken for abl. sg. as adv.: in the 4 quarters Vin i.16 cp. acc. catuddisaṃ DN ii.12; -(d)dīpika covering the 4 continents, of megha (a cloud) Dhp-a ii.95; -dvāra with 4 gates, of a house DN i.102 (= DN-a i.270); of Avīciniraya Iti 86; Ja iv.3; Pv i.1013; cp. Catudvāra Jātaka (No. 439; Ja iv.1 sq.); -nahuta ninety-four Ja i.25; Ja vi.486 -paccaya the four requisites (see paccaya) Ja iii.273 ˚santosa contentment with ˚Dhp-a iv.111; -paṇṇasa fifty-four Dhp-a i.4; -(p)patha a fourways Ja iv.460; -(p)pada [Sk caturpād, Gr. τετράπους, Lat. quadrupes] a quadruped Vin ii.110; SN i.6; AN v.21; Snp 603, Snp 964; Iti 87; Ja i.152 Ja iii.82; -parivaṭṭa (cp. aṭṭha ˚adhideva-ñāṇadassana AN iv.304) fourfold circle SN iii.59 sq. (pañcupādānakkhandhe). -parisā (f.) the fourfold assembly, scil. of male & female bhikkhus & upāsakas (cp. parisā) Pv-a 11; -pala fourfold Vism 339. -(p)pādaka (adj.) consisting of 4 padas, i.e. a sloka; f. ˚ikā (gāthā) a complete stanza or sloka Anvs p. 35; -pārisuddhasīla (nt. the four precepts of purity Ja iii.291; Dhp-a iv.111-(b)bidha (catur + vidha) fourfold Thag-a, 74; -(b)bipallāsa (catur + vipallāsa) the fourfold change (cp. Ne 85 Th + 1, 1143; Snp-a 46; -byūha (catur + vyūha) arranged in 4 arrays (of hāra) Ne 3, Ne 105; -bhāga the 4th part, a quarter Dhp 108; -bhūmika having 4 stories or stages (of citta or dhamma) Dhp-a i.21; Dhp-a iv.72; Dhs-a 344, Dhs-a 345 cp. Vism 493 (of indriya); -madhura (nt.) sweetness (syrup) of 4 (ingredients) DN-a i.136; Thag-a 68; -mahāpatha a crossing on a high-road Vism 235. -mahābhūtika consisting of the four great elements Dhs-a 403; -(m)mahārājika: see cātum˚; -māsa 4 months, a season Pv-a 96 Dpvs i.24, 37 (cā˚); see under māsa; -sacca the four truths or facts (see ariyasacca) Dhp-a iii.380; Mil 334; (s)sāla (nt.) [catur + sāla] a square formed by 4 houses, in phrasc catuhi gabbhehi paṭimaṇḍitaṃ catussälaṃ kāretvā Vv-a 220; Dhp-a iii.291; -’ha (catuha & catūha) 4 days catuhena within 4 days SN ii.191; catūhapañcāha 4 or 5 days Vin iv.280 ■ See also cpds. with cātu˚.
Vedic catvārah (m.) catvāri (nt.) fr. *qṷetuor, *qṷetur = Gr. τέτταρες (hom πίσυρες), Lat. quattuor, Goth. fidwōr, Ohg. fior, Ags fēower, E. four; catasras (f.) fr. *qṷ(e)tru, cp. tisras Also as adv. catur fr. *quetrus = Lat. quater & quadru˚ base of numeral four; 1. As num. adj. nom. & acc. m cattāro (Dhp 109; Ja iii.51) and caturo (Snp 84, Snp 188), f catasso (Snp 1122), nt. cattāri (Sn. 227); gen. m. catunnaṃ (Snp p.102), [f. catassannaṃ
clever, skilled, shrewd Ja iii.266; Ja vi.25 ■ Der. f. abstr. caturatā cleverness Vb 351 (= cāturiya).
Deriv. uncertain. Perhaps from tvar to move, that is quickly. Sk. catura
at Vv 412 is to be read ca turiya, etc. Otherwise see cāturiya.
given up. sacrificed AN ii.41; AN iii.50; Thag 209 (˚vaṇṇa who has lost fame); Ja ii.336; Ja iv.195 Ja v.41 (˚jīvita).
pp. of cajati
(nt.) the fact of giving up, abandonment, resignation Vb 254 sq.; Dhs-a 381.
fr. catta
(& cattālīsa) forty SN ii.85; Snp p.87; Iti 99≈. Usually cattāḷīsa Ja i.58; Ja v.433; Dhp-a i.41; Dhp-a ii.9. 93.
-danta having 40 teeth (one of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.172.
Sk. catvāriṃśat
(adj.) having forty MN iii.77.
at Mil 197 (ūmikavankacadika) prob. for ˚madika.
(-˚) indef. particle “like, as if,” added to rel. or interrog. pronouns, as kiñcana anything, kudācana at any time, etc. Cp. ca & ci.;
Vedic cana fr. rel. pron. *qṷo + demonstr. pron. *no, cp. anā, nānā; Gr. ρή; Lat ■ ne in quandone = P kudācana. cana = Goth. hun, Ohg. gin, Ger. ir-gen-d Cp. ci
= cana; and then, if Vin iii.121 (cp. ca 3); or should it be separated at this passage into ca naṃ?
the moon (i.e. the shiner) SN i.196; SN ii.206; MN ii.104; AN i.227 AN ii.139 sq.; AN iii.34; Dhp 413; Snp 465, Snp 569, Snp 1016; Ja iii.52 Ja vi.232; Pv i.127; ii.66; Vv 647 (maṇi˚ a shiny jewel or a moonlike jewel, see Vv-a 278, v.l. ˚sanda). -puṇṇa˚ the full moon Ja i.149, Ja i.267; Ja v.215; ˚mukha with a face like a full moon (of the Buddha) Dhp-a iii.171. Canda is extremely frequent in similes & comparisens: see list in; J.P.T.S. 1907, 85 sq. In enumerations of heavenly bodies or divine beings Canda always precedes Suriya (the Sun), e.g. DN ii.259; AN i.215; AN ii.139; Nd ii.308 (under Devatā). Cp. candimant. On quâsi mythol etym. see Vism 418.
-kanta a gem Mil 118; -(g)gāha a moon-eclipse (lit seizure, i.e. by Rāhu) DN i.10 (cp. DN-a i.95); -maṇḍala the moon’s disc, the shiny disc, i.e. the moon AN i.283; Ja i.253; Ja iii.55; Ja iv.378; Ja v.123; Dhs 617; Vism 216 (in compar,); Pv-a 65; -suriyā (pl.) sun & moon Ja iv.61.
Vedic candra from *(s)quend to be light or glowing, cp. candana sandal (incense) wood, Gr. κάηδαρος cinder; Lat. candeo, candidus, incendo; Cymr. cann white; E. candid, candle, incense, cinder
= canda Vv-a 278 (maṇi˚); Sdhp 92 (mayūra˚ the eye in a peacock’s tail).
(nt.) in cpd. paripuṇṇa˚; state or condition of the full moon Snp-a 502.
abstr. fr. canda
(m. & nt.) sandal (tree wood or unguent, also perfume) Vin i.203; AN i.9, AN i.145 AN i.226; AN iii.237; Dhp 54; Ja v.420 (tree, m.); Mil 382; Dhp-a i.422; Dhp-a iv.189 (˚pūjā); Vv-a 158 (agalu˚ with aloe & sandal); Pv-a 76 ■ Kāsika˚ sandal from Kāsī AN iii.391; AN iv.281; Mil 243, Mil 348; ratta˚ red s. Ja iv.442 lohita˚ id. AN v.22; Ja i.37; hari˚ yellow s. Ja i.146.
-ussada covered with sandal perfumes Thag 267; Pv iii.91 (= candanasārānulitto Pv-a 211); -gaṇṭhi (or better gaṇḍi; see the latter) a block of sandal wood Vin ii.110; -gandhin having a scent of sandal Ja iii.190 -vilepana sandal unguent Ja iv.3. -sāra choice sandal (wood or perfume) Vv 523, Ja i.53, Ja i.340.
Deriv. unknown. Possibly nonAryan; but see under canda, Sk. candana
(f.) a pool at the entrance of a village (usually, but not necessarily dirty: see Vin ii.122 & cp. candanapanka Av.Ś; i.221, see also PW sub candana2) SN v.361; MN i.11, MN i.73, MN i.448; AN i.161; Thag 567; Ja v.15; Mil 220 Vism 264, Vism 343, Vism 359; Sdhp 132.
(m. or f.?) the moon. By itself only in similes at Dhp 208 Dhp 387 (at end of pada) & in “abbhā mutto va candimā MN ii.104 = Dhp 172 = Thag 871; Dhp 382 = Thag 873; Pts i.175 ■ Otherwise only in combn with suriya moon & sun, DN i.240; DN ii.12; DN iii.85 sq., 90, 112; SN ii.266 SN v.264 sq.; AN i.227; AN ii.53, AN ii.130; AN v.59; Vv 30; Ja ii.213; Mil 191; Vism 153. Also in cpd. candimāpabhā the light of the moon (thus BB, whereas SS read at all passages candiyā˚ or candiya-pabhā) SN iii.156 = SN v.44; Iti 20.
Sk. candramas m. & candrimā f., cp. pūrṇimā; a cpd. of canda + mā, cp. māsa. The Pāli form, however, is based on a supposed derivation fr canda + mant, like bhagavā, and is most likely m. On this formation cp. Lat. lumen = Sk. rukmān luminous shiny
(adj.) moving to & fro, wavering, trembling, unsteady, fickle SN i.204 SN v.269; MN i.470 (and a˚ steady); AN iii.199, AN iii.355, AN iii.391; Dhp 33; Pp 35; Ja i.295; Ja ii.360. At Ja vi.548 it means one who lets the saliva flow out of his mouth (expld by paggharita-lāla “trickle-spit”).
Sk. capala cp. cāpa bow; from *qep to shake or quiver, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under caperro
(f.) fickleness, unsteadiness Mil 93. 251; Pgdp 47, Pgdp 64. At Nd ii.585 as capalanā + cāpalyaṃ with gedhikatā, meaning greed, desire (cp. capala at Ja vi.548).
fr. last
(or capucapu) a sound made when smacking one’s lips Vin ii.214 (capucapukāraka adj.), 221; iv.197.
to chew Bdhgh on Vin ii.115. Cp. jappati.
Sk. carvayati Dhtp 295 gives root cabb in meaning “adana”
(& cameti) to rinse, only in cpd ācamati (ācameti).
; cam. to sip; but given at Dhtm 552 in meaning “adana,” eating
1. the Yak ox (Bos grunniens) Ja i.149; Ja iii.18 Ja iii.375; Ja v.416; Mil 365 ■ f. -ī Ja i.20; Sdhp 621 ■ In cpds. camari˚ Ja iv.256.
2. a kind of antelope (-ī Ja vi.537.
-vījanī (f.) a chowry (the bushy tail of the Yak made into a brush to drive away flies) Vin ii.130. This is one of the royal ensigns (see kakudhabhaṇḍa & cp vāla-vījanī).;
Deriv. unknown, probably non-Aryan. Sk. camara
a ladle or spoon for sacrificing into the sacred fire Ja vi.52824 = 5294 (unite ca with masa, cp. 5299 and n. 4: aggijuhana-kaṭacchu-sankhātimasañca [for camasañ ca] v.l. Bd). Cp. Kern Toevoegselen s. v.
Vedic camasa, a cup
(f.) an army Ja ii.22; camūpati a general Mvu 10, Mvu 65; Mvu 23, Mvu 4; Dāvs i.3.
Both derivation and exact meaning uncertain. The Vedic camū is a peculiar vessel into wh. the Soma flows from the press. In late Pali & Sk. it means a kind of small army, perhaps a division drawn up more or less in the shape of the Vedic vessel
= campaka Ja vi.151.
the Champaka tree (Michelia champaka) having fragrant white & yellow flowers Ja v.420; Ja vi.269; Mil 338; DN-a i.280; Vism 514 (˚rukkha, in simile); Dhp-a i.384; Vv-a 194.
(f.) Name of a town (Bhagulpore) & a river DN i.111; DN-a i.279; Ja iv.454.
Name of a Nāgarāja Ja iv.454 (= ˚jātaka, No. 506); Vism 304.
(adj.) belonging to Campā Vin v.114; Ja vi.269 (here: a Champaka-like tree).
(nt.) 1. skin, hide, leather Vin i.192 (sīha˚ vyaggha˚ dīpi˚), 196 (elaka˚ aja˚ miga˚) AN iv.393 (sīha˚ dīpi˚); Pv-a 157 (kadalimiga˚ as rug) Ja ii.110 (sīha˚); iii.82, 184; Mil 53; Sdhp 140. It is supposed to be subcutaneous (under chavi as tegument) & next to the bone: chaviṃ chindetvā cammaṃ chindati SN ii.238 = AN iv.129; freq. in expr. like aṭṭhi-cammanahāru-matta (skin & bones) Pv-a 68, see under nahāru camma-maṃsa-nahāru Pv-a 80.
2. a shield Vin ii.192 (asi˚ sword & shield); MN i.86; AN iii.93; Ja v.373 Ja vi.580.
-aṇḍa a water-skin Ja i.250; -kāra a worker in leather a tanner Vin iv.7; Mil 331; a harness-maker Ja v.45 a waggon-builder and general artisan Ja iv.174 (= rathakāra); also as -kārin Pv-a 175 (= rathakārin); -khaṇḍa an animal’s skin, used as a rug Mil 366; Vism 99; skin used as a water-vessel (see khaṇḍa) Vin ii.122; Pts i.176 -ghaṭaka a water- skin Ja ii.345; -naddha (nt.) a drum Bv i.31; -pasibbaka a sack, made of skin or leather Thag-a 283; Ja vi.431, Ja vi.432 (as v.l.); -bandha a leather strap Vin i.194; -bhastā (f.) a sack Ja v.45; -māluka a leather bag Ja vi.431, Ja vi.432; -yodhin a soldier in cuirass DN i.51≈(in list of var. occupations; DN-a i.157: cammakañcukaṃ pavisitvā); AN iv.107, AN iv.110; -varatta (f.) a leather thong Ja ii.153; -vāsin one who wears the skin (of a black antelope), i.e. a hermit Ja vi.528; -sāṭaka an ascetic wearing clothes of skin Ja iii.82 (nāma paribbājaka).
Vedic carman, cp. Lat. corium hide or leather, cortex bark, scortum hide; Ohg. herdo; Ags heorδa = E. hide; also Sk. kṛtti; Ohg. scirm (shield) E. skin; from *sqer to cut, skin (cp. kaṭu) = the cut-off hide, cp. Gr. δέρω: (δέρμα
a skin Bv ii.52.
piling, heaping; collection, mass Vin ii.117; Dhs-a 44; in building: a layer Vin ii.122, Vin ii.152 As-˚ one who heaps up, a collector, hoarder MN i.452 (nikkha˚, khetta˚, etc.). See also ā˚, apa˚, upa˚.
from cināti
(n-adj.) 1. the act of going about, walking; one who walks or lives (usually -˚): oka˚ living in water MN i.117; Ja vi.416; antara˚ SN iv.173; eka˚ solitary Snp 166; saddhiṃ˚ a companion Snp 45; anattha˚ Ja v.433 jala˚ Dāvs iv.38. See also cāreti & gocara ■ Instr; carasā (adv.) walking MN i.449 ■ cara-vāda “going about talk,” gossip, idle talk SN iii.12; SN v.419 ■ sucara easy, duccara difficult Vin iii.26.
2. one who is sent on a message, a secret emissary, a spy SN i.79. Also as carapurisa Ja ii.404; Ja iv.343; Ja vi.469; Dhp-a i.193. Note.-cara-purāya at AN v.133 should be changed into v.l. SS paramparāya.
from car, carati
1. = cara2 (a messenger) Ja vi.369 (attha˚); adj. walking through: sabbalokaṃ˚ Ja v.395.
2. any animal SN i.106; Pv-a 153 (vana˚).
(nt.) 1. walking about grazing, feeding Vv-a 308 (˚ṭṭhāna).
2. the foot Vin iv.212; Ja v.431.
3. acting, behaviour, good conduct, freq. in combn with vijjā, e.g. AN ii.163 AN v.327; Dhp 144; Vism 202 (in detail); Pv-a 1, etc. DN iii.97, DN iii.156; Snp 410, Snp 462, Snp 536; Mil 24. sampannacaraṇa (adj.) accomplished in right behaviour SN i.153 SN i.166; Snp 1126; Pv ii.138 ■ Cp. sañ˚.
of a deer, called pañca-hattha “having 5 hands,” i.e. the mouth and the 4 feet
(adj.) one of good conduct (= sampannacaraṇa) Snp 533, Snp 536.
to move about, to “live and move,” to behave, to be ■ Imper. act. cara (Ja i.152), carā (metri causa, Ja iii.393); imper. med. carassu (Snp 696), pl. carāmase (= exhortative, Snp 32);-ppr. caranto (Ja i.152; Pv-a 14) caraṃ (Snp 151; Dhp 61, Dhp 305; Iti 117); med. caramāna (Vin i.83; Pv i.1010; Pv-a 160);-pot. careyya (Snp 45 Snp 386, Snp 1065; Dhp 142, Dhp 328) & care (Snp 35; Dhp 49, Dhp 168 Dhp 329; Iti 120);-fut. carissati (MN i.428);-aor. sg. 1st acariṃ (S iii.29), acārisaṃ (Pv iii.95), 3rd acari (Snp 344) acāri (Snp 354; Dhp 326); cari (J ii.133) ■ pl. 3rd acariṃsu (Snp 809), acārisuṃ (Snp 284); cariṃsu (Snp 289) acaruṃ (Snp 289), acāruṃ (J vi.114);-inf. carituṃ (caritu-kāma Ja ii.103);-ger. caritvā (Ja i.50) & caritvāna (Snp 816);-pp. ciṇṇa (q.v.)-Caus. cāreti (= Denom. of cara), pp. carita. 2nd caus. carāpeti (q.v.)-See also cara, caraṇa, cariyā, cāraka, cārikā, cārin.
Meaning: 1. Lit. (a) to move about, to walk, travel etc.; almost synon. with gacchati in contrast to tiṭṭhati to stand still; cp. phrase carañ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṃ nisinno udāhu sayaṃ Iti 117 (walking, standing, sitting reclining; the four iriyāpathā); care tiṭṭhe acche saye Iti 120; tiṭṭhaṃ caraṃ nisinno vā sayāno vā Snp 151. Defined as “catūhi iriyāpathehi vicarati” (i.e. more generally applied as “behaviour,” irrespective of position) Dhp-a ii.36. Expl. constantly by series viharati iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti Nd ii.237 ■ carāmi loke I move about (= I live) in the world Snp 25, Snp 455 agiho c. I lead a homeless life Snp 456, Snp 464; eko c. he keeps to himself Snp 35, Snp 956; Dhp 305, Dhp 329; sato c. he is mindful Snp 1054, Snp 1085; gocaraṃ gaṇhanto c. to walk about grazing (see below) Ja iii.275; gavesanto c. to look for Ja i.61 ■ (b) With definition of a purpose piṇḍāya c. to go for alms (gāmaṃ to the village) Snp 386 bhikkhāya c. id. Ja iii.82 ■ With acc. (in etymol constr.) to undertake, set out for, undergo, or simply to perform, to do. Either with c. cārikaṃ to wander about, to travel: Vin i.83; SN i.305 (applied: “walk ye a walk”); Snp 92; Dhp 326; Pv-a 14 (janapada-cārikaṃ) 160 (pabbata-c˚ wandering over the mountains); or with cāraṃ: piṇḍa-c.˚ carati to perform the begging-round Snp 414; or with caritaṃ: duccaritaṃ c. to lead a bad life Snp 665 (see carita). Also with acc. of similar meaning, as esanaṃ c. to beg Thag 123; vadhaṃ c. to kill Thag 138; dukkhaṃ c. to undergo pain SN i.210. (c) In pregnant sense: to go out for food, to graze (as gocaraṃ c. to pasture, see gocara). Appl. to cows caranti gāvo Snp 20; Ja iii.479; or to the bhikkhu Pv i.1010 (bh. caramāno = bhikkhāya c. Pv-a 51); Snp 386 (vikāle na c. buddhā: the Buddhas do not graze at the wrong time).
2. Appld meaning: (a) abs. to behave, conduct oneself Snp 1080; Ja vi.114; Mil 25 (kāmesu micchā c. to commit immorality) ■ (b) with obj. to practise, exercise, lead a life: brahmacariyaṃ c to lead a life of purity Vin i.17; Snp 289, Snp 566, Snp 1128 dhammañ c. to walk in righteousness Ja i.152; sucaritaṃ c. to act rightly, duccaritaṃ c. to act perversely SN i.94; Dhp 231.
Vedic carati, *qṷel to move, turn, turn round (cp. kaṇṭha & kula) = Lat. colo (incolo), Gr.; πέλομαι, πόλος (also αἰπόλος goat-herd & βουκόλος cowherd = gocara) also P. cakka, q.v. A doublet of car is cal, see calati Dhtp 243 expld car by “gati-bhakkhanesu”
(adv.) then, therefore now, esp. after interr. pron.: ko carahi jānāti who then knows? Snp 990; kathañ carahi jānemu how then shall we know? Snp 999; kiñ c. AN v.194 ■ Vin i.36; Vin ii.292; Snp 988; Ja iii.312; Mil 25; DN-a i.289.
Sk. tarhi; with change t → c due to analogy with ˚ci (˚cid) in combn with interr.
to cause to move, to make go Ja i.267 (bheriṃ c. to have the drum beaten); Pv-a 75 (do.); Dhp-a i.398 (to circulate). As cārāpeti Ja v.510 (bheriṃ).
Caus. 11. of carati
1. (adj.) going, moving, being like, behaving (-˚) Ja vi.313; Mil 92 (rāgac˚ = ratta); Vism 105, Vism 114 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚ etc.).
2. (nt.) action, behaviour, living Dhp 330 (ekassa c. living alone); Pts i.124; Mil 178. See also carati 1b, 2b. Esp. freq. with su˚ and duc˚: good, right proper or (nt.) good action, right conduct & the opposite; e.g. sucarita Dhp 168, Dhp 231; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 71, Pv-a 120 duccarita AN i.146; AN ii.85, AN ii.141; AN iii.267, AN iii.352; DN iii.111 DN iii.214; Dhp 169, Snp 665; Pv i.94 (˚ṃ caritvā), etc See also kāya˚ vacī˚ mano˚ under kāya.
pp. of cāreti, see cara & carati
(nt.) conduct (= carita2) Thag 36.
walking, performing (c. acc.) MN i.77.
n. agent to cāreti, cp. carita
(adj.) subsequent, last (opp. pubba) Thag 202; Iti 18; Ja v.120 ■ acarima not later (apubba ac˚ simultaneously) DN i.185; MN iii.65; Pug. 13.
-bhava the last rebirth (in Saṃsāra, with ref. to Arahantship) Thag-a 260, cp. caramabhavika in Divy (freq. & next.;
Vedic carama, Gr. τέλος end, πάλαι a long time (ago)
(adj.) last (= carima) MN i.426; Nd ii.569b (˚viññāṇassa nirodha, the destruction of the last conscious state, of the death of an Arahant); Vism 291.
(nt.) & cariyā (f.) (mostly-˚) conduct, behaviour, state of, life of. Three cariyās at Pts i.79; six at Vism 101; eight at Pts ii.19 sq., 225 & four sets of eight in detail at Nd;2 237b. Very freq. in dhamma & brahma˚, a good walk of life, proper conduct, chastity-eka˚ living alone Snp 820; unchā˚ begging Ja ii.272 Ja iii.37; bhikkhā˚ a life of begging Snp 700; nagga˚ nakedness Dhp 141 ■ See also carati 2b. In cpds. cariyā˚.
-piṭaka the last book in the Khuddaka-nikāya -manussa a spy, an outpost Ja iii.361 (v.l. cārika˚).
from; car, carati
(adj.) moving, quivering; unsteady, fickle, transient SN iv.68 (dhammā calā c’ eva vyayā ca aniccā, etc.); Ja ii.299; Ja iii.381; Ja v.345; Mil 93, Mil 418 Sdhp 430, Sdhp 494. -acala steadfast, immovable SN i.232; Ja i.71 (ṭṭhāna); Vv 514 (˚ṭṭhāna = Ep. of Nibbāna) acalaṃ sukhaṃ (= Nibbāna) Thig 350; cp. niccala motionless Dhp-a iii.38.
-ācala [intens. redupl.] moving to & fro, in constant motion, unsteady Ja iv.494, Ja iv.498 (= cañcala); Mil 92 (cp. Divy 180, Divy 281); -kkaku having a quivering hump Ja iii.380 Ja iv.330 (= calamānakakudha or calakakudha).
see calati
(m.) a camp marshal, adjutant DN i.51≈(in list of various occupations); AN iv.107 sq.
(nt.) a piece of meat thrown away after having been chewed Vin ii.115 Vin iv.266 (= vighāsa); Vv-a 222 (˚aṭṭhikāni meat-remnants & bones).;
perhaps from carv to chew; but Sk. carvana, chewing, is not found in the specific sense of P. calaka. Cp. ucchiṭṭha and cuṇṇa
to move, stir, be agitated, tremble, be confused, waver SN i.107; Snp 752; Ja i.303 (kileso cali) iii.188 (macchā c.) Mil 260 ■ ppr. med. calamāna Ja iv.331 ■ Esp. freq. in expression kammaja-vātā caliṃsu the labour-pains began to stir Ja i.52; Ja vi.485. pp. calita (q.v.) ■ caus. caleti to shake SN i.109.
Dhtp 251 kampana, to shake. Perhaps connected with car, carati
(adj. & nt.) shaking, trembling, vibrating; excitement Ja iii.188; Dhs-a 72 ■ f. calanī (quick, + langhī a kind of antelope Ja vi.537.
(adj.) wavering, unsteady Mil 93, Mil 251; Vism 113; Vv-a 177 ■ (nt.) Snp p.146.
pp. of calati
to move, get into motion, shift, to fall away, decease, esp. to pass from one state of existence into another DN i.14 (sañsaranti c˚ upapajjanti, cp. DN-a i.105); Kp viii.4 (= Kp-a 220: apeti vigacchati acetano pi samāno puññakkhaya-vasena aññaṃ thānaṃ gacchati); Iti 99 Nd ii.2352 (satte cavamāne upapajjamāne); Iti 77 (devo deva-kāyā c. “the god falls from the assembly of gods”) Snp 1073 for bhavetha (= Nd ii.238;) Pv-a 10. Caus cāveti: inf. cāvetuṃ SN i.128 sq., 134 (˚kāma.)-pp cuta (q.v.), see also cuti.
Vedic cyavate from cyu = Gr. σεύω; cp. Lat. cieo, cio, sollicitus, Gr. κίω, κινέω, Goth. haitan = Ohg heizan
(nt.) shifting, moving, passing away, only in ˚dhamma doomed to fall, destined to decease DN i.18, DN i.19; DN iii.31, DN iii.33; MN i.326; Iti 76; Ja iv.484; Ja vi.482 (˚dhammatā).
from cavati
(f) state of shifting, removal SN ii.3≈(cuti + ); MN i.49 (id.).
(a) abandoning, giving up, renunciation Vin i.10; SN iii.13, SN iii.26, SN iii.158; MN i.486; AN i.299. More freq. as (b) liberality, generosity, munificence (n.) generous munificent (adj.): sīlasampanno saddho purisapuggalo sabbe maccharino loke cāgena atirocati “he who is virtuous & religious excels all stingy people in generosity” AN iii.34. In freq. combns e.g. sacca dama dhiti c. Snp 188 = SN i.215; sacca dama c. khanti Snp 189; SN i.215; mutta˚ (adj.) liberal, munificent, SN v.351 = SN v.392 ˚paribhāvita citta “a heart bent on giving” SN v.309 In this sense cāga forms one of the (3, 4, 5 or 7) noble treasures of a man (cp. the Catholic treasure of grace & see ˚dhana below), viz. (as 5) saddhā, sīla, suta, cāga paññā (faith, virtue, right knowledge, liberality wisdom) SN i.232; AN i.210; AN iii.80 = SN iv.250; MN iii.99; DN iii.164, DN iii.165; cp. AN i.152 = AN iii.44; (as 4: the last minus suta) SN v.395; AN ii.62 (sama˚); (as 3) saddhā, sīla, cāga Ja ii.112; (as 7) ajjhesanā, tapo, sīla, sacca, cāga, sati mati Ja ii.327; cp. śīla-śruta-tyāga Itm 311 ■ Pv-a 30, Pv-a 120; Sdhp 214, Sdhp 323. See also anussati & anussarati;
-ādhiṭṭhāna the resolution of generosity, as one of the 4: paññā˚, sacca˚, c˚., upasama˚ DN iii.229; -ānussati generosity AN i.30; AN v.331; DN iii.250, DN iii.280; Vism 197; -kathā talk about munificence AN iii.181; -dhana the treasure of the good gift, as one of the 7 riches or blessings, the ariyadhanāni viz. saddhā, sīla, hiri, ottappa, suta, c. paññā DN iii.163, DN iii.251,; AN iv.5; Vv-a 113; as one of 5 (see above) AN iii.53; -sampadā (& sampanna) the blessing of (or blessed with) the virtue of munificence AN i.62; AN ii.66; AN iii.53; AN iv.221, etc.
from cajati, to give up, Vedic tyaj. Cp. Sk. tyāga
(adj.) generous AN iii.183; AN iv.217, AN iv.220; Pp 24.
(adj.) giving up, sacrificing, resigning Snp 719 (kāma˚).
(f.) 1. a jar, vessel, pot Ja i.199; Ja i.302 (pānīya˚); iii.277 (madhu˚ honey jar); Dhp-a i.394 (tela oil tank); Vv-a 76 (sālibhatta˚ holding a meal of rice). 2. a measure of capacity Ja ii.404; Ja iv.343.
3. a large vessel of the tank type used for living in Vin i.153.
-pañjara a cage made of, or of the form of a large earthen jar, wherein a man could lie in ambush Ja v.372, Ja v.385; -pāla (nt.) an earthenware shield (? Ja v.373 (= kīṭa).
cp. Hindī cāṭā
pleasant, polite in ˚kammatā politeness, flattery Mil 370 (cp. Sk. cāṭukāra); cāṭu-kamyatā Vb 246; Vism 17, Vism 23, Vism 27; Kp-a 236.
cp. cāru
(and cātu˚) consisting of four. Only in cpds. viz.
-(r)anta (adj.) “of four ends,” i.e. covering or belonging to the 4 points of the compass, all-encircling, Ep of the earth: Ja ii.343 (paṭhavī); iv.309 (mahī)-(n-m. one who rules over the 4 points; i.e. over the whole world (of a Cakkavattin) DN i.88 (cp. DN-a i.249); ii.16; Snp 552. See also Sp. AvS ii.111, n. 2; -kummāsa sour gruel with four ingredients Vv-a 308; -(d)dasī (f.) [to catuddasa fourteen] the 14th day of the lunar half month AN i.144. Pv-a 55; Vv-a 71, Vv-a 99, Vv-a 129. With pancadasī aṭṭhamī & pāṭihāriyapakkha at Snp 402; Vv 155 ˚dasika belonging to the 14th day at Vin iv.315 -(d)disa (adj.) belonging to, or comprising the four quarters, appld to a man of humanitarian mind Snp 42 (“showing universal love,” see Nd ii.239); cp. RV x.136. Esp. appld to the bhikkhu-sangha “the universal congregation of bhikkhus” Vin i.305; Vin ii.147; DN i.145; Ja i.93; Pv ii.28; iii.214 (expld Pv-a 185 by catūhi disāhi āgata-bhikkhu-sangha). Cp. Avs i.266 Avs ii.109; -(d)dīpa of four continents: rājā Thig 486; cp Mvu i.108, Mvu i.114; -(d)dīpaka sweeping over the whole earth (of a storm) Vin i.290, cp. Ja iv.314 & Avs i.258 -(b)bedā (pl.) the four Vedas Mil 3; -māsin of 4 months f. ˚inī Vin i.155; DN i.47; MN iii.79; DN-a i.139, cp. komudī -(m)mahāpatha the place where 4 roads cross, a crossroad DN i.102, DN i.194 = DN i.243; MN i.124; MN iii.91; cp. catu˚ -(m)mahābhūtika consisting of the 4 great elements (of kāya) DN i.34, DN i.55, DN i.186, DN i.195; SN ii.94 sq.; Mil 379; cp Av.Ś ii.191 & Sk. cāṭurbhautika; -(m)mahārājikā (pl. (sc. devā) the retinue of the Four Kings, inhabiting the lowest of the 6 devalokas Vin i.12; Vin iii.18; DN i.215 Nd ii.307 (under devā); Ja ii.311 (deva-loka); -yāma (saṃvara) fourfold restraint (see yāma) DN i.57, DN i.58 (cp DN-a i.167); iii.48 sq.; SN i.66; MN i.377; Vism 410 Cp. Dial. i.75 n1.
see catur
(nt.) skill, cleverness, shrewdness Ja iii.267; Ja vi.410; Thag-a, 227; Vb 551; Vism 104 Dāvs v.30.
cp. catura + iya
(m. nt.) a bow MN i.429 (opposed to kodaṇḍa); Dhp 156 (˚âtikhīṇa shot from the bow, cp Dhp-a iii.132), 320 (abl. cāpāto metri causa); Ja iv.272 Ja v.400; Mil 105 (daḷha˚), 352.
-koṭi the end of a bow Vv-a 261; nāḷi (f.) a bow-case Ja ii.88; -lasuṇa (nt.) a kind of garlic Vin iv.259.
Sk. cāpa, from *qēp tremble, cp. capala wavering, quivering
(nt.) fickleness DN i.115 (= DN-a i.286). Also as cāpalya MN i.470 Vb 351; Vism 106.
Der. fr. capala, Sk. cāpalya
(nt.) a chowrie, the tail of bos grunniens used as a whisk Snp 688; Vv 643; Ja vi.510; Vv-a 271, Vv-a 276. Cpd. cāmarī-gāhaka Ja vi.218 (anka) a hook holding the whisk.
from camara
(nt.). gold Vv-a 12, Vv-a 13, Vv-a 166.
Deriv. unknown. Sk. cāmīkara
to honour, only in cpd. -apacāyati (q.v.). The Dhtp (237) defines the root cāy by pūjā.
fr. ci
motion, walking, going; doing, behaviour, action, process Mil 162 (+ vihāra) Dhs 8 = Dhs 85 (= vicāra); Dhs-a 167. usually -˚ (n. adj.): kāma˚ going at will Ja iv.261; pamāda˚ a slothful life Ja i.9; piṇḍa˚ alms-begging Snp 414, Snp 708; sabbaratti wandering all night SN i.201; samavattha˚ AN iii.257 See also carati ib.
-vihāra doing & behaving, i.e. good conduct Ja ii.232 Dpvs. vi.38; cp. Mil 162 (above).
fr. car carati to move about
(cārika) (adj.) wandering about, living, going, behaving, always-˚, like ākāsa˚, niketa˚, pure˚ (see pubbangama), vana˚,-f. cārikā journey, wandering esp. as cārikaṃ carati to go on alms-pilgrimage (see carati ib) Vin i.83; Ja i.82; Ja ii.286; Dhp 326; Mil 14, Mil 22 ˚ñ pakkamati to set out wandering Ja i.87; Mil 16. SN i.199; MN i.117; AN iii.257; DN-a i.239 sq. (in detail on two cārikā); Vv-a 165; EnA 295 (unchā˚).
(adj.) = cāraka Snp 162 (saṃsuddha˚).
v.v. vāraṇika Th i.1129? a little play, masque, cp. Sk cāraṇa & Mrs. Rh. D.; Pss of the Brethren, 419.
(nt.) practice, proceeding, manner of acting, conduct Ja i.90, Ja i.367; Ja ii.277 (loka˚); v.285 (vanka˚); Mil 133; Vv-a 31 ■ cārittaṃ āpajjati to mix with, to call on, to have intercourse with (c. loc. MN i.470; SN ii.270 (kulesu); MN i.287 = MN iii.40 (kāmesu) Ja iii.46 (rakkhita-gopitesu).
-vāritta manner of acting & avoiding Ja iii.195, cp Th 1. 591; Vism 10. See on their mutual relation Vism 11; -sīla code of morality Vv-a 37.
From car
(only-˚) (adj.) walking, living, experiencing; behaving, acting, practising. (a) lit. asanga˚ SN i.199 akāla˚ Snp 386; ambu˚ Snp 62; vihangapatha˚ Sdhp 241; sapadāna˚ MN i.30; Snp 65; pariyanta˚ Snp 904. (b) fig. anudhamma˚ Snp 69; āgu˚ AN ii.240; AN iii.163 dhamma˚ Mil 19; brahma˚ Snp 695; manāpa˚ Vv 314 yata˚ Snp 971; sama˚ Mil 19. See all s. v. & cp caṭu.;
(adj.) charming, desirable pleasant, beautiful Ja vi.481; Mil 201; Sdhp 428, Sdhp 512; Vv-a 36 (= vaggu), sucāru SN i.181; Pv ii.1212 (= suṭṭhumanorama).
-dassana lovely to behold Snp 548; Ja vi.449 (expl. on p. 450 as: cāru vuccati suvaṇṇaṃ = suvaṇṇadassana) vi.579; f. -ī Pv iii.614.
Vedic cāru & cāyu to; *qe-*qā, as in kāma, Lat. carus, etc., see under kāma
to set going, to pasture, feed, preserve: indriyāni c. to feast one’s senses (cp. Ger. “augenweide”) Pv-a 58; khantiṃ c to feed meekness DN-a i.277; olambakaṃ cārento drooping Ja i.174; Pass. ppr. cāriyamāna being handed round Ja iv.2 (not vā˚)-pp. carita ■ Cp. vi˚.
Denom. fr. cara; cp. carati
shaking, a shock, only in bhūmi˚; earthquake.
From calati
(f.) a pestle, a mortar Vin i.202 (in cuṇṇa˚ & dussa˚, cp. saṇha).;
to cālana of calaka2
to move, to shake Ja v.40; to scatter Ja i.71 (tiṇāni); to sift Vin i.202.
caus. of calati
(f.) moving, shifting, disappearance Vin iii.112 (ṭhānato); Sdhp 61 (id.).
to bring to fall, move, drive away; disturb, distract AN iv.343 (samādhimhā); Ja i.60 (inf cāvetu-kāma); ii.329 (jhānā, abl.). Aor. acāvayi (prohib.) Snp 442 (ṭhānā).
caus. of cavati
(cid in Sandhi) indef. interr particle (always-˚), in koci (= Sk. kaścid) whoever kiñci (kincid-eva) whatever, kadāci at some time or any time, etc. (q.v.), see also ca, cana, ce.;
Vedic cid nom. nt. to interr. base *qṷi (as in Gr. τίς, Lat. quis, Goth. hvi-leiks, see ki˚, cp ka˚, ku˚), = Gr. τ ́δ, Lat. quid & quid(d)em, Av. ciṭ (cp. tad, yad, kad beside taṃ, yaṃ, kiṃ)
, usually tikicchati to reflect, think over, intend aim at. Pp. cikicchita Kp-a 188 (in expln of vicikicchita q.v.).
Sk. cikitsati, Desid. of cit, cinteti. Cp. vicikicchā
(cikkhanā, etc.) to tell, to announce: see ā˚ & paṭisaṃ˚.;
Freq. of khyā, Dhtp 19: cikkh = vacane
(nt.) mud, mire, swamp; often with udaka˚. Vin i.253; Vin ii.120 Vin ii.159, Vin ii.291: iii.41; AN iii.394; Ja i.196; Mil 286, Mil 311, Mil 397; Pv-a 102, Pv-a 189, Pv-a 215 ■ (adj.) Vin ii.221; Vin iv.312; Pv iv.116; Mil 286.
Sk. cikkaṇa & cikkala, slippery + ya
(adj.) muddy Pv-a 225.
to wish to drop, to ooze out Mil 152 (˚ssanto), see Kern. Toev. ii.139 & Morris,; J.P.T.S. 1884, 87.
Desid. of kṣar = Sk. cikṣariṣati
(& ˚ika) (m. nt.) 1. a kind of plant Snp 239 (= kaṇavīra-pupphasaṇṭhāna-sīsa Snp-a 283).
2. a toy windmill, made of palm-leaves, etc. (DN-a i.86: tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṃ vātappahārena paribbhamana-cakkaṃ Vin ii.10; DN i.6; MN i.266; AN v.203; Mil 229.
to twirl round, to revolve like a windmill AN i.112.
Denom. fr. cingula
to hiss, fizz, sizzle (always combd with ciṭiciṭāyati) Vin i.225; SN i.169 Snp p.15; Pp 36; Mil 258 sq.
onomat. cp. ciṭiciṭāyati
(nt.) fizzing Vism 408 (˚sadda).
(f.) the tamarind tree Ja v.38 (˚vana); Snp-a 78. Citi-citi
Sk. ciñcā & tintiḍikā
fizz DN-a i.137.
redupl. interj.
see cicciṭāyati; Vin i.225; cp. Divy 606.
travelled over, resorted to, made a habit of; done, performed, practised Ja iii.541; Mil 360-su˚ well performed, accomplished SN i.42 = SN i.214 = Snp 181; Pv iii.56 ■ Cp. ā˚, pari˚, vi˚.
-ṭṭhāna the place where one is wont to go Ja ii.159 -mānatta one who performs the Mānatta Vin iv.242 -vasin one who has reached mastership in (c. loc.) Thag-a 74; Vism 154, Vism 158, Vism 164, Vism 169, Vism 331 sq., 376; der. -vāsibhāva Dhs-a 167 (read vasī˚).
pp. of carati
(nt.) custom, habit Mil 57, Mil 105.
Der. fr. ciṇṇa
heaped; lined or faced with (cp. citaka2) pokkharaṇiyo iṭṭhakāhi citā DN ii.178, cp. Vin ii.123.
-antaraṃsa “one whose shoulder-hole is heaped up, one who has the shoulders well filled out (Ep. of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.164. Citaka & Citaka
pp. of cināti
(f.).
1. a heap, a pile, esp. a funeral pile; a tumulus DN ii.163; cp ii.1014. Ja i.255; Ja v.488; Ja vi.559, Ja vi.576; DN-a i.6; Dhp-a i.69 Dhp-a ii.240; Vv-a 234; Pv-a 39.
2. (adj.) inlaid: suvaṇṇa˚ with gold Ja vi.218 (= ˚khacita).
from ci, cināti to heap up
(f.) a heap, made of bricks Ja vi.204 (city-avayata-piṭṭhikā). See also cetiya.
From ci, cināti, to heap up
(nt.) a sectarian mark on the forehead in ˚dhara-kumma a tortoise bearing this mark, a landtortoise Mil 364, Mil 408, cp. Mil trsl. ii.352.
to citta1
: see acittaka.
(adj.) variegated, manifold, beautiful; tasty, sweet, spiced (of cakes), Ja iv.30 (geṇḍuka); Dhp 171 (rājaratha); Vv 479; Pv ii.112 (aneka˚); iv.313 (pūvā = madhurā Pv-a 251). Citta (nt.) painting Thag 674 ■ Snp 50 (kāmā = Nd ii.240 nānāvaṇṇā), 251 (gāthā); Ja v.196 (geṇḍuka), 241 vi.218 ■ sucitta gaily coloured or dressed SN i.226 (b) Dhp 151 (rājaratha); Pv i.109 (vimāna).
-akkhara (adj.) with beautiful vowels SN ii.267 (Cp ˚vyañjana); -attharaka a variegated carpet DN-a i.256 -āgāra a painted house, i.e. furnished with pictures a picture gallery Vin iv.298; -upāhana a gaily coloured sandal DN i.7≈; -kata adorned, dressed up MN ii.64; Dhp 147 = Thag 769; Dhp-a iii.109 (= vicitta); -katha (adj.) = next SN i.199 (+ bahussuta); -kathin a brilliant speaker, a wise speaker, an orator, preacher. Freq combd w. bahussuta (of wide knowledge, learned), e.g. paṇḍita… medhāvin kalyāṇapaṭibhāna SN iv.375 samaṇa bahussuta c. uḷāra Vv 8426 ■ AN iii.58; Ja i.148; Mil 1, Mil 21; -kathika = ˚kathin AN i.24; Thig 449 (+ bahussuta), expld at Thag-a 281 by cittadhammakatha -kamma decoration, ornamentation, painting Ja iv.408 Ja vi.333; Mil 278; Vism 306; Pv-a 147; Dhs-a 334 (m.) a painter Ja vi.481; -kāra a painter, a decorator (cp. rajaka) SN ii.101 = SN iii.152; Thig 256; Ja vi.333 -chatta at Ja vi.540 to be changed into ˚patta; -patta (adj.) having variegated wings Ja vi.540, Ja vi.590; -pāṭalī (f.) Name of a plant (the “pied” trumpet-flower) in the world of Asuras Ja i.202; Dhp-a i.280; -pekhuna having coloured wings Ja i.207; Ja vi.539; -bimba (-mukhi) (a woman whose face is) like a painted image Ja v.452 (cp cittakata); -miga the spotted antelope Ja vi.538 -rūpa (nt.) a wonder, something wonderful Ja vi.512 as adv. ˚ṃ (to citta2?) easily Vin ii.78 = Vin iii.161; Vin iv.177 Vin iv.232; -latā the plant Rubia Munjista Ja vi.278; ˚vana the R.M. grove, one of Indra’s gardens [Sk. caitraratha] Ja i.52, Ja i.104; Ja ii.188; Ja vi.590, etc.; -vitāna a bright canopy Dhp-a iv.14; -vyañjana (adj.) with beautiful consonants (cp. ˚akkhara) SN ii.267 = AN i.73 = AN iii.107 -sāṇī variegated cloth Ja ii.290; Dhp-a iv.14; -sālā a painted room or picture gallery DN-a i.253; -sibbana with fine sewing; a cover of various embroidery Snp 304; Ja iv.395; Ja vi.218.
to cetati; *(s)qait to shine, to be bright, cp. Sk. citra, Sk. P. ketu, Av. ciprō, Lat. caelum Ags. hador, Ohg. heitar, see also citta2
(nt.).
I. Meaning: the heart (psychologically), i.e. the centre & focus of man’s emotional nature as well as that intellectual element which inheres in & accompanies its manifestations; i.e. thought. In this wise citta denotes both the agent & that which is enacted (see kamma II. introd.), for in Indian Psychology citta is the seat & organ of thought (cetasā cinteti; cp. Gr. φρήν, although on the whole it corresponds more to the Homeric χυμός). As in the verb (cinteti) there are two stems closely allied and almost inseparable in meaning (see § III.), viz. cit & cet (citta & cetas); cp. ye should restrain, curb, subdue citta by ceto, MN i.120, MN i.242 (cp attanā coday’ attānaṃ Dhp 379 f.); cetasā cittaṃ samannesati SN i.194 (cp. cetasā cittaṃ samannesati SN i.194). In their general use there is no distinction to be made between the two (see § III.) ■ The meaning of citta is best understood when explaining it by expressions familiar to us, as: with all my heart heart and soul; I have no heart to do it; blessed are the pure in heart; singleness of heart (cp. ekagga); all of which emphasize the emotional & conative side or “thought” more than its mental & rational side (for which see manas & viññāṇa). It may therefore be rendered by intention, impulse, design; mood, disposition state of mind, reaction to impressions. It is only in later scholastic lgg. that we are justified in applying the term “thought” in its technical sense. It needs to be pointed out, as complementary to this view, that citta nearly always occurs in the singular (= heart) & out of 150 cases in the Nikāyas only 3 times in the plural (= thoughts). The substantiality of citta (cetas is also evident from its connection with kamma (heart as source of action), kāma & the senses in general.; On the whole subject see Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych Eth. introd. & Bud. Psy. ch. II.
II. Cases of citta (cetas), their relation & frequency (enum;d for gram. purposes) ■ The paradigma is (numbers denoting ", not including cpds.): Nom cittaṃ; Gen. (Dat.) cetaso (44) & cittassa (9); Instr cetasā (42) & cittena (3); Loc. citte (2) & cittamhi (2)-Nom.; cittaṃ (see below). Gen. cittassa only (of older passages) in c˚ upakkileso SN iii.232; SN v.92; AN i.207; c˚ damatho Dhp 35 & c˚ vasena MN i.214; MN iii.156 Instr. cittena only in SN i. viz. cittena nīyati loko p. 39 upakkiliṭṭha˚ p. 179; asallīnena c˚ p. 159. Loc. citte only as loc. abs. in samāhite citte (see below) & in citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi v. hoti AN i.162; cittamhi only SN i.129 & cittasmiṃ only SN i.132 ■ Plural only in Nom. cittāni in one phrase: āsavehi cittāni (vi) mucciṃsu “they purified their hearts from intoxications Vin i.35; SN iii.132; SN iv.20; Snp p.149; besides this in scholastic works = thoughts, e.g. Vb 403 (satta cittāni).
III. Citta & cetas; in promiscuous application. There is no cogent evidence of a clear separation of their respective fields of meaning; a few cases indicate the rôle of cetas as seat of citta, whereas most of them show no distinction. There are cpds. having both citta˚ ceto˚ in identical meanings (see e.g. citta-samādhi ceto˚), others show a preference for either one or the other, as ceto is preferred in ceto-khila & ceto-vimutti (but: vimutta-citta), whereas citta is restricted to comb;n w. upakkilesa, etc. The foll. sentences will illustrate this. Vivaṭena cetasā sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ bhāveti “with open heart he contemplates a radiant thought” SN v.263 = DN iii.223 = AN iv.86; cetasā cittaṃ samannesati vippamuttaṃ “with his heart he scrutinizes their pure mind” SN i.194; vigatâbhijjhena cetasā is followed by abhijjāya cittaṃ parisodheti DN iii.49 anupārambhacitto bhabbo cetaso vikkhepaṃ pahātuṃ AN v.149; cetaso vūpasamo foll. by vūpasanta-citto AN i.4; samāhite citte foll. by ceto-samādhi DN i.13≈ cittaṃ paduṭṭhaṃ foll. by ceto-padosa AN i.8; cp. It. 12 13; cetaso tato cittaṃ nivāraye “a desire of his heart he shall exclude from this” SN iv.195.
IV. Citta in itṡ relation to other terms referring to mental processes.
1. citta≈hadaya, the heart as incorporating man’s personality: hadayaṃ phaleyya, cittavikkhepaṃ pāpuṇeyya (break his heart, upset his reason) SN i.126 cittaṃ te khipissāmi hadayan te phālessāmi id. SN i.207 SN i.214; Snp p.32; kāmarāgena cittaṃ me pariḍayhati SN i.188 → nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṃ Mil 318 (“my heart is on fire”); cp. abhinibbutatto Snp 343 = apariḍayhamāna-citto Snp-a 347; cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahati to set one’s heart on, to wish Dhp-a i.327.
2. c. as mental status, contrasted to (a) physical status: citta → kāya, e.g. kilanta˚ weary in body mind DN i.20 = DN iii.32; ātura˚ SN iii.2–5; nikaṭṭha˚ AN ii.137; ṭhita˚ steadfast in body & soul (cp. ṭhitatta S; v.74; ˚passaddhi quiet of body & soul S; v.66. The Commentators distinguish those six pairs of the sankhārākkhandha or the cetasikas: citta-kāya-passaddhi-lahutā, etc. as quiet, buoyancy, etc., of (a) the viññāṇakkhandha (consciousness), (b) the other 3 mental khandhas, making up the nāma-kāya (Dhs-a 150 on Dhs. 62: Compendium of Phil. 96, n. 3); passaddha DN iii.241, DN iii.288 ■ (b) intellectual status: citta → manas & viññāṇa (mind → thought & understanding). These three constitute the invisible energizer of the body alias mind in its manifestations: yañ ca vuccati cittan ti vā mano ti vā viññāṇan ti vā: (;α) ayaṃ attā nicco dhuvo, etc., DN i.21; (β) tatr’ assutavā puthujjano n’ âlaṃ nibbindituṃ, etc. SN ii.94; (γ) taṃ rattiyā ca divasassa ca añña-d-eva uppajjati aññaṃ nirujjhati SN ii.95, cf. Thag-a. 1 on 125 ■ Under ādesanā-pāṭihāriya (thought reading): evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṃ (thus is your thought & thus your mind, i.e. habit of thinking) DN i.213 = DN iii.103; AN i.170 ■ niccaṃ idaṃ c. niccaṃ idaṃ mano SN i.53; cittena niyyati loko “by thoughts the world is led” SN i.39 = AN ii.177 (cp KS 55); apatiṭṭhita-citto ādīna-manaso avyāpaṇnacetaso SN v.74; vyāpanna-citto paduṭṭha-manasankappo SN iii.93; paduṭṭha-citto = paduṭṭha-manaso Pv-a 34, Pv-a 43.
3. c. as emotional habitus: (a) active = intention contrasted or compared with: (α) will, c. as one of the four samādhis, viz. chanda, viriya, c., vīmaṃsā DN iii.77; SN v.268; Vb 288 ■ (β) action, c. as the source of kamma: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṃ hoti “when the intention is evil, the deed is evil as well” AN i.262; cittaṃ appamāṇaṃ… yaṃ kiñci pamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ, etc. AN v.299 ■ Esp. in contrast to kāya & vācā, in triad kāyena vācāya cittena (in deed & speech & will otherwise as k. v. manasā, see under kāya III.) SN ii.231, SN ii.271 = SN iv.112. Similarly taṃ vācaṃ appahāya (cittaṃ˚, diṭṭhiṃ˚) SN iv.319 = DN iii.13 DN iii.15; & under the constituents of the dakkhiṇeyyasampatti as khetta-sampatti, citta˚, payoga˚ (the recipient of the gift, the good-will, the means) Vv-a 30 Vv-a 32 ■ (b); passive = mood, feelings, emotion, ranging with kāya & paññā under the (3) bhāvanā DN iii.219; SN iv.111; AN iii.106; cp. MN i.237; Ne 91; classed with kāya vedanā dhammā under the (4) satipaṭṭhānas DN ii.95, DN ii.100, DN ii.299 sq.; SN v.114, etc. (see kāya cpds.). As part of the sīlakkhandha (with sīla ethics, paññā understanding) in adhisīla, etc. Vin v.181; Pts ii.243; Vb 325; cp. tisso sampadā, scil. sīla, citta, diṭṭhi (see sīla & cp. cetanā, cetasika) AN i.269 ■ citta & paññā are frequently grouped together, e.g. SN i.13 = SN i.165; DN iii.269; Th i.125 sq. As feeling citta is contrasted with intellection in the group saññā c. diṭṭhi AN ii.52; Pts ii.80; Vb 376.
4. Definitions of citta (direct or implied): cittan ti viññāṇaṃ bhūmikavatthu-ārammaṇa-kiriyādi-cittatāya pan’ etaṃ cittan ti vuttaṃ Dhp-a i.228; cittan ti mano mānasaṃ Kp-a 153; cittaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ ti cittassa etaṃ vevacanaṃ Ne 54. yaṃ cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ hadayaṃ paṇḍaraṃ, etc. Dhs 6 = Dhs 111 (same for def. of manindriya, under § 17; see Buddh. Psych.). As rūpâvacara citta at Vism 376.
V. Citta in its range of semantical applications: (1) heart, will, intention, etc. (see I.).
(a) heart as general status of sensory-emotional being; its relation to the senses (indriyāni). A steadfast & constrained heart is the sign of healthy emotional equilibrium, this presupposes the control over the senses; samādahaṃsu cittaṃ attano ujukaṃ akaṃsu sārathī va nettāni gahetvā indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā SN i.26; ujugato-citto ariyasāvako AN iii.285; ṭhita c SN i.159≈; AN iii.377 = AN iv.404 (+ ānejjappatta); c. na kampati Snp 268; na vikampate SN iv.71; opp. capalaṃ c. Dhp 33; khitta˚; a heart unbalanced AN ii.52 (+ visaññin); opp.: avikkhitta˚ AN v.149; Pv-a 26; c. rakkhitaṃ mahato atthāya saṃvattati a guarded heart turns to great profit AN i.7; similarly: c. dantaṃ, guttaṃ, saṃvutaṃ ibid ■ cittaṃ rakkhetha medhāvī cittaṃ guttaṃ sukhāvahaṃ Dhp 36; cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutassa viharato cittaṃ vyāsiñcati… rūpesu SN iv.78; ye cittaṃ saññamessanti mokkhanti Mārabandhanā “from the fetters of Māra those are released who control their heart” Dhp 37; pāpā cittaṃ nivāraye Dhp 116; bhikkhuno c. kulesu na sajjati, gayhati, bajjhati SN ii.198 (cp. Schiller: “Nicht an die Güter hänge dein Herz”).
(b) Contact with kāma & rāga;: a lustful, worldly craving heart ■ (α) kāmā: kāmā mathenti cittaṃ Snp 50; SN iv.210; kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi SN i.188; kāme nâpekkhate cittaṃ Snp 435; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ Dhp 371; manussakehi kāmehi cittaṃ vuṭṭhapetvā SN v.409; na uḷāresu kāmaguṇesu bhogāya cittaṃ namati AN iv.392; SN i.92; kāmāsavā pi cittaṃ vimuccati AN ii.211, etc.; kāmesu c. na pakkhandati na ppasīdati na sanṭiṭṭhati (my h. does not leap, sit or stand in cravings) DN iii.239; kāmesu tibbasārāgo vyāpannacitto SN iii.93; kāmāmise laggacitto (divide thus!) Pv-a 107-(β) rāgā: rāgo cittaṃ anuddhaṃseti (defilement harasses his heart) SN i.185; SN ii.231 = SN ii.271; AN ii.126 AN iii.393; rāga-pariyuṭṭhitaṃ c. hoti AN iii.285; sārattacitto SN iv.73; viratta˚ SN iv.74; Snp 235; Pv-a 168. (γ) various: patibaddha-c. (fettered in the bonds of ˚) AN iv.60; Snp 37, Snp 65; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 151, etc ■ pariyādinna˚ (grasping, greedy), usually combd w. lābhena abhibhūta: SN ii.226, SN ii.228; SN iv.125; AN iv.160; DN iii.249- upakkiliṭṭha˚; (etc.) (defiled) SN i.179; SN iii.151, SN iii.232 sq.v.92 (kāmacchando cittassa upakkileso); AN i.207 AN v.93 sq ■ otiṇṇa˚ fallen in love AN iii.67; Snp-a 322.
(c) A heart, composed, concentrated, settled, selfcontrolled mastered, constrained ■ (α) c. pasīdati (pasanna-˚c) (a heart full of grace, settled in faith) SN i.98; AN i.207; AN iii.248; Snp 434; pasanna˚: AN iv.209, AN iv.213; Snp 316, Snp 403, Snp 690, cp. c. pakkhandati pasīdati SN iii.133; AN iii.245; also vippasanna˚: SN v.144; Snp 506; cp vippasannena cetasā Pv i.1010 ■ (β) c. santiṭṭhati in set s. sannisīdati, ekodihoti, samādhiyati (cp. cetaso ekodibhāva) SN ii.273; SN iv.263; AN ii.94, AN ii.157 ■ (γ) c samādhiyati (samāhita-c˚, cp. ceto-samadhi quiescence DN i.13 = DN iii.30, DN iii.108; SN i.120, SN i.129, SN i.188; SN iv.78 = SN iv.351; AN i.164; AN ii.211; AN iii.17, AN iii.280; AN iv.177; Vb 227; Vism 376 etc ■ (δ) supatiṭṭhita -c˚ always in formula catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu-s-c˚: SN iii.93; SN v.154; SN v.301; DN iii.101; AN v.195-(ε) susaṇṭhita c. SN v.74 ■ vasībhūta c. SN i.132; AN i.165 ■ danta c. Dhp 35 ■ (d) “with purpose of heart,” a heart set on, striving after, endeavouring etc ■ (α) cittaṃ namati (inclines his h. on, with dat appossukkatāya SN i.137); nekkhamma-ninna SN iii.233 viveka˚ DN iii.283; AN iv.233; AN v.175 ■ (β) cittaṃ padahati (pa + dhā: προ τίχητι) in phrase chandaṃ janeti vāyamati viriyaṃ ārabbhati c˚ ṃ paggaṇhāti padahati DN iii.221; AN ii.15 = AN iv.462; SN v.269; Nd ii.97; Ne 18 In the same ṣense pa-ni-dahati (in paṇidhi, paṇihita bent down on) (cp. ceto-paṇidhi) SN i.133 (tattha iv.309 (dup˚); v.157; Dhp 42 = Ud 39; Dhp 43 (sammā˚).
(e) An evil heart (“out of heart proceed evil thoughts Mk. 7, 21)-(α) paduṭṭha -c˚ (cp. ceto-padosa) DN i.20 DN iii.32; AN i.8 (opp. pasanna-c˚); iv.92; Iti 12, Iti 13; Pv-a 33, 43, etc ■ (β) vyāpanna -c˚: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṃ hoti AN i.262. Opp. a˚ SN iv.322; AN ii.220 ■ (γ) samoha -c˚ (+ sarāga, etc. DN i.79; DN ii.299; DN iii.281; Vism 410, & passim.;
(f) “blessed are the pure in heart,” a pure, clean, purified (cp. Ger. geläutert), emancipated, free, detached heart. (α) mutta -c˚, vimutta - c˚, etc. (cp. cetaso vimokkho ceto-vimutti, muttena cetasā), āsavehi cittāni mucciṃsu SN iii.132, etc.; vi˚ Snp p.149 ■ vimutta SN i.28 (+ subhāvita), 29, 46 = 52; iii.45 (+ viratta), 90 iv.236 (rāgā); Snp 23 (+ sudanta); Nd ii.587 ■ suvimutta: SN i.126, SN i.141, SN i.233; SN iv.164; AN iii.245; AN v.29; Snp 975 (+ satimā) ■ (β) cittaṃ parisodheti MN i.347; AN ii.211; SN iv.104 ■ (γ) alīna c. (unstained) SN i.159; AN v.149; Snp 68; Snp 717; Nd ii.97 (cp. cetaso līnatta).
(g) good-will, a loving thought, kindliness, tenderheartedness love (“love the Lord with all your heart”)-(α) metta -c˚ usually in phrase mettacittaṃ bhāveti “to nourish the heart with loving thought,” to produce good-will DN i.167; SN ii.264; AN i.10; AN v.81; Snp 507 (cp mettā-sahagatena cetasā) ■ (β) bhāvita -c˚ “keep thy heart with all diligence” (Prov. 4, 23) SN i.188 (+ susamāhita); iv.294; v.369 (saddhā-paribhāvita); AN i.6 (+ bahulīkata, etc.); Snp 134 (= SN i.188); Dhp 89 = SN v.29; Pv-a 139.
(h) a heart calmed, allayed, passionless (santa upasanta˚; ) D.iii.49; SN i.141; Snp 746.
(i) a wieldy heart, a heart ready & prepared for truth an open & receptive mind:; kalla˚, mudu˚, udagga˚ pasanna˚; AN iv.186; kalla˚; Pv-a 38 (sanctified); lahu SN i.201; udagga˚; Snp 689, Snp 1028; SN i.190 (+ mudita) mudu˚ Pv-a 54.
(k) Various phrases. Abbhuta-cittajātā “while wonder filled their hearts” SN i.178; evaṃcitto “in this state of mind” SN ii.199; Snp 985; cittam me Gotamo jānāti (G. knows my heart) SN i.178; theyya-citto intending to steal Vin iii.58; āraddha-citto of determined mind MN i.414; SN ii.21, cp. 107; Snp p.102; aññācittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti SN ii.267; nānā˚ of varying mind Ja i.295 nihīnacitto low-minded Pv-a 107; nikaṭṭha˚ AN ii.137 āhata˚ AN iv.460 = AN v.18; supahata˚ SN i.238 (cp. Mil 26); visankhāragata˚ Dhp 154; sampanna˚ Snp 164 vibbhanta˚ SN i.61 = AN i.70 = AN ii.30 = AN iii.391.
(2) thought: mā pāpakaṃ akusalaṃ cittaṃ cinteyyātha (do not think any evil thought) SN v.418; na cittamattam pi (not even one thought) Pv-a 3; mama cittaṃ bhaveyya (I should think) Pv-a 40. For further instances see Dhs & Vb Indexes & cp. cpds. See also remarks above (under I.). Citta likened to a monkey Vism 425.;
-ādhipati the influence of thought (adj. ˚pateyya Ne 16; Dhs 269, Dhs 359; Dhs-a 213. Commentators define c. here as javanacittuppāda, our “thought” in its specialized sense, Compendium of Phil. 177, n. 2 -ānuparivattin consecutive to thought Dhs 671, Dhs 772 Dhs 1522; -ānupassanā the critique of heart, adj. ˚ânupassin DN ii.299; DN iii.221, DN iii.281; MN i.59 & passim (cp kāy˚); -āvila disturbance of mind Nd ii.576 (˚karaṇa) -ujjukatā rectitude of mind Dhs 51, Dhs 277, etc.; -uppāda the rise of a thought, i.e. intention, desire as theyya ˚ṃ uppādesi he had the intention to steal (a thought of theft) Vin iii.56 ■ MN i.43; MN iii.45; Ja ii.374; -ekaggatā “one-pointedness of mind,” concentration Ne 15, Ne 16 Vism 84, Vism 137, Vism 158; Dhp-a iii.425; Thag-a 75; cp ekagga-citto AN iii.175; -kali a witch of a heart, a witch-like heart Thag 356; -kallatā readiness of heart, preparedness of mind Vv-a 330; -kilesa stain of h. Dhp 88 (Dhp-a ii.162 = pañca nīvaraṇā); -kelisā pastime of the mind Thag 1010; -kkhepa derangement of the mind, madness Vin v.189 = Vin v.193 (ummāda + ); AN iii.219 (ummāda + ); Dhp-a iii.70 (= ummāda); Pv-a 39; Dhp 138; cp. ˚vikkhepa; -cetasika belonging to heart & thought, i.e. mental state thought, mind DN i.213; Dhs 1022 (-dhammā, Mrs Rh. D.: emotional, perceptual & synthetic states as well as those of intellect applied to sense-impressions) 1282; Pts i.84; Mil 87; Vism 61, Vism 84, Vism 129, Vism 337 -dubbhaka a rogue of a heart, a rogue-like heart Thag 214; -pakopana shaking or upsetting the mind Iti 84 (dosa); -pamaddin crushing the h. Thig 357 (= Thag-a 243; v.l. pamāthin & pamādin; ) -pariyāya the ways (i.e. behaviour) of the h. AN v.160 (cp. ceto-paricca); -passaddhi calm of h., serenity of mind (cp. kāya˚; ) SN v.66; Dhs 62; -bhāvanā cultivation of the h. MN iii.149; -mala stain of h. Pv-a 17; -mudutā plasticity of mind (or thought) Dhs 62, Dhs 277, Dhs 325 -rucita after the heart’s liking Ja i.207; -rūpaṃ according to intention, as much as expected Vin i.222; Vin ii.78 Vin iii.161; Vin iv.177, Vin iv.232; -lahutā buoyancy of thought Dhs 62, Dhs 323, Dhs 1283; Vism 465; -vikkhepa (cp. ˚kkhepa madness SN i.126 (+ ummāda ); Ne 27; Vism 34; -vippayutta disconnected with thought Dhs 1192, Dhs 1515; -visaṃsaṭṭha detached fr. thought Dhs 1194, Dhs 1517; -vūpasama allayment of one’s h. SN i.46; -saṅkilesa (adj.) with impure heart (opp. c ■ vodāna) SN iii.151; -saññatti conviction Mil 256; -santāpa “heart-burn,” sorrow Pv-a 18 (= soka); -samādhi (cp. ceto- samādhi ) concentration of mind, collectedness of thought, self-possession SN iv.350; SN v.269; Vb 218; -samodhāna adjustment calming of thoughts Thag-a 45; -sampīḷana (adj.) h. crushing (cp. ˚pamaddin & ˚pakopana; ) Ne 29 (domanassa). -sahabhū arising together with thought Dhs 670, Dhs 769, Dhs 1520. -hetuka (adj.) caused by thought Dhs 667, Dhs 767.
Sk. citta, orig. pp. of cinteti, cit, cp. yutta → yuñjati, mutta → muñcati. On etym. from cit. see cinteti
Name of the month Chaitra Pv-a 135. Cp. Citra-māsa Kp-a 192.
cp. Sk. caitra, the first month of the year: MarchApril, orig. Name of the star Spica (in Virgo); see E Plunket, Ancient Calendars, etc., pp. 134 sq., 171 sq.
1. (adj.)(a) coloured Ja iv.464. - 2. (m.)(b) the spotted antelope Ja vi.538.
3. (nt. a (coloured) mark (on the forehead) Mil 408 (˚dharakumma) ■ f. cittakā a counterpane of many colours (DN-a i.86 cittikā: vāna citra-uṇṇā-may attharaṇaṃ) Vin i.192; Vin ii.163, Vin ii.169; DN i.7; AN i.181≈.
read nāna˚
, compar. of citta1, more various, more varied. SN iii.151 sq ■ a punning passage, thus: by the procedure (caraṇa) of mind (in the past) the present mind (citta) is still more varied. Cp. SA in loco: Asl. 66 Expositor 88.
. SA on SN iii.151 sq. (bhūmicittatāya dvāracittatāya ārammaṇacittatāya kammanānatta).
f. abstr. to citta1
“being of such a heart or mind,” state of mind, character SN iii.152; SN iv.142 (vimutta˚); v.158 (id.); AN v.145 sq. (upārambha˚) Vb 372 (id.); Vb 359 (amudu˚); Pv-a 13 (visuddhi˚ noble character); paṭibaddha˚ (in love with) Pv-a 145 Pv-a 147, Pv-a 270. In SN iii.152 l cittitā q.v.
f. abstr. to citta2
(n.) = cittatā SN v.158.
(f.) “giving thought or heart only in combn w. kar: cittikaroti to honour, to esteem Ger. cittikatvā MN iii.24; AN iii.172; Pv ii.955 (cittiṃ k. = pūjetvā Pv-a 135); Dpvs i.2 ■ acittikatvā MN iii.22; AN iv.392 ■ pp. cittikata thought (much) of Vin iv.6 (& a˚); Vb 2.
fr. cit, cp. citta, cintā, cinteti, formation like mutti → muc, sitti → sic
respect, consideration Vv-a 178 (garu˚), 242; Pv-a 26; Vb 371 (a˚); Vism 123 (cittī˚), 188.
see citti
painted, variegated, varied, coloured or resplendent with (-˚) SN iii.152 (sic l. for cittatā) So SA, which, on p. 151, reads citten’ eva cittitaṃ for cintitaṃ. Thag 736; Thag 2, Thag 390 (su˚); Vv 367; 402.
pp. of citteti, Denom. fr. citta1
= citta3, the month Chaitra, Kp-a 192 (˚māsa).
to heap up, to collect, to accumulate Inf. cinituṃ Vin ii.152; pp. cita (q.v.). Pass cīyati Ja v.7. Caus. cināpeti to construct, to build Ja vi.204; Mil 81 ■ Note cināti at Ja ii.302 (to weave is to be corr. to vināti (see Kern, Toev. s. v.) ■ Cp ā˚, pa˚, vi˚ ■ Note. cināti also occurs as cinati in pa˚.
Sk. cinoti & cayati,; ci, to which also kāya, q.v. See also caya, cita
(adj.) one who thinks out or invents, in akkhara˚; the grammarian Pv-a 120, nīti˚; the lawgiver ib. 130; cp. Divy 212, Divy 451, “overseer.”
cp. cintin
(nt.) = cintā Thag 695; Mil 233.
(adj.) thoughtful, considerate Ja i.222.
“the act of thinking” (cp. citti), thought SN i.57; Pp 25; Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 292; Sdhp 165 Sdhp 216 ■ loka˚ thinking over the world, philosophy SN v.447; AN ii.80.
-kavi “thought-poetry,” i.e. original poetry (see kavi) AN ii.230; -maṇi the jewel of thought, the true philosopher’s stone Vv-a 32; Name of a science Ja iii.504 -maya consisting of pure thought, metaphysical DN iii.219; Ja iv.270; Vb 324; Ne 8, Ne 50, Ne 60 (˚mayin, of paññā); Vism 439 (id.).
to cit, cinteti
(a) (adj.) thought out, invented, devised SN i.137 (dhammo asuddho samalehi c.); iii.151 (caraṇaṃ nāma cittaṃ citten’ eva c.); Pv ii.613 (mantaṃ brahma˚, expl. Pv-a 97 by kathitaṃ) ■ (b) (nt.) a thought, intention, in duc˚ su˚; (bad & good) AN i.102; Thag-a 76; -matta as much a a thought, loc. cintita-matte (yeva) at the mere thoughts just as he thought it Dhp-a i.326 (= cintita kkhaṇe in the moment of thinking it, p. 329).
pp. of cinteti, cp. also cintaka
only-˚: thinking of, having one’s thoughts on AN i.102 (duccintita˚ & su˚); Snp 174 (ajjhatta˚; v.l. B. ˚saññin) 388; Ja iii.306 = Ja iv.453 Ja v.176 = Ja v.478; Mil 92.
adj. to cintā
Forms: (a) cint: pres. cinteti pot. cinteyya; ppr. cintento & cintayanto (Snp 834)-aor. cintesi, 3rd pl. cintesuṃ (Ja i.149), acintayuṃ (Snp 258) ■ ger. cintetvā (Ja i.279) & cintiya (Mvu vii.17, Mvu vii.32) ■ grd. cinteyya & cintetabba; pp. cintita (q.v.). Cp. also cintana, cintin ■ (b) cet: pres ceteti & cetayati (SN i.121), pot. cetaye (Pv ii.97 cinteyya Pv-a 116); ppr. cetayāna (Ja v.339); fut cetessati (Vin iii.19) ■ aor. acetayi (Pv i.66 = cetesi Pv-a 34) ■ ger cecca (Vin iii.112; Vin iv.290); also cicca see sañ˚ ■ grd. cetabba (for *cetetabba only at Ja iv.157, v.l. ceteyya, expl. by cintetabba) ■ pp cetayita (q.v.). Cp. also cetanā.
Note. The relation in the use of the two forms is that cet is the older & less understood form, since it is usually expl;d by cint, whereas cint is never expld by cet & therefore appears to be the more frequent & familiar form.;
Meaning: (a) (intr.) to think, to reflect, to be of opinion, Grouped with (phuṭṭho) vedeti, ceteti, sañjānāti he has the feeling, the awareness (of the feeling) the consciousness SN iv.68. Its seat is freq. mentioned with manasā (in the heart), viz. manasā diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Snp 834; na pāpaṃ manasā pi cetaye Pv ii.97; Ja i.279; Pv-a 13 (he thought it over), ib. (evaṃ c you think so); Sdhp 289 (īdisaṃ c. id.) Mvu vii.18, Mvu vii.32; Mil 233 (cintayati), 406 (cintayitabba) ■ Prohibitive mā cintayi don’t think about it, don’t worry, don’t be afraid, never mind Ja i.50, Ja i.292, Ja i.424; Ja iii.289; Ja vi.176 pl. mā cintayittha Ja i.457; Ja iv.414; Ja vi.344; Vism 426; Dhp-a i.12; Dhp-a iii.196; also mā cintesi Ja iii.535 ■ (b) (with acc.) to ponder, think over, imagine, think out, design scheme, intend, plan. In this sense grouped with (ceteti) pakappeti anuseti to intend, to start to perform, to carry out SN ii.65. maraṇaṃ ākankhati cetayati (ponders over) SN i.121; acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni AN ii.80; cetabba-rūpa (a fit object of thought, a good thought) Ja iv.157 (= cintetabba); loka-cintaṃ c SN v.447; ajjhattarūpe, etc. ceteti Vin iii.113; mangalāni acintayuṃ Snp 258; diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Snp 834 kiṃ cintesi Ja i.221; sokavinayan’-upāyaṃ c. to devise a means of dispelling the grief Pv-a 39 ■ Esp. with pāpaṃ & pāpakaṃ to intend evil, to have ill-will against (c. dat.): mā pāpakaṃ akusalaṃ cittaṃ cinteyyātha SN v.418; na p. cetaye manasā pi Pv ii.97 (= cinteyya piheyya Pv-a 116); p. na cintetabba Pv-a 114; tassā p. acetayi Pv i.66 (= cetesi Pv-a 34); kiṃ amhākaṃ cintesi what do you intend against us? Ja i.211 ■ (c (with dat.) (restricted to ceteti) to set one’s heart on, to think upon, strive after, desire: āgatipunabbhavāya c. to desire a future rebirth SN iv.201; vimokkhāya c to strive after emancipation SN iii.121; attavyābadhāya c. MN iii.23 = AN i.157 = SN iv.339; pabbajjāya c. Iti 75 rakkhāya me tvaṃ vihito… udāhu me cetayase vadhāya Ja iii.146-acinteyya that which must not or cannot be thought AN ii.80 (cattāri ˚āni four reflections to be avoided); Vv-a 323 (a. buddhânubhāva unimaginable majesty of a B.).
Sk. cetati to appear, perceive, & cintayati to think,; cit (see citta2) in two forms: (a) Act, base with nasal infix cint (cp. muñc, yuñj, siñc, etc.); (b) Med base (denom.) with guṇa cet (cp. moc, yoj, sec, etc & the analogous formations of; chid, chind, ched under chindati) to *(s)qait: see citta1, with which further cp caksu, cikita, ciketi, cikitsati, & in meaning passati (he sees = he knows), Gr.; οἰδα = vidi, E. view = thought Ger. anschauung
(adj.) pressed flat, flattened Vv-a 222 To be read also at Ja vi.185 for vippita.
pp. to cip (?) see next: cp. Sk. cipiṭa grain flattened after boiling
crushed flat (Rh. D.; cp. also Kern Toev.) Mil 261.
ppr. Pass. of cip, see cipiṭa
(f.) see cilimikā Vin ii.150; Vin iv.40; Cp. Vin. Texts iii.167; J.P.T.S. 1885, 39.
(adj.) long (of time), usually in cpds. & as adv. Either; ciraṃ (acc.) for a long time Snp 678, Snp 730, Snp 1029; Dhp 248; Kp vii.5; Ja ii.110; Ja iv.3; Pv ii.333 or cirena (instr.) after a long time Vin iv.86; Dhs-a 239; or cirāya (dat.) for long Dhp 342. cirassa (gen.) see cirassaṃ ■ cirataraṃ (compar.) for a (comparatively) long time, rather long AN iii.58; Pv ii.87. cir-â-ciraṃ continually Vin iv.261; Ja v.233 ■ acira not long (ago) lately, newly: ˚arahattappatta SN i.196; ˚pabbajita SN i.185; ˚parinibbute Bhagavati shortly after the death of the Bhagavant DN i.204, etc.; Snp p.59.
-kālaṃ (adv.) a long time freq. e.g. Pv-a 19, Pv-a 45, Pv-a 60 Pv-a 109; -ṭṭhitika perpetual, lasting long AN iv.339 (opp pariyāpajjati); Vv 801; Pp 32, Pp 33; Vism 37, Vism 175; DN-a i.3. -dikkhita (not ˚dakkhita) having long since been initiated SN i.226 = Ja v.138 (= cirapabbajita) -nivāsin dwelling (there) for a long time SN ii.227 -paṭika [cp. Sk. ciraṃ prati] long since, adj. constr in conformity w. the subject Vin i.33; DN ii.270; SN iii.120; -pabbajita having long since become a wanderer AN iii.114; Snp p.92; DN-a i.143; -ppavāsin (adj.) long absent Dhp 219 (= cirappavuttha Dhp-a iii.293). -rattaṃ (adv.) for a long time Snp 665, Snp 670; Ja iv.371; and -rattāya id. Ja ii.340; Pv i.94.
Vedic. cira, perhaps to *quei̯e to rest, cp. Lat. quiēs, civis; Goth. hveila; Ohg. wīlōn; E. while
(adv.) at last Vin ii.195; DN i.179; SN i.142; Ja ii.439; Ja iii.315; Ja iv.446 (read cirassa passāmi); v.328; Thag 868; Thag-a 217; Pv-a 60- na cirass’ eva shortly after DN iii.11; Ja iv.2; Dhp-a iii.176; Pv-a 32 ■ sucirass’ eva after a very long while SN i.193.
origin. geName of cira = cirasya
to be long, to tarry, to delay, Dhp-a i.16; Vv-a 64, Vv-a 208; cp. ciraṃ karoti id. Ja ii.443.
Sk. cirayati, v. denom. fr. cira
a parrot Ja v.202 (in compn cirīti˚).
Sk. ciri, cp. kīra
(f.) as cimilikā at Vin ii.150; Vin iv.40 a kind of cloth or carpeting, made from palmleaves bark, etc. Also at Pv-a 144 (doubtful reading).
Der. fr. cīra
a peg, post, pillar, in dāruka˚; Thig 390 (cp. Thag-a 257). Not with Kern (Toev.) “a wooden puppet,” as der. fr. citta.1
kilaka or khīlaka, q.v.
(m. nt.) a kind of bean Snp 239 (= aṭavi-pabbatapadesu āropita-jāta-cīna-mugga Snp-a 283); Ja v.405.
(nt.) red lead DN-a i.40; Dhs-a 14.
to be gathered, to be heaped up Snp 428 (cīyate pahūtaṃ puññaṃ). See also ā˚.
Pass. of cināti
(nt.) 1. bark, fibre DN i.167 (kusa˚, vāka˚, phalaka˚); Vin iii.34; AN i.295; Pp 55-a bark dress Vin i.305; Ja vi.500 (cp. cīraka).
2. a strip (orig. of bark), in suvaṇṇa˚-khacita gold-brocaded Vv-a 280 (see also next). Cp. ocīraka (under odīraka).
Sk. cīra, cp. cīvara
1. bark (see cpds.)
2. a strip, in suvaṇṇa˚; gold brocade (dress) Ja v.197.
-vāsika (nt.) bark-dress (a punishment) MN i.87 = AN i.48 = Mil 197.
cp. cīra
(adj.) like or of bark, in cpd. dāru˚; (as Np.) “wood-barker” Dhp-a ii.35.
fr. cīra
(f.) a cricket AN iii.397 (v.l. cīrikā). Cp. on word-formation pipiḷikā & Mod. Gr.; τσίτσικος cricket.
cp. Sk. cīrī & jhillikā a cricket, cīrilli a sort of large fish
(nt.) the (upper) robe of a Buddhist mendicant C. is the first one of the set of 4 standard requisites of a wandering bhikkhu, vir. c˚, piṇḍapāta alms-bowl, senāsana lodging, a place to sleep at, gilānapaccaya-bhesajja-parikkhāra medicinal appliances for use in sickness. Thus mentioned passim e.g. Vin iii.89, Vin iii.99, Vin iii.211; Vin iv.154 sq.; DN i.61; MN ii.102; AN i.49 Nd ii.s. v.; Iti 111. In abbreviated form Snp 339; Pv-a 7; Sdhp 393. In starting on his begging round the bhikkhu goes patta-cīvaraṃ ādāya, The 3 robes are sanghāṭi, uttarāsaṅga, antaravāsaka given thus, e.g. at Vin i.289. that is literally ʻtaking his bowl & robe.ʼ But this is an elliptical idiom meaning ʻputting on his outer robe and taking his bowl.ʼ A bhikkhu never goes into a village without wearing all his robes, he never takes them, or any one of the three, with him. Each of the three is simply; an oblong piece of cloth (usually cotton cloth). On the mode of wearing these three robes see the note at Dialogues ii.145 ■ Vin iii.11; DN ii.85; Snp p.21; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 13 & passim. The sewing of the robe was a festival for the laity (see under kaṭhina). There are 6 kinds of cloth mentioned for its manufacture, viz khoma, kappāsika, koseyya, kambala, sāṇa, bhanga Vin.; i.58 = 96 = 281 (cp. ˚dussa). Two kinds of robes are distinguished: one of the gahapatika (layman) a white one, and the other that of the bhikkhu, the c proper, called paṃsukūlaṃ c. “the dust-heap robe Vin v.117 (cp. gahapati) ■ On cīvara in general also on special ordinances concerning its making, wearing & handling see Vin i.46, Vin i.49 sq., 196, 198, 253 sq. 285, 287 sq., 306 = ii.267 (of var. colours); ii.115 sq (sibbati to sew the c.); iii.45, 58 (theft of a c.), 195–223 254
266; iv.59
62, 120
123, 173, 279 sq., 283 (six kinds)-A iii.108 (cīvare kalyāṇakāma); v.100, 206; Vism 62; Iti 103; Pv-a 185 ■ Sīse cīvaraṃ karoti to drape the outer robe over the head Vin ii.207, Vin ii.217; ˚ṃ khandhe karoti to drape it over the back Vin ii.208, Vin ii.217; ˚ṃ nikkhipati to lay it down or put it away Vin i.47 sq.; Vin ii.152 Vin ii.224; Vin iii.198, Vin iii.203, Vin iii.263; ˚ṃ saṃharati to fold it up Vin i.46 ■ Var. expressions referring to the use of the robe atireka˚; an extra robe Vin iii.195; acceka˚; id. Vin iii.260 sq.; kāla˚; (& akāla˚) a robe given at (and outside) the specified time Vin iii.202 sq.; Vin iv.284, Vin iv.287; gahapati˚ a layman’s r. Vin iii.169, Vin iii.171; ti˚; the three robes, viz sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga, antaravāsaka Vin i.288, Vin i.289 Vin iii.11, Vin iii.195, Vin iii.198 sq.; Vin v.142; adj. tecīvarika wearing 3 rs. Vin v.193; dubbala˚; (as adj.) with a worn-out c Vin iii.254; Vin iv.59, Vin iv.154, Vin iv.286; paṃsukūla˚; the dust-heap robe Pv-a 141; sa˚-bhatta food given with a robe Vin iv.77; lūkha˚; (adj.) having a coarse robe Vin i.109 (+ duccola); iii.263 (id.); AN i.25; vihāra˚; a robe to be used in the monastery Vin iii.212.
-kaṇṇa the lappet of a monk’s robe Dhp-a iii.420; Vv-a 76 = Dhp-a iii.106, cp. cīvarakarṇaka Av.Ś ii.184 & ˚ika Divy 239, Divy 341, Divy 350.; -kamma (nt.) robe-making Vin ii.218; Vin iii.60, Vin iii.240; Vin iv.118, Vin iv.151; AN v.328 sq.; Dhp-a iii.342; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 145. -kāra (-samaya) (the time of sewing the robes Vin iii.256 sq. -kāla (-samaya) the right time for accepting robes Vin iii.261; Vin iv.286, Vin iv.287 -dāna (-samaya) (the ime for) giving robes Vin iv.77 Vin iv.99; -dussa clothing-material Vin iv.279, Vin iv.280; -nidāhaka putting on the c. Vin i.284; -paṭiggāhaka the receiver of a robe Vin i.283; Vin ii.176; Vin v.205; AN iii.274 sq. -paṭivisa a portion of the c. Vin i.263, Vin i.285, Vin i.301 -palibodha an obstacle to the valid performance of the kathina ceremony arising from a set of robes being due to a particular person [a technical term of the canon law. See Vinaya Texts ii.149, 157, 169]. It is one of the two kaṭhinassa palibodhā (c. & āvāsa˚ Vin i.265; Vin v.117, cp. 178; -paviveka (nt.) the seclusion of the robe, i.e. of a non-Buddhist with two other pavivekāni (piṇḍapāta˚ & senāsana˚) at AN i.240 -bhaṅga the distribution of robes Vin iv.284; -bhatta robes & a meal (given to the bh.) Vin iii.265; -bhājaka one who deals out the robes Vin i.285; Vin ii.176 Vin v.205; AN iii.274 sq. (cp. ˚paṭiggāhaka); -bhisī a robe rolled up like a pillow Vin i.287 sq.; -rajju (f.) a rope for (hanging up) the robes; in the Vinaya always combd with ˚vaṃsa (see below); -lūkha (adj.) one who is poorly dressed Pp 53; -vaṃsa a bamboo peg for hanging up a robe (cp. ˚rajju) Vin i.47, Vin i.286; Vin ii.117 Vin ii.121, Vin ii.152, Vin ii.153, Vin ii.209, Vin ii.222; Vin iii.59; Ja i.9; Dhp-a iii.342 -saṅkamanīya (nt.) a robe that ought to be handed over (to its legal owner) Vin iv.282; Vin iv.283.
*Sk. cīvara, prob. = cīra, appld orig. to a dress of bark
1. pp. broken up powdered; only in cpd. ˚vicuṇṇa crushed to bits smashed up, piecemeal Ja i.73; Ja ii.120, Ja ii.159, Ja ii.216; Ja iii.74–2. (nt.) (a) any hard substance ground into a powder dust, sand Ja i.216; Vv-a 65 (paṃsu˚); Pv iii.33 (suvaṇṇa gold-dust; Pv-a 189 = vālikā); DN-a i.245 (id.); Dhs-a 12 ■ (b) esp. “chunam” (Anglo-Ind.) i.e. a plaster of which quicklime & sand are the chief ingredients which is largely used in building, but also applied to the skin as a sort of soap-powder in bathing. Often comb;d with mattikā clay, in distinction of which c. is for delicate use (tender skin), whereas m. for rougher purposes (see Vin i.202); cuṇṇāni bhesajjāni an application of c. Vin i.202 ■ Vin i.47 = Vin i.52; Vin ii.220, Vin ii.224 sq. AN i.208; AN iii.25; Ja v.89. cuṇṇa-tela-vālaṇḍupaka Vism 142 (where Asl 115 reads cuṇṇaṃ vā telaṃ vā leḍḍūpaka)- nahāniya˚; DN i.74 = MN iii.92; Pv-a 46; na-hāna Ja ii.403, Ja ii.404 ■ gandha -cuṇṇa aromatic (bath) powder Ja i.87, Ja i.290; Ja iii.276; candana˚; id. Mil 13, Mil 18 ■ iṭṭhaka˚ plaster (which is rubbed on the head of one to be executed) Pv-a 4, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X, beginning (stanza 5) “piṣṭa-cūrṇâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ‘haṃ paśūkṛtaḥ.”
-cālanī a mortar for the preparation of chunam Vin i.202; -piṇḍa a lump of ch. Vin iii.260; Vin iv.154 sq.
Sk. cūrṇa, pp. of carvati, to chew, to *sqer to cut, break up, as in Lat. caro, Sk. kṛṇāti (cp. kaṭu); cp Lit. kirwis axe, Lat. scrūpus sharp stone, scrupulus scortum. See also calaka2 & cp. Sk. kṣunna of; kṣud to grind, to which prob. P. kuḍḍa
(adj.) (a) a preparation of chunam, paint (for the face, mukha˚) DN i.7; MN ii.64 = Thag 771; Ja v.302 ■ (b) powder; cuṇṇakajātāni reduced to powder MN iii.92 (aṭṭhikāni) ■ f. ˚ikā in cuṇṇikamaṃsa mince meat Ja i.243.
fr. cuṇṇa
to grind to powder, to crush; to powder or paint w. chunam Vin ii.107 (mukhaṃ) Ja iv.457 ■ ppr. pass cuṇṇiyamāna being ground Ja vi.185.
Denom. of cuṇṇa
1. (adj.) shifted, disappeared, deceased, passed from one existence to another Vin iv.216; Snp 774, Snp 899; Iti 19, Iti 99; Ja i.139, Ja i.205; Pp 17 ■ -accuta permanent. not under the sway of Death Ep. of Nibbāna Dhp 225.
2. (n.) in cpd. cutūpapāta disappearance & reappearance, transmigration, Saṃsāra (see cuti) SN ii.67 (āgatigatiyā sati c˚ hoti); AN iii.420; AN iv.178; Dhp-a i.259; usually in phrase sattānaṃ cutûpapāta-ñāṇa the discerning of the saṃsāra of beings DN i.82 = MN i.248; DN iii.111. As cutuppāta at AN ii.183. Cp. jātisaṃsāra-ñāṇa.
pp. of cavati; Sk. cyuta
(f.) vanishing, passing away, decease, shifting out of existence (opp. upapatti, cp also gati & āgati) DN i.162; SN ii.3 = SN ii.42; SN iii.53; MN i.49; Snp 643; Dhp 419; Ja i.19, Ja i.434; Vism 292, Vism 460, Vism 554; Dhp-a iv.228.
cp. Sk. cyuti, to cavati
(adj.) being urged, receiving blame, being reproved Vin i.173; Vin ii.250; Vin ii.250, Vin ii.251; MN i.95 sq.; AN iii.196 sq. -˚ka id. Vin v.115, Vin v.158, Vin v.161, Vin v.164.
pp. of codati
fourteen Ja i.71; Ja vi.8; Mil 12; Dhp-a iii.120, Dhp-a iii.186.
contracted fr. catuddasa, Sk. caturdaśa, cp. catur
an artist who works in ivory Ja vi.261 (Com: dantakāra); Mil 331.
a turner Ja vi.339.
(nt.) (a) a coil; a pad of cloth, a pillow Ja i.53 (dukūla˚); ii.21 (id.); Vv-a 73 ■ (b) a wreath Ja iii.87. Cp. next.
cp. Prk. cumbhala
(nt.) cumbaṭa, viz. (a) a pillow Dhp-a i.139; Vv-a 33, Vv-a 165 ■ (b) a wreath Ja iv.231 (puppha˚); Snp-a 137; Dhp-a i.72 (mālā˚).
to kiss Ja ii.193; Ja v.328; Ja vi.291, Ja vi.344; Vv-a 260. Cp. pari˚. Culla & cula;
Sk. cumbati. Dhtp 197 defines as “vadanasaṃyoge”
(adj.) small, minor (opp mahā great, major), often in conn. with names & titles of books, e.g. c˚ Anāthapiṇḍika = A jr. Ja ii.287, cp Anglo-Indian chota sahīb the younger gentleman (Hind. chhota = culla); or Culla-vagga, the minor section (Vin ii.) as subordinate to Mahā-vagga (Vin i.) Culla-niddesa the minor exposition (following upon Mahā-niddesa); culla-sīla the siṃple precepts of ethics (opp. mahā˚ the detailed sīla) DN i.5, etc. Otherwise only in cpds.:
-aṅgulī little finger Dhp-a ii.86. -ūpaṭṭhāka a “lesser follower, i.e. a personal attendant (of a thera) Ja i.108 (cūl˚); ii.325 (cull˚; Dhp-a i.135; Dhp-a ii.260; cūḷ); -pitā an uncle (“lesser” father = sort of father, cp. Lat matertera, patruus, Ger. Vetter = father jun.) Ja ii.5 Ja iii.456 (v.l. petteyya); Pv-a 107; Dhp-a i.221 (cūḷa˚).
Sk. kṣulla = kṣudra (P. khudda, see khuddaka), with c: k = cuṇṇa: kṣud
eighty-four Ja vi.226 (mahākappe as duration of Saṃsāra); Pv-a 254 (id.). Also as cūḷāsīti q.v.
= caturāsīti
(f.) = cūḷa; kaṇṇa˚; the root of the ear Ja ii.276; Vism 249, Vism 255; Dhp-a iv.13 (of an elephant). ˚baddha SN ii.182; KS ii.122. See also cūḷā.
Sk. cūlikā, cp. cūḍā
1. swelling, protuberance; root, knot, crest. As kaṇṇa-cūḷa the root of an elephant’s ear Ja vi.488. aḍḍha-cūḷa a measure (see aḍḍha). See also cūlikā.
2. (adj.) see culla.
Sk. cūḍa & cūlikā
(adj.) having a cūḷa or top-knot; pañca˚; with five top-knots Ja v.250 (of a boy).
fr. cūḷā
(f.) only in phrase sahassi cūḷanikā lokadhātu “the system of the 1,000 lesser worlds” (distinguished from the dvi-sahassī majjhimakā & the ti-sahassī mahāsahassi lokadhātu) AN i.227; Nd ii.235, Nd ii.2b.
Der. fr. culla, q.v.
(f.) = cūḷa, usually in sense of crest only, esp. denoting the lock of hair left on the crown of the head when the rest of the head is shaved (cp. Anglo-Indian chuḍā & Gujarāti choṭali) Ja i.64 Ja i.462; Ja v.153, Ja v.249 (pañcacūḷā kumārā); Dhp-a i.294; as mark of distinction of a king Ja iii.211; Ja v.187; of a servant Ja vi.135 ■ a cock’s comb Ja ii.410; Ja iii.265.
-maṇi (m.) a jewel worn in a crest or diadem, a jewelled crest Ja i.65; Ja ii.122; Ja v.441.
Vedic cūḍā. to cūḍa
for cullāsīti at Thig 51.
conditional particle “if,” constructed either with Indicative (ito ce pi yojanasate viharati even if he lived 100 y. from here DN i.117) or Conditional (tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā DN i.3), or Potential (passe ce vipulaṃ sukhaṃ Dhp 290) ■ Always enclitic (like Lat. que) & as a rule placed after the emphasized word at the beginning of the sentence: puññañ ce puriso kayirā Dhp 118; brāhmaṇo ce tvaṃ brūsi Snp 457. Usually added to pronouns or pron. adverbs ahañ ce va kho pana ceteyyaṃ DN i.185; ettha ce te mano atthi SN i.116, or combd with other particles, as noce, yañce, sace (q.v.). Freq. also in combn with other indef. interrog. or emphatic particles, as ce va kho pana if then, if now: ahañ ce va kho pana pañhaṃ puccheyyaṃ DN i.117; ahañ ce va kho pana abhivādeyyaṃ DN i.125; api (pi) ce even if: api ce vassasataṃ jīve mānavo Snp 589.
Vedic ced; ce = Lat. que in absque, ne-c, etc., Goth. h in ni-h. see also ca 3
= cicca (equal to sañcicca), ger. of cinteti, corresp. to either *cetya or *cintya [ cint ]; only in ster def. jānanto sañjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā Vin ii.91 Vin iii.73, Vin iii.112; Vin iv.290.
cet
a servant, a boy Ja iii.478. See next.
a servant, a slave, a (bad) fellow Vin iv.66; ] ii.176 = Dhp-a iv.92 (duṭṭha˚ miserable fellow); iii.281 iv.82 (bhātika-ceṭakā rascals of brothers); v.385; Mil 222.
a decoy-bird (Com. dīpaka-tittira, exciting partridge) Ja iii.357.
a kind of bird Ja vi.538. See also cela˚.
(adj.) connected with a thought or intention Ja vi.304; usually in a˚; without a thought unintentional Ja ii.375; Ja vi.178; Vb 419.
see cetanā
state of ceto in action, thinking as active thought, intention, purpose, will Defined as action (kamma: AN iii.415; cp. KV. viii.9 § 38 untraced quotation; cp. AN v.292). Often combd w. patthanā & paṇidhi (wish & aspiration), e.g. SN ii.99 SN ii.154; AN i.32, AN i.224; AN v.212; Nd ii.112 (in def. of asucimanussā people of ignoble action: asuciyā cetanāya patthanāya, paṇidhinā samannāgatā). Also classed with these in a larger group in KV., e.g. 343, 380-Combd w. vedanā saññā c. citta phassa manasikāra in def. of nāmakāya (opp. rūpakāya) SN ii.3 (without citta), Pts i.183 (do.); Ne 77, Ne 78 ■ Enumd under the four blessings of vatthu, paccaya, c., guṇātireka (-sampadā) & def. as “cetanāya somanassa-sahagatañāṇa-sampayutta-bhāvo” at Dhp-a iii.94 ■ C. is opposed to cetasika (i.e. ceto) in its determination of the 7 items of good conduct (see sīla) which refers to actions of the body (or are wilful, called cetanākamma Ne 43, Ne 96; otherwise distinguished as kāya-& vacīkammantā A; v.292 sq.), whereas the 3 last items (sīla 8–10) refer to the behaviour of the mind (cetasikakamma Nett., mano-kammanta A), viz. the shrinking back from covetousness, malice, & wrong views.; Vin iii.112; SN iii.60; AN ii.232 (kaṇhassa kammassa pahānāya cetanā: intention to give up wrong-doing) Vv-a 72 (vadhaka-cetanā wilful murder); maraṇacetanā intention of death Dhp-a i.20; āhār’ āsā cetanā intention consisting in deśire for food Vism 537. Pv-a 8, Pv-a 30 (pariccāga˚ intention to give); Pp 12; Mil 94; Sdhp 52, Sdhp 72 ■ In scholastic lgg. often expld as cetanā sañcetanā sañcetayitatta (viz. state or behaviour of volition) Dhs 5; Vb 285 ■ Cp. Dhs 58 (+ citta); Vb 401 (id.); Vb 40, Vb 403; Vism 463 (cetayatī ti cetanā; abhisandahatī ti attho).
f. abstr. fr. cet, see cinteti
intended AN v.187; Mil 62.
pp. of ceteti, see cinteti
Name of a tree, perhaps the yellow Myrobalan Ja v.420.
(adj.) only in-˚: sucetasa of a good mind, good-hearted SN i.4 = SN i.29, SN i.46 = SN i.52; paraphrased by Buddhaghosa as sundaracetasa; pāpa˚ of a wicked mind, evil-minded SN i.70 = SN i.98; a˚ without mind SN i.198; sabba˚; all-hearted, with all one’s mind or heart, in phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā sabbacetaso samannāharitva ohitasoto (of one paying careful & proper attention) SN i.112 sq. = 189, 220; AN ii.116; AN iii.163, AN iii.402; AN iv.167. The editors have often misunderstood the phrase & we freq. find vv.ll. with sabbaṃ cetaso & sabbaṃ cetasā-appamāṇa˚ SN iv.186; avyāpanna˚ SN v.74.
orig. the geName of ceto used as nominative
(adj.) belonging to ceto, mental (opp. kāyika physical). Kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ → cetasikaṃ s. AN i.81; SN v.209; kāyikā darathā → c. d. MN iii.287, MN iii.288; c. duk khaṃ DN ii.306; AN i.157; c. roga Ja iii.337. c. kamma is sīla 8–10 (see under cetanā) Ne 43 ■ As n combd with citta it is to be taken as supplementing it, viz. mind & all that belongs to it, mind and mental properties, adjuncts, co-efficients (cp. vitakka-vicāra sach cpds. as phalâphala, bhavâbhava) DN i.213; see also citta. Occurring in the Nikāyas in sg. only, it came to be used in pl. and, as an ultimate category, the 52 cetasikas, with citta as bare consciousness, practically superseded in mental analysis, the 5 khandha-category See Cpd. p. 1 and pt. II. Mrs. Rh. D., Bud. Psy. 6 148, 175. -˚cetasikā dhammā Pts i.84; Vb 421; Dhs 3 Dhs 18, etc. (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 6, 148).
gen. sg. of ceto, functioning as gen. to citta (see citta & ceto).;
(nt.) barter Vin iii.216, see also Vin. Texts i.22 & Kacc. 322.;
see cetāpeti; cp. BSk. cetanika
to get in exchange, to barter, buy Vin iii.216 (expld by parivatteti), 237; iv.250.
Caus. of *cetati to ci, collect; see also Kern, Toev. s. v.
(nt.) 1. a tumulus, sepulchral monument, cairn, MN i.20; Dhp 188; Ja i.237; Ja vi.173; Snp-a 194 (dhātu-gharaṃ katvā cetiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpesuṃ); Kp-a 221; Dhp-a iii.29 (dhātu˚) iv. 64; Vv-a 142; Sdhp 428, Sdhp 430. Pre-Buddhistic cetiyas mentioned by name are Aggāḷava˚ Vin ii.172; SN i.185; Snp p.59; Dhp-a iii.170; Ānanda˚ DN ii.123, DN ii.126; Udena˚ DN ii.102, DN ii.118; DN iii.9; Dhp-a iii.246; Gotama (ka) ibid.; Cāpāla˚ DN ii.102, DN ii.118; SN v.250; Ma-kuṭabandhana˚ DN ii.160; Bahuputta˚ DN ii.102, DN ii.118; DN iii.10; SN ii.220; AN iv.16; Sattambaka˚ DN ii.102, DN ii.118; Sārandada DN ii.118, DN ii.175; AN iii.167; Supatiṭṭha˚ Vin i.35.
-aṅgaṇa the open space round a Cetiya Mil 366 Vism 144, Vism 188, Vism 392; DN-a i.191, DN-a i.197; Vv-a 254. -vandanā Cetiya worship Vism 299.
cp. from ci, to heap up, cp. citi, cināti
see cinteti.
(nt.) = citta, q.v. for detail concerning derivation, inflexion & meaning. Cp. also cinteti.; Only the gen. cetaso & the instr.; cetasā are in use besides these there is an adj. cetaso, der. from nom base cetas. Another adj ■ form is the inflected nom ceto, occurring only in viceto SN v.447 (+ ummatto, out of mind).
I. Ceto in its relation to similar terms: (a) with kāya & vācā: kāyena vācāya cetasā (with hand speech & heart) Snp 232; Kh IX. kāya (vācā˚, ceto˚-muni a saint in action, speech & thought AN i.273 Nd ii.514. In this phrase the Nd has mano˚ for ceto˚ which is also aN v.l. at A-passage ■ (b) with paññā (see citta iv. b) in ceto-vimutti, paññā-vimutti (see below iv.) ■ (c) with samādhi, pīti, sukha, etc.: see ˚pharaṇatā below.
II. Cetaso (gen.) (a) heart. c˚ upakkilesa (stain of h.) DN iii.49, DN iii.101; SN v.93. līnatta (attachment) SN v.64. appasāda (unfaith) SN i.179; ekodibhāva (singleness) DN iii.78; SN iv.236 (see 2nd jhāna); āvaraṇāni (hindrances) S 66 ■ vimokkha (redemption) SN i.159 santi (tranquillity) Snp 584, Snp 593. vūpasama (id. AN i.4; SN v.65. vinibandha (freedom) DN iii.238; AN iii.249; AN iv.461 sq ■ (b) mind. c˚ vikkhepa (disturbance) AN iii.448; AN v.149: uttrāsa (fear) Vb 367. abhiniropanā (application) Dhs 7 ■ (c) thought. in c˚ parivitakko udapādi “there arose a reflection in me (gen.) SN i.139; SN ii.273; SN iii.96, SN iii.103.
III. Cetasā (instr.)-(a) heart. mettā-sahagatena c (with a h. full of love) freq. in phrase ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā etc. e.g. DN i.186, DN iii.78, DN iii.223; SN iv.296; AN i.183 AN ii.129; AN iv.390; AN v.299, AN v.344; Vb 272. ujubhūtena (upright) SN ii.279; AN i.63; vivaṭena (open) DN iii.223; SN v.263; AN iv.86. macchera-maḷa-pariyuṭṭhitena (in which has arisen the dirt of selfishness) SN iv.240; AN ii.58. santim pappuyya c. SN i.212. taṇhādhipateyyena (standing under the sway of thirst) SN iii.103-vippasannena (devout) SN i.32 = SN i.57, SN i.100; Dhp 79; Pv i.1010. muttena AN iv.244. vimariyādi-katena SN iii.31 vigatâbhijjhena DN iii.49. pathavī-āpo etc ■ samena AN iv.375 sq. ākāsasamena AN iii.315 sq. sabba˚ SN ii.220 abhijjhā-sahagatena AN i.206. satārakkhena DN iii.269; AN v.30 ■ migabhūtena cetasā, with the heart of a wild creature MN i.450 ■ acetasā without feeling heartlessly Ja iv.52, Ja iv.57 ■ (b) mind: in two phrases viz. (α) c. anuvitakketi anuvicāreti “to ponder & think over in one’s mind” DN iii.242; AN i.264; AN iii.178; (β) c. pajānāti (or manasikaroti) “to know in one’s mind,” in the foll. expressions: para-sattānaṃ para-puggalānaṃ cetasā ceto-paricca pajānāti “he knows in his mind the ways of thought (the state of heart) of other beings” (see ceto-paricca & ˚pariyāya) MN ii.19; SN ii.121, SN ii.213; SN v.265; AN i.255 = AN iii.17 = AN iii.280. puggalaṃ paduṭṭha-cittaṃ evaṃ c˚ ceto-paricca p. Iti 12, cp. 13 Arahanto… Bhagavanto c˚ cetoparicca viditā DN iii.100. para-cittapariyāya kusalo evaṃ c˚ ceto paricca manasikaroti AN v.160. Bhagavā [brāhmaṇassa c˚ ceto-parivitakkaṃ aññāya “perceiving in his mind the thought of [the b.]” SN i.178; DN iii.6; AN iii.374; Mil 10.
IV. Cpds. -khila fallowness, waste of heart or mind usually as pañca c-khilā, viz. arising from doubt in the Master, the Norm, the Community, or the Teaching or from anger against one’s fellow-disciples, DN iii.237 DN iii.278; MN i.101; AN iii.248 = AN iv.460 = AN v.17; Ja iii.291; Vb 377; Vism 211. -paṇidhi resolution, intention, aspiration Vv 4712 (= cittassa samma-d-eva ṭhapanaṃ Vv-a 203) Mil 129; -padosa corruption of the h., wickedness AN i.8; Iti 12, Iti 13 (opp. pasāda): -paricca “as regards the heart,” i.e. state of heart, ways of thought, character mind (= pariyāya) in ˚ñāṇa Thig 71 = Thig 227 (expld at Thag-a 76, Thag-a 197 by cetopariyañāṇa) see phrase cetasā c-p above (iii. b.); -pariyāya the ways of the heart (= paricca), in para-ceto-pariyāya-kusalo “an expert in the ways of others’ hearts” AN v.160; c ■ p-kovido encompassing the heart of others SN i.146, SN i.194 = Thag 1248; i.196 = Thag 1262. Also with syncope: ˚pariyañāṇa DN i.79; DN iii.100; Vism 431; DN-a i.223. -parivitakka reflecting, reasoning SN i.103, SN i.178; -pharaṇatā the breaking forth or the effulgence of heart, as one of five ideals to be pursued, viz. samādhi, pīti-pharaṇatā sukha˚, ceto˚, āloka˚ DN iii.278; -vasippatta mastery over one’s h. AN ii.6, AN ii.36, AN ii.185; AN iv.312; MN i.377; Vism 382; Mil 82, Mil 85; -vimutti emancipation of h. (always w paññā-vimutti), which follows out of the destruction of the intoxications of the heart (āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavā c ■ v.) Vin i.11 (akuppā); DN i.156, DN i.167, DN i.251; DN iii.78, DN iii.108 DN iii.248 (muditā); SN ii.265 (mettā); MN i.197 (akuppā), 205 296; iii.145 (appamāṇā, mahaggatā); AN i.124; AN ii.6 AN ii.36; AN iii.84; Snp 725, Snp 727 = Iti 106; Iti 20 (mettā), 75, 97 Pp 27, Pp 62; Vb 86 (mettā) Ne 81 (virāgā); DN-a i.313 (= cittavimutti); -vivaraṇa setting the h. free AN iv.352 AN v.67. See also arahant II D. -samatha calm of h Thig 118; -samādhi concentration of mind (= cittasamādhi DN-a i.104) DN i.15; iii. 30; SN iv.297; AN ii.54 AN iii.51; -samphassa contact with thought Dhs 3.
Sk. cetas
(nt.) cloth, esp. clothes worn, garment, dress AN i.206; Pv ii.127 (kañcanā˚ for kañcana˚); iii.93 (for veḷa); dhāti˚ baby’s napkin Ja iii.539. In simile of one whose clothes are on fire (āditta˚ + ādittasīsa) SN v.440; AN ii.93; AN iii.307; AN iv.320-acela a naked ascetic DN i.161, DN i.165≈; Ja v.75; Ja vi.222.
-aṇḍaka (v.l. aṇḍuka) a loincloth MN i.150; -ukkhepa waving of garments (as sign of applause), usually with sādhukāra Ja i.54; Ja ii.253; Ja iii.285; Ja v.67; Dhp-a ii.43; Snp-a ii.225; Vv-a 132, Vv-a 140; -paṭṭikā (not ˚pattika) a bandage of cloth, a turban Vin ii.128 (Bdhgh. celasandhara); MN ii.93; Dhp-a iii.136; -vitāna an awning Ja i.178; Ja ii.289; Ja iv.378; Mhbv 122; Vism 108.
Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. cela
1. one who is clothed; acelaka without clothes DN i.166; MN i.77.
2. a standard-bearer DN i.51; DN-a i.156; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; Mil 331.
cp. Sk. ceḍaka P. ceṭa & in meaning E. knight → Ger. knecht; knave → knabe, knappe
= cetakedu Ja vi.538.
= celāvaka Ja v.418.
a kind of bird Ja vi.538 (Com. celabaka; is it celā bakā?); Ja v.416. See also celāpaka.
cp. Sk. chilla?
(adj.) clean Ja iii.21; ˚bhāva cleanliness MN i.39 (= visuddhibhāva; to be read for T mokkha˚? See Trenckner’s note on p. 530).
Cp. Sk. cokṣa
(nt.) the cocoa-nut or banana, or cinnamon Ja v.420 (˚vana); -˚pāna a sweet drink of banana or cocoa-nut milk Vin i.246.
Both derivation & meaning uncertain. The word is certainly not Aryan. See the note at; Vinaya Texts ii.132
(adj.) one who rebukes; exhorting, reproving Vin i.173; Vin ii.248 sq.; Vin v.158, Vin v.159 etc.; SN i.63; MN i.95 sq.; DN iii.236; AN i.53; AN iii.196; AN iv.193 sq. DN-a i.40.
to codeti
(f.) reproof, exhortation DN i.230; DN iii.218; AN iii.352; Vin V.158, 159; Vism 276 ■ As ttg in codan’ atthe nipāto an exhortative particle Ja vi.211 (for ingha); Vv-a 237 (id.); Pv-a 88 v.l. (for handa).
see codeti
urged, exhorted, incited; questioned Snp 819; Ja vi.256; Pv ii.966; Vv 161; Pv-a 152; Sdhp 309.
pp. of codeti, q.v.
one who reproves, one who exacts blame, etc. Vin v.184.
n. ag. to codeti
aor. acodayi (Ja v.112), inf. codetuṃ, grd. codetabba; Pass. cujjati & codiyati; pp. cudita & codita (q.v.): Caus.; codāpeti (Vin. iii.165) to urge, incite, exhort; to reprove, reprimand, to call forth, to question; in spec. sense to demand payment of a debt (J vi.69 iṇaṃ codetvā 245; Snp 120 iṇaṃ cujjamāna being pressed to pay up Pv-a 3 iṇayikehi codiyamāna) DN i.230; Vin i.43 (āpattiyā c. to reprove for an offence), 114, 170 sq. 322 sq.; ii.2 sq., 80 sq.; iii.164, etc.; Ja v.112; Dhp 379; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 74.
Vedic codati & codayati, from; cud
(nt.) moving, stirring Dhp-a iv.85; Dhs-a 92, Dhs-a 240, Dhs-a 323.
cup, copati to stir, rel. to kup, see kuppati
a thief, a robber Vin i.74, Vin i.75, Vin i.88, Vin i.149; SN ii.100, SN ii.128 = AN ii.240; SN ii.188 (gāmaghāta, etc.); iv.173; MN ii.74 = Thag 786; AN i.48; AN ii.121 sq.; AN iv.92, AN iv.278; Snp 135, Snp 616, Snp 652; Ja i.264 (˚rājā, the robber king); ii.104; iii.84; Mil 20; Vism 180 (sah’ oḍḍha c.), 314 (in simile), 489 (rāja-puris ânubandha˚, in comparison), 569 (andhakāre corassa hattha-pasāraṇaṃ viya); Dhp-a ii.30; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 274- mahā˚; a great robber Vin iii.89; DN iii.203; AN i.153 AN iii.128; AN iv.339; Mil 185 ■ Often used in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87.
-āṭavi wood of robbers Vism 190; -upaddava an attack from robbers Ja i.267; -kathā talk about thieves (one of the forbidden pastimes, see kathā) DN i.7 = Vin i.188≈; -ghātaka an executioner AN ii.207; Ja iii.178 Ja iv.447; Ja v.303; Pv-a 5.
cur, corayati to steal; Dhtp 530 = theyye
a plant used for the preparation of perfume Ja vi.537.
cp. Sk. coraka
f. thieving, theft Vin i.208; Ja iii.508; Mil 158; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 86, Pv-a 192; Vv-a 72 (= theyyā).
(f.) a female thief Vin iv.276; Ja ii.363; (adj.) thievish, deceitful Ja i.295 ■ dāraka˚; a female kidnapper Ja vi.337.
at Nd ii.40 (p. 85) read terovassikaṃ (as SN iv.185).
(& coḷa) a piece of cloth, a rag SN i.34; Ja iv.380; Mil 169; Pv-a 73; Sdhp 396. -bhisi a mat spread with a piece of cloth (as a seat) Vin iv.40. duccola clad in rags, badly dressed Vin i.109; Vin iii.263.
Cp. Sk. coḍa
(& coḷaka) = cola Vin i.48, Vin i.296; Vin ii.113, Vin ii.151, Vin ii.174, Vin ii.208, Vin ii.225; Pv ii.17; Mil 53 (bark for tinder?); Dhp-a ii.173.
Ch. Cha & Chal
(cha in composition effects gemination of consonant, e.g. chabbīsati = cha + vīsati, chabbaṇṇa cha + vaṇṇa, chaḷ only before vowels in compn chaḷanga, chaḷ-abhiññā) the number six.
Cases: nom. cha, gen. channaṃ, instr. chahi (chambhī (?) Ja iv.310, which should be chambhi & prob chabbhi = ṣaḍbhiḥ; see also chambhī), loc. chasu (chassu), num. ord. chaṭṭha the sixth. Cp. also saṭṭhi (60) soḷasa (16). Six is applied whenever a “major set is concerned (see 2), as in the foll.: 6 munis are distinguished at Nd ii.514 (in pairs of 3: see muni); 6 bhikkhus as a “clique” (see chabaggiya, cp. the Vestal virgins in Rome, 6 in number); 6 are the sciences of the Veda (see chaḷanga); there are 6 buddha-dhammā (Nd ii.466) 6 viññāṇakāyā (see upadhi); 6 senses & sense-organs (see āyatana)-cha dānasālā Ja i.282; oraṃ chahi māsehi kālakiriyā bhavissati (l shall die in 6 months, i.e. not just yet, but very soon, after the “next” moon) Pv iv.335. Six bodily faults Ja i.394 (viz. too long, too short too thin, too fat, too black, too white). Six thousand Gandhabbas Ja ii.334.
-aṃsa six-cornered Dhs 617. -aṅga the set of six Vedāngas, disciplines of Vedic science, viz. 1. kappa 2. vyākaraṇā, 3. nirutti, 4. sikkhā, 5. chando (viciti) 6. jotisattha (thus enumd at Vv-a 265; at Pv-a 97 in sequence 4, 1, 3, 2, 6, 5): DN iii.269; Vv 6316; Pv ii.613 Mil 178, Mil 236. With ref. to the upekkhās, one is called the “one of six parts” (chaḷ-ang’ upekkhā) Vism 160 -abhiññā the 6 branches of higher knowledge Vin ii.161 Pp 14. See abhiññā. -āsīti eighty-six [i.e. twice that many in all directions: psychologically 6 X 80 6 X (4 X 2)10], of people: an immense number, millions Pv ii.137: of Petas Pv-a 212; of sufferings in Niraya Pv iii.106. -āhaṃ for six days Ja iii.471. -kaṇṇa heard by six ears, i.e. public (opp. catukaṇṇa) Ja vi.392 -tiṃsa(ti) thirty-six AN ii.3; Iti 15; Dhp 339; Dhp-a iii.211 Dhp-a iii.224 (˚yojana-parimaṇḍala); iv.48. -danta having six
tusks, in ˚daha Name of one of the Great Lakes of the Himavant (satta-mahā-sarā), lit. lake of the elephant with 6 tusks. cp. cha-visāṇa Vism 416. -dvārika entering through six doors (i.e. the senses) Dhp-a iv.221 (taṇhā). -dhātura (= dhātuya) consisting of six elements MN iii.239. -pañca (chappañca) six or five Mil 292. -phass’ āyatana having six seats of contact (i.e. the outer senses) MN iii.239; Thag 755; Pv-a 52 cp. Snp 169. -baṇṇa (= vaṇṇa) consisting of six colours (of raṃsi, rays) Ja v.40; Dhp-a i.249; Dhp-a ii.41; Dhp-a iv.99. -baggiya (= vaggiya) forming a group of six, a set of (sinful Bhikkhus taken as exemplification of trespassing the rules of the Vinaya (cp. Oldenberg, Buddha 7384) Their names are Assaji, Punabhasu, Paṇḍuka, Lohitaka, Mettiya, Bhummajaka Vin ii.1, Vin ii.77, and passim Ja ii.387; Dhp-a iii.330. -bassāni (= vassāni) six years Ja i.85; Dhp-a iii.195. -bidha (= vidha) sixfold Vism 184 -bisāṇa (= visāṇa) having six (i.e. a “major set”) of tusks (of pre-eminent elephants) Ja v.42 (Nāgarājā), 48 (kuñjara), cp. chaddanta ■ bīsati (= vīsati) twenty-six Dhp-a iv.233 (devalokā). Chakana & Chakana;
Vedic ṣaṣ & ṣaṭ (ṣaḍ = chaḷ) Gr.; ε ̔́ς, Lat. sex, Goth, saihs
(nt.) the dung of animals Vin i.202; Ja iii.386 (ṇ); v.286; vi.392 (ṇ).
Vedic śakṛt & śakan; Gr. κόπρος; Sk. chagana is later, see Trenckner, Notes 62 n. 16
(f.) = chakana Nd ii.199.
a he-goat Ja vi.237; ˚ka ibid. & Vin iii.166 ■ f. chakalī Ja vi.559.
cp. Sk. chagala, from chāga heifer
(nt.) [fr. cha) set of six Vism 242 (meda˚ & mutta˚).;
(adv.) six times DN ii.198; Dhp-a iii.196.
Sk. ṣaṭkṛtvas
the sixth Snp 171, Snp 437; Dhp-a iii.200: Snp-a 364. Also as chaṭṭhama Snp 101, Snp 103; Ja iii.280.
(adj.) throwing away, removing, in puppha˚ a flower-rubbish remover (see pukkusa) Thag 620; Vism 194 ■ f. chaḍḍikā see kacavara˚.
(nt.) throwing away, rejecting Ja i.290; Dhtp 571 ■ ī (f.) a shovel, dust-pan Dhp-a iii.7. See kacavara˚
thrown out. vomited; cast away, rejected, left behind SN iii.143; Ja i.91, Ja i.478; Pv ii.23 (= ucchiṭṭhaṃ vantan ti attho Pv-a 80); Vv-a 100; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 185.
pp. of chaddeti
to spit out, to vomit, throw away; abandon, leave reject Vin 214 sq.; iv.265; MN i.207; SN i.169 (chaṭṭehi wrongly for chaḍḍehi) = Snp p.15; Ja i.61, Ja i.254, Ja i.265, Ja i.292 Ja v.427; Pp 33; Dhp-a i.95 (uṇhaṃ lohitaṃ ch. to kill oneself); ii.101; iii.171; Vv-a 126; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 174 Pv-a 211; Pv-a 255; Mil 15 ■ ger. chaḍḍūna Thig 469 (= chaḍḍetvā Thag-a 284); grd. chaḍḍetabba Vin i.48; Ja ii.2 chaḍḍanīya Mil 252; chaḍḍiya (to be set aside) MN i.12 sq ■ Pass. chaḍḍīyati Pv-a 174 ■ Caus. chaḍḍāpeti to cause to be vomited, to cast off, to evacuate to cause to be deserted Vin iv.265; Ja i.137; Ja iv.139 Ja vi.185, Ja vi.534; Vism 182 ■ pp. chaḍḍita (q.v.) ■ See also kacavara˚
Vedic chardayati & chṛṇatti to vomit; cp. also avaskara excrements & karīsa dung. From; *sqer to eliminate, separate, throw out (Gr. κρίνω, Lat. ex (s)cerno), cp. Gr. σκ ̈ως, Lat. mus(s)cerda, Ags. scearn.
a festival Ja i.423, Ja i.489 (surā˚), 499; ii.48 (mangala˚), 143, iii.287, 446, 538; iv.115 (surā˚); v.212; vi.221 399 (˚bheri); Dhp-a iii.100 (surā˚), 443 (˚vesa); iv.195; Vv-a 173.
the Chaṇaka plant Mil 352; cp. akkhaṇa.
= akkhaṇa? Kern; cp. Sk. *ākhaṇa
(nt.) a sunshade (“parasol” would be misleading. The handle of a chatta is affixed at the circumference, not at the centre as it is in a parasol), a canopy Vin i.152; Vin ii.114; DN i.7≈; ii.15 (seta˚, under which Gotama is seated); Ja i.267 (seta˚); iv.16 v.383; vi.370; Snp 688, Snp 689; Mil 355; Dhp-a i.380 sq. DN-a i.89; Pv-a 47 ■ Esp. as seta˚ the royal canopy, one of the 5 insignia regis (setachatta-pamukhaṃ pañcavidhaṃ rāja-kakudhabhaṇḍaṃ Pv-a 74), see kakudhabhaṇḍa Ja vi.4, Ja vi.223, Ja vi.389; ˚ṃ ussāpeti to unfold the r canopy Pv-a 75; Dhp-a i.161, Dhp-a i.167. See also paṇṇa˚.
-daṇḍa the handle of a sunshade Dhp-a iii.212; -nāḷi the tube or shaft (of reeds or bamboo) used for the making of sunshades MN ii.116; -maṅgala the coronation festival Ja iii.407; Dhp-a iii.307; Vv-a 66.
late Vedic chattra = *chad-tra, covering to chad, see chādati
a pupil, a student Ja ii.428.
cp. Sk. chātra, one who carries his master’s sunshade
(m. nt.) 1. a sun-shade Ja vi.252; Thig 23 (= Thag-a 29 as nickname of sun-shade makers). See also paṇṇa˚.
2. ahi˚; “snake’s sun-shade,” N. for a mushroom: toadstool DN iii.87; Ja ii.95; a mushroom, toadstool Ja ii.95.
(adv.) thirty-six times Iti 15.
anything that covers, protects or hides, viz. a cover, an awning DN i.7≈ (sa-uttara˚ but ˚chadana at DN ii.194) ■ a veil in phrase vivaṭacchada “with the veil lifted” thus spelt only at Nd ii.242, Nd ii.593, Dhp-a i.106 (vivattha˚ v.l. vaṭṭa˚) & DN-a i.251 (vivatta˚), otherwise ˚chadda -shelter, clothing in phrase ghāsacchada Pp 51 (see ghāsa & cp. chāda) ■ a hedge Ja vi.60 ■ a wing Th 1 i.108 (citra˚).
cp. chādeti chad = saṃvaraṇe Dhtp 586
(nt.) = chada, viz. lit. 1. a cover, covering Ja i.376; Ja v.241.
2. a thatch, a roof Vin ii.154 (various kinds), 195; Ja ii.281; Dhp-a ii.65 (˚piṭṭha) iv.104 (˚assa udaka-patana-ṭṭhāna), 178; Pv-a 55. 3. a leaf, foliage Ja i.87; Thag 527.
4. hair Ja v.202-fig. pretence, camouflage, counterfeiting Snp 89 (= paṭirūpaṃ katvā Snp-a 164); Dhs 1059 = Vb 361 Nd ii.271ii. Dhs reads chandanaṃ & Vb chādanaṃ.;
-iṭṭhikā a tile Dhp-a iv.203.
Vedic chad
(nt.) = chada, only in phrase vivattacchadda (or vivaṭa˚) DN i.89; Snp 372, Snp 378, Snp 1003, Snp 1147; DN-a i.251 Nd ii.however & DA read ˚chada expl. by vivaṭa-rāgadosamoha-chadana Snp-a 365.;
Dhtp 590 & Dhtm 820 expl;n a root chadd by “vamane,” thus evidently taking it as an equivalent of chaḍḍ
sixfold Mil 2.
Sk. ṣaṭśaḥ
. 1. impulse, excitement; intention, resolution, will desire for, wish for, delight in (c. loc.). Expld at Vism 466 as “kattu-kāmatāy” adhivacanaṃ; by Dhtp 587 & Dhtm 821 as; chand = icchāyaṃ ■ A. As virtue: dhammapadesu ch. striving after righteousness SN i.202 tibba˚ ardent desire, zeal AN i.229; AN iv.15; kusaladhamma˚ AN iii.441. Often combd with other good qualities, e.g. ch. vāyāma ussāha ussoḷhi AN iv.320 ch. viriya citta vīmaṃsā in set of samādhis (cp. iddhipāda) DN iii.77 (see below), & in cpd. ˚âdhipateyya-kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya chandaṃ janeti vāyamati viriyaṃ ārabhati, etc., see citta; v. 1 dβ. MN ii.174; AN i.174 (ch. vā vāyāmo vā); iii.50 (chandasā instr.); Snp 1026 (+ viriya); Vv 2412 (= kusala˚ Vv-a 116); Ja vi.72; Dhp-a i.14 ■ B. As vice: (a) kinds character of ch ■ With similar expressions: (kāya-ch. sneha anvayatā MN i.500 ■ ch. dosa moha bhaya DN iii.182; Nd ii.3372 (See also below chandâgati). Its nearest analogue in this sense is rāga (lust), e.g. ch rāga dosa paṭigha DN i.25 (cp. DN-a i.116); rūpesu uppajjati ch. vā rāgo SN iv.195. See below ˚rāga. In this bad sense it is nearly the same as kāma (see kāma kāmachanda: sensual desire, cp. Dhs-a 370, Vism 466 & Mrs. Rh. D. in; Dhs trsl. 292) & the comb;n kāmachanda is only an enlarged term of kāma. Kāye chanda “delight in the body” MN i.500; Snp 203. bhave ch. (pleasure in existence) Thig 14 (cp. bhavachanda) lokasmiṃ ch. (hankering after the world) Snp 866; methunasmiṃ (sexual desire) Snp 835 (expl. by ch. vā rāgo vā peman Nd i.181) ■ Ch. in this quality is one of the roots of misery: cittass’ upakkileso SN iii.232 sq.v.92; mūlaṃ dukkhassa Ja iv.328 sq ■ Other passages illustrating ch. are e.g. vyāpāda˚ & vihiṃsā˚ SN ii.151 rūpa-dhātuyā˚ SN iii.10; SN iv.72; yaṃ aniccaṃ, etc.… tattha˚ SN iii.122, SN iii.177; SN iv.145 sq.; asmī ti ch. SN iii.130 atilīno ch. SN v.277 sq., cp. also DN ii.277 ■ (b) the emancipation from ch. as necessary for the attainment of Arahantship ■ vigata˚ (free from excitement) and a˚ SN i.111; SN iii.7, SN iii.107, SN iii.190; SN iv.387; AN ii.173 sq.; DN iii.238; ettha chandaṃ virājetvā Snp 171 = SN i.16. Kāye chandaṃ virājaye Snp 203. (a)vīta˚ AN iv.461 sq. ˚ṃ vineti SN i.22, SN i.197; ˚ṃ vinodeti SN i.186; ch. suppaṭivinīta SN ii.283. na tamhi ˚ṃ kayirātha Dhp 117. 2. (in the monastic law) consent, declaration of consent (to an official act: kamma) by an absentee Vin i.121 Vin i.122. dhammikānaṃ kammānaṃ chandaṃ datvā having given (his) consent to valid proceedings Vin iv.151, Vin iv.152 cp. ˚dāyaka ii.94 ■ Note. The commentaries follow the canonical usage of the word without adding any precision to its connotation. See Nd ii.s. v.; Dhs-a 370; Dhp-a i.14, Ja vi.72, Vv-a 77.
-āgati in ˚gamana the wrong way (of behaviour, consisting) in excitement, one of the four agatigamanāni viz. ch˚, dosa˚, moha˚, bhaya˚ DN iii.133, DN iii.228; Vb 376 (see above); -ādhipateyya (adj.) standing under the dominant influence of impulse Dhs 269, Dhs 359, Dhs 529 Vb 288 (+ viriya˚, citta˚, vīmaṃsā˚); -ānunīta led according to one’s own desire SN iv.71; Snp 781; -āraha (adj.) fit to give one’s consent Vin ii.93; Vin v.221; -ja sprung from desire (dukkha) SN i.22; -nānatta the diversity or various ways of impulse or desire SN ii.143 sq.; DN iii.289; Vb 425; -pahāna the giving up of wrong desire SN v.273; -mūlaka (adj.) having its root in excitement AN iv.339; AN v.107; -rāga exciting desire (cp kāmachanda) DN ii.58, DN ii.60; DN iii.289; SN i.198; SN ii.283 iii. 232 sq. (cakkhusmiṃ, etc.); iv.7 sq. 164 (Bhagavato ch-r. n’ atthi), 233; AN i.264 (atīte ch-r-ṭṭhānīyā dhammā); ii.71; iii.73; Nd ii.413; Dhp-a i.334; -samādhi the (right) concentration of good effort, classed under the 4 iddhipādā with viriya˚; citta˚ vīmaṃsā˚ DN iii.77; SN v.268; AN i.39; Vb 216 sq.; Ne 15; -sampadā the blessing of zeal SN v.30.
cp. Vedic and Sk. chanda, and skandh to jump
a voluntary collection (of alms for the Sangha), usually as ˚ṃ saṃharati to make a vol. coll. Vin iv.250; Ja i.422; Ja ii.45, Ja ii.85 (saṃharitvā v.l. BB; text sankaḍḍhitvā), 196, 248; iii.288 (nava˚, a new kind of donation); Cp. BSk. chandaka-bhikṣana Avs vol. ii.227.
(f.) (strong) impulse, will, desire Nd ii.394; Vb 350, Vb 370.
see chanda
(f.) = chandatā Vv-a 319.
abstr. to adj. chandavant, chanda + vant
(f.) metrics, prosody Mil 3.
see chando
(adj.) having zeal, endeavouring usually as a˚; without (right) effort, & always comb;d w. anādara & assaddha Pp 13; Vb 341; Pv-a 54 (v.l.), 175.
see chanda
(adj.) & chandīkatā (f.) (with) right effort, zealous, zeal (adj.) Thag 1029 (chandi˚) (n.) Vb 208.
(nt.) metre, metrics, prosody, esp. applied to the Vedas Vin ii.139 (chandaso buddhavacanaṃ āropeti to recite in metrical form, or acc. to Bdhgh. in the dialect of the Vedas cp. Vin. Texts iii.150) SN i.38; Snp 568 (Sāvittī chandaso mukhaṃ: the best of Vedic metres).
-viciti prosody Vv-a 265 (enumd as one of the 6 disciplines dealing with the Vedas: see chaḷanga).
Vedic chandas, from skandh, cp. in meaning Sk. pada; Gr. ιἄμβος
1. covered Ja iv.293 (vāri˚); vi.432 (padara˚, ceiling); Thag-a 257. 2. thatched (of a hut) Snp 18.
3. concealed, hidden secret Ja ii.58; Ja iv.58 ■ nt. channaṃ a secret place Vin iv.220.
pp. of chad, see chādeti1
fit, suitable, proper Vin ii.124 (+ paṭirūpa); iii.128; DN i.91 (+ paṭirūpa); SN i.9; MN i.360; Ja iii.315; Ja v.307 Ja vi.572; Pv ii.1215 (= yutta Pv-a 159).
pp. to chad (chand), chandayati, see chādeti2
name of a low-class tribe Vin iv.203 (= caṇḍāla Bdhgh. on Sekh. 69 at Vin iv.364), f. ˚ī ib.
six or five Mil 292.
cha + pañca
see under cha.
(f.) the earth; only in oblique cases, used as adv. Instr. chamā on the ground, to the ground (= ved. kṣamā) MN i.387; DN iii.6; Ja iii.232; Ja iv.285; Ja vi.89, Ja vi.528; Vv 414 (Vv-a 183; bhūmiyaṃ); Thig 17; Thig 112 (Thag-a 116: chamāyaṃ); Pv iv.53 (Pv-a 260: bhūmiyaṃ) ■ loc. chamāyaṃ Vin i.118; AN i.215; Snp 401; Vism 18; Thag-a 116; chamāya Vin ii.214.
from kṣam, cp. khamati. It remains doubtful how the Dhtm (553, 555) came to define the root cham (= kṣam) as 1. hīḷane and 2. adane
to be frightened Dhp-a iv.52 (+ vedhati).
see chambheti
. Only in der. chambhitatta (nt.) the state of being stiff, paralysis, stupefaction consternation, always combd with other expressions of fear, viz. uttāsa SN v.386; bhaya Ja i.345 (where spelled chambhittaṃ); ii.336 (where wrongly expld by sarīracalanaṃ), freq. in phrase bhaya ch. lomahaṃsa (fear stupefaction & horripilation (“gooseflesh”) Vin ii.156; SN i.104; SN i.118; SN i.219; DN i.49 (expld at DN-a i.50 wrongly by sakala-sarīra calanaṃ); Nd ii.470; Mil 23; Vb 367 Vism 187 ■ In other connections at Nd ii.1 (= Dhs 425 Dhs 1118, where thambhitatta instead of ch˚); Dhs 965 (on which see Dhs trsl. 242).
pp. of chambheti
(adj.) immovable, rigid; terrified, paralysed with fear SN i.219; MN i.19; Ja iv.310 (v.l. jambhī, here with ref. to one who is bound (stiff with ropes (pāsasatehi chambhī) which is however taken by com. as instr. of cha & expl;d by chasu ṭhānesu, viz on 4 limbs, body & neck; cp. cha) ■ acchambhin firm steady, undismayed SN i.220; Snp 42; Ja i.71 ■ See chambheti & chambhita.;
see chambheti
to be firm or rigid, fig. to be stiff with fear, paralysed: see chambhin & chambhitatta, Cp. ūrukhambha (under khambha;2).
cp. Sk. skabhnāti & stabhnāti,; skambh, and P. khambha, thambha & khambheti
bark, bast Dhp-a ii.165; Bdhgh on MV. viii.29.
Sk. challi
1. a corpse Vin ii.115 (˚sīsassa patta a bowl made out of a skull) See cpds.
2. (adj.) vile, low, miserable, wretched Vin ii.112, Vin ii.188; SN i.66; MN i.374; AN ii.57; Ja iv.263.
-aṭṭhika bones of a corpes, a skeleton C iii.15, 1 (?) -ālāta a torch from a pyre SN iii.93 = AN ii.95 = Iti 90; Ja i.482; Vism 54, Vism 299 (˚ûpama). -kuṭikā a charnelhouse morgue, Vin i.152; -dāhaka one who (officially burns the dead, an “undertaker” Vin i.152; Dhp-a i.68 (f. ˚ikā); Vism 230; Mil 331. -dussa a miserable garment DN i.166≈A i.240; ii.206. -sarīra a corpse Vism 178 sq. -sitta a water pot (see above 1) Thag 127.
Derivation doubtful. Vedic śava
1. a corpse Ja v.449.
2. wretched Mil 156, Mil 200; (˚caṇḍāla, see expln at Ja v.450).
(f.) the (outer thin) skin, tegument SN ii.256; AN iv.129; Snp 194; Ja ii.92 Distinguished from camma, the hide (under-skin corium) SN ii.238 (see camma); also in combn ch-cammamaṃsa Vism 235; Dhp-a iv.56.
-kalyāṇa beauty of complexion, one of the 5 beauties (see kalyāṇa 2d) Dhp-a i.387; -dos’-ābādha a skin disease, cutaneous irritation Vin i.206; -roga skin disease Dhp-a iii.295; -vaṇṇa the colour of the skin, the complexion, esp. beautiful compl., beauty Vin i.8; Ja iii.126; Dhp-a iv.72; Pv-a 14 (vaṇṇadhātu), 70, 71 (= vaṇṇa).
*(s)qeu to cover. Vedic chavi, skuṇāti; cp. Gr. σκϋλον; Lat. ob-scurus; Ohg. skūra (Nhg. scheuer) Ags scēo → E. sky also Goth. skōhs → E. shoe
(adj.) hungry Ja i.338; Ja ii.301; Ja v.69; Pv ii.113 (= bubhukkhita, khudāya abhibhūta Pv-a 72 ii.936 (jighacchita Pv-a 126); Pv-a 62; Vv-a 76; Mil 253; Mvu vii.24. Cp. pari˚.
-ajjhatta with hungry insides Ja i.345; Ja ii.203; Ja v.338 Ja v.359; Dhp-a i.125; Dhp-a i.367 (chātak’); iii.33, 40. -kāla time of being hungry.
cp. Sk. psāta from bhas (*bhsā), Gr. ψώξω; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sabulum & cp. bhasman probably Non-Aryan
1. adj. hungry Ja i.245, Ja i.266.
2. (nt.) hunger, famine Ja i.266; Ja ii.124, Ja ii.149, Ja ii.367; Ja vi.487; Dhp-a i.170.
fr. prec.
hunger (lit. hungriness) Dhp-a i.170.
f. abstr. fr. chāta
(nt.) covering. clothing, often combd with ghāsa˚; food & clothing (q.v.) Ja ii.79 (vattha˚) Pv i.107 (bhojana˚); ii.17 (vattha˚); Pv-a 50 (= vattha) Dhp-a iv.7 ■ As adj. Ja vi.354 (of the thatch of a house).
to chādeti
(f.) covering, concealment Pp 19, Pp 23. Cp. pari˚.
fr. chādeti
(f.) shade Ja iv.351.
chādeti1
(nt.) covering (of a house or hut), thatch, straw, hay (for eating) Ja vi.354 (= gehacchādana-tiṇa).
(a) to cover, to conceal Vin ii.211 (Pass. chādīyati); Snp 1022 (mukhaṃ jivhāya ch.); Dhp 252; Pv iii.43 ■ (b) (of sound) to penetrate, to fill Ja ii.253; Ja vi.195 ■ pp. channa1 (q.v.).
Caus. of chad, Sk. chādayati
(a) to seem good, to please, to give pleasure SN ii.110; AN iii.54; Dhp-a iii.285 (bhattaṃ me na ch.). (b) to be pleased with, to delight in, to approve of (c acc.) esp. in phrase bhattaṃ chādeti to appreciate the meal Vin ii.138; DN i.72 (= rucceyya); v.31 (chādayamāna), 33 (chādamana), 463; Thig 409; Pv i.118 (nacchādimhamhase), pp. channa2. Chapa & ka;
for chandeti, cp. Sk. chandati & chadayati; to khyā ?
the young of an animal MN i.384 (˚ka); SN ii.269 (bhinka˚); Ja i.460; Ja ii.439 (sakuṇa˚) Mil 402 ■ f. chāpī Ja vi.192 (maṇḍūka˚).
Sk. śāva
(f.) [Vedic chāyā, light & shade,; *skei (cp. (s)qait σκιά & σκοιόςskia/ & skoio/s; Goth. skeinan See note on kāla, vol. ii. p. 382] shade, shadow SN i.72, SN i.93; MN ii.235; MN iii.164; AN ii.114; Snp 1014; Dhp 2; Ja ii.302 Ja iv.304; Ja v.445; Mil 90, Mil 298; Dhp-a i.35; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 45 Pv-a 81, etc ■ Yakkhas have none; Ja v.34; Ja vi.337. chāyā is frequent in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87.
(f.) Ashes Vin i.210; Vin ii.220; DN ii.164 = Ud 93; AN i.209; AN iv.103; Ja iii.447; Ja iv.88; Ja v.144; Dhp-a i.256 Dhp-a ii.68; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 80 (chārikangāra).
Cp. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāra burning; Gr. ςηρός dry, Lat. serenus dry, clear. See also khāra bhasma.
a hole, in eka˚-yuga MN iii.169≈; tāḷa˚ key hole SN iv.290; Vism 394.
cp. chidda
(always-˚) (adj.) breaking, cutting, destroying MN i.386; SN i.191 = Thag 1234; Thag 521; Thag 1143; Snp 87 (kankha˚) 491, 1021, 1101 (taṇha˚); Vv-a 82 (id.).
1. (adj.) having rents or fissures, perforated SN iv.316; Ja i.419; (fig.) faulty defective, Vin i.290.
2. (nt.) a cutting, slit, hole aperture, SN i.43; Ja i.170 (eka˚), 172, 419, 503; ii.244 261; (kaṇṇa˚); Vism 171, Vism 172 (bhitti˚), 174 (tāḷa˚) Snp-a 248 (akkhi˚); Dhp-a iii.42; Vv-a 100 (bhitti˚) Pv-a 180 (kaṇṇa˚), 253 (read chidde for chinde); fig a fault, defect, flaw Dhp 229 (acchidda-vutti faultless conduct) Mil 94.
-āvachidda full of breaches and holes Ja iii.491 Vism 252; Dhp-a i.122, Dhp-a i.284 (cp. ˚vichidda); iii.151 -kārin inconsistent AN ii.187; -vichidda = ˚âvachidda Ja i.419; Ja v.163 (sarīraṃ chiddavichiddaṃ karoti to perforate a body).
cp. Ohg. scetar. For suffix ˚ra, cp. rudhira, etc. Vedic chid + ra. Cp. Sk. chidra
(adj.) having holes or meshes (of a net) DN i.45.
(f.) perforation, being perforated Ja i.419.
(adj.) having faults, full of defects MN i.272.
to cut off, to destroy, to remove, both lit. (bandhanaṃ, pāsaṃ, pasibbakaṃ, jīvaṃ, gīvaṃ, sīsaṃ hatthapāde, etc.) and fig. (taṇhaṃ, mohaṃ, āsavā saṃyojanāni, vicikicchaṃ, vanathaṃ, etc.) Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 88 ■ Forms: (1) chid: aor acchidā Snp 357, as acchidaṃ MN ii.35, acchidda Dhp 351 (cp. agamā); Pass. pres. chijjati (Sk. chidyate) Dhp 284; Iti 70; Ja i.167; Thag 1055 = Mil 395; Mil 40; aor chijji Ja iii.181 (dvidhā ch. broke in two) ■ fut. chijjissati Ja i.336 ■ ger. chijjitvā Ja i.202; Ja iv.120 ■ pp chijjita Ja iii.389; see also chida, chidda, chinna. (2) chind: Act. pres. chindati SN i.149 = AN v.174; Snp 657; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 114; Vv-a 123 ■ imper. chinda Snp 346; Ja ii.153; chindatha Dhp 283 ■ pot. chinde Dhp 370 ■ ppr. chindamāna Ja i.70, Ja i.233 ■ fut. chindissati Dhp-a ii.258 ■ aor. acchindi Vin i.88 & chindi Ja i.140 ■ ger. chinditvā Ja i.222, Ja i.254, Ja i.326; Ja ii.155. inf. chindituṃ Vin i.206; Pv-a 253 ■ grd. chindiya Ja ii.139 (duc˚) ■ Caus. chindāpeti Ja ii.104, Ja ii.106; Vism 190 (rājāno core ch.) ■ (3) ched: fut. checchati (Sk chetsyati) MN i.434; Dhp 350; Mil 391 ■ aor. acchecchi (Sk. acchaitsīt) SN i.12; AN ii.249; Snp 355 = Thag 1275; Ja vi.261. acchejji (v.l. of acchecchi) is read at SN iv.205, SN iv.207, SN iv.399; SN v.441; AN iii.246, AN iii.444; Iti 47 ■ inf chetuṃ Ja iv.208; Pv iv.328, & chettuṃ Snp 28 ■ ger; chetvā Snp 66, Snp 545, Snp 622; Dhp 283, Dhp 369; Ja i.255; Nd ii.245 & chetvāna Snp 44; Dhp 346; Ja iii.396 ■ grd. chetabba Vin ii.110, & chejja (often combd w. bhejja, torture & maiming, as punishments) Vin iii.47 (+ bh˚); Ja v.444 (id.) vi.536; Mil 83, Mil 359. Also chejja in neg acchejja S vi.226 ■ Caus. chedeti Vin i.50, & chedāpeti ib.; Ja iv.154. See also cheda, chedana.
Vedic chid in 3 forms viz. 1. (Perf.) base chid; 2. Act. (pres.) base w. nasal infix. chind; 3. Med (denom). base w. guṇa ched. Cp. the analagous formations of cit under cinteti ■ Idg.* sk(h)eid, Gr. σξίζω (E. schism); Lat. scindo (E. scissors); Ohg scīzan; Ags. scītan; cp. also Goth. skaidan, Ohg. sceidan Root chid is defined at Dhtp 382, Dhtp 406 as “dvedhākaraṇa”
(adj.) breaking, see pari˚.
fr. chindati
cut off, destroyed Vin i.71 (acchinna-kesa with unshaven hair); MN i.430; DN ii.8 (˚papañca); Ja i.255; Ja ii.155; Ja iv.138; Dhp 338; Pv i.112 (v.l. for bhinna), 116; Dhp-a iv.48. Very often in punishments of decapitation (sīsa˚) or mutilation (hatthapāda˚, etc.) e.g. Vin i.91; Vin iii.28; Pv ii.24 (ghāna-sīsa˚); Mil 5. Cp. sañ˚. As first part of cpd. chinna˚ very frequently is to be rendered by “without, e.g.
-āsa without hope Ja ii.230; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 174; -iriyāpatha unable to walk, i.e. a cripple Vin i.91; -kaṇṇa without ears Pv-a 151; -gantha untrammelled, unfettered Snp 219; -pilotika with torn rags, or without rags SN ii.28; Pv-a 171 (+ bhinna˚); -bhatta without food i.e. famished starved Ja i.84; Ja v.382; Dhp-a iii.106 = Vv-a 76 -saṃsaya without doubt Snp 1112; Iti 96, Iti 97, Iti 123; Nd ii.244. -sāṭaka a torn garment Vism 51.
pp. of chindati
(adj.) cut; a˚; uncut (of cloth) Vin i.297.
fr. chinna
(f.) deceitful, fraudulent, sly, only in combn w. dhuttā (dhuttikā) & only appl;d to women Vin iii.128 Vin iv.61; Ja ii.114; Mil 122.
thrown away, removed, rejected, contemptible Dhp 41 = Thig 468 (spelled chuṭṭha); Ja v.302.
Sk. kṣubdha (?) kṣubh, perhaps better ṣṭīv, pp. ṣṭyūta (see niṭṭhubhati), cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 66, 120 & Trenckner; Notes p. 75. See also khipita
to touch Vin i.191; Vin iii.37, Vin iii.121; Ja iv.82; Ja vi.166; Vism 249; Dhp-a i.166 (mā chupi) ■ pp. chupita.
Dhtp 480 = samphasse
(nt.) touching Vin iii.121; Ja vi.387.
touched Vin iii.37; Ja vi.218.
pp. of chupati
given as root chubh (for kṣubh ) with def. “nicchubhe” at Dhtm 550. See khobha.
(f.) a knife, a dagger, kreese Thig 302; Ja iii.370; Mil 339; cp. Mil trsln. ii.227; Thag-a 227; Dhp-a iii.19.
Sk. kṣurikā to kṣura see khura, cp. chārikā → khara
: see vi˚.
(adj.) 1. clever, skilful, shrewd; skilled in (c. loc.) Vin ii.96; MN i.509; Ja i.290 (anga-vijjāya); ii.161, 403 v.216, 366 (˚pāpaka good & bad); vi.294 (id.); Mil 293.; DN-a i.90; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 215; Dhp-a i.178.
2. genuine Vism 437 (opp. kūṭa).
(f.) skill Vv-a 131.
cheka + tā
1. see chindati.
2. one of the 7 notes in the gamut Vv-a 139.
an animal living in mountain cliffs, a sort of leopard SN i.198.
cutter, destroyer Snp 343; Ja vi.226.
Sk. chettṛ, n-agent to chindati
cutting, destruction, loss Snp 367 (˚bandhana); Ja i.419; Ja i.485; sīsa˚; decapitation Dhp-a ii.204; Pv-a 5; aṇḍa˚; castration Ja iv.364;- bhatta ˚ṃ karoti to put on short rations Ja i.156. pada˚; separation of words Snp-a 150. -˚gāmin (adj.) liable to break fragile AN ii.81; Ja v.453 ■ Cp. vi˚.
see chindati
(adj.) cutting; in aṇḍa˚; one who castrates Ja iv.366.
fr. cheda
(nt.) cutting, severing, destroying DN i.5; (= DN-a i.80 hattha˚-ādi); iii.176; Vin ii.133; AN ii.209; AN v.206; SN iv.169 (nakha˚); v.473; Mil 86 Vism 102 (˚vadha-bandana, etc.).
see chindati
1. (adj.) one who tears or cuts off Pv-a 7. - 2. (nt.) the process of getting cut (a cert. penance for offences: in combn with āpattiyo & pācittiyaṃ) Vin ii.307; Vin iv.168, Vin iv.170, Vin iv.171, Vin iv.279; Vin v.133, Vin v.146 (cha ch. āpattiyo).
(f.) tail Vin i.191; Vin iii.21.
J.
Sk. sépa
(-˚) born, produced, sprung or arisen from. Freq. in cpds.: atta˚, ito˚, eka˚, kuto˚, khandha˚, jala˚ daratha˚, dāru˚, di˚, puthuj˚, pubba˚, yoni˚, vāri˚ saha˚, sineha˚.
adj ■ suffix from jan, see janati; cp. ˚ga; gacchati
(nt.) the world, the earth AN ii.15, AN ii.17 (jagato gati); SN i.186 (jagatogadha plunged into the world).
Vedic jagat, intens. of gam, see gacchati
(f.) only in cpds. as jagati˚:
-ppadesa a spot in the world Dhp 127 = Pv-a 104 -ruha earth grown, i.e. a tree Ja i.216.
see jagat
(nt.) wakefulness SN i.111.
jaggati + ya
(= jāgarati, Dhtp 22 gives jagg as root in meaning “niddā-khaya.”] (a) to watch, to lie awake Ja v.269. (b) to watch over, i.e. to tend, to nourish, rear, bring up Ja i.148 (dārakaṃ), 245 (āsīvisaṃ).
(nt.) watching, tending, bringing up Ja i.148 (dāraka˚).
from jaggati
(to jāgarati] watchfulness Ja i.10.
to laugh, to deride Ja iii.223; Ja v.436; Ja vi.522. pp. jagghita Ja vi.522. See also anu˚, pa˚.
Intens. to sound-root ghar. for *jaghrati. See note on gala. Kern compares Ved. jakṣati, Intens of hasati (Toev. under anujagghati); Dhtp 31 jaggh hasane
(f.) laughter Ja iii.226.
(nt.) the loins, the buttocks Vin ii.266; Ja v.203.
Vedic jaghana, cp. Gr. κοξώνη; see janghā
(nt.) a rough, sandy & waterless place, jungle A; v.21; Ja iv.71; Vv-a 338. Cp. ujjangala.
(f.) the leg, usually the lower leg (from knee to ankle) DN ii.17≈(SN i.16 = Snp 165 (eṇi˚); Snp 610; Ja ii.240; Ja v.42; Ja vi.34; Thag-a 212). In cpds. jangha (except in janghā-vihāra).
-ummagga a tunnel fit for walking Ja vi.428; -pesanika adj. going messages on foot Vin iii.185; Ja ii.82; Mil 370 (˚iya); Vism 17. -bala(ṃ) (nissāya) by means of his leg (lit. by the strength of, cp. Fr. à force de) -magga a footpath Ja ii.251; Ja v.203; Vv-a 194. -vihāra the state of walking about (like a wanderer), usually
in phrase ˚ṃ anucaṅkamati anuvicarati DN i.235; MN i.108 Snp p.105, p. 115; or ˚ṃ carati Pv-a 73 ■ AN i.136; Ja ii.272; Ja iv.7, Ja iv.74; Dhp-a iii.141.
Vedic janghā; cp. Av. zanga, ankle; Goth. gaggan, to go; Ags. gang, walk. From *gheṅgh to walk see also jaghana
(nt.) lit. “belonging to the knees”; the kneepiece of a robe Vin i.287.
see janghā
(adj.) of birth, by birth (usually -˚) MN ii.47 (ittara˚. of inferior birth); Snp p.80 (kiṃ˚ of what birth, i.e. of what social standing); Ja i.342 (hīna˚ of low birth): Sdhp 416 (id.) Ja v.257 (nihīna˚); Mil 189 (sama˚ of equal rank).
-andha (adj.) blind from birth Ud 62 sq. (Jaccandhavagga vi.4); Ja i.45, Ja i.76; Ja iv.192; Vb 412 sq.; in similes at Vism 544, Vism 596.
jāti + tya
instr. of jāti.
withered, feeble with age Thig 270; Ja i.5, Ja i.59 (jarā˚); Thag-a 212; Pv-a 63 (˚bhāva, state of being old)- a˚; not fading (cp. amata & ajarāmara), of Nibbāna SN iv.369.
From intensive of jarati
weakened Dhp-a i.7.
pp. of intens. of jar see jarati
(adj.) of (good) birth, excellent, noble, charming, beautiful MN i.30 (jaññajañña, cp. p. 528); Ja ii.417 (= manāpa sādhu). a˚; Ja ii.436.
= janya, cp. jātya; see kula & koleyyaka
a handle, only in vāsi˚; (h. of an adze) Vin iv.168; SN iii.154 = AN iv.127.
(f.) tangle, braid, plaiting, esp. (a) the matted hair as worn by ascetics (see jatila) Snp 249; Dhp 241, Dhp 393; Ja i.12 (ajina + ); ii.272 ■ (b) the tangled branches of trees Ja i.64 ■ (c) (fig.) (the tangle of desire, lust SN i.13 = SN i.165.
-aṇḍuva (= ˚andu?) a chain of braided hair, a matted topknot SN i.117; -ājina braided hair & an antelope’s hide (worn by ascetics) Snp 1010 (˚dhara), cp. above Ja i.12; -dharaṇa the wearing of matted hair MN i.282.
B.Sk. jatā
entangled SN i.13; Mil 102, Mil 390; Vism 1 (etym.).
pp. of jaṭ; to which also jaṭā; Dhtp 95: sanghāte
one who wears a jaṭā, an ascetic Snp 689; f. -inī Ja vi.555.
one who wears a jaṭā, i.e. a braid of hair, or who has his hair matted, an ascetic. Enumd amongst other ʻreligiousʼ as ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā j paribbājakā Nd ii.308; ājīvikā nig˚ j. tāpasā Nd ii.149 Nd ii.513 ■ Vin i.24 = Vin iv.108; Vin i.38 (purāṇa˚ who had previously been j.) = Vv-a 13 = Pv-a 22; SN i.78; Snp p.103 Snp p.104 (Keṇiya j.); Ja i.15; Ja ii.382; Ud 6; Dpvs i.38.
BSk. jaṭila
= jaṭila MN i.282; AN iii.276; Mil 202; Vism 382.
(m. nt.) [Vedic jaṭhara, to *gelt = *gelbh (see gabbha), cp. Goth. kilpei uterus, Ags. cild = E. child the belly Mil 175. Jannu(ka)
the knee DN ii.160; Ja vi.332; Snp-a ii.230; Dhp-a i.80 (˚ka); ii.57 (id.), 80; iv.204; Vv-a 206 (jaṇṇu-kappara).
cp. jānu & jannu
lac. As medicine Vin i.201 ˚maṭṭhaka a decking with lac. used by women to prevent conception Vin iv.261; consisting of either jatu kaṭṭha (wood), piṭṭha (flour), or mattikā (clay).
Sk. jatu; cp. Lat. bitumen pitch; Ags. cwidu. resin, Ohg. quiti glue
(nt.) the collar-bone Dhp-a ii.55 (gloss: aṃsakūṭa); Dāvs iv.49.
Vedic jatru
only in composition as a˚; not eating, abstaining from food. ˚ka one who fasts MN i.245; ˚māra death by starvation Ja vi.63 (= anāsaka-maraṇa; Fsb. has note: read ajuṭṭha˚?) ˚mārika AN iv.287 (v.l. ajeṭṭha˚).
for jaddhuṃ, inf. to jakṣ (P. jaggh), corresp. to Sk. jagdhi eating food; intens. of ghasati
a creature, living being: (a) sg. an individual, a creature person, man Snp 121, Snp 676, Snp 807, Snp 1023 (sabba everybody) Usually collectively: people, they, one (= Fr. on), with pl. of verb Dhp 249 (dadanti); often as mahājana the people, the crowd SN i.115; Ja i.167, Ja i.294; Pv-a 6; lokamahājana = loka Dhp-a iii.175; or as bahu(j)jana many people, the many AN i.68; Dhp 320; Dhp-a iii.175. See also puthujjana ■ (b) pl. men, persons, people, beings nānā˚ various living beings Snp 1102 (expld at Nd ii.248 as khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā gahaṭṭhā pabbajitā devā manussā.) dve janā Ja i.151; Ja ii.105; tayo j. Ja i.63 Ja iii.52; keci janā some people Pv-a 20. See also Snp 243, Snp 598, Snp 1077, Snp 1121.
-ādhipa a king of men Ja ii.369; -inda = prec. Ja iii.280 Ja iii.294; -esabha the leader of men, the best of all people Dhp 255; -kāya a body or group of people Ja i.28; Dhp-a i.33 (dve j.: micchā & sammā-diṭṭhikā); Dpvs i.40 -pada country see sep.; -majjhe (loc.) before (all) the people Ja i.294; Thig 394; -vāda people’s talk, gossip Snp 973.
*gené: see janati. Cp. Gr. γίνος, γόνος; Lat. genus = Fr. gens, to which also similar in meaning
1. producing, production Vism 369; adj. (-˚) producing: pasāda˚ Mvu i.4 (= ˚kāraka); a species of karma Vism 601; Cpd. 144 (A.i).
2. n. f ˚ikā genetrix, mother Ja i.16; Dhs 1059≈(where it represents another jānikā, viz. deception, as shown by syn. māyā & B.Sk. janikā Lal. V. 541; Kern, Toev. p. 41).
to janati
(f.) a collection of people (“mankind”), congregation, gathering; people, folk DN i.151 (= DN-a i.310, correct jananā), 206; Vin ii.128 = MN ii.93 (pacchimā); AN i.61 (id.); iii.251 (id.); Iti 33; Ja iv.110; Pv iii.57 (= janȧsamūha upāsakagaṇa Pv-a 200).
from janati
only in Caus. janeti [Sk. janayati] often spelled jāneti (cp. jaleti: jāleti) & Pass. (intrs.) jāyati to bring forth, produce, cause, syn. sañjaneti nibbatteti abhinibbatteti Nd;2 s. v. (cp. karoti). ussāhaṃ j. to put forth exertion Ja ii.407 (see chanda); (saṃ)vegaṃ j. to stir up emotion (aspiration) Ja iii.184; Pv-a 32; Mvu i.4 dukkhaṃ j. to cause discomfort Pv-a 63 ■ Aor. janayi Thig 162 (Māyā j. Gotamaṃ: she bore) ■ Pp. janita produced Pv-a 1 ■ See also jantu jamma, jāta, jāti ñāti, etc.
Sk. janati (trs.) & jāyate (intrs.); *gene & *gné to (be able to) produce; Gr. γίγνομαι (γένεσις) γνωτός = jāta = (g)nātus; Lat. gigno, natura, natio; Goth knōps & kunps; Cymr. geni, Ags. cennan, Ohg. kind etc.
to make a sound Ja vi.64 (= sanati saddaṃ karoti).
(adj.) producing, causing (-˚) Iti 84 (anattha˚ dosa); Ja iv.141; Dpvs i.2; Dhs-a 258 Dhtp 428 ■ f. jananī Pv-a 1 (saṃvega˚ dẹsanā); mother (cp. janettī) Ja iv.175; Pv-a 79. Note. jananā DN-a i.310 is misprint for janatā.
to janati
inhabited country, the country (opp. town or market-place), the continent politically: a province, district, county DN i.136 (opp nigama); ii.349; AN i.160, AN i.178; Snp 422, Snp 683, Snp 995, Snp 1102; Ja i.258; Ja ii.3 (opp. nagara), 139, 300; Pv-a 20, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 111 (province). See also gāma. The 16 provinces of Buddhist India are comprised in the soḷasa mahā-janapadā (Mil 350) enumd at AN i.213 = AN iv.252 sq. = Nd ii.247 (on Snp 1102) as follows: Angā, Magadhā (+ Kālingā Nd2] Kāsī, Kosalā, Vajjī, Mallā, Cetī (Cetiyā AN iv.) Vaṃsā (Vangā AN i.), Kurū, Pañcālā, Majjā (Macchā A) Sūrasenā, Assakā, Avantī, Yonā (Gandhārā A), Kambojā Cp. Rhys Davids, B. India p. 23.
-kathā talk or gossip about the province DN i.7≈ -kalyāṇī a country-beauty, i.e. the most beautiful girl in the province DN i.193 (see kalyāṇa); -cārikā tramping the country Pv-a 14; -tthāvariya stableness, security of the realm, in ˚patta, one who has attained a secure state of his realm, of a Cakkavattin DN i.88; DN ii.16; Snp p.106; -padesa a rural district AN iv.366; AN v.101.
jana + pada, the latter in function of collective noun-abstract: see pada 3
(nt.) birthplace Ja ii.80.
jan + tra, cp. Gr. γενέτειρα
(f.) [f. to janitṛ = γενέτως = genitor, cp. genetrix. The Sk. form is janitrī. On e: i cp. petti˚: pitri˚ mother DN ii.7 sq.; MN iii.248; AN iv.276; Ja i.48; Ja ii.381 Ja iv.48.
1. a (hot room for bathing purposes, a sitzbath Vin i.47, Vin i.139 Vin ii.119, Vin ii.220 sq., 280; iii.55; MN iii.126; Ja ii.25, Ja ii.144 Vism 18; Dpvs viii.45.
2. living room Ja i.449.
acc. to Abhp. 214 = aggisālā, a room in which a fire is kept (viz. for the purpose of a steam bath, i.e. a hot room, cp. in meaning Mhg. kemenate = Lat. caminata Ger. stube = E. stove; Low Ger. pesel (room) Lat. pensile (bath) etc.) Etym. uncertain. Bühler KZ 25, p. 325 = yantra-gṛha (oil-mill?); E. Hardy (D. Lit. Ztg. 1902, p. 339) = jentāka (hot dry bath), cp Vin. Texts i.157; iii.103. In all probability it is a distorted form (by dissimilation or analogy), perhaps of *jhānt-āgāra, to jhā to burn = Sk. kṣā, jhānti heat or heating (= Sk. kṣāti) + āgāra, which latter received the aspiration of the first part (= āghāra), both being reduced in length of vowels = jant-āghara
at DN-a i.296 in jantiyā (for DN i.135 jāniyā) = hāni, abandonment, giving up, payment, fine. But see jāni.
prob. = jahanti to jahāti
a creature, living being, man, person SN i.48; AN iv.227; Snp 586, Snp 773 sq., 808 1103; Nd ii.249 (= satta, nara, puggala); Dhp 105, Dhp 176 Dhp 341, Dhp 395; Ja i.202; Ja ii.415; Ja v.495; Pv ii.949 (= sattanikāya, people, a crowd Pv-a 134).
Vedic jantu, see janati
a grass Vin i.196.
the knee Dhp-a i.394. -˚ka DN ii.17≈(in marks of a Mahāpurisa, v.l. ṇṇ); Ja iv.165; Dhp-a i.48.
cp. jaṇṇu(ka) & jānu
(& jappa vv.ll.) 1. muttering, mumbling.; recitation AN iii.56 = Ja iii.205 (+ manta); Snp 328 (jappa (= niratthaka-kathā Snp-a 334).
2. studying Ja iii.114 (= ajjhena).
fr. japati
(adj.) whispering, see kaṇṇa.˚
(& jappati Dhtp 189, also japp 190 = vacane; sound-root jap ) to mumble, whisper, utter, recite Ja iv.204; Pv ii.61 (= vippalapati Pv-a 94); Pv-a 97 ppr. jappaṃ SN i.166 (palāpaṃ); Ja iv.75. See japa japana; also pari˚.
(sic. DN-a i.97, otherwise jappana ) whispering, mumbling (see japati), in kaṇṇa˚. See also pari˚.
to hunger for, to desire, yearn long for, (c. acc.) Snp 771 (kāme), 839 (bhavaṃ), 899, 902 Nd ii.79 (= pajappati),-pp. jappita Snp 902. See also jappā, jappanā, etc., also abhijjappati & pa˚.;
not, as customary, to jalp, Sk. jalpati (= japati), but in the meaning of desire, etc., for cappati to capp as in cappeti = Sk, carvayati to chew, suck, be hungry (q.v.) cp. also calaka
= jappā Snp 945; Dhs 1059≈. Cp. pa˚.
(f.) desire, lust, greed, attachment, hunger (cp. Nd ii.on taṇhā) SN i.123 (bhava-lobha˚) Snp 1033; Nd ii.250; Ne 12; Dhs 279, Dhs 1059.
to jappati
mud; adj. jambālin muddy, as n. jambālī (f.) a dirty pool (at entrance to village) AN ii.166.
Sk. jambāla
(f.) the rose-apple tree, Eugenia Jambolana Ja ii.160; Ja v.6; Vv 67; 4413, 164 ■ As adj f. jambī sarcastically “rose-apple-maid,” appld to a gardener’s daughter Ja iii.22.
-dīpa the country of the rose-apples i.e. India Ja i.263; Vv-a 18; Mil 27, etc. -nada see jambonada -pakka the fruit of Eugenia jambolana, the rose-apple (of black or dark colour) Vism 409; -pesī the rind of the r ■ a. fruit Ja v.465; -rukka the r ■ a. tree Dhp-a iii.211 -saṇḍa rose-apple grove (= ˚dīpa, N. for India) Snp 552 Thag 822.
Sk. jambu
a jackal Ja ii.107; Ja iii.223.
Sk. jambuka, to jambh ?
a special sort of gold (in its unwelded state); also spelled jambunada (J iv.105; Vv-a 13, Vv-a 340) AN i.181; AN ii.8, AN ii.29; Vv 8417. Cp. jātarūpa.
Sk. jāmbūnada; belonging to or coming from the Jambu river (?)
to yawn, to arouse oneself, to rise, go forth (of a lion Ja vi.40.
cp. Vedic jehate, Dhtp 208 & Dhtm 298 define; jambh as “gatta-vināma,” i.e. bending the body
(f.) arousing, activity, alertness Vb 352.
to jambhati
(adj.) miserable, wretched, contemptible Ja ii.110; Ja iii.99 (= lāmaka) f. -ī SN v.217; Dhp 335, Dhp 336 (of taṇhā); Ja ii.428; Ja v.421; Dhp-a iv.44 (= lāmakā).
Vedic *jālma (?), dialectical?
(nt.) birth, descent, rank Snp 1018.
to janati
vanquishing, overcoming, victory DN i.10; Snp 681; Ja ii.406; opp. parājaya Vism 401.
-ggaha the lucky die Ja iv.322 (= kaṭaggaha, q.v.) -parājaya victory & defeat Dhp 201; -pāna the drink of victory, carousing, wassail; ˚ṃ pivati Dhp-a i.193 -sumana “victory’s joy,” Name of a plant (cp. jātisumana Vism 174; Dhp-a i.17, Dhp-a i.383.
see jayati
(jeti, jināti) to conquer surpass; to pillage, rob, to overpower, to defeat-Pres. [jayati] jeti Ja ii.3; jināti Snp 439; Dhp 354; Ja i.289; Ja iv.71 ■ Pot. jeyya Com. on Dhp 103; jine Dhp 103 = Ja ii.4 = Vv-a 69; Vv-a 3rd pl. jineyyuṃ SN i.221 (opp parājeyyuṃ) ■ Ppr. jayaṃ Dhp 201 ■ Fut. jessati Vv 332; jayissati ib.; jinissati Ja ii.183 ■ Aor. jini Ja i.313; Ja ii.404; ajini Dhp 3; pl. jiniṃsu SN i.221 (opp parājiṃsu), 224 (opp. parājiṃsu, with v.l. ˚jiniṃsu); AN iv.432 (opp. ˚jiyiṃsu, with v.l. ˚jiniṃsu). Also aor. ajesi Dhp-a i.44 (= ajini) ■ Proh. (mā) jīyi Ja iv.107 ■ Ger jetvā Snp 439; jetvāna Iti 76 ■ Inf. jinituṃ Ja vi.193; Vv-a 69 ■ Grd. jeyya Snp 288 (a˚); jinitabba Vv-a 69 (v.l. jetabba) ■ Pass. jīyati (see parā˚), jīyati is also Pass. to jarati-Caus. 1. jayāpeti to wish victory to to hail (as a respectful greeting to a king) Ja ii.213, Ja ii.369 Ja ii.375; Ja iv.403.
2. jāpayati to cause to rob, to incite to plunder MN i.231; Iti 22 = Ja iv.71 (v.l. hāpayati) Mil 402; Ja vi.108 (to annul); Mil 227 ■ Des jigiṃsati (q.v.) ■ pp. jina & jita; (q.v.).
Sk. jayati, ji to have power, to conquer, cp. jaya = βία; trans. of which the intrans. is jināti to lose power, to become old (see jīrati)
f. wife only in cpd. jayampatikā, the lady of the house and her husband, the two heads of the household. That the wife should be put first might seem suggestive of the matriarchate, but the expression means just simply “the pair of them,” and the context has never anything to do with the matriarchate. husband & wife, a married couple SN ii.98; Ja i.347; Ja iv.70 of birds. See also jāyampatikā.
Vedic jāyā
(adj.) (˚-) old, decayed (in disparaging sense), wretched, miserable; -ūdapānaṃ a spoilt well Ja iv.387; -gava = ˚goṇa Pv i.81; -goṇa [cp. Sk. jaradgava] a decrepit, old bull Ja ii.135; -sakka “the old S. Ja iv.389; -sālā a tumble-down shed Pv-a 78.
See jarati
(f.) old age Dhs 644≈ (rūpassa j. decay of form); Vism 449.
see jarati
to suffer destruction or decay, to become old in two roots, viz. 1. jar [jarati] in Caus. jarayati to destroy, to bring to ruin Ja v.501 = Ja vi.375.
2. jīr [Sk. jīryati] see jīyati, jīrati, jīrayati, jīrāpeti ■ Pp jiṇṇa ■ Cp. also jara, jarā, jajjara, jīraṇatā.
Vedic jarati & jīryati,; *gerā to crush, to pound, overcome (cp. jayati); as intrs. to become brittle, to be consumed, to decay, cp. Lat. granum, Goth kaúrn, E etc. corn
(f.) & (older); jaras (nt.) decay, decrepitude, old age Vin i.10, Vin i.34; AN i.51, AN i.138 (as Death’s messenger); v.144 sq. (bhabbo jaraṃ pahātuṃ); Snp 311 (cp. DN iii.75); Ja i.59; Thig 252 sq.; Vism 502 (def as twofold & discussed in its valuation as dukkha) Defined as “yā tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaṃ pāliccaṃ valittacatā āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripāko” DN ii.305 = MN i.49; SN ii.2 = Nd ii.252 = Dhs 644, cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 195 ■ Frequently combd with maraṇa (maccu, etc.) “decay death” (see under jāti as to formulas): ˚maraṇa DN ii.31 sq.; MN i.49; Snp 575; ˚maccu Snp 581, Snp 1092, Snp 1094 ajarāmara not subject to decay & death (cp. ajajjara Th II, 512; Pv ii.611; Vv 6311; Ja iii.515.
-ghara the house of age (adj.) like a decayed house Thig 270 (= jiṇṇagharasadisa Thag-a 213). -jajjara feeble with age Ja i.59; -jiṇṇa decrepit with age Pv-a 148; -dhamma subject to growing old AN i.138, AN i.145 AN ii.172, AN ii.247; AN iii.54 sq., 71 sq.; -patta old Ja iii.394 Ja iv.403; -bhaya fear of old age AN i.179; AN ii.121; -vata the wind of age Dhp-a iv.25. -sutta the Suttanta on old age, Name of Sutta Nipāta iv.6 (p. 157 sq.; beginning with “appaṃ vata jīvitaṃ idaṃ”), quoted at Dhp-a iii.320.
of the latter only the instr. jarasā in use: Snp 804, Snp 1123 (= jarāya Nd ii.249) ■ Sk jarā & jaraḥ to; *gerā: see jarati; cp. Gr. γ ̈ηρας, γέρας, γραϋς old age, etc. See also jīraṇa(tā)
(nt.) water Snp 845; Ja i.222; Ja iii.188; Ja iv.137.
-gocara living in the water Ja ii.158. -ja born or sprung from w. Ja iv.333; Ja v.445; Vv-a 42; -da “giving water,” rain-cloud Dāvs v.32; -dhara [cp. jalandhara rain-cloud] the sea Mil 117; -dhi = prec. Dāvs v.38.
Sk. jala, conn. with gala drop (?), prob. dialectical; cp. udaka
to burn, to shine D 3, 188; MN i.487; Ja i.62 Ja ii.380; Ja iv.69; Iti 86; Vv 462; Vv-a 107; Mil 223, Mil 343-Caus. jaleti & jāleti (cp. janeti: jāneti) to set on fire light, kindle SN i.169; Ja ii.104; Mil 47 ■ Pp. jalita Intens. daddaḷhati (q.v.). Cp. ujjāleti.
Sk. jvalati, with jvarati to be hot or feverish, to jval to burn (Dhtp 264: dittiyaṃ), cp. Ohg. kol = coal Celt. gûal
(n ■ adj.) burning Pgdp 16.
Sk. jvalana
1. the womb SN iii.240.
2. the embryo Ja iv.38.
3. the placenta Ja ii.38.
-ja born from a womb, viviparous MN i.73; DN iii.230; Ja ii.53 = Ja v.85.
Sk. jarāyu, slough & placenta, to; jar see jarati, originally that which decays (= decidua); cp. Gr. γ ̈ηρας slough. As to meanings cp. gabbha
(adj.) set on fire, burning, shining, bright, splendid Snp 396, Snp 668, Snp 686; Vv 216 (= jalanto jotanto Vv-a 107); Pv i.1014 (burning floor of Niraya) ii.112 (˚ânubhāva: shining majesty); Pv-a 41 (= āditta burning); Thag-a 292.
pp. to jalati
(f.) a leech Mil 407 (v.l. jalopikā).
Sk. *jalūkikā = jalūkā & (pop. etym.) jalankā (sprung fr. water), borrowed fr. Npers. ƶalū (?Uhlenbeck); cp. Gr. βδέλλα leech, Celt. gel; perhaps to gal in the sense of such (?)
leech DN-a i.117.
(nt.?) toddy (i.e. juice extracted from the palmyra, the date or the cocoa palm) Vin ii.294 (pātuṃ the drinking of j.), 301, 307; Mvu 4, Mvu 10.
(nt.) moisture, (wet) dirt, perspiration (mostly as seda˚ or in cpd. rajo˚, q.v. Snp 249 (= rajojalla Snp-a 291); Ja vi.578 (sweat under the armpits = jallikā Com.).
*jalya to jala or gal
athlete, acrobat Ja vi.271.
prob. = jhalla, see Kern, Toevoegselen s. v.
(f.) a drop (of perspiration), dirt in seda˚; etc. AN i.253 (kāli˚); Snp 198 = Ja i.146; Ja vi.578.
demiName of jalla
(adj.) dull, slow, stupid DN iii.265 (a˚); AN ii.252; Pp 13; Mil 251; DN-a i.290.
Sk. jaḍa
1. (n.) speed SN ii.266; SN v.227; MN i.446; AN ii.113; AN iii.248; Snp 221; Ja ii.290; Ja iv.2 Often combd with thāma, in phrase thāmajavasampanna endowed with strength & swiftness Ja i.62; Vv-a 104; Pv-a 4; Mil 4 ■ javena (instr.) speedily Ja ii.377.
2. (adj.) swift, quick Ja iii.25; Ja vi.244 (mano˚, as quick as thought); Vv 16 (= vegavanto Vv-a 78); Vv-a 6 (sīgha˚).
-cchinna without alacrity, slow, stupid (opp. sīghajava) Dhp-a i.262; -sampanna full of swiftness, nimbleness or alacrity AN i.244 sq.; AN ii.250 sq.
Sk. java, to javati
Vedic ju javate intr. to hurry, junāti trs. to incite, urge: to run, hurry, hasten SN i.33; Ja iv.213; Dāvs v.24; Dhs-a 265, pp. jūta.
(nt.) 1. alacrity, readiness; impulse, shock Pts i.80 sq.; Vism 22; Dhs-a 265 (cp. Dhs trsl. pp. 132 156); DN-a i.194. Usually in cpd. javana-pañña (adj. of alert intellection, of swift understanding, together with hāsa-pañña (hāsu˚ at MN iii.25; Ja iv.136) & puthu tikkha˚ S; v.376, 377; Nd ii.235, Nd ii.3a. Also in cpds. ˚paññā Pts ii.185 sq.; ˚paññatā AN i.45; ˚paññattaṃ SN v.413. 2. The twelfth stage in the function (kicca ) of an act of perception (or vīthicitta ): the stage of full perception or apperception. Vism ch. xiv. (e.g. p. 459) Abhdhs. pt. iii, § 6 (kiccaṃ ); Comp. pp. 29, 115, 245 In this connection javana is taken in its equally fundamental sense of “going” (not “swiftness”), and the “going” is understood as intellectual movement.
= java 2 (adj.) Vv-a 78.
(adj.) (-˚) leaving behind, giving up, see attaṃ˚, okaṃ˚, kappaṃ˚, raṇaṃ˚, sabbaṃ˚, etc (SN i.52; Iti 58; Snp 790, Snp 1101, etc.); duj˚; hard to give up Thag 495. Jahati & jahati;
to jahati
to leave, abandon, lose; give up, renounce forsake. Ster. expln at Nd ii.255 (and passim): pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhāvaṃ gameti. Lit. as well as fig.; esp. w. ref. to kāma, dosa & other evil qualities ■ Pres.; jahāti Snp 1, Snp 506 (dosaṃ), 589; Dhp 91 imper. jahassu Snp 1121 (rūpaṃ); pot. jahe Iti 34; Dhp 221; Ja iv.58, & jaheyya Snp 362; Iti 115; Ja i.153 Ja iv.58 ■ Fut. jahissāmi Ja iii.279; Ja iv.420; Ja v.465; in verse: hassāmi Ja iv.420; Ja v.465 ■ Ger. hitvā (very frequent) Snp 284, Snp 328; Dhp 29, Dhp 88, etc.; hitvāna (Snp 60) jahitvā & jahetvā (Snp 500) ■ Inf.; jahituṃ Ja i.138-Pp. jahita Snp 231; Kh 9; Mil 261 ■ Pass. hāyati SN ii.224; Snp 817; Mil 297, hāyate Ja v.488 & hīyati Ja ii.65; Snp 944 (hīyamāna), cp. hāyare Ja ii.327; pp hīna (q.v.) ■ Caus. hāpeti (q.v.). See also hāni hāyin, jaha.
Vedic root hā. Cp. *ghē(i) & ghī to be devoid (of), Gr. ξ ̈ηρος void of, ξ ̈ηρα widow, ξώρα open space (cp. Sk. vihāya = ākāsa), ξωρίζω separate; Lat her-es; Sk. jihīte to go forth = Ohg. gēn, gān, Ags gan = go; also Sk. hāni want = Goth. gaidw, cp. Gr.ξατίζω
(f.) (a woman) who has been jilted, or rejected, or repudiated Ja i.148.
See jahati
(adj.) waking, watchful, careful, vigilant SN i.3; AN ii.13 = Iti 116; MN ii.31; Iti 41; Mil 300 ■ bahu˚; wide awake, well aware, cautious Snp 972 (cp. rakkhita-mānasāno in same context v. 63) Dhp 29.
fr. jāgarti
(nt.) a means for waking or keeping awake Mil 301.
der. fr. jāgara
(f.) watchfulness, vigilance SN i.3.
cp. Sk. jāgaraṇa
to be awake, to be watchful, to be on the alert (cp. guttadvāra) Dhp 60 (dīghā jāgarato rattī), 226; Iti 41; Mil 300 ■ pp. jāgarita (q.v.).
Sk. jāgarti to be awake (redupl. perf. for jājarti) *ger & gerēi; cp. Lat. expergiscor (*exprogrīscor); Gr.ἐγείρω, perf. ἐγρήγορα (for *ἐγήγορα). Def. at Dhtp 254 by niddā-khaya
(nt.) waking, vigil Iti 41; Pp 59.
pp. of jāgarti
(f.) keeping awake, watchfulness, vigilance, esp. in the sense of being cautious of the dangers that are likely to befall one who strives after perfection. Therefore freq. in combn “indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyaṃ anuyutto” (anuyuñjati: to apply oneself to or being devoted to vigilance), e.g. SN ii.218; MN i.32, MN i.273, MN i.354 sq. 471; AN i.113 sq.; AN ii.40 ■ Also in ˚ṃ bhajati to pursue watchfulness (bhajetha keep vigil) Iti 42; Snp 926 (niddaṃ na bahulīkareyya j˚ṃ bhajeyya ātāpī) ■ SN iv.104; MN i.273, MN i.355; Mil 388.
-ānuyoga application or practice of watchfulness Nd i.484.
BSk. M Vastu jāgarikā
1. As adj.-n.un (a) born, grown, arisen, produced (= nibbatta pātubhūta Nd ii.256) Snp 576 (jātānaṃ maccānaṃ niccaṃ maraṇato bhayaṃ); jātena maccena kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahuṃ Dhp 53 = Mil 333; yakkhinī jātâsi (born a G. Ja vi.337; rukkho j. Ja i.222; latā jātā Dhp 340; gāmanissandhena jātāni sūpeyya-paṇṇāni Vism 250 ■ (n. he who or that which is born: jātassa maraṇaṃ hoti Snp 742; jātassa jarā paññāyissati Ja i.59; jātaṃ + bhūtaṃ (opp. ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ) Iti 37 ■ (b) “genuine,” i.e natural, true, good, sound (cp. kata, bhūta, taccha & opp. ajāta like akata, abhūta): see cpds.
2. As predicate, often in sense of a finite verb (cp. gata); born, grown (or was born, grew); become; occurred happened Snp 683 (Bodhisatto hitasukhatāya jāto) bhayaṃ jātaṃ (arose) Snp 207; vivādā jātā Snp 828 ekadivase j. (were born on the same day) Ja iii.391 aphāsukaṃ jātaṃ (has occurred Ja i.291 ■ So in loc abs. jāte (jātamhi) “when… has arisen, when there is…, ” e.g. atthamhi Vin i.350 = MN iii.154 = Dhp 331 vādamhi Snp 832; oghe Snp 1092; kahāpaṇesu jātesu Ja i.121.
3. ˚jāta (nt.) characteristic; pada˚ pedal character SN i.86; anga˚ the sexual organ Vin i.191; as adj. having become… (= bhūta); being like or behaving as, of the kind of…, sometimes to be rendered by an adj. or a pp. implied in the noun: cuṇṇakajātāni aṭṭhikāni (= cuṇṇayitāni) MN iii.92; jālakajāta in bud AN iv.117; chandajāta = chandika Snp 767 sujāta Snp 548 (well-born, i.e. auspicious, blessed happy); pītisomanassa˚ joyful & glad Snp p.94; Ja i.60 etc.; gandhajāta a kind of perfume (see gandha) Often untranslatable: lābhappatto jāto Ja iii.126 vināsa-ppaccayo jāto Ja i.256.
4. a Jātaka or Buddhist birth story Dhp-a i.34.
-āmaṇḍa the (wild) castor oil plant Vv-a 10; -ovaraka the inner chamber where he was born Vv-a 158; Ja i.391 (so read for jāto varake). -kamma the (soothsaying) ceremony connected w. birth, in ˚ṃ karoti to set the horoscope Pv-a 198 (= nakkhatta-yogaṃ uggaṇhāti); -divasa the day of birth, birthday Ja iii.391 Ja iv.38; -maṅgala birth festival, i.e. the feast held on the birth of a child Dhp-a ii.86; -rūpa “sterling,” pure metal, i.e. gold (in its natural state, before worked cp. jambonada). In its relation to suvaṇṇa (worked gold) it is stated to be suvaṇṇavaṇṇo (i.e. the brightcoloured metal: Vv-a 9; Dhp-a iv.32: suvaṇṇo jātarūpo); at DN-a i.78 it is expld by suvaṇṇa only & at Vin iii.238 it is said to be the colour of the Buddha j. Satthu-vaṇṇa. At AN i.253 it is represented as the material for the suvaṇṇakāra (the “white”-smith as opp. to “black”-smith) ■ Combd w. hirañña Pv ii.75; very freq. w. rajata (silver), in the prohibition of accepting gold & silver (DN i.5)≈ as well as in other connections, e.g. Vin i.245; Vin ii.294 sq.; SN i.71, SN i.95 SN iv.326 (the moral dangers of “money”: yassa jātarūpa-rajataṃ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti); v.353, 407; Dhs 617 ■ Other passages illustr the use & valuation of j. are SN ii.234 (˚paripūra); v.92 (upakkilesā); AN i.210 (id.); iii.16 (id.) ■ SN i.93, SN i.117; MN i.38; AN i.215; AN iii.38; AN iv.199, AN iv.281; AN v.290; Ja ii.296 Ja iv.102; -veda [cp. Vedic jātaveda = Agni] fire SN i.168; Snp 462 (kaṭṭhā jāyati j.) Ud 93; Ja i.214; Ja ii.326 Ja iv.471; Ja v.326; Ja vi.204, Ja vi.578; Vism 171; DN-a i.226; Dhp-a i.44 (nirindhana, without fuel); -ssara a natural pond or lake Vin i.111; Ja i.470; Ja ii.57.
pp. of janati (janeti), cp. Lat. (g)nātus, Goth. kunds; also Gr. (κασί-) γνητός, Ohg. knabo
(nt.) 1. a birth story as found in the earlier books. This is always the story of a previous birth of the Buddha as a wise man of old. In this sense it occurs as the name of one of the 9 categories or varieties of literary composition (MN i.133; AN ii.7, AN ii.103 AN ii.108; Vin iii.8; Pp 43. See navanga ).
2. the story of any previous birth of the Buddha, esp. as an animal In this sense the word is not found in the 4 Nikāyas but it occurs on the Bharhut Tope (say, end of 3rd cent. b.c., and is frequent in the Jātaka book. 3. the name of a book in the Pāli canon, containing the verses of 547 such stories. The text of this book has not yet been edited. See Rh. Davids’ Buddhist India, 189
209, and Buddh. Birth Stories, introd., for history of the Jātaka literature ■ jātakaṃ niṭṭhapeti to wind up a Jātaka tale Ja vi.363; jātakaṃ samodhāneti to apply a Jātaka to the incident Ja i.106; Dhp-a i.82. Note. The form jāta in the sense of jātaka occurs at Dhp-a i.34.
-atthavaṇṇanā the commentary on the Jātaka book, ed. by V. Fausböll, 6 vols. with Index vol. by D. Andersen, London, 1877 sq.; -bhāṇaka a repeater of the J. book Mil 341.
jāta + ka, belonging to, connected with what has happened
(m.) a son Ja i.239; Ja iv.138.
jāta + ka, belonging to what has been born
(nt.) the fact of being born or of having grown or arisen Vism 250; Dhp-a i.241.
abstr. fr. jāta
(f.) ■ Instr. jātiyā (Snp 423) & jaccā (D ii.8; Ja iii.395; Dhp 393); abl. jātiyā (SN i.88) & jātito (by descent: DN ii.8); loc. jātiyaṃ (Pv-a 10) & jātiyā (Pv-a 78).
1. birth, rebirth, possibility of rebirth “future life” as disposition to be born again, “former life” as cause of this life. Defined (cp. the corresp expln of jarā) as: yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattanaṃ tamhi tamhi satta-nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo āyataṇānaṃ paṭilābho DN ii.305 = SN ii.3 = Nd ii.257 ■ Jāti is a condition precedent of age, sickness & death, and is fraught with sorrow, pain & disappointment. It is itself the final outcome of a kamma, resting on avijjā, performed in anterior births & forms thus the concluding link in the chain of the Paṭicca-samuppāda. Under the first aspect it is enum;d in various formulae, either in full or abbreviated (see Nd ii.258), viz, (a) as (1) jāti, (2) jarā, (3) vyādhi (4) maraṇa, (5) sokaparidevadukkhadomanass’ upāyāsa in the dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ (the noble truth of what is misfortune) Vin i.10; AN i.176; AN iii.416; ˚dhamma destined to be born, etc. MN i.161 sq., 173 ■ AN v.216 Nd ii.258, Nd ii.304, Nd ii.630, etc., in var. connections (referring to some dukkha) ■ (b) as Nos. 1
4: Nd ii.254, Nd ii.494b Ja i.168, etc ■ (c) as Nos. 1, 2, 4 (the standard quotation implying the whole series 1
5): SN v.224; AN v.144 jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ Vin i.1; DN ii.31, DN ii.57, etc. ˚ika AN ii.11, AN ii.173; ˚īya MN i.280; Nd ii.40 ■ (d) to this is sometimes added (as summing up) saṃsāra: Nd ii.282f; cp. kicchaṃ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca mīyati ca cavati ca uppajjati ca DN ii.30 ■ (e) as Nos. 1 + 4 pahīna-jātimaraṇa (adj.) (= free from life & death i.e. saṃsāra) AN i.162; ˚bhayassa pāraga AN ii.15 ˚kovida Snp 484; atāri ˚ṃ asesaṃ Snp 355 (cp. 500) ˚assa pāraga Snp 32 ■ (f) = e + saṃsāra (cp. d): sattā gacchanti saṃsāraṃ jātimaraṇagāmino AN ii.12 = AN ii.52 jātimaraṇasaṃsāraṃ ye vajanti punappunaṃ… avijjāy’ eva sā gati Snp 729 ■ (g) as Nos. 1 + 2, which implies the whole series: atāri so jātijaraṃ AN i.133; Snp 1048; jātijar’ upaga Snp 725 = Iti 106; saṃyojanaṃ jātijarāya chetvā Iti 42 ■ Snp 1052, Snp 1060; Dhp 238, Dhp 348 cp. jāti ādinā nihīna Pv-a 198 ■ Other phrases applications:; Various rebirths are seen by one who has perfect insight into all happening & remembers his former existences (DN i.81; DN iii.50; AN i.164; MN ii.20) Arahantship implies the impossibility of a future rebirth: see formula khīṇā jāti (MN i.139; Snp p.16, etc. and arahant ii.A: jātiyā parimuccati SN i.88; jātiṃ bhabbo pahātuṃ AN v.144 sq ■ antimā jāti the last rebirth DN ii.15 (cp. carima); purimā j. a former existence Pv-a 1; atītajātiyaṃ in a former life (= pure Pv-a 10. On jāti as dukkha see Vism 498
501. 2. descent, race, rank, genealogy (cp. φυή, genus), often combd w. gotta. Two grades of descent are enumd at Vin iv.6 as hīnā jāti (low birth), consisting of Candāḷa, Veṇa, Nesāda, Rathakāra & Pukkusa; and ukkaṭṭhā j. (superior birth), comprising Khattiyas Brāhmaṇas ■ The var. meanings of jāti are given by Bdhgh at Vism 498, Vism 499 in the foll. classification (with examples) bhava, nikāya, sankhata-lakkhaṇa paṭisandhi, pasūti, kula, ariya-sīla ■ Kiṃ hi jāti karissati? What difference makes his parentage DN i.121; jāti-rājāno kings of birth, genuine kings Ja i.338; na naṃ jāti nivāresi brahmalok’ ûpapattiyā Snp 139; jātiṃ akkhāhi tell me the rank of his father mother Snp 421, Snp 1004; cp. 462; na jaccā vasalo hoti Snp 136; Snp 142; id. w. brāhmaṇo Snp 650; with nāma gotta in the description of a man jātiyā nāmena gottena etc. Vin iv.6; jātito nāmato gottato by descent, personal & family name DN ii.8; cp. jāti-gotta-kula Ja ii.3 See also j ■ vāda.
3. a sort of, kind of (cp. jāta 3) catujātigandha four kinds of scent Ja i.265; Ja ii.291. 4. (jāti˚) by (mere) birth or nature, natural (opp artificial); or genuine, pure, excellent (opp. adulterated inferior), cp. jāta 1 (b): in cpds., like ˚maṇi, ˚vīṇā, etc.
-kkhaya the destruction of the chance of being reborn SN v.168; AN i.167; Snp 209, Snp 517, Snp 743; Dhp 423. -khetta the realm of rebirth Pv-a 138 (= dasa cakkavāḷasahassāni); -thaddha conceited, proud of birth Snp 104 (+ dhanatthaddha, gotta˚: proud of wealth & name) -thera a Th. by rank DN iii.218; -nirodha the extermination of (the cause of) rebirth Vin i.1≈; -pabhava the origin or root of existence Snp 728; -puppha nutmeg Ja vi.367; -bhaya the fear of rebirth AN ii.121; -bhūmi natural ground, in ˚bhūmaka, ˚bhūmika, ˚bhūmiya living on nat. gr. (vassaṃ vasati) MN i.145; AN iii.366 -maṇi a genuine precious stone Ja ii.417; -maya constituting birth, being like birth Thag-a 285; -vāda reputation of birth, character of descent, parentage. The 1st of the 5 characteristics constituting a “well-bred brahmin: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena “of unblemished parentage back to the 7th generation” DN i.120, etc. (= DN-a i.281) AN i.166; AN iii.152, AN iii.223; Snp 315, Snp 596. Cp. gotta-vāda (e.g. DN i.99); -vibhaṅga a characteristic of birth, a distinction in descent Snp 600; -vīṇā a first-class lute Ja ii.249; -sampanna endowed with (pure) birth (in phrase khattiyo muddhâvasitto j.˚) AN iii.152; -sambhava the origin of birth AN i.142; AN iii.311; Ja i.168 -sambheda difference of rank Dhp-a i.166; -saṃsāra the cycle of transmigration, the saṃsāra of rebirths (see above 1 d. f.): pahīna left behind, overcome (by an Arahant) MN i.139; AN iii.84, AN iii.86; ˚ṃ khepetvā id. Thig 168; vitiṇṇo j.˚ n’ atthi tassa punabbhavo Snp 746 -sindhava a well-bred horse Ja ii.97; -ssara the remembrance of (former) births (˚ñāṇa) Ja i.167; Ja iv.29; Dhp-a ii.27; Dhp-a iv.51; cp. cutûpapāta-ñāṇa); -hiṅgulaka (& hingulikā) natural vermilion Ja v.67; Vv-a 4, Vv-a 168 Vv-a 324.
see janati & cp. Gr.; γενεά, γένεσις; Lat. gens; Goth. kind-ins
(-˚) (adj.) 1. being like, being of, having, etc. (see jāta 3): duppañña˚ & sappañña˚ MN i.225; dabba AN i.254; mukhara˚ Snp 275; viññū˚ Snp 294; māna Ja i.88.
2. descended from, being of rank, belonging to the class of: maṇḍana˚ MN ii.19; aviheṭhaka˚ Mil 219; samāna˚ (of equal rank) Dhp-a i.390; veṇa˚ (belonging to the bamboo-workers) Pv-a 175.
(adj.) of good birth, having natural or genuine qualities, noble, excellent Snp 420 (vaṇṇārohena sampanno jātimā viya khattiyo); Ja i.342 (jātimanta-kulaputtā). Of a precious stone: maṇi veḷuriyo subho j.˚ DN i.76 = MN ii.17; DN-a i.221; Mil 215. Sometimes in this spelling for jutimant Snp 1136 Nd ii.259 (expld by paṇḍita paññavā) ■ ajātima not of good birth Ja vi.356 (opp. sujātimant ibid.).
jāti + mant
(indeel.) surely, undoubtedly (ekaṃsavacanaṃ Snp-a 348) usually in negative (& interrog. sentences as na jātu, not at all, never (cp. also sādhu) mā jātu Vin ii.203; Snp 152, Snp 348 (no ce hi jātu); Ja i.293 Ja i.374; Ja iv.261; Ja v.503. Na jātucca at Ja vi.60 is apparently for na jātu ca.
Vedic jātu, particle of affirmation. Perhaps for jānātu one would know, cp. Gr. ο ̓ϊμαι, Lat. credo P. maññe. But BR. and Fausböll make it a contraction of jāyatu “it might happen.” Neither of these derivations is satisfactory
(adj.) knowing or knowable, understandable Ja iii.24 (= jānamāna). dujjāna difficult to understand DN i.170, DN i.187; MN i.487; MN ii.43. su˚ recognizable, intelligible Pv iv.135 (= suviññeyya Pv-a 230). Cp. ājāna.
to jñā, see jānāti
(nt.) knowledge, cognizance, recognition; intelligence, learning, skill Ja i.145 (attānaṃ-˚kālato paṭṭhāya from the time of self-recognition), 200 (-˚manta knowledge of a spell, a spell known by tumhākaṃ) ii.221; Snp-a 330; Dhp-a ii.73 (˚sabhāva ñatta); DN-a i.86 (akkhara˚); Vism 391 (˚atthāya in order to know), 436 (= pajānana). Cp. ājānana. ajānana not knowing (˚-) Ja v.199; Ja vi.177; not known Ja i.32 (˚sippa).
fr. jñā
(adj.) knowing Dhs-a 394.
Sk. *jñānaka, cp. jānana & Sk. jānaka (c. gen.) expert Av Ś; ii.119, 120, as n. ib. i.216
(f.) the fact of knowing, knowledge Kp-a 144.
abstr. fr. jānana
(adj.-n.) belonging to the country, living in the c.; pl. country-folk (opp. negamā townsfolk) DN i.136, DN i.142; MN ii.74; Ja ii.287, Ja ii.388; DN-a i.297 (= janapada-vāsin).
fr. janapada
to know.
I. Forms: The 2 Vedic roots jān˚ & jñā˚; are represented in P. by jān˚ & ñā˚ (ña˚) 1.; jān: pres. jānāti pot. jāneyya (Snp 781) & jaññā (A iv.366; Snp 116, Snp 775; Dhp 157, Dhp 352; Ja ii.346; Ja iv.478) 2nd sg. jāneyyāsi (MN i.487; Ja i.288), 1st pl. jāniyāma (Snp 873) & (archaic jānemu (Snp 76, Snp 599; Vv 8311) ■ imper. jānāhi (Snp 596 Snp 1026; Pv ii.912), 3rd. sg. jānātu (Iti 28) ■ ppr. jānanto & jānaṃ (DN i.192; AN i.128; Snp 722), ppr. med. jānamāna (Ja i.168) ■ fut. jānissati (J ii.342; vi.364) ■ aor ajāni (Snp 536) & jāni (Ja i.125, Ja i.269), 3rd pl. jāniṃsu (J ii.105; Vv-a 113) ■ ger. jānitvā (Ja i.293; Ja iii.276) inf. jānituṃ (Ja i.125). Caus. jānāpeti (see below iv.2)
2. ñā: fut. ñassati (DN i.165) ■ aor. aññāsi (Ja i.271 & nāsi (Snp 471), 3rd pl. aññaṃsu (Vv 22;4) ■ ger. ñatvā (freq.) ■ grd. ñeyya AN ii.135 (see below) & ñātabba (Pv-a 133) ■ inf. ñātuṃ (freq.)-pp. ñāta (q.v.). Pass. ñāyati to be called or named (Mil 25).
II. Cognate Forms: Nd ii.s. v. explains jānāti by passati dakkhati adhigacchati vindati paṭilabhati, & ñatvā (No. 267) by jānitvā tulayitvā tirayitva vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaṃ katvā (very freq.) The 1st expln is also applied to abhijānāti, & the 2nd to passitvā, viditaṃ katvā, abhiññāya & disvā. The use of the emphatic phrase jānāti passati is very frequent. Yaṃ tvaṃ na jānāsi na passasi taṃ tvaṃ icchasi kāmesi? Whom you know not neither have seen, is it she that you love and long for? DN i.193; Bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto MN i.111; similarly AN iv.153 sq. See further DN i.2, DN i.40, DN i.84, DN i.157 sq, 165 192 sq., 238 sq.; AN i.128; AN iii.338; AN v.226; Snp 908 Nd ii.35, Nd ii.413, Nd ii.517; Vism 200.
III. Meaning: (1) Intrs. to know, to have or gain knowledge, to be experienced, to be aware, to find out mayam pi kho na jānāma surely, even we do not know DN i.216; te kho evaṃ jāneyyaṃ they ought to know ib. jānantā nāma n’ âhesuṃ “nobody knew” Ja iii.188 jānāhi find out Ja i.184; kālantarena jānissatha you will see in time Pv-a 13; ajānanto unawares, unsuspecting i.223; ajānamāna id. Pv ii.314.
2. Trs. to know recognize, be familiar with (usually c. acc., but also with gen.: Ja i.337; Ja ii.243), to have knowledge of, experience find; to infer, conclude, distinguish, state, define: yaṃ ahaṃ jānāmi taṃ tvaṃ jānāsi DN i.88; aham p’ etaṃ na jānāmi Snp 989; jānanti taṃ yakkhabhūtā Pv iv.135 paccakkhato ñatvā finding out personally Ja i.262 Ja iii.168; cittam me Gotamo jānāti SN i.178; jānāti maṃ Bhagavā SN i.116; kathaṃ jānemu taṃ mayaṃ? How shall we know (or identify) him? Vv 8311; yathā jānemu brāhmaṇaṃ so that we may know what a b. is Snp 599 yath’ âhaṃ jāneyyaṃ vasalaṃ Snp p.21; ajānanto ignorant Pv-a 4; annapānaṃ ajāṇanto (being without bread water) Pv-a 169; ittaraṃ ittarato ñatvā inferring the trifling from the trifle Pv i.1111; ingha me uṇh’ odakaṃ jānāhi find me some hot water SN i.174; seyyaṃ jānāhi Vin iv.16; phalaṃ pāpassa jānamāna (having experienced) Ja i.168; mantaṃ j. (to be in possession of a charm Ja i.253; maggaṃ na j. Snp 441; pamāṇaṃ ajānitvā (knowing no measure) Pv-a 130.
3. With double acc.: to recognize as, to see in, take for, identify as, etc (cp. Caus.): petaṃ maṃ jānāhi “see in me a Peta Pv ii.912 (= upadhārehi Pv-a 119); bhadd’ itthiyā ti maṃ aññaṃsu (they knew me as = they called me Vv 224.
IV. Various: 1. Grd. ñeyya as nt. = knowledge (cp ñāṇa): yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ (knowledge coincides with the knowable, or: his knowledge is in proportion to the k., i.e. he knows all) Nd ii.2352m ñāṇaṃ atikkamitvā ñeyyapatho n’ atthi “beyond knowledge there is no way of knowledge” ib.; ñeyyasāgara the ocean of knowledge Pv-a 1.
2. Caus jānāpeti to make known, to inform, or (with attānaṃ to identify, to reveal oneself Ja i.107 (att. ajānāpetvā) vi.363; Vism 92 (att.); Pv-a 149 (att.); Dhp-a ii.62.
Vedic jña, jānāti *genē & *gné, cp. Gr. γιγνώσκω, γνωτός, γν ̈ωσις; Lat. nosco, notus, (i)gnarus (cp E. i-gnorant); Goth. kunnan; Ohg. kennan, Ags cnāwan = E. know
(f.) deprivation, loss, confiscation of property; plundering, robbery; using force, ill-treatment DN i.135 = AN i.201 (vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā); SN i.66 (hatajānisu), Ja i.55 (v.l. jāti), 212 (mahājānikara a great robber): iv.72 (dhana,˚ v.l. hāni); Dhp 138 (= Dhp-a iii.70 dhanassa jāni, v.l. hāni).
from jahati, confused in meaning with jayati. See jahati & cp. janti
(f.) wife, in jānipatayo (pl.) wife & husband (cp. jāyā(m)pati) AN ii.59 sq.
(nt.) (also as jaṇṇu(ka), q.v.) the knee Ja ii.311; Ja iv.41; Ja vi.471; DN-a i.254.
-maṇḍala the knee-cap, the knee AN i.67; AN ii.21 AN iii.241 sq.; Pv-a 179.
Vedic jānu = Gr. γόνυ, Lat. genu, Goth., Ohg., etc. kniu, E. knee
(nt.) = jānu AN iv.102.
Caus. of jayati.
(& jāmāta Ja iv.219) daughter’s husband, son-inlaw Thig 422 (= Thag-a 269 duhitu pati); Ja ii.63; Ja v.442.
Vedic jāmātar. Deriv. uncertain. BR. take it as jā + mātar, the builder up of the family, supposing the case where there is no son and the husband goes to live in the wife’s family, a bīna marriage. More likely fr. ldg *gem, to marry. Cp. Gr.γαμέω· γαμβρός, Lat. gener
(jāyate) to be born, to be produced, to arise, to be reborn. Pres. 3rd pl. jāyare Ja iii.459; Ja iv.53; Mil 337; ppr, jāyanto Snp 208; aor jāyi Ja iii.391; inf. jātum Ja i.374 ■ jāyati (loko) jīyati, miyati one is born, gets old, dies DN ii.30; Vism 235. Kaṭṭhā jāyati jātavedo out of fire-wood is born the fire Snp 462 ■ Vin ii.95 = Vin ii.305; Snp 114, Snp 296, Snp 657; Dhp 58, Dhp 193, Dhp 212, Dhp 282; Pv iii.114 (are reborn as). Cp vi˚.
from jan, see janati
(pl.) wife & husband Vv-a 286.;
see jayampatikā & cp. jāyāpatī
(f.) wife Vin ii.259 = Vin ii.264; Ja iv.285.
-patī (pl.) husband & wife Pv-a 159; Dāvs v.2.
from jan
f. (cp. jāyā) wife MN i.451.
a paramour, adulterer Ja i.293; Ja ii.309. f. ˚t adulteress Vin ii.259, Vin ii.268; Vin iii.83.
Vedic jāra
(nt.) a net; netting, entanglement (lit. or fig.): snare, deceptíon (= māyā) ■ A I.it. Nd ii.260 (= suttajāla, a plaiting of threads); Snp-a 115 Snp-a 263 (= suttamaya) DN i.45 (anto-jālikata caught in a net); Snp 62, Snp 71, Snp 213, Snp 669; Ja i.52; Ja vi.139 ■ kinkiṇika a row of bells DN ii.183; muttā˚ a net of pearls Ja i.9; Vv-a 40; loha˚ Pv-a 153; hema˚ Vv 35; a fowler’s net Dhp 174; a spider’s web Dhp 347; nets for hair Ja vi.188 pabbata˚ a chain of mountains Ja ii.399; sirā˚ network of veins Ja v.69; Pv-a 68 ■ Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 90 ■ B. Fig. Very often appld to the snares of Māra: SN i.48 (maccuno); Snp 357 (id.); Dhp-a iii.175 (Māra˚); Snp 527 (deception); taṇhā˚ the snare of worldly thirst (cp. ˚tanhā) MN i.271; Thag 306; Snp-a 351 kāma˚ Thag 355; moha˚ SN iii.83; mohasama Dhp 251 diṭṭhi˚ the fallacies of heresy DN i.46; Ja vi.220; ñāṇa the net of knowledge Vv-a 63; Dhp-a iii.171. bhumma (vijjā) “earthly net,” i.e. gift of clearsight extending over the earth Snp-a 353.
-akkhi a mesh of a net Ja i.208: -taṇhā the net of thirst Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; Dhs-a 367; -pūpa a “netcake”? Dhp-a i.319; -hatthapāda (adj.) having net-like hands & feet (one of the 32 marks of a Mahāpurisa prob. with reference to long nails DN ii.17 (see Dial. ii.14, note 3), cp. jālitambanakhehi Vv 8116 (expld at Vv-a 315: jālavantehi abhilohita-nakkehi. Tena jāli (v.l. jāla-) hatthataṃ mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇaṃ tambanakhataṃ anuvyañ anañ ca dasseti).
Vedic jāla, prob. from jaṭ; to plait, make a tangle cp. jaṭita & jaṭā; on l:ṭ cp. phulla: sphuṭa cāru: cāṭu; cela: ceṭa
glow, blaze Ja v.326; Pv-a 52 (= tejas), 154 (raṃsi˚); Mil 357; Vism 419 (kappavināsaka˚).
-roruva Name of one of the two Roruva hells (“blazes” Ja v.271; -sikhā a glowing crest i.e. a flame Nd ii.11 (= accī).
Sk. jvāla, from jalati
(nt.) 1. a net Ja vi.536; Dāvs v.51. - 2. a bud AN iv.117 sq. (˚jāta in bud) ■ f. jālikā chain armour Mil 199.
jāla1 + ka
(f.) a flame Ja i.216, Ja i.322; Mil 148, Mil 357.
see jāla2
(adj.-n.) “having a net,” ensnaring, deceptive: (a) lit. a fisherman Ja ii.178 ■ (b) fig. usually in f ˚inī of tanhā (ensnarer, witch) SN i.107 = Dhp 180; AN ii.211 Thag 162, Thag 908; Dhs 1059; Vism 1; Dhs-a 363; cp Mvu i.166; Mvu iii.92.
to cause to burn, to light, kindle Ja ii.104; Ja iv.290; Ja v.32.
caus. of jalati. See also jaleti
(adj ■ suffix) winning, victorious: sangāma˚ victorious in fight, in sangāmaj uttama “greatest of conquerors” Dhp 103; sabba SN iv.83.
From jayati to conquer
(f.) see jighacchā.
(adj.) one who wishes to gain, desirous of, pursuing Snp 690.
see next
to desire, to wish to acquire, to covet Snp 700; Ja ii.285; Ja iii.172 (v.l. BB. jigissaṃ); iv.406 (v.l. SS. jihiṃ˚, BB. jigī˚); v.372; vi.268. As jigīsati Thag 1110.
Desid. of ji, jayati. On etym. see also Kern, Toev. p. 44
(f.) desire for, covetousness Vb 353 (v.l. BB. nijigīsanatā); cp. Vism. 29
n. abstr. fr. jigiṃsati
(adj.) one who dislikes or disapproves of MN i.327 (paṭhavī˚, āpa˚ etc.) Mil 343.
to shun, avoid, loathe, detest, to be disgusted with or horrified at (c. instr.) DN i.213 (iddhi-pāṭihāriyena aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi j.): AN iv.174 (kāyaduccaritena); Snp 215 (kammehi pāpakehi; Snp-a 266 = hiriyati); Ja ii.287; Pug. 36 ■ ppr. jigucchamāna Iti 43; grd. jigucchitabba AN i.126; pp. jigucchita Snp 901 ■ See also jeguccha, jegucchin.
Desid. of gup
(nt.) dislike, contempt, disgust Vism 159; Pv-a 120.
(f.) disgust for, detestation, avoidance, shunning: tapo˚ (detesting asceticism) DN i.174; SN i.67; AN ii.200 jigucchabībhaccha-dassana detestable & fearful-looking Pv-a 56.; Note. A diff. spelling, digucchā, occurs at Dhs-a 210.
to have a desire to eat, to be hungry DN ii.266; pp. jighacchita Dhp-a ii.145.
Desid. to ghasati, eat
(f.) appetite, hunger, often combd with pipāsā, desire to drink, thirst, e.g. SN i.18; AN ii.143, AN ii.153; Mil 304 ■ MN i.13, MN i.114; MN i.364; MN iii.97, MN iii.136; AN iii.163; Dhp 203 (j. paramā rogā); Ja ii.445; Ja iii.19 (˚abhibhūta = chāta); Mil 204, Mil 304; Sdhp 118, Sdhp 388 Cp. khudā & chāta.; Note. A diff. spelling as dighacchā occurs at AN ii.117.
from jighacchati
the Gunja shrub (Abrus precatorius) Ja iv.333 (akkhīni j. ˚phalasadisāni, cp. in same application guñjā); v.156 (j. ˚phalasannibha); Dhp-a i.177 (˚gumba).
1. decayed, broken up, frail, decrepit, old: vuḍḍha mahallaka andhagata vayo-anupatta Nd ii.261; jarājiṇṇatāya jiṇṇa DN-a i.283 ■ Vin ii.189; DN i.114; MN ii.48 sq., 66; AN ii.249; AN iv.173; Snp 1 (urago va jiṇṇaṃ tacaṃ jahāti); Pv i.121 (same simile); Snp 1120 Snp 1144; Ja i.58; Ja iii.22 (-pilotikā worn-out rags); Dhp 155 Dhp 260; Pv ii.114 (jarājiṇṇa Pv-a 147); Pp 33; Vism 119 (˚vihārā), 356 (˚sandamānikā), 357 (˚koṭṭha); Thag-a 213 (-ghara a tumble-down house); Pv-a 40 (-goṇa = jaraggava), 55 (of a roof). Cp. ˚tara Ja iv.108.
2. digested Ja ii.362
pp. of jarati
(adj.) = jiṇṇa Snp 98, Snp 124; Ja iv.178, Ja iv.366; Sdhp 299 (sālā).
(f.) decrepitude DN-a i.283 (jarā˚).
cp. jiṇṇa, jaratā & jīraṇatā
conquered, subdued, mastered: (nt.) victory. jitā me pāpakā dhammā Vin i.8; Dhp 40, Dhp 104 (attā jitaṃ seyyo for attā jito seyyo see Dhp-a ii.228), 105, 179; Vv 6427 (jitindriya one whose senses are mastered, cp. guttindriya) ■ Cp. vi˚.
pp. of jayati, conquer
(nt.) mastery, conquest Vv-a 284.
n. abstr. of jita
conquering, victorious, often of the Buddha, “Victor”: jitā me pāpakā dhammā tasmâhaṃ Upaka jino ti Vin i.8 = MN i.171; Vin v.217; Snp 379, Snp 697, Snp 989, Snp 996. magga˚ conqueror of the Path Snp 84 sq.; saṃsuddha˚ (id.) Snp 372. Cp khetta˚. In other connections: Pv iv.333; Thig 419 (jin’ amhase rūpinaṃ Lacchiṃ expld at Thag-a 268 as jinā amhase jinā vat’ amha rūpavatiṃ Siriṃ).
-cakka the Buddha’s reign, rule, authority Ja iv.100 -putta disciple of the B. Mil 177; -bhūmi the ground or footing of a conqueror Pv-a 254; -sāsana the doctrine of the B. Dpvs iv.3, 10.
pp. med. of jayati
= jayati (jeti). See also vi˚.
(adj.) crooked, oblique, slant, fig. dishonest, false (cp. vanka, opp. uju | MN i.31 (+ vanka) AN v.289, AN v.290; Ja i.290 (spelled jima); iii.111 = v.222 vi.66; Vism 219 (ajimha = uju); Pv-a 51 (citta˚ vanka… ; opp. uju). Cp. kuṭila.
Vedic jihma
(f.) crookedness, deceit (opp. ujutā) Dhs 50, Dhs 51 (+ vankatā); Vb 359.
n. abstr. to jimha
(nt.) crookedness, deceit, fraud MN i.340 (sāṭheyyāni kūṭeyyāni vankeyyāni j.˚); AN iv.189 (id.) v.167.
from jimha
(f.) a bow string MN i.429 (five kinds); Ja ii.88 Ja iii.323; Vism 150; DN-a i.207. -kāra bowstring-maker Mil 331.
Vedic jyā = Gr. βιός bow, cp. also Lat. filum thread
(f.) the tongue. (a) physically: Vin i.34; AN iv.131; Snp 673, Snp 716; Dhp 65 Dhp 360; Ja ii.306; Pv-a 99 (of Petas: visukkha-kanthaṭṭha j.), 152 ■ Of the tongue of the mahāpurusha which could touch his ears & cover his forehead: Snp 1022; p. 108; & pahūta-jivhatā the characteristic of possessing a prominent tongue (as the 27th of the 32 Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni) DN i.106 = Snp p.107; DN ii.18 -dujjivha (adj.) having a bad tongue (of a poisonous snake) AN iii.260 ■ (b) psychologically: the sense of taste. It follows after ghāna (smell) as the 4th sense in the enumn of sense-organs (jivhāya rasaṃ sāyati Nd ii.under rūpa; jivhā-viññeyya rasa DN i.245; DN ii.281; MN ii.42) Vin i.34; DN iii.102, DN iii.226; MN i.191; Vism 444.
-agga the tip of the tongue AN iii.109; AN iv.137; Dhp-a ii.33. -āyatana the organ of taste DN iii.243, DN iii.280, DN iii.290; Dhs 585, Dhs 609, Dhs 653; -indriya the sense of taste DN iii.239; Dhs 585, Dhs 609, Dhs 972; -nittaddana (corr. to -nitthaddhana tying the tongue by means of a spell DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.96) -viññāṇa the cognition of taste MN i.112; DN iii.243; Dhs 556, Dhs 612, Dhs 632; -samphassa contact with the sense of taste SN i.115; DN iii.243; Dhs 585, Dhs 632, Dhs 787.
Vedic jihvā, cp. Lat. lingua (older dingua); Goth. tuggo; Ohg. zunga; E. tongue
diminished, wasted, deprived of (with acc. or abl.) having lost; with acc.: Ja iii.153, Ja iii.223, Ja iii.335 Ja v.99 (atthaṃ: robbed of their possessions; Com parihīna vinaṭṭha) ■ with abl.: Ja v.401 (read jīnā dhanā).
pp. of jīyati
to become diminished, to be deprived, to lose (cp. jayati, jāni) to decay; to become old (cp. jarati, jiṇṇa) jīyasi Ja v.100 jīyanti Ja iii.336 (dhanā); jīyittha SN i.54; Ja i.468; mā jīyi do not be deprived of (ratiṃ) Ja iv.107. Koci kvaci na jīyati mīyati (cp. jāyati) DN ii.30; cakkhūni jīyare the eyes will become powerless Ja vi.528 (= jīyissanti) grd. jeyya: see ajeyya2. Cp. parijīyati. Sometimes spelt jiyy˚: jiyyati Ja vi.150; jiyyāma Ja ii.75 (we lose parihāyāma). Pp. jīna, q.v.
Pass. of ji, cp. Sk. jyāti & jīryate
digestion, in ajīrakena by want or lack of digestion Ja ii.181. See ajīraka.
Vedic jīra, lively, alert, cp. jīvati & Gr.; διερός, Lat. viridis
cummin-seed Mil 63; Ja i.244; Ja ii.363; Vv-a 186.
(nt.) decaying, getting old Dhtp 252.
fr. jīr
(f.) the state of being decayed or aged, old age decay, decrepitude MN i.49; SN ii.2; Nd ii.252 = Dhs 644; Pv-a 149. Jirati & Jirayati;
n. abstr. of jīr = jar, see jarati; cp. jarā & jiṇṇatā
1. to destroy, bring to ruin, injure, hurt Vin i.237 (jīrati); Ja v.501 (v.l. BB for jarayetha, Com. vināseyya) = vi.375; Pv-a 57. 2. (cp. jīyati) to get old AN iii.54 (jarā-dhammaṃ mā jīri “old age may not get old,” or “the law of decay may not work”); Vism 235 (where id. p. DN ii.30 reads jīyati); Dhp-a i.11 (cakkhūni jīranti).
3. (intrs.) to be digested Vism 101. Jireti & Jirapeti;
Caus. of jarati
to work out, to digest Ja i.238, Ja i.274 (jīreti); Dhp-a i.171. Appl to bhati, wages: bhatiṃ ajīrāpetva not working off the w. Ja ii.309, Ja ii.381; jīrāpeti as “destroy” at Thag-a 269 in expln of nijjareti (+ vināseti).
Verbal formation from jīra1
(adj.-n.) 1. the soul. Sabbe jīvā all the souls, enumd with sattā pāṇā bhūta in the dialect used by the followers of Gosāla DN i.53 (= DN-a i.161 jīvasaññī). “taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīraṃ udāhu aññaṃ j. aññaṃ s.” (is the body the soul, or is the body one thing and the soul another?) see D i.157 188; ii.333, 336, 339; SN iv.392 sq.; MN i.157, MN i.426 sq. AN ii.41 ■ Also in this sense at Mil 30, Mil 54, Mil 86 ■ Vin iv.34; SN iii.215, SN iii.258 sq.; SN iv.286; SN v.418; AN v.31, AN v.186 AN v.193.
2. life, in yāvajīvaṃ as long as life lasts, for life, during (his) lifetime DN iii.133; Vin i.201; Dhp 64; Ja ii.155; Pv-a 76.
-gāhaṃ (adv.) taken alive, in phrase j.˚ gaṇhāti or gaṇhāpeti SN i.84; Ja i.180; Ja ii.404; cp. karamara; -loka the animate creation Ja iii.394; -sūla “life-pale,” a stake for execution Ja ii.443; -sokin (= sokajīvin) leading a life of sorrow Ja vi.509.
Sk. jīva, Idg. *gṷīṷos = Gr. βίος, Lat. vīvus, Goth. quius, Ohg. queck, E. quick, Lith. gyvas
(nt.) the note of the jīvaka bird Sum. V. on DN iii.201.
(adj.) = jīva, in bandhu˚; Name of a plant Vv-a 43 ■ f. ˚ikā q.v. Jivam-jivaka
(m. onom.) name of a bird, a sort of pheasant (or partridge?), which utters a note sounding like jīvaṃ jīva DN iii.201; Ja v.406, Ja v.416; Ja vi.276, Ja vi.538. With this cp. the Jain phrase jīvaṃjīveṇa gacchaï jīvaṃjīveṇaṃ ciṭṭhaï, Weber Bhagavatī pp. 289, 290, with doubtful interpretation (“living he goes with life”? or “he goes like the j bird”?).
Fausböll reads jīvajīvaka in all the Jātaka passages. Speyer Avs ii.227 has jīvañjīvaka
to live be alive, live by, subsist on (c. instr. or nissāya). Imper pres. jīva Snp 427, very freq. with ciraṃ live long… as a salutation & thanksgiving. ciraṃ jīva Ja vi.337 c. jīvāhi Snp 1029; Pv ii.333; c. jīvantu Pv i.55 ■ pot jīve Snp 440, Snp 589; Dhp 110 ■ ppr. jīvaṃ Snp 427, Snp 432; ppr. med. jīvamāna Ja i.307; Pv-a 39 ■ inf. jīvituṃ Ja i.263; Dhp 123 ■ Snp 84 sq., 613 sq., 804; Dhp 197; Ja iii.26; Ja iv.137; Ja vi.183 (jīvare); Pv-a 111.
Vedic jīvati, cp. jinoti (jinvati); Dhtp 282: pāṇadhāraṇe *gṷei̯é = Gr. βίομαι & ζώω, ζ ̈ην; Lat. vīvo Goth. ga-quiunan; Mhg. quicken, cp. E. quicken
(nt.) living, means of subsistence, livelihood Pv-a 161. Spelt jīvāna (v.l. jīvino) (adj.) at Ja iii.353 (yācana˚).
(adj.) living, alive Vism 194.
ppr. med. of jīvati + ka
(f.) living, livelihood SN iii.93; AN v.87, AN v.210; Ja iv.459; Mil 122; Snp-a 466. Freq. in combn ˚ṃ kappeti to find or get one’s living: Ja ii.209; Pv-a 40, etc.; ˚kappaka finding one’s livelihood (c. ger by) Ja ii.167. Cp. next.
abstr. fr. jīvaka
(nt.) (individual) life, lifetime, span of life; living, livelihood (cp jīvikā) Vin ii.191; SN i.42; SN iv.169, SN iv.213; MN ii.73 (appaṃ) AN i.155, AN i.255; AN iii.72; AN iv.136 (appakaṃ parittaṃ); Snp 181 Snp 440, Snp 574, Snp 577, Snp 931, Snp 1077; Dhp 110, Dhp 111, Dhp 130; Ja i.222; Pv i.1111 (ittaraṃ); ii.67 (vijahati); Dhs 19, Dhs 295; Vism 235, Vism 236; Pts ii.245; Pv-a 40 ■ jīvitā voropeti to deprive of life, to kill Vin iii.73; DN iii.235; MN ii.99; AN iii.146 AN iii.436; AN iv.370 sq.; Pv-a 67.
-āsā the desire for life AN i.86; -indriya the faculty of life, vitality Vin iii.73; SN v.204; Kv 8, 10; Mil 56; Dhs 19; Vism 32, Vism 230 (˚upaccheda destruction of life) 447 (def.); Dhp-a ii.356 (˚ṃ upacchindati to destroy life) Vv-a 72; -kkhaya the dissolution of life, i.e. death Ja i.222; Pv-a 95, Pv-a 111; -dāna “the gift of life,” saving or sparing life Ja i.167; Ja ii.154; -nikanti desire for life AN iv.48; -parikkhārā (pl.) the requisites of life MN i.104 sq. AN iii.120; AN v.211; -pariyādāna the cessation or consummation of life DN i.46 (= DN-a i.128); SN ii.83; AN iv.13 -pariyosāna the end of life, i.e. death Ja i.256; Pv-a 73; -mada the pride of life, enumd under the 3 madā viz. ārogya, yobbana, j.: of health, youth, life DN iii.220; AN i.146; AN iii.72; -rūpa (adj.) living (lifelike) Ja ii.190 -saṅkhaya = ˚khaya Snp 74; Dhp 331; Nd ii.262 (= ˚pariyosāna); -hetu (adv.) on the ground of life, for the sake of life AN iv.201, AN iv.270
Vedic jīvita, orig. pp. of jīvati “that which is lived,” cp. same formation in Lat. vīta = *vīvita; Gr.βιότη living, sustenace, & δίαιτα, “diet”
(adj.) (usually -˚) living, leading a life (of… ) SN i.42, SN i.61; Snp 88, Snp 181; Dhp 164; Pv-a 27. Cp. dīgha˚ dhamma˚.
(f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, see also P. dosinā) moonlight, a moonlit night, the bright fortnight of the month (opp kālapakkha) Vin i.138, Vin i.176; Ja i.165; Ja iv.498 (˚pakkha).
(f.) splendour, brightness, effulgence, light Ja ii.353; Pv-a 122, Pv-a 137, Pv-a 198. The spelling juti at MN i.328 (in combn gati + juti) seems to be faulty for cuti (so as v.l. given on p. 557).
-dhara (jutin˚) carrying or showing light, shining resplendent, brilliant SN i.121; Ja ii.353; Dhp-a i.432.
Sk. jyuti & dyuti, to dyotate, see jotati
(adj.) (-˚) having light, in mahā˚; of great splendour DN ii.272; AN i.206; AN iv.248.
(f.) splendour, brightness, prominence Ja 14; v.405
fr. jutimant
(adj.) brilliant, bright; usually fig. as prominent in wisdom: “bright.” distinguished, a great light (in this sense often as v.l. to jātimant) DN ii.256 (ī); SN v.24; Dhp 89 (= Dhp-a ii.163 ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā) Snp 508; Pv iv.135 (= Pv-a 230 ñāṇajutiyā jutimā).
fr. juti
(f.) splendour Snp-a 453.
fr. jutimant
to pour (into the fire), to sacrifice, offer; to give, dedicate AN ii.207 (aggiṃ) Snp 1046 (= Nd ii.263 deti cīvaraṃ, etc.); 428 (aggihuttaṃ jūhato), p. 79 (aggiṃ); Pp 56; fut. juhissati SN i.166 (aggiṃ); caus. hāpeti2 pp. huta; see also hava, havi, homa.
Sk. juhoti, *gheu(d); cp. Gr. ξέω, ξύτρα, ξϋλος; Lat. fundo; Goth. giutan, Ohg. giozan
(nt.) offering, sacrifice DN i.12, Ja ii.43.
fr. juhati
(nt.) gambling, playing at dice DN i.7 (˚ppamādaṭṭhāna cp. DN-a i.85)≈; iii.182, 186 (id.); Ja i.290; Ja iii.198 Ja vi.281; Dhp-a ii.228. ˚ṃ kīḷati to play at d. Ja i.289 Ja iii.187 ■ See also dūta2.
-gīta a verse sung at playing dice (for luck) Ja i.289 Ja i.293; -maṇḍala dice board (= phalaka Ja i.290) Ja i.293 -sālā gambling hall Ja vi.281.
Sk. dyūta pp. of div, dīvyati, P. dibbati to play at dice
(part.) exclamation: oh! ah! now then! Vin i.232, Vin i.292 (gaccha je); MN i.126; Vv-a 187, Vv-a 207; Dhp-a iv.105.
(adj.) & jegucchiya (J ii.437) contemptible, loathsome, detestable Ja iv.305; Vism 250; Thag 1056; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 192 (asuci + ). Cp pari˚ ■ a˚ not despised Snp 852; Thag 961.
sec. der. fr. jigucchā
(f.) avoidance, detestation, disgust Vin i.234; MN i.30; AN iv.182 sq.
see jigucchita
(adj.) one who detests or avoids (usually -˚) MN i.77; (parama˚), 78; AN iv.174, AN iv.182 sq., 188 sq., Mil 352 (pāpa˚).
(adj.) better (than others), best first, supreme; first-born; elder brother or sister, elder eldest DN ii.15 (aggo jeṭṭho seṭṭho = the first, foremost & best of all); AN i.108; AN ii.87; AN iii.152; AN iv.175; Ja i.138 (˚putta); ii.101 (˚bhātā), 128 (˚yakkhinī); iv.137.
-apacāyin, in phrase kule-j ■ apacāyin paying due respect to the clan-elders DN iii.72, DN iii.74; SN v.468; Vism 415; Dhp-a i.265. Same for ˚apacāyikā (f.) honour to… Nd ii.294, & ˚apacāyitar DN iii.70, DN iii.71, DN iii.145, DN iii.169 -māsa Name of a month Snp-a 359.
compar ■ superl. formation of jyā power. Gr. βία, from ji in jināti & jayati “stronger than others, used as superl. (& compar.) to vuḍḍha old-elder, eldest The compar. *jeyya is a grammarian’s construction see remarks on kaniṭṭha
= jeṭṭha Ja i.253; Ja ii.101 (˚tāpasa); iii.281 (˚kam māra: head of the silversmith’s guild); iv.137, 161 v.282; Pv i.113 (putta = pubbaja Pv-a 57); Dhp-a iii.237 (˚sīla); iv.111 (id.); Pv-a 36 (˚bhariyā), 42 (˚pesakāra head of the weaver’s guild), 47 (˚vāṇija), 75.
see jayati.
(nt.) a kind of (missile) weapon AN iv.107 = AN iv.110 (combd with āvudha & salāka; vv.ll. vedhanika jeganika, jevanika).
(adj.) illuminating, making light; explaining Ja ii.420; Dpvs xiv.50; Mil 343 (= lamp-lighter) ■ f. ˚ikā explanation, commentary, Name of several Commentaries, e.g. the Paramatthajotikā on the Sutta Nipāta (Kp-a 11); cp. the similar expression dīpanī (Paramatthadīpanī on Th 2; Vv & Pv.).; Jotika Np. Dhp-a i.385 (Jotiya); Vism 233, Vism 382.
from juti
to shine, be splendid Jˋ i.53; vi.100, 509; Pv-a 71 (jotantī = obhāsentī ).
Sk. dyotate to shine, *dei̯ā; cp. Gr. δέαται shine, δ ̈ηλος clear; also Sk. dī in dīpyate; Lat. dies. Dhtp 120 gives jut in meaning “ditti,” i.e. light
(nt.) & jotanā (f.) illumination, explanation Ja vi.542; Pts ii.112; Vv-a 17 (˚nā).
cp. Sk. dyotana
(m. nt.) 1. light, splendour, radiance SN i.93; AN ii.85; Vv 162.
2. a star: see cpds.
3. fire SN i.169; Thag 415; Ja iv.206; sajotibhūta set on fire SN ii.260; AN iii.407 sq.; Ja i.232.
-parāyaṇa (adj.) attaining to light or glory SN i.93; AN ii.85; DN iii.233; Pp 51; -pāvaka a brilliant fire Vv 162 (expl. Vv-a 79: candima-suriya-nakkhatta tāraka-rūpānaṃ sādhāraṇa-nāmaṃ); -pāsāṇa a burning glass made of a crystal Dhp-a iv.209; -mālikā a certain torture (setting the body on fire: making a fiery garland MN i.87 = AN i.47 = AN ii.122 = Nd i.154 = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197 -rasa a certain jewel (wishing stone) Vv-a 111, Vv-a 339; Dhp-a i.198; Mil 118; -sattha the science of the stars astronomy: one of the 6 Vedic disciplines: see chaḷanga cp. jotisā.
Sk. jyotis (cp. dyuti) nt. to dyotate, see jotati
(adj.) luminous, endowed with light or splendour, bright, excellent (in knowledge) Snp 348 (= paññājoti-sampanna Snp-a 348).
joti + mant, cp. also P. jutimant
(f.) astronomy Mil 3.
= Sk. jyotiṣa (nt.)
(a) trs. to cause to shine, illuminate, make clear, explain AN ii.51 = Ja v.509 (bhāsaye jotaye dhammaṃ; Gloss Ja v.510 katheyya for joteyya = jotaye Iti 108; Ja ii.208; Pv-a 18 ■ (b) intrs. to shine Dhp-a ii.163 (ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā); pp. jotita resplendent Pv-a 53.
Jh.
Caus. of jotati
set on fire, consumed, dried up (w. hunger or thirst: parched combd w. chāta Ja ii.83; Ja vi.347.
pp. of jhāpeti; cp. ñatta → *jñāpayati
see jhāpeti.
(?) a window or opening in general Ja ii.334.
(nt.) literally meditation. But it never means vaguely meditation It is the technical term for a special religious experience reached in a certain order of mental states. It was originally divided into four such states. These may be summarized: 1. The mystic, with his mind free from sensuous and worldly ideas, concentrates his thoughts on some special subject (for instance, the impermanence of all things). This he thinks out by attention to the facts, and by reasoning. 2. Then uplifted above attention & reasoning, he experiences joy & ease both of body and mind 3. Then the bliss passes away, & he becomes suffused with a sense of ease, and 4. he becomes aware of pure lucidity of mind & equanimity of heart. The whole really forms one series of mental states, & the stages might have been fixed at other points in the series. So the Dhamma-saṃgani makes a second list of five stages by calling, in the second jhāna, the fading away of observation one stage, & the giving up of sustained thinking another stage (Dhs 167–175). And the Vibhaṃga calls the first jhāna the; pañcaṅgika-jhāna because it, by itself, can be divided into five parts (Vbh 267). The state of mind left after the experience of the four jhānas is described as follows at DN i.76: “with his heart thus serene, made pure, translucent, cultured, void of evil supple, ready to act, firm and imperturbable.” It will be seen that there is no suggestion of trance, but rather of an enhanced vitality. In the descriptions of the crises in the religious experiences of Christian saints and mystics, expressions similar to those used in the jhānas are frequent (see F. Heiler Die Buddhistische Versenkung, 1918). Laymen could pass through the four jhānas (S iv.301). The jhānas are only a means, not the end. To imagine that experiencing them was equivalent to Arahantship (and was therefore the end aimed at) is condemned (DN i.37 ff.) as a deadly heresy In late Pali we find the phrase arūpajjhānā. This is merely a new name for the last four of the eight Vimokkhā, which culminate in trance. It was because they
made this the aim of their teaching that Gotama rejected the doctrines of his two teachers. Āḷāra-Kāḷāma Uddaka-Rāmaputta (MN i.164 f.) ■ The jhānas are discussed in extenso & in various combinations as regards theory & practice at: DN i.34 sq.; 73 sq.; SN ii.210 sq.; SN iv.217 sq., 263 sq.; v.213 sq.; MN i.276 sq. 350 sq., 454 sq.; AN i.53, AN i.163; AN ii.126; AN iii.394 sq. AN iv.409 sq.; AN v.157 sq.; Vin iii.4; Nd ii.on Snp 1119 & s.v. Pts i.97 sq.; Pts ii.169 sq.; Vb 257 sq.; 263 sq.; 279 sq. Vism 88, Vism 415 ■ They are frequently mentioned either as a set, or singly, when often the set is implied (as in the case of the 4th jh.). Mentioned as jh. 1
4 e.g. at Vin i.104; Vin ii.161 (foll. by sotāpanna, etc.); DN ii.156, DN ii.186 DN iii.78, DN iii.131, DN iii.222; SN ii.278 (nikāmalābhin); AN ii.36 (id.) iii.354; SN iv.299; SN v.307 sq.; MN i.21, MN i.41, MN i.159, MN i.203, MN i.247 MN i.398, MN i.521; MN ii.15, MN ii.37; Snp 69, Snp 156, Snp 985; Dhp 372; Ja i.139; Vv-a 38; Pv-a 163 ■ Separately: the 1st: AN iv.422 AN v.135; MN i.246, MN i.294; Mil 289; Mil 1st
3rd: AN iii.323; MN i.181; MN i.1st & 2nd: MN ii.28; MN ii.4th: AN ii.41; AN iii.325 AN v.31; DN iii.270; Vv-a 4 ■ See also Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh Psych. (Quest Series) p. 107 sq.; Dhs. trsl. p. 52 sq. Index to Saṃyutta N. for more refs.; also Kasiṇa.
-anuyutta applying oneself to meditation Snp 972 -aṅga a constituent of meditation (with ref. to the 4 jhānas) Vism 190. -kīḷā sporting in the exercise of meditation Ja iii.45. -pasuta id. (+ dhīra) Snp 709; Dhp 181 (cp. Dhp-a iii.226); -rata fond of meditation SN i.53, SN i.122; SN iv.117; Iti 40; Snp 212, Snp 503, Snp 1009; Vv 5015 Vv-a 38; -vimokkha emancipation reached through jhāna AN iii.417; AN v.34; -sahagata accompanied by jh (of paññābala) AN i.42.
from jhāyati,1 BSk. dhyāna. The (popular etym-) expln of jhāna is given by Bdhgh at Vism 150 as follows: “ārammaṇ’ ûpanijjhānato paccanīka-jhāpanato vā jhānaṃ,” i.e. called jh. from meditation on objects & from burning up anything adverse
(nt.) conflagration, fire DN iii.94; Ja i.347.
from jhāyati2
(adj.) belonging to the (4) meditations Vism 111.
fr. jhāna1
(adj.) one who sets fire to (cp. jhāpeti), an incendiary Ja iii.71.
(nt.) setting fire to, consumption by fire, in sarīra˚-kicca cremation Vv-a 76.
set on fire Mil 47; Vism 76 (˚kāla time of cremation).
pp. jhāpeti
1. to set fire to, to burn, to cook Vin iv.265; Ja i.255, Ja i.294; Dhp-a ii.66; Pv-a 62.
2. to destroy, to bring to ruin, to kill (see Kern, Toev., p. 37 sq. Ja iii.441 (= ḍahati pīḷeti); Vv-a 38 (= jhāyati1, connected w. jhāna: to destroy by means of jhāna); inf jhāpetuṃ Ja vi.300 (+ ghātetuṃ hantuṃ); ger. jhatvā ref. SN i.161 (reads chetvā) = Ne 145 (reads jhitvā, with v.l. chetvā) SN i.19 (reads chetvā, vv.ll. ghatvā & jhatvā) = Ja iv.67 (T. jhatvā, v.l. chetvā; expld by kilametvā); SN i.41 (v.l. for T. chetvā, Bdhgh says “jhatvā ti vadhitvā”) Ja ii.262 (+ hantvā vadhitvā; expld by kilametvā) vi.299 (+ vadhitvā); also jhatvāna Ja iv.57 (= hantvā)-pp. jhatta & jhāpita;.
Caus. of jhāyati2
(adj.-n.) burning, on fire, conflagration, in ˚khetta charcoal-burner’s field Ja i.238; Ja ii.92; ˚aṅgāra a burning cinder Pv-a 90. By itself: Ja i.405; Dhp-a ii.67.
jhāyati2
Name of a plant Ja vi.537; also in ˚bhatta (?) Ja ii.288.
(adj.) one who makes a fire DN iii.94.
to meditate, contemplate think upon, brood over (c. acc.): search for, hunt after DN ii.237 (jhānaṃ); SN i.25, SN i.57; AN v.323 sq. (+ pa,˚ ni, ava˚); Snp 165, Snp 221, Snp 425, Snp 709, Snp 818 (= Nd i.149 pa˚, ni˚ ava˚); Dhp 27, Dhp 371, Dhp 395; Ja i.67, Ja i.410; Vv 5012; Pv iv.166 Mil 66; Snp-a 320 (aor. jhāyiṃsu thought of) ■ pp jhāyita.
Sk. dhyāyati, dhī; with dhīra, dhīḥ from didheti shine, perceive; cp. Goth. filu-deisei cunning, & in meaning cinteti → citta;1
to burn, to be on fire: fig. to be consumed, to waste away, to dry up DN i.50 (= jāleti DN-a i.151) iii.94 (to make a fire); Ja i.61, Ja i.62; Pv i.1110 (jhāyare v.l. BB. for ghāyire); Mil 47; Pv-a 33 (= pariḍayhati)-aor. jhāyi Dhp-a ii.240 sq ■ (fig.) Dhp 155; Ja vi.189-Caus. jhāpeti ■ Cp. khīyati2.
Sk. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāy & kṣī, cp. khara & chārikā
(nt.) meditating, in ˚sīla the practice of meditation (cp. Sk. dhyānayoga) Vv-a 38.
der. fr. jhāyati1
(nt.) cremation, burning Pp A 187.
fr. jhāyati2
(adj.) pondering over (c. acc.) intent on: meditative, self-concentrated, engaged in jhāna-practice Vin ii.75; SN i.46 = SN i.52; SN ii.284; MN i.334; AN i.24; AN iii.355; AN iv.426; AN v.156, AN v.325 sq.; Snp 85 (magga˚) 638, 719, 1009, 1105; Iti 71, Iti 74, Iti 112; Ja iv.7; Dhp 23 Dhp 110, Dhp 387 (reminding of jhāyati2, cp. Dhp-a iv.144) Nd ii.264; Vv 58; Pv iv.132; Vb 342. Nd i.226 Nd ii.3422 = Vism 26 (āpādaka˚).
see jhāyati1 & jhāna
is reading at Ne 145 for jhatvā (see jhāpeti).
(nt.) the intellectual faculty, intelligence Dhp 72 (= Dhp-a ii.73: jānanasabhāva).
nomen agentis from jānāti
(f.) announcement, declaration, esp. as t. t. a motion or resolution put at a kammavācā (proceedings at a meeting of the chapter. The usual formula is “esā ñatti; suṇātu me bhante sangho”: Vin i.340; Vin iii.150, Vin iii.173, Vin iii.228 ■ ˚ṃ ṭhapeti to propose a resolution Vin iv.152 ■ Vin v.142 Vin v.217 (na c’ âpi ñatti na ca pana kammavācā). This resolution is also called a ñattikamma: Vin ii.89 Vin iv.152; Vin v.116; AN i.99. Two kinds are distinguished viz. that at which the voting follows directly upon the motion, i.e. a ñatti-dutiya-kamma, & that at which the motion is put 3 times, & is then followed (as 4th item) by the decision, i.e. a ñ-catuttha-kamma. Both kinds are discussed at Vin i.56, Vin i.317 sq.; Vin ii.89; Vin iii.156; Vin iv.152; & passim. Cp. Divy 356: jñapticaturtha Cp. āṇatti, viññatti.;
Sk. jñapti, from jñāpayati, caus of jñā
etc.: see jānāti.
(nt.) knowledge, intelligence insight, conviction, recognition, opp. añāṇa avijjā, lack of k. or ignorance.
1.; Ñāṇa in the theory of cognition: it occurs in intensive couple-compounds with terms of sight as cakkhu (eye) & dassana (sight, view) e.g. in cakkhu-karaṇa ñāṇa-karaṇa “opening our eyes & thus producing knowledge” i.e. giving us the eye of knowledge (a mental eye) (see cakkhu, jānāti passati & cpd. ˚karaṇa): Bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhu-bhūto ñāṇa-bhūto (= he is one perfected in knowledge) MN i.111 = Nd ii.2353h; natthi hetu natthi paccayo ñāṇāya dassanāya ahetu apaccayo ñāṇaṃ dassanaṃ hoti “through seeing & knowing,” i.e. on grounds of definite knowledge arises the sure conviction that where there is no cause there is no consequence SN v.126. Cp. also the relation of diṭṭhi to ñāṇa. This implies that all things visible are knowable as well as that all our knowledge is based on empirical grounds yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ Nd ii.2353m; yaṃ ñāṇaṃ taṃ dassanaṃ, yaṃ dassanaṃ taṃ ñāṇaṃ Vin iii.91; ñāṇa + dassana (i.e. full vision) as one of the characteristics of Arahantship: see arahant ii.D. Cp BSk. jñānadarśana, e.g. Avs i.210.
2. Scope and
character of ñāṇa: ñ. as faculty of understanding is included in paññā (cp. wisdom = perfected knowledge) The latter signifies the spiritual wisdom which embraces the fundamental truths of morality & conviction (such as aniccaṃ anattā dukkhaṃ: Mil 42); whereas ñ. is relative to common experience (see Nd ii.2353 under cakkhumā, & on rel. of p. & ñ. Ps; i.59 sq.; 118 sq. ii.189 sq.) ■ Perception (saññā) is necessary to the forming of ñāṇa, it precedes it (DN i.185); as sure knowledge ñ. is preferable to saddhā (S iv.298); at Vin iii.91 the definition of ñ. is given with tisso vijjā (3 kinds of knowledge); they are specified at Nd ii.266 as aṭṭhasamāpatti-ñāṇa (consisting in the 8 attainments, viz jhāna & its 4 succeeding developments), pañc’ abhiññā (the 5 higher knowledges, see paññā & abhi˚), micchā (false k. or heresy). Three degrees of k. are distinguished at DN-a i.100, viz. sāvaka-pāramī-ñāṇa, paccekabuddha˚ sabbaññuta˚ (highest k. of a relig. student k. of a wise man, & omniscience). Four objects of k (as objects of truth or sammādiṭṭhi) are enum;d as dhamme ñāṇaṃ, anvaye ñ., paricchede ñ., sammuti ñ at DN iii.226, DN iii.277; other four as dukkhe ñ. (dukkha-samudaye ñ., nirodhe ñ., magge ñ. (i.e. the knowledge of the paṭicca-samuppāda) at DN iii.227; Pts i.118 Vb 235 (= sammādiṭṭhi). Right knowledge (or truth is contrasted with false k. (micchā-ñāṇa = micchādiṭṭhi): SN v.384; MN ii.29; AN ii.222; AN v.327; Vb 392. 3. Ñāṇa in application: (a) Vin i.35; DN ii.155 (opp pasāda); SN i.129 (cittamhi susamāhite ñāṇamhi vuttamānamhi); ii.60 (jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan ti ñ.: see ñ-vatthu); AN i.219 (on precedence of either samādhi or ñ.); Snp 378, Snp 789, Snp 987 (muddhani ñāṇaṃ tassa na vijjati), 1078 (diṭṭhi, suti, ñ.: doctrine, revelation personal knowledge, i.e. intelligence; differently expl at Nd ii.266), 1113; Pv iii.51 (Sugatassa ñ. is asādhāraṇaṃ) Pts i.194 sq.; Pts ii.244; Vb 306 sq. (ñ-vibhanga) 328 sq. (kammassakataṃ ñ.); Ne 15 sq.; 161 (+ ñeyya) 191 (id.) ■ (b) ñāṇaṃ hoti or uppajjati knowledge comes to (him) i.e. to reason, to arrive at a conclusion (with iti = that… ) SN ii.124 = SN iii.28 (uppajjati) DN iii.278 (id.); AN ii.211≈; iv.75; v.195; SN iii.154. See also arahant ii.D ■ (c) Var. attributes of ñ.: anuttariya AN v.37; aparapaccayā (k. of the non-effect of causation through lack of cause) SN ii.17, SN ii.78; SN iii.135 SN v.179, SN v.422 sq. (= sammādiṭṭhi), same as ahetu-ñāṇa SN v.126; asādhāraṇa (incomparable, uncommon k. AN iii.441; Pv-a 197; akuppa DN iii.273; ariya AN iii.451 pariyodāta SN i.198; bhiyyosomatta SN iii.112; yathā bhūtaṃ (proper, definite, right k.) (concerning kāya etc.) SN v.144; AN iii.420; AN v.37 ■ (d) knowledge of about or concerning, consisting in or belonging to, is expressed either by loc. or-˚ (equal to subj. or obj. gen.)-(a) with loc.: anuppāde ñ. DN iii.214, DN iii.274; anvaye DN iii.226, DN iii.277; kāye DN iii.274; khaye DN iii.214, DN iii.220 (āsavānaṃ; cp. MN i.23, MN i.183, MN i.348; MN ii.38), 275; SN ii.30 Ne 15; cutûpapāte DN iii.111, DN iii.220; dukkhe (etc. D iiii.227; SN ii.4; SN v.8, SN v.430; dhamme DN iii.226; SN ii.58 nibbāne SN ii.124 (cp. iv.86) ■ (β) as-˚: anāvaraṇa˚ DN-a i.100; ariya SN i.228; AN iii.451; khanti Pts i.106 jātissara Ja i.167; cutûpapāta MN i.22, MN i.183, MN i.347; MN ii.38 etc.; ceto-pariya DN iii.100, & ˚pariyāya S; v.160 dibbacakkhu Pts i.114; dhammaṭṭhiti SN ii.60, SN ii.124; Pts i.50; nibbidā Pts i.195; pubbe-nivāsânusati MN i.22 MN i.248, MN i.347; MN ii.38, etc.; Buddha˚ Nd ii.2353; Pts i.133 Pts ii.31, Pts ii.195; DN-a i.100; sabbaññuta Pts i.131 sq.; DN-a i.99 sq.; Pv-a 197; sekha SN ii.43, SN ii.58, SN ii.80, & asekha SN iii.83 ■ (e) aññāṇa wrong k., false view, ignorance untruth SN i.181; SN ii.92; SN iii.258 sq.; SN v.126; AN ii.11; Snp 347, Snp 839; Pts i.80; Pp 21; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061; see avijjā & micchādiṭṭhi.;
-indriya the faculty of cognition or understanding Dhs 157; -ūpapanna endowed with k. Snp 1077 (= Nd ii.266b ˚upeta); -karaṇa (adj.) giving (right) understanding enlightening, in combn w. cakkhukaraṇa (giving (in)-sight, cp. “your eyes shall be opened and ye shall be knowing good and evil” Gen. 35): kusalavitakkā anandha-karaṇā cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ Iti 82; f ■ ī (of majjhimā-paṭipadā) SN iv.331; -cakkhu the eye of k Pv-a 166; -jāla the net of k., in phrase ñāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭha coming within the net, i.e. into the range of one’s intelligence or mental eye (clear sight) Dhp-a i.26 Dhp-a ii.37, Dhp-a ii.58, Dhp-a ii.96; Dhp-a iii.171, Dhp-a iii.193; Dhp-a iv.61; Vv-a 63; -dassana “knowing and seeing,” “clear sight,” i.e. perfect knowledge; having a vision of truth, i.e. recognition of truth, philosophy, (right) theory of life, all-comprising knowledge. Defined as tisso vijjā (see above 2) at Vin iv.26; fully discussed at DN-a i.220, cp. also def. at Pts ii.244 ■ Vin ii.178. (parisuddha˚; + ājīva, dhammadesanā veyyākaraṇa); iii.90 sq.; v.164, 197; DN i.76≈(following after the jhānas as the first step of paññā, see paññā-sampadā); iii.134, 222 (˚paṭilābha) 288 (˚visuddhi); MN i.195 sq.; 202 sq., 482; ii.9, 31 Ne 17, Ne 18, Ne 28; see also vimutti˚; -dassin one who possesses perfect k. Snp 478; -patha the path of k. Snp 868; -phusanā experience, gaining of k. Dhp-a i.230 -bandhu an associate or friend of k. Snp 911; -bhūta in comb” w. cakkhubhūta, having become seeing knowing, i.e. being wise SN ii.255; SN iv.94; AN v.226 sq. -vatthūni (pl.) the objects or items of (right) knowledge which means k. of the paṭiccasamuppāda or causal connection of phenomena. As 44 (i.e. 4 X 11 all constituents except avijjā, in analogy to the 4 parts of the ariyasaccāni) SN ii.56 sq., as 77 (7 X 11) SN ii.59 sq. discussed in extenso at Vb 306
344 (called ñāṇavatthu); -vāda talk about (the attainment of supreme knowledge DN iii.13 sq.; AN v.42 sq.; -vippayutta disconnected with k. Dhs 147, Dhs 157, Dhs 270; -vimokkha emancipation through k. Pts ii.36, Pts ii.42; -visesa distinction of k., superior k. Pv-a 196; -sampayutta associated with k Dhs 1, Dhs 147, Dhs 157, etc.; Vb 169 sq., 184, 285 sq., 414 sq.
from jānāti. See also jānana. *gené, as in Gr. γν ̈ω σις (cp. gnostic), γνώμη; Lat. (co)gnitio; Goth kunpi; Ogh. kunst; E. knowledge
(adj.) in pañca˚ having five truths (of samādhi) DN iii.278.
(adj.) knowing, one who is possessed of (right) knowledge SN ii.169; AN ii.89 (sammā˚); iv.340 ■ aññāṇin not knowing, unaware Vv-a 76.
known, well-known experienced, brought to knowledge, realized. In Nd ii.s. v. constantly expl. by tulita tirita vibhūta vibhāvita which series is also used as expln. of diṭṭha & vidita A; v.195; Ja i.266; Snp 343 (+ yasassin); Mil 21 (id.)- aññāta not known, unknown Vin i.209; MN i.430; SN ii.281; Dhp-a i.208.
pp. of jānāti = Gr. γνωτός, Lat. (g)notus; ajñāta (P. aññāta) = α ̓́γνωτος = ignotus
a relation, relative, kinsman Vin ii.194; MN ii.67; Dhp 43; Snp 263 (= Kp-a 140 ñāyante amhākaṃ ime ti ñātakā), 296, 579; Pv ii.14 (Minayeff, but Hardy ˚ika); Pv-a 19, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 62, Pv-a 69; DN-a i.90.
for *ñātika from ñāti
a relation, relative (= mātito pitito ca sambandhā Pv-a 25; = bandhū Pv-a 86; specialized as ˚sālohitā, see below). Pl. ñātayo (Pv i.43; Kp-a 209 Kp-a 214) and ñātī (M ii.73; Kp-a 210, cp. 213; acc. also ñātī Pv i.67); Snp 141; Dhp 139, Dhp 204, Dhp 288; Ja ii.353; Pv i.53, 122; ii.313, 67 ■ Discussed in detail with regard to its being one of the 10 paḷibodhā at Vism 94.
-kathā (boastful) talk about relatives DN i.7≈ (cp DN-a i.90); -gata coming into (the ties of) relationship Ja vi.307 (˚gataka ib. 308); -ghara the paternal home Ja i.52; -dhamma the duties of relatives Pv i.512 (= ñātīhi ñātīnaṃ kattabba-karaṇaṃ Pv-a 30); -parivatta the circle of relations DN i.61; MN i.267; Pp 57≈ -peta a deceased relation Pv i.54; -majjhagata (adj.) in the midst of one’s relations Pp 29; -mittā (pl.) friends & relatives Dhp 219; Ja iii.396; Pv i.126; -vyasana misfortune of relatives (opp. ˚sampada) DN iii.235; enum as one of the general misfortunes under dukkha (see Nd ii.304F); -saṅgha the congregation of kinsmen, the clan AN i.152; Snp 589; -sālohita a relation by blood (contrasted with friendship: mittāmaccā Snp p.104), often with ref. to the deceased: petā ñ-sālohitā the spirits of deceased blood-relations MN i.33; AN v.132, AN v.269; Pv-a 27 Pv-a 28; -sineha the affection of relationship Pv-a 29; -hetusampatti a blessing received through the kinsmen Pv-a 27.
see janati; cp. Sk. jñāti, Gr. γνωτός, Lat. cognatus, Goth. knops
to make known, to explain, to announce Ja ii.133. Cp. jānāpeti āṇāpeti.;
Caus. of jānāti, cp. also ñatti
1. method, truth, system, later = logic: ˚gantha book on logic Dāvs iii.41.
2. fitness right manner, propriety, right conduct, often appld to the “right path” (ariyamagga = ariyañāya Vin i.10) DN iii.120; SN v.19, SN v.141, SN v.167 sq., 185; AN ii.95 AN iv.426; AN v.194; Dhp i.249; ariya ñ. SN ii.68; SN v.387; the causal law SN v.388; = kalyāṇa-kusala-dhammatā AN ii.36; used in apposition with dhamma and kusala DN ii.151; MN ii.181, MN ii.197; is replaced herein by sacca SN i.240; = Nibbāna at Vism 219, Vism 524; ñ ■ paṭipanna walking in the right path SN v.343; AN ii.56; AN iii.212, AN iii.286 AN v.183. -Nu
Sk. nyāya = ni + i
(-ññū) (adj ■ suffix) knowing, recognizing, acknowledging, in ughaṭita˚, kata˚, kāla˚, khaṇa˚, matta˚, ratta˚, vara˚ vipacita˚, veda˚, sabba˚, etc. (q.v.)-fem. abstr. ˚ñutā in same combinations.
Sk ■ jña, from jānāti, *gn: cp. P. gū → Sk. ga
(?) (adv.) part of sound Ja i.287 (ṭan ti saddo).
Ṭh.
(˚ṭṭha) (adj ■ suffix) standing, as opposed to either lying down or moving; located, being based on, founded on (e.g. appa˚ based on little DN i.143): see kappa˚ (lasting a k.), kūṭa˚ (immovable) gaha˚ (founding a house, householder), dhamma˚, nava˚ vehāsa˚ (= vihan-ga) ■ (n.) a stand i.e. a place for goṭṭha a stable.
from tiṭṭhati
(nt.) 1. setting up, placing, founding; establishment, arrangement, position Vin v.114; Ja i.99 (aggha fixing prices); Mil 352 (pāda˚); DN-a i.294; (= vidhārite); Pv-a 5 (kulavaṃsa˚).
2. letting alone, omission suspension, in pāṭimokkha˚ Vin ii.241.
(f.) 1. arrangement DN-a i.294.
2. application of mind, attention Pp 18, Vism 278 (= appanā).
1. placed, put down; set up, arranged, often simply pleonastic for finite verb (= being): saṃharitvā ṭh. being folded up Ja i.265 (cp similar use of gahetvā c. ger.): mukkhe ṭh. Ja vi.366 ˚sankāra (dustheap) Pv-a 82; pariccajane ṭh. appointed for the distribution of gifts Pv-a 124.
2. suspended left over, set aside Vin ii.242 (pāṭimokkha).
pp. of ṭhapeti
to place, set up, fix, arrange, establish; appoint to (c. loc.); to place aside, save, put by, leave out Vin ii.32 (pavāraṇaṃ), 191 (ucce & nīce ṭhāne to place high or low), 276 (pavāraṇaṃ); v.193 (uposathaṃ), 196 (give advice); DN i.120 (leaving out discarding); Dhp 40 (cittaṃ ṭh. make firm) Ja i.62, Ja i.138 Ja i.223, Ja i.293 (except); ii.132 (puttaṭṭhāne ṭh. as daughter) Ja ii.159; Ja vi.365 (putting by); Vv-a 63 (kasiṃ ṭhapetvā except ploughing); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 20 (varaṃ ṭhapetvā denying a wish), 39, 114 (setting up); Mil 13 (ṭhapetvā setting aside, leaving till later) ■ inf. ṭhapetuṃ Vin ii.194; Pv-a 73 (saṃharitvā ṭh. to fold up: cp. ṭhapita); grd ṭhapetabba Ja ii.352 (rājaṭṭhāne); Pv-a 97; & ṭhapaniya (in pañha ṭh. a question to be left standing over i.e. not to be asked) DN iii.229 ■ ger. ṭhapetvā (leaving out, setting aside, excepting) also used as prep. c. acc (before or after the noun): with the omission of, besides except DN i.105 (ṭh. dve); Ja i.179 (maṃ but for me), 294 (tumhe ṭh.); ii.154 (ekaṃ vaddhaṃ ṭh.); iv.142 (ṭh maṃ); Vv-a 100 (ṭh. ekaṃ itthiṃ); Pv-a 93 (ṭh. maṃ) Cp. BSk. sthāpayitvā “except” Avs ii.111 ■ Caus ṭhapāpeti to cause to be set up; to have erected, to put up Ja i.266; Dhp-a ii.191.
Caus. of tiṭṭhati
(ṭṭhāna) (nt.) -I. Connotation As one of the 4 iriyāpathā (behaviours) 1. contrasted (a) as standing position with sitting or reclining (b) as rest with motion; 2. by itself without particular characterization as location.
II. Meanings-(1) Literal: place, region, locality abode, part (-˚ of, or belonging to)-(a) cattāri ṭhānāni dassanīyāni four places (in the career of Buddha) to be visited DN ii.140 = AN ii.120; vāse ṭhāne gamane Snp 40 (expl. by Snp-a 85 as mahā-upaṭṭhāna-sankhāte ṭhāne but may be referred to I. 1 (b)); ṭhānā cāveti to remove from one’s place Snp 442; Ja iv.138; Pv-a 55 (spot of the body) ■ (b) kumbha˚ (the “locality of the pitcher, i.e. the well) q.v.; arañña˚ (part of the forest) Ja i.253; Pv-a 32; nivāsana˚ (abode) Pv-a 76; phāsuka˚ Ja ii.103
Pv-a 13; vasana˚ Ja i.150, Ja i.278; Vv-a 66; virūhana˚ (place for the growing of… ) Pv-a 7; vihāra (place of his sojourn) Pv-a 22; saka˚ (his own abode) Ja ii.129; Pv-a 66 ■ (c) In this meaning it approaches the metaphorical sense of “condition, state” (see 2 & cp. gati in: dibbāni ṭhānāni heavenly regions SN i.21; tidivaṃ SN i.96; saggaṃ ṭh. a happy condition Pv i.13; pitu gata the place where my father went (after death) Pv-a 38 Yamassa ṭh. = pettivasaya Pv-a 59 ■ (d) In its pregnant sense in combn with accuta & acala it represents the connotation I. 1 (b), i.e. perdurance, constancy i.e. Nibbāna Vv 51;4; Dhp 225.
2. Applied meanings (a) state, condition; also-˚ (in sg.) as collective-abstract suffix in the sense of being, behaviour (corresponding to E. ending hood, ion, or ing), where it resembles abṡtr formations in ˚tā & ˚ttaṃ (Sk. tā & tvaṃ), as lahuṭṭhāna = lahutā & collect. formations in ˚ti (Sk. daśati ten-hood; devatāti godhead, sarvatāti = P. sabbattaṃ comprehensiveness; cp. also Lat. civitātem, juventūtem) ■ SN i.129 (condition) ii.27 (asabha˚) = MN i.69; SN iii.57 (atasitāyaṃ fearless state): AN ii.118 sq. (four conditions); Ḍh 137 (dasannaṃ aññataraṃ th.˚ nigacchati he undergoes one of the foll. ten conditions, i.e. items of affliction, expld at Dhp-a iii.70 with kāraṇa “labours”), 309 (states = dukkhakāraṇāni Dhp-a iii.482 conditions of suffering or ordeals); hattha-pasāraṇa-ṭṭhāna condition of outstretched hands Dhp-a i.298 loc. ṭhāne (-˚) when required, at the occasion of… Dhp-a i.89 (hasitabba˚, saṃvega˚, dātuṃ yutta˚); pubbe nibbatta -ṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya “since the state (or the time) of his former birth” Pv-a 100 ■ vibhūsanaṭṭhāna ornamentation, decoration, things for adornment DN i.5; Snp 59 (DN-a i.77 superficially: ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ; Snp-a 112 simply vibhūsā eva v-ṭṭhānaṃ); jūta-pamāda˚ (gambling & intoxication) DN i.6 (cp. expl. at Kp-a 26); gata˚ & āgata˚; (her) going coming Ja iii.188 ■ pariccāga˚ distribution of gifts Pv-a 124 ■ (b) (part = ) attribute, quality, degree aggasāvaka˚ (degrees of discipleship) Vv-a 2; esp. in set of 10 attributes, viz. rūpa (etc. 1
5), āyu, vaṇṇa sukha, yasa, ādhipateyya DN iii.146; SN iv.275; Pv ii.958 also collectively [see (a)] as dasaṭṭhānaṃ SN i.193; out of these are mentioned as 4 attributes āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha bala at Vv 327; other ten at AN v.129 (pāsaṃsāni). (c) (counter-part = ) object (-˚ for), thing; item, point pl. grounds, ways, respects. With a numeral often = a (five)fold collection of… SN iv.249 sq. (5 objects or things, cp. Ger. fünferlei); AN iii.54 sq. (id.), 60 sq. 71 sq.; etehi tīhi ṭhānehi on these 3 grounds Dhp 224 manussā tīhi ṭhānehi bahuṃ puññaṃ pasavanti: kāyena vācāya manasā (in 3 ways, qualities or properties A 151 sq.; cp. ii.119 sq. (= saṃvutaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi Dhp 391); catuhi ṭhānehi in Com. equals catuhi ākārehi or kāraṇehi pāmujjakaraṇaṃ ṭh. (object) Snp 256; ekaccesu ṭhānesu sameti ekaccesu na sameti “I agree in certain points, but not in others” DN i.162; kankhaniya doubtful point SN iv.350, SN iv.399 ■ n’ atthi aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ no other means, nothing else Dhp-a ii.90; agamanīya something not to be done, not allowed Vv-a 72; cp. also kamma˚ ■ (d) (standpoint = ) ground for (assumption) reason, supposition, principle, esp. a sound conclusion logic, reasonableness (opp. a˚ see 4): garayhaṃ th. āgacchati “he advocates a faulty principle” DN i.161 catuhi ṭh. paññāpeti (four arguments) SN iii.116; SN iv.380 ṭhāna-kusala accomplished in sound reasoning SN iii.61 sq (satta˚); AN ii.170 sq. Also with aṭṭhāna-kusala: see below 4.
III. Adverbial use of some cases acc. ṭhānaṃ: ettakaṃ ṭh. even a little bit Dhp-a i.389 ■ abl. ṭhānaso: in combn w. hetuso with reason & cause, causally conditioned [see 2 (d)] S; v.304; AN iii.417; AN v.33; Ne 94 (ñāṇa); abs. without moving (see I. 1 (b) & cp. Lat statim) i.e. without an interval or a cause (of change) at once, immediately, spontaneously, impromptu (cp cpd.˚ uppatti) SN i.193; SN v.50, SN v.321, SN v.381; Pv i.44 (= khaṇaṃ yeva Pv-a 19) ■ loc. ṭhāne instead = like, as dhītu ṭhāne ṭhapesi he treats her like a daughter Vv-a 209 puttaṭṭhāne as a son Ja ii.132.
IV. Contrasted with negation of term (ṭhāna & aṭṭhāna) The meanings in this category are restricted to those mentioned above under 1 [esp. 1 (c)] & 2 (d), viz. the relations of place → not place (or wrong place, also as proper time & wrong time), i.e. somewhere → nowhere and of possibility → impossibility (truth → falsehood) (a) ṭhānaṃ upagacchati (pathaviyā) to find a (resting place on the ground, to stay on the ground (by means of the law of attraction and gravitation) Mil 255; opp. na ṭhānaṃ upa˚ to find no place to rest, to go into nothingness Mil 180, Mil 237, Mil 270 ■ (b) ṭhānaṃ vijjati there is a reason, it is logically sound, it is possible DN i.163 DN i.175; MN iii.64; Pts ii.236 sq.; cp. Mvu ii.448; opp na etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati it is not possible, feasible, plausible logically correct Vin ii.284; DN i.104, DN i.239; MN ii.10 MN iii.64; Mil 237; Ne 92 sq ■ (c) aṭṭhānaṃ an impossibility Snp 54 (aṭṭhāna, with elision of ṃ); aṭṭhāne at the wrong time Ja i.256; ṭhāna is that one of the gatis which is accessible to human influence, as regards gifts of relief or sacrifice (this is the pettivisaya), whilst aṭṭhāna applied to the other 4 gatis (see gati) Pv-a 27 sq. In cpd. ṭhānāṭhāna-gata it means referring or leading to good & bad places (gatis): of sabbe khayadhammā (i.e. keci saggûpagā keci apāyûpagā) Ne 94 In comb;n apucchi nipuṇe pañhe ṭhānâṭhānagate (Mil 1) it may mean either questions concerning possibilities & impossibilities or truths & falsehoods, or questions referring to happy & unhappy states (of existence); ṭhānâṭhāna-ñāṇa is “knowledge of correct & faulty conclusions” Ne 94, cp. Kv 231 sq.; the same combn occurs with ˚kusala ˚kusalatā “accomplished or skilled (& skill) in understanding correct or faulty conclusions” DN iii.212 (one of the ten powers of the Buddha); MN iii.64; Dhs 1337, Dhs 1338 (trsl. by Mrs Rh. D. on p. 348 Dhs. trsl. as “skill in affirming or negating causal conjuncture”). In the same sense ṭhānaṃ ṭhānato pajānāti (& aṭṭhānaṃ aṭṭhānato p.) to draw a logical inference from that which is a proper ground for inference (i.e. which is logical) S; v.304; MN i.69 sq. = AN iii.417; AN v.33.
-uppatti arising instantaneously (see ṭhānaso, above III.) Vv-a 37; Ja vi.308 (˚kāraṇavindana finding a means right on the spot); -ka (adj.) on the spot, momentary spontaneous Ja vi.304.
Vedic sthāna, sthā, see tiṭṭhati; cp. Sk. sthāman Gr. σταχμίς, Lat. stamen
(adj.) standing, having a certain position, founded on or caused by (-˚) Vin ii.194 (-nīca˚) AN i.264 (chanda-rāga-dhamma˚). See also under tiṭṭhati.
grd. of tiṭṭhati
(adj.) at Mil 201 “one who gains his living or subsists on” (instr.) is doubtful reading.
(adj.-n.) standing, being in, being in a state of (-˚), staying with, dependent on (with gen.) pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin “being in a state of one to whom it has arisen,” i.e. one who has got the idea of… or one who imagines SN iii.3 sq.; arūpa-ṭṭhāyin Iti 62 Yamassa ṭhāyino being under the rule of Yama Pv i.119.
from tiṭṭhati
standing, i.e. (see ṭhāna I) either upright (opp nisinna, etc.), or immovable, or being, behaving in general. In the latter function often (with ger. pleonastic for finite verb (cp. ṭhapita) ■ resting in abiding in (-˚ or with loc.); of time: lasting, enduring fig. steadfast, firm, controlled: amissīkatam ev’ assa cittaṃ hoti, ṭhitaṃ ānejjappattaṃ AN iii.377 = AN iv.404 tassa ṭhito va kāyo hoti thitaṃ cittaṃ (firm, unshaken SN v.74 = Nd ii.475 B2 ■ DN i.135 (khema˚); AN i.152; Snp 250 (dhamme); Iti 116 sq. (ṭh. caranto nisinna sayāna); Ja i.167; Ja i.279; Ja iii.53 ■ with ger.: nahātvā ṭh. & nivāsetvā ṭh. (after bathing & dressing) Ja i.265 dārakaṃ gahetvā th. Ja vi.336. Cp. saṇ˚.
-atta self-controlled, composed, steadfast DN i.57 (+ gatatta yatatta; expl. at DN-a i.168 by suppatiṭṭhitacitto); SN i.48; SN iii.46; AN ii.5; AN iv.93, AN iv.428; Snp 370 (+ parinibbuta), 359 (id. expl. at Snp-a 359 by lokadhammehi akampaneyya-citta); Pp 62; -kappin (adj.) (for kappa-*ṭhitin) standing or waiting a whole kappa Pp 13 (expl. at Pp A 187 by ṭhitakappo assa atthī ti; kappaṃ ṭhapetuṃ samattho ti attho); -citta (adj.) of controlled heart (= ˚atta) DN ii.157≈; -dhamma (adj.) everlasting eternal (of mahāsamudda, the great ocean) Vin ii.237; AN iv.198.
pp. of tiṭṭhati = Gr. στατός, Lat. status, Celt. fossad (firm)
(adj.) = ṭhita in meaning of standing, standing up, erect Vin ii.165; DN ii.17 = DN iii.143; MN ii.65; Ja i.53, Ja i.62; Vv-a 64.
(f.) the fact of standing or being founded on (-˚) SN ii.25 = AN i.286 (dhamma˚ + dhamma-niyāmatā).
(nt.) standing, being placed; being appointed to, appointment Ja i.124.
(f.) state (as opposed to becoming), stability, steadfastness; duration, continuance immobility; persistence, keeping up (of c. gen.); condition of (-˚) relation SN ii.11; SN iii.31; SN iv.14 SN iv.104, SN iv.228 sq., AN v.96; Vism 32 (kāyassa); in jhāna SN iii.264, SN iii.269 sq., saddhammassa (prolongation of) SN ii.225; A i.59; ii.148; iii.177 (always with asammosa & anantaradhāna), cp. MN ii.26 sq ■ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa (state or condition of) SN ii.124; Pts i.50 sq ■ n atthi dhuvaṃ ṭhiti: the duration is not for long MN ii.64 = Dhp 147 = Thag 769 = Vv-a 77, cp. Thig 343 (= Thag-a 241); Snp 1114 (viññāṇa˚) Pv-a 198 (position, constellation), 199 (jīvita˚ as remainder of life, cp. ṭhitakappin) Dhs 11≈(cittassa), 19≈(+ āyu = subsistence).
-bhāgiya connected with duration, enduring, lasting permanent (only appl. to samādhi) DN iii.277; AN iii.427 Ne 77; cp. samādhissa ṭhitikusala “one who is accomplished in lasting concentration” AN iii.311, AN iii.427; AN iv.34.
from tiṭṭhati Sk. sthiti, Gr. στάσις, Lat. statio (cp. stationary), Ohg. stat, Ags. stede
(adj.) standing, lasting, enduring; existing, living on (-˚), e.g. āhāra˚ dependent on food Kp iii. (see āhāra); nt. adv. ṭhitikaṃ constantly Vv-a 75.
Der. fr. ṭhiti
see patiṭṭhīyati.
a yellow fly, gadfly (orig. “the bite”) Nd ii.268 (= pingala-makkhika, same at Ja iii.263; Snp-a 101); usually in combn with other biting or stinging sensations, as ˚siriṃsapa Snp 52, & freq. in cpd; ḍaṃsa-makasa-vāt’ ātapa-siriṃsapa-samphassa MN i.10; AN ii.117, AN ii.143 = AN iii.163; AN iii.388; AN v.15; Vin i.3; Nd ii.s. v. (enumd under var. kinds of dukkhā); Vism 31 (here expld as ḍaṃsana-makkhikā or andha-makkhikā).
see ḍasati
bitten Pv-a 144.
pp. of daṃśati or dasati to bite
(& ḍaṃsati) to bite (esp. of flies snakes, scorpions, etc.), pres. ḍasati MN i.519; pot ḍaseyya MN i.133; AN iii.101 = AN iv.320 (where ḍaṃs˚) ḍaṃseyya AN iii.306; ppr. ḍasamāna Ja i.265 (gīvāya) fut. ḍaṃsayissāmi Ja vi.193 (v.l. ḍass˚); aor. aḍaṃsi Vv 808 (= Sk. adānkṣīt), ḍaṃsi Pv-a 62 & ḍasi Ja i.502; Dhp-a ii.258; inf. ḍasituṃ Ja i.265; ger. ḍasitvā Ja i.222 Ja ii.102; Ja iii.52, Ja iii.538; Dhp-a i.358 ■ Pp. daṭṭha; cp. also dāṭhā & saṇḍāsa.;
cp. Sk. da ati & daṃśati, Gr.; δάκνω, Ohg. zanga, Ags. tonge, E. tong
(& dahati) to burn (trs.) consume, torment MN i.365; MN ii.73
A v.110; Ja ii.44 (aor. 3 sg. med. adaḍḍha = Sk. adagdha) Dhp 31, Dhp 71, Dhp 140; Mil 45, Mil 112 (cauterize). Pp. daḍḍha -Pass. ḍayhati SN i.188 (kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi cittam me pariḍayhati); ib. (mahārāga: mā ḍayhittho punappunaṃ) MN ii.73; SN iii.150 (mahāpaṭhavī ḍayhati vinassati na bhavati) esp. in ppr. ḍayhamāna consumed with or by, burning, glowing Dhp 371; Iti 23 (˚ena kāyena cetasā Pv i.1110, 122; ii.23) (of a corpse being cremated) Pv-a 63, Pv-a 152 (vippaṭisārena: consumed by remorse) See also similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. Cp. uḍ˚.
Sk. dahati, pp. dagdha, cp. dāha, nidāgha (summer heat); Gr. τέφρα ashes, Lat. favilla (glowing) cinders, Goth. dags, Ger. tag. E. day = hot time
(m. nt.) green food, eatable herbs, vegetable Vin i.246 (˚rasa), 248; Thig 1; Vv 206 (v.l. sāka); Vv-a 99 (= taṇḍuleyyakādi-sākavyañjana).
Sk. sāka (nt.) on ś → ḍ cp. Sk. sākinī → dākinī
burning, glow, heat DN i.10 (disā˚ sky-glow = zodiacal light?); MN i.244; Pv-a 62; Mil 325. Sometimes spelt dāha, e.g. AN i.178 (aggi˚) Sdhp 201 (id.);- dava˚; a jungle fire Vin ii.138; Ja i.461.
Sk. dāha, see ḍahati
to fly; only in simile “seyyathā pakkhī sakuṇo yena yen’ eva ḍeti…” DN i.71 = MN i.180, MN i.269 = AN ii.209 Pp 58; Ja v.417. Cp. dayati & dīyati, also uḍḍeti.;
T.
Sk. *ḍayate = dīyati; ḍayana flying. The Dhtp gives the root as ḍī or ḷī with def. of “ākāsa-gamana”.
as composition-consonant (see Müller pp. 62, 63, on euphonic cons.) especially with agge (after, from), in ajja-t-agge, tama-t-agge, dahara-t-agge AN v.300; cp deva ta-t-uttari for tad-uttari AN iii.287, AN iii.314, AN iii.316.
base of demonstr. pron. for nt., in oblique cases of m. & f., in demonstr. adv. of place & time (see also sa).; 1. Cases: nom. sg. nt. tad (older) Vin i.83; Snp 1052; Dhp 326; Mil 25 & taṃ (cp. yaṃ, kiṃ) Snp 1037, Snp 1050; Ja iii.26; acc. m. taṃ Ja ii.158, f. taṃ Ja vi.368; gen. tassa f. tassā (Snp 22, Snp 110; Ja i.151); instr. tena, f. tāya (J iii. 188); abl. tasmā (Ja i.167); tamhā Snp 291, Snp 1138 (J iii.26) & tato (usually as adv.) (Snp 390); loc. tasmiṃ (Ja i.278), tamhi (Dhp 117); tahiṃ (adv.) (Pv i.57) tahaṃ (adv.) (Ja i.384; Vv-a 36); pl. nom. m. te (J ii.129), f. tā (J ii.127), nt. tāni (Snp 669, Snp 845); gen. tesaṃ, f. tāsaṃ (Snp 916); instr. tehi, f. tāhi (J ii.128) loc. tesu, f. tāsu (Snp 670) ■ In composition (Sandhi both tad-& taṃ-are used with consecutive phonetic changes (assimilation), viz. (a); tad˚;: (α) in subst function: tadagge henceforth DN i.93 taduṭṭhāya Dhp-a iii.344; tadūpiya (cp. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78 = tadopya (see discussion under opeti), but cp. Sk. tadrūpa Divy
543 & tatrupāya. It is simply tad-upa-ka, the adj.; positive of upa, of which the compar ■ superlative is upama, meaning like this, i.e. of this or the same kind Also spelt tadūpikā (f.) (at Ja ii.160) agreeing with, agreeable pleasant Mil 9; tadatthaṃ to such purpose Snp-a 565 ■ With assimilation: taccarita; tapparāyaṇa Snp 1114; tappoṇa (= tad-pra-ava-nata) see taccarita tabbisaya (various) Pv-a 73; tabbiparīta (different Vism 290; Dhp-a iii.275; tabbiparītatāya in contrast to that Vism 450 ■ (β) as crude form (not nt.) originally only in acc. (nt.) in adj. function like tad-ahan this day then felt as euphonic d, esp. in forms where similarly the euphonic t is used (ajja-t-agge). Hence ta- is abstracted as a crude (adverbial) form used like any other root in composition. Thus: tad-ah-uposathe on this day’s fast-day = to-day (or that day) being Sunday DN i.47; Snp p.139 (expld as tam-ah-uposathe, uposatha-divase ti at Snp-a 502); tadahe on the same day Pv-a 46; tadahū (id.) Ja v.215 (= tasmiṃ chaṇa-divase) tad-aṅga for certain, surely, categorical (orig. concerning this cp. kimanga), in tadanga-nibbuta SN iii.43 tadaṅga-samatikkama Nd ii.203; tadaṅga-vikkhambhana-samuccheda Vism 410; tadaṅga-pahāna Dhs-a 351; Snp-a 8; tadangena AN iv.411 ■ (b) tan˚;: (α) as subst.: tammaya (equal to this, up to this) Snp 846 (= tapparāyana Nd ii.206); AN i.150 ■ (β) Derived from acc. use (like a β) as adj. is tankhaṇikā (fr. taṃ khaṇaṃ Vin iii.140 (= muhuttikā) ■ (γ) a reduced form of taṃ is to be found as ta˚ in the same origin & application as ta-d-(under a; β) in combn ta-y-idaṃ (for taṃidaṃ → taṃ-idaṃ → ta-idaṃ → ta-y-idaṃ) where y. takes the place of the euphonic consonant. Cp. in application also Gr. τοϋτο & ταϋτα, used adverbially as therefore (orig. just that) Snp 1077; Pv i.33; Pv-a 2, Pv-a 16 (= taṃ idaṃ), 76. The same ta˚ is to be seen in tāhaṃ Vv 8315 (= taṃ-ahaṃ), & not to be confused with tāhaṃ = te ahaṃ (see tvaṃ) ■ A similar comb;n is taṃyathā Mil 1 (this is how, thus, as follows) which is the Sk. form for the usual P. seyyathā (instead of ta-(y)-yathā, like ta-y-idaṃ); cp. Trenckner, P.M. p. 75 ■ A sporadic form for tad is tadaṃ Snp p.147 (even that, just that for tathaṃ?) ■ II. Application: 1. ta˚; refers or points back to somebody or something just mentioned or under discussion (like Gr. οὑτος, Lat. hic, Fr. ci in voici cet homme-ci, etc.): this, that, just this (or that), even this (or these). In this sense combd with api: te c’ âpi (even these) Snp 1058. It is also used to indicate something immediately following the statement of the speaker (cp. Gr. ο ̔́δε, E. thus): this now, esp. in adv. use (see below); taṃ kiṃ maññasi DN i.60; yam etaṃ pañhaṃ apucchi Ajita taṃ vadāmi te: Snp 1037; taṃ te pavakkhāmi (this now shall I tell you:) Snp 1050; tesaṃ Buddho vyākāsi (to those just mentioned answered B.) Snp 1127; te tositā (and they, pleased… ) ib. 1128.
2. Correlative use: (a) in rel. sentences with ya˚ (preceding ta˚): yaṃ ahaṃ jānāmi taṃ tvaṃ jānāsi “what I know (that) you know” DN i.88; yo nerayikānaṃ sattānaṃ āhāro tena so yāpeti “he lives on that food which is (characteristic of the beings in N.; or: whichever is the food of the N. beings, on this he lives” Pv-a 27 ■ (b) elliptical (with omission of the verb to be) yaṃ taṃ = that which (there is), what (is), whatever, used like an adj.; ye te those who, i.e. all (these), whatever: ye pana te manussā saddhā… te evam ahaṃsu… “all those people who were full of faith said” Vin ii.195; yena tena upāyena gaṇha “catch him by whatever means (you like),” i.e. by all means Ja ii.159; yaṃ taṃ kayirā “whatever he may do” Dhp 42.
3. Distributive and iterative use (cp. Lat. quisquis, etc.):… taṃ taṃ this & that, i.e. each one; yaṃ yaṃ passati taṃ taṃ pucchati whomsoever he sees (each one) he asks Pv-a 38; yaṃ yaṃ manaso piyaṃ taṃ taṃ gahetvā whatever… (all) that Pv-a 77; yo yo yaṃ yaṃ icchati tassa tassa taṃ taṃ adāsi “whatever anybody wished he gave to him” Pv-a 113. So with adv. of ta˚: tattha tattha here & there (freq.); tahaṃ tahaṃ id. Ja i.384; Vv-a 36 Vv-a 187; tato tato Snp 390 ■ (b) the same in disjunctivecomparative sense: taṃ… taṃ is this so & is this so (too) = the same as, viz. taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīraṃ is the soul the same as the body (opp. aññaṃ j. a. s.) A; v.193, etc (see jīva).
4. Adverbial use of some cases (locala temporalb, & modal;c): acc. taṃ (a) there (to): tad avasari he withdrew there DN ii.126, DN ii.156; (b) taṃ enaṃ at once, presently (= tāvad-eva) Vin i.127 (cp. Ved enā); (c) therefore (cp. kiṃ wherefore, why), that is why, now, then: SN ii.17; MN i.487; Snp 1110; Pv i.23 (= tasmā Pv-a 11 & 103); ii.716; cp. taṃ kissa hetu Nd ii.on jhāna ■ gen. tassa (c) therefore AN iv.333. instr. tena (a) there (direction = there to), always in correl. with yena: where-there, or in whatever direction here & there. Freq. in formula denoting approach to a place (often unnecessary to translate); e.g. yena Jīvakassa ambavanaṃ tena pāyāsi: where the Mangogrove of J. was, there he went = he went to the M. of J. DN i.49; yena Gotamo ten’ upasankama go where G is DN i.88; yena āvasathâgāraṃ ten’ upasankami DN ii.85 etc.; yena vā tena vā palāyanti they run here there AN ii.33; (c) so then, now then, therefore, thus (often with hi) Ja i.151, Ja i.279; Pv-a 60; Mil 23; tena hi DN ii.2; Ja i.266; Ja iii.188; Mil 19 ■ abl. tasmā (c) out of this reason, therefore Snp 1051, Snp 1104; Nd ii.279 (= taṃ kāraṇaṃ); Pv-a 11, Pv-a 103; tato (a) from there, thence Pv i.123; (b) then, hereafter Pv-a 39 ■ loc. tahiṃ (a) there (over there → beyond) Pv i.57; (c) = therefore Pv-a 25; tahaṃ (a) there; usually repeated: see above II. 3 (a) ■ See also tattha, tathā, tadā, tādi, etc.
Vedic tad, etc.; Gr. τόν τήν τό; Lat. is-te, tālis, etc.; Lith. tás tā; Goth. pata; Ohg. etc. daz; E. that
a kind of medicinal gum, enumerated with two varieties, viz. takapattī & takapaṇṇī under jatūni bhesajjāni at Vin i.201.
doubt; a doubtful view (often diṭṭhi, appl. like sammā˚, micchā-diṭṭhi), hair-splitting reasoning, sophistry (= itihītihaṃ Nd ii.151). Opp. to takka (= micchā-sankappo Vb 86, Vb 356) is dhammatakka right thought (:vuccati sammā-sankappo Nd ii.318; cp. Dhs 7, Dhs 298), DN i.16 (˚pariyāhata); MN i.68 (id.) Snp 209 (˚ṃ pahāya na upeti sankhaṃ) 885 (doubt), 886; Dhs 7, Dhs 21, Dhs 298 (+ vitakka, trsl. as “ratiocination” by Mrs. Rh. D.); Vb 86, Vb 237 (sammā˚) 356; Vism 189 See also vitakka.
-āgama the way of (right) thought, the discipline of correct reasoning Dāvs v.22; -āvacara as neg. atakkâvacarâ in phrase dhammā gambhīrā duddasā a˚ nipuṇā (views, etc.) deep, difficult to know, beyond logic (or sophistry: i.e. not accessible to doubt?), profound Vin i.4 = DN i.12 = SN i.136 = MN i.487. Gogerley trsl. “unattainable by reasoning,” Andersen “being beyond the sphere of thought”; -āsaya room for doubt Snp 972 -gahaṇa the thicket of doubt or sophistry Ja i.97 -vaḍḍhana increasing, furthering doubt or wrong ideas Snp 1084 (see Nd ii.269); -hetu ground for doubt (or reasoning?) AN ii.193 = Nd ii.151.
Sk. tarka doubt; science of logic (lit. “turning & twisting”) *treik, cp. Lat. tricae, intricare (to “trick,” puzzle), & also Sk. tarku bobbin, spindle, Lat torqueo (torture, turn)
(nt.) buttermilk (with 1/4 water), included in the five products from a cow (pañca gorasā) at Vin i.244 made by churning dadhi Mil 173; Ja i.340; Ja ii.363; Dhp-a ii.68 (takkâdi-ambila).
Should it not belong to the same root as takka1?
(nt.) thought, representation (of:-˚) Ja i.68 (ussāvabindu˚).
(= tat-kara) a doer thereof DN i.235, MN i.68; Dhp 19.
a robber, a thief Ja iv.432.
(nt.) a bulbous plant, a tuberose Ja iv.46, Ja iv.371 (biḷāli˚, expl. at 373 by takkala-kanda) = vi.578.
(f.) the tree Sesbania Aegyptiaca (a kind of acacia) Thig 297 (= dālika-laṭṭhi Thag-a 226).
(adj.) doubting, having wrong views, foolish; m. a sophist, a fool Ud 73; Ja i.97; Mil 248.
fr. takka1
(adj.-n.) thinking, reasoning, esp. sceptically; a sceptic DN i.16≈(takkī vīmaṃsī); MN i.520; DN-a i.106 (= takketvā vitakketvā diṭṭhi-gāhino etaṃ adhivacanaṃ), cp. pp. 114, 115 (takki-vāda).
fr. takka1
to think, reflect, reason, argue DN-a i.106; Dhs-a 142 ■ attānaṃ t. to have self-confidence, to trust oneself Ja i.273, Ja i.396, Ja i.468; Ja iii.233.
Denom. of tarka
a kind of insect or worm Vism 258. Reading at id. p. Kp-a 58 is kakkoṭaka.
is reading correct?
Bdellium, a perfume made from the berry of the kakkola plant Ja i.291; also as Npl. at Mil 359 (the Takola of Ptolemy; perhaps Sk. karkoṭa: Trenckner, Notes, p. 59).
Sk. kakkola & takkola
(nt.) the shrub Tabernaemontana coronaria, and a fragrant powder or perfume obtained from it, incense Vin i.203; Iti 68 (= Udānavarga p. 112, No. 8); Dhp 54 Dhp 55, Dhp 56 (candana + ); Ja iv.286; Ja vi.100 (the shrub) 173 (id.); Mil 338; Dāvs v.50; Dhp-a i.422 (tagara-mallikā two kinds of gandhā).
= tad + garuka, see taccarita.
affirmative particle (“ekaṃsena” DN-a i.236; ekaṃsa-vacana Ja v.66; ekaṃse nipāta Ja v.307) truly, surely, there now! Vin ii.126, Vin ii.297; DN i.85; MN i.207, MN i.463; MN iii.179; Ja v.65 (v.l. tagghā); Snp p.87.
tad + gha, cp. in-gha & Lat. ec-ce ego-met, Gr.; ἐγώ γε
(& taco nt.) 1. bark. - 2. skin, hide (similar to camma, denoting the thick outer skin, as contrasted with chavi, thin skin, see chavi & cp. Ja i.146).
1. bark: MN i.198, MN i.434, MN i.488; AN v.5.
2. skin: often used together with nahāru aṭṭhi (tendons & bones), to denote the outer appearance (framework) of the body, or that which is most conspicuous in emaciation: AN i.50 = Sdhp. 46; tacamaṃsâvalepana (+ aṭṭhī nahārusaṃyutta) Snp 194; Ja i.146 (where ˚vilepana); Snp-a 247; aṭṭhi-taca-mattâvasesasarīra “nothing but skin & bones” Pv-a 201. Of the cast-off skin of a snake: urago va jiṇṇaṃ tacaṃ jahāti Snp 1, same simile Pv i.121 (= nimmoka Pv-a 63)-kañcanasannibha-taca (adj.) of golden-coloured skin (a sign of beauty) Snp 551; Vv 302 = 323; Mil 75; Vv-a 9 ■ valita-tacatā a condition of wrinkled skin (as sign of age) Nd ii.252≈; Kp iii.; Kp-a 45; Sdhp 102.
-gandha the scent of bark Dhs 625; -pañcaka-kammaṭṭhāna the fivefold “body is skin,” etc, subject of kammaṭṭhāna-practice. This refers to the satipaṭṭhānā (kāye kāy’ ânupassanā:) see kāya I. (a) of which the first deals with the anupassanā (viewing) of the body as consisting of the five (dermatic) constituents of kesā lomā nakhā dantā, taco (hair of head, other hair, nails, teeth, skin or epidermis: see Kp iii.). It occurs in formula (inducing a person to take up the life of a bhikkhu): taca-p-kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhitvā taṃ pabbājesi Ja i.116; Dhp-a i.243; Dhp-a ii.87, Dhp-a ii.140, Dhp-a ii.242. Cp also Vism 353; Dhp-a ii.88; Snp-a 246, Snp-a 247; -pariyonaddha with wrinkled (shrivelled) skin (of Petas: as sign of thirst) Pv-a 172; -rasa the taste of bark Dhs 629 -sāra (a) (even) the best (bark, i.e.) tree SN i.70 = SN i.90; Iti 45 ■ (b) a (rope of) strong fibre Ja iii.204 (= veṇudaṇḍaka).
Vedic tvak (f.), gen. tvacaḥ
(adj.) in combn with tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabhāra freq. as formula, expressing: converging to this end, bent thereon, striving towards this (aim): Nd ii.under tad. The same combn with Nibbāna-ninna, N ■ poṇa, N ■ pabhāra freq. (see Nibbāna).
a carpenter, usually as ˚ka: otherwise only in cpd. ˚sūkara the carpenter-pig (= a boar, so called from felling trees), title & hero of Jātaka No. 492 (;iv.342 sq.). Cp. vaḍḍhakin.
Vedic takṣan, cp. taṣṭṛ, to takṣati (see taccheti), Lat. textor, Gr. τέκτων carpenter (cp. architect) τέξνη art
(adj.) true, real, justified, usually in combn w bhūta. bhūta taccha tatha, DN i.190 (paṭipadā: the only true & real path) S; v.229 (dhamma; text has tathā v.l. tathaṃ better); as bhūta t. dhammika (well founded and just) DN i.230. bhūta + taccha: AN ii.100 = Pp 50; Vv-a 72 ■ yathā tacchaṃ according to truth Snp 1096 which is interpreted by Nd ii.270: tacchaṃ vuccati amataṃ Nibbānaṃ, etc ■ (nt.) taccha a truth Snp 327- ataccha false, unreal, unfounded; a lie, a falsehood DN i.3 (abhūta + ); Vv-a 72 (= musā).
Der. fr. tathā + ya = tath-ya “as it is,” Sk. tathya
= taccha1. (a) a carpenter Dhp 80 (cp. Dhp-a ii.147); Mil 413. magga˚ a road-builder Ja vi.348-(b) = taccha-sūkara Ja iv.350 ■ (c) a class of Nāgas DN ii.258 ■ f. tacchikā a woman of low social standing (= veṇī, bamboo-worker) Ja v.306.
to build, construct; maggaṃ t. to construct or repair a road Ja vi.348.
fr. taccha1, cp. taccheti
to do wood-work, to square, frame, chip Ja i.201; Mil 372, Mil 383.
probably a denom. fr. taccha1 = Lat. texo to weave (orig. to plait, work together, work artistically) cp. Sk. taṣṭṛ architect = Lat. textor; Sk. takṣan, etc. Gr. τέξνη craft, handiwork (cp. technique), Ohg. dehsa hatchet. Cp. also orig. meaning of karoti & kamma.
“this like,” belonging to this, founded on this or that; on the ground of this (or these), appropriate, suitable; esp. in combn with vāyāma (a suitable effort as “causa movens”) AN i.207; Mil 53. Also with reference to sense-impressions, etc denoting the complemental sensation SN iv.215; MN i.190, MN i.191; Dhs 3–6 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 6 & Com. expl anucchavika) ■ Pv-a 203 (tajjassa pāpassa katattā by the doing of such evil, v.l. SS tassajjassa, may be a contraction of tādiyassa otherwise tādisassa); Note. The expln of Kern, Toev. ii.87 (tajja = tad + ja “arising from this”) is syntactically impossible.
tad + ya, cp. Sk. tadīya
(f.) threat, menace Ja ii.169; Vv 509; Vv-a 212 (bhayasantajjana).
from tajjeti
to be blamed or censured Vism 115 (a˚); (n.) censure, blame, scorn, rebuke. M 50th Sta Mil 365. As t. t. ˚kamma one of the sangha-kammas Vin i.49, Vin i.53, Vin i.143 sq., 325; ii.3 sq., 226, 230; AN i.99.
grd. of tajjeti
a linear measure, equal to 36 aṇu’s and of which 36 form one rathareṇu Vb-a 343; cp. Abhp 194 (tajjarī ).
threatened, frightened, scared; spurred or moved by (-˚) DN i.141 (daṇḍa˚, bhaya˚) Dhp 188 (bhaya˚); Pp 56. Esp. in combn maraṇabhaya˚; moved by the fear of death Ja i.150, Ja i.223; Pv-a 216.
pp. of tajjeti
to frighten threaten; curse, rail against Ja i.157, Ja i.158; Pv-a 55. Pp. tajjita ■ Caus. tajjāpeti to cause to threaten, to accuse Pv-a 23 (= paribhāsāpeti).
Caus. of tarjati, to frighten. Cp. Gr. τάρβος fright, fear, ταρβέω; Lat. torvus wild, frightful
declivity or side of a hill, precipice; side of a river or well, a bank Ja i.232, Ja i.303; Ja ii.315 (udapāna˚); iv.141; Snp-a 519; Dhp-a i.73 (papāta˚). See also talāka.
*tḷ, see tala & cp. tālu, also Lat. tellus
to rattle, shake, clatter; to grind or gnash one’s teeth; to fizz. Usually said of people in frenzy or fury (in ppr. ˚yanto or ˚yamāna) Ja i.347 (rosena) 439 (kodhena); ii.277 (of a bhikkhu kodhana “boiling with rage” like a “uddhane pakkhitta-loṇaṃ viya”); the latter trope also at Dhp-a iv.176; Dhp-a i.370 (aggimhi pakkhitta-loṇasakkharā viya rosena t.); iii.328 (vātâhata-tālapaṇṇaṃ viya) Vv-a 47, Vv-a 121 (of a kodhâbhibhūto; v.l. kaṭakaṭāyamāna), 206 (+ akkosati paribhāsati), 256. Cp. also kaṭakaṭāyati & karakarā.;
Onomatopoetic, to make a sound like taṭtaṭ. Root *kḷ (on ṭ for I̊ cp. taṭa for tala) to grind one’s teeth, to be in a frenzy. Cp. ciṭiciṭāyāti. See note on gala and kiṇakiṇāyati
a bowl for holding food, a flat bowl, porringer, salver Ja iii.10 (suvaṇṇa˚), 97, 121, 538 iv.281. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. taken into Tamil as taṭṭaṃ, cp. also Av. taśta. Morris (J.P.T.S. 1884, 80) compares Marathi tasta (ewer).
Etym. unknown
(f.) a (straw) mat Vin iv.40 (Bdhgh on this: teṭṭikaṃ (sic) nāma tālapaṇṇehi vā vākehi vā katataṭṭikā, p. 357); Ja i.141 (v.l. taddhika) Vism 97.
cp. kaṭaka
(*Sk. taṇḍula: dialectical] rice-grain, rice husked & ready for boiling; freq. combd with tila (q.v.) in mentioning of offerings, presentations, etc.: loṇaṃ telaṃ taṇḍulaṃ khādaniyaṃ sakaṭesu āropetvā Vin i.220, Vin i.238, Vin i.243, Vin i.249; talitaṇḍulâdayo Ja iii.53; Pv-a 105 ■ Vin i.244; AN i.130; Ja i.255; Ja iii.55, Ja iii.425 (taṇḍulāni metri causa); vi.365 (mūla˚ coarse r., majjhima medium r., kaṇikā the finest grain); Snp 295; Pp 32; Dhp-a i.395 (sāli-taṇḍula husked rice); DN-a i.93. Cp ut˚.
-ammaṇa a measure (handful?) of rice Ja ii.436 -dona a rice-vat or rice-bowl Dhp-a iv.15; -pāladvārā “doors (i.e. house) of the rice-guard” Npl. MN ii.185 -muṭṭhi a handful of rice Pv-a 131; -homa an oblation of rice DN i.9.
the plant Amaranthus polygonoides Vv-a 99 (enumd amongst various kinds of ḍāka).
cp. Sk. taṇḍulīya
(f.) lit drought, thirst; fig. craving, hunger for, excitement the fever of unsatisfied longing (c. loc.: kabaḷinkāre āhāre “thirst” for solid food SN ii.101 sq.; cīvare piṇḍapāte taṇhā = greed for Snp 339). Oppd to peace of mind (upekhā, santi) ■ A. Literal meaning: khudāya taṇhāya ca khajjamānā tormented by hunger & thirst Pv ii.15 (= pipāsāya Pv-a 69) ■ B. In its secondary meaning: taṇhā is a state of mind that leads to rebirth Plato puts a similar idea into the mouth of Socrates (Phaedo 458, 9). Neither the Greek nor the Indian thinker has thought it necessary to explain how this effect is produced. In the Chain of Causation (D ii. 34) we are told how Taṇhā arises-when the sense organs come into contact with the outside world there follow sensation and feeling, & these (if, as elsewhere stated, there is no mastery over them) result in Taṇhā In the First Proclamation (S; v.420 ff.; Vin i.10) it is said that Taṇhā, the source of sorrow, must be rooted out by the way there laid down, that is by the Aryan Path. Only then can the ideal life be lived. Just as physical thirst arises of itself, and must be assuaged got rid of, or the body dies; so the mental “thirst, arising from without, becomes a craving that must be rooted out, quite got rid of, or there can be no Nibbāna The figure is a strong one, and the word Taṇhā is found mainly in poetry, or in prose passages charged with religious emotion. It is rarely used in the philosophy or the psychology. Thus in the long Enumeration of Qualities (Dhs), Taṇhā occurs in one only out of the 1,366 sections (Dhs 1059), & then only as one of many subordinate phases of; lobha. Taṇhā binds a man to the chain of Saṃsāra, of being reborn & dying again again (2;b) until Arahantship or Nibbāna is attained taṇhā destroyed, & the cause alike of sorrow and of future births removed (2;c). In this sense Nibbāna is identical with “sabbupadhi-paṭinissaggo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho” (see Nibbāna).
1. Systematizations: The 3 aims of t. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚, that is craving for sensuous pleasure, for rebirth (anywhere but especially in heaven), or for no rebirth; cp. Vibhava These three aims are mentioned already in the First Proclamation (SN v.420; Vin i.10) and often afterwards DN ii.61, DN ii.308; DN iii.216, DN iii.275; SN iii.26, SN iii.158; Iti 50; Pts i.26 Pts i.39; Pts ii.147; Vb 101, Vb 365; Ne 160. Another group of 3 aims of taṇhā is given as kāma˚, rūpa˚ & arūpa at DN iii.216; Vb 395; & yet another as rūpa˚, arūpa & nirodha˚ at DN iii.216 ■ The source of t. is said to be sixfold as founded on & relating to the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see rūpa), objects of sense or sensations viz. sights, sounds, smells, etc.: DN ii.58; Pts i.6 sq. Nd ii.271i; in threefold aspects (as kāma-taṇhā, bhava & vibhava˚) with relation to the 6 senses discussed at Vism 567 sq.; also under the term cha-taṇha-kāyā (sixfold group, see cpds.) MN i.51; MN iii.280; Pts i.26 elsewhere called chadvārika-taṇhā “arising through the 6 doors” Dhp-a iii.286.
18 varieties of t. (comprising worldly objects of enjoyment, ease, comfort & well-living are enum;d at Nd ii.271iii (under taṇhā-lepa) 36 kinds: 18 referring to sensations (illusions) of subjective origin (ajjhattikassa upādāya), & 18 to sensations affecting the individual in objective quality (bāhirassa upādāya) at AN ii.212; Ne 37; & 108 varieties or specifications of t. are given at Nd;2 271ii (under Jappā) = Dhs 1059 = Vb 361 ■ Taṇhā as “kusalā pi akusalā pi” (good & bad) occurs at Ne 87 cp. Tālapuṭa’s good t. Th i.1091 f.
2. Import of the term: (a) various characterizations of t.: mahā˚ Snp 114 kāma˚ Si.131; gedha˚ Si.15; bhava˚ DN iii.274 (+ avijjā) grouped with diṭṭhi (wrong views) Nd ii.271iii, 271vi. T fetters the world & causes misery: “yāya ayaṃ loko uddhasto pariyonaddho tantākulajāto” AN ii.211 sq. taṇhāya jāyatī soko taṇhāya jāyatī bhayaṃ taṇhāya vippamuttassa natthi soko kuto bhayaṃ Dhp 216 taṇhāya uḍḍito loko SN i.40; yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ etth’ esā taṇhā… Vb 103; it is the 4th constituent of Māra’s army (M-senā) Snp 436; M’s daughter SN i.134. In comparisons: t. + jālinī visattikā SN i.107 = bharâdānaṃ (t. ponobbhavikā nandirāga-sahagatā SN iii.26; SN v.402: gaṇḍa = kāya, gaṇḍamūlan ti taṇhāy etaṃ adhivacanaṃ SN iv.83; = sota SN iv.292 (and a khīṇāsavo = chinnasoto); manujassa pamatta-cārino t vaḍḍhati māluvā viya Dhp 334 ■ (b) taṇhā as the inciting factor of rebirth & incidental cause of saṃsāra kammaṃ khettaṃ viññāṇaṃ bījaṃ; taṇhā sineho… evaṃ āyatiṃ punabbhavâbhinibbatti hoti AN i.223; t ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaṃ vuccati dukkha-samudayo Vb 107, similarly Ne 23 sq.; as ponobbhavikā (causing rebirth) SN iii.26; Pts ii.147, etc.; as a link in the chain of interdependent causation (see paṭiccasamuppāda): vedanā-paccayā taṇhā, taṇhā-paccayā upādānaṃ Vin i.1, Vin i.5; DN ii.31, DN ii.33, DN ii.56, etc.; t. & upadhi; taṇhāya sati upadhi hoti t. asati up. na hoti SN ii.108 ye taṇhaṃ vaḍḍhenti te upadhiṃ vaḍḍhenti, etc. SN ii.109 taṇhāya nīyati loko taṇhāya parikissati SN i.39; taṇhā saṃyojanena saṃyuttā sattā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsaranti Iti 8. See also t ■ dutiya ■ (c) To have got rid of t. is Arahantship: vigata- taṇha vigata-pipāsa vigata-pariḷāha DN iii.238; SN iii.8, SN iii.107 sq., 190 samūlaṃ taṇhaṃ abbuyha SN i.16 = SN i.63, SN i.121 (Godhiko parinibbuto); iii.26 (nicchāto parinibbuto); vīta Snp 83, Snp 849, Snp 1041 (+ nibbuta); taṇhāya vippahānena SN i.39 (“Nibbānan” iti vuccati), 40 (sabbaṃ chindati bandhanaṃ); taṇhaṃ mā kāsi mā lokaṃ punar āgami Snp 339; taṇhaṃ pariññāya… te narā oghatiṇṇā ti Snp 1082; ucchinna -bhava-taṇhā Snp 746; taṇhāya vūpasama SN iii.231; t ■ nirodha SN iv.390 ■ See also MN i.51; Dhp 154; Iti 9 (vita˚ + anādāna), 50 (˚ṃ pahantvāna); Snp 495, Snp 496, Snp 916; & cp. ˚khaya.
3.; Kindred terms which in Commentaries are expld by one of the taṇhā-formulae (cp. Nd ii.271v & 271;vii): (a) t. in groups of 5: (α) with kilesa saṃyoga vipāka duccarita (β) diṭṭhi kilesa duccarita avijjā; (γ) diṭṭhi kil˚ kamma duccarita ■ (b) quasi-synonyms: ādāna, ejā, gedha jappā, nandī, nivesana, pariḷāha, pipāsā, lepa, loluppa vāna, visattikā, sibbanī ■ In cpds. the form taṇhā is represented by taṇha before double consonants, as taṇhakkhaya, etc.
-ādhipateyya mastery over t. SN iii.103; -ādhipanna seized by t. SN i.29; Snp 1123; -ādāsa the mirror of t AN ii.54; ābhinivesa full of t. Pv-a 267; -āluka greedy Ja ii.78; -uppādā (pl.) (four) grounds of the rise of craving (viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senâsana, itibhavâbhava) AN ii.10 = Iti 109; DN iii.228; Vb 375; -kāyā (pl.) (six) groups of t. (see above B i) SN ii.3; DN iii.244 DN iii.280; Pts i.26; Vb 380; -kkhaya the destruction of the excitement of cravings, almost synonymous with Nibbāna (see above B2c): ˚rata Dhp 187 (expld at Dhp-a iii.241: arahatte c’ eva nibbāne ca abhirato hoti); Vv 735 (expld by Nibbāna Vv-a 296); therefore in the expositionary formula of Nibbāna as equivalent with N. Vin i.5; SN iii.133; Iti 88, etc. (see N.). In the same sense: sabbañjaho taṇhakkhaye vimutto Vin i.8; MN i.171 = Dhp 353; taṇhākkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna AN ii.34, expld at Vism 293; bhikkhu arahaṃ cha ṭhānāni adhimutto hoti: nekkhammâdhimutto, paviveka˚ avyāpajjha˚, upādānakkhaya˚, taṇhakkhaya˚ asammoha˚ Vin i.183; cp. also Snp 70, Snp 211, Snp 1070, Snp 1137 -gata obsessed with excitement, i.e. a victim of t Snp 776; -gaddula the leash of t. Nd ii.271ii≈; -cchida breaking the cravings Snp 1021, Snp 1101; -jāla the snare of t. MN i.271; Thag 306; Nd ii.271ii; -dutiya who has the fever or excitement of t. as his companion AN ii.10; Iti 9 = Iti 109 = Snp 740, Snp 741 = Nd ii.305; cp. Dhs. trsl. p 278; -nadī the river of t. Nd ii.271ii; cp. nadiyā soto ti taṇhāy’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ Iti 114; -nighātana the destruction of t. Snp 1085; -pakkha the party of t., all that belongs to t. Ne 53, Ne 69, Ne 88, Ne 160; -paccaya caused by t. Snp p.144; Vism 568; -mūlaka rooted in t. (dhammā: 9 items) Pts i.26, Pts i.130; Vb 390; -lepa cleaving to t. Nd ii.271iii; (+ diṭṭhi-lepa); -vasika being in the power of t. Ja iv.3; -vicarita a thought of t AN ii.212; -saṅkhaya (complete) destruction of t. ˚sutta MN i.251 (cūḷa˚), 256 (mahā˚): ˚vimutti salvation through cessation of t. MN i.256, MN i.270, & ˚vimutta (adj. SN iv.391; -samudda the ocean of t. Nd 271ii; -sambhūta produced by t. (t. ayaṃ kāyo) AN ii.145 (cp. Snp p.144 yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti sabbaṃ taṇhāpaccayā) -saṃyojana the fetter of t. (adj.) fettered, bound by t. in phrase t ■ saṃyojanena saṃyuttā sattā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsaranti Iti 8, & t ■ saṃyojanānaṃ sattānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarataṃ SN ii.178 = SN iii.149; Pv-a 166; AN i.223; -salla the sting or poisoned arrow of t. SN i.192 (˚assa hantāraṃ vande ādiccabandhunaṃ), the extirpation of which is one of the 12 achievements of a mahesi Nd ii.503 (˚assa abbuḷhana; cp. above).
Sk. tṛṣṇā, besides tarśa (m.) & ṭṛṣ (f.) = Av. tarśna thirst, Gr.; ταρσία dryness, Goth. paúrsus, Ohg durst, E. drought & thirst; to *ters to be, or to make dry in Gr. τέρσομαι, Lat. torreo to roast, Goth. gapaírsan Ohg. derren ■ Another form of t. is tasiṇā
to have thirst for SN ii.13 (for v.l. SS tuṇhīyati; BB. tasati); Vism 544 (+ upādiyati ghaṭ yati); cp. tasati & pp. tasita.;
= taṇhāyati, denom. fr. taṇhā, cp. Sk. tṛṣyati to have thirst
stretched, extended, spread out SN i.357 (jāla); Ja iv.484 (tantāni jālāni Text, katāni v.l. for tatāni). Note: samo tata at Ja i.183 is to be read as samotata (spread all over).
pp. of tanoti
Num. ord. the third ■ Snp 97 (parābhavo); 436 (khuppipāsā as the 3rd division in the army of Māra), 1001; Ja ii.353; Dhp 309; Pv-a 69 (tatiyāya jātiya: in her third birth). Tatiyaṃ (nt. adv. for the 3rd time DN ii.155; Snp 88, Snp 95, Snp 450; tatiyavāraṃ id. Dhp-a i.183; Vv-a 47 (= at last); yāva tatiyaṃ id Vin ii.188; Ja i.279; Dhp-a ii.75; Pv-a 272 (in casting the lot: the third time decides); yāva tatiyakaṃ id DN i.95.
Sk. tṛtīya, Av. ðritya, Gr. τρίτος, Lat. tertius, Goth. pridja, E. third
1. from this, in this SN iii.96 (tatoja); Ja iii.281 (tato paraṃ beyond this after this); Nd ii.664 (id.); DN-a i.212 (tatonidāna). 2. thence Ja i.278; Mil 47.
3. thereupon, further afterwards Ja i.58; Dhp 42; Mil 48; Pv-a 21, etc.
abl. of pron. base ta˚ (see ta˚ ii.4)
heated, hot, glowing; of metals: in a melted state (cp. uttatta) AN ii.122≈(tattena talena osiñcante, as punishment); Dhp 308 (ayoguḷa) Ja ii.352 (id.); iv.306 (tattatapo “of red-hot heat, i.e. in severe self-torture); Mil 26, Mil 45 (adv. red-hot) Pv-a 221 (tatta-lohasecanaṃ the pouring over of glowing copper, one of the punishments in Niraya).
pp. of tapati
(nt.) truth; abl. tattato according to truth; accurately Ja ii.125 (ñatvā); iii.276 (ajānitvā not knowing exactly).
tad + tva
pleasing, agreeable, pleasant Mil 238 (bhojana).
tatta pp. of tappati2 + ka
(adj.) (= tāvataka) of such size, so large Vism 184 (corresponding with yattaka); tattakaṃ kālaṃ so long, just that time, i.e. the specified time (may be long or short = only so long) Dhp-a i.103 (v.l. ettakaṃ) ii.16 (= ettaka).
A. 1. of; place: (a) place where there, in that place Snp 1071, Snp 1085; Dhp 58; Ja i.278; Pv i.1015; often with eva: tatth’ eva right there, on the (very same) spot SN i.116; Ja ii.154; Pv-a 27. In this sense as introduction to a comment on a passage in this, here, in this connection (see also tatra) Dhs 584; Dhp-a i.21; Pv-a 7, etc. (b) direction: there, to this place Ja ii.159 (gantvā); vi.368; Pv-a 16 (tatthagamanasīla able to go here & there, i.e. wherever you like of a Yakkha).
2. as (loc.) case of pron. base ta˚ in this, for or about that, etc. Snp 1115 (etam abhiññāya tato tattha vipassati: Snp-a tatra); tattha yo manku hoti Dhp 249 (= tasmiṃ dāne m. Dhp-a iii.359) tattha kā paridevanā Pv i.123 (“why sorrow for this?”)
3. of time: then, for the time being, interim (= ettha cp. tattaka2) in phrase tattha-parinibbāyin, where corresp. phrases have antarā-parinibbāyin (A ii.238 e.g. ≈i.134; see under parinibbāyin) DN i.156; AN i.232 AN ii.5; AN iv.12; SN v.357; MN ii.52, etc. The meaning of this phrase may however be taken in the sense of tatra A 3 (see next) ■ B. Repeated: tattha tattha here and there, in various places, all over; also corresponding with yattha yattha wherever… there Iti 115; Ne 96 (˚gāmini-paṭipadā); Vv-a 297; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 2, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 77, etc-See tatra.
Sk. tatra adv. of place, cp. Goth. papro & also Sk. atra, yatra
(Sk. tatra] = tattha in all meanings & applications, viz. A. 1. there: Dhp 375; Pv-a 54. tatrâpi DN i.81 = Iti 22≈(tatrâpâsiṃ). tatra pi DN i.1 (= DN-a i.42). tatra kho Vin i.10, Vin i.34; AN v.5 sq.; 354 sq. (cp. atha kho). In explanations: Pv-a 19 (tatrâyaṃ vitthārakathā “here follows the story in detail”).
2. in this Snp 595 (tatra kevalino smase); Dhp 88 (tatr’ abhirati enjoyment in this).
3. a special application of tatra (perhaps in the same sense to be explained tattha A 3 is that as first part of a cpd., where it is to be taken as generalizing (= tatra tatra): all kinds of (orig. in this & that), in whatever condition, all-round, complete (cp. yaṃ taṃ under ta˚; ii.2, yena tena upāyena): tatramajjhattatā (complete) equanimity (keeping balance here & there) Vism 466 (cp. tatra-majjhatt’ upekkhā 160); Dhs-a 132, Dhs-a 133 (majjh˚ + tatra majjh˚); Bdhd 157. tatrûpāyaññū (= tatra upāyaññū) having all-round knowledge of the means and ways Snp 321 (correct reading at Snp-a 330); tatrupāyāya vīmaṃsāya samannāgatā endowed with genius in all kinds of means Vin iv.211 (or may it be taken as “suitable, corresponding proportionate”? cp. tadūpiya) ■ B. tatra tatra, in t ■ t ■ abhinandinī (of taṇhā) finding its delight in this & that, here & there Vin i.10; Pts ii.147; Ne 72 Vism 506.
(adj.) (being) in truth, truthful true, real DN i.190 (+ bhūta taccha); MN iii.70; Thag 347; Snp 1115 (= Nd ii.275 taccha bhūta, etc.). (nt. tathaṃ = saccaṃ, in cattāri tathāni the 4 truths SN v.430 SN v.435; Pts ii.104 sq. (+ avitathāni anaññathāni). As ep. of Nibbāna: see derivations & cp. taccha. abl tathato exactly v.l. B for tattato at Ja ii.125 (see tatta2) ■ yathā tathaṃ (cp. yathā tacchaṃ) according to truth, for certain, in truth Snp 699, Snp 732, Snp 1127 ■ Cp vitatha.
-parakkama reaching out to the truth Ja v.395 (= saccanikkama); -vacana speaking the truth (cp. tathāvādin) Mil 401.
an adjectivized tathā out of combn tathā ti “so it is,” cp. taccha
(f.) state of being such, such-likeness, similarity, correspondence Vism 518.
abstr. fr. tathā → tatha
(nt.) “the state of being so,” the truth, Nibbāna; only in foll. phrases: (a) tathattāya paṭipajjati to be on the road to (i.e. attain) Nibbāna DN i.175, similarly SN ii.199; SN ii.209 (paṭipajjitabba being conducive to N.); Mil 255; Vism 214 ■ (b) tathattāya upaneti (of a cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ) id. SN iv.294 = MN i.301; SN v.90, SN v.213 sq ■ (c) tathattāya cittaṃ upasaṃharati id. MN i.468 ■ abl. tathattā in truth, really Snp 520 sq. (cp. Mvu iii.397).
*tathātvaṃ
(adv.) so, thus (and not otherwise, opp. aññathā), in this way, likewise Snp 1052 (v.l. yathā); Ja i.137, etc ■ Often with eva tath’ eva just so, still the same, not different DN iii.135 (taṃ tath’ eva hoti no aññathā); Ja i.263, Ja i.278; Pv i.83 Pv-a 55. Corresponding with yathā: tathā-yathā so-that Dhp 282; Pv-a 23 (tathā akāsi yathā he made that…, cp. Lat. ut consecutive); yathā-tathā asso also Snp 504; Ja i.223; Pv i.123 (yath’ āgato tathā gato as he has come so he has gone) ■ In cpds. tath before vowels.
-ūpama such like (in comparisons, following upon a preceding yathā or seyyathā) Snp 229 (= tathāvidha Kp-a 185), 233; Iti 33, Iti 90; -kārin acting so (corresp. w yathāvādin: acting so as he speaks, cp. tāthāvādin Snp 357; Iti 122; -gata see sep.; -bhāva “the being so, such a condition Ja i.279; -rūpa such a, like this or that esp. so great, such Vin i.16; Snp p.107; Iti 107; DN-a i.104; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 56. nt. adv. thus Pv-a 14. Cp. evarūpa-vādin speaking so (cp. ˚kārin) Snp 430; Iti 122 (of the Tathāgata); -vidha such like, so (= tathārūpa) Snp 772 Snp 818, Snp 1073, Snp 1113; Nd ii.277 (= tādisa taṃsaṇṭhita tappakāra).
Sk. tathā, cp. also kathaṃ
[Derivation uncertain. Buddhaghosa (DN-a i.59
67) gives eight explanations showing that there was no fixed tradition on the point, and that he himself was in doubt]. The context shows that the word is an epithet of an Arahant, and that non-Buddhists were supposed to know what it meant. The compilers of the Nikāyas must therefore have considered the expression as pre-Buddhistic; but it has not yet been found in any pre-Buddhistic work. Mrs. Rhys Davids (Dhs. tr. 1099, quoting Chalmers J.R.A.S. Jan., 1898 suggests “he who has won through to the truth.” Had the early Buddhists invented a word with this meaning it would probably have been tathaṃgata, but not necessarily, for we have upadhī-karoti as well as upadhiṃ karoti ■ DN i.12, DN i.27, DN i.46, DN i.63; DN ii.68, DN ii.103, DN ii.108 DN ii.115, DN ii.140, DN ii.142; DN iii.14, DN iii.24 sq., 32 sq., 115, 217, 264 sq. 273 sq.; SN i.110 sq.; SN ii.222 sq.; SN iii.215; SN iv.127, SN iv.380 sq. AN i.286; AN ii.17, AN ii.25, AN ii.120; AN iii.35, etc.; Snp 236, Snp 347, Snp 467 Snp 557, Snp 1114; Iti 121 sq.; Kp-a 196; Pts i.121 sq.; Dhs 1099, Dhs 1117, Dhs 1234; Vb 325 sq., 340, etc., etc.
-balāni (pl.) the supreme intellectual powers of a T. usually enumd as a set of ten: in detail at AN v.33 sq = Pts ii.174; MN i.69; SN ii.27; Nd ii.466. Other sets of five at AN iii.9; of six AN iii.417 sq. (see bala); -sāvaka a disciple of the T. DN ii.142; AN i.90; AN ii.4; AN iii.326 sq. Iti 88; Snp p.15.
(adj.) [Sk. tathya = taccha] true, Snp 882, Snp 883.
(adj.) befitting, suitable, going well with Ja vi.366; Dhp-a iv.15.
cp. ta˚ i.a
(adv.) then, as that time (either past or future) DN ii.157; Ja ii.113, Ja ii.158; Pv i.105; Pv-a 42. Also used like an adj.: te tadā-mātāpitaro etarahi m˚ ahesuṃ “the then mother & father” Ja i.215 (cp Lat. quondam); tadā-sotāpanna-upāsaka Ja ii.113. Tadupika & Tadupiya;
Vedic; cp. kadā
see ta˚ I. a.
offspring, son Mvu vii.28. pl. tanuyā [ = Sk. tanayau] son & daughter SN i.7.
at SN i.7, v.l. tanaya, cp. BSk. tanuja Avs ii.200
1. (adj.) thin, tender, small, slender Vv 162 (vara graceful = uttamarūpa-dhara Vv-a 79; perhaps to 2) Pv-a 46 (of hair: fine + mudhu).
2. (n. nt.) body (orig. slender part of the body = waist) Vv 537 (kañcana˚); Pv i.121; Vism 79 (uju + ). Cp. tanutara.
-karaṇa making thinner, reducing, diminishing Vin ii.316 (Bdhgh on CV. v.9, 2); -bhāva decrease Pp 17; -bhūta decreased, diminished Pp 17; esp in phrase ˚soka with diminished grief, having one’s grief allayed Dhp-a iii.176; Pv-a 38.
Vedic tanu, f. tanvī; also n. tanu & tanū (f.) body; *ten (see tanoti) = Gr. τανυ-, Lat. tenuis, Ohg. dunni, E thin
(adj.) = tanu; little, small Dhp 174 (= Dhp-a 175); Snp 994 (soka).
the waist (lit. smaller part of body, cp. body and bodice) Vin iv.345 (sundaro tanutaro “her waist is beautiful”).
(nt.) diminution, reduction, vanishing, gradual disappearance AN i.160 (manussānaṃ khayo hoti tanuttaṃ paññāyati); ii.144 (rāga˚, dosa˚ moha˚); esp. in phrase (characterizing a sakadāgāmin “rāga-d ■ mohānaṃ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti” DN i.156; SN v.357 sq., 376, 406; AN ii.238; Pp 16.
n ■ abstr. of tanu
to stretch extend; rare as finite verb, usually only in pp. tata. Pgdp 17.
*ten; cp. Sk. tanoti, Gr. τείνω, τόνος, τέτανος; Lat. teneo, tenuis, tendo (E. ex-tend); Goth. panjan Ohg. denen; cp. also Sk. tanti, tāna, tantra
(nt.) a thread, a string, a loom Ja i.356 (˚vitata-ṭṭhāna the place of weaving); Dhp-a i.424. At Ja iv.484 tanta is to be corrected to tata (stretched out).
-ākula tangled string, a tangled skein, in phrase tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajāta “entangled like a ball of string & covered with blight” SN ii.92; SN iv.158; AN ii.211; Dpvs xii.32. See guḷā; -āvuta weaving weft, web SN v.45; AN i.286; -bhaṇḍa weaving appliances Vin ii.135; -rajjuka “stringing & roping,” hanging execution Ja iv.87; -vāya a weaver Ja i.356; Mil 331 Vism 259; Dhp-a i.424.
Vedic tantra, to tanoti; cp. tantrī f. string
(nt.) “weaving,” a weaving-loom Vin ii.135.
(f.) 1. the string or cord of a lute, etc.; thread made of tendon Vin i.182; Thig 390 (cp. Thag-a 257); Ja iv.389; Dhp-a i.163; Pv-a 151.
2. line lineage (+ paveṇi custom, tradition) Ja vi.380; Dhp-a i.284. -dhara bearer of tradition Vism 99 (+ vaṃsânurakkhake & paveṇipolake).
3. a sacred text a passage in the Scriptures Vism 351 (bahu-peyyāla˚) avimutta-tanti-magga DN-a i.2; MN-a i.2.
-ssara string music Vin i.182; Ja iii.178.
Vedic tantrī, see tanta
a string, cord, wire (of a lute) Ja v.196.
Vedic tantu, cp. tanta
(adj.) weary, lazy, giving way Mil 238 (˚kata). Usually a˚; active, keen, industrious sedulous Dhp 305, Dhp 366, Dhp 375; Vv 3322; Mil 390; Vv-a 142. Cp. next.
pp. of tandeti = Sk. tandrayate & tandate to relax. From; *ten, see tanoti
(f.) weariness, laziness, sloth SN v.64; MN i.464; AN i.3; Snp 926, Snp 942; Ja v.397 (+ ālasya) Vb 352 (id.).
Sk. tanita
1. torment, punishment, penance, esp. religious austerity, selfchastisement ascetic practice. This was condemned by the Buddha: Gotamo sabbaṃ tapaṃ garahati tapassiṃ lūkhajīviṃ upavadati DN i.161 = SN iv.330 anattha-sañhitaṃ ñatvā yaṃ kiñci aparaṃ tapaṃ SN i.103; Ja iv.306 (tattatapa: see tatta).
2. mental devotion self-control, abstinence, practice of morality (often brahmacariyā & saṃvara); in this sense held up as an ideal by the Buddha. DN iii.42 sq., 232 (attan & paran˚) 239; SN i.38, SN i.43; SN iv.118, SN iv.180; MN ii.155, MN ii.199; DN ii.49; Dhp 184 (paramaṃ tapo), 194 (tapo sukho); Snp 77; SN i.172 (saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhi); Snp 267 (t. ca brahmacariyā ca), 655 (id.), 901; Pv i.32 (instr. tapasā brahmacariyena Pv-a 15); Ja i.293; Ne 121 (+ indriyasaṃvara); Kp-a 151 (pāpake dhamme tapatī ti tapo): Vv-a 114 (instr. tapasā); Pv-a 98.
-kamma ascetic practice SN i.103; -jigucchā disgust for asceticism DN i.174; DN iii.40, DN iii.42 sq., 48 sq.; AN ii.200 -pakkama = ˚kamma DN i.165 sq. (should it be tapopakkama = tapa + upakkama, or tapo-kamma?). -vana the ascetic’s forest Vism 58, Vism 79, Vism 342.
from tapati, cp. Lat. tepor, heat
1. to shine, to be bright, Dhp 387 (divā tapati ādicco, etc. = virocati Dhp-a iv.143); Snp 348 (jotimanto narā tapeyyuṃ), 687 (suriyaṃ tapantaṃ) ■ ger tapanīya: see sep ■ pp. tatta1.
Sk. tapati, *tep, cp. Lat. tepeo to be hot or warm, tepidus = tepid
(adj.-n.) burning, heat; fig. torment, torture, austerity.
1. (as nt.) Pv-a 98 (kāya ˚sankhāto tapo).
2. (as f.) tapanī Ja v.201 (in metaphorical play of word with aggi & brahmacārin Com. visīvana-aggiṭṭha-sankhātā-tapanī).
to tapati & tapa
burning: fig. inducing selftorture, causing remorse, mortifying AN i.49 = Iti 24; AN iv.97 (Com. tāpajanaka); v.276; Ja iv.177; Dhs i305.
grd. of tapati
(nt.) also tapaneyya (Ja v.372) & tapañña (J vi.218) shining; (n.) the shining bright metal, i.e. gold (= rattasuvaṇṇa Ja v.372 Thag-a 252) Thig 374; Vv 8416; Vv-a 12, Vv-a 37, Vv-a 340.
orig. grd. of tapati
(adj.-n.) one devoted to religious austerities, an ascetic (non-Buddhist). Fig. one who exercises self-control & attains mastery over his senses Vin i.234 = AN iv.184 (tapassī samaṇo Gotamo); DN iii.40, DN iii.42 sq., 49; SN i.29; SN iv.330 SN iv.337 sq.; MN i.77; Snp 284 (isayo pubbakā āsuṃ saññatattā tapassino); Vv 2210; Pv i.32 (˚rūpa, under the appearance of a “holy” man: samaṇa-patirūpaka Pv-a 15); ii.614 (= saṃvāraka Pv-a 98; tapo etesaṃ atthī ti ibid.).
tapas + vin; see tapati & tapa
(nt.) satiating, refreshing; a restorative, in netta˚ some sort of eye-wash DN i.12 (in combn w. kaṇṇa-tela & natthu-kamma).;
Sk. tarpaṇa
to burn, to be tormented: to be consumed (by remorse) Dhp 17, Dhp 136 (t. sehi kammehi dummedho = paccati Dhp-a iii.64).
Sk. tapyate, Pass. of tapati
(instr.) to be satiated, to be pleased, to be satisfied Ja i.185 (puriso pāyāsassa t.); ii.443; v.485 = Mil 381 (samuddo na t. nadīhi the ocean never has enough of all the rivers); Vv 8413 ■ grd. tappiya satiable, in atappiya-vatthūni (16) objects of insatiability Ja iii.342 (in full). Also tappaya in cpd. dut˚; hard to be satisfied AN i.87; Pp 26 ■ pp. titta ■ Caus. tappeti to satisfy, entertain, regale, feed Iti 67 (annapānena) Pv ii.48 (id.) Mil 227 ■ pp. tappita.
Sk. tṛpyate, caus. tarpayati; *terp = Gr. τέρπω
(adj.) quite given to or intent upon (-˚), diligent, devoted Thag-a 148 (Ap. 57, 66) (mānapūjana˚ & buddhopaṭṭhāna˚).;
Sk. tatpara
one who satisfies, a giver of good things in combn titto ca tappetā ca: self-satisfied & satisfying others AN i.87; Pp 27 (of a Sammāsambuddha).
n. ag. to tappeti
in cpds. tabbisaya, tabbahula, etc. = taṃ˚, see under ta˚ I. a.
(nt.) & tamo darkness (syn. andhakāra, opp. joti), lit. as well as fig. (mental darkness = ignorance or state of doubt); one of the dark states of life & rebirth; adj. living in one of the dark spheres of life (cp. kaṇhajāta) or in a state of suffering (duggati) Snp 248 (pecca tamaṃ vajanti ye patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirā), 763 (nivutānaṃ t. hoti andhakāro apassataṃ), 956 (sabbaṃ tamaṃ vinodetvā) Vb 367 (three tamāni: in past, present & future) adj.: puggalo tamo tama-parāyaṇo DN iii.233; AN ii.85 Pp 51; Ja ii.17 ■ tamā tamaṃ out of one “duggati into another Snp 278 (vinipātaṃ samāpanno gabbhā gabbhaṃ t. t.… dukkaṃ nigacchati), cp. Mvu ii.225, also tamāto tamaṃ ibid. i.27; ii.215 ■ tamat-agge beyond the region of darkness (or rebirth in dark spheres), cp. bhavagge (& Sk. tamaḥ pāre) S; v. 154, 163.
-andhakāra (complete) darkness (of night) v.l. for samandha˚ at Ja iii.60 (Kern: tamondhakāra); -nivuta enveloped in d. Snp 348; -nuda (tama˚ & tamo˚), dispelling darkness, freq. as Ep. of the Buddha or other sages Snp 1133, Snp 1136; Iti 32, Iti 108; Nd ii.281; Vv 352 (= Vv-a 161); Mil 1, Mil 21, etc.; -parāyaṇa (adj.) having a state of darkness or “duggati” for his end or destiny SN i.93; AN ii.85 = Pp 51.
Sk. tamas, tam & tim;, cp. tamisra = Lat. tenebrae; also timira dark & P. tibba, timira Ohg. dinstar & finstar; Ags. thimm, E. dim
Name of a tree (Xanthochymus pictorius) Pv iii.105 (+ uppala).
Sk. tamāla
(nt.) copper (“the dark metal”); usually in combinations, signifying colour of or made of (cp. loha bronze), e.g. lākhātamba (adj.) Thig 440 (colour of an ox); ˚akkhin Vv 323 (timira˚) Sdhp 286; ˚nakhin Ja vi.290; ˚nettā (f.) ibid.; ˚bhājana Dhp-a i.395; ˚mattika Dhp-a iv.106; ˚vammika Dhp-a iii.208; ˚loha Pv-a 95 (= loha).
Sk. tāmra, orig. adj. = dark coloured, leaden; cp. Sk. adj. taṃsra id., to tama
(nt.) betel or betel-leaves (to chew after the meal) Ja i.266, Ja i.291; Ja ii.320; Vism 314; Dhp-a iii.219. -˚pasibbaka betel-bag Ja vi.367.
Sk. tambūla
(nt.) a triad, in ratana-ttaya the triad of gems (the Buddha, the Norm. & the Community) see ratana e.g. Pv-a 1, Pv-a 49, Pv-a 141 ■ piṭaka-ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas Snp-a 328.
Sk. trayaṃ triad, cp. trayī; see also tāvatiṃsa
num. card. three.
nom ■ acc. m. tayo (Snp 311), & tayas (tayas; su dhammā Snp 231, see Kp-a 188) f. tisso (DN i.143; AN v.210; Iti 99) nt. tīṇi (AN i.138, etc.), also used as absolute form (eka dve tīṇi) Kp iii. (cp. Kp-a 79 tīṇi lakkhaṇā for lakkhaṇāni Snp 1019); gen. m. nt tiṇṇaṃ (J iii.52, 111, etc.), f. tissannaṃ; instr. tīhi (ṭhānehi Dhp 224, vijjāhi Iti 101); loc. tīsu (janesu Ja i.307; vidhāsu Snp 842) ■ In composition & derivation: ti in numerical cpds.: tidasa (30) q.v.; tisata (300) Snp 566 (brāhmaṇā tisatā); 573 (bhikkhavo tisatā); tisahassa (3000) Pv ii.951 (janā ˚ā); in numerical derivations: tiṃsa (30), tika (triad), tikkhattuṃ (thrice) tidhā (threefold) ■ In nominal cpds.: see ti˚ te (a) in numerical cpds.: terasa (Snp-a 489; Dhs-a 333; Vv-a 72: terasī the 13th day) & teḷasa (SN i.192 Snp p.. 102 103) (13) [Sk. trayodaśa, Lat. tredecim]; tevīsa (23; Vv-a 5; tettiṃsa (33) Ja i.273; Dhp-a i.267; tesaṭṭhi (63; Pv-a 111 (Jambudīpe tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu). (b) in nominal cpds.: see te˚.
f. tisso, nt. tīṇi; Vedic traya, trī & trīṇi; Gr. τρεϊς, τρια; Lat. trēs, tria; Goth. preis, prija; Ohg. drī E. three, etc.
(n.) crossing, “transit,” passing over Snp 1119 (maccu˚) ■ (adj.) to be crossed, passable, in duttara hard to cross SN iv.157; Snp 174, Snp 273 (oghaṃ t duttaraṃ); Thig 10; Iti 57. Also as su-duttara SN i.35; SN v.24.
-esin wanting to pass over Ja iii.230
see tarati
a wave Vism 157.
tara + ga
hyena Vin iii.58; AN iii.101; Mil 149, Mil 267; Dhp A 331; Mhbv 154 ■ f. taracchi Ja v.71 Ja v.406; Ja vi.562.
Derivation unknown. The Sk. forms are tarakṣu & tarakṣa
(nt.) going across, passing over, traversing Vin iv.65 (tiriyaṃ˚); Pts i.15; Pts ii.99, Pts ii.119.
see tarati
(lit.) to go or get through, to cross (a river), pass over, traverse (fig.) to get beyond, i.e. to surmount, overcome, esp oghaṃ (the great flood of life, desire, ignorance, etc. SN i.53, SN i.208, SN i.214; SN v.168, SN v.186; Snp 173, Snp 273, Snp 771, Snp 1069 sangaṃ Snp 791; visattikaṃ Snp 333, Snp 857; ubhayaṃ (both worlds, here & beyond) Pv iv.131 (= atikkameti Pv-a 278); Nd ii.282-ppr. taranto Vin i.191 (Aciravati) grd. taritabba Vin iv.65 (nadī); aor. atari Ja iii.189 (samuddaṃ) & atāri Snp 355, Snp 1047 (jāti-maraṇaṃ), pl atāruṃ Snp 1045 ■ See also tāreti (Caus.), tāṇa, tāyate tiro, tiriyaṃ, tīra, tīreti.;
Vedic tarati, *ter (tṛ) to get to the other side, cp. Lat. termen, terminus, Gr. τέρμα, τέρχρον; also Lat trans = Goth. pairh = Ags. purh = E. through
to be in a hurry, to make haste Thag 291; ppr. taramāna in ˚rūpa (adj.) quickly, hurriedly Snp 417; Pv ii.62; Pv-a 181 (= turita) & ataramāna Vin i.248; grd. taraṇīya Thag 293 ■ See also tura, turita, turiya.
tvarate, pp. tvarita; also turati, turayati from *ter to turn round, move quickly, perhaps identical with the *ter of tarati1; cp. Ohg. dweran = E. twirl Gr. τορύνη = Lat. trua = Ger. quirl twirling-stick, also Lat. torqueo & turba & perhaps Ger. stūren, zerstören E. storm, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under trua
(adv.) then, at that time Vin ii.189.
Vedic tarhi, cp. carahi & etarahi
(f.) a boat Dāvs iv.53.
from tarati
(nt.) the fact of having traversed, crossed, or passed through Vv-a 284.
abstr. of tarita pp. of tarati1
tree, Pv-a 154 (˚gaṇā), 251.
Perhaps dialect. for dāru
(adj.) 1. tender, of tender age, young new, newly (˚-) fresh. Esp. appld to a young calf MN i.459 (in simile); ˚vaccha, ˚vacchaka, ˚vacchī Vin i.193; Ja i.191; Dhp-a ii.35; Vv-a 200 ■ Vin i.243 (fresh milk); DN i.114 (Gotamo t. c’ eva t ■ paribbājako ca “a young man and only lately become a wanderer”) Pv-a 3, Pv-a 46 (˚janā), 62 (˚putta); Bdhd 93, 121.
2. (m & nt.) the shoot of a plant, or a young plant Vin i.189 (tāla˚); MN i.432; Vism 361 (taruṇa-tāla).
Vedic taruṇa, cp. Gr. τέρυς, τέρην; Lat. tener & perhaps tardus
(nt.) (a) flat surface (w. ref. to either top or bottom: cp. Ger. boden), level, ground, base Ja i.60 Ja i.62 (pāsāda˚ flat roof); iii.60 (id.); paṭhavī˚ (level ground) Ja ii.111, cp. bhūmi˚ Pv-a 176; ādāsa˚ surface of a mirror Vism 450, Vism 456, Vism 489; salila˚ (surface of pond Pv-a 157; Vv-a 160; heṭṭhima˚ (the lowest level Ja i.202; Pv-a 281 ■ Ja i.233 (base); 266 (khagga˚ the flat of the sword); ii.102 (bheri˚) ■ (b) the palm of the hand or the sole of the foot Ja ii.223; Vism 250 & cpds ■ See also taṭa, tāla, tālu.;
-ghātaka a slap with the palm of the hand Vin iv.260 Vin iv.261; -sattika in ˚ṃ uggirati to lift up the palm of the hand Vin iv.147; Dhp-a iii.50; cp. Vin. Texts i.51.
Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. tala m. & nt.; cp. Gr. τηλία (dice-board), Lat. tellus (earth), tabula (= table). Oir. talam (earth), Ags. pel (= deal), Ohg dili = Ger. diele
(adj.) having a sole, in eka-˚upāhanā a sandal with one sole Ja ii.277; Ja iii.80, Ja iii.81 (v.l. BB paṭilika); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 165.
from tala
= taruṇa Dhs-a 333 (cp. Burnouf, Lotus 573).
(nt.) a pond, pool reservoir Vin ii.256; Ja i.4, Ja i.239; Pv-a 202; DN-a i.273; Mil 1, Mil 66 = Mil 81, Mil 246, Mil 296, Mil 359.
Derivation uncertain. Perhaps from taṭa. The Sk. forms are taṭaka, taṭāka, taḍāga
(adj.) 1. trembling, frightened Ja i.336 = Ja i.344 (vakā, expl. at 342 by tasita); perhaps the derived meaning of:
2. moving, running (cp. to meaning 1 & 2 Gr.; τρέω to flee & to tremble), always in comb;n tasa-thāvarā (pl.) movable & immovable beings [cp. M Vastu; i.207 jangama-sthāvara; ii.10 calaṃ sthāvara]. Metaphorically of people who are in fear & trembling, as distinguished from a thāvara, a selfpossessed & firm being (= Arahant Kp-a 245). In this sense t. is interpreted by tasati;1 as well as by tasati2 (to have thirst or worldly cravings) at Kp-a 245 tasantī ti tasā, sataṇhānaṃ sabhayānañ c’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; also at Nd ii.479: tasa ti yesaṃ tasitā (tasiṇā? taṇhā appahīnā, etc., & ye te santāsaṃ āpajjanti.; SN i.141; SN iv.117, SN iv.351; SN v.393; Snp 146, Snp 629; Dhp 405 Thag 876; Ja v.221; Nd ii.479; Dhp-a iv.175.
from tasati2
to be thirsty fig. to crave for SN ii.13; Mil 254 ■ pp. tasita1. Cp pari˚.
Sk. tṛṣyati = Gr. τέρσομοι to dry up, Lat. torreo (= E. torrid, toast), Goth. gapairsan & gapaúrsnan Ohg. derren; see also taṇhā & taṇhīyati
to tremble, shake, to have fear; to be frightened Snp 394 (ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke) Nd ii.479 (= santāsaṃ āpajjati); Kp-a 245 (may be taker as tasati1, see tasa) ■ pp. tasita2, cp. also tasa uttasati.;
Vedic trasati = Gr. τρέω, Lat. terreo (= terror); *ters fr. *ter in Sk. tarala, cp. also Lat. tremo (= tremble and trepidus
(nt.) a shuttle Snp 215, Snp 464, Snp 497; Dhp-a i.424; Dhp-a iii.172. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 160.
Vedic tasara, cp. tanta, etc.
(f.) thirst; fig. craving (see taṇhā SN v.54, SN v.58; Nd ii.479 (to be read for tasitā?); Dhp 342, Dhp 343.
Diaeretic form of taṇhā, cp. dosiṇā → juṇhā, kasiṇa → kṛtsṇa, etc.
dried up, parched, thirsty SN ii.110, SN ii.118; Snp 980, Snp 1014 (not with Fausböll = tasita2); Ja iv.20; Pv ii.936 (chāta + ), 103 (= pipāsita Pv-a 143); iii.65 (= pipāsita Pv-a 127, Pv-a 202); Mil 318 (kilanta + ).
pp. of tasati1
frightened, full of fear Ja i.26 (bhīta + ). 342, iv.141 (id.): Nd ii.479 (or = tasiṇā?). atasita fearless SN iii.57. Tassa-papiyyasika
pp. of tasati2
(f.) (viz. kiriyā) Name of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathā: guilt (legal wrong) of such & such a character Vin i.325; in detail expl. MN ii.249; + tiṇavatthāraka DN iii.254; AN i.99. ˚kammaṃ karoti to carry out proceedings against someone guilty of a certain legal offence Vin ii.85, Vin ii.86; ˚kata one against whom the latter is carried out AN iv.347.
(nt.) shelter, protection refuge, esp. as tt. of shelter & peace offered by the Dhamma. Mostly in comb;n with leṇa & saraṇa; (also dīpa & abhaya; ), in var. contexts, esp. with ref to Nibbāna (see Nd ii.s. v.): DN i.95 (˚ṃ, etc. gavesin seeking refuge); AN i.155; SN iv.315 (maṃtāṇa, etc. adj protected by me, in my shelter) ■ SN i.2, SN i.54, SN i.55, SN i.107 (˚ṃ karoti); iv.372 (˚gāmī maggo); AN iv.184; Snp 668 (˚ṃ upeti); Dhp 288; Ja i.412 (= protector, expld by tāyitā parittāyitā patiṭṭhā); Sdhp 224, Sdhp 289. Cp tātar & tāyati.;
from Vedic root trā, variation of *ter in tarati. Orig. bringing or seeing through
(f.) protection, sheltering Dhp 288.
abstr. of tāṇa
father; usually in voc. sg. tāta (and pl. tātā) used as term of affectionate, friendly or respectful address to one or more persons, both younger & older than the speaker, superior or inferior. As father (perhaps = tātā, see next) at Thig 423, Thig 424 (+ ammā). tāta (sg.) in addr. one: Ja iii.54; Ja iv.281 (amma tāta mammy & daddy) Dhp-a ii.48 (= father) iii.196 (id.); Pv-a 41 (= father), 73 (a son), 74 (a minister); Ja i.179 (id.); Mil 15, Mil 16, Mil 17 (a bhikkhu or thera) in addr. several Vin i.249; Ja ii.133; Pv-a 50. tātā (pl.) Ja i.166; Ja i.263; Ja iv.138.
Vedic tāta, Gr. τάτα & τέττα, Lat. tata, Ger. tate, E. dad(dy); onomat.
protector, saviour, helper DN-a i.229. For meaning “father see tāta & cp. pitā = tāyitā at Ja i.412.
from Vedic trā, n. ag. to trāyati to protect
(adj. n.) (nom. tādī & tādi, in cpds. tādi˚) such, such like of such (good) qualities, “ecce homo”; in pregnant sense appl. to the Bhagavant & Arahants, characterized as “such” in 5 ways: see Nd i.114 sq.; Snp-a 202 & cp Mil 382. tādī: Snp 712, Snp 803 (& 154 tādī no for tādino see Snp-a 201 sq.); tādi Snp 488, Snp 509, Snp 519 sq.; Dhp 95 gen. tādino Dhp 95, Dhp 96; with ref. to the Buddha DN ii.157≈ (ṭhitacittasa tādino, in BSk. sthiracittasya tāyinaḥ Avs ii.199); Vv 186 (expln Vv-a 95: iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇasampattiyā tādino Satthu: see Nd i.114 sq.) of Arahant AN ii.34; Snp 154 (or tādī no); instr. tādinā Snp 697; Mil 382; acc. tādiṃ Snp 86, Snp 219, Snp 957;: loc. pl tādisu Pv ii.971 (= iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇappattesu Pv-a 140, cp. Vv-a 95) ■ See tādisa1.
-bhāva “such-ness,” high(est) qualification Vism 5 Vism 214. -lakkhaṇa the characteristic of such (a being Ja iii.98 (˚yoga, cp. nakkhatta-yoga); Snp-a 200 (˚patta) Vv-a 95 (˚sampatti).
Vedic tādṛś from tad-dṛś of such appearance
(adj.) [enlarged form of tādin) = tādin, only in loc. tādine Vv 212 (= tādimhi Vv-a 106).
(adj.) such like, of such quality or character, in such a condition Ja i.151 Ja iii.280; Snp 112, Snp 317, Snp 459; Nd ii.277 (in expl. of tathāvidha); Iti 68; Pv ii.94; Pv-a 69, Pv-a 72; Mil 382. Also correlative tādisa-tādisa the one-the other Vv-a 288-f. tādisī [Sk. tādṛsī] Pv i.56 (vaṇijjā).
Vedic tādṛśa from tad-dṛsa = tad-rūpa; a reduction of this form in P. tādin
(adj.) like you Ja i.167; Ja v.107.
tvaṃ + disa. Cp. Sk. tvādṛśa
(adj.) = tādisa1, of such character Snp 278; Iti 68.
(nt.) burning, scorching, roasting; fig. tormenting, torture, self-mortification Vv-a 20 (aggimhi t. udake vā temanaṃ). Cp. ā˚; upa˚ pari˚.
from tāpeti
one who practises tapas, an ascetic (brahmin). Eight kinds are enum;d at DN-a i.270 & Snp-a 295 ■ Ja ii.101, Ja ii.102; Ja v.201; Pv-a 153 ˚pabbajjā the life of an a. Ja iii.119; Dhp-a iv.29; DN-a i.270-f. tāpasī a female ascetic Mvu vii.11, Mvu vii.12.
from tapa & tapas
to burn out, scorch, torment, fig. root out, quench Snp 451 (attānaṃ); Ja v.267 (janapadaṃ); Vv-a 114 (kilesaṃ t. in expl. of tapassin). Cp. pari˚.
Sk. tāpayati, Caus. to tapati
desire, longing, greed in tāmatamadasangha-suppahīna Thag 310, an epithet of frogs which perhaps (with Kern, Toev. ii.88) is to be read as tāma-tamata-suppahita; “horribly greedy” (Kern gruwelijk vraatzuchtig).
Sk. tāma
to shelter protect, preserve, guard; bring up, nourish SN iv.246 (rūpa-balaṃ, bhoga˚, ñāti˚, putta˚); Ja iv.387; Snp 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaṃ ñātī vā pana ñātake) Pv-a 7 (khettaṃ tāyati bījaṃ).
Sk. trāyate & trāte, connected with; *ter in tarati, orig. to see through, to save, cp. tāṇa, etc.
one who protects, shelters or guards Ja i.412 (in expl. of tāṇa, q.v.).
n. ag. from tāyati
(f.) a star, a planet Snp 687 (tārāsabha the lord, lit. “the bull” of the stars, i.e. the Moon).
-gaṇa (tāra˚) the host of stars Pv ii.967 (cando va t ■ gaṇe atirocati). -maṇivitāna “star-jewel-awning” canopy of jewelled stars Vism 76.
Sk. tārā = Gr. ἀστήρ, α ̓́στον (= Lat. astrum, in E. disaster), Lat. stella, Goth. staírnō, Ohg. sterro (:E. star), perhaps loan word from Semitic sources
(f.) 1. a star, a planet: osadhī viya tārakā like the morning-star (Venus) Vv 92 = Pv ii.110 ■ Ja i.108; tāraka-rūpa the light (or sparkling of the stars DN iii.85, DN iii.90; SN iii.156 = Iti 19; SN v.44; Vv-a 79; Dhs 617.
2. fig. sparkling, glitter, twinkle akkhi˚ the pupil of the eye MN i.80; udaka˚ sparkling of the water ibid.
Sk. tārakā
to make cross, to help over, to bring through, save, help, assist Snp 319 (pare tārayetuṃ), 321 (so tāraye tattha bahū pi aññe); Iti 123 (tiṇṇo tarayataṃ varo: “one who is through is the best of those who can help through”); Ja i.28 (v.203). aor atārayi Snp 539, Snp 540 & ṭāresi Snp 545.;
Caus. of tarati1
to make haste Thag 293.
Caus. of tarati2
1. the palmyra tree (fan palm), Borassus flabelliformis; freq. in comparisons similes MN i.187; Ja i.202 (˚vana), 273 (˚matta as tall as a palm): Vv-a 162; Pv-a 100 (chinnamūlo viya tālo)
2. a strip, stripe, streak Ja v.372 (= raji).
-aṭṭhika a kernel of the palm fruit Dhp-a ii.53, cp 60 (˚aṭṭhi-khaṇḍa); -kanda a bulbous plant Ja iv.46 (= kalamba); -kkhandha the trunk of a palm Ja iv.351; Vv-a 227 (˚parimāṇā mukhatuṇḍā: beaks of vultures in Niraya); Pv-a 56; -cchidda see tāḷa˚; -taruṇa a young shoot of the p. Vin i.189; -pakka palm fruit Iti 84 -paṇṇa a palm-leaf Dhp-a i.391; Dhp-a ii.249; Dhp-a iii.328; Bdhd 62; also used as a fan (tālapattehi kata-maṇḍalavījanī Vv-a 147) Vv 3343 (Hardy for ˚vaṇṭha of Goon ed. p. 30); Vv-a 147 (v.l. ˚vaṇṭa q.v.); Nd ii.562 (+ vidhūpana); -patta a palm-leaf Vin i.189; Vv-a 147 -miñja the pith of a p. Ja iv.402; -vaṇṭa [Sk. tālavṛṇta a fan Vin ii.130 (+ vidhūpana), 137; Ja i.265; Vv-a 44 cp. ˚paṇṇa; -vatthu (more correct tālâvatthu = tāla-avatthu) in tālāvatthukata a palm rendered groundless i.e. uprooted; freq. as simile to denote complete destruction or removal (of passions, faults, etc.) Nearly always in formula pahīna ucchinna-mūla t anabhāvaṃ-kata “given up, with roots cut out, like a palm with its base destroyed, rendered unable to sprout again” (Kern, Toev. ii.88: as een wijnpalm die niet meer geschiḳt is om weêr uit te schieten). This phrase was misunderstood in BSk.: Mvu iii.360 has kālavastuṃ ■ The readings vary: tālāvatthu e.g. at MN i.370; SN i.69; SN iv.84; AN i.135; AN ii.38; Ja v.267; tālav SN iii.10; SN v.327; Thig 478 (Thag-a 286: tālassa chindita-ṭṭhāna-sadisa); Nd ii.freq. (see under pahīna); tālāvatthukatā at Vin iii.3 ■ In other combn tālāvatthu bhavati (to be pulled out by the roots & thrown away; Ja v.267 (= chinnamūla-tālo viya niraye nibbattanti p. 273), cp. MN i.250; -vāra “palm-time” (?) or is it tāḷa˚; (gong-turn?) Dhp-a ii.49 (note: from tala-pratiṣṭhāyāṃ?).
Sk. tāla, cp. Gr. τ ̈αλις & τηλεχάω (be green, sprout up) Lat. talea shoot, sprout
(nt.) (also tālissa Ja iv.286, tālīsaka Mil 338) the shrub Flacourtia cataphracta & a powder or ointment obtained from it Vin i.203 (+ tagara); Ja iv.286 (id.); Mil 338.
cp. Sk. tālī, tālīśa & talāśā
(No. 40) is short for cattālīsa, e.g. Ap. 103, 234 and passim.
the palate Snp 716; Ja i.419; Vism 264 (˚matthaka top of p.); Pv-a 260.
Sk. tālu, see tala
, cp. Sk. tāla a blow, or musical time; tālīyaka cymbal] beating, striking, the thing beaten or struck i.e. a musical instrument which is beaten, an instr. of percussion, as a cymbal, gong, or tambourine (for tāḷa gong cp. thāla): (a) gong, etc. Ja i.3; Ja vi.60; Thag 893; DN-a i.85; Dhs-a 319 (kaṃsa˚) ■ (b) music in general Dhp-a iv.67.
-āvacara musical time or measure, music, a musician DN ii.159 (v.l. tāla˚); Ja i.60 (l); iv.41; Vv-a 257 (˚parivuta, of an angel).
(nt.) [Sk. tālaka = tāḍa Avs ii.56, tāḍaka Divy 577] a key (orig. a “knocker”?) Vin ii.148 (3 kinds loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, visāṇa˚); Bdhd 1.
-cchiggala a key-hole SN iv.290; SN v.453; Vism 500 -cchidda id. Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148, Vin ii.153 (all tāla˚); iii.118; Dhp-a iii.8 (l).
(f.) a strike, a blow, in urattāḷiṃ karoti to strike one’s chest (as a sign of grief) Pv-a 39, etc. (see ura).
to strike a blow, flog, beat, esp. freq. in phrase kasāhi tāḷeti to flog with whips, etc. (in list of punishments, see kasā) MN i.87; AN ii.122; Nd ii.604; Pv-a 4, etc ■ ppr. pass. taḍḍamāna (for *tāḍyamāna) Ja vi.60 (so read for taddamāna; Com poṭhīyamāna) ■ pp. tāḷita Ja vi.60 (turiya˚); Vv 621 (id.); Sdhp 80. Cp. abhi˚.
Sk. tāḍayati, taḍ perhaps = tud
(adv.) so much, so long; usually correl. with yāva how long, how much; in all meanings to be understood out of elliptical application of this correlation Thus I. yāva-tāva as long as: yāva dve janā avasiṭṭhā ahesuṃ tāva aññamaññaṃ ghātayiṃsu Ja i.254; yāva dukkhā nirayā idha tattha pi tāva ciraṃ vasitabbaṃ Snp 678. Neg. na tāva-yāva na not until MN i.428; SN v.261; AN i.141≈(na t. kālaṃ karoti yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ byantihoti he does not die until his evil kamma is exhausted). II. Elliptical: 1. temporal: so long as, for the time (tāvakālikaṃ = yāvak˚tāvak˚; see below).
2. comparative: (such-) as, like so, such, just so, rather, in such a degree, even; tāvabahuṃ suvaṇṇaṃ so much gold Vin i.209; t ■ mahanto so much Ja i.207; t. madhuraphala with such sweet fruit Ja ii.105; asītiyā tāva kimi-kulānaṃ sādhāraṇa (of the body) or rather, i.e. Vism 235; vatthāni t. devapātubhūtāni Pv-a 44; paṭhamaṃ t. (even) at once, right away Pv-a 113, Pv-a 132; gilānāya t. ayaṃ etissā rūpasobhā even in sickness she is so beautiful Vv-a 76; parittakassa kusalakammassa t. = quidem Pv-a 51; paṃsukūlikangaṃ t. in the first place Vism. 62.
3. concessive (a) (absol.) as far as it goes, considering, because: yadi evaṃ pitā tāva purisabhāve na rodati, mātu nāma hadayaṃ mudukaṃ “even if the father as man does not weep, surely,” & c., Pv-a 63 ■ (b) with imper. in expr like gaccha tāva go as long as you like (to go) (= gaccha tāva yāva gaccheyyāsi), i.e. if you like, cp. Ger. geh’immer; passa tāva just look = Lat. licet. Therefore sometimes = please or simply an emphatic imper. as “do go,” etc. Ja ii.5 (ete t. aguṇā hontu let them be faulty), 133 (ehi t.), 352 (tiṭṭha t. leave off please) iii.53 (pāto va t. hotu only let it be to-morrow, i.e. wait tillt-m.); iv.2 taṃ t. me detha give me this though) Vv-a 289 (vīmaṃsatha t. just think); Pv-a 4 (t. ayyo āgametu yāvâyaṃ puriso pānīyaṃ pivissati may your honour wait till this man shall have drunk the water) 13 (therā t. gacchantu). With prohibitive: mā tāva ito agā please do not go from here Pv ii.322.
4. hortative with 1st pers. fut. equal to imperative-subjunctive or injunctive, cp. 3 (b): let me, well, now, then (cp Lat. age in dic age, etc.). Ja i.62 (puttaṃ t. passissāmi please let me see the son), 263 (vīmaṃsissāmi t. let me think), 265 (nahāyissāmi t. just let me bathe). III. In other combinations: tāva-na although-yet not even: ajjā pi t. me balaṃ na passasi not even to-day have you yet seen my full strength Ja i.207; t. mahādhanassāmī na me dātuṃ piyaṃ ahu although lord of wealth yet I did not like to give Pv ii.76. na-tāva (or tāva in neg. sentence) not yet, not even, not so much as (= Lat. ne-quidem) Pv ii.112 (na ca tāva khīyati does not even diminish a bit); Pv-a 117 (attano kenaci anabhibhavanīyataṃ eva tāva: that he is not to be overpowered, even by anyone). tāva-d-eva just now instantly, on the spot, at once Snp 30; Ja i.61, Ja i.151 Ja iv.2; Pv ii.89 (= tadā eva Pv-a 109); Pv-a 23, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 74 Pv-a 88, etc. tāvade (= tāva-d-eva) for all times Pv iv.338 (= Pv-a 255).
-kālika (adj.) “as long as the time lasts,” i.e. for the time being, temporary, pro tempore Vin ii.174; Vin iii.66 Vin iv.286; Ja i.121, Ja i.393; Vism 95; Thag-a 288; Pv-a 87 (= na sassata).
Sk. tāvat
(adj.) just so much or just so long (viz. as the situation requires), with (or ellipt. without a corresp. yāvataka Vin i.83 (yāvatake-t. as many as) DN ii.18 (yāvatakv’ assa kāyo tāvatakv’ assa vyāmo as tall as is his body so far can he stretch his arms: the 19th sign of a Mahāpurisa); instr. as adv. tāvatakena after a little time Mil 107; Dhp-a iii.61 ■ See also tattaka (contracted of tāvataka).
der. fr. tāva
(adv.) 1. so long (corr. to yāva) Dpvs iv.17.
2. on that account, thus DN i.104 (v.l. ettāvatā); Dhp 266.
from tāva
No. 33, only in cpds. denoting the 33 gods, whose chief is Sakka, while the numeral 33 is always tettiṃsa. This number occurs already in the Vedas with ref. to the gods & is also found in Zend-Avesta (see Haug,; Language & Writings,; etc., pp. 275, 276). The early Buddhists, though they took over the number 33, rejected the superstitious beliefs in the magical influence and mystic meaning of that & other simple numbers. And they altered the tradition. The king of the gods had been Indra, of disreputable character from the Buddhist point of view. Him they deposed, and invented a new god named Sakka, the opposite in every way to Indra (see for details; Dial. ii.294–298). Good Buddhists, after death in this world, are reborn in heaven (sagga), by which is meant the realm of the Thirty-three (D ii.209). There they are welcomed by the Thirty-three with a song of triumph (D ii.209, 211, 221, 227) The Thirty-three are represented as being quite good Buddhists. Sakka their new chief and Brahmā address them in discourses suitable only for followers of the new movement (D ii.213, 221). See further Vin i.12; MN i.252; MN ii.78; MN iii.100; AN iii.287; AN iv.396 = Vv-a 18 (cpd with the people of Jambudīpa); v.59, 331, Vism 225, etc ■ See also tidasa.
-devaloka the god-world of the 33; freq. e.g. Ja i.202 Vism 399; Dhp-a iii.8; -bhavana the realm of the 33 gods Ja i.202; Vism 207 sq., 390, 416, and passim.
tayo + tiṃsa. Cp. Vedic trayastriṃśat
(nt.) lit. “so-much-ness,” i.e. relative extent or sphere, relatively Vism 481, Vism 482.
abstr. fr. tāva
terror, trembling, fear, fright, anxiety SN iii.57; Ja i.342; Ja iii.177, Ja iii.202; Mil 24. Cp. san˚.
see tasati2
(adj.) to be dreaded, dreadful, fearful Mil 149.
contraction of 1. taṃ ahaṃ: see ta˚; 2. te ahaṃ: see tvaṃ.
(adv.) the apostrophe form of iti, thus. See iti.
cp. Sk. iti
base of numeral three in compn; consisting of three, threefold; in numerical cpds. also three (3 times).
-kaṭuka threefold spices (kaṭuka-bhaṇḍa) Vv-a 186 -gāvuta a distance of 3/4 of a league (i.e. about 2 miles), Dhp-a i.108 (less than yojana, more than usabha), 131, 396; ii.43, 61, 64, 69; iii.202, 269; Vv-a 227; B. on SN i.52 (sarīra); -catu three or four Dhp-a i.173; -cīvara (nt.) the 3 robes of a bhikkhu consisting of: diguṇā sanghāṭi, ekacciya uttarāsanga ekacciya antaravāsaka Vin i.289, Vin i.296; Vin ii.302. ticīvarena avippavāsa Vin i.109 sq ■ Vism 60, Vism 66; Dhp-a iv.23. -tālamattaṃ 3 palm-trees high Dhp-a ii.62 -daṇḍa 1. a tripod as one of the requisites of a hermit to place the water-pot on (kuṇḍikā) Ja i.8 (tidaṇḍakuṇḍikādike tāpasa-parikkhārā), 9 (hanging from the kāja); ii.317 (see tedaṇḍika).
2. part of a chariot AN iv.191 (v.l. daṇḍa only). -diva the 3 heavens (that is the Tāvatiṃsa heaven) DN ii.167, DN ii.272 (tidivûpapanna) SN i.96 (˚ṃ ṭhānaṃ upeti), 181 (ākankha-māno ˚ṃ anuttaraṃ). -pada [cp. Vedic tripad or tripād, Gr. τρίπους Lat. tripes: tripod] consisting of 3 feet or (in prosody of 3 padas Snp 457 (w. ref. to metre Sāvittī); -(p)pala threefold Vism 339; -pallattha “turning in 3 ways, i.e. skilled in all occupations (Kern, Toev.: zeer listig Ja i.163 (of miga; Com. expl. as lying on 3 sides of its lair); -piṭaka the 3 Piṭakas Vism 62, Vism 241; Dhp-a i.382 -peṭaka = tepiṭaka Mil 90; tipeṭakin at Vin v.3 -maṇḍala (nt.) the 3 circles (viz. the navel & the 2 knees) Vin ii.213 (˚ṃ paṭicchādento parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsento ); cp. Vin. Texts i.155; -yojana a distance of 3 leagues, i.e. 20 miles, or fig. a long dist.; Vism 392 (tiyojanika setacchatta); Dhp-a ii.41 (˚magga); Vv-a 75 (˚mattake vihāraṃ agamāsi); Pv-a 216 (sā ca pokkharaṇī Vesaliyā ˚mattake hoti); ˚satika 300 cubits long Ja ii.3 -loka the 3 worlds (i.e. kāma, rūpa, arūpa-loka) Sdhp 29, Sdhp 276, Sdhp 491 (cp. tebhūmaka); -vagga consisting of 3 divisions or books DN-a i.2 (Dīghāgamo vaggato t. hoti) -(v)aṅgika having 3 angas (of jhāna) Dhs 161; -vassika for the 3 seasons (-gandha-sālibhattaṃ bhuñjantā) Dhp-a ii.9; Ja i.66 (id.); -vidha 3 fold, of sacrifice (yañña DN i.128, DN i.134, DN i.143; of aggi (fire) Ja i.4 & Mil 97; Vism 147 (˚kalyāṇatā). -visākha a three-forked frown on the forehead SN i.118; MN i.109; -sandhi consisting of 3 spaces Ja vi.397 (tāya senāya Mithilā t ■ parivāritā) expld as an army made up of elephants, chariots, cavalry and infantry, with a space between each two.
Vedic tris, Av. priś, Gr. τρίς, Lat. ter (fr. ters → *tris, cp. testis → *tristo, trecenti → *tricenti), Icl. prisvar Ohg. driror
(tiṃsa˚) the number 30; DN i.81≈(tiṃsaṃ pi jātiyo); SN ii.217 (t ■ mattā bhikkhū); dat. instr. tiṃsāya AN v.305 (dhammehi samannāgato); Snp p.87 (pi dadāmi) Pv-a 281 (vassasahassehi): t ■ yojana-maggaṃ (āgato) Dhp-a ii.76 Dhp-a ii.79; Dhp-a iii.172; Pv-a 154; ˚yojanika kantāra Dhp-a ii.193 (cp. 192); Ja v.46 (magga); Dhp-a i.26 (vimāna) t ■ vassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṃ (of Konāgamana Buddha) DN ii.3; t ■ mattāni vassāni Mil 15; t ■ vassasahassāni Pv-a 281 = Dhp-a ii.10. So of an immense crowd: tiṃsa bhikkhu-sahassāni DN ii.6; tiṃsa-mattā sūkarā Ja ii.417; ˚sahassa-bhikkhū Dhp-a i.24.
Vedic triṃśat, cp. Lat. trīginta, Oir. tricha
(adj.-n.) consisting of 3, a triad SN ii.218 (t ■ bhojana); Dhp-a iv.89 (-nipāta, the book of the triads, a division of the Jātaka), 108 (t ■ catukka-jhāna the 3 & the 4 jhānas); Mil 12 (tika-duka-paṭimaṇḍitā dhammasanganī); Vism 13 sq.; Dhs-a 39 (-duka triad & pair).;
Vedic trika
a physician, a doctor AN v.219; Ja i.4 (adj. & vejja); iv.361; Pv-a 233.
fr. tikicchati
to treat medically, to cure Vin i.276; SN i.222; Mil 172, Mil 272, Mil 302. Caus. tikicchāpeti Ja i.4.
also cikicchati = Sk. cikitsati. Desid. of cit, to aim at, think upon, in pregnant sense of endeavouring to heal
(f.) the art of healing, practice of medicine DN i.10 (dāraka˚ infant healing); Snp 927 (˚ṃ māmako na seveyya) ■ See also tekiccha.
from last
at Ja v.291 in “yāva majjhantikā tikkam āgami yeva” is to be read as “yāva majjhantik’ âtikkamm’ âgami yeva.”
(adj.) sharp, clever, acute, quick (only fig. of the mind), in tikkh-indriya (opp. mud-indriya Nd ii.2353p = Pts i.121 = Pts ii.195; & tikkha-paññatā AN i.45.
= tikhiṇa
(adv.) three times (cp. tayo II. C 2), esp. in phrase vanditvā t. padakkhiṇaṃ katvā “having performed the reverent parting salutation 3 times” Vv-a 173, Vv-a 219; t. sāvesi he announced it 3 times Ja ii.352; Dhp-a ii.4; t. paggaṇhāpesi offered 3 times Pv-a 74. See also Ja iv.267; Ja v.382; Ja vi.71; Dhp-a ii.5, Dhp-a ii.42, Dhp-a ii.65, Dhp-a ii.338; Dhp-a iv.122 & passim.;
Sk. trikṛtvaḥ
(adj.) pointed, sharp pungent, acrid; fig. “sharp,” clever, cunning, acute (in this meaning only in contr. form tikkha) Ja v.264; Dhp-a ii.9; Dhp-a iv.13; Pv-a 152, Pv-a 221 (= tippa). (ati-tikhinatā Mil 278. See also tippa & tibba & cp. tejo.;
Vedic tīkṣṇa of which t. is the diaeretic form, whereas the contracted forms are tiṇha (q.v. & tikkha. Cp. also Sk. tikta pp. of; tij, tejate. From *steg in Gr. στίζω “stitch” & στικτός, Lat. instīgo Ohg. stehhan, Ger. stecken, E. stick
(adj.) dry, hard, rough Ja vi.212 (˚sela hard rock).
pp. of tasati1
to stand, etc ■ I. Forms: pres. ind. tiṭṭhati (Snp 333, Snp 434; Pv i.51); imper. 2nd tiṭṭha, 3rd tiṭṭhatu ppr. tiṭṭhaṃ, tiṭṭhanto, tiṭṭhamāna; pot. tiṭṭhe (Snp 918, Snp 968) & tiṭṭheyya (Sn. 942); fut. ṭhassati (Ja i.172 Ja i.217); aor. aṭṭhāsi (Ja i.279, pl. aṭṭhaṃsu Ja ii.129) aṭṭhā (cp. agā, orig. impf.) (Snp 429; Ja i.188); inf ṭhātuṃ (Pv-a 174); ger. ṭhatvā (Snp 887); grd. ṭhānīya (Pv-a 72) ■ pp. ṭhita, Caus. ṭhapeti. An apparent Med ■ Pass. ṭhīyati, as found in cpd. pati-ṭṭhīyati is to be expld as Med. of paṭi + sthyā (see thīna), and should be written paṭi-tthīyati. See under patiṭṭhīyati. See also ṭhāna & ṭhiti ■ II.; Meanings.
1. to stand stand up, to be standing (see ṭhāna I. 1a): ṭhānakappana-vacanaṃ nisajjādi-paṭikkhepato Pv-a 24; opp to walking or lying down: tiṭṭhaṃ caraṃ nisinno vā Snp 151, Snp 193; tiṭṭhamānāya eva c’ assā gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ ahosi “she was delivered standing” Ja i.52; ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi Pv-a 68, etc.; cankamana-koṭiyaṃ ṭhatvā Pv-a 79.
2. to stop, stay, abide; to last, endure be at rest; fig. to remain in, abide by, acquiesce in (see ṭhāna I. 1b). In imper. tiṭṭhatu it approaches the meanings of ṭhapeti viz. leave it alone, let it be so all right. yāva kāyo ṭhassati tāva naṃ dakkhinti deva-manussā (as long as the body shall last) DN i.46 tiṭṭhe shall he live on (cp. ṭhāna II.d Snp 1053, Snp 1072 = Nd ii.283, tiṭṭheyya saṭṭhikappasahassāni to stay on indefinitely); tiṭṭheyya kappaṃ DN ii.103. tiṭṭhantī anto vimānasmiṃ “remaining inside the castle” Pv i.101; tiṭṭha tāva “stop please” Ja ii.352; tiṭṭhabhadantika one who bids the guest stay (combd w ehi-bh˚) DN i.166; MN i.342; AN i.295; AN ii.206: ovāde ṭhatvā (abiding by) Ja i.153; Ja vi.367; similarly Ja vi.336-Imper. tiṭṭhatu Ja iv.40; Mil 14; Pv-a 74.
3. to live (on = instr.), behave, exist, be (see ṭhāna I. 2); to be in a certain condition [gati, cp. ṭhāna II. (c)]. Often periphrastically for finite verb (with ger.: cp. gata ṭhita) tiṭṭhantam enaṃ jānāti (he knows their “gati” Snp 1114 (see Nd ii.283); āhārena tiṭṭhati Pv-a 27 (is supported by, cp. ṭhiti); yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā (outliving their lives) Pv-a 66; karuṇa-ṭhānīya (= *kāruṇayitabba) deserving pity Pv-a 72; yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi (how you are or look!) Vv 441, etc ■ with ger.: pharitvā aṭṭhāsi (pervaded) Ja vi.367; aṭṭhiṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsi (cut through to the bone) Ja iv.415; gehaṃ samparivāretvā aṭṭhaṃsu (encircled the house) Pv-a 22.
Frequentative of Vedic sthā, stand (cp. sthāna, Lat. sto: see ṭhāna) = Av. hiśtaiti, Gr. ι ̔́στημι, Lat sisto
(nt.) grass, herb; weed; straw; thatch hay, litter SN iii.137 (tiṇa, kasā, kusa, babbaja, bīraṇa) satiṇakaṭṭhodaka full of grass, wood & water (of an estate) DN i.87, DN i.111, etc.; sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā rajo vā tiṇaṃ vā ussāvo vā (dust & weeds) DN ii.19; AN i.145 t. + paṇṇa (grass & leaves;1) AN i.183; Vv-a 5 ■ Ja i.108 (dabba˚), 295; iii.53; Pv i.81 (harita t.); iv.148; Vism 353 (kuṇṭha˚); DN-a i.77 (alla˚ fresh grass); Pv-a 7 (weed), 62 (grass), 112; Dhp-a iv.121; Mil 47 (thatch) 224 (id.).
-aṇḍupaka a roll of grass Vin i.208 = Vin iii.249; -āgāra a thatched cottage AN i.101 (+ naḷāgāra); -ukkā a firebrand of dry grass or hay SN ii.152; SN iii.185; Ja i.212 Ja i.296; Vism 428; Dhp-a i.126; Thag-a 287; Bdhd 107 -karala a wisp of grass Dhp-a iii.38; -kājaka a load of g Dhp-a iv.121; -gahana a thicket of g., a jungle AN i.153 -cuṇṇa crushed & powdered (dry) grass or herbs Vin i.203; Vv-a 100 (-rajânukiṇṇa); -jāti grass-creeper Vv-a 162; -dāya a grass-jungle SN ii.152; -dosa damaged by weeds (khetta) Dhp 356; Pv-a 7; -pupphaka (-roga sickness caused by the flowering of grass, hay-fever Mil 216; -purisaka a straw-man, a scarecrow Mil 352; Vism 462; Dhs-a 111; -bhakkha eating grass; of animals MN iii.167; of ascetics DN i.166; Pp 55; AN i.241 AN i.295; -bhusa chaff, litter, dry grass Vv-a 47; -rukkha a shrub; -vatthāraka one of the seven Adhikaraṇasamathas (ways in which litigation may be settled). In case mutual complaints of breach of the rules have been brought before a chapter, then the chapter may decline to go into the details and, with the consent of the litigants, declare all the charges settled. See Vin Texts, iii.30–34. This is the “covering over as if with grass” Vin ii.87 (in detail, cp. also tassapāpiyyasikā) DN iii.254; AN i.99; MN ii.250; -santhāraka a mat of grass Vin i.286; Vin ii.113, Vin ii.116; Ja i.360.
Vedic tṛṇa, from *ter (cp. tarati) to pierce, orig. “point” (= blade); Goth. paúrnus, Ags. porn = E thorn, Ger. dorn
a sort of drum AN ii.117.
see tinduka.
one who has reached the other shore (always fig.) gone through, overcome, one who has attained Nibbāna. Ogha˚ gone through the great flood SN i.3, SN i.142; Snp 178, Snp 823, Snp 1082, Snp 1101, Snp 1145; DN iii.54; Snp 21 (+ pāragata), 359 (+ parinibbuta), 515 545 (tiṇṇo tāres’ imaṃ pajaṃ); Iti 123 (tiṇṇo tārayataṃ varo); Dhp 195 (-sokapariddava); Nd ii.282.
-kathaṅkatha (adj.) having overcome doubt, free from doubt Snp 17, Snp 86, Snp 367; -vicikiccha = prec. Vin i.16; DN i.110; DN ii.224, DN ii.229; Pp 68; DN-a i.211.
pp. of tarati
sharp (of swords, axes, knives, etc.) DN i.56 (sattha); SN iv.160, SN iv.167 (kuṭhārī); AN iv.171; Snp 667 (˚dhāra), 673 (asipattavana); Ja i.253; Sdhp 381.
see tikhiṇa
to bear, endure, stand SN i.221; Snp 623; Dhp 321 = Nd ii.475 B7; Dhp 399 (titikkhissaṃ = sahissāmi Dhp-a iv.3) Ja v.81, Ja v.368.
Sk. titikṣate, Desid. of tij, cp. tijo & tikhiṇa.
(f.) endurance, forgiveness, longsuffering SN i.7; SN v.4; Dhp 184; Nd ii.203.
see last
satisfied (with = instr.) enjoying (c. gen.), happy, contented AN i.87 = Pp 26 (+ tappetar) Mil 249; Vv-a 86 (= pīṇita); Pv-a 46 (dibbâhārassa) 59 (= suhita), 109 (= pīṇita) ■ atitta dissatisfied, insatiate Ja i.440; Ja iii.275; Dhp 48 (kāmesu).
pp. of tappati2
(adj.) sharp, bitter (of taste) MN i.80 (˚alābu), 315 (id.); Pv-a 47 (id.; so read for tintaka lābu) Dhs 629 = Nd ii.540 (tittika; enumd between lavaṇa & kaṭuka); Dhs-a 320.
cp. Sk. tiktaka from tij
(nt.) bitterness, enumd with lavaṇattaṃ & kaṭukattaṃ at Mil 56 = Mil 63 (cp. Nd;2 540).
abstr. to tittaka
(f.) satisfaction (in = loc.) Dhp 186 = Thag-a 287 (na kahāpaṇavassena t. kāmesu vijjati); n atthi t. kāmānaṃ Thig 487; Ja v.486 (dhammesu) Vv-a 11; Pv-a 32 (˚ṃ gacchati find s.) 55 (paṭilabhati) 127.
from tappati2
in sama˚; at DN i.244, Vin i.230, brimful, of a river. Derivation & meaning doubtful. See the note at; Buddhist Suttas, 178, 9.
(adj.) satisfied, contented, so read at Ja iii.70 & vi.508 for kittimant.
titti + mant
partridge Ja i.218; Ja iii.538. -pattikā a kind of boot Vin i.186.
Onomat. cp. Vedic tittira & tittiri, Gr.; τατύρας pheasant, Lit. teterva heath-cock; Lat. tetrinnio to cackle
(adj.) belonging to a partridge, like a partridge Ja i.219 (brahmacariya).
fr. tittira
(nt.) 1. a fording place, landing place, which made a convenient bathing place DN ii.89 = Vin i.230 (Gotama˚ the G. ford) Ja i.339, Ja i.340 (titthāraṇa); ii.111; iii.228 (˚nāvika ferryman); 230 (nāvā˚ a ferry); iv.379; Pv ii.120; iii.64iv.122 (su˚); Dāvs. v.59 (harbour). Titthaṃ jānāti to know a “fording place,” i.e. a means or a person to help over a difficulty or doubt MN i.223 = AN v.349 (neg. 2. a sect (always with bad connotation. Promising to lead its votaries over into salvation, it only leads them into error).
-āyatana the sphere or fold of a sect (cp. titthiya Vin i.60, Vin i.69; Vin ii.279; MN i.483; AN i.173; Pp 22; Dhs 381, Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101n); DN-a i.118; Ledi Sadaw in J.P.T.S. 1913, 117–118; -kara a “ford-maker, founder of a sect DN i.47, DN i.116; MN i.198; Snp p.. 90, 92; Mil 4, Mil 6, etc.; -ññutā knowledge of a ford, in fig sense of titthaṃ jānāti (see above) Ne 29, Ne 80.
Vedic tīrtha, from *ter, tarate, to pass through, orig. passage (through a river), ford
(adj.).
Possible reading in Burmese MSS. for tittika. But the two compound letters (tt and tth are so difficult to distinguish that it is uncertain which of the two the scribe really meant
an heretic Vin i.54, Vin i.84, Vin i.136, Vin i.159 (˚samādāna), 306 (˚dhaja), 320; SN i.65; SN iv.37, SN iv.394; DN iii.44, DN iii.46; Snp 381, Snp 891; Nd ii.38; Pts i.160; Pp 49; Vb 247. añña˚ e.g. Vin i.101; DN i.175 sq.; DN iii.130 sq.; Ja ii.415, Ja ii.417. -sāvaka a follower of an heretic teacher Vin i.172; Ja i.95 Vism 17.
from tittha 2, cp. Divy 817; Avs i.48; Avs ii.20. An adherent of another sect (often as añña˚)
a lunar day Dhp-a i.174; Pv-a 198.
Sk. tithi
(num.) thirty (cp. tiṃsa), esp. the thirty deities (pl.) or belonging to them (adj.). It is the round figure for 33, and is used as equivalent to tāvatiṃsa. Nandanaṃ rammaṃ tidasānaṃ mahāvanaṃ Pv iii.119 = Vv 1813; devā tidasā sahindakā Vv 301 Sdhp 420.
-ādhipati the Lord of the 30 (viz. Sakka) Vv 478 -inda ruler of the 30 Sdhp 411, Sdhp 478; -gaṇa the company of the 30; Snp 679 (Com. tettiṃsa); Vv 416; -gatin going to the 30 (as one of the gatis) Vv 3512 (= tidasabhavanaṃ gata Tāvatiṃsadevanikāyaṃ uppanna Vv-a 164) -pura the city of the 30, i.e. Heaven Mil 291; -bhavana the state of the 30, i.e. heavenly existence Vv-a 164 (= Tāvatiṃsabhavana).
Vedic tridaśa
(adv.) in three ways or parts, threefold Mil 282 (-pabhinna nāgarājā).
ti + dhā
(adj.) wet, moist Mil 286; Dhp-a ii.40 (˚mukha).
= timita from temeti
at Pv-a 47 (˚alābu) is to be read as tittaka˚.
(nt.) greed, desire; (adj.) greedy. Ep. of a pāpabhikkhu AN v.149 (Com. tintiṇaṃ vuccati taṇhā, tāya samannāgato āsankābahulo vā); Vb 351 (tintiṇaṃ tintiṇāyanā, etc. = loluppaṃ). Tintinati & Tintinayati;
to become sick, to swoon, to (stiffen out in a) faint Ja i.243 (tintiṇanto corresp. with mucchita); vi.347 (tintiṇāyamāna, v.l. tiṇāy˚).
either = Sk. timirayati to be obscured, from tim in timira, or from stim (Sk. *tistimāyati → *stistim˚ after tiṣṭhati → *stiṣṭhati; = P. titiṇāyati) to become stiff, cp. timi, thīna and in meaning mucchati. The root tam occurs in same meaning in cpd. nitammati (q.v. = Sk. nitāmyati) at Ja iv.284 expld by atikilamati
the tree Diospyros embryopteris DN i.178 (v.l. tiṇḍ˚; Ja v.99; tiṇḍukāni food in a hermitage Ja iv.434; Ja vi.532 ■ tindukakandarā Npl. the T. cave Vin ii.76 ■ See also timbaru & timbarūsaka.;
Sk. tinduka
lead, tin Vin i.190 (˚maya); SN v.92; Ja ii.296; Mil 331 (˚kāra a worker in lead, tinsmith); Vism 174 (˚maṇḍala); Dhp-a iv.104 (˚parikhā).
cp. Sk. trapu, non-Aryan?
(nt.) a species of cucumber Ja v.37; Vv-a 147.
Sk. trapusa
(adj.) piercing, sharp acute, fierce; always & only with ref. to pains, esp pains suffered in Niraya. In full comb;ns sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā tippā kharā MN i.10; AN ii.116, AN ii.143, AN ii.153 ekantadukkhā t. kaṭukā ved. MN i.74; bhayānaka ekantatippa Niraya Pv iv.19 (= tikhiṇadukkha˚ Pv-a 221); nerayikā sattā dukkhā t. kaṭukā ved˚ vediyamānā Mil 148.
a variant of tibba = Sk. tīvra, presumably from tij (cp. tikhiṇa), but by Bdhgh connected w tap (tapati, burn): tippā ti bahalā tāpana-vasena vā tippā Com. to Anguttara (see M i.526)
(adj.) probably a contamination of two roots of different meaning; viz. tij & tim; (of tamas) or = stim to be motionless, cp. styā under thīna] 1. sharp, keen eager: tibbagārava very devout AN ii.21; Ne 112 (cp tīvraprasāda Avs i.130); t ■ cchanda DN iii.252, DN iii.283. 2. dense, thick; confused, dark, dim: t ■ rāga Dhp 349 (= bahalarāga Dhp-a iv.68); AN ii.149; tibbo vanasaṇḍo avijjāya adhivacanaṃ SN iii.109; tibbasārāga (kāmesu SN iii.93 = Iti 90; AN ii.30; tibbo manussaloko (dark dense) Mil 7; ˚andhakāra dense darkness Vism 500 sq. ˚kilesu deep blemish (of character) Vism 87.
a large fish, a leviathan; a fabulous fish of enormous size. It occurs always in combn w. timiṅgala, in formula timi timingala timitimingala, which should probably be reduced to one simple timitimingala (see next).
Derivation unknown. Sk. timi
in combn w. timi, timitimiṅgala. Sk. has timingila & timingilagila redupl. in 2nd syllable where P. has redupl. in 1st; fisheater redupl. as intens. = greedy or monstrous fisheater a fabulous fish of enormous size, the largest fish in existence Vin ii.238 = AN iv.200 = Nd ii.2353q; Pts ii.196; Mil 377. At Ud 54 sq. & Mil 262 we find the reading timi timingala timirapingala, which is evidently faulty A Sanskritized form of t. is timitimingala at Divy 502 See timiratipingala, & cp. also the similar Sk. cilicima a sort of fish.;
timi + gila, gl, see note on gala
(adj.) dark; nt. darkness Vv 323 (t ■ tamba) Ja iii.189 (t ■ rukkha); vanatimira a flower Ja iv.285 Ja v.182.
Sk. timira fr. tim = tam (as in tamas), to which also belong tibba 2 & tintiṇāti. This is to be distinguished from; tim in temeti to (be or) make wet See tama
(nt.) a great ocean fish, Dhs-a 13, v. timingala.
(nt.) gloom, darkness SN iii.124 (= Māra).
abstr. to timirāyita, pp. of timirayati to obscure, denom. to timira
(nt.) darkness Ja iii.433 (andhakāra-timissāya); Pp 30 (andh˚-timisāya); Mil 283
Vedic tamisrā = tamas
(f.) darkness, a very dark night Vv 96; Ja iv.98.
timisa + ka
a certain tree (Strychnos nux vomica or Diospyros) Ja vi.336; ˚tthanī (f.) “with breasts like the t fruit” Snp 110; Ja vi.457 (Snp-a 172: taruṇadārikā) Vv-a 137 (t ■ nādasadisa).
= timbarūsaka Ja vi.529.
= timbaru (Diospyros or Strychnos) Vin iii.59; Vv 3327 (= tindukaphala Vv-a 147; tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarūsakan ti ca vadanti) Dhp-a iii.315.
(adv.) across, obliquely; in ˚bhūta deviating, going wrong, swerving from the right direction DN-a i.89 (see under tiracchāna-kathā).
Vedic tiryañc, obliquely, from *ter (tarati). Goth. pairh, Ohg. durh, E. through; cp tiriyaṃ
an animal Iti 92 (tiracchānaṃ ca yoniyo for tiracchāna-yoniyo); Vb 339 (˚gāminī paṭipadā leading to rebirth among beasts); Vv-a 23 (manussatiracchāna an animal-man, wild man, “werwolf”).
-kathā “animal talk”; wrong or childish talk in general Vin i.188; DN i.7, DN i.178; DN iii.54; Vism 127; expld at DN-a i.89 by anīyānikattā sagga-mokkha-maggānaṃ tiraccha-bhūtā kathā; -gata an animal, a beast Vin iv.7; SN iii.152 = DN-a i.23; (t. pāṇā) MN iii.167 (t. pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā); Nd ii.on Snp 72 (t ■ pāṇā); Ja i.459 (= vanagocara); Vb 412 sq.; -yoni the realm of the brute creation, the animals. Among the 5 gatis (niraya t manussā devā pettivisaya) it counts as an apāyagati a state of misery DN i.228; DN iii.234; SN i.34; SN iii.225 sq. iv. 168, 307; AN i.60; AN ii.127, AN ii.129; Pv iv.111; Vism 103 Vism 427; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 166; -yonika (& yoniya; AN i.37) belonging to the realm of the animals SN v.356; -vijjā a low art, a pseudo-science Vin ii.139; DN i.9 sq.
for ˚gata = Sk. tiraścīna (˚gata) = tiraśca; “going horizontally,” i.e. not erect. Cp. tiraccha tiriyaṃ, tiro
(adv.) transversely, obliquely, horizontally (as opp to uddhaṃ vertically, above, & adho beneath), slanting across. In comb;n uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ sabbadhi “in all directions whatever” DN i.251 = AN ii.129; similarly uddhaṃ adho t. vâpi majjhe Snp 1055; with uddhaṃ adho DN i.23, DN i.153; Vism 176 (where expld) ■ AN ii.48; Snp 150, Snp 537; Ja i.96; Iti 120; Dhp-a i.40 (dvāra-majjhe t across the doorway), 47 (sideways); DN-a i.312; Kp-a 248.
-taraṇa ferrying across, adj. ˚ā nāvā, a vessel crossing over, a traject Vin iv.65.
Vedic tiryañc (tiryak) to tiras, see tiro & cp. perhaps Ger. quer = E. thwart, all to; *ter in tarati
(f.) a kind of grass or creeper AN iii.240, AN iii.242 (tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti; Com. dabbatiṇa).
a certain tree Ja v.46.
(nt.) the tree Symplocos racemosa, also a garment made of its bark Vin i.306 (˚ka); DN i.166 = AN i.295; MN i.343; Pp 51.
(prep. & adv.) (always ˚-) across, beyond, over, outside afar. See also tiraccha & tiriyaṃ.;
-karaṇī (f.) a curtain, a veil (lit. “drawing across” Vin i.276; Vin ii.152; -kucchigata having left the womb DN ii.13; -kuḍḍa outside the fence or wall, over the wall Vin iv.265 (˚kuḍḍe uccāraṃ chaḍḍeti); DN i.78; AN iii.280 (in phrase tirobhāvaṃ t. kuḍḍaṃ t. pākāraṃ t ■ pabbataṃ asajjamāno gacchati to denote power of transplacement); Pv i.51 (˚kuḍḍesu tiṭṭhanti: the Tirokuḍḍa-Sutta, Khp VII.); Vism 176, Vism 394; Dhp-a i.104; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 31; -gāma a distant village Vin iii.135; -chada “outside the veil,” conspicuous Ja vi.60; -janapada a distant or foreign country DN i.116; -pākāra beyond or over a fence (˚pākāraṃ or ˚pākāre) Vin iv.266; see also ˚kuḍḍa; -bhāva (ṃ) beyond existence, out of existence magic power of going to a far away place or concealment Vism 393 sq. (= a-pākaṭa-pāṭihāriya), see also under ˚kuḍḍa. -raṭṭha a foreign kingdom DN i.161 (= pararaṭṭha DN-a i.286).
Vedic tiras across, crossways, from; *ter of tarati = to go through; cp. Av tarō, Lat. trans, Cymr. tra
1. (adj.) one who is outside, or absent Vin iii.185.
2. (adv.) in tirokkha-vāca one who speaks abusively or with disregard Ja v.78.
= tiras + ka, cp. tiraskāra disdain abuse
(m. nt.) the sesame plant & its seed (usually the latter, out of which oil is prepared: see tela), Sesamum Indicum. Often comb;d with taṇḍula e.g. AN i.130 = Pp 32; Ja i.67; Ja iii.53 ■ Vin i.212 (navātilā); AN iv.108; Snp p.126; Ja i.392; Ja ii.352; Vism 489 (ucchu˚); Dhp-a i.79; Pv-a 47 (tilāni pīḷetvā telavaṇijjaṃ karoti).
-odana rice with sesame Ja iii.425; -kakka sesame paste Vin i.205; -tela ses. oil Vv-a 54 (˚ṃ pātukāma) Dhp-a iii.29; Bdhd 105; -piññāka tila seed-cake, oilcake Vv-a 142; -piṭṭha sesamum-grinding, crushed s seed Vin iv.341. -muṭṭhi a handful of ses. Ja ii.278 -rāsi a heap of t. seeds Vv-a 54; -vāha a cartload of t seeds AN v.173 = Snp p.126; -saṅgulikā a ses. cake Dhp-a ii.75.
Vedic tila m.
1. a spot, stain, mole, freckle MN i.88; SN i.170; Vv-a 253; Dhp-a iv.172 (˚ṃ vā kālakaṃ vā adisvā).
2. a kind of tree Vv 67 (= bandhu-jīvaka-puppha-sadisa-pupphā ekā rukkha-jāti).
tila + ka, from its resemblance to a sesame seed
at J. iv.364 acc. to Kern (Toev. ii.91) to be read as nilañchaka.
(num.) three hundred Ja vi.427 (˚mattā nāvā). See also under tayo.
ti + sata
(nt.) [Vedic tiras from *ter, tarati; orig. the opposite bank, the farther side (of a river or ocean), cp. tittha a shore, bank Vin i.1; DN i.222, DN i.244; AN ii.29, AN ii.50; Dhp 85; Snp 672; Ja i.212, Ja i.222, Ja i.279; Ja ii.111, Ja ii.159; Dhs 597; Vb 71 sq.; Vism 512 (orima˚); Pv-a 142, Pv-a 152 ■ tīra-dassin finding the shore SN iii.164; AN iii.368 ■ a-tīra-dassanī (f.) not seeing the shore (nāvā a ship) Ja v.75.
measurement, judgment, recognition, Nd ii.413 (v.l. tir˚); Ne 54 (+ vipassanā), 82 (≈ñāṇa), 191; Vism 162 ■ tīraṇa is one of the 3 pariññās, viz. t˚, pahāna˚, ñāta-pariññā. See under pariññā.
from tīreti 2
(adj.) dwelling on the banks of… Vin ii.287.
from tīra
1. to bring through, to finish, to execute (business), to accomplish: karaṇīyaṃ Mil 7; Pv-a 203; kiccaṃ Pv-a 278.
2. to measure, judge recognize, always in formula tūleti tīreti vibhāveti (Nd ii.tul˚ tir˚, etc.) as interpretation of jānāti; pp tīrita (Nd ii.tirita) Pts ii.200; Nd ii.under ñāta & No. 413.;
Caus. of tarati
(pl.) Name of a people in the time of Buddha Kakusandha SN ii.191.
(adv.) a period of three days, for 3 days; usually as cpd. dvīhatīhaṃ 2 or 3 days (see dvīha Ja ii.103, etc.
tri + aha
(indecl.) however, but, yet, now, then (similar in appl. to tāva); kin tu but (= quid nunc). Frequent in late verse ante tu, J.P.T.S. 1884, 5, 31, 37 etc. J.P.T.S. 1913 53; Bd’s Man. 1152 & c. Usually comb;d with eva: tv eva however Snp p.141; na tv eva not however, but not AN v.173.
Vedic tu, belonging to pron. base of 2nd sg. tvaṃ = Lat. tu; Gr. τύ, τοί = indeed, however (orig ethical dat, of σύ), τοίνυν, τοίγαρ; Goth. pu, etc., cp tuvaṃ
(adj.) [Sk. tunga, tum to stand out, cp. Gr. τύμβος hillock, Lat. tumeo & tumulus, Mir. tomm hill high, prominent, long Ja i.89; Ja iii.433 (pabbata, expld however by tikhiṇa, sharp, rough); Dāvs. iv.30.
-nāsika one with a prominent or long nose SN ii.284 cp. saṇha-tunga-sadisī nāsikā Thig 258; -vaṇṭaka having a long stalk; Name of a plant Ja vi.537.
(adj.) empty, vain, deserted very often combd with ritta DN i.55; DN iii.53 (˚kumbhi) MN i.207; Ja i.209 (˚hattha, empty-handed); vi.365; Snp 883; Pp 45, Pp 46; Mil 5 (+ palāpa), 10 (id.), 13; Dhp-a ii.43; Pv-a 202; Sdhp 431.
Sk. tuccha, prob. rel. to Lat. tesqua deserted place, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.
= tuccha; always combd w. rittaka DN i.240; SN iii.141; MN i.329.
Pass. of tudati.
pleased, satisfied; often combd w. haṭṭha (q.v.) i.e. tuṭṭha-haṭṭha Ja i.19 or haṭṭha-tuṭṭha Ja ii.240; cp. tuṭṭha-pahaṭṭha Ja ii.240 ■ Snp 683; Iti 103; Ja i.62 (˚mānasa), 87, 266 (˚citta), 308 (id.); iv.138 ■ tuṭṭhabba (grd.) to be pleased with Vin iv.259.
pp. of tussati to be satisfied
(f.) pleasure, joy, enjoyment SN i.48; Dhp 331 (nom. tuṭṭhī); Ja i.60, Ja i.207.
from tussati
(nt.) the beak of birds, the mouth, snout SN v.148 (of a monkey); Ja i.222; Ja iv.210; Dhp-a i.394.
Sk. tuṇḍa, prob. dial. for tunda which belongs to tudati
(nt.) = tuṇḍa Ja i.222; Ja iii.126.
see ahi˚.
(adj.) having a beak; n. a pecker, fig. a tax-collector Ja v.102 (= adhamma-bali-sādhaka 103).
from tuṇḍi
(adj.) silent Ja iv.25 (= kiñci avadanto).
fr. tūṣṇīṃ, see next
(indecl.) silently, esp. in phrase tuṇhī ahosi he remained silent, as a sign of consent or affirmative answer (i.e. he had nothing to say against it) DN ii.155; AN v.194; Dhp 227; Snp 720 (tuṇhī yāti mahodadhi); Pv-a 117.
-bhāva silence, attitude of consent, usually in form adhivāsesi tuṇhī-bhāvena he agreed Vin i.17; Snp p.104, etc ■ SN ii.236, SN ii.273 (ariyo t ■ bhāvo); MN i.161 (id.) AN iv.153 (id.) ■ Mil 15; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 20, etc.; -bhūta silent Snp p.140; Vv 20; Dhp-a 172, etc.
Sk. tūṣṇīṃ acc. sg. of fem. abstr. tūṣṇī, used adverbially, from tussati
= taṇhāyati, misspelling at SN ii.13.
inorganic form for tūṇīra quiver Ja v.128, also as v.l. at Ja v.48.
(nt.) a pike for guiding elephants, a goad for driving cattle (cp. tomara & patoda) DN ii.266 (˚tomara); Ja iv.310 Ja v.268; Cp iii.5, 2 (t ■ vegahata).
Sk tottra, from tudati to prick, push
to strike with an instrument; to prick peck, pierce; to incite, instigate Ja iii.189 (= vijjhati) Pass. tujjati to be struck Thag 780; Vism 503 (cp vitujjati); Sdhp 279 ■ pp. tunna. See also tuṇḍa (beak = pecker), tutta (goad), tomara (lance = striker & thūpa (point).;
Vedic tudati; *steud, enlarged fr. *steu, cp. Lat. tundo, tudes (hammer); Goth. stautan, Ohg stozan (to push), E. stutter, Nhg. stutzen; Ags. styntan = E. stunt
(dual) husband & wife. See under dampati.
tu˚ = dial. for du˚, Sk. dve; dampati from dama = domus, Sk. daṃpati = Gr. δεσπότης; cp. also Kern, Toev. ii.93, who compares tuvantuva for duvanduva
struck Thig 162 (vyādhimaraṇa˚ str. with sickness and death).
pp. of tudati
any pointed instrument as a stick, a goad, a bolt, or (usually) a needle Vin i.290 (+ aggaḷa means of fastening); Ja i.8 (id.).
-kamma “needle-work,” tailoring, patching, sewing Ja iv.40; Ja vi.366; Vism 112. -kāra (& ˚ka) a (mending tailor Ja iv.38 (v.l. ˚ka); Vv-a 251 (˚ka); Pv-a 120) -vāya [Sk. tunnavāya] a “needle-weaver,” a tailor Vin ii.159; Ja vi.364, Ja vi.368 (˚vesaṃ gahetvā in the disguise of a tailor); Pv-a 161 (id.); Pv ii.914 (= tunnakāra Pv-a 120); Mil 331, Mil 365.
from tudati
(pron ■ adj.) oneself, himself, etc.; every or anybody (= quisque) yaṃ tumo karissati tumo va tena paññāyissati (quid quisque faciat) Vin ii.186 = AN iii.124; Snp 890 (cp. ātumānaṃ v.888), 908; Pv iii.24 (= attānaṃ Pv-a 181).
most likely apostrophe form of ātuma = attā, Sk. ātman self; cp. also Sk. tman oneself. See Oldenberg, KZ. xxv.319. Less likely = Sk. tva one or the other (Kern, Toev. s. v.). Expld by Com. to AN iii.124 as esa.
tumult, uproar, commotion Ja vi.247 (by Com. expld as “andhakāra,” darkness); Dpvs xvii.100.
Sk. tumala; to *teu, Lat. tumeo, tumulus, tumultus, etc. E. thumb (swelling), cp. tunga tūla
(m. nt.) 1. a kind of water vessel (udaka DN-a i.202), made of copper, wood or a fruit (like a calabash, cocoanut, etc., cp. kaṭāha, E. skull) Vin i.205 (loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, phala˚); ii.114 (˚kaṭāha of gourd); Ja iii.430 (udaka˚); iv.114; Dhp-a ii.193 (udaka˚)
2. a measure of capacity, esp. used for grain Ja i.233 (mahā˚), 467 (= 4 nāḷi p. 468); Mil 102.
possibly = Sk. tumra swollen (of shape), same root as tumula
(pron ■ adj.) like you, of your kind Snp 459; Ja vi.528; DN-a i.146.
tumhe + ādisa
.
pl. of pron. 2nd pers., see tuvaṃ
(adj.) swift, quick; only in composition with ˚ga, etc., “going swiftly,” denoting the horse; viz. turaga Vv-a 279; turaṅga Vv-a 281; Mil 192 (gaja˚, etc.), 352 (id.) 364; turaṅgama Dāvs v.56; turagamana Pv-a 57.
Vedic tura, cp. tvaraṇa
to be in a hurry, to be quick, hasten Ja vi.229 (mā turittho, Prohib.) ■ pp. turita. Cp. also tura, etc.
= tarati2
hastening, speedy, quick; hastily, in a hurry Snp 1014; Ja i.69 (turita-turita); Vv 808 (= sambhamanto Vv-a 311); DN-a i.319; Pv-a 181- aturita leisurely, with leisure, slow Ja i.87 ■ See also tuvaṭaṃ.
pp. of turati
(nt.) sometimes tūriya (e.g. Vv 54) musical instruments in general, usually referred to as comprising 5 kinds of special instruments (pañcangika t. e.g. Vv 54; 391; Vv-a 181, Vv-a 183, Vv-a 210, Vv-a 257), viz ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana, susira (Vv-a 37) Freq. in phrase nippurisehi turiyehi parivāriyamāna (or paricāriyamāna) “surrounded by (or entertained by) heavenly music” Vin i.15; DN ii.21; AN i.145; Ja i.58 ■ Vv 384; 412; 5024, 645; Pv iii.81; Dhp-a iii.460; Vv-a 92; Pv-a 74.
-sadda the sound of music, music Mvu vii.30.
Derivation uncertain, probably connected with tuleti, Sk. tūrya
a hen Thig 381 (= migī Thag-a 254) (v.l. korī, cp. Tamil kōḷi hen).
(adj.) only in negative atula incomparable, not to be measured, beyond compare or description Vv 304 (= anupama Vv-a 126); Pv ii.89 (= appamāṇa Pv-a 110); iii.32 (= asadisarūpa Pv-a 188); Mil 343.
see tuleti
(f.) weighing, rating; consideration, deliberation MN i.480; MN ii.174; Ne 8, Ne 41.
see tuleti
basil (common or sweet) Ja v.46 (˚gahana a thicket of b.; v.l. tūlasi); vi.536 (tuḷasi = tuḷasigaccha).
Derivation unknown
(f.) 1. a beam or pole for lifting, carrying or supporting, a rafter Vin ii.122; Vv-a 188 (+ gopānasī); Dhs-a 107.
2. a weighing pole or stick, scales balance AN i.88; Ja i.112; Dhp 268; Mil 356 (t. nikkhepanāya).
3. fig. measure (“weighing,” cp. tulanā) standard, rate SN ii.236 (+ pamāṇa).
-kūṭa false weighing, false weight (often combd with kaṃsakūṭa & mānakūṭa, false coining & false measuring DN i.5 = AN ii.209≈; DN-a i.79; Dhp-a i.239; -daṇḍa the beam or lever of a balance Ja i.113; -puttaka a goldsmith (using scales) Ja v.424 (or should it be tulādhuttaka ).
see tuleti. Vedic tulā; Gr. τάλας, τάλαντον (balance, weighing & weight = talentum),; τόλμα; Lat tollo (lift); Goth. pulan (to carry patiently, suffer) Ger. geduld, etc.
weighed, estimated, compared, gauged, considered Thig 153 (yattakaṃ esā t. what she is worth = lakkhaṇaññūhi parichinna Thag-a 139); Nd ii.under ñāta (as syName of tirita); Pv-a 52 (in expln of mita measured).
pp. of tuleti
a flying fox Ja vi.537.
Sk.?
to weigh, examine, compare; match, equal MN i.480; Thag 107; Ja vi.283-ger. tulayitvā MN i.480 ■ grd. tuliya & tulya (see sep.) ■ pp.; tulita.
from tulā; Lat. tollo, etc.
(also tulla Ja iv.102) (adj.) to be weighed, estimated, measured; matched equal, comparable Snp 377; Ja iii.324; Pv-a 87 (= samaka) Mostly in the negative atulya incomparable, not having its equal Snp 83, Snp 683; Ja iv.102 (atulla); Mil 249 (atuliyā guṇā), 343 (id.)-See also tula. Tuvam & Tvam
orig. grd. of tuleti
Snp 983, Snp 1030; Ja i.279; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 73, etc ■ (b) ta˚, tay˚, taṃ (acc. MN i.487; Snp 31, Snp 241, Snp 1043, Snp 1049; Ja i.222; Ja ii.159; Pv i.101; ii.16; tayā (instr.) Snp 335, Snp 344; Ja i.222; Pv ii.36 (= bhotiyā Pv-a 86): Pv-a 71; tayi (loc.) Snp 382; Ja i.207; tava (gen.) Snp 1102, Snp 1110; Ja ii.153; Pv-a 106–2. pl.: tumh˚; [Sk. yuṣm˚]: tumhe (nom. & acc. Iti 31; Ja i.221 (acc.); Pv i.112. Also as pl. majesticus in addressing one person Ja ii.102; Ja iv.138; tumhaṃ (gen.) Pv-a 58 (for sg.), 78; tumhākaṃ (gen. dat. SN ii.65; Iti 32; Ja i.150; Ja ii.102; tumhesu (loc.) Ja i.292 (for sg.); tumhehi (instr.) Ja ii.154; Pv i.512 ■ II. Enclitic forms (in function of an ethical dative “in your interest,” therefore also as possessive gen. or as instrumental or any other case of the interested person according to construction). 1. sg. te DN ii.127 (dat.) Snp 76, Snp 120, Snp 1099 (dat.), 1102 (dat.); Ja i.151; Ja ii.159 (instr.); Pv i.23 (dat.); ii.32 (gen.), 46 (gen.).
2. pl vo SN iii.33 (instr.) Snp 135, Snp 172 (dat.), 331 (dat.); Ja i.222 (acc.); ii.133; iii.395 (gen.).
Sk. tvaṃ & (Ved.) tuaṃ, cp. also part. tu; Gr. τύ, σύ; Lat. tu; Goth. pu; E. thou, etc.; Oir. tū proName of 2nd pers. in foll. forms & applications:; 1. Full forms: 1. sg.: (a) tv˚, tu˚, tuyh˚;: nom. tvaṃ (in prose & verse) Snp 179, Snp 241, Snp 1029, Snp 1058; Ja i.279 Ja ii.159; Pv i.84. Also for nom. pl. at Ja i.391, Ja i.395 Ja vi.576; tuvaṃ (in verse) Snp 1064, Snp 1102, Snp 1121; Ja iii.278 Ja iii.394; Pv i.33; ii.32; also for acc. Snp 377; Pv ii.81 tuyhaṃ (gen. & dat.) [Sk. tubhyaṃ
(adv.) quickly AN v.342; Ja i.91; Ja ii.61; Ja vi.519 (as tvātaṃ ); Mil 198; Vism 305 Vism 313.
Sk. tvaritaṃ, cp. tūrta
(for *Sk. dvandvayati, denom. fr. dvandva] to share (with = loc. or abl.) Vin ii.10, Vin ii.124; Vin iv.288.
(nt.) quarrel, strife MN i.110, MN i.410.
Sk. dvandva, with dialect. t. (cp. tudampati), not (with Müller, P. Gr. 38) through confusion with pron. tvaṃ
to be satisfied, pleased or happy Ja iii.280; Ja iv.138; Mil 210. Cp. tuṭṭha (pp.), tuṭṭhi, tuṇhī, tosa, tosana toseti.
Sk. tuṣyati to *teus to be quiet, contented, happy
(nt.) satisfying, pleasing, in ˚kāraṇa cause for satisfaction or delight Ja iii.448.
Sk. toṣaṇa
= tūṇī, Vism 251.
(f.) a quiver (lit. “carrier”) Ja ii.403 (dhanuṃ tūṇiñ ca nikkhippa); v.47.
Sk. *tūṇa & tūṇī, to; *tI̊n: see under tulā; cp. Lat. tollo. On ṇ → l. cp. cikkaṇa & cikkhala, guṇa → guḷa, kiṇi → kili, etc.
(nt.) a tuft of grass, cotton Vin ii.150 (3 kinds: rukkha˚, latā˚ poṭaki˚); Snp 591 = Ja iv.127 (vāto tūlaṃ va dhaṃsaye) DN-a i.87.
-picu cotton-wool Vism 282, Vism 285, Vism 404; Dhp-a iii.202 Kp-a 173. -puṇṇikā (“stuffed with tuft of cotton” a kind of shoe Vin i.186.
Sk. tūla, to *teu, Sk. tavīti, to swell or be bushy, cp. Gr. τύλη swelling; Ags. pol peg
(f.) a mattress (consisting of layers of grass or wool: tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ aññatara-puṇṇa-tūlikā DN-a i.87) Vin i.192; Vin ii.150; DN i.7; AN i.181.
der. fr. tūla
(f.) the silk-cotton tree MN i.128.
Sk. tūlinī
secondary base of numeral three (fr. ti) in compn: having a relation to a triad of, three-; in numerical cpds. also = three (see under tayo).
-kaṭula containing 3 spices (of yāgu), viz. tila taṇḍula, mugga Vin i.210; Vin iii.66; -cīvarika wearing three robes (cp. ticīvara) Vin i.253; Ud 42; Pp 69 Vism 60. -daṇḍika carrying the tripod (see tidaṇḍa) Ep. of a brahmin ascetic AN iii.276; Ja ii.316 (= kuṇḍikaṃ ṭhapanatthāya tidaṇḍaṃ gahetvā caranto); -dhātuka (nt.) the (worlds of the) threefold composition of elements = tiloka Ne 14, Ne 63 (tedhātuke vimutti sabbadhi vippamutta), 82; cp. Kv 605; -piṭaka versed in the three piṭakas (see piṭaka), Ep. of theras bhikkhus Ja iv.219; Mil 18 sq.; Dhp-a i.7, Dhp-a i.384; Dhp-a iii.385 Dāvs v.22. Cp. Sk. tripiṭo bhikṣuḥ (Avs i.334 Index to Divy); -bhātika having 3 brothers Dhp-a i.88, Dhp-a i.97. -bhūmaka belonging to the 3 stages of being (viz. the kāma, rūpa, arūpa existences; cp. ˚dhātuka & tiloka) Dhp-a i.305; Dhp-a iv.72; Dhs-a 50, Dhs-a 214 (˚kusala) 291; -māsa (nt.) 3 months, i.e. a season MN i.438; Mil 15; Dhp-a ii.192; Pv-a 20; -vācika pronouncing the threefold formula (of the saraṇa-gata) Vin i.18; -vijja (adj. possessed of the 3 fold knowledge (i.e. either the higher knowledge of the Brahmins, i.e. the 3 Vedas [cp. Sk. trayī vidyā = the knowledge of the Vedas] or of the Buddha Arahants, as defined at AN i.164 sq., viz. (1) remembrance of former births, (2) insight into the (future) destiny of all beings, (3) recognition of the origin of misery & of the way to its removal, i.e. of the Path): 1. brahmanic DN i.238; AN i.163; also as tevijjaka (n.) DN i.88, DN i.107, DN i.119–2. buddhistic: Vin ii.161; MN i.482; SN i.194; AN i.167 = Iti 100; Snp 594 = Vv-a 10; Pp 14; Dhp-a i.138; Sdhp 420. -tevijjatā (abstr.) Vism 5.
Sk. trai˚
(adj.) curable; fig. one who can be helped or pardoned. Only in cpds. a˚; incurable unpardonable Vv-a 322 (of a sick person); Dhp-a i.25 (id.); Mil 322; of Devadatta w. ref. to his rebirth in Niraya Vin ii.202 = Iti 85; MN i.393; & sa˚; pardonable Mil 192, Mil 221, Mil 344.
der. fr. tikiccha
“sharpness,” heat, flame, fire, light; radiance, effulgence splendour, glory, energy, strength, power DN ii.259 (personified as deva, among the 4 Elements paṭhavī, āpo, t., vāyo; cp. tejo-dhātu); SN iv.215; MN i.327; Snp 1097 (glory of the sun compd with that of the Buddha); Dhp 387 (sabbaṃ ahorattiṃ Buddho tapati tejasā); Ja iii.53 (sīla˚); i.93 (puñña˚ the power of merit); Vb 426 (id.); Pts i.103; Vism 350 (def.) Vv-a 116.
-kasiṇa fire-contemplation for the purpose of kammaṭṭhāna practice (see kasiṇa) DN iii.268; Dhs 203; Vism 171; Dhp-a ii.49; Dhp-a iii.214; Bdhd 106; -dhātu the element of flame (or fire), the 3rd of the 6 Elements, viz. paṭhavī āpo t. vāyo ākāsa viññāṇa (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 242) DN iii.27 DN iii.228, DN iii.247; MN i.188, MN i.422; AN i.176; AN ii.165; Dhs 588, Dhs 648 Dhs 964; Ne 74; Vism 363.
Vedic tejas (nt.) from tij to be sharp or to pierce = a (piercing) flame. See tejate; semantically (sharp → light) cp. Ger. strahl (ray of light) = Ags. strael (arrow) ■ The nt. tejo is the usual form; instr. tejasā (Dhp 387; Snp 1097) & tejena (J iii.53), cp. tapa & tapo
to be sharp or to make sharp, to prick, to incite, etc ■ See tikkha, tikhiṇa, tiṇha, titikkhati tittaka, teja, etc.
Vedic tejate from tij (*stij) = Lat. in-stīgo (to spur), Gr. στίζω, στικτός, Ohg. stehhan, Nhg. stecken E. stick
(nt.) the point or shaft of an arrow, an arrow Thag 29; Dhp 80, Dhp 145; Dhp-a ii.147.
see tejate
(adj.) 1. splendid, powerful, majestic Dhp-a i.426.
2. in flames, heated, burning with (-˚) Mil 148.
tejas + vant
(adj.-n.) having light or splendour, shining forth, glorious Snp 1097 (= Nd ii.286 tejena samannāgata).
see teja
(num.) thirty-three Ja i.273; Dhp-a i.267 sq. See also under tayo & tāvatiṃsa.;
tayo + tiṃsa
(nt.) wetting, moistening Vism 338; Vv-a 20 (aggimhi tāpanaṃ udake vā temanaṃ) Dhp-a iii.420.
from temeti
to make wet, to moisten Vin i.47 (temetabba); ii.209 (temetvā); Dhp-a i.220, Dhp-a i.394 (id.) Ja i.88≈Kp-a 164; Ja ii.325 (temento); Pv-a 46 (sutemitvā for temetvā).
cp. Divy 285 tīmayati; Caus. of tim to moisten. There is an ancient confusion between the roots tim tamas, etc. (to be dark), tim, temeti (to be wet), and stim to be motionless. Cp. tintiṇāyati, tinta, tibba (= tamas), timira
see under tayo.
(adj.) lasting over or beyond a year (or season), a year old, dried up or decayed SN iv.161 (thero vassiko in text) = 185 (of wood) MN i.58 (of bones).
tiro + vassa + ika
(nt.) sesamum-oil (prepared from tila seeds), oil in general (tela = tilatelādika DN-a i.93): used for drinking, anointing & burning purposes Vin i.205, Vin i.220 Vin i.245, etc.; AN i.209, AN i.278 (sappi vā t. vā); ii.122≈(tattena pi telena osiñcante; punishment of pouring over with boiling oil); Ja i.293; Ja ii.104; Pv iv.148 (tiṇena telaṃ pi na tvaṃ adāsi: frequent as gift to mendicants) Pp 55; Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 815; Pv-a 80 (kaḷebarānaṃ vasā telañ ca: fat or oil in general) ■ tila ˚ṃ pātukāma desire to drink tila-wine Vv-a 54; pāka-tela oil concoction Vv-a 68 = Dhp-a iii.311; Ja ii.397 (sata˚); iii.372 (sahassa worth a thousand); v.376 (sata˚ worth a hundred) pādabbhañjana˚ oil for rubbing the feet Vv-a 44 sāsapa˚ (mustard seed & oil) Pv-a 198; sappi˚ (butter & oil) Snp 295; Pv-a 278 (also + madhu) as var. objects of grocery trade (dhañña).
-koṭṭhāgāra oil store Dhp-a i.220; -ghaṭa oil jar DN-a i.144; -cāṭī an oil tank Dhp-a i.220; -dhūpita spiced or flavoured with oil (of a cake) Vv 435; -nāḷi a reed used for keeping oil in, an oil tube Vism 99; Dhp-a ii.193 (+ udakatumba); -pajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16; DN i.85 = AN i.56 = Snp p.15; -padīpa an oil lamp Vin i.15; SN iii.126; SN v.319; Vv-a 198; -pāka an oil decoction mixed with spirits, oil-wine Vin i.205; -pilotikā (pl. rags soaked in oil Dhp-a i.221; -makkhana anointing (the body) with oil Mil 11; -miñjaka an oil-cake Pv-a 51 -vaṇijjā oil trade Pv-a 47; -homa an oblation of oil DN i.9.
from tila
(nt.) = tela Vin i.204 (“a small quantity of oil”); ii.107 (sittha-t. oil of beeswax).
(adj.) oily Ja iii.522.
see Vijjā.
(m. nt.) a pike, spear, lance, esp. the lance of an elephant-driver DN ii.266 (tutta-t. a driving lance); MN iii.133 (t. hattha) Vism 235; DN-a i.147.
Sk. tomara from tud, see tudati
(nt.) water (poetical for udaka) only in simile: puṇḍarīkaṃ (or padumaṃ) toyena na upalippati AN ii.39 = Snp 547; Snp 71 = Snp 213; Thag 700 Nd ii.287 (t. vuccati udakaṃ) ■ Bdhd 67, 93.
Vedic toya from *tāu̯ to melt away; Lat. tabeo, tabes (consumption); Ags. pāwan = E. dew, Oir. tām tabes; also Gr. τήκω, etc.
(nt.) an arched gateway, portal Vin ii.154; DN ii.83; Vv 351 (= dvārakoṭṭhaka-pāsādassa nāmaṃ Vv-a 160); Ja iii.428; Dāvs v.48.
Sk. toraṇa, perhaps related to Gr. τύρσις, τύρρις = Lat. turris (tower), cp. Hor. Od. i.47 “regumque turris” = palaces
(adj.-n.) satisfying, pleasing; satisfaction Snp 971.
see toseti
(adj.) pleasing, giving satisfaction Ja ii.249.
= tosana, in formation of a 2nd causative tosāpeti
to please, satisfy, make happy Snp 1127 (= Nd ii.288); Ja iv.274; Sdhp 304 ■ pp tosita contented, satisfied Snp 1128. Cp. pari˚.
Caus. of tussati
base of demonstr. pron. = ta˚, this that; loc. sg. tyamhi Ja vi.292; loc. pl. fem. tyāsu Ja v.368 (Com. tāsu).
Sk. tya˚, nt. tyad; perhaps to Gr. σήμερον to-day, σ ̈ητες in this year
= te assu DN ii.287, see su3.
see tuvaṃ.
see tuvaṭaṃ.
Th.
(nt.) covering, lid; closing up Dhp-a iv.85 (saṃvara + ).
see next
to cover, cover up, close (usually of doors windows) Vin ii.134 (kaṇṇagūthakehi kaṇṇā thakitā honti: the ears were closed up), 148 (kavaṭā na thakīyanti, Pass.), 209 (vātapāna); iv.54; Ja iv.4 (sabbe apihitā dvārā; api-dhā = Gr. ἐπι χη˚, cp. Hom. Od. 9, 243 ἠλίβατον πέτρην ἑπέχηκε χύρησιν the Cyclops covered the door with a polished rock) v.214; Dhp-a iv.180 (ṭhakesi, v.l. ṭhapesi); Vv-a 222; Pv-a 216 (dvārā Dāvs iv.33; Dāvs v.25 (chiddaṃ mālāguḷena th.).
Sk. sthagayati, Caus. to sthagati, from *steg to cover; cp. Gr. στέγω cover, τέγη roof; Lat. tego tegula (E. = tile), toga; Oir. tech house; Ohg. decchu cover, dah roof. On P. form cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 62
(nt.) mother’s milk Vin ii.255 = Vin ii.289 (˚ṃ pāyeti); AN iv.276; Ja iii.165; Ja vi.3 (madhura˚) Thig 496.
see thana
(nt.) bare, esp. hard, stony ground Pv iv.75 (= kharakaṭhāna bhūmippadesa Pv-a 265).
-sāyikā (f.) the act of lying on the bare ground (as a penance) [BSk. sthaṇḍila-śāyikā] SN iv.118; Dhp 141
(= Dhp-a iii.77: bhūmisayana); -seyyā (f.) a bed on bare ground DN i.167≈(v.l. BB. taṇḍila˚) Mil 351 cp. Sk. sthaṇḍilaśayyā.
Vedic sthaṇḍila a levelled piece of ground prepared for a sacrifice. Cognate with sthala, level ground
1. lit. hard, rigid firm Ja i.293 (opp. muduka); Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa) Pv-a 139 (= ujjhangala).
2. fig. (a) hardened, obdurate callous, selfish DN i.118 (māna˚); iii.45 (+ atimānin); AN ii.26 = Iti 113 (kuha th. lapa); Snp 104 (see gotta˚); Ja i.88 (māna˚) ii.136; Sdhp 90 ■ (b) slow Mil 103 (opp. lahuka; cp. BSk. dhandha, on which Kern, Toev. ii.90) ■ See thambha & thūṇa.;
-maccharin obdurate & selfish, or very selfish Dhp-a iii.313; Vv-a 69; Pv-a 45; -hadaya hard-hearted Ja iii.68.
pp. of thambeti, Sk. stabhnāti to make firm, prop, hold up; cp. Av. stawra firm, Gr. ἀστεμφής, σταφυλή; Goth. stafs, Ags. staef = E. staff; Ohg. stab See also khambha & chambheti
1. the breast of a woman DN ii.266; Ja v.205; Ja vi.483 Sdhp 360.
2. the udder of a cow MN i.343 = Pp 56; Dhp-a ii.67.
-mukha the nipple Ja iv.37. -sita-dāraka [see sita a child at the breast, a suckling Mil 364 = Mil 408.
Vedic stana; cp. Gr. στηνιον = στ ̈ηχος (Hesychius)
, a little breast, the breast of a girl Thig 265 (= Thag-a 212).
(nt.) thundering thunder Ja i.470; Thag 1108; Mil 377.
pp. of thaneti cp. Vedic (s)tanayitnu thunder = Lat. tonitrus, Ohg. donar, etc.
(adj.) having breasts,-breasted; in timbaru˚; Snp 110; Ja vi.457 ■ pucimanda˚; Ja vi.269.
to roar, to thunder DN ii.262; SN i.100, SN i.154 (megho thanayaṃ), 154 (thaneti devo) Iti 66 (megho thanayitvā) ■ pp. thanita. See also gajjati & thunati.;
Vedic stanayati & stanati to thunder; cp. Gr. στένω, στενάζω to moan, groan, στονος; Lat. tono; Ags stunian; Ger. stöhnen
1. a builder, master carpenter MN i.396 = SN iv.223; MN iii.144, MN iii.2. officer, overseer SN v.348.
Vedic sthapati, to sthā + pati
is to be read for ˚tthambha in para˚ Ja iv.313.
1. a pillar, a post Vin i.276; DN i.50 (majjhimaṃ ˚ṃ nissāya) ii.85 (id.); Snp 214; Vv 782 (veḷuriya˚, of the pillars of a Vimāna); Pv iii.31 (id.); Dhp-a iv.203; Vv-a 188 (+ tulā-gopānasī); Pv-a 186.
2. (fig.) in all meanings of thaddha, applied to selfishness, obduracy, hypocrisy & deceit; viz. immobility, hardness, stupor, obstinacy (cp. Ger. “verstockt”): thambho ti thaddha-bhāvo Snp-a 288, Snp-a 333; th. thambhanā thambhittaṃ kakkhaliyaṃ phāruliyaṃ ujucittatā (an˚?) amudutā Vb 350 ■ Often combd w. māna (= arrogance), freq. in set sāṭheyyaṃ th. sārambho māno, etc. AN i.100, AN i.299 = Nd ii.under rāga = Mil 289; cp. MN i.15 ■ AN iii.430 (+ māna) iv.350, 465 (+ sāṭheyya); Snp 245 (+ mada), 326, 437 (as one of Māra’s combatants: makkho th. te aṭṭhamo) Ja i.202.
3. a clump of grass MN i.324; cp. thambhaka.
see etym. under thaddha; occasionally spelt thamba, viz. AN i.100; MN i.324; Pv-a 186, Pv-a 187
(= thambha 3) a clump of grass Vv-a 276 (= gumba).
& thambheti, see upa˚, paṭi˚.;
(f.) firmness, rigidity, immobility Dhs 636 = Dhs 718; Vb 350.
abstr. to thambha
(nt.) = thambha 2, viz. hardness, rigidity, obduracy, obstinacy Vb 350 Note. Quite a late development of the term, caused by a misinterpretation of chambhitatta, is “fluctuation unsteadiness, inflation” at Dhs 965 (in def. of vāyodhātu: chambhittattaṃ [?] thambhitattaṃ. See on this Dhs. trsl. p. 242), & at Vb 168 (in def. of vicikicchā v.l. chambhitatta), and at Asl. 338 (of vayo). None of these meanings originally belong to the term thambha.
abstr. to thambha
(adj.) obstinate Thag 952.
(nt.) strewing, spreading. In cpds. like assa˚, bhumma˚, ratha˚, hattha˚, etc. the reading ass-attharaṇa, etc. should be preferred (= ā stṛ; ). See attharaṇa and cpds.
Sk. staraṇa to stṛ;
only in cpds. ā˚, ava˚, etc.
Sk. stṛṇoti
the hilt or handle of a sword or other weapons, a sword AN iii.152; Ja iii.221 (= sword); Mil 178; Dhp-a ii.249 (˚mūla); iv.66 (asi˚) ■ tharusmiṃ sikkhati to learn the use of a sword Vin ii.10; Mil 66.
-ggaha one who carries a sword-(handle) Mil 331 (dhanuggaha + ; not in corresponding list of occupations at DN i.51); -sippā training in swordsmanship Ud 31.
Sk. tsaru
(nt.) dry ground, viz. high, raised (opp. low) or solid, firm (opp. water) SN iv.179. As plateau opp. to ninna (low lying place) at Snp 30 (Snp-a 42 = ukkūla) Dhp 98; Iti 66 = SN i.100 (megho thalaṃ ninnañ ca pūreti) Pv-a 29 (= unnatapadesa). As dry land, terra firma opp. to jala at Dhp 34; Ja i.107, Ja i.222; Pv iv.121; Pv-a 260 As firm, even ground or safe place at DN i.234; Snp 946. Cp. Ja iii.53; Ja iv.142; Vism 185.
-gocara living on land Ja ii.159; -ja sprung from land (opp. vārija Dhp 34 or udakarūha Vv 356 = water-plant) referring to plants AN i.35; Ja i.51; Vv 356 (= yodhikādikā Vv-a 162); Mil 281; -ṭṭha standing on firm ground AN ii.241; -patha a road by land (opp. jala˚ by water Ja i.121; Ja iii.188.
Vedic sthala, to sthā, orig. standing place; cp. Gr. στέλλω, στόλος; Ags. steall (place); also P thaṇḍila
(nt.) the haft of a sword, the scabbard Ja iii.221 (reading uncertain).
prob. dialect. variant of tharu
praise, praising, eulogy Ne 161, Ne 188, Ne 192.
see thavati
to praise, extol; inf. thutuṃ Snp 217 (= thometuṃ Snp-a 272). Caus. thaveti [Sk. stavayati] pp. thavita Miln 361 See thuta, thuti, thoma, thometi.
Sk. stauti, Av. staviti, cp. Gr. στεϋται
(f.) a knapsack, bag, purse; esp. used for the carrying of the bhikkhu’s strainer Vin i.209 (parissāvanāni pi thavikāyo pl pūretvā), 224 (patte + pariss˚ + th.); Ja i.55 (pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvā); vi.67 (pattaṃ thavikāya osāretvā); Vv-a 40 (patta-thavikato parissāvanaṃ nīharitvā). Also for carrying money: sahassathavikā a purse of 1,000 pieces Ja i.54, Ja i.195, Ja i.506; Vv-a 33; Anvs 35. See also Vin ii.152, Vin ii.217; Vism. 91.
derivation uncertain
(& thāmo nt. in instr. thāmasā MN i.498; SN ii.278 = Thag 1165; iii.110, see below) “standing power, power of resistance, steadfastness, strength, firmness vigour, instr. thāmena (Mil 4; Pv-a 193); thāmasā (see above); thāmunā (J vi.22). Often combd with bala Ja i.63; Snp 68; with bala + java Pv-a 4; with bala viriya Nd ii.289, Nd ii.651; with java Ja i.62; Vv-a 104; with viriya Ja i.67 ■ DN iii.113; SN i.78; SN ii.28; SN v.227; AN i.50 AN ii.187 sq.; AN iv.192. Ja i.8, Ja i.265 (˚sampanna); ii.158 (id.); Dhs 13, Dhs 22; Vism 233 (˚mahatta); Dhp-a iv.18; Pv-a 259 ■ Instr. used as adv.: thāmena hard, very much Pv-a 193; thāmasā obstinately, perseveringly MN i.257.
-gatadiṭṭhika (adj.) one in whom heresy has become strong Ja i.83 = Ja vi.220.
Vedic sthāman sthāmas nt.,; sthā cp. Gr. στήμων, Lat. stamen (standing structure); Goth. stoma foundation
(adj.) having strength Snp 1144 (dubbala˚ with failing strength); Nd i.12 (appa˚ + dubbala).
(adj.) strong, steadfast, powerful, persevering SN v.197, SN v.225; AN ii.250; AN iv.110, AN iv.234, AN iv.291 AN v.24; Nd ii.131; Vv 51 (= thira balavā Vv-a 35).
thāma + vant
see vi˚, san˚.
(nt.) a plate, dish, vessel DN i.74; Ja i.69; Mil 282. Kaṃsa˚; a gong Mil 62 Vism 283 (in simile). See also thālī.
from thala orig. a flat dish
(nt.) a small bowl, beaker Pv ii.18 (thālakassa pānīyaṃ), 119 (id.); Ne 79 (for holding oil: dīpakapallika Com.).
thāla + ka
(f.) = thālakaVin i.203, Vin i.240. See āḷhaka˚.
(f.) (thāli˚ in cpds.) an earthen pot, kettle, large dish; in -dhovana washing of the dish AN i.161 (+ sarāva-dhovana); -pāka an offering of barley or rice cooked in milk Vin iii.15; DN i.97 (= DN-a i.267) SN ii.242; SN v.384; AN i.166; Ja i.186; Mil 249.
Sk. sthālī, cp. thāla
(adj.) “standing still,” immovable (opp to tasa) firm, strong (Ep. of an Arahant: Kp-a 245; Dhp-a iv.176. Always in connection with tasa, contrasting or comprising the movable creation (animal world) & the immovable (vegetable world), e.g. Snp 394 (“sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke”); Iti 32 (tasaṃ vā thāvaraṃ vā). See tasa for ref.
Vedic sthāvara, from sthā, cp. sthavira, Gr. σταυρός post, Lat. re-stauro, Goth. stana judgment & stojan to judge
(nt.) old age Pv-a 149 (thāvari-jiṇṇa in expl. of therī, otherwise jarā-jiṇṇa Should we read thāvira-jiṇṇa?).
from thavira = thera, old
(nt.) immobility, firmness, security, solidity, an undisturbed state; always in janapada˚; an appeased country, as one of the blessings of the reign of a Cakkavattin. Expld at DN-a i.250 as “janapadesu dhuvabhāvaṃ thāvarabhāvaṃ vā patto na sakkā kenaci cāletuṃ.” DN i.88; DN ii.16, DN ii.146, DN ii.169; SN i.100; Snp p.106; Iti 15.
fr. thāvara
(nt.) the rank of a Thera. AN i.38; AN ii.23. This has nothing to do with seniority It is quite clear from the context that Thera is to be taken here in the secondary sense explained under Thera. He was a bhikkhu so eminently useful to the community that his fellow bhikkhus called him Thera.
from thāvara2
in thāsotujana savana at Thag-a 61 according to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 81 it is to be read ṭhānaso tu jana˚.
(adj.) dropping forming drops: madhutthika Ja iii.493; Ja vi.529 (= madhuṃ paggharantiyo madhutthevasadisā p. 530 “dropping honey.”
cp. Sk. styāyate to congeal, form a (solid) mass; see cognates under thīna & cp. theva
pp. of tharati, only in cpds. parivi˚, vi˚.
(adj.) solid, hard, firm; strenuous, powerful Ja i.220 Ja iv.106 (= daḷha); Mil 194 (thir-âthira-bhāva strength or weakness); Vv-a 212 (id.), 35 (= thāmavant); Sdhp 321.
Vedic sthira, hard, solid; from sthā or Idg. ster (der. of stā ) to stand out = to be stiff; cp. Gr.στερεός; Lat. sterilis (sterile = hardened, cp. Sk. starī) Ohg. storrēn, Nhg. starr & starren, E. stare; also Lat strenuus
(f.) steadfastness, stability Dhp-a iv.176 (thiratāya thavarā; so read for ṭhira˚).
fr. thira
(f.) [Vedic strī, on which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sero. This form thī is the normal correspondent to Vedic strī; the other, more usual (& dial.) form is itthi a woman Ja i.295, Ja i.300; Ja v.296 (thī-pura), 397; vi.238.
(nt.) stiffness, obduracy, stolidity indifference (cp. thaddha & tandī, closely related in meaning). Together with; middha it is one of the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) to Arahantship (see below) Def. as cittassa akammaññatā, unwieldiness or impliability of mind (= immobility) at Nd ii.290 = Dhs 1156 Dhs 1236 = Ne 86; as citta-gelaññaṃ morbid state of mind (“psychosis”) at DN-a i.211 ■ Snp 942 (niddaṃ tandiṃ sahe thīnaṃ pamādena na saṃvase), 1106; Vb 352 (= Nd ii.290 as expln of līnatta); Vism 262 (˚sineha where p. 361 reads patthinna˚).
-middha sloth & drowsiness, stolidity & torpor; two of the 5 nīvaraṇāni (Dhs. trsl. pp. 120, 310) Vin ii.200 (vigata˚); DN i.71, DN i.246; DN iii.49, DN iii.234, DN iii.269, DN iii.278; SN i.99 SN iii.106; SN v.277 sq.; AN iii.69 sq.; 421; Snp 437 (pañcamī senā Mārassa); Iti 27, Iti 120; Ps. i.31, 45, 162; ii.12, 169 179, 228; Pp 68; Dhs 1154, Dhs 1486; Vism 469; Sdhp 459.
Sk. styāna; orig. pp. of styāyate to become hard, to congeal; stei̯ā (cp. also thira) = Gr. στέας grease, tale; Lat. stīpo to compress; also Sk. stimita (motionless) = P. timi; stīma (slow), Mhg. stīm; Goth etc. stains = E. stone; Gr. στϊφος (heap); Lat. stīpes (pale); Ohg. stīf = E. stiff
see patiṭṭhīyati.
(f.) & thīyitatta (nt.) = thīna, in exegesis at Nd ii.290≈(see thīna) Vb 352.
abstr. formations from thīna
praised Dhs-a 198; Ja iv.101 (sada˚ = sadā thuto niccapasattho); Mil 278 (vaṇṇita th. pasattha).
cp. pp. of thavati
(f.) praise Ja iv.443 (thutiṃ karoti); Vv-a 158.
cp. thavati
1. to moan, groan, roar SN v.148 (thunaṃ ppr.; v.l. thanaṃ); Vv 521 (of beings in Niraya otherwise ghosenti), v.l.SS thananti (better?). 2. to proclaim; shout, praise (confused with thavati Snp 884.
see thaneti
see thūla.
(nt.) husk of grain, chaff AN i.242 (together w. other qualities of corn); Ja iv.8; Vism 346. athusa DN iii.199.
-aggi a fire of husks Ne 23; -odaka gruel (= sabbasambhārehi kataṃ sovīrakaṃ Pp A 232) DN i.166; AN i.295 = Pp 55; -pacchi a bird stuffed with chaff, a straw-bird Ja i.242; -piṇḍa a lump of husks Vin ii.151 -rāsi a heap of h. Dhp-a i.309; -homa an oblation of h DN i.9 (= DN-a i.93; v.l. BB kana, for kaṇa; cp. kaṇahoma DN i.9).
Vedic tuṣa (m.)
(f.) a pillar, prop support AN ii.198; Vv 541 (= thambha Vv-a 245); DN-a i.124. Esp. the sacrificial post in phrase thūṇûpanīta “lead to sacrifice” (yūpa-sankhātuṃ thūṇaṃ upa DN-a i.294): DN i.127≈S i.76≈Dhp-a ii.7; Ja iii.45 kumbhathūṇā a sort of drum DN i.6 etc. (see kumbha where also kumbha -thūṇika Vin iv.285) ■ eka-thūṇaka with one support Ja iv.79.
Vedic sthūṇā from sthā, standing fast, as in thambha, thīna, etc. Nearest relation is thāvara (= thūrā, on r: ṇ = l (thūla): n see tūṇī). Cp. Gr.σταυρός (post); Lat. restauro (to prop up again) Gr. στϋλος pillar, “style”; Goth. stojan etc. (see thāvara); Ags. styran = E. steer, Ger. steuer
house-top, gable Thag 184 (= kanṇikā Com.).
der. fr. thūṇā
a stupa or tope, a bell-shaped pile of earth, a mound, tumulus, cairn; dome, esp. a monument erected over the ashes of an Arahant (otherwise called dhātugabbha = dāgaba), or on spots consecrated as scenes of his acts. In general as tomb: Vin iv.308; Ja iii.156 (mattika˚) = Pv i.84; in special as tope: DN ii.142, DN ii.161, DN ii.164 sq.; AN i.77; MN ii.244; Ja v.39 (rajata˚) Vv-a 156 (Kassapassa bhagavato dvādasayojanikaṃ kanaka˚); Ud 8; Pv iii.105. Four people are thūpārahā, worthy of a tope, viz. a Tathāgata, a Tathāgatasāvaka a Paccekabuddha, a Cakkavattin DN ii.143; AN ii.245 ■ At Dpvs vi.65 th. is to be corrected into dhūpaṃ.
Vedic stūpa, crown of the head, top, gable; cp. Gr. στύπος (handle, stalk). Oicel. stūfr (stump), to *steud as in tudati
(adj.) having domed roofs (“house-tops” Ja vi.116 (of a Vimāna = dvādasayojanika maṇimayakañcanathūpika; cp. p. 117: pañcaṭhūpaṃ vimānaṃ expld as pañcahi kūṭāgārehi samannāgataṃ).
from thūpa. The ika applies to the whole compound
(adj.) “made a heap,” heaped of an alms-bowl: so full that its contents bulge out over the top Vin iv.191.
thūpa + kata
(a) & Thulla (b) (the latter usual in cpds.) (adj.) compact, massive; coarse gross; big, strong, clumsy; common, low, unrefined rough DN i.223; Snp 146 (aṇuka˚), 633 (id.); Dhp 31, Dhp 265 Dhp 409; Ja i.196 (b); Dhs 617; Kp-a 246; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 74 (of a cloak); Vv-a 103; Sdhp 101, Sdhp 346 ■ thullāni gajjati to speak rough words Ja i.226 (= pharusavacanāni vadati).
-aṅga (adj.) heavy-limbed Ja i.420; -accaya a grave offence Vin i.133, Vin i.167, Vin i.216; Vin ii.110, Vin ii.170 etc.; Vism 22 -kacchā thick scurf Vin i.202; -kumārī (Vin. v.129); kumārikā a stout, fat girl Ja iii.147; Ja iv.220 (Com. pañcakāmaguṇika-rāgena thūlatāya thullak˚ ti vuccati) Vism 17. -phusitaka (deva) (the rain-god, probably with reference to the big drops of the rain cp. DN-a i.45; SN iii.141; SN v.396; AN i.243; AN ii.140 (a); v.114 sq.; Dhp-a iii.243; -vajja a grave sin Vin ii.87 (a); MN ii.250; -vattha a coarse garment Ja v.383; -sarīra (adj.) fat, corpulent Ja i.420; Ja iv.220 (opp. kisa thin); -sāṭaka coarse cloth Dhp-a i.393 (a).
Vedic sthūla (or sthūra); cp. Lith. storas (thick) Lat. taurus, Goth. stiur, Ags. steor (bull = strong, bulky) Ohg. stūri (strong). From sthā: see thīna, cp. thūṇā To ūl: ull cp. cūḷa: culla
(f.) coarseness, roughness, vileness Ja iv.220.
abstr. to thūla
(adj.) firm, reliable, trustworthy, true DN i.4 (DN-a i.73: theto ti thiro; ṭhita-katho ti attho); MN i.179; SN iv.384; AN ii.209 = Pp 57; Nd ii.623 ■ abl. thetato in truth SN iii.112 ■ attheta Ja iv.57 (= athira).
Sk. from tiṭṭhita, Müller P. Gr. 7 = sthātṛ
a thief adj. stealing: athenena not stealing, not stealthily, openly DN i.4; DN-a i.72. f. athenī AN iii.38. Cp. kumbhatthena Vin ii.256 (see k.).
Vedic stena & stāyu, besides which tāyu, the latter prob. original, cp. Gr.; τϋτάω to deprive; Oir. tāid thief, to a root meaning “conceal”
a thief Ja vi.115.
= prec.
to steal, to conceal Ja iv.114; Dhp-a i.80.
Denom. fr. thena
(nt.) theft Vin i.96; AN i.129; Snp 119 (theyyā adinnaṃ ādiyati); 242, 967 (˚ṃ na kareyya) Vv 158 (: theyyaṃ vuccati thenabhāvo Vv-a 72); Mil 264, Mil 265; Vism 43 (˚paribhoga); DN-a i.71; Sdhp 55, Sdhp 61.
-citta intending to steal Vin iii.58; -saṃvāsaka one who lives clandestinely with the bhikkhus (always foll by titthiyapakkantaka) Vin i.86, Vin i.135, Vin i.168, Vin i.320; Vin v.222; Mil 310; -saṅkhātaṃ (adv.) by means of theft, stealthily DN iii.65 sq., 133; AN iii.209; AN iv.370 sq.; AN v.264.
Vedic steya
t.t. only used with ref. to the bhikkhus of Gotama Buddha’s community ■ (a) (adj.) senior Vin i.47, Vin i.290 (th. bhikkhū opp. navā bh.), 159 (th bhikkhu a senior bh. opp. to navaka bh. a novice), 187 ii.16, 212. Therânutherā bhikkhū seniors & those next to them in age dating not from birth, but from admission to the Order). Three grades are distinguished thera bh., majjhima bh., nava bh., at DN i.78 ■ See also AN ii.23, AN ii.147, AN ii.168; AN v.201, AN v.348; DN iii.123 sq., 218; Dhp 260, Dhp 261. In Sangha-thera, used of Bhikkhus not senior in the Order, the word thera means distinguished Vin ii.212, Vin ii.303. In Mahāthera the meaning, as applied to the 80 bhikkhus so called, must also have some similar meaning Dīpv iv.5 Psalms of the Brethren xxxvi. Ja v.456. At AN ii.22 it is said that a bhikkhu, however junior, may be called thera on account of his wisdom It is added that four characteristics make a man a thera-high character, knowing the essential doctrines by heart, practising the four Jhānas, and being conscious of having attained freedom through the destruction of the mental intoxications. It is already clear that at a very early date, before the Anguttara reached its extant shape, a secondary meaning of thera was tending to supplant that of senior-that is, not the senior of the whole Order, but the senior of such a part of the Sangha as live in the same locality, or are carrying out the same function ■ Note. thera in thero vassiko at SN iv.161 is to be read tero-vassiko.
-gāthā hymns of senior bhikkhus, Name of a canonical book, incorporated in the Khuddaka-Nikāya. Theratara very senior, oppd to navatara, novice DN ii.154 -vāda the doctrine of the Theras, the original Buddhist doctrine MN i.164; Dpvs iv.6, 13.
Vedic sthavira. Derivation uncertain. It may come from sthā in sense of standing over, lasting (one year or more), cp. thāvara old age, then “old = venerable”; (in meaning to be compared w. Lat. senior, etc from num. sem “one” = one year old, i.e. lasting over one and many more years). Cp. also vetus = Gr. ε ̓́τος year, E. wether, one year old ram, as cpd. w. veteran old man. Or it may come from sthā in der. *stheṷā in sthūra (sthūla: see etym. under thūla) thus, “strong venerable”
(adj.) strong (?), of clothes: therakāni vatthāni DN ii.354 (vv.ll. thevakāni, dhorakāni, corakāni). Theri & Therika
(f.) 1. an old woman (cp. sthavirikā Mvu iii.283) Pv ii.116 (= thāvarijiṇṇā Pv-a 149).
2. a female thera (see cpds.), as therikā at Thig 1; Dpvs xviii. 11.
-gāthā hymns of the therīs, following on the Theragāthā (q.v.).
see thera
(m.?) a drop; stagnant water. In Vin. only in phrase cīvaraṃ… na acchinne theve pakkamitabbaṃ Vin i.50, Vin i.53 = Vin ii.227, Vin ii.230; Ja vi.530 (madhu-ttheva a drop of honey).
see etym. under thīna, with which cp. in meaning from same root Gr. στοιβή & Lat. stīria, both drop. Cp. also thika. Not with Trenckner (Notes p. 70 fr.; stip
to shine, glitter, shimmer (like a drop) Ja vi.529 (= virocati p. 530).
fr. theva; orig. “to be congealed or thick”
(adj.) little, small, short, insignificant; nt. a trifle. AN iv.10; Ja vi.366; Pv-a 12 (kāla): nt. thokaṃ as adv. = a little Ja i.220 Ja ii.103, Ja ii.159; Ja v.198; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 43 ■ thokaṃ thokaṃ a little each time, gradually, little by little Dhp 121, Dhp 239; Mil 9; Snp-a 18; Pv-a 168.
for etymology see under thīna
(adj.) = thoka; fem. thokikā Dhp 310.
praise.
Vedic stoma a hymn of praise
(nt.) & thomanā (f.) praising, praise, laudation Ja i.220 (= pasaṃsa); Pp 53; Pv-a 27.
see thavati
to praise, extol, celebrate (often with vaṇṇeti) DN i.240; Snp 679, Snp 1046 Nd ii.291; Ja vi.337; Snp-a 272 (= thutuṃ); Vv-a 102; Pv-a 196 ■ pp. thomita Ja i.9.
D.
denom. fr. thoma; cp. thavati
euphonic consonant inserted to avoid hiatus: (a) orig. only sandhi-cons. in forms ending in t & d (like tāvat kocid, etc.) & thus restored in cpds. where the simplex has lost it; (b) then also transferred to & replacing other sandhi-cons. (like puna-d-eva for punar eva).; (a) dvipa-d-uttama Snp 995; koci-d-eva Pv-a 153; kincid-eva ibid. 70; tāva-d-eva ib. 74; yāva-d-atthaṃ ib 217; ahu-d-eva Mil 22 etc ■ (b) puna-d-eva Pv ii.113 (v.l. BB); Dhp-a ii.76; samma-d-eva Snp p.16; Vv-a 148; Pv-a 66 etc.; cp. Snp-a 284. bahu-d-eva Ja i.170.
(adj.) giving, bestowing, presenting, only -˚; as anna˚, bala˚, vaṇṇa˚, sukha˚, Snp 297; vara˚ Snp 234; kāma˚ Ja vi.498; Pv ii.138; ambu giving water, i.e. a cloud Dāvs v.32; amatamagga Sdhp 1; uḷāraphala˚ ib. 26; maṃsa˚ Pgdp 49, etc.
Suffix of dā, see dadāti
: see vi˚.
(for dasseti): see upa˚; pavi˚, vi˚.
(nt.) Vin iii.112; SN iii.85; AN ii.33 = Nd ii.420 B3 (: the latter has udaka, but Nd i.14 daka).
-āsaya (adj.) (beings) living in water AN ii.33≈; -ja (adj.) sprung from water, aquatic Ja i.18 (thalajā d pupphā); -rakkhasa a water-sprite Ja i.127, Ja i.170 Ja vi.469.
= udaka, aphaeretic from combns like sītodaka which was taken for sīto + daka instead of sīt odaka
(adj.) dexterous skilled, handy, able, clever DN i.45, DN i.74, DN i.78; DN iii.190 (+ analasa) MN i.119; MN iii.2; SN i.65; Nd ii.141 (+ analasa & sampajāna); Ja iii.247; DN-a i.217 (= cheka); Mil 344 (rūpadakkhā those who are of “fit” appearance).
Vedic dakṣa = Gr. ἀρι δείκετος & δεςιός; dakṣati to be able; to please, satisfy, cp. daśasyati to honour, Denom. fr. *dasa = Lat. decus honour, skill All to *dek in Lat. decet to be fit, proper, etc. On var theories of connections of root see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under decet. It may be that *deks is an intens. formation fr. *diś to point (see disati), then the original meaning would be “pointing,” i.e. the hand used for pointing. For further etym. see dakkhiṇa
(nt.) dexterity, ability, skill Ja iii.466.
dakkha1 + ya, see dakkheyya
see dassati.
(adj.) 1. right (opp vāma left), with a tinge of the auspicious, lucky prominent: Vin ii.195 (hattha); Pv-a 112, Pv-a 132 (id.) Pts i.125. hattha, pāda, etc. with ref. to a Tathāgata’s body); Ja i.50 (˚passa the right side); Pv-a 178 (id.), 112 (˚bāhu); Snp p.106 (bāha); Pv-a 179 (˚jānumaṇḍalena with the right knee: in veneration).
2. skilled, well-trained (= dakkha) Ja vi.512 (Com. susikkhita).
3. (of that point of the compass which is characterized through “orientation” by facing the rising sun, & then;
lies on one’s right:) southern, usually in combn with disā (direction): DN iii.180 (one of the 6 points, see disā), 188 sq. (id.); MN i.487; MN ii.72; SN i.145, etc.
-āvattaka (adj.) winding to the right DN ii.18 (of the hairs of a Mahāpurisa, the 14th of his characteristics or auspicious signs; cp. BSk. dakṣiṇāvarta a precious shell, i.e. a shell the spiral of which turns to the right Avs i.205; Divy 51, Divy 67, Divy 116); Ja v.380; -janapada the southern country the “Dekkan” (= dakkhiṇaṃ) DN i.96, DN i.153 (expld by Bdhgh as “Gangāya dakkhiṇato pākaṭa-janapado” DN-a i.265); -samudda the southern sea Ja i.202.
Vedic dakṣiṇa, Av. dašinō; adj. formation fr. adv. *deksi = *deksinos, cp. purāṇa fr. purā viṣuṇa fr. viṣu, Lat. bīni (= bisni) fr. bis. From same root *deks are Lat. dexter (with compar ■ antithetic suffix ter = Sk. tara, as in uttara) & Gr.; δεςιτερός cp. also Goth. taihswa (right hand), Ohg. zeso & zesawa See dakkha for further connections
(f.) a gift, a fee, a donation; a donation given to a “holy” person with ref. to unhappy beings in the Peta existence (“Manes”), intended to induce the alleviation of their sufferings; an intercessional, expiatory offering, “don attributif” (Feer) (see Stede, Peta Vatthu, etc. p. 51 sq.; Feer Index to Avs p. 480) DN i.51 = DN iii.66 (d ■ uddhaggikā), cp. AN ii.68 (uddhaggā d.) AN iii.43, AN iii.46, AN iii.178, AN iii.259; AN iv.64 sq., 394; MN iii.254 sq (cuddasa pāṭipuggalikā d. given to 14 kinds of worthy recipients) Snp 482, Snp 485; Iti 19; Ja i.228; Pv i.44 (= dāna Pv-a 18), i.59 (petānaṃ d ˚ṃ dajjā), iv.151; Mil 257 Vism 220; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 70, Pv-a 110 (pūjito dakkhiṇāya) guru-d. teacher’s fee Vv-a 229, Vv-a 230; dakkhiṇaṃ ādisati (otherwise uddisati) to designate a gift to a particular person (with dat.) Vin i.229 = DN ii.88.
-āraha a worthy recipient of a dedicatory gift Pv ii.86; -odaka water to wash in (orig. water of dedication consecrated water) Ja i.118; Ja iv.370; Dhp-a i.112; Pv-a 23; -visuddhi. purity of a gift MN iii.256 sq. = AN ii.80 sq. = DN iii.231, cp. Kv 556 sq.
Vedic dakṣiṇā to dakṣ as in daśasyati to honour, to consecrate, but taken as f. of dakkhiṇa by grammarians expl. as gift by the “giving” (i.e. the right) hand with popular analogy to dā to give (dadāti)
(adj.-n.) one worthy of a dakkiṇā The term is expl. at Kp-a 183, & also (with ref to brahmanic usage) at Nd;2 291 ■ SN i.142, SN i.168, SN i.220; MN i.37, MN i.236 sq.; 446; AN i.63, AN i.150; AN ii.44; AN iii.134, AN iii.162 AN iii.248; AN iv.13 sq.; DN iii.5; Iti 19 (annañ ca datvā bahuno dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇaṃ… saggaṃ gacchanti dāyakā); Snp 227, Snp 448 sq., 504, 529; Nd ii.291 (as one of the 3 constituents of a successful sacrifice, viz. yañña the gift, phala the fruit of the gift, d. the recipient of the gift). Cp i.105 (where also adj. to be given, of dāna). Pv iv.133; Vv-a 120, Vv-a 155 (Ep. of the Sangha ujubhūta); Pv-a 25, Pv-a 125, Pv-a 128, Pv-a 262.
-aggi the (holy) fire of a good receiver of gifts; a metaphor taken from the brahmanic rite of sacrifice as one of the 7 fires (= duties) to be kept up (or discarded) by a follower of the Buddha AN iv.41, AN iv.45; DN iii.217; -khetta the fruitful soil of a worthy recipient of a gift Pv-a 92; -puggala an individual deserving a donation Ja i.228; there are 7 kinds enumd at DN iii.253 DN iii.8 kinds at DN iii.255; -sampatti the blessing of finding a worthy object for a dakkhiṇā Pv-a 27, Pv-a 137 sq.
grd ■ formation fr. dakkhiṇā as from a verb *dakṣiṇāti = pūjeti
(f.) the fact of being a dakkhiṇeyya Mil 240 (a˚).
abstr. fr. prec.
consecrated, dedicated Ja v.138. Cp dikkhita.
Vedic dīkṣita pp. of dīkṣ, Intens to daśayati: see dakkha1
(adj.) seeing, perceiving; f. ˚ī in atīra-dakkhiṇī nāvā a ship out of sight of land DN i.222.
fr. dakkhati, see dassati
(nt.) cleverness, skill Ja ii.237 (Com. kusalassa-ñāṇa-sampayuttaṃ viriyaṃ); iii.468.
cp. dakkha2
bitten Ja i.7; Mil 302; Pv-a 144.
pp. of daśati, see ḍasati
one who sees AN ii.25.
n. ag. to dassati
(f.) a large tooth, tusk, fang Mil 150 (˚visa).
cp. dāṭhā
burnt, always with aggi˚; consumed by fire Snp 62; Pv i.74 Mil 47; Pv-a 56 (indaggi˚).
-ṭṭhāna a place burnt by fire Ja i.212; also a place of cremation (sarīrassa d.) Pv-a 163 (= āḷāhana).
Sk. dagdha, pp. of dahati, see ḍahati
making firm, strengthening, in; kayādaḍḍhi-bahula strengthened by gymnastics, an athlete Ja iii.310 (v.l. daḷhi˚), iv.219 (v.l. distorted kādaḷiphahuna).
not with Trenckner, Notes p. 65 = Sk. dārḍhya, but with Kern, Toev. 113 = Sk. dṛḍhī (from dṛḍha, see daḷha), as in compn dṛḍhī karoti & bhavati to make or become strong
ra; (on ṇ: l cp. guṇa: guḷa etc.) to *del as in Sk. dala, dalati. Cp. Lat. dolare to cut, split, work in wood; delere to destroy; Gr.δαίδαλον work of art; Mhg. zelge twig; zol a stick Possibly also fr. *dan[d]ra (r = l freq., ṇ: l as tulā tūṇa; veṇu: veḷu, etc. cp. aṇḍa, caṇḍa), then it would equal Gr. δένδρον tree, wood, & be connected with Sk dāru] 1. stem of a tree, wood, wood worked into something, e.g. a handle, etc. Ja ii.102; Ja ii.405 (v.l. dabba) Vism 313; Pv-a 220 (nimbarukkhassa daṇḍena [v.l. dabbena] katasūla). tidaṇḍa a tripod.
2. a stick staff, rod, to lean on, & as support in walking; the walking-stick of a Wanderer Vin ii.132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṃ), 196; SN i.176; AN i.138, AN i.206; Snp 688 (suvaṇṇa˚); Ja iii.395; Ja v.47 (loha˚); Sdhp 399 (eka˚, ˚dvaya, ti˚). daṇḍaṃ olubbha leaning on the st. MN i.108; AN iii.298; Thig 27.
3. a stick as means of punishment. a blow, a thrashing: daṇḍehi aññamaññaṃ upakkamanti “they go for each other with sticks” MN i.86 = Nd ii.199; ˚ṃ dadāti to give a thrashing Ja iv.382; Ja v.442; daṇḍena pahāraṃ dadāti to hit with a stick SN iv.62; brahma˚ a certain kind of punishment DN ii.154, cp. Vin ii.290 & Kern,; Manual p. 87; pañca satāni daṇḍo a fine of 500 pieces Vin i.247; paṇīta receiving ample p. Pv iv.166; purisa-vadha˚ Ja ii.417 rāja-daṇḍaṃ karoti (c. loc.) to execute the royal beating Pv-a 216. See also Dhp 129, Dhp 131, Dhp 310, Dhp 405
4. a stick as a weapon in general, only in cert. phrases & usually in comb;n w. sattha, sword. daṇḍaṃ ādiyati to take up the stick, to use violence: attadaṇḍa (atta = ā-dā violent Snp 935; attadaṇḍesu nibbuta Dhp 406 = Snp 630 a. + kodhâbhibhūta SN iv.117: ādinna-daṇḍa ādinnasattha Vin i.349; opp. daṇḍaṃ nidahati to lay down the stick, to be peaceful: sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ Snp 35, Snp 394, Snp 629; nihita-d. nihita-sattha using neither stick nor sword, of the Dhamma DN i.4, DN i.63; MN i.287; AN i.211; AN ii.208; AN iv.249; AN v.204. daṇḍaṃ nikkhipati id. AN i.206. d ■ sattha parāmasana Nd ii.576 daṇḍa-sattha-abbhukkirana & daṇḍa-sattha-abhinipātana Nd;2 5764. Cp. paṭidaṇḍa retribution Dhp 133. 5. (fig.) a means of frightening, frightfulness, violence teasing. In this meaning used as nt. as MN i.372; tīṇi daṇḍāni pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya: kāyadaṇḍaṃ vacī˚, mano˚; in the same sense as m. at Nd ii.293 (as expld to Snp 35).
6. a fine, a penalty, penance in general: daṇḍena nikkiṇāti to redeem w. a penalty Ja vi.576 (dhanaṃ datvā Com.); daṇḍaṃ dhāreti to inflict a fine Mil 171, Mil 193; daṇḍaṃ paṇeti id. Dhp 310 (cp. Dhp-a iii.482); Dhp-a ii.71; aṭṭha-kahāpaṇo daṇḍo a fine of 8 k. Vv-a 76 ■ adaṇḍa without a stick, i.e. without force or violence, usually in phrase adaṇḍena asatthena (see above 4): Vin ii.196 (ad. as. nāgo danto mahesinā; thus of a Cakkavattin who rules the world peacefully: paṭhaviṃ ad. as. dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati DN i.89 = AN iv.89, AN iv.105, or dhammena-manusāsati Snp 1002 = SN i.236.
-ābhighata slaying w. cudgels Pv-a 58; -āraha (adj. deserving punishment Ja v.442; Vv-a 23; -ādāna taking up a stick (weapon) (cp. above 4), combd with satth ādāna MN i.110, MN i.113, MN i.410; DN iii.92, DN iii.93, DN iii.289; AN iv.400 Vism 326. -kaṭhina k. cloth stretched on a stick (for the purpose of measuring) Vin ii.116; -kathālikā a large kettle with a handle Vin i.286; -kamma punishment by beating, penalty, penance, atonement Ja iii.276 Ja iii.527; Ja v.89; Mil 8; ˚ṃ karoti to punish, to inflict a fine Vin i.75, Vin i.76, Vin i.84; Vin ii.262; -koṭi the tip of a branch or stick Dhp-a i.60; -dīpikā a torch Ja vi.398; Vism 39; Dhp-a i.220, Dhp-a i.399; -ppatta liable to punishment Mil 46 -paduma Name of a plant (cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala = sahadevā Halāyudha) Ja i.51; -parāyana supported by or leaning on a stick (of old people) MN i.88; AN i.138; Mil 282 -parissāvana a strainer with a handle Vin ii.119 -pahāra a blow with a stick DN i.144; -pāṇin carrying a staff, “staff in hand” MN i.108; -bali (-ādi) fines taxes, etc. Dhp-a i.251; -bhaya fear of punishment AN ii.121 sq. = Nd ii.470 = Mil 196; -(m)antara among the sticks DN i.166 = AN i.295 = AN ii.206 = MN i.77, MN i.238, MN i.307, MN i.342 Pp 55; see note at Dial. i.228; -yuddha a club-fight DN i.6; Ja iii.541; -lakkhaṇa fortune-telling from sticks DN i.9; -vākarā a net on a stick, as a snare, MN i.153 -veḷupesikā a bamboo stick Ja iv.382; -sikkā a rope slung round the walking-staff Vin ii.131; -hattha with a stick in his hand Ja i.59.
Vedic daṇḍa, dial. = *dal[d
1. a (small) stick, a twig; a staff, a rod; a handle DN i.7 (a walking stick carried for ornament: see DA i.89); Ja i.120 (sukkha˚ a dry twig) ii.103; iii.26; Dhp-a iii.171; Vism 353 ■ aḍḍha˚; a (birch) rod, used as a means of beating (tāḷeti) AN i.47 AN ii.122 = MN i.87 = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197; ubhato˚; two handled (of a saw) MN i.129 = MN i.189; ratha˚; the flag-staff of a chariot Mil 27; veṇu˚; a jungle rope Ja iii.204 ■ See also kudaṇḍaka a twig used for tying Ja iii.204.
2. the crossbar or bridge of a lute Ja ii.252, Ja ii.253.
-dīpikā a torch Ja i.31; -madhu “honey in a branch, a beehive Dhp-a i.59.
DemiName of daṇḍa
(adj.) liable to punishment Mil 186.
grd. formation from daṇḍa
given (-˚ by; often in Np. as Brahmadatta, Deva-datta = Theo-dor. etc.) Snp 217 (para˚ = Snp-a 272 (v.l. dinna).
pp. of dadāti
(adj.-n.) stupid; a silly fellow MN i.383; Ja vi.192 (Com.: dandha lāḷaka).
prob. = thaddha, with popular analogy to datta1, see also dandha & cp. dattu
(f.) gift, donation, offering DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.342; AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55.
from dadāti + ti
(adj.) given; Ja iii.221 (kula˚); iv.146 (id.); nt. a gift DN i.103 (= dinnaka DN-a i.271).
der. fr. datta
= dattika, given as a present Ja ii.119 (kula˚); v.281 (sakka˚); vi.21 (id.): Vv-a 185 (mahārāja˚ by the King).
(adj.?) stupid, in d˚-paññatta a doctrine of fools DN i.55 = MN i.515; Ja iv.338.
is it base of n. ag. dātar? see datta2
(-˚) (adj ■ suff.) giving, to be given SN i.33 (paññā˚); Kp viii.10 (kāma˚); Pv ii.91 (id. = dāyaka Pv-a 113); ii.124 (phala = dāyin Pv-a 157); Vv-a 171 (puriṃ˚) ■ duddada hard to give SN i.19 = SN iv.65 = Ja ii.86 = Ja vi.571.
Sk.˚ dad or ˚dada, cp ˚da & dadāti base 3
to give, etc. I. Forms. The foll. bases form the Pāli verb-system: dā, dāy, dadā & di.
1. Bases dā & (reduced); da ■ (a) dā˚;: fut. dassati Ja i.113, Ja i.279 Ja iii.83; AN iii.37; AN iii.1st sg. dassāmi Ja i.223; Ja ii.160; Pv-a 17 Pv-a 35, etc ■ dammi interpreted by Com. as fut. is in reality a contraction fr. dātuṃ īhāmi, used as a hortative or dubitative subjunctive (fr. dāhāmi, like kāhami I am willing to do fr. kātuṃ īhāmi) Snp p.15 (“shall I give”); ii.112; iv.10 (varaṃ te dammi); Pv i.103ii.324 (kin t’ āhaṃ dammi what can I give thee = dassāmi Pv-a 88) ■ pret. adā Snp 303; Pv ii.28 (= adāsi Pv-a 81) Mvu vii.14; Mvu vii.2nd sg. ado Ja iv.10 (= adāsi Com.): Mil 384; Mil 1st. pl. adamha Ja ii.71; Mil 10; Mil 2nd pl. adattha Ja i.57 (mā ad.); Mil 10, & dattha Ja ii.181 ■ aor. adāsi Ja i.150, Ja i.279; Pv-a 73, etc.; pl. adaṃsu Pv i.116 ■ inf dātuṃ Ja iii.53; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 48 (˚kāma), etc. & dātave Snp 286 ■ grd. dātabba Ja iii.52; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 88, etc. (b) da˚;: pp. datta -ger. datvā Ja i.152, Ja i.290 (a˚); Pv-a 70, Pv-a 72, etc. & datvāna Pv i.113; also as ˚dā (for ˚dāya or ˚dāna) in prep. cpds., like an-upādā, ādā, etc. Der fr. 1. are Caus. dāpeti, pp. dāpita; n. ag. dātar; nt dāna. See also suffix dā,˚ datti, dattikā, etc.; and pp atta (= ā-d[a]ta).
2. Bases dāy & (reduced); day contracted into de. (a) dāy˚;: only in der. dāya, dāyaka dāyin and in prep. cpds. ā-dāye (ger. of ādāti). (b) de˚;: pres. ind. deti Snp 130; Ja ii.111, Ja ii.154; Pv-a 8 Pv-a 1st sg. demi Ja i.228, Ja i.307; Ja i.2nd desi Ja i.279; Pv-a 39 Pv-a 1st pl. dema Ja i.263; Ja iii.126; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 75 (shall we give) 2nd detha Ja iii.127; Ja iii.3rd denti Snp 244 ■ imper. dehi Vin i.17; Ja i.223; Ja iv.101; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 73; Pv-a 3rd sg. detu Ja i.263; Ja ii.104; Ja ii.2nd pl. detha Iti 66; Ja iii.126; Pv-a 29 Pv-a 62, Pv-a 76 ■ ppr. dento Ja i.265; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 11 etc ■ grd deyya Mvu vii.31. BtSk. deya ■ Other der. fr. base 2 are dayati & dayā (q.v.).
3. Base dadā: pres. ind dadāti SN i.18; Snp p.87; Snp p.1st. sg. dadāmi Ja i.207; Snp 421 Snp 3rd. pl. dadanti Ja iii.220; Dhp 249 ■ imper. dadāhi Pv ii.14 ■ pot. dadeyya Pv-a 17; Mil 28 & dade Pv ii.322; Vv 625; 1st. sg. dadeyyaṃ Ja i.254, Ja i.265; Ja i.2nd sg. dadeyyāsi Ja iii.276. Also contracted forms dajjā SN i.18 (may he give); Dhp 224; Pv i.41 (= dadeyya Pv-a 17); ii.940; 1st sg. dajjaṃ Vin i.232 (dajjâhaṃ = dajjaṃ ahaṃ). Cp i.109 (dajjâhaṃ); Ja iv.101 (= dammi Com.) Pv ii.945; 2nd. pl. dajjeyyātha Vin i.232; Vin i.3rd y. dajjeyya & 3rd. pl. dajjuṃ in cpd. anupa˚ ■ ppr.; dadanto Snp p.87. gen. etc. dadato It. 89; Dhp 242; Pv ii.942 & dadaṃ Snp 187, Snp 487; Pv ii.942; Vv 676 ■ ppr. med dadamāna Ja i.228, Ja ii.154; Pv-a 129 ■ aor. adadaṃ Vv 3411 (= adāsiṃ Vv-a 151); proh. 2nd. pl. mā dadiṭṭha Dhp-a i.396; Ja iii.171 ■ ger. daditvā Pv ii.89.ii (v.l. BB datvā): contr. into dajjā (should be read dajja Pv ii.967 (= datvā Pv-a 139) ■ Der. dada for ˚da. 4. (Passive) base di (& dī);: pp. dinna pres. dīyati SN i.18; Thig 475; Pv-a 26, & diyyati Vv-a 75; cp ādiyati; pret. dīyittha Dhp-a i.395 ■ ppr. dīyamāna Pv-a 8, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 49, Pv-a 110, Pv-a 133, etc ■ Der. fr. 4 are Desid dicchati, diti, etc ■ II. Meanings i. (trs.) with acc. to give, to present with: dānaṃ deti (w. dat. & abs.) to be liberal (towards), to be munificent, to make a present SN i.18; Iti 89; Pv i.41; ii3; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 27, etc ■ (fig. okāsaṃ to give opportunity, allow Ja i.265; ovādaṃ to give advice Pv-a 11; jīvitaṃ to spare one’s life Ja ii.154 paṭivacanaṃ to answer Ja i.279; sādhukāraṃ to applaud Ja i.223; paṭiññaṃ to promise Pv-a 76 ■ to offer, to allow: maggaṃ i.e. to make room Vin ii.221; Ja ii.4 maggaṃ dehi let me pass Ja iv.101 ■ to grant: varaṃ a wish Ja iv.10; Pv ii.940 ■ to give or deal out: daṇḍaṃ a thrashing Ja iv.382; pahāraṃ a blow SN iv.62.
2. with ger. to give out, to hand over: dārūni āharitvā aggiṃ katvā d. to provide with fire Ja ii.102; sāṭake āharitvā to present w. clothes Ja i.265; dve koṭṭhāse vibhajitvā d. to deal out Ja i.226; kuṭikāyo kāretvā adaṃsu had huts built & gave them Pv-a 42.
3. (abs.); with inf. to permit, to allow: khādituṃ Ja i.223; nikkhamituṃ Ja ii.154; pavisituṃ Ja i.263, etc.
Redupl. formation dā as in Lat. do, perf. de-di, Gr. δίδωμι; cp. Lat. dōs dowry, Gr. δώς; Ohg. dati Lith. důti to give
a heavy, indistinct noise, a thud Ja iii.76 (of the falling of a large fruit), v.l. duddabhayasadda to be regarded as a Sk. gloss = dundubhyaśabda. See also dabhakka.
onomatop.
to make a heavy noise, to thud Ja iii.77.
Denom. fr. prec.
partridge Ja iii.541.
onomat. from the noise, cp. next & cakora, with note on gala
a cert. (grinding, crashing) noise AN iv.171; Ja ii.8; Ja iii.461; Name of a mountain, expld as named after this noise Ja ii.8; Ja iii.16, Ja iii.461.
cp. Sk. dardara
to blaze, to shine brilliantly; only in pp. med. daddaḷhamāna resplendent, blazing forth SN i.127 = Ja i.469; Vv 173; 341; Pv ii.126; iii.35; Vv-a 89 (ativiya vijjotamāna); Pv-a 157 (at. virocamāna), 189 (at. abhijalanto) ■ Spelling daddallamāna at Ja v.402; Ja vi.118.
Sk. jājvalyati, Intens. of jval, see jalati
(nt.) a kind of cutaneous eruption Mil 298; Vism 345.
-bandhana in d ■ bandhanādi-bandhana at Thag-a 241 should be read daṇḍa˚.
Sk. dadru f. & dardru a kind of leprosy, dadruna leprous (but given by Halāyudha in the meaning of ringworm, p. 234 Aufrecht); fr. *der in Sk. dṛṇāti to tear, chap, split (see dara & dala); cp Lat. derbiosus; Ohg. zittaroh; Ags. teter
a cert. kind of rice DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.343; AN i.241, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55.
(nt.) in nahāru˚ (v.l. dala & dadalla) both at MN i.188 (kukkuṭapattena pi. n-daddulena pi aggiṃ gavesanti) & AN iv.47 (kukkuṭapattaṃ vā n-daddulaṃ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṃ paṭilīyati) unexplained; perhaps a muscle.
Sk. dārdura?
(nt.) sour milk, curds junket Vin i.244 (in enumn of 5-fold cow-produce, cp gorasa); DN i.201 (id.); MN i.316; AN ii.95; Ja ii.102 Ja iv.140; Mil 41, Mil 48, Mil 63; Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; Vism 264 Vism 362.
-ghaṭa a milk bowl Ja ii.102; -maṇḍaka whey SN ii.111 -māla “the milk sea,” Name of an ocean Ja iv.140; -vāraka a pot of milk-curds Ja iii.52.
Sk. dadhi, redpl. formation fr. dhayati to suck. Cp. also dhenu cow, dhīta, etc.
, a tooth, a tusk, fang, esp. an elephant’s tusk; ivory Vin ii.117 (nāga-d. a pin of ivory); Kp ii. (as one of the taca-pañcaka, or 5 dermatic constituents of the body, viz. kesā, lomā nakhā d. taco, see detailed description at Kp-a 43 sq.); pankadanta rajassira “with sand between his teeth & dust on his head” (of a wayfarer) Snp 980; Ja iv.362, Ja iv.371; MN i.242; Ja i.61; Ja ii.153; Vism 251; Vv-a 104 (īsā˚ long tusks); Pv-a 90, Pv-a 152 (fang); Sdhp 360.
-ajina ivory MN ii.71 (gloss: dhanadhaññaṃ); -aṭṭhika “teeth-bone,” ivory of teeth i.e. the tooth as such Vism 21. -āvaraṇa the lip (lit. protector of teeth Ja iv.188; Ja vi.590; Dhp-a i.387. -ullahakaṃ (M iii.167 see ullahaka; -kaṭṭha a tooth-pick Vin i.46 = Vin ii.223 Vin i.51, Vin i.61; Vin ii.138; AN iii.250; Ja i.232; Ja ii.25; Ja vi.75; Mil 15; Dhp-a ii.184; Vv-a 63; -kāra an artisan in ivory ivory-worker DN i.78; Ja i.320; Mil 331; Vism 336 -kūta tooth of a maimed bullock (?) (thus taking kūṭa as kūṭa4, and equivalent to kūṭadanta), in phrase asanivicakkaṃ danta-kūṭaṃ DN iii.44 = DN iii.47, which has also puzzled the translators (cp. Dial. iii.40: “munching them all up together with that wheel-less thunderbolt of a jawbone,” with note: “the sentence is not clear”) -pāḷi row of teeth Vism 251; -poṇa tooth-cleaner, always combd with mukh’ odaka water for rinsing the teeth Vin iii.51; Vin iv.90, Vin iv.233; Ja iv.69; Mil 15; Snp-a 272. The C. on Pārāj. ii.4, 17, (Vin iii.51) gives 2 kinds of dantapoṇa, viz. chinna & acchinna.; -mūla the root of a tooth; the gums Ja v.172; -vakkalika a kind of ascetics (peeling the bark of trees with their teeth? DN-a i.271; -vaṇṇa ivory-coloured, ivory-white Vv 4510 -valaya an iv. bangle Dhp-a i.226; -vikati a vessel of iv DN i.78; MN ii.18; Ja i.320; Vism 336. -vikhādana biting with teeth, i.e. chewing Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; -vidaṃsaka (either = vidassaka or to be read ˚ghaṃsaka) showing one’s teeth (or chattering?) AN i.261 (of hasita, laughter) -sampatti splendour of teeth Dhp-a i.390.
Sk. danta fr. acc. dantaṃ of dan, gen. datah = Lat. dentis. Cp. Av. dantan, Gr. ὀδόντα, Lat. dentem Oir. dēt; Goth. tunpus, Ohg. zand, Ags. tōot (= tooth & tusc (= tusk); orig. ppr. to *ed in atti to eat = “the biter.” Cp. dāṭhā
(adj.) made of ivory, or iv ■ coloured Ja vi.223 (yāna = dantamaya).
-kāsāva ivory-white & yellow Vin i.287; -valaya see danta1.
Sk. dānta
tamed, controlled restrained Vin ii.196; SN i.28, SN i.65, SN i.141 (nāgo va danto carati anejo); AN i.6 (cittaṃ dantaṃ); Iti 123 (danto damayataṃ seṭṭho); Snp 370, Snp 463, Snp 513, Snp 624; Dhp 35, Dhp 142 (= catumagga-niyamena d. Dhp-a iii.83), 321 sq. = Nd ii.475 ■ sudanta well-tamed, restrained Snp 23; Dhp 159 Dhp 323.
-bhūmi a safe place (= Nibbāna), or the condition of one who is tamed SN iii.84; Nd ii.475 (in continuation of Dhp 323); Dhp-a iv.6.
Sk. dānta, pp. dāmyati to make, or to be tame, cp. Gr. δμητός, Lat. domitus. See dameti
a pin of tooth or ivory; makara˚; the tooth of a sword-fish Vin ii.113, Vin ii.117; Vin iv.47. See details under makara.
(adj.) slow slothful, indocile; silly, stupid MN i.453; SN iv.190; Dhp 116; Ja i.116, Ja i.143; Ja ii.447; Ja v.158; Ja vi.192 (+ laḷāka) Thag 293; Mil 59, Mil 102, Mil 251; Dhp-a i.94, Dhp-a i.251; Dhp-a iii.4 Vism 105, Vism 257 (with ref. to the liver).
-ābhiññā sluggish intuition DN iii.106; AN v.63; Dhs 176; Ne 7, Ne 24, Ne 50, Ne 123 sq., cp. AN ii.149 sq.; Vism 85.
Sk.? Fausböll refers it to Sk. tandra; Trenckner (Notes 65) to dṛḍha; see also Müller, P. Gr. 22, & Lüders; Z.D.M.G. 58, 700. A problematic connection is that with thaddha & datta;2 (q.v.)
(f.) stupidity Dhp-a i.250; as dandhattaṃ at DN iii.106.
(f.), in a˚; absence of sluggishness Dhs 42, Dhs 43.
(f.) clumsiness Mil 105.
(nt.) stupidity (= dandhatā) DN i.249 (opp. vitthāyitatta); SN ii.54; Mil 105; DN-a i.252.
der. fr. dandheti
to be slow, to tarry Thag 293 (opp. tāreti) ■ pp. dandhāyita see in der. ˚tta.
Denom. fr. dandha
Caus. fr. dā4 to clean, see pariyo˚; pp. dāta see ava˚.
wantonness, arrogance Ja ii.277; Mil 361, Mil 414; Pgdp 50. Cp. ditta2 ■ In def. of root gabb at Dhtm 289.
Sk. darpa, to dṛpyati
(adj.) arrogant, haughty Ja v.232, Ja v.301.
(adj.-n.) (a) fit for, able, worthy, good, SN i.187 = Thag 1218, cp. Pss of the Brethren, 399, n. 4 (= Sk. bhavya, cp. Pāṇini v.3, 104 dravyaṃ ca bhavyaḥ) ■ (b) material, substance property; something substantial, a worthy object Pgdp 14.
-jātika of good material, fit for, able MN i.114; AN i.254 (cp. Sk. pātrabhūta); Vism 196. -saṃhāra collecting something substantial Pv-a 114 (should prob. be read sambhāra). -sambhāra the collection of something substantial or worth collecting,; a gift worth giving Ja iv.311; Ja v.48; Ja vi.427; Dhp-a i.321; Dhp-a ii.114.
Sk. dravya, nt. to dravati (dru )
(adj.-n.) treelike, wooden; a tree, shrub, wood Ja i.108 (d ■ tiṇagaccha a jungle of wood & grass); v.46 (d ■ gahana a thicket of shrubs & trees); Vism 353 (˚tiṇa).
Sk. dravya, of dru wood, see dāru
(f.) a (wooden) spoon, a ladle; (met.) the hood of a snake (dabbimattā, phaṇapuṭakā Dhp-a iv.132) ■ Dhp 64 gen. & instr, davyā Ja iii.218; Mil 365 ■ In cpds dabbi˚.
-kaṇṇa the tip of the ladle Dhp-a i.371; -gāha holding a spoon, viz. for the purposes of offering MN ii.157 (of a priest); Pv ii.953 (= kaṭacchu-gāhika Pv-a 135) -mukha a kind of bird Ja vi.540 (= āṭa); -homa a spoonoblation DN i.9.
Sk. darvī = *dāru-ī made of wood, see dāru
a bunch of kuśa grass (Poa Cynosuroides) DN i.141; MN i.344; AN ii.207.
-puppha “kuśa-flower,” Ep. of a jackal Ja iii.334.
Sk. darbha to dṛbhati, to plait, interlace, etc. cp. Lith. darbas plaiting, crating
(?) (indecl.) = daddabhaṃ; a certain noise (of a falling fruit) Ja iii.77 (v.l. duddabha = daddabha).
(adj.-n.) (& of a nt.; damo the instr. damasā) taming, subduing; self-control, self-command moderation DN i.53 (dānena damena saṃyamena = Iti 15 expl. at DN-a i.160 as indriya-damena uposatha-kammena) iii.147, 229; SN i.4, SN i.29, SN i.168 = Snp 463 (saccena danto damasā upeto); SN iv.349; AN i.151; AN ii.152 sq. MN iii.269 (+ upasama); Snp 189, Snp 542 (˚ppatta), 655; Dhp 9, Dhp 25, Dhp 261; Ne 77; Mil 24 (sudanto uttame dame). duddama hard to tame or control Dhp 159; Pv-a 280; Sdhp 367 ■ arindama taming the enemy (q.v.).
Ved. dama; Ags. tam = E. tame, Ohg. zam to *demā in dameti
(adj.-n.) 1. subduing, taming; converting; one who practises self-control MN i.446 (assa˚); iii.2 (id.) Ja i.349 (kula˚ bhikkhu), one who teaches a clan self-mastery 505 (go˚, assa˚, hatthi˚); Thig 422 (= kāruññāya paresaṃ cittassa damaka Thag-a 268).
2. one who practises self-mortification by living on the remnants of offered food (Childers) Abhp 467.
= dama
taming, subduing, mastery, restraint, control MN i.235; DN iii.54 (+ samatha); Dhp 35 (cittassa d.); Pv-a 265; Dpvs vi.36.
Sk. damatha
(adj.-n..) taming, subduing, mastery Pv-a 251 (arīnaṃ d˚-sīla = arindama).
(adj.) to be tamed: duddamaya difficult to tame Thag 5 (better to be read damiya ).
Sk. damya, see damma
subdued, tamed Ja v.36; Pv-a 265.
Sk. damāyita = danta3; cp. Gr. α δάματος; Lat. domitus
one who tames or subdues, a trainer, in phrase adantānaṃ dametā “the tamer of the untamed” (of a Buddha) MN ii.102; Thig 135.
n ■ ag. to dameti = Sk. damayitṛ, cp. Sk. damitṛ = Gr. (παν)δαμάτωρ δμητήρ; Lat. domitor
to make tame, chastise, punish master, conquer, convert Vin ii.196 (daṇḍena); MN ii.102; Dhp 80, Dhp 305 (attānaṃ); Iti 123 (ppr. [danto] damayataṃ seṭṭho [santo] samayataṃ isi); Mil 14, Mil 386; Pv-a 54 (core d. = converted).
Sk. damayati, caus. to dāmyati of *dam to bring into the house, to domesticate; Gr. δαμάω, δμητός Lat. domare; Oir. dam (ox); Goth. tamjan = Ohg zemman = Ags. temian = E. tame; to *demā of dama house, see dampati
master of the house, householder, see tudampati & cp. gahapati.;
Sk. dampati master of the house; dual: husband & wife; cp. also patir dan, *dam, as in Gr. δ ̈ω, δ ̈ωμα & δες-in δεσπότης = dampati, short base of *dama house = Ved. dama, Gr. δόμος, Lat. domus to *demā (as also in dameti to domesticate) to build, cp. Gr. δέμω & δέμας; Goth. timrjan; Ohg. zimbar; E. timber
(adj.) to be tamed or restrained; esp with ref. to a young bullock MN i.225 (balagāvā dammagāvā the bulls & the young steers); Iti 80; also of other animals: assadamma-sārathi a horse-trainer AN ii.112 & fig. of unconverted men likened to refractory bullocks in phrase purisa-damma-sārathi (Ep. of the Buddha “the trainer of the human steer” DN i.62 (misprint ˚dhamma˚) = ii.93 = iii.5; MN ii.38; AN ii.112; Vv 1713 (nara-vara-d ■ sārathi cp. Vv-a 86.
Sk. damya, grd. of dāmyati see dameti & cp. damaya (damiya)
= dayati (q.v.) to fly Ja iv.347 (+ uppatati); vi.145 (dayassu = uyyassu Com.).
= to have pity (c. loc.), to sympathize, to be kind Ja vi.445 (dayitabba), 495 (dayyāsi = dayaṃ kareyyāsi).
Ved. dayate of day to divide, share, cp. Gr. δαίομαι, δαίνυμι, δαίτη, etc. to dā (see dadāti, base 2) & with p. Gr.; δαπάνη, Lat. daps (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)
(f.) sympathy, compassion, kindness MN i.78; Snp 117; Ja i.23; Ja vi.495. Usually as anuddayā; freq. in cpd. dayāpanna showing kindness DN i.4 (= dayaṃ metta-cittaṃ āpanno DN-a i.70); MN i.288; AN iv.249 sq.; Pp 57; Vv-a 23.
Ved. dayā, to dayati2
fear, terror; sorrow, pain Vin ii.156 = AN i.138 (vineyya hadaye daraṃ); SN ii.101, SN ii.103; SN iv.186 sq.; Thig 32 (= cittakato kilesa-patho Thag-a, 38); Ja iv.61; Vv 838 (= daratha Vv-a 327); Pv i.85 (= citta-daratha Pv-a 41) ■ sadara giving pain, fearful, painful MN i.464; AN ii.11, AN ii.172; SN i.101. Cp. ādara & purindada.;
Sk. dara; see etym. connection under darī
anxiety, care, distress AN ii.238; MN iii.287 sq. (kāyikā & cetasikā d.); Snp 15 (darathajā: the Arahant has nought in him born of care Cy explains by pariḷāha fever); Ja i.61 (sabbakilesa-d.) Pv-a 230 (id.); Dhp-a ii.215; Mil 320; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 41; Vv-a 327.
Sk. daratha, der. fr. dara
(f.) [Sk. darī to dṛṇāti to cleave, split, tear, rend, caus. darayati *der = Gr. δέρω to skin, δέρμα, δορά skin); Lith. dirù (id.) Goth. ga-taíran = Ags. teran (tear = Ohg. zeran (Ger. zerren). To this the variant (r:l *del in dalati, dala, etc. See also daddara, daddu, dara avadīyati, ādiṇṇa, uddīyati, purindada (= puraṃ-dara) a cleavage, cleft; a hole, cave, cavern Ja i.18 (v. 106), 462 (mūsikā˚ mouse-hole); ii.418 (= maṇiguhā); Snp-a 500 (= padara).
-cara a cave dweller (of a monkey) Ja v.70; -mukha entrance of a cave Vism 110. -saya a lair in a cleft Cp iii.71.
(nt.) a blade, leaf, petal (usually -˚); akkhi-d eyelid Thag-a 259; DN-a i.194; Dhs-a 378; uppala˚ Dhs-a 311; kamala˚ (lotus-petal) Vv-a 35, Vv-a 38; muttā˚ (? DN-a i.252; ratta-pavāḷa˚ Ja i.75.
Sk. dala, *del (var. of *der, see dara) in dalati (q.v.) orig. a piece chipped off = a chip, piece of wood cp. daṇḍa, Mhg. zelge (branch); Oir delb (figure, form) deil (staff, rod)
to burst, split break ■ Caus.; dāleti Snp 29 (dalayitvā = chinditvā Snp-a 40); Mil 398 ■ Pass. dīyati (Sk. dīryate) see uddīyati. Dalidda & Dalidda;
Sk. dalati, del to split off, tear; Gr. δαιδάλλω, Lat. dolare & delere. See dala & dara
(adj.-n.) vagrant, strolling, poor, needy wretched; a vagabond, beggar-(l:) Vin ii.159; SN i.96 (opp. aḍḍha); AN ii.57, AN ii.203; AN iii.351; AN iv.219; AN v.43 Pp 51; Vv-a 299 (ḷ:) MN ii.73; SN v.100, SN v.384, SN v.404; Vv201 (= duggata Vv-a 101); DN-a i.298; Pv-a 227 Sdhp 89, Sdhp 528.
Sk. daridra, to daridrāti, Intens. to drāti run (see dava), in meaning cp. addhika wayfarer = poor
(f.) poverty Vv-a 63.
Sk. daridratā
see dāḷiddiya.
(adj.) firm, strong, solid; steady, fast nt. adv. very much, hard, strongly-D i.245; SN i.77; AN ii.33; Snp 321 (nāvā), 357, 701, 821 (˚ṃ karoti to strengthen), 966 (id.); Dhp 112; Ja ii.3; Ja iv.106; Dhp-a iv.48; Kp-a 184; Vv-a 212 (= thira); Pv-a 94, Pv-a 277- daḷhaṃ (adv.) Dhp 61, Dhp 313.
-dhamma strong in anything, skilled in some art proficient SN ii.266 = AN ii.48 (of an archer); MN i.82; Ja vi.77; Vv 631 acc. to Trenckner, Notes p. 60 (cp also Vv-a 261) = dṛḍha-dhanva, from dhanu = having a strong bow; -nikkama of strong exertion Snp 68 (= Nd ii.294); -parakkama of strong effort, energetic MN ii.95; AN ii.250; Dhp 23; Thig 160; -pahāra a violent blow Ja iii.83; -pākāra (etc.) strongly fortified SN iv.194 -bhattin firmly devoted to somebody Dhs-a 350.
Sk. dṛḍha to dṛhyati to fasten, hold fast; *dhergh, cp. Lat. fortis (strong). Gr. ταρφύς (thick) Lith. dir̃žas (strap). For further relations see Walde Lat. Wtb. under fortis
in kāya-daḷhī-bahula strong in body athletic Vin ii.76, cp. Com. on p. 313; Ja iii.310; Ja iv.219 daḷhīkaraṇa steadiness, perseverance Snp-a 290 (+ ādhāraṇatā), 398 (id). In cpds. also daḷhi˚ viz. -kamma making firm; strengthening Vin i.290; Ja v.254; Pp 18, Pp 22; Vism 112.
f. of dṛḍha → daḷha in compn like dṛḍhī-bhūta, etc.; cp. daḍḍhi
fire, heat Ja iii.260 ■ See also dāva & dāya.;
-ḍāha (= Sk. davāgni) conflagration of a forest, a jungle-fire Vin ii.138; MN i.306; Ja i.641; Cp iii.93 Mil 189; Vism 36.
Sk. dava, to dunoti (q.v.); cp. Gr. δαις fire-brand
running, course, flight quickness, sporting, exercise, play Vin ii.13; MN i.273 MN iii.2; AN i.114; AN ii.40, AN ii.145; AN iv.167; Pp 21, Pp 25 ■ davā (abl.) in sport, in fun Vin ii.101; davāya (dat.) id. Nd ii.540; Mil 367; Dhs 1347, cp. Dhs-a 402 ■ davaṃ karoti to sport, to play Ja ii.359, Ja ii.363.
-atthāya in joke, for fun Vin ii.113; -kamyatā fondness for joking, Vin iv.11, Vin iv.354; MN i.565.
Sk. drava to dravati to run, flow, etc. *dreu besides *drā (see dalidda) & *dram (= Gr. δρόμος); cp. abhiddavati also dabba = dravyaṃ
= dabba1, in sarīra˚; fitness of body, a beautiful body Ja ii.137.
for *dravya
the number ten; gen dasannaṃ (Dhp 137); instr. dasahi (Kp iii.) & dasabhi (Vin i.38). In cpds. (-˚) also as ḷasa (soḷasa 16) rasa (terasa 13; pannar˚ 15; aṭṭhār˚ 18).
Metaphorical meaning. (A) In the first place 10 is used for measurement (more recent & comprehensive than its base 5); it is the no. of a set or comprehensive unity, not in a vague (like 3 or 5), but in a definite sense. (B) There inheres in it the idea of a fixed measure, with which that of an authoritative, solemn & auspicious importance is coupled. This applies to the unit as well as its decimal comb;ns (100, 1000) Ethically it denotes a circle, to fulfil all of which constitutes a high achievement or power.
Application (A) (based on natural phenomena): dasa disā (10 points of the compass; see disā): Snp 719, Snp 1122; Pv-a 71, etc.; d. lokadhātuyo Pv ii.961 (= 10X1000; Pv-a 138); d. māse (10 months as time of gestation kucchiyā pariharitvā Ja i.52; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 82 ■ (B) (fig. 1. a set: (a) personal (cp. 10 people would have saved Sodom: Gen. 18, 32; the 10 virgins (2X5) Matt. 25, 1) divase divase dasa dasa putte vijāyitvā (giving birth to 10 sons day by day) Pv i.6 ■ (b) impersonal: 10 commandments (dasa sikkhāpadāni Vin i.83), cp. Exod 34, 28; 10 attributes of perfection of a Tathāgata or an Arahant: Tathāgata-balāni; with ref. to the Buddha see Vin i.38 & cp.; Vin. Texts i.141 sq.; dasah’ angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati (in memorizing of No. 10 Kp iii. dasahi asaddhammehi sam˚ kāko Ja iii.127–10 heavenly attributes (ṭhānāni): āyu etc. DN iii.146; SN v.275; Pv-a 9, opp. 10 afflictions as punishment (cp 10 plagues Exod. 7
11): dasannaṃ aññataraṃ ṭhānaṃ nigacchati Dhp 137 (= das. dukkha-kāraṇānaṃ, enumd v. 138, 139) “afflicted with one of the 10 plagues” cp. Dhp-a iii.70.
10 good gifts to the bhikkhu (see deyyadhamma) Nd ii.523; Pv-a 7; Pv-a 10 rules for the king Pv-a 161 ■ dividing the Empire into 10 parts: Pv-a 111; etc. vassa-dasa a decade: das’ ev’ imā vassa-dasā Ja iv.396 (enumd under vassa); dasa-rāja-dhammā Ja ii.367; das’ akkosa-vatthūni Dhp-a i.212 ■ See on similar sets AN v.1
310; DN iii.266
271.
2. a larger unity, a crowd, a vast number (of time & space) (a); personal, often meaning “all” (cp. 10 sons of Haman were slain Esth. 9, 10; 10 lepers cleansed at one time Luke 17, 12): dasa bhātaro Ja i.307; dasa bhātikā Pv-a 111; dasa-kaññā-sahassa-parivārā Pv-a 210 etc. (b) impersonal (cp. 10 X 10 = many times, S.B.E. 43, 3) dasa-yojanika consisting of a good many miles Dhp-a iii.291. dasavassasahassāni dibbāni vatthāni paridahanto (“for ever and aye”) Pv-a 76, etc.
-kkhattuṃ [Sk. ˚kṛtvah] ten times Dhp-a i.388; -pada (nt.) a draught-board (with 10 squares on each side) a pre-Buddhistic game, played with men and dice, on such a board DN i.6; Vin ii.10 = Vin iii.180 (˚e kīḷanti) DN-a i.85. -bala, [Sk. daśabala] endowed with 10 (supernormal) powers, Ep. of the Buddhas, esp. of Kassapa Buddha Vin i.38 = Ja i.84; SN ii.27; Vism 193, Vism 391; Dhp-a i.14; Vv-a 148, Vv-a 206, etc. -vidha tenfold Dhp-a i.398. -sata ten times a hundred Vin i.38 (˚parivāro) Snp 179 (yakkhā); Dhs-a 198 (˚nayano). -sahassa ten times a thousand (freq.); ˚ī in dasa-sahassi-lokadhātu Vin i.12 (see lokadhātu).
Sk. daśa = Av. dasa, Gr. δέκα, Lat. decem, Goth. taíhun, Oir. deich, Ags. tīen, Ohg. zehan fr. *dekm̊, a cpd. of dv + km̊ = “two hands”
(-˚) seeing, to be seen, to be perceived or understood DN i.18 (aññadatthu˚ sureseeing all-perceiving = sabbaṃ passāmī ti attho DN-a i.111); Snp 653 (paṭiccasamuppāda˚), 733 (sammad˚) Ja i.506 (yugamatta˚; v.l. dassa) ■ duddasa difficult to be seen or understood DN i.12 (dhammā gambhīrā d. see gambhīra); MN i.167, MN i.487; Snp 938; Dhp 252; also as sududdasa Dhp 36.
Sk ■ dṛśa; cp. dassa
(nt.) 1. a decad, decade, a decennial Ja iv.397; Dhs-a 316. khiḍḍā˚; the decad of play Vism 619; cakkhu etc. sense-decads Vism. 553; Comp. 164, 250; kāya˚ Vism. 588.
a tooth Dāvs v.3 (d.dhātu, the tooth relic of the Buddha).
Sk. daśana to ḍasati
(f.) & dasa; (nt.) unwoven thread of a web of cloth, fringe, edge or border of a garment DN i.7 (dīgha˚ long-fringed, of vatthāni); Ja v.187; Dhp-a i.180 Dhp-a iv.106 (dasāni) ■ sadasa (nt.) a kind of seat, a rug (lit. with a fringe) Vin iv.171 (= nisīdana); opp. adasaka (adj.) without a fringe or border Vin ii.301 = Vin ii.307 (nisīdana). -anta edge of the border of a garment Ja i.467; Dhp-a i.180 sq., 391.
Sk. daśā
(adj.) (-˚) to be seen, to behold, being of appearance, only in dud˚; or frightful app., fierce, ugly Si..94 & id. p. (q.v. under okoṭimaka); Ja i.504 (kodha, anger); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 90 (of Petas)-Note. The spelling is sometimes ˚dassika: AN ii.85 Pp 51; Pv-a 90.
Sk. dṛśika, cp. dassin
(adj.) belonging to a fringe, in dasika -sutta an unwoven or loose thread Vin iii.241; Dhp-a iv.206 (˚mattam pi not even a thread, i.e. nothing at all, cp. Lat. nihīlum = ne-fīlum not a thread = nothing) See also dasaka under dasā.
fr. dasā
(-˚) to see or to be seen, perceiving, perceived Snp 1134 (appa˚ of small sight, not seeing far, knowing little = paritta-dassa thoka-dassa Nd ii.69). Cp. akkha˚ a judge Mil 114. -su˚; easily perceived (opp. duddasa) Dhp 252.
Sk ■ darśa; cp. dasa2
to see, to perceive.
1. (pres.) base dakkh [Sk. drakṣ]: pres. (a) dakkhati Nd ii.428 (= passati), 1st dakkhāmi ibid. (= passāmi) 2nd dakkhasi SN i.116; Pv ii.113 (v.l. BB adakkhi) imper. dakkha Nd ii.428 (= passa) ■ (b) dakkhiti Snp 909 (v.l. BB dakkhati), 3rd pl. dakkhinti Vin i.16≈Snp p.15 (v.l. BB dakkhanti); DN i.46 ■ aor. addakkhi (Sk adrakṣīt) Vin ii.195; SN i.117; Snp 208 (= addasa Snp-a 257), 841, 1131; Iti 47; Ja iii.189; & dakkhi Iti 47; Iti 1st sg. addakkhiṃ Snp 938. Spelling also adakkhi (v.l. BB at Pv ii.113) & adakkhiṃ (Nd;2 423) ■ inf. dakkhituṃ Vin i.179 ■ Caus. p.p. dakkhāpita (shown, exhibited) Mil 119 ■ Der. dakkhin (q.v.).
2. (pret.) base dass (Sk. darś & draś): aor. (a); addasa (Sk. adarśat) Snp 358, Snp 679, Snp 1016; Ja i.222; Ja iv.2; Pv ii.323 (mā addasa = addakkhiṃ Pv-a 88); Dhp-a i.26; Pv-a 73 & (older, cp. agamā); addasā Vin ii.192, Vin ii.195; DN i.112 DN ii.16; Snp 409 (v.l. BB addasa), 910 (id.); Mil 24, Mil 1st sg. addasaṃ SN i.101; Nd ii.423 & addasaṃ Snp 837 (= adakkhiṃ Nd i.185), 1st pl. addasāma Snp 31, Snp 178, Snp 459, Snp 3rd pl. (mā) addasuṃ Pv ii.76 (= mā passiṃsu Pv-a 102). (b) addasāsi, 1st sg. addasāsiṃ Snp 937, Snp 1145; Vv 3552 (v.l. addasāmi), 3rd pl. addasāsuṃ Vin ii.195; DN ii.16; MN i.153 ■ (c) shortened forms of aor. are: adda Thag 986; addā Ja vi.125, Ja vi.126 ■ inf. daṭṭhuṃ Snp 685 (daṭṭhukāma); Ja i.290; Pv iv.13 (= passituṃ Pv-a 219); Pv-a 48, Pv-a 79; Vv-a 75 ■ ger. daṭṭhu (= Sk. dṛṣṭvā) Snp 424 (in phrase nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khemato) = 1098; 681 Expl. at Nd ii.292 with expl. of disvā = passitvā, etc. grd. daṭṭhabba (to be regarded as) DN ii.154; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 9 Pv-a 10, etc., Vism 464; & dassanīya (see sep.). Also in Caus. (see below) & in daṭṭhar (q.v.).;
3. (med ■ pass.) base diss (Sk. dṛś): pres. pass. dissati (to be seen, to appear) Vin i.16; Snp 194, Snp 441, Snp 688 (dissare), 956; Ja i.138; Dhp 304; Pv i.84; Pv-a 61 (dissasi you look, intrs.); ppr. dissamāna (visible) Pv-a 71, Pv-a 6 (˚rūpa), 162 (id.); Vv-a 78 (˚kāya); Mvu. vii.35, & der; dissamānatta (nt.) (visibility) Pv-a 103 ■ ger. disvā Snp 48, Snp 409, Snp 687 sq. Iti 76; Pv-a 67, Pv-a 68, etc., & disvāna Vin i.15; Vin ii.195; Snp 299, Snp 415, Snp 1017; Pv ii.87, etc., also a ger. form diṭṭhā, q.v. under adiṭṭhā ■ pp. diṭṭha (q.v.).
4. Caus. (of base 2) dasseti (Sk. darśayati), aor dassesi & (exceptional); dassayi, only in dassayi tumaṃ showed himself at Pv iii.24 (= attānaṃ uddisayi Pv-a 181) & iii.216 (= attānaṃ dassayi dassesi pākaṭo ahosi Pv-a 185). 3rd pl. dassesuṃ; ger. dassetvā; inf. dassetuṃ to point out, exhibit, explain, intimate Dhp 83; Ja i.84, Ja i.200, Ja i.263, Ja i.266; Ja ii.128, Ja ii.159; Ja iii.53, Ja iii.82; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 8 Pv-a 16 (ovādaṃ d. give advice), 24, 45, 73 etc ■ to point to (acc.) Pv-a 151 (sunakhaṃ), 257 (dārakaṃ) ■ to make manifest, to make appear, to show or prove oneself; also intr. to appear Ja ii.154 (dubbalo viya hutvā attānaṃ dassesi: appeared weak); vi.116; Pv iii.23 (= sammukhībhāvaṃ gacchanti Pv-a 181); Pv-a 13 (mitto viya attānaṃ dassetvā: acting like a friend) Mil 271. Esp. in phrase attānaṃ dasseti to come into appearance (of Petas): Pv-a 32, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 79, etc. (cp above dassayi) ■ pp. dassita.
Sk. *darś in dadarśa pref. to dṛś; caus. darśayati. Cp. Gr. δέρκομαι to see; Oir. derc eye; Ags torht; Goth. ga-tarhjan to make conspicuous. The regular Pāli Pres. is dakkhiti (younger dakkhati), a new formation from the aor. addakkhi = Sk. adrākṣīt The Sk. Fut. draksyati would correspond formally to dakkhati, but the older dakkhiti points toward derivation from addakkhi. This new Pres. takes the function of the Fut.; whereas the Caus. dasseti implies a hypothetical Pres. *dassati. On dakkhati, etc. see also Kuhn, Beitr. p. 116; Trenckner, Notes pp. 57, 61 Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 554
fut. of dadāti, q.v.
(nt.)
1. Lit. seeing, looking; noticing; sight of, appearance, look. Often equivalent to an infinitive “to see,” esp. as dat. dassanāya in order to see, for the purpose of seeing (cp. dassana-kāma = daṭṭhu-kāma): [Bhagavantaṃ] dassanāya MN ii.23, MN ii.46; AN i.121; AN iii.381; Snp 325 ■ (a) (nt. “sight” DN ii.157 (visūka˚, looking on at spectacles) AN iii.202 (+ savana hearing); iv.25 sq. (bhikkhu˚) Snp 207 (muni˚, may be taken as 2, cp. Snp-a 256), 266 (= pekkhaṇa Kp-a 148); Dhp 206 (ariyānaṃ d., cp ariyānaṃ dassāvin), 210 (appiyānaṃ), 274; Vv 342 Vv-a 138 (sippa˚ exhibition of art, competition). (b) adj. as (-˚) “of appearance” (cp. ˚dasa) Snp 548 (cāru˚ lovely to behold); Pv-a 24 (bhayānaka˚ fearful to look at), 68 (bībhaccha˚).
2. Appld. (power of perception, faculty of apperception, insight, view theory; esp. (a) in combn ñāṇa-dassana either “knowing & seeing,” or perhaps “the insight arising from knowledge,” perfect knowledge, realization of the truth, wisdom (cp. ñāṇa): SN i.52; SN ii.30; SN v.28, SN v.422; MN i.195 sq., 241, 482 (Gotamo sabbaññū sabba-dassāvī aparisesaṃ ñ-d ˚ṃ paṭijānāti; id. ii.31); DN iii.134; AN i.220; AN ii.220; AN iv.302 sq.; cp. ñ-d-paṭilābha AN i.43 AN ii.44 sq.; AN iii.323; ñ-d-visuddhi MN i.147 sq. Also with further determination as adhideva -ñ-d˚ AN iv.428 alam-ariya˚; SN iii.48; SN iv.300; SN v.126 sq.; MN i.68, MN i.71, MN i.81 MN i.207, MN i.246, MN i.440 sq., AN i.9; AN iii.64, AN iii.430; AN v.88; parisuddha AN iii.125; maggāmagga˚; AN v.47; yathābhūta˚; AN iii.19 AN iii.200; AN iv.99, AN iv.336; AN v.2 sq., 311 sq.; vimutti˚; SN i.139 SN v.67; AN iii.12, AN iii.81, AN iii.134; AN iv.99, AN iv.336; AN v.130; Iti 107, Iti 108; Mil 338. See also vimutti ■ (b) in other contexts: ariyasaccāna-dassana Snp 267; ujubhūta˚ SN v.384, SN v.404 dhamma˚ (the right doctrine) SN v.204, SN v.344, SN v.404; AN iii.263; pāpa˚ (a sinful view) Pv iv.355; viparīta AN iii.114; AN iv.226; AN v.284 sq. (and a˚), 293 sq. sammā (right view) SN iii.189; AN iii.138; AN iv.290; AN v.199; sabbalokena d. SN iv.127; sahetu d. SN v.126 sq.; suvisuddha d. SN iv.191 ■ SN iii.28, SN iii.49; MN ii.46; MN iii.157; Snp 989 (wisdom: Jinānaṃ eta d. corresponding with ñāṇa in preceding line); Dhs 584, Dhs 1002 (insight: cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 256) ■ (adj.) perceiving or having a view (cp dasseti) SN i.181 (visuddha˚); Thag 422 ■ (c) as nt. from the Caus. dasseti: pointing out, showing; implication definition, statement (in Com. style) Pv-a 72 often as ˚ākāra -dassana: Pv-a 26 (dātabba˚), 27 (thomana˚), 35 (kata˚) & in; dassanatthaṃ in order to point out, meaning by this, etc. Pv-a 9, Pv-a 68.
3. adassana not seeing SN i.168 = Snp 459; invisibility Ja iv.496 (˚ṃ vajjati to become invisible); wrong theory or view AN v.145 sq.; Snp 206; Pp 21.
-anuttariya (nt.) the pre-eminence or importance of (right or perfect) insight; as one of the 3 anuttariyāni viz. d˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutta˚ at DN iii.219, DN iii.250, DN iii.281; AN iii.284, AN iii.325; -kāma (adj.) desirous of seeing AN i.150 AN iv.115; Mil 23; -bhūmi the level or plane of insight Ne 8, Ne 14, Ne 50; -sampanna endowed with right insight SN ii.43 sq., 58.
Sk. darśana, see dassati1
(adj.) fair to behold, beautiful good-looking (= dassituṃ yutta DN-a i.141), often in formula abhirūpa d. pāsādika paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgəta to express matchless physical beauty: DN i.114; SN ii.279; Pv-a 46 etc. Also with abhirūpa & pāsādika alone of anything fair & beautiful DN i.47 ■ Vin iv.18; SN i.95; Ja iii.394; Pp 52, Pp 66; DN-a i.281; Pv-a 44 (= subha), 51 (= rucira) ■ Comparative dassanīyatara SN i.237; Sdhp 325: Dhp-a i.119.
Sk. darśanīya; grd. formation of dassana, also as dassaneyya
(adj.) = dassanīya Ja v.203 (bhusa˚).
(f.) seeing, sight (-˚) Mil 140 (guṇavisesa˚).
abstr. to dassāvin
(adj.-n.) full of insight, seeing, perceiving, taking notice of. In combn with ˚ñū (knowing) it plays the part of an additional emphasis to the 1st term = knowing & seeing i.e. having complete or highest knowledge of, gifted with “clear” sight or intuition (see jānāti passati & cp. ñāṇa-dassana).; (a) As adj ■ ˚: seeing, being aware of, realizing; anicca SN iii.1; ādīnava˚ SN ii.194; SN iv.332; MN i.173; AN v.181 sq. pariyanta˚ AN v.50 sq.; bhaya˚ SN v.187: Iti 96; esp. in phrase anumattesu vajjesu bhaya˚ DN i.63 = Iti 118 (cp bhaya-dassin); lokavajjabhaya˚ SN i.138; sabba˚; (+ sabbaññū) MN i.482 (samaṇo Gotamo s˚ s˚); ii.31; Mil 74 (Buddho s˚ s˚); cp. Mvu iii.51 sarvadarśāvin; sāra˚ Vin ii.139 ■ (b) (n.) one who sees or takes notice of in phrase ariyānaṃ dassāvī (+ sappurisānaṃ dassāvī kovido) MN i.8; SN iii.4; opp. adassāvī one who disregards the Noble Ones SN iii.3, SN iii.113; MN iii.17; Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs-a 350).
Sk. *darśavant
(-˚): see dasika1.
shown, exhibited, performed Vin iv.365; Ja i.330. Cp. san˚.
Sk. darśita, pp. of dasseti1
at Ja vi.579 accord. to Kern (Toev. p. 114) = Sk. daṃśita mailed, armed.
(-˚) (adj.) seeing, finding, realizing, perceiving. Only in cpds., like attha˚ Snp 385; ananta SN i.143; ādīnava˚ Sdhp 409; ekanga˚ Ud 69; jātikkhaya˚ Snp 209; Iti 40; ñāṇa˚ Snp 478 (= sacchikatasabbaññuta-ñāṇa Snp-a 411; cp. dassāvin); tīra˚ SN iii.164 sq.; AN iii.368, cp. tīra-dakkhin; dīgha˚ (= sabbadassāvin) Pv-a 196; bhaya˚ Dhp 31 (˚dassivā = dassī vā?), 317; Iti 40; DN-a i.181 (= bhaya dassāvin); viveka Snp 474, Snp 851.
Sk. ˚darśin
see attha˚.
enemy, foe; robber, in dassukhīla robber-plague DN i.135, DN i.136 (= corakhīla DN-a i.296).
Sk. dasyu, cp. dāsa
one who shows or points out, a guide, instructor, teacher AN i.62 AN i.132 = Iti 110.
Sk. darśayitṛ, n. agent to dasseti
Caus. of dassati1 (q.v.).
n. pl. of dāsī.
a lake DN i.45 (udaka˚); Ja i.50; Ja ii.104; Ja v.412; Mil 259; Pv-a 152; Dpvs i.44.
Sk. draha, through metathesis fr. hrada, hlād, see hilādate
(dahate) to put, place; take for (acc or abl.), assume, claim, consider DN i.92 (okkākaṃ pitāmahaṃ = ṭhapeti DN-a i.258); SN iii.113 (mittato daheyya) AN iv.239 (cittaṃ d. fix the mind on); Snp 825 (bālaṃ dahanti mithu aññamaññaṃ = passanti dakkhanti, etc Nd i.163). Pass dhīyati (q.v.); grd. dheyya (q.v.). Note. dahati is more frequent in combn with prefixes compositions like ā˚, upa˚, pari˚, sad˚, san˚, samā˚, etc pp.; hita.
Sk. dadhāti to put down, set up; *dhe = Gr. τίχημι, Lat. facio, Ohg. tuon, Ags. dōn E. to do. See also dhātu
= ḍahati to burn; as dahate Pv ii.98 (= dahati vināseti Pv-a 116).
fire Vism 338 (˚kicca); Thag-a 256; Dāvs v.6; Sdhp 20.
Sk. dahana, to dahati, orig. “the burner”
(adj.) small, little delicate, young; a young boy, youth, lad DN i.80, DN i.115; SN i.131; SN ii.279 (daharo ce pi paññavā); MN i.82; MN ii.19 MN ii.66; AN v.300; Snp 216, Snp 420 (yuvā + ), 578 (d. ca mahantā ye bālā ye ca paṇḍitā sabbe maccuvasaṃ yanti); Ja i.88 (daharadahare dārake ca dārikāyo), 291 (˚itthī a young wife); ii.160, 353; iii.393; Dhp 382; Pv iv.150 (yuvā) Dhp-a i.397 (sāmaṇera); DN-a i.197 (bhikkhū), 223 (= taruṇa), 284 (id.); Pv-a 148; Vv-a 76; Thag-a 239, Thag-a 251 Opposed to mahallaka Ja iv.482; to vuḍḍha Vism 100. f. daharā Vv 315 (young wife) (+ yuvā Vv-a 129); daharī Ja iv.35; Ja v.521; Mil 48 (dārikā).
Sk. dahara & dahra for dabhra to dabhnoti to be or make short or deficient, to deceive
= dahara, young Mil 310 ■ f. ˚ikā a young girl Thig 464, Thig 483.
(f.) a large tooth, fang, tusk; as adj. (-˚) having tusks or fangs DN ii.18 (susukkha˚); Ja i.505 (uddhaṭa-dāṭho viya sappo); iv.245 (nikkhanta˚); Dhp-a i.215; Pv-a 152 (kaṭhina˚); Sdhp 286.
-āvudha [Sk. daṃṣṭrāyudha] using a tusk as his weapon Ja v.172; -danta a canine tooth Kp-a 44; -balin one whose strength lies in his teeth (of a lion) Snp 72.
Sk. daṃṣṭrā to ḍasati (q.v.), cp. also daṭṭha
(f.) beard, whiskers Vin ii.134 (na d. ṭhapetabbā, of the bhikkhus) Ja i.305; Ja v.42 (tamba˚), 217 (mahā˚ having great whiskers); DN-a i.263 (parūḷha-massu˚ with beard whiskers grown long).;
Sk. *dāḍhikā = Prk. for daṃṣṭrikā
(adj.) having tusks Ja ii.245; Ja iv.348; Thag p.1; Sdhp 286.
cp. Sk. daṃṣṭrin
a giver, a generous person Pgdp 50 ■ adātā one who does not give, a miser Pv ii.82; otherwise as na dātā (hoti) AN ii.203; Iti 65.
Sk. dāṭr, n. ag. of dadāti to give; cp. Gr. δώτωρ & δοτήρ
(nt.) sickle, scythe Mil 33.;
Sk. dātra, to dā, Sk. dāti, dyati to cut, divide, deal out; cp. Gr. δατέομαι, δαίομαι & see dāna, dāpeti dāyati
(nt.) (a) giving, dealing out, gift; almsgiving liberality, munificence; esp. a charitable gift to a bhikkhu or to the community of bhikkhus, the Sangha (cp. deyyadhamma & yañña). As such it constitutes a meritorious act (puññaṃ) and heads the list of these, as enumerated in order, dānamaya puññaṃ, sīlamaya p. bhāvanāmaya p. viz. acts of merit consisting of munificence good character & meditation (D iii.218 e.g. cp. cāga, puñña, sīla). Thus in formula dānâdīni puññāni katvā Ja i.168; Pv-a 66, Pv-a 105; cp. cpds. under ˚maya ■ (b) Special merit & importance is attached to the; mahādāna the great gift, i.e. the great offering (of gifts to the Sangha), in character the buddhistic equivalent of the brahmanic mahāyajña the chief sacrifice. On 16 Mahādānas see Wilson Hindu Caste 413; on 4 Beal. Chinese Texts 88 ■ AN iv.246; Ja i.50 Ja i.74; Ja v.383 (devasikaṃ chasatasahassa-pariccāgaṃ karonto mahādānaṃ pavattesi “he gave the great largesse spending daily 600,000 pieces”); Pv-a 19, Pv-a 22, Pv-a 75 Pv-a 127, etc ■ (c) Constituents, qualities & characteristics of a dāna: 8 objects suitable for gifts form a standard set (also enum;d as 10), viz. anna pāna vattha yāna mālā gandha-vilepana seyyāvasatha padīpeyya (bread water, clothes, vehicle, garlands, scented ointment conveniences for lying down & dwelliṅg, lightiṅg facility) AN iv.239; cp. Pv ii.49 & see ˚vatthu & deyyadhamma; Eight ways of giving alms at DN iii.258; AN iv.236, five ways, called sappurisa-dāna (& asapp˚) at AN iii.171 sq.; eight sapp˚ at AN iv.243. Five manners of almsgiving metaphorically for sīlas 1–5 at AN iv.246; DN-a i.306. Five characteristics of a beneficial gift at AN iii.172, viz. saddhāya dānaṃ deti, sakkaccaṃ d.d. kālena (cp. kāladāna AN iii.41), anuggahitacitto, attānañ ca parañ ca anupahacca d.d ■ (d) Various passages showing practice & value of dāna: Vin i.236; DN i.53 (+ dama & saṃyama; cp. Iti 15; Pv-a 276); ii.356 sq (sakkaccaṃ & a˚); AN iv.392 sq. (id.); DN iii.147 sq. 190 sq., 232; SN i.98 (dānaṃ dātabbaṃ yattha cittaṃ pasīdati); AN i.91 = Iti 98 (āmisa˚ and dhamma˚, material & spiritual gifts); AN i.161; AN iii.41 (dāne ānisaṃsā) iv.60; 237 sq. (mahapphala), 392 sq. (˚ssa vipāka) v.269 (petānaṃ upakappati); Ja i.8 (aggaḷa˚); ii.112 (dinna˚), iii.52 (id.); Snp 263, Snp 713 (appaṃ dānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ) Pv-a 54 (āgantuka˚ gift for the newcomer); Sdhp 211
213 ■ adāna withholding a gift neglect of liberality, stinginess Pv ii.945; Mil 279; Pv-a 25; cp. ˚sīla under cpds.: atidāna excessive almsgiving Pv ii.945 (cp. Pv-a 129); Mil 277.
-agga [Sk. dānāgara, cp. bhattagga, salākagga; see Trenckner, Notes p. 56] a house where alms or donations are given, a store-house of gifts, fig. a source or giver of gifts, a horn of plenty Ja vi.487; Dhp-a i.152, Dhp-a i.189; Mil 2; Pv-a 121, Pv-a 124, Pv-a 127, Pv-a 141. A possible connection w. agga = āgra is suggested by combn dānāni mahādānāni aggaññāni AN iv.246; -ādhikāra supervision or charge of alms-distributing. Pv-a 124 (cp. Pv ii.927) -ānisaṃsa praise of generosity Pv-a 9; cp. AN iii.41 -upakaraṇa means or materials for a gift Pv-a 105 -upapatti (read uppatti at DN iii.258) an object suitable for gifts, of which 8 or 10 are mentioned (see above c AN iv.239 = DN iii.258; -kathā talk or conversation about (the merit & demerit of) almsgiving, one of the anupubbi-kathā Vin i.15, Vin i.18; -dhamma the duty or meritorious act of bestowing gifts of mercy (cp. deyyadhamma) Pv-a 9; -pati “lord of alms,” master in liberality, a liberal donor (def. by Bdhgh as: yaṃ dānaṃ deti tassa pati hutvā deti na dāso na sahāyo DN-a i.298) DN i.137 (+ saddho & dāyako, as one of the qualifications of a good king); AN iii.39; AN iv.79 sq (+ saddho); Snp 487; Pv i.114 (+ amaccharin); Ja i.199; Mil 279 sq.; Sdhp 275, Sdhp 303; -puñña the religious merit of almsgiving or liberality (see above a) Pv-a 73; -phala the fruit of munificence (as accruing to the donor) AN iii.39; AN iv.79; Pv ii.83 (˚ṃ hoti paramhi loke is rewarded in the life to come, cp. Iti 19); Pv-a 8 (cp Pv i.1); -maya consisting in giving alms or being liberal (see above a) DN iii.218 (puññakiriya-vatthu); Vb 135 (kusala-cetanā), 325 (pañña); Pv-a 8 (puñña), 60 (id.) 9 (kusala-kamma), 51, etc.; -vaṭṭa alms Ja vi.333 -vatthu that which constitutes a meritorious gift almsgiving, beneficence, offering, donation DN iii.258; AN iv.236; Pv-a 20 (= annapānādika dasavidha dātabbavatthu Pv-a 7); -veyyāvaṭika services rendered at the distribution of gifts Dhp-a iii.19; -saṃvibhāga liberal spending of alms DN iii.145, DN iii.169; AN i.150, AN i.226; AN iii.53 AN iii.313; AN v.331; Iti 19; Vism 306; freq. with ˚rata fond of giving alms SN v.351, SN v.392; AN iv.6 (vigatamalamaccherena cetasā), 266 (id.); -salā a hall, built for the distribution of alms & donations to the bhikkhus & wanderers Ja i.231, Ja i.262; Ja iv.402 (six); v.383 (id.); -sīla liberal disposition Pv-a 89; usually as adāna-sīla (adj.) of miserly character, neglecting the duty of giving alms Snp 244; Pv ii.83 (˚ā na saddahaṇti dānaphalaṃ hoti paramhi loke); Pv-a 45 (= adāyaka), 59 (+ maccharin) 68 (id.).
Ved. dāna, dā as in dadāti to give & in dāti, dyāti to deal out, thus: distribution (scil. of gifts); cp Gr. δάνος (present), Lat. damnum (E. damages); Gr δ ̈ωρον, Lat. donum; also Ags. tīd (= E. tide, portion, i.e. of time), & tīma (= E. time). See further dadāti dayati, dātta, dāpeti. Def;n at Vism 60: dānaṃ vuccati avakhaṇḍanaṃ
(adv.) now, Vin i.180; Vin ii.154; SN i.200, SN i.202; SN ii.123; SN iv.202; Ja ii.246; Mil 11, etc.
shortened form for idāni, q.v.
: see vo˚.
given, sent Pv-a 6; Mvu vii.26.
Sk. dāpayita pp. of dāpeti1
to induce somebody to give, to order to be given, to deal out, send, grant, dedicate Ja vi.485; Pv-a 46; aor dāpesi Ja iv.138; Dhp-a i.226, Dhp-a i.393 (sent); Pv-a 5 (id.), 31 fut. dāpessati Ja ii.3; Dhp-a 371. Cp. ava˚.
Sk. dāpayati, dap fr. dā (see dadāti & dayati) = deal out, spend, etc., cp. Gr.; δάπτω, δαπάνη (expenditure), δεϊπνον (meal); Lat. daps (id.), damnum (expense fr. *dapnom). See also dātta & dāna
to cause to run Ja ii.404.
Sk. drāvayati & drapayati, Caus. to; dru, see davati
(nt.) a bond, fetter, rope; chain, wreath, garland SN iv.163 (read dāmena for damena), 282, (id.); AN iii.393 (dāmena baddho); Snp 28 (= vacchakānaṃ bandhanatthāya katā ganthitā nandhipasayuttā rajjubandhanavisesā); Vism 108. usually -˚, viz. anoja-puppha Ja i.9; Ja vi.227; olambaka˚ Vv-a 32; kusuma˚ Ja iii.394 gandha˚ Ja i.178; Vv-a 173, Vv-a 198; puppha˚ Ja i.397; Vv-a 198; mālā˚ Ja ii.104; rajata˚ Ja i.50; Ja iii.184; Ja iv.91 rattapuppha˚ Ja iii.30; sumana˚ Ja iv.455.
Sk. dāman to dyati to bind (Gr. δίδημι), *dé, as in Gr. δέσμα (rope), διάδημα (diadem), ὑπόδημα (sandal)
wood jungle, forest; a grove Vin i.10 (miga˚), Vin i.15, Vin i.350; Vin ii.138; SN ii.152 (tiṇa˚); SN iv.189 (bahukaṇṭaka d. = jungle) AN v.337 (tiṇa˚); Ja iii.274; Ja vi.278. See also dāva.
-pāla a grove keeper Vin i.350; MN i.205.
Sk. dāva, conflagration of a forest; wood = easily inflammable substance; to dunoti (to burn) caus dāvayati, cp. Gr. δαίω (to burn) & P. dava;1
a gift, donation; share, fee DN i.87≈(in phrase rājadāya brahmadeyya, a king’s grant, cp. rājadattiya); Ja iv.138; Ja v.363; Ja vi.346. Cp dāyāda & brahmadeyya.;
Sk. dāya, to dadāti, etc.
(adj.) giving, bestowing, distributing, providing (usually -˚); (n.) a donor, benefactor; a munificent person MN i.236 sq. AN i.26, AN i.161; AN ii.64, AN ii.80; AN iii.32, AN iii.336; AN iv.81; Snp p.87; Iti 19 (ito cutā manussattā saggaṃ gacchanti dāyakā); Ja v.129 (kaṇḍa˚); Pv i.11 sq.; 12; 42; 55; DN-a i.298; Pv-a 113 (= dada); Mil 258 (˚ānaṃ dakkhiṇā); Sdhp 276 ■ f dāyikā Vin ii.216 (bhikkhā˚), 289 (khīrassa) ■ adāyaka a stingy person, one who neglects almsgiving (cp. adānasīla) Pv i.119; f. ˚ikā Pv i.93.
Sk. dāyaka, dā as in dadāti & dāna
(nt.) inheritance Vin i.82; DN iii.189; AN iii.43; Ja i.91; Vism 43 sq.; dowry Ja iii.8 ■ (adj.) one who inherits Vin iii.66 (pituno of the father).
-upasampadā, lit. the Upasampadā by way of inh., a particular form of ordination conferred on Sumana Sopāka, both novices seven yrs. old Dhp-a iv.137.
Sk. dāyādya; see dāyāda
to cut, mow, reap, caus. dāyāpeti to cause to be cut or mowed Dhp-a iii.285.
Sk. dāti & dyāti; (dā) to cut, divide, etc.; cp. dayati, dātta, dāna
(nt.) cutting; ˚agga the first of what has been cut (on fields) Dhp-a i.98; ˚atthaṃ for the purpose of mowing Dhp-a iii.285.
see dayati
heir MN i.86 = Nd ii.199; SN i.69, SN i.90; SN iv.72; AN iii.72 sq.; Ja iii.181; Ja vi.151; Kp viii.5. Often fig. with kamma˚; one who inherits his own deeds (see kamma 3 A b & cpds.): MN i.390 sq.; AN v.289; & as; dhamma˚; (spiritual heir) opposed to āmisa (material h.): MN i.12; Iti 101; also as dhamma˚ DN iii.84 as brahma˚; MN ii.84; DN iii.83 ■ adāyāda not having an heir SN i.69; Ja v.267. See dāyajja & dāyādaka.;
Sk. dāyāda = dāya + ā-da receiving the (son’s) portion, same formation on ground of sam̊e idea as Lat heres = *ghero + ē-do receiver of what is left: see Brugmann Album Kern p. 29 sq.
heir MN ii.73; Thag 781, Thag 1142; f. ˚ikā Thig 327 (= dāyajjarahā Thag-a 234).
= dāyāda
(adj.) = dāyaka Pv-a 157; Sdhp 211, Sdhp 229. -Dayin
(adj.) giving, granting, bestowing Pv-a 121 (icchit’ icchita˚), 157 (= [kāma dada); Sdhp 214 (dānagga˚). Dara & Dara
Sk. dāyin, of dadāti
(f.) a young woman, esp. married woman, wife. As; dārā f. at Nd ii.295 (d. vuccati bhariyā & Iti 36; f. also dārī maiden, young girl Pv i.115. Otherwise as dāra (coll-masc.): Dhp 345; Ja i.120; Ja ii.248 Ja iv.7; Ja v.104, Ja v.288; Vv-a 299 (˚paṭiggaha) ■ putta-dārā (pl.) wife & children Snp 108, Snp 262; Ja i.262; cp. saputtadāra with w. & ch. Pv iv.347; putta ca dārā ca Snp 38 Snp 123. Freq. in definition of sīla No. 3 (kāmesu micchācārin or abrahmacariyā, adultery) as sakena dārena santuṭṭha AN iii.348; AN v.138; Snp 108 (a˚); Pv 177, etc- paradāra the wife of another MN i.404 sq.; Dhp 246 Dhp 309; Snp 396 (parassa d.) Pv-a 261.
Sk. dāra (m.) & dārā (f.), more freq. dārā (m.pl.); instr. sg. dārena Ja iv.7; Pv iv.177, etc. instr, pl. dārehi Snp 108 (sehi d. asantuṭṭho not satisfied with his own wife), loc. pl. dāresu Snp 38 (puttesu dāresu apekkhā), orig. “wives, womenfolk,” female members of the household = Gr. δοϋλος (slave; Hesychius δουλος = ἡ οἰκία; cp. also origin of Germ. frauenzimmer & E. womanhood). Remnants of pl. use are seen in above passage. fr. Sn.
a (young) boy, child, youngster; a young man. f. dārikā girl (see next) Vin i.83; Ja i.88 (dārake ca dārikāyo boys & girls); Ja ii.127; Ja vi.336; Pv i.127 (= bāla˚ Pv-a 65) Dhp-a i.99 (yasa˚ = yasa-kulaputta); Mil 8, Mil 9; Pv-a 176-Freq. as gāmadārakā (pl.) the village-boys, streeturchins Ja ii.78, Ja ii.176; Ja iii.275.
-tikicchā the art of infant-healing DN i.12 (= komārabhacca-vejjakamma DN-a i.98).
Sk. dāraka, cp. dāra & Gr.; δουλος (slave)
(f.) a young girl, daughter Ja iii.172; Ja vi.364; Mil 48, Mil 151; Pv-a 16 (daughter), 55 67, 68.
Sk. dārikā, see dāraka
(nt.) wood, piece of wood; pl. woodwork, sticks AN i.112; Iti 71; Dhp 80; Ja ii.102; Ja iii.54; Ja vi.366; Dhp-a i.393; Pv-a 76 (candana˚) 141.
-kuṭikā a hut, log-house Vin iii.43; -kkhandha pile of wood Pv-a 62; -gaha a wood yard Vin iii.42 sq. -ghaṭika wooden pitcher Thag-a 286. -cīriya “woodbarked” Np, Dhp-a ii.35. -ja made of wood SN i.77; Dhp 345; -dāha the burning of wood SN i.169; -dhītalikā a wooden doll Vin iii.36, Vin iii.126; -patta a wooden bowl Vin ii.112, Vin ii.143; pattika one who uses a wooden bowl for collecting alms DN i.157; DN iii.22; DN-a i.319; pādukā a wooden shoe, a clog Vin ii.143; -bhaṇḍa wooden articles Vin ii.143 (specified), 170, 211; -maṇḍalika a wooden disk Dhp-a iii.180; -maya wooden Vv-a 8; Dhp-a i.192; -yanta a wooden machine Vism 595 -saṅghāta (-yāna) “a vehicle constructed of wood, i.e. a boat Ja v.194; -samādahāna putting pieces of wood together SN i.169.
Sk. dāru, *dereṷo (oak) tree; cp. Av. dāuru (wood) Gr. δόρυ (spear), δρυς (oak); Lat. larix (fr *dārix) = larch; Oir. daur (oak); Goth. triu, Ags. treo tree. Also Sk. dāruṇa, Lat. dūrus (hard) etc., Oir. dru strong. See also dabba2, dabbī & duma
(cp. dāru] a log SN i.202 = Thag 62 = Dhp-a iii.460; adj. made of wood Th 2. 390 (˚cillaka, a wooden post see Thag-a 257).
(adj.) strong, firm, severe harsh, cruel, pitiless SN i.101; SN ii.226; Snp 244; Dhp 139; Ja iii.34; Pv iv.36 (= ghora Pv-a 251); Mil 117 (vāta) Pv-a 24, Pv-a 52 (= ghora), 159 (sapatha a terrible oath ghora), 181 (= kurūrin), 221 (˚kāraṇa); Sdhp 5, Sdhp 78, Sdhp 286.
Ved. dāruṇa, to dāru (“strong as a tree”), cp. Gr. δροόν = ἰσξυρόν Hesych; Lat. dūrus; Oir. dron (firm), Mir. dūr (hard) Ags. trum
see vi˚. Dalika & Dalima;
f. dalati
in; ˚laṭṭhi a kind of creeper; equivalent to takkāri (?) Thig 297 (dālikā) = Thag-a 226 (dālikā & dālima).;
Sk. dālika the colocynth & dāḍima the pomegranate tree
(& daḷiddiya) (nt.) poverty DN iii.65, DN iii.66; AN iii.351 sq.; Ja i.228; Dāvs ii.60; Sdhp 78.
Sk. *dāridrya
see dalati.
in ˚aggi a jungle-fire Ja i.213; Ja iii.140; Vism 470; Dhp-a i.281.
Sk. dāva, see dava1 & daya;1
(adj.) in piṇḍa˚, a cert. rank in the army (v.l. piṇḍa-dāyika) DN i.51 = Mil 331 (DN-a i.156: sāhasikamahāyodhā etc., with popular expl. of the terms piṇḍa & davayati).;
a slave, often combd w. f. dāsī. Def. by Bdhgh as “antojāto” (DN-a i.300), or as “antojātadhanakkīta-karamarânīta-sāmaṃ dāsabyaṃ upagatānaṃ aññataro” (ibid. 168) ■ In phrase dāsā ca kammakarā “slaves & labourers” Vin i.243, Vin i.272; Vin ii.154; as dāso kammakaro “a slave-servant” DN i.60 (cp. d. kammakara) ■ Vin i.72, Vin i.76 (dāso na pabbājetabbo the slave cannot become a bhikkhu); DN i.72; MN ii.68 (fig. taṇhā˚); Ja i.200, Ja i.223; Ja iii.343 (bought for 700 kahāpaṇas), 347; Pp 56; Pv-a 112.
-kammakara (porisa) a slave-servant, an unpaid labourer, a serf Vin i.240; AN i.206; DN iii.189; Dhp-a iv.1; -gaṇa a troop of slaves Pv iv.141; -purisa a servant Ja i.385; -porisa a servant, slave Snp 769 (cp. Nd i.11 where 4 kinds of d. are mentioned); -lakkhaṇa fortunetelling from (the condition of) slaves DN i.9.
Ved. dāsa; orig. adj. meaning “non-Aryan,” i.e. slave (cp. Gr. βάρβαρος, Ger. sklave = slave); Av. dāha a Scythian tribe. Also connected w. dasyu (see dassukhīla)
= dāsa in ˚putta a slave, of the sons of the slaves, mentioned as one of the sipp’ āyatanas at DN i.51 (expl. by Bdhgh as balavasinehā-gharadāsa-yodhā DN-a i.157) ■ sadāsaka with slaves, followed by slaves Vv 324 ■ f. dāsikā a female slave (= dāsī) MN i.126; Ja vi.554.
(f.) = dāsavya Sdhp 498. Dasavya & Dasabya;
(nt.) the condition of a slave, slavery, serfdom DN i.73; MN i.275 (b); Ja i.226; DN-a i.168 (b), 213; Dhp-a iii.35; Pv-a 112, Pv-a 152.
cp. Sk. dāsya
(nt.) the status of a (female) slave Mil 158.
Sk. dāsītva
a species of tree Ja vi.536.
= dāsikā, a female slave Ja vi.554.
(f.) a female servant, a handmaiden a slave-girl Vin i.217, Vin i.269, Vin i.291; Vin ii.10 (kula˚), 78 iii.161; MN i.125; MN ii.62 (ñāti˚); Pv ii.321 (ghara˚); Pv-a 46, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 65 ■ Cp. kumbha˚.
-gaṇa a troop of slave-girls Ja ii.127; -dāsā (pl.) maid& man-servants Dhp-a i.187; freq. to cpd. d-d-paṭiggahaṇa slave-trading DN i.5≈(cp. DN-a i.78); -putta the son of a slave, an abusive term (gharadāsiyā va putto Dhp i.257; cp. Sk. dāsīsuta) DN i.93 (˚vāda); -bhoga the possessions of a slave Vin iii.136.
Sk. dāsī, cp. dāsa. Nom. pl. dasso for dāsiyo Ja iv.53; in cpds. dāsi˚
see ḍāha.
secondary base of numeral “2,” contracted fr. dvi: see under dvi B i.4.
initiated, consecrated, cira˚ initiated long since SN i.226 = Ja v.138, Ja v.139 (where dakkhita q.v.; Com. cira-pabbājita).
Sk. dīkṣita “having commenced the preparatory rites for sacrifice”
(f.) disgust Dhs-a 210 (asuci˚).
= jigucchā; Sk. jugupsā
(f.) hunger AN ii.117.
= jighacchā
(adj.) inferior, low, last, hindmost (i.e. westward) Ja v.24 (where the Com. seems to imply a reading jighacchaṃ with meaning of 1st sg. pot. intens. of ghas, but d. is evidently the right reading), 402, 403 (˚rattiṃ at the end of the night).
for jighañña = Sk. jaghanya fr. janghā
to wish to give, to be desirous of giving SN i.18, SN i.20 (dicchare 3rd pl.); Ja iv.64.
Sk. ditsati, Desid. fr. dadāti, base 4, q.v.
see under dvi B i.4.
1. seen; a˚ not seen DN i.222 (a˚ + avedita asacchikata); MN i.3 sq. (diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhato sañjānāti); Snp 147 (diṭṭhā vā ye vā addiṭṭhā) 995 (na me diṭṭho ito pubbe na ssuto… Satthā) Ja ii.154; Ja iii.278; Pv i.23 (sāmaṃ d. = seen by yourself) 33 (id.) ■ nt. diṭṭhaṃ a vision Ja iii.416 ■ Since sight is the principal sense of perception as well as of apperception (cp. cakkhu), that which is seen is the chief representation of any sense-impression, & diṭṭha combd with suta (heard) and muta (sensed by means of smell taste & touch), to which; viññāta (apperceived by the mind) is often joined, gives a complete analysis of that which comprises all means of cognition & recognition Thus; diṭṭha + suta stands collectively for the whole series Snp 778, Snp 812, Snp 897, Snp 1079; Pv iv.13; diṭṭha suta muta (see Nd ii.298 for detail & cp. diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena) Snp 790, Snp 901, Snp 914, Snp 1082, Snp 1086, Snp 1122 (na tuyhaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ asutaṃ amutaṃ kiñcanaṃ atthi = you are omniscient); d. suta muta viññāta in the same sense as Snp 1122 in “yaṃ sadevakassa lokassa d. s. m. v sabbaṃ taṃ Tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ” of the cognitive powers of the Tathāgata DN iii.134 = Nd ii.276; Iti 121; DN iii.232; Snp 1086, Snp 1122.
2. known, understood MN i.486; Snp 761; diṭṭha pañha a problem or question solved Ja vi.532. See also conclusion of No. 1
3. (adj.) visible, determined by sight, in conn. with dhamma meaning the visible order of things, the world of sensation, this world (opp. samparāyika dhamma the state after death, the beyond). Usually in cpds. (-˚) of this world, in this world ■ diṭṭhadhamma Vin ii.188; DN iii.222 sq.; AN i.249; AN ii.61; Nd ii.297 (= ñātadhamma); DN-a i.278; Sdhp 470 ■ ˚abhinibbuta attained to Nibbāna in this birth AN i.142; Snp 1087 (see Nibbāna) ˚nibbāna earthly N. DN i.36; DN-a i.121; ˚sukhavihāra (& ˚in) happy condition (or faring well) in this world Vin ii.188; MN i.40, MN i.331, MN i.459; SN ii.239; Dhs 577, Dhs 1283; Dhs-a 296; ˚vedanīya to be perceived in this condition AN i.249, AN i.251; Pv-a 145 ■ Freq. in loc. diṭṭhe dhamme (in this world) Iti 17 (attha, opp. samparāyika attha) or diṭṭhe va dhamme (already or even in the present existence) DN i.156, DN i.167, DN i.177, DN i.196; DN iii.108; MN i.341 sq. 485; ii.94, 103; AN ii.155, AN ii.167; AN iii.429; Snp 141, Snp 343, Snp 1053; Iti 22, Iti 23, etc ■ In the same sense diṭṭhadhammika (adj.) belonging or referring to this world or the present existence, always contrasted with samparāyika belonging to a future state: Vin i.179; Vin iii.21; DN iii.130; AN i.47, AN i.98; Nd ii.26; Iti 16; Vv-a 149; Pv-a 131, etc.
-ānugati imitation of what one sees, emulation, competition SN ii.203; MN i.16; AN i.126; AN iii.108, AN iii.251, AN iii.422 Pp 33; Dhp-a iv.39; -āvikamma making visible or clear open statement, confession Vin v.183, Vin v.187 sq.; -kāla the time of seeing (anybody), opportunity Vv-a 120 -ppatta one who has obtained (Nibbāna) in this world Ne 190; -padā (pl.) visible signs or characteristics AN iv.103; -maṅgalika (adj.) of puccha, a question concerning visible omina. Ja iv.390; as ˚ikā (f.) Np at Ja iv.376 sq. Snp-a 185 sq. -saṃsandana Nd ii.447 = Dhs-a 55.
Sk. dṛṣṭa, pp. of *dassati
(n.) an enemy Ja i.280; cp. Sk. dviṣat ■ (adj.) poisoned, in diṭṭhagatena sallena with a p. arrow SN ii.230; misreading for diddh-agadena, q.v. The Cy. has diddhagatena with v.l. dibba-gadena.
Sk. dviṣṭa, pp. of dveṣṭi dviṣ to hate
(adj.) seen, visible, apparent Dhp-a ii.53, Dhp-a ii.90.
= diṭṭha1
(indecl.) exclamation of joy, hurrah! DN iii.73; Ja i.362.
Sk. dṛṣṭyā, instr. of diṭṭhi
(f.) view, belief, dogma, theory, speculation, esp. false theory, groundless or unfounded opinion ■ (a) The latter is rejected by the Buddha as pāpa˚; (A iv.172) and pāpikā d. (opp bhaddikā: AN v.212 sq.; Iti 26): Vin i.98, Vin i.323; Dhp 164; Pv iv.354; whereas the right, the true, the best doctrine is as sammā d. the first condition to be complied with by anyone entering the Path. As such the sammā d is opposed to micchā d. wrong views or heresy (see b) Equivalent with micchā d. is kudiṭṭhi (late) Dāvs ii.58 ■ (b) Characterized more especially as: (a) sammā diṭṭhi right doctrine, right philosophy Vin i.10; SN ii.17; SN v.11, SN v.14, SN v.30 sq., 458 sq., MN i.315; MN ii.12, MN ii.29, MN ii.87 MN iii.72; Nd ii.485; Vb 104 sq. See magga ■ ujukā d SN v.143, SN v.165; ujugatā d. MN i.46 sq ■ (β) micchā d wrong theory, false doctrine SN i.145; SN ii.153 (caused by avijjā); MN iii.71; Dhp 167, Dhp 316; Nd ii.271iiib; Vb 361 Vb 389 ■ The foll. theories are to be considered as varieties of micchā d., viz. (in limited enumn) akiriyavāda SN iii.208; SN iv.349; aññaṃ aññena SN iii.211; antaggāhikā AN i.154; AN ii.240; AN iii.130; antānantikā DN i.22 sq. SN iii.214, SN iii.258 sq.; assāda˚; AN iii.447; ahetukavādā SN iii.210 ucchedavādā DN i.34; SN ii.20; SN iii.99; SN iii.110 sq.; bhava˚ SN iii.93; MN i.65; AN i.83; sakkāya˚; AN iii.438; AN v.144; Snp 231 (cp. Kp-a 188); Nd ii.271iiib (20 fold, as diṭṭhilepa); sassatavādā DN i.13; SN ii.20; SN iii.98, SN iii.213 sq. 258 sq ■ (c) Various theories & doctrines are mentioned & discussed at: Vin i.115; SN i.133; SN ii.61 sq. 75 sq., 222; iii.215 sq., 258 sq.; iv.286; v.448 (= DN i.31) DN iii.13 sq., 45, 246, 267; MN i.40; AN i.32; AN ii.252 sq. AN iii.132, AN iii.289, AN iii.349; Thig 184; Pts i.135 sq.; Pp 22; Dhs 392, Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 257 sq., 293, 325) Vb 145, Vb 245, Vb 341, Vb 393 sq.; Sdhp 13, Sdhp 333 ■ (d) Miscellaneous: 4 diṭṭhiyo at Vb 376; also at Vism 511 (sakkāya˚, uccheda˚, sassata˚, akiriya˚); 5 Vb 378 Vb 6 at MN i.8; Vb 382; Vb 7 at Vb 383; Vb 20 see under sakkāya˚; 62 under diṭṭhigata ■ In series diṭṭhi khanti ruci laddhi characterizing “diṭṭhadhamma” at Nd ii.299 & passim. Diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena in def. of a theory of cognition at Nd;2 300 as complementing taṇhā see taṇhā B 3. Coupled with vācā & citta in formula (taṃ) vācaṃ appahāya cittaṃ appahāya diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā… (nikkhitto evaṃ niraye) at SN iv.319; DN iii.13, DN iii.15; combd with (& opposed to) sīla (as pāpaka & bhaddaka) at Iti 26, Iti 27 ■ diṭṭhiṃ āsevati to hold a view MN i.323; ˚ṃ bhindati to give up a view Ja i.273 Dāvs ii.58.
-ānugati a sign of speculation Vin ii.108; SN ii.203 Pp 33. -ānusaya inclination to speculation DN iii.254 DN iii.282; SN v.60; AN iv.9; -āsava the intoxicant of speculation the 3rd of four āsavā, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, d.˚ avijjā˚ Vin iii.5; Nd ii.134; Dhs 1099, Dhs 1448; Vb 373 cp. ˚ogha; -upadānā taking up or adhering to false doctrines, the 2nd of the four upādānāni or attachments viz. kāma˚, d.˚, sīlabbata˚, attavāda˚ DN iii.230; Dhs 1215, Dhs 1536; -ogha the flood of false doctrine, in set of four ogha’s as under ˚āsava DN iii.230, DN iii.276; Nd ii.178 -kantāra the wilderness of groundless speculation Dhs 381, Dhs 1003, Dhs 1099, etc.; see ˚gata; -gaṇṭhi the web or tangle of sophisticism Vv-a 297; cp. ˚sanghāṭa; -gata (nt.) “resorting to views,” theory, groundless opinion false doctrine, often followed by series of characterizing epithets: d ■ gahana, ˚kantāra, ˚visūka, ˚vipphandita ˚saññojana, e.g. MN i.8; Nd ii.271iiib. Of these sophistical speculations 2 are mentioned at Iti 43, Pts i.129 Pts i.6 at Pts i.130; Pts i.62 (the usual number, expressing “great and small” sets, cp. dvi AN ii.) at DN i.12–39 (in detail) SN iv.286; Pts i.130; Nd ii.271iiib; Ne 96, Ne 112, Ne 160. Vin i.49; DN i.162, DN i.224, DN i.226; SN i.135, SN i.142; SN ii.230; SN iii.109 SN iii.258 sq. (anekavihitāni); iv.286 (id.); MN i.8, MN i.176, MN i.256 sq. (pāpaka), 326 (id.), 426 sq.; AN iv.68; AN v.72 sq., 194 (pāpaka); Snp 649, Snp 834, Snp 913; Pp 15; Dhs 277, Dhs 339, Dhs 392 Dhs 505; Vism 454 ■ adj. ˚gatika adhering to (false) doctrine Dpvs vi.25; -gahana the thicket of speculation Dhs 381, Dhs 1003; see ˚gata; -jāla the net of sophistry DN i.46; DN-a i.129; -ṭṭhāna a tenet of speculative philosophy DN i.16; MN i.136; AN v.198; Pts i.138 (eight) Mil 332; DN-a i.107; -nijjhānakkhanti forbearance with wrong views SN ii.115; SN iv.139; AN i.189 sq.; AN ii.191; Nd ii.151; -nipāta a glance Vv-a 279; -nissaya the foundation of speculation MN i.137; DN ii.137 sq.; -pakkha the side or party of sophists Ne 53, Ne 88, Ne 160; -paṭilābha the attainment of speculation MN iii.46; -paṭivedha = prec DN iii.253; -patta one who has formed (a right or wrong view DN iii.105, DN iii.254; MN i.439; AN i.74; AN i.118, AN iv.10; AN v.23 -parāmasa perversion by false doctrine Dhs 1498 -maṇḍala the circle of speculative dogmatics Dhs-a 109 -vipatti failure in theory, the 3rd of the four vipattiyo viz. sīla˚, ācāra˚, d.˚, ājīva˚; opp. ˚sampadā Vin v.98; DN iii.213; AN i.95, AN i.268; Pp 21; Dhs 1362; Vb 361 -vipallāsa contortion of views AN ii.52; -visaṃyoga disconnection with false doctrine DN iii.230, DN iii.276; -visuddhi beauty of right theory AN i.95; MN i.147 sq.; DN iii.214 DN iii.288; -visūka (nt.) the discord or disunion (lit. the going into parties) of theories, the (?) puppet-show of opinion MN i.8, MN i.486; Snp 55 (= dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni), K S ii.44; Vv 8426; Pv iv.137; Nd ii.301 (= vīsati-vattukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi); cp. Nd ii.25 (attānudiṭṭhi); Dhs 381 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101), 1003, 1099. See also ˚gata; -vyasana failing or misfortune in theory (+ sīla˚, in character) DN iii.235 Nd ii.304; -saṃyojana the fetter or bond of empty speculation (cp. ˚anusaya) DN iii.254; AN iv.7 sq.; -saṅghāta the weft or tangle of wrong views (cp. ˚gaṇṭhi) Nd i.343 Nd ii.503; -samudaya the origin of wrong views AN iv.68 -sampadā success in theory, blessing of right views attainment of truth DN iii.213; DN iii.235 (opp. ˚vipatti), SN v.30 sq.; AN i.95, AN i.269; AN iii.438; AN iv.238; Pp 25; Dhs 1364; Vv-a 297; -sampanna endowed with right views SN ii.43, SN ii.58, SN ii.80; SN v.11; AN iii.438 sq.; AN iv.394; Vb 366 Dialogues iii.206, n. 10; -sārin (adj.) following wrong views Snp 911.
Sk. dṛṣṭi; cp. dassana
(adj.) (-˚) seeing, one who regards; one who has a view MN iii.24 (āgamana˚ one who views the arrival i.e. of guests); SN ii.168 sq. (sammā˚ & micchā˚ hoḷding right & wrong theories); DN iii.96 (vītimissa˚). See añña˚, micchā˚, sammā˚.
(f.) the fact of having a (straightforward) view (uju˚) Mil 257.
fr. diṭṭhi
(adj.-n.) one who has a view, or theory, a follower of such & such a doctrine Ud 67 (evaṃ˚ + evaṃ vādin).;
broken, split, undone, torn, as neg. adiṇṇa unbroken DN i.115 (so read for ādina-khattiya-kula; v.l. BB. abhinna˚); SN v.74 (so read for ādīna-mānaso, v.l. BB. adinā & SS ādina˚) Cp. also; ādiṇṇa.
Sk. dīrṇa, pp. of dṛ; dṛṇāti, see darī
blazing. Dāvs v.32. Usually in cpd. āditta.
Sk. dīpta, dīp; cp. dīpa
proud, arrogant, insolent; wanton Thag 198; Ja ii.432; Ja iii.256 = Ja iii.485; Ja v.17, Ja v.232 Ja vi.90, Ja vi.114.
Sk. dṛpta; cp. dappa
smeared Ja v.425 sq.; esp. smeared with poison, poisoned Ja iv.435 (sara, a poisoned arrow); perhaps to be read at Iti 68 for duṭṭha (scil. sara) and at SN ii.230 for diṭṭha Cp. san˚.
Sk. digdha to dih, see deha
(nt.) day Sdhp 239 -duddinaṃ darkness Dāvs v.50 (d. sudinaṃ ahosi, cp i.49, 51); also as f. duddinī Vin i.3.
Sk. dina; Lat. nun-dinae (*noven-dinom); Oir. denus; Goth. sin-teins; cp. divasa
a kind of bird Ja vi.538.
cp. Sk. ṭiṭṭibha?
(nt.) a musical instrument, a small drum Ja vi.580; Bv i.32. See also deṇḍima.
Sk. ḍiṇḍima, cp. dundubhi
given, granted, presented etc., in all meanings of dadāti q.v.; esp. of giving alms Pv iv.326 (= mahādāna Pv-a 253) & in phrase adinn’ādāna taking what is not given, i.e. stealing, adj adinnâdāyin stealing, refraining from which constitutes the 2nd sīla (see under sīla) ■; dinna: DN i.55≈(n’ atthi dinnaṃ the heretic view of the uselessness of almsgiving); Ja i.291; Ja ii.128; Snp 191, Snp 227, Snp 240; Dhp 356; Pv-a 68 (given in marriage). Used as finite tense freq. e.g. Ja i.151, Ja i.152; Ja vi.366 ■ adinna: MN i.39, MN i.404; Snp 119 (theyyā adinnaṃ ādiyati), 156, 395, 400, 633; Pv-a 33 etc.
-ādāyin taking (only) what is given DN i.4; DN-a i.72 -dāna almsgiving Ja iii.52; Dhp-a i.396; -dāyin giving alms, liberal, munificent DN iii.191.
Sk. dinna, pp. of dadāti
an adopted son, in enumn of four kinds of sons (atraja, khettaja, antevāsika, d.) Nd ii.448; Ja i.135 (= posāvanatthāya dinna).
to shine, to shine forth, to be illustrious Vin ii.285. Cp. pa˚.
Sk. dīpyate, see under dīpa1 & cp. jotati
(adj.) [Ved. divya = P. divya in verse (q.v.), Gr. δϊος (*Διvιος), Lat. dīus (*divios) = divine. Cp. deva of the next world, divine, heavenly, celestial, superb magnificent, fit for exalted beings higher than man (devas, heroes, manes etc.), superhuman, opp. mānusaka human. Freq. qualifying the foll. “summa bona” cakkhu the deva-eye, i.e. the faculty of clairvoyance attr. in a marked degree to the Buddha & other perfect beings (see cakkhumant) DN i.82, DN i.162; DN ii.20 (yena sudaṃ samantā yojanaṃ passati divā c’ eva rattiñ ca); DN iii.219; SN i.196; SN ii.55 sq.; MN ii.21; Iti 52; Thig 70; Pts i.114 Pts ii.175; Vism 434; Sdhp 482; Pv-a 5 (of Moggallāna) Tikp 278; Dukp 54. sota the d. ear, matching the d. eye DN i.79, DN i.154; Ja v.456; also as sotadhātu AN i.255; MN ii.19; DN iii.38, DN iii.281; Vism 430. rūpa DN i.153. Āyu, vaṇṇa etc. (see dasa ṭhānāni) AN i.115; AN iii.33; AN iv.242; Pv-a 9 Pv-a 89. kāmā Snp 361; Dhp 187; Iti 94; also as kāmaguṇā AN v.273. Of food, drink, dress & other commodities AN i.182; Ja i.50, Ja i.202; Ja iii.189; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 70, Pv-a 76 etc. Def. as devaloke sambhūta DN-a i.120; divibhavattā dibba Kp-a 227; divibhāvaṃ devattabhāva-pariyāpanna Pv-a 14 ■ See further e.g. SN i.105; DN iii.146; Snp 176, Snp 641; Dhp 236, Dhp 417; Pp 60; Vism 407 (defn) 423.
-osadha magical drugs Mil 283; -kāmā (pl.) heavenly joys (see above) Ja i.138 (opp. mānusakā); -cakkhuka endowed with the superhuman eye SN ii.156; AN i.23 AN i.25; -paṇṇākāra (dasavidha˚) the (tenfold) heavenly gift (viz. āyu, vaṇṇa etc.: see ṭhāna) Dhp-a iii.292 -bhāva divine condition or state Pv-a 110; -yoga union with the gods SN i.60; -vihāra supreme condition of heart Mil 225; -sampatti heavenly bliss Ja iv.3; Dhp-a iii.292; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 30.
to sport, to amuse oneself Vv-a 18 (in expl. of devī); to play at dice MN ii.106 (akkhehi).
Sk. dīvyati, pp. dyūta see jūta
(adj.) one who has little common-sense Ja vi.206, Ja vi.207 Ja vi.213, Ja vi.214. Com. expls wrongly on p. 209 with “one who possesses two tongues” (of Agni), but has equivalent nippañña on p. 217 (text 214: appapañña + ).
Sk. dara-saṃjña? See Kern, Toev. p. 118
(a) heaven Ja iv.134 (˚ṃ agā); Ja v.123 (˚ṃ patta); Pv-a 74 (˚ṃ gata) ■ (b) day Snp 507 (rattindivaṃ night day); Vv-a 247 (rattindiva one night & one day, i.e. 24 hrs.); Dhp-a ii.8 (divā-divassa so early in the day) Also in divaṃ-kara, daymaker, = sun, Vv-a 307; usually as divākara (q.v.). Cp. devasika; see also ajja.
-santatta heated for a whole day Ja iv.118 (cp. divasa˚)
Sk. diva (nt.), weak base diṷ (div) of strong form di̯ē (see deva) to *dei̯eṷo to shine; cp. Sk. dyo heaven divā adv. by day; Lat. biduum (bi-divom) two days
(m; nt. only in expression satta divasāni 7 days or a week Ja iv.139; Mil 15) a day AN i.206 (˚ṃ atināmeti); Ja iii.52 (uposatha˚); Pv-a 31 (yāva sattadivasā a week long), 74 (sattamo divaso) Usually in oblique cases adverbially, viz. acc. divasaṃ (during) one day, for one day, one day long AN iii.304 AN iv.317; Ja i.279; Ja ii.2; Dhp-a iii.173 (taṃ d. that day) eka˚ one day Ja i.58; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 33, Pv-a 67 ■ gen. divasassa (day) by day SN ii.95 (rattiyā ca d. ca); Ja v.162; DN-a i.133 ■ instr. divasā day by day Ja iv.310; divasena (eka˚) on the same day Ja i.59; sudivasena on a lucky day Ja iv.210 ■ loc. divase on a day: eka Ja iii.391; jāta˚ on his birth-day Ja iii.391; Ja iv.138 dutiya˚ the next day Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 17, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 80 etc.; puna id. Ja i.278; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 38; sattame d. on the 7th day Snp 983; Mil 15; Pv-a 6; ussava˚ on the festive d. Vv-a 109; apara˚ on another day Pv-a 81. Also repeated divase divase day after day, every day Ja i.87; Pv-a 3. abl. divasato from the day (-˚) Ja i.50; DN-a i.140.
-kara the “day-maker,” i.e. the sun (cp. divākara Vv-a 169, Vv-a 271; -bhāga the day-part (opp. ratti˚ the night-part), day-time Mil 18 (˚ena); Pv-a 152 (˚ṃ) 206 (˚e = divā); -santatta heated the livelong day SN i.169; MN i.453; AN iv.70, cp. Vin i.225; Mil 325; cp diva˚
Sk. divasa; see diva
(adv.) by day SN i.183; MN i.125; Dhp 387; DN-a i.251; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 142, Pv-a 206 (= divasa-bhāge) Often combd & contrasted with; rattiṃ (or ratto) by night; e.g. divārattiṃ by day & by night SN i.47; divā c’ eva rattiñ ca DN ii.20; rattim pi divā pi Ja ii.133 divā ca ratto ca SN i.33; Snp 223; Dhp 296; Vv 314; Vv-a 128 ■ divātaraṃ (compar. adv.) later on in the day MN i.125; Ja iii.48, Ja iii.498 ■ atidivā too late SN i.200; AN iii.117.
-kara (= divaṃ kara) the day-maker, the sun Thag-a 70 (= Ap. v.16); Pv-a 155; -divassa (adv.) early in the day, at sunrise, at an early hour Vin ii.190; SN i.89, SN i.91 SN i.97; AN v.185; MN ii.100, MN ii.112; Ja ii.1; Ja vi.31; Dhp-a ii.8; Vv-a 239, Vv-a 242; -vihāra the day-rest, i.e. rest during the heat of the day Vin i.28, SN i.129, SN i.132, SN i.146, SN i.193 = Thag 1241; Snp 679; -saññā consciousness by day, daily c DN iii.223 = AN ii.45; -seyyā = ˚vihāra DN i.112.
Ved. divā, cp. diva
an abstraction fr. divya constructed for etym. expln of dibba as divi-bhava (˚bhāva) of divine existence or character, a divine being, in “divi-bhavāni divyāni ettha atthī ti divyā” Snp-a 219; “divi-bhavattā dibbā ti” Kp-a 227; “divibhāvaṃ devattabhāvapariyāpanno ti dibbo” Pv-a 14.
a musical instrument Dpvs xvi.14.
(adj.) divine Snp 153 (cp. Snp-a 219 under divi˚), 524 (+ mānusaka); Ja vi.172 ■ (nt.) the divinity a divine being (= devatā) Ja vi.150; Snp-a 219.
Sk. divya; the verse-form for the prose-form dibba (q.v.)
an enemy Dhp 42, Dhp 162; Ja iii.357; Ja iv.217; Ja v.453; Th i.874–6; cp. Pss. Breth., 323, n. i.
Sk. dviṣant & dviṣa (-˚); dveṣṭi & dviśati to hate; cp. Gr. δεινός (corynthic δvεινία, hom. δέδvιμεν fearful; Lat. dīrus = E. dire
(f.) direction, quarter, region, part of the world Ja iv.359; Pv ii.921 (kiṃ disataṃ gato “where in the world has he gone?”); Vv ii.32 (sādisatā the circle of the 6 directions, cp. Vv-a 102).
Sk. diśatā, see disā
(f.) state of being an enemy, a host of enemies Ja iv.295 (= disasamūha, v.l. as gloss: verasamoha).
Sk. *dviṣatā, see disa
to point, show; to grant, bestow etc. Usually in combn with pref. ā, or in Caus. deseti (q.v.). As simplex only at SN i.217 (varaṃ disā to be read for disaṃ cp. Sk. adiśat). See also upa˚.
Ved. diśati, *deik to show, point towards; cp. Gr. δείκνυμι (δίκη = diśā), Lat. dico (indico, index = pointer judex), Goth. gateihan = Ger. zeigen, Ags. taecan = E token
(f.) point of the compass, region quarter, direction, bearings. The 4 principal points usualy enumd are puratthimā (E) pacchimā (W) dakkhiṇā (S) uttarā (N), in changing order. Thus at SN i.101, SN i.145; SN ii.103; SN iii.84; SN iv.185, SN iv.296; Nd ii.302; Pv ii.126 (caturo d.); Pv-a 52 (catūsu disāsu nirayo catūhi dvārehi yutto), and passim ■ To these are often added the two locations “above & below” as uparimā & heṭṭhimā disā (also as uddhaṃ adho SN iii.124 e.g. also called paṭidisā DN iii.176), making in all 6 directions: DN iii.188 sq. As a rule, however, the circle is completed by the 4 anudisā (intermediate points; sometimes as vidisā: SN i.224; SN iii.239; DN iii.176 etc.), making a round of 10 (dasa disā) to denote completeness, wide range & all pervading comprehensiveness of states activities or other happening: Snp 719, Snp 1122 (disā catasso vidisā catasso uddhaṃ adho: dasa disā imāyo) Thig 487; Pts ii.131; Nd ii.239 (see also cātuddisa in this sense); Pv i.111; ii.110; Vism 408. sabbā (all) is often substituted for 10: SN i.75; DN ii.15; Pv i.21; Vv-a 184; Pv-a 71 ■ anudisā (sg.) is often used collectively for the 4 points in the sense of “in between,” so that the circle always implies the 10 points. Thus at SN i.122 SN iii.124. In other combinations as 6 abbreviated for 10 four disā plus uddhaṃ & anudisaṃ at DN i.222 = AN iii.368 four d. + uddhaṃ adho & anudisaṃ at SN i.122; SN iii.124; AN iv.167. In phrase “mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharati” (etc. up to 4th) the all-comprehending range of universal goodwill is further denoted by uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ etc., e.g. DN i.250 Vb 272; see mettā ■ As a set of 4 or 8 disā is also used allegorically (“set, circle”) for var. combinations viz. the 8 states of jhāna at MN iii.222; the 4 satipaṭṭhānā etc. at Ne 121; the 4 āhārā etc. at Ne 117. See also in other applications Vin i.50 (in meaning of “foreign country”); ii.217; SN i.33 (abhayā), 234 (puthu˚); iii.106; v.216; DN iii.197 sq.; Iti 103; Thag 874; Vv 416 (disāsu vissutā) ■ disaṃ kurute to run away Ja v.340. diso disaṃ (often spelt disodisaṃ) in all directions (lit. from region to region) DN iii.200; Ja iii.491 Thag 615; Bv ii.50; Pv iii.16; Mil 398. But at Dhp 42 to disa (enemy), cp. Dhp-a i.324 = coro coraṃ. See also J.P.T.S. 1884, 82 on abl. diso = diśatah. Cp. vidisā.
-kāka a compass-crow, i.e. a crow kept on board ship in order to search for land (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 173 E. Hardy, Buddha p. 18) Ja iii.126, Ja iii.267; -kusala one who knows the directions Vin ii.217; -cakkhuka “seeing” (i.e. wise) in all directions Ja iii.344; -ḍāha “sky-glow,” unusual redness of the horizon as if on fire, polar light (?) or zodiacal light (?) DN i.10; Ja i.374 Ja vi.476; Mil 178; DN-a i.95; cp. BSk. diśodāha Avs ii.198; -pati (disampati) a king SN i.86; Ja vi.45; -pāmokkha world-famed Ja i.166; -bhāga [Sk. digbhāga direction, quarter Vin ii.217; -mūḷha [Sk. diṅmūḍha one who has lost his bearings Dpvs ix.15; -vāsika living in a foreign country Dhp-a iii.176. -vāsin = ˚vāsika Dhp-a iv.27.
Ved. diś & diśā, to diśati “pointing out,” point; cp. Gr. δίκη = diśā
Pass. of *dassati, q.v.
(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) long DN i.17; MN i.429; SN i.104 (˚ṃ addhānaṃ); Snp 146, Snp 633 (opp. rassa); Dhp 60 Dhp 409; Pv i.1011 (˚ṃ antaraṃ all the time); ii.955 (id.) Thag 646 (˚m-antare); Dhs 617; Kp-a 245; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 28 Pv-a 33, Pv-a 46. See def. at Vism 272 ■ dīghato lengthways Ja vi.185; dīghaso in length Vin iv.279; atidīgha too long Vin iv.7, Vin iv.8.
2. (m.) a snake (cp. Mvu ii.45 dīrghaka) Ja i.324; Ja ii.145; Ja iv.330.
3. Name of the Dīgha Nikāya (“the long collection”) Vism 96.
-aṅgulin having long fingers (the 4th of the marks of a Mahāpurisa) DN ii.17; DN iii.143, DN iii.150; -antara corridor Ja vi.349. -āyu long-lived (opp. app’ āyu) DN i.18; Ja v.71. Also as ˚ka DN iii.150; DN-a i.135; Sdhp 511 -āvu = ˚āyu in the meaning of āyasmant (q.v.) Ja v.120 -jāti (f.) a being of the snake kind, a snake Dhp-a iii.322 also as ˚ka at Ja ii.145; Ja iii.250; Ja iv.333; Ja v.449; DN-a i.252; -dasa having long fringes DN i.7; -dassin [Sk dīrghadarśin] far-seeing (= sabba-dassāvin) Pv-a 196 -nāsika having a long nose Vism 283. -bhāṇaka a repeater or expounder of the Dīgha Nikāya Ja i.59 Vism 36, Vism 266, Vism 286; DN-a i.15, DN-a i.131; -rattaṃ (adv.) [Sk *dīrgharātraṃ, see Indexes to Avs; Divy & Lal. V. otherwise dīrgha-kālaṃ] a long time DN i.17, DN i.206; AN v.194; Snp 649; Iti 8; Ja i.12, Ja i.72; Pv i.44; ii.1311 (˚rattāya = ˚rattaṃ Pv-a 165); Pp 15; Dhp-a iv.24; -loma long-haired Vin iii.129; also as ˚ka at Ja i.484, f. ˚ikā SN ii.228; -sotthiya (nt.) long welfare or prosperity Dhp-a ii.227.
Ved. dīrgha, cp. Caus. drāghayati to lengthen, *dlāgh as in Gr. δολιξός (shaft), ἐνδελεξής (lasting etc.; cp. E. entelechy); Lat. indulges; Goth tulgus (enduring)
(nt.) length AN i.54.
Sk. dīrghatvaṃ
(adj.) poor, miserable, wretched; base, mean, low DN ii.202 (?) (˚māna; v.l. ninnamāna) Ja v.448; Ja vi.375; Pv ii.82 (= adānajjhāsaya Pv-a 107) iv.81; Mil 406; Pv-a 120 (= kapaṇa), 260 (id.), 153 Sdhp 188, Sdhp 324.
Sk. dīna
(nt.) wretchedness, miserable state Sdhp 78.
Sk. *dīnatvaṃ
a lamp Ja ii.104 (˚ṃ jāleti to light a l.); Dhp-a ii.49 (id.), 94 (id.)
-acci the flame of a lamp Thag-a 154; -āloka light of a l. Ja i.266; Ja vi.391; Dhp-a i.359; Vv-a 51;- (˚ṃ)kara making light, shining, illuminating Nd ii.399 (= pabhaṃ kara Snp 1136; but cp. Dhp 236 under dīpa2); Vism 203 -tittira a decoy partridge (cp. dīpaka˚) Ja iii.64; -rukkha lit. lamp-tree, the stand of a lamp, candlestick Dhp-a iv.120; -sikhā the flame (lit. crest) of a l. Vism 171; Dhp-a ii.49.
Ved. dīpa to Ved. dī, dīpyate; Idg. *dei̯ā to shine (see dibba, deva); cp. Gr. δίαλος, δ ̈ηλος; see also jotati
(m. & nt.) an island continent (mahā˚, always as 4); terra firma, solid foundation, resting-place, shelter, refuge (in this sense freq. combd w. tāṇa lena & saraṇa & expl. in Com by patiṭṭhā)-(a) lit. island: S; v.219; Ja iii.187; Vv-a 19; Mvu vii.7, Mvu vii.41 ■ continent: cattāro mahādīpā SN v.343; Vv 2010 (= Vv-a 104); Vv-a 19; Pv-a 74 etc. Opp. the 2000 paritta-dīpā the smaller islands Kp-a 133 ■ (b) fig. shelter, salvation etc. (see also tāṇa): SN iii.42 (atta˚ + attasaraṇa etc., not with S Index to dīpa1); SN v.154, SN v.162 (id.) iv.315 (maṃ˚, not to dīpa1), 372; AN i.55 sq. (+ tāṇa etc.); Snp 501 (atta˚ selfreliant self-supported, not with Fausböll to dīpa1) 1092, 1094, 1145 (= Satthā); Nd ii.303; Dhp 236 (˚ṃ karohi = patiṭṭhā Pv-a 87); Pv iii.19 (id. Pv-a 174) Ja v.501 = Ja vi.375 (dīpañ ca parāyaṇaṃ); Mil 84, Mil 257 (dhamma-dīpa, Arahantship).
-ālaya resting place Ja vi.432; -gabbhaka same Ja vi.459, Ja vi.460.
Ved. dvīpa = dvi + ap (*sp.) of āpa water, lit. “double-watered,” between (two) waters
a car covered with a panther’s skin Ja i.259; Ja v.259 = Ja vi.48.
cp. Sk. dvīpa tiger’s skin
(= dīpa1) (a) f. dīpikā a lamp, in daṇḍa˚ a torch Dhp-a i.220, Dhp-a i.399,-(b) (˚-) an image of, having the appearance of, sham etc.; in -kakkara a decoy partridge Ja ii.161; -tittira same Ja iii.358; -pakkhin a decoy bird Ja v.376; -miga a d. antelope Ja v.376.
(= dīpa2) a (little) island Ja i.278, Ja i.279; Ja ii.160.
in vaṇidīpaka Pv-a 120 for vanibbaka (q.v.).
(adj.) illustrating, explaining; f. ˚ī explanation, commentary, Name of several Commentaries, e.g. the Paramattha-dīpanī of Dhammapāla on Th 2; Pv Vv ■ Cp. jotikā & uddīpanā.;
a panther Ja iii.480.
fr. dīpin
explained Vism 33.
pp. of dīpeti
one who illumines Vism 211.
n. ag. fr. dīpeti
a panther, leopard, tiger Vin i.186 dīpicamma a leopard skin = Sk. dvīpicarman); AN iii.101; Ja i.342; Ja ii.44, Ja ii.110; Ja iv.475; Ja v.408; Ja vi.538. dīpi-rājā king of the panthers Vism 270 ■ f. dīpinī Mil 363 Mil 368; Dhp-a i.48.
Sk. dvīpin
to make light, to kindle, to emit light, to be bright; to illustrate, explain AN v.73 sq.; Dhp 363; Mil 40; Pv-a 94, Pv-a 95, Pv-a 102, Pv-a 104 etc.; Sdhp 49, Sdhp 349. Cp. ā˚.
Sk. dīpayati, Caus. to dīp, see dīpa1 & cp. dippati
(& before vowels; dur˚; ) (indecl.) 1. syllable of exclamation (= duḥ “bad, woe” (beginning the word du (j)-jīvitaṃ) Dhp-a ii.6, Dhp-a ii.10 = Pv-a 280, cp. Ja iii.47; Bdhgh’s expln of the syllable see at Vism 494.
2. prefix, implying perverseness difficulty, badness (cp. dukkha). Original form *duḥ is preserved at dur- before vowels, but assimilated to a foll. consonant according to the rules of Assimilation, i.e. the cons. is doubled, with changes of v to bb & usual lengthening; dū before r (but also du˚). For purposes of convenience all cpds. with du are referred to the simplex, e.g. dukkaṭa is to be looked up under kata, duggati under gati etc.
See: A. dur˚. akkhāta, accaya, atikkama, atta adhiroha, anta, annaya, abhisambhava; āgata, ājāna āyuta, āsada; itthi; ukkhepa, ubbaha ■ B. du˚; (k)kata, kara; (g)ga, gata, gati, gandha, gahīta (c)caja, carita, cola; (j)jaha, jāna, jivha, jīvita; (t)tappaya, tara; (d)dama, dasika; (n)naya, nikkhaya, nikkhitta niggaha, nijjhāpaya, nibbedha, nīta; (p)pañña paṭiānaya, paṭinissaggin, paṭipadā, paṭivijjha, paṭivedha pabhajja, pamuñca, pameyya, parihāra, payāta pasu, peyya, posa; (p)phassa; (bb = b): bala, balika budha; (bb = v): dubbaca = ) vaca, vacana, vaṇṇa vijāna, vidū, vinivijjha, visodha, vuṭṭhika; (b) bhaga bhara, bhāsita, bhikkha; (m)mati, mana, manku mukha, mejjha, medha; (y)yiṭṭha, yuja, yutta (du + r) = du-ratta, ropaya (dū + r): dū-rakkha; (l)labha; (s)saddhapaya, sassa, saha, sīla; hara.
Sk. duḥ & duṣ = Gr.; δύς-, Oir. du-, Ohg. zur-, zer-; antithetic prefix, generally opposed to su˚ = Gr. εὐ-etc. Ultimately identical with du2 in sense of asunder, apart, away from opposite or wrong
in cpds. meaning two˚; see dvi B II.
(-˚) (adj ■ suff.) hurting, injuring, acting perfidiously, betraying, only in mitta˚ deceiving one’s friends SN i.225; Snp 244 expl. as mitta-dūbhaka Snp-a 287, v.l. B mittadussaka; cp. mitta-dubbhika & mitta-dubbhin.;
Sk. druha, druh, see duhana & duhitika
(nt.) [see dvi B ii].a dyad Dhs-a 36, Dhs-a 343, Dhs-a 347, Dhs-a 406; Vism 11 sq. & in titles of books “in pairs, on pairs, e.g. Dukapaṭṭhāna; or chapters, e.g. Ja ii.1 (˚nipāta).
a certain (jute?) plant; (nt.) [cp. Sk. dukūlaṃ woven silk] very fine cloth, made of the fibre of the d. plant SN iii.145; AN iv.393; Ja ii.21; Ja iv.219 Ja v.400; Ja vi.72; Vism 257, Vism 262; Vv-a 165; DN-a i.140 Dāvs v.27.
Sk. dukūla
(adj.-n.) A. (adj. unpleasant, painful, causing misery (opp. sukha pleasant Vin i.34; Dhp 117. Lit. of vedanā (sensation) MN i.59 (˚ṃ vedanaṃ vediyamāna, see also below iii.1 e) AN ii.116 = MN i.10 (sarīrikāhi vedanāhi dukkhāhi). Fig. (fraught with pain, entailing sorrow or trouble) of kāmā DN i.36 (= paṭipīḷan-aṭṭhena DN-a i.121); Dhp 186 (= bahudukkha Dhp-a iii.240); of jāti MN i.185 (cp ariyasacca, below B I.); in combn dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā DN iii.106; Dhs 176; Ne 7, Ne 112 sq., cp AN ii.149 sq. ekanta˚; very painful, giving much pain SN ii.173; SN iii.69. dukkhaṃ (adv.) with difficulty, hardly Ja i.215.
B. (nt.; but pl. also dukkhā, e.g. SN i.23; Snp 728; Dhp 202, Dhp 203, Dhp 221. Spelling dukha (after sukha) at Dhp 83, Dhp 203). There is no word in English covering the same ground as Dukkha does in Pali. Our modern words are too specialised, too limited, and usually too strong. Sukha & dukkha are ease and dis-ease (but we use disease in another sense); or wealth and ilth from well & ill (but we have now lost ilth); or wellbeing and ill-ness (but illness means something else in English). We are forced, therefore, in translation to use half synonyms, no one of which is exact. Dukkha is equally mental & physical. Pain is too predominantly physical, sorrow too exclusively mental, but in some connections they have to be used in default of any more exact rendering. Discomfort, suffering, ill, and trouble can occasionally be used in certain connections Misery, distress, agony, affliction and woe are never right. They are all much too strong & are only mental (see Mrs. Rh. D.; Bud. Psy. 83–86, quoting Ledi Sadaw).
I. Main Points in the Use of the Word.-The recognition of the fact of Dukkha stands out as essential in early Buddhism. In the very first discourse the four socalled Truths or Facts (see saccāni) deal chiefly with dukkha. The first of the four gives certain universally recognised cases of it, & then sums them up in short. The five groups (of physical & mental qualities which make an individual) are accompanied by ill so far as those groups are fraught with āsavas and grasping. (Pañc’ upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā; cp SN iii.47). The second Sacca gives the cause of this dukkha (see Taṇhā). The third enjoins the removal of this taṇhā. And the fourth shows the way, or method, of doing so (see Magga). These ariyasaccāni are found in two places in the older books Vin i.10 = SN v.421 (with addition of soka-parideva… etc. [see below in some MSS). Comments on this passage, or part of it, occur SN iii.158, SN iii.159; with expln of each term (+ soka) DN i.189; DN iii.136, DN iii.277; MN i.185; AN i.107; Snp p.140; Nd ii.under sankhārā; Iti 17 (with dukkhassa atikkama for nirodha), 104, 105; Pts i.37; Pts ii.204, Pts ii.147 Pp 15, Pp 68; Vb 328; Ne 72, Ne 73. It is referred to as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha, magga at Vin i.16, Vin i.18, Vin i.19; DN iii.227; Nd ii.304iib; as āsavānaṃ khaya-ñāṇa at DN i.83; Vin iii.5; as sacca No. 1 + paṭiccasamuppāda at AN i.176 sq. (+ soka˚); in a slightly diff. version of No. 1 (leaving out appiyehi & piyehi, having soka instead) at DN ii.305; and in the formula catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ananubodhā etc. at DN ii.90 = Vin i.230.
II. Characterisation in Detail.
1. A further specification of the 3rd of the Noble Truths is given in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.), which analyses the links & stages of the causal chain in their interdependence as building up (anabolic = samudaya) &, after their recognition as causes, breaking down (katabolic = nirodha the dukkha-synthesis, & thus constitutes the Metabolism of kamma; discussed e.g. at Vin 1; DN ii.32 sq = SN ii.2 sq.; SN ii.17, SN ii.20, SN ii.65 = Nd ii.680i.c; SN iii.14; MN i.266 sq.; MN ii.38; AN i.177; mentioned e.g. at AN i.147; MN i.192 sq., 460; Iti 89 (= dukkhassa antakiriyā). 2. Dukkha as one of the 3 qualifications of the sankhārā (q.v.), viz. anicca, d., anattā, evanescence, ill, nonsoul: SN i.188; SN ii.53 (yad aniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ); SN iii.112 (id.) iii.67, 180, 222; iv.28, 48, 129 sq.; 131 sq ■ rūpe anicc’ ânupassī (etc. with dukkh’ & anatt’) SN iii.41 anicca-saññā, dukkha˚ etc. DN iii.243; AN iii.334, cp iv.52 sq ■ sabbe sankhārā aniccā etc. Nd ii.under sankhārā.
3. Specification of Dukkha. The Niddesa gives a characteristic description of all that comes under the term dukkha. It employs one stereotyped explanation (therefore old & founded on scholastic authority) (Nd;2 304i.), & one expl;n (304iii.) peculiar to itself & only applied to Snp 36. The latter defines illustrates dukkha exclusively as suffering & torment incurred by a person as punishment, inflicted on him either by the king or (after death) by the guardians of purgatory (niraya-pālā; see detail under niraya, & cp below III. 2 b) ■ The first expl;n (304i.) is similar in kind to the definition of d. as long afterwards given in the Sānkhya system (see Sānkhya-kārikā-bhāṣya of Gauḍapāda to stanza 1) & classifies the various kinds of dukkha in the foll. groups: (a) all suffering caused by the fact of being born, & being through one’s kamma tied to the consequent states of transmigration; to this is loosely attached the 3 fold division of d. as dukkha˚, sankhāra˚, vipariṇāma˚ (see below III. 1 c)-(b) illnesses & all bodily states of suffering (cp ādhyātmikaṃ dukkhaṃ of Sānkhya k.) ■ (c) pain (bodily) discomfort through outward circumstances, as extreme climates, want of food, gnat-bites etc. (cp ādhibhautikaṃ & ādhidaivikaṃ d. of Sk.) ■ (d) (Mental distress & painful states caused by the death of one’s beloved or other misfortunes to friends or personal belongings (cp. domanassa) ■ This list is concluded by a scholastic characterisation of these var. states as conditioned by kamma, implicitly due to the afflicted person not having found his “refuge,” i.e. salvation from these states in the 8 fold Path (see above B I.).
III. General Application, & various views regarding dukkha.
1. As; simple sensation (: pain) & related to other terms: (a) principally a vedanā, sensation, in particular belonging to the body (kāyika), or physical pain (opp. cetasika dukkha mental ill: see domanassa) Thus defined as kāyikaṃ d. at DN ii.306 (cp. the distinction between śarīraṃ & mānasaṃ dukkhaṃ in Sānkhya philosophy) MN i.302; SN v.209 (in def. of dukkhindriya); AN ii.143 (sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā); Ne 12 (duvidhaṃ d.: kāyikaṃ = dukkhaṃ; cetasikaṃ domanassaṃ); Vism 165 (twofold), 496 (dukkhā aññaṃ na bādhakaṃ), 499 (seven divisions), 503 (kāyika) Snp-a 119 (sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā Snp 67 = kāyikaṃ sātāsātaṃ). Bdhgh. usually paraphrases d. with vaṭṭadukkha e.g. at Snp-a 44, Snp-a 212, Snp-a 377, Snp-a 505 ■ (b) Thus to be understood as physical pain in combn dukkha domanassa “pain & grief,” where d. can also be taken as the gen. term & dom˚ as specification, e.g. in cetasikaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti AN i.157, AN i.216 AN iv.406; SN ii.69; rāgajan d ˚ṃ dom ˚ṃ paṭisaṃvedeti AN ii.149; kāmûpasaṃhitaṃ d ˚ṃ dom ˚ṃ AN iii.207; d ˚ṃ dom ˚ṃ paṭisaṃvediyati SN iv.343. Also as cpd. dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthangamāya AN iii.326, & freq. in formula soka-parideva-d˚-domanass-upāyāsā (grief sorrow, afflictions of pain & misery, i.e. all kinds of misery) DN i.36 (arising fr. kāmā); MN ii.64; AN v.216 sq. Iti 89 etc. (see above B I. 4). Cp. also the combn dukkhī dummano “miserable and dejected” SN ii.282-(c) dukkha as “feeling of pain” forms one of the three dukkhatā or painful states, viz. d ■ dukkhatā (painful sensation caused by bodily pain), sankhāra id. having its origin in the sankhārā, vipariṇāma˚, being caused by change SN iv.259; SN v.56; DN iii.216; Ne 12 (d) Closely related in meaning is ahita “that which is not good or profitable,” usually opposed to sukha hita. It is freq. in the ster. expression “hoti dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya” for a long time it is a source of discomfort & pain AN i.194 sq.; MN i.332; DN iii.157 Pp 33. Also in phrases anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya DN iii.246 & akusalaṃ… ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattati AN i.58 ■ (e) Under vedanā as sensation are grouped the 3: sukhaṃ (or sukhā ved.) pleasure (pleasant sensation), dukkhaṃ pain (painful sens.), adukkham-asukhaṃ indifference (indifferent sens.), the last of which is the ideal state of the emotional habitus to be gained by the Arahant (cp. upekhā & nibbidā) Their rôle is clearly indicated in the 4th jhāna: sukhassa pahānā dukkhassa pahānā pubbe va somanassadomanassānaṃ atthangamā adukkham-asukhaṃ upekhā parisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati (see jhāna) ■ As contents of vedanā: sukhaṃ vediyati dukkhaṃ v. adukkham-asukhaṃ v. tasmā vedanā ti SN iii.86, SN iii.87; cp. SN ii.82 (vedayati). tisso vedanā sukha, d˚, adukkham-asukhā˚ DN iii.275; SN ii.53 SN iv.114 sq., 207, 223 sq., cp. MN i.396; AN i.173; AN iv.442; Iti 46, Iti 47. yaṃ kiñc’ āyaṃ purisa-puggalo paṭisaṃvedeti sukhaṃ vā d ˚ṃ vā a ˚ṃ vā sabban taṃ pubbe katahetū ti = one’s whole life-experience is caused by one’s former kamma AN i.173 = MN ii.217 ■ The combn (as complementary pair) of sukha + dukkha is very freq for expressing the varying fortunes of life & personal experience as pleasure & pain, e.g. n’ âlam aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā DN i.56 = SN iii.211. Thus under the 8 “fortunes of the world” (loka dhammā) with lābha (& a˚), yasa (a˚) pasaṃsā (nindā), sukha (dukkha) at DN iii.260; Nd ii.55 Regarded as a thing to be avoided in life: puriso jīvitukāmo… sukhakāmo dukkha-paṭikkūlo SN iv.172 SN iv.188 ■ In similar contexts: DN i.81≈; iii.51, 109, 187; SN ii.22, SN ii.39; SN iv.123 sq.; AN ii.158 etc. (cp. sukha).
2. As complex state (suffering) & its valuation in the light of the Doctrine: (a) any worldly sensation pleasure & experience may be a source of discomfort (see above, I.; cp. esp. kāma & bhava) Ps; i.11 sq. (specified as jāti etc.); dukkhaṃ = mahabbhayaṃ SN i.37; bhārādānaṃ dukkhaṃ loke bhāra-nikkhepanaṃ sukhaṃ (pain is the great weight) SN iii.26; kāmānaṃ adhivacanaṃ AN iii.310; AN iv.289; cp. AN iii.410 sq. (with kāmā, vedanā saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkhaṃ) ■ (b) ekanta˚; (extreme pain) refers to the suffering of sinful beings in Niraya, & it is open to conjecture whether this is not the first & orig. meaning of dukkha; e.g. MN i.74; AN ii.231 (vedanaṃ vediyati ekanta-d˚ṃ seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); see ekanta. In the same sense:… upenti Roruvaṃ ghoraṃ cirarattaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavanti SN i.30; niraya-dukkha Snp 531; pecca d˚ṃ nigacchati Snp 278, Snp 742; anubhonti d˚ṃ kaṭuka-pphalāni Pv i.1110 (= āpāyikaṃ d˚ṃ Pv-a 60); Pv-a 67; mahādukkhaṃ anubhavati Pv-a 43, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 107 etc. atidukkhaṃ Pv-a 65; dukkhato pete mocetvā Pv-a 8 ■ (c) to suffer pain, to experience unpleasantness etc. is expressed in foll. terms: dukkhaṃ anubhavati (only w ref. to Niraya, see b); anveti Dhp 1 (= kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ vipāka-dukkhaṃ anugacchati Dhp-a i.24), upeti Snp 728 carati SN i.210; nigacchati MN i.337; Snp 278, Snp 742; paṭisaṃvedeti MN i.313 (see above); passati SN i.132 (jāto dukkhāni passati: whoever is born experiences woe) vaḍḍheti SN ii.109; viharati AN i.202; AN ii.95; AN iii.3; SN iv.78 (passaddhiyā asati d˚ṃ v. dukkhino cittaṃ na samādhiyati); vedayati, vediyati, vedeti etc. see above III 1 e; sayati AN i.137 ■ (d) More specific reference to the cause of suffering & its removal by means of enlightenment:; (a) Origin (see also above I. & II. 1): dukkhe loko patiṭṭhito SN i.40; yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti sabbaṃ sankhāra-paccayā Snp 731; ye dukkhaṃ vaḍḍhenti te na parimuccanti jātiyā etc. SN ii.109; d˚ṃ ettha bhiyyo Snp 61, Snp 584; yo paṭhavī-dhātuṃ abhinandati dukkhaṃ so abhin˚ Si i.174; taṇhā d ˚ssa samudayo etc. Ne 23 sq.; as result of sakkāyadiṭṭhi SN iv.147, of chanda SN i.22 of upadhi SN ii.109, cp. upadhīnidānā pabhavanti dukkhā Snp 728; d˚ṃ eva hi sambhoti d˚ṃ tiṭṭhati veti ca SN i.135 ■ (β) Salvation from Suffering (see above I.): kathaṃ dukkhā pamuccati Snp 170; dukkhā pamuccati SN i.14; SN iii.41, SN iii.150; SN iv.205 SN v.451; na hi putto pati vā pi piyo d ˚ā pamocaye yathā saddhamma-savanaṃ dukkhā moceti pāṇinaṃ SN i.210 na appatvā lokantaṃ dukkhā atthi pamocanaṃ AN ii.49 Kammakkhayā… sabbaṃ d˚ṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ bhavissati MN ii.217, cp. i.93. kāme pahāya… d˚ṃ na sevetha anatthasaṃhitaṃ SN i.12 = SN i.31; rūpaṃ (etc.) abhijānaṃ bhabbo d-˚kkhayāya SN iii.27; SN iv.89; d˚ṃ pariññāya sakhettavatthuṃ Tathāgato arahati pūraḷāsaṃ Snp 473 pajahati d˚ṃ Snp 789, Snp 1056. dukkhassa samudayo ca atthangamo ca SN ii.72; SN iii.228 sq.; SN iv.86, SN iv.327 ■ dukkhass’ antakaro hoti MN i.48; AN iii.400 sq.; Iti 18 antakarā bhavāmase Snp 32; antaṃ karissanti Satthu sāsana-kārino AN ii.26; d ˚parikkhīṇaṃ SN ii.133; akiñcanaṃ nânupatanti dukkhā SN i.23; sankhārānaṃ nirodhena n’ atthi d˚assa sambhavo Snp 731 ■ muniṃ d˚assa pārayuṃ SN i.195 = Nd ii.136v; antagū ‘si pāragū d˚assa Snp 539 ■ sang’ ātiko maccujaho nirūpadhi pahāya d˚ṃ apunabbhavāya SN iv.158; ucchinnaṃ mūlaṃ d˚assa, n’ atthi dāni punabbhavo Vin i.231; DN ii.91.
-ādhivāha bringing or entailing pain SN iv.70; -anubhavana suffering pain or undergoing punishment (in Niraya) Ja iv.3; -antagū one who has conquered suffering Snp 401; -ābhikiṇṇa beset with pain, full of distress Iti 89; -āsahanatā non-endurance of ills Vism 325 -indriya the faculty of experiencing pain, painful sensation SN v.209, SN v.211; Dhs 556, Dhs 560; Vb 15, Vb 54, Vb 71 -udraya causing or yielding pain, resulting in ill, yielding distress MN i.415 sq.; AN i.97; AN iv.43 (+ dukkhavipāka); v.117 (dukh˚), 243; Ja iv.398; of kamma Pts i.80; Pts ii.79; Pv i.1110 (so read for dukkhandriya which is also found at Pv-a 60); Dhp-a ii.40 (˚uddaya) -ūpadhāna causing pain Dhp 291; -ūpasama the allayment of pain or alleviation of suffering, only in phrase (aṭṭhangiko maggo) d-ûpasama-gāmino SN iii.86; Iti 106; Snp 724 = Dhp 191;- (m)esin wishing ill, malevolent Ja iv.26; -otiṇṇa fallen into misery SN iii.93; MN i.460 MN ii.10; -kāraṇa labour or trials to be undergone as punishment Dhp-a iii.70 (see Dhp 138, Dhp 139 & cp. dasa;1 B 1 b) -khandha the aggregate of suffering, all that is called pain or affliction (see above B II. 1) SN ii.134; SN iii.93; MN i.192 sq.; 200 sq.; etc.;- khaya the destruction of pain, the extinction of ill MN i.93; MN ii.217 (kammakkhayā d-kkhayo); SN iii.27; Snp 732. Freq. in phrase (nīyāti or hoti) sammā-d-kkhayāya “leads to the complete extinction of ill,” with ref. to the Buddha’s teaching or the higher wisdom, e.g. of brahmacariyā SN ii.24; of paññā DN iii.268; AN iii.152 sq.; of ariyā diṭṭhi DN iii.264 = AN iii.132; of sikkhā AN ii.243; of dhamma MN i.72; -dhamma the principle of pain, a painful object, any kind of suffering (cp. ˚khandha DN iii.88; SN iv.188 (˚ānaṃ samudayañ ca atthagamañ ca yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti); Iti 38 (nirodha ˚anaṃ); -nidāna a source of pain MN ii.223; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; -nirodha the destruction of pain, the extinction of suffering (see above B II. 1) MN i.191; MN ii.10; AN iii.410, AN iii.416; etc. -paṭikkūla averse to pain, avoiding unpleasantness, in combn sukhakāmo d-p. SN iv.172 (spelt ˚kulo), 188; MN i.341; -patta being in pain Ja vi.336; -pareta afflicted by pain or misery SN iii.93; Iti 89 = AN i.147; -bhummi the soil of distress Dhs 985; -vāca hurtful speech Pv i.32 (should probably be read duṭṭha˚); -vipāka (adj. having pain as its fruit, creating misery SN ii.128; DN iii.57, DN iii.229; AN ii.172 (kamma); Pts ii.79 (id.); -vepakka = ˚vipāka Snp 537 (kamma); -saññā the consciousness of pain Ne 27; -samudaya the rise or origin of pain or suffering (opp. ˚nirodha; see above B II. 1) SN iv.37; MN i.191; MN ii.10; MN iii.267; Vb 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaṃ vuccati d-s.); -samphassa contact with pain MN i.507; Dhs 648; f. abstr. ˚tā Pp 33; -seyya an uncomfortable couch Dhp-a iv.8.
Sk. duḥkha fr. duḥ-ka, an adj. formation fr. prefix duḥ (see du). According to others an analogy formation after sukha, q.v.; Bdhgh (at Vism 494) expls dukkha as du + kha, where du = du1 and kha = ākāsa. See also def. at Vism 461.
(f.) state of pain, painfulness, discomfort, pain (see dukkha B III. 1 c) DN iii.216; SN iv.259; SN v.56; Ne 12 (expl.).
cp. Sk. duḥkhatā, abstr. to dukkha
to be painful Vism 264.
fr. dukkha
(nt.) = dukkhatā DN iii.106 (+ dandhatta).
Sk. *duhkhatvaṃ
(nt.) bringing sorrow, causing pain Mil 275 sq., 351.
abstr. to dukkhāpeti
pained, afflicted Mil 79, Mil 180.
pp. of dukkhāpeti
to cause pain, to afflict Ja iv.452; Mil 276 sq.; Pv-a 215 ■ pp. dukkhāpita.
caus. to dukkha
(adj.) afflicted, dejected, unhappy, grieved, disappointed miserable, suffering, ailing (opp. sukhita) DN i.72 (puriso ābādhiko d. bāḷha-gilāno); DN ii.24; SN i.149; SN iii.11 = SN iv.180 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); SN v.211; MN i.88; MN ii.66; Vin iv.291; Snp 984, Snp 986; Ja iv.452; Mil 275; Dhp-a ii.28; Vv-a 67.
Sk. duḥkhita; pp. of *dukkhāpeti
(adj.-n.) 1. afflicted, grieved, miserable SN i.103 sq., 129 sq., ii.282 (+ dummano) iv.78; AN iii.57.
2. a loser in the game Ja ii.160.
Sk. duḥkhin
to feel pain, to be distressed Dhp-a ii.28 (= vihaññati).
Sk. duḥkhīyati & duḥkhāyati Denom. fr. dukkha; cp. vediyati & vedayati
a difficult road Dhp 327; Pv ii.78. dugge saṅkamanāni passages over difficult roads, usually combd with papā (water-shed) SN i.100; Vv 5222 Pv ii.925.
du + ga
(adj.-n.) spoilt, corrupt; bad, malignant, wicked Vin iii.118; SN ii.259 SN ii.262; SN iv.339; AN i.124 (˚âruka), 127 (id.), 157 sq.; Iti 68 (saro d., perhaps should be read as diddho); Ja i.187 Ja i.254 (˚brāhmaṇa); Ja iv.391 (˚caṇḍāla); Pv-a 4 (˚corā rogues of thieves); Sdhp 86, Sdhp 367, Sdhp 434 ■ aduṭṭha not evil, good Snp 623; Iti 86; Dhp-a iv.164. Cp. pa˚.
-gahaṇika suffering from indigestion Vin i.206 -citta evil-minded Vin ii.192; MN iii.65.
Sk. duṣṭha, pp. of dussati, q.v.
(adv.) badly, wrong Dhs-a 384; Snp-a 396; Vv-a 337.
Sk. duṣṭhu, cp. suṣṭhu
(adj.) wicked, lewd Vin iv.128; SN i.187 (˚bhāṇin “whose speech is never lewd,” cp. Thag 1217 padulla gāhin, expld as duṭṭhullagāhin Psalms of Brethren 399 n. 3); MN i.435; MN iii.159; Vism 313 ■ (nt.) wicked ness Vin iii.21; kāya˚; unchastity MN iii.151; Thag 114 Vism 151.
-āduṭṭhulla that which is wicked & that which is not Vin v.130; -āpatti a grave transgression of the Rules of the Order, viz. the 4 Pārājika & the 13 Sanghādisesa Vin iv.31 (opp. a˚ Vin iv.32).
(num. ord.) [Sk. dvitīya, with reduction of dvi to du, as in compn mentioned under dvi B II. For the meaning “companion” cp. num. ord. for two in Lat secundus<sequor i.e. he who follows Gr. δεύτεροσ ̓ δεύομαι he who stays behind, also Sk. davīyas farther (a) (num.) the second, the following Ja ii.102, Ja ii.110 dutiyaṃ for the second time (cp. tatiyaṃ in series 1, 2 3) Vin ii.188; DN ii.155 ■ (b) (adj. n.) one who follows or is associated with, an associate of; accompanying or accompanied by (-˚); a companion, friend, partner Vin iv.225; SN i.25 (saddhā dutiyā purisassa hoti = his 2nd self); SN iv.78 (id.) i.131; Iti 9; Ja v.400; Thig 230 (a husband); Snp 49 (= Nd ii.305, where two kinds of associates or companions are distinguished, viz. taṇhā˚ puggalo˚). taṇhā-dutiyā either “connected with thirst” or “having thirst as one’s companion” (see taṇhā) SN iv.37; Iti 109 = AN ii.10; bilanga˚ kaṇājaka (rice with sour gruel) Vin ii.77; SN i.90, SN i.91 ■ adutiya alone, unaccompanied Pv-a 161.
(adj.-n.) (a) the second, following, next Ja i.504 (˚cittavāre); ˚ṃ a 2nd time MN i.83 ■ (b) a companion; only in f. dutiyikā a wife or female compn Vin iv.230, Vin iv.270 (a bhikkhunī as compn of another one); Freq. as purāṇa-dutiyikā one’s former wife Vin i.96; Vin iii.16; SN i.200; MN ii.63; Ja i.210; Ja v.152; Dhp-a i.77. Cp. Mvu ii.134 dvitīyā in the same sense.
Dimin. of dutiya
(f.) companionship, friendship, help Ja iii.169.
see daddabha.
(Sk. dugdha, pp. of duh, see dohati] milked, drawn Snp 18 (duddha-khīra = gāvo duhitvā gahitakhīra Snp-a 27); MN ii.186 ■ (nt.) milk Dāvs v.26.
a kettle-drum, in; Amata˚; the drum of Nibbāna Vin i.8 = MN i.171 (dundubhi at the latter passage); Pv-a 189 (v.l. for dundubhi).
another form of dundubhi, cp. duddabha & dundubhya
(m. & f.) a kettle-drum, the noise of a drum, a heavy thud, thunder (usually as deva in the latter meaning) Pv iii.34; Ja vi.465; Pv-a 40, Pv-a 189 (v.l. dudrabhi) ■ Amata˚ the drum of Nibbāna MN i.171 = Vin i.8 (: dudrabhi); deva˚ thunder DN ii.156; AN iv.311.
Sk. dundubhi, onomat.; cp. other forms under daddabha, dudrabhi
to burn, see der, dava, dāva & dāya.;
see dvi B II.
see under vaṇṇa.
see under vuṭṭhi.
(& dūbha) (adj.) deceiving, hurting, trying to injure Vin ii.203 (= Iti 86 where dubbhe); Pv ii.93 (mitta˚). adubbha one who does not do harm, harmless Pv ii.98 (˚pāṇin = ahiṃsakahattha). As nt. harmlessness, frankness, friendliness good-will Vin i.347 (adrūbhāya, but cp. vv.ll. p. 395 adubbhaya & adrabbhāvāya); SN i.225 (adubbhāya trustily); Ja i.180 (id. as adūbhāya); spelt wrongly adrūbhaka (for adubbhaka, with v.l. adrabhaka in expl. of adubbha-pāṇin) at Ja vi.311. Note: dabhāya (dat.) is also used in Sk. in sense of an adv. or infinitive which confirms the etymology of the word. Cp. dobha.
Sk. dambha, see dubbhati
(adj.) perfidious, insidious, treacherous Thag 214 (citta˚). Cp. dubbhaya dūbhaka.;
Sk. dambhaka
(& dūbhati) to injure, hurt, deceive; to be hostile to, plot or sin against (either w. dat. Ja v.245; Ja vi.491, or w. loc Ja i.267; Ja iii.212) SN i.85 (ppr. adubbhanto), 225; Iti 86 (dubbhe = dusseyya Com.) = Vin ii.203 (where dubbho) Thag 1129; Ja ii.125; Ja iv.261; Ja v.487, Ja v.503 ■ ppr. also dūbhato Ja iv.261; ger. dubbhitvā Ja iv.79; grd. dubbheyya (v.l. dūbheyya) to be punished Ja v.71. Cp. pa˚.
Sk. dabhnoti cp.; J.P.T.S. 1889, 204: dabh (dambh), pp. dabdha; idg. *dhebh, cp. Gr. ἀτέμβω to deceive. Cp. also Sk druh (so Kern, Toev. p. 11 s. v. padubbhati). See also dahara & dūbha, dūbhaka dūbhi
(nt.) hurtfulness, treachery, injury against somebody (c. loc.) Pv-a 114 (= anattha).
Sk. *dambhana
= dubbhaka, SN i.107.
= dubbhaka, Pv iii.113 (= mittadubbhika, mittānaṃ bādhaka Pv-a 175).
see bhikkhā.
(adj.-n.) seeking to injure, deceitful; a deceiver, hypocrite Ja iv.41; Pv ii.98 (mitta˚) Dhp-a ii.23 (mitta-dūbhin) ■ f. dubbhinī Vv-a 68 (so read for dubbinī).
Sk. dambhin
(num ■ adj.) both; only in abl. dubhato from both sides Thag 1134; Pts i.69; Pts ii.35, Pts ii.181; Vv 4621; Vv-a 281 (for Vv 6419 duvaddhato).
See dubhaya & cp. dvi B II.
(num. adj.) both (see ubhaya) Snp 517, Snp 526 Snp 1007, Snp 1125; Ja iii.442; Ja vi.110.
a contaminated form of du(ve) & ubhaya; see dvi B II.
tree AN iii.43; Ja i.87, Ja i.272; Ja ii.75, Ja ii.270; Ja vi.249, Ja vi.528; Vv 8414; Mil 278 Mil 347; Vv-a 161.
-agga 1. the top of a tree Ja ii.155.
2. a splendid tree Vv 354.
3. a tooth-pick Ja v.156; -inda “king of trees,” the Bodhi tree Dpvs i.7; -uttama a magnificent tree Vv 393; -phala fruit of a tree MN ii.74; Vism 231 (in comparison).
Sk. druma = Gr. δρυμός, see dāru
Pass to dohati (q.v.).
(nt.) woven material, cloth, turban cloth; (upper) garment, clothes Vin i.290 Vin ii.128, Vin ii.174; Vin iv.159. DN i.103; SN v.71; MN i.215; MN ii.92; AN v.347; Snp 679; Pv i.103 (= uttarīyaṃ sāṭakaṃ Pv-a 49); ii.314; Pp 55; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 75 ■ cīvara˚, q.v. chava˚ a miserable garment DN i.166; AN i.295; AN ii.206; MN i.78, MN i.308.
-karaṇḍaka a clothes-chest SN v.71 = MN i.215; AN iv.230 -koṭṭhagāra a store-room for cloth or clothes Dhp-a i.220 Dhp-a i.393; -gahaṇa (-mangala) (the ceremony of) putting on a garment Dhp-a ii.87; -cālanī a cloth sieve Vin i.202 -paṭṭa turban cloth Vin ii.266 (= setavattha-paṭṭa Bdhgh.); SN ii.102; -phala having clothes as fruit (of magic trees, cp. kapparukkha) Vv 462 (cp. Vv-a 199) -maya consisting in clothes Vv 467 (cp. Vv-a 199) -yuga a suit of garments Vin i.278; MN i.215 = SN v.71; Mil 31 (cp. Mvu i.61); Dhp-a iv.11; -ratana “a pearl of a garment,” a fine garment Mil 262. -vaṭṭi fringed cotton cloth Vin ii.266. -veṇi plaited cotton cloth Vin ii.266.
Sk. dūrśa & dūṣya
at Ja iii.54 is usually taken as = amussa (cp. amuka). C. expls as “near,” & adds “asammussa.” Or is it Sk. dūṣya easily spoilt? See on this passage Andersen Pali Reader ii.124.
= dūsaka (q.v.).
to be or become bad or cor rupted, to get damaged; to offend against, to do wrong Vin ii.113; SN i.13 = SN i.164; Dhp 125 = Pv-a 116; Dhp 137; Iti 84 (dosancyye na d.) cp. AN iii.110 (dussanīye d.) Ja vi.9; Mil 101, Mil 386 ■ pp. duṭṭha (q.v.) ■ Caus dūseti (q.v.). See also dosa1 & dosaniya; & pa˚.;
Sk. duṣyati, Denom. fr. pref. duḥ (du˚); pp. duṣṭha, caus. dūṣayati
(f.) & Dussana (nt.) defilement, guilt AN ii.225; Pp 18, Pp 22; Dhs 418, Dhs 1060; DN-a i.195 (rajjana-d. muyhana).
Sk. dūṣana, cp. dussati
(adj.) able to give offence, hateful, evil (always combd with rajanīya, cp. rāga dosa moha AN iii.110 (dusanīye dussati, where Iti 84 has dosaneyye) Ja vi.9; Mil 386.
cp. Sk. dveṣanīya, because of doṣa = dveṣa taken to dus
see sassa.
a cloth merchant Ja vi.276; Mil 262, Mil 331 sq.
(nt.) = dussanā, Pp 18, Pp 22.
Sk. *dūṣitatva
(adj ■ ˚.) milking; yielding, granting, bestowing: kāma˚ giving pleasures Ja iv.20; Ja v.33.
Sk. duh & duha; see dohati
(to milk) see dohati.
(adj.-n.) one who injures, hurts or deceives; insidious, infesting; a robber, only in pantha a dacoit DN i.135; DN-a i.296 ■ (nt.) waylaying, robbery (pantha˚) Ja ii.281 (text dūhana), 388 (text: panthadūbhana vv.ll. duhana & dūhana); Dhs-a 220 ■ Cp maggadūsin.
Sk. *druhana, to druh, druhyati to hurt, cp. Oir. droch; Ohg. triogan to deceive, traum dream; also Sk. dhvarati. For further connections see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fraus
(adj.) infested with robbers, beset with dangers SN iv.195 (magga). Note. This interpretation may have to be abandoned in favour of duhitika being another spelling of dvīhitika hard to get through (q.v.), to be compared are the vv.ll. of the latter at SN iv.323 (S.S. dūhitika & dūhītika).;
cp. Sk. druha, fr. druhyati
a messenger, envoy Vin i.16 Vin ii.32, Vin ii.277; DN i.150; SN iv.194; Snp 411 (rāja˚), 417. deva˚ Yama’s envoy, Death’s messenger AN i.138, AN i.142; MN ii.75 sq.; Ja i.138 ■ ˚ṃ pāheti to send a messenger Mil 18, Pv-a 133.
Ved. dūta, prob. to dūra (q.v.) as “one who is sent (far) away,” also perhaps Gr. δουλος slave. See Walde Lat. Wtb. under dudum
(nt.) play, gaming, gambling Ja iv.248.
Sk. dyūta, see jūta
(nt.) errand, commission, messages AN iv.196; Ja iii.134; DN-a i.78. ˚ṃ gacchati to go on an errand Vin ii.202; ˚ṃ harati to obtain a commission Vin iii.87; Vin iv.23.
-kamma doing a messenger’s duty Vin i.359; -pahiṇagamana sending & going on messages DN i.5 = MN iii.34; AN ii.209; MN i.180.
Sk. dūtya, but varying in meaning
(adj.) deceiving, see dubbha.
(adj.) deceiving, treacherous, harmful Snp-a 287 (mitta˚); f. ˚ikā Ja ii.297.
Sk. dambhaka
a diamond Ja i.363 = Ja iii.207.
Sk. dambha, cp. dambholi
(nt.) deceiving, pillaging, robbing etc. at Ja ii.388 is to be read as (pantha-) duhana.
(adj.)-dubbhin Ja ii.180 (vv.ll. dūbha & dubbhi), 327; iv.257; Dhp-a ii.23.
(f.) perfidy, treachery, Ja i.412; Ja iv.57 (v.l. dubhī ); Ja vi.59 (= aparādha ).
cp. Sk. dambha, see dubbhati
(adj.) far distant, remote,; opp. āsanna (J ii.154) or santika (Dhs 677; Vism 402) ■ Pv-a 117. Often in cpds. (see below), also as dūri˚; e.g. dūri-bhāva distance Vism 71 Vism 377; Dhs-a 76 ■ Cases mostly used adverbially, viz acc. dūraṃ far Ja ii.154; Dhp-a i.192 ■ abl. dūrato from afar, aloof Vin i.15; Vin ii.195; SN i.212; Snp 511; Dhp 219; Ja v.78 (dūra-dūrato); Mil 23; Pv-a 107. dūrato karoti to keep aloof from Pv-a 17 ■ loc. dūre at a distance also as prep. away from, far from (c. abl.), e.g. Snp 468; Ja ii.155, Ja ii.449 (= ārā); Ja iii.189 ■ Snp 772; Dhp 304; Ja vi.364; Dhs 677 ■ dūre-pātin one who shoots far [cp. Sk. dūra-pātin] AN i.284; AN ii.170, AN ii.202. Ja iv.494 See also akkhaṇavedhin ■ atidūre too far Vin ii.215.
-kantana at Thag 1123: the correct reading seems to be the v.l. durākantana, see ākantana; -gata gone far away Pv ii.134 (= paralokagata Pv-a 164); Dhp-a iii.377 (durā˚). -(ṃ)gama far-going, going here there Dhp 37 (cp. Dhp-a i.304); Pv ii.910; -ghuṭṭha farrenowned Pv ii.82; -vihāra (-vuttin) living far away Snp 220.
Sk. dūra, Ved. duva (stirring, urging on), compar. davīyān, Av. dūrō (far), *dāu; cp. Ohg zawen, Goth. taujan = E. do. Another form is *deṷā far in respect to time, as in Gr. δήν, δηρόν, Lat. dū-dum (cp. dū-rare = en-dure). See also dutiya & dūta
see rakkha & cp. du;1.
du1 + rakkha
(adj.) reddish MN i.36 (˚vaṇṇa).
du1 + ratta
(adj.-n.) corrupting, disgracing, one who defiles or defames; a robber, rebel AN v.71 (bhikkhunī˚); Ja ii.270; Ja iv.495; Snp 89 (kula˚ one who spoils the reputation of the clan); Dhp-a ii.23 (kuṭi˚ an incendiary); Mil 20 (pantha˚). As dussaka at Ja v.113 (kamma˚); Snp-a 287 (mitta˚, v.l. B. for dūbhaka)-panthadūsaka a highwayman Mil 290 ■ f. dūsikā Ja iii.179 (also as dūsiyā = dosakārikā); a˚; harmless Snp 312 (see a˚).
Sk. dūṣaka
(nt.) spoiling, defiling Ja ii.270; Sdhp 453.
see dūseti
depraved, sinful, evil Pv-a 226 (˚citta).
Sk. dūṣita, pp. of dūseti
(adj.-n.) = dūsạka, in magga˚; (cp. pantha-dusaka) a highway robber Snp 84 sq
Sk. dūṣin
to spoil, ruin; to injure, hurt; to defile, pollute, defame Vin i.79, Vin i.85, Vin i.86; Vin iv.212 (maṃ so dūsetukāmo, said by a bhikkhunī), 316 (dūsetuṃ) AN iv.169 sq.; Ja i.454; Ja ii.270; Dhp-a ii.22 (kuṭiṃ, damage destroy) ■ aor. dūsayi Ja ii.110 (fared ill) ■ pp dūsita. Cp. pa˚, pari˚.
Sk. dūṣayati, caus. of dussati (q.v.). Also as dusseti Pv-a 82
(nt.) infesting, polluting, defaming; robbing, only in pantha˚; (with v.l. duhana) waylaying Ja ii.281, Ja ii.388; Tikp 280.
see duhana
(nt.) milking (-˚), in kumbha˚; filling the pails with milk, i.e. giving much milk (gāvo; cp. Sk. droṇadughā a cow which yields much milk) Snp 309.
Sk. dohana, see dohati
see duhitika.
(= dvejjha, see dvi B i.5] divided, in a˚; undividedness Ja iii.7 (com. abhejja), 274 = iv.258 (dhanuṃ a ˚ṃ karoti to get the bow ready, v.l. BB. sarejjhaṃ C expld jiyāya ca sarena ca saddhiṃ ekam eva katvā).
a water-snake; salamander Ja iii.16; Ja vi.194; Sdhp 292. See next.
Sk. duṇḍubha
1. a sort of snake (see prec.) Ja i.361.
2. a kind of girdle (in the form of a snake’s head) Vin ii.136 (expld by udaka-sappi-sira-sadisa).
(m. nt.) a kind of kettle-drum DN i.79 (v.l. dindima); Nd ii.219 (˚ka, v.l. dind˚); Ja i.355; (= paṭaha-bheri); v.322 = vi.217 vi.465 = 580.
Sk. diṇḍima, cp. dindima
(adj.) having two tail-feathers Ja v.339.
= dvepiccha, see dvi B I. 5
(adj.) (a) to be given (see below) ■ (b) deserving a gift, worthy of receiving alms Ja iii.12 (a˚); Mil 87 (rāja˚) -nt. a gift offering Vin i.298 (saddhā˚).
-dhamma a gift, lit. that which has the quality of being given; esp. a gift of mercy, meritorious gift SN i.175; AN i.150, AN i.166; AN ii.264 (saddhā˚); Pv i.11; ii.318 Pv-a 5, Pv-a 7 sq., 26, 92 (˚bīja), 103, 129; cp. Avs i.308. The deyyadhamma (set of gifts, that which it is or should be a rule to give) to mendicants, consists of 14 items, which are (as enumd at Nd ii.523 under the old Brahman’s term yañña “sacrifice”) (1) cīvara, (2) piṇḍapāta (3) senāsana, (4) gilāna-paccaya-bhesajja-parikkhāra, (5) anna, (6) pāna, (7) vattha, (8) yāna, (9) mālā (10) gandhā, (11) vilepana, (12) seyya, (13) āvasatha (14) padīpeyya. A similar enumn in diff. order is found at Nd i.373.
Sk. deya, grd. of dā, see dadāti I. 2, b
a god, a divine being; usually in pl. devā the gods. As title attributed to any superhuman being or beings regarded to be in certain respects above the human level. Thus primarily (see 1a) used of the first of the next-world devas, Sakka, then also of subordinate deities, demons & spirits (devaññatarā some kind of deity; snake-demons: nāgas, tree-gods: rukkhadevatā etc.). Also title of the king (3). Always implying splendour (cp. above etym.) & mobility, beauty goodness & light, & as such opposed to the dark powers of mischief & destruction (asurā: Titans; petā: miserable ghosts; nerayikā sattā: beings in Niraya). A double position (dark & light) is occupied by Yama, the god of the Dead (see Yama & below 1 c). Always implying also a kinship and continuity of life with humanity and other beings; all devas have been man and may again become men (cp. DN i.17 sq.; SN iii.85), hence “gods” is not a coincident term. All devas are themselves in saṃsāra, needing salvation. Many are found worshipping saints (Th i.627–9; Th ii.365) ■ The collective appellations differ; there are var. groups of divine beings, which in their totality (cp. tāvatiṃsa) include some or most of the well-known Vedic deities. Thus some collect. designations are devā sa-indakā (the gods including Indra or with their ruler at their head: DN ii.208; SN iii.90, AN v.325), sa-pajāpatikā (S iii.90), sa-mārakā (see deva-manussaloka), sa-brahmakā (S iii.90). See below 1 b. Lists of popular gods are to be found, e.g. at DN ii.253; DN iii.194 ■ A current distinction dating from the latest books in the canon is that into 3 classes, viz. sammuti- devā (conventional gods, gods in the public opinion, i.e. kings & princes Ja i.132; DN-a i.174) visuddhi˚; (beings divine by purity, i.e. of great religious merit or attainment like Arahants & Buddhas),; upapatti˚; (being born divine, i.e. in a heavenly state as one of the gatis, like bhumma-devā etc.). This division in detail at Nd ii.307; Vb 422; Kp-a 123; Vv-a 18 Under the 3rd category (upapatti˚) seven groups are enumerated in the foll. order: Cātummahārājikā devā Tāvatiṃsā d. (with Sakka as chief), Yāmā d., Tusitā d. Nimmānaratī d., Paranimmita-vasavattī d., Bṛahmakāyikā d. Thus at DN i.216 sq.; AN i.210, AN i.332 sq.; Nd ii.307; cp. SN i.133 & Ja i.48. See also devatā.
1. good etc ■ (a) sg. a god, a deity or divine being MN i.71 (d. vā Māro vā Brahmā vā); SN iv.180 = AN iv.461 (devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā ti: I shall become a god or some one or other of the (subordinate gods angels); Snp 1024 (ko nu devo vā Brahmā vā Indo vāpi Sujampati); Dhp 105 (+ gandhabba, Māra, Brahmā) AN ii.91, AN ii.92 (puggalo devo hoti devaparivāro etc.); Pv-a 16 (yakkho vā devo vā) ■ (b) pl. devā gods. These inhabit the 26 devalokas one of which is under the rule of Sakka, as is implied by his appellation S. devānaṃ indo (his opponent is Vepacitti Asur-indo SN i.222) SN i.216 sq.; SN iv.101, SN iv.269; AN i.144; Snp 346; Pv-a 22 etc-Var. kinds are e.g. appamāṇ’-ābhā (opp. paritt ābhā) MN iii.147; ābhassarā DN i.17; Dhp 200; khiḍḍāpadosikā DN i.19; gandhabba-kāyikā SN iii.250 sq. cattāro mahārājikā SN v.409, SN v.423; Jat i.48; Pv iv.111 Pv-a 17, Pv-a 272; naradevā tidasā SN i.5; bhummā Pv-a 5 manāpa-kāyikā AN iv.265 sq.; mano-padosikā DN i.20 valāhaka-kāyikā SN iii.254 ■ Var. attributes of the Devas are e.g. āyuppamāṇā AN i.267; AN ii.126 sq. AN iv.252 sq.; dīghāyukā SN iii.86; AN ii.33; rūpino manomayā MN i.410, etc. etc ■ See further in general: DN i.54 (satta devā); DN ii.14, DN ii.157, DN ii.208; SN v.475 = AN i.37; Snp 258 (+ manussā), 310 (id.); 404, 679; Dhp 30, Dhp 56, Dhp 94, Dhp 230 Dhp 366; Pts i.83 sq.; Pts ii.149; Vb 86, Vb 395, Vb 412 sq.; Ne 23 Sdhp 240 ■ (c) deva = Yama see deva-dūta (expld at Ja i.139: devo ti maccu) ■ atideva a pre-eminent god god above gods (Ep. of the Buddha) Nd ii.307; Dhs-a 2 etc.; see under cpds.
2. the sky, but only in its rainy aspect, i.e. rain-cloud, rainy sky, rain-god (cp Jupiter Pluvius; K.S. i.40, n. 2 on Pajjunna, a Catumahārājika), usually in phrase deve vassante (when it rains etc.), or devo vassati (it rains) DN i.74 (: devo ti megho DN-a i.218); SN i.65, SN i.154 (cp. Iti 66 megha); Snp 18 Snp 30; Ja v.201; Dhp-a ii.58, Dhp-a ii.82; Pv-a 139. devo ekam ekam phusāyati the cloud rains drop by drop, i.e. lightly SN i.104 sq., 154, 184; iv.289 ■ thulla-phusitake deve vassante when the sky was shedding big drops of rain SN iii.141; SN v.396; AN i.243; AN ii.140; AN v.114; Vism 259-vigata-valāhake deve when the rain-clouds have passed SN i.65; MN ii.34, MN ii.42.
3. king, usually in voc deva, king! Vin i.272; Vin iii.43; AN ii.57; Ja i.150, Ja i.307; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 74 etc.
devī (f.) 1. goddess, of Petīs, Yakkhiṇīs etc.; see etym expl. at Vv-a 18 ■ Pv ii.112; Vv 13 etc.
2. queen Vin i.82 (Rahulamātā), 272; DN ii.14; AN ii.57, AN ii.202 (Mallikā) Ja i.50 (Māyā); Ja iii.188; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 75.
-accharā a divine Apsarā, a heavenly joy-maiden Vism 531; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 279; -aññatara, in phrase devo vā d. vā, a god or one of the retinue of a god SN iv.180; AN iv.461; Pv-a 16; -ātideva god of gods, i.e. divine beyond all divinities, a super-deva, of Buddha Nd ii.307 & on Snp 1134; Ja iv.158 = Dhp-a i.147; Vv 6427; Vv-a 18; Mil 241, Mil 258, Mil 368, Mil 384 & passim; cp. Mvu i.106, Mvu i.257 Mvu i.283, Mvu i.291; -attabhāva a divine condition, state of a god Pv-a 14; -ānubhāva divine majesty or power DN ii.12; MN iii.120; Ja i.59; -āsana a seat in heaven Iti 76; -āsurasaṅgāma the fight between the Gods & the Titans DN ii.285; SN i.222; SN iv.201; SN v.447; MN i.253; AN iv.432 (at all passages in identical phrase); -iddhi divine power Vv 313; Vv-a 7; -isi a divine Seer Snp 1116; Nd ii.310 -ūpapatti rebirth among the gods Pv-a 6; -orohaṇa descent of the gods Dhp-a iii.443; -kaññā a celestial maiden, a nymph SN i.200; Ja i.61; Vv-a 37, Vv-a 78; -kāya a particular group of gods SN i.200; Iti 77; Thig 31 -kuñjara “elephant of the gods,” of Indra Ja v.158 -kumāra son of a god (cp. ˚putta) Ja iii.391; -gaṇa a troop of gods Ja i.203; Dhp-a iii.441; -gaha a temple chapel Vin iii.43; -cārikā a visit to the gods, journeying in the devaloka Vv-a 3, Vv-a 7, Vv-a 165 etc.; -ṭṭhāna heavenly seat Ja iii.55; a temple, sacred place Mil 91, Mil 330 -dattika given or granted by a god, extraordinary Pv-a 145; -dattiya = ˚dattika Ja iii.37; Dhp-a i.278 -dāruka a species of pine Ja v.420; -dundubhi the celestial drum, i.e. thunder DN i.10; Mil 178; DN-a i.95; -dūta the god’s (i.e. Yama’s see above 1˚) messenger AN i.138 AN i.142; MN ii.75; MN iii.179; Ja i.138; Dhp-a i.85 (tayo d.) Mhbv. 122 (˚suttanta); -deva “the god of gods,” Ep of the Buddha (cp. devâtideva) Thag 533, Thag 1278 (of Kappāyana); Dhs-a 1; Pv-a 140; -dhamma that which is divine or a god AN iii.277 (˚ika); Dhp-a iii.74; -dhītā a female deva or angel (cp. devaputta), lit. daughter of a god Ja ii.57; Vv-a 137, Vv-a 153 (with ref. to Vimānapetīs) -nagara the city of the Devas, heaven Ja i.168, Ja i.202; Dhp-a i.280; -nikāya a class, community or group of gods, celestial state or condition DN ii.261 (sixty enumd) SN iv.180; MN i.102 sq.; AN i.63 sq.; AN ii.185; AN iii.249 sq. AN iv.55; AN v.18; -pañha questioning a god, using an oracle DN i.11 (= DN-a i.97: devadāsiyā sarīre devataṃ otāretvā pañha-pucchanaṃ); -parivāra a retinue of gods AN ii.91 -parisā the assembly of gods AN ii.185; Tikp 241. -putta “son of a god,” a demi-god, a ministering god (cp. f deva-dhītā), usually of Yakkhas, but also appld to the 4 archangels having charge of the higher world of the Yāmā devā (viz. Suyāma devaputta); the Tusitā d (Santusita d.); the Nimmānaratī d. (Sunimmita d.); the Paranimmitavasavattī d. (Vasavattī d.) DN i.217 sq. cp. Ja i.48 ■ DN ii.12, DN ii.14; SN i.46 sq.; 216 sq.; iv.280; AN i.278; Iti 76; Ja i.59 (jarā-jajjara); Ja iv.100 (Dhamma d.); vi.239 (Java d.); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 9, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 113 (Yakkho ti devaputto); Mil 23; -pura the city of the gods heaven SN iv.202; Vv 6430 (= Sudassana-mahānagara Vv-a 285); Ja iv.143; -bhava celestial existence Pv-a 167 -bhoga the wealth of the gods Pv-a 97; -manussā (pl.) gods & men DN i.46, DN i.62≈, 99 (˚mānuse); MN ii.38 MN ii.55; Snp 14 (sa˚), 236 (˚pūjita), 521; Iti 80 (˚seṭṭhā) Kp viii.10; Kp-a 196; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 117; -˚loka the world of gods and men. It comprises (1) the world of gods proper (Devas, i.e. Sakka, Māra & Brahmā corresp. to sammuti-devā, see above); (2) samaṇas brāhmaṇas (cp. visuddhi-devā); (3) gods & men under the human aspect (gati, cp. upapatti-devā): Snp 1047 Snp 1063; expl. at Nd ii.309 & (with diff. interpretations DN-a i.174 sq.; -yāna leading to the (world of the gods, i.e. the road to heaven Snp 139, also in ˚yāniya (magga) DN i.215; -rājā king of the devas, viz Sakka Nd i.177; Ja iii.392 (= devinda); Dhp-a iii.441; Pv-a 62; -rūpa divine appearance or form Pv-a 92 -loka the particular sphere of any devas, the seat of the devas, heaven; there exist 26 such spheres or heavens (see loka); when 2 are mentioned it refers to Sakka’s & Brahma’s heavens. A seat in a devaloka is in saṃsāra attained by extraordinary merit: Dhp 177; Ja i.202 Ja i.203; Ja iv.273; Thag-a 74; Kp-a 228; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 9, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 66, Pv-a 81 Pv-a 89; Vism 415, etc.; -vimāna the palace of a deva Ja i.58; Vv-a 173; -saṅkhalikā a magic chain Ja ii.128; Ja v.92, Ja v.94 -sadda heavenly sound or talk among the devas Iti 75 (three such sounds).
Ved. deva, Idg. *dei̯ā to shine (see dibba & diva), orig. adj. *deiṷos belonging to the sky, cp. Av. daēvō (demon.), Lat. deus, Lith. dë̃vas; Ohg. Ƶīo; Ags. Tīg gen. Tīwes (= Tuesday); Oir. dia (god). The popular etymology refers it to the root div in the sense of playing sporting or amusing oneself: dibbanti ti devā, pañcahi kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti attano vā siriyā jotantī ti attho Kp-a 123
(adj.) (-˚) belonging or peculiar to the devas; only in sa˚-loka the world including the gods in general DN i.62; Nd ii.309; Snp 86 Snp 377, Snp 443, Snp 760 etc. Mil 234. See also devamanussa-loka.
deva + ka
(adj.) (-˚) having such & such a god as one’s special divinity, worshipping, a worshipper of, devotee of Mil 234 (Brahma˚ + Brahma (garuka) ■ f.; devatā in pati “worshipping the husband,” i.e. a devoted wife Ja iii.406; Vv-a 128.
(f.) “condition or state of a deva, divinity; divine being, deity, fairy. The term comprises all beings which are otherwise styled devas, & a list of them given at Nd;2 308 & based on the principle that any being who is worshipped (or to whom an offering is made or a gift given: de-vatā = yesaṃ deti, as is expressed in the conclusion “ye yesaṃ dakkhiṇeyyā te tesaṃ devatā”) is a devatā, comprises 5 groups of 5 kinds each, viz. (1) ascetics; (2) domestic animals (elephants, horses, cows, cocks, crows); (3) physical forces & elements (fire, stone etc.); (4) lower gods (: bhumma devā) (nāgā, suvaṇṇā, yakkhā, asurā gandhabbā); (5) higher gods (: inhabitants of the devaloka proper) Mahārājā, Canda, Suriya, Inda, Brahmā) to which are added the 2 aspects of the sky-god as devadevatā & disā-devatā) ■ Another definition at Vv-a 21 simply states: devatā ti devaputto pi Brahmā pi devadhītā pi vuccati ■ Among the var. deities the foll. are frequently mentioned:; rukkha˚; tree-gods or dryads MN i.306; Ja i.221; Pv-a 5; vatthu˚; earth gods (the four kings) Pv 41; Pv-a 17; vana˚; wood-nymphs MN i.306; samudda˚; water-sprites Ja ii.112 etc. etc. DN i.180 (mahiddhikā, pl.), 192; ii.8, 87, 139, 158; SN i. sq.; iv.302; MN i.245; MN ii.37; AN i.64, AN i.210, AN i.211; AN ii.70 (sapubba˚); AN iii.77 (bali-paṭiggāhikā), 287 (saddhāya samannāgatā); 309; iv.302 sq., 390 (vippaṭisāriniyo) v.331; Snp 45, Snp 316, Snp 458, Snp 995, Snp 1043; Dhp 99; Ja i.59, Ja i.72 Ja i.223, Ja i.256; Ja iv.17, Ja iv.474; Vv 163; Pv ii.110; Kp-a 113, Kp-a 117; Pv-a 44.
-ānubhāva divine power or majesty Ja i.168; -ānussati “remembrance of the gods,” one of the 6 ânussatiṭṭhānāni, or subjects to be kept in mind DN iii.250, DN iii.280 cp. AN i.211; Vism 197. -uposatha a day of devotion to the gods AN i.211; -paribhoga fit to be enjoyed by gods Ja ii.104; -bali an offering to the gods AN ii.68 -bhāva at Pv-a 110 read as devattabhāva (opp. petattabhāva).
deva + tā, qualitative-abstr. suffix, like Lat. juventa, senecta, Goth. hauhipa, Ohg. fullida cp. Sk pūrṇatā, bandhutā etc.
to lament, etc.; see pari˚. Cp. also parideva etc.
div
(nt.) the state of being a deva, divinity Thag-a 70; Pv-a 110 (˚bhāva as Yakkha, opp. petatta bhāva; so read for devatā-bhāva).
deva + tta
(nt.) state or condition of a deva Thag 1127; cp. petattana in the foll. verse.
= last
husband’s brother, brother-in-law Ja vi.152; Vv 326 (sa˚), popularly expld at Vv-a 135 as “dutiyo varo ti vā devaro, bhattu kaniṭṭha bhātā.”
Sk. devṛ & devara Gr.; δ ̈αήρ (*δαιvήρ), Lat. levir, Ohg. zeihhur, Ags. tācor
(adj.) daily Ja v.383; DN-a i.296 (˚bhatta = bhattavetena); Dhp-a i.187 sq.,-nt. ˚ṃ as adv daily, every day Ja i.82, Ja i.149, Ja i.186; Vv-a 67, Vv-a 75; Dhp-a i.28; Dhp-a ii.41.
Der. fr. divasa
point, part, place, region, spot, country, Vin i.46; Vin ii.211; MN i.437; Ja i.308; Dhs-a 307 (˚bhūta); Pv-a 78 (˚antara prob. to be read dos˚), 153 Kp-a 132, Kp-a 227 ■ desaṃ karoti to go abroad Ja v.340 (p. 342 has disaṃ) ■ kañcid-eva desaṃ pucchati to ask a little point DN i.51; MN i.229; AN v.39, sometimes as kiñcid-eva d. p. SN iii.101; MN iii.15; v.l. at DN i.51- desāgata pañha a question propounded, lit. come into the region of some one or having become a point of discussion Mil 262.
Ved. deśa, cp. disā
(adj.) pointing out, teaching, advising Sdhp 217, Sdhp 519-(nt.) advice, instruction, lesson MN i.438.
Sk. deśaka
(f.) 1. discourse, instruction, lesson SN v.83, SN v.108; Ja iii.84; Pp 28; Ne 38; Vism 523 sq (regarding Paṭiccasamuppāda); Pv-a 1, Pv-a 2, Pv-a 9, Pv-a 11; Sdhp 213. 2. Freq. in dhamma˚; moral instruction, exposition of the Dhamma, preaching, sermon Vin i.16; AN i.53 AN ii.182; AN iv.337 sq.; Iti 33; Ja i.106 etc. (a˚ gāminī āpatti) a Pārājika or Sanghādisesa offence Vin ii.3, Vin ii.87; Vin v.187 Cp. Vin. Texts ii.33.
3. (legal) acknowledgment Mil 344 ■ Cp. ā˚.
-avasāne (loc.) at the end of an instruction discourse or sermon Dhp-a iii.175; Pv-a 54; -pariyosāne = proc Pv-a 9, Pv-a 31 etc. -vilāsa beauty of instruction Vism 524; Tikapaṭṭhāna 21.
Sk. deśanā
(adj.) = desaka, su˚; one who points out well, a good teacher Mil 195.
Sk. deśika
expounded, shown, taught etc., given, assigned, conferred Vin iii.152 (marked out) Vin v.137; DN ii.154 (dhamma); Dhp 285 (nibbāna); Pv-a 4 (magga: indicated), 54 (given).
pp. of deseti
one who instructs or points out; a guide, instructor, teacher MN i.221, MN i.249; AN i.266 AN iii.441; AN v.349.
n. ag. to deseti
to point out, indicate, show; set forth, preach, teach; confess. Very freq. in phrase dhammaṃ d. to deliver a moral discourse to preach the Dhamma Vin i.15; Vin ii.87, Vin ii.188; Vin v.125, Vin v.136; DN i.241, AN ii.185, AN v.194; Iti 111; Ja i.168; Ja iii.394; Pp 57; Pv-a 6 ■ aor. adesesi (SN i.196 = Thag 1254) & desesi (Pv-a 2, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 78 etc.)-pp. desita (q.v.).
Sk. deśayati, Caus. of disati, q.v.
(adj.) disagreeable, odious, detestable Ja i.46; Ja ii.285; Ja iv.406 Ja vi.570, Thag-a 268, Mil 281.
Sk. dveṣya, to dvis, see disa
to hate, dislike, detest Snp-a 168 (= na piheti, opp. kāmeti).
Sk. dviṣati & dveṣṭi; see etym. under disa
(f.) repulsiveness Mil 281.
Sk. dvesyatā
(adj.) hating, detesting Snp 92 (dhamma˚); better desin, cp. viddesin.
Sk. dveṣin
body AN ii.18; Pv-a 10 Pv-a 122. Usually in foll. phrases: hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ SN i.60; Pv ii.956; pahāya m. d. SN i.27, SN i.30; jahati d MN ii.73; ˚ṃ nikkhipati Pv ii.615; (muni or khīṇāsavo antima-deha-dhārin (˚dhāro) SN i.14, SN i.53; SN ii.278; Snp 471 Th ii.7, 10; Iti 32, Iti 40, Iti 50, Iti 53. ˚nikkhepana laying down the body Vism 236.
Sk. deha to *dheigh to form, knead, heap up (cp. kāya = heap), see diddha. So also in uddehaka. Cp Kern, Toev. p. 75 s. v. sarīradeha. Cp. Gr. τεϊξος (wall) = Sk. dehī; Lat. fingo & figura; Goth. deigan (knead) = Ohg. teig = E. dough
(nt.) = deha; pl. limbs Thig 392; cp. Thag-a 258.
(adj.-n.) that which has a body, a creature Pgdp 12, Pgdp 16.
a wooden pail, vat, trough; usually as measure of capacity (4 Āḷhaka generally) Pv iv.333 (mitāni sukhadukkhāni donehi piṭakehi). taṇḍula˚ a doṇa of rice Dhp-a iii.264 Dhp-a iv.15. At Ja ii.367 doṇa is used elliptically for doṇamāpaka (see below).
-pāka of which a d. full is cooked, a doṇa measure of food SN i.81; Dhp-a ii.8. -māpaka (mahāmatta) (a higher official) supervising the measuring of the doṇa-revenue (of rice) Ja ii.367, Ja ii.378, Ja ii.381; Dhp-a iv.88; -mita a d measure full DN i.54; MN i.518.
Sk. droṇa (nt.) conn. with *dereṷo tree, wood, wooden, see dabbi & dāru & cp. Sk. druṇī pail
(adj.) measuring a doṇa in capacity Vin i.240 (catu˚ piṭaka).
fr. doṇa
(f.) = donī1, viz. a hollow wooden vessel, tub, vat Vin i.286 (rajana˚ for dyeing); Vin ii.120 (mattikā to hold clay) 220 (udaka˚), 221 (vacca˚ used for purposes of defaecation). See also passāva˚.
(f.) 1. a (wooden) trough, a vat, tub SN ii.259; AN i.253; AN v.323; Ja i.450; Mil 56-tela˚ an oil vat AN iii.58 (āyasā made of iron & used as a sarcophagus).
2. a trough-shaped canoe (cp. Marāthi ḍon “a long flat-bottomed boat made of unḍi wood,” Kanarese ḍoni “a canoe hallowed from a log”] Ja iv.163 (= gambhīrā mahānāvā p. 164); Pv-a 189.
3. a hollow dug in the ground Mil 397.
4. the body of a lute, the sounding-board (?)] i.450; Mil 53; Vv-a 281.
Sk. droṇī, see doṇa
(f.) an oil-giving plant (?) (or is it = donī1 meaning a cake made in a tub, but wrongly interpreted by Dhammapāla?) only in -nimmiñjana oil-cake Pv i.1010; as ˚nimmijjani at Vv 3338; expld by telamiñjaka at Pv-a 51 & by tilapiññāka at Vv-a 147.;
Sk. droṇi?
(nt.) ill luck, misfortune Vin iv.277; Dhp-a 281 (text: ˚dobhagga).
Sk. daurbhāgya fr. duḥ + bhāga
fraud, cheating DN ii.243 (v.l. dobbha = dubbha).
see dubbha
(nt.) distress, dejectedness, melancholy, grief. As mental pain (cetasikaṃ asātaṃ cet. dukkhaṃ SN v.209 = Nd ii.312; cp DN ii.306; Ne 12) opp. to dukkha physical pain: see dukkha B III. 1 a). A synonym of domanassaṃ is appaccaya (q.v.). For defn of the term see Vism 461 Vism 504. The freq. combn dukkha-domanassa refers to an unpleasant state of mind & body (see dukkha B III 1 b; e.g. SN iv.198; SN v.141; MN ii.64; AN i.157; Iti 89 etc.) the contrary of somanassaṃ with which dom˚ is combd to denote “happiness & unhappiness,” joy & dejection e.g. DN iii.270; MN ii.16; AN i.163; Snp 67 (see somanassa)-Vin i.34; DN ii.278, DN ii.306; SN iv.104, SN iv.188; SN v.349, SN v.451; MN i.48, MN i.65, MN i.313, MN i.340; MN ii.51; MN iii.218; AN i.39 (abhijjhā covetousness & dejection, see abhijjhā); AN ii.5, AN ii.149 sq. AN iii.99, AN iii.207; AN v.216 sq.; Snp 592, Snp 1106; Pp 20, Pp 59; Ne 12 Ne 29 (citta-sampīḷanaṃ d.) 53, Dhs 413, Dhs 421, Dhs 1389; Vb 15, Vb 54, Vb 71, Vb 138 sq.; Dhp i.121.
-indriya the faculty or disposition to feel grief DN iii.239 (+ som˚); SN v.209 sq.; -upavicāra discrimination of that which gives distress of mind DN iii.245; -patta dejected, disappointed Ja ii.155.
Sk. daurmanasya, duḥ + manas
(f.) a swing Ja iv.283; Ja vi.341; Vism 280 (in simile).
Sk. dolā, *del as in Ags. tealtian = E. tilt, adj. tealt unstable = Sk. dulā iṣṭakā an unstable woman
to swing, to move to & fro Ja ii.385.
Denom. of dolā
(nt.) unruliness indocility, bad conduct, fractiousness SN ii.204 sq (˚karaṇā dhammā); MN i.95 (id. specified); AN ii.147 AN iii.178; Ne 40, Ne 127.
contamination of Sk. *daurvacasya evil speech & *daurvratya disobedience, defiance
(f.) unruliness, contumacy, stubbornness, obstinacy AN i.83, AN iii.310, AN iii.448 AN v.146 sq.; DN iii.212, DN iii.274; Pp 20; Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs trsl. p. 344); Vb 359, Vb 369, Vb 371.
2nd abstr. of dovacassa
(nt.) = dovacassa Pp 20; Dhs 1325.
gatekeeper, janitor Vin i.269; DN ii.83; DN iii.64 sq., 100; SN iv.194; MN i.380 sq.; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; AN v.194; Ja ii.132; Ja iv.382 (two by name, viz. Upajotiya & Bhaṇḍa-kucchi), 447 vi.367; Mil 234, Mil 332; Vism 281; Sdhp 356.
cp. Sk. dauvārika, see dvāra
(adj.) being in the state of fructification, budding Ja vi.529 (cp. p. 530); Mil 334.
Sk.?
corruption blemish, fault, bad condition, defect; depravity, corrupted state; usually -˚, as khetta˚ blight of the field Mil 360; tiṇa˚ spoilt by weeds Dhp 356; Pv-a 7; visa ill effect of poison Thag 758, Thag 768; sneha˚ blemish of sensual affection Snp 66. Four kasiṇa-dosā at Vism 123; eighteen making a Vihāra unsuitable at Vism 118 sq ■ Ja ii.417; Ja iii.104; Mil 330 (sabba-d ■ virahita faultless); DN-a i.37, DN-a i.141 ■ pl. dosā the (three) morbid affections, or disorder of the (3) humours Mil 43; adj with disturbed humours Mil 172, cp. DN-a i.133.
Sk. doṣa to an Idg. *deu(s) to want, to be inferior etc. (cp. dussati), as in Gr. δέομαι, δεύομαι
anger, ill-will evil intention, wickedness, corruption, malice, hatred In most freq. combn of either rāga (lust) d. & moha; (delusion), or lobha (greed) d. moha (see rāga & lobha) to denote the 3 main blemishes of character. For def;n see Vism 295 & 470. Interpreted at Nd;2 313 as “cittassa āghāto paṭighāto paṭigho… kopo… kodho… vyāpatti.”-The distinction between dosa & paṭigha is made at DN-a i.116 as: dosa = dubbalakodha; paṭigha = balavakodha ■ In combn lobha d moha e.g. SN i.98; MN i.47, MN i.489; AN i.134, AN i.201; AN ii.191 AN iii.338; Iti 45 (tīṇi akusalamūlāni). With rāga moha;: Dhp 20; Iti 2 = Iti 6; with rāga & avijjā; Iti 57; rāga & māna; Snp 270, Snp 631 etc ■ See for ref.: Vin i.183; DN iii.146, DN iii.159, DN iii.182, DN iii.214, DN iii.270; SN i.13, SN i.15, SN i.70; SN v.34 sq. MN i.15, MN i.96 sq., 250 sq., 305; AN i.187; AN ii.172, AN ii.203 AN iii.181; Snp 506; Iti 2 (dosena duṭṭhāse sattā gacchanti duggatiṃ); Pts i.80 sq., 102; Pp 16, Pp 18; Dhs 418, Dhs 982 Dhs 1060; Vb 86, Vb 167, Vb 208, Vb 362; Ne 13, Ne 90; Sdhp 33 Sdhp 43 ■ Variously characterised as: 8 purisa-dosā Vb 387; khila, nīgha, mala SN v.57; agati (4 agati-gamanāni chanda, d. moha, bhaya) DN iii.228, cp. 133, 182; ajjhattaṃ AN iii.357 sq.; its relation to kamma AN i.134; AN iii.338 AN v.262; to ariyamagga SN v.5, SN v.8 ■ sadosa corrupted depraved, wicked DN i.80; AN i.112; adosa absence of ill-will, adj. kind, friendly, sympathetic AN i.135, AN i.195, AN i.203 AN ii.192; Vb 169, Vb 210; Dhs 33 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 21, 99) Vv-a 14 (+ alobha amoha).
-aggi the fire of anger or ill-will DN iii.217; SN iv.19 sq. Iti 92 (+ rāgaggi moh˚); Ja i.61; -antara (adj.) bearing anger, intending evil in one’s heart Vin ii.249; DN iii.237; MN i.123; AN i.59; AN iii.196 sq.; AN v.81 (opp. metta-citta) perhaps at Pv-a 78 (for des˚); -kkhaya the fading away dying out of anger or malice SN iii.160, SN iii.191; SN iv.250 SN v.8; Vb 73, Vb 89; -gata = dosa (+ paṭigha) SN iv.71 -garu full of anger SN i.24; -dosa (: dosa1) spoilt by anger Dhp 357; -saññita connected with ill-will Iti 78; -sama like anger Dhp 202; -hetuka caused by evil intention or depravity AN v.261 (pāṇātipāta). Dosaniya, Dosaniya & Dosaneyya;
Sk. dveṣa, but very often not distinct in meaning from dosa1. On dveṣa see under disa
(adj.) corruptible; polluting, defiling; hateful sinful SN iv.307; AN ii.120; Iti 84 (where AN iii.110 has dussanīya in same context).
grd ■ formation either to dosa1 or dosa2, but more likely = Sk. *dūṣanīya = dūṣya (see dussa2 & dussati) influenced by dveṣaṇīya
(f.) evening, dusk. Only in acc. as adv. dosaṃ (= doṣāṃ) at night Ja vi.386.
Sk. doṣā & doṣas, cp. Gr.; δύω, δύομαι to set (of the sun)
(adj.) angry Ja v.452, Ja v.454.
to dosa2
(f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, cp. P. juṇhā) a clear night, moonlight; only in phrase ramaṇīyā vata bho dosinā ratti “lovely is the moonlight night” DN i.47≈Ja i.509; Ja v.262; Mil 5, Mil 19 etc. Expld in popular fashion by Bdhgh. as “dosâpagatā” ratti DN-a i.141.
-puṇṇamāsī a clear, full moon night Thag 306, Thag 1119 -mukha the face of a clear night Ja vi.223.
milking, milk Ja v.63, Ja v.433.
Sk. doha & dogha
(adj.) injuring (-˚) DN-a i.296.
Sk. droha
a milk-pail Ja v.105.
Sk. doha
to milk ■ pres. 1 pl.; dohāma & duhāma; Ja v.105; pret. 1 pl. duhāmase ibid.; pot duhe Jvi.211; ger. duhitvā Snp-a 27; pp. duddha (q.v ■ Pass. duyhati SN i.174 (so read for duhanti); Ja v.307 ppr. duyhamāna Mil 41 ■ See also dūhana, doha1 dohin.
Sk. dogdhi, to which prob. duhitṛ daughter: see under dhītā & cp. dhenu
(a) the longing of a pregnant woman Ja iii.28, Ja iii.333; Dhp-a i.350; Dhp-a ii.139-(b) intense longing, strong desire, craving in general Ja ii.159, Ja ii.433; Ja v.40, Ja v.41; Ja vi.263, Ja vi.308; Dhp-a ii.86 (dhammika d.).
Sk. dohada & daurhṛda, of du + hṛd, sick longing, sickness, see hadaya. Lüders; Gōttinger GelehrteNachrichten 1898, 1 derives it as dvi + hṛd
to have cravings (of a woman in pregnancy) Ja vi.263.
Denom. fr. dohaḷa
(adj ■ f.) a woman in pregnancy having cravings; a pregnant woman in general Ja ii.395, Ja ii.435; Ja iii.27 Ja iv.334; Ja v.330 (= gabbhinī); Ja vi.270, Ja vi.326, Ja vi.484; Dhp-a iii.95.
(adj. n.) one who milks, milking MN i.220 sq. = AN v.347 sq. (anavasesa˚ milking out fully).
incorrect spelling for dubbha (q.v.) in adrūbhāya Vin i.347.
in numeral composition, meaning two etc., see under dvi B III.
(adj.-n.) (adj.) (a) twofold Snp 886 (saccaṃ musā ti dvayadhammaṃ); Dhp 384; Pv iv.129 (dvayaṃ vipākaṃ = duvidhaṃ Pv-a 228)- advaya single AN v.46 ■ (b) false, deceitful Vin iii.21-nt. a duality, a pair, couple SN ii.17 (˚ṃ nissito loko) Ja iii.395 (gātha˚); Pv-a 19 (māsa˚); Dhp-a ii.93 (pada two lines, “couplet”).
-kārin “doing both,” i.e. both good & evil deeds (su˚ & duccaritaṃ) SN iii.241, cp. 247 sq.; DN iii.96.
Ved. dvaya; cp. dvi B I. 6
(cp. dva˚) see dvi B III.
(nt.) [Ved. dvār (f.) & dvāra (nt.), base; *dhvār, cp. Av. dvarəm; Gr. χύρ ̈α, χυρών; Lat. fores (gate), forum Goth. daúr, Ohg. turi = Ger. tür, Ags. dor = E. door. 1. lit. an outer door, a gate, entrance Vin i.15; SN i.58 SN i.138, SN i.211; Ja i.346; Ja ii.63; Ja vi.330; Vb 71 sq.; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 67 (village gate), 79; Sdhp 54, Sdhp 356 ■ That d. cannot be used for an inner door see Vin ii.215; on knocking at a d. see DA i.252; cp. Dhp-a i.145 (dvāraṃ ākoṭeti); to open a door: āvarati; to shut: pidahati; to lock thaketi. dvāraṃ alabhamāna unable to get out Vin ii.220 ■ mahā˚; the main or city gate Ja i.63; culla˚ Ja ii.114; catu˚; (adj.) having 4 doors (of niraya) Pv i.1013; cha˚; with 6d. (nagaraṃ, w. ref. to the 6 doors of the senses, see below) SN iv.194; pure˚; the front d Ja ii.153; pacchima˚; the back d. Ja vi.364; uttara˚; the E. gate (Pv-a 74); nagara˚; the city gate (Ja i.263; deva Dhp-a i.280); gāma˚; the village g. (Vin iii.52; Ja ii.110) ghara˚; (J iv.142; Pv-a 38) & geha˚; (Pv-a 61) the house door; antepura˚; the door of the inner chamber MN ii.100 kula˚; the doors of the clan-people Snp 288 ■ metaph. of the door leading to Nibbāna: amata˚; SN i.137; AN v.346. 2. (fig.) the doors = in-& outlets of the mind, viz. the sense organs; in phrase indriyesu gutta-dvāra (adj. guarding the doors with respect to the senses or faculties (of the mind): see gutta (e.g. SN ii.218; SN iv.103 & cp; Dhs. trsl. p. 175) ■ SN iv.117, SN iv.194 (with simile of the 6 gates of a city); Vv-a 72 (kāya-vacī˚). The nine gates of the body at Vism 346. Thus also in f. abstr. guttadvāratā the condition of well protected doors (see gutta).
-kavāṭa a door post Ja i.63; Ja ii.334; Ja vi.444; Pv-a 280 -koṭṭhaka [cp. Sk. dvārakoṣṭhaka Sp. Avs i.24, Avs i.31 gateway; also room over the gate Ud 52, Ud 65; Ja i.290 Ja iii.2; Ja iv.63, Ja iv.229; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 160; Dhp-a i.50; Dhp-a ii.27, Dhp-a ii.46 Dhp-a iv.204; Vism 22; Mil 10 ■ bahidvārakoṭṭhake or ˚ā outside the gate MN i.382; MN ii.92; AN iii.31; AN iv.206 -gāma a village outside the city gates, i.e. a suburb (cp. bahidvāragāma Ja i.361) Ja iii.126 (˚gāmaka), 188 iv.225; Dhp-a ii.25 (˚ka); -toraṇa a gateway Ja iii.431 -pānantara at Ja vi.349 should be read ˚vātapānantara -pidahana shutting the door Vism 78. -bāhā a door post SN i.146; Pv i.51; Dhp-a iii.273; -bhatta food scattered before the door Snp 286; -vātapāna a door-window Vin ii.211; Ja vi.349; -sālā a hall with doors MN i.382 MN ii.61.
(-˚) (adj.) referring or belonging to the door of-; in cha ˚ā taṇhā, craving or fever, arising through the 6 doors (of the senses) Dhp-a iv.221, & kāya˚ ■ saṃvara control over the “bodily” door, i.e. over action (opp speech) Pv-a 10 (so read for kāyañ cārika˚).
turning twice SN i.32; -ja “twice born,” i.e. a bird Ja i.152 (gaṇā) -jātin one who is born twice, i.e. a brāhmaṇa Th, 2, 430 (Thag-a 269 = brahmajātin); -tālamatta of the size of 2 palms Dhp-a ii.62; -pad [Sk. dvipad, Lat. bipes, Gr.δίπους etc.] a biped, man SN i.6; -pala twofold Vism 339 -pādaka = dvipad Vin ii.110; -bandhu having two friends Ja vi.281; -rattatiratta two or three nights Vin iv.16; also in dvīha two days (q.v.).
3. as diaeretic form duvi˚:-ja (cp. dija) “growing again” i.e. a tooth Ja v.156.
4. as contracted form di˚:-(y)aḍḍha one and a half (lit. the second half, cp. Ger. anderthalb) Dhp 235; Ja i.72 (diyaḍḍha-yojana-satika 150 y. long or high etc.) 202; iv.293 (˚yāma); Dhp-a i.395; DN-a i.17; Mil 243 Mil 272; Dhs-a 12; -guṇa twofold, double Vin i.289; Snp 714; Ja v.309; Mil 84; Dhp-a ii.6; Vv-a 63, Vv-a 120; -ja (cp. dvija, duvija) (a) “twice-born,” a bird SN i.224; Snp 1134 (d. vuccati pakkhī Nd ii.296); Ja i.152, Ja i.203 Ja ii.205; Ja iv.347; Ja v.157; Pv ii.124; Vv 358 (cp. Vv-a 178) Mil 295 ■ (b) a brahmin Thag-a, 70, 73; -jivha “twotongued,” i.e. a snake (cp. du˚) Ja iii.347; -pad (-pada or-pa) a biped (cp. dvi˚) AN i.22; AN v.21; Snp 83 (dipa-duttama), 995 (id.) 998; Dhp 273; -pādaka = ˚pad Thag 453 = Snp 205.
5. as sec. cpd. form (with guṇa) dve˚; (and de˚) -caturaṅga twice fourfold-eightfold Thag 520 (˚gāmin); -patha a “double” path, a border path, the boundary between two villages Vv 5317 (-sīmantika-patha Vv-a 241); -piccha having two tail-feathers Ja v.341 (cp. de˚); -pitika having two feathers Ja v.424 -bhāva doubling kacc. 21; -māsika two months old Pv i.67; -vācika pronouncing (only) two words, viz Buddha & Dhamma (cp. tevācika, saying the whole saraṇa-formula), Vin i.4; Ja i.81; -sattaratta twice seven nights, a fortnight [cp. Sk. dvisapta] Ja vi.230 ■ See also der. fr. numer. adv. dvidhā, viz. dvejjha (& dejjha) dvedhā˚, dveḷhaka.;
6. as noun-derivation dvaya a dyad (q.v.).
II. du; reduced base in numeral and nominal compn & der;n:
-(v)addhato from both sides (a distorted form of dubhato q.v.) Vv 6419 (= dubhato Vv-a 281); -(v)aṅgika consisting of two parts Dhs 163; -(v)aṅgula & dvaṅgula; two finger-breadths or depths, two inches long, implying a minimum measure (see above AN I.2a) Vin ii.107 Vin iv.262; usually in cpds ■ kappa the 2 inch rule, i.e. a rule extending the allotted time for the morning meal to 2 inches of shadow after mid day Vin ii.294 Vin ii.306 -pannā wisdom of 2 finger-breadths, i.e. that of a woman SN i.129 = Thig 60 (dvanguli˚, at Thag-a 66 as ˚saññā); -buddhika = ˚paññā Vv-a 96; -jivha twotongued (cp. di˚); a snake Ja iv.330; Ja v.82, Ja v.425; -paṭṭa “double cloth” (Hind. dupaṭṭā; Kanarese dupaṭa duppaṭa; Tamil tuppaṭṭā a cloak consisting of two cloths joined together, see Kern, Toev. i.179) Ja i.119; Ja iv.114, Ja iv.379 (ratta˚); Dhp-a i.249 (suratta˚) Dhp-a iii.419 (˚cīvarā); -matta (about) 2 in measure Mil 82 -māsika 2 months old or growing for 2 months (of hair Vin ii.107; -vagga consisting of two Vin i.58; -vassa 2 years old Vin i.59; -vidha twofold, instr. duvidhena MN iii.45 sq.; etc ■ Derivations from du˚ see sep. under duka (dyad), dutiya (the second), & the contamination forms; dubha (to) & dubhaya (for ubha & ubhaya).;
III. dvā (& reduced; dva ), base in numeral compn only: dvatikkhattuṃ two or three times Ja i.506; DN-a i.133, DN-a i.264; Dhp-a iv.38; dvādasa twelve (on meaning of this & foll. numerals see above AN II. & III.) Ja iii.80 Ja vi.116; Dhp-a i.88; Dhp-a iii.210; Vv-a 156, Vv-a 247 etc.; ˚yojanika Ja i.125; Ja iv.499; dvāvīsati (22) Vv-a 139; dvattiṃsa (32) Kp ii. (˚ākāra the 32 constituents of the body) Dhp-a ii.88; Vv-a 39 etc.; dvācattālīsa (42) Nd ii.15 Vism 82; dvāsaṭṭhi (Nd ii.271iii. & dvaṭṭhi (62) DN i.54; SN iii.211; DN-a i.162); dvānavuti (92) Pv-a 19, Pv-a 21-Note. A singular case of dva as adv. = twice is in dvâhaṃ Snp 1116.
Sk. dvi, dva etc ■ Bases: I. dvi = Sk. dvi in dvipad = Lat. bipēs (fr. dṷipēs), Ags. twiféte; dvidant = bidens Reduced to di (see B I.4) as in Gr. δδιπους (= dipad), Lat diennium & pref. dis-(cp. Goth. twis asunder, Ogh zwisk between) ■ II.; du (= dvi in reduced grade, cp Lat. du-plex, dubius etc.) ■ III. dvā (& dva) = Sk dvāu, dvā, f. nt. dve (declined as dual, but the P (plural) inflexion from base I. see B I.;1); Gr. δύω, Lat duo; Oir. dāu, dā, f. dī; Goth. twai, f. twōs; Ags. twā (= E. two); Ohg. zwēne, zwō zwei. Also in cpd num. dva-daśa twelve = Gr. δ(* ̔́)ώδεκα = Lat. duodecim ] number two.
A. Meanings-I. Two as unit: 1. with objective foundation: (a) denoting a combn (pair, couple) or a repetition (twice). In this conn. frequent both objective & impersonal in mentioning natural pairs as well as psychologically contrasted notions. E. g. dvipad (biped), nāgassa dve dantā (elephants’ tusks), cakkhūni (eyes); dvija (bird), duvija (tooth), dijivha (snake) See also dutiya & dvaya ■ dve: kāmā, khiḍḍā, gatiyo (Snp 1001), dānāni (Iti 98), piyā, phalāni (Snp 896; Iti 39), mittā, sinehā etc. See Nd ii.under dve, cp. AN i.47 AN i.100; DN iii.212–214 ■ (b) denoting a separation (in two, twofold etc.): see dvidhā & cpds.
2. with symbolic, sentimental meaning: (a); only two (i.e. next to one or “next to nothing”), cp. the two mites of the widow (Mark xii. 42), two sons of Rachel (Gen. 30) dumāsika not more than 2 months (Vin ii.107); dvemāsiko gabbho (Pv i.67); dvevācika; duvangula (see below) ■ (b) a few-more than one, some, a couple (often intermediate between 1 & 3, denoting more than once, or a comparatively long, rather long, but not like 3 a; very long time): māsadvayaṃ a couple of months dvisahassa dīpā 2000 islands (= a large number) diyaḍḍhasata 150 = very long etc.; dvīhatīha (2 or 3 a couple of days) q.v.; dvirattatiratta (id. of nights) dvīsu tīsu manussesu to some people (Pv-a 47); dvatikkhattuṃ soveral times; cp. dvikkhattuṃ (more than once), dutiyaṃ (for the 2nd time).
II. Two as unit in connection with its own & other; decimals means a complex plus a pair, which amounts to the same as a large & a small unit, or so to speak “a year & a day.” E. g. 12 (sometimes, but rarely 10 + 2, see sep.);- 32: rests usually on 4 X 8, but as No. of the Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni it denotes 30 + 2 the great circle plus the decisive (invisible) pair;- 62 views of heresy: see diṭṭhi; also as a year of eternity 60 kappas + 2;- 92: as measure of eternity = 90 + 2 kappas = a year & a day.;
III. Number twelve. 1. Based on natural phenomena it denotes the solar year (dvādasamāsako saṃvaccharo Vv-a 247).
2. Connected with the solar cult it is used with human arrangements to raise them to the level of heavenly ones and to impart to them a superior significance. Thus: (a) as denoting a set (cp. 12 months = companions of the Sun) it is the No. of a respectful holy, venerable group (cp. 12 sons of Jacob Gen. 35, 22 cakes as shewbread Lev. 25, 5; stones erected Josh. 4 8; apostles Math. 10, 2; patriarchs Acts 7, 8; companions of Odysseus Hom. Od. 9, 195; Knights of Arthur etc.): of theras, accompd by 12 bhikkhus Pv-a 67, Pv-a 141. 179 etc.; dvādasa koṭisatāni Snp 677; five groups of 12 musicians Vv-a 96 (cp. 5 X 12 cromlechs in the outer circle of Stonehenge) ■ (b) as measure of distance in space & time it implies vast extent great importance, a climax, divine symmetry etc 12 yojanas wide extends the radiance Vv-a 16 Vv-a 12 y. as respectful distance Pv-a 137 (cp. 2000 cubits in same sense at Josh. 3, 4); 12 y. in extent (height breadth & length) are the heavenly palaces of the Vimāna-petas or Yakkhas Vv 55;1; Ja vi.116; Vv-a 6 Vv-a 217, Vv-a 244, Vv-a 291, Vv-a 298 etc. In the same connection we freq. find the No. 16: solasa-yojanikaṃ kanaka-vimānaṃ Vv 671; Vv-a 188, Vv-a 289 etc ■ Of years: Ja iii.80; Vv-a 157 (dvādasa-vassikā; in this sense also 16 instead of 12 soḷasa-vassuddesika Vv-a 259 etc. See soḷasa).
B. Bases & Forms;-I. dvi; main base for numeral nominal composition & derivation, in:;
1. numeral dve (& duve) two: nom. acc.; dve (Snp p.107; Iti 98; Ja i.150; Ja iv.137 etc.) & (in verse); duve (Snp 896, Snp 1001); gen. dat. dvinnaṃ (Iti 39, Iti 40, Iti 98; Ja ii.154) instr. dvīhi (Ja i.87: v.l. dīhi; 151; ii.153); loc. dvīsu (Ja i.203; Pv-a 47) & duvesu (Vv 412).
2. as numeral base: -sahassa 2000 (see A I. 2b) Ja i.57; Vv-a 261; Pv-a 74; also in dvittā and adv. dvikkhattuṃ twice & dvidhā in two parts ■ (b) as nominal base:- (r)āvaṭṭa [Sk. dviḥ cp. Lat. bis
(adv.) twice Nd ii.on Snp 1116 (= dva); Nd ii.296 (jāyati dijo). See dvi B I. 2a.
Sk. *dvikṛtvaḥ
(pl.) two or three SN i.117 (perhaps we should read tad vittaṃ: Windisch, Māra & Buddha; 108).
Sk. dvitrā; see dvi B I. 2a
(num. adv.) in two parts, in two MN i.114; Ja i.253 (karoti), Ja i.254 (chindati); Ja i.298 (id.); Ja iii.181; Ja iv.101 (jāta disagreeing); Ja vi.368 (bhindati). See also dvedhā & dveḷhaka.;
-gata gone to pieces Ja v.197; -patha a twofold way a crossing; only fig. doubt SN iii.108; MN i.142, MN i.144; Ud 90. See also dvedhāpatha.
Sk. dvidhā, see dvi B I. 2a
(adv.) two days; dvīhena in 2 days SN ii.192; dvīha-mata 2 days dead MN i.88; MN iii.91.
-tīha 2 or 3 days (˚ṃ adv.) (on meaning cp. dvi AN I.2b) DN i.190 (˚assa accayena after a few days) Ja ii.316; Dhp-a iii.21 (˚accayena id., gloss: katipāh’ accayena); DN-a i.190 (˚ṃ) 215; Vv-a 45.
Sk. dvis-ahnah; see dvi B I.2b
(adj.) every other day MN i.78.
(adj.) to be gained or procured with difficulty (i.e. a livelihood which is hardly procurable), only in phrase “dubbhikkhā d setaṭṭhikā salākavuttā,” of a famine Vin iii.6, Vin iii.15, Vin iii.87 Vin iv.23; SN iv.323. On the term & its expl;n by Bdhgh (at Vin iii.268: dujjīvikā īhī tī… dukkhena īhitaṃ ettha pavattatī ti) see Kern, Toev. i.122 ■ Note. Bdhgh’s expln is highly speculative, & leaves the problem still unsolved. The case of du;1 appearing as du-(and not as dur-) before a vowel is most peculiar there may be a connection with druh (see duhana), which is even suggested by vv.ll. at SN iv.223 as dūhitika duhitika (q.v.). Dve & Dve;
du-īhitika, of du1 + īhati
see dvi B 1 & 5.;
(adj.) divided, twofold, only in neg. advejjha undivided, certain, doubtless; simple, sincere, uncontradictory AN iii.403; Ja iv.77 Nd ii.30 (+ adveḷhaka); Mil 141 ■ Cp. dejjha.
Sk. dvaidhya; cp. dvi B I. 5
(f.) in a˚; undividedness Ja iv.76.
fr. prec.
(adv.) in two Ja v.203, Ja v.206 (˚sira); Dhp-a ii.50 (bhijji: broke in two, broke asunder).
Sk. dvedhā, cp. dvidhā
(a) a double, i.e. a branching road; a cross-road Dhp-a ii.192; Mil 17. (b) doubt Dhp 282; Dhs 1004, Dhs 1161 Vism 313.
cp. dvidhā & dvi B I.5
(nt.) doubt Vin iii.309; Dhs 1004, Dhs 1161; DN-a i.68; Dhs-a 259; ˚citta uncertain Pv-a 13; ˚jāta in doubt Vin iii.309; DN iii.117 sq.; 210 ■ adveḷhaka (adj. sure, certain, without doubt Nd ii.30 (+ advejjha).
Dh.
Sk. *dvaidhaka fr. adv. dvidhā, cp. dvi B I. 5
to fall from, to be deprived of (c. abl.) to be gone DN iii.184 (with abl. asmā lokā dh.) AN ii.67 AN v.76, AN v.77; Iti 11; Thag 225, Thag 610; Ja iii.260, Ja iii.318, Ja iii.441, Ja iii.457 Ja iv.611; Ja v.218, Ja v.375 ■ Caus. dhaṃseti [Sk. dhvaṃsayati but more likely = Sk. dharṣayati (to infest, molest Lat. infestare. On similar sound-change P. dhaṃs˚ → Sk. dharṣ cp. P. daṃseti → Sk. darśayati). Caus. of dhṛṣṇoti to be daring, to assault cp. Gr. χάρσος audacious bold, Lat. festus, Goth. gadars = E. dare; Ohg gitar] to deprive of, to destroy, assault, importune DN i.211; SN iii.123; Snp 591; Ja iii.353; Mil 227; Sdhp 357, Sdhp 434. Cp. pa˚, pari˚.
Ved. dhvaṃsati to fall to dust, sink down, perish; Idg. dheṷes to fly like dust, cp. Sk. dhūsara “dusky” Ags. dust; Ger. dust & dunst; E. dusk & dust; prob also Lat. furo
(n ■ adj.) destroying, bringing to ruin, only in kula˚ as v.l. to kula-gandhana (q.v.) at Iti 64, and in dhaṃsanatā at Dhp-a iii.353 in expln of dhaṃsin (q.v.).
Sk. dharṣana
(adj.-n.) obtrusive, bold, offensive MN i.236; AN ii.182; Dhp 244 (= Dhp-a iii.353 paresaṃ guṇaṃ dhaṃsanatāya dh.).
Sk. dharṣin to dhṛṣṇoti, see dhaṃseti
a crow SN i.207; SN ii.258; Snp 271 = Nd ii.420; Ja ii.208; Ja v.107, Ja v.270; Ja vi.452; Pv iii.52 (= kāka Pv-a 198); Vv-a 334.
Sk. dhvānkṣa, cp. also dhunkṣā
a flag, banner; mark, emblem, sign, symbol Vin i.306
(titthiya˚: outward signs of); ii.22 (gihi˚); SN i.42 SN ii.280; AN ii.51; AN iii.84 sq. (panna˚); MN i.139 (id.) AN iii.149 (dhamma); Ja i.52 (+ patākā); Vv-a 173 (id.) Ja i.65 (arahad ˚;)Th i.961; Ja v.49 = Mil 221; Ja v.509 Ja vi.499; Nd i.170; Vv 361, 6428 (subhāsita˚ = dhamma Vv-a 284); Dhs 1116, Dhs 1233; Vism 469 (+ paṭȧka, in comparison); Pv-a 282; Vv-a 31, Vv-a 73; Mil 21; Sdhp 428, Sdhp 594. Cp. also panna.
-agga the top of a standard SN i.219; AN iii.89 sq.; Pp 67, Pp 68; Vism 414 (˚paritta). -ālu adorned with flags Thag 164 = Ja ii.334 (: dhajasampanna Com.); -āhaṭa won under or by the colours, taken as booty, captured Vin iii.139, Vin iii.140; Vism 63. -baddha captured (= ˚āhaṭa Vin i.74 (cora).
Sk. dhvaja, cp. Ohg. tuoh “cloth” (fr. *dwōko)
(f.) “bearing a standard,” i.e. an army, legion Snp 442 (= senā Snp-a 392).
Sk. dhvajinī, f. to adj. dhvajin
(nt.) grain, corn. The usual enumn comprises 7 sorts of grain, which is however not strictly confined to grain-fruit proper (“corn”) but includes, like other enumns, pulse seeds. These 7 are sāli & vīhi (rice-sorts), yava (barley) godhuma (wheat), kangu (millet), varaka (beans) kudrūsaka (?) Vin iv.264; Nd ii.314; DN-a i.78 ■ Nd ii.314 distinguishes two oategories of dhañña: the natural (pubbaṇṇa ) & the prepared (; aparaṇṇa ) kinds. To the first belong the 7 sorts, to the second belongs sūpeyya (curry). See also bīja-bīja ■ Six sorts are mentioned at MN i.57, viz. sāli, vīhi, mugga, māsa, tila, taṇḍula. DN i.5 (āmaka˚; q.v.); AN ii.209 (id.); MN i.180; AN ii.32 (+ dhana); Thag 531; Pp 58; Dhp-a i.173; Vv-a 99; Pv-a 29 (dhanaṃ vā dh ˚ṃ vā), 198 (sāsapa-tela-missitaṃ) 278 (sappi-madhu-tela-dhaññādīhi vohăraṃ katvā)- dhaññaṃ ākirati to besprinkle a person with grain (for good luck) Pv iii.54 (= mangalaṃ karoti Pv-a 198 see also mangala).
-āgāra a store house for grain Vin i.240; -piṭaka a basket full of grain Dhp-a iii.370; -rāsi a heap of g AN iv.163, AN iv.170; -samavāpaka grain for sowing, not more & not less than necessary to produce grain MN i.451.
Ved. dhānya, der. fr. dhana
(adj.) “rich in corn,” rich (see dhana) happy, fortunate, lucky. Often in combn dhanadhañña-Dhp-a i.171; Dhp-a iii.464 (dhaññādika one who is rich in grains etc., i.e. lucky); Dhs-a 116 ■ dhaññapuñña-lakkhaṇa a sign of future good fortune & merit Pv-a 161; as adj. endowed with the mark of… Ja vi.3 See also dhāniya.
Sk. dhānya, adj. to dhana or dhānya. Semantically cp. āḷhiya
1. firm, prepared, ready, resolved AN iii.114; Dāvs v.52–2. kept in mind, understood, known by heart Vin ii.95; AN i.36.
Sk. dhṛta, pp. of dharati; cp. dhara & dhāreti
(nt.) wealth, usually wealth of money, riches, treasures 1.; Lit. DN i.73 (sa˚); MN ii.180.; AN iii.222; AN iv.4 sq. Nd ii.135 (+ yasa, issariya etc.) Thig 464 (+ issariya) Ja i.225 (paṭhavigataṃ karoti: hide in the ground), 262 289; ii.112; iv.2; Snp 60, Snp 185, Snp 302; Pv ii.610; Dhp-a i.238. Often in combn aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga to indicate immense wealth (see aḍḍha) Pv-a 3, Pv-a 214 etc (see also below ˚dhañña).
2. fig. Used in the expression sattavidha-ariya-dhana “the 7 fold noble treasure” of the good qualities or virtues, viz. saddhā cāga etc. (see enumd under cāga) DN iii.163, DN iii.164, DN iii.251; Vv-a 113; Thag-a 240.
-agga the best treasure (i.e. the ariya-dhana) DN iii.164; -atthika wishing for or desiring wealth Snp 987 -āsā craving for wealth; -kkīta bought for money Dhp-a ii.3, -thaddha proud of wealth, snobbish Snp 104 -dhañña, usually Dvandva-cpd. “money & money’s worth,” but as adj. (always in phrase pahūta˚) it may be taken as Tatpuruṣa “rich in treasures,” otherwise “possessing money & money’s worth” cp. pahūtadhanadhaññavā Ja i.3. As n. Pv i.1111; iii.104; Pv-a 60; Mil 2, Mil 280; as adj. freq. “pahūtadhana-dhañña Vv 6313 = Pv ii.611: Pv-a 97. Thus in ster. formula of aḍḍha mahaddhana etc. DN iii.163 sq.; SN i.71; AN ii.86 -parājaya loss of money, as adj. appl. to kali: the dice marking loss in game Snp 659; -lobha “greed of gold Ja iv.1; -lola = lobha Ja ii.212; -viriya wealth & power Snp 422; -hetu for the sake of wealth Snp 122.
Ved. dhana; usually taken to dhā (see dadhāti) as “stake, prize at game, booty,” cp. pradhāna & Gr. χέμα; but more likely in orig. meaning “grain, posses sion of corn, crops etc.,” cp. Lith. dūna bread, Sk dhānā pl. grains & dhañña = dhana-like, i.e. corn grain
(nt.) being bent on having money Ja v.449.
Sk. *dhanatvaṃ
to desire (like money), to wish for, strive after MN i.260 (perhaps better to be read vanāyati, see formula under allīyati, and note MN i.552).
Denom. to dhana
a creditor, Thig 443, Thag-a, 271; Pv-a 276. Cp. dhaniya.
Sk. dhanika
sounded; as nt sonant (said of a letter) Mil 344.
Sk. dhvanita, pp. of dhvan, cp. Ags. dyn noise = E. din; Ags. dynnan to sound loud
= dhanika Vin i.76.
(nt.) a bow MN i.429; Ja i.50, Ja i.150 Ja ii.88; Ja iv.327; Pv-a 285.
-kalāpa bow & quiver Vin ii.192; MN i.86; MN ii.99; AN iii.94; Pv-a 154; -kāra a bow maker Mil 331 -kārika Name of a tree Ja v.420; -kārin = prec. Ja v.422 (= ˚pāṭali); -ggaha an archer DN i.51; AN ii.48; AN iv.107; Ja i.58, Ja i.356; Ja ii.87, Ja ii.88; Ja iii.220 (dhanuggaha) Ja iii.322 Ja v.129 (where 4 kinds are enumd); Vism 150 (in simile) DN-a i.156; -takkāri (f.) a plant Ja vi.535; -pāṭali Name of a tree Ja v.422; -lakkhaṇa prophesying from marks on a bow DN i.9.
Sk. dhanus, to Ohg. tanna fir-tree, also oak, orig tree in general, cp. dāru
(nt.) a (small) bow Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; DN i.7; AN iii.75; AN v.203; Ja vi.41; Mil 229; DN-a i.86.
Sk. dhanuṣka
blown, sounded AN i.253; Ja i.283, Ja i.284.
Sk. dhvānta in meaning of either dhvanita fr. dhvan to sound, or dhamita fr. dhmā to blow, see dhameti
(-˚) (adj.) blowing, n. a blower, player (on a horn: sankha˚) DN i.251; SN iv.322.
Sk. dhama, to dhamati
(-˚) (adj.) one who blows Mil 31; see vaṃsa˚, sankh˚, singa˚.
to blow, to sound (a drum) to kindle (by blowing), melt, smelt, singe AN i.254 AN iv.169; Ja i.283, Ja i.284; Ja vi.441; Nd i.478; Mil 262. ppr. dhamāna SN i.106; Mil 67 ■ Caus. dhameti to blow (an instrument) Ja ii.110; Mil 31, and dhamāpeti to cause to blow or kindle Dhp-a i.442 ■ pp. dhanta dhanita; (the latter to dhvan, by which dhamati is influenced to a large extent in meaning. Cp. uddhana).
Ved. dhamati, dhmā, pp. dh amita & dhmāta, cp. Ohg. dampf “steam”
to blow frequently, strongly or incessantly Mil 117.
cp. Sk. dadhmāti, Intens. to dhamati
(f.) a vein Thag 408 Usually in cpd.: -santhata strewn with veins, with veins showing, i.e. emaciated (: nimmaṃsa-lohitatāya sirājālehi vitthatagatta Pv-a 68) Vin iii.110; Ja iv.371 Ja v.69; Dhp 395 = Thag 243 = Pv ii.113; Pv iv.101; Dhp-a i.299, Dhp-a i.367; Dhp-a iv.157; Thag-a 80. So also in Jain Pk. “kisa dhamaṇisaṃtata”: Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; cp. Lal Vist. 226 ■ Also as ˚santhatagatta (adj.) having veins showing all over the body for lack of flesh Vin i.55 Vin iii.146; MN ii.121; Ja i.346, Ja ii.283; Thag-a 80.
Sk. dhamani, to dhamati, orig. a tube for blowing, a tubular vessel, pipe
(m. & rarely nt.) constitution etc. A. Definitions by Commentators: Bdhgh gives a fourfold meaning of the word dhamma (at DN-a i.99; Dhp-a i.22), viz. (1) guṇe (saddo), applied to good conduct (2) desanāyaṃ, to preaching & moral instruction (3) pariyattiyaṃ, to the 9 fold collection of the Buddh Scriptures (see navanga); (4) nissatte (-nijjīvate), to cosmic (non-animistic) law ■ No. 1 is referred to freq in expls of the term, e.g. dhammiko ti ñāyena samena pavattatī ti DN-a i.249; dhamman ti kāraṇaṃ ñāyaṃ Pv-a 211; as paṭipatti-dhamma at Vv-a 84; No. 3 e.g. also at Pv-a 2. Another and more adequate fourfold definition by Bdhgh is given in Dhs-a 38, viz. (1) pariyatti or doctrine as formulated, (2) hetu, or condition causal antecedent, (3) guṇa, or moral quality or action (4) nissatta-nijīvatā, or “the phenomenal” as opposed to “the substantial,” “the noumenal,” “animistic entity.” Here (2) is illustrated by hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā: “analytic knowledge in dhamma’s means insight into condition, causal antecedent Vibh 293, and see Niyama (dhamma˚). Since, in the former fourfold definition (2) and (3) really constitute but one main implication considered under the two aspects of Doctrine as taught and Doctrine as formulated we may interpret Dhamma by the fourfold connotation:-doctrine, right, or righteousness, condition phenomenon ■ For other exegetic definitions see the Coms & the Niddesa, e.g. Nd;1 94; for modern expls & analyses see e.g. Rhys Davids,; Buddh. India pp. 292–4; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism (1912) pp. 32 sq. 107 sq., 235 sq.; Dhs. trsl. xxxiii. sq.; and most recently the exhaustive monograph by M. & W. Geiger,; Pāli Dhamma. Abhandlungen der Bayer. Akademie xxxi..1; München 1920; which reached the editors too late to be made use of for the Dictionary.
B. Applications and Meaning.
1. Psychologically; “mentality” as the constitutive element of cognition & of its substratum, the world of phenomena. It is that which is presented as “object” to the imagination & as such has an effect of its own:-a presentation; (Vorstellung), or idea, idea, or purely mental phenomenon as distinguished from a psycho-physical phenomenon or sensation (re-action of sense-organ to sensestimulus). The mind deals with ideas as the eye deals with forms: it is the abstraction formed by mano, or mind proper, from the objects of sense presented by the sense-organ when reacting to external objects Thus cakkhu “faculty of sight” corresponds to rūpa “relation of form” & mano “faculty of thought (citta & ceto its organ or instrument or localisation corresponds to dhamma “mentalized” object or “idea” (Mrs. Rh. D. “mental object in general,” also “state of mind”)-(a) subjective: mental attitude thought, idea, philosophy, truth, & its recognition (anubodhi) by the Buddha, i.e. the Dhamma or worldwisdom = philosophy of the Buddha as contained expounded in the Dialogues of the 5 Nikāyas (see below C.)-;Note. The idea of dhamma as the interpreted Order of the World is carried further in the poetical quasi-personification of the Dh. with the phrase “dhammaja dh-nimmita dh-dāyāda” (born of the Norm, created by the Norm, heir of the Norm; see under cpds. and Dhammatā; also s. v. Niyama). That which the Buddha preached, the Dhamma κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν, was the order of law of the universe, immanent, eternal uncreated, not as interpreted by him only, much less invented or decreed by him, but intelligible to a mind of his range, and by him made so to mankind as bodhi revelation, awakening. The Buddha (like every great philosopher & other Buddhas preceding Gotama: ye pi te ahesuṃ atītaṃ addhānaṃ Arahanto Sammāsambuddhā te pi dhammaṃ yeva sakkatvā SN i.140) is a discoverer of this order of the Dhamma, this universal logic, philosophy or righteousness (“Norm”), in which the rational & the ethical elements are fused into one. Thus by recognition of the truth the knower becomes the incorporation of the knowable (or the sense of the universe = Dhamma) & therefore a perfect man one who is “truly enlightened” (sammā-sambuddha) so Bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhu-bhūto ñāṇa-bhūto dhamma˚ brahma˚ & in this possession of the truth he is not; like Brahmā, but Brahmā himself & the lord of the world as the “master of the Truth” vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā Amatassa dātā dhammassāmī SN iv.94; & similarly “yo kho Dhammaṃ passati so mam passati; yo mam passati so Dhammaṃ passati = he who sees the Buddha sees the Truth SN iii.120. Cp with this also the dhamma-cakka idea (see cpds.). On equation Dhamma = Brahman see esp. Geiger, Dhamma pp. 76
80, where is also discussed the formula Bhagavato putto etc. (with dhammaja for the brahmanic brahmaja) ■ In later (Abhidhamma) literature the (dogmatic) personification of Dhamma occurs. See e.g. Tikp A 366.
As 6th sense-object “dhamma” is the counterpart of “mano”: manasā dhammaṃ viññāya “apperceiving presentations with the mind” SN iv.185 etc. (see formula under rūpa); mano-viññeyyā dhammā SN iv.73 cp. SN iii.46; SN iv.3 sq.; SN v.74; DN iii.226, DN iii.245, DN iii.269. Ranged in the same category under the anupassanā-formula (q.v.) “dhammesu dhamm-ânupassin” realising the mentality of mental objects or ideas, e.g. DN ii.95, DN ii.100 DN ii.299; AN i.39, AN i.296; AN ii.256; AN iii.450; AN iv.301. Also as one of the 6 taṇhās “desire for ideas” DN iii.244, DN iii.280 ■ As spirituality opposed to materiality in contrast of dh. āmisa: Iti 98 (˚dāna: a mat. & a spir. gift) ■ (b); objective: substratum (of cognition), piece, constituent (= khandha), constitution; phenomenon, thing “world,” cosmic order (as the expression of cosmic sense, as under a & 2). Thus applied to the khandhas vedanādayo tayo kh. Dhp-a i.35 (see Khandha B 3); to rūpa vedanā saññā sankhārā viññāna SN iii.39; = sankhārā DN iii.58, DN iii.77, DN iii.141. Freq. in formula sabbe dhammā aniccā (+ dukkhā anattā: see nicca) “the whole of the visible world, all phenomena are evanescent etc.” SN iii.132 sq. & passim.; diṭṭhe [va] dhamme in the phenomenal world (opp. samparāyika dh. the world beyond): see under diṭṭha (S iv.175, 205 etc.) ■ ye dhammā hetuppabhavā tesaṃ hetuṃ Tathāgato āha “of all phenomena sprung from a cause the Buddha the cause hath told” Vin i.40 (cp. Isā Upanishad 14). lokadhammā things of this world (viz. gain, fame happiness etc., see under lābha) DN iii.260; Nd ii.55. uttari-manussa-dh˚ā transcendental, supernormal phenomena DN i.211, cp. DN iii.4; abbhuta-dh˚ā wonderful signs, portents Mil 8 (tayo acchariyā a. dh. pāturahesuṃ); Pv-a 2: hassa-khiḍḍhā-rati-dh ■ samāpanna endowed with the qualities or things of mirth, play enjoyment DN i.19; DN iii.31; gāma˚ things or doings of the village DN i.4 (cp. DN-a i.72).
2. Ratio-ethically-(a) objective: “rationality,” anything that is as it should be according to its reason & logicality (as expressed under No. 1 a), i.e. right property, sound condition, norm, propriety, constitution as conforming to No. 1 in universal application i. e; Natural or Cosmic Law: yattha nāmañ ca rūpaṃ ca asesam uparujjhati, taṃ te dhammaṃ idhâññāya acchiduṃ bhavabandhanaṃ (recognising this law) SN i.35 cittacetasikā dh˚ ā a term for the four mental khandhas, and gradually superseding them Dhs 1022 (cf. Compendium of Philosophy, 1); dasadhamma-vidū Vin i.38 (see dasa); with attha, nirutti and paṭibhāna one of the 4 Paṭisambhidās (branches of analytic knowledge AN ii.160; Pṭs i.84, 88 etc.; Vibh. 293 f., Points of Controversy, p. 380. In this sense freq ■ ˚ as adj.: being constituted, having the inherent quality (as based on Natural Law or the rational constitution of the Universe), destined to be…, of the (natural) property of…, like (cp. Gr ■ ειδής or E ■ able, as in change-able = liable to change, also E ■ hood,-ly & P-gata,-ṭhita), e.g. ; khaya -dhamma liable to decay (+ vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha˚), with ref. to the Sankhāras SN iv.216 sq.; in the Paṭiccasamuppāda SN ii.60; akkhaya imperishable Pv iv.152 (dānaṃ a-dh. atthu). cavana˚ destined to shift to another state of existence DN i.18 DN iii.31; Iti 76; Vv-a 54. jāti-jarā-maraṇa˚ under the law of birth, age, & death DN iii.57; AN i.147; AN iii.54; Pv-a 41 (sabbe sattā… ); bhedana˚; fragile (of kāya) DN i.76; SN i.71; Pv-a 41 (bhijjana˚ of sankhārā). vipariṇāma changeable AN i.258; AN iv.157; Pv-a 60 (+ anicca). a˚ unchanging DN iii.31 sq. samudaya˚ & nirodha˚;, in formula yaṃ kiñci s-dh˚ṃ sabban tan n-dh˚ṃ “anything that is destined to come into existence must also cease to exist” DN i.110, DN i.180; SN iv.47 & passim. Cp. further anāvatti˚ avinipāta˚ DN i.156; DN iii.107, DN iii.132; AN i.232 AN ii.89, AN ii.238; AN iv.12; anuppāda˚ DN iii.270 ■ (b) subjective: “morality,” right behaviour, righteousness practice, duty; maxim (cp. ṭhāna), constitution of character as conforming to No. 1 in social application i.e. Moral Law.-Often in pl.: tenets, convictions moral habits; & as; adj. that which is proper, that which forms the right idea; good, righteous, true; opp. adhamma false, unjust etc.; evil practice-(a) Righteousness etc.: SN i.86 (eko dh. one principle of conduct ii.280 (dh. isinaṃ dhajo: righteousness is the banner of the Wise); kusala dh. DN i.224; dhamme ṭhita righteous Vv 168; ñāti˚ duty against relatives Pv-a 30; deyya˚ dāna Pv-a 9, Pv-a 70; sad˚ faith (q.v.)-opp. adhamma unrighteousness, sin AN ii.19; AN v.73 sq.; DN iii.70 (˚rāga visama-lobha & micchā-dhamma); Pv iii.96 (˚ṃ anuvattisaṃ I practised wrong conduct) ■ In the same sense: dh. asuddho Vin i.5 = SN i.137 (pāturahosi Magadhesu pubbe dh. a.); pāpa˚ (adj.) of evil conduct Vin i.3; aṭṭhita˚ unrighteous DN iii.133; lobha˚ greedy quality DN i.224, DN i.230; methuna dh. fornication DN iii.133-(β) (pl.) Tenets, practices etc ■ (aa) good: kusalā dh. DN ii.223, DN ii.228; DN iii.49, DN iii.56, DN iii.82, DN iii.102 etc.; SN ii.206 sappurisa˚ AN v.245, AN v.279; Pv-a 114; samaṇa˚ Wanderer’s practice or observances Dhp-a ii.55. brāhmaṇakaraṇā DN i.244; yesaṃ dh˚ānaṃ Gotamo vaṇṇavādin DN i.206 cp. sīlaṃ samādhi paññā ca vimutti ca anuttarā: anubuddhā ime dhammā Gotamena yasassinā DN ii.123 dhammānaṃ sukusalo perfect in all (these) qualities DN i.180; samāhite citte dhammā pātubhavanti “with composed mind appear true views” SN iv.78; dhammesu patiṭṭhito SN i.185; ananussutesu dh˚esu cakkhuṃ udapādi “he visualized undiscovered ideas” SN ii.9. (bb) evil: āvaraṇīyā SN iv.104; pāpakā Vin i.8; DN i.70; AN i.202; akusalā DN iii.56, DN iii.57, DN iii.73, DN iii.91 etc.; lobha˚, dosa˚ moha˚ SN i.70 = Iti 45 = Nd ii.420; SN i.43; MN iii.40; dukkhavipākā vodanīyā saṃkilesikā ponobbhavikā DN i.195 DN iii.57 ■ (cc) various: gambhīrā duddasā etc. Vin i.4; DN i.12; SN i.136 ■ Cp. SN ii.15, SN ii.26; Nd ii.320; Iti 22, Iti 24; Pts i.5, Pts i.22, Pts i.28; Vb 105, Vb 228, Vb 293 sq. etc. etc ■ (γ) (adj. good, pious, virtuous etc.: adhammo nirayaṃ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiṃ “the sinners go to niraya, the good to heaven” Thag 304 = DN-a i.99 = Dhs-a 38; Dhp-a i.22. kalyāṇa˚ virtuous AN i.74, AN i.108; AN ii.81, AN ii.91 AN ii.224 sq.; Pv-a 13. Opp. pāpa˚ Vin iii.90; cp. above a.-(δ) (phrases). Very freq. used as adv. is the instr dhammena with justice, justly, rightly, fitly, properly Vin i.3; DN i.122; SN iv.331; Vv 3419 (= kāraṇena ñāyena vā Vv-a); Pv ii.930 (= yutten’ eva kāraṇena Pv-a 125 as just punishment); iv.169 (= anurūpakāraṇena Pv-a 286). Esp. in phrase of the cakkavattin, who rules the world according to justice: adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena anusāsati (or ajjhāvasati) DN i.89; DN ii.16; SN i.236 = Snp 1002; cp. Snp 554 (dhammena cakkaṃ vattemi, of the Buddha). Opp. adhammena unjustly unfitly, against the rule Vin iv.37; SN i.57; SN iv.331; DN-a i.236 ■ dhamme (loc.) honourably Ja ii.159. dhammaṃ carati to live righteously Pv ii.334; see also below C 3 & dh ■ cariyā.;
C. The Dhamma, i.e. moral philosophy, wisdom truth as propounded by Gotama Buddha in his discourses & conversations, collected by the compilers of the 5 Nikāyas (dhamma-vinayaṃ sangāyantehi dhammasangāhakehi ekato katvā Vv-a 3; cp. mayaṃ dh.˚ṃ ca vinayañ ca sangāyāma Vin ii.285), resting on the deeper meaning of dhamma as expld under B 1 a, & being in short the “doctrinal” portions of the Buddhist Tipiṭaka in contradiction to the Vinaya, the portion expounding the rules of the Order (see piṭaka). Dhamma as doctrine is also opposed to Abhidhamma “what follows on the Dhamma.”-(1) Dhamma and Vinaya, “wisdom & discipline,” as now found in the 2 great Piṭakas of the B. Scriptures, the Vinaya and SuttantaPiṭaka (but the expression “Piṭako” is later. See Piṭaka). Thus bhikkhū suttantikā vinaya-dharā dhamma kathikā, i.e. “the bhikkhus who know the Suttantas, remember the Vinaya & preach the Word of the Buddha” Vin ii.75 (≈i.169), cp. iv.67. Dhamma & Vinaya comb;d: yo ‘haṃ evaṃ svâkkhāte Dh-vinaye pabbajito SN i.119; bhikkhu na evarūpiṃ kathaṃ kattā hoti: na tvaṃ imaṃ Dh-v˚ṃ ājānāsi, ahaṃ imaṃ Dh-v˚ṃ ājānāmi etc. SN iii.12; imaṃ Dh-v˚ṃ na sakkomi vitthārena ācikkhituṃ SN i.9; samaṇā… imasmiṃ Dh-v˚e gādhanti SN iii.59 ■ Thus in var. cpds. (see below), as Dh-dhara (+ V-dh.) one who knows both by heart Dh-vādin (+ V-v.) one who can recite both, etc ■ See e.g. the foll. passages: Vin ii.285 (dh. ca v. ca pariyatta), 304; iii.19, 90; DN i.8, DN i.176, DN i.229; DN ii.124 (ayaṃ Dh. ayaṃ V. idaṃ Satthu-sāsanaṃ); DN iii.9, DN iii.12, DN iii.28, DN iii.118 sq. SN i.9, SN i.119, SN i.157; SN ii.21, SN ii.50, (dh-vinaye assāsa); AN iii.297 (id.); SN ii.120; SN iii.91; SN iv.43 sq., 260; AN i.34, AN i.121, AN i.185 AN i.266; AN ii.2, AN ii.26, AN ii.117, AN ii.168; AN iii.8, AN iii.168 sq.; AN iv.36, AN iv.200 sq.v.144, 163, 192; Iti 112; Snp p.102; Ud 50. 2. Dhamma, Buddha, Sangha. On the principle expld in Note on B 1 a rests the separation of the personality of the teacher from that which he taught (the “Doctrine,” the “Word,” the Wisdom or Truth, cp Dhamma-kāyo Tathāgatassa adhivacanaṃ DN iii.84) A person becoming a follower of the B. would conform to his teaching (Dh.) & to the community (“Church” Sangha) by whom his teaching was handed down. The formula of Initiation or membership is therefore threefold, viz. Buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ upemi (gacchāmi), Dhp ˚ṃ…, Sanghaṃ… i.e. I put myself into the shelter of the B., the Dh. & the S. (see further ref. under Sangha) SN i.34 (Buddhe pasannā Dhamme ca Sanghe tibbagāravā: ete sagge pakāsenti yattha te upapajjare i.e. those who adore the B. & his Church will shine in Heaven); DN ii.152 sq., 202 sq., 352; SN iv.270 sq (˚saraṇagamana); Dhp-a i.206; Pv-a 1 (vande taṃ uttamaṃ Dhp ˚ṃ, B ˚ṃ, S ˚ṃ). Cp. Satthari, Dhamme Sanghe kankhati, as 3 of the ceto-khilā AN iii.248≈
3. Character of the Dhamma in var. attributes, general phraseology ■ The praise of the Dh. is expressed in many phrases, of which only a few of the more frequent can be mentioned here. Among the most famous is that of “dhammaṃ deseti ādi- kalyāṇaṃ majjhe-k˚ pariyosāna-k˚, etc. “beautiful in the beginning, beautiful in the middle & beautiful in the end,” e.g. DN i.62; SN i.105; SN iv.315; AN ii.147, AN ii.208; AN iii.113 sq., 135, 262; DN iii.96, DN iii.267; Nd ii.316; Iti 79; Vv-a 87. It is welcome as a friend, beautifully told, & its blessings are immediate:; sv’ akkhāta, sandiṭṭhika, akālika, ehipassika etc. DN ii.93; DN iii.5, DN iii.39, DN iii.45, DN iii.102; SN i.9, SN i.117; SN ii.199; SN iv.271; AN iii.285 etc. It is mahā -dh. SN iv.128; ariya˚; SN i.30; AN v.241, AN v.274; Snp 783; sammā˚; SN i.129. It is likened to a splendid palace on a mountain-top Vin i.5 = Iti 33 or to a quiet lake with sīla as its banks SN i.169 = SN i.183 and it is above age & decay: satan ca dhammo na jaram upeti SN i.71. Whoever worships the Dh. finds in this worship the highest gratification: diyo loke sako putto piyo loke sako pati, tato piyatarā… dhammassa magganā SN i.210; ye keci ariyadhamme khantiyā upetā… devakāyaṃ paripūressanti SN i.30. Dhp ˚ṃ garukaroti DN iii.84. Opp. Dhamme agārava AN iii.247 AN iii.340; AN iv.84: the slanderers of the Dh. receive the worst punishment after death SN i.30 (upenti Roruvaṃ ghoraṃ)-Var. phrases: to find the truth (i.e. to realize intuitively the Dh.) = dh˚ṃ anubodhati DN ii.113; SN i.137, or vindati DN i.110, DN i.148. To expound the Dh., teach the truth, talk about problems of ethics & philosophy dh˚ṃ deseti Vin iv.134; SN i.210 etc.; katheti Pv-a 41 bhāsati Vin i.101; bhaṇati Vin i.169; pakāseti SN ii.28 SN iv.121. To hear the Dh., to listen to such an exposition: dh˚ṃ suṇāti SN i.114, SN i.137, SN i.196, SN i.210; AN i.36; AN iii.163; Dhp-a iii.81, Dhp-a iii.113. To attain full knowledge of it: dh ˚ṃ pariyāpuṇāti AN ii.103, AN ii.185; AN iii.86, cp. 177 & ˚pariyatti To remember the Dh.: dhāreti AN iii.176 (for details of the 5 stages of the Dh ■ accomplishment); to ponder over the Dh., to study it: dh ˚ṃ viciṇāti SN i.34 = SN i.55, SN i.214; AN iv.3 sq. To enter a relation of discipleship with the Dh.: dh ˚ṃ saraṇaṃ gacchati (see above 2) Pv iv.348 dhammaṃ saraṇatthaṃ upehi Vv 532 (cp. Vv-a 232). See further Pts i.34, Pts i.78, Pts i.131; Pts ii.159 sq.; Pp 58, Pp 66 Vb 293 sq., 329; Ne 11, Ne 15, Ne 31, Ne 83, Ne 112; & cp. cpds
4.; Dhamma and anudhamma. Childers interprets anudhamma with “lesser or inferior dhamma,” but the general purport of the Nikāya passages seems to be something like “in conformity with, in logical sequence to the dhamma” i.e. lawfulness, righteousness, reasonableness, truth (see KS ii.202; Geiger, Pāli Dhamma pp. 115
118). It occurs (always with Dh.) in the foll contexts: dhammassa c’ ânudh ˚ṃ vyākaroti “to explain according to the truth of the Dhamma” DN i.161 DN iii.115; Ud 50; dhammassa hoti anudhammacārin “walking in perfect conformity to the Dh.” AN ii.8 dh ■ anudh ˚ṃ ācaranti id. DN iii.154; dh ■ anudh˚ paṭipanna “one who has reached the complete righteousness of the Dh.” DN ii.224; DN iii.119; SN iii.40 sq.; Iti 81; AN iii.176 (where it forms the highest stage of the Dhammaknowledge viz. (1) dh ˚ṃ suṇāti; (2) pariyāpuṇāti (3) dhāreti; (4) atthaṃ upaparikkhati; (5) dh-anudh ˚ṃ paṭipajjati). Further in series bahussuta, dhammadhara dh-anudh˚-paṭipanna DN ii.104; SN v.261; AN ii.8; Ud 63; also in dhamma-kathika, dh-anudh˚-paṭi panna, diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna-patta SN ii.18 = SN ii.114 SN iii.163; & in atthaṃ aññāya, dhammaṃ aññāya, dhanudh˚-paṭipanna AN i.36; AN ii.97.
-akkhāna discussing or preaching of the Dhamma Nd i.91; -atthadesanā interpretation of the Dh. Mil 21 -ādhikaraṇa a point in the Dh. SN iv.63 = SN v.346; -ādhipa Lord of righteousness (+ anudhamma-cārin) AN i.150 cp. ˚ssāmi; nt. abstr. ˚ādhipateyya the dominating influence of the Dh. AN i.147 sq.; DN iii.220; Mil 94 Vism 14. -ānudhamma see above C 4; -anuvattin acting in conformity with the moral law Dhp 86, cp Dhp-a ii.161; -ānusārin of righteous living DN iii.105, DN iii.254 (+ saddhā˚); MN i.226, MN i.479; AN i.74; AN iv.215; AN iv.23; SN v.200; Pp 15; Ne 112, Ne 189; -anvaya main drift of the faith, general conclusions of the Dh., DN ii.83 DN iii.100; MN ii.120; -abhisamaya understanding of the Truth, conversion to the Dhamma [cp. dharmâbhisamaya Divy 200] SN ii.134 (+ dh ■ cakkhu-paṭilābha) Pp 41; Mil 20; Dhp-a i.27; Dhp-a iv.64; Pv-a 31 etc. -āmata the nectar of righteousness or the Dh. Mil 22 (˚meghena lokaṃ abhitappayanto), 346; -ādāsa the mirror of the Dhamma DN ii.93 (name of an aphorism SN v.357 (id.); Thag 395; Thag-a 179; -āyatana the field of objects of ideation SN ii.72; Dhs 58, Dhs 66, Dhs 147, Dhs 397, Dhs 572 Dhs 594; Vb 70, Vb 72 sq.; -ārammaṇa: dh. as an object of ideation Dhs 146, Dhs 157, Dhs 365; cp. Dhs. trsl. 2; -ārāma “one who has the Dh. as his pleasure-ground,” one who rejoices in the Dh. AN iii.431; Iti 82 (+ dh-rata); Snp 327; Dhp 364, cp. Dhp-a iv.95; -ālapana using the proper address, a fit mode of addressing a person as followed by the right custom. See Dial. i.193
196; Ja v.418 -āsana “the Dh-seat,” i.e. flat piece of stone or a mat on which a priest sat while preaching Ja i.53; Dhp-a ii.31 -ūposatha the fast day prescribed by the Dh. AN i.208 -okkā the torch of Righteousness Ja i.34; -oja the essence or sap of the Dh. SN v.162; Dhp-a iv.169; -osadha the medicine of the Dh. Mil 110, Mil 335. -kathā ethical discussion, fit utterance, conversation about the Dh. advice DN iii.151; Ja i.217; Vv-a 6; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 66; -kathika (adj.) one who converses about ethical problems, one who recites or preaches the Dh., one who speaks fitly or properly. Often in combn. with Vinaya-dhara “one who masters (knows by heart) the Vinaya,” & bahussuta “one who has a wide knowledge of tradition” Vin iv.10, Vin iv.13, Vin iv.141; AN iii.78; Dhp-a ii.30; also with suttantika “one who is versed in the Suttantas” Vin i.169; Vin ii.75; Vin iv.67. The ability to preach the Dhp is the first condition of one who wishes to become perfected in righteousness (see dhamm-ânudhamma, above C 4): SN ii.18, SN ii.114 = SN iii.163; MN iii.40 ■ AN i.25 sq. AN ii.138; Pp 42; Ja i.217; Ja iv.2 (˚thera). Cp. also Avs ii.81; -kathikatta (nt.) speaking about the Dh.; preaching MN iii.40; AN i.38 (+ vinayadhara-katta); -kamma a legally valid act, or procedure in accordance with the Rules of the Order Vin iv.37, Vin iv.136, Vin iv.232; AN i.74 (+ vinaya˚); a˚ an illegal act Vin iv.232; AN i.74 -karaka a proper or regulation (standard) water-pot i.e. a pot with a filter for straining water as it was used by ascetics Vin ii.118, Vin ii.177, Vin ii.301; Ja i.395; Ja vi.331; Dhp-a iii.290, Dhp-a iii.452; Vv-a 220 (not ˚karaṇena); Pv-a 185; Mil 68; -kāma a lover of the Dh. DN iii.267; AN v.24, AN v.27 AN v.90, AN v.201; Snp 92. -kāya having a body according to the Norm (the dhammatā of bodies). See Bdhgh as translated in Dial. iii. ad loc.; having a normal body (sic Bdhgh, esp. of the B. DN iii.84; -ketu the standard of the Dh., or Dh. as standard AN i.109 = AN iii.149; -khan- dha the (4) main portions or articles of the Dh. (sīla samādhi, paññā, vimutti) DN iii.229; cp. Sp. Avs ii.155; -gaṇa a body of followers of the Dh. Pv-a 194 -gaṇḍikā (better gaṇṭhikā, q v.) a block of justice, i.e. of execution Ja i.150, Ja i.151; Ja ii.124; Ja vi.176; Ja v.303; -garu worshipping the Dh. SN iv.123; Dhp-a i.17 (˚ka); -gariya a kind of acrobatic tumbler, lit. excellent t. (+ brahma˚ Mil 191; -gu one who knows the Dh. (analogous to vedagu) Ja v.222; Ja vi.261; -gutta protecting the Dh. or protected by the Dh. (see gutta) SN i.222; Ja v.222 (+ dhpāla); -ghosaka (-kamma) praise of the Dh. Dhp-a iii.81 -cakka the perfection or supreme harmony of righteousness (see details under cakka), always in phrase dhcakkaṃ pavatteti (of the Buddha) “to proclaim or inaugurate the perfect state or ideal of universal righteousness” Vin i.8 = MN i.171; Vin i.11; SN i.191 SN iii.86; Snp 556, Snp 693; Mil 20, Mil 343; Dhp-a i.4; Vv-a 165; Pv-a 2, Pv-a 67 etc.; besides this also in simile at SN i.33 of the car of righteousness; -cakkhu “the eye of wisdom, perception of the law of change. Freq. in the standing formula at the end of a conversation with the Buddha which leads to the “opening of the eyes” or conversion of the interlocutor, viz. “virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhcakkhuṃ udapādi” DN i.86, DN i.110; DN ii.288; SN iv.47; AN iv.186; Vin i.11, Vin i.16, Vin i.40 etc. Expl. at DN-a i.237 dhammesu vā cakkhuṃ dhammamayaṃ vā cakkhuṃ Cp. SN ii.134 (˚paṭiĺābha; + dhammâbhisamaya); Dial. i.184; ii.176; -cariyā walking in righteousness, righteous living, observance of the Dh., piety (= dānādi-puññapaṭipatti Vv-a 282) SN i.101 (+ samacariyā kusalakiriyā); AN ii.5; AN iii.448; AN v.87, AN v.302; Snp 263 (= kāyasucaritâdi˚ Snp-a 309), 274 (+ brahma˚). a˚ evil way of living AN i.55 (+ visama-cariyā); -cārin virtuous, dutiful MN i.289; MN ii.188; Dhp 168; Mil 19 (+ samacārin) -cetiya a memorial in honour of the Dh. MN ii.124 -chanda virtuous desire (opp. kāma˚) Dhs-a 370; Vb 208; -ja born of the Dh. (see above, Note on B 1 a), in formula “Bhagavato putto oraso dh-jo, dh-nimmito dh.dāyādo” (the spiritual child of the Buddha) DN iii.84 = SN ii.221; Iti 101; -jāla “net of the Dh.,” name of a discourse (cp. ˚ādāsa & pariyāya) DN i.46; -jīvin living righteously Iti 108; Dhp 24 (= dhammenā samena Dhp-a i.239); -ññū one who knows the Dh. Ja vi.261 -ṭṭha standing in the Law, just, righteous SN i.33 (+ sīlasampanna); Snp 749; Ja iii.334; Ja iv.211; Thag-a 244 -ṭṭhita = ˚ṭṭha DN i.190; -ṭṭhiti˚; having a footing in the Dh. SN ii.60, SN ii.124, cp. ˚ṭṭhitatā: establishing of causes and effects SN ii.25; -takka right reasoning Snp 1107 (= sammāsankappa Nd ii.318); -dāna gift of; -dāyāda heir of the Dh.; spiritual heir (cp. above note on B 1 a) DN iii.84; SN ii.221; MN i.12; MN iii.29; Iti 101; -dīpa the firm ground or footing of the Dh. (usually combd with atta-dīpa: having oneself as one’s refuge, self-dependent) DN ii.100; DN iii.58 DN iii.77; SN v.154; -desanā moral instruction, exposition of the Dh. Vin i.16; DN i.110 etc. (see desanā); -dessin a hater of the Dh. Snp 92; -dhaja the banner of the Dh. AN i.109 AN iii.149; Nd ii.503; Mil 21; -dhara (adj.) one who knows the Dh. (by heart); see above C 4. Combd w. Vinayadhara Vin i.127, Vin i.337; Vin ii.8; AN i.117, & bahussuta (ibid) Snp 58 (cp. Snp-a 110) ■ See also AN iii.361 sq., AN iv.310 Nd ii.319; -dhātu the mental object considered as irreducible element Dhs 58, Dhs 67, Dhs 147 etc.; Vb 87, Vb 89 (see above B 1); an ultimate principle of the Dh., the cosmic law DN ii.8; MN i.396; SN ii.143 sq.; Ne 64 sq.; Vism 486 sq. -dhāraṇa knowledge of the Dh. MN ii.175 -nāṭaka a class of dancing girls having a certain duty Ja v.279; -nimmita see ˚ja; -niyāma belonging to the order of the Norm DN i.190; DA on DN ii.12: dhammatā (˚ka); -niyāmatā, certainty, or orderliness of causes and effects SN ii.25; Points of Controversy, 387; -netti niyāma Mil 328; DN-a i.31; cp. Sk. dharmanetrī Mvu ii.357; Mvu iii.234, Mvu iii.238; -pajjota the lamp of the Dh. Mil 21; -pada (nt.) a line or stanza of the Dhamma a sentence containing an ethical aphorism; a portion or piece of the Dh. In the latter meaning given as 4 main subjects, viz. anabhijjhā, avyāpāda, sammā-sati sammā-samādhi DN iii.229; AN ii.29 sq. (in detail) Ne 170 ■ SN i.22 (dānā ca kho dh-padaṃ va seyyo) 202 (dh-padesu chando); AN ii.185; Snp 88 (dh-pade sudesite = nibbāna-dhammassa padattā Snp-a 164) Ja iii.472 (= nibbāna); Dhp-a iii.190 (ekaṃ dh-padaṃ) As Np. title of a canonical book, included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -pamāṇa measuring by the (teaching of Dh. Pp 53; Dhp-a iii.114 (˚ikāni jātisatāni); -pariyatti attainment of or accomplishment in the Dh., the collection of the Dh. in general AN iii.86 (w. ref. to the 9 angas see navanga); -pariyāya a short discourse, or a verse or a poem, with a moral or a text; usually an exposition of a single point of doctrine DN i.46; DN ii.93; DN iii.116; MN i.445; Vin i.40 (a single verse); AN i.65; AN iv.63 (a poem Snp 190
218, where also it is called a dh˚pariyāyo) AN v.288, AN v.291. Such a dh˚pariyāya had very often a special name. Thus Brahmajāla, the Wondrous Net DN i.46; Dhammādāso dh˚p˚, the Mirror of the Law DN ii.93 = SN v.357; Sokasallaharaṇa, Sorrow’s dart extractor AN iii.62; Ādittap˚ dh˚p˚, the Red-hot lancet SN iv.168; Lomahaṃsana˚ MN i.83; Dhammatā-dhamma Mil 193, etc. -pāla guardian of the Law or the Dhp Ja v.222, freq. also as Np.; -pīti (-rasa) the sweetness of drinking in the Dh. (pivaṃ) Snp 257; Dhp 79 (= dhammapāyako dhammaṃ pivanto ti attho Dhs-a ii.126) -bhaṇḍāgārika treasurer of the Dh., an Ep. of Ānanda Thag 1048; Ja i.382, Ja i.501; Ja ii.25; Dhp-a iii.250; Pv-a 2 -bhūta having become the Dh.; righteousness incorporated said of the Buddhas DN iii.84. Usually in phrase (Bhagavā) cakkhu-bhūta… dh-bhūta brahmabhūta AN v.226 sq. (cp. cakkhu); Thag 491; see also above, note B 1 a; -bheri the drum of the Dh. Mil 21 -magga the path of righteousness Snp 696; Mil 21 -maya made (built) of the Dh. (pāsāda) SN i.137; -yanta the (sugar-) mill of the Dh. (fig.) Mil 166. -yāna the vehicle of the Law (the eightfold Noble Path) SN v.5 -rakkhita rightly guarded Snp 288; -rata fond of the Law Snp 327; Dhp 364; Dhp-a iv.95; cp. dh ■ [gatā]rati Th i.742; Dhp. 354; -rasa taste of Dhp. 354; -rājā king of righteousness, Ep. of the Buddha SN i.33 = SN i.55; DN i.88 (of a cakkavatti); AN i.109; AN iii.149; Snp 554; Ja i.262 interpreted by Bdhgh at DN-a i.249 as “dhammena rajjaṃ labhitvā rājā jāto ti” = a king who gained the throne legitimately; -laddha one who has acquired the Dh., holy, pious SN ii.21; Ja iii.472; justly acquired (bhogā) Snp p.87; -vara the best of truths or the most excellent Doctrine Snp 233, Snp 234; -vādin speaking properly speaking the truth or according to the Doctrine Vin ii.285; Vin iii.175 (+ Vinaya-vādin); DN iii.135 (id.) DN i.4, DN i.95 (of Gotama; DN-a i.76: nava-lokuttara-dhamma sannissitaṃ katvā vadati); SN iv.252; AN i.75; AN ii.209 -vicaya investigation of doctrine, religious research Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 90, Dhs 309, Dhs 333, Dhs 555; Vb 106; Vism 132 -vitakka righteous thought AN i.254; -vidū one who understands the Dh., an expert in the Dh. Ja v.222 Ja vi.261; -vinicchaya righteous decision, discrimination of the truth Snp 327; Dhp 144; Dhp-a iii.86; -vihārin living according to the Dh. AN iii.86 sq.; -saṃvibhāga sharing out or distribution of the Dh., i.e. spiritual gifts Iti 98 (opp. āmisa˚ material gifts); -saṅgāhaka a compiler of the sacred scriptures, a διασκευαστής Vv-a 3, Vv-a 169 -saññā righteous thought, faith, piety Pv-a 3; -sabhā a hall for the discussion of the Dh., a chapel, meetinghouse Ja vi.333; Dhp-a i.31; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iv.91; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 196 -samaya a meeting where the Dh. is preached SN i.26 -samādāna acquisition of the Dh., which is fourfold as discussed at MN i.305; DN iii.229; -saraṇa relying on or putting one’s faith in the Dh. (see above C 3) DN iii.58 DN iii.77; SN v.154; -savana hearing the preaching of the Dh. “going to church” Vin i.101; MN ii.175; AN ii.248, AN ii.381 AN iv.361; Snp 265; Dhp-a iii.190; -sākaccha conversation about the Dh. Snp 266; -ssāmi Lord of the Truth, Ep. of the Buddha (see above B 1 a note) SN iv.94; -sāra the essence of the Dh. SN v.402; -sārathi in purisa-dh ■ s˚ at DN i.62 misprint for purisa-damma-s˚; -sārin a follower of the Dh. SN i.170; -sudhammatā excellency of the Dhp SN ii.199; Thag 24, Thag 220, Thag 270, Thag 286; -senāpati “captain of the Dhamma,” Ep. of Sāriputta Thag 1083; Ja i.408; Mil 343; Dhp-a iii.305; Vv-a 64, Vv-a 65, Vv-a 158; -soṇḍatā thirst after justice Ja v.482; -sota the ear of the Dh. SN ii.43.
Ved. dharma & dharman, the latter a formation like karman (see kamma for expl;n of subj. & obj. meanings); dhṛ; (see dhāreti) to hold support: that which forms a foundation and upholds constitution. Cp. Gr. χρόνος, Lat. firmus & fretus Lith. derme (treaty), cp. also Sk. dhariman form, constitution perhaps = Lat. forma, E. form
(adj.) only in f. -ī in combn with kathā: relating to the Dhamma, viz conversation on questions of Ethics, speaking about the Dh., preaching, religious discourse, sermon. Either as dhammī kathā Vin ii.161; Vin iv.56 & in instr ■ abl dhammiyā kathāya (sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti saṃpahaṃseti: ster. formula) SN i.114, SN i.155, SN i.210, SN iv.122; Pv-a 30 etc.; or as cpd. dhammī-kathā DN ii.1; MN i.161; Snp 325; & dhammi-kathā SN i.155; Pv-a 38.
Sk. *dhārma, cp. dhammika
(adj.) having a bow: see daḷha˚; also as dhammin in daḷha˚ SN i.185 (see dhammin).
Sk. dhanvan
(f.) conformity to the Dhammaniyāma (see niyāma), fitness, propriety; a general rule higher law, cosmic law, general practice, regular phenomenon usual habit; often used in the sense of a finite verb: it is a rule, it is proper, one should expect SN i.140 (Buddhānaṃ dh. the law of the B.’s i.e. as one is wont to expect of the B.s), 215 (su˚); iv.216 sq. (khaya˚ etc.) DN ii.12; AN ii.36 (kusala˚); AN v.46; Thag 712; Ja i.245 Ja ii.128; Ne 21, Ne 50, cp. Mil 179; Pv-a 19; Vv-a 7. See also Avs Index.
Sk. dharmitā
liability to be judged Vin ii.55 (& a˚).;
Sk. *dharmatvaṃ
only found in SN i.103, where the Comy. takes it as a locative, and gives, as the equivalent, “in a forest on dry land” (araññe thale). Cp. Kindred Sayings i.129, n. 2.
(adj.) lawful, according to the Dh. or the rule; proper, fit, right permitted, legitimate, justified; righteous, honourable of good character, just, esp. an attr. of a righteous King (rājā cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā) DN i.86; DN ii.16; AN i.109 = AN iii.149; Ja i.262, Ja i.263; def. by Bdhgh as “dhammaṃ caratī ti dh.” (DN-a i.237) & “dhammena caratī ti dh., ñāyena samena pavattalī ti” (ib. 249). Vin iv.284; DN i.103; SN ii.280 (dhammikā kathā) SN iii.240 (āhāra); iv.203 (dhammikā devā, adh˚ asurā) AN i.75; AN iii.277; Snp 404; Dhp-a ii.86 (dohaḷa); iv.185 (˚lābha); Pv-a 25 (= suddha, manohara). Also as saha-dh˚; (esp. in conn. w. pañha, a justified, reasonable proper question: DN i.94; SN iv.299 in detail) Vin iv.141; DN i.161; DN iii.115; AN i.174 ■ a˚; unjust, illegal etc. Vin iv.285; SN iv.203; AN iii.243.
= Sk. dharmya, cp. dhammiya
(adj.) only-˚: having the nature or quality of, liable to, consisting in, practising, acting like, etc. (as ˚dhamma B 2 a), viz. uppāda-vaya˚ DN ii.157; maraṇa˚ (= maraṇadhamma) AN i.147; pāpa Pv i.117 of evil nature.
Sk. dharmin
(-˚) only in daḷha-dh˚; which is customarily taken as a dern from dhanu, bow = having a strong bow (see dhamma3); although some passages admit interpretation as “of strong character or good practice, e.g. SN i.185.
(adj.) in accordance with the Dhamma Pv-a 242 (also a˚; ); Vism 306 (˚lābha).
Sk. dharmya; cp. dhammika
the braided hair of women Dāvs iv.9.
Sk. dhammilla
in ˚kathā see dhamma2.
to suck: see dhātī. Caus. dhāpayati, pp. dhāta (q.v.).
(usually -˚, except at Mil 420) (adj.) bearing, wearing, keeping; holding in mind, knowing by heart. Freq. in phrase dhammadhara (knowing the Dhamma, q.v.), vinaya˚, mātikā e.g. DN ii.125. dhamma˚ also Snp 58; Thag 187; Nd ii.319; vinaya˚ Mil 344; jaṭājina˚ Snp 1010. See also dhāra.
Sk. dhara, to dhr see dharati
(adj.) bearing, holding, comprising Vv-a 104 (suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa˚ nikkha holding, i.e. worth or equal to 15 parts of gold) ■ f. -ī bearing, i.e. pregnant with Snp 26 (of cows: godharaṇiyo paveniyo = gabbhiniyo Snp-a 39). As n. the Earth Ja v.311; Ja vi.526; Mil 34; dharaṇī-ruha Name of a tree Ja vi.482, Ja vi.497; Mil 376.
to hold, bear, carry, wear; to hold up, support; to bear in mind, know by heart; to hold out, endure, last continue, live Snp 385 (take to heart, remember); Dhp-a ii.68 ■ ppr. dharamāṇa living, lasting Ja i.75 (dh˚e yeva suriye while the sun was still up); Ja ii.6; Mil 240 Mil 291 (Bhagavato dh˚-kāle) ■ grd. dhareyya, in dh˚divasa the day when a young girl is to be carried (into the house of her husband) Thag-a, 25; cp. dhāreyya Thig 472 = vivāha Thag-a 285 ■ pp. dhata (q.v.)-Caus dhāreti (q.v.).
Sk. dharati, dhṛ; as in Gr. χρόνος; Lat. firmus & fretus. See also daḷha, dhata, dhamma, dhiti, dhuva
the shrub Grislea Tomentosa AN i.202, AN i.204; Ja iv.209; Ja vi.528.
Sk. dhava = madhuratvaca, Halāyudha
a husband Thag-a 121 (dh. vuccati sāmiko tad abhāvā vidhavā matapatikā ti attho).
Sk. dhava, a newly formed word after vidhava, widow, q.v.
(adj.) white, dazzling white Vv-a 252; Dāvs ii.123 Dāvs v.26.
Sk. dhavala, to dhavati, see dhāvati & dhovati
(f.) whiteness Vv-a 197.
fed, satiated; satisfied, appeased Vin i.222; Ja i.185; Ja ii.247, Ja ii.446; Ja v.73; Ja vi.555; Pv i.118 (so read for dāta) = Pv-a 59 (: suhita titta); Mil 238, Mil 249 ■ f abstr. dhātatā satiation, fulness, satisfaction, in ati Ja ii.293.
Sk. *dhāyita of dhayati to suck, nourish, pp. dhīta
upholder Ja v.225.
n. ag. fr. dhṛ;
(f.) wet nurse, fostermother DN ii.19; MN i.395 MN ii.97; Ja i.57; Ja iii.391; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 176. In cpds. dhāti˚; viz. -cela swaddling cloth, baby’s napkin SN i.205; Ja iii.309.
Sk. dhātrī = Gr. τιχήνη wet nurse, to dhayati suck, suckle; Idg. *dhēi as in Gr. χ ̈ησχαι to milk, χ ̈ηλυς feeding χηλή female breast; cp. Lat. felare, femina (“giving suck”), filius (“suckling”); Oir. dīnu lamb; Goth daddjan; Ohg. tila breast. See also dadhi, dhītā dhenu
(f.) element. Closely related to dhamma in meaning B 1b, only implying a closer relation to physical substance. As to its gen. connotation cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 198.
1. a primary element, of which the usual set comprises the four paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth water, fire, wind), otherwise termed cattāro mahābhūtā(ni): DN i.215; DN ii.294; DN iii.228; SN i.15; SN ii.169 sq. 224; iv.175, 195; AN ii.165; AN iii.243; Vb 14, Vb 72; Ne 73. See discussed at Cpd. 254 sq ■ A defn of dhātu is to be found at Vism 485 ■ Singly or in other combns paṭhavī˚ SN ii.174; tejo˚ SN i.144; DN iii.227; the four plus ākāsa SN iii.227, plus viññāna SN ii.248; SN iii.231; see below 2 b.
2. (a) natural condition, property, disposition; factor, item, principle, form. In this meaning in var. combns & applications, esp. closely related to khandha. Thus mentioned with; khandha & āyatana; (sensory element & element of sense-perception) as bodily or physical element, factor (see khandha B 1 d & cp. Nd;2 under dhātu) Thig 472. As such (physical substratum) it constitutes one of the lokā or forms of being (khandha˚ dhātu˚ āyatana˚ Nd ii.550). Freq also in combn kāma-dhātu, rūpa˚ arūpa˚ “the elements or properties of k. etc.” as preceding & conditioning bhava in the respective category (Nd;2 s. v.). See under d ■ As “set of conditions or state of being (-˚) in the foll.: loka˚; a world, of which 10 are usually mentioned (equalling 10,000: Pv-a 138) SN i.26; SN v.424; Pv ii.961; Vb 336; Pv-a 138; KS ii.101, n. 1;- nibbāna˚; the state of N. SN v.8; AN ii.120; AN iv.202; Ja i.55; Iti 38 (dve: see under Nibbāna); Mil 312. Also in the foll. connections: amata˚ Iti 62; bhū˚ the verbal root bhū DN-a i.229; ṭhapitāya dhātuyā “while the bodily element, i.e. vitality lasts” Mil 125; vaṇṇa˚ form beauty SN i.131; Pv i.31. In these cases it is so far weakened in meaning, that it simply corresponds to E abstr. suffix-hood or-ity (cp. ˚hood = origin. “form” see ketu), so perhaps in Nibbāna˚ = Nibbāna-dom. Cp dhātuka ■ (b) elements in sense-consciousness: referring to the 6 ajjhattikāni & 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni SN ii.140 sq. Of these sep. sota˚ DN i.79; DN iii.38; Vb 334 dibbasota˚ SN ii.121, SN ii.212; SN v.265, SN v.304; AN i.255; AN iii.17 AN iii.280; AN v.199; cakkhu˚ Vb 71 sq.; mano˚ Vb 175, Vb 182 Vb 301; mano-viññāṇa˚ Vb 87, Vb 89, Vb 175, Vb 182 sq. (c) various: aneka˚ AN i.22; AN iii.325; AN v.33; akusala˚ Vb 363; avijjā˚ SN ii.132; ābhā˚ SN ii.150; ārambha˚ SN v.66 SN v.104 sq.; AN i.4; AN ii.338; ṭhiti˚ SN ii.175; SN iii.231; AN iii.338 dhamma˚ SN ii.56; nekkhamma˚ SN ii.151; AN iii.447 nissāraṇiyā dhātuyo (5) DN iii.239; AN iii.245, AN iii.290. See further SN i.134, SN i.196; SN ii.153, SN ii.248 (aniccā); SN iii.231 (nirodha); iv.67; AN i.176; AN ii.164; AN iv.385; Dhs 58, Dhs 67, Dhs 121 Ne 57, Ne 64 sq.; Thag-a 20, Thag-a 49, Thag-a 285,-(d) Different sets and enumerations: as 3 under kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa AN i.223 AN iii.447; Pts i.137; Vb 86, Vb 363, Vb 404 sq.; under rūpa˚ arūpa˚, nirodha˚ Iti 45 ■ as 6 (pathavī etc. + ākāsa & viññāṇa˚): DN iii.247; AN i.175 sq.; MN iii.31, MN iii.62, MN iii.240; Pts i.136; Vb 82 sq ■ as 7 (ābhā subha etc.): SN ii.150
18: Pts i.101, Pts i.137; Pts ii.230, Dhs 1333; Vb 87 sq. 401 sq.; Vism 484 sq.
3. a humour or affection of the body DN-a i.253 (dhātusamatā).
4. the remains of the body after cremation Pv-a 76; a relic Vv-a 165 (sarīra˚, bodily relic); Dāvs v.3 (dasana˚ the toothrelic) ■ abl. dhātuso according to one’s nature SN ii.154 sq. (sattā sattehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti etc.) Iti 70 (id.); SN iii.65.
-kathā Name of 3rd book of the Abhidhamma Vism 96 -kucchi womb Mil 176; -kusala skilled in the elements MN iii.62; ˚kusalatā proficiency in the (18) elements DN iii.212; Dhs 1333; -ghara “house for a relic,” a dagoba Snp-a 194. -cetiya a shrine over a relic Dhp-a iii.29; -nānatta diversity of specific experience DN iii.289; SN ii.143; SN iv.113 sq., 284; -vibhāga distribution of relics Vv-a 297; Pv-a 212.
Sk. dhātu to dadhāti, Idg. *dhé, cp. Gr. τίχημι, ἀνά χημα, Sk. dhāman, dhāṭr (= Lat. conditor); Goth gadēds; Ohg. tāt, tuom (in meaning-˚ = dhātu, cp. E serf-dom “condition of… ”) tuon = E. to do; & with k-suffix Lat. facio, Gr. (ε ̓́)χηκ(α), Sk. dhāka; see also dhamma
(adj.) (only-˚) having the nature, by nature, affected with,-like (cp. ˚dhamma B 2a); often simply first part of cpd. (cp. E. friend-like = friendly = friend Ja i.438 (kiliṭṭha˚ miserable), Ja ii.31 (sama˚), 63 (badhira deaf), 102 (paṇḍuroga˚ having jaundice), 114 (dhuttika˚); iv.137 (vāmanaka˚ deformed), 391 (muddhā˚) v.197 (āvāṭa˚); Dhp-a i.89 (anattamana˚).
(adj ■ ˚) in cha˚ consisting of six elements (purisa) MN iii.239 (where āpodhātu omitted by mistake). See dhātu 2 c.
= *dhātuya
(adj.-n.) (adj.) holding, containing (-˚) MN i.11 (ahi kaṇṭaka˚; cp ādhāna & kaṇṭaka) ■ (n.) nt. a receptacle Dhp 58 (sankāra˚ dust-heap = ṭhāna Dhp-a i.445). f. dhānī a seat (= ṭhāna), in rāja˚; “the king’s seat,” a royal town Often in comb with gāma & nigama (see gāma 3 a) Vin iii.89; Ja vi.397; Pv ii.1318.
Sk. dhāna, to dadhāti; cp. dhātu
(adj.) wealthy, rich, abundant in (-˚) Ja iii.367 (pahūtadhana˚; v.l. BB ˚dhāritaṃ); (nt.) riches, wealth Ja v.99, Ja v.100.
Sk. dhānya, cp. dhañña2
(adj.) (-˚) bearing, holding, having DN i.74 (udaka-rahado sītavāri˚); MN i.281 (ubhato˚) Snp 336 (ukkā˚); Iti 101 (antimadeha˚) 108 (ukkā˚). See also dhārin.
Sk. dhāra to dhāreti; cp. dhara
(adj.-n.) 1. bearing, one who holds or possesses Dhp-a iii.93 (sampattiṃ).
2. one who knows or remembers AN ii.97 (˚jātika); AN iv.296 sq., 328 (id.).
(nt.) 1. wearing, in mālā˚ (etc.) DN i.5 = AN ii.210 = Pp 58; Kp-a 37 cīvara˚ AN ii.104 = Pp 45.
2. maintaining, sustaining keeping up Mil 320 (āyu˚ bhojana).
3. bearing in mind, remembrance Vin iv.305; MN ii.175 (dhamma˚).
cp. Sk. dhāraṇa, to dhāreti
1. a debtor (see dhāreti 4) Ja ii.203; Ja iv.45.
2. a mnemonician Mil 79.
der. fr. dhāraṇa
(f.) 1. wearing, being dressed with (= dhāraṇa 1) Mil 257.
2. mindfulness (= dhāraṇa 3) Nd ii.628; Dhs 14.
(f.) 1. memory Mil 79.
2. the earth (“the upholder,” cp. dharaṇī) Ja vi.180.
to dhāraṇa
(f.) torrent, stream, flow, shower DN i.74 (sammā˚ an even or seasonable shower; DN-a i.218 = vuṭṭhi); ii.15 (udakassa, streams) Ja i.31; Pts i.125 (udaka˚); Pv ii.970 (sammā˚); Vv-a 4 (hingulika˚); Pv-a 139; Dhp-a iv.15 (assu˚); Sdhp 595 (vassa˚).
Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 1
(f.) the edge of a weapon Ja i.455; Ja vi.449; Dhp-a 317; DN-a i.37 ■ (adj. (-˚) having a (sharp) edge Ja i.414 (khura˚) Mil 105 (sukhuma˚); ekato˚-ubhato˚ single-& double-edged Ja i.73 (asi); Ja iv.12 (sattha).
Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 2.
(adj ■ ˚) holding, wearing, keeping; often in phrase antimadeha˚ “wearing the last body” (of an Arahant SN i.14; Snp 471; Iti 32, Iti 40 ■ Ja i.47 (virūpa-vesa˚) Dāvs v.15 ■ f. ˚inī Pv i.108 (kāsikuttama˚).
Sk. dhārin, see dhāreti & cp. ˚dhara, ˚dhāra
one who causes others to remember, an instructor, teacher (cp. dhāraṇaka) AN iv.196 (sotā sāvetā uggahetā dh.).
n. ag. to dhāreti 3
to hold, viz. 1. to carry, bear, wear, possess; to put on, to bring give DN i.166≈(chavadussāni etc.); Vin i.16 = DN i.110 (telapajjotaṃ); DN ii.19 (chattaṃ to hold a sunshade over a person); Pv-a 47 (id.); dehaṃ dh. to “wear,” i.e. to have a body Iti 50, Iti 53 (antimaṃ d.); Ja iv.3 (padumaṃ) Ja vi.136; Pv i.31 (vaṇṇaṃ dh. = vahasi Pv-a 14); tassa kahāpaṇaṃ daṇḍaṃ dh. “to inflict a fine of a k. on him Mil 171.
2. to hold back, restrain Vin iv.261 (kathaṃ dhāretha how do you suppress or conceal pregnancy?); Dhp 222 (kodhaṃ).
3. to bear in mind know by heart, understand: dhammaṃ to know the Dhamma AN iii.176; tipiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ to know the 3 Piṭakas Mil 18 ■ DN ii.2; Pp 41 (suṇāti bhaṇati, dh. = remember). Cp. upadhāreti ■ With double acc.: to receive as, to take = believe, to take for consider as, call: upāsakaṃ maṃ dhāretu Bhagavā “call me your disciple” Vin i.16 & passim; atthajālan ti pi naṃ dhārehi (call it… ) DN i.46; yathā pañhaṃ Bhagavā vyākaroti tathā naṃ dhareyyāsi (believe it) DN i.222; yathā no (atthaṃ) Gotamo vyākarissati tathā naṃ dhāressāma DN i.236; evaṃ maṃ dhārehi adhimuttacittaṃ (consider as) Snp 1149 (= upalakkhehi Nd ii.323)
4. to admit, allow, allow for, take up, support (a cause); to give, to owe DN i.125 (may allow), 126; AN ii.69 (na kassa kiñci dh. pays no tribute); Mil 47 (atthaṃ).
Caus. of dharati, q.v. for etym.
(nt.) the ceremony of being carried away, i.e. the marriage ceremony, marriage (cp. dhareyya under dharati) Thig 472 (text has vāreyya but Thag-a, 285 explains dhāreyya = vivāha).
orig. grd. of dhāreti
running, racing MN i.446.
Sk. dhāva
[Sk. dhāvati & dhāvate: 1. to flow, run etc.; cp. Gr. χέω (both meanings); Ags. déaw = E. dew; Ohg tou = Ger. tau; cp. also dhārā & dhunāti.
2. to clean (by running water) etc. = P.; dhovati, q.v.] 1. to run run away, run quickly Snp 939 (cp. Nd i.419); Dhp 344; Ja i.308; Ja vi.332; Nd i.405 = Nd ii.304iii.; Pv iv.161 = palāyati Pv-a 2841; Dhp-a i.389 (opp. gacchati); Pv-a 4; Sdhp 378.
2. to clean etc.: see dhovati; cp dhavala & dhārā;2.
(nt.) [Sk. dhāvana] running, galloping Ja ii.431; Mil 351.
: see pa˚.
(indecl.) an excln of reproach & disgust: fie! shame! woe! (with acc. or gen.) S; v.217 (read dhī taṃ for dhītaṃ); Dhp 389 (dhī = garahāmi Dhp-a iv.148); Ja i.507; Dhp-a i.179 (haṃ dhī), 216 (v.l. BB but text has haṃdi). An inorganic r replaces the sandhi-cons. in dhī-r-atthu jīvitaṃ Snp 440; cp. Th i.1150; dhi-r-atthu jātiyā Ja i.59.
Sk. dhik
(f.) wisdom, only in Com. expl. of paññā: “dhi vuccati paññā” (exegesis of dhīra) at Nd i.44 = Ja ii.140 = Ja iii.38.
Sk. dhīḥ to didheti, cp. Av. dī to see, Goth. (filu-) deisei cunning. See also dhīra
(adj.) reproached, reviled; used also medially: blaming, censuring, condemning Ja i.155 (= garahitā Com.); also in Com expl. of dhīra (= dhikkita-pāpa detesting evil) at Nd i.44 = Ja ii.140 = Ja iii.38 (cp. dhi2).
Sk. dhikkṛta, of dhi1 + kata
(f.) energy, courage, steadfastness, firm character, resolution. SN i.122, SN i.215 = Snp 188 (cp. Snp-a 237); Ja i.266, Ja i.280; Ja iii.239; Ja vi.373 Vb 211; Dhs 13 (+ thāma), 22, 289, 571; Mil 23, Mil 329 Sdhp 574. Equivalent to “wisdom” (cp. juti jutimant & Sk. dhīti) in expl. of dhīra as “dhitisampanna” Nd i.44≈(see dhi2); Pv-a 131.
Sk. dhṛti to dhṛ; see dharati
(adj.) courageous, firm, resolute AN i.25; Snp 462, Snp 542; Th i.6; Ja ii.140; Ja vi.286 (wise, cp. dhiti).
Sk. dhṛtimant; cp. also dhīmant
and Dhītā (f.) daughter Thig 336 (in faith); Ja i.152, Ja i.253 Ja vi.366; Pv i.115; Dhp-a iii.171, Dhp-a iii.176; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 105 deva˚ a female deva (see deva) Vv-a 137 etc.; nattu˚ a granddaughter Pv-a 17; mātula˚ a niece Pv-a 55; rāja a princess Ja i.207; Pv-a 74. In compn dhītu.
-kkama one who is desirous of a daughter Ja vi.307 (= dhītu atthāya vicarati Com.; v.l. dhītu-kāma) -dhītā granddaughter Pv-a 16.
Sk. dhītā, orig. pp. of dhayati to suck (cp. Lat. filia): see dhāta & dhātī, inflūenced in inflection by Sk. duhitṛ, although etymologically different
(f.) a doll Vin iii.36, Vin iii.126 (dāru˚); Dhs-a 321; Pv-a 16.
DimiName of dhītā; cp. dhītikā & potthalikā
(f.) a doll Thig 374 (= dhītalikā Thag-a 252).
cp. dhītalikā
see adhīna.
to be contained Thag-a 13 (so read for dhiyati); Pv-a 71.
Sk. dhīyate, Pass. to dahati1
(adj.) constant, firm, self-relying of character; wise, possessing the knowledge of the Dhamma, often = paṇḍita & Ep. of an Arahant DN ii.128; SN i.24 (lokapariyāyaṃ aññāya nibbutā dh.) 122, 221; Snp 45, Snp 235 (nibbanti dhīrā), 913 (vippamutto diṭṭhigatehi dh.), 1052; Iti 68 (˚upasevanā, opp. bāla) 122 (dh. sabbaganthapamocano); Dhp 23, Dhp 28, Dhp 177 (opp bāla); Thag 4; Thag 2, Thag 7 (dhammā = tejussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi Thag-a 13); Ja iii.396; Ja v.116; Pv ii.16ii.945; Nd i.44, Nd i.55, Nd i.482; Nd ii.324 (= jutimant); Mil 342; Kp-a 194, Kp-a 224, Kp-a 230; Dhp-a iii.189 (= paṇḍita).
combining in meaning 1. Sk. dhīra “firm” fr. dhārayati (see dharati & dhiti); 2. Vedic. dhīra “wise” fr. dīdheti (see dhi2). The fluctuation of connotation is also scen in the expls of Coms which always give the foll. three conventional etymologies, viz. dhikkitapāpa dhiti-sampanna, dhiyā (= paññāya) samannāgata Nd144≈(see dhi2)
(& Dhūta ) 1. shaken, moved Dāvs v.49 (vāta˚).
2. lit. “shaken off,” but always expld in the commentaries as “one who shakes off” either cvil dispositions (kilese), or obstacles to spiritual progress (vāra, nīvaraṇa). The word is rare. In one constantly repeated passage (Vin i.45 = Vin i.305 = Vin ii.2 = Vin iii.21 = Vin iv.213) it is an adj opposed to kosajja lazy, remiss; and means either scrupulous or punctilious. At DN i.5 it is used of a pain At Snp 385 we are told of a dhutadhamma, meaning a scrupulous way of life, first for a bhikkhu, then for a layman. This poem omits all higher doctrine and confines itself to scrupulousness as regards minor elementary matters. Cp. Vism 61 for a defn of dhuta.
-aṅga a set of practices leading to the state of or appropriate to a dhuta, that is to a scrupulous person First occurs in a title suffixed to a passage in the Parivāra deprecating such practices. The passage occurs twice (Vin v.131, Vin v.193), but the title, probably later than the text, is added only to the 2nd of the two. The passage gives a list of 13 such practices, each of them an ascetic practice not enjoined in the Vinaya. The 13 are also discussed at Vism 59 sq. The Milinda devotes a whole book (chap. vi.) to the glorification of these 13 dhutangas, but there is no evidence that they were ever widely adopted. Some are deprecated at MN i.282, & examples of one or other of them are given at Vin iii.15; Bv i.59; Ja iii.342; Ja iv.8; Mil 133, Mil 348 Mil 351; Vism 59 (˚kathā), 65 (˚cora), 72 (id.), 80 (defn) Snp-a 494; Dhp-a i.68; Dhp-a ii.32 (dhūtanga); Dhp-a iv.30. Nd i.188 says that 8 of them are desirable. -dhara mindful of punctiliousness Mil 342 (āraññaka dh. jhāyin). -vata the vow to perform the dhutangas Dhp-a vi.165. -vāda one who inculcates punctiliousness SN ii.156; AN i.23; Mil 380; Vism 80; Thag-a 69; Dhp-a ii.30. -vādin ˚vāda Ja i.130.
cp. Sk. dhuta & dhūta, pp. of dhunāti
(nt.) the state of being punctilious Vin i.305 (of going naked).
Sk. *dhūtatvaṃ
of abandoned life, wild fast, cunning, crafty, fraudulent; wicked, bad. (m.) a rogue, cheat, evil-minded person, scoundrel, rascal There are three sorts of a wild life, viz. akkha˚; in gambling, itthi˚; with women, surā˚; in drink (Snp 106; Ja iv.255) ■ Vin ii.277 (robber, highwayman); AN iii.38 (a˚); AN iv.288 (itthi˚); Ja i.49 (surā˚), 290, 291; ii.416 iii.287; iv.223, 494 (surā˚); Thag-a 250 (itthi˚), 260 (˚purisa), 266 (˚kilesa); Pv-a 3, Pv-a 5 (itthi˚, surā˚), 151. f. dhutti (dhuttī) Ja ii.114 (˚brāhmaṇī).
Sk. dhūrta, from dhūrvati & dhvarati to injure, deceive, cp. Lat. fraus; Idg. *dhreu, an enlarged form of which is *dreugh in Sk. druhyati, drugdha = Ohg triogan, troum etc.: see duhana
= dhutta SN i.131; Thig 366 (= itthi-dhutta Thag-a 250); Dhp-a iii.207; Dpvs ix.19 ■ f. dhuttikā always in combn w. chinnikā (meretrix, q.v.) Vin iii.128; Ja ii.114; Mil 122.
(nt.) shaking, in ˚ka (adj.) consisting in shaking off, doing away with, giving up (kilesa˚) Snp-a 373.
Sk. dhūnana
to shake, toss; to shake off, remove destroy SN i.156 (maccuno senaṃ); Thag 256 = Mil 245; dhunāti pāpake dhamme dumapattaṃ va māluto Th i.2; Ja i.11 (v. 48); Ja iii.44 (hatthe dhuniṃsu, wrung their hands); Vv 649 (= Vv-a 278 misprint dhumanti) aor. adhosi [ = Sk. adhauṣīt] Snp 787 (micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahi Snp-a 523). pp. dhuta & dhūta; (q.v.). Cp nis˚, o˚.
Sk. dhunoti (dhūnoti), dhunāti & dhuvati, Caus. dhūnayati. Idg.; *dhū to be in turbulent motion cp. Gr. χύω, χύνω (to be impetuous), χύελλα (storm) χύμος “thyme”; Lat. fūmus (smoke = fume), suffio Lith. duja (dust); Goth. dauns (smoke & smell); Ohg toum. Connected also w. dhāvate; see further dhūpa dhūma, dhūsara, dhona & a secondary root Idg; *dheṷes in dhaṃsati
in ˚kaṭacchuka = druma˚; having a wooden spoon (see duma), cp. Mar. dhumārā? (Ed. in note) Dhp-a ii.59.
Doubtful reading.
(m. & nt.) 1. a yoke, a pole, the shaft of a carriage Ja i.192 (purima-sakaṭa˚) 196; Cp ii.8, 4.
2. (fig.) a burden, load, charge office, responsibility Snp 256 (vahanto porisaṃ dh ˚ṃ “carrying a human yoke” = purisânucchavikā bhārā Snp-a 299), 694 (asama˚ one who has to bear a heavy burden = asamaviriya Snp-a 489); Dhp-a ii.97 (sama˚) dve dhurāni two burdens (viz. gantha˚ & vipassanā study & contemplation) Dhp-a i.7; Dhp-a iv.37; asamadhura Ja i.193; Ja vi.330. Three dhurā are enumd at Ja iv.242 as saddhā˚, sīla˚, and paññā˚ ■ Sdhp 355 (saddhā˚), 392 (+ viriya), 413 (paññā˚) dh ˚ṃ nikkhipati to take off the yoke, to put down a burden, to give up a charge or renounce a responsibility (see ˚nikkhepa): nikkhittadhura AN i.71; AN ii.148; AN iii.65, AN iii.108, AN iii.179 sq.; a˚; SN v.197 SN v.225; Nd ii.131; Snp-a 236 (= dhuravant).
3. the forepart of anything, head, top, front; fig. chief, leader leading part. nāvāya dh. the forecastle of a ship Ja iii.127 = Ja iv.142; dh-vāta head wind Ja i.100; ekaṃ dh ˚ṃ nīharati to set aside a foremost part DN-a i.135. 4. the far end, either as top or beginning Ja iii.216 (yāva dh-sopānā); Ja iv.265 (dh- sopānaṃ katvā making the staircase end); Ja v.458 (magga-dhure ṭhatvā standing on the far end or other side of the road, i.e. opposite gloss BB maggantare); Vv-a 44 (dh-gehassa dvāre at the door of the top house of the village, i.e. the first or last house).
-gāma a neighbouring village (lit. the first v. that one meets) Ja i.8, Ja i.237; Ja iv.243; Dhp-a iii.414; -dhorayha a yoked ox SN i.173 = Snp 79 (viriyam me dh-dh ˚ṃ); Snp-a 150. -nikkhepa the putting down of the yoke, the giving up of one’s office Ja iii.243; Vism 413. -bhatta a meal where a monk is invited as leader of other monks who likewise take part in it Ja i.449. v.l. (for dhuva˚) iii.97 (v.l. dhuva˚); Vism 66. -yotta yoke-tie, i.e. the tie fastening the yoke to the neck of the ox Ja i.192 Ja vi.253; -vahana bearing a burden (cp. dhorayha) Dhp-a iii.472; -vihāra a neighbouring monastery (cp. ˚gāma Ja i.23; Ja iv.243; Dhp-a i.126 (Np.); Dhp-a iii.224 (id.); -sampaggāha “a solid grip of the burden” (Mrs. Rh.D.) Dhs 13, Dhs 22 etc. (opp. nikkhepa); -ssaha enduring one’s yoke Thag 659. Cp. dhuratā.
Sk. dhur f. & dhura m.
(f.) in cpd. anikkhitta-dh. “a state of unflinching endurance” Nd ii.394, Nd ii.405 = Dhs 13 etc. = Vb 350, Vb 370 (+ dhura-sampaggāha); opp nikkhitta-dh. weakness of character, lack of endurance (= pamāda) ibid.
abstr. fr. dhura
(adj.) one who has or bears his yoke, patient, enduring SN i.214 = Snp 187 (: cetasikaviriya-vasena anikkhittadhura Snp-a 236).
cp. Sk. dhuradhara
(adj.) stable, constant, permanent; fixed, regular certain, sure DN i.18; SN i.142; SN iv.370; AN ii.33; Ja i.19 Ja v.121 (˚sassataṃ maraṇaṃ); Ja iii.325; Bv ii.82; Mil 114 (na tā nadiyo dh-salilā). 334 (˚phala); Vism 77; DN-a i.112 (maraṇaṃ apassanto dh.), 150 (= thāvara); Dhp-a iii.170 (adhuvaṃ jīvitaṃ dhuvaṃ maraṇaṃ); Thag-a 241 Sdhp 331 ■ nt. permanence, stability MN i.326; Dhp 147. Also Ep. of Nibbāna (see ˚gāmin) ■ nt. as adv dhuvaṃ continuously, constantly, always Ja ii.24 = Mil 172; Pv-a 207; certainly Ja i.18, Ja v.103 ■ adhuva (addhuva) changing, unstable, impermanent DN i.19 (anicca a. appāyuka); MN i.326; SN iv.302; Ja i.393; Ja iii.19 (addhuva-sīla); Vv-a 77.
-gāmin leading to permanence, i.e. Nibbāna SN iv.370 (magga); -colā (f.) constantly dressed, of a woman Vin iii.129; -ṭṭhāniya lasting (of shoes) Vin i.190 -dhamma one who has reached a stable condition Dhp-a iii.289; -paññatta (a) permanently appointed (seat Vin iv.274; -bhatta a constant supply of food Vin i.25 Vin i.243; Vin ii.15 (˚ika); Ja i.449 (where the v.l. dhura˚ seems to be preferable instead of dhuva˚, see dhurabhatta) cp. niccabhatta; -yāgu constant (distribution of) rice-gruel Vin i.292 sq.; -lohitā (f.) a woman whose blood is stagnant Vin iii.129; -ssava always discharging, constantly flowing Ja i.6, Ja v.35. Dhuta & Dhutanga;
Sk. dhruva, cp. Lith. drúta firm; Goth. triggws = Ohg. triuwi (Ger. treue, trost); Ags. tréowe E. true, of Idg. *dheru, enlarged form of *dher, see dharati
see dhuta.
incense Ja i.51, Ja i.64, Ja i.290 (gandha˚, dvandva cpd.); Ja iii.144; Ja vi.42; Pv-a 141 (gandhap̄uppha˚) dh˚ṃ dadāti to incense (a room) Ja i.399. Sometimes misspelt dhūma, e.g. Vv-a 173 (gandhapuppha˚).
Sk. dhūpa of Idg. *dhūp, enlarged fr. *dhū in dhunāti (q.v.)
(nt.) incensing, fumigation; perfume, incense, spice Ja iii.144; Ja iv.236; Pv iii.53 (sāsapa˚). Dhupayati & Dhupayati;
Sk. dhūpana
to fumigate, make fragrant, perfume Vin i.180; SN i.40 (dhūpāyita) = Thag 448; AN ii.214 sq.; Ja i.73; Mil 333 (sīlagandhena lokaṃ dh.); Dhp-a i.370 (aor. dhūpāyi) Dhp-a iii.38 (ppr. dhūpayamāna) ■ pp. dhūpita.
Sk. dhūpayati; caus. fr. dhūpa
fumigated, flavoured Vv 435 (tela˚ flavoured with oil). Cp. pa˚.
pp. of dhūpāyati
smoke, fumes Vin i.204 (aroma of drugs) MN i.220 (dh ˚ṃ kattā); AN v.352 (id.); AN ii.53; AN iv.72 sq.v.347 sq.; Ja iii.401, Ja iii.422 (tumhākaṃ dh-kāle at the time when you will end in smoke, i.e. at your cremation) Dhp-a i.370 (eka˚ one mass of smoke); Vv-a 173 (for dhūpa, in gandhapuppha˚); Pv-a 230 (micchā-vitakka in expl. of vidhūma).
-andha blind with smoke Ja i.216; -kālika (cp. above dh ■ kāle) lasting till a person’s cremation Vin ii.172 Vin ii.288; -ketu fire (lit. whose sign is smoke) Ja iv.26; Ja v.63 -jāla a mass of smoke Ja v.497; -netta a smoke-tube, i.e. a surgical instrument for sniffing up the smoke of medical drugs Vin i.204; Vin ii.120; Ja iv.363; Thag-a 14 -sikhā fire (Ep. of Agni; lit. smoke-crested) Vv 352 (sikha) = Vv-a 161; Vism 416; also as sikhin Ja vi.206. Dhumayati & Dhumayati;
Vedic dhūma = Lat. fumus; Gr. χυμός (mood, mind), χυμιάω (fumigate); Ohg. toum etc. Idg. *dhu cp. Gr. χύω (burn incense), χύος (incense). See also dhunāti
to smoke, to smoulder, choke; to be obscured to cloud over MN i.142 (v.l. dhūpāyati); Pv i.64 (pariḍayhati + dh. hadayaṃ); Dhp-a i.425 (akkhīni me dh. I see almost nothing). pp. dhūmāyita.
Sk. dhūmayati, Denom. fr. dhūma
(f.) smoking, smouldering MN i.143; Ne 24 (as v.l. to dhūpāyanā).
(nt.) becoming like smoke, clouding over, obscuration SN iii.124 (+ timirāyitattaṃ).
abstr. to dhūmāyati
(adj.) dust-coloured Vv-a 335.
Sk. dhūsara, Ags. dust = E. dust & dusk, Ger. dust; see dhvaṃsati & dhunoti & cp. Walde,; Lat Wtb. under furo
(f.) a milch cow, a female animal in general Ja i.152 (miga˚ hind); Vv 806; Dhp-a i.170; Dhp-a i.396; Pv-a 112. In simile at Vism 313.
Sk. dhenu, to dhayati to give suck, see dhātī & dhītar
a suckling calf MN i.79; Snp 26.
dhenu + pa from pibati
(-˚) 1. in the realm of, under the sway or power of: anañña˚ Ja iv.110; kamma˚; AN iv.285; maccu˚; (q.v.) SN i.22; Snp 358, Snp 1104; Thig 10 (= maccu ettha dhīyati Thag-a 13) māra˚; AN iv.228.
2. putting on, assigning, in nāma˚ Dhs 1307.
Sk. dheya, orig. grd. of dhā, see dahati1
washed, bleached, clean Ja i.62 (˚sankha a bleached shell); Ja ii.275; Pv-a 73 (˚vattha), 116 (˚hattha with clean hands), 274 (id.); Vism 224 (id.).
Sk. dhāuta, pp. of dhavati2, see dhovati
(adj.-n.) 1. purified MN i.386; Snp 351, Snp 786, Snp 813, Snp 834 (= dhutakilesa Snp-a 542); Ja iii.160 (˚sākha = patthaṭasākha Com.; v.l. BB vena˚); Nd i.77 = Nd i.176 (: dhonā vuccati paññā etc., dhuta & dhota used indiscriminately in exegesis following).
2. (pl. the four requisites of a bhikkhu Dhp-a iii.344 (: dhonā vuccati cattāro paccayā, in Com. on atidhonacārin Dhp 240; gloss K. dhovanā, cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887 100).
either = dhota, Sk. dhauta, see dhovati or = dhuta, see dhuta & dhunana. Quite a diff. suggestion as regards etym. is given by Kern,; Toev. 117 who considers it as a possible dern fr. (a)dho, after analogy of poṇa. Very doubtful
to wash, cleanse DN i.93 (dhopetha, imper.; v.l. B dhovatḥa), 124 (dhopeyya; v.l. B. dhoveyya).
a variant of dhovati, taken as Caus. formation
(nt.) 1. ceremonial washing of the bones of the dead DN i.6; aṭṭhi-dhovana Bdhgh at DN-a i.84; AN v.216 (see Commentary at 364). 2. Surgical washing of a wound Ja ii.117.
3. In vaṃsadhopana apparently a feat by acrobats Ja iv.390. It is possible that the passage at DN i.6 really belongs here See the note at Dial. i.9.
a variant of dhovana, q.v.
“Carrying a yoke” a beast of burden SN i.28; DN iii.113 (purisa˚); AN i.162.
-vata (nt.) the practice of carrying a burden, the state of a beast of burden, drudgery SN i.28; -sīla accustomed to the yoke, enduring; patient Dhp 208 (= dhuravahana-sīlatāya dh. Dhp-a iii.272); -sīlin ˚sīla Ja ii.97 (= dhura-vahanaka-ācārena sampanna Com.).
for *dhor-vayha = Sk. *dhaurvahya, abstr. fr. dhurvaha; may also directly correspond to the latter.
(-˚) “to be yoked,” accustomed to the yoke, carrying a burden, in kamma˚ Mil 288.
Sk. dhaureya, der. fr. dhura
(adj.-n.) washing, cleansing Bv ii.15.
Sk. dhāva, see dhovati
to rinse, wash, cleanse, purify Vin ii.208, Vin ii.210, Vin ii.214; Snp p.104 (bhājanāni) Ja i.8; Ja v.297 ■ dhovi Ja vi.366; Dhp-a iii.207. ger dhovitvā Ja i.266; Ja iv.2; Vv-a 33 (pattaṃ), 77 (id.) Pv-a 75, Pv-a 144. inf. dhovituṃ Vin ii.120; Vin iv.261 pp dhota (q.v.) & dhovita Ja i.266 ■ See also dhopati (*dhopeti).
Sk. dhāvati, see dhāvati
(nt.) washing Vin iv.262; SN iv.316 (bhaṇḍa˚); AN i.132, AN i.161, AN i.277; Iti 111 (pādānaṃ); Ja ii.129; Ja vi.365 (hattha˚); Mil 11 Vism 343; Pv-a 241 (hattha-pāda˚); Dhp-a ii.19 (pāda˚) fig. (ariyaṃ) AN v.216.
N.
Sk. dhāvana; see also dhopana
expletive-emphatic particle, often used in comparative-indefinite sense just so, like this, as if, as (see cana & canaṃ) Ja v.339 (Com. cttha na-kāro upamāne). Also as naṃ (cp. cana → canaṃ) Vin ii.81, Vin ii.186 (kathaṃ naṃ = kathaṃ nu); Ja ii.416; Ja v.302; Ja vi.213 (Com. p. 216: ettha eko na-karo pucchanattho hoti); Thag 1204; Mil 177. Perhaps at Snp 148 (kattha-ci naṃ, v.l. BB na; but Com. Kp-a 247 etaṃ). To this na belongs na3; see also nu & nanu.;
Sk. na (in cana) & nā (in nānā, vi-nā) Idg. pron. base *no, cp. Gr.; νή, ναί; Lat. nē, nae surely, also encl. in ego-ne & in question utruṃne, nam; fuller form *eno as in Sk. anā (adv.) anena, anayā (instr. pron. 3rd) Gr. ε ̓́νη “that day”; Lat. enim
negātive & adversative particle “not” (Nd ii.326: paṭikkhepa; Kp-a 170 paṭisedhe) 1. often apostr. n’: n’ atthi, n’ etaṃ etc.; or contracted: nāhaṃ, nāpi etc., or with cuphonic consonant y: nayidaṃ (Iti 29, Ja iv.3), nayidha (Iti 36, Iti 37) nayimaṃ (Iti 15) etc. As double negation implying emphatic affirmation: na kiñci na all, everything Ja i.295.
2. In disjunctive clauses: na… na neither-nor, so-or not so. In question: karoti na karoti (“or not”) Ja ii.133. Cp. mā in same use. Often with added pi (api) in second part: na-nāpi neither-nor (“not-but also not”) SN ii.65; MN i.246; Pv i.119.
3. In syntactic context mostly emphasized by var. negative & adversative particles, viz.; nāpi (see under 2); n’ eva indeed not, not for all that Ja iii.55; or not Kp-a 219; n’ eva-na neither-nor DN i.33, DN i.35; MN i.486; AN v.193; Ja i.207, Ja i.279; Vin ii.185; Dhp-a i.328; Dhp-a ii.65; DN-a i.186, DN-a i.188; n’ eva-na pana id. DN i.24; na kho not indeed Ja ii.134; na ca but not (= this rather than that Ja i.153; na tāva = na kho Vv 3713; na nu (in quest. noune) is it not? Pv-a 74, Pv-a 136; na no surely not Snp 224 na hi [cp. Gr. ούξί not at all; ναίξι certainly] certainly not Dhp 5, Dhp 184; Snp 666; Kp vii.6; na hi jātu id. Snp 152-See also nu, nū, no.
4, na is also used in the function of the negative prefix a-(an-) in cases where the word-negation was isolated out of a sentence negation or where a negated verb was substantified, e.g. (a) nacira (= acira) short, napparūpa abundant, napuṃsaka neuter, neka (= aneka) several; (b) natthi, natthika etc. (q.v.).
Ved. na = Idg. *ně; Lat. ne in n’ unquam etc., Goth. ni; Sk. na ca = Lat. neque = Goth. nih. Also Sk. nā Idg. *nē, cp. Lat. Goth. nē
base of demonstr. pron. 3rd pers. (= ta˚), only in foll. cases: acc. sg. naṃ (mostly enclitic) fuller form enaṃ him, her, that one etc. Snp 139, Snp 201, Snp 385 Snp 418, Snp 980, Snp 1076; Iti 32; Dhp 42, Dhp 230; Ja i.152, Ja i.172, Ja i.222 Ja iii.281; Kp-a 220; Dhp-a i.181; Dhp-a iii.173; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 73.
acc. pl. ne them Iti 110 (v.l. te); Snp 223 (= te manusse Kp-a 169); Ja ii.417; Ja iii.204; Ja v.458; Dhp-a i.8 Dhp-a i.13, Dhp-a i.61, Dhp-a i.101, Dhp-a i.390; Vv-a 299 ■ gen. dat. pl. nesaṃ DN i.175, DN i.191; Iti 63; Ja i.153; Dhp-a iv.41; Vv-a 37, Vv-a 136. Pv-a 54, Pv-a 201, Pv-a 207. See also cna; cp. nava2.
identical with na1
a mungoose, Viverra Ichneumon AN v.289 sq.; Ja ii.53; Ja vi.538; Mil 118, Mil 394.
Ved. nakula, cp. nakra crocodile
(nt.) the stars or constellations, a conjunction of the moon with diff. constellations, a lunar mansion or the constellations of the lunar zodiac, figuring also as Names of months & determinant factors of horoscopic and other astrological observation; further a celebration of the beginning of a new month, hence any kind of festival or festivity ■ The recognised number of such lunar mansions is 27, the names of which as given in Sk. sources are the same in Pāli, with the exception of 2 variations (Assayuja for Aśvinī, Satabhisaja for Śatatāraka). Enumd at Abhp. 58–60 as follows Assayuja [Sk. Aśvinī] Bharaṇī, Kattikā, Rohiṇī, Magasiraṃ [Sk. Mṛgaśīrṣa] Addā [Sk. Ārdrā], Punabbasu Phussa [Sk. Puṣya], Asilesā, Maghā, Pubba-phaggunī [Sk. Pūrva-phalgunī). Uttara˚, Hattha, Cittā [Sk Chaitra], Sāti [Svātī], Visākhā, Anurādhā, Jeṭṭhā Mūlaṃ, Pubb-āsāḷha [˚āṣāḍha], Uttar˚, Savaṇa, Dhaniṭṭhā Satabhisaja [Śatatāraka], Pubba-bhaddapadā Uttara˚, Revatī ■ It is to be pointed out that the Niddesa speaks of 28 N. instead of 27 (Nd i.382: aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni), a discrepancy which may be accounted by the fact that one N. (the Orion) bore 2 names, viz. Mṛgaśīrṣa & Agrahayanī (see Plunkett; Ancient Calendars etc. p. 227 sq.) ■ Some of these Ns. are more familiar & important than others, & are mentioned more frequently, e.g. Āsāḷha (Āsālhi˚) Ja i.50 & Uttarāsāḷha Ja i.63, Ja i.82; Kattikā & Rohiṇī Snp-a 456 ■ nakkhattaṃ; ādisati to augur from the stars, to set the horoscope Nd i.382; oloketi to read the stars to scan the constellations Ja i.108, Ja i.253; ghoseti to proclaim (shout out) the new month (cp. Lat. calandae fr. cālāre to call out, scil. mensem), and thereby announce the festivity to be celebrated Ja i.250; n. ghuṭṭhaṃ Ja i.50, Ja i.433; sanghuṭṭhaṃ Pv-a 73; ghositaṃ Vv-a 31 kīḷati to celebrate a (nakkhatta-) festival Ja i.50, Ja i.250; Vv-a 63; Dhp-a i.393 (cp. ˚kīḷā below). n. ositaṃ the festival at an end Ja i.433 ■ nakkhatta (sg.) a constellation Snp 927; collect. the stars Vv 811 (cando nparivārito). nakkhattāni (pl.) the stars: nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ chando (the moon is the most prominent of the lights of night) Th 2.143; Vin i.246 = Snp 569 (but cp. expl. at Snp-a 456: candayogavasena “ajja kattikā ajja Rohiṇī” ti paññāṇato ālokakāraṇato sommabhāvato ca nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando ti vutto); DN i.10 (nakkhattānaṃ pathagamanaṃ & uppatha-gamanaṃ a right or wrong course, i.e. a straight ascension or deviation of the stars or planets); DN ii.259; DN iii.85, DN iii.90; AN iv.86; Thig 143 (nakkhattāni namassantā bālā).
-kīḷana = kīḷā Dhp-a iii.461; -kīḷā the celebration of a festival, making merry, taking a holiday Ja i.50; Thag-a 137; Vv-a 109; -ggāha the seizure of a star (by a demon see gāha), the disappearance of a planet (transit?) DN i.10 (expl. at DN-a i.95 as nakkhattasa angārakādi-gahasamāyoga); -patha “the course of the stars,” i.e. the nocturnal sky Dhp 208; -pada a constellation Vin ii.217 -pāṭhaka an astrologer, soothsayer, augur Nd i.382 -pīḷana the failing or obscuration of a star (as a sign of death in horoscopy) Dhp-a i.166;- mālā a garland of stars Vv-a 167; -yoga a conjunction of the planets, a constellation in its meaning for the horoscope Ja i.82 Ja i.253; Dhp-a i.174 (+ tithi-karaṇa); ˚ṃ oloketi to set the horoscope Dhp-a i.166, ˚ṃ uggaṇhāti id. Pv iii.54. -rājā the king of the nakkhattas (i.e. the moon) Ja iii.348.
Ved. nakṣatra collect. formation from naktiḥ & naktā = Gr.; νύς, Lat. nox, Goth. nahts, E night = the nightly sky, the heavenly bodies of the night as opposed to the Sun: ādicco tapataṃ mukhaṃ Vin i.246
a nail of finger or toe, a claw Vin ii.133; Snp 610 (na angulīhi nakhehi vā); Ja v.489 (pañcanakhā sattā five-nailed or-toed beings); Kp ii. = Mil 26, cp. taca (pañcatacakaṃ); Kp-a 43; Vv-a 7 (dasa-nakhasamodhāna putting the 10 fingers together); Pv-a 152, Pv-a 192; Sdhp 104.
Ved. nakha, cp. Sk. anghri foot; Gr. ο ̓́νυς (claw, nail), Lat. unguis = Oir. inga; Ohg. nagal = E. nail
(adj.) belonging to, consisting of or resembling a claw, in hatthi˚; like elephants’ claws, Ep. of a castle (pāsāda) Vin ii.169 (Bdhgh on p. 323: hatthikumbhe patiṭṭhitaṃ, evaṃ evaṃkatassa kir’ etaṃ nāmaṃ) (?).
(adj.) having nails Ja vi.290 (tamba˚ with coppercoloured nails).
mountain SN i.195 Nd ii.136a (nagassa passe āsīna, of the Buddha); Snp 180 (= devapabbata royal mountain Snp-a 216; or should it mean “forest”?); Thag 41 (˚vivara), 525; Pv ii.961 (˚muddhani on top of the Mount, i.e. Mt. Sineru Pv-a 138; the Buddha was thought to reside there); Mil 327 (id.); Vv 166 (˚antare in between the (5) mountains, see Vv-a 82).
Sk. naga tree & mountain, referred by Fausböll & Uhlenbeck to na + gacchati, i.e. immovable (= sthāvara) more probably however with Lidén (see Walde under nāvis) to Ohg. nahho, Ags. naca “boat = tree”; semantically mountain = trees, i.e. forest
(nt.) a stronghold, citadel, fortress a (fortified) town, city. As seat of the government as important centre of trade contrasted with gāma nigama (village & market-place or township) Vin iii.47 (˚bandhana), 184; cp. gāma 3 b. deva˚; deva-city Ji. 3 168, 202; Dhp-a i.280 etc.; cp. yakkha˚ Ja ii.127 ■ Vin i.277, Vin i.342, Vin i.344; Vin ii.155, Vin ii.184; DN ii.7; SN ii.105 sq.; SN iv.194 (kāyassa adhivacanaṃ); v.160; AN i.168, AN i.178; AN iv.106 sq (paccantima); v.194 (id.) Dhp 150 (aṭṭhīnaṃ); Snp 414 Snp 1013 (Bhoga˚); Ja i.3, Ja i.50 (Kapilavatthu˚); Ja ii.5; Ja iii.188 Ja vi.368 etc.; Pp 56; Dhp-a iv.2; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 73; Dpvs xiv.51 (+ pura). Cp. nāgara.
-ūpakārikā a town fortified with a wall covered with cement at its base DN i.105, cp. DN-a i.274; -ūpama like a citadel (of citta) Dhp 40, cp. Dhp-a i.317 & Nagaropama sūtra Divy 340; -kathā town-gossip DN i.7; -guttika superintendent of the city police Ja iii.30, Ja iii.436; Ja iv.279; Mil 345 (dhammanagare n-g.), Dhp-a iv.55. Cp. Kern Toev. p. 167; -vara the noble town (of Rājagaha Vv 166, cp. Vv-a 82; -vīthi a city street Ja ii.416; -sobhinī the city belle, a town courtesan Ja ii.367 (˚anā); iii.435 (Sulasā), 475 (˚anī); Dhp-a i.174; Dhp-a ii.201; Pv-a 4 (Sulasā) Mil 350.
Ved. nagara, Non-aryan? Connection with agāra is very problematic
(nt.) a small city DN i.146 = DN i.169, quoted Ja i.391.
(adj.) naked, nude Vin ii.121; Ja i.307; Pv i.61 (= niccola Pv-a 32); ii.15; 81; Pv-a 68 Pv-a 106.
-cariyā going naked Dhp 141; Dhp-a iii.78; cp. Sk nagnacaryā Divy 339; -bhogga one whose goods are nakedness, an ascetic Ja iv.160; Ja v.75; Ja vi.225.
Ved. nagna = Lat. nudus (fr. *nogṷedhos) Goth. naqaps = Ohg. naccot, Ags. nacod = naked; Oir nocht; perhaps Gr. γυμνός
(nt.) = naggiya nakedness Pv-a 106.
Sk. nagnatva
(nt.) naked state, nudity Vin i.292, Vin i.305; SN iv.300; Snp 249.
Sk. *nagnyaṃ
(adj. f.) = naggā, naked Pv ii.312.
Sk. nagnikā
(nt.) a plough SN i.115; SN iii.155; AN iii.64; Snp 77 (yuga˚ yoke & plough); Snp p.13; Ja i.57; Thig 441 (= sīra Thag-a 270); Snp-a 146; Vv-a 63 Vv-a 65; Pv-a 133 (dun˚ hard to plough); Dhp-a i.223 (aya˚) iii.67 (id.).
-īsā the beam of a plough SN i.104 (of an elephant’s trunk); -kaṭṭhakaraṇa ploughing SN v.146 = Ja ii.59 -phāla [mod. Ind. phār] ploughshare (to be understood as Dvandva) Dhp-a i.395.
Ved. lāngala; nangala by dissimilation through subsequent nasal, cp. Milinda → Menandros Etym. unknown, prob. dialectical (already in RV iv. 574), because unconnected with other Aryan words for plough. Cp. Balūčī nangār
(adj.-n.) having or using a plough, ploughman, in mukha˚ “using the mouth as plough” Thag 101 (maulvergnügt, Neumann) (Mrs. Rh. D. harsh of speech).
(nt.) = nangula AN ii.245; Ja i.194 (of a bull); ii.19 (of an elephant); iii.16 (sūci˚), 480 (panther); iv.256 (of a deer); Dhp-a i.275 (of a fish); ii.64.
dial. for *nangūlya → *nanguḷhya?
(nt.) a tail Thag 113 = Thag 601 (go˚).
Sk. lāngū̆la to langa & lagati (q.v.). cp. Gr.; λαγγάζω, Lat. langueo
(adj.) not of long duration, short Snp 694; gen nacirass’ eva after a short time shortly Snp p.16; Ja iv.2, Ja iv.392; Mil 250.
Sk. nacira = na + cira
(nt.) (pantomimic) dancing usually combd with singing (gīta, q.v.) & instrumental music (vādita) ■; nacca: AN i.261; DN iii.183; Ja i.61 Ja i.207; DN-a i.77; Pv-a 231 ■ nacca-gīta: Ja i.61; Pv iv.72; Dhp-a iii.129; Vv-a 131, Vv-a 135 ■ nacca-gīta-vādita (+ visūkadassana): Vin i.83; DN i.5, DN i.6; Kp-a 36; cp Vv 8110 (naccagīte suvādite).
Ved. nṛtya = Anglo-Ind. nautch, etym. uncertain, cp. naccati & naṭati
a dancer, (pantomimic actor Mil 191, Mil 331, Mil 359 (naṭa˚) ■ f. naccakī Vin ii.12.
Sk. *nṛtyaka, distinguished from but ultimately identical with naṭaka, q.v.
to dance, play Vin ii.10; Ja i.292; Vv 501 (= naṭati Vv-a 210); 6421. pp. naccento DN i.135; fut. naccissati Vin ii.12; aor nacci Ja iii.127; inf. naccituṃ Ja i.207 ■ Caus. naccāpeti to make play Vism 305 (so read for nacch˚).
Ved. nṛtyati nṛt, cp. nacca & naṭati
(nt.) dance, dancing Vv-a 282, Vv-a 315.
Ved. *nṛtyana, cp. naṭana
a kind of cock or hen Ja vi.528, Ja vi.538.
Sk. dātyūha
a dancer, player, mimic, actor Vin iv.285; SN iv.306 sq. Dhp-a iv.60 (˚dhītā), 65 (˚karaka), 224 (˚kīḷā); Mil 359 (˚naccaka); Sdhp 380 ■ Cp. naṭaka & nāṭaka.;
Sk. naṭa dial. ṭ, cp. Prk. naḍa, of nṛt, see naccati
= naṭa Vin iv.285; Mil 331; Pv-a 3 ■ f. naṭikā DN-a i.239.
Sk. naṭaka
to dance, play Vv-a 210 (= naccati).
Sk. naṭati, of nṛt, with dial. ṭ, cp. naccati
perished, destroyed; lost AN ii.249; Ja i.74; Ja i.267.
Sk. naṣṭha, pp. of nassati (naśyati), q.v.
(nt.) destruction Mil 180, Mil 237.
Der. fr. naṭṭha
bankrupt Mil 131, Mil 201.
cp. Sk. naṣṭhārtha, i.e. naṣṭha + artha
bent (on) SN i.186 (a˚); Snp 1143; Nd ii.327.
Sk. nata, pp. of namati, q.v.
(f.) bending, bent, inclination SN ii.67; SN iv.59; MN i.115. Kalya-rupa
Sk. nati of nam
pleased, glad Snp 680, Snp 683; a˚ not pleased Snp 691.
(nt.) night, acc. nattaṃ by night, in nattam-ahaṃ by day & by night Snp 1070 (v.l. BB and Nd;2 rattamahaṃ).
Sk. nakta, see nakkhatta
grandson Ja i.60 (nattu, gen.), 88; Ud 91 Ud 92; Pv-a 17 (nattu-dhītā great-grand-daughter), 25 (nattā nom.).
Sk. naptṛ, analogy-formation after mātṛ etc. from Ved. napāt; cp. Lat. nepos; Ags. nefa = E. nephew Ohg. nevo
(adj.-n.) one who professes the motto of “natthi,” a sceptic, nihilist SN i.96; usually in cpds.
-diṭṭhi scepticism, nihilistic view, heresy Snp 243 (= micchāditthi Com.); Vv-a 342; Pv-a 244; -vāda one who professes a nihilistic doctrine SN iii.73; MN i.403; AN ii.31; Pv-a 215 (+ micchādiṭṭhika).
Sk. nāstika
(f.) nihilism SN ii.17; Ja v.110.
Sk. nāstitā, fr. n’ atthi
non-existence Dhp-a iii.324.
n’ atthi-bhāva
1. the nose Ja v.166 (= nāsā Com.).
2. = ˚kamma medical treatment through the nose Vin iii.83 (deti).
-kamma nose-treatment, consisting in the application of hot oil (DN-a i.98: telaṃ yojetvā n-karaṇaṃ) DN i.12; Vin i.204; MN i.511; Dhp-a i.12; -karaṇī a pockethandkerchief Vin i.204.
cp. Sk. nas f. & nasta, see etym. under nāsā
to roar, cry, make a noise (nadaṃ nadati freq.) Snp 552 (sīha), 684 (id.), 1015; Ja i.50, Ja i.150; Ja ii.110; aor. nadi Ja iii.55; anādisuṃ Ja iv.349. Caus. nadāpeti to make roar Ja ii.244. See also nadī & nāda, & cp. onadati.;
Ved. nadati, nad of unknown etym.
(nt.) roaring Ja i.19 (sīhanāda˚ the sound of a lion’s roar).
cp. Sk. nadanu
(nt.) roar, noise Ja ii.110.
cp. Sk. nādita, pp. of caus. nadayati
(f.) a river; often characterised as mahā˚ in opp to kun˚ rivulet; pl. nadiyo also collect. “the waters ■ DN i.244 (Aciravatī nadī); SN ii.32, SN ii.118, SN ii.135; SN v.390; AN i.33, AN i.136, AN i.243 (mahā˚); ii.55, 140 (mahā˚); iii.52 iv.101 (m˚), 137; Snp 425, Snp 433, Snp 568, Snp 720; Dhp 251; Ja i.296; Ja ii.102; Ja iii.51; Ja iii.91 (Kebukā); v.269 (Vetaraṇī˚); vi.518 (Ketumatī); Pv iv.354; Vism 468 (sīghasotā); Pv-a 256 (m˚); Sdhp 21, Sdhp 194, Sdhp 574 ■ gen. sg nadiyā Ja i.278; Iti 113; instr. nadiyā Ja i.278; Pv-a 46 pl. nom. nadiyo Mil 114 (na tā n. dhuva-salilā), najjo Pv-a 29 (mahā˚); & najjāyo Ja vi.278; gen nadīnaṃ Vin i.246 = Snp 569 (n. sāgaro mukhaṃ) ■ kunnadī a small river SN i.109; SN ii.32, SN ii.118; SN v.47, SN v.63; AN ii.140; AN iv.100 V.114 sq ■ On n. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1906, 100.
-kuñja a river glen DN-a i.209; -kūla the bank of a river Cp iii.71; -tīra = ˚kūla Ja i.278; -dugga a difficult ford in a river SN ii.198; -vidugga = ˚dugga AN i.35; AN iii.128.
Ved. nadī, from nadati = “the roaring,” cp. also nandati
tied, bound, fastened, put on Ja i.175 (rathavarattaṃ); Bv i.31 (camma˚, of a drum); Mvu vii.16 (˚pañcāyudha) Mil 117 (yuga˚); Dhs-a 131. Cp. onaddha, vi˚, san˚.
Sk. naddha pp. of nah, see nayhati
(f.) husband’s sister Ja v.269 (= sāmikassa bhaginī p. 275).
Sk. nanāndṛ & nanāndā, to nanā “mother”
(adj.) disagreeable, unpleasant Dhp 309 (˚seyyā an uncomfortable bed).
na + nikāma = anikāma
(indecl.) 1. part. of affirmation (cp. na1): surely, certainly Pv ii.67 (so to be read for nanda? v.l. BB nuna); Manor. Pūr. on AN v.194 (Andersen P. R. 91)
2. part. of interrogation (= Lat. nonne) “is it not (cp. na2): Ja i.151; Ja iii.393; Dhp-a i.33.
Ved. nanu
(nt.) a shred rag, worn-out cloth, usually expld by jiṇṇapilotika (J iii.22) or khaṇḍabhūtā pilotikā (Pv-a 185) or pilotika only (Vv-a 311) ■ SN v.342; AN iii.187; AN iv.376 (˚vāsin as v.l.; text has nantikavāsin); Vv 807 (anantaka) Pv iii.214; Ja iii.22 (˚vāsin clad in rags).
a contamination of namataka (Kern, Toev. p. 169), maybe Sk. naktaka “cover for nakedness (Trenckner, Notes 811), unless it be non-Aryan
at Pv ii.67 used either as interj. (= nanu, q.v.) or as voc. in the sense of “dear”; the first expln to be preferred & n. probably to be read as nanu (v.l. nuna or; handa (in which case nanu would be gloss).
(adj.) giving pleasure, pleasing, full of joy; f. nandikā Ja iv.396 (+ khiḍḍā), either as adj or f. abstr. pleasure, rejoicing (= abhindandanā Com.).
Sk. nandikā
to be glad, to rejoice, find delight in, be proud of (c. instr.) SN i.110; AN iv.94 sq.; Snp 33; Dhp 18 ■ Caus. nandeti to please, to do a favour Ja iv.107 (nandaya = tosehi Com.); Pv-a 139 (= toseti)-ppr. nandayanto Ja vi.588 ■ Cp. ānandati.
Ved. nandati, nand = nad (cp. vind → vid etc.) orig. to utter sounds of joy
(f.) rejoicing, delight, pleasure SN i.6 = Snp 33.
Sk. nandanā
& (freq.); Nandī (f.) 1. joy, enjoyment, pleasure, delight in (c loc.) SN i.16, SN i.39, SN i.54; SN ii.101 sq. (āhāre); iii.14 (= upādāna) iv.36 sq.; AN ii.10 (kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚), iii.246 iv.423 sq. (dhamma˚); Snp 1055 (+ nivesana); Nd ii.330 (= taṇhā); Pp 57; Dhs 1059≈(in def. of taṇhā) Vb 145, Vb 356, Vb 361; Dhs-a 363; Thag-a 65, Thag-a 167 ■ For nandī at Mil 289 read tandī.
2. a musical instrument: joy-drum [Sk. nandī] Vin iii.108 (= vijayabheri) Cp. ā˚.
-(y)āvatta “turning auspiciously” (i.e. turning to the right: see dakkhiṇāvatta), auspicious, good Ne 2 Ne 4, Ne 7, Ne 113 (always attr. of naya); -ūpasecana (rāgasalla sprinkled over with joy, having joy as its sauce Ne 116, Ne 117; cp. maṃsûpasecana (odana) Ja iii.144 = Ja vi.24 -kkhaya the destruction of (finding) delight SN iii.51 -(ṃ)jaha giving up or abandoning joy Snp 1101 (+ okañjaha & kappañjaha); Nd ii.331; -bhava existence of joy, being full of joy, in ˚parikkhīṇa one in whom joy is extinct (i.e. an Arahant), expld however by Com as one who has rid himself of the craving for rebirth (tīsu bhavesu parikkhīnataṇha Dhp-a iv.192 = Snp-a 469; SN i.2, SN i.53; Snp 175, Snp 637 = Dhp 413; -mukhī (adj ■ f.) “joyfaced,” showing a merry face, Ep. of the night (esp the eve of the uposatha) Vin i.288 (ratti); ii.236 (id.) -rāga pleasure & lust, passionate delight SN ii.227 SN iii.51; SN iv.142, SN iv.174, SN iv.180; MN i.145; Dhs 1059≈, 1136 esp. as attr. of taṇhā in phrase n-r-sahagata-taṇhā (cp Mvu iii.332: nandīrāgasahagatā tr̥ṣṇā) Vin i.10; SN iii.158; SN v.425 sq.; Pts ii.137; Ne 72; -saṃyojana the fetter of finding delight in anything Snp 1109, Snp 1115 Nd ii.332; -samudaya the rise or origin of delight MN iii.267.
Sk. nandi, but cp. BSk. nandī Divy 37
= nandhi.
(adj.) finding or giving delight, delighting in, pleasurable, gladdening SN ii.53 (vedanā) AN ii.59, AN ii.61; Iti 112.
Sk. nandin
see yuga˚.
meaning not so much “to bind as “to cover”: see apiḷandhati, upanandhati, onandhati pariyonandhati.
for nayhati, der. fr. naddha after analogy of baddha → bandhati
(f.) (usually spelt nandi) a strap, thong Ja i.175 (rathassa cammañ ca nandiñ ca); Snp 622 = Dhp 398 (+ varatta) Snp-a 400; Dhp-a i.44, Dhp-a iv.160.
Sk. naddhrī to naddha, pp. of nah to bind
(adj.) of no sex; lit. Vism 548, Vism 553; Thag-a 260; Vb 417; in gram. of the neuter gender Kacc. 50; Pv-a 266 (is reading correct?)
Ved. napuṃsaka = na + puṃs “notmale”
(nt.) & Nabhas (in oblique cases) mist, vapour clouds, sky AN i.242; AN ii.50 (nabhā), iii.240, Snp 687 (nabhasi-gama, of the moon); Vv 323, 352 (= ākāsa Vv-a 161), 534 (id. 236), 6327 (id. 268); Pv-a 65; Mvu vii.9 (nabhasā instr.).
Sk. nabhas; Gr. νέφος & νεφέλη, Lat. nebula, Oir. nēl, Ags. nifol (darkness), Ohg. nebul. See also abbha
= nābhiyo, nom. pl. of nābhi (q.v.).
(nt.) a piece of cloth Vin ii.115 (satthaka), 123, 267 (˚ṃ dhāreti).
word & etym. doubtful; cp. nantaka & Bdhgh. Vin ii.317: matakan (sic) ti satthakavedhanakaṃ (= veṭhanakaṃ) pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ
to bend, bend down (trs. & instr.) direct, apply SN i.137 (cittaṃ) Snp 806; Ja i.61 (aor. nami, cittaṃ) ■ Caus. nameti (not nāmeti, Fsb. to Snp 1143 nāmenti, which is to be corrected to n’ âpenti) to bend, to wield Dhp 80 = Dhp 145 (namayati). As nāmeti at Ja vi.349. pp. namita (q.v.).
Ved. namati, Idg. *nem to bend; also to share out, cp. Gr. νέμω, Goth. niman = Ger. nehmen. See cognates in Walde loc. cit. under nemus
(nt.) naming, giving a name Kp-a 78; Dhs-a 52 (see nāma2); Vism 528.
a philosophical term constructed by Bdhgh. from nāma, cp. ruppana-rūpa
(f.) bent, application, industry Vb 352.
abstr. to namati, cp. Sk. namana nt.
to pay honour to, to venerate, honour, do homage to (often with pañjalika & añjaliṃ katvā) Snp 236, Snp 485, Snp 598, Snp 1058 Snp 1063; Nd ii.334; Ja iii.83; Pv ii.1220; Kp-a 196; pot namasseyya Iti 110; Dhp 392, Dhp 1st pl. namassemu Snp 995 ppr. namassaṃ Snp 334, Snp 934; namassanto Snp-a 565, (usually) namassamāna Snp 192, Snp 1142; Nd i.400; Ja ii.73; Vv-a 7 ■ aor. namassiṃsu Snp 287 ■ ger. namassitvā Ja i.1 ■ grd. (as adj.) namassaniya (venerable) Mil 278.
Ved. namasyati, Denom. fr. namo
(nt.) (?) veneration Ja i.1.
(namassā) (f.) worship, veneration Mil 140.
Sk. namasyā
bent on, disposed to (-˚), able or capable of Ja iii.392 (pabbajjāya-namita-citta); Mil 308 (phalabhāra˚).
pp. nameti
(nt.) & Nama (nt.) nomage, veneration esp. used as an exclamation of adoration at the beginning of a book (namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammāsambuddhassa) Snp 540, Snp 544; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 67.
Ved. namas, cp. Av. nəmo prayer; Gr. νέμος, Lat. nemus (see namati)
(Np.) a name of Māra.
(adj.-n.) “leading”; usually m: way (fig.), method, plan, manner; inference; sense, meaning (in grammar); behaviour, conduct AN ii.193 = Nd ii.151 (˚hetu through inference); Ne 2 (method), 4 (id.), 7, 113; Mil 316 (nayena = nayahetu); Kp-a 74; Vv-a 112 (sense, context, sentence) Pv-a 1 (ways or conduct), 117 (meaning), 126 (id.), 136 280 ■ nayaṃ neti to draw a conclusion, apply an inference, judge, behave SN ii.58 = Vb 329; Ja iv.241 (anayaṃ nayati dummedho: draws a wrong conclusion) Pv-a 227 (+ anumināti) ■ With ˚ādi˚; N. has the function of continuing or completing the context “and similarly,” e.g. ˚ādinaya-pavatta dealing with this & the following Vv-a 2;… ti ādinā nayena thus & similarly, & so forth Ja i.81; Pv-a 30 ■ Instr. nayena (-˚) as adv. in the way of, as, according(ly): āgata according to what has been shown or said in… Ja i.59; Vv-a 3; Pv-a 280; purima˚ as before Ja i.59 Ja iv.140; vutta˚ as said (above) (cp. vutta-niyāmena Pv-a 13, Pv-a 29, Pv-a 36, Pv-a 71, Pv-a 92 etc ■ sunaya a sound judgment Ja iv.241; dunnaya a wrong principle, method or judgment, or as adj.: wrongly inferred, hard to be understood, unintelligible AN iii.178 = Ne 21; Ja iv.241.
from nayati, to lead, see neti
see neti.
(nt.) the eye Thig 381; Vv 353; Dhs 597 Vb 71 sq.; Mil 365; Thag-a 255; Vv-a 161 (= cakkhu) Pv-a 40 (nettāni nayanāni), 152; Sdhp 448, Sdhp 621.
Sk. nayana, to nayati = the leader cp. also netra = P. netta
to tie, bind; only in comp. with prep. as upanayhati (cp. upāhanā sandal), pilandhati etc ■ pp naddha (q.v.). See also nandhi, nāha; onayhati unnahanā, piḷayhati.
Ved. nahyati, Idg. *nedh as in Lat. nodus & Ved. nahu
(nt.) tying, binding; bond, fetter Dhp-a iv.161.
Sk. nahana
man (in poetry esp. a brave, strong heroic man), pl. either “men” or “people” (the latter e.g. at Snp 776, Snp 1082; Pv i.1112) ■ AN i.130 AN ii.5; AN iii.53; Snp 39, Snp 96, Snp 116, Snp 329, Snp 591, Snp 676, Snp 865 etc. Dhp 47, Dhp 48, Dhp 262, Dhp 309, Dhp 341; Ja iii.295; Nd i.12 = Nd ii.335 (definition); Vv-a 42 (popular etymology: narati netī ti naro puriso, i.e. a “leading” man); Pv-a 116 = Dhp 125.
-ādhama vilest of men Snp 246; -āsabha “man bull, i.e. lord of men Snp 684, Snp 996; -inda “man lord,” i.e. king Snp 836; Ja i.151; -uttama best of men (Ep. of the Buddha) SN i.23; DN iii.147; Snp 1021; -deva god-man or man-god (pl.) gods, also Ep. of the B. “king of men SN i.5; Pv iv.350; -nārī (pl.) men & women, appl. to male & female angelic servants (of the Yakkhas) Vv 32;4, 337 538; Pv ii.112; -vīra a hero (?), a skilled man (?) Thag 736 (naravīrakata “by human skill & wit” Mrs. Rh D.). -sīha lion of men Ja i.89.
Ved. nara, cp. nṛtu; Idg. *ner to be strong or valiant = Gr. ἀνήρ, ἀγ ήνωρ (valiant), δρώψ (*νρώψ); Lat neriosus (muscuḷar), Nero (Sabinian, cp. Oscan ner Lat. vir); Oir. nert
1. a pit DN i.234; Thag 869; Ja iv.268 (˚āvāṭa Pv-a 225).
2. a name for Niraya, i.e. purgatory; a place of torment for the deceased (see niraya & cp. list of narakas at Divy 67) SN i.209; Snp 706; Pv-a 52; Sdhp 492 (saṃsāraghora˚), 612.
-aṅgāra the ashes of purgatory Sdhp 32.
Sk. naraka; etym. doubtful, problematic whether to Gr. νέρτερος (= inferus), Ags. nord = north as region of the underworld
(nt.) nard, ointment Ja vi.537. Nala & Nala;
Sk. nalada, Gr. νάρδος, of Semitic origin, cp. Hebr. nīrd
a species of reed; reed in general Vin iv.35; AN ii.73; Dhp 337; Nd ii.680ii; Ja i.223; Ja iv.141 Ja iv.396 (n. va chinno); Pv i.116 (id.); Dhp-a iii.156; Dhp-a iv.43 See also nāḷa, nāḷī & nāḷikā.;
-āgāra a house built of reeds SN i.156; SN iv.185 (+ tiṇāgāra); AN i.101 (+ tiṇāgāra); Nd ii.40d (id.), Mil 245 cp. Avs Index ii.228 (naḍāgāra); -aggi a fire of reeds Ja vi.100 (˚vaṇṇaṃ pabbataṃ); -kalāpī a bundle of r SN ii.114; -kāra a worker in reeds, basket-maker DN i.51 (+ pesakāra & kumbhakāra); Ja v.291; Thag-a 28; Pv-a 175 (+ vilīvakāra); Dhp-a i.177; -daṇḍaka a shaft of r. Ja i.170; -maya made of r. Vin ii.115; -vana a thicket of reeds Ja iv.140; Mil 342; -sannibha reedcoloured Ja vi.537 (Com.: naḷa-puppha-vaṇṇa rukkhasunakha); -setu a bridge of reeds Snp 4.
Ved. naḍa & Sk. naḷa, with dial. ḍ (ḷ) for *narda, cp. Gr.; νάρδης
a water-animal Ja vi.537.
(nt.) the forehead SN i.118; Ja iii.393; Ja iv.417 (nalāṭena maccuṃ ādāya: by his forelock); Vism 185; Dhp-a i.253.
-anta the side of the forehead Ja vi.331; -maṇḍala the round of the f. DN i.106; Snp p.108.
Ved. lalāṭa = rarāṭa; on n → l cp. nangala
(f.) “belonging to the forehead,” a frown Vin ii.10 (nalāṭikaṃ deti to give a frown).
Sk. lalāṭikā
(f.) a pond Ja iv.90; Vism 84, Vism 17.
Sk. nalinī
(v. intr.) to perish, to be lost or destroyed, to disappear, come to an end Snp 666 (na hi nassati kassaci kammaṃ); Iti 90; Ja i.81, Ja i.116, Ja i.150; pret. nassaṃ (prohib.) Snp 1120, pl anassāma MN i.177; aor. nassi AN iii.54 (mā nassi prohib.) Ja iv.137 (cakkhūni ˚iṃsu: the eyes failed); fut. nassisati Ja i.5; cond. nassissa Ja ii.112 ■ Caus. nāseti (q.v.) See also pa˚.
Ved. naś; naśyati & naśati, cp. Gr.; νέκυς, νεκρός (corpse), νέκταρ (“overcoming death = nec + tr̥, cp. tarati); Lat. neco, noceo, noxius
(nt.) disappearance, loss, destruction AN iii.54 (˚dhamma adj. doomed to perish).
cp. Sk. naśana
one who has bathed Vin ii.221; Ja i.266; Dhp-a iv.232 (˚kilesatā washed off moral stain).
Sk. snāta, see nahāyati
“one who has bathed,” a brahmin who has finished the studies MN i.280; AN iv.144; Dhp 422 (expl. at Dhp-a iv.232 with ref. to perfection in the Buddha’s teaching: catusaccabuddhatāya buddha); cp. Snp 521 (one who has washed away all sin), 646.
Ved. snātaka, cp. nahāta & nahāyati
(nt.) bathing, a bath Vin i.47, Vin i.51 = Vin ii.224; Vin i.196 (dhuva˚ constant bathing), 197; SN i.183 SN v.390 (fig.); Ja i.265; Pv-a 50; Vism 27.
-kāla bathing time Pv-a 46; -koṭṭhaka bath-room Dhp-a iii.88; -garuka fond of bathing Vin i.196; -cuṇṇa bath powder (cp. nahāniya˚) Dhp-a i.398; -tittha a shallow place for bathing Dhp-a i.3; Dhp-a iii.79.
Sk. snāna
(adj.) belonging to a bath, bath-; in ˚cuṇṇa bath-powder Pv-a 46.
a barber, bath attendant DN i.74; AN iii.25; DN-a i.157 (= ye nahāpenti); Pv-a 127 (= kappaka).
Sk. snāpaka, fr. Caus, nahāpeti; cp. nahāpita
(nt.) bathing, washing (trs.) DN i.7, DN i.12; AN i.62, AN i.132; AN ii.70; AN iv.54; Iti 111 (ucchādana + ); Vv-a 305 (udakadāna + ).
a barber, who has also the business of preparing & giving baths (cp. Ger “bader”) a bath-attendant (see kappaka). Barbers ranked as a low class socially, and rebirth in a barber’s family was considered unfortunate. Vin i.249 (˚pubba who had formerly been a barber); DN i.225; Ja i.137 Ja ii.5; Ja iii.451; Ja iv.138 (eight kahāpaṇas as a barber’s fee) DN-a i.157 (= kappaka); Vv-a 207 (˚sālā a barber’s shop).
Sk. only snāpaka (see nahāpaka); new formation fr. Caus. nahāpeti as n. ag. with a- theme instead of ar-, cp. sallakatta for sallakattar
to wash, to give a bath, bathe Ja i.166; Pv-a 49; Vv-a 68, Vv-a 305.
Sk. snāpayati, Caus. of nahāyati
(adj.-n.) a barber, a low-class individual Pv iii.114 (= kappaka-jātika Pv-a 176).
= nahāpaka; Kern, Toev. asks: should it be nahāpin?
(rarely nhāyati ) to bathe (trs. & intr.), to wash, to perform an ablution (esp. at the end of religious studentship or after the lapse of a lustrative period) Vin ii.280; Ja i.265; Ja vi.336; Pv-a 93. ppr. nahāyanto (Pv-a 83); nahāyamāna (Vin ii.105); inf. nahāyituṃ (Vin i.47; Pv-a 144); ger. nahāyitvā (Ja i.50; Ja vi.367; Pv-a 42); nahātvā (Ja i.265; Ja iii.277; Dhp-a iii.88; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 62 (after mourning), 82; grd. nahāyitabba (Vin ii.220 Vin ii.280). Naharu & Nharu;
Ved. snāti & snāyati,; snā = Gr. νήξω (to swim), ναρός, *Νηρεύς (Nereid), ν ̈ησος (island) Lat. nare (to swim); cp. also Sk. snauti, Gr. νάω, νέω; Goth. sniwan
sinew, tendon muscle. In the anatomy of the body n. occupies the place between maṃsa (flesh, soft flesh) & aṭṭhi (bone) as is seen from ster. sequence chavi, camma, maṃsa nahāru, aṭṭhi, aṭṭhi-miñja (e.g. at Vin i.25; Ja iii.84) See also defn in detail at Snp-a 246 sq. & Kp-a 47.; Vin i.25 (nh˚); MN i.429 (used for bow strings); AN i.50 AN iii.324; AN iv.47 sq. (˚daddula), 129; Kh 111.; Snp 194 (aṭṭhi˚) Nd ii.97 (nh˚); Dhp-a iii.118; Thag-a 257 (nh˚) Pv-a 68 (aṭṭhi-camma˚), 80 (camma-maṃsa˚); Sdhp 46 Sdhp 103.
Sk. snāyu, Idg. *sné to sew, cp. Gr. νέω, νήχω, ν ̈ημα (thread); Ohg. nājan; also Gr. νεϋρον (= Lat. nervus); Ags. sinu (= sinew); Ohg. senawa Goth. nepla = Ags. nāēdl (= needle); Oir. snātha (thread); Ohg. snuor (cord) = Ags. snōd
(nt.) a vast number, a myriad Snp 677; Ja i.25, Ja i.83; Pv iv.17; Dhp-a i.88; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 265.
Sk. nayuta (m. pl.) of unknown etym. Is it the same as navuti? The corresponding v → y → h is frequent, as to meaning cp. nava 3
1. a serpent or Nāga demon, playing a prominent part in Buddh. fairy-tales, gifted with miraculous powers & great strength. They often act as fairies are classed with other divinities (see devatā), with whom they are sometimes friendly, sometimes at enmity (as with the Garuḷas) DN i.54; SN iii.240 sq.v.47, 63; Bu. i.30 (dīghāyukā mahiddhikā); Mil 23 Often with supaṇṇā (Garuḷas); Ja i.64; Dhp-a ii.4; Pv-a 272. Descriptions e.g. at Dhp-a iii.231, Dhp-a iii.242 sq.; see also cpds.
2. an elephant, esp. a strong, stately animal (thus in combn hatthi-nāga characterising “a Nāga elephant”) & freq. as symbol of strength & endurance (“heroic”). Thus Ep. of the Buddha & of Arahants Popular etymologies of n. are based on the excellency of this animal (āguṃ na karoti = he is faultless, etc.): see Nd;1 201 = Nd ii.337; Thag 693; Pv-a 57 ■ (a) the animal DN i.49; SN i.16; SN ii.217, SN ii.222; SN iii.85; SN v.351; AN ii.116; AN iii.156 sq.; Snp 543; Vv 55 (= hatthināga Vv-a 37); Pv i.113. mahā˚ AN iv.107, AN iv.110 ■ (b) fig. hero or saint: SN ii.277; SN iii.83; MN i.151, MN i.386; Dhp 320; Snp 29, Snp 53, Snp 166, Snp 421, Snp 518. Of the Buddha: Snp 522, Snp 845 Snp 1058, Snp 1101; Mil 346 (Buddha˚).
3. The Nāga-tree (now called “iron-wood tree,” the P. meaning “fairy tree”), noted for its hard wood & great masses of red flowers (= Sk. nāgakesara, mesua ferrea Lin.): see cpds ˚rukkha, ˚puppha, ˚latā.;
-āpalokita “elephant-look” (turning the whole body) a mark of the Buddhas MN i.337; cp. BSk. nāgâvalokita Divy 208; -danta an ivory peg or pin, also used as a hook on a wall Vin ii.117 (˚ka Vin ii.114, Vin ii.152); Ja vi.382 -nāṭaka snakes as actors Dhp-a iv.130; -nāsūru (f. (woman) having thighs like an elephant’s trunk Ja v.297 -puppha iron-wood flower Mil 283; -bala the strength of an elephant Ja i.265; Ja ii.158; -bhavana the world of snakes Nd i.448; Ja iii.275; Dhp-a iv.14; -māṇavaka a young serpent Ja iii.276; f. ˚ikā ib. 275; Dhp-a iii.232 -rājā king of the Nāgas, i.e. serpents Ja ii.111; Ja iii.275; Snp 379 (Erāvaṇa, see detail Snp-a 368); Dhp-a i.359 Dhp-a iii.231, Dhp-a iii.242 sq. (Ahicchatta); iv.129 sq. (Paṇṇaka) -rukkha the iron-wood tree Ja i.35 (cp. Mvu ii.249) -latā = rukkha Ja i.80 (the Buddha’s toothpick made of its wood), 232; Dhp-a ii.211 (˚dantakaṭṭha toothpick) -vatta habits of serpents Nd i.92, also adj. ˚ika ibid. 89 -vana elephant-grove Dhp 324; Dhp-a iv.15; -vanika cl hunter MN i.175; MN iii.132; -hata one who strikes the el (viz. the Buddha) Vin ii.195.
Ved. nāga; etym. of 1. perhaps fr. *snagh = Ags. snaca (snake) & snaegl (snail); of 2 uncertain, perhaps a Non-Aryan word distorted by popular analogy to nāga1
a citizen Ja i.150; Ja iv.404; Ja v.385; Dāvs ii.85; Vv-a 31; Pv-a 19; Dhp-a i.41.
Sk. nāgara, see nagara
(adj.) citizen-like, urbane, polite DN-a i.282.
Sk. nāgarika
1. (m.) a dancer, actor, player Ja i.206; Ja v.373; Dhp-a iii.88; Dhp-a iv.59, Dhp-a iv.130; nāṭakitthi a dancing-girl, nautch-girl Dhp-a iii.166; Vv-a 131.
2. (nt.) a play, pantomime Ja i.59; Ja v.279, also used coll. = dancing-woman Ja i.59 (?) ii.395.
Sk. nāṭaka; see naccati
protector, refuge, help AN v.23, AN v.89; Dhp 160 (attā hi attano n.), 380; Snp 1131 (Nd ii.has nāga) Dhp-a iv.117; Pv-a 1. lokanātha Saviour of the world (Ep. of the Buddha) Snp 995; Pv-a 42 ■ anātha helpless, unprotected, poor Ja i.6 (nāthânāthā rich poor); Pv-a 3 (˚sālā poor house) 65. Cp. nādhati.
Ved. nātha, nāth, to which Goth. nipan (to support), Ohg. gināda (grace)
loud sound, roaring, roar Ja i.19 (sīha˚), 50 (koñca˚), 150 (mahā˚). Cp. pa˚.
Sk. nāda, see nadati
(f.) = nāda, loud sound, thundering (fig.) Vv 6410.
to have need of to be in want of (c. gen.) Ja v.90 (Com. expls by upatappati milāyati; thinking perhaps of nalo va chinno).
Sk. nādhate = nāthate (see nātha), only in nadhamāna, cp. RV x.65, 5: nādhas
(nt. m.) diversity, variety, manifoldness, multiformity, distraction; all sorts of (opp. ekatta, cp. MN i.364: “the multiformity of sensuous impressions,” M.A.). Enumn of diversity as nānattā, viz. dhātu˚ phassa˚ vedanā˚ saññā˚ sankappa chanda˚ pariḷāha˚ pariyesanā˚ lābha˚ DN iii.289; SN ii.140 sq., cp. iv.113 sq., 284 sq.; Pts i.87 ■ AN iv.385; Pts i.63 sq., 88 sq.; SN ii.115 (vedanā˚); Pts i.91 (samāpatti & vihāra˚); Ja ii.265. In composition, substituted sometimes for nāna. Cp. Dialogues i.14, n. 2.
-kathā desultory talk, gossip DN i.8; (= niratthakakathā DN-a i.90); SN v.420; -kāya (adj.) having a variety of bodies or bodily states (combd with or opp. to ekatta˚, nānatta-saññin, & ekatta-saññin), appl. to manussā, devā, vinipātikā (cp. nava sattâvāsā) AN iv.39 sq. = Nd ii.5702; DN iii.253, DN iii.263, DN iii.282; -saññā consciousness of diversity (Rh. D.: “idea of multiformity, Dial. ii.119; Mrs. Rh. D. “consciousness of the manifold”) MN i.3; SN iv.113 sq.; DN iii.224, DN iii.262 sq., 282; AN i.41, AN i.267; AN ii.184; AN iii.306; Pts ii.172; Dhs 265 (cp trsl. p. 72); Vb 342, Vb 369; -saññin having a varying consciousness (cp. ˚kāya), DN i.31 (cp. DN-a i.119) 183 iii.263.
Sk. nānatva; abstr. fr. nānā
(f.) = nānatta, diversity (of states of mind). Seven sorts at Vb 425: ārammaṇa manasikāra˚ chanda˚ paṇidha˚ adhimokkha˚ abhinīhāra paññā˚.
2nd abstr. to nānā
(adv.) variously differently. 1. (abs.) AN i.138 (on different sides, viz right
1 285), 884 sq.
2. more frequently in cpds., as first part of adj. or n. where it may be trsld as “different, divers, all kinds of” etc Before a double cons. the final ā is shortened: nānagga (for nānā + agga), nānappakāra etc. see below.
-agga (-rasa) all the choicest delicacies Ja i.266 (˚bhojana, of food); Ja vi.366; Pv-a 155 (˚dibbabhojana) -ādhimuttikatā diversity of dispositions DN-a i.44 Ne 98; -āvudhā (pl.) various weapons Ja i.150; -karaṇa difference, diversity Vin i.339 (sangha˚); MN ii.128 cp. Divy 222; -gotta of all kinds of descent Pv ii.916 -citta of varying mind Ja i.295 (itthiyo); -jana all kinds of folk Snp 1102; Nd i.308 (puthu˚); -titthiya of var. sects DN iii.16 sq.; -pakkāra various, manifold Ja i.52 (sakuṇā) 127, 278 (phalāni); DAi. 148 (āvudhā); Pv-a 50, Pv-a 123 Pv-a 135; -ratta multi-coloured Snp 287; Ja vi.230; -rasā (pl. all kinds of dainties Pv ii.911; -vāda difference of opinion DN i.236; -vidha divers, various, motley Pv-a 53, Pv-a 96 Pv-a 113, and passim; -saṃvāsaka living in a different part or living apart Vin i.134 sq. (opp. samāna˚), 321; ii.162. Nabhi & Nabhi
Ved. nānā, a redupl. nā (emphatic particle, see na1) “so and so,” i.e. various, of all kinds
(f.) 1. the navel AN iii.240; Ja i.238; DN-a i.254 (where it is said that the Vessā (Vaiśyas) have sprung from the navel of Brahmā).
2. the nave of a wheel Vv 644 (pl. nabhyo & nabbho SS = nābhiyo Vv-a 276) Ja i.64; Ja iv.277; Mil 115.
Vedic nābhi, nābhī; Av. nabā; Gr. ὀμφαλός (navel); Lat. umbo & umbilicus; Oir. imbliu (navel); Ags. nafu; Ohg. naba (nave), Ger. nabel = E nave & navel
(nt.) name.
1. Literal. nom. nāmaṃ SN i.39; Snp 808; Ja ii.131; Mil 27; acc. nāmaṃ Pv-a 145 (likhi: he wrote her name) ■ nāmaṃ karoti to give a name Snp 344 Nd ii.466 (n’ etaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ on “Bhagavā”) Ja i.203, Ja i.262 (w. double acc.) ■ nāmaṃ gaṇhāti to call by name, to enumerate Ja iv.402; Pv-a 18 (v.l. BB nāmato g.). Definitions at Vin iv.6 (two kinds: hīna & ukkatṭha˚) and at Vism 528 (= namanalakkhaṇa)
2.; Specified. nāma as metaphysical term is opposed to rūpa, & comprises the 4 immaterial factors of an individual (arūpino khandhā, viz. vedanā saññā sankhāra viññāṇa; see khandha II. Ba). These as the noëtic principle combd with the material principle make up the individual as it is distinguished by “name & body” from other individuals. Thus nāmarūpa individuality, individual being. These two are inseparable (aññamaññûpanissitā ete dhammā, ekato va uppajjanti Mil 49). SN i.35 (yattha n. ca rūpañ ca asesaṃ uparujjhati taṃ te dhammaṃ idh’ aññāya acchiduṃ bhavabandhanaṃ); Snp 1036, Snp 1100; Nd i.435 = Nd ii.339 (nāma = cattāro arūpino khandhā); Dhp-a iv.100 (on Dhp 367): vedanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ rūpakkhandhassa cā ti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ vasena pavattaṃ nāmarūpaṃ; Dhs-a 52: nāmarūpa-duke nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena nāmaṭṭhena namanaṭṭhena ca nāmaṃ ruppanaṭṭhena rūpaṃ. Cp. DN i.223; DN ii.32, DN ii.34, DN ii.56, DN ii.62; SN i.12 (taṇhā nrūpe), 23 (n-rūpasmiṃ asajjamāna); ii.3, 4, 66 (nrūpassa avakkanti), 101 sq. (id.); MN i.53; AN i.83, AN i.176 AN iii.400; AN iv.385 (˚ārammaṇa); v.51, 56; Snp 355, Snp 537 Snp 756, Snp 909; Dhp 367; Iti 35; Pts i.193; Pts ii.72, Pts ii.112 sq. Vb 294; Ne 15 sq., 28, 69; Mil 46. Nāma + rūpa form an elementary pair DN iii.212; Kp iv. Also in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.), where it is said to be caused (conditioned) by viññāṇa & to cause saḷāyatana (the 6 senses), DN ii.34; Vin i.1 sq.; SN ii.6 sq.; Snp 872 (nāmañ ca rūpañca paṭicca phassā; see in detail expld at Nd i.276). Synonymous with nāmarūpa is nāmakāya Snp 1074; Nd ii.338; Pts i.183; Ne 27, Ne 41, Ne 69, Ne 77. In this connection to be mentioned are var. definitions of nāma as the principle or distinguishing mark (“label” of the individual, given by Coms, e.g. Nd i.109, Nd i.127 Kp-a 78; with which cp. Bdhgh’s speculation concerning the connotation of nāma mentioned by Mrs. Rh. D. at Dhs. trsl. p. 341.
3. Use of Cases. Instr. nāmena by name Pv-a 1 (Petavatthū ti n.); Mvu vii.32 (Sirīsavatthu n.) ■ acc. nāma (the older form, cp. Sk. nāma by name SN i.33, SN i.235 (Anoma˚); Snp 153, Snp 177; Ja i.59 (ko nām’ esa “who by name is this one” = what is his name), 149 (nāmena Nigrodhamigarājā n.), 203 (kiṃsaddo nāma esa); ii.4; iii.187; vi.364 (kā nāma tvaṃ). See also evaṃnāma, kinnāma; & cp. the foll.
4.; nāma (acc.) as adv. is used as emphatic particle = just, indeed for sure, certainly Ja i.222; Ja ii.133, Ja ii.160, Ja ii.326; Ja iii.90; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 63 etc. Therefore freq. in exclamation exhortation (“please,” certainly) Ja vi.367; Dhp-a iii.171; Pv-a 29 (n. detha do give); in combn with interr. pron. = now, then Ja i.221 (kiṃ n.), 266 (kathaṃ n.); iii.55 (kiṃ); Kp iv. (ekaṃ n. kiṃ); with neg. = not at all, certainly not Ja i.222; Ja ii.352; Ja iii.126 etc ■ Often further emphasised or emphasising other part.; e.g. pi (= api) nāma really, just so Vin i.16 (seyyathā p. n.) Snp p.15 (id.); Vv-a 22 (read nāma kāro); Pv-a 76 app’ (= api) eva n. thus indeed, forsooth Vin i.16; Iti 89 = MN i.460; Ja i.168; Pv ii.26 (= api nāma Pv-a 80) eva nāma in truth Pv-a 2; nāma tāva certainly Dhp-a i.392, etc.
-kamma giving a name, naming, denomination Dhs 1306; Bdhd 83; -karaṇa name-giving, “christening Dhp-a ii.87; -gahaṇa receiving a name, “being christened” Ja i.262 (˚divasa) -gotta ancestry, lineage SN i.43 (˚ṃ na jīrati); Snp 648, Nd ii.385 (mātāpettikaṃ n.) -dheyya assigning a name, name-giving Ja iii.305 Ja iv.449; Ja v.496; Dhs 1306. -pada see pada. -matta a mere name Mil 25.
Vedic nāman, cp. Gr. ο ̓́νομα (ἀν ώνυμος without name); Lat. nomen; Goth. namō; Ags. noma, Ohg namo
(adj.) 1. (-˚) by name SN ii.282 (Thera˚); Pv-a 67, Pv-a 96 (kaṇha˚).
2. consisting of a mere name i.e. mere talk, nonsense, ridiculous DN i.240.
fr. nāma
at Snp 1143 (Fsb.) is to be read as nâpenti. Otherwise see under namati.
a leader, guide, lord, mostly as Ep. of the Buddha (loka˚ “Lord of the World” Snp 991 (loka˚); Mvu vii.1 (id.); Sdhp 491 (tilokassa) bala-nāyakā gang leaders Ja i.103.
BSk. nāyaka (cp. anāyaka without guide Avs i.210); fr. neti; cp. naya
an iron weapon, an arrow or javelin MN i.429; Ja iii.322; Mil 105, Mil 244, Mil 418 -valaya an iron ring or collar (?) Mvu vii.20 (Com “vaṭṭita-assanārāca-pasa” = a noose formed by bending the ends of the n. into a circle).
Sk. nārāca; perhaps for *nāḍāca & conn. with nālīka, a kind of arrow, to nāḷa
(f.) woman, wife, female Snp 301, Snp 836; Dhp 284; Ja i.60; Ja iii.395; Ja iv.396 (˚gaṇa); Vv 61, 4416; Pv i.91 (= itthi Pv-a 44). pl. nariyo (Snp 299, Snp 304, Snp 703), nāriyo (Snp 703 v.l. BB; Pv ii.952). Combd with nara as naranārī, male & female (angels), e.g. Vv 53;8 Pv ii.112 (see nara). Nala & Nala;
Sk. nārī to nara man, orig. “the one belonging to the man”
(nt.) a hollow stalk, esp. that of the water lily AN iv.169; Ja i.392 (˚pana v.l. ˚vana); Vv-a 43. See also nāḷikā & nālī.;
Sk. nāla, see nala
(adv.) not enough, insufficient Iti 37; Ja i.190; DN-a i.167.
= na alaṃ
(f.) a stalk, shaft; a tube, pipe or cylinder for holding anything; a small measure of capacity Vin ii.116 (sūci˚, cp. sūcighara, needle-case) DN i.7 (= bhesajja˚ DN-a i.89); AN i.210; Ja i.123 (taṇḍula a nāḷi full of rice); vi.366 (aḍḍha-n-matta); Nd ii.229 Cp. pa˚.
-odana a nāḷi measure of boiled rice SN i.82; Dhp-a iv.17; -gabbha an (inner) room of tubular shape Vin ii.152.
Sk. nāḍikā & nālikā
the coconut tree Vv 4413 Ja iv.159; Ja v.384; DN-a i.83; Vv-a 162.
Sk. nārikera, nārikela, nalikera, nālikela: dialect, of uncertain etym.
(adj.) belonging to the coconut tree Ja v.417.
(f.) & (in cpds.); nāḷi a hollow stalk, tube, pipe; also a measure of capacity Vin i.249; AN iii.49; Ja i.98 (suvaṇṇa˚), 124 (taṇḍula˚), 419; iii.220 (kaṇḍa˚ a quiver); iv.67; Dhp-a ii.193 (tela˚), 257. Cp pa˚.
-paṭṭa a covering for the head, a cap Ja vi.370, Ja vi.444 (text ˚vaṭṭa); -matta as much as a tube holds AN ii.199; Pv-a 283; Dhp-a ii.70; Ja i.419 (of aja-laṇḍikā).
Sk. nāḍī, see nala
(f.) a boat, ship Vin iii.49 (q.v. for definition & description) SN i.106 (eka-rukkhikā); iii.155 = v.51 = AN iv.127 (sāmuddikā “a liner”); AN ii.200; AN iii.368; Snp 321, Snp 770, Snp 771; Dhp 369 (metaphor of the human body); Ja i.239 Ja ii.112; Ja iii.126; Ja iii.188; Ja iv.2, Ja iv.21, Ja iv.138; Ja v.75 (with “500 passengers), 433; vi.160 (= nāvyā canal? or read nālaṃ?); Vv 61 (= pota Vv-a 42, with pop. etym. “satte netī ti nāvā ti vuccati”); Pv iii.35 (= doṇi Pv-a 189) Mil 261 (100 cubits long); Dāvs iv.42; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 53 Sdhp 321. In simile Vism 690.
-tittha a ferry Ja iii.230; -sañcaraṇa (a place for) the traffic of boats, a port Mil 359.
Ved. nāuḥ & nāvā, Gr.; ναϋς, Lat. navis
a mariner, sailor, skipper Mil 365.
Sk. nāvāja = Gr. ναυηγός, cp. Lat. navigo
1. a sailor, mariner Ja ii.103; Ja iv.142; Mil 359; Dāvs iv.43 (captain).
2. a ferryman Ja ii.111; Ja iii.230 (Avariya-pitā.).
Sk. nāvika
(adj.) 90 years old Ja iii.395 (˚ā itthi); Snp-a 172.
fr. navuti
destruction, ruin, death Ja i.5, Ja i.256; Sdhp 58, Sdhp 319. Usually vi˚, also adj. vināsaka Cp. panassati.
Sk. nāśa, see nassati
(nt.) destruction, abandoning, expulsion, in ˚antika (adj.) a bhikkhu who is under the penalty of expulsion Vin i.255.
Sk. nāśana
(f.) 1. the nose, Snp 198, Snp 608.
2. the trunk (of an elephant) Ja v.297 (nāga˚-uru); Sdhp 153.
-puṭa “nose-cup”; the outside of the nose, the nostril Ja vi.74; Vism 195 (nāsa˚), 264 (nāsa˚, but Kp-a 67 nāsā˚), 283 (nāsa˚). -vāta wind, i.e. breath from the nostrils Ja iii.276.
Vedic nāsā (du.); Lat. nāris, Ohg. nasa, Ags. nasu
(adj.) belonging to the nose, nasal, in ˚sota the nostril or nose (orig. “sense of smell” DN i.106; Snp p.108.
cp. Sk. nāsikya
(adj.) one who is ejected Vin iv.140 (of a bhikkhu).
see nāsa & nāseti
1. to destroy, spoil, ruin; to kill Ja i.59; Ja ii.105, Ja ii.150; Ja iii.279, Ja iii.418. 2. to atone for a fault (with abl.) Vin i.85, Vin i.86, Vin i.173 etc. Cp. vi˚.
Sk. nāśayati, Caus. of nassati, q.v.
(nt.) armour Ja i.358 (sabba˚sannaddha). Cp. onāha.
cp. nayhati, naddha
;. Nearly all (ultimately prob. all words under this heading are cpds. with the pref. ni.; A. Forms. 1. Pāli ni˚; combines the two prefixes ni nis; (nir). They are outwardly to be distinguished inasmuch as ni is usually followed by a single consonant (except in forms where double cons. is usually restored in composition, like ni-kkhipati = ni + kṣip; nissita ni + sri. Sometimes the double cons. is merely graphic or due to analogy, esp. in words where ni-is contrasted with ud- (“up”), as nikkujja → ukkujja, niggilati → uggilati, ninnamati → unnamati). On the other hand a compn with nis is subject to the rules of assimilation viz. either doubling of cons. (nibbhoga = nir-bhoga where vv is represented by bb (nibbiṇṇa fr. nir-vindati) or lengthening of ni to nī (nīyādeti as well as niyy˚ nīharati = nir + har ), or single cons. in the special cases of r & v; (niroga besides nīroga for nirroga, cp. duratta → dūrakkha; niveṭheti = nibbeṭheti, nivāreti = *nivvāreti = nīvāreti). Before a vowel the sandhi-cons. r is restored: nir-aya, nir-upadhi etc.
2. Both ni & nis are base-prefixes only, & of stable, well-defined character i.e. never enter comb;ns with other prefixes as first (modifying) components in verb-function (like saṃ, vi etc.), although nis occurs in such combn in noun-cpds negating the whole term: nir-upadhi, nis-saṃsaya etc. 3. ni is freq. emphasised by saṃ as saṃni˚ (tud, dhā pat, sad); nis most freq. by abhi as abhinis˚ (nam, pad vatt, har).
B. Meanings. 1. ni (with secondary derivations like nīca “low”) is a verb-pref. only, i.e. it characterises action with respect to its direction, which is that of (a) a downward motion (opp. abhi & ud); (b) often implying the aim (= down into, on to, cp. Lat. sub in subire, or pref. ad˚); or (c) the reverting of an upward motion = back (identical with b); e.g. (a) ni-dhā (put down), ˚kkhip (throw d.), ˚guh (hide d.), ˚ci (heap up) ˚pad (fall d.), ˚sad (sit d.); (b) ni-ratta (at-tached to) ˚mant (speak to); ˚yuj (ap-point), ˚ved (ad-dress), ˚sev (be devoted to) etc.; (c) ni-vatt (turn back).
2. nis (a) as verb-pref. it denotes the directional “out” with further development to “away from, opposite, without, pointing out the finishing, completion or vanishing of an action & through the latter idea often assuming the meaning of the reverse, disappearance or contrary of an action = “un” (Lat. dis-), e.g. nikkhamati (to go out from) opp. pavisati (to enter into), ˚ccharati (nis to car to go forth), ˚ddhamati (throw out), ˚pajjati (result from), ˚bbattati (vatt spring out from), nīharati (take out), nirodhati (break up, destroy) ■ (b) as nounpref it denotes “being without” or “not having” E. -less, e.g. niccola without clothes, ˚ttaṇha (without thirst), ˚ppurisa (without a man), ˚pphala (without fruit); niccala motion-less, ˚kkaruṇa (heartless), ˚ddosa (fault˚), ˚maṃsa (flesh˚), ˚saṃsaya (doubt˚) nirattha (useless), ˚bbhaya (fear˚) ■ Bdhgh evidently takes ni- in meaning of nis only, when defining: ni-saddo abhāvaṃ dīpeti Vism 495.
Sk. ni-& nih-, insep. prefixes: (a) ni down = Av. ni, cp. Gr.; νειός lowland, νείατος the lowest, hindmost Lat. nīdus (*ni-zdos: place to sit down = nest); Ags nēol, nider = E. nether; Goth. nidar = Ohg. nidar; also Sk. nīca, nīpa etc ■ (b) niḥ out, prob. fr. *seni & to Lat. sine without
see nikati.
(adj.) brought down, debased, low. As one kind of puggala (n-kāya + ncitta) AN ii.137. loc. nikaṭṭhe (adv.) near Ja iii.438 Thag-a 105 (v. 33) (= santike Ja iii.438).
cp. Sk. nikṛṣṭa, ni + kasati
(adj.) under (4) ears, secret, cp. catukkaṇṇa Ja iii.124; nt. adv. secretly Vin iv.270, Vin iv.271.
(adj.) deceived, cheated MN i.511 (+ vañcita paladdha); SN iv.307 (+ vañcita paluddha).
Sk. nikṛta, ni + karoti “done down”
(f.) fraud, deceit, cheating DN i.5 (= DN-a i.80 paṭirūpakena vañcanaṃ); iii.176; Snp 242 (= nirāsaṃ-karaṇaṃ Snp-a 286); Ja i.223; Pv iii.95 (+ vañcana); Pp 19, Pp 23, Pp 58; Vv-a 114; Pv-a 211 (paṭirūpadassanena paresaṃ vikāro) ■ instr. nikatiyā (metri causa) Ja i.223, nikatyā Ja ii.183, nikacca SN i.24. Cp nekatika.
Sk. nikṛti, see prec.
(adj.) cut, (ab-)razed MN i.364 (of a fleshless bone).
Sk. nikṛtta & nikṛntita (cp. Divy 537, Divy 539), ni + kantati;2
to cut down, to cut up, cut off Pv-a 210 (piṭṭhi-maṃsāni the flesh of the back, v.l. SS for ukkant˚); Pgdp 29.
Sk. ni-kṛṇtati, see kantati2
(f.) desire, craving, longing for, wish Thag 20; Pts ii.72, Pts ii.101; Dhs 1059 Dhs 1136; Vism 239, Vism 580; Dhs-a 369; Dhp-a iv.63; DN-a i.110 Dāvs iii.40.
Sk. nikānti, ni + kamati
a multitude Dāvs v.25 (jātipuppha˚).
Sk. nikara, ni + karoti
(f. or is it ˚aṃ?) = nikati (fraud) Pp 19, Pp 23 (as syName of māyā).
to bring down, humiliate, to deceive, cheat Snp 138 (nikubbetha Pot. = vañceyya Kp-a 247). pp. nikata (q.v.).
Sk. nikaroti, ni + karoti
a whetstone Dāvs iii.87 (˚opala).
Sk. nikasa, ni + kasati
(adj.) free from impurity Vin i.3; opp. anikkasāva (q.v. Dhp 9≈.
Sk. niṣkaṣāya nis + kasāva see kasāya 2d
desire, pleasure, longing: only in cpds.; see nanikāma.
-kāra read by Kern (Toev. 174) at Thag 1271 for na kāmakāra but unjustified (see Snp-a on Snp 351); -lābhin gaining pleasure SN ii.278; MN i.354; MN iii.110; AN ii.23, AN ii.36 Pp 11, Pp 12; Vb 332.
Vedic nikāma, ni + kāma
(f.) = nikanti, Dhs 1059.
to crave, desire, strive after, ppr nikāmayaṃ SN i.122, & nikāmayamāna Vin ii.108. Cp. nikanta & nikanti.;
Sk. ni-kāmayati, ni + kāmeti
collection (“body”) assemblage, class, group; 1. generally (always-˚): eka˚; one class of beings Dhs-a 66; tiracchāna˚; the animal kingdom SN iii.152; deva˚; the assembly of the gods, the gods DN ii.261 (60); MN i.102; SN iv.180; AN iii.249; AN iv.461; Pv-a 136; satta˚; the world of beings, the animate creation, a class of living beings SN ii.2, SN ii.42, SN ii.44; MN i.49 (tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi s ■ nikāye of all beings in each class); Vb 137; Pv-a 134.
2. especially the coll. of Buddhist Suttas, as the 5 sections of the Suttanta Piṭaka, viz. Dīgha˚, Majjhima˚, Saṃyutta˚ Anguttara˚ (referred to as D.M.S.A. in Dictionaryquotations), Khuddaka˚; enumd Pv-a 2; Anvs p. 35; Dhp-a ii.95 (dhammāsanaṃ āruyha pañcahi nikāyehi atthañ ca kāraṇañ ca ākaḍḍhitvā). The five Nikāyas are enumd also at Vism 711; one is referred to at Snp-a 195 (pariyāpuṇāti master by heart). See further details under piṭaka. Cp. nekāyika.
Sk. nikāya, ni + kāya
service, humility Ja iii.120 (nikāra-pakāra, prob. to be read nipaccākāra, q.v.).
Sk. nikāra in diff. meaning, ni + kāra
(n ■ adj.) appearance; adj. of appearance, like Ja v.87 (-˚), corresp. to ˚avakāsa.
ni + kaś
(adj.) “shining,” resembling, like Ja iii.320 (aggi-nikāsinā suriyena).
cp. Sk. nikāśin; fr. ni + kāsati
(adj.) “strewn down into,” hidden away, sheltered Ja iii.529.
Sk. *nikīrṇa, pp. ni + kirati, cp. kiraṇa
(adj.) engrossed in play Ja vi.313.
Sk. *nikrīḍita, pp. of nikrīḍayati, ni + kīḷati
(adj.) playful, playing or dallying with (c. loc.), finding enjoyment in SN i.9 (a˚ kāmesu) iv.110 (id.).
fr. ni-kīḷati
see nikkujja, q.v. also for nikujjita which is more correctly spelt k than kk (cp. Trenckner, Preface to Majjhima Nikāya & see ni˚ A 1).;
to be bent down on, i.e. to attach importance to, to lay weight on DN i.53 (as vv.ll. to be preferred to text reading nikkujj˚ cp. nikujja); DN-a i.160 (nikk˚).
ni + kujjati, see kujja & cp. nikkujja
a hollow down, a glen, thicket Dāvs iv.32.
Sk. nikuñja, ni + kuñja
1. to chirp, warble, hum Thag 1270 (nikūjaṃ); Thag-a 211 (nikūji).
2. to twang, jingle, rustle Ja iii.323 ■ pp. nikūjita ■ Cp abhi˚.
ni + kūjati “to sing on”
sung forth, warbled out Thig 261.
see nikūjati
a corner, top, climax Ja i.278 (arahatta˚, where usually arahattena kūṭaṃ etc.) DN-a i.307 (id.).
ni + kūṭa to kūṭa2
1. house, abode Dhp 91 (= ālaya Dhp-a ii.170).
2. (fig.) company association. (In this sense it seems to be interpreted as belonging to ketu “sign, characteristic, mark,” and niketa-sārin would have to be taken as “following the banner or flag of…, ” i.e. belonging or attached to i.e. a follower of, one who is devoted to.) a˚; not living in company, having no house Snp 207; Mil 244 (+ nirālaya).
-vāsin (a˚) not living in a house, not associating with anybody Mil 201; -sayana = ˚vāsin Mil 361; -sārin (a˚) “wandering homeless” or “not living in company, i.e. not associating with, not a follower of… SN iii.9 sq. = Nd i.198; Snp 844 = SN iii.9; Snp-a 255 = SN iii.10; Snp 970 (= Nd i.494 q.v.).
Sk. niketa settlement, ni + cināti
(adj.) parting company with Mil 288 (kamma˚).
to niketa
(adj.) having an abode, being housed, living in Snp 422 (kosalesu); Ja iii.432 (duma-sākhā-niketinī f.).
(adj.) not afraid, fearless, not doubting confident, sure Ja i.58. Cp. nissaṃsaya.
Sk. niḥśanka, nis + kankha, adj. of kankhā, cp. kankhin
(f.) fearlessness, state of confidence, trust (cp. nibbicikicchā) SN v.221.
Sk. niḥśankā, nis + kankhā
to throw out Vin iv.274 (Caus. nikkaḍḍhāpeti ibid.) Ja i.116; Ja ii.440; Snp-a 192. pp. nikkaḍḍhita.
Sk. niṣkarṣati, nis + kasati, cp. kaḍḍhati
(f.) throwing out, ejection Ja iii.22 (a˚); v.234. (= niddhamanā).
(adj.) thrown out Ja ii.103 (gehā); Pv-a 179 (read ḍḍh for ḍḍ).
Sk. *niṣkarṣita see nikkaḍḍhati
(adj.) free from thorns or enemies Mil 250; cp. akaṇṭaka.
Sk. niṣkaṇṭaka, nis + kaṇṭaka
(adj.) unstained, not dirty, free from impunity DN-a i.226.
nis + kaddama
(n ■ adj.) exertion, strength, endurance. The orig. meaning of “going forth” is quite obliterated by the fig. meaning (cp nikkhamati & nekkhamma) AN i.4; AN iii.214; Vv 187 (= viriya Vv-a 96); Dhs 13, Dhs 22, Dhs 219, Dhs 571; Vism 132; Mil 244 (+ ārambha) ■ (adj.) strong in (-˚), enduring exerting oneself SN i.194 (tibba˚); v.66, 104 sq.; Snp 68 (daḷha˚, cp. Nd ii.under padhānavā), 542 (sacca˚).
Sk. niṣkrama; nis + kama
to go out, to go forth; in fig meaning: to leave behind lust, evil & the world, to get rid of “kāma” (craving), to show right exertion strength Mil 245 (+ arabhati) + S i.156 (kkh).
Sk. niṣkramati, nis + kamati, see also nikkhamati & nekkhamma
“buying off,” redemption Ja vi.577.
cp. Sk. niṣkraya, nis + kaya cp. nikkiṇāti
(adj.) without compassion, heartless Snp 244 (= sattānaṃ anatthakāma); Sdhp 508.
nis + karuṇa, adj. of karuṇā
(f.) = following Vism 314.
(f.) heartlessness Pv-a 55.
Sk. niṣkaruṇatā; nis + karuṇā
see nikasāva.
(adj.) without craving or lust, desireless Snp 1131 (= akāmakāmin Nd ii.340 pahīnakāma Snp-a 605 with v.l.: nikkāma). Cp. next.
Sk. niṣkāma, nis + kāma
(adj.) = nikkāma Snp 228 (= katanikkhamana Kp-a 184).
nis + kāmin
(abl. = adv.) without reason, without cause or purpose Snp 75 (= akāraṇā ahetu Nd ii.341).
Sk. niṣkāraṇā, nis + kāraṇaṃ
is Bdhgh’s reading for ikkāsa (q.v.) Vin ii.151, with C. on p. 321.
to buy back, to redeem Ja vi.576, Ja vi.585; Mil 284.
Sk. niṣkriṇāti, nis + kiṇāti
(adj.) spread out, spread before, ready (for eating) Ja vi.182 (= ṭhapita Com.).
Sk. niṣkīrṇa, nis + kiṇṇa, see kiraṇa
freedom fr. moral blemish Nd i.340 = Nd ii.under pucchā Nd ii.185; as adj. pure, unstained Dhp-a iv.192 = Snp-a 469 (= anāvila).
nis + kilesa
(adj.) bent down, i.e. head forward, lying on one’s face; upset, thrown over AN i.130; SN v.48; Pv iv.77 (k); Pp 31. Opp. ukkujja.
ni + kubja, better spelling is nikujja see nikkujjati
to turn upside down, to upset Vin ii.113; AN iv.344 (pattaṃ). pp. nikkujjita.
for nikujjati (q.v.) through analogy with opp. ukkujjati. Etym. perhaps to kujja humpback, Sk kubja, but better with Kern, Toev. 1. p. 175 = Sk. nyubjati influenced by kubja with regard to k.
(adj.) lying face downward, overturned, upset fallen over, stumbled Vin i.16; DN i.85, DN i.110; DN i.147, MN i.24 (k.); AN i.173; AN iii.238; Thig 28, Thig 30 (k.); Ja iii.277; Snp-a 155 (= adhomukha-ṭhapita); DN-a i.228.
pp. of nikkujjati; often (rightly) spelt nikujjita, q.v.
(adj.) without deceit, not false AN ii.26 = Iti 113; Snp 56; Nd ii.342.
nis + kuha
(adj.) without anger, free from anger Ja iv.22.
nis + kodha
(m. & nt.) 1. a golden ornament for neck or breast, a ring Ja ii.444; Ja vi.577.
2. (already Vedic) a golden coin or a weight of gold (cp. a “pound sterling”) equal to 15 suvaṇṇas (Vv-a 104 = suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa-dharaṇaṃ nikkhan ti vadanti) SN ii.234 (suvaṇṇa & singi˚); Ja i.84 (id.); AN iv.120 (suvaṇṇa˚); Vv 208 438 (v.l. SS nekkha) Ja vi.180; Mil 284. suvaṇṇanikkha-sataṃ (100 gold pieces) Ja i.376; Ja iv.97; Ja v.58 ˚sahassaṃ (1000) Ja v.67; Dhp-a i.393 ■ See also nekkha.
Vedic niṣka; cp. Oir. nasc (ring), Ohg. nusca (bracelet)
(adj.) gone out, departed from (c. abl.), gone away; also med going out, giving up, fig. leaving behind, resigning renouncing (fusing in meaning with kanta1 of kāmyati = desireless) SN i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaṃ); Snp 991 (Kapilavatthumhā n. lokanāyako); Ja i.149; Ja ii.153 Ja iv.364 (˚bhikkhā, in sense of nikkhāmita˚, v.l. nikkhitta˚ perhaps preferable, expld p. 366 nibaddha˚ designed for, given to); Snp-a 605 (fig.; as v.l. for nikkāma); Dhp-a ii.39; Pv-a 61 (bahi); Nd ii.under nissita Nd ii.107 (free, unobstructed).
pp. of nis + kamati, see nikkhamati
(adj.) going out from Pv-a 80 (nāsikāya n ■ mala). dun˚; at Thag 72 is to be read dunnikkhaya, as indicated by vv.ll. See the latter.
cp. Sk. niṣkrama
to go forth from, to come out of (c. abl.), to get out, issue forth depart, fig. to leave the household life behind (agārā n.), to retire from the world (cp. abhinikkhamati etc.) or to give up evil desire ■ (a) lit. (often with bahi outside, out; opp. pavisati to enter into: AN v.195) DN ii.14 (mātu kucchismā); Ja i.52 (mātukucchito) Imper. nikkhama Pv. i.103; ppr. nikkhamanto Ja i.52 Ja ii.153; Ja iii.26 (mukhato); Pv-a 90; aor. nikkhami Ja ii.154; Ja iii.188; fut. ˚issati Ja ii.154; ger. nikkhamma Ja i.51, Ja i.61 (fig.) & nikkhamitvā Ja i.16, Ja i.138 (fig.), 265 iii.26; iv.449 (n. pabbajissāmi); Pv-a 14, Pv-a 19 (fig.) 67 (gāmato), 74 (id.); inf. nikkhamituṃ Ja i.61 (fig.); ii.104; Pv i.102 (bahi n.); grd. nikkhamitabba Vin i.47. (b) fig. (see also nikkamati, & cp. nekkhamma & BSk niṣkramati in same meaning, e.g. Divy 68 etc.) SN i.156 (ārabbhati + ) = Mil 245 (where nikkamati); Ja i.51 (agārā), 61 (mahābhinikkhamanaṃ “the great renunciation”), Pv-a 19 (id.) ■ pp. nikkhanta; caus. nikkhameti (q.v.).
Sk. niṣkramati, nis + kamati
going out, departing Ja ii.153; Vv-a 71 (opp. pavesana); fig renunciation Kp-a 184 (kata˚ as adj. = nikkāmin). See also abhi˚. Nikkhameti & Nikkhameti;
BSk. niṣkramaṇa, to nikkhamati
to make go out or away, to bring out or forth SN ii.128; Ja i.264 Ja ii.112 ■ pp. nikkhāmita Ja iii.99 (+ nicchuddha thrown out, in expln of nibbāpita; v.l. BB. nikaḍhāpita).
Caus. of nikkhamati
(adj.) liable to destruction, able to be destroyed, in dun˚; hard to destroy Ja iv.449 (= dun-nikkaḍḍhiya Com.); also to be read (v.l.) at Thag 72 for dunnikkhama. Cp. nikhīṇa.
Sk. *niḥkṣaya, nis + khaya
(adj.) laid down, lying; put down into, set in, arranged; in cpds. (˚-having laid down = freed of, rid of DN ii.14 (maṇi-ratanaṃ vatthe n. set into); Iti 13 (sagge: put into heaven) Ja i.53, Ja i.266; Pv iii.68; Mil 343 (agga˚; put down as the highest, i.e. of the highest praise; cp. BSk. agranikṣipta Lal. V. 167); Pv-a 148 (dhana n. = collected v.l. SS. nikkita). nikkhitta- daṇḍa (adj.) not using a weapon (cp. daṇḍa) SN i.141 etc.; nikkhitta- dhura unyoked freed of the yoke AN i.71; AN iii.108; cp. Dhs-a 145;- su˚; well set, well arranged AN ii.147 sq. (˚assa pada-vyañjanassa attho sunnayo hoti); opp. dun˚ AN i.59; Ne 21.
Sk. nikṣipta, see nikkhipati
(adj.-n.) one to whose charge something has been committed Dpvs iv.5 (agga˚; thera original depositary of the Faith).
fr. nikkhitta
1. to lay down (carefully), to put down, to lay (an egg) Vin ii.114; Iti 13, Iti 14 (Pot. nikkhipeyya); Pp 34; Ja i.49 (aṇḍakaṃ)
2. to lay aside, to put away Vin i.46 (patta-cīvaraṃ) AN i.206 (daṇḍaṃ to discard the weapon; see daṇḍa) Mvu 14, Mvu 10 (dhanu-saraṃ).
3. to eliminate, get rid of, give up Pv ii.615 (dehaṃ to get rid of the body) Dhs-a 344 (vitthāra-desanaṃ).
4. to give in charge to deposit, entrust, save Pp 26; Vv-a 33 (sahassathavikaṃ) ■ aor. nikkhipi DN ii.161 (Bhagavato sarīraṃ Ja ii.104, Ja ii.111, Ja ii.416; fut. ˚issati DN ii.157 (samussayaṃ) ger. ˚itvā MN iii.156 (cittaṃ); Ja ii.416; Ja vi.366; grd ˚itabba Vin i.46 ■ pp. nikkhitta (q.v.) ■ Caus. nikkhipāpeti to cause to be laid down, to order to be put down etc. Pv-a 215 (gosīsaṭṭhiṃ). Cp. abhi˚.
Sk. nikṣipati, ni + khipati
putting down, laying down; casting off, discarding, elimination giving up, renunciation; abstract or summary treatment Dhs-a 6, Dhs-a 344 (see under mātikā); in grammar pada˚ the setting of the verse; i.e. rules of composition (Mil 381). Vin i.16 (pādukānaṃ = the putting down of the slippers i.e. the slippers as they were, put down) Ja iii.243 (dhura˚ giving up one’s office or charge), i.236 (sarīra ˚ṃ kāresi had the body laid out); Dpvs xvii.109 (id.). Vism 618 (= cuti); Dhp-a ii.98 (sarīra˚); DN-a i.50 (sutta˚); Dhs-a 344; Mil 91.
Sk. nikṣepa, see nikkhipati
(nt.) = nikkhepa SN iii.26 (bhāra˚ getting rid of the load, opp. bhārâdānaṃ); Mil 356 (= comparison) Vism 236 (deha˚). Nikhanati & Nikhanati;
to dig into, to bury, to erect, to cover up Vin ii.116; Vin iii.78 (akkhiṃ = cover the eye, as a sign); Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197 (id.); DN ii.127 (ṇ); Ja i.264; Snp-a 519 (ṇ, to bury)-pp. nikhāta.
Sk. nikhanati, ni + khanati
1. dug, dug out (of a hole), buried (of a body) Snp-a 519.
2. dug in, erected (of a post) Snp 28; Dhp-a ii.181 (nagara-dvāre n. indakhīla) See also a˚.
pp. of nikhaṇati
(nt.) “eating down,” a sharp instrument, a spade or (acc. to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 83) a chisel Vin iii.149 Vin iv.211; Ja ii.405 (so read for khādana); Ja iv.344; Ja v.45.
Sk. *nikhādana, ni + khādati, cp. khādana
(adj.) all, entire, whole Dāvs v.40 (˚loka v.l. sakala˚).
Sk. nikhila cp. khila
(adj.) having or being lost Ja vi.499 (˚patta without wings, deprived of its wings).
nis + khīṇa
in gavaya-gokaṇṇa-nig-âdīnaṃ Dhs-a 331 is misprint for miga.
to go down to, to “undergo,” incur, enter, come to; to suffer esp. with dukkhaṃ & similar expressions of affliction or punishment SN iv.70 (dukkhaṃ); MN i.337 sq. (id.); AN i.251 (bandhanaṃ); Dhp 69 (dukkhaṃ = vindati, paṭilabhati Dhp-a ii.50), 137; Nd ii.1994 (maraṇaṃ + maraṇamattam pi dukkhaṃ) Pv iv.77 (pret. nigacchiṭṭha = pāpuṇi Pv-a 266).
Sk. nigacchati, ni + gacchati
a member of the Jain order (see M i.370–375 380 & cp. jaṭila) Vin i.233 (Nātaputta, the head of that Order, cp. DN i.57; also Sīho senāpati n-sāvako); SN i.78 SN i.82 (˚bhikkhā); AN i.205 sq. (˚uposatha), cp. 220; ii.196 (˚sāvaka); iii.276, 383; v.150 (dasahi asaddhammehi samannāgata); Snp 381; Ud 65 (jaṭilā, n., acelā, ekasātā paribbājakā); Ja ii.262 (object to eating flesh); DN-a i.162; Dhp-a i.440; Dhp-a iii.489; Vv-a 29 (n. nāma samaṇajāti) ■ f nigaṇṭhī DN i.54 (nigaṇṭhi-gabbha).
BSk. nirgrantha (Divy 143, Divy 262 etc.) “freed from all ties,” nis + gaṇṭhi. This is the customary (correct?) etym. Prk. niggantha, cp. Weber, Bhagavatī p. 165
(f.) destiny, condition, behaviour Ja vi.238. See also niyati & cp. niggatika.;
ni + gati, q.v.
a small town market town (opp. janapada); often combd with gāma (see gāma 2) Vin i.110 (˚sīma), 188 (˚kathā), 197 (Setakaṇṇika˚); DN i.7 (˚kathā), 101 (˚sāmanta), 193, 237; MN i.429, MN i.488; Pv ii.1318; Ja vi.330; Pv-a 111 (Asitañjana˚, v.l. BB nagara). Cp. negama.
Sk. nigama, fr. nigacchati = a meeting-place or market, cp. E. moot-hall = market hall
(nt.) quotation, explanation, illustration Vism 427 (˚vacana quotation); Pv-a 255 (perhaps we should read niyamana); conclusion, e.g. Paṭṭh.A 366; Vb-a 523.
Sk. nigamana
an (iron) chain for the feet Ja i.394; Ja ii.153; Ja vi.64 (here as “bracelet”).
Sk. nigaḍa, ni + gaḷa, cp. gala3
(better v.l. nigāḷhita) sunk down into, immersed in Thag 568 (gūthakūpe).
Sk. nigāḍhita; ni + gāḍhita, see gāḷha2
hidden (down), concealed; (n.) a secret Ja i.461; Dāvs iii.39.
Sk. nigūḍha, but BSk. nirgūḍha (Divy 256); ni + gūḷha
to cover up, conceal, hide Ja i.286; Ja iii.392; Ja iv.203; Pv.iii.43 (≈parigūhāmi v.l. SS guyhāmi). pp. nigūḷha (q.v.).
Sk. nigūhati, ni + gūhati
(nt.) covering, concealing, hiding Vv-a 71.
Sk. nigūhana, see nigūhati
to go out or away, disappear; to proceed from, only in pp. niggata (q.v.); at Ja vi.504 as ni˚.
Sk. nirgacchati, nis + gacchati
(adj.) free from knots (said of a sword) Mil 105 See also nighaṇḍu.
Sk. nirgranthi, nis + gaṇṭhi, cp. also nigaṇṭha
1. to hold back, restrain Dhp 326; Ja iv.97; Mil 184; Vism 133 ■ Opp paggaṇhāti.
2. to rebuke, censure (c. instr.) AN iii.187; Ja iii.222; Mil 9 (musāvādena); Dhp-a i.29. ger. niggayha, pp. niggahīta (q.v.). Cp. abhi˚.
Sk. nigṛhṇāti, ni + gaṇhāti
(adj.) 1. going out, proceeding from (abl.): dahato niggatā nadī (a river issuing from a lake) Pv-a 152.
2. (= nigata? or = nis + gata “of ill fate”) destined, fateful; miserable unfortunate Pv-a 223 (˚kamma = punishment in expln of niyassa kamma, v.l. SS. nigaha for niggata; see also niya & niyata); Sdhp 165 (of niraya = miserable), cp niggatika & niggamana.;
Sk. nirgata, see niggacchati
having a bad “gati” or fate, ill-fated, bad, unfortunate, miserable Ja iii.538 (v.l. BB as gloss, nikkāruṇika); iv.48 (v.l. BB nikatika).
Sk. *nirgatika, nis + gati-ka
(n.) in logic, deduction, conclusion. Pts. of Controversy p. 1.
1. going away DN-a i.94.
2. result, fate, consequence, outcome Sdhp 172, Sdhp 173 (dun˚).
3. (log.) conclusion Kv 4. Niggayha-vadin
Sk. *nirgamana, of niggacchati
(adj.) one who speaks rebukingly, censuring, reproving, resenting Dhp 76 (see expln in detail at Dhp-a ii.107 & cp. MN iii.118).
see niggaṇhāti
to be seized by (?), to be blamed for Dhp-a i.295 (cittaṃ dukkhena n., in expln of dunniggaha).
Sk. nigṛhyate, ni + gayhati, Pass. of niggaṇhāti
1. restraint, control, rebuke, censure, blame Vin ii.196; AN i.98, AN i.174; AN v.70; Ja v.116 (opp. paggaha); vi.371 (id.) Mil 28, Mil 45, Mil 224 ■ dun˚; hard to control (citta) Dhp 35 (cp. expl. at Dhp-a i.295).
2. (log.) refutation Kv 3.
Sk. nigraha, ni + gaha2; see niggaṇhāti
(adj.) without acquisitions, i.e. poor Ja ii.367 (v.l. BB. as gloss nirāhāra).
Sk. *nirgahaṇa, cp. nirgṛha homeless; nis + gahaṇa
(f.) restraint Vism 134 (cittassa). Opp. pagg˚.
abstr. fr. ni + gṛh, cp. next
(adj.) restrained, checked, rebuked, reproved SN iii.12; AN i.175 (aniggahīto dhammo); Ja vi.493.
Sk. nigṛhīta, but cp. Divy 401: nigṛhīta; ni + gahita
(adj.-n.) one who rebukes, oppresses, oppressor Snp 118 (= bādhaka Snp-a 178, with v.l. ghātaka); Ja iv.362 (= balisādhaka Com.).
ni + gāhaka, see niggaṇhāti
(niggalati) to swallow down (opp. uggilati to spit out, throw up) Ja iv.392 (sic as v.l.; text niggalati).
Sk. nigirati, ni + gilati
(adj.) devoid of good qualities, bad Mil 180.
Sk. nirguṇa, nis + guṇa
(f.) a shrub (Vitex Negundo) Mil 223 (˚phala); Vism 257 (˚puppha).
Sk. nirguṇḍī, of obscure etym.
(adj.) free from bushes, clear Ja i.187; Mil 3.
Sk. *nirgulma, nis + gumba
(nt.) destruction, killing, rooting out Snp 1085 (taṇhā˚; Snp-a 576 = vināsana); Nd ii.343 (v.l. nighātana).
Sk. nirghātana, nis + ghātana, but cp. nighāta
1. “shouting out,” sound; fame, renown; speech, utterance, proclamation word of reproach, blame SN i.190; AN iv.88 (appa˚ noiseless lit. of little or no noise); Snp 719, Snp 818 (= nindāvacana Snp-a 537), 1061; Ja i.64; Ja vi.83; Vv 55; Nd i.150 Nd ii.344; Dhs 621; Vv-a 140 (madhura˚); 334 (in quotation appa-sadda, appa˚); Sdhp 245.
2. (adj. noiseless, quiet, still Snp 959 (= appasadda appanigghosa Nd i.467).
Sk. nirghoṣa, nis + ghosa
the banyan or Indian fig-tree, Ficus Indica, usually as cpd. ˚rukkha Vin iv.35; DN ii.4; Snp 272; Ja iii.188 (r.) Dhp-a ii.14 (r.) Pv-a 5 (r.) 112, 244; Sdhp 270; -pakka the fruit of the fig-tree Vism 409. -parimaṇḍala the round or circumference of the banyan DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.162.
Sk. nyagrodha; Non-Aryan?
(nīgha) (adj.-n.) is invented by Com. & scholiasts to explain the comb;n anigha (anīgha sporadic, e.g. SN v.57). But this should be divided an-īgha instead of a-nīgha ■ (m.) rage, trembling, confusion, only in formula rāgo n. doso n. moho n. explaining the adj anīgha. Thus at SN iv.292 = Nd ii.45; SN v.57 ■ (adj. anigha not trembling, undisturbed, calm [see etym under īgha = Sk. ṛgh of ṛghāyati to tremble, rage, rave SN i.54; SN iv.291; Ja v.343. Otherwise always combd with nirāsa: SN i.12 = SN i.23, SN i.141; Snp 1048, Snp 1060, Snp 1078. Expld correctly at Snp-a 590 by rāgādi-īgha-virahita. Spelling anīgha Ja iii.443 (Com. niddukkha); Pv iv.134 (+ nirāsa expld by niddukkha Pv-a 230). anīgha also at Iti 97 (+ chinnasaṃsaya); Ud 76; Dhp 295 (v.l. aniggha expld by niddukkha Dhp-a iii.454).
(nt.) killing, destruction Thig 491 (= maraṇasampāpana Thag-a 288).
prob. ni + gha = Sk. ˚gha of hanati (see also P. ˚gha), to kill; unless abstracted from anigha as in prec. nigha1
rubbing, chafing Dhs-a 263, Dhs-a 308.
Sk. nigharṣa
1. to rub, rub against, graze, chafe Vin ii.133; Vism 120; Dhp-a i.396–2. to polish up, clean Ja ii.418; Ja iii.75.
Sk. nigharṣati, ni + ghaṃsati1
(nt.) = nighaṃsa Mil 215.
Sk. nigharṣana
an explained word or a word expln, vocabulary, gloss, usually in ster. formula marking the accomplishments of a learned Brahmin “ sanighaṇḍu-keṭubhānaṃ… padako” (see detail under keṭubha) DN i.88; AN i.163, AN i.166; AN iii.223; Snp p.105; Mil 10. Bdhgh’s expln is quoted by Trenckner Notes p. 65.
Sk. nighaṇṭu, dial. for nirgrantha from grathnāti (see gaṇṭhi & ghaṭṭana), orig. disentanglement unravelling, i.e. explanation; cp. niggaṇṭhi, which is a variant of the same word ■ BSk. nighaṇṭa (Divy 619 Avs ii.19), Prk. nighaṇṭu
striking down, suppressing, destroying, killing MN i.430; Ne 189. Cp. nighāti.
Sk. nighāta, ni + ghāta
“slaying or being slain,” defeat, loss (opp. ugghāti) Snp 828. Cp. nighāta.
ni + ghāti
heaping up, accumulation; wealth, provisions SN i.93, SN i.97; Vin v.172 (˚sannidhi). See also necayika.
Sk. nicaya, ni + caya, cp. nicita
(adj.) heaped up, full, thick, massed, dense Thig 480 (of hair); Pv-a 221 (ussanna uparûpari nicita, of Niraya).
Sk. nicita, ni + cita, of nicināti
a plant (Barringtonia acutangula) Vv-a 134.
Sk. nicula
(adj.) constant, continuous, permanent DN iii.31; SN i.142; SN ii.109, SN ii.198; SN iv.24 sq., 45, 63; AN ii.33, AN ii.52 AN v.210; Pts ii.80; Vb 335, Vb 426. In chain of synonyms nicca dhuva sassata avipariṇāmadhamma DN i.21; SN iii.144, SN iii.147; see below anicca,-nt. adv. niccaṃ perpetually, constantly, always (syn. sadā) MN i.326 MN iii.271; Snp 69, Snp 220, Snp 336; Dhp 23, Dhp 109, Dhp 206, Dhp 293; Ja i.290 Ja iii.26, Ja iii.190; Nd ii.345 (= dhuvakālaṃ); Pv-a 32, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 134. Far more freq. as anicca (adj.; aniccaṃ nt. n.) unstable impermanent, inconstant; (nt.) evanescence, inconstancy, impermanence ■ The emphatic assertion of impermanence (continuous change of condition) is a prominent axiom of the Dhamma, & the realization of the evanescent character of all things mental or material is one of the primary conditions of attaining right knowledge (: anicca-saññaṃ manasikaroti to ponder over the idea of impermanence SN ii.47; SN iii.155; SN v.132; Pts ii.48 sq., 100; Pv-a 62 etc ■ kāye anicc’ ânupassin realizing the impermanence of the body (together with vayânupassin & nirodha˚) SN iv.211; SN v.324, SN v.345; Pts ii.37, Pts ii.45 sq., 241 sq. See anupassanā). In this import anicca occurs in many combinations of similar terms all characterising change, its consequences & its meaning esp. in the famous triad “ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā ” (see dukkha ii.2), e.g. SN iii.41, SN iii.67, SN iii.180; SN iv.28 (sabbaṃ), 85 sq., 106 sq.; 133 sq. Thus anicca addhuva appāyuka cavanadhamma DN i.21. anicca + dukkha SN ii.53 (yad aniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ); iv.28, 31, v.345; AN iv.52 (anicce dukkhasaññā); MN i.500 (+ roga etc.); Nd ii.214 (id. cp roga). anicca dukkha vipariṇāmadhamma (of kāmā DN i.36. aniccasaññī anattasaññī AN iv.353; etc. Opposed to this ever-fluctuating impermanence is Nibbāna (q.v.), which is therefore marked with the attributes of constancy & stableness (cp. dhuva, sassata amata, vipariṇāma) ■ See further for ref. SN ii.244 sq (saḷāyatanaṃ a.), 248 (dhātuyo); iii.102 (rūpa etc.) iv.131, 151; AN ii.33, AN ii.52; AN v.187 sq., 343 sq.; Snp 805; Pts i.191; Pts ii.28 sq., 80, 106; Vb 12 (rūpa etc.), 70 (dvādasâyatanāni), 319 (viññāṇā), 324 (khandhā), 373; Pv-a 60 (= ittara).
-kālaṃ (adv.) constantly Nd ii.345; -dāna a perpetual gift DN i.144 (cp. DN-a i.302); -bhatta a continuous food-supply (for the bhikkhus) Ja i.178; Vv-a 92; Pv-a 54 -bhattika one who enjoys a continuous supply of food (as charity) Vin ii.78; Vin iii.237 (= dhuva-bhattika) iv.271; -saññā (& adj.; saññin ) the consciousness or idea of permanence (adj. having etc.) AN ii.52; AN iii.79, AN iii.334 AN iv.13, AN iv.145 sq.; Ne 27; -sīla the uninterrupted observance of good conduct Vv-a 72; Pv-a 256.
Vedic nitya, adj ■ formation fr. ni, meaning “downward” = onward, on and on; according to Grassmann (Wtb. z. Rig Veda) originally “inwardly homely”
(f.) continuity, permanence, only as a˚; changeableness, impermanence SN i.61, SN i.204 SN iii.43; SN iv.142 sq., 216, 325.
abstr. to nicca
(nt.) = niccatā Vism 509.
without skin, excoriated, in ˚ṃ karoti to flog skinless, to beat the skin off Ja iii.281. niccamma-gāvī “a skinless cow,” used in a well-known simile at SN ii.99, referred to at Vism 341 & 463.;
Sk. niścarman, nis + camma
(adj.) motionless Ja iv.2; Pv-a 95.
Sk. niścala, nis + cala
(adj.) thoughtless Ja ii.298.
Sk. niścitta, nis + citta (ka)
(adj.) without dress, naked Pv-a 32 (= nagga).
nis-cola
(adj.) without desire or excitement Ja i.7.
nis + chanda
discrimination, conviction, certainty; resolution, determination Ja i.441 (˚mitta a firm friend); Dhs-a 133 (adhimokkha = its paccupaṭṭhāna); Snp-a 60 (daḷha˚ adj. of firm resolution). See vi˚.
Sk. niścaya, nis + caya of cināti
(nt.) emanation, sending out, expansion, efflux Vism 303.
fr. niccharati
to go out or forth from, to rise, sound forth, come out Iti 75 (devasadda) Vv 382; Ja i.53, Ja i.176; Dhp-a i.389; Vv-a 12, Vv-a 37 (saddā). Caus. nicchāreti to make come out from, to let go forth get rid of, emit, utter, give out DN i.53 (anattamanavācam a˚ not utter a word of discontent); Ja iii.127 Ja v.416 (madhurassaraṃ); Pp 33; Mil 259 (garahaṃ) Dāvs i.28 (vācaṃ).
Sk. niścarati, nis + carati
having no hunger, being without cravings, stilled, satisfied. Ep. of an Arahant always in combn with nibbuta or parinibbuta: SN iii.26 (tanhaṃ abbuyha); iv.204 (vedanānaṃ khayā); MN i.341; MN i.412, AN iv.410; AN v.65 (sītibhūta); Snp 707 (aniccha), 735, 758; Iti 48 (esanānaṃ khayā); Thig 132 (abbūḷhasalla) ■ Expld at Pts ii.243 by nekkhammena kāmacchandato n.; arahattamaggena sabbakilesehi n. muccati.
Sk. *niḥpsāta, nis + chāta
see nicchodeti.
Caus. of niccharati, q.v.
(adj.) determined, convinced Mvu 7, Mvu 19.
Sk. niścita, nis + cita, see nicchināti
to discriminate, consider, investigate, ascertain; pot. niccheyya Snp 785 (expld by nicchinitvā vinicchinitvā etc. Nd i.76) Dhp 256 (gloss K vinicchaye) ■ pp. nicchita.
Sk. niścinoti, nis + cināti
(adj.) thrown out Ja iii.99 (= nibbāpita, nikkhāmita); Mil 130.
Sk. niḥkṣubdha, nis + chuddha, see nicchubhati
to throw out Ja iii.512 (= nīharati Com.; v.l. nicchurāti); Mil 187 ■ pp. nicchuddha q.v.
Sk. *niḥkṣubhati, nis + khubhati or chubhati, cp. chuddha & khobha, also nicchodeti & upacchubhati and see Trenckner, Mil pp.423, Mil pp.424
(nt.) throwing out, ejection, being an outcaste Mil 357.
see nicchubhati
(& v.l.; nicchādeti ) to shake or throw about, only in phrase odhunāti nidhunāti nicchodeti at SN iii.155 = MN i.229 MN i.374 = AN iii.365, where S has correct reading (v.l. ˚choṭeti); M has ˚chādeti (v.l. ˚chodeti); A has ˚chedeti (v.l. ˚choreti, ˚chāreti; gloss nippoṭeti). The C. on AN iii.365 has: nicchedetī ti bāhāya vā rukkhe vā paharati-nicchedeti (chid ) is pardonable because of Prk chollai “to cut.” Cp. also nicchubhati with v.l. BB nicchurāti. For sound change P. ch<sk. kṣ cp. P chamā<k ch churik etc.
shows a confusion of two roots, which are both of Prk. origin, viz. chaḍḍ; choṭ; the former = P. chaḍḍeti, the latter = Sk. kṣodayati or BSk. chorayati, Apabhraṃśa chollai; with which cp. P. chuddha
(adj.) own Dāvs ii.68. Cp. niya.
Sk. nija, wth dial. j. for nitya = P. nicca
(nt.) washing, cleansing Vism 342 (v.l. nijj˚).
fr. nij
to desire ardently, to covet DN-a i.92 (= maggeti pariyesati).
Sk. nijigīṣati, ni + jigiṃsati
(f.) covetousness Vism 23 sq. (defined), 29 (id. = magganā), referring to Vb 353 where T has jigiṃsanatā, with v.l. nijigīsanatā.
fr. last
(n. adj.) one who desires ardently, covetous, rapacious DN i.8 (lābhaṃ) AN iii.111 (id.).
n. ag. fr. prec.
(adj.) disentangled Ja i.187; Mil 3.
Sk. *nirjaṭa, nis + jaṭa, adj. to jaṭā
(adj.) causing to decay, destroying, annihilating; f. ˚ā decay, destruction, death SN iv.339; AN i.221; AN ii.198; AN v.215 sq. (dasa-n-vatthūni) Pts i.5 (id.).
Sk. nirjara in diff. meaning, P. nis functioning as emphatic pref.; nis + jara
to destroy, annihilate, cause to cease or exist MN i.93; Thig 431 (nijjaressāmi = jīrāpessāmi vināsessāmi Thag-a 269).
Sk. nir-jarayati; nis + jarati1
to make an end to a blaze, to extinguish, to put out Ja vi.495 (aggiṃ).
nis + jāleti
(adj.) destroyed, overcome, exhausted, finished, dead DN i.96; MN ii.217; AN i.221 (vedanākkhayā sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ n. bhavissati) MN i.93; AN v.215 sq.; Ne 51.
Sk. nirjīrṇa, nis + jiṇṇa
(adj.) unvanquished Mil 192 (˚kammasūrā), 332 (˚vijita-sangāma); Sdhp 360.
Sk. nirjita, nis + jita
(adj.) lifeless, soulless Dhs-a 38; Mil 413.
Sk. nirjīvita, nis + jīva1
(adj.) satisfied, pacified, appeased Ja vi.414 (= khamāpita Com.); Vv 6319 (= nijjhāpita Vv-a 265) Mil 209. See also paṭi˚
pp. of nijjhāpeti, *Sk. nidhyapta or nidhyāpita
(f.) conviction, understanding realization; favourable disposition, satisfaction MN i.320; AN iv.223; Pts ii.171, Pts ii.176; Mil 210.
abstr. to nijjhatta, cp. BSk. nidhyapti, formation like P. ñatti → Sk. jñapti
(nt.) understanding, insight, perception, comprehension; favour, indulgence (= nijjhāpana), pleasure, delight Ja vi.207. Often as ˚ṃ khamati: to be pleased with, to find pleasure in SN iii.225, SN iii.228; MN i.133, MN i.480; Vv 8417. Thus also diṭṭhinijjhāna-kkhanti delighting in speculation AN i.189 sq. AN ii.191. Cp. upa˚.
*Sk. nidhyāna, ni + jhāna1
(nt.) conflagration, in anto˚ = nijjhāyana Pv-a 18 (cittasantāpa + in expln of soka).
nis + jhāna2
(nt.) favourable disposition, kindness, indulgence Ja iv.495 (˚ṃ karoti = khamāpeti Com.; text reads nijjhapana).
Sk. *nidhyāpana, ni + jhāpana, Caus. to jhāpeti
(adj.) to be discriminated or understood, in dun˚; hard to… Mil 141 (pañha).
Sk. *ni-dhyāpya, to nijjhāpeti
to make favourably disposed, to win somebody’s affection, or favour, to gain over Vin ii.96; MN i.321; Ja iv.108; Ja iv.414, Ja iv.495; Ja vi.516; Mil 264; Vv-a 265 (nijjhāpita = nijjhatta).
Sk. nidhāyayati, ni + jhāpeti, Caus. to jhāyati1; cp. Sk. nididhyāsate
(adj. n.) burning away, wasting away, consuming or consumed AN i.295; Ne 77, Ne 95 paṭipadā.
-taṇha (adj.) of consuming thirst, very thirsty Ja i.44 -taṇhika = ˚taṇha denoting a class of Petas (q.v. Mil 294, Mil 303, Mil 357.
Sk. niḥkṣāma, cp. niḥkṣīṇa, nis + jhāma of jhāyati2 = Sk. kṣāyati
to meditate, reflect, think SN iii.140 sq. (+ passati, cp. jānāti), 157; MN i.334 (jhāyati n. apajjhāyati); iii.14 (id.). Cp. upa˚.
Sk. nidhyāyati, ni + jhāyati1
to be consumed (by sorrow), to fret Nd i.433.
ni + jhāyati2
(nt.) burning away, consumption; fig. remorse, mortification in anto˚; Ja i.168 (cp. nijjhāna2).
Sk. *niḥkṣāyana, nis + jhāyana of jhāyati2
(adj.) dependent on, resting on, intent upon SN iii.13 (accanta˚); Nd i.263 (rūpa˚).
Sk. niṣṭha, ni + ˚tha; cp. niṭṭhā1
(f.) basis, foundation, familiarity with Snp 864 (expl Snp-a 551 by samiddhi, but see Nd i.263).
Sk. niṣṭhā; ni + ṭhā, abstr. of adj ■ suff. ˚ṭha
(f.) end, conclusion; perfection, height, summit; object aim Vin i.255; SN ii.186; AN i.279 (object); Pts i.161 niṭṭhaṃ gacchati to come to an end; fig. to reach perfection be completed in the faith MN i.176; Ja i.201; Mil 310; freq. in pp. niṭṭhaṃ gata (niṭṭhangata) one who has attained perfection (= pabbajitānaṃ arahattaṃ patta) Dhp-a iv.70; SN iii.99 (a˚); AN ii.175; AN iii.450 AN v.119 sq.; Dhp 351; Pts i.81, Pts i.161.
Vedic niṣṭhā (niḥṣṭhā), nis + ṭhā from ˚ṭha
to be at an end, to be finished Ja i.220; Ja iv.391; Dhp-a i.393 ■ pp. niṭṭhita, Caus niṭṭhāpeti (q.v.).
Sk. niṣṭiṣṭhati, nis + tiṭṭhati, the older *sthāti restored in compn
(nt.) being finished, carrying out, execution, performance DN i.141; Thag-a 19 (= avasāya). Cp. san˚.
abstr. of niṭṭhāti
(& niṭṭhapita) accomplished, performed, carried out Ja i.86, Ja i.172 (˚ṭha˚), 201.
pp. of niṭṭhāpeti
to carry out, perform; prepare, make ready, accomplish Ja i.86, Ja i.290; Ja vi.366; Dhp-a iii.172 ■ pp. niṭṭhāpita Cp. pari˚.
Caus. to niṭṭhāti
(adj.) brought or come to an end, finished, accomplished; (made) ready, prepared (i.e. the preparations being finished) Vin i.35; DN i.109 (bhattaṃ: the meal is ready); ii.127 (id.); Ja i.255 (id.); Ja ii.48; Ja iii.537 (finished); Vv-a 188; Pv-a 81; & often at conclusion of books & chapters. aniṭṭhita not completed Dhp-a iii.172 ■ su˚; well finished, nicely got up, accomplished Snp 48, Snp 240. Cp. pari˚.
Sk. niṣṭhita (niḥṣṭhita), nis + ṭhita, cp. niṭṭhāti
(& nuṭṭhubhati Vin i.271; Ja i.459; also niṭṭhuhaṭi) to spit out, to expectorate Vin i.271 (nuṭṭhuhitvā) iii.132 (id.); Ja ii.105, Ja ii.117 (nuṭṭh˚); vi.367; Dhp-a ii.36 (niṭṭhuhitvā). pp. nuṭṭhubhita Sdhp 121 ■ Cp. oṭṭhubhati
Sk. niṣṭhubhati, but in meaning = Sk. niṣṭhīvati nis + *thīv, stubh taking the function of ṣṭhīv, since stubh itself is represented by thavati & thometi
(nt.) spitting out, spittle Ja i.47; Pv-a 80 (= kheḷa, v.l. SS niṭṭhuvana, BB niṭhūna).
Sk. niṣṭhīvana, see niṭṭhubhati & cp. Prk. niṭṭhuhana
(adj.) rough, hard, cruel, merciless Snp 952 (a˚; this reading is mentioned as v.l. by Bdhgh at Snp-a 569, & the reading; anuddharī given; vv. ll SS anuṭṭhurī, BB anuṭṭharī, expld as anissukī Nd i.440 however has aniṭṭhurī with expln of nitthuriya as under issā at Vb 357).
Sk. niṣṭhura or niṣṭhūra, ni + thūra = thūla; cp. Prk. niṭṭhura
(nt.) hardness, harshness, roughness Nd i.440; Nd ii.484 (in exegesis of makkha) Vb 357.
cp. Sk. niṣṭhuratva
to cut out, to weed DN i.231 (niddāyit˚); Iti 56 (as v.l. niddāta for niṇhāta, q.v.); Ja i.215. Caus niḍḍāpeti to cause to weed, to have weeds dug up Vin ii.180.
Sk. nirdāti, nis + dāyati, cp. Sk. nirdātar weeder
(nt.) nest, place, seat Dhp 148 (v.l. niḷa).
Vedic nīḍa resting-place ni + sad “sitting down”
(adj.) cleansed, purified Iti 56 (˚pāpaka = sinless; with several vv. ll amongst which niddāta of niḍḍāyati = cleansed of weeds = Nd i.58 (ninhāta˚) = Nd ii.514 (ninhāta, v.l. SS ninnahāta).
Sk. *niḥsnāta, nis + nahāta
the ridge of a mountain or a glen, gully DN-a i.209.
Sk. nitamba; etym. unknown
to become dark, to be exhausted, faint; to be in misery or anxiety Ja iv.284 (Com.: atikilamati).
Sk. nitāmyati, ni + tam as in tama
to knock down, to strike Ja iv.347.
Sk. nitāḍayati, ni + tāḷeti
(adj.) free from thirst or desire, desireless Pv-a 230 (= nirāsa) f. abstr. nitthaṇhatā Ne 38.
BSk. niṣṭṛṣṇa (Divy 210 etc.), nis + taṇhā
(better: nitthaddhana ) (nt.) paralysing DN i.11 (jīvhā˚ = mantena jivhāya thaddhakaraṇa DN-a i.96 v.l. (gloss) nibandhana).
Sk. *niṣṭambhana, abstr. fr. ni + thaddha = making rigid
see nittharati.
(adj.) free from grass Ja iii.23.
Sk. niṣṭṛṇa, nis + tiṇa
(pp.) got out of, having crossed or overcome DN ii.275 (-ogha; v.l. BB nitiṇṇa) Nd i.159 (as v.l.; text has nitiṇṇa); Nd ii.278 (t.). Cp nittharati.
Sk. nistīrṇa, nis + tiṇṇa
(nt.) pricking, piercing AN i.65 (text: nittuddana) iii.403 sq.
nis + tudana, abstr. fr. tudati; cp. Sk. nistodā
(adj.) 1. without energy Vism 596.
2. “put out, abashed, put to shame, in ˚ṃ karoti to make blush or put to shame Ja ii.94 (lajjāpeti + ).
cp. Sk. nistejas only in meaning 1; nis + teja
to moan, groan: (a) ˚thanati Ja i.463; Ja ii.362; Ja iv.446; Ja v.296; DN-a i.291 ■ (b) ˚thunati Vin ii.222; Ja v.295, Ja v.389; Vism 311; Vv-a 224. Cp nitthuna.
Sk. nisstanati “moan out,” nis + thaneti & thunati;1
(nt.) groaning, moaning DN-a i.291 (v.l. BB. ˚ṭhuna). As nitthunana Vism 504.
nis + thanana, abstr. to thaneti
(nt.) getting across, ferrying over, traversing, overcoming SN i.193 (oghassa); AN ii.200 (id.); Iti 111 (id.) MN i.134; Ja i.48 (loka˚); Dāvs ii.29 (id.); Vism 32; Sdhp 334 (bhava˚), 619 (tiloka˚).
Sk. nistaraṇa, nis + taraṇa, cp. nittharati
(nt.) “strewing or being strewn down,” putting down, carrying, bearing SN iv.177 (bhārassa, of a load, cp. nikkhepa); Vv-a 131 (so read for niddharaṇa, in kuṭumba-bhārassa nsamatthā = able to carry the burden of a household).
Sk. nistaraṇa, ni + tharaṇa
to cross over, get out of, leave behind, get over DN i.73 (kantāraṃ). pp nittiṇṇa q.v. Caus. nitthāreti to bring through, help over Nd ii.630 (nittāreti).
Sk. nistarati, nis + tarati1
passing over, rescue, payment, acquittance, in ˚ṃ vattati to be acquitted, to get off scot-free MN i.442 (v.l. netth˚, which is the usual form). See netthāra.
Sk. nistāra; nis + tāra of tarati1
(a) (of thunati;1) moan, groan DN-a i.291 (as v.l. BB for nitthanana)-(b) (of thunati2) blame, censure, curse Pv-a 76 (˚ṃ karoti to revile or curse).
Sk. *nis-stanana & nistava to thunati
etc., see nitthanati etc.
(nt.) “pointing at” evidence, example, comparison, apposition, attribute characteristic; sign, term DN i.223 (a˚ with no attribute) iii.217 (id.); SN iv.370 (id.); AN iv.305 sq. (nīla˚, pīta etc.); Snp 137; Vb 13, Vb 64, Vb 70 sq. (sa˚, a˚); Vv-a 12, Vv-a 13; Pv-a 26, Pv-a 121 (pucchanākāra˚) 226 (paccakkhabhūtaṃ n “sign, token”).
Sk. nidarśana, ni + dassana
v.l. BB at Snp 785 for nirassati (q.v.) Nd i.76 has nid˚ in text, nir˚ as v.l. SS; Snp-a 522 reads nirassati
(pp.) pointed out, defined as, termed Pv i.512; Pv-a 30.
see nidasseti
to point out (“down”), explain, show, define Vv-a 12, Vv-a 13 (˚etabbavacana the word to be compared or defined, correl. to nidassana-vacana) ■ pp. nidassita (q.v.).
Sk. nidarśayati, ni + dasseti
to lay down or aside, deposit; accumulate, hoard, bury (a treasure) Vin i.46 (cīvaraṃ); Mil 271; ger. nidahitvā Pv-a 97 (dhanadhaññaṃ) & nidhāya Dhp 142, Dhp 405; Snp 35 (daṇḍaṃ), 394 629; Nd ii.348; pres. also nidheti Kp-a 217, Kp-a 219; fut nidhessati Pv-a 132. Pass. nidhīyati Kp-a 217. Caus nidhāpeti Pv-a 130 (bhoge). See also nidāhaka, nidhāna & nidhi; also upanidhāya.
Sk. nidadhāti, ni + dahati1
heat, summer-heat, summer, drought Ja i.221 (-samaya dry season); ii.80; Vism 259 (˚samaya, where Kp-a 58 reads sarada-samaya); Pv-a 174 (-kāla summer). fig Ja iv.285; Ja v.404; Dāvs ii.60.
Sk. nidāgha, fr. nidahati, ni + dahati2, see ḍahati
(nt.) (a) (n.) tying down to; ground (lit. or fig.), foundation, occasion source, origin, cause; reason, reference, subject (“sujet”) MN i.261; AN i.134 sq.; 263 sq., 338; ii.196 iv.128 sq.; Dhs 1059 (dukkha˚, source of pain), 1136 Ne 3, Ne 32; Mil 272 (of disease: pathology, aetiology) 344 (˚paṭhanakusala, of lawyers); Pv-a 132, Pv-a 253. (b) (adj ■ ˚) founded on, caused by, originating in relating to SN v.213 sq. (a˚ & sa˚); AN i.82 (id.); Snp 271 (ito˚), 866 (kuto˚), 1050 (upadhi˚ = hetuka, paccayā kāraṇā Nd ii.346); 872 (icchā˚) etc.; Vv-a 117 (vimānāni Rājagaha˚ playing at or referring to R.) ■ (c) nidānaṃ (acc. as adv.) by means of, in consequence of, through usually with tato˚ through this, yato˚ through which DN i.52, DN i.73; MN i.112; Pv iv.161 (through whom = yaṃ nimittaṃ Pv-a 242); Pv-a 281; ito˚ by this Nd ii.2912.
Sk. nidāna, ni + *dāna of dā, dyati to bind, cp. Gr. δέσμα, δ ̈ημα (fetter) & see dāma
(adj.) one who puts away, one who has the office of keeper or warder (of robes: cīvara˚ Vin i.284.
fr. nidahati
(nt.) a cave Nd i.23 (Ep. of kāya).
nis + dara, see darī
= niddā Ja vi.294.
so read for niddanna, v.l. niddhā = niddā; cp. supinanta
(adj.) merciless, pitiless, cruel Sdhp 143, Sdhp 159.
Sk. nirdaya, nis + dayā (adj.)
(adj.) free from fear, pain or anguish Dhp 205 = Snp 257 (expld at Dhp-a iii.269 by rāgadarathānaṃ abhāvena n.; at Snp-a 299 by kilesapariḷāhâbhāvena n.).
nis + dara
see niddesa.
(f.) sleep AN ii.48, AN ii.50; AN iii.251; Snp 926 (opp. jāgariyā), 942 (see expln at Nd i.423); Ja i.61, Ja i.192; Ja ii.128 ■ niddaṃ okkamati to fall asleep Vin i.15 (niddā?); Ja iii.538 Ja iv.1; Dhp-a i.9; Vv-a 65; Pv-a 47; ˚ṃ upagacchati id Pv-a 43, Pv-a 105, Pv-a 128.
-ārāma fond of sleep, slothful, sluggish Iti 72 (+ kammarāma, bhassarata); -ārāmatā fondness of sleep laziness, sluggishness AN iii.116, AN iii.293 sq., 309 sq.; iv.25 (+ kamm˚, bhass˚); v.164; -sīlin of drowsy habits slothful, sleepy Snp 96.
Vedic nidrā, ni + drā in Sk. drāti, drāyate, Idg. *dorē; cp. Gr. (hom.) ε ̓́δραχον, Lat. dormio
(nt.) cutting off, mowing, destroying Snp 78 (= chedana lunana uppāṭana Snp-a 148) = SN i.172; K.S. i.319, cp. niḍḍāyati.
Sk. *nirdāna, nis + dāna of dayati2, Sk. dāti, cp. dātta
to sleep DN i.231; Ja i.192, Ja i.266; Ja ii.103; Ja v.68, Ja v.382; Dhp-a iii.175; Snp-a 169.
Denom. fr. niddā
a sleepy person Dhp 325.
n. ag. fr. niddāyati
(pp.) expressed, explained, designated Mil 3; Dhs-a 57; Vism 528; Vv-a 13.
see niddisati
(& niddissati) to distinguish, point out, explain designate, define, express, to mean Iti 122 = Nd ii.276f Mil 123, Mil 345; Dhs-a 57; Dhp-a ii.59; Pv-a 87, Pv-a 217 (˚itvā); aor. niddisi Dhs-a 57; Snp-a 61 ■ grd. niddisitabba Dhs-a 56; Ne 96. Pass. niddissīyati Pv-a 163-pp. niddiṭṭha (q.v.).
Sk. nir-diśati, nis + disati, cp. Lat. distinguo
(adj.) without fault or evil Ja iii.443 (in expln of anīgha); Pv-a 230 (id.); (in expln of mārisa) K.S. (S.A.) 1, 2, n. 1.
nis + dukkha
1. description, attribute, distinction Pv-a 7 (ukkaṭṭha˚) ˚vatthu object of distinction or praise DN iii.253; AN iv.15 (where reading is niddasa, which also as v.l. at DN iii.253 & Ps; i.5).
2. descriptive exposition analytic explanation by way of question & answer interpretation, exegesis Vin v.114 (sa˚); Ne 4, Ne 8 Ne 38 sq.; Vism 26; Dhs-a 54; Vv-a 78; Pv-a 71, Pv-a 147. 3. Name of an old commentary (ascribed to Sāriputta) on parts of the Sutta Nipāta (Aṭṭhaka-vagga, interpreted in the Mahā-Niddesa; Pārāyana-vagga and, as a sort of appendix, the Khaggavisāṇa-sutta, interpreted in the Culla-Niddesa); as one of the canonical texts included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; editions in P.T.S. Quoted often in the Visuddhimagga, e.g. p. 140, 208 sq. etc.
Sk. nirdeśa, fr. niddisati, cp. desa, desaka etc.
(adj.) faultless, pure, undefiled Snp 476; Dhs-a 2; Pv-a 189 (= viraja); Dhp-a i.41.
Sk. nirdośa, nis + dosa1
(adj.) free from hatred Ja iv.10 (su˚; Com. “adussanavasena,” foll. upon sunikkodha).
Sk. nirdveṣa, nis + dosa2
(adj.) without property, poor Ja v.447.
nis + dhana
(adj.) blown off, removed, cleaned, purified AN i.254 (jātarūpa “loitered,” cp. niddhota); Snp 56 (˚kasāva-moha; Com vijahati); Dhp 236 (˚mala, malānaṃ nīhaṭatāya Dhp-a iii.336); Nd ii.347 (= vanta & pahīna); Ja vi.218 (of hair Com. expls siniddharutā, v.l. BB siniddha-anta thus meant for Sk. snigdhānta).
pp. of niddhamati, nis + dhanta, q.v.
to blow away, blow off; to clean, cleanse, purify; to throw out, eject, remove Snp 281 = Mil 414 (kāraṇḍavaṃ) Snp 282 (˚itvā pāpicche), 962 (malaṃ = pajahati (Nd i.478); Dhp 239 (id.); Mil 43 ■ pp. niddhanta ).
in form = Sk. nirdhmāti, nis + dhamati, but in meaning the verb, as well as its derivations, are influenced by both meanings of niddhāvati (dhāvati1 & 2): see niddhāpeti, niddhamana, & niddhovati
(nt.) drainage, drain, canal Vin ii.120 (udaka˚; dhovituṃ immediately preceding); Ja i.175 Ja i.409, Ja i.425; Ja iii.415; Ja iv.28; Ja v.21 (udaka˚); Dhp-a ii.37.
of niddhamati or = *nirdhāvana = ˚dhovana to dhāvati2
(f.) throwing out, ejection, expulsion Ja v.233 (= nikkaḍḍhanā Com.).
either to niddhamati or to niddhāpeti
(nt.) not with Hardy (Index Vv-a) = Sk. nirdhāraṇa (estimation), but to be read as nittharaṇa (see nittharaṇa2).
(adj.) thrown out Ja iii.99 (v.l. for nibbāpita).
pp. of niddhāpeti, q.v.
to throw out, chase away, expel Ja iv.41 (niddhāpayiṃsu), 48 (? for niddhāmase). pp. niddhāpita.
Sk. nirdhāvayati, nis + dhāveti (dhāpeti), Caus. of dhāvati1; may also stand for niddhamāpeti Caus. fr. niddhamati, cp. contamination niddhāmase at Ja iv.48, unless misread for niddhāpaye, as v.l. BB bears out
at Ja iv.48 should probably be read niddhāpaye (as v.l. BB), q.v.
to shake off SN iii.155; AN iii.365 (odhunāti + ; spelt nidhunāti) MN i.229; Thag 416; Pv-a 256 (= odhunāti).
Sk. nirdhunoti, nis + dhunāti
(?) (nt.) hypocrisy Pp 18 (= makkha); cp J.P.T.S. 1884, 83.
= Sk. nihnuvana fr. nihnute with diff. derivation
(adj.) unscented Ja vi.21 (udaka).
nir + dhūpana
(adj.) washed, cleansed, purified Dāvs v.63 (˚rūpiya; cp. niddhanta).
nis + dhota; pp. of niddhovati
to wash off, clean, purify AN i.253 (jātarūpaṃ, immediately followed by niddhanta). pp. niddhota.
Sk. nirdhāvati, nis + dhovati, cp. niddhamati
(nt.) laying down, depositing, keeping; receptacle; accumulation, (hidden treasure Ja iv.280 (nidhi˚); Pv-a 7 (udaka-dāna-nīharaṇa-n˚), 97 (n-gata dhana = hoarded, accumulated), 132 (˚ṃ nidhessāmi gather a treasure); Dhs-a 405 (˚kkhama).
Vedic nidhāna, see nidahati
, see nidahati.
1. “setting down,” receptacle; (hidden) treasure Snp 285 (brahma n.); Dhp 76; Kp viii.2 (see Kp-a 217 sq.: nidhīyatī ti nidhi, def. of n.), 9 (acorâharaṇo nidhi cp. “treasures in heaven, where thieves do not steal” Matt. 6, 20) Sdhp 528, Sdhp 588.
2. “putting on,” a cloak Ja vi.79 (expld as vākacīra-nivāsanaṃ = a bark dress). Cp sannidhi.
-kumbhī a treasure-pot, a treasure hidden in a pot = a hidden treasure Dhp-a ii.107; Dhp-a iv.208; -nidhāna laying up treasures, burying a treasure Ja iv.280 -mukha an excellent treasure AN v.346.
Vedic nidhi, ni + dhā, see nidahati
see nīdhura.
see nidahati.
to blame, find fault with, censure AN ii.3; AN v.171 AN v.174; Snp 658; Ja vi.63; Dhp 227; inf. nindituṃ Dhp 230 grd. nindanīya Snp-a 477. pp. nindita (q.v.); cp. also nindiya.
Sk. nindati, nid as in Gr. ο ̓́νειδος (blame), Lith. naids (hatred), Goth. naitjan (to rail or blaspheme) Ohg. neizzan (to plague); cp. Goth. neip = Ohg. nīd (envy)
(nt.) blaming, reviling, finding fault Dhp-a iii.328.
abstr. fr. nindati
(f.) blame, reproach, fault-finding, fault, disgrace SN iii.73; AN ii.188; AN iv.157 sq.; MN i.362; Snp 213 (+ pasaṃsā blame & praise) Dhp 81 (id.); Snp 826, Snp 895, Snp 928; Dhp 143, Dhp 309; Nd i.165 Nd i.306, Nd i.384; Dhp-a ii.148 ■ In compn nindi˚; see anindi˚.
cp. Sk. nindā, to nindati
(adj.) blamed, reproved, reviled; faulty, blameworthy Dhp 228; Pv ii.334 (a˚ blameless agarahita pasaṃsa Pv-a 89); Sdhp 254, Sdhp 361 ■ anindita Ja iv.106 (˚angin).
pp. of nindati
(adj.) blameable, faulty, blameworthy Snp 658 (= nindanīya Snp-a 477) Ne 132. pi nindiyā at Pv-a 23 is to be read as pīṇitindriyā
Sk. nindya, orig. grd. of nindati
(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) bent down (cp ninnata), low-lying, deep, low, sunken Ja ii.3 (magga) Pv-a 29 (bhūmibhāga), 132 (ṭhāṇa); esp. freq. as-˚ bent on, inclining to, leading to, aiming at, flowing into etc. Often combd with similar expressions in chain taccarita tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra tadādhimutta (with variation nibbāna˚ viveka˚ etc. for tad˚): Nd ii.under tad; Ja ii.15; Pts ii.197-Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198 (samuddo anupubba˚ etc.) AN iv.224 (viveka˚); v.175 (id.); MN i.493 (Nibbāna˚) Similarly: samudda˚ Gangā MN i.493; nekkhamma Ja i.45 (v.258); samādhi˚ Mil 38.
2. (acc. as adv. downward: ninnaṃ pavattati to flow downward MN i.117; Pv i.57; ninnagata running down Mil 259 (udaka); ninnaga Dāvs iv.28.
3. (nt.) low land, low ground, plain (opp. thala elevation, plateau): usually with ref. to a raincloud flooding the low country Snp 30 (mahamegho ˚ṃ pūrayaṃto); Snp-a 42 (= pallala); Iti 66 (megho ˚ṃ pūreti); Pv ii.945 (megho ˚ṃ paripūrayanto).
-unnata low lying & elevated Mil 349 (desabhāga).;
Vedic nimna, der. fr. ni down, prob. combd with ˚na of nam to bend, thus meaning “bent down,” cp. unna & panna
(adj.) bent down, bent upon, in ninnatattā (fem. abstr.) aim, purpose (?) Dhs-a 39 (is the reading correct?).
ni + nata
(& Nināda Miln, Dāvs) sounding forth, sound, tune, melody AN ii.117 (˚sadda) Ja vi.43; Vv-a 161; Mil 148; Dāvs v.31.
Sk. nināda, ni + nāda
(adj.) sounding (loud), resonant (of a beautiful voice) DN ii.211 (cp. aṭṭhanga brahmassara & bindu).;
fr. ninnāda
(adj.) bending downwards, descending AN iv.237.
fr. ni + nam
to bend down, put out (the tongue) DN i.106 (jivhaṃ = nīharati DN-a i.276) Ja i.163, Ja i.164; cp. Divy 7, Divy 71 (nirṇāmayati).
Caus. of ni + namati
(adj.) lead down, lead away; drained, purified, free from (˚-) AN i.254 (ninnīta-kasāva of gold: free fr. dross).
pp. of ninneti
one who leads down to, one who disposes of (c. gen.) bringer of, giver, usually in phrase atthassa n. (bringer of good: “Heilbringer”) of the Buddha SN iv.94; MN i.111; AN v.226 sq., 256 sq.; Pts ii.194.
n. ag. to ni-nayati = Sk. *ninayitṛ, cp. netar
to lead down, lead away; drain, (udakaṃ), desiccate Vin ii.180 ■ pp ninnīta, q.v.
Sk. ninayati, ni + nayati
see niṇhāta.
at Ja v.6 read as nīpa.
(adj.) intelligent, clever, prudent, wise SN i.13, SN i.52, SN i.187; MN i.339; AN i.165 (+ jhāyin); iii.24, 138; Snp 45≈Dhp 328≈Dhp-a i.62; Snp 283, Snp 962, Snp 1038; Nd ii.349 (= jātimā = Nd i.478; Bv i.49; Vb 426; Mil 34, Mil 342, Mil 411 Vism 3 (defn).
cp. BSk. nipaka chief, fr. Sk. nipa, chief, master
at Vin i.200 read nippakka. Nipacc-akara
obedience, humbleness, service SN i.178; SN v.233; AN v.66; Ja i.232 Ja iv.133; Vv-a 22, Vv-a 320; Pv-a 12. Nipacca-vadin
nipacca, ger. of nipatati + ākāra
(adj.) speaking hurtfully Snp 217 (= dāyakaṃ nipātetvā appiyavacanāni vattā Snp-a 272).
nipacca, ger. of nipāteti + vādin
to lie down (to sleep) DN i.246; AN iv.332; Ja i.150; Dhp-a i.40; Pv-a 280; aor nipajji Ja i.279; Ja ii.154; Ja iii.83; Vv-a 75, Vv-a 76; Pv-a 74, Pv-a 75 Pv-a 93; ger. nipajja Ja i.7 (v.44: ˚ṭṭhānacankama) ■ Caus nipajjāpeti to lay down, deposit Ja i.50, Ja i.253, Ja i.267 Ja iii.26, Ja iii.188; Dhp-a i.50; Vv-a 76 (˚etvā rakkhāpetha) Cp. abhi˚.
Sk. nipadyate, ni + pajjati
1. (intrs. ) to fall down, fly down, descend, go out Vin ii.192 (Bhagavato pādesu sirasā n. bending his head at the feet of Bh.); Pv-a 60 (id.); Ja i.278; Ja v.467 (nippatissāmi = nikkhamissāmi Com.) Pv ii.89 (v.l. BB parivisayitvā) = nikkhamitvā Pv-a 109 (cp. nippatati).
2. (trs.) to bring together to convene, in nipatāmase (pres. subj.) “shall we convene ” Ja iv.361. See also nipadāmase ■ Cp. abhi˚ san˚.
Sk. nipatati, ni + patati
at Ja iii.120 is an old misreading & is to be corrected into; nipatāmase (= let us gather, bring together = dedicate), unless it be read as nipphadāmase (= do, set forth, prepare, give), in spite of Com. expln p. 121: nikārapakārā (= nipaccakārā?) upasaggā (upasajja?) dāmase (dā ) ti attho; endorsed by Müller, P.G. p. 97 & Kern,; Toev. p. 175. It cannot be ni + pa dāmase, since ni is never used as secondary (modifying verb-component (see ni˚ A 2), & Bdhgh’s expl;n is popular etym. Cp. nipatāmase at Ja iv.361 (see nipatati).
(adj.) lying down Ja i.151, Ja i.279; Ja ii.103; Ja iii.276 (˚kāle while he was asleep), iv.167; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 265 (spelt nippanna, opp. nikujja).
pp. of nipajjati
(adj.) = nipanna Pts ii.209; Ja i.151.
(pp.) (Com. reading for vipalāvita text) made to swim, immersed, thrown into water Ja i.326.
Sk. viplāvita, see plavati
(adj.) full grown, fully developed, in full strength Ja vi.327 (of a tree).
Sk. nipāka, ni + pāka (pacati)
1. falling down Dhp 121 (udabindu˚); Vv-a 279 (diṭṭhi˚, a glance) Pv-a 45 (asa˚).
2. descending MN i.453.
3. a particle the gram. term for adverbs, conjunctions & interjections Ja v.243 (assu); Pv-a 11 (mā), 26 (vo), 40 (taṃ) 50 (ca).
4. a section of a book (see next). Cp. vi˚ san˚.
Sk. nipāta, ni + pāta, of nipatati
(adj.) divided into sections or chapters Dpvs iv.16.
to nipāta
(nt.) 1. falling upon Dhp-a i.295. - 2. going to bed Vv-a 71 (pacchā˚ opp. pubbuṭṭhāna) Cp. nipātin.
to nipatati
(adj.) 1. falling or flying down, chancing upon Dhp 35, Dhp 36 (yatthakāma˚ cittaṃ = yattha yattha icchati tattha tatth’ eva nipatati Dhp-a i.295). 2. going to bed DN i.60 (pacchā˚ going to bed late). Cp. abhi˚.
to nipatati
to let fall, throw down into (c. loc.); bring to fall, injure; fig. cast upon, charge with DN i.91; MN i.453 (ayokaṭāhe); Ja iii.359; Snp-a 272; Pv-a 152 (bhūmiyaṃ). pp. nipātita corrupt, evil wicked Vin ii.182 (caṇḍa + ; text nippātita, v.l. nipphātita).
ni + Caus. of patati
(adj.) clever, skilful, accomplished; fine, subtle, abstruse DN i.26≈(n. gambhīra dhamma), 162 (paṇḍita + ); MN i.487 (dhamma); SN i.33; SN iv.369; AN iii.78; Snp 1126 (= gambhīra duddasa etc. Nd ii.350); Vb 426; Mil 233, Mil 276; DN-a i.117; Vv-a 73 (ariyasaccesu kusala + ) 232; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 16. Cp. abhinipuṇa.
Sk. nipuṇa, dial. for nipṛṇa, to pṛṇoti, pṛ;
(adj.) of no flavour, tasteless, useless Ja i.340.
nis + pakāra 2
(adj.) boiled, infused Vin i.200.
nis + pakka
to be produced, be accomplished, spring forth, ripen result, happen Dhp-a ii.4 (pph); Pv-a 19 (= upakappati) 71 (phalaṃ ijjhati n.), 120 (id.). pp. nipphanna. See also nipphādeti & nipphatti etc.; cp. also abhi˚.
Sk. niṣpadyate, nis + pajjati
(adj.) unwise, foolish Pv-a 40, Pv-a 41 (= dummati).
nis + pañña
to fall out; rush out, come forth, go out from (c. abl.) Vin ii.151 (nipphaṭati v.l. nippaṭati); Ja v.467 (= nikkhamati Com.; or is it nipatati?) ■ ger. nippacca (cp. BSk. nirpatya Avs i.209).
nis + patati
(adj.) 1. without wings, plucked (of a bird) Vin iv.259.
2. without leaves Ja iii.496 (= patita-patta); Snp-a 117 (˚puppha) ■ Note nippatta at Dhs 1035 is to be read as nibbatta.
nis + patta
see nipphatti.
(?) at SN i.225 read nipphādā (q.v.).
only in instr. & abl. = separately Dhs-a 2, Dhs-a 30, Dhs-a 37, Dhs-a 297.;
Sk. *niṣpradesa, nis + padesa
see nipanna & nipphanna.;
(adj.) free from diffuseness SN iv.370; Dhp 254 (Tathāgata); ˚ārāma not fond of delay MN i.65 (Neumann trsl. i.119: “dem keine Sonderheit behagt”); AN iii.431; AN iv.229 sq.; Mil 262.
nis + papañca
(adj.) without splendour Ja ii.415; Mil 102.
nis + prabhā
1. without distinction or difference, absence of explanation or demonstration Dhs-a 317 (˚ena not figuratively), 403 (˚desanā); Vv-a 320.
2. unchangeable, not to be turned Mil 113, Mil 123 Mil 212.
nis + pariyāya
(adj.) free from prattle or talk, not talking AN ii.183 (apalāpa + ; v.l. ˚palāsa).
nis + palāpa
(adj.) without hindrances, unobstructed Mil 11.
nis + palibodha
see nipphādeti.
(adj.) free from sin Snp 257 = Dhp 205.
nis + pāpa
(adj.) a bastard Ja i.133 (v.l. nippītika q.v.).
Sk. *niṣpaitṛka = fatherless or *niṣprītika?
(adj.) without thirst or desire Snp 56; Nd ii.351.
nis + pipāsā
(adj.) 1. free from (feelings of) enjoyment (characteristic of 3rd jhāna, q.v.) DN i.75; AN i.81.
2. being unloved, a foster child etc. (?) see nippitika.
nis + pīti + ka
(nt.) squeezing, pressing; a blow Ja iii.160. Cp. abhinippīḷanā.
nis + pīḷana
to squeeze, press, clench, urge Ja i.63, Ja i.223. Pass. nippīḷiyati, only in ppr. nippīḷiyamāna being urged Vin ii.303; Vv-a 138; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 192. Cp. abhi˚.
nis + pīḷeti
(adj.) 1. without men Pv-a 177. - 2. without men, executed by females (female devas only (of turiyā = a female orchestra) Vin i.15; DN ii.21; Ja v.506. Cp. Mvu iii.165 (niṣpuruṣena nāṭakena & Avs i.321 (niṣpuruṣena tūryeṇa; see also note in Index p. 229), whereas Divy 3 (see Index) has niṣparuṣa (soft), with v.l. niṣpuruṣa.
nis + purisa
one who performs jugglery, a juggler DN i.8 (= nippeso sīlaṃ etesan ti DA.i.91); AN iii.111.
cp. Sk. niṣpeṣa clashing against, bounce, shock, niṣ + piṣ
(f.) jugglery, trickery (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 176) Vb 353 (expld at Vism 29); Mil 383.
abstr. fr. prec.
(nt.) crushing, beating, destroying Snp-a 390.
nis + pothana of puth to crush
see nippajjati.
(nt.) (or ˚nā f. ?) resulting, procedure, achievement, plot Ja iv.83.
n. abstr. fr. nipp(h)ajjati
(f.) result, accomplishment, effect, end, completion, perfection Ja i.56, Ja i.335 (of dreams), 343, 456; iv.137 (sippe); vi.36; Vv-a 138 (sippa˚); Dhp-a ii.6 (import, meaning, of a vision); Dhs-a 354; Pv-a 122, Pv-a 282 (sippe); Ne 54. Cp. abhi˚.
cp. Sk. niṣpatti
(adj.) having a result Ja iii.166 (evaṃ˚ of such consequence).
fr. nipphatti
(adj.) accomplished, perfected, trained SN i.215 (˚sobhin, spelt nippanna) Ja iv.39 (˚sippa master of the art, M.A.); Dhp-a iii.285 (sasse); Dhs-a 316; in phil. determined, conditioned Kvu xi.7; xxiii.5; Vism 450; Pts. of Controversy, 395 Cp. abhi˚, pari˚. See also Cpd. 156, 157.
pp. of nippajjati
(adj.) without fruit, barren in a˚; not without fruit, i.e. amply rewarded (dāyaka, the giver of good gifts) Pv i.42; 55, Pv-a 194; Sdhp 504.
nis + phala
(adj.) broken out, split open Ja i.493 (lasī = nikkhantā Com.; v.l. nipphaḷita).
Sk. niṣphārita, pp. of nipphaleti, nis + phaleti
(nt.) state of being free from sugar or molasses Ja iii.409.
nis + phāṇita + tva
(adj.) producing, accomplishing Dhs-a 47; Pv-a 147 (sukha-˚ṃ puññaṃ).
fr. nipphādeti
(nt.) accomplishment Mil 356; DN-a i.195.
Sk. niṣpādana, to nipphādeti
one who produces or gains SN i.225 (atthassa; read nipphādā nom. for nippadā).
n. ag. = Sk. niṣpādayitṛ cp. nipphāditar
(having) produced, producing (perhaps = nipphāditar) Vv-a 113.
pp. of nipphādeti
one who produces or accomplishes Pv-a 8 (read “so nipphāditā” for sā nipphādikā). Cp. nipphādita and nipphādaka.
n. ag. to nipphādeti, cp. nipphādar
to bring forth, produce; accomplish, perform Ja i.185 (lābhasakkāraṃ); v.81; Mil 299; Vv-a 32, Vv-a 72 (grd. nipphādetabba, Name of ablative case); Sdhp 319, Sdhp 426 ■ pp. nipphādita. Cp abhinipphādeti.
Caus. of nippajjati
(nt.) beating SN iv.300 (v.l. ṭh.). Cp. nippothana.
nis + pothanā
to beat down, smother, crush SN i.101, SN i.102.
nis + potheti
(adj.) bound down to, i.e. (1) fixed, stable, sure Ja iv.134 (bhattavetana); Mil 398 (a˚ unstable, ˚sayana). At DN-a i.243 two kinds of cārikā (wanderings, pilgrimages) are distinguished, viz. nibaddha˚; definite, regular and anibaddha˚; indefinite irregular pilgrimage ■ (2) asked, pressed, urged Ja iii.277 ■ (3) nibaddhaṃ (nt. as adv.) constantly always, continually Ja i.100, Ja i.150; Ja iii.325; Ja v.95, Ja v.459 Ja vi.161; Pv-a 267 (˚vasanaka); Dhp-a ii.41, Dhp-a ii.52 sq.
ni + baddha
binding, bond; attachment, continuance, continuity SN ii.17; Vv-a 259 Vv-a 260 (perseverance). acc. nibandhaṃ (often misspelt for nibaddhaṃ ) continually Vv-a 75. Cp. vi˚.
Sk. nibandha, ni + bandha
1. to bind Mil 79.
2. to mix, apply, prepare Vin ii.151 (anibandhanīya unable to be applied, not binding); Ja i.201 (yāgubhattaṃ). 3. to press, urge, importune Ja iii.277.
ni + bandhati
(nt.) tying, fastening; binding, bond; (adj.) tied to, fettered Snp 654 (kamma˚); Mil 78, Mil 80.
ni + bandhana
to attend to, to look out for, to take Ja iii.151 (= gaṇhati) ■ Caus. nibodheti to waken, at Thag 22 is probably to be read as vibodheti.
ni + bodhati
(pp.) existing, having existed, being reborn Vin i.215 (n. bījaṃ phalaṃ fruit with seed); Ja i.168; Ja ii.111; Pv-a 10 (niraye) 35 (petayoniyaṃ), 100 (pubbe n ■ ṭhānato paṭṭhāya) Mil 268 (kamma˚, hetu˚ & utu˚) ■ Cp. abhi˚.;
Sk. nirvṛtta, nis + vaṭṭa, pp. of nibbattati
(adj.) producing, yielding Pv-a 26 (phala ˚ṃ kusalakammaṃ), 126 (= sukha˚ = sukhāvaha).
cp. nibbatta
to come out from (cp. E. turn out), arise, become, be produced, result, come into being, be reborn, ex-ist (= nir-vatt) Dhp 338; Pv i.11 (nibbattate); Thag-a 259 (= jāyati); Dhp-a iii.173; Pv-a 8 (= uppajjati) 71 (id.); ger. nibbattitvā Ja ii.158 (kapiyoniyaṃ); Pv-a 68, Pv-a 78; aor. nibbatti Ja i.221; Pv-a 14 (Avīcimhi), 67 (petesu), 73 (amaccakule) ■ pp. nibbatta (q.v.). Caus. nibbatteti (q.v.). Cp. abhi˚.
nis + vattati
(nt.) growing, coming forth; (re)birth, existence, life Ja ii.105; Pv-a 5 (devaloke n-araha deserving rebirth in the world of gods) 9 67 etc.
abstr. fr. nibbattati
(adj.) 1. arising, coming out, growing Thag-a 259 (akkhidalesu n. pīḷikā).
2. one destined to be reborn, a candidate of rebirth Ja iii.304 (sagge).
fr. nibbattana
(nt.) reproduction Mil 97.
fr. nibbattāpeti, see nibbatteti
(f.) constitution, product; rebirth Ja i.47; Ne 28, Ne 79; Vism 199, Vism 649; Vv-a 10 Cp. abhi˚.
Sk. nirvṛtti, nis + vatti
(adj.) done, produced, brought forth Pv-a 150 (a˚kusalakamma = akata).
pp. of nibbatteti
(adj.) arising, having rebirth, in neg. anibbattin not to be born again Ja vi.573.
fr. nibbatti
to produce, bring forth; practise, perform; to bring to light, find something lost (at Mil 218) Nd ii.= jāneti (s. v.); Ja i.66, Ja i.140; Ja iii.396 (jhānâbhiññaṃ); Pv-a 76 (jhānāni) 30; Mil 200; Sdhp 470 ■ pp. nibbattita (q.v.) 2nd Caus. nibbattāpeti to cause rebirth Dhp-a iii.484 see also nibbattāpana ■ Cp. abhi˚.
nis + vatteti, Caus. of nibbattati
(adj.) not crooked, straight Dhp-a i.288.
nis + vanka
to throw away, to do without, to avoid Thag 1105.
nis + vajjeti
(adj.) 1. without forest, woodless Ja ii.358.
2. [an abstr. fr. nibbāna, see nibbāna I. cp. vana2. Freq. nibbāna as v.l. instead of nibbana without cravings Snp 1131 (nikkāmo nibbano); Dhp 283 (nibbanā pl.) Vv 5014 (better reading nibbāna, in phrase “vanā nibbānaṃ āgataṃ,” as found at AN iii.346 Thag 691, although the latter has nibbanaṃ in text) expld by “nittaṇhabhāvaṃ nibbānam eva upagataṃ Vv-a 213.
Sk. nirvana
(adj.) free from lust or cravings SN i.180, SN i.186 (so ‘haṃ vane nibbanatho visallo); Thag 526; Dhp 344; Dāvs i.18.
nis + vanatha
(adj.) no longer worn, cast off (of cloth) SN ii.202, SN ii.221.
nis + vasana
to stretch out Ja iii.185 (asiṃ); to pull out Ja v.269 (jivhaṃ = jivhaṃ balisena n. 275). See also nibbāheti & nibbāhāpeti.;
nis + bahati
(instr.) to cool off (lit. & fig.), to get cold to become passionless Snp 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaṃ padīpo = vijjhāyanti; yathâyaṃ padīpo nibbuto evaṃ nibbanti Kp-a 194, Kp-a 195), 915 (kathaṃ disvā nibbāti bhikkhu = rāgaṃ etc. nibbāpeti Nd i.344); Ja iv.391 (pāyāsaṃ). See also parinibbāti (e.g. Vb 426).
see nibbuta etym.; influenced in meaning by Sk. nirvāti, nis + vāti to blow, i.e. to make cool, see vāyati & nibbāpeti
(nt.) ■ I. Etymology. Although nir + vā “to blow”. (cp. BSk. nirvāṇa) is already in use in the Vedic period (see nibbāpeti), we do not find its distinctive application till later and more commonly in popular use, where vā is fused with vṛ; in this sense, viz. in application to the extinguishing of fire, which is the prevailing Buddhist conception of the term. Only in the older texts do we find references to a simile of the wind and the flame; but by far the most common metaphor and that which governs the whole idea of nibbāna finds expression in the putting out of fire by other means of extinction than by blowing, which latter process rather tends to incite the fire than to extinguish it. The going out of the fire may be due to covering it up, or to depriving it of further fuel, by not feeding it, or by withdrawing the cause of its production. Thus to the Pali etymologist the main reference is to the root vṛ; (to cover), and not to vā (to blow). This is still more clearly evident in the case of nibbuta (q.v. for further discussion). In verbal compn. nis + vā (see vāyati) refers only to the (non-emittance of an odour, which could never be used for a meaning of “being exhausted”; moreover, one has to bear in mind that native commentators themselves never thought of explaining nibbāna by anything like blowing (vāta), but always by nis + vana (see nibbana) For Bdhgh’s defn of nibbāna see e.g. Vism 293-The meanings of n. are: 1. the going out of a lamp or fire (popular meaning).
2. health, the sense of bodily well-being (probably, at first, the passing away of feverishness, restlessness).
3. The dying out in the heart of the threefold fire of rāga, dosa & moha; lust, ill-will & stupidity (Buddhistic meaning).; 4. the sense of spiritual well-being, of security, emancipation victory and peace, salvation, bliss.
II. Import and Range of the Term. A. Nibbāna is purely and solely an ethical state, to be reached in this birth by ethical practices, contemplation and insight It is therefore not transcendental. The first and most important way to reach N. is by means of the eightfold Path, and all expressions which deal with the realisation of emancipation from lust, hatred and illusion apply to practical habits and not to speculative thought. N is realised in one’s heart; to measure it with a speculative measure is to apply a wrong standard ■ A very apt and comprehensive discussion of nibbāna is found in F. Heiler, “Die buddhistische Versenkung” (München2 1922), pp. 36
42, where also the main literature on the subject is given ■ N. is the untranslatable expression of the Unspeakable, of that for which in the Buddha’s own saying there is no word, which cannot be grasped in terms of reasoning and cool logic, the Nameless Undefinable (cp. the simile of extinction of the flame which may be said to pass from a visible state into a state which cannot be defined. Thus the Saint (Arahant) passes into that same state, for which there is “no measure” (i.e. no dimension): “atthangatassa na pamāṇam atthi… yena naṃ vajju: taṃ tassa n’ atthi” Snp 1076. The simile in v. 1074: “accī yathā vāta-vegena khitto atthaṃ paleti, na upeti sankhaṃ evaṃ munī nāmakāyā vimutto atthaṃ paleti, na upeti sankhaṃ”). Yet, it is a reality, and its characteristic features may be described, may be grasped in terms of earthly language, in terms of space (as this is the only means at our disposal to describe abstract notions of time and mentality); e.g. accutaṃ ṭhānaṃ, pāraṃ amataṃ padaṃ, amata (& nibbāna-) dhātu ■ It is the speculative, scholastic view and the dogmatising trend of later times, beginning with the Abhidhamma period which has more and more developed the simple, spontaneous idea into an exaggerated form either to the positive (i.e. seeing in N. a definite; state or sphere of existence) or the negative side (i.e. seeing in it a condition of utter annihilation). Yet its sentimental value to the (exuberant optimism of the) early Buddhists (Rh. Davids, Early Buddhism, p. 73) is one of peace and rest, perfect passionlessness, and thus supreme happiness As Heiler in the words of R. Otto (Das Heilige etc. 1917; quoted l. c. p. 41) describes it, “only by its concept Nirvāna is something negative, by its sentiment however, a positive item in most pronounced form ■ We may also quote Rh. Davids’ words: “One might fill columns with the praises, many of them among the most beautiful passages in Pāli poetry and prose lavished on this condition of mind, the state of the man made perfect according to the B. faith. Many are the pet names, the poetic epithets, bestowed upon it, each of them-for they are not synonyms-emphasising one or other phase of this many-sided conception-the harbour of refuge, the cool cave, the island amidst the floods, the place of bliss, emancipation, liberation, safety the supreme, the transcendental, the uncreated, the tranquil, the home of ease, the calm, the end of suffering, the medicine for all evil, the unshaken, the ambrosia the immaterial, the imperishable, the abiding, the further shore, the unending, the bliss of effort, the supreme joy, the ineffable, the detachment, the holy city, and many others. Perhaps the most frequent in the B. texts is Arahantship, ʻthe state of him who is worthyʼ; and the one exclusively used in Europe is Nirvana, the ʻdying out,ʼ that is, the dying out in the heart of the fell fire of the three cardinal sins-sensuality, ill-will, and stupidity (Saṃyutta iv.251, 261), (Early Buddhism pp. 72, 73.) And Heiler says (p. 42 l. c.): “Nirvāna is, although it might sound a paradox in spite of all conceptional negativity nothing but ʻeternal salvation,ʼ after which the heart of the religious yearns on the whole earth.”
The current simile is that of fire, the consuming fire of passion (rāg-aggi), of craving for rebirth, which has to be extinguished, if a man is to attain a condition of indifference towards everything worldly, and which in the end, in its own good time, may lead to freedom from rebirth altogether, to certain and final extinction (parinibbāna) ■ Fire may be put out by water, or may go out of itself from lack of fuel. The ethical state called Nibbāna can only rise from within. It is therefore in the older texts compared to the fire going out, rather than to the fire being put out. The latter point of view, though the word nibbāna is not used, occurs in one or two passages in later books. See Ja i.212; Mil 346, Mil 410; Snp-a 28; Sdhp 584. For the older view see M i.487 (aggi anāhāro nibbuto, a fire gone out through lack of fuel); Snp 1094 (akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ etaṃ dīpaṃ anāparaṃ Nibbānaṃ iti); SN i.236 (attadaṇḍesu nibbuto sādānesu anādāno); SN ii.85 (aggikkhandho purimassa upādānassa pariyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya, as a fire would go out, bereft of food because the former supply being finished no additional supply is forthcoming); sa-upādāno devānaṃ indo na parinibbāyati, the king of the gods does not escape rebirth so long as he has within him any grasping SN iv.102; pāragū sabbadhammānaṃ anupādāya nibbuto AN i.162; pāragato jhāyī anup˚ nibbuto, a philosopher freed, without any cause, source, of rebirth AN iv.290 (etc., see nibbuta). dāvaggi-nibbānaṃ the going out of the jungle fire Ja i.212; aggi nibbāyeyya, should the fire go out MN i.487; aggikkhandho nibbuto hoti the great fire has died out Mil 304; nibbuto ginī my fire is out Snp 19. The result of quenching the fire (going out) is coolness (sīta); and one who has attained the state of coolness is sītibhūta. sītibhūto ‘smi nibbuto Vin i.8; Pv i.87; sītibhūto nirūpadhi, cooled, with no more fuel (to produce heat) Vin ii.156; AN i.138; nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto (cp. nicchāta) AN ii.208; AN v.65 anupādānā dīpacci viya nibbutā gone out like the flame of a lamp without supply of fuel Thag-a 154 (Ap 153) ■ nibbanti dhīrā yath’ āyaṃ padīpo the Wise go out like the flame of this lamp Snp 235. This refers to the pulling out of the wick or to lack of oil, not to a blowing out; cp. vaṭṭiṃ paṭicca telapadīpo jāleyya SN ii.86; Thig 116 (padīpass’ eva nibbānaṃ vimokkho ahu cetaso). The pulling out of the wick is expressed by vaṭṭiṃ okassayāmi (= dīpavaṭṭiṃ ākaḍḍhemi Thag-a 117) cp. on this passage Pischel, Leben & Lehre des Buddha; 71; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism 176; Neumann Lieder 298). pajjotass’ eva nibbānaṃ like the going out of a lamp SN i.159≈.
B. Since rebirth is the result of wrong desire (kāma kilesa, āsava, rāga etc.), the dying out of that desire leads to freedom & salvation from rebirth and its cause or substratum. Here references should be given to (1) the; fuel in ethical sense (cp. A 1: aggi); (2) the aims to be accomplished (for instance, coolness = peace) (3) the seat of its realisation (the heart); (4) the means of achievement (the Path); (5) the obstacles to be removed.
1. Fuel = cause of rebirth & suffering; āsāva (intoxications). khīṇāsavā jutimanto to loke parinibbutā the wise who are rid of all intoxications are in this world the thoroughly free SN v.29; sāvakā āsavānaṃ khayā viharanti AN iv.83; kodhaṃ pahatvāna parinibbiṃsu anāsavā (are completely cooled) AN iv.98 āsavakhīṇo danto parinibbuto Snp 370; saggaṃ sugatino yanti parinibbanti anāsavā those of happy fate go to heaven, but those not intoxicated die out Dhp 126 nibbānaṃ adhimuttānaṃ atthaṅgacchanti āsavā Dhp 226 āsavānaṃ khayā bhikkhu nicchāto parinibbuto Iti 49 vimutti-kusuma-sañchanno parinibbissati anāsavo Thag 100 ■ kāmā (cravings) nikkāmo nibbano Nāgo Snp 1131 ■ kilesa-(nibbāna) vice (only in certain commentaries). kilesa-nibbānass’ āpi anupādā parinibbānass’ āpi santike Dhp-a i.286; upādānaṃ abhāvena anupādiyitvā kilesa-nibbānena nibbutā Dhp-a iv.194 ■ nibbidā (disenchantment). Nibbānaṃ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya etc. saṃvattati SN ii.223; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe nibbānaṃ attano Snp 940 ■ rāga virāgo nirodho nibbānaṃ SN i.136≈; desento virajaṃ dhammaṃ nibbānaṃ akutobhayan SN i.192; yo rāgakkhayo (dosa˚ .… moha˚… ): idaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ SN iv.251, same of Amata S; v.8; chandarāga-vinodanaṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ Snp 1086; kusalo ca jahati pāpakaṃ rāgadosamoha-kkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85; ye ‘dha pajahanti kāmarāgaṃ bhavarāgânusayañ ca pahāya parinibbānagatā Vv 5324 ■ vana sabba-saṃyojan’ atītaṃ vanā nibbānaṃ āgataṃ AN iii.346; nikkhantaṃ vānato ti nibbānaṃ Kp-a 151; taṇhā-sankhāta-vānâbhāvato nibbānaṃ Snp-a 253.
2. Aims: khema (tranquillity). ātāpī bhikkhu nibbānāya bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāya Iti 27; ajaraṃ amaraṃ khemaṃ pariyessāmi nibbutiṃ Ja i.3; acala (immovable, not to be disturbed). patto acalaṭṭhānaṃ Vv 514; accuta (stable) patthayaṃ accutaṃ padaṃ SN iii.143; chandarāga-vinodanaṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ Snp 1086. nekkhamma (renunciation, dispassionateness). vanā nibbānaṃ āgataṃ kāmehi nekkhammarataṃ AN iii.346 ■ pāragū (victor). pāragū sabbadhammānaṃ anupādāya nibbuto AN i.162 (cp AN iv.290 with tiṇṇo pāragato) ■ santipada (calm, composure). santī ti nibbutiṃ ñatvā Snp 933; santimaggaṃ eva brūhaya nibbānaṃ sugatena desitaṃ Dhp 285 s. = acala Vv-a 219 ■ samatha (allayment, quietude) sabbasankhārasamatho nibbānaṃ SN i.136≈ ■ sotthi (welfare). saccena suvatthi hotu nibbānaṃ Snp 235.
3. The Heart: (a) attā (heart, self). abhinibbut-atto Snp 456; thiṭatto frequent, e.g. parinibbuto ṭh˚; Snp 359 danto parinib˚ ṭh˚; Snp 370 ■ (b) citta (heart). apariḍayhamāna-citto Snp-a 347 (for abhinibbutatto Snp 343)-(c) hadaya (heart) nibbānaṃ hadayasmiṃ opiya SN i.199; mātuhadayaṃ nibbāyate Ja i.61; nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṃ (quench the fever of my heart Mil 318 ■ (d) mano (mind). mano nibbāyi tāvade Ja i.27; disvā mano me pasīdi Vv 5014.
4. The Path: dhīra. lokapariyāyaṃ aññāya nibbutā dhīrā tiṇṇā etc. SN i.24; nibbanti dhīrā… Snp 235 sabbābhibhū dhīro sabbagantha-ppamocano Iti 122 Recognition of anicca (transitoriness, see nicca). aniccasaññī… bhikkhu pāpuṇāti diṭṭh’ eva dhamme nibbānaṃ AN iv.353 ■ paññā. nibbānaṃ ev’ ajjhagamuṃ sapaññā SN i.22; n’ abhirato paññā SN i.38. paṇḍita & nipaka;. anupubbena n˚ṃ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā AN i.162; nipakā asesaṃ parinibbanti Iti 93. vijjā. bhikkhu paṇihitena cittena avijjaṃ bhecchati vijjaṃ uppādessati n˚ṃ sacchikarissati the bhikkhu with devout heart will destroy ignorance, gain right cognition & realise Nibbāna AN i.8; idh’ aññāya parinibbāti anāsavo AN iii.41; sabb’ āsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā Vb 426.
5. The Obstacles: gantha (fetter). nibbānaṃ adhigantabbaṃ sabba-g˚-pamocanaṃ SN i.210; Iti 104 similarly Iti 122 (see above). gabbhaseyyā (rebirth) na te punam upenti gabbhaseyyaṃ, parinibbānagatā hi sītibhūtā Vv 5324- nīvaraṇa (obstacles). pañca n˚ anibbāna-saṃvattanikā SN v.97 ■ punabbhava (rebirth) nibbāpehi mahārāgaṃ mā ḍayhittho punappunaṃ SN i.188 vibhavañ ca bhavañ ca vippahāya vusitavā khīṇapunabbhavo sa bhikkhu Snp 514; bhava-nirodha nibbānaṃ SN ii.117 ■ saṅkhārā (elements of life). sabbasaṅkhāra-samatho nibbānaṃ SN i.136; N. = sabbasankhārā khayissanti AN iii.443 ■ saṃyojanāni (fetters). sabbas-âtītaṃ vanā Nibbānaṃ āgataṃ AN iii.346; s. pahāya n˚ṃ sacchikarissati AN iii.423; saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā antarā-parinibbāyī hoti SN v.69.
III. Nibbāna: its ethical importance and general characterisation. 1. Assurance of N. (nibbānass’ eva santike, near N., sure of N.): SN i.33 (yassa etādisaṃ yānaṃ… sa etena yānena n. e. s.: with the chariot of the Dhamma sure of reaching N.); iv.75; AN ii.39 (abhabbo parihānāya n. e. s. impossible to fail in the assurance of final release, of one “catuhi dhammehi samannāgato, viz. sīla, indriyaguttadvāratā, bhojanamattaññutā jāgariyā”); iii.331 (id. with appamādagaru: ever active & keen); ii.40 = Iti 40 (id. with appamāda-rato); Snp 822 ■ 2. Steps and Means to N.: nibbāna-sacchikiriyā, attainment of N., is maṅgalaṃ uttamaṃ & to be achieved by means of; tapo, brahmacariyā and ariyasaccāna-dassanaṃ Snp 267 ■ brahmacariya (a saintly life) is n ■ parāyanā (leading to N. SN iii.189, cp. v.218; also called n ■ ogadhā (with similar states of mind, as nibbidā, virāgo, vimutti) ibid. AN ii.26 = Iti 28, cp. Iti 29 (nibbān’-ogadha-gāminaṃ b˚ṃ). The stages of sanctification are also discussed under the formula “ nibbidā virāgo vimutti… vimuttasmiṃ vimuttaṃ iti ñāṇaṃ hoti: khīṇā jāti etc. (i.e. no more possibility of birth) SN ii.124 = SN iv.86. dhamma: Buddha’s teaching as the way to N. “dhammavaraṃ adesayi n ■ gāmiṃ paramaṃ hitāya Snp 233; ahaṃ sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ desemi sattānaṃ visuddhiyā… n˚assa sacchikiriyāya AN v.194, cp 141; pubbe dh ■ ṭhiti-ñāṇaṃ pacchā nibbāne ñāṇan ti SN ii.124 ■ magga: Those practices of a moral & good life embraced in the 8 fold Noble Path (ariyamagga) Sace atthi akammena koci kvaci na jīyati; nibbānassa hi so maggo SN i.217; ekāyano ayaṃ maggo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā… N˚assa sacchikiriyāya DN ii.290; SN v.167, SN v.185; bhāvayitvā sucimaggaṃ n˚-ogadha-gāminaṃ… Vb 426; ādimhi sīlaṃ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṃ vibhāvaye, pariyosānamhi nibbānaṃ… DN-a i.176 ■ N ■ gamanaṃ maggaṃ: tattha me nirato mano “my heart rejoices in the path to Nibbāna SN i.186; N ■ gāminī paṭipadā AN iv.83 (the path to salvation). Cp. §§ 4 & 7 ■; 3. The Search for N. or the goal of earnest endeavour. ārogya-paramā lābhā nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukhaṃ, aṭṭhangiko ca maggānaṃ khemaṃ amata-gāminaṃ “N. is a higher bliss than acquisition of perfect health, the eightfold Path (alone of all leads to perfect peace, to ambrosia” MN i.508, cp Dhp 204 (“the fullest gain is for health etc.; N. is the highest happiness” Dhp-a iii.267). Similarly: khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā, n˚ṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhā DN ii.49 = Dhp 184; n˚ṃ paramaṃ sukhaṃ: Dhp 204 = Snp 257 = Ja iii.195; id.: Dhp 203; jhānaṃ upasampajja… okkamanāya n.˚assa AN iv.111 sq.; cp. 230 sq.; kaṭuviyakato bhikkhu… ārakā hoti N˚ā AN i.281; n˚ṃ ajjhagamuṃ sapaññā SN i.22; devalokañ ca te yanti… anupubbena n˚ṃ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā AN i.162; n˚ṃ abhikaṅkhati SN i.198; abhipassati AN i.147; tiṇṇakathankatho visallo n ■ ābhirato Snp 86; bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātuṃ… paṇītâdhimutto hoti ṇ-ābhirato ca AN iii.435; n ■ ābhirato… sabbadukkhā pamuccati SN i.38; n ■ ogadhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ vussati n ■ parāyaṇaṃ n ■ pariyosānaṃ SN iii.189 = SN v.218 n˚ṃ gavesanto carāmi (Bodhisat, Ja i.61). All means of conduct & all ideals of reason & intellect lead to one end only: Nibbāna. This is frequently expressed by var similes in the phrase; n ■ ninna, ˚poṇa, ˚pabbhāra, e.g. SN v.75 = SN v.134 = SN v.137 = SN v.190; SN v.244; AN v.75, AN v.134, AN v.190, AN v.244 AN v.291; Vv 8442. Saddahāno arahataṃ dhammaṃ n. pattiyā sussūsā labhate paññaṃ appamatto SN i.214; Snp 186, cp. SN i.48; Gotamo n ■ paṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya bhikkhū sandasseti SN i.214 = SN i.192 = SN i.210; Ud 80 n˚ṃ pariyesati AN ii.247; n ■ pariyosānā sabbe dhammā AN v.107; n ■ poṇaṃ me mānasaṃ bhavissati, saṃyojanā pahāṇaṃ gacchanti AN iii.443; odhunitvā malaṃ sabbaṃ patvā n ■ sampadaṃ muccati sabba-dukkhehi: sā hoti sabbasampadā AN iv.239; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe n˚ṃ attano Snp 940, cp. 1061 ■ 4. Some Epithets of Nibbāna: akutobhayaṃ AN ii.24 = Iti 122 accutaṃ padaṃ (careyya āditta-sīso va patthayaṃ a. p. SN iii.143; Snp 1086; pattā te acalaṭṭhānaṃ yattha gantvā na socare Vv 514; amataṃ AN ii.247; MN iii.224 (Bhagavā atthassa ninnetā a ˚assa dātā); Mil 319; Vv 6427 (apāpuranto a ˚assa dvāraṃ); Vv-a 85 (a-rasa) Vv 5020 (amatogadha magga = nibb˚-gāminī paṭipadā) amosadhammaṃ Snp 758; khemaṃ appaṭibhayaṃ SN iv.175; SN i.189 = Snp 454; Thig 350 (˚ṭṭhāne vimuttā te patta te acalaṃ sukhaṃ); MN i.508 (+ amatagāminaṃ) AN ii.247 (yogakkhemaṃ anuttaraṃ); same at AN iii.294; Iti 27; Dhp 23 ■ taṇhakkhaya Vv 735; ṭhānaṃ dud- dasaṃ SN i.136 (= sabba-sankhāra -samatho); dhuvaṃ (q.v.); niccaṃ Kv 121; nekkhammaṃ AN i.147 (˚ṃ daṭṭhu khemato… nibbānaṃ abhipassanto); Vv 8442. sabba-gantha-pamocanaṃ (deliverance from all ties) SN i.210; SN ii.278 (sabbadukkha˚); Iti 222 = AN ii.24 yathābhūtaṃ vacanaṃ SN iv.195; yathāsukhaṃ (the Auspicious) AN iv.415 sq.; (chanda-) rāga vinodanaṃ Snp 1086; rāgakkhayo (dosa˚, moha˚) SN v.8; rāgavinayo (dosa˚, moha˚) ibid., santi (calm, peace) Vv 5021 = Snp 204 (chandarāga-viratto bhikkhu paññāṇavā ajjhagā amataṃ santiṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ); Vv-a 219 (= acala); santimaggaṃ eva brūhaya n˚ṃ Sugatena desitaṃ Dhp 285 = Ne 36; sandiṭṭhikaṃ akālikaṃ etc. AN i.158; samo bhūmibhāgo ramaṇīyo SN iii.109; sassataṃ Kv 34; suvatthi Snp 235 ■ 5. N. is realisable in this world, i.e. in this life if it is mature (diṭṭhe va dhamme): SN ii.18 = SN ii.115 = SN iii.163 = SN iv.141 (diṭṭha-dh-npatta); MN ii.228; AN iv.353 = AN iv.358, cp. 454 ■ 6. Definitions with regard to the destruction of the causes or substrata of life (cp. above I.): taṇhāya vippahānena n˚ṃ iti vuccati SN i.39 = Snp 1109; as sabba- saṅkhārasamatho (calming down of all vital elements) Vin i.5; SN i.136; AN ii.118 = AN iii.164; AN iv.423; AN v.8, AN v.110, AN v.320, AN v.354 akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ etaṃ dīpaṃ anāparaṃ n˚ṃ iti nam brūmi jarāmaccu-parikkhayaṃ Snp 1094; bhavanirodho n˚ṃ ti SN ii.117; AN v.9; rāga-kkhayo (dosa˚, moha˚ SN iv.251 = SN iv.261; virāgo nirodho n˚ṃ in typical & very freq. exposition at Nd;2 = SN i.136≈. See also vana cp. the foll.: taṇhā-sankhāta-vānâbhāvato n˚ṃ Snp-a 253; nikkhantaṃ vānato ti n˚ṃ Kp-a 151; kilesa-n ass’ âpi anupādā parinibbānass’ âpi santike yeva Dhp-a i.286 (on Dhp 32) ■ 7. N. as perfect wisdom and what is conducive to such a state (saṃvattati ). The foll phrase is one of the oldest stereotype phrases in the Canon & very freq.; it is used of all the highest means & attainments of conduct & meditation & may be said to mark the goal of perfect understanding & a perfect philosophy of life. It is given in 2 variations, viz. in a simple form as; “upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati,” with ref. to majjhimā paṭipadā at Vin i.10 = SN iv.331 = SN v.421; of satta bojjhangā at SN v.80; and in a fuller form as “ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya etc. as above” at DN i.189 (negative); ii.251 (of brahmacariyaṃ), 285 iii.130 (sukhallikânuyogā, neg.) 136 (avyākataṃ, neg.) SN ii.223 (brahmacariya); v.82 (satta bojjhangā), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā), 255 (iddhipādā), 361 (ariyamagga), 438; AN iii.83, AN iii.326 sq.; etc ■ Cp. n- saṃvattanika SN v.97 (upekhāsambojjhanga); Nd ii.281 (neg. of tamo). 8. N. as the opposite of rāga (passion, lust). Freq. is the combn of virāga nirodha nibbāna, almost used as three synonyms, thus at SN ii.18; Vin iii.20 = Vin iii.111; AN ii.118 = AN iii.164 = AN iv.423 = AN v.8 = Nd ii.under Nibbāna AN ii.34 = Iti 88 (dhammānaṃ aggaṃ akkhāyati, madanimmadano pipāsa-vinayo ālaya-samugghāto vaṭṭûpacchedo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodha nibbānaṃ), cp Vin iii.20≈. Similarly SN i.192 (Sugataṃ payirupāsati desentaṃ virajaṃ dhammaṃ nibbānaṃ akutobhayaṃ). 9. Various Characterisations & Similes; (cp. above II A 4 & 5). sukkâbhijātiko samāno akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ n˚ṃ abhijayati DN iii.251; AN iii.384 sq.; aniccā sabbe sankhārā dukkhā ‘nattā ca sankhātā: nibbānañ c’ eva paññatti anattā iti nicchayā Vin v.86. On anicca anattā in rel. to N. see also S iv.133 sq.; AN iv.353 dukkhato & sukhato n˚ṃ samanupassati AN iii.442 On comparison with a lamp see e.g. SN i.159 = DN ii.157 Thag 906 (pajjotass’ eva nibbānaṃ vimokkho cetaso ahū), AN iv.3 (pajjotass’ eva n. vimokkho hoti cetaso) Snp 235 (.… te khīṇabījā avirūḷhichandā nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaṃ padīpo).
-abhirata fond of N. (cp. III. 3) SN i.38; AN iii.435; Snp 86 (visalla + ); -ogadha merging into N. (of brahmacariya) SN iii.189; SN v.218; AN ii.26 = Iti 28; Vb 426 cp. amatogadha AN v.107; -gamana (magga; cp. III. 2 leading to N. DN ii.223; SN i.186, SN i.217; AN iv.83; (dhamma: SN v.11; Snp 233; -dhātu the sphere or realm of N. always in phrase anupādisesāsaya n ■ dhātuyā parinibbāyate Vin ii.239; DN iii.135; Iti 38, Iti 121; Pts i.101; cp. rāgavinayo n ■ dhātuyā adhivacanaṃ SN v.8. See parinibbāyin; -ninna (+ ˚poṇa, ˚pabbhāra; cp. III. 3) converging into N. AN iii.443; Vv 8442 & passim; -paṭisaññuta (dhammikathā; cp. III. 2) relating or referring to N. SN i.114 = SN i.192 = SN i.210; Ud 80; -patta having attained N. (diṭṭha-dhamma˚, see above III. 5) SN ii.18 = SN ii.114 SN iii.163; -patti attainment of N. SN i.48, SN i.214 = Snp 186 -pada = Nibbāna (see pada 3) Snp 204. -pariyosāna ending in N. having its final goal in N. SN iii.189; SN v.218; AN v.107; -saṃvattanika conducive to N.; contributing toward the attainment of N. SN v.97; Nd ii.281 (a˚); cp above III. 7; -sacchikiriyā realisation of N. (identical with ñāṇa and constituting the highest ideal; cp. above III. 2) Snp 267. Cp. also DN ii.290; SN v.167; AN iii.423 AN v.141; -saññā perception of N. AN iii.443; -sampatti successful attainment of N. Kp viii.13; -sampadā the blessing of the attainment of N. AN iv.239.
(nt.) means of extinguishing, extinction, quenching SN i.188 (cittaṃ pariḍayhati: nibbāpanaṃ brūhi = allayment of the glow); AN iv.320 (celassa n˚āya chandaṃ karoti: try to put out the burning cloth); Mil 302 (jhāyamāno n˚ṃ alabhamāno) 318 (pariḷāha˚).
abstr. fr. nibbāpeti
(adj.) extinguished, put out, quenched Ja iii.99 (= nicchuddha).
pp. of nibbāpeti
1. to extinguish, put out, quench SN i.188 (mahārāgaṃ); Iti 93 (rāg-aggiṃ; & nibbāpetvā aggiṃ nipakā parinibbanti); cp. aggiṃ nijjāleti Ja vi.495; Pv i.85 (vārinā viya osiñcaṃ sabbaṃ daraṃ nibbāpaye); Mil 304 (aggikhandhaṃ mahāmegho abhippavassitvā n.) 318 (nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṃ), 410 (megho uṇhaṃ n.); Dhp-a ii.241 (fire); Sdhp 552 (bhavadukkh aggiṃ).
2. to cleanse, purify (cittaṃ, one’s heart Vism 305 ■ pp. nibbāpita. See also nibbāpana.
Sk. ni(r)vārayati, Caus. of ni(r)varati, influenced in meaning by nirvāpayati. Caus. of nirvāti make cool by blowing (e.g. RV x.1613). See nibbuta on etym.
1. to be cooled or refreshed, to be covered up = to be extinguished, go out (of fire), to cease to exist, always used with ref. to fire or heat or (fig.) burning sensations (see nibbāna II. A end):; aggikkhandho purimassa ca upādānassa puriyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya SN ii.85 (opp. jāleyya); do. of telaṃ & vaṭṭiṃ paṭicca; telappadīpo n. SN ii.86 = SN iii.126 = SN iv.213 = SN v.319; sace te purato so aggi nibbāyeyya jāneyyāsi tvaṃ: ayaṃ… aggi nibbuto MN i.487; AN iv.70 (papaṭikā n.); aggi udake tiṇukkā viya n. Ja i.212; mātuhadayaṃ n. Ja i.61; aggi upādāna-sankhayā n. Mil 304 ■ aor. nibbāyi [Sk niravāri] Ja i.27 (mano n.: was refreshed) 212 (aggi udake n.: was extinguished); vi.349 (cooled down).
2. to go out (of light) Vism 430 (dīpā nibbāyiṃsu the lights went out); Thag-a 154 (dīpacci n. nirāsanā: went out). See also parinibbāyati & cp. nibbuta, nibbāpeti, nibbāpana.;
Sk. ni-(or nir-)vriyate, Pass. of ni(r)varati, influenced by nirvāyati intrs. to cease to blow; see on etym. & Pāli derivation nibbuta
see pari˚.
(adj.-n.) leading out, removing, saving; (nt.) removal, clearance, refuge, way out Mil 119, Mil 198, Mil 295, Mil 309, Mil 326 (˚magga). [Miln. the only references!]
fr. nibbāheti
to lead out, carry out, save from, remove Mil 188.
2nd Caus. nibbāhāpeti to have brought out, to unload (a waggon) Vin ii.159 (hiraññaṃ) iii.43. See also nibbāhana & nibbuyhati.;
nis + vahati
distinction, distinguishing Vism 193.
nis + vikappa
(adj.) steady, unchanged, steadfast; persevering Ja i.66; Pv-a 178, Pv-a 253 (+ nicca); Snp-a 189, Snp-a 497; Vism 311.
nis + vikāra
(f.) surety, reliance, trust SN ii.84; SN v.221 (= nikkankhā); Vv-a 85 (= ekaṃsikā).
nis + vicikicchā
to pierce, transfix, wound SN v.88 (+ padāleti); Sdhp 153 (patodehi). ger nibbijjha Snp 940 (= paṭivijjhitvā Nd i.420) ■ pp nibbiddha. Cp. abhi˚.
nis + vijjhati, vyadh
(pp.) gained, earned Vin iv.265; Snp 25; Snp-a 38.
nis + viṭṭha, of nibbisati
(adj.) tired of, disgusted with (c. instr. or loc.), wearied of, dissatisfied with, “fed up” Ja i.347; Ja vi.62; Thig 478 (= viratta Thag-a 286); Dhp-a i.85 (˚hadaya); Vv-a 207 (˚rūpa) Pv-a 159 (tattha-vāsena n-mānaso tired of living there) 272 (˚rūpa), 283 (˚rūpa, tired of: purohite).
Sk. nirviṇṇa, pp. of nibbindati
(f.) weariness, disgust with worldly life, tedium, aversion, indifference, disenchantment N. is of the preliminary & conditional states for the attainment of Nibbāna (see nibbāna II B 1) & occurs frequently together with; virāga, vimutti & nibbāna; in the formula: etaṃ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya… sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati “this leads to being thoroughly tired (of the world), to dispassionateness to destruction (of egoism), to perfect wisdom, to Nibbāna,” e.g. at DN i.189; SN v.82, SN v.179, SN v.255 SN v.361; AN iii.83; AN iv.143; AN v.216 ■ In other connections Vin i.15 (nibbidāya cittaṃ saṇṭhāsi); DN iii.130 sq. SN ii.30; SN iii.40; SN iii.179, SN iii.189; SN iv.86, SN iv.141 (read nibbidāya for nibbindāya?); AN i.51, AN i.64; AN iii.19, AN iii.200, AN iii.325 sq.; AN iv.99, AN iv.336 AN v.2 sq., 311 sq.; Ja i.97; Ja iv.471, Ja iv.473; Snp 340; Pts i.195 Pts ii.43 sq.; Vb 330; Ne 27, Ne 29; Vism 650. Cp. abhi˚.
Sk. nirvid, f. (also BSk. e.g. Lal. V. 300) & nirveda; to nibbindati
1. in phrase ˚piṅgala (with) disgustingly red (eyes) (perhaps = nibbiṇṇa?) Ja v.42 (of a giant).
2. with ref. to a road: broken up, i.e. much frequented, busy street Ja vi.276 (of vīthi, bazaar, in contrast with a-nibbiddha-raccha carriage-road, which is not a thoroughfare. The reading patatthiyo at Ja vi.276, for which nibbiddha-vīthiyo is the C. expln is to be corrected into pathaddhiyo).
pp. of nibbijjhati
to get wearied of (c. loc.); to have enough of, be satiated, turn away from, to be disgusted with. In two roots A. vind: prs. nibbindati etc. usually in combn with virajjati & vimuccati; (cp nibbāna III. 2). Vin i.35; SN ii.94; SN iv.86, SN iv.140; AN v.3; Dhp 277 sq.; Iti 33; Ja i.267; Mil 235, Mil 244; Sdhp 612 ppr. nibbindaṃ SN iv.86; Pv-a 36 (nibbinda-mānasa) ger. nibbindiya Ja v.121 (˚kārin) ■ B. vid: Pot. nibbide (v.l. BB nibbije) Ja v.368 (= nibbindeyya Com.); ger nibbijjitvā Ja i.82, & nibbijja Snp 448 = SN i.124 (nibbijjâpema = nibbijja pakkameyya Snp-a 393) ■ pp. nibbiṇṇa. See also nibbidā.
nis + vindati, vid2
(adj.) lacking in strength, indolent, slothful, weak Ja iv.131; Pv-a 175 (= alasa, kusīta].
nis + viriya
(adj.) without holes or fissures, without omissions Ja v.429; Vv-a 275 (= atīva sangata).
nis + vivara
earnings, wages Thag 606 = Thag 1003 = Mil 45 (cp. Manu vi.45); Snp-a 38.
to nibbisati
(adj.) fearless, not hesitating, undaunted Snp-a 61.
nis + visanka, Sk. viśankā
to enter into; to earn, gain, find, enjoy, only in pp. anibbisaṃ not finding Thig 159 (= avindanto Thag-a 142); Ja i.76 = Dhp 153 ■ pp. nibbiṭṭha. See also nibbisa.
nis + visati
(adj.) having no residence, banished, driven from (-˚) Ja ii.401.
nis + visaya
(adj.) not self-indulgent, selfdenying, meek, tame, gentle Ja ii.210 (dametvā nibbisevanaṃ katvā), 351; v.34, 381, 456; vi.255; Dhp-a i.288 (cittaṃ ujuṃ akuṭilaṃ n. karoti), 295; Vv-a 284 (˚bhava = jitindriya).
nis + visevana
(adj.) showing no difference, without distinction, equal, similar Ja ii.32; Ja vi.355; Mil 249.
nis + visesa
to wrestle, to fight with fists Vin iii.180 ■ pp. nibbuddha.
ni + yujjhati, yudh. Pāli form difficult to explain: niy˚ = niyy˚ = nivv˚ = nibb˚
(adj.) (lit.) extinguished (of fire), cooled, quenched (fig. desireless (often with nicchāta & sītibhūta), appeased pleased, happy ■ (a) (lit.) aggi anāhāro n. MN i.487; Snp 19 (ginī n. = magga-salila-sekena n. Snp-a 28); Ja iv.391 (anibbute pāyāse); Mil 304 (aggikkhandha), 346 (mahāmeghena n˚ṃ pathaviṃ); Thag-a 154 (anupādānā dīp’ accī); Kp-a 194 (padīpo n.) ■ (b) (fig.) combd with sītibhūta (& nicchāta): Vin i.8; MN i.341; AN ii.208 = DN iii.233 = Pp 56, Pp 61; AN iv.410; AN v.65; Snp 593, Snp 707; Pv i.87 ■ In phrase anupādāya nibbuta: SN ii.279; AN i.162; AN iv.290 = Dhp 414 = Snp 638 ■ In other connections: attadaṇḍesu n. sādānesu anādāno SN i.236; Dhp 406 = Snp 630; aññāya nibbutā dhīrā SN i.24; tadangan SN iii.43; ejânugo anejassa nibbutassa anibbuto Iti 91 vītataṇho n. Snp 1041; tiṇṇa-sokapariddavo n. Dhp 196 rāg’ aggimhi n. & n. mātā, pitā, nārī Ja i.60; n. veyyākaraṇena Mil 347; upādānānaṃ abhāvena… kilesanibbānena n. Dhp-a iv.194 ■ See also abhinibbuta and parinibbuta.
Nibbuta represents Sk. nirvṛta (e.g. Avs i.48) as well as nivṛta, both pp. of vṛ; which in itself combines two meanings, as exhibited in cognate languages and in Sk. itself: (a) Idg. ṷer to cover, cover up (Lat. aperio = *apa-veri̯o to cover up, Sk. varutram upper garment, “cover”) and (b) *ṷel to resolve, roll move (Lat. volvo = revolve; Gr. ε ̔́λις, ἐλύω; Sk. vāṇa reed = Lat. ulva; Sk. ūrmi wave; P. valli creeper, valita wrinkled). *ṷer is represented in P. by e.g. vivarati to open, nivāreti to cover, obstruct, nīvaraṇa, nivāraṇa obstruction; *ṷel by āvuta, khandh-āvāra, parivāra vyāvaṭa (busy with = moving about), samparivāreti Thus we gain the two meanings combd and used promiscuously in the one word because of their semantic affinity: (a) *nivṛta covered up, extinguished, quenched and (b) *nirvṛta without movement, with motion finished (cp. niṭṭhita), ceasing, exhaustion, both represented by P. nibbuta ■ In derivations we have besides the rootform vṛ; (= P. bbu˚) that with guṇa vṝ (cp. Sk. vārayati vrāyati) or vrā = P.* bbā˚ (with which also cp. paṭivāṇa = *prativāraṇa). The former is in nibbuti (ceasing, extinction, with meaning partly influenced by nibbuṭṭhi = Sk. nirvṛṣṭi pouring of water), the latter in instr. nibbāti and nibbāyati (to cease or to go out) and trs. nibbāpeti (Caus.: to make cease, to stop or cool and further in nibbāna (nt. instr. abstr.) (the dying out)
(f.) allayment, refreshment, cooling, peace, happiness Ja i.3 (khemaṃ pariyessāmi n˚ṃ); Snp 228 (nikkāmino n˚ṃ bhuñjamānā), 917, 933 (santī ti n˚ṃ ñatvā); Nd i.399; Pv i.74 (n˚ṃ n’ âdhigacchāmi = quenching of hunger & thirst) Kp-a 185 (= paṭippassaddha-kilesa-daratha).
Sk. nirvṛti, abstr. to nibbuta
wrestling, fist-fight DN i.6 (= mallayuddhaṃ DN-a i.85); Dhs-a 403.
Sk. niyuddha, pp. of nibbujjhati
to be led out to (c. acc.): susānaṃ Thig 468 (= upanīyati Thag-a 284); to be led out of = to be saved SN i.1, cp. RV i.117, 14; vi.62, 6.
Sk. niruhyate, nis + vuyhati, Pass. of vahati, cp. nibbāhati
(nibbusitattan?) a dislocated or disconcerted mind, unrest uneasiness DN i.17.
Sk. *nir-vasit-ātman or *nirvasitatvaṃ (nt. abstr.), to nis-vasati, cp. nirvāsana = nibbisaya
= nibbicikicchā certainty, doubtlessness Nd ii.185 (opp. savicikicchā).
at SN i.124 should probably be read as nibbeṭhaniya (rejecting, evading).
(nt.) unwinding, fig. explanation Mil 28.
Sk. nirveṣṭana, nis + veṭhana
explained, unravelled, made clear Mil 123 (su˚).
pp. of nibbeṭheti
1. to unravel, untwist, unwind; to explain, make clear DN i.54 (nibbeṭhiyamāna, v.l. BB nibbedh˚); Pv iv.329 (˚ento = niveṭhīyamāna Pv-a 253 v.l. BB nibbedh˚) Mil 3; Sdhp 153.
2. to deny, reject Vin ii.79; DN i.3 (= apanetabba Com.); SN iii.12 (v.l. BB ˚dh˚). 3. to give an evasive answer Vin iii.162 ■ See also nibbejaniya ■ pp. nibbeṭhita, q.v.
Sk. nirveṣṭate, nis + veṭheti, to twist round
penetration, insight; adj.: penetrating, piercing, scrutinising, sharp. Freq. in phrase nibbedha-bhāgiya (sharing the quality of penetration), with ref. to samādhi, saññā etc. [cp. BSk nirvedha˚ Divy 50; but also nirbheda˚ Avs ii.181, of kusalamūlāni; expld as lobhakkhandhassa (etc.) nibbijjhanāni at Ne 274] DN iii.251, DN iii.277; AN iii.427 Vb 330; Ne 21, Ne 48, Ne 143 sq., 153 sq.; Vism 15, Vism 88; Dhs-a 162 ■ Also in nibbedha-gāminī (paññā) Iti 35 & dunnibbedha (hard to penetrate, difficult to solve Mil 155, Mil 233 (pañha); spelt dunniveṭha at Mil 90).
nis + vedha, to vyadh
(adj.) piercing, sharp, penetrating, discriminating; only in f. nibbedhikā (cp. āvedhikā), appld to paññā (wisdom) DN iii.237, DN iii.268; SN v.197, SN v.199; MN i.356; AN i.45; AN ii.167 AN iii.152; AN iii.410 sq., 416; v.15; Pts ii.201; Nd ii.235, Nd ii.3a (+ tikkha-paññā), 415, 689; Ja ii.9, Ja ii.297; Ja iv.267.
nis + vedhaka, to vyadh
(adj.) not disagreeing, of one accord, unanimous Vin ii.65; Dhp-a i.34.
nis + vimati + ka
to threaten, revile, scorn Ja iii.338.
Sk. nirbhartsayati, nis + bhaccheti
(adj.) free from fear or danger, fearless, unafraid Ja i.274; Ja iii.80; Ja v.287; Vism 512.
nis + bhaya
to twist round, bend, wind, contort oneself Mil 253. Cp. vi˚.
Sk. ni-or nirbhujati, nis + bhujati
(adj.) deprived of enjoyment; deserted, being of no avail, useless Ja vi.556; Pv i.12. Cp. vi˚.
Sk. nirbhoga, nis + bhoga1
bending, contortion Ja ii.264 (oṭṭha˚).
ni + bhoga2
see nivyaggha.
(adj.) shining; like, equal to, resembling (-˚) Ja v.372; Vv 401; Pv iv.312; Vv-a 122 (vaṇṇa˚ = vaṇṇa); Nd ii.608.
Sk. nibha, to bhāti
(f.) likeness, appearance Vv-a 27.
abstr. to nibha
(f.) shine, lustre, splendour Vv-a 179 (nibhāti dippatī ti nibhā).
to nibha
to shine Vv-a 179 (= dippati).
ni + bhāti
(adj.) the middle one Ja v.371.
(adj.-n.) one who invites Mil 205.
(nt.) invitation Vin i.58 = Vin ii.175; DN i.166; MN i.77; AN i.295; Ja i.116 (ṇ), 412 Pp 55.
to nimanteti
(adj.) inviting; (nt.) Name of a Suttanta MN i.331; quoted at Vism 393.
invited Snp p.104; Pv-a 22 (bhattena to the meal), 86 (= āmantita), 141.
pp. of nimanteti
to send a message, to call, summon, invite, coax (to = c. instr. Snp 981 (nimantayi aor., āsanena asked him to sit down) Ja vi.365; Nd ii.342; Dhp-a iii.171 (˚ayiṃsu); DN-a i.169; Vv-a 47 (pānīyena invite to a drink); Pv-a 75, Pv-a 95. pp. nimantita, q.v ■ Cp. abhi˚.
Sk. nimantrayati, ni + manteti
(nt.) 1. sign, omen, portent, prognostication DN i.9 (study of omens = n. satthaṃ DN-a i.92, q.v. for detailed expln); Ja i.11 (caturo nimitte nâddasaṃ); Mil 79, Mil 178 Esp. as pubba˚; signs preceding an event, portents, warnings, foreshadowings SN v.154, SN v.278, SN v.442; Iti 76 (cp. Divy 193, of the waning of a god); Ja i.48, Ja i.50 (32 signs before birth, some at DN-a i.61), 59; Mil 298; Vism 577. 2. outward appearance, mark, characteristic, attribute phenomenon (opp. essence) DN iii.249; AN i.256; AN iii.319 AN iii.375 sq.; AN iv.33, AN iv.418 sq.; Ja i.420; Pts i.60, Pts i.91 sq., 164, 170 ii.39, 64; Vb 193 sq ■ Mental reflex, image (with ref to jhāna) Vism 123, cp. Dhs-a 167 ■ Specified e.g. as foll.: oḷārika SN v.259; pasādaniya SN v.156; paccavekkhana˚ DN iii.278; Vb 334; bahiddhā-sankhārā Pts i.66 sq.; bāla˚ (opp. paṇḍita˚) MN iii.163; AN i.102 mukha˚ (= face) DN i.80; SN iii.103; SN v.121; AN v.92, AN v.97 sq., 103; rūpa˚, sadda˚ etc. SN iii.10; MN i.296; Pts i.92 Pts i.112; samatha˚ DN iii.213; samādhi˚ etc. AN i.256 sq. subha˚ (& asubha˚) S; v.64, 103 sq.; AN i.3 sq., 87, 200 v.134; Vism 178 sq. nimittaṃ gaṇhāti to make something the object of a thought, to catch up a theme for reflection Vin i.183, cp. SN v.150 sq. (˚ṃ uggaṇhāti) MN i.119 (= five sorts of mental images); Nd ii.659; Dhs-a 53 (= ākāra). See below n-gāhin & animitta.; nimittaṃ parivajjeti to discard the phenomenal SN i.188; Snp 341.
3. mark, aim: in nimittaṃ karoti to pick out the aim, to mark out Ja v.436; Nd ii.235, Nd ii.1d; Mil 418. 4. sexual organ (cp. lakkhaṇa) Vin iii.129 (n. & a˚, as term of abuse); see also kāṭa & koṭacikā.
5. ground reason, condition, in; nimittena (instr.) and nimittaṃ (acc.) as adv. = by means of, on account of Dhp-a iii.175 (instr.) Pv-a 8, Pv-a 97 (jāti-nimittaṃ), 106 (kiṃ n˚ṃ = kissa hetu), 242 (yaṃ n˚ṃ = yato nidānaṃ). gahita-nimittena “by means of being caught” Vism 144 = Dhs-a 116 (read trsln 154 accordingly!). adj. nimitta (-˚ caused by, referring to Pv-a 64 (maraṇa-nimittaṃ rodanaṃ) ■ animitta free from marks or attributes not contaminated by outward signs or appearance undefiled, ụnaffected, unconditioned (opp. sa˚) SN i.188 SN iv.225 (phassa), 268, 360 (samādhi); MN i.296 (cetovimutti); AN i.82; AN iii.292; AN iv.78; Vin iii.129; Thag 92; DN iii.219, DN iii.249; Dhp 92; Snp 342; Pts i.60, Pts i.91; Pts ii.36, Pts ii.59 sq (vimokha), 65 sq., 99; Dhs 530 (read a˚ for appa˚) Vism 236; Dhs-a 223 (absence of the 3 lakkhaṇas) Mil 333, Mil 413; Dhp-a ii.172; Thag-a 50. See also Cpd. 199 2115. sanimitta SN v.213 sq.; AN i.82.
-ānusārin following outward signs (= ˚gāhin) AN iii.292; Ne 25; -kamma prognostication, prophecy Vin v.172; Vb 353; -karaṇa = gāhin SN iv.297; -gāhin “taking signs,” enticed or led away by outward signs entranced with the general appearance, sensuously attracted DN i.70 (cp. Dialogues i.80); iii.225; SN iv.104 SN iv.168; AN ii.16; AN iii.99; AN v.348; Pp 20, Pp 24, Pp 58; Dhs 1345; Mil 367, Mil 403. Cp. Vism 151, Vism 209.
cp. Sk. nimitta, to mā, although etym. uncertain
to turn round, change to barter, exchange for (c. instr.): pres. imper. niminā Ja v.343 (= parivattehi Com.); pres. 1st pl. nimimhase Ja ii.369, pot. nimineyya Ja iii.63; fut. nimissati Ja v.271 Ja v.453 (devatāhi nirayaṃ); aor. nimmini Ja iii.63; ger niminitvā Milo 279.
Sk. niminoti in diff. meaning, the P. meaning being influenced by mā; ni + mināti, mi to fix, measure cp. Sk. nimaya barter, change
winking, shutting the eyes; animisa not winking Dāvs v.26. See also nimesa.
cp. Vedic nimiṣ f. & nimiṣa nt.
(f.) winking Ja vi.336 (a˚).
abstr. to nimisati
to wink DN ii.20 (animisanto, not winking; v.l. BB animm˚; Ja iii.96 (ummisati + ). Cp. nimisatā.
Sk. nimiṣati, ni + misati
(& Nimmīlati) to shut, close (the eyes) Ja i.279; Dhp-a ii.6 (akkhīni nimmīlituṃ nâsakkhi) Caus. nim(m)īl-eti id. MN i.120; Dhp-a ii.28 (paralokaṃ opp. ummīleti); Ja i.279; Vism 292 (akkhīni ni˚).
ni + mīlati
(adj.) plunged, immersed in, sunk down or fallen into (-˚) (c. loc. Vin iii.106 (gūthakūpe sasīsakaṃ n.); DN i.75; Ja i.4 Ja iii.393 (gūthakalale), 415; Nd i.26; Pp 71; Mil 262 Sdhp 573. Nimujja (nimmujja)
cp. Sk, nimagna, pp. of nimujjati
diving, immersion, in cpd. ummujja-nimujja(ṃ karoti) DN i.78. See ummujjā
Sk. *nimajj-yā
to sink down, plunge into (with loc.), dive in, be immersed AN iv.11; Pp 74; Ja i.66, Ja i.70; Ja iii.163, Ja iii.393 (kāmakalale); iv.139; aor nimujji Ja ii.293; Pv-a 47 (udake) ■ Caus. nimujjeti (so read for nimujjati Ja v.268) & nimujjāpeti to cause to sink or dive, to drown J-iii.133; iv.142 (nāvaṃ) ■ pp nimugga q.v.
Sk. nimajjati, ni + mujjati
(nt.) diving, ducking; bathing Pv-a 47.
Sk. nimajjana
winking Mil 194.
= nimisa, cp. Vedic nimesa
= vimokkha SN i.2 (v.l. SS vi˚, preferable).
the Nimb tree (Azadirachta Indica), bearing a bitter leaf, & noted for its hard wood Vin i.152 (˚kosa), 284 (id.), 201 (˚kasāva); AN i.32 AN v.212; Vv 3336 (˚muṭṭhi, a handful of N. leaves); Ja ii.105, Ja ii.106; Dhp-a i.52 (˚kosa); Dhs-a 320 (˚paṇṇa, the leaf of the N. as example of tittaka, bitter taste); Vv-a 142 (˚palāsa); Pv-a 220 (˚rukkhassa daṇḍena katasūla).
Sk. nimba, non-Aryan
(adj.) fleshless MN i.58, MN i.364; Pv-a 68.
nis + maṃsa
(adj.) without egotism, not false, not slandering Snp 56 (cp Nd ii.356 makkha = niṭṭhuriya; see also Snp-a 108; paraguṇa-vināsana-lakkhaṇo makkho).
nis + makkha, cp. Sk. nirmatsara
(adj.) free from flies Ja i.262; Dhp-a i.59. Nimmajjana (Nimminjana?)
Sk. nirmakṣika
a kind of (oil-)cake Vv 3338 (nimmajjani = tilapiññāka Vv-a 147); Pv i.1010 (˚miñjana, v.l. BB ˚majjani); Pv-a 47 (doṇi˚).
*mṛd-yana? perhaps nonAryan
(nt.) crushing Ja iii.252; Vism 234 (sattu˚); Dhp-a iii.404; Vv-a 284.
nis + mathana
to crush out, suppress, destroy Ja i.340. Cp. abhimatthati.
nis + matheti
(nt.) touching, touch, crushing, subduing AN ii.34 (mada-nimmadana, crushing out pride; may, however, be taken as nis + mada of mad “de-priding,” lit. disintoxication); Bv i.81; Vism 293.
to nimmādeti
(adj.) suppressible DN ii.243.
Sk. nirmṛdya, grd. of nimmadeti
(nt.) touching, crushing Mil 270 (na vāto hattha-gahaṇaṃ vā nimmaddanaṃ vā upeti the wind cannot be grasped).
nis + mṛd
(nt.) void of men, absence of men Ja iii.148.
nis + manussa + ya
(adj.) free from impurity, stainless, clean, pure AN iv.340; Dhp 243; Nd ii.586; Vism 58 Sdhp 250. Nimmata-pitika
nis + mala
(adj.) one who has neither mother nor father, an orphan Dhp-a ii.72.
nis + māta-pitika
maker, builder, creator DN i.18, DN i.56 (in formula: brahmā… kattā nimmātā… ).
Sk. nirmātṛ, n. ag. of nimmināti
to crush, subdue humiliate; insult DN i.92 (v.l. ˚maddeti; = DN-a i.257 nimmadati nimmāne karoti), 93, 96.
either = Sk. nirmṛdayati (mṛd ) or *nirmādayati to nirmada. free from pride = nirmāna
(nt.) measuring; production, creation, work; issara-n-hetu caused by God MN ii.122; AN i.173; Vb 367. N ■ ratī devā a class of devas, e.g. at DN i.218; Iti 94; Vism 225; DN-a i.114 Thag-a 169; Vv-a 149. Cp. (para-) nimmita.
Sk. nirmāṇa, see nimmināti
(adj.) free from pride, humble DN-a i.257.
Sk. nirmāna, nis + māna
to be abased, to be mocked Vin ii.183.
Pass. to nimmāna, of nis + māna
(adj ■ pp.) measured out, planned, laid out; created (by supernatural power iddhi); measured, stately DN i.18, DN i.56 (iddhiyā pi DN-a i.167), 219 (Su˚ devaputta. Np.), ibid. (Paranimmitavasavattī devā a class of devas, lit. “created by others, but also possessed of great power: Vv-a 79, Vv-a 80); also one of the 5, or the 3 spheres (kāmûpapattiyo) in the kāmaloka, viz. paccupaṭṭhita-kāmā, nimmānarati˚ (or nimmita˚), paranimmita˚. Iti 94; Dhs 1280 (cp. kāma) DN iii.218; Ja i.59, Ja i.146 (kāyo n’ eva deva˚ na brahma˚) 232, Nd ii.202a, also under pucchā; P ii.119 (su˚, well constructed i.e. symmetrical); Vism 228 (Mārena nimmitaṃ Buddharūpaṃ); Vv-a 36 (= mitaṃ gacchati vāraṇo), 79 Thag-a 69, Thag-a 70; Mil 1, Mil 242. See also abhinimmita.
pp. of nimmināti
to measure out, fashion, build, construct form; make by miracle, create, compose produce, lay out, plan, aor. nimmini Ja i.232; Pv-a 245; Dhp-a iv.67; ger nimminitvā Ja i.32; Vv-a 80, & nimmāya Vv 163 ■ pp. nimmita See also nimmātar and nimmāna. Cp. abhi˚.
cp. Sk. nirmimīti & nirmāti, nis + mināti,; mā; cp. nimināti
see nimīlati.
(adj.) without root, rootless Ja vi.177.
nis + mūla
the slough or castoff skin of a snake Pv-a 63.
Sk. nirmoka fr. nis + moceti
(adj.) one’s own Snp 149 (˚putta = orasaputta Kp-a 248); niyassakamma at AN i.99 & Pv iv.113 (v.l. Minayeff tiyassa) is to be read as nissayakamma (q.v.).
Sk. nija, q.v.
(adj.) one’s own Thig 469; Thag-a 284; Dhs-a 169, Dhs-a 337; DN-a i.183; Vb 2; Vism 349.
= niya
(adj.) restrained, bound to, constrained to, sure (as to the future), fixed (in its consequences), certain, assured, necessary DN ii.92 (sambodhiparāyanā), 155; iii.107; Snp 70 (= ariyamaggena niyāmappatta Snp-a 124, cp. Nd ii.357); Dhp 142 (= catumagga niyamena n. Dhp-a iii.83); Ja i.44 (bodhiyā); Pp 13, Pp 16 Pp 63; Kv 609 sq.; Dhs 1028 sq. (micchatta˚ etc.; cp Dhs. trsl. 266, 267), 1414, 1595; Vb 17, Vb 24, Vb 63, Vb 319 Vb 324; Mil 193; Tikp 168 (˚micchādiṭṭhi); Dhp-a iii.170; Pv-a 211. Discussed in Pts. of Contr. (see Index). aniyata see separately.
pp. of ni + yam
(f.) necessity, fate, destiny DN i.53; DN-a i.161; Vv-a 341; Pv-a 254.
cp. Sk. niyati, ni + yam
1. restraint, constraint, training, self-control Mil 116 (yama + ); Pv-a 98 (yama + ).
2. definiteness certainty, limitation Dhp-a iii.83 (catumagga˚, v.l. niyāma); Snp-a 124 (niyāma); Dhs-a 154; Pv-a 166 (ayaṃ n. saṃsāren’ atthi: law, necessity) ■ aniyama indefiniteness choice, generality Dhs-a 57; Vv-a 16 (yaṃ kiñci = aniyame, i.e. in a general sense), 17 (same of ye keci); Pv-a 175 (vā saddo aniyamattho = indefinite)- niyamena (instr.) adv. by necessity, necessarily Pv-a 287; niyamato (abl.) id. Dhs-a 145, Dhs-a 304 (so read). 3. natural law, cosmic order; in Commentarial literature this was fivefold: utu-, bīja-, kamma-, ćitta-, dhammaDA on DN ii.11; Dial. ii.8; Dhs-a 272; trs. 360.
cp. Sk. niyama, ni + yam; often confused with niyāma
(nt.) fixing, settling, definition, explanation in detail Mil 352 (lakkha-n aiming at the target); Vv-a 22 (visesattha˚); 231, Pv-a 255 (so read for nigamana?).
Sk. niyamana, to niyameti
to tie down, to fix; explain in detail, exemplify Pv-a 265; Vism 666. pp. niyamita see a˚.
cp. Sk. niyamayati, ni + yamati
see niyyādeti.
way, way to an end or aim, esp. to salvation, right way (sammatta˚); method manner, practice SN i.196; SN iii.225 (sammatta˚); AN i.122; Snp 371 (˚dassin = sammatta-niyāmabhūtassa maggassa dassāvin Snp-a 365); Nd i.314 (˚avakkanti); Nd ii.358 (= cattāro maggā); Pts ii.236 sq. (sammatta˚ okkamati); Pp 13, Pp 15; Vb 342 ■ niyāmena (instr.) adv in this way, by way of, according to Ja i.278; Ja iv.139 Ja iv.414 (suta˚ as he had heard); Dhp-a i.79; Dhp-a ii.9, Dhp-a ii.21; Vv-a 4; Pv-a 260; Kvu trs. 383 ■ aniyāmena (see also aniyāmena) without order, aimlessly, at random Ja v.337.
Sk. niyama & niyāma
(adj.) sure of or in, founded in, or leading to, completed in DN i.190 (dhamma-n. paṭipadā, cp. niyamatā).
either to niyama or niyāma
(see niyyāmaka ) ship’s captain Vism 137 (simile).
(f.) state of being settled, certainty, reliance surety, being fixed in (-˚) SN ii.25 (dhamma˚ + dhammaṭṭhitatā); AN i.286 (id.), Ja i.113 (saddhammassa n assurance of… ); Kv 586 (accanta˚ final assurance).
abstr. to niyāma, influenced in meaning by niyama
to restrain, control, govern, guide Mil 378 (nāvaṃ).
Denom. fr. niyāma or niyama
to be fit for, to be adapted to, to succeed, result, ensue Pv-a 49 (= upakappati).
Pass. of niyuñjati
(adj.) tied to, appointed to (with loc.), commissioned, ordered Dhs-a 47; Pv-a 20 (janapade), 124 (dānâdhikāre), 127 (dāne).
pp. of niyuñjati
command, order; necessity. abl. niyogā “strictly speaking” Dhs 1417.
ni + yoga
to urge, incite to (with loc.) Vin ii.303; AN iv.32; Pv ii.14; Mil 229. Niyyati = Niyati
Caus. of niyuñjati
(Pass. of nayati).
(nt.) escape Ja i.215.
cp. Sk. niryaṇa
(pp.) = niyyādita MN i.360.
(nt.) returning, return to (-˚) Ja v.497 (saka-raṭṭha˚); Vism 556; DN-a i.234.
fr. niyyāti
a guide, leader MN i.523 sq.
n. ag. to niyyāma
to go out, get out (esp. of saṃsāra); SN v.6 (niyyanti dhīrā lokamhā); Snp-a 212 aor. niyyāsi DN i.49, DN i.108; Ja i.263; Snp 417; Snp 3rd pl. niyyiṃsu AN v.195; fut. niyyassati AN v.194 ■ See also niyyāna & niyyānika.;
Sk. niryāti, nis + yāti
assigned, presented, given, dedicated Pv-a 196 (dhana nī˚). As niyyātita at Vism 115.
pp. of niyyādeti
(niyyāteti, nīyādeti) to give (back), give into charge give over, assign, dedicate, to present, denote SN i.131 (niyyātayāmi); iv.181 (sāmikānaṃ gāvo), 194; Ja i.30 Ja i.66, Ja i.496; Ja ii.106, Ja ii.133; Vv 468 niyyādesi = sampaṭicchāpesi adāsi Vv-a 199); Pv iii.211 (niyātayiṃsu = adaṃsu Pv-a 184); Vism 115 (t); Dhp-a i.70; Dhp-a ii.87; Vv-a 33, Vv-a 67; Pv-a 20 (vihāraṃ nīyādetvā), 25 (= uddissati dadāti), 42 81, 276 (at all Pv-a passages as nī˚) ■ pp. niyyādita Cp. similarly paṭiyādeti & paṭiyādita.;
cp. Sk. ni-or nir-yātayati, Caus. of ni(r)yatati
(nt.) 1. going out, departure DN i.9 (= niggamana DN-a i.94).
2. way out, release deliverance Snp 170, Snp 172 (“magga-saccaṃ bhāvento lokamhā niyyāti” Snp-a 212); Pts i.163, Pts i.176; Ne 119 Cp. niyyānika ■ aniyyāna Dhp-a ii.209.
nis + yāna, cp. niyyāti
(adj.) leading out (of saṃsāra), leading to salvation, salutary, sanctifying, saving profitable DN i.235, DN i.237; SN i.220; SN v.82, SN v.166, SN v.255, SN v.379 sq. Ja i.48 (a˚), 106; Dhs 277, Dhs 339, Dhs 505 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 82 335); Vb 12, Vb 19, Vb 56, Vb 319, Vb 324; Ne 29, Ne 31, Ne 63, Ne 83; Dhp-a iv.87 ■ Also found in spelling nīyānika e.g. AN iii.132 (ariyā diṭṭhi n. nīyāti takkarassa sammādukkha-khayāya); DN-a i.89 (anīyānikattā tiracchanabhūtā kathā). Niyyama(ka)
to niyyāna
a pilot, helmsman, master mariner, guide Ja i.107 (thala˚); iv.137, 138; Mil 194, Mil 378 sq.; Dāvs iv.42.
Sk. niyāmaka & niryāma(ka). Cp. also P. niyāmaka
any exudation (of plants or trees), as gum, resin, juice, etc. Vism 74 (˚rukkha, one of the 8 kinds of trees), 360 (paggharitan ■ rukkha). Cp. nivāyāsa.
cp. Sk. niryāsa, Halāyudha 5, 75
a pinnacle, turret, gate MN i.253; DN-a i.284 (pāsāda + ).
Sk. niryūha (& nirvyūha?), perhaps to; vah
(& nirākaroti) to think little of, despise, neglect, disregard, repudiate throw away, ruin, destroy Thag 478; Iti 83 (nirākare) Ja iii.280 = Ja v.498; Ja iv.302; Pv iii.96 (= chaḍḍeti pajahati Pv-a 211); Vv-a 109 ■ pp. (a)nirākata Iti 39.
Sk. nirākaroti, nis + ā kṛ;
(niraggaḷa) (adj.) unobstructed, free, rich in result SN i.76 = Iti 21; AN ii.43; AN iv.151; MN i.139; Snp 303; Nd ii.284 Ca; Vv 6431 (= Vv-a 285).
nis + aggala
(adj.) without fire Mil 324 (˚okāsa).
nis + aggi + ka
to be thrown out, to be expelled, to lose (with abl.) Ja vi.502, Ja vi.503 (raṭṭhā); v.l. BB nirajhati Com. ni(g)gacchati; Thig 93 (aor. nirajji ‘haṃ = na jānim ahaṃ Thag-a, 90. Kern (wrongly) proposes reading virajjhi).
Pass. of nirajati, nis + ajati, Vedic nirajati to drive out cattle
(adj.) fond of, attached to (-˚) SN i.133; DN-a i.250; Pv-a 5 (duccarita˚), 89, 161 (hitakaraṇa˚).
pp. of niramati
(adj.-n..) soulless; view of soullessness or unsubstantiality; thus interpreted (in preference to niratta2) by Com. on Snp 787 Snp 858, Snp 919. See foll.
Sk. *nirātman, nis + attan
(adj.) rejected, thrown off, given up Snp 1098; Nd ii.359. Note. At Snp 787, Snp 858, Snp 919 the interpretation of Nd i.82 Nd i.248 = Nd i.352 and also Bdhgh assume a cpd. of nis + attan (= nirātman): see niratta1.
Sk. nirasta, pp. of nirasyati, see nirassati
(adj.) useless, groundless, unproficient, vain (opp. sāttha profitable) Snp 582 (nt. as adv.) 585 (niratthā paridevanā); Dhp 41; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 18 (˚bhāva uselessness), 83 (= duḥ).
nis + attha
(adj.) = nirattha; Vv-a 324; Pv-a 18, Pv-a 40, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 102 etc ■ f. ˚ikā Thag-a 258; Mil 20; Sdhp 68.
(adj.) having no interval, continuous, uninterrupted Pv-a 135. Usually in nt. as adv nirantaraṃ always, incessantly, constantly; immediately at once Dhs-a 168; Pv-a 52, Pv-a 80, Pv-a 107, Pv-a 110 (= satataṃ) 120; Dhp-a i.13.
nis + antara
(adj.) without offence, guiltless, innocent Ja i.264.
nis + aparādha
(adj.) not heeding, unsuspecting, disregarding, indifferent, reckless Vv-a 27, Vv-a 47 (jīvitaṃ); Pv-a 62; DN-a i.177; Mil 343 (jīvitaṃ).
nis + apa + īkṣ
(m. nt.) a vast number; also Name of a hell SN i.149 = AN ii.3 = AN v.171 (expld at 173 as “seyyathā pi vīsati abbudā nirayā evam eko nirabbudo nirayo”); Ja iii.360 (Com.: vīsati abbudāni ekaṃ nirabbudaṃ).
cp. BSk. nirarbuda & abbuda 3
(adj.) free from boils or tumours, healthy (also fig.) Vin iii.18 (of the Sangha).
nis + abbuda2
purgatory, hell, a place of punishment & torture, where sin is atoned (i.e. kamma ripens = paccati, is literally boiled) by terrible ordeals (kāraṇāni) similar to & partly identical with those of Hades & Tartarus. There are a great number of hells, of which the most fearful is the; Avīcimahāniraya (see Avīci). Names of other purgatories occur frequently in the Jātaka collection, e.g. Kākola vi.247; Khuradhāra v.269 sq.; Dhūma-roruva v.271 Patāpana v.266, 271, 453; Paduma iv.245; Roruva iii.299; v.266; vi.237; Sanghāta v.266; Sañjīva ibid. Sataporisa v.269; Sattisūla v.143. As the principal one n. is often mentioned with the other apāyas (states of suffering), viz. tiracchānayoni (animal world) & pittivisaya (the; manes), e.g. at Nd i.489; Nd ii.517, Nd ii.550; Pv iv.11; Thag-a 282; Pv-a 27 sq. (see apāya) ■ There is a great variety of qualifying adjectives connected with niraya, all of which abound in notions of fearful pain, awful misery & continuous suffering, e.g. kaṭuka ghora, dāruṇa, bhayānaka, mahābhitāpa, sattussada etc ■ Descriptions of N. in glowing terms of frightfulness are freq. found from the earliest books down to the late Peta-Vatthu, Pañcagati-dīpana & Saddhammopāyana Of these the foll. may be quoted as characteristic: SN i.152 (10 nirayas); MN iii.183; AN i.141 Snp p.126 = AN v.173; Nd i.404 sq. = Nd ii.304iii.c; Ja iv.4 (Mittavindaka); Vv 52 (Revatī); Pv i.10; Pv iii.10; Pv iv.1 Pv iv.7; Dhp-a i.148 ■ See on the whole subject, esp. L Scherman, Materialen zur indischen Visionsliteratur, Leipzig 1792; & W. Stede,; Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914, pp. 33–39 ■ References: Vin i.227 (apāya duggati vinipāta niraya); DN i.82, DN i.107 (id.); Vin ii.198 (yo kho sanghaṃ bhindati kappaṃ nirayamhi paccati), 204; ii.203 = Iti 86; DN i.228 (+ tiracchānayoni), 54 (read nirayasate for niriyasate); iii.111; SN iv.126; SN v.356, SN v.450; MN i.73, MN i.285, MN i.308, MN i.334; MN ii.86, MN ii.149 MN ii.186; MN iii.166, MN iii.203, MN iii.209; AN iv.405; AN v.76, AN v.182, AN v.184; Snp 248 (patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirā), 333, 660 sq., 677 sq. Dhp 126, Dhp 140, Dhp 306, Dhp 311, Dhp 315; Thag 304 (adhammo nirayaṃ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiṃ) = Dhs-a 38 = DN-a i.99 = Dhp-a i.22; Thig 456; Iti 12; Ja iv.463; Pp 60; Pts i.83 (Avīci˚); Vb 86, Vb 337; Vism 102; Mil 148; Dhp-a i.22; Dhp-a iii.71; Sdhp 7, Sdhp 285 ■ See also nerayika.
-gāmin (adj.) leading to purgatory (magga) Snp 277 -dukkha the pain of H. Snp 531; -pāla a guardian of P. a devil AN i.138, AN i.141; MN iii.179; Nd i.404; Vv-a 226 Names of guardians (after their complexion) e.g. Kāḷa (black) & Upakāḷa (blackish) Ja vi.248. -bhaya the fear of P. Ja i.168; Vism 392; -saṃvattanika conducive to P. Nd i.489.
BSk. niraya, nis + aya of i = to go asunder, to go to destruction, to die, cp. in meaning Vedic nirṛti. The popular etym. given by Dhammapāla at Pv-a 53 is “n’ atthi ettha ayo sukhan ti” = there is no good; that given by Bdhgh at Vism 427 “n’ atthi ettha assādasaññito ayo” (no refreshment)
(adj.) without remainder, complete, inclusive Ne 14, Ne 15, cp. Mil 91, Mil 182.
nis + avasesa
(adj.) without food or subsistence, poor Ja iv.128.
nis + asana2
to throw off, despise, neglect Snp 785, Snp 954; Nd i.76 (so read for nidassati, v.l. SS nir˚), 444; Snp-a 522 ■ pp niratta2.
cp. Sk. nirasyati, nis + assati, as to throw
(adj.) without taste, insipid, dull Vism 135. Cp. nirāsāda.
nis + assāda
see nirankaroti.
(adj.) unconfused, clear, calm, undisturbed Ja i.17 (v. 94).
nis + ākula
(adj.) healthy Mil 251 (of paddy).
nis + ātanka
(adj.) healthy, undepraved, without sin, virtuous Snp 251, Snp 252 (˚gandha nikkilesayoga Snp-a 293), 717 (id. = nikkilesa Snp-a 499).
nis + āma, cp. nirāmaya
(adj.) not ill, healthy, good, without fault Pv-a 164.
nis + āmaya
(adj.) having no meat or prey; free from sensual desires, disinterested, not material SN i.35, SN i.60; SN iv.219, SN iv.235; SN v.68, SN v.332; AN iii.412; DN iii.278 Vb 195; Vism 71; Sdhp 475, Sdhp 477.
nis + āmisa
(adj.) without objects (for the purpose of sacrificing), i.e. without the killing of animals (of yañña) SN i.76; AN ii.42 sq.
nis + ārambha
(adj.) unsupported Mil 295 (ākāsa).
nis + ālamba
(adj.) houseless, homeless Mil 244 (= aniketa). At Dhp-a iv.31 as expln of appossukka. f. abstr. nirālayatā homelessness Mil 162, Mil 276, Mil 420.
nis + ālaya
(adj.) not hungry, not longing for anything, desireless SN i.12, SN i.23, SN i.141; AN i.107 sq.; Snp 1048 (anigha + ), 1078 (id.); Nd ii.360; Pp 27; Pv iv.133 (= nittaṇha Pv-a 230). See also amama.
nis + āsā
(adj.) without wishes, expectations or desires, desireless Snp 1090 (Nd ii.reading for nirāsaya); Nd ii.361 (cp. Dhp-a iv.185 nirāsāsa *nirāsaṃsa, v.l. for nirāsaya).
nis + āsaṃsa, śaṃs
(adj.) without apprehension, unsuspicious, not doubting Ja i.264; Vism 180.
nis + āsankā
(f.) the not hesitating Ja vi.337.
abstr. fr. nirāsanka
(adj.) not hanging on to, not clinging or attached to (c. loc.) Snp 851 (= nittaṇha Snp-a 549); Nd i.221.
adj. to pp. āsatta1 with nis
(adj.) without (outward) support, not relying on (outward) things, without (sinful) inclinations Snp 56 (: Nd ii.360 b reads nirāsasa) 369, 634, 1090 (Nd ii.361 reads nirāsaṃsa); Dhp 410; Dhp-a iv.185 (v.l. BB nirāsāsa; expld by nittaṇha).
nis + āsaya, fr. śri
(adj.) without intoxication, undefiled, sinless Thag-a 148.
nis + āsava
(adj.) tasteless, yielding no enjoyment Thag 710. Cp. nirassāda.
nis + assāda
(adj.) without food, not eating, fasting Ja iv.225; Sdhp 389.
nis + āhāra
(adj.) not moving, stable, unshaken Vism 377 (= acala, āneñja).
nis + iñjanā, fr. iñjati
(adj.) without fuel (of fire), Thag-a 148 (aggi); Dhp-a i.44 (jātaveda). Niriha(ka)
nis + indhana
(adj.) inactive, motionless, without impulse Thag-a 148 (˚ka); Mil 413 (+ nijjīvata); Vism 484, Vism 594 sq.
nis + īha
to be broken up, to be dissolved, to be destroyed, to cease, die Vin i.1; DN i.180 sq., 215; ii.157; SN iii.93 (aparisesaṃ); iv.36 sq., 60, 98, 184 sq.; 294 402; v.213 sq.; AN iii.165 sq. (aparisesaṃ); v.139 sq. Ja i.180; Pp 64; Sdhp 606 ■ pp. niruddha. Cp nirodha.
Pass. of nirundhati (nirodhati) ni + rundhati
(adj.) making no reply Pv-a 117.
nis + uttara
(f.) one of the Vedāngas (see chaḷanga), expln of words, grammatical analysis etymological interpretation; pronunciation, dialect way of speaking, expression Vin ii.139 (pabbajitā… sakāya niruttiyā Buddhavacanaṃ dūsenti); DN i.202 (loka˚, expression); MN iii.237 (janapada˚); SN iii.71 (tayo n-pathā); AN ii.160 (˚paṭisambhidā); iii.201; Dhp 352 (˚padakovida = niruttiyañ ca sesapadesu cā ti catūsu pi paṭisambhidāsu cheko ti attho Dhp-a iv.70 i.e. skilled in the dialect or the original language of the holy Scriptures); Pts i.88 sq.; Pts ii.150 (˚paṭisambhidā) Nd ii.563; Dhs 1307; Ne 4, Ne 8, Ne 33, Ne 105; Mil 22 Vism 441; Snp-a 358; Pv-a 97.
Sk. nirukti, nis + vac
(adj.) without water, waterless MN i.543; Nd ii.630.
nis + udaka
(pp.) expelled, destroyed; vanished, ceased SN iii.112; Dhs 1038.
pp. of nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati
see nirujjhati, niruddha, nirodha & nirodheti. Cp. parirundhati.;
(adj.) useless Ja ii.103.
nis + upakāra
(adj.) not hurt, not injured or set back Mil 130.
nis + upaghāta
(adj.) not harassed (burnt) or afflicted (by pain or harm) Thig 512.
nis + upatāpa
(adj.) without affliction or mishap, harmless, secure, happy Ja iv.139; Pv-a 262 (sotthi).
nis + upaddava
(adj.) (in verse always nirūpadhi ) free from passions or attachment, desireless controlled Vin ii.156; SN i.194 (vippamutta + ) iv.158; AN i.80, AN i.138 (sītibhūta + ); Dhp 418 (id.); Thag 1250; Thag 2, Thag 320 (vippamutta + ; expld by niddukkha Thag-a 233); Iti 46, Iti 50, Iti 58, Iti 62; Snp 33, Snp 34, Snp 642 (sītibhūta + ) Pv iv.134; Dhp-a iv.225 (= nirupakkilesa); Pv-a 230.
nis + upadhi, cp. upadhīka
(adj.) without comparison, incomparable Snp-a 455 (= atitula).
nis + upama
to suppress, hush, silence Ja i.62 (text nirumhitvā, v.l. SS nirumbhitvā, cp. san-nirumhitvā Vv-a 217).
Sk. ? Trenckner, Notes p. 59 ni + rudh (?)
(adj.) grown, risen; usual, customary, common Vv-a 108.
cp. Sk. nirūḍha, pp. of niruhati
(adj.) breathless Ja iii.416; Ja iv.121, cp. vi.197; vi.82.
cp. Sk. nirucchvāsa, nis + ussāsa
(adj.), careless, unconcerned, indifferent to (c. loc.) Thag-a 282.
nis + ussukka
see nīroga.
(adj.) tasteless, insipid Ja ii.304; Ja iii.94; Ja vi.561.
nis + oja
oppression, suppression; destruction, cessation annihilation (of senses, consciousness, feeling being in general: sankhārā). Bdhgh’s expl;n of the word is: “ni-saddo abhāvaṃ, rodha-saddo ca cārakaṃ dīpeti Vism 495 ■ N. in many cases is synonymous with nibbāna & parinibbāna; it may be said to be even a stronger expression as far as the active destruction of the causes of life is concerned. Therefore frequently combd with nibbāna in formula “sabbasankhāra-samatho… virāgo nirodho nibbānaṃ,” e.g. SN i.136; Iti 88. Nd ii.s. nibbāna (see nibbāna iii.6). Also in combn with nibbidā, e.g. SN iii.48, SN iii.223; SN iii.163 sq.v.438 ■ The opposite of nirodha is samudaya, cp formula “yaṃ kiñci samudaya-dhammaṃ sabban taṃ nirodha-dhammaṃ” e.g. Nd ii.under sankhārā & passim (a) Vin i.1, Vin i.10; DN ii.33, DN ii.41, DN ii.57 sq., 112; iii.130 sq. 136 sq., 226 sq.; Ja i.133; Ja ii.9 sq., 223; iii.59 sq., 163 v.438; MN i.140, MN i.263, MN i.410; AN i.299; AN iv.456 (= āsavānaṃ parikkhaya); Thig 6 (= kilesanirodha Thag-a 13), 158; Iti 46 = Snp 755 (nirodhe ye vimuccanti te janā maccuhāyino); Iti 62 = Snp 754; Snp 731, Snp 1037; Pts i.192; Pts ii.44 sq. 221; Pp 68; Vb 99 sq., 229; Ne 14, Ne 16 sq.; Vism 372; Vv-a 63; Pv-a 220 (jīvitassa) ■ (b) (as-˚): anupubba DN iii.266; AN iv.409, AN iv.456; abhisaññā˚ DN i.180; asesavirāga˚ SN ii.4, SN ii.12; SN iv.86; SN v.421 sq.; AN i.177; AN ii.158, AN ii.161 upādāna˚ SN iii.14; kāma˚ AN iii.410 sq.; jāti˚ SN iv.86 taṇhā˚ DN iii.216; dukkha˚ DN iii.136; SN iii.32, SN iii.60 SN iv.4 sq., 14, 384; AN i.177; nandi˚ SN iii.14; SN iv.36; bhava (= nibbāna) SN ii.117; SN iii.14; AN v.9; Pts i.159; sakkāya DN iii.240; SN v.410; AN ii.165 sq.; AN iii.246, AN iii.325 sq.v.238 sq.; saññāvedayita˚ DN iii.262, DN iii.266; SN iv.217, SN iv.293 sq.; v. 213 sq.; AN i.41; AN iii.192; AN iv.306; AN v.209.
-dhamma subject to destruction, able to be destroyed destructible (usually in formula of samudaya-dhamma see above) Vin i.11; DN i.110; SN iv.47, SN iv.107, SN iv.214; MN iii.280; AN v.143 sq.; -dhammatā liability to destruction SN iv.217 -dhātu the element or condition of annihilation, one of the 3 dhātus, viz. rūpa, arūpa˚ n˚. DN iii.215; Iti 45 Ne 97; -saññā perception or consciousness of annihilation DN iii.251 sq., 283; AN iii.334; -samāpatti attainment of annihilation Pts i.97, Pts i.100; Mil 300 Vism 702.
BSk. nirodha, to nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati & niruddha
(adj.) obstructing, destroying Iti 82 (paññā˚), cp. MN i.115.
fr. nirodha
to oppress, destroy Vism 288 (in expln of passambheti).
Denom. fr. nirodha
a dwelling, habitation, lair, nest Ja iii.454.
fr. ni + lī
see nillacchita.
(adj.) sitting on (c. loc.), perched; hidden, concealed, lying in wait Ja i.135, Ja i.293; Ja iii.26; Vv-a 230.
pp. of nilāyati
to sit down (esp. for the purpose of hiding), to settle, alight; to keep oneself hidden, to lurk, hide Ja i.222, Ja i.292; Mil 257; Pv-a 178. aor nilīyi Ja i.158; Ja iii.26; Dhp-a ii.56; Pv-a 274 ■ pp nilīna. Caus. II. nilīyāpeti to conceal, hide (trs.) Ja i.292.
ni + līyati
(nt.) hiding Ja v.103 (˚ṭṭhāna hiding-place).
abstr. fr. nilīyati, cp. Sk. nilayana
(nt.) settling place, hiding-place, refuge Ja v.102 (so read for nillenaka expld by nilīyanaṭṭhāna p. 103).
cp. Sk. nilayana, fr. ni + lī
(adj.) castrated Thig 440; written as nilicchita at Ja vi.238 (v.l. BB as gloss niluñcita). expld by “vacchakakāla… nibbījako kato, uddhaṭabījo (p. 239).
Sk. *nirlāñchita, nis + lacchita of nillaccheti
to deprive of the marks or characteristics (of virility), to castrate Thig 437 (= purisa-bhāvassa lacchana-bhūtāni bījakāni nillacchesi nīhari Thag-a 270). See also nillañchaka & nillacchita.;
nis + laccheti of lāñch, cp. lakkhaṇa
(adj.) shameless Sdhp 382. Ni(l)lanchaka
nis + lajjā
(adj.-n.) one who marks cattle, i.e. one who castrates or deprives of virility Ja iv.364 (spelt tilañchaka in text, but right in v.l.), expld as “tisūlâdi-ankakaraṇena lañchakā ca lakkhaṇakārakā ti attho” (p 366). cp. nillacchita.
cp. Sk. nirlāñchana, of nirlāñchayati = nis + laccheti
(adj.) without deceit, free from slander AN ii.26 = Iti 113. Nillaleti & Nilloleti;
nis + lapa
to move (the tongue) up & down SN i.118; MN i.109; DN-a i.42 (pp. nillāḷita-jivhā); Dhp-a iv.197 (jivhaṃ nilloleti; v.l. nillāleti & lilāḷeti) = Ja v.434 (v.l. nillelati for ˚lo˚).
nis + lul, cp. Sk. laḍayati & loḍayati
(adj.) without scratches, without edges (?) Vin ii.123 (of jantāghara).
nis + lekha
(adj.-n.) watching out; watchful, careful Ja v.43, Ja v.86 (˚sīla).
nis + lokana
to watch out, keep guard, watch, observe Vin ii.208.
nis + loketi
plundering, plunder DN i.52; AN i.154; Nd i.144 (˚ṃ harati); Nd ii.1997; Tikp 167, 280; DN-a i.159.
cp. Sk. nirlopa, nis + lup
(adj.) free from greed Ja iv.10.
nis + lobha
(adj.) free from greed or desires Snp 56 (= Nd ii.362 nittaṇha); Ja v.358.
nis + loluppā
(pp.) returned, turning away from, giving up, being deprived of, being without (˚-Vin ii.109 (˚bīja); Ja i.203; Vv-a 72.
pp. of nivattati
to turn back, to return (opp. gacchati), to turn away from, to flee vanish, disappear Vin i.46; DN i.118; Ja i.223; Ja ii.153 Ja iv.142; Snp p.80; Pv ii.934; iv.107; Snp-a 374; Pv-a 74 Pv-a 161. aor. nivatti Ja ii.3; Pv-a 141. pp. nivatta (q.v.)-Caus. I. nivatteti to lead back, to turn from, to make go back, to convert Ja i.203; Vv-a 110; Pv-a 204 (pāpato from sin). Cp. upa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚ ■ Caus. II. nivattāpeti to send back, to return Pv-a 154.
Vedic nivartati, ni + vattati
(nt.) 1. returning, turning, fig. turning away from, giving up, “conversion” Pv-a 120 (pāpato).
2. a bend, curve (of a river), nook Ja i.324; Ja ii.117, Ja ii.158; Ja iv.256; Ja v.162.
fr. nivattati
(adj.) only neg. a˚; not liable to return, not returning Dhp-a i.63.
grd. formation fr. nivattana
(f.) returning, return Pv-a 189 (gati˚ going & coming).;
fr. ni + vṛt
(pp.) clothed in or with (-˚ or acc.), dressed, covered SN i.115; Ja i.59 (su˚), 307 (sāṭakaṃ); Pv-a 47, Pv-a 49 (dibbavattha˚), 50.
pp. of ni + vasati1
to heap up, sow, throw (food) MN i.151 sq. (nivāpaṃ) ■ pp. nivutta (q.v.).
ni + vapati
see vi˚.
only in Caus. nivāreti (q.v.), pp. nivuta.
ni + varati
to live, dwell, inhabit, stay Vin ii.11 ■ pp. nivuttha, cp. also nivāsana2 & nivāsin.;
ni + vasati2
multitude, quantity, heap Dāvs iv.53; Dāvs v.14, Dāvs v.24, Dāvs v.62.
fr. ni + vah
(adj.) with the wind gone down, i.e. without wind, sheltered from the wind, protected, safe, secure Vin i.57, Vin i.72; MN i.76; AN i.137 (kūṭāgāra); AN i.101 (id.); Iti 92 (rahada); Thag 1 (kuṭikā); 2, 376 (pāsāda) ■ (nt.) a calm (opp. pavāta Vin ii.79.
Sk. nivāta, ni + vāta “wind-down”
lowliness, humbleness, obedience, gentleness MN i.125; Snp 265 (= nīcavattana Kp-a 144); Ja vi.252; Pv iv.712. Cp. Mvu ii.423. Freq. in cpd. nivātavutti (id.) AN iii.43; Snp 326 (= nīcavutti Snp-a 333) Ja iii.262; Mil 90, Mil 207; Vv-a 347.
identical with nivāta1, sheltered from the wind = low
a sheltered place, a place of escape, opportunity (for hiding) Ja i.289 = Ja v.435; cp. Mil 205 (where reading is nimantaka, with v.l. nivātaka, see note on p. 426). See Com. on this stanza at Ja v.437.
fr. nivāta1
food thrown (for feeding), fodder, bait; gift, portion, ration MN i.151 sq. (Nivāpa-sutta); Ja i.150; Ja iii.271; Dhp-a i.233 (share); iii.303; Vv-a 63 (diguṇaṃ ˚ṃ pacitvā cooking a double portion). Cp. nevāpika.
-tiṇa grass to eat Ja i.150; -puṭṭha fed on grains Dhp 325 (= kuṇḍakâdinā sūkara-bhattena puṭṭho Dhp-a iv.16 = Ne 129 = Thag 17; -bhojana a meal on food given, a feeding MN i.156).
cp. Sk. nivāpa, ni + vap, cp. nivapati
(?) oozing of trees; Bdhgh’s expln of ikkāsa at Vin ii.321. See niyyāsa.
(nt. & adj.) warding off, keeping back, preventing; refusal Snp 1034, Snp 1035, Snp 1106 (= Nd ii.363 āvāraṇa rakkhaṇa gopana); Dhs-a 259; Pv-a 102 Pv-a 278; Sdhp 396.
fr. nivāreti
(adj.) in dun˚; hard to check or keep back Mil 21 (+ durāvaraṇa).
grd. of nivāreti
(adj.) unobstructed, open Pv-a 202 (= anāvaṭa).
pp. of nivāreti
one who holds back or refuses (entrance) (opp. pavesetar) DN ii.83 = SN iv.194; AN v.194 (dovāriko aññātānaṃ nivāretā ñātānam pavesetā).
n. agent to nivāreti
to keep back, to hold back from (c. abl.), to restrain; to refuse, obstruct, forbid warn Vin i.46; Vin ii.220; SN i.7 (cittaṃ nivāreyya), 14 (yato mano nivāraye); iv.195 (cittaṃ); Dhp 77, Dhp 116 (pāpā cittaṃ nivāraye); Ja i.263; Pv iii.74; Vv-a 69; Pv-a 79 Pv-a 102; Dhp-a i.41.
Caus. of nivarati
stopping, dwelling, resting-place, abode; living, sheltering Ja i.115 (˚ṃ kappeti to put up) ii.110; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 78. Usually in phrase pubbe-nivāsaṃ anussarati “to remember one’s former abode or place of existence (in a former life),” characterising the faculty of remembering one’s former birth DN i.13, DN i.15, DN i.16 DN i.81; SN i.167, SN i.175, SN i.196; SN ii.122, SN ii.213; SN v.265, SN v.305; AN i.25 AN i.164; AN ii.183; AN iii.323, AN iii.418 sq.; AN iv.141 sq.; AN v.211, AN v.339 Also in pubbenivāsaṃ vedi Iti 100; Snp 647 = Dhp 423 p-n-paṭisaṃyuttā dhammikathā DN ii.1; p-n-anussatiñāṇa DN iii.110, DN iii.220, DN iii.275; AN iv.177. Cp. nevāsika.
fr. nivasati2
(adj.-n..) dressed, clothed; dressing, clothing, undergarment (opp. pārupana) Vin i.46; Vin ii.228; Ja i.182 (manāpa˚), 421; iii.82; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 74, Pv-a 76 Pv-a 173 (pilotikakkhaṇḍa˚ dressed in rags).
fr. nivāseti
(nt.) dwelling, abode Pv-a 44 (˚ṭṭhāna place of abode), 76 (id.).
fr. nivasati2
(adj.) staying, living, dwelling Ja ii.435 (= nibaddha-vasanaka C.).
fr. nivāsa
(adj.-n.) dwelling, staying; (n.) an inhabitant Dāvs v.45.
to nivasati
to dress oneself, to put on (the undergarment), to get clothed or dressed. Freq in ster. phrase “ pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā patta- cīvaram ādāya…, ” describing the setting out on his round of the bhikkhu; e.g. DN i.109, DN i.178, DN i.205, DN i.226. Vin i.46; Vin ii.137, Vin ii.194; DN ii.127; Ja i.265; Pp 56; Pv i.103; Pv-a 49, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 127 (nivāsessati + pārupissati) 147 (= pārupāmi) ■ Caus. II. nivāsāpeti to cause or order to be dressed (with 2 acc.) Ja i.50; Ja iv.142; Dhp-a i.223.
Caus. of nivasati1
see nibbicikicchā; MN i.260.
see vi˚.
(adj.) settled, established (in); confirmed, sure; fixed on, bent on, devoted to (loc. Snp 57 (= satta allīna etc. Nd ii.364), 756, 774, 781 (ruciyā) 824 (saccesu), 892; Nd i.38, Nd i.65, Nd i.162; Iti 35, Iti 77; Ja i.89 Ja i.259 (adhammasmiṃ); Mil 361; Vv-a 97 (˚gāma, built situated); DN-a i.90 (su˚ & dun˚ of a street = well & badly built or situate). Cp. abhi˚.;
pp. of nivisati
to enter, stop, settle down on (loc.), to resort to, establish oneself Vin i.207; Ja i.309 = Ja iv.217 (yasmiṃ mano nivisati) ■ pp. niviṭṭha ger nivissa (q.v.). Caus. niveseti. Nivissa-vadin
ni + visati
(adj.-n.) “speaking in the manner of being settled or sure,” a dogmatist Snp 910, Snp 913, expld at Nd i.326 as “sassato loko idam eva saccaṃ, mogham aññan ti”; at Snp-a 560 as “jānāmi passāmi tath’ eva etan ti.”
nivissa (ger. of nivisati) + vādin
(adj.) surrounded, hemmed in, obstructed, enveloped DN i.246; SN ii.24; SN iv.127; Snp 348 (tamo˚), 1032, 1082; Iti 8; Nd ii.365 (= ophuṭa, paṭicchanna, paṭikujjita); Mil 161; Snp-a 596 (= pariyonaddha).
pp. of nivarati (nivāreti) cp. nivārita
(pp.) called, termed, designated Pv-a 73 (dasavassa-satāni, vassa-sahassaṃ n. hoti).
pp. of ni + vac
(pp.) shorn, shaved, trimmed Snp 456 (˚kesa = apagatakesa ohāritakesamassu Snp-a 403).
Sk. *nyupta, pp. of vapati1 to shear
(pp.) sown, thrown (of food), offered, given MN i.152; Ja iii.272.
Sk. *nyupta, pp. of vapati2 to sow
(pp. of nivasati) inhabited; dwelling, living; see san˚.
in pañhe dunniveṭha at Mil 90 see nibbedha.
see vi˚.
see nibbeṭheti.
(adj.) relating, admonishing Ja vi.21.
to nivedeti
to communicate, make known, tell, report, announce Ja i.60, Ja i.307; Pv-a 53, Pv-a 66 (attānaṃ reveal oneself); Dāvs v.42.
ni + vedeti, Caus. of vid.
1. entering, stopping, settling down; house, abode Vv 82 (= nivesanāni kacchantarāni Vv-a 50).
2. = nivesana 2, in diṭṭhi˚; Snp 785 (= idaṃ-sacchâbhinivesa-sankhātāni diṭṭhi-nivesanāni Snp-a 522).
Vedic niveśa, fr. ni + viś
(nt.) 1. entering, entrance, settling; settlement, abode, house home DN i.205, DN i.226; DN ii.127; Ja i.294; Ja ii.160 (˚ṭṭhāna) Pv-a 22, Pv-a 81, Pv-a 112.
2. (fig.) (also nivesanā f.: Nd ii.366 settling on, attachment, clinging to (in diṭṭhi˚ clinging to a view = dogmatism cp. nivissa-vādin) Snp 1055 (nandi + ; = taṇhā Nd ii.366); Dhp 40 (diṭṭhi˚); Nd i.76 Nd i.110. See also nivesa.
Vedic niveśana, fr. nivesati, cp. niviṭṭha
(adj.) settled, arranged, designed, built Vv-a 82 (= sumāpita).
pp. of nivesati
to cause to enter, to establish; to found, build, fix, settle; (fig.) to establish in, exhort to (c. loc.), plead for, entreat, admonish DN i.206; SN v.189; Dhp 158, Dhp 282 (attānaṃ); Iti 78 (brahmacariye); Thig 391 (manaṃ); Ja v.99; Pv iii.77 (saṃyame nivesayi); DN-a i.273 (gāmaṃ); Pv-a 206.
Caus. of nivesati
(adj.) free from tigers Ja ii.358 (v.l. nibbyaggha).
nis + vyaggha
(& Nissagga) giving forth, bestowing; natural state, nature SN i.54 (˚ss˚). Cp. nisaṭṭha.
ni or nis + sṛj
(f.) deposit (of merit or demerit), accumulation, effect (of kamma Snp 953 (= Nd i.442 abhisankhārā).
Sk. ni-saṃskṛti, ni + saṃ + kṛ;
(f.) sitting down, opportunity for sitting, seat Pv iv.12 (seyyā + ); Ja i.217; Pv-a 24 (˚ādipaṭikkhepa-ṭṭhāna), 219 (pallankâbhujanādi-lakkhaṇā nisajjā). Cp. nesajjika.
Sk. *niṣadyā of ni sad
to spend, bestow, give, give up Pv-a 105 (dānûpakaraṇā nisajjesi read better as ˚karaṇǡni sajjesi). See also nissajjati.
sic MSS. for niss˚; Sk. niḥsarjayati, nis + sajjeti, Caus. of sṛj
(pp.) given up, spent, lost Thig 484 (v.l. ˚ss˚); Thag-a 286 (= pariccatta). Cp nisajjeti & nisagga.; Nisada & Nisada
nis + saṭṭha of sṛj
(f.) a grindstone, esp. the understone of a millstone Vin i.201; (˚pota id.); Mil 149; Vism 252 (˚pota, where Kp-a at id. p. reads ˚putta). Cp. ā˚.
Sk. dṛṣad f.; for n: d cp. P. nijjuha = Sk. dātyūha etc.
(f.) careful attention or observation AN ii.97; AN iii.201; AN iv.15 (dhamma˚), 36 (id.) 296; v.166 (dhamma˚); Dpvs i.53 (˚kāra). Cp. nisamma & nisāmeti.;
Sk. *niśānti, ni + śam
“bull among men,” i.e. prince, leader; “princeps,” best of men Ep. of the Buddha SN i.28, SN i.48, SN i.91; MN i.386; Ja v.70 Ja vi.526; Vv 167 (isi˚), cp. Vv-a 83 for expln; Vv 637 (isi˚ = ājānīya Vv-a 262).
Sk. nṛ + ṛṣabha, cp. usabha. On relation of usabha: vasabha: nisabha see Snp-a 40
(adv.) carefully, considerately, observing Snp 54; Nd ii.367 Nd ii.481 b (= sutvā). Esp. in phrase n ■ kārin acting considerately Dhp 24 (= Dhp-a i.238); Ja iii.106; Ja vi.375; Mil 3; cp. n. kiriyāya Mil 59. Cp. nisanti.
orig. ger. of nisāmeti, Sk. niśamya, śam
(f.) night Vv 352 (loc. nise); Vv-a 161 (loc. nisati, v.l. nisi = rattiyaṃ); Mil 388 (loc. nisāya) Dāvs ii.6; Dāvs v.2 (nisāyaṃ). See also nisītha.
Sk. niś & niśā, prob. with niśītha (midnight) to ni + ; śi = lying down
in koka˚; Ja vi.538, a certain wild animal; the meaning is not clear, etymologically it is to be derived fr. Sk. niśātayati to strike, to fell. See Kern, Toev. 1. p. 152, s. v. koka. The v.l. is ˚nisādaka, evidently influenced by nisāda.
a robber Ja iv.364. Cp. nesāda.
cp. Sk. niṣāda, a Non-Aryan or barbarian
grinding Dhp-a i.308.
= ni + śātana
(adj.) fit for lying down, suitable for resting Vin i.239 (go˚).
cp. Sk. niṣādin, ni + sad
(adj.) lying down DN iii.44, DN iii.47.
fr. ni + sad
a hone on which to sharpen a knife Mil 282.
ni + śā to sharpen, to whet, cp. nisita
(adj.) observant, listening to, attending to, careful of AN v.166, AN v.168 (dhammānaṃ).
cp. Sk. niśāmana
to attend to, listen to, observe, be careful of, mind Ja iv.29 (anisāmetvā by not being careful); v.486; Dhp-a i.239 (+ upadhāneti); Pv-a 1 (imper nisāmayatha). Cp. nisanti, nisamma.
ni + sāmeti
(adj.-n.) full of sap, excellent, strong (of a tree) Vv 631 (= niratisaya sārassa nisiṭṭhasārassa rukkhassa Vv-a 261).
ni + sāra
to besprinkle Mvu vii.8.
ni + siñcati
(adj.) sharp MN i.281 (āvudhajāta pīta˚?); Ja iv.118 (su˚); Vv-a 233; Pv-a 155, Pv-a 192, Pv-a 213.
Sk. niśita, ni + pp. of śā to whet
(adj.) sitting down, seated Ja i.50, Ja i.255; Ja iii.126; Kp-a 250; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 39 passim ■ Often comb;d & contrasted with; tiṭṭhaṃ (standing), caraṃ (walking) & sayaṃ (sayāna; lying down), e.g. at Snp 151, Snp 193; Iti 82.
Sk. niṣanna, pp. of nisīdati
(adj.) = nisinna; MN i.333; Ja i.163; Dhp-a iii.175.
midnight, night Thag 3 (aggi yathā pajjalito nisīthe; v.l. BB nisive), 524 (v.l. nisive); Ja iv.432; Ja v.330, Ja v.331 (v.l. BB nisive), 506 (= rattibhāga Com.).
Sk. niśītha, see nisā
to sit down, to be seated, to sit, to dwell Nd ii.433; Ja iii.392; Ja vi.367; Pv ii.93 (nisīdeyya Pot.); Pv-a 74. aor. nisīdi Vin i.1; Ja ii.153; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 44; Pv-a 3rd pl. nisīdiṃsu (Ja i.307) nisīdisuṃ (Mvu vii.40); ger. nisīditvā (J ii.160; Pv-a 5 Pv-a 74), nisajja DN ii.127) and nisīditvāna (Snp 1031); grd nisīditabba Vin i.47. pp. nisinna (q.v.) ■ Caus. II nisīdāpeti [cp. Sk. niṣādayati] to cause to sit down, to make one be seated, to invite to a seat Ja iii.392; Ja vi.367; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 35 (there āsane); Mil 20. Cp. abhi˚, san˚.
Sk. niṣīdati, ni + sīdati
(nt.) sitting down, occasion or opportunity to sit, a mat to sit on Vin i.295 Vin ii.123 (˚ena vippavasati); SN v.259 (˚ṃ gaṇhāti). ˚paccattharaṇa a mat for sitting on Vin i.47, Vin i.295; Vin ii.209 Vin ii.218.
Sk. niṣadana, fr. nisīdati
to knock down Thig 302 (= pāteti Thag-a 227).
ni + sumbh (subhnāti)
(nt.) destroying, slaughtering Mil 242.
ni + sūd
(adj.-n.) holding back, restraining; prevention, prohibition Dhp 389; Dhp-a iv.148; hirī˚ restrained by shame SN i.168 = Snp 462; Dhp 143.
fr. ni + sedh
(adj.) prohibiting, restraining; one who prohibits, an obstructer Ja ii.220.
fr. nisedha
(f.) refusing, refusal, prohibition Mil 180 (a˚).
abstr. to nisedheti
to keep off, restrain, prohibit, prevent SN i.121 (nisedha, imper.); Ja iii.83, Ja iii.442; Thag-a 250; Vv-a 105 (nirayûpapattiṃ) ■ Cp. nisedha.
Caus. of ni + sedh
to resort to, practise, pursue, follow, indulge in Ja ii.106; Snp 821 (= Nd i.157); Pv ii.319 (= karoti Pv-a 87); Mil 359 ■ pp. nisevita.
ni + sev
(nt. also -ā f.) practising, enjoying; pursuit Pp 20, Pp 24; Sdhp 406.
Sk. niṣevana, cp. nisevati
(adj.) frequented, practised, enjoyed, indulged in MN i.178; Sdhp 373.
pp. of nisevati
(adj.) having no doubt, free from doubt Mil 237 ■ acc. as adv. without doubt undoubtedly Pv iv.81; Dhp-a i.106; Pv-a 95.
nis + saṃsaya
“going out from,” ttg. a name of the ablative case Ja v.498; Vv-a 152, Vv-a 154, Vv-a 180 Vv-a 311; Pv-a 147, Pv-a 221.
fr. nis + sakkati = sakk
(nt.) going out, creeping out; only in biḷāra˚; at DN ii.83 (v.l. BB as gloss nikkhamana) + S iv.194; AN v.195.
Sk. *niḥsarpana, nis + sakk, confused with sṛp, see Trenckner, Notes p. 60 & cp. apassakkati o˚, pari˚
(adj.) to be given up, what ought to be rejected or abandoned Vin i.196, Vin i.254; Vin iii.195 sq.
Sk. *niḥsārgya grd. of nis + sajjeti, not = Sk. naisargika
(adj.) unattached, unobstructed, disinterested, unselfish Sdhp 371, Sdhp 398, Sdhp 411 etc.; Tikp 10 f. abstr. ˚tā disinterestedness Ja i.46.
nis + sanga
to let loose, give up, hand over, give, pour out Vin ii.188 ger. nissajja [Sk. niḥsṛjya] Snp 839 (v.l. nisajja); Nd i.189 (id.); Snp-a 545. pp. nisaṭṭha & nissaṭṭha; (q.v.) Cp. nissaggiya & paṭi˚.;
nis + sajjati, sṛj. See also nisajjeti
(adj.) flown or come out from, appeared; let loose, free, escaped from SN iii.31 SN iv.11 sq.; AN i.260; AN iv.430 (a˚); v.151 sq.; Ja iii.530 Ja vi.269; Nd ii.under nissita; Pts ii.10 sq.; Mil 95, Mil 225 (bhava˚). See also nissaraṇa. Cp. abhi˚.
pp. of nis + sarati, sṛ;
(adj.) dismissed, given up, left, granted, handed over, given Vin iii.197 (˚cīvara) MN i.295; MN ii.203; Vv-a 341. See also nisaṭṭha & paṭi˚.;
pp. of nissajjati
(adj.) powerless, unsubstantial; f. abstr. ˚tā absence of essence, unsubstantiality (see dhamma A) Dhs-a 38, Dhs-a 139, Dhs-a 263; cp. Dhs trsl. pp. xxxiii..& 26.;
Sk. *niḥsattva, nis + satta
(adj.) noiseless, soundless, silent Ja i.17 (v.94); Dhp-a iii.173.
nis + sadda
(adj.) without grief or selfmortification Pv-a 62.
nis + santāpa
flowing or trickling down; discharge, dropping issue; result, outcome, esp. effect of Kamma AN iii.32; Ja i.31, Ja i.205, Ja i.426 (sarīra˚); Dhp-a i.395; Dhp-a ii.36, Dhp-a ii.86; Vv-a 14 (puñña-kammassa n-phala); Pv-a 47 (puññakammassa), 58 (id.); Mil 20. 117; Pgdp 102.
Sk. nisyanda & niṣyanda, ni + ; syand (syad), see sandati
exertion, endeavour Ja v.243.
ni + sama
that on which anything depends, support help, protection; endowment, resource, requisite, supply foundation, reliance on (acc. or-˚) Vin i.58 (the four resources of bhikkhu, viz. piṇḍiyālopa-bhojanaṃ, paṃsukūla-cīvaraṃ, rukkhamūla-senāsanaṃ, pūtimuttabhesajjaṃ); ii.274, 278; DN iii.137, DN iii.141; AN i.117; AN iii.271 AN iv.353; AN v.73; Snp 753, Snp 877; Nd i.108 (two n.: taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚), 190, cp. Nd;2 s. v.; Nd ii.397A (the requisites of a bhikkhu in diff. enumeration); Pts ii.49 sq., 58 sq. 73 sq.; ii.220; Ne 7, Ne 65; Vism 12, Vism 535. nissayaṃ karoti to rely on, to be founded on to take one’s stand in Snp 800 ■ Cp. nissāya & nissita.;
-kamma giving assistance or help, an (ecclesiastical act of help or protection Vin i.49, Vin i.143, Vin i.325; Vin ii.226; AN i.99; Pv iv.11 (so to be read at the 2 latter passages for niyassa˚). -sampanna finding one’s strength in AN iv.353.
Sk. niśraya, of ni + śri, corresp. in meaning to Sk. āśraya
(f.) dependence, requirement, resource Snp 856; Nd i.245.
abstr. to nissaya
to lean on, a foundation on, rely on, trust, pursue Snp 798 (sīlabbataṃ; Snp-a 530 = abhinivisati); Vv-a 83 (katapuññaṃ). Pass. nissīyati Vv-a 83. pp. nissita ger. nissāya (q.v.).
Sk. niśrayati, but in meaning = āśrayati, ni + śri
(nt.) going out, departure; issue, outcome, result; giving up, leaving behind being freed, escape (fr. saṃsāra), salvation Vin i.104; DN iii.240, DN iii.248 sq.; SN i.128, SN i.142; SN ii.5; SN iii.170 (catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ); iv.7 sq. (id.); v.121 sq.; AN i.258, AN i.260; AN ii.10 (kāmānaṃ etc.); iii.245 sq.; iv.76 (uttariṃ); v.188; MN i.87 (kāmānaṃ), 326 (uttariṃ); iii.25; Iti 37, Iti 61; Pts ii.180, Pts ii.244; Vb 247; Vism 116; Thag-a 233; Dhs-a 164; Sdhp 579. Cp. nissaṭa & nissaraṇīya.;
-dassin wise in knowing results, prescient, able to find a way to salvation SN iv.205; -pañña (adj.) = ˚dassin DN i.245 (a˚); iii.46; SN ii.194; SN iv.332; AN v.178 (a˚), 181 sq.; Mil 401.
Sk. niḥsaraṇa, to nis + sarati, cp. BSk. nissaraṇa giving up (?) Avs ii.193
(adj.) connected with deliverance, leading to salvation able to be freed. The 3 n. dhātuyo (elements of deliverance) are nekkhamma (escape from cravings) āruppa (from existence with form), nirodha (from all existence), in detail at Iti 61 (kāmānaṃ n. nekkhammaṃ rūpānaṃ n. āruppaṃ, yaṃ kiñci bhūtaṃ sankhataṃ n nirodho). The 5 n-dh. are escape fr. kāma, vyāpāda vihesā, rūpa, sakkāya: AN iii.245; cp. AN i.99 AN iii.290.
Note. The spelling is often nissāraṇīya, thus at Vin iv.225; DN iii.239 (the five n-dhātuyo), 247, 275.
grd. of nissarati, with relation to nissaraṇa
to depart, escape from, be freed from (c. abl.) AN i.260 (yasmā atthi loke nissaraṇaṃ tasmā sattā lokamhā nissaranti) ■ pp. nissaṭa, grd nissaraṇīya (q.v.); cp. also nissaraṇa & paṭi˚.;
nis + sarati
(prep. c, acc.) leaning on (in all fig. meanings) Nd ii.368 (= upanissāya, ārammaṇaṃ ālambanaṃ karitvā). 1. near, near by, on, at Ja i.167 (pāsānapiṭṭhaṃ), 221 (padumasaraṃ); Pv-a 24 (bāhā), 134 (taṃ = with him). 2. by means of, through, by one’s support, by way of Ja i.140 (rājānaṃ: under the patronage of the k.); iv.137 (id.); ii.154 (tumhe); Mil 40 (kāyaṃ), 253 (id.); Pv-a 27 (ye = yesaṃ hetu), 154 (nadī˚ alongside of).
3. because of, on account of, by reason of, for the sake of Ja i.203 (amhe), 255 (dhanaṃ), 263 (maṃ); Pv-a 17 (kiṃ), 67 (namaṃ), 130 (taṃ) ■ Cp. nissaya, nissita.
ger. of nissayati, Sk. *niśrāya, BSk niśritya, ni + śri
(adj.) sapless, worthless, unsubstantial Ja i.393; Sdhp 51, Sdhp 608, Sdhp 612.
nis + sāra
(adj.) without diffidence, not diffident, confident Ja i.274 (+ nibbhaya).
Sk. niḥ + śārada + ya
(nt.) going or driving out, expulsion Mil 344 (osāraṇa-n ■ paṭisāraṇa), 357.
fr. nissarati
(adj.) hanging on, dependent on, inhabiting; attached to, supported by, living by means of, relying on, being founded or rooted in, bent on As-˚ often in sense of a prep. = by means of, on account of, through, esp. with pron. kiṃ˚ (= why, through what Snp 458; taṃ˚ (therefore, on acct. of this) SN iv.102. For combn with var. synonyms see Nd ii.s. v. & cp. Nd;1 75, 106 ■ SN ii.17 (dvayaṃ; cp. iii.134); iv.59, 365 v.2 sq., 63 sq.; AN iii.128; Dhp 339 (rāga˚); Snp 752, Snp 798 Snp 910; Ja i.145; Nd i.283; Pv i.86 (sokaṃ hadaya˚ lying in) ii.66 (paṭhavi˚ supported by); Vb 229; Ne 39 (˚citta) Mil 314 (inhabiting); Pv-a 86 (māna˚) ■ anissita unsupported not attached, free, emancipated Snp 66, Snp 363 Snp 753, Snp 849, Snp 1069 (unaided); Ja i.158; Mil 320, Mil 351 ■ Cp apassita.
Sk. niśrita, pp. of nissayati, corresp. in meaning to Sk. āśrita
(adj.-n.) adherent, supporter (orig. one who is supported by), pupil Ja i.142, Ja i.186; Dhp-a i.54.
fr. prec.
(nt.) dependence on, i.e. interference by, being too near, nearness Vism 118 (pantha˚). Cp san˚.
fr. nissita
(adj.) having lost his (or its) splendour or prosperity Ja vi.225 (ājīvika), 456 (rājabhavana).
nis + sirī
(adj.) outside the boundary Vin i.255 (˚ṭṭha), 298 (˚ṃ gantuṃ); ii.167 (˚e ṭhito).
cp. Sk. niḥsīman with diff. meanings (“boundless”), nis + sīma
(adj.) flown out or away, vanished, disappeared MN i.280.
fr. nis + sru, see savati
(f.) a ladder, a flight of stairs DN i.194, DN i.198; Ja i.53; Ja ii.315; Ja iii.505; Mil 263; Vism 244, Vism 340 (in simile); Dhp-a i.259.
fr. nis + śri, orig. that which leans against, or leads to something, cp. Sk. śreṇī a row
(adj.) whole, entire; nt. acc. as adv. nissesaṃ entirely, completely Nd ii.533.
nis + sesa
(adj.) free from sorrow, without grief, not mourning Pv-a 62; Kp-a 153.
nis + soka
(adj.) “slain”; put down, settled; destroyed; dejected, humiliated; humble Vin ii.307 (settled); Ja v.435 (˚bhoga one whose fortunes are destroyed).
-māna “with slain pride,” humiliated, humble SN iv.203; Thig 413 (= apanīta-māna Thag-a 267); Ja ii.300 Ja vi.367.
pp. of nihanti, ni + han
see nīharati.
(adj.) put down, put into, applied, settled; laid down, given up renounced. As ˚-often in the sense of a prep. without, e.g. ˚daṇḍa ˚sattha without stick & sword (see daṇḍa… ) DN i.70 (˚paccāmitta); Pv iv.326 (su˚ well applied); Pv-a 252 (bhasma-nihita thrown into the ashes); Sdhp 311.
Sk. nihita, pp. of ni + dhā, see dahati
(adj.) lost; degraded, low, vile, base; inferior, little, insignificant SN i.12; Snp 890; Nd i.105, Nd i.194; Pv-a 198 (jāti˚ low-born) Sdhp 86. Opp. to seyya Ja vi.356 sq.
-attha one who has lost his fortune, poor Pv iv.15 -kamma of low action Snp 661 = Iti 43; Dhp 306; Ja ii.417 -citta low-minded Pv-a 107 (= dīna); -jātika of inferior birth or caste Pv-a 175; -pañña of inferior wisdom Snp 890 (= paritta-pañña Nd i.299); -sevin of vile pursuit AN i.126.
Sk. nihīna, pp. of nihīyati or nihāyati
(f.) lowness, inferiority; vileness, baseness DN i.98, DN i.99.
abstr. to nihīna
to be left, to come to ruin, to be destroyed AN i.126 = Ja iii.324 (= vināsaṃ pāpuṇāti). pp. nihīna (q.v.).
ni + hīyati, Pass. of hā, see jahāti
(adj.) one who does not confide in the sound huṃ Vin i.3 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1901 42).
fr. nī˚; = nis + huhunka
a kind of deer (or pig) Ja v.406 (vv.ll. nika, ninga).
Sk. nyanku? Doubtful reading
(in anīgha ) see nigha1.
(adj.) low, inferior, humble (opp. ucca high, fr. adv. ud˚) Vin i.46, Vin i.47; Vin ii.194; DN i.109, DN i.179 DN i.194; AN v.82; Snp-a 424 (nīcaṃ karoti to degrade); passim.;
-kula of low clan Ja i.106; Snp 411 ■ (˚ā) kulīna belonging to low caste Snp 462; -cittatā being humble-hearted Dhs 1340; Dhs-a 395; -pīṭhaka a low stool Dhp-a iv.177 -mano humble Snp 252 (= nīcacitto Snp-a 293); -seyyā a low bed AN i.212 (opp. uccâsayana).
Vedic nīca, adj ■ formation fr. adv. ni˚, cp. Sk. nyañc downward
(adj.) lower inferior, rather low MN i.329; Snp 855, Snp 918; Nd i.244, Nd i.351.
compar. of nīca (for ˚īya?), in function of ˚eyya as “of the kind of,” sort of, rather
(pp.) led, guided; ascertained, inferred AN i.60 (˚attha); Ja i.262; Ja ii.215 (kāma˚); Ne 21 (˚attha natural meaning, i.e. the primarily inferred sense, opp neyyattha); Sdhp 366 (dun˚). Cp. vi˚.
pp. of neti
(f.) guidance, practice, conduct, esp. right conduct, propriety; statesmanship, polity Pv-a 114 (˚mangala commonsense), 129 (˚sattha science of statecraft, or of prudent behaviour), 130 (˚cintaka a lawgiver), 131 (˚naya polity & law), 132 (˚kusala versed in the wisdom of life); Mil 3 (here meaning the Nyāyaphilosophy cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 58).
Sk. nīti, fr. nīta
= nu idha, see nu.
(?) bracelet, bangle Ja vi.64, (= valaya; v.l. BB nivara). Also given as nīyura (cp Prk. neura & P. nūpura).;
Sk. ? Cp. keyura
(adj.) lit. lying low, deep, Name of the tree Nauclea cadamba, a species of Asoka tree Ja i.13 (v. 61) = Bv ii.51; Ja v.6 (so read for nipa).
Vedic nīpa, contr. fr. ni + āpa “low water”
bought out Ja iii.471.
cp. Sk. nirbhṛta, pp. of nis + bhṛ;
to be led or guided, to go, to be moved SN i.39 (cittena nīyati loko); Dhp 175; Pv i.111 (= vahīyati Pv-a 56); Ja i.264 (ppr. nīyamāna) Pv-a 4 (id.); Dhp-a iii.177; Sdhp 292, Sdhp 302. Also found in spelling niyyati at Snp 851; Nd i.223 (= yāyati vuyhati), 395 ■ In the sense of a Med. in imper nīyāmase (let us take) Pv ii.91 (= nayissāma Pv-a 113).
Sk. nīyati, Pass. of neti
see niyyāti. Niyadita, Niyadeti
see niyy˚.
see niyy˚.
(adj.) free from passion Sdhp 370.
Sk. nīraja, nis + raja
(adj.) soundless, noiseless, silent DN-a i.153 (tuṇhī + ).
Sk. nīrava, nis + rava
(adj.) sapless, dried up, withered, tasteless, insipid Ja iii.111.
Sk. nīrasa, nis + rasa
(adj.) = nīroga Sdhp 496.
Sk. nīruja, nis + rujā
(adj.) free from disease, healthy, well, unhurt Ja i.421; Ja iii.26; Ja iv.31; Pv-a 198 (ni˚). Cp. nīruja.
Sk. nīroga, nis + roga
(adj.) dark-blue, blue-black blue-green. Nīla serves as a general term to designate the “coloured-black,” as opposed to the “colouredwhite” (pīta yellow), which pairs (nīla-pīta) are both set off against the “pure” colour-sensations of red (lohitaka) & white (odāta), besides the distinct black or dark (see kaṇha). Therefore n. has a fluctuating connotation (cp. Mrs. Rh. D.; Buddh. Psych. p. 49; Dhs. trsl. p. 62), its only standard combn being that with pīta, e.g. in the enumn of the ten kasiṇa practices (see kasiṇa): nīla pīta lohita odāta; in the description of the 5 colours of the Buddha’s eye: nīla pītaka lohitaka kaṇha odāta (Nd ii.235, Ia under cakkhumā); which goes even so far as to be used simply in the sense of “black & white,” e.g. Vv-a 320. Applied to hair (lomāni DN ii.144; MN ii.136. See further enumn at Vv-a 111 & under kaṇha ■ AN iii.239; AN iv.263 sq., 305, 349 v.61; Vism 110, Vism 156, Vism 173; Thag-a 42 (mahā˚ great blue lotus); Dhs 617; Pv ii.25; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 158; Sdhp 246 Sdhp 270, Sdhp 360.
-abbha a black cloud Pv iv.39. -abhijāti a dark (unfortunate) birth (cp. kaṇh˚) AN iii.383; -uppala blue lotus Ja iii.394; Vv 454 (= kuvalaya); Dhp-a i.384 -kasiṇa the “blue” kasiṇa (q.v.) DN iii.248; Dhs 203 (Vam 172 etc.; -gīva “blue neck,” a peacock Snp 221 = maṇi-daṇḍa-sadisāya gīvāya n. ti Snp-a 277); -pupphī Name of plant (“blue-blossom”) Ja vi.53; -bījaka a waterplant (“blue-seed”) Bdhgh at Vin iii.276; -maṇi a sapphire (“blue-stone”) Ja ii.112; Ja iv.140; Dhp-a iii.254 -vaṇṇa blue colour, coloured blue or green Ja iv.140 (of the ocean); Dhs 246.
Vedic nīla, perhaps conn. with Lat. nites to shine, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.
(adj.) for nīla MN ii.201; see vi˚.
an (indigo) hair dye Ja iii.138 (Com. nīliyaka).
fr. nīlī
(f.) the indigo plant, indigo colour AN iii.230, AN iii.233.
Sk. nīlī
a nest (Ja v.92): see niḍḍha: cp. ˚pacchi bird cage Ja ii.361; roga˚ Iti 37; vadharoga˚ Th i.1093.
Vedic nīḍa
(nt. occasionally m.) an obstacle, hindrance, only as tt. applied to obstacles in an ethical sense & usually enum;d or referred to in a set of 5 (as pañca nīvaraṇāni and p. āvaraṇāni), viz. kāmacchanda, (abhijjhā-)vyāpāda, thīna-middha, uddhaccakukkucca vicikicchā i.e. sensuality, ill-will, torpor of mind or body, worry, wavering (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 310) DN i.73 (˚e, acc. pl.), 246; ii.83, 300; iii.49 sq., 101, 234 278; SN ii.23; SN iii.149; SN v.60, SN v.84 sq., 93 sq., 145, 160, 226 327, 439; MN i.60, MN i.144, MN i.276; MN iii.4, MN iii.295; AN i.3, AN i.161 AN iii.16, AN iii.63, AN iii.230 sq.; 386; iv.457; v.16, 195, 322; Snp 17 Nd i.13; Nd ii.379; Pts i.31, Pts i.129, Pts i.163; Pp 68; Dhs 1059 Dhs 1136, Dhs 1495; Vb 199, Vb 244, Vb 378; Ne 11, Ne 13, Ne 94; Vism 146, Vism 189; DN-a i.213; Sdhp 459, Sdhp 493 and passim. Other enumns are occasionally found e.g. 10 at SN v.110 SN v.8 at MN i.360 sq.; 6 at Dhs 1152.
Sk. *nivāraṇa, nis + varaṇa of vṛ; (vṛṇoti), see nibbuta & cp. nivāraṇa
(adj.) belonging to an obstacle, forming a hindrance, obstructing Dhs 584, Dhs 1164, Dhs 1488 Vb 12, Vb 30, Vb 66, Vb 130 etc.
fr. nīvaraṇa
raw rice, paddy DN i.166; AN i.241, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55; Ja iii.144 (˚yāgu).
Sk. nīvāra, unexplained
thrown out, removed; in f. abstr. ˚tā ejection, removal [cp. Sk. nirhṛti] Dhp-a iii.336 (malānaṃ n. the extirpation of impurity or removal of stain).
pp. of nīharati = Sk. nirhṛta
(nt.) taking out, carrying away, removing DN-a i.296; Pv-a 7.
fr. nīharati
to take out, to throw out, drive out Ja i.150, Ja i.157; Ja iii.52; Ja vi.336; Nd ii.1997 (ni˚); Vv-a 222 Vv-a 256; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 254; Mil 8, Mil 219. aor. nīhari DN i.92; Ja i.293; Ja ii.154; Pv-a 41, Pv-a 178 (gehato taṃ n.). grd nīharitabba Dhp-a i.397 (opp. pavesetabba) ■ pp. nīhaṭa -Caus. nīharāpeti to have thrown out, to order to be ejected Vv-a 141.
nis + hṛ;
way, manner Vin i.13; Ja i.127; Dhp-a iv.7. At Vin i.13 also in nīhāra-bhatta (= nīhāraka).
cp. Sk. nirhāra
(adj.-n.) one who carries away Vin i.13 (nīhāra-bhatta); SN v.12, SN v.320, SN v.325 (piṇḍapāta).
fr. nīhāra, cp. nīharaṇa
(indecl.) affirm ■ indef part. “then, now.”
1. most freq. combd with interr pron. and followed by kho, as kin nu kho Ja ii.159 kacci Ja i.279; kaccin nu (for kaccid nu) Ja ii.133 kathan nu (kho) Vin i.83; kattha Pv-a 22; etc.
2. as interr. part. (= Lat. ne, num) in enclitic position Vin i.17; Ja iii.52; Snp 866, Snp 871, Snp 1071; etc. As such also combd with na = nanu (Lat. nonne), which begins the sentence: Vin ii.303. (nanu tvaṃ vuḍḍho vīsativasso ‘sī ti?) Pv i.84; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 136 etc ■ Often combd with other emphatic or dubitative particles, like api nu Vin ii.303; DN i.97; nu idha, contr. to nīdha Vv 836 or with sandhi as nu-v-idha DN i.108 (v.l. nu khv idha). Cp. na1 nūna, no.
Ved. nu, Idg. *nu, orig. adv. of time = now; cp. Lat. num (to nunc, now), see nūna
see niṭṭhubhati. (aor. nuṭṭhubhi, e.g. Ja ii.105).
(-˚) (adj.) expelling, casting out, dispelling; in tamo˚; dispelling darkness Snp 1133; Vv 352 (= viddhaṃsana Vv-a 161).
Sk. ˚nud & ˚nuda, to nudati
or Nūdaka (-˚) = nuda Ja v.401 (āsa-nūdaka).
to push, impel; expel, drive away, reject Dhp 28; Ja iv.443; Dhp-a i.259. aor. nudi Nd ii.281. Cp apa˚, pa˚, vi˚ ■ pp. nunna (nuṇṇa). Nunna (nunna)
Vedic nudati; Idg. *(s)neu to push, cp. Sk. navate, Gr. νεύω & νύσσω, Lat. nuo; Ags. neosian, Low Ger. nucken
thrust, pushed, driven away, removed Nd ii.220 (ṇṇ) = khitta, cp. panuṇṇa AN ii.41.
pp. of nudati
(adj.) “of now,” i.e. recent, fresh, new Dāvs iv.47.
Vedic nūtana, adj ■ formation fr. adv. nū, cp. nūna. In formation cp. Sk. śvastana (of to-morrow) Lat. crastinus etc.
(& nūnaṃ Dhs-a 164) (indecl.) affirmative-dubitative particle with Pot or Ind., viz. 1. (dubit ■ interrog.) is it then, now, shall I etc. (= Lat. subjunctive, hortative & dubitative DN i.155 (= Lat. num, cp. nu). Esp. freq. with rel pron. yaṃ = yaṃ nūna what if, shall I, let me (Lat. age Snp p.80 (yaṃ nūn’ âhaṃ puccheyyaṃ let me ask, I will ask); Ja i.150, Ja i.255; Ja iii.393; Pv-a 5 (y. n. âhaṃ imassa avassayo bhaveyyaṃ = let me help him).
2. (affirm. surely, certainly, indeed Snp 1058 (api nūna pajaheyyuṃ); AN v.194; Ja i.60; Ja v.90; Pv ii.924 (nuna) Mil 20; Dhs-a 164; Pv-a 95 (nuna as v.l.; text reads nanda).
Ved. nūnaṃ = Gr.; νύν, Lat. nunc (cp. num); Goth. nu, Ger. nun, cp. E. now See also nu
an ornament for the feet, an anklet Thig 268; DN-a i.50.
Sk. nūpura; Non-Aryan. Cp. Prk. ṇeura & nīdhura (nīyura)
see na3.
(adj.) not one, several, many Snp 308; Vv 536 (˚citta variegated = nānāvidhacitta Vv-a 236), 641 (id. = anekacitta Vv-a 275); Tikp 366.
Sk. naika = na eka, cp. aneka
(adj.) deceitful, fraudulent; a cheat DN iii.183; Thag 940; Mil 290; Pv-a 209; Ja iv.184.
fr. nikati
= anekadā (frequently).
(adj.) versed in the 4 (or 5) Nikāyas Mil 22; cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut 142, 52.
fr. nikāya
a golden ornament, a certain coin of gold SN i.65; AN i.181; AN ii.8, AN ii.29; Dhp 230 (= Dhp-a iii.329 jambonada nikkha); Vism 48; v.l. at Vv 208, 438.
Vedic niṣka; cp. nikkha
(nt.) giving up the world leading a holy life, renunciation of, or emancipation from worldliness, freedom from lust, craving & desires, dispassionateness self-abnegation, Nibbāna Vin i.18 (˚e ānisaṃsa); DN i.110 (id.), iii.239, 275, 283; MN iii.129; AN i.147 (= khema, i.e. nibbāna); iii.245; iv.186 (ānisaṃsa), 439 sq.; Snp 424 (˚ṃ daṭṭhu khemato); Dhp 181; Pts i.107 sq.; Pts ii.169 sq.; Nd ii.370; Vism 116, Vism 325; Ja i.19; Ja i.137; Vv 8442 (= nibbāna Vv-a 348); Ne 53, Ne 87 Ne 106 sq.; Mil 285 (˚ṃ abhinikkhanta); Dhp-a iii.227 Thag-a 266.
-ādhimutta bent on self-abnegation (enumd with 5 other ideals of Arahantship: paviveka, avyāpajjha upādānakkhaya, taṇhakkhaya, asammoha) Vin i.183; AN iii.376; -ābhirata fond of renunciation AN iv.224 AN v.175; Pts ii.173; -dhātu the sphere or element of dispassionateness SN ii.152; Vb 86; Ne 97; Vism 487 -ninna merging into or bent on a holy life SN iii.233 -vitakka a thought of self-abnegation SN ii.152; AN i.275 AN ii.252; Iti 82; -saṅkappa = prec. SN ii.152; AN iii.146 Vb 104, Vb 235; -sita based or bent on a holy life (opp geha˚; q.v.) SN iv.232; -sukha the joy or happiness of Arahantship MN iii.110; AN i.80; Dhp 267, Dhp 272; Dhp-a iii.400.
formally a derivation fr. nikkhamma (ger. of nikkhamati) = Sk. *naiṣkramya, as shown also by its semantic affinity to nikkhanta, in which the metaphorical sense has entirely superseded the literal one. On the other hand, it may be a bastard derivation fr. nikkāma = Sk. *naiṣkāmya, although the adj. nikkāma does not show the prevailing meaning & the wide range of nikkhanta, moreover formally we should expect nekkamma. In any case the connection with; kāma is pre-eminently felt in the connotation of n., as shown by var. passages where a play of word exists between n & kāma (cp. kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yad idaṃ nekkhammaṃ Iti 61, cp. Vin i.104; AN iii.245; also MN i.115). The use of the similar term abhinikkhamana further warrants its derivation fr. nikkhamati
(adj.-n.) the inhabitant of a (small) town; citizen; also collect. = jana, people Vin i.268, Vin i.273; DN i.136, DN i.139; Ja iv.121; Ja vi.493; Dāvs iii.3; DN-a i.297 Often combd with ˚jānapadā (pl.) “townsmen & countryfolk” SN i.89; DN iii.148, DN iii.172; Ja 149.
fr. nigama
(adj.) rich, wealthy DN i.136, DN i.142 (read nevāsika cp. naivasika Mvu iii.38); AN v.149 (v.l. BB nerayika, Com. nevāsiko ti nivāsakaro).
fr. nicaya
a leader, guide, forerunner Snp 86, Snp 213; Nd i.446.
Vedic netṛ, n. ag. of neti
to lead, guide, conduct; to take, carry (away); fig. to draw a conclusion, to understand, to take as Dhp 80, Dhp 145, Dhp 240, Dhp 257; Ja i.228 Ja iv.241 (nayaṃ n. to draw a proper conclusion); Vv-a 42 (narati = nayati); imper. naya Pv ii.113, & nehi Ja ii.160; Pv-a 147; poetic imper. nayāhi see in paṭi˚; pot. naye Dhp 256 (to lead a cause = vinicchineyya Dhp-a iii.381) fut. nessāmi Ja ii.159; Pv ii.45; aor. nayi Ja iv.137. ger netvā Pv-a 5, Pv-a 6, etc. inf. netuṃ Pv-a 123, Pv-a 145 (˚kāma) & netave; Ja i.79 = Dhp 180. grd. neyya (see sep.), pp nīta. Pass. nīyati (q.v.). Cp. naya, nīti, netta etc. also ā˚, upa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚.
Vedic nayati, nī
a guide Ja iii.111; Nett. 130.
Sk. netra, fr. neti
(nt.) guidance, anything that guides, a conductor, fig. the eye. SN i.26 (sārathī nettāni gahetvā = the reins); Vin i.204 (dhūma˚ for smoke); Ja iv.363 (id.); DN i.12 (˚tappana, set t. & cp. DN-a i.98); Snp 550 (pasanna˚), 1120; Nd ii.371 (= cakkhu), 669; Ja vi.290 (tamba˚ with red eyes); Pv i.83 (eyes = nayanāni Com.) Dhs 597; Vb 71 sq.
Sk. netra
(f.) a guide, conductor; support (= nettika2) Iti 37 (āhāra˚-pabhava), 38 (bhava˚) 94 (netticchinna bhikkhu = Arahant). Cp. nettika2 dhamma˚, bhava˚.;
Vedic netrī, f. to netṛ
a sword Ja ii.77 (˚vara-dhārin; C. nettiṃsā vuccanti khaggā); iv.118 (C. gives it as adj. = nikkaruṇa merciless; & says “khaggassa nāmaṃ”); vi.188 (˚varadhārin).
cp. Sk. nistriṃśa, Halāyudha 2, 317; very doubtful, whether nis + triṃśa (thirty), prob. a dial distortion
(adj.-n.) 1. having as guide or forerunner, in Bhagavaṃ˚’ dhamma MN i.310; AN i.199 AN iv.158, AN iv.351; AN v.355.
2. a conduit for irrigation; one who makes conduits for watering Dhp 80 (= udakaṃ nenti nettikā), 145; fig. that which supplies with food or water, in bhava˚; (“the roots of existence, clinging to existence”) DN i.46 (ucchinna˚ with the roots of existence cut); sanettika clinging to existence, a bad man AN ii.54. Cp. netti.
netta + ika
only in phrase netthāraṃ vattati to behave in such a way as to get rid of blame or fault Vin ii.5; Vin iii.183; MN i.442 ■ Bdhgh on Vin ii.5 (p. 309) explains: nittharantānaṃ etan ti netthāraṃ yena sakkā nissāraṇā nittharituṃ taṃ aṭṭhārasa-vidhaṃ sammāvattuṃ vattantī ti attho.
see nittharati; does any connection exist with Vedic neṣṭṛ?
(nt.) prudence, discrimination, carefulness; usually as sati˚; SN v.197 sq.; MN i.356; AN iii.11 AN iv.15; Nd ii.629 B; Vb 244, Vb 249; Vism 3 (= paññā) Dhp-a iv.29.
fr. nipaka
(nt.) experience, skill, cleverness Pp 25, Pp 35; Dhs 16, Dhs 292; Dhs-a 147.
fr. nipuṇa
edge, point; root SN v.445; AN iv.404; gambhīra˚; (adj.) with deeply rooted point, firmly established SN v.444; AN iv.106.
cp. nemi
(adj.) one who lives by invitations MN i.31.
fr. nimantana
(f.) the circumference of a wheel, circumference, rim, edge (cp. nema AN i.112; Vv 645; Mil 238, Mil 285; Vism 198 (fig. jarāmaraṇa˚ the rim of old age & death, which belongs to the wheel of Saṃsāra of the chariot of existence, bhavaratha); Dhp-a ii.124 (˚vaṭṭi); Vv-a 277.
Vedic nemi, perhaps to namati
a fortune-teller, astrologer DN ii.16, DN ii.19; AN iii.243.
Sk. naimitta, fr. nimitti
an astrologer, fortune-teller, soothsayer DN i.8 (i) = DN-a i.91; AN iii.111; Ja iv.124; Mil 19 (i), 229; Vism 210 (i); Dhp-a ii.241 (a).
Sk. naimittika, fr. nimitta
(f.) = nimitta-kammaṃ, i.e. prognostication; inquisitiveness, insinuation Vb 352 = Vism 23; expld at Vism 28.
abstr. fr. nemittika
(adj.) (-˚) having a circumference etc. Ja vi.252.
= nemika
(adj.) to be led, carried etc.; fig. to be instructed; to be inferred, guessed or understood Snp 55, Snp 803, Snp 846, Snp 1113; Nd i.114, Nd i.206; Nd ii.372; Pp 41; Ne 9 sq., 125; -attha the meaning which is to be inferred (opp. nītattha) AN i.60; Ne 21.
grd. of neti; Sk. neya
(adj.) belonging to niraya or purgatory, hellish; one doomed to suffering in purgatory (n. satta = inhabitant of n. Vin ii.205 (āpāyiko n. kappaṭṭho); iv.7; DN iii.6, DN iii.9, DN iii.12; AN i.265; AN ii.231 (vedanaṃ vediyati… seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); iii.402 sq.; Snp 664; Nd i.97 (gati) Vv 521, Ja iv.3 (sattā); Pp 51; Vb 412 sq.; Vism 415 (˚sattā), 424; Mil 148 (sattā); Pv-a 27 (id.), 52 (˚bhāva) 255; Vv-a 23; Sdhp 193, Sdhp 198.
fr. niraya, cp. BSk. nairayika Divy 165
(adj.-n.) based on etymology; an etymologist or philologist Thag-a 153; Ne 8, Ne 9, Ne 32, Ne 33.
fr. nirutti
(& Nela) (adj.) 1. without fault or sin blameless, faultless; not hurting, humane, gentle merciful, innocuous DN i.4 (Bdhgh explains: elaṃ vuccati doso; n’ assā (i.e. vācāya) elan ti nelā; niddosā ti attho. “Nelango setapacchādo” ti ettha vuttanelaṃ viya; DN-a i.75); AN ii.209; AN v.205; Ja v.156; Vv 5018, 636 (= niddosa Vv-a 262); Pp 29, Pp 57; Dhs 1343 (vācā) = niddosa Dhs-a 397.
2. (somewhat doubtful “clean,” with ref. to big cats (mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṃ vuccati), whereas young ones are called “elephants, cubs” (something like “pigs”) (taruṇā bhinka-cchāpamaṇḍalaṃ) Ja v.418.
-aṅga of faultless limbs or parts, of a chariot (ratha = running perfectly SN iv.291 = Ud 76 (nelagga text nelanga v.l.) = DN-a i.75 = Dhs-a 397. -patī (f.) = neḷavatī (of vācā) humane, gentle Ja vi.558 (na elapatī elapāta-rahitā madhurā Com.).
na + eḷa = Sk. anenas, of enas fault, sin. The other negated form, also in meaning “pure clean,” is aneḷa (& aneḷaka), q.v. On ḷ: n. cp. lāngala nangala; tulā: tūṇa etc.
(indecl.) see na2 ■ nevasaññā-nâsañña (being) neither perception nor non-perception, only in cpd. ˚āyatana & in nevasaññī-nâsaññin: see saññā.;
na + eva
(adj.-n.) a deer-feeder MN i.150 sq.
fr. nivāpa
(adj.) one who inhabits, an inmate; living in a place, local Ja i.236 sq.; Dhp-a ii.53 sq. Cp. necayika.
fr. nivāsa, cp. BSk. naivāsika AvS i.286, 287
(adj.) being & remaining in a sitting position (as an ascetic practice) AN iii.220; Thag 904 Thag 1120; Nd ii.587; Ja iv.8; Pp 69; Vism 79; Mil 20, Mil 342. The n-˚aṅga is one of the dhūtanga-precepts, enjoining the sitting posture also for sleeping, see Vin v.193, Vism 61, & dhūtanga.;
fr. nisajjā
a hunter; also a low caste Vin iv.7 (+ veṇa & rathakāra); SN i.93 (˚kula); AN i.107; AN ii.85; Ja ii.36 Ja iii.330; Ja iv.397, Ja iv.413; Ja v.110, Ja v.337; Ja vi.71; Pp 51 (˚kula) Mil 311; Dhp-a iii.24; Pv-a 176.
fr. nisāda; cp. Sk. niṣāda & naiṣāda = one who lies in wait
(indecl.) affirm. & emphatic part. = ; nu (cp. na1): indeed, then, now Snp 457, Snp 875, Snp 1077; Ja v.343 (api no api nu), 435 (= nipātamattaṃ p. 437).
(indecl.) [Sk. no = na + u, a stronger na; cp. na2) negative & adversative particle = neither, nor, but not surely not, indeed not ■ (a) in neg. sentences: Snp 852, Snp 855, Snp 1040; Iti 103 (but not); Pv ii.313 (but not) as answer: no hi etaṃ “indeed not, no indeed” Vin i.17; DN i.3; no hi idaṃ DN i.105 ■ no ca kho “but surely not” DN i.34, DN i.36; AN v.195 ■ Often emphasized by na, as no na not at all Ja i.64; na no Snp 224 (= “avadhāraṇe” Kp-a 170); disjunctively na hi… no neither-nor Snp 813; na no… na neither-nor (notnor) Snp 455 ■ (b) in disjunctive questions: “or not”, as evaṃ hoti vā… no vā (is it so-or not) DN i.61, DN i.227 kacci… no (is it so-or not; Lat. ne-annon) DN i.107 nu kho… no udāhu (is it that-or not; or rather DN i.152 ■ (c) noce (no ce = Sk. no ced) if not (opp sace) Snp 348, Snp 691, Snp 840; Ja i.222; Ja vi.365; Vv-a 69. Also in sense of “I hope not” Ja v.378.
enclitic form, gen. dat. acc. pl. of pron. 1st (we) = amhākaṃ, see vayaṃ; cp. na3.
Sk. naḥ
see vi˚.
fr. nud
see navanīta.
see nahāru. Found e.g. at Vin i.25.
P.
(indecl.) directional prefix of forward motion, in applied sense often emphasising the action as carried on in a marked degree or even beyond its mark (cp. Ger. ver-in its function of Goth. fra Ger. vor). Thus the sphere of pa-may be characterised in foll. applications: 1. forth, forward, out: papatati fall forward, i.e. down; ˚neti bring forth (to); ˚gaṇhāti hold out; ˚tharati spread forth; ˚dhāvati run out ˚bajati go forth; ˚sāreti stretch out; etc.
2. (intensive in a marked degree, more than ordinarily (cp. E. up in cut up, heap up, fill up; thus often to be trsld by “up,” or “out,” or “about”): pakopeti up-set ˚chindati cut up; ˚bhañjati break up; ˚cinati heap up ˚kiṇṇaka scattered about; ˚nāda shouting out; ˚bhāti shine forth; ˚bhavati grow up, prevail; ˚dūseti spoil entirely; ˚jahati give up entirely; ˚tapeti make shine exceedingly (C. ativiya dīpeti); ˚jalati blaze up; ˚jānāti know well ■ In this meaning often with adjectives like patanu very thin; ˚thaddha quite stiff; ˚dakkhiṇa right in pre-eminence; ˚bala very strong.
3. “onward”
paṭṭhāya from… onward; pavattati move on; fig “further, later”: paputta a later (secondary) son, i.e. grandson.
4. “in front of,” “before”: padvāra before the door.
5. Sometimes in trs. (reflexive) use like pakūjin singing out to (each other, cp Ger. besingen an-rufen) ■ The most frequent combination with other (modifying) prefixes is sam-ppa; its closest relatives (in meaning 2 especially) are ā and pari. The double (assimilation) p is restored after short vowels, like appadhaṃsiya (a + pa˚).
Ved. pra, Idg. *pro, cp. Gr. πρό, Lat. pro, Goth. fra, Lith. pra, prō, Oir. ro-
(adj.) drinking; only in foll. cpds. dhenu˚ drinking of the cow, suckling calf MN i.79; Snp 26 (= dhenuṃ pivanto Snp-a 39);- pāda˚; a tree (lit. drinking with its feet, cp. expln at Pv-a 251 “pādasadisehi mūl âvayavehi udakassa pivanato pādapo ti”) Pv iv.39- majja˚; drinking intoxicants Snp 400; Pv iv.177 (a˚).
Cp. Ved. ˚pa, adj. base of pā to drink, as ˚ga fr. gam or ˚ṭha fr. sthā
dust, dirt, soil SN v.459; AN i.253; Pv ii.37 ■ paṃsvāgārakā playmates SN iii.190; saha paṃsukīḷitā id. (lit. playing together with mud, making mud pies) AN ii.186; Ja i.364; Pv-a 30. Cp. BSk sahapāṃśukrīḍita Mvu iii.450.
-kūla rags from a dust heap (cp. Vin. Texts ii.156; Vin i.58; MN i.78; SN ii.202; AN i.240, AN i.295; AN ii.206; AN iv.230; Iti 102 = AN ii.26; Dhp 395; Pp 69; Pv-a 141, Pv-a 144. A quâsi definition of p ■ k. is to be found at Vism 60 -kūlika one who wears clothes made of rags taken from a dust heap MN i.30; SN ii.187; AN iii.187, AN iii.219, AN iii.371 sq. Vin iii.15; Vin iv.360; Ud 42; Pp 55; Dhp-a iv.157 ˚attan (nt. abstr.) the habit of wearing rags MN i.214 MN iii.41; AN i.38; AN iii.108. -guṇṭhita (vv.ll. ˚kuṇḍita ˚kuṇṭhita) covered with dust or dirt SN i.197; Ja vi.559; Pv ii.35 ■ pisācaka a mud sprite (some sort of demon) Ja iii.147; Ja iv.380; Dhp-a ii.26. -muṭṭhi a handful of soil Ja vi.405. -vappa sowing on light soil (opp. kalalavappa sowing on heavy soil or mud Snp-a 137.
cp. Ved. pāṃsu
(adj.) dusty; (m.) a dusty robe Kp-a 171 (v.l. paṃsukūla).
Epic Sk. pāṃśuka; Ved. pāṃsura
(adj.) troublesome, annoying; (m.) a troubler worrier SN i.174 (v.l. pagaṇḍaka; C. rasagiddha; trsl “pertinacious”).
pa + kaṭṭha + ka; kaṭṭha pp. of kṛṣ, cp. Sk. prakarṣaka of same root in same meaning, but cp. also kaṭṭha2
see pakk˚.
done, made; as-˚ by nature (cp. pakati) Snp 286; Ja iv.38; Pv i.68; ii.316; iii.105 (pāpaṃ samācaritaṃ Pv-a 214); Mil 218; Dhp-a ii.11 (pāpaṃ) Pv-a 31, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 103 (ṭ), 124 ■ icchāpakata covetous by nature AN iii.119, AN iii.219 sq.; Pp 69; Vism 24 (here however taken by Bdhgh as “icchāya apakata” or “upadduta”) issāpakata envious by nature SN ii.260; Pv-a 46, cp macchariyā pakata afflicted with selfishness Pv-a 124 On pakata at Iti 89 see apakata ■ pakatatta (pakata attan) natural, of a natural self, of good behaviour incorrupt, “integer” Vin ii.6, Vin ii.33, Vin ii.204; Ja i.236 (bhikkhu, + sīlavā, etc.). At Vin ii.32 the pakatatta bhikkhu as the regular, ordained monk is contrasted with the pārivāsika bh. or probationer.
pp. of pa + kṛ;
(f.) 1. original or natural form, natural state or condition (lit. make-up); as ˚- = primary original, real Vin. i.189; ii.113; Ja i.146 (˚vesena in her usual dress); Kp-a 173 (˚kammakara, ˚jeṭṭhaputta) Vv-a 12 (˚pabhassara), 109 (˚bhaddatā) ■ instr. pakatiyā by nature, ordinarily, as usual Pts ii.208; Vv-a 78; Pv-a 215, Pv-a 263.
2. occasion, happening, opportunity (common) occurrence DN i.168 (trsl. “common saying”) Pv ii.89 (= ˚pavutti Pv-a 110) ■ Der. pakatika pākatika.;
-upanissaya sufficing condition in nature: see Cpd. 194 n. 3 ■ gamana natural or usual walk Dhp-a i.389 -citta ordinary or normal consciousness Kv 615 (cp Kvu trsl. 359 n. 5, and BSk. prakṛti-nirvāṇatva Bodhicary at Poussin 256). -yānaka ordinary vehicle Dhp-a i.391. -sīla natural or proper virtue DN-a i.290.
cp. Ved. prakṛti
(adj.) being by nature, of a certain nature Ja ii.30; Mil 220; DN-a i.198; Pv-a 242 (= rūpa) Dhs-a 404.
fr. pakati
talk out against, denounce Ja v.7 (mā ˚katthāsi; C. akkosi garahi nindi; gloss paccakkhāsi). Should it be ‘pakaḍḍhāsi?
pa + kattheti
(f.) fixing one’s attention on, planning, designing, scheme, arrangement Snp 945 (cp Nd i.72 Nd i.186, where two pakappanā’s, viz. taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚; at Nd i.429 it is synonymous with taṇhā Bdhgh has reading pakampana for ˚kapp˚ and expld by kampa-karaṇa Snp-a 568).
fr. pakappeti
arranged, planned, attended to, designed, made Snp 648 (= kata Snp-a 471). 784, 786 (diṭṭhi “prejudiced view” Fausböll; cp. Nd i.72 and pakappanā), 802, 838 (= kappita abhisankhata saṇṭhapita Nd i.186), 902, 910.
pp. of pakappeti
to arrange, fix, settle, prepare, determine, plan SN ii.65 (ceteti p. anuseti); Snp 886 (pakappayitvā = takkayitvā vitakkayitvā saṃkappayitvā Nd i.295) ■ pp. pakappita (q.v.).
pra + Caus. of kḷp, cp. Ved. prakalpayitar
to shake, quake, tremble Ja i.47 (v. 269); Pv-a 199 ■ Caus. pakampeti SN i.107.
pa + kampati. Cp. BSk. prakampati Jtm 220; Mptp. 151 = kampati.
see pakappanā.
shaken, trembling SN i.133 = Thig 200.
pp. of pa + kamp
(nt.) 1. performance, undertaking paragraph (of the law) DN i.98 (“offence”? see Dial. i.120); SN iii.91; Mil 189.
2. occasion Vin i.44 Vin ii.75; Vin iii.20.
3. exposition, arrangement, literary work, composition, book; usually in titles only, viz Abhidhamma˚ Ja i.312; Dpvs v.37; Kathāvatthu Paṭṭhāna˚ Mil 12; Netti˚ one of the Canonical books (see netti).
fr. pa + kṛ;
to effect, perform, prepare, make, do SN i.24 (pakubbati); Snp 254 (id.) 781, 790 (ppr. med. pakubbamāna; cp. Nd i.65); Iti 21 (puññaṃ); Snp-a 169 (pakurute, corresponding with sevati) ■ pp. pakata (q.v.).
pa + kṛ; Ved. prakaroti
1. make-up, getting up, fixing, arrangement, preparation mode, way, manner Ja ii.222; DN-a i.132; Pv-a 26 Pv-a 109, Pv-a 123, Pv-a 135, Pv-a 178, Pv-a 199; Sdhp 94, Sdhp 466.
2. ingredient flavour, way of making (a food) tasty Snp 241 (kathappakāro tava āmagandho); Mil 63.
3. (-˚) of a kind by way of, in nānā˚; (adj.) various, manifold Ja i.52 (sakuṇā), 278 (phalāni); Pv-a 50; vutta˚; as said, the said Vism 42, Vism 44; Pv-a 136.
pa + kṛ; cp. last; but Sk. prakāra “similarity”
(-˚) (adj.) of that kind SN ii.81; Ja vi.259.
fr. pakāra
to direct one’s thought towards (dat.) Ja vi.307.
Denom. fr. pakāra
to shine forth, to be visible, to become known Snp 445, Snp 1032 (= bhāsati tapati virocati Nd ii.373) ■ Caus. pakāseti to show up, illustrate, explain make known, give information about Vin ii.189; SN i.105; Iti 111 (brahmacariyaṃ); Dhp 304; Snp 578, Snp 1021 Pp 57; Ja vi.281 (atthaṃ to explain the meaning or matter); Dhp-a ii.11 (id.); Pv-a 1, Pv-a 12 (ānisaṃsaṃ) 29 (atthaṃ upamāhi), 32 (attānaṃ), 40 (adhippāyaṃ), 42 (saccāni) 72 etc ■ grd. pakāsaniya to be made known or announced in ˚kamma explanation, information annunciation Vin ii.189 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.239) ■ pp pakāsita (q.v.).
pa + kāś
(nt.) explaining, making known; information, evidence, explanation, publicity Pts i.104 (dhamma˚); Mil 95; Snp-a 445; Pv-a 2, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 103 (expln of āvi).
pa + kāś, cp. pakāsati
explained, manifested, made known SN i.161, SN i.171 sq.; SN ii.107 (su˚); Pv-a 53, Pv-a 63.
pp. of pakāseti
to deal in Vin ii.267 (grd. ˚kiṇitabba).
pa + kiṇāti
(adj.) scattered about; fig. miscellaneous, particular, opp. to sādhāraṇa Kp-a 74; cp. Cpd. 13, 952; Vism 175 (˚kathā) 317 sq. (id.) ■ As Np. name of the xivth book of the Jātakas.
pa + kiṇṇa (pp. of kirati) + ka
to proclaim Ja i.17 (v. 85).
pa + kitteti
1. to let down (the hair), scatter, let fall DN ii.139 = DN ii.148 (ger. pakiriya); Ja v.203 (so read for parikati); vi.207 (aor ˚kiriṃsu) ■ ger. pakira (= pakiritvā) Ja vi.100 (read pakira-cārī, cp. C. on p. 102), 198 (read p ■ parī) ■ Caus. pakireti 1. to throw down upset Vin iv.308 (thūpaṃ); SN i.100; Iti 90 (v.l. kīrati)
2. to scatter SN i.100 = Iti 66; Pp 23 ■ pp. pakiṇṇa (see ˚ka).
pa + kirati
to make wet, moisten (with hot water) Ja vi.109 (= temetvā khipati C.).
Caus of pa + kliś, cp. kelideti
to be angry SN i.221, SN i.223 (˚eyyaṃ).
pa + krudh
(?) an inner verandah Vin ii.153; cp. Vin. Texts iii.175 ■ Kern. Toev. s. v. expld it as miswriting for pakuṭṭha (= Sk. prakoṣṭha an inner court in a building, Prk. paoṭṭha, cp. P. koṭṭha1 & koṭṭhaka;1) Spelling pakulla at Nd ii.485 B (for magga, v.l. makula).
v.l. pakuṭṭa
to be angry Ja iv.241.
pa + kup
see pakaroti.
(adj.) to sing out to (each other) (aññamaññaṃ) Ja vi.538.
pa + kūj
agitation, effervescence, anger, fury Dhs 1060; Vism 235, Vism 236.
pa + kopa
(adj.) shaking, upsetting, making turbulent Iti 84 (moho citta-pakopano).
pa + kopana, of kup
(adj.) [Ved. pakva, a pp. formation of pac to cook, Idg. *peqṷo = Lat. coquo “cook,” Av. pac-, Obulg pekaͅ, Lith. kepû, Gr. πέσσω, ἀρτοκόπος baker, πέπων ripe; also pp. of pacati pakta = Gr. πεπτός, Lat. coctus 1. ripe (opp. āma raw, as Vedic,; and apakka) and also “cooked, boiled, baked” SN i.97 (opp. āmaka); iv.324 (˚bhikkhā); Snp 576; Ja v.286 ■ nt. pakkaṃ that which is ripe, i.e. a fruit, ripe fruit Pp 44, Pp 45; often in connection with amba˚ i.e. a (ripe) mango fruit Ja ii.104 Ja ii.394; Pv iv.123; Dhp-a iii.207; Pv-a 187 ■ apakka unripe PugA 225; Sdhp 102.
2. ripe for destruction overripe, decaying, in phrase ˚gatta (adj.) having a decaying body, with putrid body [BSk. pakvagātra Divy 82], combd with arugatta at MN i.506; SN iv.198; Mil 357 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.262), 395.
3. heated, glowing Dpvs i.62.
-āsaya receptacle for digested food, i.e. the abdomen (opp. āmāsaya) Vism 260, Vism 358; Kp-a 59. -odana (adj. having cooked one’s rice Snp 18 (= siddhabhatta Snp-a 27), cp. Ja iii.425. -jjhāna “guessing at ripeness,” i.e. foretelling the number of years a man has yet to live in list of forbidden crafts at DN i.9, expld at DN-a i.94 as “paripāka-gata-cintā.” -pakka ripe fruit Kp-a 59 -pūva baked cake Ja iii.10. -vaṇṇin of ripe appearance Pp 44, Pp 45, cp. PugA 225. -sadisa ripe-like, appearing ripe PugA 225.
to cook, boil up; only in Caus. II. pakkaṭṭhāpeti (with unexpld ṭṭh for ṭh to cause to be boiled up Ja i.472 (v.l. pakkuṭṭh˚, cp J.P.T.S. 1884, 84) ■ pp. pakkaṭhita (q.v.). Pakkathita (pakkuthita)
pa + kaṭhati of kvath
cooked up, boiled, boiling hot, hot Thūpavaṃsa 4833; Ja v.268 (pakaṭṭh˚ vv.ll. pakkudh & jakankaṭhi); vi.112 (˚kaṭṭh˚), 114 (id.; v.l. BB ˚kuṭhita); Dhp-a i.126 (kaṭṭh˚, v.l. pakkanta), 179 (kaṭṭh˚, v.l. pakuṭṭh˚); ii.5 (kaṭṭh˚, vv.ll. pakuṭṭh & pakkuth˚); iii.310 (1st passage kaṭṭh˚, v.l. pakuṭṭh˚ pakkuṭṭh˚, pakkuthita; = pakkuṭṭhita at id. p. Vv-a 67 in 2nd passage kaṭṭh˚, v.l. pakuṭṭh˚ & pakkuthita, left out at id. p. Vv-a 68); Thag-a 292 (pakkuthita).
also spelt with ṭṭh instead of ṭh or th, perhaps through popular etym. pakka + ṭṭhita for pa + kaṭhita. To kvath, P. kuthati & kaṭhati, appearing in pp. as kaṭhita, kuthita, kaṭṭhita and kuṭṭhita, cp Geiger,; P.Gr. § 42
(f.) a boiling (-hot) mixture (of oil?) MN i.87, expld by C. as katita-(= kaṭh˚ gomaya, boiling cow-dung, v.l. chakaṇakā see p. 537. The id. p. at Nd ii.199 reads chakaṇaṭī, evidently a bona fide reading. The interpretation as “cow-dung” is more likely than “boiling oil.”
fr. pa + kvat, evidently as abstr. to pakkaṭṭhita; reading uncertain
gone, gone away, departed SN i.153; Snp p.124; Ja i.202 (spelt kkh); Pv-a 78.
pp. of pakkamati
to cry out, shout out, wail Snp 310 (3rd pret. pakkanduṃ ) Ja vi.55 (id.), 188 (id.), 301 (id.).
Ved. prakrandati, pra + krand
going to, undertaking, beginning DN i.168 (tapo˚; trsl. “all kinds of penance”).
fr. pa + kram
1. to step forward, set out, go on, go away, go forth MN i.105 Pp 58; DN-a i.94; Pv-a 13 ■ pret. 3 sg. pakkāmi SN i.92, SN i.120; Snp p.. 93, 124; Pv-a 5 (uṭṭhāy’āsanā), 19 (id.); 3rd pl. pakkamuṃ Snp 1010, and pakkamiṃsu SN i.199 ■ pp. pakkanta (q.v.).
2. to go beyond (in archery), to overshoot the mark, miss the aim Mil 250.
Ved. prakramati, pra + kram
a kind of medicinal plant Vin i.201 (cp. paggava).
etym. ?
see pākula.
to call, summon Ja i.50; Ja ii.69, Ja ii.252 (= avheti); v.297; vi.420; Dhp-a i.50; Pv-a 81 (v.l. ˚āpeti) ■ Caus. II. pakkosāpeti to call, send for order to come Ja i.207; Pv-a 141, Pv-a 153; Dhp-a i.185.
pa + kosati, kruś
1. side of the body, flank wing, feathers (cp. pakkhin), in cpds. ˚biḷāla a flying fox (sort of bat) Bdhgh on ulūka-camma at Vin i.186 (MV. v.2, 4; cp. Vin. Texts ii.16 where read ulūka˚ for lūka?); Ja vi.538; and ˚hata one who is struck on (one side, i.e. paralysed on one side, a cripple (cp. Sk pakṣāghāta) Vin ii.90; MN iii.169; AN iii.385; Pp 51 (= hatapakkho pīṭhasappi PugA 227); Mil 245, Mil 276 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.62, 117)-also as wing of a house at Dhs-a 107; and wing of a bird at SN ii.231; Snp-a 465 (in expln of pakkhin).
2. side, party, faction; adj (-˚ associated with, a partisan, adherent Vin ii.299; Snp 347 (aññāṇa˚), 967 (kaṇhassa p. = Māra˚ etc., see Nd i.489; Ne 53 (taṇhā˚ & diṭṭhi˚) 88 (id.), 160 (id.) DN-a i.281; Dhp-a i.54; Pv-a 114 (paṭiloma˚). pakkhasankanta gone over to a (schismatic) faction Vin i.60 Vin iv.230, Vin iv.313 ■ pakkhaṃ dāpeti to give a side, to adhere to (loc.) Ja i.343.
3. one half of the (lunar) month, a fortnight. The light or moon-lit fortnight is called sukka-pakkha (or juṇha˚), the dark or moonless one kāḷa˚ (or kaṇha˚) MN i.20 (cātuddasī pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca pakkhassa 14th, 15th & 8;th day of the fortnight) Snp 402; AN i.142 (aṭṭhamī pakkhassa), 144 = Vv 156 (cātuddasī etc.; cp. Vv-a 71): AN v.123 sq. (kāḷa˚, juṇha˚) Thig 423 (= aḍḍhamāsa-mattaṃ Thag-a 269); Pv ii.955 (bahumāse ca pakkhe ca = kaṇha-sukka-bheda p. Pv-a 135); Vism 101 (dasâhaṃ vā pakkhaṃ vā); Vv-a 314 (sukka˚); Pv-a 55 (kāḷa˚).
4. alternative, statement loc. pakkhe (-˚) with regard or reference to Kp-a 80 (tassa pañhassa vyākaraṇapakkhe); Snp-a 168 (id.).
Ved. pakṣa in meanings 1 and 3; to Lat. pectus, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.
(adj.) visible, clear ■ ˚ resembling, like Mil 75 (mātu˚ and pitu˚).
cp. Ved. prakhya clear, & Sk. (-˚) prakhya like, of pra + ; khyā
a cripple. Cp iii.6, Cp iii.10; Ja vi.12 (= pīṭha-sappī C.). Note BSk. phakka is enumd at Mpt. 271120 with jātyaṇḍa, kuṇḍa pangu, reminding of the comb;n kāṇo vā kuṇi vā khañjo vā pakkhahato vā Vin ii.90 = SN i.94 = AN ii.85 AN iii.385. = Pp 51.
cp. Sk. phakka (?)
(& ˚ika) (nt.?) a dress made of wings or feathers, in cpd. ulūka˚ of owl’s wings (see ulūka˚) Vin iii.34 (˚ṃ nivāsetvā); AN ii.206 ≈ (˚ika).
fr. pakkha1
(nt.) being a partner of, siding in with Vism 129, Vism 130.
fr. pakkha1
at DN-a i.38 read as pakkanta.
(adj.) = pakkhandin Snp-a 164 ■ f. pakkhandikā [Ved. (?) praskandikā, BR. without refs. diarrhoea, dysentery DN ii.127 (lohita˚); Ja iii.143; Ja v.441 (lohita˚); Mil 134.
to spring forward, to jump on to MN i.86; Ja i.461; Vv 8412 (ger. pakkhandiyāna = pakkhanditvā anupavisitvā Vv-a 338); to be after someone in pursuit Dhp-a i.198; usually fig. to rejoice in, find pleasure or satisfaction in (loc.), to take to, in phrases cittaṃ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati MN i.186; SN iii.133; cp. Mil 326 (nibbāne); AN ii.165 AN iii.245 (avyāpāde); iv.442 (adukkha-m-asukhe); Iti 43 (dhamme); and na me tattha mānasaṃ p. Mil 135. pp. pakkhanna (q.v.).
pa + khandati, of skand
(nt.) 1. leaping, springing Ja ii.32; Pts 1. 194 (pariccāga-& pakkh˚-nissagga).; 2. attack, assault, chasing Dhp-a i.198.
fr. pakkhandati
(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) bold, braggart, lit. jumping on or forth Dhp 244; Snp 89 (= pakkhandaka Snp-a 164).
2. a military scout, lit an onrusher, a bravo DN i.51 (cp. Dial. i.68); DN-a i.157; Ja ii.32, Ja ii.281.
fr. pakkhandati
jumped on, fallen on to or into, chanced upon, acquired MN i.39; Thag 342 (diṭṭhigahanā˚) Ja v.471; Mil 144 (saṃsaya˚), 156, 390 (kupatha˚).
pp. of pakkhandati; often wrongly spelt pakkhanta
bordering, trimming Ja vi.223 (of a carriage).
cp. Sk. prakṣara & prakhara “ein Panzer für Pferde” BR.
to wash, cleanse Ja v.71 (ger. pakkhalya = dhovitvā C. p. 74). Caus. pakkhāleti (q.v.).
pa + kṣal
to stumble, trip, stagger Ja iii.433; Ja vi.332; DN-a i.37; Dhs-a 334.
pa + khalati, of skhal
to appear, shine forth, to be clearly visible DN ii.99 (cp. Thag 1034, where pakkhanti for pakkhāyanti metri causâ); MN ii.32; SN iv.144; SN v.153, SN v.162; AN iii.69 sq.
pa + khyā, Ved. prakhyāyate; cp. khāyati & pakkha;2
to wash, cleanse Vin i.9 (pāde); DN ii.85 (id.); MN i.205; SN i.107; Ja vi.24 (pāde); Vv-a 261.
Caus. of pa + ksal, cp. khaleti
(adj.) 1. belonging or referring to the (2) lunar fortnights fortnightly, for a fortnight or in the (specified) fortnight of the month (cp. Vin. Texts iii.220). As one special provision of food mentioned in enumn of five bhojanāni, viz. niccabhatta, salākabhatta, pakkhika uposathika, pāṭipadika, Vin i.58 = Vin ii.175; Vin iv.75; Ja ii.210; Vism 66.
2. (cp. pakkha 2 & pakkhin 2) contributing to, leading to, associated with, siding with (-˚) Vism 130, in phrase vighāta˚ anibbāna-saṃvattanika associated with destruction, etc. MN i.115; Dhs-a 382 Also in mūga˚ leading to deafness Ja i.45 (v.254). Dhp-a i.82 (paramattha-sacca˚).
for pakkhiya = Ved. pakṣya of pakkha1 3
put down into, thrown into (loc.) Snp p.15 (pāyāso udake p.); Pv-a 58 (ātave p naḷo is perhaps better read ātāpe paditto), 153 (pokkharaṇiyaṃ p.).
pp. of pakkhipati
(adj. n.) 1. winged the winged one, a bird DN i.71 (+ sakuṇa = pakkhayutto sakuṇo DN-a i.208) = AN ii.209 = AN v.206 = Pp 58; SN ii.231; Snp 606 (= sakuṇo Snp-a 465); Pv iii.53 (˚gaṇā = sakuṇagaṇā Pv-a 198).
2. (cp. pakkha 2) participating in, contributing to SN v.97 (vighāta˚ for the usual ˚pakkhika).
fr. pakkha1 = pakkhānaṃ atthitāya pakkhī ti vuccati Snp-a 465; Ved. pakṣin bird
1. to put down into (with loc. of receptacle), place into, enclose in (often used for ceremony of putting a corpse into a shell or mount) DN ii.162 (tela-doṇiyā Bhagavato sarīraṃ p.); SN ii.85; Ja ii.210 (mukhe); Mil 247 (Amat’ osadhaṃ); Pv-a 41 (atthikāni thūpe p.) Dhp-a i.71 (the corpse into the fire).
2. to throw into hurl into, in Niraya-passage at MN iii.183 = AN i.141 Nd ii.304iii; cp. nikkhipati.
3. (fig.) to include in insert, arrange, interpolate Mil 13 (Abhidhammapiṭakaṃ kusalā dhammā, akusalā dh., avyākatā dh. ti tīsu padesu p.) ■ Caus. II. pakkhipāpeti Ja i.467; DN-a i.136 ■ pp. pakkhitta (q.v.).
pa + kṣip, in sense of putting down carefully cp. nikkhipati & BSk. prakṣipati to start a ship Divy 334
a bird Thag 139 (read ˚me for ˚maṃ); Ja v.339.
= pakkhin
(adj. n.) siding with, associating with; m. part, side; only in phrase (satta-tiṃsa-) bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā the 37 parts of enlightenment Iti 75 (satta only); Ja i.275; Vism 678 sq.; Snp-a 164; Vv-a 95; see Cpd. 179 and note 1. pakkhiya at Thig 425 is not clear (expld at Thag-a 269 by vaccha, v.l. sacca).
fr. pakkha1 2; cp. pakkhikā
(m.) & ˚na (nt.) throwing, hurling; being thrown into (loc.) Pv-a 221 (lohakumbhi˚ in passage of ordeals in Niraya); Dhp-a i.357 (nadiyaṃ visa-pakkhepana).
fr. pa + kṣip
an eyelash unsally as adj.: having eyelashes (-˚) DN ii.18 (go˚) SN i.132 (˚antarikāyaṃ between the lashes); Ja v.216 (visāla˚ for alārapamha T.); Thag-a 255 (dīgha˚ for āyatapamha Thig 383); Vv-a 162, Vv-a 279.
Ved. pakṣman, diaeretic form for the contracted form pamha, the latter prepondering in poetry while pakhuma is mostly found in prose. Similar doublets are sukhuma & saṇha; as regards etym. cp Av. pasnem eyelid, Gr. πέκτω to comb, πόκος fleece, Lat pecto to comb, pecten comb, Ohg. fahs hair
see pakaṭṭhaka.
(adj.) bold, daring, forward, reckless MN i.236; SN i.201 (sup˚); AN iii.433; Snp 89, Snp 852 (ap˚ = na pagabbha Kp-a 242, cp. also Nd i.228); Dhp 244 (= kāyapāgabbhiyâdīhi samannāgata Dhp-a iii.354); Ja ii.32, Ja ii.281, Ja ii.359; Ja v.448; Mil 389 Dāvs iii.26 ■ apagabbha at Vin. iii.3 is used in quite a diff. sense, viz. “one who has no more connection with a womb” (a + pa + *garbha)
cp. Epic Sk. pragalbha
(f.) resoluteness, boldness, decision Ja vi.273. See also pāgabbhiya.
abstr. fr. pagabbha, cp. Sk. pragalbhatā
(adj.) bold Ja vi.238.
= pagabbha
going forth from (-˚) Dhs-a 329.
fr. pra + gam
sunk into, immersed in (loc.) Snp 441, Snp 772 (= ogāḷha ajjhogāḷha nimugga Nd i.26).
pp. of pagāhati
to dive into, sink into Snp 819 (≈ ajjhogāha Snp-a 537; = ogāhati ajjhogāhati pavisati Nd i.152) ■ pp. pagāḷha.
pa + gāhati
(adj.) greedy after, clinging to, finding delight in (loc.) Ja v.269 (= gadhita mucchita C. on p. 274).
pa + giddha
(adj.) learned, full of knowledge, clever, well-acquainted, familiar DN iii.170; Vv 532 (= nipuṇa Vv-a 232); Ja ii.243; Ja iv.130; Ja v.399; Vism 95 (Majjhimo me paguṇo: I am well versed in the M.), 242 (dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā); DN-a i.95; Snp-a 195; Kp-a 73 ■ paguṇaṃ karoti, to make oneself familiar with, to learn by heart, to master thoroughly Ja ii.166; Ja iii.537 (tayo vede); Mil 12 (Abhidhamma-piṭakaṃ).
-bhāva familiarity with, acquaintance, efficient state cleverness in, experience. knowledge (cp. pāguñña Ja iii.537; Dhs 48, Dhs 49.
pa + guṇa cp. Sk. praguṇa straight, der. “kind”
(f.) & Paguṇatta (nt.) (doubtful) abstr. to paguṇa in expln of pāguññatā at Dhs 48 & 49 (trsl. fitness competence).;
a thicket, bush, clump of trees Snp 233.
pa + gumba
(adv.) (how) much more or much less, a fortiori, lit. “right at the earliest” Ja i.354; Ja v.242; Mil 91; Vism 93, Vism 259, Vism 322; Vv-a 258, Pv-a 115, Pv-a 116, Pv-a 117 ■ Compar. pagevataraṃ MN iii.145; atippage too early Ja iii.48; atippago id MN i.84; SN ii.32; AN v.48.
page = Sk. prage + eva, but BSk. prāgeva
1. to stretch forth, hold out or up, take up DN i.123 (sujaṃ the sacrificial ladle), 125 (añjaliṃ stretch out the hollow hands as a token of respectful greeting); SN i.141; SN ii.280; Ja i.89 (paveṇiṃ) Pv-a 74 (turiyāni). ger. paggayha taking up, raising up, stretching forth Snp 350 (= uttāretvā Snp-a 349) Dhp 268 (tulaṃ); Pv ii.917 (bāhuṃ); iv.74 (uccaṃ p.) Vv-a 7 (añjaliṃ). Often in phrase bāhā paggayha kandati to wail or lament with outstretched arms (a special pose of mourning) Ja v.267; Ja vi.188; Pv-a 92 (= pasāreti).
2. to take up, take care of, favour support, befriend (opp. niggaṇhāti) Ja i.511; Ja ii.21 Ja v.116, Ja v.369; Mil 185, Mil 186; Pv-a 114 (sappurisa-dhammaṃ).
3. to put to, exert, strain, apply vigorously (cittaṃ one’s mind) SN v.9; Pts ii.20 (paggaṇhanto viriyena carati) ■ pp. paggahita (q.v.) ■ Caus. paggaheti to exert Mil 390 (mānasaṃ) ■ Caus. II. paggaṇhāpeti to cause to hold up or out, to cause to uphold or support Mil 21 (dhamma-dhajaṃ); Ja v.248; Pv-a 74 (turiyāni).
pa + gaṇhāti
dripping Pv-a 56 (v.l. for T. vigalita).
pp. of pa + gal
a medicinal plant with bitter fruit Ja ii.105 (v.l. pakkava). Paggaha & Paggaha;
etym?
1. exertion, energy; (a) paggaha: DN iii.213 (v.l. paggāha, also ˚nimitta) Pts ii.8 (˚cariyā), 20 (˚ṭṭha); DN-a i.63 (viriy-indriyassa ˚lakkhaṇa); (b) paggāha: AN i.83, AN i.256 (˚nimitta); Dhs 277 (trsl. “grasp”), 336, 1359 (˚nimitta); Dhs-a 406. 2. (paggaha ) favour, kindness, patronage [same meaning in Ep. Sk.] Vin iii.145 = AN iii.66; Ja v.116 (opp. niggaha); vi.371 (id.).
fr. paggaṇhāti
(nt.) stretching forth, lifting, holding out; of the hands as sign of respectful salutation (cp. añjaliṃ paggaṇhāti) Ja iii.82-Abstr. ˚tā = paggaha 1. Vism 134.
fr. pa + gṛh, cp. paggaṇhāti
holding up, or (being) held up Vin ii.131 (chatta˚ holding up a parasol,) 207 (id.); Ja vi.235; Snp-a 175 (= Snp p.21).
pp. of paggaṇhāti, cp. BSk. pragṛhīta lofty Divy 7, Divy 102
see paggaha.
(adj.) belonging to, receiving (or trading?) in cpd. ˚sālā a shop Vin ii.291 (cp. Vin Texts iii.383: “would he set up as a hawker in cloth or would he open a shop”).
paggāha + ika
(adj.-n.) trickling, oozing, dripping Ja i.146; Ja vi.187 (a˚); f. ˚ī DN i.74 (= bindubinduṃ udakaṃ paggharati DN-a i.218); the ʻmarkʼ of liquid Dhs-a 332.
fr. paggharati
(adj.) flowing, trickling, oozing out Ja vi.187 (app˚-velā), 531; Dhp-a i.126 (lohitaṃ); Vism 262.
fr. paggharati
to flow forth or out, to ooze, trickle, drip SN i.150; Snp p.125 (pubbañ ca lohitañ ca. p.); Ja vi.328; Pv i.67 (gabbho pagghari = vissandi Pv-a 34); ii.911 (= vissandati Pv-a 119); ii.926 (akkhīni p. = vissandanti Pv-a 123, sic lege!); Mil 180; Vv-a 76 (navahi dvārehi puḷuvakā pagghariṃsu) ■ pp. paggharita (q.v.).
pa + gharati, which stands for kṣarati, also appearing as jharati, cp. Sk. nirjhara, Prk. pajjharati Mālatī-M. p. 51. BSk. pragharati Divy 57, Divy 409 Avs i.282
flowing, trickling SN ii.179; Thig 466; Pv-a 198 (khīra).
pp. of paggharati
(nt.) a covered terrace before a house Vin ii.153 (“paghanaṃ nāma yaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca pādehi hananti. tassa vihāra-dvāre ubhato kuṭṭaṃ niharitvā katapadesass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ” Bdhgh, quoted Vin. Texts iii.175).
cp. Sk. praghaṇa
mud mire; defilement, impurity SN i.35, SN i.60; SN iii.118; AN iii.311 AN iv.289; Snp 970 (˚danta rajassira with dirt between their teeth and dust on their heads, from travelling); iii.236 (id.); iv.362 (id.); Snp 535, Snp 845, Snp 945, Snp 1145 (Nd ii.374 kāma-panko kāma-kaddamo etc.); Dhp 141, Dhp 327; Nd i.203; Pv iii.33; iv.32; Mil 346; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136.
cp. Epic Sk. panka, with k suffix to root *pene for *pele, as in Lat. palus; cp. Goth. fani mire, excrements Ohg, fenna “fen,” bog; also Ital. fango mud Ohg. fūht wet. See Walde Lat. Wtb. under palus BSk. panka, e.g. Jtm 215 panka-nimagna
only in cpd. paṅgacīra (nt.) at DN i.6 “blowing through toy pipes made of leaves” (Dial. i.10, where is cpd. Sinhalese pat-kulal and Marathī pungī after Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 205). Bdhgh explns as “p vuccati paṇṇa-nāḷikā; taṃ dhamantā kīḷanti” DN-a i.86.
?
(adj.) lame, crippled, see pakkha3 and next.
Sk. pangu; etym.?
(adj.) lame Ja vi.12; Vism 280.
fr. pangu
to cook, boil, roast Vin iv.264; fig. torment in purgatory (trs. and intrs.): Niraye pacitvā after roasting in N. SN ii.225, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 14 ■ ppr. pacanto tormenting, gen. pacato (+ Caus. pācayato) DN i.52 (expld at DN-a i.159, where read pacato for paccato, by pare daṇḍena pīḷentassa) ■ pp. pakka (q.v.). Caus. pacāpeti & pāceti; (q.v.) ■ Pass. paccati to be roasted or tormented (q.v.).
Ved. pacati, Idg. *peqṷō, Av. pac-; Obulg. peka to fry, roast, Lith, kepū bake, Gr. πέσσω cook, πέπων ripe
(nt.) cooking J̄ iii.425 (˚thālikā); v.385 (˚bhājana); Thag-a 29 (bhatta˚); DN-a i.270; Pv-a 135.
fr. pac, su pacati
to go after, walk in; fig. practise, perform, observe Vv 329 (v.l. pavarati, cp. Vv-a 136).
pa + carati
shaking, trembling, wavering Dhs-a 378.
fr. pa + cal
to dangle Vv-a 36 (v.l. BB paj˚).
pa + calati
to make (the eyelid) waver, to wink, to be sleepy, nod, begin to doze AN iii.343 AN iv.344; AN iv.85 (quot. at Dhs-a 236); Ja i.384 (˚āyituṃ ārabbhi); Vism 300.
quasi-denom. or caus. fr. pacala, pa + cal, cp. daṇḍāyati and pacāleti
(f.) nodding, wavering (of the eyelids), blinking, being sleepy Dhs 1157 (= akkhidalādīnaṃ pacalabhāvaṃ karoti Dhs-a 378).
abstr. fr. pacalāyati
shaken, wavering, unstable Thag 260.
pp. of pacalati
to cause to be cooked, to cook Vin iv.264; Ja i.126 (āhāraṃ); ii.15 (bhattaṃ), 122.
Caus. of pacati
to go about in (acc.), to frequent, to visit AN i.182, AN i.183 (pacārayāmi, gloss sañcarissāmi).
pa + cāreti, Caus. of car
(adj.) swinging, shaking; nt. acc. as adv. in kāya- (& bāhu˚); ppacālakaṃ after the manner or in the style of swaying the body (or swinging the arms) Vin ii.213.
fr. pacāleti
to swing, sway, move about Thag 200 (mā pacālesi “sway and nod” Trsln).
pa + Caus. of cal
1. to pick, pluck, gather, take up, collect, accumulate SN iii.89 SN iv.74 (dukkhaṃ = ācināti p. 73); Dhp 47, Dhp 48 (pupphāni ocinati Dhp-a i.366); Ja iii.22; fut. pacinissati Dhp-a i.361.
2. to pick out (mentally), to discern, distinguish, realise, know Snp 837 (ppr. pacinaṃ = pacinanto vicinanto tulayanto tīrayanto Nd i.185; = pavicinati Snp-a 545); fut. pacessati Dhp 44, Dhp 45 (sic F.; MSS vijessati, & vicessati the latter perhaps preferable to pac˚; expld at Dhp-a i.334 by vicinissati upaparikkhissati paṭivijjhissati sacchikarissati) ■ Pass. pacīyati to be heaped up, to increase, accumulate SN iv.74 (opp. khīyati).
or ˚cināti) [pa + cināti, cp, ācināti
is doubtful reading at DN-a i.164 (with vv.ll. pamuṭa, pamuca, papuṭa) for DN i.54, T. paṭuva (vv. ll pamuṭa, samudda) and is expld by gaṇṭhika, i.e. block or knot. The whole passage is corrupt; see discussed under pavuṭā.
(adj.) general, various, any; abundant, many Ja v.40 (= bahu salabha C.); Mil 408 (˚jana) Dāvs iv.11, Dāvs iv.50; Vv-a 213 (˚jano for yādisakīdiso Vv 5011). See also pasura.
cp. late Sk. pracura
see pacinati.
is contracted form of paṭi before a˚, like paccakampittha pret. fr. paṭikampati.
to curse in return SN i.162; AN ii.215.
paṭi + ā + kruś
(nt.) cursing in return Dhp-a iv.148 (a˚).
fr. paṭi + ā + kruś
(adj.) “before the eye,” perceptible to the senses, evident clear, present Dhs-a 254; Pv-a 125; Sdhp 416. Often in obl. cases, viz. instr. ˚ena personally Ja i.377; abl ˚ato from personal experience Ja v.45, Ja v.195, Ja v.281; appaccakkhāya without seeing or direct perception, in expln of paccaya at Vism 532; also in phrase paccakkhato ñatvā having seen or found out for himself, knowing personally Ja i.262; Ja iii.168.
-kamma making clear, i.e. demonstration, realisation only neg. a˚; not realising etc. SN iii.262; Dhs 390 (trsl. “inability to demonstrate”; cp. Dhs-a 254).
paṭi + akkha3, cp. Ved. pratyakṣa
rejected, given up, abandoned, repudiated Vin ii.244, Vin ii.245 (sikkhā); iii.25 (id.); Ja iv.108; Dhp-a i.12. Cp. Vin. Texts i.275.
pp. of paccakkhāti
lit. to speak against, i.e. to reject, refuse, disavow, abandon, give up, usually in connection with Buddhaṃ, dhammaṃ sikkhaṃ or similar terms of a religious-moral nature Vin iii.25; SN ii.231, SN ii.271; AN iv.372 ■ ger. paccak- khāya, in foll. conns ācariyaṃ Ja iv.200; sikkhaṃ Vin iii.23, Vin iii.34 (a˚); SN ii.231; SN iv.190; Pp 66, Pp 67; sabbaṃ SN iv.15; ariyasaccaṃ SN v.428. paccakkhāsi at Ja v.8 is gloss for pakatthāsi ■ pp. paccakkhāta (q.v.). Intens. paccācikkhati (q.v.).
paṭi + akkhāti = ā + khyā
(nt.) rejection, refusal Ja vi.422.
fr. paṭi + ā + khyā
(adj.-n.) “one who goes toward,” a pupil SN i.104 (Mārassa); vv.ll. baddhabhū, paṭṭhagū. Windisch, Māra & Buddha; trsls “unter M’s Herrschaft,” and refers paṭṭhagu to Sk. pātyagāḥ. Bdhgh (see Kindred Sayings, 1, p. 319) reads baddhagū and explns by bandhavara sissa antevāsika.
a difficult word, composed of pacca + gū, the latter a by-form of ˚ga, as in paṭṭhagū, vedagū pāragū. pacca may be praṭya, an adv. formn of prep praṭi, and paṭṭha its doublet. It is not certain whether we should read paṭṭhagū here as well (see paṭṭhagū) The form may also be expld as a substantivised pl 3rd pret. of praṭi + gacchati = paccaguṃ
(adj.) in phrase paccaggaḷe aṭṭhāsi “stuck in his throat” MN i.333.
pratyak + gaḷa
(adj.) recent, new, beautiful, quite costly Vin i.4; Ja i.80; Ja ii.435; Pv ii.316 (= abhinava mahaggha vā Pv-a 87); iii.105 (= abhinava Pv-a 214); Dāvs v.25; Pv-a 44.
paṭi + aggha, cp. Sk. pratyagra of diff. derivation
(nt.) lit. “by-limb,” small limb, only in compd aṅgapaccaṅgāni limbs great and small all limbs: see anga.
paṭi + anga
(nt.) anointing, ointment, unction DN i.12 = MN i.511; DN-a i.98 (= bhavanīya-sītalabhessajj’ añjanaṃ).
paṭi + añjana
to be boiled, fig. to be formented or vexed, to suffer. Nearly always applied to the torture of boiling in Niraya, where it is meant literally ■ SN i.92; SN v.344 (kālena paccanti read for kāle na p.); AN i.141 (phenuddehakaṃ p. niraye) Snp 670, Snp 671; Dhp 69, Dhp 119, Dhp 120 (pāpaṃ suffer for sin, cp Dhp-a iii.14); Ja v.268; Pv iv.129 (= dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti Pv-a 228); iv.339 (niraye paccare janā = paccanti Pv-a 255); Dhp-a iii.64 (expln for tappati).
Pass. of pacati, cp. BSk. pacyate Divy 422
(adj.) separate, individual; usually acc. ˚ṃ adv. separately, individually, singly, by himself in his own heart DN i.24 (yeva nibbuti viditā); DA on DN ii.77 = attano attano abbhantare; MN i.251, MN i.337 (˚vedaniya Name of a purgatory), 422; SN ii.199; SN iii.54 sq., SN iv.23, SN iv.41 sq., 168, 539; Snp 611, Snp 906; Dhp 165; Pv iii.106 (˚vedanā separate sufferings, = visuṃ visuṃ attanā anubhūyamānā mahādukkhavedanā Pv-a 214) Dhs 1044 (ajjhatta + ; trsld “self referable”); Mil 96 (˚purisa-kāra); Dhs-a 169; Vv-a 9, Vv-a 13; Pv-a 232.
-vacana expression of separate relation, i.e. case of reference, or of the direct object, reflexive case, Name of the acc. case Snp-a 303; Vv-a 281; Pv-a 30, Pv-a 35; Kp-a 213 Kp-a 236; in lieu of karaṇa Kp-a 213, of sāmin Snp-a 594.
paṭi + attan
spread out DN ii.211.
pp. of gaṭi + ā + stṛ;
(nt.) something spread against, i.e. under or over, a cover, spread, rug, cushion or carpet to sit on bedding of a couch (nisīdana˚) Vin i.47, Vin i.295, Vin i.296 Vin ii.208, Vin ii.218; DN i.7 (kadali-miga-pavara˚, cp. DN-a i.87) AN i.137 (id.); iii.50 (id.); Ja i.126; Ja iv.353 (uṇṇāmaya) Pv-a 141, Pv-a 137.
pati + ā + stṛ; cp. BSk. pratyāstaraṇa Divy 19
(adj. n.) an opponent adversary, enemy Vin ii.94 sq. (atta˚ personal enemy) AN v.71 (id.; T. attha˚); DN i.50, DN i.70, DN i.137; Iti 83; Pv-a 62 Cp. paccāmitta.
paṭi + attha + ka, lit. opposite to useful, cp. Sk. pratyanīka & pratyarthin
(nt.) being boiled, boiling. torture, torment Ja v.270; Snp-a 476 (˚okāsa). Paccanika, Paccaniya
fr. paccati, cp. pacana
(adj. n.) 1. contrary, adverse, opposed; (1) m enemy, adversary, opponent MN i.378; SN i.179; SN iv.127; Snp 761; Pts ii.67 sq.; Snp-a 288. Cp. vi.˚
2. (in method reverse, negative, opp. to anuloma. Tikp 71 passim cp. paṭiloma.
-gāthā response, responding verse (cp. paṭigāthā Snp-a 39.
cp. Sk. pratyanīka & see paccatthika
to speak out or mention correspondingly, to enumerate Kp-a 78, Kp-a 79 sq.
paṭi + anubhāsati, cp. BSk. pratyavabhāṣate to call to Divy 9
to experience, undergo, realise MN i.295; SN v.218, SN v.264 sq., 286 sq. 353; AN iii.425 sq.; Iti 38; Pv-a 26, Pv-a 44, Pv-a 107 (dukkhaṃ) ■ fut. paccanubhossati DN ii.213; SN i.133, SN i.227; Pv iii.56 ■ Pass. paccanubhavīyati Pv-a 146 (for upalabbhati) ■ pp. paccanubhūta MN ii.32; SN ii.178; Iti 15.
paṭi + anu + bhū, BSk. pratyanubhavati Divy 54, Divy 262 etc.
advised, admonished DN ii.209 = DN ii.225.
paṭi + anusiṭṭha
(adj. n.) adj. adjoining, bordering on, neighbouring, adjacent Dhp 315; Ja i.11 (v.47, ˚desa), 377 (˚vāsika); Pv-a 201 (˚nagara); Dhp-a iii.488 (id.); Sdhp 11 (˚visaya). (m.) the border, outskirts, neighbourhood Vin i.73; Ja i.126 (vihāra˚); ii.37; Mil 314 (˚e kupite in a border disturbance); Dhp-a i.101 (id.); Pv-a 20 (id.). ˚ṃ vūpasāmeti to appease the border Pv-a 20 ■ P. in sense of “heathen” at Vism 121.
paṭi + anta, cp. Sk. pratyanta
(adj.) bordering, adjoining, next to Vin. ii.166; Sdhp 5.
fr. paccanta, cp. BSk. pratyantima frontier Divy 21, Divy 426
(nt.) recognition Dhs-a 110.
paṭi + abhi + ñāṇa
lit. resting on, falling back on, foundation cause, motive etc. See on term as t.t. of philosophy Tikapaṭṭhāna I, foreword; J.P.T.S. 1916, 21 f.; Cpd. 42 sq. & esp. 259 sq.
1. (lit.) support, requisite means, stay. Usually with ref. to the 4 necessaries of the bhikkhu’s daily life, viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senāsana (gilānapaccaya-) bhesajja, i.e. clothing, food as alms a dwelling-place, medicine: see under; cīvara. Snp 339 (paccaya = gilāna-paccaya Snp-a 342); Mil 336; Mvu 3 Mvu 15.
2. (appld) reason, cause, ground, motive, means condition MN i.259 (yaṃ yad eva paccayaṃ paṭicca by whatever cause or by whichever means); SN ii.65; Ne 78 sq.; DN-a i.125; Pv-a 104. The fourfold cause (catubbidho paccayo) of rūpa (material form) consists of kamma, citta, utu, āhāra: Vism 600. Var. paccayas discussed at Vb-a 166 sq. (twofold, with ref. to paṭisandhi), 183 (eightfold), 202, 205 sq. 254 (4). sappaccaya founded, having a reason or cause SN v.213 sq. AN i.82; Nd ii.mūla; Dhs 1084, Dhs 1437 ■ yathā paccayaṃ karoti do as he likes Nd ii.p. 280 = SN iii.33. Often coupled with hetu, e.g. at SN iv.68 sq.; AN i.66; AN iv.151 sq. DN iii.284; Nd ii.under mūla; Pts ii.116 sq., paccaya came to be distinguished from hetu as the genus of which hetu was the typical, chief species. i.e. paccaya became synonymous with our “relation,” understood in a causal sense, hetu meaning condition, causal antecedent and 23 other relations being added as special modes of causality. Later still these 24 were held reducible to 4 Tikp 1 f. (and foreword); Cpd. 197 Cp. Paṭṭhāna ■ Abl. paccayā as adv. by means of through, by reason of, caused by DN i.45 (vedanā ˚taṇhā etc., see paṭicca-samuppāda); MN i.261 (jātippaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ); Pv i.52 (kamma˚; ); iv.150 (tap˚; ); Pv-a 147 (kamma˚).
3. ground for, belief, confidence trust, reliance Ja i.118, Ja i.169; apara˚ without relying on anyone else SN iii.83, SN iii.135; AN iv.186, AN iv.210; Pv-a 226.
-ākāra the mode of causes, i.e. the Paṭiccasamuppāda Dhs-a 2, Dhs-a 3; Vb-a 130 sq. (cp. Vism 522 sq.).
fr. paṭi + i, cp. Ved. pratyaya & P. pacceti, paṭicca
(f.) the fact of having a cause, causation, causal relation, in phrase idappaccayatā (adv.) from an ascertained cause, by way of cause Vin i.5; DN i.185; SN i.136; SN ii.25.
abstr. fr. paccaya
(adj.) trustworthy DN i.4; SN i.150; AN ii.209; Ja vi.384 (paccāyika); Pp 57; DN-a i.73; Snp-a 475.
fr. paccaya
see paṭilabhati. Paccavidhum & Paccavyadhim
see paṭivijjhati.
to look upon, consider, review, realise, contemplate, see M i.415; SN iii.103 SN iii.151 sq., SN iv.111, SN iv.236 sq.; Ja v.302; Vb 193, Vb 194 (cp AN iii.323); Mil 16; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 277; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 48.
paṭi + avekkhati
(nt.) & ˚nā (f.) looking at, consideration regard, attention, reflection, contemplation, reviewing (cp.; Cpd. 58) MN i.415; DN iii.278; AN iii.27; Pp 21 (a˚) Dhs 390 (a˚ = dhammānaṃ sabhāvaṃ pati na apekkhati Dhs-a 254, trsl. “inability to consider”); Mil 388 Ne 85; Vb-a 140; Vism 43 (twofold); Sdhp 413.
paṭi + avekkhana, cp. late Sk. pratyaveksana & ˚nā
(f.) imagination Mbhv 27.
cp. late Sk. pratyavekṣā
see paṭisarati.
see patissuṇāṭi.
rejected, disappointed Vin iv.237, Vin iv.238.
pp. of paṭi + a + kṛ;
flattened or smoothed out, pressed, ironed (ākoṭita + of the robes) MN i.385; SN ii.281; Dhp-a i.37.
pp. of paṭi + ākoṭeti
to fall back on, return again, to go back to (acc.), withdraw, slide back from (˚ to) Vin i.184; MN i.265; MN iii.114; Nd i.108, Nd i.312; Kv 624 (spelt wrongly pacchā˚); Pv-a 14, Pv-a 109, Pv-a 250. Cp pacceti.
paṭi + āgacchati
gone back, withdrawn Ja v.120; Mil 125.
pp. of paccāgacchati
(nt.) return, going back, backsliding Mil 246.
fr. paṭi + ā + gam
to swallow up, resorb SN v.48; AN v.337; Ja i.311; Mil 150; Caus. ˚camāpeti Mil 150.
paṭi + ā + camati; often spelt ˚vamati, but see Trenckner, Mil 425
to reject, repudiate, disallow DN iii.3; MN i.245 MN i.428; Vin iv.235.
Intens. of paccakkhāti, paṭi + ā + cikkhati of khyā
reborn, come to a new existence DN i.62; DN iii.264; MN i.93; Pp 51.
pp. of paccājāyati
to be reborn in a new existence MN iii.169; SN ii.263; SN v.466, SN v.474 ■ pp. paccājāta (q.v.).
paṭi + ā + jāyati
to lead back to (acc.) Pv ii.116 (= punar āneti C.).
paṭi + ā + neti
recited, explained Ja ii.48.
pp. of paccābhāsati
to retort, recite, explain, relate Pv-a 57 (sic lege for pacchā˚) ■ pp. paccābhaṭṭha.
paṭi + ābhāsati
lit. “back-friend,” adversary, enemy DN i.70; AN iv.106; Ja i.488: DN-a i.182; Pv-a 155.
paccā = Sk. pratyak, adv.; + mitta, cp. Ep. Sk. pratyamitra
to show in return, retort, explain MN i.96; AN iv.193. Cp. paccabhāsati.
paṭi + āropeti
to ask, beg, pray Pv iv.56 (˚anto for ˚āsaṃsanto? C explnns by āsiṃsanto).
fr. paṭi + āśā or = paccāsaṃsati or ˚siṃsati?
(adv.) near by Pv-a 216 = Pv-a 280
paṭi + āsanne
f. expectation Vin iv.286.
paṭi + āśā, cp. Sk. pratyāśā
to make go (or turn) backward MN i.124 = AN iii.28 (= paṭinivatteti C.) Vism 308 (sāreti pi p. pi).
paṭi + ā + sāreti, Caus. of sṛ;
to expect, wait for, desire, hope for, ask DN ii.100; AN iii.124; Ja i.346, Ja i.483; Ja iii.176 Ja v.214; Dhp-a i.14; Dhp-a ii.84; DN-a i.318; Vv-a 336, Vv-a 346; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 25, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 260.
paṭi + āsiṃsati
to bring back, take back Vin ii.265; Vin iii.140; Ja iv.304.
paṭi + āharati
to draw out again Vin ii.99.
paṭi + ukkaḍḍhati
(nt.) drawing out again Vin v.222.
fr. preceding
to go out, set out, go out to meet Vin ii.210; MN i.206; Snp 442 (= abhimukho upari gacchati Snp-a 392).
paṭi + ud + gam
illustrious Ja vi.280.
pp. of paccuggacchati
(nt.) going out to, meeting, receiving Ja iv.321; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 141 (˚ṃ karoti).
fr. preceding
(f.) putting against, resistance, opposition Snp 245 (= paccanīkaṭ ṭhapanā Snp-a 228).
paṭi + ud + Caus. of sthā
to rise, reappear, to rise from one’s seat as a token of respect; always combd with abhivadati DN i.61 (Pot. ˚uṭṭheyya), 110 (Fut ˚uṭṭhassati).
paṭi + ud + sthā
(nt.) rising from one’s seat, reverence DN i.125.
fr. preceding
to go out again, to withdraw SN i.8; AN iii.190. Cp. paccupadissati.
paṭi + uttarati, but cp. BSk. pratyavatarati to disembark Divy 229
to return again to (acc.) SN i.224; SN ii.104; AN v.337.
paṭi + ud + ā + vattati
(nt.) coming back, return Dhs-a 389.
fr. preceding
recite in reply Thig 40.
paṭi + ud + ā + hṛ;
go out towards Ja vi.559.
paṭi + ud + i
to wipe off or down (with a cloth, colakena) Vin ii.122 (udakapuñchaniṃ trsl. Vin. Texts ii.152 “to wear out a robe”), 151 (gerukaṃ; trsl. Vin. Texts ii.151 “to wipe down”).
paṭi + uddharati
taking up, casting (the lot) again Vin iv.121.
paṭi + uddhāra
“to stand up before,” to be present; only in pp. paccupaṭṭhita and in Caus paccupaṭṭhāpeti (q.v.).
paṭi + upa + sthā
(nt.) 1. (re)appearance, happening, coming on phenomenon Ja iii.524; Ne 28; Snp-a 509; Dhs-a 332 Thag-a 288. 2. tending DN iii.191. 3. vv.ll. gilānupaṭṭhāna.
fr. paṭi + upa + sthā; cp. Cpd. 13 & Lakkhaṇa
1. to bring before or about, to arrange, provide, instal, fix SN iv.121; Ja iii.45; Ja iv.105; Ja v.211. 2. to minister to, wait upon DN iii.189 sq.
Caus. of paccupaṭṭhahati
(re)presented, offered, at one’s disposal, imminent, ready, present DN iii.218 (˚kāmā) Iti 95 (id.); Snp p.105; Iti 111; Kv 157, 280; Mil 123.
pp. of paccupaṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. pratyupasthita, Divy Index
to accept, receive; or: to show, point out Ja v.221 (v.l. paccuttarissati to go through, perhaps preferable; C. on p. 225 expls by sampaṭicchissati).
reading uncertain; either paṭi + upadissati, or fut. of paṭi + upadisati, cp. upadaṃseti. It is not to be derived fr. ˚upadadāti
(f.) differentiation SN iii.261 (a˚) Dhs 16 = Pp 25; Dhs 292, Dhs 555, Dhs 1057.
paṭi + upalakkhaṇā
(f.) = paccavekkhaṇā SN iii.262 (a˚).
to go up or near to, to approach, serve, beset Ja iii.214. fut. ˚upessati Ja iv.362 (gloss upasevati).
pati + upeti
what has arisen (just now), existing, present (as opposed to atīta past & anāgata future) MN i.307, MN i.310; MN iii.188 MN iii.190, MN iii.196; SN i.5; SN iv.97; AN i.264; AN iii.151, AN iii.400; DN iii.100 DN iii.220, DN iii.275; Iti 53; Nd i.340; Pv iv.62; Dhs 1040, Dhs 1043 Vb-a 157 sq.; Pv-a 100. See also atīta.
pp. of paṭi + uppajjati, cp. Sk.pratyutpanna
to go out against, to go to meet somebody SN i.82, SN i.216.
paṭi + ud + yā
“the time towards dawn,” morning, dawn; always. in compn with either ˚kāle (loc.) at morning Dhp-a iv.61; DN-a i.168; or ˚velāyaṃ (loc.) id. Vv-a 105, Vv-a 118, Vv-a 165; Pv-a 61 or ˚samaye (loc.) id. SN i.107; Ja i.81, Ja i.217; Snp-a 80; Pv-a 38.
paṭi + Ved. uṣas f.; later Sk. pratyūṣa nt.
an impediment, obstacle SN i.201 (bahū hi saddā paccūhā, trsl “Ay there is busy to-and-fro of words.” C. expls by paṭiloma-saddā); Ja vi.571.
cp. late Sk. pratyūha, prati + vah
(adj.) each one, single, by oneself, separate, various several DN i.49 (itthi); ii.261 (˚vasavattin, of the 10 issaras); SN i.26 (˚gāthā a stanza each), 146 (˚brahma an independent Brahma); AN ii.41 (˚sacca); v.29 (id.) Snp 824 (id.), 1009 (˚gaṇino each one having followers visuṃ visuṃ gaṇavanto Snp-a 583); Ja iv.114 (˚bodhiñāṇa) Nd i.58 (˚muni); DN-a i.148 (paccekā itthiyo); Snp-a 52 (˚bodhisatta one destined to become a Paccekabuddha) 67 (id.), 73 (˚sambodhi), 476 (niraya a separate or special purgatory); Pv-a 251 (id.), Sdhp 589 (˚bodhi)- paccekaṃ (adv.) singly, individually, to each one Vv-a 282. See also pāṭekka.
-buddha one enlightened by himself, i.e. one who has attained to the supreme and perfect insight, but dies without proclaiming the truth to the world. MN iii.68; SN i.92 (“Silent Buddha” trsln); Ja iii.470; Ja iv.114; Ud 50 (P. Tagarasikhi); Ne 190; Kp-a 178, Kp-a 199; Snp-a 47, Snp-a 58, Snp-a 63; Dhp-a i.80, Dhp-a i.171, Dhp-a i.224, Dhp-a i.230; Dhp-a iv.201; Pv-a 144, Pv-a 263, Pv-a 265 (= isi), 272, 283.
paṭi + eka, cp. BSk. pratyeka Divy 335, Divy 336
to come on to, come back to, fig. fall back on, realise, find one’s hold in DN i.186 (“take for granted,” cp. note Dial. i.252); MN i.309 (kaṃ hetuṃ) 445 (id.); SN i.182 (“believe in,” C. icchati pattheti) Snp 662, Snp 788, Snp 800, Snp 803, Snp 840 = Snp 908; Dhp 125 (= paṭieti Dhp-a iii.34); Nd i.85, Nd i.108 (= paccāgacchati), 114; Pv ii.320 (= avagacchati Pv-a 87); Ne 93; Mil 125 Mil 313; Pv-a 116 (bālaṃ), 241 (agree to = paṭijānāti). ger. paṭicca (q.v.). Cp. paccāgacchati-pp. paṭīta (q.v.).
paṭi + i
laid in return (of a snare) Ja ii.183 (v.l. paccoṭṭita).
paṭi + oḍḍita
(adj.) lower, rt. lower part, hindquarter, bottom (?) AN iv.130; Dhp-a i.189.
paṭi + avara, cp. Sk. pratyavara
(f.) the ceremony of coming down again (?), approaching or descending to (acc.) esp. the holy fire AN v.234 sq., 249 sq., v. 251. Cp orohaṇa & Sk. pratyavarohaṇa “descent,” Name of a cert Gṛhya celebration (BR.).
fr. paccorohati
to come down again, descend DN i.50; DN ii.73; AN v.65, AN v.234.
paṭi + orohati
to withdraw, retreat, go away again DN i.230; Ja i.383; Mvu 25, Mvu 84.
paṭi + osakkati which is either ava + sakkati (of ṣvaṣk Geiger, P.Gr. § 282 or sṛp Trenckner Notes 60) or apa + sakkati
(f.) withdrawal, retreat, going back, shrinking from Dhs-a 151.
abstr. fr. paccosakkati
(nt.) vomiting, throwing out Sdhp 137.
pa + chaḍḍana
(adv.) behind after Dhp 348 (= anāgatesu khandhesu Dhp-a iv.63; opp pure); Pv-a 56, Pv-a 74; Dhp-a iii.197 (˚vatti). Often doubled pacchato pacchato, i.e. always or close behind, Ja ii.123 (opp. purato purato) ■ Cp. pacchā & pacchima;.
abl. formation fr. *paccha = Ved. paścā & paścāt, fr. Idg. *pos as in Lith. pàs near by, pastaras the last; cp. Av. pasca behind, Lat. post, after
a cover, wrapper; girdle Thig 378 (= uracchada Thag-a253) Dhs-a 397 (v.l. for ˚cchāda).
fr. pa + chad, cp. Sk. pracchada
covered, wrapped, hidden Thag 299; Ja iii.129.
pa + channa, of chad
(adv.) behind, aft, after, afterwards, back; westward DN i.205; Snp 645 Snp 773, Snp 949; Nd i.33 (= pacchā vuccati anāgataṃ, pure vuccati atītaṃ); Nd ii.395; Dhp 172, Dhp 314, Dhp 421; Pv i.111 115 (opp. purato); ii.99 (= aparabhāge Pv-a 116) Pv-a 4, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 88; Vv-a 71.
-ānutappati [fr. ânutāpa] to feel remorse Pv ii.712 Ja v.117 ■ ānutāpa [cp. Sk. paścattāpa] remorse repentance Sdhp 288. -āsa (nt.) [āsa2] “eating afterwards ” i.e. aftermath SN i.74- gacchati at Kvu 624 see paccā˚. -gataka going or coming behind Ja vi.30 -jāta (-paccaya), 11th of the 24 paccayas, q.v. causal relation of posteriority in time. -nipātin one who retires to rest later than another (opp. pubb’ uṭṭhāyin getting up before others) DN i.60; DN iii.191; AN iii.37 AN iv.265, AN iv.267 sq.; DN-a i.168 ■ bāhaṃ “arm behind, i.e. with arms (tied) behind one’s back DN i.245; Ja i.264; Dhp-a ii.39 ■ bhatta “after-meal,” i.e. after the midday meal, either as ˚ṃ (acc ■ adv.) in the afternoon after the main meal, usually combd with piṇḍapāta paṭikkanta “returning from the alms-round after dinner” AN iii.320; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 38 and passim (cp BSk. paścādbhakta-piṇḍapāta-pratikrānta, see Indexes to Avs. & Divy), or as ˚kicca the duties after the midday meal (opp. purebhatta˚) DN-a i.47 (in detail) Snp-a 133, Snp-a 134. -bhattika one who eats afterwards, i.e. afternoon, when it is improper to eat AN iii.220 (khalu˚ q.v.). -bhāga hind or after part Ja ii.91; Pv-a 114 -bhāsati see paccā˚. -bhūma belonging to the western country SN iii.5. -bhūmaka id. SN iv.312 = AN v.263 -mukha looking westward MN iii.5; DN ii.207; Thag 529; Dhp-a iii.155 (opp. pācīna eastern) ■ vāmanaka dwarfed in his hind part Ja iv.137 ■ samaṇa [BSk. paścācchramaṇa & opp. purahśramaṇa Avs ii.67, Avs ii.150; Divy 154 Divy 330, Divy 494] a junior Wanderer or bhikkhu (Thera) who walks behind a senior (Thera) on his rounds. The one accompanying Gotama Buddha is Ānanda Vin i.46 Vin iii.10 (Ānanda); iv.78 (id.); Ud 90 (Nāgasamāla) Ja iv.123; Mil 15 (Nāgasena); Pv-a 38, Pv-a 93 (Ānanda).
Vedic paścā & paścāt see pacchato
cover, covering, wrapper, in phrase nelango setappacchādo SN iv.291 = Ud 76 = DN-a i.75; Dhs-a 397.
pa + chāda
see under pacchā.
(f.) a place in the shade, shaded part Vin i.180; Vin ii.193; DN i.152 (= chāyā DN-a i.310) ii.205; AN iii.320.
pa + chāyā
at AN iii.76 is of uncertain reading & meaning; in phrase p. khipanti: either “throw into the lap” (? or (better) read pacchiyaṃ, loc. of pacchi “into the basket” (of the girls & women).;
aftermath SN i.74.
cp. pacchāli? perhaps fr. pacchā + aś
(f.) a basket Ja i.9, Ja i.243; Ja ii.68; Ja iii.21; Ja vi.369 (paṇṇa˚), 560 (phala˚); Dhp-a ii.3; Dhp-a iv.205 (˚pasibbaka).
etym. doubtful
to be cut short, to be interrupted Ja i.503 (lohitaṃ p.).
pa + chijjati, Pass. of chid
(nt.) stopping, interruption Ja iii.214 (read assu-pacchijjana-divaso? passage corrupt.).
fr. last
cut off, skinned Ja vi.249.
pa + chita, Sk. pracchita, pp. of chā, only in combn with prefixes
1. to break up, cut short, put an end to Vin iv.272; Ja i.119 (kathaṃ ˚itvā), 148 (kathaṃ ˚ituṃ); iv.59; Pv-a 78 (dānavidhiṃ ˚i).
2. to bring up (food), to vomit Dhp-a i.183 (āhāraṃ).
pa + chindati
(adj.) 1. hindmost, hind-, back-, last (opp. purima), latest DN i.239; MN i.23 (˚yāma the last night watch); DN-a i.45 sq. (id. ˚kicca duties or performances in the 3rd watch, corresp. to purima˚ & majjhima˚) Snp 352; Ja iv.137 (˚pāda); vi.364 (˚dvāra); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 75–2. western (opp. purima or puratthima) DN i.153 (disā); SN i.145.
3. lowest, meanest Vin ii.108; MN i.23; SN ii.203.
Sk. paścima, superl. formation fr. *paśca, cp. pacchato & pacchā
(adj.) 1. last, latest (opp. purimaka) Vin ii.9; Nd ii.284 D. = Thag 202; Dhs-a 262; Ja vi.151.
2. lowest, meanest Ja i.285 (pacchimakā itthiyo).
fr. pacchima
(nt.) breaking, cutting DN-a i.141.
fr. pa + chid
to laugh out loud Ja vi.475.
pa + jagghati
to yearn for, crave, to be greedy after SN i.5 = Ja vi.25 (anāgataṃ = pattheti C.).
pa + jappeti
(f.) desire, greed for, longing Ja vi.25 (anāgata˚); Snp 592; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136.
pa + jappā
desired, longed for SN i.181; Ja vi.359.
pp. of pajappeti
(adj.) only neg. a˚; not giving anything up, greedy AN iii.76.
pa + jaha, pres. base of jahati
(˚jahāti) to give up, renounce, forsake, abandon, eliminate, let go, get rid of; freq as synonym of jahati (see Nd ii.under jahati with all forms). Its wide range of application with reference to all evils of Buddhist ethics is seen from exhaustive Index at S vi.57 (Index vol.) ■ Pres. pajahati SN i.187 SN iii.33 = Nd ii.680, Q 3 (yaṃ na tumhākaṃ taṃ pajahatha) Iti 32 (kiṃ appahīnaṃ kiṃ pajahāma); 117; AN iv.109 sq (akusalaṃ, sāvajjaṃ); Snp 789 (dukkhaṃ), 1056, 1058; Pts i.63; Pts ii.244. ppr. pajahaṃ SN iii.27; fut. pahāssaṃ (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 1511) MN ii.100 ■ aor. pajahi pahāsi; Vin i.36; SN i.12 = SN i.23 (sankhaṃ); Snp 1057 ■ ger pahāya SN i.12 (kāme), 23 (vicikicchaṃ), 188 (nīvaraṇāni), Snp 17, Snp 209, Snp 520 & passim; Nd ii.430; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 122 (= hitvā), 211; pahatvāna Snp 639, and pajahitvā. fut pajahissati SN ii.226 ■ grd. pahātabba MN i.7; Snp 558; Vv-a 73, & pajahitabba -pp. pahīna (q.v.) ■ Pass pahīyati (q.v.).
pa + jahati of hā
(f.) progeny, offspring, generation, beings, men, world (of men), mankind (cp. use of Bibl. Gr. γέννημα in same meaning) DN ii.55; SN v.346 SN v.362 sq.; AN ii.75 sq.; AN iv.290; AN v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Snp 298 Snp 545, Snp 654, Snp 684, Snp 776, Snp 936, Snp 1104 (= sattā Nd ii.377); Dhp 28 Dhp 85, Dhp 254, Dhp 343 (= sattā Dhp-a iv.49); Nd i.47, Nd i.292; Pv ii.117; iv.334; Pp 57; Vism 223 (= pajāyana-vasena sattā); Dhp-a i.174; Pv-a 150, Pv-a 161 ■ Very freq. in formula sassamana-brāhmaṇī pajā “this world with its samaṇas and brāhmans” DN i.250; SN i.160, SN i.168, SN i.207 SN ii.170; SN iii.28, SN iii.59; SN iv.158; SN v.204, SN v.352; AN ii.130; AN v.204 Snp p.15; Iti 121 etc.
Ved. prajā, pra + jan
(f.) knowledge, understanding, discernment; used in exegetical literature as syName of paññā Nd ii.380 = Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 555; Pp 25; Ne 28 Ne 54. As nt. ˚a at Vism 436.
fr. pajānāti
to know, find out, come to know, understand, distinguish DN i.45 (yathābhūtaṃ really truly), 79 (ceto paricca), 162, 249; Snp 626, Snp 726 sq., 987; Iti 12 (ceto paricca); Dhp 402; Pv i.1112 (= jānāti Pv-a 60); Ja v.445; Pp 64 ■ ppr. pajānaṃ Snp 884, Snp 1050 Snp 1104 (see expln at Nd i.292 = Nd ii.378); Iti 98; Pv iv.164; and pajānanto Snp 1051 ■ ger. paññāya (q.v ■ Caus. paññāpeti; pp. paññatta; Pass. paññāyati pp.; paññāta (q.v.). Cp. sampajāna.
pa + jānāti
(˚ī ) 1. (adj.) together with his wife Vin i.23, Vin i.342; Vin iv.62; Ja i.345; Pv-a 20. (m.) Prajāpati (Np.), the supreme Lord of men, only mentioned in one formula together with Inda & Brahmā, viz devā saindakā sabrahmakā sapajāpatikā in sense of foll. Also at Vb-a 497 with Brahmā.
2.; prajāpati (f.) [of Ved. prajāvant, adj.-n. fr. prajā “having (or rich in) progeny,” with p for v, as pointed out by Trenckner Notes 6216] “one who has offspring,” a chief wife of a man of the higher class (like a king, in which case = “chief queen”) or a gahapati, in which case simply “wife”; cp. BSk. prajāpatī “lady” Divy 2 Divy 98 ■ Vin i.23; Vin iii.25; Vin iv.18, Vin iv.258; SN ii.243; AN i.137 (catasso ˚iyo); iv.210, 214; Vv 416 (= one of the 16,000 chief queens of Sakka Vv-a 183); Dhp-a i.73; Pv-a 21, Pv-a 31. sapajāpatika (adj.) together with his wife Vin i.23, Vin i.342; Vin iv.62; Ja i.345; Pv-a 20.
Ved. prajāpati, prajā + pati Lord of all created beings, Lord of Creation
to be born or produced Ja v.386; Ja vi.14.
pa + jāyati
(nt.) being born Vism 223.
fr. pa + jan
a path, road Snp 514; DN-a i.262.
cp. Sk. padya
(nt.) foot-oil, foot-salve Vin i.205; DN ii.240; Ja iii.120; Ja iv.396; Ja v.376 (= pādabbhañjana C.).
cp. Sk. padya & pādya belonging to the feet, Lat. acupedius swift-footed; Gr. πεζός foot-soldier see also pattika1
to go, go to; usually not in simplex, but only in compn with prefixes; as āpajjati, uppajjati, nipajjati etc ■ Alone only in one doubtful passage, viz. AN iv.362 (vv.ll. paccati, pabbati gacchati.) ■ pp. panna (q.v.).
pad, Vedic padyate only in meaning “to come to fall,” later Sk. also “to go to”
to burn (forth), blaze up, go into flame Vin i.180; Snp 687 (sikhi pajjalanto); Ja i.215 Thag-a 62; Pv-a 38 ■ pp. pajjalita (q.v.).
pa + jalati of jval
in flames, burning, blazing SN i.133; Snp p.21 (aggi); Dhp 146; Pv-a 43 (sāṭakā).
pp. of pajjalati
rain-cloud Ja i.332 (p. vuccati megho); iv.253. Otherwise only as Np. of the Rain God DN ii.260; SN i.29; Ja i.331.
Ved. parjanya, for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under quercus & spargo
light, lustre, splendour, a lamp SN i.15, SN i.47; AN ii.140; Snp 349; Pp 25 Sdhp 590 ■ telapajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16 = DN i.85; AN i.56 ≈; Snp p.15 ■ dhammapajjota the lamp of the Dhamma Mil 21. paññā-pajjota the torch of knowledge Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 292, Dhs 555; Vb-a 115. pajjotassa nibbānaṃ the extinguishing of the lamp DN ii.157; SN i.159; AN iv.3.
cp. Ved. pradyota, pra + dyut
to be in flames, to waste, decay, dry up; fig. to be consumed or overcome with grief disappointment or remorse Vin iii.19; Vin iv.5; AN ii.214 AN ii.216; AN iii.57; Ja iii.534 (pajjhāti metri causa; C = anusocati) = Mil 5 ■ ppr. pajjhāyanto downcast, in formula tuṇhībhūto mankubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho p. MN i.132, MN i.258 and passim.
pa + jhāyati2
(adj.-n.m.) [Ved. pañca, Idg. *penqṷe; cp. Gr. πέντε, Lat. quīnque, Goth. fimf, Lith. penki, Oir. coic number 5 ■ Cases: gen. dat. pañcannaṃ, instr. abl pañcahi, loc. pañcasu; often used in compositional form pañca˚ (cp. Ved. pañcāra with 5 spokes i.16413; Gr.πεμπώβολος, Lat. quinqu-ennis etc.).
1. Characteristics of No. 5 in its use, with ref, to lit. & fig. application “Five” is the number of “comprehensive and yet simple” unity or a set; it is applied in all cases of a natural and handy comprehension of several items into a group, after the 5 fingers of the hand, which latter lies at the bottom of all primitive expressions of No. 5 (see also below pañc’ angulika. The word for 5 itself in its original form is identical with the word for hand *prəq cp. Lat. com˚, decem, centum etc.) -
A. No. 5, appld (a) with ref. to time: catupañcāhaṃ 4 or 5 days Ja ii.114 (cp. quinque diebus Horace Sat i.316); maraṇaṃ tuyhaṃ oraṃ māsehi pañcahi after 5 months Vv 6310, p. māse vasitvā DN-a i.319 (cp. qu menses Hor. Sat. ii.3289) ■ (b) of space: ˚yojanaṭṭhāna Ja iii.504; ˚yojan-ubbedho gajavaro Vv-a 33 ˚bhūmako pāsādo Ja i.58 (cp. the house of Death as 5 stories high in Grimm, Mārchen No. 42 ed. Reclam)-(c) of a group, set, company, etc. (cp. 5 peoples RV iii.379; vi.114; viii.92 etc.; gods x.553; priests ii.3414iii.77; leaders of the Greek ships Hom. Iliad 16, 171 ambassadors Genesis 472; quinque viri Hor. Sat. ii.555 Epist. ii.124): p. janā Ja v.230; p. amaccā Ja v.231; p hatthino Dhp-a i.164; pañca nāriyo agamiṃsu Vv 322 p. puttāni khādāmi Pv i.63 ■ Note. No. 5 in this appln is not so frequent in Pāli as in older literature (Vedas e.g. ); instead of the simple 5 we find more freq the higher decimals 50 and 500. See also below §§ 3, 4.
B. No. 15 in two forms: pañcadasa (f. ˚ī the 15th day of the month Vv 156 = AN i.144; Snp 402) Vv-a 67 (˚kahāpaṇa-sahassāni dāpesi), and paṇṇarasa (also as f ī of the 15th or full-moon day Pv iii.31; Dhp-a i.198 Dhp-a iii.92; Dhp-a iv.202; Vv-a 314; Snp-a 78) Snp 153 (pannaraso uposatho); Vv 642 (paṇṇarase va cando; expld as paṇṇarasiyaṃ Vv-a 276); Dhp-a i.388 (of age, 15 or 16 years) DN-a i.17 (˚bhedo Khuddaka-nikāyo); Snp-a 357 (pannarasahi bhikkhu-satehi = 1500, instead of the usual 500) Pv-a 154 (˚yojana). The appln is much the same as 5 and 50 (see below), although more rare, e.g. as measure of space: ˚yojana Dhp-a i.17 (next in sequence to paṇṇāsa-yojana); Ja i.315; Pv-a 154 (cp. 15 furlongs from Jerusalem to Bethany John 11, 18; 15 cubits above the mountains rose the flood Gen. 7. 20).
C. No. 25 in two forms: pañcavīsati (the usual) e.g. Dhs-a 185 sq.; Mil 289 (citta-dubbalī-karaṇā dhammā) paṇṇa-vīsati, e.g. Ja iv.352 (nāriyo); Thig 67, and paṇṇuvīsaṃ (only at Ja iii.138). Similarly to 15 and 25 the number 45 (pañca-cattāḷīsa) is favoured in giving distances with ˚yojana, e.g. at Ja i.147, Ja i.348; Dhp-a i.367 ■ Application: of 25: (1) time: years Ja iii.138; Dhp-a i.4; (2) space: miles high and wide Dhp-a ii.64 (ahipeto); Vv-a 236 (yojanāni pharitvā pabhā).
2. Remarks on the use of 50 and 500 (5000). Both 50 and 500 are found in stereotyped and always recurring combinations (not in Buddhist literature alone, but all over the Ancient World), and applied to any situation indiscriminately. They have thus lost their original numerical significance and their value equals an expression like our “thousands,” cp. the use of Lat. mille and 600, also similarly many other high numerals in Pāli literature, as mentioned under respective units (4, 6, 8 e.g. in 14, 16, 18, etc.). Psychologically 500 is to be expld as “a great hand,” i.e. the 5 fingers magnified to the 2nd decade, and is equivalent to an expression like “a lot (originally “only one,” cp. casting the lot, then the one as a mass or collection), or like heaps, tons, a great many, etc ■ Thus 50 (and 500) as the numbers of “comm-union” are especially freq. in recording a company of men, a host of servants, animals in a herd etc., wherever the single constituents form a larger (mostly impressive, important) whole, as an army, the king’s retinue, etc ■ A. No. 50 (paññāsa; the by-form paṇṇāsa only at Dhp-a iii.207), in foll. applns: (a) of time: does not occur, but see below under 55 ■ (b) of space (cp. 50 cubits the breadth of Noah’s ark Gen. 6. 15; the height of the gallows (Esther 5. 14 7. 9) Ja i.359 (yojanāni); Dhp-a iii.207 (˚hattho ubbedhena rukkho); Vism 417 (paripuṇṇa ˚yojana suriyamaṇḍala); Dhp-a i.17 (˚yojana) ■ (c) of a company or group (cp. 50 horses RV ii.185; v.185; wives viii.1936; men at the oars Hom. Il. 2. 719; 16. 170 servants Hom. Od. 7, 103, 22, 421) Ja iii.220 (corā) v.161 (pallankā), 421 (dijakaññāyo); Snp p.87; Snp-a 57 (bhikkhū) ■ Note. 55 (pañcapaññāsa) is used instead of 50 in time expressions (years) e.g. at Dhp-a i.125; Dhp-a ii.57; Pv-a 99, Pv-a 142; also in groups: Dhp-a i.99 (janā) ■ B. No. 500 (pañcasata˚, pañcasatā pañcasatāni) ■ (a) of time: years (as Peta or Petī) Vv 8434; Pv ii.15; Pv-a 152 (with additional 50). (b) of space: miles high Pv iv.328 Ja i.204 (˚yojana-satikā); Vism 72 (˚dhanu-satika, 500 bows in distance) ■ (C) of groups of men, servants, or a herd, etc. (cp. 500 horses RV x.9314; witnesses of the rising of Christ 1 Cor. 15
6; men armed Vergil Aen 10. 204; men as representatives Hom. Od. 3. 7; 500 knights or warriors very frequently in Nibelungenlied where it is only meant to denote a “goodly company 500 or more”) Arahants Kp-a 98; Bhikkhus very frequent, e.g. DN i.1; Vin ii.199; Ja i.116, Ja i.227; Dhp-a ii.109, Dhp-a ii.153; Dhp-a iii.262, Dhp-a iii.295; Dhp-a iv.184, Dhp-a iv.186; Sāvakas Ja i.95 Upāsakas Ja ii.95; Pv-a 151; Paccekabuddhas Dhp-a iv.201; Pv-a 76; Vighāsâdā Ja ii.95; Dhp-a ii.154; Sons Pv-a 75; Thieves Dhp-a ii.204; Pv-a 54; Relatives Pv-a 179; Women-servants (parivārikā itthiyo) Pv ii.126 Vv-a 69, Vv-a 78, Vv-a 187; Pv-a 152; Oxen AN iv.41; Monkeys Ja iii.355; Horses Vin iii.6 ■ Money etc. as present reward or fine representing a “round-sum” (cp. Nibelungen 314: horses with gold, 317: mark; dollars as reward Grimm No. 7; drachms as pay Hor. Sat. ii.743 kahāpaṇas Snp 980, Snp 982; Pv-a 273; blows with stick as fine Vin i.247 ■ Various: a caravan usually consists of 500 loaded wagons, e.g. Ja i.101; Dhp-a ii.79; Pv-a 100, Pv-a 112; chariots Vv-a 78; ploughs Snp p.13. Cp SN i.148 (vyagghī-nisā); Vin ii.285 (ūna-pañcasatāni) Ja ii.93 (accharā); v.75 (vāṇijā); Dhp-a i.89 (suvaṇṇasivikā), 352 (rāja-satāni); iv.182 (jāti˚) Kp-a 176 (paritta-dīpā). Also BSk. pañ’opasthāyikā-śatāni Divy 529; pañca-mātrāṇi strī-śatāni Divy 533 ■ Note. When Gotama said that his “religion” would last 500 years he meant that it would last a very long time, practically for ever. The later change of 500 to 5,000 is immaterial to the meaning of the expression, it only indicates a later period (cp. 5,000 in Nibelungeniled for 500, also 5,000 men in ambush Joshua 8. 12; converted by Peter Acts 4. 4; fed by Christ with 5 loaves Matthew 14. 21). Still more impressive than 500 is the expression 5 Koṭis (5 times 100,000 or 10 million), which belongs to a comparatively later period, e.g. at Dhp-a i.62 (ariya-sāvaka-koṭiyo), 256 (˚mattā-ariyasāvakā) iv.190 (p. koti-mattā ariya-sāvakā).
3. Typical sets of 5 in the Pali Canon. ˚aggaṃ first fruits of 5 (kinds), viz. khett˚, rās˚, koṭṭh˚, kumbhi˚ bhojan˚ i.e. of the standing crop, the threshing floor the granary, the pottery, the larder Snp-a 270. ˚aṅgā 5 gentlemanly qualities (of king or brahmin): sujāta, ajjhāyaka abhirūpa, sīlavā, paṇḍita (see anga; on another combn with anga see below). The phrase pañc’ angasamannāgata & ˚vippahīna (SN i.99; AN v.16) refers to the 5 nīvaraṇāni: see expld at Vism 146. ˚aṅgikaturiya 5 kinds of music: ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana susira. ˚abhiññā 5 psychic powers (see Cpd. 209) ˚ānantarika-kammāni 5 acts that have immediate retribution (Mil 25), either 5 of the 6 abhiṭhānas (q.v. or (usually) murder, theft, impurity, lying, intemperance (the 5 sīlas) cp. Dhs trsl. 267. ˚indriyāni 5 faculties, viz. saddhā, viriya, sati, samādhi, paññā (see indriya B. 15
19). ˚vidhaṃ (rāja-) kakudhabhaṇḍaṃ insignia regis viz. vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta pādukā. ˚kalyāṇāni, beauty-marks: kesa˚, maṃsa˚ aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚. ˚kāmaguṇā pleasures of the 5 senses (= taggocarāni pañc’ āyatanāni gahitāni honti Snp-a 211). ˚gorasā 5 products of the cow: khīra, dadhi takka, navanīta, sappi. ˚cakkhūni, sorts of vision (of a Buddha): maṃsa˚ dibba˚ paññā˚ buddha˚ samanta˚ ˚taṇhā cravings, specified in 4 sets of 5 each: see Nd ii.271v. ˚nikāyā 5 collections (of Suttantas) in the Buddh. Canon, viz. Dīgha˚ Majjhima˚ Saṃyutta˚, Anguttara˚ Khuddaka˚, e.g. Vin ii.287. ˚nīvaraṇāni or obstacles: kāmacchanda, abhijjhā-vyāpāda, thīnamiddha uddhacca-kukkucca, vicikicchā. ˚patiṭṭhitaṃ 5 fold prostration or veneration, viz. with forehead waist, elbows, knees, feet (Childers) in phrase ˚ena vandati (sometimes ˚ṃ vandati, e.g. Snp-a 78, Snp-a 267; Ja v.502; Snp-a 267, Snp-a 271, Snp-a 293, Snp-a 328, Snp-a 436; Vv-a 6; Dhp-a i.197; Dhp-a iv.178, etc. ˚bandhana either 5 ways of binding or pinioning or 5 fold bondage Ja iv.3 (as “ure pañcangika-bandhanaṃ” cp. kaṇṭhe pañcamehi bandhanehi bandhitvā SN iv.201); Nda 304iii.b2 (rājā bandhāpeti andhu-bandhanena vā rajju˚, sankhalika˚, latā˚, parikkhepa˚), with which cp. Śikṣāsamucc. 165: rājñā pañcapāśakena bandhanena baddhaḥ ■ There is a diff kind of bandhana which has nothing to do with binding but which is the 5 fold ordeal (obligation: pañcavidhabandhana-kāraṇaṃ) in Niraya, and consists of the piercing of a red hot iron stake through both hands both feet and the chest; it is a sort of crucifixion. We may conjecture that this “bandhana” is a corruption of “vaddhana” (of vyadh, or viddhana?), and that the expression originally was pañcaviddhana-kāraṇa (instead of pañca-vidha-bandhana-k˚). See passages under bandhana & cp. MN iii.182; AN i.141; Kv 597; Snp-a 479. ˚balāni 5 forces: saddhā˚ viriya˚ sati samādhi˚ paññā˚ DN ii.120; MN ii.12; SN iii.96; AN iii.12 (see also bala). ˚bhojanāni 5 kinds of food: odāna kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṃsa Vin iv.176. ˚macchariyāni 5 kinds of selfishness: āvāsa˚ kula˚ lābha vaṇṇa˚ dhamma˚. ˚rajāni defilements: rūpa˚, sadda etc. (of the 5 senses) Nd i.505; Snp-a 574. ˚vaṇṇā 5 colours (see ref. for colours under pīta and others), viz nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, kaṇha, odāta (of B’s eye) Nd ii.235I.a; others with ref. to paduma-puṇḍarīka Vv-a 41; to paduma Dhp-a iii.443; to kusumāni DN-a i.140; Dhp-a iv.203. ˚vaṇṇa in another meaning (fivefold) in connection with pīti (q.v.). ˚saṃyojanāni fetters (q.v.) ˚saṅgā impurities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha, māna, diṭṭhi (cp. taṇhā) Dhp-a iv.109. ˚sīla the 5 moral precepts as sub-division of the 10 (see dasasīla and Nd ii.under sīla on p. 277).
4. Other (not detailed) passages with 5: Snp 660 (abbudāni), 677 (nahutāni koṭiyo pañca); Thig 503 (˚kaṭuka = pañcakāmaguṇa-rasa Thag-a 291); Dhp-a ii.25 (˚mahānidhi); Snp-a 39 (˚pakāra-gomaṇḍala-puṇṇabhāva). Cp. further: guṇā Mil 249; paṇṇāni Vin i.201 (nimba˚, kuṭaja˚, paṭola˚, sulasi˚, kappāsika˚); Paṇḍu-rāja-puttā Ja v.426; pabbagaṇṭhiyo Mil 103; pucchā Dhs-a 55; mahā -pariccāgā Dhp-a iii.441 mahā -vilokanāni Dhp-a i.84; vatthūni Vin ii.196 sq. vāhanāni (of King Pajjota) Dhp-a i.196; suddhāvāsā Dhs A 14. In general see Vin v.128
133 (var. sets of 5).
-aṅga five (bad) qualities (see anga 3 and above 3), in phrase vippahīna free from the 5 sins DN iii.269; Nd ii.284 C; cp. BSk. pañcānga-viprahīna. Ep. of the Buddha Divy 95, Divy 264 & ˚samannāgata endowed with the 5 good qualities AN v.15 (of senāsana, expld at Vism 122): see also above. -aṅgika consisting of 5 parts fivefold, in foll. combns: ˚jhāna (viz. vitakka, vicāra pīti, sukha, cittass’ ekaggatā) Dhs 83; ˚turiya orchestra SN i.131; Thag 398; Thag 2, Thag 139; Vv 364; Dhp-a i.274, Dhp-a i.394 ˚bandhana bond Ja iv.3. -aṅgula = ˚angulika Ja iv.153 (gandha˚); Snp-a 39 (usabhaṃ nahāpetvā bhojetvā ˚ṃ datvā mālaṃ bandhitvā). -aṅgulika (also ˚aka) the 5 finger-mark, palm-mark, the magic mark of the spread hand with the fingers extended (made after the hand 5 fingers have been immersed in some liquid, preferably a solution of sandal wood, gandha; but also blood) See Vogel, the 5 finger-token in Pāli Literature, Amsterdam Akademie 1919 (with plates showing ornaments on Bharhut Tope), cp. also J.P.T,S. 1884, 84 sq. It is supposed to provide magical protection (esp. against the Evil Eye). Vin ii.123 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.116) Ja i.166, Ja i.192; Ja ii.104 (gandha ˚ṃ deti), 256 (gandhaā appld to a cetiya); iii.23, 160 (lohita˚); Vv 3318 (gandha˚ṃ adāsiṃ Kassapassa thūpasmiṃ); Mvu 32, Mvu 4 (see trsl p. 220); Dhp-a iii.374 (goṇānaṃ gandha-˚āni datvā) Snp-a 137 (setamālāhi sabba-gandha-sugandhehi p˚akehi ca alankatā paripuṇṇa-angapaccangā, of oxen). Cp Mvu i.269 (stūpeṣu pañcangulāni; see note on p 579). Quotations of similar use in brahmanical literature see at Vogel p. 6 sq. -āvudha (āyudha) set of 5 weapons (sword, spear, bow, battle-axe, shield, after Childers) Mil 339 (see Mil trsl. ii.227), cp. p˚ sannaddha Ja iii.436, Ja iii.467; Ja iv.283, Ja iv.437; Ja v.431; Ja vi.75 sannaddha-p˚ Ja iv.160 (of sailors). They seem to be different ones at diff. passages. -āhaṃ 5 days Vin iv.281; Ja ii.114. -cūḷaka with 5 topknots Ja v.250 (of a boy). -nakha with 5 claws, Name of a five-toed animal Ja v.489 (so read for pañca na khā, misunderstood by C.). -paṭṭhika at Vin ii.117, Vin ii.121, Vin ii.152; is not clear (v.l. paṭika). Vin. Texts iii.97 trsl. “cupboards” and connect it with Sk. paṭṭikā, as celapattikaṃ Vin ii.128 undoubtedly is (“strip of cloth laid down for ceremonial purposes,” trsl. iii.128). It also occurs at Vin iv.47 -patikā (f.) having had 5 husbands Ja v.424, Ja v.427. -mālin of a wild animal Ja vi.497 (= pancangika-turiya-saddo viya C., not clear). -māsakamattaṃ a sum of 5 māsakas Dhp-a ii.29. -vaggiya (or ˚ika Snp-a 198) belonging to a group of five. The 5 brahmins who accompanied Gotama when he became an ascetic are called p. bhikkhū Their names are Aññākondañña, Bhaddiya Vappa, Assaji, Mahānāma. MN i.170; MN ii.94; SN iii.66; Pv-a 21 (˚e ādiṃ katvā); Snp-a 351; cp. chabbaggiya -vidha fivefold Ja i.204 (˚ā abhirakkhā); vi.341 (˚paduma), ˚bandhana: see this. -sādhāraṇa-bhāva fivefold connection Ja iv.7. -seṭṭha (Bhagavā) “the most excellent in the five” Snp 355 (= pañcannaṃ paṭhamasissānaṃ pañcavaggiyānaṃ seṭṭho, pañcahi vā saddhādīhi indriyehi sīlādīhi vā dhamma-khandhehi ativisiṭṭhehi cakkhūhi ca seṭṭho Snp-a 351). -hattha having 5 hands Ja v.431.
(adj.) fivefold, consisting of five Ja i.116 (˚kammaṭṭhāna); Dhs. chapters 167–175 (˚naya fivefold system of jhāna, cp. Dhs. trsln 52); Snp-a 318 (˚nipāta of Anguttara) ■ nt. pañcakaṃ a pentad, five Vin i.255 (the 5 parts of the kaṭhina robe, see Vin Texts ii.155), cp. p. 287; pl. pañcakā sets of five Vism 242. The 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body are divided into 4 pañcaka’s (i.e. sets of 5 more closely related parts), viz. taca˚; “skin-pentad,” the 5 dermatoid constituents: kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco vakka˚; the next five, ending with the kidneys; papphāsa˚; id. ending with the lungs & comprising the inner organs proper; matthaluṅga˚; id. ending with the brain and 2 chakka’s (sets of 6), viz. meda˚ & mutta˚;. See e.g. Vb-a 249, Vb-a 258.
fr. pañca
(adv.) five times.
(adv.) in five ways, fivefold Dhs-a 351.
(adj.) num. ord the fifth DN i.88; Snp 84, Snp 99, Snp 101; Vv-a 102; Pv-a 52 (˚e māse in the 5th month the Petī has to die); Dhp-a iii.195 (˚e sattāhe in the 5th week) ■ f. pañcamā Pv-a 78 (ito ˚āya jātiyā) and pañcamī Snp 437 (senā); Pv-a 79 (jāti).
compar ■ superl. formation fr. pañca, with ˚ma as in Lat. supremus, for the usual ˚to as in Gr. πέμπτος, Lat. quintus, also Sk. pañcathaḥ
(adj.) = pañcama Ja i.55.
(adv.) by fives.
heap, pile AN ii.75 (meaning different?); Cp i.1016.
is it to be puñja?
(m. & nt.) a cage, Ja i.436; Ja ii.141; Ja iii.305 (sīha˚); iv.213; v.232 (sīha), 365; vi.385 (sīha˚), 391; Mil 23 (˚antaragata gone into the c.); 27; Dhp-a i.164 (nakha˚), where meaning is “frame”; Vb-a 238; + sīha˚ meaning window.
cp. Epic Sk. pañjara, which probably belongs to Lat. pango, q.v. Walde,; Lat. Wtb. s. v.
(adj.) with outstretched hands, as token of reverence Snp 1031; in cpd. pañjalī-kata (cp. añjalīkata; añjali + pp. of kṛ; raising one’s folded hands Snp 566, Snp 573; Thag 460; Ja vi.501. Cp. BSk. prāñjalīkṛta MV astu ii.257, 287, 301.
pa + añjali. Cp. Ep. Sk. prāñjali
(adj.) holding up the clasped hands as token of respectful salutation SN i.226; Snp 485, Snp 598.
fr. pañjali
(adj.) in the right order, straight AN ii.15.
pa + añjasa
(-˚) (adj.) of wisdom, endowed with knowledge or insight, possessed of the highest cognition, in foll. cpds.: anissaraṇa˚ DN i.245; SN ii.194; SN iv.332; anoma˚ Snp 343; appa˚ SN i.198; Ja ii.166 Ja iii.223, Ja iii.263; avakujja˚ AN i.130; gambhīra˚ SN i.190 javana˚ SN i.63; Nd ii.235; tikkha˚; dup˚ DN iii.252, DN iii.282; SN i.78, SN i.191; SN ii.159 sq.; MN iii.25; AN ii.187 sq.; Dhp 111 Dhp 140; Pp 13; Dhp-a ii.255; nibbedhika˚ SN i.63; AN ii.178 Nd ii.235; puṭhu˚ ibid.; bhāvita˚ SN iv.111; AN v.42 sq. bhūri˚ SN iii.143; SN iv.205; manda˚ Vb-a 239; mahā SN i.63, SN i.121; SN ii.155; AN i.23, AN i.25; AN ii.178 sq.; Nd ii.235; Snp-a 347; sap˚ SN i.13, SN i.22, SN i.212; SN iv.210; AN iv.245; Pv i.88 115; Pv-a 60 (= paṇḍita), 131 (+ buddhimant); suvimutta˚ AN v.29 sq.; hāsa˚ SN i.63, SN i.191; SN v.376; Nd ii.235 By itself (i.e. not in cpd.) only at Dhp 208 (= lokiyalokuttara-paññāya sampanna Dhp-a iii.172) and 375 (= paṇḍita Dhp-a iv.111).
the adj. form of paññā
(f.) having sense, wisdom AN iii.421 (dup˚ = foolishness) v.159 (id.); mahā˚, puthu˚ vipula˚ AN i.45. See also paññatta2.
secondary abstract formation fr. paññā, in meaning equal to paññāṇa
pointed out, made known, ordered, designed, appointed ordained SN ii.218; AN i.98, AN i.151; AN iv.16, AN iv.19; AN v.74 sq.; Pv iv.135; Dhp-a i.274; Vv-a 9 (su˚ mañca-pītha), 92 (niccabhatta); Pv-a 78. Esp. freq. in ster. formula paññatte āsane nisīdi he sat down on the appointed (i.e. special) chair (seat) DN i.109, DN i.125, DN i.148; SN i.212; Dhp 148; Snp-a 267; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 61.
pp. of paññāpeti, cp. BSk. prajñapta
(nt.) wisdom, sense etc. SN v.412 (v.l. paññatā). See also paññatā.
abstr. fr. paññā
(f.) making known, manifestation, description, designation, name, idea notion, concept. On term see Cpd. 3 sq., 198, 199 Kvu trsln 1; Dhs trsln 340 ■ MN iii.68; SN iii.71; SN iv.38 (māra˚), 39 (satta˚, dukkha˚, loka˚); AN ii.17; AN v.190; Pts ii.171, Pts ii.176; Pp 1; Dhs i.309; Ne 1 sq., 38, 188 Kp-a 102, Kp-a 107; DN-a i.139; Snp-a 445, Snp-a 470; Pv-a 200. The spelling also occurs as paṇṇatti, e.g. at Ja ii.65 (˚vahāra); Mil 173 (loka˚); Kp-a 28; adj. paṇṇattika (q.v.).
fr. paññāpeti, cp. paññatta1
(adj.) possessed of insight, wise, intelligent sensible Vin i.60; DN iii.237, DN iii.252, DN iii.265, DN iii.282, DN iii.287; MN i.292 MN iii.23; SN i.53, SN i.79; SN ii.159 sq., 207, 279 (daharo ce pi p.) iv.243; v.100, 199, 392, 401; AN ii.76, AN ii.187, AN ii.230; AN iii.2 sq. 127, 183; iv.85, 217, 271, 357; v.25, 124 sq.; Snp 174 Nd ii.259; Dhp 84; Ja i.116; Pp 13; Dhp-a ii.255; Kp-a 54 Vb-a 239, Vb-a 278; Pv-a 40. Cp. paññāṇavant.
paññā + vant, with reduction of ā to a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 23
(f.) intelligence, comprising all the higher faculties of cognition, “intellect as conversant with general truths” (Dial. ii.68), reason wisdom, insight, knowledge, recognition. See on term Mrs. Rh. D. “Buddhism” (1914) pp. 94, 130, 201; also Cpd. 40, 41, 102 and discussion of term at Dhs. trsl. 17 339, cp. scholastic definition with all the synonyms of intellectual attainment at Nd ii.380 = Dhs 16 (paññā pajānanā vicayo etc.). As tt. in Buddhist Psych Ethics it comprises the highest and last stage as 3rd division in the standard “Code of religious practice which leads to Arahantship or Final Emancipation These 3 stages are: (1) sīla-kkhandha (or ˚sampadā) code of moral duties; (2) samādhi-kkhandha (or cittasampadā) code of emotional duties or practice of con centration & meditation; (3) paññā-kkhandha (or ˚sampadā) code of intellectual duties or practice of the attainment of highest knowledge. (See also jhāna1. They are referred to in almost every Suttanta of Dīgha 1 (given in extenso at DN i.62–85) and frequently mentioned elsewhere, cp. DN ii.81, DN ii.84, DN ii.91 (see khandha, citta sīla) ■ DN i.26 = DN i.162 (˚gatena caranti diṭṭhigatāni) 174 (˚vāda), 195 (˚pāripūrin); ii.122 (ariyā); iii.101 158, 164, 183, 230, 237, 242, 284 sq.; SN i.13 = SN i.165 (sīla citta, paññā), 17, 34, 55; ii.185 (sammā˚), 277; v.222 (ariyā); MN i.144 (id.); iii.99 (id.), 245 (paramā), 272 (sammā˚); AN i.61, AN i.216; AN ii.1 (ariyā); iv.105 (id.) iii.106 (sīla, citta, p.), 352 (kusalesu dhammesu); iv.11 (id.); v.123 sq.; Iti 35, Iti 40 (˚uttara), 51 (sīlaṃ samādhi p. ca), 112 (ariyā˚); Snp 77, Snp 329, Snp 432, Snp 881, Snp 1036 and passim; Dhp 38, Dhp 152, Dhp 372; Nd i.77; Nd ii.380; Pts i.53 Pts i.64 sq., 71 sq., 102 sq., 119; ii.150 sq., 162, 185 sq. Pp 25, Pp 35, Pp 54 (˚sampadā); Dhs 16, Dhs 20, Dhs 555; Ne 8, Ne 15 Ne 17, Ne 28, Ne 54, Ne 191; Vb-a 140, Vb-a 396; Pv-a 40 (paññāya abhāvato for lack of reason); Sdhp 343. On paññāya see sep. article. See also adhipanna (adhisīla, adhicitta + ).
-ādhipateyya the supremacy of wisdom AN ii.137 -indriya the faculty of reason (with sati˚ & samādhi˚ DN iii.239, DN iii.278; Dhs 16, Dhs 20 etc.; Nett. 7, 15 sq; 191 -obhāsa the lustre of wisdom Pts i.119; Dhs 16, Dhs 20 etc -kkhandha the code of cognition (see above) Vin i.62; DN iii.229, DN iii.279; Iti 51; Nd i.21; Ne 70, Ne 90, Ne 128. It is always combd with sīla˚ & samādhi-kkhandha.; -cakkhu the eye of wisdom (one of the 5 kinds of extraordinary sight of a Buddha: see under cakkhumant) DN iii.219; SN v.467; Iti 52; Nd i.354; Nd ii.235. -dada giving or bestowing wisdom SN i.33; Snp 177. -dhana the treasure of perfect knowledge (one of the 7 treasures, see dhana DN iii.163, DN iii.251; AN iii.53; Vv-a 113. -nirodhika tending to the destruction of reason SN v.97; Iti 82. -paṭilābha acquisition of wisdom SN v.411; AN i.45; Pts ii.189 -pāsāda the stronghold of supreme knowledge Dhp 28 (= dibba-cakkhuṃ sankhātaṃ ˚ṃ). -bala the power of reason or insight, one of the 5 powers DN iii.229, DN iii.253; MN iii.72; AN iv.363; Snp 212; Dhs 16, Dhs 20 etc.; Ne 54 Ne 191; Vv-a 7. -bāhulla wealth or plenty of wisdom SN v.411; AN i.45. -bhūmi ground or stage of wisdom; a name given to the Paṭicca-samuppāda by Bdhgh at Vism xvii, pp. 517 sq. (˚niddesa). -ratana the gem of reason or knowledge Dhs 16, Dhs 20 etc. -vimutta freed by reason DN ii.70; DN iii.105, DN iii.254; MN i.35, MN i.477; AN i.61 AN ii.6; AN iv.452; Snp 847; Nd i.207; Kv 58; Ne 199 -vimutti emancipation through insight or knowledge (always paired with ceto-vimutti) DN i.156, DN i.167; DN iii.78 DN iii.102, DN iii.108, DN iii.132, DN iii.281; Iti 75, Iti 91; Snp 725, Snp 727; Ne 7, Ne 40 Ne 81, Ne 127; DN-a i.313; Vb-a 464. -visuddhi purity of insight DN iii.288. -vuddhi increase of knowledge SN v.97, SN v.411; AN i.15, AN i.45; AN ii.245. -sampadā the blessing of higher knowledge (see above) AN i.62; AN ii.66; AN iii.12 sq. 182 sq.; iv.284, 322. -sīla conduct and (higher) intelligence Dhp 229 (˚samāhita = lokuttarapaññāya c’ eva pārisuddhisīlena ca samannāgata Dhp-a iii.329); Vv 3423 id. = ariyāya diṭṭhiyā ariyena sīlena ca sāmannāgata Vv-a 155). Often used with yathābhūtaṃ q.v. Cp paññāya.
cp. Vedic prajñā, pa + jñā
(nt.) 1. wisdom, knowledge, intelligence DN i.124 (sīla + ); SN i.41; AN iv.342; Snp 96, Snp 1136; DN-a i.171, DN-a i.290.
2. mark, sign, token Ja v.195.
pa + ñāṇa, cp. Vedic prajñāno in both meanings & paññā
(adj.) reasonable, sensible, wise Snp 202, Snp 1090; Ja v.222; Ja vi.361; Nd ii.382.
paññāṇa + vant
known, renowned DN-a i.143; ap˚ unknown, defamed Vin iv.231; SN iv.46; AN iii.134 (where also der. appaññātika).
pp. of pajānāti
(adj. n.) one who advises, assigns or appoints Vin ii.305 (āsana˚).
fr. paññāpeti
(nt.) disclosure, discovering MN iii.17; SN iii.59; declaration Dhs-a 11.
fr. paññāpeti
one who imparts knowledge, discloser of truths, discoverer DN ii.223.
n. ag. of paññāpeti
1. to make known, declare, point out, appoint, assign, recognise, define DN i.119 (brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṃ), 180, 185, 237; Iti 98 (tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ), Pp 37, Pp 38; Pv-a 61 (āsanaṃ).
2. to lay down, fold out, spread Pv-a 43 (sanghāṭiṃ) ■ pp paññatta (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. paññāpāpeti Ja iii.371.
Caus. of pajānāti
(indecl.) understanding fully, knowing well, realising, in full recognition, in thorough realisation or understanding. Used most frequently with yathābhūtaṃ (q.v. SN i.13 (bhāveti), 44 (lokasmiṃ pajjoto), 214 (parisujjhati); ii.7 sq. (uppajjati), 68 (suppaṭividdho); iii.6 (id.); v.324 (ajjhupekkhati); AN i.125 (anuggahissati) iii.44 (vaḍḍhati); iv.13 sq. (pariyogāhamāna); v.39 (disvā) Snp 1035 (see Nd ii.380ii); Iti 93 (moh’aggiṃ, v.l. saññāya); Pv-a 60 (upaparikkhitvā, as expln of ñatvā) 140 = viceyya.
ger. of pajānāti, in relation ˚ñāya: ñatvā as uṭṭhāya: ṭhatvā; so expld by P. Commentators whereas modern interpreters have taken it as instr. of paññā
to be (well) known, to be clear or evident, to be perceived, seen or taken for, to appear Iti 89; Dhp-a i.14, Dhp-a i.95 (fut. paññāyissatha you will be well known); ii.75; Pv-a 83 (pālito eva), 166 (dissati + ); ppr. paññāyamāna Dhp-a i.29; Pv-a 96 (= perceivable) ■ aor. paññāyi Pv-a 172 (paccakkhato).
Pass. of pajānāti
mode of asking, inquiry, investigation, question DN i.11 (deva˚) MN i.83; MN iii.30; AN i.103, AN i.288; AN iii.81, AN iii.191 sq. 419 sq.; v.50 sq.; Snp 512, Snp 957, Snp 1005, Snp 1024, Snp 1148 etc. Nd i.464; Mil 28, Mil 340; DN-a i.97. pañhaṃ pucchati to ask a question Nd ii.under pucchā (q.v.).
-paṭibhāna an answer to a question MN i.83; Mil 28 -vīmaṃsaka one who tests a question Snp 827; Nd i.166; Snp-a 538. -vyākaraṇa mode of answering questions, of which there are 4, viz. ekaṃsa “direct,” vibhajja “qualified,” paṭipucchā “after further questioning, ṭhapanīya “not to be answered or left undecided,” thus enumd at DN iii.229; AN i.197 sq.; AN ii.46; Mil 339.
Ved. praśna, for details of etym. see pucchati
cloth; cloak, garment SN ii.219 (˚pilotika); Thag 1092 (bhinna-paṭan-dhara “wearing the patchwork cloak” trsl.); Ja iv.494; Kp-a 45, Kp-a 58 (˚tantu); DN-a i.198; Dhp-a ii.45 (puppha˚); iii.295 ˚kañcuka, v.l. kaṭak˚) Vism 16 (bhinna-paṭa-dhara in defn of bhikkhu); Vb-a 327 (id.); Dhs-a 81 (paṭa-paṭa sadda); Vv-a 73, Vv-a 201; Pv-a 185. Cp. paṭikā & paṭalikā; also kappaṭa.
cp. Epic Sk. paṭa, etym. unknown, prob. dialectical
counter-fire Vin ii.138; Ja i.212; kacc. 31.
paṭi + aggi
a grasshopper Snp 602; Ja vi.234 Ja vi.506; Mil 272, Mil 407; Dhp-a iv.58; Pv-a 67; Pgdp 59.
cp. *Sk. phaḍingā, but influenced by Sk. pataga a winged animal, bird
(adj.) poor (lit. dressed in old clothes): so read perhaps at Ja vi.227 (vv. ll paḷaccari paṭiccari).;
paṭa + carin but cp. Sk. pāṭaccara a shoplifter Halāyudha 2, 185
(nt.) 1. a covering, membrane, lining, envelope, skin film Vism 257 (maṃsa˚ of the liver, where Kp-a 54 reads maṃsa-piṇḍa), 359 (phaṇa˚); Dhs-a 307 (7 akkhi˚ membranes of the eye); Kp-a 21 (samuppaṭana), 55 (udara mucous membrane of the stomach), 61 (id.); Dhs-a 330 (id.); Snp-a 248 (id.); Pv-a 186 (eka˚ upāhanā, singlelined cp. paṭalika & palāsika & see Morris; J.P.T.S. 1887 165); Vism 446 (kappāsa˚ film of cotton seed); Bdhd 66 (id.).
2. roof, ceiling Pv-a 52 (ayo˚ of iron). 3. a heap, mass (esp. of clouds) Ja i.73 (megha˚); Dhs-a 239 (abbha˚) ■ madhu˚ honey comb Ja i.262; Dhp-a i.59; Dhp-a iii.323.
4. cataract of the eye Dāvs v.27.
connected with paṭa, cp. Sk. paṭala in meaning “section” Vedic, in all other meanings later Sk.
(adj.) belonging to a cover or lining, having or forming a cover or lining, as adj. said of sandals (eka˚ with single lining) Ja ii.277 (v.l. for ekatalika); iii.80, 81 (id.) ■ as n. f. paṭalikā a woven cloth, a woollen coverlet (embroidered with flowers) usually combd with paṭikā Vin i.192; Vin ii.162; DN i.7 (= ghana-puppho uṇṇāmayo attharako. So āmilākapaṭṭo ti pi vuccati DN-a i.87); AN i.137, AN i.181; AN iii.50, AN iv.94 AN iv.231, AN iv.394.
fr. paṭala
a kettle-drum, war drum, one of the 2 kinds of drums (bheri) mentioned at Dhs-a 319, viz. mahā-bheri & p ■ bheri; Ja i.355; Dpvs 16, 14; Pv-a 4.
cp. Epic Sk. paṭaha, dial.
(nt.) a flag MN i.379; Mil 87; Vism 469; Thag-a 70.
cp. Sk. paṭāka, connected with paṭa
at Vin iv.46 (paṭāṇi dinnā hoti) is not clear, it is expld by Bdhgh as “mañcapidhānaṃ (for ˚pīṭhānaṃ pādasikhāsu āṇi dinno hoti.” At DN-a i.77 we find the foll.. “visūkaṃ paṭāni (sic.)-bhūtaṃ dassanan ti visūkadassanaṃ ” and at Dhs-a 393: “paṭāni-gahaṇaṃ gahetvā ekapaden’ eva taṃ nissaddaṃ akāsiṃ.”
(indecl.) directional prefix in well-defined meaning of “back (to), against towards, in opposition to, opposite.” As preposition (with acc. and usually postponed) towards, near by, at usually spelt pati (cp. sampati & sampaṭika) Snp 291 (?), 425 (Nerañjaram (pati); Thag 628 (suriyass’ uggamanam p.); 2, 258 (abhiyobbanam p.), 306 (Nerañjaram p.); Ja i.457 (paṭi suriyaṃ thatvā standing facing the sun); iv.93; vi.491; Pv ii.941 (suriy’ uggamanam p.); Mil 116 (dānam p.); Pv-a 154 (paṭi Gangaṃ against the G.) ■ Most freq. combns are: paṭi + ā (patiyā˚) patisaṃ˚; vi + paṭi˚, sampaṭi˚. The composition (assimilation-) form before vowels is pacc˚; (b. v.) ■ Meanings. I. (lit.) “back,” in the sense of: (1) against, in opposition (opp. anu, see below III.), contrary: viz (a) often with the implication of a hostile attack (anti-against): ˚kaṇṭaka, ˚kosati (re-ject), ˚kūla, ˚khipati (re-fuse, op-pose), ˚gha, ˚codeti (re-prove), thambhati ˚disā, ˚deseti, ˚pakkha, ˚patha, ˚piṃsati, ˚pīḷita, ˚magga ˚manteti, ˚yodha (at-tack), ˚vacana (re-ply), ˚vadati ˚vedeti, ˚sattu (enemy), ˚suṇāti, ˚hata ■ (b) warding off, protecting against (counter-, anti-): ˚kara (antidote), ˚sedhati (ward-off) ■ (c) putting against, setting off in a comparison (counter-, rival): ˚puggala (one’s equal), ˚purisa (rival), ˚bala (adequate), ˚bimba (counterpart), ˚bhāga (id.); ˚malla (rival wrestler) ˚sama, ˚sāsana, ˚sūra, ˚seṭṭha ■ (d) close contact (against, be-): ˚kujjita (covered), ˚gādha, ˚channa (“be-deckt”) ˚vijjhana ■ (2) in return, in exchange (in revenge) ˚akkosati, ˚āneti, ˚katheti, ˚karoti, ˚kūṭa1 ˚kkamati, ˚khamāpeti, ˚gāti (sing in response), ˚gīta ˚daṇḍa (retribution), ˚dadāti, ˚dāna, ˚nivāsana, ˚paṇṇa (in reply), ˚pasaṃsati, ˚piṇḍa, ˚pucchati (ask in return) ˚māreti (kill in revenge), ˚bhaṇḍa (goods in exchange) ˚bhaṇḍati (abuse in return) ˚rodana, ˚roseti, ˚vera (revenge), ˚sammodeti, ˚sātheyya ■ (3) (temporal again, a second time (re-): ˚dasseti (re-appear), ˚nijjhatta, ˚nivattati, ˚pavesati, ˚pākatika (re-stored) ˚bujjhati, ˚vinicchinati, ˚sañjīvita (re-suscitated) ˚sandhi (re-incarnation), ˚sammajjati ■ (4) away from back to (esp. in compn paṭivi˚): ˚kuṭati (shrink back) ˚ghāta (repulsion), ˚dhāvati, ˚neti, ˚paṇāmeti (send away), ˚bandhati (hold back), ˚bāhati (id.), ˚vijacchati ˚vineti, ˚vinodeti (drive out), ˚virata, ˚saṃharati, ˚sallīna, ˚sutta, ˚sumbhita ■ II. (applied, in reflexive sense): (1) to, on to, up to, towards, at-: ˚oloketi (look at), ˚gijjha (hankering after) ˚ggaha, ˚jānāti ˚pūjeti ˚peseti (send out to), ˚baddha (bound to), ˚bhaya ˚yatta, ˚rūpa, ˚laddha, ˚labhati (at-tain), ˚lābha ˚lobheti, ˚sāmeti, ˚sevati (go after), ˚ssata. (2) together (con-, com-), esp. combd with ˚saṃ˚; ; ˚saṃyujati ˚passaddha, ˚maṇḍita, ˚sankharoti, ˚santhāra ■ (3 asunder, apart (“up”): ˚kopeti (shake up), ˚viṃsa (part), ˚vibhatta (divided up). (4) secondary, complementary by-, sham (developed out of meaning I 1 c.): ˚nāsikā (a false nose), ˚sīsaka (sham top knot) esp. freq. in redupl. (iterative) cpds., like anga-paccanga (limb & by-limb, i.e. all kinds of limbs), vata-paṭivatta (duties & secondary duties, all duties). In the latter application paṭi resembles the use of ā, which is more frequent (see ā;5) ■ III. The opposite of pati in directional meaning is anu, with which it is freq. combd either (a) in neg. contrast or (b) in positive emphasis e.g. (a) anuvātaṃ paṭivātaṃ with and against the wind anuloma + paṭiloma with and against the grain; ˚sotaṃ w. & against the stream; (b) anumasati paṭimasati to touch cloesly (lit. up & down) ■; Note. The spelling pati for paṭi occurs frequently without discrimination it is established in the combn with st hā (as patiṭṭhāti patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are enumd under the respective form of paṭi˚, with the exception of patiṭṭh˚ Pati-aneti
Ved, prati, to Idg. *preti as in Lat. pretium (fr. *pretios)” price” (cp. precious), i.e. equivalent; Gr. πρές (aeol.), προτί against
to lead or bring back, in duppaṭi-ānaya difficult to bring back Ja iv.43. Pati-orohati
paṭi + ā + nī
to descend from DN-a i.251 (˚itvā).
paṭi + ava + ruh
to wish for, long for SN i.227. adj. ˚kankhin MN i.21. See also pāṭikankhin.
paṭi + kānkṣ
(indecl.) 1. previously (lit. as cautioned) Vin iv.44; Mil 48 (v.l. ˚kacca) usually as paṭigacc’ eva, e.g. Vin i.342; DN ii.118-(2) providing for (the future), preparing for, with caution, cautiously Vin ii.256; SN i.57; SN v.162; AN ii.25; DN ii.144; Thag 547; Ja iii.208; Ja iv.166 (in expln of paṭikata & paṭikaroti); v.235.
so read for ˚gacca as given at all passages mentioned, see Trenckner Mil p.421, Geiger; Pr. § 381 ■ ger. fr. paṭikaroti (q.v.), cp. Sk pratikāra in same meaning “caution, remedy”
an enemy, adversary, robber, highwayman Ja i.186; Ja ii.239; Dhp-a iii.456 (v.l. ˚kaṇḍaka).
paṭi + kantaka4
“done against,” i.e. provided or guarded against Ja iv.166.
pp. of paṭikaroti
to answer, reply Ja vi.224; DN-a i.263.
paṭi + katheti
to shake; pret. paccakampittha Ja v.340.
paṭi + kampati
(nt.) redress, atonement AN i.21 (sa˚ & a˚ āpatti) Mil 29; DN-a i.96.
paṭi + kamma, cp. paṭikaroti
counteracting; requital, compensation Vin iv.218 (a˚); DN i.137 (ovāda˚ giving advice or providing for? v.l. pari˚); iii.154.
fr. paṭi + kṛ;
1. to redress, repair, make amends for a sin, expiate (āpattiṃ) Vin i.98, Vin i.164; Vin ii.259 Vin iv.19; SN ii.128 = SN ii.205; AN v.324; Dhp-a i.54.
2. to act against, provide for, beware, be cautious Ja iv.166. 3. to imitate Ja ii.406 ■ ger. paṭikacca (q.v.) ■ pp paṭikata (q.v.).
paṭi + karoti
(nt.) drawing back, in phrase mūlāya p. “throwing back to the beginning, causing to begin over & over again” Vin ii.7, Vin ii.162; AN i.99.
paṭi + kṛṣ
to draw back, remove, throw back Vin i.320 (mūlāya); ii.7 (id.).
paṭi + kassati
(f.) a (white) woollen cloth (: uṇṇāmayo set’ attharako DN-a i.86; DN i.7; AN i.137, AN i.181; AN iii.50; AN iv.94, AN iv.231, AN iv.394; Dāvs v.36 See also paṭiya.
Sk. paṭikā dial. fr. paṭa cloth
counteraction, remedy, requital Sdhp 201, Sdhp 498; usually neg. app˚; adj. not making good or which cannot be made good, which cannot be helped Vin iv.218 (= anosārita p. 219); Pv-a 274 (maraṇa Cp. foll.
paṭi + kṛ;
(adj.) of the nature of an amendment; app˚; not making amends, not making good Ja v.418.
fr. preceding
inferior, low, vile AN i.286 = Dhp i.144; in meaning “miserable” at Dhp-a ii.3 is perhaps better to be read with v.l. as pakkiliṭṭha, or should it be paṭikuṭṭha?
(nt.) wrong doing in return, retaliation Ja iii.135.
paṭi + kibbisa
to strew about, to sprawl Pv iv.108 (uttānā paṭikirāma = vikirīyamān’angā viya vattāma Pv-a 271).
paṭi + kirati
(adj.) very miserable Pv-a 268 (v.l.); and perhaps at Dhp-a ii.3 for paṭikiṭṭha (q.v.).
paṭi + kiliṭṭha
to bend over, in or against, to cover over, to enclose DN ii.162; MN i.30; AN iii.58. Caus. ˚eti Ja i.50, Ja i.69 ■ pp. paṭikujjita (q.v.).
paṭi + kubj, see kujja & cp. patikuṭati
(nt.) covering, in ˚phalaka covering board, seat Kp-a 62 (vacca-kuṭiyā).
fr. paṭi + kubj
covered over, enclosed AN i.141; Thag 681; Ja i.50, Ja i.69; Ja v.266; Pv i.1013 (= upari pidahita Pv-a 52); Dhs-a 349.
pp. of paṭikujjeti
to be angry in return SN i.162 = Thag 442.
paṭi + krudh
to turn in or over, to bend, cramp or get cramped; fig to shrink from, to refuse AN iv.47 sq. (v.l. ˚kujjati) Mil 297 (pati˚; cp. Mil trslnii.156); Vism 347 (v.l. BB; T. ˚kuṭṭati); Dhp-a i.71; Dhp-a ii.42 ■ Caus. patikoṭṭeti (q.v.) ■ pp. paṭikuṭita (q.v.). See also paṭilīyati.
paṭi + kuṭ; as in kuṭila, cp. kuc & paṭikujjati
bent back, turned over (?) Vin ii.195 (reading uncertain, vv.ll. paṭikuṭṭiya paṭikuṭiya).;
pp. of paṭikuṭati
scolded, scorned, defamed blameworthy, miserable, vile Vin i.317; Pv-a 268 (v.l. paṭikiliṭṭha); as neg. app˚; blameless, faultless SN iii.71 SN iii.73; AN iv.246; Kv 141, 341. See also paṭikiṭṭha.
pp. of paṭi + kruś, see paṭikkosati & cp. BSk. pratikruṣṭa poor Divy 500
(adj.) bent, crooked Pv-a 123 (v.l. kuṇita & kuṇḍita).;
for ˚kuṭita?
= pariguṇṭhita (q.v.); covered, surrounded Ja vi.89.
cp. kuṇṭhita
a sort of bird Ja vi.538.
or uncertain etym.; paṭi + kuttaka?
the part of the carriage-pole nearest to the horse(?) AN iv.191.
paṭi + kubbara
(f.) reluctance, loathsomeness MN i.30; AN v.64 Other forms are paṭikūlatā, pāṭikkūlyatā, & pāṭikulyā (q.v.).;
fr. paṭikūla, perhaps better to write patikkulyatā
(nt.) cheating in return Ja ii.183.
paṭi + kūṭa1
(f.) disgustiveness Vism 343 sq.
fr. paṭikkūla
see parikeḷanā; i.e. counter-playing Dhp i.286.
to bend away, to make refrain from MN i.115; SN ii.265 (cp. id. p. AN iv.47 with trs. ˚kuṭati & v.l. ˚kujjati which may be a legitimate variant). The T. prints pati˚.;
paṭi + koṭṭeti as Caus. of kuṭati
to shake, disturb, break (fig.) Ja v.173 (uposathaṃ).
paṭi + kopeti
gone back from (-˚), returned (opp. abhi˚) DN i.70 (abhikkanta + ); AN ii.104 AN ii.106 sq., 210; Pv iv.143 (cp. Pv-a 240); DN-a i.183 (= nivattana); Vv-a 6 (opp. abhi˚) Pv-a 11 (piṇḍapāta˚), 16 (id.). For opp. of paṭikkanta in conn. with piṇḍāya see paviṭṭha.
pp. of paṭikkamati
one who has come or is coming back Dhp-a i.307.
fr. last
going back Pv iv.12 (+ abhikkama = “going forward and backward”; cp. Pv-a 219).
fr. paṭi + kram
to step backwards, to return (opp. abhi˚) Vin ii.110, Vin ii.208; MN i.78; SN i.200, SN i.226 SN ii.282; Snp 388 (ger. ˚kkamma = nivattitvā Snp-a 374) Snp-a 53 ■ Caus. paṭikkamāpeti to cause to retreat Ja i.214; Mil 121 ■ pp. paṭikkanta (q.v.).
paṭi + kram
(nt.) returning, retiring, going back Dhp i.95; in ˚sālā meaning “a hall with seats of distinction” Snp-a 53.
fr. paṭikkamati
(adj.) lit. against the slope; averse, objectionable, contrary, disagreeable Vin i.58 (˚kūla) DN iii.112, DN iii.113; MN i.341 (dukkha˚); SN iv.172 (id.) Ja i.393; Vv-a 92 (K.); Pv-a 77; Vb-a 250 sq ■ app˚ without objection, pleasant, agreeable Vv 532 (K.) Vism 70 (k) ■ nt. ˚ṃ loathsomeness, impurity Vv-a 232. See also abstr. pāṭikkūlyatā (paṭi˚).
-gāhitā as neg. a˚ “refraining from contradiction (Dhs trsln) Pp 24 (k.); Dhs 1327 (k.). -manasikāra realisation of the impurity of the body Dhp-a ii.87 (˚kkula); Vb-a 251. -saññā (āhāre) the consciousness of the impurity of material food DN iii.289, DN iii.291; SN v.132; AN iv.49; adj. ˚saññin SN i.227; SN v.119, SN v.317; AN iii.169.
paṭi + kūla
to blame, reject, revile, scorn Vin i.115; Vin ii.93; MN iii.29; DN i.53 (= paṭibāhati DN-a i.160); SN iv.118 (+ apavadati); Snp 878; Dhp 164; Ja iv.163; Mil 131, Mil 256; Dhp-a iii.194 (opp. abhinandati)-pp. paṭikuṭṭha (q.v.).
paṭi + kruś
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) protest Vin i.321; Vin ii.102 (a˚).
fr. paṭikkosati
to look forward to, to expect Snp 697 (paṭikkhaṃ sic ppr. = āgamayanā Snp-a 490).
paṭi + īks
refused, rejected DN i.142; MN i.78, MN i.93; AN i.296; AN ii.206; Ja ii.436; Ne 161, Ne 185 sq. Dhp-a ii.71.
pp. of paṭikkhipati
to reject, refuse, object to, oppose Ja i.67; Ja iv.105; Mil 195; DN-a i.290; Dhp-a i.45 Dhp-a ii.75; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 114, Pv-a 151, Pv-a 214 (aor. ˚khipi = vāresi)- appaṭikkhippa (grd.) not to be rejected Ja ii.370. Contrasted to samādiyati Vism 62, Vism 64 & passim.;
paṭi + khipati
opposition, negation, contrary Snp-a 228 for “na”), 502; Pv-a 189 (˚vacana the opp expression). ˚to (abl.) in opposition or contrast to Pv-a 24.
fr. paṭi + kṣip
forgiven Dhp-a ii.78.
pp. of paṭi + khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati
see paṭikacca.
to give up, leave behind Ja iv.482 (gehaṃ); cp. paccagū.
only as neg. appaṭi˚; (q.v.).
(f.) counter-stanza, response Snp-a 340. Cp. paccanīka-gāthā.
paṭi + gāthā
a firm stand or foothold AN iii.297 sq.; Pp 72 = Kv 389. Patigayati (gati)
paṭi + gādha2
to sing in response, to reply by a song Ja iv.395 (imper. ˚gāhi ).
paṭi + gāyati
(adj.) greedy; hankering after Snp 675 (Snp-a 482 reads ˚giddha and explns by mahāgijjha).
paṭi + gijjha, a doublet of giddha, see gijjha2
(nt.) a song in response, counter song Ja iv.393. Patiguhati (guhati)
paṭi + gīta
to concert, keep back Cp i.918.
paṭi + gūhati
(adj.-n.) receiving, receiver Pv-a 175. Patigganhati (patiganhati)
paṭiggaṇhana (= paṭiggahaṇa) + ka
to receive, accept, take (up) DN i.110 (vatthaṃ), 142; Vin i.200 Vin ii.109, Vin ii.116 (a sewing-needle); SN iv.326 (jātarūpa-rajataṃ); Snp 479, Snp 689, Snp 690; Dhp 220; Ja i.56, Ja i.65; DN-a i.236; Pv-a 47. In special phrase accayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) a sin, to pardon a sin Vin ii.192; DN i.85; MN i.438; Ja v.379 ■ pp. paṭiggahita (q.v.) ■ Caus. ˚ggaheti Vin ii.213; MN i.32.
paṭi + gaṇhāti
1. receiving, acceptance; one who receives, recipient Ja i.146; Ja ii.9; Ja vi.474; Pv iii.111
2. friendly reception Ja vi.526.
3. receptacle (for water etc.) Vin ii.115, Vin ii.213 (udaka˚).
4. a thimble Vin ii.116.
fr. paṭiggaṇhāti
(nt.) acceptance, receiving, taking MN iii.34; SN v.472; Snp-a 341 ■ accaya˚ acceptance of a sin, i.e. pardon, absolution Ja v.380.
fr. paṭigganhāti
received, got, accepted, appropriated, taken Vin i.206, Vin i.214; Ja vi.231 ■ As appaṭiggahitaka (nt.) “that which is not received” at Vin iv.90.
pp. of paṭigganhāti
one who receives, recipient DN i.89.
n. ag. of paṭiggaṇhāti
see patiṭṭhāha.
(adj.-n.) receiving, accepting; one who receives, recipient Vin ii.213; DN i.138; AN i.161; AN ii.80 sq.; AN iii.42, AN iii.336; Ja i.56; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 128, Pv-a 175 (opp. dāyaka); Vv-a 195; Sdhp 268.
fr. paṭiggaṇhāti
(nt.) reception, taking in Ja vi.527.
fr. paṭiggaṇhāti
(m. & nt.) 1. (ethically) repulsion, repugnance anger DN i.25, DN i.34; DN iii.254, DN iii.282; SN i.13; SN iv.71, SN iv.195, SN iv.205 SN iv.208 sq.; SN v.315; AN i.3, AN i.87, AN i.200; Snp 371, Snp 536; Dhs 1060; Mil 44; DN-a i.22.
2. (psychologically) sensory reaction DN iii.224, DN iii.253, DN iii.262; SN i.165, SN i.186; AN i.41, AN i.267 AN ii.184; Dhs 265, Dhs 501, Dhs 513, Dhs 579; Vb-a 19. See on term Dhs trsln 72, 204, 276 and passim ■ appaṭigha see separately s. v. Note. How shall we read paṭighaṭṭha nānighaṃso at Dhs-a 308? (paṭigha-ṭṭhāna-nighaṃso or paṭighaṭṭana-nighaṃso?)
paṭi + gha, adj. suffix of; ghan = han, lit. striking against
(adj.) full of repugnance, showing anger SN iv.208, SN iv.209.
fr. paṭigha
1. (lit.) warding off, staying, repulsion, beating off DN iii.130; MN i.10; AN i.98; AN iv.106 sq.; Ja i.344; Vism 31 (= paṭihanana); Mil 121; Dhp-a ii.8; Pv-a 33.
2. (psych. resentment Dhs 1060, cp. Dhs trsl. 282.
paṭi + ghāta, of same root as paṭigha
echo Vism 554.
paṭi + ghosa
in ˚gataṃ sallaṃ at Ja vi.78 to be expld not with C. as from paṭi + camati (cam to wash, cp. ācamati) which does not agree with the actual meaning, but according to Kern, Toev. ii.29, s. v. as elliptical for paṭibhinna-camma, i.e. piercing the skin so as to go right through (to the opp. side) which falls in with the C. expln “vāmapassena pavisitvā dakkhiṇapassena viniggatan ti.”
& (paṭiccaya) adding to, heaping up, accumulation, increase Vin ii.74; Vin iii.158 (pati˚) SN iii.169; AN iii.376 sq. (v.l. pati˚); iv.355; v.336 sq. Thag 642; Ud 35 (pati˚); Mil 138.
paṭi + caya
1. to wander about, to deal with Mil 94.
2. to go about or evade (a question), to obscure a matter of discussion, in phrase aññena aññaṃ p. “to be saved by another in another way,” or to from one (thing) to another, i.e. to receive a diff, answer to what is asked DN i.94; Vin iv.35; MN i.96, MN i.250, MN i.442; AN iv.168 (v.l. paṭivadati); expld at DN-a i.264 by ajjhottharati paṭicchādeti “to cover over,” i.e. to conceal (a question). See on expression Dialogues i.116.
paṭi + carati
to nudge Ja v.434.
Caus. of paṭicalati
intercourse, visit, dealing with Mil 94.
fr. paṭi + car
(nt.) rebuking, scolding (back) Dhs-a 393.
abstr. fr. paṭicodeti
to blame, reprove MN i.72; Vin iv.217; Ud 45.
paṭi + codeti
grounded on, on account of, concerning, because (with acc.) MN i.265 (etaṃ on these grounds); SN iii.93 = Iti 89 (atthavasaṃ); Ja ii.386 (= abhisandhāya); Snp 680, Snp 784 Snp 872, Snp 1046; Snp-a 357; Dhp-a i.4; Pv-a 64 (maraṇaṃ), 164 181 (kammaṃ), 207 (anuddayaṃ). See also foll.
-vinīta trained to look for causality MN iii.19. Paticca-samuppanna
ger. of pacceti, paṭi + i; cp. BSk. pratītya
evolved by reason of the law of causation DN iii.275; MN i.500; SN ii.26; AN v.187; Pts i.51 sq., 76 sq.; Vb 340, Vb 362. Cp. BSk pratitya samutpanna Mvu iii.61. Paticca-samuppada
p. + samuppana
“arising on the grounds of (a preceding cause)” happening by way of cause working of cause & effect, causal chain of causation causal genesis, dependent origination, theory of the twelve causes ■ See on this Mrs. Rh. D. in Buddhism 90 f., Ency. Rel. & Ethics,; s. v. & KS ii., preface Cpd. p. 260 sq. with diagram of the “Wheel of Life” Pts. of Controversy, 390 f ■ The general formula runs thus: Imasmiṃ sati, idaṃ hoti, imass’ uppādā, idaṃ uppajjati; imasmiṃ asati, idaṃ na hoti; imassa nirodhā, idaṃ nirujjhati. This being, that becomes from the arising of this, that arises; this not becoming, that does not become: from the ceasing of this, that ceases MN ii.32; SN ii.28 etc. The term usually occurs applied to dukkha in a famous formula which expresses the Buddhist doctrine of evolution, the respective stages of which are conditioned by a preceding cause & constitute themselves the cause of resulting effect, as working out the next state of the evolving (shall we say) “individual” or “being,” in short the bearer of evolution. The respective links in this chain which to study & learn is the first condition for a “Buddhist” to an understanding of life, and the cause of life, and which to know forward and backward (anuloma-paṭilomaṃ manas’ âkāsi Vin i.1) is indispensable for the student, are as follows. The root of all primary cause of all existence, is avijjā ignorance; this produces saṅkhārā: karma, dimly conscious elements capacity of impression or predisposition (will, action Cpd.; synergies Mrs. Rh. D.), which in their turn give rise to viññāṇa thinking substance (consciousness Cpd.; cognition Mrs. Rh. D.), then follow in succession the foll. stages: nāmarūpa individuality (mind & body animated organism Cpd.; name & form Mrs. Rh. D.); saḷāyatana the senses (6 organs of sense Cpd.; the sixfold sphere Mrs. Rh. D.), phassa contact, vedanā feeling, taṇhā thirst for life (craving), upādāna clinging to existence or attachment (dominant idea Cpd.; grasping Mrs. Rh. D.), bhava (action or character Cpd.; renewed existence Mrs. Rh. D.), jāti birth (rebirth conception Cpd.), jarāmaraṇa (+ soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass’ ûpayāsā) old age & death (+ tribulation grief, sorrow, distress & despair). The BSk. form is pratītya-samutpāda, e.g. at Divy 300, Divy 547.;
The Paṭicca-samuppāda is also called the Nidāna (“basis,” or “ground,” i.e. cause) doctrine, or the Paccay’ ākāra (“related-condition”), and is referred to in the Suttas as Ariya-ñāya (“the noble method or system”). The term paccay’ ākāra is late and occurs only in Abhidhamma-literature ■ The oldest account is found in the Mahāpadāna Suttanta of the Dīgha Nikāya (D ii.30 sq.; cp. Dial. ii.24 sq.), where 10 items form the constituents of the chain, and are given in backward order, reasoning from the appearance of dukkha in this world of old age and death towards the original cause of it in viññāṇa. The same chain occurs again at SN ii.104 sq ■ A later development shows 12 links, viz. avijjā and saṅkhārā added to precede viññāṇa (as above). Thus at SN ii.5 sq ■ A detailed exposition of the P ■ s. in Abhidhamma literature is the exegesis given by Bdhgh at Vism xvii. (pp. 517–586 under the title of Paññā-bhūmi-niddesa), and at Vb-a 130
213 under the title of Paccayākāra-vibhanga. Some passages selected for ref.: Vin i.1 sq.; MN i.190 MN i.257; SN i.136; SN ii.1 sq., 26 sq., 42 sq., 70, 92 sq., 113 sq. Ai.177; v.184; Sn. 653; Ud 1 sq.; Pts i.50 sq.; 144 Ne 22, Ne 24, Ne 32, Ne 64 sq.; DN-a i.125, DN-a i.126.
-kusala skilled in the (knowledge of the) chain of causation MN iii.63; Nd i.171; f. abstr. ˚kusalatā DN iii.212.
p. + samuppāda, BSk. prātītyasamutpāda, e.g. Divy 300, Divy 547
(adj.) [fr. paṭicchati) receiving Ja vi.287.
to accept, receive, take AN iii.243 (udakaṃ); Vin iv.18; Thig 421; Ja i.233; Ja ii.432 Ja iii.171; Ja iv.137; Ja v.197; Dhp-a iii.271 ■ pp. paṭicchita (q.v.). Caus. II. paṭicchāpeti to entrust, dedicate, give Ja i.64, Ja i.143, Ja i.159, Ja i.383, Ja i.506; Ja ii.133; Pv-a 81.
paṭi + icchati of iṣ2; cp. BSk. pratīcchati Divy 238 and sampaṭicchati
covered, concealed, hidden Vin ii.40; AN i.282; Snp 126, Snp 194; Pv i.102 (kesehi = paṭicchādita Pv-a 48); ii.102 (kesehi); DN-a i.276, DN-a i.228; Snp-a 155; Kp-a 53; Vb-a 94 (˚dukkha) Pv-a 43, Pv-a 103. -appaṭicchanna unconcealed, open, unrestrained Vin ii.38; Ja i.207.
-kammanta of secret doing, one who acts underhand or conceals his actions AN ii.239; Snp 127.
pp. of paṭicchādeti
in appaṭicchavi at Pv ii.113 read with v.l. as sampatitacchavi.
1. covering, clothes, clothing Pv ii.116 (= vattha Pv-a 76).
2. deceiving, hiding concealment, deception Snp 232.
fr. paṭi + chad
= prec. Dhs-a 51.
(nt.) covering, hiding, concealment MN i.10; AN iii.352; Vb 357 = Snp-a 180.
fr. paṭicchādeti
(nt.) the flavour of meat, flavouring, meat broth or gravy Vin i.206, Vin i.217; Mil 291.
fr. paṭicchādeti
covered, concealed, hidden Ja vi.23 (= paṭisanthata Pv-a 48.
pp. of paṭicchādeti, cp. paṭicchanna
(f.) 1. covering, protection Vin ii.122.
2. antidote, remedy, medicine (or a cloth to protect the itch) Vin i.296; Vin iv.171.
fr. paṭicchādeti
1. to cover over, conceal, hide SN i.70, SN i.161; DN-a i.264; Vv-a 65 (dhanaṃ); Kp-a 191; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 88, Pv-a 142 (kesehi), 194 (= parigūhati).
2. to clothe oneself Vin i.46.
3. to dress (surgically), to treat (a wound) MN i.220.
4. to conceal or evade (a question) DN-a i.264 ■ pp. paṭicchādita & paṭicchanna; (q.v.).
paṭi + chādeti, Caus. of chad
accepted, taken up Snp 803 (pl. ˚tāse, cp. Nd i.113 & Snp-a 531).;
pp. of paṭicchati
(adj.) fostering, nursing, taking care of Ja v.111.
fr. paṭijaggati
lit. to watch over, i.e. to nourish, tend, feed look after, take care of, nurse Dhp 157; Ja i.235, Ja i.375 Ja ii.132, Ja ii.200, Ja ii.436; Vism 119; Dhp-a i.8, Dhp-a i.45, Dhp-a i.99, Dhp-a i.392; Dhp-a iv.154; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 43 ■ pp. paṭijaggita (q.v.) ■ Caus. ˚jaggāpeti.
paṭi + jaggati, cp. BSk. pratijāgarti Divy 124, Divy 306
(nt.) rearing, fostering, tending; attention, care Ja i.148; Mil 366; Dhp-a i.27 Dhp-a ii.96.
fr. paṭijaggati
(adj.) to be reared or brought up Ja vi.73 (putta).
fr. paṭijaggana
to make look after or tend Vism 74.
Caus. II. of paṭijaggati
reared, cared for, looked after, brought up Ja v.274, Ja v.331.
pp. of paṭijaggati
(adj.) to be nursed Dhp-a i.319.
grd. of paṭijaggati
to acknowledge, agree to, approve, promise, consent DN i.3, DN i.192; SN i.68, SN i.172; SN ii.170; SN iii.28 SN v.204, SN v.423; Snp 76, Snp 135, Snp 555, Snp 601, Snp 1148; Ja i.169; Dhp-a i.21; Pv-a 223 (pot. paṭiññeyya), 226 (id.), 241; ger paṭiññāya Vin ii.83 (a˚) ■ pp. paṭiññāta (q.v.).
paṭi + jānāti
(-˚) in phrase jīva-paṭijīvaṃ at Ja ii.15 is to be taken as a sort of redupl. cpd. of jīva, the imper. of jīvati “live,” as greeting. We might translate “the greeting with ʻjīvaʼ and reciprocating it.”
(adj.) acknowledged; making belief, quâsi-; in phrase samaṇa˚; a quâsi-Samaṇa, pretending to be a Samaṇa AN i.126; AN ii.239; cp. Sakyaputtiya˚ SN ii.272; sacca˚ Ja iv.384, Ja iv.463; Ja v.499.
= paṭiññā
(f.) acknowledgment, agreement, promise, vow, consent, permission DN iii.254; Ja i.153; Pv iv.112, 144; Mil 7; Dhp-a ii.93; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 123; Snp-a 397, Snp-a 539 ■ patiññaṃ moceti to keep one’s promise Dhp-a i.93.
fr. paṭi + jñā; cp. later Sk. pratijñā
agreed, acknowledged, promised Vin ii.83, Vin ii.102; DN i.88; AN i.99; AN iv.144; Pv-a 55.
pp. of paṭijānāti
(adj.) satisfied, happy Dhp-a ii.269 (˚ācāra) Patititthati (patitthahati)
etc. see pati˚.
(nt.) opposite bank (of a river) Ja v.443.
paṭi + tittha
to stand firm (against) Mil 372.
paṭi + thambhati
retribution Dhp 133, cp. Dhp-a iii.57, Dhp-a iii.58.
paṭi + daṇḍa
to give back, to restore Ja i.177; Ja iv.411 (˚diyyare); Pv-a 276 (ger. ˚datvā).
paṭi + dadāti
to show oneself or to appear again, to reappear Pv iii.227.
paṭi + dasseti
(nt.) reward, restitution, gift Pv-a 80.
paṭi + dāna
(f.) an opposite (counter-) point of the compass, opposite quarter DN iii.176 (disā ca p. ca vidisā ca).
paṭi + disā
to be seen, to appear Ja iii.47 = Pv-a 281; Snp 123; Ja iv.139; Snp-a 172.
paṭi + dissati; usually spelt pati˚
(f.) the fact of being afflicted again with súffering Mil 180.
paṭi + abstr. of dukkhāpeti, Caus ■ Denom. fr. dukkha
to confess Vin ii.102. See also pāṭidesaniya.
paṭi + deseti
to run back to (acc.) MN i.265 ≈ SN ii.26 (pubbanṭaṃ; opp. aparantaṃ ādhāvati M, upadhāvati S); Sdhp 167.
paṭi + dhāvati
to accept gladly, to greet in return SN i.189.
paṭi + nandati
rejoicing or rejoiced; greeted, welcomed Snp 452 (pati˚); Ja vi.14, Ja vi.412.
pp. of paṭi + nand
(f.) a false nose Ja i.455, Ja i.457.
paṭi + nāsikā
(adj.) appeased again Ja vi.414.
paṭi + nijjhatta
coming back upon a subject Ne 5.
paṭi + niddesa
to turn back again Vin i.216; Ja i.225; Mil 120, Mil 152 (of disease), 246; Pv-a 100, Pv-a 126 ■ Caus. ˚nivatteti to make turn back Pv-a 141; C. on AN iii.28 (see paccāsāreti).
paṭi + nivattati
(nt.) a dress given in return Vin i.46 = Vin ii.223.
paṭi + nivāsana1
giving up, forsaking; rejection, renunciation Vin iii.173; MN iii.31; SN v.421 sq.; AN i.100, AN i.299; AN iv.148, AN iv.350; Pts i.194 (two p., viz. pariccāga˚ and pakkhandana˚) Pp 19, Pp 21, Pp 22 ■ ādāna˚ SN v.24; AN v.233, AN v.253 sq.; upadhi˚ Iti 46, Iti 62; sabbûpadhi˚ SN i.136; SN iii.133 SN v.226; AN i.49; AN v.8, AN v.110, AN v.320 sq.; ˚ânupassanā Pts ii.44 sq.; ˚ânupassin MN iii.83; SN iv.211; SN v.329; AN iv.88, AN iv.146 sq.; AN v.112, AN v.359.
paṭi + nissagga of nissajjati, nis + sṛj, Cp. BSk. pratinisarga Avs ii.118, pratiniḥsarga ib. ii.194 Mvu ii.549; pratinissagga Mvu iii.314, Mvu iii.322.
(adj.) giving up, renouncing, or being given up, to be renounced, only in cpd. duppaṭi˚; (sup˚) hard (easy) to renounce DN iii.45; MN i.96; AN iii.335; AN v.150.
fr. paṭinissagga
to give up, renounce, forsake Vin iii.173 sq. Vin iv.294; SN ii.110; AN v.191 sq ■ ger. paṭinissajja SN i.179; AN iv.374 sq.; Snp 745, Snp 946 (cp. Nd i.430) ■ pp. paṭinissaṭṭha (q.v.).
paṭi + nissajjati, cp. BSk. pratinisṛjati Avs ii.190
given up, forsaken (act & pass.), renouncing or having renounced Vin iii.95 Vin iv.27, Vin iv.137; MN i.37; SN ii.283; AN ii.41; Iti 49; Nd i.430 Nd i.431 (vanta pahīna p.); Pv-a 256.
pp. of paṭinissajjati, BSk. pratiniḥsṛṣṭa Divy 44 and ˚nisṛṣṭa Divy 275
to depart, escape from, to be freed from Ne 113 (= niyyāti vimuccati C.).
paṭi + nissarati
to lead back to (acc.) Vv 5217; Thig 419; Pv ii.1221 (imper. ˚nayāhi); Pv-a 145, Pv-a 160.
paṭi + neti
(adj.-n.) opposed, opposite; (m.) an enemy, opponent (cp. pratipakṣa obstacle Divy 352) Nd i.397; Ja i.4, Ja i.224; Ne 3, Ne 112, Ne 124; Vism 4; Dhp-a i.92; Snp-a 12, Snp-a 21, Snp-a 65, Snp-a 168, Snp-a 234, Snp-a 257, Snp-a 545; Pv-a 98; Dhs-a 164; Sdhp 211, Sdhp 452.
paṭi + pakkha
(adj.) opposed, inimical Sdhp 216.
fr. paṭipakkha
to enter upon (a path), to go along, follow out (a way or plan) to go by; fig. to take a line of action, to follow a method to be intent on, to regulate one’s life DN i.70 (saṃvarāya) 175 (tathattāya); SN ii.98 (kantāramaggaṃ); iv.63 (dhammass’ anudhammaṃ); v.346 (id.); iv.194 (maggaṃ); AN i.36 (dhammânudhammaṃ); ii.4; Snp 317, Snp 323 Snp 706, Snp 815, Snp 1129 (cp. Nd ii.384); Dhp 274 (maggaṃ); Pp 20 (saṃvarāya); Pv-a 43 (maggaṃ), 44 (ummaggaṃ), 196 (dhanaṃ); Sdhp 30.
3rd sg. aor. paccāpādi Ja iv.314-ger. pajjitabba to be followed Pv-a 126 (vidhi), 131 (id.), 281 ■ pp. paṭipanna (q.v.) ■ Caus. paṭipādeti (q.v.).
paṭi + pad, cp. BSk. pratipadyate
(nt.) a way or plan to be followed, procedure, in ˚vidhi method, line of action Pv-a 131 (v.l. BB), 133.
fr. paṭipajjati
to make turn back, to send back, ward off, chase away MN i.327 (siriṃ) SN iv.152 (ābādhaṃ); Mil 17 (sakaṭāni).
paṭi + pa + Caus. of nam
(nt.) a letter in return, a written reply Ja i.409.
paṭi + paṇṇa
(f.) “way,” method, conduct, practice, performance, behaviour, example AN i.69 AN v.126 (dhammânudhamma˚), 136; Pts ii.15; Nd i.143 Nd ii.s. v.; Mil 131, Mil 242; Dhp-a ii.30; Dhp-a iv.34 (sammā good or proper behaviour); Pv-a 16 (parahita˚), 54, 67; DN-a i.270; Sdhp 28, Sdhp 29, Sdhp 37, Sdhp 40, Sdhp 213, Sdhp 521.
fr. paṭi + pad
a confronting road, opposite way Vin ii.193 (˚ṃ gacchati to go to meet); iii.131; iv.268; Mil 9; Vism 92; Dhp-a ii.88.
paṭi + patha
(f.) means of reaching a goal or destination, path, way, means, method, mode of progress (cp. Dhs. trsln 53, 82, 92, 143), course, practice (cp. BSk. pratipad in meaning of pratipatti “line of conduct” Avs ii.140 with note) DN i.54 (dvatti p.), 249 (way to); SN ii.81 (nirodhasāruppa-gāminī p.); iv.251 (bhaddikā), 330 (majjhimā) v.304 (sabbattha-gāminī) 361 (udaya-gāminī sotāpatti˚), 421; DN iii.288 (ñāṇadassana-visuddhi˚); AN i.113, AN i.168 (puñña˚) ii.76, 79, 152 (akkhamā); Vb 99, Vb 104 sq., 211 sq., 229 sq., 331 sq-In pregnant sense The path (of the Buddha), leading to the destruction of all ill & to the bliss of Nibbāna (see specified under magga, ariyamagga, sacca), thus a quâsi synonym of magga with which freq. comb;d (e.g DN i.156) Vin i.10; DN i.157; DN iii.219 (anuttariya); MN ii.11; MN iii.251, MN iii.284; SN i.24 (daḷhā yāya dhīrā pamuccanti); AN i.295 sq. (āgālhā nijjhāmā majjhimā); Snp 714 (cp. Snp-a 497), 921; Pts ii.147 (majjhimā); Ne 95 sq. Pp 15, Pp 68; Vv-a 84 (˚sankhāta ariyamagga). Specified in various ways as follows: āsava-nirodha-gāminī p DN i.84; dukkha-nirodha-g˚. DN i.84, DN i.189; DN iii.136; SN v.426 sq.; AN i.177; Pts i.86, Pts i.119; Dhs 1057; lokanirodha-g˚ AN ii.23; Iti 121; with the epithets sammā anuloma˚ apaccanīka˚ anvattha˚ dhammânudhamma Nd i.32, Nd i.143, Nd i.365; Nd ii.384 etc. (see detail under sammā˚)-There are several groups of 4 paṭipadā mentioned, viz (a) dukkhā dandhâbhiññā, sukhā & khippâbhiññā dandh˚ & khipp˚, i.e. painful practice resulting in knowledge slowly acquired & quickly acquired, pleasant practice resulting in the same way DN iii.106; AN ii.149 sq., 154; v.63; Snp-a 497; (b) akkhamā, khamā damā & samā p. i.e. want of endurance, endurance self-control, equanimity.;
fr. paṭi + pad
(having) followed or following up, reaching, going along or by (i.e. practising), entering on, obtaining SN ii.69; SN iv.252; AN i.120 (arahattāya); iv.292 sq. (id.), 372 sq.; Iti 81 (dhammânudhamma˚); Snp 736; Dhp 275 (maggaṃ); Vv 3423 (= maggaṭṭha one who has entered the path Vv-a 154) = Pv iv.349 Pp 63; Mil 17; DN-a i.26; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 112 (maggaṃ), 130 174 (sammā˚), 242; (dhammiyaṃ paṭipadaṃ); Dhp-a i.233 (magga˚ on the road, wandering).
pp. of paṭipajjati
(adj. n.) one who has entered upon the Path (ariyamagga) Pp 13 (= maggaṭṭhaka phalatthāya paṭipannattā p. nāma PugA 186); Mil 342 Mil 344; Ne 50; Dhs-a 164. See also Mil trsl. ii.231, 237.
fr. paṭipanna
to turn back or round once more MN i.133.
paṭi + p.
gone inside again Snp 979.
pp. of paṭipavisati
to go in(to) again; Caus. ˚paveseti to make go in again, to put back (inside again Vin i.276 ■ pp. paṭipaviṭṭha (q.v.).
paṭi + pavisati
to praise back or in return Ja ii.439.
paṭi + pasaṃsati
to strike in return Dhp-a i.51.
paṭi + paharati
to send back (in return) Dhp-a i.216.
paṭi + pahinati
(adj.) restored, set right again, safe and sound Ja iii.167 (= pākatika at Pv-a 66) iv.407; vi.372; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 284.
paṭi + pākatika
(f.) order, succession Vin i.248 (bhatta˚); Vism 411 (khandha˚); usually in abl. paṭipāṭiyā adv. successively, in succession, alongside of, in order Vism 343 = Ja v.253 (ghara˚ from house to house) Thag-a 80 (magga˚); Dhp-a i.156; Dhp-a ii.89; Dhp-a iii.361; Snp-a 23 Snp-a 506; Pv-a 54; Vv-a 76, Vv-a 137.
paṭi + pāṭi
(adj.) being in conformity with the (right) order Thag-a 41.
fr. last
the supporter (of a bed) Vin i.48; Vin ii.208.
fr. paṭi + pad
to impart, bring into give to, offer, present MN i.339; Ja v.453, Ja v.497; Pv ii.81 (vittaṃ).
Caus. of paṭipajjati, cp. BSk. pratipādayati in same meaning Avs i.262, Avs i.315
to beat against SN ii.98 (ure); Ja vi.87; Vism 504 (urāni).
paṭi + piṃsati
alms in return Ja ii.307; Ja v.390 (piṇḍa˚ giving & taking of alms); Mil 370.
paṭi + piṇḍa
in asuci˚; at AN iii.226 is not clear (v.l. ˚pīḷita perhaps to be preferred).
(nt.) oppression Mil 313, Mil 352.
fr. paṭipīḷeti
(adj.) pressed against, oppressed, hard pressed Mil 262, Mil 354.
paṭi + pp. of pīḍ
a person equal to another, compeer, match, rival MN i.171 = Mil 235; SN i.158; Snp 544; Iti 123 (natthi te paṭipuggala) ■ appaṭipuggala without a rival, unrivalled, without compare SN i.158 SN iii.86; Thig 185; Ja i.40; Mil 239 (cp. Mil trsl. ii.43).
paṭi + puggala
(adj.) belonging to one’s equal, individual Dhs 1044. Perhaps read pāṭi˚ (q.v.).
fr. paṭipuggala
to ask (in return), to put a question to, to inquire DN i.60; MN i.27; SN iii.2; Snp p.92; Ja i.170; Ja iv.194; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 56, Pv-a 81; AN i.197; AN ii.46; also neg. appaṭipucchā (abl. adv.) without inquiry Vin i.325.
paṭi + pucchati
(f.) a question in return, inquiry; only ˚-(as abl.) by question, by inquiry, by means of question & answer in foll. cpds.: ˚karaṇīya Vin i.325 ˚vinīta AN i.72; ˚vyākaraṇīya (pañha) DN iii.229.
paṭi + pucchā
a rival, opponent Nd i.172.
paṭi + purisa
(nt.) or ˚ā (f.) worship, reverence, honour Mil 241.
fr. paṭi + pūj
to honour, worship, revere Snp 128; Pv i.13; Mil 241.
paṭi + pūjeti
to send out to Pv-a 20.
paṭi + peseti
to bend (back), stretch out Dhs-a 324.
paṭi + paṇāmeti
allayed, calmed, quieted, subsided SN iv.217, SN iv.294; SN v.272; AN i.254 AN ii.41; Ja iii.37, Ja iii.148; Ja iv.430; Pts ii.2; Pp 27; Kp-a 185; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 245, Pv-a 274. Note. The BSk. form is pratiprasrabdha Divy 265.
pp. of paṭippassambhati
(f.) subsidence, calming, allaying, quieting down, repose, complete ease Vin i.331 (kammassa suppression of an act); Pts ii.3 Pts ii.71, Pts ii.180; Ne 89; Dhs 40, Dhs 41, Dhs 320; Snp-a 9. Esp frequent in the Niddesas in stock phrase expressing the complete calm attained to in emancipation, viz. vūpasama paṭinissagga p. amata nibbāna, e.g. Nd ii.429.
fr. paṭippassaddha
to subside, to be eased, calmed, or abated to pass away, to be allayed SN i.211; SN v.51; aor. ˚ssambhi Dhp-a ii.86 (dohaḷo); iv.133 (ābādho) ■ pp. paṭippassaddha (q.v.) ■ Caus. paṭippassambheti to quiet down, hush up, suppress, bring to a standstill, put to rest, appease Vin i.49 (kammaṃ), 144 (id.), 331 (id.) ii.5 (id.), 226 (id.); MN i.76; Ja iii.28 (dohaḷaṃ).
paṭi + ppa + sambhati of śrambh. Note however that the BSk. is ˚praśrambhyati as well as ˚srambhyati, e.g. Mvu i.253, Mvu i.254; Divy 68, Divy 138 Divy 494, Divy 549, Divy 568
(f.) & ˚ppassambhitatta (nt.) are exegetical (philosophical) synonyms of paṭippassaddhi at Dhs 40, Dhs 41, Dhs 320.
to effulge, shine forth, stream out, emit, fig. splurt out, bring against, object MN i.95 sq. AN iv.193 (codakaṃ); Ja i.123, Ja i.163; Nd i.196 (vādaṃ start a word-fight); Mil 372; Dhp-a iv.4 (vacanaṃ).
paṭi + pharati
(adj.) bound to, in fetters or bonds, attracted to or by, dependent on DN i.76; Vin iv.302 (kāya˚); AN v.87 (para˚); Dhp 284; Mil 102 (āvajjana˚); Pv-a 134 (˚jīvika dependent on him for a living) ■ Freq. in cpd. ˚citta affected enamoured, one’s heart bound in love Vin iii.128 Vin iv.18; Snp 37 (see Nd ii.385), 65; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 145 (˚tā f abstr.), 151, 159 (rañño with the king).
paṭi + baddha, pp. of bandh
(adj.) bound to, connected with, referring to Pts i.172, Pts i.184.
paṭi + bandha
to hold back, refuse Ja iv.134 (vetanaṃ na p. = aparihāpetvā dadāti).
paṭi + bandhati
a connection, a relation, relative Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136, Dhs 1230; Dhs-a 365.
paṭi + bandhu
(adj.) able, adequate, competent Vin i.56, Vin i.342; Vin ii.103, Vin ii.300; Vin iii.158; AN v.71; Mil 6.
paṭi + bala
(op)pressed, forced, urged Vb 338 = Mil 301.
pp. of paṭibāhati, though more likely to paṭi + vah2
antidote Mil 335; repelling, preventing Ja vi.571.
of paṭi + bādh
to ward off, keep off, shut out, hold back, refuse, withhold, keep out, evade Vin i.356; Vin ii.162, Vin ii.166 sq., 274; iv.288; Ja i.64, Ja i.217; Dhp-a ii.2 (rañño āṇaṃ), 89 (sītaṃ); Vv-a 68; Pv-a 96 (maraṇaṃ), 252, 286 (grd. appaṭibāhanīya) Caus. ˚bāheti in same meaning Ja iv.194; Dhp-a ii.71; Pv-a 54 ■ pp. paṭibāḷha (q.v.).
paṭi + *bāh of bahis adv. outside
exclusion, warding off, prevention Mil 81; Vism 244.
(adj.) to be kept off or averted, neg. ap˚; Ja iv.152.
grd. of paṭibāhati
(adj.) outside, excluded Vin ii.168.
paṭi + bāhira
(nt.) counterpart, image, reflection Vism 190; Vv-a 50; Vb-a 164.
paṭi + bimba
to wake up, to understand, know, AN iii.105 sq.; Thag-a 74; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 128 ■ pp paṭibuddha (q.v.).
paṭi + bujjhati
awakened, awake Snp 807.
pp. of paṭibujjhati
awaking, waking up Vv 5024.
fr. paṭi + budh, cp. paṭibujjhati
to divide MN iii.91.
paṭi + bhaj
merchandise in exchange, barter Ja i.377; Pv-a 277.
paṭi + bhaṇḍa, cp. BSk. pratipanya Divy 173, Divy 271, Divy 564
to abuse in return SN i.162 (bhaṇḍantaṃ p.); AN ii.215 (id.); Nd i.397 (id.).
paṭi + bhaṇḍati
fear, terror, fright SN iv.195; Pv-a 90; Dāvs iv.35. Freq. in cpd. ap˚ & sap˚, e.g. Vin iv.63; MN i.134; MN iii.61.
paṭi + bhaya
1. counterpart, likeness, resemblance Nd ii.s. v.; Vism 125 (˚nimitta, imitative mental reflex, memory-image); Snp-a 65, Snp-a 76, Snp-a 83, Snp-a 114, Snp-a 265; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 178, Pv-a 279.
2. rejoinder Ja vi.341 (pañha˚).
3 counterpart, opposite, contrary MN i.304 ■ appaṭibhāga (adj.) unequalled, incomparable, matchless Mil 357 (+ appaṭiseṭṭha); Dhp-a i.423 (= anuttara).
paṭi + bhāga
to appear, to be evident, to come into one’s mind, to occur to one, to be clear (cp. Vin Texts ii.30) SN i.155 (˚tu taṃ dhammikathā); v.153 (T reads patibbāti); Snp 450 (p. maṃ = mama bhāgo pakāsati Sna 399); Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386 (also fut. ˚bhāyissati); Ja v.410; Vv-a 78 = Vv-a 159 (maṃ p. ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchituṃ “I should like to ask a question”).
paṭi + bhā
(nt.) understanding, illumination, intelligence readiness or confidence of speech, promptitude, wit (see on term Vin. Texts iii.13, 172; Pts. of Controversy, 378 f. DN i.16, DN i.21, DN i.23; SN i.187; AN ii.135, AN ii.177, AN ii.230; AN iii.42 AN iv.163; AN v.96; Pts ii.150, Pts ii.157; Ja vi.150; Pp 42; Vb 293 sq.; Vb-a 338, Vb-a 394, Vb-a 467; Mil 21; DN-a i.106- appaṭibhāna (adj.) bewildered, not confident, cowed down Vin ii.78 = Vin iii.162; MN i.258; AN iii.57; Ja v.238 Ja v.369; Ja vi.362.
paṭi + bhāna. Cp. late Sk. pratibhāna, fr. Pali
(adj.) = paṭibhānavant Vin i.249 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.140) AN i.25.
ger. formation + ka fr. paṭibhāna
to address in return or in reply SN i.134; Snp 1024.
paṭi + bhās
(adj.) as neg. app˚; not to be touched, untouched; faultless Vin ii.248 (acchidda + ); AN v.79.
for paṭimassa = Sk. *pratimṛśya, ger. of prati + mṛś, cp. in consonants haṃsa for harṣa etc.
the way against, a confronting road; ˚ṃ gacchati to go to meet somebody Ja iv.133; Ja vi.127.
paṭi + magga, cp. similarly paṭipatha
decorated, adorned with Ja i.8, Ja i.41, Ja i.509; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 66, Pv-a 211.
pp. of paṭi + maṇḍ
one who speaks to or who is spoken to, i.e. (1) an interlocutor Ja iv.18 (= paṭivacana-dayaka C.) ■ (2) an amiable person (cp. Lat affabilis = affable) MN i.386.
fr. paṭi + mant
to discuss in argument, to reply to, answer, refute; as pati˚; at Vin ii.1; DN i.93 (vacane), 94; Dhp i.263; Ja vi.82, Ja vi.294.
paṭi + manteti
a rival wrestler SN i.110; Nd i.172.
paṭi + malla
to touch (at) DN i.106; Snp p.108 (anumasati + ) ■ Caus. paṭimāseti (q.v.).
paṭi + masati of mṛś, cp. paṭimaṃsa
(f.) counterpart, image, figure Ja vi.125; Dāvs v.27; Vv-a 168 (= bimba); Dhs-a 334 - appaṭima (adj.) without a counterpart, matchless incomparable Thag 614; Mil 239.
fr. paṭi + mā
honoured, revered, served Pv-a 18.
pp. of paṭimāneti
to wait on, or wait for, look after, honour, serve Vin ii.169; Vin iv.112; DN i.106; Ja iv.2, Ja iv.203; Ja v.314; Mil 8; Pv-a 12; DN-a i.280 ■ pp paṭimānita (q.v.).
paṭi + Caus. of man
to kill in revenge Ja iii.135.
paṭi + Caus. of mṛ;
to hold on to, to restrain, keep under control; imper. paṭimāse (for ˚māsaya Dhp 379 (opp. codaya; expld by ˚parivīmaṃse “watch Dhp-a iv.117).
Caus. of patimasati
(adj.) fastened on, tied to, wound round, clothed in SN iv.91; MN i.383; Iti 56 Thig 500 (? v.l. paripuṇṇa, cp. Thag-a 290); Ja i.384 Ja vi.64; Mil 390; Dhp-a i.394 (sīse); Vv-a 167 (so read for ˚mukkha), 296.
pp. of paṭimuñcati; cp. also paṭimutta & ummukka, see Geiger,; P.Gr. § 197
(adj.) facing, opposite; nt. ˚ṃ adv. opposite Snp-a 399 (gacchati).
paṭi + mukha
1. to fasten, to bind (in lit. as well as appld sense), to tie, put on Vin i.46; SN i.24 (veraṃ ˚muñcati for ˚muccati!); Ja i.384; Ja ii.22, Ja ii.88, Ja ii.197 iv. 380 (ger. ˚mucca, v.l. ˚muñca), 395; v.25 (attain) 49; vi.525; Dhp-a iii.295 ■ Pass. paṭimuccati to be fastened, aor. ˚mucci Ja iii.239; Ja vi.176.
2. to attain obtain, find Ja iv.285 = Ja vi.148.
paṭi + muc
(& ˚ka) (adj.) in sup˚ well purified, cleansed, pure Ja iv.18 (˚kambu = paṭimutta-suvaṇṇ’ ālankāra C.); v.400; Pv iv.133 (˚ka-suṭṭhu paṭimuttabhāṇin Pv-a 230).
pp. of paṭimuñcati, cp. paṭimukka
1. a sort of remedy, purgative DN i.12 osadhīnaṃ p. expld at DN-a i.98 as “khārâdīni datvā tad-anurūpo khaṇe gate tesaṃ apanayanaṃ.” Cp Dial. 26.
2. binding, obligatory Ja v.25 (sangaraṃ p a binding promise). Cp. pāṭimokkha.
fr. paṭi + muc
(nt.) a white woollen counterpane Ja iv.352 (= uṇṇāmaya-paccattharaṇāni setakambalāni pi vadanti yeva C.).
= paṭikā
prepared, got ready, made, dressed Vin iv.18 (alankata˚); Ja iv.380 (C. for pakata) Pv-a 25 (C. for upaṭṭhita), 75 (alankata˚), 135 (id.), 232 (id.), 279 (id.); Kp-a 118 (alankata˚).
pp. of paṭi + yat
to go back to, reach Ja vi.149 (C. for paṭimuñcati).
paṭi + yā, cp. pacceti
given, prepared, arranged, dedicated Mil 9; Dhp-a ii.75.
pp. of paṭiyādeti
to prepare, arrange, give, dedicate Snp-a 447 ■ pp. paṭiyādita (q.v.) ■ Caus.II. paṭiyādāpeti to cause to be presented or got ready, to assign, advise, give over Vin i.249 (yāguṃ); Snp p.110 (bhojaniyaṃ); P.vA 22, 141. Pati-y-alokam
for *paṭiyāteti = Sk. pratiyātayati, Caus. of paṭi + yat, like P. niyyādeti = Sk. niryātayati
gacchati “to go to the South” Vin iv.131, Vin iv.161.
counterfight Ja iii.3.
paṭi + yodha
(T. paṭi-oloketi) to look at, to keep an eye on, observe Ja ii.406.
paṭi + oloketi
shouting out, roar Dāvs iv.52.
paṭi + rava
hostile king, royal adversary Ja vi.472; Dhp-a i.193.
paṭi + rājā
obstructed, hindered, held back, caged Ja iv.4 (oruddha-paṭiruddha sic.).
pp. paṭi + rudh
(adj.) fit, proper, suitable, befitting, seeming DN i.91; Vin ii.166 (seyyā); MN i.123; SN i.214 SN ii.194 (ap˚); Thig 341; Pv ii.1215; Ja v.99; Pp 27; Dhp-a iii.142; Pv-a 26, Pv-a 122 (= yutta), 124. -˚desavāsa living in a suitable region DN iii.276 = AN ii.32; Ne 29, Ne 50 ■ Spelt pati˚; at Dhp 158; Snp 89, Snp 187, Snp 667; Snp-a 390. Cp. pāṭirūpika.
paṭi + rūpa
(adj.) (-˚) like, resembling, disguised as, in the appearance of, having the form of SN i.230; Dhp-a i.29 (putta˚); Pv-a 15 (samaṇa˚). As pati˚ at Snp-a 302, Snp-a 348, Snp-a 390 ■ nt. an optical delusion Dhp-a iii.56.
fr. paṭirūpa
(f.) likeness, semblance, appearance, pretence Pv-a 268 (= vaṇṇa).
abstr. fr. paṭirūpa
to cry in return, to reply by crying Ja iii.80; pp. paṭirodita = paṭirodana.
paṭi + rodati of rud
(nt.) replying through crying Ja iii.80.
paṭi + rodana
to scold back SN i.162.
paṭi + Caus. of rud
to annoy in return, to tease back SN i.162; AN ii.215; Nd i.397.
paṭi + rosati
received, got, obtained Pv-a 15 (= laddha), 88.
pp. of paṭilabhati
to obtain, receive, get Iti 77; Ja i.91; Nd ii.427 (pariyesati p. paribhuñjati); Pp 57; Vv-a 115; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 7, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 67 etc ■ pret. 3rd pl paccaladdhaṃsu SN i.48 (so v.l. & C. T. ˚latthaṃsu) expl;d by paṭilabhiṃsu cp. K. S. 319 ■ aor. 1st sg paṭilacchiṃ Ja v.71 ■ Caus. paṭilābheti to cause to take or get, to rob Ja v.76 (paṭilābhayanti naṃ “rob me of him”).
paṭi + labhati
obtaining, receiving, taking up, acquisition, assumption, attainment DN i.195; MN i.50; AN ii.93, AN ii.143; Pts ii.182, Pts ii.189; Nd i.262; Dhp 333; Pp 57; Vv-a 113; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 74 ■ attabhāva˚ obtaining a reincarnation, coming into existence SN ii.256; SN iii.144; AN ii.159, AN ii.188; AN iii.122 sq ■ See also paribhoga.
fr. paṭi + labh
v.l. BB together with paṭalika for talika at Ja iii.80 (cp. AN iii.36?).
having withdrawn, keeping away SN i.48 (˚nisabha “expert to eliminate”; reading pati˚); with reading pati also; AN ii.41; AN iv.449; Snp 810 Snp 852; Nd i.130, Nd i.224 (rāgassa etc. pahīnattā patilīno).
pp. of paṭilīyati
to withdraw, draw back, keep away from, not to stick to AN iv.47 = Mil 297 (+ paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati; Mil & id. p. at SN ii.265 print pati˚) Vism 347 (+ paṭikuṭṭati pativaṭṭati) ■ pp. paṭilīna Caus. paṭileṇeti (q.v.).
paṭi + līyati of lī
to withdraw, to make keep away not to touch SN ii.265 (pati˚, as at Mil 297 patilīyati).
Sec. dern fr. pp. paṭilīna in sense of Caus.; cp. Sk. ˚lāpayati of lī
to fill with desire, to entice Ja v.96.
paṭi + Caus. of lubh
(adj.) “against the hair,” in reverse order, opposite, contrary, backward; usually combd with anuloma i.e. forward & backward Vin i.1; AN iv.448 etc (see paṭiccasamuppāda); Ja ii.307. -˚pakkha opposition Pv-a 114 (cp. paṭipakkha ).
paṭi + loma
(nt.) answer, reply, rejoinder Ja iv.18; Mil 120; Pv-a 83 (opp. vacana); Thag-a 285.
paṭi + vacana
(& ˚vattati) (intrs.) to roll or move back, to turn away from AN iv.47 = Mil 297 (paṭilīyati paṭikutati p.); Caus. paṭivaṭṭeti in same meaning trs (but cp. Childers s. v. “to knock, strike”) SN ii.265 (T spells pati˚, as also at Mil 297) ■ grd. paṭivattiya only in neg. ap˚ (q.v.) ■ pp. paṭivatta (q.v.).
paṭi + vr̥t
(nt.) moving backwards, only in cpd. vatta-paṭivatta-karaṇa “moving forth or backwards ” performance of different kinds of duties; doing this, that & the other Dhp-a i.157.
pp. of paṭivattati
one who contradicts SN i.222.
paṭi + vattar, n. ag. of vac
to answer, reply AN iv.168 (v.l. for paṭicarati); Snp 932; Dhp 133; Nd i.397; Pv-a 39.
paṭi + vadati
to live, dwell (at) DN i.129; Vin ii.299; SN i.177; Ja i.202; Snp-a 462; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 67. Pativana, Pativanita, Pativani
paṭi + vasati
etc. occur only in neg. form app˚, q.v.
(adv.) against the wind (opp. anuvātaṃ) Vin ii.218; SN i.13; Snp 622; Dhp 54, Dhp 125; Pv-a 116; Sdhp 425.
paṭi + vātaṃ, acc. cp. Sk. prativāta & prativātaṃ
retort, recrimination Mil 18 (vāda˚ talk and counter-talk).
paṭi + vāda
to turn away from, to free from, cleanse MN i.435 = AN iv.423; Dhs-a 407.
Caus. of paṭi + vap
to throw out again DN-a i.39.
Cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, p. 160, suggesting paṭivādh˚, or paṭibādhayamāno and referring to Thag 744.
paṭi + Caus. vam
lit. “divided part,” sub-part, share, bit portion, part Vin i.28; Vin iii.60 (T. reads paṭivisa); Ja ii.286; Dhs-a 135; Dhp-a i.189; Dhp-a iii.304; Vv-a 61 (˚vīsa), 64 (v.l. ˚vīsa), 120 (id.).
paṭi-aṃsa with euphonic consonant v instead of y (paṭi-y-aṃsa) and assimilation of a to i (paṭiyiṃsa → paṭiviṃsa)
part share, portion Dhp-a ii.85.
prec. + ka
to go apart again, to go away or asunder AN iii.243; Mil 51.
paṭi + vi + gacchati
to recognise Vin iii.130; Nd ii.378 (ājānāti vijānāti p. paṭivijjhati); Mil 299.
paṭi + vi + jānāti
(adj.) in cpd. dup˚; hard to penetrate (lit. & fig.) S; v.454.
grd. of paṭivijjhati
to pierce through, penetrate (lit. & fig.), intuit, to acquire, master, comprehend Vin i.183; SN ii.56; SN v.119, SN v.278, SN v.387, SN v.454; AN iv.228, AN iv.469; Nd ii.378; Ja i.67, Ja i.75; Pts i.180 sq.; Mil 344; Dhp-a i.334 ■ aor. paṭivijjha Snp 90 (= aññāsi sacchākāsi Snp-a 166), and paccavyādhi Thag 26 = Thag 1161 (˚byādhi); also 3rd pl. paccavidhuṃ AN iv.228 ■ pp paṭividdha (q.v.). On phrase uttariṃ appaṭivijjhanto See uttari.
paṭi + vijjhati of vyadh
(adj.) only in neg. ap˚; impenetrable Dhp-a iv.194.
paṭi + vijjhana + ka,of vyadh
known, ascertained DN i.2; Pts i.188.
pp. of paṭi + vid
being or having penetrated or pierced; having acquired, mastering, knowing MN i.438; SN ii.56 (sup˚); Pts ii.19, Pts ii.20; Ja i.214; Vv-a 73 (˚catusacca = saccānaṃ kovida) ■ appaṭividdha not pierced, not hurt Ja vi.446.
pp. of paṭivijjhati
repression, subdual, only in cpd. āghāta˚; DN iii.262, DN iii.289; AN iii.185 sq. See āghāta.
paṭi + vi + nī
to try or judge a case again, to reconsider Ja ii.187.
paṭi + vinicchinati
removed, dispelled, subdued SN ii.283; SN v.76, SN v.315.
pp. of paṭivineti
to drive out, keep away, repress, subdue SN i.228; MN i.13; AN iii.185 sq.; Ja vi.551; Pv-a 104 (pipāsaṃ). Cp. BSk. prativineti Mvu ii.121 ■ pp paṭivinīta (q.v.).
paṭi + vi + nī
(nt.) removal, driving out, explusion AN ii.48, AN ii.50; Mil 320.
fr. paṭivinodeti
(adj.-n.) dispelling, subduing, riddance, removal; dup˚ hard to dispel AN iii.184 sq.
fr. paṭivinodeti
to remove, dispel, drive out, get rid of DN i.138; MN i.48; Pv iii.58; Pp 64; Vv-a 305; Pv-a 60.
paṭi + vi + Caus. of nud, Cp. BSk. prativinudati Divy 34, Divy 371 etc.
to divide off, to divide into (equal) parts MN i.58 (cp. iii.91; paṭibhaj˚ & v.l. vibhaj˚).;
paṭi + vibhajati
(adj.) (equally) divided MN i.372; AN iv.211; Vv-a 50. On neg. ap˚; in cpd ˚bhogin see appaṭivibhatta.
paṭi + vibhatta
(adj.) [pp. of paṭiviramati, cp. BSk. prativiramati Divy ii, 302, 585].abstaining from, shrinking from (with abl.) DN i.5; MN iii.23; SN v.468; Iti 63; Pp 39 Pp 58; DN-a i.70; Pv-a 28, Pv-a 260 ■ app˚; not abstaining from Vin ii.296; SN v.468; Iti 64.
(f.) abstinence from Dhs 299; MN iii.74; Pv-a 206.
fr. paṭivirata
to absṭain from MN i.152.
paṭi + viramati
to act hostile, to fall out with somebody, to quarrel (saddhiṃ) Ja iv.104 ■ pp paṭiviruddha (q.v.).
paṭi + vi + rudh
obstructed or obstructing, an adversary, opponent Ja vi.12; DN-a i.51 (˚ā satta = pare) Mil 203, Mil 403.
pp. of paṭivirujjhati, cp. BSk. prativiruddha rebellious Divy 445
to grow again Vism 419.
paṭi + virūhati
hostility, enmity, opposition Dhs 418, Dhs 1060; Pp 18; Mil 203.
paṭi + virodha
peculiar MN i.372.
paṭi + visiṭṭha
sub-discrimination Ja ii.9.
paṭi + visesa
(adj.) dwelling near, neighbouring MN i.126; Ja i.114, Ja i.483; Ja iii.163 Ja iv.49; Ja v.434; Dhp-a i.47 (˚itthi), 155, 235 (˚dārakā).
fr. paṭi + *veśman or *veśya
(paṭi + vutta, pp. of vac ] said against, replied Vin iii.131, Vin iii.274.
see ap˚.
to make known, declare, announce Vin i.180; SN i.101, SN i.234; Snp 415 (aor ˚vedayi); DN-a i.227; Pv-a 6 (pītisomanassaṃ).
paṭi + vedeti, Caus. of vid
lit. piercing, i.e. penetration comprehension, attainment, insight, knowledge AN i.22 AN i.44; DN iii.253; Pts i.105; Pts ii.50, Pts ii.57, Pts ii.105, Pts ii.112, Pts ii.148, Pts ii.182 Vb 330; Mil 18; Snp-a 110, Snp-a 111; Sdhp 65 ■ appaṭivedha non-intelligence, ignorance Vin i.230; SN ii.92 SN iii.261; SN v.431; AN ii.1; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061, Dhs 1162; Pug 21- duppaṭivedha (adj.) hard to pierce or penetrate; flg difficult to master Mil 250 ■ maggaphala˚; realisation of the fruit of the Path Dhp-a i.110.
fr. paṭi + vyadhī cp. paṭivijjhati & BSk. prativedha Mvu i.86
revenge Dhp-a i.50.
paṭi + vera
to embrace, cling to Ja v.449.
paṭi + vellati
to desist from, aor. paccavyāhāsi DN ii.232.
paṭi + vyāharati
(pati˚) to heap up against (?) Snp-a 554.
paṭi + vyūhati
to restrain, to exercise self-control Ja iv.396.
paṭi + saṃyamati
to connect with, fig. to start, begin (vādaṃ a discussion or argument) SN i.221 (bālena paṭisaṃyuje = paṭipphareyya C.; “engage himself to bandy with a fool” K.S. 284); Snp 843 (vādaṃ p. paṭipphareyya kalahaṃ kareyya Nd i.196) ■ pp. paṭisaṃyutta (q.v.).
paṭi + saṃ + yuj
connected with, coupled, belonging to Vin iv.6; SN i.210 (nibbāna ˚dhammikathā); Thag 598; Iti 73; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 87; Pv-a 12.
pp. of paṭisaṃyujati
apperceived, known, recognised, in phrase “pubbe appaṭisaṃvidita pañho” SN ii.54.
pp. of paṭi + saṃ + vid; same (prati) at Mvu iii.256
(adj.) experiencing, feeling, enjoying or suffering MN i.56; SN i.196; SN ii.122; SN iv.41; SN v.310 sq. AN i.164 (sukhadukkha˚); iv.303 (id.); v.35 (id.); Iti 99; Pts i.95, Pts i.114 (evaṃsukhadukkha˚), 184, 186 sq.; Pp 57 Pp 58.
fr. paṭisaṃvedeti; BSk. pratisaṃvedin Divy 567
to feel, experience, undergo, perceive DN i.43, DN i.45; AN i.157 (domanassaṃ); iv.406 (id.); Pp 59; Pv-a 192 (mahādukkhaṃ). There is also a by-form, viz. paṭisaṃvediyati SN ii.18, SN ii.75, SN ii.256 (attabhāva-paṭilābhaṃ); Iti 38 (sukkha-dukkhaṃ; v.l. ˚vedeti).
paṭi + saṃ + vedeti, Caus. of vid
(nt.) removing Ne 27, Ne 41.
fr. paṭisaṃharati
to draw back, withdraw, remove, take away, give up Vin ii.185 (sakavaṇṇaṃ); DN i.96; SN v.156; Pv-a 92 (devarūpaṃ).
paṭi + saṃ + hṛ; cp. BSk. pratisaṃharati Mvu i.82
to run back Vin ii.195; AN iv.190.
paṭi + sakkati
is ppr. of paṭi + saṃ + kṣi, to be pacified Thag 371.
to restore, repair, mend Vin ii.160; AN ii.249; Ja iii.159 (nagaraṃ). Caus. II paṭisaṅkhārāpeti to cause to repair or build up again MN iii.7; Ja vi.390 (gehāni).
paṭi + saṃ + kṛ;
(f.) reflection, judgment, consideration Vin i.213; SN iv.104 (˚yoniso) Pts i.33, Pts i.45, Pts i.57, Pts i.60, Pts i.64; Pp 25, Pp 57; Dhs 1349. appaṭisaṅkhā (see also ˚sankhāti) want of judgment, inconsideration Pts i.33, Pts i.45; Dhs 1346 = Pp 21 ■ Note. In combn paṭisaṅkhā yoniso “carefully, with proper care or intention” p. is to be taken as ger. of paṭisankhāti (q.v.). This connection is frequent, e.g. SN iv.104; AN ii.40; Nd i.496; Nd ii.540.
paṭi + sankhā of khyā
to be careful, to think over, reflect, discriminate, consider; only in ger. paṭisaṅkhā (as adv.) carefully, intently, with discrimination Vin i.213; MN i.273; MN iii.2; Ja i.304; Nd ii.540; Pp 25 cp. paṭisankhā (+ yoniso); also ger. paṭisaṅkhāya Sddp 394 ■ Opp. appaṭisaṅkhā inconsiderately, in phrase sahasā app˚ rashly & without a thought MN i.94; SN ii.110, SN ii.219 ■ Cp. paṭisañcikkhati.
paṭi + saṃ + khyā
(nt.) carefulness, mindfulness, consideration Ja i.502; Vv-a 327; Dhs-a 402 (˚paññā); Sdhp 397. -˚bala power of computation AN i.52, AN i.94; AN ii.142; DN iii.213, DN iii.244; Pts ii.169, Pts ii.176; Dhs 1354 (cp. Dhs trsln 354); Ne 15, Ne 16, Ne 38. Patisankharika & ya;
fr. paṭisankhāti
(adj.) serving for repair Vin iii.43 (dārūni); Pv-a 141 (id.; ˚ya).
fr. paṭisankharoti
to think over, to discriminate, consider, reflect Vin i.5; DN i.63; MN i.267, MN i.499; MN iii.33; SN i.137; AN i.205; Pp 25 Vism 283.
paṭi + saṃ + cikkhati of khyā; cp. paṭisankhāti & BSk. pratisañcikṣati Mvu ii.314
revived, resurrected MN i.333.
pp. of paṭi + saṃ + jīv
(adv.) by the hundred, i.e. in front of a hundred (people) Vin i.269.
paṭi + instr. of sataṃ
an enemy (in retaliation) Ja ii.406; Nd i.172, Nd i.173; Mil 293.
paṭi + sattu
kindly received (covered, concealed? C.) Ja vi.23 (= paṭicchāditaṃ guttaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ vā C.).
pp. of paṭisantharati
to receive kindly, to welcome, Mil 409; Dhs-a 397. ger. ˚santhāya Ja vi.351 ■ pp. paṭisanthata (q.v.).
paṭi + saṃ + tharati of stṛ;
lit. spreading before, i.e. friendly welcome, kind reception, honour, goodwill favour, friendship DN iii.213, DN iii.244; AN i.93; AN iii.303 sq. AN iv.28, AN iv.120; AN v.166, AN v.168 (˚aka adj. one who welcomes) Ja ii.57; Dhp 376 (expld as āmisa˚ and dhamma˚ at Dhp-a iv.111, see also Dhs-a 397 sq. & Dhs trsl. 350); Dhs 1344 Vb 360; Mil 409. paṭisanthāraṃ karoti to make friends, to receive friendly Pv-a 12, Pv-a 44, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 187.
fr. paṭi + saṃ + stṛ;
to undergo reunion (see next) Mil 32.
paṭi + sandahati
reunion (of vital principle with a body), reincarnation, metempsychosis Pts i.11 sq. 52, 59 sq.; ii.72 sq.; Ne 79, Ne 80; Mil 140; Dhp-a ii.85; Vv-a 53; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 79, Pv-a 136, Pv-a 168. A detailed discussion of p. is to be found at Vb-a 155–160 ■ appaṭisandhika see sep.
fr. paṭi + saṃ + dhā
(adj.) equal, forming, a counterpart Mil 205 (rāja˚); neg. appaṭisama not having one’s equal, incomparable Ja i.94; Mil 331.
paṭi + sama
(f.) lit. “resolving continuous breaking up,” i.e. analysis, analytic insight discriminating knowledge. See full discussion expl;n of term at Kvu trsln 377–382. Always referred to as “the four branches of logical analysis” (catasso or catupaṭisambhidā), viz. attha˚; analysis of meanings “in extension”; dhamma˚; of reasons, conditions, or causal relations; nirutti˚; of [meanings “in intension as given in] definitions paṭibhāna˚ or intellect to which things knowable by the foregoing processes are presented (after Kvu trsln). In detail at AN ii.160; AN iii.113 AN iii.120; Pts i.88, Pts i.119; Pts ii.150, Pts ii.157, Pts ii.185, Pts ii.193; Vb 293
305 Vb-a 386 sq. (cp. Vism 440 sq.), 391 sq ■ See further AN i.22; AN iv.31; Nd ii.386 under paṭibhānavant; Pts i.84 Pts i.132, Pts i.134; Pts ii.32, Pts ii.56, Pts ii.116, Pts ii.189; Mil 22 (attha-dh˚nirutti-paṭibhāna-pāramippatta), 359; Vv-a 2; Dhp-a iv.70 (catūsu p-˚ āsu cheka). p˚-patta one who has attained mastership in analysis AN i.24; AN iii.120; Pts ii.202 ■ Often included in the attainment of Arahantship in formula “saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpunāti,” viz. Mil 18; Dhp-a ii.58, Dhp-a ii.78, Dhp-a ii.93.
paṭi + saṃ + bhid; the BSk. pratisaṃvid is a new formation resting on confusion between bhid & vid;, favoured by use & meaning of latter root in P paṭisaṃvidita. In BSk. we find pratisaṃvid in same application as in P., viz. as fourfold artha˚ dharma nirukti˚ pratibhāna˚ (?). Mvu iii.321
to sweep over again Mil 15.
paṭi + sammajjati
to greet friendly in return Ja vi.224 (= sammodanīya-kathāya paṭikatheti C.).
paṭi + saṃ + Caus. of mud
(nt.) refuge in (-˚), shelter, help, protection MN i.295 (mano as p. of the other 5 senses) iii.9; SN iv.221; SN v.218; AN i.199 (Bhagavaṃ˚); ii.148 (sa˚ able to be restored); iii.186 (kamma˚); iv.158 351; v.355; Ja i.213; Ja vi.398 ■ appaṭisaraṇa (adj. without shelter, unprotected Vin ii.153 (so read for appaṭiss˚) ■ Note. In meaning “restoration” the derivation is prob. fr paṭi + sṛ; to move (Sk. saraṇa and not saraṇa protection). Cp. paṭisāraṇiya.
paṭi + saraṇa1
to run back, stay back, lag behind Snp 8 sq. (opp. atisarati; aor. paccasāri expld by ohiyyi Snp-a 21).
paṭi + sṛ;
to think back upon, to mention DN-a i.267.
paṭi + smṛ;
(& ˚āṇa, e.g. S; v.320) (nt.) retirement for the purpose of meditation, solitude, privacy, seclusion DN iii.252; MN i.526; SN i.77; SN iii.15; SN iv.80, SN iv.144; SN v.12 SN v.398, SN v.414; AN ii.51, AN ii.176; AN iii.86 sq., 116 sq., 195; iv.15 36, 88; v.166, 168; Snp 69 (cp. Nd ii.s. v.); Ja ii.77 (pati˚) Vb 244, Vb 252; Mil 138, Mil 412.
-ārāma fond(ness) of solitude or seclusion (also ˚rata AN iii.261 sq.; Iti 39; Nd ii.433. -sāruppa very suitable for seclusion Vism 90.
for *paṭisallayana, fr. paṭi + saṃ + lī, cp. paṭilīna & paṭilīyati, also BSk pratisaṃlayana Divy 156, Divy 194, Divy 494
(˚līyati) to be in seclusion (for the purpose of meditation) Vin iii.39 (inf. ˚salliyituṃ); DN ii.237; SN v.12 (id.), 320, 325; Mil 139 ■ pp. paṭisallīna (q.v.).
fr. paṭi + saṃ + lī, cp. paṭilīyati
secluded, retired, gone into solitude abstracted, plunged in meditation, separated Vin i.101 (rahogata + ); DN i.134, DN i.151; SN i.71, SN i.146 sq. (divāvihāragata + ), 225; ii.74 (rahogata + ); iv.80, 90, 144 v.415; AN ii.20; Snp-a 346 (pati˚); Ja i.349; Mil 10, Mil 138 sq.; Vv-a 3; DN-a i.309 (pati˚).
pp. of paṭisalliyati; cp. BSk. pratisaṃlīna Divy 196, Divy 291.
(nt.) a deceit in return (cp. paṭikūṭa) Ja ii.183.
paṭi + sāṭheyya
arranged, got ready Vism 91.
pp. of paṭisāmeti
to set in order arrange, get ready Vin ii.113, Vin ii.211, Vin ii.216; MN i.456; Ja iii.72; Mil 15 (pattacīvaraṃ); Vv-a 118 (v.l. ˚yāpeti) 157 (v.l. ˚nameti).
paṭi + Caus. of śam, samati to make ready; cp. BSk. pratiśāmayati Divy passim
to taste, eat, partake of food Vin ii.177.
paṭi + sāyati
see vi˚.
paṭi + smṛ;
(nt.) act of protection, expiation, atonement Mil 344 (in law); appld.
fr. paṭi + sāreti
(adj. nt.) only as t.t. in combn with kamma (official act, chapter), i.e. a formal proceeding by which a bhikkhu expiates an offence which he has committed against someone, reconciliation (cp. Vin. Texts ii.364; Vin i.49 (one of the 5 Sangha-kammas, viz. tajjaniya˚ nissaya˚, pabbājaniya˚, p.˚, ukkhepaniya˚), 143 (id.) 326; ii.15–20, 295; AN i.99; AN iv.346; Dhp-a ii.75.
a grd. formation fr. paṭi + sāreti, Caus. of sṛ; to move
(adj.) falling back upon, going back to, trusting in leaning on (-˚) DN i.99 (gotta˚); SN i.153 (id.); ii.284 (id.).
fr. paṭi + sṛ; cp. paṭisāraniya & paṭisaraṇa Note
(nt.) counter-message, reply Dhp-a i.392.
paṭi + sāsana
sewn, embroidered Vv-a 167 (pati˚).
pp. of paṭi + sibbati
a false top-knot, “chignon” (?) Ja ii.197 (˚ṃ paṭimuñcitvā); v.49 (id.); Mil 90 (muṇḍaka˚).
paṭi + sīsaka
sunk into sleep Thag 203.
pp. of paṭi + svap
fallen down Pv iii.18 (= patita Pv-a 174).
pp. of paṭi + śumbh
a rival hero or fighter, an opponent in fight Snp 831 (= paṭipurisa paṭisattu paṭimalla Nd i.172); Nd i.173 (id.).
paṭi + sūra
(adj.) having a superior; neg. app˚; incomparable, unsurpassed Mil 357 (appaṭibhāga + ).
paṭi + seṭṭha
warding off, prohibition Mil 314 (“resubjugation”); Snp-a 402 (with ref. to part “na”); Kp-a 170 (id.); Pv-a 11 (˚nipāta = “mā”); Vv-a 224.
fr. paṭi + sidh1, sedhati drive off
(adj. n.) warding off, one who prevents or puts a stop to SN i.221; Mil 344.
fr. paṭisedha
& (Caus.); ˚sedheti to ward off, prohibit, prevent, refuse SN iv.341; Pv-a 11.
paṭi + sedhati
(nt.) warding off, refusal, prohibition, stopping SN i.221, SN i.223; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 25; Sdhp 397.
cp. paṭisedha
one who prohibits or refuses Ja ii.123. = v.91.
n. ag. fr. paṭisedhati
repulsion, opposition, enmity, retaliation; only in compn with kṛ; as ˚senikaroti to make opposition, to oppose, retaliate Snp 932, cp. Nd i.397; -˚senikattar (n ag.), one who repulses, fighter, retaliator, arguer Snp 832 cp. Nd i.173.
paṭi + sena, of either sī or śri, cp. usseneti
to repel, push away, be inimical towards, retaliate (opp. usseneti) AN ii.215 (paṭisseneti); Snp 390 (˚seniyati).
paṭi + seneti, see usseneti
to follow, pursue, indulge in (acc.) practise Vin ii.296 (methunaṃ dhammaṃ); MN i.10; AN ii.54 (methunaṃ); Ja i.437; Ja vi.73, Ja vi.505; Dhp 67; Nd i.496 Pp 62; Mil 224; Dhp-a ii.40; Pv-a 130; Sdhp 396. Note. paṭisevati is spelt pati˚; at Dhp 67, Dhp 68; Ja iii.275 Ja iii.278.
paṭi + sevati, cp. BSk. pratisevate Divy 258 in same meaning
(nt.) going after, indulging in, practice MN i.10.
fr. paṭisevati
one who practises, pursues or indulges in (acc.) AN iii.143 sq. (bhesajjaṃ).
n. ag. of paṭisevati
(adv.) against the stream (opp. anusotaṃ) Iti 114; Ja i.70; Pv-a 154. paṭisotagāmin going against the stream, toiling, doing hard work SN i.136; AN ii.6 (opp. anu˚), 214 sq.
paṭi + sotaṃ, acc. of sota
recollecting, thoughtful, mindful, minding Snp 283 = Mil 411; Dhp 144 (t); Vv 2110; and with spelling pati˚; at SN iii.143; SN iv.74, SN iv.322, SN iv.351; AN iii.24; Iti 10, Iti 21, Iti 81; Snp 283, Snp 413.
paṭi + sata, pp. of smṛ;
(f.) mindfulness, remembrance, memory MN i.36 sq.; Dhs 23; Pp 25. app˚ lapse of memory Dhs 1349.
paṭi + sati of smṛ;
(adj.) mindful, thoughtful Thag 42.
fr. paṭissati
assent, promise, obedience Ja vi.220; Vv-a 351 (cp. paṭissaya Vv-a 347).
fr. paṭi + śru
(f.) obedience; neg. appaṭissavatā want of deference Dhs 1325 = Pp 20. Patissa & Patissa
abstr. fr. paṭissava
(f.) [paṭi + śru, cp. paṭissuṇāti & paṭissāvin; in BSk. we find pratīsā which if legitimate would refer the word to a basis different than śru. The form occurs in cpd. sapratīśa respectful Divy; also Mvu i.516; Mvu ii.258; besides as sapratisa Mvu iii.345 deference, obedience, only in cpd. sappaṭissa (q.v. obedient, deferential Iti 10 (sappatissa); Vv 8441 (cp Vv-a 347), & appaṭissa disobedient, not attached to SN i.139; SN ii.224 sq.; AN ii.20; AN iii.7, AN iii.247, AN iii.439; Ja ii.352 (˚vāsa anarchy; reading t); Pv-a 89.
(adj.) assenting, ready, obedient, willing DN i.60; SN iii.113 (kinkāra-paṭi˚).
fr. paṭi + śru
to assent, promise, agree aor. paccassosi Vin i.73; DN i.236; SN i.147, SN i.155; Snp p.50, and paṭisuṇi Snp-a 314; ger. ˚suṇitvā freq. in formula “sādhū ti patissuṇitvā” asserting his agreement, saying yes SN i.119; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 55; & passim; also paṭissutvā SN i.155 ■ f. abstr. paṭissutavatā Snp-a 314.
paṭi + śru
see paṭiseneti.
to beat, knock against Pv-a 271 (for ghaṭṭeti Pv iv.108; v.l. paṭipisati).
for ghaṃsati?
only in one stock phrase viz. purāṇañ ca vedanaṃ paṭihankhāmi navañ ca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmi “I shall destroy any old feeling and not produce any new” SN iv.104 = AN ii.40 AN iii.388 = AN iv.167 = Nd i.496 = Nd ii.5402; Vism 32, Vism 33.
fut. of paṭihanti
stricken, smitten, corrupted Pv iii.79; Pv-a 20 (˚citta), 207 (id.) ■ app˚ unobstructed Dhp-a ii.8; Vv-a 14.
pp. of paṭihanti
(nt.) repulsion, warding off Vism 31.
fr. paṭi + han
(adj.) one who offers resistance Dhp-a i.217.
fr. paṭi + han
to strike against, ward off, keep away, destroy MN i.273; Mil 367; ppr. paṭihanamāna meeting, impinging on, striking against Vism 343. ger. paṭihacca SN v.69, SN v.237, SN v.285; fut. paṭihaṅkhati; pp paṭihata (q.v.) ■ Pass. paṭihaññati Iti 103; Ja i.7; Dhs-a 72.
paṭi + han
to strike in return Vin ii.265; DN i.142; SN iv.299 ■ Caus. paṭihāreti to repel, avoid Ja vi.266, Ja vi.295 ■ Cp. pāṭihāriya etc.
paṭi + hṛ;
(adj.) sharp, pungent; fig. keen, wise, clever, skilful Vism 337 (˚saññākicca), 338. Cp paddha1 & pāṭava.;
cp. Epic. Sk. paṭu
(nt.) subtraction (opp. sankalana) DN-a i.95. The word is not clear (cp. Dial. i.22).
paṭa (?) + upp˚
at DN i.54 is read as pacuṭa by Bdhgh. & trsl;n (see Dial. i.72). See under pavuṭā.
a kind of cucumber, Trichosanthes Dioeca Vin i.201 (˚paṇṇa).
dial.?
1. slab, tablet, plate, in cpds. ayo˚; iron plate AN iv.130, AN iv.131; Ja iv.7 (suvaṇṇa˚); Pv-a 43 (ayomaya˚); loha˚; brass plate Pv-a 44; silā˚ stone slab Ja i.59 etc. When written on it is placed into a casket (mañjūsā) Ja ii.36; Ja iv.335. 2. a bandage, strip (of cloth) Vv 3341 (āyoga˚) = Vv-a 142.
3. fine cloth, woven silk, cotton cloth, turban (-cloth) Vin ii.266 (dussa˚ = setavattha-paṭṭa Bdhgh see Vin. Texts iii.341); SN ii.102 (id.) Ja i.62 (sumana cloth with a jasmine pattern); vi.191 (˚sāṭaka), 370 (nāḷi˚); Kp-a 51 (˚bandhana); DN-a i.87 (āmilāka); Dhp-a i.395 (˚vattha); ii.42 (rajata˚) ■ dupaṭṭa “double cloth, see under dvi B ii.
cp. late Sk. paṭṭa, doubtful etym.
(adj. n.) made of or forming a strip of cloth; a bandage, strip (of cloth), girdle Vin ii.136 (paṭṭikā); AN i.254 (= paṭṭikā C.); Ja v.359 (aya˚ an iron girdle), Vb-a 230 (paṭṭikā).
fr. paṭṭa
(nt.) a place, city, port Ja i.121; Ja iv.16, Ja iv.137, Ja v.75; Pv-a 53 ■ ˚ka a sort of village Ja vi.456.
*Sk. paṭṭana
see paṭṭaka.
in yāna˚ at Vism 328 is doubtful. It might be read as yāna-kaḷopi (on account of combn with kumbhimukha), or (preferably) as putoḷi (with v.l. BB), which is a regular variant for mutoli. The trsln would be “provision bag for a carriage.” See further discussed under mutoḷi.
(adj.) “standing out,” setting out or forth, undertaking, able (clever? Vin iii.210 (dhammiṃ kathaṃ kātuṃ); iv.60 (cīvarakammaṃ kātuṃ), 254 (dhammiṃ kathaṃ kātuṃ) 285 290; Nd ii.p. 46 (for Snp p.ose part puṭṭha; v.l. seṭṭha) Nd ii.no. 388 (in expln of paṭṭhagū Snp 1095; here it clearly means “being near, attending on, a pupil or follower of”). See also paddha1 and paddhagu.
fr. pa + sthā, see patthahati
established, or given Pv-a 119 (cp. patiṭṭhāpitatta).
pp. of paṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. prasthapita Divy 514
to put down, set down, provide; ppr. paṭṭhayamāna Pv-a 128 (varamāna + ; v.l. paṭṭhap˚); aor. paṭṭhayi Pv ii.934 (dānaṃ; v.l. paṭṭhapayi, expld by paṭṭhapesi Pv-a 126) ger. paṭṭhāya see sep ■ Caus. II. paṭṭhapeti to put out or up, to furnish, establish, give SN ii.25; Pv ii.924 (fut. ˚ayissati dānaṃ, v.l. paṭṭhayissati; expld by pavattessati Pv-a 123); Ja i.117; Pv-a 54 (bhattaṃ), 126 (dānaṃ) ■ pp. paṭṭhapita (q.v.).
pa + sthā = P. tiṭṭhati, with short base *ṭṭha for *tiṭṭha in trs. meaning, see patiṭṭhahati
(nt.) setting forth, putting forward; only in cpd. sati˚; setting up of mindfulness (q.v. and see discussion of term at Dial ii.324) Besides in later lit. meaning “origin,” starting point cause, in title of the 7th book of the Abhidhamma, also called Mahāpakaraṇa. See Ledi, J.P.T.S. 1915–16 p. 26; Mrs. Rh. D., Tika p. 1, vi ■ At Sdhp 321 it has the Sk. meaning of “setting out” (?).
fr. pa + sthā, cp. paṭṭhahati
(indecl.) putting down, starting out from, used as prep. (with abl.) from… onward, beginning with, henceforth, from the time of e.g. ajjato p. from to-day Vv-a 246; ito p. from here henceforth Ja i.60, Ja i.63, Ja i.150; cp. Ja i.52 (mūlato); vi.336 (sīsato); Pv-a 11 (galato), 13 (gihīkālato). paṭṭhāyayāva (with acc.) from-up to Vism 374.
ger. fr. paṭṭhahati
in pañca˚ see under pañca.
to read (of a text) Vv-a 72; Pv-a 58, Pv-a 59, Pv-a 70 etc.; see also pāṭha.
paṭh to read, Sk. paṭhati
(nt.) reading (textual) Mil 344.
fr. paṭhati
(adj.) num. ord. “the first,” in foll. meanings: (1) the first, foremost, former Snp 93, Snp 436, Snp 1031; Ja ii.110; Kp-a i.192; Dhp-a iii.5, Dhp-a iii.196 (˚vaya, contrasted with majjhima & pacchima); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 56. nt. acc. paṭhamaṃ at first, for the first time Vin i.16; DN ii.14; Dhp 158; Ja i.222; Ja ii.103, Ja ii.153; often as first part of cpd. ˚-, meaning either “first” or “recently, newly, just” Vin i.1 (˚âbhisambuddha having just attained Buddhaship); DN iii.253 (˚âbhinibbatta), Snp 420 (˚uppattika “in his first youth”) Ja iii.394 (˚uggata newly sprung up) ■ A second compar formation is paṭhamatara, only as adv. ˚ṃ at the (very) first, as early as possible, first of all Vin i.30; Ja vi.510; Dhp-a i.138; Vv-a 230; Pv-a 93.
Ved. prathama, cp. Av. fratəma; also Ved. prataraṃ further, Gr. πρότερος superl. formation fr. prep. *pro, Sk. pra etc. see pa˚
(nt.) earthliness MN i.329.
abstr. fr. paṭhavī
(adj.-n.) a wayfarer SN i.37.
fr. paṭhavī
(f.) the earth. Acc to Nd ii.389 syn. with jagati. It figures as the first element in enumn of the 4 elements (see dhātu 1), viz p., āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind or the elements of the extension, cohesion, heat and motion Cpd. 155). At DN iii.87 sq.≈ Vism 418 rasa˚ is opposed to bhūmi-pappaṭaka. Otherwise it is very frequent in representing the earth as solid, firm, spacious ground See DN ii.14, DN ii.16; MN i.327 sq.; SN i.113 (p. udrīyati) 119 (id.), 186; ii.133, 169 sq.; v.45, 78, 246, 456 sq. AN ii.50; AN iv.89, AN iv.374, AN v.263 sq.; Snp 307, Snp 1097; Iti 21; Dhp 41, Dhp 44, Dhp 178 (pathavyā); Pv ii.66; Mil 418; Pv-a 57, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 174 ■ mahā˚ MN i.127; SN ii.179, SN ii.263; SN iii.150; Ja i.25, Ja i.74; Ja iii.42; Mil 187; aya˚ iron soil (of Avīci Dhp-a i.148. In compn both paṭhavī˚ & pathavi˚.;
-ojā (paṭhavojā) sap or essence of the earth Dhp-a ii.154. -kampa shaking the earth, an earthquake DN-a i.130. -kampana = kampa Ja i.47. -kasiṇa the earth artifice (see Dhs trsl 43) DN iii.286. -dhātu the earth element (see above) DN i.215; DN ii.294; DN iii.228, DN iii.247; MN i.185; MN i.421; SN ii.170; Dhs 588, Dhs 648, Dhs 962 (cp. Dhs trsln 241); Ne 73, Ne 74; Vb-a 55; -maṇḍala the circle of the E. DN i.134; SN i.101; AN iv.90. -rasa taste of earth SN i.134; Snp-a 5. -lekha writing on (or in) carth AN i.283 Pp 32. -saññā earth consciousness MN ii.105; AN iv.312; AN v.7 sq., 318 sq. 353 sq. -sama like the earth MN i.127, MN i.423; Dhp 95.
Ved. pṛthivī, doublets in Pāli pathavī, puthavī, puthuvī, puṭhuvī, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 124, 17n. To ad. pṛthu: see puthu, prath to expand, thus lit. the broad one, breadth, expansion. Not (as Bdhgh at Vism 364 patthaṭattā pathavī, cp. Cpd. 155 even modern linguists!) to be derived fr. pattharati
v.l. at Pv-a 60 for T. pariḍayhati.
a shop Ja iv.488 [v.l. pana].
in this meaning unknown in Sk; only in one faulty var. lect. as “house”; see BR s. v. paṇa. Usual meaning “wager”
see paṇṇaka ■ paṇaka (comb) see phaṇaka.
to sell, barter, bargain, risk, bet Ja v.24 (= voharati attānaṃ vikkiṇati C.) ■ See also paṇitaka & paṇiya.;
cp. Sk. paṇati
to bend, to be bent or inclined Pts i.165, Pts i.167 ■ pp. paṇata ibid ■ Caus. panāmeti (q.v.).
pa + nam
affection Ja vi.102.
classical Sk. praṇaya, fr pra + nī
a small drum or cymbal DN i.79; SN ii.128; SN iv.344; AN ii.117, AN ii.241; Ja iii.59 (of an executioner; Pv-a 4 in id. p. has paṭaha); Thag 467; Bv i.32; Vv 8110; Dhs 621 (˚sadda); Dhp-a i.18.
cp. Ep. Sk. paṇava, dial; accord. to BR a corruption of praṇava
bending, salutation, obeisance (cp. paṇāmeti 1) Vv-a 321 (˚ṃ karoti = añjaliṃ karoti) ■ As paṇāmana nt. at Ja iv.307.
fr. pa + nam, see paṇamati
bowing, bow, obeisance Thig 407 (˚ṃ karoti).
fr. pa + nam, see paṇamati
1. (= paṇāmeti 1) raised, bent or stretched out Snp 352 (añjalī sup˚).
2. (= paṇāmeti 3) dismissed, given leave Vin i.54; MN i.457 (bhikkhusangho); Mil 209 (id.), 187.
pp. of paṇāmeti
1. to bend forth or over, stretch out, raise, in phrase añjaliṃ p. to raise the hands in respectful salutation Vin ii.188; DN i.118; Snp p.79. 2. to bend to or over, to shut, in kavāṭaṃ p. to shut the door Vin i.87; Vin ii.114, Vin ii.207; pattaṃ Vin ii.216. 3. to make go away, to turn someone away, give leave dismiss Vin i.54; Vin ii.303; SN i.7; Thag 511, Thag 557; Ja v.314; Mil 187 (parisaṃ); Pass. paṇāmīyati (ibid.)-pp paṇāmita (q.v.).
Caus. of paṇamati
(adj. nt.) staked, wagered, bet, wager, stake at play Ja vi.192 (so read for paṇīta˚).
fr. paṇita-pp. of paṇati
to put forth, put down to, apply, direct, intend; aspire to, long for, pray for SN v.156 (atthāya cittaṃ paṇidahiṃ). ger. paṇidhāya SN i.42 = Snp 660 (vācaṃ manañ ca pāpakaṃ); SN i.170 (ujuṃ kāyaṃ); AN iii.249 (deva-nikāyaṃ p.); iv.461 sq (id.); Vb 244 (ujuṃ kāyaṃ p.) = DN-a i.210. Also lit (as prep with acc.) “in the direction of, towards MN i.74 (angārā-kāsuṃ) ■ pp. paṇihita (q.v.).
pa + ni + dhā
(nt.) aspiration, longing, prayer Vv-a 270; Sdhp 344.
fr. paṇidahati; cp. philosophical literature & BSk. praṇidhāna
(f.) aspiration, request, prayer, resolve DN iii.29 DN iii.276; SN ii.99, SN ii.154; SN iii.256 (ceto˚); iv.303; AN ii.32 AN iv.239 sq. (ceto˚); v.212 sq.; Snp 801; Vv 4712; Nd i.109; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1126; Snp-a 132 (= paṇidhāna); Dhp-a ii.172; Dhs-a 222 (rāga-dosa-moha˚).
-kamma (in deva cult) payment of a vow DN i.12 cp. DN-a i.97 (which Kern, however, Toev. s. v., interprets as “application of an enema,” comparing Sk pranidheya to be injected as a clyster).
fr. paṇidahati; cp. BSk. praṇidhi Divy 102, Divy 134, in same meaning. The usual Sk. meaning is “spy”
to fall down before Thag 375.
pa + ni + pat
prostration, adoration Dāvs v.53.
fr. pa + ni + pat
(adj.) consisting of a footfall, humbling or humble, devotional Snp-a 157.
fr. paṇipāta
(adj.) to be sold or bought, vendible, nt. article of trade, ware AN ii.199; Vv 847 (= bhaṇḍa Vv-a 337); Ja iv.363 (= bhaṇḍa C 366).
ger. formation fr. paṇ, see paṇati & cp. BSk. paṇya in tara-paṇya fare Avs i.148
applied, directed, intent, bent on, well directed, controlled SN iv.309 (dup˚); AN i.8 AN v.87; Dhp 43; (sammā ˚ṃ cittaṃ); Snp 154 (su˚ mano suṭṭhu ṭhapito acalo Snp-a 200); Pts ii.41 (vimokkha) Mil 204, Mil 333; Mil 413 ■ appaṇihita in connection with samādhi & vimokkha seems to mean “free from all longings,” see Vin iii.93 = Vin iv.25; SN iv.295, SN iv.309, SN iv.360; Pts ii.43 sq., 100; Mil 337.
pp. of paṇidahati
(adj.) 1. (lit.) brought out or to, applied executed; used with ref. to punishment (see paṇeti daṇḍaṃ) Pv iv.166 (˚daṇḍa receiving punishment ṭhapita-sarīra-daṇḍa Pv-a 242).
2. (appld) brought out or forth, (made) high, raised, exalted, lofty, excellent with ref. to food (very often used in this sense) “heaped up, plentiful, abundant.” Synonymous with uttama (DN-a i.109, DN-a i.171), uḷāra (Pv-a 25, Pv-a 228), atuḷa (Pv-a 110) opp. hīna (D iii.215; AN iii.349; AN v.140; Vism 11) lūkha (S ii.153; Vv-a 64) ■ DN i.12 (dhammā gambhīrā… paṇītā… ), 109 (khādaniya); ii.127 (id. iii.215 (with hīna & majjhima-dhātu); SN i.136 (dhammo gambhīro etc.); ii.153 (dhātu), 154 (paṇidhi); iii.47 iv.360; v.66 (dhammā), 226 (etaṃ padaṃ), 266 (sattā) AN i.284; AN ii.171, AN ii.190; AN iv.10, AN iv.332, AN iv.423; AN v.8, AN v.36 and passim; Snp 240, Snp 389; Iti 44; Pv i.53; iv.127; Pp 28 (˚âdhimutta having high aspirations), 30, 60; Dhs 269 Dhs 1027, Dhs 1411; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 35 (āhāra), 42 (id.); Dhp-a ii.154 (bhojana). Compar. paṇītatara, often combd with abhikkantatara, e.g. DN i.62, DN i.74, DN i.216; SN i.80; AN i.119 AN i.171; AN v.37, AN v.140, AN v.203 sq.
pp. of pa + neti in same application BSk.; cp. Divy 385
a gambler’s stake Ja vi.192 See paṇitaka. Panudati, Panunna
perhaps = Sk. paṇita, or paṇ (see paṇa), as P. formation it may be taken as pa + nīta + ka, viz. that which has been produced
see panudati etc.
to lead on to, bring out, adduce, apply, fig. decree (a fine or punishment), only used in phrase daṇḍaṃ paṇeti to give a punishment DN ii.339 = Mil 110; MN ii.88; Dhp 310; Ja ii.207; Ja iii.441; Ja iv.192; Mil 29; Dhp-a iii.482 ■ pp. paṇīta (q.v.).
pa + nī
see bhaṇḍati.
a eunuch, weakling Vin i.86, Vin i.135, Vin i.168, Vin i.320; Vin iv.20, Vin iv.269; AN iii.128; AN v.71 Sdhp 79 ■ With ref. to the female sex as paṇḍikā at Vin ii.271 (itthi˚).
cp late (dial.) Sk. paṇḍa & paṇḍaka; for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under pello
(adj) white, pale, yellowish Ja ii.365; v. 340; Nd i.3; Dhs 6 Vb 88 (Dhs trsl. “that which is clear”? in def. of citta & mano) Dhs 17, Dhs 293, Dhs 597; Mil 226; Dhp-a iv.8; Vv-a 40; Pv-a 56 (= seta); Sdhp 430.
Ved. pāṇḍara; cp. paṇḍu, q.v. for etym.
(nt.) erudition, cleverness, skill, wisdom Ja i.383; Pts ii.185; Pp 25; Dhs 16 (= paṇḍitassa bhāvo Dhs-a 147), 292, 555. As pandicciya Ja vi.4.
fr. paṇḍita
(adj.) wise, clever, skilled, circumspect, intelligent Vin ii.190 (+ buddhimanto) DN i.12 (˚vedaniya comprehensible only by the wise) 120 (opp. duppañña); iii.192; MN i.342; MN iii.61, MN iii.163, MN iii.178; SN iv.375 (+ viyatta medhāvin); v.151 (+ vyatta kusala) AN i.59, AN i.68, AN i.84, AN i.101 sq., 162 (paṇḍitā nibbānaṃ adhigacchanti); ii.3 sq., 118, 178, 228; iii.48 = Iti 16; Snp 115 Snp 254, Snp 335, Snp 523, Snp 721, Snp 820, Snp 1007, Snp 1125 (Ep. of Jatukaṇṇī) Iti 86; Dhp 22, Dhp 28, Dhp 63 (˚mānin), 79, 88, 157, 186, 238 289; Ja iii.52 (sasa˚); Nd i.124; Pv iv.332 (opp. bāla = sappañña Pv-a 254); Dhs 1302; Mil 3, Mil 22; DN-a i.117; Dhp-a iv.111; Vv-a 257; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 41, Pv-a 60 (= pañña), 93 99.
cp. Ved. paṇḍita
(adj.) a pedant DN i.107.
paṇḍita + ka
(adj.) [cp. Ved. pāṇḍu, palita, pāṭala (pale-red); Gr. πελιτνός, πελλός, πόλιος (grey); Lat. palleo (to be pale), pullus (grey); Lith. patvas (pale-yellow), pilkas (grey); Ohg. falo (pale, yellowish, withered); E. pale pale-red or yellow, reddish, light yellow, grey; only at Thig 79 (kisā paṇḍu vivaṇṇā), where paṇḍu represents the usual up-paṇḍ’-uppaṇḍuka-jātā: “thin, pale and colourless” see Thag-a 80). Otherwise only in cpds. e.g.
-kambala a light red blanket, orange-coloured cloth SN i.64 (= ratta-kambala C.); AN i.181; Snp 689 (= ratta Snp-a 487); also a kind of ornamental stone, Sakka’s throne (p ■ k ■ silā) is made of it Ja i.330; Ja ii.93; Ja ii.53 (˚silāsana); v.92 (id.); Pv ii.960 (˚silā = p ■ k-nāmaka sīlāsana Pv-a 138); Vv-a 110 (id.); Kp-a 122 (˚varāsana); Dhp-a i.17 (˚silāsana). -palāsa a withered leaf Vin i.96 = Vin iii.47; Vin iv.217; Dhp 233, Vb-a 244; Kp-a 62 on ˚palāsika (DN-a i.270) see J.P.T.S. 1893, 37. -mattikā yellow loam, clay soil Kp-a. 59. -roga jaundice Vin i.206 (˚ābādha) 276 (id.); Ja i.431; Ja ii.102; Dhp-a i.25 -rogin suffering from jaundice Ja ii.285; Ja iii.401. -vīṇā yellow flute (of Pañcasikha): see beluva ■ sīha yellow lion, one of the 4 kinds Snp-a 125 (cp. Manor ■ pūr. on AN ii.33). -sutta orange-coloured string DN i.76.
(-roga) perhaps to be read with v.l. at MN ii.121 for bandhuka˚.
(nt.) 1. a leaf (esp. betel leaf) Vin i.201 (5 kinds of leaves recommended for medicinal purposes, viz. nimba˚; Azadirachta Indica kuṭaja˚; Wrightia antidysenterica, paṭola˚; Trichosanthes dioeca, sulasi˚; or tulasi˚ basil, kappāsika˚ cotton, see Vin. Texts ii.46) AN i.183 (tiṇa + ) Snp 811 (p. vuccati paduma-pattaṃ Nd i.135); Ja i.167; Ja ii.105 (nimba)˚; Kp-a 46 (khitta-p ■ kosa-saṇṭhāna); Pv-a 115 (= patta) tālapaṇṇa a fan of palm leaves Vv 3343 (= tālapattehi kata-maṇḍala-vījanī Vv-a 147); haritapaṇṇa greens, vegetable Snp-a 283; sūpeyyapaṇṇa curry leaf Ja i.98.
2. a leaf for writing upon, written leaf, letter; donation, bequest (see below paṇṇākāra Ja i.409 (cp. paṭipaṇṇa); ii.104; iv.151 (ucchangato p ˚ṃ nīharati); Dhp-a i.180; Pv-a 20 (likhā˚ written message). paṇṇaṃ āropeti to send a letter Ja i.227; pahiṇati id. Ja iv.145; Ja v.458; peseti id. Ja i.178; Ja iv.169. paṇṇaṃ likhati to write a letter Ja ii.174; Ja vi.369 (paṇṇe wrote on a leaf), 385 iṇa˚ a promissory note Ja i.230; Ja iv.256-p. as ticket or label at Dhs-a 110.
3. a feather wing see su˚.
-ākāra “state or condition of writing” (see ākāra 1) i.e. object of writing; that which is connected or sent with a letter, a special message, donation, present, gift Ja i.377; Ja ii.166; Ja iii.10; Ja iv.316, Ja iv.368; vi. 68, 390; Snp-a 78; Dhp-a. 184 326, 392, 339: ii.80; iii.292 (dasavidha dibba˚ viz. āyu etc.: see ṭhāna); iv.11. -kuṭi a hut of leaves DN iii.94; SN i.226; Ja ii.44; Pv iii.220; DN-a i.318. -chatta a fan of leaves Ja ii.277. -chattaka a leaf-awning SN i.90 SN i.92. -dhāra a holder made of leaves Ja v.205. -pacchi leaf-basket, a b. for greens Ja vi.369. -puṭa a palm-leaf basket Pv-a 168. -saññā a mark of leaves (tied up to mark the boundary of a field) Ja i.153. -santhāra a spreading leaf, leaf cover, adj. spread with leaves AN i.136; Ja vi.24. -sālā a hut of leaves, a hermitage Ja i.6, Ja i.7, Ja i.138; Ja ii.101 sq.; Ja vi.30, Ja vi.318 (nala-bhittikaṃ ˚ṃ katvā); vi.24. -susa (& sosa); drying the leaves (said of the wind) Kp-a 15.
Ved. parṇa, cp. Ags. fearn, E. fern
1. green leaves (collectively), vegetable, greens Ja vi.24 (kāra˚ vegetable as homage or oblation); Pv iii.33 (panko paṇṇako ca, expld as “kaddamo vā udakacchikkhalo vā” Pv-a 189, but evidently misunderstood for “withered leaves”); Pv-a 256 (tiṇakaṭṭha-paṇṇaka-sala, is reading correct?).
2. Name of a water plant, most likely a kind of fern (see Kern Toev. ii.16 q.v.). Often combd with sevāla (Blyxa Octandra), e.g. at Ja ii.324; Ja v.37 ■ The spelling is also paṇaka, even more frequent than paṇṇaka and also combd with sevāla, e.g. Vin iii.177 (in combn saṇkha-sevāla˚, where Bdhgh explains “sankho ti dīghamūlako paṇṇasevālo vuccati, sevālo ti nīlasevālo, avaseso udaka-pappaṭaka-nīla-bījak’ ādi sabbo ‘ti paṇako ti sankhaṃ gacchati”); SN v.122; AN iii.187, AN iii.232, AN iii.235; Ja iv.71 (sevāla˚); Mil 35 (sankha-sevāla-p. which the Manor-pūṛ explns by udaka-pappaṭaka, and also as “nīlamaṇḍūkapiṭṭhivaṇṇena udakapiṭṭhiṃ chādetvā nibattapaṇakaṃ” see Trenckner, Mil 421 and cp Miln. trsln i.302), 210 (suvaṇṇa˚), 401 (cakkavāko sevāla paṇaka-bhakkho); Kp-a 61 (sevāla˚; cp. Schubring’s kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.).
3. (see paṇṇa 2) a written leaf, a ticket Dhs-a 110.
paṇṇa + ka
see paññatti.
(adj.) having a manifestation or name, in a˚-bhāva state without designation, state of non-manifestation, indefinite or unknown state (with ref to the passing nature of the phenomenal world) Dhp-a i.89; Dhp-a ii.163. Pannarasa & Pannavisati;
fr. paṇṇatti
see pañca 1. B, & C.;
see pañca 2. A.
(f.) a leaf Vin i.202 (taka˚).
= paṇṇa
one who deals with greens, a florist or greengrocer Ja i.411; Ja ii.180; Ja iii.21 (˚dhītā); Mil 331.
paṇṇa + ika
(f.) greens, green leaves vegetable Vin ii.267 (na harītaka ˚ṃ pakinitabbaṃ trsl. at Vin. Texts iii.343 by “carry on the business of florist and seedsman,” thus taken as paṇṇika, cp. also Vin. Texts iii.112); Ja i.445 (paṇṇikāya saññaṃ adāsi is faulty; reading should be saṇṇikāya “with the goad, of saṇ(ṇ)ikā = Sk. sṛṇi elephant-driver’s hook).
to paṇṇaka; cp. Sk. parṇikā; meaning uncertain, cp. Kern, Toev. p. 17 s. v.
(m. & f.) the heel Vin ii.280 (˚samphassa); Ja ii.240; Ja v.145; Sdhp 147, Sdhp 153. See next.
Ved. pārṣṇi, Av. paṣṇā, Lat. perna, Gr.; πτέρνα, Goth. fairzna, Ohg. fersana = Ger. ferse
(f.) the heel Ja i.491; Kp-a 49 (˚aṭṭhi); Vism 253 (id.); Pv-a 185.
fr. paṇhi
(adj.) having heels DN ii.17 (āyata˚ having projecting heels, the 3rd of the 32 characteristics of a Mahāpurisa).
fr. paṇhi
to fall, jump, fall down on (loc. acc. & instr.), to alight Ja i.278 (dīpake); Snp 248 (nirayaṃ); Pv iv.108 (1st pl. patāmase); Mil 187; Pv-a 45 ppr. patanto Ja i.263 (asaniyā); iii.188 (nāvāya); fut patissati Ja iii.277; aor. pati Snp 1027 (sirasā); Ja iii.55; Pv i.78; ger. patitvā Ja i.291; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 16; Dhp-a iii.196 (vv.ll. papāta & papatā the latter aor. of papatati q.v.); ger. patitvā Ja i.291; Ja iii.26; Pv-a 16. pp. patita (q.v.) ■ Caus. pāteti (q.v.). Pass. (Caus. patīyati is brought to fall also intrs. rush away Ja iv.415 (= palāyati C.); Mil 187.
Ved. patati, Idg. *pet “to fly” as well as “to fall.” Cp. Av. pataiti fly, hurry; Gr. πέτομαι fly, ὠκυπέτης quick, πίπτω fall; Lat. praepes quick, peto to go for, impetus, attack etc.
at Ja vi.276 is misprint for pathaddhi (q.v.).
(nt. adj.) falling, falling out, ruin, destruction Ja i.293 (akkhīni); ii.154; iii.188 (geha˚) vi.85 (usu˚ range of his arrow).
fr. patati
(adj.) on the point of falling, going to fall, falling Ja vi.358.
fr. patana
(adj.) very thin Ja vi.578 (˚kesa); Dhs 362 (˚bhāva) = Dhs-a 238; Kv 299 (id.).
pa + tanu
a split a slit Ja iv.32.
Vedic pradara, pa + dṛ; with t. for d.; see Trenckner, Notes 6216; Geiger, P.Gr. § 39, 4
1. to go through or forth, to run out, to cross over DN i.248; Ja iii.91 (aor. patari).
2. to overflow, boil over (of water) Mil 260 ■ Caus patāreti (q.v.).
pa + tarati
(f.) a flag, banner (cp. dhaja) Ja i.52; Vv-a 31, Vv-a 173.
cp. later Sk. patākā
splendour, majesty Vv 408 (= tejas, ānubhāvo Vv-a 180).
fr. pa + tap
(adj.) splendid, majestic Snp 550 (= jutimantatāya p. Snp-a 453); Thag 820.
fr. patāpa
scorch, burn fiercely Vv 795 (= ativiya dīpeti Vv-a 307). Sdhp 573.
pa + tāpeti, Caus. of tap
to be spread out, intrs. to spread (?) AN iv.97 (kodho p., as if fr. pat ); Ja iii.283 (C. nikkhamati as if fr. tṛ; Kern. trsls “to be for sale”).
in form = pa + tāyati, diff. in meaning; not sufficiently expld, see Kern, Toev. p. 29 s. v. It is probably a distorted *sphāṭayati: see under pharati phalaka and phāteti
to make go forth, to bring over or through MN i.225; AN iii.432 (v.l. M. pakaroti)-aor. patārayi in meaning “strive” at Ja iii.210 (= patarati vāyamati C. but Rhys Davids. “to get away from”); as “assert” at Ja v.117.
Caus. of patarati
lord, master, owner, leader.
1. in general DN iii.93 (khettānaṃ p. gloss adhipati). Mostly-˚; see under gavam˚, gaha˚, dāna˚, yūtha˚, senā˚.
2. husband SN i.210; Snp 314; Ja iii.138; Pv-a 161. See also sapatika (with her husband), patibbatā & patika.;
-kula her husband’s clan Thag-a 283; Vv-a 206; -devatā a devoted wife Ja iii.406; Vv-a 128.
Ved. pati, Av. paitis lord, husband; Gr. πόσις husband, Lat. potis, potens, possum, hos-pes; Goth brūp-faps bridegroom, hunda faps centurion, Lith. pāts husband
(indecl.) [Vedic prati etc.) a doublet of paṭi; both often found side by side; pati alone always as prep (with acc.) and as prefix with sthā (paṭiṭṭhāti, patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are referred to the form with paṭi˚, except in the case of patiṭṭh˚. The more frequent cases are the foll.: patikāra, ˚kuṭati, ˚caya ˚dissati, ˚nandati, ˚manteti, ˚māneti, ˚ruddha, ˚rūpa ˚līna, ˚sallāna, etc. ˚sibbati, ˚sevati, ˚ssata, ˚ssaya ˚ssava.
(adj.) having a husband in mata˚ “with husband dead,” a widow Thig 221 (= vidhuva Thag-a 179); Ja v.103 (ap˚ without husband, v.l. for appatīta, C. explns by assāmika) pavuttha˚ (a woman) whose husband lives abroad Vin ii.268; Vin iii.83; Mil 205 (pavuttha˚). See also pañcapatika & sapatika.;
only f. patikā and only as-˚
at Vism 28 is to be read pātika (vessel, bowl, dish).
(& Patiṭṭhāti) to stand fast or firmly, to find a support in (loc.), to be established (intrs.), to fix oneself, to be set up, to stay; aor. patiṭṭhahi Dhp-a iii.175 (sotāpattiphale), Pv-a 42 (id.), 66 (id.); Vv-a 69 (sakadāgāmiphale); and patiṭṭhāsi Mil 16 ■ fut. ˚ṭṭhahissati Ja v.458 (˚hessati); Dhp-a iii.171-ger. patiṭṭhāya Snp 506; Ja ii.2 (rajje); iii.52; v.458 (rajje); Mil 33; Pv-a 142 ■ pp. patiṭṭhita (q.v.). Caus. patiṭṭhāpeti (q.v.).
paṭi + sthā
(f.) support, resting place, stay, ground, help also (spiritual) helper, support for salvation SN i.1 (ap˚) ii.65; iii.53; Snp 173; Dhp 332; Ja i.149; Ja iv.20; Mil 302; Dhs-a 261; Vv-a 138; Pv-a 53, Pv-a 60 (= dīpa), 87 (= dīpa), 141 (su˚), 174 (su˚ = dīpa).
fr. pati + sthā. Cp. Ved. pratiṣṭhā support, foundation
(nt.) fixing, setting up, support, help, ground (for salvation Snp 1011: Pv-a 123.
fr. paṭi + sthā cp. late Sk. pratiṣṭhāna
put down, set down, established Pv-a 139.
pp. of patiṭṭhāpeti
one who establishes AN v.66.
n. ag. of patiṭṭhāpeti
to establish, set up, fix, put into, instal DN i.206; SN i.90; Ja i.152; Ja i.168, Ja i.349 (sotāpatti-phale) Pv-a 22 (id.), 38 (id.) 50 (saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca), 223 (id.), 76 (ceṭiyaṃ), 78 (upāsakabhāve), 131, 132 (hatthe)-aor. patiṭṭhāpesi Ja i.138 ■ pp. patiṭṭhāpita (q.v.).
Caus. of patiṭṭhahati, cp. BSk. praṭiṣṭhāpayati Jtm 224
having one’s footing in, hold on, tenacity Dhs 381 = Nd ii.271iii Dhs-a 253. The v.l. at Nd ii.is paṭiggāha which is also read by Dhs.
fr. patiṭṭhahati
established in (loc.), settled, fixed, arrayed, stayed, standing, supported founded in DN iii.101 (supatiṭṭhita-citta); MN i.478; SN i.40 SN i.45, SN i.185 (dhammesu); Iti 77; Snp 409, Snp 453; Ja i.51 (kucchimhi), 262 (rajje); Pv i.44; ii.969 (dussīlesu); Mil 282; Vv-a 110 (˚gabbhā), 259 (˚saddha); Pv-a 34 (jāta + -nt. ˚ṃ arrangement, settling, in pañca˚; the fivefold array, a form of respectful greeting, see under pañca.
pp. of patiṭṭhahati
to be obdurate, to offer resistance AN i.124; AN ii.203; AN iii.181 sq. Ja iv.22 (aor. ˚ṭṭhīya); Pp 36; Kp-a 226.
only apparently (Pass.) to patiṭṭhahati, of sthā, but in reality = Sk. prati-sthyāyate, of sthyā, see thīna. Ought to be paṭitthīyati; but was by popular analogy with patiṭṭhāya changed to patiṭṭhīyati
fallen Dhp 68, Dhp 320; Ja i.167; Mil 187; Pv-a 31 (read pātita), 56.
pp. of patati
(adj.) thrown or fallen into (loc.), dropped Vism 62.
fr. last
to stand up again Thag 173.
paṭi + titthati
a bank of a river or lake, su˚ (adj.) with beautiful banks SN i.90; Pv ii.120 (= sundaratittha Pv-a 77).
pa + tittha
(f.) a devoted wife (cp. patidevatā) Ja ii.121; Ja vi.533; Vv-a 56, Vv-a 110.
pati + vatā
see paṭi˚.
pleased, delighted Dhp 68; Snp 379, Snp 679; Vv 8410 (= pahaṭṭha Vv-a 337) ■ neg. appatīta displeased MN i.27; Ja v.103 (v.l. appatika, C explns by assāmika, i.e. without husband).
pp. of pacceti
see patati.
in phrase alam-pateyya at DN iii.71 (kumārikā alam-pateyyā), 75 (id.) means “surely fit to have husbands, ripe for marriage” (?)
a goad, driving stick, prick, spur MN i.124; MN iii.97; SN iv.176; AN ii.114 AN iii.28; AN iv.91; AN v.324; Thag 210; Ja i.57, Ja i.192; Dhs 16 Dhs 20, Dhs 292; Pp 25; Snp-a 147; Thag-a 174; Sdhp 367.
-laṭṭhi a driver’s stick, goad-stick [cp. BSk. pratodayaṣṭi Divy 7, Divy 76, Divy 463, Divy 465] DN i.105, DN i.126; Ja vi.249; Mil 27; Dhp-a i.302; Dhp-a ii.38; Dhp-a iv.216; Vv-a 64. As ˚yaṭṭhi at Dpvs xi.30.
fr. pa + tud cp. Ved. pratoda
(adj. n.) lit. pushing, spurring; only in phrase aṅguli˚; nudging with one’s fingers Vin iii.84 = Vin iv.110 (here to be taken as “tickling”); DN i.91 (cp Dial. i.113); AN iv.343.
fr. pa + tud
(nt.) 1. the wing of a bird, a feather Vin iv.259; DN i.71. kukkuṭa˚ a hen’s quill (for sewing) Vin ii.215–2. a leaf MN i.429; Snp 44 = Snp 64 (sañchinna˚, see Nd ii.625); 625 (pokkhara˚ lotus l.); Dhp 401 (id.); Nd i.135 (paduma˚); Pv ii.95 (= paṇṇa Pv-a 15); Vv-a 147 (tāla˚); Thag-a 71; Pv-a 283 (nigrodha˚). asi-patta-vana “sword-leaf-forest” (a forest in Niraya) Snp 673; Pv-a 221.
3. a small thin strip of metal at the lute Mil 53; Vv-a 281.
-āḷhalka a toy measure made of palm-leaves Vin ii.10 Vin iii.180; DN i.6 (cp. DN-a i.86); MN i.266; AN v.203; Mil 229. -gandha odour of leaves Dhs 625. -nāḷī rib of a feather Dhp-a i.394. -phala leaf-fruit, a leaf and fruit vegetables Snp 239 (= yaṃ kiñci harita-pannaṃ Snp-a 283); Pv-a 86. -yāna having wings as vehicle, “winggoer,” i.e. a bird Snp 606 (= pattehi yantī ti pattayānā Snp-a 465); Ja ii.443. -rasa taste of leaves Dhs 629 juice of leaves Vin i.246 (+ puppharasa & ucchurasa); -salākā leaf-ticket Dhp-a iv.65.
Ved. patra, to *pet as in patati (q.v. & see also paṇṇa); cp. Gr. πτερόν wing, πτέρυς id.; Lat penna feather = Ger. fittig.; acci-piter; Ohg. fedara = E feather etc.
(m. & nt.) a bowl, esp the alms-bowl of a bhikkhu Vin i.46, Vin i.50, Vin i.51, Vin i.61, Vin i.224 (patte pūresuṃ); ii.111, 126, 224, 269; SN i.112; AN iv.344; Snp 413, Snp 443; Ja i.52, Ja i.55 (pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipati), 69; iii.535 (puṇṇa ˚ṃ deti to give a full bowl, i.e. plenty); v.389 (pl. pattāni); Vism 108 (āṇigaṇṭhik’ āhato ayopatto); Dhp-a iv.220 (˚ṃ pūreti) Pv-a 35, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 76, Pv-a 88, Pv-a 141 ■ Two kinds of bowls are mentioned at Vin iii.243, viz. ayo˚ of iron & mattikā˚ of clay, dāru˚ a wooden bowl Vin ii.112, Vin ii.143. uda˚ a bowl of water or a water-bowl MN i.100; SN v.121; AN iii.230 sq. cp. odapattakinī ■ pattassa mukhavaṭṭi Ja v.38 ■ fut. pātī (q.v.).
-ādhāraka bowl support, bowl-hold Vin ii.113 -kaṇḍolikā a wicker-work stand for a bowl Vin ii.114 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.86). -gata gone into the bowl alms given Thag 155; Pv iv.73. -gāhāpaka one who is going to take a bowl, a receiver of a b. Vin ii.177 (+ sāṭiya˚ etc.); AN iii.275. -cīvara bowl and robe (see note in Dial ii.162) Vin i.46; Vin ii.78, Vin ii.194; SN i.76; Ja iii.379; Pv ii.1316; DN-a i.45, DN-a i.186; Pv-a 61. -tthavikā a bag to carry a bowl in Vin ii.114; Ja iii.364; Vv-a 40, Vv-a 63 Kp-a 45. -dhovana “bowl-washing,” (the water used for) washing the bowl Vin ii.214. -pāṇin hand on bowl, bowl in hand Snp 713; Iti 89 = SN iii.93≈; onīta˚ removing the hand from the bowl: see onīta. -piṇḍika “eating from one vessel only” AN iii.220. -maṇḍala a circular artificial bottom of a bowl Vin ii.112. -māḷaka a raised parapet (?) on which to put the bowl Vin ii.114 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.86). -mūla the bottom of the bowl Vin ii.269. -vaṭṭi the brim of a bowl SN iv.168. -saññin paying attention to one’s bowl Vin ii.214.
Ved. pātra, fr. Idg. *pōtlom = Lat. poculum beaker, Oir. ōl. See pāna & pibati
obtained, attained, got, reached (pass. & med.) Snp 55, Snp 138, Snp 478, Snp 517, Snp 542, Snp 992; Dhp 134 (nibbānaṃ) 423; Ja i.255 (vināsaṃ); iv.139 (samuddaṃ) Pv-a 4 (anayavyasanaṃ), 5 (sīsacchedaṃ), 71 (manussabhāvaṃ). Very frequent as-˚ and in meaning equal to finite verb or other phrase, when spelling ˚ppatta is restored (Sk. prāpta), e.g. ummādappatta out of mind Pv-a 6; jara˚ old Ja iii.394; dukkha˚ afflicted with pain Ja vi.336; domanassa˚ dejected Ja ii.155; patti˚ attained one’s (possible) share Iti 32; bala˚ (become) strong DN ii.157; vaya˚ (become) old, come of age Ja ii.421 (+ soḷasa-vassa-kāle); Pv-a 68; somanassa˚ pleased Ja iii.74; haritu˚ covered with green MN i.343; Ja i.50 Ja i.399. Also as ˚-, but less frequent, meaning often equal to prep. “with,” “after,” etc., as pattâbhiseka after consecration Dhp-a iv.84; Snp-a 484; pattuṇṇa with wool Snp-a 263; ˚dhamma mastering the Dh. Vin i.16; the same at Dhp-a iv.200 in meaning of patti˚, i.e. “merit attained”; ˚mānasa (?) Iti 76 (v.l. satta˚); ˚sambodhi Iti 97 (v.l. satta˚) ■ Opp. appatta not obtained (see also patti 2), i.e. without Dhp 272 (cp. Dhp-a iii.58); Pp 51 (˚pānabhojana, so read for appanna˚) ■ Cp. sam
pp. of pāpuṇāti
at Dpvs xi.18 for pattin or pattika, foot-man, infantry.
downcast, dejected, disappointed Vin ii.77 = Vin iii.162 (trsld “with fallen hearts,” expld as patita, see Vin. Texts iii.13); SN i.124; MN i.132, MN i.258; MN iii.298; AN iii.57; Ja v.17; Mil 5.
perhaps patta1 + khandha, thus “leaf- shouldered,” i.e. with shoulders drooping like leaves; the Commentators explain patta as contracted form of patita fallen, thus “with shoulders falling.” We may have to deal with an old misspelling for panna (= pa + nam bent down, put down), which expln would suit the sense better than any other
(nt.) a (little) bowl Thig 28.
fr. patta2
(nt.) (-˚) the fact of being furnished or possessed with Vism 524.
abstr. fr. patta3
(adj.) to be gained or attained; nt. that which can be attained or won Snp-a 443. See also pattiya2.
grd. of pāpuṇāti
(˚lī) (f.) plantain Thig 260 (= kadali Thag-a 211).
according to Kern, Toev. s. v. to be read as either sattali or sattalā
on foot, one who is on foot, a foot-soldier Vin iv.105 (as one of the 4 constituents of a senā or army, viz. hatthī elephants, assā horses, rathā chariots, pattī infantry); Ja iv.494 (hatthī assā, rathā, pattī); 463 (hatthī assā rathā, pattī senā padissate mahā); Vism 19. Cp. pattika1.
-kāya a body of foot soldiers, infantry SN i.72 (cp BSk. same, at Jtm 215 with hasty-aśva-ratha˚). -kārika (for ˚kārika, of prec.) a foot soldier, lit. one of a body of infantry Ja iv.134; Ja v.100; Ja vi.15 (hatthāruhā anīkaṭṭhā rathikā pattikārikā), 21, 463 (hatthī assā rathikā p.).
Ved. patti, *pad (of pada) + ti
(f.) 1. (-˚) obtaining, acquiring, getting, entering into, state of SN i.189 = Thag 1230 (nibbāna˚); Snp 68 (paramattha˚) 186 (nibbāna˚); Pv-a 5 (vyasana), 112 (id.); Sdhp 379.
2. attainment, acquisition SN ii.29 (aggassa) Snp 425 (yogakkhemassa); Nd ii.390 (= lābhā paṭilābhā adhigamo phusanaṃ sacchikiriyā); esp. in phrase apattassa patti “attt of the unattained” DN iii.255; AN iv.332; SN i.217; SN ii.29; AN ii.148; AN iii.179; Kv 581. 3. gaining, gain, profit, advantage SN i.169 (brahma “best vantage ground”).
4. merit, profit, in special sense of a gift given for the benefit of someone else (as a “dakkhiṇǡ”), accrediting, advising, transference of merit, a gift of merit Ja ii.423, Ja ii.425 (= dakkhiṇā); iv.21; Dhp-a i.270 (opp. to mūla price); ii.4; iv.200 sq. (opp. to mūla). See also cpds. ˚dāna & ˚dhamma.
5. that which obtains (as a rule), occasion, happening, state place, as gram. t. t. loc. pattiyaṃ or pattiyā (-˚) in lieu of Snp-a 310, Snp-a 317 ■ See sam˚.;
-dāna an assigned or accredited gift, giving of merit (as permanent acquisition), transference of merit Vv-a 188, Vv-a 190; Pv-a 9 (˚vasena dānadhamma-pariccāgo), 49 (= dakkhiṇā) 88 (id.); Sdhp 229. -dhamma the practice of transferred merit, see Kvu trsln 1611, 170, & cp pattadhamma.; -patta, one who has obtained what can be obtained, or the highest gain (i.e. Nibbāna) Snp 536 (= pattabbaṃ patto pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ patto ti vuttaṃ hoti Snp-a 433), 537, 540.
Classical Sk. prāpti fr. pa + āp, cp. patta3
(f.) leaf, leafy part of a plant Vin i.201 (taka, taka-patti, taka-paṇṇi).
for patta1?
on foot, a pedestrian or soldier on foot, DN i.50, DN i.89, DN i.106, DN i.108; DN ii.73; AN ii.117 (hatth’-āruha, assāruha, rathika, p.); Ja vi.145; Vism 396 (manussā pattikā gacchanti); Snp 418; a form pattikārika is found, e.g. at Ja iv.134; Ja v.100; Ja vi.15 Ja vi.463; Ap. 316.
fr. patti1 cp. pajja2
having a share, gain or profit; a partner, donor Dhp-a i.270, Dhp-a i.271.
fr. patti2
(adj.-n.) in dāru˚; (collecting alms) with a wooden bowl, man with a wooden bowl DN i.157 (cp. DN-a i.319).
fr. patta2
(f.) a leaf, in tāla˚; palm-leaf SN ii.217, SN ii.222.
fr. patta1 or patti3
(adj. n.) attaining, one who obtains or gains Snp 513 (kiṃ˚ = kiṃ patta, adhigata Snp-a 425).
fr. patta3, Sk. *prāptin
(adj. n.) believing, trusting, relying Ja v.414 (para˚) (m.) belief, trust Ja v.231 (parapattiyena by relying on others), 233 (id.), 414 (id.).
for *pratyaya = paccaya, cp. Trenckner, Notes 73, 9
(adj.) to be attained, to be shared or profited Pv ii.931 (para˚ profitable to others, see expln at Pv-a 125).
grd. of pāpuṇāti; cp. pattabba
to believe, trust, rely on Ja i.426; Ja v.403; DN-a i.73.
denom. fr. pattiya1
(nt.) belief Ja v.402.
fr. pattiyāyati
to gain, to profit from (acc.) Mil 240 (attānaṃ na p. does not profit from himself).
denom. fr. patti2
a lonely place, in cpd. vana˚; DN i.71; Pp 59 etc., a wilderness in the forest, expld by Bdhgh as “gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāra-ṭṭhānaṃ yattha na kasanti na vapanti” DN-a i.210; Ud 43 (patthañ ca sayan’ āsanaṃ, ed.; but better with id. p. Dhp 185 as pantañ, which is expld at Dhp-a iii.238 by “vivittaṃ, i, e. separately). Cp. with this Sk. vana-prastha a forest situated on elevated land.
fr. pa + sthā. Cp. Epic Sk. prastha plateau
a Prastha (certain measure of capacity) = 1/4 of an Āḷhaka; a cooking utensil containing one Prastha Dhp-a ii.154; Snp-a 476 (cattāro patthā āḷhakaṃ).
cp. late Sk. prastha
stretched, spread out Ja i.336; Vism 364; DN-a i.311.
pp. of pattharati
hermitage MN ii.155.
pa + thandila
(quite) stiff Vin ii.192; Thag 1074.
pa + thaddha
(f.) aiming at, wish, desire, request aspiration, prayer SN ii.99, SN ii.154; AN i.224; AN iii.47; AN v.212 Nd i.316, Nd i.337 (p. vuccati taṇhā); Nd ii.112; Ne 18, Ne 27; Dhs 1059; Mil 3; Snp-a 47, Snp-a 50; Dhp-a ii.36; Pv-a 47-patthanaṃ karoti to make a wish Ja i.68; Dhp-a i.48 ˚ṃ ṭhapeti id. Dhp-a i.47; Dhp-a ii.83; Dhp-a iv.200.
of ap + arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati & prārthana nt., prārthanā f.
1. stone, rock SN i.32.
2. stoneware Mil 2.
cp. late Sk. prastara. The ord. meaning of Sk. pr. is “stramentum”
to spread, spread out, extend Ja i.62; Ja iv.212; Ja vi.279; Dhp-a i.26; Dhp-a iii.61 (so read at Ja vi.549 in cpd ˚pāda with spreading feet, v.l. patthaṭa˚)-pp. patthaṭa (q.v.) ■ Caus. patthāreti with pp patthārita probably also to be read at Thag 842 for padhārita.
pa + tharati
a merchant Vin ii.135 (kaṃsa˚).
fr. patthara
wished for, desired, requested, sought after Snp 836; Mil 227, Mil 361; Dhp-a iv.201; Pv-a 47 (˚ākāra of the desired kind, as wished for) Sdhp 79 (a˚).
pp. of pattheti
stiff DN ii.335; Dhs-a 307. Also as patthinna at Vin i.286 (= atirajitattā thaddha Bdhgh on p. 391); Vism 361 (= thīna p. 262); Vb-a 67 (˚sneha).
pa + thīna
to wish for, desire, pray for, request, long for SN iv.125; SN v.145; Snp 114 Snp 899; Thig 341; Nd i.312, Nd i.316; PugA 208 (āsaṃsati + ) Pv-a 148; Sdhp 66, Sdhp 319; ppr. patthento Pv-a 107 patthayanto Ja i.66 (paramâbhisaṃbodhiṃ); patthayaṃ Snp 70 (= icchanto patthayanto abhijappanto Nd ii.392) patthayamāna MN i.4; Snp 902; Ja i.259; Dhp-a iii.193; Pv-a 226 (= āsiṃsamāna); & patthayāno; Snp 900; Iti 67 Iti 115 ■ grd. patthetabba Pv-a 96, patthayitabba Pv-a 95, and patthiya which only occurs in neg. form apatthiya what ought not to be wished Ja iv.61; Pv ii.67 (= apatthayitabbaṃ Pv-a 95); Dhp-a i.29; also as napatthiya (med.) one who does not wish for himself Snp 914 (cp. Nd ii.337) ■ pp. patthita (q.v.).
pa + arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati
see pāpuṇāti.
1 path, road, way DN i.63; Snp 176 (loc. pathe), 385, 540 868; Nd ii.485 B (+ pantha, in expln of magga); Ja i.308 (loc. pathe); ii.39; vi.525 (abl. pathā); Thag 64; Pp 22, Pp 57; Mvu 21, Mvu 24 (pathe); 36, 93 (loc. pathi, see Geiger, Gr. § 89); Sdhp 241.
2. Very frequent as-˚, where it is sometimes pleonastic, and acts in the function of an abstract formation in ˚tā or ˚ttaṃ (cp similar use of anta: see anta1 5; and pada: see pada 3), e.g. anila˚ (air) Ja iv.119; anupariyāya˚ AN iv.107 ādicca˚ (path of the sun, sky) Dhp-a iii.177; ummagga SN i.193; kamma˚ Dhp-a i.36; gaṇana˚ (range of) calculation Mil 20; cakkhu˚ Ja iv.403 (= cakkhūnaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ C.); catummahā˚ AN iii.28, AN iii.42, AN iii.394; dve˚ Vv 5317; nakkhatta˚ Dhp 208; yañña˚ (= yañña) Nd ii.524 yogga˚ AN iii.122; rajā˚ SN ii.219; rāga˚ (sensuality SN iv.70; vacana˚ (way of saying, speech) Vv 6317 (= vacana Vv-a 262), etc. See also cakkhu˚, ñeyya˚ dveḷhā˚, manussa˚, yañña˚, vāda˚, sagga˚, hattha˚ der. pātheyya ■ See also byappatha ■ apatha where there is no way or road, wrong way Ja ii.287; Thag-a 255; Vv-a 337.
-addhan “the journey or stretch of the path”: see under addhan. -addhi (?) so perhaps to be read for patatthi, according to Fausböll Ja vi.276. Unclear in meaning, expld by nibbiddha vīthi (frequented road? -gamana “going on their course,” of the stars DN i.10 (see Dial. i.20 “their usual course”).
of path, Ved. pathi with the 3 bases pathi, path˚ and panth˚, of which only the last two have formed independent nouns, viz. patha and pantha (q.v.)
belonging to the earth, ruler of the earth (?) AN iv.90 (reading uncertain).
fr. pathavi = paṭhavi
see paṭhavi.
a traveller Vin iv.108; Ja vi.65; DN-a i.298.
fr. patha
(nt.) 1. foot Dhp 273 = Snp-a 366 (? saccānaṃ caturo padā); DN-a i.85; usually -˚, like hatthipadaṃ elephant’s foot MN i.176, MN i.184; SN i.86; SN v.43, SN v.231; and with numerals dvi˚ & di˚, catup˚, aṭṭha˚ (q.v.). In aṭṭha˚ also meaning “square of a chessboard.”
2. step, footstep track Dhp 179 (of a Buddha, cp. Dhp-a iii.194 & 197; Ja i.170 (footmark) ii.154; in redupl ■ iterative formation padāpadaṃ step by step Snp 446 (v.l. padânupadaṃ), and pade padaṃ Snp p.107 (cp. Snp-a 451).
3 (Often synonymous with ˚patha i.e. way, kind, & sometimes untranslatable) (a) lit. way, path, position, place Vin ii.217 (nakkhatta˚ constellation); Ja i.315 (assama = assama); v.75 (id.), 321 (id.); vi.76 (id.); vi.180 (v.l. patha; C. mahāmagga); mantapada = manta DN i.104 (cp. DN-a i.273). See also janapada, saggapada-(b) in appld meaning (modal): case, lot, principle part, constituent, characteristic, ingredient, item, thing element MN i.176 (cattāri padāni 4 characteristics) SN i.7 (pade pade “now in this thing, now in that C. ārammaṇe ārammaṇe), 212 (amataṃ p. = nibbāna) ii.280 (id.); AN ii.51 (id.), Iti 39 (p. asankhataṃ = nibbāna); Snp 88 (dhammapade sudesite; expld as nibbānadhamma Snp-a 164; dhammapada = Dhamma), ibid (anavajja-padāni sevamāna = principles), 700 (moneyyaṃ uttamaṃ padaṃ, thing; but Snp-a 491 expls as uttama-paṭipadaṃ), 765; Dhp 21, Dhp 93, Dhp 114 (amataṃ) 254, 368 (santaṃ = nibbānass’ etaṃ nāmaṃ, santakoṭṭhāsaṃ Dhp-a iv.108); Pv iv.348 (amataṃ); Ne 2 Ne 192 (nava padāni kusalāni); Snp-a 397 (nāmādi p.) Sdhp 47 (accutaṃ santaṃ p.), 615 (paramaṃ). See further dhamma˚, nibbāna˚, santi˚, sikkhā˚.
4. a word, verse (or a quarter of a verse), stanza, line, sentence SN ii.36 (ekena padena sabbo attho vutto); SN iv.379 = AN v.320 (agga˚); AN ii.182 (+ vyañjana desanā); 189 (attha˚ text, motto); iii.356 (id.); Snp 252 (= dhamma-desanā Snp-a 293), 374; Dhp 273; Ja i.72 (atireka-pada-satena); Ne 4 (akkharaṃ padaṃ vyañjanaṃ cp. nāmādīhi padehi at Snp-a 397, which is to be understood as nāma, pada & vyañjana, i.e. word, sentence & letter, cp. Mptp. 104, 74
76); Mil 148 (āhacca˚); Kp-a 169; Snp-a 409 (ubhaya˚), 444; Vv-a 3, Vv-a 13; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 117 (word, term). abl. padaso (adv.) sentence by stce or word by word Vin iv.14 (dhammaṃ vāceti = anupadaṃ C.; cp. Kp-a 190 p ˚dhamma). At MN-a i.2 pada (sentence or division of a sentence) is contrasted with akkhara (word), when it is said that the Majjhima Nikāya consists of 80,523 padas and 740,053 akkharas ■ Neg. apada (1) without feet footless AN iv.434 (Māra; v.l. apara); Iti 87 (sattā, dvipada etc.) ■ (2) trackless, leaving no footprint, fig having no desires (i.e. signs of worldliness) Dhp 179 (rāga, etc., as padāni Dhp-a iii.197, but cp. also p. 194.)
-attha meaning of a word Kp-a 81, Kp-a 84; Snp-a 91 -ānupadaṃ (adv.) on the track Dhp-a ii.38. -ānupadika following one’s footsteps Ja ii.78; Dhp-a ii.94 (therānaṃ) nt. adv. ˚ṃ close behind Dhp-a i.290. -ānupubbatā (or ˚ta) succession of words Nd i.140 (in expln of “iti” cp. Snp-a 28); Nd ii.137 (id.; reading ˚ka). -uddhāra synopsis of a verse Snp-a 237 (atthuddhāra + ). -kusala clever at following a trail Ja iii.501, Ja iii.505. -cārikā a female (foot-) servant Ja iv.35. -cetiya “step-shrine,” a holy footprint, a miraculous footprint left on the ground by a holy man Dhp-a iii.194. -ccheda separation of words parsing Snp-a 150. -jāta (nt.) pedal character SN i.86 -ṭṭhāna [cp. Sk. padasthāna footprint] “proximate cause” (Cpd. 13, 23) Ne 1 sq., 27 sq., 40 sq., 104 Vism 84. -dvaya twofold part (of a phrase), i.e. antecedent and subsequent Dhs-a 164. -parama one whose highest attainment is the word (of the text, and not the sense of it) AN ii.135; Ja vi.131; Pp 41 (“vyañjanapadam eva paramaṃ assā ti” PugA 223. -pāripūrī (f.) expletive particle Nd ii.137; Snp-a 28. -pūraṇa filling out a verse; as tt. g. expletive particle Snp-a 590 (a) 139 (kho), 137 (kho pana), 378 (tato), 536 (pi), 230 (su) 416 (ha), 377 (hi); Kp-a 219 (tam), 188 (su); Vv-a 10 (maya). -bhājana dividing of words, i.e. treating each word (of a phrase) separately Dhs-a 234. -bhājaniya division of a phrase Dhs-a 54. -bhāṇa reciting or preaching (the words of the Scriptures) Dhp-a ii.95 Dhp-a iii.345; Dhp-a iv.18. -vaṇṇanā expln of a pada or single verse Snp-a 65, Snp-a 237; Kp-a 125, Kp-a 132, Kp-a 228. -valañja a footprint track Ja vi.560; Dhp-a ii.38; Dhp-a iii.194. -viggaha separation of words, resolution of a compound into its components Vv-a 326. -vibhāga separation of words parsing Snp-a 269; Pv-a 34. -saṃsagga contact of words Nd i.139; Nd ii.137; Snp-a 28. -sadda sound of footsteps Snp p.80; Ja iv.409. -sandhi euphonic combination of words Nd i.445; Nd ii.137; Kp-a 155, Kp-a 224; Snp-a 28, Snp-a 40 Snp-a 157 etc.; Pv-a 52. -silā a stone for stepping on, flag Vin ii.121 = Vin ii.154.
Ved. pad, pād (m.) foot, and also pāda; pada (nt.) step. Cp. Gr. πώς (πούς) = Lat. pēs, Goth. fōtus = Ohg fuoz = E. foot; further Arm. het track, Gr. πεδά after, πέδον field, πεζός on foot, etc.; Lith. péda track; Ags. fetvan = E. fetch ■ The decl. in Pāli is vocalic (a), viz. pada; a trace of the consonant (root decl. is instr. sg. padā (Thag 457; Snp 768), of cons. (s decl. instr. padasā with the foot, on foot (DN i.107; Ja iii.371; Dhp-a i.391) ■ Gender is nt., but nom. pl. is frequently found as padā, e.g. at Dhp 273; Ne 192 (mūla˚)
(adj.) one who knows the padas (words or lines), versed in the padapāṭha of the Veda (Ep. of an educated Brahmin) DN i.88 = Snp p.105 (where Avs ii.19 in id. p. has padaśo = P. padaso word by word, but Divy 620 reads padako; ajjheti vedeti cā ti padako) MN i.386; AN i.163, AN i.166; Snp 595; Mil 10, Mil 236.
fr. pada4
(nt.) = pada 3, viz. basis, principle or pada 4, viz. stanza, line Ja v.116 (= kāraṇa-padāni C.).
(nt.) in cpd. aṭṭha˚; an “eight-foot,” i.e. a small inset square (cp. aṭṭha-pada chess-board) a patch (?) Vin i.297. See also padika.
fr. pada1
(adj.) 1. “to the right,” in phrase padakkhiṇaṃ karoti (with acc. of object) to hold (a person, etc.) to one’s right side, i.e. to go round so as to keep the right side turned to a person, a mode of reverential salutation Vin i.17; SN i.138; AN i.294 AN ii.21, AN ii.182; AN iii.198; Snp 1010; Ja i.50, Ja i.60; Ja iii.392. 2. “(prominent) with the right,” i.e. skilful, clever quick in learning Ja iv.469 (= susikkhita C.).
3. lucky auspicious, turning out well or favourable Ja v.353 (= sukha-nipphattin vuddhi-yutta C.).
-ggāhin “right-handed,” i.e. cleverly taking up (what is taught), good at grasping or understanding AN iii.79, AN iii.180, AN v.24 sq., 90, 338; Dhp-a ii.105 ■ Opp appadakkhiṇaggāhin “left-handed,” unskilled, untrained (cp. Ger. “linkisch”) SN ii.204 sq.; Ja iii.483 -ggāhitā skilfulness, quick grasp, cleverness Kp-a 148.
pa + dakkhiṇa
(nt.) being or constituting a lot, part or element Snp-a 164.
abstr. fr. pada
(nt.) 1. a cleft, split, fissure, crevice MN i.469; SN ii.32; Snp 720 (= darī Snp-a 500); combd with kandara at Mil 36, Mil 296 Mil 411; Pv-a 29.
2. a board, plank Ja ii.10 Ja ii.91 (˚sakaṭa 112; iii.181; v.47 sq.; vi.432 (˚cchanna); Snp-a 330 (dabba˚ oar), 355; Dhp-a ii.55; Dhp-a iii.296.
3. Wrong spelling for badara at Ja iv.363 (beluvā p˚āni ca); vi.529.
-sañcita filled with clefts (?) Vin iv.46. -samācāra refractiousness, disobedience (?) MN i.469.
pa + dara of dṛ; cp. dabba, darati, dāru
1. to strive, exert DN iii.221 (cittaṃ paggaṇhāti p.); Pv-a 31 (yoniso p.).
2. to confront take up, fight against, stand Ja vi.508 (usīraṃ muñjapubbajaṃ urasā padahessāmi “I shall stand against the grasses with my chest”; C. expls by dvedhā katvā purato gamissāmi, i.e. break and go forward). Note. padahasi at Ja iv.383 read pade hasi (see Windisch Māra & B.; p. 124 & Morris,; J.P.T.S. 1893, 51. Windisch takes padahasi as pa + dah to burn, & translates “du willst das Feuer brennen,” i.e. you attempt something impossible, because the fire will burn you) ■ pp pahita (q.v.).
pa + dhā
see padhāna.
extravagant, a squanderer Pdgp. 65, 68.
n. ag. of padāti
(padadāti, padeti) 1. to give, bestow Pv i.116 (ger. padatvā, perhaps better to read ca datvā as v.l. BB); Ja iii.279 (fut. padassati); v.394 (id.). 2. to acquire, take, get Ja i.190 (inf. padātave, C. gahetuṃ) ■ Pass padīyati (q.v.).
pa + dā
(nt.) giving, bestowing; but appears to have also the meaning of “attainment, characteristic attribute” AN i.102 (bāla˚ & paṇḍita˚); Ja i.97 (sotāpattimagg’ ādi˚); Pv-a 71 (anubala˚); Thag-a 35 (anupattidhammatā˚) ■ At Thag 47 Kern (Toev. ii.138) proposes to read tuyhaṃ padāne for T. tuyh’ âpadāne, and translates padāna by “footstep, footprint.” See also sampadāna.
fr. pa + dā
(nt.) splitting, tearing Thag 752.
pa + dṛ;
(nt.) cleaving, bursting open, breaking Ne 61, Ne 112 (mohajāla˚); Thag-a 34 (mohakkhandha˚).
fr. padāleti
broken, pierced, destroyed SN i.130; SN iii.83; AN v.88 (appadālita-pubbaṃ lobhakkhandhaṃ); Snp 546 (āsavā te p.; quoted at Vv-a 9); Thag-a 34 (as AN v.88 with moha˚).
pp. of padāleti
(nt.) the fact of having (med.) or being (pass.) pierced or broken, abl. padālitattā on account of having broken Mil 287.
abstr. fr. padālita
one who pierces or destroys, a destroyer, breaker, in phrase mahato kāyassa padāletā the destroyer of a great body (or bulk) AN i.284 sq. (in sequence dūre-pātin, akkhaṇavedhin, m. k. p.); ii.170 sq., 202; cp. padāleti1.
n. ag. to padāleti
1. to cleave, break, pierce, destroy, in combn ˚khandhaṃ padāleti to destroy the great mass of…, e.g. tamo˚ Iti 8 (padālayuṃ); Thig 28 (ger. padāliya = moha˚ padālitvā Thag-a 34); lobha SN v.88; avijjā˚ AN i.285.
2. to break, break down tear down, burst open Ja i.73 (pabbata-kūṭāni); iv.173 (matthakaṃ p˚etvā uṭṭhita-singā); v.68 (silāya matthakaṃ); Mil 332 (diṭṭhi-jālaṃ); DN-a i.37 (Sineruṃ) See also sam˚-pp. padālita (q.v.).
Caus. of pa + dal
(adj.) consisting of feet or parts,-fold; dvādasa˚ twelve fold Ja i.75 (paccayākāra).
fr. pada 1; cp. padaka3
kindled, set on fire, blazing SN iii.93 ≈ (chav’ âlataṃ ubhato padittaṃ) Ja vi.108; Sdhp 208 (˚angārakāsuṃ).
pp. of pa + dīp, cp. Sk. pradīpta
to flame forth, to blaze Cp iii.93 (davaḍāho p.) ■ pp. paditta (q.v.) ■ Caus. padīpeti (q.v.).
pa + dippati
(adj.) being seen, to be seen, appearing DN ii.205 (upasantappa˚).
grd. of padissati
to be seen Snp 108 (doubtful; v.l. padussati; expld at Snp-a 172 by paṭidissati v.l. padussati, cp. p. 192); Cp i.102 Ja vi.89 Sdhp 427.
pa + dissati, Pass. of dṛś
1. a light Dhp 146; Vv 462 (jalati blazes); Tikp 14; Mil 40; Vv-a 51 (padīpaṃ ujjāletvā lighting a lamp, making a light); Pv-a 38 Sdhp 250.
2. a lamp Snp 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yath âyaṃ p.); Dhp-a ii.163 (anupādāno viya p.). ˚ṃ karoti to make a light, to light up Vin i.118; ˚ṃ ujjāleti see under 1. Usually as tela-padīpa an oil lamp Vin i.15; SN ii.86 (telañ ca vaṭṭiñ ca telapadīpo jhāyati) = iv.213 v.319; AN i.137; Vv-a 198 ■ appadīpa where there is no light, obscure Vin iv.268.
-kāla lighting time Vv 96.
cp. Epic Sk. pradīpa
lit, burning, shining Mil 40. Padipiya & Padipeyya;
pp. of padīpeti
(nt.) that which is connected with lighting, material for lighting a lamp lamps & accessories; one of the gifts forming the stock of requisites of a Buddhist mendicant (see Nd ii.523 yañña as deyyadhamma). The form in ˚eyya is the older and more usual one, thus at AN ii.85, AN ii.203; AN iv.239; Iti 65; Pp 51; Vv-a 51 ■ The form in ˚iya at Vv 225 266, 376; Ja vi.315; Vv-a 295.
padīpa + (i) ya
to light a light or a lamp Vin i.118 (padīpeyya, padīpetabba); Mil 40; Thag-a 72 (Ap. v. 46); Sdhp 63, Sdhp 332, Sdhp 428 ■ pp. padīpita (q.v.).
Caus. of padippati
to be given out or presented; Pv ii.916; Sdhp 502, Sdhp 523.
Pass. of padāti
made bad, spoilt, corrupt, wicked, bad (opp. pasanna, e.g. at AN i.8; Iti 12, Iti 13; DN iii.32 (˚citta); MN iii.49; AN ii.30; Snp 662; Dhp 1; Ja ii.401; Dhp-a i.23 (opp. pasanna); Pv-a 34, Pv-a 43 (˚manasa) ■ appaduṭṭha good, not corrupt DN i.20; DN iii.32; MN iii.50; SN i.13; Pv iv.710.
pp. of padussati
to do wrong, offend, plot against Ja i.262 (ger. ˚dubbhitvā).
pa + dubbhati
(nt.) the lotus Nelumbium speciosum. It is usually mentioned in two varieties, viz. ratta˚; and seta˚; i.e. red and white lotus so at Ja v.37; Snp-a 125; as ratta˚ at Vv-a 191; Pv-a 157. The latter seems to be the more prominent variety; but paduma also includes the 3 other colours (blue, yellow pink?), since it frequently has the designation of pañcavaṇṇa-paduma (the 5 colours however are nowhere specified), e.g. at Ja i.222; Ja v.337; Ja vi.341; Vv-a 41. It is further classified as satapatta and sahassapatta- p., viz lotus with 100 & with 1,000 leaves: Vv-a 191. Compared with other species at Ja v.37, where 7 kinds are enumd as uppala (blue, red & white),; paduma (red white),; kumuda (white) and kallahāra. See further kamala and kuvalaya ■ (1) the lotus or lotus flower MN iii.93; SN i.138, SN i.204; AN i.145; AN ii.86 sq.; AN iii.26, AN iii.239; Snp 71, Snp 213; Ja i.51 (daṇḍa˚ Name of a plant, cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala), 76 (khandha˚, latā˚, daṇḍaka˚, olambaka˚) iv.3; vi.564; Dhp 458; Nd i.135; Vv 354 (= puṇḍarīka Vv-a 161); 4412 (nānā-paduma-sañchanna); Pv ii.120 (id.); ii.122 (id.); Pp 63; Vism 256 (ratta˚); DN-a i.219 Kp-a 53; Snp-a 97; Sdhp 359 ■ (2) Name of a purgatory (˚niraya) SN i.151–152; Snp 677; p. 126; Snp-a 475 sq.
-acchara (heavenly) lotus-maiden Snp-a 469 ■ uttara Name of Buddha Snp-a 341, Snp-a 455 etc. -kaṇṇikā a peak in the shape of a lotus Vv-a 181. -kalāpa a bunch of lotuses Vv-a 191. -gabbha the calyx of a l. Thag-a 68 (˚vaṇṇa). -patta a l. leaf Nd i.135 (= pokkhara); Dhp-a iv.166 (= pokkhara-patta). -puñja a l. cluster Ja iii.55. -puppha a lotus flower Nd ii.393; Snp-a 78. -rāga “lotus hued,” a ruby Vv-a 276. -vyūha one of the 3 kinds of fighting, viz. p.˚; cakka˚, sakaṭa˚ Ja ii.406 Ja iv.343 (cp. Sk. p ■ vyūha-samādhi a kind of concentration & see Ja trsl;nii.275). -sara a lotus pond Ja i.221 Ja v.337; Snp-a 141.
cp. Epic Sk. padma, not in RV.
1. the Paduma purgatory SN i.152.
2. a lotus Ja ii.325.
fr. paduma
(adj.-n.) having a lotus, belonging to a lotus, lotus-like; Name of (the spotted) elephant Snp 53 (expld at Snp-a 103 as “padumasadisa-gattatāya vā Padumakule uppannatāya vā padumī,” cp. Nd ii.p. 164) ■ f. paduminī [cp. Sk padminī lotus plant] 1. a lotus pond or pool of lotuses DN i.75; DN ii.38; MN iii.93; SN i.138; AN iii.26.
2. the lotus plant Nelumbium speciosum Ja i.128 (˚paṇṇa); iv.419 (˚patta); Snp-a 369; Kp-a 67 (˚patta); Pv-a 189.
cp. Sk. padmin, spotted elephant
in cpd. padulla-gāhin is perhaps misreading; trsl. “clutching at blown straws (of vain opinion), expld by C. as duṭṭhullagāhin; at id. p. SN i.187 we find duṭṭhullabhāṇin “whose speech is never lewd” (see Psalms of Brethren 399, n. 3).
?
to do wrong, offend against (with loc.), make bad, corrupt DN-a i.211 (see padosa); Snp 108 (v.l. for padissati); aor. padussi Ja ii.125, Ja ii.401 ■ pp paduṭṭha; Caus. padūseti (q.v.).
pa + dussati
made bad, corrupted, spoilt Iti 13 (v.l. padussita). Paduseti & Padoseti;
pp. of padūseti
to defile, pollute, spoil make bad or corrupt [cp. BSk. pradūṣyati cittaṃ Divy 197, Divy 286] DN i.20; MN i.129; Iti 86; DN-a i.211 (see padosa1) Thag-a 72 (Ap. v. 40; to be read for paduse, Pot. = padoseyya); Ja v.273 (manaṃ p., for upahacca) ■ padusseti read also at AN iv.97 for padasseti (dummanku ‘yam padusseti dhūm’ aggimhi va pāvako) ■ As padoseti at Pv-a 212 (cittāni padosetvā) and in stock phrase manaṃ padosaye (Pot.) in sense of “to set upon anger” (cp padosa2) SN i.149 (“sets his heart at enmity”) = AN ii.3 AN v.171, AN v.174 = Snp 659 (= manaṃ padoseyya Snp-a 477) Ne 132; SN iv.70; Snp-a 11 (mano padoseyya) ■ pp padūsita (q.v.).
Caus. of padussati, but the latter probably Denom. fr. padosa2
indication, location, range, district; region, spot, place SN ii.227, SN ii.254 SN v.201; AN ii.167 (cattāro mahā˚); Dhp 127 (jagati˚), 303; Ja ii.3, Ja ii.158 (Himavanta˚); iii.25 (id.), 191 (jāti-gottakula˚); Snp-a 355; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 33 (hadaya˚), 36 (so read for padase), 43, 47; Sdhp 252.
-kārin effecting a limited extent SN v.201. -ñāṇa knowledge within a certain range, limited knowledge SN v.457. -bodhisatta a limited Bodhisatta Kv 283 (cp. Kvu trsln 1393, 1662). -rajja principality over a district, local government Iti 15; Thag-a 26 (Ap. v. 10) -rājā a local or sub-king Vism 301 (cakkavatti + ). -lakkhaṇa regional or limited characteristics Kv 283 -vassin raining or shedding rain only locally or over a (limited) district Iti 64–66.
fr. pa + diś, cp. late Sk. pradeśa
(adj.) (-˚) belonging to a place of indication, indicating, regional, reaching the index of only with numerals in reference to age (usually soḷasavassa˚ at the time of 16 years) Ja i.259 (id.) 262 (id. ii.277 (id.) ■ See also uddesika in same application.
fr. padesa
defect, fault, blemish, badness, corruption, sin DN i.71 (= padussati paraṃ vā padūseti vināsetī ti padoso DN-a i.211); MN iii.3; SN iv.322 (vyāpāda˚); AN i.8 (ceto˚); iii.92 (vyāpāda); Iti 12; Ja v.99; Pp 59, Pp 68; Dhs 1060 ■ Note. At Thag-a 72 we find reading “apace paduse (padose?) pi ca” as uncertain conjecture for v.l. BB “amacce manase pi ca.”
pa + dosa1, Sk. pradoṣa
anger, hatred, ill-will; always as mano˚; “anger in mind” MN i.377; Snp 328 (= khāṇu-kaṇṭak’ ādimhi p Snp-a 334), 702; Ja iv.29; Mil 130; Vism 304; Snp-a 477.
pa + dosa2, Sk. pradveṣa, see remarks to dosa2
(adj.) sinful, spoiling or spoilt, full of fault or corruption, only in 2 phrases, viz. khiḍḍā˚ “debauched by pleasure” DN i.19; and mano˚; “debauched in mind” DN i.20, DN i.21.
fr. padosa1
(adj.) abusing, damaging, spoiling, injuring SN i.13 (appaduttha˚); Pv iv.710.
fr. padosa1
see padūseti.
(adj.) 1. expert in (loc. Ja vi.476 (v.l. patha = paṭṭha; C. cheko paṭibalo). 2. subject to, serving, attending Ja iv.35 (p. carāmi, so read for baḍḍha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.; C. padacārikā).
cp. Sk. prādhva (?) in diff. meaning “being on a journey,” but rather prahva
(adj.) half (?) Ja iii.95 (probably = paddha1, but C. explns as aḍḍha upaḍḍha).
cp. Sk. prārdha
(adj. n.) 1. going, walking Ja iii.95 (T. na p’ addhaguṃ, but C. reads paddhaguṃ)
2. humble, ready to serve, servant, attendant, slave SN i.104 (so read for paccagu); Snp 1095 (T. for paṭṭhagu q.v ■ Nd ii.reads paṭṭhagu but Snp-a 597 paddhagu and explns by paddhacara paricārika); Ja vi.380 (hadayassa) Thag 632.
cp. Sk. prādhvaga
(adj.-n.) ready to serve, subject to ministering; a servant SN i.144 (T. baddhacara, v.l. paṭṭha˚; trsl. “pupil”); Ja iv.35 (read paddhacarā ‘smi tuyhaṃ for T. baddha carāmi t., as pointed out by Kern Toev. s. v. baddha. The Cy. misunderstood the wrong text reading and expld as “tuyhaṃ baddha carāmi, but adds “veyyāvaccakārikā padacārikā”); v.327 (as baddhañcara; C. veyyāvacca-kara); vi.268 (˚ā female servant = C. pāda-paricārikā); Nd i.464 (+ paricārika) Snp-a 597 (+ paricāraka, for paddhagū).
paddha1 + cara, cp. Sk. prādhva and prahva humble
see paduma.
(m. & nt.) Name of a tree, Costus speciosus or arabicus Ja v.405, Ja v.420; Ja vi.497 (reading uncertain), 537.
Sk. padmaka
(nt.) a place before a door or gate Ja v.433; Ja vi.327.
-gāma suburb Dāvs v.3.
pa + dvāra
see appadhaṃsa.
to fall from (abl.), to be deprived of Vin ii.205 (yogakkhemā p.; so read for paddh˚) ■ Caus. padhaṃseti to destroy, assault, violate offend Ja iv.494. (= jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpeti); Pv-a 117. grd. padhaṃsiya in cpds. su˚ & dup˚ easily (or with difficulty) overwhelmed or assaulted Vin ii.256; SN ii.264. Also neg. appadhaṃsiya (& ˚ka); (q.v.). pp. padhaṃsita (q.v.).
pa + dhaṃsati
offended, assaulted Ja ii.422. See also app˚.
pp. of padhaṃseti
(nt.) exertion, energetic effort, striving, concentration of mind DN iii.30 DN iii.77, DN iii.104, DN iii.108, DN iii.214, DN iii.238; MN ii.174, MN ii.218; SN i.47; SN ii.268 SN iv.360; SN v.244 sq.; AN iii.65–67 (5 samayā and 5 asamayā for padhāna), 249; iv.355; v.17 sq.; Snp 424, Snp 428; Iti 30; Dhp 141; Ja i.90; Nd ii.394 (= viriya); Vb 218 (citta-samādhi p˚ etc.); Ne 16; DN-a i.104; Dhp-a i.85 (mahā-padhānaṃ padahitvā); Thag-a 174; Pv-a 134 Padhāna is fourfold, viz. saṃvara˚, pahāna˚, bhāvana˚ anurakkhaṇā˚ or exertion consisting in the restraint of one’s senses, the abandonment of sinful thoughts, practice of meditation & guarding one’s character. These 4 are mentioned at DN iii.225; AN ii.16; Pts i.84; Pts ii.14 sq. 56, 86, 166, 174; Ud 34; Nd i.45, Nd i.340; Sdhp 594. Very frequently termed sammappadhāna [cp. BSk samyak-pradhāna Mvu iii.120; but also samyakprahāṇa e.g. Divy 208] or “right exertion,” thus at Vin i.22; SN i.105; SN iii.96 (the four); AN ii.15 (id.); iii.12 iv.125; Nd i.14; Pts i.21, Pts i.85, Pts i.90, Pts i.161; Snp-a 124; Pv-a 98 ■ As padahana at Pts i.17, Pts i.21, Pts i.181.
fr. pa + dhā, cp. padahati
(adj.) making efforts, exerting oneself in meditation, practising “padhāna” DN-a i.251.
fr. padhāna
(adj.) belonging to or connected with exertion, worthy of being pursued in cpd. ˚aṅga (nt.) a quality to be striven after, of which there are 5 expressed in the attributes of one who attains them as saddho, appābādho, asaṭho, āraddha-viriyo, paññavā DN iii.237 = MN ii.95, MN ii.128 = AN iii.65; referred to at Mil trsln i.188. Besides these there is the set called pārisuddhi-padhāniy’ angāni and consisting either of 4 qualities (sīla˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚, vimutti˚) AN ii.194, or of 9 (the four + kankhā-vitaraṇa˚, maggâmagga-ñāṇa paṭipadāñāṇa-dassana˚, ñāṇa-dassana˚ paññā˚) DN iii.288; Pts i.28.
fr. padhāna
(“born in mind”) read patthārita at Thag 842 (see pattharati) ■ padhārehi (v.l. F.) at Snp 1149 read dhārehi ■ padhārita in meaning of “considered, understood” in cpd. su˚ at SN iii.6; SN v.278.
to run out or forth Pv iii.17 (ger. ˚itvā = upadhāvitvā Pv-a 173).
pa + dhāvati
(adj.) rushing or running out or forth MN ii.98.
fr. padhāvati
(= padhūpāyati) to blow forth smoke or flames Vin i.25 (aor. padhūpāsi); iv.109 (id.); Vism 400 (id.), (so read for padhūmāsi T., v.l. SS padhūpāyi & padhūmāyi) ■ pp.; padhūpita (q.v.).
pa + dhūpāyati
fumigated, reeking, smoked out SN i.133 (trsld “racked [wrapt] in flames”; C. santāpita) Vv-a 237 (so read with v.l. SS. for T. pavūsita; meaning scented, filled with scent).
pa + dhūpita, latter only in meaning “incensed,” cp. dhūpa etc.
(adj.) cleansed, in cpd. sup˚ well cleansed DN ii.324.
pa + dhota
(indecl.) adversative & interrogative particle, sometimes (originally, cp. puna “again, further”) merely connecting & continuing the story ■ (1) (adversative) but, on the contrary Ja i.222; Ja ii.159; Vv-a 79 (correl. with tāva). ca pana “but” Ja i.152; atha ca pana “and yet” DN i.139; Ja i.279; na kho pana “certainly not” Ja i.151; vā pana “or else” Vin i.83; Dhp 42; Snp 376, Snp 829 ■ (2) (in questions) then, now Ja ii.4 (kiṃ p.), 159 (kahaṃ p.) Vv-a 21 (kena p.); Pv-a 27 (katamaṃ p.) ■ (3) (conclusive or copulative) and, and now, further, moreover DN i.139 (siyā kho p. be it now that… ); Snp 23, Snp 393 Snp 396, Snp 670; Ja i.278; Pv-a 3.
doublet of Sk. puna(ḥ) wiṭh diff. meaning (see puna), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34
to dance (forth), to dance Thag-a 257 (ppr. panaccanta) ■ pp. panaccita (q.v.).
pa + naccati
dancing, made to dance Thig 390.
pp. of panaccati
the Jack or bread-fruit tree (Artocarpus integrifolia) and its fruit Ja i.450; Ja ii.160 Ja v.205, Ja v.465; Vv 4413; Kp-a 49, Kp-a 50, Kp-a 58 (˚phala, where Vism 258 reads panasa-taca); Snp-a 475; Vv-a 147.
cp. late Sk. panasa, Lat. penus stores, Lith. pẽnas fodder, perhaps Goth. fenea
to be lost, to disappear, to go to ruin, to cease to be MN i.177; SN ii.272 (read panassissati with BB); Ja v.401 Ja vi.239; Thag 143.
pa + nassati, cp. also BSk praṇāśa Divy 626
shouting out, shrieks of joy Ja vi.282.
pa + nāda
to shout out, to utter a sound Thag 310.
Caus. of pa + nad
(f.) a pipe, tube, channel, water course DN-a i.244.
fr. panāḷī
(f.) a tube, pipe AN iv.171 (udapāna˚).
pa + nāḷī
in cpd. appanigghosa is wrongly registered as such in A Index (for AN iv.88); it is to be separated appa + nigghosa (see nigghosa).
to dispel, repel, remove, push away SN i.167 sq., 173; Dhp 383; Snp 81, Snp 928 (pot. panudeyya or metri causa panūdeyya = pajaheyya etc. Nd i.385) Ja vi.491 (1. pl. panudāmase) ■ ger. panuditvā Snp-a 591, & panujja Snp 359, Snp 535, Snp 1055 (expld at Nd ii.395 as imper. pres. = pajaha, cp. Snp-a 591 = panudehi); Ja iii.14; Ja v.198 (= pātetvā C.) ■ Fut. panudahissati Thag 27, Thag 233 ■ Pass. panujjati, ppr. panujjamāna in phrase “api panujjamānena pi” even if repulsed MN i.108, cp. AN iv.32 & Ne 164 (v.l. to be substituted for T. pamajjamānena) ■ pp.; panunna & panudita; (q.v.).
pa + nudati
dispelled, driven out Snp 483 (panūdita metri causa, v.l. panudita). See also panunna. Panunna (Panunna & Panunna);
pp. of panudati
(med. & pass.) put away, rejected or rejecting, dispelled driven away, sent AN ii.29; AN v.31; Snp 469 (˚kodha) Ja vi.247, Ja vi.285; Kv 597 (ito p., trsld “ending here”).
-paccekasacca one who has rejected each of the four false truths (the 5th of the 10 noble states ariyavāsā: see Vin. Texts i.141) DN iii.269, DN iii.270; AN ii.41 AN v.29 sq.
pp. of panudati
(nt.) removal, dispelling, rejection Snp 252 (sabba-dukkhâpanūdana Snp-a 293 should be read as sabba-dukkha-apanūdana, as at Vin ii.148 = Ja i.94) 1106 (= pahānaṃ etc. Nd ii.396).
fr. panudati
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. prānta edge, margin, border, pra + anta; also BSk. prānta in meaning of Pali, e.g. Mvu iii.200; Divy 312 (prānta-śayan-āsana-sevin) distant, remote, solitary, secluded; only in phrase pantaṃ senāsanaṃ (sayanāsanaṃ) or pantāni senāsanāni “solitary bed & chair” MN i.17, MN i.30; AN i.60; AN ii.137 AN iii.103; AN v.10, AN v.202; Snp 72 (cp. Nd ii.93), 338, 960 (˚amhi sayanāsane), 969 (sayanamhi pante); Dhp 185 (= vivitta Dhp-a iii.238); Ud 43 (so read for patthañ); Ja iii.524 (˚amhi sayanāsane); Vism 73 (panta-senāsane rata) Snp-a 263 (v.l. pattha).
-sena (adj.) one who has his resting place far away from men, Ep. of the Buddha MN i.386.
(f.) a row, range, line Vism 392 (tisso sopāna-pantiyo) Dhp-a iii.219 (uddhana˚); Thag-a 72 (satta pantiyo) Vv-a 198 (amba˚).
Ved. pankti set or row of five, group in general
to come or go (by) a road, roadway, path SN i.18 (gen. pl. panthānaṃ kantāramagga C; “jungle road” trsl.); Snp 121 (loc panthasmiṃ); Nd ii.485 B (+ patha in expln of magga) Mil 157 (see panthaṃ)
-gū a traveller (lit. going by road) SN i.212 (v.l. addhagū, as at id. p. Thig 55); Ja iii.95 (v.l.). -ghāta highway robbery Ja i.253; Ja iv.184. -duhana waylaying robbery; m. a robber DN i.135 (see DA i.296); Ja ii.281 Ja ii.388; DN iii.68, and Tikp 280 (˚dūhana). -dūbhin a highwayman Ja ii.327. -dūsaka a robber Mil 20. -devatā a way spirit, a spirit presiding over a road, road-goddess Ja vi.527. -makkaṭaka a (road) spider Mil 364, Mil 407 -sakuṇa a “road-bird,” i.e. a bird offered (as a sacrifice) to the goddess presiding over the roads, propitiation; it is here to be understood as a human sacrifice Ja vi.527 (vv.ll. pattha˚ & bandha˚).;
base panthan˚, Ved. panthāḥ, with bases path˚ panth˚ and pathi. Same as patha (q.v.). For etym cp. Gr. πόντος sea(-path), πάτος path, Av. pantā˚, also Goth. finpan = E. find, of Idg *pent.
(for saṇṭhāna) at Snp-a 20: see saṇṭhāna 3.
a traveller Mil 20.
fr. pantha, formation panthika: panthan = addhika: addhan
fallen, gone, gone down; also: creeping only in foll. cpds.:
-ga a snake Thag 429 (˚inda chief of snake-demons) Ja v.166; Mil 23. -gandha with gone down (i.e. deteriorated) smell, ill-smelling, or having lost its smell Ja v.198 (= thokaṃ duggandha C.). -dhaja one whose flag gone or is lost, i.e. whose fight is over (Ep of the Buddha), cp. BSk. prapātito māna-dhvajaḥ Lal. V. 448 (with derivation from pat instead of pad cp. papātana) MN i.139 sq., 386; AN iii.84 sq.; in eulogy on the Buddha (see exegesis to mahesi Nd i.343; Nd ii.503) reference is made to mānadhaja (˚papātanaṃ which is opposed to dhamma-dhaja (-ussapana); thus we should explain as “one who has put down the flag of pride.” -bhāra one who has put down his burden, one whose load has gone, who is delivered or saved MN i.139; AN iii.84; SN i.233; Dhp 402 (= ohitakhandha-bhāra Dhp-a iv.168); Snp 626, Snp 914 (cp Nd i.334) Thag 1021. -bhūmi state of one who has fallen DN-a i.103 (opp. to jina-bhūmi, one of the 8 purisa-bhūmiyo-cp. DN i.54 & Dial. i.722). -loma one whose hairs have fallen or are put down (flat, i.e. do not stand erect in consequence of excitement), subdued, pacified (opp. haṭṭha loma) Vin ii.184 (cp. Vin ii.5 & Bdhgh on p. 309 lomaṃ pāteti, Bdhgh pādeti; also Vin. Texts ii.339); iii.266; MN i.450; Ja i.377. Another form is palloma (q.v. & cp.; J.P.T.S. 1889, 206). See also remarks on parada-vutta.
pp. of pajjati but not satisfactorily expld as such, for pajjati & panna never occur by themselves, but only in cpds. like āpajjati, āpanna, upp˚, upa˚, sam˚ etc. Besides, the word is only given in lexic. literature as pp. of pajjati, although a tendency prevails to regard it as pp. of patati. The meaning points more to the latter, but in form it cannot belong to; pat. A more satisfactory expln (in meaning and form) is to regard panna as pp. of pa + nam, with der. fr. short base. Thus panna would stand for panata (paṇata) as unna for unnata, ninna for ninnata, the double nn to be accounted for on analogy. The meaning would thus be “bent down, laid down,” as panna-ga going bent, panna-dhaja = flag bent or laid down etc. Perhaps patta of patta-kkhandha should belong here as panna˚
(adj.) silent (?) DN-a i.163.
fr. panna
(adj. num.) fifteen (and fifteenth), usually referring to the 15th day of the lunar month, i.e. the full-moon day Snp 153 (pannaraso uposatho); pannarase on the 15th day SN i.191 = Thag 1234; MN iii.20; Snp 502, Snp 1016 f. loc. pannarasāya id. SN i.233. See also paṇṇarasa.
see pañcadasa & paṇṇarasa under pañca
(num. ord.) the 15th Snp-a 366 (gāthā).
fr. pannarasa
(adj.) belonging to the 15th day (of the lunar month) Vin iv.315.
fr. pannarasa
(nt.) water Ja i.109 (āpaṃ papaṃ mahodakan ti attho). The word is evidently an etym. construction. See also papā.
see pibati, pānīya etc. of pā
to be cooked, to become ripe Pv-a 55 (˚itvā).
Pass. of pa + pacati
1. obstacle, impediment, a burden which causes delay hindrance, delay Dhp-a i.18; Dhp-a ii.91 (kathā˚). ˚ṃ karoti to delay, to tarry Ja iv.145; ˚ṃ akatvā without delay Ja i.260; Ja vi.392 ■ ati˚ too great a delay Ja i.64; Ja ii.92–2. illusion, obsession, hindrance to spiritual progress MN i.65; SN i.100; SN iv.52, SN iv.71; AN ii.161 sq.; AN iii.393 sq. Snp 530 (= taṇhā-diṭṭhi-mānabheda-p. Snp-a 431; and generally in Commentaries so resolved, without verbal analysis); Ud 77 (as f. papañcā); Thag 519, Thag 902, Thag 989 (cp. Brethren 344, 345 & J.R.A.S. 1906, 246 sq.; Neumann trsls “Sonderheit,” see Lieder p. 210, 211; Mittlere Sammlung i.119 in trsl. of MN i.65 nippapañca) Dhp 195, Dhp 254 (˚âbhiratā pajā, nippapañcā Tathāgatā = taṇhādisu p˚ esu abhiratā Dhp-a iii.378); Ja i.9; Pv iv.134 (= taṇh’-ādi-p. Pv-a 230); Ne 37, Ne 38; Snp-a 495 (gihi) ■ nippapañca (q.v.) without obsession. 3. diffuseness, copiousness Snp-a 40.
-saṅkhā sign or characteristic of obsession Snp 874 (cp. Snp-a 553; = taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚ and māna˚ Nd i.280), 916 (= avijjādayo kilesā mūlaṃ Snp-a 562) -saññā (˚sankhā) idea of obsession, idée fixe, illusion DN ii.277 (cp. Dial ii.312); MN i.109, MN i.112, MN i.271, MN i.383; SN iv.71.
in its P. meaning uncertain whether identical with Sk. prapañca (pra + pañc to spread out; meaning “expansion, diffuseness, manifoldedness”; cp. papañceti & papañca 3) more likely, as suggested by etym & meaning of Lat. im-ped-iment-um, connected with; pada, thus perhaps originally “pa-pad-ya,” i.e. what is in front of (i.e. in the way of) the feet (as an obstacle)
obsessed, illusioned Snp-a 495 (a˚ gihipapañ-cena) ■ nt. obsession, vain imagination illusion SN iv.203≈Vbh 390.
pp. of papañceti
1. to have illusions, to imagine, to be obsessed MN i.112; Dhp-a i.198 (tesaṃ suvaṇṇa-lobhena papañcentānaṃ).
2. to be profuse. to talk much, to delay on Snp-a 136 ■ pp. papañcita.
Denom. fr. papañca
(papatā) (f.) a broken-off piece, splinter, fragment; also proclivity precipice, pit (?) SN ii.227 (papatā ti kho lābha-sakkāra-silokass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; cp. SN iii.109: sobbho papāto kodh’ ûpāyāsass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ); So 665 (= sobbha Snp-a 479; gloss papada). See also pappaṭaka.
fr. papāta? Cp. papaṭikā
(f.) 1. a splinter piece, fragment, chip Vin ii.193 (read tato pap.˚) AN iv.70 sq. (of ayophāla); Ja v.333 (same as Vin passage); Mil 179.
2. the outer dry bark or crust of a tree, falling off in shreads; also shoots, sprouts MN i.78 MN i.192 sq., 488; AN i.152; AN iii.19 sq., 44, 200, 360; iv.99 336; v.4 sq., 314 sq.; Ja iii.491. Cp. pheggu.
cp. Sk. prapāṭikā (lexic. & gram.) young shoot, sprout; and parpharīka (RV.) one who tears to pieces; also Sk. parpaṭa Name of a plant
to fall forward, to fall down, off or from, to fall into (acc.) Vin ii.284; MN i.79, MN i.80; SN i.48 (visame magge), 187 (= Thag 1220 patanti) 100, ii.114; v.47; Dhp 336; Ja v.31; Pv i.1012 (nirayaṃ papatiss’ ahaṃ, cp. Pv-a 52; v.l. SS niray’ ûpapatiss âhaṃ) ■ aor. papatā Vin iii.17, cp. ii.126; Ja vi.566 See also patati.
pa + patati
(nt.) falling down Snp 576 = Ja iv.127 (abl. papatanā papatanato C.).
fr. pa + pat
(or Papadā ?) tip of the foot. toes; but in diff. meaning (for papaṭā or papāta to pat ) “falling down, abyss, pit” at Snp 665 (gloss for papaṭa; expld at Snp-a 479 by “mahāniraya”).
pa + pada
(f.) a place for supplying water, a shed by the roadside to provide travellers with water a well, cistern DN iii.185; SN i.33 = Kv 345 (= pānīyadāna-sālā SA); SN i.100 (read papañ ca vivane); Ja i.109; Dhp-a iii.349 = Ja i.302 (= pānīya-cāṭī C.); Vv 5222 (+ udapāna); Pv ii.78 (n. pl. papāyo = pānīya-sālā Pv-a 102); ii.925 (+ udapāna).
Ved. prapā, pa + pā
1. falling down, a fall Vin ii.284 (chinna-papātaṃ papatanti); SN v.47. 2. a cliff, precipice, steep rock MN i.11; SN iii.109 (sobbho p. kodh’ upāyāsass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; cp. papaṭā) AN iii.389 (sobbho p.); Ja iii.5; Ja iii.530; Ja v.70; Ja vi.306, Ja vi.309 Vism 116; Pv-a 174; Sdhp 208, Sdhp 282, Sdhp 353 ■ adj. falling off steeply, having an abrupt end Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198 AN iv.200 (samuddo na āyatakena p.).
-taṭa a rocky or steep declivity Dhp-a i.73.
cp. Epic. Sk. prapāta, of pra + pat
(adj.) falling or flying forward, flying up Ja iii.484 (uccā˚ flying away).
fr. papatati
a paternal great-grandfather Dāvs iii.29.
pa + pitāmaha
(nt.) drinkable, to be drunk, drinking Ja i.109 (udakaṃ papīyana-bhāvena papā ti).
fr. pā, ger. pa-pīya
worn out, rubbed through (of the sole of sandals) Ja ii.223.
pa + pīḷita
a grandson Ja vi.477.
pa + putta, cp. Sk. praputra (BR.: “doubtful”) Inscr.
(adj.) “with flowers in front,” flower-tipped (of the arrows of Māra) Dhp 46 (but expld at Dhp-a i.337 as “p.˚ sankhātāni tebhūmakāni vaṭṭāni,” i.e. existence in the 3 stages of being).
pa + pupphaka
1. a broken bit, splinter, small stone (?) (Rh. D. in Dial. iii.83 “outgrowth” DN iii.87 (bhūmi ˚ṃ paribhuñjati); Vism 418 (≈) Ne 227 (Com.) (˚ojaṃ khādāpento).
2. a water plant see paṇṇaka 2; cp, also papaṭikā2 & Sk. parpaṭa Name of medicinal plant.;
etym. uncertain
to strike, knock, beat, flap (of wings) Vin i.48; Vin ii.208, Vin ii.217; MN i.333 (papph˚); Ja ii.153 (pakkhe); iii.175 (papoṭh˚ sañcuṇṇeti C.); Mil 368 (papph˚); DN-a i.7; Vism 283 (pph).
pa + poṭheti; sometimes spelt papphoṭeti
to obtain, get, gain, receive, attain DN iii.159, DN iii.165; Snp 185, Snp 187, Snp 584; Dhp 27; Dhp-a i.395 ■ Pot. 1st pl pappomu Ja v.57 (= pāpuṇeyyāma C.) ■ ger. pappuyya SN i.48; Snp 482 (or pot?), 593, 829 (= pāpuṇitvā Nd i.170) ■ For further ref. see pāpuṇāti.
the contracted form of pāpuṇāti, Sk. prāpnoti
(nt.) the lungs DN ii.293; MN i.185, MN i.421 MN iii.90; Snp 195 = Ja i.146; Kp iii. (cp. Kp-a 56); Mil 26.
fr. sound-root* phu, not corresponding directly to Sk. pupphusa (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34), to which it stands in a similar relation as *ghur (P.) to *ghar (Sk.) or phurati → pharati. From same root Gr. φυσάω to blow and Lat. pustula bubble, blister; see Walde under pustula
(adj.) (˚-) continuous Vism 32.
pa + bandha
(adj.) very strong, mighty Sdhp 75.
cp. Sk. prabala
pulled out, drawn forth DN i.77 (T. reads pavāḷha). See pavāḷha.
pp. of pabāhati
(adj.) strong, sharp (of pain) DN ii.128; Ja v.422, Mil 174.
pa + bāḷha
to pull out, draw forth DN i.77 (T. reads pavāhati, v.l. pabbāḷhati, evidently fr. pabāḷha); cp. Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa iv.3, 3 16 ■ pp. pabāḷha1 (q.v.).
pa + bṛh to pull, see abbahati
to wake up (intrs.), awake SN i.4, SN i.209; Dhp 296 sq.; Iti 41 (suttā p.); Ja i.61; Ja ii.103 Ja iv.431 (opp. niddāyati); DN-a i.140 ■ pp. pabuddha (q.v.).
pa + bujjhati
awakened SN i.143 (sutta˚ from sleep awakened), Ja i.50; Vv-a 65.
pp. of pabujjhati
to awake, also trs. awaken, stir up, give rise to (or: to recognise, realise?); only in one phrase (perhaps corrupt), viz. yo nindaṃ appabodhati SN i.7 = Dhp 143 (= nindaṃ apaharanto bujjhati Dhp-a iii.86; trsl. KS 13 “forestalleth blame”). Caus. pabodheti (1) to enlighten, instruct, give a sign Ja i.142; Ja iii.511 ■ (2) to set going, arouse Ja i.298 Ja v.390 ■ (3) to render oneself conspicuous Ja v.8.
pa + bodhati
(adj.-n..) 1. (nt.) awakening waking, arising Dhp-a i.232 (˚codana-kamma).
2. (adj. arousing (or realising?) Vv 6422 (= kata-pīti-pabodhano Vv-a 282); awaking Thag 893 (samma-tāḷa˚).
fr. pabodhati
(nt.) 1. a knot (of a stalk), joint, section Vin iv.35; MN i.80; Ja i.245 (veḷu˚); Vism 358 (id.; but nāḷika p. 260); Vb-a 63 (id.); Thag 243-angula˚ finger joint Vin iv.262, MN i.187; DN-a i.285-pabba-pabbaṃ knot for knot Dhs-a 11.
2. the elbow SN iv.171.
3. section, division, part Vism 240 (14 sections of contemplation of the body or kāyagatāsati); Vb-a 275, Vb-a 286.
-gaṇṭhi a knot Mil 103. -valli a species of Dūrvā Ja v.69; -vāta intermittent ague Vin i.205.
Ved. parvan
a species of reed. bulrush Vin i.190 (T. reads babbaja); SN i.77 SN ii.92; SN iii.137 (v.l. babbaja), 155 (˚lāyaka); Thag 27; Ja ii.140, Ja ii.141; Ja v.202; Ja vi.508. For further refs. see babbaja.
Sk. balbaja, cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 39. 6
to go forth, to leave home and wander about as a mendicant, to give up the world, to take up the ascetic life (as bhikkhu samaṇa, tapassin, isi etc.). SN i.140, SN i.141; Snp 157, Snp 1003 imper. pabbaja Dhp-a i.133. Pot. pabbajeyya Ja i.56 Pp 57 ■ Fut. pabbajissati Snp 564; Dhp-a i.133 Dhp-a iv.55. Aor. pabbaji MN iii.33; SN i.196 = Thag 1255; Snp 405; Vv 826; Pv-a 76; ger. pabbajitvā Ja i.303; Pv-a 21 and ˚vāna Snp 407 ■ (agārasmā) anagāriyaṃ pabbajati to go forth into the homeless state Vin iii.12; MN iii.33; SN i.196; AN v.204; Pv ii.1316. sāsane p. to become an ascetic in (Buddhas) religion, to embrace the religion (& practice) of the Buddha Ja i.56; Pv-a 12 pabbajjaṃ pabbajati to go into the holy life (of an ascetic friar, wanderer etc.): see pabbajjā ■ Caus pabbājeti (q.v.) ■ pp. pabbajita.
cp. Sk. pravrajati, pra + vraj
(nt.) going into an ascetic life Ja iii.393 (a˚).
fr. pabbajati
one who has gone out from home, one who has given up worldly life & undertaken the life of a bhikkhu recluse or ascetic, (one) ordained (as a Buddhist friar) gone forth (into the holy life or pabbajjā) Vin iii.40 (vuḍḍha-pabbajito bhikkhu); iv.159; DN i.131 (agārasmā anagāriyaṃ p.), 157; iii.31 sq., 147 sq.; MN i.200 MN i.267, MN i.345, MN i.459; MN ii.66, MN ii.181; MN iii.261; SN i.119 (dhammavinaye p.); iv.260, 330; v.118 sq., 421; AN i.69, AN i.107 AN i.147, AN i.168; AN ii.78, AN ii.143; AN iii.33, AN iii.78 (vuḍḍha˚), 244, 403 (acira˚); iv.21 (cira˚); v.82, 348 sq.; Snp 43 (see Nd ii.397), 274, 385, 423; Dhp 74, Dhp 174, Dhp 388; Ja i.56; Pv ii.81 (= samaṇa Pv-a 106); ii.111 (bhikkhu = kāmādimalānaṃ pabbajitattā paramatthato pabbajito Pv-a 146); ii.1317 (= pabbajjaṃ upagata Pv-a 167); Mil 11; DN-a i.270; Dhp-a i.133; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 55.
pp. of pabbajati, cp. BSk. pravrājita Divy 236
(f.) leaving the world, adopting the ascetic life state of being a Buddhist friar, taking the (yellow) robe ordination ■ (1) ordination or admission into the Buddha’s Order in particular: Vin iii.13; SN i.161 etc-sāmanera˚ ordination of a Novice, described in full at Vin i.82 ■ pabbajjaṃ yācati to beg admission Vin iv.129; labhati to gain admission to the Order Vin i.12, Vin i.17, Vin i.32; DN i.176; SN iv.181 ■ (2) ascetic or homeless life in general DN iii.147 sq.; MN iii.33 (abbhokāso p.); SN v.350 (id.; read pabbajjā); AN v.204 (id.); SN ii.128 (read ˚jjā for ˚jā); iv.260; AN i.151, AN i.168; AN iv.274 sq.; Snp 405, Snp 406, Snp 567; Iti 75 (pabbajjāya ceteti) Mil 19 (dhamma-cariya-samacariy’ atthā p.); Dhp-a i.6; Snp-a 49, Snp-a 327, Snp-a 423; Thag-a 251 ■ pabbajjaṃ upagata gone into the homeless state Pv-a 167 (for pabbajita) agārasmā anagāriyaṃ p. the going forth from home into the homeless state Vin ii.253; MN ii.56; pabbajjaṃ pabbajati to undertake or go into the ascetic life, in foll. varieties: isi˚ of a Saint or Sage Ja i.298, Ja i.303; Dhp-a iv.55; Pv-a 162 (of the Buddha); tāpasa˚ of a Hermit Ja iii.119; DN-a i.270 (described in detail); Dhp-a iv.29; Pv-a 21; samaṇa˚ of a Wanderer Pv-a 76. Note. The ceremony of admission to the priesthood is called pabbajjā (or pabbajana), if viewed as the act of the candidate of orders, and pabbājana (q.v.) if viewed as the act of the priest conferring orders; the latter term however does not occur in this meaning in the Canon.
fr. pa + vraj, cp. pabbajati, Epic & BSk. pravrajyā
(1) a mountain (-range), hill, rock SN i.101 SN i.102, SN i.127, SN i.137; SN ii.32, SN ii.185, SN ii.190; AN i.243; AN ii.140; AN iv.102 (dhūpāyati); Snp 413, Snp 417, Snp 543, Snp 958, Snp 1014; Nd i.466; Dhp 8, Dhp 127 (˚ānaṃ vivaro) = Pv-a 104; Dhp 188 (n. pl ˚āni), 304; DN-a i.209; Mil 346 (dhamma˚); Pv-a 221 (angāra˚) Sdhp 352, Sdhp 545, Sdhp 574 ■ The 7 mountains round Veḷuvana are enumd at Ja v.38 ■ Names of some (real or fictitious) mountains, as found in the Jātaka literature: Cakkavāḷa Ja vi.282; Caṇḍoraṇa Ja iv.90 Canda Ja iv.283; Ja v.38, Ja v.162; Daṇḍaka-hirañña Ja ii.33 Daddara Ja ii.8; Ja iii.16; Nemindhara Ja vi.125; Neru Ja iii.247; Ja v.425; Paṇḍava Snp 417; Snp-a 382 sq.; Mahāneru Ja iv.462; Mahindhara Vv 3210 (cp. Vv-a 136) Meru Ja i.25; Ja iv.498; Yugandhara Pv-a 137; Rajata Ja i.50; Vipula Ja vi.518; Sineru SN ii.139; Ja i.48 passim; Suvaṇṇa Ja i.50; Ja vi.514 (˚giritāla) ■ (2) [cp Sk. pārvata mountainous] a mountaineer Mil 191.
-utu the time (aspect) of the mountain (in prognostications as to horoscope) Dhp-a i.165 (megha-utu, p. utu, aruṇa-utu). -kaccha a mountain meadow (opp nadī-kaccḥa) Snp-a 33. -kandara a m. cave SN ii.32 SN v.396, SN v.457 sq.; AN v.114 sq.; -kūṭa m. peak Vin ii.193; Ja i.73. -gahaṇa m. thicket or jungle Pv-a 5. -ṭṭha standing on a m. Dhp 28. -pāda the foot of a m. Ja iii.51; Dhp-a iv.187; Pv-a 10. -muddhā mountain top Vin i.5. -raṭṭha m ■ kingdom Snp-a 26. -rājā “king of the mountain,” Ep. of Himavā SN i.116; SN ii.137 sq., 276 iii.149; v.47, 63, 148; AN i.152; AN iii.240; AN iv.102; Pv-a 143. -saṅkhepa top of a m. DN i.84 (= p ■ matthaka DN-a i.226). -sānu m ■ glen Vv 3210 (cp. Vv-a 136) -sikhara mountain-crest Ja v.421.
Vedic parvata, fr. parvan, orig. knotty, rugged, massive
a mountain Ja i.303.
fr. pabbata
(adj.) belonging to mountains, mountain-born (of a river) AN iii.64 (nadī p˚ā sīghasotā hārahārinī); iv.137 (id.); Vism 231 (id.), 285 (nadī).
fr. pabbata
(adj.) forming a division or section, consisting of, belonging to Kp-a 114 (khaya˚) (?).
fr. pabba
(nt.) keeping out or away, removing, banishment exiling DN i.135; DN iii.93; Mil 357; Dhp i.296 (= nīharaṇa); Dhp-a iv.145.
fr. pa + Caus. of vraj, see pabbajati & pabbājeti
(adj.) belonging to banishment, deserving to be exiled Mil 186; also in cpd. ˚kamma excommunication, one of the 5 ecclesiastical acts enumd at Vin i.49, Vin i.143. See also AN i.79; Dhp-a ii.109.
fr. pabbājana
taken into the order, made a bhikkhu MN ii.62.
pp. of pabbājeti
1. to make go out or away, drive out, banish, exile DN i.92 (raṭṭhasmā out of the kingdom; = nīharati DN-a i.258); MN ii.122; Dhp 388 (attano malaṃ pabbājayaṃ, tasmā pabbajito ti vuccati) Dhp-a iv.145 (explns as “attano rāgādimalaṃ pabbājento vinodento”) Ja i.262 (raṭṭhā); iii.168 (id.) vi.350, 351; Dhp-a ii.41; Pv-a 54 (core).
2. to make go forth (into the homeless state), to make somebody take up the life of an ascetic or a bhikkhu, to take into the (Buddha’s) order, to ordain Vin i.82 (description of ordination of a novice), 97; iii.12; iv.129; Dhp-a i.19 Dhp-a i.133 ■ pp. pabbājita (q.v.).
Caus. of pabbajati
piercing through (measuring) an arrow shot Thag 164-J ii.334 (soḷasa˚ = soḷasa-kaṇḍa-pāta-vitthāro C.) ■ Note. pabbedha owes its bb to analogy with ubbedha. It also corresponds to the latter in meaning: whereas ubbedha refers to the height, pabbedha is applied to the breadth or width.
pa + vedha of vyadh, cp. BSk. pravedha in same phrase at Divy 56, viz. ṣoḍaśa-pravedho
to roam forth or about Ja v.106 (= bhamati C.).
pa + bhamati
1. (m.) a decline, incline, slope Ja i.348; adj. (usually -˚) bending inclining, sloping; fig. tending or leading to (cp. E “bearing on”) MN i.493 (samudda˚); SN i.110 (id.) v.38, 216, 219; AN iv.198 (anupubba˚), 224 (viveka˚) Mil 38 (samādhi˚). Very frequent in combn with similar expressions, e.g. ninna, poṇa (cp. Pv-a ninnapoṇa-pabbhāraṃ cittaṃ): see further ref. under ninna with adhimutta & garuka at Vism 117 (Nibbāna˚)-; apabbhara (sic.) not slanting or sloping Ja v.405 (= samatittha C.).
2. (m. & nt.) a cave in a mountain Mil 151; Ja v.440; Dhp-a ii.59 (nt.), 98.
-ṭṭhāna a slope Ja i.348; Dhs-a 261. -dasaka the decade (period) of decline (in life), which in the enum of the 10 decades (vassadasā) at Ja iv.397 is given as the seventh.
cp. BSk. prāg-bhāra Divy 80 etc.
to speak out, proclaim, declare (publicly) Snp 131, Snp 649, Snp 870, Snp 952 and passim (cp. Nd i.211, Nd i.273; Nd ii.398, Nd ii.465).
pa + brūti
is adj. form (-˚) of pabhā (q.v.).
(adj.-n..) causing to fall or disappear depriving, taking away, theft, in maṇi˚ jewel-theft Ja vi.383. (Rh. D. “polishing”?) Kern in Toev. s. v takes pabhaṃsana as a der. fr. pa + bhrās to shine, i.e. making bright, polishing (as Rh. D.).
fr. pa + bhraṃś, cp. nāva-prabhraṃśana Npl. A.V.
broken up, destroyed, defeated Vin iii.108.
pp. of pabhañjati, cp. Sk prabhagna
one who makes light, one who lights up, light-bringer (often as Ep. of the Buddha) SN i.51 (quoted at Vv-a 116), 210; AN ii.51 sq.; Iti 80; Ja iii.128; Snp 991, Snp 1136 (= ālokakara obhāsakara etc. Nd ii.399); Vv 214 (= ñāṇ’ obhāsa-kara Vv-a 106); 3425 (= lokassa ñāṇ’ āloka-kara Vv-a 115).
pabhaṃ, acc. of pabhā, + kara
destruction, breaking up, brittleness Pts ii.238 (calato pabhangato addhuvato) but id. p. at Nd ii.214ii and Mil 418 read “calato pabhanguto addhuvato.” Pabhangu, Pabhanguna & gura;
fr. pa + bhañj
(adj.) brittle, easily destroyed, perishable frail. (a) pabhaṅgu: SN iii.32; SN v.92; AN i.254, AN i.257 sq. AN iii.16; Dhs-a 380; Sdhp 51, Sdhp 553 ■ (b) ˚guṇa: Iti 37; Ja i.393 (ittarā addhuvā pabhanguno calitā; reading may be pabhanguṇā); Dhp 139 (as n.; = pabhangubhāva, pūtibhāva, Dhp-a iii.71), 148 (= pūtikāya ibid 111) ■ (c) ˚gura Dhp 148 (v.l.); Thag-a 95; Sdhp 562 Sdhp 605 ■ See also pabhaṅga.
fr. pa + bhanj, cp. BSk. prabhanguṇatā destruction, perishableness Mvu iii.338
to break up, destroy Ja iv.494. - pp. pabhagga (q.v.).
pa + bhañj
(m. & nt.) production, origin, source, cause MN i.67; SN i.181; SN ii.12; Iti 37 (āhāra-netti˚); Snp 728, Snp 1050; Nd ii.under mūla (with syName of sambhava & samuṭṭhāna etc.); Ja iii.402 Ja vi.518.
fr. pa + ; bhu, cp. Ved. prabhava
see pahoti.
to fall down or off, drop, disappear Vin ii.135 (pret. pabhassittha); iv.159 (id.) ■ Cp. pabhaṃsana.
pa + bhraṃś; cp. Sk. prabhraśyate
(adj.) shining, very bright, resplendent SN i.145; SN v.92, SN v.283; AN i.10, AN i.254, AN i.257 sq., AN iii.16; Snp 48 (= parisuddha pariyodāta Nd ii.402); Ja v.202 Ja v.170; Vv 171 (rucira + ); Pv iii.31 (rucira + ); Vism 223 Vism 377; Dhp-a i.28; Vv-a 12 (pakati˚ bright by nature).
fr. bhās
(f.) light, radiance, shine AN ii.139; AN v.22; Iti 19, Iti 20; Pv-a 56 (sarīra˚), 137 (id.), 71, 176; Sdhp 250 ■ canda-ppabhā moonshine Iti 20; Dhs-a 14 ■ adj. pabha (-˚), radiating lucid, in cpd. sayam˚; self-lucid or self-radiant DN i.17 (= attano attano va tesaṃ pabhā ti DN-a i.110); AN v.60; Snp 404.
fr. pa + bhā, cp. Epic Sk. prabhā
at Kern, Toev. s. v. is wrongly given with quot. Ja v.421 (in meaning “speaking”) where it should be read manāpa-bhāṇin, and not manā-p˚.
become clear or light, shining, dawning Snp 178 (sup˚); esp. in phrase pabhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i.e. given way to dawn, at daybreak Ja i.81, Ja i.500 ■ (nt.) daybreak morning SN i.211; Snp-a 519 (pabhāte); atipabhāte in broad daylight Ja i.436.
pp. of pabhāti
to shine forth, to become light, gleam, glitter Ja v.199 (said of a river; = pavattati C.) ■ pp pabhāta.
pa + bhā
might, power, strength, majesty, dignity Ja v.36; Ja vi.449.
fr. pa + bhū
increased, furthered, promoted Thag 767 (bhava-netti˚); expld by samuṭṭhita C.
pp. of pabhāveti
to increase, augment, foster Pv ii.964 = Dhp-a iii.220 (dakkhiṇeyyaṃ) ■ pp pabhāvita.
Caus. of pabhavati
shining, splendour, beauty SN i.67; sap˚ with beauty SN v.263; Mil 223; ap˚ without beauty Mil 299.
fr. pa + bhās
to tell, declare, talk Thag 582.
pa + bhaṣ
to illumine, pervade with light, enlighten Dhp 172 (= obhāseti Dhp-a iii.169), 382 (= obhāseti ekālokaṃ karoti Dhp-a iv.137); Ja i.87; Pv i.109 (so read for ca bh˚); ii.112; Pts i.174; Mil 336; Pv-a 10 (= obhāseti).
Caus. of pa + bhās
to split asunder (trs.), break, destroy Snp 973 (= bhindati sambhindati Nd i.503) ger. pabhijja SN i.193 = Thag 1242 ■ Pass. pabhijjati to be broken, to burst (open), to split asunder (intrs.) to open SN i.150 (aor. pabhijjiṃsu); Snp p.125 (id.) Vv 413 (break forth = pabhedaṃ gacchanti Vv-a 183 gloss pavajjare for pabhijjare); Snp-a 475 (= bhijjati) Also “to open, to be developed” (like a flower) Mil 93 (buddhi p.) ■ pp. pabhinna.
pa + bhindati
1. to burst open, broken (like a flower or fruit), flowing with juice; usually appld to an elephant in rut, mad, furious MN i.236 (hatthi˚); Dhp 326 (hatthi˚ = mattahatthi Dhp-a iv.24) Thag 77; Ja iv.494; Ja vi.488; Pv i.112 (read chinnapabhinna-gatta); Mil 261, Mil 312 (hatthināgaṃ tidhāpabhinnaṃ); DN-a i.37 (˚madaṃ caṇḍa-hatthiṃ).
2 developed, growing Mil 90 (˚buddhi).
pp. of pabhindati
(adj.) (-˚) beginning, in meaning of: since, after, subsequently; tato p. from that time henceforth Vv-a 158.
Vedic prabhṛti
(adj.) dating from, derived or coming from (abl.) DN i.94 (kuto p.).
fr. pabhuti
iord, master, ruler, owner DN-a i.250.
fr. pa + bhū
breaking or splitting up, breaking, opening Vv-a 183; akkhara˚ breaking up of letters, word-analysis, phonology DN i.88 (= sikkhā ca nirutti ca DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 447) ■ adj (-˚) breaking up into, i.e. consisting of, comprising, of various kinds Ja i.84; Pv-a 8 (paṭisandhi-ādi˚), 130 (saviññāṇak’ âviññāṇaka˚).
fr. pa + bhid, cp. pabhindati
(nt.) breaking up, destruction Snp 1105 (avijjāya˚ = bhedanaṃ pahānaṃ etc. Nd ii.403).
cp. pabheda
etc. see pahoti.
1. to become intoxicated SN i.73.
2. to be careless, slothful, negligent; to neglect waste one’s time SN iv.125, SN iv.133; Snp 676, Snp 925, Snp 933; cp Nd i.376 & Nd;2 70; Dhp 168, Dhp 172, Dhp 259; Ja iii.264 (with acc.); iv.396 (with gen.); Pv i.1112 (dāne na p.); iv.13 (jāgaratha mā p.); Sdhp 16, Sdhp 620 ■ aor. 2 pl. pamādattha MN i.46; AN iii.87; AN iv.139. Other noteworthy forms are aor. or precative (mā) pamādo SN iv.263 Thag 119; Dhp 371 (see Geiger P.Gr. § 161 b), and cond or aor. pamādassaṃ MN iii.179; AN i.139 (see Geiger l. c 170 & Trenckner; Notes 752) ■ appamajjanto (ppr. diligent, eager, zealous Pv-a 7 ■ pp. pamatta (q.v.).
pa + mad
1. to wipe off, rub off, sweep, scour Vin i.47; Vin ii.209 (bhūmi˚ itabbā); MN i.383.
2. to rub along, stroke, grope, feel along (with one’s hands) Vin ii.209 (cīvara-rajjuṃ ˚itvā; cp. Vin. Texts iii.279). Note. pamajjamāna in phrase gale pi p˚ ānena at Ne 164 is after the example of similar passages MN i.108 and AN iv.32 and as indicated by v.l. preferably to be read as “api panujjamānena pi” (see panudati).
pa + mṛj
(f.) & ˚itatta (nt.) are abstr. formations fr. pa + mad, in the sense of pamāda carelessness etc., occur as philological synonyms in exegesis of pamāda at Vb 350 = Nd;1 423; Nd ii.405. Also at Dhp-a i.228 (˚bhāva = pamāda).
(f.) only neg. ap˚; immeasurableness Vb 272 sq. (catasso appamaññāyo viz. mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekhā). See appamaññā.
abstr. fr. pamāṇa, for *pamānyā, grd. form. of pa + mā for the usual pameyya
in cpd. luñcita-pamaṭṭā kapotī viya (simile for a woman who has lost all her hair) at Pv-a 47 is doubtful it should probably be read as luñcita-pakkhikā k. viya i.e. like a pigeon whose feathers have been pulled out (v.l. ˚patthaka).
slothful, indolent, indifferent, careless, negligent DN iii.190; SN i.61 = SN i.204; AN i.11, AN i.139 AN iv.319; AN v.146; Snp 57, Snp 70, Snp 329 sq., 399, 1121; Dhp 19, Dhp 21 Dhp 29, Dhp 292, Dhp 309 (= sati-vossaggena samannāgata Dhp-a iii.482), 371; Nd ii.404; Pv-a 276 (quot. ˚ṃ ativattati) appamatta diligent, careful, eager, mindful SN i.4, SN i.140 SN i.157; AN v.148; Thag 1245; Pv iv.138; Pv-a 66 (dānaṃ detha etc.), 219, 278. See also appamatta2.
-cārin acting carelessly Dhp 334 (= sati-vossagga-lakkhaṇena pamādena p ■ c. Dhp-a iv.43). -bandhu friend of the careless (Ep. of Māra) SN i.123, SN i.128; Snp 430 Nd ii.507.
pp. of pamajjati
(adj.) = pamatta, only in neg. form ap˚ careful, mindful Pv-a 201.
crushed, only in cpd. sam˚ (q.v.).
pp. of pa + mathati to crush
(f.) a young (wanton) woman, a woman Snp 156 Snp 157 (gloss for pamāda cp. Snp-a 203); Ja iii.442 (marapamadānaṃ issaro; v.l. samuddā), 530 (v.l. pamuda pamoda).
Classical Sk. pramadā, fr. pra + mad, cp. pamāda
to crush down, destroy, overcome, defeat; pp. pamaddita Ja vi.189 (mālutena p. corresponding with vāta-pahaṭa).
pa + mṛd
(adj. nt.) crushing, defeating, overcoming DN i.89 (˚parasena˚); Snp p.106 (id. = maddituṃ samattho Snp-a 450); Snp 561 (Mārasena˚); DN-a i.250.
fr. pamaddati
(adj.) crushing, able to crush, powerful, mighty Ja iv.26 (= maddana-samattha C.).
fr. pa + mṛd
(nt.) 1. measure, size, amount SN ii.235; AN i.88; AN iii.52, AN iii.356 sq.; AN v.140 sq. Mil 285 (cp. trsl. ii.133, n. 2); Snp-a 137; Vv-a 16; Pv-a 55 (ghaṭa˚), 70 (ekahattha˚), 99 (tālakkhandha˚; ) 268 (sīla˚).
2. measure of time, compass, length duration Pv-a 136 (jīvitaṃ paricchinna ˚ṃ); esp. in cpd. āyu˚ age SN i.151; AN i.213; AN ii.126 sq. and passim (cp. āyu).
3. age (often by Com. taken as “worldly characteristic,” see below rūpa˚ and cp. Nd ii.406 on Snp 1076); Dhp-a i.38.
4. limit Pv-a 123, Pv-a 130 (dhanassa).
5. (appld meaning) standard, definition description, dimension SN iv.158≈Snp 1076 (perhaps (“age”). pamāṇaṃ karoti set an example Dhp-a iii.300 (maṃ p. katvā) ■ adj. (-˚) of characteristic of the character of, measuring or measured by, taking the standard of, only in cpd. rūpa˚ measuring by (appearance or) form, or held in the sphere of form (defined or Pp A 229 as “rūpa-ppamāṇ’ ādisu sampattiyuttaṃ rūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ karotī ti”) AN ii.71 = Pp 53 Nd ii.406 ■ appamāṇa without a measure, unlimited immeasurable, incomparable DN i.31; DN ii.12 (+ uḷāra) MN iii.145 (ceto-vimutti); AN i.183, AN i.192; AN ii.73; AN iii.52 AN v.299 sq., 344 sq.; Snp 507; Pv-a 110 (= atula). See also appamāṇa.
-kata taken as standard, set as example, being the measure, in phrase p ■ kataṃ kammaṃ DN i.251; SN iv.322.
of pa + mā, Vedic pramāṇa
(adj. n.) having a measure, finite; or: to be described, able to be defined Vin ii.110; AN ii.73.
fr. pamāṇa
(adj. n.) 1. forming or taking a measure or standard, measuring by (-˚) Dhp-a iii.113 (rūpa˚ etc., see A ii.71); (n.) one who measures, a critic, judge AN iii.349 sq.; AN v.140; Sdhp 441 (as pamāṇaka).
2. according to measure, by measure Vin iii.149; Vin iv.279.
fr. pamāṇa
carelessness, negligence, indolence, remissness DN i.6 (jūta˚, see DA i.85) iii.42 sq., 236; MN i.151; SN i.18, SN i.20, SN i.25, SN i.146, SN i.216; SN ii.43 SN ii.193; SN iv.78, SN iv.263; SN v.170, SN v.397; AN i.212 (surāmerayamajja˚) = SN ii.69; AN i.16 sq.; AN ii.40; AN iii.6, AN iii.421, AN iii.449 AN iv.195, AN iv.294, AN iv.350; AN v.310, AN v.361; Snp 156, Snp 157 (gloss pamadā cp. Snp-a 203), 334, 942, 1033; Dhp 21, Dhp 30 sq., 167 (= satiossagga-lakkhaṇa p. Dhp-a iii.163), 241, 371; Thag 1245 = SN i.193; Iti 86; Nd i.423 = Nd ii.405; Pts ii.8 sq. 169 sq., 197; Pp 11, Pp 12; Ne 13, Ne 41; Mil 289 (māna atimāna mada + ); Snp-a 339 (= sati-vippavāsa); Dhp-a i.228; Pv-a 16 (pamādena out of carelessness); Sdhp 600 ■ appamāda earnestness, vigilance, zeal DN iii.236; SN i.158; SN ii.29; Dhp 21.
-pāṭha careless reading (in the text) Nett Ṭ. (see introd. xi. n. 1); Kp-a 207; Pv-a 25.
cp. Vedic pramāda, pa + mad
(f.) remissness AN i.139.
abstr. fr. pamāda + vant, adj.
(adj.) infatuating, exciting, in phrase citta˚ Thig 357 (trsln “leading to ferment of the mind”; vv.ll. ˚pamaddin & ˚pamāthin, thus “crushing the heart,” cp. Thag-a 243).
fr. pamāda
having measured, measuring Snp 894 (sayaṃ p. = paminitvā Nd i.303) Ja iii.114.
ger. of pamināti i.e. pa + mā
crushing, destroying Snp 209 (bījaṃ; = hiṃsitva vadhitvā Snp-a 257). See on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 45.
ger. of pamināti i.e. pa + mṛ; Sk. pramārya of pramṛṇāti
(adj.) measuring, estimating, defining SN i.148 (appameyyaṃ p. “who to th’ illimitable limit lays” trsl.; corresponds with paminanto).
fr. pa + mā
to strike dead, maltreat, hurt Dhp-a iii.172.
pa + māreti, Caus. of mṛ; marati to die
to measure estimate, define AN iii.349, AN iii.351; AN v.140, AN v.143; Sdhp 537-ppr. paminanto SN i.148; inf. paminituṃ Vv-a 154 ger. paminitvā Nd i.303, and pamāya (q.v.); grd paminitabba Vv-a 278; aor. 3rd sg. pāmesi Ja v.299 Ja v.3rd pl. pamiṃsu AN ii.71; Thag 469 (pāmiṃsu).
pa + mināti to mā with pres. formation fr. mi, after Sk. minoti; see also anumināti
faded, withered, languished Mil 303.
pp. of pa + mlā
(adj.) lit. “in front of the face,” fore-part, first, foremost, chief prominent SN i.234, SN i.235; Snp 791 (v.l. BB and Nd i.92 for pamuñca); Ja v.5, Ja v.169. loc. pamukhe as adv. or prep. “before” SN i.227 (asurindassa p.; v.l. sammukhe); Vism 120. As-˚ having as chief, headed by with NN at the head DN ii.97; SN i.79 (Pasenadi˚ rājāno) Pv-a 74 (setacchatta˚ rājakakudhabhaṇḍa); freq. in phrase Buddha˚ bhikkhusangha, e.g. Vin i.213; Snp p.111; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 20. Cp. pāmokkha.
pa + mukha, cp. late Sk. pramukha
(nt.) 1. eyebrow (?) only in phrase alāra˚ with thick eyebrows or lashes Ja vi.503 (but expld by C. as “visāl’ akkhigaṇḍa); Pv-a 189 (for aḷāra-pamha Pv iii.35). Perhaps we should read pakhuma instead.
identical with pamukha1, lit. “in front of the face,” i.e. frontside, front
Pass. of pamuñcati (q.v.).
1. swooning, in a faint, fainting (with hunger) Pv iii.18 (= khuppipāsādidukkhena sañjāta-mucchā Pv-a 174); iv.108.
2. infatuated SN i.187 (v.l.; T. samucchita) = Thag 1219; Ja iii.441.
pa + mucchita
loosening, setting free or loose, in cpd. ˚kara deliverer SN i.193 = Thag 1242 (bandhana˚)-adj. dup˚; difficult to be freed SN i.77;Snp 773; Dhp 346; Ja ii.140.
fr. pa + muc
1. to let loose, give out, emit Snp 973 (vācaṃ; = sampamuñcati Nd i.504) Ja i.216 (aggiṃ).
2. to shake off, give up, shed Dhp 377 (pupphāni). Perhaps also in phrase saddhaṃ p. to renounce one’s faith, although the interpretation is doubtful (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 46 sq. & cp; Dial. ii.33) Vin i.7 = DN ii.39 = SN i.138 (C. vissajjati, as quoted KS p. 174).
3. to deliver, free Snp 1063 (kathan kathāhi = mocehi uddhara etc. Nd ii.407a), 1146 (pamuñcassu = okappehi etc. Nd ii.407b) ■ Pass. pamuccati to be delivered or freed SN i.24, SN i.173; Snp 80 Snp 170 sq. (dukkhā); Dhp 189 (sabbadukkhā), 276 (fut pamokkhati), 291 (dukkhā), 361 ■ pp. pamutta (q.v.)-Caus. pamoceti to remove, liberate, deliver, set free SN i.143, SN i.154, SN i.210; Thig 157 (dukkhā); Cp ii.75; iii.103 sq. Caus. II. pamuñcāpeti to cause to get loose DN-a i.138.
pa + muñcati of muc
being or having forgotten Vin i.213; Pts i.173 (a˚); Ja iii.511 (T. spells pamm˚) iv.307 (id.); Mil 77. Cp. parimuṭṭha.
pp. of pamussati
1. let loose, hurled Ja vi.360 (papātasmiṃ).
2. liberated, set free SN i.154; Snp 465 Snp 524 sq.
pp. of pamuñcati
(f.) setting free, release SN i.209; Thig 248; Ja iv.478; Ne 131 (= SN i.209; but read pamutty atthi); Pv-a 103 (dukkhato).
fr. pa + muc
(& ˚modita) greatly delighted, very pleased MN i.37; SN i.64; AN iii.21 sq.; Snp 512; Ja iii.55; DN-a i.217, Thag-a 71; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 132 ■ Spelt pamodita at Snp 681, Ja i.75; Ja v.45 (āmodita + ).
pp. of pamodati
to become bewildered or infatuated Ja vi.73 ■ pp. pamūḷha (q.v.).
pa + muyhati of muh
to forget Ja iii.132, Ja iii.264 (pamajjati + ); iv.147, 251 ■ pamuṭṭha (q.v.).
pa + mṛṣ, Sk. mṛṣyati = P. *mussati
bewildered, infatuated Snp 774; Nd i.36 (= sammūḷha), 193 (+ sammūḷha).
pp. of pamuyhati
(-˚) (adj.) to be measured, measurable, only in foll. cpd appameyya not to be measured, illimitable, unfathomable SN i.148; SN v.400; MN iii.71, MN iii.127; AN i.266; Vv 3419 (= paminituṃ asakkhuṇeyya Vv-a 154); 377 (expld as before at Vv-a 169); duppameyya hard to be gauged or measured AN i.266; Pp 35; opp. suppameyya ibid.
grd. of pamināti, like Epic Sk. prameya
1. discharging, launching, letting loose, gushing out; in phrases itivāda˚ pouring out gossip MN i.133; SN v.73; AN ii.26; DN-a i.21; and caravāda˚ id. SN iii.12; SN v.419.
2. release deliverance SN i.2; Pv-a 103 (pamutti + ); abl pamokkhā for the release of, i.e. instead of (gen. Ja v.30 (pituno p. = pamokkha-hetu C.).
fr. pa + muc, see pamuñcati
(adj. n.) loosening, setting free; deliverance, emancipation SN i.172 = Snp 78; AN ii.24, AN ii.37 AN ii.49 sq.; Snp 166 (maccupāsā, abl. = from), 1064 (pamocanāya dat. = pamocetuṃ Nd2); Iti 104 (Nibbānaṃ sabbagantha ˚ṃ). At Dhp 274 we should read pamohanaṃ for pamocanaṃ.
fr. pa + muc
Caus. of pamuñcati (q.v.).
joy, delight Sdhp 528, Sdhp 563. See also pāmojja.
fr. pa + mud, cp. Vedic pramoda
to rejoice, enjoy, to be delighted, to be glad or satisfied SN i.182; AN iii.34 (so read for ca modati); Dhp 16, Dhp 22; Pv i.113, 115; Vv-a 278 (= āmodati)-Caus. pamodeti id. Sdhp 248 ■ pp. pamudita (pamodita); (q.v.). Cp. abhippamodati.
pa + mud
(f.) delight, joy, satisfaction Dhs 9, Dhs 86, Dhs 285 (āmodanā + ).
fr. pa + mud
bewilderment, infatuation, fascination Snp 841 (v.l. Nd i.sammoha) Nd i.193 (+ sammoha andhakāra); Ja vi.358; Ja vi.358 Pp 21; Dhs 390, Dhs 1061.
pa + muh, cp. Epic Sk. pramoha
deceiving, deception, delusion Dhp 274 (T. reads pamocana; Dhp-a iii.403 expls by vañcana).
fr. pa + muh
a loris (Abhp. 618) i.e. an ape; but probably meant for a kind of bird (cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.) Ja vi.538 (C. reads pampuka & expl;s by pampaṭaka).
etym? Cp. Sk. pampā Name of a river (or lake), but cp. ref. in BR. under pampā varaṇ-ādi
(nt.) [the syncope form of pakhuma = Sk. pakṣman used in poetry and always expld in C. by pakhuma eye-lash, usually in cpd. aḷāra˚; having thick eyelashes e.g. at Ja v.215; Vv 357; 6411; Pv iii.35; asāyata˚ at Thig 383.
to laugh; Caus. pamhāpeti to make somebody laugh Ja v.297 (= parihaseti C.), where it is syn. with the preceding umhāpeti.
pa + smi, Sk. prasmayate
(nt.) milk, juice Ja i.204; Ja vi.572.
Ved. payas, nt, of pī
to offer, present, give Dpvs xi.28; Pgdp 63, Pgdp 72, Pgdp 77 sq ■ pp. payata (q.v.).
pa + yacchati of yam
restrained, composed, purified, pure DN i.103 (= abhiharitvā dinna); AN iii.313; Thag 348, Thag 359 (˚atta); Iti 101 (˚pāṇin) = Mil 215; Snp 240 (= sakkāra-karaṇena p. alankata Snp-a 284); Vism 224 (˚pāṇin = parisuddha-hattha); Sdhp 100.
pp. of payacchati
(nt.) striving after, effort, endeavour Kp-a 108.
cp. Sk. prayatna, of yat
making effort, taking care, being on one’s guard, careful Mil 373.
pp. of pa + yat
gone forth, set out, proceeded Pv iv.56 (= gantuṃ āraddha Pv-a 260); Ja iii.188, Ja iii.190 Strange is “evaṃ nānappayātamhi” at Thag 945 (Mrs Rh. D. “thus when so much is fallen away”; Neumann “in solcher Drangsal, solcher Not”) ■ duppayāta going or gone wrong, strayed Vv 849 (= duṭṭhu payātha apathe gata Vv-a 337).
pp. of payāti
to go forward, set out, proceed, step out, advance, only aor pāyāsi Ja i.146, Ja i.223, Ja i.255; Ja i.3rd pl pāyiṃsu Ja i.253 and pāyesuṃ Ja iv.220 ■ pp. payāta (q.v.). See also pāyāti.
pa + yā
to speak out, to proclaim aor payirudāhāsi DN ii.222 (vaṇṇe); Ja i.454 (vyañjanaṃ).
pari + ud + āharati with metathesis payir˚ for pariy˚
1. “to sit close round,” i.e. to attend on (acc.), to honour, pay homage, worship DN i.47; DN ii.257; MN ii.117, SN i.146; AN i.124, AN i.126, AN i.142; AN iv.337; Dhp 64 Dhp 65; Thag 1236; Ja vi.222 (imper. ˚upāsaya); Pv ii.961 Pp 26, Pp 33; Snp-a 401; Vb-a 457 (here defd by Bdhgh as “punappunaṃ upasankamati”) ■ ppr. ˚upāsanto SN v.67 = Iti 107; Pv-a 44; and upāsamāna Dhp-a ii.32-aor. ˚upāsiṃ AN iv.213 (Bhagavantaṃ); Pv-a 50. ger. ˚upāsiya DN ii.287.
2. to visit Vin i.214 (ger ˚upāsitvā ); iv.98 ■ pp. payirupāsiṭa (q.v.).
pari + upa + ās, with metathesis as in payirudāharati
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) attending to, worshipping: worship, homage MN ii.176; SN v.67; Iti 107; DN-a i.142; Pv-a 138.
fr. payirupāsati
a worshipper Thag-a 200.
fr. payirupāsati
worshipped Pv-a 116 (= upaṭṭhita), 205 (= purakkhata).
pp. of payirupāsati
to harness, yoke, employ, apply; Pass. payujjati to be applied to Sdhp 400 (ppr. ˚māna )-pp. payutta (q.v.) ■ Caus. payojeti (q.v.).
pa + yuj
(wrongly) applied, at random, careless “misdirected” AN i.199; Snp 711 (˚ṃ vācaṃ = obhāsaparikathā-nimitta-viññatti-payuttaṃ ghāsesana-vācaṃ Snp-a 497), 930 (= cīvarādīhi sampayutta tadatthaṃ vā payojita Snp-a 565; Nd i.389 however reads payutta and expls as “cīvarapayutta” etc.).
pp. of pa + yu, cp. Sk. pra + yuta united, fastened to, increased
1. yoked Snp p.13 (= yottehi yojita Snp-a 137).
2. applied, intent on, devoted to busy in (acc., loc., or-˚) Ja v.121 (ajjhattaṃ); Pv iii.710 (sāsane); Snp-a 497 (viññatti˚).
3. applicable (either rightly or wrongly); as su˚ well-behaved, acting well Mil 328; by itself (in bad sense), wrongly applied wasted (cp. payuta) AN ii.81 sq.; Snp 930 (see Nd i.389)
4. planned, schemed, undertaken Vin ii.194 (Deva dattena Bhagavato vadho p.).
pp. of payuñjati
(adj. n.) one who is applied or put to a (bad) task, as spy, hireling; bribed Ja i.262 (˚cora), 291 (˚dhutta).
payutta + ka
1. means, instrument Ja vi.116 (= karaṇa ); Snp-a 7; Dhs-a 215 (sa˚).
2. preparation, undertaking, occupation exercise, business, action, practice Vin iv.278; Pts ii.213 (sammā˚); Mil 328 (sammā˚); Kp-a 23, Kp-a 29 sq. Pv-a 8 (vapana˚), 96 (manta˚), 103, 146 (viññatti˚ cp. payutta 2), 285 (sakkhara-kkhipana˚). payogaṃ karoti to exert oneself, to undertake, to try Pv-a 184 (= parakkamati).
-karaṇa exertion, pursuit, occupation Dhp-a iii.238 -vipatti failure of means, wrong application Pv-a 117 Pv-a 136. -sampatti success of means Vv-a 30, Vv-a 32. -suddhi excellency of means, purity in application Dhs-a 165; Vv-a 60. -hīna deficient in exertion or application Mil 288.
Vedic prayoga, fr. pa + yuj, see payuñjati
(f.) application (to) Vism 134 (majjhatta˚).
fr. payoga
(nt.) 1. undertaking, business Pv-a 201.
2. appointment Ja i.143.
3. prescript injunction Dhs-a 403.
4. purpose, application, use Sdhp 395.
fr. pa + yuj
1 connected with, directed to, applied Snp-a 565.
2. instigated, directed Mil 3.
pp. of payojeti
1. to undertake, engage in, begin DN i.71 (kammante “set a business on foot”) AN ii.82 (kammantaṃ); Snp 404 (vaṇijjaṃ); Ja i.61; Pv-a 130 (kammaṃ).
2. to prepare, apply, use, put to, employ Pv-a 46 (bhesajjaṃ cuṇṇena saddhiṃ). 3. to engage, take into service, set to, hire Ja i.173 Ja ii.417.
4. to engage with, come to close quarters J. ii.10.
5. to put out at interest (vaḍḍhiyā) DN-a i.270 ■ pp. payojita (q.v.).
Caus. of payuñjati
(paternal) great-grandfather Ja i.2 (ayyaka˚); Pv-a 107 (id.).
pa + ayyaka
(adv ■ adj.) 1. (adv. & prep.) beyond, on the further side of (with abl. or loc.), over Pv-a 168 (para Gangāya, v.l. ˚āyaṃ). See in same meaning & application paraṃ, paro and parā & cp. cpds. like paraloka
2. (adj.) para follows the pron. declension; cases sg. nom. paro Snp 879, acc. paraṃ Snp 132, Snp 185, gen. dat parassa Snp 634; Pv ii.919, instr. parena Pv-a 116, loc paramhi Snp 634, and pare Pv ii.943; pl. nom. pare Dhp 6, acc. pare Dhp 257; Pv-a 15, gen. dat. paresaṃ DN i.3 Thag 743; Ja i.256; Snp 818, instr. parehi Snp 240, Snp 255; Pv-a 17 ■ Meanings: (a) beyond, i.e. “higher” in space (like Ved. para as opp. to avara lower), as well as “further” in time (i.e. future, to come, or also remote past: see loc. pare under c.), freq. in phrase paro loko the world beyond, the world (i.e. life) to come, the beyond or future life (opp. ayaṃ loko) Snp 185 (asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ na socati), 634 (asmiṃ loke paramhi ca); Dhp 168 (paramhi loke); Pv ii.83 (id. = paraloke Pv-a 107); but also in other combn, like santi-para (adj. higher than calm Dhp 202. Cp. paraloka, paraṃ and paro ■ (b) another, other, adj. as well as n., pl. others Snp 396 (parassa dāraṃ nâtikkameyya), 818 (paresaṃ cp. Nd i.150); Dhp 160 (ko paro who else), 257 (pare others); Pv ii.919 (parassa dānaṃ); ii.943 (pare, loc. paramhi parassa Pv-a 130); Dhp-a iv.182 (gen. pl.); Pv-a 15, Pv-a 60 (paresaṃ dat.), 103, 116, 253 (parassa purisassa & paraṃ purisaṃ). Often contrasted with and opposed to attano (one’s own, oneself), e.g. at MN i.200 (paraṃ vambheti attānaṃ ukkaṃseti); Snp 132 (attānaṃ samukkaṃse paraṃ avajānāti); Ja i.256 (paresaṃ, opp. attanā) Nd ii.26 (att-attha opp. par-attha, see cpds. ˚ajjhāsaya & ˚attha) ■ paro… paro “the one… the other” DN i.224 (kiṃ hi paro parassa karissati); paro paraṃ one another Snp 148 (paro paraṃ nikubbetha). In a special sense we find pare pl. in the meaning of “the others,” i.e. outsiders, aliens (to the religion of the Buddha), enemies, opponents (like Vedic pare DN i.2 (= paṭiviruddhā sattā DN-a i.51); Vin i.349; Dhp 6 ■ (c) some oblique cases in special meaning and used as adv.: paraṃ acc. sg. m. see under cpds., like parantapa; as nt. adv. see sep. In phrase puna ca paraṃ would be better read puna c’ aparaṃ (see apara)- parena (instr.) later on, afterwards Ja iii.395 (= aparena samayena C.) ■ pare (loc.); cp. Gr. παραί at; Lat prae before; Goth. faúra = E, for, old dat. of *per) in the past, before, yet earlier Ja ii.279 (where it continues ajja and hiyyo, i.e. to-day and yesterday, and refers to the day before yesterday. Similarly at Vin iv.63 pare is contrasted with ajja & hiyyo; and may mean “in future,” or “the day before yesterday.” It is of interest to notice the Ved. use of pare as “in the future opp. to adya & śvas); Ja iii.423 (the day before yesterday). At Dhp-a i.253 (sve vā pare vā) and iv.170 in the sense of “on the day after tomorrow.”- parā (only apparently abl., in reality either para + a˚ which represents the vocalic beginning of the second part of the cpd., or para + ā which is the directional prefix ā emphasizing para. The latter expln is more in the spirit of the Pali language): see separately. -paro (old abl. as adv. = Sk. paras) beyond further: see sep- parato (abl.) in a variety of expressions and shades of meaning, viz. (1) from another, as regards others AN iii.337 (attano parato ca); Ne 8 (ghosa), 50 (id.)-(2) from the point of view of “otherness,” i.e. as strange or something alien, as an enemy MN i.435 (in “anicca”-passage); AN iv.423; Nd ii.214ii; Pts ii.238 Kv 400; Mil 418 and passim; in phrase parato disvā “seen as not myself” Thag 1160; Thag 2, Thag 101; SN i.188 (sankhāre parato passa, dukkhato mā ca attato). (3) on the other side of, away from, beyond Ja ii.128; Pv-a 24 (kuḍḍānaṃ) ■ (4) further, afterwards, later on SN i.34; Ja i.255; Ja iv.139; Snp-a 119, Snp-a 482 ■ Note. The compounds with para˚ are combinations either with para 1 (adv. prep.), or para 2 (adj. n.). Those containing para in form parā and in meaning “further on to” see separately under parā˚. See also pāra, pārima etc.
-ajjhāsaya intent on others (opp. att˚) Snp-a 46 -attha (parattha, to be distinguished from adv. parattha q.v. sep.) the profit or welfare of another (opp. attattha) SN ii.29; AN iii.63; Dhp 166; Nd ii.26. -ādhīna dependent on others DN i.72 (= paresu adhīno parass’ eva ruciyā pavattati DN-a i.212); Ja vi.99; Thag-a 15 (˚vuttika) Vv-a 23 (˚vutti, paresaṃ bhāraṃ vahanto). -ūpakkama aggression of an enemy, violence Vin ii.194. -ūpaghāta injuring others, cruelty Vv 8440. -ūpaghātin killing others Dhp 184 (= paraṃ upahananto p. Dhp-a iii.237). -ūpavāda reproaching others Snp 389. -kata see paraṅkata ■ kamma service of others, ˚kārin serving others Vv 3322. -kāra see below under parankāra. -kula clan of another, strange or alien clan Snp 128; Dhp 73 -kkanta [para˚ or parā˚ *krānta?] walked (by another or gone over?) Ja vi.559 (better to be read with v.l. on p. 560 as pada˚ i.e. walked by feet, footprint) -kkama (parā + kram ] exertion, endeavour, effort strife DN i.53; DN iii.113; SN i.166 (daḷha˚); ii.28 (purisa˚) v.66, 104 sq.; AN i.4, AN i.50 (purisa˚); iv.190; Snp 293; Dhp 313; Nd i.487; Ja i.256; Ja ii.153; Dhs 13, Dhs 12, Dhs 289, Dhs 571; Mil 244; Dhp-a iv.139; Sdhp 253; adj. (-˚) sacca˚ one who strives after the truth Ja iv.383. -kkamati [*parakramati] to advance, go forward, exert oneself, undertake show courage Snp 966 (ger. parakkamma); Dhp 383 (id.); Pv iii.213 (imper. parakkāma, v.l. parakkama) Pp 19, Pp 23; Pv-a 184 (= payogaṃ karoti); Sdhp 439 -kkaroti [either for parā + kṛ; or more likely paras + kṛ; cp. paro] lit. “to put on the opposite side,” i.e. to remove, do away with Ja iv.26 (corresponding to apaneti C. explns as “parato kāreti,” taking parato in the sense of para 2 c 3), 404 (mā parākari = mā pariccaji C.) -gatta alien body, trsl. “limbs that are not thou Thag 1150. -gavacaṇḍa violent against the cows of another AN ii.109 = Pp 47 (opp. sakagavacaṇḍa, cp PugA 226: yo attano gogaṇaṃ ghaṭṭeti, paragogaṇe pana so rato sukhasīlo hoti etc.). -(n)kata made by something or somebody else, extra-self, extraneous, alien SN i.134 (nayidaṃ attakataṃ bimbaṃ nayidaṃ parakataṃ aghaṃ); with ref. to loka & dukkha and opposed to; sayankata DN iii.137 sq.; SN ii.19 sq., 33 sq., 38 sq. Ud 69 sq. -(n)kāra condition of otherness, other people, alienity Ud 70 (opp. ahankara selfhood). -citta the mind or heart of others AN v.160. -jana a stranger enemy, demon, fig. devil (cp. Sk. itarajana) MN i.153, MN i.210 -tthaddha [parā + tthaddha] propped against, founded on, relying on (with loc.) Ja vi.181 (= upatthadda C.) -tthabbha is to be read for ˚tthambha at Ja iv.313, in meaning = ˚tthaddha (kismiṃ). -dattūpajīvin living on what is given by others, dependent on another’s gift Snp 217; Mil 294. -davutta see sep. under parada -dāra the wife of another, somebody else’s wife MN i.87; AN ii.71 AN ii.191; Snp 108, Snp 242 (˚sevanā); Dhp 246, Dhp 309 (˚upasevin, cp Dhp-a iii.482); Ja vi.240; Dhp-a iii.481 (˚kamma). -dārika (better to be read as pāra˚) an adulterer SN ii.188, SN ii.259; Ja iii.43. -dhammika “of someone else’s norm,” one who follows the teaching of another, i.e. of an heretic teacher Snp 965 (Nd i.485: p˚ ā vuccanti satta sahadhammika ṭhapetvā ye keci Buddhe appasannā dhamme appa nnā, sanghe appasannā). -niṭṭhita made ready by others SN i.236. -nimmita “created by another,” in ˚vasavattin having power under control of another, Name of a class of Devas (see deva) DN i.216 sq. AN i.210; Iti 94; Pp 51; DN-a i.114, DN-a i.121; Kp-a 128; Vv-a 79. -neyya to be led by another, under another’s rule Snp 907 Nd i.321 (= parapattiya parapaccaya) -(n)tapa worrying or molesting another person (opp attantapa) DN iii.232; MN i.341, MN i.411; MN ii.159; Pp 56 -paccaya resting, relying, or dependent on someone else Nd i.321; usually neg. a˚ independent of another Vin i.12, Vin i.181 and passim. -pattiya = prec. Nd i.321. -pāṇa other living beings Snp 220. -puggala other people DN iii.108. -putta somebody else’s son AN iv.169; Snp 43 -pessa serving others, being a servant Snp 615 (= paresaṃ veyyāvacca Snp-a 466). -pessiyā a female servant or messenger, lit. to be sent by others Ja iii.413 (= parehi pesitabbā pesanakārikā C.). -ppavāda [cp. BSk. parapravādin “false teacher” Divy 202] disputation with another, challenge, opposition in teaching (appld to Non-Buddhistic systems) SN v.261; AN ii.238; Mil 170 Mil 175. -bhāga outer part, precinct part beyond Pv-a 24 -bhuta [Sk. parabhṛta] the Indian cuckoo (lit. brought up by another) Ja v.416 (so read for parābhūta). -bhojana food given by others Snp 366 (= parehi dinnaṃ saddhādeyyaṃ Snp-a 364). -loka [cpd. either with para 1. or para 2. It is hardly justified to assume a metaphysical sense, or to take para as temporal in the sense of paraṃ (cp. paraṃmaraṇā after death), i.e. the future world or the world to come] the other world, the world beyond (opp. ayaṃ loko this world or idhaloka the world here, see on term Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 29 sq. DN i.27, DN i.58, DN i.187; DN ii.319; SN i.72, SN i.138; Snp 579, Snp 666, Snp 1117 Nd i.60; Nd ii.214 (v.l. for paloka in anicca-passage) 410 (= manussalokaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbo paraloko); Pts i.121; Vv 845 (= narakaṃ hi sattānaṃ ekantânatthatāya parabhūto paṭisattubhūto loko ti visesato paraloko ti Vv-a 335); Pv-a 5, Pv-a 60 (= pettivisaya parattha), 64, 107, 253 (idhalokato p. natthi); Snp-a 478 (= parattha); Sdhp 316, Sdhp 326, Sdhp 327. -vambhitā contempt of others MN i.19 (a˚). -vambhin contempting others MN i.19, MN i.527 -vasatta power (over others) Dāvs iv.19. -vāda (1 talk of others, public rumour SN i.4; Snp 819 (cp. Nd i.151) Snp-a 475. (2) opposition Mil 94 sq. -vādin opponent Mil 348. visaya the other world, realm of the Dead Hades Pv iv.87 (= pettivisaya Pv-a 268). -vediya to be known by others, i.e. heterodox DN ii.241; Snp 474 (= parehi ñāpetabba Snp-a 410). -sattā (pl.) other beings AN i.255 = AN iii.17 (+ parapuggalā). -suve on the day after tomorrow Dhp-a iv.170 (v.l. SS for pare, see para 2 c.). -sena a hostile army DN i.89 = DN ii.16 DN iii.59 = Snp p.106 ≈ (cp. DN-a i.250 = Snp-a 450). -hattha the hand of the enemy Ja i.179. -hiṃsā hurting others Pv iii.73. -hita the good or welfare of others (opp. attahita) DN iii.233; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 163. -hetu on account of others, through others Snp 122 (attahetu + ) Pp 54.
fr. Idg. *per, *peri (cp. pari); Ved. para, parā, paraṃ; Lat. per through, Gr. πέρα & πέραν beyond; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under per & also pari pubba, pura, purāṇa
(param˚) (adv.) further, away (from); as prep. (w. abl.) after, beyond; absolute only in phrase ito paraṃ from here, after this, further, e.g. Kp-a 131; Snp-a 160, Snp-a 178, Snp-a 412, Snp-a 512, Snp-a 549; Pv-a 83, Pv-a 90 also in tato paraṃ Ja iii.281.
-parā (f.) [adv. converted into a noun paraṃ + abl. of para] lit. “after the other,” i.e. succession, series Vin ii.110; Vin iv.77, Vin iv.78 (parampara-bhojana “taking food in succession,” successive feeding, see under bhojana, and cp. C. at Vin iv.77, Vin iv.78 and Vin Texts i.38); DN i.239; MN i.520; AN ii.191 (paramparāya in phrase anussavena p. itikirāya, as at Nd ii.151); Bv i.79; Ja i.194; Ja iv.35 (expld by C. as purisa˚, viz. a series of husbands, but probably misunderstood, Kern, Toev. s. v. interperts as “defamation, ravishing”); Ne 79 (˚parahetu); Mil 191, Mil 276; Dhs-a 314; Snp-a 352; Dhp-a i.49 (sīsa˚). -maraṇā (adv.) after death; usually in combn with kāyassa bhedā p. after the dissolution of the body, i.e. after death SN i.231; DN i.245; Pv-a 27 Pv-a 133; absolutely only in phrase hoti Tathāgato p. DN i.188 DN i.192; AN v.193. -mukhā (adv.) in one’s absence, lit with face turned away (opp. sammukhā in presence, thus at Ja iii.263 where parammukhā corresponds to raho and sam˚ to āvi; Pv-a 13) DN i.230 (parammukhin?) Dhp-a ii.109.
orig. nt. of para
see parājeti.
(adv.) elsewhere, hereafter, in the Beyond, in the other world SN i.20; Snp 661 = Iti 42 = Dhp 306; Dhp 177; Ja ii.417; Pv i.1110 (= paraloke Pv-a 60); iii.120 (= samparāye Pv-a 177) Snp-a 478 (= paraloke).
Vedic parastāt beyond
(adj.) finding pleasure in, fond of, only in two (doubtful cpds. viz. ˚vutta [unexpld, perhaps v for y, as daya → dava through influence of d in parada˚; thus = parata yutta?] “fond of being prepared,” adapted, apt, active alert; only in one stock phrase (which points to this form as being archaic and probably popular etymology, thus distorting its real derivation), viz. appossukka pannaloma + Vin ii.184 (Vin. Texts iii.232 trsl. “secure,” cp. Vin ii.363); MN i.450; MN ii.121 (v.l. BB paradatta˚),-and ˚samācāra living a good (active) life MN i.469.
for uparada (?) = uparata, pp. of upa + ram
(adj.) highest, most excellent, superior, best paraphrased by agga seṭṭha visiṭṭha at Nd ii.502 A Nd i.84, Nd i.102 (the latter reading viseṭṭha for visiṭṭha); by uttama at Dhp-a iii.237; Vv-a 78 ■ DN i.124 (ettaka˚) MN ii.120 (˚nipacca); SN i.166; SN ii.277; SN v.230; AN v.64 (˚diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna); Snp 138 (yasaṃ paramaṃ patto), 296 (˚ā mittā), 788 (suddhaṃ ˚ṃ arogaṃ), 1071 (saññāvimokhe ˚e vimutto); Dhp 184 (nibbānaṃ ˚ṃ vadanti Buddhā). 203, 243; Vv 161 (˚alankata paramaṃ ativiya visesato Vv-a 78) Pv ii.910 (˚iddhi) Pp 15, Pp 16, Pp 66; Snp-a 453 (˚issara); Pv-a 12 (˚nipacca) 15 (˚duggandha), 46 ■ At the end of a cpd. (-˚) “at the outmost, at the highest, at most; as a minimum at least” Vin iv.263 (dvangula-pabba˚); esp. freq. in phrase sattakkhattu˚; one who will be reborn seven times at the outmost, i.e. at the end of the 7 rebirthinterval SN ii.185 (sa˚); v.205; AN i.233; AN iv.381; AN v.120; Iti 18; Kv 469. See pāramī & pāramitā.;
-attha [cp. class. Sk. paramārtha] the highest good ideal; truth in the ultimate sense, philosophical truth (cp. Kvu trsl. 180; J.P.T.S. 1914, 129 sq.; Cpd. 6, 81) Arahantship Snp 68 (= vuccati Amataṃ Nibbānaṃ etc Nd ii.409), 219 (˚dassin); Nd ii.26; Mil 19, Mil 31; ˚dīpanī Exposition of the Highest Truth, Name of the Commentary on Th, Vv and Pv; mentioned e.g. at Pv-a 71 ˚jotikā id., Name of the C. on Kp and Sn, mentioned e.g. at Kp-a 11 ■ As ˚-, in instr. and abl. used adverbially in meaning of “in the highest sense, absolutely κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν, primarily, ideally, in an absolute sense, like ˚pāramī Bv i.77 ˚visuddhi AN v.64; ˚saññita Thig 210; ˚suñña Pts ii.184; ˚suddhi Snp-a 528; abl. paramatthato Mil 28; Vv-a 24 (manusso), 30 (bhikkhu), 72 (jīvitindriyaṃ); Pv-a 146 (pabbajito, corresponding to anavasesato), 253 (na koci kiñci hanati = not at all) instr. paramatthena Mil 71 (vedagū), 268 (sattûpaladdhi). -gati the highest or best course of life or future exsitence Vv 3512 (= anupādisesa-nibbāna Vv-a 164).
Vedic parama; superl. formation of para, lit. “farthest,” cp. similarly, although fr. diff. base Lat. prīmus
the most influential or ruling doctrine MN iii.7.
cp. Vedic parama-jyā
(f.) the highest quantity, measure on the outside minimum or maximum DN i.60 (ghāsa-cchādana-paramatāya santuṭṭho contented with a minimum of food & clothing; DN-a i.169 expls by uttamatāya); MN i.10 (abyābajjha˚); SN i.82 (nāḷik’ odana-paramatāya on a nāḷi of boiled rice at the most); freq. in phrase sattakkhattuṃ p. interval of seven rebirths at the outside (cp. parama), being reborn seven times at the most SN ii.134 sq.; SN v.458; Kv 469 (cp. Kvu trsl. 2683).
fr. parama, Vedic paramatā highest position
at SN v.441 is to be corrected to pharasu˚.
(prefix) prep meaning “on to,” “over” (with the idea of mastering) also “through, throughout.” The ā is shortened before double consonant, like parā + kṛ; = parakkaroti, parā kram = parakkamati (see under cpds. of para).
para + ā, not instr. of para: see para 2 c; in some cases it may also correspond to paraṃ˚
see parakkaroti (paraṃ˚? or parā?).
1. defeat DN i.10; Ja vi.209; Vv-a 139.
2. defeat in game, loss, losing at play SN i.149 (dhana˚) = AN v.171 = Snp 659; Ja vi.234 (˚gāha sustainment of a loss).
parā + ji, opp. of jaya
defeated, having suffered a loss Vin iv.5; SN i.224; AN iv.432; Snp 440, Snp 681; Dhp 201 (= parena parājito Dhp-a iii.259, where Bdhgh takes it evidently as instr. of para = parā); Ja i.293; Ja ii.160 (sahassaṃ), 403.
pp. of parājeti
to defeat, conquer; in gambling: to make lose, beat Pv-a 151 (sahassaṃ p by 1,000 coins) ■ aor. parāji in 3rd pl. ˚jiṃsu, only in one stock phrase referring to the battle of the Gods Titans, viz. at DN ii.285 = MN i.253 (˚jiniṃsu) = SN i.221 SN i.224 (v.l. ˚jiniṃsu) = AN iv.432 (˚jiyiṃsu, with v.l. ˚jiniṃsu), where a Pass. is required (“were defeated lost”) in opp. to jiniṃsu, and the reading ˚jiyiṃsu as aor. pass. is to be preferred ■ Pass. ˚jīyati to be defeated, to suffer defeat SN i.221 (Pot. parājeyya, but form is Active); Ja i.290; and parajjhati (1st pl. parajjhāma) Ja ii.403; aor. parājiyi: see above parāji ■ pp parājita (q.v.).
parā + jeti of ji, cp. jayati
defeat, destruction, ruin, disgrace SN ii.241; AN ii.73; AN iv.26; Snp 91–115; Ja iii.331; Snp-a 167.
fr. parā + bhu Vedic parābhava
1. to go to ruin Snp 91 (= parihāyati vinassati).
2. to win through, to surpass Thag 1144 (cp. trsl. 3814) ■ pp. parābhūta (q.v.) See also parābhetvā.
parā + bhū
ruined, fallen into disgrace MN ii.210 (avabhūta + ) ■ Note. parābhūta at Ja v.416 is to be read parabhuta (q.v.).
pp. of parābhavati
at Ja v.153 is not clear (C.: hadayaṃ bhinditvā olokento viya… ); perhaps we have here a reading parābh˚ for parāg˚ (as bheṇḍuka wrongly for geṇḍuka) which in its turn stands for parādhetvā (cp. similarly BSk. ārāgeti for ārādheti), thus meaning “propitiating.”
touched, grasped, usually in bad sense: succumbing to, defiled, corrupted DN i.17 for a different, commentarial interpretation see Parāmāsa (evaṃ˚ so acquired or taken up; cp. DN-a i.107 nirāsanka-cittatāya punappuna āmaṭṭha); SN ii.94 Nd ii.152 (gahita p. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. gahessasi No 227); Dhs 584, Dhs 1177, Dhs 1500; Sdhp 332 ■ dup˚ wrongly grasped, misused SN i.49 ■ apparāmaṭṭha [cp. BSk aparāmṛṣta not affected Mptp. p. 84] untarnished incorrupt DN ii.80 (cp. Dial ii.85); iii.245; SN ii.70; AN iii.36.
pp. of parāmasati
touching, seizing, taking hold of MN i.130 (v.l. ˚māsa which reading is probably to be preferred, cp. Trenckner on p. 541) SN iii.46 (v.l. ˚māsa) ■ neg. aparāmasa not leading astray, not enticing DN i.17 (˚to), 202 ■ Perhaps we should read parāmāsa altogether.
parā + mṛś, but see parāmāsa
to touch, hold on to, deal with, take up, to be attached or fall a victim to (acc.) Vin ii.47, Vin ii.195, Vin ii.209; DN i.17; MN i.257; SN iii.110; Ja iv.138; in combn with gaṇhāti & nandati (abhiniveseti) at Nd;2 227 ■ ger. parāmassa DN ii.282; MN i.130, MN i.498 (but cp. p. 541); grd. parāmasitabba Ja i.188-pp. parāmaṭṭha (q.v.).
para + masati of mṛś
(nt.) touching, seizing, taking up Nd ii.576 (daṇḍa-sattha˚); Dhs-a 239 (angapaccanga˚); Pv-a 159 (kiriyā˚).
fr. parāmasati
touching contact, being attached to, hanging on, being under the influence of, contagion (Dhs. trsl. 316). In Asl. 49, Bdhgh analyses as parato āmasantīti parāmāsā: p. means “they handle dhamma’s as other” (than what they really are e.g. they transgress the real meaning of anicca etc and say nicca). Hence the renderings in Asl. trs “Reversion,” in Dialogues iii.28, 43, etc. “perverted (parāmasāmi parāmaṭṭha)-S iii.46, 110; AN ii.42 (sacca˚); iii.377 (sīlabbata˚), 438 (id.); v.150 (sandiṭṭhi˚) DN iii.48; Thag 342; Iti 48 (itisacca˚, cp. idaṃsaccabhinivesa under kāyagantha); Pp 22; Dhs 381, Dhs 1003 Dhs 1175 (diṭṭhi˚ contagion of speculative opinion), 1498 (id.) It is almost synonymous with abhinivesa; see kāyagantha (under gantha), and cp. Nd ii.227 (gāha p abhinivesa) and Nd ii.under taṇhā iii. 1 C ■ See also parāmasa.
parā + mṛś, cp. Epic Sk. parāmarśa being affected by; as philos. term “reflection”
(adj.) grasping, seizing, perverting DN iii.48; MN i.43, MN i.96 (sandiṭṭhi˚). Parayana (Parayana)
fr. parāmāsa
(nt.) 1. (n.) final end, i.e. support, rest, relief SN i.38; AN i.155, AN i.156 (tāṇa lena dīpa etc.); Ja v.501 = Ja vi.375 (dīpañ ca p.).
2. (adj ■ ˚) (a) going through to, ending in, aiming at, given to, attached to, having one’s end or goal in; also: finding one’s support in (as daṇḍa leaning on a stick MN i.88; AN i.138), in foll. phrases prevalent: Amata˚ SN v.217 sq.; tama˚ Pp 51; Nibbāna SN iv.373; SN v.218; brahmacariya˚ SN i.234; Maccu˚ SN v.217; sambodhi˚ DN i.156; DN ii.155; Pp 16. Cp. also Snp 1114 (tap˚ = tad˚, see Nd ii.411); Mil 148 (ekantasoka˚); Dhp-a i.28 (rodana, i.e. constantly weeping). (b) destined to, having one’s next birth in., e.g. Avīci Ja iii.454; Ja iv.159; duggati˚ Pv-a 32; devaloka˚ Ja i.218 brahmaloka˚ Ja iii.396; Mil 234; sagga˚ Ja vi.329; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 160; sugati˚ Pv-a 89 similarly nīlamañca˚ Pv ii.25. See also pārāyana.
fr. parā + i, cp. Vedic parāyaṇa highest instance, also BSk. parāyaṇa e.g. Divy 57, Divy 327
see sam˚.
(adj.) having one’s refuge or resort (in), being supported, only neg. aparāyinī (f.) without support Ja iii.386.
fr. parāyana
(indecl.) prefix, signifying (lit. around, round about; (fig.) all round, i.e. completely altogether. The use as prep. (with acc. = against, w abl. = from) has entirely disappeared in Pāli (but see below 1a). As adv. “all round” it is only found at Ja vi.198 (parī metri causa; combd with samantato). The composition form before vowels is pariy˚; which in combn with ud and upa undergoes metathesis, scil payir˚. Frequent combns with other preps. are pari + ā (pariyā˚) and pari + ava (pariyo˚); sampari˚; Close affinities of p. are the preps. adhi (cp. ajjhesati → pariyesati, ajjhogāhati → pariyogāhati) and abhi (cp abhirādheti → paritoseti, abhitāpa → paritāpa, abhipīḷita → pari˚, abhipūreti → pari˚, abhirakkhati → pari˚), cp also its relation to ā in var. combns ■ Meanings. 1. (lit. (a) away from, off (cp. Vedic pari as prep. c. abl.: ˚kaḍḍhati to draw over, seduce, ˚cheda cutting off restriction, ˚puñchati wipe off ■ (b) all round, round (expld by samantato, e.g. at Vism 271 in pallanka) ˚anta surrounded, ˚esati search round, ˚kiṇṇa covered all round (i.e. completely, cp. expln as “samantato ākiṇṇa”), ˚carati move round, ˚jana surrounding people ˚dhāvati run about, ˚dhovati wash all round, ˚paleti watch all round, fig. guard carefully, ˚bhamati roam about, ˚maṇḍala circular (round), ˚sā assembly (lit sitting round, of sad ).
2. (fig.) (a) quite, completely very much, κα ̓τ εςοξήν: ˚ādāna consummation, ˚āpanna gone completely into, ˚odāta very pure, ˚osāna complete end, ˚gūhati to hide well, ˚toseti satisfy very much ˚pūreti fulfil, ˚bhutta thoroughly enjoyed, ˚yañña supreme sacrifice, ˚suddha extremely clean ■ (b) too much, excessively (cp. ati˚ and adhi˚): ˚tāpeti torment excessively, ˚pakka over-ripe ■ A derivation (adv. from pari is parito (q.v.). On its relation to Sk. pariṣ see parikkhāra. A frequently occurring dialectical variant of pari˚ is pali˚; (q.v.) ■ Note. The expln of P Commentators as regards pari is “pariggahaṭṭho Pts i.176; “paricca” Snp-a 88; “parito” Vv-a 316; Pv-a 33.
Idg. *peri to verbal root *per, denoting completion of a forward movement (as in Sk. pṛ2 piparti. to bring across, promote; cp. Vedic pṛc to satisfy, pṛṇāti to fill, fulfill. See also P. para). Cp Vedic pari, Av. pairi, Gr. πέρι, Lat. per (also in adj per-magnus very great); Obulg. pariy round about Lith. per̃ through, Oir er-(intensifying prefix), Goth faír, Ohg. fir, far = Ger. ver-
to draw over or towards oneself, to win over seduce DN ii.283 (purisaṃ); Mil 143 (janapadaṃ). Cp parikassati and samparikaḍḍhati.
pari + k˚, cp. BSk. parikaḍḍhati Mvu ii.255
(nt.) drawing, dragging along Ja ii.78; Mil 154.
fr. prec.
arrangement, preparation, getting up Ja v.203.
*parikṛti of kṛ; (?)
cut round, cut off Mil 188.
pp. of pari + kantati2; corresponds to Sk, kṛtta, which is usually represented in P. by kanta2
(f.) 1. “round-about tale,” exposition, story, esp religious tale DN ii.204; Vism 41 (= pariyāya-kathā
2. talk about, remark, hint Vin i.254 (cp. Vin Texts ii.154); Vb 353 = Vism 23 (with obhāsa nimitta); Snp-a 497.
3. continuous or excessive talk Vism 29.
pari + kathā, cp. BSk. parikathā Divy 225, Divy 235
cut open Vin iii.89 (kucchi p.). See also parikatta & cp. Kern,; Toev. s. v (misreading for ˚katta?) ■ Note. Reading parikantaṃ upāhanaṃ at Ja vi.51 is with v.l. to be changed to pariyantaṃ.
pari + kanta2 of kantati2
at Vin ii.80 (bhāsita˚) is probably to be read as pārikata. Bdhgh explns as parik kametvā kata, but it is difficult to derive it fr. parikkamati Vin. Texts iii.18 trsl. “as well in speech as in act” and identify it with parikanta1, hardly justified Cp. also Kern. Toev. s. v. The passage is evidently faulty.
pp. of parikaroti
to wind round, twist Ja iii.185 (pāso pādaṃ p.; but taken by C. as parikantati2 expld as “cammādīni chindanto samantā kantati”).
pari + kantati1
to cut (round), cut through, pierce MN i.244 (vātā kucchiṃ p.); Ja iii.185 (see parikantati1).
pari + kantati2
1. preparation, intention, stratagem Thag 940.
2. assumption, supposition, surmise AN i.197; AN v.271; Dhs-a 308.
fr. pari + kalp
inclined, determined, decided, fixed upon Sdhp. 362, 602.
pp. of parikappati
(nt.) “doing round,” i.e. doing up, viz (1.) arrangement, getting up, preparation Vin ii.106 (˚ṃ kārāpeti), 117 (geruka˚ plastering with red chalk) 151 (id.). parikammaṃ karoti to make (the necessary) preparation, to set to work Vism 395 and passim (with ref. to iddhi). Usually in form parikammakata arranged, prepared Vin ii.175 (bhūmi), as “with,” viz. geruka˚ plastered with red chalk Vin i.48 Vin ii.209; lākhā˚ Ja iii.183; Ja iv.256; su˚; beautifully arranged or prepared, fitful, well worked Mil 62 (dāru), 282 (maṇiratana); Vv-a 188. In special sense used with ref. to jhāna, as kasiṇa˚; processes whereby jhāna is introduced, preparations for meditation Ja i.141 Ja iv.306; Ja v.162, Ja v.193; Dhs-a 168; cp. Cpd. 54; Dhp-a i.105 (2.) service, attention, attending Vin i.47; Vin ii.106, Vin ii.220; SN i.76; Thig 376 (= veyyāvacca Thag-a 253); Pp 56; Dhp-a i.96, Dhp-a i.333, chiefly by way of administering ointments etc. to a person, cp. Ja v.89; Dhp-a i.250. sarīra˚ attending the body DN-a i.45, DN-a i.186; Snp-a 52.
-kāraka one who ministers to or looks after a person attendant; one who makes preparations Thig 411 (f-ikā = paricārikā Thag-a 267); Ja i.232.
pari + kamma
“doing round,” i.e. girdle, loincloth Ja iv.149; Dhp-a i.352 ■ In cpd. ovāda˚ it is v.l. SS at DN i.137 for paṭikara (q.v.).
fr. pari + kṛ; a similar formation belonging to same root, but with fig. meaning is to be found in parikkhāra, which is also expld by parivara cp. parikaroti = parivāreti
to surround, serve, wait upon, do service for J. iv.405 (= parivāreti C.); v. 353 (id.), 381 vi.592. Cp. parikara & parikkhāra.;
pari + kṛ;
1. to drag about SN i.44, cp. Dhs-a 68.
2. sweep away, carry away Dhp-a ii.275 (mah’ ogho viya parikassamāno, v.l. ˚kaḍḍhamāno) ■ Pass. parikissati (q.v.).
pari + kṛṣ, cp BSk. parikarṣayati to carry about Divy 475, and parikaḍḍhati
scattered or strewn about, surrounded Ja iv.400; Ja vi.89, Ja vi.559; Pv i.61 (makkhikā˚ samantato ākiṇṇa Pv-a 32); Mil 168, Mil 285; DN-a i.45 (spelt parikkhiṇṇa). Cp. sampari˚.
pp. of parikirati
declared, announced, made public Sdhp 601.
pp. of parikutteti
to declare, praise, make public Mil 131, Mil 141, Mil 230, Mil 383 ■ pp. parikittita (q.v.).
pari + kitteti
to strew or scatter about, to surround SN i.185 = Thag 1210; aor. parikiri Ja vi.592 (v.l. for parikari, see parikaroti) ■ pp. parikiṇṇa (q.v.).
pari + kirati
strewing about, trsld “consecrating sites” DN i.12 (vatthu-kamma + vatthu˚; v.l. paṭi˚; expld at DN-a i.98 as “idañ c’ idañ ca āharathā ti vatvā tattha balikamma-karaṇaṃ”). The BSk. form appears to be parīkṣā, as seen in phrase vatthuparīkṣā at Divy 3 & 16. See under parikkhā.;
fr. pari + kirati
tired out, exhausted Mil 303.
pp. of parikilamati
to get tired out, fatigued or exhausted Ja v.417, Ja v.421 ■ pp. parikilanta (q.v.).
pari + kilamati
to get stained or soiled; fig. get into trouble or misery (?) see parikissati ■ pp parikiliṭṭha see parikkiliṭṭha.
pari + kilissati
misery, calamity, punishment Thag-a 241 (for ˚klesa, q.v.).
pari + kilesa
to be dragged about or worried, to be harassed, to get into trouble SN i.39 (trsl. “plagues itself”); AN ii.177 AN iv.186; Snp 820 (v.l. Nd i.˚kilissati; expld at Nd i.154 as kissati parikissati parikilissati, with vv.ll. kilissati pakirissati).
most likely Pass. of parikassati; maybe Pass. of kisa (= Sk. kṛśa) to become emaciated. Mrs. Rh. D at K.S. 319 takes it as contracted form of kilissati
at Sdhp 145, meaning? Cp. palikujjati.
greatly excited, very much agitated AN ii.75; Mil 253.
pp. of pari + kup
(f.) adornment, adorning oneself, being fond of ornaments Nd ii.5852 (v.l. parilepanā); DN-a i.286 has paṭikelanā instead, but Vb id p. 351 parikeḷanā with v.l. parikelāsanā.
pari + keḷanā
to excite violently Mil 253.
Caus. of pari + kup
(nt.) walking about MN i.43, MN i.44; adj. sa˚; having (opportunity for) walking about i.e. accessible, good for rambling in, pleasant, said of the Dhamma AN v.262 (opp. a˚).
pari + kram
at Ja v.74 is probably to be read parikkhita (pari + ukṣ ): see okkhita “sprinkled, strewn,” unless it is misreading for parikiṇṇa.
soiled, stained Vin ii.296 (for parikiliṭṭha, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.); id. p at AN ii.56 has paṭikiliṭṭha, cp. upakkiliṭṭha Vin ii.295.
pp. of parikilissati
(-˚) see parikkhā.
(adj.) investigating, examining, experienced, shrewd Pv-a 131 (lokiya˚ experienced in the ways of the world, for agarahita).
fr. parikkhati
(nt.) putting to the test, trying Sdhp 403 (sarīra˚, or should we read parirakkhaṇa? Cp. parirakkhati).
fr. parikkhati; cp. Class. Sk. parīkṣaṇa
wounded, hurt, grazed Ja iii.431; Pv-a 272 (a˚).
pp. of pari + kṣan
made up, prepared, endowed with, equipped, adorned DN ii.217; MN iii.71; Mil 328.
pp. of *parikkharoti; cp. Sk. pariṣkṛta
(f.) “making up,” pretence, posing, sham Pp 19 (23) = Vb 351 (358).
abstr. fr. parikkhata2
to look round, to inspect, investigate, examine AN i.162 (vaṇṇaṃ parikkhare 3rd pl.) See also parikkhaka, parikkhavant & parikkhā.;
pari + īkṣ
read pāri˚ (= parikkhatatā) q.v.
lit. to do all round, i.e. to make up, equip, adorn (cp. parikaroti); pp. parikkhata2 (q.v.); see also parikkhāra.
pariṣ + kṛ;
exhaustion, waste, diminution, decay, loss, end DN i.156; MN i.453; MN iii.37 sq.; SN i.2, SN i.90, SN i.152; SN v.461; AN i.100, AN i.299 AN ii.68; AN iii.46 (bhogā ˚ṃ gacchanti); iv.148, 350; Thag 929; Snp 374, Snp 749, Snp 1094 (= pahānaṃ etc. Nd ii.412); Dhp 139; Ja i.290; Pv ii.615; Pp 16, Pp 17, Pp 63; Mil 102; Dhp-a iv.140 (˚ṃ gacchati to come to waste, to disappear atthaṃ gacchati of Dhp 384); Thag-a 285; Pv-a 3 (dhanasannicayo ˚ṃ na gamissati). In the latter phrase freq combd with pariyādāna (q.v.).
fr. pari + kṣi2, cp. Epic Sk. parikṣaya
(adj.) circumspect, elever, experienced Ja iii.114.
fr. parikkhati
(f.) examination, investigation, circumspection prudence Ja iii.115; Ne 3, Ne 4, Ne 126 (cp. Index p. 276) Sdhp. 532 (attha˚).
fr. pari + īkṣ, cp. BSk. parīksā Divy 3 & 16 in vastu˚, ratna˚ etc. with which cp. P. vatthu-parikirana
“all that belongs to anything,” make-up, adornment (so Nd ii.585 bāhirā p. of the body) ■ (a) requisite, accessory equipment, utensil, apparatus Vin i.50, Vin i.296 (˚colaka cloth required for water-strainers & bags, cp; Vin. Texts ii.229); ii.150 (senāsana˚-dussa clothrequirement of seat & bed); iv.249 sq., 284; DN i.128 DN i.137 (yaññassa p. = parivāra DN-a i.297); MN i.104 (jīvita˚) iii.11; SN ii.29; AN iv.62 (citt’ ālankāraṃ citta-parikkhār atthaṃ dānaṃ), 236 (id.); Ja iii.470 (sabba˚-sampannaṃ dānaṃ with all that belongs to it); v.232; Snp 307 Nd ii.585; Ne 1 sq.; 4, 108; DN-a i.294, DN-a i.299; Dhp-a i.38 Dhp-a i.240 (geha˚), 352 (v.l. for parikara); Pv-a 81 (sabba˚)- saparikkhāra together with the (other) requisites, i.e. full of resources; used with reference to the samādhiparikkhārā (see below) DN ii.217; MN iii.71 ■ (b) In a special sense and in very early use it refers to the “set of necessaries” of a Buddhist monk & comprises the 4 indispensable instruments of a mendicant, enum;d in stock phrase “cīvara-piṇḍapāta-senāsana-gilānapaccayabhesajja-p.” i.e. robe, alms-bowl, seat & bed medicine as help in illness. Thus freq. found in Canon e.g. at Vin iii.132; DN iii.268; SN iv.288, SN iv.291; Nd ii.523 (as 1st part of “yañña”); also unspecified, but to be understood as these 4 (different Vin Texts iii.343 which take it to mean the 8 requisites: see below) at Vin ii.267 ■ Later we find another set of mendicants requisites designated as “aṭṭha parikkhārā,” the 8 requirements. They are enumd in verse at Ja i.65; DN-a i.206, viz. ticīvaraṃ, patto, vāsi, sūci, (kāya-bandhanaṃ, parissāvana, i.e. the 3 robes, the bowl, a razor, a needle, the girdle, a water-strainer. They are expld in detail DN-a i.206 sq. Cp. also Ja iv.342 (aṭṭhaparikkhāra-dhara); v.254 (kāyabandhana-parissāvanasūci-vāsi-satthakāni; the last-named article being “scissors” instead of a razor); Dhp-a ii.61 (˚dhara thera) ■ (c) In other combns: satta nagara˚; AN iv.106 sq. (cp. nagarûpakārikā DN i.105); satta samādhi˚ DN ii.216; MN iii.71; AN iv.40; soḷasa˚ (adj.) of yañña having sixteen accessories DN i.134 (cp. Dial. i.174, 177) bahu˚ having a full equipment, i.e. being well-off Vin iii.138; Ja i.126 ■ Note. A set of 12 requisites (1–8 as under b and 4 additional) see detailed at DN-a i.207.
fr. *parikkharoti, cp. late Sk. pariṣkāra
(-˚) (adj.) one who has the parikkhāras (of the mendicant). Usually the 8 p. are understood, but occasionally 12 are given as in the detailed enumn of p. at DN-a i.204–207.
fr. parikkhāra
at DN-a i.45 is to be read parikiṇṇa (q.v.).
thrown round, overspread, overlaid, enclosed, fenced in, encircling, surrounded by (-˚) MN iii.46; AN iv.106 (su˚); SN i.331 (read valligahana˚); Pv iv.336 (v.l. for pariyanta as in i.1013) Vism 71 (of gāma); Thag-a 70; Dhp-a i.42 (pākāra˚); Pv-a 52 (= pariyanta i.1013), 283 (sāṇī-pākāra˚; ); Sdhp 596.
pp. of parikkhipati
to throw round, encircle, surround Vin ii.154; Ja i.52 (sāṇiṃ), 63, 150, 166; ii.104 iii.371; Dhp-a i.73 ■ pp. parikkhitta (q.v.) ■ Caus II. parikkhipāpeti Ja i.148 (sāṇiṃ); ii.88 (sāṇi-pākāraṃ).
pari + kṣip
exhausted, wasted, decayed, extinct Vin iv.258; MN iii.80; SN i.92; SN ii.24 SN v.145, SN v.461; DN iii.97, DN iii.133 (˚bhava-saṃyojana); Iti 79 (id.); AN iv.418, AN iv.434 (āsavā); Snp 175, Snp 639, Snp 640; Dhp 93 Pp 11, Pp 14; Mil 23 (˚āyuka); Pv-a 112 (˚tiṇodak’ āhāra).
pp. of parikkhīyati
(nt.) the fact of being exhausted, exhaustion, extinction, destruction DN-a i.128 (jīvitassa); Pv-a 63 (kammassa), 148 (id.).
abstr. of parikkhīṇa
to go to ruin, to be wasted or exhausted Thig 347 (= parikkhayaṃ gacchati Thag-a 242) ■ pp. parikkhīṇa (q.v.).
pari + khīyati of kṣi2
1. closing round, surrounding, neighbourhood, enclosure Vin iv.304; Ja i.338; Ja iv.266; Snp-a 29 (˚dāru etc.).
2. circumference Ja i.89; Ja v.37 Vism 205; Kp-a 133; Snp-a 194.
3. “closing in on, i.e. fight, quarrel Iti 11, Iti 12.
fr. pari + kṣip
hardship, misery, calamity SN i.132 = Thig 191; Thig 345 (= parikilesa Thag-a 241).
pari + klesa
(f.) a ditch, trench, moat Vin ii.154; DN i.105 (ukkiṇṇa-parikha adj with trenches dug deep, combd with okkhittapaligha expld by khāta-parikha ṭhapita-paligha at DN-a i.274) MN i.139 (sankiṇṇa˚ adj. with trenches filled, Ep. of an Arahant, combd with ukkhittapaligha) = AN iii.84 sq. Nd ii.284 C (spelt kkh); AN iv.106 (nagara˚); Ja i.240, Ja i.490 Ja iv.106 (ukkiṇṇ’ antaraparikha); vi.276, 432; Cp II.13 (spelt kkh); Mil 1 (gambhīra˚); Snp-a 519 (˚taṭa); Pv-a 201 (˚piṭṭhe), 261 (id.), 278 (id., v.l. ˚parikkhāṭa-tīre).
fr. pari + khan, cp. Epic Sk. parikhā
(nt.) comprehension Ja ii.7 (˚paññā comprehensive wisdom).
fr. parigaṇhāti
(& Pariggaheti Caus.) 1. to embrace, seize, take possession of, hold, take up MN i.80 MN i.137; Ja iii.189; DN-a i.45.
2. to catch, grasp Dhp-a i.68.
3. to go all round Dhp-a i.91 (sakala-jambudīpaṃ) ■ Caus. ˚ggaheti (aor. ˚esi, ger. ˚etvā, inf. ˚etuṃ 1. to embrace, comprehend, fig. master Vin ii.213; Ja ii.28; Ja iii.332; Snp-a 549 (mantāya); Dhp-a iii.242; Pv-a 68 (hattesu), 93; Vv-a 75.
2. to explore, examine find out, search Ja i.162; Ja ii.3; Ja iii.85, Ja iii.268 (˚ggahetuṃ), 533; v.93, 101; Dhp-a ii.56 ■ Caus. II. parigaṇhāpeti Ja i.290.
3. to comprise, summarise Kp-a 166, Kp-a 167 ■ pp. pariggahita (q.v.).
pari + gṛh
to sink down, slip or glide off Ja iv.229, Ja iv.250; Ja v.68.
pari + galati, see gaḷati
to swallow Ja i.346.
pari + gilati
to hide, conceal AN i.149; AN iv.10, AN iv.31; Pv iii.43 (= paṭicchādeti Pv-a 194).
pari + gūhati
(f.) hiding, concealment, deception Pp 19, Pp 23.
fr. patigūhati
1. wrapping round, enclosing Thag 419 (? cp. Brethren 217 n. 6).
2. taking up seizing on, acquiring, acquisition, also in bad sense of “grasping” Snp 779 (= taṇhā and diṭṭhi˚ Nd i.57) Pts i.172; Pts ii.182 (nekkhamma˚ etc.); Nd i.11 (itthi acquiring a wife); Ja vi.259; Mil 244 (āhara˚ abstinence in food), 313 (id.).
3. belongings, property possessions DN ii.58; DN iii.289 = AN iv.400; MN i.137 (quoted at Nd i.122); SN i.93; Snp 805; Ja iv.371; Ja vi.259; Pv-a 76 (˚bhūta belonging to, the property of); Vv-a 213, Vv-a 321 sa˚; with all (its) belongings SN i.32.
4. a wife Thag-a 271; Pv-a 161 (kata˚ wedded), 282; Thag-a 271. sapariggaha → apariggaha married → unmarried (in general with ref. to the man as well as the woman) DN i.247; Ja iv.190; Ja vi.348, Ja vi.364.
5. grace, favour DN-a i.241 (āmisa˚ material grace).
fr. pari + gṛh
taken, seized, taken up, haunted, occupied Vin iii.51 (manussānaṃ p. by men) iv.31, 278; Dhp-a i.13 (amanussa˚ by ghosts); Pv-a 87 Pv-a 133; Sdhp 64 ■ f. abstr, ˚tā being possessed (Vism 121 (amanussa˚).
pp. of parigaṇhāti
(adj.) including, occupying Ne 79 (= upathambhaka C. as quoted in Index p. 276).
fr. pariggaha
a cross-bar Thag-a 211 (˚daṇḍa).
Vedic parigha, of which the usual P. representative is paligha (q.v.)
to rub (too) hard, scrub, scratch, only in ppr. aparighaṃsanto Vin i.46; Vin ii.208.
pari + ghaṃsati1
one who looks round or enquires, neg. a˚ Ja v.77.
n. ag. fr. pari + cakṣ, cp. akkhi & cakkhu
familiarity, acquaintance Ja vi.337; Vism 153; Pv-a 74 ■ adj. (-˚) acquainted with, versed in (loc.) Ja ii.249 (jāta˚), Vv-a 24 (kata˚); Pv-a 4 (id.) 129 (id.).
fr. pari + ci
(nt.) 1. going about, mode of life Dhp-a i.382 (gihīnaṃ ˚ṭṭhānaṃ, v.l. for vicaraṇa˚). 2. attending to, looking after, worshipping Dhp-a i.199 (aggi-p˚-ṭṭhāna fire-place).
3. enjoyment, pleasure (indriyānaṃ) Pv-a 16. See also paricāraṇā.
fr. pari + car
servant, attendant DN-a i.269.
fr. paricaraṇa
to move about, in var. senses, viz. 1. to go about, look after AN iii.94 (upaṭṭhahati + Ja v.421; Pv-a 175.
2. to worship (only in connection aggin p. to worship the fire) DN i.101; SN i.166; Dhp 107; Ja i.494; Snp p.79 (= payirupāsati Snp-a 401).
3. to roam about, to feast one’s senses, to amuse oneself play, sport Pv-a 77 (indriyāni = kīḷāmi Pv ii.121) ■ We often find reading pariharati for paricarati, e.g. at Dhp-a ii.232; cp. paricāreti for ˚hāreti Pv-a 175; paricaraṇā for ˚haraṇā Pv-a 219 ■ pp. pariciṇṇa; Caus paricāreti (q.v.).
pari + carati
(f.) going about, service, ministration, worship SN i.182; AN i.132; Dhp-a ii.232 (aggi˚; ) Occurs also as pāricariyā (q.v.), e.g. at Ja v.154. See also paricārikā.
fr. paricarati
fr. serving, attendance; (m.) servant, attendant Thag 632 (C. on this stanza for paddhagū).
paricāreti
(adj.-n.) attending, serving honouring; (m.) attendant, worshipper, follower (cp BSk. paricāraka attendant Avs i.170; Avs ii.167] DN i.101 DN ii.200; Thag 475; Snp p.218 (Nd ii.reads ˚cārika) Ja i.84; Ja iv.362; Pv iv.87 (not ˚vāraka); DN-a i.137, DN-a i.269 See also paricārika.
fr. paricāreti
(f.) care, attention, looking after; pleasure, feasting, satisfaction Pv ii.12 (gloss for ˚cārika); Pv-a 219.
fr. paricāreti
(adj.-n.) = paricāraka (servant, attendant) AN v.263 (aggi˚ fire-worshipper); Pv ii.620 (amacca minister & attendant); Thag-a 267; Snp-a 597 ■ f. ˚carikā (1) a maid-servant, handmaiden, nurse, (personal attendant MN i.253; cp. SN i.125; Ja i.204 (pāda˚; ), 291 ii.395; iv.35 (veyyāvacca-kārikā p.), 79; v.420; Pv ii.126 (= veyyāvacca-kārinī Pv-a 157); Pv-a 46 ■ (2 care, attention; pleasure, pastime (so here, probably another form of paricāriyā) Pv iv.12 (= indriyānaṃ pariharaṇā Pv-a 219; gloss ˚cāraṇā ).
served by; delighted by, indulging in MN i.504.
pp. of paricāreti
(adj. n.) serving, attending, f. a maid-servant Ja ii.395.
fr. paricāreti
1. to serve, wait on, attend upon, honour, worship [cp. BSk. paricārayati Divy 114 sq., 421] SN i.124 (pāde); Dhp-a iii.196 (id.); Ja i.81 (˚cāritabba-ṭṭhāna place of worship); iv.274; v.9. Pass. paricāriyati, ppr. ˚iyamāna MN i.46, MN i.504; Ja i.58 In this sense it may also be taken as “being delighted or entertained by.”
2. to amuse oneself, gratify one’s senses, to have recreation, find pleasure [cp. BSk paricārayati Divy 1, and freq. phrase pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samarpitā samangibhūtā p. e.g. Mvu i.32; Vin ii.290; Vin iii.72 (pañcahi kamaguṇehi samappitā etc.) DN i.36 (id.), 104 (id.); MN i.504 (id.); Thag 96 (saggesu) Pv i.116 (= yathā sukkhaṃ cārenti indriyāni Pv-a 58) iv.129 (read ˚cārayanti for ˚vārayanti, cp. Pv-a 228 indriyāni p.) ■ pp. paricārita q.v. See also parivāreti.
Caus. of paricarati
1. surrounded, attended Ja v.90.
2. worshipped MN i.497; SN iv.57 (me Satthā p.), cp. Thag 178 (Satthā ca p. me) & 891 (p. mayā Satthā).
3. practised, performed Mil 360.;
pari + ciṇṇa, pp. of carati
gathered, accumulated, collected, increased, augmented MN iii.97; SN i.116; SN ii.264; SN iv.200; AN ii.67 sq., 185; iii.45, 152 iv.282, 300; v.23; Thag 647; Pts i.172 (expld); Pv-a 67 Sdhp 409.
pp. of pari + ci, cinoti, P. cināti
known, scrutinized, accustomed acquainted or familiar with, constantly practised Vin ii.95 (vācasā p.), 109 (aggi˚ etc. read aggiparijita); Thag-a 52; Mil 140 (iddhipādā p.); Dāvs iv.19 ■ aparicita unfamiliar Dhp-a i.71.
pp. of pari + ci, ciketi, P. cināti; but perhaps identical with paricita1
to kiss (all round, i.e. from all sides), to cover with kisses MN ii.120; SN i.178, SN i.193; AN iv.438; Dhp-a i.330.
pari + cumbati
(indecl.) lit. “going round,” i.e. having encircled grasped, understood; grasping, finding out, perceiving freq. in phrase cetasā ceto paricca (pajānāti) grasping fully with one’s mind, e.g. at DN i.79; MN i.445; MN iii.12; SN ii.121, SN ii.233; Iti 12; Vb 329; Vism 409 (= paricchinditvā). See pariyeti.
ger. of pari + i, cp. Sk. (Gr.) parītya & P. pariyeti
to give up, abandon, leave behind, reject SN i.44; Iti 94; Ja ii.335; Ja vi.259 (= chaḍḍeti) Mil 207; Dhp-a iv.204; Pv-a 121, Pv-a 132, Pv-a 221 (read jīvitaṃ pariccajati for parivajjati; cp. BSk. jīvitaṃ parityakṣyāmi Avs i.210); Sdhp 539 ■ pp. pariccatta (q.v.).
pari + cajati of tyaj
(nt.) & ˚nā (f.) 1. giving up, rejection, leaving Iti 11, Iti 12.
2. giving out, bestowing giving a donation Pv-a 124.
fr. pariccajati
one who gives (up) or spends, a giver, donor Pv-a 7.
fr. prec.
given up abandoned, thrown out, left behind Ja i.69, Ja i.174, Ja i.477; Mil 280; Pv-a 178, Pv-a 219 (= virādhita); Sdhp 374.
pp. of pariccajati; cp. BSk. parityakta in meaning “given to the poor” Avs i.3
1. giving up, abandonment, sacrifice, renunciation AN i.92 (āmisa˚ & dhamma material & spiritual); Pts ii.98; Ja i.12 (jīvita˚); Dhp-a iii.441 (pañca mahāpariccāgā the five great sacrifices i.e. the giving up of the most valuable treasures of wife of children, of kingdom, of life and limb).
2. expense Dhp-a ii.231 (sahassa˚; expenditure of a thousand coins)
3. giving (to the poor), liberality Dhs-a 157; Snp-a 295 (mahā˚, corresponding to mahādāna); Pv-a 7 sq. 27, 120 sq., 124.
fr. pariccajati
a cover, covering Ja i.341, Ja i.466.
fr. pari + chad
enveloped, covered, wrapped round Vin iv.17.
pari + channa, pp. of chad
very much seared, scorched (?) Sdhp 102 (˚odara-ttaca).
pari + chāta
(f.) covering, hiding, concealing Pp 19 = Pp 23 = Vb 358.
fr. pari + chad
1. to mark out Vv-a 291 (vasana-ṭṭhānaṃ).
2. to determine, to fix accurately to decide Ja i.170 (padaṃ the track), 194 (nivāsavetanaṃ); iii.371; iv.77; Mil 272; Vism 184, Vism 409; Snp-a 434 (paññāya p.).
3. to limit, restrict, define Mil 131; DN-a i.132 ■ pp. paricchinna (q.v.).
pari + chindati
(nt.) “cutting up,” definition, analysis Vv-a 114.
fr. paricchindati
(adj.) marking out, defining, analysing, Dhs-a 157 (ñāṇa).
fr. pari + chind
1. restricted, limited, small Dhp-a i.58; Pv-a 136 (˚ppamāṇa).
2. divided measured Vism 184; Pv-a 185 (= mita).
pp. of paricchindati
1. exact determination, circumscription range, definition, connotation, measure Ja iii.371; Vism 184 (as one of the nimittas of the body), 236 (referring to the 5 nimittas of the life-principle); Snp-a 160, Snp-a 229 Snp-a 231, Snp-a 376, Snp-a 408, Snp-a 503; Kp-a 182 (gaṇana˚); Vv-a 194 (id.) Dhs-a 3; Dhp-a ii.73 (avadhi˚); Pv-a 254 (kāla˚), 255 (āyuno p.); Vb-a 417 (citta˚, for citta-paricce ñãṇa Vb 330).
2. limit, boundary Mil 131, Mil 405; Ja iii.504 (˚nadī-tīra).
3. limitation, restriction Dhp-a ii.88, Dhp-a ii.98; Pv-a 20 (˚ṃ karoti to restrict).
4. division (of time), in ratti˚ & divā˚;, night-& day-division Vism 416.
5. (town)-planning, designing Vb-a 331.;
fr. pari + chid; late Sk: (philos.) in same meaning
(adj.) determining, fixing Vb-a 346 (uṭṭhāna-velā ˚ā saññā).
fr. pariccheda
“the people round,” i.e. attendants, servants, retinue, suite Vin i.15; Ja i.72, Ja i.90; Dhp-a iii.188; Vv-a 63; Pv-a 58, Pv-a 62 ■ saparijana with one’s servants Cp ii.82 (T. saparijjana metri causâ).
pari + jana
to mutter (spells), to practise divination Ja iii.530; Mil 200 (vijjaṃ).
pari + japati, cp. BSk. parijapta enchanted Divy 397
(nt.) mumbling, uttering spells Mil 356 (mantaṃ).
fr. parijapati
(f.) cognition, recognition, knowledge Ne 20 (as paraphrase of pariññā).
pari + jānanā = jānana
to know accurately or for certain, to comprehend, to recognise, find out MN i.293; SN i.11, SN i.24; SN ii.45, SN ii.99, SN iii.26, SN iii.40, SN iii.159; SN iv.50; SN v.52, SN v.422; AN iii.400 sq.; Snp 202, Snp 254, Snp 943; Nd i.426; Ja iv.174 Thag 226; Mil 69; Dhp-a iv.233 ˚jānitvā) ■ ppr. parijānaṃ SN iii.27; SN iv.89; Iti 3 sq ■ pp. pariññāta (q.v.) ger. pariññāya see under pariññā1.
pari + jānāti
worn out, gone down, decayed, reduced Ja i.111 (seṭṭhi-kulaṃ p.); v.99, 100 (bhoga˚); vi.364; Dhp 148; Dhp-a ii.272 (˚kula).
pp. of pari + jar, i.e. decayed; Kern Toev. s. v. proposes reading ˚jīna of ji, i.e. wasted, see parijīyati
overpowered, injured, damaged Vin ii.109 (so read for paricita).
pp. of pari + ji, jayati; Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading parijīta, Sk. form of P. parijīna, pp. of pari jīyati, but hardly necessary, see also Vin. Texts iii.75.
to become worn out, to decay, fade, SN i.186; Ja iv.111. Spelt ˚jiyyati at Thag 1215. pp. parijīna (see parijiṇṇa).
pari + jīyati
(f.) intense dislike of, disgust with (-˚) DN i.25, cp. DN-a i.115.
pari + jegucchā
is doubtful reading at AN iii.38 (v.l. parivajjanā) = iv.266 (T. reads parijjana, cp. parijana; vv. ll parivajjanā & parijanā); meaning?.
(-˚) knowing, recognising, understanding Iti 44 (bhūta˚ so, or should we read bhūtapariññāya?); also in cpd. pariññacārin (to be expd as shortened gr. pariññā?) Snp 537 (= paññāya paricchinditvā caranto living in full knowledge i.e. rightly determining); also (abstr.) pariññatthaṃ at Iti 29 (abhiññatthaṃ + ), cp. SN iv.253.
the adj. form of pariññā, cp. abhiñña
(f.) accurate or exact knowledge, comprehension full understanding MN i.66, MN i.84; SN iii.26 (yo rāgakkhayo dosā˚ moha˚ ayaṃ vuccati p.), 159 sq., 191; iv.16, 51 138, 206, 253 sq.; v.21, 55 sq., 145, 236, 251, 292; AN i.277 (kāmānaṃ rūpānaṃ vedanānaṃ), 299; v.64 Pp 37; Ne 19, Ne 20, Ne 31; Kp-a 87; Snp-a 251 ■ In exegetical literature three pariññās are distinguished viz. ñāta˚, tīraṇa˚ pahāna˚, which are differently interpreted & applied according to the various contexts See e.g. the detailed interpretation at Nd;1 52 sq. Nd ii.413; Ja vi.259 (where ñāṇa˚ for ñāta˚); Dhp-a ii.172 (in ref. to food); mentioned at Snp-a 517 ■ adj. pariñña -The form pariññāya is an apparent instr., but in reality (in form & meaning) the ger. of parijānāti (like abhiññāya → abhijānitvā) for the usual parijānitvā It is freq. found in poetry & in formulas (like yathābhūtaṃ p.); its meaning is “knowing well in right knowledge”: SN v.182; Snp 455, Snp 737, Snp 778 (= parijānitvā Nd i.51 sq.), 1082 (corresp. with pahāya, cp. similar phrase pahāya parijānitvā Dhp-a iv.232); Iti 62; Ja vi.259.
cp. Epic Sk. parijñāna; the form parijñā given by BR only with the one ref. Vyutp. 160; fr pari + jñā
(indecl.) having full knowledge or understanding of Snp 779 (= parijānitvā Nd;1 56 & Snp-a 518); Iti 4 (perhaps to be read pariññāya for pariññā so).
ger. of parijānāti for *parijñāya, cp. same short forms of ādā & abhiññā
well understood, thoroughly known Thig 106; MN i.1 sq.; SN ii.99; SN v.182; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 287 With ref. to food (˚bhojana & ˚āhāra) it means food understood according to the three pariññās (q.v.) Dhp 92 (˚bhojano adj. one who lives on recognised food or takes the right view of the food he eats, cp. Dhp-a ii.172); Mil 352 (˚āhāro); contrasted with bhāvita consciousness is to be well studied, insight is to be made to grow MN i.293.
pp. of parijānāti
(nt.) the fact of having full or exact knowledge SN v.182.
abstr. fr. pariññāta
(adj.) one who has correct knowledge SN iii.159 sq., 191 (puggala).
fr. pariññāta
(adj.) knowable, perceivable, to be known (accurately) MN i.4; SN iii.26; SN iv.29; Dhp-a iv.233 (cp. Nd ii.under abhiññeyya).
grd. of parijānāti
to burn: Pass. pariḍayhati to be burnt or scorched MN i.422; SN i.188 = Thag 1224; AN i.137; AN iii.95, AN iii.98; Snp 63; Pts i.128 (ḷ); Pv i.64 (= parito jhāyati Pv-a 33); Mil 303; Pv-a 60. Cp. pariḷāha.
pari + ḍadati
1. bent down, crooked Vv-a 222 (˚dāṭhā fangs, or does it mean “long”?).
2 changed SN iii.40.
3. ripened, matured, hatched, ripe Ja iii.174, Ja iii.286, Ja iii.431, Vv-a 288; Dhp-a i.47 (gabbha).
pp. of pariṇamati
1. to change (trs. & intrs.), lit. to bend round, to turn (round), to be transformed into (acc.) SN iii.3 (reading pariṇamati once, at other passages vi˚, cp. p. 40); Mil 136 (bhojanaṃ visamaṃ p food changes, i.e. turns bad), 277 (id.); Vv-a 13; Pv-a 144 (for parivattati Pv ii.105), 194 (id. iii.44).
2. to change into a diff. state, to ripen, mature (often said of the foetus) Mil 93, Mil 358 ■ pp. pariṇata (q.v.). Caus. pariṇāmeti (q.v.).
pari + namati
“bending round,” i.e. 1. change, alteration in utu˚; (sudden) change of season, unseasonable weather, with ref. to illnesses caused by such (˚ja ābādhā) = illness arising from the change of season AN ii.87; AN iii.131; AN v.110; Nd ii.3041; Mil 112, Mil 135 sq. 304; Vism 31.
2. alteration of food, digestion, in phrase sammā-pariṇāmaṃ gacchati MN i.188; SN i.168; AN iii.30; cp. Mvu i.211.
3. ripening Mil 93. 4. course, development, fulfilment, in special sense dispensation, destiny Ja v.171; Pv iv.325; Pv-a 252, Pv-a 254-Cp. vi˚.
fr. pari + nam, cp. class Sk. pariṇāma in all meanings
(nt.) diverting to somebody’s use Vin iv.157.
fr. parinamati
1. bent down Ja vi.269 (of trees, overladen with fruit, C. expls as “entangled”)
2. issued, apportioned, destined Ja v.171; Pv-a 254.
pp. of pariṇāmeti
one who destines or makes develop, fate, destiny Ja vi.189.
n. ag. of pariṇāmeti
(adj.) ending in, resulting in (-˚) MN i.11, MN i.526; MN iii.88.
fr. pariṇāma
to bend to, to change into, to turn to use for somebody, to procure for, obtain appropriate DN i.92; Vin iii.259 (puttassa rajjaṃ p. for his son); iv.156; Pv-a 281 ■ ppr. ˚ṇāmayamāna Ja v.424. See also āvajjeti ■ pp. pariṇāmita (q.v.).
Caus. of parinamati
a leader, guide, adviser; one of the 7 treasures (ratanāni) of a great king or Cakkavattin (according to Bdhgh on DN ii.177 the eldest son; in the Lal. Vist. a general cp. Divy 211 Divy 217; Senart, Lég. de Buddha p. 42), i.e. a wonderful Adviser DN i.89; DN ii.17, DN ii.177; MN i.220; MN ii.175; AN iii.151 Snp p.106 (cp. Snp-a 450 = DN-a i.250); Ja i.155; Ja iv.93; Mil 38, Mil 314 ■ f. pariṇāyikā. Ep. of wisdom, synonymous with paññā, i.e. insight, cleverness Dhs 1057 Pp 25; Vism 3; Dhs-a 148.
fr. pari + ni, cp. pariṇeti
compass, circumference, breadth, extent, girth SN ii.206 (of the moon) = AN v.19; Ja iii.192 Ja iii.277, Ja iii.370; Ja v.299; Pp 53; Mil 282, Mil 311; Snp-a 382 (āroha + ).
fr. pari + nah
to lead round or about SN ii.128.
pari + neti
scared (exceedingly), frightened Sdhp 147.
pari + tajjita
tormented, worried, vexed, grieved Mil 313.
pp. of paritappati
to be vexed, to grieve, worry, sorrow Thig 313 (= santappati Thag-a 233) Mil 313 ■ pp. paritatta (q.v.).
Pass. of pari + tap
(nt.) worry, excitement DN i.40 (v.l. ˚tassita, cp. Dial i.53). Paritassati (tasati)
pari + tasita1 or tasita2
to be excited, to be tormented, to show a longing after, to be worried DN ii.68; MN i.36, MN i.67, MN i.151; SN ii.82, SN ii.194; SN iii.43, SN iii.55; SN iv.23, SN iv.65, SN iv.168; AN ii.27; AN iii.133 sq.; Snp 621 (= taṇhāya na bhāyati Snp-a 467, thus combining tasati1 & tasati;2), 924 (Pot. parittase, interpreted by Nd i.373 as taseyya, uttaseyya, bhāyeyya thus taken as tasati2); Mil 253, Mil 400; Dhp 397 (= taṇhāya na bhāyati Dhp-a iv.159); Sdhp 476 ■ ppr aparitassaṃ DN ii.68; MN i.67; SN ii.82; SN iii.55; Iti 94. pp. paritasita (q.v.).
pari + tasati1, in form clearly = Sk. paritṛṣyati, but freq. confused with tasati2, cp. tasa Snp 924 is the only example of paritasati representing tasati2
(f.) trembling, fear; nervousness, worry; excitement, longing DN i.17 (= ubbijjanā phandanā etc. DN-a i.111); MN i.136 MN iii.227; SN iii.15 sq., 133; Mil 253, Mil 400 ■ neg. a˚ SN iii.15; MN i.136.
fr. paritassati, q.v. for meaning
(adj.) trembling, excited, worrying, only neg. a˚; AN iv.108, AN iv.111, AN iv.230 sq.
fr. paritassati
= foll. Mil 313 (ātāpa + ).
(nt.) tormenting, torture, affliction, mortification MN i.78, MN i.341–344; AN i.151, AN i.296 AN ii.205 sq. (atta˚ self-mortification, opp. para˚); Pp 55 Pp 56, Pp 61; Pv-a 18 (atta˚), 30 (id.). Often combd with ātāpana (q.v.).
pari + tāpana, of tap
to burn, scorch, molest, trouble, torture, torment MN i.341 (ātāpeti + ), 506; SN iv.337; AN iii.54, AN iii.380; Ja v.420 (mā paritāpi).
pari + tapeti
to weigh, consider, estimate, think Vism 522 ■ Vb-a 130.
pari + tuleti
(adv.) round about, around, on every side, everywhere, wholly Vin ii.194; Snp-a 393; Vv-a 316; Pv-a 33.
fr. pari, cp. Sk. paritaḥ
to please, appease, satisfy, make happy Ja i.262; Ja iii.386; Ja v.216; Pv-a 213 (v.l. SS āsiñcati).
pari + toseti
(adj.) small, little, inferior, insignificant limited, of no account, trifling Vin i.270; DN i.45; MN iii.148 (˚ābha of limited splendour, opp. appamāṇ’ ābha); SN ii.98; SN iv.160 (opp. adhimatta); AN iv.241 AN v.63; Iti 71; Snp 61, Snp 390 (˚pañña of inferior wisdom, cp Nd ii.415), 1097 (id.); Ja i.221; Dhs 181, Dhs 584, Dhs 1018, Dhs 1034 (cp. Dhs trsl.265, Dhs trsl.269); DN-a i.119; Kp-a 133 (˚dīpā the 2,000 inferior islands), 176 (500 do.); Pv-a 198; Sdhp 251, Sdhp 261. Synonyms: appaka, omaka, lāmaka, dukkha Nd ii.414; catukka Nd ii.415 (opp. mahā); appaka Pv-a 48, Pv-a 60; appama taka Pv-a 262; ittara Pv-a 60; oma Snp-a 347; oraka Snp-a 489; lāmaka Snp-a 347.
BSk. parītta, pari + pp. of dā in short form *tta, like ātta for ādatta. The development of meaning however causes difficulties, paridatta meaning given up, transmitted, cp. Divy 388, whereas P. paritta means trifling. The BSk. form parītta (e.g. Divy 204 Divy 498, Divy 504; Avs i.329; Avs ii.137) may be a re-translation of P. paritta, which may correspond to Sk, prarikta, pp of pra + ric, meaning “that which is exceeded,” i.e. left (over or behind)
(nt.) & Parittā (f.) protection, safeguard; (protective charm, palliative, amulet Vin ii.110 (atta˚ f. personal protection) iv.305 (gutt’ atthāya ˚ṃ pariyāpuṇāti); AN ii.73 (rakkhā + parittā); Ja i.200 (manto + parittaṃ vaḍḍhiṃ), 396 (paccekabuddhehi ˚ṃ kārāpeti makes them find a safeguard through the P.); iv.31 (osadhaṃ vā ˚ṃ vā); Mil 150 (f. & nt.) ■ Var. parittās in the way of Suttantas are mentioned at Vism 414 (Khandha˚ Dhajagga˚: SN i.218 sq.; Āṭānāṭiya˚: DN iii.195 sq. Mora˚: Ja ii.33). Cf. Dialogues iii.185.
-vālikā sand worn on the head as an amulet Ja i.396 Ja i.399. -suttaka a thread worn round the head as a charm Ja i.396, Ja i.399.
fr. pari + trā, cp. tāṇa, tāyati & also parittāna
small, insignificant, little Nd i.306 (for appaka etc. as at Nd ii.414); Pv i.1011; ii.967 Mil 121 (a˚), 253; DN-a i.170 (for appa); Pv-a 51 Sdhp 42 ■ f. parittikā Thag 377.
paritta1 + ka
(nt.) protection, shelter, refuge, safeguard, safety DN i.9 (sara from an arrow, i.e. a shield); iii.189; Ja vi.455; Pv-a 284; Sdhp 396.
-kitikā a protecting arrangement Vin ii.152, cp. Vin Texts iii.174.
pari + tāṇa. Cp. Epic Sk. paritrāṇa
(adj.) safeguarding against, sheltering against, keeping away from Vism 376 (angāra-vassaṃ p. thero).
fr. pari + tāyati
(adj.) being in dread of (-˚) SN i.201.
pari + tāsin, fr. tāsa of tasati2
(adj.) “with a stick around,” i.e. surrounded by a stick; only in one phrase viz. “saparidaṇḍā iṭṭhi” a woman protected by a stick, or liable to punishment (?), in stock phrase enumerating 10 kinds of women MN i.286 = MN iii.46 = Vin iii.139 = AN v.264; Vv-a 73.
pari + daṇḍa
(nt.) controlling, taming Vism 375.
pari + damana
to control, tame, keep under Vism 376.
pari + dameti
to put round, put on, clothe Dhp 9 (fut. ˚dahessati); Ja ii.197; Ja v.434 (ger ˚dahitvā); vi.500; Pv ii.118; Pv-a 76 (vatthāni), 77 127 (˚dahissati for paridhassati Pv ii.936, which read for T. parivassati). ger also paridayha Ja v.400 (= nivāsetvā cp pārupitvā ca C.) ■ pp. paridahita (q.v.). Caus. II. paridahāpeti to cause to be clothed Pv-a 49 (= acchādeti).
pari + dahati, of dhā
put round, put on (of clothing) Pv-a 43.
pp. of paridahati
(adj.) illuminating, explaining, explanatory Snp-a 40
fr. paridīpeti, cp, dīpaka1
(nt.) illuminating, elucidating, explanation Mil 318; Kp-a 111; Snp-a 394 sq.
pari + dīpana
(f.) explanation, illustration Mil 131.
fr. paridīpeti, cp. paridīpana
1. in flames, set ablaze Thig 200 (= punappunaṃ ādīpitatāya p. Thag-a 170),
2. explained made clear, illuminated Vism 58; KvuA 8 Sdhp 305.
pp. of paridīpeti
to make bright, to illustrate, to explain Mil 131; Sdhp 491 ■ pp. paridīpita (q.v.).
pari + dīpeti
to spoil altogether, to ruin, corrupt, defile Sdhp 409.
pari + dūseti
lamentation, wailing MN i.200; SN ii.1; SN iii.3 sq. AN i.144; AN ii.195; Snp 328, Snp 592, Snp 811, Snp 923, Snp 969; Ja i.146; Ja vi.188, Ja vi.498; Nd i.128, Nd i.134, Nd i.370, Nd i.492; Pts i.11 sq., 38 59, 65; Vb 100, Vb 137; Ne 29. It is exegetically paraphrased at DN ii.306 = Nd ii.416 (under pariddava) with synonyms ādeva p. ādevanā paridevanā ādevitattaṃ paridevitattaṃ; often combd with soka grief, e.g. at DN i.36; Snp 862; Iti 89; Pv-a 39, Pv-a 61 ■ Bdhgh at DN-a i.121 explns it as “sokaṃ nissita-lālappana-lakkhaṇo p.”
pari + deva of div, devati; only in one passage of Epic Sk. (Mbhār. vii.3014); otherwise paridevana nt.
to wail, lament DN ii.158 (mā socittha mā paridevittha); Snp 582, Snp 774 = Nd i.38 (as ˚devayati), 166; Ja vi.188, Ja vi.498; Pv-a 18 (socati + ); ger ˚devamāna SN i.199, SN i.208; Ja v.106; Pv-a 38, & ˚devayamāna Snp 583 ■ grd. ˚devaniya Nd;1 492; Snp-a 573, ˚devaneyya Snp 970 (= ādevaneyya Nd;1 493) ■ pp paridevita (q.v.).
pari + devati, div
(f.) = parideva, Snp 585; Nd ii.416 (see under parideva) Pv i.43 (= vācā-vippalāpa Pv-a 18); i.123 Pv-a 41.
(nt.) lamentation, wailing Snp 590; Pv i.123 (= ruditaṃ Pv-a 63); Mil 148 (kanditap.˚-lālappita-mukha).
pp. of paridevati
(nt.) lamentation etc.; only exegetical construction in expln of parideva at DN ii.306 = Nd ii.416.
abstr. fr. paridevita
= parideva MN i.56 (soka˚); AN i.221; Thig 345 (soka˚); Snp 1052, cp. Nd ii.416 (see parideva).
according to Trenckner MN i.532 (on MN i.56, where SS read p., whereas BB have parideva) the metrical substitute for parideva; therefore not = Sk paridrava, which is only a late re-translation of the P word
(adj.) destructive, ruinous Pv-a 15 (˚vacano speaking destructively, scandalmonger).
fr. paridhaṃsati
to be deprived, to lose, to come to ruin Iti 90; Mil 249, Mil 265 ■ Caus. paridhaṃseti in same meaning at Nd i.5. It is almost synonymous with paripatati & parihāyati.;
pari + dhaṃsati
to run about Ja i.127 (ādhāvati + ), 134 (id.), 158 (id.); ii.68 (id.) = Thag-a 54; v.106.
pari + dhāvati
washed, rinsed, cleansed, purified DN i.124.
pp. of paridhovati
to wash (all round), cleanse, clean Vin i.302 ■ pp. paridhota.
pari + dhovati
(nt.) 1. end Pv-a 287. - 2. accomplishment Ja v.400.
pari + niṭṭhāna
to bring to an end, attain, accomplish Dhs-a 363.
pari + niṭṭhāpeti
(adj.) accomplished MN iii.53; Thig 283; Dhp-a ii.78.
pari + niṭṭhita
(adj.) deeply hollowed, sunken Sdhp 103.
pari + ninna
(adj.) predetermined Kv 459 (v.l. ˚nibbāna), 626 (a˚); cp. Kvu trsl. 2616 3681.
pari + nipphanna
(nt.) “complete Nibbāna” in two meanings: 1. complete extinction of khandhalife; i.e. all possibility of such life & its rebirth, final release from (the misery of) rebirth and transmigration death (after the last life-span of an Arahant). This is the so-called “an-upādi-sesa Parinibbāna,” or “extinction with no rebirth-substratum left.”
2. release from cravings & attachment to life, emancipation (in this life) with the assurance of final death; freedom of spirit, calm, perfect well-being or peace of soul. This is the so-called “sa-upādisesa-P.,” or “extinction (of passion) with some substratum left.”-The two kinds are distinguished by Bdhgh at Dhp-a ii.163 as follows “arahatta-pattito paṭṭhāya kilesa-vaṭṭassa khepitattā sa-upādi-sesena, carima-citta-nirodhena khandhavaṭṭassa khepitattā an-upādi-sesena cā ti dvīhi pi parinibbānehi parinibbutā, an-upādāno viya padīpo apaṇṇattika-bhāvaṃ gatā.”
1. DN ii.72 sq. (the famous Mahā-parinibbāna-suttanta or “Book of the Great Decease”); MN iii.127, MN iii.128; AN ii.79 (˚samaye) iii.409 (˚dhamma, contrasted with āpāyika nerayika cp. Dhp-a iv.42); Mvu 7, Mvu 1 (˚mañcamhi nipanna); Vv-a 158; Pv-a 244.
2. DN iii.55; AN v.64; Snp 514 (˚gata vitiṇṇa-kankho); Vv 5324 (˚gata + sītibhūta). This state of final emancipation (during life) has also received the determination of anupādā-parinibbāna, i.e. emancipation without ground. for further clinging (lit without fuel), which corresponds to Bdhgh’s term “kilesavaṭṭassa khepitattā sa-upādi-sesa p.” (see above) thus at MN i.148; SN iv.48; SN v.29; AN i.44; AN v.65 (nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto etc).; AN v.233 = AN v.253 = Dhp 89 (+ khīṇāsava).
pari + nibbāna
(adj.) one who is destined to or that which leads to complete extinction DN iii.264 DN iii.265 (opasamika + ).
fr. parinibbāna
(nt.) refreshing, cooling, quenching; controlling, subduing, training Pts i.174 (atta-damatha, atta-samatha, atta-p.).
pari + nibbāpana
one who pacifies, a calmer, trainer MN ii.102 (dametar sametar p.).
n. ag. fr. parinibbāpeti
to bring to complete coolness, or training (see next), emancipation or cessation of the life-impulse, to make calm, lead to Nibbāna to exercise self-control, to extinguish fever of craving or fire of rāga, dosa, moha. Always coupled with the quâsi synonyms sameti & dameti (cp. damatha samatha parinibbāpana) DN iii.61 = AN iii.46 (attānaṃ dameti, sameti p.); MN i.45 (fut. ˚bbapessati); AN ii.68 (attānaṃ d. s. p.) ■ pp. parinibbuta (see p. No. 3) & parinibbāpita (only in n. ag. ˚āpetar, q.v.).
pari + nibbāpeti
(& ˚nibbāti) 1. to be completed, perfected in any work or art, e.g. of a trained horse MN i.446. Cp. τελειόω.
2. to die without being reborn to reach complete extinction of existence Vin ii.194 (Tathāgathā ˚āyanti); MN iii.128 (aor ˚nibbāyi); SN v.152 (˚nibbāyeyyaṃ), 261 (˚nibbāyissāmi); AN ii.120 (anupādisesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā p.); iv.202 (id.), 313 (id.), Mil 175 (id.); Ja i.28 (id.), 55 (id.); Vv-a 158 (fut ˚nibbāyissāmi); Pv-a 21, Pv-a 283 (of a Paccekabuddha). 2. to become emancipated from all desire of life DN ii.68 (cp. Dial. ii.65 & Brethren 417); SN iv.102 (diṭṭh eva dhamme), ibid. (sa-upādāno devānaṃ indo na parinibbāyati), 168; AN iii.41 = Vin ii.148, Vin ii.164 (parinibbāti anāsavo); AN iv.98 (aor. ˚nibbiṃsu anāsavā Thag 100 (fut. ˚nibbissati anāsavo), 364; Iti 93 (˚nibbanti), cp. 95; Dhp 126 (˚nibbanti anāsavā perhaps better taken to No. 1!); Vb 426 (sabbāsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā); Sdhp 584 (˚nibbanti mahoghen’ eva aggino) ■ pp. parinibbuto (q.v.). Caus. parinibbāpeti (q.v.).
pari + nibb˚ cp. BSk. parinirvāti Divy 150 (Buddhā Bhagavantaḥ parinirvānti & ger. parinirvātavya ibid. 402
(nt.) passing away, see parinibbāyin 2 b.
abstr. fr. parinibbāyin
one who attains Parinibbāna. Of the 2 meanings registered under parinibbāna we find No. 1 only in a very restricted use when taken in both senses of sa-and an-upādisesa parinibbāna; e.g. at AN ii.155 sq., where the distinction is made between a sa-sankhāra p. and an a-sankhāra p., as these two terms also occur in the fivefold classification of “Never-returners” (i.e. those who are not reborn) viz. antarā-parinibbāyin, upahacca˚, sasankhāra˚ uddhaṃsota, akaniṭṭhagāmin. Thus at DN iii.237; SN v.201, SN v.237; AN i.233; AN iv.14, AN iv.71 sq., 146, 380 v.120; Pp 16, Pp 17.
2. In the sense of Parinibbāna No. 2 (i.e. sa-upādisesa p.) we find parinibbāyin almost as an equivalent of arahant in two combns, viz. (a tattha˚; (always combd with opapātika, i.e. above the ordinary cause of birth) [cp. BSk. tatra-parinirvāyin anāgāmin Divy 533]. It is also invariably combd with anāvattidhamma, e.g. at DN i.156; DN iii.108, DN iii.132; MN ii.56, MN ii.146; AN i.232; AN i.245, AN i.290; AN ii.5, AN ii.89, AN ii.238; AN iv.12, AN iv.399 AN iv.423; AN v.343; SN v.346 (cp. 406), 357; Pp 16, Pp 62, Pp 83. See also Kvu trsl. 742 ■ (b) antara˚; [cp. BSk. antarāparinirvāyin Mvu i.33] one who passes away in the middle of his term of life in a particular heaven; an Anāgāmin (cp. Bdhgh’s expln at PugA 198 as “āyuvemajjhassa antarā yeva parinibbāyanato a. p.” SN v.69 = AN iv.70; SN v.201 = SN v.204, SN v.237, SN v.285, SN v.314, SN v.378; AN ii.134; Pts i.161; Pp 16; Ne 190 (cp. AN iv.380).
fr. parinibbāyati
(adj.) completely calmed, at peace, at rest (as to the distinction of the twofold application see parinibbāna and cp., Mrs. Rh.D. Buddhism p. 191; Cpd. p. 168), viz.
1. gone out, or passed away without any remaining cause of rebirth anywhere completely extinct, finally released (fr. rebirth & trans migration), quite dead or at rest [cp. BSk. parinirvṛta Divy 79]. It is usually applied to the Buddha, or the Tathāgata, but also to Theras & Arahants who have by means of moral & intellectual perfection destroyed all germs of further existence. With ref. to Gotama Buddha: Vin ii.284 (atikkhippaṃ Bhagavā p.), 294 (vassasata˚ e Bhagavati); v.119, 120; DN i.204 (acira-˚e Bhagavati); SN i.158 (Tathāgato p. ii.191); v.172 (˚e Tathāgate); Vv iii.97 (˚e Gotame = anupādisesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā parinibbuto Vv-a 169); Pv-a 140 (Satthari p.), 212 (Bhagavati). Of others: SN i.121, SN i.122 (Godhika); iii.124 (Vakkali); iv.63 (Puṇṇa); Snp p.59 Snp p.60 (a Thera); Mil 390 (Arahant); Vv-a 158; Pv-a 76; Dhp-a ii.163; Dhp-a iv.42.
2. emancipated, quite free (from earthly bonds), calm, serene, at peace, perfected Vin ii.156 = AN i.138 “spiritually free” Vin. Texts iii.182) DN ii.123 (cp. Dial. ii.132); iii.55; MN i.235; MN ii.102; SN i.1 (+ tiṇṇo loke visattikaṃ), 7 = iv.179 (aheṭhayāno + ); i.54 (+ tiṇṇo loke visattikaṃ); 187 (p. kankhati kālaṃ); Snp 359 (+ ṭhitatta), 370 (id.), 467 (p udaka-rahado va sīto); Thag 5 (cp. Brethren 113); Ja iv.303, Ja iv.453; Ud 85 (rāga-dosa-moha-kkhayā p.); Mil 50 (˚atta), Freq. in combn with kindred terms like sītibhūta (cooled), e.g. Vin ii.156 = AN i.138; Vv 5324 or nicchāta (without hunger), e.g. SN iii.26; SN iv.204; Iti 46; Snp 735 sq.; Iti 48 (esanānaṃ khayā), 49 (āsavānaṃ khayā).
3. (to be understood as pp. of parinibbāpeti) calmed, well trained, domesticated MN i.446 (of a horse).
pari + nibbuta
at Dhs 1280 read para˚.
(adj.) 1. (quite) ripe, ripened, matured, developed DN i.54; SN iv.105 = DN-a i.50; AN iv.357; Dhp 260; Ja i.91, Ja i.231; Ja vi.1 (ap˚); Ud 36 (id.) Mil 194, Mil 288; Dhp-a iii.338; Kp-a 56; Thag-a 273; Pv-a 274 (su˚).
2. overripe, rotten Mil 223.
pari + pakka
scattered Thig 391 (reading doubtful).
pp. of pari + pakkirati
to become ripe, to heal (of a wound) Mil 112.
pari + paccati
(nt.) ripening, healing (of a wound) Mil 112.
pari + paccana
to question AN v.16.
denom. fr. pari + pañha
to go to ruin, to come to fall, to come to naught Mil 91 (opp. sambhavati) combd with paridhaṃsati at Nd i.5; Mil 249, Mil 265.
doublet of paripatati
to fall down, to fall off from (abl.) Vin ii.152 sq.; Ja v.417, Ja v.420; Pv iv.53 (bhūmiyaṃ) DN-a i.132; Pv-a 37, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 62 ■ Caus paripāteti (q.v.) ■ See also paripaṭati.
pari + patati, cp. nipatati
1. “way round,” edge, border; paripanthe in ambush (near a road) MN i.87; Ja iii.65. 2. obstacle, hindrance, danger. It refers esp. to danger arising out of mishaps to or bad conditions of roads in the forests. DN i.52; SN i.43; AN i.153; AN iii.252; AN v.136; Pts i.162; Ja i.395; Ja iii.268; Ja iv.17; Ja vi.57 (n. pl. ˚ayo = kilesaparipanthā C.), 75; Dhp-a i.14 (magga˚), 16 (id.), 51, 69 migānaṃ p. danger to the crops from (the nuisance of deer Ja i.143, Ja i.154 ■ saparipantha full of danger Dhp-a i.63. See also palipatha.
pari + pantha
(adj.) forming or causing an obstacle AN i.161. The usual form is pāri˚; (q.v.).
fr. paripantha
see palipanna.
1. ripeness, maturity, development, perfection DN i.9 (cp. DN-a i.94); Ud 36 (pañca dhammā paripākāya saṃvattanti); Ja i.142, Ja i.148 Ja vi.236; Mil 288; Vism 116 (bodhi˚), 199; Dhp-a i.89 (˚gatatta nt. state of perfection); Thag-a 79; Pv-a 276–2. overripeness, decay, collapse, only in phrase “indriyānaṃ p.,” i.e. decay of the (mental) faculties in formula defining jarā (old age) at DN ii.305; MN i.49; SN ii.2, SN ii.42 sq.; AN v.203; Nd ii.252; Dhs 644; cp. BSk indriyaparipāka Avs ii.110.
fr. pari + pac
(nt.) ripening, maturing, digestion Vims 351, 363, 365.
pari + pācana1
(adj.) bringing to maturity, leading to perfection, accomplishing, only in phrase vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā (5) things achieving emancipation (see Ud 36) SN iv.105 = DN-a i.50; Thag-a 273.
fr. paripācana
to bring to maturity, to cause to ripen, to develop, prepare Ja vi.373 (atthaṃ p. ˚ācayitvā = vaḍḍhetvā C.); Mil 232 Mil 285, Mil 288, Mil 296 ■ pp. paripācita Vism 365.
pari + pāceti, Caus. of pacati
attacked, pursued, brought into difficulty Vv-a 336.
pp. of paripāteti
(or ˚pāṭeti ) to cause to fall down, to bring to ruin, to attack, pursue Vin iv.115; Ja ii.208 Ja iii.380; Mil 279, Mil 367; Kp-a 73 (see App. II. p. 353 n. 9) ■ pp. paripātita (q.v.).
Caus. of paripatati. Cp. BSk. paripāṭayati to destroy Divy 417
guarded Vism 74.
pp. of paripāleti
to watch, guard (carefully) Pv-a 130 (= rakkhati) ■ pp. paripālita (q.v.) ■ Pass ˚pāliyati Ne 105 (= rakkhitaṃ).
pari + pāleti
(adj.) very dear, highly valued Sdhp 571.
pari + pīta
(adj.) oppressed, vexed, injured Mil 97 (aggi-santāpa-pariḷāha˚), 303 jighacchāya).
pari + pīlita, pp. of pīḍ
(adj.) asking a question, enquiring Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386; Sdhp 90 ■ f. abstr paripucchakatā questioning Vism 132 (one of the 7 constituents of dhamma-vicaya-sambojjhanga).
fr. pari + prc̣h
to ask a question, to interrogate, inquire Vin i.47 = Vin i.224; Vin ii.125; SN i.98; AN v.16; Snp 380, Snp 696 (˚iyāna ger.), 1025; Pp 41; Mil 257, Mil 408; Snp-a 111.
pari + pucchati
(f.) question, interrogation Vin i.190 (uddesa + ); ii.219 (id.); AN i.285; Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386 (cp. Snp-a iii). See also uddesa.
pari + pucchā
to wipe off, stroke down Vin iii.14 (pāṇinā gattāni p.).
pari + puñchati
(adj.) 1. (quite) full, fulfilled, complete, finished, satisfied MN i.200 (˚sankappa), iii.276; SN ii.283; SN iv.104; SN v.315; Pts i.172 (= pariggah’ aṭṭhena parivār’ aṭṭhena, paripūr’ aṭṭhena p., i.e. acquiring keeping, fulfilling); Snp 889 (˚mānin = samatta-mānin Nd i.298), 904; Iti 40 (˚sekha); Pv iv.163; Vism 45 (˚sankappa): Pv-a 13, Pv-a 54 (˚vassa whose years are completed i.e. old enough for ordination), 68 (˚gabbha ready to be delivered), 77 (vārinā).
2, complete, i.e. not defective, perfect, sound, healthy Snp 548 (˚kāya lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya ahīn’ anga-paccangatāya ca paripuṇṇa-sarīro Snp-a 452); Mil 249.
pp. of paripūrati
(f.) fullness, completeness Snp-a 452.
abstr. fr. paripuṇṇa
(adj.) full, complete, perfected, accomplished DN i.75; DN i.133; DN iii.94; SN ii.32; SN iv.247; SN v.269 (f. ˚ī); AN ii.77; AN v.10 sq.; Snp 205, Snp 1017; Pts i.15, Pts i.18, Pts i.49 Pts i.172; Pts ii.122; Pp 35, Pp 36. -aparipūra not completed imperfect, incomplete AN ii.77; AN iv.314 sq.; AN v.10 sq Iti 107; Pp 35, Pp 36.
-kāritā completion MN i.64, MN i.66 sq. -kārin completing fulfilling, making complete, doing to the full MN i.33 sq. 64; SN v.201; AN ii.136; AN iii.215; AN iv.380; AN v.131 sq.; Pp 37; Mil 243.
pari + pṛ;
(adj.((-˚) one who fills, filling Vism 300 (niraya˚).
(nt.) fulfilment, completion Vism 3 (sīla˚). See pāripūraṇa.
fr. paripūreti
to become full or perfect Dhp 38; Ja iv.273 (devaloko p.); Mil 395 (sāmaññaṃ); fut paripūrissati Dhp-a i.309 ■ Pass. paripūriyati to be fulfilled or perfected Dhp-a i.309 ■ pp. paripuṇṇa (q.v.) ■ Caus. paripūreti (q.v.).
pari + pūrati
(nt.) fullness, completeness, completion SN v.200 sq. (+ samatta).
abstr. fr. paripūra
filled (to overflowing), full Pv-a 216.
pp. of paripūreti
(f.) fulfilment, completion SN i.139.
fr. paripūra, but better spelt pāripūrī, q.v.
to fulfil; to fill (up), make more full, supplement, fill out, add to DN i.74 (parisandeti p. parippharati; DN-a i.217 explns as “vāyunā bhastaṃ viya pūreti”); ii.221; MN iii.92; SN i.27 (devakāyaṃ) = 30; ii.29, 32; iii.93 (sāmaññatthaṃ) = AN ii.95; Iti 90; Pv ii.945 (ppr. ˚ayanto); Pp 31, Pp 35; Mil 349 (lekhaṃ); Pv-a 29 (sāgaraṃ), 30 (ñātidhammo ˚pūretabbo), 136 (vassasahassāni); Sdhp 371 ■ ppr. med ˚pūramāna DN i.103 ■ pp. paripūrita (q.v.).
Caus. of paripūrati
beaten, whipped Mil 188 (laguḷehi).
pp. of paripotheti
to pervade DN i.74 (= samantato phusati DN-a i.217); MN iii.92 sq. See also paripūreti pp. paripphuta & ˚pphuṭṭha; (q.v.).
pari + sphur
filled, pervaded DN i.75; MN iii.94 (spelt here paripphuta). Cp. BSk. parisphuṭa Mvu ii.349; Mvu iii.274; Lal 33, Lal 385.
pp. of parippharati
(adv.) sprinkled all round DN i.74; MN i.276; MN ii.15; MN iii.92; expld as “siñcitvā” at DN-a i.218.
either with Kern. Toev, s. v. ger. of paripphoseti (i.e. paripphosa) + kaṃ or preferably with Trenckner, Notes 80 absolutive in ˚aka (i.e. nt. formation fr. adj. paripphosa, as phenuddeha + kaṃ etc.). Cp also Geiger P.Gr. § 62. 1
sprinkled all round Ja vi.51, Ja vi.481 (candana sāra˚).
pp. of paripphoseti
to sprinkle over, Vin ii.209 (udakena ˚pphositvā; so read for ˚ppositvā) AN i.257; Ja vi.566; Pv iii.102 (˚itvā = āsiñcitvā Pv-a 231) ■ pp. paripphosita (q.v.).
pari + Caus. of pruṣ
unsteady, wavering, swerving about Dhp 38 (= upplavana Dhp-a i.309).
fr. pari + plu
to quiver, roam about, swerve Ja iii.484 (ppr. pariplavanto = upplavamāna C ■ pp paripluta (q.v.).
pari + plu
immersed, drenched Ja vi.78 (= nimugga C.); Dāvs iii.34.
pp. of pariplavati
to tremble, quiver, throb, waver Snp 776 (cp. Nd i.46 sq.), 1145; Dhp 34 (= saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkoti Dhp-a i.289); Ja iv.93; Mil 91, Mil 249. pp. pariphandita (q.v.).
pari + spand
wavered, trembled, quivered Ja iii.24.
pp. of pariphandati
at Thag-a 242 is C. reading for paripantha at Thig 352; also at Vism 147, Vism 152.
to oppress, attack Pv-a 193 (= hiṃsati).
pari + bādh
to keep out, keep away from, hinder Ja i.204 (ger ˚bāhiya); Pv-a 214 (˚bāhire).
pari + bāhati or preferably bāheti: see bahati3
(adj.) external, alien to; an outsider Vin ii.140; Vin iv.283; SN i.126; Ja i.482; Ja iii.213 Nd i.144; (parimussati p. hoti, in expln of mussati Vism 54; Pv-a 131; Thag-a 204; DN-a i.30.
pari + bāhira
to wander about (as a religious mendicant) Snp 74, Snp 639; Iti 109; Dhp 346, Dhp 415; Ja iv.452.
pari + vraj
1. earned money, earnings, wages Ja i.156 (˚ṃ datvā), 296 (id.), 433 iv.170; Dhp-a iv.196.
2, expense, expenditure Ja ii.213 (nivāsa˚ expense for a lodging), 249, 368; iii.287 (˚ṃ karoti to invest); vi.383; Vv-a 75; Pv-a 3 (sahassaṃ sahassaṃ ˚ṃ karoti), 97 (nicca˚); Dāvs v.66.
pari + vaya, i.e. *vyaya
(adj.) abiding, staying by Snp 796 (= vasamāna Snp-a 529; sakāya diṭṭhiyā vasanti Nd i.102), 878, 880, 895.
ppr. med. of pari + vas
= paribbājaka SN i.49; Snp 134; Dhp 313; Dhp-a iii.485. ˚vata the vow of a p. Thag-a 73.
a wandering man, a Wanderer, wandering religious mendicant, not necessarily Buddhist (cp. Muir, J.R.A.S. 1866, 321; Lassen, Ind. Alt ii.114, 277, 468; Vin. Texts i.41) Vin i.342; Vin iv.285 (bhikkhuñ ca sāmaṇerañ ca ṭhapetvā yo koci paribbājaka-samāpanno); DN i.157; DN iii.1 sq., 35 sq., 53 sq. 130 sq.; MN i.64, MN i.84; SN i.78; SN ii.22, SN ii.119, SN ii.139; SN iii.257 sq. SN iv.230, SN iv.251, SN iv.391 sq.; AN i.115, AN i.157, AN i.185, AN i.215; AN ii.29 sq. 176; iv.35 sq., 338, 378; v.48 sq.; Snp 537, Snp 553; Ja i.85; Ud 14, Ud 65; DN-a i.35; Pv-a 31 ■ f. paribbājikā Vin iv.285; MN i.305; SN iii.238 sq.; Ud 13, Ud 43 sq.
fr. pari + vraj
(nt.) wandering about or practising the customs of a mendicant Snp-a 434.
fr. paribbajati
one who indulges in the practice of a Wanderer, fig. one who leads a virtuous ascetic life Snp 537 (T. ˚vajjayitā). Perhaps we should read ˚bājayitvā for ˚bājayitā, cp. Snp-a 434 nikkhamet[v]ā niddhamet[v]ā.
n. ag. of paribbajati
(adj.) encompassed, provided with, surrounded AN iii.34; Snp 301 (= parikiṇṇa Snp-a 320); Ja iv.120; Ja v.68, Ja v.322, Ja v.417; Ja vi.452.
pp. of paribrūhati
1. to walk or roam about Pv-a 6, Pv-a 47 (ito c’ ito), 63 (saṃsāre), 100, 166 (saṃsare). 2. to reel about Ja iii.288; Ja iv.407 ■ Caus. ˚bbhameti to make reel round Ja vi.155.
pari + bhamati
(f.) great distinction, clearness; wide experience, learnedness Mil 349.
pari + vyatta + tā
(nt.) growth, increase, promotion Thag p.2;n Cp. paribrūhana.
to bṛh, see paribrūhati & cp. late Sk. paribarhaṇā
to augment, increase, do with zest Vv-a 115 ■ Caus. ˚brūheti [cp. Sk. paribṛnhayati] to make strong, increase Ja v.361 (aparibrūhayi aor. med. with a˚ neg., i.e. was weakened, lost his strength; but expld by C. as “atibrūhesi mahāsaddaṃ nicchāresi,” thus taking it to brū to speak which is evidently a confusion) ■ pp. paribbūḷha paribrūhita; (q.v.).
pari + brūhati of bṛh2
(nt.) augmentation, increase Ne 79.
fr. paribrūhati, cp. upabrūhana
increased, furthered, strengthened Thag-a 245.
pp. of paribrūheti
fallen, dropped Ja i.482; Thag p.12n.
pp. of paribhassati of bhraś
abused, censured, scolded Ja vi.187.
pp. of paribhāsati
1. a binding along the back Vin i.254, Vin i.297; Vin ii.116; Ja v.254 (v.l. ˚daṇḍa).
2. a girdle, belt Ja vi.125; Dhp-a ii.174. 3. a plastered flooring Vin ii.113, Vin ii.172, Vin ii.220; Ja iii.384 Ja iv.92; Ja v.437, Ja v.440.
4. slough of a serpent (?) Ja vi.339
5. (˚-) adj. encircling, comprehensive, in ˚ñāṇa Vism 429.
for paribandha, dialectical, see Kern, Toev. i.36, who compares Tamil panda “a surrounding wall = P. bandha. The meaning is rather uncertain, cp notes in Vin. Texts ii.154; iii.85, 213
nurtured, nourished MN ii.56 (sukha˚). Also in expln of pāribhaṭyatā (q.v.).
pp. of pari + bhṛ;
contempt, disrespect Vin iv.241; AN iii.191; Ja v.436; Ja vi.164; Vb 353 sq.; Pv-a 257.
pari + bhū
(nt.) = paribhava DN-a i.255.
, also paribhoti to treat with contempt, to neglect, despise SN i.69; AN iii.174 sq (˚bhoti); Ja iii.16; Ja v.442; Mil 23, Mil 259; Pv-a 266. grd. paribhotabba SN i.69; Snp p.93. (= paribhavitabba Snp-a 424) ■ Caus. paribhāveti; pp. paribhūta (q.v.).
pari + bhū
(f.) permeation, penetration Dhs-a 163 (= vāsanā ).
fr. paribhāveti
1. penetrated, supplied, filled with, trained, set DN ii.81 (saddhā-p. cittaṃ, sīla etc.; trsl. “set round with,” cp. Dial. ii.86), cp. SN v.369; Snp 23 (cittaṃ p.; Snp-a 37 saṃvāsiya); Mil 361; Pv-a 139 (˚aya bhāvanāya codito).
2. compounded of, mixed with Ja i.380, cp. iv.407; Pv-a 191.
3. fostered treated, practised Mil 394 (bhesajjena kāyaṃ) Pv-a 257.
4. sat on (said of eggs), being hatched MN i.104; SN iii.153; AN iv.125 sq., 176.
pp. of paribhāveti
to cause to be pervaded or penetrated, to treat, supply Vin i.279 (uppalahatthāni bhesajjehi p.); Ja iv.407 ■ pp. paribhāvita (q.v.).
Caus. of paribhavati
censure, abuse, blame Ja v.373; Pv-a 175.
fr. pari + bhāṣ
(adj.) reviling, abusing, abusive SN i.34; AN iv.79; Pv i.116 (= akkosaka Pv-a 58); iv.84; Vv-a 69. See also akkosaka.
fr. paribhāsa, cp. BSk. paribhāṣaka Divy 38
to abuse, scold, revile, censure, deiame SN i.221; SN iv.61; Vin iv.265; Snp 134, Snp 663; Ja i.112, Ja i.384 (for ˚hāsiṃsu) 469 iii.421; iv.285 (read paribhāsentī for aribhāsentī) v.294; vi.523; Pv ii.108; Pp 37; Mil 186; Pv-a 43-aor. ˚bhāsissaṃ Pv iv.85, pl. ˚bhāsimhase Pv iii.111 grd. ˚bhāsaniya Mil 186 ■ Very frequently combd with akkosati (+ p.), e.g. at Vin ii.14, Vin ii.296; Ud 44; Pv i.93; Pv-a 10 ■ pp. paribhaṭṭha2 (q.v.) ■ Caus II. ˚bhāsāpeti id. Pv i.67.
pari + bhāṣ, cp. BSk. paribhāṣate Divy 38
1. to break up, split, create dissension, to set at variance Ja i.439; Ja iv.196; Ja v.229 Ja vi.368; Pv-a 13.
2. to break (see ˚bhinna) ■ pp paribhinna.
pari + bhid
1. broken, broken up MN i.190 (a˚); Vv-a 184 (˚vaṇṇa of broken up appearance i.e. crumbly.).
2. set at variance, disconcerted split Vin iii.161; Ja ii.193; Dhs-a 308; Pv-a 13 ■ Cp. vi˚
pp. of paribhindati
1. to enjoy, to use, to enjoy the use of Vin ii.109; MN i.153 (nivāpaṃ p.), 207, SN ii.29; Snp 240, Snp 241, Snp 423; Pv i.12; i.94; iv.52 (= khādituṃ Pv-a 259); Nd ii.427 (pariyesati paṭilabhati paribhuñjati) Mil 366, Mil 395 (ālopaṃ ˚bhuñjisaṃ); Pv 3, Pv 5 (modake eat up), 8, 13, 23, 47; Sdhp 394 ■ grd. ˚bhuñjiya Ja i.243 (dup˚); & ˚bhuñjitabba Pv-a 71 (with nt. abstr ˚tabbatta) ■ Pass. ˚bhuñjiyati, ppr. ˚iyamāna SN i.90–2. [see bhuñjatī2] to purify, clean, cleanse MN i.25; Ja vi.75 ■ pp. paribhutta (q.v.).
pari + bhuj
(nt.) eating Pv-a 35.
fr. paribhuñjati
used, employed, made use of Vin ii.109 (su˚) Ja iii.257 (a˚); DN-a i.261 (sayaṃ ˚bhesajja); Snp-a 19.
pp. of paribhuñjati, cp. BSk. paribhukta Divy 277
treated with contempt, disregarded, despised Vin iv.6; SN ii.279; Mil 229, Mil 288.
pp. of paribhavati
1. breaking, breaking up, falling to pieces Dhs 738, Dhs 874.
2. bursting, breaking open Pv-a 55.
fr. pari + bhid, see paribhindati
(adj.) breaking; a disturber of peace, breedbate Ja ii.173 Ja iii.168; Ja v.245; Ja vi.437.
fr. paribheda in sense of paribhindati
1. material for enjoyment, food, feeding Ja i.243; Ja ii.432; Mil 156, Mil 403; Dhp-a ii.66; Snp-a 342.
2. enjoyment, use Vin iv.267; SN i.90 Nd i.262; Vism 33 (with pariyesana & paṭiggahana) Dhp-a i.60; Pv-a 25, Pv-a 26, Pv-a 220 ■ Four paribhogas are distinguished at Ja v.253 and at Vism 43, viz. theyya˚ iṇa,˚ dāyajja˚, sāmi˚. Paribhoga discussed in relation to paṭilābha at Vism 43.
-cetiya a tree, shrine etc., used by the Buddha, consequently sacred Kp-a 222.; -dhātu a relic consisting of something used by the dead Saint (opp. sarīradhātu remains of the body) Mvu 15, Mvu 163. (cp. pāribhogika-dhātu); Snp-a 579.
fr. pari + bhuj
(or ˚īya ) (nt.) that which is used for cleaning, water for washing Vin ii.76, Vin ii.208, Vin ii.216 (˚ghaṭa), 226 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.8); iii.119 (pāniyaṃ); Ja i.416; Ja vi.75; Dhp-a i.58.
orig. grd. of paribhunjati 2
= parama (cp. Geiger P.Gr. 191) MN iii.112.
(adj.) touching, reaching (up to) Mil 343 (candasuriya˚, cp. Mvu II, candramasūrya-parimārjako maharddhiko etc.).
fr. pari + marj
1. to wipe away, wipe off or out MN i.78.
2. to touch, stroke DN i.78; MN iii.12; SN ii.121; Dhp 394; Ja i.192, Ja i.305; Ja ii.395 (piṭṭhiṃ).
3. to rub, polish, groom (a horse) AN v.166, AN v.168 ■ pp. parimaṭṭha (q.v.).
pari + majjati
(nt.) 1. wiping off or out Pp 33 (ukkhali˚).
2. rubbing, grooming (a horse AN v.166, AN v.168 (ājānīya˚).
fr. parimajjati
rubbed, stroked, polished, in su˚ well polished SN ii.102. See also palimaṭṭha.
pp. of parimajjati
(adj.) 1. round, circular Ja i.441; Ja ii.406 (āvāṭa); vi.42; Pv iv.328 (guḷa˚); Dhs 617 (expld at Dhs-a 317 as “egg-shaped,” kukkuṭ-aṇḍasaṇṭhāna) ■ nt. as adv. in phrase ˚ṃ nivāseti to dress or cover oneself all round Vin i.46; Vin ii.213; Vin iv.185 (nābhimaṇḍalaṃ jānu-maṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentena C.; cp timaṇḍala).
2. rounded off, i.e. complete, correct pleasant, in phrase ˚āni padavyañjanāni well sounding words and letters, correct speech Vin ii.316; MN i.216; AN i.103; DN-a i.282; Snp-a 177, Snp-a 370.
pari + maṇḍala
1. to rub, crush, rub off, treat, shampoo, massage Ja iv.137 (sarīraṃ examine the body) Mil 241 ■ Of leather (i.e. treat) MN i.128.
2. to go together with, to frequent Dhp-a i.90 (samayaṃ p.) ■ pp parimaddita (q.v.).
pari + mṛd
(nt.) rubbing, kneading, shampooing, massage; usually in stock phrase (kāyo anicc’-ucchādana-parimaddana-bhedana-viddhaṃsanadhammo DN i.76 (cp. DN-a i.88, but trsld at Dial. i.87 as “subject to erasion, abrasion, dissolution and disintegration”); MN i.500; SN iv.83; Ja i.416. See further DN i.7; AN i.62; AN iv.54 (ucchādana-p ■ nahāpana-sambāhana); Mil 241 (ucchādana˚); Sdhp 578.
fr. pari + mṛd
crushed, rubbed, treated MN i.129 (su˚ well-treated).
pp. of parimaddati
brought to an end or standstill, destroyed Ja i.145 (˚sankhāra).
pp. of pari + maddheti, Caus. of mṛdh to neglect
to touch, stroke, grasp (usually combd with parimajjati), DN i.78; DN ii.17; MN i.34, MN i.80 MN iii.12; SN ii.121; SN iv.173; AN iii.70 ■ pp. parimaṭṭha (same as pp. of parimajjati ), q.v.
pari + mṛś
(nt.) measure, extent, limit, as adj. (-˚) measuring, extending over, comprising Ja i.45; Snp-a 1 (pariyatti˚); Pv-a 113 (yojana˚), 102 (anekabhāra˚) ■ neg. aparimāṇa without limit, immeasurable very great Vin ii.62, Vin ii.70; SN v.430; AN ii.182 Kp-a 248; DN-a i.288 (˚vaṇṇa); Pv-a 110, Pv-a 129.
of pari + mā
mortified, only in phrase ˚indriya Ja i.361; Ja iii.515; Ja iv.9, Ja iv.306 Ja v.152; Dāvs i.16.
pp. of pari + māreti, Caus. of mṛ;
measured, restricted, limited, only in neg. a˚; measureless Pv ii.811; Mil 287, Mil 343.
pp. of parimināti
(nt.) the condition of being measured Pv-a 254.
fr. parimita
to measure, mete out, estimate, limit, restrict; inf. ˚metuṃ Mil 192; Thag-a 26; and ˚minituṃ Mil 316; grd. ˚meyya (q.v.) ■ pp. parimita (q.v.).
pari + mā
(adj.) to be measured, neg. a˚ countless, immeasurable Mil 331, Mil 388; Pv-a 212.
grd. of parimināti
(adj.) facing, in front; only as nt. adv. ˚ṃ in front, before, in phrase parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapeti “set up his memory in front” (i.e. of the object of thought), to set one’s mindfulness alert Vin i.24; DN ii.291; MN i.56, MN i.421; SN i.170; AN iii.92; Iti 80; Pts i.176 (expld); Pp 68; DN-a i.210. Also in phrase ˚ṃ kārāpeti (of hair) Vin ii.134 “to cut off (? the hair in front” (i.e. on the breast) Vin. Texts iii.138 where is quoted Bdhgh’s expln “ure loma-saṃharaṇaṃ.”
pari + mukha
to be released, to be set free, to escape Vin ii.87; MN i.8; SN i.88, SN i.208; SN ii.24, SN ii.109 SN iii.40, SN iii.150, SN iii.179; Mil 213, Mil 335 (jātiyā etc.) aor. ˚mucci MN i.153 ■ pp. parimutta; Caus. parimoceti (q.v.).
Pass. of pari + muc
forgetful, bewildered Vin i.349 = Ja iii.488 (= muṭṭhassati C.); cp. Vin. Texts ii.307.
pari + muṭṭha, pp. of mussati, cp. pamuṭṭha
released, set free, delivered SN iii.31.
pp. of parimuccati
(f.) release Ja i.4 (v. 20); Mil 112, Mil 227; Pv-a 109.
fr. pari + muc
to become bewildered or disturbed, to vanish, fall off Nd i.144.
pari + mussati
to set free, deliver, release DN i.96; Ja i.28 (v. 203); Mil 334; DN-a i.263; Dhp-a i.39.
Caus. of parimuccati
(adj.) very confused, muddled, dulled, bewildered, infatuated Sdhp 206.
pp. of pari + Caus. of muh
encompassing, fathoming, comprehending (as ger.); penetration, understanding (as n.) Only in phrase ceto-pariya-ñāṇa knowledge encompassing heart or mind (cp. phrase cetasā ceto paricca DN ii.82 sq. (v.l. ˚āya); iii.100 (v.l. ˚āye); DN-a i.223 (corresp. with pubbe-nivāsa-ñāṇa); with which alternates the phrase indriya-paro-pariya-ñāṇa in same meaning (see indriya cpds. & remark on paropariya Ja i.78 ■ See also pariyatta1 pariyatti, pariyāya 3 and cpds. of ceto.
either short form of pariyāya, or ger. of pari + ī substantivised (for the regular form paricca) representing an ending -ya instead of -tya.-Bdhgh at Vism 409 takes pariya as nt., but seems to mix it with the idea of a ppr. by defining it as “pariyātī ti pariyaṃ paricchindatī ti attho”
supreme or extraordinary offering or sacrifice Snp-a 321, Snp-a 322.
pari + yañña
(nt.) learning understanding, comprehension, only in phrase indriyaparo pariyatta (-ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the intentions of others AN v.34, AN v.38; Pts i.121 sq.; Vb 340.
abstr. fr. pariya (pari + i ) but confused with pariyatta2 & pariyatti fr. pari + ; āp
(adj.) (a) capable of, mastered, kept in mind learned by heart; only in phrase dhammo ca vinayo ca p. Vin ii.285 = Kp-a 92; DN iii.241 sq. (yathā sutaṃ yathā p˚ṃ dhammaṃ) ■ (b) sufficient, enough Pv-a 33 (= alaṃ)
cp. Sk. paryāpta. pp. of pari + āp, see pāpuṇāti
(f.) adequacy, accomplishment, sufficiency capability, competency; indriya-paro˚; efficiency in the (knowledge of) thoughts of others SN v.205; Ne 101 Three accomplishments are distinguished at DN-a i.21 sq. viz. alagadd-ûpamā (like a serpent), nissaraṇatthā (on account of salvation) and bhaṇḍâgārika˚ (of a treasurer) apariyatti-kara bringing no advantage Dhp-a i.71.
2 accomplishment in the Scriptures, study (learning by heart) of the holy texts Vism 95. Also the Scriptures themselves as a body which is handed down through oral tradition. In this meaning the word is only found in later, dogmatic literature; -tīsu piṭakesu tividho pariyatti-bhedo DN-a i.21. At Snp-a 494 it is classed with paccaya dhutaṅga & adhigama; as a part of paṭibhāna at Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386. pariyattiṃ uggaṇhāti to undertake the learning (of the Scriptures) Dhp-a ii.30; cp Kp-a 91 (tipiṭaka-sabba-p ■ pabheda- dhara ); Ja ii.48 (˚ṃ ṭhapetvā leaving the learning aside); Mil 115, Mil 215 Mil 345, Mil 411 (āgama˚) ■ abl. pariyattito through learning by heart Snp-a 195 (opp. to atthato according to the meaning).
-dhamma that which belongs to the holy study, part or contents of the Scriptures, the Tipiṭaka comprising the nine divisions (see navanga Buddha-sāsana) Kp-a 191, Kp-a 193; Snp-a 328; Pv-a 2; cp. ˚sāsana. -dhara knowing the Scriptures by heart Mil 21. -dhura (= ganthadhura): see vāsadhura. -paṭibhānavant possessed of intelligence as regards learning the Scriptures Snp-a 111. -parimāṇa extent of study Snp-a 1, Snp-a 608 -bahula clever in the study of the Dhamma AN iii.86 -bahussuta versed in the Scriptures Snp-a 110. -sāsana object, instruction of the Scriptures, code of the holy Texts (cp. ˚dhamma) Nd i.143; Dhp-a iv.39.
fr. pari + āp, cp. Epic Sk. paryāpti & P. pariyāpuṇāti
1. limit, end, climax, border SN i.80 (manāpa˚ “limit-point in enjoyment”; cp. C. nipphattikaṃ koṭikaṃ K.S. 320) Ja i.149 (hattha-pāda˚ hoofs), 221 (udaka˚), 223 (sara˚) ii.200 (angana˚); Pv ii.1312; Dhp-a iii.172 (parisa˚). 2. limit, boundary, restriction, limitation Vin ii.59, Vin ii.60 (āpatti˚); Nd i.483 (distinguishes between 4 pariyantā with ref. to one’s character, viz. sīlasaṃvara˚ indriyasaṃvara˚ bhojane mattaññutā˚, jāgariyânuyoga˚). 3. (adj ■ ˚) bounded by, limited by, surrounded, ending in Vin iv.31; MN iii.90; SN ii.122 (āyu˚); AN i.164 (id.) Snp 577 (bhedana˚); Pv i.1013 (parikkhitta Pv-a 52)- apariyanta (adj.) boundless, limitless Pv-a 58, Pv-a 166.
-kata restricted, limited, bounded Nd ii.taṇhāiii (with sīmakata & odhikata; v.l. pariyanti˚, cp. BSk. paryantīkṛta “finished” Divy 97, Divy 236). -cārin living in selfrestriction Snp 964 (cp. Nd i.483). -dassāvin seeing the limit AN v.50. -rahita without limits Dhp-a iii.252.
pari + anta, cp. Sk. paryanta
(adj.) having a limit, having a set or well-defined purpose; f. ˚vatī (vācā) discriminating speech DN i.4 = MN iii.49 = Pp 58; expld as “paricchedaṃ dassetvā yatha ‘ssa paricchedo paññāyati, evaṃ bhāsatī ti attho” DN-a i.76 = PugA 238.
fr. pariyanta
(adj.) (-˚) ending in, bounded or limited by SN ii.83 = AN ii.198 (kāya-p. ˚ā & jīvita-p ˚ā vedanā); Vism 69 (bhojana˚, udaka˚, āsana˚) Sdhp 440 (kāla˚ sīla).
fr. pariyanta
revolution, lapse of time, period term Ja iii.460 (= kālapariyāya C.); v.367 (kāla˚).
cp. Epic Sk. paryaya, pari + i; the usual P. form is pariyāya, but at the foll. passages the short a is required metri causa
(f.) winding round, turning round; of a tree, branch Ja vi.528 (duma˚; read ˚pariyāsu with v.l. instead of T. pariyāyesu; C. expls by sākhā).
fr. pari + yā
having come to, reached, attained Ja vi.237 (phalaṃ; C = upagata), 238 (kusalaṃ C. = pariyāyena attano vārena āgata).
pari + ā + gata
(adj.) having the house all round, entirely surrounded by the house Vin iii.119 (of gabbha).
pari + āgāra
1. to go round (acc.) Ja i.307.
2. to come near Ja ii.440.
pari + yā
to take up in an excessive degree, to exhaust. Only in secondary forms of med-pass ādiyati, pp. ˚ādinna, ger. ādāya (q.v.).
pari + ādāti
(nt.) “taking up completely,” i.e. using up, consummation, consumption finishing, end MN i.487 (kaṭṭha˚, opp. to upādāna) SN i.152; SN iii.16 sq. (cetaso p., cp. pariyādāya & ˚dinna) iv.33 (sabb’ upādāna˚) AN ii.139; Ja v.186. Cp. BSk paryādāna Divy 4, Divy 55, Divy 100 ■ Esp. in foll. phrases āsava˚ & jīvita˚; DN i.46 (jīvita-pariyādānā abl., expld at Dhp i.128 as “jīvitassa sabbaso pariyādinnattā parikkhīṇattā puna appaṭisandhika-bhāvā ti attho”) SN ii.83 = AN ii.198; SN iii.126; SN iv.213; AN iv.13, AN iv.146 Pp 13; Mil 397; and combd with parikkhaya in ˚ṃ gacchati to be exhausted or consummated AN v.173 Snp p.126; Mil 102; Pv-a 147, cp. BSk. parikṣayaṃ paryādānaṃ gacchati Divy 567; Avs i.48; Avs ii.193.
pari + ādāna, opp. upādāna
(indecl.) 1. taking all round, summing up, completely Nd ii.533 (in expln of ye keci, as synonymous with sabbato, i.e. for completeness exhaustively).
2. exhausting, overpowering, enticing, taking hold of, as cittaṃ p. “taking hold of the mind” MN i.91; Iti 19; Dhp-a i.15.
3. losing control over, giving out (cittaṃ ) SN iii.16; SN iv.125. In absolute sense perhaps at SN v.51 = AN iv.127 (with vv. ll pariyenāya & pariyāya).;
ger. of pariyādati
1. (Pass. exhausted, finished, put an end to, consummated Vin i.25 (tejo); DN ii.8 = MN iii.118; SN ii.133 sq. (dukkhaṃ parikkhīṇaṃ + ); v.461 sq ■ neg. apariyādinna not finished, not exhausted MN i.79 (muttakarīsaṃ ˚ādiṇṇaṃ), 83 (dhammadesanā ādiṇṇā); SN ii.178 sq.
2 (Med.) having exhausted, lost control over, being overcome (usually ˚citta adj.) Vin ii.185; MN ii.172; SN ii.228 Nd ii.32; Pv-a 279.
often spelt ˚diṇṇa, e.g. in vv.ll. at DN ii.8; MN ii.172; MN iii.118 ■ pp. of pariyādiyati
(nt.) exhaustion, consummation DN-a i.128.
abstr. fr. pariyādinna
1. to put an end to exhaust, overpower, destroy, master, control SN iii.155 (rāgaṃ); Nd ii.under parisahati ■ Pot. ˚ādiyeyyaṃ Vin i.25 (tejaṃ) ■ ger. ˚adiyitvā Vin i.25 (tejaṃ) iv.109 (id.); SN i.84 (trsl. “confiscate”).
2. to become exhausted, give out Ja v.186 (udakaṃ); Mil 297 (cittaṃ p.; opp. to parivaḍḍhati) ■ pp. pariyādinna (q.v.).
sometimes spelt ˚diyyati, e.g. Nd ii.s. v.; pari + ādiyati, q.v. for etym. ref.
to be finished AN iv.339. - pp. pariyāpanna (q.v.) ■ Caus. pariyāpādeti (q.v.).
pari + āpajjati
(nt.) good advice, application trick, artfulness, artifice Ja v.361, Ja v.369. (C. explns as parisuddha after v.l. pariyodāta which was prob misread for pariyodāna), 370.
pari + apadāna, the latter for ava˚, and metrical lengthening of a
1. “gone completely into,” included in, belonging to, got into Vin i.46 (patta˚ that which has been put into the bowl); DN i.45 (= ābaddha DN-a i.127); Snp-a 397 (milakkhabhāsa˚ etc.); Kp-a 136 (vinaya˚), 191 (sangha˚) Dhp-a i.158 (idhaloka-paraloka˚); Pv-a 14, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 59, Pv-a 129 (devaloka˚), 150.
2. accomplished (i.e. gone into the matter), thorough, mastering (said of vācā ) SN ii.280 = AN ii.51.
3. (˚ā dhammā) the Included, viz. all that is contained in the threefold cycle of existence (i.e. the worlds of sense, form & formless) Dhs 1268 Vb 12, Vb 15, Vb 19 & passim; Dhs-a 50. Opp. apariyāpannā (dhammā) the Unincluded (viz. all that is exempt from this cycle) Pts i.101; Dhs 583 (cp. Dhs trsln 165, 254, 329, 332), 992, 1242; Kv 507.
pari + āpanna, cp. adhipanna
(nt.) includedness Snp-a 174.
abstr. fr. pariyāpanna
to finish off, i.e. put to death completely SN iv.308 sq. = AN iii.94.
Caus. of pariyāpajjati
(nt.) mastery over, accomplishment in (gen.) Vism 442 (Buddhavacanassa).
abstr. formn fr. pariyāpuṇāti
1. to learn (by heart), to master, to gain mastership over, to learn thoroughly Vin iv.305 (parittaṃ a charm) DN i.117 (= jānāti DN-a i.117); AN iii.86 (dhammaṃ); fut pariyāpuṇissati Dhp-a i.382 (dhammaṃ); ger. pariyāpuṇitvā SN i.176; SN ii.120; Snp-a 195 (nikāyaṃ).
2. (with inf.) to know (to do something), to be able to Vin ii.109 (aor. ˚iṃsu), 121 ■ pp. pariyāputa and pariyatta (q.v.).
pari + āp, cp. BSk. paryavāpnoti Divy 613
1. learned by heart, known Nd i.234 = Nd ii.386 (Buddhavacana).
2 learned, accomplished DN-a i.21 ■ See also pariyatta2.
pp. of pariyāpuṇāti
lit. “going round” analysed by Bdhgh in 3 diff. meanings, viz. vāra (turn, course) desanā (instruction, presentation), and kāraṇa (cause reason, also case, matter), see DA i.36 and cp. Kindred Sayings i.320.
1. arrangement, disposition, in phrase ˚ṃ karoti to arrange DN i.179 (trsln takes it literally “departure,” i.e. going out of one’s way, détour; or change of habit, see Dial i.245); MN i.252, MN i.326; MN iii.7 MN iii.62; SN i.142 (trsl. “make occasion” [for coming]). 2. order, succession, turn, course (= vāra) DN i.166 (˚bhatta i.e. feeding in turn or at regular intervals expld as vāra -bhatta PugA 232); MN i.78, MN i.282, MN i.481; SN ii.51 sq.; AN ii.206; Ja v.153 (= vāra); Pv-a 242 (aparā˚)
3. what goes on, way, habit, quality, property SN i.146 (ceto˚; habits of mind, thoughts, but see also pariya ); AN v.160 (citta˚, see ceto).
4. discussion instruction, method (of teaching), discourse on (-˚) representation of (-˚) (= desanā); thus āditta˚ (of Vin i.34) Dhp-a i.88; esp. in cpd. dhamma˚; disquisition on the Dhamma DN i.46; DN ii.93; MN i.83; MN iii.67; SN ii.74 SN v.357; AN iii.62; AN iv.166, AN iv.381; Snp p.218; also in foll. vitakka˚ MN i.122; deva˚ AN iii.402 sq.; peta˚ Pv-a 92 cp. Vism 41 (˚kathā).
5. in Abhidhamma terminology specifically: pariyāyena, the mode of teaching in the Suttanta, ad hominem, discursively, applied method, illustrated discourse, figurative language as opposed to the abstract, general statements of Abhidhamma = nippariyāyena, nippariyāyato Vism 473 Vism 499; cp. Dhs-a 317 (figuratively).
6. mode, manner reason, cause, way (= kāraṇa ) DN i.185 (iminā ˚ena), 186 (id.); ii.339 (ayaṃ p. yena ˚ena); DN-a i.106 (tena tena ˚ena in some way or other); Dhs-a 366 (iminā ˚ena for this reason); esp. in phrase aneka -pariyāyena in many (or various) ways Vin i.16, Vin i.45; DN i.1 (cp. DN-a i.36), 174; MN i.24; AN i.56; Snp p.15.
7. winding round (of a tree: branch), in doubtful reading at Ja vi.528 (see pariyā ) ■ See also nippariyāya.
fr. pari + i, cp. Class. Sk. paryāya in all meanings, already Vedic in meaning of “formula,” in liturgy, cp. below 4
struck out, affected with (-˚), only in phrase takka˚; “beaten out by argumentations” DN i.16 (cp. DN-a i.106); MN i.520.
pari + āhata
(nt.) striking, beating Vism 142 (āhanana˚; in exposition of vitakka) = Dhs-a 114 (“circumimpinging” Expos. 151).
fr. pari + ā + han
sought, desired, looked for SN iv.62 (a˚); Mil 134; Vism 344 (˚āhāra).
pp. of pariyesati
= pariyeṭṭhi Snp 289 (Snp-a 316 reads pariyeṭṭhi). Perhaps we should read pariyeṭṭhuṃ (see pariyesati).
to have great longing, to be distressed Ja v.417, Ja v.421 (mā ˚kaṇṭhi).
pari + ukkaṇṭhati
to arise, pervade; intrs. to become prepossessed, to be pervaded Dhs-a 366 (cittaṃ p.; corā magge pariyuṭṭhiṃsu) ■ pp. pariyuṭṭhita (q.v.).
pari + uṭṭhāti
(nt.) state of being possessed (or hindered) by (-˚), prepossession bias, outburst MN i.18, Kvu xiv.6 (thīnamiddha˚), 136; AN i.66 (˚ajjhosāna); v.198 (adhiṭṭhāna-˚samuṭṭhāna) Nd ii.under taṇhāii (= Dhs 1059, where trsln is “pervading,” based on expln at Dhs-a 366: uppajjamānā [scil. taṇhā] cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāti, and allegorical interpretation ibid.: the heart becomes possessed by lust as a road by highwaymen); Pp 21 (avijjā˚); Vb 383 (where 7 pariyuṭṭhānā [sic! pl. m.] are enumd in the same set as under headings of anusaya & saṃyojana; thus placing p. into the same category as these two) Dhs 390, Dhs 1061 (avijjā˚), 1162 (id.); Ne 13, Ne 14, Ne 18, Ne 37 Ne 79 sq.; Dhs-a 238; Thag-a 80; Vism 5 (with vītikkama & anusaya). Cp. also; adhiṭṭhāna.
pari + uṭṭhāna, it is doubtful whether this connection is correct, in this case the meaning would be “over-exertion.” BSk. paryavasthāna points to another connection, see Divy 185
possessed by (the C. expln as given K.S. 320 is “abhibhūta”) biassed, taken up by, full of (-˚) MN i.18; MN iii.14; SN iv.240 (maccheramala˚ ceto); AN i.281; AN ii.58; Iti 43 (diṭṭhigatehi); Kvu i.91 (kāma-rāga˚); Thag-a 78 Sdhp 581.
-citta whose heart is possessed by (-˚) DN ii.104 (Mārena); Pv-a 142 (maccheramala˚), 195 (id.), 279 (kilesasamudācārena). -ṭṭhāyin being rooted in prepossession affected by bias, SN iii.3 sq. (so read for pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin ).
pari + uṭṭhita, with v.l. at DN ii.104 parivuṭṭhita and BSk. rendering paryavasthita: see remarks on pariyuṭṭhāna and Dial. ii.111
to utter solemnly, to proclaim aloud Dhs-a 1 (aor. ˚āhāsi).
pari + udāharati
search for DN i.222; AN i.93 (āmisa˚ & dhamma˚); iii.416; Snp 289 (vijjācaraṇa˚) Ja i.14; Ne 1, Ne 5; DN-a i.271.
pari + eṭṭhi of esati, ā + iṣ
to go about, to go round, encircle, encompass; ger. paricca (q.v.). The pp. is represented by pareta, see also pareti which seems to stand for pariyeti.
pari + i
going round, walking round; of a ship: sailing round, tour, voyage SN v.51 (pariyenāya, v.l. pariyādāya) = AN iv.127 (reads pariyādāya v.l. pariyāya). Reading is doubtful.
fr. pari + i, cp. Sk. *paryayana
to seek for, look, search, desire DN i.223 (˚esamāna ppr.); Snp 482 (id.); SN i.177, SN i.181 SN iv.62; AN ii.23, AN ii.25, AN ii.247; Nd i.262; Nd ii.427 (+ paṭilabhati and paribhuñjati); Ja i.3, Ja i.138; Mil 109, Mil 313; Dhp-a iii.263 (ppr. ˚esanto); Pv-a 31; Sdhp 506 ■ grd ˚esitabba SN ii.130; inf. ˚esituṃ Snp-a 316; and ˚eṭṭhuṃ (conj. ˚iṭṭhuṃ?) Snp 289 (cp. Snp-a 316 which gives reading ˚eṭṭhuṃ as gloss); ger. ˚esitvā Snp-a 317, Snp-a 414-pp. pariyesita & pariyiṭṭha; (q.v.). Cp. for similar formation & meaning; ajjhesati with pp. ajjhesita ajjhiṭṭha ■ Cp. vi˚.;
pari + esati, cp. BSk. paryeṣate to investigate Avs i.339. The P. word shows confusion between esati & icchati, as shown by double forms ˚iṭṭhuṃ etc See also anvesati
(f.) & ˚na (nt.) search, quest, inquiry (a) (˚nā ) DN ii.58, DN ii.61, DN ii.280 (twofold, viz. sevitabbā and asevitabbā); iii.289; MN i.161 (twofold, viz ariyā & anariyā); AN ii.247 (id.); SN i.143; SN ii.144, SN ii.171 SN iii.29; SN iv.8 sq. (assāda˚ & ādīnava˚); AN i.68 (kāma˚) 93 ■ (b) (˚na) Nd i.262 (˚chanda, + paṭilābha˚ & paribhoga˚); Dhp-a iii.256 (kāmaguṇe ˚ussukka). With paṭiggahaṇa & paribhoga at Dhp-a i.75.
fr. pariyesati
searched, sought for, desired Iti 121. See also pariyiṭṭha.
pp. of pariyesati
cauldron (see Kern, Toev. s. v.) Mil 118.
fr. pari + yuj
at MN i.480 is contracted form (ger.) of pariyogāhitvā (so expld by C.).
dived into, penetrated into, immersed in (loc.) Vin i.181; DN i.110; MN i.380; SN ii.58; SN iv.328; Vb 329; Mil 283.
-dhamma one who has penetrated into the Dhamma Vin i.16; AN iv.186, AN iv.210; Ud 49.
pp. of pariyogāhati, see also ogādha1
diving into, penetration; only in cpd. dup˚; hard to penetrate, unfathomable SN iv.376; Mil 70. Pariyogahati & gaheti;
pari + ogāha
to penetrate, fathom, scrutinise AN ii.84; AN iv.13, AN iv.145 sq. (paññāya) Ja i.341; Pp 33 (a˚), 48 sq. Cp. ajjhogāhati.
pari + ogāhati
(nt.) & ā (f.) plunging into, penetration Pts i.106, Pts i.112; Pts ii.183; Dhs 390 (a˚) 425 (a˚); Pp 21 (a˚); Dhs-a 260.
pari + ogāhana
to spread all over (intrs.) Mil 197.
pari + ottharati
(nt.) & ā (f.), cleansing, purification AN i.207 (cittassa); Dhp 183 (= vodāpana Dhp-a iii.237); Ne 44. In BSk. distorted to paryādapana Mvu iii.12 (= Dhp 183).
fr. pariyodapeti
cleansed, purified Ne 44 (cittaṃ).
pp. of pariyodapeti
to cleanse, purify MN i.25; Dhp 88 (= vodapeti parisodheti Dhp-a ii.162; Ne 44; Thag-a 237 (indriyāni) ■ pp. pariyodāta & pariyodapita; (q.v.).
pari + odapeti, of Caus. of dā4 to clean
(adj.) 1. very clean, pure, cleansed, mostly combd with parisuddha (+ ) DN i.75, DN i.76 (+ ); MN i.26; SN i.198; SN iii.235 (+ ) v.301; AN iii.27 (+ ); iv.120 sq.; Ja v.369 (+ ; see pariyāpadāna); Pp 60; DN-a i.219; Dhp-a iv.72 (+ ); Vv-a 138.
2. very clever, accomplished, excellent [cp BSk. paryavadāta in same meaning at Divy 100; Ja iii.281 (˚sippa); Vism 136 (id.).
pari + odāta, cp. pariyodapeti
(adj.) cleansing, purifying Vism 149 (ñāṇa).
fr. pariyodapeti
defence AN i.154.
pari + yodha
covered over, enveloped DN i.246; DN iii.223 (a˚); MN i.25; SN v.263; AN ii.211 (uddhasta + ); iv.86; Ja i.30; Mil 161; Snp-a 596 (= nivuta); Dhp-a iii.199; Pv-a 172 (taca˚).
pp. of pariyonandhati, cp. onaddha & BSk. paryavanaddha “overgrown” Divy, 120, 125.
to tie down, put over, envelop, cover up Vin ii.137; SN v.122; Ja iii.398; Dhp-a iii.153 ■ pp. pariyonaddha (q.v.).
pari + avanandhati
(nt.) covering DN-a i.135; Dhp-a iii.198.
fr. above
enveloping, covering DN i.246 (= nīvaraṇa); Dhs 1157 (cp. Dhs trsl. 311); Mil 300.
pari + onāha
(nt.) 1. end, finish, conclusion Ja i.106 (sacca˚ = desanā˚); Pv-a 9 (desanā and passim), 136 (āyūha˚), 162 (id.), 281 (= anta) Often contracted with ādi beginning & majjha middle (see e.g. Snp-a 327), esp. in phrase ādi-kalyāṇa majjhe; kalyāṇa ˚kalyāṇa with reference to the Dhamma (expld as “ekagāthā pi hi samanta-bhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapadena ādik˚ dutiyatatiya-padehi majjhe k pacchima-padena pariyosānak˚” etc. at Snp-a 444), e.g. DN i.62; Iti 111 & passim.
2. end, i.e. perfection, ideal Arahantship (see on these fig. meanings and its appl;n to Nibbāna DN-a i.175, DN-a i.176) DN i.203 (brahmacariya + ) ii.283 (cp. Dial. ii.316); iii.55 (brahmacariya + ) SN v.230; AN iii.363 (nibbāna˚), 376 (brahmacariya˚) Vism 5.
pari + osāna of ava + sā
1. to make fulfil Vin iii.155; DN-a i.241; Thag-a 159 (for khepeti Thig 168).
2. to bring to an end, to finish Vism 244.
Caus. of pari + ava + sā, Sk. syati, of which pp. pariyosita cp. osāpeti
1. finished, concluded, satisfied, DN ii.224; MN i.12 (paripuṇṇa + ).
2. [pp. of pari + ava + śri, cp. ajjhosita] fixed on, bent on Mil 140 (˚sankappa).
pp. of pari + ava + sā
(nt.) guarding, preserving, keeping Mil 356, Mil 402; Pv-a 130.
fr. pari + rakṣ
to guard, protect; preserve, maintain Snp 678 (pot. ˚rakkhe) Mil 410; Sdhp 413, Sdhp 553 (sīlaṃ).
pari + rakṣ, cp. abhirakkhati
dyed, coloured; fig. marked or distinguished by (instr.) Mil 75.
pari + rañjita
burning, fever; fig fever of passion, consumption, distress, pain DN iii.238 (avigata˚), 289 (˚nānatta); MN i.101 (kāme); SN ii.143 sq (˚nānatta), 151 (kāma˚; vyāpāda˚, vihiṃsā˚); iii.7 sq (taṇhā, pipāsā, p.), 190 (vigata˚); iv.387; v.156 (kāyasmiṃ), 451 (jāti˚, jarā˚); AN i.68 (kāma˚), 137 (rāgaja mohaja etc.); ii.197 (vighāta); iii.3, 245 sq., 388 sq. iv.461 sq.; Snp 715 (= rāgajo vā dosajo vā appamattako pi p. Snp-a 498); Dhp 90 (cp. Dhp-a ii.166: duvidho p kāyiko cetasiko ca); Nd ii.374 (kāma˚); Ja ii.220; Mil 97, Mil 165, Mil 318; Thag-a 41, Thag-a 292; Vv-a 44; Pv-a 230.
pari + ḍāha of ḍah, cp. pariḍahati. On change of ḍ and ḷ see Geiger, P.Gr. § 423
Name of a bird (C. on Thag 49).
cp. Sk. pirilī, pirillī Bṛh. Saṃh. 86, 44
(nt.) being active, preparation, outfit Ja v.46; Ja vi.21 (gamana˚); Dhp-a i.207 (gloss & v.l. gamana-parisajja), 395 (v.l. parisajja).;
Note. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. parivaccha is wrong spelling for parivacca which is abstr. from pariyatta (*pariyatya), with va for ya as in pavacchati pavecchati = Sk. prayacchati.
formation from ger. of pari + vrt, corresp. to *parivṛtyaṃ (?)
(nt.) avoiding, avoidance MN i.7, MN i.10; AN iii.387, AN iii.389; Mil 408; Vism 33. As f ˚ā at Vism 132, and ibid. as abstr. parivajjanatā.
fr. pari + vṛj
to shun, avoid, keep away from (acc.) MN i.10; SN i.69, SN i.102, SN i.188, SN i.224; Snp 57 (= vivajjeti Nd ii.419), 395 sq., 768 (kāme, cp Nd i.6), 771; Iti 71; Dhp 123 (pāpāni), 269; Ja iv.378 (fut. ˚essati); Pv iv.146 (nivesanaṃ); iv.177 (loke adinnaṃ ˚ayassu); Mil 91 (grd. ˚ajjayitabba), 300, 408; Pv-a 150 (v.l. ˚ajjati), 221 (jīvitaṃ, for vijahati, better read with v.l. pariccajati ).
pari + vajjeti, Caus. of vṛj
(?) (adj.) forming a circle, circular DN i.22 (trsld “a path could be traced round it” Dial. i.36). Can it be misspelling for pariyanta? Kern, Toev. s. v. equals it to Sk. parivartman, and adds reference ˚kata “bounded (syn. paricchinna) Mil 132.
doubtful spelling & expl;n; perhaps “parivaṭṭin?
round, circle, succession, mainly in two phrases, viz. catu˚; fourfold circle MN iii.67; SN iii.59 (pañcupādāna-kkhandhe, cp aṭṭha-parivaṭṭa-adhideva-ñāṇadassana AN iv.304); and ñāti˚; circle of relatives DN i.61 (= ñāti DN-a i.170; cp expln ābandhan’ atthena ñāti yeva ñāti-parivaṭṭo DN-a i.181 = PugA 236); ii.241; MN iii.33; Pp 57; Thag-a 68; Vv-a 87 ■ See further at DN-a i.143 (rāja˚), 283 (id., but spelt ˚vatta); Snp-a 210.
fr. pari + vṛt, cp. parivattana
to increase, to be happy or prosperous Mil 297 (cittaṃ p.; opp. pariyādiyati).
pari + vṛdh
extolled, praised Sdhp 557.
pp. of parivaṇṇeti
to describe, praise, extol Ja vi.213 (ppr. ˚vaṇṇayanto) ■ pp. ˚vaṇṇita.
pari + vaṇṇeti
(adj.) changing round, twisting, turning; f. pl. ˚āyo Ja v.431.
fr. pari + vṛt
circle (lit. turning round) Ja i.101; cp. parivattika in phrase paligha˚ (q.v.).
fr. parivatta
1. to turn round, twist (trs. & intrs.), go about Vin ii.220; Ja v.431 (singaṃ); Pv iv.53 (= pariyāti Pv-a 260); Mil 118; DN-a i.265.
2. (intrs. to change about, move, change, turn to Pv ii.105 (= pariṇamati Pv-a 144); iii.44 (id. 194); iii.65; Pv-a 178 ■ Caus. parivatteti (q.v.). Cp. vipari˚.
pari + vṛt
(nt.) setting going, keeping up, propounding Ja i.200 (˚manta adj. one who knows a charm); Ne 1 sq., 106.
fr. parivattati
1. turned round, twisted Ja iv.384.
2. recited Vism 96.
pp. of parivatteti
1. to turn round (trs.), to turn over Ja i.202; Ja ii.275 (sarīraṃ); v.217; DN-a i.244–2. to deal with, handle, set going, put forth, recite Vism 96, in phrase mantaṃ p. to recite, practise a charm Ja i.200, Ja i.253; Pv ii.613 (= sajjhāyati vāceti Pv-a 97) cp. mantaṃ pavatteti & pavattar; saraṃ p. to make a sound Ja i.405; adhippāyaṃ speak out, propound, discuss Pv-a 131.
3. to change, exchange Vin ii.174; Ja iii.437 ■ pp. parivattita (q.v.).
Caus. of parivattati
(f.) making resound, resounding, in cpd godhā˚; “string-resounding,” i.e. a string instrument lute Ja vi.580 (cp. Sk *parivāda an instrument with which the lute is played) ■ Another parivadentikā we find at Ja vi.540 (C. reading for T. ˚vadantikā, with v.l. ˚devantikā) denoting a kind of bird (ekā sakuṇajāti).
pari + vadento + ikā; vadento being ppr. Caus. of vad
to stay, dwell, to live under probation Vin iii.186 (grd. ˚vatthabba); iv.30, 127; DN i.176; MN i.391; SN ii.21; Snp 697 (= pabbajitvā tāpasavesena vasati Snp-a 490) ■ ppr. med. paribbasāna; pp parivuṭṭha & parivuttha; (q.v.).
pari + vas2
at Pv ii.936 is to be read as paridhassati (see paridahati).
to carry about Thig 439 (dārake).
pari + vahati
(-˚) blown round or through, i.e. filled with, stirred by Mil 19 (isi-vāta˚).
pp. of pari + vā
(f.) a lute of seven strings Abhp. 138 ■ See parivadentikā.
fr. pari + vad, late Sk. the same
1. surrounding, suite, retinue, followers, entourage, pomp Ja i.151; Ja iv.38; Ja vi.75; Pv-a 21, Pv-a 30 (˚cāga-cetana, read pariccāga-cetana?); usually as adj.-˚ surrounded by, in company of Vin i.38 (dasasata˚); AN ii.91 (deva˚ & asura˚); Ja i.92 (mahā-bhikkhusangha˚); Pp 52 (pheggu sāra˚; with expln PugA 229 rukkho sayaṃ-pheggu hoti, parivāra-rukkhā pan’ assa sārā honti); Mil 285 (dvisahassa-paritta-dīpa-p˚ ā cattāro mahā dīpā); Vism 37; Dhp-a iii.262 (pañcasatabhikkhu˚); Pv-a 53 (accharā-sahassa˚), 74 (dvisahassadīpa˚); sa˚; with a retinue (of… ) Ja i.49 (cattāro dīpe) Pv-a 20.
2. followers, accompaniment or possession as a sign of honour, and therefore meaning “respect, attendance, homage, fame (cp. paricāra) AN i.38 ˚sampadā) Pts i.172 (pariggaha, p., paripūra); Dhp-a ii.77 Thag-a 241 (dhana + , riches and fame); Vb-a 466; Pv-a 137 (sampatti = yaso); Vv-a 122 (= yaso).
3. ingredient accessories (pl.), requisite Ja i.266 (pañca-sugandhika˚) Mil 290 (sa˚ dāna); DN-a i.297 (= parikkhārā).
4. as N. it is the name of the last book of the Vinaya Piṭaka (“The Accessory”), the Appendix,a sort of résumé and index of the preceding books Snp-a 97 (sa-parivāraka Vinaya-piṭaka); Vb-a 432.
fr. pari + vṛ;
(adj.) accompanying, forming a retinue Ja v.234. See also parivāra 4 and paricāraka.
parivāra + ka
(nt.) 1. covering, drapery (so trsl. at K.S. p. 45) SN i.33.
2. (adj.) (-˚) surrounded by Ja v.195 (= parikkhitta C.).
fr. pari + vṛ;
surrounded, fig. honoured SN i.166, SN i.192 = Th1,1235; Ja ii.48; purakkhata + ); Dhp-a iv.49 (= purakkhata Dhp 343); Dhs-a 1 (devānaṃ gaṇena); Dāvs i.16 (v.l. for parimārita).
pp. of parivāreti
to cover, encompass, surround Ja i.181 (nagaraṃ ˚ayiṃsu); ii.102 (fut. ˚essati) iii.371 (rukkhaṃ); iv.405 (for parikaroti); vi.179. ger. parivāretvā used as prep. “round” Ja i.172 (pokkharaṇiṃ) ■ In meaning “to serve, attend upon,” also “to attend upon oneself, to amuse oneself,” parivāreti is often erroneously read for paricāreti, e.g. at DN ii.13; Pv iv.129 (v.l. ˚cāreti); Pv-a 228; in ppr. med. ˚vāriyamāna (with v.l. ˚cāriyamāna) at DN ii.21; AN i.145; Ja i.58; Vv-a 92 ■ See also anuparivāreti ■ pp. parivārita (q.v.).
Caus. of pari + vṛ;
1. sojourn; stay, in phrase vipassanā˚; Dhp-a iii.118; Dhs-a 215.
2. period under probation, (living under) probation Vin iii.186 (˚ṃ vasati, cp. parivuttha) iv.30; SN ii.21 (˚ṃ vasati). ˚ṃ deti to allow probation Vin i.49; Vin ii.7; Vin iv.30, Vin iv.127; ˚ṃ yācati to ask for probation Vin iv.30, Vin iv.127 ■ samodhāna˚; inclusive probation Vin ii.48 sq.; suddhanta˚ probation of complete purification Vin ii.59 sq.
3. period, time (lit. stay) interval, duration Ud 7 (eka-ratti˚).
-dāna the allowance of probation AN i.99.
fr. pari + vas2, cp. Epic Sk. parivāsa only in meaning 1
(adj.) 1. “staying,” i.e. usual, accustomed, common Snp-a 35 (˚bhatta; or is it “fermented,” and thus to be taken to No. 3?) a˚ unusual, new, uncommon Ja ii.435 (where it is combd with abhinava, which should be substituted for readings accuṇha, abbhuṇha & abhiṇha according to similar expl;n of paccaggha at Pv-a 87), with v.l. samparivāsita (well-seasoned?).
2. a probationer Vin ii.162. In this meaning usually spelt pāri˚ (q.v.).
3. in combn cira˚ (with ref. to food) it may be interpreted either as “staying long, being in use for a long time,” i.e. stale or it may be derived fr. vāsa3 (odour, perfume or seasoning) and translated (so Mrs. Rh. D. in Expositor 63, 64) “long-fermented” (better “seasoned”?) Dhs-a 48 (˚vāsika & vāsiya); Thag-a 29.
fr. pari + vas2, see parivasati
(adj.) perfumed (all round) Ja i.51 (v.l. ˚vārita); cp. samparivāsita (well-seasoned?), which is perhaps to be read at Ja ii.435 for aparivāsika.
pari + pp. of vāseti fr. vāsa3
reflection, meditation, thought, consideration MN ii.170 (ākāra˚), Vin ii.74; SN ii.115 (id.); AN ii.193 (id.); Mil 13; Dhp-a ii.62; Dhs-a 74; Vv-a 3; Pv-a 282 (vutta-˚e nipāta in expln of nūna ). Usually in phrase cetasā ceto- parivitakka mental reflection, e.g. DN i.117; DN ii.218; SN i.121, SN i.178; SN iii.96; SN v.294; AN iii.374; and cetasoparivitakka, e.g. DN i.134; SN i.71, SN i.103, SN i.139; SN ii.273 SN iii.96, SN iii.103; SN iv.105; SN v.167; AN ii.20.
pari + vitakka, cp. BSk. parivitarka Divy 291
reflected, meditated, thought over MN i.32; SN i.193 ■ nt. ˚ṃ reflection, thinking over Pv-a 123 (˚e with ref. to nūna, i.e. particle of reflection).
pp. of parivitakketi
to consider, reflect, meditate upon Ja iii.277 ■ pp. ˚vitakkita (q.v.).
pari + vitakketi
spread out wide Mil 99.
pari + vitthiṇṇa, Sk. vīstīrṇa, pp., of vi + stṛ;
(adj.) providing, serving food Vism 108.
fr. parisati
to serve (with food = instr.), wait upon present, offer Vin i.240 (bhatṭena); ii.77 (kaṇājakena bilangadutiyena); DN ii.127; Ja i.87, Ja i.90; Ja ii.277; Ja iv.116; Pv ii.84 (= bhojeti Pv-a 107); ii.88 (id. 109); Vism 108 Vism 150 (sūdo bhattāraṃ p.); Vv-a 6; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 78.
pari + viṣ, viveṣti; same use of parivise (inf.) in R. V. x.6110
to think over, consider thoroughly examine, search SN ii.80 sq.; Iti 42 = Snp 975 (ppr dhammaṃ ˚vīmaṃsamāna, cp. Nd i.508); DN-a i.134; Dhp-a iv.117 (attānaṃ).
pari + vīmaṃsati, Desid. of pari + man, cp. vīmaṃsā for mīmāṃsā
(f.) complete inquiry, thorough search or examination MN iii.85; SN iii.331; SN v.68; Snp-a 173. Parivuttha & vuttha;
pari + vīmaṃsā
staying (a period), living (for a time), spending (or having spent) one’s probation (cp. BSk. paryuṣita-parivāsa Avs i.259; Vin iii.186 (tth); SN ii.21 (ṭṭh).
pp. of parivasati
surrounded by (-˚ or instr.) SN i.177; Ja i.152 (miga-gaṇa˚), 203 (devagaṇena); ii.127 (dāsi-gaṇa˚); iii.371 (mahā-jana˚); vi.75; Vv 165 (= samantato p. Vv-a 81); Pv-a 3 (dhutta-jana˚), 62 (parijana˚), 140 (deva-gaṇa˚).
pp. of pari + vṛ;
enveloped, covered Mil 22. Opp. nibbeṭṭhita (q.v.).
pp. of pari + veṣṭ;
(nt.) 1. all that belongs to a castle, a mansion and its constituents Vv 8453 (expld at Vv-a 351 as follows: veṇiyato pekkhitabbato pariveṇaṃ pāsāda-kūtâgāra-ratti-ṭṭhān’ ādisampannaṃ pākāraparikkhittaṃ dvārakoṭṭhaka-yuttaṃ āvāsaṃ); Dhp-a i.260 (pāsāda˚).
2. a cell or private chamber for a bhikkhu (cp. Vin. Texts iii.109, 203) Vin i.49 = Vin ii.210 (p. koṭṭhaka upaṭṭhāna-sālā); i.216 (vihārena vihāraṃ pariveṇena pariveṇaṃ upasankamitvā), 247 (id.); ii.167 (vihāra + ); iii.69, 119 (susammaṭṭhaṃ); iv.52, 252 (˚vāsika); Ja i.126; Mil 15 (˚ṃ sammajjati), 19; Vism 90; Dhp-a ii.179 (˚dvāra); iv.204; Vb-a 13.
etym.?
(f.) = pariveṇa 2; Vin i.80 (anu pariveṇiyaṃ each in their own cell), 106 (id.).
(adj.) waiting, serving up meals Vism 109 ■ f. ˚ikā Thag-a 17.
fr. pari + viṣ
(f.) distribution of food, feeding, serving meals Vin i.229; SN i.172; Snp p.13 (= bhattavissagga Snp-a 140); Mil 247, Mil 249; Dhp-a iv.162; Pv-a 109 (˚ṭṭhāna), 135 (id.).
fr. pari + vis
(adj.) quite conspicuous or clear Vism 162.
pari + vyatta
sewn together, entwined Dhp-a iii.198 (v.l. for saṃsibbita + ).
pari + pp. of saṃsibbati
to go about to (with inf. or dat.), to endeavour, undertake try Vin ii.18 = AN iv.345 (alābhāya); Ja i.173 (vadhāya); ii.394; Pv iv.52 (= payogaṃ karoti Pv-a 259).
pari + sakkati
to suspect, fear, have apprehension Ja iii.210, Ja iii.541; Dhp-a i.81 ■ pp. ˚saṅkita (q.v.). Cp. āsaṅkati.
pari + sankati
(f.) suspicion, misgiving Vin iv.314; DN iii.218. Cp. āsaṅkā.
fr. pari + śaṅk
suspecting or suspected, having apprehensions, fearing Vin ii.243 (diṭṭha-suta˚) AN iii.128; Ja iv.214; Ja v.80; Mil 372; Dhp-a i.223 (āsankita˚) ■ Cp. āsaṅkita & ussaṅkita;.
pp. of parisankati
in ˚patha the region round the path of stakes & sticks, Name of a path leading up to Gijjha-pabbata (see expl;n at Ja iii.485) Ja iii.484.
to induce someone to mention or relate something Ja vi.328.
pari + Caus. of sangaṇhāti
(adj.) very fraudulent or crafty Pp 23 (saṭha + ).
pari + saṭha
to return into the former state, to be restored; aor. ˚saṇṭhāsi Ja iii.341.
pari + saṇṭhāti
(adj,.) very smooth or soft Mil 198.
pari + saṇha
to make flow round, to make overflow, to fill, in phrase kāyaṃ abhisandeti p DN i.75, DN i.214; MN iii.92 sq. etc. expld as “samantato sandeti” at DN-a i.217 ■ pp. parisanna (q.v.).
pari + Caus. of syad
surrounded or filled with water, drenched, well-watered DN i.75; MN iii.94.
pp. of parisandati, cp. parisandeti
to run about, crawl about, to be frightened Dhp 342, Dhp 343 (= saṃsappati bhāyati Dhp-a iv.49).
pari + sṛp
(f.) running about, fear, hesitation, doubt, always combd with āsappanā and only found with ref. to the exegesis of “doubt” (vicikicchā or kankhā) Nd ii.1; Dhs 425 (cp. Dhs trsl.116 and Dhs-a 260); DN-a i.69.
fr. parisappati
(adv.) from all sides Vv-a 236.
pari + samantato
to stroke, to rub from all sides MN ii.120; SN i.178, SN i.194; AN v.65.
pari + sambāhati
to remember, recollect Ja vi.199 (read parissaraṃ).
pari + smr, but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. pari here fr. Prk. paḍi = Sk. prati, thus for pratismarati.
to overcome, conquer, master, get the better of SN iv.112; exegetically in formula sahati p. abhibhavati ajjhottharati etc. Nd i.12, Nd i.361 = Nd ii.420.
pari + sahati
(f.) surrounding people, group collection, company, assembly, association, multitude Var. typical sets of assemblies are found in the Canon viz, eight assemblies (khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚ samaṇa˚, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiṃsa˚, Māra˚, Brahma˚ or the assemblies of nobles, brahmins, householders wanderers, of the angel hosts of the Guardian Kings, of the Great Thirty-Three, of the Māras, and of the Brahmās) DN ii.109; DN iii.260; MN i.72; AN iv.307. four assemblies (the first four of the above) at DN iii.236 Nd i.163; other four, representing the Buddha’s Order (bhikkhu˚, bhikkhunī˚, upāsaka˚, upāsikā˚, or the ass of bhikkhus, nuns, laymen and female devotees; cp same enumn at Divy 299) SN ii.218; AN v.10; cp. Ja i.40 (catu-parisa-majjhe), 85 (id.), 148 (id.) ■ two assemblies (viz. Brahma˚, Māra˚) at DN iii.260; allegorically two groups of people (viz. sāratta-rattā & asāratta-rattā MN ii.160 = AN i.70 sq ■ For var. uses of the word see the foll. passages: Vin ii.188, Vin ii.296 (rājaparisā); iii.12 (Bhagavā mahatiyā parisāya parivuto surrounded by a great multitude); iv.153 (gen. parisāya); MN i.153 (nevāpika˚); ii.160; iii.47; SN i.155 (brahma˚), 162 sarājikā p.), 177; AN i.25 (mahā˚), 70 (uttānā p.), 71 (ariya˚), 242 (tisso p.); ii.19 (˚āya mando), 133, 183, 185 (deva˚) iii.253 (khattiya˚); iv.80, 114; Iti 64 (upāsakā ˚sāsu virocare); Snp 349, Snp 825 sq.; Ja i.151, Ja i.264; Ja vi.224 (omissaka˚); Pv iii.96; Mil 187, Mil 249, Mil 359 (38 rāja-parisā, or divisions of the royal retinue); Pv-a 2, Pv-a 6, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 21, Pv-a 78 and passim; Sdhp 277. saparisa together with the assembly Vin iv.71; adv. ˚ṃ Thag-a 69 ■ Note. The form of parisā as first part of a cpd. is parisa˚ (= *parisad, which laṭter is restored in cpd. parisaggata = *parisad-gata) ■ See also pārisagga.
-antare within the assembly Ja iii.61. -āvacara one who moves in the society, i.e. the Brotherhood of the Bhikkhus AN iv.314; AN v.10. -gata (ggata) having entered a company Snp 397 (= pūga-majjha-gata Snp-a 377); Pp 29. -ññū knowing the assembly AN iii.148; AN iv.113 (+ kālaññū puggalaññū), cp. DN iii.252. -dussana defilement of the Assembly AN ii.225 (opp. ˚sobhaṇā) -pariyanta the outer circle of the congregation Dhp-a i.67 Dhp-a iii.172. -majjhe in the midst of the assembly Ja i.267 Ja ii.352; Pv-a 11. -sārajja being afraid of the a. Mil 196 = Nd ii.470 (so read for parisārajja).
cp. Vedic pariṣad; in R. V. also pariṣad as adj. surrounding, lit. “sitting round,” fr. pari + sad ■ In Pāli the cons. stem has passed into a vocalic ā-stem with the only preservation of cons. loc. sg. parisati Vin iv.285; AN ii.180 (ī); Ja v.61; DN-a i.141 and parisatiṃ MN i.68; AN ii.180 (v.l.); Ja v.332, besides the regular forms parisāyaṃ (loc. sg.) Vin ii.296; AN v.70; and parisāsu (loc. pl.) SN ii.27; Iti 64
to sprinkle all over, to bathe MN i.161; SN i.8 (gattāni); Sdhp 595.
pari + siñcati
sewn round, bordered Vin i.186; Ja v.377.
pp. of pari + sibbati
(adj.) dried up, very dry Ja i.215 (of fields); Mil 302 (of the heart); Pv-a 64 (˚sarīra).
pari + sukkha
dried up, withered Mil 303 (˚hadaya).
pp. of pari + ṡukṣ. Intens. of śuṣ
to become clear or clean, to be purified SN i.214; Snp 183, Snp 184 ■ pp. parisuddha (q.v.).
Pass. of pari + śudh
(adj.) clean, clear, pure, perfect Vin ii.237; MN i.26; MN iii.11; SN ii.199 (˚dhammadesanā); iii.235; v.301, 354; AN iii.125 (˚ñāṇa-dassana) iv.120 sq.; Ja i.265; Vism 2 (accanta˚); Pp 68 (samāhite citte parisuddha); Mil 106; DN-a i.177, DN-a i.219; Snp-a 445 (apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosa-bhāvena p.) Pv-a 44, Pv-a 70. Very freq. combd with pariyodāta (q.v.)- aparisuddha unclean Vin ii.236, MN i.17.
-ājīva (adj.) of pure livelihood DN i.63 (see DA i.181) AN iii.124 (cp. pārisuddhi).
pari + pp. of śudh
(nt.) purity, cleanliness, perfection MN i.36; Mil 103 sq.; Vism 168 ■ As f. pari-suddhatā at Vism 30.
abstr. fr. parisuddha
(f.) purity, purification SN i.169. The usual spelling is pārisuddhi (q.v.).
fr. pari + śudh
to strike, hit, throw down Ja iii.347 (= paharati C.); vi.370, 376 (id. C.).
pari + sumbhati
(nt.) throwing down Ja vi.508 (bhūmiyā p.).
fr. pari + śumbh
to dry quite up, waste quite away Ja ii.5, Ja ii.339, Ja ii.437 ■ Caus. parisoseti (q.v.).
pari + sussati
(nt.) drying up completely, withering Ja v.97.
fr. pari + śuṣ
heated, hatched, made ripe MN i.104 (bījāni); SN iii.153; Vin iii.3; Aiv. 125 (aṇḍāni), 176.
pp. of pari + Caus. of svid, Sk. parisvedita in slightly diff. use
remnant, remainder, rest; only neg. aparisesa (adj.) without remainder, complete, entire MN i.92, MN i.110; AN iii.166 = Pp 64; AN iv.428 (˚ñāṇadassana).
pari + sesa
great grief, severe mourning Pts i.38 (anto˚ in def. of soka).
pari + soka
(nt.) cleansing, purification Mil 215.
fr. parisodheti
cleaned, cleansed, purified Mil 415; Sdhp 414.
pp. of parisodheti
to cleanse, clean, purify MN iii.3, MN iii.35 (aor. ˚sodhesi); Snp 407 (aor. ˚sodhayi) Dhp-a ii.162 (vodapeti + ) ■ Freq. in phrase cittaṃ p to cleanse one’s heart (from = abl.) DN iii.49; SN iv.104; AN ii.211; AN iii.92; Nd i.484; Pp 68 ■ pp. parisodhita (q.v.).
pari + Caus. of śudh
becoming dried up, dryness, withering away SN i.91.
fr. pari + śuṣ
dried up, withered away Sdhp 9.
pp. of parisoseti
to make dry up, to exhaust, make evaporate (water) Mil 389 ■ pp. parisosita (q.v.).
Caus. of parisussati
(˚ssajati?) to embrace, enfold, Ja i.466; Ja vi.156 (˚itvā, v.l. ˚ssajitvā & palisajjitvā).;
pari + svaj
tired, fatigued, exhausted Pv ii.936; Vv-a 305; Sdhp 9, Sdhp 101.
pp. of parissamati
fatigue, toil, exhaustion, Vv-a 289, Vv-a 305 (addhāna˚ from journeying); Pv-a 3, Pv-a 43, Pv-a 113 Pv-a 127.
fr. pari + śram
(m. & nt.) danger, risk, trouble MN i.10 (utu˚); AN iii.388 (id.); Snp 42, Snp 45, Snp 770, Snp 921, Snp 960 sq.; Dhp 328 (˚ayāni sīha-vyaggh’-ādayo pākaṭa-parissaye, rāga-bhaya-dosabhay’ ādayo paṭicchanna-parissaye Dhp-a iv.29); Nd i.12 = Nd ii.420 (where same division into pākaṭa˚ & paṭicchanna˚); Nd i.360, Nd i.365; Ja i.418; Ja ii.405; Ja v.315, Ja v.441 (antarāmagga p. cp. paripantha in same use); Vism 34 (utu˚); Snp-a 88 (expld as paricca sayantī ti p.); Dhp-a iii.199 (˚mocana); Pv-a 216, Dhs-a 330.
fr. pari + ; śri? Etym. doubtful, cp. Weber, Ind. Streifen iii.395 and Andersen, Pāli Reader ii.167, 168
(nt.) a water strainer, filter (one of the requisites of a bhikkhu) Vin i.209 Vin ii.119 and passim; Ja i.198; Ja iii.377; Nd i.226; Dhp-a iii.260 (udaka˚); Vv-a 40, Vv-a 63; Sdhp 593.
fr. pari + Caus. of sru
(adj.-n.) only neg. a˚;: 1. one who has no strainer Vin ii.119; Ja i.198.
2. not to be filtered, i.e. so that there is nothing left to be filtered Ja i.400 (so read for ˚ssavanaka). Or is it “not overflowing”?
fr. parissāvana
strained, filtered Ja i.198 (udaka).
pp. of parissāveti
to strain or filter Ja i.198 (pānīyaṃ); DN-a i.206 (udakaṃ); iii.207 (pānīyaṃ) ■ pp parissāvita (q.v.).
Caus. of pari + sru
overflowing Ja vi.328 (= atipuṇṇattā pagharamāna).
pp. of pari + sru
(˚hata) surrounded by (-˚) encircled; only in phrase sukha-parihaṭa (+ sukhe ṭhita) steeped in good fortune Vin iii.13 (corr. sukhedhita accordingly!); Ja ii.190 (pariharaka v.l. BB); vi.219 (= sukhe ṭhita).
pp. of pariharati
gladdened, very pleased Pv-a 13.
pp. of pari + hṛṣ
(adj. n.) 1. surrounding or surrounded, having on one’s hands Ja ii.190 (sukha˚, v.l. for ˚parihaṭa).
2. an armlet, bracelet Vv-a 167 (v.l. ˚haraṇa; expld as hatthālaṅkāra. ) See also parihāraka.
fr. pari + hṛ;
(nt.) 1. protection, care Vism 500 (gabbha˚); Kp-a 235; DN-a i.207 (kāya˚); Dhp-a ii.179 (kāyassa).
2. keeping up, preservation, keeping in existence; in phrase khandha˚; Dhp-a iii.261, Dhp-a iii.405. Cp foll.
fr. pari + hṛ;
(f.) 1. keeping up, preserving, care, attention, pleasure Pv-a 219 (with v.l. ˚caraṇā for paricārikā Pv iv.12).
2. keeping secret, guarding hiding, deceiving Vb 358 = Pp 23.
= pariharaṇa
1. to take care of, to attend to (acc.), shelter, protect, keep up, preserve, look after Vin i.42 Vin ii.188; DN ii.100 (sanghaṃ); DN ii.14 (gabbhaṃ kucchinā) MN i.124, MN i.459; SN iii.1; AN iii.123; Ja i.52 (kucchiyā), 143 170; Mil 392, Mil 410 (attānaṃ) 418; Snp-a 78; Dhp-a ii.232 (aggiṃ, v.l. paricarati, which is the usual); Pv-a 63 (kucchiyā), 177. Cp. BSk. pariharati in same meaning e.g. Avs i.193, Avs i.205.
2. to carry about DN ii.19 (ankena); MN i.83; Snp 440 (muñjaṃ parihare, 1 sg. pres med.; Snp-a 390 takes it as parihareyya); Mil 418 (āḷakaṃ p.).
3. (intrs.) to move round, go round circle, revolve MN i.328; AN i.277 (candima-suriyā p. cp. AN v.59) = Vism 205; Ja i.395; Ja iv.378; Ja vi.519; DN-a i.85; Pv-a 204.
4. to conceal Vin iii.52 (sunkaṃ). 5. to set out, take up, put forward, propose, only in phrase (Com. style) uttān’ atthāni padāni p. to take up the words in more explicit meaning Snp-a 178, Snp-a 419, Snp-a 437 Snp-a 462 ■ pp. parihaṭa. Pass. parihīrati (q.v.) ■ See also anupariharati.
pari + hṛ;
(nt.) necessity of guarding Vism 98.
abstr. fr. grd. of pariharati
to laugh at, mock, deride Ja i.457. - Caus. parihāseti to make laugh Ja v.297.
pari + has
(nt.) diminution, decrease, wasting away, decay SN ii.206 sq.; AN ii.40 (abhabbo parihānāya) iii.173, 309, 329 sq., 404 sq. (˚dhamma); v.103 (id.) 156 sq.; Iti 71 (˚āya saṃvattati); Dhp 32 (abhabbo p ˚āyo); Pp 12, Pp 14.
fr. pari + hā
(f.) loss, diminution (opp. vuddhi) SN ii.206; SN iv.76, SN iv.79; SN v.143, SN v.173; AN i.15; AN iii.76 sq. AN iv.288; AN v.19 sq., 96, 124 sq.; Ja ii.233; Dhp-a iii.335 Dhp-a iv.185.
fr. pari + hā
(adj.) connected with or causing decay or loss DN ii.75 sq. (˚ā dhammā conditions leading to ruin); AN iv.16 sq.; Vb 381; Vb-a 507 sq- a˚; SN v.85.
parihāna + ya
1. to let fall away, to lose, to waste SN ii.29; Ja iv.214 (vegaṃ); Mil 244 (cittaṃ to lose heart, to despair); Pv-a 78.
2. to set aside, abandon, neglect, omit Vin i.72 (rājakiccaṃ) Ja ii.438; Ja iv.132 (vaṭṭaṃ); v.46; Mil 404 (mūḷakammaṃ) ■ Neg. ger. aparihāpetvā without omission Dhs-a 168; ppr. aparihāpento not slackening or neglecting Vism 122.
Caus. of parihāyati
to decay, dwindle or waste away, come to ruin; to decrease, fall away from, lack; to be inferior, deteriorate Vin i.5; MN iii.46 sq. (opp. abhivaḍḍhati); SN i.120, SN i.137; SN iii.125; SN iv.76 sq.; AN iii.252; Dhp 364; Snp 767; Ja ii.197; Ja iv.108; Nd i.5 (paridhaṃsati + Mil 249 (id.); Pp 12 (read ˚hāyeyya for ˚hāreyya) Snp-a 167 (+ vinassati); PugA 181 (nassati + ); Pv-a 5 Pv-a 76 (v.l.), 125 (˚hāyeyyuṃ) ■ pp. parihīna, Pass. parihiyyati, Caus. parihāpeti (q.v.).
pari + hā
1. attention, care (esp ■ ˚), in cpds. like gabbha˚; care of the foetus Dhp-a i.4; dāraka˚; care of the infant Ja ii.20; kumāra˚; looking after the prince Ja i.148, Ja ii.48; Dhp-a i.346; dup˚; hard to protect Ja i.437; Vism 95 (Majjhimo d. hard to study?
2. honour, privilege, dignity Vin i.71; Ja iv.306 (gārava˚; ).
3. surrounding (lit.), circuit of land Ja iv.461.
4. surrounding (fig.), attack; in cpd visama˚; being attacked by adversities AN ii.87; Nd ii.304ic; Mil 112, Mil 135.
5. avoidance, keeping away from Ja i.186.
-patha “circle road,” i.e. (1) a roundabout way Dhp-a ii.192. (2) encircling game DN i.6 = Vin ii.10 (expld as “bhūmiyaṃ nānāpathaṃ maṇḍalaṃ katvā tattha pariharitabbaṃ pariharantānaṃ kīḷanaṃ” DN-a i.85 trsld as “keeping going over diagrams” Dial. i.10 with remark “a kind of primitive hop-scotch”).
fr. pari + hṛ; cp. pariharati
(adj.-n.) surrounding, encircling; a guard AN ii.180.
fr. pari + hṛ;
keeping, preserving, protecting, sustaining DN i.71 (kāya˚ cīvara, kucchi˚ piṇḍapāta; expld as kāya-pariharaṇa-mattakena & kucchi˚ at DN-a i.207 correct reading accordingly); MN i.180; MN iii.34; Pp 58 Vism 65 (kāya˚, of āvara).
fr. parihāra
(adj.) taking care of, (worth) keeping SN iv.316 (udaka-maṇika).
fr. parihāra
laughter, laughing at, mockery Ja i.116 (˚keḷi), 377; Dhp-a i.244.
fr. pari + has, cp. parihasati
at Ja i.384 is to be read ˚bhāsiṃsu.
to be left, to be deserted, to come to ruin (= dhaṃsati) Ja iii.260.
Pass. of parihāyati, Sk. ˚hīyate
fallen away from, decayed; deficient, wanting; dejected, destitute SN i.121; AN iii.123; Snp 827, Snp 881 (˚pañña); Ja i.112, Ja i.242; Ja iv.200 Nd i.166, Nd i.289; Mil 249, Mil 281 (a˚); Pv-a 220 (= nihīna).
pp. of parihāyati
(adj.) one who has fallen short of, neglected in, done out of (abl. or instr.) DN i.103.
parihīna + ka
to be carried about (or better “taken care of,” according to Bdhgh’s expln Snp-a 253; see also Brethren 226) Snp 205 = Thag 453.
Pass. of pariharati, Sk. parihriyate in development ˚hriyate → *hiriyati → *hiyirati → ˚hīrati
see vi˚.
as para + upa˚ (in parūpakkama, parūpaghāta etc.) see under para.
(adj.) grown, grown long, mostly in phrase ˚kaccha-nakha-loma having long nails, & long hair in the armpit, e.g. at SN i.78; Ud 65; Ja iv.362, Ja iv.371; Ja vi.488; Mil 163 (so read for p ■ kaccha-loma); Sdhp 104. Kern, Toev. ii.139 s. v. points out awkwardness of this phrase and suspects a distortion of kaccha either from kesa or kaca, i.e. with long hairs (of the head), nails & other hair ■ Further in foll. phrases: mukhaṃ p bearded face Ja iv.387; ˚kesa-nakha-loma Ja i.303 ˚kesa-massu with hair & beard grown long Ja iv.159 ˚kaccha with long grass Ja vi.100; ˚massu-dāṭhika having grown a beard and tooth DN-a i.263.
pp. of pa + ruh, cp. BSk. prarūḍha (-śmaśru) Jtm 210
(adv.) see para 2 c.
gone on to, affected with, overcome by (-˚), syn. with abhibhūta (e.g. Pv-a 41, Pv-a 80). Very frequent in combn with terms of suffering, misadventure and passion, e.g. khudā˚, ghamma˚, jighacchā˚ dukkha˚, dosa˚, rāga˚, soka˚, sneha˚, Vin i.5; DN ii.36; MN i.13, MN i.114, MN i.364, MN i.460; MN iii.14, MN iii.92; SN ii.110; SN iii.93 SN iv.28; AN i.147 = Iti 89; AN iii.25, AN iii.96; Snp 449, Snp 736, Snp 818 (= samohita samannāgata pihita Nd i.149) 1092, 1123; Ja iii.157; Pv i.86; ii.24; Mil 248; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 93.
pp. of pareti, more likely para + i than pari + i, although BSk. correspondent is parīta, e.g. śokaparīta Jtm 3194
to set out for, go on to, come to (acc.) SN ii.20; AN v.2, AN v.139 sq., 312; Ja v.401 (= pakkhandati C.). pp pareta (q.v.).
in form = parā + i but more likely pari + i, thus = pariyeti
(adv.) beyond, further, above, more than, upwards of; only ˚-in connection with numerals (cp. Vedic use of paras with acc. of numerals) e.g. paropaññāsa more than 50; DN ii.93; parosataṃ more than 100; Ja v.203, Ja v.497; parosahassaṃ over 1,000; DN ii.16; SN i.192 = Thag 1238; Snp p.106 (= atireka-sahassaṃ Snp-a 450). See also parakkaroti.
cp. Vedic paras; to para
(adj.) beyond the eye, out of sight, invisible, imperceptible Mil 291 ■ abl. parokkhā (adv.) behind one’s back, in the absence of Ja iii.89 (parammukhā C.; opp. sammukhā).
paro + akkha = Vedic parokṣa (paraḥ + akṣa)
to cry out (for) Ja i.166; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 257.
pa + rud
(˚ñāṇa) see under indriya˚. The form is paro + pariya, paro heŕe taking the place of para. Yet it would be more reasonable to explain the word as para apara (upara?) + ya, i.e. that which belongs to this world & the beyond, or everything that comes within the range of the faculties. Cp.; parovara.
(adj.-n.) high & low, far & near; pl. in sense of “all kinds” (cp. uccâvaca). The word is found only in the Sutta Nipāta, viz. Snp 353 (v.l. BB varāvaraṃ, varovaraṃ; expld as “lokuttara-lokiya-vasena su̇ndar âsundaraṃ dūre-santikaṃ vā” Snp-a 350), 475 (˚ā dhammā; v.l. BB paroparā; expld as “parâvarā sundar’ âsundarā, parā vā bāhirā aparā ajjhattikā Snp-a 410), 704 (kāme parovare; v.l. BB paropare expld as sundare ca asundare ca pañca kāmaguṇe Snp-a 493), 1048 (reading paroparāni Nd2; see expln Nd ii.422b; expld as “parāni ca orāni ca, par’ attabhāva-sak’ attabhāv’ ādīni parāni ca orāni ca” Snp-a 590), 1148 (paroparaṃ Nd2; see Nd ii.422a; expld as “hīna-ppaṇītaṃ” Snp-a 607) ■ Note. Already in RV we find para contrasted with avara or upara; para denoting the farther, higher or heavenly sphere, avara or upara the lower or earthly sphere: see e.g. RV i.128, 3; i.164, 12 ■ On paropara see further Wackernagel Altind. Gr. ii.121 d.
para + avara, sometimes through substitution of apa for ava also paropara. We should expect a form *parora as result of contraction: see Nd ii.p. 13
(-˚) a certain weight (or measure), spelt also phala (see phala2), only in cpd. sata˚; a hundred (carat) in weight Thag 97 (of kaṃsa); Ja vi.510 (sataphala kaṃsa = phalasatena katā kañcana-pātī C.). Also in combn catuppala-tippala-dvipala-ekapala-sāṭikā Vism 339.
classical Sk. pala
a species of plant Ja vi.564.
cp. late Sk. pala, flesh, meat
a mason, bricklayer, plasterer MN i.119; SN iii.154 (the reading phala˚ is authentic, see Geiger, P.G. § 40) AN iv.127.
cp. Sk. palagaṇḍa Halāyudha ii.436; BSk. palagaṇḍa Avs i.339; Aṣṭas. Pār. 231; Avad. Kalp ii.113
an onion Vin iv.259.
cp. Epic Sk. palāṇḍu, pala (white) + aṇḍu (= aṇḍa? egg)
taken over, “had,” overcome, deceived MN i.511 (nikata vañcita p. where v.l. and id p. SN iv.307 however reads paluddha ); Ja iii.260 (dava˚ abhibhūta C.).
pp. of pa + labh
to talk nonsense Ja ii.322. Cp. vi˚.
pa + lapati
to hang down Thag-a 210; Sdhp 110 ■ pp. palambita (q.v.). See also abhi˚.
pa + lambati
hanging down Thig 256, Thig 259; Thag-a 211.
pp. of palambati
to deceive DN i.50, cp. DN-a i.151.
pa + lambheti
led astray SN iv.197 (v.l. ˚lāḷita). At AN iii.5 we read palāḷita, in phrase kāmesu p. (“sporting in pleasures”? Or should we read palolita?).
pa + laḷita
to float, swim Vin iv.112; Dhp 334; Thag 399; Ja iii.190.
Vedic plavati, plu
a rhinoceros Ja vi.277 (v.l. phalasata expld as “khagga-miga,” with gloss “balasata”); as phalasata at Ja vi.454 (expld as phalasata-camma C.) See palāsata.
according to Trenckner, Notes p. 59, possibly fr. Sk. parasvant
to lick Pv iii.52 = Pv-a 198.
pa + lahati
run away Ja vi.369; Vism 326; Vv-a 100; Dhp-a ii.21.
contracted form of palāyita, pp. of palāyati, cp. Prk. palāa (= *palāta) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 567
(nt.) running away, escape Ja i.72.
abstr. fr. palāta
chaff of corn, pollard AN iv.169 (yava˚); Ja i.467, Ja i.468; Ja iv.34; Snp-a 165 (in exegesis of palāpa2 v.l. BB palāsa), 312 (id.); Ja iv.34, Ja iv.35 (perhaps better to read kula-palāso & palāsa-bhūta for palāpa).;
Vedic palāva, cp. Lat. palea, Russ pelëva; see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 396, where pralāva is to be corr. to palāva
prattling, prattle, nonsense; adj talking idly, chaffing, idle, void MN iii.80 (a˚); SN i.166 (not palapaṃ), 192 = Thag 1237; AN iv.169 (samaṇa in allegory with yava˚ of palāpa1); Snp 89 (māyāvin asaṃyata palāpa = palāpa-sadisattā Snp-a 165), 282; Mil 414 (here also expld as palāpa1 by Snp-a 312) Vb-a 104. In phrase tuccha palāpa empty and void at Mil 5, Mil 10.
Vedic pralāpa, pa + lap; taken by P. Com. as identical with palāpa1, their example followed by Trenckner, Notes 63, cp. also Miln. trsl. ii.363 “chaff as frivolous talk”
in apalāpin “not neglectful” see palāsin.
to cause to run away, to put to flight, drive away Ja ii.433; Dhp-a i.164, Dhp-a i.192 Dhp-a iii.206.
Caus. of palāyati
to prattle, talk Ja i.73, Ja i.195.
Caus. of pa + lap, cp. palāpa to which it may be referred as Denom.
to run (away) Vin iii.145 (ubbijjati uttasati p.); AN ii.33 (yena vā tena vā palayanti); Snp 120; Ja ii.10; Dhp-a i.193; Pv-a 253 Pv-a 284 (= dhāvati) ■ ppr. palāyanto SN i.209 = Thig 248 = Pv ii.717 = Ne 131 = Dhp-a iv.21; aor. palāyi SN i.219; Ja i.208; Ja ii.209, Ja ii.219, Ja ii.257; Ja iv.420; Dhp-a iii.208; DN-a i.142; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 274; ger. palāyitvā Ja i.174; Pv-a 154; inf palāyituṃ Ja i.202; Ja vi.420 ■ Contracted forms are pres. paleti (see also the analogy-form pāleti under pāleti, to guard) DN i.54 (spelt phaleti, expld DN-a i.165 by gacchati); Snp 1074, Snp 1144 (= vajati gacchati Nd ii.423); Dhp 49; Nd i.172; Ja v.173, Ja v.241; Vv 8436 (= gacchati Vv-a 345); Pv i.111 (gacchati Pv-a 56); aor. palittha Ja v.255; fut. palehiti Thag 307; imper. palehi Snp 831 (= gaccha Snp-a 542)-pp. palāta & palāyita; Caus palāpeti1 (q.v.).
cp. Vedic palāyati, palāy
(nt.) running away Dhp-a i.164. See also pālana.
fr. palāy
(adj.) running away Ja ii.210 (˚ṃ karoti to put to flight).
fr. palāy
(adj.) running away, taking to flight SN i.221 = SN i.223 ■ Usually neg. apalāyin SN i.185, and in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin SN i.99; Thag 864; Ja iv.296 and passim. See apalāyin & apalāsin;.
fr. palāy
(m. & nt.) straw Ja i.488; Dhp-a i.69.
-channaka a roof of thatch Thag 208. -piṇḍa a bundle of straw Vism 257 = Kp-a 56. -pīṭhaka “straw foot-stool,” a kind of punishment or torture MN i.87; AN ii.122 = Mil 197 (see Mil trsl. i.277 “Straw Seat, i.e. being so beaten with clubs, that the bones are broken, and the body becomes like a heap of straw) Nd i.154; Nd ii.604; Ja v.273. -puñja a heap of straw DN i.71; MN iii.3; AN i.241; AN ii.210; Pp 68; Vb-a 367 -puñjaka same as puñja Mil 342.
cp. Ved. & Epic Sk. palāla
see palaḷita.
(m. & nt.) 1. the tree Butea frondosa or Judas tree Ja iii.23 (in Palāsa Jātaka).
2. a leaf; collectively (nt.) foliage, pl. (nt.) leaves SN ii.178; Ja i.120 (nt.); iii.210, 344; Pv-a 63 (˚antare; so read for pās’ antare), 113 (ghana˚), 191 (sāli˚). puppha˚ blossoms & leaves Dhp-a i.75; sākhā˚; branches & leaves MN i.111; Ja i.164; Mil 254; paṇḍu˚; a sear leaf Vin i.96; Vin iii.47; Vin iv.217; bahala˚; (adj.) thick with leaves Ja i.57 ■ palāsāni (pl.) leaves Ja iii.185 (= palāsapaṇṇāni C.); Pv-a 192 (= bhūsāni).
Vedic palāśa
& (more commonly); Paḷāsa unmercifulness, malice, spite. Its nearest synonym is yuga-ggāha (so Vb 357; Pp 18, where yuddhaggāha is read; Ja iii.259; Vv-a 71); it is often combd with macchera (Vv 155) and makkha (Mil 289). MN i.15, MN i.36, MN i.488; AN i.79; Ja ii.198; Vb 357; Pp 18 (+ paḷāsāyanā, etc.) ■ apaḷāsa mercifulness MN i.44.
according to Trenckner, Notes 83, from ras, but BSk. pradāśa points to pa dāśa = dāsa “enemy” this form evidently a Sanskritisation
a rhinoceros Ja v.206 Ja v.408; Ja vi.277.
so read for palasata & palasada; cp. Vedic parasvant given by BR. in meaning “a certain large animal, perhaps the wild ass”
(adj.) 1. in cpd. paṇḍu˚; one who lives by eating withered leaves DN-a i.270, DN-a i.271.
2. in cpd. eka˚; (upāhanā) (a shoe) with one lining (i.e. of leaves) Vin i.185 (= eka paṭala Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts ii.13).
fr. palāsa1
(paḷāsin) (adj.) spiteful, unmerciful, malicious MN i.43 sq., 96; AN iii.111; combd with makkhin at Vin ii.89 (cp. Vin Texts iii.38); Ja iii.259 apaḷāsin DN iii.47 (amakkhin + ); MN i.43; AN iii.111 Pp 22; see also separately.
fr. palāsa2
round, around (= pari) only as prefix in cpds (q.v.). Often we find both pari˚ & pali˚ in the same word.;
a variant of pari˚, to be referred to the Māgadhī dialect in which it is found most frequently, esp. in the older language, see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 257; Geiger P.Gr. § 44
to bend oneself over, to go crooked MN i.387.
pali + kujjati
covered, enveloped, smeared with Ja ii.92 (lohita˚).
a var. of paliguṇṭhita, q.v. & cp. Geiger,; P.Gr. § 391
a bar Ja vi.276 (with palighā as gloss).
a variant of paligha on kh for gh see Geiger, P.Gr. § 392
to dig up, root out SN i.123; SN ii.88 (so read for paliṃ˚ & phali˚) = AN i.204 ger. palikhañña Snp 968 (= uddharitvā Nd i.490); palikhāya SN i.123 (cp. KS 320); & palikhaṇitvā SN ii.88; Snp-a 573 ■ pp. palikhata (q.v.).
pali + khaṇ, cp. parikhā
dug round or out SN iv.83 (so read with v.l. for T. palikhita).
pp. of palikhaṇati
to scratch, in phrase oṭṭhaṃ p. to bite one’s lip Ja v.434 = Dhp-a iv.197.
pa + likh
to bite all round, to gnaw or peck off MN i.364 (kukkuro aṭṭhikankalaṃ p.).
pali + khādati
to be greedy Nd ii.77 (abhigijjhati + ).
pali + gijjhati
entangled, covered enveloped Snp 131 (mohena; v.l. BB ˚kuṇṭhita) Ja ii.150 = Dhp-a i.144 (v.l. ˚kuṇṭh˚); iv.56; Mil ii. Expld by pariyonaddha Ja ii.150, by paṭicchādita Ja iv.56. Cp. pāliguṇṭhima.
pali + guṇṭhita, variant palikuṇṭhita, as kuṇṭhita & guṇḍhita are found
greed, conceit, selfishness AN i.66; Nd ii.taṇhā ii.(gedha + ); Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136.
pali + gedha but acc. to Geiger, P.Gr. § 10 = parigṛddha
(adj.) conceited, greedy selfish AN iii.265.
fr. paligedha, but Geiger, P.Gr. § 10 takes it as *parigṛddhin, cp. giddhin
1. a cross-bar Vin ii.154; Thig 263 (vaṭṭa˚ = parighadaṇḍa Thag-a 211); Ja ii.95; Ja vi.276.
2. an obstacle hindrance DN ii.254 = SN i.27 ■ (adj) (-˚) in two phrases okkhitta˚; with cross-bars erected or put up DN i.105 (= ṭhapita˚ DN-a i.274), opp. ukkhitta˚; with cross-bars (i.e. obstacles) withdrawn or removed MN i.139 = AN iii.84 = Nd ii.284 C.; Snp 622 (= avijjā-palighassa ukkhittattā Snp-a 467); cp. parikhā.
-parivattika turning round of the bar the “Bar Turn,” a kind of punishment or torture (consisting in “a spike being driven from ear to ear he is pinned to the ground” Hardy, E.M. 32, cp. Mil trsl. i.277; MN i.87 = AN i.47 = AN ii.122 = Nd i.154 = Nd ii.604 B (reads palingha, v.l. paligha) = Mil 197.
pari + gha of (g)han, cp. P. & Sk. parigha
(adj.) grey, in cpd. ˚kesa with grey (i.e. white hair MN i.88 (f. ˚kesī); AN i.138; Ja i.59, Ja i.79; abs. only at Ja vi.524. The spelling phalita also occurs (e.g. Pv-a 153) ■ Der. pālicca.
cp. Vedic palita; Gr. πελιτνός, πελιός black-grey; Lith. pilkas grey; Ags. fealu = Ohg. falo E. fallow, Ger. fahl; also Sk. pāṇḍu whitish; P. paṇḍu pāṭala pink
smeared Thig 467 (= upalitta Thag-a 284).
pp. of palippati
fr. sloppiness, mud, marsh MN i.45; Thag 89; Thag 2, Thag 291 (= panka Thag-a 224); Ja iii.241 (read palipo cp. C. = mahākaddamo ibid.) = iv.480.
pa + lip
danger, obstacle (or is it “mud, mire” = palipa?) AN iv.290; Snp 34 = Snp 638 (rāga˚ Snp-a 469) = Dhp 414 (= rāga˚ Dhp-a iv.194).
for paripatha = ˚pantha (q.v.), the bases path˚ & panth˚ frequently interchanging. Trenckner (;Notes 80) derives it fr. pa + lip
see pāli˚.
fallen, got or sunk into (-˚ or loc.) Vin i.301 (muttakarīse); DN ii.24 (id.); MN i.45 (palipa˚) = Nd ii.651 B; MN i.88; Ja vi.8 Vism 49 (muttakarīse).
for paripanna, pp. of paripajjati
to be smeared; to stick, to adhere to Pv iv.15 (˚amāna read for palimpamāna) ■ pp. palitta (q.v.).
Med ■ Pass. of pa + lip; often spelt palimpati
see palibuddhati.
(nt.) obstruction Dhp-a iii.258.
fr. palibujjhati
obstructed, hindered, stopped; being kept back or delayed, tarrying Ja ii.417 Nd ii.107 (paliveṭhita + ); Mil 388 (ākāso a˚) 404; Dhp-a iii.198. Often in phrase lagga laggita p. Nd ii.88 Nd ii.107, Nd ii.332, Nd ii.596, Nd ii.597, Nd ii.657.
pp. of palibujjhati
1. to obstruct refuse, keep back, hinder, withhold Vin ii.166; Vin iv.42 Vin iv.131; Ja i.217 (cp. paṭibāhati ibid.); iii.138 (aor. ˚buddhi.) iv.159; Mil 263.
2. to delay Mil 404 (or should we read ˚bujjhati i.e. sticks, tarries, is prevented?). Pass. palibujjhati [this word occurs only in Commentary style & late works. In the Niddesa the nearest synonym is; lag, as seen from the freq. combn palibuddha + lagga, palibodha + laggana: see Nd ii.p. 188 under nissita] to be obstructed or hindered, to be kept by (instr. or loc.) to stick or adhere to, to trouble about attend to Nd ii.74, Nd ii.77 (paligijjhati + ), 88, 107, 597, 657; Mil 263 ■ pp. palibuddha (q.v.).
the etym. offered by Andersen, Pāli Reader s. v. palibuddha, viz. dissimilation for pari + ruddhati (rudh) is most plausible, other explns like Trenckner’s (Notes 66 for pari + bādh, med-pass. bajjhati = *bādhyate, seemingly confirmed by v.l. Nd ii.74 & 77 ˚bajjhati for ˚bujjhati) and Kern’s (;Toev. s. v. = Ogh firbiotan, Ger. verbieten) are semantically not satisfactory Cp. avaruddhati & avaruddha;
obstruction, hindrance, obstacle, impediment, drawback Ja i.148; Ja iii.241 (a non-obstruction), 381 (id.); Ne 80; also in var. phrases viz. kāma˚ Nd ii.374 (+ kāmapariḷāha); kula˚ cīvara Nd ii.68, cp. Mil 388 (kule p.); ghar’āvāsa˚, putta-dāro etc. Nd i.136; Nd ii.172a B, 205, cp. Ja ii.95 (ghara˚); Kp-a 39 (enumd as set of dasa palibodhā which are also given and expld in detail at Vism 90 sq.); cp. Dhs-a 168, and in combn laggana bandhana p. Nd ii.332, Nd ii.620. Two palibodhas are referred to at Vin i.265, viz. āvāsa˚ and cīvara˚ (cp. Vin. Texts ii.157) and sixteen at Mil 11. Cp. Cpd. 53 ■ The minor obstacles (to the practice of kammaṭṭhāna) are described as khuddaka˚ at Vism 122 & referred to at Dhs-a 168 ■ See also sam˚.;
see palibuddhati
(nt.) breaking up Nd ii.576 (sambhañjana + ; v.l. pari˚). See also sam˚. The spelling phali˚; occurs at Thag-a 288.
pari + bhañjana
polished Ja v.4. Cp. parimaṭṭha. See also sam˚.
pp. of pari + mṛj
(adj. nt.) wrapping, surrounding, encircling, encumbrance Ja iv.436; Pp 34; Vism 353 (˚camma); Dhs-a 366.
fr. pari + veṣṭ;
wrapped round, entwined, encircled, fettered Nd ii.107 (˚veṭṭh˚, combd with laggita & palibuddha); Ja iv.436; Ja vi.89. Cp. sam˚.
pp. of paliveṭheti
to wrap up, cover, entwine, encircle MN i.134; Ja i.192; Ja ii.95; Dhp-a i.269; Dhs-a 366 ■ Pass. paliveṭhīyati Mil 74 ■ pp. paliveṭhita (q.v.). See also sam˚.
pari + veṣṭ;
to loosen, make loose SN ii.89 (mūlāni).
pari + sṛj
to embrace DN ii.266; Ja v.158 (aor. palissaji = ālingi C). 204, 215; vi.325.
pari + svaj
flowing over Ja vi.328.
pp. of pari + sru
broken up, crushed, crumbled Bv ii.24; Mil 217.
pp. of palujjati, Sk. *prarugṇa
to break (intrs.) to fall down, crumble, to be dissolved Vin ii.284; DN ii.181; MN i.488; SN ii.218; SN iii.137; SN iv.52 = Nd ii.550 (in exegesis of “loka”); Mil 8; Vism 416 ■ pp. palugga (q.v.) Cp. BSk. pralujyati Mvu ii.370.
Pass. of palujati = pa + ruj
(nt.) breaking up, destruction Snp-a 506.
fr. palujjati
seduced, enticed SN iv.307 (where id. p. MN i.511 reads paladdha); Ja i.158; Ja vi.255 Ja vi.262. See also palobheti & palobhita;.
pp. of pa + lubh
to rob, plunder, deprive of AN i.48.
pa + lup
see palāyati.
smearing; plaster, mortar Thig 270; Thag-a 213.
fr. pa + lip
(nt.) smearing, anointing; adj. (-˚) smeared or coated with MN i.429 (gāḷha˚ thickly smeared).
fr. pa + lip
breaking off or in two, dissolution, decay Vin ii.284; MN i.435 = Mil 418 (in formula aniccato dukkhato rogato etc., with freq.v.l. paralokato; cp AN iv.423; Nd ii.214; Pts ii.238); SN iii.167 (id.) iv.53 v. 163.
fr. pa + *luj = ruj, thus standing for *paloga, cp. roga
(adj.) destined for decay or destruction SN iv.205 = Snp 739 (acc. palokinaṃ = jarā-maraṇehi palujjana-dhamma Snp-a 506); Thig 101 (acc. pl palokine, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 952).
fr. paloka
desire, greed Pv-a 265.
fr. pa + lubh
(nt.) = palobha Ja i.196, Ja i.210; Ja ii.183; Mil 286.
desired Pv-a 154.
pp. of palobheti
to desire, to be greedy Snp 703; Ja i.79, Ja i.157, Ja i.298; Ja vi.215; Snp-a 492; Dhp-a i.123 Dhp-a i.125; Pv-a 55 ■ pp. palobhita (q.v.).
Caus. of pa + lubh
1. sitting cross-legged, in instr.; pallaṅkena upon the hams SN i.124, SN i.144; and in phrase pallaṅkaṃ ābhujati “to bend (the legs) in crosswise” DN i.71; MN i.56; AN iii.320; Ja i.17, Ja i.71; Pts i.176; Pp 68; Mil 289; Dhp-a ii.201 ■ This phrase is expld at Vism 271 and Vb-a 368 as “samantato ūru-baddh’ āsanaṃ bandhati.”
2. a divan, sofa, couch Vin ii.163, Vin ii.170 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.209, which is to be corrected after Dial. i.12); DN i.7; SN i.95; Ja i.268; Ja iv.396; Ja v.161; Vv 311; Pv ii.127; iii.32; Dhp-a i.19; Pv-a 189, Pv-a 219.
pary + anka, cp. Class Sk. palyanka & Māgadhī paliyanka
(pallate), is guarded or kept, contracted (poetical) form of pālayate (so Cy.) Ja v.242.
the posture of sitting or squatting or lolling Ja i.163 (here in expln of tipallattha: pallatthaṃ vuccati sayanaṃ, ubhohi passehi ujukam eva ca go-nisinnaka-vasenā ti tīh’ākārehi pallatthaṃ etc.; see under ti˚). Cp. ti˚, vi˚.
Sk. *paryasta, pari + pp. of as to throw, cp. Prk pallattha Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 285
(f.) same meaning as pallattha Vin ii.213; Vin iii.162 (cp. Vin. Texts i.62; iii.141); Vism 79 (dussa˚).
fr. pallattha
perverse Ja v.79.
doubtful, perhaps we should read paliyattha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.
(nt.) 1. marshy ground MN i.117; SN iii.108 sq.
2. a small pond or lake Vin i.230; DN ii.89; Ja ii.129; Ja v.346.
cp. Class Sk. palvala = Lat. palus; Ohg. felawa = Ger. felber willow; Lith. pélkè moor; BSk. also palvala, e.g. Divy 56
(nt.) a sprout Ja i.250; Ja ii.161. See also phallava.
cp. Class Sk. pallaka
(adj.) having sprouts, burgeoning, budding Mil 151; Vv-a 288 (sa˚ full of sprouts).
fr. pallava
see vi˚.
security, confidence DN i.96; MN i.17; cp. DN-a i.266 “loma-haṃsa-mattam pi ‘ssa na bhavissati.”
a contraction of pannaloma, see J.P.T.S. 1889, 206
only in 1st sq. pavakkhāmi “I will declare or explain” Snp 701, Snp 963 = Snp 1050 (cp Nd i.482 & Nd;2 under brūmi).
fut. of pa + vac
see anu˚, & cp.; pavecchati.
Sk. prayacchati
to wander forth, go about, perambulate; ppr. pavajamāna SN i.42 (but may be pavajjamāna “being predicated” in play of word with act pavadanto in same verse).
pa + vraj
to sound forth to be played (of music) Ja i.64 (pavajjayiṃsu, 3rd pl. aor.); Vv-a 96 (pavajjamāna ppr. med.).
Pass. of pavadati
(nt.) sounding, playing of music Vv-a 210.
fr. pavajjati, Pass. of pavadati
grown up, increased, big, strong Ja v.340 (˚kāya of huge stature; so read for pavaddha˚; expld as vaḍḍhita-kāya).
pp. of pavaḍḍhati
to grow up, to increase MN i.7; SN ii.84, SN ii.92; Snp 306 (3rd sg. praet. ˚atha); Dhp 282, Dhp 335 Dhp 349; Pp 64; Pv-a 8 (puññaṃ) ■ pp. pavaḍḍha pavuddha;.
pa + vṛdh
to blow forth, to yield a scent Thag 528 (= gandhaṃ vissajjati C.). See pavāti.
pa + vā
to hurry on, to rush Vv-a 42 (but better read with v.l. patati as syName of gacchati).
of plu, cp. Vedic plavate to swim & Epic Sk.; pravate to jump
(adj.) 1. (adj.) happening, going on, procedure, resulting Thig 220 (assu ca pavattaṃ taken by Mrs. Rh. D. as “tears shed”); Thag-a 179; Pv-a 35, Pv-a 83 (gāthāyo), 120, esp. with ref. to natural products as “that which comes,” i.e. normal, natural raw; ˚phala ready or natural, wild fruit (gained without exertion of picking), in cpds. ˚phalika Snp-a 295 sq. ˚bhojana (adj.) Ja i.6; Ja iii.365; Vism 422, and, ˚bhojin one who lives on wild fruit (a certain class of ascetics tāpasā) DN i.101; MN i.78, MN i.343; AN i.241; AN ii.206; cp DN-a i.269 sq. & Snp-a 295, Snp-a 296.; ˚maṃsa fresh or raw meat (flesh) Vin i.217 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.81).
2. (nt. “that which goes on,” i.e. the circle or whirl of existence Mil 197, Mil 326 (cp. Mil trsln ii.200 “starting afresh in innumerable births,” quot. fr. C.), opp appavatta freedom from Saṃsāra, i.e. Nibbāna ibid
3. founded on, dealing with, relating to, being in SN iv.115 (kuraraghare p. pabbata); DN-a i.92 (ādinaya˚), 217 (˚pīti-sukha being in a state of happiness).
pp. of pavattati
(intrs.) 1. to move on, go forward, proceed Pv i.57; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 131; of water: to flow SN ii.31; Ja ii.104; Pv-a 143, Pv-a 154, Pv-a 198.
2. to exist to be, continue in existence Ja i.64; Pv-a 130 (opp ucchijjati).
3. to result, to go on Pv-a 45 (phalaṃ) 60 (vippaṭisār’ aggi) ■ pp. pavatta; Caus. pavatteti (q.v.).
pa + vattati, vṛt
(adj. nt.) 1. moving forward, doing good, beneficial, useful; f. ˚i MN i.214; Pp 35 (spelt pavattinī in T. as well as Pp A 218).
2. execution performance, carrying out Mil 277 (āṇā,˚ cp pavatti).
fr. pavattati
one who sets into motion or keeps up DN-a i.273 (see foll.).
n. ag. to pavatteti
one who keeps up or keeps going, one who hands on (the tradition) an expounder, teacher DN i.104 (mantānaṃ p. = pavattayitar DN-a i.273); SN iv.94; Dhp 76 (nidhīnaṃ p. = ācikkhitar Dhp-a ii.107).
n. ag. of either pa + vac or pa + vṛt, the latter more probable considering similar use of parivatteti The P. commentators take it as either
(nt.) making continue, keeping going, preservation upkeep Vism 32 (T. ˚attha).
fr. Caus. II. of pavatteti = pavattāpeti
(f.) 1. manifestation, wielding, execution, giving, in āṇā˚; royal authority Ja iii.504 Ja iv.145; Thag-a 283.
2. happening, incident, news Ja i.125, Ja i.150; Ja ii.416; Vism 91; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 17, Pv-a 29, Pv-a 35 Pv-a 92, Pv-a 152, Pv-a 242, etc.; Dhp-a i.80 (v.l. pavutti). Cp pavutti.
fr. pa + vṛt
set going, inaugurated, established Vin i.11 (dhammacakka); MN iii.29, MN iii.77; SN i.191; Snp 556, Snp 557 (dhammacakka); Pv-a 67 (id.) 140 (sangīti); Snp-a 454.
pp. of pavatteti
(adj.) 1. advancing, moving forward, proceeding, effective, beneficial; only in phrase dhammā pavattino AN i.279; DN-a i.4 = Pv-a 2; and in suppavattin (good-flowing, i.e. well-recited?) AN iv.140 (of pātimokkha; trsld as “thoroughly mastered J.P.T.S. 1909, 199, v.71 (id.).
2. going on, procedure (in f. ˚inī) Vin ii.271 sq., 277.
fr. pa + vṛt
(trs.) 1. to send forth, set going Vin i.87 (assūni); SN ii.282 (id.) Ja i.147 (selagulaṃ pavaṭṭ˚); esp. in phrase dhammacakkaṃ p. to inaugurate the reign of righteousness Vin i.8, Vin i.11; MN i.171; SN iii.86; Snp 693; Mil 20, Mil 343; Vv-a 165; Pv-a 21, etc.
2. to cause, produce, make arise Ja ii.102 (mah’ oghaṃ); Mil 219.
3. to give forth bestow, give (dānaṃ a gift) Vin iv.5 (spelt ṭṭ); Pv-a 19 Pv-a 123, Pv-a 139.
4. to continue, keep on, practise, go on with Dhp-a i.257; Pv-a 29 (attabhāvaṃ), 42 (kammante)
5. to move about, behave, linger Dhp-a i.14 (ṭṭ). 6. to display, execute, wield, enforce Mil 189 (āṇaṃ cp. āṇāpavatti) ■ pp. pavattita (q.v.).
Caus. of pavattati
to speak out, speak to, talk, dispute; ppr. pavadanto SN i.42 (trsl. “predicate”); Nd i.293-aor. pāvādi Thag-a 71 ■ Cp. pāvadati.
pa + vad
(nt.) winnowing of grain Mil 201 (read pavanena ṭṭhāyiko who earned his living by winnowing gṛain).
cp. Sk. pavana & pāvana, of; pū
(nt.) side of a mountain, declivity DN ii.254; MN i.117; SN i.26; SN ii.95 SN ii.105; Thag 1092; Ja i.28; Ja ii.180; Ja vi.513; Cp i.15, 101iii.131; Mil 91, Mil 198 sq., 364, 408; Vism 345. Cp Pavananagara Snp-a 583 (v.l. BB for Tumbavanagara = Vanasavhaya). Note. Kern, Toev. s. v defends Müller’s (after Subhūti) interpretation as “wood, woodland,” and compares BSk. pavana Mvu ii.272, Mvu ii.382.
cp. Vedic pravaṇa; not with Müller, P.Gr. 24 = upavana; perhaps = Lat. pronus “prone”
at Vin ii.136 in cpd. pavan-anta refers to the end of the girdle (kāyabandhana), where it is tied into a loop or knot. Bdhgh on p. 319 (on C.V. v.29, 2 expls it by pās’ anta.
to sow out Thig 112.
pa + vap
(adv.) carrying on, pressing, urgently, constantly, always repeated as pavayha pavayha MN iii.118 = Dhp-a ii.108; MN i.442, MN i.444.
ger. of pavahati
(adj.) most excellent, noble, distinguished SN iii.264; Snp 83, Snp 646, Snp 698 (muni˚); Dhp 422 Pp 69; Mil 246; Pv-a 2 (˚dhamma-cakka), 67 (id.) 39 (˚buddh’āsana); Sdhp 421.
pa + vara
to “live forth,” i.e. to be away from home, to dwell abroad Snp 899; Ja ii.123 (= pavasaṃ gacchati); v.91 ■ pp. pavuttha (q.v.). Cp. vi˚.
pa + vas
to “rain forth,” to begin to rain, shed rain SN i.100; Snp 18 sq. (imper. pavassa), 353 (v.l.) Ja vi.500 (“cry”), 587 (aor. pāvassi) ■ pp. pavaṭṭha pavuṭṭha;: see abhi˚.
pa + vṛṣ
(nt.) beginning to rain, raining Mil 120.
fr. pa + vṛṣ
(nt.) a draught of air, breeze Vin ii.79 (opp. nivāta).
pa + vāta, cp. Vedic pravāta
to diffuse a scent Dhp 54; Thag 528; Ja v.63 (disā bhāti p. ca). See also pavāyati.
pa + vā
talk, disputation, discussion DN i.26, DN i.162; MN i.63; Snp 538.
pa + vad, cp. Epic Sk. pravāda talk, saying
(adj.) 1. belonging to a discussion, intended for disputation DN i.178 (samaya˚ “debating hall”).
2. fond of discussing Mil 4 (bhassa˚ “fond of wordy disputation”). Cp. pavādiya.
fr. pavāda
(adj.) belonging to a disputation, disputing, arguing, talking Snp 885 (n. pl ˚āse, taken by Nd i.293 as pavadanti, by Snp-a 555 as vādino).
fr. pavāda, cp. pavādaka
to blow forth, to permeate (of a scent), to diffuse Ja i.18 (dibba-gandho p.); Vism 58 (dasa disā sīla-gandho p.). Cp. pavāti.
pa + vā
(f.) 1. the Pavāraṇā, a ceremony at the termination of the Vassa Vin i.155, Vin i.160 (where 2 kinds cātuddasikā & pannarasikā),; ii.32. 167; DN ii.220; SN i.190. pavāraṇaṃ ṭhapeti to fix or determine the (date of) P. Vin ii.32, Vin ii.276. Later two kinds of this ceremony (festival) are distinguished, viz. mahā˚; the great P. and ˚saṅgaha, an abridged P. (see DA i.241; Ja i.29, Ja i.82, Ja i.193 (mahā˚); Vism 391 (id.); Snp-a 57 (id.) Vv-a 67 (id.); Pv-a 140 (id.);
2. satisfaction Vism 71.
pa + vṛ; cp. BSk. pravāraṇā Divy 91, Divy 93; whereas Epic Sk. pravāraṇa, nt., only in sense of “satisfaction”
1. satisfied MN i.12 (+ paripuṇṇa pariyosita); Mil 231; Vism 71.
2. having come to the end of the rainy season Vin i.175 ■ Freq in formula bhuttāvin pavārita having eaten & being satisfied Vin i.213 (cp. Vin. Texts i.39); ii.300; iv.82; Pv-a 23.
pp. of pavāreti
1. to invite, offer, present, satisfy SN i.190; AN iv.79; Ja iii.352.
2. to celebrate the Pavāraṇā (i.e. to come to the end of the Vassa) Vin i.160 sq.; Vin ii.255; Dhp-a i.87; Ja i.29, Ja i.215; Ja iv.243 (vuttha-vassa p.); Vism 90; Snp-a 57 ■ pp. pavārita (q.v.) See also sam˚. Pavala & Pavala;
Caus. of pa + vṛ; cp. BSk. pravārayati Divy 116, Divy 283, etc.
(m. & nt.) 1. coral Ja i.394 (˚ratta-kambala) ii.88; iv.142; Mil 267 (with other jewels), 380 (id.) Snp-a 117; Vv-a 112 (˚ratana).
2. a sprout, young branch, shoot Ja iii.389, Ja iii.395 (kāḷa-valli˚); v.207; Ne 14 (˚ankura); Snp-a 91 (id.).
cp. Class Sk. prabāla, pravāḍa & pravāla
1. carried away (?), turned away, distracted, dismissed SN iii.91 (bhikkhu-sangho p.).
2. drawn forth, pulled out taken out DN i.77 = Pts ii.211 = Vism 406 (muñjamhā isīkā p.); Ja vi.67 (muñjā v’isikā p.).
apparently pp. of pavahati (pavāheti), but in reality pp. of pa + bṛh1, corresp. to Sk. prabṛdha (pravṛdha), cp. abbūlha & ubbahati (ud + ; bṛh1 ), but cp also ubbāḷha which is pp. of ud + bādh. At DN i.77 (where v.l. pabbāḷha = pabūḷha, unexpld by Bdhgh it is synonymous with uddharati = ubbahati
sojourning abroad, being away from home Ja ii.123 Ja v.434; Ja vi.150; Mil 314 ■ Cp. vi˚.
fr. pa + vas, cp. Vedic pravāsa in same meaning
1. (perhaps we should read pavārita?) given as present, honoured Ja v.377 (= pesita C.).
2. (so perhaps to be read for pavūsita T.) scented, permeated with scent Vv-a 237 (v.l. padhūpita preferable).
pp. of pavāseti
(adj.) living abroad or from home, in cira˚; long absent Dhp 219 (= cirappavuttha Dhp-a iii.293).
fr. pavāsa
(adj.) carrying or driving away Thag 758.
fr. pa + vah
1. to cause to be carried away, to remove; freq. with ref. to water: to wash away cleanse MN i.39; SN i.79, SN i.183 (pāpakammaṃ nahānena) ii.88; Thag 349; Ja i.24; Ja iii.176, Ja iii.225, Ja iii.289; Ja iv.367 Ja v.134; Ja vi.197; Ja vi.588; Mil 247; Dāvs ii.59; Pv-a 256. 2. to pull out, draw out DN i.77 (better to be read as pabāhati).
Caus. fr. pa + vah
(nt.) the fact of being removed or cleansed Ja v.134.
abstr. fr. pavāhita, pp. of pavāheti
(adj. & nt.) 1. carrying off, putting away, Thag 751.
2. wiping off Ja iii.290.
fr. pa + ; vah
boasted Ja i.359.
pp. of pa + vi + katthati
investigation Snp 1021; Thag 593; Pp 25; Ne 3, Ne 87.
fr. pa + vicinati
to investigate thoroughly MN iii.85; SN v.68.
pa + vicarati
to investigate, to examine MN iii.85; SN v.68, SN v.262; Ne 21; Snp-a 545. grd. paviceyya Ja iv.164, & pavicetabba Ne 21.
pa + vicinati
to throw forth or down Vin ii.193 (silaṃ cp. Ja i.173 & v.333); iii.82, 178, 415; DN-a i.138 DN-a i.154 ■ pp. paviddha (q.v.).
pa + vyadh
(nt.) hurling, throwing Ja v.67 (Devadattassa silā˚, cp. Vin ii.193); Ja i.173; Ja v.333.
fr. pavijjhati
entered, gone into (acc.), visited SN i.197; SN ii.19; Dhp 373; DN-a i.288; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13.
pp. of pavisati
scepticism, speculation, controversy Snp 834; Nd i.176.
pa + vitakka
to make clear, to reveal Ja v.326 (aor. pavidaṃsayi).
pa + vi + Caus. of dṛś; daṃseti = dasseti
thrown down, fig. given up, abandoned Thag 350 (˚gocara).
pp. of pavijjhati
to lead or drive away, expel Snp 507 = Ja v.148.
pa + vineti
to distribute, to apportion SN i.193 (˚bhajjaṃ, ppr., with jj metri causa) = Thag 1242 (˚bhajja ger.).
pa + vi + bhaj. Cp. Class Sk. pravibhāga division, distribution
to be dissolved, to melt or fade away SN iv.289 (pavilīyamānena kāyena with their body melting from heat; so read for paveliyamānena).
pa + vi + lī
to look forward or ahead Ja vi.559.
pa + viloketi
separated, detached, secluded, singled MN i.14, MN i.77, MN i.386; MN ii.6; SN ii.29; Vism 73; Pv-a 127; Dhp-a ii.77. Often in phrase appiccha santuṭṭha pavivitta referring to an ascetic enjoying the satisfaction of seclusion Nd ii.225 = Nd i.3421b = Vism 25; Ja i.107; Mil 244, Mil 358, Mil 371 (with appa-sadda appanigghosa).
pp. of pa + vi + vic
retirement, solitude, seclusion Vin i.104; Vin ii.258 (appicchatā santuṭṭhi + ; cp. pavivitta); DN i.60; MN i.14 sq.; SN ii.202; SN v.398; AN i.240; Snp 257; Dhp 205 (˚rasa, cp. Dhp-a iii.268); Thag 597; Ja i.9; Pts ii.244; Vism 41, Vism 73 (˚sukha-rasa); Sdhp 476; DN-a i.169.
fr. pa + vi + vic
(f.) = paviveka Vism 81 (appicchatā etc. in enumn of the 5 dhuta-dhammas).
abstr. fr. paviveka
(adj.) springing from solitude Thag 669.
fr. paviveka
to go in, to enter (acc.) Snp 668, Snp 673; Dhp-a ii.72 (opp. nikkhamati); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 47 (nagaraṃ). Pot. ˚vise Snp 387 imper. pavisa MN i.383; SN i.213 fut. pavisissati Vin i.87; Ja iii.86; pavissati (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 652) Ja ii.68; Cp i.956, and pavekkhati SN iv.199; Ja vi.76 (nāgo bhūmiyaṃ p.); Dāvs iii.26; aor. pāvisi Vin ii.79 (vihāraṃ); MN i.381; Ja i.76 (3rd pl. pāvisuṃ) 213; Ja ii.238; Vism 42 (gāmaṃ) Pv-a 22, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 161, Pv-a 256 and pavisi Ja ii.238; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 35; ger. pavisitvā SN i.107; Ja i.9 (araññaṃ); Vism 22; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 79 & pavissa SN i.200; Dhp 127 = Pv-a 104 ■ pp. paviṭṭha (q.v.). Caus. paveseti (q.v.).
pa + viś
(nt.) going in, entering, entrance Ja i.294; Ja ii.416; Ja vi.383; Dhp-a i.83. Cp. pavesana.
fr. pa + viś
(adj.) clever, skilful Dāvs v.33; Vv-a 168 (v.l. kusala).
cp. Class. Sk. pravīṇa
to look up to, respect, honour Ja iii.387 (T. reading sure, but v.l. C. pavīrati).
pa + vī to seek, Sk. veti, but with diff. formation in P. cp. Trenckner, Notes 78 (who derives it fr. veṇ) apaviṇāti. The form is doubtful; probably we should read pacināti
in pl. diff. kinds of rice Ja v.405 (= nānappakārā vīhayo).
pa + vīhi
to be called, said, or pronounced Snp 436, Snp 513, Snp 611 & passim; Dhp 257; Pv iv.347 Pv-a 102. The form pavuccate also occurs, e.g. at Snp 519 sq ■ pp. pavutta1 (q.v.).
Pass. of pavacati
at MN i.518 is unexplained. The reading of this word is extremely doubtful at all passages. The vv ll. at MN i.518 are pavudhā, pavujā, paṭuvā, *phutā, and the C. expln is pavuṭā = gaṇṭhikā (knot or block?). The identical passage at DN i.54 reads paṭuvā (q.v.), with vv.ll. pamuṭā, pamuvucā, while DN-a i.164 expls pacuṭā = gaṇṭhikā (vv.ll. pamuṭā, pamucā, papuṭā). Dial. i.72 reads pacuṭa, but leaves the word untranslated Franke, Dīgha, p. 58 ditto.
(pavaṭṭha) see abhi˚.
pp. of pavassati
said, declared, pronounced DN i.104 (mantapada p.; v.l. ˚vatta which is more likely; but DN-a i.273 expls by vutta & vācita) SN i.52; Snp 383 (su˚ = sudesita Snp-a 373), 868 (= ācikkhita desita, etc. Nd i.271).
pp. of pa + vac, but sometimes confounded with pavatta, pp. of pa + vṛt, cp. pavutti
scattered forth, strewn, sown SN i.227.
pp. of pa + vap
happening, proceeding, fate, event Pv-a 31 (v.l. pavatti), 46, 53 61, 78, 81 and passim (perhaps should be read pavatti at all passages).
fr. pa + vṛt, cp. Class. Sk. pravṛtti
dwelling or living abroad, staying away from home DN ii.261 (˚jāti one who dwells away from his caste, i.e. who no longer belongs to any caste); Ja v.434; Dhp-a iii.293. Freq. in phrase pavutthapatikā itthi a woman whose husband dwells abroad Vin ii.268; Vin iii.83; Mil 205.
pp. of pavasati
at Vv-a 237 is misreading either for pavāsita or (more likely) for padhūpita (as v.l. SS.), in meaning “blown” i.e. scented, filled with scent.
is fut. pavisati.
to give, bestow SN i.18; Snp 463 sq., 490 sq. Thig 272; Ja i.28; Ja iii.12 (v.l. pavacchati), 172; iv.363 vi.502, 587 (vuṭṭhi-dhāraṃ pavecchanto devo pāvassi tāvade; v.l. pavattento); Pv ii.943 (= deti Pv-a 130) ii.970 (= pavatteti ibid. 139); ii.107 (= deti ibid. 144) Mil 375.
another dern suggested by Dr. Barnett in J.R.A.S. 1924, 186 is = Sk pra-vṛścati.
most likely (as suggested by Trenckner, Notes 61) a distortion of payacchati (pa + yam ) by way of *payecchati → pavecchati (cp. sa-yathā → seyyathā) Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 43 fr. pa + vṛṣ, nor with Müller P.Gr. 120 fr. pa + viṣ (who with this derivation follows the P. Commentators, e.g. Ja iii.12 pavesati, deti; Snp-a 407 (pavesati paṭipādeti); Geiger P.Gr. § 152, note 3 suggests (doubtfully) a Fut. stem (of viś ?)
(f.) 1. a braid of hair, i.e. the hair twisted & unadorned AN iii.56–2. a mat, cover DN i.7 ≈ (see ajina˚).
3. custom, usage, wont, tradition Ja i.89 Ja ii.353; Ja v.285; Ja vi.380 (kula-tanti, kula-paveṇi); Dpvs xviii.1; Mil 134 (˚upaccheda break of tradition) 190, 226 (+ vaṃsa), 227; Dhp-a i.284 (tanti + ); Pv-a 131.
4. succession, lineage, breed, race Snp 26 (cp Snp-a 39); Dhp-a i.174.
-pālaka guardian of tradition Vism 99 (tanti-dhara vaṃsanurakkhaka + ); Dhp-a iii.386.
pa + veṇi; cp. late Sk. praveṇi in meanings 1 & 2
(nt.) making known, telling, proclamation, announcement only in stanza “nisīd ambavane ramme yāva kālappavedanā,” until the announcement of the time (of death) Thag 563 (trsln “until the hour should be revealed”) = Ja i.118 = Vism 389 = Dhp-a i.248.
fr. pa + vid
made known, declared, taught MN i.67 (su˚ & du˚); SN i.231; Dhp 79, Dhp 281; Snp 171, Snp 330 Snp 838; Nd i.186.
pp. of pavedeti
to make known, to declare, communicate, relate SN i.24; SN iv.348; Dhp 151; Snp p.103 (= bodheti ñāpeti Snp-a 444); Pv-a 33, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 68 (attānaṃ make oneself known), 120 ■ pp. pavedita (q.v.).
Caus. of pa + vid
to be afflicted, to be frightened, to be agitated, quiver, tremble, fear Snp 928 (= tasati etc. Nd i.384); Vism 180 (reads pavedheti) Thag-a 203 (allavatthaṃ allakesaṃ pavedhanto misreading for pavesento); Dhp-a ii.249 ■ Freq in ppr. med. pavedhamāna trembling MN i.88; Pv iii.55 (= pakampamāna Pv-a 199); Ja i.58; Ja iii.395 ■ pp pavedhita & pavyadhita; (q.v.).
pa + vyath, cp. pavyatheti
to shake, move to & fro, undulate SN iv.289 (paveliyamānena kāyena); Ja iii.395 ■ pp pavellita (q.v.).
pa + vell
shaken about, moving to & fro, swinging, trembling Ja vi.456.
pp. of pavellati
(-˚) entrance Thag-a 66 (Rājagaha˚); Dhp-a iv.150.
fr. pa + viś
(nt.) 1. going in, entering, entrance Ja i.142; Pv-a 79 (v.l. for T. ˚vesa), 217, 221 (asipattavana˚).
2. beginning Vv-a 71 (opp. nikkhamana). 3. putting in, application Ja ii.102 (daṇḍe p.).
4. means of entry, as adj. able to enter Ja vi.383.
fr. paveseti
one who lets in or allows to enter, an usher in SN iv.194; AN v.195.
n. ag. of paveseti
1. to make enter, allow to enter, usher in MN i.79; Ja i.150 (miga-gaṇaṃ uyyānaṃ) 291; vi.179; Vism 39; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 44, Pv-a 61 (gehaṃ), 141 (id.); Dhp-a i.397.
2. to furnish, provide, introduce procure, apply to (acc. or loc.) Ja iii.52 (rajjukaṃ gīvāya) vi.383 (siriṃ); Mil 39 (gehe padīpaṃ), 360 (udakaṃ) DN-a i.218. Perhaps at Thag-a 203 for pavedheti. Caus. II. pavesāpeti Ja i.294 (mātugāmaṃ aggiṃ).
Caus. of pavisati
to cause to tremble, to shake Ja v.409. Cp. pavedhati ■ pp. pavyadhita (q.v.).
Caus. of pa + vyath
afflicted, frightened, afraid Ja vi.61 Ja vi.166.
pp. of pa + vyath; the dh through analogy with pavedhita
flatterer MN i.327; Ja ii.439; Sdhp 565.
fr. pasaṃsati
to speak out, praise, commend, agree DN i.163; SN i.102, SN i.149, SN i.161; Ja i.143; Ja ii.439; Ja v.331; Iti 16; Snp 47, Snp 163, Snp 390, Snp 658, Snp 906; Dhp 30; Pv ii.942 DN-a i.149; Pv-a 25, Pv-a 131 (= vaṇṇeti) ■ pp. pasattha pasaṃsita; (q.v.). Cp. paṭipasaṃsita.
pa + saṃs
(nt.) praising, commendation Pp 53; Sdhp 213; Pv-a 30.
fr. pa + śaṃs
(f.) praise, applause DN iii.260; SN i.202; Thag 609; Snp 213, Snp 826 Snp 895; Mil 377; Snp-a 155. In composition the form is pasaṃsa˚; e.g. ˚āvahana bringing applause Snp 256 ˚kāma desirous of praise Snp 825, cp. Nd i.163; ˚lābha gain of praise Snp 828. As adj. pasaṃsa “laudable praiseworthy” it is better taken as grd. of pasaṃsati (= pasaṃsiya); thus at Pv iv.713 (pāsaṃsa Minayeff) Pv-a 8, Pv-a 89 (= anindita).
fr. pa + śaṃs; cp. Vedic praśaṃsā
praised SN i.232; Snp 829, Snp 928; Dhp 228, Dhp 230; Nd i.169; Pv-a 116 (= vaṇṇita) 130.
pp. of pasaṃsati, cp. pasattha
(adj.) laudable, praiseworthy SN i.149; SN iii.83; AN ii.19; Snp 658; Ja i.202; Sdhp 563. Cp. pasaṃsā.
grd. of pasaṃsati, cp. Vedic praśaṃsia
to go forth or out to; ger. pasakkiya SN i.199 = Thag 119; Thag 125.
pa + sakkati
at Ja iv.365 is doubtful; perhaps we should read pasakkita (pp. of pasakkati); the C. expls as “lying down” (nipanna acchati, p. 367); Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes change to pamakkhita on ground of vv.ll. vamakkhita & malakita.;
gone out to, gone forth Pv-a 22.
pp. of pa + sankamati, of kram
to go out or forth to (acc.) Sdhp 277 ■ pp. pasaṅkanta.
pa + saṃ + kram
1. hanging on, inclination, attachment to Kp-a 18; Pv-a 130.
2. occasion, event; loc. pasaṅge at the occasion of (-˚), instead of Kp-a 213 (karaṇavacana˚, where Pv-a 30 in id. p. reads karaṇ’ atthe).
fr. pa + sanj. Class Sk. prasanga in both meanings
to let loose, produce; to be attached to Snp 390 (= allīyati Snp-a 375).
pa + sṛj
let out, produced DN iii.167; Snp-a 109 (conj. for pasava in expln of pasuta).
pp. of pa + sṛ;
(adj.) spotted, only in cpd. ˚miga spotted antelope Ja v.418 (v.l. pasada˚) The more freq. P. form is pasada˚; e.g. SN ii.279 (gloss pasata˚); Ja v.24, Ja v.416; Ja vi.537; Snp-a 82.
Vedic pṛṣant, f. pṛṣatī
(nt.) a small measure of capacity, a handful (seems to be applied to water only) Ja i.101 (˚mattaṃ udakaṃ); iv.201 (udaka˚); v.382 (˚mattaṃ pānīyaṃ). Often redupl. pasataṃ pasataṃ “by handfuls” MN i.245, Ja v.164. At DN-a i.298 it is closely connected with sarāva (cup), as denoting the amount of a small gift.
etym.? Late Sk. pṛṣat or pṛṣad a drop; cp. phusita1 rain-drop = pṛṣata; BR. under pṛṣant pasata1, but probably dialectical & Non-Aryan
(& Pasaṭṭha) praised, extolled, commended SN i.169; Ja iii.234; Vv 4421; Mil 212, Mil 361 As pasaṭṭha at Pv ii.973 (so to be read for paseṭṭha) iv.152 (= vaṇṇita Pv-a 241); Dhs-a 124.
pp. of pasaṃsati
. See pasata1.
(adj) 1. clear, bright Snp 550 (˚netta); Kp-a 64 & 65 (˚tilatelavaṇṇa, where Vism 262 reads vippasanna˚); Vism 409 (id.).
2. happy gladdened, reconciled, pleased Ja i.151, Ja i.307; Vism 129 (muddha˚).
3. pleased in one’s conscience, reconciled believing, trusting in (loc.), pious, good, virtuous AN iii.35 (Satthari, dhamme sanghe); SN i.34 (Buddhe) v.374; Vv 59; Snp 698; Dhp 368 (Buddha-sāsane) Ja ii.111; Dhp-a i.60 (Satthari). Often combd with saddha (having faith) Vin ii.190; Pv-a 20, Pv-a 42 (a˚), and in cpd. ˚citta devotion in one’s heart Vin i.16; A vi.209; Snp 316, Snp 403, Snp 690; Pv ii.16; Snp-a 490; Pv-a 129 or ˚mānasa Snp 402; Vv-a 39; Pv-a 67; cp. pasannena manasā SN i.206; Dhp 2. See also abhippasanna vippasanna;.
pp. of pasīdati
flowing out, streaming, issuing forth; in assu-pasannaṃ shedding of tears SN ii.179.
pp. of pa + syad
(f.) a kind of spirituous liquor (made from rice) Ja i.360.
late Sk. prasannā
to become allayed, to cease, to fade away Thag 702.
pa + Śam
is ger. of pasahati (q.v.).
(nt.) stretching, spreading, being stretched out Pv-a 219 (piṭṭhi˚). See also pasāraṇa.
fr. pa + sṛ;
bringing forth, offspring SN i.69.
fr. pa + su
to bring forth, give birth to, beget, produce; mostly fig. in combn with the foll. nouns kibbisaṃ to commit sin Vin ii.204; AN v.75; pāpaṃ id Pv iv.150; puññaṃ to produce merit SN i.182, SN i.213; AN v.76; Pv-a 121; opp. apuññaṃ Vin ii.26; SN i.114 veraṃ to beget hatred SN ii.68; Dhp 201 ■ Caus. pasaveti in same meaning Ja vi.106 (pāpaṃ)-pp. pasūta (q.v.).
pa + su
(nt.) 1. giving birth Pv-a 35. - 2. producing, generating, effecting Pv-a 31 (puñña˚).
fr. pa + su
overcoming, mastering, in dup˚; (adj.) hard to overcome Ja ii.219; Mil 21.
fr. pa + sah
to use force, subdue, oppress, overcome MN ii.99; Snp 443; Dhp 7, Dhp 128; Dhp-a iii.46; Ja iv.126 Ja iv.494; Ja v.27 ■ ger. pasayha using force, forcibly, by force DN ii.74 (okkassa + ); AN iv.16 (id.); SN i.143; Snp 72; Ja i.143; Pv ii.92; ii.910; (read appasayha for suppasayha); Mil 210 (okassa + ; for okkassa?). Also in cpd. pasayha-kārin using force Ja iv.309; Ja v.425.
pa + sah
(m. & nt.) 1. a smaller branch Ja vi.324 (sākha˚; ).
2. branch-like wood, i.e. hard wood Thag 72.
3. the body where it branches off from the trunk, i.e. abdomen & thighs the lower part of the body Vin iv.316 (= adho-nābhi ubbha-jānu-maṇḍalaṃ C.). Cp. Suśruta ii.31, 10. 4. the extremities (being the 5th stage in the formation of the embryo) SN i.206.
pa + sākhā; Epic Sk. praśākhā branch
1. clearness, brightness, purity; referring to the colours (“visibility”) of the eye Ja i.319 (akkhīni maṇiguḷa-sadisāni paññāyamāna pañca-ppasādāni ahesuṃ); Snp-a 453 (pasanna-netto i.e. pañca-vaṇṇa-ppasāda-sampattiyā) In this sense also, in Abhidhamma, with ref. to the eye in function of “sentient organ, sense agency” sensitive surface (so Mrs Rh. D. in Dhs. tsrl. 174) at Dhs-a 306, Dhs-a 307.
2. joy, satisfaction, happy or good mind virtue, faith MN i.64 (Satthari); SN i.202; AN i.98, AN i.222 (Buddhe etc.); ii.84; iii.270 (puggala˚); iv.346; Snp-a 155, Pv-a 5, Pv-a 35.
3. repose, composure, allayment serenity Ne 28, Ne 50; Vism 107, Vism 135; Thag-a 258 ■ Note. pasāda at Thig 411 is to be read pāsaka (see J.P.T.S. 1893 pp. 45, 46). Cp. abhi˚.
fr. pa + sad, cp. Vedic prasāda
(adj.) 1. making bright Mil 35 (udaka˚ maṇi).
2. worthy, good, pious Pv-a 129 (a˚). Cp. pāsādika.
fr. pasāda
(nt.) 1. happy state, reconciliation, purity Pv-a 132.
2. granting graces, gratification Dhp-a iii.3 (brahmaṇo mama p. ˚ṭṭhāne pasīdati he is gracious instead of me giving graces) ■ Cp. sam˚.
fr. pa + sad
(adj.) inspiring confidence, giving faith SN v.156; Pp 49, Pp 50; Vb-a 282 (˚suttanta); Sdhp 543; the 10 pāsādaniyā dhammā at MN iii.11 sq. Cp. sam˚.
fr. pasāda
at Ja vi.530 is doubtful; it is expld in C. together with saṃsādiyā (a certain kind of rice: sūkara-sāli), yet the C. seems to take it as “bhūmiyaṃ patita”; v.l. pasāriya. Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as rice plant compares Sk.; *prasātikā.
to render calm, appease, make peaceful, reconcile, gladden, incline one’s heart (cittaṃ) towards (loc.) DN i.110, DN i.139; SN i.149; AN v.71; Pv ii.942 (cittaṃ); Mil 210; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 123 (khamāpento p.) ■ Cp. vi˚.
Caus. of pa + sad, see pasīdati
(nt.) ornament, decoration, parure Ja ii.186 (rañño sīsa ˚kappaka King’s headdress-maker i.e. barber); iii.437; iv.3 (ura-cchada˚); Dhp-a i.227 (˚peḷikā), 342 (˚kappaka), 393; Thag-a 267; Vv-a 165, Vv-a 187; Pv-a 155.
fr. pa + sādh; cp. Class. Sk. prasādhana in same meaning
adorned, arrayed with ornaments, embellished, dressed up Ja i.489 (maṇḍita˚) ii.48 (id.); iv.219 (id.); v.510 (nahāta˚).
pp. of pasādheti
to adorn, decorate, array Mvu vii.38; Dhp-a i.398 ■ pp. pasādhita (q.v.).
Caus. of pa + sādh
(nt.) stretching out DN-a i.196 (opp. sammiñjana); Dhp-a i.298 (hattha˚).
fr. pa + sṛ; cp. pasaraṇa
1. stretched out, usually in contrast with sammiñjita, e.g. at DN i.222; Vin i.230; MN iii.35, MN iii.90; SN i.137; Vism 19; Vv-a 6.
2. put forth laid out, offered for sale Mil i.336.
pp. of pasāreti
1. to cause to move forwards, to let or make go, to give up Ja vi.58 (pasāraya, imper.)-Pass. pasāriyati Vism 318; Pv-a 240 (are turned out of doors).
2. to stretch out, hold out or forth, usually with ref. to either arm (bāhuṃ, bāhaṃ, bāhā) SN i.137 (opp. sammiñjeti ); DN-a i.196; Pv-a 112, Pv-a 121; or hand (hatthaṃ) Ja v.41; Ja vi.282; Pv-a 113; or feet (pāde pādaṃ) Thig 44, Thig 49, cp. Thag-a 52; Dhs-a 324 (= sandhiyo paṭippanāmeti).
3. to lay out, put forth, offer for sale Vin ii.291; Dhp-a ii.89 ■ pp. pasārita (q.v.) Cp. abhi˚
Caus. of pa + sṛ;
1. to teach, instruct SN i.38; Ja iii.367, Ja iii.443.
2. to rule, reign, govern DN ii.257; Cp iii.141 Pv-a 287.
pa + śās
(nt.) teaching, instruction Ja iii.367.
fr. pa + śās
(m. nt.) a sack, Vin iii.17; Ja i.112, Ja i.351; Ja ii.88, Ja ii.154; Ja iii.10, Ja iii.116 Ja iii.343 (camma˚ leather bag); iv.52, 361; v.46 (pūpa˚) 483; vi.432 (spelling pasippaka); DN-a i.41; Dhp-a iv.205.
fr. pa + siv, late Sk. prasevaka → P. pasebbaka → pasibbaka, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. 151
sewn up, enveloped by (-˚) Thag 1150 (maṃsa-nahāru˚).
pp. of pa + siv
1. to become bright, to brighten up Pv-a 132 (mukha-vaṇṇo p.).
2. to be purified, reconciled or pleased; to be clear & calm, to become of peaceful heart (; mano or cittaṃ p. ); to find one’s satisfaction in (loc.), to have faith DN ii.202; SN i.98; SN ii.199 (sutvā dhammaṃ p.); AN iii.248; Snp 356, Snp 434, Snp 563; Nd ii.426 (= saddahati, adhimuccati okappeti); Vv 5014 (mano me pasīdi, aor.); Vism 129; Mil 9; Dhp-a iii.3 (= he is gracious, i.e. good); Vv-a 6 (better v.l. passitvā) Pv-a 141 ■ pp. pasanna (q.v.). See also pasādeti vippasīdati;.
pa + sad
(nt.) calming, happiness, purification Pts ii.121 (SS passādana).
fr. pasīdati
cattle MN i.79; Ja v.105; Pv ii.1312 (˚yoni); Mil 100; Pv-a 166 (˚bhāva); n. pl pasavo SN i.69; Snp 858; gen. pl. pasūnaṃ Snp 311; Pv ii.25 ■ dupasu bad cattle Thag 446.
Vedic paśu, cp. Lat. pecu & pecunia, Gr.; πέκος fleece, Goth. vieh, E. fee
= pasu Vin ii.154 (ajaka + ).
attached to (acc. or loc.), intent upon (-˚), pursuing, doing DN i.135 (kamma˚); Snp 57 (see Nd ii.427), 709, 774, 940, Dhp 166, Dhp 181; Vism 135 (doing a hundred & one things: aneka-kicca˚); Dhp-a iii.160; Pv-a 151 (puñña-kammesu), 175 (kīḷanaka˚) 195, 228 (pāpa˚).
pp. of pa + sā or si, Sk. prasita, on change of i to u see Geiger, P.Gr. § 193. In meaning confounded with pasavate of pa + su
(adj.) many, abundant Ja vi.134 (= rāsi, heap C.). We should probably read pacura as at Ja v.40 (= bahu C.).
reading doubtful
produced; having born, delivered Pv-a 80.
pp. of pasavati
(f.) bringing forth, birth, in ˚ghara lying-in chamber Nd i.120; Vism 235; Kp-a 58 (where Vism 259 reads sūtighara).
fr. pa + su
at Pv ii.973 is to be read pasaṭṭha (see pasattha).
to cleanse, clean, purity DN i.71 (cittaṃ).
pa + Caus. of śudh
seeing, one who sees Thag 61 (see Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1885, 48).
cp. Sk. paśya, fr. passati
(m. & nt.) 1. side, flank MN i.102; MN iii.3; AN v.18; Snp 422; Ja i.264; Ja iii.26. Pleonastic in piṭṭhi˚ (cp. E. backside) the back, loc. behind Ja i.292; Pv-a 55.
2. (mountain-) slope, in Himavanta˚; Ja i.218; Ja v.396 (loc pasmani = passe C.).
Vedic pārśva to parśu & pṛṣṭi rib, perhaps also connected with pārṣṇi side of leg, see under paṇhi
1. to see-Pres. passati Vin i.322; SN i.69 SN i.132, SN i.198; SN ii.29; Snp 313, Snp 647, Snp 953, Snp 1063, Snp 1142 (cp. Nd ii.428); Pv i.23; Mil 218; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 102; Pv-a 1st pl. passāma Snp 76, Snp 153, Snp 164; Pv i.101 (as future); imper. sg. passa Snp 435, Snp 580, Snp 588, Snp 756; Ja i.223; Ja ii.159; Pv ii.116, 119 Pv-a 38; pl. passatha SN ii.25; Snp 176 sq., 777, & passavho (cp. Sk. paśyadhvaṃ) Snp 998 ■ ppr. passaṃ (see Geiger, P.Gr. 972) MN ii.9; Snp 739, Snp 837, Snp 909;; passanto Ja iii.52; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 6; f. passantī SN i.199 ■ grd passitabba Ja iv.390 (a˚) ■ fut. passissati Pv ii.46 Pv-a 6 ■ aor. passi Ja ii.103, Ja ii.111; Ja iii.278, Ja iii.341.
2. to recognise, realise, know: only in combn with jānāti (pres. jānāti passati; ppr. jānaṃ passaṃ): see jānāti 11.
3. to find Snp 1118 (= vindati paṭilabhati Nd ii.428b); Ja iii.55; Pv ii.99 ■ Cp. vi˚.
Vedic paśyati & *spaśati (aor. aspaṣṭa, Caus. spāśayati etc.); cp. Av. spasyeiti, Gr. σκέπτομαι, (E “scepsis”); Lat. species etc.; Ohg. spehon = Ger spāhen (E. spy) ■ The paradigm pass˚, which in literary Sk. is restricted to the pres. stem (paś) interchanges with the paradigm dakkh˚ & dass˚; (dṛś): see dassati1
calmed down, allayed, quieted, composed, aṭ ease. Almost exclusively with ref. to the body (kāya) e.g. at Vin i.294; DN iii.241, DN iii.288; MN i.37; MN iii.86; SN i.126 SN iv.125; AN i.148; AN v.30; Vism 134; Vb-a 283 (˚kāyapuggala) ■ In lit. appln ˚ratha when the car had slowed down Ja iii.239. See also paṭi˚.
pp. of passambhati, cp. BSk. praśrabdha Divy 48
(f.) calmness, repose Nd ii.166.
abstr. fr. passaddha
(f.) calmness, tranquillity, repose, serenity MN iii.86; SN ii.30; SN iv.78; SN v.66; AN iv.455 sq.; Pts ii.244; Dhs 40 (kāya˚), 41 (citta˚), cp. Dhs trsl. 23; Vism 129; Vb-a 314 (kāya˚, citta˚); Dhs-a 150 (= samassāsa-ppatta). Often combd with pāmujja pīti;, e.g. DN i.72, DN i.73, DN i.196; Ne 29, Ne 66. Six passaddhis at SN iv.217 (with ref. to vācā, vitakka-vicārā, pīti assāsa-passāsā, saññā-vedanā, rāga-dosa-moha, through the 4 jhānas etc.). Passaddhi is one of the 7 sambojjhaṅgas (constituents of enlightenment): see this & cp. MN iii.86; Vism 130, Vism 134 = Vb-a 282 (where 7 conditions of this state are enumd).
fr. pa + śrambh
see anu˚, vi˚.
to calm down, to be quiet Vin i.294 (fut ˚issati); DN i.73; MN iii.86; SN v.333; AN iii.21 ■ pp. passaddha; Caus. passambheti (q.v.).
pa + śrambh
to calm down, quiet, allay MN i.56, MN i.425; SN iii.125; Vism 288 (= nirodheti) ppr. passambhayaṃ MN i.56; MN iii.82, MN iii.89.
Caus. of passambhati
(f.) allayment, calmness, composure Dhs 40, Dhs 41, Dhs 320.
fr. passambhati
refuge Cp iii.104 ■ Note. ˚passaya in kaṇṭakapassaya Ja iii.74, & kaṇṭakāpassayika DN i.167 (kaṇṭh˚); Ja iv.299 (kaṇṭaka˚) is to be read as ˚apassaya (apa + śri ).
fr. pa + śri, cp. Class. Sk. praśraya reverence
to flow forth, to pour out Mil 180.
pa + sru
to breathe in DN ii.291; MN i.56; MN iii.82; Ja iii.296; Ja v.43; Vism 271; Dhp-a 1.215. See also assasati & remarks under ā;1 3.
pa + śvas
urine (lit. flowing out) Vin ii.141; Vin iv.266 (p. muttaṃ vuccati); DN i.70 (uccāra + ); MN iii.3, MN iii.90; Ja i.164 (uccāra-passāvaṃ vissajjeti), 338 v.164, 389; Vism 235 (uccāra˚).
-doṇikā a trough for urine Vin ii.221; Vism 235.
fr. passavati
inhaled breath, inhalation SN i.106, SN i.159; Pts i.95, Pts i.164 sq., 182 sq. Usually in combn assāsapassāsa (q.v.). At Vism 272 passāsa is expl1 as “ingoing wind” and assāsa as “outgoing wind.”
fr. pa + śvas
(adj.) breathing; in ghuru-ghuru˚ snoring SN i.117.
fr. passāsa
(adj.) (-˚) only in cpd. ehipassika (q.v.).
fr. imper. passa of passati, + ka
to sleep, rest, aor. passupi; fut. passupissati Ja v.70. 71.
pa + svap
(nt.) flight of steps from which to step down into the water, a ghat (= tittha Bdhgh) DN i.223. The meaning is uncertain, it is trsld as “accessible” at Dial. i.283 (q.v. for further detail). Neumann (Majjhima trsln i.513) trsls “ganz und gar erloschen (pabhā?). It is not at all improbable to take pahaṃ as ppr. of pajahati (as contracted fr. pajahaṃ like pahatvāna for pajahitvāna at Snp 639), thus meaning “giving up entirely.” The same form in the latter meaning occurs at Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.3).
?
(adj.) = pahu, i.e. able to (with inf.) Ja v.198 (C. pahū samattho).
to strike, beat (a metal), rub, sharpen (a cutting instrument, as knife, hatchet, razor etc.) Ja i.278 Ja ii.102 (pharasuṃ); Dhp-a i.253 (khuraṃ pahaṃsi sharpened the razor; corresponds to ghaṭṭeti in preceding context) ■ pp. pahaṭṭha1 & pahaṃsita;1 (q.v.).
pa + haṃsati1 = ghaṃsati1, of ghṛṣ to rub, grind
to be pleased, to rejoice; only in pp. pahaṭṭha2 & pahaṃsita;2 (q.v.), and in Pass. pahaṃsīyati to be gladdened, to exult Mil 326 (+ kuhīyati). See also sam˚.
pa + haṃsati2 = hassati, of hṛṣ to be glad, cp. ghaṃsati2
struck, beaten (of metal), refined Ja vi.218 (ukkā-mukha˚), 574 (id.).
pp. of pahaṃsati
gladdened, delighted, happy Dhp-a i.230 (˚mukha); Vv-a 279 (˚mukha SS pahasita at Mil 297 is better to be taken as pp. of pahasati, because of combn haṭṭha pahaṭṭha hasita pahasita.
pp. of pahaṃsati2
assailed, struck, beaten (of musical instruments) Ja ii.102, Ja ii.182; Ja vi.189; Vv-a 161 (so for pahata); Pv-a 253. Of a ball: driven, impelled Vism 143 (˚citra-geṇḍuka) = Dhs-a 116 (so read for pahaṭṭha-citta-bheṇḍuka and correct Expositor 153 accordingly). The reading pahaṭa at Pv-a 4 is to be corrected to paṭaha.
pp. of paharati
struck, beaten (of metal) Ja vi.217 (suvaṇṇa).
pp. of pahaṃsati1
gladdened, happy, cheerful, delighted Vin iii.14; Ja i.278 (twice; once as ˚mānasa which is wrongly taken by C. as pahaṭṭha1), 443 ii.240 (tuṭṭha˚); Vism 346 (haṭṭha˚); Dhp-a i.230 (tuṭṭha˚); Vv-a 337. In its original sense of “bristling (with excitement or joy), with ref. to ear & hair of an elephant in phrase; pahaṭṭha-kaṇṇa-vāla at Vin ii.195; Ja v.335 (cp. Sk. prahṛṣṭa-roman, Name of an Asura at Kathāsaritsāgara 47, 30).
pp. of pahaṃsati2
killed, overcome MN iii.46; SN ii.54; Ja vi.512.
pp. of pa + han
(nt.) striking, beating Snp-a 224; Pv-a 285.
fr. paharati
(adj.) striking, hitting Ja i.418.
fr. paharaṇa
to strike, hit, beat Ja iii.26, Ja iii.347; Ja vi.376; Vv-a 65; Pv-a 4; freq. in phrase accharaṃ p. to snap one’s finger, e.g. Ja ii.447; see accharā1. aor. pahāsi (cp. pariyudāhāsi) Vv 292 (= pahari Vv-a 123) ■ pp pahaṭa (q.v.). Caus. paharāpeti.
1. to cause to be assailed Ja iv.150.
2. to put on or join on to Ja vi.32 (˚hārāpesi).
pa + hṛ;
to laugh, giggle Ja v.452 (ūhasati + ). See also pahassati & pahāsati ■ pp.; pahasita (q.v.).
pa + has
laughing, smiling, joyful, pleased Mil 297; Ja i.411 (nicca˚ mukha) ii.179.
pp. of pahasati or ˚hassati
to laugh, be joyful or cheerful Snp 887 (= haṭṭha pahaṭṭha Nd i.296; cp. Snp-a 555 hāsajāta) The pp. pahasita (q.v.) is derived fr. pres. pahasati which makes the equation pahassati = pahaṃsati2 all the more likely.
pa + has, perhaps pa + hṛṣ, Sk. harṣati, cp. pahaṃsati2
(nt.) giving up, leaving, abandoning, rejection MN i.60, MN iii.4, MN iii.72; SN i.13, SN i.132 (dukkha˚); ii.170; iii.53; iv.7 sq.; DN iii.225, DN iii.246; AN i.82, AN i.134; AN ii.26, AN ii.232 (kaṇhassa kammassa ˚āya). iii.431; Snp 374, Snp 1106 (= vūpasama paṭinissagga etc Nd ii.429); Dhp 331; Ja i.79; Pts i.26; Pts ii.98, Pts ii.156; Pp 16; Dhs 165, Dhs 174, Dhs 339; Ne 15 sq., 24, 192; Vism 194 (nīvaraṇa-santāpa˚); Dhs-a 166, Dhs-a 345; Vv-a 73. -˚pariññā see pariññā; -˚vinaya avoidance consisting in giving up (coupled with saṃvara-vinaya avoidance by protection, prophylaxis), based on the 5 qualities tadanga-pahāna, vikkhambhana˚, samuccheda˚, paṭippassaddhi˚ nissaraṇa˚ Dhs-a 351; Snp-a 8.
fr. pa + hā, see pajahati
is ger. of pajahati (q.v.).
(adj.) giving up, abandoning Snp 1113, Snp 1132, cp. Nd ii.431; Sdhp 500.
fr. pa + hā, see pajahati
1. a blow, stroke, hit DN i.144 (daṇḍa˚); MN i.123, MN i.126; Pv iv.167 (sālittaka˚); MN i.123; Dhp-a iii.48 (˚dāna-sikkhāpada the precepts concerning those guilty of giving blows cp. Vin iv.146); Pv-a 4 (ekappahārena with one stroke) 56 (muggara˚), 66 (id.) 253 ■ ekappahārena at Vism 418 as adv. “all at once.” pahāraṃ deti to give a blow Vin iv.146; SN iv.62; AN iii.121; Vism 314 (pahārasatāni); Pv-a 191 (sīse).
2. a wound Ja iv.89; Ja v.459 (˚mukha).
fr. pa + hṛ; Class. Sk. prahāra, see paharati
see abhi˚.
(adj.) striking, assaulting Ja ii.211.
fr. paharati
laughing, mirth Dhs 9, Dhs 86, Dhs 285; Vv-a 132; Sdhp 223.
fr. pa + has, cp. Class. Sk. prahāsa
in pahāsanto saparisaṃ at Thag-a 69 should preferably be read as pahāsayanto parisaṃ, thus taken as Caus. of pa + has, i.e. making one smile, gladdening.
is 3rd sg. aor. of paharati; found at Vv 298 (musalena = pahari Vv-a 113); and also 3rd sg. aor of pajahati e.g. at Snp 1057 (= pajahi Nd ii.under jahati)
to make laugh, to gladden, to make joyful Vism 289 (cittaṃ pamodeti hāseti pahāseti).
Caus. of pahasati
(adj.-n.) sending; being sent; a messenger, in ˚gamaṇa going as messenger, doing messages DN i.5; MN i.345; Ja ii.82; Mil 370; DN-a i.78 See also pahana.
fr. pa + hi
(nt.) a sweetmeat AN iii.76 (v.l. pahenaka). See also paheṇaka. The (late) Sk. form is prahelaka.
fr. pahiṇati?
to send; Pres. pahiṇati. Vin iii.140 sq.; Vin iv.18; Dhp-a ii.243; aor. pahiṇi Ja i.60 (sāsanaṃ); v.458 (paṇṇāni); Vv-a 67; Dhp-a i.72 Dhp-a ii.56, Dhp-a ii.243; ger. pahiṇitva Vv-a 65 ■ pp. pahita2 (q.v.). There is another aor. pāhesi (Sk. prāhaiṣīt) in analogy to which a new pres. pāheti has been formed, so that pāhesi is now felt to be a der. fr. pāheti & accordingly is grouped with the latter. All other forms with he˚ (pahetuṃ e.g. ) are to be found under pāheti.;
pa + hi, Sk. hinoti
(nt.) sending, dispatch Dhp-a ii.243.
fr. pahiṇati
resolute, intent, energetic; only in cpd. pahitatta of resolute will (cp. BSk. prahitātman Divy 37) MN i.114; SN i.53 (expld by Bdhgh with wrong derivation fr. peseti as “pesit-atta” thus identifying pahita1 & pahita;2, see K.S. 320); ii.21, 239; iii.73 sq. iv.60, 145, v.187, AN ii.14, AN iii.21, AN iv.302 sq.; AN v.84; Snp 425, Snp 432 sq., 961; Iti 71; Nd i.477; Thig 161 (expld at Thag-a 143, with the same mistake as above, as pesita citta); Nd i.477 (id.; pesit-atta); Mil 358, Mil 366, Mil 406.
pp. of padahati
sent Ja i.86 (sāsana); Dhp-a ii.242; Dhp-a iii.191 (interchanging with pesita).
pp. of pahiṇati
given up, abandoned, left, eliminated Vin iii.97 = Vin iv.27; SN ii.24; SN iii.33; SN iv.305; Snp 351 (˚jāti-maraṇa), 370, 564, 1132 (˚mala-moha) Iti 32; Nd ii.s. v.; Pts i.63; Pts ii.244; Pp 12, Pp 22.
pp. of pajahati
to be abandoned, to pass away, vanish MN i.7; SN i.219 (fut. ˚issati); ii.196 (ppr ˚īyamāna); v.152; Snp 806; Nd i.124; Vb-a 271. Spelt pahiyyati at SN v.150.
Pass. of pajahati
(adj.) able Snp 98; Ja v.198; Nd ii.615˚.
cp. Vedic prabhū, fr. pa + bhū
(adj.) sufficient, abundant, much, considerable Snp 428, Snp 862 sq. Pv i.52 (= anappaka, bahu, yāvadattha C.; Dhp at Pv-a 25 gives bahuka as inferior variant); i.117 (= apariyanta, uḷāra; v.l. bahū); ii.75 (v.l. bahūta); Pv-a 145 (dhana; v.l. bahuta); Snp-a 294 (id.), 321 (id.) See also bahūta.
-jivha large tongued DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.173. -jivhatā the characteristic of a large tongue Snp p.107. -dhañña having many riches Ja iv.309. -dhana id. Thig 406 (C. reading for T. bahuta-ratana). -pañña rich in wisdom Snp 359, Snp 539, Snp 996. -bhakkha eating much, said of the fire SN i.69. -vitta = ˚dhañña DN i.134; Snp 102; Pv-a 3.
pp. of pa + bhū, cp. Vedic prabhūta
(adj.) = pahuta Pv-a 135 (v.l. BB bahuta; in expln of bahu).
(nt.) a present Ja vi.369 (so here, whereas the same word as pahiṇaka at AN iii.76 clearly means “sweetmeat”).
cp. BSk. praheṇaka in sense of “sweetmeat” at Divy 13, Divy 258; the *Sk. form is prahelaka
(nt.) same as pahiṇa in ˚gamana going on errands Ja ii.82.
paheṇa?
& (in verse) pabhavati 1. to proceed from (with gen.), rise, originate DN ii.217; MN iii.76; SN ii.184; as pabhavati at Snp 728 = Snp 1050 (cp. Nd ii.401) (perf. med.) pahottha it has arisen from (gen.), i.e. it was the fault of Ja v.102.
2. to be sufficient, adequate or able (with inf.) DN i.240; MN i.94; SN i.102; Snp 36, Snp 867; Ja v.305; DN-a i.192; DN-a iii.254 (fut. pahossati); Vv-a 75 Dāvs iv.18. Neg. both with na˚ & a˚ viz. nappahoti Ja vi.204; Dhp-a iii.408; nappahosi Ja i.84; appahoti Dhp-a iv.177; appabhonto Pv-a 73; in verse appabhavaṃ Ja iii.373 (= appahonto C.) ■ pp. pahūta (q.v.).
pa + ; bhu, cp. Vedic prabhavati in meaning “to be helpful”
in ˚kāla at Ja iii.17 read as pahonaka˚.
(adj.) sufficient, enough Ja i.346; Ja ii.122; Ja iii.17 (so read for pahona˚); iv.277; Vism 404; Dhp-a i.78, Dhp-a i.219; Vv-a 264; Pv-a 81.
fr. pahoti
that which is cooked, cooking, quantity cooked Ja vi.161 (tīhi pākehi pacitvā); Vv-a 186. Esp. in foll. combn tela˚; “oil cooking,” an oil decoction Vin ii.105; thāli˚; a th. full of cooking Ja i.186; doṇa˚; a d. full SN i.81; Dhp-a ii.8; sosāna˚ Dhātumañjūsā 132 (under kaṭh). On pāka in appld meaning of “effect, result” see Cpd. 883 ■ As nt. in stanza “pākaṃ pākassa paccayo; apākaṃ avipākassa” at Vb-a 175 ■ Cp. vi˚.
-tela an oil concoction or mixture, used for rubbing the body; usually given with its price worth 100 or 1,000 pieces, e.g. sata˚ Ja ii.397; Ja v.376; Vv-a 68; Dhp-a iii.311; sahassa˚; Ja iii.372. -vaṭṭa subsistence livelihood, maintenance Mvu 35, Mvu 120; Dhp-a ii.29; Vv-a 220. -haṃsa a species of water bird Ja v.356 Ja vi.539; Snp-a 277.
Vedic pāka, see pacati
(adj.) 1. common, vulgar, uncontrolled in phrase pākat-indriya of uncontrolled mind SN i.61 (= saṃvarâbhāvena gihikāle viya vivaṭa-indriya K.S. 320), 204; iii.93; v.269; AN i.70, AN i.266, AN i.280; AN iii.355, AN iii.391 Thag 109 (C. asaṃvuta, see Brethren 99); Pp 35 ■ At Mil 251 pākatā is to be read pāpakā.
2. open common, unconcealed Ja i.262 (pākaṭo jāto was found out); Snp-a 343; Pv-a 103 (for āvi).
3. commonly known, familiar Vism 279; Pv-a 17 (devā), 23, 78 (su˚) 128; Vv-a 109 (+ paññāta); ˚ṃ karoti to make manifest Vism 287; ˚bhāva being known Dhs-a 243; Pv-a 103
4. renowned, well-known DN-a i.143; Pv-a 107.
= pakata; on ā for a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 331. Cp. Sk. prakaṭa Halāyudha. The spelling is sometimes pākaṭa
(adj.) natural, in its original or natural state Ja v.274; Mil 218 (maṇiratana); Dhp-a i.20; Vv-a 288; Pv-a 66 (where id. p Ja iii.167 reads paṭipākatika), 206; pākatikaṃ karoti to restore to its former condition, to repair, rebuild Ja i.354, also fig. to restore a dismissed officer, to reinstate Ja v.134.
fr. pakati, cp. BSk. prākṛtaka (loka) Bodhicaryâvatāra v. 3, ed. Poussin
an encircling wall, put up for obstruction and protection, a fence rampart Vin ii.121 (3 kinds: made of bricks, of stone or of wood, viz. iṭṭhakā˚, silā, dāru˚); iv.266 (id.) MN iii.11; SN iv.194 (˚toraṇa); AN iv.107; AN v.195; Ja i.63 Ja ii.50; Ja vi.330 (mahā˚), 341 (+ parikhā & aṭṭāla); Pv i.1013 (ayo˚); Mil 1; Vism 394 (= parikkhepa-pākāra) Dhp-a iii.441 (tiṇṇaṃ pākārānaṃ antare); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 52 sāṇi˚; screen-fencing Ja ii.88; Pv-a 283.
-iṭṭhakā brick or tile of a wall Ja iii.446 (T. iṭṭhikā) -parikkhitta surrounded by a wall DN-a i.42. -parikkhepa a fencing Vism 74.
cp. Epic Sk. prākāra, pa + ā + kṛ;
(adj.) evident, manifest, open, clear Ja vi.230 (opp. guyha; C. pākāsika).
fr. pa + ā + kāś, cp. pakāsati & Class. Sk. prākāśya
(adj.) read at Ud 5 in combn akkulapakkula (= ākula-pākula) “in great confusion”; read also in gāthā 7 pākula for bakkula. Cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 94 sq.
pa + ākula
(nt.) boldness, impudence, forwardness Snp 930; Nd i.228 sq. (3 kinds, viz. kāyika vācasika, cetasika), 390 sq.; Ja ii.32; Ja v.449 (pagabbhiya); Snp-a 165; Kp-a 242; Dhp-a iii.354 (pa˚) Vv-a 121.
fr. pagabbha
(f.) being familiar with, experience Dhs 48, Dhs 49; Vism 463 sq. 466.
abstr. of pāguñña, which is der. fr. paguna
a certain kind of fish Ja iv.70 (as gloss, T. reads pāvusa, SS puṭusa, BB pātusa & pāvuma; C. explns as mahā-mukha-maccha).
cp. Sk. vāgusa, a sort of large fish Halāyudha 3, 37
(adj.-n.) one who cooks, a cook; f. ˚ikā Ja i.318.
fr. pac, cp. pāceti
(nt.) bringing to boil, cooking Ja i.318 (yāgu˚). Cp. pari˚.
fr. pac, Caus. pāceti
(nt.) a goad, stick SN i.172; Snp p.13; Snp v.77; Ja iii.281; Ja iv.310.
-yaṭṭhi driving stick, goad stick SN i.115.
for pājana, cp. pāceti2 & Snp-a 147
(-˚) only as 2nd part of a (redupl.) compound ācariya-pācariya in the nature of combns mentioned under a1 3 b: “teacher upon teacher (expld by Cs as “teacher of teachers”) DN i.90 (cp DN-a i.254); ii.237, etc. (see ācariya).
pa + ācariya
(adj.) requiring expiation, expiatory Vin i.172, Vin i.176; Vin ii.242, Vin ii.306 sq.; Vin iv.1 sq., 258 sq.; AN ii.242 (dhamma); Vism 22 ■ It is also the name of one of the books of the Vinaya (ed. Oldenberg, vol. iv.). See on term Vin. Texts i.18, 32, 245.
most likely prāk + citta + ika, i.e. of the nature of directing one’s mind upon, cp. pabbhāra *prāg + bhāra. So expld also by S. Lévi J.As. x.20 p. 506. Geiger, P.Gr. § 27, n. 1 inclines to etym prāyaś + cittaka
(adj.) eastern i.e. facing the (rising) sun (opp. pacchā) Ja i.50 (˚sīsaka, of Māyādevī’s couch), 212 (˚lokadhātu) Mil 6; DN-a i.311 (˚mukha facing east); Dhp-a iii.155 (id.); Vv-a 190; Pv-a 74, Pv-a 256. The opposite apācīna (e.g. SN iii.84) is only apparently a neg. pācīna, in reality a der. fr. apa (apa + ac ), as pācīna is a der. fr pra + ac. See apācīna.
Vedic prācīna, fr. adv. prāc bent forward
to cause to boil, fig. to cause to torment DN i.52 (ppr. pācayato, gen., also pācento) Cp. vi˚.
Caus. of pacati
to drive, urge on Dhp 135 (āyuṃ p. gopālako viya… peseti Dhp-a iii.60).
for pājeti, with c. for j (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 393); pra + aj: see aja
(nt.) a goad Snp-a 147.
fr. pa + aj, cp. pācana2
to cause to drive or go on Ja ii.296 (sakaṭāni); iii.51 (so read for pajāpeti; BB pāceti & pājeti).;
Caus. of pājeti
1. to drive (cp. pāceti2) Ja ii.122, Ja ii.143, Ja iii.51 (BB for T. pājāpeti); v.443 (nāvaṃ) vi.32 (yoggaṃ); Snp-a 147; Dhp-a iv.160 (goṇe).
2. to throw (the dice) Ja vi.281 ■ Caus. II. pājāpeti (q.v.).
Caus. of pa + aj, cp. aja
(f.) “sedan chair” (?) in phrase sivikaṃ pāṭaṅkiṃ at Vin i.192 (MV v.10, 3) is not clear. The vv. ll (p. 380) are pāṭangin, pāṭangan pāṭakan. Perhaps pallankaṃ?
(adj.) pale red, pink Ja iv.114.
cp. Class. Sk. pāṭala, to same root as palita & pāṇḍu: see Walde,; Lat. Wtb. under palleo & cp paṇḍu
(f.) the trumpet flower, Bignonia Suaveolens DN ii.4 (Vipassī pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho); Vv 359; Ja i.41 (˚rukkha as the Bodhi tree); ii.162 (pāṭali-bhaddaka sic. v.l. for phālibhaddaka); iv.440; v.189; vi.537; Mil 338; Vv-a 42, Vv-a 164; Thag-a 211, Thag-a 226.
cp. Class. Sk. pāṭalī, to pāṭala
(nt.) skill Kp-a 156.
cp. late Sk. pāṭava, fr. paṭu
(adj.) to be desired or expected MN i.25; MN iii.97; SN i.88 SN ii.152; AN iii.143 = Snp p.140 (= icchitabba Snp-a 504) Ud 36; Dhp-a iv.2 (gati ˚ā) Pv-a 63 (id.).
grd. of paṭikankhati, Sk. *pratikānkṣya
(-˚) (adj.-n.) hoping for, one who expects or desires DN i.4; MN iii.33; AN ii.209; Ja iii.409.
fr. paṭi + kāṅka, cp. patikankhin
(f.) half-moon stone, the semicircular slab under the staircase Vin i.180 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.3). As pāṭiya at Ja vi.278 (= piṭṭhi-pāsāṇa C.).
etym. unknown; with pāṭiya cp. Sk. pāṣya?
(f.) = pātikkūlyatā (perhaps to be read as such) Ja v.253 (nava, cp. Vism 341 sq.).
fr. paṭi(k)kūla
(f.) loathsomeness, objectionableness AN iii.32; AN iv.47 sq.; AN v.64. Cp. paṭikulyatā paṭikūlatā & pāṭikulyā.;
abstr. fr. paṭikkūla
(adj.) belonging to confession, (a sin) which ought to be confessed Vin i.172; Vin ii.242; AN ii.243 (as ˚desanīyaka).
grd. of paṭideseti with pāṭi for pāṭi in der.
(adj.) following the (right) Path MN i.354 = Iti 80 (+ sekha).
the adj. form of paṭipadā
lit, “entering, beginning”; the first day of the lunar fortnight Vin i.132; Ja iv.100; Vv-a 72 (˚sattamī).
fr. paṭi + pad, see patipajjati & cp. paṭipadā
(adj.) belonging to the 1st day of the lunar fortnight; only with ref. to bhatta (food & in comb;n with pakkhika & uposathika, i.e. food given on the half-moon days, on the 7;th day of the week & on the first day of the fortnight Vin i.58 Vin ii.175; Vin iv.75; (f. ˚ikā), 78.
fr. pāṭipada2
(adj.) belonging to one’s equal MN iii.254 sq. (dakkhiṇā).
fr. paṭipuggala
a sponsor AN ii.172; Ud 17; Iti 1 sq.; Ja ii.93; Vism 555 sq.; Dhp-a i.398; Vb-a 165. Patimokkha (pati)
for paṭibhoga (?); difficult to explain, we should suspect a ger. formation *prati-bhogya for *bhujya i.e. “counter-enjoyable,” i.e. one who has to be made use of in place of someone else; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 24.
(nt.) a name given to a collection of various precepts contained in the Vinaya (forming the foundation of the Suttavibhanga, Vin vols. iii & iv. ed. Oldenberg), as they were recited on Uposatha days for the purpose of confession. See Geiger, P. Lit. c. 7, where literature is given; & cp.; Vin. Texts i.27 sq. Franke, Dighanikāya p. 66 sq.;- pāṭimokkhaṃ uddisati to recite the P. Vin i.102, Vin i.112, Vin i.175; Vin ii.259; Vin iii.8 Vin iv.143; Ud 51; opp. ˚ṃ ṭhapeti to suspend the (recital of the) P. Vin ii.240 sq ■ See Vin i.65, Vin i.68; Vin ii.95 Vin ii.240 sq. 249; SN v.187; Snp 340; Dhp 185, Dhp 375; Nd i.365 Vism 7, Vism 11, Vism 16 sq., 36, 292; Dhp-a iii.237 (= jeṭṭhakasīla); iv.111 (id.); Sdhp 342, Sdhp 355, Sdhp 449. -uddesa recitation of the P. Vin i.102; DN ii.46; MN ii.8; Snp-a 199 -uddesaka one who recites the P. Vin i.115, cp. Vin Texts i.242. -ṭhapana suspension of the P. Vin ii.241 sq.; AN v.70. -saṃvara “restraint that is binding on a recluse” (Dial. i.79), moral control under the P Vin iv.51; DN i.62; DN ii.279; DN iii.77, DN iii.266, DN iii.285; AN iii.113 AN iii.135, AN iii.151; AN iv.140; AN v.71, AN v.198; Iti 96, Iti 118; Ud 36; Vism 16 (where expld in detail); Vb-a 323; cp. saṃvuta-pāṭimokkha (adj.) Pv iv.132.
with Childers plausibly as paṭi + mokkha, grd. of muc (Caus. mokṣ˚) with lengthening of paṭi as in other grd. like pāṭidesaniya. Thus in reality the same as paṭimokkha 2 in sense of binding, obligatory obligation, cp. Ja v.25. The spelling is freq. pāti (BB pāṭi˚). The Sk. prāṭimokṣa is a wrong adaptation fr. P. pātimokkha, it should really be pratimokṣya “that which should be made binding.” An expln of the word after the style of a popular etym. is to be found at Vism 16
see pāṭekka.
(adj.) assuming a disguise, deceitful, false Snp 246.
fr. paṭirūpa, cp. paṭirūpaka
striking, that which strikes (with ref. to marking the time) Ja i.121, Ja i.122 (v.l. SS pāṭihāriya)
= pāṭihāra, with pāṭi after analogy of pāṭihāriya
special, extraordinary; only in cpd. ˚pakkha an extra holiday AN i.144; Vv 156 (cp. Vv-a 71, Vv-a 109) Thag-a 38.
= pāṭihāriya or der. fr. pātihāra in meaning of ˚hāriya
(adj.) striking surprising, extraordinary, special; nt. wonder, miracle Usually in stock phrase iddhi˚, ādesanā˚, anusāsanī˚ as the 3 marvels which characterise a Buddha with regard to his teaching (i.e. superhuman power, mind reading giving instruction) DN i.212; DN iii.3 sq.; SN iv.290; AN i.170 AN v.327; Pts ii.227 ■ Further: Vin i.34 (aḍḍhuḍḍha sahassāni); Vism 378, Vism 390 (yamaka˚); Vv-a 158 (id.) Pv-a 137 (id.). For yamaka-pāṭihāriya (or ˚hīra) see yamaka ■ Two kinds of p. are given at Vism 393 viz. pākaṭa˚ and apākaṭa˚ ■ sappāṭihāriya (with ref to the Dhamma) wonderful, extraordinary, sublime as opposed to appāṭi˚ plain, ordinary, stupid MN ii.9 (where Neumann, Majjhima Nikāya ii.318 trsls sa˚ “intelligible” and a˚ “incomprehensible,” referring to Chāndogyopaniṣat i.11, 1); DN ii.104; cp. also Windisch Māra 71.
-pakkha an extra holiday, an ancient festival, not now kept SN i.208 (cp. Thig 31); Snp 402 (cp. expln at Snp-a 378, where var. opinions are given); Ja iv.320 Ja vi.118. See also Kern’s discussion of the term at Toev. ii.30.
grd. formation fr. paṭi + hṛ; (paṭihāra) with usual lengthening of paṭi to pāṭi, as in ˚desanīya ˚mokkha etc. Cp. pāṭihīra; BSk. prātihārya
(adj.) wonderful nt. a wonderful thing, marvel, miracle Pts i.125 (yamaka˚); ii.158 (id.); Mvu 5, Mvu 118; Mil 106; Dāvs i.50; Dhp-a iii.213 ■ appātihīrakathā stupid talk DN i.193 DN i.239; Kv 561 (diff. Kern. Toev. ii.30); opp. sa˚; ibid.
contracted form of pāṭihāriya viâ metathesis *pāṭihāriya → *pāṭihēra → paṭihīra
(f.) at Vv-a 321 in phrase sukka-pakkha-pāṭiyaṃ “in the moonlight half” is doubtful. Hardy in Index registers it as “part, half-,” but pakkha already means “half” and is enough by itself. We should probably read paṭipāṭiyaṃ “successively.” Note that the similar passage Vv-a 314 reads sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṃ Patuka & Patubha;
?
only neg. a˚; (q.v.).
: see pātu˚. Patekka (Patiyekka)
(adj.) several, distinct single Vin i.134; Vin iv.15; Ja i.92 (T. pāṭiekka, SS pāṭiyekka); Vism 249 (pāṭiyekka, SS pāṭiekka), 353, 356 443, 473; Dhp-a iv.7 (pāṭiy˚ SS pāṭieka) ■ nt. ˚ṃ (adv.) singly, separately, individually Vism 409 (pāṭiy˚) Vv-a 141.
paṭi + eka; the diaeretic form of pacceka: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 24
to remove; Pass. pāṭiyati Pv iv.147 (turned out of doors); v.l. pātayati (bring to fall) Prob, in sense of Med. at Mil 152 in phrase visaṃ pāṭiyamāno (doubtful, cp. Kern, Toev. ii.139, & Morris; J.P.T.S. 1884, 87).
Caus. of paṭ;
reading, text-reading; passage of a text, text. Very freq. in Commentaries with phrase “ti pi pāṭho,” i.e. “so is another reading,” e.g. Kp-a 78 Kp-a 223; Snp-a 43 (˚ṃ vikappeti), 178, 192, 477; Pv-a 25 (pamāda˚ careless text), 48, 58, 86 and passim.
fr. paṭh
(-˚) reciter; one who knows, expert Nd i.382 (nakkhatta˚); Ja i.455 (asi-lakkhaṇa˚); ii.21 (angavijjā˚), 250 (id.); v.211 (lakkhaṇa˚ fortune-teller wise man).
fr. pāṭha
the fish Silurus Boalis, a kind of shad Ja iv.70 (C pāṭhīna-nāmakaṃ pāsāṇa-macchaṃ); v.405; vi.449.
cp. Sk. pāṭhīna Manu 5, 16; Halāyudha 3, 36
living being, life, creature DN iii.48, DN iii.63, DN iii.133; SN i.209, SN i.224; SN v.43, SN v.227, SN v.441 (mahā-samudde); AN i.161 AN ii.73, AN ii.176, AN ii.192; Snp 117, Snp 247, Snp 394, Snp 704; Dhp 246; DN-a i.69 DN-a i.161; Kp-a 26; Thag-a 253; Pv-a 9, Pv-a 28, Pv-a 35; Vv-a 72; Dhp-a ii.19 ■ pl. also pāṇāni, e.g. Snp 117; Dhp 270. Bdhgh’s defn of pāṇa is “pāṇanatāya pāṇā; assāsapassās’ āyatta-vuttitāyā ti attho” Vism 310.
-ātipāta destruction of life, murder Vin i.83 (in “dasa sikkhāpadāni,” see also sīla), 85, 193; DN iii.68, DN iii.70, DN iii.149 DN iii.182, DN iii.235; MN i.361; MN iii.23; Snp 242; Iti 63; Ja iii.181 Pp 39 sq.; Ne 27; Vb-a 383 (var. degrees of murder) Dhp-a ii.19; Dhp-a iii.355; DN-a i.69; Pv-a 27. -ātipātin one who takes the life of a living being, destroying life DN iii.82; MN iii.22; SN ii.167; Iti 92; Dhp-a ii.19. -upeta possessed or endowed with life, alive [cp. BSk. prāṇopeta Divy 72, Divy 462 etc.] SN i.173; Snp 157; DN-a i.236 -ghāta slaying life, killing, murder DN-a i.69; -ghātin âtipātin Dhp-a ii.19. -bhu a living being Ja iv.494 -bhūta = ˚bhu MN iii.5; AN ii.210; AN iii.92; AN iv.249 sq. Ja iv.498. -vadha = âtipāta DN-a i.69. -sama equal to or as dear as life Ja ii.343; Dpvs xi.26; Dhp-a i.5. -hara taking away life, destructive MN i.10 = MN iii.97; SN iv.206; AN ii.116, AN ii.143, AN ii.153; AN iii.163.
fr. pa + an, cp. Vedic prāṇa breath of life; P. apāna, etc.
(adj.-n.) (usually -˚) a living being, endowed with (the breath of) life SN iv.198 (chap˚) Dhp-a i.20 (v.l. BB mata˚); sap˚; with life, containing living creatures Ja i.198 (udaka); ap˚; without living beings, lifeless Vin ii.216; MN i.13, MN i.243; SN i.169; Snp p.15 (udaka); Ja i.67 (jhāna).
fr. pāṇa
(nt.) breathing Vism 310 (see pāṇa); Dhātupāṭha 273 (“baḷa” pāṇane).
fr. pāṇa
the hand Vin iii.14 (pāṇinā paripuñchati); MN i.78 (pāṇinā parimajjati) SN i.178, SN i.194; Snp 713; Dhp 124; Ja i.126 (˚ṃ paharati) PugA 249 (id.); Pv-a 56; Sdhp 147, Sdhp 238. As adj. (-˚) “handed,” with a hand, e.g. alla˚; with clean hand Pv ii.99; payata˚; with outstretched hand, open-handed liberal SN v.351; AN iii.287; AN iv.266 sq.; AN v.331.
-tala the palm of the hand DN ii.17. -bhāga handshare division by hands Vv-a 96. -matta of the size of a hand, a handful Pv-a 70, Pv-a 116, Pv-a 119. -ssara hand sound hand music, a cert. kind of musical instrument DN i.6 DN iii.183; DN-a i.84 (cp. Dial i.8), 231; Ja v.390, Ja v.506; cp BSk. pāṇisvara Mvu ii.52. Also adj. one who plays this instrument Ja vi.276; cp. BSk. pāṇisvarika Mvu iii.113.
Vedic pāṇi, cp. Av. pərənā hand, with n-suffix, where we find m-suffix in Gr. παλάμη, Lat. palma, Oir lām, Ohg. folma = Ags. folm
(f.) a sort of spoon Vin ii.151. Cp. puthu-pāṇikā (˚pāṇiyā?) Vin ii.106.
fr. pāṇi; Sk. *pāṇikā
(adj.-n.) having life, a living being SN i.210, SN i.226, Snp 220 (acc. pl. pāṇine, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 952) 587 (id.), 201, 575; Pv-a 287; Dhp-a ii.19.
fr. pāṇa
(-˚) 1. fall DN-a i.95 (ukkā˚); Pv-a 45 (asani˚). The reading “anatthato pātato rakkhito” at Pv-a 61 is faulty we should prefer to read apagato (apāyato? rakkhito.
2. throwing, a throw Snp 987 (muddha˚) Pv-a 57 (akkhi˚). See also piṇḍa.
fr. pat
(nt.) bringing to fall, destroying, killing, only in gabbha˚; destroying the foetus, abortion (q.v. Dhp-a i.47 and passim.
fr. pāteti
(adv.) early in the morning, in foll forms: (1) pātar (before vowels), only in cpd. ˚āsa morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. prātar-aśana Divy 631] DN iii.94; Snp 387; Ja i.232; Vv-a 294, Vv-a 308; Snp-a 374 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍa-pātass’ etaṃ nāmaṃ)-katapātarāsa (adj.) after breakfast Ja i.227; Ja vi.349 (˚bhetta); Vism 391 ■ (2) pāto (abs.) DN iii.94; Dhp-a ii.60; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 126, Pv-a 128; pāto va right early Ja i.226 Ja vi.180 ■ (3) pātaṃ SN i.183; SN ii.242; Thig 407. Note. Should piṇḍa-pāta belong here, as suggested by Bdhgh at Snp-a 374 (see above)? See detail under piṇḍa.
Vedic prātar, der. fr. *prō, *prā, cp. Lat. prandium (fr. prām-edi̯om = pātar-āsa); Gr. πρωί early Ohg. fruo = Ger. früh
(f.) downfall, bringing to fall, felling MN i.305; AN i.266; Vin iv.34 (˚by˚); Vb-a 499.
fr. pāt, see pāteti
to cause to fall, to cause an abortus Vin ii.108; DN-a i.134.
Caus. II. of pāteti
proclivity, cliff, abyss SN i.32, SN i.127, SN i.197; SN iv.206; Thag 1104 (see Brethren 418 for fuller expln); Ja iii.530 (here expld as a cliff in the ocean).
cp. Epic Sk. pātāla an underground cave
to watch, keep watch, keep Ja iii.95 (to keep the eyes open, C. ummisati; opp nimisati); Vism 16 (= rakkhati in def. of pāṭimokkha).
Vedic pāti of pā, cp. Gr. π ̈ωυ herd, ποιμήν shepherd, Lat. pāsco to tend sheep
= pātī, read at Vism 28 for patika.
brought to fall, felled, destroyed Snp 631; Dhp 407; Ja iii.176; Pv-a 31 (so read for patita).
pp. of pāteti
(-˚) (adj.) throwing, shooting, only in cpd. dūre˚; throwing far AN i.284; AN ii.170. See akkhaṇa-vedhin.
fr. pāta
see pāṭi˚. Pati & Pati;
(f.) a bowl, vessel, dish Vin i.157 (avakkāra˚), 352 (id.); ii.216 (id.); MN i.25 (kaṃsa˚), 207; SN ii.233; AN iv.393 (suvaṇṇa˚, rūpiya˚ kaṃsa˚); Ja i.347, Ja i.501; Ja ii.90; Ja v.377 (suvaṇṇa˚) vi.510 (kañcana˚); Vv-a 65; Pv-a 274.
the femin. of patta, which is Vedic pātra (nt.); to this the f. Ved. pātrī
is frequent v.l. for cāṭu-kamyatā, which is probably the correct reading (see this). The meaning (according to Vism 27 = Vb-a 483) is “putting oneself low,” i.e. flattery, “fawning” (Vism trsl. 32). A still more explicit defn is found at Vb-a 338. The diff spellings are as follows: cāṭukamyatā Vism 17, Vism 27 Kp-a 236; Vb-a 338, Vb-a 483; cāṭukammatā Mil 370 pāṭukamyatā Vb 246; pātukamyatā Nd ii.39. See standing phrase under mugga-sūpyatā.
(-˚) (˚pātu) (indecl.) visible open, manifest; only in compn with kṛ; and bhū, and with the rule that pātu˚ appears before cons., whereas pātur˚ stands before vowels. (1) with kṛ; (to make appear): pres. pātukaroti Snp 316; Ja iv.7; Pp 30; Snp-a 423; aor. pātvākāsi SN ii.254; Dhp-a ii.64; pp pātukata Vv 8441 ■ (2) with bhū (to become manifest to appear): pres. pātubhavati DN i.220; DN ii.12, DN ii.15, DN ii.20 DN ii.226; MN i.445; SN iv.78; Pv ii.941 (pot. ˚bhaveyyuṃ) aor. pāturahosi [cp. BSk. prādurabhūt Jtm. 211; Vin i.5; DN i.215; DN ii.20; SN i.137; Pv ii.86; Mil 10, Mil 18; Vv-a 188; pl. pāturahaṃsu Ja i.11, & ˚ahiṃsu Ja i.54. pp. pātubhūta SN iii.39; Dhs 1035; Pv-a 44.
-kamma making visible, manifestation SN ii.254; Dhp-a iv.198. -bhāva appearance, coming into manifestation MN i.50; SN ii.3; SN iv.78; AN i.266; AN ii.130; Snp 560 Snp 998; Ja i.63; Nd ii.s. v.; Vism 437.
cp. Vedic prāduḥ in prādur + bhu; on t for d see Geiger, P.Gr. § 394. As regards etym. Monier Williams suggests prā = pra + dur, door thus “before the door, openly”; cp. dvāra
1. to make fall, drop, throw off SN i.197 (sakuṇo rajaṃ); Ja i.93 (udakaṃ); Mil 305 (sāraṃ).
2. to bring to fall Ja v.198; Mil 187.
3. to kill, destroy, cut off (the head) Ja i.393; Ja iii.177; Pv-a 31 Pv-a 115 ■ pp. pātita. Caus. II. pātāpeti (q.v.) ■ Cp abhi˚. Note. In meaning 3 it would be better to assume confusion with pāṭeti (for phāṭeti = Sk. sphāṭayati to split [ sphuṭ = (s)phal ], see phāleti & phāṭeti In the same sense we find the phrase; kaṭṭhaṃ pāteti to split firewood MN i.21 (MA ereti), besides phāleti.
Caus. of pat
(nt.) “what is necessary for the road,” provisions for a journey, viaticum Vin i.244; SN i.44; Dhp 235, Dhp 237; Ja v.46, Ja v.241; DN-a i.288; Dhp-a i.180; Dhp-a iii.335; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 154.
grd. form. fr. patha
(nt.) = patheyya Pv-a 126.
1. the foot, usually pl. pādā both feet, e.g. Vin i.9, Vin i.34, Vin i.188; Iti 111; Snp 309, Snp 547, Snp 768, Snp 835, Snp 1028; Ja ii.114; Ja iv.137; Dhp-a iii.196; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 40, Pv-a 68; Vv-a 105. In sg. scarce and then specified as eka˚ & dutiya˚, e.g. at Nd;2 304iii Ja vi.354.
2. foot or base of a mountain Vism 399 (Sineru˚); Dhp-a i.108 (pabbata˚).
3. the fourth part (“foot”) of a verse (cp. pada 4) Snp-a 239, Snp-a 273 Snp-a 343, Snp-a 363; Thag-a 23.
4. a coin Vin iii.47; Vv-a 77 (worth here 1/4 of a kahāpaṇa and double the value of māsaka; see also kākaṇikā).
-aṅguṭṭha a toe MN i.337. -aṅguṭṭhaka same Ja ii.447 Vism 233. -aṅguli same Pv-a 125 (opp. to hatth anguli finger). -aṭṭhika bone of the foot MN i.58, MN i.89 MN iii.92; Kp-a 49. -āpacca offspring fr. the foot (of Brahmā): see bandhu. -ūdara “(using) the belly as feet,” i.e. a snake Snp 604. -odaka water for washing the feet Vin i.9. -kathalika (˚iya) acc. to Bdhgh either a foot stool or a towel (adhota-pāda-ṭhapanakaṃ pāda-ghaṃsanaṃ vā, see Vin. Texts i.92; ii.373) Vin i.9, Vin i.46; Vin ii.22; Vin iv.310; Kv 440; Vv-a 8; Dhp-a i.321 -kudārikā holding the feet like an axe (?) Pv iv.147 (expld at Pv-a 240 by pādasankhātā kudārikā; does k. here represent kuṭhārikā? The reading & meaning is uncertain).; -khīla a corn in the foot Vin i.188 (as ˚ālādha, cp. Vin Texts ii.19). -ghaṃsanī a towel for rubbing the feet (dry) Vin ii.130. -cāra moving about on feet Ja iv.104. -tala the sole of the foot Vin i.179; MN iii.90; DN iii.143, DN iii.148; Pv-a 74. -dhovana cleaning or washing one’s feet Dhp-a ii.9. -pa “drinking with the foot,” N. for tree Pv iv.39 (cp. Pv-a 251); Mil 117 Mil 376; Vism 533; Vv-a 212; Sdhp 270. -paricārikā “serving on one’s feet,” i.e. a wife (cp. SN i.125) Ja iii.95 Ja vi.268; Dhp-a iii.194. -pīṭha a foot-stool Vin i.9 (cp Vin. Texts i.92); iv.310; Dhp-a iii.120 = Dhp-a iii.186; Vv-a 291 -puñchana(ka) wiping one’s feet (with a towel) Vism 358 (˚rajju-maṇḍalaka, in comparison = Vb-a 62) Vb-a 285 (˚coḷaka); Kp-a 144; Snp-a 333; Dhp-a i.415 (˚ka). -puñchanī a towel for the feet Vin ii.174 -bbhañjana ointment for the feet, foot-salve Vin i.205; Ja v.197, Ja v.376; Pv-a 44, Pv-a 78; anointing the feet Vv-a 44 (˚tėla), 295 (id.). -mūla the sole of the foot, the foot Ja iv.131. Cp. mūla. -mūlika “one who sits at one’s feet,” a foot-servant, lackey Ja i.122, Ja i.438; Ja ii.300 sq (Gāmaṇicaṇḍa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30. -lola loafing about, one who lingers after a thing, a greedy person Snp 63, Snp 972; Nd i.374; Nd ii.433; abstr. f. ˚lolatā Snp-a 36 & ˚loliya Nd ii.433. -visāṇa “a horn on the foot,” i.e. an impossibility Ja vi.340. -sambāhana massaging the feet Dhp-a i.38.
Vedic pāda, see etym. under pada
(adj. n.) 1. having a foot or basis Vin ii.110 (a˚); Snp 205; Thag-a 78.
2. fundamental pādakaṃ karoti to take as a base or foundation Vism 667.
3. (nt.) basis, foundation, base Pv-a 167. pādaka-jjhāna meditation forming a basis (for further introspective development) Vism 390, Vism 397, Vism 412 sq., 428 667 ■ Cp. āhacca˚.
fr. pāda
is aor. of padāti.
a little foot Ja vi.554.
= pādaka
(f.) a shoe, slipper, clog Vin i.190; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.222; Ja iii.327; Ja iv.129, Ja iv.379 Ja v.298; Ja vi.23; Mil 330; DN-a i.136; Dhp-a iii.451 (muñja˚)-At Vin ii.143 (according to Rh. D.) pādukā (dāru˚) is a kind of stool or stand in a privy.
cp. Epic Sk. pāduka & pādukā
, cp. Gr. πίνω to drink, πότος drink; Obulg piti to drink, pivo drink; Lith. penas milk; Lat. potus drink, poculum drinking vessel (= Sk. pātra, P. patta) drink, including water as well as any other liquid Often combd with anna˚; (food), e.g. Snp 485, Snp 487; Pv i.52; and ˚bhojana (id.) e.g. Dhp 249; Ja i.204. Two sets of 8 drinks are given in detail at Nd i.372 ■ Vin i.245, Vin i.249 (yāgu˚); SN v.375 (majja˚); Snp 82, Snp 398, Snp 924; Ja i.202 (dibba˚); Pp 51; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 8, Pv-a 50.
-āgāra a drinking booth, a tavern Vin ii.267; Vin iii.151; Ja i.302 (= surā-geha C.); Vb 247; Vb-a 339.
Vedic pāna, fr. pā, pibati = Lat. bibo, pp. pīta, Idg. *po[i
(nt.) a drink Ja ii.285; Ja iv.30; Dāvs v.2; Dhp-a iii.207 (amba˚); Vv-a 99, Vv-a 291 ■ Der. pānakatta (abstr. nt.) being provided with drink Ja v.243 (a˚).
fr. pāna
in cpd. pānad’ ûpama at Ja ii.223 is faulty. The meaning is “a badly made sandal,” and the reading should probably be (with v.l. & C.) “dupāhan’ ûpama, i.e. du(ḥ) + upāhanā. The C. expls as “dukkatupāhan’ ûpama.”
(adj. nt.) 1. drinkable SN ii.111.
2. drink, be erage, usually water for drinking Vin ii.207; Vin iv.263; Ja i.198, Ja i.450; Ja iii.491 Ja v.106, Ja v.382; Pv i.107; ii.119, 710; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 5. A reduced form pāniya (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23) is also found, e.g. Vin ii.153; DN i.148; Pv ii.102.
-ghata a pot for drinking water Vin ii.216; Ja vi.76 Ja vi.85. -cāṭika drinking vessel Dhp-a iv.129. -cāṭī id Ja i.302. -ṭhālika drinking cup Vin ii.214; Vin iv.263 -bhājana id. Vin ii.153. -maṇḍapa water reservoir (BSk. id. e.g. Avs ii.86) Vin ii.153. -māḷaka (? Ja vi.85 (Hardy: Flacourtia cataphracta). -sālā a hall where drinking water is given Vin ii.153; Pv-a 102 cp. papā.
Vedic pānīya, fr. pāna
see panudati.
(adj. nt.) 1. (adj.) evil, bad, wicked, sinful AN ii.222 sq. (and compar. pāpatara); Snp 57; Dhp 119 (opp. bhadra) Other compar-superl. forms are pāpiṭṭha SN v.96 pāpiṭṭhatara Vin ii.5; pāpiyyasika DN iii.254. See pāpiya.
2. unfertile (of soil) SN iv.315.
3. (nt. evil, wrong doing, sin Snp 23, Snp 662; Dhp 117 (opp. puñña 183; Pv i.66; 112; iv.150; Dhp-a ii.11 ■ pp. pāpāni Snp 399, Snp 452, Snp 674; Dhp 119, Dhp 265.
-iccha having bad wishes or intentions Vin i.97; DN iii.246; SN i.50; SN ii.156; AN iii.119, AN iii.191, AN iii.219 sq.; AN iv.1 AN iv.22, AN iv.155; AN v.123 sq.; Snp 133, Snp 280; Iti 85; Nd ii.342 Vism 24 (def.); Vb-a 476; -icchatā evil intention AN iv.160, AN iv.165; Dhp-a ii.77. -kamma evil doing, wickedness sin, crime DN iii.182; Iti 86; Snp 407; Dhp 127 Vism 502; Vb-a 440 sq.; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 25, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 51, Pv-a 84 -kammanta evil-doer, villain SN i.97. -kammin id MN i.39; Dhp 126. -kara id. Snp 674. -karin id. Dhp 15 Dhp 17. -dassana sinful view Pv iv.355. -dhamma wickedness evil habit Dhp 248, Dhp 307; Pp 37; Dhp-a iii.4; Pv-a 98; as adj. at Pv-a. 58. -dhammin one of evil character or habits Pv i.117. -parikkhaya decay or destruction of demerit (opp. puñña˚) Pv ii.615. -mitta an evil associate, a bad companion (opp. kalyāṇa˚ MN i.43, MN i.470; DN iii.182. -mittatā bad company, association with wicked people AN i.13 sq., 83; iv.160, 165; DN iii.212; Dhs 13, Dhs 27; Vb 359, Vb 369, Vb 371. -saṅkappa evil thought Snp 280. -sīla bad morals Snp 246. -supina an evil dream (opp. bhaddaka) Vism 312; Dhp-a iii.4.
Vedic pāpa, cp. Lat. patior≈E. passion etc.; Gr. π ̈ημα suffering, evil; ταλαίπωρος suffering evil
(adj.) bad, wicked, wretched, sinful Vin i.8; SN i.149, SN i.207; SN v.418 (p. akusala citta); Snp 127 Snp 215, Snp 664; Dhp 66, Dhp 78, Dhp 211, Dhp 242; Ja i.128; Pv ii.716 (= lāmaka C.); ii.93; Pp 19; Dhs 30, Dhs 101; Mil 204 (opp kalyāṇa); Vism 268 (= lāmaka), 312 (of dreams, opp bhaddaka) ■ f. pāpikā Dhp 164, Dhp 310; a˚; without sin innocent, of a young maiden (daharā) Thig 370; Vv 314; 326 (so expld by Vv-a, but Thag-a explns as faultless, i.e. beautiful).
fr. pāpa
(adj. n.) belonging to a shop, i.e. 1. a shopkeeper AN i.115 sq.
2. laid out in the shop (of cīvara) Vin i.255; Vism 62 (= āpaṇa-dvāre patitaka). See also Vin. Texts ii.156.
pa + āpaṇa + ika
= pāpaka DN i.90 (cp. DN-a i.256); AN iv.197.
one who has done wrong, sinful, evil MN ii.43 (where DN i.90 at id. p has pāpika); DN-a i.256 (for pāpika, v.l. vāpita).
pp. of pāpeti1, in meaning = pāpika
(adj. n.) sinful; a sinner, esp. used as Ep. of Māra, i.e. the Evil, the wicked one SN i.103; AN iv.434; Ud 64; Snp 430; Thag 1213; Mil 155 sq.; Dhp-a iv.32.
fr. pāpa, cp. Vedic pāpman
(adj.) worse, more evil or wicked SN i.162, SN i.202; Snp 275; Dhp 42, Dhp 76; Ja i.158; Ja iv.303; Mil 155; Dhp-a ii.108.
compar. of pāpa, cp. Sk. pāpīyas
(nt.) attainment Ja iv.306.
fr. pāpuṇāti
to reach, attain, arrive at, obtain, get to learn ■ pres. pāpuṇāti Vin ii.208; Ja iv.285; Ja vi.149; Pp 70; DA 21; Pv-a 74, Pv-a 98 Pv-a 125, Pv-a 195; and pappoti SN i.25; Dhp 27; Vism 501; Dhp-a i.395; pot. pāpuṇe Snp 324; Dhp 138; Ja v.57 (1st pl pāpuṇeyyāma for T. pappomu); Dhp-a iv.200. aor apāpuṇi Thag-a 64, and pāpuṇi Ja ii.229. pret. apattha Ja v.391 (proh. mā a.). fut. pāpuṇissati Ja i.260. ger pāpuṇitvā SN ii.28; patvā Snp 347, Snp 575, and pappuyya SN i.7 (cp. Vin ii.56; AN i.138), 181, 212. inf. pappotuṃ Si. 129 = Thig 60, and pāpuṇituṃ Vb-a 223 ■ grd pattabba SN i.129; SN ii.28; Snp-a 433 ■ pp. patta; Caus pāpeti2 (q.v.).
pa + āp; cp. Sk. prāpnoti
(nt.) cover, dress, cloak SN i.175; Mil 279; Dhp-a iii.1. See also pārupana.
through *pāvuraṇa fr. pra + vṛ; cp. Sk. prāvaraṇa
to cover, veil; shut, hide; only neg. a˚; and only in phrase apāpurati Amatassa dvāraṃ to open the door of Nibbāna Vin i.5; Vv 6427 (= vivarati Vv-a 284).
fr. pa + ā + vṛ; cp. Vedic pravṛṇoti
to make bad, bring into disgrace Vin iv.5 ■ pp. pāpita.
Denom. fr. pāpa
to make attain, to let go to, to cause to reach, to bring to Ja iv.494; Ja v.205, Ja v.260; DN-a i.136. imper. pāpaya SN i.217, and pāpayassu Ja iv.20. fut. pāpessati Ja i.260 and pāpayissati Ja v.8.
Caus. of pāpuṇāti
brought, conveyed DN-a i.262; Snp-a 356 (kathā˚).
pa + ābhata
(nt.) “that which has been brought here,” viz. 1. a present, bribe DN-a i.262. 2. money, price Ja i.122; Ja v.401, Ja v.452 ■ kathā˚; “a tale brought,” occasion for something to tell, news, story Ja i.252, Ja i.364, Ja i.378; Snp-a 356.
pa + ā + pp. of bhṛ;
(nt.) a band or chain Vin ii.106; Vin iii.48; Mvu 11, Mvu 28; Dpvs xii.1; Dhp-a iv.216. See on this Vin. Texts iii.69 & Mvu trsl. 797.
etym.?
(nt.) delight, joy, happiness; often combd with pīti ■ DN i.72, DN i.196; SN iii.134; SN iv.78 = SN iv.351; SN v.156 SN v.398; AN iii.21; AN v.1 sq., 311 sq., 339, 349; Snp 256; Ne 29; DN-a i.217; Sdhp 167. See also pāmojja.
grd. form. tr. pa + mud, see similar forms under pāmokkha
(adj.) 1. chief, first, excellent eminent, (m.) a leader ■ AN ii.168 (sanga sa˚); Pp 69 Pp 70; Mil 75 (hatthi˚ state elephant). disā˚ worldfamed Ja i.166, Ja i.285; Ja ii.278; Ja vi.347 ■ Freq. in series agga seṭṭha pāmokkha attama, in exegesis of mahā (at Nd ii.502 A e.g. , when AN ii.95 reads mokkha for p.). See mahā. Defd as “pamukhe sādhū ti” at Vb-a 332.
2. facing east Pv iv.353 (= pācīna-dis âbhimukha).
a grd. form. fr. pamukha, with lengthening of a as frequently in similar forms like pāṭidesanīya pāṭimokkha, pāmojja
= pāmujja DN ii.214; DN iii.288; MN i.37, MN i.98; SN i.203; SN ii.30 SN v.157; Dhp 376, Dhp 381; Pts i.177; Dhs 9, Dhs 86; Mil 84 Vism 2, Vism 107, Vism 177 (T. pa˚); Dhp-a iv.111 (˚bahula).
Cp. BSk. prāmodya Divy 13, Divy 82, Divy 239
setting out, starting SN ii.218 (nava˚ newly setting out); instr. pāyena (adv.) for the most part, commonly, usually Ja v.490; DN-a i.275 (so read for pāṭhena).
fr. pa + ā + yā
(-˚) drinking Ja i.252 (vāruṇi˚)
fr. pā to drink
gone forth, set out, started Ja i.146.
pp of pāyāti
to set out, start, go forth Dhp-a ii.42; aor. 3rd sg. pāyāsi DN ii.73; Ja i.64, Ja i.223; Ja iii.333; Vv-a 64; Pv-a 272; Pv-a 3rd pl. pāyesuṃ Ja iv.220, and pāyiṃsu DN ii.96; Ja i.253; Dhp-a iii.257 ■ pp. pāyāta (q.v.) See also the quasi synonymous abhiyāti.
pra + ā + yā
rice boiled in milk, milk-rice, rice porridge SN i.166; Snp p.15; Ja i.50, Ja i.68 Ja iv.391; Ja v.211; Vism 41; Snp-a 151; Dhp-a i.171; Dhp-a ii.88; Vv-a 32.
cp. Class. Sk. pāyāsa
(adj. n.) drinking Ja iii.338.
fr. pā, see pivati
1. to give to drink, to make drink DN ii.19; Snp 398 (Pot. pāyaye); Mil 43 Mil 229; Dhp-a i.87 (amataṃ); Vv-a 75 (yāguṃ); Pv-a 63 aor. apāyesi SN i.143; ger. pāyetvā Ja i.202 (dibba-pānaṃ) ii.115 (lohitaṃ); iii.372 (phāṇīt’ odakaṃ); iv.30 (pānakaṃ); vi.392 (suraṃ).
2. to irrigate Ja i.215 ■ ppr f. pāyamānā a woman giving suck, a nursing woman DN i.166; MN i.77; AN i.295; AN ii.206; AN iii.227; Pp 55; Dhp-a i.49 ■ Caus. II. pāyāpeti Ja v.422.
Caus. fr. pā, see pibati
(adj.-n..) 1. as adv. (˚-) beyond, over, across, used as prep. with abl., e.g. pāra-Gangāya beyond the G. SN i.207, SN i.214; Snp-a 228. See under cpds
2. as nt. the other side, the opposite shore SN i.169 SN i.183; Snp 1059; Nd i.20 (= amataṃ nibbānaṃ); Dhp 385; Dhp-a iv.141 aparā pāraṃ gacchati to go from this side to the other (used with ref. to this world & the world beyond) SN iv.174; AN v.4; Snp 1130; pāraṃ gavesino MN ii.64 = Thag 771
3. Cases adverbially: acc. pāraṃ see sep.; abl. pārato from the other side Vin ii.209
3. the guṇa form of para, another: see cpds.:
-atthika (pār’) wishing to cross beyond DN i.244 -ga “going beyond,” traversing, crossing, surmounting SN iv.71 (jātimaraṇassa); Snp 32, Snp 997. -gata one who has reached the opposite shore SN i.34; SN ii.277 SN iv.157; AN iv.411; Snp 21, Snp 210, Snp 359; Dhp 414; Vv 531 (cp. Vv-a 231); one who has gone over to another party Thag 209. -gavesin looking for the other shore Dhp 355; Dhp-a iv.80. -gāmin = gata SN i.123; AN v.232 sq. 253 sq.; Dhp-a ii.160. -gū (a) gone beyond, i.e. passed transcended, crossed SN i.195 = Nd ii.136a (dukkhassa) iv.210 (bhavassa); AN ii.9 (id.); iii.223; Iti 33 (jarāya) Dhp 348. (b) gone to the end of (gen. or ■ ˚), reached perfection in, well-versed in, familiar with, an authority on Snp 992 (sabbadhammānaṃ), 1105 (cp. Nd ii.435) DN i.88 (tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ); Dhp-a iii.361 (id.). -dārika an adulterer, lit. one of another’s wife SN ii.259; Ja iii.43 (so read for para˚); Dhp-a ii.10.
fr. para
(adv ■ prep.) beyond, to the other side DN i.244; MN i.135; Snp 1146 (Maccu-dheyya˚, vv. ll ˚dheyassa & ˚dheyya˚), expl;d by Nd ii.487 as amataṃ nibbānaṃ; Vv-a 42.
-gata (cp. pāragata) gone to the other side, gone beyond, traversed, transcended MN i.135; SN ii.277; Snp 803; Nd i.114; Nd ii.435; Pp 72; Vism 234. -gamana crossing over, going beyond SN v.24, SN v.81; AN v.4 AN v.313; Snp 1130.
acc. of pāra
(f.) = pāramī Ne 87.
pāramī + tā
(f.) completeness, perfection, highest state Snp 1018, Snp 1020; Pp 70; Dhp-a i.5; Vv-a 2 (sāvakañāṇa˚); Pv-a 139; Sdhp 328. In later literature there is mentioned a group of 10 perfections (dasa pāramiyo as the perfect exercise of the 10 principal virtues by a Bodhisatta, viz. dāna˚, sīla˚, nekkhamma˚, paññā˚ viriya˚, khanti˚, sacca˚, adhiṭṭhāna˚, mettā˚, upekhā Ja i.73; Dhp-a i.84.
-ppatta (pārami˚) having attained perfection MN iii.28; Nd ii.435; Mil 21 Mil 22; cp. Mil trsl. i.34.
abstr. fr. parama, cp. BSk. mantrāṇāṃ pāramiṃ gata Divy 637
one who has committed a grave transgression of the rules for bhikkhus; one who merits expulsion (see on term Vin. Texts i.3 Mil trsln i.268; ii.78) Vin i.172; Vin ii.101, Vin ii.242; AN ii.241 AN iii.252; AN v.70; Ja vi.70, Ja vi.112; Mil 255; Vism 22; Kp-a 97, Dhp-a i.76 (as one of the divisions of the Suttavibhanga see also Vin iii.1 sq.).
etym. doubtful; suggested are parā + aj (Burnouf); para + ji; pārācika (S. Lévi, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 38, n. 3; also Childers s. v.)
a dove, pigeon Ja i.242; Ja v.215; Vv-a 167 (˚akkhi); Pgdp 45. See the doublet pārevata.
Epic Sk. pārāvata
(nt.) the highest (farthest) point, final aim, chief object, ideal; title of the last Vagga of the Sutta Nipāta AN iii.401; Snp 1130; Nd ii.438; Snp-a 163, Snp-a 370 Snp-a 604.
late Sk. pārāyaṇa, the metric form of parāyana
= parikkhattatā, Pp 19 = Vb-a 358.
(f.) same as paricariya serving, waiting on, service, ministration, honour (for = loc.) DN iii.189, DN iii.250 DN iii.281; MN ii.177; SN iv.239; AN ii.70; AN iii.284, AN iii.325, AN iii.328; Ja iii.408; Ja iv.490; Ja v.154, Ja v.158 (kilesa˚); Pv-a 7, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 128 Cp. BSk. pāricāryā Mvu ii.225.
= pāricchattaka, Snp 64 (˚ka Nd ii.439; expld as koviḷāra); Ja v.393.
the coral tree Erythmia Indica, a tree in Indra’s heaven Vin i.30; AN iv.117 sq.; Vv 381 (expld as Māgadhism at Vv-a 174 for pārijāta, which is also the BSk. form) Ja i.40; Ja ii.20; Kp-a i.122; Snp-a 485; Dhp-a i.273; Dhp-a iii.211; Dhs-a 1; Vv-a 12, Vv-a 110; Pv-a 137.
Epic Sk. pārijāta, but P. fr. pari + chatta + ka, in pop. etym. “shading all round”
= pāricchattaka, Vv-a 174.
(nt.) 1. decay, loss MN ii.66; Dhp-a i.238; Vv-a 101 (bhoga˚)
2. loss of property, poverty Pv-a 3.
abstr. fr. parijuṇṇa, pp. of pari + jur
1. highwayman, robber SN ii.188; Ja v.253.
2. connected with danger, threatening dangerous to (-˚) Vism 152; PugA 181 (samādhi˚ vipassanā˚).
fr. paripantha
(f.) fulfilment, completion, consummation SN i.139; AN v.114 sq.; Snp 1016; Ja vi.298; Nd ii.137 (pada˚) Snp-a 28 (id.); Pp 53; Dhs 1367; Dhp-a i.36; Pv-a 132 Pv-a 133; Vb-a 468 (˚mada conceit of perfection).
abstr. fr. pari + pūr, cp. BSk. pāripūri Avs ii.107
(adj.) yonder, farther, only combd with ˚tīra the farther shore DN i.244; MN i.134 MN i.135; SN iv.174; Mil 269; Dhp-a ii.100. Cp. BSk pārimaṃ tīraṃ Avs i.148.
superl. form. fr. pāra
(nt.) (& der.) “petting (or spoiling) the children” (Mil trsl. ii.287) but perhaps more likely “fondness of being petted” or “nurture (as Vism trsl. 32) (being carried about like on the lap or the back of a nurse, as expln at Vism 28 = Vb-a 483) The readings are different, thus we find ˚bhaṭyatā at Vb 240; Vb-a 338, Vb-a 483; ˚bhatyatā at Vism 17, Vism 23 Vism 27 (vv.ll. ˚bhaṭṭatā & ˚bbhaṭṭatā); ˚bhaṭṭakatā at Mil 370; ˚bhaṭṭatā at Vb 352; Kp-a 236; Nd ii.39. The more det. expln at Vb-a 338 is “alankāra-karaṇ ādīhi dāraka-kīḷāpanaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.”-See stock phrase under mugga-sūpyatā.
fr. pari + ; bhṛ;
(adj.) belonging to use or enjoyment, with ref. to relics of personal use Ja iv.228 (one of the 3 cetiyas, viz. sarīrika, pāribhogika, uddesika); Mil 341 (id.).
fr. paribhoga
(adj.) = pari˚; changing, turning round (of cīvara) Vin iv.59, Vin iv.60. Parivasika = pari
(a probationer), Vin i.136; Vin ii.31 sq., where distinguished from a pakatatta bhikkhu, a regular, ordained bh. to whom a pārivāsika is inferior in rank.
belonging to an assembly, pl. the members of an assembly, esp. those who sit in council councillors (cp. BSk. pāriṣadya councillor Divy 291; Vin i.348; DN i.136; DN iii.64, DN iii.65; MN i.326; SN i.145, SN i.222; AN i.142; Mil 234; DN-a i.297.
fr. parisā
(f.) purity Vin i.102, Vin i.136 (cp. Vin. Texts i.242, 280); MN iii.4; AN ii.194 sq. (˚padhāniy’ angāni, the four, viz. sīlapārisuddhi, citta˚ diṭṭhi˚, vimutti˚); Nd i.475; Pts i.42 (˚sīla); Dhs 165; Mil 336 (ājīva˚, and in 4th jhāna); Vism 30 (= parisuddhatā), 46 (˚sīla), 278; Dhp-a iii.399 (catu˚-sīla) iv.111 (ājīva˚); Sdhp 342.
fr. parisuddha
(adj.) connected with preservation or attention, fostering, keeping Vism 3 (˚paññā) 98 (˚kammaṭṭhāna); Snp-a 54 (id.).
fr. parihāra
covered, dressed SN i.167, SN i.175; Thag 153; Ja i.59, Ja i.347; Snp-a 401; Pv-a 48, Pv-a 161 ■ duppāruta not properly dressed (without the upper robe Vin i.44; Vin ii.212; SN ii.231, SN ii.271. See also abhipāruta Note. The form apāruta is apparently only a neg. pāruta in reality it is apa + ā + vṛta.
pp. of pārupati
to cover, dress, hide, veil DN i.246; Vin iv.283; MN iii.94; SN ii.281; Ja ii.24, Ja ii.109; Pv ii.112 (= nivāseti Pv-a 147); Mvu 22, Mvu 67; Vism 18; Dhp-a iii.325; Vv-a 44, Vv-a 127; Pv-a 73, Pv-a 74, Pv-a 77 ■ pp pāruta (q.v.).
metathesis fr. pāpurati = Sk. prāvṛṇoti, pra + vṛ; see also pāpurati etc.
(nt.) covering, clothing; dress Ja i.126, Ja i.378; Ja iii.82; Mil 279; Dhp-a i.70, Dhp-a i.164; Pv-a 74 Pv-a 76.
fr. pārupati
to make go through, to bore through, pierce, break (?) Ja iii.185 (reading uncertain).
Denom. fr. pāra; cp. Lat. portare
1. a dove, pigeon AN i.162 (dove-coloured); Vv 363 (˚akkhi pārāpat’ akkhi Vv-a 167); Ja vi.456.
2. a species of tree, Diospyros embryopteris Ja vi.529, Ja vi.539.
the Prk. form (cp. Māgadhi pārevaya) of the Sk. pārāpata, which appears also as such in P.
1. a small (side) branch, new twig (of a Nigrodha tree) Ja v.8, Ja v.38, Ja v.472 Ja vi.199; Snp-a 304; Pv-a 113.
2. a shoot, sprout (from the root of a tree, tillering) SN i.69 (see C. expln at K.S. 320); Ja vi.15; Dhp-a ii.70; Vb-a 475; Vb-a 476.
fr. pra + ruh, cp. Sk. *prāroha
(-˚) a guard, keeper, guardian, protector SN i.185 (vihāra˚); Ja v.222 (dhamma˚); Vv-a 288 (ārāma˚); Sdhp 285. See also go˚, loka˚.
fr. pā, see pāleti
(-˚) a guardian, herdsman MN i.79; SN iii.154; AN iv.127; Ja iii.444.
fr. pā
(nt.) (& pālanā? ) moving running, keeping going, living, in phrase vutti pālana yapana etc. at Vism 145; Dhs-a 149 Dhs-a 167; also in defn of bhuñjati1 as “pālan’ ajjhohāresu” by eating drinking for purposes of living, at Dhtp 379. As; pālanā at the Dhs passages of same context as above (see under yapana ).
fr. pāleti 2, to all likelihood for palāyana through *pālāna, with false analogy
(f.) guarding, keeping Ja i.158; Dhs 19, Dhs 82,295. Pali (Pali)
fr. pāleti cp. Ep. Sk. pālana nt.
(f.) 1. a line, row Dāvs iii.61; Dāvs iv.3; Vism 242 (dvattiṃs’ ākāra˚), 251 (danta˚); Snp-a 87.
2. a line, norm thus the canon of Buddhist writings; the text of the Pāli Canon, i.e. the original text (opp. to the Commentary; thus “pāliyaṃ” is opposed to “aṭṭhakathāyaṃ” at Vism 107, Vism 450, etc). It is the literary language of the early Buddhists, closely related to Māgadhī. See Grierson, The Home of Lit. Pāli (Bhandarkar Commemoration vol. p. 117 sq.), and literature given by Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt., ii.10; iii.606, 635. The word is only found in Commentaries, not in the Piṭaka See also Hardy, Introd. to Nett, p. xi ■ Ja iv.447 (˚nayena accord. to the Pāli Text); Vism 376 (˚nay’ anusārena id.), 394, 401, 565 (˚anusārato accord. to the text of the Canon); 607, 630, 660 sq., 693, 712; Kp-a 41; Snp-a 333, Snp-a 424, Snp-a 519, Snp-a 604; Dhs-a 157, Dhs-a 168; Dhp-a iv.93; Vv-a 117, Vv-a 203 (pālito + aṭṭhuppattito); Pv-a 83, Pv-a 87, Pv-a 92 Pv-a 287; and freq. elsewhere.
-vaṇṇanā is explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual criticism, as opposed to vinicchaya-kathā analysis, exegesis, interpretation of sense Vb 291; Vism 240 (contrasted to bhāvanāniddesa).
cp. Sk. pālī a causeway, bridge Halāyudha iii.54
(adj.) covered round (of sandals Vin i.186 (Vin. Texts ii.15: laced boots); v.l. BB ˚gunṭhika.
doubtful, fr pali + guṇṭh, see paliguṇṭhita; hapax legomenon
(nt.) greyness of hair MN i.49; SN ii.2, SN ii.42; AN iii.196; Dhs 644, Dhs 736, Dhs 869; Vb-a 98.
fr. palita
the tree Butea frondosa Ja iv.205; Nd ii.680Aii Vism 256 (˚aṭṭhi); Vb-a 239 (id.); Kp-a 46, Kp-a 53; Dhs-a 14; Dhp-a i.383. As phālibhaddaka (-vana) at Ja ii.162 (v.l. pātali˚).
fr. palibhadda = pari + bhadda, very auspicious
1. to protect, guard, watch, keep Snp 585; Ja i.55; Ja iv.127; Ja vi.589; Mil 4 (paṭhavī lokaṃ pāleti, perhaps in meaning “keeps holds, encircles,” similar to meaning 2); Sdhp 33. 2. (lit. perhaps “to see through safely”; for palāyati by false analogy) to go on, to move, to keep going in defn of carati as viharati, iriyati, vattati, pāleti yapeti, yāpeti at Nd ii.237; Vb 252; Dhs-a 167. Cp pālana. So also in phrase atthaṃ pāleti (so read for paleti?) “to come home” i.e. to disappear Snp 1074 (see expld Nd ii.28). See other refs. under palāyati. pp. pālita. See also abhi˚ & pari˚. A contracted (poetical) form is found as; pallate at Ja v.242, expld by C. as pālayati (pālayate), used as Med ■ Pass.
cp. (Epic) Sk. pālayati, fr. pā
(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) pure, bright, clear, shining Ja v.419.
2. (m.) the fire SN i.69; AN iv.97; Dhp 71, Dhp 140; Ja iv.26; Ja v.63 (= kaṇha-vattanin vi.236 (= aggi C.); Pv i.85; Vism 170 (= aggi).
fr. pu, Vedic pāvaka
(nt.) a word, esp. the word of the Buddha DN i.88; SN ii.259; Thag 587; Thag 2, Thag 457.
pa + vacana, with lengthening of first a (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 331)
to speak out, to tell, show Ja ii.439; Pv iv.148; Pv-a 118.
= pavadati
see pavassati.
1. a cloak, mantle Vin i.281; Ja v.409 (expld as pavara-dibba-vattha!).
2. the mango tree Kp-a 58 (˚puppha; Vism 258 at id. p. has pāvāraka˚).
fr. pa + vṛ;
a cloak-seller (?) Vin iv.250.
fr. pāvāra
hair; only in cpd. ˚nipphoṭanā pulling out one’s hair SN iv.300. Pavisa & Pavekkhi;
see pavāḷa
see pavisati.
(nt.) cloak, mantle MN i.359; Vin iv.255, Vin iv.289; Thag-a 22.
fr. pa + ā + vṛ; see pāpuraṇa & pārupana
1. rain, the rainy season (its first 2 months) Thag 597; Ja v.202 Ja v.206.
2. a sort of fish Ja iv.70 (gloss pāgusa, q.v.).
pa + vṛṣ, cp. Vedic prāvṛṣa & pravarṣa
(adj.) raining, shedding rain MN i.306; SN v.51; AN iv.127; Ja i.95, Ja i.96; Mil 114.
fr. pāvusa
a sling, snare, tie, fetter SN i.105, SN i.111; AN ii.182; AN iv.197; Vin iv.153 (? hattha˚); Snp 166; Iti 36 (Māra˚); Ja iii.184; Ja iv.414; Pv-a 206. On its frequent use in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 111.
Vedic pāśa
a spear, a throw Snp 303; AN iv.171 (kuṭhāri˚ throw of an axe) ■ asi˚; a class of deities Mil 191.
Class. Sk. prāsa fr. pra + as
(a stone?) at Pv-a 63 (pās’ antare) is probably a misreading and to be corrected to palāsa (palās’ antare similarly to rukkh’ antare, kaṭṭh’-and mūl’ antare) foliage.
(adj.) to be praised praiseworthy MN i.15, MN i.404; MN ii.227 (dasa ˚ṭṭhānāni) AN v.129 (id.); Ja iii.493; Pv iv.713; Ne 52.
grd. fr. pasaṃsati with pā for pa as in similar formations (see pāmokkha)
a bow, for the dress Vin ii.136; for the hair Thig 411 (if Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 45, 46, is right to be corr. fr. pasāda).
fr. pāsa1
a throw, a die Ja vi.281.
fr. pāsa2
lintel Vin ii.120 = Vin ii.148 (see Vin. Texts iii.144).
heresy, sect SN i.133, AN ii.466; Thig 183; Mil 359; Thag-a 164. -˚ika heretic sectarian Vin iv.74.
cp. late Sk. pāṣaṇḍa
(?) only in “sammaṃ pāsanti” at Snp-a 321 as expln of sammāpāsa (q.v.).
a rock, stone AN i.283; Snp 447; Ja i.109, Ja i.199; Ja v.295; Vism 28, Vism 182, Vism 183; Vb-a 64 (its size as cpd with pabbata); Dhp-a iii.151; Dhs-a 389; Vv-a 157; Sdhp 328.
-guḷa a ball of (soft) stone, used for washing (pumice stone?) AN ii.200 (sāla-laṭṭhiṃ… taccheyya… likheyya… pāsāṇaguḷena dhopeyya… nadiṃ patāreyya), cp. MN i.233; and Vism 28 “bhājane ṭhapitaṃ guḷapiṇḍaṃ viya pāsāṇaṃ.” -cetiya a stone Caitya Dhp-a iii.253. -tala a natural plateau Ja i.207. -piṭṭhe at the back of a rock Vism 116. -pokkharaṇī a natural tank Vism 119. -phalaka a slab of stone Ja iv.328 -macchaka a kind of fish (stone-fish) Ja iv.70; Ja vi.450 -lekha writing on a stone Pp 32. -sakkharā a little stone, fragment of rock SN ii.137; AN iv.237. -sevāla stone Vallisneria Ja v.462. -vassa rain of stones Snp-a 224.
Epic Sk. pāṣāṇa
= pāsāṇa Vin ii.211.
a lofty platform, a building on high foundations, a terrace, palace Vin i.58, Vin i.96, Vin i.107, Vin i.239; Vin ii.128, Vin ii.146, Vin ii.236 (cp. Vin. Texts i.174; iii.178); DN ii.21; SN i.137; AN i.64; Snp 409; Iti 33; Pv ii.125; Ja ii.447; Ja iv.153 (pillars); v.217; Vism 339 (˚tala); Dhs-a 107; Snp-a 502; Thag-a 253, Thag-a 286; Vv-a 197; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 279 (cp. upari˚); Sdhp 299 ■ satta-bhū- maka˚; a tower with 7 platforms Ja i.227, Ja i.346; Ja iv.323 Ja iv.378; Ja v.426, Ja v.577. The Buddha’s 3 castles at DN ii.21; AN i.145; Ja vi.289. See also J.P.T.S. 1907, 112 (p. in similes).
pa + ā + sad, cp. Class. Sk. prāsāda
(adj.) 1. pleasing, pleasant, lovely, amiable Vin iv.18; DN iii.141; SN i.95; SN ii.279; AN ii.104 sq. 203; iii.255 sq.; Dhp-a i.119; Thag-a 266, Thag-a 281; DN-a i.141 DN-a i.281; Vv-a 6; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 186, Pv-a 187, Pv-a 261 ■ samanta˚; lovely throughout AN i.24; AN v.11.
2. comfortable Vism 105.
fr. pasāda
(adj.) bringing forth SN v.170; Ja i.394.
fr. pasavati
a rib Vin ii.266. (loop? Rh.D.).
for the usual phāsuka
a rib Vin iii.105.
for phāsuka
fat. of pibati (for pivissati).
(m. nt.) 1. (m.) a guest AN iii.260; Ja vi.24, Ja vi.516.
2. (nt.) meal for a guest DN i.97 = MN ii.154; Vism 220; DN-a i.267.
fr. pa + ā + hu, see also āhuna & der.
(m ■ nt.) 1. (m.) a guest Ja i.197; Ja iv.274; Mil 107; DN-a i.267, DN-a i.288; Dhp-a ii.17.
2. (nt. meal for a guest SN i.114.
fr. pāhuna
(adj.) worthy of hospitality, deserving to be a guest DN iii.5; SN i.220 SN ii.70; AN ii.56; AN iii.36, AN iii.134, AN iii.248, AN iii.387; AN iv.13 sq.; AN v.67 AN v.198; Iti 88; Vism 220.
fr. pāhuna, see also āhuneyya
= pāhuṇeyya Ja iii.440.
to send Ja i.447; Mil 8; Pv-a 133.
secondary form. after aor. pāhesi fr. pahiṇati
(indecl.) emphatic particle, as prefix only in pidahati and pilandhati where api˚ also is found (cp. api 1b).
1. also, and also, even so DN i.1; Vin iv.139 (cara pi re get away with you: see re); Ja i.151, Ja i.278.
2. even, just so; with numbers or num. expressions “altogether, in all, just that many” Ja i.151; Ja iii.275; Ja iv.142 ■ cattāro pi Ja iii.51; ubho pi Ja i.223; sabbe pi Snp 52; Ja i.280. 3. but, however, on the other hand, now (continuing a story) Ja i.208; Ja iv.2.
4. although, even if Ja ii.110 (ciram pi kho… ca although for a long time… yet).
5. perhaps, it is time that, probably Snp 43; Ja i.151; Ja ii.103.
6. pi… pi in correlation (like api… api ): (a) both… and; very often untranslatable Snp 681 (yadā pi… tadā pi when… then), 808 (diṭṭhā pi sutā pi); Ja i.222 (jale pi thale pi) (b) either… or Ja i.150; Ja ii.102.
the enclitic form of api (cp. api 2a); on similarities in Prk. see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 143
crushed, ground, pounded Dhp-a iii.184 (v.l. piṭṭha, perhaps preferable).
pp. of piṃsati2
or piṃś, cp. Vedic piṃśati, with two bases viz. Idg. *peig, as in P. piñjara & pingala; Lat. pingo to paint, embroider; and *peik, as in Sk. piṃśati, peśaḥ Av. paes-to embellish; Gr. ποικίλος many-coloured Goth. fēh, Ags. fāh id. See detail in Walde, Lat Wtb. under pingo] to adorn, form, embellish; orig. to prick, cut. Perhaps piṃsare (3. pl. med.) Ja v.202 belongs here, in meaning “tinkle, sound” (lit. prick) expld in C. by viravati. Other der. see under pingala piñjara, pesakāra.
or piṃṣ, Vedic pinaṣṭi, cp. Lat. pinso to grind, pīla = pestle, pistillum = pistil; Lith. paisýti to pound barley; Gr. πτίσσω id.; Ohg. fesa = Nhg. fese] 1. to grind, crush, pound Ja i.452; Ja ii.363; Ja iv.3 (matthakaṃ) 440 (akaluñ candanañ ca silāya p.); Mil 43; Dhp-a iii.184 (gandhe piṃsissati; BB pisissati).
2. to knock against each other, make a sound Ja v.202: see piṃsati1 ■ pp. piṃsa & piṭṭha;1. See also pisati and paṭi˚.
a young shoot, sprout Ja iii.389 (v.l. singa, which also points to pinga expld by pavāla).
for pinga yellow, brownish, tawny
see pinka.
(adj.) 1. reddishyellow, brown, tawny SN i.170; Ja vi.199 (= pingiya). 2. red-eyed, as sign of ugliness Ja iv.245 (as Np. combd with nikkhanta-dāṭha); v.42 (tamba-dāṭhika nibbiddha-pingala); Pv ii.41 (= ˚locana Pv-a 90 + kaḷāra-danta).
-kipillaka the red ant Dhp-a iii.206. -cakkhutā redeyedness Pv-a 250. -makkhikā the gadfly Ja iii.263 (= ḍaṃsa) Nd ii.268 = Snp-a 101 (id.); Snp-a 33 (where a distinction is made between kāṇa-makkhikā and pingala˚), 572 (= ḍaṃsa).
see piṃsati1, cp. Vedic pingala
(adj.) reddish-brown, yellow Ja vi.199.
fr. Vedic pinga
(f.) a species of bird Ja vi.538.
a var. of Sk. piṅgalā, a kind of owl
cotton Vin i.271; usually in cpds, either as kappāsa˚; SN v.284, SN v.443, or tūla˚; SN v.284 SN v.351 (T. thula˚), 443; Ja v.480 (T. tula˚).
-paṭala membrane or film of cotton Vism 445 -manda the Nimb or Neem tree Azadizachta Indica Pv iv.16 (cp. Pv-a 220); the usual P. form is pucimanda (q.v.).
cp. Class. Sk. picu
a wild animal, said to be a kind of monkey Ja vi.537.
etym. unknown, prob. Non-Aryan
(nt.) tail-feather, esp. of the peacock Vin i.186 (mora˚) ■ dve˚; (& de˚) having two tail-feathers Ja v.339, Ja v.341 (perhaps to be taken as “wing” here, cp. Halāyudha 2, 84 = pakṣa). Cp piñcha & piñja.;
cp. Epic Sk. piccha & puccha tail, to Lat. pinna, E. fin. Ger. finne
in su˚ Ja v.197 is not clear, C. expl5 by suphassita, i.e. pleasing, beautiful, desirable, thus dividing su-picch˚.
(adj.) slippery Vism 264; Vb-a 247 (lasikā = p-kuṇapaṃ); Dhp-a iii.4 (˚magga).
cp. Class. Sk. picchila
= piccha, i.e. tail-feather, tail Vin ii.130 (mora˚). Cp. piñja.
(nt.) a (peacock’s) tail-feather Ja i.38 (mora˚ kalāpa), 207 (= pekkhuṇa); iii.226 (BB piccha & miccha); DN-a i.41 (mora˚); Dhp-a i.394 (id.); Vv-a 147 (mayūra˚; BB piñcha, SS pakkha); Pv-a 142 (mora˚ kalāpa).
= piccha
of a reddish colour, tawny Ja i.93; DN-a i.245; Vv-a 165 Vv-a 288.
-odaka fruit of the esculent water plant Trapa Bispinosa Ja vi.563 (v.l. ciñcarodaka), expld by singhāṭaka.
cp. Class. Sk. piñjara; for etym. see piṃsati1
(adj.) tinged, dyed Mil 240. On expression see Kern, Toev. s. v.
fr. piṃsati1, cp. Sk. piñjana
(nt.) ground sesamum, flour of oil-seeds MN i.78, MN i.342; Vin iv.341 (p. nāma tilapiṭṭhaṃ vuccati); Vv-a 142 (tila˚ seed cake); Pv-a 48.
-bhakkha feeding on flour of oil-seeds DN i.166; AN i.241, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Nd i.417; Pp 55.
to piṃsati2, cp. Class. Sk. piṇyāka
1. basket Vin i.225 (ghaṭa p. ucchanga), 240 (catudoṇika p.); Pv iv.333; Vism 28 (piṭake nikkhitta-loṇa-maccha-phāla-sadisaṃ phaṇaṃ); dhañña˚ a grain-basket Dhp-a iii.370; vīhi˚; a rice basket Dhp-a iii.374. Usually in combn kuddāḷa-piṭaka “hoe and basket,” wherever the act of digging is referred to e.g. Vin iii.47; DN i.101; MN i.127; SN ii.88; SN v.53; AN i.204; AN ii.199; Ja i.225, Ja i.336; DN-a i.269.
2. (fig.) t.t for the 3 main divisions of the Pāli Canon “the three baskets (basket as container of tradition Winternitz Ind. Lit. ii.8; cp. peḷā 2) of oral tradition,” viz. Vinaya˚ Suttanta˚, Abhidhamma˚; ; thus mentioned by name at Pv-a 2; referred to as “tayo piṭakā” at Ja i.118 Vism 96 (pañca-nikāya-maṇḍale tīṇi piṭakāni parivatteti), 384 (tiṇṇaṃ Vedānaṃ uggahaṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ Piṭakānaṃ uggahaṇaṃ); Snp-a 110, Snp-a 403; Dhp-a iii.262 Dhp-a iv.38; cp. Divy 18, Divy 253, Divy 488. With ref. to the Vinaya mentioned at Vin v.3 ■ Piṭaka is a later collective appellation of the Scriptures; the first division of the Canon (based on oral tradition entirely) being into Sutta and Vinaya (i.e. the stock paragraphs learnt by heart, and the rules of the Order). Thus described at DN ii.124; cp. the expression bhikkhu suttantika vinayadhara Vin ii.75 (earlier than tepiṭaka or piṭakadhara ) Independently of this division we find the designation “Dhamma” applied to the doctrinal portions; and out of this developed the 3rd Piṭaka, the Abhidhammap. See also Dhamma C. 1 ■ The Canon as we have it comes very near in language and contents to the canon as established at the 3rd Council in the time of King Asoka. The latter was in Māgadhī ■ The knowledge of the 3 Piṭakas as an accomplishment of the bhikkhu is stated in the term tepīṭaka “one who is familiar with the 3 P.” (thus at Mil 18; Dāvs v.22; Kp-a 41 with v.l. ti˚; Snp-a 306 id.; Dhp-a iii.385). tipetakī (Vin v.3 Khemanāma t.), tipeṭaka (Mil 90), and tipiṭaka-dhara Kp-a 91. See also below ˚ttaya. In BSk. we find the term trepiṭaka in early inscriptions (1st century a.d., see e.g. Vogel, Epigraphical discoveries at Sārnāth, Epigraphia Indica viii. p. 173, 196; Bloch, J. As. Soc Bengal 1898, 274, 280); the term tripiṭaka in literary documents (e.g. Divy 54), as also tripiṭa (e.g. Avs i.334; Divy 261, Divy 505) ■ On the Piṭakas in general the origin of the P. Canon see Oldenberg, in ed. of Vin 1; and Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt. 1913, ii.1 sq. iii.606, 635 ■ Cp. peṭaka.
-ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas or holy Scriptures Snp-a 328. -dhara one who knows (either one or two or all three) the Piṭaka by heart, as eka˚, dvi˚, ti˚; at Vism 62, Vism 99. -sampadāya according to the P. tradition or on the ground of the authority of the P. MN i.520 (itihītiha etc.); ii.169 (id.); and in exegesis of itikirā (hearsay-tradition) at AN i.189 = AN ii.191 = Nd ii.151.
cp. Epic Sk. piṭaka, etym. not clear. See also P. peḷā & peḷikā
(nt.) what is ground, grindings, crushed seeds, flour. Vin i.201, Vin i.203; Vin iv.261 Vin iv.341 (tila˚ = piññāka); Ja ii.244 (māsa˚). As piṭṭhi at Ja i.347.
-khādaniya “flour-eatables,” i.e. pastry Vin i.248 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.139). -dhītalikā a flour-doll, i.e. made of paste or a lump of flour Pv-a 16, Pv-a 19 (cp. uddāna to the 1st vagga p. 67 piṭṭhi & reading piṇḍa˚ on p. 17); -piṇḍi a lump of flour Vism 500 (in comp.). -madda flour paste Vin ii.151 (expld in C. by piṭṭha-khali; cp piṭṭhi-madda Ja iii.226, which would correspond to piṣṭī). -surā (intoxicating) extract or spirits of flour Vv-a 73.
pp. of piṃsati2. cp. Sk. piṣṭa
(nt.) a lintel (of a door) Vin i.47 (kavāṭa˚); ii.120 (˚sanghāṭa, cp. Vin Texts iii.105), 148, 207.
identical in form with piṭṭha3
(nt.) back, hind part; also surface, top Ja i.167 (pāsāṇa˚ top of a rock). Usually in oblique cases as adv., viz. instr. piṭṭhena along, over beside, by way of, on Ja ii.111 (udaka˚); iv.3 (samudda˚) loc. piṭṭhe by the side of, near, at: parikhā˚ at a ditch Pv-a 201; on, on top of, on the back of (animals) ammaṇassa p. Ja vi.381 (cp. piṭṭhiyaṃ); tiṇa˚ Ja iv.444 panka˚ Ja i.223; samudda˚ Ja i.202 ■ assa˚ on horseback DN i.103; similarly: vāraṇassa p. Ja i.358; sīha˚ Ja ii.244 haṭṭhi˚ Ja ii.244; Ja iii.392. See also following. Pitthi & Pitthi
cp. Vedic pṛṣṭha, expld by Grassmann as pra-stha, i.e. what stands out
(f.) 1. the back Vin ii.200 (piṭṭhī); MN i.354; Ja i.207; Ja ii.159, Ja ii.279. piṭṭhiṃ (paccāmittassa) passati to see the (enemy’s) back, i.e. to see the last of somebody Ja i.296, Ja i.488; Ja iv.208. piṭṭhi as opposed to ura (breast) at Vin ii.105; Snp 609; as opposed to tala (palm) with ref. to hand & foot: hattha (or pada-) tala & ˚piṭṭhi: Ja iv.188; Vism 361 ■ abl. piṭṭhito as adv (from) behind, at the back of Snp 412 (+ anubandhati to follow closely); Vv-a 256; Pv-a 78 (geha˚). piṭṭhito karoti to leave behind, to turn one’s back on Ja i.71 (cp. pṛṣṭhato-mukha Divy 333). piṭṭhito piṭṭhito right on one’s heels, very closely Vin i.47; DN i.1, DN i.226–2. top, upper side (in which meaning usually piṭṭha3) only in cpd. ˚pāsāṇa and loc. piṭṭhiyaṃ as adv. on top of Ja v.297 (ammaṇa˚) piṭṭhi at Vv-a 101 is evidently faulty reading.
-ācariya teacher’s understudy, pupil-teacher, tutor Ja ii.100; Ja v.458, Ja v.473, Ja v.501. -kaṇṭaka spina dorsi, backbone MN i.58, MN i.80, MN i.89; MN iii.92; Vism 271; Vb-a 243 Kp-a 49 sq.; Sdhp 102. -koṭṭhaka an upper room (bath room?) Dhp-a ii.19, Dhp-a ii.20. -gata following behind foll. one’s example Vism 47. -paṇṇasālā a leaf-hut at the back Ja vi.545. -parikamma treating one’s back (by rubbing) Vin ii.106. -passe (loc.) at the back of behind Ja i.292; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 83, Pv-a 106. -pāda the back of the foot, lit. foot-back, i.e. the heel Vism 251; Kp-a 51 (˚aṭṭhika); DN-a i.254. -pāsāṇa a flat stone or rock plateau, ridge Ja i.278; Ja ii.352; Ja vi.279; Dhp-a ii.58 Vb-a 5, Vb-a 266. -bāha the back of the arm, i.e. elbow (cp. ˚pāda) Kp-a 49, Kp-a 50 (˚aṭṭhi): -maṃsa the flesh of the back Pv-a 210; Snp-a 287. -maṃsika backbiting, one who talks behind a person’s back Snp 244 (= ˚maṃsakhādaka C.); Ja ii.186 (of an unfair judge); v.1; Pv iii.97 (BB; T. ˚aka). As ˚maṃsiya at Ja v.10. -maṃsikȧtā backbiting Nd ii.39. -roga back-ache Snp-a 111 -vaṃsa back bone, a certain beam in a building Dhp-a i.52.
= piṭṭha3, of which it has taken over the main function as noun. On relation piṭṭha → piṭṭhi cp. Trenckner, Notes 55; Franke, Bezzenberger’s Beiträge xx.287. Cp. also the Prk. forms piṭṭha piṭṭhī & piṣṭī, all representing Sk. prṣṭḥa: Pischel; Prk. Gram. §53
(adj.) (-˚) having a back, in dīgha˚; with a long back or ridge Snp 604; mudu˚; having a flexible back Vin iii.35.
fr. piṭṭhi
(f.) = piṭṭhi; loc. piṭṭhikāya at the back of, behind Ja i.456 (maṇḍala˚).
(adj.) having a back, in f. piṭṭhimatī (senā) (an army) having troops on (horse-or elephant-) back Ja vi.396.
fr. piṭṭhi
(m. & nt.) a pot, a pan Mil 107 (spelt pīthara). As; piṭharaka [cp. BSk piṭharikā Divy 496; so read for T. piparikā] at Kp-a 54 to be read for T. pivaraka according to App. Snp-a 869.
cp. Epic Sk. piṭhara
1. a lump, ball, thick (& round mass SN i.206 (aṭṭhīyaka˚); Pv iii.55 (nonīta˚); Vv-a 62 (kummāsa˚), 65; Sdhp 529 (ayo˚).
2. a lump of food esp. of alms, alms given as food SN i.76; Snp 217, Snp 388 Snp 391; Ja i.7 (nibbuta˚ cooled); Mil 243 (para ˚ṃ ajjhupagata living on food given by others). piṇḍāya (dat. for alms, freq. in combn with carati, paṭikkamati (gāmaṃ) pavisati, e.g. Vin ii.195; Vin iii.15; MN iii.157; Snp 386; Snp-a 141, Snp-a 175; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 81, Pv-a 136 and passim.
3. a conglomeration, accumulation, compressed form, heap, in akkhara˚; sequence of letters or syllables, context Dhp-a iv.70.
-attha condensed meaning, résumé Ja i.233, Ja i.275, Ja i.306 Kp-a 124, Kp-a 192. Cp. sampiṇḍanattha. -ukkhepakaṃ in the manner of taking up lumps (of food), a forbidden way of eating Vin ii.214 = Vin iv.195, cp. Vin. Texts i.64 (= piṇḍaṃ piṇḍaṃ ukkhipitvā C.). -gaṇanā counting in a lump, summing up DN-a i.95. -cāra alms-round wandering for alms Snp 414. -cārika one who goes for alms, begging Vin ii.215; Vin iii.34, Vin iii.80; Vin iv.79; Ja i.116; Vv-a 6. -dāyika (& ˚dāvika) one who deals out food (as occupation of a certain class of soldiers) DN i.51 (˚dāvika); AN iv.107 (v.l. ˚dāyaka); Mil 331; cp DN-a i.156. See also Geiger, P.Gr. 46, 1; Rh. D. Dial. i.68 (trsl. “camp-follower”); Franke, Dīgha trsl. 531 trsl. “Vorkämpfer” but recommends trsl. “Klossverteiler” as well). -dhītalikā a doll made of a lump of dough, or of pastry Pv-a 17; cp. piṭṭha˚. -paṭipiṇḍa (kamma) giving lump after lump, alms for alms i.e. reciprocatory begging Ja ii.82 (piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṃ kappesuṃ), 307 (piṇḍapāta-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṃ kappenti); v.390 (mayaṃ piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍa-kammaṃ na karoma). -pāta food received in the alms-bowl (of the bhikkhu), alms-gathering (on term see Vism 31 yo hi koci āhāro bhikkhuno piṇḍolyena patte patitattā piṇḍapāto ti vuccati, and cp. BSk. piṇḍapāta-praviṣṭha Avs i.359; piṇḍapāta-nirhāraka Divy 239; Vin i.46; Vin ii.32 (˚ṃ nīharāpeti), 77, 198, 223; iii.80, 99 iv.66 sq., 77; MN iii.297; SN i.76, SN i.92; AN i.240; AN ii.27, AN ii.143 AN iii.109, AN iii.145 sq.; AN v.100; Snp 339; Ja i.7, Ja i.149, Ja i.212, Ja i.233 Pp 59; Vism 31, Vism 60; Vb-a 279 (˚âpacāyana); Snp-a 374; Pv-a 11 sq., 16, 38, 240. -pātika one who eats only food received in the alms-bowl; ˚anga is one of the dhutanga ordinances (see dhutanga) Vin i.253; Vin ii.32 (˚anga), 299 (+ paṃsukūlika); iii.15 (id.); MN i.30 MN iii.41; AN iii.391; Pp 59, Pp 69; Snp-a 57 (˚dhutanga) -piṇḍapātika bhikkhu a bh. on his alms-round Vism 246 (in simile); Vb-a 229 (id.). Cp. BSk. piṇḍapātika Avs i.248. -pātikatta (abstr. to prec.) the state of eating alms-food, a characteristic of the Buddhist bhikkhu MN iii.41; SN ii.202, SN ii.208 sq.; AN i.38; AN iii.109.
cp. Vedic piṇḍa; probably connected with piṣ i.e. crush, grind, make into a lump; Grassmann compares pīḍ to press; on other attempts at etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v. puls
(alms)-food AN iv.185 (SS piṇḍapāta); in phrase na piṇḍakena kilamati not go short of food Vin iii.15, Vin iii.87; Vin iv.23, in ukka-piṇḍaka meaning a cluster of msects or vermin Vin i.211 = Vin i.239 (v.l. piṇḍuka).
fr. piṇḍa
(f.) a lump, round mass, ball, cluster DN i.74 = AN iii.25 (nahāniya˚ ball of fragrant soap; DN-a i.218: piṇḍa); MN iii.92; Ja i.76 (phala˚) ii.393; iii.53 (amba˚); Mil 107; Vism 500 (piṭṭha˚) Dhp-a iii.207 (amba˚).
cp. piṇḍa & Sk. piṇḍī
(-˚) in chatta˚-vivara is a little doubtful, the phrase prob. means “a crevice in the covering (i.e. the round mass) of the canopy or sunshade” Ja vi.376. Dutoit (J. trsln vi.457) translates “opening at the back of the sunshade,” thus evidently reading “ piṭṭhika. ”
(adj.) 1. made into a lump, massed together, conglomerated, thick Thig 395.
2. “ball-like,” close, compact; of sound: Ja ii.439; Ja vi.519.
pp. of piṇḍeti, cp. BSk. piṇḍitamūlya lump-sum Divy 500
a morsel of food Vin i.58 (˚bhojana), 96 (id.); AN ii.27; Iti 102.
piṇḍi + ālopa
to ball together, mix, put together Pv ii.952 (= pisana-vasena yojeti Pv-a 135). pp. piṇḍita.
Denom. fr. pinḍa
one who seeks alms SN iii.93 = Iti 89; cp. Np. ˚bhāradvāja Snp-a 346, Snp-a 514, Snp-a 570.
etym. unclear
(nt.) asking for alms, alms-round SN iii.93 = Iti 89; Vism 31.
fr. piṇḍola
father ■; Cases: sg. nom. pitā SN i.182; Dhp 43; Ja v.379; Snp-a 423; acc. pitaraṃ Dhp 294;; pituṃ Cp ii.93; instr. pitarā Ja iii.37, pitunā, petyā Ja v.214; dat. gen. pitu MN iii.176; Ja iv.137; Ja vi.365 Ja vi.589; & pituno Vin i.17 (cp. Prk. piuṇo); abl. pitarā Ja v.214; loc. pitari ■ pl. nom. pitaro Snp 404; Ja iv.1; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 54 (mātā˚); acc. pitaro Pv-a 17, pitare, pitū Thig 433; instr. pitarehi & pitūhi; dat. gen pitunnaṃ Ja iii.83; (mātā˚); vi.389 (id.); Pv ii.84 pitūnaṃ Iti 110; loc. pitusu Thig 499; Ja i.152 (mātā˚) and pitūsu Pv-a 3 (mātā˚). Further: abl. sg. pitito by the father’s side DN i.113 (+ mātito); AN iii.151; Ja v.214 ■ AN i.62, AN i.132, AN i.138 sq.; Snp 296, Snp 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaṃ); Nd ii.441 (= yo so janako) Ja i.412 (= tāta); v.20; Vb-a 108 (where pretty popular etym. is given with “piyāyatī ti pitā”), 154 (in simile). Of Brahmā: DN i.18, cp. DN-a i.112; of Inda Ja v.153. There is sometimes a distinction made between the father as such and the grandfather (or ancestors in gen.) with culla˚; (cūḷa˚), i.e. little and mahā˚; i.e. grand-father e.g. at Ja i.115 (+ ayyaka); Pv-a 107. The collective term for “parents” is mātāpitaro (pl. not dual), e.g. Snp 404; Ja i.152; Ja iii.83; Ja iv.1; Pv-a 107. On similes of father and son op. J.P.T.S. 1907, 112. In cpds. there are the 3 bases pitā, piti˚ & pitu˚. (a); pitā˚ ˚putta father & son Ja i.253; pl. ˚puttā fathers & sons or parents & children Ja iv.115; Ja vi.84. ˚mahā grandfather Pv ii.84; Ja ii.263; DN-a i.281; Pv-a 41; ˚mahāyuga age of a grandfather (i.e. a generation of ancestors DN i.113 (see det. expln DN-a i.281 = Snp-a 462); Snp p.115 Kp-a 141; petti-pitā-mahā great-grandfathers, all kinds of ancestors Ja ii.48 (= pitu-vitā mahā C.). (b.) piti˚: ˚kicca duty of a father Ja v.153; ˚ghāta parricide Ja iv.45 (BB pitu˚); ˚pakkha father’s side Dhp-a i.4; ˚pitāmahā (pl.) fathers & grandfathers ancestors Ja v.383; ˚vadha parricide DN-a i.135 ■ (c) pitu˚ ˚ja originating from the father Ja vi.589 (+ mātuja) ˚ghātaka parricide (+ mātughātaka) Vin i.88, Vin i.136 Vin i.168, Vin i.320; ˚nāma fathers name Snp-a 423; ˚pitāmahā (pl.) ancestors (cp. piti˚) AN iv.61; Ja i.2; Ja ii.48. ˚rakkhita guarded by a father MN iii.46. ˚santaka father’s possession Ja i.2. ˚hadaya father’s heart Ja i.61.
Vedic pitṛ, pitar-; cp. Gr. πατήρ; Lat. pater, Juppiter, Dies-piter = *Ζε*Ζευς πατήρ; Goth. fadar = Ger. vater E. father; Oir. athir etc. to onomat. syllable *pa-pa cp. tāta & mātā
(-˚) (adj.) one who has a father, having a father Vv-a 68 (sa˚ together with the f.); Pv-a 38 (mata˚ whose f. was dead): cp. dve˚ with 2 fathers Ja v.424.
fr. pitā
(f.) father’s sister, aunt; decl. similarly to pitā & mātā Dhp-a i.37 acc. sg. pitucchasaṃ [Sk. *svasaṃ instead of *svasāraṃ] Ja iv.184.
-dhītā aunt’s daughter, i.e. (girl) cousin Dhp-a i.85 -putta aunt’s son, i.e. (boy) cousin SN ii.282 (Tisso Bhagavato p.); iii.106 (id.); Ja ii.119, Ja ii.324.
pitu + svasā, cp. Sk. pitṛ-ṣvasṛ
(nt.) 1. the bile, gall; the bile also as seat of the bilious temperament, excitement or anger. Two kinds are distinguished at Kp-a 60 Vism 260, viz. baddha˚ & abaddha˚;, bile as organ bile as fluid. See also in detail Vism 359; Vb-a 65 Vb-a 243 ■ In enumerations of the parts or affections of the body pitta is as a rule combd with semha (cp Vin ii.137; Kh 111; Vism 260, Vism 344; Mil 298) ■ Vin ii.137; MN iii.90; SN iv.230, SN iv.231 (+ semha); AN ii.87 AN iii.101, AN iii.131; Snp 198 (+ semha), 434 (id., expld as the two kinds at Snp-a 388); Nd i.370; Ja i.146 (+ semha) ii.114 (pittan te kupitaṃ your bile is upset or out of order, i.e. you are in a bad mood); Mil 112 (vāta-pittasemha… ), 304 (roga, + semha), 382 (+ semha) Dhs-a 190 (as blue-green); Dhp-a iii.15 (cittaṃ n’ atthi pittaṃ n’ atthi has no heart and no bile, i.e. does not feel & get excited; vv.ll. vitta & nimitta).
2. [according to Morris,; J.P.T.S. 1893, 4 for *phitta = phīta Sk. sphīta] swelling, a gathering Vin ii.188 (Vin. Texts iii.237 “a burst gall, i.e. bladder”); SN ii.242. The passage is not clear, in C. on Ud i.7 we read cittaṃ, see Morris loc. cit. May the meaning be “muzzle”?
-kosaka gall-bladder Kp-a 61; Vism 263; Vb-a 246.
cp. Vedic pitta
(adj.) one who has bile or a bilious humoui, bilious Mil 298 (+ semhika).
fr. pitta
the realm of the departed spirits MN i.73; Ja i.51; Nd i.489.
Sporadic reading for the usual petti˚
(adj.) belonging to the realm of the departed Nd i.97 (gati; v.l. petti˚).
fr. pittivisaya
(pithiyyati) to be covered, obscured or obstructed to close, shut MN ii.104; MN iii.184; Snp 1034, Snp 1035; Nd ii.442 (BB pidhiyyati; expld by pacchijjati); Thag 872; Dhp 173; Ja i.279 (akkhīni pithīyiṃsu the eyes shut) ii.158 (= paticchādiyati); vi.432. The spelling of the BB manuscripts is pidhīyati (cp. Trenckner, Notes 62).
Pass. of pidahati, cp. api-dahati, Sk. apidhīyate
a small stick skewer Vin ii.116, cp. Bdhgh on p. 317: “daṇḍakathina-ppamāṇena kaṭasārakassa pariyante paṭisaṃharitvā duguṇa-karaṇa.” See also Vin Texts iii.94.
etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests diminutiveformation fr. Sk. bidala split bamboo
to cover, to close, conceal, shut MN i.117, MN i.380 (dvāraṃ); Ja i.292; Ja iii.26; Ja v.389; Mil 139 (vajjaṃ); Dhp-a i.396; Dhp-a ii.4, Dhp-a ii.85; Dhp-a iv.197 (ūruṃ); Sdhp 321 aor. pidahi Ja iv.308 (kaṇṇe); ger. pidahitvā Pv ii.76 (dvāraṃ); Vism 182 (nāsaṃ); DN-a i.136, pidhatvā Thig 480, & pidhāya Ja i.150 (dvāraṃ), 243 (id.); Thag-a 286; Dhp-a ii.199 (dvārāni) ■ Pass. pithīyati; pp. pihita (q.v.). The opp. of p. is vivarati.
api + dhā, cp. apidahati & Prk. piṇidhattae = Sk. apinidhātave
(nt.) covering up, shutting, closing Vism 20; Dhp-a iv.85 (= thakana).
fr. api + dhā, cp. apidahana
a stick (or rag?) for scraping (or wiping?) Vin ii.141 (avalekhana˚), 221 (id.). Meaning doubtful.
fr. api + dhṛ;
(nt.) cover Ja vi.349. -˚phalaka covering board Vism 261 (where Kp-a in same passage reads paṭikujjana-phalaka) = Vb-a 244.
= pidahana
cold in the head, catarrh, in enumn of illnesses under dukkha, at Nd ii.3041 ≈ (kāsa, sāsa pināsa, etc.).
cp. Sk. pīnasa
to drink, only in imper. pres. pipa MN i.316; SN i.459, and ppr. pipaṃ Ja v.255, gen. pl. pipataṃ Snp 398.
dial. form for pibati, pivati, usually restricted to Gāthā Dial., cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 132
(f.) 1. thirst Nd ii.443 (= udaka-pipāsā); Mil 318 Vb-a 196 (in comparison); Pv-a 23, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 67 sq.; Sdhp 288. Often combd with khudā (hunger) e.g. Snp 52 Snp 436 (khup˚); Pv-a 67; or jighacchā (id.), e.g. MN i.10; SN i.18; AN ii.143, AN ii.153; Mil 304.
2. longing (for food) hunger Ja ii.319.
3. desire, craving, longing DN iii.238 (avigata˚); SN iii.7, SN iii.108, SN iii.190; SN iv.387; AN ii.34 (pipāsavinaya; expld at Vism 293); iv.461 sq.
Desid. form. fr. pā, pibati → pipati, lit. desire to drink
(adj.) thirsty SN i.143; SN ii.110 (surā˚); Ja vi.399; Mil 318 (kilantatasita-p.); Vism 262; Pv-a 127; Sdhp 151.
pp. of pipāsati, Desid. fr. pā, cp. pipāsā
(adj.) thirsty DN ii.265.
fr. pipāsā
(adj.) drinking (?) in su˚ good to drink (?) Ja vi.326 (v.l. BB sucimant). Or is it “flowing” (cp. Vedic pipiṣvat overflowing)?
fr. pā, see pivati
(f.) & pipillika ant Ja iii.276 (BB kipillikā); Sdhp 23; as pipillikā at Ja i.202.
cp. Vedic pipīlikā, pipīlaka & pipīlika; BSk. pipīlaka Avs ii.130 (kunta˚). See also kipillikā
pepper Vin i.201, cp. Vin. Texts ii.46.
for the usual P. pipphalī, Sk. pippalī
the fruit of Ficus religiosa, the holy fig tree Ja vi.518 (Kern’s reading, Toev. s. v. for T. maddhu-vipphala C. reads madhuvipphala & expl;ns by madhuraphala).
cp. Epic Sk. pippala, on ph for p see pipphalī
(nt.?) scissors (? so ed.) DN-a i.70.
etym.? BR give Sk. *pippalaka in meaning “thread for sewing”
(f.) long pepper SN v.79; Ja iii.85; Vv 436; Dhp-a i.258 (˚guhā Npl.); iv.155.
with aspirate ph for p, as in Sk. pippalī, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 62. See also pippala. Etym. loan words are Gr. πέπερι = Lat. piper = E. pepper, Ger pfeffer
(adj.) dear, in two applications (as stated Nd i.133 = Nd ii.444, viz dve piyā: sattā vā piyā sankhārā vā piyā, with ref. to living beings, to sensations): 1. dear, beloved (as father mother, husband, etc.) SN i.210 (also compar. ˚tara) Dhp 130, Dhp 157, Dhp 220; Vism 296, Vism 314 sq.; often combd with manāpa (pleasing, also in 2), e.g. DN ii.19; DN iii.167; Ja ii.155; Ja iv.132.
2. pleasant, agreeable, liked Snp 452, Snp 863: Dhp 77, Dhp 211; often combd (contrasted) with appiya, e.g. Snp 363, Snp 450 (see also below). nt. piyaṃ a pleasant thing, pleasantry, pleasure SN i.189; Snp 450 Snp 811; Dhp-a iii.275 ■ appiya unpleasant MN i.86; Kp viii.5. appiyatā unpleasantness Ja iv.32. See also pīti & pema.;
-āpāya separation from what is dear to one, absence of the beloved AN iii.57; Dhp 211. -āppiya pleasant unpleasant DN ii.277 (origin of it); Dhp 211. -kamya friendly disposition Vin iv.12. -ggāhin grasping after pleasure Dhp 209, cp. Dhp-a iii.275. -cakkhu a loving eye DN iii.167. -dassana lovely to behold, goodlooking DN iii.167. -bhāṇin speaking pleasantly, flattering Ja v.348. -manāpatā belovedness MN i.66. -rūpa pleasant form, an enticing object of sight DN i.152 (cp. DN-a i.311); SN ii.109 sq.; AN ii.54; Iti 95, Iti 114; Snp 337, Snp 1086 (cp. Nd ii.445); Vb 103; Ne 27. -vacana term of endearment or esteem, used with ref. to āyasmā Nd ii.130; Snp-a 536, etc.; or mārisa Snp-a 536. -vācā pleasant speech SN i.189; Snp 452. -vādin speaking pleasantly, affable DN i.60 (manāpacārin + ); AN iii.37 AN iv.265 sq. -vippayoga separation from the beloved object Snp 41 (cp. Nd ii.444); Pv-a 161 (here with ref to the husband); syn. with appiya-sampayoga, e.g. at Vism 504 sq.
Vedic priya, prī, cp. Gr. προπροών; Goth. frijōn to love, frijonds loving = E. friend; Ger. frei freund; Ohg. Frīa = Sk. priyā, E. Friday, etc.
oar; usually so in cpd. piyāritta (nt.) oar & rudder SN i.103; AN ii.201; Ja iv.164.
sporadic for phiya, q.v.
a plant going under various names, viz. Nauclea cadamba; Terminalia tomentosa Vitex trifolia Ja v.420 (= setapuppha C.); vi.269.
cp. Class. Sk. priyaka
(f.) 1. panic seed, Panicum Italicum Vv 537; Ja i.39; Pv-a 283. Mixed with water and made into a kind of gruel (piyangûdaka) it is used as an emetic Ja i.419. See also kaṅgu.
2. a medicinal plant, Priyangu Ja v.420.
cp. Vedio priyangu
(nt.) belovedness, pleasantness AN v.164 sq.; Sdhp 66.
abstr. fr. piya1
to hold dear, to like, to be fond of (acc.), to be devoted to SN i.210; Ja i.156; Ja ii.246 Ja vi.5; Vb-a 108 (in etym. of pitā, q.v.); Dhp-a iv.125; Snp-a 78; Vv-a 349; Pv-a 71 ■ pp. piyāyita. Note. A ppr. piyaṃ is found at Snp-a 169 for Snp 94 adj. piya, and is expld by pīyamāna tussamāna modamāna.
Denom. fr. piya1
(f.) love, fondness for (loc.) SN i.210.
fr. piyāyati
held dear, fondled, loved, liked Snp 807; Nd i.126.
pp. of piyāyati
the Piyal tree, Buchanania latifolia Ja v.415 ■ (nt.) the fruit of this tree, used as food Ja iv.344; Ja v.324.
cp. Class. Sk. priyāla
at Vin iv.139 is to be separated (cara pi re get away with you), both pi and re acting as part. of exclamation The C. expln (p. 362) by “pire (voc.?) = para amāmaka” is an artificial construction.
a boil Snp p.124 (piḷaka, v.l. pilaka); Vism 35 (pīḷaka); Dhp-a i.319 (v.l. piḷaka). See also piḷakā.
cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā
the wave-leaved fig tree, Ficus infectoria Vin iv.35; DN-a i.81. As pilakkhu [cp. Prk. pilakkhu Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 105] at SN v.96; Ja iii.24, Ja iii.398.
cp. Vedic plakṣa
(adj.) (-˚) adorning or adorned Mil 336, Mil 337. Cp. apiḷandha.
fr. pilandhati
to adorn, put on, bedeck Mil 337; Ja v.400. Caus. II. pilandhāpeti Ja i.386. Pilandhana & Pilandhana;
see apilandhati, api + nah
(nt.) putting on ornaments, embellishment, ornament, trinkets AN i.254 AN i.257; AN iii.16; Thig 74; Vv 6417 (ḷ); Ja i.386 (ḷ); v.205 Vb-a 230 (˚vikati; ḷ); Vv-a 157 (ḷ), 167 (ḷ); Pv-a (ḷ) Sdhp 243.
= apilandhana
1. swimming, flowing, floating Ja v.408 (suplav-atthaṃ in order to swim through well = plavana C.).
2. a kind of duck [so Epic Sk.] Vv 358 (cp Vv-a 163); Ja v.420.
fr. plu, cp. Vedic plava boat, Russ. plov ship
to move quickly (of water), to swim, float, sway to & fro Thag 104; Mil 377; Vv-a 163; Dhs-a 76. As plavati at Ja i.336 (verse) Dhp 334 (v.l. SS; T. palavati). As palavati at Thag 399 ■ See also uppalavati (uppluta), opilāpeti, paripalavati
cp. Vedic plavati; plu, as in Lat. pluo to rain, pluvius rain, Gr. πλέω swim, πλύνω wash; Ohg flouwen etc. to rinse = E. flow
(nt.) swimming, plunging Ja v.409 (pl˚).
fr. plu
(f.) superficiality Dhs 1349, cp. Dhs-a 405.
fr. plu, see pilavati
at Ja i.382 (˚piṇḍa + mattikā-piṇḍa) is doubtful. Fausböll suggests mistake for palala straw, so also Ed. Müller, P.Gr. 6.
(f.) a small piece of cloth, a rag, a bandage Vin i.255, Vin i.296 (khoma˚ cp. Vin. Texts ii.156); MN i.141 (chinna-˚o-dhammo laid bare or open); SN ii.28 (id.) 219 (paṭa˚); Ja i.220; Ja ii.145; Ja iii.22 (jiṇṇa˚), 511; vi.383; Mil 282; Vism 328; Kp-a 55; Dhp-a i.221 (tela˚ rags dipped in oil); Vv-a 5; Pv-a 185 ■ As m. at Ja iv.365. The BSk. forms vary; we read chinna-pilotika at Avs i.198; Mvu iii.63; pilotikā (or ˚ka) at Mvu iii.50, Mvu iii.54. Besides we have ploti in karmaploti (pūrvikā k.) Divy 150 etc. Avs i.421.
-khaṇḍa a piece of rag Dhp-a iv.115; Thag-a 269; Pv-a 171.
cp. Class. Sk. plota (BR = prota), Suśr. i.15, 3; 16, 7 & passim
the young of an animal, sometimes used as term for a child Ja ii.406 (sūkara˚); Dhp-a iv.134 (as an abusive term; vv.ll. SS kipillaka; gloss K pitucūḷaka, BB cūḷakaniṭṭha); Sdhp 164, Sdhp 165 ■ As pillika at Ja i.487 (godha˚, v.l. BB godha-kippillika).
cp. Sk. *pillaka
(f.) 1. a small boil, pustule, pimple Vin i.202; SN i.150; Ja v.207, Ja v.303; Nd i.370; Mil 298; DN-a i.138.
2. knob (of a sword) Ja vi.218-Cp. pilaka.
cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā
to fasten on, put on, cover, dress, adorn Ja v.393 (piḷayhatha 3rd sg imper. = pilandhatu C.).
api + nayhati, cp. Sk. pinahyate
(v.l. miḷhakā ) at SN ii.228 is to be read as mīḷhakā “cesspool” (q.v.). The C. quoted on p. 228 expls incorrectly by “kaṃsalak’ ādi gūthapāṇakā,” which would mean “a low insect breeding in excrements (thus perhaps = paṭanga?). The trsl. (K.S. ii.155) has “dung-beetle.”
to drink ■ pres. pivati DN i.166; DN iii.184; Ja iv.380; Ja v.106; Pv-a 55.
1st pl. pivāma Pv i.118 2nd pl. pivatha Pv-a 78 & pivātha Pv i.112; 3rd pl. med piyyare Ja iv.380 ■ imper. piva Pv-a 39, & pivatu Vin iv.109 ■ ppr. pivaṃ Snp 257; Dhp 205, & pivanto Snp-a 39 ■ fut. pivissati Ja vi.365; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 59; pissāmi Ja iii.432; pāssati Ja iv.527 ■ aor. pivi Ja i.198; apivi Mvu 6, Mvu 21; pivāsiṃ Ud 42; apāyiṃha Ja i.362 (or ˚siṃha?); apaṃsu AN i.205 ■ ger. pivitvā Ja i.419 Ja iii.491; Ja vi.518; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 23; pītvā Snp 257; Dhp 205; Ja i.297; pītvāna Ja ii.71; pitvā Pv i.118 ■ grd. pātabba Vin ii.208; peyya; see kāka.˚-inf. pātuṃ Ja ii.210; Pv i.64 ■ pp. pīta (q.v.) ■ Of forms with p for v we mention the foll.: pipati MN i.32; Dhs-a 403 (as v.l.) imper. pipa Ja i.459; ppr. pipaṃ MN i.316, MN i.317 ■ Caus pāyeti & pāyāpeti; (q.v.).
Vedic pāti & pibati, redupl. pres. to root Idg.; *poi & pī, cp. Lat. bibo (for * pibo); Gr. πϊυω to drink, πότος drink; Obulg. piti to drink, also Lat pōtus drink, pōculum beaker (= pātra, P. patta). See also pāyeti to give drink, pāna, pānīya drink, pīta having drunk
(nt.) drinking Pv-a 251.
fr. pivati
see piṭharaka.
to grind, crush, destroy; Pass. pisīyati to perish Vv-a 335 (+ vināseti) ■ pp. pisita.
= piṃsati
(nt.) grinding, powder see upa˚.
fr. piṃsati?
1. a demon goblin, sprite DN i.54 (T. pesācā, v.l. pisācā, expld at DN-a i.164 as “pisācā mahanta-mahantā sattā ti vadati”), 93; SN i.209; AN iii.69; Ud 5; Ja i.235; Ja iv.495 (yakkha p. peta); Mil 23; Vv-a 335; Pv-a 198; Sdhp 313 ■ f. pisācī Ja v.442.
2. [like pisāca-loha referring to the Paiśāca district, hailing from that tribe, cp the term malla in same meaning and origin] a sort of acrobat, as pl. pisācā “tumblers” Mil 191.
-nagara town of goblins (cp. yakkha-nagara) Vism 531. -loha [connected with the tribe of the Paiśāca’s Mhbh vii.4819; cp. Paiśācī as one of the Prākrit dialects: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 3] a kind of copper Vb-a 63 (eight varieties). Pisacaka = pisaca
cp. Sk. piśāca & Vedic piśāci; to same root as pisuna = Vedic piśuna, & Lat. piget, Ohg. fēhida enmity = Ags. faehp (“feud”), connected with root of Goth. fijan to hate; thus pisāca = fiend
, only in cpd. paṃsu˚; mud-sprite Ja iv.380, Ja iv.496; DN-a i.287; Dhp-a ii.26.
(adj. n.) only f. pisācinī a witch (= pisācī) Thag 1151.
fr. pisāca, lit. having a demon
(f.) a tree-goblin Vin i.152; Vin ii.115, Vin ii.134; Snp-a 357; cp. Vin. Texts i.318.
fr. pisāca
crushed, ground Vism 260 (= piṭṭha Kp-a id. p.); Vb-a 243.
pp. of pisati
Pass. of pisati (q.v.).
(nt.) a dial. expression for pātī or patta “bowl” MN iii.235 (passage quite misunderstood by Neumann in his trslniii.414).
Sk. piśāla
(adj.) backbiting, calumnious, malicious MN iii.33, MN iii.49; Ja i.297 Pp 57; Pv-a 15, Pv-a 16. Usually combd with vācā malicious speech, slander, pisuṇavācā and pisuṇāvācā DN i.4 DN i.138; DN iii.70 sq., 171, 232, 269; MN i.362; MN iii.23; adj pisuṇāvāca & MN iii.22, MN iii.48; SN ii.167; Pp 39 ■ Cp pesuna.
Vedic piśuṇa, see etym. under pisāca
having a spotted belly Kp-a 107 (ed. compares pṛṣodarādi Pāṇini vi.3, 109).
pṛṣa, i.e. pṛṣant + udara, see pasata1
(nt.) the spleen MN iii.90; Snp 195; Ja v.49 In detail at Vism 257; Vb-a 240.
cp. Sk. plihaṇaka & plīhan (also Vedic plāśi?), Av. spərəƶan; Gr. σπλήν, σπλάγξνα entrails Lat. lien spleen
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) envying Dhs 1059; Snp-a 459 (˚sīla).
fr. piheti
1. to desire, long for (with acc.) Vin ii.187; SN ii.242 (pihāyittha 2nd pl. aor.); Ja i.401; Ja iv.198 (pattheti + ); Thig 454; Vv 8445 (= piyāyati Vv-a 349).
2. to envy (with gen of person & object), covet MN i.504; SN i.202, SN i.236; Thag 62; Snp 823, Snp 947; Iti 36; Dhp 94 (= pattheti Dhp-a 177), 181 (id. iii.227), 365 (ppr. pihayaṃ = labhaṃ patthento Dhp-a iv.97); Ja i.197 (aor. mā pihayi); Mil 336 ■ pp pihayita.
cp. Vedic spṛhayati, spṛh
desired, envied, always combd with patthita Mil 182, Mil 351.
pp. of pihayati
(f.) envy, desire MN i.304; Ja i.197; Vism 392 (Bhagavantaṃ disvā Buddha-bhāvāya pihaṃ anuppādetvā thita-satto nāma n’ atthi) ■ adj apiha without desire SN i.181.
fr. spṛh, cp. Sk. spṛhā
(f.) = pihanā Ne 18.
(adj.) covetous, only neg. a˚; SN i.187 = Thag 1218; Snp 852; Nd i.227.
cp. Sk. spṛhālu, fr. spṛh, but perhaps = Ved. piyāru malevolent. On y → h cp. P. paṭṭhayati for paṭṭhahati
covered, closed, shut, obstructed (opp. vivaṭa) MN i.118; MN iii.61; SN i.40; AN ii.104; Nd i.149; Ja i.266; Mil 102 (dvāra), 161; Vism 185; DN-a i.182 (˚dvāra).
pp. of pidahati
(nt.) a seat, chair, stool, bench.
4. kinds are given at Vin iv.40 = Vin iv.168, viz. masāraka bundikābaddha, kuḷirapādaka, āhaccapādaka (same categories as given under mañca) ■ Vin i.47, Vin i.180 Vin ii.114, Vin ii.149, Vin ii.225; AN iii.51 (mañca˚, Dvandva); iv.133 (ayo˚); Pts i.176; Vv 11 (see discussed in detail at Vv-a 8); Vv-a 295 (mañca˚) ■ pāda˚; footstool Ja iv.378; Vv-a 291; bhadda˚; state-chair, throne Ja iii.410.
-sappin “one who crawls by means of a chair or bench,” i.e. one who walks on a sort of crutch or support, a cripple (pīṭha here in sense of “hatthena gahana-yogga” Vv-a 8; exlpd by Bdhgh as “chinn’ iriyāpatha” Vin. Texts i.225) Ja i.76, Ja i.418; Ja v.426 (khujja + vi.4, 10; Mil 205, Mil 245, Mil 276; Vism 596 (& jaccandha, in simile); Dhp-a i.194; Dhp-a ii.69; PugA 227; Pv-a 282.
cp. Fpic Sk. pīṭha
a chair, stool Vv-a 8, Vv-a 124. See also palāla˚.
fr. pīṭha
(f.) a bench, stool Vin ii.149 (“cushioned chair” Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts iii.165); Ja iv.349; DN-a i.41; Vv-a 8.
fr. pīṭha
(nt.) 1. gladdening, thrill, satisfaction Vism 143 = Dhs-a 115.
2. embellishment Vism 32 (= maṇḍana).
fr. prī, cp. pīti
pleased, gladdened, satisfied Vv 1613 (= tuṭṭha Vv-a 84); Mil 238, Mil 249, Mil 361; usually in phrase pīṇitindriya with satisfied senses, with joyful heart MN ii.121; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 70.
pp. of pīṇeti
to gladden please, satisfy, cheer; to invigorate, make strong, often in phrase (attānaṃ) sukheti pīṇeti “makes happy and pleases” DN i.51; DN iii.130 sq.; SN i.90; SN iv.331; Pv-a 283 cp. Dhs-a 403 (sarīraṃ p.). It also occurs in def. of pīti (pīṇayatī ti pīti) at Vism 143 = Dhs-a 115 ■ pp pīṇita.
cp. Vedic prīṇāti, prī, see piya. The meaning in Pāli however has been partly confused with pī, pinvati (see pīna), as suggested by Bdhgh in DN-a i.157: “pīṇentī ti pīṇitaṃ thāma- bal’ ûpetaṃ karonti”
1. having drunk or (pred.) being drunk (as liquid) SN i.212 (madhu˚); Ja i.198; Pv-a 25 (with asita, khāyita & sāyita as fourfold food).; 2. soaked or saturated with (-˚), in kasāyarasa˚; Ja ii.98 (or = pīta2?) and visapīta (of an arrow) Ja v.36; Vism 303, Vism 381; which may however be read (on acct. of v.l. visappīta) as visappita “poison-applied” (see appita) Does MN i.281 pīta-nisita belong here (= visapīta)? 3. (nt.) drink MN i.220 sq. = AN v.347 sq.; AN v.359; Thag 503; Pv ii.710; Ne 29, Ne 80.
pp. of pivati
(adj.) yellow, goldencoloured Vin i.217 (virecana); DN i.76 (nīla p. lohita odāta); iii.268 (˚kasiṇa); MN i.281 (pīta-nisita, belonging here or under pīta1?), cp. 385 (below); AN iii.239 AN iv.263, AN iv.305, AN iv.349; AN v.61; Ja vi.185 (nīla p. lohita odāta mañjeṭṭhaka), 449 (˚alankāra, ˚vasana ˚uttara, cp 503); Dhs 203 (˚kasiṇa), 246, 247 (nīla p. lohitaka odāta); Vism 173 (˚kasiṇa) ■ pīta is prominent (in the sense of golden) in the description of Vimānas or other heavenly abodes. A typical example is Vv 47 (Pītavimāna v.1 & 2), where everything is characterised as pīta, viz. vattha, dhaja, alankāra, candana, uppala pāsāda, āsana, bhojana, chatta, ratha, assa, bījanī the C. expln of pīta at this passage is “suvaṇṇa”; cp Vv 361 (= parisuddha, hemamaya Vv-a 166); 784 (= suvaṇṇamaya C. 304).
-antara a yellow dress or mantle Vv 36 (= pītavaṇṇā uttarīyā C. 166). -aruṇa yellowish red Thig 479 -āvalepana “golden-daubed” MN i.385.
Epic Sk. pīta, etym. unclear
(adj.) yellow Vin iv.159; Thig 260; Ja ii.274; Pv iii.13 (= suvaṇṇavaṇṇa Pv-a 170); Dhs 617 (nīla p. lohitaka odāta kāḷaka mañjeṭṭhaka); Thag-a 211 -pītakā (f.) saffron, turmeric MN i.36.
fr. pīta
(f.) emotion of joy, delight, zest exuberance. On term see Dhs. trsl. 11 and Cpd. 243 Classed under sankhārakkhandha, not vedanā˚-D i.37, 75; iii.241, 265, 288; MN i.37; SN ii.30; SN iv.236; AN iii.26, AN iii.285 sq.; AN iv.411, AN iv.450; AN v.1 sq., 135, 311 sq. 333 sq.; Snp 257, Snp 687, Snp 695, Snp 969, Snp 1143 (= Bhagavantaṃ ārabbha p. pāmujjaṃ modanā pamodanā citti-odagyaṃ etc. Nd ii.446); Nd i.3, Nd i.491; Pp 68; Dhs 9, Dhs 62, Dhs 86, Dhs 172 Dhs 584, Dhs 999; Ne 29; Vism 145 (& sukha in contrasted relation), 212, 287 (in detail); DN-a i.53 (characterised by ānanda); Dhp-a i.32; Sdhp 247, Sdhp 461. On relation to jhāna see the latter. In series pīti passaddhi samādhi upekkhā under sambojjhaṅga (with eleven means of cultivation: see Vism 132 & Vb-a 282) ■ Phrase; pītiyā sarīraṃ pharati “to pervade or thrill the body with joy” (aor. phari), at Ja i.33; Ja v.494; Dhp-a ii.118 Dhp-a iv.102; all passages refer to pīti as the fivefold pīti pañcavaṇṇā pīti, or joy of the 5 grades (see Dhs. trsl. 11, 12, and Cpd. 56), viz. khuddikā (slight sense of interest), khaṇikā (momentary joy), okkantikā (oscillating interest, flood of joy), ubbegā (ecstasy, thrilling emotion), and pharaṇā pīti (interest amounting to rapture, suffusing joy). Thus given at Dhs-a 115 Vism 143, referred to at Dhs-a 166 ■ pīti as; nirāmisa (pure) and sāmisa (material) at MN iii.85; SN iv.235.
-gamanīya pleasant or enjoyable to walk MN i.117 -pāmojja joy and gladness AN iii.181. 307 (˚pāmujja) Dhp 374; Dhp-a iv.110; Kp-a 82. -pharaṇatā state of being pervaded with joy, joyous rapture, ecstasy DN iii.277; Pts i.48; Vb 334; Ne 89. -bhakkha feeding on joy (Ep. of the Ābhassara Devas) DN i.17; DN iii.28, DN iii.84, DN iii.90; AN v.60; Dhp 200; AN i.110; Dhp-a iii.258; Sdhp 255 -mana joyful-hearted, exhilarated, glad of heart or mind MN i.37; MN iii.86; SN i.181; AN iii.21; AN v.3; Snp 766 Nd i.3; Ja iii.411; Vb 227. -rasa taste or emotion of joy Vv-a 86. -sambojjhaṅga the joy-constituent of enlightenment MN iii.86; DN iii.106, DN iii.226, DN iii.252, DN iii.282 Eleven results of such a state are enumd at Dhs-a 75 viz. the 6 anussatis, upam’ ânussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā siniddha-pug ■ sevanatā, pasādanīyasuttanta-paccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatā (cp. Vism 132 & Vb-a 282).; -sahagata followed or accompanied by joy, bringing joy Dhs 1578 (dhammā, various things or states); Vism 86 (samādhi). -sukha zest and happiness intrinsic joy (cp. Cpd. 56, 243) SN i.203; DN iii.131 DN iii.222; Dhs 160; Vism 158; Thag-a 160. According to Dhs-a 166 “rapture and bliss,” cp. Expositor 222. -somanassa joy and satisfaction Ja v.371; Snp 512; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 27, Pv-a 132.
cp. Class. Sk. prīti & Vedic prīta pp. of; prī, see pīneti & piya
(-˚) (adj.) belonging to joy; only as sappītika & nippītika; bringing joy & devoid of joy, with without exuberance (of sukha) AN iii.26; AN iv.300, AN iv.441.
fr. pīti
(adj.) [fr. pīta1) drinking, only at Dhp 79 in cpd. dhamma˚; drinking in the Truth, expld as dhammapāyako dhammaṃ pivanto at Dhp-a ii.126.
(adj.) fat swollen Thig 265 (of breasts).;
cp. Epic Sk. pīna of pī to swell up (with fat); to which also Vedic pīvan & pīvara fat, Gr.; πιμελή & ππιμελή & πιον fat, Lat. opīmus fat, Ger. feist & fett = E. fat
a (sort of) boil Vism 35; see pilaka.
fr. pīd ?
(nt.) oppression, injury, suffering (from dukkha) Vism 212 = Vism 494; also in nakkhatta˚ harm to a constellation, i.e. occultation Dhp-a i.166 sq.
fr. pīḍ, cp. pīḷā
(f.) 1. pain, suffering Ja i.421; Mil 278; Vism 42.
2. oppression, damage injury Snp-a 353; DN-a i.259.
cp. Class. Sk. pīḍā fr. pīḍ
(f.) eyesecretion Thig 395 (= akkhigūthaka Thag-a 259, q.v. for fuller expln; see also J.P.T.S. 1884, 88).
reading not quite sure, cp. koḷikā
crushed, oppressed, molested, harassed Vin iv.261; Vism 415 (dubbhikkha˚); Dhp-a iv.70 Thag-a 271. Cp. abhi˚, pa˚.
pp. of pīḷeti
1. to press, press down Vin ii.225 (coḷakaṃ).
2. to weigh down heavily Ja i.25 (ppr. pīḷiyamāna), 138.
3. to press, clench Mil 418 (muṭṭhiṃ pīḷayati); Dhp-a iv.69 (anguliyā pīḷiyamānāya).
4. to crush, keep under, subjugate Mil 277 (janaṃ).
5. to molest Vv-a 348 (pīḷanto ppr for pīḷento?) ■ pp. pīḷita.
cp. Vedic pīḍayati, pīḍ, cp. Gr. πιέζω (*πισεδιω?) to press, oppress (lit. sit upon?)
as a term for Purgatory (niraya): see Bdhgh’s etym. of puggala Vism 310, as quoted under puggala.
Of the simplex no forms are found in Pāli proper. The base; puṃ occurs in pukusa (?), puggala (?), pungava pullinga; puṃs in napuṃsaka (cp. Prk. napuṃsaveya Pischel, Gram. § 412). The role of puṃs as contrast to itthi has in Pāli been taken over by purisa, except in itthi-pumā at the old passage DN iii.85. The strong base is in P. puman (q.v.). See also posa1.
Vedic puṃs (weak base) and pumāṃs (strong base), often opp. to strī (woman, female); cp. putra & potaka
Name of a (Non-Aryan) tribe, hence designation of a low social class, the members of which are said (in the Jātakas) to earn their living by means of refuseclearing On the subject see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 206, 207 ■ Found in foll. enumerations: khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā caṇḍāla-pukkusā AN i.162 AN iii.214; Ja iii.194 (expld by C. chava-chaḍḍaka-caṇḍālā ca puppha-chaḍḍaka-pukkusā ca); iv.303; Pv ii.612 Mil 5. Further as pukkusakula as the last one of the despised clans (caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚, rathakāra˚ p.˚) at MN iii.169; SN i.94; AN ii.85; Vin iv.6 Pp 51. With nesāda at Pv-a 176 ■ Cp. MN iii.169.
non-Aryan; cp. Epic Sk. pukkuśa, pukkaśa pulkasa. The “ Paulkāsa ” are mentioned as a mixed caste at Vājasaneya Saṃhitā 30, 17 (cp. Zimmer, Altind Leben 217)
1. an individual, as opposed to a group (sangha or parisā), person, man; in later philosophical (Abhidhamma) literature = character, soul (= attan). DN i.176; MN iii.58; SN i.93 sq.; SN iii.25; AN i.8, AN i.197; AN ii.126 sq.; Snp 544, Snp 685; Dhp 344; Pts i.180 sq.; Pts ii.1 sq., 52; Pv ii.325 (cp. Pv-a 88); ii.97; Pv-a 40, Pv-a 132 ■ pl. puggalā people Vv-a 86 (= sattā), 149 ■ para-puggala another man DN i.213; SN ii.121; SN v.265; Vism 409- purisa-puggala individual man, being, person SN ii.206 SN iv.307; AN i.173 = MN ii.217. Characterised as an individual in var. ways, e.g. as agga˚ Sdhp 92, Sdhp 558 abhabba˚ Ja i.106; ariya˚ Vin v.117; asura-parivāra AN ii.91; kodhagaru˚ AN ii.46; gūtha˚, puppha˚ madhubhāṇī˚ AN i.128; dakkhiṇeyya˚ Vv-a 5; diṭṭhisampanna AN i.26 sq.; AN iii.439 sq.; AN iv.136; nibbiriya kusīta˚ Ja iv.131 pāsāṇalekh’ ûpama˚ etc. AN i.283; valāhak’ ûpama AN ii.102 sq.; saddha, asaddha Pts i.121; Pts ii.33; sivāthik upama AN iii.268; suppameyya etc. AN i.266 sq. [a]sevitabba AN iv.365; AN v.102, AN v.247, AN v.281; hīna majjhima paṇīta SN ii.154 ■ Groups of characters: (2) AN i.76, AN i.87 (3) gilān’ ûpama etc. AN i.121 sq.; avuṭṭhika-sama padesa-vassin, sabbatth’ âbhivassin Iti 64 sq.; satthar sāvaka, sekha Iti 78; sekha asekha n’ eva-sekha-nāsekha DN iii.218; (4) DN iii.232, DN iii.233; SN i.93; Ja iv.131; (5) Ne 191; (6) rāga-carita, dosa˚, moha˚, saddhā˚, buddha˚ vitakka˚ Vism 102; (7) ubhato-bhāga-vimutta, paññāvimutta etc. DN iii.105; (8) AN iii.212; SN v.343 (19) Ne 190; (26) Ne 189, Ne 190 ■ See also paṭipuggala. 2. (in general) being, creature Mil 310 (including Petas & animals).;
-ñū knowing individuals DN iii.252, DN iii.283. -paññatti descriptions of persons, classification of individuals DN iii.105 (cp. Dial. iii.101); also Name of one of the canonical books of the Abhidhamma-piṭaka. -vemattatā difference between individuals SN ii.21; SN v.200 Snp p.102 (= ˚nānatta Snp-a 436).
cp. Class. Sk. pudgala, etym. connected with puṃs, although the fantastic expln of native Commentators refers it to puṃ “a hell” and gal; so at Vism 310: “pun ti vuccati nirayo, tasmiṃ galantī ti puggalā”
(adj.) belonging to a single person, individual, separate Vin i.250; Vin ii.270. The BSk paudgalika at Divy 342 is used in a sense similar to the Vin passages. Divy Index gives, not quite correctly “selfish.”
fr. puggala
the feathered part of an arrow Ja ii.89. Cp. ponkha.
cp. Epic Sk. punkha, etym. puṃ (base of puṃs) + kha (of khan ), thus “man-digging”?
a bull, lit “male-cow,” AN i.162; AN ii.75 sq.; Snp 690; Ja iii.81, Ja iii.111; Ja v.222, Ja v.242, Ja v.259, Ja v.433; Snp-a 323. As-˚ in meaning “best, chief” Vism 78 (muni˚) Thag-a 69 (Ap v.5) (nara˚).
puṃ + gava (see go), cp. Class. Sk. pungava in both meanings
the Nimba tree, Azadirachta Indica Ja iii.34; Ja iv.205; Ja vi.269 (˚thanī, of a woman nimba-phala-saṇṭhāna-thana-yuggalā C.).
fr. picumanda
(f.) state of a rotten egg MN i.357.
pūti + aṇḍa + tā, viâ *pūtyaṇḍatā
(nt.) a tail Dhs-a 365 (dog’s tail) See puñcikata.;
cp. Vedic puccha (belonging with punar to Lat. puppis) & P. piccha
(adj.) asking, questioning Dhs-a 2, Dhs-a 3 (pañha˚).
fr. pṛch
1. to ask, to question SN i.207, SN i.214; Vin ii.207; Snp 995; Nd i.341 etc-Pres. 1st sg. pucchāmi Snp 83, Snp 241, Snp 682, Snp 1043, Snp 1049 Nd ii.447: Pv ii.112.
1st pl. pucchāma Snp 1052 Imper. puccha Snp 460; DN-a i.155; pucchatha DN ii.154 pucchassu Snp 189, Snp 993; Pot. puccheyyāmi DN i.51 puccheyya AN i.199; Pv-a 6; ppr. pucchanto Snp 1126; aor. 1st sg. apucchissaṃ Snp 1116, pucchisaṃ Vv 3011, apucchiṃ Vv-a 127; Vv-a 2nd sg. apucchasi Snp 1050; Snp 3rd sg. apucchi Snp 1037, apucchasi Nd ii.447; pucchi Snp 981, Snp 1031; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 68 apucchatha Snp 1017; Snp 1st. pl. apucchimha Snp 1052. 3rd pl. pucchiṃsu Ja i.221; pucchisuṃ Mvu 10, Mvu 2. Fut. pucchissāmi Ja vi.364. Inf pucchituṃ Vin i.93; Snp 510; puṭṭhuṃ Snp 1096, Snp 1110 pucchitāye Ja v.137. Grd. pucchavho Snp 1030; Pass pucchiyati Dhp-a i.10 ■ Caus. II. pucchāpeti Mvu 10 Mvu 75 ■ pp. puṭṭha & pucchita; (q.v.).
2. to invite to (instr.), to offer, to present to somebody (acc.), lit. to ask with Vin ii.208, Vin ii.210 (pāniyena); iii.161 (odanena sūpena etc.); DN ii.240 ■ See also anu˚, abhi˚, sam˚.
pṛcch, cp. Vedic pṛcchati = Lat. posco, postulo, with which connected also Lat. precor = Goth. fraihnan Ohg. frāgōn; Vedic praśna = P. pañha
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) asking, enquiring, questioning Snp 504 (ā); Pv-a 121, Pv-a 223.
fr. pṛch
(f.) a question Snp 1023; Snp-a 46, Snp-a 200, Snp-a 230. A system of questions (“questionnaire”) is given in the Niddesa (and Commentaries), consisting of 12 groups of three questions each. In full at Nd i.339, Nd i.340 = Nd ii.under pucchā (p. 208). The first group comprises the three adiṭṭha-jotanā pucchā, diṭṭha-saṃsandanā p., vimaticchedanā p. These three with addition of anumati p and kathetu-kamyatā p. also at DN-a i.68 = Dhs-a 55. The complete list is referred to at Snp-a 159 ■ apuccha (adj.) that which is not a question, i.e. that which should not be asked Mil 316 ■ puccha-vissajjanā question and answer Pv-a 2 ■ At Ne 18 p. occurs as quâsi synonym of icchā and patthanā.
cp. Class. Sk. pṛcchā = Ohg. forsca question
asked Snp 76, Snp 126, Snp 383, Snp 988, Snp 1005; Nd i.211; Kp-a 125 (˚kathā); Pv-a 2, Pv-a 13, Pv-a 51. Cp. puṭṭha.
pp. of pucchati
one who asks, a questioner MN i.472; SN iii.6 sq.; Snp p.140.
n. ag. to pucchita
(adj.) to be honoured MN iii.38 sq., 77 sq.; AN iii.78 (v.l.); Ne 52, Ne 56 (= pūjaniya C.). Compar. pujjatara MN i.13; & see; pūja.
grd. of pūj, cp. Sk. pūjya
is wrong reading at Dhs 1059 in taṇhā paraphrase (pattern 1 Nd ii.taṇhā) for mucchañcikatā. The readings of id. p. are puñcikatā Dhs 1136, Dhs 1230; Vb 351, Vb 361 (v.l. pucchañji˚); mucchañci˚; at Nd i.8 (v.l. BB mucchañji˚, SS suvañci˚); Nd ii.p. 152 (v.l. BB pucchiñci˚, SS pupañci˚); pucchañjikatā Vb-a 477. The translation of Dhs gives “agitation” as meaning The C. (Dhs-a 365) reads puñcikạtā (vv.ll. puñcaṃ vikatā; pucañcikaka; pucchakatā) and connects it with pucchaṃ cāleti (wagging of a dog’s tail, hence “agitation”); Expositor ii.470 gives “fluster.” The C. on Vb (VbhA 477) expls as “lābhan’ âlābhanaka-ṭṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā,” thus “agitation.”
to wipe off, clean Vin ii.208 (upāhanā), 210; AN iv.376 (rajoharaṇaṃ suciṃ p., asuciṃ p. etc.); Ja i.392 (akkhīni); Vism 63 (gabbha-malaṃ), 415 = Kp-a 120; Ja i.47 (assūni hatthehi p.); Kp-a 136 (paṃsukaṃ). The reading puñjati occurs at Ja i.318 (akkhīni); v.182 vi.514, also as v.l. at AN iv.376 (v.l. also muñcati: cp puñcikatā) ■ Caus. II. puñchāpeti Vism 63. Cp pari˚.
cp. Sk. *proñchati, but BSk. poñcchate (v.l. puñchati & pocchate) Divy 491: upânahān mūlāc ca p.
(adj. nt.) wiping Vin i.297 (mukha˚colaka); ii.208 (upāhana˚-colaka), 210. Cp. puñchanī.
fr. proñch
(f.) a cloth for wiping, a towel Vin ii.122; Thag 560 (pāda˚ napkin for the feet). See Vin. Texts iii.114.
see puñchana
(usually -˚) a heap, pile, mass, multitude Vin ii.211; Ja i.146 (sabba-rogānaṃ). As-in foll. cpds.: aṭṭhi˚; Iti 17 (+ aṭṭhikandala); kaṭṭha˚ AN iii.408; AN iv.72; Ja ii.327; gūtha˚; Ja ii.211; tiṇa˚; AN iii.408; palāla˚; DN i.71; MN iii.3; AN i.241; AN ii.210 maṃsa˚; DN i.52; vālika˚; Ja vi.560; saṅkhāra˚; SN i.135.
-kata (& ˚kita) for; puñjikata; cf. Sk. puñjīkṛta with i for a in compn with kṛ & bhū heaped up, heaped together Vin ii.208 (puñjakita); MN i.58, MN i.89 (id. but id p. MN iii.92 puñjakajāta); AN iii.324 (puñjakata; v.l. puñjakita & puñjanika); Ja ii.408 (puñjakata, v.l. pancalikata); vi.111 (id., v.l. puñca˚).
cp. Epic Sk. puñja
= puñja MN iii.92 (˚jātāni aṭṭhikāni, where MN i.89 at id. p. reads puñjakitāni); Mil 342 (palāla˚).
is a variant of puñchati (q.v.).
(nt.) merit meritorious action, virtue. Always represented as foundation and condition of heavenly rebirth & a future blissful state, the enjoyment (& duration) of which depends on the amount of merit accumulated in a former existence. With ref. to this life there are esp. 3 qualities contributing to merit, viz., dāna, sīla & bhāvanā or liberality, good conduct & contemplation These are the puñña-kiriya-vatthūni (see below) Another set of; ten consists of these 3 and apaciti, veyyāvacca patti-anuppadāna, abbhanumodanā, desanā savana, diṭṭh’ ujjuka-kamma. The opp. of puñña is either apuñña (D iii.119; SN i.114; SN ii.82; AN i.154; AN iii.412 Sdhp 54, Sdhp 75) or pāpa (Snp 520; Dhp 39; Ne 96; Pv-a 5) The true Arahant is above both (Pv ii.615). See on term also Kvu trsl. 201 ■ (a) Passages (selected): DN iii.58, DN iii.120; MN i.404; MN ii.191, MN ii.199; SN i.72; SN ii.82 SN iv.190; SN iv.190; SN v.53; AN i.151, AN i.155 sq.; AN iii.412; Snp 427 sq., 547, 569, 790; Dhp 18, Dhp 116 sq., 196, 220, 267, 331 412; Nd i.90; Pv 1.2; i.512; Pp 55; Vism 541 (puññānaṃ paccayo duvidhā); Dhp-a iv.34; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 8 Pv-a 30 Pv-a 69 sq.; Sdhp 4, Sdhp 19 sq ■ (b) Var. phrases & characterisations:; Merit is represented as great (uḷāra DN-a i.110; Pv-a 5; anappaka Pv i.512) or little (paritta DN-a i.110; appa SN ii.229); as adj. (-˚) mahā˚ SN i.191 opp. appa˚ MN ii.5. puñña is defined at Nd i.90 as follows: “puññaṃ vuccati yaṃ kiñci tedhātukaṃ kusal’ âbhisankhāraṃ; apuññaṃ vuccati sabbaṃ akusalaṃ ” It is defined as “dāna-sīl’-ādi-pabheda” “sucaritaṃ kusala-kammaṃ” at Vv-a 19; considered as leading to future happiness: Vv 13; Pv-a 58; consisting mainly in dāna (dānamayaṃ p.) Pv-a 8, Pv-a 51, Pv-a 60 Pv-a 66, Pv-a 73, but also in vandana Pv-a 1. To do good puññaṃ (puññāni) karoti DN i.137; SN iv.331; AN v.177; Pv i.119; or pasavati SN i.182, SN i.213; AN i.89; AN ii.3 sq. AN iii.244; AN v.249, AN v.282; Pv-a 121, cp. puññaṃ pasutaṃ Pv i.512; Vv-a 289. Other phrases: ˚ṃ ākankhati SN i.18, SN i.20; pavaḍḍhati SN i.33; corehi duharaṃ SN i.36 puññānaṃ vipāko AN iv.89; āgamo SN iii.209 SN iv.349 opadhikaṃ SN i.233; Iti 78; purāṇaṃ & navaṃ SN i.92 sayaṃ katāni puññāni SN i.37; puññassa dhārā SN i.100 SN v.400.
-atthika desirous of merit Snp 487 sq. -ānubhāva the majesty of merit Pv-a 58. -ābhisaṅkhāra accumulation of merit DN iii.217; SN ii.82; Nd i.90, Nd i.206, Nd i.442 Vism 557 sq., 571; Vb-a 142 sq., 166, 184. -ābhisanda (+ kusalâbhisanda) meritorious results AN ii.54 sq. AN iii.51, AN iii.337; AN iv.245. -assaya seat of merit DN-a i.67 -iddhi the magic power of m. Pv-a 117. -kata one who has done a deed of m. AN ii.32. -kamma good works righteousness, merit SN i.97, SN i.143; DN-a i.10; Vv-a 32; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 87; Sdhp 32. -kāma (adj.) desirous of doing good works SN v.462. -kiriyā a good or meritorious action SN i.87 (˚kriyā), 101; Pv-a 54; usually as ˚kiriyavatthu item of m. action (of which 3 are usually enumd see above) DN iii.218; AN iv.241; Iti 51; Ne 50, Ne 128 -kkhandha mass of merit (only as mahā˚) SN v.400; AN iii.337. -kkhaya decay (or waning of the effect) of merit DN i.18 (cp. āyukkhaya & DN-a i.110). -kkhetta field of m., Ep. of the Sangha or any holy personalities doing good (lit. planting seeds of merit) to whom is a source of future compensation to the benefactor Usually with adj. anuttara unsurpassed field of m. (see also sangha) DN iii.5, DN iii.227; MN i.446; MN iii.80; SN i.167, SN i.220 SN v.343, SN v.363, SN v.382; AN i.244; AN ii.34 sq., 56, 113; iii.158, 248 279 sq., 387; iv.10 sq., 292; Iti 88; Snp 486; Vv 5031 (cp. Vv-a 216); Pv iv.133 (of a bhikkhu); Vism 220; Vv-a 286; Pv-a 1 (ariyasangha), 5 (Moggallāna), 6 (arahanto), 132, 140, 214 and passim. Cp. BSk puṇyakṣetra Divy 63, Divy 395 (+ udāra). -paṭipadā the meritorious path, path of m. AN i.168; Ne 96. -pasavana creation of m. Pv-a 31. -pekkha looking for merit (i.e. reward), intent upon m. SN i.167; Snp 463 sq. 487 sq.; Dhp 108 (cp. Dhp-a ii.234). -phala the fruit (or result) of m. action SN i.217; Pp 51; Dhp-a ii.4; Pv-a 8 Pv-a 50, Pv-a 52. -bala the power of m. Pv-a 195. -bhāga taking part in meritorious action SN i.154. -bhāgiya having share in m. MN iii.72 sq.; Ne 48. -maya = puñña Ja iv.232 (˚iddhi); cp. BSk. puñyamaya Avs i.183.
cp. (late) Vedic puṇya favourable, good; etym. not clear, it may be dialectical. The word is expld by Dhammapāla as “santānaṃ punāti visodheti, i.e. cleaning the continuation (of life) Vv-a 19, thus taken to pu. The expln is of course fanciful
(adj.) possessing merit, meritorious, virtuous Pts ii.213; Vism 382; Dhp-a i.340; Pv-a 75.
fr. puñña
orig. meaning “tube,” container, hollow pocket.
1. a container, usually made of leaves (cp Ja iv.436; Ja v.441; Ja vi.236), to carry fruit or other viands a pocket, basket: ucchu˚; basket for sugar Ja iv.363 paṇṇa˚; leaf-basket Pv-a 168; phala˚; fruit basket Ja iv.436 = Ja vi.236; phānita(ssa)˚; basket of molasses sugar-basket SN i.175 (KS.: jar); Ja iv.366; Dhp-a iv.232 mālā˚; basket for garlands or flowers Dhp-a iii.212 (baddha made, lit. bound). In puṭa-baddha-kummāsa Vv-a 308 perhaps meaning “cup.”
2. a bag or sack, usually referring to food carried for a journey, thus “knapsack” (or directly “provisions,” taking the container for what it contains DN-a i.288 puts puṭaṃsa pātheyya), in bhatta˚; bag with provisions Ja ii.82 (with bandhati), 203; iii.200; DN-a i.270. Also at Ja iv.375 “bag” (tamba-kipillaka˚). See below ˚aṃsa ˚bhatta.
3. a tube, hollow, in; nāsā˚; (nāsa˚) nostril Ja vi.74; Vism 195, Vism 263, Vism 362; Kp-a 65; hattha˚; the hollow of the hand Mil 87; vatthi˚; bladder(-bag Vism 264; sippi- puṭa oyster shell Ja v.197, Ja v.206. puṭaṃ karoti to form a hollow Vb-a 34.
4. box, container see ˚bheda & ˚bhedana, in pāṭali-puṭa seed box for the P. flower.;
-aṃsa “bag-shoulder” (for “shoulder-bag,” cp aṃsapuṭa (assapuṭa) & Ger. rucksack = knapsack Rightly expl;d by Bdhgh at DN-a i.288), a bag carrying provisions on journeys, hence “provision,” in phrase puṭaṃsena with provisions (v.l. at all places puṭosena DN i.117; MN iii.80; AN ii.183; cp. Dialogues i.150; see also mutoḷī ■ pāka something cooked in a bag (like a meal-pudding) Vism 500. -baddha kind of moccasins Vin i.186, see Vin. Texts ii.15. Spelt puṭa-bandha at Vism 251 = Vb-a 234. -bhatta “bag-food,” viaticum provisions for journey Ja ii.423; Kp-a 46. -bheda the breaking of the container (i.e. seed boxes of the Sirīsa plant) Vv-a 344 (in vatthu where Sirīsa refers to Pāṭaliputta cp. Vv 8452, 53). -bhedana breaking of the (seed-) boxes of the Pāṭali plant, referring primarily to the Name of Pāṭali-putta, where putta represents a secondary Pālisation of Sk. ˚putra which again represents P (or Non-Aryan) puṭa (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 238 292). Through popular etym. a wrong conception of the expression arose, which took puṭa in the sense of “wares, provisions, merchandise” (perhaps influenced by puṭaṃsa) and, based on C. on Ud 88 (bhaṇḍakānaṃ mocara-ṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti) gave rise to the (wrong trslnDial. ii.92 “a centre for interchange of all kinds of wares.” See also Mil trsln i.2; Buddh. Suttas xvi ■ Vin i.229 = DN ii.87 = Ud 88. After the example of Pāṭaliputta applied to the city of Sāgala at Mil 1 (nānā-puṭa-bhedanaṃ S˚ nagaraṃ). Here clearly meant for “merchandise.”-Rh. D. in a note on puṭabhedana gives expln “a town at the confluence or bend of a river” (cp. Jaina Sūtras 2, 451).
etym. unknown, prob. dialectical, as shown by Name of Pāṭaliputta, where putta = puṭa since unfamiliar in origin
(nt.) a bag, pocket, knapsack or basket Ja ii.83 (˚bhatta = provisions); DN-a i.263; Dhp-a ii.82 (v.l. piṭaka & kutaka); iv.132 (pockets of a serpent’s hood). Cp. bhatta.
fr. puṭa
nourished, fed, strengthened, brought up Snp 831; Ja iii.467.
pp. of puṣ (see poseti), Vedic puṣṭa
asked SN ii.36; Snp 84, Snp 122, Snp 510 sq., 1036; Dhp-a iv.132; Pv-a 10 (after acc.) 68, 72 with samāno AN i.197. See also pucchita.
pp. of pucchati, Vedic pṛsṭa
see phuṭṭha.
= Sk. spṛṣṭa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 311
(nt.) the fact of being fed or brought up by Ja ii.405 (vaḍḍhakinā ˚ā).
abstr. fr. puṭṭha1
one who has touched or come in direct contact with Thag-a 284.
fr. puṭṭha3, cp. same form in Prk. AMg. puṭṭhavaṃ = Sk. spṛṣṭavān: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 569
(nt.) the white lotus DN i.75 = AN iii.26 (in sequence uppala padụma, p.); DN ii.4 (Sikhī puṇḍarīkassa mūle abhisambuddho); MN iii.93; SN i.138, SN i.204 = Ja iii.309; AN i.145 (uppala paduma p.); ii.86 sq. (samaṇa˚ adj.); Snp 547; Ja v.45, Ja v.215 (˚ttac’ angī = ratta-paduma-patta-vaṇṇasarīrā); Vv 4412 (= seta-kamala Vv-a 191); Pv ii.122iii.33 (pokkharaṇī bahu ˚ā); Pp 63; DN-a i.219, DN-a i.284 (sankho elo uppalo puṇḍarīko ti cattāro nidhayo). N of a hell SN i.152; Snp p.126 (here in sq. Uppalaka, Puṇḍ˚ Paduma).
Non-Aryan (?). Cp. Vedic puṇḍarīka
(f.) a pool or pond of white lotuses DN i.75≈(M iii.93; SN i.138).
adj. pundarīkin, of puṇḍarīka
full seldom by itself (only passage so far pannarase puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā DN i.47 = Snp p.139). nor-(only Snp 835 muttakarīsa˚), usually in cpds., and there mostly restricted to phrases relating to the full moon.
-ghaṭa a full pitcher (for feeding the bhikkhus, as offering on festive days, cp. J.P.T.S. 1884) Dhp-a i.147 Kp-a 118 (v.l. suvaṇṇaghaṭa); DN-a i.140 (˚paṭimaṇḍita ghara). -canda the full moon Ja i.149, Ja i.267; Ja v.215 -patta a full bowl (as gift, ˚ṃ deti to give an ample gift Ja iii.535. -baddha at Mil 191 should be read as ˚bhadda. -bala at DN-a i.110 read puñña-bala. -bhadda worshipper of Puṇṇabhadda, perhaps a Yakkha (father of the Yakkha Harikesa) Nd i.92 (Vāsuvadeva, Baladeva P. and Maṇibhadda, cp. p. 89); Mil 191 (pisācā maṇibhaddā p.). -mā the full moon (night) DN i.47 (komudiyā cātumāsiniyā puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā cp. DN-a i.140); Snp p.139 (similar); MN iii.21; Ja v.215 (dve p-māyo); Vism 292 (puṇṇa-m-uposatha = puṇṇa-māuposatha), 418 (Phagguṇa-puṇṇama-divase); Vv-a 66 (āsāḷhi p.); Pv-a 137 (id.); DN-a i.140; Dhp-a iii.461 (komudi). -māsa = ˚mā only in loc. puṇṇamāse Vv 811 (= puṇṇa-māsiyaṃ sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṃ Vv-a 314; the similar pass. at Vv-a 321 reads, prob. by mistake, sukka-pakkha-pāṭiyaṃ: see pāṭī); Ja v.215 (= puṇṇa candāya rattiyā C.). -māsī (f.; fr. ˚māsa) mā Ja i.86 (Phagguṇi p.); Vv-a 314; cp. BSk. pūrṇamāsī Avs i.182.
pp. of pṛ; Vedic pṛṇāti, Pass. pūryate, *pelē to fill; cp. Sk. prāṇa & pūrṇa = Av. pərəna; Lith. pílnas Lat. plēnus; Goth fulls = E. full = Ger voll
(f.) fulness DN-a i.140 (māsa˚ full-moon).
abstr. to puṇṇa
(nt.) fulness Snp-a 502.
abstr. ro puṇṇa
see muṭolī.
1. a son SN i.210; Snp 35, Snp 38, Snp 60, Snp 557, Snp 858; Dhp 62, Dhp 84 Dhp 228, Dhp 345; Ja iv.309; Vism 645 (simile of 3 sons); Pv-a 25, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 73 sq.; DN-a i.157 (dāsaka˚). Four kinds of sons are distinguished in the old Cy. viz. atraja p., khettaja dinnaka, antevāsika, or born of oneself, born on one’s land, given to one, i.e. adopted, one living with one as a pupil. Thus at Nd i.247; Nd ii.448; Ja i.135. Good and bad sons in regard to lineage are represented at Ja vi.380 ■ Metaph. “sons of the Buddha” SN i.192 Thag 1237 (sabbe Bhagavato puttā); Iti 101 (me tumhe puttā orasā mukhato jātā dhammajā), Ja iii.211-The parable of a woman eating her sons is given as a punishment in the Peta condition at Pv i.6 (& 7).; pl. puttāni Pv i.63 ■ aputta-bhāvaṃ karoti to disinherit formally Ja v.468.
2. (in general) child, descendant sometimes pleonastic like E. ˚man, ˚son in names see putta-dāra; so esp. in later literature, like ludda hunter’s son = hunter Ja ii.154; ayya˚ = ayya, i.e. gentleman, lord Ja v.94; Pv-a 66. See also rāja˚ ■ Of a girl Thig 464 ■ mātucchā˚ & mātula˚ cousin (from mother’s side), pitucchā˚ id (fr. father’s side). On putta in N. Pāṭali˚ see puṭa ■ f. puttī see rāja˚.;
-jīva Name of a tree: Putranjiva Roxburghii Ja vi.530 -dāra child & wife (i.e. wife & children, family) DN iii.66 DN iii.189, DN iii.192; SN i.92; AN ii.67; Pv iv.348 (sa˚ together with his family); Ja iii.467 (kiṃ ˚ena what shall I do with a family?); v.478. They are hindrances to the development of spiritual life: see Nd ii.under āsiṃsanti & palibodha; -phala a son as fruit (of the womb) Ja v.330 -maṃsa the flesh of one’s children (sons) a metaphor probably distorted fr. pūta˚; rotten flesh. The metaphor is often alluded to in the kasiṇa-kammaṭṭhāna, and usually coupled with the akkha-bbhañjana (& vaṇapaticchādana)-simile, e.g. Vism 32, Vism 45; Dhp-a i.375; Snp-a 58, Snp-a 342. Besides at SN ii.98 (in full); Thag 445 (˚ūpamā); 2, 221. -mata a woman whose sons (children are dead MN i.524.
Vedic putra, Idg. *putlo = Lat. pullus (*putslos) young of an animal, fr. pōu, cp. Gr. παυς, παίς child Lat. puer, pubes, Av. pupra, Lith. putýtis (young animal or bird), Cymr. wyr grandchild; also Sk. pota(ka young animal and base pu-in pumaṃs, puṃs “man”.
1. a little son SN i.209, SN i.210.
2. a little child Thig 462 (of a girl).
3. a young bird (= potaka Ja ii.154.
fr. putta
(nt.) sonship Dhp-a i.89.
fr. putta
(adj.) having sons SN iv.249. Trenckner, Notes 6216 gives a f. *puttapatī for puttavatī, but without ref.
fr. putta
(adj.) having sons SN i.6; Snp 33.
fr. *puttamant
(-˚) in Sakya˚; is compound Sakyaputta + iya “belonging to the son of the Sakyas” (i.e. to the Sakya prince) Pv-a 43 ■ asakyaputtiya dhamma Vin ii.297. Puthavi & Puthuvi
(f.) the earth; as puthavi at SN i.186; Ja i.14 (v.l. puthuvi); iv.233, in cpds.; ˚nābhi the navel of the earth (of the bodhimaṇḍa the Buddha’s seat under the holy fig tree Ja iv.232; ˚maṇḍala the round of the earth Snp 990-As puthuvī at AN ii.21, and in cpd. puthuvi-agga Snp-a 353.
doublets of paṭhavī
(adj.) 1. (= pṛthak) separated, individual adv. separated, individual, adv. separately, each (also given as puthag eva Kacc. 29) SN i.75 (puthu attā individual self); Thag 86; Ja iv.346 (= visuṃ visuṃ C.) Mil 4. See further under cpds.
2. (= pṛthu) The forms (pl.) are both puthu & puthū, both as adj & n.; puthū more freq. found in metre ■ numerous various, several, more, many, most DN i.185 (puthu saññaggā; opp. ekaṃ); SN i.181 (puthū), 207 (id.); Snp 769 (puthū kāme = bahū Nd i.11); 1043, 1044 (puthū bahukā Nd ii.449b); Thig 344 (puthu = puthu sattā Thag-a 241); Ja vi.205 (puthū). nt. adv. puthu & puthuṃ greatly, much, in many ways Snp 580 (= aneka-ppakāraṃ Snp-a 460); Vv 624 (= mahantaṃ Vv-a 258).
-gumba experienced in many crafts Ja vi.448 (= aneka-sippa-ññu C.). -jja (puthu 1, but see remarks on puthujjana) common, ordinary Snp 897, Snp 911 (= puthujjanehi janita Nd i.308). -titthakara a common sectarian DN i.116 (thus to puthu 1, but DN-a i.287 bahū t.) -ddisā (puthu 1) each separate quarter “all the diverse quarters” SN i.234. -pañña (adj.) of wide wisdom (p. 2) AN i.130; AN ii.67 (v.l. hāsa˚). -paññatā wide wisdom AN i.45. -pāṇiya ordinary (p. 1) mode of shampooing with the hand Vin ii.106 (Bdhgh on p. 316 explns pudhu-pāṇikan ti hattha parikammaṃ vuccati “manual performance,” thus not identical with pāṇikā on p. 151). -bhūta (p. 2) widely spread SN ii.107; but cp. BSk pṛṭhag bhavati to be peculiar to Divy 58, Divy 100 -mati wide understanding SN i.236. -loma “flat fin, N of a fish “the finny carp” (Mrs. Rh. D.) Vv 4411 (= dibba-maccha Vv-a 191); Thig 508 (= so-called fish Thag-a 292); Ja iv.466. -vacana “speaking in many (bad) ways,” or “people of various speech” (so expld Nd i.397) Snp 932 (prob. better “speaking ordinary talk” = puthu 1). -sattā (pl.) = puthujjanā, common people, the masses SN i.44; Pv iii.73.
both Vedic pṛthak & pṛthu, lit. spread out, far & wide, flat, of Idg. *plēt broad, Sk.; prath to expand pṛthaḥ palm of hand Av. frapah breadth, cp. Gr. πλατύς broad, πλάτανος plane tree, Lith. platùs broad Lat. planta sole of foot, Ohg. flado pancake, Ags. flet ground, E. flat
rice in the ear Dhp-a i.98 (˚agga as first gift of the field).
fr. puthu, cp. (late) Vedic pṛthuka “flat corn,” also “young of an animal,” with which cp. perhaps Gr. παρχένος: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under virgo
an ordinary, average person (4 classes of ordinary people are discussed at Cpd. 49, 50) a common worldling, a man of the people, an ordinary man MN i.1, MN i.7, MN i.135, MN i.239, MN i.323; MN iii.64, MN iii.227; SN i.148; SN ii.94 sq (assutạvā), 151 (id.); iii.46, 108, 162; iv.157, 196, 201 (assutavā), 206 sq.; v.362 (opp. to sotāpanna); AN i.27 AN i.147 (maraṇa-dhammin), 178, 267; ii.129, 163; iii.54 iv.68, 97, 157, 372; Snp 351, Snp 455, Snp 706, Snp 816, Snp 859; Dhp 59 Dhp 272; Vv 826 (= anariya Vv-a 321, + anavabodha) Nd i.146, Nd i.248; Pts i.61 sq., 143, 156; ii.27; Dhs 1003 (cp. Dhs-a 248 sq.); Vism 311 (= anariya); Vb-a 133 (avijj’ âbhikhūta, bhava-taṇh’ âbhibhūta), 186 (ummat taka, opposed to upabrūhita-ñāṇa-purisa, exemplifying upādāna and kamma); Dhp-a i.5 (opp. ariyasāvaka), 445 Sdhp 363.
-kalyāṇaka (cp. BSk. pṛthagjana-kalyāṇaka Divy 419, Divy 429) an ordinary man striving after his spiritual good Nd i.477; Pts i.176; Pts ii.190, Pts ii.193. -bhikkhu a bh of the common sort DN-a i.269; Vb-a 383. -sukha ordinary happiness MN i.454.
*prthag-jana, thus puthu 1 + jana, but from the point of Pali identical in form and meaning with puthu 2, as shown by use of puthu in similar cpds. and by C. explns. One may even say that puthu 1 = pṛthak is not felt at all in the P. word. Trenckner (Notes 76 already hinted at this by saying “puthujjana, partly confounded with puthu”; a connection which also underlies its expln as “one-of-the-many-folk” at Kvu trsln 807 & 291;3. It is felt to belong to puthu 2 in the same sense as Ger. “die breite Masse,” or Gr. οἱ πολλοί. The expln at Nd i.308 = Nd i.328 is puthu-nānā-janā. A long and detailed etym ■ speculation expln of the term is found at DN-a i.59, trsld at Dhs trsln 258. The BSk. form is pṛthagjana Divy 133 etc.
(f.) common-place character SN i.187 = Thag 1217.
abstr. fr. puthujjana
(adj.) common, ordinary Ja i.360 (of iddhi).
fr. puthujjana
(nt.) being at variance, diversity SN ii.77 (opp ekatta; v.l. SS puthatta). At AN iv.97 we have to read puth’ attānaṃ for puthuttānaṃ which has nothing to do with puthutta, but is puthu + attānaṃ as borne out by v.l. puthujj’ attānaṃ, and by AA: puthu nānākāraṇehi attānaṃ hanti.
fr. puthu, cp. Sk. *pṛthutva; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. pṛthaktva, speciality peculiarity
(adj.) broad, large, flat Ja iii.16 (˚sīsa flat-headed); vi.171 (˚antaraṃsa flat-chested); Mil 121 (of a river); Vv-a 301 (˚gambhīra) ■ abl. puthulato (as adv.) across Dhp-a i.396.
fr. puthu
(adv.) broadly, i.e. diversely, at variance Snp 891, Snp 892 (= puthu-diṭṭhi-gata Nd i.301).
abl. of puthu
see gāma˚; (Vin ii.105 with Bdhgh note on p. 315).
(indecl.) again. There are several forms of this adv., but puna has to be considered as the orig. Pali form. The form puno is doubtful; if authentic, a Sanskritisation; only found at Thag-a 71 (Ap. v. 38; v.l. puna) & 72 (Ap. v. 41, v.l. puna). The sandhi; r is preserved only in metre and in compn.. That it is out of fashion even in metre is shown by a form punā where ā is the regular metrical lengthening instead of ar (J iii.437: na hi dāni punā atthi; v.l. puna). Besides this the r is apparent in the doubling of the first consonants of cpds. (punappunaṃ, punabbhava); it is quite lost in the enclitic form pana ■ We find r in punar āgami Snp 339; punar āgato Ja i.403 (= puna āgato Ja i.403 (= puna āgato, ra-kāro sandhivasena vutto C.); in cpds.: punar- abhiseka see J.P.T.S. 1885 49; a-punar -āvattitā the fact of not turning back Mil 276 (cp. Prk. apuṇar-avatti Pischel, § 343). Otherwise r stands on the same level as other sandhi (euphonic) consonants (like m. & d., see below), as in; puna-r-eva Dhp 338; Pv ii.87; ii.116. We have m in puna-m-upāgamuṃ Snp 306; puna by itself is rarely found, it is usually combd with other emphatic part like eva and api. The meaning is “again,” but in enclitic function (puna still found Snp 677, Snp 876, otherwise pana ); it represents “however, but, now” (cp same relation in Ger. abermals: aber), similar to the development in Prk. puṇo vi & puṇar avi “again” puna “now” (Pischel Gr. § 342) ■ puna by itself at Snp-a 597; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 45; Mvu 14, Mvu 12. doubled as punappunaṃ SN i.174; Thag 531, Thag 532; Snp 728, Snp 1051; Dhp 117 Dhp 118, Dhp 325, Dhp 337; Ja v.208; Snp-a 107; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 47; punappuna at Dhp-a ii.75; as puna-d-eva at DN i.60, DN i.142; Pv ii.113 (v.l.); Vism 163; Dhp-a ii.76; puna-m-eva Pv ii.113; puna pi once more Ja i.279; Pv-a 67, Pv-a 74 puna-p-pi Ja v.208. The phrase puna c’ aparaṃ “and again something else” stands on the same level as the phrase aparo pi (apare pi), with which one may compare the parallel expressions puna-divase: aparadivase all of which show the close relation between pi puna, apara, but we never find para in these connections Trenckner’s (& following him Oldenberg in Vin and Hardy in A etc.) way of writing; puna ca paraṃ (e.g. Mil 201, Mil 388, Mil 418 etc.) is to be corrected to puna c’ aparaṃ, cp. punâpara Snp 1004; Cp iii.61.
-āgamana coming again, return SN i.22 (a˚). -āvāsa rebirth SN i.200. -divase on the following day Ja i.278; Pv-a 19, Pv-a 38. -nivattati to turn back again SN i.177 -bbhava renewed existence, new birth DN ii.15; SN i.133; Iti 62; SN iv.201 (āyati˚); Snp 162, Snp 273, Snp 502, Snp 514, Snp 733 Nd ii.s. v.; Ne 28, Ne 79 sq.; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 200; cp. ponobhavika; a˚; no more rebirth SN i.174, SN i.208; Nd ii.64; ˚ābhinibbatti birth in a new existence MN i.294; SN ii.65; AN i.223; Vin iii.3; Pv-a 35. -vacana repetition Snp-a 487. -vāre (loc.) another time Ja v.21.
cp. Vedic punar, punaḥ, to base *pŭ (related to *apo: see apa), as in puccha tail, Lat puppis, poop, Gr. πύματος the last; orig. meaning “behind”
1. to clean, cleanse Vv-a 19 (+ visodheti, in def. of puñña).
2. to sift Ja vi.108 (angāraṃ p. = attano sīse angāre p. okirati C. so read with v.l. for phunati T.); DN-a i.268 (bhusaṃ pumanto viya like sifting the chaff, winnowing). Cp puneti.
cp. Vedic pavate, punāti, pū to cleanse, as in Lat. purus clean, purgo, Ohg. fowen to sift also Gr. πϋρ (cp. P. pāvaka) = Ohg. fūir = E. fire, Armen. hur, lit “cleansing,” see also puñña
to experience (over & over) again: in this meaning at Iti 1 sq. & Nd;1 202 Nd ii.337 (kilese na p. na pacceti etc.); perhaps also at Thag 533 (sattayugaṃ), although Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it = punāti and Mrs. Rh. D. translates “lifts to lustrous purity.”
Caus. fr. puna? or = punāti?
a species of tree Ja i.9 (˚puppha); vi.530; Kp-a 50 (aggacchinna˚-phala), 53 (id.).
dial.?
(nt.) a flower Vin ii.123; SN i.204 = Ja iii.308; Snp 2, Snp 5; Dhp 47 sq.; 377; Vism 430; Snp-a 78 (paduma˚); Vv-a 73; Pv-a 127; Sdhp 550- pupphāni (pl.) Vb-a 255 (of 32 colours, in simile) 292 sq. (for Cetiya-worship) ■ adj. ˚puppha in ghana thick with flowers DN-a i.87 ■ Cp. pokkharatā.
-ābhikiṇṇa decked with flowers Vv 6429; Pv ii.112 -ādhāna “a ledge (on a Tope) where offerings of flowers are laid down” (Geiger, Mvu p.355; cp. Mvu trsl. p. 2022) Mvu 30, Mvu 51, Mvu 56, Mvu 60; Mvu 33, Mvu 22 Reading uncertain -āveḷā flower-garland Vv-a 125. -āsava wine made from flowers, flower-liquor Ja iv.117; Kp-a 26. -gandha odour of flowers Dhp 54; Dhs 625. -cumbaṭaka a fl cushion. -chaḍḍaka a remover of (dead) flowers, a rubbish-remover, a low occupation, including cleaning of privies & bins etc. Vin iv.6; Thag 620; Ja v.449 (= vacca-ṭṭhāna-sodhaka C.); Mil 331; Vism 194 (in simile). Cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 89 and Mil trsl. ii.211 -cchatta a parasol with flowers Dhp-a i.110. -dāna offering of flowers Vb-a 336. -dāma a wreath or garland of fls. Ja i.397; Vv-a 198. -dhara bearing flowers Pv ii.124 (so read for T. ˚dada). -pañjara a cage (ornamented) with flowers Ja v.365. -paṭa a cloth (embroidered) with flowers Ja iv.283; Dhp-a ii.45 -palāsa a fl. heap Dhp-a i.75. -bhāṇin “speaking flowers,” i.e. speaking the truth Pp 29. -mālā garland of fls. Snp-a 78. -muṭṭhi a handful of fl. Vism 432 (in simile). -rasa (wine-) juice made of fls., flower-liquor Vin i.246; taste of fls. Dhs 629. -rāsi a heap of fls. Dhp 53.
Vedic puṣpa according to Grassmann for *puṣka fr. puṣ (?) see poseti
(nt.) blood: see pupphaka pupphavatī. With ref. to the menses at Ja v.331.
cp. Class. Sk. puṣpa “les fleurs” in strī˚; the menses Am. Kośa 3, 4, 30, 233 and Mārk. Pur. 51 42. Similarly phala is used in the sense of “menstruation”: see BR s. v. phala 12
(nt.) blood Ja iii.541 (v.l. pubbaka; C. = lohita); Mil 216 (tiṇa˚-roga, a disease, Kern “hay-fever”). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls the Ja passage with “vuil, uitwerpsel.”
fr. puppha2
to flower Ja i.76 (aor. ˚iṃsu); Pv-a 185 (= phalati) ■ pp. pupphita.
puṣp
(f.) a menstruous woman Mil 126.
fr. puppha2, but cp. Vedic puṣpavat flowering
flowering, in blossom SN i.131 = Thig 230 (su˚); Vv 354; Ja i.18; Mil 347; Thag-a 69 (Ap. v. 12); Dhp-a i.280; Dhp-a ii.250 (su˚).
pp. of pupphati
(adj.) bearing flowers; in nīlapupphī (f.) Name of a plant (“with blue flowers”) Ja vi.53.
fr. puppha1 cp. Vedic puṣpin
pus, matter, corruption MN i.57; MN iii.90; SN i.150; SN ii.157; AN i.34; Ja ii.18; Mil 382; Pv-a 80 ■ In detail discussed (as one of the 32 ākāras ) at Vism 261, Vism 360; Kp-a 62; Vb-a 244 ■ Often in combn pubba-lohita matter & blood, e.g. Snp p.125; Snp 671; Ja v.71; Dhp-a i.319; as food of the Petas Pv i.69; i.91 (lohita-pubba); i.118; ii.26. pubba-vaṭṭi a lump of matter Dhp-a iii.117.
Vedic pūya → *pūva → *puvva → pubba (Geiger, P.Gr. § 461); cp. pūyati to smell rotten, Lat. pūs = E pus, Gr. πύχω to rot, πύον matter; Vedic pūti smelling foul; Goth. fūls = E. foul
(adj.) previous, former, before. The adj. never occurs in abs. forms by itself (for which see pubbaka), it is found either as-˚ or ˚-or in cases as adv. The phrase pubbam antam anissita Snp 849 is poetical for pubbantam.
1. (-˚) having been before Ja iii.200; na diṭṭha˚ not seen before Nd i.445; mātabhūta˚ formerly (been) his mother Pv-a 79; vuttha (gāma) formerly inhabited Dhp-a i.15; as adv. bhūtapubbaṃ before any beings (existed) Vin i.342; Dhp-a i.102 and passim (see bhūta).
2. (neg.) apubba (nt. what has not been before, something new Vv-a 117, Vv-a 287 acc. as adv. in phrase apubbaṃ acarimaṃ not earlier not after, i.e. simultaneously MN iii.65; Pp 13 (= apure apacchā, ekappahāren’ evâti attho PugA 186). 3. (cases adverbially) instr. pubbena in ˚âpara gradual MN iii.79; acc. pubbaṃ see 1, 2, with abl. as prep. before Snp-a 549 (= purā); loc. pubbe in earlier times (also referring to previous births, cp. pure), in the past before SN iv.307; Snp 831, Snp 949 (with pacchā & majjhe i.e. future & present); Pv i.31; ii.22; Snp-a 290, Snp-a 385 Snp-a 453; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 10, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 40, Pv-a 100. With abl. as prep. before SN ii.104. In compn with ˚nivāsa see sep. An old acc. f. *pūrvīṃ (cp. Prk. puvviṃ Pischel, Gr. § 103 we find in Cpd. anupubbikathā (q.v.). The compar pubbatara (“quite early”) occurs abs. at SN iv.117 as nom. pl. “ancestors” (cp. Gr. οἱ πρότεροι), as loc. adv. at SN i.22.
-aṅgin in f. ˚angī (cāru˚) at Ja v.4 & vi.481 read sabbangin. -aṇṇa “first grain,” a name given to the 7 kinds of grain, as distinguished from aparaṇṇa, the 7 sorts of vegetables, with which it is usually combined; Vin iii.151; Vin iv.267; Nd i.248 (where the 7 are enumd); Nd ii.314; Ja ii.185; Mil 106; DN-a i.78, DN-a i.270; Dhp-a iv.81 etc. (see aparaṇṇa). See also bīja-bīja -aṇha the former part of the day, forenoon, morning (as contrasted with majjhaṇha & sāyaṇha) DN i.109, DN i.226; AN i.294; AN iii.344; SN i.76 (˚samayaṃ); Snp-a 139 (id.) Dhp-a iii.98; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 216. The spelling pubbanha MN i.528 (cp. Trenckner, Notes 80). -anta (1) the East Ja i.98 (˚ato aparantaṃ aparantato pubbantaṃ gacchati from E. to W. from W. to E.); v.471 ■ (2) the Past (opp. aparanta the Future) DN i.12 sq.; SN ii.26; Nd i.212; Dhs 1004. pubbam antaṃ for pubbantaṃ is poetical at Snp 849. -˚ânudiṭṭhi theory concerning the past or the beginning of things DN i.13 (cp. DN-a i.103); MN ii.233; SN iii.45; Dhs 1320. -aḷha(ka) (āḷhaka) at Thig 395 is doubtful. T. reads bubbuḷaka, Mrs. Rh. D. translates “bubble of film”; Thag-a 259 explns by “ṭhita-jalapubbaḷha-sadisa.” -ācariya (1) an ancient teacher, a scholar of previous times AN i.132; AN ii.70; Iti 110; Vism 523 = Vb-a 130; Kp-a 11, Kp-a 64, Kp-a 65 ■ (2) a former teacher Snp-a 318. -āciṇṇa (-vasena) by way of former practice, from habit Snp-a 413. -āpara (1) what precedes and what follows, what comes first and what last (with ref. to the successive order of syllables and words in the text of the Scriptures) AN iii.201 (˚kusala) Dhp 352; Ne 3 (˚ânusandhi); cp. BSk. pūrvāpareṇa vyākhyānaṃ karoti “expld in due order” Avs ii.20-(2) ˚rattaṃ “as in the former, so in the foll. night, i.e. without ceasing, continuous Thag 413. cp. pub baratt-âparattaṃ Dhp-a iv.129. -āpariya former future, first & last Ud 61 (˚vivesa); -ābhoga previous reflection Thag-a 30. -ārāma “Eastern Park,” Name of a locality east of Sāvatthi AN iii.344; Snp p.139 (cp. Snp-a 502). -āsava former intoxication Snp 913, cp. Nd i.331. -uṭṭhāna getting up before (someone else) either applied to a servant getting up before the master, or to a wife rising before her husband Vv-a 71, Vv-a 136. -uṭṭnāyin “getting up earlier” (with complementary Ep pacchā-nipātin “lying down later”), see above DN i.60 DN iii.191; AN iii.37; AN iv.265 sq.; DN-a i.168 ■ abstr. ˚uṭṭhāyitā Ja iii.406 (˚ādīhi pañcahi kalyāṇa dhammehi samannāgatā patidevatā) = v.88; Kp-a 173. -uttara (1) preceding and following Kacc. 44. 47 ■ (2) “eastnorthern,” i.e. north-eastern Ja v.38 (˚kaṇṇa N.E corner); vi.519 (id.). -kamma a former deed, a deed done in a former existence Cp iii.113. -kārin “doing before,” i.e. looking after, obliging, doing a favour AN i.87; Pp 26 (= paṭhamaṃ eva kāraka PugA 204; Pv-a 114. -kicca preiiminary function Vin v.127 (cattāro pubbakiccā); cp. Cpd. 53. -koṭṭhaka “Eastern Barn,” Npl. AN iii.345. -(n)gama (1) going before preceding AN iii.108 (okkamane p.); MN iii.71 sq. (2) “allowing to go before”; controlled or directed by giving precedence Dhp 2 (mano˚ dhammā = tena paṭhama-gāminā hutvā samannāgatā Dhp-a i.35); Nd ii.318 Pp 15 (paññā˚ ariyamagga = paññaṃ pure-cārikaṃ katṿā PugA 194); Sdhp 547 (paññā˚). Cp. BSk pūrvangama Divy 333 (“obedient” Index). -carita former life Snp-a 382, Snp-a 385. -ja born earlier, i.e. preceding in age Pv-a 57 (= jeṭṭhaka). -ñāti former relative Pv-a 24. -deva a former god, a god of old, pl the ancient gods (viz. the Asuras) SN i.224. -devatā an ancient deity AN ii.70; Iti 110 (v.l. ˚deva). -nimitta “previous sign,” a foregoing sign, prognostic, portent forecast Iti 76 (the 5 signs of decay of a god); Ja i.11 (the 32 signs at the conception of a Buddha, given in detail on p. 51), 48; Mil 298 (of prophetic dreams cp. Cpd. p. 48); Vb-a 407 (in dreams); Dhp-a ii.85 -pada the former, or antecedent, part (of a phrase Dhs-a 164. -parikamma a former action Snp-a 284 (opp. to pacchā-parikamma). -purisa ancestor DN i.93, DN i.94. -peta a deceased spirit, a ghost (= peta DN i.8 (˚kathā, cp. DN-a i.90 & Dial. i.14). pubbe pete is poetical at Pv i.41 for pubbapete. Cp. BSk. pūrvapreta Avs i.149 (see Index p. 230); Divy 47, Divy 97 -bhāga “former part,” i.e. previous Pv-a 133 (˚cetanā opp. apara-bhāga-cetanā. SS omit bhāga). -bhāsin speaking obligingly (cp. pubbakārin) DN i.116 (trsl “not backward in conversation”), DN-a i.287 (bhāsanto va paṭhamataraṃ bhāsati etc.). -yoga “former connection ” i.e. connection with a former body or deed former action (and its result) Ja v.476; Ja vi.480; Mil 2 (pubbayogo ti tesaṃ pubba-kammaṃ). Kern, Toev. s. v. remarks that it is frequent in BSk. as pūrvayoga (yoga = yuga; syn. with pūrvakalpa), e.g. Saddh. Puṇḍ ch. vii.; Mvu ii.287; Mvu iii.175; and refers to Ind Studien 16, 298; J.R.A.S. 1875, 5. -rattāparattaṃ the past and future time, the whole time, always AN iii.70; Dhp-a iv.129. -vāsana an impression remaining in the mind from former actions Snp 1009 Thag-a 31 (Ap. v. 8). -videha Eastern Videha Kp-a 123 Kp-a 176; Snp-a 443. -sadisa an old (former) friend Dhp-a i.57
Vedic pūrva, to Idg. *per, see pari & cp. Goth. fram = from; Gr. πρόμος first, Goth. fruma = As formo first, Av. pourvō, also Sk. pūrvya = Goth. frauja = Ohg. frō Lord, frouwa = Ger. frau. See also Lat prandium, provincia
(adj.) 1. former, ancient, living in former times DN i.104 (isayo), 238 (id.); Snp 284 (id.) SN ii.105; SN iv.307 (ācariya-pācariyā); Thag 947. 2. (-˚; cp. pubba2 1) having formerly been, previous Ja i.182 (suvaṇṇakāra˚ bhikkhu), cp. BSk. ˚pūrvaka in same use at Avs i.259, Avs i.296, Avs i.322.
3. (-˚) accompanied or preceded by Thag-a 74 (guṇ’ âbhitthavana udāna); Pv-a 122 (puññânumodana˚ maggācikkhana) cp. āśvāsana-pūrvaka Jtm 210.
fr. pubba2
occurs only in one phrase (gattāni pubbāpayamāno) at MN i.161 & AN iii.345≈402 in meaning “drying again”; at both A pass. the vv. ll (glosses) are “sukkhāpayamāno” and “pubba-sadisāni kurumāno”; to the M. pass. cp. Trenckner’s notes on p. 543, with the BB expln of the word (= pubbabhāvaṃ gamayamāno), also Neumann, Majjh. trsln i.260. The similar passage at SN i.8, SN i.10 has “gattāni sukkhāpayamāno” as T. reading and “pubbāpayamāno” as v.l. BB.
Denom. fr. pubba2
(˚-) in cpds.: “in a former existence”: ˚kata (nt.) deeds done in a past life MN ii.217 = AN i.173 (˚hetu); Ja v.228 (˚vādin fatalist) Ne 29 (˚punnata). ˚nivāsa [cp. BSk. pūrve-nivāsasaṃprayuktaṃ Mvu iii.224, otherwise as pūrvanivāsa Divy 619] abode in a former life, one’s former state of existence DN ii.1, DN ii.2; DN iii.31 sq., 50 sq., 108 sq 230, 281; MN i.278; MN ii.21; MN iii.12; SN i.167; AN i.164 sq. Iti 100; Snp 647; Dhp 423; Pp 61; Vism 411 (remembered by 6 classes of individuals); Thag-a 74, Thag-a 197. pubbe-nivās’ ānussati (-ñāṇa) (knowledge of) remembrance of one’s former state of existence, one of the faculties of an Arahant (cp. AN i.164 sq., and Cpd. 64; DN iii.110, DN iii.220; MN i.35, MN i.182, MN i.248, MN i.278, MN i.496; Dhs 1367 Ne 28, Ne 103; Vism 433; Vb-a 373 sq., 401, 422 Tikp. 321 ■ See also under nivāsa and cp. Vism ch. xiii, pp. 410 sq.
loc. of pubba2, see pubba2 3
to blow, aor. pumi Ja i.171; ger. pumitvā Ja i.172. See J.P.T.S. 1889 207 (?).
onomat. *pu to blow, cp. Gr. φυσα blowing, bubble, φυσάω blow, Lat. pustula = pustule, Sk. *pupphusa = P. papphasa lung, phutkaroti blow, etc., see Uhlenbeck Ai. Wtb. s. v. pupphusa
(Pumā) a male, a man, nom sg. pumo D n.273; Cp ii.62; instr. pumunā Ja vi.550. nom. pl pumā DN iii.85 (itthi-pumā men & women; v.l. K ˚purisā); Ja iii.459; acc. sg. pumaṃ Ja v.154 (gata, cp purisantara-gata) ■ On decl. cp. Müller, P.Gr. p. 79 Greiger, P.Gr. § 935.
see puṃs
base of adv. & prep. denoting “before”; abl. purato (adv. & prep. in front of (with gen.), before (only local) Vin i.179 Vin ii.32; DN ii.14 (mātu); SN i.137; Pv i.111, 113 (opp pacchā); ii.86 (janâdhipassa); DN-a i.152; Pv-a 5 (purisassa), 22, 39 (tassa). Often repeated (distributively purato purato each time in front, or in front of each, or continuously in front Vin ii.213; Vism 18; cp. pacchato pacchato ■ Otherwise *pura occurs only in foll der.: (1) adverbial: *puraḥ in purakkharoti, purekkhāra purohita; purā, pure, puratthaṃ, puratthato. (2) adjectival: purāṇa, puratthima, purima.
on etym. see purā, purāṇa, pure
(nt.) 1. a town, fortress, city Vin i.8 = MN i.171 (Kāsinaṃ puraṃ); Ja i.196, Ja i.215; Snp 976, Snp 991, Snp 1012 (˚uttama),1013; Ja vi.276 (= nagara C); Mvu 14, Mvu 29 ■ avapure below the fortress MN i.68 ■ devapura city of the Gods SN iv.202; Vv 6430 (= Sudassana-mahā-nagara Vv-a 285). See also purindada.
2. dwelling, house or (divided) part of a house (= antepura), a meaning restricted to the Jātakas, e.g. v.65 (= nivesana C.); vi.251, 492 (= antepura). Cp. thīpura lady’s room, harem, also “lady Ja v.296, and antepura.
3. the body [cp. Sk. pura body as given by Halāyudha 2, 355, see Aufrecht p. 273] Thag 279 Thag 1150 (so read for pūra, cp. Kern Toev. s. v. & under sarīradeha) ■ Cp. porin.;
Vedic pur. f., later Sk. puraṃ nt. & purī f.
honoured, esteemed, preferred DN i.50; MN i.85; SN i.192, SN i.200; Snp 199, Snp 421 Snp 1015; Nd i.154; Dhp 343 (= parivārita Dhp-a iv.49) Ja ii.48 (˚parivārita); Pv iii.71 (= payirupāsita Pv-a 205); DN-a i.152 (= purato nisinna); Thag-a 170. Cp purekkhata.
pp. of purakkharoti
to put in front, to revere, follow, honour; only in foll sporadic forms: ppr. purakkharāna holding before oneself, i.e. looking at SN iii.9 sq.; aor. 3rd pl. purakkharuṃ Mil 22; ger. purakkhatvā MN i.28; Snp 969 Nd i.491; Ja v.45 (= purato katvā C.); Pv-a 21, Pv-a 141. purakkhata pp. (q.v.). See also purekkhāra.
fr. puraḥ, cp. Ved. puras-karoti, see pure
(adv.) 1. before SN i.141 (na pacchā na puratthaṃ = no after, no before).
2. east DN i.50 (˚âbhimukha looking eastward.)
for Vedic purastāt, fr. puraḥ, see *pura
(adv.) in front, coram Snp 416 (sic, v.l. BB purakkhato); Ja vi.242.
fr. puratthaṃ, cp. BSk. purastataḥ Mvu ii.198
(adj.) eastern DN i.153; SN i.144; Ja i.71 (˚âbhimukha: Gotama facing E. under the Bo tree).
fr. *pura, cp. Prk. (AMg.) puratthima, acc. to Pischel, Gr. § 602 a der. fr. purastāt (= P puratthaṃ) as *purastima, like *pratyastima (= paccatthima) fr. *pratyastaṃ
(indecl.) prep. c. abl. “before” (only temporal) Vin iv.17 (purāruṇā = purā aruṇā before dawn); Snp 849 (purā bhedā before dissolution (of the body), after which the Suttanta is named Purābhedasutta, cp. Nd i.210 sq. expld by sarīra-bhedā pubbaṃ at Snp-a 549).
Vedic purā; to Idg. *per, cp. Goth. faúr = Ags. for = E. (be-) fore; also Lat. prae = Gr. παραί = Sk pare
(adj.) 1. ancient, past Snp 312, Snp 944 (= Nd i.428 atītaṃ opp. nava = paccuppannaṃ); Dhp 156 (= pubbe katāni C.); with ref. to former births or previous existences p. kammaṃ SN ii.64 = Nd i.437 = Nd ii.680 Q. 2; puññaṃ SN i.92.
2. old (of age), worn out, used (opp. nava recent) DN i.224 (bandhanaṃ, opp. navaṃ); Vin ii.123 (udakaṃ p.˚ṃ stale water); SN ii.106 (magga); Snp 1 (tacaṃ); Ja ii.114 (f. purāṇī, of an old bow string, applied jokingly to a former wife); iv.201 (˚paṇṇa old leaf, opp nava); v.202 (a˚ not old, of years); vi.45 (apurāṇaṃ adv. recently); Vb-a 363 (udaka stale water). 3. former, late, old in cpds. as ˚dutiyikā the former wife (of a bhikkhu) Vin i.18, Vin i.96; Vin iv.263; SN i.200; Ud 5; Ja i.210; ˚rājorodhā former lady of the harem Vin iv.261 ˚sālohita former blood-relation Snp p.91; Ud 7; Dhp-a ii.210. Cp. porāṇa.
Venic purāṇa, fr. *per, cp. Sk. parut in former years, Gr. πέρυσι = Lith. pernai, Goth. fairneis Ohg. firni = Ger. firn (last year’s snow), forn formerly ferro far
(adj.) belonging to the past, former, old Ne-a 194.
fr. purā, cp. sanātana in formation
“townbreaker,” a name of Sakka (Indra) DN ii.260; SN i.230; Vv 374, 622; Pv-a 247.
distorted fr. Vedic puraṃ-dara, pura + dṛ; to break, see darī, thus “breaker of fortresses,” Ep. of Indra (& Agni). The P. Commentator (Vv-a 171) of course takes it popularly as “pure dānaṃ dadātī ti Purindado ti vuccati,” thus pure + dā; see also Trenckner, Notes 596; Geiger, P.Gr. § 443
(adj.) preceding, former, earlier, before (opp pacchima) DN i.179; Snp 773, Snp 791, Snp 1011; Nd i.91; Ja i.110; Snp-a 149 (˚dhura); Pv-a 1, Pv-a 26. In sequence p. majjhima pacchima; past, present, future (or first, second last) DN i.239 sq.; DN-a i.45 sq. and passim ■ purimatara = purima Ja i.345 (˚divase the day before).
-attabhāva a former existence Vv-a 78; Pv-a 83, Pv-a 103 Pv-a 119. -jāti a previous birth Pv-a 45, Pv-a 62, Pv-a 79, Pv-a 90.
compar ■ superl. formation fr. *pura, cp. Sk. purima
(adj.) previous, first Vin ii.167 (opp. pacchimaka). f. ˚ika Vin i.153.
fr. purima
man (as representative of the male sex, contrasted to itthi woman, e.g. at AN iii.209; AN iv.197; Ja i.90; Ja v.72; Pv-a 51). Definitions of the C. are “puriso nāma manussa-puriso na yakkho na peto etc.” (i.e. man κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν) Vin iv.269 (the same expln for purisa-puggala at Vin iv.214); “seṭṭh’ aṭṭhena puri setī ti puriso ti satto vuccati” Vv-a 42–1. man DN i.61 (p. kassaka “free man”); ii.13; SN i.225; AN i.28 AN i.126; AN ii.115; AN iii.156; Snp 102, Snp 112, Snp 316, Snp 740, Snp 806 and passim; Dhp 117, Dhp 152, Dhp 248; Nd i.124; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 4, Pv-a 165 Pv-a 187; Vv-a 13 (majjhima˚, paṭhama˚, as t.t. g.?) uttama˚; SN ii.278; SN iii.61, SN iii.166; SN iv.380; Iti 97; mahā˚ SN v.158; AN ii.35; AN iii.223; AN iv.229 (see also under mahā) sappurisa (q.v.). Var. epithets of the Buddha e.g. at SN i.28 sq ■ Kāpurisa a contemptible man; kimpurisa a wild man of the woods (“whatever man”), f. kimpurisī Ja v.215 ■ purisa as “a man, some one, somebody” as character or hero in var. similes, e.g. angārakāsuyaṃ khipanaka˚ Vism 489; asucimhi patita Vism 465; āgantuka˚ Vb-a 23; dubbala Vism 533; papāte patanto Vb-a 23 (cannot be a help to others; similarly with patita at Vb-a 170 = Vism 559); bhikkhusanghaṃ disvā Vism 333; maṇḍapa-lagga Vism 339 sq. lakuṇṭaka-pāda & dīghapāda Vb-a 26; cp. the foll. of a man pleasing the king Vb-a 442 sq.; a man wishing to perform a long journey in one day Vism 244; a man breathing when exhausted Vism 274. Frequently elsewhere
2. an attendant, servant, waiter Vin ii.297; DN i.60 (dāsa + ), 72 (id.); Ja i.385 (dāsa˚); vi.462. Cp porisa, posa.
-atthika one who seeks a servant Vin ii.297. -anta = purisādhama Snp 664 (anta = Sk. antya; Snp-a 479 explns by antimapurisa). -antaragatā touched by a man (lit. gone in by… ), a woman who has sexual intercourse, a woman in intercourse with a man DN i.166 (cp. Dial. i.228); MN i.77; AN i.295; AN ii.206; Vin iv.322 Pp 55 (= he does not accept food, lest their intercourse should be broken: rati antarāyo hoti PugA 231); DN-a i.79 (= itthi, as opp. to kumārikā). Cp. pumaṃ gata Ja v.154. -allu (& ālu) Name of certain monstrous beings living in the wilderness Ja v.416 (= vaḷavā-mukhayakkhinī, a y. with the face of a mare), 418; vi.537 (˚ālu = vaḷavā-m ■ pekkhī C.). -ājañña “a noble steed of a man,” a thorough-bred or remarkable man SN iii.91; AN v.325 sq., Snp 544; Dhp 193; as -ājāneyya at Dhp-a i.310 -ājāniya at AN i.290; AN ii.115; AN iv.397 sq.; AN v.324. -āda a bad man (“man-eater”) a wild man, cannibal Ja v.25 (cp. puruṣāda Jtm 3141); ˚ādaka Ja v.30. -ādhama a wicked man Dhp 78; Ja v.268. -indriya male faculty masculinity SN v.204; AN iv.57; Dhs 634, Dhs 715, Dhs 839, Dhs 972 Vism 447, Vism 492. -uttama “the highest of men,” an excellent man AN v.16, AN v.325 sq.; Snp 544; Dhp 78; Dhp-a ii.188. -usabha (purisusabha) “a bull of a man,” a very strong man Vin iii.39. -kathā talk about men DN i.8. -kāra manliness DN i.53 (cp. DN-a i.161); Mil 96 -thāma manly strength DN i.53; SN ii.28; AN ii.118 AN iv.190. -dammasārathi guide of men who have to be restrained, Ep. of the Buddha [cp. BSk. puruṣa-damyasārathi Divy 54 and passim] SN ii.69; AN i.168, AN i.207 AN ii.56, AN ii.112, AN ii.147; Snp p.103 (= vicitrehi vinayan’ ûpāyehi purisadamme sāretī ti Snp-a 443); Iti 79; Pp 57; Vism 207; Thag-a 178. -dosā (pl.) faults or defects in a man eight are discussed in detail at AN iv.190 sq.; Pts i.130 eighteen at Ja vi.542, Ja vi.548. -dhorayha a human beast of burden SN i.29. -parakkama manly energy DN i.53; SN ii.28. -puggala a man, a human character DN iii.5 DN iii.227 (eight); SN i.220 (8); ii.69, 82, 206; iv.272 sq. Iti 88 (8) (expld at Vism 219); AN i.32, AN i.130, AN i.173, AN i.189 AN ii.34, AN ii.56; AN iii.36, AN iii.349; AN iv.407 (8); v.139, 183 (8), 330 (8); Vin iv.212 sq. (= male); Vb-a 497; -bhava state of being a man, manhood, virility Ja iii.124; Dhs 634 Dhs 415, Dhs 839; Pv-a 63. -bhūmi man’s stage, as “eight stages of a prophet’s existence” (Dial. i.72) at DN i.54 in detail at DN-a i.162, DN-a i.163. -medha man-sacrifice human sacrifice SN i.76; AN ii.42; AN iv.151; Iti 21; Snp 303 -yugāni (pl.) (4) pairs of men SN iv.272 sq.; AN i.208 AN ii.34, AN ii.56; AN iii.36; AN iv.407; AN v.330; DN iii.5, DN iii.227; Iti 88; in verse Vv 4421; expld Vism 219 (see under yuga). -lakkhaṇa (lucky) marks on a man DN i.9. -liṅga (see also pullinga) a man’s characteristic, membrum virile Vin iii.35; Dhs 634, Dhs 715, Dhs 839; Tikp 50; Vism 184. -viriya manly vigour SN ii.28. -vyañjana the membrum virile (= ˚linga) Vin ii.269.
according to Geiger, Gr. § 303 the base is *pūrṣa, from which the Vedic form puruṣa, and the Prk ■ P. form purisa. The further contraction *pussa *possa yielded posa (q.v.). From the Prk. form puliśa (Māgadhī) we get pulla
(n ■ adj.) 1. a (little) man, only in ˚tiṇa doll effigy made of grass (straw), scarecrow Mil 352; Vism 462; Dhs-a 111.
2. (adj.) having a man f. ˚ikā in eka˚ (a woman) having intercourse with only one man Ja i.290.
fr. purisa
(nt.) manhood, virility Dhs 634, Dhs 715, Dhs 839.
abstr. fr. purisa
(nt.) manhood Mil 171.
= purisatta, cp. Trenckner, Notes 7037
(indecl.) before (both local & temporal), thus either “before, in front or “before, formerly, earlier.” In both meanings the opp. is pacchā -(a) local SN i.176 (pure hoti to lead) Ja ii.153 (opp. pacchima)-(b) temporal SN i.200; Snp 289, Snp 311, Snp 541, Snp 645, Snp 773 (= atītaṃ Nd i.33; opp pacchā); Dhp 348 (opp. pacchato); Ja i.50 (with abl. pure puṇṇamāya). Often meaning “in a former life, e.g. Vv 348, 3413; Pv i.21 (= pubbe atītajātiyaṃ Pv-a 10); ii.32 (cp. purima); ii.42; ii.74 (= atītabhāve Pv-a 101); ii.913 ■ apure apacchā neither before nor after i.e. simultaneously PugA 186 (see apubbaṃ):- puretaraṃ (adv.) first, ahead, before any one else Dhp-a i.13 Dhp-a i.40 ■ (c) modal, meaning “lest” DN-a i.4; cp. purā in same sense Jtm. 28.
-cārika going before, guiding, leading, only in phrase ˚n katvā putting before everything else, taking as a guide or ideal Ja i.176 (mettā-bhāvanaṃ); iii.45 (id.), 180 (khantiñ ca mettañ ca); vi.127 (Indaṃ); PugA 194 (paññaṃ). -java [cp. BSk. purojava attendant Divy 211, Divy 214, Divy 379; also Vedic puroyāva preceding] preceding, preceded by, controlled by (= pubbangama SN i.33 (sammādiṭṭhi˚); Snp 1107 (dhamma-takka˚, cp Nd ii.318). -jāta happening before, as logical category (˚paccaya) “antecedence”; Vism 537 (elevenfold) Tikp. 17; freq. in Dukp. & Tikp. (as ārammaṇa˚ vatthu˚), cp. Vb-a 403 (˚ārammaṇa & ˚vatthuka); -dvāra front door Ja ii.153. -bhatta the early meal morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. purobhaktakā Divy 307] Vv-a 120; Pv-a 109; ˚ṃ in the morning Vv-a 51; Pv-a 78; ˚kicca duties after the morning meal DN-a i.45 sq.; Snp-a 131 sq. -bhava “being in front,” i.e. superior DN-a i.75 (in exegesis of porī). -samaṇa one who wanders ahead of someone else Vin ii.32 (opp pacchā˚).
is the genuine representative (with Māgadhī e) of Vedic puraḥ, which also appears as *puro in purohita, as *pura in purakkharoti. It belongs to base Idg. *per (cp. pari), as in Cr. πάρος before, earlier πρέσβυς “preceding in life,” i.e. older; Ohg. first
= purakkhata Snp 849, Snp 859, (a˚); Nd i.73, Nd i.214.
to honour etc. Snp 794 = Snp 803; ppr. purekkharāna Snp 844 Snp 910.
for purakkharoti, pure = Sk. puraḥ
deference, devotion, honour; usually -˚ (adj.) devoted to honouring DN i.115; Vin iii.130; Vin iv.2, Vin iv.277; Nd i.73, Nd i.214; Dhp 73 (= parivāra Dhp-a ii.77); Vv 3414 (attha˚ hitesin Vv-a 152); Vb-a 466 (˚mada); Vv-a 72.
for purakkhāra, puraḥ + kṛ; see pure
(f.) deference to (-˚) Dhp-a iv.181 (attha˚).
abstr. fr. purekkhāra
1. placed in front, i.e. foremost or at the top, in phrase devā Inda-purohitā the gods with Inda at their head Ja vi.127 (= Indaṃ pure-cārikaṃ katvā C.).
2. the king’s headpriest (brahmanic), or domestic chaplain, acting at the same time as a sort of Prime Minister DN i.138; Ja i.210 Ja v.127 (his wife as brāhmaṇī); Pp 56 (brāhmaṇa p.) Mil 241, Mil 343 (dhamma-nagare p.); Pv-a 74.
purah + pp. of dhā, ch. Vedic purohita
shrivelled grain Mil 232 (sukka-yava˚ of dried barley); Dhp-a ii.154 (SS; T. reads mūlakaṃ which is expld by Bdhgh as “nitthusaṃ katvā ussedetvā gahita-yava-taṇḍula vuccanti” ibid). Here belongs pulasa-patta of Ja iii.478. (vv.ll. pulā˚, mūlā˚ mulā˚; expld by C. as “saṇhāṇi pulasa-gaccha-paṇṇāni, thus taking pulasa as a kind of shrub, prob. because the word was not properly understood).
cp. Sk. pulāka, Halāyudha 5, 43; not Sk. pulaka, as Kern, Toev. s. v. for which see also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. pilus
a worm, maggot MN iii.168; Snp 672; Ja iii.177; Ja vi.73; Mil 331, Mil 357 Vism 179 (= kimi) Dhp-a iii.106, Dhp-a iii.411. See next.
etym.? dial; cp. Class. Sk. pulaka erection of the hairs of the body, also given by lexicographers (Hemachandra 1202) in meaning “vermin”
(BB puḷuvaka) = puḷava Dhp-a iv.46; Vv-a 76; Pv-a 14. One of the (asubha) kammaṭṭhānas is called p. “the contemplation (˚saññā idea) of the worminfested corpse” SN v.131; Dhs 264; Vism 110, Vism 179 (puḷu˚), 194 (id.; as asubha-lakkhaṇa); Dhp-a iv.47 See also asubha.
see pulaka.
(& Puḷina) (nt.) 1. a sandy bank or mound in the middle of a river Ja ii.366 (vālika˚); iii.389 (id.); v.414; Mil 297 (ḷ); Dāvs iv.29; Vism 263 (nadī˚); Vv-a 40 (paṇḍara˚).
2. a grain of sand Mil 180 (l).
cp. Epic Sk. pulina, also Halāyudha 3, 48
man, only in cpd. pulliṅga (= purisa-linga) membrum virile, penis Ja v.143 (where expld by C. as uṇha-chārikā pl. “hot embers”; the pass. is evidently misunderstood; v.l. BB phull˚).
a contracted form of purisa (q.v.)
at Nd i.90 in cpds. ˚tila, ˚tela, dantakaṭṭha, mattikā, etc. is probably to be read with v.l. phussa˚ meaning not quite clear (“natural, raw”?).
at AN i.188 is to be read as phussaka (see phussa3) cuckoo.
at Ja vi.39 read phussa˚; (q.v.).
(nt.) heap, quantity; either as n. with gen or as adj. = many, a lot Snp 1073 (pūgaṃ vassānaṃ bahūni vassāni Nd ii.452); Pv iv.79 (pūgāni vassāni) Vb-a 2 (khandhaṭṭha, piṇḍ˚, pūg˚).
etym.? cp. Vedic pūga in meaning of both pūga1 & pūga;2
(m.) corporation, guild Vin ii.109, Vin ii.212; Vin iv.30, Vin iv.78, Vin iv.226, Vin iv.252; MN iii.48; AN iii.300; Ud 71 Pp 29 (= seṇi PugA 210).
-āyatana guild’s property Ja vi.108 (= pūga-santaka dhana C.). -gāmaṇika superintendant of a guild guildmaster AN iii.76. -majjhagata gone into a guild AN i.128 = Pp 29; Snp-a 377.
see preceding
the betel-palm, betel nut tree Ja v.37 (˚rukkha-ppamāṇaṃ ucchu-vanaṃ).
Class. Sk. pūga
(adj.) to be honoured, honourable AN iii.78 (v.l.; T. pūjja); Ja iii.83 (apūja apūjanīya C.); pūjaṃ karoti to do homage Vism 312. See also pūjiya.
Epic Sk. pūjya, cp. pujja
(f.) veneration, worship AN ii.203 sq.; Dhp 106, Dhp 107; Pp 19; Dhs 1121; Mil 162. Pujaneyya & Pujaniya;
fr. pūjeti
to be honoured, entitled to homage SN i.175; Snp-a 277; -īya Ja iii.83 Sdhp 230, Sdhp 551.
grd. of pūjeti
(f.) honour, worship, devotional attention AN i.93 (āmisa˚, dhamma˚); v.347 sq.; Snp 906; Dhp 73, Dhp 104; Pv i.55; i.512; Dpvs vii.12 (cetiya˚); Snp-a 350; Pv-a 8; Sdhp 213, Sdhp 230, Sdhp 542, Sdhp 551.
-āraha worthy of veneration, deserving attention Dhp 194; Dhp-a iii.251. -karaṇa doing service, paying homage Pv-a 30. -kāra = karaṇa Dhp-a ii.44.
fr. pūj, see pūjeti
honoured, revered, done a service SN i.175, SN i.178; SN ii.119; Thag 186; Snp 316; Ud 73 (sakkata mānita p. apacita); Pv i.42 (= paṭimānita C.); ii.810.
pp. of pūjeti
worthy to be honoured Snp 527; Ja v.405; Sdhp 542.
= pūja, Sk. pūjya
one who shows attention or care AN v.347 sq., 350 sq.
n. ag. fr. pūjeti
to honour, respect, worship, revere Snp 316 (Pot. pūjayeyya), 485 (imper. pūjetha); Dhp 106 Dhp 195; DN-a i.256; Pv-a 54 (aor. sakkariṃsu garukkariṃsu mānesuṃ pūjesuṃ); Sdhp 538 ■ pp. pūjita (q.v.).
pūj, occurring in Rigveda only in śācipūjana RV viii.16, 12
(adj.) putrid, stinking, rotten, fetid DN ii.353 (khaṇḍāni pūtīni); MN i.73, MN i.89 = MN iii.92 (aṭṭhikāni pūtīni); Vin iii.236 (anto˚); SN iii.54; Pv i.32; i.61 (= kuṇapagandha Pv-a 32); Vism 261 (= pūtika at Kp-a 61), 645 (˚pajā itthi, in simile); Pv-a 67; Sdhp 258 ■ See also puccaṇḍatā.
-kāya foul body, mass of corruption, Ep. of the human body MN ii.65; SN i.131; SN iii.120; Thig 466 Thag-a 283; Snp-a 40; Dhp-a iii.111. -kummāsa rotten junket Vism 343. -gandha bad smell, ill-smelling Pv i.31 (= kuṇapa˚ Pv-a 15); Ja v.72. -dadhi rancid curds Vism 362; Vb-a 68; cp. pūti-takka Vism 108 -deha = ˚kāya SN i.236. -maccha stinking fish MN iii.168 (+ ˚kuṇapa & ˚kummāsa); in simile at Iti 68 = Ja iv.435 = Ja vi.236 = Kp-a 127. -mukha having a putrid mouth Snp-a 458 (āsīvisa); Pv-a 12, Pv-a 14. -mutta strong-smelling urine, usually urine of cattle used as medicine by the bhikkhu Vin i.58 = Vin i.96 (˚bhesajja); MN i.316; Iti 103; Vv-a 5 (˚harītaka). -mūla having fetid roots MN i.80 -latā “stinking creeper,” a sort of creeper or shrub (Coccolus cordifolius, otherwise gaḷoci) Snp 29 = Mil 369; Vism 36, Vism 183; Kp-a 47 (˚saṇṭhāna); Dhp-a iii.110 Dhp-a iii.111 (taruṇā galoci-latā pūtilatā ti vuccati). -lohitaka with putrid blood Pv i.78 (= kuṇapa˚ Pv-a 37). -sandeha = ˚kāya Dhp 148.
cp. Sk. pūti, pūyati to fester; Gr. πύχω, πϋον = pus; Lat. pūtidus putrid; Goth. fūls = Ger. faul, E foul
(adj.) = pūti MN i.449; SN v.51; AN i.261; Ja i.164; Ja ii.275; Mil 252; Dhp-a i.321; Dhp-a iii.111; Vv-a 76 ■ apūtika not rotten, fresh MN i.449; AN i.261; Ja v.198; Mil 252.
a special kind of cake, baked or boiled in a bag Ja v.46 (˚pasibbaka cake-bag); Dhp-a i.319 (jāla˚ net-cake v.l. pūva). See also pūva.
cp. Epic Sk. pūpa; “a rich cake of wheaten flour” Hȧlāyudha, 2, 164; and BSk. pūpalikā Av.Ś ii.116
(adj.) full; full of (with gen.) DN i.244 (nadī); MN i.215; MN iii.90, MN iii.96; AN iv.230; Snp 195, Snp 721; Ud 90 (nadī); Ja i.146; Pv iv.313 (= pānīyena puṇṇa Pv-a 251); Pp 45, Pp 46; Pv-a 29 ■ dup˚; difficult to fill Ja v.425 ■ pūraṃ (-˚) nt. as adv. in kucchi-pūraṃ to his belly’s fill Ja iii.268; Vism 108 (udara-pūra-mattaṃ).
cp. Class. Sk. pūra; fr. pṛ; see pūreti
(adj.) filling (-˚) Vism 106 (mukha˚).
= pāra + ka
(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) filling Snp 312 (? better read purāṇa with Snp-a 324); Pv-a 70 (eka-thālaka˚) 77 (id.). As Np. in Pūraṇa Kassapa, which however seems to be distorted from Purāṇa K. (DN i.47; Snp p.92, cp. Kp-a 126, Kp-a 175; Snp-a 200, Snp-a 237, Snp-a 372). The expln (popular etym.) of the name at DN-a i.142 refers it to pūreti (“kulassa ekūnaṃ dāsa-sataṃ pūrayamāno jāto” i.e. making the hundred of servants full). 2. (nt.) an expletive particle (pada˚ “verse-filler”), so in C. style of “a” Snp-a 590; “kho” ib. 139; “kho pana” ib. 137; “taṃ” Kp-a 219; “tato” Snp-a 378 “pi” ib. 536; “su” ib. 230; “ha” ib. 416; “hi” ib 377. See pada˚.
fr. pūreti
(nt.) getting or being full, fulness Vin ii.239 (opp. unattaṃ).
abstr. fr. pūra
sacrificial cake (brahmanic), oblation Snp 459 (= carukañ ca pūvañ ca Snp-a 405), 467 479 (= havyasesa C.), 486.
cp. Vedic puroḍāśa
filled with (-˚), full Pv ii.120 (= paripuṇṇa Pv-a 77); Pv-a 134.
pp. of pūreti
1. to fill (with = gen. or instr.) SN i.173; Snp 30, Snp 305; Ja i.50 (pāyāsassa), 347 ii.112 (pret. pūrayittha); iv.272 (sagga-padaṃ pūrayiṃsu filled with deva world); Dhp-a ii.82 (sakaṭāni ratanehi); iv.200 (pattaṃ); Pv-a 100 (bhaṇḍassa), 145 (suvaṇṇassa).
2. to fulfil Dhp-a i.68.
3. (Caus.) to make fill Vism i.37 (lakāraṃ) ■ pp. puṇṇa. See also pari˚. Caus. II. pūrāpeti to cause to fill SN ii.259; Ja i.99.
Caus. of pṛ; pṛṇāti to fill, intrs. pūryate, cp. Lat. pleo; Gr. πίμ πλημι, πλήχω, πολύς much, Goth. filu Ger. viel; Ohg. folc = folk
a cake, baked in a pan (kapalla) AN iii.76; Ja i.345 (kapalla˚ pan-cake), 347 iii.10 (pakka˚); Vv 136; 296 (= kapalla-pūva Vv-a 123); Pv iv.313 (= khajjaka Pv-a 251); Vism 108 (jāla net-cake, cp. jāla-pūpa), 359 (pūvaṃ vyāpetvā, in comp.); Vb-a 65, Vb-a 255 (simile of woman going to bake a cake); Kp-a 56; DN-a i.142; Vv-a 67, Vv-a 73 (˚surā, one of the 5 kinds of intoxication liquors, see surā); Pv-a 244 See also Vin. Texts i.39 (sweetmeats, sent as presents).
cp. Sk. pūpa; with v for p
a cake-seller, confectioner Mil 331.
fr. pūva
is abbreviation of peyyāla (q.v.); cp. la.
(adj.) (-˚) looking out for, i.e. intent upon, wishing usually in puñña˚; desirous of merit SN i.167; Dhp 108 (= puññaṃ icchanto Dhp-a ii.234); Vv 3421 (= puññaphalaṃ ākankhanto Vv-a 154); Pv-a 134.
cp. Sk. prekṣā f. & prekṣaka adj.; fr. pa + īks
(adj.) to be looked for, to be expected, desirable Ja vi.213.
grd. of pekkhati, Sk. prekṣya
(adj.) (-˚) seeing, looking at; wishing to see Thag-a 73 (Ap. v.59), f. ˚ikā SN i.185 (vihāra˚).
fr. pekkha1
(nt.) seeing, sight, look DN-a i.185, DN-a i.193; Kp-a 148 (= dassana).
fr. pa + īkṣ
to behold, regard, observe, look at DN ii.20; SN iv.291; Ja vi.420 ■ ppr. pekkhamāna Vin i.180; Snp 36 sq. (= dakkhamāna Nd ii.453), 1070, 1104; Pv ii.37; Vism 19 (disā-vidisaṃ). gen. pl. pekkhataṃ Snp 580 (cp. Snp-a 460) ■ Caus. pekkheti to cause one to behold, to make one see or consider Vin ii.73; AN v.71 ■ Cp. anu˚.
pa + īkṣ
desirous of (loc.) Ja v.403. Pek(k)ha
fr. pekkhā
(f.) 1. consideration, view Vb 325, Vb 328.
2. desire Ja v.403 (p. vuccati taṇhā).
3. (or (pekkhaṃ?) show at a fair DN i.6 (= naṭa-samajjā DN-a i.84); see Dial. i.7, n. 4 and cp. J.R.A.S. 1903, 186.
fr. pa + īkṣ
(adj.) looking (in front), in phrase yugamattaṃ p. “looking only the distance of a plough Mil 398.
fr. pekkhati
(pekkh˚) (nt.) 1. a wing Thag 211 (su˚ with beautiful feathers), 1136; Ja i.207–2. a peacock’s tail-feathers Ja vi.218 (= morapiñja C.), 497 (citrapekkhuṇaṃ moraṃ).
not with Childers fr. *pakṣman, but with Pischel, Gr. § 89 fr. Sk. prenkhaṇa a swing Vedic prenkha, fr. pra + īṅkh, that which swings through *prenkhuṇa → prekhuṇa → pekhuṇa
“after having gone past,” i.e. after death, having departed SN i.182; SN iii.98; AN ii.174 sq.; AN iii.34, AN iii.46, AN iii.78; Snp 185, Snp 188 Snp 248, Snp 598, Snp 661; Iti 111; Dhp 15, Dhp 131 (= paraloke Dhp-a hi.51); Ja i.169; Ja v.489, Pv i.119; iii.75 (v.l. pacca) The form peccaṃ under influence of Prk. (AMg.) peccā (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. 587) at Ja vi.360.
ger. of pa + i, cp. BSk. pretya Jtm 3154
(adj.) “what belongs to the Piṭaka,” as title of a non-canonical book for the usual Peṭak’ opadesa “instruction in the Piṭaka.” dating from the beginning of our era (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. p. 18), mentioned at Vism 141; Dhs-a 165. Cp. tipeṭaka, see also piṭaka.
fr. piṭaka
(f.) a species of bird (crane?) Mil 364, Mil 402; shortened to peṇāhi at Mil 407 (in the uddāna). Cp. Mil trsl. ii.343.
dial.; etym. uncertain
is v.l. for paṇṇakata Npl. at Vv 455 sq. (see Vv-a 197).
dead, departed, the departed spirit. The Buddhistic peta represents the Vedic pitaraḥ (manes, cp. pitṛyajña), as well as the Brāhmaṇic preta. The first are souls of the “fathers,” the second ghosts, leading usually a miserable existence as the result (kammaphala) or punishment of some former misdeed (usually avarice) They may be raised in this existence by means of the dakkhiṇā (sacrificial gift) to a higher category of mahiddhikā petā (alias yakkhas), or after their period of expiation shift into another form of existence (manussa, deva, tiracchāna). The punishment in the Nirayas is included in the peta existence. Modes of suffering are given SN ii.255; cp K.S. ii, 170 p. On the whole subject see Stede, Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914; in the Peta Vatthu the unhappy ghosts are represented, whereas the Vimāna Vatthu deals with the happy ones.
1. (souls of the departed, manes) DN iii.189 (petānaṃ kālakatānaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ anupadassati); AN iii.43 (id.); i.155 sq.v.132 (p. ñātisalohita); MN i.33; SN i.61 = SN i.204; Snp 585 Snp 590, Snp 807 (petā-kālakatā = matā Nd i.126); Ja v.7 (= mata C.); Pv i.57; i.121; ii.610. As pubba-peta (“deceased-before”) at AN ii.68; AN iii.45; AN iv.244; Ja ii.360.
2. (unhappy ghosts) SN ii.255 sq.; Vin iv.269 (contrasted with purisa, yakkha & tiracchāna-gata) AN v.269 (dānaṃ petānaṃ upakappati); Ja iv.495 sq (yakkhā pisācā petā, cp. preta-piśācayoḥ MBhār. 13 732); Vb 412 sq.; Sdhp 96 sq ■ manussapeta a ghost in human form Ja iii.72; Ja v.68; Vv-a 23. The later tradition on Petas in their var. classes and states is reflected in Mil 294 (4 classes: vantāsikā, khuppipāsā nijjhāma-taṇhikā, paradatt’ ûpajīvino) & 357 (appearance and fate); Vism 501 = Vb-a 97 (as state of suffering with narakā, tiracchā, asurā); Vb-a 455 (as nijjhāmataṇhikā, khuppipāsikā, paradatt’ upajīvino). 3. (happy ghosts) mahiddhikā petī Pv i.101; yakkha mahiddhika Pv iv.154; Vimānapeta mahiddhika Pv-a 145; peta mahiddhika Pv-a 217. [Cp. BSk. pretamahardhika Divy 14] ■ f. petī Vin iv.20; Ja i.240; Pv i.62; Pv-a 67 and passim. Vimānapetī Pv-a 47, Pv-a 50 Pv-a 53 and in Vimāna-vatthu passim.
-upapattika born as a peta Pv-a 119. -katha (pubba˚ tales (or talk) about the dead (not considered orthodox DN i.8, cp. DN-a i.90; AN v.128. -kicca duty towards the deceased (i.e. death-rites) Ja ii.5; Dhp-a i.328. -rājā king of the Petas (i.e. Yama) Ja v.453 (˚visayaṃ na muñcati “does not leave behind the realm of the Petaking”); C. expls by petayoni and divides the realm into petavisaya and kālakañjaka-asura-visaya ■ yoni the peta realm Pv-a 9, Pv-a 35, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 103 and passim -loka the peta world Sdhp 96. -vatthu a peta or ghost-story; Name of one (perhaps the latest) of the canonical books belonging to the Suttanta-Piṭaka Kp-a 12; DN-a i.178 (Ankura˚).
pp of pa + ī, lit. gone past, gone before
(nt.) state or condition of a Peta Thag 1128.
abstr. fr. peta
one who lives on the fortune or power inherited from his father AN iii.76 = AN iii.300.
fr. pitar
fatḥer’s brother, paternal uncle AN iii.348 AN v.138 (gloss pitāmaho).
for pettāviya (Epic Sk. pitṛvya), cp. Trenckner, Notes 6216, 75
(adj.) paternal Vin iii.16; Vin iv.223; DN ii.232; SN v.146 = Mil 368 (p. gocara); (sake p. visaye ʻyour own home-groundsʼ) DN iii.58; SN v.146; Ja ii.59; Ja vi.193 (iṇa). Also in cpd. mātā-pettika maternal & paternal DN i.34, DN i.92; Ja i.146.
fr. pitar, for pētika, cp. Epic Sk. paitṛka & P. petteyya
(& Pitti˚) the world of the manes, the realm of the petas (synonymous with petavisaya & petayoni) DN iii.234; Iti 93; Ja v.186; Pv ii.22; ii.79; Mil 310; Dhp-a i.102; Dhp-a iv.226; Vism 427; Vb-a 4, Vb-a 455; Pv-a 25 sq., 29, 59 sq., 214, 268 Sdhp 9.
Sk. *paitrya-viṣaya & *pitryaviṣaya, der. fr. pitar, but influenced by peta
(adj.) father-loving, showing filial piety towards one’s father DN iii.72, DN iii.74; SN v.467; AN i.138; Ja iii.456; Ja v.35; Pv ii.718. See also matteyya.
fr. pitar; cp. Vedic pitrya
(f.) reverence towards one’s father DN iii.70 (a˚), 145, 169; Dhp 332 (= pitari sammāpaṭipatta Dhp-a iv.34); Nd ii.294. Cp. matteyyatā.
abstr. fr. petteyya
(adv.) from the father’s side Ja v.214 (= pitito).
fr. pitar, for Sk. pitrā; cp. Trenckner, Notes 564
(nt.) love, affection DN i.50; DN iii.284 sq.; MN i.101 sq.; SN iii.122; SN iv.72, SN iv.329 SN v.89, SN v.379; AN ii.213; AN iii.326 sq.; Snp 41; Dhp 321; DN-a i.75. -(a)vigata-pema with(out) love or affection DN iii.238, DN iii.252; SN iii.7 sq., 107 sq., 170; iv.387; AN ii.174 sq.; AN iv.15, AN iv.36, AN iv.461 sq.
fr. prī, see pīṇeti & piya & cp. BSk. prema Jtm 221; Vedic preman cons. stem
(m. or nt.) = pema Ja iv.371.
fr. pema
(adj.) affectionate, kind, loving amiable, agreeable DN i.4 (cp. DN-a i.75); ii.20 (˚ssara) AN ii.209; Pp 57; Ja iv.470.
fr. pema as grd. formation, cp. BSk., premaṇīya Mvu iii.343
to be drunk, drinkable, only in compn or neg. apeyya undrinkable AN iii.188; Ja iv.205 Ja iv.213 (apo apeyyo). maṇḍa˚; to be drunk like cream, i.e. of the best quality SN ii.29. manāpika˚; sweet to drink Mil 313. duppeyya difficult to drink Sdhp 158. See also kākapeyya.
grd. of pibati
= piya, only in cpds. vajja˚; kindness of language, kind speech, one of the 4 sangaha-vatthus (grounds of popularity) AN ii.32, AN ii.248; AN iv.219, AN iv.364; DN iii.190, DN iii.192, DN iii.232; Ja v.330. Cp. BSk. priya-vādya Mvu i.3; and ˚vācā kind language DN iii.152; Vv 8436 (= piyavacana Vv-a 345) ■ It is doubtful whether vāca-peyya at Snp 303 (Ep. of sacrifice) is the same as ˚vācā (as adj.), or whether it represents vāja-peyya [Vedic vāja sacrificial food] as Bdhgh expls it at Snp-a 322 (= vājam ettha pivanti; v.l. vāja˚), thus peyya peyya1.
*priya-vadya
(nt.?) repetition, succession, formula way of saying, phrase (= pariyāya 5) Vism 46 (˚mukha beginning of discourse), 351 (id. and bahu˚-tanti having many discourses or repetitions), 411 (˚pāḷi a row of successions or etceteras); Vv-a 117 (pāḷi˚ vasena “because of the successive Pāli text”) ■ Very freq. in abridged form, where we would say “etc.,” to indicate that a passage has be to repeated (either from preceding context, or to be supplied from memory, if well known) The literal meaning would be “here (follows) the formula (pariyāya).” We often find pa for pe, e.g. AN v.242, AN v.270, AN v.338, AN v.339, AN v.355; sometimes pa + pe combd e.g. SN v.466 ■ As pe is the first syllable of peyyāla so la is the last and is used in the same sense; the variance is according to predilection of certain MSS.; la is found e.g. SN v.448, SN v.267 sq.; or as v.l. of pe: AN v.242, AN v.243 AN v.354; or la + pe combd: SN v.464, SN v.466 ■ On syllable pe Trenckner, Notes 66, says: “The sign of abridgment pe, or as it is written in Burmese copies, pa, means peyyāla which is not an imperative ʻinsert, fill up the gap,ʼ but a substantive, peyyālo or peyyālaṃ, signifying a phrase to be repeated over & over again. I consider it a popular corruption of the synonymous pariyāya, passing through *payyāya, with-eyy-for-ayy-, like seyyā, Sk. śayyā.” See also Vin. Texts i.291; Oldenberg, K.Z. 35, 324.
a Māgadhism for pariyāya, so Kern, Toev. s. v. after Trenckner, cp. BSk. piyāla and peyāla Mvu iii.202, Mvu iii.219
is Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading for what he considered a faulty spelling in bhaya-merita (p for m Ja iv.424 = Ja v.359. This however is bhaya-m-erita with the hiatus-m, and to supplant perita (= Sk. prerita) is unjustified.
a hare Ja vi.538 (= sasa C.).
etym.?
a lump, only in yaka˚; the liver (-lump) Snp 195 (= yakana-piṇḍa Snp-a 247) = Ja i.146.
a Prk. form for piṇḍa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 122 peḍhāla
1. a (large) basket Ja iv.458; Ja vi.185; Cp ii.25 Mil 23, Mil 282; Vism 304; Kp-a 46 (peḷāghata, wrong reading, see p. 68 App.); Thag-a 29.
2. a chest (for holding jewelry etc.) Pv iv.142; Mvu 36, Mvu 20; Dhs-a 242 (peḷ-opamā, of the 4 treasure-boxes) ■ Cp. piṭaka.
cp. Class. & B. Sk. peṭa, f. peṭī & peṭā, peḍā Divy 251, Divy 365; and the BSk. var. phelā Divy 503; Mvu ii.465
(f.) a basket Dhp-a i.227 (pasādhana˚, v.l. pelakā).
cp. peḷā
is spurious spelling for pessa (q.v.).
employer, controller, one who attends or looks after Vin ii.177 (ārāmika˚ etc.); AN iii.275 (id.).
fr. pa + iṣ, cp. Vedic preṣa order, command
weaver DN i.52; Vin iii.259; Vin iv.7; Ja iv.475; Dhp-a i.424 (˚vīthi); iii.170 sq.; Vb-a 294 sq. (˚dhītā the weaver’s daughter; story of-) Pv-a 42 sq., 67.
pesa + kāra, epsa = Vedic peśaḥ, fr. piś: see piṃsati1
(nt.) sending out, message; service Ja iv.362 (pesanāni gacchanti); v.17 (pesane pesiyanto.)
-kāraka a servant Ja vi.448; Vv-a 349. -kārikā (a girl) doing service, a messenger, servant Ja iii.414; Dhp-a i.227.
fr. pa + iṣ, see peseti
(adj.) “message sender,” employing for service, in ˚corā robbers making (others) servants Ja i.253. Pesanika (iya)
fr. pesana
(adj.) connected with messages, going messages, only in phrase jaṅgha˚; messenger on foot Vin iii.185; Ja ii.82; Mil 370 (˚iya).
fr. pesana
(adj.) lovable, pleasant, well-behaved amiable SN i.149; SN ii.387; AN iv.22; AN v.170; Snp 678; Snp p.124; Mil 373; Sdhp 621. Often as Ep. of a good bhikkhu, e.g. at SN i.187; Vin i.170; Vin ii.241; Ja iv.70; Vv-a 206; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 268.
cp. Epic Sk. peśala; Bdhgh’s pop. etym. at Snp-a 475 is “piya-sīla”
is reading at DN i.54 for pisāca (so v.l.). Pesi (pesi)
(f.) 1. a lump, usually a mass of flesh Ja iii.223 = Dhp-a iv.67 (pesi = maṃsapesi C.). Thus maṃsapesi, muscle Vin ii.25 ≈ (maṃsapes ûpamā kāmā); iii.105; MN i.143, MN i.364; SN ii.256; SN iv.193 (in characteristic of lohitaka); Vism 356; Pv-a 199. 2. the foetus in the third stage after conception (between abbuda & ghana; ) SN i.206; Ja iv.496; Nd i.120; Mil 40 Vism 236.
3. a piece, bit (for pesikā), in veḷu˚ Ja iv.205.
cp. Epic Sk. peśī
(f.) (-˚) rind, shell (of fruit) only in cpds. amba˚; Vin ii.109; vaṃsa˚; Ja i.352; veḷu˚; (a bit of bamboo) DN ii.324; Ja ii.267, Ja ii.279; Ja iii.276; Ja iv.382.
cp. Sk. *peśikā
1. sent out or forth Snp 412 (rājadūta p.) Vv 217 (= uyyojita Vv-a 108); Dhp-a iii.191 pesit-atta is the C. expln at SN i.53 (as given at K.S. 320) of pahit-atta (trsln “puts forth all his strength”) Bdhgh incorrectly taking pahita as pp. of pahiṇati to send whereas it is pp. of padahati.
2. ordered, what has been ordered, in pesit-āpesitaṃ order and prohibition Vin ii.177.
pp. of peseti
(nt.) = pesuñña SN i.240; Snp 362, Snp 389, Snp 862 sq., 941; Ja v.397; Pv i.33 Pv-a 16; Sdhp 55, Sdhp 66, Sdhp 81.
-kāraka one who incites to slander Ja i.200, Ja i.267.
fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśuna
(adj.) slanderous, calumnious Pv-a 12, Pv-a 13. Pesuniya & Pesuneyya;
fr. pesuṇa
(nt.) = pesuñña; 1. (pesuṇiya) Snp 663, Snp 928; Pv i.32.
2. (pesuṇeyya) SN i.228, SN i.230; Snp 852; Nd i.232.
(nt.) [abstr. fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśunya. The other (diaeretic) forms are pesuṇiya & pesuṇeyya backbiting, calumny, slander MN i.110; DN iii.69; AN iv.401; Vin iv.12; Nd i.232, Nd i.260; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 15.
to send forth or out, esp. on a message or to a special purpose, i.e. to employ as a servant or (intrs.) to do service (so in many derivations 1. to send out Ja i.86, Ja i.178, Ja i.253; Ja iv.169 (paṇṇaṃ) v.399; vi.448; Mvu 14, Mvu 29 (rathaṃ); Dhp-a iii.190; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 53.
2. to employ or order (cp. pesaka) in Pass. pesiyati to be ordered or to be in service Vin ii.177 (ppr. pesiyamāna); Ja v.17 (ppr. pesiyanto)-pp. pesita. See also pessa & derivations.;
pa + iṣ to send
a messenger, a servant often in combn dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā, e.g. DN i.141; SN i.76, SN i.93 (slightly diff. in verse); AN ii.208 (spelt pesā); iv.45; Dhp-a ii.7. See also AN iii.37; AN iv.266, AN iv.270; Ja v.351; Pp 56; DN-a i.300 At Snp 615 pessa is used in the sense of an abstr. n. pessitā service (= veyyavacca Snp-a 466). So also in cpds.
-kamma service Ja vi.374; -kāra a servant Ja vi.356.
grd. formn fr. peseti, Vedic preṣya, f. preṣyā. This is the contracted form, whilst the diaeretic form is pesiya, for which also pesika
(f.) being a servant, doing service Ja vi.208 (para˚ to someone else). Pessiya & ka;
abstr. fr. pessa, Sk. *preṣyatā
servant; m. either pessiya Vv 8446 (spelt pesiya, expld by pesana-kāraka, veyyāvaccakara Vv-a 349); Ja vi.448 (= pesana-kāraka C.), or pessika Snp 615, Snp 651; Ja vi.552; f. either pessiyā (para˚ Vv 185 (spelt pesiyā, but v.l. SS pessiyā, expld as pesaniyā paresaṃ veyyāvacca-kārī Vv-a 94); Ja iii.413 (= parehi pesitabbā pesana-kārikā C. 414), or pessikā Ja vi.65.
see pessa
is imper. 2nd sg. of pa + i, “go on,” said to a horse AN iv.190 sq., cp. SN i.123.
(nt.) 1. a lotus plant, primarily the leaf of it, figuring in poetry and metaphor as not being able to be wetted by water Snp 392, Snp 812 (vuccati paduma-pattaṃ Nd i.135); Dhp 336; Iti 84.
2. the skin of a drum (from its resemblance to the lotus-leaf SN ii.267; Mil 261 (bheri˚). As Np. of an angel (Gandhabba) “Drum” at Vv 189.
3. a species of waterbird (crane): see cpd. ˚sataka.
-ṭṭha standing in water (?) Vin i.215 (vanaṭṭha + ) 238 (id.). -patta a lotus leaf Snp 625; Dhp 401 (= paduma-patta Dhp-a iv.166); Mil 250. -madhu the honey sap of Costus speciosus (a lotus) Ja v.39, Ja v.466. -vassa “lotus-leaf rain,” a portentous shower of rain, serving as special kind of test shower in which certain objects are wetted, but those showing a disinclination towards moisture are left untouched, like a lotus-leaf Ja i.88; Ja vi.586; Kp-a 164; Dhp-a iii.163. -sātaka a species of crane, Ardea Siberica Ja vi.539 (koṭṭha + ) Snp-a 359. Cp. Np. Pokkharasāti Snp 594; Snp p.115; Snp-a 372.
cp. Vedic puṣkara, fr. pus, though a certain relation to puṣpa seems to exist, cp. Sk. puṣpapattra a kind of arrow (lit. lotus-leaf) Halāyudha 2 314, and P. pokkhara-patta
(f.) a lotuspond an artificial pool or small lake for water-plants (see note in Dial. ii.210) Vin i.140, Vin i.268; Vin ii.123; DN ii.178 sq.; SN i.123, SN i.204; SN ii.106; SN v.460; AN i.35, AN i.145; AN iii.187 AN iii.238; Ja ii.126; Ja v.374 (Khemī), 388 (Doṇa); Pv iii.33iv.121; Snp-a 354 (here in meaning of a dry pit or dugout); Vv-a 160; Pv-a 23, Pv-a 77, Pv-a 152. pokkharaññā gen Pv ii.129; instr. SN i.233; loc. Vin ii.123. pokkharaṇiyāyaṃ loc. AN iii.309 ■ pl. pokkharaṇiyo Vin i.268; Vv-a 191; Pv-a 77; metric pokkharañño Vv 4411 Pv ii.119: ii.78.
fr. puṣkara lotus; Vedic puṣkariṇī, BSk. has puskiriṇī, e.g. Avs i.76; Avs ii.201 sq.
(f.) splendidness “flower-likeness,” only in cpd. vaṇṇa-pokkharatā beauty of complexion DN i.114; Vin i.268; SN i.95 SN ii.279; AN i.38, AN i.86; AN ii.203; AN iii.90; DN-a i.282; Kp-a 179; Vv-a 14; Pv-a 46. The BSk. passage at Avs ii.202 reads “śobhāṃ varṇaṃ puṣkalatāṃ ca.”
is it fr. pokkhara lotus (cp. Sk. pauṣkara), thus “lotus-ness,” or founded on Vedic puṣpa blossom The BSk. puṣkalatā (Avs ii.201) is certainly a misconstruction if it is constructed fr. the Pali
arrow, only in redupl. (iterative) cpd. poṅkh’ ānupoṅkhaṃ (adv. arrow after arrow, shot after shot, i.e. constantly continuously SN v.453, SN v.454; Nd ii.631 (in def. of sadā) DN-a i.188; Vv-ah 351. The expln is problematic.
increment form of punkha
a bubble Ja iv.457 (v.l. poṭha). See also phoṭa. Potaki (i?)
fr. sphuṭ;
(m. f.?) a kind of grass, in ˚tūla a kind of cotton, “grass-tuft, thistle-down (?) Vin ii.150; Vin iv.170 (id., 3 kinds of cotton spelt potaki here).
etym. uncertain, prob. Non-Aryan
a kind of grass, Saccharum spontaneum Thag 27 = Thag 233; Ja vi.508 (= p.˚-tiṇaṃ nāma C.).
etym. unknown, cp. poṭaki & (lexic.) Sk. poṭagala a kind of reed; the variant is poṭagala
is spurious reading for phoṭṭhabba (q.v.).
is; aṅguli˚; snapping of one’s fingers (as sign of applause) Ja v.67. Cp poṭhana & phoṭeti.;
fr. puth, cp. poṭhana & poṭheti
(& Pothana) (nt.) 1. striking, beating Ja ii.169 (tajjana˚); v.72 (udaka˚); vi.41 (kappāsa˚dhanuka). At all Ja passages th.
2. (th) snapping one’s fingers Ja i.394 (anguli˚, + celukkhepa); Thag-a 76 (anguli˚, for accharā-sanghāta Thig 67). Cp nippothana.
fr. poṭheti
(& Pothita) beaten, struck Mil 240 (of cloth, see Kern, Toev. s. poṭheti); Ja iii.423 (mañca; v.l. BB pappoṭ˚) Kp-a 173 (˚tulapicu cotton beaten seven times, i.e. very soft; v.l. pothita, see App. p. 877); Dhp-a i.48 (su˚); Pv-a 174 ■ Cp. paripothita.
pp. of poṭheti
(& Potheti) 1. to beat, strike Snp 682 (bhujāni = appoṭheti Snp-a 485); Ja i.188, Ja i.483 (th) ii.394; vi.548 (= ākoṭeti); Dhp-a i.48; Dhp-a ii.27 (th) 67 (th); Vv-a 68 (th); Pv-a 65 (th).
2. to snap one’s fingers as a token of annoyance DN ii.96; or of pleasure Ja iii.285 (anguliyo poṭhesi) ■ pp. poṭhita ■ Caus. II poṭhāpeti (poth˚) to cause to be beaten or flogged Mil 221; Dhp-a i.399 ■ Cp. pappoṭheti.
fr. puth = sphuṭ;
(nt.) only in cpd. danta˚; a tooth pick Vin iv.90; Ja iv.69; Mil 15; Snp-a 272. As dantapoṇaka at Dāvs i.57 ■ kūṭa-poṇa at Vism 268 read ˚goṇa.
= poṇa2?
(adj.) 1. sloping down, prone, in; anupubba˚; gradually sloping (of the ocean) Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198 sq. = Ud 53–2. (-˚) sloping towards, going to, converging or leading to Nibbāna; besides in var. phrases, in general as tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra, “leading to that end.” As nibbāna˚; e.g. at MN i.493; SN v.38 sq.; AN iii.443; cp. Vv 8442 (nekkhamma˚-nibbāna-ninna Vv-a 348); taṃ˚; Pts ii.197; ṭhāne Pv-a 190; viveka˚ AN iv.224, AN iv.233; AN v.175; samādhi˚; Mil 38; kiṃ˚ MN i.302.
fr. pa + ava + nam, cp. ninna & Vedic pravaṇa
(adj.) that which is prone, going prone; DN-a i.23 where the passage is “tiracchāna-gata-pāṇāpoṇika-nikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti,” quoted from SN iii.152, where it runs thus: “tiracchāna-gata pāṇā te pi bhikkhave tiracchānagatā pāṇā citten’ eva cittatā. The passage is referred to with poṇika at Kp-a 12 where we read “tiracchāna-gatā pāṇā poṇika-nikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti.” Thus we may take poṇikanikāya as “the kingdom of those which go prone (i.e. the animals).
fr. poṇa2
the young of an animal Ja ii.406 (˚sūkara); Cp i.102 (udda˚) Snp-a 125 (sīha˚).
cp. Epic Sk. pota, see putta for etym.
a boat Dāvs v.58; Vv-a 42.
Epic Sk. pota; dial. form for plota (?), of plu
a millstone, grindstone, only as nisada˚; Vin i.201; Vism 252.
etym.?
(-˚) 1. the young of an animal MN i.104 (kukkuṭa˚); Ja i.202 (supaṇṇa˚), 218 (hatthi˚); ii.288 (assa˚ colt); iii.174 (sakuṇa˚); Pv-a 152 (gaja˚) ■ f potikā Ja i.207 (haṃsa˚); iv.188 (mūsika˚).
2. a small branch, offshoot, twig; in twig; in amba˚; young mango sprout Dhp-a iii.206 sq.; araṇi˚; small firewood Mil 53.
fr. pota1
poor, indigent, miserable Ja ii.432 (= potthakapilotikāya nivatthatā pottho C.; v.l. poṭha). See also *ponti, with which ultimately identical.
?
modelling, only in cpd. ˚kamma plastering (i.e. using a mixture of earth, lime, cowdung & water as mortar Ja vi.459; carving Dhs-a 334; and ˚kara a modeller in clay Ja i.71. Cp. potthaka1.
later Sk. pusta, etym. uncertain; loan-word?
1. a book Ja i.2 (aya˚ ledger); iii.235, 292; iv.299, 487; Vv-a 117.
2 anything made or modelled in clay (or wood etc.), in rūpa˚ a modelled figure Ja vi.342; Thag-a 257; DN-a i.198; Sdhp 363, Sdhp 383. Cp. pottha2.
cp. Class. Sk. pustaka
(nt.) cloth made of makaci fibre Vin i.306 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.247); AN i.246 sq.; Ja iv.251 (= ghana-sāṭaka C.; v.l. saṇa˚); Pp 33.
etym.?
(f.) a dagger (= potthanī) Vin ii.190 = DN-a i.135 (so read here with v.l. for T. ˚iyā).
fr. puth ?
(f.) a butcher’s knife Ja vi.86 (maṃsakoṭṭhana˚), 111 (id.).
fr. puth ?
(adj.) belonging to ordinary man, common, ordinary, in 2 combns viz. (1) phrase hīna gamma p. anariya Vin i.10; SN iv.330; AN v.216 (2) with ref. to iddhi Vin ii.183; Ja i.360; Vism 97. Cp. Vin. Texts iii.230. The BSk. forms are either pārthag-janika Lal. Vist 540, or prāthug-janika Mvu iii.331.
fr. puthujjana
at Ja ii.404 (ummukkāni p.) is doubtful. The vv.ll. are yodhetvā & sodhetvā (the latter a preferable reading).
see gāma˚.
(adj.) leading to rebirth MN i.48, MN i.299, MN i.464, MN i.532; SN iii.26; SN iv.186; DN iii.57; AN ii.11 sq., 172; iii.84, 86; v.88; Ne 72; Vism 506 Vb-a 110.
fr. punabbhava, with preservation of the second o (puno → punaḥ) see puna
(vv.ll. poṭhi, sonti) Thig 422, Thig 423 is doubtful; the expln at Thag-a 269 is “pilotikākhaṇḍa,” thus “rags (of an ascetic),” cp. J.P.T.S. 1884. See also pottha1, with which evidently identical, though misread.
(adj.) old, ancient, former DN i.71, DN i.238; SN ii.267; Snp 313; Dhp 227 (cp. Dhp-a iii.328); Ja ii.15 (˚kāle in the past); Vb-a 1 (˚aṭṭhakathā), 523 (id.); Kp-a 247 (˚pāṭha); Snp-a 131 (id.); Dhp-a i.17; Pv-a 1 (˚aṭṭhakathā), 63 ■ Porāṇā (pl.) the ancients, ancient authorities or writers Vism passim esp. Note, 764; Kp-a 123, Kp-a 158; Snp-a 291, Snp-a 352 Snp-a 604; Vb-a 130, Vb-a 254, Vb-a 299, Vb-a 397, Vb-a 513.
= purāṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paurāṇa
(adj.) 1. ancient, former, of old (cp. purāṇa 1) Ja iii.16 (˚paṇḍitā); Pv-a 93 (id.), 99 (id.); Dhp-a i.346 (kula-santaka).
2. old, worn, much used (cp. purāṇa 2) Ja iv.471 (magga).
fr. porāṇa
(adj.) [fr. pora = Epic Sk. paura citizen, see pura. Semantically cp. urbane → urbanus → urbs; polite πολίτησ ̓πόλις. For pop. etym. see DA i.73 & 282 belonging to a citizen, i.e. citizenlike, urbane, polite usually in phrase; porī vācā polite speech DN i.4, DN i.114; SN i.189; SN ii.280 = AN ii.51; AN iii.114; Pp 57; Dhs 1344; DN-a i.75, DN-a i.282; Dhs-a 397. Cp. BSk. paurī vācā Mvu iii.322.
(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) human, fit for a man Snp 256 (porisa dhura), cp. porisiya & poroseyya.
2. (m.) = purisa esp. in sense of purisa 2, i.e. servant, used collectively (abstract form;n like Ger. dienerschaft, E. service servants) “servants” esp. in phrase dāsa-kammakaraporisa Vin i.240; AN i.145, AN i.206; AN ii.78; AN iii.45, AN iii.76, AN iii.260; Dhp-a iv.1; dāsa˚ a servant Snp 769 (three kinds mentioned at Nd i.11, viz. bhaṭakā kammakarā upajīvino); rāja king’s service, servant of the king DN i.135; AN iv.286 AN iv.322; sata˚ a hundred servants Vism 121. For purisa in uttama˚ (= mahāpurisa) Dhp 97 (cp. Dhp-a ii.188). Cp posa.
abstr. fr. purisa, for *pauruṣa or *puruṣya)
(nt.) 1. business, doing of a man (or servant cp. purisa 2), service, occupation; human doing, activity MN i.85 (rāja˚); Vv 6311 (= purisa-kicca Vv-a 263); Pv iv.324 (uṭṭhāna˚ = purisa-viriya, purisa-kāra Pv-a 252)
2. height of a man MN i.74, MN i.187, MN i.365.
abstr. fr. purisa, *pauruṣyaṃ, cp. porisiya and poroseyya
(f.), only in neg. a˚ inhuman or superhuman state, or: not served by any men (or servants) Vv-a 275. The reading is uncertain.
abstr. fr. porisa
man-eater, cannibal Ja v.34 sq., 471 sq., 486, 488 sq., 499, 510.
fr. purisa + ad to eat
= porisāda Ja v.489. Cp. pursādaka Ja v.91.
(adj.) 1. of human nature, human Ja iv.213.
2. Of the height of man Vin ii.138.
fr. purisa, cp. porisa & poroseyya
= porisiya (cp. porisa1 1) fit for man, human MN i.366. The word is somewhat doubtful, but in all likelihood it is a derivation fr. pura (cp. porin; Sk *paura), thus to be understood as *paurasya → *porasya → *poraseyya → *poroseyya with assimilation. The meaning is clearly “very fine, urbane, fashionable” thus not derived from purisa, although C. expls by “puris’ ânucchavikaṃ yānaṃ” (M. i.561). The passage runs “yānaṃ poroseyyaṃ pavara-maṇi-kuṇḍalaṃ” with vv.ll. voropeyya & oropeyya;. Neumann accepts oropeyya as reading & translates (wrongly) “belüde” see Mittl. Slg. 21921; vol. ii. pp. 45 & 666. The reading; poroseyya seems to be established as lectio difficilior On form see also Trenckner, Notes 75.
Dhp-a i.174 (v.l. BB pur˚).
(nt.) the character or office of a family priest DN ii.243. As porohicca at Snp 618 (= purohita-kamma Snp-a 466). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 75.
fr. purohita
= purisa, man (poetical form, only found in verse) Vin i.230; SN i.13, SN i.205; Ja iii.309; AN iv.266; Snp 110, Snp 662; Dhp 104, Dhp 125 (cp Dhp-a iii.34); Ja v.306; Ja vi.246, Ja vi.361 ■ poso at Ja iii.331 is gen. sg. of puṃs = Sk. puṃsaḥ.
contraction of purisa fr. *pūrṣa → *pussa → *possa → posa. So Geiger, P.Gr. 303
(adj.) to be fed or nourished, only in dup˚; difficult to nourish SN i.61.
= *poṣya, grd. of poseti, puṣ
(adj.) nourishing, feeding AN i.62, AN i.132 = Iti 110 (āpādaka + ); f. ˚ikā a nurse, a female attendant Vin ii.289 (āpādikā + ).
fr. posa2
(f.) only-˚, in su˚ & dup˚; easy & difficult support Vin ii.2.
abstr. fr. posa2
= uposatha Ja iv.329; Ja vi.119.
cp. BSk. poṣadha Divy 116, Divy 121, and Prk. posaha (posahiya = posathika) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 141
= uposathika Ja iv.329. Cp. anuposathika & anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ.;
(nt.) nourishing, feeding, support Vv-a 137. Posapeti & Posaveti;
fr. puṣ
to have brought up, to give into the care of, to cause to be nourished Vin i.269 (pp. posāpita) ≈ DN-a i.133 (posāvita, v.l. posāp˚). Posavanika & ya;
Caus. II. fr. poseti
(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) to be brought up, being reared fed Vin i.272; Ja iii.134, Ja iii.432. -˚iya Dhp-a iii.35; Ja iii.35; Ja iii.429 (& ˚iyaka).
2. (nt.) fee for bringing somebody up, allowance, money for food, sustenance Ja ii.289; Dhp-a iv.40; Vv-a 158 (˚mūla). -˚iya Ja i.191.
fr. posāvana = posāpana of Caus. posāpeti
nourished, fed Cp iii.32; Vv-a 173 (udaka˚).
pp. of poseti
at Vin ii.151 stands for phusituṃ “to sprinkle,” cp. Vin. Texts iii.169. See phusati2.
(-˚) (adj.) thriving (on), nourished by Vin i.6; DN i.75; SN i.138; Snp 65 (anañña˚; cp. Nd ii.36) 220 (dāra˚; ); DN-a i.219.
fr. poseti
to nourish, support, look after, bring up, take care of, feed, keep Vin i.269; SN i.181; AN i.117; Ja i.134 Ja iii.467; Nd ii.36; Vism 305; Vv-a 138, Vv-a 299 ■ pp. posita -Caus. posāpeti.
Ph.
puṣ
a special period of fasting MN i.39; DN-a i.139. See also pheggu.
in forṃ = Vedic phalgu (small, feeble), but in meaning different
& Phagguṇī (f.) Name of a month (Feb. 15;th-March 15th), marking the beginning of Spring; always with ref. to the spring full moon, as phagguṇa-puṇṇamā at Vism 418; phagguṇi˚ Ja i.86.
cp. Vedic phālguna & ˚ī
the hood of a snake Vin i.91 (˚hatthaka, with hands like a snake’s hood); Ja iii.347 (patthaṭa˚); Dhp-a iii.231 (˚ṃ ukkhipitvā); iv.133 Freq. as phaṇaṃ katvā (only thus, in ger.) raising or spreading its hood, with spread hood Ja ii.274; Ja vi.6 Vism 399; Dhp-a ii.257.
cp. Epic Sk. phaṇa
an instrument shaped like a snake’s hood, used to smooth the hair Vin ii.107.
fr. phaṇa
a kind of plant, which is enumd at Vin iv.35 = DN-a i.81 as one of the aggabīja, i.e. plants propagated by slips or cuttings, together with ajjuka & hirivera. At Ja vi.536 the C. gives bhūtanaka as expln. According to Childers it is the plant Samīraṇa.
etym.?
1. to throb, palpitate DN i.52 = MN i.404, cp. DN-a i.159; Nd i.46–2. to twitch, tremble, move, stir Ja ii.234; Ja vi.113 (of fish wriggling when thrown on land) ■ Caus. II phandāpeti to make throb DN i.52 = MN i.404 ■ pp phandita (q.v.). Cp. pari˚, vi˚, sam˚. The nearest synonym is calati.
spand, cp. Gr. σφαδάςω to twitch, σφοδρός violent; Lat. pendeo “pend” i.e. hang down, cp pendulum; Ags. finta tail, lit. mover, throbber
1. (adj.) throbbing, trembling, wavering Dhp 33 (phandanaṃ capalaṃ); Ja vi.528 (˚māluvā trembling creeper) Dhp-a i.50 (issa˚ throbbing with envy).
2. (m.) Name of a tree Dalbergia (aspen?) AN i.202; Ja iv.208 sq.; Mil 173.
3. (nt.) throb, trembling, agitation, quivering Ja vi.7 (˚mattaṃ not even one throb; cp. phandita) Nd i.46 (taṇhā etc.).
fr. phandati, cp. Sk. spandana
(f.) throbbing, agitation, movement, motion Snp-a 245 (calanā + ); DN-a i.111; Ne 88 C. cp. iñjanā.
fr. phandati
(nt.) throbbing, flashing; throb MN ii.24 (˚mattā “by his throbbings only”); pl phanditāni “vapourings,” imaginings Vb 390 (where Vb-a 513 only says “phandanato phanditaṃ”) cp Brethren 344.
pp. of phandati
(nt.) = phandanā SN v.315 (= iñjitatta).
abstr. fr. phandita
(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) pervading, suffused (with), quite full (of) Mil 345.
2. (nt. pervasion, suffusion, thrill Ja i.82 (˚samattha mettacitta); Ne 89 (pīti˚ etc., as m., cp. pharaṇatā); Dhs-a
166 (˚pīti all-pervading rapture, permeating zest; cp pīti pharaṇatā) ■ Cp. anu˚.
fr. pharati
(adj.) thrilling, suffusing, pervading, filling with rapture Vv-a 16 (dvādasa yojanāni ˚pabho sarīra-vaṇṇo).
fr. pharaṇa
(f.) suffusion, state of being pervaded (with), only-˚ in set of 4-fold suffusion, viz pīti˚; of rapture, sukha˚; of restful bliss, ceto˚; of [telepathic] consciousnss, āloka˚; of light, DN iii.277; Pts i.48 Vb 334; Ne 89.
abstr. fr. pharaṇa
1. (trs.) to pervade permeate, fill, suffuse Pv i.1014 (= vyāpetvā tiṭṭhati Pv-a 52); Ja iii.371 (sakala-sarīraṃ); v.64 (C. for pavāti) Pv-a 14 (okāsaṃ), 276 (obhāsaṃ). To excite or stimulate the nerves Ja v.293 (rasa-haraṇiyo khobhetvā phari: see under rasa ) ■ Often in standard phrase mettā-sahagatena cetasā ekaṃ (dutiyaṃ etc.) disaṃ pharitvā viharati DN ii.186; SN v.115 and passim where pharitvā at Vism 308 = Vb-a 377 is expld by phusitvā ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Cp. BSk. ekaṃ disāṃ spharitvopasampadya viharati Mvu iii.213. Also in phrase pītiyā sarīraṃ pharati (aor. phari ) to thrill the body with rapture, e.g. Ja i.33; Ja v.494; Dhp-a ii.118 Dhp-a iv.102.
2. [in this meaning better to be derived from sphar to spread, expand, cp. pharita & phālita] to spread make expand Ja i.82 (metta-cittaṃ phari).
3. [prob of quite a diff. origin and only taken to pharati by pop analogy, perhaps to phal = sphaṭ; to split; thus kaṭṭh’atthaṃ pharati = to be split up for fuel] to serve as, only with ˚atthaṃ in phrases āhāratthaṃ ph. (after next phrase) to serve as food Mil 152; kaṭṭhatthaṃ ph. to serve as fuel AN ii.95 = SN iii.93 = Iti 90 = Ja i.482; khādaniyatthaṃ & bhojaniyatthaṃ ph. to serve as eatables Vin i.201 (so to be read in preference to ˚attaṃ) ■ pp pharita, phurita & phuṭa; cp. also phuṭṭha; see further anu˚, pari˚.
sphur & sphar;, same root as in Gr. σπαίρω to twitch; Lat. sperno “spurn” lit. kick away; Ags speornan to kick; spurnan = spur
hatchet, axe AN iii.162; Ja i.199, Ja i.399; Ja ii.409 Ja v.500; Dhp-a ii.204; Pv-a 277. The spelling parasu occurs at SN v.441 & Ja iii.179.
cp. Vedic paraśu = Gr. πέλεκυς; on p → ph cp. Prk. pharasu & parasu, Pischel Gr. § 208; Geiger, Gr. § 40
1. being pervaded or permeated (by) Vv-a 68 (mettāya).
2. spread (out) Ja vi.284 (kittisaddo sakala-loke ph.) ■ Cp. phuṭṭha & phālita;.
pp. of pharati
(adj.) [cp. Vedic paruṣa, on ph. → p see pharasu, on attempt at etym. cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fario 1. (lit.) rough Pv ii.41.
2. (fig.) harsh, unkind, rough (of speech) Vin ii.290 (caṇḍa + ); Pv ii.34; iii.57 Ja v.296; Kv 619. In combn with vācā we find both pharusa- vācā and pharusā- vācā DN i.4, DN i.138; DN iii.69 sq., 173, 232; MN i.42 (on this and the same uncertainty as regards pisuṇā-vācā see Trenckner, at MN i.530) pharusa vacana rough speech Pv-a 15, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 83.
3. cruel Pv iv.76 (kamma = daruṇa Pv-a 265).
(nt.) to burst, thus lit. “bursting,” i.e. ripe fruit; see phalati] 1. (lit. fruit (of trees etc.) Vv 8414 (dumā nicca-phal’ ûpapannā not to phalu, as Kern, Toev. s. v. phalu); Vism 120- amba˚; mango-fruit Pv-a 273 sq.; dussa˚; (adj.) having clothes as their fruit (of magic trees) Vv 462 (cp. Vv-a 199); patta˚; leaves & fruits, vegetables Snp 239; Pv-a 86 pavatta˚; wild fruit DN i.101; puppha˚; flower & fruit Ja iii.40. rukkha˚-ūpama Thag 490 (in simile of kāmā taken fr. MN i.130) lit. “like the fruit of trees is expld by Thag-a 288 as “anga-paccangānaṃ p(h)alibhañjan’ aṭṭhena, and trsld according to this interpretation by Mrs. Rh. D. as “fruit that brings the climber to a fall.”-Seven kinds of medicinal fruits are given at Vin i.201 scil. vilanga, pippala, marica, harītaka vibhītaka, āmalaka, goṭhaphala. At Mil 333 a set of 7 fruits is used metaphorically in simile of the Buddha’s fruit-shop, viz. sotāpatti˚, sakadāgāmi˚, anāgāmi˚ arahatta˚, suññata˚ samāpatti (cp. Cpd. 70), animitta˚ samāpatti, appaṇihita˚ samāpatti.
2. a testicle Ja iii.124 (dantehi ˚ṃ chindati = purisabhāvaṃ nāseti to castrate); vi.237 (uddhita-pphalo, adj., = uddhaṭa-bījo C.), 238 (dantehi phalāni uppāṭeti, like above). 3. (fig.) fruit, result, consequence, fruition, blessing As t.t. with ref. to the Path and the progressive attainment (enjoyment, fruition) of Arahantship it is used to denote the realization of having attained each stage of the sotāpatti, sakadāgāmi etc. (see the Mil quot under 1 and cp. Cpd. 45, 116). So freq. in exegetical literature magga, phala, nibbāna, e.g. Tikp 155, 158 Vb-a 43 & passim ■ In general it immediately precedes Nibbāna (see Nd;2 no 645b and under satipaṭṭhāna) and as agga-phala it is almost identical with Arahantship Frequently it is combd with vipāka to denote the stringent conception of “consequence,” e.g. at DN i.27, DN i.58; DN iii.160. Almost synonymous in the sense of “fruition, benefit, profit” is ānisaṃsā DN iii.132 phala at Pv i.125 = ānisaṃsa Pv-a 64-Vin i.293 (anāgāmi˚); ii.240 (id.); iii.73 (arahatta˚); DN i.51 DN i.57 sq. (sāmañña˚); iii.147, 170 (sucaritassa); MN i.477 (appamāda˚); SN i.173 (Amata˚); Pv i.1110 (kaṭuka˚) ii.83 (dāna˚); iv.188 (mahap˚ & agga˚); Vism 345 (of food, being digested); Pv-a 8 (puñña˚ & dāna˚), 22 (sotāpatti˚), 24 (issā-macchariya˚).;
-atthika one who is looking for fruit Vism 120 -āpaṇa fruit shop Mil 333. -āphala [phala + aphala see ā4; but cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 331] all sorts of fruit, lit what is not (i.e. unripe), fruit without discrimination; a phrase very freq. in Jātaka style, e.g. Ja i.416 Ja ii.160; Ja iii.127; Ja iv.220; Ja iv.307, Ja iv.449, Ja v.313; Ja vi.520; Dhp-a i.106. -āsava extract of fruit Vv-a 73. -uppatti ripening Pv-a 29. -esin yielding fruit Ja i.87 = Thag 527 cp. phalesin Mvu iii.93. -gaṇḍa see palagaṇḍa -ṭṭha “stationed in fruition,” i.e. enjoying the result or fruition of the Path (cp. Cpd. 50) Mil 342. -dāna gift of fruit Vb-a 337. -dāyin giver of fruit Vv 676 -pacchi fruit-basket Ja vi.560. -pañcaka fivefold fruit Vism 580; Vb-a 191. -puṭa fruit-basket Ja vi.236 -bhājana one who distributes fruit, an official term in the vihāra Vin iv.38, cp. BSk. phalacāraka. -maya see sep. -ruha fruit tree Mbvs 82. -sata see palasata.
cp. Vedic phala, to phal [sphal
is spelling for pala (a certain weight) at Ja vi.510. See pala & cp. Geiger,; P.Gr. § 40.
the point of a spear or sword SN ii.265 (tiṇha˚). Cp. phāla2.
etym.? Sk. *phala
1. a flat piece of wood, a slab, board, plank Ja i.451 (a writing board school slate); v.155 (akkhassa ph. axle board); vi.281 (dice-board). pidhāna˚; covering board Vb-a 244 Vism 261; sopāna˚; staircase, landing Ja i.330 (maṇi˚) Vism 313; cp. Mvu i.249; ˚āsana a bench Ja i.199 ˚kāya a great mass of planks Ja ii.91. ˚atthara -sayana a bed covered with a board (instead of a mattress Ja i.304, Ja i.317; Ja ii.68. ˚seyya id. DN i.167 (“plank-bed”)
2. a shield Ja iii.237, Ja iii.271; Mil 355; Dhp-a ii.2. 3. a slip of wood or bark, used for making an ascetic’s dress (˚cīra) DN i.167, cp. Vin i.305. ditto for a weight to hang on the robe Vin ii.136.
4. a post MN iii.95 (aggaḷa˚ doorpost); Thag-a 70 (Ap. v.17).
fr. phal = *sphal or *sphaṭ; (see phalati), lit. that which is split or cut off (cp. in same meaning “slab”); cp Sk. sphaṭika rock-crystal; on Prk. forms see Pischel Prk. Gr. §206. Ved. phalaka board, phāla ploughshare Gr. α ̓́σπαλον, σπολάς, ψαλίς scissors; Lat. pellis spolium; Ohg. spaltan = split, Goth, spilda writing board, tablet; Oicel. spjald board
is spurious writing for palagaṇḍa (q.v.).
(f.) the fact or condition of bearing fruit Pv-a 139 (appa˚).
abstr. fr. phala
to split, burst open (intrs.) AN i.77 (asaniyā phalantiyā); usually in phrase “ muddhā sattadhā phaleyya, as a formula of threat or warning “your (or my) head shall split into 7 pieces,” e.g. DN i.95; SN i.50; Snp 983; Ja i.54; Ja iv.320 (me); v.92 (= bhijjetha C.); Mil 157 (satadhā for satta˚); Dhp-a i.41 (m. te phalatu s.) Vv-a 68; whereas a similar phrase in Snp 988 sq. has adhipāteti (for *adhiphāṭeti = phalati) ■ Caus. phāleti (& phāṭeti) ■ pp.; phalita & phulla;.
2. to become ripe, to ripen Vin ii.108; Ja iii.251; Pv-a 185.
phal to split, break open = *sphal or *sphaṭ; cp. phāṭeti. On etym. see also Lüders, K.Z. xlii, 198 sq. 1.
stands in all probability for phalika-maya, made of crystal, as is suggested by context, which gives it in line with kaṭṭha-maya & loha-maya (& aṭṭhi˚ danta˚, veḷu˚ etc.). It occurs in same phrase at all passages mentioned, and refers to material of which boxes, vessels, holders etc. are made. Thus at Vin i.203 (of añjani, box), 205 (tumba, vessel); ii.115 (sattha-daṇḍa, scissors-handle), 136 (gaṇṭhikā, block at dress). The trsln “made of fruits” seems out of place (so Kern, Toev. s. v.), one should rather expect “made of crystal” by the side of made of wood, copper bone, ivory, etc.
(adj.) bearing or having fruit Ja iii.251.
fr. phala
see palasata ■ At Ja vi.510 it means “goldbronze” (as material of which a “sovaṇṇa-kaṃsa” is made).
a fruit vendor Mil 331.
fr. phala
(f.) crystal quartz Vin ii.112; Ja vi.119 (˚kā = phaḷika-bhittiyo C.); Vv 351 (= phalika-maṇi-mayā bhittiyo Vv-a 160) 783 (˚kā); Mil 267 (ḷ), 380 (ḷ).
also spelt with ḷ; cp. Sk. sphaṭika; on change ṭ → ḷ see Geiger, P.Gr. § 386. The Prk. forms are phaḷiha & phāḷiya, see Pischel,; Gr. § 206
(adj.) grey-haired Pv-a 153.
sporadic spelling for palita
broken, only in phrase hadayaṃ phalitaṃ his heart broke Dhp-a i.173; hadayena phalitena with broken heart Ja i.65.
pp. of phal to burst, for the usual phulla, after analogy with phalita3
fruit bearing, having fruit, covered with fruit (of trees) Vin ii.108; Ja i.18; Mil 107, Mil 280.
pp. of phal to bear fruit
(adj.) bearing fruit Ja v.242.
fr. phala
(adj.) at Ja v.92 is of doubtful meaning. It cannot very well mean “bearing fruit, since it is used as Ep. of a bird (˚sakuṇī). The Cy expln is sakuṇa-potakānaṃ phalinattā (being a source of nourishment?) phalina-sakuṇī.” The v.l. SS is phalīna & palīna.;
fr. phala, phalin?
(adj.) bearing fruit, full of fruit Ja iii.493.
fr. phala
a knot or joint in a reed, only in cpd. ˚bīja (plants) springing (or propagated) from a joint DN i.5; Vin iv.34, Vin iv.35.
cp. Vedic paru
at DN i.54 is spurious reading for paleti (see palāyati), expld by gacchati DN-a i.165; meaning “runs, not with trsln “spreads out”.
to sphar
is spelling for pallava sprout, at Ja iii.40.
contact, touch (as sense or sense-impression, for which usually phoṭṭhabbaṃ ). It is the fundamental fact in a senseimpression and consists of a combination of the sense the object, and perception, as expld at MN i.111: tiṇṇaṃ (i.e. cakkhu, rūpā, cakkhu-viññāṇa) sangati phasso and gives rise to feeling: phassa-paccayā vedanā. (See paṭicca-samuppāda & for expl;n Vism 567; Vb-a 178 sq.) ■ Cp. DN i.42 sq.; DN iii.228, DN iii.272, DN iii.276; Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso); Snp 737, Snp 778 (as fundamental of attachment, cp. Snp-a 517); Ja v.441 (rājā dibba-phassena puṭṭho touched by the divine touch, i.e. fascinated by her beauty; puṭṭho = phutto); Vb-a 177 sq. (in detail) 193, 265; Pv-a 86 (dup˚ of bad touch, bad to the touch i.e. rough, unpleasant); poet. for trouble Thag 783 See on phassa: Dhs. trsl. 5 & introd. (lv.) lxiii.; Cpd. 12, 14, 94.
-āyatana organ of contact (6, referring to the several senses) Pv-a 52. -āhāra “touch-food,” acquisition by touch, nutriment of contact, one of the 3 āhāras, viz phass˚, mano-sañcetanā˚ (Name of representative cogitation) and viññāṇ˚ (of intellection) Dhs 71–73; one of the 4 kinds of āhāra, or “food,” with ref. to the 3 vedanās Vism 341. -kāyā (6) groups of touch or contact vîz. cakkhu-samphasso, sota˚, ghāna˚, kāya˚ mano˚ DN iii.243. -sampanna endowed with (lovely touch, soft, beautiful to feel Ja v.441 (cp. phassita).
cp. Ved. sparśa, of spṛś: see phusati
(adj.) to be felt, esp. as a pleasing sensation; pleasant, beautiful Ja iv.450 (gandhehi ph.).
grd. fr. phusati, corresp. to Sk. spṛśya
stands for phusati at Vism 527 in def. of phassa (“phassatī ti phasso”).
(f.) touch, contact with Dhs-a 167 (jhānassa lābho… patti… phassanā sacchikiriyā).
abstr. fr. phassa
(adj.) made to touch, brought into contact, only in cpd. suphassita of pleasant contact, beautiful to the touch, pleasant, perfect, symmetrical Ja i.220 (cīvara) 394 (dantā); iv.188 (dant’ āvaraṇaṃ); v.197 (of the membrum muliebre), 206 (read ˚phassita for ˚phussita) 216 (˚cheka-karaṇa); Vv-a 275 (as expln of atīva sangata Vv 642) ■ Note. Another (doubtful) phassita is found at Ja v.252 (dhammo phassito; touched, attained where vv.ll. give passita & phussita.;
pp. of phasseti = Sk. sparśayati to bring into contact
to touch, attain Ja v.251 (rājā dhammaṃ phassayaṃ = C. phassayanto; vv.ll. pa˚ phu˚); Mil 338 (amataṃ, cp. phusati), 340 (phassayeyya Pot.) ■ Pass. phassīyati Vin ii.148 (kavāṭā na ph.; v.l. phussiy˚) ■ pp. phassita & phussita;3. *Phateti
Caus. of phusati1
is conjectured reading for pāteti in phrase kaṭṭhaṃ pāteti MN i.21, and in adhipāteti to split (see adhipāta & vipāta). The derivation of these expressions from; pat is out of place, where close relation to phāleti (phalati) is evident, and a derivation from phaṭ = sphat, as in Sk. sphāṭayati to split, is the only right expln of meaning. In that case we should put phal = sphaṭ; where l = ṭ, as in many Pali words, cp phalika<spha geiger P.Gr. § 386). The Prk correspondent is phāḍei (Pischel, Gr. § 208).
(nt.) 1. juice of the sugar cane, raw sugar, molasses (ucchu-rasaṃ gahetvā kataphāṇitaṃ Vv-a 180) Vin ii.177; DN i.141; Vv 3525; 404 Ja i.33, Ja i.120, Ja i.227; Mil 107; Dhp-a ii.57. phāṇitassa puṭaṃ a basket of sugar SN i.175; Ja iv.366; Dhp-a iv.232–2. (by confusion or rightly?) salt Ja iii.409 (in expln of aloṇika = phāṇita-virahita).
-odaka sugar water Ja iii.372, -puṭa sugar basket Ja iv.363.
cp. Epic Sk. phāṇita
(f.) swelling, increase Ja ii.426 (= vaḍḍhi); Vism 271 (vuddhi + ). Usually combd with kṛ; as phāti-kamma increase, profit, advantage Vin ii.174 Vb-a 334 & phāti-karoti to make fat, to increase, to use to advantage MN i.220 = AN v.347; AN iii.432.
cp. Sk. sphāti, fr. sphāy, sphāyate to swell, increase (Idg. *spē(i), as in Lat. spatium, Ohg. spuot Ags. spēd = E. speed; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. spatium) pp. sphīta = P. phīta
(adj.) at Vv-a 288 is not clear; meaning something like “bitter,” combd with kasaṭa; v.l. pāru˚. Probably = phārusaka.
at Vb 350 (in thambha-exegesis) is faulty spelling for phārusiya (nt.) harshness, unkindness, as evidence of id. passage at Vb-a 469 shows (with expln “pharusassa puggalassa bhāvo phārusiyaṃ”).
1. a certain flower, the (bitter) fruit of which is used for making a drink Vin i.246; Vv 3331 = Dhp-a iii.316. 2. Name of one of Indra’s groves Ja vi.278, similarly Vism 424; Vb-a 439.
fr. pharusa, cp. Sk. *pāruṣaka Mpt 103, Mpt 143
(m. & nt.) ploughshare SN i.169; Snp p.13 & v.77 (expld as “phāletī ti ph.” Snp-a 147) Ja i.94; Ja iv.118; Ja v.104; Ud 69 (as m.); Dhp-a i.395.
cp. Vedic phāla
an (iron) board, slab (or ball?), maybe spear or rod. The word is of doubtful origin & meaning, it occurs always in the same context of a heated iron instrument, several times in correlation with an iron ball (ayogula). It has been misunderstood at an early time, as is shown by kapāla AN iv.70 for phāla Kern comments on the word at Toev. ii.139. See Vin i.225 (phālo divasantatto, so read; v.l. balo corr. to bālo; corresp. with guḷa); AN iv.70 (divasa-santatte ayokapāle, gloss ayogule); Ja v.268; Ja v.109 (phāle ciraratta-tāpite, v.l. pāle, hale, thāle; corresp. with pakaṭṭhita ayogula), id. v.113 (ayomayehi phālehi pīḷeti v.l. vālehi).
to phala3
in loṇa-maccha˚; a string (?) or cluster of salted fish Vism 28.
(adj.) splitting; one who splits Vism 413 (kaṭṭha˚).
fr. phāleti
(nt.) splitting Ja i.432 (dāru˚); Vism 500 (vijjhana˚).
fr. phāleti
1. made open, expanded, spread Ja iii.320 (+ vikasita).
2. split [fr. phāleti phal ], split open Vism 262 = Vb-a 245 (˚haliddi-vaṇṇa).
= Sk. sphārita, sphar
in full blossom MN i.218; Ja i.52.
either Intensive of phulla, or Der. fr. pariphulla in form phaliphulla
is spurious spelling for pāli˚ at Ja ii.162 (v.l. pātali-bhaddaka). Cp. Prk. phālihadda (= pāribhadra Pischel, Gr. § 208).
(adj.) [either fr. Caus. of phal1 (phāleti), or fr. sphar (cp. phārita, i.e. expanded), or fr. sphāy (swell increase, cp. sphāra & sphārī bhavati to open, expand) expanding, opening, blossoming in cpd. aggi-nikāsi-phālima paduma Ja iii.320 (where Cy. explns by phālita vikasita).
to split, break chop, in phrases 1. kaṭṭhaṃ phāleti to chop sticks (for firewood) Vin i.31; Ja ii.144; Pv ii.951, besides which the phrase kaṭṭhaṃ *phāṭeti. 2. sīsaṃ (muddhā sattadhā phāleti (cp. adhipāteti & phalati) Dhp-a i.17 (perhaps better with v.l. phal˚), 134.
3. (various: AN i.204 = SN ii.88; Ja ii.398; Nd ii.483; Vism 379 (kucchiṃ; Dhp-a iv.133 (hadayaṃ) ■ pp. phālita. Caus. II phālāpeti to cause to split open Ja iii.121; Mil 157 (v.l. phāḷāp˚).
Caus. of phalati, phal; a variant is phāṭeti fr. sphaṭ; which is identical with *(s)phal
(adj.) pleasant, comfortable; only neg. a˚; in phrase aphāsu-karoti to cause discomfort to (dat.) Vin iv.290; and in cpds. ˚kāma anxious for comfort, desirous of (others) welfare DN iii.164; ˚vihāra comfort, ease Vin ii.127; DN i.204; Dhs 1348 = Mil 367 (cp. Dhs-a 404); Mil 14; Vism 33; Vb-a 270; Pv-a 12.
etym.? Trenckner, Notes 82 (on Mil 1417: corr. J.P.T.S. 1908, 136 which refers it to Mil 1315 suggests connection with Vedic prāśu enjoying, one who enjoys, i.e. a guest, but this etym. is doubtful; cp phāsuka. A key to its etym. may be found in the fact that it never occurs by itself in form phāsu, but either in composition or as ˚ka
at Mil 146 (cp. p. 425) “bhaggā phāsū” is un certain reading, it is not phāsuka; it may represent a pāsa snare, sling. The likeness with phāsukā bhaggā (lit.) of Ja i.493 is only accidental.
(adj.) pleasant, convenient, comfortable Ja iii.343 Ja iv.30; Dhp-a ii.92; Pv-a 42 ■ aphāsuka unpleasant uncomfortable, not well Ja ii.275, Ja ii.395; Dhp-a i.28; Dhp-a ii.21-Note. It seems probable that phāsuka represents a Sk. *sparśuka (cp. Pischel § 62), which would be a der fr. spṛś in same meaning as phassa2 (“lovely”). This would confirm the suggestion of phāsu being a secondary formation.
fr. phāsu. Cp. Prk. phāsuya; acc. to Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 208; Jain Sk. prāsuka is a distortion of P. phāsuka. Perhaps phāsu is abstracted from phāsuka
(f.) a rib, only in pl. phāsukā Vin i.74 (upaḍḍha˚ bhañjitabbā), in phrase sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā Ja i.493 (lit.), which is fig. applied at Dhp 154 (expld as “sabbā avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā” at Dhp-a iii.128), with which cp. bhaggā phāsū at Mil 146; both the latter phrases prob. of diff. origin ■ (adj.) (-˚) in phrase mahā˚passa the flank (lit. the side of the great ribs Ja i.164, Ja i.179; Ja iii.273; abs. mahā˚; with great ribs Ja v.42; uggata˚; with prominent ribs Pv-a 68 (for upphāsulika adj. Pv ii.11) ■ in cpds. as phāsuka˚; e.g. ˚aṭṭhīni the rib-bones (of which there are 24) Vism 254 (v.l. pāsuka˚); Vb-a 237; ˚dvaya pair of ribs Vism 252 Vb-a 235 ■ See also pāsuka, pāsuḷa & the foll.;
cp. Sk *pārśukā & Ved. pārśva, see passa;2
(f.) rib, only in cpd. upphāsulika (adj.) Pv ii.11.
fr. phāsuḷi
rib SN ii.255 (phāsuḷ-antarikā).
for phāsukā
a rib MN i.80.
cp. phāsukā & phāsuḷā
oar Snp 321 (+ aritta rudder, expld by dabbi-padara Snp-a 330); Ja iv.21 (˚ârittaṃ) See also piya2 which is the more freq. spelling of phiya.
etym. unknown
opulent, prosperous, rich; in the older texts only in stock phrase iddha ph. bahujana (rich & prosperous & well-populated) DN i.211 (of the town Nālandā); ii.146 (of Kusāvatī); MN i.377; (of Nālandā) ii.71 (of country); SN ii.107 (fig. of brahmacariyaṃ; with bahujañña for ˚jana) AN iii.215 (of town). By itself & in other comb;n in the Jātakas, e.g. Ja iv.135 (= samiddha); vi.355 (v.l. pīta) With iddha & detailed description of all classes of the population (instead of bahujana) of a town Mil 330.;
pp. of sphāy, cp. Sk. sphīta & see phāti
1. (cp. pharati1) pervaded, permeated, thrilled (cp. pari˚) DN i.73, DN i.74 (pītisukhena T. prints phuta; v.l. phuṭa; v.l. at DN-a i.217 p(h)uṭṭha) MN i.276; Ja i.33 (sarīraṃ pītiyā ph.); Dhp-a ii.118 (pītiyā phuṭa-sarīro); Snp-a 107 (referring to the nerves of taste).
2. (cp. pharati2) expanded, spread out, spread with (instr.) Vin i.182 (lohitena); Ja v.266 (in nirayapassage T. reads bhūmi yojana-sataṃ phuṭā tiṭṭhanti i.e. the beings fill or are spread out over such a space; C. 272 explns by “ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ anupharitvā tiṭṭhanti.” The id. p. at Nd i.405 = Nd ii.304iii d reads bh. yojana-sataṃ pharitvā (intrs.: expanding, wide tiṭṭhati, which is the more correct reading) ■ See also ophuṭa & cp.; phuta3.
pp. of pharati
blossoming out, opened, in full bloom Dāvs iv.49 (˚kumuda). Cp phuṭita.
pp. of sphuṭ; to expand, blossom
at MN i.377 (sabba-vāri˚, in sequence with vārita, yuta, dhuta) is unnecessarily changed by Kern, Toev. s. v. into pūta. The meaning is “filled with, spread with,” thus = phuṭa1, cp. sequence under ophuṭa. The v.l. at MN i.377 is puṭṭha. On miswriting of phuṭṭa puṭṭha for phuṭa cp. remark by Trenckner, MN i.553 A similar meaning (“full of, occupied by, overflowing with”) is attached to phuṭa in Avīci passage AN i.159 (Avīci maññe phuṭo ahosi), cp. Anāgata Vaṃsa (J.P.T.S. 1886, v.39) & remarks of Morris’s; J.P.T.S. 1887, 165-The same passage as MN i.377 is found at DN i.57 where T. reads phuṭṭa (as also at DN-a i.168), with vv. ll puṭṭha & phuṭa.;
1. shaken, tossed about, burst, rent asunder, abstr. nt. phutitattaṃ being tossed about Mil 116 (v.l. put ˚). 2. cracked open, chapped, torn (of feet) Thig 269 (so read for T. phuṭika, Thag-a 212 explns by bāhita has v.l. niphuṭita).;
for phoṭita, pp. of *sphoṭayati, sphuṭ;
touched, affected by, influenced by; in specific sense (cp. phusati1 2) “thrilled, permeated” Vin i.200 (ābādhena); AN ii.174 (rogena) Ja i.82 (mettacittena, v.l. puṭṭha); v.441 (dibbaphassena); Vism 31 (˚samphassa contact by touch), 49 (byādhinā); Vv-a 6 (in both meanings, scil. pītiyā rogena). On phuṭṭha at DN i.57 see phuṭa3. Cp. sam˚.
pp. of phusati1
to shake, sprinkle, of doubtful spelling, at Ja vi.108 (angārakāsuṃ ph.; v.l. punanti perhaps better; C. explns by vidhunati & okirati). Perhaps we should read; dhunati.
?
(= pulaka) a kind of gem Vv-a 111.
blossoming, in blossom Ja v.203. Also as Intensive phāliphulla “one mass of flowers” MN i.218; Ja i.52. Note. phulla1 may stand for phuṭa2.
pp. of phalati, or root formation fr. phull, cp. phalita3
broken, in phrase akhaṇḍa-phulla unbroken (q.v.), Pv iv.176 and passim.
pp. of phalati, cp. phalita2
in flower, blossoming Ja v.214 (for phīta = rich), 216 (su˚-vana).
pp. of phullati
, fr. which sparśa = phassa; cp. also phassati] 1. (lit.) to touch Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso) DN-a i.61 (aor. phusī = metri causa for phusi); Mil 157 (grd. aphusa not to be touched).
2. (fig.) [see on this term of Buddhist ecstatic phraseology Cpd. 1332. In this meaning it is very closely related to pharati, as appears e.g. from the foll. explns of Cys.: DN i.74 parippharati = samantato phusati DN-a i.217; DN ii.186 pharitvā = phusitvā ārammaṇaṃ katvā Vism 308] to attain, to reach, only in specific sense of attaining to the highest ideal of religious aspiration, in foll. phrases ceto-samādhiṃ ph. DN i.13 = DN iii.30, DN iii.108 etc.; nirodhaṃ DN i.184; samatha-samādhiṃ Vv 169 (reads āphusiṃ but should prob. be aphusiṃ as Vv-a 84, expld by adhigacchiṃ); phalaṃ aphussayi (aor. med.) Pv iv.188; cp Pv-a 243; amataṃ padaṃ Pv iv.348; amataṃ Mil 338 (but T. reads khippaṃ phasseti a.); in bad sense kappaṭṭhitikaṃ kammaṃ Mil 108 (of Devadatta) ■ pp phuṭṭha. Cp. upa˚.
this is a specific Pali form and represents two Sk. roots, which are closely related to each other and go back to the foll. 2 Idg. roots: 1. Idg. *sp(h)ṛj, burst out, burst (forth), spring, sprinkle, as in Sk. sphūrjati burst forth, parjanya rain cloud; Gr. σφαραγέω; Ags spearca = E. spark, E. spring, sprinkle. This is an enlargement of sphur (cp. pharati, phuṭṭha, phuta). 2. Idg. *spṛk to sprinkle, speckle, as in Sk. pruṣ, pṛśni speckled, pṛṣan, pṛṣatī spotted antelope, pṛṣata raindrop; Gr. περκνός of dark (lit. spotted) colour; Lat spargere = Ger. sprengen. To this root belong P pasata, phoseti, paripphosaka, phussa, phusita ■ Inf phusituṃ, conjectured reading at Vin i.205 for T phosituṃ (vv.ll. posituṃ & dhovituṃ), & Vin ii.151 for T. posituṃ; Vin. Texts iii.169 translate “bespatter.”
(nt.) touch Vism 463.
abstr. fr. phusati1 1
(f.) attainment, gaining, reaching Vism 278 (= phuṭṭha-ṭṭhāna); Dhp-a i.230 (ñāṇa˚); Vv-a 85 (samādhi˚).
abstr. fr. phusati1 2
to sprinkle (rain), to rain gently, drizzle SN i.104 sq., 154 184 (devo ekaṃ ekaṃ ph. “drop by drop”). See also anuphusāyati (so read for ˚phusīyati).
Caus. of pruṣ, but formed fr. P. phusati2
(nt.) rain-drop MN iii.300; SN ii.135; Dhp-a iii.243. The Prk. equivalent is phusiya (Pischel, Gr. § 208), cp. Ger. sprenkeln → E. sprinkle.
either pp. of phusati2 or direct correspondent of Sk. pṛṣata (see pasata2)
spotted, coloured variegated (with flowers) Snp 233 (˚agga = supupphit agga-sākha Kp-a 192).
pp. of phusati2 2. i.e. pruṣ, cp. Sk. pruṣita sprinkled, pṛṣatī spotted antelope
touched, put on, in ˚aggaḷa with fastened (clinched) bolts (or better: door-wings) MN i.76 (reads phassit˚; cp. v.l. on p. 535 phussit˚); AN i.101; Thag 385; Ja vi.510.
= phassita2, Kern. Toev. s. v. takes it as pp. of *puṃsayati
(adj.) (-˚) [fr. phusita1) having raindrops, only in phrase thulla˚ deva (the sky) shedding big drops of rain SN ii.32 (reads phulla-phusitaka); iii.141; AN i.243 AN ii.140; AN v.114; Vism 259.
1. see phussa3 2.
2. Name of a month (Dec ■ Jan. Ja i.86. Name of a lunar mansion or constellation Vv 534 (= phussa-tārakā Vv-a 236) ■ Frequent as Np., cp Vism 422, and combns like ˚deva, ˚mitta.
fr. puṣ to blossom, nourish, etc. cp. Ved. puṣya
touching, feeling, realising; doubled at DN i.45, DN i.54.
ger. of phusati1
(adj.-n.) 1. speckled gaily-coloured, ˚kokila the spotted cuckoo [Kern Toev. s. v. phussa however takes it as “male-cuckoo, Sk. puṃs-kokila] Ja v.419, Ja v.423; Vv-a 57 ■ As phussaka at AN i.188 (so read for pussaka).
2. in sense of “clear, excellent, exquisite” (or it is puṣya in sense of “substance, essence” of anything, as Geiger, P. Gr. § 40 1a?) in ˚ratha [cp. Sk, puṣpa˚, but prob. to be read puṣya˚?] a wonderful state carriage running of its own accord Ja ii.39; Ja iii.238; Ja iv.34; Ja v.248; Ja vi.39 sq.) v.l. pussa˚); Pv-a 74. -rāga [cp. Sk. puṣpa-rāga] topaz Mil 118; Vv-a 111 ■ At Nd i.90 as v.l. to be preferred to pussa˚; in ˚tila, ˚tela, ˚dantakaṭṭha, etc with ref. to their use by Brahmins.
grd. formation fr. phusati2 2; scarcely fr. Sk. puṣya (to puṣ nourish, cp. poseti), but meaning rather “speckled” in all senses. The Sk. puṣyaratha is Sanskritisation of P. phussa˚
accessory wood, wood surrounding the pith of a tree, always with ref. to trees (freq. in similes), in sequence; mūla sāra, pheggu, taca, papaṭikā etc. It is represented as next to the pith, but inferior and worthless. At all passages contrasted with sāra (pith, substance). Thus at MN i.192 sq., 488; DN iii.51; SN iv.168; AN i.152 (pheggu sāra, v.l. phaggu); ii.110 = Pp 52; AN iii.20; Ja iii.431 (opp. sāra); Mil 267, Mil 413 (tacchako phegguṃ apaharitvā sāraṃ ādiyati).
cp. Vedic phalgu & P. phaggu in form
(-˚) (adj.) having worthless wood, weak, inferior MN i.488 (apagata˚, where ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd.); Ja iii.318 (a˚ + sāramaya).
fr. pheggu
(f.) state of dry wood; lack of substance, worthlessness Pp A 229.
abstr. fr. pheggu
scum, foam, froth, only in cpds. viz.:
-uddehakaṃ (adv.) (paccamāna, boiling) with scum on top, throwing up foam MN iii.167; AN i.141; Nd ii.304iii c; Ja iii.46; Mil 357. -paṭala a film of scum Vism 359; Vb-a 65. -piṇḍa a lump or heap of foam SN iii.140 sq. = Vism 479 (in simile of rūpa); Nd ii.680 Aii Vism 40 (in comp); Vb-a 32 sq. bubbuḷaka a bubble of scum Vism 171, Vism 259, Vism 345; Vb-a 242. -mālā a wreath or garland of scum Mil 117. -mālin with a wreath of scum Mil 260. -missa mixed with froth Vism 263. -vaṇṇa colour of scum Vism 263.
cp. Vedic phena, with *ph fr. sp˚, connected with Lat. spūma, scum, Ags. fām = Ger. feim = E. foam.
= pheṇa Vism 254; Vb-a 237.
swelling, boil, blister Ja iv.457; Ja vi.8 (v.l. pota & poṭha); cp. poṭa bubble. Photaka = phota
fr. sphuṭ; cp. Sk. sphoṭa
Vism 258; Vb-a 242.
“applause,” in brahma-pphoṭana at Dhp-a iii.210 should be taken as ā + phoṭana (= apphoṭana).
to shake, toss (or thunder?) only at two places in similar formula, viz. devatā sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu, brahmāno apphoṭesuṃ (v.l. appoṭh˚) Mil 13 Mil 18; Sakko devarājā appoṭhesi (v.l. appoṭesi), Mahābrahmā sādhukāraṃ adāsi Ja vi.486. Perhaps we should read poṭheti (q.v.), to snap one’s fingers (clap hands) as sign of applause. At Dhp-a iii.210 we read fut. apphoṭessāmi (i.e. ā + phoṭ).
Caus. of sphuṭ; if correct. Maybe mixed with sphūrj. The form apphoṭesi seems to be ā + phoṭeti Sk. āsphoṭayati
(nt.) tangible, touch, contact; it is synonymous with phassa, which it replaces in psychol. terminology. Phoṭṭhabbaṃ is the senseobject of kāya (or taca ) touch (“kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā” DN iii.226, DN iii.250, DN iii.269; Nd ii.p. 238 under rūpa) See also āyatana ■ DN iii.102 (in list of ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni: kāyo c’ eva phoṭṭhabbā ca; with pl. like m.); Vb-a 79 (˚dhātu).
grd. of phusati
sprinkled Ja vi.47 (candana˚, v.l. pusita).
pp. of phoseti, cp. Sk. pruṣita
to sprinkle (over) Vin ii.205 (inf. phosituṃ). pp. phosita. Cp. pari˚.
B.
Caus. of phusati2, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati = P. phusayati
(indecl.) the sound (& letter); b, often substituted for or replaced by p (& ph):; so is e.g. in Bdhgh’s view pahuta the word bahuta, with p for b (Kp-a 207), cp. bakkula badara, badālatā, baddhacara, bandhuka 2, bala, balīyati bahuka, bahūta, billa, bella; also paribandha for paripantha; phāla2. Also substituted for v, cp. bajjayitvā v.l. vajjetvā DAI, 4, and see under Nibb-.
1. a crane, heron Cp iii.102; Ja i.205 (˚suṇikā), 221, 476; ii.234; iii.252.
2. Name of a dweller in the Brahma world MN i.326; SN i.142.
cp. Epic Sk. baka
in milāta˚-puppha is v.l. Kp-a 60 (see App. p. 870 Pj.) for ˚ākuli˚; which latter is also read at Vism 260.
cp. Class. Sk. bakula, Name of the tree Mimusops elengi, and its (fragrant) flower
a demon, uttering horrible cries, a form assumed by the Yakkha Ajakalāpaka, to terrify the Buddha Ud 5 (see also ākulī, where pākula is proposed for bakkula).
= vyākula? Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 94
see bandhati.
Pass. of bandhati (q.v.).
(num. card.) thirty-two Ja iii.207.
for dvat-tiṃsa
(m. & nt.) the fruit of the jujube tree (Zizyphus jujuba), not unlike a crabapple in appearance & taste, very astringent, used for medicine AN i.130 = Pp 32; AN iii.76; Vin iv.76; Ja iii.21; Dhs-a 320 (cited among examples of acrid flavours) Vv-a 186. Spelling padara for b˚ at Ja iv.363; Ja vi.529.
-aṭṭhi kernel of the j. Snp-a 247. -paṇḍu light yellow (fresh) jujube-fruit AN i.181 (so read for bhadara˚) -missa mixture or addition of the juice of jujube-fruits Vin iv.76. -yūsa juice of the j. fruit Vv-a 185.
cp. Ved. badara & badarī
(f.) the jujube tree Ja ii.260.
cp. Sk. badarī
(f.) a creeper (with thorns Kern, Toev. s. v.) DN iii.87 = Vism 418; Bdhgh says (see Dial. iii.84) “a beautiful creeper of sweet taste.”
etym. uncertain, may it be *padālatā, pa + n. ag. of dal Caus., lit. “destroyer”?
1. bound, in bondage MN i.275; SN i.133; SN iv.91; Snp 957 (interpreted as “baddhacara by Nd i.464); Dhp 324.
2. snared, trapped Ja ii.153 Ja iii.184; Ja iv.251, Ja iv.414.
3. made firm, settled, fastened bound (to a cert. place) Kp-a 60 (˚pitta, opp. abaddha˚)
4. contracted, acquired Vin iii.96.
5. bound to addicted or attached to Snp 773 (bhavasāta˚, cp. Nd i.30)
6. put together, kneaded, made into cakes (of meal Ja iii.343; Ja v.46; Ja vi.524.
7. bound together, linked clustered Dhp-a i.304 kaṇṇika˚ (of thoughts).
9. set made up (of the mind) Dhp-a i.11 (mānasaṃ te b.). Cp. ati˚, anu˚, a˚, ni˚, paṭi˚, vini˚, sam˚.
-añjalika keeping the hands reverently extended Dāvs iii.30. -rāva the cry of the bound (or trapped Ja iv.279, Ja iv.415 (v.l. bandhana˚). -vera having contracted an enmity, hostile, bearing a grudge Dhp-a i.324.
pp. of bandhati
(nt.) a leather strap, a thong Vin i.287 (T. bandha perhaps right, cp. ābandhana 3) Pv-a 127.
fr. bandhati
see paddhacara.
(adj.) deaf Vin i.91, Vin i.322; Thag 501 = Mil 367; Ja i.76 (jāti˚); v.387; vi.7; Dhp-a i.312. See also mūga.
-dhātuka deaf by nature Ja ii.63; Ja iv.146; Dhp-a i.346.
cp. Vedic badhira, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fatuus, comparing Goth. baups and M Irish bodar
(adj.) 1. bond, fetter Iti 56 (abandho Mārassa, not a victim of M.) Nd i.328 (taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚); Thag-a 241.
2. one who binds or ties together, in assa˚; horsekeeper, groom Ja ii.98; Ja v.441, Ja v.449; Dhp-a i.392.
3. a sort of binding maṇḍala˚; with a circular b. (parasol) Vin iv.338 salāka˚; with a notched b. ibid.
4. a halter, tether Dpvs i.76 ■ Cp. vinibandha.
cp. Vedic bandha, fr. bandh
as v.l. of vaṭṭaka see aṃsa˚.
(f.) an unchaste woman (lit. binder) Vin iv.224 (pl. bandhakiniyo), 265 (id.); Ja v.425, Ja v.431 (va˚).
fr. bandhaka, cp. Epic Sp. bandhukī a low woman = pāṃśukā & svairinī Halāy 2, 341
to bind etc.
1. Forms: Imper. bandha DN ii.350; pl. bandhantu Ja i.153. Pot. bandheyya SN iv.198; Vin iii.45 Fut. bandhayissati Mvu 24. 6; Aor. abandhi Ja iii.232 & bandhi Ja i.292; Dhp-a i.182. Ger. bandhitvā Vin i.46; SN iv.200; Ja i.253, Ja i.428, & bandhiya Thig 81. Inf bandhituṃ Thig 299. Caus. bandheti (see above Fut. & bandhāpeti (see below) ■ II. Meanings
1. to bind SN iv.200 (rajjuyā). fig. combine, unite Dhp-a ii.189 (gharāvāsena b. to give in marriage).
2. to tie on bind or put on to (loc.) Dhp-a i.182 (dasante). fig. to apply to, put to, settle on Dhp-a ii.12 (mānasaṃ paradāre)
3. to fix, prepare, get up, put together Ja iv.290 (ukkā); also in phrase cakk’ āticakkaṃ mañc’ ātimañcaṃ b. to put wheels upon wheels & couches upon couches Ja ii.331. iv.81; Dhp-a iv.61. fig. to start, undertake begin, make, in phrases āghātaṃ b. to bear malice Dhp-a ii.21; and veraṃ b. to make enmity against (loc. Ja ii.353.
4. to acquire, get Ja iii.232 (atthaṃ b. nibbatteti C.).
5. to compose Mil 272 (suttaṃ) Ja ii.33; Ja v.39 ■ Caus. II. bandhāpeti to cause to be bound (or fettered) Vin iv.224, Vin iv.316 (opp. mocāpeti) Nd ii.304iii. b (bandhanena); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 113 ■ Pass. bajjhati Nd ii.74 (for bujjhati, as in palābujjhati to be obstructed: see palibuddhati). I. Forms Ind. 3rd pl bajjhare Thag 137; pret. 3rd pl. abajjhare Ja i.428 Imper. bajjhantu SN iv.309; AN v.284. Pot. bajjheyya SN ii.228. Aor. bajjhi Ja ii.37; Ja iv.414. Ger. bajjha Ja iv.441, Ja iv.498, & bajjhitvā Ja ii.153; Ja iv.259; Ja v.442. II. Meanings.
1. to be bound, to be imprisoned Snp 508 (cp. Snp-a 418); Ja iv.278.
2. to be caught (in a sling or trap) Ja iii.330; Ja iv.414.
3. to incur a penalty (with loc., e.g. bahudaṇḍe) Ja iv.116.
4. to be captivated by, struck or taken by, either with loc. Ja i.368 (bajjhitvā & bandhitvā in Pass. sense); v.465; or with instr. Ja i.428; Ja iv.259 ■ pp. baddha (q.v.) ■ Cp. ati˚ anu˚, ā, o˚, paṭi˚, sam˚.
Vedic badhnāti, later Sk. bandhati, Idg. *bhendh, cp. Lat. offendimentum i.e. band; Goth bindan = Ohg, bintan, E. bind; Sk. bandhu relation Gr. πενχερός father-in-law, πεϊσμα bond, etc.
(nt.) 1. binding, bond, fetter Vin i.21; DN i.226, DN i.245 (pañca kāmaguṇā); iii.176; MN ii.44; SN i.8, SN i.24 (Māra˚), 35, 40 iv.201 sq. (5 fold) to bind the king of the Devas or Asuras, 291; Snp 532, Snp 948; Thag 414; Thag 2, Thag 356 (Māra˚ Dhp 345 sq.; Ja ii.139, Ja ii.140; Ja iii.59 = Pv-a 4; v.285; Nd ii.304iii. b (var. bonds, andhu˚, rajju˚ etc. cp. Nd i.433) DN-a i.121 (with ref. to kāmā).
2. binding, tying band, ligature; tie (also fig.) Vin i.204 (˚suttaka thread for tying) ii.135 (kāya˚ waistband); ii.117 (˚rajju for robes); SN iii.155 (vetta˚ ligatures of bamboo; cp. v.51) Snp 44 (gihi˚, cp. Nd ii.228: puttā ca dāsī ca); Dhp-a i.4 (ghara˚ tie of the house); Kp-a 51 (paṭṭa˚).
3. holding together, composition, constitution Vin i.96 (sarīra˚) cp. iii.28 ■ fig. composition (of literature) Ja ii.224 (gāthā˚).
4. joining together, union, company Dhp-a ii.160 (gaṇa˚ joining in companies).
5. handle Vin ii.135.
6. piecing together Vin i.254 (˚mattena when it, i.e. the stuff, has only been pieced together, see Vin. Texts ii.153 n.).
7. strap (?) doubtful reading in aṃsa˚; (q.v.) Vv 3340, where we should prefer to read with v.l. ˚vaṭṭaka.
8. doubtful in meaning in cpd paṃca-vidha-bandhana “the fivefold fixing,” as one of the torments in Niraya. It is a sort of crucifixion (see for detail pañca 3) Nd ii.304iii. c = Nd i.404; Ja i.174; Pv-a 221; Vb-a 278. In this connection it may mean “set,” cp. mūla˚ ■ On use of bandhana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 115. Cp. vini˚.
-āgāra “fetter-house,” prison DN i.72; MN i.75; Vin iii.151; Ja iii.326; Dhp-a ii.152; Vv-a 66; Pv-a 153 -āgārika prison-keeper, head-jailer AN ii.207.
fr. bandh, cp. Vedic bandhana
(adj.) 1. to be bound or fettered Mil 186.
2. apt to bind, binding, constraining DN ii.337 (cp. Dial. ii.361); Thig 356.
grd. of bandhati
1. kinsman, member of a clan or family, relative AN iii.44; Snp 60 (pl. bandhavāni in poetry; cp. Nd ii.455); Dhp 288 (pl. bandhavā) Ja ii.316; Ja v.81; DN-a i.243.
2. (-˚) one who is connected with or belongs to Snp 140 (manta˚, well-acquainted with Mantras; cp. Snp-a 192; vedabandhū veda-paṭisaraṇā ti vuttaṃ hoti); Ja v.335 (bodhaneyya˚) cp. bandhu 3.
cp. Class. Sk. bāndhava
1. a relation, relative, kinsman; pl. bandhū Ja iv.301; Pv-a 86 (= ñātī) & bandhavo Nd ii.455 (where Nd i.11 in id. p. reads bandhū) ■ Ādicca˚; kinsman of the Sun an Ep. of the Buddha Vin ii.296; AN ii.17; Snp 54, Snp 915 Snp 1128, cp. Nd ii.152b; Vv 2413; 7810, cp. Vv-a 116. Four kinds of relations enumd at Nd i.11. viz. ñāti˚ gotta˚, manta˚ (where Nd ii.455 reads mitta˚), sippa˚
2. Ep. of Brahmā, as ancestor of the brahmins DN-a i.254: see below ˚pāda.
3. (˚-) connected with related to, dealing with [cp. Vedic amṛta-bandhu RV x.725] SN i.123 (pamatta˚); 128; Snp 241, Snp 315 Snp 430, Snp 911; Ja iv.525; Mil 65 (kamma˚); Snp-a 192 (veda˚.) ■ f. bandhunī Ja vi.47 (said of the town of Mithilā (rāja˚); expld by C. as “rāja-ñātakeh’eva puṇṇā”).
-pāda the foot of Brahma, from which the Śūdras are said to have originated (cp. Sk. pādaja), in cpd bandhupād’apacca “offering from the foot of our kinsman,” applied as contemptuous epithet to the Samaṇas by a Brahmin DN i.90; MN i.334; SN iv.117.
Vedic bandhu, see bandhati & cp. bandhava
(adj.) 1. the plant Pentapetes phoenicea Ja iv.279 (˚puppha, evidently only a contraction of bandhu-jīvaka, cp. C. bandhujīvaka puppha; although Sk. bandhūka is given as syName of bandhujīva at Halāyudha 2, 53).
2. in bandhukaroga MN ii.121 prob. to be read paṇḍuka˚, as v.l. BB see paṇḍuroga.
fr. bandhu
the plant Pentapetes phoenicea MN ii.14 (˚puppha); DN ii.111 (id.) Ja iv.279; Vism 174; Dhs-a 14; Vv-a 43, Vv-a 161.
cp. Class. Sk. bandhujīva
(adj.) having relatives, rich in kinsmen; only as Np. m bandhumā Name of father of the Buddha Vipassin DN ii.11 = Vism 433; f. bandhumatī Name of mother of the Buddha Vipassin ibid.; also Name of a town DN ii.12 (capital of king Bandhumā); Snp-a 190 = Ja iv.388 (where the latter has Vettavatī), and a river Snp-a 190; Ja iv.388 (: Vettavatī).
fr. bandhu, cp. Vedic bandhumant
(adj.) having relatives, rich in relatives Ja vi.357.
bandhu + vant
a sort of coarse grass or reed, used to make slippers, etc. Vin i.190; DN ii.55; SN ii.92; SN iii.137 SN iv.158; AN ii.211; Dhp 345; Dhp-a iv.55.
-pādukā a slipper out of b. grass Dhp-a iii.451 -lāyaka cutter or reaper of grass SN iii.155; AN iii.365.
cp. Vedic balbaja, doubtful whether it belongs to Lat. bulbus; for the initial b. very often p. is found see pabbaja
(& ˚ka) Epic a cat Ja i.480 (= biḷāra C.) = Dhp-a ii.152.
Sk. babhruka a kind of ichneumon; Vedic babhru brown, cp. Lat. fiber = beaver, further connection “bear,” see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fiber
imitation of a confused rumbling noise MN i.128 ■ Cp. also P. mammana and sarasara.
onomat., cp. Sk. balbalā-karoti to stammer or stutter, barbara = Gr. βάρβαρος stuttering, people of an unknown tongue, balbūtha Np. “stammerer”; also Lat. balbas, Ger. plappern, E. blab; babbhara is a redupl. formation fr. *bhara-bhara = barbara, cp J.P.T.S. 1889, 209; Geiger, P.Gr. § 20
a peacock Ja iv.497.
cp. Sk. barhin
(nt.) the sacrificial grass DN i.141; MN i.344; AN ii.207; Pp 56.
Vedic barhis
(nt.) 1. strength power, force DN ii.73; AN i.244; Thag 188; Dhp 109 (one of the 4 blessings, viz. āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, bala; cp Dhp-a ii.239); Pv i.512 (= kāya-bala Pv-a 30); i.76 Vv-a 4 (iddhi˚); Pv-a 71 (id.), 82 (kamma˚) ■ Of cases used as adv. balasā (instr.) is mentioned by Trenckner at Mil 430 (notes), cp. Prk. balasā (Pischel, Gr. § 364) yathā balaṃ according to one’s power, i.e. as much as possible Pv-a 1, Pv-a 54. The compn form of bala in conn with kṛ; is balī˚; e.g. dubbalīkaraṇa making weak MN iii.4; Pp 59, Pp 68; ˚karaṇin id. DN iii.183 ■ adj. bala strong Ja v.268, abala weak Snp 770, Snp 1120, dubbala id SN i.222; Ja ii.154; Nd i.12; Pv-a 55; compar. ˚tara MN i.244, nt. n. abalaṃ weakness SN i.222.
2. an army military force Mvu 25, Mvu 57; Snp-a 357. See cpds. below-Eight balāni or strong points are 1. of young children (ruṇṇa-balaṃ).
2. of womanhood (kodha˚)
3. of robbers (āvudha˚).
4. of kings (issariya˚)
5. of fools (ujjhatti˚).
6. of wise men (nijjhatti˚)
7. of the deeply learned (paṭisankhāna˚).
8. of samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (khanti˚) AN iv.223 (where used as adj ■ ˚ strong in… ); cp. Snp 212, Snp 623 ■ Five balāni of women are: rūpabalaṃ, bhoga˚, ñāti˚, putta˚, sīla˚ SN iv.246
8. The five-fold force (balaṃ pañca-vidhaṃ of a king Ja v.120, Ja v.121 consists of bāhābalaṃ strength of arms, bhoga˚ of wealth, amacca˚ of counsellors, abhijacca˚ of high birth, paññā˚ the force of wisdom; in the religious sense five balāni or powers are commonly enumd: saddhābalaṃ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚ AN iii.12; DN ii.120; MN ii.12, MN iii.296; SN iii.96, SN iii.153 SN iv.366, SN v.219, SN v.249; Pts ii.56, Pts ii.86, Pts ii.166, Pts ii.174, Pts ii.223; Pts ii.84 Pts ii.133, Pts ii.168 etc. They correspond to the 5 indriyāni and are developed with them. SN v.219, SN v.220; Ne 31; they are cultivated to destroy the five uddhambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni SN v.251. They are freq. referred to in instructions of the Buddha about the constituents of the “Dhamma,” culminating in the eightfold Path, viz cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, samappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā pañcindriyani, p. balāni, sattabojjhangāni, ariyo aṭṭhangiko maggo e.g. SN iii.96; Pts ii.56; Nd i.13 = Nd i.360 = Nd ii.420; Nd ii.s. v. satipaṭṭhāna; and passim. [Cp BSk. catvāra ṛddhipādāḥ pañc’ endriyāni p. balāni sapta bodhyangāni etc. Divy 208.] Two balāni are specially mentioned AN i.52 (paṭisankhānabalaṃ and bhāvanā˚), also DN iii.213, followed here by the other “pair” satibalaṃ and samādhi˚. There are four balāni of the ariyasāvaka, by which he overcomes the five fears (pañca bhayāni q.v.); the four are paññābalaṃ viriya˚, anavajja˚ saṅgāha˚; AN iv.363 sq., as given at AN ii.141, also the foll. 3 groups of cattāri balāni: (1) saddhābalaṃ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚; cp. DN iii.229-(2) sati˚ samādhi, anavajja˚, sangāha˚. (3) paṭisankhāna˚ bhāvanā˚, anavajja˚; sangāha˚ ■ For 4 balāni see also D iii.229 note, and for paṭisankhānabala (power of computation) see Dhs. trsl. 1353. The ten balāni of the Tathāgata consist of his perfect comprehension in ten fields of knowledge AN v.32 sq. MN i.69; Nd ii.466; Mil 105, Mil 285; Vb-a 397 ■ In a similar setting 10 powers are given as consisting in the knowledge of the Paṭiccasamuppāda at SN ii.27, SN ii.28. The balāni of the sāvaka are distinct from those of the Tathāgata: Kv 228 sq ■ There are seven balāni DN iii.253, and seven khīṇāsava-balāni 283 i.e. saddhābalaṃ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, hiri˚; and ottappa˚; The same group is repeated in the Abhidhamma; Dhs 58, Dhs 95, Dhs 102; Dhs-a 126. The Ps. also enumerates seven khīṇāsavabalāni i.35; and sixty-eight balāni ii.168 sq.
-agga front of an army, troops in array DN i.6; Vin iv.107, cp. DN-a i.85. -ānīka (adj.) with strong array Snp 623; Dhp 399 (cp. Dhp-a iv.164). -kāya a body of troops, an army cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 52 note (also in BSk. e.g. Divy 63, Divy 315) AN i.109; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; SN i.58; Ja i.437 (˚ṃ saṃharati to draw up troops); ii.76 iii.319; v.124; vi.224, 451; Dhp-a i.393; PugA 249 -koṭṭhaka fortress, camp Ja i.179; Mvu 25, Mvu 29. -(k)kāra application of force, violence Ja i.476; Ja ii.421; Ja iii.447 instr. ˚ena by force Pv-a 68, Pv-a 113. -gumba a serried troop Ja ii.406. -cakka wheel of power, of sovereignty Dpvs vi.2. -ṭṭha a military official, palace guard royal messenger Mil 234, Mil 241, Mil 264, Mil 314; Mvu 34, Mvu 17 -da strength-giving SN i.32; Snp 297. -dāyin id. AN ii.64 -deva “God of strength” Name of the elder brother of Kaṇha Ja iv.82; Nd i.89, Nd i.92 (Vāsudeva + ); Vism 233 (id). -(p)patta gṙown-strong Dhs-a 118 (v.l. phala˚) -vāhana troops, an army Ja ii.319, Ja iv.170, Ja iv.433 Ja vi.391, Ja vi.458. -vīra a hero in strength Vv 531, cp Vv-a 231. -sata for palāsata, q.v. (cp. J.P.T.S. 1908 108 note).
Vedic bala, most likely to Lat. de-bilis “without strength” (cp. E. debility, P. dubbala), and Gr. βέλτιστος (superl.) = Sk. baliṣṭha the strongest. The Dhātupāṭha (273) defines b. with pāṇane. At Dhs-a 124 bala is understood as “na kampati”
a species of carrion crow Ja v.268; also in cpd. bal’aṅkapāda having crow’s feet, i.e. spreading feet (perhaps for balāka˚?) Ja vi.548 (C. explns by pattharita-pāda read patthārita˚).
cp. *Sk. bala: Halāyudha 5, 23; & P. balākā
(adj.) strong; only in kisa˚; of meagre strength, weakly MN i.226; and dub˚; weak MN i.435 Cp. balika.
fr. bala
(f.) strength, lit. strength-quality MN i.325.
abstr. fr. bala
to live Kp-a 124 (in def. of bālā as “balanti anantī ti bālā”).
fr. bal, as in bala
(nt.) strength, only in cpd. dubbalatta weakness Ja ii.154.
abstr. fr. bala, cp. balatā
(f.) strength, force (also in military sense) Ja ii.369 (ārakkhassa b.); Mil 101 (kusalassa & akusalassa kammassa b.).;
abstr. fr. balavant; cp. Epic Sk. balavattā
(adj.) strong, powerful, sturdy MN i.244 (purisa) SN i.222; Ja ii.406; Dhp-a ii.208; Vv-a 35; Pv-a 94. Comparative balavatara Mil 131; f. ˚a(n)tarī Sdhp 452. In compn balava˚; e.g. ˚gavā sturdy oxen MN i.226; ˚vippaṭisāra deep remorse Pv-a 14, ˚balava very strong Ja ii.406. -balavaṃ as nt. adv. “exceedingly,” in cpd. balav’ ābalavaṃ very (loud and) strong Vin ii.1 (= suṭṭhu balavaṃ C.), and ˚paccūse very early in the morning Vism 93, and ˚paccūsa-samaye id. Ja i.92; Dhp-a i.26.
fr. bala
see palasata.
(f.) a crane Thag 307; Ja ii.363; Ja iii.226; Mil 128 (˚ānaṃ megha-saddena gabbhâvakkanti hoti); Vism 126 (in simile, megha-mukhe b. viya); DN-a i.91 (v.l. baka).
cp. Vedic balākā, perhaps to Lat. fulica, Gr. φαλαρίς a water fowl, Ohg. pelicha = Ger. belche
1. religious offering, oblation DN ii.74 (dhammika); AN iv.17, AN iv.19; Snp 223; Mvu 36, Mvu 88 (particularly to subordinate divinities, cp. Mvu. trsln 263) Dhp-a ii.14 (v.l. ˚kamma) ■ pañca˚; the fivefold offering i.e. ñāti˚, atithi˚, pubbapeta˚, rāja˚, devatā˚, offering to kinsfolk, guests, the departed, the king, the gods AN ii.68; AN iii.45.
2. tax, revenue (cp. Zimmer Altind. Leben 166 & Fick,; Sociale Gliederung 75; DN i.135, DN i.142; Ja i.199 (daṇḍa˚ fines & taxes), 339; Dhp-a i.251 (daṇḍa˚).
3. Np. of an Asura DN ii.259.
-kamma offering of food to bhūtas, devas & others Ja i.169, Ja i.260; Ja ii.149, Ja ii.215; Ja iv.246 (offering to tutelary genii of a city. In this passage the sacrifice of a human being is recommended); v.99, 473; Snp-a 138; Mhbv 28 -karaṇa oblation, offering of food Pv-a 81; Vv-a 8 (˚pīṭha, reading doubtful, v.l. valli˚). -kāraka offering oblations Ja i.384. -˚ṅkatā one who offers (the five oblations AN ii.68. -paṭiggāhaka receiving offerings worthy of oblations Ja ii.17 (yakkha; interpreted by Fick, Sociale Gliederung 79 as “tax-collector,” hardly justified); f. ˚ikā AN iii.77 (devatā), 260 (id.), cp. BSk balipratigrāhikā devatā Divy 1. -pīḷita crushed with taxes Ja v.98. -puṭṭha a crow (cp. Sk. balipuṣṭa “fed by oblations”) Abhp 638. -vadda (cp. Sk. balivarda after the Pali?) an ox, esp. an ox yoked to the plough or used in ploughing (on similes with b. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 349) SN i.115, SN i.170; SN iv.163 sq., 282 sq.; AN ii.108 sq. Snp p.13 (cp. Snp-a 137); Dhp 152 = Thag 1025; Ja i.57 Ja v.104 (Sāliyo b. phālena pahaṭo); Vism 284 (in simile of their escape from the ploughman); Dhp-a i.24 (dhuraṃ vahanto balivaddassa, v.l. balibaddassa); Vv-a 258 (vv.ll. ˚baddha & ˚bandha). The spelling; balibadda occurs at Vin iv.312. -sādhaka tax collector, tax gatherer Ja iv.366; Ja v.103 sq. -haraṇa taking oblations AN v.79 (˚vanasaṇḍa).
cp. Vedic bali; regarding etym. Grassmann connects it with bhṛ;
(adj.) strong; only in der. balikataraṃ (compar.) adv. in a stronger degree, more intensely more Mil 84; & dubbalika weak Thag-a 211. Cp balaka.
fr. bala
(adj.) strong Thag 12 (paññā˚); Vv 647; Dhp 280; Ja iii.484; Ja vi.147. Balisa & Balisa;
fr. bala
(m. & nt.) a fish-hook SN ii.226 = SN iv.158 (āmisa-gataṃ b.); Nd ii.374 (kāma˚ v.l. palisa); Ja i.482 sq.; Ja iii.283; Ja iv.195; Ja v.273 sq. 389; vi.416; Mil 412; Snp-a 114 (in expln of gaḷa Snp 61); Thag-a 280, Thag-a 292; Vb-a 196 (in comparison); Sdhp 610. On use in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 115.
-maṃsikā (f.) “flesh-hooking,” a kind of torture MN i.87; MN iii.164; AN i.47; AN ii.122; Nd i.154; Nd ii.604; Mil 197. -yaṭṭhi angling rod Dhp-a iii.397.
cp. Sk. baḍiśa
= bala˚ in combn with bhū & kṛ;, see bala.
to have strength, to grow strong, to gain power, to overpower Snp 770 (= sahati parisahati abhibhavati Nd i.12, cp. 361); Ja iv.84 (vv.ll. khalī˚ & paliyy˚; C expls by avattharati) = Pv ii.61 (= balavanto honti vaḍḍhanti abhibhavanti Pv-a 94); Ja vi.224 (3rd pl balīyare; C. abhibhavati, kuppati, of the border provinces); Ne 6 (vv.ll. bali˚, pali˚; C. abhibhavati).
Denom. fr. bala, cp. BSk. balīyati Mvu i.275
(nt.) belonging to strength, only in cpd. dub˚; weakness MN i.364; Pp 66; also spelt dubballa MN i.13 ■ abl. dubbalyā as adv. groundlessly without strong evidence Vin iv.241 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1886 129).
der. fr. bala
foolishness, stupidity Dhp 63 (v.l. bālya); Ja iii.278 (C. bālya); Dhp-a ii.30.
fr. bāla, cp. P. & Sk. bālya
(f.) a mare, only in cpd. ˚mukha the mare’s mouth, i.e. an entrance to Niraya (cp. Vedic vaḍavâgni & vaḍavāmukha) Thag 1104 (trsl. “abyss-discharged mouth,” cp. Brethren, p. 418).
cp. Vedic vaḍavā
a species of birds Ja vi.539.
etym.?
to pull, see ab˚, ub˚, nib˚, & cp. udabbahe, pavāḷha.;
doublet of bṛh2 ] to strengthen, increase, see brūhana (upa˚); otherwise only in pp. bāḷha (q.v.) The Dhtp (344, cp. Dhtm 506) explns “baha braha brūha: vuddhiyaṃ.”
only in Caus. formations: to keep outside, lit. to make stay outside or away. See bāhā 2; bāheti, paribāhati.
a Pali root, to be postulated as der. fr. bahi in sense of “to keep out”
(adj.) dense, thick Vin ii.112; Ja i.467 (˚palāpa-tumba a measure thickly filled with chaff); ii.91; Mil 282; Vism 257 (˚pūva, where Kp-a 56 omits bahala), 263 (opp. tanuka) Kp-a 62 (˚kuthita-lākhā thickly boiled, where in id. p Vism 261 has accha-lākhā, i.e. clear); Dhp-a iv.68; Vv-a 162 (= aḷāra) ■ subahala very thick Mil 258 (rajojalla).
cp. Class. Sk. bahala & Ved. bahula
(nt.) thickness, swollen condition, swelling Ja i.147.
abstr. fr. above
(adv.) outside 1. (adv.) Ja i.361 (˚dvāre-gāma a village outside the city gates); Pv i.102; Dhp-a iii.118; Pv-a 24, Pv-a 61. 2. (prep.) with acc. (direction to) Ja i.298 (˚gāmaṃ) with loc. (place where) ˚dvāra-koṭṭhake outside the gate MN ii.92; AN iii.31; ˚nagare outside the city Ja ii.2; Pv-a 39. 47; ˚vihāre outside the monastery Dhp-a i.315.
-gata gone outside (i.e. into worldly affairs, or according to Vv-a 213 engaged with the bahiddh’ ārammaṇāni) Vv 5015 (abahiggata-mānasa with his mind not gone outside himself). -nikkhamana going outside of (abl.), leaving Vism 500 (mātukucchito bahinikkhamanaṃ mūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ).
cp. Vedic bahis & bahir; the s(ḥ) is restored in doubling of cons. in compn like bahig-gata Vv 5015, in bahiddhā and in lengthening of i as bahī Ja v.65
(adv.) outside (adv. & prep.) DN i.16; DN ii.110; SN i.169; SN iii.47, SN iii.103 SN iv.205; SN v.157; Vin iii.113 (˚rūpa opp. ajjhatta-rūpa Snp 203; Vb-a 260 (kāye); Dhp-a i.211 (c. gen); iii.378 (sāsanato b.); Dhs-a 189 ■ ajjhatta˚; inside & outside personal-external see ajjhatta ■ The; bahiddh’ ārammaṇāni (objects of thought concerning that which is external) are the outward sense-objects in the same meaning as bāhirāni āyatanāni are distinguished fr ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (see āyatana 3 and ārammaṇa 3). They are discussed at Vism 430 sq.; cp. Dhs 1049-The phrase “ito bahiddhā” refers to those outside the teaching of the Buddha (“outside this our doctrine”), e.g. at DN i.157; SN i.133; AN iv.25; Dhs 1005.
fr. bahi, cp. Vedic bahirdhā, formation in ˚dhā, like ekadhā, sattadhā etc. of numerals
(adj.) [Vedic bahu, doubtful whether to Gr. παξύς; fr. bṛh2 to strengthen, cp. upabrūhana, paribbūḷha much, many, large, abundant; plenty; in compn also very, greatly (˚-) instr. sg. bahunā Dhp 166; nom. pl bahavo Vin iii.90; Dhp 307, & bahū Dhp 53; Ja iv.366 Ja v.40; Ja vi.472; Bv 2, Bv 47; Pv iv.14; Mvu 35, Mvu 98; Pv-a 67; nt. pl. bahūni Snp 665, Snp 885; gen. dat. bahunnaṃ SN i.196; Snp 503, Snp 957, & bahūnaṃ Ja v.446; Kv 528 (where id. p. MN i.447 reads bahunnaṃ); instr. bahūhi Pv-a 241; loc. bahūsu Pv-a 58 ■ nt. nom. bahu Dhp 258; bahuṃ Pv-a 166, & bahud in compn bahud-eva (d may be euphonic) Ja i.170; Bv 20, Bv 32. As nt. n. bahuṃ a large quantity AN ii.183 (opp. appaṃ); abl. bahumhā Ja v.387. As adv. bahu so much Pv ii.1311 ■ Compar bahutara greater, more, in greater number AN i.36 (pl bahutarā, opp. appakā); ii.183; SN v.457, SN v.466; Ja ii.293 Ja vi.472; Pv ii.117; Mil 84; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 76 ■ In composition with words beginning with a vowel (in sandhi bahu as a rule appears as bavh˚; (for bahv˚, see Geiger P.Gr. § 49, 1), but the hiatus form bahu is also found as in bahu-itthiyo Ja i.398 (besides bahutthika); bahuamaccā Ja i.125; bahu-āyāsa (see below). Besides we have the contracted form bahū as in bahûpakāra, etc.).
-ābādha (bavh˚) great suffering or illness, adj. full of sickness, ailing much MN ii.94; AN i.107; AN ii.75, AN ii.85; Mil 65; Sdhp 89 (cp. 77). -āyāsa (bahu˚) great trouble Thig 343 ■ (i)tthika (bahutthika) having many women Vin ii.256; SN ii.264. -ūdaka containing much water Ja iii.430 (f. bahūdikā & bahodikā).; -ūpakāra of great service, very helpful, very useful SN iv.295; SN v.32; MN iii.253; Iti 9; Vin v.191; Ja i.121; Pv iv.156; Pv-a 114. -odaka (bavh˚) = ˚ûdaka Thag 390. -kata (a. benevolent, doing service Vin iv.57, Vin iv.212. (b) much moved or impressed by (instr.), paying much attention to Vin i.247. -karaṇīya having much to do, busy DN ii.76; Vin i.71; SN ii.215; AN iii.116; DN-a i.237. -kāra (a) favour Dāvs iv.39 (b) doing much, of great service very helpful MN i.43, MN i.170; AN i.123, AN i.132; AN ii.126; SN v.67; Pv ii.1219; Ja iv.422; Mil 264. -kāratta service, usefulness Kp-a 91. -kicca having many duties, very busy Vin i.71; DN i.106; DN ii.76; SN ii.215; AN iii.116; DN-a i.237 -khāra a kind of alkali (product of vegetable ash Ja vi.454. -jañña see bāhu˚ ■ jana a mass of people a great multitude, a crowd, a great many people DN i.4; Iti 78; Ja vi.358; Pp 30, Pp 57; Pv ii.77; Pv-a 30. At some passages interpreted by Bdhgh as “the unconverted the masses,” e.g. DN i.47, expld at DN-a i.143 by “assutavā andha-bāla puthujjana”; Dhp 320 (bahujjana), expld at Dhp-a iv.3 by “lokiya-mahājana. -jāgara very watchful Dhp 29 (= mahante sativepulle jāgariye ṭhita Dhp-a i.262); Snp 972 (cp. Nd i.501). -jāta growing much, abundant Ja vi.536. -ṭhāna (-cintin) of far-reaching knowledge, whose thoughts embrace many subjects Ja iii.306; Ja iv.467; Ja v.176. -dhana with many riches Pv-a 97. -patta having obtained much, loaded with gifts Vin iv.243. -pada many-footed, a certain order of creatures, such as centipedes, etc. Vin ii.110 Vin iii.52; AN ii.34; Iti 87. -(p)phala rich in fruit Snp 1134 cp. Nd ii.456. -(b)bīhi t.t.g., name of cpds. with adj sense, indicating possession. -bhaṇḍa having an abundance of goods, well-to-do Vin iii.138; Kp-a 241. -bhāṇika = ˚bhāṇin Pv-a 283. -bhāṇitā garrulousness Pv-a 283. -bhāṇin garrulous AN iii.254, AN iii.257; Dhp 227. -bhāva largeness, richness, abundance Dhp-a ii.175. -bherava very terrible AN ii.55. -maccha rich in fish Ja iii.430 -mata much esteemed, venerable Cp vi.7; Pv-a 117 -manta very tricky Dhp-a ii.4 (v.l. māya). -māna respect, esteem, veneration Ja i.90; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 155, Pv-a 274 -māya full of deceit, full of tricks Ja v.357 (cp. ˚manta) -vacana (tt.g.) the plural number Ja iv.173; Pv-a 163 -vāraka the tree Cordia myxa Abhp 558. -vighāta fraught with great pain Thig 450. -vidha various multiform Cp xv.7; Pgdp 37. -sacca see bāhu˚-(s)suta having great knowledge, very learned, well-taught DN i.93, DN i.137; DN iii.252, DN iii.282; Ja i.199; Ja iv.244; AN i.24; AN ii.22, AN ii.147, AN ii.170, AN ii.178; AN iii.114; Snp 58 (see Nd ii.457); Iti 60, Iti 80; Thag 1026; Dhp 208; Vin ii.95; Ja i.93; Mil 19; Thag-a 274, Thag-a 281; Snp-a 109, Snp-a 110. -(s)sutaka of great knowledge (ironical) DN i.107 (see Dial. i.132).
(adj.) great, much, many, abundant J. iii.368 (b. jano most people, the majority of p.) v.388; iv.536; Mvu 36, Mvu 49; Pv-a 25 (gloss for pahūta Pv i.52); Dhp-a ii.175 ■ nt. bahukaṃ plenty, abundance AN ii.7 = Pp 63; Vism 403 (opp. thokaṃ). Compar bahukataraṃ more Ja ii.88 (v.l. bahutaraṃ).
fr. bahu
(adv.) many times Mil 215.
bahu + khattuṃ, like sattakkhattuṃ, ti˚ etc.
(nt.) multiplicity, manifoldedness Vb-a 320 (cetanā˚).
cp. Sk. bahutvaṃ
(adv.) in many ways or forms SN v.264 (hoti he becomes many), 288; MN i.34; Snp 966; Pv iv.152 (= bahūhi pakārehi Pv-a 241) Mvu 31, Mvu 73; Dāvs v.68.
fr. bahu, cp. Vedic bahudhā
(adj.) much, abundant, nt. abundance (˚-); full of, rich in, fig. given to, intent on, devoted to DN ii.73; SN i.199, SN i.202; AN iii.86 (pariyatti˚), 432 (āloka˚); iv.35; Iti 27, Iti 30; Ja iv.5 (vināsa˚), 22; Pv-a 80 (chārik’ angāra˚) ■ sayana˚ as much as “particular in one’s choice of resting place Mil 365 nt. bahulaṃ (-˚) in the fullness of, full of SN iii.40 (nibbidā˚). The compn form with karoti (kamma) is bahulī˚ (q.v.). Cp.; bāhulla.
-ājīva living in abundance (opp. lūkh’ ājīvin) DN iii.44, DN iii.47.
usually -˚, as ˚-only in cpd. ˚ājīva
(nt.) Name of a lucky die Ja vi.281.
= preceding
in compn with kar = bahula (adj.) + kar, lit. “to make much of,” i.e. to practise, in foll. words: ˚kata (pp. practised (frequently), usually combd with bhāvita SN ii.264; SN iv.200, SN iv.322; SN v.259; AN i.6; Vism 267 (= punappunaṃ kata); ˚katatta (nt.) practice DN ii.214; ˚kamma continuous practice, an act often repeated MN i.301; Dhs-a 406 (= punappuna-karaṇa); ˚karoti to take up seriously, to practise, devote oneself to (acc.) MN i.454; AN i.275; AN iii.79; SN iv.322; Dhp-a iii.356 (sevati + ) Vb-a 291; ˚kāra zealous exercise, practice MN iii.25 sq (tab-bahulī˚ to this end).
rare in Ep. Sk.; when found, diff. in meaning
(adv.) repeatedly Pv-a 107.
cp. Sk. bahuśaḥ
(adj.) abundant, much Thig 406 (˚ratana, so read for bahuta˚), 435 (for bahutadhana); Ja iii.425 (bahūtam ajjaṃ “plenty of food”; ajja = Sk. ādya, with Kern, Toev. s. v. bahūta for T. bahūtamajjā, which introd. story takes as bahūtaṃ = balaṃ ajja, with ajjā metri causâ. C. expls however as mataka-bhattaṃ); vi.173 (˚tagarā mahī); Pv ii.75 (v.l. for pahūta, cp. pahūtika).
for pahūta = Sk. prabhūta
(adv.) in abundance Ja iii.484 (where C. expln with bahūtaso is faulty and should perhaps be read pahūtaso) vi.538.
der. fr. bahūta, cp. Sk. prabhūtaśaḥ
(f.) the plant Vernonia anthelminthica Abhp 586.
cp. *Sk. bākucī
an arrow Mbhv 19.
cp. Vedic bāṇa
lit. pressing (together), oppression, hindrance, annoyance Ja vi.224. Cp. sam˚.
fr. bādh
(adj.) oppressing, harassing, injurious Vism 496 (dukkhā aññaṃ na ˚ṃ); Vv-a 214; Pv-a 175.
fr. bādh
(nt.) the fact of being oppressive or injurious Vism 496.
abstr. fr. bādhaka
to press, weigh on; oppress, hinder afflict, harm DN ii.19; Ja i.211; Ja iv.124; Vism 400; Dhp-a i.24. grd. bādhitabba Thag-a 65; Pass. bādhiyati to be afflicted, to become sore, to suffer Snp-a 481; Thag-a 282; ppr. bādhiyamāna Pv-a 33 (so read for ˚ayamāna) 69 ■ Caus. bādheti; pp. bādhita (q.v.). Cp. vi˚.
Vedic bādhate, bādh; Idg. *bheidh to force, cp. Goth. baidjan, Ohg. beitten. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fido. In Pali there seems to have taken place a confusion of roots bādh and bandh, see bādheti & other derivations
(nt.) 1. snaring, catching (of animals etc.) SN v.148; Ja i.211.
2. hindrance DN-a i.132. 3. affliction, injury, hurting Vism 495; Pv-a 116.
fr. bādh
oppressed, pressed hard, harassed Dhp 342 (but taken by C. as “trapped, snared,” baddha Dhp-a iv.49); Thag-a 65.
pp. of bādhati
(adj.) (-˚) (lit. oppressing), snaring; as n. a trainer Vin ii.26 (Ariṭṭha gaddha˚-pubba); iv.218 (id.).
fr. bādh
1. to oppress, afflict, hurt, injure Ja vi.224; Pv-a 198 (bādheyya = heṭhayeyya). grd. bādhanīya Pv-a 175. Cp. paribādheti in same sense.
2. to bind, catch, snare Thag 454; Thag 2, Thag 299; Ja ii.51 (aor bādhayiṃsu); iv.342; v.295, 445 (pot. bādhaye bādheyya C. on p. 447; vv.ll. baddh˚, bandh˚). grd bādhetabba SN iv.298.
Caus. of bādhati; the confusion with bandhati is even more pronounced in the Caus. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. we find bādhayati for bandhayati in Sk. as well
(adj.) of Benares, coming fr. B. (a kind of muslin) DN ii.110; DN iii.260.
fr. Bārāṇasī
(adj.) 1. ignorant (often with ref. to ignorance in a moral sense, of the common people, the puthujjana) foolish (as contrasted with paṇḍita cp. the Bālapaṇḍita-sutta MN iii.163 sq.; DN ii.305 sq.; Vism 499 and contrasts at Snp 578; Dhp 63, Dhp 64; Pv iv.332; Dhs 1300), lacking in reason, devoid of the power to think & act right. In the latter sense sometimes coupled with; andha (spiritually blind), as andhabāla stupid ignorant, mentally dull, e.g. at Dhp-a i.143; Dhp-a ii.89; Pv-a 254 ■ A fanciful etym. of b. at Kp-a 124 is “balanti ananti ti bālā.” Other refs.: DN i.59, DN i.108; SN i.23; AN i.59, AN i.68, AN i.84; AN ii.51, AN ii.180; Snp 199, Snp 259, Snp 318, Snp 578, Snp 879; Iti 68; Dhp 28, Dhp 60 sq., 71 sq., 206 sq., 330; Ja i.124 (lola greedy-foolish); v.366 (bālo āmaka-pakkaṃ va); Vv 835; Pv i.82; iv.129; Pp 33; Nd i.163, Nd i.286 sq., 290; Snp-a 509 (= aviddasu); Pv-a 193. Compar. bālatara Ja iii.278, Ja iii.279; Vv-a 326.
2. young, new; newly risen (of the sun): ˚ātāpa the morning sun DN-a i.287; Dhp-a i.164; Mhbv 25; ˚vasanta “early spring” (= Citramāsa), Name of the first one of the 4 summer months (gimha-māsā) Kp-a 192; -suriya the newly risen sun Ja v.284; Pv-a 137, Pv-a 211.
3. a child; in wider application meaning a youth under 16 years of age (cp. Abhp 251) DN-a i.134. Cp. bālaka.
-nakkhatta Name of a certain “feast of fools,” i.e. carnival Dhp-a i.256. -saṅgatacārin one who keeps company with a fool Dhp 207.
cp. Sk. bāla (rarely Vedic, more freq. in Ep. & Class. Sk.); its orig. meaning is “young, unable to speak,” cp. Lat. infans, hence “like a child, childish infantile”
the hair of the head Pv-a 285 (˚koṭimatta not even one tip of the hair; gloss BB vālagga˚).
for vāla
1. boy, child, youth SN i.176; Thag-a 146 (Ap. v.44: spelt ˚akka); Sdhp 351 ■ f. bālikā young girl Thag-a 54 (Ap. v.1).
2. fool Dhs-a 51 (˚rata fond of fools).
fr. bāla
(adj.) having fools, consisting of fools; f. ˚inī MN i.373 (parisā).
fr. bālaka
(f.) foolishness Ja i.101, Ja i.223.
abstr. to bāla
a fisherman SN ii.226; SN iv.158; Ja i.482; Ja iii.52 (cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 194); Mil 364 Mil 412; Dhp-a iii.397.
fr. balisa
(nt.) 1. childhood, youth SN iii.1.
2. ignorance, folly Dhp 63; Ja ii.220 (= bāla-bhāva); iii.278 (balya); Pv-a 40. Also used as adj. in compar. bālyatara more foolish, extremely foolish Vv 836 sq. = Dhp-a i.30 (= bālatara, atisayena bāla Vv-a 326).
3. weakness (?) Ja vi.295 (balya, but C. bālya = dubbala-bhāva).
fr. bāla
(adj.) strong; only as adv. ˚ṃ and ˚-, viz.
1. bāḷhaṃ strongly, very much, excessively, too much, to satiety Ja ii.293 Ja vi.291 (i.e. too often, C. punappunaṃ); Mil 407; Pv-a 274. Comparative bāḷhataraṃ in a higher degree even more, too much Vin ii.270, Vin ii.276; Mil 125.
2 (˚-) in bāḷha-gilāna very ill, grievously sick DN i.72; AN ii.144; SN v.303; DN-a i.212.
Vedic bāḍha, orig. pp. of bahati2
(adj.), only in su˚; having excess of good things, very prosperous Ja v.214 (C. expls by suṭṭhu aḍḍha).
fr. bāḷha
(num.) twenty-two Kv 218; Mil 419; Dhs-a 2.
bā = dvā, + vīsati
see bāheti.
(f.) 1. the arm AN ii.67 = AN iii.45 (˚bala); Vin ii.105; Ja iii.62; Ja v.215 (˚mudu). pacchā-bāhaṃ arm(s) behind (his back) DN i.245 (gāḷhabandhanaṃ baddha). bāhaṃ pasāreti to stretch out the arm DN i.222 = MN i.252≈. bāhāyaṃ gahetvā taking (him or her) by the arm DN i.221 sq.; MN i.365 (nānā-bāhāsu g.); Pv-a 148. bāhā paggayha reaching or stretching out one’s arms (as sign of supplication) DN ii.139; Ja v.267; Pv-a 92 and passim.
2. not quite certain whether “post” of a door or a “screen” (from bahati3) the former more likely. Only-˚ in ālambana˚; post to hold on to, a balustrade Vin ii.120, Vin ii.152; dvāra˚; doorpost DN ii.190; Pv i.51. Cp. bāhitikā.
-aṭṭhi (bāh˚) arm-bone Kp-a 50. -paramparāya arm in arm Vin iii.126.
a specific Pali doublet of bāhu, q.v. It is on the whole restricted to certain phrases, but occurs side by side of bāhu in others, like pacchā-bāhaṃ & ˚bāhuṃ bāhaṃ & bāhuṃ pasāreti
(adj.) foreign in ˚raṭṭha-vāsin living in a foreign country Ja iii.432 (or is it N.? Cp. Ja vii. p. 94).
= bāhiya
(nt.) keeping out, exclusion Nd ii.464 (in expln of word brāhmaṇa).
abstr. fr. bāhita
(f.) a mantle, wrapper (lit. “that which keeps out,” i.e. the cold or wind MN ii.116, MN ii.117.
fr. bāhita, pp. of bāheti1
to be kept out (?) MN i.328. The reading seems to be corrupt; meaning is very doubtful; Neumann trsls “musst (mir) weichen.”
unclear; grd. of bāheti1, but formed fr. pp.?
(adj.) foreign Ja i.421; Ja iii.432.
fr. bahi, cp. bāhira and Vedic bāhya
(adj.) 1. external, outside (opp. abbhantara inside) outer, foreign DN ii.75; AN iv.16; Dhp 394 (fig. in meaning of 2); Ja i.125 (antara˚ inside & outside); 337 (out of office, out of favour, of ministers); vi.384 (bāhiraṃ karoti to turn out, turn inside out); Pv iv.11 (nagarassa b.); Mil 281 (˚abbhantara dhana); Vv-a 68 (˚kittibhāva fact of becoming known outside) ■ santara˚ (adj.) [ = sa-antara] including the inward & outward parts DN i.74; AN iii.25; Thag 172; Ja i.125.
2. external to the individual, objective (opp. ajjhattika subjective MN iii.274 (cha āyatanā); Ja iv.402 (˚vatthuṃ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṃ gaṇhāti); Dhs 674 (cp. trsl. p. 207) Vb 13; Mil 215; Vism 450.
3. heretical, outsider in religious sense, non-Buddhist, freq. applied to the Brahmanic religion & their practice (samaya) Kv 251 (+ puthujjana-pakkhe ṭhita); Dhp-a iii.378 (= mana i.e. Bhagavato sāsanato bahiddhā) ■ Cases as adv. bāhirato from outside, from a foreign country Ja i.121 bāhire outside (the Buddhist order) Dhp 254.
-assāda finding his enjoyment in outward things AN i.280 (Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests “inclined towards heretic views”). -āsa one whose wishes are directed outwards, whose desires are turned to things external Thag 634. -kathā non-religious discourse, profane story Mil 24 (applied to the introductory chapter, thus “outside story” may be translated). -tittha doctrine of outsiders Ja iii.473. -dāna gift of externals, gift of property as opposed to gift of the person Ja iv.401 Ja vi.486; Dāvs iii.33. -pabbajjā the ascetic life outside the community of the Buddha; Brahmanic saintly life (thus equal to isi-pabbajjā. cp. bāhiraka˚). Ja iii.352 Ja iv.305. -bhaṇḍa property, material things, objects Ja iv.401. -mantā ritualistic texts (or charms) of religions other than the Buddha’s Ja iii.27. -rakkhā protection of external means SN i.73. -lomi with the fleece outside (of a rug) Vin ii.108. -samaya doctrine of the outsiders, i.e. Brahmins Dhp-a iii.392.
fr. bahi, as Sk. bāhya fr. bahis, cp. also bāhiya
(adj.) outsider, non-religious, non-Buddhist, heretic profane SN ii.267; AN i.73; AN iii.107; Kv 172 (isayo) Vv-a 67 (itthi).
-kathā unreligious discussion, profane story Kp-a 118 (cp. bāhirakathā). -tapa = foll. Ja i.390. -pabbajjā the ascetic life as led by disciples of other teachers than the Buddha, esp. Brahmanic (cp. bāhira˚ and BSk. bāhirako mārgaḥ, e.g. Mvu i.284; Mvu ii.210; Mvu ii.223) Ja iii.364; Dhp-a i.311.
= bāhira, but specialised in meaning bāhira 3
(nt.) being outside (of the individual), externality Vism 450.
abstr. fr. bāhira
(adj.) outer, external, outside Vin iii.149 (b. māna external measure; opp. abbhantarima); Ja v.38 (opp. abbhantarima).
fr. bāhira, compar ■ adversative formation
the arm Ja iii.271 (bāhumā bāhuṃ pīḷentā shoulder to shoulder); Vism 192. -˚ṃ pasāreti to stretch out the arm (cp. bāhaṃ) Pv-a 112 pacchā-bāhuṃ (cp. bāhaṃ) Pv-a 4 (gāḷha-bandhanaṃ bandhāpetvā).
-(p)pacālakaṃ (adv.) after the manner of one who swings his arms about Vin ii.213 (see expln at Vin iv.188).
cp. Vedic bāhu, prob. to bahati2; cp. Gr. π ̈ηξυς in same meaning, Ohg. buoc. It seems that bāhu is more frequent in later literature, whereas the by-form bāhā belongs to the older period
(adj.) belonging to the mass of people, property of many people or of the masses DN ii.106, DN ii.219; SN ii.107 SN v.262; Ja i.29 (v.212). Note. The expression occurs only in stock phrase iddha phīta vitthārika bāhujañña.
fr. bahu + jana, cp. sāmañña fr. samaṇa
(nt.) abundance Sdhp 77.
fr. bahula, the Sk. form for P. bāhulla
(nt.) 1. abundance, superfluity, great quantity MN i.171; AN iv.87 (˚kathā) AN iv.87; Pts i.197; Ja i.81.
2. luxurious living, swaggering, puffed up frame of mind Vin i.9, Vin i.59, Vin i.209; Vin ii.197; Vin iii.251 ■ See also bāhulya & bāhullika;.
fr. bahula
(adj.) living in abundance, swaggering, luxurious, spendthrift Vin i.9 (+ padhāna-vibbhanto, as also Ja i.68, with which Kern, Toev. s. v compares Mvu ii.241 & iii.329); ii.197; iii.250; MN i.14; MN iii.6; AN i.71; AN iii.108, AN iii.179 sq.; Ja i.68; Ja iii.363. The reading is often bāhulika.
fr. bāhulla
(nt.) great learning, profound knowledge MN i.445; AN i.38 (so read for bahu˚); ii.218; Vin iii.10; Dhp 271; Vv 639.
fr. bahu + sacca, which latter corresponds to a Sk. śrautya fr. śru, thus b. is the abstract to bahussuta See on expln of word Kern, Toev. s. v.
to keep away, to keep outside, to ward off; only with ref. to pāpa (pāpaka) to keep away (from) sin SN i.141 (bāhetvā pāpāni); Snp 519 = Nd ii.464a (bāhetvā pāpakāni); Dhp 267; a popular etymology of brāhmaṇa (pāpaṃ bahenti) DN iii.94 (bāhitvā, better bāhetvā, expld by panuditvā Dhp-a iii.393; v.l. K vāh˚) ■ pp. bāhita (q.v.). See also nib˚, pari˚.
Caus. of bahati3 or Denom. fr. bahi
to carry, see sam˚; (sambāhana, meaning rubbing, stroking). Whether atibāheti belongs here, is doubtful.
Caus. of bahati4, cp. Sk. vāhayati
(adj. n.) 1. a kind of pulse, split pea Ja iv.353 (= mugga) in ˚sūpa haricot soup Ja iv.352.
2. a split bamboo cane, in ˚mañcaka a bedstead made of laths of split bamboo, the use of which is given as one of the characteristic features of the ascetic life Vin ii.149; Ja i.9; Dhp-a i.135.
cp. Sk. vidala in same meaning, fr. vi + dal
1. a drop, usually a drop of water Snp 392, Snp 812 (uda˚); Ja i.100; Vism 531 (madhu˚) Thag-a 281; Pv-a 98 (udaka˚).
2. a spot (cp. SBE xvii.155) Vism 222 (˚vicitvā gāvī a spotted cow). 3. (as adj.) one of the eight qualities of perfect sound (brahma-ssara, with ref. to the voice of Brahmā and of Buddha, cp. aṭṭhanga), which are given at DN ii.211 DN ii.227 as (saro hoti) vissaṭṭho ca viññeyyo ca mañjū ca savanīyo ca bindu [vv.ll. bandu & bhindu] ca avisārī ca gambhīro ca ninnādī ca. We may translate by “full, close, compact” (Dial. ii.245 “continuous”) See also below ˚ssara.
-tthanī having breasts round as a bubble Ja v.215 -bindu(ṃ) drop by drop DN-a i.218. -matī (f.) Np. of a courtesan of Pāṭaliputta in the time of Asoka Mil 121 sq. -matta measuring a drop, even a drop Pv-a 100, Pv-a 104 (eka ˚ṃ). -sāra Np. of king of India, father of Asoka Dpvs v.101; vi.15; Mvu v.18, Mvu v.19. -ssara a full rounded voice Snp 350 (referred by Snp-a to a Mahāpurisa); adj. having a full voice (see above bindu 3; Pv iii.34 (T. vindu˚, BB bindu˚; Pv-a explns by avissaṭṭha-ssara sampiṇḍita-ssara, i.e. “continuous”) Ja ii.439 (= bindhunā avisaṭena piṇḍitena sarena samannāgata C.); v.204, 299 (= sampiṇḍita-ghana-ssara) vi.518 = 581 (= piṇḍita-ssara C.).
cp. Vedic bindu & vindu
(nt.) 1. shape, image (= paṭimā Vv-a 168) SN i.134 (trsl. “puppet”); v.217 (vimba) Ja v.452. In phrase cittakataṃ bimbaṃ it refers to the human body (“the tricked-out puppet-shape” Brethren 303): MN ii.64 = Thag 769 = Dhp 147 = Vv-a 47, cp Dhp-a iii.109 (= attabhāva).
2. the red fruit of Momordica monadelpha, a species of Amaranth [cp. Sk bimba & bimbī, a kind of gourd] Ja iii.478; Ja vi.457, Ja vi.591; Vv 366 (kañcana˚-vaṇṇa of the colour of the golden Bimba Dhp. at Vv-a 168 takes it as bimba1 = paṭimā Dhp-a i.387 (˚phala, with ref. to red lips). bimboṭṭha (f. ˚ī) (having) red lips Ja iii.477; Ja vi.590 (nigrodhapatta-bimb’ oṭṭhī) Thag-a 133 (Ap. v.57). The Sk. vimbī according to Halāyudha 2, 48 is equal to oṣṭhī, a plant (Bryonia grandis?).
-oṭṭhi see above 2. -ohana [second part either *ūhana vāhana “carrying,” or contracted form of odahana fr. ava + dhā, i.e. *odhana *ohana “putting down,” or still more likely for ūhana as seen in ūhanati2 2 fr. ud + hṛ; raising, lifting up] a pillow Vin i.47 (bhisi˚); ii.76, 150, 208, 200, 218; iii.90, 119 (bhisi˚) iv.279; SN ii.268; AN iii.240; Vb-a 365; Vism 79. See also bhisi1. -jāla [BR. bimbajā?] the Bimba tree Momordica monadelpha (lit. net of b. fruits) Ja i.39 Ja vi.497 (cp. p. 498 ratt’ ankura-rukkhaṃ probably with v.l. to be read ratta-kuravaka˚, see bimbi-jāla) Bv xvi.19.
cp. Class. Sk. bimba
= bimba 2; Vv-a 168.
(or bimbī ) gold, of golden colour DN-a i.280 = Snp-a 448 (in Bdhgh’s fanciful etym of king Bimbisāra, viz. bimbī ti suvaṇṇaṃ, sārasuvaṇṇa-sadisa-vaṇṇatāya B.).
-jāla the red amaranth tree, the Bodhi tree of the former Buddha Dhammadassin Ja i.39; Ja v.155. At Ja vi.497, Ja vi.498 the form is bimbajāla. The C. expln gives ratta-kuravaka as a synonym.
= Sk. bimbī, see bimba
(nt.) a hole, den, cave AN ii.33 = SN iii.85; Thag 189 Nd i.362; Ja i.480; Ja ii.53; Ja vi.574 (= guhā C.); Mil 151 Sdhp 23 ■ kaṇṇa˚; orifice of the ear Vism 195; vammīka˚; ant’s nest Ja iv.30; sota˚; = kaṇṇa˚ Dhs-a 310.
-āsaya (adj.) living in holes, a cave-dweller, one of the four classes of animals (bil˚, dak˚, van˚, rukkh˚ SN iii.85 = AN ii.33; Nd i.362; Bv ii.97; Ja i.18.
Vedic bila, perhaps fr. bhid to break, cp. K.Z. 12, 123. Thus already expld by Dhtp 489: bila bhedane
(nt.) a part, bit Ja vi.153 (˚sataṃ 100 pieces); abl. bilaso (adv.) bit by bit MN i.58 = MN iii.91 (v.l. vilaso). At Ja v.90 in cpd. migābilaṃ (maṃsaṃ it is doubtful whether we should read mig’ābilaṃ (thus as we have done, taking ābila = āvila), or migā-bilaṃ with a lengthened metri causâ, as the C. seems to take it (migehi khādita-maṃsato atirittaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ).
-kata cut into pieces, made into bits Ja v.266 (read macchā bilakatā yathā for macchābhīlā katā y.). The C. here (p. 272) expls as koṭṭhāsa-kata; at Ja vi.111 however the same phrase is interpreted as puñja-kata i.e. thrown into a heap (like fish caught by a fisherman in nets). Both passages are applied to fish and refer to tortures in Niraya.
identical with bila1
a kind of salt Vin i.202; MN ii.178, MN ii.181.
cp. Sk. viḍa
sour gruel Ja vi.365 (= kañjiya); usually in stock phrase kaṇājaka bilaṅga-dutiya (seed-cake? accompanied by sour gruel Vin ii.77, Vin ii.78; SN i.90; AN i.145; AN iv.392; Ja i.228; Ja iii.299; Snp-a 94; Dhp-a iii.10 (v.l. pilanka-˚akaṃ); iv.77; Vv-a 222, Vv-a 298 (bilanka˚).
-thālika a certain torture, called “gruel-pot (should there be any relation to bila-kata under bila2? AN i.47; AN ii.122; Nd ii.604 (v.l. khil˚); Mil 197, Mil 290, Mil 358 (all passages in standard setting).
etym. doubtful; one compares both Sk. viḍanga the plant Embelia ribes, and vilanga the plant Erycibe paniculata
(adj.) living on sour gruel; Name of a class of brāhmaṇas at Rājagaha SN i.164.
fruit of the Bilva tree, Aegle marmelos or Bengal quince, only in one stock phrase where its size is compared with sizes of smaller fruits, and where it is preceded by āmalaka SN i.150 = AN iv.170 (vv.ll. villa, bila, beḷu, bilāla) = Snp p.125 (vv.ll. pillā billā, billa; T. reading after SS billi ). Cp. derivations bella & beluva;.
cp. Ved. bilva
a cat DN ii.83; MN i.128, MN i.334; SN ii.270; AN iii.122 (viḷāra); v.202, 289; Thag 1138; Ja i.461 (as representing deceit), 480; v.406, 416, 418; Mil 118; Dhp-a ii.152; PugA 225. On biḷāra in similes cp J.P.T.S. 1907, 116.
-nissakkana (-matta) (large enough) for a cat to creep through AN v.195. -bhastā (a bag of) catskin MN i.128 (expld by Bdhgh as “biḷāra-camma-pasibbako”); Thag 1138. At both passages in similes.
etym. uncertain, prob. a loan-word; cp. late Sk. biḍāla & see also P. biḷāla. The Prk. forms are birāla & virāla, f. birālī
(f.) a she-cat Ja iii.265.
cp. Sk. biḍālikā
a cat Ja i.110; Ja ii.244; Ja vi.593. pakkha a flying fox Ja vi.538.
see biḷāra
a kind of salt Abhp 461.
see bila3
(f.) a bulbous plant, a tuber Ja iv.46 (= ˚vallīkanda, cp. gloss latātanta on kalamba), 371 (= ˚kanda Com. p. 373); vi.578. Cp. takkaḷa.
f. of biḷāla = biḷāra, cp. Sk. biḍālī, also Name of a plant, see on Prk. chira-birālī = Sk. kṣīra-biḍālī Pischel Gr. § 241
(f.) tittle-tattle SN i.200 = Thag 119. Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren 106 n.) trsl “finglefangle,” noting the commentator’s paraphrase “vilivilikriyā” (lit. sticky-sticky-action?).
onomat. cp. E. babble
(nt.) 1. seed, germ, semen, spawn. Used very frequently in figurative sense: see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 116 ■ DN i.135 (˚bhatta seed-corn food); iii.44 (the five kinds: see below under ˚gāma) MN i.457; SN i.21, SN i.134, SN i.172, SN i.227; SN iii.54, SN iii.91; SN iv.315; AN i.32 (ucchu˚), 135, 223, 229, 239; iii.404; iv.237 v.213 (ucchu˚); Snp 77 (saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhi, cp Snp-a 142 sq., where a detailed discussion on bīja is found), 209, 235 (khīṇa˚ adj. fig.); Ja i.242 (tiṇa˚-ādīni grass and other seeds), 281; Pv i.11; Vism 555 (in simile); Kp-a 194 (on Snp 235, in another comparison) Sdhp 24, Sdhp 270 sq., 318. nibbatta˚; (or nivatta˚) (adj.) that which has dropped its seed (hence a lawful food) Vin i.215, cp. ii.109; iv.35.
2. element, in udaka˚; whose element is the water Ja vi.160.
-gāma seed-group, seed-kingdom, seed-creation (opp bhūta-gāma). There are 5 kinds of seeds usually enumd, e.g. at DN i.5 (expld at DN-a i.77, trsln at Dial. i.6 and passim), viz. mūla˚, khandha˚, phalu˚, agga˚ bija˚, or plants propagated by roots, cuttings, joints buddings, shoots, seeds (Dial. iii.40: tubers, shoots berries, joints, seeds). The same set occurs at DN iii.44 DN iii.47; Vin iv.34; Snp-a 144 ■ Without ref. to the 5 kinds at MN iii.34; SN v.46; Mil 33. -jāta species of seed SN iii.54. -bīja one of the 5 groups of edible or useful plants, falling under bījagāma. It is expld at Vin iv.35 & DN-a i.81 by the terms pubbaṇṇa (i.e. the seven dhaññāni or grains, sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu varaka, kudrūsa) and aparaṇṇa (i.e. beans and other leguminous plants, and gourds such as mugga, māsa tila, kulattha, alābu, kumbhaṇḍa). -sakaṭa a cart (-load) of seeds Snp-a 137.
cp. Vedic bīja
scion, offspring Vin iii.18 ■ nīla˚; a waterplant Vin iii.276 (C. on Vin iii.177). Bijati & Bijani
fr. bīja
are by-forms of vījati & vījanī (q.v.).
(-˚) (adj.) having seed, only in cpd. eka˚; having one seed (for only one future life) left AN i.233; SN v.205; Ne 189, cp. AN iv.380; Kvu ii.471, see also KvuA in J.P.T.S. 1889, 137.
fr. bīja
(adj.) disgusting, awful, horrible, dreadful Ja ii.276; Ja iv.71 (˚vaṇṇa), Sdhp 603. ˚dassana a disgusting sight, horrible to behold Ja i.171; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 56 Pv-a 68, Pv-a 99 (: all with ref. to Petas) ■ The spelling bhībhaccha (after bhī ) is sometimes found, e.g. at Ja i.61 Ja iv.491; Ja v.42.
cp. Epic Sk. bībhatsa, bībhatsate to feel disgust. Not a des. fr. bādhate: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fastidium
a fragrant grass, Andropogon muricatum SN iii.137; (here represented as larger than the kusa babbaja grasses, smaller than a tree).;
cp. Sk. vīraṇa & vīraṇī-mūla = uśīra Halāyudha 2, 467
(adj.) intelligent, prudent, judicicus, in a˚; Dpvs ix.17, foolish, imprudent, unmindful of their own interest (trsln suggested by E. Hardy as preferable to Oldenberg’s “unnoticed”). Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893 69 suggests “not fighting,” thus making abujjhaka avujjh˚ = ayujjh˚ (of yudh ).
fr. budh
to be awake, to be enlightened in (acc.), to perceive, to know, recognise, understand DN ii.249; SN i.74, SN i.198; Dhp 136, Dhp 286; Thag 146; Ja iii.331; Ja iv.49 Ja iv.425; Mil 165, Mil 348 (pot. bujjheyya); Dpvs i.14 (with gen.) Kp-a 219 (so attho sukhaṃ b.). 3rd pl. bujjhare Thig 453; Bv ii.183. imper. bujjhassu Bv ii.183. fut. bujjhissati Bv ii.65; aor. abujjhi Bv ii.211, and bujjhi Ja iv.425; Vism 209; pret. 3rd sg. abujjhatha Bv vii.22 ■ ppr. bujjhamāna Snp 395; Bv vii.22; Dhp-a i.93 ■ pp. buddha (q.v.) ■ Caus. I. bodheti (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. bujjhāpeti to lead to knowledge or recognition Ja i.407. Two infinitives formed fr. bodh but belonging to budh are bodhuṃ Ja v.341, and boddhuṃ Thag 167.
budh, y-formation, corresp. to Sk. budhyate for the usual bodhate. The sense is that of a Med., but is also used as Act. with acc. of object, e.g. saccāni bujjhi he recognised the truths Vism 209 ■ The Dhtp (414) and Dhtm (652) explain budh by “avagamane (understanding, see ogamana), Dhtm (242) also by “bodhane” (awakening). Bdhgh’s expln of the meaning is “kilesa-santāna-niddāya uṭṭhahati cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati Nibbānam eva vā sacchikaroti” Dhs-a 217, cp. trsln at Expos. 294 “to rise from the slumber of the continuum of the lower nature, or a penetrating the Ariyan Truths, or a realizing Nibbāna”
(nt.) awakening, attaining to knowledge, recognition Pts i.18; Mil 194; DN-a i.51.
fr. budh
(adj.) endowed with knowledge, having the elements of bodhi, being enlightened Dhs-a 217.
fr. bujjhana
one who becomes enlightened or recognises Nd i.457 = Pts i.174 = Vism 209 (bujjhitā saccāni, of the Buddha).
n. ag. of bujjhati
aged, old DN ii.162; Ja i.164 (˚pabbajita one who has become an ascetic in his old age). Compar. buḍḍhatara Dhp-a ii.239 (v.l. K.B.S. vuḍḍhatara).
for vuḍḍha, pp. of vṛdh, see vaḍḍhati
(adj.) (a) understood SN i.35 = SN i.60 (su-dub-buddha very difficult to understand) ■ (b) having attained enlightenment, wise AN iv.449; Pv-a 16 (buddh’ ādayo) 60 (= ariya). Usually appld to the Bhagavant (Gotama) MN i.386 (one of the adj. describing Gotama to Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta); Snp 993. The true brāhmaṇa is buddha, e.g. Snp 622, Snp 643, Snp 646.
med ■ pass. pp. of bujjhati, cp. Epic Sk. buddha
A. one who has attained enlightenment; a man superior to all other beings, human divine, by his knowledge of the truth, a Buddha. At AN ii.38 the Buddha declares himself to be neither a god (deva) nor a Gandharva, nor a Yakṣa nor a man. The word Buddha is an appellative, not a proper name (na mātarā kataṃ etc., vimokkh’ antikaṃ etaṃ buddhānaṃ Bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle… paññatti Nd i.458 & Ps; i.174 ■ There are 2 sorts of B’s, viz Pacceka-buddhas or Buddhas who attain to complete enlightenment, but do not preach the way of deliverance to the world, and Sammāsambuddhas, who are omniscient and endowed with the 10 powers (see bala) and whose mission is to proclaim the saving truth to all beings (cp. Mil 106). In this function the B’s are Satthāro or teachers, Masters. In his rôle of a preeminent man a Buddha is styled Bhagavā or Lord Buddho so Bhagavā MN i.235; Pv ii.960 = Dhp-a iii.219-Besides the 18 dhammā and the 10 balāni they are gifted with the 4 vesārajjāni (A ii.9, cp. Mil 106) These teachers appear upon the earth from time to time; the approach of the birth of a B. (buddh’-uppāda) is hailed by the acclamation of the worlds, they live the houseless life and found an Order (Buddha-pamukha bhikkhu-sangha Snp p.111; Snp 81, Snp 386; Mil 212; DN-a i.242; Pv-a 19). The news that a B. has appeared upon earth is a cause of the greatest rejoicing: opportunity to see him is eagerly sought (Vin ii.155; SN i.210; DN-a i.248). The B. is always born in a brāhmaṇa or khattiya family. It is impossible here to give all the references for the Buddhas or Buddhahood in general see e.g. Vin iii.24 sq.; Dhp 182 sq., 194, 195 (= sammā sambuddhā Dhp-a iii.252), 387; Ja i.51; Ja iii.128; Vism 442 (pubba-buddhā); Pv-a 20 ■ The remembrance of former births a B. shares with other classes of privileged beings, only in a different (higher) degree. This faculty (in an ascending scale) is possessed by the foll. 6 classes titthiyā, pakati-sāvakā, mahā-sāvaka, agga-sāvakā pacceka-buddhā, buddhā (see Vism 411) ■ B. The word Buddha is specially applied to the Buddha of the present world-age, Gotama by family-name. He is said to be the 25th of the series of former Buddhas (pubbā buddhā) SN i.109, SN i.140; SN iv.52 ■ Seven Buddhas are mentioned in the earlier texts & frequently referred to (cp. the 7 Rishis of the Vedic period, see also under satta, No. 7). They are Vipassī, Sikhī, Vessabhū Kakusandha, Konāgamana, Kassapa and Gotama (D ii.5–7; SN ii.5
11; cp. Thag 491; Ja ii.147). They are also mentioned in an old formula against snake-bites (Vin ii.110). The (allegorical) names of the predecessors of these in former ages are Dīpankara, Kondañña, Mangala Sumana, Revata, Sobhita, Anomadassī, Paduma Narada, Padumuttara, Sumedha, Sujāta, Piyadassī Atthadassī, Dhammadassī, Siddhattha, Tissa, Phussa-The typical career of a Buddha is illustrated in the life of Gotama and the legends connected with his birth, as they appear in later tradition. Before his last existence he practised the 10 perfections (pāramitā q.v.) for many ages, & finally descended from the Tusita Heaven (see Buddhavaṃsa). He was born in a khattiya family and was distinguished by the 32 signs of a great man (Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni see D; ii.17 sq and similar passages; cp. Ud 48). His mother Māyā bore him painlessly and died seven days after his birth MN iii.118 sq ■ The story of each of the 25 Buddhas is given in the Buddhavaṃsa, quoted in the introductory chapters of the Jātak’ aṭṭhakathā ■ Convinced that asceticism was not the way to enlightenment, he renounced austerities. He became enlightened when seated in meditation under an Assattha tree (Ficus religiosa, hence called Bodhi or Bo tree). At the supreme moment he was tempted by Māra, but vanquished the evil one. He was then ready to depart but resolved to remain in the world and preach the truth (MN i.169; Vin i.6; a rather diff. account AN ii.20) That day he knew and proclaimed himself to be the Buddha and his career as a teacher began (MN i.171; Vin i.9; Snp 558) ■ Like all the other Sammā-sambuddhas he founded an Order, converting and gladdening men by his discourses. After a long life of teaching he attained Nibbāna (nibbānaṃ adhigacchi), and passed utterly away: SN i.210; DN ii.156; Snp 83, Snp 513 Snp 1133 sq.; Mil 96 ■ The Epithets attributed to all the Buddhas are naturally assigned also to Gotama Buddha Out of the almost endless series of these we only give a few. He is adored as the highest and holiest of men (SN i.47; SN iii.84; loke anuttaro, lokassa aggo; Mil 70) He is the supremely wise, the conqueror of the powers of darkness, the teacher of gods (devas and yakkhas and men SN i.50, SN i.132, SN i.206. 301; AN i.142; AN ii.33; AN iii.65; Snp 157 sq. He is the ādicca-bandhu kinsman of the sun SN i.186; and compared to a universal monarch (rājā cakkavattī) AN i.76; AN iii.150 and to the lion (sīha) the king of the animals AN iii.122. He is buddha-vīra Thag 47; the refuge of all beings MN ii.305; DN-a i.233; Mil 95; further appaṭipuggala SN i.134; his teaching leads to enlightenment, to self-conquest, to security deliverance MN i.235; Snp 454, Snp 993; DN-a i.230. He himself is not to be reborn (antima-sarīro with his last body) SN i.210; he is vimutto, freed & has come to the end of sorrow AN iv.258; SN iii.65; full of compassion for all beings SN i.25, SN i.51; MN ii.100; he is bhisakko the physician AN iv.340; magga-ññu, magga-vidū, maggakovido SN iii.66 ■ Under Buddh’ anussati (Vism 198 sq. we find the famous formula Bhagavā Arahaṃ Sammāsambuddho vijjā-caraṇa-sampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisa-damma-sārathi Satthā devamanussānaṃ buddho Bhagavā (DN i.49≈), analysed & exegetically discussed. Here (p. 209) “Buddha” is expld with the formula as found at Pts i.174; Nd i.457. More explicitly with var. epithets at the latter passage. This formula is one of the highest & most comprehensive characterisations of a Buddha, & occurs frequently in the Canon e.g. MN i.179; SN ii.69; SN v.343 ■ A khattiya by birth he is called a brāhmaṇa because he carries on the sacred tradition, and because he excels in wisdom, self-control and virtue Mil 225.
-ānubuddha enlightened after the Enlightened one Thag 679, Thag 1246 (trsld “who next to our Great Waked one was awoke”). -ānubhāva the majestic power of the B. Pv-a 38, Pv-a 171. -ānussati mindfulness of the B., one of the 6 anussatis (B.˚, dhamma˚, sangha˚, sīla˚ cāga˚, devatā˚) DN iii.250, DN iii.280; Vism 132 (where followed by upasamânussati and 4 other qualities making up the pīti-sambojjh’anga; see anussati), 197 sq. (the 10, as mentioned under anussati). -aṅkura a nascent (lit sprouting) Buddha, one who is destined to be a B Dhp-a i.83. -antara a Buddha-interval, the period between the appearance of one Buddha & the next Mil 3; Dhp-a i.201 (the 4 last ones); iv.201; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 14 Pv-a 21, Pv-a 47, Pv-a 191. -ārammaṇa having its foundation or cause in the B., in ˚pīti joy, caused by contemplation of a B Ja iii.405; Vism 143 (here as ubbegā-pīti). -ūpaṭṭhāna B ■ worship Dhp-a i.101; Pv-a 93. -uppāda the coming into existence of a Buddha, time or age in which a B was born (opp. buddh’ antara), a Buddha-period Ja i.59 Mhbv 12; Vb-a 50; Thag-a 28. -kara making a B. bringing about Buddhahood Ja i.20. -kāraka = ˚kara Mhbv 9. -kāla the time of a B. Vism 91 (Buddhakālo viya pavattati it is like the time of the B.) -kula Buddha-clan Snp-a 532 (B ■ pitā, ˚mātā ibid.). -kolāhala the announcement of a Buddha, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q.v.) Kp-a 121, cp. Ja i.48. -khetta field or region of (or for the existence of) a Buddha Vism 414 (divided into 3 spheres: jātikkhetta, āṇākkhetta visayakkhetta, see khetta). -gata directed or referring to the B. SN i.211 (sati); Dhp 296. -guṇa quality of a B., virtue, character of a Buddha Ja i.27; Ja ii.147 Bv ii.177; Mbhv 80; Kp-a 121 (cp. App.). -cakkhu the eye of a Buddha, i.e. an eye (or the faculty) of complete intuition Vin i.6; Thag-a 2; see discussed in detail at Nd i.359 = Nd ii.2354; cp. cakkhu. -ñāṇa knowledge of a B., which is boundless (cp. Saddh. 73 J.P.T.S. 1887, 40) Bv i.64 (appameyya); x.5 (cuddasa) -dhamma Buddhahood Mil 276; pl. condition or attributes of a B. Ja i.20; referred to as 6 at Nd i.143 Nd ii.466 (bhāgī channaṃ ˚ānan ti Bhagavā), as 18 at Mil 105, Mil 285. Kern (Manual & Grundriss; iii.8, p. 63 gives (after Lal 183, Lal 343) the foll. 18 āveṇikadharmas (“extraordinary qualities”) as such: (1) seeing all things past, (2) present, (3) future, (4) propriety of actions of the body, (5) of speech, (6) of thought, (7 firmness of intuition, (8) of memory, (9) of samādhi (10) of energy, (11) of emancipation, (12) of wisdom (13) freedom from fickleness, (14) noisiness, (15) confusedness (16) hastiness, (17) heedlessness, (18) inconsiderateness -pañha the name given to one question asked by Sāriputta, which the paribbājikā Kuṇḍalakesī was unable to answer Dhp-a ii.225. -pasanna finding one’s happiness, or believing in the B. Vin iv.39. -putta son of the B. said of bhikkhus or arahants Mil 143 cp. SN iii.83: puttā Buddhassa orasā. -bala the force of a B. (iddibala & paññā˚) Bu; i.3. -bījaṅkura a future B. Bv ii.71. -bhāva condition of a B. enlightenment Ja i.14, Ja i.147 (abuddhabhāva un-buddhahood, of Devadatta); DN-a i.1. -bhūmi the ground of Buddhahood Bv ii.175. -manta mystic verses of a B. DN-a i.248 -māmaka devotedly attached to the B. Dhp-a i.206 (+ Dhamma˚, Sangha˚). -rakkhita saved by the B (Np.) Snp-a 534 (+ Dhamma˚). -rasmi (pl. ˚iyo) rays shining forth from the person of the Buddha; they are of 6 colours Ja i.501; Snp-a 132; Mhbv 6, 15, 38; Vv-a 207; Dhs-a 13. -rūpa form or figure of the B. Vism 228 (Mārena nimmita, cp. Divy 162, Divy 166; Buddha-nirmāṇa the magic figure of the B.). -līḷha (& ˚līḷhā); deportment ease, grace of a Buddha Ja i.54; Mhbv 39; Dhp-a i.33; Dhp-a ii.41. -vacana the word (teaching) of the Buddha Mil 17; Kp-a 13; Snp-a 274, Snp-a 331. -visaya the sphere (of wonder), the range, scope or power of a Buddha (cp. buddha-khetta) Dhp-a i.33; Dhp-a ii.199; Snp-a 154, Snp-a 228 -veneyya one able to be led to enlightenment, accessible to Buddha’s teaching Snp-a 15, Snp-a 331. -sāsana the teaching (instructions) of the B. Dhp 368, Dhp 381 -sukumāla delicate, sensitive (to fatigue), as Buddhas are Dhp-a i.5.
= buddha1
(-˚) (adj.) in cpd. dvangula-buddhikā (f.) possessing insight as much as 2 finger-breadths Vv-a 96 ■ The ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd.
fr. buddha
(f.) enlightenment, wisdom Dhp-a iv.228; Thag-a 4 (Buddha-subuddhatā) ■ Cp. buddhatta.
abstr. fr. buddha
to obstruct, withhold etc.: see pali˚.
(nt.) state of (perfect) enlightenment, (attainment of) Buddhahood Ja iii.363 (sabbadhammānaṃ b.); Vism 209 (buddhattā Buddho) Mhbv 12. Cp. buddhatā and abhisambuddhatta.
abstr. fr. buddha
(f.) wisdom, intelligence DN iii.165 (in sequence saddhā sīla suta b cāga etc.); Ja iii.369; Ja v.257; Mil 349; Sdhp 263. The ref. Vism 439 should be read vuddhi for b˚.
-carita one whose behaviour or character is wisdom Vism 104 (= paññavā). -sampanna endowed with (highest) wisdom Pv-a 39.
fr. budh; cp. Class. Sk. buddhi
(adj.) intelligent, in cpds a˚; unintelligent & sa˚; possessed of wisdom Mil 76.
-˚) [fr. buddhi
(adj.) possessing insight, full of right knowledge Vin ii.195; Ja v.257; Mil 21, Mil 294; Pv-a 131 (paṇḍita, b., sappañña-jātika).
fr. buddhi
the root of a tree Abhp 549.
Vedic budhna
in cpd. ˚ābaddha is of uncertain origin; the whole means a sort of seat or bedstead (fixed up or tied together with slats?) Vin ii.149; Vin iv.40, Vin iv.357.
(& Bubbula) a bubble. On similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 117 ■ Usually of a waterbubble udaka˚; SN iii.141; AN iv.137; Ja v.216; Mil 117 Vism 109; Dhp-a iii.209; Vb-a 33 (as unsubstantial to which vedanā are likened). In other connection at Ja i.68 (of cooking gruel).
cp. Epic Sk. budbuda
= bubbuḷa, viz. 1. a bubble Dhp-a iii.166; Mil 118.
2. the iris of the eye Thig 395 (cp. Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1884, 89, but according to Thag-a 259 the reading pubbaḷhaka is to be preferred.)
wishing to eat, hungry Ja ii.14; Ja v.70; Mil 66; Dāvs iii.32.
pp. of bubhukkhati, Desid. of bhuñjati
array of troops Ja i.387.
for vūḷha, cp. Sk. vyūḍha for the usual vyūha, q.v.
see vyūha. Beluva & Beluva;
1. the Vilva tree Aegle marmelos MN i.108; MN ii.6; Ja iv.363, Ja iv.368; Ja vi.525 Ja vi.560.
2. wood of the Vilva tree SN i.22; DN ii.264 Mhbv 31.
-pakka ripe fruit of the Vilva Ja v.74. -paṇḍu(-vīṇā) a yellow flute made of Vilva wood, representing a kind of magic flute which according to Snp-a 393 first belonged to Māra, and was then given to Pañcasikha, one of the Heavenly Musicians, by Sakka. See Vism 392 (attributed to Pañcasikha); Dhp-a i.433 (of Māra; v.l. veḷuvadaṇḍa-vīṇā); iii.225 (of P.); Snp-a 393 (v.l. veluva˚) -laṭṭhi a young sprout of the Vilva tree Kp-a 118 -salāṭuka the unripe fruit of the Vilva, next in size to the smaller kola, surpassed in size by the ripe billa or billi SN i.150 = AN iv.170 = Snp p.125.
the guṇa-form of billa, in like meaning. It is the diaeretic form of Sk. *bailva or *vailva, of which the contracted form is P. bella
(m. & nt.) the fruit of the Vilva tree (a kind of citron?) Ja iii.77 (C. beluva); vi.578. Also in doubtful passage at Ja iii.319 (v.l. mella, phella).
= beluva, q.v.
(nt.) a matter to be known or understood, subject of knowledge or understanding Ne 20.
orig. grd. of bujjhati or bodheti
a factor or constituent of knowledge or wisdom. There are 7 bojjhangas usually referred to or understood from the context. There are enumd at several places, e.g. at DN iii.106, where they are mentioned in a list of qualities (dhammā) which contribute to the greatest happiness of gods and man, viz. the 4 satipaṭṭhānā, 4 sammapadhānā 4 iddhipādā, 5 indriyāni, 5 balāni & the 7 bojjhangas and ariya aṭṭhangika magga, 37 in all The same list we find at Divy 208 ■ The 7 b. (frequently also called; sambojjhaṅgā ) are sati, dhamma-vicaya viriya, pīti, passaddhi, samādhi, upekhā or mindfulness investigation of the Law, energy, rapture, repose, concentration and equanimity (Dhs-a 217, cp. Expositor ii.294) ■ DN ii.79, DN ii.83, DN ii.120, DN ii.303; DN iii.101, DN iii.128, DN iii.284; MN i.11, MN i.61; MN ii.12; MN iii.85, MN iii.275; SN i.54; SN v.82, SN v.110; AN i.14 AN iv.23; Nd i.14, Nd i.45, Nd i.171 (˚kusala), 341; Kvu i.158; Dhs 358, Dhs 528, Dhs 1354; Vb 199 sq., 227 sq.; Vism 160; Mil 340; Dhp-a i.230; Vb-a 120, Vb-a 310; Thag-a 27, Thag-a 50, Thag-a 160 They are counted among the 37 constituents of Arahantship viz. the 30 above-mentioned qualities (counting magga as one), with addition of sīlesu paripūrikāritā indriyesu gutta-dvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā jāgariy’ ânuyoga, sati-sampajaññaṃ (see e.g. Nd i.14 Nd ii.s. v. satipaṭṭhāna & sīla); cp. Thag 161, Thag 162 Thig 21 (maggā nibbāna-pattiyā); Dhs-a 217 (bodhāya saṃvattantī ti bojjhangā etc.; also def. as “bodhissa ango ti pi bojjhango sen’ angarath’ ang’ ādayo viya) They are also called the paribhoga-bhaṇḍāni or “insignia” of the Buddha Mil 330.
-kosalla proficiency in the constituents of wisdom Vism 248.
bodhi + anga; cp. BSk. bodhyanga, e.g. Lal 37, where the 7 are given at Divy 208
form is sambodha = bodhi, viz. knowledge, wisdom, enlightenment, Buddhaship DN iii.54 (v.l. sam˚); Dhs-a 217; in phrase bodhāya maggo Ja i.67; Mil 244, Mil 289; and in bodha-pakkhiyadhammā (for which usually bodhi˚) Snp-a 164 (where given as 37); complementary to santi (arousing soothing) Thag 342. bodhaṅgama leading to enlightenment (dhammā) Ne 31, Ne 83 (v.l. bojjh˚).
fr. budh; the usual
see pali˚.
(nt.) 1. knowing Mil 168 (cp. SN v.83).
2. (adj.) enlightening, teaching Bv 26, Bv 22 (pacchima-jana˚).
fr. bodheti
(adj.) capable of being enlightened, worthy to be taught Bv 5, Bv 31. See also bodhaneyya.
grd. fr. bodheti
(adj.) capable of being enlightened, to be taught the truth Bv 2, Bv 195 (jana); Mil 169 (yena yogena bodhaneyyā sattā bujjhanti tena y. bodheti); otherwise in combn bodhaneyya-bandhavo the (Buddha’s) relations (or fellowmen) who are able to be enlightened Ja i.345 = Dhp-a i.367; Ja v.335.
fr. bodheti, see bodhanīya
(f.) (supreme knowledge, enlightenment, the knowledge possessed by a Buddha (see also sambodhi & sammā-sambodhi) MN i.356; MN ii.95 = DN iii.237 (saddho hoti, saddahati Tathāgatassa bodhiṃ); DN iii.159 (anuttaraṃ pappoti bodhiṃ) 165 (id.); SN i.103, SN i.196; SN v.197 sq.; AN ii.66; Vb-a 310 (def.). Bodhi consists of 7 elements called bojjhaṅgā or sambojjhaṅgā, and is attained by the accomplishment of the perfections called bodhi-pācanā dhammā (see under cpds. & cp. bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā). The Buddha is said to have found the Path followed by former Buddhas, who “catusu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā satta-bojjhange yathābhūtaṃ bhāvetvā anuttaraṃ sammā-sambodhiṃ abhisambujjhiṃsu” SN v.160. The moment of supreme enlightenment is the moment when the Four Truths (ariya-saccāni) are grasped SN v.423 Bodhi is used to express the lofty knowledge of an ascetic (Bodhi-paribbājaka Np. Ja v.229 sq.), and the stage of enlightenment of the Paccekabuddha (paccekabodhi Ja iii.348; pacceka-bodhi-ñāṇa Ja iv.114; paccekasambodhi Snp-a 73), as distinguished from sammāsambodhi
-ṭṭhāna the state of Bodhi, state of enlightenment Dpvs 2.61. -pakkhika = pakkhiya (& pakkhika;, e.g. AN iii.70 = AN iii.300; Thag 900; cp. bodha˚) belonging to enlightenment, usually referred to as the 37 bodhipakkhiyā dhammā qualities or items constituting or contributing to Bodhi, which are the same as enumd under bojjhanga (q.v.). They are enumd & discussed at Vism 678 sq. and mentioned at many other passages of the Abhidhamma, e.g. Vb 244, Vb 249; Ne 31, Ne 197 Ne 240, Ne 261; and in the Commentaries, e.g. Ja i.275 Ja iii.290; Ja v.483; Dhp-a i.230. When they are increased to 43 they include the above with the addition of aniccasaññā; dukkha˚, anatta˚, pahāna˚, virāga˚, nirodhasaññā thus at Ne 112, Ne 237. In the older texts we do not find any numbered lists of the b ■ p ■ dhammā At AN iii.70 only indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā and jāgariy’ ânuyoga are mentioned in connection with bodhipakkhikā dhammā in general At SN v.227, SN v.239 sq. (so read in Vb preface xiv. for 327 337!) the term is applied to the 5 indriyas: saddh indriyaṃ, viriy˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññ˚. A more detailed discussion of the bodhi-p-dhammā and their mention in the Piṭakas is found in Mrs. Rh. D.’s preface to the Vb edition, pp. xiv ■ xvi. Of BSk. passage may be mentioned Divy 350 (saptatriṃśad-bodhi-pakṣān dharmān amukhī-kṛtya pratyekāṃ bodhiṃ sākṣātkṛtavantah) & 616 (bodhipakṣāṃs tān dharmān Bhagavān saṃprakāśayati sma).; -paripāka the maturing of enlightenment Vism 116. -pācana ripening of knowledge (of a Buddha); adj. leading to enlightenment Bv ii.121 sq.; Cp i.11 (cp. Ja i.22). It is a late term The b. dhammā are the 10 perfections (pāramiyo), i.e. dāna˚, sīla˚, nekkhamma˚, paññā˚, viriya˚, khanti˚; sacca˚, adhiṭṭhāna˚, mettā˚, upekhā˚. -satta (1) a “bodhi-being,” i.e. a being destined to attain fullest enlightenment or Buddhaship. A Bodhisatta passes through many existences & many stages of progress before the last birth in which he fulfils his great destiny The “amhākaṃ Bodhisatto,” or “our Bodhisatta” of the Buddhist Texts (e.g. Vism 419 (imasmiṃ kappe ayam eva Bhagavā Bodhisatta-bhūto); DN-a i.259 refers to Gotama, whose previous existences are related in the Jātaka collection. These tales illustrate the wisdom & goodness of the future Buddha, whether as an animal, a god, or a human being. In his last existence before attaining Buddhahood he is a man. Reference is made to a Bodhisatta or; the B. at very many places throughout the Canon. See e.g. MN i.17, MN i.163 MN i.240; SN ii.5; SN iii.27; SN iv.233; SN v.263, SN v.281, SN v.317; AN ii.130 AN iii.240; AN iv.302, AN iv.439; Vism 15, Vism 116, Vism 499; Snp-a 52 (pacceka˚), 67, 72 ■ (2) Name of the author of a Pali grammar used by Kaccāyana (not extant): see Windisch, Proceedings of XIVth Or. Congress, Vol. i.290. -sambhāra (pl.) conditions (lit. materials) necessary for the attainment of bodhi Ja i.1; Ja vi.595; Mbvs 12.
fr. budh, cp. Vedic bodhin-manas having an attentive mind; RV v.75, 5; viii.82, 18
the tree of wisdom, the sacred Bo tree, the fig tree (Assattha, Ficus religiosa) under which Gotama Buddha arrived at perfect knowledge. The tree is near the spot where Buddhagāya is now, about 60 miles fr. Patna. It is regarded by pilgrims as the centre of the world (cp. pathavī-nābhi mahā-bodhimaṇḍo Mbvs 79). It is also spoken of as Mahābodhi (e.g. Ja iv.228; Vism 403) ■ Vism 72, Vism 299, Vism 342; Dhp-a i.105; Thag-a 62; Vb-a 473.
-aṅgaṇa the courtyard in which the Bo tree stands DN-a i.191; Vism 188 (˚vatta); Vb-a 349. -tala “Bodhifoundation,” i.e. the place or ground of the B. tree otherwise bodhi-maṇḍa Ja i.105; Mhbv 9; Dhp-a i.117 -pakka fruit of the Bo tree Ja iv.229. -pādapa the Bodhi tree Mbhv 1. -pūjā veneration of, or offerings to the Bo tree Mhbv 81. -maṇḍa (for ˚maṇḍala) the ground under the Bodhi tree, hence the spot (or “throne”), on which the Buddha was seated at the time of attaining highest enlightenment. The term is only found in very late canonical and post-canonical literature. Bv ii.65, Bv ii.183; Vism 203; Ja iv.228, Ja iv.232 Mhbv 79; Snp-a 2, Snp-a 30, Snp-a 225, Snp-a 258, Snp-a 281, Snp-a 340, Snp-a 391, Snp-a 441; Dhp-a i.86; Dhp-a ii.69; Dhp-a iv.72; Thag-a 2. Cp. BSk. bodhimaṇḍa Divy 392. -maha feast in honour of the Bo tree Ja iv.229 -mūla the root or foot of the Bo tree Snp-a 32, Snp-a 391; cp Bodhiyā mūle Nd i.172, Nd i.458 = Pts i.174. -rukkha the Bodhi tree Vin i.1.
= bodhi1
awakener, enlightener Nd i.457; Pts i.174; Vism 209.
n. ag. fr. bodheti
1. to awaken to the truth, to enlighten SN i.170; Bv ii.195. aor. bodhesi Vism 209 abodhayi Bv ii.196 & bodhayi Bv v.31; Bv xxv.6 inf bodhuṃ: see bujjhati, & bodhetuṃ Ja iv.393. grd bodhabba DN ii.246; AN iv.136.
2. to make aware (of), to make known Ja vi.412; Snp-a 444.
Caus. of bujjhati
body Pv iv.332; Ja i.503; Ja ii.160; Ja iii.117; Pv-a 254.
etym. doubtful, one proposed by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 207 derives it fr. bandh = bundh to bind, which is an erroneous comparison; on his hint “probably cognate with E. body” cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fidelia. The orig. meaning may have been, as Morris suggests, “trunk.” It certainly is a dial. word
etc. (byā˚, byu˚) words not found under these initials are to be looked up under vya˚; etc.
3rd sg. aor. of vi + gam, to depart, to be lost, perish Thag 170.
a tiger Ja ii.110; Sdhp 388. f. byagghinī Mil 67.
cp. Sk. vyāghra
(nt.) 1. sign, mark: see vyañjana.
2. the letter, as compared with attha the spirit or meaning; thus in phrase atthato byañjanato ca according to the meaning & the letter Mil 18, Mil 345; Ne 23. As vyañjana is the more usual (classical) form, other refs. will be found under vyañjana;
cp. Sk. vyañjana
(adj.) experienced, learned Mil 21.
cp. P. vyatta; Sk. vyakta
(f.) experience, learning Mil 349. See also pari˚.
fr. byatta
in ˚bhavati, bhāva etc. see vyanti˚.
departed, dispelled Mil 225.
= vy-apa-gata
busy, active. Thus Kern, but the trsln is not satisfactory. It occurs only at 2 passages; Vin iv.2 where combd with vācā, girā, vacībheda, and meaning “mode of speech,” and at Snp 961, where it has the same meaning & is referred by Nd;1 472 to a mode of speech & expl;d by Snp-a 572 by vacana. Thus the derivation fr. pṛ; with vyā˚ can hardly be claimed to be correct for Bdhgh’s conception of the word; to him it sounded more likely like vy + ā + patha (cp. cpds vacana-patha & vāda-patha), thus “way of speaking.”
so for byappattha; according to Kern, Toev. s. v. the word is a distortion fr. *vyāpṛta (for which usually P. vyāvaṭa ) of vy + ā + pṛ3, pṛṇoti to be busy or active
a celestial mansion, a Vimāna Vv 523. As vyamha at Ja iv.464.
cp. vyamha
see vyasana.
(indecl.) intensive particle: “just so, certainly, indeed” only in phrase “evaṃ byā kho” Vin ii.26; Vin iv.134 = DN-a i.27; MN i.130 (evaṃ vyā kho ti evaṃ viya kho C.), 257.
distorted fr. iva = eva, with metathesis & diaeresis *veyya → *veyyā → *vyā → byā
sickness, disease AN i.146; Kvu ii.457; Mil 351.
cp. Sk. vyādhi; lit. “upset” fr. vy + ā + dhā
afflicted with disease Thag 73; Mil 168.
pp. fr. byādheti
to cause to waver, unsettle, agitate, trouble SN i.120; Thag 46, Thag 1211. Pass. byādhiyati Kvu ii.457 (aor. byādhiyiṃsu) ■ pp. byādhita.
Caus. fr. byādhi
1. trouble, opp. a˚; relief MN i.10.
2. malevolence; neg. a˚; benevolence Vin i.3; MN i.38; cp. avyāpajjha SN iv.296, SN iv.371.
fr. vy-ā- pad
malevolent Sdhp 70; otherwise vy˚; e.g. SN ii.168 (˚citta).
fr. vyāpajjati
ill-will, malevolence, one of the 5 “obstructions” (āvaraṇāni, see e.g. SN v.94 Nd ii.379); and of the 4 “bonds” (kāya-ganthā see e.g. Nd i.98) ■ MN i.434; SN i.99; Iti 119; Pts i.31; Pts ii.12 Nd i.149, Nd i.207, Nd i.386.
-vitakka a malevolent or angry thought MN i.11; SN i.203; SN ii.151; SN iii.93; SN v.417; Nd i.501; Kv 113.
fr. vy + ā + pad
evil, wrong, hurt; usually referred to as 3 fold: atta˚, para˚, ubhaya˚, or against oneself against others, & both-M i.416; SN iv.159 (vyā˚), 339.
vy + ā + bādh
to injure, hurt, oppress SN v.393 (na kiñci byābādhemi tasaṃ vā thāvaraṃ vā).
Denom. fr. byābādha
(f.) 1. a pole for carrying burdens Thag 623.
2. a flail SN iv.201.
vy + ā + bhañj
a fathom, measured by both hands being extended to their full length, only in phrase ˚ppabhā a halo extending for a fathom around the Buddha Ja i.12, Ja i.90; Bv i.45; Mil 75; Vv-a 213.
cp. Vedic & P. vyāma cp. Śatap. Br.; i.2, 5, 14.
obstructed, opposed, hindered Snp 936 (aññam-aññehi b. in enmity with each other; = paṭiviruddha Nd i.408), 938 (412 id.; Snp-a 566 = āhata-citta).
pp. of vy + ā + rundh; reading by˚ in Nd1; vy˚ in Sn & Snp-a; v.l. BB
covered, adorned with Vv-a 213 (rūpakāya byāvaṭa jana; v.l. byāgata).
the meaning (wrongly given as “adorned”) is to be deleted. The reading at Vv-a 213 is doubtful. It may be kāyavyāvaṭa, but dassana-vyāvaṭa is to be preferred (see under vyāvaṭa ).
vy + ā + vṛ;
attached to, clinging to, in cpd. ˚mānasa possessed with longing Dhp 47 (= sampatte vā asampatte vā lagga-mānasa Dhp-a i.361), 287 (cp. Dhp-a iii.433; lagganatāya sattamānasa).
pp. of vy + ā + sañj, cp. āsatta1
1. the array or arrangement of troops in particular positions, order of parade or battle DN-a i.85. Three formations of troops are mentioned at Ja ii.404 & 406, viz. paduma-vyūha (lotus formation), cakka˚ (wheel form;n), sakaṭa˚ (cart formn).
2. a heap, collection, in byūhaṃ karoti to put into a (well-arranged) heap Mil 2 (kacavaraṃ). 3. a (blind) alley, cul-de-sac Vin iv.271 (byūhan nāma yen’ eva pavisanti ten’ eva nikkhamanti).
cp. Sk. & P. vyūha fr. vi + ; vah
to stand in array (like a troop) Vv-a 104 (byūhanto, v.l. brahmanto).
Denom. fr. byūha
(adj.) very great, vast, high, lofty, gigantic; nom sg. brahā Snp 410, Snp 550; Thag 31; Ja iii.117 (= dīgha C.); iv.111 (su˚); 647; Pv iv.310 (of a huge tree), acc sg. brahantaṃ AN iii.346; Vv-a 182; nom. pl. also brahantā Vv 524 (= mahantā Vv-a 224; of the Yama-dūtā or Death’s giant messengers) ■ f. brahatl Ja v.215 (= uḷārā C.); also given as Name of a plant Abhp 588 ■ Superl. brahaṭṭha (= Sk. barhiṣṭha; on inversion bar → bra cp. Sk. paribarhanā → P. paribrahaṇa) in ˚puppha a large or fully developed blossom Ja v.416.
-arañña woodlands, vast forest AN i.187. -vana the wild wood, immense forest AN i.152; AN iii.44; Vv 633 Ja v.215. -sukha (-vihāra- jjhāna-jhāyin) (a thinker enjoying his meditations in) immense happiness Mil 226 (in characterisation of the term “brāhmaṇa”). Brahma & Brahma
cp. Vedic bṛhant, of bṛh2 to increase, to be great or strong; paribṛdha solid (cp. brūha, paribrahaṇa & paribrūhana), Av. bərəƶat high; Arm. barjr high; Oir. brī, Cymr. bre mountain; Goth. baurgs “borough,” Ohg. etc. burg “burgh,” i.e. fortress Ger. berg mountain ■ The fundamental notion is that of an increase above normal or the ordinary: vuddhi (of vṛdh ) is used in explns of the term; thus Dhtp 344 (Dhtm 506) baha braha brūha = vuddhiyaṃ; Vv-a 278 brahā = vuddhā. Its use is almost entirely restricted to poetry
I. Brahman (nt.) [cp. Vedic bráhman nt. prayer; nom. sg bráhma] 1. the supreme good; as a buddhistic term used in a sense different from the brahmanic (save in controversy with Brahmans); a state like that of Brahmā (or Brahman) AN ii.184 (brahmappatta). In cpds. brahma˚.
2. Vedic text, mystic formula prayer DN-a i.244 (brahmaṃ aṇatī ti brāhmaṇo).
II. Brahmā [cp. Vedic brahmán, m., one who prays or chants hymns, nom. sg. Brahmā] 1. the god Brahmā chief of the gods, often represented as the creator of the Universe (vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā) DN i.18 DN iii.30, also called Mahābrahmā (DN i.235 sq., 244 sq. iii.30; Iti 15; Vism 578; Dhp-a ii.60); and Sahampati (Vin i.5; DN ii.157; SN i.136 sq.; Vism 201; Kp-a 171; Snp-a 56) and Sanaṅkumāra (D ii.226; iii.97). The duration of his life is given as being 1 kalpa (see Kv 207, 208) ■ nom. Brahmā Vin i.5; DN ii.46; Ja vi.486; Mil 224; Vism 2 (brahmānaṃ atibrahmā, Ep. of Buddha Bhagavā); Snp-a 229 (B. mahānubhāvo); gen abl. Brahmano DN ii.209; Vism 205; Snp-a 177; instr Brahmanā DN i.252; DN ii.239; Dhp 105, Dhp 230; Vism 48, Vism 405; Dhp-a ii.60; acc. Brahmānaṃ DN ii.37; voc. Brahme SN i.138.
2. a brahma god, a happy & blameless celestial being, an inhabitant of the higher heavens (brahma-loka; in which to be reborn is a reward of great merit); nom. sg. brahmā SN i.142 (Baka br.) MN i.327 (id.); AN iv.83; Pv-a 138 (˚devatā for brahma˚?) gen. abl. brahmuno SN i.142, SN i.155; instr. brahmunā DN iii.147, DN iii.150 & brahmanā Pv-a 98; voc. sg. brahme MN i.328. pl. nom. brahmāno Mil 13, Mil 18 (where Ja vi.486 has Mahā-brahmā in id. p.); Dhs-a 195; gen brahmānaṃ Vism 2; Mhbv 151 ■ paccekabrahmā a br. by himself SN i.149 (of the name of Tudu; cp. paccekabuddha) ■ sabrahmaka (adj.) including the brahma gods DN i.62; AN ii.70; Vin i.11; DN-a i.174.
III. brahma (adj.-n.) [cp. brahmā II. 2; Vedic brahma˚ & Sk. brāhma] 1. holy, pious, brahmanic (m.) a holy person, a brahmin-(adj.) Ja ii.14 (br vaṇṇa = seṭṭha vaṇṇa C.); Kp-a 151 (brahma-cariyaṃ brahmaṃ cariyaṃ) ■ (m.) acc. brahmaṃ Snp 285; voc brahme (frequent) Snp 1065 (= brahmā ti seṭṭhavacanaṃ Snp-a 592); Ja ii.346; Ja iv.288; Ja vi.524, Ja vi.532; Pv i.129 (= brāhmaṇa Pv-a 66).
2. divine, as incorporating the highest & best qualities, sublime, ideal best, very great (see esp. in cpds.), AN i.132 (brahmā ti mātāpitaro etc.), 182; iv.76.
3. holy, sacred, divinely inspired (of the rites, charms, hymns etc.) DN i.96 (brahme mante adhiyitvā); Pv ii.613 (mantaṃ brahmacintitaṃ) = brāhmaṇānaṃ atthāya brahmaṇā cintitaṃ Pv-a 97, Pv-a 98) ■ Note. The compn form of all specified bases (I. II. III.) is brahma˚; and with regard to meaning it is often not to be decided to which of the 3 categories the cpd. in question belongs.
-attabhāva existence as a brahma god Dhp-a iii.210 -ujjugatta having the most divinely straight limbs (one of the 32 marks of a Great Man) DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.155 -uttama sublime Dhs-a 192. -uppatti birth in the brahma heaven SN i.143. -ūposatha the highest religious observance with meditation on the Buddha practice of the uposatha abstinence AN i.207. -kappa like Brahmā Thag 909. -kāya divine body DN iii.84; Ja i.95. -kāyika belonging to the company of Brahmā, N of a high order of Devas in the retinue of Br (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie pp. 191, 193, 197) DN i.220 DN ii.69; AN iii.287, AN iii.314; AN iv.40, AN iv.76, AN iv.240, AN iv.401; Thag 1082 Vism 225, Vism 559; Kp-a 86. -kutta a work of Brahmā DN iii.28, DN iii.30 (cp. similarly yaṃ mama, pitrā kṛtaṃ devakṛtaṃ na tu brahmakṛtaṃ tat Divy 22). See also under kutta. -giriya (pl.) name of a certain class of beings possibly those seated on Brahmagiri (or is it a certain class of performers, actors or dancers?) Mil 191 -ghaṭa (= ghaṭa2) company or assembly of Brahmans Ja vi.99. -cakka the excellent wheel, i.e. the doctrine of the Buddha MN i.69; AN ii.9, AN ii.24; AN iii.417; AN v.33; Iti 123; Pts ii.174; Vb-a 399 (in detail); -cariya see separate article. -cārin leading a holy or pure life, chaste, pious Vin ii.236; Vin iii.44; SN i.5, SN i.60; SN ii.210; SN iii.13; SN iv.93, AN ii.44; MN iii.117; Snp 695, Snp 973; Ja v.107, Ja v.382; Vv 3411 (acc. pl. brahmacāraye for ˚cārino); Dhp 142; Mil 75; DN-a i.72 (brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ caratī ti br. c.) Dhp-a iii.83; a˚ SN iv.181; Pp 27, Pp 36. -cintita divinely inspired Pvi i.613 = Vv 6316 (of manta); expln at Pv-a 97 as given above III.3, differs from that at Vv-a 265 where it runs: brahmehi Aṭṭhak’ ādīhi cintitaṃ paññācakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ, i.e. thought out by the divine (seer Aṭṭhaka and the others (viz. composers of the Vedic hymns: v. s. brāhmaṇa1, seen with insight). -ja sprung from Brahmā (said of the Brāhmaṇas) DN iii.81 DN iii.83; MN ii.148. Cp. dhammaja. -jacca belonging to a brahman family Thag 689. -jāla divine, excellent net Name of a Suttanta (D No. 1) Vism 30; Vb-a 432, Vb-a 516 Kp-a 12, Kp-a 36, Kp-a 97; Snp-a 362, Snp-a 434. -daṇḍa “the highest penalty,” a kind of severe punishment (temporary deathsentence ) Vin ii.290; DN ii.154; Dhp-a ii.112; cp. Kern Manual p. 87. -dāyāda kinsman or heir of Brahmā DN iii.81, DN iii.83. -deyya a most excellent gift, a royal gift, a gift given with full powers (said of land granted by the King) DN i.87 (= seṭṭha-deyyaṃ DN-a i.246; cp. Dial. i.108 note: the first part of the cpd. (brahma) has always been interpreted by Brahmans as referring to themselves But brahma as the first part of a cpd. never has that meaning in Pali; and the word in our passage means literally “a full gift.”-Cp. id. p. Divy 620 where it does not need to mean “gift to brahmans,” as Index suggests); DN i.114; Ja ii.166 = Dhp-a iii.125 (here a gift to a br., it is true, but not with that meaning) Ja vi.486 (sudinnaṃ + ); Mhbv 123. We think that both Kern (who at Toev. s. v. unjustly remarks of Bdhgh’s expln as “unjust”) and Fick (who at “Sociale Gliederung” p. 126 trsls it as “gift to a Brahman”) are wrong, at least their (and others’) interpretation is doubtful. -devatā a deity of the Brahmaloka Pv-a 138 (so read for brahmā˚). -nimantanika “addressing an invitation to a brahma-god,” title of a Suttanta MN i.326 sq., quoted at Vism 393. -nimmita created by Brahmā DN iii.81, DN iii.83. -patta arrived at the highest state, above the devas, a state like the Br. gods MN i.386; AN ii.184. -patti attainment of the highest good SN i.169 SN i.181; SN iv.118. -patha the way to the Br. world or the way to the highest good SN i.141; AN iii.346; Thag 689 Cp. Geiger, Dhamma 77. -parāyana devoted to Brahmā Mil 234. -parisā an assembly of the Brahma gods DN iii.260; MN i.330; SN i.155; AN iv.307. -pārisajja belonging to the retinue of Br., Name of the gods of the lowest Rūpa-brahmaloka SN i.145, SN i.155; MN i.330; Kv 207; cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 191, 194. -purohita minister or priest to Mahābrahmā; ˚deva gods inhabiting the next heaven above the Br ■ pārisajjā devā (cp. Kirfel loc. cit.) Kv 207 (read ˚purohita for ˚parohita!). -pphoṭana [a-pphoṭana; ā + ph.] a Brahmaapplause divine or greatest applause Dhp-a iii.210 (cp Mil 13; Ja vi.486). -bandhu “brahma-kinsman,” a brāhmaṇa in descent, or by name; but in reality an unworthy brahman, Thig 251; Ja vi.532; Thag-a 206 cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 140. -bhakkha ideal or divine food SN i.141. -bhatta a worshipper of Br Ja iv.377 sq. -bhavana Br ■ world or abode of Br. Nd i.448. -bhūta divine being, most excellent being, said of the Buddha DN iii.84; MN i.111; MN iii.195, MN iii.224; SN iv.94; AN v.226; Iti 57; said of Arahants AN ii.206; SN iii.83 -yāna way of the highest good, path of goodness (cp brahma-patha) SN v.5; Ja vi.57 (C. ariyabhūmi: so read for arāya˚). -yāniya leading to Brahmā DN i.220 -loka the Br. world, the highest world, the world of the Celestials (which is like all other creation subject to change & destruction: see e.g. Vism 415 = Kp-a 121) the abode of the Br. devas; Heaven ■ It consists of 20 heavens, sixteen being worlds of form (rūpa-brahmaloka) and four, inhabited by devas who are incorporeal (arūpa˚). The devas of the Br. l. are free from kāma or sensual desires. Rebirth in this heaven is the reward of great virtue accompanied with meditation (jhāna) AN i.227 sq.; AN v.59 (as included in the sphere called sahassī cūḷanikā lokadhātu) ■ The brahmās like other gods are not necessarily sotāpannā or on the way to full knowledge (sambodhi-parāyaṇā); their attainments depend on the degree of their faith in the Buddha Dhamma, & Sangha, and their observance of the precepts ■ See e.g. DN iii.112; SN i.141, SN i.155, SN i.282; AN iii.332; AN iv.75, AN iv.103; Snp 508, Snp 1117; Ja ii.61; Pts i.84; Pv ii.1317; Dhs 1282; Vb 421; Vism 199, Vism 314, Vism 367 Vism 372, Vism 390, Vism 401, Vism 405, Vism 408, Vism 415 sq., 421, 557; Mhbv 54 83, 103 sq., 160; Vb-a 68; Pv-a 76; Vb-a 167, Vb-a 433 Vb-a 437, Vb-a 510. See also Cpd. 57, 141 sq.; Kirfel, Kosmographie 26, 191, 197, 207, and cp. in BSk. literature Lal 171. The Br ■ l. is said to be the one place where there are no women: Dhp-a i.270 ■ yāva Brahmalokā pi even unto Br.’s heaven, expression like “as far as the end of the world” MN i.34; SN v.265, SN v.288 -˚ûpaga attaining to the highest heaven DN ii.196; AN v.342; Snp 139; Ja ii.61; Kv 114. -˚ûpapatti rebirth in Heaven Snp 139. -˚parāyana the Br ■ loka as ultimate goal Ja ii.61; Ja iii.396. -˚sahavyatā the company of the Br. gods AN iv.135 sq. -yāna the best vehicle SN v.5 (+ dhammayāna). -vaccasin with a body like that of Mahābrahmā, combd with -vaṇṇin of most excellent complexion, in ster. passage at DN i.114, DN i.115; MN ii.167, cp. DN-a i.282: ˚vaccasī ti Mahābrahmuṇo sarīra-sadisena sarīrena samannāgato; ˚vaṇṇī ti seṭṭhavaṇṇī -vāda most excellent speech Vin i.3. -vimāna a palace of Brahmā in the highest heaven DN iii.28, DN iii.29; Iti 15; Vism 108. -vihāra sublime or divine state of mind, blissful meditation (exercises on a, altruistic concepts; b, equanimity; see on these meditations Dial i.298). There are 4 such “divine states,” viz. mettā karuṇā, muditā, upekkhā (see Vism 111; Dhs-a 192 and cp. Expositor 258; Dhs trsl. 65; BSk. same, e.g. Divy 224); DN ii.196; DN iii.220 (one of the 3 vihāra’s dibba˚, brahma˚, ariya˚); Thag 649; Ja i.139 (˚vihāre bhāvetvā… brahmalok’ ûpaga), ii.61; Dhs 262 Vism 295 sq. (˚niddesa), 319. -veṭhana the head-dress of a brahmin Snp-a 138 (one of the rare passages where brahma˚ = brahma III. 1). -sama like Brahmā Snp 508; Snp-a 318, Snp-a 325; Dhs-a 195. -ssara “heavenly sound, a divine voice, a beautiful and deep voice (with 8 fine qualities: see enumd under bindu) DN ii.211 = DN ii.227; Ja i.96; Ja v.336.
fr. bṛh, see brahant. Perhaps less with regard to the greatness of the divine principle than with ref. to the greatness or power of prayer or the ecstatic mind (i.e. holy enthusiasm). On etym. see Osthoff, “Bezzenberger’s Beiträge” xxiv.142 sq. (= Mir bricht charm, spell: Oicel. bragr poetry)
(adj.) only in cpd. sa˚; with Brahmā (or the Br. world). q.v.
(nt.) a term (not in the strictly Buddhist sense) for observance of vows of holiness, particularly of chastity: good & moral living (brahmaṃ cariyaṃ brahmāṇaṃ vā cariyaṃ = brahmacariyaṃ Kp-a 151); esp. in Buddh. sense the moral life, holy life, religious life, as way to end suffering Vin i.12, Vin i.19, renouncing the world, study of the Dhamma DN i.84, DN i.155; DN ii.106; DN iii.122 sq., 211; MN i.77 MN i.147, MN i.193, MN i.205, MN i.426, MN i.463, MN i.492, MN i.514; MN ii.38; MN iii.36, MN iii.116; SN i.38, SN i.43, SN i.87, SN i.105, SN i.154, SN i.209; SN ii.24, SN ii.29, SN ii.120, SN ii.219, SN ii.278 SN ii.284 (˚pariyosāna); iii.83, 189; iv.51, 104, 110, 126 136 sq., 163, 253, v.7 sq., 15 sq., 26 sq., 54 sq., 233 262, 272, 352; AN i.50, AN i.168, AN i.225; AN ii.26, AN ii.44, AN ii.185; AN iii.250 AN iii.346; AN iv.311; AN v.18, AN v.71, AN v.136; Snp 267, Snp 274 (vas-uttama) 566, 655, 1128; Thag 1027, Thag 1079; Iti 28, Iti 48, Iti 78, Iti 111; Dhp 155, Dhp 156, Dhp 312; Ja iii.396; Ja iv.52; Pv ii.913; Dhp-a iv.42 (vasuttamaṃ); Vb-a 504 ■ brahmacariyaṃ vussati to live the religious life AN i.115 (cp. ˚ṃ vusitaṃ in formula under Arahant II. A); ˚assa kevalin wholly given up to a good life AN i.162; ˚ṃ santānetuṃ to continue the good life AN iii.90; Dhp-a i.119; komāra˚; the religious training of a well-bred youth AN iii.224; Snp 289 ■ abrahmacariya unchastity, an immoral life sinful living MN i.514; DN i.4; Snp 396; Kp-a 26.
-antarāya raping Dhp-a ii.52. -ānuggaha a help to purity AN i.167; AN iv.167; Dhs 1348. -ūpaddava a disaster to religious life, succumbing to worldly desires MN iii.116. -vāsa state of chastity, holy & pure life adj. living a pure life AN i.253; Ja iii.393; Kv 93; Dhp-a i.225.
brahma + cariya
(adj.) only in phrase ādi˚ leading to the highest purity of life DN i.189, DN i.191 DN iii.284; AN iv.166.
fr. brahmacariya
(adj.) leading the religious life, pure, chaste SN i.182; Dhp 267.
fr. brahmacariya
(adj.) brahman, of the brahman rank; brahmanhood, of higher conduct, leading a pure life DN i.115 (at which passage DN-a i.286 includes Sāriputta, Moggallāna & Mahākassapa in this rank) MN ii.167; AN i.143 ■ abstr. der. brāhmaññā (nt.) higher or holy state, excellency of a virtuous life DN i.166; Vin iii.44; Ja iv.362 (= brāhmaṇa dhamma C.); brahmañña (nt.) DN ii.248; brahmaññā (f.) DN iii.72, DN iii.74; AN i.142; brahmaññattha (nt.) SN iii.192; SN v.25 sq., 195; AN i.260 (brāhmaññattha).
fr. brāhmaṇa
(& brāh˚) state of a brahman DN iii.145, DN iii.169; Dhp 332, cp. Dhp-a iv.33-Neg. a˚; DN iii.70, DN iii.71.
fr. brahma or brāhmaṇa
see brahmañña.
(nt.) state of a Brahma god, existence in the Br. world Vb 337; Vism 301 Vb-a 437; Dhp-a i.110. brahmattabhāva is to be read as brahm’ attabhāva (see under brahma).
abstr. fr. brahma
at Ja iii.207 (of a castle) is probably to be read brahmuttara “even higher than Brahmā,” i.e. unsurpassed, magnificent. C. explns by suvaṇṇa- pāsāda.
(adj.) “having Brahmā,” possessed or full of Brahmā; f. brahmavatī Np. Vism 434. Brahmanna. brahmannata & brahmannattha;
fr. brahma
see brahmañ˚.
a member of the Brahman caste; a Br teacher. In the Buddhist terminology also used for a man leading a pure, sinless & ascetic life, often even syn. with arahant ■ On brāhmaṇas as a caste & their representation in the Jātaka collection see Fick; Sociale Gliederung; esp. ch. 8, pp. 117–162 ■ Var fanciful etymologies, consisting of a word-play, in P definitions are e.g. “sattannaṃ dhammānaṃ bāhitattā br.” (like def. of bhikkhu) Nd i.86 = Nd ii.464a (cp Snp 519); ye keci bho-vādikā Nd i.249 = Nd ii.464b brahā-sukhavihāra-jhāna-jhāyin Mil 226; pāpaṃ bāhesuṃ DN iii.94; bāhita-pāpattā br. Dhp-a iii.84 ariyā bāhita-pāpattā br. DN-a i.244 ■ pl. brāhmaṇāse Snp 1079 sq ■ Var. ref8 in the Canon to all meanings of the term: DN i.90, DN i.94, DN i.104, DN i.119 sq., 136 (mahāsālā) 150 (˚dūta), 247; iii.44 sq., 61, 83 sq., 94 sq. (origin of) 147, 170, 258 (˚mahāsālā), 270; MN i.271 (˚karaṇā dhammā), 280; ii.84, 148, 177; iii.60, 270 (a bhikkhu addressed as br.); SN i.47, SN i.54, SN i.94 sq., 99 (˚kumāra), 117 125, 160 sq.; ii.77, 259; iv.157; v.194; AN i.66, AN i.110, AN i.163 (tevijjā); 166; ii.176; iii.221 sq. (brāhmaṇa-vagga) Iti 57 sq., 60, 98, 101; Ja iii.194; Ja iv.9; Ja vi.521 sq.; Vb 393 sq. For br. with the meaning “arahant” see also: Vin i.3; Vin ii.156 (br. parinibbuta); Thag 140, Thag 221 (brahma-bandhu pure āsiṃ, idāni kho ‘mhi brāhmaṇo) Dhp 383 sq.; Snp p.ssim (e.g. v. 142 kammanā hoti brāhmaṇo; 284 sq.); Ja iv.302 sq.; Mil 225. Ten kinds of Br. are pronounced to be apetā brahmaññā degraded fr. brahmanship Ja iv.361 sq. Diff. schools of br. teachers are enumd at DN i.237 sq. (Tevijja Sutta) ■ brāhmaṇānaṃ pubbakā isayo mantānaṃ kattāro “the ten inspired Seers of old times, who composed the Vedic hymns”; their names are Aṭṭhaka Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi, Angirasa Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu Vin i.245; DN i.104; AN iii.224; AN iv.61; cp. Vv-a 265 ■ f. brāhmaṇī (n. or adj.) the wife of a brāhmaṇa DN i.193; Ja v.127 (of a purohita or high priest); Dhp-a i.33; Dhp-a iv.176; Pv-a 55 Pv-a 61, Pv-a 64. Freq. in combn brāhmaṇī pajā this generation of brāhmaṇas, e.g. DN i.249; AN i.260; AN ii.23 (see pajā).
-ibbhā Brahmins & Vaiśyas Ja vi.228 sq. -kumārikā a brahmin young girl Ja iii.93. -kula a br. clan or family Ja ii.85, Ja ii.394, Ja ii.411; Ja iii.147, Ja iii.352; Pv-a 21, Pv-a 61 -gahapatikā priests & laymen (“clerk & yeoman Rh. D. in S.B.E. xi.258) DN ii.178; DN iii.148, DN iii.153, DN iii.170 sq. SN i.59, SN i.184; AN i.110; Vin i.35; Ja i.83. -gāma a br village Vin i.197; DN i.87, DN i.127; SN i.111; Ja ii.368; Ja iii.293 Ja iv.276. -dhamma duty of a br.; see on contrast between Brahmaṇic & Buddhist view Ja iv.301 sq., cp also Snp-a 312
325 (br ■ dhammika-suta) & Fick, l. c. 124; -putta son of a br. Pv-a 62. -bhojana giving food (alms) to brahmans Vin i.44. -māṇava a young brahmin Ja iv.391. -rūpa (in) form of a br. Pv-a 63. -vaḍḍhakī a br. carpenter Ja iv.207. -vaṇṇin having the appearance of a brahmin Cp x.10. -vācanaka a br. disputation some sort of elocution show Ja i.318; Ja iv.391 -vāṭaka circle of brahmins Dhp-a iv.177 (v.l. ˚vādaka) -vāṇija a br. merchant Pv-a 113. -sacca a brahmanic (i.e. standard, holy) truth AN ii.176 (where the Buddha sets forth 4 such br ■ saccāni, diff. from the usual 4 ariyasaccāni).
fr. brahma; cp. Vedic brāhmaṇa, der. fr. brahmán
(nt.) state of a true brahman, “holiness supreme” Thag 631.
for brahmañña
to say, tell, call; show explain DN i.95; Snp 308 sq.; Dhp 383 sq.; Cp vi.8; Mil 314, Mil 327 ■ Constructed with double acc. or with dat of person & acc. of thing said (cp. Mil 233) ■; Forms: Pres. 1st sg. brūmi Iti 33, Iti 40; S 1033, 1042 sq. (expld as ācikkhāmi desemi paññāpemi etc. by Nd.); Pv i.23 (= kathemi Pv-a 11); Thag 214; Thag 2nd sg. brūsi Snp 457 Snp 1032, Snp 1081; Ja ii.48; Thig 58; Thig 3rd sg. brūti Snp 122 imper. brūhi Thag 1266; Snp 1018, Snp 1034, Snp 1043; Mil 318 ■ pret. abravi Snp 981; Thag 1275; Ja vi.269; Pv ii.964 (v.l. abruvi); Pv-a 264; abruvi Ja iii.62, and bravi Ja v.204; Ja v.3rd sg. med. bravittha Vv 5310 (= kathesi Vv-a 240); 1st sg. also abraviṃ Cp ii.68; 3rd pl. abravuṃ Ja v.112.
brū, Sk. bravīti, Med. brūte; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 1412. Expld by Dhtp 366 as “vacane,” by Dhtm 593 as “vācāyaṃ, viyattiyaṃ”
to say DN i.95 (expld as “brūmetū ti vadatu” DN-a i.265).
possible Caus. fr. brūti, but as Geiger, P.Gr. 1412, rightly remarks “not critically sound”
(nt.) expansion, increasing, spreading; cultivation, development (trs. & intrs.) Mil 313 (Kern,; Toev. s. v. “amusement”); Dhs-a 332; Vv-a 20 (sukha˚). Cp. upa˚.
fr. brūheti
increaser; one who practises, is devoted to; in phrase brūhetā suññāgārānaṃ frequenter of solitary places; given up to solitary meditation MN i.33, MN i.213.
n. ag. of brūheti
to cause to grow, increase; hence: to promote, develop, practise, to put or devote oneself to; to look after, to foster, make enjoy; practically syn. with sevati; SN i.198 (saddhaṃ) Snp 324 (kammāni); Dhp 285 (imper. brūhaya = vaḍḍhaya Dhp-a iii.429); Ud 72; Ja i.289; Mil 313 (saddena sotaṃ br.); Pv-a 168 (vaḍḍheti + , for ābhāveti) ■ Cp anu˚, pari˚.
Bh.
cp. Sk. bṛṃhayati; fr. brh2 to increase; Dhtp 346 & Dhtm 505: vuddhiyaṃ. Cp. brahant
(indecl.) the letter or sound (syllable) bh; figuring in Bdhgh’s exegesis of the N. Bhagavā as representing bhava, whereas ga stands for gamana, va for vanta Kp-a 109 ■ Like ba˚; we often find bha˚; mixed up with pa˚ ■ see e.g. bhaṇḍa bhaṇḍati; bh represents b. in bhasta = Sk. basta, bhisa = Sk. bisa, bhusa = Sk buśa ■ bha-kāra the sound (or ending) ˚bha, which at Vin iv.7 is given as implying contempt or abuse among other low terms (hīnā akkosā). This refers also to the sound (ending) ˚ya (see ya-kāra). The expln for this probably is that ˚bha is abstracted from words ending thus, where the word itself meant something inferior or contemptible, and this shade of meaning was regarded as inhering in the ending, not in the root of the word, as e.g. in ibbha (menial).
(f.) superciliousness Snp 485. Ja iii.99; Vism 26 (˚karaṇa); Snp-a 412. Der. bhākuṭika (q.v.). See also bhūkuṭi.
cp. Epic Sk. bhrakuṭi from older bhṛkuti, bhrukuṭi or bhrūkuṭi
(-˚) (adj.) 1. eating, feeding on DN iii.41 (sāka˚ etc.); SN i.69 (pahūta˚ voracious, of fire) 238 (kodha˚); Pv i.91 (lohita-pubba˚); Pp 55 (tiṇa˚) Sdhp 388 (tiṇa˚).
2. eatable, to be eaten; nt. ˚ṃ food, prey, in cpd. appa-bhakkha offering no food Vv 843 (appodaka + ) ■ pl. also bhakkhā (eatables Ja ii.14; Ja iv.241 (similar context; = bhojana C.); Pv ii.941 (= āhārā Pv-a 129). It is to be pointed out that bhakkhā occurs in poetry, in stock phrase “dibbā bhakkhā pātubhavanti”; cp. Vedic bhakṣa (m) feeding partaking of food, esp. drink (of Soma), thus something extraordinary.
fr. bhakṣ
to eat, to feed upon Pv ii.25 (pubba-lohitaṃ); Dhp-a ii.57 (vātaṃ). inf. bhakkhituṃ Ja ii.14 ■ Caus. bhakkheti in same meaning Ja iv.349 (aor. bhakkhesuṃ); cp. BSk. bhakṣayati Divy 276.
bhakṣ fr. bhaj, cp. Sk. bhakṣati & bhakṣayati; Dhtp 17 & 537 expl;ns by “adana”
luck, lot, fortune, only in cpd. dub˚; (adj.) unhappy, unpleasant uncomfortable Iti 90; DN-a i.96 (˚karaṇa) ■ bhaga (in verse “bhagehi ca vibhattavā” in exegesis of word “Bhagava”) at DN-a i.34 read bhava, as read at id. p Vism 210.
Vedic bhaga, bhaj, see bhagavant etc.
(& ā) an ulcer, fistula Vin i.216, Vin i.272; Nd i.370. Has expln at Dhtm 204 “bhaganda secane hoti” (“comes from sprinkling” anything to do with our word?
cp. late Sk. bhagandara
Name of a mountain Snp-a 197 (loc. Bhagalavati pabbate). Occurs also as an assembly-hall under the Name of Bhagalavatī at DN iii.201 Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 196.
of uncertain origin
(adj. n.) fortunate, illustrious, sublime, as Ep. and title “Lord.” Thus applied to the Buddha (amhākaṃ Bh. and his predecessors. Occurs with extreme frequency of fanciful exegetic explns of the term & its meaning we mention e.g. those at Nd;1 142 = Nd ii.466; Vism 210 sq. DN-a i.33 sq. Usual trs. Blessed One, Exalted One.
cp. Vedic bhagavant, fr. bhaga
(f.) a sister Ja vi.32. The popular etym. of bh. as given at Vb-a 108 is the same as that for bhātar, viz. “ bhagatī ti bh.”-Cpd bhagini-māla a “sister garland” (?) Name of a tree Ja vi.270 (= upari-bhaddaka).
Epic Sk. bhaginī
broken, in phrases “sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā” Ja i.493, which is applied metaphorically at Dhp 154 (phāsukā = pāpakā?), expld Dhp-a iii.128 (artificially) by “avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā”; further “bhaggā pāpakā dhammā” Vism 211; bhaggā kilesā Mil 44; and bhagga -rāga, ˚dosa etc. (in def. of Bhagavā) at Nd i.142 = Nd ii.466 B, quoted at Vism 211.
pp. of bhañj, Sk. bhagna
(nt.) fortune, good luck, welfare, happiness Vism 210 (akāsi ˚ṃ ti garū ti Bhāgyavā etc.).;
fr. bhaga; cp. Sk. & P. bhāgya
potter (?) Ja iii.381, Ja iii.382 in voc. bhaggava (m.) & bhaggavī (f.). The terms are not expld in C., evidently because somewhat obscure According to Kern, Toev. s. v. the Sk. form in this meaning occurs at MBh. i.190, 47; Saddhp. 191 sq. Mvu iii.347.
cp. Sk. *bhārgava, a der. fr. bhṛgu, & bhargaḥ, of same root as Lat. fulgur lightning; Gr. φλός light Ger. blitzen, blank; Ags. blanca white horse, all of the idea of “shining, bright, radiant.”-How the meaning “potter” is connected with this meaning, is still a problem, perhaps we have to take the word merely as an Epithet at the one passage where it occurs, which happens to be in the Kumbhakāra-jātaka, v. 6, 7. i.e. the “Jātaka of the potter”
(adj. n.) having good luck or auspices, fortunate; in def of “Bhagavā” at Vism 210 = DN-a i.34 (“bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto”); with ref. to the 4 qualities implied in the word “bhagavā,” which passage is alluded to at Vv-a 231 by remark “bhāgyavantat’ ādīhi catūhi kāraṇehi Bhagavā.”
fr. bhagga2, cp. Sk. & P. bhāgyavant
(nt.) hemp coarse hempen cloth Vin i.58 (where combd with sāṇa).
cp. Sk. bhanga, which occurs already Atharva-veda xi. 6. 15 (see Zimmer. Altind. Leben 68) also Av. baṃha, Polish pienka hemp. On its possible etym. connection with Vedic śaṇa (Ath. Veda ii. 4. 5 = P. saṇa & sāṇa hemp (= Gr.; κάνναβις, Ger. hanf E. hemp) see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. cannabis
(nt.) 1. (lit.) breaking, breaking off, in sākhā˚; a layer of broken-off branches Ja iii.407.
2. (fig.) breaking up, dissolution, disruption (see on form Cpd. 25, 66; Pts i.57 sq. (˚ânupassanā insight into disruption), quoted & expl;d at Vism 640 sq.; Vb-a 27 (˚khaṇa); Sdhp 48 Sdhp 78 (āsā˚). Cp. vi˚. Bhangana & Bhangaloka;
cp. Class. Sk. bhanga, fr. bhañj: see bhañjati
are vv.ll. of Npl. at Nd i.155 for Gaṅgaṇa & Aṅgaṇeka; respectively With misspelling bh → g, cp. bheṇḍaka → geṇḍaka.
to bhanga1?
(adj.) to be carried, kept or sustained AN iii.46 (= a dependant) Ja iv.301 (C. bharitabba). As Kern. Toev. s. v. bhacca points out this gāthā “bhaccā mātā pitā bandhū, yena jāto sa yeva so” is a distortion of MBh i.74, 110, where it runs “bhastrā mātā, pituḥ putro, yena jāto sa eva saḥ (or is it bhrastā?).
grd. fr. bhṛ; cp. Sk. bhṛtya
to associate with (acc.), keep companionship with, follow, resort to; to be attached to (acc.), to love Freq. syName of sevati. The Dhtp & Dhtm mark the fig. meaning (bhaj;2) by sevāyaṃ (Dhtp 61), sevāputhakkare (Dhtm 523) & saṃsevane (ib. 76), whilst the lit. (bhaj;1) is expressed by vibhājane ■ Snp 958 (bhajato rittaṃ āsanaṃ; gen. sq. ppr. = sevato etc Nd i.466); Dhp 76, Dhp 303; Pp 26, Pp 33; Ja i.216 = Ja iii.510 (disā bh.) vi.358; Sdhp 275 ■ Pot. bhaje Dhp 76, Dhp 78 and bhajetha Dhp 78 (= payirupāsetha), 208 in sense of imper.; hence 2nd sg. formed like Caus. as bhajehi Ja iii.148 (C. bhajeyyāsi; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 1392). -grd. bhajitabba Nd ii.s. v. kāmaguṇā B (sevitabba bh., bhāvetabba).
bhaj to divide, partake etc.: see Caus. bhājeti & cp. vi˚
(f.) resorting to, familiarity with Pp 20 = Dhs 1326, cp. sam˚ & Dhs trsl. 345.
fer. bhaj
(adj.) loving, attached to, worshipping Nd i.142 (in expln of “Bhagavā”).
fr. bhajati
to roast, toast Vin iv.264; Dhtp 79 & Dhtm 94, expl;d by “pāke.” Caus. bhajjāpeti to have, or get roasted Vin iv.264; Dhp-a i.224 (v.l. K. paccāpeti).
Vedic bhṛjjati, cp. Gr. φρύγω to roast, φρύγανον dry wood; Lat. frīgo to make dry
(adj.) breaking, spoiling, destroying (attha˚ ■ visaṃvāda; cp. bhañjanaka) Ja iii.499.
fr. bhañjati
1. (trs. & intrs.) to break Vin i.74 (phāsukā bhañjitabbā ribs to be broken); Dhp 337 (mā bhañji = mā bhañjatu C.). Pv ii.93 (sākhaṃ bhañjeyya = chindeyya Pv-a 114); Pv-a 277 (akkho bhañji the axle broke, intrs.).
2. to fold or furl (the lip) oṭṭhaṃ bh. Ja ii.264.
3. (fig.) to break up, spoil destroy, in atthaṃ bh. to destroy the good SN iv.347 (cp bhañjanaka) ■ pp. bhagga1 (q.v.).
bhañj, cp. Vedic bhañjati & bhanakti, roots with & without r, as Lat. frango = Goth. brikan = Ohg brehhan, E. break, Sk. giri-bhraj breaking forth from the mountain; and Sk. bhanga, bhañji wave ■ The Dhtp. 68 paraphrases by “omaddana,” Dhtm 73 by “avamaddana”
(nt.) breakage, breaking down, break, only in cpd. akkha˚; break of the axle Vism 32 Vism 45; Dhp-a i.375; Pv-a 277.
fr. bhañjati
(nt.) anointing, smearing, oiling, in gatta˚ and pāda˚ ■ bbhañjana-tela oil for rubbing the body and the feet Vism 100; Vv-a 295.
for byañjana, in composition; maybe graphical mistake
(nt.) destroying, hurting, spoiling, in phrase attha˚; destroying the welfare (with ref. to the telling of lies) Dhp-a iii.356; Vv-a 72; cp bhañjaka.
fr. bhañjana1
(adj.) breaking, destroying, in cakka˚; breaking the wheel, fig. breaking the state of harmony Ja v.112.
fr. bhañj
(Ja v.317) see bhā.
to hire; originally the same as bhṛtya fr. bhṛta & bhṛti of; bhṛ Dhtp 94, Dhtm 114 ■ bhaṭa = bhatyaṃ i.e. bhṛtyaṃ servant, hireling, soldier Mil 240; Vv-a 305 (bhattavetana˚). As to suggestion of bhaṭa occurring in phrase yathā-bhaṭaṃ (Kern. Toev. s. v. yathābhaṭaṃ see discussion under yathā bhataṃ.
-patha service, employment, salary Vin iv.265; Snp-a 542.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaṭa, fr, dial.; bhaṭ
dropped, fallen down Ja i.482; Ja iv.222, Ja iv.382; Ja v.444. Cp. pari˚.
pp. of bhraṃś, see bhassati
spoken, said Vv 6319 (su˚ = subhāsita Vv-a 265). See also paccā˚ & pari˚ cp. also next.
pp. of bhaṇ, for bhaṇita
(?) wages, tip, donation Ja iv.261 (by C. expld as kathita, thus same as bhattha2) v.l. bhatta. Cp. Sk. bhāṭa & BSk. bhāṭaka Mvu iii.37.
perhaps for bhatta?
to speak, tell, proclaim (the nearest synonym is katheti: see Nd ii.s. v. katheti Dhp 264; Pp 33, Pp 56; Dhp-a ii.95 ■ ppr. bhaṇanto Snp 397. Pot. bhaṇe Snp 1131 (= bhaṇeyya Nd ii.469); Dhp 224 (saccaṃ; = dīpeyya vohareyya Dhp-a iii.316). Also bhaṇeyya Snp 397. An old subjunctive form is bhaṇā- mase SN i.209 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126). Prohib. mā bhāṇi. A Caus. form is bhāṇaye (Pot.) Snp 397.
bhaṇ; cp. Sk. bhaṇati; Ohg. ban = E. ban etc. “proclamation.” See connections in Walde, Lat Wtb. under fabula ■ Expld by Dhtp 111 as “bhaṇana. by Dhtm 162 as “bhāsana”
(nt.) telling, speaking Dhp-a iv.93 (˚sīla, adj. wont to speak); Dhtp 111.
fr. bhaṇati
(indecl.) “I say,” used as an interjection of emphasis, like “to be sure,” “look here.” It is a familiar term of address often used by a king to his subjects Vin i.240 (amhākaṃ kira bhaṇe vijite Bhaddiya-nagare), 241 (gaccha bhaṇe jānāhi… ) Mil 21 (atthi bhaṇe añño koci paṇḍito… ).
orig. 1st sg. pres. Med. of bhaṇati
(nt.) 1. stock in trade; collectively goods, wares, property, possessions, also “object” SN i.43 (itthi bhaṇḍānaṃ uttamaṃ woman is the highest property), Nd ii.38; Ja iii.353 (yācita˚ object asked, = yāca); Thag-a 288 (id.); Vism 22 ■ bhaṇḍaṃ kiṇāti to buy goods Vb-a 165 ■ bhaṇḍaṃ vikkiṇati to sell goods Ja i.377 (+ paṭibhaṇḍaṃ dāpeti to receive goods in return); vikkiṇiya-bh. goods for sale Dhp-a i.390 ■ assāmika˚; ownerless goods, unclaimed property Ja vi.348; ābharaṇa˚; trinkets, jewelry Ja iii.221; piya˚; best goods, treasure Ja iii.279; bahu˚ having many goods, rich in possessions Vin iii.138 Kp-a 241 (of a bhikkhu); vara˚; best property or belongings Vin iv.225.
2. implement, article, instrument Vin ii.142, Vin ii.143 (where 3 kinds are distinguished of wood, copper, & of earthenware), 170 (id.); Dāvs iv.50 (turiya˚) ■ In assa (hatthi˚) -bhaṇḍa Vin i.85 sq. the meaning “horse (elephant-) trader (or owner) does not seem clear; should we read paṇḍaka? Cp. bhaṇḍa = paṇḍa under bhaṇḍati.
-āgāra store house, warehouse, only in der. -āgārika keeper of stores Vin i.284; Vin ii.176; surveyor of the (royal) warehouses, royal treasurer (a higher court office: cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 101 sq.) Ja iii.293 Ja iv.43; Ja v.117; Mil 37; DN-a i.21; Pv-a 2, Pv-a 20. -āhāraka (trader) taking up goods Dhp-a iv.60.
cp. Epic Sk. bhāṇḍa
(adj. in sense of collect. nt.) 1. article, implement; kīḷā˚; toys Ja vi.6.
2. belongings property Vin iv.225.
3. trappings, in assa˚; horsetrappings Ja ii.113.
fr. bhaṇḍa
to quarrel, abuse Vin i.76 (saddhiṃ) iv.277; Thag 933; Snp-a 357 (aññamaññaṃ).
bhaṇḍ, cp. “paṇḍa bhaṇḍa paribhāse” Dhtp 568; Dhtm 798
(nt.) quarrel, quarrelling, strife Iti 11; Ja iii.149; Nd i.196; Dhp-a i.55, Dhp-a i.64.
fr. bhaṇḍ, cp. BSk. bhāṇḍana Divy 164
a certain plant or flower Ja v.420. Reading uncertain.
?
(f.) collection of goods, heap, bundle; bhaṇḍikaṃ karoti to make into a heap Ja iii.221, Ja iii.437; or bhaṇḍikaṃ bandhati to tie into a bundle Dhp-a ii.254; Vv-a 187. sahassa˚; a heap of 1,000 kahāpaṇas Ja ii.424; Ja iii.60; Ja iv.2 ■ Note. bhaṇḍika is v.l. at Ja iii.41 for gaṇḍikā.
fr. bhaṇḍaka, in collect. sense
(adj.) bald-headed, close shaven Vin i.71 (˚kamma shaving), 76 (kammāra˚); Ja iii.22; Ja vi.538 (+ tittira); Mil 11, Mil 128.
etym. uncertain, dialectical or = paṇḍu?
(adj.) 1. supported, fed, reared, maintained AN iii.46 (bhatā bhaccā “maintained are my dependents”); Ja v.330 (kicchā bh.), given by Kern, Toev. s. v. in meaning “full” with wrong ref Ja vi.14. Cp. bharita.
cp. Epic Sk. bhṛta
a hired servant, hireling, servant Thag 606, Thag 685, Thag 1003; Ja iii.446; Mil 379; Dhp-a i.119, Dhp-a i.233 (˚vīthi servant street). See also Fick Sociale Gliederung 158, 195, 196.
cp. Epic Sk. bhṛtaka
(f.) wages, fee, pay Ja i.475; Ja iii.325, Ja iii.446; Dhp-a i.21, Dhp-a i.70; Dhtp 94 (in expln of root bhaṭ; see bhaṭa).
cp. Vedic bhṛti, fr. bhṛ;
(f.) fee Ja iv.184.
fr. bhati
(nt.) feeding, food, nourishment, meal Dhp 185; Pp 28, Pp 55; Ja ii.15; Ja v.170 (bhatta-manuñña-rūpaṃ for bhattaṃ-); Vism 66 (where 14 kinds enumd, i.e. sangha˚ uddesa˚ etc.); Sdhp 118 ■ ucchiṭṭha˚ food thrown away Pv-a 173; uddesa˚ special food Vin i.58 = Vin i.96, cp ii.175; devasika˚ daily food (as fee or wages) DN-a i.296 (= bhatta-vetana); dhura˚ a meal to which a bhikkhu is invited as leader of others, i.e. a responsible meal Ja i.449; Ja iii.97 (v.l. dhuva˚); dhuva˚ constant supply of food Vin i.25, Vin i.243.
-agga [cp. BSk. bhaktāgra Divy 335; Mvu ii.478 a refectory Vin i.44; MN i.28; Ja v.334. -ammaṇa food trough Ja vi.381. -ābhihāra gift of food SN i.82. -uddesaka (thera) (an elder) who supervises the distribution of food, a superintendent of meals Vism 388, Dhp-a i.244. -kāraka one who prepares the meal or food, a cook, butler Ja i.150 sq.; Ja v.296; Ja vi.349; DN-a i.157 -kicca “meal-performance,” meal (cp. BSk. bhaktakṛtya Divy 185) Ja i.87; Mil 9; Vism 278 (kata˚ after the meal, cp. kata ii.1. a); Pv-a 76. -kilamatha fatigue after eating Snp-a 58 (cp. ˚sammada). -gāma a village giving tribute or service Dhp-a i.398. -dāna gift of a meal Pv-a 54. -puṭa a bag with food Ja ii.82, Ja ii.203 Ja iii.200; DN-a i.270. Cp. puṭabhatta. -puṭaka same Kp-a 44; Vb-a 234; Vism 251. -bhoga enjoyment of food SN i.92. -randhaka a cook Ja iv.431. -vissagga serving a meal, meal-function, participation at a meal Vin iv.263; Pv iii.29 (so read for vissatta; expld at Pv-a 184 by bhattakicca & bhuñjana); Mil 9; Snp-a 19 Snp-a 140. -vetana service for food, food as wages (cp bhaktā-dāsa a slave working for food Manu viii.415 see Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 197), in general “hire wages,” also “professional fee” DN iii.191; Vin iii.222 (rañño bh-v ■ āhāro “in the King’s pay”); Ja iv.132 sq. Mil 379; Dhp-a i.25 (to a physician); Vv-a 305. -velā meal-time Snp-a 111. -sammada drowsiness after a meal SN i.7; Ja vi.57; Vb 352; Vism 278, Vism 295. -sālā hall for meals, refectory Vism 72.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhakta, orig. pp. of bhajati
a husband; nom. sg. bhattā Thig 413; Ja v.104, Ja v.260 (here in meaning “supporter”); vi.492; gen. bhattu Ja v.169, Ja v.170; acc bhattāraṃ Thig 412.
Vedic bhartṛ to bhṛ;
(adj.) possessing reverence or worship(pers), worshipful, adored; in a (late) verse analysing fancifully the word “Bhagavant, at DN-a i.34 = Vism 210 sq. Expld at Vism 212 by “bhaji-sevi-bahulaṃ karoti.”
fr. *bhakta, pp. of bhajati
(f.) 1. devotion, attachment, fondness Pp 20; Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs trsl. 345); Pp 65; Ja v.340 (= sineha C.); vi.349; Vv-a 353, Vv-a 354.
2. in bhatti-kata Thig 413 it means “service,” thus “doing service” (or “rendered a servant”?).
3. of uncertain meaning in bhatti-kamma, probably “making lines, decoration ornamentation” Vin ii.113 (˚kamma-kata decorated) i.51. The reading is uncertain, may be bhati˚ (? Kern Toev. s. v. trsls “patchwork”?). Cp. vi˚.
cp. Vedic & Class. Sk. bhakti, fr.; bhaj: see bhajati
(adj.) (-˚) in dhuva˚; being in constant supply of food, being a regular attendant (servant) or adviser Vin ii.15. Also at Thag-a 267 in meaning “being a servant, working for food” in expln of bhattikatā (= kata-sāmi-bhattikā), said of a toiling housewife.
fr. bhatta
(adj.) 1. devoted? 2. discerning, analytical, perspicacious? Thag 370; Com. has: yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattiyā tattha bhattimā nāma.
from bhatti
venerable, reverend mostly in voc. as address “Sir, holy father” etc., to men of the Order. voc. sg. bhadante SN i.216 (v.l. bhaddante); voc. pl. bhadantā Dhp-a iii.414 ■ A contracted form of bhadante is bhante (q.v.). Note. In case of bhadanta being the corresp. of Sk. *bhavanta (for bhavān) we would suppose the change v → d and account for dd on grounds of pop. analogy after bhadda See bhante. The pl. nom. from bhadantā is formed after bhadante, which was felt as a voc. of an a-stem with-e for-a as in Prk. Māgadhī.
a secondary adj. formation from address bhaddaṃ (= bhadraṃ) te “hail to thee,” cp “bhaddaṃ vo” under bhadda 1
(adj.) (-˚) only in cpd. ehi˚; lit. “one belonging to the (greeting) ʻcome hail to thee,ʼ i.e. one who accepts an invitation DN iii.40, MN ii.161; AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55. See also under ehi.
fr. bhadanta
in ˚paṇḍu at AN i.181 is to be read as badara˚.
(adj.) 1. auspicious lucky, high, lofty, august, of good omen reverend (in address to people of esteem), good, happy fortunate DN ii.95(a); SN i.117(b); Dhp 143 sq.(b) (of a good, well-trained horse), 380(b) (id.); Ja vi.281(b) (24 bhadrā pāsakā or lucky throws of the dice); Dhp-a i.33(a) (voc. bhadde = ayye) ■ bhadraṃ (nt.) something bringing luck, a good state, welfare; a good deed (= kalyāṇaṃ) Dhp 120 (= bhadra-kamma, viz. kāyasucarita etc. Dhp-a iii.14); Pv-a 116 (= iṭṭhaṃ). Also as form of address “hail to thee,” bhaddaṃ vo Ja v.260–2. a kind of arrow (cp. Sk. bhalla) Ja ii.275 (v.l. bhadra; so Kern, Toev. s. v.; but C. takes it as bhadda lucky, in neg. sense “unlucky, sinister,” & expl;s by bībhaccha = awful).
3. bull (cp. Sk. bhadra, Halāyudha 5, 21) Thag 16, Thag 173, Thag 659.
-mukha one whose face brings blessings, a complimentary address, like “my noble & c friend!” [cp BSk. bhadramukha; Divy frequent: see Index], MN ii.53; SN i.74 (cp. K.S. i.100n) Ja ii.261 (v.l. bhadda˚); Vism 92 (v.l. SS bhadda˚). -muttaka [cp. Sk. bhadramusta] a kind of fragrant grass (Cyperus rotundus) DN-a i.81 Abhp 599. -yuga a noble pair Dhp-a i.95 (Kolita Upatissa),; -vāhana the auspicious (royal) vehicle (or carriage) Mil 4.
cp. Vedic bhadra, on diff. forms see Geiger, P.Gr. § 532. Dhtp 143, Dhtp 589 expls bhadd by “kalyāṇe”; whereas Dhtm 205 & 823 gives; bhad (bhadd) with expln “kalyāṇa kammāni”
1. good, of good quality (opp. pāpaka) AN iv.169(a).
2. honoured of high repute Ja iii.269(a) (= sambhāvita C.).
3. (m nt.) a good thing, lucky or auspicious possession, a valuable. Appld to the 8 requisites (parikkhārā) of a Samaṇa at Ja v.254(b) ■ On upari-bhaddaka (Name of a tree Ja vi.269; C. = bhagini-mālā) see upari ■ At AN iv.255 bhaddaka is given as one of the eight ingredients of the sun & moon; it may be gold (? cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 190), or simply a term for a very valuable quality.
fr. bhadda
swerving, swaying, staggering, deviating; always used of an uncontrolled car (ratha or yāna) Dhp 222 (ratha = ativegena dhāvanta Dhp-a iii.301); (yāna = adanta akārita aviṇīta Nd i.145) Dhs-a 260 (˚yāna). Cp. vi˚.
pp. of bham
(nt.) turmoil, confusion Dhs 429 (= vibhanti-bhāva Dhs-a 260, so read for vibhatti˚) cp. Dhs trsl. 120.
fr. bhanta
voc. of polite address: Sir, venerable Sir, used like bhadante. Either abs. as voc.: Vin i.76; DN ii.154, DN ii.283; Ja ii.111; Ja iii.46; Mil 19; or with another voc.: Mil 25; or with other oblique cases, as with nom. DN i.179; Dhp-a i.62. with gen. DN i.179.
would correspond either to Sk. *bhavantaḥ (with ending ˚e as Māgadhism for ˚aḥ) = bhavān, or to P bhadanta. In both cases we have a contraction. The expln bhante = bhadante (bhadantaḥ) is advocated by Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 165, 366b, intimated also by Weber Bhagavatī 156 n. 3 (unable to explain-e); the expln bhante = bhavantah (see bhavaṃ) by Geiger, P.Gr. 983 hinted at by Weber loc. cit. (bhavantaḥ = bhagavantaḥ).
(adj.) 1. able, capable, fit for (-˚ or with dat. or inf.); abhabba unfit, incapable Vin i.17; SN iii.27 (dukkha-kkhayāya); iv.89 (id.) Pp 12, Pp 13; Vism 116 (bhikkhu), neg. Iti 106 (antakiriyāya), 117 (phuṭṭhuṃ sambodhiṃ); Ja i.106 (˚puggala a person unfit for the higher truths & salvation); bhabbābhabba nt & unfit people Nd;2 2353 = Vism 205 expld at Vb 341, Vb 342 by “bhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ.”
2. possible (abhabba impossible) MN iii.215 (kammaṃ bhabbaābhāsa apparently possible) ■ See also abhabba.
grd of bhū, Sk. bhavya
(f.) possibility; neg. a˚; impossibility Snp 232; Kp-a 191; Vv-a 208.
abstr. fr. bhabba
to spin (of a wheel), to whirl about, to roam Dhp 371 (mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ); Ja i.414; Ja iii.206 Ja iv.4 (cakkaṃ matthake); iv.6 (kumbha-kāra-cakkaṃ iva bh.); v.478 ■ pp. bhanta ■ Caus. bhameti to make whirl Vism 142 (cakkaṃ).
bhram; on etym. see K.Z. iv.443; vi.152. Expld at Dhtp 219 by “anavaṭṭhāne,” i.e. unsettledness
1. a bee Ja v.205 (˚vaṇṇa bee-coloured, i.e. of black colour, in expln of kaṇha); Thig 252. Usually in similes, e.g. at Dhp 49 (cp. Dhp-a i.374 sq.); Vism 142, Vism 152; Snp-a 139.
2. in bhamara-tanti “the string that sounds,” one of the seven strings of the lute Ja ii.253, cp. Vv-a 140.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhramara; either to bhram (semantically quick, unsteady motion = confused noise), cp. Gr. φόρμιγς zither; or perhaps for *bramara to Ohg. bremo = Ger. bremse gadfly, bremen = brummen to hum; Gr. βρόμος thunder, Lat. fremo to growl roar: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fremo
(f.) a humming top Ja v.478.
fr. bhamara
(f.) eyebrow Ja vi.476 (ṭhita˚), 482 (nīla˚).
secondary formation after bhamuka
(& Bhamukha) (f.) eyebrow Th 11, 232 = SN i.132 pamukh-J iv.18 (in expln of su-bbhū = su-bhamukhā in C. Fausböll puts “bhamuka”? Kern on this passage quotes BSk. bhrūmukha, see Toev. s. v.); vi.503 (aḷāra˚ for pamukha); Dhp-a iii.102; Dhp-a iv.90, Dhp-a iv.197 = Ja v.434; Snp-a 285.
cp. Vedic bhrū; the Pali word is possibly a compn of bhrū + mukha with dissimilation of first u to a
(nt.) fear, fright, dread AN ii.15 (jāti-maraṇa˚); DN iii.148, DN iii.182; Dhp 39, Dhp 123, Dhp 212 sq., 283; Nd i.371, Nd i.409; Pp 56; Vism 512; Kp-a 108; Snp-a 155; Dhp-a iii.23. There are some lengthy enumns of objects causing fear (sometimes under term mahabbhaya, mahā-bhaya), e.g. one of 17 at Mil 196, one of 16 (four times four) at AN ii.121 sq. the same in essence, but in different order at Nd ii.470 and at Vb-a 502; one of 16 (with remark “ādi,” and so on) at Vism 645. Shorter combns are to be found at Snp 964 (5, viz. ḍaṃsā, adhipātā, siriṃsapā, manussaphassā catuppādā); Vb 379 (5, viz. ājīvika˚, asiloka˚ parisa-sārajja˚, maraṇa˚, duggati˚, expld at Vb-a 505 sq.), 376 (4: jāti˚, jarā˚, vyādhi˚, maraṇa˚) 367 (3: jāti˚, jarā˚, maraṇ˚); Nd i.402 (2: diṭṭha-dhammikaṃ & samparāyikaṃ bh.) ■; abhaya absence of fear safety Vin i.75 (abhay-ûvara for abhaya-vara?) Dhp 317; Ja i.150; Dhp-a iii.491.
-ñāṇa insight into what is to be feared: see Cpd. 66 -dassāvin seeing or realising an object of fear, i.e. danger Vb 244, Vb 247 and passim. -dassin id. Dhp 31, Dhp 317 -bherava fear & dismay MN i.17 (= citt’ uttrasassa ca bhayānak’ ārammaṇassa adhivacanaṃ MA 113), Name of Suttanta No. 4 in Majjhima (pp. 16 sq.), quoted at Vism 202; Snp-a 206.
fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhaya, P. bhāyati
(adj.) frightful, horrible Ja iii.428; MA 113; Pv-a 24 (as ˚ika); Sdhp 7, Sdhp 208 ■ nt. ˚ṃ something awful Nd ii.470 (in def. of bhaya).
fr. bhaya, cp. Epic Sk. bhayānaka
, a word imitating a confused sound MN i.128; otherwise contracted to babbhara (q.v.).
(adj.) (-˚) “bearing” in act. & pass. meaning, i.e. supporting or being supported; only in cpd. dubbhara hard to support AN v.159, AN v.161 (v.l. dubhara), and subhara easy to support Thag 926 (trsl. “of frugal ways”).
fr. bhṛ;
(nt.) bearing, supporting, maintenance Dhtm 346 (in expln of bhṛ; ) Abhp 1053.
fr. bhṛ; Epic Sk. bharaṇa
(f.) only in cpd. dub˚; difficulty to support, state of being hard to maintain, synonymous with kosajja at AN iv.280, and kuhanā at AN v.159, AN v.161-opp. subharatā AN iv.280.
abstr. fr. bhara
to bear, support, feed maintain Ja v.260 (mama bharatha, ahaṃ bhattā bhavāmi vo; C. explns as “maṃ icchatha”) ■ pp. bhata See also bhaṭa, bhara, bharita, and Der. fr. bhār˚. A curious Passive form is anu-bhīramāna (ppr.) MN iii.123 (chatta: a parasol being spread out), on which see Geiger, P.Gr. § 52, 5; 175 n. 3, 191.
bhṛ; cp. Lat. fero, Gr. φέρω, Av. baraiti, Oir. berim, Goth. bairan = to bear, Ger. gebāren. Dhtm expls simply by “bharena”
(adj.) filled with (-˚) Ja i.2 (suvaṇṇa-rajata˚ gabbha); iv.489 (udaka˚); v.275 (kimi˚); Snp-a 494 (vāta˚); Thag-a 283 (kuṇapa˚).
lit. made to bear, i.e. heavy with etc. Cp. formations bhār˚, fr. bharati
(f.) a wife (lit. one who is supported) DN iii.190; Iti 36; Ja iii.511; Dhp-a i.329.
fr. bhṛ; Vedic bhāryā
sea, in two names for a town and a kingdom viz. Bharukaccha Nd i.155; Ja ii.188; Ja iv.137, and Bharu-raṭṭha Ja ii.169 sq., a kingdom which is said to have been swallowed up by the sea ■ Also in Name of the King of that country Bharu -rājā Ja ii.171 (v.l. Kuru˚) ■ Der Bhārukacchaka an inhabitant of Bharukaccha Dhs-a 305 (so read at Expos. ii.401).
a dial. (inscription) word, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.
a kind of copper, enumd under the eight pisāca-lohāni, or copper coming from the Piśāca country Vb-a 63 (is reading correct?) It is doubtful whether we should not read mallaka, cp malla.
lit. from the Bhalla people
the marking nut plant Semicarpus anacardium Ja vi.578.
cp. Epic Sk. bhallātaka
“becoming, (form of) rebirth, (state of) existence, a “life.” There are 3 states of existence conventionally enumd as kāma˚ rūpa˚, arūpa˚; or sensual existence, deva-corporeal, formless existence (cp. rūpa) DN ii.57; DN iii.216; SN ii.3 SN iv.258; AN ii.223; AN iii.444; Nd i.48; Nd ii.s. v. dhātu B. Vism 210 = DN-a i.34; Vism 529; Vb-a 204 ■ Another view is represented by the division of bhava into kamma˚; and upapatti˚; (uppatti˚), or the active functioning of a life in relation to the fruitional, or resultant way of the next life (cp. Cpd. 43) Vb 137 Vism 571; Vb-a 183; also in def. of bhava at Nd ii.471 (kamma˚ and paṭisandhika punabbhava) ■ In the “causal chain” (Paṭicca-samuppāda, q.v.) bhava is represented as condition of birth (jāti), or resultant force for new birth ■ See Snp 361, Snp 514, Snp 742, Snp 839, Snp 923 Snp 1055, Snp 1133; Dhp 348; Nd i.274; Vb 294, Vb 358; Vism 556 sq.; Dhp-a iv.221; Sdhp 33, Sdhp 333, Sdhp 335 ■ On itibhav’ ābhava see iti, and add ref. Vb 375 ■ A remarkable use of bhava as nt. (obstr.) to bhū (in cpd.) is to be noted in the def. given by Bdhgh. of divya = divi bhavaṃ (for divi-bhū) Kp-a 227; Snp-a 199; and mānasaṃ = manasi bhavaṃ (for manasi-bhū) Kp-a 248, cp. Pāṇini iv.3, 53 Similarly āroga bhava health Dhp-a i.328 for ˚bhava-Cp. anu˚, vi˚, sam˚.
-agga the best (state of) existence, the highest point of existence (among the gods) Ja iii.84; Vb 426; Mil 132; Kp-a 179, Kp-a 249; Snp-a 17, Snp-a 41, Snp-a 507; often as highest “heaven” as opposed to Avīci, the lowest hell; thus at Ja iv.182; Ja vi.354; Mil 336. -aṅga constituent of becoming, function of being, functional state of subconsciousness i.e. subliminal consciousness or subconscious life-continuum, the vital continuum in the absence of any process [of mind, or attention] (thus Mrs Rh. D. in Expos. 185 n.), subconscious individual life See on term Cpd. 26 sq., 265–267; & cp.; Dhs trsl. 134-J vi.82; Mil 299 sq.; Vism 164, Vism 676; Dhs-a 72, Dhs-a 140 Dhs-a 269; Dhp-a i.23; Vb-a 81, Vb-a 156 sq., 406. -antaga “gone to the ends of existence,” past existence, Ep. of the Bhagavan Buddha Vism 210. -antara an existence interval, i.e. transition fr. one life to another, a previous or subsequent life Vism 553 sq. -ābhava this or that life, any form of existence some sort of existence Snp 1060, Snp 1068; Nd i.48, Nd i.109, Nd i.284; Nd ii.472, Nd ii.664 A Thag 784 (Thag-a mahantāmahanta bh.) Thag-a 71 (Ap. v 30); Vb-a 501. -āsava the intoxicant of existence DN iii.216; Vb 364, Vb 373. -uppatti coming into (a new ex ■ Four such bh ■ uppattis lead to rebirth among the foll. gods: the paritt’-ābhā devā, the appamāṇ’ābhā d., the sankiliṭṭh’-ābhā d., the parisuddh’-ābhā d MN iii.147. -esanā longing for rebirth DN iii.216, DN iii.270 -ogha the flood of rebirth (see ogha) Nd i.57, Nd i.159 Vism 480. -cakka the wheel or round of rebirth equivalent to the Paṭicca-samuppāda Vism 529 Vism 576 sq.; in the same context at Vb-a 138, Vb-a 194 sq -carimakā the last rebirth Vism 291. -taṇhā craving for rebirth DN iii.212, DN iii.216, DN iii.274; SN v.432; Snp 746; Vb 101, Vb 358, Vb 365; Thig 458; Thag-a 282; Vb-a iii.133 -netti [cp. BSk. bhava-netrī M. Vastu ii.307; ˚netrika iii.337] leader to renewed ex., guide to ex. Vin i.231; Iti 38; Dhs 1059≈ (cp. Dhs-a 364 = bhava-rajju). -saṃyojana the fetter of rebirth: see arahant II. C. -salla the sting or dart of rebirth Dhp 351 (= sabbāni bhavagāmīni sallāni Dhp-a iv.70). -sāta (pl. sātāni) the pleasures of ex., variously enumd in sets of from one to six at Nd i.30. -ssita at Ja v.371 read with v.l. as ghaṭa-ssita.
cp. Sk. bhava, as philosophical term late, but as Name of a deity Vedic; of bhū, see bhavati
to become, to be, exist, behave etc. (cp. Nd ii.474 sambhavati jāyati nibbattati pātu-bhavati) ■ I Forms. There are two bases used side by side, viz bhav˚; and (contracted) ho˚; the latter especially in the (later) Gāthā style and poetry in general, also as archaic in prose, whereas bhav˚ forms are older. On compounds with prepositions, as regards inflection, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 1312, 1513; and cp. anubhavati, abhibhavati abhisaṃ˚, pa˚ (also pahoti, pahūta), pari˚ vi˚, saṃ˚.
1. Pres. ind. bhavāmi Snp 511 & homi Ja iii.260; Ja iii.2nd bhavasi & hosī MN iii.140; Vv 8420; 3rd bhavati freq.; Snp 36 (where Nd ii.474 with v.l. BB of Sn reads bhavanti; Divy p.294 also reads bhavanti snehāḥ as conjecture of Cowell’s for MSS. bhavati) Dhp 249, Dhp 375; & hoti freq.; 1st pl. homa Pv i.118 2nd hotha Ja i.307; Ja i.3rd bhavanti & honti; freq ■ imper 2nd sg. bhava Snp 337, Snp 340, Snp 701; Dhp 236; Thig 8 bhavāhi Snp 510; hohi Snp 31; MN iii.134; Ja i.32; Pv-a 89 Pv-a 3rd sg. hotu Snp 224; Ja iii.150; Pv-a 13; Mil 18. pl 1st med. bhavāmase Thag 1128; Snp 32; Snp 2nd pl. bhavatha Ja ii.218, bhavātha Snp 692; Dhp 144; hotha Dhp 243; Dhp ii.141; Ja ii.302; Dhp-a i.57; Dhp-a i.3rd pl. bhavantu Snp 145; hontu Ja ii.4. Pot. 1st sg. bhaveyyaṃ Ja vi.364 Ja vi.2nd bhaveyyāsi Ud 91; Pv-a 11; Pv-a 3rd bhave Snp 716 bhaveyya Ja ii.159; Dhp-a i.329, & hupeyya Vin i.8 (for huveyya: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 396 & 131;2); pl. 1st bhaveyyāma; 2nd bhavetha Snp 1073, Snp 3rd bhaveyyuṃ Snp 906 ■ ppr. bhavaṃ Snp 92, & bhavanto Snp 968; f hontī Pv-a 79 ■ fut. 1st sg. bhavissāmi Pv-a 49 hessāmi Thig 460 (Thag-a 283 reads bhavissāmi),; hessaṃ Thag 1100; Ja iii.224; Pv i.105; 2nd bhavissasi Pv-a 16, hohisi Pv i.33; 3rd bhavissati Dhp 228, Dhp 264; Dhp-a ii.82, hessati Ja iii.279 & med.; hessate Mvu 25 Mvu 97, hehitī Bv ii.10 = AN i.4; Vv 6332; & hossati (in pahossati fr. pahoti Dhp-a iii.254); 1st pl. bhavissāma Dhp 200; Dhp 2nd hessatha SN iv.179; SN iv.3rd bhavissanti freq-Cond. 1st sg. abhavissaṃ Ja i.470; Ja i.2nd abhavissa Ja ii.11; Ja iii.30; Ja iii.3rd abhavissa Iti 37; Vin i.13; DN ii.57; MN iii.163; Ja i.267; Ja ii.112 (na bhavissa = nābhavissa?) 3rd pl. abhavissaṃsu Vin i.13. 1st aor. (orig. pret. of *huvati, cp. hupeyya Pot.; see Geiger P.Gr. 1312, 1622) 1st sg. ahuvā SN i.36, with by-form (see aor.) ahuvāsiṃ Vv 826; 2nd ahuvā ibid., 3rd ahuvā Vv 8124; Ja ii.106 Ja iii.131; Ja iii.1st pl. ahuvāma MN i.93; MN ii.214, & ahuvamha ibid.; 2nd ahuvattha SN iv.112; MN i.445; Dhp-a i.57. 2nd aor. (simple aor., with pret. endings): 1st sg. ahuṃ Pv ii.32 (v.l. BB ahu) (= ahosiṃ Pv-a 83); 2nd ahu (sk abhūḥ) Pv ii.35; 3rd ahū (Sk. abhūt) Snp 139, Snp 312, Snp 504 and passim; Pv i.23, & ahu Pv i.93; i.113; & bhavi Dhp-a i.329 (pātubhavi); 1st pl. ahumhā (Sk. abhūma Pv i.116, & ahumha Ja i.362; Dhp-a i.57.
3rd aor. (s aor.) 1st sg. ahosiṃ Thag 620; Ja i.106; Vv-a 321; Pv-a 10 (= āsiṃ); 2nd ahosi Ja i.107; Ja i.3rd ahosi Snp 835; Vin i.23; Vin i.1st pl. ahesumha MN i.265; MN i.3rd ahesuṃ DN ii.5; Vv 744; Ja i.149; Dhp-a i.327; & bhaviṃsu (Sk abhāviṣuḥ) Dhp-a iv.15 ■ Of medial forms we mention the 1st pl. pres. bhavāmahe Mvu i.65, and the 3rd sg pret. ahuvattha Vv-a 103 ■ Inf. bhavituṃ Snp 552,; hetuye Bv ii.10 ■ ger. bhavitvā Snp 56, hutvā Snp 43 & hutvāna Snp 281 ■ grd. bhavitabba Ja i.440; Ja vi.368 hotabba Vin i.46; bhabba (Sk. bhavya); see sep. bhuyya see cpd. abhibhuyya ■ Caus. bhāveti see sep-pp. bhūta. Note. In compn with nouns or adjectives the final vowel of these is changed into ī, as in combn of the same with the root kṛ; e.g. bhasmībhavati to be reduced to ashes, cp. bhasmī-karaṇa s. v. bhasma, etc-II. Meanings. In general the meaning “to become to get” prevails, but many shades of it are possible according to context & combinations. It is impossible & unnecessary to enumerate all shades of meaning, only a few idiomatic uses may be pointed out.
1. to happen, to occur, to befall Ja vi.368.
2. The fut bhavissati “is certainly,” “must be” Dhp-a iii.171 (sātthikā desanā bh.); Mil 40 (mātā ti pi na bh.). 3. Imper. hotu as adv. “very well” Mil 18 (hotu bhante very well, sir).
4. aor. in meaning and as substitute of āsiṃ, pret. of as to be; etad ahosi this occurred to him Dhp-a i.399 (assā etad ahosi “this thought struck her”).
bhū to become, cp. Sk. bhūmi earth; Gr. φύσις nature (physical), φύομαι to grow; Lat. fui I have been futurus = future; Oir. buith to be; Ags. būan = Goth bauan to live, Ger. bauen, also Ags. bȳldan = to build Lith. búti to be, būtas house Dhtp 1: bhū sattāyaṃ.
(nt.) the fact of being, state, condition Kp-a 227.
abstr. fr. bhū
(nt.) dwelling, sphere, world, realm SN i.206, Snp 810 (see expln Nd i.132: nerayikānaṃ nirayo bh. etc. & Snp-a 534: niray’ ādi-bhede bhavane); Nd i.448 (Inda˚ the realm of Indra); Ja iii.275 (nāga˚ the world of the Nāgas).
fr. bhū
proName of polite address “Sir, Lord, or “venerable, honourable,” or simply “you.” Cases as follows (after Geiger, P.Gr. § 983): sg. nom. bhavaṃ Snp 486; DN i.249; MN i.484. nt. bhavaṃ MN iii.172 acc. bhavantaṃ Snp 597; DN ii.231; instr. bhotā DN i.93 DN i.110; SN iv.120. gen. bhoto Snp 565; MN i.486; voc bhavaṃ DN i.93 & bho DN i.93; MN i.484; Ja ii.26. See bho also sep ■ pl. nom. bhavanto Snp p.107 (only as v.l.; T. bhagavanto), & bhonto; ibid.; MN ii.2; Mil 25 acc. bhavante MN ii.3; instr. bhavantehi MN iii.13; gen bhavataṃ MN ii.3; voc. bhonto Thag 832; MN ii.2 ■ f bhotī: sg. nom. bhotī Snp 988; Ja iii.95; acc. bhotiṃ Ja vi.523; loc. bhotiyā ibid. voc. bhoti ibid.; DN ii.249-On form bhante see this.
cp. Sk. (& Vedic) bhavant, used as proName of the 2;nd; but constructed with 3rd person of the verb Probably a contraction fr. bhagavant, see Whitney Altind. Gr. 456
a sort of tree, perhaps Averrhoa carambola Ja vi.529.
cp. Class. Sk. bhavya
to bark (of dogs) Ja iv.182 (aor. bhasi; so read for T. bhusi) ■ pp. bhasitaṃ (as n.) bark ibid. (mahā-bhasitaṃ bhasi, read for bhusita) See also bhusati.
cp. Epic Sk. bhaṣate
1. see bhasati.
2. pp. of bhas “crumbled to ashes” see bhasma.
a he-goat Ja iii.278.
cp. Vedic basta
(f.) & bhasta (nt.) 1. a bellows Thag 1134; Ja vi.12 (vāta-puṇṇa-bhasta-camma, skin of bellows full of wind); Snp-a 171 (vāta-pūrita-bhastrā viya), 494 (vātabharita˚); Dhp-a i.442 (bhastaṃ dhamāpeti); Vism 287–2. a sack Thag 1151; Thag 2, Thag 466 (T. reads gatta, but Thag-a 283 reads bhasta & expl;s as “camma-pasibbaka”) Ja iii.346 (sattu˚ = sattu pasibbaka flour sack); v.45 Thag-a 212 (udaka˚). biḷāra-bhastā a bag of catskin MN i.128 (= biḷāra-camma-pasibbaka Bdhgh); Thag 1138.
cp. Class. Sk. bhastrā (also one MBh. passage), orig. n. ag. fr. bhas (to bark?), lit bellower, blower
(nt.) ashes SN i.169 = Nd ii.576 (loc bhasmani); Vv 8444; Ja iii.426; Vism 469 (in comparison).
-antāhuti (bhasm’ ant’ āhuti) “whose sacrifice ends in ashes” DN i.55 (so read for bhassant˚, according to DN-a i.166, & cp. Franke,; Dīgha Nikāya p. 60); MN i.515; SN iii.207. -ācchanna covered by ashes Dhp 71 (= chārikāya paṭichanna Dhp-a ii.68); Ja vi.236 (.… va pāvaka)-puṭa a sack for ashes DN-a i.267 (as expln for assa-puṭa of DN i.98; fanciful; see assa1). -bhāva “ashy” state state of being crumbled to dust Vv-a 348.
cp. Vedic bhasman (adj.); Sk. bhasman (n.), originally ppr. of bhas to chew & thus n-stem. It has passed into the a-decl. in Pali, except in the loc; bhasmani (SN i.169). Etymologically & semantically bhasman is either “chewing” or “anything chewed (small),” thus meaning particle, dust, sand, etc. and bhas is another form of psā (cp. Sk. psā morsel of food, psāta hungry = P. chāta). Idg *bhsā & *bhsam, represented in Gr.; ψώξω to grind ψάμμος & ψ ̈ωξος sand; Lat. sabulum sand. The Dhtp 326 & Dhtm 452 explain; bhas by bhasmīkaraṇa “reduce to ashes,” a pp. of it is bhasita; it also occurs in Sk. loc. bhasi
(nt.) speech, conversation, way of talking, disputation Snp 328 (v.l. for hassa); Iti 71; Mil 90; Vism 127 (grouped into fit talk as the 10 kathā-vatthus, and unfit talk or gossip, as the 32 tiracchāna-kathā).
-kāraka one who makes talk, i.e. invites disputation or one who gossips Vin i.1; Nd i.142; f. ˚kārikā Vin iv.230. -pavādaka one who proposes disputation one who is fond of debate & discussions MN i.161, MN i.227 (˚ika); Mil 4. -pavedin one experienced in debating Mil 90. -samācāra (good) conduct in speech, proficiency in disputation DN iii.106. -samussaya grandiloquence proud talk Snp 245 (cp. Snp-a 288 = att’ukkaṃsanatā ti vuttaṃ hoti).
cp. Class. Sk. bhāṣya, of bhāṣ
to fall down, drop, to droop (Dhtp 455 & Dhtm 695: adho-patane & adhopāte) Ja iv.223; Ja vi.530. ppr. bhassamāna Mil 82 pret. 3rd sg. bhassittha Ja ii.274 (cp. pabhassittha Vin ii.135), & abhassittha SN i.122 (so read for abhassatha)-pp. bhaṭṭha1.
bhranś, Sk. bhraśyate
(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) shining, resplendent Ja v.169 (C. pabhassara).
2. Name of a bird Ja vi.538 (= sata-haṃsa C.) ■ Cp. ā˚, pa˚.
fr. bhās
(f.) light, splendour; given as name of a jewel at an extremely doubtful passage Ja v.317, Ja v.318, where T. reads “vara taṃ bhañ ñam icchasi,” & C. expl;s.: “bhā ti ratanass’ etaṃ nāmaṃ.” The v.l. for bhaññaṃ is bhuñjaṃ; the passage may be corrupt from “varatu bhavaṃ yam icchasi.”
cp. Vedic bhā & bhāḥ nt.
(adj.) knitting the eyebrows, frowning, only in redupl. cpd. bhākuṭika- bhākuṭiko frowning continually, supercilious Vin ii.11 = Vin iii.181 (manda-mando + ); Nd ii.342 (korajika-korajiko + ) Vism 26 (id.) ■ f. bhākuṭikā a frown, frowning, superciliousness def. at Vism 26 as “padhāna-parimathitabhāva-dassanena bhākuṭi [read bhakuṭi]-karaṇaṃ mukha-saṅkoco ti vuttaṃ hoti.” It occurs in stock phrase bhākuṭikā bhākuṭiyaṃ kuhanā kuhāyanā in def. of kuhanā at Vb 352 = Vism 23, Vism 25 (cp. Nd i.225) and at Nd ii.342 D. See also Vb-a 482 (bhākuṭikaraṇaṃ sīlam assā ti bhākuṭiko). The form bhākuṭiyaṃ (nt.) is originally the same as bhākuṭikā, only differentiated in C ■ style. The def. at Vism 26 is “bhākuṭikassa bhāvo bhākuṭiyaṃ.” The v.l. ibid. is bhākuṭitā ■ bhākuṭikaṃ karoti to make a frowning face, to act superciliously Vism 105 (as a quality of one “dosa-carita”).
fr. bhakuṭi
1. part, portion, fraction, share Vin i.285; Snp 427 (sahassa-bhāgo maraṇassa = sahassaṃ bhāgānaṃ assā ti Snp-a 387; a thousand times a share of death, i.e. very near death, almost quite dead), 702 (v.l. Snp-a 492 for Sn samāna-bhāva, evenness proportionate-ness); Vv 146 (= kummāsa-koṭṭhāsa Vv-a 62); Pv i.115 (aḍḍhi˚ one half); Vin iv.264 ■ Cp vi˚ ■ bhāgaso (abl ■ adv.) in parts, by parts, by portions esp. in even portions, i.e. evenly, in proportion SN i.193 (according to each one’s share; cp. Thag 1242); MN iii.183; Vv 72; Mil 330, Mil 415 (aneka˚ hundredfold or more). bhāgaso mita (of cities or dwelling-places etc. evenly planned, well laid out, i.e. in squares Snp 300, Snp 305 (nivesanāni suvibhattāni bhāgaso); Ja v.266 (cp. C. on p. 272) = Nd ii.304iii. d; Pv i.1013 (= bhāgato mita Pv-a 52) ■ bhāgabhatta apportioned food, ration Dhp-a i.134 ■ Cp. dobbhagga “disproportionateness,” i.e. bad luck.
2. apportioned share (of money), fee remuneration, always in term ācariya˚; (ācariyassa) the teacher’s fee (usually consisting in 1,000 kahāpaṇas Ja i.273; Ja v.457; Ja vi.178; Mil 10; Dhp-a i.253.
3. division of space, quarter, side, place, region: disā˚; quarter of the compass Vin ii.217; para˚; outside part Kp-a 206 = Pv-a 24 (kuḍḍānaṃ parabhāgā = tiro-kuḍḍā); pacchābhāgaṃ (acc. adv.) at the back part, behind Pv-a 114-fig. way, respect, in ubhato-bhāga -vimutta “free in both ways” DN ii.71; MN i.477 (see Dial ii.70; i.e. free both by insight and by the intellectual discipline of the 8 stages of Deliverance, the aṭṭha vimokkhā).
4. division of time, time, always-˚, e.g. pubba˚; the past apara˚; the future Pv-a 133; obl. cases adverbially: tena divasa-bhāgena (+ ratti bhāgena) at that day (& that very night) Mil 18; apara-bhāge (loc.) in future Ja i.34; Pv-a 116.
cp. Vedic bhāga, fr. bhaj, bhajati
(adj.) sharing in, partaking of (gen.) Dhp 19, Dhp 20 (sāmaññassa).
fr. bhāga, equal to bhāgin
(adj.) sharing in, partaking of (with gen.), endowed with; getting, receiving AN ii.80; AN iii.42 (āyussa vaṇṇassa etc.); Ja i.87 (rasānaṃ) Mil 18 (sāmaññassa); Vism 150 (lābhassa); Dhp-a ii.90 Vb-a 418 sq. (paññā as hāna-bhāginī, ṭhiti˚, visesa & nibbedha˚; ) ■ Also in def. of term Bhagavā at Nd i.142 = Nd ii.466 = Vism 210 ■ pl. bhāgino Pv iii.112 (dukkhassa); Pv-a 18 (dānaphalassa), 175 ■ Cp bhāgavant, bhāgimant, bhāgiya.
fr. bhāga. Cp. Vedic bhāgin
sister’s son, nephew Snp 695; Ja i.207; Ja ii.237; Dhp-a i.14; Pv-a 215.
fr. bhaginī, Cp. Epic Sk. bhāgineya
(adj.) partaking in, sharing, possessing (with gen. Thig 204 (dukkhassa); Thag-a 171 (= bhāgin).
a double adj. formation bhāgin + mant
(adj.) (-˚) connected with, conducive to, procuring; in foll. philos. terms: kusala AN i.11; hāna˚, visesa˚ DN iii.274 sq.; hāna˚, ṭhiti˚ visesa˚, nibbedha˚ Vism 15 (in verse), 88 = Pts i.35. Cp. BSk. mokṣa bhāgīya, nirvedha˚ Divy 50; mokṣa ibid. 363.
fr. bhāga, cp. bhāgin
(nt.) good luck, fortune Ja v.484.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhāgya; fr. bhaga, see also contracted form bhagga2
(adj.) having good luck, auspicious fortunate, in def. of term “Bhagavā” at DN-a i.34 = Vism 210; also at Vv-a 231, where the abstr. bhāgyavantatā is formed as expln of the term bhāgyavatā (f.) at Vism 211.
same as bhaggavant, only differentiated as being the Sk. form and thus distinguished as sep. word by Commentators
(adj.) (-˚) distributing, one who distributes or one charged with the office of distributing clothes, food etc. among the Bhikkhus Vin i.285 (cīvara˚); AN iii.275 (cīvara˚, phala˚, khajjaka˚).
fr. bhajeti
(nt.) a bowl, vessel, dish, usually earthenware, but also of other metal, e.g. gold (suvaṇṇa˚) DN-a i.295; copper (tamba˚ Dhp-a i.395; bronze (kaṃsa˚) Vism 142 (in simile). Vin i.46; Snp 577 (pl. mattika-bhājanā); Ja ii.272 (bhikkhā˚); iii.366 (id.), 471; v.293 (bhatta˚); Mil 107; Vv-a 40, Vv-a 292 (v.l. bhojana); Pv-a 104, Pv-a 145, Pv-a 251 Sdhp 571.
-vikati a special bowl Ja v.292 (so read for T. bhojana˚) Vism 376.
cp. Epic Sk. bhājana, fr. bhāj
(nt.) division, dividing up, in pada˚; dividing of words, treating of words separately Dhs-a 343; similarly bhājaniyaṃ that which should be classed or divided Dhs-a 2, also in pada˚; division of a phrase Dhs-a 54.
fr. bhāj
divided, distributed; nt. that which has been dealt out or allotted, in cpd. bhājit-ābhājita AN iii.275.
pp. of bhājeti
to divide, distribute deal out Vin iv.223 (ppr. bhājiyamāna); Ja i.265; Dhs-a 4 (fut. bhājessati) grd. bhājetabba Vin i.285 ■ pp. bhājita.
Caus. of bhajati, but to be taken as root by itself; cp. Dhtm 777 bhāja = puthakkare
reciting or preaching, in pada˚; reciting the verses of the Scriptures Dhp-a ii.95 (v.l. paṭibhāna) iii.345; iv.18.
-vāra a section of the Scriptures, divided into such for purposes of recitation, “a recital” Vin i.14; Vin ii.247 DA 13; MA 2 (concerning the Bh. of Majjhima Nikāya) Snp-a 2 (of Sutta Nipāta), 608 (id.); Dhs-a 6 (of Dhammasangaṇī, cp. Expos. 8 n. 3), and frequently in other Commentaries & Expositionary Works.;
fr. bhaṇati
(adj.-n.) speaking; (n.) a reciter, repeater, preacher (of sections of the Scriptures), like Aṅguttara˚; Vism 74 sq.; Dīgha˚; DN-a i.15, DN-a i.131; Ja i.59 Vism 36, Vism 266; Jātaka˚; etc. Mil 341 sq.; Majjhima˚ Vism 95 (Revatthera), 275, 286, 431; Saṃyutta˚; Vism 313 (Cūḷa-Sivatthera). Unspecified at Snp-a 70 (Kalyāṇavihāravāsi-bhāṇaka-dahara-bhikkhu; reading doubtful) ■ f. bhāṇikā Vin iv.285 (Thullanandā bahussutā bhāṇikā); also in cpd. mañju-bhāṇikā sweet-voiced uttering sweet words Ja vi.422.
fr. bhaṇati
a jar Vin ii.170 (loha˚) iii.90.
cp. Sk. bhāṇḍaka a small box: Kathāsarits. 24, 163; & see Müller,; P.Gr. p. 48
(adj.) (-˚) speaking, reciting Snp 850 (manta˚; a reciter of the Mantras, one who knows the M. and speaks accordingly, i.e. speaking wisely, expld by Snp-a 549 as “mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṃ bhāsitā”); Dhp 363 (id.; expld as “mantā vuccati paññā tāya pana bhaṇana-sīlo” Dhp-a iv.93) ■ ativela˚ speaking for an excessively long time, talking in excess Ja iv.247, Ja iv.248.
fr. bhaṇati
Caus. of bhaṇati (q.v.) with 3rd praet. bhāṇi & pot.; bhāṇaye.
brother, nom. sg. bhātā Snp 296; Ja i.307; Pv-a 54, Pv-a 64 gen. sg. bhātuno Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.36), & bhātussa Mvu 8, Mvu 9; instr. bhātarā Ja i.308; acc. bhātaraṃ Snp 125; Ja i.307; loc. bhātari Ja iii.56 ■ nom. pl. bhātaro Ja i.307, & bhātuno Thig 408; acc. bhāte Dpvs vi.21. In cpds. both bhāti˚; (. bhātisadisa like a brother Ja v.263), and bhātu˚; (: bhātu-jāyā brother’s wife, sister-in-law Ja v.288; Vism 95). Cp. bhātika & bhātuka; On pop. etym. see bhaginī.
cp. Vedic bhrātar = Av. bratar, Gr. φράτωρ, Lat. frater, Goth. brōpar = Ohg. bruoder, E. brother
to shine (forth), to appear DN ii.205; Vv 352; Ja ii.313 ■ pp. bhāta: see vi˚.
bhā Dhtp 367, Dhtm 594: dittiyaṃ; Idg. *bhé, cp. Sk. bhāḥ nt. splendour, radiance, bhāsati to shine forth; Gr. φάος light, φαίνω to show etc.; Ags. bonian to polish = Ger. bohnen; also Sk. bhāla shine, splendour = Ags. bael funeral pile
(& Bhātiya) lit. brotherly, i.e. a brother, often˚- ■ “brother”-(a bhātika: Ja i.253 (jeṭṭhaka˚); vi.32; Dhp-a i.14 (˚thera my Thera-brother or br ■ thera), 101, 245; Pv-a 75. (b) bhātiya: Vism 292 (dve ˚therā two Th. brothers)-Cp. bhātuka.
fr. bhātar, cp. Class. Sk. bhrātṛka
brother, usually -˚, viz. pati˚; brother-in-law, husband’s brother Ja vi.152 putta˚; son & brother Dhp-a i.314; sa˚; with the brother Thag-a 71 (Ap. v.36).
= bhātika, fr. Sk. bhrātṛka
(adj.) light, bright red Ja iii.62 (of the kaṇavera flower); Vv-a 175 (˚raṃsi).
cp. Vedic bhānu (m.) shine, light, ray; Epic Sk. also “sun”
(adj.) luminous brilliant; mostly of the sun; nom. bhānumā SN i.196 Thag 1252; Vv 6417, 787 (= ādicca Vv-a 304); Ja i.183 acc. bhānumaṃ Snp 1016 ■ The spelling is sometimes bhāṇumā.
fr. bhānu, ray of light Vedic bhānumant, Ep. of Agni; also Epic Sk. the sun
to be afraid. Pres, Ind. 1st sg. bhāyāmi Thag 21; Snp p.48; Snp p.2nd sg. bhāyasi Thig 248; Thig 1st pl. bhāyāma Ja ii.21; Ja ii.3rd pl. bhāyanto Dhp 129; Imper. 2nd pl bhāyatha Ud 51; Ja iii.4; Pot. 3rd sg. bhāye Snp 964; bhāyeyya Mil 208; Mil 3rd pl. bhāyeyyuṃ Mil 208. Aor. 1st sg. bhāyiṃ Dhp-a iii.187; Dhp-a iii.2nd sg. bhāyi Thag 764; Dhp-a iii.187; & usually in Prohib.; mā bhāyi do not be afraid SN v.369; Ja i.222; Dhp-a i.253 ■ grd bhāyitabba Nd ii.s.v. kāmaguṇā B; Dhp-a iii.23. Caus. I. bhāyayate to frighten Ja iii.99 (C.: utraseti) Caus. II. bhāyāpeti Ja iii.99, Ja iii.210 ■ pp. bhīta.
cp. Sk. bhayate, bhī, pres. redupl. bibheti; Idg. *bhei, cp. Av. bayente they frighten; Lith. bijotis to be afraid; Ohg. bibēn = Ger. beben. Nearest synonym is tras
(adj.) to be feared, dreadful, fearful, Sdhp 95.
grd. of bhāyati + ka
1. anything to carry, a load Vin iii.278 (Bdhgh; dāru˚ a load of wood) bhāraṃ vahati to carry a load AN i.84; Vv-a 23 ■ garu˚ a heavy load, as “adj.” “carrying a heavy load Ja v.439 (of a woman, = pregnant) ■ bhāratara (adj. compar.) forming a heavier load Mil 155 ■ Cp. ati˚; sam˚.
2. a load, cartload (as measure of quantity Vv-a 12 (saṭṭhi-sakaṭa˚-parimāṇa); Pv-a 102 (aneka˚parimāṇa).
3. (fig.) a difficult thing, a burden or duty i.e. a charge, business, office, task, affair Vism. 375; Ja i.292; Ja ii.399; Ja iv.427; Ja vi.413; Dhp-a i.6, Dhp-a i.111. Several bhārā or great tasks are mentioned exemplifying the meaning of “gambhīra” & “duddasa” (saccāni) at Vb-a 141, viz. mahā-samuddaṃ manthetvā ojāya nīharaṇaṃ; Sineru-pādato vālikāya uddharaṇaṃ; pabbataṃ pīḷetvā rasassa nīharaṇaṃ.
4. (fig.) in metaphors for the burden of (the factors of renewed) existence (the khandhas and similar agents). Esp. in phrase panna-bhāra “one whose load (or burden) has been laid down,” one who has attained Arahantship MN i.139; AN iii.84; SN i.233; Dhp 402 (= ohita-khandha-bhāra Dhp-a iv.168); Snp 626 (same expln at Snp-a 467), 914 (expld as patita-bhāra, oropita˚, nikkhitta˚ Nd i.334 where 3 bhāras in this sense are distinguished, viz khandha˚, kilesa˚, abhisankhāra˚); Thag 1021. So at Vism 512 with ref. to the ariya-saccāni, viz. bhāro dukkha-saccaṃ, bhār’ ādānaṃ = samuda-saccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanaṃ = nirodha-s., bhāra-nikkhepan’upāya magga-s ■ On bhāra in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 118.
-ādāna the taking up of a burden SN iii.25 -(m)oropana “laying down the load,” i.e. delivery of a pregnant woman Bv ii.115. -ṭṭha contained in a load carried as a burden Vin iii.47. -nikkhepana the laying down or taking off of a burden SN iii.25. -mocana delivery (of a pregnant woman) Ja i.19. -vāhin “burdenbearer,” one who carries an office or has a responsibility AN iv.24 (said of a bhikkhu). -hāra load-carrier, burdenbearer SN iii.25 sq.
fr. bhṛ; Vedic bhāra; cp. bhara
(-˚) a load, only in cpd. gadrabha˚; a donkey-load (of goods) Ja ii.109; Dhp-a i.123.
fr. bhāra
“the petty descendants of Bhārata” or: load-carrier, porter (?) Ś iv.117 (indignantly applied to apprentices and other low class young men who honour the Mahā-Kaccāna).
fr. bhara
(adj.) 1. loaded, heavy Ja v.84, Ja v.477; Mil 261.
2. full of, loaded down with (-˚) Vv-a 314 (sineha˚ hadaya).
3. grievous, serious, sorrowful Pv-a 82 (hadaya).
4. important Mil 240, Mil 311 ■ See bhāriya.
fr. bhāra
(adj.) carrying, wearing, only in cpd. mālā˚; (māla˚), wearing a garland (of flowers Ja iv.60, Ja iv.82; Ja v.45; where it interchanges with ˚dhārin (e.g. Vv.323; v.l. at Pv-a 211; cp. BSk. ˚dhārin Mvu i.124) ■ f. ˚bhārinī Ja iii.530; Vv-a 12; and ˚bhārī Thag 459 (as v.l.; T. ˚dhārī). See also under mālā.
fr. bhṛ; cp. bhāra
(adj.) 1. heavy, weighty, grave serious; always fig. with ref. to a serious offence, either as bhāriyaṃ pāpaṃ a terrible sin Pv-a 195, or bh kammaṃ a grave deed, a sin Dhp-a i.298, Dhp-a i.329; Dhp-a ii.56 Dhp-a iii.120; Vv-a 68; or bhāriyaṃ alone (as nt.), something grave, a sin Dhp-a i.64. Similarly with ati˚; as atibhāriyaṃ kammaṃ a very grave deed Dhp-a i.70, or atibhāriyaṃ id. Dhp-a i.186.
2. bhāriyā (= bhārikā, f. of bhāraka) carrying, fetching, bringing Ja vi.563 (phala˚).
fr. bhāra Vedic bhārya to be nourished or supported; bhāryā wife
see bharu˚.
1. being, becoming, condition, nature; very rarely by itself (only in later & C. literature, as e.g. Ja i.295 thīnaṃ bhāvo, perhaps best to be translated as “women’s character,” taking bhāva = attabhāva); usually -˚, denoting state or condition of, and representing an abstr. der. from the first part of the cpd. e.g. gadrabha˚ ʻasininityʼ Ja ii.109 Thus in connection with (a) adjectives: atthika˚; state of need Pv-a 120; ūna˚; depletion Snp-a 463; ekī˚; loneliness Vism 34; sithill˚; (for sithila˚ in conn. with kṛ bhū ) relaxation Vism 502 ■ (b) adverbs. upari˚; high condition MN i.45; pātu˚; appearance Snp 560; vinā˚ difference Snp 588. (c) nouns & noun-derivations:; atta˚ individual state, life, character Snp 388 (= citta Snp-a 374) asaraṇa˚; state of not remembering Dhp-a iii.121; samaṇa˚ condition of a recluse Snp 551 ■ (d) forms of verbs: nibbatta˚; fact of being reborn Dhp-a iii.121; magg ārūḷha˚; the condition of having started on one’s way Vv-a 64; baddha˚; that he was bound; suhita˚; that they were well Ja iv.279. The translation can give either a full sentence with “that it was” etc. (Vv-a 64 “that he had started on his way”), or a phrase like “the fact or state of,” or use as an English abstract noun ending in -ness (atthika-bhāva needfulness, eki loneliness), -ion (ūna˚ depletion, pātu˚ manifestation) -hood (atta˚ selfhood), or -ship (samaṇa˚ recluseship). Similarly in Com. style: sampayutta- bhāvo (m.) Dhp-a iii.94, for *sampayuttattaṃ (abstr.); bhākuṭikassa bhāvo = bhakuṭiyaṃ Vism 26; sovacassassa bhāvo sovacassatā Kp-a 148; mittassa bh. = mettaṃ Kp-a 248 Here sometimes bhava for bhāva.
2. (in pregnant specifically Buddhistic sense) cultivation or production by thought, mental condition, esp. a set mental condition (see der. bhāvanā). Sometimes (restricted to Vin J) in sense “thinking of someone,” i.e. affection, love sentiment ■ (a) in combn khanti, diṭṭhi, ruci, bhāva at Vin ii.205; Vin iii.93; Vin iv.3, Vin iv.4 ■ (b) in Jātaka passages Ja v.237; Ja vi.293 (bhāvaṃ karoti, with loc., to love)- abhāva (late, only in C. style) not being, absence want Pv-a 25; abl. abhāvato through not being, in want of Pv-a 9, Pv-a 17 ■ sabhāva (sva + bhāva) see sep.
fr. bhū, cp. Vedic bhāva
(f.) producing, dwelling on something, putting one’s thoughts to, application developing by means of thought or meditation, cultivation by mind, culture ■ See on term Dhs translation 261 (= 2 240); Expos. i.217 (= Dhs-a 163); Cpd. 207 n. 2. Cp. pari˚, vi˚, sam˚ ■ Vin i.294 (indriya˚); DN iii.219 (three: kāya˚, citta˚, paññā˚), 221, 225, 285, 291; SN i.48; Dhp 73, Dhp 301; Ja i.196 (mettā˚); iii.45 (id.); Nd i.143 (saññā˚); Ne 91 (samatha-vipassanaṃ); Vb 12 Vb 16 sq., 199, 325; Vism 130 (karaṇa, bhāvanā, rakkhaṇa; here bh. = bringing out, keeping in existence) 314 (karuṇā˚), 317 (upekkhā˚); Mil 25 (˚ṃ anuyuñjati); Sdhp 15, Sdhp 216, Sdhp 233, Sdhp 451.
-ānuyoga application to meditation Vb 244, Vb 249 -ārāma joy of or pleasure in self culture AN ii.28. -bala power to increase the effect of meditation, power of self-culture AN i.52; DN iii.213. -maya accomplished by culture practice; brought into existence by practice (of cultured thought), cp. Cpd. 207. DN iii.218, DN iii.219 Ne 8; with dānamaya & sīlamaya; at Iti 19, Iti 51; Vb 135, Vb 325. -vidhāna arrangement of process of culture Dhs-a 168 = Vism 122.
fr. bhāveti, or fr. bhāva in meaning of bhāva 2, cp. Class. Sk. bhāvanā
(adj.) “being as ought to be, to be cultivated, to be respected, in a self-composed state (cp. bhāvitatta) MN i.33 (garu + ; expld by Bdhgh as “addhā ‘yam āyasmā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passatī ti evaṃ sambhāvanīyo” MA 156); SN v.164; AN iii.110; Mil 373; Pv-a 9. See also under manobhāvanīya.
grd. fr. bhāveti, but taken by Bdhgh as grd. formation fr. bhāvanā
developed, made to become by means of thought, cultured, well-balanced AN v.299 (cittaṃ parittaṃ abhāvitaṃ; opp. cittaṃ appamāṇaṃ subhāvitaṃ); Snp 516, Snp 558.
pp. of bhāveti
(adj.) one whose attan (ātman) is bhāvita, i.e. well trained or composed Attan here = citta (as Pv-a 139), thus “self-composed well-balanced” AN iv.26; Snp 277, Snp 322, Snp 1049; Dhp 106 Dhp 107; Nd ii.142; Nd ii.475 B (indriyāni bh.); Ja ii.112 (˚bhāvanāya when the training of thought is perfect) Vism 185 (˚bhāvana, adj. one of well-trained character) 267, 400 (+ bahulī-kata); Dhp-a i.122 (a˚); Thag-a 164 (indriya˚). See foll.
bhāvita + attan
(nt.) only neg. a˚ the fact of not developing or cultivating SN iii.153 SN iii.475; Pv ii.966.
abstr. fr. bhāvita = *bhāvitattvaṃ
(adj.) “having a being,” going to be, as-˚ in avassa˚; sure to come to pass, inevitable Ja i.19 ■ f. bhāvinī future Vv-a 314 (or is it bhāvanīya? cp. v.l. S bhāvaniyā).
fr. bhāva, Epic Sk. bhāvin “imminent”
to beget, produce, increase, cultivate, develop (by means of thought meditation), The Buddhist equivalent for mind-work as creative in idea, MN i.293; cp. B.Psy p. 132 ■ DN ii.79; MN ii.11 (cattāro sammappadhāne & iddhipāde); SN i.188 (cittaṃ ekaggaṃ), Thag 83, Thag 166 (ppr. bhāvayanto); Snp 341 (cittaṃ ekaggaṃ), 507 (ppr. bhāvayaṃ), 558 (grd. bhāvetabba), 1130 (ppr. bhāvento = āsevanto bahulī-karonto Nd ii.476); Dhp 87, Dhp 350, Dhp 370; Ja i.264 (mettaṃ), 415, ii.22 Nd ii.s. v. kāmaguṇā (p. 121) (where grd. in sequence “sevitabba, bhajitabba, bhāvetabba, bahulī-kātabba”) Pp 15, Dhp-a iii.171; Sdhp 48, Sdhp 495 ■ Pass. ppr bhāviyamāna AN ii.140; Kp-a 148 ■ pp. bhāvita.
Caus. of bhū, bhavati
-sakuṇa a bird of prey, a vulture [Abhp. 645, 1049]; as one of the lucky omens enumd (under the so-called mangala-kathā) at Kp-a 118 (with v.l. SS. cāta˚ & vāca˚, BB cāba˚) = Nd;1 87 (on Snp 790) (T. reads vāta˚; v.l. SS vāpa˚, BB chapa˚).
cp. Epic Sk. bhāsa
(adj.) (-˚) speaking DN-a i.52 (avaṇṇa˚; uttering words of blame).
fr. bhāṣ
to speak, to say, to speak to, to call MN i.227, Snp 158 Snp 562, Snp 722; Dhp 1, Dhp 246, Dhp 258; also bhāsate Snp 452 ■ Pot bhāseyya Vin ii.189; Snp 451, Snp 930; Snp-a 468 (for udīraye Dhp 408); bhāse Dhp 102; Snp 400; & bhāsaye AN ii.51; Ja v.509 (with gloss katheyya for joteyya = bhāseyya)-Aor. abhāsi Vin iv.54; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 17, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 69; Pv-a 1st sg also abhāsissaṃ (Cond.) Pv i.68 (= abhāsiṃ Pv-a 34) imper. pres. bhāsa Snp 346; ppr. bhāsamāne AN ii.51; Ja v.509; Snp 426; Dhp 19; Ja iv.281 (perhaps better with v.l. as hasamāna); v.63; & bhāsanto Snp 543 ■ grd bhāsitabba AN iv.115; Vism 127 ■ Med. ind. pres 2nd sg. bhāsase Vv 342; imper. pres. 2nd sg. bhāsassu MN ii.199 ■ An apparent ger. form abhāsiya Iti 59, Iti 60 (micchā vācaṃ abhāsiya) is problematic. It may be an old misspelling for ca bhāsiya, as a positive form is required by the sense. The vv.ll. however do not suggest anything else but abhāsiya; the editor of It suggests pa˚ ■ Cp. anu, o˚, samanu˚.
bhāṣ; Dhtp 317: vacane; Dhtm 467; vācāya
to shine, shine forth, fill with splendour Snp 719 (2nd sg. fut. bhāsihi = bhāsissasi pakāsessasi Snp-a 499). Usually with prep prefix pa˚; (so read at Pv i.109 for ca bh.). Cp. o˚, vi˚.
bhās Dhtm 467: dittiyaṃ
(nt.) speaking, speech Dhtm 162; Sdhp 68.
fr. bhāṣ
(f.) speech, language, esp. vernacular, dialect Ja iv.279 (manussa˚ human speech) 392 (caṇḍāla˚); Kp-a 101 (saka-saka˚-anurūpa); Snp-a 397 (Milakkha˚); DN-a i.176 (Kirātā-Yavanâdi-Millakkhānaṃ bhāsā); MN-a i.1 (Sīhaḷa˚); Vb-a 388 (18 dialects of which 5 are mentioned; besides the Māgadhabhāsā).
cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣā
spoken, said, uttered AN v.194; Mil 28; Dhp-a iv.93 ■ (nt.) speech, word Dhp 363; MN i.432. Usually as su˚ & dub˚; (both adj. & nt.) well & badly spoken, or good & bad speech Vin i.172; MN ii.250; AN i.102; AN ii.51 (su˚; read bhāsita for bāsita) vi.226; Snp 252, Snp 451, Snp 657; Ja iv.247, Ja iv.281 (su˚, well spoken or good words); Pv ii.620 (su˚); Pv-a 83 (dub˚).
pp. of bhāsati1
one who speaks, utters; a speaker SN i.156; Pp 56; Snp-a 549.
n. ag. fr. bhāṣ
(adj.) (-˚) speaking AN i.102 (dubbhāsita-bhāsin).
cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣin
(adj.) bright, shining, resplendent Thag-a 139, Thag-a 212; Vv-a 12.
cp. Epic Sk. bhāsura fr. bhas
(adj.) terrible; only in cpd. ˚rūpa (nt. & adj.) an awful sight; (of) terrific appearance, terrible, awful Ja iii.242, Ja iii.339; Ja iv.271, Ja iv.494. Bhimsana & ka;
= Vedic bhīṣma, of which there are 4 P. forms, viz. the metathetic bhiṃsa, the shortened bhisma, the lengthened bhesma, and the contracted bhīsa (see bhīsana). Cp. also Sk ■ P. bhīma; all of bhī
(adj.) horrible, dreadful, awe-inspiring, causing fear. (a) bhiṃsanaka (usually combd with lomahaṃsa DN ii.106 = AN iv.311; DN ii.157; Vin iii.8; Pv-a 22 Thag-a 242 (˚sabhāva = bhīmarūpa); Ja v.43 ■ (b) bhiṃsana Pv iv.35 (+ lomahaṃsa).
the form with ˚ka is the canonic form, whereas bhiṃsana is younger. See bhiṃsa on connections
(f.) terror, fright; mahā-bhiṃsa (adj.) inspiring great terror DN ii.259. Cp. bhismā.
fr. bhiṃsa
(f.) frightful thing, terror, terrifying omen Mvu 12, Mvu 12 (vividhā bhiṃsikā kari he brought divers terrors to pass).
fr. bhiṃsa
a beggar, mendicant SN i.182 (bh. brāhmaṇa) Ja vi.59 (v.l. BB. ˚uka); Vb-a 327.
fr. bhikkhu, Cp. Epic Sk. bhikṣuka & f. bhikṣukī
to beg alms, to beg, to ask for SN i.176, SN i.182 (so read for T. bhikkhavo); Dhp 266 Vb-a 327 ■ ppr. med. bhikkhamāna Thig 123.
cp. Vedic bhikṣate, old desid. to bhaj; def. Dhtp 13 “yācane”
(f.) begged food, alms, alms-begging; food Vin iv.94; Cp i.14; Vv 704 (ekāhā bh. food for one day) Mil 16; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 131 (kaṭacchu˚); bhikkhāya carati to go out begging food [cp. Sk. bhaikṣaṃ carati] Ja iii.82 Ja v.75; Pv-a 51 & passim ■; subhikkha (nt.) abundance of food DN i.11. dubbhikkha (nt.) (& ˚ā f.) scantiness of alms, famine, scarcity of food, adj. famine-stricken (cp. Sk. durbhikṣaṃ) Vin ii.175; Vin iii.87 (adj.); iv.23 (adj.); SN iv.323, SN iv.324 (dvīhitikaṃ); AN i.160; AN iii.41; Ja ii.149, Ja ii.367; Ja v.193; Ja vi.487; Cp i.33 (adj.); Vism 415 (˚pīḷita), 512 (f. in simile); Kp-a 218; Dhp-a i.169 Dhp-a ii.153 (f.); iii.437 (˚bhaya).
-āhāra food received by a mendicant Ja i.237 (= bhikkhu-āhāra?). -cariyā going about for alms, begging round Snp 700; Pv-a 146. -cāra = ˚cariyā Mhbv 28 -paññatti declaration of alms, announcement that food is to be given to the Sangha, a dedication of food Vin i.309.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaikṣa of; bhikṣ, adj. & nt.
an almsman, a mendicant, a Buddhist monk or priest, a bhikkhu. nom. sg. bhikkhu freq. passim; Vin iii.40 (vuḍḍhapabbajita); AN i.78 (thera bh., an elder bh.; and nava bh. a young bh.); iii.299 (id.); iv.25 (id.); Snp 276, Snp 360 Snp 411 sq., 915 sq., 1041, 1104; Dhp 31, Dhp 266 sq., 364 sq. 378; Vv 801; acc. bhikkhuṃ Vin iii.174; Dhp 362,; bhikkhunaṃ Snp 87, Snp 88, Snp 513; gen. dat. bhikkhuno AN i.274; Snp 221, Snp 810, Snp 961; Dhp 373; Pv i.1010; & bhikkhussa AN i.230; Vin iii.175; instr. bhikkhunā Snp 389 pl. nom. bhikkhū Vin ii.150; Vin iii.175; DN iii.123; Vism 152 (in sim.); Vb-a 305 (compared with amaccaputtā) & bhikkhavo Snp 384, Snp 573; Dhp 243, Dhp 283; acc bhikkhu Snp p.78; MN i.84; Vv 2210; & bhikkhavo Snp 384, Snp 573; gen. dat. bhikkhūnaṃ Vin iii.285; DN iii.264; Snp 1015; Pv ii.17; & bhikkhunaṃ SN i.190; Thag 1231 instr. bhikkhūhi Vin iii.175; loc. bhikkhūsu AN iv.25 & bhikkhusu Thag 241, Thag 1207; Dhp 73; voc. bhikkhave (a Māgadhī form of nom. bhikkhavaḥ) Vin iii.175; Snp p.78; Vv-a 127; Pv-a 8, Pv-a 39, Pv-a 166; & bhikkhavo Snp 280 Snp 385.
There are several allegorical etymologies (definitions of the word bhikkhu, which occur frequently in the commentaries. All are fanciful interpretations of the idea of what a bhikkhu is or should be, and these qualities were sought and found in the word itself Thus we mention here the foll. (a) bhikkhu = bhinnakilesa (“one who has broken the stains” i.e. of bad character) Vb-a 328; Vv-a 29, Vv-a 114, Vv-a 310; Pv-a 51. (b) Another more explicit expln is “sattannaṃ dhammānaṃ bhinnattā bhikkhu” (because of the breaking or destroying of 7 things, viz. the 7 bad qualities leading to rebirth, consisting of sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā sīlabbata-parāmāsa, rāga, dosa, moha, māna) This def. at Nd i.70 = Nd ii.477a ■ (c) Whereas in a & b the first syllable; bhi(-kkhu) is referred to bhid, in this def. it is referred to bhī (to fear), with the further reference of (bh-) ikkh(u) to īkṣ (to see) and bhikkhu defined as “saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhati ti bh.” Vism 3, Vism 16 (saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhaṇatāya vā bhinna-paṭa-dharaditāya vā) ■ A very comprehensive def. of the term is found at Vb 245–246, where bhikkhu-ship is established on the ground of 18 qualities (beginning with samaññāya bhikkhu, paṭiññāya bh., bhikkhatī ti bh., bhikkhako ti bh., bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagato ti bh., bhinna-paṭa-dharo ti bh., bhindati pāpake dhamme ti bh., bhinnattā pāpakānaṃ dhammānan ti bh. etc. etc.) ■ This passage is expld in detail at Vb-a 327, Vb-a 328 ■ Two kinds of bhikkhus are distinguished at Pts i.176; Nd i.465 = Nd ii.477b, viz kalyāṇa[-ka-]puthujjana (a layman of good character and sekkha (one in training), for which latter the term paṭilīnacara (one who lives in elimination, i.e. in keeping away from the dangers of worldly life) is given at Nd i.130 (on Snp 810).
-gatika a person who associates with the bhikkhus (in the Vihāra) Vin i.148. -bhāva state of being a monk, monkhood, bhikkhuship DN i.176; Snp p.102 -saṅgha the community of bhikkhus, the Order of friars DN iii.208; Snp 403, Snp 1015; Snp p.101, Snp p.102; Mil 209; Pv-a 19 sq. & passim.;
cp. later Sk. bhikṣu, fr. bhikṣ
(-˚) (adj.) belonging to a Buddhist mendicant, a bhikkhu-, a monk’s, or of monks, in sa˚; with monks, inhabited by bhikkhus Vin iv.307, Vin iv.308 opp. a˚; without bhikkhus, ibid.
fr. bhikkhu
(f.) an almswoman, a female mendicant a Buddhist nun DN iii.123 sq., 148, 168 sq., 264; Vin iv.224 sq., 258 sq. (˚sangha); SN i.128; SN ii.215 sq. SN iv.159 sq.; AN i.88, AN i.113, AN i.279; AN ii.132 (˚parisā), 144 iii.109; iv.75; Mil 28; Vb-a 498 (dahara˚, story of) Vv-a 77.
fr. bhikkhu, cp. BSk. bhiksuṇī, but classical Sk. bhikṣukī
the young of an animal, esp. of an elephant, in its property of being dirty (cp. pigs) Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269 (bhinka-cchāpa) Ja v.418 (with ref. to young cats: “mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṃ vuccati taruṇā bhinka-cchāpa-maṇḍalaṃ, T. ˚cchāca˚, vv.ll. bhiñjaka-cchāca; taruṇa-bhiga-cchāpa; bhinga-cchāja).
cp. Vedic bhṛnga large bee
(& ˚gāra) a water jar, a (nearly always golden) vase, ceremonial vessel (in donations) Vin i.39 (sovaṇṇa-maya); DN ii.172; AN iv.210 = AN iv.214 (T. ˚gāra, v.l. ˚kāra); Cp i.35; Ja i.85 Ja i.93; Ja ii.371; Ja iii.10 (suvaṇṇa˚); Dpvs xi.32; Pv-a 75 Kp-a 175 (suvaṇṇa˚; v.l. BB ˚gāra), Sdhp 513 (soṇṇa˚).
cp. late Sk. bhṛngāra
cheers, cries of delight (?) Bv i.35 (+ sādhu kāra).
?
a bird: Lanius caerulescens Ja v.416.
cp. Sk. bhṛnga bee, bhṛngaka & bhṛnga-rājā
to be broken, to be destroyed; to break (instr.); pres. bhijjati Dhp 148, ppr. bhijjamāna: see phrase abhijjamāne udake under abhijj˚, with which cp. phrase abhejjantyā pathavyā Ja vi.508, which is difficult to explain (not breaking? for abhijjantī after abhejja & abhedi, and *abhijjanto for abhijjamāna, intrs.?). imper. bhijjatu Thag 312 ■ praet. 2;nd pl. bhijjittha Ja i.468 aor. abhedi Ud 93 (abhedi kāyo) ■ fut. bhijjhissati DN-a i.266; grd. bhijjitabba Ja iii.56; on grd. ˚bhijja see pabhindati; grd. bhejja in abhejja not to be broken (q.v.).
Pass. of bhindati, cp. Sk. bhidyate
(nt.) breaking up, splitting, perishing; destruction Ja i.392; Ja v.284; Ja vi.11; Dhp-a i.257 (kaṇṇā bhijjan’ ākāra-pattā); Thag-a 43 (bhijjana-sabhāva of perishable nature; expln of bhidura Thig 35); Pv-a 41 (˚dhammā destructible, of sankhārā) ■ Der. abhijjanaka see sep.
fr. bhijjati
(f.) a wall Vin i.48; DN ii.85; SN ii.103; SN iv.183 SN v.218; Ja i.491; Vism 354 = Vb-a 58 (in comparison) Thag-a 258; Vv-a 42, Vv-a 160, Vv-a 271, Vv-a 302; Pv-a 24.
-khīla a pin (peg) in the wall Vin ii.114, Vin ii.152. -pāda the support or lower part of a wall Ja iv.318.
fr. bhid, cp. *Sk. bhitta fragment, & Class. Sk. bhitti wall
(adj.) having a wall or walls Ja iv.318 (naḷa ˚ā paṇṇasālā ); vi.10 (catu˚ with 4 walls).
fr. bhitti
(adj.) fragile, perishable, transitory Thig 35 (= bhijjana-sabhāva Thag-a 43).
fr. bhid
to split, break, sever destroy, ruin. In two bases: *bhid (with der. *bhed) *bhind; ■ (a) *bhid: aor. 3rd sg. abhida (= Sk abhidat) DN ii.107; Ja iii.29 (see also under abhida) abbhidā Ja i.247; Ja ii.163, Ja ii.164 ■ fut. bhecchati (Sk bhetsyati) AN i.8 ■ ger. bhetvā (Sk. bhittvā) Thag 753; Snp 62 (v.l. BB bhitvā) ■ grd. bhejja: only neg abhejja (q.v.). See also der. bheda, bhedana ■ pp bhinna & Pass.; bhijjati ■ (b) *bhind: pres. bhindati Nd i.503; Dhp-a i.125 (kathaṃ bh. to break a promise) Sdhp 47 ■ ppr. bhindanto Mvu 5, Mvu 185 ■ Pot bhinde Vism 36 (sīlasaṃvaran) ■ fut. bhindissati Vin ii.198 ■ aor. bhindi Ja i.467 (mitta-bhāvaṃ),; abhindi AN iv.312 (atta-sambhavaṃ) ■ ger. bhinditvā Ja i.425, Ja i.490; Pv-a 12; also in phrase indriyāni bhinditvā breaking in one’s senses, i.e. mastering, controlling them Ja ii.274; Ja iv.104, Ja iv.114, Ja iv.190 ■ Caus. I. bhedeti see vi˚. Caus. II. bhindāpeti to cause to be broken Ja i.290 (sīlaṃ); vi.345 (pokkharaṇiṃ) and bhedāpeti Vin iii.42 ■ See also bhindana.
bhid, Sk. bhinatti; cp. Lat. findo to split, Goth. beitan = Ger. beissen. Def. at Dhtp 381, Dhtp 405 by “vidāraṇe” i.e. splitting
(adj.) breaking up, brittle, falling into ruin SN i.131 (kāya).
fr. bhindati
a sort of spear Ja vi.105, Ja vi.248 Abhp 394.
Non-Aryan; Epic Sk. bhindipāla spear, but cp Prk bhiṇḍi-māla & ˚vāla, Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 248 see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 38
1. broken, broken up (lit. & fig.) Snp 770 (nāvā); Ja i.98 (abhinna magga an unbroken path); iii.167 (uda-kumbha); Pv-a 72 (˚sarīra-cchavi)
2. (fig.) split, fallen into dissension, not agreeing DN iii.117 = DN iii.210, DN iii.171 ■ Usually in cpds., & often to be translated by prep. “without,” e.g. bhinnahirottappa without shame ■ Cp. sam˚.
-ājīva without subsistence, one who has little means to live on, one who leads a poor mode of living Mil 229 sq. (opp. parisuddh’ ājīva); Vism 306 -nāva ship-wreeked Ja iv.159. -paṭa a torn cloth, in cpd. ˚dhara “wearing a patchwork cloth,” i.e. a bhikkhu (see also s. v. bhikkhu) Thag 1092. -plava ship-wrecked Ja iii.158. -manta disobeying (i.e. breaking) a counsel Ja vi.437. -sira with a broken head Ja iv.251. -sīmā (f.) one who has broken the bounds (of decency) Mil 122. -sīla one who has broken the norm of good conduct Vism 56. -hirottappa without shame, shameless Ja i.207.
pp. of bhindati
(nt.) state of being broken or destroyed, destruction AN iv.144.
fr. bhinna
(Bhīyo, Bhīyyo) [Vedic bhūyas, compar. form fr. bhū, functioning as compar. to bhūri. On relation Sk bhūyaḥ: P. bhiyyo cp. Sk. jugupsate: P. jigucchati 1. (adj.) more Snp 61 (dukkham ettha bhiyyo), 584 (id.) 306 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhatha); Dhp 313 (bh. rajan ākirate), 349 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhati).
2. (adv.) in a higher degree, more, repeatedly, further SN i.108 (appaṃ vā bhīyo less or more); Snp 434 (bh. cittaṃ pasīdati) Dhp 18 (bh. nandati = ativiya n. C.); Mil 40 ■ See also bhiyyoso, yebhuyyena.
-kamyatā desire for more, greed Vin ii.214. -bhāva getting more, increase, multiplication DN iii.221; Vin iii.45; SN v.9, SN v.198, SN v.244; AN i.98; AN v.70; Vb-a 289.
(adv.) still more, more and more, only in cpd. ˚mattāya [cp. BSk. bhūyasyā mātrāya Mvu ii.345; Divy 263 & passim exceedingly, abundantly AN i.124 = Pp 30 (expld at PugA 212 by “bhiyyoso-mattāya uddhumāyana-bhāvo daṭṭhabbo”); Ja i.61; Pv-a 50.
abl. formation fr. bhiyyo 1
(nt.) the sprout (fr. the root) of a lotus the lotus fibres, lotus plant SN i.204; SN ii.268; Ja i.100 Ja iv.308.
-puppha the lotus flower Snp 2 (= paduma-puppha Snp-a 16). -muḷāla fibres & stalk of the lotus Ja v.39 Vism 361.
cp. Vedic bisa, with bh for b: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 40 1a
a physician MN i.429; AN iii.238 AN iv.340; Iti 101; Mil 169, Mil 215, Mil 229, Mil 247 sq., 302; Vism 598 (in simile); DN-a i.67, DN-a i.255.
cp. Vedic bhiṣaj physician, P. bhesajja medicine & see Geiger,; P.Gr. § 631
(f.) a bolster, cushion pad, roll Vin i.287 sq. (cīvara˚ a robe rolled up); ii.150 170; iii.90; iv.279. Five kinds are allowed in a Vihāra, viz. uṇṇa-bhisi, cola˚, vāka˚, tiṇu˚, paṇṇa˚, i.e. bolsters stuffed with wool, cotton-cloth, bark, grass or talipot leaves, Vin ii.150 = Vb-a 365 (tiṇa˚).
-bimbohana bolster & pillow Vin i.47; Vin ii.208; Dhp-a i.416; Vb-a 365.
cp. Epic Sk. bṛṣī & bṛsī, with bh for b, as in Prk. bhisī, cp. Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 209
a raft Snp 21 ■ Andersen, Pali Reader, Glossary s. v. identifies it with bhisi1 and asks: “Could it also mean a sort of cushion, made of twisted grass used instead of a swimming girdle?”
etym.?
(f.) a small bolster Vin ii.148 (vātapāna˚ a roll to keep out draughts); Kp-a 50 (tāpasa˚ v.l. Kk kapala-bhitti, see Appendix to Indexes on Sutta Nipāta & Pj.).;
fr. bhisi1
(f.) terror, fright DN ii.261 (˚kāya adj. terrific).
= bhiṃsā
frightened, terrified, afraid Dhp 310; Ja i.168 (niraya-bhaya˚); ii.110 (maraṇa-bhaya˚), 129 iv.141 (+ tasita); Pv-a 154, Pv-a 280 (+ tasita). Cp. sam˚.
pp. of bhāyati
see bībhaccha.
(adj.) dreadful, horrible, cruel, awful Ja iv.26; Mil 275.
-kāya of horrible body, terrific Ja v.165. -rūpa of terrifying appearance Thig 353. -sena having a terrifying army Ja iv.26; Ja vi.201. Also Np. of one of the 5 sons of King Paṇḍu Ja v.426; Vism 233.
fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhīma
(adj.) terrifying, horrible, awful Ja v.43 (T. bhīmūla, but read bhīmala; C. expls by bhiṃsanaka-mahāsadda).
fr. bhīma
Pass. to bharati, only in cpd. ppr. anubhīramāna MN iii.123 (chatta: being brought up,or carried behind) Neumann, M. trsl.2iii.248 translates “über ihm schwebt,” & proposes reading (on p. 563); anu-hīramāna (fr. hṛ; ). This reading is to be preferred, & is also found at DN ii.15.
(adj. n.) 1. fearful, i.e. having fear, timid, afraid, shy, cowardly Sdhp 207 (dukkha˚); usually in neg. abhīru not afraid, without fear, combd with anutrāsin: see utrāsin.
2. fearful i.e. causing fear, awful, dreadful, terrible Pv ii.41 (˚dassana terrible to look at).
3. (m.) fear, cowardice Snp 437 (= utrāsa Snp-a 390).
-ttāṇa refuge for the fearful, adj. one who protects those who are in fear AN ii.174; Iti 25; Sdhp 300.
fr. bhī; cp. Vedic bhīru
(adj.) afraid, shy, cowardly, shunning (-˚) Vism 7 (pāpa˚), 645 (jīvitu-kāma bhīruka-purisa).
fr. bhīru
(adj.) = bhiṃsana (q.v.) Pv iv.35 (v.l. in Pv-a 251), expld by bhayajanana Pv-a 251, where C. reading also bhīsana.
(adj.) barking, n a barker, i.e. dog; only in redupl. intens. formation bho-bhu-kka (cp. E. bow-wow), lit. bhu-bhu-maker (: kka fr. kṛ; ?) Ja vi.354 (C.: bhun-karaṇa). See also bhussati.
fr. onomat. root *bhukk, dialectical, cp. Prk. bhukkai to bark, bhukkiya barking, bhukkana dog (Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 209); the root bhukk (bukk) is given by Hemacandra 4, 98 in meaning “garjati (see P. gajjati), cp. also Prk. bukkaṇa crow
(adj.-n..) making “bhu,” i.e. bow-wow, barking Ja vi.355 (˚sunakha) v.l. bhu-bhukka-sadda-karaṇa.
bhu + kṛ; see bhukka
(adj.) only in cpd. yathā-bhuccaṃ (nt. adv.) as it is, that which really is, really (= yathā bhūtaṃ) Thig 143. See under yathā.
ger. of bhū in composition, corresponding to *bhūtya → *bhutya, like pecca (*pretya) fr. pra + i In function equal to bhūta
(m. & nt.) the arm Snp 48 (expld by Nd ii.478 as hattha, hand); 682 (pl. bhujāni); Ja v.91, Ja v.309; Ja vi.64 Bv i.36; Vv 6418.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhuja m. & bhujā; bhuj, bhujate to bend, lit. “the bender”; the root is expld by koṭilya (koṭilla) at Dhtp 470 (Dhtm 521). See also bhuja3. Idg. *bheṅg, fr. which also Lat. fugio to flee = Gr. φεύγω, Lat. fuga flight = Sk bhoga ring, Ohg. bouc; Goth. biugan to bend = Ger beugen & biegen; Ohg. bogo = E. bow. Semantically cp. Lat. lacertus the arm, i.e. the bend, fr. *leq to bend to which P. laguḷa a club (q.v. for etym.), with which cp. Lat. lacerta = lizard, similar in connotation to P bhujaga snake
clean, pure, bright, beautiful Ja vi.88 (˚dassana beautiful to look at; C. explns by kalyāṇa dassana).
fr. bhuñjati2
(adj.) bending, crooked, in bhuja-laṭṭhi betel-pepper tree Ja vi.456 (C.: bhujangalatā perhaps identical with bhujaka?), also in cpd bhuja-ga going crooked, i.e. snake Mil 420 (bhujaginda king of snakes, the cobra); Dāvs. 2, 17; also as bhujaṅga Dāvs 2, Dāvs 56, & in der.; bhujaṅga-latā “snakecreeper,” i.e. name of the betel-pepper Ja vi.457; and bhujaṅgama SN i.69 ■ Cp. bhogin2.
fr. bhuj to bend
a fragrant tree growing (according to Dhpāla) only in the Gandhamādana grove of the Devaloka Vv 355; Vv-a 162.
fr. bhuj, as in bhuñjati2; or does it belong to bhuja3 and equal to bhuja-laṭṭhi?
1. (n. m.) a freed slave freeman; a servant as distinguished from a slave Vin i.93; Ja ii.313; Pv-a 112 ■ bhujissaṃ karoti to grant freedom to a slave Ja v.313; Ja vi.389, Ja vi.546; Dhp-a i.19 Thag-a 200 ■ f. bhujissā Vin ii.271 (in same sequence as bhujissa at Vin i.93).
2. (adj.) freeing fr. slavery productive of freedom DN ii.80 (cp. Dial. ii.80); iii.245; SN ii.70; SN iv.272; AN iii.36, AN iii.132, AN iii.213; Vism 222 (with exegesis). Cp. bhoja & bhojaka.;
-bhāva state of being freed fr. slavery, freedom Thag-a 200.
cp. BSk. bhujiṣya Divy 302, according to Mhvyut § 84 meaning “clean”; thus fr. bhuj (see bhuñjati2) to purify, sort out
(adj.) eating, one who eats or enjoys, in ˚sammuti definition of “eater,” speaking of an eater, declaration or statement of eating Vb-a 164.
fr. bhuñjati1
to Lat. fruor, frūx = E. fruit, frugal etc.; Goth. brūkjan = As. brūkan = Ger. brauchen. The Dhtp 379 (& Dhtm 613) expl;ns bhuj by “pālan ajjhohāresu,” i.e. eating & drinking for the purpose of living] to eat (in general), to enjoy, make use of, take advantage of, use Snp 102, Snp 240, Snp 259, Snp 619; Dhp 324 Pp 55. Pot. bhuñjeyya Snp 400; Dhp 308, Dhp 2nd pl bhuñjetha Dhp 70; Mvu 25, Mvu 113. Imper. 2nd med bhuñjassa SN v.53; SN v.3rd act. bhuñjatu SN i.141; Snp 479 bhuñjassu Snp 421; ppr. bhuñjanto Ja iii.277: bhuñjamāna Thag 12; Snp 240. Fut. 1st sg. bhokkhaṃ [Sk bhoksyāmi] Ja iv.117. Aor. 1st sg. bhuñjiṃ Miln 47 3rd sg. bhuñji Ja iv.370; Ja iv.3rd pl. abhuñjiṃsu Thag 922 abhuñjisuṃ Mvu 7, Mvu 25. Ger. bhutvā Ja iii.53 (= bhuñjitvā C.); Dhp-a i.182; bhutvāna Snp 128. Grd bhuñjitabba Mvu 5, Mvu 127. Inf. bhottuñ: see ava˚. pp. bhutta ■ Caus. bhojeti (q.v.). Cp. bhoga bhojana, bhojanīya, bhojja; also Desid. pp. bubbhukkhita; & ābhuñjati.;
to purify, cleanse, sift, not given in this meaning by the Dhātupāṭha. Cp. Av. buxti purification buj to clean, also Lat. fungor (to get through or rid of, cp. E. function), Goth. us-baugjan to sweep; P paribhuñjati 2, paribhojaniya & vinibbhujati. See Kern,; Toev. p. 104, s. v. bhujissa] to clean, purify cleanse: see bhuja2 and bhujissa, also bhoja & bhojaka.;
(nt.) [fr. bhuñjati1] taking food, act of eating, feasting Ja iv.371 (˚kāraṇa); Pv-a 184.
-kāla meal-time Dhp-a i.346.
1. (Pass.) eaten, being eaten Snp p.15; Dhp 308; impers. eating Vin iv.82 (bhuttaṃ hoti). Also ˚geha eating house Ja v.290, and in phrase yathā-bhuttaṃ bhuñjatha “eat according to eating,” i.e. as ought to be eaten, eating in moderation DN ii.173 (where Rh. D., Dial. ii.203, trsls “ye shall eat as ye have eaten”) = iii.62, 63 (where Rh. D., Dial. iii.64 trsls “enjoy your possessions as you have been wont to do”; see note ibid.). We should favour a translation in the first sense ■ dubbhuttaṃ, indigestible
2. (Med. cp. bhuttar) having eaten, one who has eaten Mil 370 (sace bhutto bhaveyy’ âhaṃ); also in phrase bhutta-pātar-āsa after having eaten breakfast Ja ii.273; Dhp-a iv.226.
-āvasesa the remainder of a meal Vin ii.216.
pp. of bhuñjati1; Sk. bhukta
one who eats or has eaten, or enjoys (cp. bhutta 2) Ja v.465 (ahaṃ bhuttā bhakkhaṃ ras’ uttamaṃ).
n. ag. fr. bhuj, cp. Sk. bhoktṛ already Vedic & Epic
(adj.) having eaten, one who has eaten Ja v.170 (= kata-bhatta-kicca); Vv-a 244.
bhutta + vant
(adj.) having eaten, one who has had a meal nom. sg. bhuttāvī Vin iv.82; Mil 15 (+ onīta-pattapāṇi); Pv-a 23 (+ pavārita); Snp-a 58; instr. bhuttāvinā Vin iv.82; gen. dat. bhuttavissa DN ii.195. acc. bhuttāviṃ Vin i.213; Snp p.111 (+ onīta-pattapāṇiṃ) Ja v.170; nom. pl. bhuttāvī Vin iv.81, & bhuttāvino SN iv.289.
bhutta + suffix ˚āvin, corresponding to Vedic ˚āyin
(adj.-n.) 1. belonging to the earth, earthly, terrestrial; nt. soil, ground, floor Snp 222 (bhūtāni bhummāni earthly creatures contrasted with creatures in the air, antalikkhe), 236 (id.); Sdhp 420 (sabba-bhummā khattiyā). pl. bhummā the earthly ones, i.e. the gods inhabiting the earth, esp tree gods (Yakkhas) Vv 842 (= bhumma-deva Vv-a 334)-nt. ground: Pv ii.102 (yāva bhummā down to the ground); v.l. BB bhūm(i).
2. the locative case Kp-a 106, Kp-a 111, Kp-a 224; Snp-a 140, Snp-a 210, Snp-a 321, Snp-a 433; Pv-a 33.
-attharaṇa “earth-spread,” a ground covering, mat carpet Vin i.48; Vin ii.208; Vin iv.279. -antara “earth-occasion,” i.e. (1) sphere of the earth, plane of existence Mil 163; Dhs-a 296 ■ (2) in ˚pariccheda discussion concerning the earth, i.e. cosmogony Dhs-a 3. -antalikkha earthly and celestial, over earth & sky (of portents) Mil 178. The form would correspond to Sk. *bhaum-āntarīkṣa.; -jāla “terrestrial net (of insight) gift of clear sight extending over the globe (perhaps to find hidden treasures) Snp-a 353 (term of a vijjā, science or magic art). Cp. bhūrikamma bhūrivijjā ■; ṭṭha (a) put into the earth, being in the earth, found on or in the earth, earthly Vin iii.47 (b) standing on the earth Dhp 28 ■ (c) resting on the earth Mil 181. Also as ˚ka living on earth, earthly (of gods) Ja iii.87. -deva a terrestrial deva or fairy AN iv.118; Pts ii.149; Vb-a 12; Dhp-a i.156; Vv-a 334; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 43, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 215, Pv-a 277. -devatā = ˚deva Ja iv.287 (= yakkha); Kp-a 120.
fr. bhūmi, Vedic bhūmya
(f.) that which belongs to the ground, i.e. a plane (of existence), soil, stage (as t.t. in philosophy) Dhs-a 277 (˚y-āpatti), 339 (id.), 985 (dukkha˚), 1368, 1374 sq. (see Dhs trsl.2 231).
fr. bhumma
a voc. of friendly address “my (dear) man” (lit. terrestrial) Vin ii.304 (= piyavacanaṃ Bdhgh).
old voc. of bhumma
the regular P. representative of Sk. bhūyas (compar.); for which usually bhiyya (q.v.). Only in cpd. yebhuyyena (q.v.).
see bhū.
chaff, husks AN i.241 (˚āgāra chaff-house); Dhp 252 (opuṇāti bhusaṃ to sift husks); Ud 78; Pv iii.41; iii.107; Vv-a 47 (tiṇa litter).
cp. Vedic busa (nt.) & buśa (m.)
(adj.) strong, mighty, great Dhp 339 (taṇhā = balavā Dhp-a iv.48); Ja v.361 (daṇḍa daḷha, balavā C.) ■ nt. bhusaṃ (adv.) much, exceedingly, greatly, vehemently. In cpds. bhusaṃ˚ & bhusa˚-S i.69; Ja iii.441; Ja iv.11; Ja v.203 (bhusa-dassaneyya) vi.192; Vv 69; Pv 338; iv.77; Mil 346; Snp-a 107 (“verbum intensivum”); Sdhp 289.
cp. Vedic bhṛśa
to bark DN-a i.317 (bhusati vv.ll. bhussati & bhūsati); Dhp-a i.171, Dhp-a i.172 ■ See also bhasati & bhukka; -pp. bhusita.
perhaps a legitimate form for Sk. bhaṣate (see P. bhasati), with u for a, so that the suggested correction of bhusati to bhasati (see under bhasati) is unfounded
(f.) chaff AN i.242; Vin ii.181.
fr. bhusa1
barking Ja iv.182 (˚sadda, barking, noise). See also bhasita.
pp. of bhusati
to make strong, to cause to grow (?) Ja v.218 (C. explns by “bhusaṃ karoti, vaḍḍheti” p. 224).
Denom. fr. bhusa2 = *bhṛśayati; but not certain, may have to be read bhūseti, to endeavour, cp. Sk bhūṣati
(adj.) being, (n.) creature, living being in pāṇa-bhū a living being (a breathing being) Ja v.79 (= pāṇa-bhūta C.).
fr. bhū
(f.) the earth; loc. bhuvi according to Kaccāyana; otherwise bhuvi is aor. 3rd sg. of bhū: see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 516; Geiger, Pali Gr. § 865.
fr. bhū, otherwise bhūmi
(f.) frown, anger, superciliousness MN i.125 (v.l. bhakuṭi & bhā˚); Ja v.296.
a different spelling of bhakuṭi, q.v ■ Cp. Sk. bhṛkuti & bhrukuṭi
the Bhūrja tree, i.e. a kind of willow Ja v.195, Ja v.405 (in both places = ābhujī), 420.
cp. late Sk. bhūrja, with which related Lat. fraxinus ash, Ags. beorc = E. birch, Ger. birke
grown, become; born, produced; nature as the result of becoming. The (exegetical) definition by Bdhgh of the word bhūta is interesting. He (at MN-a i.31) distinguishes the foll. 7 meanings of the term: (1) animate Nature as principle or the vital aggregates (the 5 Khandhas), with ref. MN i.260; (2) ghosts (amanussā) Snp 222; (3) inanimate Nature as principle, or the Elements (the 4 dhātus SN iii.101 (mahābhūtā); (4) all that exists, physical existence in general (vijjamānaṃ) Vin iv.25 (bhūtaṃ) (5) what we should call a simple predicative use, is exemplified by a typical dogmatic example, viz. “kālaghaso bhūto,” where bhūta is given as meaning khīṇāsava (Arahant) Ja ii.260; (6) all beings or specified existence, animal kingdom (sattā) DN ii.157; (7) the vegetable kingdom, plants, vegetation (rukkh’ ādayo Vin iv.34 (as bhūta-gāma) ■ Meanings: 1. bhūtā bhūtāni; (pl.) beings, living beings, animate Nature Snp 35 (expld at Nd ii.479 as 2 kinds, viz. tasā & thāvarā movable & immovable; SN ii.47 (K.S. ii.36) mind and body as come-to-be; Dhp 131 (bhūtāni), 405; MN i.2 sq (paṭhavī, āpo etc., bhūtā, devā, Pajāpatī etc.), 4; MN-a i.32. The pl. nt. bhūtāni is used as pl. to meaning 2; viz. inanimate Nature, elements, usually enumd under term mahā- bhūtāni.
2. (nt.) nature, creation world MN i.2 (bhūte bhūtato sañjānāti recognises the beings from nature, i.e. from the fact of being nature) Dhs-a 312 (˚pasāda-lakkhaṇa, see Expos. 409). See cpds. ˚gāma, ˚pubba (?).
3. (nt. adj.) that which is i.e. natural, genuine, true; nt. truth; neg. abhūta falsehood, lie Snp 397; Pv-a 34. See cpds. ˚bhāva ˚vacana, ˚vāda.
4. a supernatural being, ghost demon, Yakkha; pl. bhūtā guardian genii (of a city Ja iv.245. See cpds. ˚vijja, ˚vejja.
5. (-˚) pp. in predicative use (cp. on this meaning Bdhgh’s meaning No. 5, above): (a) what has been or happened; viz mātu-bhūtā having been his mother Pv-a 78; abhūtapubbaṃ bhūtaṃ what has never happened before happened (now) DN-a i.43 (in expln of abbhuta) ■ (b having become such & such, being like, acting as, being quâsi (as it were), consisting of, e.g. andha˚ blind, as it were Ja vi.139; aru˚ consisting of wounds Dhp-a iii.109; udapāna˚ being a well, a well so to speak Pv-a 78; opāna˚ acting as a spring AN iv.185; hetu as reason, being the reason Pv-a 58; cp. cakkhu˚ having become an eye of wisdom. Sometimes bhūta in this use hardly needs to be translated at all.
-kāya body of truth Dhp-a i.11 ■ gāma vegetation, as trees, plants, grass, etc. Under bhūtagāma Bdhgh understands the 5 bīja-jātāni (5 groups of plants springing from a germinative power: see bīja), viz mūla-bījaṃ, khandha˚, phala˚, agga˚, bīja˚. Thus in C. on Vin iv.34 (the so-called bhūtagāma-sikkhāpada quoted at Dhp-a iii.302 & Snp-a 3); cp. MN iii.34; Ja v.46; Mil 3, Mil 244. -gāha possession by a demon Mil 168 (cp. Divy 235). -ṭṭhāna place of a ghost Kp-a 170 -pati (a) lord of beings Ja v.113 (of Inda); vi.362 (id.) Vv 641 (id.). (b) lord of ghosts, or Yakkhas Ja vi.269 (of Kuvera). -pubba (a) as adj. (-˚) having formerly been so & so, as mātā bhūtapubbo satto, pitā etc., in untraced quotation at Vism 305; also at Snp-a 359 (Bhagavā kuṇāla-rājā bhūtapubbo) ■ (b) as adv (bhūtapubbaṃ) meaning: before all happening, before creation, at a very remote stage of the world, in old times, formerly Vin ii.201; DN i.92; DN ii.167, DN ii.285, DN ii.337; MN i.253; MN iii.176; SN i.216, SN i.222, SN i.227; SN iv.201; SN v.447; AN iv.136 = Vism 237; AN iv.432; Ja i.394; Dhp-a i.56 -bhavya past and future DN i.18. -bhāva truthful character, neg. a˚ Pv-a 14. -vacana statement of reality or of the truth Snp-a 336. -vādin truthful speaking the truth MN i.180; DN iii.175; Pp 58; a˚ untruthful Dhp 306; Ja ii.416. -vikāra a natural blemish fault of growth, deformity Snp-a 189 (opp. nibbikāra) -vijjā knowledge of demons, exorcism DN i.9; Dhp i.93 cp. Dial. i.17). -vejja a healer of harm caused by demons, an exorcist Vin iv.84; Ja ii.215; Ja iii.511; Mil 23.
pp. of bhavati, Vedic etc. bhūta
(nt.) the fact of having grown, become or being created (i.e. being creatures or part of creation) Vism 310 (in def. of bhūtā); MN-a i.32 (id.).
abstr. fr. bhūta
a fragrant grass; Andropogon schoenanthus Ja vi.36 (= phanijjaka); Vism 543 (so v.l. for T. bhūtinaka).
cp. *Sk. bhūtṛna
(adj.) (-˚) in cpd. cātummahā˚ belongs to the whole expression, viz. composed of the 4 great elements MN i.515.
a destroyer of beings Snp 664 (voc. bhūnahu, expld by Snp-a 479 as “bhūti-hanaka vuddhi-nāsaka”; vv.ll. bhūnahaṭa bhūnahoṭa, bhūhata, all showing the difficulty of the archaic word); Ja v.266 (pl. bhūnahuno, expld by C 272 as “isīnaṃ ativattāro attano vaḍḍhiyā hatattā bh.”). Cp. MN i.502 (“puritanical” suggested by Lord Chalmers).
difficult to expln; is it an old misspelling for bhūta + gha? The latter of han ?
(-˚) 1. (lit.) ground, country, district SN iii.5 (pacchā˚ the western district).
2. (fig. ground, reason for, occasion; stage, step Snp 896 (avivāda˚ ground of harmony; according to Snp-a 557 Ep. of Nibbāna).
= bhūmi
(& ˚ika) (adj.) (only-˚) 1. having floors or stories (of buildings) as dve˚ pāsāda Dhp-a i.414; pañca˚; pāsāda a palace with 5 stories Ja i.58, Ja i.89; satta˚; with 7 stories (pāsāda) Dhp-a ii.1, Dhp-a ii.260. The form ˚ika at Dhp-a i.182 (dve˚ geha). 2. belonging to a place or district, as jāti˚ from the land of (their) birth MN i.147; pacchā˚; from the western country SN iv.312 (brāhmaṇā).
3. being on a certain plane or in a certain state, as paritta˚ & mahā˚; Vb 340 te˚; in 3 planes Snp-a 4 (of the 5 Khandhas), 510 (˚vaṭṭa); Dhp-a i.36 (kusala), 305 (˚vaṭṭa); iv.69 (tebhūmaka-vaṭṭa-sankhātaṃ Māra-bandhanaṃ), 72 (dhammā) catu˚; in 4 planes Dhs-a 296 (kusala); Dhp-a i.35 (citta) The form ˚ika at Dhp-a i.288 (with ref. to citta).
from bhūma, or bhūmi
(f.) [cp. Vedic bhūmi, Av. būmiš soil, ground, to bhū, as in bhavati, cp. Gr. φύσις etc. See bhavati 1. (lit.) ground, soil, earth Vin ii.175; Snp 418 (yāna carriage road); Pv i.1014≈; Snp-a 353 (heṭṭhā-bhūmiyaṃ under the earth); Dhp-a i.414 (id., opp. upari-bhūmiyaṃ)
2. place, quarter, district, region MN i.145 (jāti district of one’s birth); Snp 830 (vighāta˚); Nd ii.475 (danta˚); Dhp-a i.213 (āpāna˚); Pv-a 80 (susāna˚)- uyyāna˚; garden (-place or locality) Vv 6419; Pv ii.129 Ja i.58.
3. (fig.) ground, plane, stage, level; state of consciousness, Vin. i.17; Vb 322 sq.; Vism 126, Vism 442 (with ref. to the 4 Paṭisambhidā, as sekha-bhūmi asekha-bhūmi), 517 (paññā˚-niddesa). usually -˚ indriya˚ Ne 192; dassana˚ plane of insight Ne 8, Ne 14 Ne 50; sukha˚ ground for happiness Dhs 984 (cp Dhs-a 214) ■ bhūmi-ttaya the 3 stages, viz kāmâvacara, rūpâvacara, lokuttara Vism 493 ■ pl bhūmiyo Pts ii.205 = Vism 384 (appld to the 4 jhānas) purisa˚ (aṭṭha p. bh. eight stages of the individual viz. manda-bhūmi, khiḍḍā˚, vīmaṃsana˚, ujugata˚ sekha˚, samaṇa˚, jina˚, panna˚, or as trsld by Rh. D in Dial. i.72, under “eight stages of a prophet’s existence”; babyhood, playtime, trial time, erect time learning time, ascetic time, prophet time & prostrate time. Cp. the 10 decades of man’s life, as given by Bdhgh at Vism 619) ■ Bdhgh, when defining the 2 meanings of bhūmi as “mahā-paṭhavī” and as “cittuppāda” (rise of thought) had in view the distinction between its literal & figurative meaning. But this def (at Dhs-a 214) is vague & only popular ■ An old loc of bhūmi is; bhumyā, e.g. Ja i.507; Ja v.84. Another form of bhūmi at end of cpds. is bhūma (q.v.).
-kampa shaking of the ground, earthquake Mil 178 -gata “gone into the soil,” i.e. hiding, stored away Ja i.375. -ghana thick soil Snp-a 149, cp. paṭhavi-ghana ibid. 146. -tala ground (-surface) Pv-a 186. -padesa place or region upon the earth Ja vi.95. -pappaṭaka outgrowths in the soil DN iii.87 = Vism 418. -pothana beating the ground Dhp-a i.171. -bhāga division of the earth, district Ja i.109; Ja v.200; Vv-a 125; Pv-a 29, Pv-a 154 -laddh’ (uppanna) acquired on a certain stage of existence Snp-a 4. -saya lying or sleeping on the ground Dhp-a ii.61.
(f.) the earth; given as name for the earth (paṭhavi) at Pts ii.197; see also def. at Dhs-a 147. Besides these only in 2 doubtful cpds., both resting on demonology, viz. bhūrikamma DN i.12, expld as “practices to be observed by one living in a bhūrighara or earth-house” (?) DN-a i.97, but cp. Vedic bhūri-karman “much effecting”; and bhūrivijjā DN i.9, expld as “knowledge of charms to be pronounced by one living in an earth-house” (?) DN-a i.93. See Dial. i.18, 25. The meaning of the terms is obscure there may have been (as Kern rightly suggests: see Toev. s. v.) quite a diff. popular practice behind them which was unknown to the later Commentator. Kern suggests that bhūri-vijjā might be a secret science to find gold (digging for it: science of hidden treasures) and ˚kamma might be “making gold” (alchemistic science). Perhaps the term bhumma-jāla is to be connected with these two.
cp. late Sk. bhūr
(adj.) wide, extensive, much, abundant, Dhs-a 147 (in def. of the term bhūri1, i.e. earth); otherwise only in cpds.: ˚pañña (adj.) of extensive wisdom, very wise SN iv.205; Snp 346, Snp 792, Snp 1097 Snp 1143; Pv iii.55; Pts ii.197 (“paṭhavī-samāya vitthatāya vipulāya paññāya samannāgato ti bhūripañño, with other definitions); Nd i.95 (same expln as under Pts ii.197); Nd ii.415 C. (id.). ˚paññāṇa (adj.) same as ˚pañña Snp 1136 ≈ (cp. Nd ii.480). ˚medhasa (adj.) very intelligent SN i.42, SN i.174; SN iii.143; AN iv.449; Snp 1131, Snp 1136 Thag 1266; Pv iii.77.
cp. Vedic bhūri
(f.) knowledge, understanding intelligence Dhp 282, quoted at Dhs-a 76 (expld as termed so because it is as widespread as the earth; Dhs 16; Dhp-a iii.421; same expln at Dhs-a 148) Ja vi.415.
is it original? Cp. BSk. bhūri in same sense at Lal. V. 444, 541; Mvu iii.332
(nt.) ornament, decoration Vism 10 (yatino-sīla-bhūsana-bhūsitā contrasted to rājāno muttāmaṇi-vibhūsitā).
fr. bhūṣ
(f.) ornament, decoration, only in cpd. bhūsa-(read bhūsā-)dassaneyya beautiful as an ornament Pv iii.32.
fr. bhūṣ
to adorn, embellish, beautify. Only in pp. bhūsita adorned with (-˚) Pv ii.952, 127; iii.35; Ja vi.53. Cp. vi˚.
Caus. of bhūṣ, to be busy; in meaning “to adorn” etc. Expld at Dhtp. 315, 623 by “alaṅkāra”
a frog Thag 310; Ja iii.430; Ja iv.247; Ja vi.208.
cp. Vedic bheka, onomat.
is fut. of bhindati (q.v.).
(adj.) to be split, only in neg. form abhejja not to be split or sundered Snp 255; Ja i.263; Ja iii.318; Pp 30; Mil 160, Mil 199.
grd. of bhindati
(adj.) breakable; like bhejja only in neg. form abhejjanaka indestructible Ja i.393.
fr. bhejja
a kind of missile used as a weapon arrow Vin iii.77 (where enumd with asi, satti & laguḷa in expl;n of upanikkhipana).
perhaps identical with & only wrong spelling; for bheṇḍu = kaṇḍu2
a ball, bead; also a ball-shaped ornament or turret, cupola Thag 164 (see kaṇḍu2) Ja i.386 (also ˚maya ball-shaped); iii.184 (v.l. geṇḍu).
with v.l. geṇḍu, of uncertain reading & meaning. Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 107 gives giṇḍu & remarks that this cannot be derived fr. kaṇḍuka (although; kaṇḍu may be considered as gloss of bheṇḍu at Thag 164: see kaṇḍu2), but belongs with Prk. geṇḍui play & P geṇḍuka and the originally Sk. words genduka, ginduka geṇḍu, geṇḍuka to a root; gid, giḍ, Prk. giṇḍai to play Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 90 says: “I am inclined to read geṇḍu in all cases & to compare it with geḍuka & geṇḍuka a ball”
a ball for playing Ja iv.30, Ja iv.256; Ja v.196; Ja vi.471; Dhs-a 116 See also geṇḍuka.
in all probability misreading for geṇḍuka. The v.l. is found at all passages. Besides this occur the vv.ll. keṇḍuka (= kaṇḍuka?) & kuṇḍika
a knob, cupola, round tower Ja i.2 (mahā-bh˚-pamāṇa).
fr. bheṇḍu, identical with bheṇḍuka1
a breaker, divider AN v.283.
n. ag. fr. bhid
1. breaking, rending, breach, disunion, dissension Vism 64 sq. (contrasted with ānisaṃsa), 572 sq (with ref. to upādāna & bhava); Vb-a 185 (id.); Sdhp 66, Sdhp 457, Sdhp 463 ■ mithu˚; breaking of alliance DN ii.76; Ja iv.184; Kv 314 ■ vacī˚; breaking of [the rule as to speech Mil 231 ■ saṅgha˚; disunion in the Sangha Vin ii.203 ■ sīla˚; breach of morality Ja v.163 ■ abl bhedā after the destruction or dissolution in phrase kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā, i.e. after the breaking up of the body & after death: see kāya i.e. & cp. DN iii.52, DN iii.146 sq., 258; Dhp 140; Pp 51.
2. (-˚) sort kind, as adj. consisting of, like Ja ii.438; Ja vi.3 (kaṭuk ādi˚); Dhp-a iii.14 (kāya-sucarit’-ādi˚-bhadra-kammāni) Snp-a 290 (Avīci-ādi-˚ niraya).
-kara causing division or dissension Vin ii.7; Vin iii.173 Vin v.93 (cp. Vin i.354 & Vin. Texts iii.266 for the 18 errors in which the Sangha is brought into division by bhikkhus who are in the wrong); Dhs-a 29 (aṭṭhārasa bheda-kara-vatthūni the 18 causes of dissension).
fr. bhid, cp. Ved. & Class. Sk. bheda in same meanings
(adj. n.) breaking, dividing, causing disunion; (m.) divider Vin ii.205; Ja vi.382 ■ nt. adv bhedakaṃ, as in ˚nakha in such a way as to break a nail DN-a i.37.
fr. bheda
(nt.) 1. breaking (open), in puṭa˚; breaking of the seed-boxes (of the Pāṭali plant), idiomatic for “merchandise” Mil 1 See under puṭa.
2. (fig.) breach, division, destruction AN iv.247; Dhp 138; Bv ii.7; Ja i.467 (mittabhāva˚).
-dhamma subject to destruction, fragile, perishable AN iv.386; Ja i.146, Ja i.392; Thag-a 254. -saṃvattanika leading to division or dissension Vin iii.173. Bhedapeti & Bhedeti;
fr. bhid, as in Caus. bhedeti
are Causatives of bhindati (q.v.).
a jackal Ja v.270; the nom. probably formed after the acc. in phrase bheraṇḍakaṃ nadati to cry after the fashion of, or like a jackal AN i.187.
cp. *Sk. bheruṇḍa
(adj.) fearful, terrible, frightful Thag 189; Snp 959, Snp 965, Snp 984; Nd i.370 Nd i.467; Ja vi.520; Dpvs 17, 100; Pgdp 26, Pgdp 31 ■ bahu˚ very terrible AN iii.52; stricken with terror Ja vi.587-(n) terror, combd with bhaya fear & dismay MN i.17; AN iv.291; AN v.132; Thag 367, Thag 1059 ■ pahīna-bhayabherava having left behind (i.e. free from) fear terror SN iii.83.
-rāva cry of terror Mil 254.
fr. bhīru, cp. Epic Sk. bhairava
(f.) a kettle-drum (of large size; Dhs-a 319 distinguishes 2 kinds: mahā˚ & paṭaha˚ DN i.79; AN ii.185; Vv 8110; Ja vi.465; Dhp-a i.396; Sdhp 429 ■ issara˚; the drum of the ruler or lord Ja i.283 paṭaha˚; kettle-drum Dpvs 16, 14; Dhs-a 319; Pv-a 4 yāma˚; (-velāya) (at the time) when the drum sounds the watch Ja v.459 ■ bheriṃ vādeti to sound the drum Ja i.283 ■ bheriyo vādentā (pl.) beating (lit. making sound) the drums Ja ii.110. bheriñ carāpeti to make the drum go round, i.e. to proclaim by beat of drum Ja v.41; Ja vi.10.
-caraṇa the carrying round of the drum (in proclamations), in cpds. ˚magga the proclamation road Dhp-a ii.43; & ˚vīthi id. Dhp-a ii.45. -tala the head of the drum Vism 489 (in comparison); Vb-a 80 (id.) -paṇava drum & tabor (in battle) AN ii.117. -vāda drum-sound, fig. for a loud voice Pv-a 89 (bherivādena akkosati rails like drum). -vādaka a drummer Ja i.283 -saññā sign of the drum Dhp-a i.396. -sadda sound of the drum Ja i.283.
cp. Epic Sk. bherī
(nt.) a remedy, medicament, medicine Vin i.278; DN ii.266; MN i.30; Snp-a 154, Snp-a 446; Sdhp 393-bhesajjaṃ karoti to treat with a medicine Dhp-a i.25 mūla-bhesajjāni the principal medicines Mil 43; pañca bhesajjāni the 5 remedies (allowed to bhikkhus) Dhp-a i.5.
-kapālaka medicine bowl Vb-a 361. -sikkhāpada the medicine precepts Vb-a 69.
cp. Vedic bhaiṣajya = bheṣaja, fr. bhiṣaj; see also P. bhisakka
(adj.) terrible, awful Vin ii.203 = Iti 86 (“bhesmā hi udadhī mahā,” so read for Vin. bhasmā with v.l. bhesmā, and for It tasmā, with v.l. BB bhesmā, misunderstood by ed ■ Bdhgh Vin ii.325 on Vin. passage expls by bhayānaka); Ja v.266; Ja vi.133 (v.l. bhasma).
cp. Vedic bhīṣma of which the regular P. form is bhiṃsa, of bhī; bhesma would correspond to a form *bhaiṣma
(indecl.) a familiar term of address (in speaking to equals or inferiors): sir friend, you, my dear; pl. sirs DN i.88, DN i.90, DN i.93, DN i.111; MN i.484; Snp 427, Snp 457, Snp 487; with voc. of noun: bho purisa my dear man Ja i.423; bho brahmaṇā oh ye brahmans Ja ii.369. Double bho bho Dhp-a iv.158.
-vādika = ˚vādin Nd i.249. -vādin a brahman, i.e. one who addresses others with the word “bho,” implying some superiority of the speaker; name given to the brahman, as proud of his birth, in contrast to brāhmaṇa, the true brahman Snp 620; Dhp 396; Ja vi.211 Ja vi.214; Dhp-a iv.158.
voc. of bhavant, cp. Sk. bhoḥ which is the shortened voc. bhagoḥ of Vedic bhagavant; cp. as to form P. āvuso → Sk. āyuṣmaḥ of āyuṣmant
is fut. of bhuñjati (q.v.).
at Vb-a 424, in phrase sucikāmo bh. brāhmaṇo is a kind of Desider, formation fr. bhuj˚ (bhuñj), appearing as *bhukṣ = bhokkh (cp. bhokkhaṃ), with ending ˚in; meaning “wishing to eat.” It corresponds to Sk bhoktu-kāma. Cp. also n. ag. bhoktṛ of *bhukṣ enjoyer, eater. P. bhokkhi might be Sk. bhoktrī, if it was not for the latter being f. The word is a curiosity.
1. enjoyment AN iv.392 (kāmaguṇesu bh.).
2. possession, wealth DN iii.77; Snp 301, Snp 421; Dhp 139, Dhp 355; Pp 30, Pp 57; Sdhp 86, Sdhp 228 Sdhp 264 ■ appa˚; little or no possession Snp 114.
-khandha a mass of wealth, great possessions DN ii.86 (one of the 5 profits accruing from virtue). -gāma “village of revenue,” a tributary village, i.e. a village which has to pay tribute or contributions (in food etc.) to the owner of its ground. The latter is called gāmabhojaka or gāmapati “landlord” Ja ii.135 Cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 71, 112. -cāgin giving riches, liberal AN iii.128.. -pārijuñña loss of property or possessions Vv-a 101. -mada pride or conceit of wealth Vb-a 466. -vāsin, as f. vāsinī “living in property, i.e. to be enjoyed or made use of occasionally, one of the 10 kinds of wives: a kept woman Vin iii.139, Vin iii.140 cp. MN i.286.
fr. bhuñj: see bhuñjati
the coil of a snake Ja iii.58. See also nib˚.
fr. bhuj to bend, cp. bhuja3 & Sk. bhoga id. Hālayudha 3, 20
(-˚) (f.) condition of prosperity, having wealth or riches, in uḷāra˚; being very rich MN iii.38.
abstr. fr. bhoga
(adj.) one who has possessions or supplies, wealthy Ja v.399; Mvu 10, Mvu 20; Sdhp 511.
fr. bhoga
(-˚) (adj.) having wealth or power, in antara˚; an intermediate aristocrat Vin iii.47.
fr. bhoga
(-˚) (adj.-n.) enjoying, owning, abounding in, partaking in or devoted to (e.g. to pleasure, kāma˚; ) DN ii.80; DN iii.124; SN i.78; SN iv.331, SN iv.333; AN iii.289 AN v.177 ■ m. owner, wealthy man MN i.366.
fr. bhoga
(adj.) having coils, of a snake Ja iii.57; Ja vi.317.
fr. bhuj, see bhuja3
is diaeretic form of Sk. bhogya = P. bhogga2 with which identical in meaning 2, similar also to bhogika.
(adj.) bent, crooked MN i.88; DN ii.22; AN i.138; Ja iii.395.
fr. bhuj to bend, pp. corresp. to Sk. bhugna
(adj.) 1. to be enjoyed or possessed, n. property, possession in cpd. rāja˚; (of an elephant) to be possessed by a king, serviceable to a king, royal DN i.87; AN i.244, AN i.284 AN ii.113, AN ii.170; Ja ii.370; Dhp-a i.313 (royal possessions in general); DN-a i.245. Cp. BSk. rājabhogya Mvu i.287. See in detail under rāja-bhogga ■ naggabhogga one who possesses nothing but nakedness, i.e. an ascetic Ja iv.160; Ja v.75; Ja vi.225.
2. (identical with bhogika & bhogiya & similar in meaning to bhojarājā) royal, of royal power, entitled to the throne, as a designation of “class” at Vin iii.221 in sequence rājā rāja-bhoggā brāhmaṇā, etc., where it takes the place of the usual khattiya “royal noble.”
grd. of bhuñj to enjoy, thus = Sk. bhogya
one who is getting trained, dependent, a freed slave, villager subject. Only in cpds. like bhojisiyaṃ [bhoja + isi ya = issariya] mastery over dependence, i.e. independence SN i.44, SN i.45; bhojājānīya a well-trained horse, a thoroughbred Ja i.178, Ja i.179; bhojaputta son of a villager Ja v.165; bhojarājā head of a village (-district) a subordinate king Snp 553 = Thag 823 ■ In the latter phrase however it may mean “wealthy” kings, or “titled kings (khattiyā bh-r., who are next in power to and serve on a rājā cakkavatti). The phrase is best taken as one, viz. “the nobles, royal kings.” It may be a term for “vice-kings” or substitute-kings, or those who are successors of the king. The expln at Snp-a 453 takes the three words as three diff. terms and places bhojā bhogiyā as a designation of a class or rank (= bhogga) Neumann in his trsln of Sn has “Königstämme, kühn and stolz,” free but according to the sense. The phrase may in bhoja contain a local designation of the Bhoja princes (Name of a tribe), which was then taken as a special name for “king” (cp. Kaiser → Caesar, or Gr. βασιλεύς) With the wording “khattiyā bhoja-rājāno anuyuttā bhavanti te” cp. MN iii.173: “ paṭirājāno te rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti,” and AN v.22: “ kuḍḍarājāno ” in same phrase ■ Mrs. Rh. D. at Brethren, p. 311, trsls “nobles and wealthy lords.”
lit. grd. of bhuñjati2, to be sorted out, to be raised from slavery; thus also meaning “dependence, “training,” from bhuj, to which belongs bhujissa
is ppr. of bhojeti, feeding Ja vi.207.
1. one who provides food, attendant at meals Ja v.413.
2. (is this from bhuñjati2 & bhujissa?) one who draws the benefit of something, owner, holder, in; gāma˚; landholder, village headman (see Dial. i.108 n. & Fick,; Sociale Gliederung 104 sq.) Ja i.199, Ja i.354, Ja i.483; Ja ii.135 (= gāmapati, gāmajeṭṭhaka); v.413; Dhp-a i.69. Cp. bhojanaka.
fr. bhuj, bhojeti
(nt.) food, meal, nourishment in general Ja ii.218; Ja iv.103, Ja iv.173; Ja i.178; Ja iv.223; Snp 102 Snp 128, Snp 242, Snp 366, Snp 667; Dhp 7, Dhp 70; Pp 21, Pp 55; Mil 370 Vism 69, Vism 106; Sdhp 52, Sdhp 388, Sdhp 407. Some similes with bhojana see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119 ■ tika˚; food allowed for a triad (of reasons) Vin ii.196. dub˚ having little or bad food Ja ii.368; Dhp-a iv.8. paṇīta˚; choice plentiful meals Vin iv.88. sabhojane kule in the family in which a bhikkhu has received food Vin iv.94 ■ bhojane mattaññu(tā) knowing proper measure in eating (& abstr.); eating within bounds, one of the 4 restricttions of moral life SN ii.218; AN i.113 sq.; Nd i.483. 5 bhojanāni or meals are given at Vin iv.75, viz niccabhatta˚, salākabhatta˚, pakkhikaṃ, uposathikaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ ■ As part of the regulations concerning food, hours of eating etc. in the Sangha there is a distinction ascribed to the Buddha between gaṇabhojanaṃ, parampara-bhojanaṃ, atirittabhojanaṃ, anatirittabhojanaṃ mentioned at Kvu ii.552; see Vin iv.71 Vin iv.77. All these ways of taking food are forbidden under ordinary circumstances, but allowed in the case of illness (gilāna-samaye), when robes are given to the Bhikkhus (cīvarasamaye) and several other occasions as enumd at Vin iv.74 ■ The distinction is made as follows: gaṇabhojanaṃ said when 4 bhikkhus are invited to partake together of one of the five foods; or food prepared as a joint meal Vin iv.74; cp. ii.196 v.128, 135; paramparabhojanaṃ said when a bhikkhu invited to partake of one of the 5 foods, first takes one and then another Vin iv.78; atirittabhojanaṃ is food left over from that provided for a sick person, or too great a quantity offered on one occasion to bhikkhus (in this case permitted to be eaten) Vin iv.82; anatirittabhojanaṃ is food that is not left over & is accepted & eaten by a bhikkhu without inquiry Vin iv.84.
-aggadāna gift of the best of food Snp-a 270. -atthika in need of food, hungry Pv ii.929. -pariyantika restricting one’s feeding Vism 69. -vikati at Ja v.292 is to be read as bhājana˚; (q.v.).
fr. bhuñjati
= bhojaka, in ˚gāma owner or headman of the village Ja ii.134. Bhojaniya, Bhojaniya, Bhojaneyya
what may be eaten, eatable food; fit or proper to eat ■ bhojaniya: food Vin iv.92 (five foods: odana rice, kummāsa gruel, sattu meal flour, maccha fish, maṃsa meat). Soft food, as distinguished from khādaniya hard food Ja i.90. See also khādaniya. bhojanīya: eatable SN i.167, cp. pari˚. bhojaneyya: fit to eat DN-a i.28; a˚ unfit to be eaten Snp 81; Ja v.15.
grd. of bhuj, Caus. bhojeti. Cp. bhuñjitabba
(-˚) (adj.) feeding on, enjoying AN iii.43; MN i.343; Snp 47; Ja ii.150; Pp 55.
fr. bhuj
to cause to eat, to feed, entertain, treat, regale Vin i.243; Vin iv.71; Ja vi.577; Dhp-a i.101.
Caus. of bhuñjati
(adj.) to be eaten, eatable; khajja˚; what can be chewed & eaten DN-a i.85. ˚yāgu “eatable rice-gruel,” i.e. soft gruel, prepared in a certain way Vin i.223, Vin i.224.
grd. of bhuñjati
a good horse, a Sindh horse Ja i.180.
f. of bhavant (q.v.) Dhp-a iii.194. Bhottabba & Bhottum
are grd. & inf. of bhuñjati (q.v.); bhottabba to be eaten Ja v.252, Ja v.253; bhottuṃ to eat Ja ii.14.
one making a barking sound, barker, i.e. dog Ja vi.345 (= bhunkaraṇa C.).
M.
intens-redupl. of bhukk = bukk, to bark: see bhukka & cp. Sk. bukkati, bukkana
euphonic consonant inserted between two vowels to avoid hiatus, as agga-m-agga the best of all Vin iv.232 aṅga-m-aṅgāni limb by limb Vin iii.119; Vv 382, etc See also SN iii.254 (yena-m-idh’ ekacco); Dhp 34 (oka-mokata ubbhato); Snp 765 (aññatra-m-ariyehi); Nd i.269 (dvaye-m-eva); Ja i.29 (asīti-hattha-m-ubbedha, for hatth’ ubbedha); iii.387 (katattho-m-anubujjhati); v.72 (orena-m-āgama); vi.266 (pacchā-m-anutappati); Snp-a 309 (rāg’ ādi-m-anekappakāraṃ) ■ On wrong syllable division through Sandhi-m-, and thus origin of specific Pali forms see māsati.
(-kāra) the letter or sound m Ja iii.273 (sandhi-vasena vutta put in for the sake of euphony); v.375 (ma-kāro sandhikaro); Kp-a 155, Kp-a 224; Snp-a 181, Snp-a 383, Snp-a 404.
(nt.) flesh, meat SN ii.97 (putta˚); Dhp 152; Ja iii.184; Pp 55; Vism 258 Vism 357 (in compar.); Dhp-a i.375 (putta˚); ii.51 (alla˚ living flesh); Vb-a 58, Vb-a 61 (pilotika-paliveṭhita). Described and defined in detail as one of the 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body at Vism 252, Vism 354; Kp-a 46 Vb-a 235.
-ūpasecana sauce for meat Ja iii.144 = Ja vi.24; Dhp-a i.344. -kalyāṇa beauty of flesh, one of the 5 beauties of a girl (see kalyāṇa) Ja i.394; Dhp-a i.387. -khādaka flesh-eater Ja vi.530. -cakkhu the bodily eye, one of the 5 kinds of the sense of sight (see cakkhu III) DN iii.219; Nd i.100, Nd i.354. -dhovanī odaka water for washing meat Kp-a 54. -piṇḍika a meat-ball, lump of flesh Vism 256. -puñja a heap of flesh Vism 361 (in comp.) Vb-a 67. -pesi a piece of flesh or meat (see on simile J.P.T.S. 1907, 122) Vin ii.25; Vin iii.105 (˚ṃ vehāsaṃ gacchantiṃ addasaṃ); MN i.143; AN iii.97; Mil 280 Vism 195, Vism 252, Vism 468; Dhp-a i.164; Vb-a 235; -lohita flesh & blood Dhp 150.;
cp. Vedic māṃsa, fr. Idg. *memsro-, as in Gr. μηρός thigh, Lat. membrum limb (“member”); Goth mims flesh; Oir mīr bite, bit (of flesh)
(f.) a certain plant Nardostychus jatamansi Ja vi.535.
cp. Sk. māṃsī
1. a dealer in meat, meat-seller Mil 331.
2. in piṭṭhi˚; the ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd., thus: one who is a backbiter a slanderer Snp 244 (= piṭṭhi-maṃsa-khādaka Snp-a 287). Similarly piṭṭhi-maṃsikatā (q.v.) Nd ii.391.
fr. maṃsa; cp. *Sk. māṃsika
a kind of cloth, material, fibre Dhp-a iii.68 (vākakhaṇḍa).
-pilotikā rough cloth (used for straining) Ja ii.96; Dhp-a ii.155. Cp. makkhi-vāla. -vāka m. bark Vism 249 (+ akkavāka); Vb-a 232.
etym.?
a mythical fish or sea monster, Leviathan (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 97; Ja ii.442; Ja iii.188; Mil 131, Mil 377; Thag-a 204 ■ f. makarinī Mil 67.
-dantaka the tooth of a sword fish, used as a pin Vin ii.113, cp. p. 315 ■ as a design in painting or carving Vin ii.117. 121, 152; iv.47. In these
latter passages it occurs combd with latākamma & pañcapaṭṭhika (q.v.). The meaning is not quite clear.;
cp. Epic Sk. makara
the nectar of a flower Ja vi.530.
cp. Class. Sk. makaranda
mosquito Vin ii.119; SN i.52 (a˚ free from m.); AN ii.117; Snp 20; Ja i.246; Sdhp 50. See also cpd. ḍaṃsa˚.
-kuṭikā mosquito net or curtain Vin ii.119, Vin ii.130 -vījanī mosquito fan Vin ii.130.
fr. Vedic maśaka viâ *masaka → makasa: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 472
(f.) a crest Abhp 283 (kirīṭa + , i.e. adornment).
cp. BSk. makuṭa Divy 411
1. a bud (Hardy in Index to Vv-a gives “Mimusops elengi” after BR) Thig 260; Vv 4526; Ja i.273; Ja ii.33; Ja iv.333; Ja v.207 (makuḷa), 416 Vism 230 (ḷ); 256 (paduma˚); Vv-a 177 (kaṇavīra˚) 194 (makuḷa), 197 (id.); Vb-a 228, Vb-a 239 (where Vism 256 has makulita, & Kp-a 53 mukulita).
2. a knob Ja i.31; Ja ii.90; Vism 253 (kandala˚).
3. v.l. at Nd ii.485 B for pakulla (= pakuṭa).
cp. Sk. makula
1. a monkey Ja i.385; Ja ii.267; Dhp-a ii.22; Vb-a 408 (˚niddā, a m.’s sleep, said to be quickly changing); Kp-a 73 (in simile); Snp-a 522 (cp. Snp 791). Names of monkeys famous in Jātaka tales: Sālaka Ja ii.268; Kālabāhu Ja iii.98 sq.; on the monkey as a figure in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119, to which add Vb-a 228 & 259 (tālavana˚), cp. Vism 245–2. a spider: see ˚sutta.;
-chāpaka the young of a monkey MN i.385; Ja i.218 -sutta spider’s thread Ja v.47; Vism 136 (in simile) Dhp-a i.304.
cp. Epic Sk. markaṭa
a spider (see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 119) Dhp 347 (cp. Dhp-a iv.58); Ja ii.147 (= uṇṇanābhi); iv.484 (aptly called Uṇṇanābhi); v.47, 469; Mil 364, Mil 407 (pantha˚ road spider, at both passages). -˚sutta spider’s thread Vism 285.
cp. Sk. markaṭaka; der. fr. markaṭa = makkaṭa
(nt.) monkey grimace Ja ii.448 (mukha˚). The same as mukha-makkaṭika at Ja ii.70.
fr. makkhaṭa + ya
(f.) a female monkey Vin iii.33, Vin iii.34; Ja i.385; Dhp-a i.119.
of makkaṭa
hypocrisy; usually combd with paḷāsa (see also palāsa MN i.15; AN i.95, AN i.100, AN i.299; AN iv.148, AN iv.456; AN v.39, AN v.156, AN v.209 AN v.310, AN v.361; Iti 3; Snp 56, Snp 437, Snp 631, Snp 1132 (cp. Nd ii.484 makkhāyanā makkhāyitattaṃ niṭṭhuriya-kammaṃ, i.e. hardness, mercilessness); Dhp 150, Dhp 407; Ja v.141; Vb 357, Vb 380, Vb 389; Pp 18, Pp 22; Mil 289, Mil 380; Dhp-a iii.118 Dhp-a vi.181.
-vinaya restraining fr. hypocrisy SN ii.282; AN v.165 sq.
fr. mṛkṣ, lit. smearing over. Cp. BSk. mrakṣa Śikṣ 198. 8, in cpd. māna-mada-mrakṣa-paridāha etc.
anger rage Vin i.25.
probably = makkha1, but BSk. differentiates with mrakṣya Divy 622, trsl. Index “ill-feeling” Böhtlingk-Roth have: mrakṣya “wohlgefühl”
(nt.) smearing, oil Ja iii.120; Mil 11 (tela˚); Dhtp 538.
fr. mṛkṣ, cp. *Sk. mrakṣaṇa
(f.) & Makkhāyitatta (nt.) the fact of concealment, hypocrisy: in exegesis of makkha at Nd ii.484; Pp 18, Pp 22.
abstr. fr. makkha
(f.) a fly MN iii.148; Nd i.484; Ja ii.275 (nīla˚); iii.263 (pingala gadfly), 402; Snp-a 33 (pingala˚), 572 (id.); Dhp-a iv.58 Sdhp 396, Sdhp 529.
cp. Vedic makṣika & makṣikā
smeared with (-˚), soiled; anointed MN i.364 (lohita˚); Ja i.158 (madhu˚); iii.226 (piṭṭhi-maddena); v.71 (ruhira˚); vi.391.
pp. of makkheti
(adj.) concealing, hypocritical; harsh, merciless; often combd with palāsin (e.g. at Vin ii.89; Ja iii.259) DN iii.45, DN iii.246. a˚ (+ apalāsin) DN iii.47; AN iii.111; Snp 116; Pp 22. Makkhi-vala
fr. makkha
a cloth of hair for straining Ja ii.97.
cp. makaci-pilotikā
to smear, paste, soil, anoint Ja iii.225, Ja iii.314; Pp 36; Mil 268; Vism 344; Dhp-a ii.65 ■ Pass makkhīyati Mil 74. Caus. II. makkhāpeti to cause to be anointed Ja i.486; Dhp-a i.400 ■ pp. makkhita.
Caus. of mṛkṣ; Dhtp 538: makkhaṇa
1. animal for hunting, deer, antelope MN i.173 (in simile); SN i.199 (id.); AN i.70; AN ii.23; Thag 958 Thag 989; Snp 275, Snp 763, Snp 880; Ja v.267.
2. a stupid person Ja vi.206, Ja vi.371.
another form of miga = Sk. mṛga, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 124
1. a road (usually high road), way, foot-path Vism 708 (maggaṃ agata-pubba-purisa, simile of); Vb-a 256 (tiyojana˚, simile of a man travelling); Dhp-a i.229- addhāna˚; high road Vin iv.62; MN iii.158; see under addhāna; antāra- magge on the road Mil 16; ujuka˚ a straight way SN i.33; Dhp-a i.18; ummagga (a) a conduit; (b) a devious way: see ummagga, to which add refs. Ja v.260; Thig 94; kummagga a wrong path: see kum˚, to which add SN iv.195; Thag 1174. passāva & vacca˚; defecation & urination Vin iii.127 visama˚; a bad road SN i.48.
2. the road of moral good living, the path of righteousness, with ref. to the moral standard (cp. the 10 commandments) & the way to salvation. The exegetic (edifying) etym. of magga in this meaning is “nibbān’ atthikehi maggīyati (traced by those who are looking for N.), nibbānaṃ vā maggeti kilese vā mārento gacchatī ti maggo” (VbhA 114). Usually designated (a) the “ ariya aṭṭhaṅgika magga or the “Noble Eightfold Path” (see aṭṭhangika ). It is mentioned at many places, & forms the corner-stone of the Buddha’s teaching as to the means of escaping “dukkha” or the ills of life. It consists of 8 constituents viz. sammā-diṭṭhi, sammā-sankappa, ˚vācā ˚kammanta, ˚ājīva, ˚vāyāma, ˚sati, ˚samādhi, or right views, right aspirations, right speech, right conduct right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right rapture. The 7 first constituents are at DN ii.216; MN iii.71 enumd as requisites for sammā-samādhi. The name of this table of ethical injunctions is given as “maggam uttamaṃ” at Snp 1130, i.e. the Highest Path. See for ref. e.g. Vin iii.93; Vin iv.26; DN ii.353 DN iii.102, DN iii.128, DN iii.284, DN iii.286; Iti 18; Nd i.292; Nd ii.485; Vb 104 sq. 235 sq., Vb-a 114 sq. (its constituents in detail) 121, 216; Vism 509 sq. (where the 8 constituents are discussed) ■ (b) as ariya magga: MN iii.72; Pp 17; DN-a i.176 sq., 225 sq., 233; Vb-a 373 sq.; Thag-a 205. (c) as pañcaṅgika or the Path of 5 constituents (the above first 2 and last 3): Dhs 89; Vb 110 sq., 237 sq-(d) other expressions of same import: dhamma˚ Mil 21; magga alone; SN i.191 (Bhagavā maggassa uppādetā etc.) = MN iii.9 = SN iii.66; Snp 429, Snp 441, Snp 724 sq. 1130; Dhp 57, Dhp 273 sq., Iti 106; Vb-a 53, Vb-a 73. As the first condition & initial stage to the attainment of Arahantship (Nibbāna) it is often found in sequence of either; magga-phala-nirodha (e.g. Vism 217, cp. Nd ii.under dukkha II. p. 168), or magga, phala, nibbāna (e.g. Tikp. 155 sq., 158; Vb-a 43, Vb-a 316, Vb-a 488) ■ magga as entrance to Arahantship is the final stage in the recognition (ñāṇa, pariññā, paññā) of the truth of the causal chain, which realises the origin of “ill,” the possibility of its removal & the “way” to the removal These stages are described as dukkhe ñāṇaṃ, samudaye ñāṇaṃ nirodhe ñāṇaṃ and magge ñāṇaṃ at DN iii.227; Pts i.118. At the latter passage the foll. chapter (i.49 gives dukkha-nirodha gāminī paṭipadā as identical with magga ■ Note. On the term see Cpd. 41 sq., 66 sq., 175 186; Dhs trsl.2 58, 299 sq., 362 sq.; Expos. 216, 354n. On passages with aṭṭhaṅgika magga & others where magga is used in similes see Mrs. Rh. D. in; J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 119 120.
3. Stage of righteousness, with ref. to the var conditions of Arahantship divided into 4 stages, viz sotāpatti- magga, sakadāgāmi˚, anāgāmi˚, arahatta˚; or the stage of entering the stream (of salvation), that of returning once, that of the never-returner, that of Arahantship ■ At Dhp-a i.110 magga-phala “the fruit of the Path” (i.e. the attainment of the foundation or first step of Arahantship) is identical with sotāpattiphala on p. 113 (a) in general: arahatta˚; SN i.78; AN iii.391; DN-a i.224 ■ (b) in particular as the 4 paths Nd ii.612 A; Vb 322 sq., 328, 335; Vism 453, Vism 672 Vism 678; Dhp-a iv.30; Vb-a 301.
4. In the Tikapaṭṭhāna (under magga-paccaya-niddesa p. 52) 12 constituents of magga are enumd; viz. paññā, vitakka, sammāvācā s-kammanta, s-ājīva, viriya, sati, samādhi micchā-diṭṭhi, micchā-vācā, m-kammanta, m-ājīva.
-aṅgāni the constituents of the Ariyan Path Vb-a 120. -āmagga which is the (right) road and which is not MN i.147; Vism ch. xx (˚ssa kovida) = Snp 627; SN iii.108 (id.); Dhp-a iv.169 (id.); AN v.47 (˚ssa ñāṇadassana); Dhp 403. -udaka water found on the road Vism 338 (simile). -kilanta wearied by the road Ja i.129. -kusala one who is clever as regards the road one who knows the road well SN iii.108; Nd i.171 Vb-a 332 (in simile); Kp-a 70, Kp-a 126. -kovida = ˚kusala Nd i.446. -kkhāyin (should be ˚akkhāyin) one who tells the (right) way MN iii.5; Nd i.33. -jina Conqueror of the paths Snp 84 sq. -jīvin who lives in the right path Snp 88. -jjhāyin reflecting over the Path Snp 85 -ñāṇa knowledge of the Path Vb-a 416. -ññū knows the Path Nd i.446. -ṭṭhāna one who stands in the Path, attains the P. see Cpd. 23, 50. -ttaya the triad of the paths (i.e. the first 3 of the 4 Paths as given above under 3) Dhp-a iv.109. -dūsin highway robber Snp 84. -desaka one who points out the way, a guide Snp 84; Ja iv.257; as ˚desika at Dhp-a ii.246. -desin = ˚desaka Snp 87. -dhamma the rule of the Path, i.e. righteous living Snp 763. -dhīra wise as regards the Path Nd i.45 -paṭipanna
1. one on the road, i.e. wandering, tramping Dhp-a i.233.
2. one who has entered the Path Pv iv.349. -parissaya danger of the road Vv-a 200. -bhāvanā cultivation of the Path (i.e. righteousness) Nd i.323. -mūḷha one who has lost the way Vv-a 332 -vaṇṇa praise of the Path Dhp-a i.115. -vidū one who knows the Path Nd i.446. -sacca the truth concerning the Path Vb-a 114, Vb-a 124. -sira Name of a month DN-a i.241.
cp. Epic Sk. mārga, fr. mṛg to track, trace
(nt.) & magganā (f.) tracking, search for, covetousness Vism 29 (syn. for nijigiṃsanatā gaveṭṭhi); Dhtp 298 (& gavesana).;
fr. magg
wayfarer, tramp Dhp-a i.233.
fr. magga
& (spurious); mageti to track, hunt for, trace out follow, seek MN i.334 (ppr. magayamana); SN ii.270 (pp maggayamāna); Thig 384 (cp. Thag-a 255 = pattheti) Ja v.102 (where T. reads maggheyya, which is expld by C. as vijjheyya to pierce, hurt, & which is doubtful in meaning, although Kern,; Toev. s. v. defends it. The v.l. reads magg˚. Same on p. 265 where one ought to read phasseyya in C. instead of passeyya. The form pp. magga (?) on p. 102 must belong to the same root) Dhs-a 162 (= gavesati) ■ Caus. II. maggāpeti Pv-a 112 ■ Pass. maggīyati Vb-a 114.
Denom. fr. magga, cp. Sk. margayati. The Dhtp. gives both mag & magg; in meaning “anvesana,” i.e. tracking, following up; see Dhtp Nos. 21, 540, 541
see maggeti.
Name of Indra, or another angel (devaputta) SN i.221 (voc. maghavā; so read for mathavā), 229; Dhp 30. Cp. māgha.
cp. Epic Sk. maghavā, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. Maia
(f.) Name of a nakkhatta, in cpd. ˚deva Snp-a 352 (cp. MN ii.74, n. 6, where spelling Makkādeva; we also find Makhadeva at Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa xiv. i..1).
cp. *Sk. maghā
is given as root maṅk (aor. maki) at Dhtm 13, in meaning maṇḍana, i.e. adornment. It is meant to be an expln of mankato?
(adv.) on my account, for me Mil 384.
for Sk. mat-kṛte, Cp. E. Müller, P.Gr. 12
(adj.) staggering, confused troubled, discontented Vin ii.118; SN v.74; Dhp 249 Nd i.150; Dhp-a iii.41, Dhp-a iii.359 (with loc.) ■ f. pl. maṅkū Vin i.93 ■ dummaṅku “staggering in a disagreeable manner,” evil-minded AN i.98; AN iv.97 (read line as “dummanku’ yaṃ padusseti dhūm’ aggamhi va pāvako” he, staggering badly, is spoilt like the fire on the crest of smoke); v.70; Vin ii.196; Vin iii.21; Vin iv.213; SN ii.218; Ne 50.
-bhāva discontent, moral weakness Ja iv.49; Mil 227; Dhp-a iii.359. -bhūta discontented, troubled confused Vin ii.19; DN ii.85; AN i.186; Dhp 263; Ja v.211 Ja vi.362; Dhp-a ii.76; a˚; self-possessed AN iii.40; Mil 21 Mil 339.
cp. Vedic manku; see on meaning Hardy in preface to Anguttara v. p. vi
(& ˚ṇa ) an insect, bug or flea Ja i.10; Ja iii.423; Vism 109 (where kīla-mankula ought to be read as kīṭamankuna); Dhp-a ii.12.
cp. late Sk. matkuṇa, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 63
(adj.) auspicious prosperous, lucky, festive Nd i.87, Nd i.88; Kp-a 118 sq. Snp-a 273, Snp-a 595; Sdhp 551 ■ nt. maṅgalaṃ good omen auspices, festivity Snp 258; Vin ii.129; Pv-a 17. A curious popular etymology is put forth by Bdhgh at Kp-a 123, viz. “maṃ galanti imehi sattā ti” mangalāni- maṅgalaṃ karoti lit. to make an auspicious ceremony i.e. to besprinkle with grains etc. for luck (see on this Pv-a 198), to get married Dhp-a i.182; maṅgalaṃ vadati to bless one Ja iv.299; Dhp-a i.115. Three (auspicious wedding-ceremonies at Dhp-a i.115 viz. abhiseka˚ consecration geha-ppavesana˚ entering the house, vivāha wedding ■ Certain other general signs of good luck or omina κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν are given at Ja iv.72, Ja iv.73 and Kp-a 118 sq. (see also mangalika) ■ Several ceremonious festivities are mentioned at Dhp-a ii.87 with regard to the bringing up of a child, viz. nāma-karaṇa-mangala the ceremony of giving a name; āhāra-paribhoga˚ of taking solid food; kaṇṇa-vijjhana˚ of piercing the ears dussa-gahaṇa˚ of taking up the robe: cūḷā-karaṇa˚ of making the top-knot ■ Cp. abhi˚.
-usabha an auspicious bull Snp-a 323. -chaṇa a merry time, fair Ja ii.48; Dhp-a i.392. -kicca auspicious function festivity Snp-a 175, Snp-a 323. -kiriyā festivity, wedding Snp-a 69; finding good omens Ja iv.72. -kolāhala the lucky, or most auspicious, foreboding, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q.v.) Kp-a 121. -pañha see mangalika -divasa a lucky day Ja iv.210; Dhp-a iii.467. -vappa ploughing festival Snp-a 137. Cp. vappa-mangala -sindhava state horse Ja i.59. -silāpaṭṭa auspicious slab (of stone) Ja i.59; Ja vi.37; Pv-a 74. -supina lucky dream Ja vi.330. -hatthi state elephant Mvu 35, Mvu 21; Dhp-a i.389.
cp. Vedic mangala. Expld by Dhtp 24 with root maṅg, i.e. lucky; see also mañju
(adj.) (-˚) 1. one who is feasting in, one whose auspices are such & such; fond of; only in kotūhala˚; fond of excitement Ja i.372; Mil 94 (apagata˚, without passion for excitement).
2. superstitious looking out for lucky signs Vin ii.129 (gihī) 140 (id.). At Ja iv.72, Ja iv.73; three sets of people are exemplified, who believe in omina as either diṭṭhaṃ (seen) or sutaṃ (heard) or mutaṃ (sensed); they are called diṭṭha-maṅgalikā, suta˚ & muta˚; respectively The same group is more explicitly dealt with in the Mangala-sutta Kp-a 118 sq. (cp. Nd i.89); diṭṭhamaṅgalika pañha “a question concerning visible omina” Ja iv.73 (correct meaning given under diṭṭha1 vol. ii.1561!), 390 (?). The Np. diṭṭha-mangalikā at Ja iv.376 sq.
fr. mangala
(nt.) auspiciousness, good luck, fortune Dhtp 24.
fr. mangala
(adj.) golden; in cpd. ˚cchavi of golden colour, f cchavī DN i.193, DN i.242; MN i.246, MN i.429; MN ii.33; Vism 184.
etym.? or = mangula? See J.R.A.S. 1903, 186 the corresponding passage to MN i.246 in Lal. v. 320 has madgura.
(adj.) sallow; f. maṅgulī woman of sallow complexion SN ii.260 = Vin iii.107; Vin iii.100.
cp. mangura
(adj.-n.) [orig. grd. of marati, mṛ; corresponding to Sk. martya. A diaeretic form exists in P. mātiya (q.v.) mortal; (m.) man, a mortal SN i.55; Snp 249, Snp 577, Snp 580 Snp 766; Ja iii.154; Ja iv.248; Ja v.393; Dhp 53, Dhp 141, Dhp 182; Vv 6312 Kv 351 ■ See also refs. under jāta.
the God of Death, the Buddhist Māra, or sometimes equivalent to Yama SN i.156; Snp 357 (gen. maccuno), 581 (instr maccunā), 587; Thag 411; Dhp 21, Dhp 47, Dhp 128, Dhp 135, Dhp 150 Dhp 287; Vb-a 100; Snp-a 397; Dhp-a iii.49; Sdhp 295, 304.
-tara one who crosses or overcomes death Snp 1119 (= maraṇaṃ tareyya Nd ii.486). -dheyya the realm of Māra, the sphere of Death SN i.4; adj. belonging to death or subject to death (= Māradheyya, maraṇadheyya Nd ii.487b) ■ Snp 358, Snp 1104 (with expln “m vuccanti kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd ii.487a), 1146 (˚pāra-maccudheyyassa pāraṃ vuccati amataṃ nibbānaṃ Nd ii.487); Thig 10 (= maccu ettha dhīyati Thag-a 13); Dhp 86; Dhp-a ii.161. -parāyaṇa surmounting death Snp 578; pareta id. Snp 579. -pāsa the sling or snare of Māra Snp 166; Ja v.367. -bhaya the fear of death Mvu 32, Mvu 68. -maraṇa dying in death MN i.49 (cp. C on p. 532: maccu-maraṇan ti maccu-sankhātaṃ maraṇaṃ tena samuccheda-maraṇ’ ādīni nisedheti ■ See also def. of maraṇa s.v.). -mukha the mouth of death Snp 776; Nd i.48. -rājā the king of death Snp 332, Snp 1118 (= Maro pi Maccurājā maraṇaṃ pi Nd ii.488); Dhp 46 Dhp 170; Kp-a 83. -vasa the power of death 3 i.52: Snp 587, Snp 1100 (where maccu is expld by maraṇa & Māra;) -hāyin leaving death behind, victorious over death Iti 46 = Snp 755; Thag 129.
in form = Vedic mṛtyu, fr. mṛ; in meaning differentiated, the Ved ■ Sk. meaning “death” only
fish AN iii.301; Snp 605, Snp 777, Snp 936; Ja i.210, Ja i.211; Ja v.266 (in simile); vi.113 (phandanti macchā, on dry land); Pp 55; Sdhp 610 ■ maccha is given at Nd ii.91 as syName of ambucārin ■ pūti˚; rotten fish MN iii.168; & in simile at Iti 68 = Ja iv.435 = Ja vi.236 = Kp-a 127. Cp. J.P.T.S. 1906, 201. bahu˚; rich in fish Ja iii.430. loṇa˚; salt fish Vism 28. rohita˚; the species Cyprinus rohita Ja ii.433; Ja iii.333; Dhp-a ii.132 On maccha in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. Of names of fishes several are given in the Jātaka tales; viz. Ānanda (as the king of the fishes or a Leviathan) Ja i.207; Ja ii.352; Ja v.462; Timanda & Timirapiṅgala; Ja v.462 Mitacintin Ja i.427; Bahucintin Ja i.427.
-maṃsa the flesh of fishes Snp 249. -bandha one who sets net to catch fish, a fisherman AN iii.301; Vism 379 -bhatta food for fishes, devoured by fishes Ja v.75 -vālaka a garment made in a particular fashion (forbidden to bhikkhus) Vin ii.137. -sakalika “a bit of fish” (fish-bone?) in description of constitution of the finger nails at Vism 250 = Kp-a 43 = Vb-a 233.
cp. Vedic matsya
(adj.) niggardly envious, selfish Pgdp ii.49 ■ maccharaṃ (nt.) avarice envy AN iv.285; Snp 811, Snp 862, Snp 954 (vīta-macchara, adj.).
Vedic matsara & matsarin enjoyable; later period also “envious,” cp. maccharin
to be selfish, greedy or envious Ja vi.334; Dhp-a ii.45, Dhp-a ii.89.
Demon. fr. macchariya
(f.) & Maccharāyitatta (nt.) the condition of selfishness, both expressions in defn of macchariya at Dhs 1122; Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhs-a 375.
(adj.) selfish, envious, greedy (cp. Dhs trsl.2 p. 320); AN ii.82; AN iii.139, AN iii.258, AN iii.265; DN iii.45, DN iii.246; Dhp 263; Snp 136, Snp 663; Nd i.36; Ja i.345; Ja v.391; Vv 5226 Pp 20; Dhs-a 394; Dhp-a ii.89; Sdhp 89, Sdhp 97 ■ a unselfish DN iii.47; AN iv.2; Snp 852, Snp 860; Iti 102.
cp. Vedic matsarin, fr. mat + sṛ; i.e. “reflecting to me”
(nt.) avarice, stinginess, selfishness, envy; one of the principal evil passions & the maịn cause of rebirth in the Petaloka
1.; macchariya: AN i.95, AN i.299; AN iii.272; Dhp iii.44 (issā˚), 289; Snp 863 (˚yutta), 928; Pp 19, Pp 23; Vb 357, Vb 389, Vb 391 ■ Five sorts of selfishness are mentioned āvāsa˚, kula˚, lābha˚, vaṇṇa˚, dhamma˚; DN iii.234 Nd i.118, Nd i.227; AN iv.456; Dhs 1122 (cp. Dhs tsrl.2 p. 276) Vism 683; Dhs-a 373, Dhs-a 374. Selfishness is one of the evil conditions which have to be renounced as habits of mind by force of intelligence AN v.40, AN v.209; Mil 289; Pv-a 87, Pv-a 124.
2. macchera AN i.105 (˚mala), 281; Dhp 242; Iti 18; Nd i.260; Sdhp 313, Sdhp 510. At AN ii.58 and elsewhere the state called vigata-mala-macchera “with the stain of avarice vanished,” is freq. mentioned as a feature of the blameless life and a preparation for Arahantship ■ Note. The (etym.) expln of macchariya at Vb-a 513 is rather interesting: “idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhaṃ eva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṃ hotū ti pavattattā macchariyan ti vuccati” (from the Purāṇas ).
cp. Epic Sk. mātsarya
a fish-catcher, fisherman AN iii.301; Ja v.270; Ja vi.111; Mil 331.
fr. maccha
(f.) a female fish Ja ii.178.
of maccha
see macchariya.
(nt.) 1. intoxicant, intoxicating drink, wine, spirits Vin i.205; DN iii.62, DN iii.63; Snp 398 (+ pāna = majjapāna); Vv-a 73 (= surā ca merayañ ca); Sdhp 267.
2. drinking place Ja iv.223 (= pān’ āgāra).
-pa one who drinks strong drink, a drunkard AN iv.261; Snp 400; Pv iv.176 (a˚); Thag-a 38. -pāna drinking of intoxicating liquors Vv 158; Vv-a 73; Sdhp 87. -pāyaka = majjapa Ja ii.192 (a˚). -pāyin = ˚pāyaka Sdhp 88 -vikkaya sale of spirits Ja iv.115.
fr. mad, cp. Vedic mada & madya
is represented in Pali by mujjati, as found esp. in cpds ummujjati & nimujjati.;
majj to immerse, submerge, cp. Lat. mergo
to wipe, polish, clean Vv-a 165. Cp. sam˚ ■ pp. majjita & maṭṭha;.
mṛj to clean, polish; connected with either Lat. mergo (cp. Gr. ἀμέργω) or Lat. mulgeo to wipe, stroke milk (cp. Gr. ἀμέλγω, Mir. mlich = milk etc.) Dhtp 71 gives root majj with meaning “saṃsuddhiyaṃ”
to be intoxicated; to be exultant, to be immensely enjoyed or elated SN i.73, SN i.203; AN iv.294; Snp 366 (Pot. majje = majjeyya Snp-a 364), 676 (id., T reads na ca majje, Snp-a 482 reads na pamajje); Ja ii.97 Ja iii.87 (majjeyya). aor. majji in cpd. pamajji Mvu 17, Mvu 15 ■ pp. matta.
mad, Sk. mādyati; Vedic madati; see mada for etym.
a cat Mil 23 ■ f. majjārī (majjāri˚) Vin i.186 (˚camma cat’s skin) Dhp-a i.48; Pgdp 49.
cp. Epic Sk. mārjāra; dialectical
a dealer in strong drink. a tavernkeeper Mil 331.
fr. majja
cleaned, polished Vv-a 340 (suṭṭhu m. for sumaṭṭha Vv 8417). See also maṭṭha.
pp. of majjati2
(adj.) middle, viz 1. of space: of moderate height DN i.243 (contrasted with ucca & nīca).
2. of; time: of middle age Snp 216 (contrasted with dahara young & thera old).
3. often used adv. in loc.; majjhe in the middle; i.e. (a) as prep in between, among (-˚ or with gen.) Pv i.111, 114 Ja i.207 (sakuṇānaṃ); Dhp-a i.182 (vasana-gāmassa) Pv-a 11 (parisā˚). majjhe chetvā cutting in half Ja v.387 ■ (b) in special dogmatic sense “in the present state of existence,” contrasted with past future existences (the latter comb;d as “ubho antā” at Snp 1040). The expln of majjhe in this sense is at Nd i.434: “majjhaṃ vuccati paccuppannā rūpā” etc (similarly at Nd ii.490) ■ Snp 949 (in sequence pubbe majjhe pacchā), 1099 (id.); Dhp 348 (pure majjhe pacchato; i.e. paccuppannesu khandhesu Dhp-a iv.63)
4. (nt.) majjhaṃ the middle Dhp-a i.184 (tassa uramajjhaṃ ghaṃsentī).
Vedic madhya, cp. Lat. medius, Gr. μέσσος, Goth. midjis = Ohg. mitti, E. middle
(adj.) (-˚) lying or being in the midst of…, in pācīna-yava˚ (dakkhiṇa˚, pacchima˚ uttara˚) nigama, a market-place lying in the midst of the eastern corn-fields (the southern etc.): designation of 4 nigamas situated near Mithilā Ja vi.330.
fr. majjha
(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) “standing in the middle,” umpire neutral, impartial, indifferent Ja i.300; Ja ii.359 (parama˚ + upekkhā-pārāmī); vi.8; Mil 403; Vism 230; Mvu 21, Mvu 14.
2. indifference, balance of mind, equanimity almost synonymous with upekkhā: Vism 134, Vism 296 Vb-a 283 (˚payogatā); Dhp-a ii.214 (˚upekkhā); Pv-a 38 (so read for majjhattha). See also following. Note. A similar term is found in BSk. as mṛdu-madhyā kṣānti “state of spiritual calm” Divy 271; see Yoga Sūtra ii.34.
for majjha-ṭṭha, which we find in Prk. as majjhattha: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 214; majjha sthā
(f.) impartiality, indifference, balance of mind Nd ii.166 (in expln of upekkhā with syn. passaddhatā); Vb 230; Vism 134; Vb-a 285 (satta˚ & sankhāra˚), 317 (def.); Dhs-a 133.
abstr. from prec.
midday, noon; used either absolutely Vin iv.273; SN iv.240; Ja v.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha-majjhantikā); v.291 (read majjhantik âtikamm’ āgami); Vism 236; Mil 3; or as apposition with kāla & samaya; SN i.7 (kāla); Pv iv.32 (id.); Nd ii.977 (samaya); DN-a i.251 (id.).
majjha + anta + ika
a certain kind of plant Vin i.196 (v.l. majjāru); doubtful whether designation (like Sk. mārjāra) of Plumbago rosea.
etym. doubtful
(adj.) 1. middle medium, mediocre, secondary, moderate ■ Applied almost exclusively in contrast pairs with terms of more or less, in triplets like “small-medium-big,” or “first-middle-last” (cp. majjha 3b); viz. (a) of degree: hīna- m -paṇīta DN iii.215 (tisso dhātuyo); Dhs 1205, Dhs 1027 (dhammā); Vism 11 (sīlaṃ); h. m. ukkaṭṭha Vism 308; omaka m. ukkaṭṭha Vin iv.243; khuddaka m mahā Vism 100; lāmaka m. paṇīta (i.e. lokuttara Dhs-a 45 (dhammā); paritta -m- uḷāra Sdhp 260. (b) of time: paṭhame yāme majjhima˚ pacchima˚; Ja i.75; id. with vaye Pv-a 5.
2. (nt.) majjhimaṃ the waist, in cpd. su-majjhimā (f.) a woman with beautiful waist Ja v.4.
Vedic madhyama, with sound change ˚ama → ˚ima after Geiger, P.Gr. 191, or after analogy with pacchima, with which often contrasted
a couch, bed Vin iv.39, Vin iv.40 (where 4 kinds are mentioned which also apply to the defn of pīṭha, viz. masāraka bundikābaddha, kuḷīra-pādaka, āhacca-pādaka; same defn at Vb-a 365); Snp 401; Ja iii.423; Dhp-a i.89 (˚ṃ bandhati to tie a bed or two together), 130; iv.16 Vb-a 20; Vv-a 291; Pv-a 93 ■ heṭṭhā mañce underneath the bed Ja i.197 (as place where domestic pigs lie) ii.419 (id.); ii.275 (where a love-sick youth lies down in the park).
-atimañca bed upon bed, i.e. beds placed on top of each other serving as grand stands at a fair or festival Ja iii.456; Ja vi.277; Dhp-a iv.59. -parāyaṇa ending in bed, kept in bed Pv ii.25 (nīla˚, fig. for being buried) Dhp-a i.183 (with v.l. maccu˚, just as likely, but see maccuparāyaṇa). -pīṭha couch and chair Vin ii.270 sq.; AN iii.51; Vv-a 9, Vv-a 220, Vv-a 295. -vāna stuffing of a couch Dhp-a i.234.
cp. Epic Sk. mañca stand, scaffolding, platform
bed, couch, bedstead Vin i.271; SN i.121 = SN iii.123; Ja i.91; Ja iii.423; Thig 115; Mil 10; Dhp-a ii.53.
fr. mañca
(f.) a branching flower-stalk, a sprout Ja v.400, Ja v.416.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. mañjarī
(f.) = mañjari, Vin iii.180.
(adj.) with (full-grown) pedicles, i.e. in open flower Mil 308 (˚patta in full bloom).
fr. mañjari
an anklet, foot-bangle Abhp 228.
cp. late Sk. mañjīra nt.
(adj.) pleasant, charming sweet, lovely (only with ref. to the voice) DN ii.211, DN ii.227 (one of the 8 characteristics of Brahmā’s & the Buddha’s voice: see bindu & aṭṭhanga); Ja ii.150 ■ (nt. a sweet note Ja vi.591 (of the deer in the forest); Vv-a 219 (karavīka ruta˚).
-bhāṇaka sweet-voiced, speaking sweetly Ja ii.150; Dhp-a i.144; f. bhāṇikā Ja vi.418, Ja vi.420. -bhāṇin id Ja ii.150.
cp. Class Sk. mañju, also mangala, cp. Gr. μάγγανον means of deceiving, Lat. mango a dealer making up his wares for sale. See further cognates at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mango
(adj.) sweet voiced Vin i.249; Ja ii.350; Ja iii.266; Ja vi.412, Ja vi.496.
mañju + ka
(-rukkha) Name of a celestial tree, famed for its fragrancy Vv 386; Snp-a 52, Snp-a 66, Snp-a 95, Snp-a 98; Vv-a 175.
fr. mañjūsa
(f.) a casket; used for keeping important documents in Ja ii.36 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ mañjūsāya nikkhipāpesi); iv.335 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ sāra-mañjūsāyaṃ ṭhapetvā kālam akāsi).
cp. Epic Sk. mañjūṣā
(adj.) light (bright) red, crimson, usually enumd in set of 5 principal colours with nīla, pīta, lohitaka, odāta; e.g. at Vin i.25; SN ii.101 (f. mañjeṭṭhā); Vv 221 (Hardy in T. reads mañjaṭṭha, as twice at Vv-a 111, with vv.ll. ˚jiṭṭha ˚jeṭṭha, cp. Corrections & Add;ns on p. 372); Mil 61.
cp. *Sk. mañjiṣṭhā Indian madder
(adj.) crimson, bright red, fig. shining Vv 391 (cp. defn at Vv-a 177: like the tree Vitex negundo, sindhavāra, or the colour of the Kaṇavīra-bud; same defn at Dhs-a 317, with Sinduvāra for Sindha˚); usually in sequence nīla, pīta, mañjeṭṭhaka, lohitaka, odāta as the 5 fundamental colours: MN i.509 (has ˚eṭṭhika in T. but v.l. ˚eṭṭhaka); Ja vi.185; Dhs 617 ■ f. mañjeṭṭhikā a disease of sugar cane Vin ii.256.
fr. mañjeṭṭha, after lohita + ka
(f.) Bengal madder DN-a i.85.
= Sk. mañjiṣṭhā
1. to think, to be of opinion, to imagine, to deem Snp 199 (sīsaṃ… subhato naṃ maññati bālo) 588 (yena yena hi maññanti, tato taṃ hoti aññathā) Ja ii.258 (maññāmi ciraṃ carissati: I imagine he will have to wander a long time) ■ With (double) acc.: to take for, to consider as; na taṃ maññāmi mānusiṃ I deem you are not human Pv ii.41; yassa dāni kālaṃ maññati for this now may he think it time (in a phrase of departure), let him do what he thinks fit, we wait the Buddha’s pleasure, i.e. let it be time to go [so also BSk. manyate kālaṃ, e.g. Divy 50, Divy 64 etc.] DN i.189. Esp. in phrase taṃ kiṃ maññasi (maññatha 2. pl.) what do you think of this? (the foll.), what is your opinion about this? DN i.60; SN iii.104 & passim ■ Pot. 1;st sg maññeyyaṃ I should think Pv-a 40; Pv-a 3rd sg. maññeyya SN iii.103, and maññe Snp 206. The short form 1st sg maññe is used like an adv. as affirmative particle is inserted without influencing the grammatical or syntactical construction of the sentence; meaning methinks, for certain, surely, indeed, I guess, presumably. E. g. DN i.137 (patapati m. paccatthike yasasā); SN i.181 (m. ‘haṃ); iv.289 (paveliyamānena m kāyena); Ja ii.275; Mil 21; Vism 90, Vism 92 (mato me m putto); Dhp-a i.107; Dhp-a ii.51; Pv-a 40 (m. goṇo samuṭṭhahe) 65 (tasmā m. sumuttā) ■ na maññe surely not Dhp-a ii.84; Pv-a 75 (n. m. puññavā rājā).
2. to know, to be convinced, to be sure Snp 840 (= jānāti Nd i.192) 1049, 1142; Nd ii.491 (= jānāti); Dhp-a i.29 (maññāmi tuvaṃ marissasi).
3. to imagine, to be proud (of) to be conceited, to boast Snp 382 (ppr. maññamāna) 806, 813, 855 (maññate); Ja iii.530 (aor. maññi ‘haṃ perhaps maññe ‘haṃ? C. explns by maññāmi) ■ pp mata ■ Note. Another Present form is munāti (q.v.) of which the pp. is muta.
man, Vedic manyate & manute, Av. mainyeite; Idg. *men, cp. Gr. μένος mood, anger = Sk. manah mind; μέμονα to think of, wish to, Lat. memini to think of, mens → mind, meneo; Goth. munan to think muns opinion; Oisl. man, Ags. mon; Ohg. minna love Ags, myne intention. Dhtp 427: man = ñāṇe, 524 bodhane
(f.) conceit Nd i.124 (taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚, māna˚, kilesa˚ etc.); Dhs 1116 Dhs 1233; Ne 24; Vism 265 (for mañcanā?).
fr. man
(nt.) illusion, imagination MN i.486. Nine maññitāni (the same list is applied to the phanditāni, the papañcitāni & sankhatāni) at Vb 390: asmi, ayam aham asmi, bhavissaṃ, na bhavissaṃ rūpī bhavissaṃ, arūpī bh., saññī bh., asaññī bh., nevasaññī-nâsaññī-bh.;
pp. of maññati
(nt.) self-conceit, pride Dhs 1116; Dhs-a 372.
fr. maññita
(nt.) a certain weapon MN i.281 (˚ṃ nāma āvudhajātaṃ; Neumann trsls “Mordwaffe”).
doubtful
(adj.) short (?) Vin ii.138 (ati˚ = atikhuddaka C.). Matta & Mattha;
doubtful spelling & meaning
wiped, polished, clean, pure ■ (a) maṭṭa: DN ii.133 (yugaṃ maṭṭaṃ dhāraṇīyaṃ: “pair of robes of burnished cloth of gold and ready for wear” trsl.); Vism 258 (v.l. maṭṭha) Cp. sam.˚-(b) maṭṭha: Vv 8417 (su˚); Mil 248; Dhp-a i.25 (˚kuṇḍalī having burnished earrings); Vv-a 6 (˚vattha). Cp. vi˚.
-sāṭaka a tunic of fine cloth Ja i.304; Ja ii.274; Ja iii.498 Vism 284 (ṭṭh).
pp. of mṛj, see majjati2
1. a gem, jewel At several places one may interpret as “crystal.” DN i.7 (as ornament); Dhp 161; Ja vi.265 (agghiya, precious). In simile at DN i.76 (maṇi veḷuriyo). On maṇi in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121 ■ udaka-pasādaka maṇi a precious stone (crystal?) having the property of making water clear Mil 35 (cp. below Vism 366 passage); cintā˚; a “thought-jewel,” magic stone (crystal?) Ja iii.504; Vv-a 32; cūḷā˚; a jewelled crest or diadem, the crown-jewel Ja v.441 sq.; jāti˚; a genuine precious stone Ja ii.417; Vism 216 (in comparison); tārā˚; (-vitāna) (canopy) of jewelled stars Vism 76; nīla˚; a dark blue jewel Ja ii.112; Ja iv.140; Dhp-a iii.254. The passage “amaṇiṃ udakaṃ maṇiṃ katvā” at Vism 366 (+ asuvaṇṇaṃ leḍḍuṃ suvaṇṇaṃ katvā) refers clearly to meaning “jewel” (that the water is without a jewel or crystal, but is made as clear as crystal; a conjuror’s trick, cp. Mil 35). Whether meaning “waterpot” (as given at Abhp 1113 & found in der. maṇika) is referred to here, is not to be decided
2. a crystal used as burning-glass Mil 54.;
-kāra a jeweller Mil 331; Dhp-a ii.152. -kuṇḍala a jewelled earring, adj. wearing an (ear) ornament of jewels Vin ii.156 (āmutta˚ adorned with… ); Vv 208 (id.); 438 (id.); Pv ii.951 (id.); Th i.187; Dhp 345 (maṇi-kuṇḍalesu = manīsu ca kuṇḍalesu ca maṇicittesu vā kuṇḍalesu, i.e. with gem-studded earrings Dhp-a iv.56). -kuṭṭima at Vv-a 188 is probably to be read as ˚kuṇḍala (v.l. ˚kundima). -khandha “jewelbulk,” i.e. a tremendous jewel, large gem, functioning in tales almost like a magic jewel Ja iii.187; Ja v.37 (˚vaṇṇaṃ udakaṃ water as clear as a large block of crystal), 183 (˚pilandhana). -guhā a jewelled cave cave of crystal Ja ii.417 (where pigs live); Snp-a 66 (one of three, viz. suvaṇṇa-guhā, m.˚, rajata˚. At the entrance of it there grows the Mañjūsaka tree). -canda “the jewelled moon,” i.e. with a crest like the (glittering moon Vv 646 (= maṇi-maya-maṇḍalânuviddha-candamaṇḍala-sadisa maṇi Vb-a 277). -cchāyā reflection of a jewel Ja vi.345. -thūṇā, a jewelled pillar, adj. with jewelled pillars Vv 541, 671. -pabbata mountain of gems Snp-a 358. -pallaṅka a jewelled pallanquin Dhp-a i.274. -bandha (place for) binding the jewel(led bracelet, the wrist Vism 255 = Vb-a 238 = Kp-a 50 (˚aṭṭhi). -bhadda Name of one of 20 classes of people mentioned Mil 191; trsld by Rh. D. Mil trsl. i.266 by “tumblers.” The term occurs also at Nd i.89 Nd i.92. Cp. Sk. Maṇibhadra, Name of a brother of Kuvera & prince of the Yakṣas.; -maya made of, consisting of or caused by jewels Pv ii.64; Vv-a 280; Dhp-a i.29 -ratana a precious stone or mineral, which is a gem (jewel); i.e. maṇi as a kind of ratana, of which there are seven Vism 189 (in sim.); Mil 218. -rūpaka a jewelled image Dhp-a i.370; -lakkhaṇa fortune-telling from jewels DN i.9; Snp-a 564.
-vaṇṇa the colour or appearance of crystal; i.e. as clear as crystal (of water) Ja ii.304 (pasanna + ). -sappa a kind of poisonous snake (i.e. a mysterious, magic snake) DN-a i.197.
cp. Vedic maṇi. The connection with Lat. monile (pendant), proposed by Fick & Grassmann, is doubted by Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. monile, where see other suggestions For further characterisation of maṇi cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben pp. 53, 263
a waterpot MN ii.39. Usually in cpd. udaka˚; Vin i.277; MN i.354; SN iv.316; AN iii.27; Mil 28; Dhp-a i.79. Whether this is an original meaning of the word remains doubtful; the connection with maṇi jewel must have been prevalent at one time.
cp. Class. Sk. maṇika
(f.) Name of a charm, the Jewel-charm, by means of which one can read other people’s minds DN i.214 (m. iddhi-vijjā), cp. Dial. i.278 n. 3.).
f. of maṇika, adj. fr. maṇi
a kind of tree Vism 313.
cp. *Sk. maṇila dewlap?
the top part, best part of milk or butter, etc. i.e. cream scum; fig. essence of, the pick of, finest part of anything parisā˚; the cream of a gathering, the pick of the congregation, excellent congregation AN i.72 (or for ˚maṇḍala?); bodhi˚; essence of enlightenment, highest state of enlightenment; in later literature objectively “the best place of enlightenment, the Throne of Enlightenment or of the Buddha” (does it stand for ˚maṇḍala in this meaning?) Ja iv.233 (cp. puthavi-maṇḍa ibid. & puthavi-maṇḍala Snp 990); Dhp-a i.86; Dhp-a ii.69 Dhp-a iv.72. sappi˚; “cream of butter,” the finest ghee (cp Avs i.1513 sarpimaṇḍa) DN i.201; AN ii.95; Pp 70; Mil 322 ■ maṇḍaṃ karoti to put into the best condition to make pleasant Snp-a 81 ■ manda at Dhs-a 100 is to be read baddha (v.l. BB). Cp. Expos. 132n.
-khetta best soil, fertile ground Mil 255. -peyya to be drunk like cream, i.e. of the finest quality first-class SN ii.20 (˚ṃ idaṃ brahmacariyaṃ).
later Sk. maṇḍa, perhaps dial. from *mranda, cp. Sk. vi-mradati to soften. Attempts at etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mollis. Cp. also mattikā
1. the cream of the milk, whey, in dadhi˚; whey SN ii.111.
2. the scum of stagnant water i.e. anything that floats on the surface & dirties the water, water-weeds, moss etc. Ja ii.304 (gloss sevāla).
fr. maṇḍa
(nt.) ornament, adornment, finery DN i.5, DN i.7; Ja vi.64; Pp 21, Pp 58; Vb 351; Vb-a 477 Dhtm 13. See under mada.
-ānuyoga practice of ornamenting, fondness of finery Vin i.190. -jātika of an ornament (-loving) nature fond of dressing DN i.80 = Vin ii.255 = MN ii.19, MN ii.32.
fr. maṇḍ
a temporary shed or hall erected on special or festive occasions, an awning, tent Vin i.125; Vism 96, Vism 300 (dhamma-savaṇa˚), 339 sq (in simile); Dhp-a i.112; Dhp-a ii.45; Dhp-a iii.206 (˚kāraka); Pv-a 74, Pv-a 171, Pv-a 194; Vv-a 173.
cp. late Sk. maṇḍapa
1. circle DN i.134 (paṭhavi˚, cp. puthavi˚ Snp 990); Vism 143 (˚ṃ karoti to draw a circle, in simile), 174 (tipu˚ & rajata˚ lead-& silver circle, in kasiṇa practice); Vv-a 147 (of a fan = tālapattehi kata˚-vījanī).
2. the disk of the sun or moon; suriya˚; Vv-a 224, Vv-a 271 (divasa-kara˚); canda˚ Vism 174; Pv-a 65.
3. a round, flat surface, e.g. jānu˚ the disk of the knee, i.e. the knee Pv-a 179 naḷāta˚ the (whole of the) forehead DN i.106; Snp p.108
4. an enclosed part of space in which something happens, a circus ring; e.g. MN i.446 (circus, race-ring) assa˚; horse-circus, raceground, Vism 308; āpāna˚ drinking circle, i.e. hall; kīḷa˚; play-circle, i.e. games Ja vi.332, Ja vi.333; Dhp-a iii.146; keḷi˚; dice board (?) Ja i.379; gā˚; Th i.1143, cp. trs. ib. n. 3; go˚; ox-round Snp 301; jūta˚; dicing table Ja i.293; yuddha˚; fighting-ring Vism 190; raṅga˚; play-house Vv-a 139; vāta˚ tornado Ja i.73.
5. anything comprised within certain limits or boundaries, a group Ja v.418 (chāpa˚ litter of young animals).
6. border as part of a bhikkhu’s dress, hem, gusset Vin i.287; Vin ii.177.
-agga [cp. Sk. maṇḍal’ āgra Halāyudha 2, 317 at Aufrecht p. 301] a circular sword or sabre Mil 339 -māla (sometimes māḷa ) a circular hall with a peaked roof, a pavilion DN i.2, DN i.50 (ḷ); Mil 16 (ḷ); Snp p.104; Snp-a 132 (Npl.); Vv-a 175.
cp. Vedic maṇḍala
(adj.-n.) a district officer king’s deputy Vin iii.47 f. maṇḍalikā = maṇḍala 4 i.e. circus, ring, round, in assa˚; race court Vin iii.6.
fr. maṇḍala, cp. maṇḍalaka-rājā “the king of a small country” Mpt 94
(adj.) 1. circular Thag 863 (maṇḍali-pākāra).
2. having a disk, orbed (of the sun) SN i.51 = Vv-a 116.
fr. maṇḍala
adorned, embellished, dressed up Sdhp 244, Sdhp 540. In cpd. ˚pasādhita beautifully adorned at Ja i.489; Ja ii.48; Ja vi.219 ■ Cp. abhi˚.
pp. of maṇḍeti
a frog Vv 512; Ja iv.247; Ja v.307; Ja vi.164; Kp-a 46; Vv-a 217, Vv-a 218; Sdhp 292 f. mandūkī Ja i.341 ■ Mandūka is the name of an angel (devaputta) at Vism 208.
-chāpī a young (female) frog Ja vi.192. -bhakkha eating frogs, frog eater (i.e. a snake) Ja iii.16.
Vedic maṇḍūka
to adorn, embellish, beautify Ja iii.138; Dhp-a ii.86 ■ pp. maṇḍita.
maṇḍ to adorn, related to Lat. mundus world, cp. in meaning Gr. κόσμος = ornament Dhtp 103 bhūsane, 566: bhūsāyaṃ
thought, understood, considered (as = -˚), only late in use Vb 2 (hīna˚ paṇīta˚, doubtful reading); Sdhp 55; Mvu 25, Mvu 55 (tassā matena according to her opinion); 25, 110 (pasu-samā matā, pl. considered like beasts). Cp. sam˚ ■ Note. Does mata-sāyika at Thag 501 (= Mil 367) belong under this mata? Then mata would have to be taken as nt. meaning “thought thinking,” but the phrase is not without objection both semantically & syntactically. Mrs. Rh. D (;Brethren, p. 240) trsls “nesting-place of thought.”
pp. of maññati
dead MN i.88 (ekāha˚ dead one day); iii.159 (matam eyya would go to die); Snp 200, Snp 440; Ja v.480. Neg. amata see separate article ■ Note. mata at Pv-a 110 is to be corrected into cuta.
-kicca duty towards the dead, rites for the dead Pv-a 274.
pp. of marati, mṛ;
dead, one who is dead Dhp-a ii.274.
-ākāra condition of one who is dead Ja i.164 (˚ṃ dassati pretends to be dead). -bhatta a meal for the dead, food offered to the manes Ja iv.151; Dhp-a i.326 (= petakicca p. 328); iii.25.
fr. mata2
(f.) mind, opinion, thought thinking of, hankering after, love or wish for Vin iii.138 (purisa˚ thought of a man); Mvu 3, Mvu 42 (padīpa lamp of knowledge); 15, 214 (amala˚ pure-minded); Pv-a 151 (kāma + ) ■ su˚; (adj.) wise, clever Mvu 15, Mvu 214; opp du˚; (adj.) foolish Ja iii.83 (= duppañña C.); Pv i.82 (= nippañña Pv-a 40); Sdhp 292.
Vedic mati, fr. man: cp. Av. maitiš, Lat. mens, mentem (cp. E. mental); Goth. ga-munds, gaminpi Ohg. gi-munt, E. mind
(adj.) in su˚; well-harrowed (field) AN i.229, AN i.239 (khetta).
cp. Sk. matī-kṛta, fr. matya, nt., harrow = Lat. mateola, Ohg. medela plough
(adj.) sensible, intelligent, wise, metri causâ as matīmā (fr. matimanto, pl.) at Snp 881 (= matimā paṇḍitā Nd i.289).
mati + mant
(-˚) (adj.) “by measure,” measured, as far as the measure goes, i.e ■ (1) consisting of, measuring (with numerals or similar expressions): appamatto kali Snp 659; pañcamattā sata 500; DN-a i.35; saṭṭhimatte saṭṭhimatte katvā Snp-a 510 māsamattaṃ Pv-a 55; ekādasa˚ ib. 20; dvādasa˚ 42 satta˚ 47; tiṃsamattehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ 53 ■ (2 (negative) as much as, i.e. only, a mere, even as little as, the mere fact (of), not even (one), not any: aṇumattena pi puññena Snp 431; kaṭacchumattaṃ (not even a spoonful Mil 8; ekapaṇṇa˚ Pv-a 115; citta ˚ṃ pi (not) even as much as one thought ib. 3; nāma˚ a mere name Mil 25; phandana ˚ṃ not even one throb Ja vi.7; phandita˚ the mere fact of… MN ii.24, bindu only one drop Pv-a 100; rodita˚ MN ii.24 ■ (3) (positive as much as, so much, some, enough (of); vibhava riches enough Ja v.40; kā pi assāsa-mattā laddhā found some relief? Pv-a 104 (may be = mattā f.) ■ (4) like just as what is called, one may say (often untranslateable): sita˚-kāraṇā just because he smiled Vv-a 68 bhesajja-mattā pītā I have taken medicine DN i.205 (= mattā f.?) okāsa-˚ṃ (nt.) permission Snp p.94 putta˚ like children AN ii.124; maraṇa˚ (almost) dead MN i.86; attano nattumatte vandanto Dha iv.178. f mattī (= mattin?) see mātu˚ ■ (5) as adv. (usually in oblique cases): even at, as soon as, because of, often with other particles, like api, eva, pi, yeva: vuttamatte eva as soon as said Dhp-a i.330; cintitamatte at the mere thought Dhp-a i.326; naṃ jātamattaṃ yeva as soon as he was born Pv-a 195; anumodana-mattena because of being pleased Pv-a 121; upanītamattam eva as soon as it was bought Pv-a 192; nimujjana-matte yeva as soon as she ducked her head under Pv-a 47-na mattena… eva not only… but even Pv-a 18 (n. m. nipphalā, attano dānaphalassa bhāgino eva honti).
i.e. mattā used as adj.
intoxicated (with), full of joy about (-˚), proud of, conceited Snp 889 (mānena m.); Ja iv.4 (vedanā˚, full of pain, perhaps better with v.l. ˚patta for ˚matta); Vv-a 158 (hatthi matto elephant in rut) Dhp-a iv.24 (id.); Pv-a 47 (surā˚), 86 (māna-mada˚), 280 (bhoga-mada˚).
-kāsinī see matthak’ āsinī.
pp. of madati
(adj.) 1. of the size of Sdhp 238 (pāṇi˚).
2. only as much as, mere DN i.12 (appa˚ ora˚, sīla˚); Ja iv.228 (mana˚); Dhp-a iv.178 (pitumattakaṃ gahetvā).
fr. matta1
(nt.) (the fact of) consisting of, or being only… Pv-a 199 (maṃsa-pesi˚).
abstr. fr. matta
(f.) measure, quantity, right measure, moderation Snp 971 (mattaṃ so jaññā); Dhp i.35 (mattā ti pamāṇaṃ vuccati) ■ Abl. mattaso in ˚kārin doing in moderation, doing moderately Pp 37 (= pamānena padesa-mattam eva karontī ti) ■ In cpds shortened to matta˚.
-aṭṭhiya (mattaṭṭhiya = ˚atthika) desirous of moderation moderate Thag 922. -ññu knowing the right measure, moderate, temperate (bhojane or bhojanamhi in eating) AN ii.40; Snp 338; Pp 25; Dhp 8. Cp. jāgariyā -ññutā moderation (in eating) DN iii.213; Nd i.483; Dhp 185; Pp 25; Vb 249, Vb 360; Dhs 1348; Dhp-a ii.238. -sukha (metri causâ: mattā-sukha) measured happiness, i.e. small happiness Dhp 290 (cp. Dhp-a iii.449).
Vedic mātrā, of mā
(-sambhava) born (from a mother) Snp 620 (= mātari sambhūta Snp-a 466) = Dhp 396 (= mātu santike udarasmiṃ sambhūta Dhp-a iv.158).
for *māti˚ = mātu˚ = *mātṛ, after pitti˚ = pitu˚ = *pitṛ
(adj.) (˚-) made of clay, clay-; only in cpds.:
-kuṇḍala clay earring SN i.79 (v.l. mattikā˚). -bhājana clay or earthenware vessel Snp 577; Vism 231 (in comparison); Dhp-a i.130. -vāka clay fibre Dhs-a 321 (v.l. ˚takka, perhaps gloss = takku spindle, see takka1).
fr. mattikā
(f.) 1. clay Ja vi.372; Mvu 29, Mvu 5 sq ■ tamba˚; red clay Dhp-a iv.106; Pv-a 191. mattikā pl. kinds of clay (used in cosmetics, like Fuller’s earth) Ja v.89 (nānā-cunṇāni mattikā; see also cuṇṇa).
2. loam, mud MN iii.94 (alla˚ fresh loam or mud); Vism 123 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā) Kp-a 59 (paṇḍu); Vv-a 65; Pv-a 216 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā).
-thāla bowl of clay Dhp-a iv.67. -piṇḍa a lump of clay or loam DN-a i.289; same trope at Pv-a 175.
cp. Vedic mṛttikā, der. fr. Vedic mṛt (mṛd) soil, earth, clay; with P. maṇḍa, Sk, vimradati. Gr. βλαδαρός soft, Osil. mylsna dust, Goth. mulda, Ags molde (E. mould, mole = mouldwarp), to same root mṛd as in Sk. mṛdu = Lat. mollis soft, Gr. ἀμαλδύνω to weaken, Sk. mardati & mṛdnāti to crush, powder, Caus mardayati; also in cognate ˚mḷd as appearing in Gr. μέλδω to melt = Ags meltan, Ohg. smëlzan
(& metteyya) (adj.) reverential towards one’s mother, motherloving DN iii.74; Pv ii.718 (= mātu hita Pv-a 104 v.l. mett˚). Spelling at DN iii.72 is metteyya. It is difficult to decide about correct spelling, as metteyya is no doubt influenced by the foll. petteyya, with which it is always combined.
fr. mātā, *mātreyya → *matteyya
(& mett˚) (f.) filial love towards one’s mother; always combd with petteyyatā DN iii.145 (v.l. mett˚); Nd ii.294 (mett˚), Dhp 332; Dhp-a iv.33.
abstr. fr. matteyya
the head, etc. Only in cpd. mattha-luṅga [cp. Sk. mastulunga] the brain Vin i.274; Snp 199; Kp iii.; Ja i.493; Kp-a 60; Vism 260 (in detail) 264, 359; Vb-a 63, Vb-a 243, Vb-a 249; Dhp-a ii.68; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 80 ■ See also matthaka.
cp. Vedic masta(ka) skull, head, Vedic mastiṣka brains; perhaps to Lat. mentum chin, Cymr. mant jawbone; indirectly also to Lat. mons mountain
the head, fig. top, summit Ja iii.206 = Ja iv.4; Ja iv.173, Ja iv.457; Ja v.478; DN-a i.226 (pabbata˚); Pv iv.163; Dhp-a i.184. matthaka-matthakena (from end to end) Ja i.202; Ja iii.304. Loc. matthake as adv. (1) at the head Dhp-a i.109; (2) at the distance of (-˚) Dhp-a i.367; (3) on top of (-˚) Ja v.163 (vammīka˚); Mvu 23, Mvu 80 (sīsa˚); Yugandhara˚ Mil 6; Dhp-a ii.3 (uddhana˚).
-āsin sitting on top (of the mountain) Ja vi.497 (= pabbata-matthake nisinna C.; gloss matta-kāsin i.e. wildly in love, expld by kāma-mada-matta). The reading is not clear. -tela oil for the head Kp-a 64 (= muddhani tela Vism 262).
cp. mattha
to churn, to shake, disturb, upset. Only in Caus. matheti to agitate, crush, harass, upset (cittaṃ SN iv.210; Snp 50 (= tāseti hāpeti Nd ii.492); Pv iv.71 (kammānaṃ vipāko mathaye manaṃ; C 264: abhibhaveyya); Mil 385 (vāyu pādape mathayati;… kilesā mathayitabbā) ■ pp. mathita. See also abhimatthati (sic) & nimmatheti.
Vedic math, manth to twirl, shake about, stir etc.; cp. Lat. mamphur part of the lathe = Ger. mandel (“mangle”), E. mandrel; Lith. mentùris churning stick, Gr. μόχος tumult μόχουρα shaft of rudder. The Dhtp (126) gives both roots (math & manth) and expl;s by “viḷolana,” as does Dhtm (183) by “viḷoṭana”
(adj. nt.) shaking up, crushing, harassing, confusing Mil 21 (+ maddana); Dhp-a i.312; Pv-a 265.
fr. math
. 1. (churned) buttermilk Vin ii.301 (amathita-kappa).
2. upset, mentally unbalanced state, disturbance of mind through passion conceit, etc. MN i.486 (maññita + ). Neumann trsls “Vermutung” i.e. speculation, guessing (v.l. matth˚).
pp. of matheti
1. intoxication sensual excess, in formula davāya madāya maṇḍanāya (for purposes of sport, excess, personal charm etc. MN i.355 = AN ii.40 = Nd i.496 = Nd ii.540 = Pp 21 = Dhs 1346, Dhs 1348. The commentator’s explns bearing directly or indirectly on this passage distinguish several kinds of mada, viz. māna-mada & purisa-; mada (at Dhs-a 403 Vism 293), or muṭṭhika-mall’ ādayo viya madatthaṃ bala- mada-nimittaṃ porisa- mada-nimittañ cā ti vuttaṃ (at Vism 31). Snp 218 (mada-pamāda on which passage Snp-a 273 comments on mada with jāti-mad’ ādi-bhedā madā).
2. (as mental state or habit) pride, conceit Mil 289 (māna, m., pamāda); Vb 345 (where 27 such states are given, beginning with jāti˚, gotta˚, ārogya˚ yobbana˚, jīvita-mada), 350 (where mada is paraphrased by majjanā majjitattaṃ māno… uṇṇati… dhajo sampaggāho ketukamyatā cittassa: same formula, as concluding exegesis of māna at Nd ii.505; Dhs 1116); sometimes more def. characterised with phrase mada-matta elated with the pride or intoxication of… (-˚). e.g. AN i.147 (yobbana˚, ārogya˚ jīvita˚); Pv-a 86 (māna˚), 280 (bhoga˚) ■ The traditional exegesis distinguishes only 3 mada’s, viz. ārogya- mada the pride of health, yobbana˚; of youth, jīvita˚; of life: DN iii.220; AN i.146.
-nimmadana “disintoxication from intoxication, freedom from pride or conceit AN ii.34; Bv i.81; Vism 293.
Vedic mada, mad (see majjati), Idg. *mad, as in Av. mata intoxication, drink, mad, to get intoxicated orig. meaning “drip, be full of liquid or fat”; cp. Gr. μαδάω dissolve, μαστός breast (μαζός → Amazone), Lat madeo to be wet, Ohg. mast fattening, Sk. meda grease fat, Gr. μέζεα· μεστός full; Goth. mats eatables, Ags mōs, Ohg. muos = gemüse, etc. Perhaps connected with *med in Lat. medeor to heal. For further relations see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. madeo ■ The Dhtp (412) Dhtm (642) explain; mad by “ ummāde ” Dhtm 210 also by “muda, mada = santose”
(nt.) lit. making drunk, intoxication Nd ii.540 C. (in formula davāya madāya madanāya instead of maṇḍanāya: see under mada 1); in cpd ˚yuta intoxicated, a name for the Yakkhas Ja i.204. Cp. nimmadana.
fr. mad
(adj. nt.) 1. intoxicating DN ii.185 (sadda vaggu rajanīya kāmanīya m.).
2. intoxication Vv-a 73.
orig. grd. of madati
(f.) intoxicating drink, spirit Ja v.425; Dhs-a 48.
of adj. Vedic madira intoxicating
1. crushing etc.; kneading, paste, in piṭṭha paste of flower Vin ii.151; Ja iii.226 (piṭṭhi˚).
2. [dialectical, cp. Sk. madra] Name of a country & its inhabitants, in; ˚raṭṭha Snp-a 68 sq. ˚rājakula Kp-a 73.
-viṇā a sort of girdle Vin ii.136.
fr. mṛd, Sk. marda
1. to tread on, trample on (acc.), crush Ja iii.245 Ja iii.372 (ppr. maddamāna); Dhp-a ii.66.
2. to defeat destroy Snp 770 (= abhibhavati Nd i.12); Nd ii.85 (madditvā = abhibhuyya); Snp-a 450; Mvu 1, Mvu 41 ■ fig. to crush a heresy: vādaṃ m. Mvu 36, Mvu 41.
3. to neglect (an advice), spurn Ja iii.211 (ovādaṃ).
4. to mix up knead, jumble together Dhp-a ii.155.
5. to thresh Ja i.215.
6. to break down, upset Ja i.500 (vatiṃ, a fence).
7. to draw together (a net) Ja i.208 ■ Caus. I maddeti to cause to be trampled on Mvu 29. 4 (aor maddayi) ■ Caus. II. maddāpeti to cause to be threshed Vin ii.180 ■ pp. maddita. See also pari˚.
cp. Vedic mṛd to crush: see etym. under mattikā
(nt.) 1. crushing, grinding, destroying Ja iv.26; Mil 21 (adj., + mathana) Sdhp 449; Dhtp 156.
2. threshing Mil 360 ■ See also nimmaddana, pamaddana, parimaddana.
cp. Epic Sk. mardana, fr. mṛd
(f.) a species of bird, in cpd. ambaka˚; AN i.188.
?
(adj. nt.) 1. mild, gentle, soft, suave Dhs 1340; Vb 359; Mil 229 (cittaṃ mudukaṃ m. siniddhaṃ), 313 (mudu˚), 361 (among the 30 best virtues, with siniddha & mudu).; 2. (fr. madda) as Np. name of a king, reigning in Sāgala, the capital of Madda.
3. withered Dhp 377 (= milāta Dhp-a iv.112) ■ nt. maddavaṃ mildness softness, gentleness Snp 250 (ajjava + ), 292 (id.); Ja iii.274 (as one of the 10 rāja-dhammā); v.347 (= mettacittaṃ); Dhs-a 151. See also sūkara˚.
fr. mṛdu, cp. Epic Sk. mārdava
(f.) gentleness, softness, suavity Dhs 44, Dhs 1340; Dhs-a 151.
abstr. fr. maddava
a kind of bird Ja vi.538.
etym.?
1. kneaded, mixed, in su˚; Vism 124.
2. crushed, defeated, in su˚; Mil 284 ■ Cp. pa˚, pari˚.
pp. of maddeti, see maddati
(adj.) crushing, destroying Sdhp 218. Cp. pamaddin.
fr. mṛd, cp. Sk. mardin = mardana
see pari˚.
of mṛdh
dripping with honey, full of honey Ja iii.493 (so read for madh-atthika); vi.529 (= madhuṃ paggharanto C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. unnecessarily reads as ˚atthika which he takes = ˚aṭṭhika. -da giving honey liberal Mvu 5, Mvu 60 (Asoka). -paṭala honey-comb Ja i.262; Dhp-a i.59; Dhp-a iii.323. -piṇḍikā a ball of honey (to eat), honey-food, a meal with honey Vin i.4; MN i.114. -pīta having drunk honey, drunk with honey SN i.212. -(b)bata “courting honey,” a bee Dāvs iii.65 -bindu a drop of honey Vism 531; Vb-a 146 (˚giddha in comparison). -makkhitā smeared with honey Ja i.158. -madhuka dripping with honey, full of honey Ja vi.529. -mehika referring to a particular disease madhumeha (“honey-urine,” diabetes?) Vin iv.8 -laṭṭhikā liquorice (no ref.?); cp. Laṭṭhi-madhukavana Ja i.68. -lāja sweet corn Ja iv.214, Ja iv.281. -vāṇija honey seller Mvu 5, Mvu 49. -ssava flowing with honey Pv ii.911.
cp. Vedic madhu, Gr. μέχυ wine, Lith. medùs honey, midùs wine, Ohg. metu = Ger. met wine. Most likely to root *med to be full of juice: see under madati honey Ja i.157 sq.; Ja iv.117; Dhp 69 (madhū vā read as madhuvā); Mvu 5, Mvu 53; Dhs-a 330; Dhp-a ii.197 (alla fresh honey) ■ pl. madhūni Mvu 5, Mvu 31 ■ The Abhp (533) also gives “wine from the blossom of Bassia latifolia” as meaning ■ On madhu in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. -atthika (madh˚) at Ja iii.493 is with v.l. to be read madhu-tthika (q.v. below). The proposal of Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) to read madh’ aṭṭhika “with sweet kernels cannot be accepted. The C. explns rightly by “madhura-phalesu pakkhitta-madhu viya, madhura-phalo hutvā.” -atthika (madhu˚) desirous of honey, seeking honey Ja iv.205; Mvu 5, Mvu 50. -āpaṇa (madhv˚) honey shop Mvu 5, Mvu 52. -āsava (madhv˚) honey extract wine from the flower of Bassia latifolia Vv-a 73 (as one of the 5 kinds of intoxicating liquors). -kara “honey-maker,” bee Ja iv.265; Vism 136 (in simile) Dhp-a i.374. -gaṇḍa honey-comb Mvu 22, Mvu 42; Mvu 34, Mvu 52 -tthika [madhu + thika, which latter stands for thīya fr. styā to congeal, drip; see thika, thīna, thīya and theva
(adj. n.) connected with honey. 1. (n.) the tree Bassia latifolia (lit. honey tree) Vin i.246; Ja v.324, Ja v.405; Ja vi.529; Mil 165.
2. the fruit of that tree Ja iv.434.
3. (adj.) (-˚) full of honey Ja vi.529 (madhu˚ containing honey).
4. connected with an intoxicating drink, given to the drink of (-˚ Ja iv.117 (surā-meraya˚).
-aṭṭhika the kernel (of the fruit) of Bassia latifolia Vism 353 = Kp-a 43 (which latter reads madhukaphal’ aṭṭhi; in the description of the finger nails) -puppha the flower of Bassia latifolia from which honey is extracted for liquor Vin i.246 (˚rasa liquorice juice) Ja i.430.
fr. madhu
(f.) honey drink, sweet drink, liquor Mvu 5, Mvu 52.
fr. madhuka
(adj.) 1. sweet Snp 50; Ja iii.493; Ja v.324; Pv ii.67; Pv-a 119, Pv-a 147.
2. of intoxicating sweetness, liquor-like, intoxicating Ja iv.117.
3. (nt. sweetness, sweet drink Dhp 363; Ja i.271 (catu˚ the 4 sweet drinks, used as cure after poison); Dhs 629; Dhs-a 320.
4. (nt.) flattery, praise Snp-a 287 (opp avaṇṇa).
-rasa sweet (i.e. honey-) juice, sweet liquor Dhp-a ii.50; Pv-a 119. -ssara sweet-sounding Vv-a 57; Pv-a 151; Mvu 5, Mvu 32.
fr. madhu
(adj.) full of sweet drink, intoxicated, in phrase madhuraka-jātokāyo viya “like an intoxicated body, i.e. without control, weak. The usual translation has been “become languid or weak” (“erschlafft” Ger.) Franke, Dīgha Übs. 202 (where more literature) translates: “Ich fūhlte mich schwach, wie ein zartes Pflänzchen,” hardly justifiable ■ DN ii.99; MN i.334; SN iii.106; AN iii.69. The description refers to a state of swooning like one in a condition of losing consciousness through intoxication. Rh. D. (Dial. ii.107) translates “my body became weak as a creeper,” hardly correct.
taken as noun also by Winternitz (Rel. gesch. Lesebuch 301) “wohl eine zarte Pflanze mit schwachen Stengel.” F. L. Woodward follows me in discarding trsln “creeper” and assuming one like “intoxicated” (so also UdA, 246): see his note on SN iii.106 trsln (K.S. iii.90).
fr. madhura, cp. similarly madhuka → madhu
(f.) sweetness Ja i.68.
abstr. fr. madhura
(nt.) sweetness Mvu 2, Mvu 13.
abstr. fr. madhura
(adv.) “by a certain weight,” i.e. a little, somewhat, almost, well-nigh, nearly. Combd with vata in exclamation: MN ii.123 (m. v. bho anassāma); Dhp-a iii.147 (m. v. therī nāsitā). Often in phrase man amhi (with pp.). “I nearly was so & so,” e.g. Vin i.109 (vuḷho); Ja i.405 (upakūḷito); iii.435 (matā) 531 (mārāpito). Cp. BSk. manāsmi khāditā Mvu ii.450.
cp. Class. Sk. manāk, “a little (of something)” prob. derived from Vedic manā f. a. gold weight = Gr. μν ̈α
(f.) mentality Dhs-a 143 (in expln of attamanatā).
abstr. fr. mano
(adj.) having a mind with such & such a mind Snp 942 (nibbāna˚ “a nibbāna mind,” one who is intent upon N., cp. expln at Snp-a 567); Pv i.66 (paduṭṭha-manasā f., maybe ˚mānasā but Pv-a 34 explns “paduṭṭha-cittā paduṭṭhena vā manasā). See also adhimanasa under adhimana.
the-˚ form of mano, an enlarged form, for which usually either ˚mana or ˚mānasa
(nt.) of a mind, only in cpds. do˚ & so˚ (q.v.).;
*manasyaṃ, abstr. der. fr. mana(s)
to crush, destroy; only in Commentator’s fanciful etymological analysis of veramaṇī at Dhs-a 218 (veraṃ manāti (sic.) vināsetī ti v. and Kp-a 24 (veraṃ maṇātī ti v., veraṃ pajahati vinodeti etc.).
cp. Sk. mṛṇāti, mṛ2
(adj.) pleasing, pleasant, charming Snp 22, Snp 759; Dhp 339 (˚ssavana); Vv-a 71; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 9. Often in combn piya manāpa, e.g. DN ii.19 DN iii.167; Ja ii.155; Ja iv.132 ■ Opp. a˚; e.g. Pp 32.
cp. BSk. manāpa
= manāpa, Vb 380; Mil 362.
human being; man AN iv.159; Snp 458 Snp 661, Snp 1043 sq.; Dhp 306, Dhp 334. Nd ii.496 (explns as “manussa” & “satta”).
-ādhipa lord of men Mvu 19, Mvu 32. -inda king of men great king Snp 553; Ja vi.98.
manu + ja, i.e. sprung from Manu, cp. etym. of manussa s. v.
(adj.) pleasing, delightful, beautiful Vv 8417 (= manorama Vv-a 340); Ja i.207 Ja ii.331; Pv ii.122; iv.121; Mil 175, Mil 398; Vv-a 11, Vv-a 36; Pv-a 251; adv. ˚ṃ pleasantly, delightfully Ja iv.252. Opp. a˚; unpleasant Ja vi.207.
cp. Class. Sk. manojña
to think, discern, understand Dhs-a 123.
Med. form of maññati
a human being, man The popular etym. connects m. with Manu(s), the ancestor of men, e.g. Kp-a 123: “Manuno apaccā ti manussā, porāṇā pana bhaṇanti ʻmana-ussannatāya manussaʼ; te Jambudīpakā, Aparagoyānikā, Uttarakurukā Pubbavidehakā ti catubbidhā.” Similarly with the other view of connecting it with “mind Vv-a 18: “manassa ussannatāya manussā” etc. Cp also Vv-a 23, where manussa-nerayika, ˚peta, ˚tiracchāna are distinguished ■ Snp 75, Snp 307, Snp 333 sq., 611 sq. Dhp 85, Dhp 188, Dhp 197 sq., 321; Nd i.97 (as gati), 340, 484 (˚phassa of Snp 964); Vism 312; Vb-a 455 (var. clans) Dhp-a i.364 ■ amanussa not human, a deva, a ghost a spirit; in cpds. “haunted,” like ˚kantāra Ja i.395 ˚ṭṭhāna Vv 843 (cp. Vv-a 334 where expld); ˚sadda Dhp-a i.315. See also separately amanussa.
-attabhāva human existence Pv-a 71, Pv-a 87, Pv-a 122. -itthi a human woman Pv-a 48, Pv-a 154. -inda lord of men SN i.69; Mvu 19, Mvu 33. -khādaka man eater, cannibal (usually appld to Yakkhas) Vb-a 451. -deva (a) “god of men,” i.e. king Pv ii.811; (b) men & gods (?) Vv-a 321 (Hardy, in note takes it as “gods of men,” i.e. brāhmaṇā). -dhamma condition of man, human state Vv-a 24. See also uttari-manussa dhamma. -bhūta as a human, in human form Pv i.112; ii.112. -loka the world of men Snp 683.
fr. manus, cp. Vedic manuṣya. Connected etym. with Goth. manna = man
(nt.) human existence, state of men Iti 19; Vv 3416; Snp-a 48, Snp-a 51; Sdhp 17 sq.
abstr. fr, manussa
(adj.) see under a˚.
fr. manussa
(f.) “mind-searching,” i.e. guessing the thoughts of others, mind-reading; a practice forbidden to bhikkhus DN i.7 (= m. nāma manasā cintita-jānana-kīḷā DN-a i.86); Vin ii.10.
mano + esikā2
(nt.) I. Declension. Like all other nouns of old s-stems mano has partly retained the s forms (cp cetah → ceto) & partly follows the a-declension. The form mano is found throughout in cpds. as; mano˚; the other mana at the end of cpds. as ˚mana. From stem manas an adj. manasa is formed and the der. mānasa & manassa; (-˚) ■ nom. mano freq.; & manaṃ Dhp 96 acc. mano Snp 270, Snp 388; Snp-a 11, and freq.; also manaṃ Snp 659 = AN ii.3; AN v.171 = Ne 132; Snp 678; Cp i.85 Vism 466; gen. dat. manaso Snp 470, Snp 967; Dhp 390 (manaso piya); Pv ii.111 (manaso piya = manasā piya Pv-a 71); instr. manasā Snp 330, Snp 365, Snp 834 (m. cintayanto) 1030; MN iii.179; Dhp 1; Pv ii.97 (m. pi cetaye); also manena Dhp-a i.42; Dhs-a 72; abl. manato SN iv.65; Dhp-a i.23; Vism 466; loc. manasmiṃ SN iv.65; manamhi Vism 466; also mane Dhp-a i.23, & manasi (see this in compn manasi karoti, below) ■ II. Meaning: mind thought DN iii.96, DN iii.102, DN iii.206, DN iii.226, DN iii.244, DN iii.269, DN iii.281; SN i.16 SN i.172; SN ii.94; MN iii.55; AN iii.443; AN v.171; Snp 77, Snp 424, Snp 829 Snp 873; Dhp 116, Dhp 300; Sdhp 369.
1. Mano represents the intellectual functioning of consciousness, while viñnāṇa represents the field of sense and sense-reaction (“perception”), and citta the subjective aspect of consciousness (cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhist Psychology p. 19-The rendering with “mind” covers most of the connotation; sometimes it may be translated “thought. As “mind” it embodies the rational faculty of man which, as the subjective side in our relation to the objective world, may be regarded as a special sense, acting on the world, a sense adapted to the rationality (reasonableness, dhamma) of the phenomena, as our eye is adapted to the visibility of the latter. Thus it ranges as the 6th sense in the classification of the senses and their respective spheres (the āyatanāni or relations of subject and object, the ajjhattikāni & the bāhirāni see āyatana 3). These are: (1); cakkhu (eye) which deals with the sight of form (rūpa); (2) sota (ear dealing with the hearing of sound (sadda); (3) ghāna (nose) with the smelling of smells (gandha); (4) jivhā (tongue), with the tasting of tastes (rasa); (5) kāya (touch), with the touching of tangible objects (phoṭṭhabba); (6) mano, with the sensing (viññāya) of rational objects or cognisables (dhamma). Thus it is the sensus communis (Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. 140 163) which recognises the world as a “mundus sensibilis” (dhamma). Both sides are an inseparable unity: the mind fits the world as the eye fits the light or in other words: mano is the counterpart of dhammā the subjective dh. Dhamma in this sense is the rationality or lawfulness of the Universe (see dhamma B. 1), Cosmic Order, Natural Law. It may even be taken quite generally as the “empirical. world” (as Geiger, e.g. interprets it in his Pali Dhamma p. 80
82 pointing out the substitution of vatthu for dhamma at Kv 126 sq. i.e. the material world), as the world of “things,” of phenomena in general without specification as regards sound, sight, smell, etc ■ Dhamma as counterpart of mano is rather an abstract (pluralistic representation of the world, i.e. the phenomena as such with a certain inherent rationality; manas is the receiver of these phenomena in their abstract meaning, it is the abstract sense, so to speak. Of course, to explain manas and its function one has to resort to terms of materiality, and thus it happens that the term vijānāti used of manas, is also used of the 5th sense, that of touch (to which mano is closely related, cp. our E expressions of touch as denoting rational, abstract processes: warm & cold; used figuratively; to grasp anything; terror-stricken; deeply moved feeling → Lat palpare to palpitate, etc.). We might say of the mind “sensing,” that manas “senses” (as a refined sense of touch) the “sensibility” (dhamma) of the objects, or as Cpd. 183 expresses it “cognizable objects.” See also kāya II.; and phassa.
2. In Buddhist Psychological Logic the concept mano is often more definitely circumscribed by the addition of the terms (man-) āyatana (man-) indriya and (mano-) dhātu, which are practically all the same as mano (and its objective correspondent dhammā). Cp. also below No. 3. The additional terms try to give it the rank of a category of thought On mano-dhātu and m-āyatana see also the discourse by S. Z. Aung. Cpd. 256
59, with Mrs. Rh. D.’s apt remarks on p. 259 ■ The position of manas among the 6 āyatanas (or indriyas ) is one of control over the other 5 (pure and simple senses). This is expressed e.g. at MN i.295 (commented on at Dhs-a 72) and SN v.217 (mano nesaṃ gocara-visayaṃ paccanubhoti: mano enjoys the function-spheres of the other senses; cp. Geiger Dhamma 81; as in the Sānkhya: Garbe, Sānkhya Philosophie 252 sq.). Cp. Vin i.36; “ettha ca te mano na ramittha rūpesu saddesu atho rasesu.”
3. As regards the relation of manas to citta, it may be stated that citta is more substantial (as indicated by translation “heart”), more elemental as the seat of emotion, whereas manas is the finer element, a subtler feeling or thinking as such. See also citta2 I., and on rel. to viññāṇa & citta see citta;2 IV. 2b. In the more popular opinion and general phraseology however manas is almost synonymous with citta as opposed to body cittaṃ iti pi mano iti pi SN ii.94. So in the triad “thought (i.e. intention) speech and action” manas interchanges with citta: see kāya III ■ The formula runs kāyena vācāya manasā, e.g. MN iii.178 (sucaritaṃ caritvā) Dhp 391 (natthi dukkaṭaṃ), cp. Dhp 96; santaṃ tassa manaṃ, santā vācā ca kamma ca. Besides with citta kāyena vācāya uda cetasā SN i.93, SN i.102; AN i.63. rakkhitena k. vācāya cittena SN ii.231; SN iv.112 ■ It is further combd with citta in the scholastic (popular) definition of manas, found in identical words at all Cy. passages “mano” is “cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ hadayaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ man-āyatanaṃ… mano-viññāna-dhātu” (mind sensibility). Thus e.g. at Nd i.3 (for mano), 176 (id.) Nd ii.494 (which however leaves out cittaṃ in exegesis of Snp 1142, Snp 1413, but has it in No. 495 in exegesis of Snp 1039); Dhs 6 (in defn of citta), 17 (of man’ indriyaṃ) 65 (of man-āyatanaṃ), 68 (of mano-viññṇa-dhātu). The close relation between the two appears further from their combn in the formula of the ādesanā-pāṭihāriyaṃ (wonder of manifestation, i.e. the discovery of other peoples’ thoughts & intentions), viz. evam pi te; mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṃ: “so & so is in your mind… so & so are your emotions”; DN i.213 DN iii.103 = AN i.170 ■ At SN i.53 both are mutually influenced in their state of unsteadiness and fear: niccaṃ utrastaṃ idaṃ cittaṃ (heart), niccaṃ ubbiggaṃ idaṃ mano (mind). The same relation (citta as instrument or manifestation of mano) is evident from Ja i.36, where the passage runs: sīho cittaṃ pasādesi. Satthā tassa manaṃ oloketva vyākāsi… At Pv-a 264 mano (of Pv iv.71) is expld by cittaṃ; pīti mano of Snp 766 (glad of heart) expld at Snp-a 512 by santuṭṭha-citto; nibbānamanaso of Snp 942 at Snp-a 567 by nibbāna-ninna- citto In the phrase yathā-manena “from his heart,” i.e. sincerely, voluntarily Dhp-a i.42, mano clearly acts as citta.
4. Phrases: manaṃ uppādeti to make up one’s mind, to resolve Dhp-a ii.140 (cp. citt’ uppāda); manaṃ karoti: (a) to fix one’s mind upon, to give thought to find pleasure or to delight in (loc.) Ja iv.223 (rūpe na manaṃ kare = itthi-rūpe nimittaṃ na gaṇheyyāsi C Cp. the similar & usual manasi-karoti in same sense) vi.45 (Pass. gīte karute mano); (b) to make up one’s mind Dhp-a ii.87; manaṃ gaṃhāti to “take the mind, take the fancy, to please, to win approval Ja iv.132; Dhp-a ii.48 ■ III. ˚mana: dhamm-uddhacca-viggahita AN ii.157 (read ˚mano for ˚manā); sankiliṭṭha-manā narā Thig 344; atta˚ pleased; gedhita˚; greedy Pv ii.82 dum˚; depressed in mind, sad or sick at heart DN ii.148; SN i.103; Vin i.21; AN ii.59, AN ii.61, AN ii.198; Thig 484; Ja i.189 opp. sumana elated, joyful Pv ii.948 (= somanassajāta Pv-a 132); pīti˚; glad or joyful of heart Snp 766 (expld by tuṭṭha-mano, haṭṭha-mano, attamano etc at Nd i.3; by santuṭṭha-citto at Snp-a 512) ■ IV. manasi-karoti (etc.) to fix the mind intently, to bear in mind, take to heart, ponder, think upon, consider recognise.
1. (v.) pres. 1st pl. ˚karoma Vin i.103 imper. 2nd sg. ˚karohi, often in formula “suṇāhi sādhukaṃ m ■ k.” “harken and pay attention” DN i.124, DN i.157, DN i.249 cp. MN i.7; AN i.227; pl. 2nd ˚karotha AN i.171; DN i.214 (+ vitakketha); Pot. ˚kareyyātha DN i.90 (taṃ atthaṃ sādhukaṃ k.); ppr. ˚karonto Dhs-a 207; ger. ˚katvā AN ii.116 (aṭṭhikatvā + .… ohitasoto suṇāti); Pv iii.25 (a˚ = anāvajjetvā Pv-a 181); Vv-a 87, Vv-a 92; Pv-a 62; grd. ˚kātabba Vism 244, Vism 278; Dhs-a 205; aor manas-ākāsi MN ii.61; MN ii.2nd pl. (Prohib.) (mā) manasākattha DN i.214; AN i.171. Pass. manasi -karīyati Vism 284.
2. (n.) manasikāra attention, pondering, fixed thought (cp. Cpd. 12, 28, 40, 282) DN iii.104, DN iii.108 sq. 112, 227 (yoniso), 273 (ayoniso); MN i.296; SN ii.3 (cetanā phasso m.); iv.297 (sabba-nimittānaṃ a˚ inattention to all outward signs of allurement); Nd i.501 (ayoniso) Vb 320, Vb 325, Vb 373 (yoniso), 425; Vism 241 (paṭikūla˚) Vb-a 148 (ayoniso), 248 sq. (as regards the 32 ākāras) 251 (paṭikkūla˚), 255 (n’âtisīghato etc.), 270 (ayoniso) 500; Dhp-a ii.87 (paṭikkula˚); Dhs-a 133 ■ sammā manasikāraṃ anvāya by careful pondering DN i.13, DN i.18≈ As adj. (thoughtful) at Thag-a 273 ■ The defn of m. at Vism 466 runs as follows: “kiriyā-kāro, manamhi kāro m. purima-manato visadisaṃ manaṃ karotī ti pi m Svāyaṃ: ārammaṇa-paṭipādako vīthi-paṭipādako javana-p.˚ ti ti-ppakāro.”-Cpds.: -kusalatā proficiency in attention DN iii.211; -kosalla id. Vb-a 56 (in detail), 224, 226 sq.; Vism 241 (tenfold), 243 (id., viz anupubbato, nâtisīghato, nâtisāṇikato etc.); Pv-a 63 (yoniso˚); -vidhāna arrangement of attention Vb-a 69, Vb-a 71; -vidhi rule or form of attention Vism 278 (eightfold, viz. gaṇanā, anubandhanā, phusanā, ṭhapanā sallakhaṇā, vivaṭṭanā, pārisuddhi, tesañ ca paṭipassanā ti) ■ The composition form of manas is mano˚ except before vowels, when man’ takes its place (as man-āyatana Vb-a 46 sq.).
-aṅgaṇa (man˚) sphere of ideation (Dhs. trsl. § 58; DN iii.243, DN iii.280 and passim. -āvajjana representative cognition: Cpd. 59. -indriya (man˚) mind-faculty category of mind, faculty of ideation (cp. Dhs. trs. § 17; Cpd. pp. 183, 184) DN i.70 (with other senses cakkh-undriyaṃ etc.) iii.226, and passim. -kamma work of the mind, mental action, associated with kāyakamma (bodily action) and vacī˚ (vocal action) AN i.32 AN i.104; Pp 41; Dhs 981 (where omitted in text). -java [cp. Vedic manojava] swift as thought Vv 6329; Pv-a 216 (assājāniya). -daṇḍa “mind-punishment” (? corresponding to kāya˚ & vacī-daṇḍa, MN i.372 sq (Neumann, trsls “Streich in Gedanken”). -duccarita sin of the mind or thoughts Dhp 233; Nd i.386; Pp 60 -dosa blemish of mind AN i.112. -dvāra door of the mind, threshold of consciousness Vb-a 41; Dhs-a 425 cp. Dhs. trsl. 3 (2p. 2); Cpd. 10. -dhātu element of apprehension, the ideational faculty (cp. Dhs. trsl. 129 2p. 119, 120; and p. 2lxxxv sq.) Dhs 457 sq.; Vb 14, Vb 71, Vb 87 sq., 144, 302; Vism 488; Vb-a 80, Vb-a 81, Vb-a 239 (physiological foundation), 405; Dhs-a 263, Dhs-a 425 Kp-a 53. -padosa anger in mind, ill-will DN iii.72; MN i.377; Snp 702; Ja iv.29; Dhs 1060 (cp. Dhs-a 367 manaṃ padussayamāno uppajjatī ti, i.e. to set one’s heart at anger). -padosika (adj.) debauched in mind (by envy & ill-will), Name of a class of gods DN i.20; Vb-a 498, Vb-a 519. Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 193 & Kern (;Toev. i.163), slightly different: from looking at each other too long. -pasāda tranquillity of the mind devotional feeling (towards the Buddha) Dhp-a i.28 -pubbaṅgama directed by mind, dominated by thought (see pubba2) Dhp 1, Dhp 2; cp. Dhp-a i.21, Dhp-a i.35. -bhāvanīya of right mind-culture, self-composed SN iii.1; MN iii.261; Vv 3413 (cp. Vv-a 152: mana-vaḍḍhanaka); Mil 129 Kern, Toev. i.163 trsls “to be kept in mind with honour.” -mattaka, in phrase mana-mattakena (adv. “by mere mind,” consisting of mind only, i.e. memorial as a matter of mind Ja iv.228. -maya made of mind consisting of mind, i.e. formed by the magic power of the mind, magically formed, expld at Vism 405 as “adhiṭṭhāna-manena nimmitattā m.”; at DN-a i.120 as “jhāna-manena nibbatta”; at Dhp-a i.23 as “manato nipphanna”; at Vv-a 10 as “bāhirena paccayena vinā manasā va nibbatta.”-Dhp 1, Dhp 2; Ja vi.265 (manomayaṃ sindhavaṃ abhiruyha); Sdhp 259; as quality of iddhi: Vism 379, Vism 406 ■ Sometimes a body of this matter can be created by great holiness or knowledge human beings or gods may be endowed with this power DN i.17 (+ pītibhakkha, of the Ābhassaras), 34 (attā dibbo rūpī m. sabbanga-paccangī etc.), 77 (id.) 186 (id.); Vin ii.185 (Koliya-putto kālaṃ kato aññataraṃ mano-mayaṃ kāyaṃ upapanno); MN i.410 (devā rūpino m.); SN iv.71; AN i.24; AN iii.122, AN iii.192; AN iv.235 AN v.60. -ratha desired object (lit. what pleases the mind), wish Vism 506 (˚vighāta + icchā- vighāta); ˚ṃ pūreti to fulfil one’s wish Mvu 8, Mvu 27 (puṇṇa-sabbamanoratha). Manoratha-pūraṇī (f.) “the wish fulfiller” is the name of the Commentary on the Anguttara Nikāya. -rama pleasing to the mind, lovely, delightful Snp 50, Snp 337, Snp 1013; Dhp 58; Pv ii.958 (phoṭṭhabba), Mvu 18, Mvu 48; Vv-a 340. -viññāṇa representative cognition rationality Vism 489; Vb-a 150 (22 fold); Dhs-a 304 cp. Dhs. trsl. 170 (2p. 157); -dhātu (element of) representative intellection, mind cognition, the 6th of the viññāṇadhātus or series of cognitional elements corresponding to and based on the 12 simple dhātus, which are the external & internal sense-relations (= āyatanāni) Dhs 58; Vb 14, Vb 71, Vb 87, Vb 89, Vb 144, Vb 176 and passim. See also above II. 3 and discussions at Dhs. trsl. 132 (2p. 122); introd. p. 53 sq.; Cpd. 1232, 184. -viññeyya to be comprehended by the mind (cp. Dialogues ii.281n) DN ii.281; MN iii.55, MN iii.57; Ja iv.195. -vitakka a thought (of mind SN i.207 = Snp 270 (mano is in C. on this passage expld as “kusala-citta” Snp-a 303). -sañcetan’ āhāra “nutriment of representative cogitation” (Dhs. trsl. 31; SN ii.11, SN ii.13, SN ii.99; Dhs 72; Vism 341. -satta “with mind attached,” Name of certain gods, among whom are reborn those who died with minds absorbed in some attachment MN i.376. -samācāra conduct, observance, habit of thought or mind (associated with kāya˚ & vacī˚ MN ii.114; MN iii.45, MN iii.49. -silā (cp. Sk. manaḥ-śila) red arsenic, often used as a powder for dying and other purposes; the red colour is frequently found in later (Cy.) literature, e.g. Ja v.416 (+ haritāla yellow ointment); Vism 485; Dhp-a iv.113 (id. as cuṇṇa); Thag-a 70 (Ap. v.20); Mvu 29, Mvu 12; Snp-a 59 (˚piṇḍa in simile) Dhp-a ii.43 (˚rasa); Vv-a 288 (˚cuṇṇa-pịñjara-vaṇṇa of ripe mango fruit); Pv-a 274 (˚vaṇṇāni ambaphalāni) -tala a flat rock, platform (= silātala) Snp-a 93, Snp-a 104; as the platform on which the seat of the Buddha is placed & whence he sends forth the lion’s roar: Ja ii.219 Ja vi.399; Vv-a 217; as a district of the Himavant Ja vi.432; Snp-a 358. -hara charming, captivating beautiful Mvu 18, Mvu 49; Name of a special gem (the wishing gem?) Mil 118, Mil 354.
Vedic manaḥ, see etym. under maññati
orig. a divine saying or decision, hence a secret plan [cp. def. of mant at Dhtp 578 by “gutta-bhāsane”], counsel hence magic charm, spell. In particular a secret religious code or doctrine, esp. the Brahmanic texts or the Vedas, regarded as such (i.e. as the code of a sect) by the Buddhists.
1. with ref. to the Vedas usually in the pl. mantā (the Scriptures, Hymns, Incantations) DN i.96; MN ii.166 (brahme mante adhiyitvā; mante vāceti); Snp 249 (= devā Snp-a 291), 302 (mante ganthetvā criticised by Bdhgh as brahmanic (: heretic) work in contrast with the ancient Vedas as follows “vede bhinditvā dhammayutte porāṇa-mante nāsetvā adhamma-yutte kūṭa-mante ganthetvā” Snp-a 320) 1000 (with ref. to the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa), 1018; Dhp 241 (holy studies); Ja ii.100; Ja iii.28 (maybe to be classed under 2), 537 ■ Sometimes in sg.: mantaṃ parivattenti brahma-cintitaṃ Pv ii.613 (= veda Pv-a 97) = Vv 6316 (= veda Vv-a 265) ■ n. pl. also mantāni meaning “Vedas”: Mil 10.
2 (doubtful, perhaps as sub group to No. 3) holy scriptures in general, sacred text, secret doctrine SN i.57 (mantā dhīra “firm in doctrine” K.S. thus taking mantā as instr.; it may better be taken as mantar ); Snp 1042 (where Nd ii.497 expls as paññā etc.); Mvu 5, Mvu 109 (Buddha˚ the “mantra” of the B.), 147 (id.).
3. divine utterance a word with supernatural power, a charm, spell, magic art, witchcraft Mil 11 (see about manta in the Jātakas: Fick, Sociale Gliederung 152, 153). At Pv-a 117 m. is combined with yoga and ascribed to the devas while y. is referred to men ■ Ja i.200 (+ paritta) iii.511 (˚ṃ karoti to utter a charm, cast a spell); Dhp-a iv.227. There are several special charms mentioned at var. places of the Jātakas, e.g. one called Vedabbha by means of which under a certain constellation one is able to produce a shower of gems from the air Ja i.253 (nakkhatta-yoge laddhe taṃ mantaṃ parivattetvā ākāse ulloki, tato ākāsato satta-ratana-vassaṃ vassati) Others are: paṭhavī-jaya m. (by means of which one conquers the earth) Ja ii.243; sabba-rāva-jānana˚ (of knowing all sounds, of animals) iii.415; nidhi-uddharana˚ (of finding secret treasures) iii.116; catukaṇṇa (four-cornered) vi.392, etc.
4. advice, counsel, plan design Vin iv.308 (˚ṃ saṃharati to foil a plan); Ja vi.438
5. (adj.) (-˚) parivattana˚; a charm that can be said an effective charm Ja i.200; bahu˚; knowing many charms very tricky Dhp-a ii.4; bhinna˚; one who has neglected an advice Ja vi.437, Ja vi.438.
-ajjhāyaka one who studies the Mantras or Holy Scriptures (of the Brahmins) Ja i.167; Dhp-a iii.361 (tinnaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū m ■ a. brāhmaṇo). -ajjhena study of the Vedas Snp-a 314. -pada = manta 1. DN i.104 (= veda-sankhāta m. DN-a i.273. -pāraga one who masters the Vedas; in buddh. sense: one who excels in wisdom Snp 997. manta in this sense is by the Cys always expld by paññā, e.g. , Nd ii.497 (as mantā f.) Dhp-a iv.93 (id.), Snp-a 549 (mantāya pariggahetvā) -pāragū one who is accomplished in the Vedas Snp 251 (= vedapāragū Snp-a 293), 690 (= vedānaṃ pāragata Snp-a 488), 976. -bandhava one acquainted with the Mantras Snp 140 (= vedabandhū Snp-a 192); Nd i.11 (where Nd ii.455 in same connection reads mitta˚ for manta˚: see under bandhu). -bhāṇin reciter of the Holy Texts (or charms) Th ii.281; fig. a clever speaker Snp 850 (but Nd i.219 reads manta˚; see mantar) Dhp 363 (cp. Dhp-a iv.93; paññāya bhaṇana-sīla) Thag 2 -yuddka a weird fight, a bewitched battle Mvu 25, Mvu 49 (“cunningly planned b.” trsl. Geiger; “diplomatic stratagem,” Turnour).
cp. Vedic mantra, fr. mantray
(adj.) plotting Ja v.437.
fr. mantanā
f. (& ˚ṇā) counsel, consultation, deliberation, advice, command DN i.104; AN i.199; Vin v.164; Ja vi.437, Ja vi.438; Mil 3 (ṇ); DN-a i.273.
fr.; mant
a sage, seer, wise man, usually appositionally nom. mantā “as a sage,” “like a thinker,” a form which looks like a fem. and is mostly expld as such by the Commentaries Mantā has also erroneously been taken as instr. of manta, or as a so-called ger. of manteti, in which latter two functions it has been expld at “jānitvā.” The form has evidently puzzled the old commentators as early as the Niddesa; through the Abhp (153 979) it has come down at mantā “wisdom” to Childers Kern, Toev. s. v. hesitates and only comes half near the truth. The Index to Pj. marks the word with? SN i.57 (+ dhīra; trsln “firm in doctrine”); Snp 159 (“in truth,” opp. to musā; Snp-a 204 explns m. = paññā; tāya paricchinditvā bhāsati), 916 (mantā asmī ti, expld at Snp-a 562 by “mantāya”), 1040 = 1042 (= Nd ii.497 mantā vuccati paññā etc.); Vv 636 (expld as jānitvā paññāya paricchinditvā Vv-a 262) ■ Besides this form we have a shortened manta (nom.) at Snp 455 (akiñcano + ), which is expld at Snp-a 402 as mantā jānitvā It is to be noted that for manta-bhāṇin at Snp 850 the Nd i.219 reads mantā and expls customarily by “mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṃ bhāsati.”
n. ag. of mant, cp. Sk. *mantṛ a thinker
1. considered Thag 9; Mil 91.
2. advised, given as counsel Ja vi.438; DN-a i.273.
pp. of manteti
(adj.-n.) 1. (adj.) giving or observing counsel SN i.236.
2. (n.) counsellor, minister Ja vi.437 (paṇḍita m.).
fr. manta
to pronounce in an important (because secret) manner (like a mantra), i.e. 1. to take counsel (with = instr. or saddhiṃ) DN i.94, DN i.104 (mantanaṃ manteyya to discuss 122 (2nd pl. imper. mantavho, as compared with mantayavho Ja ii.107 besides mantavho ibid. Cp Geiger, P.Gr. § 126); ii.87, 239; Vin iv.308 (mantesuṃ aor.; perhaps “plotted”); Snp p.107 (= talk privately to); Snp 379; Ja i.144; Ja vi.525 (mantayitvāna ger.) DN-a i.263 (imper. mantayatha ); Pv-a 74 (aor. mantayiṃsu).
2. to consider, to think over, to be of opinion AN i.199 (Pot. mantaye); Mil 91 (grd. mantayitabba & inf.; mantayituṃ ).
3. to announce, advise; pronounce advise Snp 126; Pv iv.120 (= kathemi kittayāmi Pv-a 225); Snp-a 169 ■ pp. mantita ■ Cp. ā˚.
cp. Vedic mantrayati; mant is given at Dhtp in meaning of gutta-bhāsana, i.e. “secret talk”
a churning stick, a sort of rice-cake (= satthu) Vin i.4, [cp. Vedic mantha “Rührtrank” homeric κυκεών “Gerstenmehl in Milch verrührt, Zimmer, Altind. Leben 268].
fr. math
(adj.) 1. slow, lazy, indolent; mostly with ref. to the intellectual faculties, therefore: dull, stupid, slow of grasp, ignorant foolish MN i.520 (+ momuha); Snp 666, Snp 820 (= momūha Nd i.153), 1051 (= mohā avidvā etc. Nd ii.498); Dhp 325 (= amanasikārā manda-pañña Dhp-a iv.17); Ja iv.221; Pp 65, Pp 69; Kp-a 53, Kp-a 54.
2. slow, yielding little result unprofitable (of udaka, water, with respect to fish; and gocara, feeding on fishes) Ja i.221.
3. [in this meaning probably = Vedic mandra “pleasant, pleasing,” although Halāyudha gives mandākṣa as “bashful” soft, tender (with ref. to eyes), lovely, in cpds. ˚akkhin having lovely (soft) eyes Ja iii.190; and ˚locana id Thig 375 (kinnari-manda˚ = manda-puthu-vilocana Thag-a 253); Pv i.115 (miga-manda˚ = migī viya mand akkhī Pv-a 57); Vv 6411 (miga-m˚ = miga-cchāpikānaṃ viya mudu siniddha-diṭṭhi-nipāta).
4. In cpd. picu (or puci˚) manda the Nimb tree, it means “tree” (? see picu-manda & puci-manda.
5. In composition with; bhū it assumes the form mandī˚; e.g. mandībhūta slowed down, enfeebled, diminished Ja i.228 Vb-a 157.
-valāhakā a class of fairies or demi-gods DN ii.259 (“fragile spirits of the clouds” trsl.).
cp. late-Vedic & Epic manda
according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = *mandra (of sound: deep, bass) + ka; a sort of drum Ja vi.580.
?
(f.) = mandatta Sdhp 19.
(nt.) stupidity MN i.520; Pp 69.
fr. manda
(f.) Name of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant, enumd at AN iv.101; Ja v.415; Vism 416; Snp-a 407; DN-a i.164. (Halāyudha 3, 51 gives m. as a name for the Ganges.)
(f.) a coal-pan, a vessel for holding embers for the sake of heating Vin i.32 (= aggi-bhājana C.); Vv-a 147 (mandamukhī, stands for angara-kapalla p. 142 in expln of hattha-patāpaka Vv 3332).
dialectical? reading a little doubtful
the coral tree, Erythrina fulgens (considered also as one of the 5 celestial trees) The blossoms mentioned DN ii.137 fall from the next world ■ DN ii.137; Vv 222 (cp. Vv-a 111); Ja i.13, Ja i.39; Mil 13, Mil 18 (dibbāni m ■ pupphāni abhippavassiṃsu).
cp. Sk. mandāra
a water-plant (kind of lotus) Ja iv.539; Ja vi.47, Ja vi.279, Ja vi.564.
etym.?
(nt.) 1. laziness, slackness SN i.110.
2. dullness of mind, stupidity Ja iii.38 (= manda-bhāva).
cp. Sk. māndya
(nt.) a house, edifice, palace Snp 996, Snp 1012; Ja v.480; Ja vi.269, Ja vi.270; Dāvs ii.67 (dhātu˚ shrine).
cp. late Sk. mandira
see manda 5.
gen. dat. of pers. pron. ahaṃ (q.v.) used quasi independently (as substitute for our “self-”) in phrase mama-y-idaṃ Snp 806 thought of “this is mine,” cp SN i.14, i.e. egoism, belief in a real personal entity expld at Nd i.124 by maññanā conceit, illusion. Also in var. phrases with kṛ; in form mamaṃ˚; viz. mamankāra etc ■ As adj. “self-like, selfish” only neg amama unselfish Snp 220 (= mamatta-virahita Snp-a 276); Pv iv.134 (= mamankāra-virahita Pv-a 230) Ja iv.372; Ja vi.259. See also amama, cp. māmaka.
selfish attachment, self-interest, selfishness Pv-a 230 In canonic books only in combn with ahaṅkāra mān’ ānusaya; (belief in an ego and bias of conceit) e.g. at MN iii.18, MN iii.32; SN iii.80, SN iii.103, SN iii.136, SN iii.169; SN iv.41, SN iv.197 SN iv.202; AN i.132 sq.; AN iii.444. See also mamiṅkāra.
mamaṃ (= mama) + kāra, cp. ahaṃ + kāra
(nt.) treating with tenderness, solicitude, fondness Ja v.331.
fr. mamaṃ + kṛ;
(nt.) selfishness, self-love, egoism; conceit, pride in (-˚), attachment to (-˚). Snp 806, Snp 871 Snp 951; Thag 717; Nd i.49 (two: taṇhā & diṭṭhi˚); Nd ii.499 (id. but as masc.); Snp-a 276; Dhs-a 199; Pv-a 19.
fr. mama
to be attached to, to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster, love MN i.260; SN iii.190; Thag 1150; Snp 922 (mamāyetha); Nd i.125 (Bhagavantaṃ); Ja iv.359 (= piyāyati C.); Mil 73 Vb-a 107 (mamāyatī ti mātā: in pop. etym. of mātā) Dhp-a i.11; Snp-a 534; Mvu 20, Mvu 4 ■ pp. mamāyita.
Denom. fr. mama, cp. Sk. mamāyate in same meaning (not with Böhtlingk & Roth: envy) at MBh; xii.8051 and Aṣṭas Prajñā Pāramitā 254
(f.) = mamatta (selfishness) Ja vi.259 (˚taṇhārahita in expln of amama).
cherished, beloved; as n. nt. attachment, fondness of, pride ■ (adj. or pp. SN ii.94 (etaṃ ajjhositaṃ, m., parāmaṭṭhaṃ); Snp 119; Dhp-a i.11 ■ (nt.:) Snp 466, Snp 777, Snp 805, Snp 950 = Dhp 367 (expld as: yassa “ahan” ti vā “maman” ti vā gāho n’ atthi Dhp-a iv.100); Snp 1056 (cp. Nd ii.499).
pp. of mamāyati
to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster Ja v.330.
mama(ṃ) + kṛ; “to make one’s own”
self-love, self-interest, egoism MN i.486; MN iii.32 (at both places also ahiṅkāra for ahaṅkāra ).
for maman˚, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 19
(nt.) soft spot of the body, a vital spot (in the Vedas chiefly between the ribs near the heart), joint. A popular etym. and expln of the word is given at Expos. 132n3 (on Dhs-a 100) ■ Ja ii.228; Ja iii.209; Dhs-a 396.
-ghaṭṭana hitting a vital spot (of speech, i.e. backbiting Cp. piṭṭhi-maṃsika) Dhp-a iv.182. -chedaka breaking the joints (or ribs), violent (fig. of hard speech Dhp-a i.75; Dhs-a 100.
Vedic marman, fr. mṛd
(adj.) [onomat. cp. babbhara. With Sk. marmara rustling to Lat. fremo to roar = Gr. βρέμω to thud, βροντή thunder, Ger. brummen. Cp. also Sk murmura = P. mummura & muramurā, Lat. murmur stammering, stuttering Vin ii.90 (one of the properties of bad or faulty speech, combd with dubbaca & eḷagalavāca).;
(adj.) (-˚ only) made of, consisting of ■ An interesting analysis (interesting for judging the views and sense of etymology of an ancient commentator) of maya is given by Dhammapāla at Vv-a 10 where he distinguishes 6 meanings of the word, viz 1. asma -d-atthe, i.e. “myself” (as representing mayaṃ!).
2. paññatti “regulation” (same as 1 according to example given, but constructed syntectically quite diff. by Dhp.).
3. nibbatti “origin (arising from, with example mano-maya “produced by mind”).
4. manomaya “spiritually” (same as 3)
5. vikār’ atthe “alteration” (? more like product consistency, substance), with example “sabbe-maṭṭikāmaya-kuṭikā.”
6. pada-pūraṇa matte to make up a foot of the verse (or add a syllable for the sake of completeness with example “dānamaya, sīlamaya (= dana; sīla).
1. made of: aṭṭhi˚; of bone Vin ii.115; ayo˚; of iron Snp 669; Pv i.104; Ja iv.492; udum- bara˚; of Ud. wood Mvu 23, Mvu 87; dāru˚; of wood, Vv-a 8; loha˚; of copper Snp 670; veḷuriya˚ of jewels Vv 21
2. consisting in: dāna˚; giving alms Pv-a 8, Pv-a 9; dussa˚ clothes Vv 467; dhamma˚; righteousness SN i.137.
3 (more as apposition, in the sense as given by Dhp above under 6) something like, a likeness of, i.e. ingredient, substance, stuff; in āhāra˚; food-stuff, food Ja iii.523; utu˚; something like a (change in) season Vism 395; sīla˚; character, having sīla as substance (or simply-consisting of) Iti 51 (dāna˚, sīla˚, bhāvanā˚).
Vedic maya
we Vin ii.270; Snp 31, Snp 91, Snp 167; Dhp 6; Kp-a 210.
1st pl. of ahaṃ, for vayaṃ after mayā etc. See ahaṃ
a ray of light Abhp. 64; Dhp. A 426 (old citation unverified).
Vedic mayūkha in diff. meaning, viz. a peg for fastening a weft etc., Zimmer Altind. Leben 254
a peacock DN iii.201; SN ii.279; Thag 1113; Ja ii.144, Ja ii.150 (˚gīva) = Dhp-a i.144; Ja iv.211 (˚nacca); v.304; vi.172, 272, 483; Vv 111, 358 (= sikhaṇḍin Vv-a 163); Vv-a 27 (˚gīva-vaṇṇa); Sdhp 92. The form mayūra occurs nearly always in the Gāthās and is the older form of the two m. and mora. The latter contracted form is found in Prose only and is often used to explain the old form, e, g. at Vv-a 57. See also mora.
Vedic mayūra
(adj.) dying; only neg. amara not dying, immortal, in phrase ajarāmara free from decay death Th; ii.512; Pv ii.611. See also amara.
fr. mṛ;
(nt.) death, as ending this (visible) existence, physical death, in a narrower meaning than kālakiriyā; dying, in cpds. death ■ The customary stock definition of maraṇa runs; yaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhā tamhā satta-nikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṃ maccu maraṇaṃ kālakiriyā, khandhānaṃ bhedo, kaḷebarassa nikkhepo MN i.49; Nd i.123, Nd i.124 (adds “jīvit’ indriyass’ upacchedo”). Cp. similar defns of birth and old age under jāti and jarā ■ SN i.121; DN iii.52, DN iii.111 sq., 135 sq., 146 sq., 235, 258 sq. Snp 32, Snp 318, Snp 426 sq., 575 sq., 742, 806; Nd ii.254 (= maccu) Pp 60; Vb 99 sq.; Vb-a 100 (defn and exegesis in det., cp. Vism 502), 101 (var. kinds of, cp. Vism 229) 156 (lahuka), 157; Dhp-a iii.434; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 18, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 64, Pv-a 76 Pv-a 96; Sdhp 292, Sdhp 293 ■ kāla˚; timely death (opp. akāla˚) khaṇika˚; sudden death Vism 229.
-anta having death as its end (of jīvita) Dhp 148 (cp Dhp-a ii.366: maraṇa-sankhāto antako). -ānussati mindfulness of death Vism 197, Vism 230 sq. (under 8 aspects) -cetanā intention of death Dhp-a i.20. -dhamma subject to death Pv-a 41. -pariyosana ending in death (of jīvita, life) Dhp-a iii.111, Dhp-a iii.170. -pāra “the other side of death,” Np. at Nd i.154 (vv.ll. BB purāpuraṃ; SS parammukhaṃ). -bhaya the fear of death Ja i.203 Ja vi.398; Vb 367. -bhojana food given before death the last meal Ja i.197; Ja ii.420. -mañca death-bed Vism 47, Vism 549; ˚ka Ja iv.132. -mukha the mouth of d. Pv-a 97 (or should we read ˚dukkha?). -sati the thought (or mindfulness) of death, meditation on death Snp-a 54; Dhp-a iii.171; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 66. -samaya the time of death Vb-a 157–159 (in var. conditions as regards paṭisandhi).
fr. mṛ;
to die ■ pres. marati Mvu v. spur. after 5, 27; 36, 83; Pot. mareyyaṃ Ja vi.498; Ja vi.2nd mareyyāsi Ja iii.276. ppr. maramāna Mvu 36, Mvu 76 ■ aor. amarā Ja iii.389 (= mata C.; with gloss amari) ■ amari Mvu 36, Mvu 96 ■ Fut. marissati Ja iii.214 ■ ppr. (= fut. marissaṃ Ja iii.214 (for *mariṣyanta) ■ Inf. marituṃ DN ii.330 (amaritu-kāma not willing to die); Vism 297 (id.); Vv-a 207 (positive); and marituye Thig 426. The form miyyati (mīyati) see separately ■ Caus I māreti to kill, murder Mvu 37, Mvu 27; Pv-a 4. Pass māriyati Pv-a 5 (ppr. māriyamāna); Sdhp 139 (read mār˚ for marīy˚) ■ Caus. II. mārāpeti to cause to be killed Ja iii.178; Mvu 37, Mvu 28. Cp. pamāreti.
mṛ; = Idg. *mer, Vedic mriyate & marate; cp. Av. miryeite, Sk. marta = Gr. βροτός mortal, man; māra death; Goth. maurpr = Ags. mort = Ger. mord; Lith mir̃ti to die; Lat. morior to die, mors death. The root is identical with that of mṛṇāti to crush: see maṇāti and mṛdnāti (mardati) same: see mattikā ■ The Dhtp (No. 245) defines mṛ; by “pāṇa-cāge,” i.e. giving up breathing
(nt.) black pepper Vin i.201 (allowed as medicine to the bhikkhus); Mil 63.
-gaccha the M ■ shrub Ja v.12. -cuṇṇa powdered pepper, fine pepper Ja i.455.
cp. scientific Sk. marica
(f.) 1. boundary limit, shore, embankment Vin iii.50; AN iii.227 (brāhmaṇānaṃ); DN iii.92 = Vism 419; Ja v.325; Ja vi.536 (tīra˚) Mvu 34, Mvu 70; Mvu 36, Mvu 59 (vāpi˚); Mil 416.
2. strictly defined relation, rule, control Ja ii.215; Vism 15 ■ adj keeping to the lines (or boundaries), observing strict rules AN iii.227 (quoted Snp-a 318, Snp-a 325). ˚bandha keeping in control Vin i.287 ■ Cp. vimariyādi.
cp. Vedic maryādā; perhaps related to Lat. mare sea; s. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under mare
(f.) [Vedic marīci; cp. Gr. μαρμαίρω to shimmer, glitter, μαϊρα dog star, ἀμαρύσσω sparkle; Lat. merus clear, pure; perhaps also mariyādā to be taken here 1. a ray of light Vv-a 166.
2. a mirage Ja vi.209 Vism 496; Vb-a 34, Vb-a 85; often combd with māyā (q.v.) e.g. Nd ii.680 Aii; Ja ii.330.
-kammaṭṭhāna the “mirage” station of exercise Dhp-a iii.165. -dhamma like a mirage, unsubstantial Ja vi.206; Dhp 46; Dhp-a i.337.
(f.) = marīci 2; SN iii.141; Vism 479 (in comp.); Dhp 170 (= māyā Dhp-a iii.166).
a region destitute of water, a desert. Always combd with ˚kantāra: Nd i.155 (as Name); Ja i.107; Vb-a 6; Vv-a 332; Pv-a 99, Pv-a 112.
cp. Epic Sk. maru
1. pl. marū the genii, spirits of the air Snp 681, Snp 688; Mil 278 (nāga-yakkha-nara-marū perhaps in meaning 2); Mvu 5, Mvu 27.
2. gods in general (˚-) Mvu 15, Mvu 211 (˚gaṇā hosts of gods); 18, 68 (˚narā gods and men) ■ Cp. māruta & māluta;.
Vedic marut, always in pl. marutaḥ, the gods of the thunder-storm
a sort of (sweet-scented) earth or sand Vin ii.121, Vin ii.142, Vin ii.153 (at these passages used for besprinkling a damp living-cell); iv.33 (pāsāṇā, sakkharā kaṭhalā, marumbā, vālikā); Mvu 29, Mvu 8; Dpvs 19, 2; Mil 197 (pāsāṇa, sakkhara, khara, m.).
etym.?
(f.) a species of hemp (Sanseveria roxburghiana MN i.429. At Ja ii.115 we find reading marūdvā marucavāka; (C.), of uncertain meaning?
cp. Sk. mūrvā, perhaps connected with Lat. malva
(nt.) anything impure, stain (lit. & fig.), dirt. In the Canon mostly fig. of impurities. On mala in similes see J.P.T.S., 1907, 122 ■ SN i.38 (itthi malaṃ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); AN i.105 (issā˚); Snp 378 Snp 469, Snp 962, Snp 1132 (= rāgo malaṃ etc. Nd ii.500); Nd i.15 Nd i.478 sq.; Dhp 239 sq.; Vb 368 (tīṇi malāni), 389 (nava purisa-malāni); Pv ii.334 (macchera˚); Pv-a 45 (id.) 80 (id.), 17 (citta˚); Sdhp 220 ■ Compar. malatara a greater stain AN iv.195 = Dhp 243 ■ See also māla.
-ābhibhū overcoming one’s sordidness SN i.18; Ja iv.64. -majjana “dirt wiper,” a barber Vin iv.308 (kasāvaṭa m. nihīnajacca); Ja iii.452; Ja iv.365.
Vedic mala, see etym. under malina. The Dhtm (395) only knows of one root mal or mall in meaning “dhāraṇa” supporting, thus thinking of māḷaka
(adj.) dirty, stained impure, usually lit ■ Ja i.467; Mil 324; Dhp-a i.233; Vv-a 156; Pv-a 226; Vb-a 498.
fr. mal, *mel to make dirty, to which belongs mala ■ Cp. Lat. mulleus reddish, purple; Gr. μέλας black, μολύνω to stain, μέλτος reddish; Lith. mulvas yellowish, mélynas blue; Ohg. māl stain
(adj.) dirty; with ref. to loha, a kind of copper, in the group of copper belonging to Pisāca Vb-a 63.
malina + ka
(nt.) flower, garland of flowers Vv 11 (-dhara); 21; Ja v.188 (puppha˚), 420. The reading at Pv iii.33 (pahūta˚, adj. having many rows of flowers) is mālya.
for *mālya, fr. māla
a wrestler Vin ii.105 (˚muṭṭhika) Ja iv.81 (two, named Cānura and Muṭṭhika “fister”); Vism 31 (muṭṭhika + i.e. boxing & wrestling as amusements: see mada 1) Perhaps as “porter” Bdhgh on CV v.29. 5 (see Vin ii.319). At Mil 191 the mallā are mentioned as a group or company; their designation might here refer to the Mallas, a tribe, as other tribes are given at the same passage (e.g. Atoṇā, Pisācā). Cp. Bhallaka.
-gaṇa troop of professional wrestlers Mil 331 -muṭṭhika boxer Vin ii.105. -yuddha wrestling contest Mil 232; Dhp-a ii.154; DN-a i.85. -yuddhaka a professional wrestler Ja iv.81.
cp. Sk. malla, perhaps a local term, cp. Cānura
1. a bowl, a vessel (?) used in bathing Vin ii.106 (mallakena nahāyati; or is it a kind of scrubber? Bdhgh’s expln of this passage (CV v. i.4) on p. 315 is not quite clear mallakaṃ nāma makara-dantike chinditvā mūllakamūla-saṇṭhānena kata-mallakaṃ vuccati; akata˚ danta achinditvā kataṃ). It may bear some ref. to malla on p. 105 (see malla) & to mallika-makula (see below mallikā).
2. a cup, drinking vessel AN i.250 (udaka˚)
3. a bowl Ja iii.21 (kaṃsa˚ = taṭṭaka).
4. in kheḷa a spittoon Vin i.48; Vin ii.175 ■ Note. W. Printz in “Bhāsa’s Prākrit.” p. 45, compares Śaurasenī maḷḷaa Hindī maḷḷ(a) “cup,” maliyā “a small vessel (of wood or cocoanut-shell) for holding the oil used in unction, mālā “cocoanut-shell,” and adds: probably a Dravidian word.
cp. Sk. mallaka & mallika
(f.) Arabian jasmine Dhp 54 (tagara˚) Ja i.62; Ja iii.291; Ja v.420; Mil 333, Mil 338; Dhs-a 14; Kp-a 44. mallika-makula opening bud of the jasmine Visni 251 = Vb-a 234 (˚saṇṭhāna, in descr, of shape of the 4 canine teeth) ■ See also mālikā.
cp. Epic Sk. mallikā, Halāyudha 2, 51; Daṇḍin 2, 214
(f.) a stand, (tripod) for a bowl, formed of sticks Vin ii.124 (= daṇḍ’ ādhāraka Bdhgh on p. 318).
prob. dialectical for māḷaka: cp. mallaka
in line “āsadañ ca masañ jaṭaṃ” at Ja vi.328 is to be combd with ca, and read as camasañ, i.e. a ladle for sacrificing (C.: aggi-dahanaṃ).
to touch: only in cpd. āmasati. The root is expld at Dhtp 305 as “āmasana.” Another root masu [ mṛś ?] is at Dhtm 444 given in meaning “macchera.” Does this refer to Sk. mṛṣā (= P. micchā) Cp. māsati, māsana etc.
mṛś
(nt.) a coarse cloth of interwoven hemp and other materials DN i.166; MN i.308, MN i.345; AN i.241, AN i.295; Pp 55. At all passages as a dress worn by certain ascetics.
etym.? prob. provincial & local
a kind of couch (mañca) or longchair; enumd under the 4 kinds of mañcā at Vin iv.40-See also Vin ii.149; Vin iv.357 (where expld as: mañcapāde vijjhitvā tattha aṭṭaniyo pavesetvā kato: made by boring a hole into the feet of the bed & putting through a notched end); Vv-a 8, Vv-a 9.
fr. masāra?
(m. & nt.) a precious stone, cat’s eye; also called kabara-maṇi (e.g. Vv-a 304). It occurs in stereotyped enumn of gems at Vin ii.238 (where it is said to be found in the Ocean) = Mil 267; and at Mil 118, where it always stands next to lohitaṅka. The same combn (with lohit.) is found at Vv 363; 783 = 813 8415.
cp. Sk. masāra emerald + galva crystal & musāragalva
. 1. the fine particles of ashes, in; aṅgara˚; charcoal-dust Vv-a 67 = Dhp-a iii.309 (agginā) masiṃ karoti to reduce to powder (by fire), to burn to ashes, turn to dust SN ii.88 = SN iv.197 = AN i.204 AN ii.199.
2. soot Ja i.483 (ukkhali˚; soot on a pot).
cp. Class. Sk. maṣi & masi
a bolster Ja iv.87; Ja vi.185.
connected with masāraka
the beard DN ii.42; Pp 55; Ja iv.159 ■ parūḷha˚ with long-grown beard DN-a i.263; bahala thick-bearded Ja v.42.
-kamma beard-dressing Ja iii.114; Dhp-a i.253. -karaṇa shaving Dhp-a i.253; DN-a i.137. -kutti [m. *kḷpti] beard-trimming Ja iii.314 (C. = ˚kiriyā).
Vedic śmaśru
(adj.) bearded; a˚; beardless (of a woman) Ja ii.185.
fr. massu
(m. & nt.) 1. worthiness, venerableness Mil 357.
2. a (religious) festival (in honour of a Saint, as an act of worship) Mvu 33, Mvu 26 (vihārassa mahamhi, loc.); Vv-a 170 (thūpe ca mahe kate), 200 (id.). mahā˚; a great festival Mvu 5, Mvu 94. bodhi˚; festival of the Bo tree Ja iv.229. vihāra˚; festival held on the building of a monastery Ja i.94; Vv-a 188. hatthi˚; a festival called the elephant f. Ja iv.95.
fr.; mah, see mahati & cp. Vedic nt. mahas
to honour, revere Vv 4711 (pot. med. 1 pl. mahemase, cp Geiger, P.Gr. § 129; expld as “mahāmase pūjāmase at Vv-a 203). Caus. mahāyati in same sense: ger mahāyitvāna (poetical) Ja iv.236 ■ Pass. mahīyati Vv 621 (= pūjīyati Vv-a 258); 6422 (ppr. mahīyamāna pūjiyamāna Vv-a 282). pp. mahita.
mah; expld by Dhtp 331 as “pūjāyaṃ”
(nt.) greatness Ja v.331 (= seṭṭhatta C.); Vism 132, Vism 232 sq.; Vb-a 278 (Satthu˚, jāti˚, sabrahmacārī˚); DN-a i.35; Vv-a 191.
fr. mahat˚ cp. Sk. mahattva
(adj.) great, extensive, big important, venerable ■ nom. mahā Snp 1008; Mvu 22, Mvu 27. Shortened to maha in cpd. pitāmaha (following a-decl.) (paternal) grandfather Pv-a 41; & mātāmaha (maternal) grandfather (q.v.) ■ instr. mahatā Snp 1027-pl. nom. mahantā Snp 578 (opp. daharā) ■ loc mahati Mil 254 ■ f. mahī
1. one of the 5 great rivers (Np.).
2. the earth. See separately ■ nt mahantaṃ used as adv., meaning “very much, greatly Ja v.170; Dhp-a iv.232. Also in cpd. mahantabhāva greatness, loftiness, sublimity Dhs-a 44 ■ Compar mahantatara Dhp-a ii.63, and with dimin. suffix ˚ka Ja iii.237 ■ The regular paraphrase of mahā in the Niddesa is “agga, seṭṭha, visiṭṭha, pāmokkha, uttama pavara,” see Nd ii.502.
Note on mahā & cpds ■ A. In certain cpds. the comb;n with mahā (mah˚) has become so established & customary (often through politeness in using mahā for the simple term), that the cpd. is felt as an inseparable unity and a sort of “antique” word, in which the 2nd part either does not occur any more by itself or only very rarely, as mah’ aṇṇava, which is more freq. than aṇṇava; mah’ ābhisakka, where abhisakka does not occur by itself; cp. mahānubhāva, mahiddhika mahaggha; or is obscured in its derivation through constant use with mahā, like mahesī [mah + esī, or īsī] mahesakkha [mah + esakkha]; mahallaka [mah + *ariyaka]; mahāmatta. Cp. E. great-coat, Gr. ἀρξ˚ in ἀρξ ιατρός = Ger. arzt. Only a limited selection of cpd ■ words is given, consisting of more frequent or idiomatic terms. Practically any word may be enlarged & emphasized in meaning by prefixing; mahā. Sometimes a mahā˚ lends to special events a standard (historical) significance, so changing the common word into a noun proper, e.g. Mah-âbhinikkhammana, Mahāpavāraṇa-B. Mahā occurs in cpds. in (a) an elided form mah before a & i; (b) shortened to maha˚; before g, d p, b with doubling of these consonants; (c) in the regular form mahā˚;: usually before consonants, sometimes before vowels. This form is contracted with foll. i to e and foll. u to o. In the foll. list of cpds. we have arranged the material according to these bases.
mah˚:-aggha very costly, precious Pp 34; Mvu 27, Mvu 35; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 87; Sdhp 18. -agghatā costliness great value Pp 34, Sdhp 26. -aṇṇava the (great ocean Mvu 19, Mvu 17. -atthiya (for ˚atthika) of great importance or use, very useful, profitable Ja iii.368 -andhakāra deep darkness Vism 417. -assāsin fully refreshed, very comfortable SN i.81.
maha˚:-ggata “become great,” enlarged, extensive fig. lofty, very great MN i.263; MN ii.122; AN ii.63, AN ii.184 AN iii.18; Vv-a 155; Ja v.113; Dhs 1020 (trsln: “having a wider scope”) Vb 16, Vb 24, Vb 62, Vb 74, Vb 126, Vb 270, Vb 326; Tikp 45; Vism 410, Vism 430 sq. (˚ārammaṇa); Vb-a 154 (id.) 159 (˚citta); Dhs-a 44. See on term Cpd. 4, 12, 55 1014; [cp. BSk. mahadgata Divy 227]. -gghasa eating much, greedy, gluttonous AN iv.92; P iii.111 (= bahubhojana Pv-a 175); Mil 288; Dhp 325 (cp. Dhp-a iv.16) -ddhana having great riches (often combd with mahābhoga) Dhp 123; Ja iv.15, Ja iv.22. -pphala much fruit; adj bearing much fruit, rich in result AN iv.60, AN iv.237 sq. Snp 191, Snp 486; Dhp 312, Dhp 356 sq. -bbala (a) a strong force a great army Mvu 10, Mvu 68 (v.l., T. has mahā-bala) (b) of great strength, mighty, powerful Ja iii.114; Mvu 23, Mvu 92; Mvu 25, Mvu 9. -bbhaya great fear, terror SN i.37; Snp 753 Snp 1032, Snp 1092, ep. Nd ii.501.
mahā˚:-anas kitchen Mvu 5, Mvu 27 (spurious stanza) -anasa kitchen Ja ii.361; Ja iii.314; Ja v.368; Ja vi.349; Dhp-a iii.309; Thag-a 5. -anila a gale Mvu 3, Mvu 42. -ānisaṃsa deserving great praise (see s. v.), [cp. BSk. mahānuśaṃsa Mvu iii.221]. -ānubhāva majesty, adj. wonderful splendid Ja i.194; Ja vi.331; Pv iii.31; Pv-a 117, Pv-a 136 Pv-a 145, Pv-a 272. -aparādhika very guilty Ja i.114. -abhinikkhamaṇa the great renunciation Dhp-a i.85. -abhisakka [abhi + śak ] very powerful Thag 1111. -amacca chief minister Mvu 19, Mvu 12. -araha costly Mvu 3, Mvu 21 Mvu 5, Mvu 75; Mvu 27, Mvu 39; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 160.
mahā˚:-alasa great sloth Dhp-a iii.410. -avīci the great Purgatory Avīci, freq. -isi in poetry for mahesi at Ja v.321. -upaṭṭhāna great state room (of a king Snp-a 84. -upāsikā a great female follower (of the Buddha) Vv-a 5. -karuṇā great compassion Dhp-a i.106 Dhp-a i.367. -kāya a great body Mil 16. -gaṇa a great crowd or community Dhp-a i.154. -gaṇḍa a large tumour Vb-a 104. -gedha great greed Snp 819; Nd i.151. -cāga great liberality, adj. munificent Mvu 27 Mvu 47. As ˚paricāga at Snp-a 295 (= mahādāna). -jana a great crowd, collectively for “the people,” a multitude Pv-a 6, Pv-a 19, Pv-a 78; Mvu 3, Mvu 13. -taṇha (adj.) very thirsty Ja ii.441. -tala “great surface,” the large flat roof on the top of a palace (= upari-pāsāda-tala) Ja vi.40. -dāna (see under dāna) the great gift (to the bhikkhus) a special great offering of food & presents given by laymen to the Buddha & his followers as a meritorious deed usually lasting for a week or more Mvu 27, Mvu 46; Pv-a 111, Pv-a 112. -dhana (having) great wealth Pv-a 3, Pv-a 78 -naraka (a) great Hell, see naraka. -nāga a great elephant Dhp 312; Dhp-a iv.4. -nāma Name of a plant Vin i.185; Vin ii.267. -niddā deep sleep Pv-a 47 -nibbāna the great N. Dhp-a iv.110. -niraya (a) great hell Snp-a 309, Snp-a 480; Pv-a 52. See Niraya & cp. Kirfel; Kosmographie 199, 200. -nīla sapphire Vv-a 111 -pañña very wise DN iii.158; AN iii.244; Dhp 352; Dhp-a iv.71. -patha high road DN i.102; Snp 139; Dhp 58 Vism 235; Dhp-a i.445. -paduma a great lotus Ja v.39 also a vast number & hence a name of a purgatory, cp Divy 67; Kirfel, Kosmographie 205. -pitā grandfather Pv-a 107. -purisa a great man, a hero, a man born to greatness, a man destined by fate to be a Ruler or a Saviour of the World. A being thus favoured by fate possesses (32) marks (lakkhaṇāni) by which people recognise his vocation or prophesy his greatness. A detailed list of these 32 marks (which probably date back to mythological origin & were originally attributed to Devas) is found at DN ii.17, DN ii.19, passim ■ DN iii.287; Snp 1040 sq.; Dhp 352; Mil 10; Snp-a 184, Snp-a 187 sq., 223 258, 357, 384 sq.; ˚lakkhaṇāni: DN i.88, DN i.105, DN i.116; Snp 549, Snp 1000 sq.; Vism 234; Vv-a 315; Dhp-a ii.41. -bhūta usually in pl. ˚bhūta(ni) (cattāro & cattā) the 4 great elements (see bhūta), being paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo DN i.76; Nd i.266; Vb 13, Vb 70 sq.; Vism 366 sq.; Tikp 39, 56 sq., 74 sq., 248 sq.; Vb-a 42, Vb-a 169, Vb-a 253 ■ See Cpd. 154, 268 sq., & cp. dhātu 1.; -bhoga great wealth adj. wealthy Pv-a 3, Pv-a 78. -maccha a great fish, seamonster Ja i.483. -mati very wise, clever Mvu 14, Mvu 22 Mvu 19, Mvu 84 (f. ˚ī); 33, 100 (pl. ˚ī). -matta [cp. Sk. mahāmātra] a king’s chief minister, alias Prime Minister, “who was the highest Officer-of-State and real Head of the Executive” (Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India, 1916). His position is of such importance, that he even ranges as a rājā or king: Vin iii.47 (rājā… akkhadassā mahāmattā ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsanti ete rājāno nāma) ■ Note. An acc. sg mahā-mattānaṃ we find at AN i.154 (formed after the prec. rājānaṃ) ■ Vin i.74 (where two ranks are given senā-nāyakā m ■ mattā the m. of defence, and vohārikā m ■ m. those of law); DN i.7; DN iii.88; DN iii.64 (here with Ep. khattiya); AN i.154, AN i.252, AN i.279; AN iii.128; Vin iv.224 Vism 121; Vb-a 312 (in simile of two m.), 340; Pv-a 169. Cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 92, 99, 101. -muni great seer Snp 31. -megha a big cloud, thunder cloud MN ii.117; Snp 30; Vism 417. -yañña the great sacrifice DN i.138 sq., 141 (cp. AN ii.207≈). -yasa great fame Vv 216; Mhys 5, 22. -raṅga [cp. Sk. m ■ rajana] safflower, used for dyeing Vin i.185 (sandals); ii.267 (cloaks). -rājā great king, king, very freq.: see rājā-rukkha a great tree Vism 413 (literally); Mil 254 (id.) otherwise the plant euphorbia tortilis (cp. Zimmer Altind. Leben 129). -lātā (-pasādhana) a lady’s parure called “great creeper” Dhp-a i.392; Vv-a 165 (-pilandhana); same Snp-a 520. -vātapāna main window Dhp-a iv.203. -vīṇā a great lute Vism 354; Vb-a 58. -vīra (great) hero Snp 543, Snp 562. -satta “the great being or a Bodhisatta Vv-a 137 (v.l. SS. bodhisatta). [Cp BSk. mahāsattva, e.g. Jtm 32]. -samudda the sea the occean Mvu 19, Mvu 18; Vism 403; Snp-a 30, Snp-a 371; Pv-a 47. -sara a great lake; usually as satta-mahāsarā the 7 great lakes of the Himavant (see sara), enumd e.g. at Vism 416. -sāra (of) great sap, i.e. great wealth adj. very rich Ja i.463 (˚kula, perhaps to be read mahāsāla-kula). -sāla (adj.) having great halls, Ep. of rich people (especially brāhmaṇas) DN i.136, DN i.235; DN iii.16, DN iii.20; Ja ii.272 (˚kula); iv.237 (id.), 325 (id.); v.227 (id.) Pp 56; Vb-a 519; Dhp-a iii.193. -sāvaka [cp. BSk mahāśrāvaka Divy 489] a great disciple Vism 98 (asīti ˚ā); Dhp-a ii.93. -senagutta title of a high official (Chancellor of the Exchequer?) Ja v.115; Ja vi.2. -hatthi a large elephant MN i.184 (˚pada elephant’s foot, as the largest of all animal feet), referred to as simile (˚opama at Vism 243, Vism 347, Vism 348.
mahi˚; [mah’ i˚]: -iccha full of desire, lustful, greedy AN iv.229; Thag 898; Iti 91; Ja i.8; Ja ii.441. -icchatā arrogance, ostentatiousness AN iv.280; Vb-a 472 -iddhika [mahā + iddhi + ka] of great power, always combd with mah-ānubhāva to denote great influence high position & majesty Vin i.31; Vin ii.193; Vin iii.101; DN i.78, DN i.180 (devatā), 213; SN i.145 sq.; SN ii.155, SN ii.274 sq. 284 sq.; iv.323; v.265, 271 sq., 288 sq.; AN v.129; Ja vi.483 (said of the Ocean); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 136, Pv-a 145. -inda (ghosa) lit. the roar of the Great Indra, Indra here to be taken in his function as sky (rain) god, thus: the thunder of the rain-god Thag 1108. [Cp. BSk. māhendra in ˚bhavana “the abode of the Great Indra,” and vaṛṣa “the rain of the Gr. I.” (here as rain-god), both at Avs i.210]. -issāsa [Sk. maheṣvāsa] great in the art of the bow, a great archer SN i.185; Dhp-a i.358.
mahe˚; [mahā + i]: -esakkha [mahā + īsa + khyaṃ fr. īś ] possessing great power or authority AN ii.204 AN iii.244; Nd ii.5032; Vism 419; Sdhp 511. The BSk form is maheṣākhya evidently differing in its etymology The P. etym. rests on the same grounds as esitatta in mahesi Dhp-a iv.232. -esi [mahā + isi; Sk. maharṣi] a great Sage AN ii.26; Snp 208, Snp 481, Snp 646, Snp 915, Snp 1057, Snp 1061 Thag 1132; Thag 2, Thag 149; Dhp 422 (expld at Dhp-a iv.232 as “mahantaṃ sīla-kkhandh’ ādīnaṃ esitattā m.” cp. the similar expln at Nd ii.503); Nd i.343; Vism 505; Vb-a 110; Pv-a 1. -esiyā = mahesī Ja vi.483. -esī [in P. to be taken as mah + iś, as f. to īsa, but in Sk. (Vedic) as f. of mahiṣa, buffalo] chief queen, king’s first wife, king’s consort; also the wife of a great personage Ja ii.410 Ja v.45; Ja vi.425; Pp 56; Mvu 2, Mvu 22 (pl. mahesiyo) Vv-a 184 (sixteen). Usually as agga-mahesī, e.g. Ja i.262; Ja iii.187, Ja iii.393; Ja v.88. -esitta state of chief consort, queenship Ja v.443; Pv ii.1310; Thag-a 37; Vv-a 102. -eseyya = ˚esitta Ja v.91.
-maho [mahā + u, or + o]: -ogha the great flood (see ogha) Snp 4, Snp 945; Dhp 47, Dhp 287; Dhp-a iii.433. -odadhi the (great) ocean, the sea Snp 720, Snp 1134; Mil 224; Mvu 18, Mvu 8. -odara big belly Ja vi.358 (addressing a king’s minister). -odika full of water, having much water deep, full (of a river) Snp 319; Ja ii.159; Mil 346 -oraga [m + uraga] a great snake Ja v.165.
Vedic mahant, which by Grassmann is taken as ppr. to mah, but in all probability the n is an original suffix ■ cp. Av. mazant, Sk. compar. mahīyān Gr. μέγας (compar. μείζων), Lat. magnus, Goth mikils = Ohg. mihhil = E. much
(f.) greatness Dhp-a ii.62. At MN iii.24 the spelling is mahattatā (tt misread for nt?) at MN i.184 however mahantatta (nt.).
fr. mahant˚
(adj. n.) old, venerable, of great age an old man DN i.90 (opp. taruṇa), 94, 114, 247; Snp 313, Snp 603; Nd ii.261 (vuḍḍha m. andhagata etc. Ja iv.482 (opp. dahara young); Vv 461 (= mahanto Vv-a 199); Dhp-a i.7, Dhp-a i.278; Dhp-a ii.4, Dhp-a ii.55, Dhp-a ii.91; Snp-a 313. Compar mahallakatara Dhp-a ii.18 ■ f. mahallikā an old woman Mil 16; Mvu 21, Mvu 27; Vv-a 105; Pv-a 149 (= addhagata) ■ [The BSk. form is mahalla, e.g. Divy 329, Divy 520.]
a distorted mah-ariyaka → ayyaka → allaka; cp. ayyaka
(f.) fog, frost, cold (= himaṃ Dhs-a 317) Vin ii.295 = Mil 273; Snp 669; Mil 299; Vv-a 134 (fog) ■ As mahiyā at AN ii.53.
cp. *Sk. mahikā
honoured, revered MN ii.110; Mil 278; Sdhp 276.
pp. of mahati or mahīyati
(adj.) praiseworthy Vv-a 97.
grd. of mahati
(f.) woman, female Vin ii.281 (˚titthe at the women’s bathing place); Ja i.188; Dpvs ix.4 Thag-a 271. Mahisa, Mahisa, Mahimsa
*Sk. mahilā
a buffalo- mahisa: DN i.6 (˚yuddha b ■ fight), 9; Ja iii.26 (vana wild b.); Mvu 25, Mvu 36 (T. māhisaṃ) ■ mahīsa Ja vi.110- mahiṃsa Vism 191, & in Np.; mahiṃsaka-maṇḍala the Andhra country Ja i.356, cp. Mahiṃsaka-raṭṭha Vb-a 4; as Mahisa-maṇḍala at Mvu 12, Mvu 29 ■ Note. The P. pop. etym. is propounded by Bdhgh as “mahiyaṃ setī ti mahiso” (he lies on the ground, that is why he is a buffalo) Dhs-a 62.
cp. Vedic mahiṣa, an enlarged form of mahā; the P. etym. evidently to be connected with mahā + īś, because of mahīsa → mahiṃsa
(f.) the earth (lit. Great One) Mvu 5, Mvu 266; Sdhp 424, Sdhp 472; loc mahiyā Mil 128; mahiyaṃ Dhs-a 62 ■ Note. As mahī is only found in very late P. literature, it must have been re-introduced from Sk. sources, and is note a direct correspondent of Vedic mahī.
-tala the ground (of the earth) Mvu 5, Mvu 54. -dhara mountain Mil 343; Mvu 14, Mvu 3; Mvu 28, Mvu 22 (v.l. mahin˚) -pa king (of the earth) Mvu 14, Mvu 22. -pati king Mvu 5 Mvu 48; Mvu 33, Mvu 32. -pāla king Mvu 4, Mvu 38; Mvu 5, Mvu 265. -ruha tree (“growing out of the earth”) Mvu 14, Mvu 18, Mvu 18, Mvu 19.
f. of mah, base of mahant, Vedic mahī
(indecl.) prohibition particle: not, do not, let us hope not, I wish that… not [cp Lat. utinam & ne]. Constructed with various tenses e.g. 1. with; aor. (prohibitive tense): mā evaṃ akattha do not thus Dhp-a i.7; mā abhaṇi speak not Pv i.33; mā cintayittha do not worry Dhp-a i.12; mā parihāyi I hope he will not go short (or be deprived) of… MN i.444 mā bhāyi fear not Ja ii.159; mā mariṃsu I hope they will not die Ja iii.55; mā (te) rucci may it not please (you), i.e. please do not Vin ii.198; mā evaṃ ruccittha id. Dhp-a i.13.
2. with imper.: mā gaccha Ja i.152 mā detha Ja iii.275. mā ghāta do not kill: see māghāta
3. with pot.: mā anuyuñjetha Dhp 27; mā bhuñjetha let him not eat Mvu 25, Mvu 113; mā vadetha Ja vi.364. 4. with indic. pres.: mā paṭilabhati AN v.194 ■ A peculiar use is found in phrase ānemi mā ānemi shall I bring it or not? Ja vi.334.
5. mā = na (simple negation in māsakkhimhā we could not Vin iii.23. -Ma
cp. Vedic mā, Gr. μή
see puṇṇa-mā.
the short form of māsa, direct dern fr. mā: see mināti
scent-seller, (lit. “from Magadha”) Pv ii.937 (= gandhin Pv-a 127).
fr. Magadha
(nt.) garlic Vin iv.259 (lasuṇaṃ nāma māgadhakaṃ vuccati).
māgadha + ka, lit. “from Magadha”
a deerstalker, huntsman AN ii.207; Pp 56; Mil 364, Mil 412; Pv-a 207.
guṇa-form to *mṛga = P. miga; Sk. mārgavika
(nt.) the injunction not to kill, non-killing order (with ref. to the killing of animals Ja iii.428 (˚bheri, the drum announcing this order); iv.115; vi.346 (uposatha˚).
lit. mā ghāta “kill not”
(adj.) auspicious, fortunate, bringing about fulfilment of wishes Ja vi.179.
fr. mangala
a youth, young man, esp. a young Brahmin Snp 1022, Snp 1027, Snp 1028; Ja iv.391 (brāhmaṇa˚); DN-a i.36 = satto pi coro pi taruṇo pi; Dhp-a i.89 pl. māṇavā men Thig 112 ■ The spelling mānava occurs at Snp 456, Snp 589, & Pv i.87 (= men Th ii.112; kumāra Pv-a 41).
cp. Sk. māṇava
a young man, youth a Brahmin Mil 101; in general: young, e.g. nāga˚; a young serpent Ja iii.276; f. ˚ikā a Brahmin girl Ja i.290; Mil 101 nāga˚; a young female serpent Ja iii.275; Dhp-a iii.232.
fr. māṇava
an elephant Dhp 329, Dhp 330 (here as Ep. of nāga); Ja iii.389; Ja vi.47; Vv 439; Mil 368.
2. a man of a low class [cp. BSk mātangī Divy 397] Snp-a 185 sq. (as Np.).
cp. Epic Sk. mātanga, dial.
(f.) mother ■ Cases: nom. sg mātā Snp 296; Dhp 43; Ja iv.463; Ja v.83; Ja vi.117; Nd ii.504 (def. as janikā); gen. mātu Thag 473; Vin i.17; Ja i.52 mātuyā Ja i.53; Mvu 10, Mvu 80; Pv-a 31; and mātāya Ja i.62; dat. mātu Mvu 9, Mvu 19; acc. mātaraṃ Snp 60, Snp 124; Dhp 294; instr. mātarā Thig 212; loc. mātari Dhp 284-pl. does not occur. In combn with pitā father, mātā always precedes the former, thus mātā-pitaro (pl. “mother & father” (see below) ■ mātito (abl ■ adv. from the mother’s side (cp. pitito) DN i.113; AN iii.151; Pv-a 29 ■ On mātā in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122 cp. Vism 321 (simile of a mother’s solicitude for her children). Similarly the pop. etym. of mātā is given with “mamāyatī ti mātā” at Vb-a 107 ■ The 4 bases of m. in compn are: mātā˚, māti˚, mātu˚, matti˚;.
1. mātā˚:- pitaro mother & father DN iii.66 DN iii.188 sq.; Snp 404; Mil 12. See also pitā ■ pitika having mother & father Dhp-a ii.2. -pitiṭṭhāna place of m. & f. Dhp-a ii.95. -pettika having m. & f., of m. f. Nd;2 385 (nāma-gotta). -petti-bhāra supporting one’s m. & f. SN i.228; Ja i.202; Ja vi.498. -maha maternal grandfather Ja iv.146; Dhp-a i.346.
2. māti˚:-devatā protector or guardian of one’s mother Ja iii.422 (gloss mātu-devatā viya). -pakkha the mother’s side Dhp-a i.4 (+ pitipakkha). -posaka supporting one’s m Ja iii.422 (v.l. mātu˚).
3. mātu˚:-upaṭṭhāna (spelt mātupaṭṭh˚) reverence towards one’s m. Dhp-a iv.14 -kucchi m’s womb DN ii.12; Vism 560 (˚gata); Vb-a 96; Dhp-a i.127. -gāma “genex feminarum,” womanfolk women (collectively cp. Ger, frauen-zimmer) AN ii.126; Vin iv.175; MN i.448, MN i.462; MN iii.126; SN iv.239 sq. Ja i.201; Ja iii.90, Ja iii.530. (pl. ˚gāmā p. 531); Pp 68; Snp-a 355; Pv-a 271; Vv-a 77. -ghāta & (usually); ˚ka a matricide (+ pitu- ghātaka; see abhiṭhāna) Vin i.168, Vin i.320; Mil 310; Tikp 167 sq.; Vb-a 425. -ghātikamma matricide Tikp. 281. -bhūta having been his mother Pv-a 78 -mattin (see matta1 4) whatever is a mother SN iv.110 (˚īsu mātucittaṃ upaṭṭhapeti foster the thought of mother towards whatever is a mother, where in sequence with bhaginī-mattin & dhītumattin).; -hadaya a mother’s heart Pv-a 63.
4. matti˚;: see matti-sambhava. -Matika
Vedic mātā, stem mātar˚, Av. mātar-, Gr. μήτηρ (Doric μάτηρ) Lat. māter, Oir. māthir, Ohg muoter, Ags. modor = mother; Cp. further Gr. μήτρα uterus, Lat. mātrix id., Sk. mātṛkā mother, grandmother Ger. mieder corset. From Idg. *ma, onomat part., cp. “mamma”
(adj.) -mother; in mata˚; one whose mother is dead, lit. a “dead-mother-ed, Ja ii.131; Ja iii.213. Also neg. amātika without a mother Ja v.251.
fr. mātā, Sk. mātṛka
(f.) 1. a water course Vism 554 (˚âtikkamaka); Mvu 35, Mvu 96; Mvu 37, Mvu 50; Snp-a 500 (= sobbha); Dhp-a ii.141 (its purpose: “ito c’ ito ca udakaṃ haritvā attano sassa-kammaṃ sampādenti”); Vv-a 301–2. tabulation, register, tabulated summary, condensed contents, esp. of philosophical parts of the Canonical books in the Abhidhamma; used in Vinaya in place of Abhidhamma Piṭaka; probably the original form of that (later) Piṭaka Vin i.119, Vin i.337; Vin ii.8 [cp semantically in similar sense Lat. mātrix = E. matric i.e. register. In BSḳ. mātrikā Divy 18, Divy 333] AN i.117 (Dhamma-dhara, Vinaya-dhara, Mātikā-dhara; here equivalent to Abhidhamma); Vism 312 (so pañcavasso hutvā dve mātikā paguṇaṃ katvā pavāretvā) Snp-a 15; Kp-a 37, Kp-a 99, Kp-a 117.
-nikkhepa putting down of a summary, tabulation Vism 536, Vism 540. The summary itself is sometimes called nikkhepa, e.g. the 4th part of the Atthasālinī (Dhs-a pp.343
409) is called nikkhepa-kaṇḍa or chapter of the summary; similarly m ■ nikkhepa vāra at Tikp. 11.
*Sk. mātṛkā
(adj. n.) (a) mortal Ja vi.100 (C. macca; gloss māṇava).
the diaeretic form of macca, used in verse, cp. Sk. martya & Vedic (poetical) martia
see mātā.
(nt.) “genetrix,” matrix, origin, cause Thag 612.
cp. Sk. māṭṛka, fr. mātṛ = mātar
(f.) mother’s sister, maternal aunt Vin ii.254, Vin ii.256; Ja iv.390; Mil 240. -putta aunt’s son, male first cousin (from mother’s sister’s side SN ii.281; Ud 24; Dhp-a i.119. Cp. mātula-dhītā.
Sk. mātṛ-ṣvasā
a mother’s brother an uncle Ja i.225; Dhp-a i.15; Pv-a 58, Pv-a 60.
-dhītā (the complement of mātucchā-putta) uncle’s daughter, female first cousin (from mother’s brother’s side) Ja ii.119; Dhp-a iii.290; Pv-a 55.
cp. Epic Sk. mātula & semantically Lat. matruus, i.e. one who belongs to the mother
= mātula Dhp-a i.182.
(f.) a mother’s brother’s wife, an aunt Ja i.387; Ja iv.184; Pv-a 55, Pv-a 58.
Sk. mātulānī, semantically cp. Lat. mater tera
(nt.) a citron Ja iii.319 (= mella; v.l. bella).
cp. Class. Sk. mātulunga; dialectical?
(adj.) one like me Snp 482; Mvu 5, Mvu 193; Vv-a 207; Dhp-a i.284; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 123.
Epic & Class. Sk. mādṛś & mādṛśa, maṃ + ; dṛś
1. pride, conceit, arrogance (cittassa uṇṇati Nd i.80; Vb 350). Māna is one of the Saññojanas It is one of the principal obstacles to Arahantship A detailed analysis of māna in tenfold aspect is given at Nd i.80 = Nd ii.505; ending with defn “māno maññanā… ketukamyatā” etc. (cp. Vb 350 & see under; mada ). On term see also Dhs § 1116; Dhs trsl. 298 (= 2275) sq ■ DN iii.234; SN i.4; Snp 132, Snp 370; Snp 469 Snp 537, Snp 786, Snp 889, Snp 943, Dhp 74, Dhp 150, Dhp 407; Nd i.298; Pp 18 Vb 345 sq., 353 sq., 383 (7 fold), 389 (9 fold); Vb-a 486 sq. (“seyyo ‘ham asmī ti” etc.); Tikp 166, 278; Dhp-a iii.118, Dhp-a iii.252; Sdhp 500, Sdhp 539 ■ asmi˚; pride of self as real egoism DN iii.273.
2. honour, respect Ja v.331 (+ pūjā). Usually in cpd. bahumāna great respect Mvu 20, Mvu 46; Pv-a 50. Also as māni˚; in compn with karoti: see mānikata. Cp. vi˚, sam˚
-ātimāna pride & conceit, very great (self-) pride or all kinds of conceit (see 10 fold māna at Nd;1 80 Nd ii.505) DN iii.86; Snp 245, Snp 830, Snp 862; Nd i.170, Nd i.257 -atthe at Thag 214 read mânatthe = mā anatthe -ānusaya the predisposition or bad tendency of pride MN i.486; DN iii.254, DN iii.282; Snp 342. Cp. mamankāra -ābhisamaya full grasp (i.e. understanding) of pride (with sammā˚) MN i.122 (which Kern. Toev. s. v. interprets wrongly as “waanvoorstelling”); SN iv.205 sq. 399; Snp 342 (= mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaṃ Snp-a 344). -jātika proud by nature Ja i.88 -thaddha stubborn in pride, stiff-necked Ja i.88, Ja i.224 -da inspiring respect Mvu 33, Mvu 82. -mada (-matta (drunk with) the intoxicating draught of pride Ja ii.259; Pv-a 86. -saññojana the fetter of pride or arrogance DN iii.254; Dhs 1116 = Dhs 1233. See under saññojana cp. formulae under; mada 2. -satta cleaving to conceit Snp 473. -salla the sting or dart of pride Nd i.59 (one of the 7 sallāni, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc., expld in detail on p. 413. See other series with similar terms & māna at Nd;2 p. 237 s. v. rāga).
late Vedic & Epic Sk. māna, fr.; man, orig. meaning perhaps “high opinions” (i.e. No. 2); hence “pride (No. 1). Def. of root see partly under māneti, partly under mināti
(nt.) 1. measure Vin iii.149 (abbhantarima inner, bāhirima outer); DN-a i.140. -˚kūṭa cheating in measure, false measure Pp 58; Pv-a 278.
2. a certain measure, a Māna (cp. mānikā & manaṃ) Ja i.468 (aḍḍha˚ half a M. according to C. equal to 8 nāḷis).
fr. mā: see mināti; Vedic māna has 2 meanings, viz. “measure,” and “building” (cp. māpeti)
(nt.) a sort of penance, attached to the commission of a sanghādisesa offence Dhs-a 399 (+ parivāsa). ˚ṃ deti to inflict penance on somebody Vin ii.7 (+ parivāsaṃ deti); iv.225. mānatt’ āraha deserving penance Vin ii.55, Vin ii.162 (parivāsika + ). See on term Vin. Texts ii.397.
a doubtful word, prob. corrupted out of something else, maybe omānatta, if taken as der. fr māna1. If however taken as belonging to māna2 as an abstr. der., it might be expld as “measuring, taking measures,” which suits the context better. The BSk form is still more puzzling, viz. mānāpya “something pleasant”: Mpt § 265
(nt.) & Mānanā (f.) paying honour or respect; reverence, respect SN i.66; Ja ii.138; Pp 19, Pp 22; Mil 377 (with sakkāra, vandana, pūjana & apaciti) Dhs 1121; Dhs-a 373 ■ Cp. vi˚, sam˚.
fr. māna1
(nt.) intention purpose, mind (as active force), mental action. Almost equivalent to mano Dhs § 6. In later language mānasa is quite synonymous with hadaya. The word, used absolutely, is more a t. t. in philosophy than a living part of the language. It is more frequent as-˚ in adj use, where its connection with mano is still more felt Its absolute use probably originated from the latter use ■ Dhs-a 140 (= mano); Vb 144 sq. (in definition of viññāṇa as cittaṃ, mano, mānasaṃ, hadayaṃ etc. see mano ii.3); Dhp-a ii.12 (paradāre mānasaṃ na bandhissāmi “shall have no intention towards another’s wife,” i.e. shall not desire another’s wife); Mvu 4, Mvu 6 (sabbesaṃ hita-mānasā with the intention of common welfare); 32, 56 (rañño hāsesi mānasaṃ gladdened the heart of the king) ■ As adj. (-˚): being of such & such a mind, having a… mind, with a… heart; like ādīna˚; with his mind in danger SN v.74 (+ apatiṭṭhitacitta); uggata˚; lofty-minded Vv-a 217; pasanna˚; with settled (peaceful) mind Snp 402 and frequently; mūḷha˚ infatuated Mvu 5, Mvu 239; rata˚; Pv-a 19; sañcodita˚; urged (in her heart) Pv-a 68; soka-santatta˚; with a heart burning with grief Pv-a 38.
a secondary formation fr. manas = mano, already Vedic lit. “belonging to mind”
(adj.) = mānasa in adj. use Snp 63 (rakkhita˚).
fr. mānasa, secondary formation
(adj. n.) [prob. fr. manassin (*manasvin) under influence of māna. Cp. similar formation mānavant proud Vin ii.183 (expld by Bdhgh in a popular way as “mana-ssayino māna-nissitā”). The corresponding passage at Ja i.88 reads māna-jātikā māna-tthaddhā.
lit. “held in high opinion,” i.e. honoured, worshipped SN ii.119 (garukata m. pūjita).
pp. of a verb māni-karoti, which stands for māna-karoti, and is substituted for mānita after analogy of purakkhata, of same meaning
(f.) a weight, equal to 4 Doṇas Snp-a 476 (catudoṇaṃ mānikā). Cp. BSk. mānikā, e.g. Divy 293 sq.
cp. māna2 2
revered, honoured Ud 73 (sakkata m. pūjita apacita) ■ A rather singular by-form is mānikata (q.v.).
pp. of māneti
(adj.) (-˚) proud (of) Snp 282 (samaṇa˚), 889 (paripuṇṇa˚); Dhp 63 (paṇḍita˚ proud of his cleverness cp. Dhp-a ii.30); Ja i.454 (atireka˚); iii.357 (paṇḍita˚); Sdhp 389, Sdhp 417 ■ f. māninī Mvu 20, Mvu 4 (rūpa˚ proud of her beauty).
fr. mana1
(adj. n.) 1. (adj.) human Snp 301 (bhoga); Iti 94 (kāmā dibbā ca mānusā); Pv ii.921 (m. deha); 956 (id.)- amānusa divine Vv 356; Pv ii.1220; ghostly (= superhuman) Pv iv.36; f. amānusī Pv iii.7.9
2. (n. m.) a human being, a man Mvu 15, Mvu 64; f. mānusī a (human woman Ja iv.231; Pv ii.41 ■ amānusa a superhuman being Pv iv.157 ■ pl. mānusā men Snp 361, Snp 644; Pv ii.117. As nt. in collective sense = mankind Pv ii.113 (v.l. mānussaṃ; C. = manussaloka). Manusaka = manusa
cp. Vedic mānuṣa; fr. same base (manus) as manussa
, viz. 1. (adj.) human: AN i.213 (sukhaṃ); Snp 524 (brahma-khettaṃ); Dhp 417 (yogaṃ m. kāyaṃ Dhp-a iv.225); Vv 356; Ja i.138 (kāmā) ■ f manusikā Vism 407.
2. a human being, man Pv iv.157. Also nt. (collectively) pl. mānusakāni human beings, men Dhp-a i.233.
to honour revere, think highly of Pv-a 54 (aor. mānesuṃ, + garukariṃsu + pūjesuṃ) ■ pp. mānita.
Caus. of man, cp. Sk. mānayati, Lat. moneo to admonish. Ger. mahnen, Ags. manian. The Dhtp 593 gives root as mān in meaning “pūjā”
(-˚) (adj. n.) one who measures, only in doṇa˚; (a minister) measuring the d. revenue (of rice Ja ii.367, Ja ii.381; Dhp-a iv.88; and in dhañña˚; measuring corn or grain Ja iii.542 (˚kamma, the process of… ) Vism 278 (in comparison).
fr. māpeti
1. to build, construct SN ii.106 (nagaraṃ); Mvu 6, Mvu 35 (id.); Vv 8453; Vv-a 260.
2. to create, bring about make or cause to appear by supernatural power (in folkoristic literature, cp. nimmināti in same sense Ja ii.111 (sarīraṃ nāvaṃ katvā māpesi transformed into a ship); iv.274; Mvu 28, Mvu 31 (maggaṃ caused a road to appear).
3. to measure out (?), to declare (?), in a doubtful passage Ja iv.302, where a misreading is probable as indicated by v.l. BB (samāpassiṃsu for T tena amāpayiṃsu). Perhaps we should read tena-māsayiṃsu.
Caus. of mā, see mināti. The simplex mimīte has the meaning of “erect, build” already in Vedic Sk.
(adj.) lit. “mine,” one who shows affection (not only for himself), making one’s own, i.e devoted to, loving Snp 806 (= Buddha˚, Dhamma˚ Sangha˚ Nd i.125; = mamāyamāna Snp-a 534), 927 (same expln at Nd i.382); Mil 184 (ahiṃsayaṃ paraṃ loke piyo hohisi māmako ti),- Buddha˚; devoted to the B. Ja i.299; Dhp-a i.206. f. ˚māmikā Ja iii.182. In voc. f. māmike at Thig 207 (cp. Thag-a 172) “mother, we may perhaps have an allusion to mā “mother [cp. Sk. māma uncle, Lat. mamma mother, and mātā]-amāmaka see sep.; this may also be taken as “not loving.”
fr. mama
(f.) 1. deceptive appearance fraud, deceit, hypocrisy Snp 245, Snp 328 (˚kata deceit), 469, 537, 786, 941 (: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā Nd i.422); Vb 357, Vb 361, Vb 389; Mil 289; Vism 106 (+ sātheyya, māna, pāpicchatā etc.), 479 (māyā viya viññāṇaṃ); Vb-a 34 (in detail), 85, 493 (def.). Is not used in Pali Abhidhamma in a philosophical sense. 2. mystic formula, magic, trick MN i.381 (āvaṭṭanī m.) khattiya˚; the mystic formula of a kh. Ja vi.375; Mil 190; Dhp-a i.166. In the sense of “illusion” often combd with marīci, e.g. at Ja ii.330; Ja v.367; Nd ii.680a ii
3. jugglery, conjuring Mil 3 ■ On māyā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122; on term in general Dhs trsl.2 255 (“ilḷusion”); Expos. 333, 468n ■ As adj. in amāya (q.v. & in; bahu-māye rich in deceit Snp-a 351 ■ Note. In the word maṃ at Kp-a 123 (in pop. etym. of man-gala) the ed. of the text sees an acc. of mā which he takes to be a contracted form of māyā (= iddhi).
-kāra a conjurer, magician SN iii.142; Vism 366 (in comparison); Vb-a 196.
cp. Vedic māyā. Suggestions as to etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. manticulor
(adj.) deceitful, hypocritical DN iii.45, DN iii.246; Snp 89, Snp 116, Snp 357; Pp 19 Pp 23; Pv-a 13. See also amāyāvin.
fr. māyā, cp. Vedic māyāvin
bile, gall Abhp 281.
*Sk. māyu
death; usually personified as Np. Death, the Evil one, the Tempter (the Buddhist Devil or Principle of Destruction) Sometimes the term māra is applied to the whole of the worldly existence, or the realm of rebirth, as opposed to Nibbāna. Thus the defn of m. at Nd ii.506 gives “kammâbhisankhāra-vasena paṭisandhiko khandha- māro, dhātu˚, āyatana˚ ■ Other general epithets of M (quasi twin-embodiments) are given with Kaṇha Adhipati, Antaka, Namuci, Pamattabandhu at Nd i.489 = Nd ii.507; the two last ones also at Nd i.455. The usual standing epithet is pāpimā “the evil one,” e.g. SN i.103 sq. (the famous Māra-Saṃyutta: see Windisch Māra & Buddha;); Nd i.439; Dhp-a iv.71 (Māravatthu & freq ■ See e.g. Snp 32, Snp 422, Snp 429 sq., 1095, 1103; Dhp 7, Dhp 40, Dhp 46, Dhp 57, Dhp 105, Dhp 175, Dhp 274; Nd i.475; Vism 79, Vism 228 Vism 376; Kp-a 105; Snp-a 37, Snp-a 44 sq., 225, 350 sq., 386 sq. Sdhp 318, Sdhp 449, Sdhp 609. Further refs. & details see under Proper Names.;
-ābhibhū overcoming M. or death Snp 545 = Snp 571 -kāyika a class of gods Mil 285; KvuA 54. -dhītaro the daughters of M. Snp-a 544. -dheyya being under the sway of M.; the realm or kingdom of Māra AN iv.228; Snp 764; Dhp 34 (= kilesa-vaṭṭa Dhp-a i.289). -bandhana the fetter of death Dhp 37, Dhp 276, Dhp 350 (= tebhūmaka-vaṭṭasankhātaṃ Dhp-a iv.69). -senā the army of M. Snp 561 Snp 563; Snp-a 528.
fr. mṛ; later Vedic, māra killing, destroying, bringing death, pestilence, cp. Lat. mors death, morbus illness, Lith. māras death, pestilence
(-˚) one who kills or destroys, as manussa˚; man-killer Ja ii.182; hatthi˚; elephant-killer Dhp-a i.80 ■ m. in phrase samāraka (where the-ka belongs to the whole cpd.) see under samāraka.
fr. māreti
(nt.) killing, slaughter, death DN ii.128; Sdhp 295, Sdhp 569.
fr. Caus. māreti
(nt.) state of, or existence as a Māra god, Māraship Vb 337.
*Māra-tvaṃ
killed Ja ii.417; Ja iii.531.
pp. of mārāpeti
(nt.) being incited to kill Dhp-a i.141.
abstr. fr. mārāpita
: see marati ■ pp. mārāpita.
Caus. II. of mṛ;
killed SN i.66; Vin iii.72; Ja ii.417 (aññehi m ■ bhāvaṃ jānātha).
pp. of māreti
(adj.) only in voc. as respectful term of address, something like “Sir,” pl “Sirs.” In sg. mārisa MN i.327; AN iii.332; Snp 814, Snp 1036 Snp 1038, Snp 1045 etc.; Nd i.140 = Nd ii.508 (here expld by same formula as āyasmā, viz. piya-vacanaṃ garu-vacanaṃ etc.); Ja v.140; Pv ii.133; Mvu 1, Mvu 27 ■ pl. mārisā Snp 682; Ja i.47, Ja i.49; Vism 415; Pv-a 75. Explained by Buddhaghosa to mean niddukkha K.S. i.2 n.
perhaps identical with mādisa
the wind SN i.127; Mhbv 8.
for the usual māluta
one who kills, slayer, destroyer SN iii.189.
n. ag. to māreti
to kill: see under marati ■ pp. mārita. Mala (mala)
Caus. of mṛ;
1. mud [is it mis-spelling of mala?], in pakka-m˚-kalala (boiling mud) Ja vi.400. Kern, Toev. s. v. believes to see the same word in phrase mālā-kacavara at Ja ii.416 (but very doubtful).
2. perhaps froth, dirty surface, in pheṇa˚; Mil 117 (cp. mālin 2) where it may however be māla (“wreaths of foam”). 3. in asi˚; the interpretation given under asi (as “dirt see above p. 88) has been changed into “sword-garland, thus taking it as mālā. Malaka (Malaka)
?
a circular (consecrated) enclosure, round, yard (cp. Geiger, Mvu. trsl. 99: “m. is a space marked off and usually terraced within which sacred functions were carried out. In the Mahāvihāra (Tiss’ ārāma) at Anurādhapura there were 32 mālakas; Dpvs xiv.78; Mvu 15, Mvu 192. The sacred Bodhi-tree e.g. was surrounded by a malaka”)-The word is peculiar to the late (Jātaka-) literature & is not found in the older texts ■ Ja i.449 (vikkama˚) iv.306; v.49 (visāla˚), 138 (id., spelling maḷaka) Mvu 15, Mvu 36 (Mahā-mucala˚); 16, 15; 32, 58 (sanghassa kamma˚, encl. for ceremonial acts of the S., cp. 15, 29) Dhp-a iv.115 (˚sīmā); Vism 342 (vitakka˚).
fr. māla or māḷa
(f.) the great-flowered jasmine Abhp 576. Cp. mālikā.
fr. mālā
(f.) garland, wreath, chaplet; collectively = flowers; fig. row, line Snp 401; Pp 56 Vism 265 (in simile); Pv ii.316 (gandha, m., vilepana as a “lady’s” toilet outfit); ii.49 (as one of the 8 or 10 standard gifts to a bhikkhu: see dāna, deyyadhamma & yañña); Pv-a 4 = Ja iii.59 (ratta- kaṇavera˚ a wreath of red K. flowers on his head: apparel of a criminal to be executed. Cp. ratta-māla-dhara wearing a red garland Ja iii.179, an ensign of the executioner); Pv-a 51 Pv-a 62 ■ asi ˚-kamma the sword-garland torture (so correct under asi!) Ja iii.178; Dāvs iii.35; dīpa˚; festoons of lamps Mvu 5, Mvu 181; Mvu 34, Mvu 77 (˚samujjota); nakkhatta˚; the garland of stars Vv-a 167; puppha˚; a garland or wreath of flowers Mvu 5, Mvu 181 ■ On mālā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123. In compn māla˚; sometimes stands for mālā˚.
-kamma garland-work, garlands, festoons Vv-a 188 -kāra garland-maker, florist, gardener (cp. Fick, Sociale Gleiderung 38, 182) Ja v.292; Mil 331; Dhp-a i.208, Dhp-a i.334; Vv-a 170, Vv-a 253 (˚vīthi). -kita adorned with garlands wreathed Vin i.208. -guṇa “garland-string,” garlands a cluster of garlands Dhp 53 (= mālā-nikaṭi “makeup” garlands Dhp-a i.419; i.e. a whole line of garlands made as “ekato-vaṇṭika-mālā” and “ubhato-v ■ m., one & two stalked g., cp. Vin iii.180). mālā guṇaparikkhittā one adorned with a string of gs., i.e. a marriageable woman or a courtesan MN i.286 = AN v.264 -guḷa a cluster of gs., a bouquet Vin iii.139; Snp-a 224; Vv-a 32, Vv-a 111 (v.l. guṇa). -cumbaṭaka a cushion of garlands, a chaplet of flowers Dhp-a i.72. -dāma a wreath of flowers Ja ii.104. -dhara wearing a wreath Ja iii.179 (ratta˚, see also above). -dhārin wearing a garland or wreath (on the head) Pv iii.11 (kusuma˚; v.l. BB ˚bhārin); Pv-a 169 (v.l. ˚bhārin); f. dhārinī Vv 323 (uppala˚, of a Petī. See also bhārin). -puṭa a basket for flowers Dhp-a iii.212. -bhārin wearing a wreath (chaplet) [the reading changes between ˚bhārin ˚dhārin; the BSk. prefers ˚dhārin, e.g. Mvu i.124 & ˚dhāra at Divy 218] Ja iv.60, Ja iv.82; Ja v.45; Pv-a 211 (v.l. ˚dhārin); f. ˚bhārinī Ja iii.530; Vv-a 12; & bhārī Thag 459 (as v.l.; T. reads ˚dhārī). Cp. ˚dhārin -vaccha [vaccha here = vṛḳṣa] a small flowering tree or plant, an ornamental plant Vin ii.12; Vin iii.179; Vism 172 (v.l. ˚gaccha); Dhp-a ii.109 (q.v. for expln: taruṇarukkha-puppha).
cp. Epic Sk. mālā
(nt.) name of a dice Ja vi.281.
fr. mālā or mala?
a gardener, florist Abhp 507.
fr. mālā
(f.) double jasmine Dāvs 5, Dāvs 49.
fr. mālā
(adj.) 1. wearing a garland (or row) of flowers (etc.) Pv iii.91 (= mālābhārin Pv-a 211); f mālinī Vv 362 (nānā-ratana˚); Mvu 18, Mvu 30 (vividhadhaja˚ mahābodhi).
2. (perhaps to māla) bearing a stain of, muddy, in pheṇa˚; with a surface (or is it garland ) of scum Mil 260.
3. what does it mean in pañca˚; said at Ja vi.497 of a wild animal? (C. not clear with expln “pañcangika-turiya-saddo viya”).
fr. mālā
(m. or f.?) a kind of vessel, only in camma˚; leather bag (?) Ja vi.431 (where v.l. reads camma-pasibbakāhi vālukādīhi), 432 (gloss c. pasibbaka).
of uncertain origin
wind, air, breeze SN iv.218; Th i.2; ii.372; Ja i.167; Ja iv.222; Ja v.328 Ja vi.189; Mil 319; Vism 172 (= vāyu); Vv-a 174, Vv-a 178.
-īrita (contracted to māluterita ) moved by the wind fanned by the breeze Thag 754; ii.372; Vv 4412 = 816 Pv ii.123. See similar expressions under īrita.
the proper Pali form for māruta, the a-stem form of maru2 = Vedic marut or māruta
(f.) a (long) creeper MN i.306; SN i.207; AN i.202 sq.; Snp 272; Dhp 162, Dhp 334; Ja iii.389 Ja v.205, Ja v.215, Ja v.389; Ja v.205, Ja v.215, Ja v.389; Ja vi.528 (phandana˚) Dhp-a iii.152; Dhp-a iv.43 ■ On maluvā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123.
cp. BSk. mālu
the tree Aegle marmelos Abhp 556.
late Sk.
see malya.
(& Māla) a sort of pavilion, a hall DN i.2 (maṇḍala˚, same at Snp p.104, which passage Snp-a 447 explns as “savitānaṃ maṇḍapaṃ”); Vin i.140 (aṭṭa, māla, pāsāda expld at Vin iii.201. In the same sequence of Vb 251 expld at Vb-a 366 as “bhojana-sālā-sadiso maṇḍala-māḷo; Vinay’ aṭṭha-kathāyaṃ pana eka-kūṭasangahito caturassa-pāsādo ti vuttaṃ”); Mil 46, Mil 47-Cp. mālaka ■ [The BSk. form is either māla, e.g. Mvu ii.274, or māḍa, e.g. Mpt 226, Mpt 43.]
Non-Aryan, cp. Tamil māḍam house, hall
a stand, viz. for alms-bowl (patta˚) Vin ii.114, or for drinking vessel (pānīya˚ Ja vi.85.
a Non-Aryan word, although the Dhtm 395 gives roots mal & mall; in meaning “dhāraṇa” (see under mala). Cp. malorika
a month, as the 12th part of the year. The 12 months are (beginning with what chronologically corresponds to our middle of March) Citta (Citra), Vesākha, Jeṭṭha, Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Poṭṭhapāda Assayuja, Kattika, Māgasira, Phussa, Māgha Phagguna. As to the names cp. nakkhatta. Usually in acc., used adverbially; nom. rare, e.g. aḍḍha-māso half-month Vv-a 66; Āsāḷhi-māsa Vv-a 307 (= gimhānaṃ pacchima māsa); pl. dve māsā Pv-a 34 (read māse) cattāro gimhāna-māsā Kp-a 192 (of which the 1st is Citra, otherwise called Paṭhama-gimha “1st summer and Bāla-vasanta “premature spring”) ■ Instr. pl catūhi māsehi Miln. 82; Pv-a i.1012 ■ acc. pl. as adv. dasamāse 10 months Ja i.52; bahu-māse Pv-a 135; also nt. chammāsāni 6 months SN iii.155. Freq. acc. sg. collectively: a period of…, e.g. temāsaṃ 3 months Dhs-a 15; Pv-a 20; catu˚; DN-a i.83; Pv-a 96; satta˚; Pv-a 20 dasa˚; Pv-a 63; aḍḍha˚; a fortnight Vin iv.117 ■ On māsa (& f.; māsī ), as well as shortened form ˚ma see puṇṇa.
-puṇṇatā fullness or completion of the month DN-a i.140; -mattaṃ (adv.) for the duration of a month Pv-a 19.
cp. Vedic māsa, & mās; Gr. μήν (Ionic μείς); Av. māh (moon & month); Lat. mensis; Oir. mī Goth. mēna = moon; Ohg. māno, mānōt month. Fr *mé to measure: see mināti
a bean (Phaseolus indica or radiata); usually combd with mugga, e.g. Vin iii.64; Mil 267, Mil 341; DN-a i.83. Also used as a weight (or measure?) in dhañña-māsa, which is said to be equal to 7 lice: Vb-a 343 ■ pl. māse Vv 806 (= māsa-sassāni Vv-a 310).
-odaka bean-water Kp-a 237. -khetta a field of beans Vv-a 808; Vv-a 308. -bīja bean-seed Dhp-a iii.212 -vana plantation Ja v.37 (+ mugga˚).
Vedic māṣa, Phaseolus indica, closely related to another species: mudga Phaseolus mungo
a small coin (= māsaka) Ja ii.425 (satta māsā = s. māsakā C.).
identical with māsa2
lit. a small bean, used as a standard of weight & value; hence a small coin of very low value. Of copper, wood & lac (Dhs-a 318 cp. Kp-a 37; jatu˚, dāru˚, loha˚); the suvaṇṇa˚ (golden m.) at Ja iv.107 reminds of the “gold” in fairy tales That its worth is next to nothing is seen from the descending progression of coins at Dhp-a iii.108 = Vv-a 77, which, beginning with kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha-pāda, places māsaka & kāhaṇikā next to mudhā “gratis.” It only “counts” when it amounts to 5 māsakas ■ Vin iii.47 Vin iii.67; Vin iv.226 (pañca˚); Ja i.112 (aḍḍha-māsakaṃ na agghati is worth nothing); iv.107; v.135 (first a rain of flowers, then of māsakas, then kahāpaṇas); Dhp-a ii.29 (pañca-m ■ mattaṃ a sum of 5 m.); Pv-a 282 (m + aḍḍha˚ half-pennies & farthings, as children’s pocket-money).;
fr. māsa2 + ka = māsa3
at Vin iii.23 is for mā asakkhimhā “we could not”; mā here stands for na. Masati, Masana, Masin
■ dumapakkāni -māsita Ja ii.446 (C. reads māsita & expl;ns by asita, dhāta); visa-māsita Milo 302 (T. reads visamāsita) having taken in poison; visa- māsan- ûpatāpa (id.) Vism 166; tiṇa -māsin eating grass Ja vi.354 (= tiṇakhādaka C.) ■ A similar case where Sandhi-m-has led to a wrong partition of syllables and has thus been lost through syncope may be P. eḷaka1, as compd with Sk. methi (cp. Prk. meḍhi), pillar, post.
fr. mṛṣ, for massati etc.; see masati| touch, touching, etc. in sense of eating or taking in. So is probably to be read for āsati etc. in the foll. passages, where m precedes this ā in all cases Otherwise we have to refer them to a root ās = as (to eat) and consider the m as partly euphonic.
only instr. māsalunā Mil 292, Trenckner says (note p. 428): “m. is otherwise unknown it must mean a period shorter than 5 months Cp. Sk. māsala.”-Rh. D. (trsl. ii.148) translates “got in a month,” following the Sinhalese gloss. The period seems to be only a little shorter than 5 months; there may be a connection with catu in the word.
reading uncertain
filled by the (say 6 or more) month(s), i.e. heavy (alluding to the womb in advanced pregnancy), heaped full MN i.332 (kucchi garu-garu viya māsācitaṃ maññe ti; Neumann trsls “wie ein Sack voll Bohnen,” thus taking m. = māsa2, and ācita as “heap” which however is not justified). This passage has given rise to a gloss at Vb 386, where māsācitaṃ maññe was added to kāyo garuko akammañño, in meaning “heavy, languid.” The other enumns of the 8 kusīta-vatthūni (A iv.332; DN iii.255) do not give m. m. It may be that the resemblance between akam mañño and maññe has played a part in reminding the Commentator of this phrase. The fact that Bdhgh comments on this passage in the Vb-a (p. 510) shows that the reading of Vb 386 is a very old one. Bdhgh takes māsa in the sense of māsa2 & expl;s māsācita as “wet bean” (tinta māso), thus omitting expln of ācita The passage at Vb-a 510 runs: “ettha pana māsācitaṃ nāma tintamāso, yathā tintamāso garuko hoti, evaṃ garuko ti adhippāyo.”
māsa1 + ācita
(adj.) 1. of a month, i.e. a month old Mil 302.
2. of a month, i.e. consisting of months so many months (old) (-˚), as aḍḍha˚; at intervals of half a month DN i.166; MN i.238, MN i.343; Pp 55; dve˚; two months old Pv i.67.
3. monthly, i.e. once a month Thag 283 (bhatta) ■ Cp. māsiya.
fr. māsa1
(adj.) consisting of months DN ii.327 (dvādasa˚ saṃvacchara the year of 12 months).
= māsika
1. a wild animal, an animal in its natural state (see cpds.).
2. a deer, antelope, gazelle Various kinds are mentioned at Ja v.416; two are given at Nd ii.509, viz. eṇi (antelope) & sarabha (red deer) see under eṇi & sarabha ■ Snp 39, Snp 72; Ja i.154; Ja iii.270 (called Nandiya); Pv-a 62, Pv-a 157. On miga in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123, where more refs. are given.
-ādhibhū king of beasts (i.e. the lion) Snp 684. -inda king of beasts (id.) Sdhp 593. -chāpaka young of a deer Vv-a 279. -dāya deer park Ja iv.430 (Maddakucchi); Vv-a 86 (Isipatana). -dhenu a hind Ja i.152; Dhp-a iii.148. -bhūta (having become) like a wild animal, MN i.450 (˚bhūtena cetasā). -mandalocana the soft eye of the deer Vv 6411; Pv i.115. See under manda -rājā king of the beasts (the lion) DN iii.23 sq. -luddaka deer-hunter Ja i.372; Ja iii.49, Ja iii.184; Dhp-a ii.82; Vb-a 266 (in simile). -vadha deer-slaying Ja i.149. -vittaka amateur of hunting Ja iv.267. -visāna a deer’s horn Pp 56. -vīthi deer-road Ja i.372.
Vedic mṛga, to mṛj, cp. magga, meaning, when characterised by another attribute “wild animal” in general, animal of the forest; when uncharacterised usually antelope
(f.) hunt, hunting, deer-stalking Pv-a 154 (˚padesa). Usually in devasikaṃ migavaṃ gacchati to go out for a day’s hunting Ja iv.267; or as pp. ekadivasaṃ migavaṃ gata Vv-a 260; ekāhaṃ m. g. Mvu 5, Mvu 154.
= Sk. mṛgayā, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 461
(f.) a doe Thag 109; Ja v.215; Ja vi.549; Dhp-a i.48.
f. of miga, cp. Epic Sk. mṛgī
(nt.) item of wrong, wrongness. There are 8 items of wrong, viz. the 8 wrong qualities as enumd under (an-) ariya-magga (see micchā) forming the contrary to the sammatta or righteousness of the Ariyan Path. These 8 at DN ii.353; DN iii.254; AN ii.221; AN iv.237; Vb 387; Vism 683. Besides these there is a set of 10, consisting of the above 8 plus micchā -ñāṇa and ˚vimutti wrong knowledge & wrong emancipation: DN iii.290; Vb 391; Vism 683 (where ˚ñāṇa & ˚viratti for vimutti ) ■ See further DN iii.217 (˚niyata); Pp 22; Dhs 1028 (cp. Dhs. trsl. §1028) Vb 145; Tikp. 32 (˚niyata-citta), 325 (˚tika), 354 (id.).
abstr. fr. micchā
(adv.) wrongly, in a wrong way, wrong-, false Snp 438 (laddho yaso), 815 (paṭipajjati leads a wrong course of life, almost syn with anariyaṃ. Illustrated by “pāṇaṃ hanati, adinnaṃ ādiyati, sandhiṃ chindati, nillopaṃ harati, ekāgārikaṃ karoti, paripanthe tiṭṭhati, paradāraṃ gacchati, musā bhaṇati” at Nd i.144); Vb-a 513 (˚ñāṇa, ˚vimutti) -micchā˚; often in same combns as sammā˚; with which contrasted, e.g. with the 8 parts of (an-) ariya-magga viz. ˚diṭṭhi (wrong) views (D iii.52, 70 sq., 76, 111 246, 269, 287, 290, Dhp 167, Dhp 316 sq.; Pp 39; Vism 469 (def.) Pv-a 27, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67; cp. ˚ka one who holds wrong views DN iii.45, DN iii.48, DN iii.264; Vism 426); ˚saṅkappa aspiration (D iii.254, 287, 290 sq., Dhp 11); ˚vācā speech (ibid.); ˚kammanta conduct (ibid.); ˚ājīva living (D iii.176 sq., 254, 290; AN ii.53, AN ii.240, AN ii.270, AN iv.82); ˚vāyāma effort (D iii.254, 287, 290 sq.); ˚sati mindfulness (ibid.) ˚samādhi concentration (ibid.); see magga 2, and cp the following:
-gahaṇa wrong conception, mistake Ja iii.304. -cāra wrong behaviour Pp 39 (& adj. cārin); Vb-a 383 (var degrees). -paṭipadā wrong path (of life) Pp 49 (adj.: ˚paṭipanna, living wrongly).; -paṇihita (citta wrongly directed mind Dhp 42 = Ud 39 [cp. BSk. mithyāpraṇidhāna Divy 14]. -patha wrong road, wrong course Vb 145 (lit. & fig.; in exegesis of diṭṭhi, cp Nd ii.taṇhā iii.; Dhs 381; Dhs-a 253).
Sk. mithyā, cp. Vedic mithaḥ interchanging, separate, opposite, contrary (opp. saṃyak together: see samma); mithū wrongly; see also mithu
(nt.) & miñjā (f.) marrow, pith, kernel Vin i.25 (in sequence chavi, camma, maṃsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, miñjā); Vism 235 (id.); Kp iii. (aṭṭhi˚, f. cp. Kp-a 52, nt.); Ja iv.402 (tāla˚ pith of the palm); Mvu 28. 28 (panasa˚, f. kernels of the seeds of the jak-fruit).
-rāsi heap of marrow Vism 260 (= matthalunga).
Vedic majjan (fr. majj ?); on form see Geiger. P.Gr. § 91, & cp. Pischel,; Prk. Gr. §§ 74, 101
= miñja, only in tela˚; inner kernels of tila-seed, made into a cake Pv-a 51. See doṇī2.
measured, in measure DN i.54 (doṇa˚ a doṇa measure full); Snp 300 (bhāgaso m. measured in harmonious proportions, i.e. stately); Pv i.1013 (id.) Ja iii.541 ■ amita unlimited, without measure, boundless in Ep. amit-ābha of boundless lustre Sdhp 255 Also Name of a Buddha.
-āhāra measured, i.e. limited food Snp 707. -bhāṇin speaking measuredly, i.e. in moderation Dhp 227; Ja iv.252.
Vedic mita, pp. of mā, mināti, to measure; also in meaning “moderate, measured,” cp. in same sense Gr. μέτριος
(m. nt.) friend. Usually m., although nt. occurs in meaning “friend,” in sg. (Ne 164) & pl. (Snp 185 Snp 187); in meaning “friendship” at Ja vi.375 (= mittabhāva C.). The half-scientific, half-popular etym. of mitta, as given at Vb-a 108, is “mettāyantī ti mittā minantī ti vā m.; sabba-guyhesu anto pakkhipantī ti attho” (the latter: “they enclose in all that is hidden”)-Two kinds of friends are distinguished at Nd ii.510 (in exegesis of Snp 37 & 75), viz.; āgārika˚; (a house-or lay-friend) and anāgārika˚; (a homeless-or clericalfriend). The former is possessed of all ordinary qualities of kindness and love, the latter of special virtues of mind & heart ■ A friend who acts as a sort of Mentor or spiritual adviser, is called a; kalyāṇa-mitta (see under kalyāṇa) ■ Mitta is often combd with similar terms devoting relationship or friendship, e.g. with amaccā colleagues and ñāti-sālohita˚; blood-relations, in ster phrase at Vin ii.126; AN i.222; Snp p.104; Pv-a 28; cp ñāti-mittā relatives & friends Pv i.59; suhada (“dear heart”) DN iii.187 (four types, cp. m. paṭirūpaka) suhajja one who is dear to one’s heart Pv-a 191; sahāya companion Pv-a 86. The neut. form occurs for kind things DN iii.188; SN i.37 ■ Opp. sapatta enemy Pv-a 13; amitta a sham friend or enemy Snp 561 (= paccatthika Snp-a 455); DN iii.185. pāpa-mitta bad friend Pv-a 5 ■ For refs. see e.g. Snp 58, Snp 255, Snp 296, Snp 338; Dhp 78, Dhp 375.
-ābhirādhin one who pleases his friends Ja iv.274 (= mittesu adubbhamāno C.) -ddu [cp. Sk. mitra-druha one who injures or betrays his friends SN i.225; Snp 244; Ja iv.260; also in foll. forms: ˚dubbha Pv ii.93 (same passage at Ja iv.352; Ja v.240; Ja vi.310, Ja vi.375); ˚dūbha Ja iv.352; Ja vi.310; ˚dūbhin [cp. Sk. ˚drohin] Ja iv.257 Ja v.97 (˚kamma); vi.375; Dhp-a ii.23. -paṭirūpaka a false friend, one pretending to be a friend DN iii.185 (four types: añña-d-atthu-hara, vacī-parama, anuppiyabhāṇin apāya-sahāya, i.e. one who takes anything one who is a great talker, one who flatters, one who is a spendthrift companion.) -bandhava a relation in friendship, one who is one’s relative as a friend Nd ii.455 (where Nd i.11 has manta-bandhava). -bheda see mithu-bheda -vaṇṇa pretence of friendship, a sham friendship Pv iv.86 (= mitta-rūpa, m ■ paṭirūpatā Pv-a 268).
cp. Vedic mitra, m. & nt., friend; Av. mipro, friend
(f.)-(˚) state of being a friend, friendship, in kalyāṇa˚; being a good friend, friendship as a helper (see kalyāṇa) DN iii.274; Vism 107.
abstr. fr. mitta
(f.) friendship Ja i.468 (= metti C.).
a by-form of metti
(adv.) opposite reciprocally, contrary Snp 825, Snp 882 (taken by Nd i.163 Nd i.290, on both passages identically, as n. pl. of adj. instead of adv., & expl;d by “dve janā dve kalaha-kāraka” etc.).
-bheda [evidently in meaning of mitta-bheda “break of friendship,” although mithu means “adversary, thus perhaps “breaking, so as to cause opposition” breaking of alliance, enmity DN ii.76; Ja iv.184 (here with v.l. mitta˚); Kv 314.
cp. Vedic mithū & P. micchā; mith, cp. mithaḥ alternately, Av. miχō wrongly; Goth. misso one another, missa-leiks different; Ger. E. prefix mis-i.e. wrongly: Ger. missetat wrong doing = misdeed; Lat mūto to change, mutuus reciprocal; Goth. maipms present = Ags. mapum; mith in Vedic Sk. is “to be opposed to each other,” whereas in Vedic mithuna the notion of “pair” prevails. See also methuna
(nt.) torpor, stupidity, sluggishness DN i.71 (thīna˚) Snp 437; AN v.18; Dhs 1157; Mil 299, Mil 412 (appa˚ not slothful, i.e. diligent, alert); Vism 450 (˚rūpa; + rogarūpa, jātirūpa, etc., in def. of rūpa); DN-a i.211 (expld as cetasika gelañña: see on this passage Dhs trsl. §1155) Sdhp 459 ■ See thīna.
orig. pp. perhaps to Vedic mid (?) to be fat = medh, as Dhs-a 378 gives “medhatī ti middhaṃ ■ More likely however connected with Sk. methi (pillar = Lat. meta), cp. Prk. medhi. The meaning is more to the point too, viz. “stiff.” Thus semantically identical with thīna ■ BSk. also middha, e.g. Divy 555
(adj.) torpid, drowsy, sluggish Dhp 325 (= thīnamiddh’ âbhibhūta Dhp-a iv.16).
fr. middha
is given as root in meaning “hiṃsana,” to hurt at Dhtm 536 (with var. v.v ll.), not sure.
does it refer to mī2 as in mināti2, or to middha ?
(nt.) measuring, surveying DN-a i.79; Dhs-a 123.
fr. mi to measure, fix, construct
to measure Vb-a 108 (see etym. of mitta); Pot. mine Ja v.468 (= mineyya C.) fut. minissati Sdhp 585. ger. minitvā Vism 72; grd minitabba Ja v.90 ■ Pass. mīyati: see anu˚,-pp mita ■ Cp. anu˚, abhi˚, ni˚, pa˚, vi˚. Caus. māpeti (q.v.).
roots (Vedic) mā & mi; pres. minūte & minoti; Idg. *me, cp. Sk. mātra measure, māna; Av. mā-mitiḥ measure; Gr. μάτιον small measure, μ ̈ητις counsel Lat.; metior, mensis, modus; Goth. mēla bushel; Ags. maed measure (cp. E. mete, meet fitting); Lith. mẽtas year ■ The Dhtm 726 gives mi in meaning “pamāṇa”
to diminish; also: to hurt injure. Very rare, only in some prep. combns ■ See also mīyati.
Vedic mināti, mī (or mi), to diminish; cp. Gr. μινύω diminish; Lat. minor = E. minor; Goth. mins (little), compar, minniza, superl. minnists = Ger mindest ■ The Dhtp 502 gives mi with “hiṃsā,” the Dhtm 725 with “hiṃsana.” It applies the same interpretation to a root midh (Dhtm 536), which is probably abstracted fr. Pass. mīyati
(& Mīyati) to die ■ (a miyyati: Snp 804; Ne 23. med. 3rd pl. miyyare Snp 575; pot. miyye Ja vi.498; ppr. miyyamāna MN iii.246 Vism 49; fut. miyyissati MN iii.246 ■ (b) mīyati (influenced in form by jīyati & mīyati of mināti;2) MN iii.168 (jāyati jīyati mīyati); Ja iii.189; Dhp 21 pot. mīyetha DN ii.63. ppr. mīyamāna SN i.96 ■ pp mata.
corresponding to Vedic mriyate, fr. mr, viâ *mīryate → miyyati. See marati
a barbarian, foreigner, outcaste hillman S; v.466; Ja vi.207; DN-a i.176; Snp-a 236 (˚mahātissa-thera Np.), 397 (˚bhāsā foreign dialect) The word occurs also in form milakkhu (q.v.).
cp. Ved. Sk. mleccha barbarian, root mlecch, onomat. after the strange sounds of a foreign tongue cp. babbhara & mammana
a non-Aryan DN iii.264 Thag 965 (˚rajana “of foreign dye” trsl.; Kern, Toev. s. v. translates “vermiljoen kleurig”). As milakkhuka at Vin iii.28, where Bdhgh expls by “Andha-Damil’ ādi.”
the Prk. form (A-Māgadhī, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. 105, 233) for P. milakkha
a wild man of the woods, non-Aryan, barbarian Ja iv.291 (not with C. = janapadā), cp. luddā m. ibid., and milāca-puttā Ja v.165 (where C. also expls by bhojaputta, i.e. son of a villager).
by-form to milakkha, viâ *milaccha → *milacca → milāca: Geiger, P.Gr. 622; Kern, Toev. s. v.
faded, withered, dried up Ja i.479; Ja v.473; Vism 254 (˚sappa-piṭṭhi, where Kp-a 49 in same passage reads “milāta-dham(m)ani-piṭṭhi”); Dhp-a i.335 Dhp-a iv.8 (sarīra), 112; Snp-a 69 (˚mālā, in simile); Mvu 22 Mvu 46 (a˚); Sdhp 161.
pp. of milāyati
(f.) only neg. a˚; the (fact of) not being withered Ja v.156.
abstr. fr. milāta
to relax, languish, fade wither SN i.126; Iti 76; Ja i.329; Ja v.90 ■ Caus. milāpeti [Sk. mlāpayati] to make dry, to cause to wither Ja i.340 (sassaṃ); fig. to assuage, suppress, stifle Ja iii.414 (taṇhaṃ) ■ pp. milāta.
Vedic mlā, to become soft; ldg. *melā & *mlei;, as in Gr. βλας, βλακεύω to languish; Lat. flaccus withered (= flaccid); Lith. blakà weak spot; also Gr. βληξρός weak ■ Dhtp 440: “milā = gatta-vimāne” (i.e. from the bent limbs); Dhtm 679 id.
at Pv-a 144 in passage paṃsukūlaṃ dhovitv-âbhisiñcimillikañ ca katvā adāsi is to be read either as “abhisiñci cimillikañ ca k.” or “abhisiñcitvā mudukañ ca k.”
at SN ii.228 is to be read mīḷhakā (q.v.).
to wink (one’s eyes): see ni˚.
miṣ, Vedic miṣati, root given as misa at Dhtm 479, with expln “mīlane”
(adj.) 1. mixed (with:-˚); various Vin i.33 (kesa˚, jatā˚ etc. = a mixture of, various); Thag 143; Ja iii.95, Ja iii.144 (udaka-paṇṇa˚ yāgu); Pv i.92 (missā kiṭakā). nt. missaṃ as adv. “in a mixed way” Vism 552 = Vb-a 161 (+ dvidhā).
2. accompanied by (-˚), having company or a retinue, a title of honour in names, also as polite address [cp. Sk. miśra & āraya miśra] Ja v.153 (voc. f. misse), 154 (f. missā).
3. missa is changed to missī in compn with kṛ; and bhū (like Sk.) thus in missī-bhāva (sexual) intercourse, lit. mixed state, union Ja ii.330; Ja iv.471; Ja v.86; Vb-a 107; and missī-bhūta mixed, coupled, united Ja v.86 (= hatthena hatthaṃ gahetvā kāya-missībhāvaṃ upagata C.). Cp sam.˚;
-kesī (f.) “mixed hair,” Ep. of a heavenly maiden or Apsaras Vv 6014 (expld at Vv-a 280 as “ratta-mālādīhi missita-kesavaṭṭī”). The m. missa-kesa occurs as a term for ascetics (with muṇḍa) at Vism 389.
orig. pp. of miś, cp. Vedic miśra. Sk. miśrayati, mekṣayati; Gr. μίγνυμι & μίσγω; Lat. misceo mixtus; Ags. miscian = mix; Ohg. miskan ■ Dhtp 631 “sammissa”
(adj. n.) 1. mixed, combined Ja ii.8 (phalika˚ rajata-pabbata mountain of silver mixed with crystal); Vb-a 16 (lokiya-lokuttara˚); usually ˚-, like ˚āhāra mixed food Dhp-a ii.101; ˚uppāda mixed portents, a main chapter of the art of prognosticating (cp. Bṛhat-Saṃhitā ch. 86: miśrak’ âdhyāya) Mil 178 ˚bhatta = ˚āhāra Snp-a 97; Mhbv 27.
2. (m.) an attendant follower; f. missikā Dhp-a i.211 (Sāmāvati˚). 3. (nt.) Name of a pleasure grove in heaven (lit. the grove of bodily union), one of the 3: Nandana, M., Phārusaka Ja vi.278; Vism 424.
4. (pl. missakā) a group of devas mentioned at DN ii.260 in list of popular gods (cp. missa 2 and missakesī).
fr. missa
(nt.) mixing, mixture, combination with (-˚) Tikp 291.
abstr. fr. missaka
(nt.) mixing Dhtp 338.
fr. misseti
mixed, intermingled Snp 243; Ja v.460; Pv-a 198 (dhañña sāsapa-tela˚); Vv-a 280 (see under missa-kesī).
pp. of misseti
1. to mix Mil 126 (mayaṃ missayissāma); Pv-a 191 (palāse sālīhi saddhiṃ).
2. to bring together in cohabitation, to couple Ja v.154 (C.: kilesana misseti) ■ pp. missita.
Caus. of miś, Vedic miśrayati
is given as root mih in 2 meanings at Dhtp, viz. (1) īsa-hasana (No. 328), i.e. a kind of laugh, for smi as in mihita. (2) secana (No. 342).
(nt.) a smile Ja iii.419; Ja v.452; Ja vi.504- mihita-pubba with smiles Thag 460 (spelt mhita˚) Ja vi.221 (= sita C.) ■ Cp. vimhaya, vimhāpaka vimhita.
pp. of smi; this is the inverted-diaeretic (Pāli) form (smita → *hmita → *mhita → mihita) for the other (Sk.) form smita (q.v.). The Dhtp (328) puts root down as mih
see miyyati (Pass. of marati ).
to wink, only in cpd. nimīlati to close the eyes (opp um˚).
mīl, given at Dhtp 267 & 614 with “nimīlane”
excrement MN i.454 = MN iii.236 (˚sukhaṃ vile pleasure); AN iii.241, AN iii.242; Thag 1152; Ja ii.11; Ja vi.112; Vv 5211 (with ref. to the gūthaniraya); Pv iii.45 (= gūtha Pv-a 194); Dhp-a ii.53 (˚ṃ khādituṃ).
-kūpa pit of excr., cesspool Pgdp 22.
pp. of mih, Vedic mehati to excrete water, i.e. urine, only with ref. to the liquid; Sk. mīḍha = Lat. mictus pp. of mingo, to urinate. Cp. Av. maēƶaiti to urinate meƶ urine; Gr. ὀμιξεϊν & ο ̓́μιξμα id.; Ags. mīgan to ur.; in Ohg. mist & Ags. miox the notion refers more to the solid excrement, as in Pāli ■ A related root; *meigh to shed water is found in megha, cloud (watershedder), q.v. for further cognates
(f.) cesspool SN ii.228 (so read for T. piḷhakā; v.l. BB miḷhakā) See also piḷhakā. The trsl. (K.S. ii.155) gives “dungbeetle.”
fr. mīḷha; cp. BSk. mīḍha-ghaṭa
a bud; see makula (where also see mukulita ) ■ Abhp 811, Abhp 1116.
cp. Sk. mukula
only in um & paṭi˚; (q.v.), and as v.l. at MN iii.61.
pp. of muc, Sk. mukta, for the usual P. mutta; cp. Prk. mukka, Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 566
at Ja i.441 should be read as mokkhaka, meaning “first, principal, foremost”; cp. mokkha2.
(nt.) 1. the mouth Snp 608, Snp 1022 (with ref. to the long tongue, pahūta-jivha, of the Buddha or Mahāpurisa) Ja ii.7; DN-a i.287 (uttāna˚ clear mouthed, i.e. easy to understand, cp. DN i.116); Pv-a 11, Pv-a 12 (pūti˚), 264 (mukhena).
2. the face Ja vi.218 (uṇṇaja m.); Pv-a 74, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 77; ˚ṃ karoti to make a face (i.e. grimace Vism 343 ■ adho˚; face downward Vin ii.78; opp upari˚; (q.v.); assu˚; with tearful face Dhp 67; Pv-a 39 see assu ■ dum˚; (adj.) sad or unfriendly looking Ja ii.393; Ja vi.343; scurrilous Ja v.78; bhadra˚; brightfaced Pv-a 149; ruda˚; crying Pv i.112.
3. entrance mouth (of a river) Mvu 8, Mvu 12; āya˚; entrance (lit opening), i.e. cause or means of income DN-a i.218 ukkā˚; the opening of a furnace, a goldsmith’s smelting pot AN i.257; Snp 686; Ja vi.217; Ja vi.574. ubhato-mukha having 2 openings MN i.57. sandhi˚; opening of the cleft Pv-a 4. Hence:
4. cause, ways, means reason, by way of Ja iii.55 by way of a gift (dānamukhe) iv.266 (bahūhi mukhehi) ■ apāya˚; cause of ruin or loss AN ii.166; AN iv.283.
5. front part, front, top, in īsā˚; of the carriage pole SN i.224 = Ja i.203. Hence
6. the top of anything, front, head, best part; adj topmost, foremost Snp 568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaññā) 569 (nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando; cp. Vin i.246) Vb-a 332 (= uttamaṃ, mukha-bhūtaṃ vā) ■ Der. adj mokkha & pāmokkha; (q.v.). Note. A poetical instr sg. mukhasā is found at Pv i.23 & i.32, as if the nom were mukho (s-stem) ■ The abl. mukhā is used as adv. “in front of, before,” in cpd. sam˚ & param˚;, e.g. Pv-a 13. See each sep.
-ādhāna (1) the bit of a bridle MN i.446; (2) setting of the mouth, i.e. mouth-enclosure, rim of the m.; in m siliṭṭhaṃ a well-connected, well-defined mouth-contour Dhs-a 15 (not with trsl. “opens lightly,” but better with note “is well adjusted,” see Expos. 19, where write ˚ādhāna for ˚ādāna). -āsiya (? cp. āsita1) to be eaten by the mouth Dhs-a 330 (mukhena asitabba) -ullokana looking into a person’s face, i.e. cheerful bright, perhaps also flattering Dhp-a ii.193 (as ˚olokana) -ullokika flattering (cp. above) Nd i.249 (puthu Satthārānaṃ m. puthujjana); Pv-a 219. -odaka water for rinsing the mouth Nd ii.391 = Mil 370; Vv-a 65; Dhp-a ii.19; Dhp-a iv.28. -ja born in (or from) the mouth, i.e. a tooth Ja vi.219. -tuṇḍa a beak Vv-a 227 [cp. BSk mukhatuṇḍaka Divy 387]. -dugga one whose mouth is a difficult road, i.e. one who uses his mouth (speech badly Snp 664 (v.l. ˚dukkha). -dūsi blemishes of the face, a rash on the face DN-a i.223 (m ■ dosa ibid.) -dvāra mouth opening Pv-a 180. -dhovana-ṭṭhāna place for rinsing the mouth, “lavatory” Dhp-a ii.184 -puñchana wiping one’s mouth Vin i.297. -pūra filling the mouth, a mouthful, i.e. as much as to fill the mouth Ja vi.350. -pūraka mouth-filling Vism 106 -bheri a musical instrument, “mouth-drum,” mouthorgan (?) Nd ii.219 B; Snp-a 86. -makkaṭika a grimace (like that of a monkey) of the face Ja ii.70, Ja ii.448 (T makkaṭiya). -vaṭṭi “opening-circumference,” i.e. brim, edge, rim Dhp-a ii.5 (of the Lohakumbhi purgatory cp. Ja iii.43 lohakumbha-mukhavaṭṭi); Dhp-a iii.58 (of a gong). -vaṇṇa the features Pv-a 122, Pv-a 124. -vikāra contortion of the mouth Ja ii.448. -vikūṇa (= vikāra grimace Snp-a 30. -saṅkocana distortion or contraction of the mouth, as a sign of displeasure Dhp-a ii.270 cp. mukha-sankoca Vism 26. -saññata controlling one’s mouth (i.e. speech) Dhp 363, cp. Dhp-a iv.93.
Vedic mukha, fr. Idg. *mu, onomat., cp. Lat. mu facere, Gr. μυκάομαι, Mhg. mūgen, Lat. mūgio to moo (of cows), to make the sound “moo”; Ohg māwen to cry, muckazzen to talk softly; also Gr. μϋχος word, “myth”; Ohg. mūla = Ger. maul; Ags. mule snout, etc. Vedic mūka silent, dumb = Lat. mutus = E mute
(adj.) garrulous, noisy, scurrilous SN i.203; SN v.269; AN i.70; AN iii.199, AN iii.355 Thag 955; Snp 275; Ja iii.103; Dhp-a ii.70 (ati˚); Pv-a 11-opp. amukhara MN i.470; Thag 926; Pp 35; Mil 414.
cp. Sk. mukhara; fr. mukha
(f.) talkativeness, garrulousness, noisiness Dhp-a ii.70.
fr. mukhara
a kind of kidney-bean, Phaseolus mungo, freq. combd with māsa2 (q.v.). On its size (larger than sāsapa smaller than kalāya) see A v.170 & cp. kalāya ■ DN ii.293; MN i.57 (+ māsa); SN i.150; Ja i.274, Ja i.429; Ja iii.55 Ja vi.355 (˚māsā); Mil 267, Mil 341; Snp-a 283.
-sūpa bean-soup Vism 27. -sūpyatā “bean-soupcharacter,” or as Vism trsl. 32 has it “bean-currytalk”; fig. denoting a faulty character, i.e. a man who behaves like bean-soup. The metaphor is not quite transparent; it is expld by Bdhgh as meaning a man speaking half-truths, as in a soup of beans some are only half-boiled. The expln is forced, & is stereotype; as well as is the combn in which it occurs. Its origin remains to be elucidated. Anyhow it refers to an unevenness in character, a flaw of character. The passage (with var. spellings) is always the foll.: cāṭukamyatā (pātu˚ Nd2; ˚kammatā Miln; pāṭu˚ Vb mugga-sūpyatā (˚sūpatā Nd2; ˚suppatā Mil & Kp-a 236; ˚sūpatā and suppatā Vb & Vb-a 338; supyatā Vism) pāribhaṭṭatā (˚bhatyatā Vism.; ˚bhaṭṭakatā Miln; ˚bhaṭyatā & ˚bbhaṭṭatā Vb). At Nd;2 391 it is used to explain sāvajja- bhogin, at Vism 17 & Vb 246; anācāra; at Vb 352 lapanā; at Mil 370 it is used generally (cp. Mil trsl. ii.287). The C. expln of the Vb passage, as given at (VbhA 483 & ) Vism 17 runs as follows: “mugga-sūpa-samānāya sacc’ âlikena jīvita kappanatāy’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathā hi muggasūpe paccante bahū muggā pākaṃ gacchanti, thokā na gacchanti, evam eva saccâlikena jīvitakappake puggale bahuṃ alikaṃ hoti, appakaṃ saccaṃ.” The text at Vb-a 483 is slightly different, although the sense is the same. Similarly at Vism 27.
Vedic mudga, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 240
(nt.?) a plant, according to C. a species of bean Ja vi.536.
fr. mugga?
a club, hammer, mallet Ja i.113; Ja ii.196, Ja ii.382; Ja v.47; Ja vi.358; Mil 351; Vism 231; Dhp-a i.126; Dhp-a ii.21; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 55 (ayo˚), 56 (˚pahāra), 66 192. The word is specifically peculiar to the so-called Jātaka style.
cp. Sk. mudgara
occurs as simplex only in Np. Mahā- mucala -mālaka Mvu 15, Mvu 36. It refers to the tree mucalinda, of which it may be a short form. On the other hand mucal-inda appears to the speaker of Pāli a cp. noun, viz. king of the mucala(s) (trees). Its (late?) Sk. correspondent is mucilinda, of which the P. form may be the regular representative (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 34).
1. the tree Barringtonia acutangula (Nicula*, of which it may be a dialectical distortion: *Abhp 563 nicula → *mucula → *mucala) Vin i.3; Ja v.405 (˚ketakā, Dvandva); vi.269 (id.).
2. Name of a nāga (serpent) king Vin i.3.
3. N of a great lake Ja vi.534, Ja vi.535.
1. (spelt muccati to become stiff, congeal, coagulate, curdle Dhp 71; Dhp-a ii.67.
2. to become infatuated DN iii.43 (majjati + )
3. only in Caus. muccheti to make sound, to increase in tone Ja ii.249 (vīṇaṃ); iii.188 (id.) ■ pp. mucchita.
murch, an enlargement of Vedic mūr to get stiff (as in mūra stupid, dull, cp. Gr. μωρός; Sk. mūrakha foolish). Used in 2 senses, viz. (a) to become stiff (b) (Caus.) to harden, increase in tone, make louder From (a) a fig. meaning is derived in the sense of to become dulled or stupid, viz. infatuated, possessed.; See also Lüders in K.Z. xlii.194 a. How far we are justified to connect Dhtp 216 mū & 503; mu (“bandhane”) with this root is a different question. These 2 roots seem to be without connections ■ mūrch itself is at Dhtp 50 defined with “mohe”
(f.) swelling or rising in tone, increase of sound Ja ii.249 (vīṇaṃ uttama-mucchanāya mucchetvā vādesi).
fr. mucchati 2
(˚añji˚) is probably the correct reading for puñcikatā ■ We find puñcikatā at Dhs 1136, Dhs 1230 Vb 351, Vb 361 (v.l. pucchañji˚); Dhs-a 365; mucchañci˚ at Nd i.8 & Nd;2 p. 152; pucchañji˚; at Vb-a 477. The meaning is “agitation,” as seen from expln of term at Dhs-a 365 (“wagging of a dog’s tail,” pucchaṃ cāleti) and Vb-a 477 (“lābhan’ âlābhanaka-ṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā”) ■ The etym. expln is difficult we may take it as a (misunderstood) corruption of *mucch-aṅgi-kata i.e. mucchā + anga + kṛ; “being made stiff-of-limbs,” or “swoon.” Psychologically we may take “swoon” as the climax of agitation, almost like “hysterics.” A similar case of a similar term of swooning being interpreted by Bdhgh as “wavering (cal ) is chambhitatta “paralysis,” expld as “sakalasarīra calanaṃ ” at DN-a i.50 ■ The expression mucchañcikatā reminds us of the term kaṭukañcukatā.
1. fainting, swoon Pv-a 174.
2. infatuation AN ii.10 (kāma˚). Snp 328; Dhs 1059.
fr. mūrch
1. fainted, swooning, in a faint Ja i.243; Dhp-a ii.112; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 174, Pv-a 258.
2. distraught infatuated SN i.61, SN i.204; AN i.274; DN iii.46 (a˚) Iti 92; Ja iii.432; Ja v.274 (C. for pagiddha & gadhita).; Cp. pa˚.
pp. of mucchati
to sink, dive, be submerged Dhtp 70 (mujja = mujjana). Only in cpds um˚ & ni˚;.
The P. form of the Sk. majj
I. Forms. The 2 bases muñc˚ & mucc˚; are differentiated in such a way, that muñc˚; is the active base, and mucc˚; the passive. There are however cases where the active forms (muñc˚) are used for the passive ones (mucc˚), which may be due simply to a misspelling ñc & cc being very similar ■ A.; Active. pres. muñcati Ja i.375; Ja iv.272; Ja v.453; Vv 6418; pot. muñcetha Dhp 389; imper. muñca Dhp 348; ppr. muñcanto Snp 791 aor. muñci Ja v.289; Mvu 19, Mvu 44; pl. muñciṃsu Ja iv.142 ger. muñciya Mvu 25, Mvu 67; mutvā Ja i.375; & muñcitvā ibid.; Pv-a 43; inf. muñcituṃ DN i.96 ■ Caus. II muñcāpeti DN i.148 ■ B. Passive. pres. muccati Snp 508 ppr. muccanto Ja i.118; imper, sg. muccassu Thig 2 pl. muccatha Dhp-a ii.92; pot. muñceyya Pv ii.26 Pv-a 104; Dhp 127; fut. muccissati Ja i.434 (where also muñcissati in same sense); Dhp-a i.105; Dhp-a iii.242; Pv-a 53 Pv-a 105; also mokkhasi Vin i.21 = SN i.111; pl. mokkhanti Dhp 37; aor. mucci(ṃsu) SN iii.132; SN iv.20; Ja ii.66; inf muccituṃ Thag 253; Dhp-a i.297 ■ Caus. moceti mocāpeti; (q.v.) ■ pp. mutta ■ II. Meanings. 1. to release, deliver (from = abl.), set free (opp. bandhati Snp 508 (sujjhati, m., bajjhati); SN iii.132 (cittāni mucciṃsu their hearts were cleansed), Thig 2 (muccassu) Dhp 127 (pāpakammā, quoted at Pv-a 104); Pv ii.26 Pv-a 53 (niray’ ûpapattito muccissati), 105; Dhp-a i.297 (dukkhā muccitu-kāma desirous of being delivered from unpleasantness; v.l. muñc˚); ii.92 (dukkhā). 2. to send off, let loose, drop, give Ja iv.272 (saraṃ an arrow); Vism 313 (dhenu vacchakassa khīra-dhāraṃ m.); Mvu 25, Mvu 63 (phalakaṃ).
3. to let out of the yoke, to unharness, set free DN i.148 (satta usabhasatāni muñcāpeti); Pv-a 43 (yoggāni muñcitvā). 4. to let go, emit, send forth (light) Ja v.289 (obhāsaṃ muñci); Mvu 19, Mvu 44 (rasmiyo).
5. to send forth (sound); to utter, emit (words etc.) Ja i.375 (vācaṃ) Vv 6418 (mālā m. ghosaṃ = vissajjenti Vv-a 281). 6. (from 4 & 5 in general) to undertake, to bestow, send forth, let loose on Dhp 389: “na brāhmaṇassa pahareyya nâssa muñcetha brāhmaṇo,” where Dhp-a iv.148 supplements veran na muñcetha (i.e. kopaṃ na kareyya) In this case veraṃ muñcati would be the same as the usual veraṃ bandhati, thus opposite notions being used complementarily. The interpretation “give up (enmity) instead of “undertake” is possible from a mere grammatical point of view. L. v. Sohroeder (Worte der Wahrheil) trsls “noch stürzt der Priester auf den Feind”!
7. to abandon, give up, leave behind Dhp 348 (muñca, viz. taṇhaṃ Dhp-a iv.63); Ja v.453 (peta-rāja-visayaṃ).
8. An idiomatic (late) use of the ger. muñciya (with acc.) is in the sense of an adv. (or prep.), meaning “except, besides,” e.g. maṃ m Mvu 25, Mvu 67; imaṃ m. (besides this Mvu 14, Mvu 17) ■ Cp pa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚. Note. At Dhp 71 muccati stands for muccheti (= Sk. mūrchati) to become stiff, coagulate curdle; cp. Dhp-a ii.67. Muncana & Muccana;
Vedic muñcati; muc, to release, loosen; with orig. meaning “strip off, get rid of,” hence also “glide as in Lith. mūkti to escape, Ags. smūgan to creep Ger. schmiegen to rub against. See further connections in Walde, Lat. Wtb., s. v. emungo. The Dhtp 376 expls by mocane, Dhtm 609 id.; 631: moce; 765 pamocane
(nt.) 1. release, being freed, deliverance Ja iv.478 (mucc˚); ˚ākāra (muñc˚) means of deliverance (dukkhato from ill) Dhp-a i.267; ˚kāla time of release (dukkhā from suffering Dhp-a ii.11 (mucc˚, v.l. muñc˚).
2. letting loose emitting, giving, bestowing Vb-a 249 (speaking shouting out; Vism reading p. 265 is to be corrected fr mañcana!); Pv-a 132 (v.l. dāna).
abstr. fr. muc
(adj.) sending out or forth, emitting Vv-a 303 (pabhā˚).
fr. muñcana
1. a sort of grass (reed) Saccharum munja Roxb. Snp 440 ˚kesa having a dark mane (like m. grass) DN ii.174 ˚pādukā slipper made of m. grass Dhp-a iii.451. ˚maya made of m. grass Snp 28 ■ The reed itself is called isīkā (q.v.).
2. a sort of fish Ja iv.70 (+ rohita, taken as Dvandva by C.); vi.278 (id.).
Vedic muñja, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 72
see mutoḷī. Otherwise occurring in Np. Muṭa-siva at Mvu 11, Mvu 4.
having forgotten, one who forgets; only in two cpds., viz. ˚sacca [der. fr. foll. muṭṭha + sati + ya] forgetfulness, lit. forgotten-mindedness, usually combd with asampajañña, DN iii.213; AN v.149; Pp 21; Dhs 1349 (where read: yā asati ananussati… adhāraṇatā pilāpanatā sammussanatā) Vb 360, Vb 373; Vism 21; Dhp-a iv.85; & ˚sati(n) (adj. “forgetful in mindfulness,” i.e. forgetful, careless bewildered [cp. BSk. amuṣitasmṛti Lal. V. 562, to all appearance (wrongly) derived from P. musati to rob mus, muṣṇāti] DN iii.252, DN iii.282; SN i.61 (+ asampajāna) Pp 21, Pp 35 (neither passage expld in PugA!); Ja iii.488 Vb-a 275. As ˚satika at Mil 79 ■ Note. muṭṭhasati with var. (unsuccessful) etym. is discussed in detail also by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, pp. 92–94.
pp. of mussati, mṛṣ
(f.) the fist Vv-a 206 muṭṭhī katvā gaṇhāti to take by making a fist, i.e. clutch tightly, clenching one’s fist Ja vi.331 ■ muṭṭhiṃ akāsi he made a fist (as sign) Ja vi.364. As-˚ often meaning “handful.”- ācariya- muṭṭhi close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back from the pupil DN ii.100; SN v.153; Ja ii.221, Ja ii.250; Vv-a 138; Snp-a 180, Snp-a 368. kuṇḍaka˚; handful of rice powder Vv-a 5; Dhp-a i.425 taṇḍula˚; handful of rice Pv-a 131. tila˚; do. of tilaseeds Ja ii.278. paṃsu˚; do. of soil Ja vi.405. ritta˚ an empty fist Snp-a 306 = Dhp-a iv.38 (˚sadisa alluding to ignorance).
-yuddha fist-fight, boxing DN i.6. -sammuñjanī “fistbroom” a short broom Dhp-a ii.184.
Vedic muṣṭi, m. f. Does defn “ muṭ; = maddane” at Dhtm 125 refer to muṭṭhi?
1. a fist-fighter, wrestler, boxer Vin ii.105 (malla˚); Ja iv.81 (Np.); vi.277; Vism 31 (+ malla).
2. a sort of hammer Ja v.45.
fr. muṭṭhi
(adj.) bald, shaven; a shaven, (bald-headed) ascetic, either a samaṇa, or a bhikkhu or (f.) bhikkhunī SN i.175 (m. sanghāṭi-pāruta); Vin iv.265 (f.); Snp p.80 (= muṇḍita-sīsa Snp-a 402) ■ kaṇṇa˚; with cropped or shorn ears (appld to a dog) Pv ii.1210, cp muṇḍaka.
-pabbataka a bare mountain Ja i.303 (Hatthimatta) Vv-a 302 (v.l. for T. muṇḍika-pabbata). -vaṭṭin “shaven hireling” (?), a king’s servant, probably porter Vin ii.137. The expln given by Bdhgh on p. 319 (on CV. v. 29. 5) is twofold, viz. malla-kammakar’ ādayo viya kacchaṃ banditvā nivāsenti; and muṇḍa-veṭṭhī (sic) ti yathā rañño kuhiñci gacchanto parikkhāra-bhaṇḍavahana-manussā ti adhippāyo. Maybe that reading veṭi is more correct. -sira shaven head Dhp-a ii.125.
cp. BSk. muṇḍa
= muṇḍa; cp. BSk. muṇḍaka Divy 13 ■ Snp p.80; Dhp 264 (= sīsa-muṇḍana-matta Dhp-a iii.391 qualification of a shaveling); Vv-a 67 (˚samaṇā, Dvandva) ■ aḍḍha˚; shaven over one half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mvu 6, Mvu 42 ■ kaṇṇa˚; “with blunt corners,” Name of one of the 7 great lakes: see under kaṇṇa. -paṭisīsaka the chignon of a shaveling, in phrase: kāsāyaṃ nivāsetvā muṇḍaka-paṭisīsakaṃ sīse paṭimuñcitvā fastening the (imitation) top-knot of a shaveling to his head Mil 90; cp. Ja ii.197 (paccekabuddha-vesaṃ gaṇhitvā paṭisīsakaṃ paṭimuñcitvā) similarly Ja v.49.
(nt.) the fact of being shaven or shorn Pv-a 106.
abstr. fr. muṇḍa
(nt.) shaving, tonsure Dhp-a iii.391
fr. muṇḍa
(-pabbata) bare (mountain), uncertain T. reading at Vv-a 302 for v.l. SS muṇḍa- pabbata (q.v.).
shaven Snp-a 402 (˚sīsa).
pp. of muṇḍeti
baldness, shaven condition (of ascetics & bhikkhus) MN i.515; Snp 249; Kvu i.95 Sdhp 374.
abstr. fr. muṇḍa
to shave Mhbv 103 ■ pp. muṇḍita ■ The BSk. has only Caus. II muṇḍāpayati, at Divy 261. Should Dhtp 106 “muṇḍ khaṇḍha” be the defn of muṇḍati?-At Ja iii.368 we find muṇḍati for muṇḍeti (kuṇṭha-satthena muṇḍanto viya), which should prob. be read muṇḍento.
Denom ■ Caus. from muṇḍa
thought, supposed, imagined (i.e. received by other vaguer sense impressions than by sight & hearing) MN i.3; Snp 714 (= phusan’ arahaṃ Snp-a 498), 812; Ja v.398 (= anumata C.) Vb 14, Vb 429 sq ■ Often in set diṭṭha suta muta what is seen, heard & thought (? more likely “felt,” cp Nd ii.298: diṭṭha = cakkhunā d., sutaṃ = sotena s. mutaṃ = ghānena ghāyitaṃ, jivhāya sāyitaṃ, kāyena phuṭṭaṃ, and viññātaṃ = manasā v.; so that from the interpretation it follows that d. s. m. v. refer to the action (perception) of the 6 senses, where muta covers the 3 of taste, smell & touch, and viññāta the function of the manas) SN i.186 (K.S. i.237 note); iv.73; Th i.1216. Similarly the psychol. analysis of the senses at Dhs 961: rūp’ āyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ; sadd-āyat. sutaṃ gandh˚, ras˚, phoṭṭhabb˚ mutaṃ; sabbaṃ rūpaṃ manasā viññātaṃ. See on this passage Dhs trsl. § 961 note. In the same sense Dhs-a 388 (see Expositor, ii.439) ■ DN iii.232; Snp 790 (cp. Nd i.87 sq. in extenso 793, 798, 812, 887, 901, 914, 1086, 1122. Thus quite a main tenet of the old (popular) psychology.
-maṅgalika one who prophesies from, or derives lucky auspices from impressions (of sense; as compd with diṭṭha-mangalika visible-omen-hunter, and suta-m sound-augur) Ja iv.73 (where C. clearly expls by “touch”); Kp-a 119 (the same expln more in detail) -visuddhika of great purity, i.e. orthodox, successful, in matters of touch Nd i.89, Nd i.90. -suddhi purity in matter of touch Nd i.104, Nd i.105.
for mata, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. § 18
(f.) sense-perception, experience, understanding, intelligence Snp 864; Nd i.205 (on Snp 846 = hearsay, what is thought); Vb 325 (diṭṭhi, ruci muti, where muti is expld at Vb-a 412 as “mudatī ti muti”!) 328; Sdhp 221. Cp. sam˚.
for mati, cp. muta
a small drum, tabour DN i.79; Vin i.15; SN ii.266 sq. (a famous mythological drum, called Ānaka; same also at Ja ii.344); Ja iv.395 (bheri + ); Kp-a 49. Spelling mudiṅga at SN ii.266; Ja iv.395; Vism 250; Vb-a 232; Vv-a 210 (v.l. SS mutinga), 340 (id.).
-sadda sound of the drum Ja i.3 (one of the 10 sounds hatthi˚, assa˚ etc.).
Sk. mṛdanga on d → t. cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23
(adj.) sensible, intelligent, wise Snp 539; as mutīmā at Snp 61, Snp 321, Snp 385; pl. 881; Ja iv.76 (as mutīmā & mutimā); Nd ii.511 = Nd ii.259. Cp matimant.
fr. muti
a doubtful word occurring only in one stock phrase, viz. “ubhato-mukhā m. pūrā nānā-vihitassa dhaññassa” at MN i.57 (vv.ll. putoḷi, mūṭolī) = iii.90 (mūtoḷī) = DN ii.293 (T. mutoli, v.l. muṭoli; gloss K pūtolī). The Dial. ii.330 trsl. “sample bag” (see note on this passage; with remark “spelling uncertain”) Neumann, Mittlere Sammlung i.101 trsls “Sack.” Kern, Toev. s. v. mutoḷī tries to connect it with BSk moṭa (Hindi moṭh), bundle, which (with vv.ll. mūḍha muṭa, mūṭa) occurs only in one stock phrase “bharaiḥ motaiḥ piṭakaiḥ” at Divy 5, Divy 332, Divy 501, Divy 524. The more likely solution, however, is that mutoḷī is a distortion of puṭosā (puṭosa), which is found as v.l. to puṭaṃsa at all passages concerned (see puṭaṃsa). Thus the meaning is “bag, provision-bag.” The BSk. moṭa (muṭa) remains to be elucidated. The same meaning “provision-bag” fits at Vism 328 in cpd. yāna˚; where spelling is T. ˚paṭṭoli, v.l. BB ˚putoḷi, but which is clearly identical with our term. We should thus prefer to read yāna-puṭosi “carriage-bag for provisions.”
?
1. released, set free, freed; as-˚ free from Snp 687 (abbhā˚ free from the stain of a cloud); Dhp 172 (id.), 382 (id.) ■ Dhp 344; Pv iv.134; Pv-a 65 (su˚).
2. given up or out, emitted sacrificed Vin iii.97 = Vin iv.27 (catta, vanta, m.) AN iii.50 (catta + ). Cp. vi˚.
3. unsystematised. Comp. 9, 137 (vīthi˚).
-ācāra of loose habits DN i.166 = DN iii.40 = Pp 55 (where expld at PugA 231, as follows: vissatth’ ācāro. Uccārakamm’ ādīsu lokiya-kulaputt’ ācārena virahito ṭhitako va uccāraṃ karoti passāvaṃ karoti khādati bhuñjati) -paṭibhāna of loose intelligence, or immoderate promptitude (opp. yutta˚), quick-tempered Pp 42 (cp. PugA 223); Snp-a 110, Snp-a 111; -saddha given up to faith Snp 1146 (= saddhâdhimutta Nd ii.512). -sirā (pl.) with loose (i.e. confused) heads Kp-a 120 = Vism 415.
pp. of muñcati; Sk. mukta
(nt.) urine Vin iv.266 (passāvo muttaṃ vuccati); Pv i.91 (gūthañ ca m.); Pv-a 43, Pv-a 78 Enumd under the 32 constituents of the body (the dvattiṃs-ākāraṃ) at Kp iii. (cp. Kp-a 68 in detail on mutta; do. Vism 264, Vism 362; Vb-a 68, Vb-a 225, Vb-a 248 sq. = MN iii.90 = DN ii.293 etc.
-ācāra see mutta1. -karaṇa “urine-making,” i.e. pudendum muliebre, cunnus Vin iv.260. -karīsa urine & faeces, i.e. excrements Vin i.301; SN iii.85; AN ii.33; Snp 835; Nd i.181; Ja vi.111; Vism 259, Vism 305 Vism 342, Vism 418 (origin of). -gata what has become urine Dhs-a 247 (gūtha˚ + ). -vatthi the bladder Vism 345.
cp. Vedic mūtra; Idg. *meud to be wet, as in Gr. μύζω to suck, μυδάω to be wet; Mhg. smuz (= Ger schmutz), E. smut & mud, Oir. muad cloud (= Sk mudira cloud); Av. muprem impurity, Mir. mūn urine Gr. μιαίνω to make dirty
(adj.) only in cpd. antarā˚; one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167.
mutta1 + ka
(f.) = muttā; ˚maya made of pearls Mvu 27, Mvu 33.
(f.) state of being liberated, freedom Ja v.480.
abstr. fr. mutta1
(f.) a pearl Vv 377 (˚ācita); Pv ii.75 (+ veḷuriya); Mvu 30, Mvu 66. Eight sorts of pearls are enumd at Mvu. 11, 14, viz. haya-gaja-rath’ āmalakā valay’anguli-veṭhakā kakudha-phala-pākatikā, i.e horse-, elephant-, waggon-, myrobalan-, bracelet-, ring-kakudha fruit-, and common pearls.
-āhāra a string or necklace of pearls Ja i.383; Ja vi.489; Dhp-a i.85; Snp-a 78 (simile); Vism 312. -jāla a string (net) of pearls Ja iv.120; Mvu 27, Mvu 31; Vv-a 198. -dāma garland or wreath of p. Mvu 30, Mvu 67 (so T. for v.l. ˚maya). -vali string of pearls Vv-a 169. -sikkā string of pearls Vv-a 244.
cp. Sk. muktā
(f.) release, freedom, emancipation Snp 344 (muty-apekho); Nd i.88, Nd i.89 (+ vimutti & parimutti); Pv-a 35, Pv-a 46; Sdhp 492 ■ Cp vi˚.
fr. muc, cp. Sk. mukti
a pearl vendor, dealer in pearls Mil 262.
fr. muttā
in exegetical expln of “ muti ” at Vb-a 412: mudatī ti muti. See muti.
for modati?
(f.) a certain plant, perhaps Ptychotis ajowan Ja vi.536.
cp. Sk. modayantī
(f.) joy, pleasure DN ii.214 (v.l. pamudā); Sdhp 306, Sdhp 308.
fr. mud, see modati
see mutinga.
pleased, glad, satisfied, only in cpd. ˚mana (adj.) with gladdened heart, pleased in mind Snp 680 (+ udagga); Vv 8315 (+ pasanna-citta) Cp. pa˚.
pp. of mud, modati
(f.) soft-heartedness, kindliness sympathy. Often in triad mettā (“active love” Snp-a 128), karuṇā (“preventive love,” ibid.), muditā (“disinterested love”: modanti vata bho sattā modanti sādhu sutthū ti ādinā mayena hita-sukh’ âvippayogakāmatā muditā Snp-a 128); e.g. at DN i.251; SN v.118; AN i.196 etc. (see karuṇā) ■ Cp. also Snp 73; DN iii.50 DN iii.224, DN iii.248; Mil 332 (˚saññā; + mettā˚, karuṇā˚); Vism 318 (where defined as “modanti tāya, taṃ-samangino sayaṃ vā modati etc.”); Dhs-a 192. See on term Dhs trsl. §251 (where equalled to συγξαιροσύνη); Cpd. 24 (called sympathetic & appreciative), 97 (called “congratulatory & benevolent attitude”); Expos. 200 (interpretation here refers to mudutā Dhs-a 151 “plasticity”).
abstr. fr. mudu, for the usual mudutā, which in P. is only used in ord. sense, whilst muditā is in pregnant sense. Its semantic relation to mudita (pp of mud ) has led to an etym. relation in the same sense in the opinion of P. Commentators and the feeling of the Buddhist teachers. That is why Childers also derivers it from mud, as does Bdhgh ■ BSk. after the Pali: muditā Divy 483
(adj.) soft, mild, weak, tender DN ii.17 = DN iii.143 (+ taluṇa); AN ii.151 (pañcindriyāni mudūni, soft, blunt weak: opp. tikkha); SN ii.268 (˚taluṇa-hatthapādā) Snp 447 (= muduka Snp-a 393); Thag 460 (= loving) Pv i.92; Vism 64; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 230. Compar. mudutara SN v.201.
-indriya (mud˚) weak, slow minded, of dull senses Pts i.121 = Pts ii.195; Vism 87. -citta a tender heart Pv-a 54. -cittatā kind (soft) heartedness Dhp-a i.234. -piṭṭhika having a soft (i.e. pliable) back Vin iii.35 -bhūta supple, malleable DN i.76 (+ kammaniya); Pp 68. -maddava soft & tender (said of food taken by young women to preserve their good looks) Dhs-a 403; -hadaya tender-hearted Dhp-a ii.5.
Vedic mṛdu, fr. mṛd: see maddati; cp. Lat. mollis (fr. *moldṷis); Gr. ἀμαλδύνω to weaken, Cymr blydd soft
(adj.) = mudu.
1. flexible, pliable, soft SN ii.221 (sanghāṭi); Vism 66 (giving in easily, cpd with ukkaṭṭha & majjhima); Kp-a 49 (˚aṭṭhikāni soft bones); Mvu 25, Mvu 102 (sayana); bhūmi Mil 34.
2. soft mild, gentle, kindly, tender-hearted Ja v.83 (m. hadaya) 155; Mil 229 (cittaṃ m.); Snp-a 84 (˚jātika), 393; Dhp-a i.249 (citta); Pv-a 243.
3. soft, weak, pampered spoilt SN ii.268 (of the Licchavi princes) ■ See also maddava, & cp. ati˚.;
fr. mudu
(f.) softness, impressibility, plasticity AN i.9; DN iii.153 (trsln “loveliness”); Dhs 44 (+ maddavatā) 1340 (id.); Vism 463 sq.; Dhs-a 151 (= mudubhāva) cp. Dhs. trsl. §1340.
cp. Sk. mṛdutā; abstr. fr. mudu. See also muditā
(f.) 1. a seal, stamp, impression;- rāja˚; the royal seal Dhp-a i.21. Also with ref. to the State Seal at Mil 280, Mil 281 in cpds. muddakāma (amacca) & mudda-paṭilābha.
2. the art of calculation mentioned as a noble craft (ukkaṭṭhaṃ sippaṃ) at Vin iv.7 (with gaṇanā & lekhā), as the first of the sippāni (with gaṇanā) at MN i.85 = Nd ii.199 Further at Mil 3, Mil 59, Mil 78 sq., 178. Cp. BSk. mudrā in same sense (e.g. at Divy 3, Divy 26, Divy 58 in set lipyā, sankhyā gaṇanā, m.). Bdhgh’s expln of muddā DN i.11 m. + gaṇanā (see DA i.95) as “hattha-muddā-gaṇanā is doubtful; since at Mil 78 sq. muddā & gaṇanā are two quite diff. things. See also Franke,; Dīgha trsl. p. 18, with note (he marks muddā “Finger-Rechnen with?); and cp. Kern, Toev. i.166 s. v. muddā. The Dial. i.21 trsl. “counting on the fingers” (see Dial. i.21 22 with literature & more refs.) ■; hattha˚; is signlanguage gesture (lit. hand-arithmetic), a means of communicating (question & answer) by signs, as clearly evident fr. Ja vi.364 (hattha-muddāya naṃ pucchissāmi… muṭṭhiṃ akāsi, sā “ayaṃ me… pucchati” ti ñatvā hatthaṃ vikāsesi, so ñatvā… ; he then asks by word of mouth) ■ hattha-muddaṃ karoti to make a sign, to beckon Ja iii.528; cp. Vin v.163: na hatthavikāro kātabbo, na hattha-muddā dassetabbā.
-ādhikaraṇa the office of the keeper of the Privy Seal Chancellorship Mil 281.
cp. (late?) Sk. mudrā
(adj. n.) one who practises muddā (i.e. knowledge of signs) DN i.51 (in list of occupations combd with gaṇaka & trsl;dDial. i.68 by “accountant” cp. Franke, Dīgha p. 53, “Finger-rechner”?) Vin iv.8 (m., gaṇaka, lekhaka); SN iv.376 (gaṇaka, m., sankhāyaka).
fr. muddā
(f.) a seal ring, signet-ring, fingerring Ja i.134; Ja iii.416; Ja iv.439; Dhp-a i.394; Dhp-a ii.4 (a ring given by the king to the keeper of the city gates as a sign of authority, and withdrawn when the gates are closed at night); iv.222. aṅguli˚; finger-ring, signetring Vin ii.106; Ja iv.498; Ja v.467 ■ Similarly as at Dhp-a ii.4 (muddikaṃ āharāpeti ) muddikā is fig. used in meaning of “authority,” command; in phrase muddikaṃ deti to give the order, to command Mil 379 (with ref. to the captain of a ship).
fr. muddā
(f.) a vine or bunch of grapes, grape, grape wine Vin i.246 (˚pāna) Ja iv.529; Dhp-a ii.155.
fr. mudu, cp. *Sk. mṛdvīkā
infatuated, bewildered, foolish Ja v.436.
-dhātuka bewildered in one’s nature, foolish(ly Ja iv.391 (v.l. luddha˚); Dhp-a iii.120 (v.l. danta˚ mūḷa˚).;
pp. of muh, for the usual mūḷha, corresp. to Sk. mugdha. Not = mṛddha (of mṛdh to neglect which in P. is maddhita: see pari˚; nor = mṛdhra disdained
the head; top, summit. m. sg. muddhā Snp 983, Snp 1026, & muddhaṃ Snp 989; acc muddhaṃ DN i.95; Snp 987 sq., 1004, 1025; Dhp 72 (= paññāy’ etaṃ nāmaṃ Dhp-a ii.73); & muddhānaṃ MN i.243 MN iii.259 = SN iv.56; instr. muddhanā Mvu 19, Mvu 30; loc muddhani Snp 689, Snp 987; MN i.168; Vism 262; Mvu 36 Mvu 66, in meaning “on the top of (a mountain)”: Vin i.5 (here spelt pabbata-muddhini) = SN i.137; Ja iv.265 (Yugandhara˚); Pv ii.961 (Naga˚ = Sineru˚ Pv-a 138) Vism 304 (vammika˚ on top of an ant-hill) ■ Freq in phrase muddhā (me, or no, or te) sattadhā phaleyya as an oath or exclamn of desecration or warning “(your) head shall split into 7 pieces,” intrs. spelt both phal˚ & phāl˚ at Ja v.92 (te s. phal˚); Mil 157; Dhp-a i.17 (me… phāl˚), 41 (te phalatu s.), 42 (ācariyassa m s. phalissati); iv.125 (no… phāleyya); Vv-a 68 (me s. phal˚) ■ In compn muddha˚.
-(n)aṭṭhi (muddhan-aṭṭhi) bone of the head Kp-a 51 -ādhipāta head- splitting, battering of the head Snp 988 sq., 1004, 1025; -ādhipātin head-splitting (adj.) Snp 1026. -āra head (top) spoke Kp-a 172. -āvasitta “head-anointed” a properly anointed or crowned king DN iii.60 sq., 69; Pp 56; Mil 234. -pāta = ˚âdhipāta.
Vedic mūrdhan, the P. word shows a mixture of a-and n-stem
(f.) foolishness, stupidity, infatuation Ja v.433 (v.l. muṭhatā, muddatā).
fr. muddha1
(adv.) for nothing, gratis Vv-a 77.
Class. Sk. mudhā
(nt.) fathoming, recognising, knowing; a C. word to explain “muni,” used by Dhpāla at Vv-a 114 (mahā-isibhūtaṃ… mahanten’ eva ñāṇena munanato paricchindanato mahā muniṃ), & 231 (anavasesassa ñeyyassa munanato muni).;
fr. munāti, almost equal to mona
to be a wise man or muni, to think, ponder, to know Dhp 269 (yo munāti ubho loke munī tena pavuccati), which is expl;d at Dhp-a iii.396 as follows: “yo puggalo… tulaṃ āropetvā minanto viya ime ajjhattikā khandhā ime bāhirā ti ādinā nayena ime ubho pi atthe mināti munī tena pavuccati.” Note. The word occurs also in Māgadhī (Prk.) as muṇaï which as Pischel (Prk. Gr. § 489) remarks, is usually taken to man, but against this speaks its meaning “to know” & Pāli munāti. He compares maṇaï with Vedic mūta in kāma-mūta (driven by kāma; mūta = pp. of mū = mīv ) and Sk. muni. Cp animo movere.
= manyate, prob. corresponding to Sk. med. manute, with inversion *munati and analogy formation after jānāti as munāti, may be in allusion to Sk. mṛṇāti of mṛ; to crush, or also mā mināti to measure out or fathom. The Dhtm 589 gives as root mun in meaning “ñāṇa.” The word is more a Com. word than anything else, formed from muni & in order to explain it
a holy man, a sage, wise man. I. The term which was specialised in Brahmanism has acquired a general meaning in Buddhism & is applied by the Buddha to any man attaining perfection in self-restraint and insight. So the word is capable of many-sided application and occurs frequently in the oldest poetic anthologies, e.g. Snp 207–221 (the famous Muni-sutta mentioned Divy 20, Divy 35; Snp-a 518; expld Snp-a 254
277) 414, 462, 523 sq., 708 sq., 811 sq., 838, 844 sq., 912 sq. 946, 1074 & passim (see Pj. Index p. 749); Dhp 49, Dhp 225 Dhp 268 sq., 423 ■ Cp. general passages & expl;ns at Pv ii.113; ii.133 (expld at Pv-a 163 by “attahitañ ca parahitañ ca munāti jānātī ti muni”); Mil 90 (munibhāva “munihood,” meditation, self-denial, abrogation) Dhp-a iii.521 (munayo = moneyya-paṭipadāya maggaphalaṃ pattā asekha-munayo), 395 (here expld with ref. to orig. meaning tuṇhībhāva “state of silence = mona) ■ II. The Com. & Abhidhamma literature have produced several schedules of muni-qualities, esp based on the 3 fold division of character as revealed in action, speech & thought (kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚). Just as these 3 are in general exhibited in good or bad ways of living (˚sucaritaṃ & ˚duccaritaṃ), they are applied to a deeper quality of saintship in kāya-moneyya, vacīmoneyya mano-moneyya; or Muni-hood in action speech & thought; and the muni himself is characterised as a kāya-muni, vacī˚ & mano˚. Thus runs the long exegesis of muni at Nd;2 514a = Nd i.57. Besides this the same chapter (514b) gives a division of 6 munis viz. agāra- muni, anagāra˚; (the bhikkhus), sekha˚; asekha˚; (the Arahants), pacceka˚; (the Paccekabuddhas) muni˚; (the Tathāgatas) ■ The parallel passage to Nd ii.514a at AN i.273 gives a muni as kāya-muni, vācā & ceto˚ (under the 3 moneyyāni).;
cp. Vedic muni, originally one who has made the vow of silence. Cp. Chh. Up. viii.5, 2; Pss. of the Br. 132 note. Connected with mūka: see under mukha. This etym. preferred by Aufrecht: Halāyudha p. 311 Another, as favoured by Pischel (see under munāti) is “inspired, moved by the spirit.” Pāli explns (popular etym.) are given by Dhammapāla at Vv-a 114 & 231 see munana
crackling fire, hot ashes, burning chaff Ja ii.134.
*Sk. murmura, lit. crackling, rustling; cp. Lat. murmur = E. murmur, Gr. μορμύρω to rustle, Ohg murmurōn & murmulōn = Ger. murmeln; all to Idg *mrem, to which Sk. marmara: see P. mammara & cp murumurā
to get bewildered to be infatuated, to become dull in one’s senses, to be stupified. Just as rāga, dosa & moha form a set, so do the verbs rajjati, dussati, muyhati, e.g. Mil 386 (rajjasi rajjanīyesu, dussanīyesu dussasi muyhase mohaniyesu). Otherwise rare as finite verb only Dhs-a 254 (in defn of moha) & Sdhp 282, Sdhp 605 (so read for mayhate) ■ pp.; mūḷha & muddha;1.
Vedic muhyati, muh; defn Dhtp 343: mucchāyaṃ; 460: vecitte; cp. moha & momuha
(nt.) bewilderment, stupefaction, infatuation DN-a i.195 (rajjana-dussana-m.).
fr. muyhati
1. a small drum, tambourine Ja v.390; Vv 353 (= bheri Vv-a 161); 8418 (= mudinga Vv-a 340); Snp-a 370.
2. a kind of girdle Vin ii.136.
cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. muraja, Prk. murava: Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 254
(indecl.) the grinding, crackling sound of the teeth when biting bones, “crack”; in phrase m ti khādati to eat or bite up to bits Ja i.342; Ja v.21 (of a Yakkhinī, eating a baby).
onomat. to sound root mṛ; see mammara & mummura
= murumurāyati Ja ii.127; Ja iii.134; Ja v.196 (˚etvā khādati).
to munch, chew, bite up with a cracking sound Ja iv.491. Mulala & Mulali
Denom. fr. murumurā
(f.) the stalk of the lotus:; muḷālī Vin i.215 (bhisa + ); muḷāli Ja vi.530 (= muḷālaka C.); muḷālikā Vin i.215 (bhisa + ); bhisa-muḷālaṃ (nt.) (collective cpd. fibre & stalks Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269; SN iv.94; SN v.39; Vism 361; Vb-a 66 ■ muḷāli-puppha a lotus Thag 1089.
cp. Vedic mulālin. Zimmer, Altind Leben 70 mentions Bisa, Śāluka & Mulālin as edible roots of lotus kinds ■ Geiger,; P.Gr. 12 & 43 puts muḷāla = Sk. mṛṇāla
to betray, beguile bewilder, dazzle, in cakkhūni m. DN ii.183 (but trsln “destructive to the eyes”); musati ‘va nayanaṃ Vv 353 (cp. Vv-a 161).
in this connection = mṛṣ in an active sense, as quâsi Denom. fr. musā. Not to muṣ to steal, which is given at Dhtp 491 with “theyya”
(m. nt.) 1. a pestle (whilst udukkhala is “mortar,” cp. Ja ii.428 & see udukkhala) DN i.166 = Pp 55; Dhp-a ii.131 (+ suppa). 2. a club AN ii.241; Vv-a 121.
3. a crowbar Ja i.199; Pv-a 258 (˚daṇḍa).
cp. Vedic musala. The etym. is probably to be connected with mṛd (see maddati)
(nt.) a little pestle, a toy for little girls Dhs-a 321.
fr. musala
only in cpd. danta˚; (an ascetic) who uses his teeth as a pestle Ja iv.8 (an aggi-pakkaṃ khādati, eats food uncooked, only crushed by his teeth).
(adv.) falsely, wrongly; uṣually with verbs vadati, bhanati bhāsati & brūti; to speak falsely, to tell a lie ■ AN i.149 (opp. saccaṃ); Snp 122, Snp 158, Snp 397, Snp 400, Snp 757, Snp 883, Snp 967 Snp 1131; Nd i.291; Pv i.33; Vv-a 72 (= abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ) Snp-a 19; Pv-a 16, Pv-a 152.
-vāda lying, a falsehood, a lie DN i.4, DN i.25; DN iii.68 sq. 92 sq., 106, 170, 195, 232, 269; MN i.414; Snp 129, Snp 242 (cp. DN ii.174); Dhp 246; Pp 57; Nd i.268; Vv 158 Pv i.68; Vb-a 383 (var. degrees); Pv-a 16; Sdhp 65 explicitly at Nd i.152, Nd i.394; Nd ii.515. Cp. mosavajja -vādin speaking falsely, lying DN i.138; DN iii.15, DN iii.82; Dhp 176; Pp 29, Pp 38.
Vedic mṛṣā, fr. mṛṣ, lit. “neglectfully”
v. intrs. to forget, to pass into oblivion, to become bewildered to become careless DN i.19 (sati m.); Ja v.369 (id.); Snp 815 (= nassati Snp-a 536; = parimussati, paribāhiro hoti Nd i.144) ■ pp. muṭṭha. Cpp. pa˚, pari˚.
= mṛṣ, mṛṣyati; to which musā “wrongly,” quite diff. in origin fr. micchā: mṛṣā → mithyā. Dhtm 437 defines by “sammose,” i.e. forgetfulness
(m. & nt.) a moment, a very short period of time, an inkling, as we should say “a second.”-Its duration may be seen from descending series of time-connotations at Pv-a 198 (under jātakamma, prophesy by astrologers at the birth of a child): rāsi, nakkhatta, tithi, m.; and from defn at Nd ii.516 by “khaṇaṃ, layaṃ, vassaṃ, atthaṃ.” Usually in oblique cases: muhuttena in a short time in a twinkling of an eye Pv-a 55; muhuttaṃ (acc.) a moment, even a second Snp 1138 (m. api); Dhp 65 (id.) 106; Pv-a 43.
Vedic muhūrta, fr. muhur suddenly
(adj.) only for a moment; ˚ā (f.) a temporary wife, in enumn of several kinds of wives at Vin iii.139 & Vv-a 73. Syn. tan-khaṇikā.;
fr. muhutta
is given as root as Dhtp 216 in meaning “bandhana.”
(adj.) dumb Vin i.91 (andha, m., badhira); Snp 713; Dhp-a ii.102 (andha, m., badhira); Snp-a 51 (in simile); Sdhp 12 Freq. combd with eḷa, deaf (q.v.).
Vedic mūka; see etym. under mukha
(nt.) 1. (lit.) root AN ii.200; MN i.233; Dhp-a i.270; Dhp-a iv.200 (opp. patti); Vism 270 (rukkha˚; = rukkha-samīpaṃ); Pv ii.96 (sa˚ with the root); Pv-a 43 (rukkhassa mūle at the foot of).
2. foot bottom Vin ii.269 (patta˚); Pv-a 73 (pāda˚), 76 (id.) rukkha˚; foot of a tree: see under rukkha for special meaning.
3. (appld) ground for, reason, cause, condition defd as “hetu, nidāna, sambhava” etc. at Nd ii.s. v.; Snp 14 = Snp 369 (akusalā mũlā n. pl. = ākāra or patiṭṭhā Snp-a 23); Pv ii.333 (sa˚ with its cause); Dukp 272, 297 312, 320; Mil 12 (& khandha-yamaka, with ref. to the Yamaka). Very freq. in this sense as referring to the three lobha, dosa, moha as conditioning; akusala (absence of them = kusala), e.g. at DN iii.214, DN iii.275; AN i.201; AN i.203; Vb 106 sq., 169, 361; Yam i.1; Vism 454 cp. Nd ii.517; Vb-a 382.
4. origin, source, foundation root (fig.) Vin i.231 = DN ii.91 (dukkhassa); Vin ii.304; Snp 916, Snp 968 (cp. Nd i.344, Nd i.490); Thag 1027 (brahmacariyassa); Dhp 247, Dhp 337. Freq. in formula (may be taken to no. 1) [pahīna] ucchinna-mūla tālâvatthukata etc. with ref. to the origin of saṃsāra, e.g. at SN ii.62, SN ii.88 SN iii.10, SN iii.27, SN iii.161, SN iii.193; SN iv.253, SN iv.292, SN iv.376. See Nd ii.p. 205 s. v. pahīna, in extenso.
5. beginning, base, in mūladivasa the initial day DN-a i.311; also in phrase mūlakāraṇato right from the beginning Vv-a 132 (cp. BSk mūlaṃ kramataś ca id. Divy 491).
6. “substance, foundation, i.e. worth, money, capital, price, remuneration Mil 334 (kamma˚); Dhp-a i.270 (?); Pv-a 273 Mvu 27, Mvu 23. amūla unpaid Mvu 30, Mvu 17 (kamma labour) ■ iṇa˚; borrowed capital DN i.71.
-kanda eatable tuber Dhp-a iii.130; Dhp-a iv.78 (mūlaka˚) See also kanda. -kammaṭṭhāna fundamental k. or k of causes Snp-a 54. -ghacca radically extirpated Dhp 250, Dhp 263. -ṭṭha one who is the cause of something, an instigator Vin iii.75. -dassāvin knowing the cause or reason Snp 1043, cp. Nd ii.517. -phala (eatable) fruit consisting of roots; roots as fruit Snp 239. -bandhana fundamental bond (?) or set of causes (?) Snp 524 sq. 530 sq., cp. Snp-a 429
431. -bīja having seeds in roots i.e. propagated by roots, one of the classes of plants enumd under bījagāma (q.v.). -rasa taste of roots, or juice made fr. roots Vb-a 69; see under rasa.
Vedic mūra & mūla. The root is given as; mūl in 2 meanings, viz. lit. “rohane” Dhtm 859, and fig. “patiṭṭhāyaṃ” Dhtm 391
(adj. nt.) 1. (adj.) (a) (-˚) being caused by, having its reason through or from, conditioned by originating in Vb 390 (taṇhā˚ dhammā); Tikp. 233 sq. 252 sq., 288 sq. & passim; Vb-a 200 sq., 207 sq (sankhāra˚, avijjā˚ etc. with ref. to the constituents of the Paṭicca-samuppāda); Pv-a 19 ■ (b) having a certain worth, price, being paid so much, dear Mvu 27, Mvu 23 (a ˚ṃ kammaṃ unpaid labour); Dhp-a i.398 (nahāna-cuṇṇa ˚ṃ catu-paṇṇāsa-koṭi dhanaṃ, as price) ii.154 (pattha-pattha-mūlakā bhikkhā); iii.296 (kiṃ mūlakaṃ how dear?).
2. (nt.) = mūla, i.e. root bulb, radish, only in cpd. mūlaka-kanda radish (-root Ja iv.88, Ja iv.491; Dhp-a iv.78 ■ See also pulaka.
fr. mūla
(adj. n.) 1. (m.) root-vendor Mil 331.
2. (adj ■ ˚) belonging to the feet (pāda˚), a footman lackey Ja i.122, Ja i.438; Ja ii.300 sq. (Name of the king of Janasandha Gāmaṇi-caṇḍa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30.
3. in rukkha˚; one who lives at the foot of a tree: see under rukkha, where also ˚mūlikatta.
fr. mūla
1. gone astray, erring, having lost one’s way (magga˚) DN i.85 ≈ (˚ssa maggaṃ ācikkhati); Pv iv.148 (id. with pāvadati); Pv-a 112 (magga˚).
2. confused infatuated, blinded, erring, foolish DN i.59; Pv iv.334 (sa˚, better to be written sam˚).
-gabbhā (f.) a woman whose “foetus in utero” has gone astray, i.e. cannot be delivered properly, a woman difficult to be delivered Ja i.407 = Dhp-a iv.192; Mil 169 Vb-a 96. -rūpa foolish Dhp 268; Dhp-a iii.395.
Vedic mūḍha, pp. of muh; cp. also muddha1 = Vedic mugdha
(m.) & mūsikā (f.) a mouse DN ii.107 = Pp 43 (f.); Vism 109 (m.), 252 Kp-a 46 (m.); Mvu 5, Mvu 30 (m.); Vb-a 235.
-cchinna (auguries from the marks on cloth (gnawed by mice) DN i.9 (mūsikā˚; DN-a i.92 mūsika˚ = undurakhāyitaṃ; cp. Dial. i.17). -darī a mouse-hole Ja i.462 (mūsikā˚, so read for musikā˚). -patha “Mouseroad” Name of a road Nd i.155, Nd i.415 (here mūsikā˚) -potikā the young of a mouse Ja iv.188 (mūsika˚). -vijjā mouse craft DN i.9 (cp. DN-a i.93).
Vedic mūṣikā, fr. mūṣ
(f.) a mouse SN ii.270 (mudu˚ a tender, little m.).
Venic mūṣ & mūḥ mouse or rat; cp. Lat. mūs Gr. μϋς, Ohg. mūs = E. mouse. Not to muṣ to steal but to same root as Lat. moveo, to move
is enclitic form of ahaṃ in var. cases of the sg. See under ahaṃ.
(f.) a girdle Ja v.202, Ja v.294 (su˚, adj.); vi.456; Thag-a 35; Kp-a 109; Dhp-a i.39; Pv-a 46.
cp. Vedic mekhalā
(f.) a girdle Vin ii.185 (ahi˚, consisting of a snake).
fr. mekhalā
a cloud Pv ii.945; Vism 126; esp. a thundercloud storm, SN i.100 (thaneti), 154; Th i.307 (as kāḷa) Iti 66; Ja i.332 (pajjunna vuccati megha); Dhp-a i.19; Snp-a 27 (˚thanita-sadda). In this capacity often called mahā-megha, e.g. Snp 30; Dhp-a i.165; Kp-a 21; Pv-a 132 ■ On megha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907 124, 125.
-nātha having clouds as protectors (said with ref. to grass-eating animals) Ja iv.253. -maṇḍala cloud-circle a circle of clouds Snp-a 27. -vaṇṇa cloud-coloured Ja v.321 (C. for megha-sannibha); ˚pāsāṇa a sort of ornamental building stone Mvu 30, Mvu 59 (v.l., T. meda˚ trsl. fat-coloured stones). See meda˚.
Vedic megha; not to mih, mehati (see mīḷha), but to Idg. *meigh-, fog, rain; cp. Sk. miḥ mist; Av maēga cloud; Gr. ὀμίξλη fog, Lith. mighá fog, Dutch miggelen to drizzle, also Ags. mist = Oicel mistr “mist”
(adj.) black, dark blue Dhs-a 13.
cp. Vedic mecaka
to be fat, to be full of fat; fig. to be in love with or attracted by, to feel affection (this meaning only as a “petitio principii” to explain mettā) Dhs-a 192 (v.l. mijjati = siniyhati).
cp. Vedic midyati, to mid, see meda Dhtp 160, Dhtp 413 & Dhtm 641 give; mid with meaning “snehane”
(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) [to medha1] fit for sacrifice, pure; neg. a˚; impure Sdhp 363 Sdhp 2. (nt.) [to medha2 & medhāvin] in; dum˚; foolishness Pp 21 = Dhs 390 (expld at Dhs-a 254 by “yaṃ… citta-santānaṃ mejjhaṃ bhaveyya suci-vodānaṃ taṃ duṭṭhaṃ mejjhaṃ iminā ti dummejjhaṃ”).
*medhya; fr. medha
1. a ram DN i.9; Ja iv.250 Ja iv.353 (˚visāṇa-dhanu, a bow consisting of a ram’s horn) -˚patha Npl. “ram’s road” Nd i.155 = Nd i.415. -˚yuddha ram fight DN i.6.
2. a groom, elephant-driver in cpd hatthi˚; elephants’ keeper Ja iii.431; Ja v.287; Ja vi.489.
dial., cp. Prk. měṇṭha & miṇṭha: Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 293. The Dhtm (156) gives a root meṇḍ (meḍ) in meaning of “koṭilla,” i.e. crookedness. The Ved (Sk.) word for ram is meṣa
(adj.) 1. made of ram(s) horn, said of a (very strong) bow Ja ii.88 (˚dhanu); v.128 (˚singadhanu).
2. belonging to a ram, in meṇḍaka-pañha “question about the ram” Mil 90 alluding to the story of a ram in the Ummagga-jātaka (J vi.353
55), which is told in form of a question, so difficult & puzzling that nobody “from hell to heaven” (J vi.354) can answer it except the Bodhisatta. Cp. Trenckner’s remark Mil 422.
fr. meṇḍa
(adj. nt.) friendly, benevolent kind as adj. at DN iii.191 (mettena kāya-kammena etc.), 245 (˚ṃ vacī-kammaṃ); as nt. for mettā in cpds. of mettā (cp. mettaṃsa) and by itself at DN i.227 (mettaṃ + cittaṃ), perhaps also at Snp 507.
cp. Vedic maitra “belonging to Mitra”; Epic Sk. maitra “friendly,” fr. mitra
(f.) [abstr. fr. mitra = mitta, cp. Vedic maitraṃ. According to Asl. 192 (cp. Expos. 258) derived fr. mid to love, to be fat: “mejjati mettā siniyhatī ti attho” love, amity, sympathy, friendliness, active interest in others. There are var. defns & expl;ns of mettā: the stereotype “ metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ mettā cetovimutti” Vb 86 = Vb 272; occurring as “ metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ anudā anudāyana anudāyitattaṃ hitesitā anukampā abyāpādo… kusalamūlaṃ” at Nd i.488 & Dhs 1056 (where T. mettaṃ for metti, but see Dhs trsl.2 253). By Bdhgh at Snp-a 128 expld in distinction fr. karuṇā (which is “ahita-dukkh-âpanayakāmatā”) as “hita-sukh-ûpanaya-kāmatā,” i.e. desire of bringing welfare & good to one’s fellow-men. Cp def;n of mettā at Vism 317 ■ Snp 73 (see Nd ii.p. 232) 967; DN iii.247 sq., 279; Vism 111, Vism 321 sq.; Snp-a 54; Pv-a 66 (khanti, m., anudaya); Sdhp 484, Sdhp 487. Phrases occurring frequently: mettā ceto-vimutti DN i.251; SN ii.265; AN iv.150; Iti 20; Vb 86 and passim mettā-sahagatena cetasā with a heart full of love DN i.250; DN ii.186; DN iii.49 sq., 78, 223 sq.; SN v.115; AN i.183 AN ii.129; AN iv.390; AN v.299, AN v.344; expld in detail at Vism 308 mettaṃ karoti (loc.) to be friendly or sympathize with Mvu 12, Mvu 23 ■ In cpds. usually mettā˚, but shortened to metta˚; in metta- cittaṃ kindly thought, a heart full of love DN i.167; DN iii.237; Snp 507; Pv ii.1317; Ja vi.71 and metta- jhāna love-meditation, as expln of m ■ citta at Snp-a 417; Pv-a 167.
-aṃsa (mettaṃsa) sympathetic, showing love towards Iti 22 (v.l. ˚āsa); Ja iv.71 (= metta-koṭṭhāsa mettacitta C.). -kammaṭṭhāna the k. of sympathy Dhp-a iv.108. -bhāvanā cultivation or development of friendliness (towards all living beings) Ja i.176; Ja iii.45; Mil 199; Vism 295. -vihārin abiding in kindliness Dhp 368; Dhp-a iv.108; Ne 25; Vism 324; Pv-a 230.
to feel friendly, to show love, to be benevolent AN iv.151; Dhs-a 194; Vb-a 75. With loc. to show friendship or be affectionate towards Ja i.365; Ja iii.96; Dāvs iii.34.
Denom. fr. mettā
(f.) & Mettāyitatta (nt.): see defn of mettā. Metti & Metti
abstr. formations fr. mettā
(f.) love, friendship Ja iii.79; Ja v.208; Vb-a 75. See also defn of mettā.
cp. Epic Sk. maitrī
(f.) is occasional spelling for matteyyatā (q.v.), in analogy to petteyyatā; e.g. Nd ii.294.
(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) relating to sexual intercourse sexual, usually with dhamma, sex intercourse, in phrase ˚ṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati to cohabit Vin i.96; DN ii.133; Snp 291, Snp 704; Nd i.139; Vism 418; Snp-a 536 ■ (m.) an associate Ja vi.294 (na rājā hoti methuno).
2. (nt. sexual intercourse [Vedic maithuna] DN i.4; DN iii.9, DN iii.88 sq. 133; Snp 400, Snp 609, Snp 814, Snp 835 = Dhp-a i.202; Nd i.139, Nd i.145 Pp 67; Vism 51.
fr. Vedic mithuna pair, der. fr. mithu. Cp. micchā
1. one concerned with (illicit) sexual intercourse, a fornicator Nd i.139 (in a wider sense).
2. an associate Vin iii.66.
3. (nt.) coitus Ja ii.360 (= methuna-dhamma C.).
fr. methuna
fat SN i.124; Snp 196; Ja iii.484 (ajakaraṃ medaṃ = ajakara-medaṃ C.); Kp iii. (expld at Vism 262 as “thīnasineha” thick or coagulated fluid or gelatine); Vism 361 Vb-a 66, Vb-a 225, Vb-a 245, Vb-a 249.
-kathālika a cooking pot or saucepan for frying fat AN iv.377 (in simile with kāya); Dhp-a ii.179 (similar) Vism 195 (in compar.). -gaṇṭhi (as medo-gaṇṭhi, Sk influence!) an abscess of fat, fatty knot or tumour mentioned as a disease at Mil 149. -vaṇṇa fatcoloured; in cpd. ˚pāsāna a stone of the (golden) colour of fat found in the Himālaya mountains Snp 447 (= medapiṇḍa-sadisa Snp-a 393); Mvu 1, Mvu 39; Mvu 30, Mvu 57 sq., 96 31, 121; see Geiger’s note Mvu (P.T.S. ed.) p. 355, who puts it beyond doubt, that meda˚ is the correct reading for the v.l. megha˚ at all places.
Vedic medas (nt.) fr. mid, see etym. under mada
in go˚; a precious stone of light-red (or golden) colour (cp. meda-vaṇṇa-pāsāṇa) Vv-a 111.
meda + ka
(f.) the earth (also later Sk.) Mvu 5, Mvu 185; Mvu 15 Mvu 47; Vism 125.
of adj. medin, fr. meda fat, but cp. Vedic medin an associate or companion fr. mid in meaning to be friendly
to become fat MN i.238.
Denom. fr. meda
sacrifice only in assa˚; horse-sacrifice & purisa˚; human s. (q.v.) e.g. at AN iv.151; Snp 303 ■ Cp. mejjha.
Vedic medha, in aśva, go˚, puruṣa˚ etc.
(& ˚ka) quarrel, strife Vin ii.88 (˚ka) Thig 344; Snp 893, Snp 894 (= kalaha, bhaṇḍana, viggaha vivāda Nd i.302, Nd i.303), 935 (T. ˚ka; Nd i.402 & 406 ˚ga with v.l. SS ˚ka); Dhp 6; Ja iii.334 (˚ka; C. = kalaha) 488 (˚ga; C. ˚ka expln kalaha); Dhp-a i.65.
cp. Sk. methana abusive speech; Vedic methati fr. mith to scold
(adj.) having wisdom or intelligence, wise, only in cpds. bhūri˚; of great wisdom Snp 1131; & su˚; [Ved. sumedhas] very wise Vv 222 (= sundara-pañña Vv-a 111); Pv iii.77 (both combd as bhūri-su-medhasa, hardly correct; v.l. M bhūrimedhasa Pv-a 205).
= Vedic medhas, as a- base
(f.) wisdom, intelligence sagacity Nd i.s. v. (m. vuccati paññā); Pp 25; Dhs 16; Dhs-a 148; Pv-a 40 (= paññā) ■ adj. sumedha wise clever, intelligent Snp 177; opp. dum˚; stupid Pv i.82- khīṇa-medha one whose intelligence has been impaired stupefied Ja vi.295 (= khīṇa-pañña).
Vedic medhā & medhas, perhaps to Gr.; μαχ˚ in μανχάνω (“mathematics”)
(f.) cleverness, intelligence Vv-a 229.
abstr. fr. medhāvin
(adj.) intelligent, wise, often combd with paṇḍita & bahussuta;: DN i.120; SN iv.375; AN iv.244; Vin iv.10, Vin iv.13, Vin iv.141; Snp 323 (acc. medhāvinaṃ + bahussutaṃ) 627, 1008 (Ep. of Mogharājā), 1125 (id.) Nd ii.259 (s. v. jātimā, with var. other synonyms) Dhp 36; Ja vi.294; Mil 21; Dhp-a i.257; Dhp-a ii.108; Dhp-a iv.169; Vv-a 131; Pv-a 41.
medhā + in = *medhāyin → medhāvin; already Vedic, cp. medhasa
(f.) pillar, part of a stūpa [not in the Canon?].
Vedic methī pillar, post (to bind cattle to); BSk. medhi Divy 244; Prk. meḍhi Pischel Gr. § 221 See for etym. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. meta
(adj.-n.) = medha in adj. use; only in cpd. dummedhin (= dum-medha) foolish, ignorant Dhp 26 (bālā dummedhino janā; = nippaññā Dhp-a i.257).
(nt.) a sort of intoxicating liquor, spirits, rum, usually combd with surā. DN i.146 DN i.166; MN i.238; Pp 55; Dhp 247; Ja iv.117 (pupphāsav-ādi, i.e. made fr. flowers, cp. defn dhātakī-puṣpaguḍa-dhāny-āmla-sanskṛtaṃ by Mādhava, Halāy. p 314). Five kinds are given by Dhpāla at Vv-a 73 viz. pupph-āsava, phal’ āsava, madhv˚, guḷ˚, sambhārasaṃyutta
Epic Sk. maireya, cp. Halāyudha 2, 175 (Aufrecht p. 314); prob. dial.
in bhayamerita Ja iv.424 = Ja v.359 is to be read as bhaya-m-erita driven by fear; there is no need to change it with Kern, Toev. to perita.
citron (= mātulunga) Ja iii.319 (gloss bella ).
dial. or uncertain reading?
1. (lit.) release, freedom from, in bandhanā m DN i.73 = MN i.276.
2. (fig.) release, deliverance, salvation Vb 426 (jarā-maraṇa˚ from old age & death) Dhp-a i.4 (˚magga + sagga-magga, the way to heaven & salvation), 89, 90 (˚dhamma = salvation) Mvu 5, Mvu 61
3. (lit.) (act.) letting loose, emission, uttering (of speech) Ja i.375.
4. it may (& prob. ought to) be taken as adj. (= *mokṣya, grd. of Caus. of; muc ) at Snp 773 (añña˚, either = 1, as “deliverance for others, or = 4, as “to be delivered by others.” Bdhgh at Snp-a 516 gives both explns: aññe mocetuṃ (na) sakkonti kāraṇa-vacanaṃ vā etaṃ: aññena mocetabbā (na) honti).
late Vedic & Epic Sk. mokṣa, fr.; muc, see muñcati. Dhtp 539 mokkha = mocana; Dhtm 751 moca
(adj.) the headmost, first, foremost, in series aggo seṭṭho m uttamo AN ii.95, where the customary tradition reads pāmokkha (see under mahā & cp. Nd;2 502A).
fr. mukha 6; Vṛddhi form = *maukhya
= mokkha2; thus we should read at Ja i.441 for mukkhaka.
(m. or ˚ā f.) tumbling, turning somersaults, an acrobatic feat; in list of forbidden amusements at DN i.6 (cp. DN-a i.86; samparivattaka-kīḷanaṃ, i.e. playing with something that rolls along, continuously turning The foll. sentence however seems to imply turning head over heels: “ākāse vā daṇḍaṃ gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ vā sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā heṭṭh-upariya (so read!)-bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṃ”; i.e. trapeze-performing. Cp Dial. i.10 & Vin. Texts ii.184). The list re-occurs at Vin ii.10 (˚āya: f.! kīḷanti); iii.180; MN i.266≈and AN v.203 (with important v.l. mokkhaṭika, which would imply mokkha & ending; tiya, and not ˚cika at all The Cy. on this passage expls as: daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā heṭṭh-uppariya (sic. as DN-a i.86; correct to upariya?-bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṃ). The word is found also at Vin i.275, where the boy of a Seṭṭhi in Bārāṇasī contracts injuries to his intestines by “mokkhacikāya kīḷanto,” playing (with a) m ■ According to its use with kīḷati & in instr.; mokkhacikena (Nd ii.219 may be either a sort of game or an instrument (toy) with which children play.
see on attempt at etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1885, 49 who takes mokkha as fr. muc “tumbling” & cika = “turning” fr. cak = cik. The word remains obscure, it must be a dialectical expression distorted by popular analogy & taken perhaps; from a designation of a place where these feats or toys had their origin. More probable than Morris’ etym is an analysis of the word (if it is Aryan) as mokkha mokkha2, in meaning “head, top,” so that it may mean “head over,” top-first” & we have to separate *mokkhac-ika the ˚ika representing ˚iya “in the manner of like” & -ac being the adv. of direction as contained in Sk. prāñc = pra-añc.
see under muñcati.
(adj.) empty, vain useless, stupid, foolish DN i.187 (opp. to sacca), 199; Snp 354; Dhp 260 (˚jiṇṇa grown old in vain; C. expls as tuccha-jiṇṇa Dhp-a iii.388); Dhp-a i.110 (patthanā a futile wish); Pv-a 194 ■ Opp. amogha SN i.232; Ja vi.26; Dhp-a ii.34 (˚ṃ tassa jīvitaṃ: not in vain).
-purisa a stupid or dense fellow Vin iv.126, Vin iv.144.
the Vedic mogha for the later Sk. moha, which is the P. noun moha; fr. muh. BSk. mohapuruṣa e.g. at Avs ii.177; Mvu iii.440
the plantain or banana tree’ Musa, sapientum Vin i.246 (˚pāna drink made fr. M. s. one of the 8 permitted drinks); Ja iv.181; Ja v.405, Ja v.465.
cp. *Sk. moca & mocā
delivery, setting free Dhtm 631, Dhtm 751, where Dhtp in same context reads mocana.
root-noun of moc, Caus. of muc
(nt.) 1. setting free, delivering Dhp-a iii.199 (parissayā˚); Dhtp 376, Dhtp 539; Dhtm 609. Cp moca2.
2. letting loose, discharging, in assu˚; shedding tears Pv-a 18. Cp. vi˚.
fr. moceti
(adj.) to be freed, able to escape, in dum˚; difficult to obtain freedom Ja vi.234.
quâsi grd. formation fr. moceti
(nt.) causing one’s freedom, deliverance Ja vi.134.
fr. Caus. II. mocāpeti
one who sets free, a deliverer Nd i.32.
M. ag. fr. moceti
1. to deliver, set free, release, cause one’s release or deliverance from (abl.). imper praes. mocehi Pv ii.16 (duggatiyā); Pv-a 12; aor. mocesi Pv-a 112 (dāsavyato); ger. mocetvā Pv-a 8, Pv-a 77; inf mocetuṃ Pv-a 45 (petalokato).
2. to discharge, emit (semen in coitu) Vin iii.36, Vin iii.39 (as Caus II.), 110.
3. to let loose, set into motion, stir: padaṃ m. to run Ja iii.33
4. to discharge, fulfil: paṭiññaṃ one’s promise Dhp-a i.93.
5. to unharness Dhp-a i.67.
6. to detach SN i.44 ■ Caus. II. mocāpeti to cause to be freed, to give freedom, to let loose Vin iv.316 (opp. bandhāpeti).
Caus. of muñcati
see mutoḷī.
BSk. moṭa, Prk. mrḍa: Pischel § 166, 238
one who feels (or senses) that which can be felt (or sensed), in phrase “mutaṃ na maññati motabbaṃ (so read) na maññati motāraṃ” he does not identify what is sensed with that which is not sensed nor with what is to be sensed (motabba ) nor with him who senses AN ii.25; where motar & motabba correspond to sotar & sotabba & daṭṭhar & daṭṭhabba. The word does not occur in the similar passage MN i.3.
n. ag. fr. munāti, more likely direct der. fr. muta, pp. of man, q.v.
1. a sort of sweetmeat SN i.148; AN i.130; AN iii.76; Pp 32; Pv-a 4. 2. receptacle for a letter, an envelope, wrapper or such like Ja vi.385 (paṇṇaṃ ˚assa anto pakkhipitvā). May however, be same ạs 1.
cp. Epic. Sk. modaka in meaning 1
to rejoice, to enjoy oneself, to be happy AN iii.40; Snp 561; Pv i.54; ii.121 ■ pp. mudita (q.v.). For mohayamāna at Dhp-a i.275 the better reading is modayamāna rejoicing, a ppr. med.
mud, cp. Vedic moda joy Dhtp 146: tose
(nt.) satisfaction, rejoicing Sdhp 229. Cp. sam˚.
fr. mud
(f.) blending (?); Cy. expln at Dhs-a 143 of term āmodanā.
fr. mud
: In modara at Ja v.54 (of elephant’s teeth) Kern, Toev. s. v. sees a miswriting for medura (full of, beset with), which however does not occur in Pali. The C expln is “samantato obhāsento,” i.e. shining.
(nt.) wisdom, character, self-possession Snp 540 (˚patha = ñāṇa-patha Snp-a 435), 718, 723; Nd i.57 Nd ii.514 A (= ñāṇa & paññā); Thag 168 (what is monissaṃ? fut. 1st sg. of ?).
fr. muni, equal to *maunya taken by Nd as root of moneyya
(nt.) state of a muni, muni-hood; good character, moral perfection This is always represented as 3 fold, viz. kāya˚, vacī˚ mano˚ (see under muni), e.g. at DN iii.220; AN i.273 Nd i.57; Nd ii.514 A (where also used as adj.: moneyyā dhammā properties of a perfect character). Cp. also Snp 484, Snp 698, Snp 700 sq. On moneyya-kolāhala (forebodings of the highest wisdom) see the latter.
fr. muni, cp. Vedic moneya
(adj.) dull, silly, stupid, infatuated, bewildered (cp Cpd. 833) DN i.27; AN iii.164 sq.; Snp 840, Snp 841, Snp 1120 Nd i.153 (= manda), 192; Nd ii.521 (= avidvā etc.) Pp 65.
intens ■ redupl. formation fr. moha & muh
(nt.) silliness, foolishness, bewilderment of the mind MN i.520; AN iii.119, AN iii.191, AN iii.219 (= mandatta); Pp 69.
abstr. fr. momūha
f. pea-hen a peacock Ja ii.275 (˚upasevin, see C. on this passage) vi.218, 497; Pv-a 142; Dhp-a i.394. A peacock’s tail (sometimes used as a fan) is denoted in var. terms in cpds., as mora-kalāpa Dhp-a i.387; -piccha Vin i.186 -piñcha Vin ii.130; -pīñja Pv-a 142, Pv-a 176; Vv-a 147 -sikali (?) Kp-a 49; -hattha Vv 3344 (= mayūra-piñjehi kataṃ makasa-vījaniṃ); Pv iii.117. Perhaps also as morakkha “a peacock’s eye” at Vb-a 63 (morakkhaka loha, a kind of copper, grouped with pisācaloha). It is more likely however that morakkha is distorted fr. *mauryaka, patronymic of mura, a local (tribal) designation (cp. murala), then by pop. etym connected with mora peacock. With this cp. Sk moraka “a kind of steel” BR.
the contracted, regular P. form of *Sk. mayūra, viâ *ma-ūra → mora. See also Geiger, P.Gr. § 27 Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 166. Vedic only mayūrī
a tender grass (Achyranthes aspera) Vin i.196.
cp. (scientific) Sk. mayūraka
(f.) a peahen Mil 67.
fr. mora
(m. & f.) a chignon; crest, turban Ja i.64; Ja v.431; Mvu 11, Mvu 28; DN-a i.136 (v.l. moḷi). Also found (as molin, adj.?) in Np Yama-moli: see under yakkha 5.
-galla (?) fat Vin i.85 (expld by thūla-sarīra; vv. ll moḷi˚ & mukalla).; -baddha one who has his hair tied into a top-knot 128, 243, 348.
cp. Epic Sk. mauli, fr. mūla
(˚-) (adj.-n..) belonging to or untruth, false-; only in cpds. -dhamma of a deceitful nature, false, AN v.84 (kāma); Snp 739, Snp 757 & -vajja [fr. musā-vāda] false-speaking, lie, untruth SN i.169; Snp 819, Snp 866, Snp 943; Nd i.152, Nd i.265; Nd ii.515; Vv 126.
the guṇa (compn) form of musā
(adj.) worthy of being slain (with clubs), punishable AN ii.241.
fr. musala
stupidity, dullness of mind & soul, delusion bewilderment, infatuation DN iii.146, DN iii.175, DN iii.182, DN iii.214, DN iii.270; Vin iv.144, Vin iv.145; Snp 56, Snp 74, Snp 160, Snp 638, Snp 847; Vb 208, Vb 341 Vb 391, Vb 402; Pp 16; Tikp 108, 122, 259 ■ Defd as “dukkhe aññāṇaṃ etc., moha pamoha, sammoha avijj’ ogha etc.,” by Nd ii.99 & Vb 362; as “muyhanti tena, sayaṃ vā muyhati, muyhana-mattaṃ eva vā tan ti moho” and “cittassa andha-bhāva-lakkhaṇo, aññāṇalakkhaṇo vā” at Vism 468 ■ Often coupled with rāga & dosa; as one of the 3 cardinal affects of citta, making a man unable to grasp the higher truths and to enter the Path: see under rāga (& Nd;2 p. 237, s. v. rāga where the wide range of application of this set is to be seen). Cp. the 3 fires: rāg-aggi, dos-aggi, moh-aggi Iti 92; DN iii.217 also rāga-kkhaya, dosa˚, moha˚ Vb-a 31 sq ■ On combn with rāga, lobha & dosa see dosa;2 and lobha ■ On term see also Dhs trsl. §§ 33, 362, 441 Cpd 16, 18, 41, 113, 146 ■ See further DN i.80 (samoha-cittaṃ); Nd i.15, Nd i.16 (with lobha & dosa); Vv-a 14; Pv-a 3 ■ amoha absence of bewilderment Vb 210 (+ alobha, adosa; as the 3 kusala-mūlāni: cp. mūla 3) 402 (id., as kusala-hetu) ■ Cp. pa˚, sam˚.
-antara (personal) quality of bewilderment (lit having m. inside) Snp 478 (taken by C. as “cause of m.,” i.e. ˚kāraṇa, ˚paccaya Snp-a 411; cp. antara = kāraṇa under antara I 2 b.). -ussada quality of dullness Nd i.72, Nd i.413. -kkhaya destruction of infatuation Vb 73; Vb-a 51. -carita one whose habit is infatuation Ne 90 (+ rāgacarita & dosacarita).; -tama the darkness of bewilderment MA 1. -dhamma anything that is bewildering or infatuating Snp 276. -pāruta covered or obstructed by delusion Pv iv.334. -magga being on the road of infatuation Snp 347. -salla the sting of bewilderment Nd i.59.
fr. muh, see muyhati; cp. Sk. moha & Vedic mogha
(nt.) infatuation, bewilderment AN ii.120; AN iii.376.
abstr. fr. moha
(nt.) making dull or stupid, infatuation, enticement, allurement Snp 399, Snp 772 (= mohanā vuccanti pañca kāmaguṇā Nd i.26). The Sk. meaning is also “sexual intercourse” (cp. Halāyudha p. 315), which may apply to the Snp p.ssages Snp-a 517 (on Snp 772) expls “mohanaṃ vuccati kāmaguṇā, ettha hi deva-manussā muyhanti.”
fr. muh as Caus. formn
(adj.) leading astray, bewildering, leading into error Vin iv.144. Mohaneyya & Mohaniya;
fr. mohana
(adj.) leading to infatuation AN ii.120; AN iii.110; Ja iii.499.
grd. formn fr. moha
to deceive, to befool, to take in, surprise, delude, aor 2;nd sg. amohayi Snp 352; Snp 3rd sg. amohayi SN iv.158; Iti 58 (maccu-rājan; vv.ll. asamohayi & asamohari) reading somewhat doubtful, cp. similar context Snp 1076 with “sabbesu dhammesu samūhatesu ” (v.l. samoha˚).
3rd sg. (poet.) also amohayittha Snp 332 (mā vo pamatte viññāya maccurājā amohayittha vasānuge cp. Sn ed. p. 58) ■ On mohayamāna Dhp-a i.275 see modati.
Y.
Caus. fr. muh, see muyhati & cp. moha
combn consonant (sandhi), inserted (euphonically) between 2 vowels for the avoidance of hiatus. It has arisen purely phonetically from i as a sort of “gliding or semi-vowel within a word, where the syllable division was in regular speech more openly felt than in the written language, e.g. pari-y-āpanna (Pāli) corresponds to Sk. pary-āpanna, similarly pari-y-osāna = Sk paryosāna. Thus inserted after a before i or e: chay-imā disā DN iii.188; ta-y-idaṃ Snp 1077; Pv i.33 tava-y-idaṃ Snp 352; na-y-idaṃ SN ii.278; mama-y-idaṃ Snp 806; na-y-idha Snp 790; mā-y-idha Vin i.54; yassay-etādisī pajā DN ii.267 (v.l. ss for T yassa-s-etādisī) satiyā-y-etaṃ adhivacanaṃ MN ii.260; na-y-imassa Pv iv.12 ■ After i before a: pāvisi-y-assamaṃ Ja v.405 khaṇi-y-asmani Ja iii.433; yā-y-aññaṃ Ja i.429 (where C. expls: ya-kāro paṭisandhi-karo) ■ Cp. yeva for eva ■ Note. At Ja vi.106 ya-y-ime jane is to be taken as ye ime jane; the spelling ay for e being found elsewhere as well. Cp. the following ta-y-ime jane.
I. Forms. (See inflection also at Geiger, P.Gr. § 110.) The decl. is similar to that of ta˚ among the more rarely found forms we only mention
the foll.: sg. nom. m. yo with by-form (in hiatus) yv- as yv’āyaṃ = yo ayaṃ MN i.258; yv’āssa = yo assa MN i.137 Notice the lengthening of the subsequent vowel. An unsettled ya is to be found at Ja v.424 (Fausböll remarks “for yassā”?; perhaps to be combd with preceding pañcapatikā; C. on p. 427 expls ya-kāro nipātamatto)-abl. yasmā in adv. use; yamhā Dhp 392 ■ loc. yamhi Dhp 261, Dhp 372, Dhp 393 ■ f. loc. yassaṃ AN iii.151 (see below). See further adv. use of cases (below ii.5) ■ At Pv ii.16 yāhi is doubtful (perhaps imper. = yajahi, of yajati; C. leaves it unexpld).
Special mention must be made of the nt. n. acc. sg. where both yaṃ and yad are found. The (Vedic) form yad (Ved. yat) has been felt more like ya + expletive (Sandhi-) d, and is principally found in adv. use and certain archaic phrases, whereas yaṃ represents the usual (Pali) form (like tad and taṃ ). See more under II ■ A Māgadhized form is ye (after se = taṃ), found at DN ii.278 (see Geiger § 1052 & 110;2. Cp. Trenckner Notes 75.). The expression ye-bhuyyena may belong under this category, if we explain it as yad + bhuyyena (bhuyyena equivalent to bhiyyoso). It would then correspond to seyyathā (= sad + yathā, cp. sayathā sace, taṃyathā). See refs. under yebhuyyena ■ The expression yevāpanaka is an adj. formn from the phrase ye-vā-pana (= yaṃ vā pana “whatever else there is”) i.e. belonging to something of the same kind, i.e. corresponding, reciprocal, as far as concerned, respective (See s. v.)-In adv. use it often corresponds to E. as; see e.g. yad-icchakaṃ, yad-idaṃ (under ii.2 b ii.4 b.).
II. Meaning: “which,” in correspondence to a following demonstr. pron. (ta˚); whichever (generalizing); nt. what, whatever. In immediate combn with the demonstr. pron. it is qualifying and specifying the person, thing or subject in discussion or question (see below 4).
1. Regular use as correl. pron., when ya˚; (+ noun) is followed by ta˚; (+ noun). Sometimes (in poetry) the reverse is the case, e.g. at Iti 84 where ta˚; (m. sa) is elliptically omitted: atthaṃ na jānāti yaṃ lobho sahate naraṃ “he does not know good, whom greed overcomes ■ Otherwise regular, e.g. : yassa jātarūparajataṃ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti SN iv.326 In a generalizing sense (cp. below ii.3): yo vā so vā “der erste beste,” some or other, whoever, any Ja iv.38 Ja v.362; yaṃ vā taṃ vā karotu let her do whatever she likes Vv-a 208; yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā on every occasion SN i.160 na yo vā so vā yakkho not this or that yakkha i.e. not any (ordinary) kind of Yakkha (but Inda DN-a i.264 ■ The same use (ordinary correlative) applies to the nt. forms yaṃ & yad; in correl. to taṃ and tad (See sep. under II. 2.)
2. Use of nt. forms.-(a) nt. yaṃ (a) as pronoun SN iii.44 (yaṃ dukkhaṃ… tad anattā); Iti 78 (yañ c’ aññaṃ whatever else); Vb-a 54 (yaṃ labbhati yañ ca na labbhati taṃ sabbaṃ pucchitvā). See also under 3 a (yaṃ kiñci, yaṃ yaṃ) ■ (b) as adj. adv.: yaṃmukha facing what, turned where (?) Ja v.475 (but C reads & expl;s sammukha!); yaṃ-vipāka having what or which kind of fruit DN ii.209. yaṃ vā… yaṃ vā whether… or SN ii.179; yaṃ no… na tv’ eva neither… nor SN ii.179–180 ■ yaṃ with pot.: “so that,” that (corresp. to Lat. ut consecutivum) SN iii.41 (yaṃ rūpe anatt’ ânupassī vihareyya). Ja v.339 (n’ esa dhammo yaṃ taṃ jahe that I should leave you) ■ In the function of other conjunctions e.g. as temporal when, since, after: Ja iv.319 (yaṃ maṃ Suruci-m-ānayi that, or since, S. married me). As conditional or causal = if, even if, because: Vin i.276 (yaṃ te sakkā… arogaṃ kātuṃ, taṃ karohi if it is possible… do it; or may be taken in sense of “in whatever way you can do it, do”); Ja iii.206 = Ja iv.4 (yaṃ me sirasmiṃ ūhacca cakkaṃ bhamati matthake = because; C.: yena pāpena) ■ (c) as adv. deictive “so,” in combn with var other (emphatic) particles as e.g. yaṃ nūna used in an exhortative sense “well, now”; or “rather, let me” or “so now,” always in phrase yaṃ nūn’ āhaṃ “now then let me” (do this or that) very freq., either with foll. pot., e.g. “y. n. âhaṃ araññaṃ paviseyyaṃ Dhp-a ii.91. “y. n. â. katakammaṃ puccheyyaṃ Vv-a 132; dasseyyaṃ Vv-a 138; pabbajjeyyaṃ MN ii.55 āneyyaṃ Dhp-a i.46, vihareyyaṃ ibid. 56; etc. cp. Ja i.14 Ja i.150, Ja i.255; Ja iii.393; Dhp-a i.91; Pv-a 5 (avassayo bhaveyyaṃ) ■ Similarly yañ hi “well then, now then (with Pot.) SN ii.210, SN ii.221 (taṃ vadeyya). Cp. yagghe yañ ca & yañ ce; [Sk. yac ca, or cet, ca here = ce see ca & cp. sace = sa + ce] (rather) than that: yañ ca Thig 80; Ja i.210; yañce (with Pot.) SN i.176; Iti 43; Thag 666 sangāme me mataṃ seyyo yañ ce jīve parājito (than that I live vanquished) Snp 440 (cp. the intricate expln at Snp-a 390); similarly Ja iv.495: me maraṇaṃ seyyo yañ ce jīve tayā vinā ■ (b) nt. yad: (a) as pron in regular relative use e.g. SN iii.44 (yad aniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ); Iti 59 (yad eva diṭṭhaṃ tad ev’ âhaṃ vadāmi). (b) as adv., e.g. yad-agge (loc.) from what on, i.e. from which time, since what time DN i.152 (= mūladivasato paṭṭhāya yaṃ divasaṃ aggaṃ patvā DN-a i.311); Vv 8433 (= yato paṭṭhāya Vv-a 344) Also as yad-aggena (instr.) Vin ii.257 (y. Mahāpajāpati-gotamiyā aṭṭha garudhammā paṭiggahitā tad eva sā upasampannā); Vb-a 387 ■ yad-atthaṃ for what, why Thig 163. yad-atthiya as much as necessary, as required, sufficient, proper Thag 12 Thag 1274 (“which, for the goal desirous, he led” trsl. refers to brahmacariyaṃ). The same verse occurs at Snp 354. The latter passage is mentioned in P.D under atthiya with meaning “on account of what (cp. kim-atthiyaṃ SN iii.189). The Snp p.ssage is not expld in Snp-a ■ yad-icchakaṃ whatever is pleasant i.e. according to liking, as he pleases AN iii.28; Pp 11 Pp 12; Ja i.141 (y. bhutta eaten heartily); Vism 154 (+ yavadicchaka); Vv-a 341. Cp. yen’ icchakaṃ below II. 5- yad-icchita see under yathā-icchita! -yadidaṃ: see below II. 4 b.
3. Generalizing (or distributive) use of ya: There are two modes of generalization, viz. (a) by repeating ya˚; yassa yass’ eva sālassa mūle tiṭṭhasi, so so muñcati pupphāni; “at the foot of whichever tree you stand he (in all cases concerned) sheds flowers” Vv 393; yaṃ yaṃ hi manaso piyaṃ “whatever is pleasant to the senses” Pv ii.118; yaṃ yaṃ passati taṃ taṃ pucchati “whomsoever he sees, him he asks” Ja iii.155; yassaṃ yassaṃ disāyaṃ viharati, sakasmiṃ yeva vijite viharati” in whichever region he lives, he lives in his own realm” AN iii.151; yo yo yaṃ yaṃ icchati tassa tassa adāsi “whatever anybody wished he gave to him Pv-a 113; yaṃ yaṃ padesaṃ bhajati tattha tatth’ eva assa lābhasakkāro nibbattati “whichever region he visits, there (in each) will he have success” Dhp-a ii.82-(b) by combination with ko-ci (cp. the identical Lat qui-cun-que): yassa kassaci rāgo pahīno ayaṃ vuccati… “the lust of whosoever is abandoned he is called so & so” Iti 56. yāni kānici vatthūni… sabbāni tāni… Iti 19; ye keci ārabbha “with ref. to whosoever” Pv-a 17; yaṃ kiñci whatever Pv i.41.
4. Dependent & elliptic; use of ya (with pron demonstr.). This represents a sort of deictic (emphatic) use, with ref. to what is coming next or what forms the necessary compliment to what is just being said. Thus it introduces a general truth or definition as we would say “just this, namely, i.e.,” or Ger. “so wie, und zwar.”-(a) The usual combns are those of ya + sa (nt. taṃ) and of ya + ayaṃ (nt. idaṃ), but such with amu (nt. aduṃ) also occur: yaṃ aduṃ khettaṃ aggaṃ evam eva mayhaṃ bhikkhu-bhikkhuniyo “as there is one field which is the best, thus to me the bh & bhikkhunīs” SN iv.315. Cp. the foll.: ya + sa e.g. at MN i.366 (yo so puriso paṭhamaṃ rukkhaṃ ārūḷho sace so na khippam eva oroheyya “just that man, who climbed up the tree first, if he does not come down very quickly”); Ja ii.159 (yena tena upāyena with every possible means); Pv i.91 (yā tā [so read for yā ca! “just she over there; who as such, i.e. such as she is”) cp. also the foll.: yā sā sīmā… taṃ sīmaṃ Vin i.109 ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā etc.… sātthaṃ brahmacariyaṃ abhivadanti tathā rūpā ‘ssa dhammā honti… MN iii.11; yāni etāni yānāni (just) these Dhp-a iv.6- ya + ayaṃ e.g. at MN i.258 (yv’ āyaṃ vado vedeyyo tatra tatra… vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti); Iti 35 = Iti 93 (nibbāpenti moh’aggiṃ paññāya yā ‘yaṃ nibbedha-gāminī “as it is also penetrating, which as such, or in this quality, or as we know, is penetrating”); Vin iv.134 (ye ‘me antarāyikā dhammā vuttā… te paṭisevato n’ âlaṃ antarāyāya “just those which, or whichever”) Thag 124 (panko ti hi naṃ avedayuṃ yâyaṃ vandanapūjanā; here = yā ayaṃ); Dhp 56 (appamatto ayaṃ gandho yâyaṃ tagara-candanī; here = yo ayaṃ); MN ii.220 (yaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ… taṃ) ■ (b) nt. yadidaṃ lit. “as that,” which is this (i.e. the following) may be translated by “viz.,” that is, “i.e.” in other words, so to speak, just this, “I mean”; e.g. kāmānaṃ etaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yad idaṃ nekkhammaṃ “there is an escape from the lusts, viz. lustlessness”; or: “this is the abandoning of lusts, in other words lustlessness Iti 61; dve dānāni āmisa˚ dhamm˚, etad aggaṃ imesaṃ yad idaṃ dhamma˚ “this is the best of them, I mean dh-d.” Iti 98 = Iti 100; supaṭipanno sāvaka-sangho, y. i cattāri purisa-yugāni etc. MN i.37. Instead of yadidaṃ we also find yāvañ c’ idaṃ. See also examples given under yāvatā.
5. Cases used adverbially: Either locally or modally with regards to the local adverbs it is to be remarked that their connotation is fluctuating, inasmuch as direction and place (where) are not always distinguished (cp. E. where both meanings = where & where-to), but must be guessed from the context. (a) instr.; yena: (local where (i.e. at which place) DN i.71 (yena yena wherever) 220 (yattha yena yahiṃ = whence, where, whither; not with trslnDial. I. 281: where, why, whence!), 238 (id.) yenatena where (he was)-there (he went) DN i.88, DN i.106 DN i.112 & passim; cp. DN ii.85 (yena âvasath’ âgāraṃ ten upasankami); AN ii.33 (yena vā tena vā here & there or “hither & thither”) ■ (modal) Dhp 326 (yen’ icchakaṃ ii. 2 b.); Pv i.112 (kiṃ akattha pāpaṃ yena pivātha lohitaṃ: so that) ■ loc. yahiṃ where (or whither) Vv 8429 (yahiṃ yahiṃ gacchati tahiṃ tahiṃ modati); & yasmiṃ yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā on every occasion SN i.160 ■ abl yasmā (only modal) because AN i.260; Iti 37 (corresp. to tasmā). On yasmā-t-iha see Geiger, P.Gr. 735.
pron. rel. base; Vedic yaḥ = Gr. ο ̔́ς who; cp. Goth. jabai if,-ei rel. part. An amplification of the dem pron. base *i-, *ei-(cp. ayaṃ). See on detail Brugmann “Die indogerm. Pronomina” in Ber. d. sächs Ges. LX. 41 sq.
(nt.) the liver Kp iii. MN i.57, MN i.421; DN ii.293; AN v.109; Mil 26; Vism 257 Vism 356; Vb-a 60, Vb-a 240. The old n-stem is to be seen in cpd yaka-peḷa (q.v.). Yaka-pela
fr. gen. yaknaḥ or sec. stem yakan-of Vedic yakṛt; cp. Av. yākars; Gr. ἡπαρ, Lat. jecur. In formation cp. P. chakana fr. Ved. śakṛt.
the lump of the liver Snp 195 (= yakana-piṇḍa Snp-a 247) = Ja i.146. Dines Andersen suggests: “Could y ■ p. possibly be an old error for sakapeḷa cp. Sk. śaka-piṇḍa & śakṛt-piṇḍa?” Cp. paṭala (ref. Vism 257). Ya-kara
see peḷa
1. the letter (or sound) y: Ja i.430 (padasandhikara); iii.433 (vyañjana-sandhi-vasena gahita).
2. the letter (or syllable) ya: Ja v.427 (nipāta-matta). It is referred to at Vin iv.7 as an ending implying ridiculing or insult, together with the ending ˚bha. The Cy. means words like dāsiya gumbiya, bālya etc. where-ya either denotes descendency or property, or stands for-ka as diminutive (i.e. (disparaging) ending. The same applies to ˚bha Here at Vin iv.7 this way of calling a person by means of adding -ya- or -bha to his name (cp. E ■ y in kid → kiddy etc.) is grouped with a series of other terms of insult (hīnā akkosā).
ya + kāra
1. name of certain non-human beings, as spirits, ogres, dryads, ghosts spooks. Their usual epithet and category of being is amanussa, i.e. not a human being (but not a sublime god either); a being half deified and of great power as regards influencing people (partly helping, partly hurting). They range in appearance immediately above the Petas; many “successful” or happy Petas are in fact Yakkhas (see also below). They correspond to our “genii” or fairies of the fairy-tales and show all their qualities. In many respects they correspond to the Vedic Piśācas, though different in many others and of diff. origin. Historically they are remnants of an ancient demonology and of considerable folkloristic interest, as in them old animistic beliefs are incorporated and as they represent creatures of the wilds and forests, some of them based on ethnological features See on term e.g. Dial. iii.188; on their history and identity Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu chap. v.; pp. 39–44 ■ They are sometimes called devatā: SN i.205; or devaputtā: Pv-a 113, Pv-a 139. A female Yakkha is called yakkhinī (q.v.).
2. Their usual capacity is one of kindness to men (cp. Ger. Rūbezahl). They are also interested in the spiritual welfare of those humans with whom they come into contact, and are something like “tutelary genii” or even “angels” (i.e. messengers from another world) who will save prospective sinners from doing evil (cp. Pv iv.1). They also act as guides in the “inferno”: Pv iv.11, cp. iv.3. A somewhat dangerous “Mentor” is represented at DN i.95, where the y Vajirapāṇī threatens to slay Ambaṭṭha with an iron hammer, if he does not answer the Bhagavā. He is represented as hovering in the air; Bdhgh. (DN-a i.264 says on this: na yo vā so vā yakkho, Sakko devarājā ti veditabbo: it is to be understood not as this or that y. but as Sakka the king of devas ■ Whole cities stand under the protection of, or are inhabited by yakkhas DN ii.147 (ākiṇṇa-yakkha full of y.; thus Āḷakamandā may here mean all kinds of supra-mundane beings), cp Lankā (Ceylon) as inhabited by y.: Mvu 7, Mvu 33 ■ Often however, they are cruel and dangerous. The female yakkhas seem on the whole more fearful and evil-natured than the male (see under yakkhinī). They eat flesh and blood: Ja iv.549; devour even men: DN ii.346; Ja ii.15
17, or corpses: Ja i.265; mentioned under the 5 ādīnavā (dangers) at AN iii.256. A yakkha wants to kill Sāriputta: Ud 4.
3. Var. classes of y. are enumd at DN ii.256, DN ii.257; in a progressive order they rank between manussa and gandhabba at AN ii.38; they are mentioned with devas rakkhasas, dānavas, gandhabbas, kinnaras and mah’oragas at Ja v.420. According to Vv-a 333 Sakka, the 4 great kings (lokapālā), the followers of Vessavaṇa (alias Yama, the yakkhas proper) and men (see below 7) go by the name of yakkha ■ Sakka, the king of the devas, is often named yakkha: Ja iv.4; DN-a i.264 Some are spirits of trees (rukkha-devatā): Ja iii.309 Ja iii.345; Pv i.9; Pv ii.9; Pv-a 5; are also called bhumma-devā (earthly deities) Pv-a 45, Pv-a 55. Their cult seems to originate primarily from the woods (thus in trees Pv ii.9; Pv iv.3), and secondarily from the legends of sea-faring merchants (cp. the story of the flyingDutchman). To the latter origin point the original descriptions of a Vimāna or fairy-palace, which is due to a sort of mirage. These are usually found in or at the sea, or in the neighbourhood of silent lakes, where the sense of hauntedness has given rise to the fear of demons or supernatural witchcraft. Cp. the entrances to a Vimāna by means of a dried-up river bed (Pv i.9 Pv ii.12) and the many descriptions of the Vimānas in the Lake-districts of the Himavant in Vv. (See Stede Peta Vatthu trsln p. 104 sq.)
4. Their names too give us a clue as to their origin and function. These are taken from (a) their bodily appearance, which possesses many of the attributes of Petas, e.g. Khara “Rough-skin” or “Shaggy” Snp p.48 (= khara-samphassaṃ cammaṃ Snp-a 302), also as Khara-loma “Rough-hair” Vism 208; Khara- dāṭhika “Rough-tooth” Ja i.31. Citta “Speckled” Mvu 9 Mvu 22; Mvu 10, Mvu 4; also as Citta-rājā Ja ii.372; Mvu 10, Mvu 84 Silesa-loma “Sticky-hair” Ja i.273. Sūci-loma “Needlehair” Snp p.47, Snp p.48; SN i.207; Vism 208; Snp-a 302 ■ (b places of inhabitance, attributes of their realm, animals and plants, e.g. Ajakalāpaka “Goat-bundle” Ud 1 Āḷavaka “Forest-dweller” Ja iv.180; Ja vi.329; Mvu 30, Mvu 84: Vism 208. Uppala “Lotus” Dhp-a iv.209 Kakudha “K ■ tree” (Terminalia arjuna) SN i.54 Kumbhīra “Crocodile” Ja vi.272. Gumbiya either “One of a troop” (soldier of Yama) or “Thicket-er (fr. gumba thicket) Ja iii.200, Ja iii.201. Disāmukha “Sky-facer” Dhp-a iv.209. Yamamoli “Yamachignon Dhp-a iv.208. Vajira “Thunderbolt” Dhp-a iv.209 alias Vajira-pāṇī DN i.95, or Vajira-bāhu Dhp-a iv.209 Sātāgira “Pleasant-mount” DN ii.256; Snp 153; Ja iv.314 Ja vi.440. Serīsaka “Acacia-dweller” Vv-a 341 (the messenger of Vessavaṇa) ■ (c) qualities of character, e.g. Adhamma “Unrighteous” Mil 202 (formerly Devadatta). Katattha “Well-wisher” Dhp-a iv.209 Dhamma “Righteous” Mil 202 (= Bodhisatta) Puṇṇaka “Full(-moon?)” Ja vi.255 sq. (a leader of soldiers, nephew of Vessavaṇa). Māra the “Tempter Snp 449; SN i.122; MN i.338. Sakata “Waggon-load (of riches) Dhp-a iv.209-(d) embodiments of former persons, e.g. Janavasabha “Lord of men” DN ii.205 Dīgha MN i.210. Naradeva Ja vi.383, Ja vi.387. Paṇḍaka “Eunuch” Mvu 12, Mvu 21. Sīvaka SN i.241 = Vin ii.156 Serī “Self-willed” SN i.57 ■ Cp. the similar names of yakkhinīs.
5. They stand in a close relationship to and under the authority of Vessavaṇa (Kuvera), one of the 4 lokapālas They are often the direct servants (messengers of Yama himself, the Lord of the Underworld (and the Peta-realm especially). Cp. DN ii.257; DN iii.194 sq. Ja iv.492 (yakkhinī fetches water for Vessavaṇa) vi.255 sq. (Puṇṇaka, the nephew of V.); Vv-a 341 (Serīsaka, his messenger). In relation to Yama: dve yakkhā Yamassa dūtā Vv 522; cp. Np. Yamamolī Dhp-a iv.208 ■ In harmony with tradition they share the rôle of their master Kuvera as lord of riches (cp Pv ii.922) and are the keepers (and liberal spenders) of underground riches, hidden treasures etc., with which they delight men: see e.g. the frame story to Pv ii.11 (Pv-a 145), and to iv.12 (Pv-a 274). They enjoy every kind of splendour & enjoyment, hence their attribute; kāma-kāmin Pv i.33. Hence they possess supernatural powers, can transfer themselves to any place with their palaces and work miracles; a frequent attribute of theirs is mah’ iddhika (Pv ii.910; Ja vi.118) Their appearance is splendid, as a result of former merit: cp. Pv i.2; Pv i.9; Pv ii.11; Pv iv.317. At the same time they are possessed of odd qualities (as result of former demerit); they are shy, and afraid of palmyra leaf & iron: Ja iv.492; their eyes are red & do not wink Ja v.34; Ja vi.336, Ja vi.337 ■ Their abode is their self-created palace (Vimāna ), which is anywhere in the air, or in trees etc. (see under vimāna). Sometimes we find a communion of yakkhas grouped in a town, e.g. Āḷakamandā DN ii.147; Sirīsa-vatthu (in Ceylon) Mvu 7 Mvu 32.
6. Their essential human character is evident also from their attitude towards the “Dhamma.” In this respect many of them are “fallen angels” and take up the word of the Buddha, thus being converted and able to rise to a higher sphere of existence in saṃsāra Cp. DN iii.194, DN iii.195; Ja ii.17; Vv-a 333; Pv ii.810 (where “yakkha” is expld by Dhpāla as “pet-attabhāvato cuto (so read for mato!) yakkho ataṃ jāto dev-attabhāvaṃ patto” Pv-a 110); Snp-a 301 (both Sūciloma Khara converted) ■ See in general also the foll passages: Snp 153, Snp 179, Snp 273, Snp 449; SN i.206
15; AN i.160 Vism 366 (in simile); Mil 23.
7. Exceptionally the term “yakkha” is used as a philosophical term denoting the “individual soul [cp. similar Vedic meaning “das lebendige Ding (B.R.) at several AV. passages]; hence probably the old phrase: ettāvatā yakkhassa suddhi (purification of heart) Snp 478, quoted Vv-a 333 (ettāvat’ aggaṃ no vadanti h’ eke yakkhassa sudhiṃ idha paṇḍitāse) Snp 875 (cp. Nd i.282: yakkha = satta, nara, puggala manussa).
-ānubhāva the potency of a yakkha Ja i.240. -āviṭṭha possessed by a y. Ja vi.586. -iddhi (yakkh˚) magic power of a y. Pv-a 117, Pv-a 241. -gaṇa the multitude of ys. Ja vi.287. -gaha = following Dhp-a iii.362. -gāha “yakkha-grip,” being seized by a y. SN i.208; Pv-a 144 -ṭṭhāna the dwelling-place of a y. -dāsī “a female temple slave,” or perhaps “possessed by a demon (?) Ja vi.501 (v.l. BB devatā-paviṭṭhā cp. p. 586 yakkh’ āviṭṭhā.) -nagara city of ys. Ja ii.127 (= Sirīsavatthu); cp. pisāca-nagara. -pura id. Mvu 7.32 -bhavana the realm or abode of the y. Nd i.448. -bhūta a yakkha-being, a ghost Pv iii.52 (= pisāca-bhūta vā yakkha-bh. vā Pv-a 198); iv.135. -mahiddhi = ˚iddhi Pv iv.154. -yoni the y ■ world, realm of the y. Snp-a 301 -samāgama meeting of the y. Pv-a 55 (where also devaputtā join). -sūkara a y. in the form of a pig Vb-a 494. -senā army of ys. DN iii.194; Snp-a 209 -senāpati chief-commander of the yakkha-army Ja iv.478; Snp-a 197.
Vedic yakṣa, quick ray of light, but also “ghost”; fr. yaks to move quickly; perhaps: swift creatures changing their abode quickly and at will ■ The customary (popular) etym. of Pali Commentators is y. as quâsi grd. of yaj, to sacrifice, thus: a being to whom a sacrifice (of expiation or propitiation) is given. See e.g. Vv-a 224: yajanti tattha baliṃ upaharantī ti yakkhā; or Vv-a 333: pūjanīya-bhavato yakkho ti vuccati ■ The term yakṣa as attendants of Kubera occurs already in the Upanishads.
(nt.) condition of a higher demon or yakkha DN ii.57; AN ii.39; Pv-a 117.
fr. yakkha
(f.) a female yakkha, a vampire. Their character is usually fierce & full of spite & vengeance, addicted to man-& beast-murder (cp. yakkha 2). They are very much like Petīs in habits. With their names cp. those of the yakkhas, as enum;d under yakkha 4 ■ Vin iii.37 Vin iv.20 (where sexual intercourse with y. is forbidden to the bhikkhus); SN i.209 (Piyankara-mātā); Ja i.240 (as a goat), 395 sq.; ii.127; iii.511; v.21 (eating a baby) 209 (eaten by a y.); vi.336 (desirous of eating a child) Vism 121 (singing), 382 (four: Piyankara-mātā, Uttaramātā Phussa-mittā, Dhammaguttā), 665 (in simile) Mvu 7, Mvu 11 (Kuvaṇṇā, i.e. bad-coloured); 10, 53 (Cetiyā); 12, 21 (Hāritā “Charming” or fr. harita “green” (?)); Dhp-a i.47; Dhp-a ii.35, Dhp-a ii.36 (a y. in the form of a cow, eating 4 people in successive births). Note. A by-form of yakkhinī is yakkhī.
-bhāva the state of being a yakkhinī Ja i.240; Ja ii.128 (yakkhini˚).
fr. yakkha, perhaps corresponding directly to Vedic yakṣiṇī, f. of yakṣin; adj. persecuting, taking vengeance, appld to Varuṇa at RV. vii.884
(f.) = yakkhinī SN i.11; Vin iii.121; Vin iv.20; Ja iv.492; Mvu 7, Mvu 26.
direct formation fr. yakkha, like petī fr. peta; form older than yakkhinī (?)
(indecl.) hortative part, used in addressing a (superior) person in the voc., followed by Pot. of jānāti, either 2;nd jāneyyāsi, or 3rd sg. jāneyya; to be trsld somewhat like “look here, don’t you know, surely, you ought to know; now then; similarly to part. yaṃ nu, yaṃ nūna & yaṃ hi;. The part. is found in the language of the Nikāyas only, thus indicating part of the oldest & original dialect. E. g.: y. bhante jāneyyāsi Vin i.237; yagghe deva jāneyyāsi yo te puriso dāso… so… pabbajito do you know, Oh king DN i.60 (trsl.: “if it please your majesty, do you know…”; DN-a i.169 expls as “codan’ atthe nipāto”) y. ayye jāneyyāsi MN ii.62; mahārāja j. MN ii.71; id SN i.101; y. bhavan jāneyya SN i.180 ■ The passage MN ii.157 is somewhat doubtful where we find y. with the ind. and in var. forms (see v. l.) of yagghi & taggha “jānanti pana bhonto yagghe…, ” with reply “na jānāma yagghe…” Perhaps the reading taggha would be preferable.
similar in formation & meaning to tagghe (q.v.). It is yaṃ (yad) + gha, the latter in a Māgadhised form ghe, whereas taggha (= tad + gha only occurs as such
to sacrifice, to make an offering (yaññaṃ); to give alms or gifts-In the P. literature it refers (with yañña, sacrifice) either (when critical) to the Brahmanic rites of sacrificing to the gods according to the rules initiated in the Vedas & Vedic literature; or (when dogmatical) to the giving of alms to the bhikkhu. In the latter sense it implies liberal donation of all the necessities of a bhikkhu (see enumd under yañña). The latter use is by far the more frequent ■ The construction is with the acc. of the deity honoured and the instr. of the gift ■ Pres yajati DN i.139; AN i.168; AN ii.43, AN ii.44; Snp 505, Snp 509; DN-a i.160 ■ ppr. yajanto DN i.52; MN i.404; Mil 21; gen pl. yajataṃ Snp 569 (= Vin i.246, where reading is jayataṃ) ■ ppr. med. yajamāna DN i.138 (mahayaññaṃ); Snp 506; SN i.233; Ja vi.502, Ja vi.505 ■ imper 3rd sg. yajatu DN-a i.297; med. yajataṃ DN i.138 (= detu bhavaṃ DN-a i.300). 2nd sg. yajāhi Ja iii.519; Pv-a 280 and perhaps at Pv ii.16 (for T. yāhi). 2nd med. yajassu Snp 302, Snp 506; Ja v.488 (yaññaṃ), 490 (id.)-Pot. 1st sg yajeyyaṃ DN i.134; DN i.3rd pl. yajeyyuṃ Ja vi.211, Ja vi.215 Ja vi.3rd sg. med. yajetha Dhp 106 (māse māse sahassena yo y. = dānaṃ dadeyya Dhp-a ii.231), 108; Iti 98; AN ii.43; Snp 463 ■ Fut. 2nd sg. yajissasi Ja iii.515; Ja iii.1st sg yajissāmi Ja vi.527 (pantha-sakuṇaṃ tuyhaṃ maṃsena) 3rd pl. yajissanti Ja iv.184; Ja iv.1st pl. yajissāma Ja vi.132. aor. 1st sg. yajiṃ Thag 341; Thag 3rd sg. ayajī Iti 102; yaji Mil 219, Mil 221 ■ inf. yajituṃ Mil 220; yiṭṭhuṃ DN i.138 (yiṭṭhu-kāma wishing to sacrifice), and yaṭṭhuṃ in ˚kāma DN ii.244; Snp 461 ■ ger. yajitvā DN i.143; AN ii.44; Snp 509; Ja vi.137 (puttehi), 202; Pv ii.956 (datvā + , i.e. spending liberally; cp. Pv-a 136); yajitvāna Snp 303, Snp 979 ■ grd. yajitabba Ja vi.133 (sabbacatukkena) ■ pp. yajita & yiṭṭha; ■ Caus. I. yājeti Caus. II. yajāpeti (q.v.).
yaj, cp. Vedic yajati, yajus, Yajur-veda. To Av. yaƶaitē to sacrifice, Gr. α ̔́ζομαι to revere, worship On etym. cp. also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. aestimo ■ The Dhtp (62) defines root by “deva-pūjā, sangati-karaṇa dānesu,” i.e. “said of deva-worship, of assembling and of gifts.” Similarly Dhtm 79
(nt.) the act of sacrificing Ja iii.518; Ja vi.133; Cp. I. 72 Vism 224; Pv-a 135.
late formation fr. yaj, yajati, for the earlier yañña
(adj.) one who sacrifices Ja vi.133.
fr. yajana
to cause a sacrifice to be held AN i.168 (yajati + ).
Caus. II. of yajati
sacrificed Mil 219; Ja iv.19.
pp. of yajati
the Yajurveda, the 2nd of the Vedas, dealing with sacrifice Mil 178; DN-a i.247; Snp-a 447. As yajuveda at Dpvs v.62, where the 3 Vedas are enumd as iruveda yaju˚ and sāma˚.
fr. Vedic yajus the sacrificial formula, + veda
1. a brahmanic sacrifice.
2. almsgiving charity, a gift to the Sangha or a bhikkhu. The brahmanic ritual of Vedic times has been given a changed and deeper meaning. Buddhism has discarded the outward and cruel form and has widened its sphere by changing its participant, its object as well as the means and ways of “offering,” so that the yañña now consists entirely in a worthy application of a worthy gift to a worthy applicant. Thus the direct and as it were self-understood definition of yañña is at Nd ii.523 given with “yañño vuccati deyyadhammo, ” and as this the 14 constituents of the latter are enumd; consisting of the 4 paccayas, and of anna, pāna, vattha yāna, mālā, gandhā, vilepana, seyya, avasatha, padīpeyya Cp. Nd i.373 ■ The term parikkhāra, which refers to the requisites of the bhikkhu as well (see DA i.204
207), is also used in the meaning of “accessory instrument” concerning the brahmanic sacrifice: see D i.129 sq., 137 sq. They are there given as 16 parikkhāras as follows: (4) cattāro anumati-pakkhā viz the 4 groups khattiyas, ministers, brahmans and householders, as colleagues by consent; (8) aṭṭhangāni of a king-sacrificer; (4) cattār’ angāni of a purohita. The term mahāyañña refers to the brahmanic ritual (so at MN ii.204; Dhs-a 145, cp. Expositor 193); its equivalent in Buddhist literature is mahādāna, for which yañña is also used at Pv ii.950 (cp. Pv-a 134). The Jātakas are full of passages referring to the ineffectiveness and cruelty of the Brahmanic sacrifice e.g. Ja iii.518 sq.; Ja vi.211 sq., & cp. Fick,; Sociale Gliederung p. 146 sq. One special kind of sacrifice is the sabba-catukkayañña or the sacrifice of tetrads, where four of each kind of gifts, as elephants, horses, bulls and even men were offered: Ja i.335; Ja iii.44, Ja iii.45; Pv-a 280. The number 4 here has the meaning of evenness completeness, or harmony, as we find it freq., in the notion of the square with ref. to Vimānas & lotus ponds (in J., Vv & Pv etc.); often also implying awfulness magic, as attached e.g. to cross-roads. Cp. the Ep of niraya (Purgatory) “catu-dvāra” (esp. at Pv i.10) See cpds. of catur ■ It may also refer to the 4 quarters of the sky, as belonging to the 4 Guardians of the World (lokapālā) who were specially worth offering to, as their influence was demonic (cp. Pv i.4).
The prevailing meaning of yañña in the Suttapiṭaka is that of “gift, oblation to the bhikkhu, alms-giving.” Cp. Snp 295, Snp 461, Snp 484, Snp 1043. At Vv 3426 the epithets “su-dinna, su-huta, su-yiṭṭha” are attributed to dāna ■ The 3 constituents which occur under dāna & deyyadhamma as the gift, the giver and the recipient of the gift (i.e. the Sangha: cp. opening stanza Pv; i1 are similarly enumd under yañña (or yaññapatha) as “ye yaññaṃ (viz. cīvaraṃ etc.) esanti” those who wish for a gift, “ye yaññaṃ abhisankharonti” those who get it ready, and “ye yaññaṃ denti” those who give it, at Nd ii.70 (under appamatta). Similarly we find the threefold division of “yañña” (= cīvara etc.), “yaññayājaka” (= khattiyā, brāhmaṇā etc., including all 8 classes of men: see Nd ii.p. 129 s. v. khattiya, quoted under janab), and “dakkhiṇeyya” (the recipient of the gift, viz. samaṇa-brāhmaṇā, kapaṇ’addhikā vanibbakā yācakā) at Nd ii.449b (under puthū) ■ Cp. the foll. (mixed) passages: DN i.97, DN i.128
144 (brahmanic criticised); ii.353, 354 (profitable and unprofitable criticised); MN i.82 (brahm.); SN i.76, SN i.160; SN ii.42 sq., 63 207; iii.337; iv.41; AN i.166; AN ii.43 (nirārambhaṃ yaññaṃ upasankamanti arahanto, cp. Dhs-a 145); Snp 308 (brahm.), 568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaññā: the sacrifices to Agni are the best; brahm.); Thag 341; Ja i.83, Ja i.343; Ja iii.517 (˚ṃ yajati; brahm.); iv.66; v.491 492; vi.200 (yañña-kāraka-brāhmaṇa), 211 sq.; DN-a i.267; Dhp-a ii.6.
-āgāra a hall for sacrifices Pp 56 (= yañña-sālā PugA 233). -āvāṭa the sacrificial pit DN i.142, DN i.148; Ja i.335; Ja iii.45, Ja iii.517; Ja vi.215 (where reading yaññavāṭa cp. yaññavāṭaka at Cp i.72). It has been suggested by Kern, Toev, s. v., and it seems more to the sense to read yañña- vāṭa for yanñ’ āvāṭa, i.e. enclosed place for sacrifice. Thus at all passages for ˚āvāṭa. -kāla a suitable (or the proper) time for sacrifice DN i.137; Snp 458, Snp 482; DN-a i.297. -upanīta one who has been brought to the sacrifice SN i.168 (trsl. K.S. 211 not quite to the point: “the oblation is brought.” Reading is uncertain; v.l. ˚opanīta which may be read as opavīta “wearing the sacrificial cord”: see foll.). -opavīta (?) [see upavīta] in phrase yaññ’ opavīta-kaṇṭhā “having the (sacrificial, i.e.) alms-cord wound round their necks” Snp-a 92 (v.l. BB yaññ-opacita-kammā). Cp yañña-suttaka. -patha [cp. patha2] (way of) sacrificing, sacrifice Snp 1045; Nd ii.524 (yañño y’ eva vuccati yañña-patho); Ja vi.212, Ja vi.215. -vaṇṇa praise of sacrifice Ja vi.200. -vidhāna the arrangement or celebration of a sacrifice Ja vi.202. -sampadā success of the sacrifice DN i.128 sq. (in its threefold mode), 134, 143, 144; Snp 505, Snp 509. -sāmin lord or giver of a sacrifice DN i.143 -suttaka “sacrificial string,” i.e. alms-cord (the sign of a mendicant) Dhp-a ii.59. Cp. above: ˚opavīta.
Vedic yajña, fr. yaj: see yajati. The metric reading in the Veda is sometimes yajana, which we are inclined to look upon as not being the source of the P. yajana
(f.) “sacrificiality,” the function or ceremony of a sacrifice Ja vi.202 (= yañña-vidhāna C.).
abstr. fr. yañña
(f.) 1. a staff, stick, pole MN iii.133 (tomara˚ goad); SN i.115 (pācana˚ driving stick, goad); Mil 2; Dhp-a iii.140 (kattara˚ a mendicant’s staff); Pv-a 241; Vb-a 241 (yantacakka˚); Mvu 11, Mvu 10 (veḷu˚ a bamboo pole). 2. a stem, stalk (of a plant), cane in ucchu˚; sugarstick sugar-cane Dhp-a iii.315 (= ucchu-khaṇḍika at Vv 3326); iv.199.
3. a measure of length (= 7 ratanas) Vb-a 343.
-koṭi the end of the stick or staff Dhp-a i.15. -madhukā (“cane-sweetness”) liquorice Mvu 32, Mvu 46 -luddaka “stick-hunter” at Ja iv.392 means a hunter with a lasso.
cp. Vedic yaṣṭi. Another Pali form is laṭṭhi
held, checked, controlled, restrained, careful SN ii.15, SN ii.50; Snp 78, Snp 220, Snp 1079 (= yatta, paṭiyatta gutta etc. Nd ii.525); Ja vi.294 (C. appamatta; Kern Toev. s. v. proposes reading yatta for yata Vism 201 (?). Esp. in two phrases: yat-atta (yata + attan) selfcontrolled one whose heart is kept down DN i.57 (cp Dial. i.75); Snp 216, Snp 490, Snp 723; DN-a i.168 ■ yata-cārin living in self-restraint, living or behaving carefully Snp 971 (= yatta paṭiyatta gutta etc. Nd i.498); Mil 300 (+ samāhita-citta, where Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes to read yatta-cārin for yata˚). A similar passage at Thag 981 reads yathā-cārin (q.v. for further expln). Cp. saṃyata & see also; yatta.
pp. of yam
to exert oneself, strive endeavour, to be cautious or careful; ppr. yataṃ Iti 120 (care, tiṭṭhe, acche etc.; Seidenstūcker trsls “gezügelt,” thus taking it in meaning of yata) ■ pp. yatta.
yat, given by Dhtp 121 in meaning “yatana,” by Dhtm 175 as “paṭiyatana”
is given in meaning of “lead out” (?) at Dhtp 580 (“niyyātane”) and Dhtm 813 (id.).
unidentified, perhaps as expln of yati?
(nt.) endeavour, undertaking Ja v.346 (C. expls samosaraṇa-ṭṭhāna?); Dhtp 121 (in expln of yatati1).
fr. yat, cp. Epic Sk. yatna
a Buddhist monk Mvu 5, Mvu 37 (racchāgataṃ yatiṃ); 25, 4; 30, 26 (mattikā-dāyakaṃ yatiṃ); 32, 32 (khīṇāsavassa yatino) Dāvs iv.33 (yatī); Vism 79 (vikampeti Mārassa hadayaṃ yatī); Pv-a 287 (instr. muni-vara-yatinā).
fr. yat, cp. Vedic yati leader, guide
(adv.) [the abl. case of ya˚, used as conjunction, Cp. Vedic yataḥ wherefrom, by which, out of which 1. (local) from where DN i.240 (uggacchanti candima-suriyā; opp. yattha where).
2. (temporal) whence since, when, from which time Vv-a 344 (yato paṭṭhāya).
3. (modal) from which, out of what cause because, in as far as DN i.36 sq. (yato… ettāvatā because… therefore); Snp p.113 (id.) Dhp 374, Dhp 390 (doubled = from whichever source) ■ Freq. in two combns: yatvādhi-karaṇaṃ (yato + adhikaraṇaṃ) because (lit. by reason of which; cp. kim-ādhikaraṇaṃ, see adhik.) DN i.70; DN i.113; MN i.269; Dhs 1346; cp. similarly BSk. yato adhikaraṇaṃ Mvu iii.52; and yato-nidānaṃ on account of which, from which (or what) reason, because MN i.109; Snp 273, Snp 869; Pv iv.161 (cp. Pv-a 242) ■ Note. yaticchita at Pv-a 265 is to be read yadicchita.
strenuous, making an effort, watchful Nd ii.525 (+ paṭiyatta, in exegesis of yata); Ja iv.222 (+ paṭiyatta); vi.294 (Kern’s reading for yata; vv. ll saṃyata & sata, thus warranting yata); Mil 373 (˚payatta), 378 (id. = in keen effort) ■ Note. Kern Toev. s. v. would like to equal yatta = Sk. yatna effort.
pp. of yatati1
(adj.) however much, whatever, as many (in correlation with ta˚; or tattaka ) Ja v.74 (= yāvant); Vism 184 (yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti… tattakaṃ… ), 293 (yattakā = yāvatā); DN-a i.118 (yattaka… tattaka as long as); Dhp-a ii.50 (˚ṃ kālaṃ as long), 128 Vb-a 73 (yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ… tattakaṃ), 391 (yattakāni kusala-cittāni… tesaṃ sabbesaṃ); Vv-a 175 (yattakāni… tāni as many… so many, i.e. whatever), 285 (yattakā āhuneyyā nāma… tesu sabbesu… ) ■ instr. yattakena as adv. “because on account of” Dhp-a iii.383, Dhp-a iii.393.
fr. yāvant, a late formation; cp. Trenckner, Notes, 80
(adv.) rel. adv. of place “where,” at which spot occasionally “at which time,” when; with verbs of motion = “whereto.”-D i.240 (whither); Snp 79, Snp 170 (here closely resembling yatra in meaning = “so that”) 191, 313, 445, 995, 1037; Dhp 87, Dhp 127 (yattha ṭhita, cp Pv-a 104) 150, 171, 193, Pv-a 27 ■ yattha vā tattha vā wherever (or whenever) Dhp-a iv.162; similarly yattha yattha wherever (he likes) AN ii.64. yattha kāmaṃ (cp. yathākāmaṃ in same meaning) where to one’s liking, i.e. wherever Dhp 35 (= yattha katthaci or yattha yattha icchati Dhp-a i.295, Dhp-a i.299), 326. Similarly we find yatth-icchakaṃ, almost identical (originally variant?) with yadicchakaṃ and yāvadicchakaṃ at Vism 154.
the regular P. form of Ved. yatra. See also P. yatra
(adv.) in which, where, since; only in phrase yatra hi nāma (in emphatic exclamations) with Fut. “as indeed, inasmuch as, that” SN ii.255 (ñāṇabhūtā vata sāvakā y. h. n. savako ñassati etc.); Ja i.59 (dhir-atthu vata bho jātiyā y. h. n. jātassa jarā paññāyissati “woe to birth that old age is to be noticed in that which is born!”); Mil 13 (acchariyaṃ vata bho… y. h. n. me upajjhāyo ceto-parivitakkaṃ jānissati).
the (older?) reconstituted Sk. form of P. yattha, cp. Vedic yatra in which, where. The P. form is younger than the Vedic, as the P. meaning is doubtful for the V. period. It is merely a differentiation of forms to mark a special meaning in the sense of a causal conjunction, whereas yattha is adv. (of place or time) only
(adv.) as, like, in relation to, after (the manner of) ■ As prep. (with acc.): according (to some condition, norm or rule): yathā kāmaṃ (already Vedic) according to his desire, after his liking Pv-a 113, Pv-a 136; y. kālaṃ in time timely Pv-a 78; matiṃ to his own mind or intention Pv iv.167; ruciṃ to his satisfaction, amply, satisfactorily Pv-a 88, Pv-a 126, Pv-a 242; vibhavaṃ acc. to their wealth i.e. plentifully Pv-a 53; sukhaṃ as they liked or pleased Pv-a 133. Sometimes with loc.: yathā padese “according to place,” in the right place Ja iii.391. Or instr.: y. sattiyā as much as you can Dhp-a i.92; y. manena from his heart, sincerely, voluntarily Dhp-a i.42 ■ Also with ger. yathā haritvā according to his taking (or reward: see under cpd. ˚bhata) Iti 14 (y. h. nikkhipeyya which Seidenstücker, not doing justice to context translates “so wie man etwas nimmt und dann wegwirft”). With foll. adj. expressing something like “as it were” and often untranslateable (see cpds.)-As conjunction: “as if,” or “so that” yathā mata like dead Dhp 21; yathā na “in order that not”: Vism 31 (y. sarīre ābādhaṃ na uppādeti, evaṃ tassa vinodan’ atthaṃ); Dhp-a i.311 (y. assa patitaṭthānaṃ na passāmi, tathā naṃ chaḍḍessāmi: so that I shall not see…, thus shall I throw him) ■ As adv. just, as, so, even; in combn with other particles yathā kathaṃ pana how so then, how is it then that SN ii.283 (cp. yathā tathaṃ under cpds.); yathā kiṃ viya somewhat like this Mil 91; yathā pana like as Dhp-a i.158; yatha-r-iva (for yathā-iva) just as DN i.90; yathā pi… evaṃ just as… so Dhp 51–52 ■ yatha -yidaṃ (for yathā-idaṃ) positive: “as just this,” “so that,” “e.g. ,” “like,” “i.e.”; after negation “but Iti 8, Iti 9 (na aññaṃ… yathayidaṃ); Snp 1092 (tvañ ca me dīpam akkhāhi, yathayidaṃ n’ âparaṃ siyā “so that there be no further ill”; cp. Snp-a 597). See also the enlarged forms seyyathā & seyyathīdaṃ ■ In correlation with; tathā: the same… as, like… as, as… so; Pv i.123 (yath’ āgato tathā-gato as he has come so has he gone). Often elliptically in direct juxtaposition: yathā tathā in whatever way, in such & such a manner; so and so, according to the occasion; also “correctly, truly, in reality” Snp 504 (tvaṃ h’ ettha jānāsi y. t. idaṃ ); Pv-a 199 (y. t. vyākāsi). See yathā-tathaṃ under cpds. About phrase yathā taṃ see yathātaṃ ■ For further refs. on the use of yathā see Indexes to Saṃyutta (S vi.81 s. v. yathābhūtaṃ) Anguttara (A. vi.91 ibid.); Sutta-Nipāta (Index p. 751) & Dhammapada.;
-ānudhammaṃ according to the rules (leading to enlightenment) Snp 963, cp. Nd i.481. -ānurūpa suitable proper Mvu 28, Mvu 42. -ānusiṭṭhaṃ in accordance with what has been taught Dhp-a i.158. -ābhirantaṃ (adv nt. of ppr.) to (their) heart’s content, as much (or as long) as one likes Vin iii.145; Snp 53; Dhp-a i.385; Vv-a 181. -āraddha [ = ālabdha] as much as was to be had, sufficient Vin iii.160. -ārahaṃ (nt. adv.) as is fit or proper, seeming, fitful, appropriately, duly (cp Cpd. 1111, 1182) SN i.226; Snp 403; Pv ii.923; Pv-a 78 Pv-a 132 (yathā codanaṃ v.l. SS), 287; Vv-a 139. So to be read at all Pv & Pv-a passages for T. yathā rahaṃ Very freq. in Mvu. e.g. 3, 27; 5, 148; 7, 70; 14, 54 20, 8; 22, 58. -ālaṅkata dressed as he was, in full (state-) dress Dhp-a iii.79. -āvajjaṃ “as if to be blamed,” i.e. (imitating) whatever is faulty, mimicry of deformities (as a forbidden pastime) DN i.7 (= kāṇakuṇi-khañj’ ādīnaṃ yaṃ yaṃ vajjaṃ taṃ taṃ payojetvā dassana-kīḷā DN-a i.86); Vin ii.10. -icchitaṃ according to one’s wish, as he liked, after his heart’s content Ja i.27 (v. 188) = Bv ii.179; is preferably to be read as yad- icchitaṃ at all Pv-a passages, e.g. Pv-a 3 (˚ṃ dento) 110 (˚ṭhāna whichever place I like), 265 (where T. has yat˚). The ed. of Mvu however reads yath˚; throughout; e.g. 7, 22; 22, 50. -odhi as far as the limit, final utmost MN i.37; Ja iii.302. -odhika to (its or their) full extent, altogether, only in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Snp 60 (cp. Nd ii.526); Ja iii.381 (C. not quite to the point with expln “attano odhivasena ṭhitāni,” giving variant yatodhikāni, with expln “yato uparato odhi etesan ti yatodhikāni uparata-koṭṭhāsāni”); iv.487 (with better C. expln: “yena yena odhinā thitāni tena tena ṭhitān eva jahissāmi, na kiñce avasissāmī ti attho”); v.392 (C.: “yathāṭhita-koṭṭhasāni”). -kamma (ṃ) according to one’s karma or action Ja i.57, Ja i.109; Ja iv.1. Freq in phrase yathā-kamm-ūpage satte (pajānāti) “(he recognises) the beings passing away (or undergoing future retribution) acc. to their deeds” DN i.82; MN i.482 MN ii.21; MN iii.178; SN ii.122; AN iv.141, AN iv.178, AN iv.422; AN v.35; Snp 587; Iti 99; and yathā-kamm-ūpaga-ñāṇa “the knowledge of specific retribution” Vism 433 sq.; Tikp 321 Vb-a 373 sq. (˚catuttha). -kāmaṃ according to wish at random (see above); ˚ -karaṇiya to be done or dealt with ad lib., i.e. a victim, prey SN ii.226; SN iv.91, SN iv.159; Iti 56. -kārin as he does Iti 122 (corresp. to tathāvādin). -kālaṃ according to time, in one time Mvu 5 Mvu 180. -kkamaṃ acc. to order, in one order or succession Mvu 4, Mvu 54; Sdhp 269. -cārin virtuous (for the usual yatacārin as indicated by C. explnyata kāyādīhi sanyati: see Brethren, p. 342!) Thag 981 (trsl. “Whoso according to his powers is virtuous”). -ṭhita so-being, such such, as they are, as they were Ja v.392; Vv-a 256 -tathaṃ according to truth, true & real (corresponding to yathā tathā adv.: see above) Iti 122 (here as nom. sg. as he is in one respect, so in the other, i.e. perfect) Snp 1127 (= yathā ācikkhitabbaṃ tathā ācikkhi Nd ii.527); Thag 708 (diṭṭhe dhamme yathātathe: is reading correct? perhaps better as yathātathā, cp. trslnBrethren 292: “the truths are seen e’en as they really are”) Dpvs iii.2 (so read for yathā-kathaṃ; v.l. has ˚tathaṃ) v.64 (pañhaṃ byākarohi yathātathaṃ). -dhamma (used as adj. & adv.; ˚ṃ ) “one according to the law,” i.e. as the rule prescribes; nt. according to the rule put down See Vin. Texts i.203; Geiger, Dhamma, p. 19, 67. Vin i.135 (yo uddiseyya, yathā-dhammo kāretabbo) 168 (yo pavāreyya, y ■ dhammo kāretabbo), 191 (yo māreyya y ■ dh. k.); ii.67 (ubho pi yathādhammaṃ kārāpetabbā), 132 (yo ajjhohareyya, y ■ dhammo kāretabbo); iv.126 (yo jānaṃ (i.e. knowing) yathādhammaṃ nihat’ âdhikaraṇaṃ punakammāya ukkoṭeyya pācittiyan ti i.e. a dispute settled in proper form; with expln: y ■ dhammaṃ nāma dhammena vinayena satthu sāsanena kataṃ), 144 (na tassa… mutti atthi yañ ca tattha āpattiṃ āpanno tañ ca yathādhammo kāretabbo, uttari c’ assa moho āropetabbo) Cp. the foll. passages; as adj.: Vin i.205; Vin ii.132, Vin ii.142 Vin ii.263; MN iii.10; Mil 195; as adv.: with paṭikaroti (to atone, make amends) Vin i.173, Vin i.315; Vin ii.126; Vin iv.19; DN i.85; DN iii.55; MN iii.247; SN ii.128, SN ii.205; AN i.103, AN i.238 AN ii.146; AN iv.377; cp. yathādhammaṃ paṭigaṇhāti SN i.239; AN i.59, AN i.103. At SN iii.171 yathādhammaṃ is used in the sense of “according to the truth, or reality,” where yathā-bhūtaṃ takes its place; similarly at Thag 188 -dhota as if it were washed (so to speak), clean, unsoiled Dhp-a i.196; cp. Mvu i.301 yathā-dhauta -pasādhanaṃ according to a clear state of mind, to one’s gratification Dhp 249 (= attano pasād’ ânurūpaṃ Dhp-a iii.359). -puggalaṃ according to the individual individually Pv iii.51 (read yathāpu˚). -pūrita as full as could be, quite full Ja i.101. -phāsuka comfortable pleasant Dhp-a i.8. -balaṃ according to one’s power or means Dhp-a i.107 (v.l. ˚satti); Sdhp 97; Mvu 5, Mvu 180 -buḍḍha see ˚
fr. ya˚; Vedic yathā; cp. kathā, tathā
(adv.) as it is, as, as if Vin iii.5; SN i.124; MN i.253. The spelling in our books is yathā taṃ (in two words).
yathā + taṃ
(adj.) having the character of being in accordance with (the truth or the occasion), real, true, just Iti 44 (santaṃ paṇītaṃ yathāvaṃ, nt.); Thag 188, Thag 422 (˚āloka-dassana seeing the real light); Mil 171 (˚lakkhaṇa true characteristics); Vism 588 (as yāthāvasarasa), 639 (id.) ■ abl. yathāvato (also found as yāthāvato, probably more correctly, being felt as a der fr. yathā) according to fitness, fitfully, duly, truly sufficiently Pv-a 60 (so read for yathā vato), 128 (all MSS. yāthāvato!); Thag-a 256 (yā˚; the expln given by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 208 is not correct).
der. fr. yathā, as yathā + vant, after analogy of yāvant, but following the a-decl., cp. Epic Sk. yathāvat
(adj.) being according to reality or sufficiency, essential, true, real, sufficient Thag 347 Vb-a 409 (˚vatthu, referring to the “māna”-division of the Khuddaka-vatthu Vb 353 sq., cp. Nd ii.505≈ Should we read yāthāvaka˚? Yad, Yad-idam
fr. yathāva
etc., see ya˚; 4b.
(adv.) when Snp 200 (y. ca so mato seti), 681, 696 (here as yada, expld as yadā), 923; Dhp 28, Dhp 69, Dhp 277 sq., 325, 384, 390; Iti 77 (y devo devakāyā cavati); Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67. Cp. kadā & tadā.;
Vedic yadā; old instr. of ya˚
(indecl.) 1. as conjunction: if; constructed either with pres. indic., as: Snp 189; “yadi bodhiṃ pattuṃ icchasi” Ja i.24 (v. 167); “yadi dāyako dānaṃ deti… etaṃ bījaṃ hoti” Pv-a 8; or pot.; or with a participle, as: “yadi evaṃ sante” that being so, if this is so DN i.61; “gahito yadi sīho te” if the lion is caught by you Mvu 6, Mvu 27 ■ With other particles, e.g. yādi āsanamattaṃ pi even if only a seat Vv-a 39; yadi… atha kasmā if… how then Mil 4. yadi evaṃ… (tu) even if… yet (but) Pv-a 63 (y. e. pitā na rodati mātu nāma hadayaṃ mudukaṃ) ■ yadi va “or” (cp Vedic yadi vā “or be it that”) Dhp 195 (= yadi vā athavā Dhp-a iii.252). So yadi vā at Ja i.18 (v. 97: latā vā yadi vā rukkhā etc. Snp 119 (gāme vā yadi vâraññe)
2. as a strong particle of exhortation: yadi evaṃ if so, in that case, let it be that, alright, now then Pv-a 54 (y. e. yaṃ mayhaṃ desitaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno dehi), 217 (y. e. yāvadatthaṃ gaṇhāhi: take as much as you like).
adv. formation, orig. loc., fr. ya˚; cp. Vedic yadi
(nt.) a means for holding, contrivance, artifice, instrument machine, mechanism; fig. instrumentality (as perhaps in, kamma˚ at Th passages) ■ Referring to the machinery (outfit) of a ship (as oars, helm, etc.) Ja iv.163 (sabbayant’ ûpapanna = piy’-ârittā etc. C.); Mil 379. To mechanism in general (mechanical force Ja v.333 (˚vegena = with the swiftness of machinery) To a sugar-mill Mil 166; usually as ucchu-yanta Ja i.25, Ja i.339 (˚yante gaṇṭhikā), cp. ucchūnaṃ yanta Dhp-a iv.199 ■ tela-yanta (-cakka) (the wheel of) an oil mill Ja i.25 ■ dāru-yanta a wooden machine (i.e. a mechanical man with hands & feet moved by pulling of strings) DN-a i.197; Vism 595 (quoted as simile)- kamma-yanta the machinery of Kamma Thag 419 (i.e. its instrumentality, not, as trsln “car”; cp Brethren 217: “it breaks in pieces K’s living car, evidently influenced by C. expln “attabhāva-yanta”) 574 (similarly: see discussed under yantita). Note. yantāni at Nd ii.529 (on Snp 48 sanghaṭṭa-yantām) is expld as “dhuvarāni.” The spelling & meaning of the latter is not clear. It must refer to bracelets.; Cp. Snp-a 96 valayāni.
-ākaḍḍhana pulling the machine Vism 258 = Vb-a 241. -cakkha-yaṭṭhi the stick of the wheel of a (sugar-mill Vb-a 60. -nāḷi a mechanical tube Dhp-a iii.215 -pāsāṇa an aerolite (?) Ja iii.258 (read ˚pāsāṇo). -phalakāni the boards of a machine Vism 258. -yutta combined by machinery Ja vi.432. -sutta the string of a machine (or mill). Vism 258 (as ˚ka) = Vb-a 241 -hatthi a mechanical (automatic) elephant Dhp-a i.192 (of King Caṇḍa-pajjota; cp. the horse of Troy).
Vedic yantra, a kind of n. ag. formation fr. yam to hold by means of a string or bridle, etc. Idg *em & *i̯em;, as in Lat. emo to take & red-imio.
(nt.) a bolt Vin ii.148 (vihārā aguttā honti… anujānāmi yantakaṃ sūcikan ti), cp. Vin Texts iii.162; DN-a i.200 (kuñcikā + ); Dhp-a i.220 (yantakaṃ deti to put the bolt to, to lock up).
fr. yanta
is 3rd pl. pres. of yā: see yāti ■ Note. At DN ii.269 we should combine yanti with preceding visamā sambādhā, thus forming denom. verbs: visamāyanti “become uneven” and sambādhāyanti “become oppressed or tight.” The trslnDial ii.305 gives just the opposite by reading incorrectly.
made to go, set into motion, impelled Thag 574: evâyaṃ vattati kāyo kamma-yantena yantito “impelled by the machinery of Karma” trslnBrethren 261 not quite to the point “carried about on Karma’s car.” Kern, Toev. s, v. quite out of place with “fettered, held, restrained,” in analogy to his trsln of yanta id. loc. with “fetter.” He may have been misled by Dhtm defn of yant as “sankocana (see yanteti).
pp. of yanteti
to set into motion, to make go, impel, hurl Ja i.418 (sakkharaṃ anguliyā yantetvā); pp. yantita.
denom. fr. yanta. Dhtm 809 gives a root yant in meaning of “sankocane,” i.e. contraction
see ya˚; 2˚.
see yāpana.
see yāpeti.
to cohabit, futuere, only given as root yabh with defn “methune” at Dhtp 215 & Dhtm 308.;
one passage in Atharva Veda; cp. Gr. οι ̓́φω “futuo,” Lat. ibex (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)
restraint Pv-a 98 (+ niyama).
fr. yam
the ruler of the kingdom of the dead. See details in Dicty. of Names. In cpds. often in general sense of “death” or “manes,” or “petā” e.g.
-dūta Death’s messenger Sdhp 287; cp. Yamassa dūtā Vv 522 (see Vv-a 224), or deva-dūta AN i.138 (see under dūta), alias niraya-pāla AN i.138 and passim -purisa (a) = ˚dūta Dhp 235 (cp. Dhp-a iii.335); Vv-a 223 (b) ˚purisā Yama-people, i.e. Petas Pv iv.38 (cp. Pv-a 251). -loka the yama-world or world of the Petas Dhp 44, Dhp 45; Pv-a 107 & freq.; -visaya = ˚loka Pv ii.82 & passim.; -sādana Y’s kingdom, or the realm of the dead Ja vi.267, Ja vi.304; Ja vi.457, Ja vi.505.
Vedic Yama
(m. nt.) (nt. a pair, (m.) a twin Abhp 628. See der. yamaka.
Vedic yama = yama2; fr. yam in meaning “to combine,” cp. Av. yə̄ma twin, Mir. emuin id.
1. (adj.) double, twin; only in foll. combns: ˚pāṭihāriya (& ˚hīra); the miracle of the double appearances, a miracle performed by the Buddha in Sāvatthī to refute the heretical teachers (cp. Vin iii.332 Samanta-pāsādika; and in detail DN-a i.57). It consisted in the appearance of phenomena of opposite character in pairs, as e.g. streaming forth of fire water. (Cp.; Mvu trsln 120). The miracle was repeatedly performed by the Buddha & is often referred to, e.g. at Ps; i.125 (˚hīra); Ja i.77, Ja i.88, Ja i.193; Mil 106 (˚hīraṃ), 349 (˚hāriyaṃ); Mvu 17, Mvu 44, Mvu 50; Mvu 30, Mvu 82; Mvu 31 Mvu 99; Dāvs i.50 (˚hīraṃ); Dhp-a iii.213 (id.); Snp-a 36 Vism 390; Pv-a 137. -sālā the pair of Sal willows in between of which the Buddha passed away Vv-a 165; Pv-a 212.
2. (adj. or m.) a twin, twin child Mvu 6 Mvu 9 (yamake duve puttaṃ ca dhītaraṃ janesi), 37 (soḷasakkhattuṃ yamake duve duve putte janayi); Dhp-a i.353 (same, with vijāyi).
3. (nt.) a pair, couple Name of one of the Abhidhamma canonical books, also called Yamaka-ppakaraṇa; Tikp 8 ■ The Yamakasutta refers to the conversion of the bhikkhu Yamaka and is given at SN iii.109 sq.; mentioned at Vism 479 & Vb-a 32. The phrase; yamakato sammasana at Vism 626 may mean “in pairs” (like kalāpato “in a bundle” ibid.), or may refer to the Yamaka-sutta with its discussion of anicca, dukkha, anatta.
fr. yama3
at SN i.14 (sa vītivatto yamataṃ sumedho) we should read (with Mrs. Rh. D.’s emendation K.S. p. 320) as yaṃ mataṃ (Cy.: maññanaṃ; trsl. “he rich in wisdom hath escaped beyond conceits and deemings of the errant mind”).
to restrain, suppress, to become tranquil; only in stanza Dhp 6 = Th i.275 = Ja iii.488 as 1st pl. med yamāmase in imper. sense: “pare ca na vijānanti mayaṃ ettha yamāmase,” which is expld both at Dhp-a i.65, Th 1 A, & Ja iii.489 in connection with yama,2 viz. “yamāmase: uparamāma nassāma satataṃ samitaṃ maccu-santikaṃ gacchāmā ti na jānanti,” i.e. let us go continually into the presence of death. A little further at Dhp-a i.66 the expln of it is “bhaṇḍ’ ādīnaṃ vuddhiyā vāyamāmā ti na vijānanti.” The meaning is “to control oneself,” cp. saṃyamāmase SN i.209. Leop. v. Schroeder however trsls. “Und mancher Mann bedenket nicht: wir alle müssen sterben hier” (Worte der Wahrheit, p. 2.) ■ yameyyātha at SN i.217 is wrongly separated from the preceding vā which ought to be read as vāyameyyātha (so K.S. i.281).
yam, given in meaning “uparame” i.e. cessation, quieting at Dhtp 226 & Dhtm 322, at the latter with additional “nāse.” On etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. redimio and emo: cp. yanta.
a pair Abhp 628 ■ yamalī occurs in BSk. only as a kind of dress, at Divy 276; Avs i.265.
fr. yama3
corn (in general), barley (in particular) Vin iv.264; SN iv.220; AN iv.169.
-karaṇa the preparation of corn AN iv.169. -kalāpī (or ˚inī) a sheaf of barley SN iv.201. -kāraṇḍava chaff of corn (or barley) AN iv.169. -kummāsa barley-gruel Vv-a 62. -khetta corn-field Vin iv.47, Vin iv.266; Vv-a 294 -dūsin spoiling the corn AN iv.169. -majjhaka lying in the midst of a corn-field, in pācīna˚ of the c ■ f. on the E. side (+ dakkhiṇa˚ S.; pacchima˚ W.; uttara˚ N.) names of 4 market-places near Mithilā Ja vi.330. -sūka the awn or beard of corn (barley) AN i.8; SN v.10, SN v.48.
Vedic yava, corn; see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 239. Cp. Gr. ζεά spelt; Lith. javaī corn; Oir. eorna barley.
(nt.) in cpd. sāli˚; (whatever there is of) rice & corn (i.e. rice-and cornfields C.) Ja iv.172. Cp. yāvaka.
yava + collect. ending ˚ka
(nt.) grass, hay, fodder Ja i.338.
fr. yava; Vedic yavasa
(adj.) famous, having renown AN ii.64 (dīghāyu + ).
cp. Vedic yaśasvat
(adj.) glorious, famous, renowned, having all endowments or comforts of life (as expld at Nd ii.530: yasappatta, sakkata, lābhī etc.) DN i.48 (ñāta + ) AN ii.34; Snp 179, Snp 298, Snp 343, Snp 1117; Pv i.41; iii.117; iii.35iii.108; Vv 159 (= kittimant parivāravant Vv-a 73) DN-a i.143; Pv-a 10; Sdhp 420 ■ f. yasassinī shining resplendent Ja v.64.
Vedic yaśasvin
(adj.) splendid, glorious, full of splendour Ja v.63 (pāvako yasassimā = teja-sampattiyā yassassinīhi accīhi yutto C.).
double adj. ending; yasas + vin + mant
(nt.) glory, fame, repute success, high position. On term as used with ref. to the brahmin see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 128, 129. The prevailing idea of Dhammapāla is that yaso consists of a great retinue, & company of servants, followers etc. This idea is already to be found at DN i.118 = DN i.126 where y. is founded on parisā (cp. DN-a i.143 on DN i.48; DN-a i.298: yasasā ti āṇā-ṭhapana-samatthatāya). See e.g. Vv-a 122 (yaso = parivāra); Pv-a 137 (yasasā mahati parivāra-sampattiyā); cp. Ja i.134 (rājā mahantena yasena uppanaṃ gacchati) ■ DN i.137 (as quality of a king); iii.260, 286; Ja iv.275 sq. (dibba y. as one of the 10 qualities of greatness, viz. divine duration of life, complexion, happiness, fame, power, and the 5 sense-objects rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba The same 10 are found at Pv ii.958, 59); AN i.15; AN ii.32 AN ii.66, AN ii.188; AN iii.31, AN iii.47 sq.; AN iv.95, AN iv.195 sq.; Dhp 24, Dhp 303 (+ bhoga); Thag 554; Nd i.147; Pv iii.35 (= dev’ iddhi Pv-a 189); Vv 291; Ja i.134; Ja vi.468; Mil 291 (bhoga + ) Vism 393; Sdhp 306, Sdhp 518 ■ yasaṃ deti to give credit Ja i.180. mahā-yaso great fame Ja i.46 (v. 266), cp yas-agga the highest (of) fame Ja i.51, where coupled with lābh-agga the greatest gain. The latter combn is stereotype in the Niddesa (see e.g. Nd ii.55), where the 4 worldly ideals are given in sequence lābha, yaso pasaṃsā, sukha ■ With kitti we find yaso at Snp 817 (see defn & exegesis at Nd;1 147) ■ Opp. ayasa DN iii.260, DN iii.286; AN ii.188; AN iv.157 sq.
-dāyika giving (or a giver of) repute Ja vi.285. -mada pride of fame Vb-a 467. -mahatta greatness of fame Vism 233. -lābha the gain of fame Ja iii.516 (+ dhanalābha).
Vedic yaśaḥ (nt.). The word follows the a˚; declension, but preserves & favours the instr; yasasā after the s˚; decl. (like mano, ceto etc,), e.g. at Ja i.134 ■ In the nom. & acc. sg. both forms; yaso yasa(ṃ); occur; in cpds. the form yasa˚; is the usual yaso as masc. is found at Snp 438
(adv.) where, wherever Mvu 15, Mvu 209 (corresp. to yattha in v. 210).
after kuhiṃ
1. a; (brahmanic) sacrifice, known otherwise as mahāyāga (or pl ˚yāgā), and consisting of the 4: assamedha, purisamedha sammāpāsa, vāja-peyya. Thus mentioned at SN i.76 & Snp 303.
2. In; Buddhistic sense: gift alms-giving, charity; expense or expenditure of giving (almost syn. with cāga) AN i.91 (here given in line with dāna & cāga, with distinction of; āmisa˚ & dhamma˚; i.e. the material sacrifice, as under 1, and the spiritual sacrifice or help); with the same contrast of ā˚ & dh. at DN iii.155; Iti 98, Iti 102; Ja v.57, Ja v.65; Dhp-a i.27 ■ Ja iv.66 (sahassena yāgaṃ yajanto); Mil 21 (dhamma˚) Vv-a 155; Pv-a 135 (mahā˚-saññita yañña), 136 (mahā˚)- suyiṭṭha yāga sampadā “well-given is the perfection of charity” Thag-a 40 (Ap. v. 7) = 230 (id.).
-piṇḍa the sacrificial oblation consisting in a ball of meat or flour (cp. piṇḍa-pitṛ-yajña) Ja vi.522 (with v.l. yāgu˚).
fr. yaj, *Sk. yāga, cp. yañña & yaja
(adj.) (-˚) sacrificing, giving, spending SN i.19 = Ja iv.66 (sahassa˚ giving the worth of a thousand pieces).
fr. yāga
(f.) rice-gruel, rice-milk (to drink). See Vin. Texts ii.89. Vin i.46 = Vin ii.223 (sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaṃ dhovitvā yāgu upanametabbā; yāguṃ pītassa udakaṃ datvā… ) 51 (id.), 61 (id.), 84, 210 (Bhagavato udara-vāt-ābādho tekaṭulāya yāguyā dhuva-yāguṃ dātuṃ; i.e. a constant supply of rice-gruel), 339 (na mayaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ yāgupāne nisīdissāma); iv.311; AN iii.250 (ānisaṃsā: 5 good qualities: it is good for hunger, for thirst, allays wind, cleans the bladder, helps to digest any undigested food); Ja i.186; Ja ii.128 (for drink) Pv-a 12, Pv-a 23, Pv-a 274 ■ Often combd (and eaten) with cakes (khajjaka) & other soft food (bhojja), e.g. ; yāgukhajjaka Ja i.270; Ja iii.20; Dhp-a iv.20; Mvu 14, Mvu 55 (˚khajja -bhojja ); 36, 100 (+ khajja -bhojja ).
-pāna a drink of rice-milk Vin i.84. -piṇḍa see yāga˚. -bhājaka one who distributes the rice-gruel Vin ii.176 (pañcah’ angehi samannāgataṃ; together with cīvarabhājaka, phala-bhājaka & khajja-bhājaka) iv.38 (yāgu˚, phala˚, khajja˚), 155 (id.); AN iii.275.
cp. Vedic yavāgū; on form see Geiger, P.Gr. § 274
(nt.) anything asked for, donation, alms, begging Ja iii.353; Ja v.233, Ja v.234.
-yoga (y. + *yogga; perhaps yāja˚ the original. The variant yājayoga is old & well established: cp. Vism 224) accessible to begging, one ready to comply with another’s request, devoted to liberality, open-handed Freq. in ster. phrase mutta-cāga payata-pāṇī vossaggarata yāca-yoga dāna-saṃvibhāga-rata to denote great love of liberality, e.g. at AN i.226; AN ii.66; AN iii.313. See also AN iii.53, AN iii.313 = Vism 223, Vism 224 (where expld as follows: yaṃ yaṃ pare yācanti tassa tassa dānato yācanayogo ti attho; yājayogo ti pi pāṭho; yājana-sankhātena yājena yutto ti attho); AN iv.6, AN iv.266 sq., 271, 284 v.331, 336; Snp p.87 (cp. expln Snp-a 414: “yācituṃ yutto, yo hi yācake disvā bhakuṭiṃ katvā pharusavacan’ ādīni bhanati, so na yācayogo hoti” etc.) Snp 487, Snp 488, Snp 489, Snp 509; Ja iii.307 (expld in C. as “yaṃ yaṃ āgantukā yācanti tassa tassa yutto anucchaviko bhavitvā, sabbaṃ tehi yācita-yācitaṃ dadamāno ti attho”); iv.274 (“yācitabba-yuttaka” C.); vi.98 (= yācana-yuttaka or yañña-yuttaka; “ubhayath’ âpi dāyakass’ ev’ etaṃ nāma” C.); Mil 215, Mil 225 ■ The form yājayoga at Snp 1046 (expld at Nd ii.531 as “yāje yutta”); and mentioned at Vism 224 (see above). On diff. meaning of yācayoga see Kern, Toev. s. v with unidentified ref. Cp. also Mpt. 140, 4.
fr. yāc
(adj. n.) requesting, one who begs, a recipient of alms, a beggar Ja iii.353; Pv ii.938; Pv-a 78, Pv-a 102 (= yācanaka); Sdhp 324, Sdhp 331. Freq. in combn with similar terms of wayfaring people in phrase samaṇa-brāhmaṇa-kapaṇ iddhika-vaṇibbaka-yācakā e.g. at DN i.137; Iti 64. See single terms ■ yācaka at Snp 618 (as Fick, Soc.Gliederung 144 quotes yācaka) is to be read yājaka.
fr. yāca, cp. Epic & later Sk. yācaka
to beg, ask for, entreat Vin iv.129 (pabbajjaṃ) Snp 566, Snp 980, Snp 983; Ja iii.49, Ja iii.353; Ja v.233, Ja v.404 ■ aor. 3rd pl. yāciṃsu Pv-a 13, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 42; ayācisuṃ Mvu 33, Mvu 76 (v.l. ayācayuṃ) ■ inf. yācituṃ Pv-a 29, Pv-a 120 ■ ger. yāciya Snp 295; yācitvā MN i.365; yācitvāna Mvu 17, Mvu 58. pp. yācita.
Vedic yācati; yāc, with which cp. Lat. jocus (dial. juca “prayer”); Ohg. jehan to confess, etc.: see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v. jocus ■ Dhtp (38) only expls yāca yācane
(dt.) begging, asking, entreaty Ja iii.353; Snp-a 161 (inghā ti yācan’ atthe nipāto) 551 (id.); Pv-a 113 (= sādhuka).
-jīvāna living by begging Ja iii.353.
fr. yāc
= yācaka AN iii.136 (ati˚); Pv ii.76; 916; 946; Ja iii.49; DN-a i.298.
cp. BSk. yācanaka Divy 470, Divy 585
(f.) = yācana; Ja iii.354 = Mil 230; Ja v.233, Ja v.404.
begged, entreated, asked (for) AN iii.33; Dhp 224; Ja iii.307; Pv-a 39 ■ Cp. yācitaka.
pp. of yācati
(adj.) asked, begged, borrowed MN i.365 (˚ṃ bhogaṃ) Ja iv.358 = Ja vi.127 (˚ṃ yānaṃ and ˚ṃ dhanaṃ, alluding to MN i.365–366), with expln Ja iv.358: “yaṃ parena dinnattā labbhati taṃ yācita-sadisam eva hoti.”-(nt.) anything borrowed, borrowed goods: yācitak’ ūpamā kāmā (in app’ assādā kāmā passage) “the pleasures of the senses are like borrowed goods” Vin ii.25 = MN i.130; AN iii.97 = Thig 490 = Nd ii.71 (correct yācitan’); expld in detail at MN i.365 ■ See also Dhp-a i.403 (ye y. gahetvā na paṭidenti); Thag-a 288 (kāmā = yācitaka-bhaṇḍasadisā tāvakālik’ aṭṭhena).
yācita + diminutive (disparaging) ending ˚ka
sacrificing, giving alms, liberality (felt as synonymous with; cāga, thus influenced by tyaj, cp. Sk. tyājana): see yācayoga ■ Nd ii.531 (yāye yutta); Vism 224.
fr. yaj; cp. yāja & yājeti
(adj.) sacrificing, one who sacrifices, a priest Snp 312, Snp 313 (= yanna-yājino janā Snp-a 324), 618 (of a purohita; v.l. BB yācaka).
fr. yaj in its Caus. form yājeti
(nt) = yāja; Vism 224: see yācayoga.
(adj.) sacrificing Snp-a 324 (yañña˚).
fr. yāja
one who superintends a sacrifice or causes it to be performed DN i.143.
n. ag. to yājeti
to cause to sacrifice, to make a priest give an offering (to the gods or otherwise) Ja vi.211, Ja vi.215; ppr. yājento MN i.404; Pot. 2nd sg. yājeyya Ja iii.515; Ja iii.3rd pl. yājeyyuṃ Ja vi.215 (aññaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ) also yājayeyyuṃ Ja vi.211 ■ ger. yājetvā DN i.143.
Caus. I. of yajati
going, gone, proceeded; habit, custom; only in cpd. yāt’ānuyāyin going on according to what (or as it) has gone, i.e. following old habits Ja vi.309 Ja vi.310; expld by C. as “pubba-kārinā yātassa puggalassa anuyāyī, paṭhamaṃ karonto yāti nāma pacchā karonto anuyāyati.” The usual Sk. phrase is gat-ânugatika Cp. yātrā, yānikata.
pp. of yāti
to go, go on to proceed, to go away ■ pres. 1st yāmi Pv ii.88 (= gacchāmi Pv-a 107), Mvu 10, Mvu 3; Mvu 2nd yāsi Ja i.291 Mvu 10, Mvu 2 (kuhiṃ yāsi?); 3rd yāti Snp 720 (tuṇhī y mahodadhi); Dhp 29, Dhp 179, Dhp 294, Dhp 295; Ja vi.311; Mvu 5 Mvu 47; Dhp-a i.18; Dhp-a i.1st pl. yāma Mvu 6, Mvu 12 (kiṃ na y. v.l. kiṃ nu y.); 2nd yātha = imper.; 3rd yanti Snp 179 Snp 578, Snp 714; Dhp 126, Dhp 175, Dhp 225 (see also note s. v. yanti ) Pv ii.916 (= gacchanti Pv-a 120) ■ imper. 2nd sg yāhi Pv ii.16 (read yajāhi?); Mvu 13, Mvu 15; Mvu 3rd sg. yātu Mvu 29, Mvu 17; Mvu 2nd pl. yātha Mvu 14, Mvu 29; Dhp-a i.93. ppr. yanto Mvu 36, Mvu 60 (pacchā y. walking behind gen. yantassa Mvu 22, Mvu 57 (assavegena y.) ■ inf yātave Snp 834 ■ Another formation fr. yā is yāyati (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 138), in an intensive meaning of “to drive, to move on quickly or by special means, e.g. in phrase yānena yāyati to drive in a carriage Vin i.191 (Pot. yāyeyya); ii.276; Snp 654 (ppr.: rathass āṇī va yāyato) 418 (ger.: yānabhūmiṃ yāyitvā yānā oruyha); Ja vi.125. As “march” at Ja vi.449. In special meaning “to drive,” i.e. “to be driven or affected by” in expln of the ending of ppr. med kāma yamāne Snp 767 (or kāma-yāna) at Nd i.4, viz. “taṇhāya yāyati niyyati vuyhati saṃhariyati.” Cp. yāna as ending ■ pp. yāta. Caus. yapeti & yāpeti; (q.v.). See also anupari˚, ā˚, upa˚, uy˚, pa˚ (aor. pāyāsi) paccuy˚ pari˚; and anuyāyati.
Vedic yāti, or yā, which represents Idg *i̯ā, an amplified *ē as in eti (q.v.). Cp. Lat. janua door the Np. Janus (= January); Lith. jóti to ride, Mir. āth ford ■ The Dhtp 368 expls yā more in appld meaning as “papuṇane,” cp. Dhtm 596: pāpuṇe
(f.) 1. travel, going on, proceeding, good habit (like yāta; cp. yātrā = anuvṛtti Halāyudha 5, 33; SN i.33; SN i.16 = SN i.63 (trslnK.S., perhaps wrongly “egress”: it is more a question of going on through life!). Perhaps to be classed under foll. meaning as well.
2. going on, livelihood, support of life, maintenance in stock phrase occurring at many places of the Canon, viz. “purāṇaṃ vedanaṃ paṭihankhāmi, navañ ca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati etc.” where Dhs-a 404 explains yātrā by yāpanā, as may be inferred also from context. Thus at MN i.10 (where Neumann translates: “ein Fortkommen haben, i.e. progress), 355; SN iv.104; AN ii.40; AN iii.388; Nd i.496 Nd ii.540 (correct devanaṃ into vedanaṃ!); Pp 25; Dhs 1348; Mil 367: all passages identical. The whole passage is expld in detail at Vism 31 sq. where yātrā is given with “cira-kāla-gamana-sankhātā yātrā, Bdhgh. thus taking it as “keeping going,” or “continued subsistence” (longevity trsḷn) ■ In one other passage yātrā is conjectured for sātrā, viz. at Snp-a 322 in reading y ■ yāga for sātrā yāga, where meaning y might be taken as “customary.” The ed. compares Sk. yātsattra, a certain ceremony.
fr. yā, Class. Sk. yātrā, a n. ag. formation like nettī, meaning something like “vehicle,” that which keeps going
(adj.) sufficient (lit “just as much”; i.e. such as it is), sufficiently founded logical, consistent, exact, definite, true Nd ii.275 (where tatha is expld by taccha, bhūta, yāthāva, aviparīta) Dhs-a 248 (where micchā-diṭṭhi is expld as incorrect or illogical view ■ yāthāvato (abl.) exactly, truly consistently DN-a i.65; Thag-a 256; Vv-a 232. See also yathāvato ■ The nearest synonyms of yāthāva are aviparīta (i.e. definite) and yathābhūtaṃ. See also yathāva and yathāvaka.
-nāma having the name of exactitude Pv-a 231 (+ aviparīta-nāma). -māna pride of sufficiency or consistency Vb-a 487 sq. (and a˚). -lakkhaṇa possessing the characteristic of definiteness or logic Mil 171 Ne 27 (where avijjā is called “sabba dhammayāthāva-asampaṭivedha-lakkhaṇā”). -vacana exact logical or true speech Mil 214 (taccha-vacana, yāthāvav, aviparīta-v.). -sarasa logical and with its essential (sa + rasa) properties Vism 588, Vism 639.
see yathāva. It is a combn of a guṇader. fr. yathā and an adj ■ der. of ˚vant
at Vv-a 341 read as yadicchakaṃ (see ya˚).
(adj.) which like, what like, whichever, how much; in neg. sentence any, whatever little ■ Pv. ii.119 (= yāva mahanto Pv-a 77) ■ Often combd with kīdisa in meaning “any one, this or that, whoever,” e.g. Vv 5014 (= yo vā so vā pacura-jano ti attho Vv-a 213). As adj.: yādisi (sic! = Sk. yādṛśī) -kīdisā jīvikā (no livelihood, whatever little) Ja vi.584 (v.728; Trenckner, Mil p.423 gives v. 732!), expld by C as “yā vā sā vā, lāmakā ti attho” yādisaṃ kīdisaṃ dānaṃ a gift of whatever kind Mil 278 So also with tādisa: yādisā vā tādisā vā (viz. kāmā of whichever kind AN iii.5.
Vedic yādṛś & yādṛsa, yad + dṛśa
= yādisa; in correlation (generalising sense) yādisaka-tādisaka whatsoever… such, any whatsoever AN iv.308; SN v.96.
(nt.) 1. going, proceeding Ja vi.415 (+ ayāna, opposed to ṭhāna).
2. means of motion, carriage, vehicle Different kinds of carriages are enumd at Nd i.145 (on Snp 816) with hatthi˚; (elephant-), go˚; (cow-), aja˚ (goat-), meṇḍaka˚; (ram-), oṭṭha˚; (camel-?), khara˚ (donkey-). Cp. Mil 276 ■ yāna is one of the requisites (carriage or other means of locomotion) of the bhikkhu & as such included in the deyya-dhamma or 14 gifts (see yañña & deyya-dh.). Thus mentioned with; anna pāna vattha etc. at SN i.94; AN ii.85; Pp 51 ■ Cp. the defn & application of the term yāna as given below under yāna-sannidhi ■ See e.g. the foll. passages Vin i.191 (bhikkhū yānena yāyanti… na bhikkhave yānena yāyitabbaṃ; yo yāyeyya etc.: here a “carriage is expressly forbidden to the bhikkhu!), 231 (Ambapālī bhadrāni-bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṃ yānaṃ abhirūhitvā… ), 242 (same phrase with Meṇḍaka gahapati); DN i.7, DN i.89, DN i.106; MN i.366 (yānaṃ poroseyyaṃ pavara-maṇi-kuṇḍalaṃ, where vv.ll. on p. 561 read voropeyya and oropeyya, which Neumann (unwarrantedly) adopts in his trsln: Mittl. Sammlung2 1921 ii.666; the C. accepts reading poroseyya with expln “puris -anucchavikaṃ yānaṃ”); Dhp 323 (= hatthiyānādīni Dhp-a iv.6); Ja iii.525 sq.; Ja v.59; Ja vi.223 (= ratha) Kv 599 (Erāvaṇo hatthināgo sahassa-yuttaṃ dibbaṃ yānaṃ; trsld as “the wondrous elephant E., the thousand-wise yoked celestial mount.” trsl. p. 347 (lit vehicle) Pv iii.228 (= ratha or vayha etc. Pv-a 186) Pv-a 113 ■ iddhi-yāna carriage of magic power Mil 276; deva˚; godly carriage Mil 276; applied to the 8 fold Aryan Path at Snp 139 (= devalokaṃ yāpetuṃ samatthatā… aṭṭha-samāpatti-yānaṃ Snp-a 184). Similarly of the Path: magg’ aṭṭhangika-yāna (-yāyinī) Thig 389 (= aṭṭhangika-magga-sankhāta ariya-yāna Thag-a 257); and brahma-yāna dhamma-yāna “the very best & excellent carriage” as Ep. of magga SN v.5, cp. Ja iv.100 Cp. the later terms mahā and hīna- yāna. See also yānikata.
-ugghata shaking or jolting of the carriage Vin ii.276; Dhp-a iii.283. -gata having ascended the carriage DN i.126. -puṭosā (˚puṭoḷī) provision bag on a carriage (provision for the journey?) Vism 328 (so read for paṭṭoli). -bhūmi carriage-ground, i.e. the road as far as accessible to a carriage DN i.89; Snp 418. -sannidhi storing up of carriages or means of locomotion DN i.6 (with expln at DN-a i.82 as follows: yānaṃ nāma vayhaṃ ratho sakaṭaṃ sandamānikā patankī ti. Na pan’ etaṃ pabbajitassa yānaṃ, upāhanā yānaṃ pana); Snp 924 (= anna-pāna-vattha-yāna-sannidhi Nd i.372). -sukha pleasures of riding and driving Kv 209; cp. Kvu trsl. 127.
fr. yā, as in yāti. Cp. Vedic yāna and Lat. Janus
(nt.) a (small) cart, carriage, waggon, vehicle Ja iii.49 (˚ṃ pūretvā, or a hunter’s cart); iv.45; Dhp-a i.325 (sukha˚), 391 (pakati˚, an ordinary waggon) -˚ṃ pājeti to drive a cart Ja ii.112, Ja ii.143; Ja iii.51.
-upatthambha(na) waggon-prop Kp-a 44 (˚ni v.l. see Appendix to Index Pj.); Vb-a 234 (˚nika; illustrating the shape of the teeth). Yanika & Yaniya;
fr. yāna
(adj.) (-˚) 1. (lit.) leading to, conducive to, as ˚yāniya in deva˚ magga DN i.215, Brahma˚ magga the way leading to the Brahma-world DN i.220.
2. (in appld meaning, cp. yānikata) ˚yānika one who has become used to, whose habit it is…, in vipassanā˚ & samatha˚ at Vism 588.;
fr. yāna
made a habit of, indulged in, acquired, mastered (cp. expln Pts i.172 “yattha yattha ākankhati tattha tattha vasippatto hoti balappatto etc.”). The expression is to be compared with yatānuyāgin & yātrā, similarly to which it is used only in one stock phrase. It comes very near yātrā in meaning “that which keeps one going,” i.e. an acquired & thoroughly mastered habit, an “altera natura.” It is not quite to the point when Dial ii.110 (following Childers?) translate as “to use as a vehicle ■ Occurring with identical phraseology, viz. bahulīkata yāni-kata vatthu-kata anuṭṭhita paricita susamāraddha in application to the 4 iddhipādā at DN ii.103; AN iv.309; SN v.260; Mil 140; to mettā at MN iii.97; SN i.116; SN ii.264; SN iv.200; SN v.259; AN v.342; Ja ii.61; Mil 198. Expld at Pts i.172, cp. ii.122, 130.
yāna + kata, with i for a in compn with kṛ; perhaps also in analogy with bahulī-kata
(adj.) one who drives in a carriage Ja iii.525 = Ja iv.223 (where read yānī va for yān iva). At the latter passage the C. somewhat obscurely expls as “sappi-tela-yānena gacchanto viya”; at iii.526 the expln is simply “yānena gacchanto viya.”
fr. yāna
(& yapana) (nt.) keeping going, sustenance, feeding, nourishment existence, living. Esp. in one standing comb;n respecting the feeding and keeping of the body “ kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya etc.” (for the maintenance of the body) in yātrā passage: see yātrā 2; in which it is expld at Vism 32 by “pavattiyā avicched’ atthaṃ cira-kāla-ṭṭhit’ atthaṃ” i.e. for the preservation of life ■ Further at Ja i.66 (alam me ettakaṃ yāpanāya) v.387 (thokaṃ mama yāpana-mattaṃ eva); Dhp-a iv.210 (yāpana-mattaṃ dhanaṃ); Pv-a 28 ■ Used more freq together with shortened form yapana; in standard phrase vutti pālana, yapana yāpana cāra (cp. yapeti at Vism 145; Dhs-a 149, Dhs-a 167. Or similarly as f. with spelling yapanā & yāpanā: yapanā yāpanā iriyanā vattanā pālanā at Dhs 19, Dhs 82, Dhs 295, Dhs 380, Dhs 441, Dhs 716. At Dhs-a 404 yāpanā is used as syName of yātrā.
fr. yāpeti. Cp. Epic & Class. Sk. yāpana
(adj.) fit or sufficient for supporting one’s life Vin i.59, Vin i.212, Vin i.253 ■ Cp. BSk yāpanīyatara a more healthy state Divy 110.
grd. formation fr. yāpeti
(& yapeti) 1. (lit.)-(a) in caus.intensive as well as intrs. sense; in the latter also with short ă; as yapeti and then combd with yāpeti, in stock phrase defining carati “to go,” “to be” (or viharati with synonyms iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti at Nd ii.237; Vb 252; Dhs-a 167. Besides singly (yapeti at Dhs-a 149 ■ (b) to cause to go, to make someone go (to), to bring to, lead to (acc.) Ja vi.458 (sasenāvāhanaṃ yāpesi); Snp-a 184 (devalokaṃ yāpetuṃ samattha fit to bring one to the d-world) ■ (c) to get on, move to be active Dhp-a i.10 (sarīre yāpente); iv.17 (iriyāpathena).
2. (fig.) to keep going (both trs. & intrs.;) to keep up, esp. to keep oneself going or alive, to live by (instr.) [cp. BSk. yāpayati Divy 93, Divy 150, Divy 196, Divy 292 Divy 293, Divy 471, Divy 488, Avs i.209] DN i.166 (ekissā dattiyā on only one alms); Pp 56; Ja ii.204; Ja iii.67; Ja iv.125 Ja vi.532 (uñchena); Pv i.57 (ito dinnena yāpenti petā) i.117; iii.28 (tava dinnena yāpessanti kurūrino); Pv-a 27, Pv-a 29 (= attabhāvaṃ yāpeti = upajīvati).
Caus. of yāti
(adj.) 1. (lit.) fit for movement or locomotion: in ˚yāna sedan-chair, palanquin Abhp. 373.
2. (fig.) concerning the preservation of life, vital, in ˚rogin one who suffers from a vital disease lit. a disease concerning the upkeep of the body Vism 33 (trslnPath of Purity 39: “patient of long-suffering, from a different point of view, viz. of time only, like Bdhgh.).
shortened grd ■ formation for yāpanīya. *Sk. yāpya in slightly diff. meaning
1. restraint, only as cpd. cātu-yāma 4-fold restraint DN i.57; DN iii.48; SN i.66; MN i.377; Vism 416. Cp. Dial. i.751.
2. a watch of the night. There are 3 watches given as paṭhama, majjhima & pacchima; (first, middle & last) Nd;1 377 sq.; or purima, m. & pacchima; Nd ii.631 (under sadā) ■ AN i.114; AN iv.168; Dhp 157 (one of the 3; interpreted as the 3 vayas at Dhp-a iii.138); Ja i.243 (tīsu yāmesu ekasmiṃ yāme); Mvu 21, Mvu 33; Pv-a 217 Pv-a 280.
3. (usually pl. Yāmā devā) one who belongs to Yama or the ruler of the Underworld; a subject of Yama the realm of Yama ■ pl. inhabitants of Yamaloka AN i.210 (yāmā devā); Snp-a 244 (˚bhavana the abode of the Y.); Kp-a 166 (Yāmato yāva Akaniṭṭhaṃ from the Underworld to the Highest Heaven); Vism 225 (Yāmā); Vb-a 519 (Yāmā); Vv-a 246 (id.); Thag-a 169 (Y. devā).
-kālika of a restricted time, for a (relatively) short period (lit.) only for one watch of the night, but longer than yāva-kālika temporary. It is one of the three regulation-terms for specified food, viz. y ■ k., sattāhakālika & yāvajīvika;, or short period, of a week’s duration and life-long food Vin iv.83, Vin iv.86, Vin iv.176, Vin iv.311; to which is added yāva-kālika, temporary at Vin i.251 (where mutual relations of the 4 are discussed). -gaṇḍika(ṃ) koṭṭeti to beat the block of restraint (?), i.e. exercise self-control (?) (or does it belong to yāma 3?) Kp-a 233.
fr. yam in both meanings of yamati & yama;3
see yāti.
(adj.) (-˚) going, going on to; in yāna-yāyinī (f.) Thig 389 (maggaṭṭhangika˚ having ascended the carriage of the 8-fold Path; expld by “ariya-yāyena nibbāna-puraṃ yāyinī upagatā” Thag-a 257).
fr. yā, see yāti
(adv.). 1 (as prep.) up to (a point), as far as, how far so far that (cp. tāva I), both temporal and local, used either with absolute form of noun or adj. (base), or nom., or abl. or acc.-(a) absolute: y. sahassa up to 1000; Pv-a 21; y. sattama up to the seventh DN i.238. (b) nom.: y. deva-bhava-sampatti up to the attainment of a deva existence Pv-a 167; y. satta divasā up to 7 days, as long as 7 days Pv-a 31. (c) with abl.: y brahmalokā up to the highest heaven AN iii.17; y mekhalā down to her girdle Pv-a 46; yāva āyu-pariyosānā up to the end of life Pv-a 200; y. ajjadivasā till the present day Mvu 32, Mvu 23; y. kapp’ âvasānā up to the end of the world Vism 688 (where Snp-a 5 in same passage reads acc. ˚âvasānaṃ); y. kāla-ppavedanā Ja i.118 + Dhp-a i.248; y. mukhasmā up to the brim Mil 238; yāva bhumm’ âvalambare hang down to the ground Pv ii.102 ■ (d) with acc. y. Bodhimaṇḍaṃ as far as the Bodhimaṇḍa Mvu 30, Mvu 88; y. tatiyakaṃ for the 3rd time (i.e. the last time; ascending scale! DN i.95; y. tatiyaṃ id. Vin iv.236 samanubhāsitabba) Snp 1116; Ja iv.126 ■ Freq. in phrase yāva jīvaṃ (see under cpds.). Sattamāsaṃ cha pañca cattāro ti vatvā yāva temāsaṃ yāciṃsu “after having said 7, 6, 5, 4, months they begged down to 3 months” Pv-a 20 ■ With startingpoint local: pādatalato… yāvakesaggaṃ from the sole of the foot to the tip of the hair (“from tip to toe”) Dhp-a i.70; (in modal sense:) paṭhavī-kasiṇato paṭṭhāya yāva odāta-kasiṇaṃ “from the one to the other” Vism 374. Similarly in correlation yāva-tāva (see tāva 1.) as far-so far, until-so long: y. rājā āgacchati tāva ubho ramissāma Ja iv.190; heṭṭhā pi yāva Avīci upari yāva Akaniṭṭha-bhavanaṃ, tāva addasa Vism 392; yāva naṃ ānemi tāva idh’ eva tiṭṭha Dhp-a iii.194.
2. (as adv.) how, how much, to which or what extent, as great or as much (as) (cp. tāva ii.2) usually in combn yāva mahā (mahantaṃ), e.g. yāva mahantaṃ how big Pv-a 77 (= yādisaṃ of Pv ii.119) Vv-a 325 = Dhp-a i.29 (yāva mahantaṃ). Also in other combns, like yāva dukkhā nirayā how (or as) many painful purgatories Snp 678; yāva dukkhā tiracchānayoni MN iii.169; yāva pāpo ayaṃ Devadatto alakkhiko… “how very wicked is this D.” Vin ii.196 Further in combn with attha(ṃ), and eva, in which cases the final d is restored, or may be regarded as euphonic Thus yāvad-atthaṃ as far as need be, as much as you like (with imper.) Pv iv.57 (khādassu y.); UbhA 504 (= yattakaṃ icchati tattakaṃ); Ja v.338; Pv-a 217 (gaṇhāhi) Cp. Vin iii.37 (yāvadatthaṃ katvā “pleasing herself”)-As adj. sufficient, plenty MN i.12 (paripuṇṇa… suhita y.); Pv-a 24 (= pahūta). yāvad-eva [cp. the similar tāva-d ■ eva] “as much as it is (in extent)” i.e. with limitation as far as is necessary, up to (i.e. not further or more than), ever so much, as much as you like, at least; (then:) as far as, in short, altogether indeed ■ The same idea as our defn is conveyed by Bdhgh’s at Snp-a 503 (on Snp p.140) “paricched âvadhāraṇa-vacanaṃ,” and at Dhp-a ii.73 “avadhiparicchedana”: giving a limitation, or saying up to the limit. SN ii.276; Snp p.140; Dhp 72; and in stock phrase “n’eva davāya… yāvad eva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā…” (“in short”); see passages under yātrā. The expln of yāvad eva in this phrase as given at Dhs-a 403 runs: “āhār’ āharaṇe payojanassa pariccheda-niyamadassanaṃ,” of which the trslnExpos. ii.512 is “so as to suffice signifies the limit of the result of taking food. Ṉeumann’s trsln at MN i.10 is “but only.”-Note. In the stock phrase of the Buddha’s refusal to die until his teaching has been fully proclaimed (Mahāparinibbānasutta) “among gods and men” DN ii.106 (= 114, 219 iii.122; AN iv.311) “yāva-deva-manussehi suppakāsitaṃ” (trslnDial. ii.113: “until, in a word, it shall have been well proclaimed among men”) we are inclined to consider the reading yāva deva˚; as original and better than yāvad-eva, although Rhys Davids (Dial. ii.236) is in favour of the latter being the original. Cf K.S. ii.75 n. The phrase seems to require yāva only as continuation of the preceding yāva’s; moreover the spirit of the message is for the whole of the worlds Cp. BSk. yāvad-deva manusyebhaḥ Divy 201. It is not a restriction or special definition of meaning at this passage. But may it not be taken as a summing up “in short”? It is left doubtful. If it is = yāva, then we should expect yāva na, as in the preceding sentence if it is yāvad eva the meaning “not more than made known by men” seems out of place; in this case the meaning “at least” is preferable. A similar case of insertion of a euphonic consonant m (or is it the a-stem nt in ˚ṃ instead of ˚t as in yāvat?) we find in the phrase yāvam pi at Ja v.508 (with Pot. tiṭṭheyya; see below 3 C. expln by yattakaṃ kālaṃ) ■ The form yāvade (for yāvad eva) also occurs (like tāvade for tāvad eva) at MN ii.207 ■ For yad-idaṃ we find yāvañ c’ idaṃ at AN iii.34; MN iii.169 ■ The latter form (yāvaṃ, as above Ja v.508) is better to be grouped directly under yāvant where more & similar cases are given.
3. (as; conj. so long as, whilst, until (cp. tāva ii.3, 4; iii.); either with Fut. or Pot. or Prohibitive. E.g. ‘S i.202 (ahu pure dhammapadesu chando y. virāgena samāgamimha trsln “until I met with that Pure thing and Holy”) Ja vi.266 (y. āmantaye); Pv-a 4 (tāva ayyo āgametu yāva ayaṃ puriso… pānīyaṃ pivissati or: “you shall wait please, until he shall drink”). Neg. yāva… na not until, unless, as long as not DN ii.106 (na paribbāyissāmi… yāva… na bhavissati); SN i.47 (y na gādhaṃ labhati); Dhp 69 (yattakaṃ kālaṃ na… Dhp-a ii.50).
-kālika (cp. tāva ii.1) “as far as the time or occasion goes,” occasional, temporary, at Vin i.251 in foll context (cp. yāmakālika): “kappati… yāvakālikena yāmakālikaṃ na kappati, kappati yāvakālikena sattāha kālikaṃ na k. etc. with foll. yāvajīvikaṃ & the same with kappati yāma-kālikena, sattāha-kālikenana k.; kappati satt˚, yāvajīv, na k.” The reply of the Buddha is: yāvakālikena yāmakālikaṃ tadahu paṭiggahitaṃ kāle kappati vikāle na kappati (same with sattāhakālikaṃ & yāvajīvikaṃ); followed by yāmakālikena… sattāhakālikaṃ & yāvajīvikaṃ; sattāhakālikena… jāvajīvikaṃ.” -jivaṃ (adv.) for the length of one’s life, life-long, all one’s life, for life (-time) Vin i.80 Vin ii.197; Vin iii.23; Iti 78; Dhp 64, Dhp 284; Vism 94; Dhp-a i.45; Pv-a 76, Pv-a 110 (= satataṃ). Cp. BSk. yāvajīva-sukhya Avs ii.37. -tajjanī (-vinīta) led only as long as kept under a threat AN i.285 (one of the 3 parisā’s; so read with v.l. for T. yāvatajjhā˚). -tatiyaka “as much as 3 times,” name of the last 4 Sanghādisesa offences because before the punishment is inflicted warning must have been given 3 times: see passage of Vin iii.186 under yāva t-ihaṃ ■ tihaṃ (read as yāvat-ihaṃ, the latter = aha2 day) as many days as… ; in foll. passage: uddiṭṭhā… terasa sanghādisesā dhammā, nava patham-āpattikā cattāro yāvatatiyakā, yesaṃ bhikkhu aññataraṃ vā aññataraṃ vā āpajjitvā yāvatihaṃ jānaṃ paṭicchādeti tāvatihaṃ tena bhikkhunā akāmā parivatthabbaṃ (for as many days as he knowingly conceals his sin, for so many days… ), parivuttha-parivāsena bhikkhunā uttariṃ chārattaṃ bhikkhumānattāya paṭipajjitabbaṃ Vin iii.186.
Vedic yāvat as nt. of yāvant used as adv. in meanings 1 & 2. The final t is lost in Pāli, but restored as; d in certain combinations: see below 2 ■ Cp. tāva kīva;
a dish prepared of barley Ja vi.373 (= yavataṇḍula-bhatta C.).
= yavaka
(adj.) as much as, as many as, as far as, whatever; usually in correl with tāvataka e.g. Vin i.83 (yāvataka… t.); DN ii.18 (y. kāyo t. vyāmo); Nd ii.2353 (y ˚ṃ ñeyyaṃ t ˚ṃ ñāṇaṃ); or similarly MN i.397 (y. kathā-sallāpo… sabbaṃ taṃ… ); Pv-a 103 (yāvatakā = yāvanto). f. yāvatikā: yāvatikā gati tāvatikaṃ gantvā AN i.112 y. nāgassa bhūmi as far as there was ground for the elephant DN i.50; similarly: y. yānassa bh. as far as the carriage-road DN i.89, DN i.106, DN i.108; y. ñāṇassa bh Ne 25.
fr. yāva, as tāvataka fr. tāva
(indecl.) lokasmiṃ yad idam arahanto “as far as the abodes of beings, as far as heaven, these are the highest these are the best, I mean the Arahants.” SN iii.84 yāvatā dhammā sankhatā vā asankhatā vā virāgo… aggam akkhāyati, yad-idaṃ mada-nimmadano… AN ii.34 = Iti 88; “of all the things definite or indefinite passionlessness deserves the highest praise, I mean the disintoxication of pride etc.” The expln at Vism 293 takes yāvatā (grammatically incorrectly) as n. pl. yattakā ■ yāvatā jagato gati as far as (like as) the course of the world Iti 120.
abl. of yāvant in adv. use cp. tāvatā ) as far as, like as, in comparison with, regarding, because Dhp 258 (na tena paṇḍito hoti y. bahu bhāsati = yattakena kāraṇena Dhp-a iii.383), 259, 266 (similarly, C. yattakena); Snp 759 (yāvat’ atthī ti vuccati; expld at Snp-a 509 as “yāvatā ete cha ārammaṇā ʻatthīʼ ti vuccanti vacana-vyattayo veditabbo”); yāvatā ariyaṃ paramaṃ sīlaṃ, nâhaṃ tattha attano sama-samaṃ samanupassāmi kuto bhiyyo “compared with this sīla I do not see anyone quite equal to myself, much less greater.” DN i.74 yāvatā ariyaṃ āyatanaṃ yavatā vanippatho idaṃ agga-nagaraṃ bhavissati Pātaliputtaṃ puṭa-bhedanaṃ Vin i.229 = Ud 88 = DN ii.87 (concerning a most splendid site, and a condition for trade, this Pāṭ will be the greatest town; trsln Dial. as far as Aryan people resort, as far as merchants travel… ). yāvatā satt’ āvāsā yāvatā bhavaggaṃ ete aggā ete saṭṭhā [read seṭṭhā
(pron. rel.) 1. yāvant as adj.: as many (as) Dhp 337 (hāvant’ ettha samāgatā as many as are assembled here); Ja v.72 (yāvanto uda-bindūni… tāvanto gaṇḍū jāyetha; C. on p. 74 expls by yattakāni; yāvatā pl. as many as Pv ii.116; yāvanto Pv ii.716 (= yāvatakā Pv-a 103); Ja v.370 (detha vatthāni… yavanto eva icchati as many as he wants).
2. yāvat (nt.) used adverbially. The examples and meanings given here are really to be combined with those given under yāva2 (yāvad˚). It is hardly possible to distinguish clearly between the 2 categories; the t may well have been reduced to d or been replaced by another sandhi consonant. However, the specific Pāli use of yāva (like tāva ) justifies a separate treatment of yāva in that form only ■ yāvat occurs only in combn with ca (where we may assume either a peculiar nt. form yāvaṃ: see yāva 2; or an assimilation of t to ñ before c ■ The form yāva mahantaṃ may originally have been a yāvaṃ m.) as yāvañ ca “and that,” “i.e.,” how much, however much, so great SN i.149 (passa yāvañ ca te idaṃ aparaddhaṃ: see how great a mistake you have made in this); Iti 91, Iti 92 (passa yāvañ ca ārakā santike: see how far and near). yāvañ c’ idaṃ stands for; yad-idaṃ (see ya˚ 4) in peculiar use of restriction at M. III.169; SN ii.178; AN iii.34.
3. The nt. form yāvat further occurs in foll. cpds.: ˚āyukaṃ (better as yāvat˚ than yāvatā˚) as long as life lasts, for a lifetime Mvu 3, Mvu 41; Vv-a 196 (as adj. ˚āyukā dibba-sampatti) Pv-a 66, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 133; ˚icchakaṃ as much as is desired, according to one’s wishes Pp 12, Pp 25; Vism 154 (here spelt yāvad -icchakaṃ); ˚ihaṃ see under yāva (cpds ■ instr. yavatā: see sep.
cp. Sk. yāvant; same formation as demonstr. pron. tāvant, of which the P. uses the adv. nt tāva (t) form more frequently than the adj. tāvant The only case so far ascertained where tāvant occurs as adj. is Ja v.72 (see below)
at MN ii.47 is an obscure expression. The reading is established; otherwise one might think of a corrupted yāv(a) etad ahosī(pi) or yāva-d-ev’-ahosi “was it really so?” or: “did you really have that thought?” Neumann, Mittl. Sammlung2 1921; ii.381 trsls “gar so sehr drängt es dich” (are you in such a hurry?), and proposes reading (on p. 686, note) yāv etado hi pi, leaving us wondering what etado might be-Could it be a distorted yāyetar (n. ag. of yāyeti Caus. yā )?
med.: having sacrificed DN i.138 (mahā-yaññaṃ y. rājā)-pass.: sacrificed, (nt.) sacrifice DN i.55 (dinna, y huta); expld at DN-a i.165 by “ mahāyāga ” Vb 328 (id.); Ja i.83 (y. + huta); iv.19 (= yajita C.); v.49 vi.527 ■ duyyiṭṭha not properly sacrificed, a sacrifice not according to rites Ja vi.522. In specific Buddhistic sense “given, offered as alms, spent as liberal gift Vin i.36; Ja i.168 = AN ii.44; MN i.82. Dhp 108 (yaṃ kiñci yiṭṭhaṃ va hutaṃ va; Dhp-a ii.234 = yebhuyyena mangalakiriya-divasesu dinna-dānaṃ) ■ suyiṭṭha well given or spent AN ii.44; Thag-a 40; Vv 3426 (in both senses; Vv-a 155 expls “mahā-yāga-vasena yiṭṭhaṃ”).
pp. of yajati with a petrified sandhi y.; Vedic iṣṭa
in mā yidha at Vin i.54 is to be read mā-y-idha, the y being an euphonic consonant (see y.).
(nt.) 1. the yoke of a plough (usually) or a carriage Dhp-a i.24 (yugaṃ gīvaṃ bādhati presses on the neck); Pv-a 127 (ratha˚); Sdhp 468 (of a carriage) Also at Snp 834 in phrase dhonena yugaṃ samāgamā which Bdhgh. (Snp-a 542) expls as “dhuta-kilesena buddhena saddhiṃ yugaggāhaṃ samāpanno,” i.e. having attained mastery together with the pure Buddha. Neumann Sn trsln not exactly: “weil abgeschüttelt ist das Joch” (but dhona means “pure”). See also below ˚nangala.
2. (what is yoked or fits under one yoke) a pair, couple; appld to objects, as-˚: dussa˚; a pair of robes SN v.71.; Dhp-a iv.11; Pv-a 53; sāṭaka˚; id Ja i.8, Ja i.9; Pv-a 46; vattha˚; id. Ja iv.172 ■ tapassi˚; a pair of ascetics Vv 2210; dūta˚; a pair of messengers SN iv.194; sāvaka˚; of disciples DN ii.4; SN i.155; SN ii.191 SN v.164; in general: purisa˚; (cattāri p ■ yugāni) (4) pairs of men SN iv.272 sq. = Iti 88; in verse at Vv 4421 and 533 expld at Vism 219 as follows: yugaḷa-vasena paṭhamamagga-ṭṭho phala-ṭṭho ti idam ekaṃ yugaḷan ti evaṃ cattāri purisa -yugaḷāni honti. Practically the same as “aṭṭha purisa-puggalā.” Referring to “pairs of sins (so the C.) in a somewhat doubtful passage at Ja i.374 sa mangala-dosa-vītivatto yuga-yog’ âdhigato na jātum eti; where C. expls yugā as kilesā mentioned in pairs (like kodho ca upanāho, or makkho ca paḷāso), and yoga as the 4 yojanas or yogas (oghas?), viz. kāma˚ bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ ■ Also used like an adj. num in meaning “two,” e.g. yugaṃ vā nāvaṃ two boats Dpvs i.76.
3. (connected by descent) generation, an age DN i.113 (yāva sattamā pitāmahā-yugā “back through seven generations.” Cp. DN-a i.281: āyuppamāṇa); Kp-a 141 (id.); Ja i.345 (purisa˚). There are also 5 ages (or stages) in the [life of the] sāsana (see Brethren, p. 339): vimutti, samādhi, sīla, suta dāna.
-anta (-vāta) (storm at) the end of an age (of men or the world), whirlwind Ja i.26. -ādhāna putting the yoke on, harnessing MN i.446. -ggāha “holding the yoke,” i.e. control, dominance, domineering, imperiousness; used as syn. for palāsa at Vb 357 = Pp 19 (so read for yuddha˚), expld by sama-dhura-ggahaṇaṃ “taking the leadership altogether” at Vb-a 492. See further Nd i.177; Vv-a 71 (yugaggāha-lakkhaṇo paḷāso); Snp-a 542; Dhp-a iii.57 (˚kathā = sārambhakathā). -˚ṃ ganhāti to take the lead, to play the usurper or lord Ja iii.259 (C. for T. palāsin); Dhp-a iii.346 -ggāhin trying to outdo somebody else, domineering imperious Vv-a 140. -cchidda the hole of a yoke Thig 500 (in famous simile of blind turtle). -naṅgala yoke and plough (so taken by Bdhgh. at Snp-a 135) Snp 77; SN i.172 (“plough fitted with yoke” Mrs. Rh.D.) -nandha (with v.l. ˚naddha, e.g. at Pts ii.92 sq.; Kp-a 27 in T.) putting a yoke on, yoking together; as adj. congruous harmonious; as nt. congruity, association common cause Pts ii.98 = Vism 682; Pts ii.92 sq. (˚vagga & ˚kathā); Kp-a 27 (nt.); Vism 149 (˚dhammā things fitting under one yoke, integral parts, constituents) -mattaṃ (adv.) “only the distance of a plough,” i.e. only a little (viz. the most necessary) distance ahead with expressions of sight: pekkhati Snp 410 (“no more than a fathom’s length” Rh.D. in Early Buddhism 32) pekkhin Mil 398; ˚dassāvin Vism 19 (okkhitta-cakkhu + ) pekkhamāna Snp-a 116 (as expln of okkhittacakkhu). -sāṭaka (= s ■ yuga) a pair of robes, two robes Dpvs vi.82. Yugala & Yugala;
fr. yuj; Vedic yuga (to which also yoga) = Gr. ζυγόν; Lat. jugum = Goth. juk; Ohg. juh; E. yoke Lith. jungas
(nt.) a pair couple Ja i.12 (yugaḷa-yugaḷa-bhūtā in pairs), 500 (bāhu˚); vi.270 (thana˚ the 2 breasts); Vism 219; Vb-a 51 (yugaḷato jointly, in pairs); the six “pairs of adaptabilities” or “words,” Yog. 18–23, Mystic 30 sq. cp. Dhs 40 sq. Also used as adj. (like yuga) in phrase yugalaṃ karoti to couple, join, unite Dpvs i.77; Vv-a 233.
Class. Sk. yugala; in relation to yuga the same as Lat. jugulum (“yoke-bone”) to jugum. Cp. also Gr. ζεύγλη yoking strap
(nt.) a pair Tikp 66; Vb-a 73.
fr. yugala
(adj.) (-˚) yoked or to be yoked applicable, to be studied, only in cpd. duyyuja hard to be mastered, difficult Ja v.368 (atthe yuñjati duyyuje he engages in a difficult matter; C. reads duyyuñja ).
either a direct root-derivation fr. yuj, corresponding to Sk. yuj (or yuk, cp. Lat. con-jux “conjugal,” Gr. ὁμό ζυς companion, σύ ζυς = conjux Goth. ga-juka companion); or a simplified form of the grd. *yujya → *yujja → yuja
(adj.) to be fought; neg. a˚; not to be fought, invincible MN ii.24 (so read for ayojjha).
grd. of yujjhati
to fight, make war. Rare in older literature our refs. only from the Mahāvaṃsa; e.g. 22, 82 (fut yujjhissāma, with instr.: Damiḷehi); 25, 23 (aor ayujjhi); 25, 58 (ppr. yujjhamāna); 33, 41 (aor. yujjhi) To which add Dhp-a ii.154 (mallayuddhaṃ yujjhanto) iii.259 (Ajātasattunā saddhiṃ yujjhanto) ■ pp. yuddha -Caus. yodheti (q.v.).
cp. Vedic yudhyate, yudh, given in meaning “sampahāra” at Dhtp 415 ■ Etymologically to Idg *ieudh to shake, fr. which in var. meanings Lat. jubeo to command, juba horse’s mane; Gr. ὑσμίνη battle Lith. jundù, jùdra whirlwind; cp. also Av. yaošti agility
(nt.) fighting, making war Ja iii.6, Ja iii.82.
fr. yujjhati
(nt.) making somebody fight, inciting to war Mil 178.
fr. yujjhati Caus.
(lit.) to yoke; (fig.) to join with (instr. or loc.), to engage in (loc.), to exert oneself, to endeavour. All our passages show the applied meaning, while the lit. meaning is only found in the Caus. yojeti ■ Often expld by and coupled with the syn. ghaṭati & vāyamati;, e.g. at Ja iv.131 Ja v.369; Dhp-a iv.137 ■ Forms: pres. yuñjati Dhp 382; Ja v.369; Ja v.2nd pl. yuñjatha Thig 346 (kāmesu; = niyojetha Thag-a 241); ppr. yuñjanto Ja iv.131 (kammaṭṭhāne) imper. yuñja SN i.52 (sāsane); Thag-a 12; med. imper yuñjassu Thig 5 ■ Pass. yujjati (in grammar or logic is constructed or applied, fits (in), is meant Kp-a 168; Snp-a 148, Snp-a 403, Snp-a 456 ■ Caus. I. yojeti & II.; yojāpeti (q.v.) ■ pp. yutta.
Vedic yunakti, yuñjati & yuñkte,; yuj; cp. Gr. ζεύγνυμι, Lat, jungo to unite, put together (pp junctus = Sk. yukta, cp. E. junct-ion); Lith. jùngin The Idg. root *i̯eug is an enlarged form of *i̯eṷe “to unite,” as in Sk. yanti, yuvati, pp. yuta; f. yuti, to which also Lat. jūs = P. yūsa. The Dhtp gives several (lit. & fig.) meanings of; yuj, viz. “yoge” (No. 378) “samādhimhi” (399), “saṃgamane” (550)
fastened to (loc.), attracted by, bent on, engaged in DN i.57 (sabba-vārī˚); Snp 842 (pesuṇeyye; Nd i.233 reads yutta in exegesis, do. at p. 234, with further expln āyutta, payutta etc.), 853 (atimāne); Dāvs v.18 (dhiti˚)-Note. yuta is doubtful in phrase tejasā-yuta in Niraya passage at AN i.142 = MN iii.183 = Nd i.405 = Nd ii.304iii = Ja v.266. The more likely reading is either tejas’ āyuta (so BSk. M.Vastu 9), or tejasā yutta (so Nd ii.& Pv-a 52), i.e. endowed with, furnished with full of heat ■ We find a similar confusion between; uyyuta & uyyutta;.
pp. of yu, yauti to fasten but Dhtp 338: “missane”
1. (lit.) yoked, harnessed (to loc.) Pv i.114 (catubbhi yutta ratha); Mvu 35, Mvu 42 (goṇā rathe yattā); Dhp-a i.24 (dhure yuttā balivaddā)
2. coupled; connected with; (appld) devoted to applied to, given to, engaged in (-˚, instr. or loc.) Snp 820 (methune), 863 (macchiriya˚), 1144 (tena, cp. Nd ii.532); Iti 93 (Buddha-sāsane); Ja vi.206 (yoga˚).
3. furnished; fixed, prepared, in order, ready Snp 442 (Māra = uyyutta Snp-a 392); Pv-a 53.
4. able, fit (to or for = inf.), suitable, sufficient Snp 826 (cp. Nd i.164) Ja v.219; DN-a i.141 (dassituṃ yutta = dassanīya); Vv-a 191 (= alaṃ); Pv-a 74.
5. proper, right Pv-a 159
6. due to (-˚, with a grd., apparently superfluous Ja iii.208 (āsankitabba˚); cp. yuttaka.
7. (nt.) conjunction i.e. of the moon with one or other constellation Vin ii.217 ■ ayutta not fit, not right, improper Pv-a 6 (perhaps delete), 64 ■ suyutta well fit, right proper, opp. duyutta unbefitting, in phrase suyuttaṃ duyuttaṃ ācikkhati Ja i.296 (here perhaps for dur-utta?) du˚ also lit. “badly fixed, not in proper condition, in a bad state” at Ja iv.245 (of a gate).
-kāra acting properly Pv-a 66. -kārin acting rightly Mil 49. -paṭibhāṇa knowledge of fitness Pp 42 (cp PugA 223). -payutta intent on etc. Pv-a 150. -rūpa one who is able or fit (to = inf.) Ja i.64. -vāha justified Vv-a 15.
pp. of yuñjati; Vedic yukta, cp. Lat. junctus, Gr. ζευκτός, Lith. jùnktas
(adj.) (-˚) proper, fit (for); nt. what is proper, fitness: dhamma-yuttakaṃ katheti to speak righteous speech Ja iv.356 ■ Usually combd with a grd., seemingly pleonastically (like yutta), e.g. kātabba˚ what had to be done Pv-a 81; Dhp-a i.13 (as kattabba˚) āpucchitabba˚; fit to be asked Dhp-a i.6.
fr. yutta
“fitting,” i.e. 1. application, use Mil 3 (opamma˚).
2. fitness vāda˚, KVA 37; in instr. yuttiyā in accordance with Mvu 10, Mvu 66 (vacana˚); Sdhp 340 (sutti˚); and abl yuttito Sdhp 505.
3. (logical) fitness, right construction correctness of meaning; one of the 16 categories (hārā), appld to the exposition of texts, enumd in the 1st section of the Netti; e.g. at Ne 1
3, 103; Kp-a 18; Snp-a 551, Snp-a 552. Thus abl. yuttito by way of correctness or fitness (contrasted to suttato ) Vb-a 173 = Vism 562; and yutti-vasena by means of correctness (of meaning) Snp-a 103 (contrasted to anussava ).
4. trick device, practice Ja vi.215.
-kata combined with; (nt.) union, alloy Vv-a 13.
cp. Vedic yukti connection, fr. yuj
(nt.) war, battle, fight DN i.6 (daṇḍa˚ fighting with sticks or weapons); Ja iii.541 (id.) Snp 442 (dat. yuddhāya); Ja vi.222; Mil 245 (kilesa˚ as pp.: one who fights sin); Mvu 10, Mvu 45 (˚atthaṃ for the sake of fighting); 10, 69 (yuddhāya in order to fight) 25, 52 (yuddhāy’ āgata); 32, 12 (yuddhaṃ yujjhati) 32, 13 (maccu˚ fight with death); 33, 42; Dhp-a ii.154 (malla˚ fist-fight) ■ The form yudhāya at Snp 831 is to be taken as (archaic) dat. of Vedic yudh (f.), used in sense of an inf. & equal to yuddhāya. Nd;1 172 expls as “yuddh’ atthāya.”
-kāla time for the battle Mvu 10, Mvu 63. -ṭṭha eṅgaged in war SN i.100 (so read for ˚ttha). -maṇḍala fightingring arena Ja iv.81; Vism 190; Vb-a 356 (in comparison).
orig. pp. of yujjhati; cp. Vedic yuddha (pp.) and yudh (f.) the fight
a fighter, in malla˚; fist-fighter, pugilist Ja iv.81.
fr. yuddha, for the usual yodha (ka)
(f.) Name of a tree Ja v.422 (for T. yodhi, which appears as yodhikā in C. reading). The legitimate reading is yūthikā (q.v.), as is also given in vv.ll.
doubtful
a youth-nom. sg.; yuvā DN i.80 = yobbanena samannāgata DN-a i.223; Snp 420; Dhp 280 (= paṭhama-yobbane ṭhita Dhp-a iii.409); Pv iii.71 (= taruṇa Pv-a 205) ■ Cp yava, yuvin & yobbana;.
Vedic yuvan; cp. Av. yavan = Lat. juvenis, Lith. jáunas young; Lat. juvencus “calf”; juventus youth Goth. junda, Ohg. jugund & jung, E. young ■ The n ■ stem is the usual, but later Pāli shows also decl after a-stem, e.g. gen. yuvassa Mvu 18, Mvu 28
(adj.-n.) young Ja iv.106, Ja iv.222.
= yuvan with diff-adj. ending
(nt.) a flock, herd of animals Snp 53 (of elephants); Ja i.170 (monkeys), 280 (id.); Snp-a 322 (go˚, of oxen).
-pa the leader of a herd Thig 437 (elephants). -pati same Ja iii.174 (elephant); Dhp-a i.81 (id.).
Vedic yūtha
(f.) a kind of jasmine, Jasminum auriculatum Ja vi.537; Mil 338. So is also to be read at Ja v.420 (for yodhi) & 422 (yodhikā yudhikā). See also; yodhikā.
cp. later Sk. yūthikā
1. a sacrificial post DN i.141; AN iv.41; Ja iv.302; Ja vi.211; Mil 21 (dhamma˚); Snp-a 321, Snp-a 322; DN-a i.294.
2. a pāsāda, or palace Thag 163 = Ja ii.334.
-ussāpana the erection of the sacr. post Dhs-a 145 (cp. Mil 21).
Vedic yūpa
1. juice Vin i.206 (akaṭa˚ natural juice); Mvu 28, Mvu 26; Vv-a 185 (badara˚ of the jujube); Vism 195 (seda sweaty fluid).
2. soup, broth. Four kinds of broths are enumd at MN i.245, viz. mugga˚; bean soup, kulattha˚ of vetch (also at Vism 256), kaḷāya˚; (chick-) pea soup hareṇuka˚; pea soup; Mil 63 (rañño sūdo yūsaṃ vā rasaṃ vā kareyya).
Vedic yūṣan, later Sk. yūṣa; fr. base Idg. *i̯ūs, cp. Lat. jūs soup, Gr. ζύμη yeast, ferment, ζωμός soup Obulg. jucha = Ger. jauche manure; Swedish ōst cheese an enlargement of base *i̯eu to mix, as in Sk. yu to mix: see yuta, to which further *i̯eṷe, as in yuñjati.
(adj.) sattā Ābhassarasaṃvaṭṭanikā honti; expld by half allegorical, half popular etym. at DN-a i.110 as follows: “ye upari Brahma-lokesu vā Āruppesu vā nibbattanti, tadavasese sandhāya vuttaṃ”); DN ii.139: yebhuyyena dasasu loka-dhātusu devatā sannipatitā (as a rule) Snp p.107 (= bahukāni Snp-a 451); Mil 6 (y. Himavantam eva gacchanti: usually); DN-a i.280 (ordinarily) Vv-a 234 (occasionally), 246 (pihita-dvāram eva hoti usually); Pv-a 2 (Sattari tattha tattha viharante y tāya tāya atth’ uppattiyā), 46 (tassā kesa-sobhaṃ disvā taruṇa-janā y. tattha paṭibaddha-cittā adesuṃ invariably) ■ na yebhuyyena not as a rule, usually not (at all): nâpi y. ruditena kāci attha-siddhi Pv-a 63.
ye = yad in Māgadhī form; thus yad bhūya = yad bhiyya “what is more or most(ly)” abundant, numerous, most. Not found as adj. by itself, except in phrase yebhuyya-vasena mostly, as a rule Thag-a 51 and Pv-a 136, which is identical with the usual instr. yebhuyyena occurring as adv. “as according to most,” i.e. (1) almost all, altogether, practically (as in our phrase “practically dead”), mostly DN i.105 (addasā dvattiṃsa lakkhanāṇi y. ṭhapetvā dve: all except two) = 109; Vin iii.29 sq.; Ja i.246 (gāmako y andha-bāla-manussehi yeva ussanno the village was peopled by mostly foolish folk); v.335 (y. asīti-mahātherā, altogether) ■ (2) as it happens (or happened) usually, occasionally, as a rule, ordinarily DN i.17 (saṃvaṭṭamāne loke y. [as a rule
(f.) lit. “according to the majority,” i.e. a vote of majority of the Chapter; name of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathas, or means of settling a dispute ■ Vin ii.84 (anujānāmi bh. adhikaraṇaṃ yebhuyyasikāya vūpasametuṃ), 93 (vivād’ âdhikaraṇaṃ dvīhi samathehi sammati: sammukhā-vinayena ca yebhuyyasịkāya ca). As one of the 7 methods of settling a dispute mentioned at Vin iv.207 = Vin iv.351 (the seven are: sammukhā-vinaya, sati-vinaya, amūḷha˚, paṭiññā, yebhuyyasikā tassa-pāpiyyasikā, tīṇ’ avatthāraka). Expld in detail at MN ii.247: if the bhikkhus cannot settle a dispute in their abode, they have to go to a place where there are more bh., in order to come to a vote by majority. Cp. DN iii.254 (the seven enumd); AN i.99 AN iv.144.
formation fr. yebhuyya like tassapāpiyya-sikā. Originally adj., with kiriyā to be understood
(indecl.) emphatic particle meaning “even, just, also”; occurring most frequently (for eva) after palatal sounds, as ṃ: Snp 580 (pekkhataṃ yeva), 822 (vivekaṃ); Dhp-a ii.20 (saddhiṃ); Pv-a 3 (tasmiṃ), 4 (imasmiṃ), 13 (tumhākaṃ) ■ further after o: Pv-a 39 (apanīto yeva) ■ after ā: Snp 1004 (manasā yeva) ■ after i: SN ii.206 (vuddhi yeva); Pv-a 11 (ahosi) ■ after e: Ja i.82 (vihāre yeva; pubbaṇhe y.); Vb-a 135 (na kevalaṃ ete yeva, aññe pi “not only these, but also others”). Cp. Mvu 22, Mvu 56; Vv-a 222; Pv-a 47. Yevapana(ka)
= eva with accrudescent y from Sandhi. On form and relation between eva & yeva cp. Geiger; P.Gr. § 66, 1. See also eva 2 ■ The same form in Prākrit: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 336
(adj.) corresponding reciprocal, respective, in corresponding proportion, as far as concerned; lit. “whatever else.” The expression is peculiar to exegetical (logical) literature on the Abhidhamma. See e.g. Dhs-a 152 (yevāpanā, pl. and ˚kā); Vism 468, Vism 271 sq.; Vb-a 63, Vb-a 70 sq.; cp. Dhs trsl.1 p. 5 and introd. p. 56 ■ Note. The expression occurring as phrase shows ye as nom. pl., e.g. Dhs 1 Dhs 58, Dhs 151–161 & passim: ye vā pana tasmiṃ samaye aññe pi dhammā; but cp. in § 1: yaṃ yaṃ vā pan’ ārabbha, in same sense.
not connected with yeva, but an adj. formation from phrase ye vā pana; ye here standing (as Māgadhism) for yaṃ: cp. yebhuyya
lit. “yoking, or being yoked,” i.e. connection bond, means; fig. application, endeavour, device
1. yoke, yoking (rare?) Ja vi.206 (meant here the yoke of the churning-sticks; cp. Ja vi.209).
2 connection with (-˚), application to; (natural) relation (i.e. body, living connection), association; also conjunction (of stars). mānusaka yoga the relation to the world of men (the human body), opp. dibba yoga: SN i.35 = SN i.60; Snp 641; Dhp 417; expld at Dhp-a iv.225 as “ kāya. ” association with: DN iii.176; application: Vism 520 (+ uppāda). yogato (abl.) from being connected with by association with Pv-a 40 (bālya˚), 98 (sammappadhāna˚) ■ pubba˚; connection with a former body, one’s former action or life-history Ja v.476; Ja vi.480; Mil 2 See pubbe1 ■ aḍḍhayoga a “half-connected” building, i.e. a half-roofed monastery Vin i.239; Vism 34- nakkhatta˚; a conjunction of planets, peculiar constellation (in astrology) Ja i.82, Ja i.253 (dhana-vassāpanaka suitable for a shower of wealth); iii.98; Dhp-a i.174; Dhs-a 232 (in simile).
3. (fig.) bond, tie; attachment (to the world and its lusts), or what yokes to rebirth (Cpd. 1712). There are 4 yogas, which are identical with the 4 oghas viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ or the bonds of craving, existence, false views, and ignorance; enumd in detail at AN ii.10; DN iii.230, DN iii.276; Ja i.374; cp. Pts i.129 (catūhi yogehi yutto lokasannivāso catu-yoga-yojito); Vb-a 35. Mentioned or referred to at SN v.59; Dhs 1059 (ogha + , in defn of taṇhā), cp, Dhs trsln 308; Ne 31 (with ogha), 114 (id.); as sabba- (or sabbe) yogā at Thig 4; Thig 76; SN i.213; Dhp-a iii.233; severally at Iti 95 (bhava-yoga-yutta āgāmī hoti, + kāma˚); ogha + yoga: Pp 21 (avijjā˚) Vism 211, Vism 684; cp. also DN ii.274 (pāpima-yogāni the ties of the Evil one); Iti 80 (yogā pamocenti bahujanaṃ)
4. application, endeavour, undertaking, effort Dhp-a iii.233, Dhp-a iii.234 (= samma-ppadhāna). yogaṃ karoti to make an effort, to strive after (dat.) SN ii.131; AN ii.93 (āsavānaṃ khayāya y. karaṇīya); Mil 35. yogaṃ āpajjati to show (earnest) endeavour, to be active SN iii.11 sq.; Vb 356 (attanā) ■ dhamma˚; one who is devoted to the Dhamma AN iii.355; yutta˚; (bent on, i.e. earnest in endeavour Ja i.65; yāca˚; given to making offerings: see yāca.
5. pondering (over), concentration devotion MN i.472; Dhp 209 (= yoniso manasikāra Dhp-a iii.275), 282 (same expln at Dhp-a iii.421); Mil 3 Vb 324 (yoga-vihitesu kamm’ & sipp’-āyatanesu Vb-a 410 expls: y. vuccati paññā ■ perhaps better to above 4?).
6. (magic) power, influence, device scheme Ja vi.212 (yoga-yogena practice of spells etc = tāya tāya yuttiyā C.); Pv-a 117 (combd with manta ascribed to devas).
7. means, instrument, remedy Ja i.380 (vamana˚ an emetic); vi.74 (ekaṃ yogaṃ datvā but we better read bhesajjaṃ tassa datvā for vatvā and ekaṃ yogaṃ vatvā for datvā; taking yoga in meaning of “charm, incantation”); Mil 109 (yena yogena sattānaṃ guṇa-vaḍḍhi… tena hitaṃ upadahati).
-ātiga one who has conquered the yoke, i.e. bond of the body or rebirth Iti 61 (muni), 81 (id.). -ātigāmin ˚âtiga; AN ii.12 (same as sabba-yoga-visaṃyutta) -āvacara “one at home in endeavour,” or in spiritual (esp. jhāna-) exercises; one who practises “yoga” an earnest student. The term is peculiar to the Abhidhamma literature ■ Ja i.303, Ja i.394, Ja i.400; Ja iii.241 (saṃsārasāgaraṃ taranto y.); Pts ii.26; KvuA 32; Mil 33 sq., 43 366, 378 sq.; Vism 245 (as hunter) 246 (as begging bhikkhu), 375 (iddhi-study), 587, 637, 666, 708; Dhp-a ii.12 (padhānaṃ padahanto y.); iii.241 (˚bhikkhu) Dhs-a 187 (ādhikammika), 246 (˚kulayutta); Vb-a 115, Vb-a 220, Vb-a 228 (as bhikkhu on alms-round), 229 (as hunter), 258, 331; Kp-a 74; Snp-a 20, Snp-a 374. -kkhema [already Vedic yoga-kṣema exertion & rest, acquisition & possession] rest from work or exertion, or fig. in scholastic interpretation “peace from bondage,” i.e. perfect peace or “uttermost safety” (K.S. ii.132); a freq. epithet of nibbāna [same in BSk.: yogakṣema e.g. Divy 98, Divy 123, Divy 303, Divy 498] MN i.117 (˚kāma), 349, 357 (anuttara); SN i.173 (˚adhivāhana); ii.195 (anuttara) 226; iii.112 (˚kāma, neg.); iv.125; v.130 sq.; AN i.50 (anuttara); ii.40, 52 (a˚), 87, 247; iii.21, 294 sq., 353; DN iii.123, DN iii.125, DN iii.164 (˚kāma); Vin ii.205 = Iti 11 (˚ato dhaṃsati, whereas Vin ˚ā padhaṃsati); Iti 9, Iti 27 (abhabbo ˚ssa adhigamāya); Thig 6; Snp 79 (˚adhivāhana), 425; Dhp 23 (anuttara, cp. Dhp-a i.231); Pts i.39; Pts ii.81; Vb 247 (kulāni y-kh-kāmāni, which Vb-a 341 expls catūhi yogehi khemaṃ nibbhayaṃ icchanti); Thag-a 13-kkhemin finding one’s rest, peace, or salvation; emancipated free, an Arahant SN iii.13 (accanta˚); iv.85; AN ii.12; AN iv.310 (patta˚); v.326 (accanta˚); Dhp-a iii.233 Dhp-a iii.234 (= sabba-yoga-visaṃyutta); neg. a˚; not finding one’s salvation AN ii.52 (in verse) = Pts ii.80; Iti 50-ññu knowing the (right) means Mil 169 sq. -bahula strong in exertion AN iii.432. -yutta (Mārassa) one who is tied in the bonds (of Māra) AN ii.52 (so read for ˚gutta the verse also at Pts ii.80, Pts ii.81, and Iti 50). -vibhāga dividing (division) of the relation (in grammar: to yoga 2) Snp-a 266.
Vedic yoga, see etym. under yuga & yuñjati. Usually m.; pl. nt. yogāni occurs at DN ii.274 in meaning “bonds”
(adj.) of the nature of trying, acting as a bond, fetter-ish Dhs 584; Dhs-a 49 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 301). The spelling is also yoganiya, cp oghaniya.
fr. yoga; grd. formation
(adj.-n.) 1. (-˚) applying oneself (to), working (by means of), using Vism 70 (hattha˚ & patta˚ using the hand or the bowl but trsln p. 80: “hand-ascetic” & “bowl-ascetic”). 2. one who devotes himself to spiritual things, an earnest student, one who shows effort (in contemplation), a philosopher, wise man. The word does not occur in the four Nikāyas. In the older verses it is nearly synonymous with muni. The oldest ref. is Thag 947 (pubbake yogī “Saints of other days” Mrs Rh. D.). Freq. in Miln, e.g. pp. 2, 356 (yogi-jana) at pp. 366, 393, 404, 417, 418 in old verses. Combd with yogâvacara Mil 366, Mil 404 ■ Further passages are Ne 3, Ne 10, Ne 61; Vism 2, Vism 14, Vism 66, Vism 71 (in verse), 150, 320 373, 509, 620, 651, 696; Dhs-a 195, Dhs-a 327.
fr. yoga, cp. Class. Sk. yogin
(nt.) “what may be yoked,” i.e. 1. a coach, carriage, waggon (usually large & covered, drawn by bullocks) Ja vi.31 sq. (paṭicchanna), 368 (mahā˚) Dhp-a ii.151 (mahā˚ & paṭicchanna).
2. a draughtbullock ox Vv 84;8; Pv ii.936 (= ratha-yuga-vāhana Pv-a 127); Ja vi.221. yoggāni muñcati to unharness the oxen Pv-a 43, Pv-a 100.
Vedic yogya; a grd. formation fr. yoga in meaning of yoga 1
(nt. & adj.) 1. (nt.) a contrivance Ja iv.269 (yoggaṃ karoti, may be in meaning “training, practice” here: see yoggā) Vv-a 8 (gahaṇa˚).
2. (adj.) fit for (= yutta), adapted to, suitable; either-˚ or with inf.: Vv-a 291; Pv-a 25 (here spelt yogya), 135 (bhojana˚), 152 (kamma-vipāk ânubhavana˚), 154 (gamana˚ passable, v.l. yogya), 228 (anubhavana˚).
same as last, in meaning of yoga 7
(f.) training, practice Ja ii.165 (yoggaṃ karoti to practise); iv.269 (id.); Dhp-a i.52 (lakkha-yoggaṃ karoti to practise shooting) ■ adj. (-˚) katayogga well-practised, trained SN i.62, SN i.98 (neg.). Only at these passages, missing at the other daḷha-dhamma- passages e.g. at SN ii.266; MN i.82; AN ii.48.
-ācariya a groom, trainer SN iv.176 = MN i.124; MN iii.97 MN iii.222; Thag 1140; Ja i.505.
Vedic and Epic Sk. yogyā; same as yogga2, fr. yoga
(nt.) 1. the yoke of a carriage Ja vi.38, Ja vi.42 (= ratha-yuga).
2. a measure of length as much as can be travelled with one yoke (of oxen) a distance of about 7 miles, which is given by Bdhgh as equal to 4 gāvutas (Dhp-a ii.13). It occurs in descending scale of yojana-tigāvuta-usabha at Dhp-a i.108. Dhp 60; Ja v.37 (yojana-yojana-vitthatā each a mile square); Snp-a 194. More favoured combns of yojana with numbers are the foll.: 1/2 (aḍḍha˚): DN-a i.35; Dhs-a 142.
3: Dhp-a ii.41.
4: Pv-a 113.
5: Vv-a 33
15: Dhp-a i.17; Ja i.315; Pv-a 154.
18: Ja i.81, Ja i.348
20: Dhp-a iv.112 (20 X 110, of a wilderness).
25; Vv-a 236.
45: Ja i.147, Ja i.348; Dhp-a i.367.
50: Vism 417.
100: DN i.117; Iti 91; Pv i.1014.
500: Ja i.204
1,000: Ja i.203 ■ Cp. yojanika.
Vedic yojana
(f.) (grammatical) construction; exegesis, interpretation; meaning Kp-a 156 Kp-a 218, Kp-a 243; Snp-a 20, Snp-a 90, Snp-a 122 sq., 131 sq., 148, 166, 177 248, 255, 313; Pv-a 45, Pv-a 50, Pv-a 69, Pv-a 73, Pv-a 139 (attha˚), and passim in Commentaries.
*Sk. yojanā, fr. yojeti
(adj.) a yojana in extent Ja i.92 (vihāra); Dpvs 17, 108 (ārāma); Dhp-a i.274 (maṇipallanka).
fr. yojana
yoked, tied, bound Pts i.129 (catuyoga˚ fettered by the four bonds); Snp-a 137 (yottehi y.).
pp. of yojeti
(adj.) connected with, mixed; neg. a˚ not mixed (with poison), unadulterated Ja i.269.
fr. yojita
1. to yoke, harness, tie, bind Pv ii.936 (vāhana, the draught-bullock); Mvu 35, Mvu 40 (yojayi aor.; v.l. for yojāpayi); Pv-a 74 (sindhave). 2. to furnish (with), combine, unite, mix, apply Ja i.252 (suraṃ), 269 (id.); Mvu 22, Mvu 4 (ambaṃ visena y. to poison a mango); 36, 71 (visaṃ phalesu poison the fruit). 3. to prepare, provide, set in order, arrange, fix, fit up Mvu 30, Mvu 39 (pāde upānāhi fitted the feet with slippers) dvāraṃ to put a door right, to fix it properly Ja i.201 iv. 245 (cp. yojāpeti).
4. to engage, incite, urge commission, put up to, admonish Mvu 17, Mvu 38 (manusse) 37, 9 (vihāraṃ nāsetuṃ y. incited to destroy the v.) Pv-a 69.
5. to construct, understand, interpret, take a meaning Snp-a 148 (yojetabba); Pv-a 98 (id.), 278 (id.) ■ Caus. II. yojāpeti to cause some one to yoke etc.: DN ii.95 (yānāni, to harness); Ja i.150 (dvāraṃ, to set right); Mvu 35, Mvu 40 (rathe, to harness) ■ Pass yojīyati to become yoked or harnessed Ja i.57 (nangalasahassaṃ y.) ■ pp. yojita.
Caus. of yuñjati
in a˚; MN ii.24 read yujjha (of yudh ).
(nt.) the tie of the yoke of a plough or cart SN i.172 = Snp 77; SN iv.163 SN iv.282; Ja i.464; Ja ii.247 (camma˚); iv.82; v.45 (cammay ■ varatta), 47; Vism 269; Dhp-a i.205; Snp-a 137. As dhura-yotta at Ja i.192; Ja vi.253.
Vedic yoktra, cp. Lat. junctor, Gr. ζευκτ ̈ηρες yoke-straps; Epic Sk. yoktṛ one who yokes
(nt.) a tie, band, halter, rope Ja vi.252; Mil 53; Vism 254, Vism 255; Dhp-a iii.208.
yatta + ka
a warrior, soldier, fighter, champion Vin i.73 (yodhā yuddh’ âbhinandino… pabbajjaṃ yāciṃsu); Ja i.180; Mil 293.
-ājīva one who lives by battle or war, a soldier SN iv.308 = AN iii.94; AN i.284; AN ii.170, AN ii.202; AN iii.89 sq. (five kinds); Snp 617, Snp 652; Pp 65, Pp 69. -hatthin a war elephant Dhp-a i.168.
cp. Vedic yodha; fr. yudh
= yodhikā Ja v.420.
(f.) a special kind of jasmine Vv 354; Ja iv.440 (yoth˚), 442; v.422; Vv-a 162 (as thalaja and a tree).
a var. reading of yūthikā (q.v.)
a warrior; camma˚; a warrior in cuirass, a certain army grade DN i.51; AN iv.107.
= yodha
to attack, to fight against (acc.) Dhp 40 (yodhetha = pahareyya Dhp-a i.317) Ja v.183.
Caus. of yujjhati
(f.) 1. the womb.
2. origin, way of birth, place of birth, realm of existence; nature, matrix There are four yonis or ways of being born or generation viz. aṇḍaja oviparous creation, jalābuja viviparous saṃsedaja moisture-sprung, opapātika spontaneous MN i.73; DN iii.230; Mil 146; Vism 552, Vism 557 sq.; cp Vb-a 203 sq ■ Freq. in foll. combns: tiracchāna˚; the class of animals, the brute creation AN i.37, AN i.60; AN v.269; Iti 92; Pv iv.111; Vism 103, Vism 427; Pv-a 27, Pv-a 166; nāga˚ birth among the Nāgas SN iii.240 sq. (in ref. to which the 4 kinds of birth, as mentioned above, are also applied) Vism 102 (niraya-nāga-yoni); pasu˚; = tiracchāna˚ Pv ii.1312; pisāca˚; world of the Pisācas SN i.209; peta˚ the realm of the Petas Pv-a 68 (cp. peta) ■ kamma˚ K. as origin AN iii.186 ■ yoni upaparikkhitabba (= kiṃjātikā etc.) SN iii.42 ■ ayoni unclean origin Thag 219
3. thoroughness, knowledge, insight Ne 40 ■ ayoni superficiality in thought SN i.203 (“muddled ways Mrs. Rh. D.) ■ yoniso (abl.) “down to its origin or foundation,” i.e. thoroughly, orderly, wisely, properly judiciously SN i.203 (“in ordered governance” K.S. i.259); DN i.118 (wisely); Iti 30 (āraddha āsavānaṃ khayāya); Pp 25; Vism 30, Vism 132, Vism 599; PpA 31. Opp ayoniso disorderly improperly Pp 21; Dhp-a i.327; Pv-a 113, Pv-a 278 ■ Esp. frequent in phrase yoniso manasikāra “fixing one’s attention with a purpose or thoroughly,” proper attention, “having thorough method in one’s thought” (K.S. i.259) Pts i.85 sq.; Iti 9; Ja i.116; Mil 32; Ne 8, Ne 40, Ne 50, Ne 127; Vism 132; Pv-a 63. See also manasikāra ■ Opp. ayoniso manasikāra disorderly or distracted attention DN iii.273; Vb-a 148 Thag-a 79. In BSk. the same phrase: yoniśo manasikāraḥ Divy 488; Avs i.122; Avs ii.112 (Speyer: “the right & true insight, as the object of consideration really is”). See further on term Dial. iii.218 (“systematized attention”); K.S. i.131; ii.6 (“radical grasp”).
-ja born from the womb Snp 620; Dhp 396. -pamukha principal sort of birth DN i.54; MN i.517.
Vedic yoni
(nf.) youth DN i.115; AN i.68; AN iii.5, AN iii.66, AN iii.103; Dhp 155 Dhp 156; Snp 98, Snp 110, Snp 218; Pv i.76; Dhp-a iii.409; Pv-a 3.
-mada pride of youth DN iii.220; AN i.146; AN iii.72 Vb-a 466.
R.
cp. late Vedic & Epic Sk. yauvana, fr. yuvan
the letter (or sound) r, used as euphonic consonant to avoid hiatus. The sandhi-r-originates from the final r of nouns in ˚ir & ˚ur of the Vedic period. In Pali it is felt as euphonic consonant only, like other sandhi consonants (y for instance) which in the older language were part of the noun itself. Thus r even where it is legitimate in a word may interchange with other sandhi-consonants in the same word, as we find punam-eva and puna-d-eva besides the original puna-r-eva (= Vedic punar eva). At Ja i.403 we read “punar āgata,” where the C. expls “puna āgata, ra-kāro sandhivasena vutto.” Similarly: Snp 81 (vutti-r-esā) 214 (thambho-r ■ iva), 625 = Dhp 401 (āragge-r-iva), 679 (ati-r-iva), 687 (sarada-r-iva), 1134 (haṃsa-r-iva) Vv 6422 (Vajir’ āvudho-r-iva); Pv ii.87 (puna-r-eva ii.116 (id.); Pv-a 77 (su-r-abhigandha). In the latter cause the r has no historical origin, as little as in the phrase dhir atthu (for *dhig-atthu) Snp 440; Ja i.59. Ramsi & Rasmi;
a rein, a ray.
1. In meaning “rein only as rasmi, viz. at MN i.124; Dhp 222; Ja i.57; Ja iv.149
2. In meaning “ray” both raṃsi and rasmi: (a raṃsi (in poetry) Snp 1016 (vīta˚? perhaps pīta˚? See note in P.T.S. ed.); Vv 535 (pl. raṃsī = rasmiyo Vv-a 236); 6327 (sahassa˚ having a thousand rays; = suriya Vv-a 268); Sdhp 124. Also in cpd. raṃsi-jāla a blaze of rays Ja i.89; Pv-a 154; Vv-a 12 (˚sammujjala) 14 (id.), 166 (id.) ■ (b) rasmi (in prose, late) Dhp-a i.27 (˚ṃ vissajjesi); Dhs-a 13 (nīla-rasmiyo); Vv-a 125 (candima-suriya˚). Also in cpd. buddha-rasmi the ray of enlightenment, the halo around a Buddha, consisting of 6 colours (chabbaṇṇa) Ja i.444, Ja i.501 (˚rasmiyo vissajjento); Snp-a 132; Vv-a 207, Vv-a 234, Vv-a 323; Mhbv 6 15, 38.
Vedic raśmi. The form raṃsi is the proper Pali form, originating fr. raśmi through metathesis like amhi for asmi, tamhā for tasmā etc. Cp Geiger P.Gr. § 502. The form rasmi is a Sanskritism and later
(adj.) having rays, radiant, in sahassa˚; having 1000 rays Vv 645 (= suriya-maṇḍala viya Vv-a 277).
raṃsi + ka
(adj.) having rays, radiant; n. sg. raṃsimā the sun Vv 812 (= suriya Vv-a 314).
fr. raṃsi
(adj.) (-˚) guarding or to be guarded ■ (a) act.: dhamma˚; guardian of righteousness or truth Mil 344 ■ (b) pass.: in cpd. dū˚; v.l. du
hard to guard Dhp-a i.295. ˚kathā, s. l. rukkha-˚ warding talk Thag-a 1, in Brethren, 185, cp. note 416.
fr. base rakkh
(adj. n.) 1. guarding, protecting, watching, taking care Pv-a 7; f. ˚ikā (dāsī) Dhp-a iv.103 (a servant watching the house).
2. observing, keeping Ja i.205 (sīla˚).
3. a cultivator Ja ii.110.
4. a sentry Ja i.332.
fr. rakkha
1. to protect, shelter, save, preserve Snp 220; Ja iv.255 (maṃ rakkheyyātha); vi.589 (= pāleti); Pv ii.943 (dhanaṃ); Mil 166 (rukkhaṃ), 280 (attānaṃ rakkheyya save himself); Pv-a 7 ■ grd. rakkhiya to be protected Mvu 33, Mvu 45. Neg. arakkhiya & arakkheyya; (in meaning 3) see separately ■ Pass. ppr. rakkhiyamāna Ja i.140.
2. to observe, guard, take care of, control (with ref. to cittaṃ the heart, and sīlaṃ good character or morals) Iti 67 (sīlaṃ); Dhp-a i.295 (cittaṃ rakkha equivalent with cittaṃ dama), 397 (ācāraṃ); Ja iv.255 (vācaṃ); Vv-a 59 (sīlāni rakkhi); Pv-a 66 (sīlaṃ rakkhatha uposathaṃ karotha).
3. to keep (a) secret, to put away, to guard against (i.e. to keep away from Snp 702 (mano-padosaṃ rakkheyya); Mil 170 (vacīduccaritaṃ rakkheyya) ■ pp. rakkhita. See also parīpāleti & parirakkhati;.
Vedic raksati, rakṣ to Idg. *ark (cp. Lat. arceo etc.) in enlarged form *aleq = Gr. ἀλέςω to protect (Alexander!); ἀλκή strength; Ags. ealgian to protect Goth. alhs = Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also base *areq in P. aggala. The Dhtp 18 expls rakkh by “pālana”.
(nt.) 1. keeping, protection, guarding Ne 41; Mvu 35, Mvu 72 (rahassa˚-atthāya so that he should keep the secret); Pv-a 7.
2. observance keeping Vv-a 71 (uposatha-sīla˚); Pv-a 102 (sīla˚), 210 (uposatha˚).
fr. rakkh
(adj.) observing, keeping; one who observes Ja i.228 (pañca-sīla˚; so read for rakkhānaka).
fr. rakkhana
a kind of harmful (nocturnal) demon, usually making the water its haunt and devouring men Thag 931; Snp 310 (Asura˚) Ja i.127 (daka˚ = udaka˚), 170 (id.); vi.469 (id.); Dhp-a i.367 (˚pariggahita-pokkharaṇī); iii.74 (udaka˚); Sdhp 189, Sdhp 313, Sdhp 366 ■ f. rakkhasī Ja iii.147 (r. pajā); Mvu 12, Mvu 45 (rudda˚, coming out of the ocean).
cp. Vedic rakṣa, either fr. rakṣ to injure, or more likely fr. rakṣ to protect or ward off (see details at Macdonell, Vedic Mythology pp. 162
-164)
(f.) shelter, protection, care AN ii.73 (+ parittā); Mvu 25, Mvu 3; Ja i.140 (bahūhi rakkhāhi rakkhiyamāna ); Pv-a 198 (˚ṃ saṃvidahati) Often in combn rakkhā + āvaraṇa (+ gutti) shelter defence, e.g. at Vin ii.194; DN i.61 (dhammikaṃ r ■ v. guttiṃ saṃvidaheyyāma); MN ii.101; Ja iv.292 ■ Cp gorakkhā ■ Note. rakkhā at Ja iii.144 is an old misreading for rukkhā.
verb-noun fr. rakkh
guarded, protected, saved SN iv.112 (rakkhitena kāyena, rakkhitāya vācāya etc.) AN i.7 (cittaṃ r.); Snp 288 (dhamma˚), 315 (gottā˚) Vv-a 72 (mātu˚, pitu˚ etc.); Pv-a 61, Pv-a 130 ■ Note. rakkhitaṃ karoti at Mvu 28, Mvu 43 Childers trsls “take under protection,” but Geiger reads rakkhike and trsls “appoint as watchers.”
-atta one who guards his character SN i.154; Ja i.412; Snp-a 324. -indriya guarding one’s senses Snp 697 -mānasāna guarding one’s mind Snp 63 (= gopitamānasāno-rakkhita-citto Nd ii.535).
pp. of rakkhati
colour, paint Mil 11 (˚palibodha).
-kāra dyer Mil 331. -jāta colour MN i.385; Vb-a 331. -ratta dyed crimson Vin i.185 = Vin i.306.
fr. raj1, rajati, to be coloured or to have colour
a stage, theatre, dancing place, playhouse Vv 331; Ja ii.252 ■ raṅgaṃ karoti to play theatre Dhp-a iv.62 ■ raṅgamajjha the stage, the theatre usually in loc. ˚majjhe, on the stage, SN iv.306; Ja iv.495; Dhp-a iii.79; same with ˚maṇḍale Ja ii.253.
fr. raj2, irajyati, to straighten, order, direct etc.: see uju. The Dhtp (27) only gives one raj in meaning “gamana”
to arrange, prepare, compose. The root is defined at Dhtp 546 by “paṭiyattane” (with v.l. car ), and given at No. 542 as v.l. of pac in meaning “vitthāre.”-pp. racita.
rac, later Sk.
(f.) 1. arrangement (of flowers in a garland) Vv-a 354.
-2. composition (of a book) Sdhp 619.
fr. rac
1. arranged Ja v.157 (su˚ in C. for samocita; v.l. sucarita).
-2. strung (of flowers Mvu 34, Mvu 54 ■ Cp. vi˚.
pp. of racati
(f.) a carriage road Vin ii.194; Vin iii.151; Vin iv.271 (= rathiyā); v.205 (raccha-gata); Ja i.425; Ja v.335; Ja vi.276 (in its relation to vīthi); Dāvs v.48; Pv-a 24 (koṇa˚).
Sk. rathyā. This the contracted form. The diaeretic forms are rathiyā & rathikā (q.v.)
a dyer (& “washerman” in the same function), more correctly “bleacher.” See remarks of Kern’s at Toev. ii.45 on distinction of washerman dyer ■ DN i.51 (in list of occupations); Vin iii.45; SN ii.101 = SN iii.152 (in simile; combd with cittakāra, here perhaps “painter”?); SN iii.131; Ja v.186; Vb-a 331 (in simile).
fr. rajati
(-˚) (adj.) only in combn with appa˚ and mahā˚; i.e. having little (or no) and much defilement (or blemish of character) MN i.169; SN i.137 (here further combd with ˚jātika; cp. BSk. alpa-rajaskajātīya Mvu iii.322); Vin i.5 (id.); Pts i.121; Pts ii.33 Pts ii.195; Nd i.358; Nd ii.235 No. 3 p2; Vb 341; Mil 263 Vism 205; Vb-a 458.
rajo + ending ka, in combn *rajas-ka = rajakkha, like *puras-kata = purakkhata. The ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd.
(f.) is Kern’s (problematic) proposed reading (Toev. s. v.) for rājakhāda at Snp 831 (rājakhādāya phuṭṭho), which is however unjustified as the original reading is well-attested and expld in the Niddesa as such. The term as proposed would not occur by itself either (like rajakkha, only-˚).
abstr. fr. rajakkha
(nt.) silver DN i.5 (expld at DN-a i.78 as a general name for all coins except gold: kahāpaṇas etc.); SN i.92; Snp 962 (in simile expld at Nd i.478 as jātarūpa), Ja v.50; Ja v.416 (hema˚ gold & silver); Vv 351 (˚hema-jāla); Dhp-a ii.42 (˚paṭṭa silver tablet or salver); iv.105 (˚gabbha silver money box or cabinet for silver, alongside of kahāpaṇa-gabbha and suvaṇṇa˚); Vb-a 64 (expld as “kahāpaṇa”); Pv-a 95 (for rūpiya).
Vedic rajata; see etym. under rajati
usually intrs. rajjati (q.v.). As rajitabba (grd.) in meaning “to be bleached” (dhovitabba + ) only in meaning “bleach” (as compared with dhovati clean, & vijaṭeti to disentangle, smoothe) Vin iii.235 (ppr. fr. pl. dhovantiyo rajantiyo etc.); Ja i.8 (rajitabba, grd.; dhovitabba + ) ■ Somehow it is difficult to distinguish between the meanings “bleach” and “dye” (cp rajaka), in some combns with dhovati it clearly means “dye,” as at Vin i.50 (forms: rajati, rajitabba, rajiyetha 3 sg. Pot. Med.); Vism 65 (forms: rajitvā, rajitabba rajituṃ) ■ Another grd. rajanīya in diff. meaning (see sep.). Caus. rajeti to paint, colour Thag 1155 (inf rajetave: (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 204, 1. a). Caus. also rañjeti (see under rañjati). Med. Pass. rajjati (q.v.)-Caus. II. rajāpeti to cause to be bleached Vin iii.206 (dhovāpeyya rajāpeyya ākoṭāpeyya), 235 (dhovapeti r. vijaṭāpeti); Ja ii.197 (ovaṭṭikaṃ sibbāpetvā rajāpetvā).
raj & rañj; to shine, to be coloured or light (-red); to Idg. *areg to be bright, as in Lat. argus, Gr. ἀργής & ἀργός light; Sk. arjuna (see ajjuna); to which also rajati silver = Lat. argentum, Gr. α ̓́ργυρος; Gallic Argento-ratum (Name of Strassburg); Oir argat.
(nt.) colouring, dye DN i.110 (suddhaṃ vatthaṃ… sammadeva rajanaṃ paṭigaṇheyya); Vin i.50 = Vin i.53 Vin ii.227; Vin i.286 (6 dyes allowed to the bhikkhus: mūla˚, khandha˚, taca˚, patta˚, puppha˚, phala˚ or made of the root, the trunk, bark, leaf, flower, fruit of trees) Thag 965; SN ii.101 (here either as f. or adj.) Ja i.220 (washing?).
-kamma (the job of) dyeing Ja i.118; Vism 65. -pacana boiling the dye Vism 389 (cp. rajana-pakka Vin. Texts ii.49). -bhājana dye-vessel Vin i.286. -sālā colouringworkshop dyeing-hall Vism 65.
fr. raj
(f.) the night Dāvs i.39; Abhp 69; Pv-a 205.
fr. raj, cp. rajanīya 2
(adj.) of the nature of rajas, i.e. leading to lust, apt to rouse excitement, enticing lustful.
1. As Ep. of rūpa (vedanā saññā etc.) SN iii.79; also at DN i.152 sq. (dibbāni rupāni passāmi piya-rūpāni kām’ ûpasaṃhitāni rajanīyāni; & the same with; saddāni). In another formula (relating to the 5 kāmaguṇā): rūpā (saddā etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kām’ ûpasaṃhitā rajanīyā DN i.245; MN i.85. The expln of this passage at DN-a i.311 is: r. = rāgajanaka ■ The expression rajanīyā dhammā “things (or thoughts) causing excitement” is contrasted with vimocaniyā dh. “that which leads to emancipation at AN ii.196. The same takes the places of lobhanīyā dhammā in combn with dosanīyā & mohanīyā dh. at SN iv.307; AN ii.120; AN iii.169. Another pair is mentioned at Ne 18, viz. r. dhammā and pariyuṭṭhāniyā dh. 2. In diff. connections it means simply “delightful lovely” and is e.g. an Ep. of the night. So at Pv iii.71, where the passage runs “yuvā rajanīye kāmaguṇehi sobhasi”: youthful thou shinest with the qualities of enjoyment in the enjoyable (night), which at Pv-a 205 is expld in a twofold manner viz. first as “ramaṇīyehi rāguppatti-hetu-bhūtehi” (viz. kāmagunehi), referring to aN v.l. rajanīyehi, and then as “rajanī ti vā rattīsu, ye ti nipātamattaṃ” and “virocasi rattiyaṃ.” Thus rajanī is here taken directly as “night” (cp. Abhp 69) ■ At Pv iv.62 the passage runs “pamattā rajaniyesu kām’ assād’ âbhinandhino” i.e. not heeding the enjoyment of the taste of craving at nights; here as m. & not f ■ The meaning “lovely is appld to sounds at Thag 1233 (sarena rajanīyena) Vv-a 37 (r. nigghosa).
grd. of rajati
(rajas) & Raja (nt.). A Forms. Both rajo & rajaṃ occur as noun & acc. sg., e.g. rajo at DN ii.19; Snp 207, Snp 334; Dhs 617; rajaṃ at Snp 275; Iti 83; once (in verse) rajo occurs as m, viz. Snp 662. The other cases are formed from the a-stem only, e.g. rajassa Snp 406; pl. rajāni Snp 517, Snp 974. In compn we find both forms, viz. (1) rajas either in visarga form rajah, as (a) rajo-, (b) raja- and (c) rajā- (stressed), or in s-form (d) rajas-; (2) raja-, appearing apostrophied as (e) raj-. B Meanings. (1) (lit.) dust, dirt; usually wet, staining dust DN ii.19 (tiṇa + ); Snp 662 = Pv-a 116 (sukhumo rajo paṭivātaṃ khitto); Iti 83; Dhs 617 (dhūmo + ). adj. rāja˚;: in sa˚ & a˚ vāta Vin ii.209 Vism 31. The meaning “pollen” [Sk. raja, m.] may be seen in “raja-missakaṃ rasaṃ” at Dhp-a i.375. 2. (fig.) stain, dirt, defilement, impurity. Thus taken conventionally by the P. commentators as the 3-fold blemish of man’s character: rāga, dosa, moha, e.g. Nd i.505; Snp-a 255; Dhp-a iii.485; or as kilesa-raja at Snp-a 479 ■ Snp 207 (niketā jāyate rajo), 334, 665 (rajaṃ ākirasi, metaph.), 974 (pañca rajāni loke, viz. the excitement caused by the 5 bāhirāni āyatanāni Nd i.505 Also in stanza rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati (with dosa & moha; the same) Nd i.505 = Nd ii.590 (slightly diff.) = Ja i.117 = Vism 388, cp. Divy 491 with interesting variation ■ adj. raja˚; in two phrases apagata˚; Vv-a 236 & vigata˚; Nd i.505 ≈ free from defilement ■ On raja in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 126. Cp. vi˚ ■ C Compounds. (a) rajo-: ˚jalla dust and (wet) dirt, muddy dirt DN ii.18; Vin iii.70; Ja iv.322; Ja v.241; Mil 133, Mil 195 Mil 258, Mil 410; Snp-a 248, Snp-a 291. -jallika living in dirty mud designation of a class of ascetics MN i.281; Ja i.390 -dhātu “dust-element” (doubtful trsln) DN i.54, which DN-a i.163 explns as “raja-okiṇṇa-ṭṭhānāni,” i.e. dusty places. Dial. trsl. “places where dust accumulates, Franke, Dīgha p. 57 as “Staubiges” but rightly sees a deeper, speculative meaning in the expression (Sānkhya doctrine of rajas?). -mala dust & dirt Ja i.24 -vajalla [this expression is difficult to explain. It may simply be a condensed phrase rajo ‘va jalla, or a redupl cpd. rajo + avajalla, which was spelt raj-ovajalla for ava˚ because of rajo, or represents a contamination of raj-avajalla and raj- ojalla, or it is a metric diaeresis of rajo-jalla] dust and dirt Dhp 141 (= kaddama-limpan ākārena sarīre sannicita-rajo Dhp-a iii.77). -haraṇa dirt-taking, cleaning; wet rag, floor-cloth, duster Vin ii.291; AN iv.376; Ja i.117; Dhp-a i.245 ■ (b) raja--reṇu dirt and dust Ja iv.362; -vaḍḍhana indulgence in or increase of defilement Thig 343 (“fleshly lusts” trsl.) Thag-a 240 (= rāga-raj’ ādi-saṃvaḍḍhana) ■ (c) rajā-˚patha dusty place, dustiness, dust-hole DN i.62, DN i.250; SN ii.219; DN-a i.180 (here taken metaphorically: rāga-raj ādīnaṃ uṭṭhāna-ṭṭhānaṃ) ■ (d) rajas-: ˚sira with dusty head Snp 980; Ja iv.184, Ja iv.362, Ja iv.371. See pankadanta ■ (e raj-:-˚agga a heap of dust, dirt Ja v.187 (= rajakkhandha C.); fig. = kilesa Pp 65, Pp 68 (here perhaps nt of a distorted rajakkha? So Kern, Toev. s. v.). -˚upavāhana taking away the dust (or dirt) Snp 391, Snp 392.
raj, see rajati & rañjati. Vedic rajaḥ meaning: (a) space, as region of mist & cloud similar to antarīksa, (b) a kind of (shiny) metal (cp rajata); see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 55
(nt.) kingship, royalty, kingdom, empire; reign, throne; (fig.) sovereignty AN iii.300 (˚ṃ kāreti); Snp 114, Snp 553 (˚ṃ kāreti to reign); Ja i.57; Ja i.64 (ekarattena tīṇi rajjāni atikkamma; 3 kingdoms) iii.170 (˚ṃ amaccānaṃ niyyādetvā), 199 (dukkhaseyyaṃ api rajjaṃ pi kāraye); iv.96, 105, 393 (nava rajja new kingship, newly (or lately) crowned king); vi.4 (rajjato me sussitvā maraṇam eva seyyo: death by withering is better than kingship); Vv-a 314 (= Ja i.64 as above); Pv-a 73 sq.; Mvu 10, Mvu 52 (rājā rajjaṃ akārayi) ■ cakkavatti˚; rule of a universal king Dhp-a iii.191; deva˚; reign amongst gods Kp-a 227; padesa˚ local sovereignty Iti 15; Kp viii.12 (cp. Kp-a 227).
-siri-dāyikā (devatā) (goddess) giving success to the empire Dhp-a ii.17. -sīma border of the empire Vism 121.
Sk. rājya, fr. rāj
to be excited, attached to (loc.), to find pleasure in SN iv.74 (na so rajjati rūpesu; = viratta-citta); Snp 160, Snp 813 (contrasted with virajjati); Pts i.58, Pts i.77 sq., 130, 178 Nd i.138; Mil 386 (rajjasi rajanīyesu etc.: in combn with dosa & moha or derivations, representing rāga or lobha, cp. lobhanīya); Vb-a 11 ■ ppr. rajjamāna Pv-a 3; Pot. rajjeyya Mil 280 (kampeyya + ); grd rajjitabba Mil 386 (rajanīyesu r.; with dussanīyesu and muyhanīyesu; followed by kampitabba); fut rajjissati Dhs-a 194; aor. arañji Vin i.36 = Ja i.83 (na yiṭṭhe na hute arañjiṃ) ■ pp. ratta.
cp. Sk. rajyati, raj or rañj, Med. of rajati
(nt.) defilement DN-a i.195. Cp. muyhana.
fr. rajjati
(f.) a cord, line, rope SN ii.128; Vin ii.120 Vin ii.148 (āviñchana˚); Nd ii.304; Ja i.464, Ja i.483 (fisherman’s line); v.173; Mvu 10, Mvu 61; Dhp-a iv.54; Vb-a 163 Kp-a 57; Vv-a 207; Sdhp 148, Sdhp 153.
-kāra rope-maker Mil 331. -gāhaka “rope-holder, (king’s) land-surveyor Ja ii.367 = Dhp-a iv.88 (see Fick Sociale Gliederung 97).
Vedic rajju, cp. Lat. restis rope, Lith. rẽƶgis wicker, basket
1. a rope, line Ja i.164 (bandhana˚); Thag-a 257.
2. = rajjugāhaka, king’s land surveyor Ja ii.367.
rajju + ka
1. to colour, dye Ja i.220. 2. (= rajjati) to find delight in, to be excited Snp 424 (ettha me r. mano; v.l. BB rajjati) ■ Caus. rañjeti to delight or make glad DN iii.93 (in etym. of rājā (q.v.)-pp rañjita ■ Caus. II. rañjāpeti to cause to be coloured or dyed Dhp-a iv.106 (v.l. raj˚).
rañj = raj: see rajati & rajjati-Dhtp 66 & 398 defines rañja = rāge
(nt.) delighting, finding pleasure, excitement Dhs-a 363 (rañjan’ aṭṭhena rāgo; v.l. rajano˚; perhaps better to be read rajjana˚).
fr. rañjati
coloured, soiled, in raja˚; affected with stain, defiled Ja i.117 ■ See also anu˚ & pari˚;.
pp. of rañjeti
to yell, cry; shout (at), scold, revile: not found in the texts.
raṭ; Dhtp 86: “paribhāsane”
(nt.) reign, kingdom, empire; country, realm Snp 46 (expld at Nd ii.536 as “raṭṭhañ ca janapadañ ca koṭṭhāgārañ ca… nagarañ ca”), 287 444, 619; Ja iv.389 (˚ṃ araṭṭhaṃ karoti); Pv-a 19 (˚ṃ kāreti to reign, govern). Pabbata˚ mountain-kingdom Snp-a 26; Magadha˚ the kingdom of Magadha Pv-a 67.
-piṇḍa the country’s alms-food (˚ṃ bhuñjati) Dhp 308 (saddhāya dinnaṃ); AN i.10; SN ii.221; MN iii.127; Thig 110; Iti 43, Iti 90. -vāsin inhabitant of the realm, subject Dhp-a iii.481
Vedic rāṣṭra
(adj.) belonging to the kingdom, royal, sovereign Ja iv.91 (senāvāhana) ■ Cp. raṭṭhika.
Sk. rāṣṭraka
(adj.) possessing a kingdom or kingship Pv ii.611 (˚nto khattiyā).
raṭṭha + vant
1. one belonging to a kingdom, subject in general, inhabitant Ja ii.241 (brāhmaṇa gahapati-r ■ do ārik’ ādayo).
2. an official of the kingdom [op Sk. rāṣṭriya a pretender; also king’s brother in-law] AN iii.76 = AN iii.300 (r. pettanika senāya senāpatika).
fr. raṭṭha, cp. Sk. rāṣṭrika
1. fight, battle; only in Thig 360 (raṇaṃ karitvā kāmānaṃ): see discussed below; also late at Mvu 35, Mvu 69 (Subharājaṃ raṇe hantvā).
2. intoxication, desire, sin, fault. This meaning is the Buddhist development of Vedic raṇa enjoyment. Various influences have played a part in determining the meaning & its expl;n in the scholastic terms of the dogmatists and exegetics. It is often expld as pāpa or rāga. The Ṭīkā on Dhs-a 50 (see Expos. 67) gives the foll. explns (late & speculative) (a) = reṇu, dust or mist of lust etc.; (b) fight, war (against the Paths); (c) pain, anguish & distress ■ The trsl;n (Expos. 67) takes raṇa as “cause of grief,” or “harm, hence araṇa “harmless” and saraṇa “harmful” (the latter trsld as “concomitant with war” by Dhs. trsl. of Dhs 1294; and asaraṇa as opp. “not concomitant” doubtful). At SN i.148 (rūpe raṇaṃ disvā) it is almost syn. with raja. Bdhgh. expls this passage (see K.S. 320) as “rūpamhi jāti-jarā-bhanga-sankhātaṃ dosaṃ, trsln (K.S. 186): “discerning canker in visible objects material.”
The term is not sufficiently cleared yet. At Thig 358 we read “(kāmā) appassādā raṇakarā sukkapakkha-visosanā,” and v. 360 reads “raṇaṃ karitvā kāmānaṃ.” Thag-a 244 expls v 358 by “rāg’ ādi sambandhanato”; v. 360 by “kāmānaṃ raṇaṃ te ca mayā kātabbaṃ ariyamaggaṃ sampahāraṃ katvā.” The first is evidently “grief,” the second “fight,” but the trsln (Sisters 145) gives “stirring strife” for v. 358, and “fight with worldly lusts” for v. 360; whereas Kern Toev. s. v. raṇakara gives “causing sinful desire” as trsl.
The word araṇa (see araṇa2) was regarded as neg of raṇa in both meanings (1 & 2); thus either “freedom fr. passion” or “not fighting.” The trsln of Dhs-a 50 (Expos. 67) takes it in a slightly diff. sense as “harmless” (i.e. having no grievous causes)-At MN iii.235 araṇa is a quâsi summing up of “adukkha an-upaghāta anupāyāsa etc.,” and saraṇa of their positives. Here a meaning like “harmfulness” & “harmlessness seems to be fitting. Other passages of araṇa see under araṇa.
-jaha (raṇañjaha) giving up desires or sin, leaving causes of harmfulness behind. The expression is old and stereotype. It has caused trouble among interpreters: Trenckner would like to read raṇañjaya “victorious in battle” (Notes 83). It is also BSk. e.g. Lal 50; Avs ii.131 (see Speyer’s note 3 on this page. He justifies trsln “pacifier, peace-maker”) At foll. passages: SN i.52 (trsln “quitting corruption”) Iti 108 (Seidenstücker trsls: “dem Kampfgewühl entronnen”); Mil 21; Ne 54; Sdhp 493, Sdhp 569.
Vedic raṇa, both “enjoyment,” and “battle.” The Dhtp (115) only knows of ran as a sound-base saddatthā (= Sk. ran2 to tinkle)
delighting in (loc. or-˚), intent on, devoted to SN iv.117 (dhamme jhāne), 389 sq. (bhava etc.); Snp 54 (sangaṇika˚) 212, 250, 327, 330 (dhamme) 461 (yaññe), 737 (upasame); Mvu. 1, 44 (mahākāruṇiko Satthā sabba-loka-hite rato); 32, 84 (rato puññe) Pv-a 3, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 19 (˚mānasa).
pp. of ramati
(nt.) 1. (lit. a gem, jewel Vv-a 321 (not = ratana2, as Hardy in Index) Pv-a 53 (nānāvidhāni) ■ The 7 ratanas are enumd under veḷuriya (Mil 267). They are (the precious minerals) suvaṇṇa, rajata, muttā, maṇi, veḷuriya vajira, pavāḷa. (So at Abhp 490.) These 7 are said to be used in the outfit of a ship to give it more splendour: Ja ii.112. The 7 (unspecified) are mentioned at Thig 487 (satta ratanāni vasseyya vuṭṭhimā “all seven kinds of gems”); and at Dhp-a i.274, where it is said of a ratana-maṇḍapa that in it there were raised flags “sattaratana-mayā.” On ratana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1909, 127.
2. (fig.) treasure, gem of (-˚) Snp 836 (etādisaṃ r. = dibb’ itthi-ratana Snp-a 544); Mil 262 (dussa˚ a very fine garment) ■ Usually as a set of 7 valuables, belonging to the throne (the empire) of a (world-) king. Thus at DN ii.16 sq.; of Mahā-Sudassana DN ii.172 sq. They are enumd singly as follows: the wheel (cakka) DN ii.172 sq., the elephant (hatthi, called Uposatha) DN ii.174, DN ii.187, DN ii.197; the horse (assa, Valāhaka) ibid.; the gem (maṇi) DN ii.175, DN ii.187; the woman (itthi) ibid.; the treasurer (gahapati) DN ii.176, DN ii.188 the adviser (pariṇāyaka) ibid. The same 7 are enumd at DN i.89; Snp p.106; DN-a i.250; also at Ja iv.232, where their origins (homes) are given as: cakka˚ out of Cakkadaha; hatthi from the Uposatha-race; assa˚ from the clan of Valāhassarāja, maṇi˚ from Vepulla, and the last 3 without specification. See also remarks on gahapati. Kern, Toev. s. v. ratana suspects the latter to be originally “major domus” (cp. his attributes as “wealthy” at Mvu i.108). As to the exact meaning of pariṇāyaka he is doubtful, which mythical tradition has obscured ■ The 7 (moral) ratanas at SN ii.217; SN iii.83 are probably the same as are given in detail at Mil 336, viz. the 5: sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚ vimutti-ñāṇadassana (also given under the collective name sīla-kkhandha or dhamma-kkhandha), to which are added the 2: paṭisambhidā˚ & bojjhanga˚. These 7 are probably meant at Pv-a 66, where it is said that Sakka “endowed their house with the 7 jewels” (sattar ■ bharitaṃ katvā) ■ Very frequent is a Triad of Gems (ratana-ttaya), consisting of Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha or the Doctrine, the Church and the Buddha [cp. BSk ratna-traya Divy 481], e.g. Mvu 5, Mvu 81; Vb-a 284; Vv-a 123; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 49, Pv-a 141.
-ākara a pearl-mine, a mine of precious metals Thag 1049; Ja ii.414; Ja vi.459; Dpvs i.18. -kūṭa a jewelled top Dhp-a i.159. -paliveṭhana a wrapper for a gem or jewel Pp 34. -vara the best of gems Snp 683 (= vararatana-bhūta Snp-a 486). -sutta the Suttanta of the (3) Treasures (viz. Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha), representing Sutta Nipāta ii.1 (P.T.S. ed. pp. 39
42), mentioned as a parittā at Vism 414 (with 4 others) and at Mil 150 (with 5 others), cp. Kp-a 63; Snp-a 201.
cp. Vedic ratna, gift; the BSk. form is ratna (Divy 26) as well as ratana (Avs ii.199)
a linear measure (which Abhp p.23 gives as equal to 12 angula or 7 ratanas = 1 yaṭṭhi: see Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 335. The same is given by Bdhgh. at Vb-a 343 dve vidatthiyo ratanaṃ; satta r. yaṭṭhi) Ja v.36 (vīsaṃr-sataṃ); vi.401 (˚mattaṃ); Vv-a 321 (so given by Hardy in Index as “measure of length,” but to be taken as ratana1, as indicated clearly by context & C.); Mil 282 (satta-patiṭṭhito aṭṭha-ratan’ ubbedho nava-ratan āyāma-pariṇāho pāsādiko dassanīyo Uposatho nāgarājā: alluding to ratana1 2!).
most likely = Sk. aratni: see ratani
(-˚) (adj.) characteristic of a gem, or a king’s treasure; in phrase aniggata-ratanake “When the treasure has not gone out” Vin iv.160, where the chief queen is meant with “treasure.”
ratana + ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.
a cubit Mil 85 (aṭṭha rataniyo).
Sk. aratni “elbow” with apocope and diaeresis; given at Halāyudha 2, 381 as “a cubit, or measure from the elbow to the tip of the little finger.” The form ratni also occurs in Sk. The etym. is fr. Idg *ole (to bend), cp. Av. arəpna elbow; Sk. arāla bent of which enlarged bases *olen in Lat. ulna, ond *oleq in Lat. lacertus, Sk. lakutaḥ = P. laguḷa. See cognates in Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lacertus
(adj.) a ratana in length Ja i.7 (aḍḍha˚); Mil 312 (aṭṭha˚).
fr. ratana
(f.) love, attachment, pleasure, liking for (loc.), fondness of SN i.133 (˚ṃ paccanubhavati), 207; iii.256; Snp 41 (= anukkhaṇṭhit adhivacanaṃ Nd ii.537), 59 (id.), 270, 642, 956 (= nekkhamma-rati paviveka˚, upasama˚ Nd i.457); Ja iii.277 (kilesa˚); Dhp-a iv.225; Pv-a 77 ■ arati dislike, aversion SN i.7, SN i.54, SN i.128, SN i.180, SN i.197; SN v.64; Snp 270 (+ rati), 642 (id.); Dhp 418 (rati + ); Thig 339; Dhs-a 193; Pv-a 64 Sdhp 476 ■ ratiṃ karoti to delight in, to make love Vism 195 (purisā itthīsu).
Classic Sk. rati, fr. ram
(adj.) (-˚) fond of, devoted to, keen on, fostering; f. ratinī Ja iv.320 (ahiṃsā˚).
fr. rati
1. dyed, coloured MN i.36 (dūratta-vaṇṇa difficult to dye or badly dyed MA 167 reads duratta and expls as durañjita-vaṇṇa opp. suratta ibid.); Snp 287 (nānā-rattehi vatthehi) Vism 415 (˚vattha-nivattha, as sign of mourning) Dhp-a iv.226 (˚vattha).
2. red. This is used of a high red colour, more like crimson. Sometimes it comes near a meaning like “shiny, shining, glittering (as in ratta-suvaṇṇa the glittering gold), cp. etym. meaning of; rajati and rajana. It may also be taken as “bleached” in ratta-kambala. In ratta-phalika (crystal) it approaches the meaning of “white,” as also in expln of puṇḍarīka at Ja v.216 with ratta-paduma “white lotus.”-It is most commonly found in foll combns at foll. passages: Mil 191 (˚lohita-candana) Vism 172 (˚kambala), 174 (˚koraṇḍaka), 191 (˚paṭākā) Ja i.394 (pavāla-ratta-kambala); iii.30 (˚puppha-dāma) v.37 (˚sālivana), 216 (˚paduma); 372 (˚suvaṇṇa) Dhp-a i.393 (id.), 248 (˚kambala); iv.189 (˚candanarukkha red-sandal tree); Snp-a 125 (where paduma is given as “ratta-set’ ādivasena”); Vv-a 4 (˚dupaṭṭa) 65 (˚suvaṇṇa), 177 (˚phalika); Pv-a 4 (˚virala-mālā garland of red flowers for the convict to be executed cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104), 157 (˚paduma), 191 (˚sāli); Mvu 30, Mvu 36 (˚kambala); 36, 82 (rattāni akkhīni bloodshot eyes). With the latter cp. cpd. rattakkha “with red eyes” (fr. crying) at Pv-a 39 (v.l. BB.), and Np. rattakkhin “Red-eye” (Ep. of a Yakkha). 3. (fig.) excited, infatuated, impassioned SN iv.339; Snp 795 (virāga˚); Iti 92 (maccā rattā); Mil 220. Also in combn ratta duṭṭha mūḷha: see Nd ii.s. v. chanda; cp bhava-rāga-ratta.
pp. of rañjati, cp. Sk. rakta
(nt.) & (poet.); rattā (f.) (rarely) night; (usually time in general. Occurs only-˚, with expressions giving a definite time. Independently (besides cpds. mentioned below) only at one (doubtful) passage, viz. Snp 1071 where BB MSS. read rattam-ahā for rattaṃ aho, which corresponds to the Vedic phrase aho-rātraṃ (= P. ahorattaṃ). The P.T.S. ed. reads nattaṃ; Snp-a 593 reads nattaṃ, but expls as rattin-divaṃ, whereas Nd ii.538 reads rattaṃ & expl;s: “rattaṃ vuccati ratti, ahā (sic lege!) ti divaso, rattiñ ca divañ ca.”-Otherwise only in foll. adv. expressions (meaning either “time” or “night”): instr. eka-rattena in one night Ja i.64; satta after one week (lit. a seven-night) Snp 570 ■ acc. sg. cira-rattaṃ a long time Snp 665; dīgha˚ id. [cp. BSk dīrgha-rātraṃ freq.] Snp 22; MN i.445; aḍḍha˚ at “halfnight,” i.e. midnight AN iii.407; pubba-ratt’ âpararattaṃ one night after the other (lit. the last one and the next) Dhp-a iv.129 ■ acc. pl. cira rattāni a long time Ja v.268 ■ loc. in var. forms, viz. vassa- ratte in the rainy season Ja v.38 (Kern, Toev. s. v. gives wrongly iii.37, 143; aḍḍha- ratte at midnight Pv-a 152; aḍḍha rattāyaṃ at midnight Vv 8116 (= aḍḍharattiyaṃ Vv-a 315); divā ca ratto ca day & night Vv 31;5 (= rattiyaṃ Vv-a 130); cira- rattāya a long time Ja v.267; Pv i.94.
-andhakāra the dark of night, nightly darkness Vin iv.268 (oggate suriye); MN i.448. -ūparata abstaining from food at night DN i.5 (cp. DN-a i.77). -ññu of long standing, recognised DN i.48 (in phrase: r. cira-pabbajito addhagato etc.; expld at DN-a i.143 as “pabbajjato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātī ti r.”) AN ii.27 (here the pl. rattaññā, as if fr. sg. ratta-ñña) Snp p.92 (therā r. cira-pabbajitā; the expln at Snp-a 423 is rather fanciful with the choice of either = ratana-ññu i.e. knowing the gem of Nibbāna, or = bahu-ratti-vidū i.e. knowing many nights); Thag-a 141. A f. abstr ˚ññutā “recognition” is found at MN i.445 (spelt rataññūtā but v.l. ˚utā). -samaye (loc., adv.) at the time of (night) Ja i.63 (aḍḍha-ratta˚ at midnight), 264 (id.) iv.74 (vassa˚ in the rainy season); Pv-a 216 (aḍḍha˚).
Epic Sk. rātra; Vedic rātra only in cpd. aho-rātraṃ. Semantically an abstr formation in collect. meaning “the space of a night’s time,” hence “interval of time” in general. Otherwise rātri: see under ratti
(f.) night DN i.47 (dosinā). gen. sg. ratyā (for *rattiyā) Thag 517; Snp 710 (vivasane = ratti-samatikkame Snp-a 496); Ja vi.491. abl. sg. rattiyā in phrases abhikkantāya r. at the waning of night DN ii.220; Vin i.26; SN i.16; MN i.143; & pabhātāya r. when night grew light, i.e. dawn Ja i.81, Ja i.500. instr. pl. rattīsu Vin i.288 (hemantikāsu r.). A loc. ratyā (for *rātryām) and a nom. pl. ratyo (for *rātryaḥ) is given by Geiger, P.Gr. § 583 ■ Very often combd with and opp. to diva in foll. combns: rattin-diva [cp. BSk. rātrindiva = Gr. νυξχήμερον, Avs i.274, Avs i.278; Avs ii.176; Divy 124] a day & a night (something like our “24 hours”), in phrase dasa rattindivā a decade of n. & d. (i.e. a 10-day week A; v.85 sq.; adverbially satta-rattin-divaṃ a week Dhp-a i.108. As adv. in acc. sg.: rattin-divaṃ night and day AN iii.57; Snp 507, Snp 1142; Iti 93; Ja i.30; or rattiñ ca divañ ca Nd ii.538, or rattiṃ opposed to adv. divā by night-by day MN i.143; Pv-a 43 ■ Other cases as adv. acc. eka rattiṃ one night Ja i.62; Pv ii.97; Pv-a 42; taṃ rattiṃ that night Mvu 4, Mvu 38; imaṃ r. this night MN i.143 yañ car.… yañ car.… etasmiṃ antare in between yon night and yon night Iti 121; rattiṃ at night Mil 42; rattiṃ rattiṃ night after night Mvu 30, Mvu 16 ■ gen. rattiyā ca divasassa ca by n. & by day SN ii.95 ■ loc. rattiyañ by night Vv-a 130, Vv-a 315 (aḍḍha˚ at midnight) Pv-a 22; and ratto in phrase divā ca ratto ca Snp 223 Thig 312; Dhp 296; Vv 315; 8432; SN i.33.
-khaya the wane of night Ja i.19. -cāra (sabba˚) allnight wandering SN i.201 (trsl. “festival”). -cheda interruption of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin ii.34 (three such: sahavāsa, vippavāsa, anārocanā). -dhūmāyanā smouldering at night Vism 107 (v.l. dhūp˚) combd with divā-pajjalanā, cp. MN i.143: ayaṃ vammīko rattiṃ dhūmāyati divā pajjalati. -pariyanta limitation of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin ii.59 -bhāga night-time Ja iii.43 (˚bhāge); Mil 18 (˚bhāgena). -bhojana eating at night MN i.473; DN-a i.77 -samaya night-time, only in loc. aḍḍha-ratti-samaye at midnight Vv-a 255; Pv-a 155.
Vedic rātrī & later Sk. rātri ■ Idg; *lādh as in Gr. λήχω = Lat. lateo to hide; Sk rāhu dark demon also Gr. *Λητώ (= Lat. Latona) Goddess of night; Mhg luoder insidiousness; cp. further Gr. λανχάνω to be hidden, λήχη oblivion (E. lethargy) ■ The by-form of ratti is ratta2
a two-wheeled carriage, chariot (for riding driving or fighting SN i.33 (ethically); AN iv.191 (horse cart; diff. parts of a ratha); MN i.396; Snp 300, Snp 654 Vism 593 (in its compn of akkha, cakka, pañjara, īsā etc.); Ja iii.239 (passaddha˚ carriage slowing up); Thig 229 (caturassaṃ rathaṃ, i.e. a Vimāna); Mvu 35, Mvu 42 (goṇā rathe yuttā); Vv-a 78 (500), 104, 267 (= Vimāna) Pv-a 74 ■ assatarī˚; a chariot drawn by a she-mule Vv 208 = 438; Pv i.111; Ja vi.355 ■ Phussa-ratha state carriage Ja iii.238; Ja vi.30 sq. See under ph ■ On ratha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127.
-atthara (rathatthara) a rug for a chariot DN i.7; Vin i.192; Vin ii.163. -anīka array of chariots Vin iv.108 -īsā carriage pole AN iv.191. -ūpatthara chariot or carriage cover DN i.103; DN-a i.273. -esabha (ratha ṛṣabha, Sk. rathārṣabha) lord of charioteers. Ratha here in meaning of “charioteer”; Childers sees rathin in this cpd.; Trenckner, Notes 59, suggests distortion from rathe śubha. Dhpāla at Pv-a 163 clearly understands it as ratha- = charioteer explaining “rathesu usabha-sadiso mahā-ratho ti attho”; as does Bdhgh at Snp-a 321 (on Snp 303): “mahā-rathesu khattiyesu akampiy’ aṭṭhena usabha-sadiso.”-Snp 303–308, 552; Pv ii.131; Mvu 5, Mvu 246; Mvu 15, Mvu 11; Mvu 29, Mvu 12. -kāra carriagebuilder chariot-maker, considered as a class of very low social standing, rebirth in which is a punishment (cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 56, 207, 209 sq.) SN i.93; Vin iv.9 (as term of abuse, enumd with other low grades: caṇḍāla veṇa nesāda r. pukkusa), 12 (˚jāti) MN ii.152, MN ii.183 f.; as kārin at Pv iii.113 (expld as cammakārin Pv-a 175). As Npl. name of one of the 7 Great Lakes in the Himālaya (Rathakāradaha), e.g. at Vism 416; Snp-a 407. -cakka wheel of a chariot or carriage Vism 238 (in simile, concerning its circumference); Pv-a 65. -pañjara the body (lit. “cage” or “frame”) of a carriage Vv 831 (= rath’ ûpattha Vv-a 326); Ja ii.172; Ja iv.60; Dhp-a i.28. -yuga a chariot yoke Ja vi.42. -reṇu “chariot-dust,” a very minute quantity (as a measure), a mite. Childers compares Sk. trasareṇu a mote of dust, atom. It is said to consist of 36 tajjāri’s, and 36 ratha-reṇu’s are equal to one likkhā Vb-a 343. -vinīta “led by a chariot,” a chariot-drive (Neumann, “Eilpost”), name of the 24th Suttanta of Majjhima (MN i.145 sq.), quoted at Vism 93, Vism 671 and Snp-a 446. -sālā chariot shed Dhp-a iii.121.
Vedic ratha, Av. rapa, Lat. rota wheel, rotundus (“rotund” & round), Oir. roth = Ohg rad wheel, Lith rãtas id.
pleasure, joy, delight: see mano˚.
fr. ram, cp. Sk. ratha
(nt.) a little carriage, a toy cart DN i.6 (cp. DN-a i.86: khuddakarathaṃ); Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; MN i.226; Mil 229.
fr. ratha, cp. Sk. rathaka m.
(adj.) having a chariot, neg. a˚ without a chariot Ja vi.515.
ratha + ka
fighter fr. a chariot, charioteer MN i.397 (saññāto kusalo rathassa anga-paccangānaṃ); DN i.51 (in list of var. occupations, cp. DN-a i.156); Ja vi.15 (+ patti-kārika), 463 (id.). Rathika & Rathiya
fr. ratha
(f.) a carriage-road ■ (a) rathikā: Vin ii.268; Vism 60; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 67 ■ (b) rathiyā: DN i.83; Vin i.237, Vin i.344; MN ii.108; MN iii.163; SN i.201; SN ii.128; SN iv.344. In compn rathiya˚; e.g. rathiya-coḷa “street-rag” Vism 62 (expld as rathikāya chaḍḍita-coḷaka).
Vedic rathya belonging to the chariot, later Sk. rathyā road. See also racchā
at Thag-a 257 in cpd. “sannivesa-visiṭṭha-rada-visesayutta” is not quite clear (“splitting”?).
to scratch Dhtp 159 cp. rada & radana; tooth Abhp 261.
rad: see etym. at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rado (“rase”). Given in meaning “vilekhana” at Dhtp 159 & Dhtm 220. Besides this it is given at Dhtm 224 in meaning “bhakkhana”
cooked Ja v.505; Ja vi.24; Mil 107.
for Sk. raddha, pp. of randhati 2
opening, cleft, open spot; flaw, defect, weak spot AN iv.25; Snp 255, Snp 826 randhamesin looking for somebody’s weak spot cp. Nd i.165 (“virandham˚ aparandham˚ khalitam gaḷitam˚ vivaram-esī ti”); Ja ii.53; Ja iii.192; Snp-a 393 (+ vivara); Dhp-a iii.376, Dhp-a iii.377 (˚gavesita).
Sk. randhra, fr. randhati 1; the P. form viâ *randdha: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 581
(-˚) (adj.) one who cooks, cooking, a cook Ja iv.431 (bhatta˚).
fr. randhati 2
to be or make subject to, (intrs.) to be in one’s power; (trs.) to harass oppress, vex, hurt (mostly Caus. randheti = Sk. randhayati). Only in Imper. randhehi Ja i.332, and in Prohib. mā randhayi Ja v.121, and pl. mā randhayuṃ Dhp 248 (= mā randhantu mā mathantu Dhp-a iii.357) See also randha2.
2. to cook (cp. Sk. randhi randhana) Mil 107 (bhojanaṃ randheyya) ■ pp; randha1.
radh or randh, differentiated in Pāli to 2 meanings & 2 verbs according to Dhtm: “hiṃsāyaṃ” (148), and “pāke” (827). In the former sense given as raṇḍ, in the latter randh. The root is freq. in the Vedas, in meaning 1. It belongs perhaps to Ags. rendan to rend: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s, v. lumbus
to chatter, whisper Dhtp 187 (“vacane”); Dhtm 266 (“akkose”). See also lapati.
rap
wild, terrible, violent DN i.91 expld by “bahu-bhāṇin” at DN-a i.256. There are several vv.ll. at this passage.
rabh = labh, which see for etym. Cp. also Lat rabies ■ Dhtp 205 expls rabh (correctly) by ārambha & Dhtm 301 by rābhassa
(-˚) (adj.) delighting, enjoyable; only in cpd. dū˚; (= duḥ) difficult to enjoy, not fit for pleasures as nt. absence of enjoyment Dhp 87 = SN v.24; and mano˚ gladdening the mind (q.v.).
fr. ram
(adj.) pleasing, charming, delightful Dhp-a ii.202 (˚ṭṭhāna).
fr. ramati; cp. Sk. ramaṇa
(adj.) = ramaṇa Ja iii.207.
(& ˚nīya) (adj.) delightful, pleasing, charming, pleasant, beautiful DN i.47 (˚ṇīyā dosinā ratti, cp. DN-a i.141); Snp 1013; Mvu 15, Mvu 69 (ṇ) Pv-a 42, Pv-a 51 (expln for rucira). As ramaṇeyya at SN i.233. Cp. rāmaṇeyya(ka).
grd. of ramati
1. to enjoy oneself, to delight in; to sport, find amusement in (loc.) SN i.179; Vin 197 (ariyo na r. pāpe) Snp 985 (jhāne); Dhp 79 (ariya-ppavedite dhamme sadā r. paṇḍito); subj. 1st pl. ramāmase Thig 370 (cp Geiger, P.Gr. 126); med. 1st sg. rame Ja v.363; imper rama Pv ii.1220 (r. deva mayā saha; better with v.l. as ramma) ■ fut. ramissati Pv-a 153 ■ ger. ramma Pv ii.1220 (v.l. for rama). grd. ramma & ramanīya; (q.v.) ■ pp. rata ■ Caus. I. rameti to give pleasure to, to please, to fondle Thag 13; Ja v.204; Ja vi.3 (pp ramayamāna); Mil 313 ■ pp. ramita (q.v.). Caus. II. ramāpeti to enjoy oneself Ja vi.114.
ram; defd by Dhtp 224 & Dhtm 318 by “kīḷāyaṃ”
having enjoyed, enjoying, taking delight in, amusing oneself with (loc. or saha) Snp 709 (vanante r. siyā); Dhp 305 (id. = abhirata Dhp-a iii.472) Pv ii.1221 (’mhi tayā saha).
pp. of rameti
(& lambati); to hang down. Both forms are given with meaning “avasaṃsane” at Dhtp 198 and Dhtm 283.
lamb
(f.) a plantain or banana tree Abhp 589.
Sk. rambhā
(adj.) enjoyable, charming, beautiful Snp 305; Thag-a 71 (v. 30); Mvu 1, Mvu 73; Mvu 14, Mvu 47 Sdhp 248, Sdhp 512.
grd. of ramati
(adj.) Name of the month Chaitra Ja v.63.
Sk ramyaka
speed, lit. current Abhp 40. See rava1.
fr. ri, riṇāti to let loose or flow, which is taken as ray at Dhtp 234, defd as “gamana,” and at Dhtm 336 as “gati.” The root ri itself is given at Dhtm 351 in meaning “santati,” i.e. continuation ■ On etym. cp Vedic retaḥ; Lat. rivus river = Gall, Rēnos “Rhine. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rivus
speed, exceeding swiftness, galloping, in combn with dava running at Vin ii.101; Vin iv.4; MN i.446 (better reading here dav’ atthe rav’ atthe for dhāve ravatthe, cp. vv.ll. on p. 567 & Neumann,; Mittl Sammlg. ii.672 n. 49). Note. At the Vin passages it refers to speaking & making blunders by over-hurrying oneself in speaking ■ The Dhtm (No. 871) gives rava as a synonym of; rasa (with assāda & sneha). It is not clear what the connection is between those two meanings.;
for raya, with v. for y as freq. in Pāli, Dhtm 352: ru “gate”
loud sound, roar, shout, cry; any noise uttered by animals Ja ii.110; Ja iii.277; Dhp-a i.232 (sabba-rava-ññu knowing all sounds of animals); Mil 357 (kāruñña˚). See also rāva ruta;.
fr. ru, cp. Vedic rava
= rava, in go˚; a cow’s bellowing MN i.225.
(adj.-n..) roaring, howling, singing, only in cpd. ˚ghaṭa a certain kind of pitcher, where meaning of ravaṇa is uncertain. Only at identical passages (in illustration) Vism 264 = Vism 362 = Kp-a 68 (reading peḷā-ghaṭa, but see App. p. 870 ravaṇa˚) Vb-a 68 (where v.l. yavana˚, with?).
fr. ravati
to shout cry, make a (loud) noise Mil 254 ■ aor. ravi Ja i.162 (baddha-rāvaṃ ravi); ii.110; iii.102; Pv-a 100; arāvi Mvu 10, Mvu 69 (mahā-rāvaṃ); and aravi Mvu 32, Mvu 79. pp. ravita & ruta; ■ Cp. abhi˚, vi˚.
ru: Idg. *re & *reu;, cp. Lat. ravus “raw, hoarse,” raucus, rūmor “rumour”; Gr. ὠρυόμαι to shout ὠρυδόν roaring, etc.; Dhtp 240: ru “sadde”
the sun Ja ii.375 (taruṇa˚-vaṇṇaratha).
-inda “king of the sun,” Name of the lotus Dāvs iii.37 -haṃsa “sun-swan,” Name of a bird Ja vi.539.
cp. Sk. ravi
shouted, cried, uttered Mil 178 (sakuṇa-ruta˚).
pp. of ravati
that which is connected with the sense of taste. The defn given at Vism 447 is as follows “jivhā-paṭihanana-lakkhaṇo raso, jivhā-viññāṇassa visaya-bhāvo raso, tass’ eva gocara-paccupaṭṭhāno mūla-raso khandha-raso ti ādinā nayena anekavidho, i.e. rasa is physiologically & psychologically peculiar to the tongue (sense-object & sense-perception), and also consists as a manifold object in extractions from roots, trunk etc. (see next) ■ The conventional encyclopaedic def;n of rasa at Nd i.240; Nd ii.540, Dhs 629 gives taste according to: (a) the 6-fold objective source as mūla- rasa, khandha˚, taca˚, patta˚, puppha˚, phala˚; or taste (i.e. juice, liquid) of root, trunk, bark, leaf flower & fruit; and-(b) the 12-fold subjective (physiological) sense-perception as ambila, madhura, tittika kaṭuka loṇika, khārika, lambila (Mil 56: ambila) kasāva; sādu, asādu, sīta, uṇha, or sour, sweet, bitter pungent, salt, alkaline, sour, astringent; pleasant, unpleasant cold & hot. Mil 56 has the foll.:; ambila lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura.
1. juice [as applied in the Veda to the Soma juice], e.g. in the foll. combns: ucchu˚; of sugar cane, extract of sugar cane syrup Vin i.246; Vv-a 180; patta˚ & puppha˚; of leaf & flower Vin i.246; madhura˚; of honey Pv-a 119
2. taste as (objective) quality, the sense-object of taste (cp. above defns). In the list of the āyatanas or senses with their complementary sense-objects (sentient and sensed) rasa occupies the 4th place following upon gandha. It is stated that one tastes (or “senses”) taste with the tongue (no reference to palate) jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā (or viññeyya ). See also āyatana 3 and rūpa ■ MN iii.55 (jivhā-viññeyya r.), 267; DN iii.244, DN iii.250; Snp 387; Dhs 609; Pv-a 50 (vaṇṇagandha-rasa-sampanna bhojana: see below 5).
3 sense of taste, as quality & personal accomplishment Thus in the list of senses marking superiority (the 10 ādhipateyyas or ṭhāṇas), similar to rasa as special distinction of the Mahāpurisa (see cpd. ras-agga) SN iv.275 = Pv ii.958; AN iv.242.
4. object or act of enjoyment sensual stimulus, material enjoyment, pleasure (usually in pl.) Snp 65 (rasesu gedha, see materialistic exegesis at Nd ii.540), 854 (rase na anugijjhati; perhaps better rasesu, as Snp-a); AN iii.237 (puriso agga˚-parititto perhaps to No. 2).
5. flavour and its substance (or substratum), e.g. soup Vv-a 243 (kakkaṭaka˚ crabsoup), cp. SN v.149, where 8 soup flavours are given (ambila, tittaka, kaṭuka, madhura, khārika, akhārika loṇika, aloṇika); Pv ii.115 (aneka-rasa-vyañjana “with exceptionally flavoured sauce”); Ja v.459, Ja v.465. gorasa “flavour of cow, i.e. produce of cow: see under go. Also metaphorically: “flavour, relish, pleasure” Snp 257 (pariveka˚, dhamma-pīṭi˚, cp. Snp-a 299 “assād aṭṭhena” i.e. tastiness); Pv-a 287 (vimutti˚ relish of salvation). So also as attha˚, dhamma˚, vimutti˚ Pts ii.89.
6. (in grammar & style) essential property elegance, brightness; in dramatic art “sentiment (flavour) (see Childers s. v. naṭya-rasa) Mil 340 (with opamma and lakkhaṇa: perhaps to No. 7); Pv-a 122 (˚rasa as ending in Np. Angīrasa, expld as jutiyā adhivacanaṃ ” i.e. brightness, excellency).
7. at t. t. in philosophy “essential property” (Expos. 84), combd with lakkhaṇa etc. (cp. Cpd. 13, 213), either kicca˚ function or sampatti˚; property Dhs-a 63, Dhs-a 249; Vism 8 Vism 448; Mil 148.
8. fine substance, semi-solid semiliquid substance, extract, delicacy, fineness, dust Thus in paṭhavī˚; “essence of earth,” humus SN i.134 (trsln “taste of earth,” rather abstract); or rasapaṭhavī earth as dust or in great fineness, “primitive earth” (before taking solid shape) DN iii.86 sq. (trsl “savoury earth,” not quite clear), opp. to bhūmipappaṭaka; Vism 418; pabbata-rasa mountain extract rock-substance Ja iii.55; suvaṇṇa˚; gold dust Ja i.93. 9. (adj ■ ˚) tasting Vv 1611 (Amatarasā f. = nibbānarasāvinī Vv-a 85).
-agga finest quality (of taste), only in further compn with ˚aggita (ras-agga-s-aggita) most delicate sense trslnDial.) DN iii.167, and ˚aggin (ras-agga-s-aggin, cp Mvu ii.306: rasa-ras’ âgrin) of the best quality (of taste, cp. above 2), said of the Mahāpurisa DN ii.18 DN iii.144 (cp. trslnDial. ii.15 “his taste is supremely acute”). The phrase & its wording are still a little doubtful. Childers gives etym. of rasaggas-aggin as rasa-ggas-aggin, ggas representing; gras to swallow (not otherwise found in Pāli!), and expls the BSk. ras’âgrin as a distortion of the P. form. -añjana a sort of ointment (among 5 kinds), “vitriol” (Rh. D.) Vin i.203. -āda enjoying the objects of taste MN iii.168 -āyatana the sphere of taste DN iii.243, DN iii.290; Dhs 629 Dhs 653, Dhs 1195 (insert after gandha˚, see Dhs. trsl. 319) -ārammaṇa object of taste Dhs 12, Dhs 147, Dhs 157. -āsā craving for tastes Dhs 1059. -garuka bent on enjoyment Snp-a 107. -taṇhā thirst for taste, lust of sensual enjoyment DN iii.244, DN iii.280; Ja v.293; Dhs 1059; Dhp-a iv.196. -saññā perception of tastes DN iii.244 (where also ˚sañcetanā). -haraṇī (f.) [ph. ˚haraṇiyo, in compn haraṇi˚] taste-conductor, taste-receiver; the salivary canals of the mouth or the nerves of sensation; these are in later literature given as numbering 7000, e.g. at Ja v.293 (khobhetvā phari); Dhp-a i.134 (anuphari) Kp-a 51 (only as 7!); Snp-a 107 (paṭhama-kabaḷe mukhe pakkhitta-matte satta rasa-haraṇi-sahassāni amaten eva phutāni ahesuṃ). Older passages are: Vin ii.137; DN iii.167 (referring to the Mahāpurisa: “sampajjasā r-haranī susaṇṭhitā,” trsln: erect taste-bearers planted well [in throat]).
Vedic rasa; with Lat. ros “dew,” Lith. rasā id., and Av Ranhā Name of a river, to Idg. *eres to flow, as in Sk. arṣati, Gr. α ̓́ψορρος (to ῥέω); also Sk. ṛṣabha: see usabha1 ■ Dhtp 325 defines as “ assādane ” 629 as “assāda-snehanesu”; Dhtm 451 as “assāde.”-The decl. is usually as regular a-stem, but a secondary instr fr. an s-stem is to be found in rasasā by taste AN ii.63; Ja iii.328
(-˚) is a dial. form of ˚dasa ten, and occurs in Classic Pāli only in the numerals for 13 (terasa), 15 (paṇṇa-rasa, pannarasa), 17 (sattarasa) & 18 (aṭṭhārasa, late). The Prk. has gone further: see Pischel; Prk. Gr. § 245.
a cook Ja v.460, Ja v.461, Ja v.507.
fr. rasa, cp. Classic Sk. rasaka
to shout, howl Ja ii.407 (vv.ll. rayati, vasati; C. expls as “nadati”) = iv.346 (v.l. sarati).
ras
(nt.) taste, sweetness Snp-a 299.
fr. rasa
(f.) “possessing flavours” i.e. a kitchen Vin i.140.
rasa + vant
(adj. tasting Vv-a 85 (nibbāna˚).
fr. rasa
to find taste or satisfaction in (gen.), to delight in, to be pleased AN iv.387 (bhāsitassa), 388 (C.: tussati, see p. 470).
Pass ■ Demon ■ formation fr. rasa
see raṃsi.
(adj.) short (opp dīgha) DN i.193 (dīghā vā r. vā majjhimā ti vā), 223 (in contrast with d.); Snp 633; Dhp 409; Ja i.356; Dhs 617 Vism 272 (def.); Dhp-a iv.184 ■ Cp. ati˚.
-ādesa reduction of the determination (here of vowel in ending) Ja iii.489. -sarīra (adj.) dwarfish, stunted Ja i.356.
cp. Sk. hrasva: Geiger, P.Gr. § 492. The Prk. forms are rahassa & hassa: Pischel § 354
(nt.) shortness, reduction (of vowel) Dhs-a 149.
fr. rassa
to leave, desert: see pp. rahita & der.; rahas rahassa.
rah, defd at Dhtp 339 & 632 by “cāga,” giving up, also at Dhtm 490 by “cāgasmiṃ,” 876 by cāga and gata
a (deep) pond, a lake DN i.50 (˚ṃ iva vippasannaṃ udānaṃ); SN i.169 = SN i.183 (dhammo rahado sīla-tittho); Snp 721 = Mil 414 (rahado pūro va paṇḍito) Iti 92 (rahado va nivāto), 114 (r. sa-ummi sāvaṭṭo sagaho); Dhp-a ii.152 ■ As udaka˚; at DN i.74, DN i.84; AN iii.25 (ubbhid-odako); Pp 47 ■ On r. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127.
Vedic hrada, with diaeresis & metathesis *harada → rahada; the other metathetic form of the same hrada is *draha → daha
(nt.) lonely place, solitude, loneliness; secrecy, privacy.
1. raho: occurring only as adv. “secretly, lonely, in secret,” either absolutely, e.g. SN i.46; Snp 388; Pv ii.716 (opp. āvi openly); iv.140 (raho nisinna); Vism 201 (na raho karoti pāpāni arahaṃ tena vuccati); or in cpds. e.g. ˚gata being in private, being alone DN i.134 (+ paṭisallīna); Snp p.60 See also under paṭisallīna; ˚gama “secret convention secret intercourse,” fig. a secret adviser Ja vi.369 (after Kern, not found!); ˚vāda secret talk MN iii.230. See also anu˚.
2. rahā˚; only in cpd. rahā-bhāva secrecy in defn of arahant at DN-a i.146 = Vism 201 (rahābhāvena ten’ esa arahan ti). See also der. rāha-seyyaka. Note. Hardy’s reading yathā rahaṃ at Pv ii.923 & Pv-a 78 is not correct, it should be yath’ ârahaṃ (cp. similarly pūj-âraha). In the same sense we would preferably read agg’ āsan’ ādi-arahānaṃ “of those who merit the first seat etc.” at Ja i.217, although all MSS. have aggāsanādi-rahānaṃ, thus postulating a form raha = araha.
Vedic rahas. The Pāli word is restricted to the forms raho and rahā˚; (= *rahaḥ); a loc. rahasi is mentioned by Childers, but not found in the Canon ■ To rahati
(adj. nt.) secret, private; nt. secrecy, secret Mvu 35, Mvu 64 (vatvā rahassaṃ); instr. rahassena (as adv.) secretly Mvu 36, Mvu 80; acc. rahassaṃ id. Pv iv.165.
-kathā secret speech, whispered words Ja i.411; Ja ii.6.
Sk. rahasya
(adj.) secret Mil 91 (guyhaṃ na kātabbaṃ na rahassakaṃ).
fr. rahassa
to be lonely, to wish to be alone MN ii.119.
Denom. fr. rahas; not corresponding to Sk. rahayati, C. of rahati to cause to leave
1. lonely, forsaken Thig 373 (gantum icchasi rahitaṃ bhiṃsanakaṃ mahāvanaṃ).
2. deprived of, without (-˚) Ja iii.369 (buddhiyā rahitā sattā); DN-a i.36 (avaṇṇa˚); Pv-a 63 (bhoga˚), 67 (ācāra˚), 77 (gandha˚). Note. samantarahita is to be divided as sam-antarahita.
pp. of rah
1. colour, hue; colouring, dye Vin ii.107 (anga˚ “rougeing” the body bhikkhū angarāgaṃ karonti); Thag-a 78; Snp-a 315 (nānāvidha˚).
2 (as t. t. in philosophy & ethics) excitement passion; seldom by itself, mostly in combn with dosa, & moha;, as the three fundamental blemishes of character: passion or lust (uncontrolled excitement) ill-will (anger) and infatuation (bewilderment): see dosa2 & moha; cp. sarāga ■ These three again appear in manifold combns with similar terms, all giving var shades of the “craving for existence” or “lust of life (taṇhā etc.), or all that which is an obstacle to nibbāna Therefore the giving up of rāga is one of the steps towards attaining the desired goal of emancipation (vimutti) ■ Some of the combns are e.g. the 3 (r. d m.) + kilesa; + kodha; very often fourfold r. d. m. with māna, these again with diṭṭhi: see in full Nd ii.s. v. rāga (p. 237), cp. below ussada ■ Of the many passages illustrating the contrast rāga → nibbāna the foll. may be mentioned: chandarāga vinodanaṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ Snp 1086; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṃ vuccati amataṃ SN v.8; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ SN iv.251; ye ‘dha pajahanti kāmarāgaṃ bhavararāganu-sayañ ca pahāya… parinibbāna-gatā Vv 5324; kusalo jahati pāpakaṃ… rāga dosa-mohakkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85 ■ Personified, Rāga (v.l. Ragā), Taṇhā & Arati; are called the “daughters of Māra” (Māradhītā): Snp 835; Dhp-a iii.199; Nd i.181 ■ For further detail of meaning & application see e.g ■ (1) with; dosa & moha;: DN i.79, DN i.156 DN iii.107, DN iii.108, DN iii.132; SN i.184; SN iv.139, SN iv.195, SN iv.250, SN iv.305 SN v.84, SN v.357 sq.; MN ii.138 (rasa˚ the excitement of taste) AN i.52, AN i.156 sq., 230 sq.; ii.256; iii.169, 451 sq. iv.144; Iti 56, Iti 57; Vism 421; Vb-a 268, Vb-a 269 (sa & vīta˚) ■ (2) in other connection: DN iii.70, DN iii.74, DN iii.146 DN iii.175, DN iii.217, DN iii.234 (arūpa˚), 249 (cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati) SN ii.231 = SN ii.271 (cittaṃ anuddhaṃseti); iii.10; iv.72, 329 v.74 (na rāgaṃ jāneti etc.); AN ii.149 (tibba-rāga-jātiko rāgajaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti); iii.233, 371 (kāmesu vīta˚); iv.423 (dhamma˚); Snp 2, Snp 74, Snp 139, Snp 270 = SN i.207 (+ dosa); Snp 361, Snp 493, Snp 764, Snp 974, Snp 1046; Dhp 349 (tibba˚ bahala-rāga Dhp-a iv.68); Pts i.80 sq.; Pts ii.37 (rūpa˚), 95 (id.); Vb 145 sq. (= taṇhā), 368 (= kiñcana), 390 Tikp 155, 167; DN-a i.116 ■ Opp. virāga.
-aggi the fire of passion DN iii.217; SN iv.19; Iti 92 (r dahati macce ratte kāmesu mucchite; + dosaggi mohaggi); Ja i.61 (˚imhi nibbute nibbutaṃ nāma hoti) -ānusaya latent bias of passion (for = dat.) SN iv.205 (the 3 anusayas: rāga˚, paṭigha˚, avijjā˚); Iti 80 (yo subhāya dhātuyā rāgo so padūyati). -ussada conceit of lust, one of the 7 ussadas (r. d. m., māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa kamma) Nd i.72. -kkhaya the decay (waning) of p SN iii.51, SN iii.160: iv.142, 250, 261; v.8, 16, 25; Vb-a 51 sq. -carita one whose habit is passion, of passionate behaviour Mil 92; Vism 105 sq. (in det.), 114 (+ dosa˚ moha˚), 193; Kp-a 54 (colour of the blood of his heart cp. Vism 409) -ṭṭhānīya founded on passion AN i.264 AA 32. -patha way of lust, lustfulness, passion, sensuality SN iv.70; Snp 370, Snp 476 (with expln “rāgo pi hi duggatīnaṃ pathattā rāgapatho ti vuccati” Snp-a 410) -rati passionate or lustful delight Dhp-a iii.112; -ratta affected with passion SN i.136; Snp 795 (as ˚rāgin, cp Nd i.100 = kāma-guṇesu ratta).
cp. Sk. rāga, fr. raj: see rajati
(-˚) one who shows passion for, possessed of lust, affected with passion Snp 795 (cp. Nd i.100) SN i.136; Vism 193, Vism 194 (with var. characterisations).
fr. rāga
(adj.) (-˚) characteristic of the king, king-; in cpds arājaka without a king Ja vi.39 (raṭṭhe); sarājaka including the king Tikp 26; f. sarājikā Vin i.209 (parisā) Also in phrase anikkhanta-rājake (loc. abs.) when the king has not gone out Vin iv.160.
rāja + ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.
“royalty”; a high courtier, a khattiya (= rājabhogga, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 100) DN i.103 (Pasenadi rājā… uggehi vā rājaniyehi vā kañcid eva mantanaṃ manteyya) DN-a i.273 (= anabhisittā kumārā, i.e. uncrowned princes); Mil 234; Vv-a 297 (Pāyāsi r.).
fr. rājā, cp, Vedic rājanya
(f.) state of being a king, kingship, sovereignty Ja i.119 (anuttara-dhamma˚ being a most righteous king).
abstr. fr. rājā
to shine Vv-a 134 (= vijjotati). Cp.; vi˚. Raja (Rajan)
rāj, cp. rajati & rañjati
king, a ruling potentate. The defn at Vin iii.222 is “yo koci rajjaṃ kāreti.” The fanciful etym. at DN iii.93 Vism 419 is “dhammena pare rañjetī ti rājā” i.e. he gladdens others with his righteousness ■ At the latter passage the origin of kingly government is given as the third stage in the constitution of a people, the 2 preceding being mahā-sammata (general consent) and khattiya (the land-aristocrats) ■ Cases. We find 3 systems of cases for the original Sk. forms, viz. the contracted, the diaeretic and (in the pl.) a new formation with-ū-. Thus gen. & dat. sg.; rañño [Sk. rājñaḥ Vin iii.107; Vin iv.157; Ja ii.378; Ja iii.5; Vv 744; and rājino Snp 299, Snp 415; Thig 463; Ja iv.495; Mvu 2, Mvu 14; instr. sg. raññā Vin iii.43; Ja v.444; Dhp-a i.164; Pv-a 22; Vb-a 106; and rājinā [Sk. rajña] Mvu 6, Mvu 2; acc. sg. rājānaṃ Vin iv.157; loc. raññe Pv-a 76; voc. rāja Snp 422, Snp 423 pl. nom. rājāno AN i.68; gen. dat. raññaṃ [Sk. rājñaṃ DN ii.87; Mvu 18, Mvu 32; and rājūnaṃ Vin i.228; Ud 11; Ja ii.104; Ja iii.487; Snp-a 484; Pv-a 101, Pv-a 133; instr. raññāhi AN i.279 rājūhi Ud 41; MN ii.120; Ja i.179; Ja iii.45 Mvu 5, Mvu 80; Mvu 8, Mvu 21; and rājubhi DN ii.258. Cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 921.
1. rājā is a term of sovereignship. The term rājā as used in Buddhist India does not admit of a uniform interpretation and translation. It is primarily an appellative (or title) of a khattiya, and often the two are used promiscuously. Besides, it has a far wider sphere of meaning than we convey by any trsln like “king” or even “sovereign,” or “prince.” We find it used as a designation of “king” in the sense of an elected or successory (crowned) monarch, but also in the meaning of a distinguished nobleman, or a local chieftain, or a prince with var. attributes characterizing his position according to special functions. From this we get the foll. scheme: (a) [based on mythological views: the king as representing the deity, cp. deva king. Note that rājā never takes the place of deva in the meaning king, but that mahārāja is used in voc equivalent to deva ] a world-king, over-lord, a so-called cakkavatti rājā. This is an office (as “Universal King”) peculiar to the Mahāpurisa or the (mythol. “Great Man,” who may become either the Saviour of men in the religious sense, a Sammā-sambuddha, or a just Ruler of the earth in the worldly sense, a King of Righteousness. These are the 2 gatis of such a being as described at var. places of the Canon (e.g. Snp p.106; Snp 1002, Snp 1003; DN iii.142; AN i.76). His power is absolute, and is described in the standard phrase “c dhammiko dhamma-rājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariya-ppatto satta-ratana-samannāgato,” e.g. DN iii.59. Dhammapāla gives the dignity of a C. as the first “human sovereign powers” (Pv-a 117). The four iddhi’s of a C. are given (quite crudely) at MN iii.176: he is beautiful, lives longer than others, is of a healthier constitution than others, he is beloved by the brahmins and householders. Other qualities: how his remains should be treated = DN ii.141; deserves a thūpa DN ii.142 sq.; his four qualities DN ii.145 (the 4 assemblies of khattiyas, brāhmaṇas, gahapatis samaṇas are pleased with him). See under cakkavatti & ratana ■ In a similar sense the term; dhamma-rājā is used as Ep. of the Buddha Snp 554 (rāj’ âham asmi dh-.r. anuttaro); Ja i.262; and a reflection of the higher sphere is seen in the title of politeness (only used in voc.) mahārāja, e.g. Snp 416 (addressed to Bimbisāra Pv-a 22 (id.); Ja vi.515 ■ (b) [in a larger constitutional state] the crowned (muddhâvasitta) monarch (i.e. khattiya) as the head of the principality or kingdom The defn of this (general) rājā at Nd ii.542 is significant of the idea of a king prevalent in early Buddhist times It is: “khattiyo muddh’ âbhisitto vijita-sangāmo nihata-paccāmitto laddh’ adhippāyo paripuṇṇa-koṭthāgāro,” i.e. “a crowned noble, victorious in battle slaying his foes, fulfilling his desires, having his storehouses full.” This king is “the top of men” (mukhaṃ manussānaṃ) Vin i.246 = Snp 568. Cp. DN i.7; Snp 46 (raṭṭhaṃ vijitam pahāya); Ja v.448 and passim. See also below 3. 4 & 6 ■ In similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907 128; & cp. Vism 152 (r. va saddh’ antagato), 336 (wishing to become an artisan). Here belongs the title of the king of the devas (Sakka) “ deva-rājā, ” e.g. Dhp-a iii.269, Dhp-a iii.441; Pv-a 62 ■ (c) [in an oligarchic sense member of a kula of khattiyas, e.g. the kumāras of the Sakiyans and Koliyans are all called rājāno of the rājakulānaṃ in Ja v.413 sq., or at least the heads of those kulas. Cp. B. Ind. p. 19 ■ (d) [in a smaller, autocratic state] a chieftain, prince, ruler; usually (collectively as a group: rājāno, thus indicating their lesser importance e.g. AN v.22 (kuḍḍa-rājāno rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti: so read for anuyantā); Snp 553 (bhoja˚ similar to rāja-bhoggā or bhogiyā as given at Snp-a 453); AN ii.74 sq. (dhammikā & a˚); Ja iv.495 Similarly at Vin i.228 we find the division into the 3 ranks: mahesakkhā rājāno, majjhimā r., nīcā r. Here also belongs the designation of the 4 lokapālā (or Guardians of the World) at cattāro mahā-rājāno, the mahā˚ being added for sake of politeness (cp. Note A on mahā ), e.g. AN iv.242. See also paṭirājā & cp. below 4 c ■ (e) A wider range of meaning is attached to several sub-divisions (with rājā or without): officials and men who occasionally take the place of the king (royal functionaries), but are by public opinion considered almost equal to the king. Here belongs the def;n of what is termed “ rājāno ” (pl. like d) at Vin iii.47, viz. rājā, padesa-rājā, maṇḍalikā, antarabhogikā akkhadassā, mahāmattā, ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsanti (i.e. those who have juridical power). See also below 4 b, and ˚putta, ˚bhogga [ other cpds.].
2. It would fill a separate book, if we were to give a full monograph of kingship in and after the Buddha’s time; we therefore content ourselves with a few principal remarks. The office of king was hereditary: kula-santakaṃ rajjaṃ Ja i.395; Ja ii.116; Ja iv.124 but we sometimes read of a king being elected with great pomp: Ja i.470; Pv-a 74. He had the political and military power in his hand, also the jurisdiction although in this he is often represented by the mahāmatta, the active head of the state. His 10 duties are mentioned at several places (see below under ˚dhammā) Others are mentioned e.g. at DN i.135, where it is said he gives food and seed-corn to the farmer, capital to the trader, wages to the people in government service. His qualifications are 8 fold (see D i.137): well-born (“gentleman,” khattiya), handsome, wealthy, powerful (with his army), a believer, learned, clever, intelligent. His wealth is proverbial and is characterized in a stock phrase, which is also used of other ranks, like seṭṭhi’s & brāhmaṇa’s, viz. “aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga pahūta-jātarūpa-rajata pahūta-vitt’ ûpakaraṇa pahūtadhana-dhañña paripuṇṇa-kosa-koṭṭhāgāra,” e.g. DN i.134. For a late description of a king’s quality and distinction see Mil 226, Mil 227 ■ His disciplinary authority is emphasized; he spares no tortures in punishing adversaries or malefactors, esp. the cora (see below 4 c). A summary example of these punishments inflicted on criminals is the long passage illustrating dukkha (bodily pain) at Nd ii.304iii cp. MN iii.163 (here also on a cora ).
3. The king (rājā or khattiya) in the popular opinion, as reflected in language, heads several lists, which have often been taken as enumerating “castes,” but which are simply inclusive statements of var. prominent ranks as playing a rôle in the social life of the state, and which were formulated according to diff. occasions. Thus some show a more political, some a more religious aspect. e.g. khattiya amacca brāhmaṇa gahapati DN i.136; rājā brāhmaṇa gahapatika AN i.68, where another formula has khattiya br. g. AN i.66; Ja i.217; and the foll. with an intermediate “rank” (something like “royalty, “the royal household”) between the king and the brahmins: rājā rājaputtā brāhmaṇā gahapatikā negama-jānapadā AN ii.74 sq.; rājāno rāja-mahāmattā khattiyā br., gah., titthiyā DN iii.44 (trslnDialogues too weak “rājas & their officials”); rājā rājabhogga br. gah. Vin iii.221.
4. Var. aspects illustrating the position of the king in relation to other prominent groups of the court or populace: (a) rājā & khattiya; All kings were khattiyas. The kh. is a noble κα ̓τἐςοξήν (cp. Gr. ἡγεμών) as seen fr. defn jāti-khattiya at Snp-a 453 and var. contexts. Already in the Rig Veda the kṣatriya is a person belonging to a royal family (RV x.109, 3), and rājanya is an Ep. of kṣatriya (see Zimmer Altindisches Leben 213) ■ rājā khattiyo muddhâvassito “a crowned king” DN i.69; DN iii.61 sq.; Vin iv.160; AN i.106 sq.; AN ii.207 (contrasted with brāhmaṇa mahāsāla); iii.299 (if lazy, he is not liked by the people) MN iii.172 sq. (how he becomes a cakkavatti through the appearance of the cakka-ratana) ■ Without muddhāvasitta: rājāno khattiyā Dhp 294 = Ne 165. Cp khattiyā bhoja-rājāno the khattiyas, the (noble or lesser?) kings (as followers of the cakkavatti) Snp 553 (see bhoja). At Ja vi.515. rājāno corresponds directly to khattiyā on p. 517 (saṭṭhisahassa˚); cp. expression khattiya-kula Ja i.217 as equivalent to rāja-kula (b) rājā & mahāmatta;. The latter occupies the position of “Premier,” but is a rank equal to the king hence often called rājā himself: Vin iii.47 where styled “akkhadassa mahāmatta.” Otherwise he is always termed rāja-mahāmatta “royal minister,” or “H.R.H the Premier,” e.g. Vin i.172; AN i.279; Vin i.228 (also as Magadha-mahāmatta), and called himself a khattiya DN iii.44 ■ (c) rājā & cora;. A prominent figure in the affairs of State is the “robber-chief” (mahā-cora) The contrast-pair rajāno (so always pl.) & cora is very frequent, and in this connection we have to think of rājāno as either smaller kings, knights or royals (royalists), i.e. officers of the kings or “the king’s Guards. Thus at Ja iii.34 the C. expln as rāja-purisā. It is here used as a term of warning or frightening “get up robber, so that the kings (alias ʻpolicemanʼ) won’t catch you”: uṭṭhehi cora mā taṃ gahesuṃ rājāno Other passages are e.g. : DN i.7 (rāja-kathā & corakathā) = Vin i.188; MN iii.163 (rājāno coraṃ āgucāriṃ gahetvā); AN i.68, AN i.154; Iti 89 (rāj’ âbhinīta + cor˚); in sequence; rājāno corā dhuttā (as being dangerous to the bhikkhus) at Vin i.150, Vin i.161.
5. On the question of kingship in Ancient India see Zimmer Altind. Leben pp. 162
175, 212 sq.; Macdonell & Keith; Vedic Index ii.210 sq.; Fick, Soc. Gl. 63
90; Foy, Die Königl. Gewalt nach den altind. Rechtsbüchern (Leipzig 1895); Rh. Davids, Buddhist India pp. 1
16; Hopkins E. W., The social and military position of the ruling caste in A. I. in J.A.O.S. 13, 179 sq.; Banerjea Public Administration in A. I. 1916, pp. 63
93.
6 Kings mentioned by name [a very limited & casual list only, for detailed refs. see DPPN] Ajātasattu; Udena (Dhp-a i.185); Okkāka; Dīghī (of Kosala; Vin i.342); Parantapa (of Kosambī; Dhp-a i.164;) Pasenadi (of Kosala; DN i.87, DN i.103; Vin iv.112 Vin iv.157); Bimbisāra (of Magadha; Vin iv.116 sq.; Snp 419) Bhaddiya; etc.
7. (fig.) king as sign of distinction (“princeps”), as the lion is called rājā migānaṃ Snp 72; Vism 650; the Himavant is pabbata -rājā AN i.152; AN iii.44; and Gotama’s horse Kaṇthaka is called assa -rājā Ja i.62 = Vv-a 314 ■ Note. The compn form of rājā is rāja˚.
-āgāra a king’s (garden-or pleasure-) house DN i.7 (˚ka); DN-a i.42. -aṅga royal mark, characteristic or qualification; king’s property Vin i.219 (rājangaṃ hatthī: the elephants belong to the king), cp. AN i.244 assājāniyo rañño angan t’ eva sankhaṃ gacchati is called king’s property. -aṅgana royal court Pv-a 74. -āṇatti king’s permission Tikp 26 (in simile). -āṇā (1) the king’s command Ja iii.180; cp. Pv-a 217 “rañño āṇā” (2) the king’s fine or punishment, i.e. a punishment inflicted by the king (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. 74), synonymous with rāja-daṇḍa: Ja i.369, Ja i.433 (rājāṇaṃ karoti to inflict) ii.197; iii.18, 232, 351; iv.42; vi.18; Pv-a 242. -ānubhāva king’s power, majesty, authority, pomp Ja iv.247; Pv-a 279. -antepura the royal harem AN v.81, AN v.82 (the 10 risks which a bhikkhu is running when visiting it for alms). -ābhinīta brought by a king Iti 89 (+ corâbhinīta). -ābhirājā “king of kings” Snp 553; Dhs-a 20. -āmacca royal minister Ja v.444 (˚majjhe). -āyatana Name of a tree: “Kingstead tree,” the royal tree (as residence of a king of fairies), Buchanania latifolia Vin i.3 sq. (where Mvu iii.303 reads kṣīrikā, i.e. milk-giving tree); Ja i.80; Ja iv.361 sq.; Dhs-a 35; Vb-a 433 (˚cetiya). -iddhi royal power Pv-a 279. -isi a royal seer, a king who gives up his throne & becomes an ascetic (cp. Sk. rājarṣi, freq. in Mhbhārata & Rāmā yana) Thag 1127 (read rāja-d-isi); Iti 21 (rājīsayo, with var vv.ll. not quite the same meaning); Ja vi.116, Ja vi.124 Ja vi.127, Ja vi.518; Dhp-a iv.29. Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading rājīsi ■ upaṭṭhāna attendance on the king, royal audience Vin i.269; Ja i.269, Ja i.349; Ja iii.119, Ja iii.299; Ja iv.63 -ūpabhoga fit for use by the king Mil 252. -uyyāna royal garden or pleasure ground Ja iii.143; Mvu 15, Mvu 2 -orodhā a lady from the king’s harem, a royal concubine Vin iv.261. -kakudha-bhaṇḍa an ensign of royalty (5: khagga, chatta, uṇhīsa, pādukā, vālavījanī) Dhp-a i.356. See under kakudha. -kathā talk about kings (as tiracchānakathā in disgrace), combd with corakathā (see above 4 c) DN i.7; DN iii.36, DN iii.54; Vin i.188. -kammika a royal official, one employed by the king Ja i.439 Ja iv.169. -kuṭumba the king’s property Ja i.439. -kuṇḍa a “crook of a king” Dhp-a iii.56. -kumāra a (royal prince (cp. khattiya-kumāra) Vin i.269; Ja iii.122 Vb-a 196 (in comparison). -kumbhakāra a “royal potter,” i.e. a potter being “purveyor to the king Ja v.290. -kula the king’s court or palace AN i.128 AN ii.205; Vin iv.265; Ja ii.301; Dhp-a ii.44, Dhp-a ii.46; Dhp-a iii.124 -khādāya puṭṭha at Snp 831 is according to Kern Toev. to be read as rajakkhatāya ph. (fr. rajakkha) The old Niddesa, however, reads ˚khādāya & expl;ns the word (Nd i.171) by rājabhojanīyena, i.e. the king’s food, which is alright without being changed. -guṇa “virtue of a king” MN i.446 (trick of a circus horse + rāja-vaṃsa). -daṇḍa punishment ordered by the king Pv-a 216, Pv-a 217. -dāya a royal gift DN i.127; DN-a i.246 -dūta king’s messenger Snp 411, Snp 412; in meaning of “message,” i.e. calling somebody to court, summons at Ja ii.101, Ja ii.305. -dhamma “king’s rule,” i.e. rule of governing, norm of kingship; usually given as a set of 10, which are enumd at Ja iii.274 as “dāna, sīla, pariccāga ajjava, maddava, tapo, akkodha, avihiṃsā, khanti avirodhana,” i.e. alms-giving, morality, liberality straightness, gentleness, self-restriction, non-anger non-hurtfulness, forbearance non-opposition. These are referred to as dasa rājadhammā at Ja i.260, Ja i.399 Ja ii.400; Ja iii.320; Ja v.119, Ja v.378; usually in phrase “dasa rāja-dhamme akopetvā dhammena rajjan kāresi” he ruled in righteousness, not shaking the tenfold code of the king. Another set of 3 are mentioned at Ja v.112, viz. “vitathaṃ kodhaṃ hāsaṃ nivāraye” (expld as giving up musāvāda, kodha & adhamma-hāsa); -dhānī a royal city (usually combd with gāma & nigama AN i.159; AN ii.33; AN iii.108; Vin iii.89; Ja v.453; Pv 1318 -dhītā king’s daughter, princess Ja i.207; Pv-a 74 -nivesana the king’s abode, i.e. palace Dhp-a iv.92 -parisā royal assembly Vin ii.296. -pīla (?) Dhp-a i.323 -putta lit. “king’s son,” prince, one belonging to the royal clan (cp. similarly kulaputta), one of royal descent, Rājput Snp 455; Mil 331; Vb-a 312, Vb-a 319 (in simile); Pv-a 20. f. ˚puttī princess Ja iv.108; Ja v.94 -purisa “king’s man,” only in pl. ˚purisā the men of the king, those in the king’s service (as soldiers, body-guard policeman etc.) Ja iii.34; Vb-a 80 (˚ânubandha-corā) 109. -porisa (m. & nt.) servant of the king, collectively: king’s service, those who devote themselves to Govt. service DN i.135; MN i.85 = Nd ii.199; AN iv.281, AN iv.286 See also porisa ■ bali royal tax Ja i.354. -bhaṭa king’s hireling or soldier Vin i.74, Vin i.88; Snp-a 38 (in simile -bhaya fear of the king’s punishment) Vism 121 -bhāga the king’s share Ja ii.378. -bhogga 1. royal in the service of the king, in foll. phrases: rāja-bhoggaṃ raññā dinnaṃ rāja-dāyaṃ brahma-deyyaṃ DN i.87, of a flourishing place. Dial. i.108 trsls “with power over it as if he were king,” and expls with: “where the king has proprietary rights.” The C. rather unmeaningly expls as “rāja-laddha” (DN-a i.245). The BSk. has a curious version of this phrase: “rājñā-agni- dattena brahmadeyyaṃ dattaṃ” (given by the king in the place of agni?) Divy 620 ■ Further at Vin iii.221 in sequence rājā r-bhogga, brāhmaṇa, gahapatika where the C. expls (on p. 222) as “yo koci rañño bhatta-vetan’ āhāro.” (We should be inclined to take this as No. 2.)-Thirdly, in stock phrase “rājâraha rājabhogga rañño angan t’ eva sankhaṃ gacchati,” i.e. worthy of a king, imperial, he justifies the royal qualification said of a thoroughbred horse at AN i.244 AN ii.113; of a soldier (yodh’ ājīva) at AN i.284; of an elephant at Ja ii.370 (where it is expld as “rāja paribhoga”) Also as “royal possessions” in general at Dhp-a i.312 Dhp-a i.13 ■ Fick, Soc. Gl. 99 does not help much, he takes it as “king’s official.”
2. royal, of royal power, one entitled to the throne. Either as bhogga, bhogiya (Snp-a 453) or (khattiyā) bhoja-rājāno (Snp 553). Thus at Vin iii.221, where it takes the place of the usual khattiya “royal noble” & Snp 553, where it is comb;d (as bhoja rājano) with khattiyā. See also bhoja & cp (antara); bhogika and rājañña ■ mahāmatta king’s prime minister (see above 4 b, to which add: DN iii.44; AN i.154, AN i.252, AN i.279; AN iii.128; Vb-a 312 (simile of 2), 340. -mālakāra royal gardener Ja v.292 -muddā the royal seal Dhp-a i.21. -muddikā id. Snp-a 577. -ratha the king’s chariot Dhp-a iii.122. -rukkha “royal tree,” Cathartocarpus fistula Vv-a 43. -vara the best king, famous king Vv 321 (= Sakka Vv-a 134) -vallabha the king’s favourite, or overseer Mvu 37, Mvu 10; Vb-a 501 (in simile). -vibhūti royal splendour or dignity Pv-a 216, Pv-a 279. -haṃsa “royal swan,” a sort of swan or flamingo Vism 650 (suvaṇṇa˚, in simile).
cp. Vedic rājā, n-stem. To root *reg, as in Lat. rego (to lead, di-rect, cp. in meaning Gr. ἡγεμών): see etym. under uju. Cp. Oir. rī king, Gallic Catu-rīx battle king, Goth reiks = Ohg. rīhhi = rich or Ger. reich. Besides we have *reig in Ags. rāēcean reach; Ger. reichen ■ The Dhtp only knows of one root rāj in meaning “ditti” i.e. splendour
a streak, line, row Snp p.107 (nīla-vana˚ = dark line of trees, expld as nīla-vana rukkha-panti Snp-a 451); Vv 644 (nabhyo sata-rāji-cittita “coloured with 100 streaks”; Vv-a = lekhā); 646 (veḷuriya˚) pabbata˚; a mountain range Ja ii.417; dīgha˚; (adj.) of long lineage Pv-a 68; dvaṅgula˚; a band 2 inches broad Dāvs v.49; roma˚; a row of hair (on the body) Ja v.430.
cp. Sk. rāji
dissension, quarrel, in phrase saṅgha˚; (+ sanghabheda) Vin ii.203 (quoted at Vb-a 428) iv.217.
fr. rāga?
(f.) a certain (gold) weight (a seedcorn of Sinapis ramosa) Thag 97 = Thag 862 (kaṃsa sata 100 mustard seeds in weight, i.e. very costly); Ja vi.510 (kaṃse sovaṇṇe satarājike).
cp. Sk. rājikā
: see vi˚.
(adj.) having streaks or stripes, in uddhagga˚; having prominent stripes (of a lion) Ja iv.345.
fr. rāji
(adj.) having streaks or stripes; f. rājimatī shining, radiant Vv 321 (v.l. rājāputti), expld at Vv-a 134 as follows: “rājati vijjotatī ti rājī: rājī ti matā paññātā rājimatī” (thus connecting ˚mant with man ).
fr. rāji1
a certain reptile Abhp 651.
cp. Sk. rājila
to take up no refs.
Sk. rā to give, bestow; given at Dhtp 369 & Dhtm 597 in meaning “ādāne,” with doublet lā
to please: see cpds. abhi˚ apa˚, ā˚ vi˚.
Caus. of rādh to succeed, rādhyate. The root is given at Dhtp 420 & Dhtm 656 in meaning “saṃsiddhiyaṃ,” i.e. of success. See etym. at Walde, Lat Wtb. s. v. reor.
no refs.
rādh? Given at Dhtp 424 & Dhtm 656 in meaning “hiṃsāyaṃ,” i.e. of hurting
pleasure, sport, amusement; ˚kara having pleasure, sporting, making love Ja v.448.
fr. ram; cp. Vedic rāma
(adj. nt.) pleasant agreeable, lovely AN i.35, AN i.37; Dhp 98 (= ramaṇīya Dhp-a iii.195); nt. delightfulness, lovely scenery MN i.365 (four seen in a dream: ārāma˚, vana˚, bhūmi pokkharaṇī˚).
orig. grd. of rāmeti, ram, cp. Sk. rāmaṇīya. On e for ī see Geiger, P.Gr. § 10
crying, howling; shout, noise Ja i.162 (baddha˚ the cry of one who is caught); iv.415 (id.); vi.475 (of the cries of animals, known to an expert); Mil 254 (bherava-rāvaṃ abhiravati); Mvu 10, Mvu 69 (mahā-rāvaṃ arāvi).
fr. ravati, cp. rava
1. heap, quantity, mass Iti 17; usually -˚, e.g. aṅgāra˚; heap of cinders Ja i.107; kaṇikārapuppha˚; of k. flowers Vv-a 65; kahāpaṇa˚; of money Pv-a 162, tila˚; of seeds Vv-a 54; dhañña˚; of corn AN iv.163, AN iv.170; etc ■ rāsiṃ karoti to make a heap, to pile up Mvu 29, Mvu 28; Vv-a 157.
2. (store of) wealth riches; in ˚agga-dāna gift of the best treasures (of one’s property), one of the 5 “donations of the best,” viz khett˚, rās˚, koṭṭh˚, kumbhi˚, bhojan˚: Snp-a 270 See also ˚vaḍḍhaka
3. a sign of the Zodiac (the 12 as given at Abhp 61 are: mesa, usabha, methuna kakkata, sīha, kaññā, tulā, vicchikā, dhanu, makara kumbha, mīna; or the ram, bull, twins, crab, lion, virgin balance, scorpion bow, capricorn, waterpot, fish) Pv-a 198.
4. (fig.) at t. t. in logic: group, aggregate category, congery; freq. in Abhidhamma-literature where 3 “accumulations” are spoken of, viz. micchatta-niyato rāsi, sammatta-niyato r., anivato r. or “wrong doing entailing immutable evil results, that of well-doing entailing immutable good results, and that of everything not so determined” (Dialogues iii.210) DN iii.217; Kv 611; Ne 96; cp. Kvu trsl. 356 Dhs trsl. 26, 253. In the 5 factors of individuality (body and mind) khandhā are explained as meaning rāsi e.g. Asl. 141; B. Psy. 42. In other connections SN v.146 (kusala˚, akusala˚), 186; AN iii.65 (akusala˚) Tikp 45. -Note. In BSk. we find only 2 of the 3 categories mentioned at Mvu i.175, viz. mithyātvaniyato & aniyato rāśih.;
-vaḍḍhaka one who increases wealth, i.e. a treasurer DN i.61 (trsln: “increases the king’s wealth”; DN-a i.170 simply defines “dhañña-rāsiñ ca dhana-rāsiñ ca vaḍḍhetī ti r. v.”); Ja i.2; Mhbv 78.
Vedic r̄āśi
(nt.) revenue, fisc DN i.135.
fr. rāsi
(adj.) “having one’s bed in loneliness, living in seclusion or secrecy, in manussa˚; “fit to lie undisturbed by men” Vin i.39 (+ paṭisallāna-sāruppa) MN ii.118.
rahas + seyya + ka or rāha (for rahā˚) + seyyaka
Name of an Asura: see under Proper Names ■ rāhumukha “mouth of Rāhu,” designation of a certain punishment for criminals (MN i.87; MN iii.164 Nd i.154 (in list of tortures) = Nd ii.604 = Mil 197.
Vedic rāhu
see under raya.
to leave, abandon leave behind, give up, neglect Vin i.190 (also fut riñcissati); MN i.155 (riñcissati), 403; SN iv.206; AN iii.86 sq., 108 sq., 343 sq., 366 sq., 437; Thag 1052; Snp 156; Mil 419; Ja v.403 ■ ppr. med. with neg.: ariñcamāna Snp 69; ger. riñcitvā (for Sk. riktvā) Thig 93 ■ pp. ritta -Pass. riccati [Sk. ricyate] to be left: see ati˚.
ric, in Vedic & Sk. rinakti; cp. Av. irinaxti to leave; Gr. λείπω id., λοιπός left; Lat. linquo id. Goth. leihwan = Ohg. līhan to lend; Ags lāēn = loan cp. E. leave etc ■ The defn of the root at Dhtp is given in two forms, viz. ric as “virecane” (No. 396; cp Dhtm 517 “kharaṇe,” i.e. flowing; 610 “recane”) and riñc as “riñcane” (No. 44)
(nt.) leaving behind, giving up Dhtp 44.
fr. riñc
devoid, empty, free, rid (of) MN i.207 (+ tuccha), 414; Vin i.157 = Vin ii.216; Snp 823 (emancipated: ritto muni = vivitta etc. Nd i.158), 844 (opp. to aritta); Thig 265 (see rindi); Ja i.29 (v. 222); iii.492; Mil 383.
-assāda finding one’s taste in empty things AN i.280 (+ bāhir-assāda. Kern, Toev. s. v. reads rittāsa and trsls “impure (of food),” not according to the sense at all). -āsana an empty seat Snp 963 (expld at Nd i.481 as “opportunity for sitting down which is free from unbefitting sights”). -pesuṇa free fr. slander Snp 941 (expld at Nd i.422: “yassa pesuññaṃ pahīnaṃ” etc.) -muṭṭhi an empty fist (˚sadisa: comparing someone as regards ignorance) Snp-a 306 = Dhp-a iv.38. -hattha (adj.) empty-handed Ja v.46; Sdhp 309.
pp. of riñcati; cp. atireka
(adj.) empty, void, without reality Thag 41; Thag 2, Thag 394 (= tucchaka anto-sāra-rahita Thag-a 258) Pv iii.65 (of a river = tuccha Pv-a 202); Pv-a 139 (= suñña, virahita). Usually in combn with tucchaka as a standing phrase denoting absolute emptiness worthlessness, e.g. at DN i.240; MN i.329; SN iii.141.
ritta + ka
at Thig 265 is doubtful. The T. reading is “te rindī va lambante ‘nodaka,” said of breasts hanging down in old age. The C. compares them with leather water bottles without water (udaka-bhastā viya). We have to read either with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 94 “ rittī va ” (= rittā iva), “as it were, empty,” or (preferably) with Thag-a 212 “ therī ti va ” (“like an old woman”). The trsln (Sisters, p. 124) takes the C expln of udaka-bhastā as equivalent to T. reading rindi, in saying “shrunken as skins without water”; but rindī is altogether doubtful & it is better to read; therī which is according to the context. We find the same meaning of therī (“old woman”) at Pv ii.116.
to be hurt, to suffer harm MN i.85 (ḍāṃsa-makasa-vāt’ ātapa-siriṃsapa-samphassehi rissamāno; where Nd ii.199 in same passage reads samphassamāna).
Vedic riṣ, riṣyati
in cpd. aḍḍha˚; at Vin ii.134, referring to the shape of a beard, is doubtful. The v.l. is “ duka. ” Could it correspond to Vedic rukma (a certain ornament worn on the chest)?
a tree. In the rukkha-mūlik’ anga (see below Bdhgh at Vism 74 gives a list of trees which are not to be selected for the practice of “living at the root of a tree.” These are sīmantarika-rukkha, cetiya˚, niyyāsa˚ phala˚, vagguli˚, susira˚, vihāra-majjhe ṭhita˚, or a tree standing right on the border, a sacred tree, a resinous tree, a fruit t., a tree on which bats live, a hollow tree a tree growing in the middle of a monastery. The only one which is to be chosen is a tree “vihāra-paccante ṭhita,” or one standing on the outskirt of the Vihāra He then gives further advice as to the condition of the tree ■ Various kinds of trees are given in the defn of r. at Vism 183, viz. assattha, nigrodha, kacchaka kapitthaka; ucca, nīca, khuddaka, mahanto; kāḷa seta ■ A very complete list of trees mentioned in the Saṃyutta Nikāya is to be found in the Index to that Nikāya (vol. vi. p. 84, 85). On rukkha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 128–130 ■ See also the foll. refs. AN i.137; AN ii.109, AN ii.207; AN iii.19, AN iii.200, AN iii.360; AN iv.99, AN iv.336 AN v.4 sq., 314 sq.; Snp 603, Snp 712; Ja i.35 (nāga˚); Vism 688 (in simile: mahārukkhe yāva kapp’ âvasānā bījaparamparāya rukkha-paveṇiṃ santāyamāne ṭhite) Vb-a 165 = Vism 555 (rukkha phalita); Vb-a 196 (in compn: jātassa avassaṃ jarā-maraṇaṃ, uppannassa rukkhassa patanaṃ viya), 334 sq. (as garu-bhaṇḍa) Snp-a 5 (“pathavi-ras’ ādim iva rukkhe”: with same simile as at Vism 688, with reading kappâvasānaṃ and santānente); Dhp-a iii.207 (amba˚); Vv-a 43 (rāja˚), 198 (amba˚); Dhp-a iv.120 (dīpa˚); Pv-a 43.
-antara the inside of a tree Pv-a 63. -koṭṭaka (-sakuṇa) the wood-pecker Ja iii.327 (= java sakuṇa) -gahana tree-thicket or entanglement AN i.154 (so for ˚gahaṇa). -devatā a tree spirit, dryad, a yakkha inhabiting a tree (rukkhe adhivatthā d. Vin iv.34; Ja ii.385; kakudhe adhivatthā d. Vin i.28) Ja i.168, Ja i.322 Ja ii.405, Ja ii.438 sq. (eraṇḍa˚), 445; iii.23; iv.308 (vanajeṭṭhaka-rukkhe nibbatta-devatā); Dhp-a ii.16; Pv-a 5 (in a Nigrodha tree), 43 (in the Vindhya forest). They live in a Nigrodha tree at the entrance of the village (Ja i.169), where they receive offerings at the foot of the tree (cp. iv.474), and occasionally one threatens them with discontinuance of the offerings if they do not fulfil one’s request. The trees are their vimānas (Ja i.328, Ja i.442; Ja iv.154), occasionally they live in hollow trees (Ja i.405; Ja iii.343) or in tree tops (Ja i.423) They have to rely on the food given to them (ibid.) for which they help the people (J iii.24; v.511). They assume various forms when they appear to the people (Ja i.423; Ja ii.357, Ja ii.439; Ja iii.23); they also have children (Vin iv.34; Ja i.442). -paveṇi lineage of the tree Vism 688. -pāṇikā a wooden spoon Vism 124 (opp. to pāsāṇa˚). -mūla the foot of a tree (taken as a dwelling by the ascetics for meditation: DN i.71, where several such lonely places are recommended, as arañña, r-m. pabbata, kandara, etc ■ DN-a i.209 specifies as “yaṃ kiñci sanda-cchāyaṃ vivittaṃ rukkha-mūlaṃ”); AN ii.38 AN iv.139, AN iv.392; SN i.199 (˚gahana); Iti 102; Snp 708, Snp 958 Nd i.466; Pp 68; Pv-a 100 (v.l. sukkha-nadī), 137 (Gaṇḍamba˚, with ref. to the Buddha). -˚gata one who undertakes living at the foot of a tree (as an ascetic) AN iii.353; AN v.109 sq., 207, 323 sq.; Pp 68 -˚senāsana having one’s bed & seat at the foot of a tree for meditative practices as a recluse Vin i.58 (as one of the 4 nissayas: piṇḍiy’ ālopa-bhojana, paṃsukūla-cīvara, r ■ m. s., pūti-mutta bhesajja), 96 (id.) AN iv.231. -mūlika (a) one who lives at the foot of a tree, an open air recluse MN i.282; MN iii.41; AN iii.219; Ja iv.8 (āraññaka, paṇṇasālaṃ akatvā r., abbhokāsika) (b) belonging to the practice of a recluse living under a tree “tree rootman’s practice” (Vism trsln 84); as ˚anga one of the (13) dhutaṅga -practices; i.e. practices for a scrupulous way of living Vism 59, Vism 74, Vism 75 (mentioned between the ārannik’ anga & the; abbhokāsik’- anga). -mūlikatta the practice of living (alone) under a tree MN iii.41 (mentioned with paṃsukūlikatta piṇḍapātikatta); AN iii.109 (id.). -sunakha “tree dog, a cert. animal Ja vi.538 (C. in expln of naḷa-sannibha “reed-coloured”). -susira a hollow tree Pv-a 62.
Vedic vṛkṣa. See Geiger, P.Gr. § 13, with note. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 320 puts rukkha to Sk. rukṣa (shining which as Pischel, following Roth. says has also the meaning “tree” in Ṛgveda). The Prk. form is rukkha Cp. Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. 1, § 184 b. We find a byform rakkha at Ja iii.144. Cp. Brethren, pp. 185, 416 where the Bn MS. has rukkha kathā the meaning being rakkha˚
(-rukkha) & Rucā (f.) Name of a plant, or tree, alias “mukkhaka” (read mokkhaka ) “principal Ja i.441, Ja i.443 (gloss mangala-rukkha).
fr. ruc
(nt.) (gold) sand Vv 351; Vv-a 160 (= suvaṇṇa-vālikā).
cp. Sk. rucaka a golden ornament
(f.) 1. splendour, light, brightness Snp 548 (su˚ very splendid; Snp-a 453 = sundara-sarīrappabha).
2. inclination, liking, pleasure Pv-a 59 (˚ṃ uppādeti to find pleasure, to be satisfied) ■ aruci aversion, dislike Thig 472 ■ ruci object of pleasure Ja v.371 ■ ruciyā (abl.) in the pleasure (of), by the liking (of) (cp. No. 3), in phrases attano ruciyā (attano citta-ruciyā: so read for ˚ruciyaṃ!); as one pleases, by one’s own free will, ad lib. Ja i.106; Ja iv.281; Pv-a 59 parassa r. pavattati to live by the pleasure (gratiâ) of somebody else, i.e. to be dependent on others DN-a i.212 ■ yathā ruciṃ according to liking or satisfaction fully, amply Mvu 4, Mvu 43; Mvu 5, Mvu 230; Pv-a 88, Pv-a 126, Pv-a 242. 3. In dogmatic language used in the sense of “will” or “influence” in combn diṭṭhi, khanti, ruci one’s views indulgence & pleasure (= will), i.e. one’s intellectual emotional & volitional sphere, e.g. Vin i.70; Snp 781 (without khanti, but see defn at Nd i.65); also with saddhā, anussavo, ākāraparivitakke, diṭṭhinijjhānakhanti MN ii.170, MN ii.218; MN ii.234; contrasted with dhamma DN iii.40; Vb 245 (in defn of “ idha ”: cp. same at Pts i.176 and Nd ii.145), 325, 328. aññatra ruciyā under the influence of someone else’s will SN ii.115; SN iv.138 See also bhāva 2a.
fr. ruc, cp. Vedic ruc (f.) light, Classic Sk. ruci in meaning “pleasure”
(-˚) (adj.) belonging to the pleasure (of); only in phrase añña˚; being dependent on someone else’s will or under another’s influence, together with aññadiṭṭhika and añña-khantika characterizing the various sides of personality (see ruci 3) with ref. to one’s intellect feeling & will DN i.187 = MN i.487. Rhys Davids (Dial. i.254) trsls: “holding different views, other things approving themselves to you, setting diff. aims before yourself”; thus differing in interpretation of añña taking it subjectively. Neumann (Majjhima Übs. ii.250) quite wrongly: “ohne Deutung, ohne Geduld ohne Hingabe” (without explanation, patience, devotion).
fr. ruci 3
(adj.) brilliant, beautiful, pleasant, agreeable Pv i.109 (= ramaṇīya dassanīya Pv-a 51); Ja i.207; Ja v.299; Vv 402 (so read for rurira) Mvu 11, Mvu 11; Mvu 18, Mvu 68; Dāvs iv.29; Mil 2, Mil 398; Dhp-a i.383 (= sobhana); Vv-a 12; Pv-a 156 (= vaggu).
fr. ruc, cp. Sk. rucira
to find delight or pleasure in (loc.), to please to indulge in, set one’s mind on Snp 565 (etañ ce r. bhoto buddha-sāsanaṃ); with khamati to be pleased and to approve of, MN ii.132; often used by Bdhgh in C. style yathā r. tathā paṭhitabbaṃ Kp-a 78; “yaṃ r. taṃ gahetabbaṃ Snp-a 23, Snp-a 43, Snp-a 136, Snp-a 378” “to take, whichever one pleases” (in giving the choice of 2 readings or interpretations) ■ ger. ruccitvā Vv-a 282 (r. pūresi “to find thorough delight in,” expln for abhirocesi). pret. 1st pl. ruccādimhase Pv i.118 (= ruccāma ruciṃ uppādema, taṃ attano ruciyā pivissāmā ti attho Pv-a 59) ■ Prohibitive mā rucci (pl. mā rucittha ) as an entreaty not to pursue an aim (= please do not do that, please don’t) Vin ii.198 (alaṃ Devadatta mā te rucci sangha-bhedo); Dhp-a i.13 (mā vo āvuso evaṃ ruccittha).
*rucyati Med. of ruc: see rocati. Same in Prk ■ Originally Caus. formation like Epic Sk. rocyate for rocayate
(& ā˚ f.) (nt.) choice, pleasure Dhp-a i.387 (tava ˚ṭṭhāne according to your own liking) DN-a i.106 (˚ā).
fr. ruccati
(adj.) pleasing, satisfying; nt. satisfaction Ja i.211 (˚maccha the fish you like); ii.182 (tava ˚ṃ karosi you do whatever you like). a˚; unpleasant, distasteful Dhp-a i.251 (attano aruccanakaṃ kiñci kammaṃ adisvā).
fr. ruccana, cp. Sk. rucya
a lute-player Ja vi.51, Ja vi.52, given by Kern, Toev. s. v. as conjecture (vīṇaṃ) va rujaka for virujaka The conjecture is based on C. reading “rujaka = vīṇāvādaka.”
fr. ruj ?
to break crush; lit. to (cause) pain, to afflict, hurt (trs. & intrs. Ja i.7 (pādā rujanti), 396 (pādā me rujanti my feet ache) iv.208 (khandhena rujantena with hurting back); vi.3 (ūrū rujanti); Mvu 10, Mvu 15 (pādā me r.); Mil 26 (pādā r.); Dhp-a i.10, Dhp-a i.21 (akkhīni me rujiṃsu); ii.3 ■ fut rucchiti [cp. Sk. roḳsyate] Ja vi.80 (v.l. B.B. rujjati; C takes wrongly as “rodissati,” of rodati) ■ pp. lugga -Cp. lujjati & comb;ns.
ruj, representing an Idg. *leug, as in Gr. λευγαλέος, λυγρός sad, awful; Lat. lugeo to mourn; Lith. lúžti to break; German lücke, loch etc ■ A specific Pāli l-form is lujjati. A der. fr. ruj is roga illness ■ The Dhtp (469) defines ruj by “bhanga” i.e. breaking
(nt.) hurting, feeling pain Ja ii.437 (roga = rujana-sabhāvattaṃ); Ja iv.147 (yāva piṭṭhiyā rujana-ppamāṇaṃ until his back ached).
fr. ruj, cp. rujā
(adj.) aching, hurting Dhp-a iv.69 (anguli).
fr. rujana
(f.) disease, pain Mil 172 (rujaṃ na karoti); Vism 69; Dhp-a iv.163 (accha˚ a bad pain).
fr. ruj, see rujati; cp. Sk. rujā
to be broken up, to be destroyed Ja iii.181 (pāṇā rujjhanti; C. expls by nirujjhati). Cp. upa˚, vi˚.
Pass. of rundhati
vexed, cross, enraged Ja iv.358 (opp. to tuṭṭha v.l. atuṭṭha) v.211 (gloss kuddha); Dāvs iii.37.
pp. of ruṣ; Sk. ruṣṭa
see luṭhati & cp.; rudda.
a sound-particle, denoting a heavy fall, something like “thud” Ja i.418. Runna & Ronna;
1. (pp. crying, in comb;n ruṇṇa-mukha with tearful face Ja vi.525 (C. rudam˚); Mil 148.
2. (nt.) weeping, crying lamentation Thag 554; AN i.261; Snp 584 (+ soka); Pv i.43; Milo 357. As roṇṇa at AN iv.197, AN iv.223; Thag 555; Ja iii.166.
pp. of rudati for Sk. rudita, after analogy of other roots in-d, as tud → tunna, pad → panna, nud → nunna. The BSk. forms are both ruṇḍa (Mvu ii.218, Mvu ii.224) and ruṇṇa (Mvu iii.116); Prk. ruṇṇa (Pischel § 566). See rudati & cp. āruṇṇa
(nt.) noise, sound(ing); cry, singing Thag 1103; Ja i.207 (T. reading ruda is expld in C. as ruta with ˚da for ˚ta: ta-kārassa dakāro kato); iii.276 (sabba-ruta-jānana-manta: spell of knowing all animal-sounds; T. reads rūta; cp. sabbarāva-jānana Ja iii.415); vi.475 (rudaññu = ruta-jña C. same meaning); Mil 178 (sakuṇa-ruta-ravita); Vv-a (karavīka˚).
pp. of ravati: see rava & ravati
in du˚ & su˚; at Dhs-a 396 is to be read as dur- and su(r)- utta (see utta).
stands for ruta (cry) at 2 Jātaka passages, viz. Ja i.207; Ja vi.475 (ruda-ññu knowing the cries of all animals, expld as “ruta-jña, sabba-rāvaṃ jānāti” C.).
to cry, lament weep, wail ■ Forms I. rud˚; (the older form): pres rudati (not yet found); ppr. rudanto DN i.115; Snp 675 Snp 691; rudamāna MN i.341; AN ii.95; Pp 62; Mil 275 Sdhp 281; and rudaṃ Pv i.84; also in cpd. rudam-mukha with weeping face Ja vi.518 (assu-netta + ); Pv i.112 ger. ruditvāna Mvu 35, Mvu 24; fut. rucchati Ja v.366 and rucchiti Ja vi.550 (= rodissati C.; see also rujati). II. rod˚; (the younger form & the one peculiar to; prose) pres. rodati Ja i.55; Ja iii.169 (socati + ); Pv i.87 (socati + ) i.124; Pv-a 17, Pv-a 18; Pot. rode Pv i.85 (= rodeyyaṃ Pv-a 64); ppr. rodanto Ja i.65; f. rodantī Pv-a 16; med rodamāna Pv-a 6; DN-a i.284 ■ aor. rodi Ja i.167; Dhp-a ii.17 (+ hasi); fut. rodissati Ja vi.550; ger. roditvā Mvu 9, Mvu 7; inf. rodituṃ Ja i.55 ■ Caus. ii. rodāpeti to make someone cry Dhp-a ii.86 ■ pp. ruṇṇa, rudita rodita;.
rud, the usual Sk. pres. being rodati, but forms fr. base rud˚; are Vedic and are later found also in Prk. (cp. Pischel Prk. Gr. § 495): ruyai besides royai & rodasi ■ The Idg. root is; *reud, being an enlargement of *reu, as in ravati (q.v.). Cp. cognates Lat. rudo to cry, shout, bray; Lith. raudà wailing; Ohg. riozan Ags. reotan ■ The Dhtp expls rud by “rodane” (144) the Dhtm by “assu-vimocane” (206)
(nt.) crying, weeping Pv-a 18 (+ assu-mocana, in expln of ruṇṇa), 63 (= paridevita).
pp. of rudati, equivalent to ruṇṇa
(adj.) fierce, awful, terrible Ja iv.416 (so luddako rudda-rūpo; v.l. ludda˚); v.425, 431 (su-ruddho spelling for su-ruddo, very fierce, expld as su-luddo supharuso); Mvu 12, Mvu 45 (rudda-rakkhasī, prob. with ref to the demon Rudra; trsln “fearsome female demon” vv.ll. ruda˚, ruddha˚, dudda˚).
cp. Sk. raudra & Vedic rudra (a fierce demon or storm-deity; “the red one,” with Pischel from rud to be ruddy. See Macdonell, Vedic Mythology 74
-77) The usual Pāli form is ludda. At Dhtp 473 & Dhtm 135 a root; ruṭh (or luṭh ) is given in meaning “upaghāte” i.e. killing, which may represent this rud: see luṭhati
1. obstructed, disturbed Dāvs 4, Dāvs 46.
-2. at Ja v.425 & 431 in cpd. su-ruddha it stands for; rudda (q.v.) ■ Cp. upa˚, ni˚, paṭi˚ paṭivi˚, vi˚.
pp. of rundhati
(nt.) blood Dhp-a i.140; Pv-a 34 (for lohita; v.l. ruhira). See the more freq words rohita & lohita; a form ruhira (q.v.) occurs e.g. at Pv i.91.
late Vedic rudhira. Etym. connected with Lat. ruber red; Gr. ἐρυχρός red; Oicel. rodra blood Goth. raups = Ger. rot = E. red
1. to restrain, hinder, prevent, obstruct, keep out Cp iii.107; Mil 313 (+ upa˚).
2. to conceal, hide cover up Thig 238 (ppr. rundhanto); Pv-a 88 (ppr rundhamāna).
3. in phrase nagaraṃ r. to surround or besiege a town Ja i.409 (aor. rundhi); iii.159 (˚itvā) iv.230 (˚iṃsu) ■ Pass rujjhati; pp. ruddha & rūḷha;. See also upa˚, paṭi˚ paṭivā, vi˚, Note. The roots rudh & rundh; are also found in Prk. (see Pischel § 507) besides we have a by-form rubh in Prk. as well as in Pāli: see Pischel, § 266, 507, and P. rumbhati.
rundh or rudh, both roots in Vedic Sk ■ Dhtp (375, 425) expls by “āvaraṇe”; id. Dhtm (608, 662).
in ruppa-rūpakaṃ (nt.) Thig 394 is not clear. It refers to something which is not rūpa, yet pretends to be rūpa, i.e. a sham performance or show. Thus ruppa may correspond to *rūpya & with rūpaka mean “having the form (i.e. the appearance) of form, i.e. substantiality ” The Cy. (Thag-a 259) interprets as “rūpiya-rūpasadisaṃ sāraṃ sāraṃ upaṭṭhahantaṃ asāran ti attho” and Mrs. Rh. D. (Sisters, p. 154) trsls: “deluded by puppet shows (seen in the midst of the crowd).”
to be vexed, oppressed hurt, molested (always with ref. to an illness or pain Snp 767 (salla-viddho va r.) 1121; Nd i.5 (= kuppati ghaṭṭiyati, pīḷiyati); Nd ii.543 (= kuppati pīḷayati ghaṭayati) ■ ppr. gen. ruppato SN i.198 (salla-viddhassa r.; expld at K.S. 320 by “ghaṭṭan-atthena”) Snp 331 (reads salla-viddhāna ruppataṃ, i.e. pl. instead of sg.); Thag 967 (salla-viddhassa ruppato (C. sarīravikāraṃ āpajjato, Brethren, 338); Ja ii.437 (C. ghaṭṭiyamāna pīḷiyamāna) = Vism 49 (dukkhitassa r.); Ja iii.169 (salla-viddhassa r. = ghaṭṭiyamāna C.) ■ ruppati to Pāli exegesis with its fondness of allegorical (“orthodox”) interpretation, is the etym. base of rūpa, thus at SN iii.86: “ruppatī ti tasmā rūpan ti vuccati kena r. sītena, uṇhena etc. (all kinds of material dukkha dukkha ii.3b) ruppati.”-Or at Snp 1121 (ruppanti rūpena), & at other passages given under rūpa (A) See also; ruppana.
rup = lup, one of the rare cases of P. r. representing a Sk. 1., whereas the opposite is frequent. The same sound change Idg., as Lat. rumpo to break corresponds to Sk. lumpati. Besides we find the Sk. form ropayati to break off ■ The root has nothing to do with rūpa, although the P. Commentators combine these two-Cp. also Sk. ropa hole; Ags. rēofan to break, rēaf (theft) = Ger. raub, rauben, and many other cognates (see Walde s. v. rumpo) ■ The root rup is defd at Dhtm by nās, i.e. to destroy; another rup is given at Dhtm 837 in meaning “ropana”
(nt.) [fr. rup ) molestation, vexation, trouble Ja iii.368 (= ghaṭṭana dūsana kuppana C.). Frequent in allegorical exegesis of rūpa, e.g. at Dhs-a 52 (naman aṭṭhena nāmaṃ ruppan’ aṭṭhena rūpaṃ), 303 (rūp’ ādīhi ruppana-bhāva-dīpana); Vb-a 4 (ruppan’ aṭṭhena rūpaṃ in expln of passage SN iii.86 (mentioned under ruppati); Kp-a 78, Kp-a 79 (ruppan’ aṭṭhena… rūpaṃ rūpaṃ ti vuccati).
to obstruct surround, besiege (= rundhati 3) Ja vi.391 (where spelling rumhati; in phrase nagaraṃ r.). See also ni˚, sanni˚-pp. rūḷha.
so read for rumhati (Trenckner, Notes 599; the root is another form of rudh (as in Prk.): see rundhati The Dhtm (547) defines by “uppīḷana”
(adj.) miserable, dirty, poorly, in cpds. ˚rūpin Ja iv.387 (= lūkhavesa C.), with v.l. duma˚; and ˚vāsin poorly dressed Ja iv.380.
put down (rightly) by Geiger, P.Gr. § 53 as different fr. Sk. rukma (shining); Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893 12 tried the etym. rumma = Sk. rumra “tawny,” oṛ rukma (rukmin) shiny. It is still an unsolved problem It may not be far off to trace a relation (by miswriting dissimilation or false analogy) to ruppa in sense of ruppati, or to ruj, or even rudda. The C. expln of all the rumma-& rummin passages is; anañjita, i.e. unkempt
(dirty-soiled) Ja iv.322 (v.l. dummi); vi.194 (do.).
at MN i.480 is doubtful in spelling. The meaning is clearly “furthering growth, making or being prosperous, bringing luck” (combd with ojavant ), as also indicated by v.l. ruḷh˚. Thus it cannot belong to rumbh, but must represent either rup, as given under ruppati in meaning “ropana” (Dhtm 837), or ruh (see rūhati). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls “tot groei geschikt (i.e. able to grow), Neumann, “erquickend” (i.e. refreshing).
is Med. of rūhati (rohati), q.v.
at Vv 402 is misprint for rucira.
a sort of deer, a stag; usually called ruru-miga Ja iv.256, Ja iv.261; Ja v.406 (pl rohitā rurū), 416. Cp. ruruva.
Vedic ruru: RV vi.75, 15
annoyed, irritated, offended Snp 932, Snp 971 (expld by Nd i.498 as “khuṃsita, vambhita ghaṭṭita” etc.). See rosa, roseti etc.
pp. of ruṣ to be vexed. The Dhtp defines by “rose” (306, 450), “pārusiye” (626); Dhtm has 2 roots viz. one with “ālepe” (442), the other with “hiṃsāyaṃ” (443)
at Snp-a 121 for dussati.
(adj.) (-˚) growing, a tree, in cpds.: jagati˚, dharaṇi˚, mahī˚, etc.
fr. ruh: see rūhati
blood, in cpd. ruhaṅghasa blood-eater, a name for panther Ja iii.481 (= ruhira-bhakkha lohita-pāyin C.).
poetical for ruhira (rohita) = lohita
(nt.) blood MN iii.122; Thag 568; Vin ii.193; Mil 125, Mil 220; Sdhp 38.
-akkhita (ruhir’ akkhita) “besmeared with blood Ja iv.331, is to be read as ruhir’ ukkhita of ukṣ ).
fr. rudhira
at Ja iii.276 read ruta (q.v.).
(nt.) [cp. Vedic rūpa, connected etymologically with varpa (Grassmann) ■ The nom. pl. is rūpā & rūpāni form, figure, appearance, principle of form, etc ■ A; Definitions. According to P. expositors rūpa takes its designation fr. ruppati, e.g. “ruppanato rūpaṃ” Vism 588; “ruppan’ aṭṭhena r.” Vb-a 3; “rūpa-rūpaṃ ruppana sabhāvena yuttaṃ” Cpd. 1567 (where ruppati is, not quite correctly, given as “change”), “ruppatī ti: tasmā rūpan ti vuccati” SN iii.86; other defns are “rūpayatī ti rūpaṃ” (with cakkhu & the other 10 āyatanas) Vb-a 45; and more scientifically: “paresu rūp’ ādisu cakkhu-paṭihanana lakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ Vism 446 ■ Of modern interpretations & discussions see e.g. ; Dhs. trsl. introd. ch. vi. (pp. 41–63, or 248
71) Dial. ii.244; Expos. 67n; Cpd. 270 sq. (where objections are raised to trsln “form,” and as better (philosophical) terms “matter,” “material quality” are recommended). See also loka for similar etym ■ B (lit.) appearance, form, figure Dhs 597 sq. (= form either contrasted with what is unseen, or taken for both seen and unseen), 751; Mvu 27, Mvu 30 (sīha-vyagghādirūpāni representations of lions, tigers etc.); 30, 68 (ravicanda-tāra-rūpāni id.); 36, 31 (loha˚ bronze statue) Thag-a 257 ■ Esp. beautiful form, beauty SN iv.275; Pv ii.958 (as one of the 10 attributes, with sadda etc. of distinction: see also below DN ii.a); Mil 285; Mvu 20, Mvu 4 (rūpa-māninī proud of her beauty); Pv-a 89- surūpa very beautiful Thag-a 72; durūpa of evil form ugly AN ii.203 sq. (dubbaṇṇa + ) ■ In phrase rūpaṃ sikkhati Vin i.77 = Vin iv.129 the meaning is doubtful; it may be “to study drawing, or arts & craft,” or (with Mrs. Rh. D.) “weights & measures,” or (w. Hardy “money changing.” It is said that through this occupation the eyes become bad; it is opposed to gaṇanā -C. (-˚) of such & such a form, like, kind, of a certain condition or appearance. In this appl;n very frequent & similar to E ■ hood, or Ger ■ heit, i.e. an abstract formation Often untranslatable because of the latter character. It is similar to; kāya (cp. expln of ātura rūpa Vv 8314 by abhitunna -kāya Vva 328), but not so much with ref. to life & feeling as to appearance and looks. E. g. aneka˚ Snp 1079 (= anekavidha Nd;2 54) adissamāna˚ invisible Pv-a 6 (lit. with invisible form) ummatta˚ as if mad, under the appearance of madness like a madman Pv i.81; ii.63; eva˚ in such a condition Pv ii.15; tapassī˚ appearing to be an ascetic Pv i.32 tāraka˚ the (shapes of the) stars Dhs 617; deva˚ as a deva Pv-a 92. Pleonastically e.g. in: anupatta˚ attaining Pv iv.166; taramāna˚ quickly Pv ii.62; yutta˚ fit Pv-a 157; sucitta˚ variegated Pv i.109 ■ Cases ad verbially: citta -rūpaṃ according to intention Vin iii.161 Vin iv.177; cetabba-rūpaṃ fit to be thought upon Ja iv.157 (= ˚yuttakaṃ C.) ■ atta -rūpena on my own account SN iv.97; godha- rūpena as an iguana Mvu 28, Mvu 9 ■ D (as philos. t. t.) principle of (material) form, materiality visibility ■ There are var. groups of psychological and metaphysical systematizations, in which rūpa functions as the material, gross factor, by the side of other, more subtle factors. In all these representations of rūpa we find that an element of moral psychology overshadows the purely philosophical & speculative aspect. A detailed (Abhidhammatic) discussion of rūpa in var. aspects is to be found at Dhs § 585
980. 1. rūpa as āyatana or sense object. It is the object of the activity or sphere of the organ of sight (cakkhu) As such it heads the list of the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see e.g. Nd ii.p. 238 A-E & āyatana;3) with “cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā” (the others: sota → sadda, ghāna → gandha jivhā → rasa, kāya → phoṭṭhabba, mano → dhamma), cp. cakkhu-viññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā etc. DN i.245; MN i.266 cakkhunā rūpaṃ passati iṭṭha-rūpaṃ kanta-rūpaṃ etc SN iv.126 ■ see further: Vin i.34 (sabbaṃ ādittaṃ cakkhuṃ ādittaṃ, rūpa ādittā etc. with sequence of other āyatanas); DN ii.308 sq., 336 sq.; MN iii.18 (yaṃ kho rūpaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ rūpe assādo; cp. Pts ii.109 sq.), 291 (ye te cakkhu-viññeyyesu rūpesu avīta-rāgā etc.); Pts i.79; Pts ii.38 (rūpī rūpāni passatī ti vimokkho); Dhs 617, Dhs 653, Dhs 878; Tikp 28. 2. (metaphysically) as the representative of sensory or material existence: (a) universally as forming the corporeal stratum in the world of appearance or form (rūpa- bhava) as compared with the incorporeal (arūpa -bhava) being itself above, and yet including the kāma- bhava (The kāmabhava is a subdivision of rūpabhava, which has got raised into a third main division.) This triad is also found in combns with loka or dhātu (see dhātu 2 a & d), or; avacara. See e.g. DN i.17; DN iii.215 (˚dhātu) 216 (˚bhava); Kv 370 sq. (˚dhātu); Dhs 499 (˚âvacara) 585 (˚dhātu); Vb 17 (˚āvacara), 25 (as garu-pariṇāma & dandha-nirodha comp;d with arūpa). A similar sequence rūpa arūpa & nirodha; (i.e. nibbāna) in old verses at Snp 755; Iti 45, Iti 62 (rūpehi arūpā santatarā arūpehi nirodho santataro). On indriya-rūpa “faculty as form” see indriya B ■ (b) individually in the sphere of saṃsāra as one (i.e. the material quality) of the substrata of sensory individual existence or the khandhas They are the 5: rūpa-kkhandha, vedanā˚ saññā˚, sankhārā˚, viññāṇa˚; otherwise called rūp ūpādāna-kkhandha etc. (e.g. DN iii.223, DN iii.278; Vism 443) See khandha ii. B ■ In this property rūpa consists of 28 subdivisions, viz. the 4 (great) dhātūs (mahābhūtāni or else bhūta-rūpa primary matter) and 24 upādārūpāni (i.e. derivative forms or accidentals). These are given in extenso in the rūpakkhandha section of the Vism (pp. 443
450), also at Dhs 585; the 24 consist of cakkhu, sota, ghāna, jivhā, kāya, rūpa, sadda, gandha rasa, itthindriya, purisindriya, jīvitindriya, hadaya vatthu, kāya -viññatti, vacī-viññatti, ākāsa-dhātu (rūpassa) lahutā mudutā kammaññatā, upacaya santati jaratā aniccatā, kabaḷinkār’-āhāra; cp. defn at Ne 73: cātu-mahābhūtikaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ ca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpassa paññatti. The rūpakkhandha shares with the others the qualities of soullessness, evanescence and ill (anattā, anicca dukkha); e.g. rūpañ ca h’ idaṃ attā abhavissa, na y’ idaṃ rūpaṃ ābadhāya saṃvatteyya Vin i.13, cp similarly MN iii.282 sq.; SN iii.66; quoted and expld in detail at Vism 610; rūpaṃ aniccaṃ Vin i.14; MN i.228 MN iii.18 (also expld at Vism 610); SN iii.48, SN iii.66, SN iii.88; rūpe anicc’ ânupassanā Pts ii.186 sq ■ See also DN ii.301 DN iii.233; Pts i.23, Pts i.53, Pts i.104; Pts ii.96, Pts ii.102, Pts ii.109 (rūpassa ādīnavo); Vb 1. sq., 12 sq. (in detail); Kv 11 sq. Vism 443 sq.; Tikp 33; Vb-a 2, Vb-a 3, Vb-a 32 sq. = SN iii.142 (with var. similes); Dhp-a iv.100 ■ (c) in the making up of the individuality as such (nāma-rūpa ), where in contrast with nāma (as abstract, logical, invisible or mind-factor) rūpa represents the visible (material factor, resembling kāya (cp. phrase nāma-kāya in same sense). The foll. are current defns of nāma-rūpa nāma-(kāya) = vedanā, saññā, cetanā, phassa, manasikāra (otherwise citta-sankhārā), rūpa(-kāya) = cattāro mahā-bhūtā catunnaṃ m-bhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpaṃ (otherwise kāya-sankhārā) SN ii.4; SN iii.59 sq.; Pts i.183 with explns at Vism 558 & Vb-a 169. Defined at Ne 15: “ye phassa-pañcamakā dhammā: idaṃ nāmaṃ yāni pañc’ indriyāni rūpāni: idaṃ rūpaṃ, tad ubhayaṃ nāmarūpaṃ viññāṇa-sampayuttaṃ.” Discussed in detail also at Vism 562 (= Vb-a 173, Vb-a 174), 587
597; cp Dhs-a 392 (Expos. 500, where “mind-matter” is given as corresp. couple in trsln, do. Cpd. 271 sq. “mind and body”). See also under paṭicca-samuppāda.
3 various references: DN iii.102, DN iii.212, DN iii.225, DN iii.244, DN iii.273; MN i.84 (Gotamo kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññāpeti, rūpānaṃ vedanānaṃ); SN ii.198; SN iii.11 (evaṃ-rūpo siyaṃ, evaṃ vedano etc.), 101 (id., & the khandhas); Snp 867, Snp 874 Snp 943, Snp 1037, Snp 1121; Nd i.425; Tikp 36, 38, 54, 262; Vism 625 (uppajjanaka˚).
-ārammaṇa a visible thing as object Dhs 146, Dhs 365; Dhs-a 310 (cp. Expos. 407). -āvacara world of form sphere of matter (cp. Expos. 67, 216n, 264) Pv-a 163 -ūpaga (satta) (a being) living in (bodily) form Iti 62; Snp 754. -ūpajīvinī f. a woman living on her beauty i.e. a harlot Pv-a 46, Pv-a 201. -ññu knowing (var.) bodily forms MN i.220 = AN v.347. -taṇhā craving after form DN ii.309; DN iii.216, DN iii.244, DN iii.280; Vb-a 179 (in det.). -dakkha one clever in forms, viz. an artist (accountant?) Mil 344 (in the Dhamma-nagara). -dhātu the element of form, material element Vism 486; Ne 32, Ne 97. See above D 2. -nimitta sign of form Pts i.92. -patta beautiful Ja i.61. -pamāṇika measuring by form (outward appearance), one of the 4 kinds of measurements which the world takes of the Tathāgata (see A ii.71 Pp 53), viz. rūpa˚, ghosa˚, lūkha˚, dhamma˚ Dhp-a iii.113; the same four similarly at Snp-a 242. -pātubhāva appearance of form (also as ˚antara˚ intermediate form) Snp-a 245. -bhava material existence: see above D 2. -rāga lust after rebirth in rūpa DN iii.234 (+ arūpa˚); Ne 28 (pañc’ indriyāni rūpīni rūpa-rāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. -rūpa material form (mutable material quality?) Cpd. 156, doubtful trsln & expl;n -saññā perception of material qualities, notion of form DN i.34 DN ii.112 (expld in det. at Vism 328); iii.224, 244, 253 Nd ii.545; Dhs-a 200 (cp. Expos. 269). -saññin perceiving form DN iii.260; Pts ii.38; Snp 1113. -santati duration of material form Vism 431; Vb-a 21. -samussaya accumulation of form, complex form Thag-a 98 -samāpatti attainment of beauty Ja i.406. -sampatti beauty Ja iii.187. -siri personal splendour Ja i.60.
(nt.) form, figure; likeness of, image (-˚); representation Vin ii.113 (rūpak’ okiṇṇāni pattāni of painted bowls); Thig 394 (see ruppa˚); Dhp-a i.370 (maṇi˚ jewelled image); ii.69 (assa˚ toy horse); Mvu 25, Mvu 26 (rāja˚); 27, 30 (devatā˚ shape of devas); Vv-a 213 -dūrūpaka of squalid appearance Ja ii.167; cp. durūpa.
fr. rupa
(f.) (being) shape(d), appearance; accordance, conformity, in phrase bhavya-rūpatāya “by appearance of likelihood” AN ii.191 (in hearsay formula, where it is missing in id. passage at Nd ii.151).
abstr. fr. rūpa
(nt.) lit. “form-hood,” i.e. shaping (being) shape(d) SN iii.87 (rūpaṃ rūpattāya sankhātaṃ).
abstr. fr. rūpa
(adj.) 1. having bodily form SN iii.16 & passim (in formula of sakkāya-diṭṭhi); Dhs 1003.
2. having the form of (-˚) Mvu 14, Mvu 3 (gokaṇṇa˚).
3. beautiful Mvu 10, Mvu 30 (f. rūpavatī).
rūpa + vant
(adj.) having shape; neg. a˚; formless Sdhp 236 (rūp’ ârūpika).
fr. rūpa
(adj.) 1. having material qualities, possessed of form or shape or body or matter, belonging to the realm of form. rūpī is nearly always combd contrasted with; arūpī formless, incorporeal (see rūpa D 2 a), cp. combn rūpī arūpī saññī asaññī nevasaññinâsaññī Nd ii.617 and similarly Iti 87 = Mil 217 ■ DN i.34 (attā dibbo rūpī), 77 (kāyo r. manomayo), 186 (attā etc.), 195 (attapaṭilābho r. manomayo); iii.111 139; MN ii.229; SN iii.46 (r. arūpī saññī etc.); iv.202, 402; AN ii.34; Nd i.97, Nd i.137; Pts ii.38 (rūpī rūpāni passati) Dhs 635, Dhs 1091, Dhs 1444; Vb 123, Vb 342 (read rūpī); Ne 28 (pañc’ indriyāni rūpīni), 69 (five rūpīni indriyāni & five arūpīni); DN-a i.119 (attā); Dhs-a 304 (rūpino dhammā) Vb-a 511 sq. (attā).
2. (-˚) having the appearance of, resembling: see rumma˚.
fr. rūpa
(nt.) silver Vin iii.239 (here collectively for any transactions in “specie,” as expld by C. p. 240: rūpiyaṃ nāma satthu-vaṇṇo kahāpaṇo lohamāsako dārumāsako jatumāsako; i.e. copper wood & lac); SN i.104 (suddhaṃ r.); ii.233; Dhs 584.
-maya made of silver Vin ii.112; SN iii.144 (sovaṇṇamaya + ); Pv ii.64 (where in sequence sovaṇṇa˚, maṇi˚ loha˚ r.; expld as “rajatamaya” Pv-a 95); Dhp-a i.29.
cp. Sk. rūpya, lit. of splendid appearance, cp. name for gold jātarūpa
see ruppa.
1. to put into shape, to make appear, to make grow (?) Snp-a 132, Snp-a 143 (v.l. ropeti).
2. to be formed, to appear, to come to notice in defn of rūpa at Vb-a 45: “rūpayatī ti rūpaṃ.”
Caus. Denom. fr. rūpa
awful, terrible Mil 275 (synonymous with bhīma).
doubtful spelling; perhaps for rūḷha, evidently identical with rudda, as Trenckner suggests in Notes 6319
1. grown Snp 20 (˚tiṇa).
2. (see rūhati) healed up Mil 291 (˚vaṇa one whose wound has healed): cp. rūhanā.
pp. of rohati; of ruh; Sk. rūḍha
at Mil 217 & 218 is a by-form of; ruddha, pp. of rundhati (rumbhati) to obstruct; thus meaning “obstructed, difficult” (of a road, together with lugga palugga). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls (as rūḷha1) by “overgrown.”
(f.) lit. ascent, growth see vi˚ ■ fig. what has grown by custom tradition, popular meaning of a word (˚sadda). The fig. meaning is the one usually found in Pāli, esp. in Abhidhamma and Commentary literature; e.g. rūḷhiyaṃ by tradition, usually, commonly, Vb-a 1 (as category with the 3 other: rāsi, guṇa, paṇṇatti) rūḷhito id. Vb-a 2; rūḷhiyā id. Snp-a 430; Pv-a 163; also rūḷhi-vasena Vv-a 42; or with sadda: rūḷhi-sadda usual meaning Vism 333; Dhs-a 205; ˚saddena in popular language, in ordinary speech, customarily, commonly speaking Tikp 253; Vism 310; DN-a i.239, DN-a i.294: Snp-a 135 Snp-a 400.
fr. rūḷha, pp. of rohati, cp. Sk. rūḍhi
1. to grow, spread Iti 67; Ja iv.408 (akkhīni rūhiṃsu; also ppr. med. ruyhamāna ) v.368; vi.360.
2. to heal (of a wound), close up Vin i.206 (vaṇo na rūhati);
3. to have effect in (loc.), to be effective Vin ii.203 = Iti 87 (vādo tamhi na rūhati) ■ pp. rūḷha2. See also rūhita (pp. of Caus rūheti = roheti).
the specific P. form of the usual Sk. P. rohati (q.v.). The root ruh is given at Dhtp 334 with meaning “janana” i.e. causing, which refers more to the compounds with prefixes
to be broken or (fig.) to be suspended Vin ii.55 (dhammattā rūhati the liability is cancelled) ■ pp. rūḷha1.
for rundh (rumbh, rudh) or Pass. rujjh˚; see also rumbhati & ropeti;2
(f.) 1. growth Ja ii.322 (virūhanā C.).
2. healing (of a wound) Mil 112.
cp. Sk. rohaṇa, fr. ruh: rūhati1
(nt.) a boil, a diseased growth (lit. “healed”) Vin iv.316 (expld as “yaṃ kiñci vaṇo” v.l. rudhita).
fr. rūhati1
(indecl.) a part. of exclamation, mostly implying contempt, or deprecation (DN-a i.276) “hīḷanavasena āmantanaṃ” i.e. address of disdain: heigh, go on, get away, hallo ■ DN i.96, DN i.107; Ja iii.184 (C. = āmantaṇe nipāto); often combd with similar particles of exhortation, like cara pi re get away with you! MN ii.108; Vin iv.139 (so read for cara pire which the C. takes as “ para, ” amamaka); or ehi re come on then! Ja i.225; ha re look out! here they are Pv-a 4; aho vata re wish I would! Pv ii.945 (re ti ālapanaṃ Pv-a 131); no ca vata re vattabbe but indeed good sir… (Kv 1).
shortened for are, q.v.
(f.) line, streak Abhp 539. See lekhā.
fr. rikh, for which the Pāli form is likh, cp. Sk. rekhā, Lat. rīma, Ohg. rīga row
(nt.) letting loose, emission Dhtm 610. Cp. vi˚.
fr. ric
1. dust; pl. reṇū particles of dust ■ Vin i.32 (˚hatā bhūmi); Vism 338 = Nd i.505 = Ja i.117 (rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati); Ja iv.362 (okiṇṇā raja-reṇūhi; C. expls by “paṃsūhi”); Mil 274 (pl.) Snp-a 132 (reṇuṃ vūpasāmeti allays).
2. pollen (in this meaning found only in the so-called Jātaka-style Ja i.233 (mahā-tumba-matta), 349 (pupphato reṇuṃ gaṇhāti); iii.320; v.39 (puppha˚); vi.530 (padumakinjakkha˚); Dhp-a iv.203 (˚vaṭṭhi).
cp. Vedic reṇu
“elephant’s tooth,” ivory Ja ii.230 (= hatthi-danta C.).
etym.? Probably dialectical
illness, disease ■ The defn of roga at Ja ii.437 is “roga rujana-sabhāvattaṃ.” There are many diff enumerations of rogas and sets of standard combns, of which the foll. may be mentioned. At sn 311 (cp DN iii.75) it is said that in old times there were only 3 diseases, viz. icchā, anasanaṃ, jarā, which gradually through slaughtering of animals, increased to 98 Bdhgh at Snp-a 324 hints at these 98 with “cakkhu-rog adinā-bhedena.” Beginning with this (cakkhuroga affection of the eye) we have a list of 34 rogas at Nd i.13 (under pākaṭa-parissayā or open dangers = Nd i.360 Nd ii.420) & Nd;2 3041 B, viz. cakkhu˚ & the other 4 senses, sīsa˚, kaṇṇa˚, mukha˚, danta˚; kāsa, sāsa pināsa, ḍāha, jara; kucchiroga, mucchā, pakkhandikā sūlā, visūcikā; kuṭṭhaṃ, gaṇḍo, kilāso, soso, apamāro daddu, kaṇḍu, kacchu, rakhasā, vitacchikā, lohita pittaṃ, madhumeho, aṃsā, piḷakā, bhagandalā. This list is followed by list of 10 ābādhas & under “dukkha goes on with var. other “ills,” which however do not make up the number 98. The same list is found at AN v.110. The 10 ābādhas (Nd ii.3041 C.) occur at AN ii.87 & Mil 308 (as āgantuka-rogā). The 4 “rogas of the Sun (miln 273, cp. Vin ii.295) are: abbha, mahikā megha, Rāhu ■ Another mention of roga together with plagues which attack the corn in the field is given at Ja v.401, viz. visa-vāta; mūsika-salabha-suka-pāṇaka setaṭṭhika-roga etc., i.e. hurtful winds, mice, moths parrots, mildew ■ The comb;n roga, gaṇḍa, salla is sometimes found, e.g. MN ii.230; Vism 335. Of other single rogas we mention: kucchi˚ (stomach-ache) Ja i.243 ahivātaka˚ Vin i.78; Ja ii.79; Ja iv.200; Dhp-a i.231 paṇḍu˚ jaundice Vin i.206; Ja ii.102; Dhp-a i.25; tiṇapupphaka˚ hay-fever Mil 216 ■ See also ātaṅka ābādha;. On roga in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 130. DN i.11, DN i.73; DN iii.182; SN iii.32; SN iv.64; AN ii.128, AN ii.142 sq. AN iv.289,; Nd i.486; Vism 236 (as cause of death), 512 (in simile); Vb-a 88 (in sim. of dukkha etc.); Thag-a 288; Vv-a 6 (rogena phuṭṭha), 75 (sarīre r. uppajji); Pv-a 86 (kacchu˚), 212 (rogena abhibhūta) ■ Opp. aroga health: see sep.
-ātaṅka affliction by illness AN ii.174 sq.; AN v.169, AN v.318 -niḍḍha the nest or seat of disease Dhp 148 (cp. Dhp-a iii.110); as ˚nīḷa at Iti 37. -mūla the root of disease Snp 530. -vyasana distress or misfortune of disease DN iii.235 (one of the 5 vyasanāni: ñāti˚, bhoga˚, roga˚ sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚); Mil 196 (id.).
Vedic roga: ruj (see rujati), cp. Sk. rujā breakage, illness
(adj.) having a disease, suffering from (-˚); one who has a disease Vism 194 (ussanna-vyādhi dukkhassa); Sdhp 86 ■ paṇḍu˚; one who has the jaundice Ja ii.285; Ja iii.401.
fr roga
1. to please, i.e. it pleases (with dat. of person) Thig 415 (rocate); Mvu 15, Mvu 9 (nivāso rocatu). Cp. BSk. rocyate Avs ii.158.
2. to find pleasure in (loc.) Mil 338 (bhave) ■ Caus. roceti: 1. to be pleased, to give one’s consent Dhp-a i.387 (gloss K rucitha ruceyyātha). 2. (with acc. of object) to find pleasing, to find delight in, to be attached to, to approve of, to choose SN i.41 (vadhaṃ); Ja i.142 (Devadattassa laddhiṃ r.); v.178 (pabbajjaṃ roc’ ahaṃ = rocemi C.), 226 (kammaṃ). Freq. with dhammaṃ to approve of a doctrine or scheme e.g. at Vin ii.199 (Devadattassa dhammaṃ); SN i.133; Snp 94 (asataṃ dh.), 398 (dhammaṃ imaṃ rocaye) Ja iv.53 (dh. asataṃ na rocayāma) ■ Cp. abhi˚, ā˚, vi˚.
Vedic rocate, ruc, Idg. *leuq, as in Lat. luceo to be bright (cp. lūx light, lūmen, lūna etc.); Sk. rocana splendid, ruci light, roka & rukṣa light; Av. raocantshining; Gr. αμφι λύκη twi-light, λευκός white; also with 1: Sk. loka world, locate to perceive, locana eye Lith. laukti to await; Goth. liuhap light = Ohg. lioht E. light; Oir lōche lightning ■ The Dhtp (& Dhtm gives 2 roots; ruc, viz. the one with meaning “ ditti (Dhtp 37), the other as “ rocana ” (Dhtp 395), both signifying “light” or “splendour,” but the second probably to be taken in sense of “pleasing”
see ruṇṇa.
see rudati.
(nt.) crying, weeping Dhp-a i.28; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 64; Dhtp 144.
fr. rud
obstruction, stopping, in cpd. parapāṇa˚; stopping the life of somebody else; life-slaughter murder Snp 220; Ja ii.450. Cp. anu˚, ni˚, vi˚.
fr. rudh
(nt.) bank, dam AN iii.128 (where id. p. at AN i.154 reads gedha, cave; v.l. also gedha, cp. v.l. rodhi˚ for gedhi˚ at Nd ii.585).
fr. rudh
(nt.) obstructing Ja v.346; Sdhp 57.
fr. rudh
(-˚) plantation; in vana˚ & ārāma˚; SN i.33.
fr. rop = Caus. of ruh
sapling Ja ii.346 (rukkha˚).
ropa + ka
(nt.) & ropanā (f.) 1. planting Pv-a 151 (ārāma˚); Mvu 15, Mvu 41.
2. healing SN iv.177 (vaṇa˚)
3. furthering, making grow Pts ii.115 (buddhi˚). 4. (f.) accusation Vin iv.36.
fr. ropeti1
(adj.) (-˚) to be healed, only in cpd. du˚; hard to heal (of a wound) Vin i.216 (vaṇa).
for *ropya, fr. ropeti1
see ropeti1.
1. planted Pv ii.78.
2. growing up Pv 970 (read “pi ropitaṃ” for viropitaṃ).
3. furnished with, powdered with (-˚) Vv 6415 (Ed. vosita Vv-a 280 expls by ullitta, vicchurita).
4. accused brought forward (of a charge) Vin iv.36.
pp. of ropeti1
(nt.) 1. what has been planted Vin iv.267.
2. a kind of arrow MN i.429 (contrasted with kaccha; Neumann trsls ropima by “aus Binsen”). 3. (adj.) at Vv 4413 aropima (“not planted”?) is an attribute of trees. It is not expld in Vv-a.
fr. ropeti1
1. to plant or sow Ja i.150 (nivāpatiṇaṃ); Mvu 15, Mvu 42 (amb’ aṭṭhikaṃ); 19, 56; Dhp-a ii.109.
2. to put up, fix Ja i.143 (sūlāni).
3. to further, increase, make grow Snp 208 (Pot. ropayeyya)
4. (fig.) to fix, direct towards, bring up against: see ropeti2 2 ■ pp. ropita. Caus. II. ropāpeti to cause to be planted DN ii.179; Ja vi.333; Mvu 34, Mvu 40; Dhp-a ii.109-Cp. abhi˚, abhini˚, ā˚.
Caus. of rūhati1
1.to cause to break off, to cause to suspend or cancel; to pass off refuse Vin ii.261 (bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnaṃ kammaṃ ropetvā bhikkhunīnaṃ niyyādetuṃ, i.e. by the bhikkhus is an act of the nuns to be passed off and to be referred to the nuns).
2. to make confess or accuse of (acc. āpattiṃ a guilt) Vin ii.2 (first codeti, then sāreti, then ropeti & lastly (sanghaṃ) ñāpeti), 85 (id.); iv.36, (aññavādakaṃ ropeti to bring the charge of heresy against someone). No. 2 perhaps better to ropeti1. Cp. Vin Texts ii.334 ■ To ropeti2 belong the cpds. oropeti (cut off) & voropeti (deprive). They are better to be taken here than to ava + ; ruh.
Caus. of rūhati2. See lumpati
(nt.) the hair of the body Ja v.430 (where in roma-rājiyā maṇḍita-udarā as expln of loma-sundarī); Sdhp 119 (˚kūpa),
Vedic roman; the usual P. form is loma (q.v.)
(adj.) feathered (?) Ja ii.383 (C. wrong!).
fr. roma
(?) hairy (?) Dāvs v.14 (˚kancuka).
fr. roma, cp. Vedic romaśa
(adj.) chewing the cud, ruminating Vin ii.132.
fr. romanthati
to chew the cud, to ruminate Vin ii.132 (˚ati); Ja iv.392 (˚eti).
to romantha; cp. Lat. rumen & ruminare = E. ruminate
(nt.) ruminating Vin ii.321.
fr. romanthati
1. a sort of hart (i.e. ruru) MN i.429.
2. Name of a naraka (purgatory): see Dictionary of Names. E.g Ja iii.299; Dāvs iii.12; Sdhp 195. Cp. BSk. raurava Divy 67.
fr. ru, cp. Sk. raurava, Name of a purgatory
1. anger, angry feeling MN i.360.
2. quarrel Ja iv.316.
cp. Sk. roṣa, of ruṣ
(adj.) angry, wrathful SN i.85, SN i.96; Snp 133; Vv 528 (= paresaṃ ros uppādanena r. Vv-a 226); Ja ii.270.
fr. rosa; cp. BSk. roṣaka Divy 38
(f.) making angry, causing anger, being angry Vb 86 (hiṃsanā + ), expld at Vb-a 75 by ghaṭṭanā. Cp. BSk. roṣaṇī Avs i.178.
abstr. fr. rosati
(adj.) apt to be angry or cause anger; neg. a˚ not to be angered, not irritable Snp 216.
grd. formation fr. rosa
smeared (with) anointed Ja iv.440 (= vilitta C.).
pp. of rus, to smear: Sk. rūṣita; given as root rus at Dhtm 442 with meaning “ālepa”
to make angry, to annoy, to irritate SN i.162; AN ii.215 (so read for rosati) iii.38; Snp 125, Snp 130, Snp 216; Ja i.432; Ja iv.491.
Caus. of rosati, ruṣ; see rusita
(adj.) red Ja v.259 (rohaññā pungav’ūsabhā; C. expls by ratta-vaṇṇā). Kern Toev. s. v. proposes rohiñño = *rohiṇyah, (cp. pokkharaṇī for ˚iṇī) red cows.
fr. roha = rohita
: for the Sk. rohati of ruh to grow we find the regular P. correspondent rūhati: see rūhati1. The Caus. of this verb is ropeti (to make grow): see ropeti-Another root, restricted to the Pāli, is seen in rūhati2 (with pp. rūḷha) and is equal to rundh (rudh rumbh) to break. The Caus. of this root (ropeti2 is either an indirect formation from it or (more likely) a direct representative of rup = lup as in P lumpati. To the latter belong the prep. cpds. oropeti & voropeti.;
a kind of deer Ja vi.537 (˚sarabhā migā).
fr. rohita, perhaps directly fr. Vedic rohita ewe, lit. the red one
(f.) 1. a red cow AN i.162 = AN iii.214.
2. Name of a nakkhatta or constellation (“red cow”) Snp-a 456; Mvu 19, Mvu 47.
3. Name of a river Snp-a 357.
cp. Vedic rohiṇī red cow or mare
(adj.) red, as attribute of fishes at Ja v.405 (i.e. a special kind of fish), and of deer at Ja v.406 in same passage (i.e. a special kind of deer). Otherwise only in standing term rohita-maccha the “red fish,” viz. Cyprinus Rohita, which is freq. mentioned in the “Jātaka literature, e.g. Ja ii.433; Ja iii.333; Dhp-a ii.132 (four) 140; Kp-a 118.
L.
Vedic rohita; cp. the usual P. word lohita red & blood. See also rudhira & ruhira
syllable of abbreviation, corresponding to our “etc.”: see peyyāla. Lak-atthika
at Vv-a 222 is doubtful; aṭṭhika means “kernel,” lak˚; may be a misspelling for labujak˚ (?).
(nt.?) ship’s anchor (nāvā˚ Mil 377 (v.l. lagganaka), 378.
fr. lag, with k for g, as lakuṭa: laguḷa etc. Would correspond to Sk. *lagnaka, cp. Trenckner Notes 62; Geiger, P.Gr. § 391
a sail Ja ii.112; Mil 378; Dāvs iv.42; Vism 137 (v.l. BB. lankāra).
for alankāra, lit. “fitting up,” cp. Hindī & Marāthī langara, Tamil ilankaran “in meaning anchor.”
a club, cudgel Mil 255 (in sequence daṇḍa-leḍḍu-lakuṭa-muggara), 301, 367, 368 See also laguḷa.
see laguḷa for etym.
a dwarf Mvu 23, Mvu 50 (˚sarīratta); Vb-a 26 (˚pāda-purisa, cpd. with arūpa); PugA 227; C. on SN i.237.
dialectical
(nt.) dwarfishness Ja vi.337.
fr. lakuṇṭaka
to hold fast (lit. to make adhere) Mil 377.
for laggeti, see lakanaka
(nt.) 1. a mark Mil 102.
2. a target Mil 418; Dhp-a i.52 (˚yoggā target practice, i.e. shooting).
3. a stake at gambling Ja vi.271.
4. a high numeral, a lac or 100,000 (but cp. Pv-a 255, where lakkha of Pv iv.338 is taken as a “period of time,” equal to 100 koṭis); Dāvs v.66.
fr. lakṣ (see lakkhaṇa), or (after Grassmann) lag “to fix,” i.e. to mark. Cp. Vedic lakṣa price at gambling (Zimmer, Altind. Leben 287)
(adj.) connected with auspices, auspicious, in phrase “lakkhaññā vata bho dosinā ratti” (how grand a sign friends, is the moonlight night! trsln) DN i.47 = Ja i.509 (expld at DN-a i.141 as “divasa-mās’-ādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttā”); Ja v.370 (˚sammata considered auspicious).
fr. lakkhaṇa, cp. BSk. lakṣaṇya diviner Divy 474
(nt.) 1. sign, characteristic mark; esp. a sign as implying something extraordinary or pointing to the future, therefore a prognosticative mark (cp. talisman), a distinguishing mark or salient feature, property, quality (as Rh. D. in Dial. i.19 somewhat lengthily, after Bdhgh, trsls lakkhaṇa by “signs of good & bad qualities in the foll. things and of the marks in them denoting the health or luck of their owners”) DN i.9 (a long list, as forbidden practice of fortune-telling, like maṇi˚ from jewels, daṇḍa˚ from
sticks, asi˚ from marks on swords etc.); Snp 360 (pl lakkhanā, here as fortune-telling together with supina telling fr. dreams, cp. Snp-a 362: daṇḍa˚, vattha˚ etc referring to DN i.9), 927 (with Āthabbana, supina nakkhatta, all kinds of secret sciences; expld at Snp-a 564 as “maṇi-lakkhaṇâdi”) 1018 (gottaṃ brūhi sa “with its distinguishing marks”); Ja vi.364 (sign of beauty); Mil 171 (yathāva˚ just characterization) Mvu 35, Mvu 109 (itthi˚ auspicious signs in women); Pv-a 161, Pv-a 219; Snp-a 386. A long enumn of all sorts of (perfect) marks (tatha-lakkhaṇāni) is found at DN-a i.62 sq. Cp. tādi-lakkhaṇa marks of such (a being) with ref. to good luck etc. Ja iii.98; Snp-a 200; Vv-a 95–2. mark on the body, esp. when serving a def purpose, e.g. as the branding (of slaves), or the marks of a fortunate being, pointing towards his future greatness: (a) brand Ja i.451, cp. cpd. ˚āhata ■ (b) the (32 marks of a mahā-purisa or a great being, either destined to be a rājā cakkavatti, or a sammā-sambuddha. These are given at Snp 1019 (pl. lakkhanā), 1021, 1022 as only 3 (viz. mukhaṃ jivhāya chādeti, uṇṇ’ assa bhamuk antare, kos’ ohitaṃ vattha-guyhaṃ with ref. to his tongue, the hair between the eyebrows & the sexual organ); more completely as 32 at DN ii.16 sq.; DN iii.142 sq (the Lakkhaṇa Suttanta); referred to at DN i.88, DN i.105; Ja i.56; Mvu 5, Mvu 91; cp. paripuṇṇa-kāya Snp 548 (with expln lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya at Snp-a 452).
3. (in spec. sense:) pudendum Ja v.197 (subha˚, the male member), 366.
4. (adj.) (-˚) having the marks (of) characterized by, of such & such character AN i.102 (kamma˚; bāla˚ & paṇḍita˚, together with bāla-paṇḍitanimitta); Mil 111 (sata-puñña˚, of the Buddha); Vv-a 71 (para-sampatti-usuyyā-lakkhaṇā issā); Pv-a 17, Pv-a 120.
5. (as t. t. in philosophy specific attribute, characteristic (mark). In contrast to nimitta more a substantial attribute or primary characteristic (cp. Vb-a 261). Compared with other terms of definition we get the foll.: rasa essential property, paccupaṭṭhāna recurring phenomenon, padatṭhāna immediate occasion Dhs-a 63 (trslnExpos. i.84) cp. Cpd. 13 (where padaṭṭhāna is trsld as “proximate cause”) ■ Pts i.54 sq. (khandhānaṃ); ii.108 (saccānaṃ) Vb-a 85, Vb-a 136 (with ref. to the Paṭiccasamuppāda, cp Vism 528), 261 (fourfold, of kesā etc.); Vism 278 (with ref. to kammaṭṭhāna) 351 (4, of the dhātus: thaddha˚ ābandhana˚, paripācana˚, vitthambhana˚), 363 sq (id.), 495 (ariya-saccānaṃ); Vv-a 38 (compd with ārammaṇa with ref. to jhāna) ■ The 3 properties (tilakkhaṇaṃ) of existing things or of the phenomenal world are anicca, dukkha, anatta, or impermanence, suffering unreality: thus at Ja i.48 (dhamma-desanā ti-l-˚muttā) 275; iii.377 (through contemplating them arises vipassanā & pacceka-bodhi-ñāṇa) ■ abl.; lakkhaṇato “by or qua characteristic,” “in its essential qualification,” often found in exegetical analysis in Commentary style combd with var. similar terms (atthato, kamato, nimittato etc.), e.g. Vism 351, Vism 363, Vism 495, Vism 528; Vb-a 46 Vb-a 76, Vb-a 83, Vb-a 131, Vb-a 261 (where Vism 351 has paripācana for uṇhatta); Snp-a 343 ■ Cp. upa˚, vi˚, sa˚.
-āhata affected with a mark (of punishment or disgrace), branded Vin i.76; Vv-a 66. -kusala clever at interpreting bodily marks or at fortune-telling from signs (cp. nemittaka) MN i.220; Ja i.272. -kusalatā cleverness at (telling people’s fortune by) signs Vv-a 138. -paṭiggāhaka one who reads the signs, a soothsayer wise man Ja i.56. -pāṭhaka an expert in (interpreting) signs, fortune-teller Ja i.455; Ja ii.194; Ja v.211 -manta the secret science of (bodily) marks Snp 690 (but expld at Snp-a 488 as “lakkhaṇāni ca vedā ca,” thus taking it as Dvandva); Dhp-a iii.194. -sampatti excellency of marks Ja i.54. -sampanna endowed with (auspicious) signs Snp 409; Ja i.455.
the 3 lakkhaṇas at Snp 1022 refer to the brahmin Bāvari. Lakkhika & ya;
Vedic lakṣman nt. sign; adj. lakṣmaṇa; later Sk. lakṣmaṇa nt. In the defn of grammarians syn with aṅka brand, e.g. Dhtp 536 “anka lakkhaṇe lakkha dassane,” or Dhtm 748 “lakkha = dassanaanke”; cp. Ja i.451 lakkhaṇena anketi to brand. The Sk. Np. Lakṣmaṇa appears also in Prk. as Lakkhaṇa: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 312
(adj.) belonging to auspices, favoured by good luck Sdhp 105 (˚ya); usually neg alakkhika unlucky, unfortunate, ill-fated; either with appa-puñña of no merit, e.g. SN v.146 = Ja ii.59; Vv 508 (= nissirīka, kālakaṇṇi Vv-a 212); or pāpa wicked Vin ii.192 (of Devadatta).
fr. lakkhī
see abhi˚.
pp. of lakkheti
(f.) 1. luck, good fortune, success, personal welfare Ja iii.443 (combd with sirī splendour expld by parivāra-sampatti & paññā respectively) iv.281 (expld as “sirī pi puññam pi paññā pi”). 2. splendour, power Dāvs i.6 (rajja˚ royal splendour) iv.38 (id.).
3. prosperity Dāvs v.35 (˚nidhāna Anurādhapura).
Sk. lakṣmī
to mark, distinguish, characterize Ne 30 ■ pp. lakkhita ■ Cp. upa˚.
Denom. fr. lakkha
to adhere to, stick (fast) to (loc.), to hang from Vin i.202; Ja iii.120; Dhp-a i.131; Dhp-a iii.298 (ppr. alaggamāna); DN-a i.257 (for abhisajjati); aor. laggi Pv-a 153 (tīre); ger laggitva Ja iii.19; Dhp-a iv.25; Pv-a 280 (but better to be read laggetvā making fast; as v.l.) ■ pp. lagga & laggita; -Caus. laggeti to make stick to, to fasten, tie, hang up Vin i.209; Vin ii.117, Vin ii.152; Ja iii.107; Ja v.164, Ja v.175; Mvu 7, Mvu 9 (suttañ ca tesaṃ hatthesu laggetvā); Dhp-a i.138. Caus. II. laggāpeti to cause to fasten or stick, to make stick, to obstruct Ja iii.241; Mvu 33, Mvu 11; Mvu 34, Mvu 48 (kalāpaṃ); Dhp-a iv.183 ■ Cp. ālaggeti.
with variant langati; the spelling with gg is the usual one. Root lag, as in Vedic lakṣa etc. Sk. lagati, pp. lagna (from the pp. lagga the double g has been generalized in P.: but see Geiger, P.Gr. § 136) perhaps to Lat. langueo, E. languid, from meaning “to lag,” but doubtful: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. langueo. The Dhtp 23 gives lag in meaning “sanga,” which is the customary syn. in the commentaries. Cp. langī
(nt.) 1. adhering Ja i.46 (g.; v.281); with gg: Ja iii.202 (= sanga); Nd ii.p. 188 (s. v nissita, in sequence l., bandhana, palibodha); Mil 105; Dhp-a iii.433.
2. slinging round, making fast Vv-a 212.
fr. lag
a club, cudgel Vin iii.77 (enumd with var. weapons of murder, like asi, satti, bheṇḍi pāsāṇa etc.); Mil 152, Mil 351 (kodaṇḍa-laguḷa-muggara) 355 (kilesa˚); Ja vi.394; Vism 525 (˚abhighāta).
cp. Sk. laguḍa, Marāthī lākūḍa, Hindī lakuṭa stick. The word is really a dialect word (Prk.) and as such taken into Sk. where it ought to be *lakṛta = lakuṭa Other etym. connections are Lat. lacertus (arm), Gr. λέκρανα, λάς; Old Prussian alkunis elbow; and distantly related E. leg. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lacertus Cp. P. bhuja1 & ratana
(adj.) sticking; stuck, attached; obstructed, hindered Nd ii.107; Mil 346 (laggaṃ disvā mahiṃ); Dhs-a 127 (alagga-bhāva); Dhp-a i.361 (˚mānasa) Neg. alagga unobstructed (lit. not sticking or being stuck to), in phrase ākāso alaggo asatto apatiṭṭhito apalibuddho Mil 388 and elsewhere ■ Cp. olagga.
pp. of lag(g)ati
(nt.) making stick, causing obstruction Ja iii.241.
fr. laggāpeti: see lagati
stuck, adhering; obstructed Ja iv.11. Often in exegetical style in sequence lagga laggita, palibuddha, e.g. Nd ii.p. 188 (s. v. nissita) cp. No. 107.
pp. of lag(g)ati
(langhima) in phrase aṇima-laghim’ ādikaṃ is doubtful in reading & meaning at Kp-a 108 = Vism 211 (spelt langh˚ here).;
see lakāra.
(f.) bolt, bar, barrier, obstruction, only metaphorically with ref. to avijjā MN i.142, MN i.144; Pp 21; Dhs 390; Vb-a 141.
fr. lag
(nt.) the tail of an animal Mvu 6, Mvu 6 (lāḷento langulaṃ; v.l. nangulaṃ) See also naṅgula & (concerning l → n); landhati (= nandhati); nalāṭa (for laḷāta).
cp. Sk. lāngula & lāngūla; also the ordinary P. forms nangula & nanguṭṭha, to; lag
a jumper, tumbler, acrobat Ja ii.142; Mil 34, Mil 191, Mil 331. f. laṅghikā Vin iv.285 (with naṭakā & sokajjhāyikā).;
fr. laṅgh
1. to jump over (acc.) step over, to hop Ja iii.272; Ja v.472 (langhamāno yāti); Mil 85.
2. to make light of, disregard neglect, transgress Pv-a 15; Vv-a 138 ■ Cp. abhilaṅghati, ullaṅghati ■ Caus. laṅgheti (= laṅghati) to jump over (acc.), lit. to make jump Ja v.472 (vatiṃ) Thig 384 (Meruṃ langhetuṃ icchasi); Mil 85 ■ ger laṅghayitvā Thag-a 255, & (poet.); laṅghayitvāna Ja i.431 (= attānaṃ langhitvā C.); Mvu 25, Mvu 44 (pākāraṃ). Cp. olaṅgheti.
laṅgh, a by-form of lagh, as in laghu (see lahu) light, quick; Idg. *legh & *leṅgh;, with meanings of both “quick” & “light” (or “little”) from the movement of jumping. Here belong Gr. ελαξύς little ἐλαφρός quick; Lat. levis (fr. *leghṷis), Goth. leihto E. light; Ohg. lungar quick, Ger. ge-lingen to succeed Further Lat. limen threshold. Perhaps also the words for “lungs,” viz. Ger. lunge, E. lights etc ■ The Dhtp 33 defines lagh (laṅgh) by “gati-sosanesu”
(nt.) jumping, hopping Ja i.430 (˚naṭaka a tumbler, jumper, acrobat, cp. Fick, Soc Gliederung 188, 190, 192); ii.363, 431. Cp. ullaṅghanā olaṅghanā.
fr. laṅgh
(pl.) at Ja v.408 is problematic. We should expect something like laṅghiyo or laṅghimayā in meaning “deer,” as it is combd with eneyyaka. The C. reads laṅghimayā (“like deer; jumping”?) & expl;s by nānā-ratana-mayā “made of var. jewels,” rather strange.
(nt.) making jump, raising, lifting Vism 143 (“launching”). Langhi (Langhi)
fr. Caus. of laṅgh
(f.) 1. a kind of deer (?) Ja vi.537.
2. doubtful of meaning & origin in phrase; laṅghī-pitāmahā at Ja ii.363 = Ja iii.226: “whose grandfather was a deer, or a jumper” (?); used in disparagingly addressing a crane. The C. to Ja ii.363 expls rather strangely as follows: laṅghī vuccati ākāse langhanato megho “(a) jumping deer is called the cloud because of its jumping in the air,” balākā ca nāma megha-saddena gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī ti “the cranes conceive by the sound of the cloud,” meghasaddo balākānaṃ pitā megho pitāmaho ti “the sound of the cloud is the father of the cranes & the cloud the grandfather ”
fr. laṅgh
1. to be ashamed or abashed, to be modest or bashful Pv-a 48 (for harāyati) ppr. lajjamāna Dhp-a i.188; Pv-a 88; fut. lajjissati Ja iii.218; inf. lajjituṃ Dhp-a i.72; ger. lajjitvā Ja i.208 grd. lajjitabba (nt.) what one has to be ashamed of something disgraceful Ja vi.395; also (an odd form lajjitāya (so read: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 203 against Trenckner, Notes, 6627) Dhp 316.
2. to have regard of (gen.), to consider, to respect Ja iv.128 ■ Caus. II lajjāpeti to cause to be ashamed, to put to the blush Ja iii.137; Ja v.296 ■ pp. lajjita.
lajj; Dhtp 72: lajjane
(nt.) being ashamed Dhtp 72.
fr. lajj
(nt.) causing shame, humiliating, disgraceful Ja vi.395.
fr. lajjana
(nt.) shamefacedness DN iii.213 (where Dhs 1340 has maddava); cp. AN i.94.
fr. lajj
(f.) shame, bashfulness, modesty MN i.414; DN-a i.70; Dhp-a ii.90; instr. lajjāya out of shame Pv-a 47, Pv-a 112, Pv-a 283. Cp. nillajja.
fr. lajj
(f.) making ashamed, putting to shame, disgracing Ja v.284 (kula bringing disgrace on the clan).
fr. lajjāpeti, Caus. II. of lajjati
ashamed, bashful Sdhp 35 ■ f. lajjitā as n. abstr. “bashfulness” Dhp-a i.188.
pp. of lajjati
(nt.) something to be ashamed of, a cause of shame, disgrace Ja vi.395.
grd. of lajjati + ka
(adj.) feeling shame, modest, afraid, shy, conscientious (expld as “one who has hiri & ottappa; by C. on SN i.73: see K.S. 320 & cp.; Dhs. trstln p. 18; DN i.4, DN i.63; DN iii.15; SN i.73; AN ii.208; AN iv.249 sq.; Pp 57; Pv ii.915 (expld as one who is afraid of sin); Mil 373; DN-a i.70 ■ pl. lajjino Vin i.44.
-dhamma (lajji˚) modesty, feeling of shame Vin ii.53 sq.
fr. lajj
fut. of labhati (q.v.).
a present, a bribe Ja i.201; Ja ii.186; Ja v.184; Ja vi.408 (gahita, bribes received); Dhp-a i.269 (˚ṃ adāsi); iv.1; Pv-a 209. The word is a word peculiar to the “Jātaka” literature.
-khādaka “eater of bribes,” one who feeds on bribes Ja ii.196; Ja v.1. -ggāha taking of bribes Ja v.109. -daṇḍaka a staff given as a present (?) Ja vi.450 (v.l. volañjanaka˚). -dāna gift of bribes, bribery Ja iii.205 -vittaka one who gets rich through bribes Ja i.339.
cp. Sk. lañca
: Hardy in ed. of Netti, p. 278 suggests writing lañjaka & trsl;d “making known,” “exposition” (cp Sk. lañj to declare], found only at Mil 137 & 217 in cpd. Saṃyutta-nikāya-vara-lañcaka (trl;n Rh. D. “most excellent”); at Mil 242 & 258 in Majjhimanikāya vara˚; at Mil 362 in Ekuttara-nikāya-vara˚ and at Ne 2 in cpd. nayalañjaka. Trenckner (Mil ed. p. 424) translates it as “excellent gift (to mankind).”
in “kārāpesi tilañcanaṃ ” at Dpvs 20, 10 is not clear. We may have to correct reading into lañchanaṃ or lañchakaṃ. Oldenberg in his trsln (p. 211) leaves the word out and remarks: “Probably this passage refers to the three pupphayāna mentioned in the Mahāvaṃsa (33, 22, where Geiger reads “pupphādhānāni tīṇi, with trsln “3 stone terraces for offerings of flowers”) though I do not know how to explain or to correct the word used here (tilañcanaṃ).”
a mark, an imprint Ja ii.425; Vb-a 52.
fr. lañch
one who makes marks (expld by Cy. as “lakkhaṇa-kāraka”) Ja iv.364, Ja iv.366 (ti˚ so expld by Cy. v.l. ni˚). See nillañchaka & cp; lañcana (ti˚).
fr. lañcha; doubtful
to stamp, to seal Dhp-a i.35 (sāsanaṃ rāja-muddāya lañchanto) ■ Caus lañcheti.
1. to seal Ja i.452 (spelt lañjetvā); ii.326 vi.385; Snp-a 577 (rāja-muddikāya); Dhp-a i.21.
2. to mark, paint, smear Vin ii.107 = Vin ii.266 (mukhaṃ). Caus. II. lañchāpeti to have marked or sealed (by king’s command) Vism 38 (“had his seal put to this order”; trsl.) ■ Cp. nillaccheti.
lañch Dhtp 54 “lakkhaṇe”
(nt.) 1. stamp, mark, imprint Vv-a 89 (sasa˚, of the moon); Dāvs ii.23 (pada˚).
2. the seal (of a letter or edict) Snp-a 172 ■ Cp. lañcana.
fr. lañch
sealed Ja i.227 (pihita-lañchitā vā loha-cātiyo).
pp. of lañcheti
in dīpa˚; stands as equivalent of dīpavaṃsa thus “story of the island” Dpvs 18, 2 Oldenberg (trsln p. 204) translates “the island of Lankā.”
see lañcaka
see lañchati and valañjeti.
(f.) the Indian quail, Perdix chinensis DN i.91; MN i.449 (l. sakuṇikā); Ja iii.44 Ja iii.174 sq. (quoted at Snp-a 358 & Dhp-a i.55); v.121; Mil 202; DN-a i.257 ■ Cp. Cunningham, Bharhut Tope, p. 58.
Dimin. fr. laṭvāka; dial.
(adj.) beautiful, auspicious, lovely Ja iii.464 Ja iii.493; Ja iv.1, Ja iv.477; DN-a i.284.
Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Sk. laṭaha, laḍaha, dialectical
(f.) 1. a staff, stick DN i.105 (patoda goad), 126 (id.); Vv-a 64 (id.); Ja iv.310 (laṭṭhī hata laṭṭhiyā hata G.); v.280; Mil 27.
2. stick of sugar cane (ucchu˚) Pv-a 257.
3. sprout of a plant, offshoot Ja iii.161 (in simile); usually -˚, as in aṅga˚; sprout Thag-a 226; dālika˚; of the d. creeper Thig 297; beḷuva˚; of the Vilva tree Kp-a 118; sala˚; of the Sal tree AN ii.200 Found also in names of places, as Laṭṭhivana (Ja i.83 etc.).
-madhu(ka) “cane-honey,” i.e. liquorice Ja iv.537; Dhp-a iv.171 (˚ka).
Sk. yaṣṭi, with l for y; also in Prk. see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 255 & cp. Geiger,; P. Gr. § 462. The doublet yaṭṭhi also in Pāli
(f.) = laṭṭhi, only in Npl. as-˚ (cp. laṭṭhi 3), e.g. Amba˚; the grove of mango sprouts DN-a i.41.
(nt.) [cp. Sk. laṇḍa (dial.). The Dhtm under No. 155 gives a root laḍ in meaning “jigucchana,” i.e. disgust excrement, dung of animals, dirt; mostly used with ref to elephants (haṭṭhi˚), e.g. at Ja ii.19; Dhp-a i.163, Dhp-a i.192 Dhp-a iv.156 (here also as assa˚; horse dung.) Cp. laṇḍikā.
(f.), only in aja˚; goat’s dirt, pellet of goat’s dung Ja i.419; Pv-a 283.
fr. laṇḍa
(f.) 1. a slender tree, a creeping plant creeper AN i.202 (māluvā˚); Vv 355 (= vallī Vv-a 162) 474 (kosātakī l.); Ja i.464 (rukkha˚, here perhaps better “branch”); Dhp-a i.392 (˚pasādhana: see under mahā˚) Mil 253, Mil 351; Vv-a 12 (kappa˚); Pv-a 51, Pv-a 121; Vism 183 (where the foll. kinds are given: lābu, kumbhaṇḍī sāmā, kāḷavallī, pūtilatā) ■ nāga˚; the iron wood tree see under nāga; pūti˚; a sort of creeper (q.v.). On latā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 130.
2. (fig.) an epithet of taṇhā (greed), as much as it strangles its victim Dhs 1059, Dhs 1136; Ne 24, Ne 121.
3. (fig.) streak flash, in vijjul-latā flash of lightning Ja i.103.
-kamma creeper-work (combd with mālā-kamma Vin ii.117, Vin ii.152.
cp. Sk. latā, connected with Lat. lentus flexible; Ohg. lindi soft, E. lithe; also Ohg. lintea lime tree; Gr. ἐλάτη fir tree
(having) obtained, taken, received Snp 106, Snp 239; Ja v.171; Mvu 5, Mvu 133 (kiñci laddhaṃ); 10 37 (kaññā laddhā); Pv-a 5 ■ laddhatvaṃ at Ja iv.406 is to be corrected to uddhatvā ■ Cp. upa˚, pa˚.
-adhippāya one who obtains his wishes Nd ii.542 -assāsa getting one’s breath again, coming to (out of a swoon) Ja iv.126. -upasampada one who has obtained ordination Pv-a 54. -jaya victorious Mvu 25, Mvu 98 -jīvika revived Pv-a 40. -nāma so-called Thag-a 292 (puthulomo laddhanāmo maccho); Pv-a 33 (yamaloka l-n. petaloka), 52 (niraya l-n. naraka), 57 (kuñjara l-n hatthi), 107 (sūcikā jighacchā), 119 (Purindada Sakka), 143 (Himavanto = pabbata-rājā), etc.
pp. of labhati
is ger. and 3rd sg. aor.; laddhāna ger. of labhati (q.v.).
(f.) religious belief, view, theory, esp. heretical view; a later term for the earlier diṭṭhi (cp Kvu trsl. introd. p. 47) Ja i.142 (Devadattassa), 425 iii.487; v.411; Dāvs ii.86 (dulladdhi wrong view) DN-a i.117; Pv-a 254; Sdhp 65. Cp. upa˚.
fr. labh
(-˚) having a (wrong) view or belief, schismatic Ja i.373 (evaṃ˚); Dpvs vii.35 (puthu˚).
fr. laddhi
see nandhati & pilandhana. Concerning l → n cp.; laṅgula.
(adj. n.) talkative, talking, prattling; a talker, tattler, prattler, chatterer AN ii.26 Thag 959 = Iti 112; Vism 26 (doubled: lapa-lapa) Nd i.226 (as lapaka-lapaka).
fr. lap: see lapati
one who mutters, a droner out (of holy words for pay) DN i.8 (cp. Dial. i.15); AN iii.111; Ja iii.349; Mil 228; DN-a i.91.
fr. lap
to talk prattle, mutter Snp 776; Iti 122; Pv i.81; ii.63 ■ Cp ullapati, palapati, samullapati ■ Caus. lapeti (and lāpeti, metri causâ) to talk to, to accost, beg SN i.31 (here meaning “declare”); Snp 929 (janaṃ na lāpayeyya = na lapayeyya lapanaṃ pajaheyya Nd i.389); Dhp-a ii.157. Infin. lapetave (only in Gāthā language cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 204) Ud 21 ■ pp. lapita ■ Caus. II. lapāpeti Dhp-a ii.157.
lap, cp. Russ. lépet talk, Cymr. llêf voice. The Dhtp 188 & 599 defines; lap with “vacana”
(nt.) & lapanā (f.) 1. talking, muttering; esp. prattling or uttering indistinct words for the sake of begging, patter DN i.8; AN ii.26; AN iii.430; Nd i.389; Ne 94; Mil 383. As f. lapanā at Vb 352; Vism 23 & 27 (def.); Vb-a 482.
2. the mouth, in cpd. lapana-ja “mouth born,” i.e. tooth Ja vi.218 (= mukhaja C.). Cp. ālapana ālapanatā, ullapana.
(nt.) causing to speak, speaking Thag-a 78.
fr. Caus. II. lapāpeti of lap
talked, uttered, muttered Iti 98.
pp. of lapati
see lambila.
the bread-fruit tree, Artocarpus lacucha or incisa DN i.53; Ja iv.363; Ja v.6, Ja v.417; Pv-a 153 (sa˚, read as salaḷa˚, like Vv 355, expld at Vv-a 162).
cp. Sk. labuja
(nt.) the fact of being taken Pv-a 56.
abstr. fr. ppr. med. of labhati
(indecl.) allowable, possible (with inf.); usually neg (thus = Prohibitive!) Snp 393 na l. phassetuṃ; Snp-a p.376 expls by “sakkā”), 590; Pv ii.610; Ja i.64 (na l. tayā pabbajituṃ), 145 (id.), Pv-a 96 (= laddhuṃ sakkā).
best to be taken, with Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 465, as an old Opt. 3rd sg., like sakkā which corresponds to Vedic śakyāt. Thus labbhā = *labhyāt, as in Māgadhī
(-˚) (adj.) receiving, to be received, to get; only in dul˚; hard to get Snp 75; SN i.101; Ja i.307; Pp 26; Mil 16; Sdhp 17, Sdhp 27; and su˚ easy to obtain Pv ii.319.
a base-formation fr. labh
1. (the very freq. & ordinary meaning) to get, to receive, obtain, acquire.
2. (fig.) to obtain permission to receive an opportunity, etc., as “pabbajituṃ sace lacchāmi” if I am allowed to receive the pabbajjā Mvu 18, Mvu 5; or “labhamāno niccam pi khāditu-kāmo ‘mhi” if I get the chance I should always like to eat Ja i.478; and passim (cp. Pass. labbhati below). The paradigma of labhati shows a great variety of forms owing to its frequent occurrence (cp. E. “get”). We have selected the most interesting ones. Pres. Ind. labhati rare (late, e.g. Vism 136); usually med labhate Thag 35; Snp 185, Snp 439; Snp 1st sg. labhe Pv i.64; 2nd sg labhase Ja ii.220; Ja ii.3rd pl. labhare SN i.110 ■ ppr. med labhamāna SN i.122 (otāraṃ a˚, cp. iv.178; MN i.334) also in Pass. sense “getting taken” Pv-a 71 ■ Opt. 3rd sg. labhe Snp 458, & (med.); labhetha Snp 45, Snp 46, Snp 217; Pv ii.97; also (usual form) labheyya Pv-a 115. 2nd sg med. labhetho (= Sk. ˚thāh) Snp 833 ■ Imper. 2nd sg labha Iti 77; Iti 3rd labhatu Pv-a 112; med. 2nd sg. labhassu Thig 432; Thig 3rd sg. labhataṃ DN ii.150; DN ii.1st pl. (as Hortative) labhāmase Pv i.55 (= labhāma Pv-a 27); & labhāmhase Pv iii.224 ■ Fut. 3rd sg. lacchasi (Sk. lapsyati SN i.114; Pv ii.46; iii.37; Ja ii.60 (Māro otāraṃ l.), 258; Mil 126; Dhp-a i.29; Snp-a 405; Thag-a 69 (Ap.); 1st sg lacchāmi MN ii.71; MN ii.2nd sg. lacchasi Vv 835; Pv iv.160 1st pl. lacchāma Ja i.54; Ja iv.292; & lacchāmase (med. Vv 329. Also (the Com. form) labhissati Pv-a 190; Vv-a 136 ■ Cond. 1st pl. alabhissāma Ja iii.35; med 3rd sg. alabhissatha DN ii.63 ■ Pret. (& aor.); (a) 3rd sg alattha DN i.176 (alattha pabbajjaṃ); MN ii.49; SN iv.302; Ja iv.310; Vv-a 66, Vv-a 69; Vv-a 1st sg. alatthaṃ DN ii.268; Vv 8122; Thag 747; Dhp-a iii.313; Dhp-a iii.2nd sg. alattha SN i.114 SN i.1st pl. alatthamha MN ii.63; MN ii.3rd pl. alatthuṃ DN ii.274 & alatthaṃsu SN i.48 ■ (b) (Prohib.) mā laddhā (3rd sg. med.) shall not receive (Sk. alabdha) Ja iii.138. (c) labhi Snp 994; Snp 1st sg. labhiṃ Thag 218; Thag 2, Thag 78; Ja ii.154; Vv-a 68; & alabhitthaṃ Thag 217; Thag 3rd sg. alabhittha Pv i.77 (spelt bbh); 1st pl. labhimhā (for labhimha DN ii.147 ■ Inf. laddhuṃ Ja ii.352; Dhp-a iii.117; Pv-a 96 ■ Ger. laddhā (poet.) Snp 306, Snp 388, Snp 766, Snp 924; laddhāna (poet.) Snp 67 (= laddhā, labhitvā Nd ii.546) Iti 65; and (ord.) labhitva Ja i.150; Ja iii.332; Pv-a 95. Grd. (a): labbhiya (only neg. alabbhiya what cannot be got) Ja iv.86; Pv ii.69; labbhaneyya (a˚) (in Com style as expln of labbhanīya) Ja iv.86 (˚ṭhāna); Pv-a 65 (˚vatthu), 96 (id.); and labbhanīya (as a˚-ṭṭhānāni impossible things) AN iii.54 sq. (five such items), 60 sq (id.); Ja iv.59 ■ (b): laddhabba Ja iii.332; Pv-a 112 Pv-a 252 ■ (c): laddheyya Pv iv.325 ■ Caus. labbheti (for *lābheti, a diff. formn fr. Sk. lambhayati, which is found in P. pa-lambheti) to make someone get, to procure, in 1st sg. aor. alabbhesi Vin iv.5 = Ja i.193; Dhp-a iii.213 (v.l. labh˚); and in pres. 3rd sg. labbheti Ja iii.353 (= adhigameti C.) ■ Pass. labbhati (fig.) to be permitted to be possible or proper; (or simply:) it is to be Mvu 30, Mvu 43; Kp-a 192 (vattuṃ), 207 (id.) ■ pp laddha ■ Cp. upa˚, pati˚, vi˚.
later Vedic labh for older rabh, cp. rabhate, rabha, rabhasa. Related are Gr. λαμβάνω to get λάφυρον booty; Lat. rabies = E. rabies; Lith. lõbis wealth ■ The Dhtp (204) simply defines as “lābhe. On the Prk. forms see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 484 ■ See also rabhasa
(nt.) taking, receiving, gift, acquisition Dhp-a iii.271 (˚bhāva); Pv-a 73 (˚ṭṭhāna), 121 (id.).
fr. labh
(adj.) (-˚) hanging down, drooping, pendulous SN iv.341, SN iv.342 (˚cūḷakā bhaṭa hirelings with large or drooping top-knots); Ja ii.185 (˚tthana with hanging breasts); iii.265 (˚cūla-vihangama); Dāvs ii.61 ■ alamba not drooping, thick, short Ja v.302 Ja vi.3 (˚tthaniyo) ■ Cp. ā˚, vi˚ & ālambana;.
fr. lamb
to hang down, to droop, fall Mvu 32, Mvu 70 (laggāni lambiṃsu), 71 (ākāse lambamānāni). Fut. lambahīti (poet.) Ja v.302 (= lambissati) ■ Caus lambeti to cause to hang up or to be suspended, to hang up Mvu 34, Mvu 48 ■ Caus. II. lambāpeti id. Mvu 21, Mvu 15-pp. lambita ■ Cp. abhi˚, pa˚, vi˚.
lamb; cp. Lat. limbus “limb,” which may be also in E. limp, lit. “hanging down.”-The Dhtp defines the root as “ramba lamba avasaṃsane” (No. 199) as does Dhtm 284
hanging down, suspended Mvu 27, Mvu 38; Mvu 30, Mvu 67.
pp. of lambeti
(adj.) hanging down, able to hang or bend down (with ref. to the membrum virile) Vin iii.35 (“tassa bhikkhussa angajātaṃ dīghaṃ hoti lambati tasmā lambī ti vutto” Sam. Pās. i.278).
fr. lamb
(adj.) sour, acrid, astringent (of taste) Nd i.240; Nd ii.540; Dhs 629; Dhs-a 320 (reads lapila, v.l. lampila; expld as “badara-sāḷava-kapiṭṭha-sāḷav’ ādi”); Mil 56 (reads ambila ).
reading not quite certain, cp. ambila
see palambheti (to deceive, dupe) It may be possibie that reading lampetvā at AN ii.77 (v.l. lambitvā) is to be corrected to lambhetvā (combd with hāpetvā) ■ alambhavissa at SN v.146 is to be read alam abhavissa, as at Ja ii.59.
Caus. of labh, for which usually labbheti (q.v. under labhati). The Sk. form is lambhayati ■ The Dhtm. (840) puts it down as a special root, although it occurs only in cpd. pa˚ in this special meaning “labhi vañcane”
1. a brief measure of time, usually combd with other expressions denoting a short moment, esp. frequent as khaṇa laya muhutta Vin i.12 Vin iii.92; AN iv.137; cp. Dpvs i.16 (khaṇe khaṇe laye Buddho sabbalokaṃ avekkhati) ■ Vism 136 (īsakam pi layaṃ yantaṃ paggaṇheth’ eva mānasaṃ).
2. time in music, equal time, rhythm Dāvs iv.50; Vv-a 183 (dvādasannaṃ laya-bhedānaṃ vasena pabheda).
cp. Sk. laya: see līyati
to dally, sport, sing Ja ii.121 (ppr. laḷamānā); Vv-a 41 (laḷantī; with kīḷati), 57 (id.) ■ Caus laḷeti Ja i.362 (ppr. lāḷentā); Vism 365; cp. upa˚ ■ pp laḷita: see pa˚.
lal, onomat. cp. Lat. lallo “lull”; Sk. lalallā; Gr. λάλος talkative; λαλέω talk; Ger. lallen. The Dhtp distinguishes 2 roots: lal (= icchā) & laḷ (= vilāsa & upasevā)
see nalāṭa (cp. langula).
a small particle, a drop Vv-a 253 (lavanka a small mark); Sdhp 105 (˚odaka).
fr. lū
a cutter, reaper Snp-a 148 (v.l. lāvaka). See lāvaka.
fr. lū
(nt.) salt, lotion Mil 112; Sdhp 158. See loṇa.
cp. late Vedic lavaṇa, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 54
(nt.) cutting, reaping Mil 360.
fr. lunāti
Caus. of lunāti (q.v.).
(hattha) at AN ii.165 is to be read (with v.l.) as lepagata, i.e. sticky (opp. suddha).
to desire, long; to dance, play sport; to shine; to sound forth. See lāsana, abhilāsa upaḷāseti, alasa, vilāsa ■ Caus. lāseti to sport, to amuse (oneself) Vin ii.10 (with vādeti, gāyati, naccati).
represents las to gleam, shine; sport, play; as well as laṣ to desire, long for. Cp. Lat. lascivus; Gr. λιλαίομαι; Goth. lustus = E., Ger. lust etc ■ The Dhtp 324 defs. las as “kanti”
(f.) the fluid which lubricates the joints, synovic fluid Vin i.202; DN ii.293; MN iii.90; SN iv.111; Snp 196; Ja i.146; Mil 382. In detail at Vism 264, Vism 362; Vb-a 247.
cp. Sk. *lasikā
(f.) brains Ja i.493 (= matthalunga C.) = Dhp-a i.145. Lasuna & Lasuna;
etym.?
(nt.) garlic Vin ii.140; Vin iv.258; Ja i.474; Vv 436; Vv-a 186.
cp. Sk. laśuna
to lick: see ullahaka, palahati, & lehati.;
(adj.) light, quick AN i.10, AN i.45 ■ lahuṃ karoti to make light, to be frivolous Ja ii.451 ■ nt. lahuṃ (adv.) quickly Pv iv.160; Dpvs i.53; Mvu 4, Mvu 17 ■ Usually as lahuka (q.v.).
-citta light-minded SN i.201; Ja iii.73. -ṭṭhāna lightness of body, bodily vigour, good health MN i.437, MN i.473; DN i.204; Ud 15; Mil 14. [Cp. BSk. laghūtthānatā Divy 156.] -parivatta quickly or easily changing Vb-a 408.
Sk. laghu & raghu: see etym. under langhati
(adj.) 1. light (opp. garuka ); trifling Vin i.49; AN ii.48 (āpatti); iv.137 (jīvitaṃ parittaṃ l.) Mil 344 (āpatti).
2. light, buoyant Thag 104 (kāyo) Dhs 648; Mil 105; Pv-a 280. atilahukaṃ (adv.) too soon Vin ii.215.
3 (as tt. in grammar) light (of letters or syllables), opp. garuka DN-a i.177 (with ref. to the 10 fold vyañjana of the dhamma).
lahu + ka
(f.) lightness, buoyancy Dhs 42, Dhs 322, Dhs 585; Vism 448.
fr. lahu
(adj.) easily offended, touchy DN i.90; expld by DN-a i.256 as follows: “lahusā ti lahukā appaken’ eva tussanti vā russanti vā udaka-piṭṭhe lābukaṭāhaṃ viya appakena pi uppilavanti.” Cp rabhasa.
fr. lahu
(adv.) quickly AN iv.247 (sabba˚); Vism 238.
orig. abl. of lahu
(f.) lac; lac-dye; enumd with other colourings at MN i.127 = SN ii.101 = AN iii.230 ■ Snp-a 577 Vism 261 (as colour of blood).
-ācariya expert in lac-dyeing Snp-a 577. -guḷaka a ball of lac Snp-a 80. -goḷaka id. Snp-a 577. -tamba copper coloured with lac Thig 440 (= lākhā-rasarattehi viya tambehi lomehi samannāgata Thag-a 270) -rasa essence of lac, used for dyeing; lac-colouring Ja v.215 (˚ratta-succhavi); vi.269 (id.); Kp-a 62, Kp-a 63 Thag-a 270. Laja & Laja
cp. Sk. dākṣā
(f.) 1. fried grain, parched corn: occurring only in combn madhu-lāja fried grain with honey, sweet corn Ja iii.538; Ja iv.214, Ja iv.281.
2. the flower of Dalbergia arborea, used for scattering in bunches (with other flowers making 5 kinds or colours) as a sign of welcome & greeting, usually in phrase; lāja-pañcamāni pupphāni (“a cluster of flowers with lāja as the fifth”) Dhp-a i.112; Vv-a 31; Ja i.55 (˚pañcamakāni p.); cp. Ja ii.240 (vippakiṇṇa-lāja-kusuma-maṇḍita-talā); vi.42 (vippakiṇṇa-lāja-kusuma-vāsa-dhūp’ andhakāra); Dhp-a i.140 (vippakiṇṇa-valikaṃ pañcavaṇṇa-kusuma-lāja-puṇṇaghaṭa-paṭimaṇḍita).
cp. Vedic lāja: Zimmer, Altind. Leben 269
to fry or have fried Ja vi.341 (v.l. lañc˚, lañj˚), 385 (lañchetvā; v.l. lañci˚, lañje˚).
fr. lāja
talk: see cpds. abhi˚, pa˚, sal˚.
fr. lap
a sort of quail, Perdix chinensis SN v.146 = Ja ii.59. As lāpaka-sakuṇa also at Ja ii.59-Another name for quail is vaṭṭaka.
also fr. lap, lit. “talker,” cp. similar semantics of E. quail → Ger. quaken, quicken; E. quack. The P form rests on pop. etym., as in Sk. we find corresponding name as lāba
(nt.) muttering, utterance, speech Iti 98; AN i.165 (lapita˚). Perhaps also to be read at Thig 73 ■ Cp. upa˚.
fr. lāpeti, Caus. of lap
(-˚) (adj.) talking (silly) SN iii.143 (bāla˚).
fr. lap
(f.) a kind of cucumber Ja i.336, Ja i.341. See also lābuka.
-latā the cucumber creeper or plant Mil 374.
short for alāpu or ālābu, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 396
: see lapati & cp. upalāpeti.;
(f.) & Lābuka = lāpu (alābu) gourd or pumpkin, often used as receptacle Ja i.158 (˚ka), 411 (˚kumbhaṇḍa vesseḷ made of the gourd); v.37 (˚ka), 155 (addha-lābu-samā thanā); Dhp-a ii.59 (˚ka); Snp-a 227 (lābumhi catumadhuraṃ pūretukāmo).
-kaṭāha a gourd as receptacle Vism 255, Vism 359; Vb-a 63.
receiving, getting, acquisition, gain, possession; pl. possessions DN i.8; DN ii.58, DN ii.61; MN i.508 (ārogya-paramā lābhā); iii.39; AN i.74; AN iv.157 sq., 160 (lābhena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto Devadatto, cp Ja i.185 sq.); Snp 31, Snp 438, Snp 828, Snp 854, Snp 1014, Snp 1046 (cp. Nd ii.548); Iti 67 (vitta˚); Ja iii.516 (yasa˚, dhana˚); Vism 93 Vism 136 (˚ṃ labhati), 150 (˚assa bhāgin getting riches) Pv-a 113, Pv-a 280 ■ A dat. sg. lābhā (for lābhāya) is used adverbially with foll. genitive in meaning of “for my (our) gain,” “it is profitable,” “good for me that” etc.; e.g. Mil 17 (lābhā no tāta, suladdhaṃ no tāta), 232 (lābhā vata tāsaṃ devatānaṃ); AN iii.313 (lābhā vata me suladdhaṃ vata me), expld at Vism 223; Dhp-a i.98 (lābhā vata me, elliptically); ii.95 (l. vata no ye mayaṃ… upaṭṭhahimha).
-agga highest gain Ja iii.125; Mil 21. -āsā desire for gain AN i.86. -kamyā (abl. out of desire for gain Snp 854 Snp 929 (= lābha-hetu Nd i.389). -taṇhā craving for possession Dhp-a iv.38. -macchariya selfishness in acquisitions AN iii.273; DN iii.234; Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhs 1122 -mada pride of gain Vb-a 466. -sakkāra gain and honour, usually combd with ˚siloka fame; the two first e.g. at Vin ii.196; Iti 73; Ja i.185, Ja i.186; Ja v.75; the three combd e.g. at MN i.192; SN ii.227, SN ii.237; AN ii.73; AN iii.343 sq., 377; Vb 352 sq.; lābha -siloka alone at Vism 67.
fr. labh
(adj. nt.) one who receives; reception; a˚; not getting, non-receiving Vin iii.77.
fr. lābha
see under lābha.
(adj.) (-˚) receiving, getting, having, possessed of MN iii.39 (as n. “a receiver, recipient”) AN i.24; AN ii.85; AN iv.400; Pp 51; Vb 332 (nikāma˚) Ja i.140.
2. one who has intuition either in reasoning (or logical argument) or psychically, and who may therefore take certain premises for granted (opp alābhin a denier) DN-a i.106, DN-a i.120.
fr. labha
(adj.) insignificant, poor inferior, bad, sinful. The usual syn. is pāpa ■ Vin ii.76; Vism 268 (= pāpaka); Dhs-a 45; Kp-a 243 (= khudda); PugA 229 (nīca lāmaka = oṇata); Kp-a 150 (˚desanā, cp. ukkaṭṭha); Dhp-a ii.77; Dhp-a iv.44 (˚bhāva) Vv-a 116; Pv-a 15 (for pāpa); 103 (= pāpaka), 125 (˚purisa = kāpurisa); Sdhp 28, Sdhp 253, Sdhp 426, Sdhp 526 (opp ukkaṭṭha) ■ f. lāmikā Ja i.285; Ja ii.346 (for itarā) Dhp-a ii.61 (pāpikā l. diṭṭhi) ■ Cp. Dhs. trsl.2 § 1025.
seems to be a specific Pāli word. It is essentially a C. word & probably of dialectical origin Has it anything to do with; omaka ?
(lāmañjaka) (nt.) the root of Andropogon muricatus Vv 436 (v.l. ˚añc˚); Vv-a 186, (˚añj˚) 187.
cp. Sk. lāmajjaka
(-˚) cutter, reaper AN iii.365 = SN iii.155 (read babbaja˚).
fr. lāyati
. to cut (off), mow, reap; ger. lāyitvā AN iii.365; Ja i.215; Ja iii.226; Vin iii.64; Pv i.81 (= lāvitvā Pv-a 40)-pp. lāyita.
for. *lāvati, lū, for which the ordinary form is lunāti (q.v.), y for v as freq. in Pāli: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 462 ■ The Dhtp. has a root lā in meaning “ādāna (No. 370)
(nt.) cutting Ja v.45 (tiṇa-lāyana asi, sickle); Dhp-a iii.285 (v.l. for dāyana).
fr. lāyati
cut, reaped Ja iii.130 (tiṇaṃ na lāyita-pubbaṃ); Vism 419 (˚ṭṭhāna place where one has reaped).
pp. of lāyati, lāyeti
(adj.) talking without sense, silly, foolish Ja vi.360, Ja vi.417 (ḷ). Cp. alālā.
fr. lal, see laḷati
a wag, silly person, fool Ja i.205; Ja iv.210. Lalapati & Lalappati;
lala + ka
to talk much, to talk silly, to lament, wail Snp 580; Pv iv.52 (= vilapati Pv-a 260); Ja iii.217; Mil 148, Mil 275; Mvu 32, Mvu 68. pp. lālappita.
Intens. of lapati
talking much, excited or empty talk, wailing Vb 100, Vb 138; Pts i.38; Ne 29; Vb-a 104 (= punappunaṃ lapanaṃ). Lala(p)pana
fr. lālappati
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) = lālappa, together with lāla(p)pitatta (nt.) in exegesis of parideva at Nd ii.416; Vb 100, Vb 138; Vb-a 104; DN-a i.121.
1. talking much, wailing Mil 148 (paridevita-l ■ mukha).
2. (nt.) much talk, excited talk, talking Ja vi.498.
pp. of lālappati
(f.) saliva Ja i.61, Ja i.248; Ja vi.357; Vism 259; Dhp-a i.307 (mukhato lālā galati).
cp. laḷati
(nt.) swaying, dalliance, sport DN-a i.197; Sdhp 387; as lāḷanā at Thag-a 243.
fr. lal
see laḷati.
a cutter, reaper Mil 33 (yava˚); Mvu 10, Mvu 31; Snp-a 148 (v.l. BB. for lavaka). Lavati & Laveti;
fr. lāvati
to cut, to mow Pv-a 40 (lāvitvā), Mvu 10, Mvu 30 (lāvayati).
the latter the usual form, as Caus. of lunāti. lāvati is the simple Pāli formation fr. lū Another Caus. II. is lavāpati (q.v.). See also lāyati.
sporting, dancing: see abhi˚, vi˚.
of las
(f.) a dancer, Mil 331.
fr. las
see lasati.
(f.) a kind of measure Vb-a 343 (36 rattareṇus equal to one likkhā 7 likkhās equal to 1 ūkā); Kp-a 43 (˚matta).
*Sk. likṣā egg of a louse, as measure equal to 8 trasareṇu (BR.) ■ Connected with Lat. ricinus a kind of vermin (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)
1. to scratch; to cut carve; write, inscribe MN i.127 (rūpāni); Ja ii.372 (suvaṇṇa-patte); iv.257 (id.), 488, 489 (jāti-hingulakena); Dhp-a i.182; Pv-a 145 (nāmaṃ likhi wrote his name) ■ paṇṇaṃ l. to write a letter Ja ii.174; Ja vi.369 (paṇṇe on a leaf).
2. to shave (off), plane Vin ii.112 (inf. likhituṃ) ■ pp. likhita ■ Cp. vi.˚-Caus. I lekheti (q.v.). Caus. II. likhāpeti to cause to be cut or carved [cp. BSk. likhāpayati Divy 547] Vin ii.110; Snp-a 577; to cause to be written Mil 42.
likh; Vedic likhati, also rikh in Ved. ārikhati (R.V. vi.53, 7), cp. with palatal riśati, liśati. Connected with Gr. ἐρείκω to tear; Lith. rë̃kti to cut bread, to plough; Ohg. rīga = Ags. rāw = E. row ■ Dhtp 467 simply expls by “lekhane”
(nt.) scratching, cutting, writing Ja v.59 (a golden tablet for writing on) Cp. ullikhana.
cp. late Sk. likhana; fr. likh
in likhā-paṇṇa at Pv-a 20 is faulty for lekhā˚; (lekha˚) letter, cp. lekha-pattra letter Mālatīm 172, 7.
1. carved, cut, worked (in ivory etc.), in cpd. saṅkha˚ brahmacariya the moral life, like a polished shell DN i.63; SN ii.219, expld at DN-a i.181 as “likhita-sankha-sadisa dhota-sankha-sappaṭibhāga.” 2. written, inscribed Ja iv.7 (likhitāni akkharāni); Mil 42 (lekha l.).
3. made smooth, shaved Ja vi.482 (cāpa)
4. marked, proscribed, made an outlaw Vin i.75. Cp. ullikhita.
pp. of likhati
(adj.) one who has been proscribed, an outlaw Vin i.75 (cora).
likhita + qualifying ending ka
(nt.) 1. characteristic, sign, attribute, mark feature MN i.360; SN v.278; Snp 601 sq. (= saṇṭhāna Snp-a 464); Vin iv.7 (two: hīna & ukkaṭṭha); Ja i.18; Ja iv.114 (gihi˚), 130; Mil 133 (sāsana˚), 162 (dve samaṇassa lingāni), 405 (lingato ca nimittato ca etc.); Vism 184; Dhs-a 64 (= saṇṭhāna Tīkā: Expos. 86).
2. mark of sex, sexual characteristic, pudendum (male as well as female, as neither m. nor f.) Vin iii.35 (purisa˚); Ja v.197 (˚saṇṭhāna); Kp-a 110 (itthi˚); Snp-a 48 (˚sampatti), 51 (id.), 300 (itthi˚); Dhs-a 321 sq. (itthi˚).
3. (in grammar) mark of sex, (characteristic) ending, gender Snp-a 397. ˚vipallāsa change or substitution of gender Pv-a 7, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 87, Pv-a 157.
fr. liṅg; late Vedic & (pre-eminently) Class. Sk. linga
antelope (?) Pgdp 10.
cp. Sk. lingālikā a kind of mouse
(adj.) having or being a characteristic Vism 210 (of nāma); Kp-a 107 (id.).
fr. linga
1. to embrace, in poet. ger. liṅgiya (as if fr. lingati) Thig 398 (= ālingetvā Thag-a 260). See ā˚.
2. to characterize: see ul˚.
Denom. fr. liṅg
the alphabet; a letter of the alphabet; writing Mil 79.
fr. lip; late Sk. lipi
to stay behind, to stay, E. leave & live, Ger leben. The Dhtp (385) simply expl;s by “limpana” to smear, plaster, stain; usually in pass. (or med.) sense “to get soiled, to dirty oneself” Thig 388; Pv-a 215 Doubtful in Snp p.ssages, where both limpati & lippati; are found as readings, e.g. Snp 778 in Text lippati, but Niddesa reading limpati (Nd i.55); Snp 811 lipp˚, Nd i.133 limp˚; Snp 1040, Snp 1042 lipp˚, Nd ii.549 limp.˚-Pass lippati to be soiled (by), to get stained (in character Snp 250, Snp 547, Snp 625, Snp 778, Snp 913, Snp 1040; cp. Snp 71 (alippamāna ppr.) ■ pp. litta: see ava˚, ul˚, vi.˚-Cp. also ālimpeti, palimpeti, vilimpati ■ Caus. I. lepeti to cause to be plastered Ja vi.432 ■ Caus. II. limpāpeti to cause to be plastered or anointed Mvu 34, Mvu 42 (cetiyaṃ ˚āpetvāna).
lip, cp. repa stain, lepa ointment, stain; Gr. λίπος grease, fat, λιπαρός fat, ἀλείφω to anoint; Lat lippus; Lith. limpû to stick, Goth. bi-leiban, Ohg bilīban.
(nt.) soiling, smearing Dhtp 385.
fr. lip
to break off, tear off, pull; only at Dhtp 444 expld by “lesa.”
cp. dial. Sk. liśate = Vedic riśate
to lick; pres. lehati Ja ii.44; aor. lehayiṃsu Pv-a 198 (v.l. for palahiṃsu). Cp. parilehisaṃ Vv 8121 Vv-a 316; ger. lehitvā DN-a i.136 (sarīraṃ); Vv-a 314. pp. līḷha (?). Cp. leyya.
lih, Sk. leḍhi or līḍhe, also lihati. Cp. Lat. lingo, Gr. λείξω; Goth. bilaigōn, Ags. liccian = E. lick, Ger lecken ■ The Dhtp 335 expls lih by “assādane,” i.e. taste
clinging, sticking; slow, sluggish; shy, reserved, dull, AN i.3; Vism 125. Definitions at Vb 352, Vb 373; Dhs 1156, Dhs 1236; SN v.277, SN v.279 (ati˚). Often combd with uddhata as “sluggish or shy” and “unbalanced,” e.g. at SN v.112; Vism 136; Vb-a 310 alīna active, open, sincere Snp 68 (˚citta), 717 (id.) Ja i.22 (v. 148; ˚viriya sīha).
pp. of līyati
(f.) = līyanā Vism 469. alīnatā open-mindedness, sincerity Ja i.366; Snp-a 122.
abstr. formation fr. līna instead of līy˚
(nt.) sluggishness, shyness; only in phrase cetaso līnattaṃ immobility of mind SN v.64 SN v.103; AN i.3 = AN iv.32; AN v.145 sq.; Ne 86, Ne 108; Vb-a 272 (= cittassa līn’ ākāra).
abstr. fr. līna
to stick. The Dhtp evidently favours the separation when interpreting lī by “silesana-dravīkaraṇa,” i.e. to make slip or run (Dhtp 441; Dhtm 681)] 1. to stick, adhere, cling to see cpds. all˚, o˚, ni˚, paṭisal˚.
2. to melt, slip: see cpd. pavi˚ (to dissolve) ■ pp. līna.
lī, Vedic līyati; *lei to stick to or cleave: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lino, which he separates in meaning fr. *lei to smear, polish
(nt.) sticking to, adhering, resting Sdhp 190 (˚ṭṭhāna resting-place).
fr. līyati
(f.) = līyana; cleaving to, sluggishness, shyness Dhs 1156.
(nt.) = līyanā Dhs 1156.
abstr. formation after similar synonymical chains, like bhāvitatta
(līḷā) (f.) play, sport, dalliance; probably for līḷhā at Ja v.5 & 157, both times comb;d with vilāsa.
-aravinda a lotus serviceable for sport Vv-a 43 (līḷ˚).
cp. Epic Sk. līlā or *līḍā
(f.) grace, ease, charm adroitness; always used with ref. to the Buddha (Buddhalīḷhā), e.g. Ja i.155; Dhp-a i.33; Dhp-a iii.79. So in phrase Buddhalīḷhāya dhammaṃ deseti “to expound the doctrine with the Buddha’s mastery” Ja i.152, Ja i.155 Ja iii.289; Vv-a 217 (spelling wrongly līḷāya). Of the B’s gait: Ja i.93, Ja i.149; Dhp-a ii.41. The combn with vilāsa, as mentioned by Childers, applies to līlā (q.v.) which may stand for līḷhā at the passages mentioned although not used of the Buddha.
abstr. of līḷha, Sk. līḍha, pp. of lih, lit. being polished, cp. ullīḍha polished
broken (up), rugged (of a path) Mil 217, Mil 218. Cp. vi˚.
pp. of rujati; corresponding to Sk. rugṇa
to be broken up, to break (up), to be destroyed to go asunder, to fall apart AN i.283 = Pp 32 (here equal to “be wiped out,” but it is unnecessary to assume as Kern, Toev. s. v. lujjati does, a by-form of luc, luñcati The Pp C. 215 expls by “nassati”); Vin i.297; Vin ii.123; SN iv.52 (in etymologizing interpretation of loka: “lujjati kho loko ti vuccati”; quoted at Nd ii.550 on Snp 1119); Thag 929 ■ Cp. olujjati, palujjati ■ pp. lugga.
Pass. of ruj, corresponding to Sk. rujyate. Dhtp 400 gives luj as sep. root with meaning vināsa. See rujati
(nt.) breaking up, crumbling away, dissolution Dhs-a 47 (in etym. of loka = lujjana-palujjan’ aṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ), 308 (id.); Vism 427 (id.).
fr. lujjati; a word peculiar to Pali dogmatics
to pull out, pluck (a bird), tear, peel Ja i.244, Ja i.476; Ja ii.97, Ja ii.363; Ja iii.314; Ja iv.191; Ja v.463; Mvu 23, Mvu 46 (aor. aluñci ); 28, 26 (ger. luñcitvā ); Vism 248 (kese) ■ Caus. II. luñcāpeti Dhp-a ii.53 (kese), and loceti Thag 283 (kesamassuṃ alocayiṃ) ■ pp. luñcita.
Vedic luñcati, luc or luñc, to Lat. runco to pull up weeds; Gr. ῥυκάνη plane. The Dhtp 43 expls by apanayana
plucked, pulled Mil 240 (i.e. combed, of wool; Rh. D. trsls “pressed”; Nyānatiloka “cut”); Pv-a 47 (vilūna-kesa + ).
pp. of luñcati
to rob, plunder.
cp. later Sk. luṭhati to plunder, which is one of the dial. variants luṭh, lunṭh, loṭh of lul to shake. The Dhtp (474) & Dhtm (136) both give; ruṭh & luṭh; with meaning “upaghāte”
seems to be a legitimate spelling representing either lutta or lūna, in meaning “cut, cut off”. Thus at SN i.5 (nalo va harito luto) 126 = Ja vi.25; and at Snp 532 (lutāni bandhanāni; vv. ll lūtāni & lunāni; expld as “chinnāni padālitāni” at Snp-a 432).
cp. lu for lū under lunāti
broken, cut off; as t. t. in grammar “elided” Vv-a 13 (of ca), 111 (of iti), 122 (id.).
cp. Epic Sk. lupta; pp. of lumpati
(adj.) 1. fierce, terrible; cruel, gruesome SN i.143; AN ii.174 (pāpa, l., kibbisa); v.149; Pp 56; Vv 845 (= dāruṇā pisāc’-ādino Vv-a 335); Ja v.243 (ṭhānaṃ niraya); Sdhp 286. The spelling ludra occurs at Ja iv.46 = Ja vi.306, which is ludda at Ja v.146.
2. a hunter, sportsman Snp 247 (dussīla˚; Snp-a 289: luddā ca kurūra-kammantā lohita-pāṇitāya, macchaghātakamigabandhaka-sākuṇik’ādayo idha adhippetā); Vv 631 Ja ii.154 (˚putta = luddaka); iii.432 (Bharata by name) Pp 56 (māgavika, sākuṇika, l., macchaghātaka etc. expld by dāruṇa kakkhaḷa at Pp A 233); Vism 245 Vb-a 259; Vb-a 228.
the usual P. form of rudda, corresponding to Sk. raudra
= ludda 2, i.e. hunter Vin i.220; Ja iv.416; Pv iii.72 (miga˚; expld as “dāruṇa” Pv-a 206); Mil 222; Vb-a 266 (miga˚, in simile); Pv-a 34, Pv-a 168. Cp Fick, Sociale Gliederung 143, 207. Note. The expression sunakha-luddako at Dhs-a 273 is not quite clear (“doghunter”?). It applies to a female & Maung Tin (;Expositor ii.361) reads “ luddhikā ” (sic), with trsln “dog-mistress,” remarking that Pyī reads luddako “hunter-dog” (?).
greedy, covetous AN iii.433 (with pharusa-vāca & samphappalāpin); Iti 84; Mil 92 (duṭṭha, mūḷha, l.); Ja i.124.
pp. of lubbhati
(nt.) cutting, severing Snp-a 148 (niddānan ti chedanaṃ lunanaṃ uppāṭanaṃ).
for lūna(na), cp. lavana
to cut, cut off, mow, reap Mil 33 (yavalāvakā yavaṃ lunanti); Dhs-a 39 ■ pp. lūna (& luta); -Caus I. lāvayati Mvu 10, Mvu 30; Caus. II. lavāpeti to cause to mow Vin ii.180 ■ A Pass. lūyati [fr. lu ] is found at DN i.141 (aor. lūyiṃsu) and at corresponding passage Pp 56 (imper. lūyantu, where dubbā is to be corrected to dabbhā ) ■ See lava, lavaka, lavana lāyati, lavati.
lū, given as lu at Dhtp 504 (“chedana”) & Dhtm 728 (“paccheda”). For etym. cp. Gr. λύω to loosen Lat. luo to pay a fine, Goth. fraliusan to lose; Ger. los E. lose & loose
to be lustful or greedy, to covet, long for, desire Iti 84 (lobhaneyye na lubbhati); Vism 465, Vism 468 ■ ger. lubbha (?) in olubbha is to be referred to lamb rather than lubh. A grd formation in lobhaneyya or lobhanīya (q.v.) ■ pp luddha.
Vedic lubhyate, lubh, cp. Lat. lubet & libet it pleases, libido longing; Goth. liufs = Ger. lieb & lob E. love, etc ■ Dhtp 434: lobhe
(nt.) being greedy, greediness, a scholastic word, only found in exegesis of word lobha, e.g. at Dhs 32 (where also the enlarged abstr. formation lubbhitatta ) & Vism 465, Vism 468 (lubbhana-mattaṃ lobha).;
fr. lubh
to break, harm, injure; to attack plunder; with a strong touch of affection (sympathy or desire) lubh in it [cp. lup: Gr. λύπη; ruj: roga], which is still more evident in Intens. loluppa (q.v.) ■ Dhs-a 365 (in expln of loluppa) ■ pp. lutta ■ Cp. ullumpana ullopa, lopa, vilumpati, vilopa. Lulati & Lutati;
lup, Epic Sk. lumpati, found also as rup in Pali: see ruppati. Connected with Lat. lugeo to be sorry (cp. rujati, roga; Gr. λύπη sorrow) and rumpo to break Defns at Dhtp 386 & 433 (chedana) and at Dhtm 618 & 669 (cheda, vināsa)
to stir, shake, agitate, upset; intrs. to be in motion, to be stirred Mil 259 (calati khubbhati l. āvilati) ■ pp. luḷita.
cp. Ep. Sk. loṭh to move & dial.; luḍ, loḍayati, to stir, agitate, which is a by-form of lul lolati to move, Caus. lolayati to set in motion. Etym connected with Slavonic ljuljati to rock, Ags. lāēl a (flexible) rod, rood; root due to onomat. formation. Another form is luṭhati. The Dhtm (117) expls luṭ; by “loṭane” (cp. viloṭana & viloḷana), and; luḷ (510) by “manthane”
stirred, moved, disturbed; lively; turbid (of water) SN v.123 = AN iii.233; (udapatta āvila l.); DN ii.128 = Ud 83 (udakaṃ parittaṃ luḷitaṃ āvilaṃ) Ja vi.63; Nd i.488 (āvila + ); Mil 35, Mil 177, Mil 220 (˚citta) 383 (a˚); Dhs-a 328 (indriyāni paripakkāni alulitāni avisadāni).
pp. of luḷati
owl Ja vi.497 (= ulūka C.).
apocope form of ulūka, arisen through wrong syllable-division
(adj.) [Vedic rūkṣa; Prk. lūha & lukkha; BSk. lūha, e.g. Divy 13 (praheṇaka), 81 (˚cīvara), 425, 427 1. rough, coarse, unpleasant; poor, bad (usually appld to dress or food); mediocre, meȧgre, wretched. Opp paṇīta (e.g. Vin i.212; SN ii.153; AN iv.10; Ja i.228; Vv-a 64) ■ SN iv.337 sq.; AN iv.232 sq.; Vin i.55; Thag 923; Ja i.228 (cittasmiṃ paṇīte… dānaṃ lūkhaṃ na hoti); Nd ii.342 (p. 182, in exegesis of nikkuha, where practices of ascetics are referred to as “lūkhaṃ cīvaraṃ dhāreti, l. piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjati, l. senāsanaṃ paṭisevati etc.); Vv-a 298, Vv-a 335 sq.; Pv-a 180.
2. (of men) low wretched, rough, miserable, offensive Vin i.199; Vin iii.110 (kisa l. dubbaṇṇa); SN i.175 (= jiṇṇa C, see K.S. 320 trsln “looking worn”); MN i.77 = Ja i.390 ■ lūkhapuggala a miserable, offensive character (opp. siniddhapuggala) Vism 132; Vb-a 282.
-ājīvin leading a hard or rough life DN i.161; DN iii.44, DN iii.47; SN ii.200; AN v.190. -cīvara (adj.) wearing a shabby robe, badly clad Vin iii.263; Mil 342 (cp. cīvara lūkha bad condition of clothes AN ii.71 = Pp 53; lūkhacīvara-dhara AN i.25). -ppamāṇa (& ˚ika); taking unpleasantness or misery as one’s standard AN ii.71 Pp 53 (cp. PugA 229); Dhp-a iii.114; Snp-a 242; cp rūpa-ppamāṇa. -ppasanna believing in shabbiness or mediocrity, having (bodily) wretchedness as one’s faith Vin ii.197; AN ii.71 = Pp 53. -pāpuraṇa miserably clad SN i.175; Dhp-a iv.8, Dhp-a iv.9.
(f.) unpleasantness, wretchedness, poorness, misery PugA 229.
fr. lūkha
(adj.) rough, harsh; miserable, selfmortifying Snp 244 (= nīrasa atta-kilamath’ ânuyutta Snp-a 287).
fr. lūkha
(f.) spider Abhp 621.
*Sk. lūtā
cut, mowed, reaped Thig 107 (˚kesī); Ja ii.365; Dāvs i.32. Cp. vi˚.
pp. of lunāti
: Pass. of lunāti (q.v.).
1. writing, inscription, letter, epistle Ja vi.595 (silā˚ inscription on rock) Mvu 5, Mvu 177 (lekhe sutvā); 27, 6; 33, 40 (˚ṃ vissajjayi) Dāvs 5, Dāvs 67 (cāritta˚); Mil 42; Snp-a 164 (˚vācāka reciting), 577.
2. chips, shavings Vin ii.110 (v.l. likha).
fr. likh, cp. Sk. lekha & lekhā
one who knows the art of writing, a scribe, secretary Vin iv.8 (as a profession); iv.10 (= muddikā & gaṇakā, pl.); Mil 42.
fr. lekha
(f.) an instrument for scratching lines or writing, a stencil, pencil AN ii.200; Ja i.230.
fr. likh; cp. Epic Sk. lekhaṇī stencil Mbh 1, 78
(nt.) scratching, drawing, writing Dhtp 467.
fr. likh
(f.) 1. streak, line Vv-a 277 (= rāji); canda˚; crescent moon [cp. Epic candralekhā Mbh 3, 1831] Vism 168; Dhs-a 151.
2. a scratch, line AN i.283; Pp 32; Ja vi.56 (lekhaṃ kaḍḍhati).
3. writing, inscription, letter Vin iii.76 (˚ṃ chindati destroy the letter); Ja i.451 (on a phalaka); Mil 349 (˚ācariya teacher of writing); Pv-a 20 (˚paṇṇa, letter so read for likhā˚).
4. the art of writing or drawing [ = lipi Hemacandra], writing as an art. It is classed as a respectable (ukkaṭṭha) profession (sippa) Vin iv.7; and mentioned by the side of muddā and gaṇanā Vin iv.7, Vin iv.128 = Vin i.77; cp. Vin iv.305.
fr. likh; Vedic lekhā. See also rekhā & lekha
drawn (of lines), pencilled Thig 256.
pp. of lekheti
to (make a) scratch Ja iv.402 ■ pp. lekhita.
Caus. of likhati or Denom. of lekha
a clod of earth SN v.146 = Ja ii.59 (˚ṭṭhāna); Ja i.19, Ja i.175 Ja iii.16; Ja vi.405; Mil 255; Snp-a 222 (ākāse khitta, in simile); Vism 28 (trsln “stone”), 360 (˚khaṇḍ’ādīni) 366 (containing gold), 419; Vb-a 66 (˚khaṇḍā); Vv-a 141; Pv-a 284 ■ The throwing of clods (stones?) is a standing item in the infliction of punishments, where it is grouped with daṇḍa (stick) and sattha (sword), or as leḍḍu-daṇḍ’ādi, e.g. at MN i.123; DN ii.336, DN ii.338 (v.l. leṇḍu); Ja ii.77; Ja iii.16; Ja vi.350; Vism 419; Dhp-a i.399 (v.l. leṇḍu); iii.41; iv.77; Vv-a 141 ■ Note. leḍḍūpaka in cuṇṇaṃ vā telaṃ vā leḍḍūpakena etc. at Dhs-a 115 read as vālaṇḍupakena, as at Vism 142.
-pāta “throw of a clod,” a certain measure of (not too far) a distance Vin iv.40; Vism 72; Dhs-a 315 (trsln “a stone’s throw”).
dial. Sk. leṣṭu → *leṭṭhu → *leṭṭu → leḍḍu; also Prk. leḍu & leṭṭhu: Pischel, § 304; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 62
= leḍḍu; Vism 28.
(& lena) (nt.) 1. a cave (in a rock), a mountain cave, used by ascetics (or bhikkhus) as a hermitage or place of shelter, a rock cell. Often enumd with kuṭi guhā, e.g. Vin iv.48; Mil 151; Vb 251 (n.). At Vin ii.146 it is given as collective name for 5 kinds of hermitages, viz. vihāra, aḍḍhayoga, pāsāda, hammiya guhā. The expln of leṇa at Vb-a 366 runs as follows “pabbataṃ khaṇitvā vā pabbhārassa appahonakaṭṭhāne kuḍḍaṃ uṭṭhāpetvā vā katasenāsanaṃ,” i.e. opportunity for sitting & lying made by digging (a cave in a mountain or by erecting a wall where the cave is insufficient (so as to make the rest of it habitable) Cp. Vin i.206 = Vin iii.248 (pabbhāraṃ sodhāpeti leṇaṃ kattukāmo) Mvu 16, Mvu 12; Mvu 28, Mvu 31 sq. (n); Mil 200 (mahā˚).
2. refuge, shelter, (fig.) salvation (sometimes in sense of nibbāna ). In this meaning often combd with tāṇa & saraṇa;, e.g. at DN i.95; SN iv.315 (maṃ-leṇa refuge with me; + maṃtāṇa ); iv.372 (= nibbāna); AN i.155 sq. (n); Ja ii.253; DN-a i.232. Cp. Vin iii.155. leṇ’atthaṃ for refuge Vin ii.164 (n); Ja i.94- aleṇa without a refuge Pts i.127; Pts ii.238; Pv ii.25 (= asaraṇa Pv-a 80).
-gavesin seeking shelter or refuge Ja ii.407 = Ja iv.346 -guhā a mountain cave Ja iii.511. -dvāra the door of the (rock) hermitage Vism 38; Dhp-a iii.39. -pabbhāra “cave-slope,” cave in a mountain Dhp-a iv.170.
*Sk. layana, fr.; lī in meaning “to hide,” cp. Prk. leṇa
1. smearing, plastering, coating over Vin iv.303 (bāhira˚); Ja ii.25 (mattikā˚).
2. (fig.) plaster, i.e. that which sticks, affection, attachment, etc., in taṇhā˚ the stain of craving, & diṭṭhi˚; of speculation Nd i.55 Nd ii.271iii ■ Note. lasagata at AN ii.165 read with v.l. as lepa-gata, i.e. sticky ■ Cp. ā˚, pa˚;
fr. lip, see limpati; cp. Classic Sk. lepa stain, dirt
(nt.) smearing, plastering, anointing Vin ii.172 (kuḍḍa˚); AN iv.107 (vāsana˚), 111 (id.); Ja ii.117 Cp. abhi˚, ā˚, pa˚
fr. lip
see limpati.
(adj. nt.) to be licked or sipped; nt. mucilaginous food (opp. peyya liquid) AN iv.394 (+ peyya); Mil 2 (id.).
grd. of lih: see lihati
sham, pretext, trick Vin iii.169 (where ten lesas are enumd, viz. jāti˚, nāma˚ gotta˚, linga˚, āpatti˚, patta˚, cīvara˚, upajjhāya˚ ācariya˚, senāsana˚); Ja ii.11; Ja vi.402 ■ lesa-kappa pretext Vin ii.166; Vv 8443 (= kappiya-lesa Vv-a 348) Thag 941; DN-a i.103.
cp. Sk. leśa particle; as Kern, Toev. s. v. points out, it occurs in Sk. also in the P. meaning at Mbh v.33, 5 although this is not given in BR ■ As “particle only at Dhtp 444 in defn of lisati
see lihati.
world, primarily “visible world,” then in general as “space or sphere of creation, with var. degrees of substantiality. Often (unspecified in the comprehensive sense of “universe.” Sometimes the term is applied collectively to the creatures inhabiting this or var. other worlds, thus, “man, mankind people, beings.”- Loka is not a fixed & def term. It comprises immateriality as well as materiality and emphasizes either one or the other meaning according to the view applied to the object or category in question Thus a trsl;n of “sphere, plane, division, order” interchanges with “world.” Whenever the spatial element prevails we speak of its “regional” meaning as contrasted with “applied” meaning. The fundamental notion however is that of substantiality, to which is closely related the specific Buddhist notion of impermanence (loka = lujjati).
1. Universe: the distinctions between the universe (cp. cakkavāḷa) as a larger whole and the world as a smaller unit are fluctuating & not definite. A somewhat wider sphere is perhaps indicated by; sabba-loka (e.g. SN i.12; SN iv.127, SN iv.312; SN v.132; Iti 122 Mvu 1, Mvu 44; cp. sabbāvanta loka DN i.251; DN iii.224) otherwise even the smaller loka comprises var. realms of creation. Another larger division is that of loka as sadevaka, samāraka, sabrahmaka, or the world with its devas, its Māra and its Brahmā, e.g. SN i.160, SN i.168 SN i.207; SN ii.170; SN iii.28, SN iii.59; SN iv.158; SN v.204; AN i.259 sq. AN ii.24 sq.; AN iii.341; AN iv.56, AN iv.173; AN v.50; Iti 121; Nd i.447 (on Snp 956), to which is usually added sassamaṇa-brāhmaṇī pajā (e.g. DN i.250, see loci s. v. pajā). With this cp. Dhp 45, where the divisions are paṭhavī, Yamaloka sadevaka (loka), which are expld at Dhp-a i.334 by paṭhavī = attabhāva; Yamaloka = catubbidha apāyaloka; sadevaka = manussaloka devalokena saddhiṃ-The universe has its evolutional periods: saṃvaṭṭati and vivaṭṭati DN ii.109 sq. The Buddha has mastered it by his enlightenment: loko Tathāgatena abhisambuddho Iti 121. On loka, lokadhātu (= cosmos) and cakkavāḷa cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie p. 180, 181. 2. Regional meaning.-(a) in general. Referring to this world, the character of evanescence is inherent in it; referring to the universe in a wider sense, it implies infinity, though not in definite terms. There is mention of the different metaphysical theories as regards cosmogony at many places of the Canon. The antānantikā (contending for the finitude or otherwise of the world) are mentioned as a sect at DN i.22 sq Discussions as to whether loka is sassata or antavā are found e.g. at MN i.426, MN i.484; MN ii.233; SN iii.182, SN iii.204; SN iv.286 sq. AN ii.41; AN v.31, AN v.186 sq.; Pts i.123, Pts i.151 sq.; Vb 340; Dhs 1117. Views on consistency of the world (eternal or finite; created or evolved etc.) at DN iii.137; cp SN ii.19 sq. Cp. also the long and interesting discussion of loka as suñña at SN iv.54 sq.; Pts ii.177 sq.; Nd ii.680-as well as MN ii.68 (upanīyati loko addhuvo, and “attāṇo loko, assakoloko” etc.); “lokassa anto” is lit unattainable: AN ii.50 = SN i.62; SN iv.93; but the Arahant is “lok’antagū,” cp. AN iv.430 ■ As regards their order in space (or “plane”) there are var. groupings of var worlds, the evidently popular one being that the world of the devas is above and the nirayas below the world of man (which is “tiriyaṃ vâpi majjhe”): Nd ii.550. The world of men is as ayaṃ loko contrasted with the beyond or paro loko: DN iii.181; SN iv.348 sq.; AN i.269; AN iv.226; Snp 779 (n’āsiṃsati lokaṃ imaṃ parañ ca); or as idhaloka DN iii.105. The defn of ayaṃ loko at Nd i.60 is given as: sak’attabhāva, saka-rūpa-vedanā etc., ajjhatt āyatanāni, manussa-loka, kāmadhātu; with which is contrasted paro loko as: parattabhāva, para-rūpavedanā, bāhir’āyatanāni, devaloka, rūpa-& arūpadhātu-The rise and decay of this world is referred to as; samudaya and atthaṅgama at SN ii.73; SN iii.135 SN iv.86; AN v.107 ■ Cp. DN iii.33 (attā ca loko ca); Mvu 1, Mvu 5 (lokaṃ dukkhā pamocetuṃ); 28, 4 (loko ‘yaṃ pīḷito) Pv-a 1 (vijjā-caraṇa-sampannaṃ yena nīyanti lokato)-Other divisions of var. kinds of “planes” are e.g. deva˚; AN i.115, AN i.153; AN iii.414 sq.; Brahma˚; Vb 421 Mvu 19, Mvu 45; Yama˚; Dhp 44; SN i.34; nara˚; Mvu 5, Mvu 282 See also each sep. head-word, also peta˚ & manussa˚;. The division at Nd i.550 is as follows: niraya˚, tiracchāna˚, pittivisaya˚, manussa˚, deva˚ (= material) upon which follow khandha˚, dhātu˚, āyatana˚ (= immaterial). Similarly at Nd i.29, where apāya˚; takes the place of niraya˚, tiracchāna˚, pittivisaya˚ ■ Another threefold division is saṅkhāra˚, satta˚, okāsa˚; at Vism 204, with explns: “sabbe sattā āhāra-ṭṭhitikā” ti sankhāraloka; “sassato loko ti vā asassato loko” ti sattaloka; “yāvatā candima-suriyā pariharanti disā ‘bhanti virocamānā” etc. (= MN i.328; AN i.227; cp Ja i.132) = okāsaloka. The same expln in detail at Snp-a 442 ■ Another as kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚;: see under rūpa; another as kilesa˚, bhava˚, indriya˚; at Ne 11, Ne 19. Cp. sankhāra-loka Vb-a 456; dasa lokadhātuyo (see below) SN i.26.
3. Ordinary & applied meaning.;-(a) division of the world, worldly things SN i.1, SN i.24 (loke visattikā attachment to this world; opp sabba-loke anabhirati SN v.132) ■ loke in this world among men, here DN iii.196 (ye nibbutā loke); Iti 78 (loke uppajjati); DN-a i.173 (id.); Vb 101 (yaṃ loke piya-rūpaṃ etc.); Pv ii.113 (= idaṃ C.); Kp-a 15, Kp-a 215 See also the diff. defns of loke at Nd ii.552 ■ loka collectively “one, man”: kicchaṃ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca, etc. DN ii.30. Also “people”: Lanka-loka people of Ceylon Mvu 19, Mvu 85; cp. jana in similar meaning. Derived from this meaning is the use in cpds. (˚-as “usual, every day, popular, common”: see e.g. ˚āyata, ˚vajja, ˚vohāra ■ (b) “thing of the world, material element, physical or worldly quality, sphere or category (of “materiality”). This category of loka is referred to at Vb 193, which is expld at Vb-a 220 as follows: “ettha yo ayaṃ ajjhatt’ ādi bhedo kāyo pariggahīto so eva idha-loko nāma.” In this sense 13 groups are classified according to the number of constituents in each group (1
12 and No. 18); they are given at Nd ii.551 (under lokantagū Snp 1133) as follows (1) bhavaloka; (2) sampatti bhavaloka, vipatti bhavaloka; (3) vedanā; (4) āhārā; (5) upādāna-kkhandhā (6) ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (their rise & decay as “lokassa samudaya & atthangama” at SN iv.87); (7 viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo; (8) loka-dhammā; (9) satt’āvāsā (10) upakkilesā; (11) kāmabhavā; (12) āyatanāni (18) dhātuyo. They are repeated at Pts i.122 = Pts i.174 with (1) as “sabbe sattā āhāra-ṭṭhitikā; (2) nāmañ ca rūpañ ca; and the remainder the same. Also at Vism 205 and at Snp-a 442 as at Pts i.122. Cp. the similar view at SN iv.95: one perceives the world (“materiality” loka-saññin and loka-mānin, proud of the world) with the six senses. This is called the “loka” in the logic (vinaya) of the ariyā ■ A few similes with loka see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.
-akkhāyikā (f., scil. kathā ) talk or speculation about (origin etc. of) the world, popular philosophy (see lokāyata and cp. Dialogues i.14) Vin i.188; DN i.8; MN i.513; Mil 316; DN-a i.90. -agga chief of the world Ep. of the Buddha Thag-a 69 (Ap. v.11). -anta the end (spatial) of the world AN ii.49 (na ca appatvā lokantaṃ dukkhā atthi pamocanaṃ). -antagū one who has reached the end of the world (and of all things worldly) Ep. of an Arahant AN ii.6, AN ii.49 sq.; Iti 115, Snp 1133; Nd ii.551. -antara the space between the single worlds Ja i.44 (v.253: Avīcimhi na uppajjanti, tathā lokantaresu ca). -antarika (scil. Niraya) a group of Nirayas or Purgatories situated in the lokantara (i.e. cakkavāl antaresu Ja i.76), 8,000 yojanas in extent, pitch dark which were filled with light when Gotama became the Buddha Ja i.76; Vb-a 4; Vism 207 (lokantariya˚) Snp-a 59 (˚vāsa life in the l. niraya); cp. BSk. lokântarikā Divy 204 (andhās tamaso ‘ndhakāra-tamisrā) -ādhipa lord or ruler of the world AN i.150. -ādhipateyya “rule of the world,” dependence on public opinion, influence of material things on man, one of the 3 ādhipateyyas (atta˚, loka˚, dhamma˚) DN iii.220 Vism 14. -ānukampā sympathy with the world of men [cp. BSk. lokânugraha Divy 124 sq.] DN iii.211; Iti 79 -āmisa worldly gain, bait of the flesh MN i.156; MN ii.253 Thig 356. -āyata what pertains to the ordinary view (of the world), common or popular philosophy, or as Rhys Davids (Dial. i.171) puts it: “name of a branch of Brahman learning, probably Nature-lore”; later worked into a quâsi system of “casuistry, sophistry. Franke, Dīgha trsln 19, trsls as “logisch beweisende Naturerklärung” (see the long note on this page, and cp. Dial. i.166
172 for detail of lokāyata). It is much the same as lok-akkhāy(ika) or popular philosophy. DN i.11, DN i.88; Vin ii.139; Snp p.105 (= vitaṇḍa-vādasattha Snp-a 447, as at DN-a i.247); Mil 4, Mil 10, Mil 178; AN i.163, AN i.166; AN iii.223. Cp. BSk. lokāyata Divy 630, Divy 633 and lokāyatika ibid. 619. See also Kern’s remarks at Toev. s. v. -āyatika (brāhmaṇa) one who holds the view of lokāyata or popular philosophy SN ii.77 (trslnK.S. 53: a Brahmin “wise in world-lore”); Mil 178; Ja vi.486 (na seve lokāyatikaṃ; expld as “anatthanissitaṃ… vitaṇḍa-sallāpaṃ lokāyatika-vādaṃ na seveyya,” thus more like “sophistry” or casuistry) -issara lord of the world Sdhp 348. -uttara see under lokiya. -cintā thinking about the world, worldphilosophy or speculation SN v.447; AN ii.80 (as one of the 4 acinteyyāni or thoughts not to be thought out buddha-visaya, jhāna-visaya, kamma-vipāka, l-c.). Cp BSk. laukika citta Divy 63, Divy 77 etc. -dhammā (pl. common practice, things of the world, worldly conditions SN iii.139 sq.; Snp 268 (expln loke dhammā; yāva lokappavatti tāva-anivattikā dhammā ti vuttaṃ hoti Kp-a 153, cp. Ja iii.468); Mil 146. Usually comprising a set of eight, viz. lābha, alābha, yaso, ayaso, nindā pasaṃsā, sukhaṃ, dukkhaṃ DN iii.260; AN iv.156 sq.v.53; Nd ii.55; Pts i.22, Pts i.122; Vb 387; Ne 162; Dhp-a ii.157. -dhātu constituent or unit of the Universe “world-element”; a world, sphere; another name for cakkavāla. Dasa-sahassi-lokadhātu the system of the 10,000 worlds Vin i.12; AN i.227 ■ DN iii.114; Pv ii.961 Kv 476; Vism 206 sq.; Vb 336; Nd i.356 (with the stages from one to fifty lokadhātu’s, upon which follow sahassī cūḷanikā l-dh.; dvisahassī majjhimikā; tisahassī; mahāsahassī); Ja i.63, Ja i.212; Mil 237; Vb-a 430 Vb-a 436. See also cūḷanikā. -nātha saviour of the world Ep. of the Buddha Snp 995; Vism 201, Vism 234; Vv-a 165; Pv-a 42, Pv-a 287. -nāyaka guide or leader of the world (said of the Buddha) Snp 991; Ap 20; Mvu 7, Mvu 1; Mil 222 -nirodha destruction of the world Iti 121 (opp. ˚samudaya). -pāla (˚devatā) guardian (governor) of the world, which are usually sepcified as four, viz. Kuvera (= Vessavaṇa), Dhataraṭṭha, Virūpakkha, Virūḷhaka alias the 4 mahārājāno Pv i.42; Ja i.48 (announce the future birth of a Buddha). -byūha “world-array, pl. byūhā (devā) Name of a class of devas Ja i.47; Vism 415 (kāmâvacara-deva’s). -mariyādā the boundary of the world Vv-a 72. -vajja common sins Mil 266; Kp-a 190. -vaṭṭa “world-round,” i.e. saṃsāra (opp. vivaṭṭa = nibbāna) Ne 113, Ne 119. See also vaṭṭa. -vidu knowing the universe, Lp. of the Buddha DN iii.76; SN i.62; SN v.197, SN v.343; AN ii.48; Snp p.103; Vv 3426; Pp 57; expld in full at Snp-a 442 and Vism 204 sq. -vivaraṇa unveiling of the universe, apocalypse, revelation Vism 392 (when humans see the devas etc.). -vohāra common or general distinction, popular logic, ordinary way of speaking Snp-a 383, Snp-a 466; Vb-a 164.
cp. Vedic loka in its oldest meaning “space, open space.” For etym. see rocati. To the etym. feeling of the Pāli hearer loka is closely related in quality to ruppati (as in pop. etym. of rūpa ) and rujati. As regards the latter the etym. runs “lujjati kho loko ti vuccati” SN iv.52, cp. Nd ii.550, and loka = lujjana Dhs-a 47, Dhs-a 308: see lujjana. The Dhtp 531 gives root lok (loc) in sense of dassana
(& lokika) (adj.) 1. (ordinarily) “belonging to the world,” i.e ■ (a) world-wide, covering the whole world, famed, widely known Thag 554; Ja vi.198. (b) (-˚) belonging to the world of, an inhabitant of (as lokika ) Pv i.62 (Yama˚) ■ (c) common, general worldly Vism 89 (samādhi); Dhp-a iv.3 (˚mahājana Pv-a 131 (˚parikkhaka), 207 (sukha), 220 (˚sabhāva) See also below 3.
2. (special meaning) worldly mundane, when opposed to lokuttara. The term lokuttara has two meanings-viz. (a) in ordinary sense the highest of the world, best, sublime (like lokagga etc.), often applied to Arahantship, e.g. lokuttaradāyajja inheritance of Arahantship Ja i.91; Dhp-a i.117 ideal: lokuttara dhamma (like parama dhamma) the ideal state, viz. Nibbāna MN ii.181; pl. l. dhammā MN iii.115 ■ (b) (in later canonical literature) beyond these worlds, supra-mundane, transcendental, spiritual In this meaning it is applied to the group of nava lokuttarā dhammā (viz. the 4 stages of the Path sotāpatti etc., with the 4 phala’s, and the addition of nibbāna), e.g. Dhs 1094. Mrs. Rh. D. tries to compromise between the two meanings by giving lokuttara the trsln “engaged upon the higher ideal” (Dhs. tsrl. Introd. p. 98), since meaning (b) has too much of a one-sided philosophical appearance. On term cp Cpd. 913.
3. lokiya (in meaning “mundane”) is contrasted with lokuttara (“transcendental”) at many passages of the Abhidhamma, e.g. at Pts ii.166; Dhs 505, Dhs 1093, Dhs 1446; Vb 17 sq., 93, 106, 128, 229 sq., 271 322; Kv 222, 515, 602; Pp 62; Tikp 41 sq., 52 sq. 275; Dukp 304, 324; Ne 10, Ne 54, Ne 67, Ne 77, Ne 111, Ne 161 sq. 189 sq.; Mil 236, Mil 294 (lokika), 390; Vism 10, Vism 85, Vism 438; DN-a i.331; Dhs-a 47 sq., 213; Vb-a 128, Vb-a 373; Dhp-a i.76 (lokika); ii.150; iii.272; iv.35.
fr. loka; cp. Vedic laukika in meaning “worldly, usual”
(adj.) one who pulls out DN i.167 (kesa-massu˚, habit of cert ascetics); MN i.308 (id.).
fr. loc. Caus. of luñc; cp. Sk. luñcaka
the eye; adj. (-˚) having eyes. (of… ) Pv i.115 (miga-manda˚); Pv-a 57, Pv-a 90 (pingala˚).
fr. loc or lok to see; Dhtp 532 & Dhtm 766:; loc = dassana
(nt.) pulling, tearing out DN i.167 (kesa-massu˚); AN i.296; Pp 55.
fr. loc. Caus. of luñcati
see luñcati.
(nt.) shaking, upsetting Dhtm 117. Cp. vi˚.;
luṭ; cp. *Sk. lolana & viloḷana
(nt.) salt; as adj., salty, of salt, alkaline-Vin i.202 (loṇāni bhesajjāni alkaline medicine among which are given sāmuddaṃ kāḷaloṇaṃ sindhavaṃ ubbhidaṃ bilaṃ as var. kinds of salt), 220 = 243 (as flavouring, with tela, taṇḍula & khādaniya); AN i.210 AN i.250; AN iv.108; Mil 63; Dhp-a iv.176 (in simile see below) Vv-a 98, Vv-a 100, Vv-a 184 (aloṇa sukkha-kummāsa, unsalted) On loṇa in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.
-ambila acid and salt Ja i.505; Ja ii.171, Ja ii.394. -odaka salt water Ja vi.37; Vv-a 99 (˚udaka). -kāra salt-maker Vin i.350 (˚gāma); AN ii.182 (˚dāraka); Ja vi.206 (kara) Mil 331. -ghaṭa a pitcher with salt SN ii.276. See also App. to Kp-a 68 (in Sn Index 870, 871) on Vism passage with loṇaghaṭaka. -dhūpana salt-spicing Vb-a 311 (viya sabba vyañjanesu; i.e. the strongest among all flavourings). -phala a crystal of (natural salt [phala for phaṭa = *sphaṭa, cp. phalaka] AN i.250 (in simile). -rasa alkaline taste AN iv.199, AN iv.203. -sakkhara a salt crystal (cp. ˚phala), a (solid) piece of (natural) salt SN ii.276 (in simile, cp. AN i.250); Snp-a 222 (aggimhi pakkhitta l-s., in the same simile at Dhp-a iv.176: uddhane pakkhitta-loṇa). -sakkharikā a piece of salt-crystal, used as a caustic for healing wounds Vin i.206. -sovīraka salted sour gruel Vin i.210; Vv-a 99. Lonika & Loniya;
cp. Sk. lavaṇa, for which see also lavaṇa. The Prk. form is loṇa
(adj.) salty, alkaline Dhs 629 ■ loṇiya-teliya prepared with salt & oil Ja iii.522 Ja iv.71 ■ aloṇika unsalted 426 (˚aka); Vv-a 184; Ja i.228 Ja iii.409.
fr. loṇa
Name of a tree Ja v.405; Ja vi.497.
cp. *Sk. rodhra; on sound changes see Geiger, P.Gr. 44, 622
taking away, cutting off; as tt. g. apocope, elision (of the final letter) Vb-a 164 (sabba-loka-vohāra˚); Snp-a 12, Snp-a 303, Snp-a 508; Vv-a 79 often in anunāsika˚; dropping of (final) ṃ Snp-a 410; Vv-a 154, Vv-a 275. At SN v.342 read piṇḍiy ‘ālopena for piṇḍiyā lopena ■ Cp. ālopa, nillopa, vilopa vilopiya.
fr. lup: see lumpati
covetousness, greed. Defined at Vism 468 as “lubbhanti tena, sayaṃ vā lubbhati, lubbhana-mattam eva vā taṃ,” with several comparisons following. Often found in triad of lobha, dosa, moha (greed, anger bewilderment, forming the three principles of demerit see kusala-mūla), e.g. at AN iv.96; Iti 83, Iti 84; Vism 116 Dukp 9, 18 sq. See dosa & moha; ■ DN iii.214, DN iii.275; SN i.16, SN i.43, SN i.63, SN i.123 (bhava˚); v.88; AN i.64 (˚kkhaya) 160 (visama˚), cp. DN iii.70 sq.; DN ii.67; Snp 367, Snp 371, Snp 537 (˚kodha), 663, 706, 864, 941 (˚pāpa); Nd i.15, Nd i.16, Nd i.261; Ja iv.11 (kodha, dosa, l.); Dhs 982, Dhs 1059; Vb 208, Vb 341 Vb 381, Vb 402; Ne 13, Ne 27; Vism 103; Vb-a 18; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 13 Pv-a 17, Pv-a 89 (+ dosa), 102; Vv-a 14; Sdhp 52 (˚moha), 266- alobha disinterestedness DN iii.214; Dhs 32.
-dhammā (pl.) affection of greed, things belonging to greed; (adj.) (of) greedy character MN i.91; MN iii.37; DN i.224, DN i.230; SN iv.111; AN iii.350; Ja iv.11. -mūla the root of greed Vism 454 (eightfold; with dosa-mūla moha-mūla).;
cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. lobha; fr. lubh: see lubbhati
(nt.) being greedy Thig 343 (= lobh’ uppāda Thag-a 240). Lobhaniya (iya, eyya)
fr. lobha
(adj.) 1. belonging to greed “of the nature of greed” causing greed Iti 84 (˚eyya). See rajaniya.
2. desirable Mil 361 (paduma).
grd. formation fr. lobha
(nt.) Vin ii.5 (= pannalomo hoti C.); iii.183; MN i.442. Cp. anu˚, paṭi˚, vi˚.
-kūpa a pore of the skin Ja i.67; Kp-a 51, Kp-a 63; Snp-a 155 (where given as 99,000) Vism 195 (id.). -padmaka a kind of plant Ja vi.497 (reading uncertain; v.l. lodda˚) -sundarī (f.) beautiful with hairs (on her body) Ja v.424 (Kurangavī l.; expld on p. 430 as “roma-rājiyā maṇḍita udarā”). -haṃsa horripilation, excitement with fear or wonder, thrill DN i.49; AN iv.311 sq. (sa˚); Snp 270 Vb 367; Mil 22; Vism 143; DN-a i.150. -haṃsana causing horripilation, astounding, stupendous Snp 681; Ja iv.355 (abbhuta + ); Pv iii.93; iv.35; Mil 1; Mvu 17, Mvu 55 (abbhuta + ). -haṭṭha having the hair standing on end, horrified, thunderstruck, astounded DN i.95; SN v.270; Snp p.15; Mil 23; Snp-a 155; cp. haṭṭha-loma above.
cp. Vedic roman. The (restituted) late P. form roma only at Ja v.430; Abhp 175, Abhp 259; Sdhp 119 the hair of the body (whereas kesa is the hair of the head only) DN ii.18 (ekeka˚, uddhagga˚, in characteristics of a Mahāpurisa); SN ii.257 (asi˚, usu˚, satti˚ etc.) AN ii.114; Vin iii.106 (usu˚ etc.); Snp 385; Ja i.273 (khaggo lomesu allīyi); Vb-a 57; Dhp-a i.126; Dhp-a ii.17 (˚gaṇanā); Thag-a 199; Vv-a 324 (sūkara˚); Pv-a 152 Pv-a 157; Sdhp 104. A detailed description of loma as one of the 32 ākāras of the body (Kp iii.; pl. lomā) is found at Vism 250, Vism 353; Vb-a 233; Kp-a 42, Kp-a 43 ■ aloma hairless Ja vi.457; puthu˚ having broad hair or fins name of a fish Ja iv.466; Vv 4411. haṭṭha˚; with hairs erect, excited Mvu 15, Mvu 33 ■ On loma in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131 ■ lomaṃ pāteti to let one’s hair drop, as a sign of subduedness or modesty, opp. to horripilation [pāteti formed fr. pat after wrong etym of panna in panna-loma “with drooping hairs,” which was taken as a by-form of patita: see panna-loma
(-˚) (adj.) having hair, in cpd. caturaṅga˚; having fourfold hair (i.e. on the diff. parts of the body? Vin iv.173. It may refer to the 5 dermatoid constituents of the body (see pañcaka) & thus be characteristic of outward appearance. We do not exactly see how the term; caturaṅga is used here ■ Cp. anulomika.
fr. loma
(adj.) hairy, covered with hair, downy, soft MN i.305; Pv i.92. At Ja iv.296 lomasā is expld as pakkhino, i.e. birds; reading however doubtful (vv.ll. lomahaṃsa & lomassā).;
cp. Vedic romaśa
(-˚) (adj.) having hair, in cpds. ekanta˚ & uddha˚;, of (couch-) covers or (bed) spreads: being made of hair altogether or having hair only on top Vin i.192 = Vin ii.163; DN i.7; cp. DN-a i.87. Lola (Lola)
fr. loma
(adj.) wavering, unsteady, agitated; longing, eager greedy SN iv.111; Snp 22, Snp 922; Ja i.49 (Buddha-mātā lolā na hoti), 111, 210, 339 (dhana-loḷa); ii.319 (˚manussa) iii.7; Pp 65; Nd i.366; Dāvs iv.44; Mil 300 ■ alola not greedy, not distracted (by desire), self-controlled SN v.148; Snp 65.
-bhava greediness, covetousness Thag-a 16.
fr. luḷ: see luḷati; cp. Epic & Classic Sk. lola
(f.) longing, eagerness, greed Mil 93; Snp-a 35 (āhāra˚).
fr. lola
agitated, shaken Thig 373 (= ālolita Thag-a 252).
pp. of loleti
(adj.) covetous greedy, self-indulgent Dāvs ii.73. a˚; not greedy, temperate Snp 165. Cp. nil˚ ■ f. lolupā as Name of a plant at Ja vi.537.
fr. lup, a base of lumpati but influenced by lubh, probably also by lola. See lumpati
(nt.) greediness, covetousness, self-indulgence, desire; in the language of the Abhidhamma often syn. with jappā or taṇhā. At Dhs-a 365 loluppa is treated as an adj. & expl;d at “punappuna visaye lumpati ākaḍḍhatī ti,” i.e. one who tears again & again at the object (or as; Expos. ii.470: repeated plundering, hauling along in the fields of sense)-Ja i.340, Ja i.429; Dhs-a 365; Vism 61; & with exegetical synonyms; loluppāyanā & loluppāyitattaṃ at Dhs 1059 Dhs 1136.
abstr. fr. lolupa
to make shake or unsteady AN iii.188 (khobheti + ) ■ pp. lolita.
Caus. fr. luḷ, see luḷati
see āloḷi.
(nt.) metal, esp. copper, brass or bronze It is often used as a general term & the individual application is not always sharply defined. Its comprehensiveness is evident from the classification of; loha at Vb-a 63, where it is said lohan ti jātilohaṃ, vijāti˚ kittima˚, pisāca˚; or natural metal, produced metal artificial (i.e. alloys), & metal from the Pisāca district Each is subdivided as follows:; jāti˚; = ayo, sajjhaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ, tipu, sīsaṃ, tambalohaṃ, vekantakalohaṃ vijāti˚; = nāga-nāsika˚; kittima˚; = kaṃsalohaṃ, vaṭṭa˚ ārakūṭaṃ; pisāca˚; = morakkhakaṃ, puthukaṃ, malinakaṃ capalakaṃ, selakaṃ, āṭakaṃ, bhallakaṃ, dūsilohaṃ The description ends “Tesu pañca jātilohāni pāḷiyaṃ visuṃ vuttān’ eva (i.e. the first category are severally spoken of in the Canon). Tambalohaṃ vekantakan ti imehi pana dvīhi jātilohehi saddhiṃ sesaṃ sabbam pi idha lohan ti veditabbaṃ.”-On loha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131. Cp. AN iii.16 = SN v.92 (five alloys of gold: ayo, loha, tipu, sīsaṃ, sajjhaṃ); Ja v.45 (asi˚) Mil 161 (suvaṇṇam pi jātivantaṃ lohena bhijjati) Pv-a 44, Pv-a 95 (tamba˚ = loha), 221 (tatta-loha-secanaṃ pouring out of boiling metal, one of the five ordeals in Niraya).
-kaṭāha a copper (brass) receptacle Vin ii.170. -kāra a metal worker, coppersmith, blacksmith Mil 331 -kumbhī an iron cauldron Vin ii.170. Also Name of a purgatory Ja iii.22, Ja iii.43; Ja iv.493; Ja v.268; Snp-a 59, Snp-a 480 Sdhp 195. -guḷa an iron (or metal) ball AN iv.131; Dhp 371 (mā ˚ṃ gilī pamatto; cp. Dhp-a iv.109). -jāla a copper (i.e. wire) netting Pv-a 153. -thālaka a copper bowl Nd i.226. -thāli a bronze kettle Dhp-a i.126 -pāsāda “copper terrace,” brazen palace, Name of a famous monastery at Anurādhapura in Ceylon Vism 97; DN-a i.131; Mvu passim. -piṇḍa an iron ball Snp-a 225. -bhaṇḍa copper (brass) ware Vin ii.135. -maya made of copper, brazen Snp 670; Pv ii.64. -māsa a copper bean Nd i.448 (suvaṇṇa-channa). -māsaka a small copper coin Kp-a 37 (jatu-māsaka, dāru-māsaka + ) Dhs-a 318. -rūpa a bronze statue Mvu 36, Mvu 31. -salākā a bronze gong-stick Vism 283.
Cp. Vedic loha, of Idg. *(e)reudh “red”; see also rohita & lohita
(f.) being a metal, in (suvaṇṇassa) aggalohatā the fact of gold being the best metal Vv-a 13.
abstr. fr. loha
(adj.-n..) 1. (adj.) red: rarely by itself (e.g. MN ii.17), usually in cpds. e.g. ˚abhijāti the red species (q.v.) AN iii.383; ˚kasiṇa the artifice of red DN iii.268; AN i.41; Dhs 203; Vism 173; ˚candana red sandal (unguent) Mil 191. Otherwise rohita.
2. (nt. blood; described in detail as one of the 32 ākāras at Kp-a 54 sq.; Vism 261, Vism 360; Vb-a 245 ■ Vin i.203 (āmaka˚), 205 (˚ṃ mocetuṃ); AN iv.135 (saṭṭhi-mattānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ uṇhaṃ l. mukhato uggañchi; cp. the similar passage at Mil 165); Snp 433; Pv i.67; i.91 (expld as ruhira Pv-a 44); Vism 261 (two kinds; sannicita˚; and saṃsaraṇa˚; ), 409 (the colour of the heartblood in relation to states of mind); Vb-a 66; Pv-a 56 Pv-a 78, Pv-a 110.
-akkha having red (blood-shot) eyes (of snakes yakkhas) Vv 52;2 (cp. Vv-a 224: ratta-nayanā; yakkhānaṃ hi nettāni ati-lohitāni honti); Ja vi.180. -uppāda (the crime of) wounding A Tathāgata, one of the anantariya-kammas Vb-a 427; cp. Tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeti Mil 214. -uppādaka one who sheds the blood of an Arahant Vin i.89, Vin i.136, Vin i.320; Vin v.222 -kumbhi a receptacle for blood Ud 17 (with ref. to the womb). -doṇi a bloody trough Vism 358; Vb-a 62 -pakkhandikā (or ˚pakkhandik’ ābādha) bloody diarrhoea dysentery MN i.316; DN ii.127; Ud 82; Ja ii.213; Mil 134, Mil 175; Dhp-a iii.269. -homa a sacrifice of blood DN i.9; DN-a i.93.
cp. Vedic lohita & rohita; see also P. rohita “red”
(adj.) 1. red MN ii.14; AN iv.306, AN iv.349; Ap. 1; Dhs 247, Dhs 617. -˚upadhāna a red pillow DN i.7; AN i.137; AN iii.50; AN iv.94, AN iv.231, AN iv.394; ˚sāli red rice Mil 252.
2. bloody Pv i.78 (pūti˚ gabbha) Vism 179, Vism 194.
fr. lohita
a ruby AN iv.199, AN iv.203; Ap 2; Vv 363; Vv-a 304. See masāragalla for further refs. Note. The word is not found in Vedic and Class. Sk. a later term for “ruby” is lohitaka. In the older language lohitāṅga denotes the planet Mars.
lohita + anka
is given at Dhtp 361 as a variant of ḍī to fly (see ḍeti), and expld as “ākāsa-gamana.” Similarly at Dhtm 586 as “vehāsa-gamana.”
V.
euphonic (sandhi-) consonant, historically justified after u (uv from older v), as in su-v-ānaya easy to bring (SN i.124); hence transferred to i, as in ti-v-aṅgika threefold (Dhs 161), and ti-v-aṅgula three inches wide (Vism 152, Vism 408); perhaps also in anu-v-icca (see anuvicca).
the syllable “va” Kp-a 109 (with ref. to ending ˚vā in Bhagavā, which Bdhgh expls as “va-kāraṃ dīghaṃ katvā,” i.e. a lengthening of va); Snp-a 76 (see below va3).
(indecl.) like, like as, as if; only in poetry (as already pointed out by Trenckner, Mil 422): Iti 84 (tālapakkaṃ va bandhanā), 90 (chavālātaṃ va nassati); Dhp 28; Snp 38 (vaṃso visālo va: see C. expln under va3); Pv i.81 (ummatta-rūpo va; = viya Pv-a 39); i.116 (naḷo va chinno); Mil 72 (chāyā va anapāyinī); Ja iii.189 (kusamuddo va ghosavā); iv.139 (aggîva suriyo va); Dhp-a iii.175.
the enclitic, shortened form of iva after long vowels. Already to be found for iva in RV metri causâ
(indecl.) even, just (so), only; for sure, certainly Dhp 136 (aggi-daḍḍho va tappati); Ja i.138, Ja i.149 (so pi suvaṇṇa-vaṇṇo va ahosi) 207; Snp-a 76 (vakāro avadhāraṇ’ attho eva -kāro vā ayaṃ, sandhi-vasen’ ettha e-kāro naṭṭho: wrong at this passage Snp 38 for va2 = iva!); Pv-a 3 (eko va putto), 4 (ñātamattā va).
for eva, after long vowels
is (metrically) shortened form of vā, as found e.g. Dhp 195 (yadi va for yadi vā); or in correlation va-va either-or: Dhp 108 (yiṭṭhaṃ va hutaṃ va), 138 (ābādhaṃ va cittakkhepaṃ va pāpuṇe).
1. a bamboo Snp 38 (vaṃso visālo va; vaṃso expld at Nd ii.556 as “veḷugumba,” at Snp-a 76 as “veḷu”), ibid. (˚kaḷīra)
J vi.57; Vism 255 (˚kaḷīra); Kp-a 50 (id.).
2. race lineage, family AN ii.27 (ariya˚ of noble family); SN v.168 (caṇḍāla˚); Ja i.89, Ja i.139; Ja iv.390 (caṇḍāla˚); v.251 (uju˚); Mvu 4, Mvu 5 (pitu-ghātaka-vaṃso a parricidal race)
3. tradition, hereditary custom, usage, reputation Mil 148 (ācariya˚), 190 (Tathāgatānaṃ); Kp-a 12 (Buddha˚); Dpvs 18, 3 (saddhamma˚-kovidā therā)- vaṃsaṃ nāseti to break family tradition Ja v.383 vaṃsaṃ ucchindati id. Ja v.383; or upacchindati Ja iv.63 opp. patiṭṭhāpeti to establish the reputation Ja v.386
4. dynasty Mvu 36, Mvu 61 (kassa v. ṭhassati).
5. a bamboo flute, fife Mil 31; Vv-a 210.
6. a certain game, at DN i.6 in enumn of pastimes and tricks (caṇḍālavaṃsa-dhopana), a passage which shows an old corruption Bdhgh at DN-a i.84 takes each word separately and expls vaṃsa as “veṇuṃ ussāpetvā kīḷanaṃ” (i.e. a game consisting in raising a bamboo; is it climbing a pole? Cp. vaṃsa-ghatikā “a kind of game” Divy 475) against Dial. i.9 “acrobatic feats by Caṇḍālas.” Cp Ja iv.390 in same passage. Franke (Dīgha trsln) has “bamboo-tricks”; his conjecture as “vaṃsa-dhamanaṃ,” playing the bamboo pipe (cp. Mil 31: “vaṃsadhamaka”), as oldest reading is to be pointed out. On vaṃsa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 134.
-āgata come down fr. father to son, hereditary Mvu 23, Mvu 85. -ānupālaka guarding tradition Sdhp 474 (ariya˚). -ānurakkhaka preserving the lineage, carrying on the tradition Ja iv.444; Vism 99 (+ paveṇi-pālaka) Dhp-a iii.386. -coraka Name of a certain kind of reed (cp coraka: plant used for perfume) Ja v.406 (C. for veḷuka) -ja belonging to a race Mvu 1, Mvu 1 (suddha˚). -ñña born of good family AN ii.27. -dhara upholding tradition Mil 164. -dharaṇa id. Mil 226. -nalaka bamboo reed Kp-a 52, Kp-a 59 (with note Sn Index p. 870: naḷaka)-nāḷa id. Mil 102. -rāga the colour of bamboo, a term for the veḷuriya gem Ja iv.141. -vaṇṇa the veḷuriya gem Abhp 491.
Vedic vaṃśa reed, bamboo (R.V.)
(-˚) (adj.) descended from, belonging to a family (of) SN v.168 (caṇḍāla˚).
fr. vaṃsa
wolf, only in poetry Snp 201; Ja i.336; Ja ii.450; Ja v.241, Ja v.302.
Vedic vṛka, Idg. *ṷI̊qṷo = Lat. lupus, Gr. λύκος, Lith. vilkas, Goth. wulfs = E. wolf etc.
(indecl.): a root vak is given at Dhtp 7 & Dhtm 8 in meaning “ādāne,” i.e. grasping, together with a root kuk as synonym. It may refer to vaka1 wolf, whereas kuk would explain koka wolf. The notion of voraciousness is prevalent in the characterization of the wolf (see all passages of vaka1, e.g. Ja v.302).
a tree (Mimusops elengi) Ja v.420.
cp. *Sk. vakula
(adj.) crooked Ja i.216.
Vedic vakra; the usual P. form is vanka
(nt.) the kidney Snp 195; Kp iii.; Mil 26; Dhs-a 140. In detail described as one of the 32 ākāras at Vism 255, Vism 356; Vb-a 60, Vb-a 239, Vb-a 356.
-pañcaka the series of five (constituents of the body beginning with the kidney. These are vakka, hadaya yakana, kilomaka, pihaka: Vb-a 249.
Vedic vṛkka
a term for bird, poetically for sakuṇa Ja i.216 (tesaṃ ubhosu passesu pakkhā vankā jātā ti vakkangā C.).
vakkaṃ + ga
is fut. of vac: he will say, e.g. at Vin ii.190; Vin iv.238. See vatti.
1. the bark of a tree Ja ii.13 (˚antara); iii.522.
2. a bark garment (worn by ascetics): see vakkali.
cp. BSk. valkala (e.g. Jtm 210): see vāka
(“bark-like,” or “tuft”?) is at Kp-a 50 as the Vism reading, where Kp-a reads daṇḍa. The P.T.S. ed. of Vism (p. 255) reads wrongly cakkalaka.
wearing a garment of bark, an ascetic, lit. “barker” Ja ii.274 (˚sadda the sound of the bark-garment-wearer). See also Np. Vakkali.
in compn for in
(adj.) (-˚) in danta˚; peeling bark with one’s teeth, designation of a cert. kind of ascetics DN-a i.271.
fr. vakkala
1. a company, section group, party Vin i.58 (du˚, ti˚), 195 (dasa˚ a chapter of 10 bhikkhus).
2. a section or chapter of a canonical book Dhp-a i.158 (eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam pi) Dhs-a 27.
-uposatha celebration (of the uposatha) in groups “incomplete congregation” (trsln Oldenberg) Dpvs 7 36. More likely to vagga2! -gata following a (sectarian) party (Bdhgh identifies this with the 62 diṭṭhigatikā Snp-a 365) SN i.187; Snp 371. -bandha, in instr ˚ena group by group Mvu 32, Mvu 11. -bandhana banded together, forming groups Dhp-a iv.93, Dhp-a iv.94. -vagga in crowds, confused, heaped up Ja vi.224; Pv-a 54. -vādaka taking somebody’s part Vin iii.175. -sārin conforming to a (heretic) party Snp 371, Snp 800, Snp 912; Nd i.108, Nd i.329.
Vedic varga, fr. vṛj; cp. Lat. volgus & vulgus (= E. vulgar) crowd, people
(adj.-n..) dissociated, separated; incomplete; at difference dissentious Vin i.111 sq., 129, 160; iv.53 (sangha) AN i.70 (parisā); ii.240 ■ instr. vaggena separately secessionally, sectariously Vin i.161; Vin iv.37, Vin iv.126.
-ārāma fond of dissociation or causing separation MN i.286; Iti 11 (+ adhamma-ṭṭha; trsln Seidenstücker not quite to the point: rejoicing in parties, i.e. vagga1 = Vin ii.205. -kamma (ecclesiastical) act of an incomplete chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.315 sq. (opp. sam agga-kamma) ■ rata = ˚ārāma.
vi + agga, Sk. vyagra; opposed to samagga
to jump Vv 649 (expld at Vv-a 278 as “kadāci pade padaṃ” [better: padāpadaṃ?] nikkhipantā vagganena gamane [read: vagga-gamanena gacchanti); Ja ii.335, Ja ii.404; Ja iv.81, Ja iv.343; Ja v.473.
valg, to which belong Oicel. valka to roll; Ags. wealkan = E. walk
(nt.) distraction, dissension, secession, sectarianism Vin i.316 (opp. samaggatta).
abstr. fr. vagga2
see vaggati (ref. of Vv 649).
(-˚) (adj.) belonging to a group, forming a company, a party of (-˚), e.g. pañcavaggiyā therā Ja i.57, Ja i.82; bhikkhū MN i.70; MN ii.94; chabbaggiyā bhikkhū (the group of 6 bh.) Vin i.111 sq., 316 sq. & passim sattarasa-vaggiyā bhikkhū (group of 17) Vin iv.112.
fr. vagga1
(adj.) lovely, beautiful pleasant, usually of sound (sara) DN ii.20 (˚ssara); SN i.180 SN i.190; Snp 350, Snp 668; Vv 53, 361, 364 (˚rūpa), 5018 (girā) 636, 6410 (ghoso suvaggu), 6420, 672, 8417; Pv i.113ii.121; iii.34; Ja ii.439; Ja iii.21; Ja v.215; Sdhp 245. The foll. synonyms are frequently given in Vv-a & Pv-a as expl;ns of vaggu: abhirūpa, cāru, madhura, rucira savanīya, siniddha, sundara, sobhaṇa.
-vada of lovely speech or enunciation Snp 955 (= madhura-vada, pemaniya-vada, hadayangama˚, karavīkaruda-mañju-ssara Nd i.446). Vagguli & i
cp. Vedic valgu, fr. valg; freq. in combn with vadati “to speak lovely words”
(m. & f.) a bat Vin ii.148; Mil 364, Mil 404; Vism 663 (in simile) Dhp-a iii.223.
-rukkha a tree on which bats live Vism 74. -vata “bat-practice,” a certain practice of ascetics Ja i.493 Ja iii.235; Ja iv.299.
cp. Sk. valgulī, of; valg to flutter
(adj.-n.), I. (adj.).
1. crooked, bent, curved MN i.31 (+ jimha); SN iv.118 (read v-daṇḍā); Vin ii.116 (suttā vankā honti); Ja i.9 (of kāja); iv.362 (˚daṇḍa), Pv-a 51 With ref. to a kind of vīṇā at Vv-a 281.
2. (fig. crooked, deceitful, dishonest Ja iii.313 (of crows: kākānaṃ nāmaṃ C.); vi.524; Pv iv.134 (a˚); Snp 270 (probably to be read dhaṅka as Snp-a 303, = kāka).
3. doubtful deceitful, deceptive, i.e. haunted Vv 843, cp. Vv-a 334-II. (m.)
1. a bend, nook, curve (of ponds) Ja ii.189 Ja vi.333 (sahassa˚).
2. a hook Ja v.269.
3. a fishhook DN ii.266; Thag 749; Ja vi.437 ■ On vaṅka in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.
-aṅgula a crooked finger AN iii.6. -ātivaṅkin having curves upon curves (in its horns), with very crooked antlers Ja i.160 (said of a deer). -gata running in bends or crooked (of a river) Ja i.289. -ghasta (a fish) having swallowed the hook DN ii.266; Ja vi.113. -chidda a crooked hole DN-a i.112. -dāṭha having a bent fang (of a boar) Ja ii.405.
cp. Vedic vanka & vakra bending; also Ved. vanku moving, fluttering, walking slant; vañcati to waver, walk crooked. Cp. Lat. con-vexus “convex, Ags. wōh “wrong,” Goth. wāhs; Ohg. wanga cheek and others ■ The Dhtp 5 gives “koṭilya” as meaning of vaṅk. Another Pāli form is vakka (q.v.). The Prk. forms are both vakka & vanka: Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 74
(nt.) a sort of toy: Rh. D. “toyplough” (Dial. i.10); Kern “miniature fish-hook (Toev. s. v.). Rh. D. derives it fr. Sk. vṛka (see P vaka1). Bdhgh at DN-a i.86 takes it as “toy-plough. See DN i.6; Vin ii.10 (v.l. vangaka & vankata); iii.180 (v.l. cangaka); AN v.203 (T. vanka; v.l. vankaka); Mil 229. At Thag-a 15 vaṅkaka is used in general meaning of “something crooked” (to explain Thig 11 khujja ) which is specified at Thag 43 as sickle, plough and spade.
fr. vanka
(f.) & Vaṅkatta (nt.) crookedness A 1 112 (tt); Dhs 1339; Vb-a 494.
abstr. fr. vanka
(adj.) “of a crooked kind,” crooked-like; nt. twisting, crookedness, dishonesty MN i.340; AN iv.189; AN v.167.
grd. formation fr. vanka
at DN-a i.223 is syn. with kaṇa and means some kind of fault or flaw. It is probably a wrong spelling for vaṅka.
to go, walk, waver; found only in Dhtp (No. 29) as root vaṅg in meaning “gamana. Perhaps confused with valg; see vaggati.
cp. *Sk. vangati, to which belongs vañjula. Idg. *ṷag to bend; cp. Lat. vagor to roam, vagus = vague Ohg. wankon to waver
(nt.) a kind of root Vin i.201 = Vin iv.35. Cp. vacattha.
(f.) is found only in cpd. dubbacatā surliness Ja i.159.
abstr. fr. vaco
see vatti.
vac
(nt.) a kind of root Vin i.201 = Vin iv.35.
(nt.) 1. speaking, utterance, word, bidding SN ii.18 (alaṃ vacanāya one says rightly); iv.195 (yathā bhūtaṃ); AN ii.168; Snp 417, Snp 699 Snp 932, Snp 984, Snp 997; Mil 235; Pv ii.27; Snp-a 343, Snp-a 386-mama vacanena in my name Pv-a 53 ■ dubbacana a bad word Thig 418 (= dur-utta-vacana Thag-a 268)- vacanaṃ karoti to do one’s bidding Ja i.222, Ja i.253. 2. (t. t. g.) what is said with regard to its grammatical syntactical or semantic relation, way of speech, term expression, as: āmantana˚; term of address Kp-a 167; Snp-a 435; paccatta˚; expression of sep. relation, i.e. the accusative case Snp-a 303; piya˚; term of endearment Nd ii.130; Snp-a 536; puna˚; repetition Snp-a 487; vattamāna˚; the present tense Snp-a 16, Snp-a 23; visesitabba˚ qualifying (predicative) expression Vv-a 13; sampadāna˚ the dative relation Snp-a 317. At Snp-a 397 (combd with linga and other terms) it refers to the “number,” i.e. singular & plural.;
-attha word-analysis or meaning of words Vism 364; Snp-a 24. -kara one who does one’s bidding, obedient a servant Vv 165; 8421; Ja ii.129; Ja iv.41 (vacanaṃ-kara) v.98; Pv-a 134. -khama gentle in words SN ii.282; AN iv.32. -paṭivacana speech and counterspeech (i.e. reply), conversation Dhp-a ii.35; Pv-a 83, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 117 -patha way of saying, speech MN i.126 (five ways, by which a person is judged: kālena vā akālena vā, bhūtena & a˚, saṇhena & pharusena, attha-saṃhitena an˚, mettacittā & dosantarā); AN ii.117, AN ii.153; AN iii.163 AN iv.277, cp. DN iii.236; Vv 6317 (= vacana Vv-a 262) Snp-a 159, Snp-a 375. -bheda variance in expression, different words, kind of speech Snp-a 169, cp. vacanamatte bhedo Snp-a 471. -vyattaya distinction or specification of expression Snp-a 509. -sampaṭiggaha “taking up together,” summing up (what has been said), résumé Kp-a 100. -sesa the rest of the words Pv-a 14, Pv-a 18, Pv-a 103.
fr. vac; Vedic vacana
(adj.) to be spoken to, or to be answered DN i.175; Snp p.140.
grd. formation fr. vacana
(adj.) (-˚) having speech, speaking, in cpd. saddheyya˚; of credible speech trustworthy Vin iii.188.
the adj. form of vaco = vacas
(˚-) speech, words; rare by itself (and in this case re-established from cpds. and poetical, as at Snp 472 (yassa vacī kharā; expld at Snp-a 409 by “vācā”), 973 (cudito vacīhi = vācāhi Snp-a 574). Otherwise in cpds, like: -gutta controlled in speech Snp 78. -para one who excels in words (not in actions), i.e. a man of words Ja ii.390. -parama id. DN iii.185. -bheda “kind of words,” what is like speech, i.e. talk or language Vin iv.2; Mil 231 (meaning here: break of the vow of speech?); various saying detailed speech, specification Kp-a 13; Snp-a 464, Snp-a 466 See also vākya-bheda & vācaṃ bhindati. -viññatti intimation by language Vism 448; Mil 370; Dhs 637 -vipphāra dilating in talk Mil 230, Mil 370. -samācāsa good conduct in speech MN ii.114; MN iii.45; DN iii.217. Often coupled (as triad) with kāya˚ & mano˚; (= in deed & in mind; where vācā is used when not compounded) e.g. in (vacī) -kamma (+ kāya˚ & mano˚) deed by word MN i.373, MN i.417; MN iii.207; DN iii.191, DN iii.245; ˚duccarita misbehaviour in words (four of these, viz. musāvāda pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpa AN ii.141; DN iii.52, DN iii.96, DN iii.111, DN iii.214, DN iii.217; Nd i.386; Pp 60; Dhp-a i.23 Dhp-a iii.417; ˚saṅkhāra antecedent or requisite for speech MN i.301; AN iii.350; SN iv.293; Vb-a 167; Vism 531 ˚sañcetanā intention by word Vb-a 144; ˚sucarita good conduct in speech AN ii.141 (the 4: sacca-vācā, apisuṇā vācā, saṇhā vācā, mantā bhāsā).
the composition form of vaco
(& vaca ) (nt.) speech, words, saying; nom. & acc.; vaco Snp 54, Snp 356, Snp 988, Snp 994, Snp 1006 Snp 1057, Snp 1110, Snp 1147; Ja i.188; Nd i.553 (= vacana byāpatha desanā anusandhi); Pv i.1112. instr. vacasā Vin ii.95 (dhammā bahussutā honti dhatā v. paricitā); iii.189; SN i.12 (+ manasā); Snp 365, Snp 663, Snp 890 (= vacanena Nd i.299); Vism 241; Mvu 19, Mvu 42 ■ As adj. (-˚) vaca in combn with du˚; as dubbaca having bad speech, using bad language, foul-mouthed MN i.95; SN ii.204; AN ii.147 AN iii.178; AN v.152 sq.; Ja i.159; Pp 20; Sdhp 95, Sdhp 197. Opp suvaca of nice speech MN i.126; AN v.24 sq.; Pv iv.133 (= subbaca Pv-a 230) ■ Cp. vacī & vācā.;
Vedic vacas, of vac
(nt.) excrement, faeces Vin ii.212; Vin iv.229, Vin iv.265; Vism 250 (a baby’s); Vb-a 232 (id.), 243; Pv-a 268 ■ vaccaṃ osajjati, or karoti to ease oneself Ja i.3; Pv-a 268.
-kuṭī (& kuṭi); a privy Vin ii.221; Ja i.161; Ja ii.10 Vism 235, Vism 259, Vism 261; Vb-a 242; Dhp-a ii.55, Dhp-a ii.56; Pv-a 266, Pv-a 268. -kūpa a cesspool Vin ii.221; Ja v.231; Vism 344 sq.; Dhp-a i.180. -ghaṭa a pot for excrements chamber utensil, commode Vin i.157 = Vin ii.216; MN i.207 -doṇikā id. Vin ii.221. -magga “the way of faeces, excrementary canal, opening of the rectum Vin ii.221 Vin iii.28 sq., 35; Ja i.502; Ja iv.30. -sodhaka a privy-cleaner night-man Mvu 10, Mvu 91.
cp. BSk. vaccaḥ Avs i.254
(adj.) energetic imposing DN i.114 (brahma˚; Dial. i.146 “fine in presence ” cp. DN-a i.282). See also under brahma. Note. The P. root vacc is given at Dhtm 59 in meaning of “ditti,” i.e. splendour.
cp. Sk. varcasvin & Ved. varcin, having splendour, might or energy, fr. Vedic varcas
wanting to ease oneself, oppressed with vacca Vin ii.212, Vin ii.221.
pp. of vacceti, Denom. of vacca
a calf Dhp 284; Ja v.101; Vism 163 (in simile) 269 (id.; kūṭa˚ a maimed calf); Dhs-a 62 (with popular etym. “vadatī ti vaccho”); Vv-a 100, Vv-a 200 (taruṇa˚). On vaccha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.
-giddhinī longing for her calf SN iv.181. -gopālaka a cow-herd Vism 28. -danta “calf-tooth,” a kind of arrow or javelin MN i.429; Ja vi.448. -pālaka cow-herd Vv 512.
Vedic vatsa, lit. “one year old, a yearling”; cp. Gr. ε ̓́τος year, Sk. vatsara id., Lat vetus old, vitulus calf; Goth. wiprus a year old lamb = Ohg. widar = E wether
a tree; only in mālā˚; an ornamental plant Vin ii.12; Vin iii.179; Vism 172; Dhp-a ii.109.
= rukkha, fr. vṛkṣa
a (little) calf Ja iii.444; Ja v.93, Ja v.433; Mil 282 (as go-vacchaka).
-pālaka a cow-herd Ja iii.444. -sālā cow-shed, cowpen Ja v.93; Mil 282.
Demin. fr. vaccha1
a weaned calf bullock DN i.127, DN i.148; SN i.75; AN ii.207; AN iv.41 sq.; Pp 56; DN-a i.294 ■ f. vacchatarī DN i.127; SN i.75; Vin i.191; Pp 56.
fr. vaccha; the compar. suffix in meaning “sort of,-like.” Cp. Sk. vatsatara
is fut. of vasati to dwell.
year Sdhp 239. See the usual saṃvacchara.
cp. Class. Sk. vatsara
(adj.) affectionate, lit. “loving her calf” Thag-a 148 (Ap v.64).
cp. Sk. vatsala
a cattle-fold, cow-pen AN iii.393; Ja ii.300; Ja iii.270, Ja iii.379; Vism 166, Vism 279; Dhp-a i.126, Dhp-a i.396 ■ giribbaja a (cattle or sheep) run on the mountain Ja iii.479; as Npl. at Snp 408.
Vedic vraja: see vajati
to go, proceed, get to (acc.), lit. to turn to (cp. vṛj, vṛṇakti, pp. vṛkta, which latter coincides with vṛtta of vṛt in P. vatta: see vatta1 & cp. vajjeti to avoid, vajjita, vajjana etc.) Snp 121, Snp 381, Snp 729 (jātimaraṇa-saṃsāraṃ), 1143; Ja iii.401; Ja iv.103 (nirayaṃ) Pv iv.172 (Pot. vajeyya); Nd ii.423 (= gacchati kamati) Mvu 11, Mvu 35 (imper. vaja as v.l.; T. reads bhaja). See cpds. anubbajati, upabb˚, pabb˚, paribb˚.
Vedic vraj, cp. Ved. vraja (= P. vaja) & vṛjana enclosure = Av. vərəƶə̄na-, with which cp. Gr.; ει ̓́ργνυμι to enclose, εἱργμός, Lat. vergo to turn; Gaelic fraigh hurdle; Ags. wringan = E. wring = Ger. ringen, E. wrinkle = Ger. renken, and many others, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. vergo ■ The Dhtp (59) defines vaj (together with aj ) by “gamana”
see rajo-vajalla.
a thunderbolt; usually with ref. to Sakka’s (= Indra’s) weapon DN i.95 = MN i.231 (ayasa); Thag 419; Ja i.134 (vajira-pūritā viya garukā kucchi “as if filled with Sakka’s thunderbolt.” Dutoit takes it in meaning vajira2 and trsls “with diamonds”) Snp-a 225 (˚āvudha the weapon of Sakka).
-pāṇin having a thunderbolt in his hand (Name of a yakkha) DN i.95 = MN i.231.
cp. Vedic vajira, Indra’s thunderbolt; Idg. *ṷeĝ = Sk. vaj, cp. Lat. vegeo to thrive, vigeo → vigour Av. vaƶra; Oicel. vakr = Ags. wacor = Ger. wacker; also E. wake etc. See also vājeti
(m. & nt.) a diamond AN i.124 (˚ûpamacitta) = Pp 30; Dhp 161; Ja iv.234; Mil 118, Mil 267, Mil 278; Mvu 30, Mvu 95; Kp-a 110 (˚sankhāta-kāya) Dhp-a i.387 (˚panti row of diamonds), 392 sq.
cp. Sk. vajra = vajira;1
Name of several plants, a tree (the ratan: Halāyudha 2 46) Ja v.420. See also vaṅgati.
cp. Sk. vañjula. Given as vañjula at Abhp 553
(nt.) that which should be avoided, a fault, sin DN ii.38; SN i.221; Vin ii.87 (thūla˚ a grave sin); AN i.47, AN i.98; AN iv.140; Pts i.122; Dhp 252; Vb-a 342 (syn. with dosa and garahitabba) Kp-a 23 (paṇṇatti˚ & pakati˚), 24 (id.), 190 (loka˚) DN-a i.181 (= akusala-dhamma). Freq. in phrase aṇumattesu vajjesu bhaya-dassāvin “seeing a source of fear even in the slightest sins” DN i.63; SN v.187 and passim. -˚dassin finding fault Dhp 76 (expld in detail at Dhp-a ii.107) ■ anavajja & sāvajja;, the relation of which to vajja is doubtful, see avajja.
grd. of vajjati, cp. Sk. varjya
(adj.-n..) 1. “to be said,” i.e. speaking DN i.53 (sacca˚ = sacca-vacana DN-a i.160). See also mosa-vajja.
2. “to be sounded, i.e. musical instrument Ja i.500 (˚bheri). Vajja, vajja, vajjum
cp. Sk. vādya, grd. of vad
: Pot. of vad, see vadati.
to turn etc.; only as Pass. form vajjati [in form = Ved. vṛjyate to be avoided, to be excluded from (abl.) Mil 227 Kp-a 160 (˚itabba, in pop. etym. of Vajjī ) ■ Caus vajjeti (*varjayati) to avoid, to abstain from, renounce Sdhp 10, Sdhp 11, Sdhp 200. Cp. pari˚, vi˚.
vṛj, Vedic vṛṇakti & varjati to turn; in etym. related to vajati. Dhtp 547: “vajjane”
Pass of vad, see vadati.
(nt.) avoidance, shunning Vism 5 (opp. sevana); Dhp-a iii.417.
fr. vajjati
(adj.) to be avoided, to be shunned; improper Mil 166 (i.e. bad or uneven parts of the wood), 224.
grd. formation fr. vajjati1
(adj.) sinful SN iii.194.
vajja1 + vant
(adj.) to be killed, slaughtered or executed; object of execution; meriting death Vin iv.226; Snp 580 (go vajjho viya); Ja ii.402 (cora) vi.483 (= vajjhappatta cora C.); Vism 314; Kp-a 27- avajjha not to be slain, scathless Snp 288 (brāhmaṇa) Mil 221 = Ja v.49; Mil 257 (˚kavaca invulnerable armour).
-ghāta a slaughterer, executioner Thig 242 (cp Thag-a 204) ■ cora a robber (i.e. criminal) waiting to be executed Pv-a 153. -paṭaha-bheri the execution drum Pv-a 4. -bhāvapatta condemned to death Ja i.439 -sūkariyo (pl.) sows which had no young, barren sows (read vañjha˚!) Ja ii.406.
grd. of vadhati
(adj.) (-˚) = vajjha Dhs-a 239.
(f.) execution; only in cpd. (as vajjha˚) ˚ppatta condemned to death, about to be executed Vin iv.226; Ja ii.119, Ja ii.264; Ja vi.483.
cp. Sk. vadhyā
to destroy, kill Ja vi.527 (siro vajjhayitvāna). Kern, Toev. s. v. vaddh˚ proposes reading vaddhayitvāna (of a root vardh to cut), cutting off is perhaps better. The expression is hapax legomenon.
Denom. fr. vajjha
1. to walk about Ja i.214 (inf. ˚ituṃ = pādacāra-gamanena gantuṃ C.).
2. Caus. vañceti to cheat, deceive, delude, elude DN i.50; Snp 100, Snp 129, Snp 356; Ja iii.420 (aor. avañci = vañcesi C.); vi.403 (˚etu-kāma) Pv iii.42; Mil 396; Mvu 25, Mvu 69 (tomaraṃ avañcayi). pp. vañcita.
vañc: see etym. under vanka ■ The Dhtp distinguishes two roots vañc, viz. “gamane” (46) and “palambhane” (543), thus giving the lit. & the fig meanings
(nt.) deception, delusion, cheating, fraud, illusion DN i.5; DN iii.176; AN ii.209; Snp 242; Pv iii.95; Pp 19; Ja iv.435; Dhs-a 363 (for māyā Dhs 1059); DN-a i.79; Dhp-a iii.403; Pv-a 193-vañcana in lit. meaning of vañcati 1 is found in avañcana not tottering Ja i.214.
fr. vañc, cp. Epic Sk. vañcana
(adj.) deceiving; a cheat DN iii.183; Thag 940; Mil 290.
fr. vañcana
(adj.) deceiving, deluding Thig 490.
grd. formation fr. vañcana, cp. Mvu ii.145: vañcanīya
deceived, cheated Ja i.287 (vañcit’ ammi = vañcitā amhi).
pp. of vañceti
see vajuḷa.
(adj.) barren, sterile DN i.14, DN i.56; MN i.271; SN ii.29 (a˚); iv.169; v.202 (a˚) Pv iii.45 (a˚ = anipphala C.); Ja ii.406 (˚sūkariyo: so read for vajjha˚); Mil 95; Vism 508 (˚bhāva); Dhp-a i.45 (˚itthi); DN-a i.105; Pv-a 31, Pv-a 82; Vv-a 149; Sdhp 345 (a˚).
cp. Epic & later Sk. bandhya
the Indian fig tree Ja i.259 (˚rukkha); iii.325; Mvu 6, Mvu 16; Dhp-a i.167 (˚rukkha) Pv-a 113.
cp. Epic Sk. vaṭa. A root vaṭ; not connected with this vaṭa is given at Dhtm 106 in meaning “veṭhana”: see vaṭaṃsa
at Pp 45, Pp 46 (tuccho pi hito pūro pi vaṭo) read ti pihito pūro vivaṭo. See vivaṭa.
a kind of head ornament perhaps ear-ring or garland worn round the forehead Mvu 11, Mvu 28 (C. expls as “kaṇṇapilandhanaṃ vaṭaṃsakan ti vuttaṃ hoti”). Usually as vaṭaṃsaka Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; Thag 523; Vv 385 (expld as “ratanamayā kaṇṇikā” (pl.) at Vv-a 174); Ja vi.488; Vv-a 178 Vv-a 189, Vv-a 209 ■ Note. The root vaṭ; given as “veṭhana” at Dhtm 106 probably refers to vaṭaṃsa.
for avaṭaṃsa: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 661; cp. Sk. avataṃsa with t; Prk. vaaṃsa
a small ball or thickening, bulb, tuber; in muḷāla˚; the (edible) tuber of the lotus Ja vi.563 (C. kaṇḍaka).
cp. *Sk. vaṭaka, fr. vaṭa rope
a rope, cable Ja iii.478 (nāvā sa-vaṭākarā).
probably distorted by metathesis from Sk. vaṭārakā. Fr. vaṭa rope. On etym. of the latter see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. volvo
(nt.) a road, path DN ii.8; SN iv.52 (chinna˚); Ja iii.412; Vism 123 (sa˚ a˚). Cp.; ubbaṭuma & parivaṭuma;.
cp. Vedic vartman, fr. vṛt
(adj.-n..) 1. round circular; (nt.) circle Pv-a 185 (āyata + ); Kp-a 50 (˚nāli). See cpd. ˚aṅguli.
2. (fig.) “rolling on,” the “round” of existences, cycle of transmigrations, saṃsāra evolution (= involution) (as forward or ascending circle of existences, without implying a teleological idea in contrast to vivaṭṭa “rolling back” or devolution, i.e. a new (descending) cycle of existence in a new aeon with inverted [vi-] motion, so to speak) SN iii.63; SN iv.53 (pariyādiṇṇa˚), cp. MN iii.118; Thag 417 (sabba˚: “all constant rolling on” trsln); Snp-a 351 (= upādāna) Dhs-a 238 ■ There are 3 vaṭṭas, (te-bhūmaka vaṭṭa see also tivaṭṭa) embracing existence in the stages of kamma- vaṭṭa, kilesa˚; and vipāka˚; or circle of deed sin & result (found only in Commentarial literature) Kp-a 189; Snp-a 510 (tebhūmaka˚); Dhp-a i.289 (kilesa˚) iv.69 (tebhūmaka˚). See also Māra; and ˚dukkha ˚vivaṭṭa below.
3. “what has been proffered, expenditure, alms (as t. t.) Ja vi.333 (dāna˚ alms-gift) Dhp-a ii.29 (pāka˚ cooked food as alms); Vv-a 222 (id.) Mvu 32, Mvu 61 (alms-pension); 34, 64 (salāka-vaṭṭabhatta) ■ Cp. vi˚.
-aṅguli a rounded (i.e. well-formed) finger; adj. having round fingers Vv 6413 (= anupubbato v., i.e. regularly formed, Vv-a 280); Ja v.207, Ja v.215. -aṅgulika same as last Ja v.204. -ānugata accompanied by (or affected with) saṃsāra Ja i.91 (dhana). -ūpaccheda destruction of the cycle of rebirths AN ii.34 = Iti 88; AN iii.35; Vism 293. -kathā discussion about saṃsāra Vism 525; DN-a i.126; Vb-a 133. -kāra a worker in brass. The meaning of vaṭṭa in this connection is not clear; the same vaṭṭa occurs in ˚loha (“round” metal?). Kern Toev. s. v. compares it with Sk. vardhra leather strap taking vaṭṭa as a corruption of vaḍḍha, but the connection brass → leather seems far-fetched. It is only found at Mil 331. -dukkha the “ill” of transmigration (a Commentary expression) Vism 315; Dhp-a iv.149; Vv-a 116. -paṭighātaka (ṃ) (vivaṭṭaṃ) (a devolution destroying evolution, i.e. salvation from saṃsāra Snp-a 106. -bhaya fear of saṃsāra Vb-a 256. -mūla the root of saṃsāra Dhp-a iii.278. -vivaṭṭa (1) evolving and devolving; going round and back again, i.e. all round (a formation after the manner of reduplicative cpds like cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa in intensive-iterative meaning) ˚vasena in direct and inverse succession, all round completely Ja i.75. Cp. also vatta-paṭivatta ■ (2 saṃsāra in ascending and descending lines, evolution (“involution”) and devolution, or one round of transmigration and the other. It is dogmatically defined at Ne 113 as “vaṭṭaṃ saṃsāro vivaṭṭaṃ nibbānaṃ (similarly, opposed to vaṭṭa at DN-a i.126) which is however not the general meaning, the vivaṭṭa not necessarily meaning a nibbāna stage. See Snp-a 106 (quoted above); Vv-a 68. We have so far not found any passage where it might be interpreted in the comprehensive sense as meaning “the total round of existences ” after the fashion of cpds. like bhavâbhava -loha “round metal” (?), one of the 3 kittima-lohāni mentioned at Vb-a 63 (kaṃsa˚, vaṭṭa˚, ārakūṭa); also at Mil 267 (with kāḷa˚, tamba˚ & kaṃsa˚, where in the trsl;n Rh. D. does not give a def. expln of the word).
pp. of vṛt, Sk. vṛtta in meaning of “round” as well as “happened, become” etc. The two meanings have become differentiated in Pāli vaṭṭa is not found in meaning of “happened.” All three Pāli meanings are specialized, just as the pres vaṭṭati is specialized in meaning “behoves”
(“rained”): see abhivaṭṭa and vaṭṭha (vuṭṭha); otherwise only at Dhp-a ii.265.
(nt.) a cart, in haṭṭha˚; handcart Vin ii.276.
fr. vṛt, or P. vaṭṭa
(f.) (& vaṭṭaka˚; ) the quail MN iii.159 sq.; Ja i.172, Ja i.208 (vaṭṭaka-luddaka) iii.312; Dhp-a iii.175 (loc. pl. vaṭṭakesu) ■ The Vaṭṭaka-jātaka at Ja i.208 sq. (cp. Ja v.414).
cp. Sk. vartakā & Ved. vartikā
1. to turn round to move on: doubtful in “kattha vaṭṭaṃ na vaṭṭati SN i.15; preferably with v.l. as vaḍḍhati ■ Caus. I vaṭṭeti to turn or twist Ja i.338 (rajjuṃ); to cause to move or go on (in weaving; tasaraṃ v. to speed the shuttle) Snp-a 265, Snp-a 266. Should we read vaḍḍheti Cp. āvaṭṭeti ■ Caus. II. vaṭṭāpeti to cause to turn Ja i.422.
2. to be right or fit or proper, to behove it ought to (with infin.); with instr. of person who ought to do this or that, e.g. sīlācāra-sampannena bhavituṃ vaṭṭati Ja i.188; kataññunā bhavituṃ v. Ja i.122 ■ See e.g. Ja i.376; Ja ii.352, Ja ii.406; Mil 9; Vism 184; Dhp-a ii.38, Dhp-a ii.90, Dhp-a ii.168; Snp-a 414 (vattuṃ to say); Vv-a 63, Vv-a 69 Vv-a 75; Pv-a 38 (dātuṃ). The noun to vaṭṭati is vatta (not vaṭṭa!).
Vedic vṛt. The representative of vattati (= Sk. vartate) in specialized meaning. The regular meaning of *vartate (with vaṭṭana), viz. “turning round,” is attached to vaṭṭati only in later Pāli & sometimes doubtful. It is found also in the Caus.; vaṭṭeti The defn of vaṭṭ; (literal meaning) at Dhtp 89 is “vaṭṭana,” and at Dhtm 107 “āvattana”
(nt.) turning round Dhtp 89 (in defn of vaṭṭati). Cp. āvaṭṭana.
fr. vṛt, vaṭṭati
(f.) in ˚valī is a line or chain of balls (“rounds,” i.e. rings or spindles). Reading somewhat doubtful. It occurs at MN i.80, MN i.81 (seyyathā v. evaṃ me piṭṭhi-kaṇṭako unnat’ âvanato hoti; Neumann trsls “wie eine Kugelkette wurde mein Rückgrat mit den hervor-und zurücktretenden Wirbeln”) and at Ja v.69 (spelt “vaṭṭhanā-vali-sankāsā piṭṭhi te ninnat’ unnatā, with C. expln “piṭṭhika-ṭṭhāne āvuṇitvā ṭhāpitā vaṭṭhanā-vali-sadisā”). The Ja trsln by Dutoit gives “einer Reihe von Spinnwirteln dein Rücken gleicht im Auf und Nieder”; the E. tsrln has “Thy back like spindles in a row, a long unequal curve doth show.”
fr. vṛt
(f.) a ring, round, globe, ball Thig 395 (vaṭṭani-riva; expld at Thag-a 259 as “lākhāya guḷikā viya,” trslnSisters 154: “but a little ball”).
cp. Vedic vartani circumference of a wheel, course
(f.) 1. a wick SN ii.86 = SN iii.126 = SN iv.213; Ja i.243 (dīpa˚); Dhp-a 393; Thag-a 72 (Ap. v.45: nom. pl. vaṭṭīni); Mvu 32, Mvu 37 Mvu 34, Mvu 35.
2. enclosure, lining, film, skin Vism 258 (anta˚ entrails), 262 (udara˚); Ja i.260 (anta˚, so read for ˚vaddhi).
3. edge, rim, brim, cireumference Vin ii.120 (aggala˚; of the door), 148 (id.); SN iii.141 (patta of a vase or bowl); iv.168 (id.); Dhp-a ii.124 (nemi˚) Often as mukha-vaṭṭi outer rim, border, lining, e.g. cakkavāḷa˚ Ja i.64, Ja i.72; Dhp-a i.319; Dhp-a iii.209; patt˚ Ja v.38 pāsāda˚ Dhs-a 107.
4. strip, fringe Vin ii.266 (dussa˚) Ja v.73 (camma˚); Mvu 11, Mvu 15.
5. a sheath, bag, pod Ja iii.366 (tiṇa˚); Mvu 26, Mvu 17 (marica˚ red pepper pod) Dhp-a iv.203 (reṇu˚).
6. a lump, ball Dhp-a iii.117 (pubba˚, of matter).
7. rolling forth or along, a gush (of water), pour Ja i.109 (or to vṛṣ ?).
represents both Epic Sk. varti and vṛtti, differentiated derivations from vṛt, combining the meanings of “turning, rolling” and “encircling, round”
(f.) 1. a wick Mvu 30, Mvu 94.
2. a brim Mvu 18, Mvu 28.
3. a pod Mvu 26, Mvu 16 (marica˚).
vaṭṭi + kā, cp. Class. Sk. vartikā
(-˚) (adj.) in muṇḍa˚; porter (?) is not clear. It is a dern fr. vaṭṭi in one or the other of its meanings. Found only at Vin ii.137, where it is expld by Bdhgh as “veṭṭhin.” It may belong to vaṭaṃsa or vaṭa (rope) cp. Dhtm 106 “veṭhana” for vaṭaṃsa.
(adj.) circular Abhp 707.
fr. vṛt, cp. late Sk. vartula
rained, in nava˚; newly rained upon Dhp-a i.19 (bhūmi).
pp. of vassati, for the usual vuṭṭha
(adj.) bulky, gross Abhp 701.
cp. BSk. vaṭhara Mvu ii.65. A root vaṭh is given at Dhtm 133 in meaning “thūlattane bhave” i.e. bulkiness
(nt.) wealth, riches Ja iii.131 (vaḍḍhaṃ vaḍḍhataṃ, imper.). Or should we read vaṭṭa? Vaḍḍha is used as Np. at Kp-a 119, perhaps in meaning “prosperous.”
fr. vṛdh
1. augmenting, increasing, i.e. looking after the welfare of somebody or something one who superintends Ja i.2 (rāsi˚ the steward of an estate).
2. a maker of, in special sense (cīvara˚; robecutter perhaps fr. vardh to cut: see vaddheti ) a tailor Ja i.220.
fr. vaḍḍheti
(& ˚ī ) a carpenter builder, architect, mason. On their craft and guilds see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 181 sq.; Mrs. Rh. D Cambridge Hist. Ind. i.206 ■ The word is specially characteristic of the Jātakas and other popular (later literature Ja i.32, Ja i.201, Ja i.247; Ja ii.170; Ja vi.332 sq., 432 Ap. 51; Dhp-a i.269; Dhp-a iv.207; Vism 94; Pv-a 141; Mhbv 154 ■ iṭṭha˚; a stonemason Mvu 35, Mvu 102; nagara˚; the city architect Mil 331, Mil 345; brāhmaṇa˚; a brahmin carpenter Ja iv.207; mahā˚; chief carpenter, master builder Vism 463. In metaphor taṇhā the artificer lust Dhp-a iii.128.
-gāma a carpenter village Ja ii.18, Ja ii.405; Ja iv.159.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vardhaki & vardhakin; perhaps from vardh to cut: see vaddheti
primary meaning “to increase” (trs. intrs.); hence: to keep on, to prosper, to multiply, to grow SN i.15 (read vaḍḍh˚ for vaṭṭ˚); ii.206 (vaṇṇena) iv.73, 250; AN v.249 (paññāya); Snp 329 (paññā ca sutañ ca); Ja iii.131 (porāṇaṃ vaḍḍhaṃ vaḍḍhataṃ, imper. med 3rd sg.); v.66 (sadā so vaḍḍhate rājā sukka-pakkhe va candimā); Pv i.12 (dātā puññena v.); Pp 71; Mil 9 Mvu 7, Mvu 68 (putta-dhītāhi vaḍḍhitvā having numerous sons & daughters); 22, 73 (ubho vaḍḍhiṃsu dārakā grew up); Snp-a 319; Pv-a 94 ■ ppr. vaḍḍhamāna (1 thriving Kp-a 119 (read as Vaḍḍh˚, Np.) ■ (2) increasing Ja i.199 (putta-dhītāhi); Mvu 23, Mvu 34 (˚chāyāyaṃ as the shadows increased) ■ See also pari˚ ■ pp vaḍḍha, vaddha, vuḍḍha, vuddha, buḍḍha ■ Caus. I vaḍḍheti, in many shades of meaning, all based upon the notion of progressive motion. Thus to be translated in any of the foll. senses: to increase, to make move on (cp. vv.ll. vaṭṭeti), to bring on to, to further; to take an interest in, to indulge in, practise; to be busy with cause to prosper; to arrange; to make for; and in a general sense “to make” (cp. derivation vaḍḍhaka “maker,” i.e. tailor; vaḍḍhaki id., i.e. carpenter vaḍḍhana, etc.). The latter development into “make is late.
1. to increase, to raise Snp 275 (rajaṃ); DN-a i.115; Mvu 29, Mvu 66 (mangalaṃ to raise the chant); Pv-a 168 (+ brūheti).
2. to cultivate (vipassanaṃ insight Ja i.117 (aor. ˚esi); Pv-a 14.
3. to rear, to bring up Mvu 35, Mvu 103 (aor. vaḍḍhesi).
4. (with ref. to food to get ready, arrange, serve in (loc.) Ja iii.445 (pātiyā on the dish); iv.67 (karoṭiyaṃ), 391.
5. to exalt Ja i.338 (akulīne vaḍḍhessati).
6. to participate in, to practise, attend to, to serve (acc.) SN ii.109 (tanhaṃ) AN ii.54 (kaṭasiṃ to serve the cemetery, i.e. to die again and again: see refs. under kaṭasi); Vism 111 (kasiṇaṃ) 152.
7. to make move on, to set into motion (for vaṭṭeti?), in tasaraṃ v. Snp-a 265, Snp-a 266.
8. to take up Mvu 26, Mvu 10 (kuntaṃ) ■ pp. vaḍḍhita ■ Caus. II vaḍḍhāpeti: 1. to cause to be enlarged Mvu 35, Mvu 119. 2. to cause to be brought up or reared Ja i.455.
3. to have attended to Vin ii.134 (massuṃ).
4. to cause to be made up (of food) Ja iv.68.
Vedic vardhati, vṛdh, cp. Av. vərədaiti to increase. To this root belongs P. uddha “high up (= Gr. ορχός straight). Defd at Dhtp 109 simply as “vaḍḍhane”
(nt. & adj.) 1. increasing, augmenting, fostering; increase, enlargement prolongation MN i.518 (hāyana˚ decrease increase); Ja iii.422 (kula˚, spelling ddh); Mvu 35, Mvu 73 (āyussa); Dhs-a 406; Pv-a 31; Mil 320 (bala˚ strengthincreasing); Dhtp 109; Sdhp 361.
2. indulgence in attachment; serving, practising Snp 1084 (takka˚) Ja i.146 (kaṭasi˚, q.v. & cp. vaḍḍheti 6); Vism 111 (˚âvaḍḍhana), 152, 320. Here belong the phrases raja & loka˚.
3. arrangement Ja vi.11 (paṭhavi-vaḍḍhanaka-kamma the act of attending to, i.e. smoothing the ground).
4. serving for, enhancing, favouring Pv iii.36 (rati-nandi˚).
5. potsherd [connected with vardh ? See vaddheti] Ja iii.226 (C. kaṭhalika; uncertain).
6. a kind of garment, as puṇṇa˚; (full of costliness? but perhaps not connected with vaḍḍh˚ at all) Mvu 23, Mvu 33 & 37 (where C. expl;s: anagghāni evaṃnāmikāni vattha-yugāni). Cp. vaḍḍhamāna.
fr. vaḍḍheti; see also vaddhana
(adj.) serving, in f. ˚ikā a serving (of food), a dish (bhatta˚) Dhp-a 188 (so read for vaḍḍhinikā).
fr. vaḍḍhana, cp. vaḍḍheti 4
(nt.) at Dpvs xi.33 is probably equivalent to vaḍḍhana (6) in special sense at Mvu 23, Mvu 33, and designates a (pair of) special (ly costly) garment(s). One might think of meaning vaḍḍheti “to bid higher (at a sale),” as in Divy 403; Avs i.36, and explain as “that which causes higher bidding,” i.e. very precious. The passage is doubtful. It may simply mean “costly” (belonging to nandiyāvaṭṭaṃ); or is it to be read as vaṭṭamāna ?
BSk. vardhate
(adj.) growing, increasing, getting bigger; only in phrase vaḍḍhamānaka-cchāyāya (loc.) with growing shade, as the shadows lengthened, when evening drew near Dhp-a i.96 Dhp-a i.416; Dhp-a ii.79; Mvu 19, Mvu 40.
ppr. of vaḍḍheti + ka
(f.) 1. increase growth (cp.; Cpd. 251 sq.) SN iv.250 (ariya˚); Ja ii.426 (= phāti); Mil 109 (guṇa˚); Dhs-a 327; Dhp-a iii.335 (avaḍḍhi = parihāni).
2. welfare, good fortune, happiness Ja v.101; Ja vi.330.
3. (as t. t.) profit, interest (on money, esp. loans) Thig 444 (= iṇa-vaḍḍhi Thag-a 271) DN-a i.212, DN-a i.270; Vb-a 256 (in simile); Snp-a 179 (˚gahaṇa).
fr. vṛdh, Vedic vṛddhi refreshment etc., which is differentiated in Pāli into vuddhi & vaḍḍhi
(adj.) leading to increase, augmenting, prosperous Mil 351 (ekanta˚, equal to aparihāniya).
fr. vaḍḍhi
1. increased, augmented; raised, enlarged; big Thag 72 (su-su˚); DN-a i.115; Dhs-a 188 Dhs-a 364; Ja v.340 (˚kāya).
2. grown up Dhp-a i.126. 3. brought up, reared Ja i.455.
4. served, indulged supplied: see kaṭasi˚; (S ii.178 e.g. ).
pp. of vaḍḍheti
(nt. & m.) a wound, sore Vin i.205 (m.), 218 (vaṇo rūḷho); iii.36 (m; angajāte), 117 (angajāte) SN iv.177 (vaṇaṃ ālimpeti); AN v.347 sq., 350 sq.; 359 Nd ii.540; PugA 212 (purāṇa-vaṇa-sadisa-citto); Dhp-a ii.165 (˚ṃ bandhati to bandage); Vv-a 77; Pv-a 80 Sdhp 395. On vaṇa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 132.
-ālepana putting ointment on a sore Snp-a 58 (in sim.) -coḷaka a rag for dressing a wound Vism 342; Vb-a 361 -paṭikamma restoration or healing of a wound Dhp-a ii.164. -paṭicchādana dressing of a wound Dhp-a i.375 -paṭṭa id., bandage Snp-a 100. -bandhana id. Vin i.205 -mukha the opening of a sore AN iv.386 (nava ˚āni) Vv-a 77 (id.).
cp. Vedic vraṇa; Serbian rana; Obulg. var̄e, both “wound”
(f.) wish, request Ud 53; Ja iv.404 (= yācana C.); cp. J.P.T.S. 1891, 18 See vana2 & cp vaṇeti.;
fr. van to desire
(f.) trade, trading MN ii.198; Snp 404 (payojaye dhammikaṃ so vaṇijjaṃ); AN ii.81 sq.; Pv i.56 (no trade among the Petas); Ja i.169; Pv-a 47 (tela˚) Sdhp 332, Sdhp 390 ■ Five trades must not be carried on by lay followers of the Buddha, viz. sattha˚; trade in swords satta˚; in living beings, maṃsa˚; in meat, majja˚; in intoxicants, visa˚; in poisons AN iii.208, quoted at DN-a i.235 and Snp-a 379.
Vedic vaṇijyā, fr. vaṇij˚ (vaṇik) merchant, cp. vāṇija & vaṇibbaka
wounded, bruised Pv ii.24; Ja i.150; Sdhp 395.
pp. of *vaṇeti, Denom. fr. vaṇa
trading, trade Vin i.229 = DN ii.87 = Ud 88 (with ref. to Pāṭaliputta).
vaṇik + patha, in meaning patha 2
a wayfarer, beggar, pauper Snp 100 (ṇ); Ja iv.403, Ja iv.406 (n); v.172 (= bhojaputta C.; n) vi.232 (n); DN-a i.298 (ṇ); Pv-a 78 (n), 112 (n); Vv-a 5 (n). Often combd with similar terms in phrase kapaṇ addhika [iddhika] vaṇibbaka-yācakā indigents, tramps wayfarers & beggars, e.g. DN i.137 (ṇ); Mil 204 (ṇ) Dhp-a i.105 (ṇ). Other spurious forms are vaṇidīpaka Pv-a 120; vanīpaka Cp i.49.
vaṇibba + ka. The form *vaṇibba, according to Geiger, P.Gr. § 461, distorted fr. vaṇiya, thus “travelling merchant, wayfarer.” Spelling wavers between vaṇibb˚; & vanibb˚. The BSk. form is; vanīpaka, e.g. at Avs i.248; Avs ii.37; Divy 83; occurring also as vaṇīyaka at Divy 83
(adj.-n.) begging, a beggar, tramp Ja iii.312; Ja iv.410 (= yācanto C.). Spelling at both places n. See also vanin.
fr. *vaṇibba
see vanīyati.
to wish, desire, ask, beg Ja v.27 (spelt vaṇṇeti C. expls as vāreti icchati); pres. med. 1st pl. vaṇimhase (= Sk. vṛṇīmahe) Ja ii.137 (= icchāma C.). As vanayati at Kp-a 111 (vanayatī ti vanaṃ).
Caus. of van (see etym. under vana2), cp. vaṇi (vani). It may be derived directly fr. vṛ; vṛṇāti = P vuṇāti, as shown by vaṇimhase. A Denom. fr. vani is vanīyati
(nt.) a stalk SN iii.155 = DN i.73 (˚chinna with its stalk cut); Ja i.70; Ap 62; Vism 356 (in comparison); Snp-a 296; Vb-a 60; Dhp-a ii.42 Dhp-a iv.112; Vv-a 44. avaṇṭa (of thana, the breast of a woman) not on a stalk (i.e. well-formed, plump) Ja v.155. So to be trsld here, although vaṇṭa as medical term is given in BR with meaning “nipple.”-See also tālavaṇṭa
Epic Sk. vṛnta
(adj:) (-˚) having a stalk; a˚; not fastened on stalks Ja v.203.
vaṇṭa + ka
to partition, share; is given as root vaṇṭ; at Dhtp 92, Dhtp 561 and Dhtm 787 in meaning “vibhājana.”-Another root vaṇṭ; is found at Dhtm 108 with unmeaning expln “vaṇṭ’ atthe.”
dial. Sk. vaṇṭ
(adj.) (-˚) having a stalk; only in phrase ekato˚ & ubhato˚; having a stalk on one or on both sides (of a wreath) Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; Dhp-a i.419.
vaṇṭa + ika
appearance etc (lit. “cover, coating”). There is a considerable fluctuation of meaning, especially between meanings 2, 3, 4. One may group as follows.
1. colour Snp 447 (meda˚); SN v.216 (chavi˚ of the skin); AN iii.324 (sankha˚); Thag 13 (nīl’abbha˚); Vv 4510 (danta˚ = ivory white); Pv iv.39; Dhp-a ii.3 (aruṇa˚); Snp-a 319 (chavi˚) Vv-a 2 (vicitta˚); Pv-a 215. Six colours are usually enumd as vaṇṇā, viz. nīla pīta lohitaka odāta mañjeṭṭha pabhassara Pts i.126; cp. the 6 colours under rūpa at Dhs 617 (where kāḷaka for pabbassara); Ja i.12 (chabbaṇṇa-buddha-rasmiyo). Groups of five see under pañca 3 (cp. Ja i.222) ■ dubbaṇṇa of bad colour, ugly SN i.94; AN v.61; Ud 76; Snp 426; Iti 99; Pp 33; Vv-a 9; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 68. Opp. suvaṇṇa of beautiful colour, lovely AN v.61; Iti 99. Also as term for “silver.”-As t. t. in descriptions or analyses (perhaps better in meaning “appearance”) in abl. vaṇṇato by colour, with saṇṭhānato and others: Vism 184 (“kāḷa vā odāta vā manguracchavi vā”), 243 = Vb-a 225; Ne 27.
2. appearance SN i.115 (kassaka-vaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā); Ja i.84 (id. with māṇavaka˚); Pv ii.110 (= chavi-vaṇṇa Pv-a 71); iii.32 (kanakassa sannibha); Vv-a 16; cp. ˚dhātu
3. lustre, splendour (cp. next meaning) DN iii.143 (suvaṇṇa˚, or = 1); Pv ii.962 (na koci devo vaṇṇena sambuddhaṃ atirocati); iii.91 (suriya˚); Vv 291 (= sarīr obhāsa Vv-a 122); Pv-a 10 (suvaṇṇa˚), 44.
4. beauty (cp. vaṇṇavant) DN ii.220 (abhikkanta˚); MN i.142 (id.) DN iii.68 (āyu + ); Pv ii.910 (= rūpa-sampatti Pv-a 117) Sometimes combd with other ideals, as (in set of 5) āyu, sukha, yasa, sagga AN iii.47; or āyu, yasa, sukha ādhipacca Ja iv.275, or (4): āyu, sukha, bala AN iii.63
5. expression, look, specified as mukha˚; e.g. SN iii.2, SN iii.235; SN iv.275 sq.; AN v.342; Pv iii.91; Pv-a 122. 6. colour of skin, appearance of body, complexion MN ii.32 (parama), 84 (seṭṭha); AN iii.33 (dibba); iv.396 (id.); Snp 610 (doubtful, more likely because of its combn with sara to below 8!), 686 (anoma˚); Vism 422 (evaṃ˚ = odato vā sāmo vā). Cp. ˚pokkharatā. In special sense applied as distinguishing mark of race or species, thus also constituting a mark of class (caste distinction & translatable as “(social) grade, rank caste” (see on term Dial. i.27, 99 sq.; cp. Vedic ārya varṇa and dāsa varṇa RV ii.12, 9; iii.34, 9: see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 113 and in greater detail Macdonell & Keith,; Vedic Index ii.247 sq.). The customary enumn is of 4 such grades, viz. khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā Vin ii.239; AN iv.202; MN ii.128, but cp. Dial. i.99 sq ■ See also Vin iv.243 (here applied as general term of “grade” to the alms-bowls: tayo pattassa vaṇṇā, viz. ukkaṭṭha, majjhima, omaka; cp below 7); DN i.13, DN i.91; Ja vi.334; Mil 225 (khattiya˚ brāhmaṇa˚).
7. kind, sort Mil 128 (nānā˚), cp. Vin iv.243, as mentioned under 6.
8. timbre (i.e. appearance) of voice, contrasted to sara intonation, accent may occasionally be taken as “vowel.” See AN i.229 (+ sara); iv.307 (id.); Snp 610 (id., but may mean “colour of skin”: see 6), 1132 (giraṃ vaṇṇ’ upasaṃhitaṃ, better than meaning “comment”); Mil 340 (+ sara). 9. constitution, likeness, property; adj. (-˚) “like” aggi˚; like fire Pv iii.66 (= aggi-sadisa Pv-a 203).
10 (“good impression”) praise Dhp-a i.115 (magga˚) usually combd and contrasted with avaṇṇa blame, e.g. DN i.1, DN i.117, DN i.174; AN i.89; AN ii.3; AN iii.264; AN iv.179, AN iv.345; DN-a i.37.
11. reason (“outward appearance”) SN i.206 (= kāraṇa K.S. i.320); Vv 846 (= kāraṇa Vv-a 336) Pv iv.16 (id. Pv-a 220); iv.148.
-āroha (large) extent of beauty Snp 420. -kasiṇa the colour circle in the practice of meditation Vb-a 251 -kāraka (avaṇṇe) one who makes something (unsightly appear beautiful Ja v.270. -da giving colour, i.e. beauty Snp 297. -dada giving beauty AN ii.64. -dasaka the ten (years) of complexion or beauty (the 3rd decade in the life of man) Vism 619; Ja iv.497. -dāsī “slave of beauty,” courtezan, prostitute Ja i.156 sq., 385; ii.367 380; iii.463; vi.300; Dhp-a i.395; Dhp-a iv.88. -dhātu composition or condition of appearance, specific form material form, natural beauty SN i.131; Pv i.31; Pv-a 137 (= chavivaṇṇa); Dhs-a 15. -patha see vaṇṇu˚ -pokkharatā beauty of complexion DN i.114, DN i.115; AN i.38 AN ii.203; Pp 66; Vb-a 486 (defd); Dhp-a iii.389; Pv-a 46 -bhū place of praise Ja i.84 (for ˚bhūmi: see bhū2) -bhūta being of a (natural) species Pv-a 97. -vādin saying praise, praising DN i.179, DN i.206; AN ii.27; V.164 sq. Vin ii.197. -sampanna endowed with beauty AN i.244 sq., 288; ii.250 sq.
cp. Vedic varṇa, of vṛ;: see vuṇāti. Customary definition as “vaṇṇane” at Dhtp 572
(nt.) paint, rouge DN ii.142; Thag 960; Dpvs vi.70.
fr. vaṇṇa
(f.) having colour, complexion AN i.246 (dubbaṇṇatā bad c.); Vv-a 9.
abstr. fr. vaṇṇa
(f.) 1. explanation, commentary, exposition Kp-a 11, Kp-a 145, Kp-a 227; Snp-a 65 (pada˚); Pv-a 2- pāḷi˚; explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual analysis (opp. vinicchayakathā Vb-a 291.
2. praise Dhp-a ii.100 (vana˚).
fr. vaṇṇeti
(adj.) to be described; a˚; indescribable Ja v.282.
grd. formation fr. vaṇṇeti
(adj.) beautiful AN iv.240 (cātummahārājikā devā dīgh’āyukā vaṇṇavanto; v.l. ˚vantā) Pp 34; Pv iii.212 (= rūpasampanna Pv-a 184); Dhp-a i.383.
fr. vaṇṇa
1. explained, commented on Snp-a 368.
2. praised, extolled Pp 69; Ja i.9; Mil 278 (+ thuta & pasattha); Pv-a 116 (= pasaṃsita), 241; Vv-a 156 (= pasaṃsita).
pp. of vaṇṇeti
(-˚) (adj.) 1. having colour Thag 1190 (accharā nānattavaṇṇiyo “in divers hues”).
2. belonging to a caste, in cātu˚; (suddhi) (purity of) the fourfold castes MN ii.132.
3. having beauty Snp 551 (uttama˚).
4. having the appearance of AN ii.106 Pp 44 (āma˚, pakka˚); Ja v.322 (vijju˚).
fr. vaṇṇa
(nt.) colouring; having or giving colour, complexion MN i.446 (in phrase assaṃ assa-damako vaṇṇiyañ ca valiyañ ca anuppavecchati, trsld by Neumann as “lässt der Rossebändiger noch die letzte Strählung und Striegelung angedeihen”; still doubtful) AN iii.54 (dubbaṇṇiyaṃ bad complexion); Iti 76 (dub˚ evil colour).
fr. vaṇṇeti
(f.) is given at Abhp 663 in meaning of “sand.” Occurs only in cpd. vaṇṇupatha a sandy place, quicksand, swamp Ja i.109; Vv 843 (= vālu-kantāra Vv-a 334); Pv iv.32 (= petena nimmitaṃ mudu-bhūmi-magga Pv-a 250, so read for vaṇṇapatha); shortened to vaṇṇu at Vv 8411 (where MSS vaṇṇa).
cp. late Sk. varṇu, Name of a river (-district)
1. to describe, explain, comment on Ja i.2, Ja i.222; Kp-a 168; Snp-a 23, Snp-a 160, Snp-a 368. 2. to praise, applaud, extol Ja i.59, Ja i.84; Pv-a 131 (+ pasaṃsati) ■ pp. vaṇṇita.
Denom. fr. vaṇṇa
(indecl.) part of exclamation: surely, certainly, indeed, alas! Vin iii.39 (puris’ usabho vat’ âyaṃ “for sure he is a human bull”) Thig 316 (abbhutaṃ vata vācaṃ bhāsasi); Snp 178, Snp 191 Snp 358; Vv 4713; Pv i.85; Ja iv.355; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 61, Pv-a 75, Pv-a 121 Often combd with other emphatic particles, like aho vata Pv ii.945 (= sādhu vata Pv-a 131); lābhā vata no it is surely a gain that Snp 31; Dhp-a ii.95; vata bho Ja i.81.
Vedic bata, post-Vedic vata
(m. & nt.) 1. a religious duty, observance, rite, practice custom SN i.143, SN i.201; SN iv.180; AN iv.461 (sīla, vata, tapas brahmacariya); v.18; Snp 792, Snp 898; Vv 8424; Ja iii.75; Vv-a 9; Pv-a 60 ■ subbata of good practice Vv 346 Cp. patibbata, sīlabbata.
2. manner of (behaving like) a certain animal (as a practice of ascetics), e.g. aja˚; like a goat Ja iv.318; go˚; like a cow MN i.387; Ja iv.318; vagguli˚; bat practice Ja i.493; Ja iii.235; Ja iv.299 hatthi˚; elephant behaviour Nd i.92 (here as vatta; see under vatta1).
-pada an item of good practice, virtue (otherwise called guṇa at Mil 90) Ja i.202 (where 7 are enumd, viz devotion to one’s mother & father, reverence towards elder people, speaking the truth, gentle speech, open speech, unselfishness); Mil 90 (where 8 are given in detail, differing from the above). See also vatta1 2 where other sets of 7 & 8 are quoted.; -samādāna taking up a (good) practice, observance of a vow Ja i.157.
cp. Vedic vrata vow. fr.; vṛt, meaning later “milk” (see Macdonell & Keith,; Vedic Index ii.341)
(adj.) observant of religious duties, devout Snp 624 (= dhuta-vatena samannāgata Snp-a 467); Dhp 400 (with same expln at Dhp-a iv.165 as as Snp-a 467).
vata2 + vant
(f.) a fence Ja i.153; Ja iii.272; Ja v.472; Vism 186 (vatī, v.l. vati); Snp-a 98 (v.l. for gutti), 148 (v.l. for ˚vatikā).
later Sk. vṛti, fr. vṛ;
(f.) a choice, boon Dhp-a i.190 (pubbe Sāmā nāma vatiyā pana kāritattā Sāmāvatī nāma jātā).
fr. vṛ; cp. Sk. vṛti
(adj.) (-˚) having the habit (of), acting like MN i.387 (kukkura˚).
vata2 + ika
(f.) a fence Snp-a 148 (kaṇṭaka˚ & rukkha˚).;
fr. vati1
(nt.) 1. that which is done, which goes on or is customary, i.e. duty, service custom, function Vin ii.31; Snp 294, Snp 393 (gahaṭṭha˚) Vism 188 (cetiy’ angaṇa˚ etc.); Dhp-a i.92 (ācariya˚) Vb-a 354 (gata-paccāgata˚); Vv-a 47 (gāma˚).
2. (for vata2) observance, vow, virtue DN iii.9 (the 7 vattapadāni diff. from those enumd under vata-pada) Nd i.66 (sīlañ ca vattañ ca), 92 (hatthi˚ etc.: see vata2 2) 104 (˚suddhi), 106 (id.), 188 (giving 8 dhutangas as vattas).
-paṭivatta all kinds of practices or duties Ja i.67 Ja ii.103; Ja iii.339; Ja iv.298; Mil 416 (sucarita˚); Dhp-a i.13 sq.; Dhp-a ii.277; Dhp-a iv.28. -bbata the usual custom Dhp-a iv.44; C on SN i.36 § 2 and on SN ii.18 § 4 sq. -sampanna one who keeps all observances Vb-a 297 (where the foll. vattāni are enumd: 82 khuddaka-vattāni. 14 mahā˚, cetiyangaṇa˚, bodhiyangaṇa˚, pānīyamāḷa˚ uposathāgāra˚, āgantuka˚, gamika˚).
orig. pp. of vattati
(nt.) the mouth (lit. “speaker”) Pgdp 55 (sūci-vatto mah’odaro peto).
cp. Sk. vaktra & P. vattar
opened wide Vin iii.37; Ja v.268 (vatte mukhe).
vyatta, Sk. vyātta, of vi + ā + dā
at Ja v.443 is corrupt for vaṇṭha cripple.
(adj.) doing, exercising, influencing; in vasa˚; having power, neg. avasa˚; having no free will involuntary Pv-a 64.
fr. vatta1
to move, go on, proceed to happen, take place, to be; to be in existence; to fare to do Snp p.13 (parivesanā vattati distribution of food was in progress); Snp 654 (kammanā vattati loko keeps up, goes on); Pv ii.944 (vatteyya); Mil 338 (na ciraṃ vattate bhavo) ■ grd. vattabba to be proceeded, or simply “to be” Vin ii.8 (so read for vatth˚): nissāya te v. “thou must remain under the superintendence of others” (Vin. Texts, ii.344) ■ Often equal to atthi or (pl.) santi, i.e. is (are), e.g. Ja vi.504; Snp-a 100 (bāḷhā vedanā vattanti); Pv-a 40 ■ ppr. med. vattamāna see sep ■ pp. vatta ■ Caus. vatteti to make go on, to keep up, practise, pursue Snp 404 (etaṃ vattayaṃ pursuing this); freq. in phrases vasaṃ vatteti to exercise power, e.g. Pv-a 89; and cakkaṃ vatteti to wield royal power, to govern (cp. expression cakkavattin & see pavatteti) Snp 554, Snp 684 (vattessati) 693 (dhamma-cakkaṃ); Ja iii.412 ■ grd. vattitabba to be practised Vin ii.32 ■ pp. vattita.
Vedic vartate; vṛt. A differentiated P. form is vaṭṭati ■ Cp. Av. varət to turn, Sk. vartana turning vartulā = Lat. vertellum = E. whorl (Ger. wirtel) & vertil Gr. ῥατάνη; Goth. waírpan = Ger. werden (to become, E “turn”); Goth ■ waírps = E ■ wards; Obulg. vrěteno spindle; and many others (e.g. Lat. vertex, vortex), q. v Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. verto
(nt.) moving on, upkeep, existence, continuance Snp 698 (cakka˚ continuance of royal power); Mvu 3, Mvu 38.
fr. vattati
(& ˚i) (f.) a track, a road Ja i.196, Ja i.395, Ja i.429; Ja iii.200 ■ kaṇha˚; leaving a black trail, Ep. of the fire Ja iii.140.
cp. Sk. vartanī, fr. vṛt
(adj.-n..) being in existence, going on, happening at the time; nt. process progress, (as ˚-) in progress Snp-a 4 (˚uppanna); Pv-a 55 -˚vacana the present tense Snp-a 16, Snp-a 23.
ppr. med. of vattati
(adj.) going on, being, existing; ˚bhave in the present existence or period Mil 291.
fr. last
one who speaks, a sayer, speaker MN i.470; SN i.63; SN ii.182; SN vi.94, SN vi.198; DN i.139; AN iv.32; AN v.79 sq., 226 sq.; Thag 334 (read ariya-vattā for ˚ vatā); Ja i.134; Snp-a 272; Pv-a 15.
n. ag. of vatti, vac
to speak, say, call; pres. not found (for which vadati); fut. 1st sg. vakkhāmi Ja i.346 Ja i.3rd vakkhati SN i.142; Ja i.356; Ja ii.40; Ja vi.352; Vb-a 51 Vb-a 1st pl. vakkhāma SN iv.72; MN iii.207; Vism 170, Vism 446 Vism 3rd vakkhanti Vin ii.1; pte. fut. vakkhamāna Pv-a 18-aor. 1st sg. avacaṃ Ja iii.280; Dhp-a iii.194, & avocaṃ Thig 124; Vv 797; SN i.10; Dhp-a iii.285; Dhp-a iii.2nd avaca Thig 415, avoca Dhp 133, & avacāsi Vv 357; 539; 3rd avaca Ja i.294; Pv ii.319; Pv-a 65 (mā a.); avoca Thig 494; SN i.150; Snp p.78; Ja ii.160; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 31, Pv-a 49,; avacāsi Ja vi.525; Ja vi.1st pl. avacumha & avocumha; MN ii.91; MN iii.15; MN iii.2nd avacuttha Vin i.75 (mā a.); ii.297; Ja ii.48; Dhp-a i.73; Dhp-a iv.228, & avocuttha Ja i.176; Mil 9 Mil 3rd pl. avacuṃ Ja v.260, & avocuṃ MN ii.147 ■ inf. vattuṃ Snp 431; Ja vi.351; Vism 522 = Vb-a 130 (vattukāma); Snp-a 414; DN-a i.109; Dhp-a i.329; Dhp-a ii.5 ■ ger. vatvā Snp-a 398; Pv-a 68, Pv-a 73, & vatvāna Snp p.78. grd. vattabba Mil 276 (kiṃ vattabbaṃ what is there to be said about it? i.e. it goes without saying); Snp-a 123 Snp-a 174, Snp-a 178; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 27, Pv-a 92 ■ ppr. med. vuccamāna Vin i.60; Vin iii.221; Pv-a 13 ■ Pass. vuccati DN i.168, DN i.245; Dhp 63; Mvu 9, Mvu 9; Mvu 34, Mvu 81 (vuccate, v.l. uccate); Ja i.129 (vuccare, 3rd pl.); Pv-a 24, Pv-a 34, Pv-a 63, Pv-a 76 ■ pp. vutta (q.v.) ■ Caus. vāceti to make speak, i.e. to read out to cause to read; also to teach, to instruct Snp 1018 Snp 1020; Ja i.452 (read); Pv-a 97 ■ pp. vācita (q.v.). Desid. vavakkhati (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 184 = Sk. vivakṣati) to wish to call DN ii.256.
Vedic vakti, vac
Nd i.89 (having the habit of horses, elephants etc.).
(nt.) that which goes on, round (of existence), revolution Mil 226.
fr. vatteti
(adj.) (-˚) engaged in, having power over, making, doing; only in cpds. cakka˚ & vasa˚; (q.v.).
fr. vṛt
(nt.) 1. cloth; clothing, garment raiment; also collectively: clothes; MN i.36 sq. AN i.132, AN i.209, AN i.286; AN ii.85, AN ii.241; AN iii.27 (odātaṃ), 50 (kāsikaṃ), 386 (kāsāyaṃ); iv.60, 186, 210; v.61 sq. (ubhatobhāga-vimaṭṭhaṃ = MN ii.13, reading vimaddha; with the expression cp. ubhato-bhāga-vimutta); Snp 295 Snp 304; Kp-a 237 (˚ṃ pariyodāyati, simile); Pv-a 43, Pv-a 50 Pv-a 70; Sdhp 217 ■ alla˚; fresh, clean clothes Dhp-a iv.220 ahata˚; new clothes Ja i.50; Dāvs ii.39; dibba˚; heavenly i.e. exquisite dresses Pv-a 23, Pv-a 46, Pv-a 53 ■ pl. vatthāni garments, clothes Snp 64, Snp 287, Snp 924; Pp 57 (kāsāyāni) Dhp-a i.219 (their uses, from a new dress down to a bit of rag).
2. hangings, tapestry Ja iv.304 ■ On vattha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 132.
-guyha “that which is concealed by a cloth,” i.e. the pudendum DN i.106; Snp 1022; DN-a i.275 (= angajātaṃ Bhagavato ti vāraṇass’ eva kosohitaṃ vatthaguyhaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ paduma-gabbha-samānaṃ). -yuga a pair of garments Ja iv.172; Dāvs i.34. -lakkhaṇa fortune telling from clothes Snp-a 362. -sannidhi storing up of clothes DN i.6; Nd i.372; DN-a i.82. -sutta the Suttanta on clothes (i.e. with the parable of the clothes vatth’ upama-sutta) MN i.36 sq., quoted at Vism 377 and Snp-a 119.
Vedic vastra, fr. vas, vaste to clothe; Idg. *ṷes, enlargement of *eu (: Lat. ex-uo); cp. Lat. vestis “vest(-ment),” Gr. ε ̔́ννυμι to clothe, ε ̔ϊμα dress; Goth wasjan to clothe; wasti dress
as pp. of vasati1 occurs only in cpd. nivattha. The two passages in Pv-a where vattha is printed as pp (vatthāni vattha) are to be read as vattha-nivattha (Pv-a 46, Pv-a 62).
at Vin ii.8 is to be spelt vattabba (see vattati).
(m. & f.) 1. the bladder Vin iii.117; Ja i.146; Snp 195; Vism 144 = Dhs-a 117; Vism 264, Vism 345 (mutta˚) 362; DN-a i.161; Vb-a 248.
2. the pudendum: see ˚kosa.
3. a clyster (-bag): see ˚kamma.
-kamma (ṃ karoti) to use a clyster Vin i.216. -kosa a membranous sheath enveloping the sexual organ of a male DN-a i.275 (˚kosena paṭicchanna vatthaguyha: so read for ˚kesena); Vv-a 252 (˚mukha orifice of the pudendum of an elephant).
Vedic vasti in meaning 1; the other meanings later
(nt.) lit. “ground,” hence 1. (lit.) object, real thing, property, thing, substance (cp. vatthu2!) AN ii.209 (khetta˚, where khetta in lit. sense, cp. No. 2). Here belongs the defn of kāma as twofold: vatthu-kāma and kilesa-kāma, or desire for realities, objective kāma, and desire as property of stained character, i.e. subjective kāma, e.g. Nd i.1; Snp-a 99, Snp-a 112; Dhs-a 62 ■ On vatthu as general philos term cp. Dhs. trsln2§§ 455, 679, 1229, also introd. p. 86 Cpd. 15, 31, 1741.
2. (appld meaning) object, item Vin i.121 (antima-vatthuṃ ajjhāpannaka guilty of an extreme offence?); v.138 (the 10 āghāta-vatthūni, as at Vb 86); DN iii.252 (seven niddesa˚), 255 (eight kusīta˚) 258 (eight dāna˚); SN ii.41, SN ii.56 sq.; Vb 71 (cakkhu˚ etc.) 306 sq., 353; Ne 114 (ten); Snp-a 172; Dhp-a iv.2 (akkosa˚); Pv-a 8, Pv-a 20 (dāna˚), 26 (left out in id. p. Kp-a 209) 29, 65 (alabbhaneyya˚), 96 (id.), 119, 121 (iṭṭha˚), 177 220. Cp. ˚bhūta.
3. occasion for, reason, ground AN ii.158 (+ khetta [in fig. sense!], āyatana & adhikaraṇa); iv.334; DN i.13 sq. (aṭṭhādasahi vatthūhi etc.) Ja ii.5 (avatthumhi chandaṃ mâkari do not set your heart on what is unreasonable); vatthunā (instr.) because Pv-a 118; vatthuto (abl.) on account of Pv-a 241. 4. basis, foundation, seat, (objective) substratum, substance element Ja i.146 (kāyo paridevānaṃ v.); Vb-a 404 (+ ārammaṇa). See most of the cpds.
5. subjectmatter subject, story, account Snp-a 4; Dhp-a ii.66; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 263, Pv-a 269. Cp. ˚gāthā & titles like Petavatthu Vimānavatthu.;
-kata made a foundation or basis of, practised thoroughly Ja ii.61; Ja v.14 and passim (+ bhāvita etc.). In phrase tālāvatthukata (= tāla avatthu kata) vatthu means foundation, basis, ground to feed and live on, thus “a palm deprived of its foundation”: see refs. under tāla ■ gāthā the stanzas of the story, the introductory (explanatory, essential to its understanding) stanzas something like “prologue” Snp-a 483, Snp-a 575 (preceding Snp 699 & 976).; -dasaka tenfold substance or material basis Vb-a 22. -bhūta being an object, i.e. subject to Ja v.210. -rūpa substance or substratum of matter material form Vism 561, Vism 564; Vb-a 22, Vb-a 172. -visadakiriyā clearing of the foundation or fundamentals purification of the elements Vb-a 283 = Dhs-a 76 (˚kiriyatā; trslnExpos. 101 “cleansing of things or substance”); Vism 128; Vb-a 276.
Class. Sk. vastu, fr. vas1
site, ground, field, plot Vin iii.50 (ārāma˚ & vihāra˚), 90 (id.); Snp 209, Snp 473 (sakhetta˚, cp. vatthu1 4), 769 (khetta + ), 858 (id.); Thag 957 (khetta + vatthu, cp. Brethren p. 3371 & Vin Texts iii.389 sq.); Mil 279 (khetta˚ a plot of arable land); DN-a i.78 (contrasted with khetta, see khetta 1 and cp. vatthu1 1); Pv-a 88 (gehassa the back yard of the house); haunted by fairies (parigaṇhanti) DN ii.87.
-kamma “act concerning sites,” i.e. preparing the ground for building DN i.12 (trsln: fixing on lucky sites for dwellings), cp. DN-a i.98: akaṭa-vatthumhi gehapatiṭṭhāpanaṃ -devatā the gods protecting the grounds field-gods, house-gods Pv i.41 (= ghara-vatthuṃ adhivatthā devatā Pv-a 17). -parikiraṇa offerings over the site of a house (“consecrating sites” trsln) DN i.12 (cp DN-a i.98 = balikamma-karaṇaṃ). -vijjā the science of (building-) sites, the art of determining a suitable (i.e. lucky) site for a house DN i.9 (see expln at DN-a i.93) SN iii.239; Nd i.372; Vism 269 (in comparison); Kp-a 237 See also Dial ii.92 & Fick,; Sociale Gliederung 152.
Vedic vāstu; fr. vas
(adj.) (-˚) 1. having a site or foundation or ground, in ucca˚; (high) and nīca˚; (low) Vin ii.117, Vin ii.120; Mvu 33, Mvu 87.
2. having its ground in founded on, being of such & such a nature or composition SN iv.67 (vācā˚); Pts i.130 (micchādiṭṭhi˚, correct in Index J.P.T.S. 1908!); Vb 319 (uppanna˚; + ārammaṇa), 392 (micchādiṭṭhi˚); Vb-a 403 (uppanna˚ etc.).
fr. vatthu1
(adj.) (-˚) speaking, in cpd. vaggu˚; speaking pleasantly Snp 955 (cp. Nd i.446; Snp-a 571 = sundaravada); suddhiṃ˚; of clean speech Snp 910.
fr. vad
(adj.) lit. “(easily) spoken to,” addressable, i.e. liberal bountiful, kind SN i.43; AN ii.59, AN ii.61 sq.; AN iv.271 sq., 285 289, 322; Snp 487; Pv iv.133, 342, 1011, 154; Vv-a 281.
cp. Sk. vadāniya, which also in P. avadāniya
(f.) bounty, kindness, liberality; neg. a˚; stinginess AN v.146, AN v.148 sq.; Vb 371.
abstr. fr. vadaññu
to speak, say, tell AN iv.79; Snp 1037, Snp 1077 sq.; Pp 42; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 16, Pv-a 39; Pot. 1st sg. vade (so read for vado? MN i.258; MN i.3rd sg. vadeyya Pv i.33; aor. 3rd pl. vadiṃsu Pv-a 4 ■ Cp. abhi˚, upa˚, pa˚, vi˚ ■ Another form (not Caus.: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 1392) is vadeti DN i.36; Vin ii.1; Snp 825; Snp p.140 (kiṃ vadetha); Ja i.294 imper. vadehi Pv-a 62; Pot. med. 1st pl. vademase DN iii.197; fut. vadessati Snp 351; aor. vadesi Dhp-a iii.174 ■ A specific Pāli formation is a Caus. vādiyati in act. and med. sense (all forms only in Gāthā style) e.g. indic. vādiyati Snp 824 = Snp 892, Snp 832; expld as vadati Snp-a 541, Snp-a 542, or katheti bhaṇati etc. (the typical Niddesa expln of vadati: see Nd ii.555) Nd i.161. In contracted (& shortened) form Pot. 2;nd sg. vajjesi (*vādiyesi you might tell, i.e. please tell Pv ii.116 (= vadeyyāsi Pv-a 149); iii.67 (same expln p. 203). The other Pot forms from the same base are the foll.: 1st sg. vajjaṃ Thig 308; Thig 2nd sg. vajjāsi Thig 307; Ja iii.272; Ja vi.19 and vajja Thig 323; Thig 3rd sg. vajjā Snp 971 (cp. Nd i.498) Ja vi.526 (= vadeyya C.); 3rd pl. vajjuṃ Snp 859 (= vadeyyuṃ katheyyuṃ etc. Nd ii.555); Ja v.221 ■ Caus. vādeti to make sound, to play (a musical instrument) Ja i.293 Ja ii.110, Ja ii.254 (vādeyyāma we might play); Ap 31 (aor vādesuṃ); Pv-a 151 (vīṇaṃ vādento) ■ Pass. vajjati (*vādiyati) to be played or sounded Ja i.13 (vajjanti bheriyo); Ap 31 (ppr. vajjamāna & aor. vajjiṃsu).; Another form of ppr. med. (or Pass.) is vadāna (being called, so-called) which is found in poetry only (contracted fr. vadamāna) at Vin i.36 = Ja i.83 ■ pp. udita2 & vādita; (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. vādāpeti to cause to be played Mvu 25, Mvu 74 (tūriyaṃ).
vad, Ved. vadati; Dhtp 134 vada = vacana
(nt.) speech, utterance Vv-a 345 (+ kathana).
fr. vad
see vadati.
see a˚.
another form of vadaññu
(nt.) making somebody speak or something sound Dhs-a 333 (we should better read vād˚; ).
fr. vādāpeti, Caus. II. of vadati
(f.) rainy weather Vin i.3; Ja vi.52 (loc. vaddalike); Dhp-a iii.339; Vb-a 109.
cp. late Sk. vārdala & BSk. vardalikā Mvu iii.301; Divy 500
(adj.-n.) 1. grown, old; an Elder; venerable, respectable; one who has authority At Ja i.219 three kinds of vaddha are distinguished: one by nature (jāti˚), one by age (vayo˚), one by virtue (guṇa˚); Ja v.140 (= paññāya vuddha C.). Usually combd with apacāyati to respect the aged, e.g. Ja i.219 and in cpd. vaddh-apacāyika respecting the elders or those in authority Ja iv.94; and ˚apacāyin id. Snp 325 (= vaddhānaṃ apaciti-karaṇa Snp-a 332); Dhp 109; Dhp-a ii.239 (= buḍḍhatare guṇavuddhe apacāyamāna) Cp. jeṭṭh’ apacāyin.
2. glad, joyful; in cpd. ˚bhūta gladdened, cheerful Ja v.6.
pp. of vaḍḍhati; see also vaḍḍha, vuḍḍha & vuddha. The root given by Dhtp (166) for; vṛdh is vadh in meaning “vuddhi”
(m. & nt.) a (leather) strap, thong Ja ii.154 (vv.ll. baddha, bandhana bandha, vaṭṭa). Occurs as aṃsa˚; shoulder strap at Ap 310, where ed. prints baddha (= baddha2).
-maya consisting of a strap, made of leather Ja ii.153.
cp. Vedic vardhra in meaning “tape”
in cpd. aṃsa˚; “shoulder strap” should be the uniform reading for a series of diff. spellings (˚vaṭṭaka, ˚baddhaka, ˚bandhaka) at Vin i.204 Vin ii.114; Vin iv.170. Cp. Geiger, Zeitschrift fur Buddhismus iv.107.
vaddha + ka
(nt.) increase, furthering Ja iii.422 (kula˚); Sdhp 247 (pīti˚), 307 (id.).
fr. vṛdh; see the usual vaḍḍhana
(nt.) joy, pleasure Ja v.6 (but C. = paṇḍita-bhāva).
fr. vaddha1 2
(nt.) (old) age Ja ii.137 (= vuddhabhāva, mahallakatā C.).
fr. vaddha1 1
in anta˚; at Ja i.260 is to be read as vaṭṭi.
to cut off, is Kern’s proposed reading (see Toev. s. v.) at Ja vi.527 (siro vaddhayitvāna) for vajjheti (T. reading vajjhayitvāna ).
fr. vardh to cut, cp. vaḍḍhaka & vaḍḍhakī
striking, killing; slaughter, destruction, execution DN iii.176; AN ii.113; Pp 58; Ja ii.347; Mil 419 (˚kata); Dhp-a i.69 (pāṇa˚ + pāṇa-ghāta), 80, 296; Dhp-a ii.39; Vb-a 382 ■ vadhaṃ dadāti to flog Ja iv.382- atta˚; self-destruction SN ii.241; piti˚; parricide DN-a i.153; miga˚; hunting Ja i.149.
-bandhana flogging and binding (imprisoning). In this connection vadh is given as a separate root at Dhtp 172 & 384 in meaning “bandhana.” See AN ii.209 AN v.206; Snp 242 (vadha-cheda-bandhana; v. is expld at Snp-a 285 as “sattānaṃ daṇḍ’ ādīhi ākoṭanan” i.e. beating) 623 (= poṭhana Snp-a 467); Ja i.435; Ja iv.11 Vb-a 97.
fr. vadh
slaying, killing; murderous; a murderer SN iii.112 (in simile); iv.173 (id.); AN iv.92 (id.); Thig 347; DN iii.72 (˚citta); Kp-a 27; Vv-a 72 (˚cetanā murderous intention); Vism 230, Vism 231 (in sim.); Sdhp 58. f. vadhikā Ja v.425 (pl. ˚āyo).
fr. vadh
to strike, punish; kill, slaughter slay; imper. 2nd pl. vadhetha Vism 314; ger. vadhitvā MN i.159; DN i.98; Ja i.12; Ja iv.67; Snp-a 257 (hiṃsitvā + ) fut. vadhissati Mvu 25, Mvu 62; aor. vadhi Ja i.18 (cp. ud-abbadhi); cond. 1st sg. vadhissaṃ Mil 221 ■ grd vajjha: see a˚ ■ Caus. vadheti Ja i.168; Mil 109. pp. vadhita.
Vedic vadh; the root is given at Dhtp 169 in meaning of “hiṃsā”
smitten Thag 783 = MN ii.73 (not with Kern, Toev. s. v. = vyathita).
pp. of vadheti
(f.) a daughter-in-law, a young wife AN ii.78; Dhp-a iii.260.
fr. vadhū
(f.) a daughter-in-law Vv-a 123.
Ved. vadhū; to Lith. vedù to lead into one’s house
(nt.) the forest; wood; as a place of pleasure sport (“wood”), as well as of danger & frightfulness (“jungle”), also as resort of ascetics, noted for its loneliness (“forest”). Of (fanciful) defns of vana may be mentioned: Snp-a 24 (vanute vanotī ti vanaṃ); Kp-a 111 (vanayatī ti vanaṃ); Dhs-a 364 (taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vanati bhajati allīyatī ti vanaṃ, yācati vā ti vanaṃ [i.e. vana2]. vanatho ti vyañjanena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ… balava-taṇhāy’etaṃ nāma); Dhp-a iii.424 (mahantā rukkhā vanaṃ nāma, khuddakā tasmiṃ vane ṭhitattā vanathā nāma etc., with further distinguishing detail concerning the allegorical meanings) ■ DN ii.256 (bhikkhūṇaṃ samitiṃ vanaṃ); AN i.35, AN i.37; Dhp 283 (also as vana2); Snp 272, Snp 562 (sīho nadati vane), 1015 (id.), 684 (Isivhaya v.); Snp p.18 (Jetavana), p. 115 (Icchānangala); Thig 147 (Añjanavana; a wood near Sāketa with a vihāra); Ja v.37 (here meaning beds of lotuses) Mil 219 (vanaṃ sodheti to clear a jungle); Dhs 1059 (“jungle” = taṇhā); Pv ii.65 (arañña˚-gocara); Vism 424 (Nandana˚ etc.); Dhp-a iv.53 (taṇhā˚ the jungle of lust). Characterized as amba˚; mango grove DN ii.126 and passim; ambāṭaka˚; plum grove Vin ii.17; udumbara of figs Dhp-a i.284; tapo˚; forest of ascetics Thag-a 136; Dhp-a iv.53; nāga˚; elephant forest MN i.175; brahā wild forest AN i.152; AN iii.44; Vv 633; Ja v.215; mahā˚; great forest Thig 373 (rahitaṃ & bhiṃsanakaṃ) ■; vanataraṃ (with compar. suffix) thicker jungle, denser forest Mil 269 (vanato vanataraṃ pavisāma) ■ On similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 133. Cp. vi˚.
-anta the border of the forest, the forest itself Snp 708 Snp 709; Pv ii.310 (= vana C.). -kammika one who works in the woods Ja iv.210 (˚purisa); v.427, 429. -gahana jungle thicket Vism 647 (in simile). -gumba a dense cluster of trees Vv 817 (cp. Vv-a 315). -caraka a forester Snp-a 51 (in simile). -cetya a shrine in the wood Ja v.255 -timira forest darkness; in metaphor ˚matt-akkhin at Ja iv.285 = Ja v.284, which Kern (Toev. s. v.) changes into ˚patt-akkhin, i.e. with eyes like the leaves of the forest darkness. Kern compares Sk. vanajapattr’ākṣī Mbh i.171, 43, and vanaja-locanā Avad. Kalp. 3, 137. The Cy. explns are “vana-timira-puppha-samān’ akkhī, and “giri-kaṇṇika-samāna-nettā”; thus taking it as name of the plant Clitoria ternatea. -dahaka (& ˚dahana ) burning the forest (aggi) Kp-a 21 (in simile) -devatā forest deva SN iv.302. -ppagumba a forest grove Vb-a 196. -ppati (& vanaspati); [cp. Vedic vanaspati Prk. vaṇapphai] “lord of the forest,” a forest tree; as vanappati only at Vin iii.47; otherwise vanaspati, e.g. SN iv.302 (osadhī + tiṇa + v.; opposed to herbs, as in R.V.); AN i.152; Ja i.329; Ja iv.233 (tiṇa-latā-vanaspatiyo) Dhp-a i.3. -pattha a forest jungle DN i.71; DN iii.38, DN iii.49, DN iii.195; MN i.16, MN i.104; Vin ii.146; AN i.60; AN iii.138 (arañña˚) Pp 59, Pp 68; DN-a i.210. -pantha a jungle road AN i.241 -bhaṅga gleanings of the wood, i.e. presents of wild fruit & flowers AN iv.197. -mūla a wild root DN i.166 (+ phala); AN i.241 (id.); Mil 278. -rati delight in the forest Dhp-a ii.100. -vaṇṇanā praise of the jungle Dhp-a ii.100. -vāsin forest-dweller Snp-a 56 (Mahā-tissatthera). -saṇḍa jungle-thicket, dense jungle DN i.87 DN i.117; SN iii.109 (tibba v. avijjāya adhivacana); AN iii.30; Ja i.82, Ja i.170; Dhp-a i.313; Dhp-a ii.100.
Ved. vana ■ The P. (edifying) etymology clearly takes vana as belonging to van, and, dogmatically equals it with vana2 as an allegorical expression (“jungle”) to taṇhā (e.g. Dhs-a 364 on Dhs 1059; Dhp-a iii.424 on Dhp 283) ■ The Dhtp (174) & Dhtm (254) define it “sambhattiyaṃ,” i.e. as meaning companionship
(nt.) lust, desire. In exegetical literature mixed up with vana1 (see definitions of vana1) ■ The word to the Pāli Buddhist forms a connection between vana and nibbāna, which is felt as a quâsi derivation fr. nibbana nis + vana: see nibbana & cp. nibbāna II. B 1 ■ SN i.180 (so ‘haṃ vane nibbanatho visallo); Snp 1131 (nibbana) Dhp 334; Thag 691 (vanā nibbanaṃ āgataṃ) ■ A Denom. fr. vana2 is vanāyati (like vanīyati fr. vaṇi).
van; vanati & vanoti to desire = Av. vanaiti Lat. venus, Ohg. wini friend (: E. winsome, attractive wunsc = E. wish, giwon = E. wont; also “to win.” The spelling sometimes is vaṇ: see vaṇi ■ The defn at Dhtp 523 is “yācane” (i.e. from begging), at Dhtm 736 “yācāyaṃ”
(-) (adj.) belonging to the forest, forestlike; adj. in cpd. ku˚; (kubbanaka, q.v.) brushwood Snp 1134.
fr. vana1
to desire, love, wish, aim at ask for Snp-a 24 (vanute & vanoti); Dhs-a 364 (vanati bhajati, allīyati). Caus. vanayati Kp-a 111.
van; Sk. vanoti & vanute. See also vana;2, vaṇi, vaṇeti
underwood, brushwood, thicket. Does not occur in lit meaning, except in exegesis of Dhp 283 at Dhp-a iii.424 q.v. under vana1. Another defn is given at Snp-a 24 “taṇhā pariyuṭṭhāna-vasena vanaṃ tanotī ti vanatho taṇh’ ānusayass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.”-The fig. meaning is “lust, desire,” see e.g. SN i.186; Thag 338; Dhp 344; Snp 16 (˚ja); Dhs 1059 (as epithet of taṇhā); Ja ii.205 (vanathaṃ na kayirā); Ne 81, Ne 82 ■ nibbanatha free from desire SN i.180; Dhs-a 364.
vana + tha; same in BSk. e.g. Mvu i.204
to desire, wish, covet, to hanker after MN i.260; SN iii.190. See also allīyati.
Denom. fr. vana2, cp, vanāyati
= vanaka; only in cpd. nāga˚; one belonging to the elephant forest, i e. an elephant-hunter MN i.175; MN iii.132.
(adj.-n.) poor begging; one who asks (for alms) or begs, a mendicant Ja vi.232 (= vanibbaka C.).
either fr. Sk. vani (= P. vaṇi) in meaning “begging,” or poetical abbreviation of vaṇibbin
.
to desire Ja vi.264 C.: (pattheti), 270 (hadayaṃ vanīyati, v.l. dhanīyati: cp allīyati) ■ See also vanati & vaṇeti;.
Denom. fr. vani = P. vaṇi
born in the woods Ja ii.446.
vane (loc. of vana1) + ja
1. vomited, or one who has vomited Mil 214; Pv-a 80. As nt. vomit at Vin i.303.
2. (fig. given up, thrown up, left behind, renounced MN i.37 (+ catta, mutta & pahīna). Cp. BSk. vāntī-bhāva, syn with prahāna Avs ii.188.
-āda refuse-feeder, crow Ja ii.439. -āsa one who has given up all wishes, an Arahant Dhp 97 (= sabbā āsā iminā vantā Dhp-a i.187). -āsika eating what has been vomited, a certain class of Petas Mil 294. -kasāva one who has left behind all fault Dhp 10 (= chaḍḍita˚ Dhp-a i.82). -gamana at Vism 210 = DN-a i.34 read either as v’ antagamana or c’ anta˚. -mala stainless Dhp 261 -lokāmisa renouncing worldly profit Dhp 378.
pp. of vamati
(adj.) disposed to veneration; f. ˚ikā Thig 337.
fr. vand
to greet respectfully, salute, to pay homage, to honour, respect to revere, venerate, adore Snp 366, Snp 547, Snp 573, Snp 1028; Pv ii.16; Mvu 15, Mvu 14 (+ pūjeti); Mil 14; Snp-a 191; Pv-a 53 (sirasā with the head, a very respectful way of greeting), 67; Vv-a 71. imper. vanda Vv 211 (= abhivādaya Vv-a 105); pl. vandantu Snp 573; ppr. vandamāna Snp 598; aor. vandi Snp 252; Ja i.88; Pv-a 38, Pv-a 61 Pv-a 81, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 275; inf. vandituṃ Pv-a 77; grd. vandiya (neg a˚; ) Vin ii.162 ■ Caus. II. vandāpeti to cause somebody to pay homage Ja i.88; Ja iii.11 ■ pp. vandita.
vand, originally identical with vad; the defn at Dhtp (135 & 588) is “abhivādana & thuti”
(nt.) & Vandanā (f.) salutation, respect, paying homage; veneration, adoration AN i.294 (ā); ii.203 (+ pūjā); Ja i.88; Pp 19, Pp 24 Mvu 15, Mvu 18; Mil 377; Pv-a i.53; Snp-a 492; Thag-a 256 Sdhp 221, Sdhp 540.
fr. vand, cp. Vedic vandana
(nt.) causing to do homage Ja i.67.
fr. vandāpeti; Caus. of vandati
saluted, revered, honoured, paid homage to; as nt. homage, respect, veneration Snp 702 (akkuṭṭha + ); Thig 388 (id.); Ja i.88.
pp. of vandati
one who venerates or adores, a worshipper Ja vi.207 (vandit’ assa = vanditā bhaveyya C.).
n. ag. fr. vandita
see vavakassati.
to sow Snp p.13 (kasati + ); Ja i.150 (nivāpaṃ vapitvā); Pv-a 139 ■ Pass. vappate SN i.227 (yādisaṃ v. bījaṃ tādisaṃ harate phalaṃ), and vuppati [Vedic upyate] Thag 530 ■ pp. vutta ■ Caus. I. vāpeti: see pp. vāpita1 ■ Caus. II. vapāpeti to cause to be sown Vin iii.131 (khettaṃ); Ja iv.276 (sāliṃ).
vap, Vedic vapate. Defn at Dhtp 192; bījanikkhepe
to shear, mow, to cut, shave: only in pp. of Caus. vāpita2 (q.v.).
vap, probably identical with vapati1
(nt.) sowing Snp-a 137; Dhp-a iii.220 (˚kassaka); Pv-a 8.
fr. vap
to go away, to disappear, only at Vin. i.2 = Kv 186 (kankhā vapayanti sabbā; cp. id p. Mvu ii.416 vyapananti, to be read as vyapayanti).
vi + apa + yā
(m. or nt.) to be sown, sowing; or soil to be sown on, in paṃsu˚; sowing on light soil & kalala˚; on heavy soil Snp-a 137 ■ Note. The defn of a root vapp at Dhtm 541 with “vāraṇe refers to P. vappa bank of a river (Abhp 1133) = Sk vapra, which is not found in our texts.
-kamma the act or occupation of sowing Ja i.340 (+ kasi-kamma). -kāla sowing time Snp p.13; SN i.172 (= vapanakāla, bīja-nikkhepa-kāla Snp-a 137). -maṅgala ploughing festival Ja i.57; Dhp-a ii.113; Snp-a 141.
orig. grd. fr. vap = Sk. vāpya
a tear, tears Vin i.345 (vappaṃ puñchitvā wiping the tears).
cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. bāṣpa
is a α ̔́πας λεγομένον at MN i.172; read perhaps better as vambhayitaṃ: see p. 545. Neumann trsls only “thus spoken” (i.e. bhāsitam etaṃ).
to vomit, eject, throw out, discharge Snp 198 = Ja i.146; Ja v.255 (fut. vamissati); Pv iv.354 (= uḍḍayati chaḍḍayati Pv-a 256) ■ Caus. vameti Mil 169 ■ pp. vanta.
vam, Idg. *ṷemo, cp. Lat. vomo, vomitus = vamathu; Gr. ἐμέω (E. emetic); Oicel. vaema seasickness-The defn at Dhtp 221 & Dhtm 315 is “uggiraṇa”.
vomiting; discharged food Pv-a 173 (˚bhatta; + ucchiṭṭha˚).
fr. vam
(nt.) an emetic DN i.12; AN v.219; cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 452.
fr. vam
one who has to take an emetic Mil 169.;
grd. of vamati; cp. Sk. vāmanīya; ā often interchanges with a before 1 & m, like Caus. vameti vāmeti
(f.) contempt, despite Vin iv.6; MN i.402 (att’ukkaṃsana: para-vambhana) Nd ii.505; Vism 29; Vb-a 484; Pgdp 100 ■ Spelt vamhanā at Ja i.454 (vamhana-vacana) & at Dhs-a 396 (khuṃsana˚).;
abstr. fr. vambheti
(adj.) to be despised, wretched, miserable Pv-a 175, Pv-a 176.
grd. of vambheti
(nt.) being despised or reviled MN i.172; Snp 905; Nd i.319 (= nindita, garahita, upavādita).
pp. of vambheti
(adj.) (-˚) despising, treating with contempt, disparaging MN i.95 (para˚, opp. to att’ ukkaṃ- saka).
fr. vambh
(& Vamheti) to treat with contempt despise, revile, scold; usually either combd with khuṃseti or opposed to ukkaṃseti, e.g. Vin ii.18; Vin iv.4; MN i.200 (= Snp 132 avajānāti), 402 sq.; DN i.90; AN ii.27 sq. Thag 621; DN-a i.256 (= hīḷeti); Dhp-a iv.38; Vv-a 348-pp. vambhayita ■ vamheti is found at Ja i.191, Ja i.356 cp. vamhana ■ Note. The spelling bh interchanges with that of h (vamheti), as ambho shows var. amho Trenckner (introd. to M 1. p. 1) gives vambheti (as BB reading) the preference over vamheti (as SS reading) Morris’ note on vambheti in J.P.T.S. 1884, 96 does not throw any light on its etymology.
Caus. of vambh, a root of uncertain origin (connected with vam ?). There is a form vambha given by Sk. lexicographers as a dial. word for vaṃśa Could it be a contraction fr. vyambheti = vi + Denom fr. ambho 2, part. of contempt?-The Dhtp (602 defines vambh as “garahāyaṃ”
(nt.) armour Ja ii.22.
Vedic varman, fr. vṛ; to cover, enclose
(adj.) = vammin Vin i.342.
fr. vamma
armoured, clad in armour Ja i.179 (assa); ii.315 (hatthi); iii.8 v.301, 322; DN-a i.40.
pp. of vammeti, cp. Sk. varmita
(adj.) wearing armour, armoured Ja iv.353 (= keṭaka-phalaka-hattha C.); v.259 373; vi.25; Mil 331. Vammika & vammika;
fr. vamma; Vedic varmin
(m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic valmīka; Idg. *ṷorm(āi); cp. Av. maoiris, Sk. vamraḥ, Gr. μύρμηζ, Lat. formica, Cymr. mor; all of same origin & meaning ant-hill: (a); ˚ika: MN i.142 sq.; Ja iii.85; Ja iv.30 (˚bila the ant’s hole); v.163 ■ (b) ˚ika: Ja i.432; Ja iv.30; Vism 183 (described), 304 (˚muddani), 446; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iii.208 Dhp-a iv.154.
to dress in armour, to armour Ja i.180; Ja ii.94 (mangala-hatthiṃ) ■ pp. vammita.
Denom. fr. vamma
bragging, boasting, despising Ja i.319 (˚vacana).
for vambha: see vambheti
(& vayo) (nt.) age, especially young age, prime youth; meaning “old age” when characterized as such or contrasted to youth (the ord. term for old age being jarā ). Three “ages” or “periods of life” are usually distinguished, viz. paṭhama˚; youth, majjhima˚; middle age, pacchima˚; old age, e.g. at Ja i.79; Vism 619; Dhp-a iii.133 ■ vayo anuppatta one who has attained old age old DN i.48 (= pacchima-vayaṃ anuppatta DN-a i.143) Snp p.. 50, 92 ■ Cp. Dhp 260; Ja i.138 (vayo-harā kesā) Vism 619 (the 3 vayas with subdivisions into dasakas or decades of life); Mvu 2, Mvu 26 (ekūnatiṃso vayasā 29 years of age); Pv-a 5 (paṭhama-vaye when quite young) 36 (id.; just grown up). In cpds. vaya˚.
-kalyāṇa charm of youth Dhp-a i.387. -ppatta come of age, fit to marry (at 16) Vv-a 120; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 112; Thag-a 266.
Vedic vayas vitality, age; to be distinguished from another vayas meaning “fowl.” The latter is probably meant at Dhtp 232 (& Dhtm 332) with def;n “gamane.” The etym. of vayo (age) is connected with Sk. vīra = Lat. vir. man, hero, vīs strength; Gr. ι ̓́ς sinew, ι ̓́φιος strong; Sk. vīḍayati to make fast, also veśati; whereas vayas (fowl) corresponds with Sk vayasa (bird) & viḥ to Gr.; αἰετός eagle, οἰωνός bird of prey, Lat. avis bird
1. loss, want, expense (opp. āya) AN iv.282 (bhogānaṃ); Snp 739; Pv-a 130 ■ avyayena safely DN i.72. 2. decay (opp. uppāda) DN ii.157 = Ja i.392 (aniccā vata sankhārā uppāda-vaya-dhammino); SN iv.28; AN i.152 AN i.299.
-karaṇa expense, expenditure Ja iv.355; Vin ii.321 (Sam. Pās on C. V. vi.4, 6, explaining veyyāsika or veyyāyika of Vin ii.157).
Sk. vyaya, vi + i; occasionally as vyaya in Pāli as well
is the Sk. form of the nom. pl. of pers. pron. ahaṃ, represented in Pāli by mayaṃ (q.v.). The form vayaṃ only in grammarians, mentioned also by Müller, P.Gr. p. 87 as occurring in Dhp (?). The enclitic form for acc gen. & dat. is no, found e.g. at Pv i.53 (gloss for vo C. amhākaṃ); Ja ii.153, Ja ii.352; Dhp-a i.101; Pv-a 20, Pv-a 73.
a friend Ja ii.31; Ja iii.140; Ja v.157.
cp. Sk. vayasya
(nt.) & Vayhā (f.) a vehicle, portable bed, litter Vin iv.339 (enumd under yāna together with ratha sakaṭa sandamānikā sivikā & pāṭankī); Ja vi.500 (f.), with sivikā ratha.;
grd. formation fr. vah; cp. Sk. vahya (nt.)
(adj.) excellent, splendid, best, noble. As attribute it either precedes or follows the noun which it characterizes, e.g. ˚pañña of supreme wisdom Snp 391, Snp 1128 (= agga-pañña Nd ii.557); ˚bhatta excellent food (opp. lāmaka˚) Ja i.123; ˚lañcaka excellent gift (?) (Trenckner, Mil p.424): see under lañcaka. dhamma˚; the best norm Snp 233; nagara˚; the noble city Vv 166 (= uttama˚, Rājagahaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ Vv-a 82); ratana˚; the best of gems Snp 683; rāja˚; famous king Vv 321 (= Sakka Vv-a 134); or inserted between noun and apposition (or predicate), e.g. ākiṇṇa -vara- lakkhaṇa full of the best marks Snp 408; narī -vara- gaṇa a crowd of most lovely women Snp 301; esp. frequent in combn with predicate gata: “gone on to the best of, i.e. riding the most stately (horse or elephant), or walking on the royal (palace) etc., e.g. upari-pāsādavara -gata Pv-a 105; sindha-piṭṭhi -vara- gata Ja i.179 hatthi-khandha vara -gata Pv-a 75, Pv-a 216, Pv-a 279 ■ nt varaṃ in compar. or superl. function: better than (instr.) the best, the most excellent thing AN iv.128 (katamaṃ nu kho varaṃ: yaṃ… yaṃ); Dhp 178 (ādhipaccena sotāpattiphalaṃ v.), 322 (varaṃ assatarā dantā… attadanto tato varaṃ).
-aṅganā a noble or beautiful woman Mvu 33, Mvu 84 -ādāyin acquiring the best SN iv.250; AN iii.80. -āroha (1) state elephant Vv 51 (= varo aggo seṭṭho āroho ti varāroho Vv-a 35); (2) (f.) a noble lady Ja vi.562 (Maddī varārohā rājaputtī).
fr. vṛ; to wish; Vedic vara
(m. & nt.) wish, boon, favour Mil 110, Mil 139. Usually in phrases ilke varaṃ dadāti to grant a wish or a boon Ja iv.10; Vv-a 260; Pv-a 20. varaṃ gaṇhāti to take a wish or a vow Ja v.382; varaṃ vuṇāti (varati) id. Ja iii.493 (varaṃ varassu, imper.); Pv ii.940, 42 Mil 227 ■ varaṃ yācati to ask a favour Ja iii.315 (varāni yācāmi).
fr.; vṛ; to wish
the bean Phaseolus trilobus Ja ii.75 (where equal to kalāya); Mil 267; Dhp-a i.311.
cp. *Sk. varaka
(adj.) wishing or asking (in marriage) Thig 406.
fr. vṛ;
the tree Crataeva roxburghii Ja i.222, Ja i.317 (˚rukkha ), 319 = Dhp-a iii.409 (˚kaṭṭhabhañja); Ja vi.535.
cp. Sk. varaṇa rampart, causeway, wall
& der. (“to choose” as well as “to obstruct”) see vuṇāti.
vṛ
(nt.) & Varattā (f.) a strap, thong, strip of leather SN i.63; AN ii.33; Snp 622; Dhp 398 (fig. for taṇhā); Ja ii.153; Ja v.45. As “harness at Ja i.175; as straps on a ship’s mast (to hold the sails Mil 378 ■ Cp. vārattika.
-khaṇḍa strip of leather, a strap MN i.244 = MN ii.193 MN iii.259 = SN iv.56 = AN iii.380.
cp. Vedic varatrā, given also in meaning “elephant’s girth” at Halāyudha ii.66
(adj.) wretched, miserable SN i.231; Ja iv.285; Vism 315; Vv-a 101; Pv-a 120 (syn for kapaṇa), 175 (id.).
cp. Epic Sk. varāka
a boar, wild hog Dhp 325 = Thag 17; Ja v.406 = Ja vi.277; Mil 364 Sdhp 378.
Vedic varāha & varāhu, freq. in Rigveda
(-˚) 1. track, line, trace, in pada˚; track, footprint Ja i.8; Ja ii.153 (v.l. lañca & lañcha) iv.221 (valañcha T.), 383; Dhp-a ii.38.
2. that which is spent or secreted, i.e. outflow, faeces, excrement, in sarīra˚; faeces Ja i.70, Ja i.80, Ja i.421 (˚ṃ muñcati to ease oneself) iii.486; Dhp-a ii.55.
2. design, use; only neg. avalañja useless, superfluous Vin iv.266; Vv-a 46 (˚ṃ akaṃsu rendered useless); Dhp-a iv.116.
see valañjeti
(nt.) 1. resorting, acting as, behaviour Vv-a 248.
2. giving off, evacuation, easing the body Ja i.161 (˚vacca-kuṭi privy); Dhp-a iii.270 (sarīra˚).
fr. valañjeti
(adj.) (-˚) being marked off, being traced, belonging to, behaving, living (anto˚ in the inner precincts, bahi˚; outside the bounds) Ja i.382, Ja i.385 Ja i.398.
fr. valañjana
traced, tracked, practised, travelled Ja iii.542 (magga).
pp. of valañjeti; cp. BSk. valañjita used, Mvu iii.276
1. to trace, track travel (a road); practise, achieve, resort to Mil 359; Vv-a 58.
2. to use, use up, spend Ja i.102; Ja iii.342 Ja vi.369, Ja vi.382, Ja vi.521 ■ ppr. Pass. (a-)valañjiyamāna (not any longer) in use Ja i.111 ■ pp. valañjita.
customarily expld as ava + lañj (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 661), the root lañj being given as a Sk. root in meaning “to fry,” “to be strong,” and a variety of others (see Mon. Williams s. v. lañj ). But the root & its derivations are only found in lexicographical and grammatical works, therefore it is doubtful whether it is genuine.; lañja is given as “pada,” i.e. track, place foot, and also “tail.” We are inclined to see in lañj a by-form of lañch, which is a variant of lakṣ “to mark etc. (cp. lañcha, lañchaka, ˚ana, ˚ita). Thus the meaning would range from originally “trace,” mark off enclose, to: “being enclosed,” assigned or belonging to i.e. moving (in), frequenting etc., as given in C. explns There seems to be a Singhalese word at the root of it as it is certainly dialectical ■ The Dhtm (522) laconically defines valañj as “valañjane”
(m. & nt.) a bracelet Vin ii.106; Ja ii.197 (dantakāre valay’-ādīni karonte disvā); iii.377; vi.64, 65; DN-a i.50; Dhp-a i.226 (danta˚ ivory bangle); Pv-a 157 (sankha˚) Mvu 11, Mvu 14 (˚anguli-veṭhakā).
Epic Sk. valaya, fr. Idg.; *ṷel to turn; see Sk. roots vṛ; to enclose, and val to turn, to which belong the foll.: varutra upper robe, ūrmi wave, fold valita bent, vālayati to make roll, valli creeper, vaṭa rope, vāṇa cane. Cp. also Lat. volvo to roll, Gr. ἐλύω to wind, ε ̓́λις round, ε ̓́λυτρον cover; Goth. walwjan to roll on, Ohg. welzan & walzan = Ags. wealtan (E. waltz) Ags. wylm wave, and many others, q.v. in Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v. volvo ■ The Dhtp (274) gives root val in meaning saṃvaraṇa, i.e. obstruct, cover. See further vuṇāti
1. a cloud, dark cloud, thundercloud SN i.212 Thig 55; AN ii.102; AN v.22; Thag 760; Pp 42, Pp 43; Vv 681 Ja iii.245; Ja iii.270 (ghana˚); Vism 285 (˚paṭala); Mil 274; Dhs-a 317; Vv-a 12 (= abbhā).
2. Name of mythical horses SN iii.145.
-kāyikā (devā) groups of cloud gods (viz. sīta˚, uṇha˚ abbha˚, vāta˚, vassa˚) SN iii.254.
valāha + ka; of dial. origin; cp. Epic Sk. balāhaka
cloud-horse Ja ii.129 (the Valāhassajātaka, pp. 127 sq.); cp. BSk. Bālāh’āśva (-rājā Divy 120 sq. (see Index Divy). Vali & Vali
valāha + assa
(f.) a line, fold, wrinkle, a streak, row Vin ii.112 (read valiyo for valiṃ?); Thig 256; Ja iv.109 Shhp 104 ■ muttā-vali a string of pearls Vv-a 169 For vaṭṭanā-valī see vaṭṭanā. See also āvali.
cp. Epic Sk. vali; fr val. Spelling occasionally with ḷ
(adj.) having folds Ja i.499.
fr. vali
wrinkled AN i.138 (acc. khaṇḍadantaṃ palita-kesaṃ vilūnaṃ khalitaṃ siro-valitaṃ tilak’āhata-gattaṃ: cp. valin with passage MN i.88 MN iii.180, one of the two evidehtly misread); Pv-a 56, Pv-a 153 In compn with taca contracted to valittaca (for valitattaca) “with wrinkled skin” Dhp-a ii.190 (phalitakesa + ); with abstr. valittacatā the fact of having a wrinkled skin MN i.49 (pālicca + ; cp. MA 215); AN ii.196 (khaṇḍicca pālicca + ).
pp. of val: see valeti
(adj.) having wrinkles MN i.88 (acc. palitakesiṃ vilūnaṃ khalita-siraṃ valinaṃ) = iii.180 (palitakesaṃ vilūnaṃ khalitaṃ-siraṃ valīnaṃ etc.) See valita for this passage ■ In compn vali-mukha “wrinkled face,” i.e. monkey Ja ii.298.
fr. vali
at MN i.446 is not clear. It is combd with vaṇṇiya (q.v.). See also note on p. 567; v.l. pāṇiya; C. silent.
read for valikaṃ at Thig 403, in meaning “wrong, fault”; Thag-a 266 expls as “vyālikaṃ dosaṃ.” So Kern, Toev. s. v.
cp. Sk. vyalīkaṃ
(adj.) having wrinkles Thig 269 (pl. valīmatā).
fr. vali
1. to twist, turn, in gīvaṃ to wring (a fowl’s neck Ja i.436; Ja iii.178 (gīvaṃ valitvā: read ˚etvā).
2. to twist or wind round, to put (a garment) on, to dress Ja i.452 (sāṭake valetuṃ; v.l. valañcetuṃ) ■ pp. valita.
cp. Sk. vāleti, Caus. of val to turn: see valaya
(f.) cp. Epic Sk. vallakī, BSk. vallikī Divy 108; Mvu i.227] the Indian lute Abhp 138.
a favourite Ja iv.404 Ja vi.38, Ja vi.371; rāja˚; a king’s favourite, an overseer Ja i.342 Mvu 37, Mvu 10; Vb-a 501 ■ f. vallabhā (a) beloved (woman), a favourite Ja iii.40; Vv-a 92, Vv-a 135, Vv-a 181.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vallabha & BSk. vallabhaka a sea monster Divy 231
(nt.) being a favourite Dāvs v.7.
abstr. fr. vallabha
(f.) a branching footstalk, a compound pedicle Abhp 550. The word is found in BSk. in meaning of “musical instrument” at Divy 315 and passim.
cp. Class. Sk. vallarī, Halāyudha ii.30
(f.) 1. an ornament for the ear Vin ii.106 (cp. Bdhgh’s expln on p. 316).
2. a jungle rope Vin ii.122.
cp. Sk. vālikā?
the plant kumbhaṇḍa i.e. a kind of gourd Abhp 597 (no other ref.?).
cp. late Sk. valibha wrinkled
(f.) 1. a climbing plant, a creeper Vin iii.144; Ja v.37; Ja vi.536; Vv-a 147 Vv-a 335 (here as a root?) ■ santānaka˚; a long, spreading creeper Vv-a 94, Vv-a 162.
2. a reed or rush used as a string or rope for binding or tying (esp. in building), bast (? MN i.190 (Neumann, “Binse”); Ja iii.52 (satta rohita macche uddharitvā valliyā āvuṇitvā netvā etc.), 333 (in similar connection); Dhp-a iii.118.
3. in kaṇṇa˚; the lobe of the ear Mvu 25, Mvu 94 ■ The compn form of vallī is valli˚.
-koṭī the tips of a creeper Ja vi.548. -pakka the fruit of a creeper Vv 3330. -phala = ˚pakka Ja iv.445. -santāna spreadings or shoots of a creeper Kp-a 48. -hāraka carrying a (garland of) creeper Vism 523 = Vb-a 131 (in comparison illustrating the paṭicca-samuppāda).
cp. Sk. vallī; for etym. see valaya
(nt.) dried flesh SN ii.98; Ja ii.245.
cp. Class. Sk. vallūra
at Vism 312 is to be read vāḷa (snake), in phrase vāḷehi upadduta “molested by snakes.”
is not clear; it occurs only in the expression (is it found in the Canon?) vaḷabhā-mukha a submarine fire or a purgatory Abhp 889. The Epic Sk. form is vaḍavā-mukha (Halāyudha i.70; iii.1).
= vaḷavā?
(f.) a roof; only in cpd. ˚ratha a large covered van (cp. yogga1) MN i.175 (sabba-setena vaḷabhī-rathena Sāvatthiyā niyyāti divā divaṃ); ii.208 (id.), but vaḷavābhi-rathena); Ja vi.266 (vaḷabhiyo = bhaṇḍa-sakaṭiyo C.). The expression reminds of vaḷavā-ratha.
cp. late (dial.) Sk. vaḍabhī
(f.) a mare, a common horse DN i.5; Pp 58; Mvu 10, Mvu 54; Ja i.180; Ja vi.343; Dhp-a i.399; Dhp-a iv.4 (assatarā vaḷavāya gadrabhena jātā).
-ratha a carriage drawn by a mare DN i.89, DN i.105, DN i.106. The expression reminds of vaḷabhī-ratha.
cp. Vedic vaḍavā
at Ja vi.90 is not clear (in phrase jaṭaṃ vaḷīnaṃ pankagataṃ). The C. reads valinaṃ, paraphrased by ākulaṃ. Fausböll suggests malinaṃ. Should we accept reading valinaṃ? It would then be acc. sg. of valin (q.v.).
drawn away, alienated; withdrawn, secluded Dhp-a ii.103 (˚kāya).
pp. of vavakassati
to be drawn away, to be distracted or alienated (from); so is to be read at all passages, where it is either combd with avakassati or stands by itself The readings are: Vin ii.204 (apakāsanti avapakāsanti = AN v.74 (avakassanti vavakassanti); AN iii.145 (bhikkhu n’ âlaṃ sanghamhā ‘vapakāsituṃ: read vavakāsituṃ or ˚kassituṃ), 393 (vapakassat’ eva Satthārā, vapakassati garuṭṭhāniyehi). See also apakāsati, avakassati, avapakāsati-pp. vavakaṭṭha.
v + ava + kṛṣ, would correspond to Sk. vyavakṛṣyate, Pass.
see vatti. Vavatthapeti & tthapeti;
to determine, fix, settle, define, designate, point out Ja iv.17 (disaṃ ˚tthapetvā getting his bearings); Vb 193 sq. Vism 182; Snp-a 67; Kp-a 11, Kp-a 42, Kp-a 89; Vv-a 220 ■ ppr Pass. vavatthāpiyamāna Dhp-a i.21, Dhp-a i.35 ■ pp. vavatthita & vavatthāpita;.
Caus. of vi + ava + sthā
(nt.) [fr. vi + ava + sthā; cp. late Sk. vyavasthāna which occurs in Ep. Sk. in meaning “stay” determination, resolution, arrangement, fixing, analysis Pts i.53; Vin iv.289; Vism 111, Vism 236 (= nimitta), 347 (defn); Mil 136; Kp-a 23.
arranged, settled, established Mil 345 (su˚).
pp. of vavatthāpeti
1. entered on arranged, fixed, determined, settled MN iii.25; Dhs-a 36–2. separated (opp. sambhinna) Vin ii.67 sq.
pp. of vi + ava + sthā, cp. vavatthapeti & late Sk. vyavasthita “determination”
to be determined or analysed Pts i.53, Pts i.76, Pts i.84.
unusual pres. (Med ■ Pass.) formation fr. vi + ava + sthā, formed perhaps after vavatthita
“letting go,” i.e. starting on something, endeavouring, resolution AN i.36; Ja vi.188 (handā ti vavassagg’ atthe nipāto); DN-a i.237 (here handa is expld as vavasāy’ atthe nipato). Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly “consent.”
vi + ava + srj; Sk. vyavasarga
(m. & nt.) power, authority, control, influence SN i.43, SN i.240 (kodho vo vasam āyātu: shall be in your power; vasa = āṇāpavattana K.S. i.320); MN i.214 (bhikkhu cittaṃ vasaṃ vatteti, no ca cittassa vasena vattati: he brings the heart under his control, but is not under the influence of the heart); Snp 297, Snp 315, Snp 578, Snp 586, Snp 968; Sdhp 264 ■ The instr. vasena is used as an adv. in meaning “on account of, because” e.g. mahaggha-vasena mahāraha “costly on account of its great worth” Pv-a 77; cp. Ja i.94; Pv-a 36 (putta˚); Mvu 33, Mvu 92 (paṭisanthāra˚) ■ Freq in phrase vase (loc.) vattati to be in somebody’s power Ja v.316 (te vase vattati), cp. MN i.214 (cittassa vasena vattati) & 231 (vatteti te tasmiṃ; vaso have you power over that?); trs. vase vatteti to get under control, to get into one’s power Ja iv.415 (attano vase vattetvā) v.316 (rājāno attano v. v.); Dhp-a ii.14 (rājānaṃ attano v. v.), cp. MN i.214 (vasan vatteti) & Pv-a 89 (;vasaṃ vattento) ■ Note. The compn form in connection with kṛ; and bhū is vasī˚; (q.v.).
-ānuga being in somebody’s power, dependent, subjected obedient Snp 332, Snp 1095; Ja iii.224 (= vasavattin C.); Thig 375 (= kinkāra- paṭissāvin Thag-a 252); Sdhp 249. -ānuvattin id.; f. ˚inī obedient, obliging (to one’s husband) Vv 313. -uttama highest authority, greatest ideal Snp 274. -gata being in someone’s power Ja v.453 (narīnaṃ); cp. vasī-kata. -vattaka wielding power Sdhp 483 (˚ika); a˚; having no free will Pv-a 64. -vattana wielding power, (having) authority Mil 356 -vattin
1. (act., i.e. vatteti) having highest power domineering, autocrat, (all-)mighty; fig. having self-mastery, controlling one’s senses DN i.247; DN ii.261; AN ii.24; Iti 122; Th 2. 37; Pv ii.333; Mil 253; DN-a i.111 DN-a i.114, DN-a i.121; Snp-a 133 (˚bhavana).
2. (pass.; i.e. vattati being in one’s power, dependent, subject Ja iii.224 Ja v.316; Thag-a 226 (read vattino for ˚vattito!).
cp. Vedic vaśa; vaś to be eager, to desire
to clothe. pp.; vuttha1. Caus. vāseti: see ni˚ See also vāsana1 & vāsana;1.
vas1; to Idg. *ṷes, cp. Gr. ε ̓́ννυμι to clothe, Sk. vasman cover, Goth. wasjan clothe, wasti dress; Lat vestis = E. vest etc.; Dhtp 628 (& Dhtm 870): acchādane
to live, dwell, stay, abide; to spend time (esp. with vassaṃ the rainy season); trs. to keep, observe live, practise Snp 469 sq., 1088 (= saṃvasati āvasati parivasati Nd ii.558); Pv-a 3, Pv-a 12, Pv-a 78 (imper. vasatha). uposathaṃ vasaṃ (ppr.) keeping the Sunday Ja vi.232 brahmacariyaṃ v. to live a chaste life MN i.515 (cp. same expression Ait. Br. 5, 13; Śat. Br. 12, 2, 2; 13, 8. 22)-ppr. vasanto Pv-a 75, Pv-a 76; ppr. med. vasamāna Ja i.21, Ja i.236, Ja i.291; Pv-a 117; Pot. vaseyya MN i.515; Pv ii.97 (ghare), & vase Mil 372 ■ aor. vasi Snp 977; Ja iv.317 (piya-saṃvāsaṃ); Pv-a 111; Mvu 1, Mvu 13 (vasī vasi); 5, 229 ■ ger. vasitvā Ja i.278; Ja iv.317; Pv-a 13 grd. vasitabba Snp 678; Pv-a 42; & vatthabba Mvu 3 Mvu 12; inf. vatthuṃ Thig 414, & vasituṃ Pv-a 12, Pv-a 112. Fut vasissati [ = Sk. vasiṣyati] Mvu 14, Mvu 26; Pv-a 12; and (older) vacchati [ = Sk. vatsyati] Vin i.60; Thig 294; Ja iv.217; Ja iv.1st sg. vacchāmi Ja v.467 (na te v. santike) vi.523, 524, & vacchaṃ Thig 414 ■ Pass. vussati [Sk uṣyate] MN i.147 (brahmacariyaṃ v.) ■ pp. vasita vusita [ = vi + uṣita], vuttha [perhaps = vi + uṣṭa], q. v-Caus. I. vāseti to cause to live, stay or dwell; to make live; to preserve (opp. nāseti at SN iv.248) Vin iii.140; SN iv.248; Mil 211; Pv-a 160 (inf. vāsetuṃ); see also vāseti2 ■ Caus. II. vasāpeti (cp. adhivāsāpeti) to make live or spend, to cause to dwell, to detain Ja i.290; Ja ii.27; Pv-a 20 (vassaṃ) ■ pp. vāsita ■ See also adhi˚, ā˚ ni˚, pari˚.
vas2; Idg. *ṷes to stay, abide; cp. Av. varəhaiti; Lat. Vesta the goddess of the hearth = Gr. ἑστία hearth Goth. wisan to stay, remain, be (= Ohg. wesan, E. was were); Oicel. vist to stay, Oir. foss rest ■ Dhtm 470 kanti-nivāsesu
(f.) a dwelling, abode, residence Ja vi.292 (rāja˚ = rāja-paricariyā C.); Mil 372 (rājavasatiṃ vase); Dāvs iv.27 (saka˚).
fr. vas2, cp. Vedic vasati
(nt.) clothing, clothes Snp 971; Thig 374; DN iii.118 (odāta˚), 124 (id.); Nd i.495 (the six cīvarāni); Pv-a 49 ■ vasanāni clothing Mvu 22, Mvu 30- vasana (-˚) as adj. “clothed,” e.g. odāta˚; wearing white robes Vin i.187; kāsāya˚; clad in yellow robes Mvu 18, Mvu 10; pilotika˚; in rags Ja iv.380; suci˚; in bright garments Snp 679; Pv i.108.
fr. vasati1
(nt.) dwelling (-place), abode; usually in cpds. like ˚gāma the village where (he) lived Ja ii.153 ˚ṭṭhāna residence, dwelling place Pv-a 12, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 92; Dhp-a i.323 and passim.
fr. vasati2
(adj.) (-˚) living (in) Ja ii.435 (nibaddha˚, i.e. of continuous abode).
fr. vasana2
spring Ja i.86; Ja v.206; Kp-a 192 (bāla˚ = Citra); DN-a i.132 (˚vana); Pv-a 135.
Vedic vasanta; Idg. *ṷēr, cp. Av. varehar spring, Gr. εἄρ, Lat. vēr, Oicel. vār spring, Lith. vasarā summer.
a bull Mil 115 (rāja˚); Snp-a 40 (relation between usabha, vasabha & nisabha) Vv-a 83 (id.).
the Sanskritic-Pāli form (*vṛṣabha) of the proper Pāli usabha (q.v. for etym.). Only in later (Com. style under Sk. influence
an outcaste; a low person, wretch; adj. vile, foul Vin ii.221; Snp 116–136; Ja iv.388; Snp-a 183,-f. vasalī outcaste wretched woman SN i.160; Ja iv.121, Ja iv.375; Dhp-a i.189; Dhp-a iii.119; Dhp-a iv.162; Vv-a 260.
-ādhama = ˚dhamma Snp 135. -dhamma vile conduct Ja ii.180. -vāda foul talk Ud 28; Snp-a 347. -sutta the suttanta on outcasts Snp 116 sq. (p, 21 sq.), commented on at Snp-a 174 sq., 289.
Vedic vṛṣala, DimiName of vṛṣan, lit. “little man”
= vasala Snp p.21.
vasala + ka in more disparaging sense
(f.) a cow (neither in calf nor giving suck) Snp 26, Snp 27; Snp-a 49 (= adamita-vuddha-vacchakā).
Vedic vaśā; cp. vāśitā; Lat. vacca cow
(f.) fat, tallow, grease Snp 196; Kp iii.; Pv ii.23; Ja iii.356; Ja v.489; Pv-a 80; Vb-a 67 In detail at Vism 263, Vism 361; Vb-a 246.
cp. Vedic vasā
is the shortened form of vasī˚; (= vasa) in combns ˚ppatta one who has attained power, mastering: only in phrase ceto-vasippatta AN ii.6; AN iii.340; Mil 82; cp BSk. vaśiprāpta Divy 210, Divy 546 ■ and ˚ppatti mastership mastery Vism 190 (appanā + ).
(adj.) (-˚) being in the power of, subject to, as in kodha˚; a victim of anger Ja iii.135; taṇhā under the influence of craving Ja iv.3 mātugāma˚; fond of women Ja iii.277.
fr. vasa, cp. Sk. vaśika
dwelled, lived, spent Mvu 20, Mvu 14.
pp. of vasati2
one who abides, stays or lives (in), a dweller; fig. one who has a (regular) habit AN ii.107 Pp 43, cp. PugA 225 ■ vasitā is given as “habit” at Cpd. 58 sq., 207.
n. ag. fr. vasita
(adj.) having power (over), mastering, esp. one’s senses; a master (over) Vin iii.93; DN i.18 (= ciṇṇavasitattā vasī DN-a i.112); iii.29; Snp 372; Vism 154 (fivefold); Mvu 1, Mvu 13 (vasī vasi); Dāvs i.16.
fr. vasa
= vasin Iti 32 (acc. vasimaṃ; v.l. vasīmaṃ).
is the composition form of vasa in combn with roots kṛ; and bhū, e.g. ˚kata made dependent, brought into somebody’s power, subject(ed) Thig 295 (= vasavattino katvā, pl.); Snp 154; cp. BSk. vaśīkṛta Jtm 213. See also vasagata ■ ˚katvā having overcome or subjected Snp 561 (= attano vase vattetvā Snp-a 455). Metricausâ as vasiṃ karitvā at Snp 444 ■ ˚bhāva state of having power mastery Nd ii.466 (balesu); Pp 14 (in same passage, but reading phalesu), expld at PugA 189 (with v.l. SS balesu!) as “ciṇṇa-vasī-bhāva”; Kv 608 (implies balesu); Mil 170. Cp. BSk. bala-vaśī-bhāva Mvu iii.379. See also ciṇṇa ■ ˚bhūta having become a master (over), mastering SN i.132; Mil 319; cp. Mvu i.47 & 399 vaśībhūta ■ The same change of vasa˚ to vasī˚ we find in comb;n vasippatta (vasī + ppatta), q. v under vasi˚.
(nt.) wealth; only in cpds. ˚deva the god of wealth, i.e. Kṛṣṇa (Kaṇha) Mil 191 (as ˚devā followers of K.); Ja v.326 (here in T. as ādicco vāsudevo pabhankaro, expld in C. as vasudevo vasujotano, i.e. an Ep. of the sun); Vism 233 (Vāsudevo baladevo) -˚dharā (f.) (as vasun-dharā) the bearer of wealth, i.e. the earth SN i.100; AN iii.34; Ja v.425; Vism 205, Vism 366; DN-a i.61. -˚dhā id. Ja i.25; Ap 53; Vism 125.
Vedic vasu good, cp. Gr. ἐύς good, Oir. fīu worthy, Goth. iusiza better
(adj.) having wealth, rich Ja vi.192.
fr. vasu
(m. & nt.) 1. rain, shower Ja iv.284; Ja vi.486 (khaṇika sudden rain); Mil 307; Mvu 21, Mvu 31; Dhp-a iii.163 (pokkhara˚ portentous); Snp-a 224 (mahā˚ deluge of rain); Pv-a 55 (vāta˚ wind & rain) ■ fig. shower, downpour fall MN i.130 = Vin ii.25 (kahāpaṇa˚); Dhp-a ii.83 (kusuma˚) ■ Esp. the rainy season, lasting roughly from June to October (Āsāḷha-Kattika), often called “Lent,” though the term does not strictly correspond Usually in pl. vassā (A iv.138), also termed vassā-ratta “time of rains” (J iv.74; v.38). Cp. BSk. varṣā, e.g. Divy 401, Divy 509 ■ Keeping Lent (i.e. spending the rainy season) is expressed by vassaṃ vasati Vin iii.10; Mvu 16, Mvu 8; or by vassa-vāsaṃ (vass’ āvāsaṃ) vasati (see below) vassaṃ upeti SN v.152, vassaṃ upagacchati SN v.152; Pv-a 42. One who has kept Lent or finished the residence of the rains is a vuttha-vassa Ja i.82; Mvu 17, Mvu 1; or vassaṃ vuttha Vin iii.11; SN i.199; SN v.405; Pv-a 43. Cp BSk. varṣ’ oṣita Divy 92, Divy 489 ■ Vassa-residence is vassa-vāsa (see below) ■ vassaṃ vasāpeti (Caus.) to induce someone to spend the rainy season Pv-a 20- anto-vassaṃ during Lent; cp. antovass’ eka-divasaṃ one day during Lent Mvu 18, Mvu 2; antara-vassaṃ id SN iv.63.
2. (nt.) a year AN iv.252 (mānusakāni paññāsa vassāni); Snp 289, Snp 446, Snp 1073. satta˚; (adj.) seven years old Mvu 5, Mvu 61; satta-aṭṭha˚ 7 or 8 years old Pv-a 67 ■ See cpd. ˚sata.
3. semen virile, virility see cpds. ˚kamma & ˚vara;.
-agga shelter from the rain, a shed (agga = agāra Ja i.123; Dhp-a iii.105 = Vv-a 75. -āvāsa vassa-residence AN iii.67. -āvāsika belonging to the spending of the rainy season, said of food (bhatta) given for that purpose Ja vi.71; Dhp-a i.129 (as one of the 4 kinds: salāka˚ pakkhika˚, navacanda˚, vass’-āvāsika˚), 298; iv.129 (˚lābha a gift for the r. s.). -upagamana entering on the vassa-residence Pv-a 42. -upanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, commencement of Vassa residence [BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, Divy 489; Avs i.182, where Ep. of the full moon of Āsāḷha]. Two such terms for taking up the residence: purimikā & pacchimikā AN i.51 i.e. the day after the full moon of Ā. or a month after that date. See upanāyika ■ vass’ ûpanāyika-divasa the first day of Lent Vism 92; Dhp-a iv.118; ˚ûpanāyikaṃ khandhakaṃ the section of the Vinaya dealing with the entrance upon Lent (i.e. Vin i.137 sq.) Mvu 16, Mvu 9. -odaka rain-water Vism 260 = Vb-a 243 -kamma causing virility DN i.12 (= vasso ti puriso, vosso ti paṇḍako iti; vossassa vassa-karaṇaṃ vassa-kammaṃ vassassa vossa-karaṇaṃ vossa-kammaṃ DN-a i.97). -kāla time for rain Ja iv.55. -dasa (& ˚dasaka) a decade of years: see enum;d at Ja iv.397. -pūgāni innumerable years Ja vi.532, cp. Snp 1073. -vara a eunuch Ja vi.502 -valāhaka a rain cloud AN iii.243 (˚devā). -vassana shedding of rain, raining Dhp-a ii.83. -vāsa Vassa residence SN v.326; Pv-a 20. -vuṭṭhi rainfall Snp-a 34, cp 224. -sata a century Snp 589, Snp 804; AN iv.138; Pv ii.115 Pv-a 3, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 69. -satika centenarian Mil 301.
cp. Vedic varṣa (nt.) rain. For etym. see vassati;1
to rain (intrs.), fig to shower, pour(down) Vin i.32 (mahāmegho vassi) SN iii.141 (deve vassante); v.396 (id.); Snp 30 (devassa vassato, gen. sg. ppr.); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 139, Pv-a 287; Mvu 21, Mvu 33; Dhp-a ii.83 (vassatu, imper.; vassi, aor.); 265 (devo vassanto nom. sg.) ■ Cp. kālena kālaṃ devo vṛṣyate Divy 71 ■ Caus. II. vassāpeti to cause to rain Ja v.201 (Sakko devaṃ v. let the sky shed rain) ■ pp. vaṭṭa vaṭṭha, vuṭṭha. Another pp. of the Caus. *vasseti is vassita.
vṛṣ, varṣati, vṛṣate; Idg. *ṷers to wet, cp. Vedic vṛṣa bull, varṣa rain, vṛṣabha (P. usabha), Av. varšna virile, Lat. verres boar; Gr. α ̓́ρρην virile, ε ̓́ρση dew with which root is connected *eres to flow: Sk. arṣati ṛṣabha bull, Lat. ros dew = Sk. rasa essence etc. Dhtm 471 gives “secana” as defn
to utter a cry (of animals), to bellow, bark, to bleat, to crow etc. SN ii.230; Ja i.436 (of a cock); ii.37 153, 307; iii.127; vi.497 (ppr. vassamāna = vāsamāna C.) ■ pp. vassita2.
vāś to bellow, Vedic vāśyate; Dhtm 471: “saddane”
(nt.) raining, shedding (water) Dhp-a ii.83 (vassa˚).
fr. vassati1
(nt.) bleating; neg. a˚; Ja iv.251.
fr. vassati2
(belonging to) the rainy season Vin iv.286; AN iv.138; Ja ii.445 Ja v.177.
gen. pl. formation fr. vassa, like gimhāna fr. gimha (q.v.). Kern, Toev. s. v. sees in it a contraction of varṣāyaṇa. Cp. Trenckner, Mil p.428
(adj.) shedding, pouring out Ja i.253 (dhana˚).
fr. vassāpeti; Caus. of vassati1
(adj.) 1. (cp. vassa1) for the rainy season DN ii.21 (palace); cp. Avs i.269 varṣaka (id.).
2. (-˚ of years, in gaṇa˚; for many years Snp 279; Snp-a 339 tero˚; more than one year (old): see under tero; satta˚ seven years old Pv-a 53.
fr. vassa
(f.) & Vassika (nt.) = vassikī, i.e. Jasminum Sambac; cp. BSk. varṣika Lal 366, Lal 431; Divy 628; Avs i.163. (a) f. (the plant) Dhp 377 (= sumanā Dhp-a iv.112); Mil 251. (b) nt. (the flower, said to be the most fragrant of all flowers) AN v.22; SN v.44; Dhp-a iv.112 (˚puppha).
(f.) the great-flowered jasmine, Jasminum Sambac (cp. vassikā) Dhp 55 = Ja iii.291 = Mil 333; Mil 181, Mil 338; Dhp-a i.422.
sprinkled with, wet with, endowed with, i.e. full of Ja iv.494 (balena vassita).
pp. of *vasseti, Caus. of vassati1
(nt.) a cry Ja i.432; Ja iv.217, Ja iv.225.
pp. of vassati2
a shedder of rain AN ii.102 = Pp 42.
n. ag. fr. vassita1
(adj. n.) raining; in padesa˚; shedding local showers Iti 64.
fr. vassati1
(-˚) 1. bringing, carrying, leading Pv i.58 (vāri˚ river = mahānadī Pv-a 29); SN i.103; Pv-a 13 (anattha˚). Doubtful in hetu- vahe Pv ii.85, better with v.l. ˚vaco, expld by sakāraṇa-vacana Pv-a 109.
2. a current Ja iv.260 (Gangā˚); v.388 (mahā˚) ■ Cp. vāha.
fr. vah
1. to carry, bear, transport Ja iv.260; Pv-a 14 (= dhāreti); Mil 415 (of iron: carry weight) ■ imper. vaha Vv 8117; inf. vahituṃ Pv-a 122 (perhaps superfluous); grd. vahitabba Mvu 23, Mvu 93. 2. to proceed, to do one’s work MN i.444; Mvu 34, Mvu 4 guḷayantaṃ vahitvāna, old var. reading for P.T.S. ed T. reading guḷayantamhi katvāna.
3. to work, to be able, to have power AN i.282 ■ Pass. vuyhati (Sk uhyate) to be carried (along) Vin i.106; Thag 88; ppr vuyhamāna SN iv.179; Thag 88; Ja iv.260; Pv-a 153 pass. also vahīyati Pv-a 56 (= nīyati); ppr. vahīyamāna Mil 397 ■ pp. ūḷha (see soḍha), vuḷha & vūḷha; (būḷha)-Caus. vāheti to cause to go, to carry, to drive away Vin ii.237; Snp 282; Ja vi.443 ■ ppr. vāhiyamāna (in med. pass. sense) Ja vi.125 ■ pp. vahita (for vāh˚) Mil 346. Cp. ubbahati2.
vah, Idg. *ṷeĝh to drive, lead, cp. Sk. vahitra = Lat. vehiculum = E. vehicle; Gr. ο ̓́ξος waggon, Av vaƶaiti to lead, Lat. veho to drive etc.; Goth. ga-wigan = Ohg. wegan = Ger. bewegen; Goth. wēgs = Ger. weg E. way; Ohg. wagan = E. waggon, etc ■ Dhtp 333 Dhtm 498: vaha; pāpuṇane
(adj. nt.) 1. carrying Vv-a 316; Dhp-a iii.472 (dhura˚).
2. a current Ja iv.260.
fr. vah
(adj.) (-˚) carrying, bearing Ja ii.97 (dhura˚).
vahana + ka
(indecl.) part. of disjunction: “or”; always enclitic Kp viii. (itthiyā purisassa vā; mātari pitari vā pi). Usually repeated vā-vā (is it so-) or, either-or, e.g. Snp 1024 (Brahmā vā Indo vā pi); Dhp 1 (bhāsati vā karoti vā); Pv-a 74 (putto vā dhītā vā natthi?) ■ with negation in second place: whether-or not, or not, e.g. hoti vā no vā is there or is there not DN i.61; taṃ patthehi vā mā vā Vv-a 226 ■ Combined with other emphatic particles (na) vā pana not even Pv ii.69 (manussena amanussena vā pana); vā pi or even Snp 382 (ye vā pi ca); Pv ii.614 (isayo vā pi ye santā etc.); iti vā Nd ii.420; atha vā Dhp 83 (sukhena atha vā dukhena); uda… vā Snp 232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā) ■ In verse vā is sometimes shortened to va, e.g. devo va Brahmā vā Snp 1024: see va4.
Ved. vā, Av. vā, Gr. η ̓́, Lat ■ ve
(˚-) speech, voice, talk; only in cpd. ˚karaṇa talk, speaking conversation, as kālyāṇa-vāk-karaṇa good speech AN ii.97; AN iii.195, AN iii.261; AN iv.296 sq.; 328; v.155; abstr ˚ta AN i.38. Cp. vākya.
Vedic vāc, for which the usual P. form is vācā
(nt.) the bark of a tree DN i.167; Vin iii.34; Ja i.304; Ja ii.141; Vism 249 = Vb-a 232 (akka˚ & makaci˚); Mil 128 ■ avāka without bark Ja iii.522.
-cīra (= cīvara) a bark garment worn by an ascetic Vin iii.34; AN i.240, AN i.295; Ja i.8, Ja i.304; Ja v.132; Pp 55 -maya made of bark Vin ii.130. Vakara = vagula
late Sk. valka, cp. P. vakka
net, snare MN i.153 (daṇḍa˚, Dvandva); ii.65 ■ As vākara at Ja iii.541; as vākura at Thag 774.
(nt.) saying, speech, sentence, usually found in poetry only, e.g. DN ii.166 (suṇantu bhonto mama eka-vākyaṃ); AN ii.34 (sutvā arahato vākyaṃ); iii.40 (katvāna vākyaṃ Asitassa tādino); Snp 1102 (= vacana Nd ii.559); Ja iv.5 Ja v.78; Ap 25; Kp-a 166 (˚opādāna resumption of the sentence); Dhs-a 324 (˚bheda “significant sentence trsln).
fr. vac: see vāk & vācā; Vedic vākya
at Mvu 19, Mvu 28 (tadahe v. rājā) is to be read (tadah’ ev) āgamā, i.e. came on the same day. The passage is corrupt: see trsln p. 130. Vagura & a
(f.) a net; as ˚a Ja vi.170 Kp-a 47 (sūkara˚); Thag-a 78; as ˚ā Ja vi.582. Another P. form is vākarā.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vāgurā; to Idg. *ṷeg to weave, as in Lat. velum sail, Ags. wecca = E wick; Ohg. waba = Ger. wabe
(adj.) reciting, speaking, expressing Snp-a 164 (lekha˚); sotthi˚; an utterer of blessings, a herald Mil 359 ■ f. ˚ikā speech Sdhp 55.
fr. vācā
(nt.) talk, recitation, disputation; invitation (?), in brāhmaṇa˚; Ja i.318 (karoti); iii.171 iv.391 (karoti); regarded as a kind of festival. At Ja iii.238 vācanaka is used by itself (two brahmins receiving it). It refers to the treating of brāhmaṇas (br. teachers) on special occasions (on behalf of their pupils: a sort of farewell-dinner?) ■ It is not quite sure how we have to interpret vācanaka. Under brāhmaṇa (cpds.) we have trsld it as “elocution show (cp. our “speech day”). The E. trsln gives “brahmin feast”; Prof. Dutoit “Brahmanen-backwerk” (i.e. special cakes for br.). vācana may be a distortion of vājana, although the latter is never found as v.l. It is at all events a singular expression. BR give vācanaka as α ̔́πας λεγομένον in meaning of “sweetmeat,” with the only ref. Hārāvalī 152 (Calc. ed.), where it is expld as “prahelaka” (see P. paheṇaka ). On the subject see also Fick, Soc. Glied. 137, 205.
fr. vāceti
(f.) recitation, reading; ˚magga way of recitation, help for reading, division of text (into chapters or paragraphs) Tikp 239; Kp-a 12, Kp-a 14, Kp-a 24.
fr. vāceti
(1) amiable speech (vācā + peyya = piya) Ja vi.575 (= piyavacana C.) ■ (2) spelling for vājapeyya (q.v.).
(adj.) connected with speech, verbal (contrasted with kāyika & cetasika; ) Vin iv.2; Pp 21; Mil 91; Vism 18; Dhs-a 324 ■ As nt. noun at Mil 352 in meaning “behaviour in speech.”
fr. vācā
(f.) word, saying, speech; also as adj. (-˚) vaca speaking, of such a speech (e.g. duṭṭha˚ Pv i.32, so to be read for dukkha˚) ■ DN iii.69 sq., 96 sq., 171 sq. SN iv.132 (in triad kāyena vācāya manasā: see kāya iii. and mano ii.3); Snp 232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā) 397, 451 sq., 660, 973, 1061 (= vacana Nd ii.560); Nd i.504; Dhs-a 324 (vuccatī ti vācā) ■ In sequence vācā girā byappatha vacībheda vācasikā viññatti, as a defn of speech Vin iv.2, expld at Dhs-a 324: see byappatha- vācaṃ bhindati: (1) to modify the speech or expression Snp-a 216 (cp. vākya-bheda Dhs-a 324) ■ (2) to use a word, so say something Vin i.157; MN i.207 (Neumann “das Schweigen brechen”); Mil 231 (i.e. to break silence? So Rh. D. trsln). Cp. the English expression “to break the news.”- vācā is mostly applied with some moral characterization, as the foll., frequently found: atthasaṃhitā AN iii.244; kalyāṇa˚; AN iii.195, AN iii.261 AN iv.296; AN v.155; pisuṇā & pharusā AN i.128, AN i.174, AN i.268 sq. AN iii.433; AN iv.247 sq.; DN-a i.74, DN-a i.75; Nd i.220, and passim rakkhita˚; SN iv.112; vikiṇṇa˚; SN i.61, SN i.204; AN i.70 AN iii.199, AN iii.391 sq.; sacca˚; AN ii.141, AN ii.228; saṇhā AN ii.141 AN ii.228; AN iii.244; AN iv.172; see also vacī-sucarita; sammā˚ Vb 105, Vb 106, Vb 235; Vb-a 119; see also magga; hīnā etc. SN ii.54.
-ānurakkhin guarding one’s speech Dhp 281 (cp vācāya saṃvara Dhp-a iv.86). -ābhilāpa “speechjabbering,” forbidden talk Snp 49 (i.e. the 32 tiracchānakathā Nd ii.561). -uggata with well intoned speech Mil 10. -yata restrained in speech Snp 850 (= yatta gutta rakkhita Nd i.221). -vikkhepa confusion of speech equivocation DN i.24 sq.; DN-a i.115.
vac, vakti & vivakti; cp. vacaḥ (P. vaco); Vedic vāk (vāc˚) voice, word, vākya; Av. vacah & vaxs word Gr. ε ̓́πος word, ο ̓́ψ voice, Lat. vox = voice, voco to call Ohg. gi-wahan to mention etc. The P. form vācā is a remodelling of the nom. vāc after the oblique cases, thus transforming it from the cons. decl. to a vowel (˚ā decl. Of the old inflexion we only find the instr. vācā Snp 130, Snp 232. The compn forms are both vācā˚; and vacī˚;
one who teaches or instructs DN i.123.
n. ag. fr. vāceti
to make speak or recite, to teach: see vatti ■ pp. vācita.
Caus. of vac
vigeo to be strong [“vigour”]; Av. vaƶra; Oicel wakr = Ags. wacor = Ger. wacker; E. wake, etc.] 1 strength, a strength-giving drink, Soma Snp-a 322. 2. the feather of an arrow Ja iv.260; Ja v.130.
cp. Vedic vāja strength; Idg. *ṷeġ, cp. vājeti, vajra (P. vajira); Lat. vegeo to be alert [“vegetation”
the vājapeya sacrifice, a soma offering. Spelling often vāca˚; (mostly as v.l.); see S i.76; AN ii.42; AN iv.151; Snp 303; Iti 21; Mil 219; Ja iii.518. Cp. peyya2.
cp. Vedic vājapeya; see Macdonell, Vedic Mythology pp. 131 sq., 155, quoting Weber, Vājapeya; Banerjea, Public Administration etc. 92
(adj.) feathered (of an arrow) MN i.429.
pp. of vājeti: see vāja
(adj.-n.) possessed of strength or swiftness; a horse, stallion Dāvs i.31; Dāvs v.35 (sita˚), 53 (sasi-paṇḍara˚) Vv-a 278.
fr. vāja
enclosure, enclosed place Vin ii.154. See also yañña˚.
cp. Class. Sk. vāṭa; on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. vallus
(-˚) enclosure, circle, ring; in gala˚; the throat circle, i.e. the bottom of the throat Vism 258; Dhs-a 316; Dhp-a i.394; caṇḍāla˚; circle of Caṇḍālas Ja vi.156; brāhmaṇa˚; of Brahmins Dhp-a iv.177.
fr. vāṭa
a merchant, trader Vin iii.6 (assa˚; ) Snp 614, Snp 651, Snp 1014; Ja v.156 (so read for va˚); Pv i.106 Dāvs i.58; Kp-a 224; Snp-a 251; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 48, Pv-a 100, Pv-a 191 Pv-a 215, Pv-a 271. On similes with v. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 134. Vanijaka = vanija
fr. vaṇij (vaṇik): see vaṇijjā; lit. son of a merchant; Vedic vāṇija
S ii.215 (sūci˚); Ja iii.540.
(f.) trade, trading Vin iv.6 (as one of the exalted professions); Pv-a 111, Pv-a 201 Pv-a 273, Pv-a 277.
fr. vāṇija, cp. vaṇijjā
wind. There exists a common distinction of winds into 2 groups: “internal and “external” winds, or the ajjhattikā vāyo-dhātu (wind category), and the bāhirā. They are discussed at Vb 84, quoted at MA 30, 31, and expld in detail at Vb-a 70 sq.; Vism 350. The bāhirā also at Nd ii.562 and in poetical form at SN iv.218 ■ The internal winds (see below 2) comprise the foll.: uddhangamā vātā adhogamā, kucchisayā, koṭṭhāsasayā, angam-ang’ ânusārino, satthakā, khurakā, uppalakā, assāso, passāso i.e. all kinds of winds (air) or drawing pains (rheumatic?) in the body, from hiccup, stitch and stomach-ache up to breathing. Their complement are the external winds (see below 1), viz. puratthimā vātā pacchimā, uttarā, dakkhiṇā (from the 4 quarters of the sky), sarajā arajā, sītā uṇhā, parittā adhimattā, kāḷā verambha˚, pakkha˚, supaṇṇa˚, tālavanta˚, vidhūpana ˚ These are characterized according to direction dust, temperature, force, height & other causes (like fanning etc.).
1. wind (of the air) SN iv.218 (vātā ākāse vāyanti); Snp 71, Snp 348, Snp 591 (vāto tūlaṃ va dhaṃsaye), 622, 1074; Ja i.72; Pp 32; Vism 31. adhimatta v. SN iv.56; mahā˚; SN ii.88; AN i.136, AN i.205; AN ii.199; AN iv.312 veramba˚; (winds blowing in high regions: upari ākāse SN ii.231) AN i.137; Thag 598; Ja vi.326.
2. “winds” of the body, i.e. pains caused by (bad) circulation, sometimes simply (uncontrolled) movements in the body, sometimes rheumatic pains, or sharp & dragging pains in var. parts of the body Nett. 74. Also applied to certain; humours, supposed to be caused by derangements of the “winds of the body (cp. Gr. χυμός; or E. slang “get the wind up”), whereas normal “winds” condition normal health: Pv ii.61 (tassa vātā balīyanti: bad winds become strong, i.e. he is losing his senses, cp. Pv-a 94: ummāda-vātā) ■ aṅga˚; pain in the limbs (or joints) rheumatism Vin i.205; udara˚; belly ache Ja i.393, Ja i.433; Dhp-a iv.129; kammaja˚; birth-pains Vism 500; kucchi˚ pains in the abdomen (stomach) Vb-a 5; piṭṭhi˚; pains in the back ibid.
3. (fig.) atmosphere, condition, state or as pp. (of vāyati) scented (with), full of, pervaded (by), at Vin i.39 (vijana˚; pervaded by loneliness, having an atmosphere of loneliness; Kern. Toev. s. v. vāta wrongly “troop, crowd.” The same passage occurs at DN iii.38, where Rh. D., Dial. iii.35, trsls “where the breezes from the pastures blow”; with expln vijana vṛjana [see vajati], hardly justified. In same connection at AN iv.88); Mil 19 (isi˚-parivāta scented with an atmosphere of Sages; Rh. D. differently: “bringing down the breezes from the heights where the Sages dwell”; forced) ■ On vāta in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 135.
-ātapa (Dvandva) wind and heat. In this phrase Bdhgh. takes vāta as wind (above 1) at Vism 31 (saraja & araja v.), but as (bodily); pain (above 2) at Vb-a 5 See DN iii.353; SN ii.88; SN iii.54; SN v.379; AN i.204; AN ii.117 AN ii.143, AN ii.199; AN iii.394 sq., 404; v.15, 127; Snp 52; Ja i.93; Mil 259, Mil 314, Mil 416; Dhp-a iii.112. -ābādha “wind disease,” internal pains (not rheumatism) Vin i.205; Mil 134; Vism 41. -āyana air hole, window Mvu 5 Mvu 37; Dāva v.57. -āhata struck by the wind Vism 63; Dhp-a iii.328. -erita moved by the wind (of trees SN v.123; AN iii.232; Vv-a 175. -kkhandha “wind bulk,” mass of wind, region of the wind Ja vi.326 -ghāta (“wind-struck”) the tree Cassia (or Cathartocarpus) fistula, a syName of uddāla(ka) Ja iv.298; Vv-a 197 also as ˚ka at Ja v.199, Ja v.407; Vv-a 43. -java swiftness of the wind Ja vi.274. -dhuta shaken by the wind, swaying in the w. Vv 385, cp. Vv-a 174. -passa the wind side Dhp-a ii.17. -pāna lattice, window Vin i.209; Vin ii.148 Vin ii.211; AN i.101, AN i.137; AN iv.231; Ja ii.325; Ja v.214; Ja vi.349 (read vātapān˚; for dvārapān˚); Kp-a 54; Dhp-a i.211, Dhp-a i.370; Vv-a 67; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 216, Pv-a 279. -bhakkha living on air Dhp-a ii.57. -maṇḍala a whirlwind, gust of wind, storm tornado [cp. BSk. vāyu-maṇḍala at Avs i.256 with note] Ja i.72; Snp-a 224. -maṇḍalikā id. Vin ii.113 iv. 345; Ja iv.430. -yoga direction of the wind Ja ii.11 -roga “wind disease,” upset of the body, disturbance of the intestines, colic Snp-a 69; Vv-a 185. -vassā (pl. wind and rain Pv-a 55. -vuṭṭhi id. Snp-a 34. -vega force of the wind Snp 1074; Pv-a 47. -sakuṇa a certain kind of bird (“wind-bird”) Nd i.87, where Kp-a 118 reads bhāsa˚.
Vedic vāta, of vā; cp. Sk. vāti & vāyati to blow, vāyu wind; Lat. ventus, Goth. winds = wind; Ohg wājan to blow, Oir. feth air; Gr. αἤμι to blow, ἀήτης wind, Lith. áudra storm etc.
(adj.) (-˚) belonging to or connected with the winds (of the body) in ahi-vātaka-roga a cert (intestinal) disease (lit. “snake-pain”), pestilence plague; dysentery (caused by a famine and attacking men and beasts alike) Dhp-a i.169, Dhp-a i.187, Dhp-a i.231; Dhp-a iii.437.
fr. vāta 2
see vāyati (in meaning “weave,” as well as “blow”).
(adj.) connected with the winds (humours) of the body having bad circulation, suffering from internal trouble rheumatic (?) Mil 135, Mil 298.
fr. vāta 2, cp. *Sk. vātakin Halāyudha ii.451
the egg plant, Solanum melongena Ja v.131; Dhs-a 320.
cp. *Sk. vātingaṇa
1. speaking, speech, talk, nearly always-˚, e.g. iti˚; hearsay, general talk MN i.133; SN v.73; AN ii.26; kumāraka˚; child-talk or childish talk i.e. in the manner of talking to a child SN ii.218 sq. cori˚; deceitful talk Pv-a 89 (so read with v.l. for T bheri˚); dhammika˚; righteous speech AN v.230; musā˚ telling lies, false speech AN i.129; AN ii.141; AN iv.401; Pv-a 15 See under musā ■ adj. (-˚) speaking up for, proclaiming, advertising DN i.174 (sīla˚, paññā˚ etc.); Snp 913 (nivissa˚ dogmatist); AN i.287 (kamma˚, kiriya˚, viriya˚)- vādaṃ bhindati to refute a speech, to make a view discrepant (cp. bhinna-vāda under 4!) Snp-a 45 (Māravādaṃ bh.).
2. what is said, reputation, attribute characteristic Snp 859 (but Snp-a 550 = nindā-vacana) Ja i.2 (jāti˚ genealogy, cp. DN i.137). See also cpd. ˚patha
3. discussion, disputation, argument, controversy dispute Snp 390, Snp 827 (also as adj. hīna˚); Dhp-a iii.390; Vin iv.1; Mvu 4, Mvu 42 (sutvā ubhinnaṃ vādaṃ).
4 doctrine, theory put forth, creed, belief, school, sect Snp-a 539 sq.; in cpds.: ācariya˚; traditional teaching Mil 148; also “heterodoxy” Mhbv 96, cp. Dpvs v.30 uccheda˚; annihilistic doctrine Nd i.282: see under uccheda; thera˚; the tradition of the Theras, i.e. the orthodox doctrine or word of Gotama Buddha Mvu 5, Mvu 2; Mvu 33, Mvu 97 sq.; Dpvs v.10, 14 (theravādo aggavādo ti vuccati), 51 (17 heretical sects, one orthodox, altogether 18 schools); dhuta˚; (adj.) expounding punctiliousness Vism 81 (= aññe dhutangena ovadati anusāsati). See under dhuta; bhinna˚; heretical sect (lit. discrepant talk or view) Dpvs v.39, 51 (opp. abhinnaka vāda) sassata˚; an eternalist Pts i.155.
-ānuvāda the trsln of this phrase (used as adj.) at SN iii.6 (see K.S. iii.7) is “one who is of his way of thinking.” all kinds of sectarian doctrines or doctrinal theses DN i.161; DN iii.115; SN iii.6; SN iv.51, SN iv.340, SN iv.381; SN v.7; AN iii.4; Ne 52. -kāma desirous of disputation Snp 825 -khitta upset in disputation, thrown out of his belief Vin iv.1 = Dhp-a iii.390. -patha “way of speech,” i.e. signs of recognition, attribute, definition Snp 1076 (expld dogmatically at Nd ii.563); AN ii.9. -sattha the science of disputation, true doctrine Snp-a 540. -sīla having the habit of, or used, to disputes Snp 381.
fr. vad: see vadati; Vedic vāda (not in RV!), in meaning of “theory, disputation” only in Class. Sk. The relation of roots vac: vad is like E. speak: say but vāda as t. t. has developed quite distinctly the specified meaning of an emphatic or formulated speech assertion or doctrine
(adj. n.) doctrinal, sectarian, heretical; vagga˚; (either vagga1 or vagga2) professing somebody’s party, sectarian, schismatic Vin iii.175 (anu-vattaka + ) vādaka-sammuti doctrinal (sectarian) statement AN iv.347.
fr. vāda
(nt.) playing on a musical instrument, music Vv-a 276.
fr. vādeti
(adj.) (-˚) speaking, talking (of) Mvu 5, Mvu 60 (pāra˚ speaking of the farther shore, i.e. wishing him across the sea).
fr. vāda
a species of bird Ja vi.538 (v.l. vāj˚).
?
(nt.) (instrumental) music DN i.6; DN iii.183; AN i.212; AN ii.209; Dhp-a iv.75; DN-a i.77.
pp. of vādeti
a speaker, one who professes or has a doctrine DN iii.232; AN ii.246; AN iv.307.
n. ag. fr. vādeti
(adj.) (-˚) speaking (of), saying, asserting, talking; professing, holding a view or doctrine; arguing. Abs. only at AN ii.138 (cattāro vādī four kinds of disputants); Snp 382 (ye vā pi c’aññe vādino professing their view). Otherwise-˚, e.g. in agga˚; “teacher of things supreme” Thag 1142; uccheda˚; professing the doctrine of annihilation Ne 111 (see uccheda); kāla˚; bhūta˚ attha˚; etc. speaking in time, the truth & good etc. DN i.4, DN i.165; AN i.202; V. 205, 265, 328; caṇḍāla˚ uttering the word C. Mvu 5, Mvu 60; tathā˚; speaking thus consistent or true speaker DN iii.135; Snp 430; dhamma˚ professing the true doctrine SN iii.138; in combn with vinaya-vādin as much as “orthodox” Vin iii.175 mahā˚; a great doctrinaire or scholar Snp-a 540; yatha˚; cp tathā˚-; sacca˚; speaking the truth AN ii.212; the Buddha so-called Th ii.252 f.; vaṇṇa˚; singing the praises (of Vin ii.197.
fr. vāda
(nt.) sewing, stuffing (of a couch) DN-a i.86; Dhp-a i.234 (mañca˚).
fr. vā2: see vāyati1
(nt.) lit. “jungle” (cp. vana1 etym.), fig. desire, lust (= taṇhā craving) Dhs-a 409 Kp-a 151, Kp-a 152.
fr. vana, both in meaning 1 & 2 but lit. meaning overshadowed by fig.
in combn suvānaya (SN i.124, SN i.238) is to be separated su-v-ānaya (see ānaya).
monkey, lit. “forester” Thag 399 = Dhp 334; Thag 454; Ja ii.78 (Senaka), 199 sq. (Nandiya) iii.429; iv.308; v.445; Mil 201; Dhp-a ii.22.
-inda monkey king Ja i.279; Ja ii.159.
fr. vana
(f.) a pond; ˚jala water from a pond Mvu 25, Mvu 66.
cp. Epic & Classic Sk. vāpī
sown Ja i.6 (+ ropita, of dhañña).
pp. of vāpeti
mown Dhs-a 238.
pp. of vāpeti
to cause to sow [cp. Divy 213 vāpayituṃ] or to mow ■ pp. vāpita. *Vabhi
Caus. fr. vap, representing vapati1 as well as vapati2
appears in P. as nābhi in uṇṇanābhi (q.v.).
fr. vā to weave
(adj.) 1. left, the left side (always opposed to dakkhiṇa) Ja iv.407 (˚akkhi); Pv iv.78 Mil 295 (˚gāhin left-handed); Pv-a 178 (˚passa left side). As “northern” at Ja v.416. vāmaṃ karoti to upset Ja iv.101 ■ instr. vāmena on the left Snp p.80. abl. vāmato from or on the left Ja iii.340; Pv ii.320 (as much as “reverse”; Pv-a 87 = vilomato).
2. beautiful; only in cpd. vām-ūru having beautiful thighs DN ii.266; Ja ii.443. So read at both places for vāmuru.
Vedic vāma
(adj.) dwarfish; m. dwarf Vin i.91; DN-a i.148.
fr. vāma1, cp. Ger. linkisch = uncouth
(adj.-n.) dwarfish, crippled Ja ii.226; Ja iv.137; Ja v.424, Ja v.427 ■ f. ˚ikā Name of certain elephants MN i.178.
fr. vāmana
weaving Pv-a 112 (tunna˚). See tanta˚.
fr. vā, vāyati1
to weave, only in pp. vāyita ■ Pass. viyyati Vin iii.259. pp. also vīta ■ Caus. II. vāyāpeti to cause to be woven Vin iii.259 (= vināpeti); Vv-a 181-See also vināti.
Vedic vayati, vā, cp. Sk. veman loom, vāṭikā band, Gr. ι ̓́τυς willow, Ohg. wīda id.; Lat. vieo to bind or plait
1. to blow (only as vāyati) Vin i.48; DN ii.107 (mahāvātā vāyanti); SN iv.218 (vātā ākāse v.); Ja i.18; Ja vi.530 Mvu 12, Mvu 12 ■ aor. vāyi SN iv.290; Ja i.51. Cp. abhi˚ upa˚, pa˚.
2. to breathe forth, to emit an odour, to smell Pv i.61; Pv-a 14; as vāti (2nd sg. vāsi) at Ja ii.11 (= vāyasi C.) ■ pp. vāta only as noun “wind” (q.v.).
Vedic vāti & vāyati. See etym. under vāta
(nt.) blowing Vb-a 71 (upari˚vāta).
fr. vā, vāyati2
to struggle, strive, endeavour; to exert oneself SN iv.308; SN v.398; AN iv.462 sq. (chandaṃ janeti v. viriyaṃ ārabhati cittaṃ paggaṇhāti); Pv iv.52 Vb 208 sq.; Pp 51; Vism 2; Dhp-a iii.336; Dhp-a iv.137; Pv-a 185.
vi + ā + yam
a crow DN i.9 (˚vijjā: see DA i.93); SN i.124; Snp 447, Snp 675; Ja i.500; Ja ii.440; Mil 373; Dhp-a iii.206; Vv-a 27.
cp. Vedic vāyasa a large bird, Epic Sk. vāyasa crow
striving, effort, exertion, endeavour SN ii.168; SN iv.197; SN v.440; AN i.174 (chando + ) 219; ii.93; iii.307; iv.320; v.93 sq.; Ja i.72; Vb 123 Vb 211, Vb 235; Vb-a 91; Dhp-a iv.109; Pv-a 259. On vāyāma as a constituent of the “Path” (sammā˚) see magga 2.a ■ vāyāmaṃ karoti to exert oneself Dhp-a iv.26; Pv-a 259.
fr. vi + ā + yam
woven MN iii.253 (sāma˚), where Mil 240 in id. p. reads sayaṃ˚ Vin iii.259. Cp. vīta.
pp. of vāyati1, cp. Divy 276 vāyita
(adj.) blowing (forth), emitting an odour, smelling Pv-a 87.
fr. vāyati2
(adj.) weaving, woven; a˚; not woven Vin iii.224 (of a rug or cover).
fr. vā: vāyati1
wind Mil 385; Pv-a 156. See next.
Vedic vāya, fr. vā: vāyati2
(nt.) wind DN iii.268 (˚kasiṇa) MN i.1, MN i.424 = AN iv.375; AN v.7, AN v.318, AN v.353 sq. (˚saññā) SN iii.207; Vism 172 (˚kasiṇa), 350 (def.). On vāyo as t. t. for mobility, mobile principle (one of the 4 elements) see Cpd. 3, 270; Dhs trsln § 962.
-dhātu the wind element, wind as one of the four great elements, wind as a general principle (consisting of var. kinds: see enumd under vāta) Vb 84; Vism 363; Ne 74; Vb-a 55; Vv-a 15; DN-a i.194.
for vāyu, in analogy to āpo & tejo;, with which frequently enumerated
1. turn, occasion, time, opportunity Ja i.58 (utu-vārena utuvārena according to the turn of the seasons), 150 vi.294; Vism 431 (santati˚ interval); DN-a i.36; Dhp-a i.47 (dve vāre twice); Dhs-a 215; Vv-a 47 (tatiyavāraṃ for the 3rd & last time); Pv-a 109, Pv-a 135.
2. In pada˚; “track-occasion,” i.e. foot-track, walk(ing) step Ja i.62, Ja i.213 (˚vārena) by walking (here spelt pāda˚; ) 506 (pādavāre pādavāre at every step).
3. In udaka˚ v. stands for vāraka (i.e. bucket), the phrase udakavāraṃ gacchati means “to go for water,” to fetch water (in a bucket) Ja iv.492; Dhp-a i.49. Dutoit (J. trsln iv.594) trsls “Wunsch nach Wasser.”
4. bhāṇa˚ “turn for recitation,” i.e. a portion for recital, a chapter Snp-a 194. See bhāṇa.
fr. vṛ; in meaning “turn,” cp. vuṇāti
a pot, jar Vin ii.122 (three kinds: loha˚, dāru˚ and cammakhaṇḍa˚); Ja i.349 Ja ii.70; Ja iii.52 (dadhi˚); Mil 260; Dhs-a 377 (phānita˚).
cp. Sk. vāra & vāraka
(nt.) warding off, obstruction, resistance Vb-a 194, Vb-a 195 (= nivāraṇa) ■ ātapa˚; sunshade Dāvs i.28; Dāvs v.35.
fr. vṛ; to obstruct
1. elephant Ja i.358; Ja iv.137; Ja v.50, Ja v.416; DN-a i.275; Dhp-a i.389 (˚līḷhā elephant’s grace); Vv-a 36, Vv-a 257.
2. the Hatthilinga bird Thag 1064.
cp. Vedic vāraṇa strong
spirituous liquor Ja v.505.
for vāruṇī?
at Thag 1129 read cāraṇika (a little play): see Brethren 419 note.
(adj.) consisting of leather or a strap Ja iii.185.
fr. varatta
(nt.) [Vedic vāri, cp. Av. vār rain, vairi-sea; Lat. ūrīna = urine; Ags. waer sea; Oicel. ūr spray, etc. water DN ii.266; MN iii.300; AN iii.26 (in lotus simile) Thag 1273; Snp 353, Snp 591, Snp 625, Snp 811; Vv 7910; Ja iv.19 Nd i.135, Nd i.203 (= udaka); Mil 121; Pv-a 77.
-gocara living or life (lit. feeding) in water Snp 605 -ja “water-born,” i.e. (1) a lotus Snp 845, cp. Nd i.203-(2) a fish Dhp 34 (= maccha Dhp-a i.289); Ja v.464 (= Ānanda-maccha C.), 507. -da “water-giver,” i.e. cloud Dāvs iii.40. -dhara water-holder, water jug Ja v.4. -bindu a drop of water Snp 392. -vāha “watercarrier,” i.e. cloud AN ii.56; AN iii.53; SN v.400; Ja vi.26 Ja vi.543, Ja vi.569; Kp vii.8 ■ vārita,-yuta,-dhuta,-phuṭa (Jain practice) DN i.57; MN i.377.
obstructed, hindered Ja iv.264; restrained (sabbavāri) see vāri.
-vata (so read for cārita˚) “having the habit of selfdenial” (trsln) SN i.28 (cp. K.S. i.39 & 320 with note Bdhgh’s expl;n: “kilesānaṃ pana chinnattā vataṃ phala-samādhinā samāhitaṃ”), cp. bhāvanā-balena vāritattā dhammā etc. at Tikp. 14.
pp. of vāreti, Caus. of vṛ1
(nt.) avoidance, abstinence Thag 591; Mil 133 (cārittañ ca vārittañ ca); Vism 11.
fr. vṛ; on the analogy of cāritta. The BSk. is vāritra: Mpt 84
(f.) 1. spirituous liquor AN iii.213; Ja i.251 (˚vāṇija spirit merchant), 268; vi.502.
2. an intoxicated woman; term for a female fortune-teller Ja vi.500 (Vāruṇī ‘va pavedhati; C. devatā-bhūta-paviṭṭhā yakkha-dāsī viya gahitā, i.e. possessed), 587 (vāruṇī ‘va pavedhentī; C. yakkh’ āviṭṭhā ikkhaṇikā viya).
cp. Sk. vāruṇī, with only ref. in BR.: Harivaṃśa 8432
1. to prevent obstruct, hinder Pv ii.77 (vārayissaṃ I had the habit of obstructing; = nivāresiṃ Pv-a 102); Vv-a 68; Sdhp 364–2. to ask in marriage Thag-a 266; Pv-a 55 ■ Caus. II vārāpeti to induce somebody to choose a wife Ja iv.289-Note. vāriyamāna (kālakaṇṇi-salākā) at Ja iv.2 read cār˚; (cp. Pv-a 272 vicāresuṃ id.) ■ pp. vārita.
Caus. of vuṇāti, representing vṛ1 (to enclose, obstruct), as well as vṛ1 (to choose)
(nt.) marriage, wedding Thig 464, Thig 472, Thig 479; Snp-a 19.
grd. of vāreti
1. the hair of the tail horse-hair, tail Vin ii.195 = Ja v.335 (pahaṭṭha-kaṇṇavāla with bristling ears & tail, of an elephant); Ja v.274 (so read for phāla, cp. p. 268, v. 113); Pv-a 285 (˚koṭi so read for bāla˚; ); Sdhp 139 ■ pallankassa vāle bhinditvā destroying the hair (-stuffing) of a couch Vin ii.170 = DN-a i.88; cp. Vin iv.299: pallanko āharimehi vālehi kato ■ On v. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 136–2. a hair-sieve [also Vedic] MN i.229.
-agga the tip of a hair AN iii.403; Mil 250 (˚vedha hitting the tip of a hair, of an archer); DN-a i.66. -aṇḍupaka a cert. material, head dress (?) AN i.209 (so read for vālanduka); Vism 142; Dhs-a 115 (reads leḍḍūpaka)-kambala a blanket made of horse-tails DN i.167; AN i.240 AN i.296; Pp 55. -koṭi the tip of the hair Pv-a 285. -rajju a cord made of hair SN ii.238; AN iv.129; Ja ii.161. -vījanī a fan made of a Yak’s tail, a chowrie DN i.7. -vedhin (an archer) who can hit a hair Ja i.58 (akkhaṇa-vedhin + ) Vism 150; Mvu 23, Mvu 86 (sadda-vedhin vijju-vedhin + ) The abstr. ˚vedhā hitting a hair, at Vism 150 ■ fig. an acute arguer, a hair-splitter; in standing phrase paṇḍitā nipuṇā kata-para-ppavādā vālavedhi-rūpā at DN i.26; MN i.176; MN ii.122; see expln at DN-a i.117.
Vedic vāla; connected with Lat. adūlāre (ad + ūlāre) to flatter (lit. wag the tail, like a dog), cp. E adulation; Lith. valaī horse hair
(adj.) malicious, troublesome, difficult Vin ii.299 (adhikaraṇa).
cp. Sk. vyāla
(nt.) water; only in cpd. ˚ja a fish (cp. vārija).
= vāri, cp. late Sk. vāla
(nt.) trouble, difficulty Vin ii.86 (in same context as vāla2); AN i.54.
abstr. fr. vāla2
a tail (usually of a large animal) Thag 695; Ja i.63, Ja i.149; Ja vi.302; Pv i.83; Mvu 10, Mvu 59; Vv-a 252, Sdhp 621; Vism 36 quoting Ap.
cp. Epic Sk. vāladhi
(f.) sand (often sprinkled in connection with festivities to make the place look neat AN i.253; Ja i.210; Ja iii.52, Ja iii.407; Ja vi.64; Vism 420; Dhp-a i.3, Dhp-a i.111; Vv-a 160, Vv-a 305; Pv-a 189 ■ paritta˚; sand (on the head) as an amulet Ja i.396, Ja i.399 ■ In cpds. usually vālika˚. Cp. vālukā.
-puñja a heap of sand Ja vi.560. -pulina sand bed or bank Ja ii.366; Ja iii.389. -vassa a shower of sand Snp-a 224.
a by-form of vālukā
(adj.) having a hairy tail Vv 647, cp. Vv-a 277.
fr. vāla1
at Vv-a 332 probably for vāluka-kantāra, i.e. sandy desert. See vaṇṇu.
(f.) sand. In comp;n usually vāluka˚ ■ SN iv.376; Vv 391; 441; Ap. 23 Nd ii.p. 72 (Gangāya v.); Ja ii.258; Ja iv.16; Pv ii.121 Mvu 23, Mvu 86; Dhp-a iii.243, Dhp-a iii.445; Vv-a 31, Vv-a 177; Sdhp 244 See also vālika.
cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. vālukā
1. a snake Vism 312 (so read for vaḷa ).
2. a beast of prey AN iii.102 (amanussa); Ja i.295; Ja iii.345 (˚macchā predaceous fishes); Mil 23 (˚vana forest of wild beasts).
-miga a beast of prey, predaceous animal, like tiger leopard, etc. Ja vi.569; Dhp-a i.171 (˚ṭṭhāna); iii.348 (˚rocanā); Vism 180, Vism 239.
cp. late Sk. vyāḍa, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 546
music (?) Pgdp 83.
misspelt for vāda?
(vi + ā + vṛt ] to turn away (trs.), to do away with, remove MN i.12 (aor. vāvattayi saṃyojanaṃ, expld at MA 87 as “parivattayi, nimmūlaṃ akāsi”) = 122 (with v.l. vi˚, see p. 526); AN ii.249 (v.l. vi˚).
clothing; adj. (-˚) clothed in Ja vi.47 (hema-kappana-vāsase).
vas to clothe, see vasati1
1. living, sojourn, life Snp 191; Mvu 17, Mvu 2 (anātha-vāsaṃ vasati to lead a helpless life); Pv-a 12 (saraagga-vāsaṃ v. live a life of concord); Snp-a 59 (lokantarika˚). Cp. pari˚, saṃ˚. 2. home, house, habitation Snp 40. vāsaṃ kappeti to live (at a place), to make one’s home Ja i.242; Pv-a 47 Pv-a 100. vāsaṃ upagacchati to enter a habitation (for spending the rainy season) Pv-a 32. In special sense “bed”: see cpd. ˚ūpagata.
2. state, condition (-˚) in ariya˚ holy state AN v.29 sq.; brahmacariya˚; chastity Pv-a 61.
4. (adj.) (-˚) staying, living, abiding, spending time Snp 19 (ekaratti˚), 414 (ettha˚). vassa˚; spending Lent Pv-a 20; vuttha˚; having spent Lent Ja i.183. Cp ante-vāsika-vāsa.
-attha home success, luck in the house, prosperity AN ii.59, AN ii.61 sq. -āgāra bedroom Ja iii.317. -ūpagata (a) having entered one’s hut or abode (for the rainy season) Snp 415 ■ (b) gone to bed Pv ii.128; Pv-a 280 -ghara living room, bedroom Snp-a 28 (= kuṭī). -dhura ordinary duty (lit. burden) or responsibility of living or the elementary stages of saintliness Snp-a 194, Snp-a 195 (contrasted to pariyatta-dhura), 306 (: ganthadhura).
vas to dwell, see vasati2
perfume Ja i.242; Ja vi.42. Vasaka, vasika
cp. Class. Sk. vāsa, e.g. Mālatīm. 148, 4; fr. vā: see vāta
(adj.) (-˚) living, dwelling; vāsaka: see saṃ˚. vāsika: gāma˚; villager Mvu 28 Mvu 15; Bārāṇasi˚; living in Benares Ja iii.49. See also ante˚.
fr. vāsa2
to cry (of animals) Ja vi.497.
vāś, see vassati2
(adj.-n..) clothing, clothed in (-˚) Pv-a 173.
= vasana1
(adj.-n..) dwelling Dpvs v.18.
= vasana2
(f.) that which remains in the mind, tendencies of the past, impression usually as pubba˚; former impression (Snp 1009; Mil 10, Mil 263) ■ Cp. Ne 4, Ne 21, Ne 48, Ne 128, Ne 133 sq., 153, 158 sq. 189 sq ■ Cp. BSk. vāsanā, e.g. Mvu i.345.
fr. vasati2 = vāsa2, but by Rh. D., following the P. Com̄. connected with vāseti & vāsa;3
day (opp. night), a day Dāvs i.55; Dāvs v.66.
cp. Vedic vāsara matutinal, vasaḥ early
(f.) 1. a sharp knife, axe, hatchet, adze (often combd with pharasu ) Ja i.32, Ja i.199; Ja ii.274; Ja iii.281 Ja iv.344; Mil 383; Mil 413; Dhp-a i.178 (tikhiṇā vāsiyā khaṇḍâkhaṇḍikaṃ chinditvā: cutting him up piecemeal with a sharp knife); Kp-a 49. -˚jaṭa handle of a mason’s adze Vin iv.168; SN iii.154; AN iv.127.
2. a razor Ja i.65; Ja ii.103; Ja iii.186, Ja iii.377.
cp. Sk. vāśī
1. scented Ja i.65; Ja ii.235 (su˚); iii.299; v.89; Vism 345.
2. [preferably fr. vāseti1 = vasati2 established, made to be or live, preserved Mvu 8, Mvu 2 So also in phrase vāsita-vāsana (adj.) or vāsana-vāsita one who is impressed with (or has retained) a former impression Snp 1009 (pubba˚, = vāsanāya vāsita-citta Snp-a 583); Mil 263 (id.); Vism 185 (+ bhāvita-bhāvana). If taken as vāseti2, then to be trsld as “scented filled, permeated,” but preferably as vāseti1 ■ Cp pari˚.
fr. vāseti2
(adj.) scented, perfumed Vin iv.341 (vāsitakena piññākena nhāyeyya: should bathe with perfumed soap) ■ f. vāsitikā (scil. mattikā) scented clay Vin ii.280 (id.).
fr. vāsita
(adj.) (-˚) clothed in, clad Snp 456 (sanghāṭi˚), 487 (kāsāya˚); Pv iii.16 (sāhunda˚); Ja iii.22 (nantaka˚); iv.380 (rumma˚); f. vāsinī Vin iii.139 (chanda˚, paṭa˚ etc.) = Vv-a 73.
fr. vas1
(adj.) (-˚) liking, dwelling (in) Snp 682 (Mern-muddha˚), 754 (āruppa˚); Pv-a 1 (Mahāvihāra˚) 22 (Anga-Magadha˚), 47 (Sāvatthi˚), 73 (Bārāṇasi˚)
fr. vas2
: Caus. of vasati2 (q.v.).
to perfume, to clean or preserve by means of perfumes, to disinfect (?) Vin i.211 (here in the sense of “preserve, cure,” probably as vāseti of vasati2); ii.120; Ja iv.52 (aṭṭhīni, for the sake of preservation); v.33 (saso avāsesi sake sarīre expld as “sake sarīre attano sarīraṃ dātuṃ avāsesi vāsāpesī ti attho, sarīrañ c’ assa bhakkh’ atthāya adāsi. In this passage vāseti is by Kern, Toev. s. v. taken as Caus. of vas to eat, thus “he made eat, feasted, entertained by or on his own body”), 321 (kusumehi vāsetvā perfume). See also vasati2 (Caus.) ■ pp. vāsita. Caus. II. vāsāpeti Ja v.33.
Denom. fr. vāsa perfume
(adj.-n.) 1. carrying, leading; a leader, as in sattha˚; a caravan leader, merchant Ja i.271; Vv 847 8420; Vv-a 337.
2. a cart, vehicle; also cartload Snp p.126 (tila˚ = tila-sakaṭa Snp-a 476); Ja iv.236 (saṭṭhi˚sahassāni 60,000 cartloads); Mil 80 (˚sataṃ).
fr. vah
that which carries (or causes to carry) away, i.e. a current, torrent, flow; only in combn with udaka˚; a flood of water AN i.178; Vin i.32; Mil 176.
fr. vāheti
1. (adj.) carrying, pulling, drawing Vin ii.122 (udaka˚-rajju); Ja i.136 (kaṭṭha˚ gathering fire-wood); Pv-a 127 (ratha-yuga˚).
2. (nt.) conveyance beast of burden, monture Vin i.277 (˚āgāra stable garage); Snp 442 (Māra sa˚ with his elephant); Pv ii.926 Dhp-a i.192 (hatthi˚, elephant-mount; cp. p. 196 where five. vāhanāni, belonging to King Pajjota, are enumd, viz. kaṇeru, dāsa, dve assā, hatthi) ■ bala˚ army & elephants, i.e. army in general, forces Ja i.262.
fr. vāheti
= vāha 1; Vv-a 337.
(indecl.) owing to, by dint of, on account of, through Vin iv.158; Thag 218, Thag 1127; Mil 379; Vv-a 100.
an instr. of vāha, formed after the manner of balasā, thāmasā, used adverbially
(adj.-n.) carrying, conveying Ja vi.125 (haya˚ running by means of horses, i.e. drawn by horses) also as poetical expression for “horse” Ja vi.252 (= sindhava C.). The reading vāhin at Mvu 22, Mvu 52 is given as v.l. for T. vājin in P.T.S. ed ■ f. vāhinī, an army Ja iii.77 (miga˚; expld as “aneka-sahassa-sankhā migasenā”); vi.581.
fr. vāha
is Caus. of vahati (q.v.).
(indecl.) 1. (a) inseparable prefix of separation and expansion, in original meaning of “asunder,” semantically closely related to Lat. dis-& Ger ver-. Often as base-prefix in var meanings (see below 1–4), also very frequent as modifying prefix (in comb;n with other primary prefixes like ā ni, pa, paṭi, saṃ), where its prevailing character is one of emphasis ■ (b) The native grammarians define vi- either as “ vividha ” (i.e. our meaning 2): see Bdhgh at Snp-a 136 (viharati = vividhaṃ hitaṃ harati); and Vism 179 vividhaṃ khittaṃ = vikkhittaṃ; see also under viggaṇhati; or “ prātilomya ” (i.e. meaning 3) Nirukta (ed. Roth) i.3; or paraphrase it by su˚; or suṭṭhu (i.e. meaning 4): see under vimāna & vippasanna The latter meaning also in Hemacandra’s Anek’ ārtha-sangraha (ed. Calc.) 7, 15: “śreṣṭhe ’tīte nānārthe” (i.e. Nos. 4 & 2) ■ (c); vi˚; occurs also as distributive (repetitional) prefix in reduplication compounds (here closely resembling paṭi˚ and the negative a˚), like cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa piecemeal, chidda-vicchidda holes upon holes, vaṭṭa-vivaṭṭa, etc ■ Contracted forms are vy˚; (= viy˚ before vowels) and vo˚; (= vi ava); the guṇa & vriddhi form is; ve˚ ■ II. Meanings.
1. denoting expansion, spreading out; fig. variety or detail, to be trsld by expressions with over or about (cp Lat. e-), as: ˚kampati shake about, ˚kāseti open out, ˚kirati scatter about, ˚kūjati sing out (= upa-nadati C), ˚carati move about (= ā-hiṇḍati), ˚churita sprinkled about, ˚jāyati bring forth, ˚tāna “spread out,” ˚tthāra ex-tension, de-tail, ˚dāleti break open, ˚dhammati whirl about, ˚dhāyaka providing, ˚pakirati strew all over, ˚pphāra pervading, ˚pphārika ef-fulgence, ˚bhajati ex-plain, ˚bhatta dis-tributed, ˚bhāga division, distribution ˚ravati shout out, ˚rūhana growing up, ˚rocati shine out, ˚ssajjati give out, ˚ssaṭṭha sent out, ˚ssara shouting out, ˚ssuta far-famed.
2. denoting disturbance separation, mixing up (opp. saṃ˚), as given with “away” or “down,” or the prefixes de- and dis-, e.g. ˚kasita burst asunder, ˚kubbana change, i.e. miracle (meta-morphosis), ˚kkaya sell (“ver-kaufen”), ˚kkhambhati de-stroy, ˚kkhāleti wash off (= ācameti), ˚kkhepa de-rangement, ˚gata dis-appeared (used as defn of vi at Thag-a 80), ˚galita dripping down, ˚ggaha separation ˚cinati dis-criminate, ˚jahati dis-miss, ˚desa foreign country (cp. verajjaka), ˚naṭṭha destroyed, ˚nata bending down, ˚nāsa de-struction, ˚nicchaya dis-crimination ˚nodaka driving out, ˚pāteti to be destroyed, ˚ppalapati to talk confusedly, ˚rājeti discard as rāga, ˚rodha destruction, ˚lumpati break up, ˚vitta separated, ˚vidha mixed, ˚veka separation, ˚vāha carrying away, i.e. wedding.
3. denoting the reverse of the simple verb or loss, difference, opposite, reverse, as expressed by un- or dis-, e.g. ˚asana mis-fortune, ˚kaṭika unclean ˚kappa change round, ˚kāra per-turbation, dis-tortion ˚kāla wrong time, ˚tatha un-truth, ˚dhūma smoke-less, ˚patti corruption, ˚parīta dubious, ˚ppaṭipanna on the wrong track, ˚bhava non-existence (or as 4 “more bhava, i.e. wealth), ˚mati doubt, ˚mānana dis-respect ˚yoga separation, ˚raja fault-less, ˚rata abs-taining ˚rūpa un-sightly, ˚vaṭa unveiled, ˚vaṇṇeti defame ˚vāda dis-pute, ˚sama uneven, ˚ssandati overflow ˚ssarita for-gotten, ˚siṭṭha distinguished, ˚sesa difference distinction.
4. in intensifying sense (developed fr. 1 & 2), mostly with terms expressing; per se one or the other of shades of meanings given under 1
3; to be trsld by “away,” out, all over, “up,” or similarly (completely), e.g. ˚ākula quite confused, ˚katta cut up ˚kopeti shake up, ˚garahati scold intensely, ˚chindati cut off, ˚jita conquered altogether, ˚jjotita resplendent ˚tarati come quite through, ˚niyoga close connection ˚nivatteti turn off completely, ˚pariṇāma intense change ˚ppamutta quite released, ˚ppasanna quite purified ˚pphalita crumpled up, ˚bandhana (close) fetter, ˚ramati cease altogether, ˚sahati have sufficient strength ˚sukkha dried up, ˚suddha very bright, ˚ssamati rest fully (Ger. aus-ruhen), ˚haññati to get slain.
prefix, resting on Idg. *ṷi “two,” as connotation of duality or separation (Ger. “ent-zwei”), which is contained in viṃśati, num. for “twenty” (see vīsati) cp. Sk. viṣu apart, Gr. ι ̓́διος private (lit. separate); also Sk. u-bhau both; and *ṷidh, as in Lat. dīvido = divide A secondary (compar.) formation in Sk. vitara further farther, Goth. wipra against, Ger. wider
(adj.) blossoming DN-a i.40.
changed, altered, distorted; disgusting, foul, filthy Pgdp 63 (˚ānana with filthy mouth)-nt. filth, dirt; four mahā-vikaṭāni applied against snake-bite, viz., gūtha, mutta, chārikā, mattikā Vin i.206 ■ Cp. vekaṭika.
-bhojana filthy food DN i.167; MN i.79.
vi + kata, of kṛ;
(adj.) having deranged or bent corners, frayed Vin i.297; Vin ii.116.
vi + kaṇṇa
a kind of arrow (barbed?) Ja ii.227, Ja ii.228.
fr. vikaṇṇa
changed, altered Vin i.194 (gihi-vikata changed by the g.)
(f.) “what is made of something,” make, i.e. 1. sort, kind Ja i.59 (ābharaṇa˚ kind of ornament) 243 (maccha-maṃsa˚); Mil 403 (bhojana˚ all kinds of material things); Vism 376 (bhājana˚ special bowl) Vb-a 230 (pilandhana˚); Dhp-a ii.10 (khajja˚).
2. product make; vessel: danta˚; “ivory make,” i.e. vessels of ivory MN ii.18; DN i.78; Ja i.320.
3. arrangement get up, assortment; form, shape Ja v.292 (mālā˚ garlandarrangement).
-phala an assortment of fruit Ja v.417.
fr. vi + kṛ;
(f.) a woollen coverlet (embroidered with figures of lions, tigers etc.) DN i.7 (cp. DN-a i.87) AN i.181; Vin i.192; Thag-a 55 (Ap v.10: tūlikā˚; ).
fr. vikati
(adj.) cut open Ja vi.111 (v.l. ˚kanta).
pp. of vi + kantati2
(nt.) cutter, knife Vin iii.89 (tiṇha go˚) MN i.449; Ja vi.441.
fr. vi + kantati2
to boast, show off SN ii.229; Ja i.454 (= vañcana-vacanaṃ vadati C.) ■ pp. vikatthita.
vi + katthati
(nt.) boasting Snp-a 549.
fr. vi + katth
(nt.) boasting Ja i.359.
fr. vikatthati
(adj.) boasting; only neg. a˚; not boasting, modest AN v.157; Snp 850; Mil 414.
fr. vi + katth
= vikatta; cut open, cut into pieces Ja ii.420.
to cut Ja v.368 (= chindati C.). - pp. vikatta & vikanta;.
vi + kantati2
(nt.) knife MN i.244. Cp. vikattana.
fr. vikantati
1. thinking over, considering, thought, intention Nd 97, Nd 351.
2. doubtfulness, indecision, alternative, appld to the part. vā Snp-a 202, Snp-a 266 Kp-a 166; DN-a i.51; Pv-a 18 ■ attha˚; consideration or application of meaning, exposition, statement, sentence Ja iii.521; Snp-a 433, Snp-a 591 ■ Cp. nibbikappa.
vi + kappa
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) 1. assignment, apportioning Vin iv.60 = Vin iv.123 = Vin iv.283. At Vin iv.122 two ways of assigning a gift are distinguished: sammukhāvikappanā & parammukhā˚. All these passages refer to the cīvara.
2. alternative, indecision, indefiniteness (= vikappa), as t. t. g. applied to part.; ca and vā e.g. Snp-a 179 (“ca”); Kp-a 166 (“vā”).
fr. vikappeti
prepared, put in order, arranged, made; in combn su˚; well prepared, beautifully set Snp 7; Vv-a 188 (manohara + ) ■ Bdhgh. at Snp-a 21 interprets ˚kappita as chinna “cut,” saying it has that meaning from “kappita-kesa-massu” (with trimmed hair & beard), which he interprets; ad sensum, but not etymologically correctly. Cp. vikappeti 5.
pp. of vikappeti
(adj.) having intentions upon (-˚), designing AN iii.136 (an-issara˚ intentioning unruliness).
fr. vikappa
(adj.) to be designed or intended Sdhp 358.
grd. of vikappeti
1. to distinguish, design, intend, to have intentions or preferences, to fix one’s mind on (loc. or acc.) Snp 793 = Snp 802 (= vikappaṃ āpajjati Nd i.97) 918 (id. Nd i.351).
2. to detail, describe, state Kp-a 166; Snp-a 43.
3. to assign, apportion, give Vin i.289 (cīvaraṃ); iv.121 (id.).
4. to arrange, put on, get ready Vin i.297.
5. to change, alter, shape, form Ja v.4 (ambapakkaṃ satthena v.; C. not quite correctly = vicchindati) ■ pp. vikappita.
vi + kappeti
to shake; fig. to be unsettled, to waver, to be in doubt SN iv.71 (cittaṃ na vikampate) Thag 1076 (vidhāsu na v.; trslnBrethren p. 366: “who is not exercised about himself in this way or in that”) Nd i.195 (tīsu vidhāsu, as at Thag 1076; as comment on Snp 843); Ja vi.488 ■ ppr. med. vikampamāna, only neg. a˚; not hesitating, settled, well balanced, resolved Snp 842; Ja iv.310; Ja v.495 (C. anolīyamāna); vi.175 (C nirāsanka) ■ pp. vikampita.
vi + kamp
(adj.) shaking; only neg. a˚; not shaking, steadfast, steady, settled Snp 952; Vv 5022.
fr. vikampati
to alter, change, disturb; aor. vyakāsi Ja ii.166 (= vikāraṃ akāsi parivattayi C.); so read for T. vyākāsi ■ Imper. Pass. 3 sg. vikiriyyatu “let him be disturbed” Ja iii.368 (after Kern, Toev. s. v. One may take it to vikirati, q.v.) ■ pp. vikaṭa & vikata; See also vikubbati, etc.
vi + kṛ;
(adj.) defective, in want of, deprived, (being) without Thig 391; Pv iv.1 (bhoga˚); Ja iv.278 Ja vi.232; Mil 106, Mil 307 (udakena); DN-a i.222; Pv-a 4 (hattha˚). Cp. vekalla.
Sk. vikala
(adj.) being short of, wanting Vin i.285.
vikala + ka
to open (out), to expand, to blossom fully (of flowers) ■ pp. vikasita. Caus. vikāseti to open Ja vi.364 (hatthaṃ).
vi + kas
to shine; Caus. vikāseti to illuminate Davs v.47 (mukh’ ambuja-vanāni vikāsayanto).
vi + kāś, cp. okāsa
burst asunder, blossoming, opened (wide), expanded, usually appld to flowers Ja iii.320 (= phālita C.); iv.407; Vv-a 40, Vv-a 206 (of eyes) Snp-a i.39; DN-a i.40.
pp. of vikasati1
1. change, alteration, in mahā˚; great change Vism 366, Vism 367 (of two kinds: anupādiṇṇa upādiṇṇa, or primary & secondary, i.e. the first caused by kappa-vuṭṭhāna, the second by dhātu-kkhobha) Kp-a 107 (vaṇṇa˚).
2. distortion, reversion, contortion, in var. connections, as kucchi˚; stomach-ache Vin i.301; bhamuka˚; frowning Dhp-a iv.90; raukha˚ grimace, contortion of the face, Ja ii.448; Pv-a 123 hattha˚; hand-figuring, signs with the hand, gesture Vin i.157 (+ hattha-vilanghaka) = MN i.207 (reads vilangaka); Vin v.163 (with other similaṛ gestures); Ja iv.491 Ja v.287; Ja vi.400, Ja vi.489 ■ Kern. Toev. s. v. vikāra is hardly correct in translating hattha-vikārena at Vin i.157 by “eigenhandig,” i.e. with his own hand. It has to be combd with hattha-vilanghakena.
3. perturbation disturbance, inconvenience, deformity Vin i.271, Vin i.272 (˚ṃ sallakkheti observe the uneasiness); Mil 224 (tāvataka v. temporary inconvenience), 254 (˚vipphāra disturbing influence); Snp-a 189 (bhūta˚ natural blemish)
4. constitution, property, quality (cp. Cpd. 1572 1681) Vism 449 (rūpa˚ material quality); Vv-a 10 (so correct under maya in P.D. vol. iii. p. 147).
5. deception fraud Pv-a 211 (= nikati) ■ Cp. nibbikāra.
fr. vi + kṛ;
“wrong time,” i.e. not the proper time, which usually means “afternoon” or “evening,” and therefore often “too late.”-Vin iv.274 (= time from sunset to sunrise); Ja v.131 (ajja vikālo to-day it is too late); Vv-a 230 (id.) ■ loc. vikāle (opp. kāle) as adv., meaning: (1) at the wrong time Vin i.200; Snp 386; Pv-a 12 ■ (2) too late Vv 84 (= akāle Vv-a 337); Dhp-a i.356; Dhp-a iv.69 ■ (3) very late (at night Ja v.458.
-bhojana taking a meal at the wrong time, i, e. in the afternoon Vin i.83; DN i.5; AN i.212; AN ii.209; Snp 400; DN-a i.77.
vi + kāla
opening, expansion Ja vi.497 (vana˚ opening of the forest); Dhtp 265.
vi + kas: see vikasati1
a linen bandage (Kern: “pluksel”) Vin i.206 (for wound-dressing). May be a dern fr. kāsika, i.e. Benares cloth, the vi˚ denoting as much as “a kind of.”
fr. vi + kṛṣ: see kasati
one who plucks or pulls, bender of a bow, archer Ja vi.201.
fr. vi + kṛṣ, kasati
(adj.) (-˚) illumining, delighting Mvu 18, Mvu 68.
fr. vi + kāś: see vikasati2
see vikasati.
scattered about, strewn all over, loose Vin i.209 (undurehi okiṇṇa˚; overrun); Ja v.82.
-kesa with dishevelled hair Ja i.47; Vism 415. -vāca (adj.) of loose talk SN i.61 (= asaññata-vacana K.S. i.320) Pp 35 (same expln PugA 217): Ja v.77 (= patthaṭavacana C.).
pp. of vikirati
to slander Mil 276 (opp. pakitteti).
vi + kitteti
(nt. & adj.) 1. scattering, dispersing; being scattered or dispersed DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.96) ■ Vb 358 (T. reads vikī˚; v.l. vikāraṇa & vikkir˚) = Pp 23 (which reads nikaraṇā; trsl. “guilefulness”). In this connection Vb-a 493 interprets vikiraṇa (or ˚ā) as “denial, abnegation” (pretext?), by saying “nâhaṃ eva karomī ti pāpānaṃ vikkhipanato vikiraṇā.”-With ref. to Arahantship (the dissolution of the body) at Dhp-a iii.109 in formula bhedana-vikiraṇa-viddhaṃsanadhamma i.e. “of the nature of total destruction. Cp. BSk. formula śatana-patana-vikiraṇa-vidhvaṃsana (-dharmatā) Avs i.96 (where S. Speyer in Index considers vikaraṇa the correct form) = Divy 299 (reading cyavanapatana˚) = Lal. V. 242. See also SN iii.190 (under vikirati).
2. (adj.) scattering, spending, squandering f. ˚ī Sn. 112.
fr. vikirati
to scatter about, sprinkle, spread, mix up (trs. & intrs.) MN i.127; SN iii.190 (in simile of playing children: paṃsv’ āgārakāni hatthehi ca pādehi ca vikiranti [mix up] vidhamanti [fall about] viddhaṃsenti [tumble over] vikīḷanikaṃ karonti, describing the scrambling and crowding about. In quite a diff. interpretation appld to Arahantship: see under vikiraṇa, as also in the same chapter (S iii.190 § 11 sq.) in phrase rūpaṃ vikirati vidhamati etc. where it is meant in trs sense of “destroy”; thus vi˚ in the same verb in meaning (vi˚ 1 & 2); SN iv.41 (kāyo vikiri [came to pieces] seyyathâpi bhusa-muṭṭhi); Ja i.226; Pv ii.38 (vikiri, v.l. for okiri); Mil 101, Mil 237 (lokadhātu vikireyya, would fall to pieces; combd with vidhameyya & viddhaṃseyya; “drop & tumble,” denoting total confusion and destruction Similarly on p. 250 = 337 “vāri pokkhara-patte vikirati vidhamati viddhaṃsati”: the water scatters, drops falls off; appld figuratively to bad qualities at same passage); Snp-a 172 ■ Pass. vikiriyyati & vikirīyati; may be taken either to vikirati or vikaroti (cp. kiriyati) Dhs-a 19 (suttena sangahitāni pupphāni na vikirīyanti na viddhaṃsiyanti: get scattered and fall off); ppr vikirīyamāna Pv-a 271 (with sprawling or confused limbs); imper. vikiriyyatu Ja iii.368 ■ pp. vikiṇṇa.
vi + kirati
(adj. & nt.) playing about; in phrase vikīḷanikaṃ karoti (intrs.) to play all over or excitedly (lit. to make play; vi˚ in meaning vi˚ 1) SN iii.190; as trs. to put out of play, to discard (vi˚ 3) ibid (rūpaṃ etc. v. karoti).
fr. vi + kīḷana
made angry, angered, annoyed, vexed MN ii.24 (so read for vikujjita).
vi + pp. of kujjheti
(adj.) distorted, deformed Vism 346 (˚mukha); Pv-a 123 (id.). Cp. vikūṇa.
vi + kuṇita
(adj.) free fr. anger Ja v.308.
vi + kuddha
to change round, transform, do magic Ja iii.114 (= parivatteti); Dpvs i.40 (vikubbeyya); also in phrase iddhi-vikubbati to work transformation by magic (psychic) potency Kv 55 ■ ppr. f. vikubbantī Vv 112 (iddhiṃ working magic = vikubban’ iddhiyo vaḷañjentī Vv-a 58), and vikubbamānā (iddhi˚) Vv 311 ■ pp. *vikubbita miracle: see vikubbana.
vi + kubbati, med. of karoti
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) miraculous transformation, change; assuming a diff. form by supernatural power; miracle Thag 1183; Pts ii.174, Pts ii.210 Dpvs viii.6 (˚esu kovida); Mvu 19, Mvu 19; Mil 343 Vism 309, Vism 316 sq. More specific as iddhi-vikubbana (or ˚ā ), i.e. by psychic powers, e.g. DN ii.213; Vism 373 sq.; or vikubbanā iddhi Vism 378, Vism 406; Vv-a 58; Dhs-a 91 (the var. forms of iddhi). Cp. Kvu trsl. 50 Cpd. 61 ■ The BSk. form is represented by the pp. of vikubbati, i.e. vikurvita, e.g. Avs i.258; Divy 269 etc. Vikulava(ka)
fr. vikubbati
(adj.) having no nest, without a nest SN i.224 (ka); Ja i.203.
vi + kulāva
to sing (like a bird), warble, chirp, coo Pv-a 189 (= upanadati) ■ ppr. med. vikūjamāna Vin iv.15; Ja v.12.
vi + kūjati
distortion, grimace (mukha˚) Snp-a 30.;
cp. vikuṇita & vikāra
(adj.) sloping down, low-lying AN i.35 (contrasted with ukkūla). We should expect ni˚; for vi˚; as in BSk. (see ukkūla).
vi + kūla
(adj.) contrary, disgusting Thig 467 (= paṭikūla Thag-a 284).
fr. vikūla
(adj ■ f.) with loose or dishevelled hair Vin i.15.
vi + kesa + ika
beaten, cut, slain, killed Mil 304 (koṭṭita + ).
vi + koṭṭita
(nt.) upsetting, injuring, doing harm Ja ii.330 = Ja iv.471; Mil 185, Mil 266; Dhs-a 145.
fr. vi + kup
(adj.) shaking, disturbed; neg. a˚; Ja vi.226.
vi + kup
1. to shake up Pv-a 253.
2. to upset, spoil, to do harm Vin iii.47; Mil 276 (vikitteti + )
3. to destroy Ja vi.68 (padaṃ a track).
vi + kopeti
heroic Ja i.119; Ja ii.211; Ja iv.271; Mil 400 (˚cārin, of a lion).
pp. of vi + kram
to cry out, lament, wail Ja vi.525.
vi + kandati
1. walking about, stepping; in ˚malaka walking-enclosure, “περιπατεϊον“, corridor Ja i.449.
2. strength, heroism Ja ii.211, Ja ii.398; Ja iii.386 (˚porisa).
fr. vi + kram
to have or show strength, to exert oneself Ja iii.184 (= parakkamati); Mil 400 ■ pp vikkanta.
vi + kamati
selling, sale AN ii.209; Snp 929 (kaya + ); Ja i.121; Ja ii.200; Ja iv.115 (majja˚); Mil 194 (˚bhaṇḍa goods for sale, merchandise); Pv-a 29, Pv-a 113 (˚bhaṇḍa). Vikkayika & kayika;
vi + kaya
(adj.-n.) 1. a salesman, vendor Dhp-a iv.50 (ā).
2. for sale Ja i.201 (ā); Dhp-a i.269 (a).
fr. vikiṇāti
to sell Ja i.227, Ja i.377 (ger. vikkiṇitvā); Pv-a 100 (id.), 191 (aor. vikkiṇi) ■ inf. vikketu ṃ Ja iii.283 ■ grd. vikkiṇiya = for sale Dhp-a i.390 (˚bhaṇḍa merchandise).
vi + kiṇāti
(nt.) sporting, amusement, pastime Ne 124 (in appld meaning).
vi + kīḷita
(adj.) boiled, ˚duddha boiled milk Kp-a 60 (T. reads vikkuthita-duṭṭha-vaṇṇa, but App. Snp-a Index p. 870: vikkuṭṭhita-duddha˚). The corresp. passage at Vism 260 has duṭṭha-khīra- vaṇṇa which seems faulty.
vi + kuthita
to break (up), destroy, spoil Sdhp 450 (ger. ˚iya) ■ pp. vikkhaṇḍita.
vi + khaṇḍati
broken, ruined, spoilt Sdhp 436.
pp. of vikkhaṇḍati
diameter (lit. support) Ja v.268, Ja v.271; Mvu 18, Mvu 27.
vi + khambha 1
(intrs.) to become stiff (with fear), to be scared or frightened Ap. 50.
fr. vi + khambha 2
(nt.) withdrawal of support, stopping (the nīvaraṇas or any evil influences or corruptions: kilesa˚), arresting, paralysing; elimination discarding Pts ii.179; Nd i.6; Nd ii.338, Nd ii.606b Ja iii.15 (kilesa˚ + metta-bhāvana-jhān’ uppatti); iv.17 Vism320; Sdhp 455 ■ Usually in foll. cpds.: ˚pahāna elimination (of character-blemishes) by discarding Ja ii.230; Nd ii.203; Vism 5; Dhs-a 352; Snp-a 19; ˚vimutti emancipation by elimination Ja ii.35; ˚viveka arrest by aloofness Dhs-a 12, Dhs-a 164; Vism 140, Vism 141.
vi + khambha + na
(f.) state of having undone or discarded, removal, destruction, paralysis Ne 15, Ne 16.
vikkhambhana + tā
(adj.) leading to arrest (of passions), conducive to discarding (the blemishes of character) Vism 114.
fr. vikkhambheti
arrested, stopped, paralysed, destroyed Pts ii.179; Tikp 155, 320 sq. Dukp 10.
pp. of vikkhambheti
(adj.) in neg. a˚ not to be obstructed or overcome DN iii.146.
grd. of vikkhambheti
(trs.) to “unprop,” unsettle, discard; to destroy, extirpate, paralyse (cp khambha 2 and chambheti), give up, reject Snp 969 (= abhibhavati etc. Nd i.492); Vism 268; Ja i.303 (jhānabalena kilese v.); Mil 34 (nīvaraṇe); Dhp-a iv.119 (pītiṃ vikkhambhetvā: here in meaning “set up, establish” Or to produce such pīti as to be called pharaṇā pīti, thus vikkhambheti = pharati 2? Or as Denom. fr. vikkhambha “diameter” = to establish etc.?); Vv-a 156 (read ˚etvā.)-pp. vikkhambhita.
vi + khambheti
(nt.) stumbling, fault, faux pas AN i.199.
vi + khalita2
(adj.-n..) “pertaining (or: of the nature of) to being eaten up, i.e. a (mental) representation obtained by contemplation of a corpse gnawed by animals, one of the asubhakammaṭṭhānas Vism 110 = Mil 332 (˚saññā); Vism 179, Vism 194.
vi + khāyati(= khādita) + ka
washed off, cleansed Vin ii.201; Vism 59.
pp. of vikkhāleti
to wash off, to wash one’s face (mukhaṃ) rinse one’s mouth Vin ii.201; SN ii.269; Ja i.266, Ja i.459; Pv-a 75, Pv-a 209, Pv-a 241 (= ācameti) ■ pp vikkhālita
vi + khāḷeti
(adj.) 1. upset, perplexed, mentally upset, confused SN ii.122 (˚citta); v.157, 263 sq.; AN iii.174 (˚citta); v.147 (id.); Vism 410 (= uddhacc ânugata) ■ a˚; undisturbed, composed, collected AN v.149; Iti 94; Pv-a 26.
vi + khitta
(adj.) 1. scattered all over, deranged, dismembered; of a dead body with respect to its limbs (as one of the asubha-kammaṭṭhāna’s: cp vikkhāyika & vicchiddaka) Vism 110 (˚saññā) = Mil 332; Vism 179 (with defn vividhaṃ khittaṃ vikkhittaṃ aññena hatthaṃ aññena pādaṃ aññena sīsan ti evaṃ tato tato khittassa chava-sarīrassa adhivacanaṃ), 194- hata˚; killed & cut up Vism 179.
2.; citta˚; of unbalanced or deranged mind Mil 308.
vi + khitta + ka
(nt.) refusal, denial Vb-a 493 (see vikiraṇa 1).
cp. BSk. viksepa refusal Avs i.94
to be disturbed Ja i.400 (gocare, in… ); Mil 337 (cittaṃ) ■ pp. vikkhitta.
Pass. of vikkhipati
totally destroyed, finished, gone Thig 22.
vi + khīṇa
to go to ruin, to be destroyed, to be lost Ja v.392 (fut. ˚īyissati) ■ pp. vikkhīṇa.
vi + khīyati
1. disturbance, derangement Ja vi.139.
2. perplexity, confusion DN i.59 ■ vācā˚ equivocation, senseless talk DN i.24.
3. in citta˚ cetaso; v. upset of mind, unbalanced mind, mental derangement: citta˚; SN i.126; Pp 69; cetaso AN iii.448; Dhs 429; Vb 373 ■ avikkhepa equanimity, balance DN iii.213; AN i.83; Pts i.94; Dhs 160, Dhs 430; Vb 178 sq. 231 sq., 266 sq., 279 sq., 285 sq.
-paṭibāhana exclusion or warding off of confusion (of mind) or disturbance Vism 244; Vb-a 227.
vi + khepa
(adj.), in phrase amarā˚;: see under amarā; another suggestion as to explanation may be: khipa = eel-basket, thus vikhep-ika one who upsets the eel-basket, i.e. causes confusion.
fr. vikkhepa
(adj ■ f.) having saliva dropping from the mouth (of sleeping women), slobbering Vin i.15.
vi + kheḷa + ikā
thoroughly shaken up or disturbed Mil 377.
pp. of vikkhobheti: see khobha
(nt.) biting, chewing Dhs 646, Dhs 740, Dhs 875; Dhs-a 330.
vi + khādana
to depart, disappear; to decrease DN i.138 (bhogakkhandha vigacchissati); Sdhp 523. pp. vigata.
vi + gacchati
(˚-) gone away, disappeared, ceased; having lost or foregone (for-gone = vi-gata), deprived of, being without; often to be trsld simply as prep. “without. It nearly always occurs in compn, where it precedes the noun. By itself rare, e.g. Snp 483 (sārambhā yassa vigatā); Vv-a 33 (padumā mā vigatā hotu). Otherwise as follows: ˚āsa Pp 27; ˚āsava Snp-a 51; ˚icchā Dhp 359; ˚khila Snp 19; ˚cāpalla DN i.115; DN-a i.286; ˚chavivaṇṇa Thag-a 80 (= vivaṇṇa); ˚jīvita Pv-a 40; ˚paccaya Vism 541; Tikp 7, 21, 59; ˚paṭighāta Dhp-a iv.176 ˚mada Mvu 34, Mvu 94; ˚raja Snp 517; Ja i.117; ˚valita Pv-a 153. Cp. vīta˚; in similar application and meaning.
pp. of vigacchati, in act. (reflexive) & medpass. function
(-˚) going away, disappearance, departing, departure Dāvs v.68 (sabb’ āsava˚); Dhs-a 166; Sdhp 388 (jighacchā˚), 503 (sandeha˚).
fr. vi + gam
see vigāhati.
to scold (intensely), to abuse Vin ii.161 (dhammiṃ kathaṃ); iii.46; SN i.30 (ariyadhammaṃ); Mil 227.
vi + garahati
to drop Mil 250 ■ pp. vigaḷita. Cp. vinigaḷati.
vi + galati
dropping, dripping (down) Pv-a 56.
pp. of vigaḷati
to plunge into, to enter SN i.180 (ger. vigāhiya); Ja v.381 (˚gāhisuṃ, aor.); Mvu 19, Mvu 29 (here as ˚gāhetvā). The ger. is also vigayha at Snp 2, Snp 825; cp Nd i.163 (= ogayha pavisitvā). At Vin ii.106 we should prefer to read viggayha for vigayha.
vi + gāhati
1. to take hold of, to quarrel, to be in disharmony with; only in ger. viggayha disputing quarrelling, fighting Vin ii.106 (read gg for g Bdhgh on p. 315: rubbing against each other); Ud 69; Snp 844, Snp 878; Nd i.285 (= uggahetvā parāmasitvā). 2. to stretch out, disperse, divide, spread; ger. viggayha Vv 501 (hattha-pāde v.; expld as “vividhehi ākārehi gahetvā” Vv-a 209).
vi + gaṇhati
1. dispute, quarrel Ja i.208 (ñātakānaṃ aññamaññaṃ viggaho); Mil 90 often combd with kalaha, e.g. Vin ii.88; AN iv.401 Nd i.302; Mil 383.
2. taking up form (lit. seizing on), “incorporation,” form, body DN ii.210 = DN ii.226 (sovaṇṇo viggaho mānusaṃ viggahaṃ atirocati); Vin i.97 (manussa˚); ii.286 (id.); iv.215 (tiracchānagata-manussa˚), 269 (id.); Ja v.398 = Ja v.405 (= sarīra C); vi.188 (rucira˚); Dāvs i.42 (uju-somma˚).
3. (t.t.g.) resolution of words into their elements, analysis, separation of words Mil 381; Vv-a 226 (pada˚); Snp-a 168 Thag-a 202 (pada˚).
fr. vi + gah: see gaṇhati 3
taken hold of, seized; prejudiced against, seduced by (-), in phrase dhamm’ uddhacca- viggahita-mānasa AN ii.157; Pts ii.101. Cp BSk. vigrāhita, e.g. Avs i.83 = Avs i.308 (Ajātaśatru Devadatta˚); Divy 419, Divy 557, Divy 571; Jtm 143, 146.
pp. of viggaṇhati
(adj.) of the nature of dispute or quarrel; only in cpd. ˚kathā quarrelsome speech, dispute DN i.8; SN v.419; Snp 930; DN-a i.91.
fr. viggaha
struck, knocked, beaten Ja v.203 (a˚).
vi + ghaṭṭita
(adj.) unfastening, breaking up, overthrowing Thag 419.
fr. vighāṭeti
overthrown, destroyed Sdhp 314.
pp. of vighāṭeti, Denom. fr. vi + ghāṭa, cp. gantheti
1. destruction, killing, slaughter Pv-a 150 (vighātaṃ āpajjati = vihaññati) ■ as adj slain, beaten Pv iv.53 (= vighātavā vihata-bala). 2. distress, annoyance, upset of mind, trouble, vexation DN iii.249; MN i.510; AN ii.197 sq.; AN iv.161 (˚pariḷāha) Snp 814 (= ugghāta pīḷana ghaṭṭana upaddava Nd i.140 = Nd i.170); Thig 450 (bahu˚ full of annoyance) ■ sa˚ connected with, or bringing vexation, with opp. a˚; free of annoyance: SN iii.8; SN v.97; AN i.202 sq.; AN iii.3, AN iii.429 Thig 352; Thag-a 242.
3. opposition MN i.499.
-pakkhika having its part in adversity, associated with trouble MN i.115; SN v.97; Dhs-a 382. -bhūmi ground for vexation Snp 830 (cp. Nd i.170 with expln as above).
vi + ghata
(adj.) full of annoyance or vexation SN iii.16 sq.; AN ii.143 (= discontented); Thag 899 (in same connection, neg.); Pv-a 260 (= distressed).
vighāta + vant
(& ˚ghasa) remains of food, broken meat, scraps Vin iv.265, Vin iv.266; Ja ii.288; Ja iii.113 Ja iii.191, Ja iii.311 (read ˚ghasa for metre); v.268 (do.); Sdhp 389.
-āda one who eats the remains of food Vin i.200 (panca˚-satāni) Ja i.348; Ja ii.96; Ja iii.191; Dhp-a ii.128 Also Name of an animal Ja vi.538.
fr. vi + ghasati
(adj.) without wheels Ja i.378 (sakaṭa). Doubtful in phrase asani˚; where used as a noun, probably in diff. meaning altogether (= asani-pāta?): see S ii.229 (= “falling of a thunderbolt” K.S. ii.155) DN iii.44, DN iii.47.
vi + cakka
(adj.-n..) [vi + cakkhaṇa, of cakṣ to see, attentive, watchful, sensible, skilful; (nt.) application attention, wit SN i.214 = Snp 186 (appamatta + ; trslnK.S. i.277 “discerning wit”); Snp 583; Ja iv.58; Ja vi.286; Mil 216; Vism 43; Snp-a 238; Sdhp 200, Sdhp 293.
(adj.) eyeless, blind, in phrase ˚kamma making blind or perplexed SN i.111, SN i.118 (“darkening their intelligence” trsln) [cp. BSk. vicakṣu-karma Mvu iii.416; Lal V. 490].
vi + cakkhu
(adj.) not seeing, blinded, dulled in sight, half-blind Mil 295 (Rh. D. “squinting”).
vicakkhu + ka
search, investigation, examination SN iii.96 (vicayaso, i.e. thoroughly); Pp 25; Mil 340 (dhamma˚); Ne 1, Ne 2, Ne 10; Dhs-a 147; Sdhp 466. For dhamma˚ see sambojjhanga.
fr. vi + ci: see vicinati
(adj.-n..) going about, circulating, moving, travelling Ja v.484 (˚bhaṇḍa travelling merchandise).
fr. vicarati
to go or move about in (loc.), to walk (a road = acc.), to wander Snp 444 (raṭṭhā raṭṭhaṃ vicarissaṃ, fut.), 696 (dhamma-maggaṃ); Nd i.201, Nd i.263; Pv iii.73 (aor. vicari); Dhp-a i.66; Pv-a 4, Pv-a 22, Pv-a 33, Pv-a 69 Pv-a 120, Pv-a 185 (= āhiṇḍati); Sdhp 133 ■ In Sn often with loke (in this world), e.g. Snp 466, Snp 501, Snp 845, Snp 846, Snp 864. Caus. vicāreti; pp. vicarita, vicārita & viciṇṇa. Cp anu˚.;
vi + carati
occupied by (-˚), haunted, frequented Vv-a 163.
pp. of vicarati
investigation, examination, consideration, deliberation ■ Defd as “vicaraṇaṃ vicāro, anusañcaraṇan ti vuttaṃ hoti” Vism 142 (see in def. under vitakka) ■ Hardly ever by itself (as at Thag 1117 mano˚), usually in close connection or direct combn with vitakka (q.v.).
vi + cāra
(adj.) 1. looking after something; watching Ja i.364 (ghara˚).
2. investigating; (n.) a judge Mvu 35, Mvu 18.
fr. vicāreti
(f.) & a˚; (nt.) 1. investigation, search, attention Snp 1108, Snp 1109 (f. & nt.); Ja iii.73 (˚paññā).
2. arranging, planning, looking after scheme Ja i.220; Ja ii.404 (yuddha˚); vi.333 sq.
fr. vicāreti
thought out, considered; thought DN i.37 (vitakkita + , like vitakka- vicāra, cp. DN-a i.122) 213 (id.); Snp-a 385.
pp. of vicāreti
1. to make go round, to pass round, to distribute Pv-a 272 (salākaṃ).
2. to think (over) SN v.156 (vitakketi + ).
3. to investigate examine, test Ja ii.413; Ja iii.258; Vv-a 336 (a˚ to omit examining).
4. to plan, consider, construct Ja ii.404 Ja vi.333.
5. to go about (some business), to look after administer, provide Ja ii.287; Ja iii.378; Mvu 35, Mvu 19 (rajjaṃ); Pv-a 93 (kammante) ■ pp. vicārita & viciṇṇa;.
Caus. of vicarati
(adj.) in neg. a˚; not to be shaken, not wavering Sdhp 444.
grd. of vi + cāleti
lit. “dis-reflect,” to be distracted in thought, i.e. to doubt, hesitate DN i.106; SN ii.17, SN ii.50, SN ii.54; SN iii.122, SN iii.135; Ja iv.272 (2 sg. vicikicchase) Snp-a 451; DN-a i.275 ■ pp. vicikicchita.
vi + cikicchati
(f.) doubt, perplexity, uncertainty (one of the nīvaraṇas) DN i.246; DN iii.49, DN iii.216, DN iii.234 DN iii.269; SN i.99; SN iii.106 sq. (dhammesu v. doubt about the precepts); iv.350; AN iii.292, AN iii.438; AN iv.68, AN iv.144 sq.; AN v.144; Snp 343, Snp 437, Snp 540; Vv 81 (= soḷasa-vatthuka-vicikicchā Vv-a 317); Ja ii.266; Pp 59; Vb 168, Vb 341, Vb 364; Dhs 425; Ne 11; Tikp 108, 122, 152 sq., 171, 255, 275 Dukp 170 sq., 265 sq., 289 sq.; Vism 471 (= vigatā cikicchā ti v. etc.), 599 sq.; Vb-a 209; Vv-a 156; MA 116; Sdhp 459 ■ As adj. (-˚) vicikiccha, e.g. tiṇṇa˚; one who has overcome all doubt DN i.71, DN i.110; MN i.18; AN ii.211; AN iii.92; AN iii.297 sq.; AN iv.186; AN iv.210 ■ See also Cpd. 242; Dhs. trsl. § 425 n. 1; and cp. kathankathā, kicchati vecikicchin.
fr. vicikicchati
(nt.) doubt Pv iv.137.
pp. of vicikicchati
see ve˚.
thought out; in neg. a˚; not thought out; reading however doubtful, better to be taken as adhiciṇṇa, i.e. procedure, method DN i.8; MN ii.3 = SN iii.12 (vi˚ as v.l.) ■ DN-a i.91 reads āciṇṇa (cp. MN i.372).
pp. of vicāreti
in phrase ˚kāḷaka bhatta rice from which the black grains have been separated DN i.105; MN ii.8; DN-a i.274; as vicita-bhatta in same sense at Ja iv.371.
pp. of vi + ci to gather
(& ˚citra) (adj.) various, variegated, coloured, ornamented, etc. Ja i.18, Ja i.83; Pv ii.19; Vv 6410 (citra); Mil 338, Mil 349; Vv-a 2, Vv-a 77; Sdhp 92, Sdhp 245- vicitra-kathika eloquent Mil 196.
vi + citta;1
(˚cināti) 1. to investigate, examine, discriminate SN i.34 (yoniso vicine dhammaṃ); AN iv.3 sq (id.); Snp 658, Snp 933; Ap 42; Ja vi.373; Nd i.398; Ne 10 Ne 22 (grd. vicetabba), 25 sq.; Mil 298; Dpvs iv.2; Dhs-a 147; Pv-a 140; Sdhp 344 ■ ger. viceyya discriminating; with discrimination DN ii.21 (doubled: with careful discrimn); iii.167 (˚pekkhitar); Snp 524 sq.; usually in phrase viceyya-dāna a gift given with discrimination SN i.21; AN iv.244; Ja iv.361; Ja v.395; Pv ii.972; Dhp-a iii.221; Mvu 5, Mvu 35.
2. to look for, to seek, to linger to choose Pv iii.64 (aor. vicini = gavesi C.); iv.142 (ger viceyya = vicinitvā Pv-a 240); Ja i.419 ■ See also pacinati.
vi + cināti
(nt.) discrimination Vism 162.
fr. vicinati
to think, consider Snp 1023; Mvu 4, Mvu 28 (vicintiya, ger.); 17, 38.
vi + cinteti
crushed up, only in redupl ■ iter. formation cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa crushed to bits, piecemeal Ja i.26; Ja iii.438 etc. See under cuṇṇa.
vi + cuṇṇa
crushed up Ja i.203 (viddhasta + ).
pp. of vi + cuṇṇeti
fallen down Ja v.403 (expld as viyutta C.); Dhp i.140.
vi + cuta
to throw out, to vomit; in late (Sanskritic) Pāli at Sdhp 121 (pp. vicchaḍḍita) and 136 (nt. vicchaḍḍana throwing out).
vi + chaḍḍeti
(& ˚ya ) (adj.) fit to disinterest, “disengrossing,” in ˚kathā sermon to rid of the desire for the body Vin iii.271 (Sam. Pās. on Pār iii.3, 1); & ˚sutta the Suttanta having disillusionment for its subject (another name given by Bdhgh to the Vijayasutta Snp 193–206) Snp-a 241 sq. (˚ya). Cp. vicchindati.
vi + chanda + na + ika
(f.) concealment Pp 19, Pp 23.
vi + chādanā
a scorpion DN i.9 (˚vijjā scorpion craft); Vin ii.110; AN ii.73; AN iii.101, AN iii.306; AN iv.320; AN v.289 sq.; Ja ii.146; Mil 272 Mil 394; Vism 235; DN-a i.93.
cp. Vedic vṛścīka: Zimmer, Altind. Leben 98
in phrase balavicchita-kārin at Mil 110 is to be read balav’ icchita-kārin “a man strong to do what he likes,” i.e. a man of influence.
(adj.) only in (redupl.) combin. chidda˚; full of little holes, perforated all over Ja i.419.
vi + chidda
“having holes all over,” referring to one of the asubha-kammaṭṭhānas, obtained by the contemplation of a corpse fissured from decay AN ii.17 (˚saññā); v.106, 310; Mil 332; Vism 110, Vism 178 Vism 194.
vi + chidda + ka
breaking off, cutting off Ja ii.436, Ja ii.438 (kāya˚; ). Kern, Toev. s. v considers it as a corruption of vicchanda. See vicchandanika.
fr. vi + chind as in vicchindati
to cut off, to interrupt, to prevent Pv-a 129 (˚itu-kāma). The BSk. form is vicchandayati [ = vi + Denom. of chando] e.g. Divy 10, Divy 11, Divy 383, Divy 590 ■ pp. vicchinna.
vi + chindati
cut off, destroyed Sdhp 34, Sdhp 117, Sdhp 370, Sdhp 585.
pp. of vicchindati
besprinkled, sprinkled about Vv-a 4, Vv-a 280 (= ullitta).
vi + churita
cutting off, destruction Ja iv.284 (santati˚). a˚; uninterruptedness Vv-a 16.
vi + cheda
(nt.) disentangling Mil 11.
fr. vijaṭeti
disentangled SN i.165.
pp. of vijaṭeti
1. to disentangle, to comb out; fig. to unravel, explain Vin ii.150 (bimbohanaṃ kātuṃ tūlāni v.); Mil 3; Vism 1, Vism 2.
2. to plunder Ja iii.523 ■ pp. vijaṭita.
vi + Caus. of jaṭ;: see jaṭita
(adj.) deserted of people, lonely SN i.180; Thag-a 252. -˚vāta: see vāta.
vi + jana
to rouse oneself, to display activity, often appld to the awakening of a lion SN iii.84; AN ii.33; Ja i.12, Ja i.493; Ja v.215 (˚amāna, ppr., getting roused) 433, 487; vi.173; Vism 311.
vi + jambhati
(f.) arousing, activity, energy Ja vi.457.
vi + jambhanā
(f.) yawning (before rising) i.e. drowsiness, laziness, in ster. combn with arati tandī SN i.7 (trsln “the lanquid frame”); AN i.3; Vb 352 Vism 33. As vijambhitā at SN v.64; Ja i.506 (here in meaning “activity, alertness,” but sarcastically as sīha˚); Vb-a 272 (= kāya-vināmanā).
fr. vijambhati
victory; conquering, mastering; triumph over (-˚) DN i.46; AN iv.272 (idha-loka˚); Snp-a 241 sq. (˚sutta, another name for the Kāya-vicchandanika-sutta).
fr. vi + ji
(& vijinati ) to conquer, master, triumph over DN-a i.250 (vijeti); fut. vijessati Ja iv.102. ger. vijeyya Snp 524, Snp 1002; and vijetvā Ja iii.523 ■ pp vijita. Cp. abhi˚.
vi + jayati
to abandon, forsake, leave; to give up, dismiss Pv iii.615 (sarīraṃ); Vv-a 119; Pot. vijaheyya Pv iv.110; fut. vijahissati SN ii.220; Pv ii.67 (jīvitaṃ) ■ ger. vihāya Mvu 12, Mvu 55; & vijahitvā Vin iv.269; Ja i.117; Ja iii.361 (iddh’ ânubhāvena attabhāvaṃ )-grd. vihātabba AN iii.307 sq.; Mil 371 ■ Pass vihīyati Ja vi.499 (eko v. = kilamissati C.) ■ pp. vijahita & vihīna;.
vi + jahati
(nt.) abandoning, relinquishing DN-a i.197.
fr. vijahati
left, given up, relinquished; only in neg. a˚; Ja i.71, Ja i.76, Ja i.94, Ja i.178.
pp. of vijahati
(f.) (a woman) having borne Ja ii.140; Pv ii.23 (= pasūtā Pv-a 80).
-kāla time of birth Ja ii.140. -ghara birth-chamber Mil 301.
pp. of vijāyati
in ˚loha a kind of copper Vb-a 63.
(nt ■ adj.) understanding; as adj. (-˚) in cpds. du˚; (dubbijāna) hard to understand SN i.60; Ja iv.217; and su˚; easy to perceive Snp 92; Ja iv.217.
fr. vijānāti
(nt.) recognition, knowing, knowledge, discrimination Vian 452; Dhs-a 141.
the diaeretic form of Sk. vijñāna: cp. jānana = ñāṇa
to have discriminative (dis = vi˚) knowledge, to recognize, apprehend, ascertain, to become aware of, to understand, notice, perceive, distinguish learn, know Snp 93 sq., 763; Dhp 64, Dhp 65; Nd i.442. See also viññāṇa 2a ■ imper. 2nd sg. vijāna Snp 1091 (= ājāna Nd ii.565b); Pv iv.55 (= vijānāhi Pv-a 260) ppr. vijānanto Snp 656, Snp 953; Pv iv.188; Pv-a 41; and vijānaṃ neg. a˚; ignorant Dhp 38, Dhp 60; Iti 103. Pot. 1st sg (poet.) vijaññaṃ Ja iii.360 (= vijāneyyaṃ C.); Snp 1065 Snp 1090, Snp 1097 (= jāneyyaṃ Nd ii.565a); & vijāniyaṃ Vv 415 (paṭivijjhiṃ C.); 3rd sg. vijañña Snp 253, Snp 316, Snp 967 (cp Nd i.489) ■ ger. vijāniya Mvu 8, Mvu 16; viññāya Snp 232 & viññitvā Vin iv.264 ■ aor. (3rd pl.) vijāniṃsu Mvu 10, Mvu 18 ■ Pass. viññāyati Pv-a 197; fut. viññissati Thag 703 ■ inf. viññātuṃ SN iii.134 ■ grd. viññātabba (to be understood) Vb-a 46; & viññeyya (q.v.) ■ pp viññāta ■ Caus. II. viññāpeti (q.v.).
vi + jñā
(nt.) bringing forth, birth, delivery AN i.78; Ja iii.342; Ja vi.333; Vism 500; Vb-a 97.
fr. vijāyati
to bring forth, to bear, to give birth to Sdhp 133; aor. vijāyi Vv-a 220; Pv-a 82 (puttaṃ) ger. vijāyitvā Mvu 5, Mvu 43 (puttaṃ); and vijāyitvāna Pv i.63 ■ pp. vijāta ■ Caus. II. vijāyāpeti to cause to bring forth Ja vi.340.
vi + jāyati
(adj.-n.) in f. ˚inī able to bear a child, fertile Ja iv.77 (opp. vañjhā); Dhp-a i.46 (id.).
fr. vijāyati
to loathe Snp 41 (˚amāna = aṭṭiyamāna harāyamāna Nd ii.566), 253, 958 (˚ato = aṭṭiyato harāyato Nd i.466), 963; Nd i.479.
vi + j.
1. conquered, subdued, gained, won Snp 46; Snp-a 352; DN-a i.160; Pv-a 75, Pv-a 76, Pv-a 161. Cp. nijjita.
2. (nt.) conquered land, realm, territory kingdom Ja i.262; Vv 8120 (= desa Vv-a 316); Dhp-a i.386.
-aṅga at Pv iii.117 (Pv-a 176) read vījit.˚-indriya one who has conquered his senses Snp 250. -saṅgāma by whom the battle has been won, victorious DN ii.39; Iti 76; Nd ii.542; Pp 68.
pp. of vijayati
(adj.) victorious DN i.88 (caturanta + ); ii.146; SN iii.83; Snp 552, Snp 646; DN-a i.249; Dhp-a iv.232; Snp-a 162.
vijita + āvin; see Geiger, P.Gr. 1983
distress (?), in stock phrase at AN v.156, AN v.158, AN v.160, AN v.162 (v.l. at all pass. vicina).
doubtful
at Ja iii.374 is to be read as vījiyati (Pass. of vījati ).
(adj.) (-˚) having vijjā, possessed of wisdom; in vatthu˚, tiracchāna˚, nakkhatta˚ etc. (referring to the lower arts condemned as heretic: vijjā c.) SN iii.239 te˚; possessed of threefold wisdom: see vijjā b.
= vijjā
(f.) adultery Pv-a 151. Vijjati, vijjamana
? doubtful spelling
etc.: see vindati.
(f.) is not clear; according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = vīthi + antarikā, i.e. space in between two streets or midstreet MN i.448; AN i.124. Neumann (Mittl. Slg. ii.182) translates “Rinnstein” (i.e. gutter). Under antarikā we have given the trsln “interval of lightning, thus taking it as vijju + antarikā. Quoted DN-a i.34.
a very bold assumption: vīthy contracted to vijj˚!
(f.) one of the dogmatic terms of Buddhist teaching varying in meaning in diff. sections of the Canon. It is not always the positive to avijjā (which has quite a well-defined meaning from its first appearance in Buddhist psych. ethics), but has been taken into the terminology of Buddhism from Brahmanic and popular philosophy The opposite of avijjā is usually ñāṇa (but cp. SN iii.162 f. 171; v.429). Although certain vijjās pertain to the recognition of the “truth” and the destruction of avijjā, yet they are only secondary factors in achieving “vimutti” (cp. abhiññā, ñāṇa-dassana & paññā) That; vijjā at MN i.22 is contrasted with avijjā is to be expld as a word-play in a stereotype phrase ■ A diff side of “knowledge” again is given by “bodhi.” (a) Vijjā is a general, popular term for lore in the old sense, science, study, esp. study as a practice of some art (something like the secret science of the medicine man: cp. vejja!); hence appld in special, “dogmatic sense as “secret science,” revelation (put into a sort of magic formula), higher knowledge (of the learned man), knowledge which may be applied and used as an art (cp. magister artium!), practical knowledge; but also mysterious knowledge: “charm.”-(b) vijjā having a varying content in its connotation, is applied to a series of diff. achievements. A rather old tabulation of the stages leading by degrees to the attainment of the highest knowledge is given in the Sāmañña-phala-sutta (DN i.63–86), repeated in nearly every Suttanta of D 1 It is composed of the 3 sampadās, viz. sīla˚, citta˚ paññā˚. Under the first group belong sīla(-kkhandha) indriya-saṃvara, sati-sampajañña, santuṭṭhi; the second is composed (1) of the overcoming of the nīvaraṇas, (2) of the 4 jhānas; the third consists of 8 items, viz (1) ñāṇa-dassana, (2) manomaya-kāya, (3) iddhi (4) dibba-sota, (5) ceto-pariyañāṇa, (6) pubbe-nivās ânussatiñāṇa, (7) cut’ ûpapatti-ñāṇa, (8) āsavānaṃ khaya-ñāṇa. Other terms used are: for the 2nd sampadā: caraṇa (D. i.100), and for the 3rd: vijjā (ibid.). The discussion at DN i.100 is represented as contradicting the (brahmaṇic) opinion of Ambaṭṭha, who thought that “vijjā nāma tayo Vedā, caraṇaṃ pañca sīlāni” (DN-a i.267 sq.) ■ In the enumn of 3 vijjās at MN i.22 sq. only Nos. 6
8 of the 3rd sampadā (said to have been attained by the Buddha in the 3 night watches) with the verbs anussarati (No. 6), pajānāti (7), abhijānāti (8), each signifying a higher stage of (“saving”) knowledge, yet all called “vijjā.” Quoted at Vism 202, where all 8 stages are given as “aṭṭha vijjā, ” and caraṇa with 15 qualities (sīla-saṃvara, indriyesu guttadvāra etc.). The same 3 vijjās (No. 6, 7, 8) are given at DN iii.220, DN iii.275, and poetically at AN ii.165 as the characteristics of a proper (ariya, Buddhist) monk (or brāhmaṇa): “etāhi tīhi vijjāhi tevijjo hoti brāhmaṇo,” opposing the threeVeda -knowledge of the Brahmins ■ Tevijja (adj.) in same meaning at SN i.146 (where it refers to Nos. 3, 5, 8 of above enumn), 192, 194. In brahmanic sense at Snp 594 (= tiveda Snp-a 463). Both meanings compared contrasted at AN i.163 (aññathā brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṃ tevijjaṃ paññāpenti, aññathā ca pana ariyassa vinaye tevijjo hoti “different in the Brahmanic and diff. in the Buddhist sense”) ■ Tisso vijjā (without specification but referring to above 6, 7, 8) further at Vin ii.183; Snp 656; Pts i.34; Pts ii.56; Pv iv.134; Mil 359 (+ chaḷabhiññā); Dhp-a iv.30 (id.). It is doubtful whether the defn of ñāṇa as “tisso vijjā” at Vin iii.91 is genuine. On vijjā-caraṇa see also D iii.97, 98, 237; SN i.153, SN i.166 SN ii.284; SN v.197; AN ii.163; AN iv.238; AN v.327; Snp 163, Snp 289, Snp 442-On vijjā in the doctrinal appln see: D iii.156, 214 274; SN ii.7 sq. (cakkhu, ñāṇa, paññā, vijjā, āloka) iii.47; 163; 171; iv.31, 49 sq. AN i.83; AN ii.247; Snp 334 (simply meaning “wisdom,” craft, care, but Bdhgh Snp-a 339 takes it as “āsavānaṃ-khaya-ñāṇa”), 1026 (opposed to avijjā); Pp 14, Pp 57; Vb 324; Ne 76, Ne 191 ■ (c) popular meanings & usage of; vijjā: science, craft, art, charm spell DN i.213 (Gandhārī nāma v., also mentioned at Ja iv.498 as practised by physicians), 214 (Maṇika n. v.); Ja iii.504 (Cintāmaṇi v.); iv.323 (vatthu˚: see under vatthu), 498 (ghora˚); v.458 (anga˚ palmistry) Mil 200; Dhp i.259 (bhūmicala n. v. “earthquake charm), 265 (dhanu-agamanīyaṃ Ambaṭṭha n. v.); Kp-a 237 (vatthu˚, khetta˚, anga˚); and see the list of forbidden crafts at DN i.9 (anga˚, vatthu˚, khetta˚; etc. cp. Dial. i.18, 19).
-gata having attained wisdom Snp 730 (opp. avijjā the playful expln at Snp-a 505 is “ye arahatta-maggavijjāya kilese vijjhitvā gatā khīṇāsava-sattā”). -caraṇa (-sampanna) (endowed with) special craft (wisdom) virtue: see above, b.; -ṭṭhāna branch of study; there are 18 vijja-ṭṭhānāni or “arts & sciences,” subjects of study referred to at Ja i.259. -dhara a knower of charms, a sorcerer Ja iii.303, Ja iii.529; Ja iv.496; Ja v.94; Mil 153, Mil 200, Mil 267 -bhāgiyā (dhammā) (states) conducive to wisdom (6 kinds of saññā) AN iii.334; cp. DN iii.243; SN v.395; AN iv.52 sq. -mayā (iddhi) (potency) accomplished by art or knowledge (Expos. i.122) Vism 383; see iddhi. -vimutti wisdom (higher knowledge) as salvation SN v.28 SN v.335 sq.; Pts ii.243 (in detail). Vijju & vijjuta
cp. Vedic vidyā knowledge: etym. see under vindati
(f.) lightning ■ (a) vijju: SN i.100 (˚māli); AN i.124 (˚ūpamacitta); Ja v.322 (˚vaṇṇin); Pp 30; Mil 22 (˚jāla); Vv-a 12; Sdhp 244, Sdhp 598 ■ (b) vijjutā: Thag 1167; Ja ii.217 ■ On similes with v. see J.P.T.S. 1907 136 ■ Cp. next.
cp. Vedic vidyut; fr. vi + dyut: see juti
(f.) a flash or streak of lightning, forked lightning SN i.106; Ja i.103, Ja i.279, Ja i.501.
vijju(t) + latā
to shine (forth) Pv-a 56; Caus. ˚eti to illumine Pv-a 10 ■ pp. vijjotita.
vi + jotati
to flicker Vin ii.131; MN i.86.
Freq. of vijjotati? Or = vijjotayati = vijjoteti?
resplendent Pv-a 154.
pp. of vijjotati
to pierce, perforate; to shoot with an arrow; to strike, hit, split; fut. ˚issati Ja iv.272; inf ˚ituṃ ibid.; ger. ˚itvā Vin ii.150; Ja i.201 (boring through timber); Snp-a 505 (kilese); Pv-a 155; & viddhā Ja vi.77-Pass. vijjhati: ger. ˚itvā having been hit Ja iii.323 ppr. vijjhamāna Pv-a 107; grd. viddheyya Ja vi.77 ■ pp viddha ■ Caus. vijjheti Ja i.45 (sūlehi vijjhayanto); and vedheti to cause to be pierced Ja vi.453 (fut. vedhayissati)-pp. vedhita.
vyadh
(nt.) piercing or getting pierced DN-a i.75; DN-a ii.87 (kaṇṇa˚-mangala, ear-piercing ceremony) Pv-a 107.
fr. vijjhati
to extinguish Vin i.31; Vin ii.219, Vin ii.221; Ja iv.292; Mil 42.
vi + jhāpeti
to be extinguished, to go out (of fire) Vin i.31 (imper. ˚āyatu & fut. ˚āyissati); Dhp-a i.21 (akkhīni dīpa-sikhā viya vijjhāyiṃsu).
vi + jhāyati2
(f.) intimation, giving to understand, information; begging or asking by intimation or hinting (a practice forbidden to the bhikkhu) Vin i.72 (˚bahula, intent on… ); iii.144 sq. (id.); iv.290; Ja iii.72 (v. nāma na vaṭṭati, is improper); Vb 13 Vism 41 (threefold: nimitta˚, obhāsa˚, parikathā; as t. t., cp. Cpd. 1201: medium of communication); Mil 343, Mil 370; Dhp-a ii.21 (viññattiṃ katvā bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati); Pv-a 146 ■ Two kinds of viññatti are generally distinguished, viz. kāya˚; and vacī˚; or intimation by body (gesture) and by voice: Dhs 665, Dhs 718; Mil 229 sq.; Vism 448, Vism 530, Vism 531. Cp. Cpd. 22, 264.
fr. viññāpeti
(nt.) (as special term in Buddhist metaphysics) a mental quality as a constituent of individuality, the bearer of (individual) life, life-force (as extending also over rebirths), principle of conscious life, general consciousness (as function of mind and matter), regenerative force animation, mind as transmigrant, as transforming (according to individual kamma) one individual life (after death) into the next. (See also below, c & d). In this (fundamental) application it may be characterized as the sensory and perceptive activity commonly expressed by “mind.” It is difficult to give any one word for v., because there is much difference between the old Buddhist and our modern points of view, and there is a varying use of the term in the Canon itself. In what may be a very old Sutta SN ii.95 v. is given as a synonym of citta (q.v.) and mano (q.v.), in opposition to kāya used to mean body. This simpler unecclesiastical unscholastic popular meaning is met with in other suttas. E. g. the body (kāya) is when animated called sa-viññāṇaka (q.v. and cp. viññāṇatta). Again v. was supposed, at the body’s death, to pass over into another body (SN i.122; SN iii.124) and so find a support or platform (patiṭṭhā). It was also held to be an immutable persistent substance, a view strongly condemned (MN i.258). Since, however, the persistence of v. from life to life is declared (D ii.68; SN iii.54), we must judge that it is only the immutable persistence that is condemned. V. was justly conceived more as “minding” than as “mind.” Its form is participial. For later variants of the foregoing cp. Mil 86; Pv-a 63, Pv-a 219.
Ecclesiastical scholastic dogmatic considers v. under the categories of (a) khandha; (b) dhātu; (c) paṭiccasamuppāda; (d) āhāra; (e) kāya. (a) V. as fifth of the five khandhas (q.v.) is never properly described or defined. It is an ultimate. But as a factor of animate existence it is said to be the discriminating (vijānāti) of e.g. tastes or sapid things (S iii.87), or, again, of pleasant or painful feeling (MN i.292). It is in no wise considered as a condition, or a climax of the other incorporeal khandhās. It is just one phase among others of mental life. In mediaeval dogmatic it appears rather as the bare phenomenon of aroused attention, the other khandhās having been reduced to adjuncts or concomitants brought to pass by the arousing of v. (Cpd. 13), and as such classed under cetasikā, the older sankhārakkhandha-(b) as dhātu, v. occurs only in the category of the four elements with space as a sixth element, and also where dhātu is substituted for khandha (S iii.10) ■ (c) In the chain of causation (Paṭicca-samuppāda ) v. is conditioned by the saṅkhāras and is itself a necessary condition of nāma-rūpa (individuality). See e.g. SN ii.4, SN ii.6, SN ii.8, SN ii.12 etc.; Vin i.1; Vism 545 sq. = Vb-a 150 Vism 558 sq.; Vb-a 169 sq.; 192 ■ At SN ii.4 = SN iii.61 viññāṇa (in the Paṭicca-samuppāda) is defined in a similar way to the defn under v ■ ṭṭhiti (see c), viz. as a quality peculiar to (& underlying) each of the 6 senses: “katamaṃ viññāṇaṃ? cha-y-ime viññāṇa-kāyā (groups of v.), viz. cakkhu˚ sota˚ etc.,” which means that viññāṇa is the apperceptional or energizing principle so to speak the soul or life (substratum, animator, lifepotency) of the sensory side of individuality. It arises through the mutual relation of sense and sense-object (M iii.281, where also the 6 v ■ kāyā). As such it forms a factor of rebirth, as it is grouped under upadhi (q.v.) Translations of SN ii.4: Mrs. Rh. D. (K.S. ii.4) “consciousness”; Geiger (in Z. f. B. iv.62) “Erkennen.” (d) As one of the four āhāras (q.v.) v. is considered as the material, food or cause, through which comes rebirth (S ii.13; cp. B.Psy. p. 62). As such it is likened to seed in the field of action (kamma) AN i.223, and as entering (a body) at rebirth the phrase viññāṇassa avakkanti is used (D ii.63; SN ii.91). In this connection the expression paṭisandhi-viññāṇa first appears in Pts i.52, and then in the Commentaries (VbhA 192; cf. Vism 548 Vism 659 paṭisandhicitta); in Vism 554 = Vb-a 163, the v. here said to be located in the heart, is made out, at bodily death, “to quit its former ʻsupportʼ and proceed (pavattati) to another by way of its mental object and other conditions.” Another scholastic expression both early and late, is abhisaṅkhāra-v., or “endowment consciousness,” viz. the individual transmigrant or transmitted function (viññāṇa) which supplies the next life with the accumulation of individual merit or demerit or indifference, as it is expressed at Nd ii.569a in defn of v. (on Snp 1055: yaṃ kiñci sampajānāsi… panujja viññāṇaṃ bhave na tiṭṭhe): puññ’ âbhisankhāra-sahagata-viññāṇaṃ, apuññ’…, ānejj’… ■ Under the same heading at Nd ii.569b we find abhisankhāra v with ref. to the sotāpatti-stage, i.e. the beginning of salvation, where it is said that by the gradual disappearance of abhis ■ v. there are still 7 existences left before nāma-rūpa (individuality) entirely disappears The climax of this development is “anupādi-sesa nibbāna-dhatu,” or the nibbāna stage without a remainder (parinibbāna), which is characterized not by an abhisankhāra-v., but by the carimaka-v., or the final vital spark, which is now going to be extinct This passage is referred to at Dhs-a 357, where the first half is quoted literally ■ (e) As kāya i.e. group, v. is considered psycho-physically, as a factor in senseperception (D iii.243, MN iii.281, etc.), namely, the contact between sense-organ and object (medium, μεταζύ was not taken into account) produces v. of sight, hearing etc. The three factors constitute the v ■ kāya of the given sense. And the v. is thus bound to bodily process as a catseye is threaded on a string (D ii.76). Cp. above c.
Other applications of the term v., both Canonical and mediaeval: on details as to attributes and functions, see Vin i.13 (as one of the khandhas in its quality of anattā cp. SN iv.166 sq.); DN iii.223 (as khandha); SN ii.101 sq (˚assa avakkanti); iii.53 sq. (˚assa gati, āgati, cuti etc.); AN i.223 sq.; AN iii.40; Snp 734 (yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti, sabbaṃ viññāṇa-paccayā), 1037 (nāma-rūpa destroyed in consequence of v. destruction), 1073 (cavetha v. [so read for bhavetha]; v. at this passage expld as “punappaṭisandhi-v.” at Nd ii.569c); 1110 (uparujjhati); Pts i.53 sq., 153 sq.; ii.102; Vb 9 sq. 53 sq., 86; Ne 15 (nāma-rūpa v ■ sampayutta), 16 (v ■ hetuka n ■ r.), 17 (nirodha), 28, 79, 116 (as khandha) Vism 529 (as simple, twofold, fourfold etc.), 545 = Vb-a 150 sq. (in detail as product of sankhāras & in 32 groups); Vb-a 172 (twofold: vipāka & avipāka) Dhp-a iv.100.
-ānañc’āyatana infinitude (-sphere) of life-force or mind-matter DN i.35, DN i.184, DN i.223; DN iii.224, DN iii.262, DN iii.265; Ne 26 Ne 39. It is the second of the Āruppa-jhānas; see jhāna-āhāra consciousness (i.e. vital principle) sustenance see above d and cp. Dhs 70, Dhs 126; Ne 114 sq.; Vism 341 -kāya: see above e. -khandha life-force as one of the aggregates of physical life DN iii.233; Tikp 61; Dhs-a 141 Vb-a 21, Vb-a 42. -ṭṭhiti viññāṇa-duration, phase of mental life. The emphasis is on duration or continuation rather than place, which would be ṭṭhāna. There are (α) 4 v ■ durations with regard to their “storing (abhisankhāra) quality, viz. combinations of v. (as the governing, mind-principle) with each of the 4 other khandhas or aggregates of material life (rūpa vedanā, saññā, sankhārā), v. animating or bringing them to consciousness in any kind of life-appearance and (β) 7 v ■ durations with regard to their “regenerating” (new-life combn or rebirth = paṭisandhi) quality viz. the 4 planes of var. beings (from men to devas) followed by the 3 super-dimensional stages (the ānañc’ āyatanas) of ākāsa-infinitude, viññāṇa-infin. ākiñ-cañña-infin ■ Passages in the Canon: (;α) as 4: D 1 i.262 sq.; SN iii.53 sq. (“standing for consciousness” & “platform,” ˚patiṭṭhā SN iii.54; K.S. iii.45) (β) the 7: DN ii.68 sq.; DN iii.253 (trsln “station of consciousness”), 282; = AN iv.39. Both the 4 and the 7 at Nd ii.570. Cp. under a slightly diff. view SN ii.65 (yaṃ ceteti… ārammaṇaṃ… hoti viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā)-See also Pts i.22, Pts i.122; Snp 1114; Ne 31, Ne 83 sq. Vism 552; Vb-a 169. -dhātu mind-element, which is the 6th dhātu after the 4 great elements (the mahābhūtāni) and ākāsa-dhātu as fifth (this expld as “asamphuṭṭha-dhātu” at Vb-a 55, whereas v ■ dhātu as “vijānana-dhātu”) DN iii.247; Vb 85, Vb 87; Vb-a 55 cp. AN i.176; MN iii.31, MN iii.62, MN iii.240; SN ii.248. -vīthi the road of mind (fig.), a mediaeval t. t. for process in sense perception Kp-a 102.
fr. vi + jñā; cp. Vedic vijñāna cognition
(adj.) having life or consciousness or sense, endowed with vitality. Found in the four Nikāyas only in one standard passage in the same connection, viz. sa-viññāṇaka kāya “the body with its viññāṇa” (i.e. life-force or mind): SN ii.253; SN iii.80, SN iii.169 SN v.311; AN i.132; AN iv.53. Thus (sa˚) should be read at all passages ■ Later in contrast pair sa˚; and a˚; i.e. with life & without, alive & lifeless, animate & inanimate, e.g. Ja i.466, Ja i.468; Dhp-a i.6; Pv-a 130.
viññāṇa + ka
(nt.) the fact of being endowed with viññāṇa SN iii.87; Pv-a 63.
abstr. formation fr. viññāṇa
apperceived, (re)cognized, understood, cogitated (Cpd. 37), learned Snp 323 (˚dhamma, one who has recognized or understood the Dhamma); Vv 4418 (= viññāta-sāsana-dhamma Vv-a 192); Ja i.2 Sdhp 429 ■ Often in sequence diṭṭha suta muta viññāta to denote the whole range of the cognitional & apperceptional faculties (see; muta ), e.g. DN iii.232; Snp 1086, Snp 1122.
pp. of vijānāti
a perceiver, one who apperceives or takes to heart, a learner DN i.56; AN iii.169 AN iv.196 (sotar, uggahetar, v.).
n. ag. of viññāta
(adj.) clever in instruction, able to instruct SN v.162 = Mil 373; Iti 107.
fn. viññāpeti
(adj.) instructing, informing AN ii.51, AN ii.97 ■ f. viññāpanī instructive, making clear (of speech) DN i.114 (atthassa viññāpaniyā = viññāpanasamatthāya DN-a i.282); AN iii.114; Dhp 408 (= attha Dhp-a iv.182); Snp 632.
fr. viññāpeti
(adj.) accessible to instruction; only in cpds du˚ & su˚; indocile docile SN i.138; DN ii.38; Nd ii.2353; Pts i.121; Pts ii.195 Vb 341.
grd. of viññāpeti, = *viññāpya
instructed, informed; su˚; well taught Mil 101.
pp. of viññāpeti
an instructor, teacher DN i.56; AN iv.196.
n. ag. of viññāpita
to address, inform, teach, instruct; to give to understand; to appeal to, to beg Vin i.54; Vin iv.264; DN i.251; Ja iii.72 (to intimate); Mil 229; Vv-a 72, Vv-a 181 ■ pp. viññāpita. Vinnaya & vinnayati;
Caus. II. of vijānāti
see vijānāti. Vinnuta & vinnuta
(f.) discretion; in phrase viññutaṃ pāpuṇāti to reach the years of discretion or puberty Vin i.269; Vin ii.278; Ja i.231; Ja iii.437: Pv-a 3.
fr. viññu
unattacked, not deficient, unmolested, undisturbed: is Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading for viññū-pasattha (“extolled by the wise”) at SN ii.70 (reads ṭṭh); v.343; DN ii.80; DN iii.245: all identical passages. We consider Kern’s change unnecessary: anupasaṭṭha would have been the most natural expression if it had been meant in the sense suggested by Kern.
vi + ni + upassaṭṭha, pp. of sṛj (?)
(adj.) intelligent, learned, wise DN i.163; SN i.9; SN iii.134; SN iv.41 sq., 93, 339; AN ii.228 AN v.15; Iti 98; Snp 39, Snp 294, Snp 313, Snp 396, Snp 403; Pts ii.19, Pts ii.21; Mil 21; DN-a i.18; Vv-a 87; Pv-a 130, Pv-a 226; Sdhp 45. a˚; Dhp-a iii.395.
cp. Sk. vijña
(adj.) to be recognized or apperceived (of the sense objects: cakkhu-viññeyya rūpa, etc.) DN i.245; MN iii.291; AN iii.377; AN iv.404 sq., 415 430; Nd i.24 ■ su˚; easily understood Vv-a 258.
grd. of vijānāti
the fork of a tree, a branch Ja i.169, Ja i.215, Ja i.222; Ja iii.28; Ja vi.177 (nigrodha˚).
cp. Epic Sk. viṭapa
a tree, lit. “having branches” Ja vi.178.
viṭapa + in
(f.) the fork of a tree MN i.306; Ja ii.107; Ja iii.203.
= Sk. viṭapin
reflection, thought, thinking; “initial application” (Cpd. 282) ■ Defd as “vitakkanaṃ vitakko, ūhanan ti vuttaṃ hoti” at Vism 142 (with simile on p. 143, comparing vitakka with vicāra kumbhakārassa daṇḍa-ppahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa uppīḷana-hattho viya vitakko (like the hand holding the wheel tight), ito c’ ito sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro: giving vitakka the characteristic of fixity & steadiness,; vicāra that of movement display) ■ DN ii.277 (“pre-occupation” trsln: see note Dial. ii.311); iii.104, 222, 287 (eight Mahāpurisa˚) MN i.114 (dvidhā-kato v.), 377; SN i.39, SN i.126, SN i.186, SN i.203 SN ii.153; SN iv.69, SN iv.216; AN ii.36; AN iii.87 (dhamma˚); iv.229 (Mahāpurisa˚), 353 (˚upaccheda); Snp 7, Snp 270 sq., 970 1109; Ja i.407 (Buddha˚, Sangha˚, Nibbāna˚); Nd i.386 Nd i.493, Nd i.501 (nine); Nd ii.s. v. takka; Pts i.36, Pts i.136, Pts i.178; Pv iii.58; Pp 59, Pp 68; Vb 86, Vb 104 (rūpa˚, sadda˚ etc.) 228 (sa˚), 362 (akusala˚); Dhs 7, Dhs 160, Dhs 1268; Tikp 61 333, 353; Vism 291 (˚upaccheda); Mil 82, Mil 309; Dhs-a 142; Dhp-a iv.68; Vb-a 490; Pv-a 226, Pv-a 230 ■ kāma˚ vihiṃsā˚, vyāpāda˚; (sensual, malign, cruel thought) DN iii.226; SN ii.151 sq.; SN iii.93; AN i.148, AN i.274 sq.; AN ii.16, AN ii.117 AN ii.252; AN iii.390, AN iii.428. Opp. nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚ avihiṃsā˚; AN i.275; AN ii.76; AN iii.429 ■ vitakka is often combd with vicāra or “initial & sustained application Mrs. Rh. D.; Cpd. 282; “reflection & investigation Rh. D.; to denote the whole of the mental process of thinking (viz. fixing one’s attention and reasoning out or as Cpd. 17 expls it “ vitakka is the directing of concomitant properties towards the object; vicāra is the continued exercise of the mind on that object.” See also above defn at Vism 142). Both are properties of the first jhāna (called sa-vitakka sa-vicāra) but are discarded in the second jhāna (called a˚). See e.g. DN i.37; SN iv.360 sq.; AN iv.300; Vin iii.4; Vism 85 and formula of jhāna. The same of pīti & samādhi at Vb 228, of; paññā at Vb 323. The same combn (vitakka + vicāra) at foll. passages: DN iii.219 (of samādhi which is either sa˚, or a˚, or avitakka vicāra-matta) SN iv.193; SN v.111; AN iv.409 sq., 450; Ne 16; Mil 60 Mil 62; Vism 453. Cp. rūpa- (sadda-etc.) vitakka + rūpa (sadda-etc.) vicāra AN iv.147; AN v.360; Vb 103 ■ On term (also with vicāra ) see further: Cpd. 40, 56, 98 238 sq., 282 (on difference between v. & manasikāra) Expos. i.188n; Kvu trsln 2381 ■ Cp. pa˚, pari˚.
Note. Looking at the combn vitakka + vicāra in earlier and later works one comes to the conclusion that they were once used to denote one & the same thing: just thought, thinking, only in an emphatic way (as they are also semantically synonymous), and that one has to take them as; one expression, like jānāti passati, without being able to state their difference. With the advance in the Sangha of intensive study of terminology they became distinguished mutually. Vitakka became the inception of mind, or attending, and was no longer applied, as in the Suttas, to thinking in general. The explns of Commentators are mostly of an edifying nature and based more on popular etymology than on natural psychological grounds.
vi + takka
(nt.) = vitakka Vism 142.
reflected, reasoned, argued DN-a i.121. Cp. pari˚.
pp. of vitakketi
to reflect, reason, consider SN i.197, SN i.202; SN iv.169; SN v.156; AN ii.36; Mil 311 ■ pp vitakkita.
Denom. fr. vitakka
at SN ii.99 = SN iv.188 read vītaccika (q.v.).
(f.) scabies Nd ii.3041 (as roga).
cp. *Sk. (medical) vicarcikā
planed, smoothed; su˚; well carded (of a cīvara) Vin iii.259.
pp. of vitaccheti
1. tear, pluck, pick to pieces; in simile MN i.364 (+ virājeti) = SN ii.255 (reads vibhajeti for virājeti) = Vin iii.105 (id.).
2. to smoothe: see pp vitacchita.
vi + taccheti
(f.) tricky disputation, frivolous or captious discussion; in cpds. vitaṇḍa˚: ˚vāda sophistry Snp-a 447; DN-a i.247; ˚vādin a sophist, arguer Dhs-a 3 (so read for vidaḍḍha); Vb-a 9, Vb-a 51, Vb-a 319, Vb-a 459. See lokāyata.
cp. Epic Sk. vitaṇḍā, e.g. Mbh 2, 1310; 7, 3022
stretched, extended, diffused SN i.207; Snp 272, Snp 669 (v.l. vitthata); Ja i.356 (tanta where the strings were stretched); Mil 102, Mil 307; Mvu 17, Mvu 31 (vallīhi v.)-nt. vitata a drum (with leather on both sides) Vv-a 37.
pp. of vitanoti
(adj.) untrue; nt. untruth DN ii.73 (na hi Tathāgatā vitathaṃ bhaṇanti); Snp 9 sq.; Vv 5315 (= atatha, musā ti attho Vv-a 240); Ja v.112; Ja vi.207; Pts 104; DN-a i.62 ■ avitatha true SN ii.26; SN v.430; Mil 184; Sdhp 530; DN-a i.65.
vi + tatha; cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vitatha
(*vitanati) to stretch out, spread out; poet. ger. vitanitvāna Ja vi.453 ■ Pass. vitaniyyati ibid ■ pp. vitata. Cp. vitāna.
vi + tanoti
(nt.) overcoming, getting through MN i.147 (kankhā˚); Mil 233 (id.), 351; Sdhp 569.
fr. vitarati
1. to go through, come through, overcome Snp 495, Snp 779 (ger. ˚eyya, taken as Pot. at Nd i.57 oghaṃ samatikkameyya), 941, 1052; Pv iii.24 (vitaritvā = vitiṇṇo hutvā Pv-a 181, q.v. for detail).
2. to perform Ja ii.14 (bubhukkhito no vitarāsi bhottuṃ; v.l. visahāmi) ■ pp. vitiṇṇa.
vi + tarati
(m. & nt.) spread-out, canopy, awning Vin iv.279; Ja i.40, Ja i.62, Ja i.83; Dhp-a ii.42; Snp-a 447; Vv-a 32 Vv-a 173; Pv-a 154. See also cela˚.
fr. vi + ; tan
1. overcome or having overcome, gone through, conquered Dhp 141 (˚kankha); Snp 514 (id.) 746; Pv-a 181.
2. given up, rejected, abandoned Dhp 176 (˚paraloka); Ja iv.447 (= pariccatta C.).
pp. of vitarati
to strike, prick, nudge, knock, push, attack DN i.105; SN iv.225; AN iii.366; Snp 675; Ud 67; Ja ii.163, Ja ii.185 ■ Pass. vitujjati Vism 505; Vb-a 104 Vb-a 108 ■ pp. vitunna.
vi + tudati
struck, pricked, pushed Ja iii.380.
pp. of vitudati
at Ja v.47 is not clear. The v.l. is vitariyati; the C. expls by tuleti tīreti, i.e. contemplates, examines Kern, Toev. s. v. discusses it in detail & proposes writing; vituriyata (3rd sg. praet. med.), & expl;s at “get over Dutoit trsls “überstieg.”
cp. Vedic tūryati overcome, fr. tur or tvar = P. tarati2
property, wealth, possessions, luxuries SN i.42; Snp 181 sq., 302; Ja v.350, Ja v.445; Ja vi.308; Pv ii.81 (= vittiyā upakaraṇa-bhūtaṃ vittaṃ Pv-a 106) ■ Often in phrase ˚ūpakaraṇa possessions & means, i.e. wealth; e.g. DN i.134; SN i.71; SN iv.324; Pp 52; Dhp i.295; Pv-a 3 Pv-a 71. Vittaṃ is probably the right reading SN i.126 (15) for cittaṃ. Cf. p. 123 (3); K.S. i.153, n. 3.
orig. pp. of vindati = Av. vista, Gr. αἴστος, Lat. vīsus; lit. one who has found, acquired or recognized but already in Vedic meaning (as nt.) “acquired possessions”
(adj.) gladdened, joyful, happy Ja iii.413 (= tuṭṭha); iv.103; Vv 414 (= tuṭṭha C.); 4414 (id.), 495 (id.).
identical with vitta1
see vi˚.
pp. of vic to sift, cp. Sk. vikta
(adj.) possessing riches, becoming rich by (-˚) Ja i.339 (lañca˚); iv.267 (miga˚), vi.256 (jūta˚).
fr. vitta1
(f.) in suta˚; “the fact of getting rich through learning” as an expln of the name Sutasoma Ja v.457 (for auspiciousness). Dutoit trsls quite differently: “weil er am Keltern des Somatrankes seine Freude hatte,” hardly correct.
vittaka + tā
(f.) prosperity, happiness, joy, felicity AN iii.78; Ja iv.103; Ja vi.117; Kv 484; Thag 609; Dhs 9 (cp. Dhs-a 143); Pv-a 106.
cp. Sk. vitti, fr. vid
(nt.) a bowl, in surā˚; for drinking spirits Ja v.427; Dhp-a iii.66.
vi + sthā ?
(nt.) a small bowl, as receptacle (āvesana˚) for needles, scissors & thimbles Vin ii.117.
fr. vittha
1. extended, spread out, wide MN i.178; Vin i.297; Ja v.319; Mil 311; Snp-a 214; Pv-a 68 (doubtful!).
2. wide, spacious (of a robe Vin iii.259.
3. flat Snp-a 301.
pp. of vi + stṛ;
perplexed, confused, hesitating Mil 36 (bhīta + ). Ed Müller, P.Gr. 102 considers it as pp. of vi + tras to tremble together with vitthāyati & vitthāyi.;
pp. of vitthāyati (?). A difficult form!
(nt.) making firm, strengthening, supporting Vism 351 (cp. Dhs-a 335).
fr. vi + thambhati
to make firm, strengthen Dhs-a 335.
vi + thambheti
to be embarrassed or confused (lit. to become quite stiff), to be at a loss, to hesitate Vin i.94 = Vin ii.272; aor. vitthāsi (vitthāyi? ibid. [the latter taken as aor. of tras by Geiger, P.Gr. § 166] ■ pp. vitthata2 & vitthāyita;.
vi + styā: see under thīna
(nt.) perplexity, hesitation DN i.249.
abstr. fr. vitthāyita, pp. of vitthāyati
1. expansion, breadth; instr. vitthārena in breadth Mil 17; same abl. vitthārato Ja i.49–2. extension, detail; often in C. style, introducing detailed explanation of the subject in question, either with simple statement “ vitthāro ” (i.e. here the foll detail; opp. saṅkhepa ), e.g. DN-a i.65, DN-a i.229; Snp-a 325 [cp. same in BSk. “vistaraḥ,” e.g. Divy 428], or with cpds. ˚kathā Snp-a 464; Pv-a 19; ˚desanā Snp-a 163 ˚vacana Snp-a 416. Thus in general often in instr. or abl. as adv. “in detail,” in extenso (opp. sankhittena in short): vitthārena DN iii.241; SN iv.93; AN ii.77, AN ii.177 AN ii.189; AN iii.177; Pp 41; Pv-a 53, Pv-a 113; vitthārato Vism 351, Vism 479; Pv-a 71, Pv-a 77, Pv-a 81. Cp. similarly BSk. vistarena kāryaṃ Divy 377.
fr, vi + stṛ;
(f.) explicitness, detail Ne 2. As vitthāraṇā at Ne 9.
fr. vitthāra
(adj.) 1. wide-spread Mil 272.
2. widely famed, renowned Snp 693; Ja iv.262. See also bahujañña.
vitthāra + ika
detailed, told in full Vism 351; Mvu 1, Mvu 2 (ati˚ with too much detail; opp. sankhitta).
pp. of vitthāreti
to expand, to go into detail Ne 9.
Denom. fr. vitthāra
1. to spread out AN iii.187.
2. to expand, detail give in full Vism 351; Snp-a 94, Snp-a 117, Snp-a 127 Snp-a 274 and passim ■ pp. vitthārita; f.pp. vithāretabba.
fr. vitthāra
“spread out,” wide, large, extensive, roomy Ja ii.159 (so read for vittiṇṇa); Mil 102, Mil 283 Mil 311, Mil 382; Dhs-a 307; Snp-a 76; Vv-a 88; Sdhp 391, Sdhp 617 Cp. pari˚.
vi + thiṇṇa
(ad.) showing; danta˚; showing one’s teeth (referring to laughter) AN i.261; Ja iii.222.
fr. vidaṃseti
to make appear, to show AN i.261; Thig 74; Ja v.196; Mil 39. Cp. pa˚.
vi + daṃseti = dasseti
in redupl ■ iter. cpd. daḍḍhavidaḍḍha-gatta “with limbs all on fire” Mil 303.
vi + daḍḍha
see vindati.
(f.) a span (of 12 angulas or finger-breadths) Vin iii.149 (dīghaso dvādasa vidatthiyo sugata-vidatthiyā); iv.279; Ja i.337; Ja iii.318; Mil 85; Vism 65, Vism 124, Vism 171, Vism 175, Vism 408; Dhp-a iii.172; Dhp-a iv.220; Vb-a 343 (dvādas’ angulāni vidatthi; dve vidatthiyo ratanaṃ, etc.).
cp. Vedic vitasti; see Geiger, P.Gr. 383
to arrange, appoint, assign; to provide; to practise ■ Pres. vidahati: see saṃ˚ vidadhāti Ja vi.537; vidheti Ja v.107. Pot. vidahe Snp 927 (= vidaheyya Nd i.382); aor. vidahi Ja v.347. Perf. 3rd pl. vidadhu [Sk. vidadhuḥ] Ja vi.284. inf. vidhātuṃ Vin i.303 (bhesajjaṃ); ger. vidhāya Mvu 26, Mvu 12 (ārakkhaṃ, posting a guard) ■ grd vidheyya in meaning “obedient,” tractable Ja vi.291-pp. vihita.
vi + dahati; dhā
(nt.) splitting, rending Dhtp 247 (in expln of dar ), 381 (do of bhid ).
fr. vidāreti
split, rent Sdhp 381.
pp. of vidāreti
to split, rend Ja i.340 ■ pp. vidārita.
vi + dāreti: see under darī
(nt.) breaking open, bursting, splitting Mil 1.
fr. vidāleti
split, broken, burst Ja i.493; Pv-a 220.
pp. of vidāleti
to break open, split, burst Thag 184; Pv-a 135, Pv-a 185 ■ pp. vidālita.
vi + dāleti; see dalati
known, found (out) DN iii.100; SN v.180; Snp 436, Snp 1052; Mvu 17, Mvu 4; DN-a i.135 (a˚).
pp. of vindati
(nt.) the fact of having found or known, experience Ja ii.53.
abstr. fr. vidita
(f.) an intermediate point of the compass SN i.224; SN iii.239; Snp 1122; Ja i.20, Ja i.101; Ja vi.6, Ja vi.531.
vi + disā
(adj.-n.) hard to walk; troublesome, difficult, painful ■ (m.) difficult passage; difficulty distress DN iii.27; AN iii.128; Ja iii.269; Ja iv.271.
vi + dugga
(adj.) wise, clever Ja v.399 (= paṇḍita C.). Cp. vidhura 2.
fr. vid, cp. Sk. vidura
(adj.) clever, wise, knowing, skilled in (-˚) SN i.62 (loka˚); v.197; Vin ii.241 (pl. paracittaviduno); Snp 677 (vidūhi), 996; Ja v.222 (dhamma˚) Vv 3011 (= sappañña Vv-a 127); Mil 276; Mvu 15, Mvu 51 (ṭhān’ âṭhāṇa˚ knowing right & wrong sites) ■ In Pass sense in; dubbidū hard to know Ja v.446 ■ For vidū (vidu) “they knew” see vindati.
Vedic vidu
at Ud 71 (vitakkā vidūpitā) is to be read as vidhūpita.
(adj.) far, remote, distant AN ii.50 (su˚). Mostly neg. a˚; not far, i.e. near Snp 147; Pv-a 14, Pv-a 31 Pv-a 78, Pv-a 81.
vi + dūra
(adj.) corrupted, depraved Pv-a 178 (˚citta).
vi + dūsita
foreign country Mil 326; Vv-a 338.
vi + desa; cp. disā at Vin i.50
(f.) absence of dejection Vism 504 = Vb-a 105.
vi + domanassa
(adj.) skilled, wise MN i.65 (gen. sg. & nom. pl viddasuno), 310 (id.). Usually in neg. form; aviddasu foolish Vin ii.296 = AN ii.56 (pl. aviddasū); SN v.1; Thig 164 (pl. aviddasū); Snp 762 (= bāla C.); Dhp 268 = Nd ii.514 (= aviññū Dhp-a iii.395); Pv-a 18.
another form of vidvā = Sk. vidvān: see under vindati
enmity, hatred Ja iii.353; Thag-a 268.
fr. vi + disa
(f.) enmity Thig 446; Ja iii.353.
abstr. formation fr. viddesa, cp. disatā2
(adj.-n.) hating; an enemy Thag 547.
vi + desin; see dessin
to hate Thig 418 ■ grd. viddesanīya to be hated, hateful Sdhp 82.
vi + dessati
pierced, perforated; hit, struck, hurt Snp 331; Nd i.414 (sallena); Mil 251 (eaten through by worms); Sdhp 201 (kaṇṭakena).
pp. of vijjhati
(adj.) clear; only in phrase viddha vigata-valāhaka deva a clear sky without a cloud Vin i.3; MN i.317 = SN i.65 = SN iii.156 = SN v.44 = Iti 20.
cp. *Sk. vīdhra clear sky
demolition, destruction Ja iv.58 (˚kārin).
fr. vidhaṃsati
to fall down, to be shattered, to be ruined Mil 237; Pv-a 125 (Pot. ˚eyya) ■ Caus viddhaṃseti to shatter, to destroy SN iii.190 (both trs. intrs., the latter for ˚ati); Ja ii.298; Ja iii.431; Ja v.100; DN-a i.265; Nd i.5 (vikirati vidhameti viddhaṃseti: see also under vikirati) ■ pp. viddhasta & viddhaṃsita;. Pass. viddhaṃsīyati to drop or to be destroyed, to come to ruin DN-a i.18 = Dhs-a 19 (suttena sangahitāni pupphāni na vikirīyanti na v.).
vi + dhaṃsati
(adj.-n..) shattering, destruction (trs. & intrs.) undoing, making disappear; adj. destroying SN iv.83; Mil 351 (kosajja˚); Ja i.322; Ja v.267 (adj.); Vism 85 (vikkhepa + ); Vv-a 58, Vv-a 161 (adj.) ■ Often in phrase (denoting complete destruction): anicc-ucchādana-parimaddana-bhedana-viddhaṃsana-dhamma, e.g. DN i.76; MN i.500; AN iv.386; Ja i.146 [cp. Divy 180: śatanapatana-vikiraṇa-vidhvaṃsana-dharmatā; see also under vikiraṇa].
fr. viddhaṃseti; cp. BSk. vidhvaṃsana Divy 180
(adj.) destroying Dhs-a 165.
fr. viddhaṃsana
(f.) quality of destruction, ability to destroy Vism 8.
abstr. formation fr. viddhaṃsana
shattered, destroyed Dhp-a iii.129.
pp. of viddhaṃseti
fallen to pieces, broken, destroyed MN i.227; AN ii.50; Snp 542; Ja i.203; Ja v.69, Ja v.401; Vv 6314 (= vinaṭṭha Vv-a 265).
pp. of viddhaṃsati
poet. ger. of vijjhati Ja vi.77.
see under vindati.
(adj. (-˚) of a kind, consisting of,-fold, e.g. aneka˚; manifold DN-a i.103; tathā˚; of such-kind such-like Snp 772; ti˚; threefold DN i.134; Snp 509; nānā˚ various Pv-a 53, Pv-a 96, Pv-a 113; bahu˚; manifold Thag-a 197; etc.
= vidhā
form, kind Thag 428 (māna˚) ■ There are several other meanings of vidha, which are however, uncertain & rest on doubtful readings. Thus it occurs at Vin ii.136 in meaning of “buckle” (v.l. pīṭha; C. silent); at Vin iv.168 in meaning “little box (?); at DN-a i.269 as “carrying pole” (= kāca2, but text DN i.101 has “vividha”).
= vidha1 as noun
(adj.) one who throws away or does away with; destroying, clearing away Mil 344 (kilesa-mala-duggandha˚).
fr. vidhamati
& ˚eti (trs.) to destroy, ruin; do away with, scatter ■ (intrs.) to drop off, fall away, to be scattered, to roll or whirl about. Both vidhamati & ˚eti; are used indiscriminately although the Caus. ˚eti occurs mostly in meaning of “destroy.” (1) vidhamati: SN iii.190; Ja i.284 (in play of words with dhamati to blow; aor. vidhami = viddhaṃsesi C.); vi.490 (vidhamaṃ te raṭṭhaṃ, is ruined) Mil 91, Mil 226 (Mārasenaṃ), 237, 337 (intrs., with vikirati & viddhaṃsati) ■ (2); vidhameti: Nd i.5; Ja iii.261 (poet. vidhamemasi [write ˚se!] = vidhamema, nāsema C.); v.309; Mil 39; Pv-a 168 ■ pp. vidhamita.
vi + dhmā in particular meaning of blowing i.e. driving asunder, cp. dhamati
(nt.) destroying, scattering, dispersing Mil 244 (Maccu-sena˚).
fr. vidhamati
destroyed Nd ii.576a.
pp. of vidhamati
(f.) a widow SN i.170; AN iii.128; Ja vi.33; Mil 288; Vism 17; Pv-a 65, Pv-a 161 Vb-a 339.
Vedic vidhavā widow, vidhu lonely, vidhura separaṭed, Av. vidavā = Goth. widuwō = Ohg. wituwa (Ger. Witwe = E. widow); Gr. ἠίχεος unmarried; Lat vidua widow, etc., in all Idg. languages
(f.) 1. mode, manner, sort, kind; proportion, form, variety DN iii.103 (ādesana˚); Thig 395 (cakkhu˚ “shape of an eye” trsln); Vb-a 496 (in expln of kathaṃ-vidha: “ākāra-saṇṭhānaṃ vidhā nāma”) DN-a i.222 (iddhi˚), 294 (in expln of tividha-yañña “ettha vidhā vuccati ṭhapanā” i.e. performance arrangement), 299 (similarly tisso vidhā = tīṇi ṭhapanāni of yañña) ■ Used as (abl.) adv. vidhā in meaning “variously” at Pv ii.952 (C. expln = vidhātabba, not quite correctly; Pv-a 135). Perhaps the phrase vidhāsamatikkanta is to be explained in this way, viz “excelling in a variety of ways, higher than a variety (of things)” or perhaps better: “going beyond all distinctions” (i.e. of personality); free from prejudice [i.e. No. 2] SN ii.253; SN iii.80, SN iii.136, SN iii.170; AN iv.53. 2. (ethically) in special sense: a distinctive feature (of a person as diff. from others), a “mode” of pride or delusion, a “form” of conceit. As such specified as three kinds of conceit (tisso vidhā ), viz. “seyyo ‘ham asmi,” “sadiso ‘ham asmi,” & “hīno ‘ham asmi (i.e. I am better than somebody else, equal to, & worse than somebody else). See e.g. DN iii.216; SN i.12; SN iii.48 SN iii.80, SN iii.127; SN v.56, SN v.98; Nd i.195; Vb 367; Snp 842; Vb-a 496 (māno va vidhā nāma) ■ The adj. form is vidha: see sep.
cp. Sk. vidhā
provider, disposer Ja v.221 (dhātā vidhātā, as of Viśvakarman: cp. Macdonell Vedic Mythology p. 118).
n. ag. of vidahati
(nt.) 1. arrangement, get up, performance, process Ja iii.178 (attano vidhānena “in his robes of office”); Vism 66 sq.; Dhs-a 168 = Vism 122 (bhāvanā˚); Vb-a 69, Vb-a 71 (manasikāra˚) Thag-a 273 (id.).
2. ceremony, rite Ja vi.202 (yañña˚) Mil 3.
3. assignment, disposition, provision Ja ii.208 (vidhi-vidhāna-ññū; C. expld v. as “koṭṭhāso vā saṃvidahanaṃ vā”); Pv-a 30.
4. succession (as much as “supplement”) Kp-a 216; Snp-a 23 (note 2) ■ Cp saṃvidahana & saṃvidhāna.;
fr. vi + dhā; Vedic vidhāna
providing Pv-a 60.
fr. vi + dhā
to run about, roam, cover space (acc.), stray SN i.37; Snp 411, Snp 939; Nd i.414; DN-a i.39.
vi + dhāvati
(f.) 1. form, way; rule, direction, disposition, method, motto Vism 278 (manasikāra˚, eightfold); Pv-a 78 (dāna˚ = dāna), 126; Vv-a 82 ■ instr. vidhinā in due form Mvu 14, Mvu 52; Pv-a 130 Sdhp 336.
2. luck, destiny Ja ii.243 (˚rahita unlucky).
fr. vi + dhā, cp. Ved. vidhi
a wreath Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180.
etym.?
to shake SN i.197; Mil 399; Vism 71.
2. to remove, to skin (an animal) Vin i.193.
vi + dhunāti
(adj.) 1. destitute, lonely; miserable, wretched Ja v.399 (so read for vidura; according to Kern, Toev. s. v., but doubtful). 2. [vi + dhura] “burdenless,” unequalled Snp 996 (= vigata-dhura, appaṭima Snp-a 583); AN i.116 (here in meaning “clever,” perhaps = vidura; spelt vidhūra) Cp. Np. Vidhura Kp-a 128; Snp-a 201 (as Vidhūra at Ja iv.361).
Vedic vidhura: see vidhavā
(adj.-n..) fanning, a fan Vin ii.130; Vin iv.263; AN ii.130; Nd ii.562; Vv 3342 (= caturassa vījani) Vv-a 147; Vb-a 71.
fr. vidhūpeti
scattered, destroyed Snp 472 (= daḍḍha Snp-a 409); Ud 71 (so read for vidūpita).
pp. of vidhūpeti
(˚dhūpayati) 1. to fumigate, perfume, diffuse Mil 252.
2. to scatter, destroy Vin i.2 (vidhūpayaṃ Māra-senaṃ); SN i.14; SN iii.90 = AN v.325; SN iv.210; Pts ii.167 ■ pp. vidhūpita.
vi + dhūpayati
(& vidhuma) (adj.) “without smoke,” i.e. passionless, quiet, emancipated SN i.141 (K.S.: “no fume of vice is his”); Snp 460 (= kodhadhūma-vigamena v. Snp-a 405), 1048 (cp. Nd ii.576 with long exegesis); Pv iv.134 (= vigata-micchā-vitakkadhūma Pv-a 230).
vi + dhūma
destroyed Vv-a 265; Pv-a 55.
pp. of vinassati
bent, bending Pv-a 154 (˚sākhā).
pp. of vi + nam
to cry or shout out, to scold Ja iii.147 (kāmaṃ vinadantu let them shout!). Cp. BSk. vinādita “reviled” Divy 540.
vi + nadati
covered, bound, intertwined Vin i.194 (camma˚, onaddha + ); Ja v.416; Ja vi.589 (kañcanalatā˚ bheri); Vism 1 (= jaṭita saṃsibbita).
pp. of vinandhati
to close, encircle, cover Mvu 19, Mvu 48; Vism 253 (ppr. vinandhamāna: so read for vinaddh˚) ■ pp. vinaddha.
vi + nandhati
(nt.) tying, binding Vin ii.116 (˚rajju rope for binding).
fr. vi + nandhati
1. driving out, abolishing destruction, removal Vin i.3 (asmi-mānassa), 235 iii.3 (akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ vinayāya dhammaṃ desemi); SN i.40; Snp 921; AN i.91 (kodha˚, upanāha˚) ii.34 (pipāsa˚); iv.15 (icchā˚); v.165 (id.); Snp-a 12; Pv-a 114 (atthassa mūlaṃ nikati˚). Often in phrase rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚; e.g. SN iv.7 sq.; SN v.137 sq., 241; AN iv.175; Ne 22.
2. rule (in logic), way of saying or judging, sense, terminology (cp. iminā nayena SN iv.95 (ariyassa vinaye vuccati loko); AN i.163 (ariyassa vinaye tevijjo one called a threefold wise in the nomenclature of the Buddhist); ii.166 (ariyassa v.); Snp-a 403
3. norm of conduct, ethics, morality, good behaviour Snp 916, Snp 974; Ja iv.241 (= ācāra-vinaya C.); AN ii.112 AN iii.353 sq. (ariya-vinaye saddhā yassa patiṭṭhitā etc faith established in Buddhist ethics).
4. code of ethics, monastic discipline, rule, rules of morality or of canon law. In this sense applied to the large collection of rules which grew up in the monastic life and habits of the bhikkhus and which form the ecclesiastical introduction to the “Dhamma,” the “doctrine,” or theoretical, philosophical part of the Buddhist Canon The history & importance of the Vinaya Piṭaka will be dealt with under the title “Vinaya” in the Dictionary of Names. Only a few refs. must suffice here to give a general idea. See also under Dhamma C., and in detail Geiger, Dhamma pp. 55
58 ■ Often combd with dhamma: dhammato vinayato ca on the ground of Dh. and V. Vin i.337; cp. ii.247 ■ dhammo ca vinayo ca Vin i.356; Vin ii.285, Vin ii.302; or (as (Dvandva) dhammavinaya (i.e. the teaching of the Buddha in its completeness) DN i.229; Vin ii.237 sq.; MN i.284; MN ii.181 sq. AN i.283; AN iii.297, AN iii.327; SN i.9; SN iii.65; Ud 53; Vv-a 3 Often approaches the meaning of “Buddhist order, e.g. Vin i.69; DN i.176; MN i.68, MN i.459, MN i.480; MN iii.127; SN ii.120; AN i.185; AN ii.123; AN v.122 ■ See further Vin ii.96 (vinaye cheko hoti); AN ii.168 (ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ v. idaṃ Satthu-sāsanaṃ); Vism 522; Vb-a 273; Kp-a 106 Kp-a 151; Snp-a 4, Snp-a 195, Snp-a 310 ■ a-vinaya one who sins against the V. (like a-dhamma one who neglects the Dh. Vin ii.295 sq.; Vin iii.174; AN i.18; AN v.73 sq ■ The division of the books of the Vinaya is given at Dhs-a 18. Its character (as shown by its name) is given in the foll verse at Dhs-a 19: “(vividha-visesa-) nayattā vinayanato c’ eva kāya-vācānaṃ vinayy’ attha-vidūhi ayaṃ vinayo Vinayo ti akkhāto,” i.e. “Because it shows precepts & principles, and governs both deed and word, therefore men call this scripture V., for so is V interpreted” (Expos. i. 23).
-aṭṭhakathā the (old) commentary on the Vinaya Vism 72, Vism 272; Vb-a 334; Kp-a 97. -ānuggaha taking up (i.e. following the rules) of the Vinaya Vin iii.21; AN i.98, AN i.100; AN v.70. -kathā exposition of the Vinaya Vin iv.142. -dhara one who knows or masters the V by heart, an expert in the V. Vin i.169; Vin ii.299 (with dhamma-dhara & mātikā-dhara); AN i.25; AN ii.147 AN iii.78 sq., 179, 361; iv.140 sq.; v.10 sq.; Ja iii.486 Ja iv.219; Vism 41, Vism 72; Kp-a 151; Dhp-a ii.30 (with dhamma-kathika & dhuta-vāda) [cp. BSk. vinayadhara Divy 21].; -piṭaka the V. Piṭaka Kp-a1 2, 97; Vb-a 431 -vatthu chapter of the V. Vin ii.307. -vādin one who professes the V. (or “speaking in accordance with the rules of conduct”), aN V ■ follower DN i.4 (here expld by Bdhgh as “saṃvara-vinaya-pahāna-vinaya sannissitaṃ katvā vadatī ti” v. DN-a i.76, thus taking it as vinaya 3 = MN iii.49 = Pp 58 (trsln here: “speaking according to self-control”); DN iii.135, DN iii.175.
fr. vi + nī, cp. vineti
see vineti.
(nt.) 1. removing, removal Mil 318 (pipāsā˚); Pv-a 39 (soka˚).
2. instruction, discipline setting an example Ja v.457 (conversion); Mil 220.
fr. vi + nī
(adj.) lit. “having the reed or stem removed, rendered useless, destroyed MN i.227; AN ii.39; Snp 542 (= ucchinna Snp-a 435); Thag 216; Ja vi.60 (viddhasta + as at Snp 542).
vi + naḷa + kata, with naḷī for naḷa in combn with kṛ;
to be lost; to perish, to be destroyed SN iv.309; MN ii.108 (imper. vinassa “away with you”) Ja iii.351; Ja v.468; Pv iii.45; Vism 427 ■ pp. vinaṭṭha Caus. vināseti.
vi + nassati
(indecl.) without, used as prep. (or post-position) with (usually) instr., e.g. Vin ii.132 (vinā daṇḍena without a support); Pv-a 152 (purisehi vinā without men); or abl., e.g. Snp 589 (ñāti sanghā vinā hoti is separated from his relatives; cp BSk. vinābhavati Mvu i.243); or acc., e.g. Mvu 3, Mvu 10 (na sakkā hi taṃ vinā). In compn vinā-bhāva separation [cp. BSk. vinābhāva Mvu ii.141] Snp 588 Snp 805; Nd i.122; Ja iii.95; Ja iv.155; Ja v.180; Ja vi.482 (= viyoga C.).
Vedic vinā = vi-nā (i.e. “not so”), of pron. base Idg. *no (cp. nānā “so & so”), as in Sk. ca-na Lat. ego-ne, pō-ne behind, etc. See na1
to weave Ja ii.302; Dhp-a i.428 (tantaṃ); inf. vetuṃ Vin ii.150. Pass. viyyati. Cp. upavīyati ■ Caus. II. vināpeti to order to be woven Vin iii.259 (= vāyāpeti).
vi, by-form of vā to weave: see vāyati1
(m.) & Vināmana (nt.) bending Mil 352 (˚na); Vb-a 272 (kāya-vināmanā, bending the body for the purpose of getting up; in expln of vijambhikā); Dhtp 208.
fr. vināmeti
to bend, twist Mil 107, Mil 118.
vi + nāmeti; Caus. of namati
1. a leader, guide, instructor MN ii.94; Vv 167 (= veneyya-satte vineti Vv-a 83); Thag-a 69. 2. a judge Ja iii.336.
fr. vi + nī
destruction, ruin, loss DN i.34 (+ uccheda & vibhava), 55; Pv ii.710; Vism 427 (so read for vinasa); DN-a i.120; Pv-a 102 (dhana˚), 133. Vinasaka (ika)
vi + nāsa, of naś
(adj.) causing ruin; only neg. a˚; not causing destruction AN iii.38; AN iv.266, AN iv.270; Ja v.116.
fr. vināsa
(adj.), only neg. a˚; imperishable Dpvs iv.16.
fr. vināsa
1. to cause destruction, to destroy, ruin, spoil Thag 1027; Snp 106; Pv ii.78 DN-a i.211; Pv-a 3 (dhanaṃ), 116; Sdhp 59, Sdhp 314, Sdhp 546. 2. to drive out of the country, to expel, banish Ja iv.200.
Caus. of vinassati
to drop down Mil 349.
vi + nigaḷati
coming (out) from Ja vi.78; DN-a i.140; Dhp-a iv.46; Sdhp 23.
vi + niggata
checking, restraint Pts i.16; Pts ii.119.
vi + niggaha
to throw out, to emit Kp-a 95.
vi + niggilati
(adj.) afraid of defeat, anxious about the outcome (of a disputation), in phrase vinighāti-hoti (for ˚ī-hoti) Snp 826, cp. Nd i.164.
fr. vi + nighāta
1. discrimination, distinction, thought, (firm) opinion thorough knowledge of (-˚) AN iii.354 (pāpakamma˚) Snp 327 (dhamma˚), 838 (= dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhi-vinicchayā Nd i.186), 867 (˚ṃ kūrute; cp. Nd i.265); Ja iii.205 (attha˚) Pv-a 1, Pv-a 112, Pv-a 210 (kūṭa˚), 287.
2. decision; (as t. t. in law:) investigation, trial, judgment (given by the king or his ministers) DN ii.58 (with ref. to lābha, expld as deciding what to do with one’s gains) = iii.289 = AN iv.400 = Vb 390 (expld at Vb-a 512, where vinicchaya is said to be fourfold, viz. ñāṇa˚, taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚, vitakka˚); Ja ii.2.
3. court house, hall of judgment Ja i.176 Ja iii.105; Ja iv.122, Ja iv.370; Ja vi.333; Mil 332 (vinaya˚, i.e. having the Vinaya as the law court in the City of Righteousness).
4. (as t. t. in logic & psychology: (process of) judgment, detailed analysis, deliberation consideration, ascertainment Ja v.60 (˚ṃ vicāreti) Vb-a 46 sq. (according to attha, lakkhaṇa, etc.), 83 sq (id.); Kp-a 23, Kp-a 75.
-kathā analytical discussion, exegesis, interpretation Vism 16; Vb-a 291 (opp. pāḷi-vaṇṇanā). -ññū clever in deciding or giving judgment Ja iii.205; Ja v.367 (a˚) -ṭṭhāna place of judgment, law court Ja v.229; Dhp-a iii.141; Dhp-a iv.215. -dhamma law practice Ja v.125; Dhp-a iii.141. -vīthi process of judgment (in logic): see Cpd. 241. -sālā the law court(s) Ja iv.120; Dhp-a iii.380.
vi + nicchaya; cp. Vedic viniścaya
to go out (in all directions) Ja iv.181.
vi + niccharati
discerned, decided, distinguished, detailed Vin i.65 (su˚); Ja v.65 (a˚); Snp-a 477; Sdhp 508.
pp. of vinicchināti
(adj.) discerning Thag 551.
fr. vinicchināti
(nt.) giving judgment Ja v.229.
fr. vinicchināti
(˚inati ) & vinicchati to investigate, try; to judge, determine, decide Ja v.229 fut. vinicchissati Vin iii.159; ger. vinicchinitvā Nd i.76 aor. vinicchini Ja ii.2; inf. vinicchituṃ Ja i.148; Dhp-a iv.215 ■ pp. vinicchita.
vi + nicchināti
(adj.) unvanquished Sdhp 318.
vi + nijjita
(indecl.) lit. “misplacing,” i.e. asserting or representing wrongly giving a false notion of (acc.) Vin ii.205, expld at Vin iv.2; Snp-a 204.
vi + nidhāya, ger. of vinidahati
to censure, blame, reproach Ja ii.346; Ja vi.200.
vi + nindati
ruin, destruction; a place of suffering, state of punishment, syn. with apāya duggati; (with which often combd, plus niraya, e.g. Vin i.227; DN i.82, DN i.162; MN i.73; AN iii.211; Iti 58; Pp 60): AN v.169; Snp 278; Ja iii.32; Mil 108; Vism 427 (where expld as “vināsā nipatanti tattha dukkaṭakārino ” together with duggati & niraya). The; sotāpanna is called “avinipāta-dhammo,” i.e. not liable to be punished in purgatory: see under sotāpanna, & cp sym. term; khīna-niraya AN iii.211.
fr. vi + nipāteti
(adj.) destined to suffer in purgatory, liable to punishment after death DN ii.69; DN iii.253; MN i.73, MN i.390; AN i.123; AN ii.232 sq.; AN iv.39, AN iv.401; Ja v.117, Ja v.119.
fr. vinipāta
to bring to ruin, to destroy, to frustrate Vin i.298; Ja vi.71; Vv-a 208.
vi + nipāteti
(adj.) bound (to) SN i.20; SN iii.9; AN iii.311 (chanda-rāga˚); iv.289 (id.); Nd i.30 (+ lagga etc.).
vi + nibaddha
bondage SN ii.17; SN iii.135, SN iii.186; AN i.66 (+ vinivesa); Snp 16 ■ The five cetaso vinibandhā (bondages of the mind) are: kāmesu rāgo, kāye rāgo, rūpe rāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udar’ âvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyya-sukhaṃ anuyogo, aññataraṃ deva-nikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ; thus at DN iii.238; MN i.103; AN iii.249; AN iv.461, AN iv.463 sq.; AN v.17; Vb 377.
vi + nibandha
(or ˚bhuñjati ) 1. [to bhuj, to bend, as in bhuja1 & nibbhujati] to turn inside out Thig 471.
2. [to; bhuj or bhuñj as in bhuñjati2 and paribhuñjati2] to separate, cut off, remove MN i.233; SN iii.141; SN iv.168 (spells wrongly jj).
3. [id.] to cleanse fig. to sift out thoroughly, to distinguish, discriminate MN i.292; Ja v.121 (avinibbhujaṃ, ppr.); Mil 63 (doubled) Vism 438 (spelling wrongly jj); Dhs-a 311 ■ pp vinibbhutta.
vi + ni + bhujati
(nt.) turning inside out Thag-a 284.
fr. vinibbhujati
separated, distinguished, discriminated Vism 368.
pp. of vinibbhujati
(adj.) lacking, deprived of (-˚), deficient Thag-a 248 (viññāṇa˚).
vi + nibbhoga
sifting out, distinction, discrimination Vism 306 (dhātu˚), 368 (id.); neg. a˚ absence of discrimination, indistinction Dhs-a 47; used as adj. in sense of “not to be distinguished,” indistinct at Ja iii.428 (˚sadda).
fr. vinibbhujati 3
to break (right) through MN i.233.
vi + ni + bhid
reciprocity, barter, exchange Ja ii.369.
fr. vi + nimināti
to shut one’s eyes Sdhp 189.
vi + nimīleti
(Vinimmutta) 1. released, free from Ja i.375 (mm); Sdhp 1, Sdhp 4, Sdhp 16, Sdhp 225.
2. discharged (of an arrow) Dhp-a iii.132 (mm).
vi + nis + mutta
to free (oneself) from, to get rid of AN iii.92; Pp 68.
vi + nis + moceti, cp. nimmoka
to be connected with, to ensue, accrue Pv-a 29 (= upakappati).
vi + niyujjati
possession, application, use Dhs-a 151; Vv-a 157; Pv-a 171, Pv-a 175.
vi + niyoga
(& ˚vatteti ) 1. to turn over, to repeat Ja i.25 (ṭṭ), 153 (ṭṭ), 190 (ṭṭ).
2. to turn (somebody) away from, to distract Pv i.88 (read ˚vattayi for ˚vattanti); ii.619 (˚vattayi; aor.); Ja iii.290 (ṭṭ). 3. to roll over, to glide off Ja iii.344 (ṭṭ); Dhp-a ii.51 (ṭṭ).
vi + nivatteti
(adj.) to be pierced; in dubbinivijjha difficult to pierce, hard to penetrate Ja v.46.
grd. of vinivijjhati
to pierce through & through Ja ii.91; Mil 339; Dhs-a 253.
vi + ni + vijjhati
(nt.) piercing, perforating, penetrating Dhs-a 253; Thag-a 197 (in expln of bahuvidha).
fr. vinivijjhati
pierced (all through), perforated Ja v.269; Ja vi.105; Vism 222.
pp. of vinivijjhati
(& ˚nibbeṭhana ) (nt.) unwrapping, unravelling; fig. explaining, making clear, explanation, refutation Nd ii.503 (diṭṭhi-sanghātassa vinibbeṭhana; where id. p. at Nd i.343 reads vinivedhana, cp, nibbedha); Mil 96; Vv-a 297 (diṭṭhi-gaṇṭhiviniveṭhana).
vi + nibbeṭhana
1. to disentangle, to unwrap Vin i.3, Vin i.276 (anta-gaṇṭhiṃ, the intestines); Ja ii.283 (sarīraṃ); v.47.
2. to disentangle oneself, to free oneself (from) AN iii.92; Pp 68.
vi + nibbeṭheti
tie, bond, attachment AN i.66 (+ vinibandha).
vi + nivesa
led, trained, educated SN v.261; AN iv.310 (viyatta + ); Dhp-a ii.66 (˚vatthu); Pv-a 38- avinīta not trained SN iv.287; Vv 297; Dhs 1003, Dhs 1217 suvinīta well trained SN iv.287; opp. dubbinīta badly trained Ja v.284, Ja v.287 ■ ratha-vinīta (nt.) a relay MN i.149.
pp. of vineti
(adj.) of a bluish-black (purple) colour, discoloured Ja ii.39 (of a cygnet, bastard of a swan & a crow, “resembling neither father nor mother, i.e. “black & white”). Usually applied to the colour of a corpse (purple, discoloured), the contemplation of which forms one of the 10 asubha-saññās: MN i.88 (uddhumātaka + ); Snp 200 (id.) ■ AN i.42; AN ii.17; SN v.129 sq.; Dhs 264; Ne 27; Mil 332; Vism 110, Vism 178 Vism 193.
vi + nīlaka
(adj.) unobstructed, unbiassed, unprejudiced AN ii.71; Sdhp 458. Usually in phrase ˚citta of an unbiassed mind, combd with mudu-citta udagga-citta;: Vin i.16, Vin i.181; DN i.110, DN i.148; AN iv.186. Same in BSk., e.g. Mvu iii.225; Divy 616 sq.
vi + nīvaraṇa
is only found in Caus. form vinodeti.
teacher, instructor, guide Snp 484; Pts ii.194 (netar, vinetar, anunetar); Ja iv.320.
n. ag. fr. vineti
1. to remove, put away, give up ■ ppr. vinayaṃ Ja vi.499; Pot. 3rd sg. vinayetha Snp 361, & vineyya Snp 590; imper. vinaya Snp 1098,; vinayassu Snp 559 ■ ger. vineyya Snp 58 (but taken as Pot. at Nd ii.577b); Pv ii.334 (macchera-malaṃ); vinetvā Ja v.403 (chandaṃ); vinayitvā Vv-a 156, & vinayitvāna Snp 485 (bhakuṭiṃ).
2. to lead, guide, instruct, train educate AN iii.106 (inf. vinetuṃ ); SN iv.105 (Pot. vineyyaṃ & fut.; vinessati ); aor. vinesi Mil 13 (Abhidhamme) ger. vinayitvāna Thag-a 69 (Ap. v. 10); grd. vinetabba Snp-a 464, & vineyya Mil 12; cp. veneyya ■ pp vinīta.
vi + neti; cp. vinaya
(adj.) driving out, dispelling, allaying Pv-a 114 (parissama˚).;
fr. vinodeti, cp. nudaka & nūdaka
(adj.-n..) dispelling, removal AN iii.387, AN iii.390; Snp 1086 (chanda-rāga˚, = pahāna etc Nd ii.578); Mil 285; DN-a i.140 (niddā˚); Dhp-a i.41 (tama˚, adj.); Pv-a 38 (soka˚).
fr. vinodeti
to drive out, dispel, remove, put away SN iv.70, SN iv.76, SN iv.190; AN ii.13, AN ii.117; Snp 273, Snp 956 (tamaṃ); 967; Nd i.454, Nd i.489; Ja i.183; Ja ii.63, Ja ii.283 (sinehaṃ); Vv 8426; Mil 259 (imper. vinodehi, + apanehi nicchārehi); Mvu 5, Mvu 245 (vimatiṃ); 31, 10 (kankhaṃ) Dhp-a iv.145; Pv-a 38 (sokaṃ).
Caus. of vi + nudati
the Vedic differentiations vetti “to know” and vindati “to find” are both in Pāli, but only in sporadic forms, some of which are archaic and therefore only found in poetry. Of vid are more frequent the Pass. vijjati and derivations fr the Caus. ved˚. The root vind occurs only in the present tense and its derivations ■ A. vid to know, to ascertain: The old Vedic pres. vetti only at Thag 497 (spelt veti). Another old aor. is vedi [Sk. ayedīt] Dhp 419, Dhp 423; Ja iii.420 (= aññāsi); iv.35 (here perhaps as aor. to Caus. vedeti: to cause to know or feel). Remnants of the old perfect tense 3rd pl. [Sk. viduḥ] are vidū & viduṃ (appears as vidu in verse), e.g. at Thag 497; Snp 758; Pv ii.74 (= jānanti Pv-a 102); Ja v.62 (= vijānanti C.); Mvu 23, Mvu 78. The old participle of the same tense is vidvā [ = Sk. vidvān; cp. Geiger P.Gr. 1002] in meaning “wise” Snp 792, Snp 897, Snp 1056, Snp 1060 expld as vijjāgato ñāṇī vibhāvī medhāvī at Nd i.93, Nd i.308 Nd ii.575. Opp. avidvā Snp 535; MN i.311 ■ Younger forms are a reconstructed (grammatical) pres. vidati DN-a i.139; ger. viditvā SN v.193; Snp 353, Snp 365, Snp 581, Snp 1053 Snp 1068 and pp. vidita (q.v.) ■ Pass. vijjati to be found to be known, to exist; very frequent, e.g. Snp 20 (pl vijjare), 21, 431, 611, 856, 1001, 1026; Thag 132; DN i.18; Pv i.56; ii.318 (spelt vijjite!) ii.914 (= atthi C.) 3rd sg. pret. vijjittha Snp 1098 (mā v. = saṃvijjittha Nd ii.568). ppr. vijjamāna existing Ja i.214; Ja iii.127; Pv-a 25, Pv-a 87, Pv-a 103; Mil 216 (gen. pl. vijjamānataṃ). Caus. vedeti; Pass. Caus. vediyati; grd. vedanīya: see separately, with other derivations ■ B. vind to find possess, enjoy (cp. vitta1, vitta2, vitti) Snp 187 (vindate dhanaṃ), 658; Thag 551; Thag 2, Thag 79 (aor. vindi); Ja vi.508 (vindate, med. = look for, try to find for oneself); Mvu 1, Mvu 13 (ppr. vindaṃ); Dhp-a iii.128 (ppr. vindanto), 410; Pv-a 60, Pv-a 77 ■ inf. vindituṃ Mil 122; Ja 18; grd vindiya Vism 526 (as avindiya in expln of avijjā). Cp. nibbindati ■ pp. vitta1 (for which adhigata in lit meaning).
vid, both in meaning “to know” & “to find”; cp. Gr. ε ̓ϊδον I saw, ο ̓ϊδα I know = Sk. veda “Veda, ει ̓́δωλον “idol”; Vedic vindati to find, vetti to know vidyā knowledge; Goth. witan to observe & know Ger. wissen; Goth. weis = E. wise, etc., for which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. video
is v.l. of bindu˚; (q.v.).
(adj.) fully ripe Ja i.136.
vi + pakka
(adj.) opposite, hostile; enemy; only in foll. cpds.:
-sevaka siding in or consorting with the enemy keeping bad company, a traitor Ja i.186; Ja iii.321; Dhp-a iv.95. -sevin id. Ja i.487; Ja ii.98.
vi + pakkha1 2
(adj.) 1. [vi + pakkha1 1] without wings Ja i.429.
2. [vi + pakkha1 2] opposite hostile Sdhp 71.
vipakkha + ika
(adj.) having no wings, without wings Ja v.255.
vi + pakkhin
(f.) at Vin ii.88 is perhaps a der. fr. vi + vac, and not pac, thus representing a Sk. *vivācyatā, meȧning “challenging in disputation,” quarrelsomeness, provocation See also vipāceti. If fr. vi + pac, the meaning would be something like “heatedness, exasperation.”
1. to be cooked, i.e. to ripen Ja v.121; Pv-a 104.
2. to bear fruit DN ii.266; SN i.144; MN i.388; Ne 37; Vv-a 171.
vi + paccati
(adj.) bearing fruit, ripening (fully) Mil 421 (Notes); Pv-a 190.
fr. vipaccati, cp. paccana
(adj.) hostile MN i.402; AN iv.95; Ja iv.108; Pp 20; Vb 351, Vb 359, Vb 371; Vb-a 478; Pv-a 87.
vi + paccanīka
to go wrong, to fail, to perish (opp. sampajjati) Dhp-a iii.357; Pv-a 34 ■ pp. vipanna. Vipancana & Vipanciyati;
vi + pajjati
: see under vipañcita.
only in phrase ˚ññū either: knowing diffuseness or detail, or: of unillusioned understanding, clear-minded, unprejudiced combd with ugghaṭita-ññū at AN ii.135 = Pp 41 (trsld by B. C. Law as “learning by exposition”; PugA 223 expls as “vitthāritaṃ atthaṃ jānāti,” i.e. one who knows a matter expld in detail. The spelling at AN ii.135 is vipacita˚; at Pp 41 vipaccita˚ & at PugA vipaccita˚ with v.l. vipañcita˚); Ne 7 sq., 125; Snp-a 163 (where ugghaṭita-ññū is applied to those who understand by condensed instruction, sankhepa-desanāya, and vipañcita-ññū to those who need a detailed one, vitthāradesanā; thus “learning by diffuseness”) ■ At Ne 9 we have the var. terms vipañcanā, vipañcayati vipañciyati; (Denom.) used in the description of var ways of parsing and grammatical analysis. Here vipañcanā (resting clearly on Sk. papañca expansion means “expanding” (by letters & vowels) and stands midway between; ugghaṭanā & vitthāraṇā “condensing & detailing.” The term vipañcayati (= vipañciyati) is used in the same way ■ Note. The term is not sufficiently cleared up. It occurs in BSk. as vipañcika (e.g. Divy 319, Divy 391, Divy 475, where it is appld to “brāhmaṇā naimittikā” & trsl;d by Cowell as “sooth-sayer”), and vipañcanaka (Divy 548?), with which cp. vipañcitājña at Lal 520. See remark on vejjañjanika.
fr. vi + pañc, cp. papañcita
to sell, to trade (with) Ja iv.363 (= vikkiṇati C.).
vi + Caus. of paṇati
see vipāṭeti 2.
(f.) wrong state, false manifestation, failure, misfortune (opp. sampatti ) Vin i.171 (ācāra failure of morality); AN i.270 (ājīva˚); iv.26, 160 (atta˚ para˚); Pts i.122; Ja vi.292; Ne 126 (the 3 vipattiyo sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚, ācāra˚); Dhp-a i.16 (sīla˚) DN-a i.235. Often in pair diṭṭhi˚; wrong view, heresy, & sīla˚; moral failure: DN ii.213; AN i.95, AN i.268, AN i.270; Vin v.98; Vb 361; Dhs 1361 ■ payoga˚; wrong application Pv-a 117, Pv-a 136 (opp. ˚sampatti).
vi + patti2
wrong way or course Vv 5010 (= apatha Vv-a 212).
vi + patha
gone wrong, having lost, failing in (-˚), opp. sampanna: AN iii.19 (rukkho sākhā-palāsa a tree which has lost branches and leaves); Snp 116 (˚diṭṭhi one who has wrong views, heretic; expld as “vinaṭṭha-sammādiṭṭhi” Snp-a 177); Mil 258 (su thoroughly fallen). -sīla˚; gone wrong in morals, lacking morality Vin i.63 (+ ācāra˚, diṭṭhi˚); ii.4 (id.); Ja iii.138 (vipanna-sīla).
pp. of vipajjati
(nt.) failure, misfortune Dhs A 367.
fr. vipanna
(indecl.) endeavouring strongly, with all one’s might Snp 425
ger. of vi + parakkamati
(Viparāmāsa ) highway robbery DN i.5 (expld as twofold at DN-a i.80, viz. hima˚ & gumba˚ or hidden by the snow & a thicket; the pop. etym given here is “janaṃ musanti,” i.e. they steal, or beguile people); iii.176 (v.l. ˚māsa); AN ii.209; AN v.206; SN v.473; Pp 58.
vi + parāmāsa, the form ˚mosa probably a distortion of ˚māsa
reversed, changed DN i.8; MN ii.3; SN iii.12; SN v.419; DN-a i.91.
pp. of vi + parā + vṛt
changed, perverted Dhs 1038; Vb 1, Vb 3, Vb 5 sq.; Mil 50.
vi + pariṇata
change (for the worse), reverse, vicissitude DN iii.216 (˚dukkhatā); MN i.457 (also as “disappointment”); SN ii.274; SN iii.8; SN iv.7 sq., 67 sq. AN ii.177 (˚dhamma subject to change); iii.32; v.59 sq. Vb 379 (˚dhamma); Vism 499 (˚dukkha), 629 sq. Vb-a 93 (id.); Pv-a 60 ■ a˚ absence of change, steadfastness DN i.18; DN iii.31, DN iii.33; Dhp-a i.121.
vi + pariṇāma
to change, alter DN i.56 (T. ˚ṇamati; but DN-a i.167 ˚ṇāmeti: sic for ˚ṇāmati!) = SN iii.211; Pv-a 199.
Denom. fr. vipariṇāma
(entirely) broken up MN i.296; SN iv.294.
vi + paribhinna
in verse at Ja v.372 is the poet. form of vipallattha (so the C. expln).
& Vipariyāya change, reversal DN-a i.148 (ā); Snp-a 499; Dhs-a 253 (ā); Sdhp 124, Sdhp 333 Cp. vipariyesa & vipallāsa;.
vi + pariyaya
(adj.) thrown out of its course upset, destroyed Thag 184 (cittaṃ; cp. similar phrase vipariyatthaṃ cittaṃ Ja v.372-The v.l. at Th passage is vimariyādi˚; ).
vipariyāya + kata, with sound change y → d, viz. ˚āyi → ˚ādi
reversal, contrariness, wrong state Kv 306 (;three reversals: saññā˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚; or of perception consciousness & views, cp.; Kvu trsln 176); Vb 376 (id.)- ˚gāha inverted grasp i.e. holding opposite views or “holding the contrary aim” (B. C. Law) Pp 22; Dhs-a 253 (= vipallattha-gāha).
a contamination form between ˚pariyaya & ˚pallāsa
changing or turning round, upset Ja i.344 (lokassa ˚kāle).
vi + parivatta
to turn round, to upset Ja iv.224 (nāvā ˚amānā capsizing); Mil 117; Thag-a 255.
vi + parivattati
(nt.) changing, change. reverse Dhs-a 367.
fr. viparivattati
(adj.) reversed, changed; equivocal; wrong, upset AN iii.114 (˚dassana); iv.226 (id.); v.284; Thig 393; Ja i.334; Kv 307; Mil 285 Mil 324; Ne 85 (˚gāha), 126 (˚saññā); Pv-a 244 ■ aviparīta unequivocal, certain, distinct, definite AN v.268 (˚dassana); Mil 214 (˚vacana); Pv-a 231 (= sacca yāthāva).;
pp. of vi + pari + i
(f.) contradistinction Vism 450 (tabbiparītatā).
abstr. fr. viparīta
made to float, floating, thrown out (into water) Ja iv.259 (reads viplāvitaṃ) = i.326 (reads vipalāvitaṃ, with reading nipalāvitaṃ in C.). The C. at Ja iv.259 expls as “ uttārita, ” so at Ja i.326 as “brought out of water,” fished out = thale ṭhapita, evidently incorrect.
vi + palāvita, pp. of Caus. of plu
(adj.) changed, reversed, upset, deranged corrupt, perverted. Occurs in two forms: vipariyattha Ja v.372 (˚cittaṃ: in poetry); and vipallattha Vism 20 (˚citta: trsln “with corrupt thought”; T. spells vipallatta v.l. ˚attha); Dhs-a 253 (˚gāha); Pv-a 212.
= Sk. viparyasta, pp. of vi + pari + as: see vipallāsa
reversal change (esp. in a bad sense), inversion, perversion derangement, corruption, distortion ■ The form vipariyāsa occurs at Vin ii.80 (citta-˚kata, with deranged mind or wrong thoughts); Ja i.344 (where it is expld by vipallāsa). Otherwise vipallāsa, e.g. Snp 299; Pts ii.80 Vism 214 (attha˚); Ne 4, Ne 27, Ne 31, Ne 85 sq., 115 sq.; Dhp-a ii.228; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 70 ■ There are 3 kinds of vipallāsas viz. saññā˚; perversion of perception, citta˚; of thought diṭṭhi˚; of views; AN ii.52; Ne 85; Vism 683. See the same under vipariyesa!
cp. Sk. viparyāsa, vi + pari + as (to throw). The diaeretic P. form (founded on Sk. is vipariyāsa another bastard form is vipariyesa (q.v.)
to be deceived (about), to distort, to have or give a wrong notion (of) Ne 85.
Denom. fr. vipallāsa
(adj.) qualified to win insight, contemplating, gifted with introspection SN ii.232; Pts i.167; Mil 342, Mil 369; Mil 393, Vb-a 297.
fr. vipassati
to see clearly; to have intuition, to obtain spiritual insight DN iii.196 (ye nibbutā loke yathābhūtaṃ vipassisuṃ, aor.); Thag 471; Thag 2, Thag 271 (vipassi for ˚passasi); Snp 1115; Ja iii.183 (pabbajitvā vipassitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu).
vi + passati
(f.) inward vision, insight, intuition, introspection DN iii.213, DN iii.273; SN iv.195, SN iv.360; SN v.52 (samatha + ) AN i.61 (id.), 95; ii.140, 157 (samatha + ); iv.360; v.99 131; Pts i.28, Pts i.57 sq., 181; ii.92 sq.; Pp 25; Ja i.106; Dhs 55, Dhs 1356; Ne 7, Ne 42 sq., 50, 82, 88 sq., 125 sq., 160, 191; Mil 16; Vism 2 (with jhāna etc.), 289 (+ samādhi) 628 sq. (the 18 mahā˚); Pv-a 14 (samāhita-citta˚), 167; Vv-a 77; Sdhp 457, Sdhp 466.
-aṅga constituent of intuition Snp-a 8 (given as “nāmarūpa-pariccheda etc.”). -upekkhā indifference by introspection Vism 162. -kammaṭṭhāna exercise for intuition Dhp-a iv.46. -ñāṇa ability or method of attaining insight Vism 629; Dhp-a iv.30; cp. Cpd. 65 sq., where 10 such modes. -dhura obligation of introspection Dhp-a i.8; Dhp-a iv.37 sq.
fr. vi + passati; BSk. vipaśyanā, e.g. Divy 44, Divy 95, Divy 264 etc.
(adj.) gifted with insight, wise AN iv.244; Snp 349; Iti 2 = Iti 7.
fr. vipassati
fruit, fruition, product; always in pregnant meaning of “result, effect, consequence (of one’s action),” either as good & meritorious (; kusala or bad & detrimental (; akusala ). Hence “retribution (kamma˚; ), reward or punishment. See on term e.g. Dhs. trsln introd.2xciii; Cpd. 43. 249 ■ DN iii.150, DN iii.160 DN iii.176 sq.; SN i.34, SN i.57, SN i.92 (kammassa); ii.128 (compar vipākatara), 255 (id.); iv.186 sq., 348 sq.; AN i.48, AN i.97 (sukha˚, dukkha˚), 134 (kamma˚), 263; ii.34 (agga), 80 112; iii.35, 172 (dānassa), 410 sq. (kāmānaṃ etc.), 436 iv. 303 (kamma˚); v.251; Snp 653 (kamma˚); Pts ii.79 (dukkha˚); Pv i.91; i.107 & passim; Pp 13, Pp 21; Dhs 431, Dhs 497, Dhs 987; Vb 16 sq., 73, 319, 326 sq., 334 (sukha˚) Kv 353 sq., 464 (kamma & vipāka); Ne 99, Ne 161 Ne 180 sq.; Tikp 27 (fourfold), 44, 48, 50, 292 (a˚ & sa˚) 328 sq. (˚tika), 350 sq.; Dukp 17; Vism 177, Vism 454 (fourfold), 456 (˚viññāṇa), 538 (˚paccaya), 545 sq.; Vb-a 17, Vb-a 150 sq. (kusala˚ & akusala), 144, 177, 391; Pv-a 50 Pv-a 73, Pv-a 77; Sdhp 12, Sdhp 73, Sdhp 197, Sdhp 235.
fr. vi + pac
(nt.) state of being ripe Pv-a 52.
abstr. fr. vipāka
to become annoyed, to get angry (lit. to get heated): this meaning as trsln of vi + pac, although not quite correct as pac means to “ripen” and is not ordinarily used of heated conditions. Since the word is not sufficiently cleared up, we refrain from a detailed discussion concerning possible explanations. It may suffice to point out that it occurs only in Vinaya (and in one sporadic passage SN i.232) in standing combn ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti, expressing annoyance or irritation about something; e.g. Vin i.191; Vin ii.85, Vin ii.291; Vin iv.64. The corresponding BSk. phrase is avadhyāyati dhriyati [to resist, dhṛ ] vivācayati, e.g. Divy 492. It is not quite clear which of the two versions is the older one. There may be underlying a misunderstood (dial.) phrase which was changed by popular analogy. The BSk phrase seems a priori the more intelligible one; if we take vipāceti = vivāceti, we should translate it as “to speak disparagingly.” Mrs. Rh. D at K.S. i.296 trsls as “were vexed and fretted and consumed with indignation “-See remarks under khīyati & cp.; vipaccatā.
Caus. of vi + pac, or distorted fr. vivāceti ?
1. to rip or tear open Vin ii.115. - 2. to be destroyed, to fall to pieces (cp. pāṭeti & Pass pāṭiyati in sense of “destroy”) Pv iv.146 (sanghāṭiyo vipātayanti T.; vv.ll. vināsayati & vidālayati; Pv-a 240 expls as Pass. vipāḷiyati [ = vipaṭiyati?] with v.l. vidāliyati); Ja v.33 (reads: muddhā vipphaleyya sattadhā: perhaps the best reading), 493 (muddhā vipateyya [sic] sattadhā). See vipphalati.
vi + pāṭeti
see vipāṭeti 2.
in phrase vipiṭṭhi-katvā(na) Snp 67 & 362, to turn one’s back on (acc.), to leave behind, to abandon; cp. piṭṭhito karoti. The expln at Nd ii.580 is pahāna etc.; at Snp-a 119 piṭṭhito katvā.
vi + piṭṭhi
(nt.) wood, grove DN i.248 (doubtful; vv.ll. vijina, vivada, vivana) Ap 51 (vv.ll. vivana, vicina; C. vivana & vipina); Dāvs iv.39; Pv-a 81 (read vicitta! ).
cp. *Sk. vipina, Halāyudha 2, 55
(adj.) without a son, bereft of his son Ja v.106.
vi + putta
(adj.) full of corruption or matter, festering (said of a dead body). The contemplation (saññā) of a festering corpse is one of the asubhakammaṭṭhānas ■ MN i.58, MN i.88; MN iii.91; AN iii.324. As ˚saññā: AN ii.17; AN v.310; Dhs 264; Ne 27; Mil 102 Mil 332; Vism 110, Vism 178, Vism 193.
fr. vi + pubba1
(adj.) large, extensive, great, abundant. The word is poetical.-D iii.150; AN i.45 (˚paññatā); Snp 41, Snp 675, Snp 687, Snp 978, Snp 994; Thag 588; Nd i.581 (= adhimatta); Vv 676 (= mahanta Vv-a 290) Ap 40; Pv ii.118; ii.49; ii.969 (= ulāra Pv-a 139); Mil 164, Mil 311, Mil 404; Pv-a 7, Pv-a 76; Sdhp 271.
cp. Sk. vipula
1. imperfectly executed, left unfinished, interrupted DN i.2 (cp Dhp i.49); Vin ii.172, Vin ii.243, Vin ii.304; Vin iv.279; AN ii.196; Ja i.120–2. done wrongly Ja v.214 ■ At Vin iv.358 (in Bdhgh’s remarks on Pāc. 26, 1) we find vippagatamedhuna as inaccurate spelling for vippakata-methuna (“interrupted intercourse”).
pp. of vippakaroti; vi + pakata
to ill-treat, abuse Vin ii.133. - pp. vippakata.
vi + pa + kṛ;
change, mutation, alteration Ja vi.370; Dhp-a i.28; Vv-a 46.
vi + pakāra
strewn all over, beset with, sprinkled (with) Ja ii.240; Ja vi.42; Dhp-a i.140; DN-a i.40; Vv-a 36.
pp. of vippakirati
(f.) the fact of being beset or endowed (with) Vism 8.
abstr. fr. vippakiṇṇa
1. to strew all over Pv-a 92. - 2. to confound, destroy Ja ii.398 ■ pp. vippakiṇṇa.
vi + pakirati
to part company, to go away Vin iv.284.
vi + pakkamati
to give up, to abandon Snp 817 (inf. ˚pahātave), 926 (Pot. ˚pajahe); ger. ˚pahāya Snp 367, Snp 499, Snp 514; Ja i.87 ■ pp. vippahīna.
vi + pajahati
(adj.) contrary, antagonistic Dhs 1325 = Pp 20.
vi + paṭikkūla
to go astray; fig. to err, fail; to commit sin Vin iii.166; SN i.73; Ja i.438 ■ pp. vippaṭipanna. Caus. vippaṭipādeti.
vi + paṭipajjati. Cp. BSk. vipratipadyate Divy 293
(f.) wrong way, error, sin Vism 511.
vi + paṭipatti
“on the wrong track,” going or gone astray, committing sin Pv iv.159 (˚citta = adhammiyaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipanna Pv-a 242).
pp. of vippaṭipajjati
to cause to commit sin (esp. adultery) Vin iii.40.
Caus. of vippaṭipajjati
bad conscience, remorse, regret, repentance Vin ii.250; DN i.138; SN iii.120, SN iii.125; SN iv.46; AN iii.166, AN iii.197, AN iii.353; AN iv.69; Ja iv.12; Ja v.88; Pp 62; Dhp-a iv.42; Vv-a 116; Pv-a 14, Pv-a 60, Pv-a 105, Pv-a 152 ■ a˚; no regret, no remorse AN iii.46.
vi + paṭisāra
(adj.) remorseful, regretful, repentant SN iii.125 SN iv.133, SN iv.320 sq., 359 sq.; AN iii.165 sq.; AN iv.244, AN iv.390; Ja i.200; Mil 10, Mil 285; Tikp 321, 346.
fr. vippaṭisāra; cp. BSk. vipratisārin Divy 322, Divy 638
to scratch open or apart MN i.506.
vi + pa + taccheti
strayed, lost, perished Vv 849 = 8444 (= magga-sammūḷha Vv-a 337); Ja iv.139 Ja v.70; Ja vi.525; Mil 326.
vi + pp. of panassati
released, set free, saved SN i.4, SN i.29, SN i.50; SN iii.31, SN iii.83; SN iv.11; AN i.10; AN ii.34; Snp 176 Snp 218, Snp 363, Snp 472, Snp 492, Snp 501, Snp 913; Ja i.84; Vv 204≈2910; Nd i.331, Nd i.336.
vi + pamutta
release, deliverance SN i.154; Ja v.27.
vi + pamokkha
separated SN ii.173 (visaṃyutta + ); Snp 914 (or ˚mutta). -˚paccaya the relation of dissociation Tikp 6, 53 sq., 65; Vism 539.
vi + payutta
separation Snp 41; Pv-a 161 (piya˚).
vi + payoga
to talk confusedly (as in one’s sleep), to chatter, wail, lament Vin i.15; SN iv.303; Ja i.61; Ja iii.217; Ja iv.167; Dhp-a ii.100; Pv-a 40, Pv-a 93.
vi + palapati
to deceive, mock DN-a i.151; Thag-a 78.
vi + palambheti
confused talk, wailing Pts i.38; Pv-a 18.
vi + palāpa
to be broken up, to be destroyed Nd i.5.
vi + palujjati
to dispute, disagree Ja iv.163; Ja vi.267.
vi + pavadati
to go from home, to be away from (abl.), to be absent Snp 1138 (= apeti apagacchati vinā hoti Nd ii.582); Ja iv.51, Ja iv.439 ■ pp. vippavuttha.
vi + pavasati
absence; in sati˚; absence of mind, neglect, absentmindedness, thoughtlessness Ja i.410; Snp-a 339; a˚; thoughtfulness, mindfulness Vin v.216; Snp 1142; Ja iv.92.
vi + pavāsa
pierced through and through Ja i.61.
pp. of vippavijjhati, vi + pa + vyadh
absent; ˚sati neglectful Dhp-a i.239.
pp. of vippavasati
(adj.) (quite) purified, clear; happy, bright, pure, sinless Vin iii.88 (˚chavivaṇṇa) SN i.32 (cetas); iii.2, 235; iv.118, 294; v.301; AN iii.41 AN iii.236; Snp 637; Dhp 82, Dhp 413 (= pasanna-citta Dhp-a iv.192) Pv i.1010 (= suṭṭhu pasanna); ii.935; Vism 262 (where Kp-a reads pasanna only); Dhp-a ii.127; DN-a i.221.
vi + pasanna
to purify, cleanse Snp 506.
Caus. of vippasīdati
to become bright; fig. to be reconciled or pleased, to be satisfied or happy Dhp 82; Ja i.51; Pv-a 122 (mukha-vaṇṇa). Caus. vippasādeti.
vi + pasīdati
to dry up entirely Ja v.106.
vi + pa + sukkhati
(nt.) leaving, abandoning, giving up SN i.39 = Snp 1109; Snp 1097; Ja vi.260; Mil 181.
vi + pahāna
(nt.) sending out in all directions, message Ja iii.386 (dūta˚).
vi + pahita2
given up, abandoned SN i.99; AN v.16, AN v.29 sq.; Snp 360, Snp 362.
pp. of vippajahati
at Ja vi.185 is to be read cipiṭa (“flat”).
to twitch, writhe, struggle Vv 5216 (5214 Ha.); Ja iv.495-pp. vipphandita.
vi + phandati; cp. BSk. vispandati Jtm 11.
(nt.) “writhing,” twitching, struggle MN i.446; SN ii.62 ■ (fig.) in diṭṭhi˚ combd with visūkāyita ) “scuffling of opinion” (Mrs Rh. D.), sceptical agitation, worry & writhing (cp; Dial. i.53) MN i.8, MN i.486; SN i.123 (here without diṭṭhi˚ the C. expln is “hatthirājavaṇṇa sappavaṇṇ’ ādidassa nāni” K.S. i.320); Dhs 381; Pp 22.
pp. of vipphandati
(or is it pipphala ?) = phala at Ja vi.518.
(intrs.) to split open, to burst asunder: so read at Ja v.33, Ja v.493 (for vipatati); Pv iv.146 (for vipāteti); see detail under vipāṭeti.
vi + phalati
diffusion, pervasion, (adj.) pervading, spreading out AN i.171 (vitakka-vip phāra-sadda, cp. Kvu trsln 241), 206 (mahājutika mahā vipphāra); iv.252; Pts i.112 sq.; Pts ii.174; Ja iii.12 (mahā + mahājutika); v.150 (id.); Mil 230 & 270 (vacī; dilating in talk), 130, 346; Vism 42; DN-a i.192; Vv-a 103 (mahā˚ + mahājutika); Pv-a 178 (karuṇā˚).
fr. vi + pharati 1 or 2
(adj.) possessing vibration Dhs-a 115 = Vism 142.;
fr. vipphāra, cp. pharati 1 & vipphurati
(adj.) spreading out (in effulgence) Vv-a 5 (mahā˚).
fr. vi + pharati 2
expanded Dāvs v.34 (˚akkhi-yugala, both eyes wide open).
pp. of Caus. vi + pharati
(adj.) split open, cut to pieces Pv-a 152 (su˚; so read for vipphalita); Sdhp 188 (˚anga).
vi + phālita 2
to expand, to bend or draw the bow Ja vi.580.
vi + sphar: cp. phālita 1. It is not = vi + phāleti
(nt.) spreading out, effulgence, pervasion Vv-a 277.
vi + phuraṇa = pharaṇa
to vibrate, tremble, quiver, fly asunder, diffuse Ja i.51; Snp-a 225; Vv-a 12 (vijjotamāna vipphurato).
vi + phurati: see pharati
(adj.) burst open (of a boil) Thag 306.
vi + phoṭita: see phoṭa, cp. BSk. visphoṭa open Divy 603
(adj.) fruitless, useless Sdhp 527.
vi + phala
fetter Pv-a 207.
vi + bandha
(nt.) = vibandha Thag-a 243.
vi + bandhana
(adj.) doing harm to (-˚), injuring, preventing Dāvs ii.88.
fr. vibādha
to oppress, harm Mil 135 (so read for ˚bhādati); Dhs-a 42 ■ Pass. vibādhiyati to be oppressed Pv-a 239.
vi + bādhati
circumference Ja i.212.
fr. vi + vyadh after analogy of ubbedha; not vi + bheda
1. roaming, straying; strayed, confused MN i.171 (padhāna˚ giving up exertion), 247 (id.). Usually in phrase ˚citta with wandering (or confused) mind SN i.61 (see expln of C. at K.S. i.321) 204; iii.93; v.269; AN i.70; AN ii.30; AN iii.391; Iti 90; Ja iv.459 (+ kupit’ indriya); Mil 324 ■ At Dhs-a 260 we find the cpd. vibbhanti-bhāva [vibbhanta in compn with bhu! ] of citta, in meaning “wavering, roaming (of mind): so read for vibhatti-bhāva.
pp. of vibbhamati
(adj.) 1. straying away from (-˚), confused Vism 187 (jhāna˚), 429.
2. (a bhikkhu) who has forsaken the Order, apostate Vin ii.60.
vibbhanta + ka
to wander about, to go astray, to forsake the Order Vin i.72; Vin ii.14; Vin iii.40 (may be taken in the sense of enjoying oneself or sporting, i.e. cohabiting, at this passage), iv.216; Ja i.117; Ja iii.462 (of a bhikkhu enticed by his former wife), 496 ■ pp. vibbhanta.
vi + bhamati
distribution, division, distinction, classification Vin i.359; Snp 600 (jāti classification of species; expld as jāti -vitthāra at Snp-a 464); Ja iv.361 (+ vicaya; C. expls as vibhāga ); Mvu 30, Mvu 87 (dhātu˚ distribution of relics); Snp-a 422 (contrasted with uddesa ) ■ Vibhanga is the title of the second book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka (see Pāli Name Dictionary). Cp. Sutta-vibhanga.
vi + bhanga, of bhaj1
(lit.) to distribute, divide; (fig.) to distinguish, dissect, divide up, classify; to deal with something in detail, to go into details MN iii.223; SN ii.2, SN ii.255 (vibhājeti) = MN i.364 (reads virājeti); SN iv.93 (atthaṃ); v.261 (dhammaṃ vivarati vibhajati uttāni-karoti); Snp 87; Pp 41; Vb 259; Mil 145; Snp-a 237; DN-a i.104; Pv-a 81, Pv-a 111. ger vibhajja (q.v.) ■ pp. vibhatta.
vi + bhajati, i.e. bhaj1, as in bhājeti
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) distinction, division, going into detail Ne 5, Ne 8 sq., 38 (+ vivaraṇā uttāni-kammatā); Tikp 10; Snp-a 445 (vivaraṇa, v. uttāni-karaṇa); Dhs-a 343, Dhs-a 344. Cp. vibhājana.
fr. vibhajati
(adv.) dividing, analysing, detailing; in detail (˚-) DN iii.229 (˚vyākaraṇīya pañha “discriminating reply” trsln); AN ii.46 (˚vacana analysis)- ˚vāda the Vibhajja doctrine, i.e. the doctrine which analyses, or the “religion of logic or reason”; a term identical with theravāda, the doctrine of the Elders i.e. the original teaching of the Buddhist church -˚vādin one who teaches the V. doctrine, Ep. of the Buddha Mvu 5, Mvu 271; Tikp 366; Vb-a 130; cp. Kvu trsln introd. p. 38.
ger. of vibhajati
(adj.) 1. (lit.) divided, distributed; parted, partitioned, having divisions, portioned off Snp 300; Pv i.1013 (of niraya); Ja v.266 (id.); Mil 316 (a˚ samudda) ■ su˚ well divided, well planned proportioned, regular Snp 305; Pv iii.221; Mil 330, Mil 345 Vism 108.
2. (fig.) detailed, explained, analysed Vism 187; Snp-a 288; Pv-a 104.
pp. of vibhajati
(adj.) full of details, giving all detail Vism 212; DN-a i.34.
fr. vibhatta
(f.) 1. division, distinction, classification, detail, variety Ja vi.432 (of paintings); Ne 1 sq., 105; Mil 102, Mil 381; Vism 352 (contrasted with sankhepa); Pv-a 199, Pv-a 282 (rūpa˚ various forms, patterns)
2. (t. t. g.) inflection of nouns & verbs, declensions conjugation Snp-a 397; Vv-a 78, Vv-a 199. -˚lopa omission of inflection Vv-a 174, Vv-a 192; Pv-a 147 ■ Note. vibhattibhāva at Dhs-a 260 is to be read as vibbhanti˚; (see under vibbhanta).
fr. vibhajati
(adj.) having divisions; (fig.) detailed. Neg. a˚; not giving details Vv-a 164.
fr. vibhatti
1. power, wealth, prosperity DN-a i.147; Ja i.56; Ja v.285; Mvu 26, Mvu 6; Dhp-a i.6; Dhp-a ii.9, Dhp-a ii.84 Dhp-a iv.7; Vv-a 5, Vv-a 302 (˚sampanna rich); Pv-a 122, Pv-a 130, Pv-a 176 Pv-a 196. Great wealth is expressed by asīti-koṭi-vibhava consisting in 80 koṭis, e.g. Dhp-a i.367; Dhp-a ii.25 ■ bahu˚ very rich Ja i.145; mahā˚; id. Pv-a 97, Pv-a 107 ■ yathā vibhavaṃ according to one’s means or power Pv-a 54 vibhav’ ānurūpaṃ id. Vv-a 254.
2. non-existence cessation of life, annihilation DN i.34; Snp 514 (+ bhava) 867 (id.); Nd i.274, Nd i.282; Ja iii.402 (˚ṃ gata = vināsaṃ patta C.); v.267 (id.); Dhs-a 392; DN-a i.120; Vb-a 505 (= bhava-vigama). See also taṇhā B 1.
-taṇhā “craving for life to end” (Dial. iii.208), desire for non-existence DN iii.216, DN iii.275; Vin i.10; Ud 33; Iti 50; Vb-a 111. -diṭṭhi the theory of non-becoming DN iii.212; AN i.83; Nd i.245, Nd i.274.
vi + bhava
to cease to exist SN iii.56 (fut. ˚issati); Snp 873 (vibhoti); Nd i.279 (id.) ■ pp. vibhūta.
vi + bhavati
(nt.) gossip, lit. “made into talk” Vin iv.241.
vi + bhassa + kata
distribution, division; detailing, classification Ja iv.361 Vism 494; Vb-a 83; Thag-a 100; Vv-a 37; Pv-a 122-attha˚ detailing of meaning Vism 569; dhātu˚; distribution of relics Vv-a 297; Pv-a 212; pada˚; division of words Snp-a 269; Pv-a 34 ■ Cp. saṃ˚.
fr. vibhajati, cp. vibhanga & vibhajana
(nt.) distribution, division Dhtp 92, Dhtp 561; Dhtm 776, Dhtm 787.
vi + bhājana2
shining, turned to light, bright; in phrase vibhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i.e. at daybreak or dawn (Dhp-a iv.105; Pv-a 13 Pv-a 22) ■ (nt.) daybreak, dawn Dhp-a ii.5 (˚khaṇe).
pp. of vibhāti
to shine forth, to be or become light (said of the night turning into day); pres. also vibhāyati Vin i.78; fut. vibhāyissati DN ii.148; aor. vibhāyi Ja v.354 ■ pp. vibhāta.
vi + bhāti
at Mil 135 should be read at vibādhati.
(nt.) shining forth, brightening Vv-a 148.
fr. vibhāti
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) 1. making clear, ascertainment, explanation, exposition Ja iii.389; Vb 342, Vb 343 (ā); Snp-a 13, Snp-a 261 sq., 318; Vb-a 409 (ā) Thag-a 76 (ā), 230; Pv-a 137, Pv-a 140 (so read for vibhavanā in attha˚).
2. annihilation, disappearance, making non-existing (cp. vibhava 2) Dhs-a 163 (vibhāvanā nāma antara-dhāpanā ti attho).
fr. vibhāveti
(adj.) pertaining to ascertainment, making clear, explaining Pv-a 244 (paramattha˚).
fr. vibhāvana
made non-existing, annihilated Nd ii.584.
pp. of vibhāveti
(adj.) intelligent, wise Snp 317; Ja vi.304; Nd ii.259 (= medhāvin); Mil 21, Mil 276, Mil 346 Sdhp 382.
fr. vibhāveti
1. to understand clearly (lit. “to produce intensively or well”) Snp 318 (ger. a-vibhāvayitvā).
2. to make clear, to explain Kp-a 89; Snp-a 406, Snp-a 472; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 70, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 135.
3. to put out of existence to annihilate [as Caus. of vibhava 2] Dhs-a 163. pp. vibhāvita.
vi + bhāveti
illuminated, made bright, shining forth Sdhp 591.
pp. Caus. of vi + bhāsati2
(adj.) scattered; divided, at variance Snp 314 (= aññam-aññaṃ bhinna Snp-a 324).
vi + bhinna
(& ˚ṭaka) the plant Terminalia belerica; beleric myrobolan. Dice were made from its fruits, which are also used as medicine (intoxicant); its flowers smell vilely ■ Vin i.201; Ja iii.161; Ja v.363; Ja vi.529.
cp. *Sk. vibhīta & ˚ka
(adj.) 1. [cp. bhūta 1, & vibhava 2] destroyed, annihilated, being without Thag 715; Snp 871 sq., 1113 (= vibhāvita atikkanta vītivatta Nd ii.584).
2. [cp. bhūta 3] false Snp 664.
3. [cp. vibhāveti 2] clear, distinct AN v.325; Mil 311; Abdhs 16 (a˚ unclear); Vism 112 (& a˚); -˚ṃ karoti to explain Mil 308.
pp. of vibhavati, or vi + bhūta
(f.) 1. [cp. vibhūta 2] destruction, ruin Thag 1018 (˚nandin = malign).
2. [cp vibhava 1] splendour, majesty, glory Ja v.305; Pv-a 133 (dāna˚), 216 (rāja˚).
fr. vi + bhavati
(nt.) adornment AN i.212; AN ii.40, AN ii.145, AN ii.209; Snp 59 (cp. Nd ii.585); Pp 21, Pp 58; Ja i.8; Dhs 1348; Mil 382.
vi + bhūsana
(f.) ornament, decoration, distinction, pride Snp 926; Nd i.380; Nd ii.585; Mil 224 (Rh. D trsls “dexterity,” hardly correct. Should we read “vibhūti”?).
vi + bhūsā
adorned, decorated Mvu 25, Mvu 102; Vism 10; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 157.
pp. of vibhūseti
to adorn, embellish, beautify Thig 411; Mvu 19, Mvu 25; Dhp-a i.77 ■ pp. vibhūsita.
vi + bhūseti
to be afraid, to stand in awe of Ja v.509 (= bhāyati C.). Should we read bibheti?
vi + bhāyati
one who disturbs friendship, a slanderer Ja iii.260.
vi + bhedaka
(f.) the palmyra tree Ja vi.529.
fr. vi + bhid
to cause disruption, to slander AN v.345 sq.
vi + bhedeti
(nt.) making smooth, polishing MN i.385.
fr. vi + majjati2
(adj.) smoothed, soft, smooth, polished Ja v.96 (˚ābharana), (C. expls as “visāla”) 204, 400 (of ornaments) ■ ubhato-bhāga˚; polished or smooth on both sides MN i.385; AN v.61 = MN ii.13 (has ˚maddha).
vi + maṭṭha
(adj.) perplexed, in doubt Ja v.340.
fr. vi + man
(f.) doubt, perplexity, consternation DN i.105; SN iv.327; AN ii.79, AN ii.185; Ap 29; Dhs 425; Ja iii.522; Mil 119, Mil 144, Mil 339; DN-a i.274.
vi + mati
(adj.) disintoxicated, without conceit Ja v.158 (taken as “unconscious” by C.).
vi + mada
(nt.) crushing, destroying Vv-a 232.
vi + maddana
(adj.) 1. perplexed, consternated Mil 23, Mil 118; Pv-a 274.
2. infatuate Thig 380. 3. distracted, distressed Thag 1051; Ja vi.523.
vi + mano
(adj.) lit. made unrestricted, i.e. delivered, set free SN ii.173; SN iii.31 (vippamutto ˚ena cetasā viharati); vi.11; AN v.151 sq-At Thag 184 v.l. for vipariyādi˚.
vi + mariyādā + kata
(adj.) without stains, spotless, unstained, clean, pure AN iv.340; Snp 378, Snp 476, Snp 519, Snp 637, Snp 1131 (cp. Nd ii.586); Ja i.18; Mil 324; Dhp-a iv.192.
vi + mala
a certain precious stone of dark-blue colour Vv-a 111.
cp. Sk. vimalaka
(nt.) lit. covering a certain space, measuring; the defns given by Dhpāla refer it to “without measure,” i.e. immeasurable. Thus = vigata-māne appamāṇe mahanta vara-pāsāda Vv-a 131; = visiṭṭhamānaṃ, pamāṇato mahantaṃ Vv-a 160 ■ Appld meaning: heavenly (magic) palace, a kind of paradise elysium.
1. General remarks: (a) The notion of the vimāna is peculiar to the later, fantastic parts of the Canon, based on popular superstition (Vimāna & Peta Vatthu, Apadāna, Jātaka and similar fairy tales). It shows distinct traces of foreign (Hellenic-Babylonian influence and rests partly on tales of sea-faring merchants (cp. location of V. in mid-ocean). On the other hand it represents the old (Vedic); ratha as chariot of the gods to be driven at will (cp. below 5, 7, 8). Thus at Vv 16 (here as 500 chariots!), 36, 63, 64; Ja i.59 (deva-vimānasadisa ratha) ■ (b) The vimānas are in remote parts of the world (cp. the island of the blessed), similar to the elysium in Homer’s Odyssey, e.g. iv.563 sq.: ̓σἐς ̓*Ηλύσιον πεδίον κα ̓σἐς ̓*Ηλύσιον πεδίον και πείρατα γαίης ἀχάνατοι πεμψουσιν etc. (trsln G. Chapman: “the immortal ends of all the earth, the fields Elysian Fate to thee will give; where Rhadamanthus rules, and where men live a nevertroubled life, where snow, nor show’rs, nor irksome winter spends his fruitless pow’rs, but from the ocean zephyr still resumes a constant breath, that all the fields perfume”). Cp. Ehni, Yama p. 206 sq ■ (c) In popular religion the influence of this eschatological literature has been very great, so great in fact as to make the Vimāna and Peta-vatthus & the Jātakastories exemplifying the theory of retribution as appealing to an ordinary mind by vivid examples of mythology, greater favourites than any other canonical; book. From this point of view we have to judge Mvu 14, Mvu 58: Petavatthuṃ Vimānañ ca sacca-saṃyuttaṃ eva ca desesi thero…
2. The descriptions of the Vimānas are in the most exuberant terms. The palaces (kingdoms in miniature) are of gold, crystal or exquisite jewels, their pillars are studded with gems their glittering roofs are peaked with 700 pinnacled turrets (Vv-a 244, Vv-a 289; also as “innumerable” Vv-a 188, or 18,000 Ap. 63). Surrounded are these towering (ucca) mansions by lovely, well-planned gardens, the paths of which are sprinkled with gold dust; they are full of wishing-trees, granting every desire. There is a variety of stately trees, bearing heavenly flowers fruit, swaying gently in delicious breezes. Lotus ponds with cool waters invite to refreshing baths; a host of birds mix their songs with the strains of cymbals and lutes, played by heavenly musicians. Angelic maidens perform their dances, filling the atmosphere with a radiant light which shines from their bodies. Peace and happiness reign everywhere, the joys of such a vimāna cannot be expressed in words. This elysium lasts for aeons (cira-ṭṭhitika Vv 801, kappa-ṭṭhāyin Thag 1190) in short it is the most heavenly paradise which can be imagined ■ For a monograph of vimāna the Vimāna Vatthu and its Commentary should in the first place be consulted.
3. The inhabitants of the Vimānas are usually happy persons (or yakkhas: see Stede, P. V. trsl. 39
41), called devatā, who have attained to such an exalted state through their own merit (puñña see foll 4) ■ Departed souls who have gone through the Petastage are frequently such devas (at Vv 172 called pubbadevatā). That these are liable to semi-punishment and semi-enjoyment is often emphasized, and is founded on the character of their respective kamma: Ja i.240 (vimāna-petiyo sattāhaṃ sukhaṃ anubhavanti, sattāhaṃ dukkhaṃ); Ja v.2 (vemānika-peta-bhavena-kammassa sarikkhako vipāko ahosi; i.e. by night pleasures; by day tortures); cp. Pv ii.12 (see Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu p. 106), iii. 78; Pv-a 204, Pv-a 210 & Divy p.9. Expressions for these “mixed” devatās who are partly blessed, partly cursed are e.g. : vimānapeta Pv-a 145, Pv-a 148, Pv-a 271, Pv-a 275; f. vimāna-petī Pv-a 152, Pv-a 160 Pv-a 186, Pv-a 190; vimāna devatā Pv-a 190; vemānika-peta Ja v.2; Pv-a 244; Dhp-a iii.192 (as powerful, by the side of nāgas & supaṇṇas) ■ In their appearance they are like beautiful human beings, dressed in yellowish (pīta, expl;d as “golden” robes (cp. the angels in the oldest Christian apocalyptic literature: on their relation to Hellenic ideas see e.g. A. Dieterich, Nekyia, Leipzig 1903, pp. 10
18, 29: red & white the colours of the land of the blessed), with gold and silver as complementary outfit in person and surroundings Thus throughout the Vimāna Vatthu, esp. Nos, 36 47 (pīta-vimāna). Their splendour is often likened to that of the moon or of the morning star.
4.; Origin of Vimānas. A vimāna arises in the “other world (paraloka) at the instant of somebody doing good (even during the lifetime of the doer) and waits for the entry of the owner: Dhp-a iii.291 sq. In the description of the vimāna of the nāga-king (J vi.315 = Vv 8422) it is said on this subject: a vimāna is obtained neither without a cause (adhicca), nor has it arisen in the change of the seasons, nor is it self-made (sayankata), nor given by the gods, but “sakehi kammehi apāpakehi puññehi laddha” (i.e. won by one’s own sinless & meritorious deeds) ■ Entering the Vimāna-paradise is, analogous to all semi-lethal passing over into enchanted conditions in fairy tales, compared with the awakening from sleep (as in a state of trance): sutta-ppabuddha Dhp-a iii.7 Of the Vimāna itself it is said that it appears (pātur ahosi), e.g. Vv-a 188; Dhp-a i.131; or arises (uggañchi Dhp-a iii.291; Vv-a 221.
5. Location of the Vimānas The “vimāna” is an individual paradisiacal state Therefore vimānas are not definitely located “Elysian Fields.” They are anywhere (in this world as well as in the Beyond), but certain places are more favourable for their establishment than others. Thus we may state that κα ̓τ ἐςοξήν they are found in the neighbourhood of water. Thus either in the Ocean (majjhe sāgarasmiṃ Thag 1190; samudda-majjhe Pv-a 47), where access is possible only through adventures after shipwreck or similar causes (J. iv.1 sq.; Pv iv.11); or at one or the other of the great lakes of the Himavant (Pv ii.12). They are in out-of-the-way places (“end of the world”); they are also found in the wilderness: Vv 84; Pv iv.32. As tree-vimānas with rukkha-devatā as inhabitants they occur e.g. at Ja iii.310; Ja v.502; Pv i.9; Pv ii.9; Pv-a 244. Very often they are phantasmagorical castles in the air. By special power of their inhabitants they may be transported to any place at will. This faculty of transference is combined with the ability of extremely swift motion (compared to the speed of thought: manojava). Thus a golden palanquin is suspended in mid-air above a palace at Vv-a 6 (ākāsa-cārin, sīgha-java). They are said to be ākāsaṭṭhānāni Ja vi.117; Snp-a 222, Snp-a 370 (but the palace of the Yakkha Āḷavaka is bhumma-ṭṭha, i.e. stands on the ground, and is described as fortified: Snp-a 222) The place of a (flying) vimāna may be taken by various conveyances: a chair, an elephant, ship, bed, litter etc. Or the location of it in the other world is in the Cittalatāvana (Vv 37), or the Pāricchattaka tree (Vv 38), or in the Cātummahārājika-bhavana (Vv-a 331)-Later on, when the theory of meritorious deities (or departed souls raised to special rank) as vemānikā devā was established, their abode was with their vimānas settled among the Tāvatiṃsa (e.g. Vv-a 188, Vv-a 217, Vv-a 221 Vv-a 244, Vv-a 289; Dhp-a iii.291), or in the Tusita heaven. Thus Tusita-pura interchanges with Tusita-vimāna at Dhp-a ii.208. The latter occurs e.g. at Dhp-a iii.173, Dhp-a iii.219. 6. The dimensions of the Vimānas are of course enormous but harmonious (being “divine”), i.e. either of equal extent in all directions, or specially proportioned with significant numbers. Of these the foll. may be mentioned. The typical numbers of greatest frequency are 12, 16, 30, 700, in connection with yojana. The dimensions, with ref. to which 12 & 16 are used, are length, width, height, & girth, whereas 700 applies usually to the height (Dhp-a iii.291 e.g. , where it is said to be “over 700”), and the number of turrets (see above 2). At Vv-a 267 (satta-yojana-pamāṇo ratho) No. 7 is used for 700; No. 30 (extent) is found e.g. at Dhp-a iii.7; Thag-a 55; No. 12 e.g. at Ja vi.116; Dhp-a iii.291; Vv-a 6, Vv-a 217, Vv-a 221, Vv-a 244, Vv-a 246, Vv-a 291 sq.; No. 16 at Vv-a 188 Vv-a 289.
7. Vimānas of sun and moon. A peculiar (late?) idea is that sun and moon have their vimānas (cp. Vedic ratha = sun). There are only very few passages in the post-canonical books mentioning these The idea that the celestial bodies are vimānas (“immense chariots in the shape of open hemispheres” Kirfel Kosmographie der Inder p. 282) is essentially Jainistic See on Jain Vimānas in general Kirfel, l. c. pp. 7
9 292
300 ■ In the Pāli Com. we find Snp-a 187, Snp-a 188 (canda-vimānaṃ bhinditvā = breaking up the moon’s palace, i.e. the moon itself); and Dhp-a iii.99 (candimasuriyā vimānāni gahetvā aṭṭhaṃsu).
8. Other terms for vimāna, and specifications. Var. other expressions are used more frequently for vimāna in general. Among these are ratha (see above 1 a); nagara (Pv ii.125) pura (see above 5, as tusita˚); pāsāda; either as dibba˚ (Dhp-a iii.291), or vara˚; (Vv-a 130), or vimāna˚; (Vv 3110) ■ The vimānas are specified as deva-vimāna “heavenly palace,” e.g. Ja i.59; Vism 342; Vv-a 173 or (in a still more superlative expression) brahmavimāna i.e. best or most excellent magic palace, highest paradise, e.g. DN i.17 (here perhaps “palace of Brahmā”) iii.28 (“abode of brahmās” Rh. D.); Iti 15; Vism 108. The latter expression is abbreviated to brahma (nt. “highest, best thing of all,” “summum bonum,” paradise magic palace: Thag-a 47 (Ap. v. 6) & 55 (Ap; v. 8), at both places as sukataṃ, i.e. well made ■ A rather odd expression for the paradisiacal state (in concrete form) is attabhāva (existence, cp. Gr. βιοτή Hom. Od. iv.365?) instead of vimāna, e.g. Dhp-a i.131 (tigāvuta-ppamāṇa); iii.7 (id.).
9. Various. Of innumerable passages in the books mentioned above (under 1) only the foll. may be given for ref.: Ja iii.310 Ja iii.398, Ja iii.405; Ja v.165, Ja v.171; Ja vi.117 sq., 120 sq.; Ap 35, 55 59; Dāvs iv.54 (acalaṃ v. antalikkhamhi nāvaṃ gativirahitaṃ ambhorāsi-majjhamhi disvā); and Vimāna Vatthu throughout. Of passages in the 4 older Nikāyas we have only AN ii.33 (ye devā dīgh’ āyukā uccesu vimānesu cira-ṭṭhitikā). At SN i.12 = SN i.23 we should read “na ca mānaṃ” for “na vimānaṃ” (K.S. i.18).
in the Pāli meaning not Vedic. Found in meaning “palace-chariot” in the Mbhārata and elsewhere in Epic Sk.
disrespect, contempt Snp 887 (˚dassin showing contempt).
vi + māna
(nt.) disrespect, contempt DN iii.190 (a˚); Mil 377, Mil 386.
vi + mānana
treated with contempt AN iii.158, AN iii.160.
pp. of vimāneti
to disrespect, to treat with contempt Vin ii.260; Snp 888; Nd i.297 ■ pp. vimānita.
vi + māneti
(adj.) turning away from, averted, neglectful Mvu 22, Mvu 80; Pv-a 3 (dhamma-saññā˚), 269 (carita˚).
vi + mukha
to be released, to be free (of passion), to be emancipated MN i.352; SN ii.94, SN ii.124; SN iii.46, SN iii.189; SN iv.86; SN v.218; AN iv.126 sq. 135, 179; Snp 755; Pp 61, Pp 68; Sdhp 613 ■ aor. 3rd pl. vimucciṃsu Snp p.149 ■ pp. vimutta. See also (an)upādā & (an)upādāya; ■ Caus. vimoceti to cause to be released or emancipated, to set free AN ii.196 (cittaṃ); Vin iii.70 (id.) ■ grd. vimocanīya AN ii.196.
vi + muccati, Pass. of muñcati
freed, released, intellectually emancipated Vin i.8; AN iv.75, AN iv.179, AN iv.340; AN v.29; DN iii.97 DN iii.100, DN iii.133, DN iii.258; SN i.23, SN i.35; SN iii.13, SN iii.53, SN iii.137; Snp 354, Snp 475 Snp 522, Snp 877, Snp 1071 sq., 1101, 1114; Nd i.283; Nd ii.587; Pv iv.132 (arahā + ); Vism 410 ■ Often as cittaṃ v an emancipated heart, e.g. DN i.80; AN iii.21; SN i.46 SN i.141; SN iii.90; SN iv.164; SN v.157 (here taken by Mrs. Rh. D at S vi.93, Index, as “unregulated, distrait”); Snp 975 Nd i.284; Vb 197. ubhatobhāga˚; emancipated in both ways (see Dial ii. 70) DN ii.71; DN iii.105, DN iii.253; SN i.191; AN i.73; AN iv.10, AN iv.77, AN iv.453; AN v.23; MN i.439, MN i.477 sq ■ paññā˚; emancipated by insight, freed by reason (see Dial. ii.68) SN i.191; SN ii.123; DN ii.70; DN iii.105, DN iii.254; MN i.439, MN i.477- saddhā˚; freed by faith AN i.73; AN iv.10, AN iv.77; AN v.23; Pts ii.52; MN i.439, MN i.477 ■ anupādā vimutta freed without any further clinging to the world MN i.486; SN ii.18; SN iii.59 SN iv.83 and passim.
-atta having an emancipated self SN iii.46, SN iii.55, SN iii.58; AN iv.428. -āyatana point or occasion of emancipation of which there are 5, viz. hearing the Dhamma taught by the Master, teaching it oneself, reciting it, pondering over it, understanding it AN iii.21 sq.; DN iii.241, DN iii.279; Pts i.5.
pp. of vimuñcati
(f.) release, deliverance, emancipation DN i.174; DN iii.288; SN v.206 sq. (abhijānāti), 222 (ariya˚), 266, 356; AN ii.247, AN iii.165 (yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti), 242, Snp 54, Snp 73, Snp 725 sq.; Ja i.77, Ja i.78, Ja i.80; Pts i.22 Pts ii.143 sq.; Nd i.21; Pp 27, Pp 54 sq.; Vb 86, Vb 272 sq. 392 (micchā˚) Ne 29; Vism 410; Sdhp 614 ■ ceto (& paññā˚); emancipation of heart (and reason) DN i.156 DN iii.78, DN iii.108, DN iii.247 sq., 273; SN i.120; SN ii.214; SN iv.119 sq.v.118 sq., 289 sq.; AN i.123 sq., 220 sq.; 243; ii.36, 87 214; iii.20, 131, 400; iv.83, 314 sq.; v.10 sq.; Vb 344 Ne 40, Ne 43, Ne 81 sq., 127 ■ sammā˚; right or true emancipation AN ii.222 sq.; AN v.327; Pts i.107; Pts ii.173 ■ See also arahatta, upekkhā, khandha ii.A, dassana, phala mettā.
-rasa the essence of emancipation AN i.36; AN iv.203; Pv-a 287. -sāra substance or essence of emancipation AN ii.141, AN ii.243; AN iv.385.
fr. vimuccati
(& Vimokha) deliverance, release, emancipation, dissociation from the things of the world, Arahantship DN ii.70, DN ii.111) iii.34, 35, 230, 288; MN i.196 (samaya˚ & asamaya˚) SN i.159 (cetaso v.); ii.53, 123; iii.121; iv.33; AN ii.87 AN iv.316; AN v.11; Vin v.164 (cittassa); Snp 1071 (which Nd ii.588 expls as “agga” etc., thus strangely taking it in meaning of mokkha2, perhaps as edifying etym.); Nd ii.466 (in expln of Bhagavā); Pts i.22; Pts ii.35 (as 68!), 243 Pp 11 sq.; Vb 342; Dhs 248; Ne 90, Ne 100, Ne 119, Ne 126 Vism 13, Vism 668 sq.; Mil 159; Pv-a 98; Sdhp 34, Sdhp 264. The three vimokkhas are: suññato v., animitto v. appaṇihito v. Pts ii.35; Vism 658. The eight vimokkhas or stages of emancipation, are: the condition of rūpī, arūpa-saññī, recognition of subha, realization of ākāsānañc’āyatana, of viññāṇ’ānañc’āyatana ākiñcaññ’āyatana, neva-saññā-n’āsaññ’āyatana, saññāvedayita-nirodha DN iii.262 (cp. Dial. iii.242), AN i.40 AN iv.306; Vb 342; expld in detail at Pts ii.38–40. [cp BSk. aṣṭau vimokṣāḥ, e.g. Avs ii.69, Avs ii.153.]-In sequence jhāna vimokkha samādhi samāpatti (magga phala) at Vin i.97, Vin i.104; Vin iii.91; Vin iv.25; AN iii.417, AN iii.419 AN v.34, AN v.38; Vb 342 ■ See also jhāna.
fr. vi + muc, cp. mokkha1
(nt.) 1. letting loose, discharging Dhtm 216 (assu˚).
2. release from, doing away with Mvu 35, Mvu 73 (antarāya˚).
vi + mocana
see vimuccati.
deluded, bewildered Sdhp 363.
pp. of vi + moheti
is another spelling for bimba at SN v.217. Cp. BSk. vimbaka (form of face) Divy 172, Divy 525.
astonishment, surprise, disappointment Ja v.69 (in expln of vyamhita) Mvu 5, Mvu 92; Snp-a 42 (explaining “vata”), 256 (do. for “ve” = aho); DN-a i.43; Vv-a 234, Vv-a 329.
cp. Sk. vismaya, vi + smi
(adj.) deceiving, dismaying Snp-a 549 (= kuhaka).
fr. vimhāpati
(nt.) dismaying, deceiving, disappointing Vism 24 (in expln of kuhana); Dhtp 633 (id.).
fr. vimhāpeti
to astonish, to cause dismay to, to deceive Mvu 17, Mvu 44; DN-a i.91 (in expln of kuhaka).
Caus. of *vimhayati = vi + smi
(adj.) astonished, discouraged, dismayed Ja vi.270 (su˚ very dismayed) Mil 122; Mvu 6, Mvu 19; Dāvs ii.80. See also vyamhita.
pp. of vi + smi, cp. mihita
(indecl.) 1. part of comparison: like, as; stands for iva (usually in verse after ā: Snp 420 (jātimā v.); Pv i.85 (vārinā v.); or o Snp 580 (vajjho v.), 818 (kapaṇo v.); or ṃ: Snp 381 (vajantaṃ v.), 689 (nekkhaṃ v.).
2. dubitative particle: na viya maññe I suppose not MN ii.121. Cp. byā.
another form of iva, viâ, *via (so some Prākrits: Pischel Prk. Gr., § 143, 336) → viya. Pischel Prk. Gr. § 336, 337 derives it fr. viva = v’ iva
the diaeretic form (for sake of metre) of vya˚;, which see generally. Cp. the identical veyya˚.
= vi + a˚
(adj.) determined, of settled opinion, learned, accomplished; only in stock phrase sāvakā viyattā vinītā visāradā (which Rh. D trsls “true hearers, wise and well-trained, ready etc. Dial. ii. 114) at DN ii.104 = AN iv.310 = SN v.260 = Ud 63. The BSk. (at Divy 202) has śrāvakāh (for bhikkhū!) paṇḍitā bhaviṣyanti vyaktā vinītā viśāradāh. 2. separated, split, dissenting, heretic Snp 800 (= vavatthita bhinna dvejjhāpanna etc. Nd ii.108; = bhinna Snp-a 530). Cp. the two meanings of vavatthita (= *vyakta), which quasi-correspond to viyatta 1 & 2 At this passage the v.l. (all SS of the Commentary); viyutta is perhaps to be perferred to viyatta.
Note. It is to be noted that viyatta in § 1 does not occur in poetry, but seems to have spelling viy˚ because of the foll. vinīta and visārada. Cp. vyatta & veyyatta;.
cp. Sk. vyakta, vi + pp. of añj
(f.) distinctness Dhtp 366 & Dhtm 593 (in def;n of brū ). Cp. veyyatti.
cp. Sk. vyakti
preparation, display, distinction, splendour, majesty Snp 299 (= sampatti Snp-a 319).
vi + ākāra
in verse at Snp 1090 for vyācikkhati, i.e. vi + ācikkhati, to tell, relate, explain; pp. vyākhyāta.
gone down, lost, destroyed Snp 314 (in verse; gloss viyāvatta. The former expld as “naṭṭha,” the latter as “viparivattitvā aññathā-bhūta” at Snp-a 324).
vi + āpanna, pp. of vi + āpajjati cp. vyāpajjati
stretched out or across Ja iii.373 (in verse).
vi + āyata
striving, endeavour, undertaking Snp 953 (expld as the 3 abhisankhāras, viz puñña˚, apuñña˚ & āneñja˚ at Nd;1 442).
vi + ārambha
massed heaped; thick, dense (of fighting) MN i.86 = Nd ii.1995 (ubhato viyūlḥaṃ sangāmaṃ massed battle on both sides); AN iii.94, AN iii.99 (sangāma, cp. SN iv.308); Ja vi.275 (balaggāni viyūḷhāni; C. = pabbūḷha-vasena ṭhitāni where pabbūḷha evidently in meaning “sambādha.” 2. put in array, prepared, imminent Ja ii.336 (maraṇe viyūḷhe = paccupaṭṭhite C.). Cp. saṃyūḷha.
apparently vi + ūḷha, pp. of viyūhati, but mixed in meaning with vi + ūha (of vah ) = vyūha
to take away, carry off, remove Vin iii.48 (paṃsuṃ vyūhati) Ja i.177, Ja i.199 (paṃsuṃ), 238, 331 (kaddamaṃ dvidhā viyūhitvā); iii.52 (vālikaṃ); iv.265 (paṃsuṃ); vi.448 (vālukaṃ); Dhs-a 315; Dhp-a ii.38; Dhp-a iii.207 (paṃsuṃ). pp. viyūḷha. Cp. saṃyūhati.
vi + ūh, a differentiated form of vah
(nt.) removing, removal Vism 302 (paṃsu˚).
fr. viyūhati
separation Ja vi.482; Mvu 19, Mvu 16 (Mahābodhi˚); Pv-a 160, Pv-a 161 (pati˚ from her husband) Sdhp 77, Sdhp 164.
vi + yoga 2
to be woven Vin iii.259 ■ pp. vīta2.
Pass. of vāyati1 or vināti. The Vedic is ūyate
1. put together, composed, made Vv-a 14, Vv-a 183.
2. ornamented Thag-a 257; Vv-a 188.
vi + racita
(adj.) free from defilement or passion, stainless, faultless Vin i.294 (āgamma maggaṃ virajaṃ) Snp 139, Snp 520, Snp 636, Snp 1105 (see exegesis at Nd ii.590); Pv iii.36 (= vigata-raja, niddosa Pv-a 189); Dhp-a iv.142 Dhp-a iv.187; DN-a i.237. Often in phrase virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhamma-cakkhuṃ udapādi “there arose in him the stainless eye of the Arahant,” e.g. Vin i.16; SN iv.47- virajaṃ (+ asokaṃ) padaṃ “the stainless (+ painless element” is another expression for Nibbāna, e.g. SN iv.210; AN iv.157, AN iv.160; Iti 37, Iti 46; Vv 169; similarly ṭhānaṃ (for padaṃ) Pv ii.333 (= sagga Pv-a 89).
vi + rajo
(adj.) separated from one’s kingdom, living in a foreign country Vv-a 336.
vi + rajja + ka
to detach oneself, to free oneself of passion, to show lack of interest in (loc.). SN ii.94, SN ii.125 (nibbindaṃ [ppr.] virajjati); iii.46, 189; iv.2, 86; AN v.3; Snp 739 = SN iv.205 (tattha); Thag 247; Snp 813 (na rajjati na virajjati), 853; Nd i.138, Nd i.237; Mil 245 Sdhp 613 ■ pp. viratta ■ Caus. virājeti to put away to estrange (acc.) from (loc.), to cleanse (oneself) of passion (loc.), to purify, to discard as rāga DN ii.51; SN i.16 = Snp 171 (ettha chandaṃ v. = vinetvā viddhaṃsetvā Snp-a 213); SN iv.17 = Kv 178; AN ii.196 (rajanīyesu dhammesu cittaṃ v.); Snp 139, Snp 203; Thag 282; Pv ii.1319 (itthi-cittaṃ = viratta-citta Pv-a 168); Thag-a 49; Dhp-a i.327 (itthi-bhāve chandaṃ v. to give up desire for femininity) ■ pp. virājita.
vi + rajjati
(nt.) discolouring Ja iii.148 (rajjana + ).
fr. virajjati; cp. rajjana
to fail, miss, lose SN iv.117; Ja i.17, Ja i.490 (aor. virajjhi) ii.432 (id.); Pv-a 59 ■ pp. viraddha ■ Caus. virādheti (q.v.).
vi + rādh; cp. Sk. virādhyati: see rādheti1
(adj. nt.) without fight or harm, peace Sdhp 579.
vi + raṇa
abstaining from (abl.) Snp 59, Snp 531, Snp 704, Snp 900, Snp 1070; Nd i.314; Nd ii.591; Vv-a 72; Sdhp 338.
pp. of viramati
(f.) abstinence Mvu 20, Mvu 58. The three viratis given at DN-a i.305 (= veramaṇī) are sampatta˚ samādāna˚, setughāta˚ (q.v.). Cp. Dhs-a 154 (tisso viratiyo), 218; Sdhp 215, Sdhp 341 & Cpd. 244, n. 2.
vi + rati
dispassioned, free from passion, detached, unattached to, displeased with (loc.) SN iii.45 (rūpadhātuyā cittaṃ virattaṃ vimuttaṃ); Snp 204 (chandarāga˚), 235 (˚citta āyatike bhavasmiṃ); AN v.3 AN v.313; Ja v.233 (mayi); Sdhp 613.
pp. of virajjati
failed, missed, neglecte SN v.23 (ariyo maggo v.), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā viraddhā 254, 294; Nd i.512; Ja i.174, Ja i.490; Ja ii.384; Ja iv.71, Ja iv.497 Ne 132.
pp. of virajjhati
(f.) (missing, failure?) at Vin i.359 is uncertain reading. The vv.ll. are visuddhi, visandi & visandhi with expl;ns “viddhaṭṭhāna” & “viraddhaṭṭhāna” see p. 395.
opening; defect, flaw Nd i.165.
vi + randha2
(nt.) (-˚) abstinence, abstaining from (-˚) Mvu 14, Mvu 48 (uccā-seyyā˚).
fr. viramati
to stop, cease; to desist (abl.), abstain, refrain Snp 400 (Pot. ˚meyya), 828 (Pot. ˚me) 925; Nd i.168, Nd i.376; Thig 397 (aor. viramāsi, cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 1651); Pv iv.355 (pāpadassanaṃ, acc.); Mil 85; Pv-a 204.
vi + ramati
(& Viraḷa) (adj.) 1. sparse, rare, thin Thig 254 (of hair, expld as vilūna-kesa Thag-a 210, i.e. almost bald spelling ḷ); Dhs-a 238 (ḷ); Dhp-a i.122 (˚cchanna thinly covered); Pv-a 4 (in ratta-vaṇṇa-virala-mālā read better with v.l. as ratta-kaṇavīra-mālā, cp. Ja iii.59).
connected with Vedic ṛtē excluding, without, & nirṛti perishing; cp. also Gr. ε ̓́ρημος lonely; Lat. rarus = rare
thin, sparse, rare Dāvs iv.24 (a˚), with v.l. viraḷita.
pp. of Denom. of virala = viraleti, cp. Sk. viralāyate to be rare
(& ˚rāva ) shouting out, roaring; crying (of animals) Ja i.25, Ja i.74 (ā), 203 (of elephants); v.9 (ā, of swans).
vi + rava & rāva; cp. Vedic virava
1. to shout (out), to cry aloud; to utter a cry or sound (of animals) Ja ii.350 (kikī sakuṇo viravi); v.206; Mvu 12, Mvu 49 (mahārāvaṃ viraviṃsu mahājanā); Pv-a 154, Pv-a 217, Pv-a 245 (vissaraṃ), 279 (id.) Sdhp 179, Sdhp 188, Sdhp 291.
2. to rattle Ja i.51 ■ Caus virāveti to sound Mvu 21, Mvu 15 (ghaṇṭaṃ to ring a bell).
vi + ravati
(adj.) empty, rid of, bar, without Pv-a 137, Pv-a 139 (sīla˚).
vi + raho
(adj.) empty, exempt from, rid of, without Mil 330 (dosa˚); Pv-a 139.
vi + rahita
1. absence of rāga, dispassionateness, indifference towards (abl. or loc.) disgust, absence of desire, destruction of passions; waning, fading away cleansing, purifying; emancipation, Arahantship. DN iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 222, 243, 251, 290; SN i.136 SN iii.19 sq., 59 sq., 163, 189; iv.33 sq., 47, 226, 365 v.226, 255, 361; AN i.100, AN i.299; AN ii.26; AN iii.35, AN iii.85, AN iii.325 sq. AN iv.146 sq., 423 sq.; v.112, 359; Thag 599; Snp 795; Pts ii.220 sq.; Nd i.100; Kv 600 = Dhp 273 = Ne 188 (virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṃ); Dhs 163; Ne 16, Ne 29 Vism 290 (khaya˚ & accanta˚) 293 ■ Often nearly synonymous with; nibbāna, in the description of which it occurs frequently in foll. formula: taṇhakkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna, e.g. SN i.136; Vin i.5; AN ii.118; Iti 88 ■ or combd with nibbidā virāga nirodha upasama… nibbāna, e.g. MN i.431; SN ii.223; cp. nibbāna ii.B1 & iii.8 ■ In other connection (more objectively as “destruction”): aniccatā sankhārānaṃ etc., vipariṇāma virāga nirodha, e.g. SN iii.43; (as “ceasing fading away”:) khaya (-dhamma liable to), vaya˚ virāga˚, nirodha˚; MN i.500; SN ii.26.
2. colouring diversity or display of colour, dye, hue (= rāga 1) Ja i.89 (nānā˚-samujjala blazing forth different colours); 395 (nānā˚ variously dyed); Pv-a 50 (nānā˚-vaṇṇa-samujjala).
vi + rāga
(f.) disinterestedness, absence of lust Kv 212 = Ud 10.
abstr. fr. rāga
(adj.) at Ja v.96 is not clear. It is said of beautiful women expl;d by C. as vilagga-sarīrā, tanumajjhā, i.e. “having slender waists.” Could it be “excited with passion or “exciting passion”? Or could it be an old misreading for virājita2 ? It may also be a distorted vilāka (q.v.) or vilaggita.
fr. vi + *rāgeti, Denom. of rāga?
(adj.) 1. discoloured, fading in colour Ja iii.88 (fig. saddhā avirāginī), 148 (rāga fading in the original dye, of citta).
2. changing reversing AN iii.416 (of dukkha: dandha˚ & khippa˚ of slow & quick change; v.l. M6 is viparāgi, which may represent a vipariyāyi, i.e. changing).
fr. virāga 2, cp. rāgin
in meaning “fading away, waning” in verse at Iti 69 (of viññāṇa) is doubtful reading. It corresponds to virāgadhamma of the prose part (virāgudh˚ vv.ll.) The v.l. is pabhaṅguṇa (which might be preferable unless we regard it as an explanation of virāgin, if we should write it thus).
to fail, miss; only at MN i.327 (puriso narakapapāte papatanto hatthehi ca pādehi ca paṭhaviṃ virāgeyya “would miss the earth”; differently Neumann “Boden zu fassen suchte,” i.e. tried to touch ground)-Perhaps also in virāgāya (either as ger. to virāgeti or as instr. to virāga in sense of virādha(na) ) Pv i.117 (sukhaṃ virāgāya, with gloss virāgena, i.e. spurning one’s good fortune; expld as virajjhitvā virādhetvā at Pv-a 59). Cp. virāye (= virāge?) at Thag 1113 (see virādheti).
for virādheti, as in BSk. virāgayati (e.g. Divy 131, Divy 133) to displease, estrange, the fig. meaning of virāgeti like BSk. ārāgeti for Pāli ārādheti in lit & fig meanings
to shine Pv-a 189 (= virocati).
vi + rājati
cleansed, discarded as rāga, given up SN iv.158 (dosa); Ja iii.404 (= pahīna C.).
pp. of virājeti
shining out, resplendent Ja ii.33 (mora… suratta-rāji-virājita here perhaps = streaked?). Cp. virāgita.
pp. of Caus. of virājati
see virajjati.
(f.) failing, failure DN ii.287; AN v.211 sq.
fr. virādheti
failed, missed, lost Ja v.400; Pv iv.13 (= pariccatta C.).
pp. of virādheti
to miss, omit, fail, transgress, sin Snp 899; Thag 37, Thag 1113 virāye for virādhaya C., may be virāge, cp. Brethren 3752 see; virāgeti ); Nd i.312; Ja i.113; Ap. 47; Pv-a 59 ■ Cp virageti ■ pp. virādhita.
vi + rādheti1, or Caus. of virajjhati
see virava.
to get purged DN ii.128 (ppr. viriccamāna) ■ pp. viritta ■ Cp. vireka.
Pass. of vi + riñcati
purged Mil 214.
pp. of viriccati
(nt.) lit. “state of a strong man,” i.e. vigour, energy, effort, exertion On term see also Dhs. trsln § 13; Cpd. 242 ■ DN iii.113 DN iii.120 sq., 255 sq.; SN ii.132, SN ii.206 sq.; Snp 79, Snp 184, Snp 353, Snp 422 Snp 531, Snp 966, Snp 1026 (chanda˚); Nd i.476, Nd i.487; Nd ii.394; Ja i.178 (viriyaṃ karoti, with loc.); Pp 71; Vb 10 Ne 16, Ne 28; Tikp 60, 63; Mil 36; Vism 160 (˚upekkhā), 462; Kp-a 96; Snp-a 489; Dhp-a iv.231; DN-a i.63; Dhs-a 120; Vv-a 14; Pv-a 98, Pv-a 129; Sdhp 343, Sdhp 517. accāraddha˚; too much exertion MN iii.159; AN iii.375 opp. atilīna˚; too little ibid; uṭṭhāna˚; initiative or rousing energy SN i.21, SN i.217; AN iii.76; AN iv.282; Thag-a 267; Pv-a 129; nara˚; manly strength Ja iv.478, Ja iv.487. -viriyaṃ āra(m)bhati to put forth energy, to make an effort SN ii.28; SN iv.125; SN v.9, SN v.244 sq.; AN i.39, AN i.282, AN i.296; AN ii.15 AN iv.462 ■ As adj. (-˚) in alīna˚; alert, energetic Ja i.22 āraddha˚; full of energy, putting forth energy, strenuous SN i.53, SN i.166, SN i.198; SN ii.29, SN ii.207 sq.; SN iv.224; SN v.225; AN i.4 AN i.12; AN ii.76, AN ii.228 sq.; AN iii.65, AN iii.127; AN iv.85, AN iv.229, AN iv.291, AN iv.357 AN v.93, AN v.95, AN v.153, AN v.335; Ja i.110; ossaṭṭha˚; one who has given up effort Ja i.110; hīna˚; lacking in energy Iti 34 (here as vīriya, in metre) ■ v. is one of the indriyas, the balas & the; sambojjhaṅgas (q.v.).
-ārambha “putting forth of energy,” application of exertion, will, energy, resolution DN iii.252; SN ii.202 SN iv.175; AN i.12; AN iii.117; AN iv.15 sq., 280; v.123 sq.; Pts i.103 sq.; Vb 107, Vb 194, Vb 208; Dhs-a 145, Dhs-a 146. -indriya the faculty of energy DN iii.239, DN iii.278; SN v.196 sq.; Dhs 13 Vb 123; Ne 7, Ne 15, Ne 19; Vb-a 276. -bala the power of energy DN iii.229, DN iii.253; AN iv.363; Ja i.109. -saṃvara restraint by will Vism 7; Snp-a 8; Dhs-a 351.
fr. vīra; cp. Vedic vīrya & vīria
(f.) manliness, energy, strength MN i.19; Vv-a 284.
abstr. fr. viriya
(adj.) energetic AN i.236; Snp 528, Snp 531 (four-syllabic), 548 (three-syllabic); Vism 3 (= ātāpin); Sdhp 475.
viriya + vant
(vīṇā˚) lute-player Ja vi.51 (= vīṇā-vādaka C.). See rujaka.
to be obstructed Snp 73 (avirujjhamāna unobstructed); Ja vi.12.
vi + rujjhati
(nt.) obstructing or being obstructed, obstruction, Ja vi.448.
fr. virujjhati
(nt.) noise, sound (of animals), cry Snp 927; expld as “virudaṃ [spelling with d, like ruda for ruta] vuccati-miga-cakkaṃ; miga-cakka-pāthakā [i.e. experts in the ways of animals; knowers of auspices migacakkaṃ ādisanti” at Nd i.382; and as “mig’ ādīnaṃ vassitaṃ” at Snp-a 564. The passage is a little doubtful when we compare the expression viruṭañ ca gabbhakaraṇaṃ at Snp 927 with the passage viruddha-gabbhakaraṇaṃ at DN i.11 (cp. DN-a i.96), which seems more original.
vi + ruta
hindered, obstructed, disturbed SN i.236; Snp 248, Snp 630; Nd i.239; Mil 99, Mil 310; Ja i.97 ■ Often neg. a˚ unobstructed, free SN i.236 SN iv.71; AN iii.276 (˚ka); Dhp 406; Snp 365, Snp 704, Snp 854; Vb-a 148 = Vism 543.
-gabbha-karaṇa (using charms for) procuring abortion DN i.11; DN-a i.96 (expld here as first trying to destroy the foetus and afterwards giving medicine for its preservation). See also viruta.
pp. of virundhati
to obstruct etc. Pass. virujjhati (q.v.) ■ pp. viruddha ■ Caus. virodheti. (q.v.).
vi + rundhati
(adj.) deformed, unsightly, ugly Snp 50; Ja i.47; Ja iv.379; Ja vi.31, Ja vi.114; Pv-a 24, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 47; Sdhp 85.
at Snp 50 virūpa is taken as “various” by Bdhgh (Snp-a 99), and virūpa-rūpa expld as vividha-rūpa, i.e. diversity, variety. So also the Niddesa.
vi + rūpa
having grown, growing SN ii.65 (viññāṇe virūḷhe āyatiṃ punnabbhav’ âbhinibbatti hoti).
pp. of virūhati
(f.) growth MN i.250; SN iii.53; AN iii.8, AN iii.404 sq.; AN v.152 sq., 161, 350 sq.; Iti 113; Mil 33 Mvu 15, Mvu 42; Vb-a 196 ■ avirūḷhi-dhamma not liable to growth Snp 235; Dhp-a i.245.
vi + rūḷhi, of ruh
to grow, sprout Iti 113; Mil 386; DN-a i.120 ■ Cp. paṭi˚ ■ pp. virūḷha ■ Caus II. virūhāpeti to make grow, to foster Mil 386.
vi + rūhati1
(f.) & ˚a (nt.) growing, growth Ja ii.323 (f.); Mil 354; Vism 220; DN-a i.161; Pv-a 7.
vi + rūhanā
Mil 134 (cp. Vin i.279).
(nt.) purging, a purgative Vin i.206 (˚ṃ pātuṃ to drink a p.), 279 (id.); DN i.12; AN v.218; Ja iii.48 (sineha˚ an oily or softening purgative); DN-a i.98.
vi + recana, ric
(adj.) (one who is) to be treated with a purgative Mil 169.
grd. formation fr. virecana
to purge Mil 229, Mil 335.
vi + Caus. of riñcati
to shine (forth), to be brilliant Vin ii.296 (tapati, bhāsati, v.); Snp 378, Snp 550; Iti 64 (virocare); Ja i.18, Ja i.89; Ja iv.233; Pv i.114; ii.962; iii.35 (= virājati Pv-a 189); Dhp-a i.446; Dhp-a iv.143; Dhs-a 14; Pv-a 110 (˚amāna = sobhamāna), 136 sq., 157. Cp. verocana. Caus. viroceti to illumine Mil 336.
vi + rocati
obstruction, hindrance, opposition, enmity SN i.111; SN iv.71, SN iv.210; Snp 362; Pp 18, Pp 22; Kv 485; Mil 394; Dhs-a 39 ■ avirodha absence of obstruction, gentleness MN ii.105 = Thag 875; Pv iii.73.
vi + rodha1
(adj. nt.) opposing, obstruction, opposition, contradiction, only neg. a˚ absence of opposition, Ja iii.274, Ja iii.320, Ja iii.412; Ja v.378.
fr. virodheti
obstructed, rendered hostile Pgdp 90 (or is it virādhita ?).
pp. of virodheti
to cause obstruction, to render hostile, to be in disharmony, to exasperate SN iv.379 = AN v.320 (which latter passage reads viggaṇhati instead); Sdhp 45, Sdhp 496 ■ pp. virodhita.
Caus. of virundhati
(f.) causing anger Vb 86; Vb-a 75.
vi + rosanā
(adj.-n..) wrong or false characteristic; (adj.) discharacteristic, i.e. inconsistent with characteristics, discrepant (opp. sa˚; in accordance with ch.) Mil 405; Ne 78; Vb-a 250 sq.
vi + lakkhaṇa
(adj.) 1. stuck Vin i.138; MN i.393. - 2. slender (of waist) Ja v.96 (see virāgita), 216 (see vilāka ).
vi + lagga
(adj.) stretched or bending (?), slender Ja iv.20 (see under vilāka ).
vi + laggita
(nt.) the plant Erycibe paniculata Vin i.201 (v.l. viḷ˚) ■ ˚thālikā at Nd i.154 read as bilaṅga˚; (q.v.).
*Sk. viḍanga
in hattha˚; jerking of the hand beckoning (as a mode of making signs) Vin i.157; MN i.207 (has g for gh, cp. p. 547) ■ Cp. hattha-vikāra.
fr. vilangheti
to jump about, to leap (over) Sdhp 168.
vi + langhati
to be ashamed, to be bashful, to pretend bashfulness Ja v.433.
vi + lajjati
1. to talk idly Ja i.496.
2. to lament, wail Thag 705; Ja ii.156; Ja v.179; Mil 275; Thag-a 148 (Ap. v. 66).
vi + lapati
(adj.) hanging down; only in redupl ■ iter. cpd. olamba-vilamba dropping or falling off all round Ja iv.380.
vi + lamba
to loiter, to tarry, lit. “hang about” Ja i.413; Dhp-a i.81.
vi + lambati
(adj.) hanging down, drooping MN i.306 (f. ˚inī, of a creeper, i.e. growing tendrils all over).
vi + lambin
dissolution; ˚ṃ gacchati, as much as: “to be digested,” to be dissolved Mil 67. adj. dissolved, dispersed Dpvs i.65.
vi + laya, cp. līyati
to play, dally, sport; to shine forth, to unfold splendour Ja v.38 (of a tree “stand herrlich da” Dutoit), 433 (of woman); vi.44 (of a tree, vilāsamāna T.) ■ pp. vilasita.
vi + lasati
(adj.) shining; gay, playful, coquettish Ja v.420.
pp. of vilasati
(adj.) only in f ˚a: slender (of waist); the expln with vilagga may refer to a comparison with a creeper (cp. vilambin & Ja v.215 as “hanging” (“climbing”) i.e. slim, but seems forced See also virāgita which is expld in the same way. The word is peculiar to the “Jātaka” style ■ Ja iv.19 (= suṭṭhu- vilaggita -tanu-majjhā); v.155 (+ mudukā; C expls as sankhitta-majjhā), 215 (˚majjhā = vilaggasarīrā C.), 506 (velli-vilāka-majjhā = vilagga-majjhā tanu-dīgha-majjhā C.); Vv-a 280 (˚majjhā for sumajjhimā of Vv 6413; T. reads vilāta˚; ).
perhaps = vilagga (Geiger, P.Gr. § 612), although difficult to connect in meaning
idle talk Ja i.496; Ja v.24. Cp. saṃ˚.
vi + lāpa
(f.) = vilāpa Pp 21.
1. charm, grace, beauty Ja i.470; Ja vi.43; Mil 201; Thag-a 78; Pv-a 3 ■ desanā˚; beauty of instruction DN-a i.67; Vism 524, Vism 541; Tikp 21.
2. dalliance sporting, coquetry Ja iii.408; Ja v.436. vilāsa is often coupled with līlā (q.v.).
fr. vilasati
(adj.) having splendour, grace or beauty Mvu 29, Mvu 25.
fr. vilāsa
(adj.) shining forth, unfolding splendour, possessing charm or grace, charming DN-a i.40 (vyāmapabhā parikkhepa-vilāsinī splendour shining over a radius of a vyāma).
fr. vilāsa
1. to scrape, scratch SN i.124 (bhūmiṃ); iv.198; Dhs-a 260 (fig. manaṃ v. ; in expln of vilekha ).
2. to scratch open Vin ii.175 ■ pp vilikhita.
vi + likhati
scraped off Snp-a 207.
pp. of vilikhati
anointed DN i.104 (su-nahāta suvilitta kappita-kesa-massu); Ja iii.91; Ja iv.442.
pp. of vilimpati
to smear, anoint AN iii.57; Ja i.265 (ger. ˚itvā); iii.277 (ppr. ˚anto): Pv i.106 (ger ˚itvāna) Pv-a 62 (˚itvā) ■ pp. vilitta ■ Caus. II. vilimpāpeti to cause to be anointed Ja i.50 (gandhehi), 254 (id.). Vilivili (-kriya)
vi + limpati
see biḷibiḷikā.
(adj.) 1. clinging, sticking [cp. līyati 1] Vin i.209 (olīna˚ sticking all over). 2. matured (“digested”? cp. vilaya) Ja iv.72 (nava˚gosappi freshly matured ghee); Mil 301 (phalāni ripefruit).
3. [cp. līyati 2] molten, i.e. refined, purified Ja iv.118 (tamba-loha˚ molten or liquid-hot copper) v. 269 (tamba-loha˚, id.; cp. C. on p. 274; vilīnaṃ tambālohaṃ viya pakkaṭṭhitaṃ lohitaṃ pāyenti); Dhs-a 14 (˚suvaṇṇa) ■ Cp. uttatta in same sense and the expln of velli as “uttatta-ghana-suvaṇṇa-rāsi-ppabbā” at Ja v.506 C.
vi + līna, pp. of vilīyati
to melt (intrs.), to be dissolved, to perish Ja iv.498; Vism 420 (pabbata, spelling here with ḷ; Warren wrong “are hidden from view,” i.e. nilīyati) Dhs-a 336 (phānita-piṇḍa; trsln not to the point “reduced or pounded”); Sdhp 383; Pgdp 21 ■ pp vilīna ■ Cp. pa˚.
vi + līyati 2
(nt.) melting, dissolution Sdhp 201. Viliva & Viliva;
fr. vilīyati
(adj.) [Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Sk, bilma slip, chip. Phonetically viliva = Sk. bilva: see billa 1. made of split bamboo Vin ii.266 (i).
2. (ī) a chip of bamboo or any other reed, a slip of reed MN i.566 (Bdhgh on MN i.429); Vism 310 (˚maya).
a worker in bamboo, a basketmaker Vin iii.82; Mil 331; Vb-a 222 (˚ka in simile) Pv-a 175.
vilīva + kāra
(adj.) broken; only in redupl ■ iter. cpd. olugga-vilugga all broken up, tumbling to pieces MN i.80, MN i.450.
vi + lugga
plundered, stripped, robbed, ruined SN i.85 = Ja ii.239; Ja v.99; Ja vi.44; Mil 303; Mvu 33, Mvu 71 (corehi).
pp. of vilumpati
(adj.) (act. or pass.) plundering or being plundered Ja i.370 (˚cora); ii.239 (pass.).
fr. vi + lup
to plunder, rob, steal, ruin SN i.85 = Ja ii.239; Ja v.99; Mil 193; Vv-a 100; Dhp-a iii.23-Pass. viluppati Ja v.254 (gloss for ˚lump˚ of p. 253)-pp. vilutta ■ Caus. II. vilumpāpeti to incite to plunder Mil 193; Ja i.263.
vi + lumpati
(nt.) plundering Dhp-a iii.23. Vilumpamana(ka)
fr. vilumpati
plundering, robbing Ja v.254; Pv-a 4 (˚ka cora).
orig. ppr. med. of vilumpati
(adj.) stirred, agitated, shaken, disturbed Dāvs iv.54 (bhaya˚citta). Cp. viloḷeti.
vi + luḷita; cp. BSk. vilulita Jtm 210
(adj.) cut off (always with ref. to the hair) MN iii.180 = AN i.138; Mil 11; Pv-a 47.
vi + lūna
perplexity, lit. “scratching” Vin iv.143 (here as f. ˚ā); Dhs 1256 (mano˚); Dhs-a 260. The more common word for “perplexity” is vikkhepa.
vi + lekha
(nt.) ointment, cosmetic, toilet perfume AN i.107, AN i.212; AN ii.209; Thag 616 (sīlaṃ v. seṭṭhaṃ Cp. Ja iii.290); Pp 51, Pp 58; Pv ii.316; DN-a i.77 DN-a i.88.
vi + lepana
(nt.) looking, reflection, investigation, prognostication usually as 5 objects of reflection as to when & where & how one shall be reborn (; pañca-mahā-˚āni ), consisting in kāla, desa, dīpa, kula, mātā (the latter as janetti-āyu i.e. mother and her time of delivery at Ja i.48) or time (right or wrong), continent, sky (orientation), family (or clan) and one’s (future) mother: Ja i.48, Ja i.49; Dhp-a i.84; as 8 at Mil 193, viz. kāla, dīpa, desa, kula, janetti āyu, māsa, nekkhamma (i.e. the 5 + period of gestation month of his birthday, and his renunciation). Without special meaning at DN-a i.194 (ālokana + ). Cp. volokana.
vi + lok (loc = roc ), see loka & rocati
(nt.) a look AN ii.104, AN ii.106 sq., 210; Pp 44, Pp 45; DN-a i.193; Vv-a 6 (ālokita + ).
pp. of viloketi
one who looks or inspects DN-a i.194 (āloketar + ).
n. ag. fr. viloketi
to examine, study, inspect, scrutinize, reflect on Thig 282; Ja i.48, Ja i.49; Dhp-a i.84; Mil 193; Mvu 22, Mvu 18 ■ pp. vilokita. Cp. pa˚; & vo˚.;
vi + loketi, of lok, as in loka
(nt.) the eye Dāvs i.41; Thag-a 253.
vi + locana
plunder, pillage MN i.456 (maccha˚ fishhaul); Ja i.7; Ja iii.8; Ja vi.409; Dpvs ix.7 (˚kamma). vilopaṃ khādati to live by plunder Ja vi.131.
vi + lopa
(adj.) plundering, living by plundering Ja i.5; Mil 122 (f. ˚ikā).
fr. vilopa
(adj.) to be plundered; neg. a˚; Sdhp 311.
grd. formation fr. vilopa
(f.) unseemliness, repugnance Snp-a 106.
abstr. fr. viloma
(adj.) against the grain (lit. against the hair), discrepant, reversed, wrong, unnatural Vin ii.115 (of cīvara: unsightly); Ja iii.113; Dpvs vii.55; Dhp-a i.379; Pv-a 87.
vi + loma
(nt.) discrepancy, disagreement, reverse Dhs-a 253.
fr. viloma
to dispute, disagree with, to find fault Ne 22; Mil 29, Mil 295; Dhs-a 253.
Denom. fr. viloma
(nt.) & Viloṭana; [fr. vi + luḍ; cp. Whitney, Sanskrit Roots, 1885, p. 149, where themes & their forms are given by; luṭh1 to roll, luṭh2 & luṇṭh; to rob, luḍ to stir up (some forms of it having meaning of luṇṭh) = lul to be lively] shaking, stirring; only found in lexicogr. literature as defn of several roots, viz. of gāh Dhtp 349; Dhtm 504; math & manth; (see mathati Dhtp 126; Dhtm 183. See also luḷati.
fr. vi + luḷ
to stir, to move about Ja i.26; Dpvs vi.52.
vi + loḷeti or loleti, cp. vilulita
to burn (intrs.) Ja ii.220.
vi + dayhati
at AN iii.122 read as biḷāra (sasa-biḷārā rabbits & cats).;
1. abandoning, abstaining from Vv-a 75 (˚kiliṭṭha-kamma).
2. avoided Thig 459. 3. distant from (abl.) Mil 131.
pp. of vivajjeti
to avoid, abandon, forsake SN i.43; AN v.17; Snp 53 (= parivajj˚ abhivajj˚ Nd ii.592), 399 (˚jjaya), 407 (praet. ˚jjayi); Vv 8438 (˚jjayātha = parivajjetha Vv-a 346); Ja i.473; Ja iii.263, Ja iii.481 (˚jjayi); v.233 (Pot. ˚jjaye); Mil 129; Sdhp 210, Sdhp 353, Sdhp 395 ■ pp vivajjita ■ Pass. vivajjati Ja i.27.
vi + vajjeti
uncovered, open (lit. & fig.), laid bare, unveiled Snp 19 (lit.), 374 (fig. anāvaṭa Snp-a 366), 763, 793 (= open-minded); Nd i.96 Pp 45, Pp 46 (read vivaṭa for pi vaṭa; opp. pihita); Vism 185 (opp. pihita); Ja v.434; Dhp-a iii.79; Vv-a 27; Pv-a 283 (mukha unveiled) ■ vivaṭena cetasā “with mind awake & clear” DN iii.223; AN iv.86; SN v.263; cp. cetovivaraṇa ■ vivaṭa is freq.v.l. for vivatta (-cchada) e.g. at AN ii.44; Snp 372; Dhp-a iii.195; Snp-a 265 (in expln of term); sometimes the only reading in this phrase (q.v.), e.g. at Nd ii.593 ■ instr. vivaṭena as adv “openly” Vin ii.99; Vin iv.21.
-cakkhu open-minded, clear-sighted Snp 921; Nd i.354 -dvāra (having) an open door, an open house Ja v.293 (aḍḍha˚ half open); Dhp-a ii.74 -nakkhatta a yearly festival, “Public Day,” called after the fashion of the people going uncovered (appaṭicchannena sarīrena) bare-footed to the river Dhp-a i.388.
vi + vaṭa, pp. of vṛ;: see vuṇāti
(adj.) open (i.e. not secret) Vin ii.99.
vivaṭa + ka
(m. & nt.) 1. “rolling back,” with ref. to the development of the world (or the aeons kappa) used to denote a devolving cycle (“devolution”) whereas vaṭṭa alone or saṃvaṭṭa denote the involving cycle (both either with or without kappa). Thus as “periods” of the world they practically mean the same thing & may both be interpreted in the sense of a; new beginning. As redupl ■ inter. cpds. they express only the idea of constant change. We sometimes find vivaṭṭa in the sense of “renewal” & saṃvaṭṭa in the sense of “destruction,” where we should expect the opposite meaning for each. See also vaṭṭa & saṃvaṭta; Dogmatically vivaṭṭa is used as “absence of vaṭṭa, i.e. nibbāna or salvation from saṃsāra (see vaṭṭa cp. citta-vivaṭṭa, ceto˚, ñāṇa˚, vimokkha˚ at Ps; i.108 & ii.70) ■ Fig. in kamma˚; “the rolling back of k., i.e. devolution or course of kamma at SN i.85 ■ Abs & comb;d with saṃvaṭṭa (i.e. devolution combd with evolution) e.g. at DN i.14, DN i.16 sq.; DN iii.109; AN ii.142 (where read vivaṭṭe for vivaṭṭo); Pp 60; Vism 419 (here as m. vivaṭṭo, compared with saṃvaṭṭo), 420 (˚ṭṭhāyin) In cpd. ˚kappa (i.e. descending aeon) at DN iii.51; Pp 60; Iti 15.
2. (nt.) part of a bhikkhu’s dress (rolling up of the binding?), combd with anu- vivaṭṭa at Vin i.287.
vi + vaṭṭa;1
1. to move back, to go back, to revolve, to begin again (of a new world-cycle), contrasted with saṃvaṭṭati to move in an ascending line (cp vivaṭṭa) DN i.17; DN iii.84, DN iii.109; Vism 327.
2. to be distracted or diverted from (abl.), to turn away; to turn over, to be upset Ne 131; Pp 32 (so read for vivattati); Pts ii.98 (ppr.) ■ pp. vivaṭṭa.
vi + vaṭṭati
(nt.) & ˚ā (f) turning away, moving on, moving back Ps; i.66; ii.98; Vism 278 (f. expld as “magga”).
fr. vivaṭṭati
to turn down or away (perhaps in dogmatic sense to turn away from saṃsāra), to divert destroy: only in phrase vivaṭṭayi saṃyojanaṃ (in standard setting with acchecchi taṇhaṃ ), where the usual v.l. is vāvattayi (see vāvatteti ). Thus at MN i.12 MN i.122; SN i.127; SN iv.105, SN iv.205, SN iv.207, SN iv.399; AN i.134; AN iii.246 AN iii.444 sq.; AN iv.8 sq.; Iti 47 (T. vivattayi).
vi + vaṭṭeti
(adj.) discoloured, pale, wan Snp 585; Thig 79; Ja ii.418.
vi + vaṇṇa
(nt.) dispraise, reviling Vin iv.143.
fr. vivaṇṇeti
to dispraise, defame Pv iii.106 (thūpa-pūjaṃ); Pv-a 212.
vi + vaṇṇeti
(adj.) having the cover removed, with the veil lifted; one who draws away the veil (cp. vivaraṇa or reveals (the Universe etc.); or one who is freed of all (mental & spiritual) coverings (thus Bdhgh), Ep. of the Buddha ■ Spelling sometimes; chadda˚; (see chada)-D i.89; ii.16; iii.142 (dd; sammā-sambuddha loke vivatta-chadda; trsln “rolling back the veil from the world”), 177 (dd); AN ii.44 (v.l. dd); Snp 372 (expld as “vivaṭa-rāga-dosa-moha-chadana Snp-a 365), 378, 1003 (ed. Snp p.efers dd as T. reading); Nd ii.593 (with allegorical interpretation); Ja i.51; Ja iii.349; Ja iv.271 (dd) Dhp-a i.201 (v.l. dd); iii.195; DN-a i.250 ■ It occurs either as vivatta˚; or vivaṭa˚. In the first case (vivatta˚; the expln presents difficulties, as it is neither the opp of vatta (“duty”), nor the same as vivaṭṭa (“moving back” intrs.), nor a direct pp. of vivattati (like Sk vivṛtta) in which meaning it would come nearer to “stopped, reverted, ceased.” vivattati has not been found in Pāli. The only plausible expln would be taking it as an abs. pp. formation fr. vṛt in Caus. sense (vatteti) thus “moved back, stopped, discarded”, in meaning “uncovered, lifted, off,” referring to the covering (chada) as uncovered instead of the uncovered object. See vivaṭa. It is difficult to decide between the two meanings. On the principle of the “lectio difficilior” vivatta would have the preference whereas from a natural & simple point of view; vivaṭa seems more intelligible & more fitting. It is evidently an; old phrase. Note. -vivatta-kkhandha at SN i.121 is a curious expression (“with his shoulders twisted round”?). Is it an old misreading for pattakkhandha? Cp. however, S.A. quoted K.S. i.151 n. 5, explaining it as a dying monk’s effort to gain an orthodox posture.
cp. BSk vivartayati to cast off a garment, Divy 39). In the second case (vivaṭa˚; ) it is pp. of vivarati [vi + vṛ;: see vuṇāti
at Pp 32 is to be read as vivaṭṭati.
1. to dispute, quarrel Snp 842, Snp 884; Ja i.209; Mil 47.
2. (intrs.) to be quarrelled with SN iii.138.
vi + vadati
(nt.) causing separation, making discord DN i.11; DN-a i.96.
fr. vivadati
(carrying yoke) see khārī-vidha and vividha2.
(nt.) wilderness, barren land SN i.100; Vv 776 (= arañña Vv-a 302); Ja ii.191, Ja ii.317.
vi + vana
(nt.) 1. opening (lit. dis-covering), pore, cleft, leak, fissure Dhp 127 (pabbatānaṃ; cp Divy 532; Mil 150; Pv-a 104); Vism 192, Vism 262; Ja iv.16; Ja v.87; Dhp-a iv.46 (mukha˚); Snp-a 355; Pv-a 152, Pv-a 283. 2. interval, interstice DN i.56 (quoted at Pv iv.327) Vism 185.
3. fault, flaw, defect AN iii.186 sq.; Ja v.376.
fr. vi + vṛ;
(nt.) 1. uncovering, unveiling, making open, revelation, in loka˚; laying open the worlds, unveiling of the Universe; referred to as a great miracle at Vism 392; Mil 350; Dāvs ii.120; Ja iv.266–2. opening, unfolding, making accessible, purifying (fig.), in ceto˚; AN iii.117, AN iii.121; AN iv.352; AN v.67.
3. explanation making clear (cp. vibhajana ) Ne 8 (as f.) Snp-a 445.
fr. vivarati
1. to uncover, to open Vin ii.219 (windows, opp. thaketi); DN i.85 (paṭicchannaṃ v.); Ja i.63 (dvāraṃ), 69; iv.133 (nagaraṃ) Dhp-a i.328 (vātapānaṃ); DN-a i.228; Pv-a 74 (mukhaṃ) Vv-a 157, Vv-a 284.
2. (fig.) to open, make clear, reveal SN iv.166; SN v.261; Kp-a 12 (+ vibhajati etc.) ■ pp vivaṭa.
vi + varati vṛ; see vuṇāti
to live away from home, to be separated, to be distant Ja iv.217 ■ Cp. vippavasati.
vi + vasati2
(nt.) (gradually) getting light; turning into dawn (said of the night), only in phrase ratyā vivasane at the end of night, combd in stock phrase with suriy’ uggamanaṃ pati “towards sunrise” (evidently an old phrase) at Thag 517; Ja iv.241; Ja v.381, Ja v.461; Ja vi.491; Pv iii.82. Also at Snp 710.
vi + vas (uṣ) to shine, cp. vibhāti
lit. to make [it] get light; rattiṃ v. to spend the night (till it gets light) Snp 1142 Nd ii.594 (= atināmeti)- vivasati is Kern’s proposed reading for vijahati (rattiṃ) at Thag 451. He founds his conjecture on aN v.l. vivasate & the C. expl;n “atināmeti khepeti.” Mrs. Rh. D. trsls “waste” (i.e. vijahati).
Caus. of vi + vas to shine
dispute, quarrel, contention DN i.236; DN iii.246; AN iv.401; Snp 596, Snp 863, Snp 877, Snp 912; Nd i.103, Nd i.167 Nd i.173, Nd i.260, Nd i.307; Pp 19, Pp 22; Ud 67; Ja i.165; Mil 413; Vv-a 131. There are 6 vivāda-mūlāni (roots of contention), viz. kodha, makkha, issā, sāṭheyya, pāpicchatā, sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsa or anger, selfishness, envy fraudulence, evil intention, worldliness: DN iii.246; AN iii.334 sq.; Vb 380; referred to at Pts i.130. There is another list of 10 at AN v.78 consisting in wrong representations regarding dhamma & vinaya.
fr. vi + vad
a quarreller Ja i.209.
fr. vivāda
(vivādeti) to quarrel Snp 832 (= kalahaṃ karoti Nd i.173), 879, 895. Pot. 3rd sg vivādiyetha (= kolahaṃ kareyya Nd i.307), & vivādayetha Snp 830 (id. expln Nd i.170).
Denom. fr. vivāda
“carrying or sending away,” i.e. marriage, wedding DN i.99; Snp p.105; Pv-a 144; Snp-a 448 (where distinction āvāha = kaññā-gahaṇaṃ, vivāha kaññā-dānaṃ) ■ As nt. at Vin iii.135. Cp. āvāha & vevāhika.;
fr. vi + vah
(nt.) giving in marriage or getting a husband for a girl (cp. āvāhana) DN i.11; DN-a i.96. Cp Vin iii.135.
fr. vi + vah
(indecl.) separating oneself from (instr.), aloof from DN i.37; AN iii.25; Ja vi.388; Dhs 160 Pp 68; Vism 139, Vism 140 (expld in detail) ■ Doubtful reading at Pv i.119 (for viricca?) ■ As viviccaṃ (& a˚ at Ja v.434 in meaning “secretly” (= raho paṭicchannaṃ C.).
ger. of viviccati
to separate oneself, to depart from, to be alone, to separate (intrs.) Vin iv.241; ger. viviccitvā Dhs-a 165, & vivicca (see sep.) ■ pp. vivitta ■ Cp viveceti.
vi + vic
to desire, long for, want Ne 11.
Desid. of vindati
(f.) manifold desire, greediness, avarice Dhs-a 375; Ne 11 (where expln “vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā ”). See also veviccha.
Desid. of vid, cp. Sk. vivitsā
(adj.) separated, secluded, aloof, solitary, separate, alone DN i.71; SN i.110; AN ii.210; AN iii.92; AN iv.436; AN v.207, AN v.270; Snp 221, Snp 338, Snp 810 Snp 845; Nd i.201; Kv 605; Mil 205; DN-a i.208; Dhs-a 166; Dhp-a iii.238; Dhp-a iv.157 (so read for vivivitta!); Vb-a 365; Pv-a 28, Pv-a 141, Pv-a 283. Cp. pa˚.
pp. of viviccati; vi + vitta3
(adj.) solitary Ja iv.242 (˚āvāsa).
vivitta + ka
(f.) seclusion (= viveka) Vb-a 316, cp. K.S. i.321.
abstr. fr. vivitta
(f.) separation Dhs-a 166 ■ Cp. viveka.
fr. viviccati
(adj.) divers, manifold, mixed; full of, gay with (-˚) DN ii.354; Pv ii.49; Vv 359; Mil 319 Mvu 25, Mvu 30; Snp-a 136 (in expln of vi˚: “viharati vividhaṃ hitaṃ harati”).
vi + vidha1
carrying-yoke DN i.101; SN i.78 (as v.l. khāri-vividhaṃ, see khāri); Ja iii.116 (parikkhāraṃ vividhaṃ ādāya, where v.l. reads khāriṃ vividhaṃ).
for Sk. vivadha; vi + vah
detachment, loneliness, separation, seclusion; “singleness” (of heart), discrimination (of thought) DN i.37, DN i.182; DN iii.222, DN iii.226, DN iii.283 = SN iv.191 (˚ninna citta); SN i.2, SN i.194; SN iv.365 sq.; SN v.6, SN v.240 sq. AN i.53; AN iii.329; AN iv.224; Vin iv.241; Snp 474, Snp 772, Snp 822 Snp 851, Snp 915, Snp 1065; Nd i.158, Nd i.222; Ja i.79; Ja iii.31; Dhs 160 Pp 59, Pp 68; Ne 16, Ne 50; Dhs-a 164, Dhs-a 166; Thag-a 64; Pv-a 43; Sdhp 471 ■ viveka is given as fivefold at Pts ii.220 sq. and Vb-a 316, cp. K.S. i.321 (Bdhgh on SN iii.2, SN iii.8), viz. tadanga˚, vikkhambhana˚, samuccheda paṭippassaddhi˚, nissaraṇa˚; as threefold at Vism 140 viz. kāya˚, citta˚, vikkhambhana˚, i.e. physically mentally, ethically; which division amounts to the same as that given at Nd i.26 with kāya˚, citta˚, upadhi˚ the latter equivalent to “nibbāna.” Cp. on term Dial. i.84. See also jhāna. Cp. pa˚. Vivekatta = vivittata
fr. vi + vic
VbhA 316.
(nt.) discrimination, specification Dhs-a 388.
abstr. fr. vivecita, pp. of viveceti
to cause separation, to separate, to keep back, dissuade Vin i.64; DN i.226; SN iii.110 MN i.256; Pv iii.107 (= paribāheti Pv-a 214); Mil 339; Dhs-a 311; Ne 113, Ne 164 (˚iyamāna).
Caus. of viviccati
to get entangled Vin ii.117.
vi + veṭhïyati
distinction DN i.229, DN i.233. We should read visesa, as printed on p. 233.
?
(nt.) poison, virus venom MN i.316 = SN ii.110; Thag 418; Thag 768; Snp 1 (sappa snake venom); AN ii.110; Ja i.271 (halāhala˚ deadly p.) iii.201; iv.222; Pp 48; Mil 302; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 256; Thag-a 489 ■ On visa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 137. Cp āsī˚.
-uggāra vomiting of poison Snp-a 176. -kaṇṭaka a poisoned thorn or arrow, also name of a sort of sugar Dhs-a 203. -kumbha a vessel filled with p. Iti 86 -pānaka a drink of p. Dhp-a ii.15. -pīta (an arrow dipped into poison (lit. which has drunk poison). At another place (see pīta1) we have suggested reading visappita (visa + appita), i.e. “poison-applied,” which was based on reading at Vism 303. See e.g. Ja v.36; Mil 198; Vism 303, Vism 381; Dhp-a i.216. -rukkha “poison tree,” a cert. tree Vism 512; Vb-a 89; DN-a i.39. -vaṇijjā trading with poison AN iii.208. -vijjā science of poison DN-a i.93 ■ vejja a physician who cures poison (ous snake-bites) Ja i.310. -salla a poisoned arrow Vism 503.
cp. Vedic viṣa; Av. viš poison, Gr. ἰός, Lat. vīrus, Oir. fī: all meaning “poison”
is P. prefix corresponding to Sk. viṣu (or visva˚; in meaning “diverging, on opposite sides,” apart, against; only in cpd. ˚vādeti and derivations, lit to speak wrong, i.e. to deceive.
see vi˚;
(& visaññutta ) (adj.) 1. (lit.) unharnessed, unyoked Thag 1021 (half-fig.).
2. detached from the world AN i.262 = AN iii.214; SN ii.279 (ññ) Thag 1022; Snp 621, Snp 626, Snp 634; Dhp-a iii.233 (sabba-yoga˚) iv.141, 159, 185.
vi + saṃyutta
(& visaññoga ) disconnection, separation from (-˚), dissociation Vin ii.259 (ññ) = AN iv.280; DN iii.230 (kāma-yoga˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ cp. the 4 oghas), 276; AN ii.11; AN iii.156.
vi + saṃyoga
deceiving; neg. a˚; Mil 354.
visaṃ + vāda
(adj.) deceiving, untrustworthy Vism 496; f. ˚ikā Ja v.401, Ja v.410 ■ a˚; not deceiving DN iii.170; AN iv.249; MN iii.33; Pp 57.
visaṃ + vādaka
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) & ˚atā (f.) deceiving, disappointing AN v.136 (˚ā); Vin iv.2 ■ a˚ honesty DN iii.190 (˚atā ).
fr. visaṃvādeti
one who deceives another DN iii.171.
n. ag. fr. visaṃvādeti
to deceive with words, to break one’s word, to lie, deceive Vin iii.143; Vin iv.1 Ne 91 ■ Neg. a˚; Ja v.124.
visaṃ + vādeti; cp. BSk. visaṃvādayati Avs i.262, after the Pāli
(adj.) separated, unconnected with (instr.) MN i.480; DN-a i.59.
vi + saṃsaṭṭha
removed, destroyed Thag 89.
vi + saṃhata2
in ˚dūta is a special kind of messenger Vin iii.74.
vi + sakkiya?
see a˚.
(adj.) fearless, secure; a˚; Sdhp 176.
vi + sanka; Sk. viśanka
(adj.) suspicious, anxious Thag-a 134 (Ap. v. 78) ■ neg. a˚; not perturbed, trusting secure Sdhp 128.
pp. of vi + śaṅk
divestment of all material things Dhp 154 (= nibbāna Dhp-a iii.129). See sankhāra 3.
vi + sankhāra
destroyed, annihilated Dhp 154; Ja i.493 (= viddhaṃsita Dhp-a iii.129).
vi + sankhata
to hang on, cling to, stick to, adhere (fig.) only in pp. visatta (q.v.) ■ The apparent ger. form visajja belongs to vissajjati.
vi + sajjati, Pass. of sañj; the regular Act. would be visajati
(adj.) 1. having wrong perceptions Snp 874.
2. unconscious Ja v.159. In composition with bhū as visaññī-bhūta at Ja i.67.
vi + sañña = saññā
(adj.) unconscious, one who has lost consciousness; also in meaning “of unsound mind (= ummattaka Nd i.279) AN ii.52 (khitta-citta + ); Mil 220; Sdhp 117. Visata & visata;
vi + saññin
spread, diffused, wide, broad DN iii.167 (ṭ); Snp 1 (T. reads t, v.l. BB has ṭ); Ja ii.439; Ja iv.499 (t); Mil 221, Mil 354 (ṭ; + vitthata) 357. Cp. anu˚. Visata & visata
pp. of vi + sṛ; Sk. visṛta
(f.) “hanging on,” clinging, attachment. The word seems to be a quasi-short form of visattikā. Thus at Snp 715 (= taṇhā C.; spelling t); Dhs 1059 (trsln “diffusion,” i.e. fr. vi + sṛ; spelling ṭ) = Nd ii.s. v. taṇhā (spelt with t).
abrh. formation fr. vi + sañj, spelling t for tt: see visatta. The writing of MSS. concerning t in these words is very confused
see vissaṭṭha.
(f.) 1. emission; in sukka˚; emission of semen Vin ii.38; Vin iii.112; Kv 163–2. visaṭṭhi at SN iii.133 and AN iv.52 (T. visaṭṭhi probably stands for visatti in meaning “longing, clinging to (cp. BSk. viṣakti Avs ii.191), or “love for (loc.).
for vissaṭṭhi, fr. vi + sṛj
to enter, only in combn with prefixes like upa˚, pa˚, pari˚, saṃ˚, abhisaṃ˚, etc.… See also vesma (house).
viś, cp. viś dwelling-place, veśa; Gr. οίκος house, οἰκέω to dwell; Lat. vīcus, Goth. weihs = E. ˚wick in Warwick, etc.
hanging on (fig.), sticking or clinging to, entangled in (loc.) AN ii.25; Snp 38, Snp 272 Nd ii.597; Ja ii.146; Ja iii.241.
pp. of visajjati
(f.) clinging to, adhering, attachment (to = loc.), sinful bent, lust, desire-It is almost invariably found as a syName of taṇhā. P Commentators explain it with ref. either to visaṭa (diffused), or to visa (poison). These are of course only exegetical edifying etymologies. Cp. Dhs. trsln § 1059 Expositor ii.468: Brethren 213 n. 3, K.S. i.2, n. 6, and the varied exegesis of the term in the Niddesas. SN i.1, SN i.24, SN i.35, SN i.107, SN i.110; AN ii.211; AN iv.434; Snp 333, Snp 768 Snp 857, Snp 1053 sq.; Thag 519; Nd i.8 sq., 247; Nd ii.598; Dhp-a iii.198; Dhp-a iv.43; Dhs-a 364; Ne 24; Dhs 1059.
visatta + ikā, abstr. formation
(adj.) 1. clean, pure, white DN ii.14; Mil 93, Mil 247; Dāvs v.28.
2. clear, manifest Mil 93; Dhs-a 321, Dhs-a 328 (a˚); Vb-a 388 sq.
-kiriyā making clear: see under vatthu1 ■ bhāva clearness Vism 128; Tikp 59.
cp. Sk. viśada
(f.) purity, clearness Vism 134 (vatthu˚).
abstr. fr. visada
sunk into (loc.), immersed Ja iv.399. The poetical form is vyasanna.
pp. of visīdati
in ˚rasa at Vism 470 is not clear. Is it “spreading”, or misprint for visa-pāna?
vi + sṛp
(adj.) different, unusual, extraordinary, uncommon Mil 78 sq.; DN-a i.212; Vism 180 (purisassa itthisarīraṃ, itthiyā purisa-sarīraṃ visabhāgaṃ), 516; Dhp-a iv.52; Pv-a 118. -˚ārammaṇa pudendum muliebre Ja ii.274 ≈ iii.498.
vi + sabhāga
(adj.) 1. uneven, unequal, disharmonious, contrary AN i.74; Pv-a 47 (vāta), 131 (a˚ = sama of the “middle” path).
2. (morally) discrepant lawless, wrong AN iii.285; AN v.329; Snp 57 (cp. Nd ii.599) Mil 250 (˚diṭṭhi).
3. odd, peculiar, petty, disagreeable AN ii.87; Mil 112, Mil 304, Mil 357; Ja i.391 (nagaraka). As nt. an uneven or dangerous or inaccessible place rough road; (fig.) unevenness, badness, misconduct disagreeableness AN i.35 (pabbata˚); SN iv.117; Vb 368 (two sets of 3 visamāni: rāga, etc.); Mil 136, Mil 157, Mil 277 Mil 351; Ja v.70; Vv-a 301 ■ visamena (instr.) in a wrong way Pv iv.14.
vi + sama3
to be uneven DN ii.269 (so read for visamā yanti).
Denom. fr. visama
1. locality, spot, region; world, realm, province, neighbourhood Snp 977. Often in foll. combns: petti˚; (or pitti˚) and pettika (a) the world of the manes or petas MN i.73; SN iii.224; SN v.342 SN v.356 sq.; AN i.37, AN i.267; AN ii.126 sq.; AN iii.211, AN iii.339, AN iii.414 sq. AN iv.405 sq.; AN v.182 sq.; Pv ii.22; ii.79; Ja i.51; Pv-a 25 sq. 59 sq., 214. (b) the way of the fathers, native or proper beat or range DN iii.58; SN v.146 sq.; AN iii.67; Ja ii.59 Yama˚; the realm of Yama or the Dead Pv ii.82 (= petaloka Pv-a 107).
2. reach, sphere (of the senses) range, scope; object, characteristic, attribute (cp. Cpd. 143 n. 2) SN v.218 (gocara˚); Ne 23 (iddhi˚); Mil 186 Mil 215, Mil 316; Vism 216 (visayī-bhūta), 570 = Vb-a 182 (mahā˚ & appa˚); Kp-a 17; Snp-a 22, Snp-a 154 (buddha˚) 228 (id.); Pv-a 72, Pv-a 89 ■ avisaya not forming an object a wrong object, indefinable AN v.50; Ja v.117 (so read for ˚ara); Pv-a 122, Pv-a 197.
3. object of sense, sensual pleasure Snp-a 100.
cp. Sk. viśaya, fr. vi + śī
(adj.) possible Pv iv.112 (yathā ˚ṃ as far as possible); a˚; impossible MN i.207 = Vin i.157.
ger. of visahati
a multitude DN-a i.40.
vi + sara
(adj.) free from pain or grief SN i.180; Snp 17, Snp 86 = Snp 367.
vi + salla
(f.) at DN ii.213 in phrase iddhi˚; is doubtful reading. The gloss (K) has “ visevitā. ” Trsln (Dial. ii.246) “proficiency.” It is combd with iddhi-pahutā & iddhivikubbanatā. Bdhgh’s expln is “ visavanā ”.
fr vi + sru ?
to be able, to dare, to venture Snp 1069 (= ussahati sakkoti Nd ii.600); Ja i.152 ■ ppr neg. avisahanto unable Vv-a 69, Vv-a 112; and avisahamāna Ja i.91 ■ ger. visayha (q.v.).
vi + sahati
(adj.) having branches, forked; in ti˚ three-branched SN i.118 = MN i.109.
visākhā as adj.
(f.) Name of a lunar mansion (nakkhatta) or month (see vesākha ), usually as visākha˚ (-puṇṇamā), e.g. Snp-a 391; Vv-a 165.
vi + sākhā, Sk. viśākhā
cut in pieces, smashed, broken Ja ii.163 (= bhinna C.).
pp. of vi + sāṭeti
(nt.) 1. the horn of an animal (as cow, ox, deer, rhinoceros) Vin i.191; AN ii.207; AN iv.376; Snp 35 (khagga˚, q.v.), 309; Pp 56 (miga˚); Ap 50 (usabha˚); Ja i.505; Mil 103.
2. (also as m.) the tusks of an elephant Ja iii.184; Ja v.41, Ja v.48.
-maya made of horn Vin ii.115.
cp. Sk. viṣāṇa
(adj.) crushed to pieces, destroyed M 11 102 (˚gabbha, with mūḷha-gabbha; v.l. vighāta).
fr. vi + śat, cp. sāṭeti
depression, dejection DN i.248; DN-a i.121; Sdhp 117. Cp. visīdati.
fr. vi + sad
spreading, diffusion, scattering Dhs-a 118.
fr. vi + sṛ;
(adj.) spreading, extending, expanding Vin iii.97 (vattu˚ T.; vatthu˚ MSS.).
vi + sāraka, of sṛ;
(adj.) self-possessed, confident; knowing how to conduct oneself, skilled, wise DN i.175; DN ii.86; SN i.181; SN iv.246; SN v.261; AN ii.8 (vyatta + ); iii.183, 203 iv.310, 314 sq.; v.10 sq.; MN i.386; Ap 23; Ja iii.342 Ja v.41; Mil 21; Sdhp 277 ■ avisārada diffident Mil 20 Mil 105.
cp. BSk. viśārada, e.g. AvS i.180. On etym. see sārada
(adj.) wide, broad, extensive Snp 38; Ja v.49, Ja v.215 (˚pakhuma); Mil 102, Mil 311.
-akkhī (f.) having large eyes Ja v.40; Vv 371 (+ vipulalocanā; or a petī).
cp. Sk. viśāla
(f.) breadth, extensiveness Vv-a 104.
abstr. fr. visāla
(adj.) only neg. a˚; imperturbed, balanced Dhs 11, Dhs 15, Dhs 24 etc.
visa + āhaṭa
distractedness, perturbation; neg. a˚; balance Dhs 11, Dhs 15.
visa + āhāra, or vi + saṃ + āhāra
(f.) a street, road Vin iv.312; Ja i.338; Ja iv.310; Ja v.16, Ja v.434.
-kathā gossip at street corners DN i.179; MN i.513; Dhp i.90.
cp. *Sk. (lexicogr.) viśikhā
(adj.) distinguished, prominent, superior, eminent DN iii.159; Vv 324; Ja i.441; Mil 203 Mil 239; Dhp-a ii.15; Vv-a 1 (˚māna = vimāna), 85, 261 Sdhp 260, Sdhp 269, Sdhp 332, Sdhp 489 ■ compar. ˚tara Vism 207 (= anuttara) ■ As visiṭṭhaka at Sdhp 334 ■ See also abhi˚, paṭi˚, and vissaṭṭha.
pp. of visissati
broken, crushed, fallen to pieces Ja i.174.
pp. of viseyyati
see usseneti.
(adj.) entwined, entangled Mil 102 (saṃsibbita˚ as redupl ■ iter cpd.).
pp. of vi + sibbeti, sīv to sew
to unsew, to undo the stitches Vin iv.280 ■ Caus. II. visibbāpeti ibid ■ Another visibbeti see under visīveti.
vi + sibbeti, sīv
to differ, to be distinguished or eminent Ne 188 ■ pp. visiṭṭha ■ Caus. viseseti (q.v.).
Pass. of vi + śiṣ
1. to sink down Ja iv.223.
2. to falter, to be dejected or displeased SN i.7; AN iii.158; Pp 65 ■ pp visanna.
vi + sad; cp. visāda & pp. BSk.; viṣaṇṇa Divy 44
to be dissolved; 3rd pl. imper. med. visīyaruṃ Thag 312 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126).
vi + sīyati; cp. Sk. śīyate, Pass. of śyā to coagulate
(nt.) warming oneself Ja i.326; Ja v.202. As visibbana at Vin iv.115.
fr. visīveti
to warm oneself Mil 47; Ja ii.68; Dhp-a i.225, Dhp-a i.261 Dhp-a ii.89. As visibbeti (in analogy to visibbeti to sew) at Vin iv.115 ■ Caus. II. visīvāpeti Ja ii.69.
vi + sīveti, which corresponds to Sk. vi-śyāpayati (lexicogr.!), Caus. of śyā, śyāyati to coagulate; lit. to dissolve, thaw. The v stands for p; śyā is contracted to sī
(indecl.) separately, individually; separate, apart Dhp-a ii.26 (mātā-pitaro visuṃ honti). Usually repeated (distributively) visuṃ visuṃ each on his own, one by one, separately, e.g. Vism 250; Mvu 6, Mvu 44; Snp-a 583; Vv-a 38; Pv-a 214- visukaraṇa separation Thag-a 257.
cp. Sk. viṣu, a derivation fr. vi˚
(adj.) dried out or up Pv-a 58.
vi + sukkha
(adj.) dried up Mil 303.
vi + sukkhita
to be cleaned, to be cleansed, to be pure Vin ii.137; Ja i.75; Ja iii.472 ■ pp. visuddha. Caus. visodheti (q.v.).
vi + sujjhati
(adj.) clean, pure, bright; in appld meaning: purified, stainless, sanctified Vin i.105; DN iii.52 (cakkhu); SN ii.122 (id.); iv.47 (sīla); AN iv.304 (su˚); Snp 67, Snp 517, Snp 687; Nd ii.601; Pp 60; Pv-a 1 (su˚) Sdhp 269, Sdhp 383.
pp. of visujjhati
(nt.) purity, purification AN ii.239.
abstr. fr. visuddha
(f.) brightness, splendour, excellency; (ethically) purity, holiness, sanctification virtue, rectitude Vin i.105 (visuddho paramāya visuddhiyā); DN i.53; DN iii.214 (diṭṭhi˚, sīla˚), 288; MN i.147; SN iii.69; AN i.95 (sīla˚ & diṭṭhi˚); ii.80 (catasso dakkhiṇā˚), 195; iii.315; v.64 (paramattha˚); Snp 813, Snp 824 Snp 840, Snp 892; Dhp 16 (kamma˚); Pts i.21 (sīla˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚) ii.85 (id.); Nd i.138, Nd i.162; Vism 2; Snp-a 188 (˚divasa) Pv-a 13 (˚cittatā); Sdhp 447. A class of divine beings (dogmatically the highest in the stages of development viz. gods by sanctification) is called visuddhi-devā Nd ii.307; Ja i.139; Vv-a 18. See under deva.
vi + suddhi
(nt.) restless motion, wriggling, twisting, twitching (better than “show, although connection with sūc would give meaning “indication, show”), almost synonymous with vipphandita. Usually in cpd. diṭṭhi˚; scuffling or wriggling of opinion, wrong views, heresy MN i.8, MN i.486; Snp 55 (cp Nd ii.301); Pv iv.137.
-dassana visiting shows (as fairs) DN i.5 (cp. DN-a i.77 “visūkaṃ paṭani-bhūtaṃ dassanaṃ,” reading not clear) AN i.212; AN ii.209; Pp 58.
perhaps to sūc, sūcayati
(nt.) 1. restlessness, impatience MN i.446.
2. disorder twisting, distortion (of views); usually in phrase diṭṭhi˚ with ˚visevita & ˚vipphandita; e.g. MN i.234; SN i.123 (Bdhgh’s expln at K.S. i.321 is “vinivijjhan’ aṭṭhena viloman’ aṭṭhena”); ii.62 (in same combn; Bdhgh at K.S. ii.203: “sabbaṃ micchādiṭṭhi-vevacanaṃ”); Dhs 381 (“disorder of opinion” trsln); Nd ii.271iii; Vb 145; Dhs-a 253. Cp. v.l. SN i.12317 (K.S. i.155 “disorders”; n. p. 321).
pp. of visūkāyeti, denom. fr. visūka
(f.) cholera Mil 153, Mil 167.
cp. *Sk. visūcikā
“without an enemy,” in ˚katvā making armyless, i.e. disarming Snp 833, Snp 1078. Expld in the Niddesa as “keep away as enemies, conquering” Nd i.174 = Nd ii.602 (where Nd i.reads paṭisenikarā kilesā for visenikatvā kilesā). -˚bhūta disarmed, not acting as an enemy Snp 793 = Snp 914, where Nd i.96 = Nd i.334 has the same expln as for ˚katvā; SN i.141 (+ upasanta-citta; trsln “by all the hosts of evil unassailed” K.S. i.178). Kern Toev. s. v. differently “not opposing” for both expressions
vi + sena in combn with kṛ; and bhū; cp. paṭisena
to discard, dislike, get rid of (opp. usseneti) SN iii.89; Pts ii.167. See usseneti.
to be broken, to fall to pieces Ja i.174 ■ pp. visiṇṇa.
vi + seyyati, cp. Sk. śīryati, of śṛ; to crush
(nt.) 1. restlessness, trick, capers MN i.446 (of a horse; combd with visūkāyita ).
2. disagreement SN i.123 (= viruddha-sevita K.S. i.320). Bdhgh at K.S. ii.203 reads ˚sedhita. Cp. visūkāyita.
vi + sevita
1. (mark of) distinction, characteristic, discrimination AN i.267; SN iv.210; Ja ii.9; Mil 29; Vv-a 58, Vv-a 131; Pv-a 50, Pv-a 60.
2. elegance splendour, excellence Ja v.151; Dhp-a i.399.
3. distinction peculiar merit or advantage, eminence, excellence extraordinary state DN i.233 (so for vivesa all through?); AN iii.349 (opp. hāna); Ja i.435; Vv-a 157 (puñña˚); Pv-a 71 (id.), 147 (sukha˚).
4. difference variety Snp-a 477, Snp-a 504; Vv-a 2; Pv-a 37, Pv-a 81, Pv-a 135 (pl. items). abl. visesato, distinctively, altogether Pv-a 1 Pv-a 259.
5. specific idea (in meditation), attainment Ja vi.69: see & cp.; Brethren 24, n. 1; 110 ■ Cp. paṭi˚.
-ādhigama specific attainment AN iv.22; MN ii.96 Ne 92; Mil 412; Dhp-a i.100. [Cp. BSk. viśeṣadhigama Divy 174]. -gāmin reaching distinction, gaining merit AN ii.185; AN iii.349 sq.; SN v.108. -gū reaching a higher state or attainment Ja vi.573. -paccaya ground for distinction Vv-a 20. -bhāgiya participating in, or leading to distinction or progress (spiritually) DN iii.272 sq., 277, 282; Ne 77; Vism 11, Vism 88 (abstr. ˚bhāgiyatā).
fr. vi + śiṣ, cp. Epic Sk. viśeṣa
(m. or nt.) 1. a (distinguishing) mark (on the forehead) Vin ii.267 (with apanga).
2. leading to distinction Vv-a 85. Visesata = visesa
fr. visesa
Sdhp 265.
(nt.) distinguishing, distinction, qualification, attribute Vv 1610; Ja iii.11; Ja vi.63; Snp-a 181, Snp-a 365, Snp-a 399; Vv-a 13 ■ instr. avisesena (adv.) without distinction, at all events, anyhow Pv-a 116.
fr. viseseti
(f.) the Vaiśeṣika philosophy Mil 3.
fr. visesa
distinguished, differentiated Mvu 11, Mvu 32; Kp-a 18; Pv-a 56.
pp. of viseseti
(adj.) possessing distinction, distinguished from, better than others Snp 799, Snp 842, Snp 855, Snp 905 Nd i.244.
fr. visesa
(adj.) distinguished Vv 1610 (= visesaṃ patvā Vv-a 85); v.l. visesin (= visesavant C.).
grd. of viseseti
to make a distinction, to distinguish, define, specify Ja v.120, Ja v.451; Snp-a 343; grd. visesitabba (-vacana) qualifying (predicative) expression Vv-a 13 ■ pp. visesita.
Caus. of visissati
(adj.) freed from grief Dhp 90; Dhp-a ii.166.
vi + soka
cleaning, cleansing, in cpd. dubbisodha hard to clean Snp 279.
fr. vi + śudh
(nt.) cleansing, purifying, emending Pts ii.21, Pts ii.23; Pv-a 130.
fr. visodheti
to clean, cleanse, purify, sanctify Kv 551; Pv iv.325; Dhp-a iii.158; Sdhp 321.
Caus. of visujjhati
to cause to dry up, to make wither, to destroy AN i.204; Snp 949 = Snp 1099; Nd i.434 (= sukkhāpeti); Nd ii.603 (id.).
Caus. of vissussati
(adj.) all, every, entire; only in Np. Vissakamma. The word is antiquated in Pāli (for it sabba); a few cases in poetry are doubtful. Thus at Dhp 266 (dhamma), where Dhp-a iii.393 expls as “visama, vissagandha”; and at Iti 32 (vissantaraṃ “among all beings”? v.l. vessantaraṃ).
Vedic viśva, to vi˚
(nt.) a smell like raw flesh, as ˚gandha at Dhs 625; Dhs-a 319; Snp-a 286; Dhp-a iii.393.
cp. Sk. visra
dwelling: see paṭi˚.
of viś
dispensing, serving, donation, giving out, holding (a meal), only in phrases bhatta˚; the function of a meal Vin ii.153 Vin iv.263; Pv iii.29 (so read for vissatta); Mil 9; Snp-a 19, Snp-a 140; and dāna˚ bestowing a gift Pv ii.927 (= pariccāga-ṭṭhāne dān’agge Pv-a 124).
vi + sagga, vi + sṛj, cp. Sk. visarga
1. giving out, distributing Vin ii.177–2. one who answers (a question) Mil 295.
fr. vissajjati
. A. The pres.; vissajjati is not in use. The only forms of the simple verb system are the foll.: ger. vissajja, usually written visajja, in meaning “setting free,” giving up leaving behind Snp 522, Snp 794, Snp 912, Snp 1060; Nd i.98; Nd ii.596-grd. vissajjaniya [perhaps better to vissajjeti1] to be answered, answerable; nt. a reply Ne 161, Ne 175 sq. 191; and vissajjiya to be given away: see under a˚. pp. vissaṭṭha ■ B. Very frequent is the Caus. vissajjeti (also occasionally as visajj˚; ) in var. meanings, based on the idea of sending forth or away, viz. to emit, discharge Ja i.164 (uccāra-passāvaṃ) ■ to send Mvu 8 Mvu 3 (lekaṃ visajjayi) ■ to dismiss Pv-a 81 (there) ■ to let loose Pv-a 74 (rathaṃ) ■ to spend, give away, bestow hand over Pp 26 (visajj˚); Nd i.262 (dhanaṃ); Mil 41 (dhaññaṃ); Pv-a 111, Pv-a 119 ■ to get rid of Ja i.134 (muddikaṃ) ■ to answer (questions), to reply, retort Snp 1005 (˚essati, fut.); Vv-a 71; Pv-a 15, Pv-a 59, Pv-a 87 ■ pp. vissajjita -Caus. II. vissajjāpeti (in meanings of vissajjeti Ja iv.2 (hatthaṃ = to push away); Mil 143; Mvu 6, Mvu 43.
vi + sajjati, of sṛj. The ss after analogy of ussajjati & nissajjati, cp. ossajjati for osajjati
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) 1. giving out, bestowing Nd i.262 (dhana˚).
2. sending off, discharging Ja i.239 (nāvā˚ putting off to sea).
3. answer reply Vism 6, Vism 84; often in combn pucchā˚; question and answer, e.g. Mvu 4, Mvu 54; Pv-a 2.
fr. vissajjeti
(adj.) (-˚) 1. giving out, bestowing Pv-a 121.
2. answering Ja i.166 (pañha˚).
fr. vissajjana
one who replies or causes to reply Dhp-a iv.199. Cp. vissajjetar.
n. ag. fr. vissajjāpeti
1. spent, given away Snp 982–2. let loose, sent off, discharged Mvu 23, Mvu 88.
pp. of vissajjeti
one who answers (a question) AN i.103 (pañhaṃ). Cp. vissajjāpetar.
n. ag. fr. vissajjeti
1. let loose; sent (out); released, dismissed; thrown; given out Mvu 10, Mvu 68; Ja i.370; Ja iii.373; Pv-a 46, Pv-a 64, Pv-a 123, Pv-a 174.
2. (of the voice.) distinct, well enunciated DN i.114 (= apalibuddha, i.e. unobstructed; sandiddha-vilambit’ ādi dosa-rahita DN-a i.282); ii.211; AN ii.51; AN iii.114; SN i.189; Ja vi.16 (here as vissattha -vacana).
3. vissaṭṭha at Ja iv.219 in phrase ˚indriya means something like “strong,” distinguished. The v.l. visatta˚; suggests a probable visaṭa˚; ; it may on the other hand be a corruption of visiṭṭha˚.
pp. of vissajjati
see visaṭṭhi.
trusting or trusted; confident; being confided in or demanding confidence, intimate friendly AN iii.114; Vin i.87 (so read for ṭṭh); iv.21; Ja ii.305; Ja iii.343; Mil 109 (bahu˚ enjoying great confidence); Snp-a 188 (˚bhāva state of confidence); Sdhp 168, Sdhp 593 ■ vissaṭṭhena (instr.) in confidence Vin ii.99-Cp. abhi˚.
pp. of vissasati
(adj.) overflowing Pv-a 119.
fr. vissandati
to flow out, to stream overflow Ja i.51; Ja v.274; Pv-a 34 (aor. ˚sandi = pagghari) 51 (ppr. ˚amāna), 80 (ger. ˚itvā), 119 (˚anto = paggharanto), 123 (for paggharati; T. ˚eti).
vi + sandati, of syand
to rest, repose; to recover from fatigue Ja i.485; Ja ii.70; Ja ii.128, Ja ii.133; Ja iii.208; Ja iv.93 Ja iv.293; Ja v.73; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 151 ■ Caus. vissameti to give a rest, to make repose Ja iii.36.
vi + samati, of śram
(nt.) resting, reposing Ja iii.435.
fr. vissamati
one who provides a rest, giver of repose, remover of fatigue Ja vi.526.
n. ag. fr. vissameti
1. outcry, shout, cry of distress, scream Vin i.87; Vin ii.152, Vin ii.207; Vin iv.316; Pv-a 22 Pv-a 245 (s), 279, 284 (˚ṃ karoti); Sdhp 188.
2. distress Vin iv.212, Vin iv.229.
fr. vi + sarati, of svar
to forget Vin i.207; Vin iv.261; Mvu 26, Mvu 16 ■ pp. vissarita.
vi + sarati, of smṛ;
forgotten Pv-a 202.
opp. of vissarati
to flow, ooze Thag 453 = Snp 205 (v.l. SS vissasati).
vi + savati, of sru
& vissāseti to confide in, to put one’s trust in (loc. or gen.), to be friendly with SN i.79 (vissase); Ja i.461 (vissāsayitvā); iii.148 = 525 (vissāsaye); iv.56; vi.292 ■ pp. vissattha.
vi + sasati, of śvas
trust, confidence, intimacy, mutual agreement Vin i.296; Vin i.308, AN ii.78; Ja i.189, Ja i.487; Mil 126; Vism 190; Vv-a 66; Pv-a 13, Pv-a 265 ■ dubbissāsa difficult to be trusted Ja iv.462.
vi + sāsa, of śvas
(& ˚ika ) (adj.) intimate, confidential; trustworthy AN i.26; Mil 146; DN-a i.289.
vissāsa
(adj.) to be trusted, trustworthy Pv-a 9; Sdhp 306, Sdhp 441; neg. a˚; Ja iii.474; cp dubbissāsaniya hard to trust Ja iv.462.
grd. of vissāseti
(adj.) intimate, confidential AN iii.136 (asanthava˚ intimate, although not acquainted).
fr. vissāsa
(adj.) widely famed, renowned, famous Snp 137, Snp 597, Snp 998, Snp 1009; Pv ii.74; Mvu 5, Mvu 19; Pv-a 107 (= dūra-ghuṭṭha).
vi + suta, of śru
to dry up, to wither SN i.126 (in combn ussussati vissussati, with ss from uss˚). Spelling here visuss˚, but ss at SN iii.149 ■ Caus. visoseti (q.v.).
vi + śuṣ
(adj.) flowedaway, wasted Mil 294.
vi + sota, of sru
a bird (lit. going through the sky) DN-a i.46. -˚pati lord of birds, a garuḷa Dāvs iv.33, Dāvs iv.38 Dāvs iv.55.
viha, sky, + ga
= vihaga, Ja v.416; Pv-a 154, Pv-a 157; Sdhp 241.
(adj.) going through the air, flying; (m.) a bird AN ii.39; AN iii.43; Snp 221, Snp 606; Thag 1108; Ja i.216; Ja iii.255; DN-a i.125 = Dhs-a 141.
viha + gam
to be struck or slain; to be vexed or grieved, to get enraged, to be annoyed, suffer hardship; to be cast down Snp 168 sq.; Pv ii.117 (= vighātaṃ āpajjati Pv-a 150); iv.52 (with same expln); Ja i.73 Ja i.359; Ja ii.442; Ja v.330; DN-a i.289 ■ ppr. vihaññamāna Snp 1121 (with long and detailed exegesis at Nd ii.604) SN i.28 (a˚); Pv-a 150. pp. vihata DN-a i.231.
Pass. of vihanati
struck, killed, destroyed, impaired Iti 100 (where AN i.164 reads vigata); Ja vi.171; Sdhp 313 Sdhp 425.
pp. of vihanati
(adj.) broad, wide Ja vi.171 (= puthula C.).
cp. Sk. vihṛti
to strike, kill, put an end to, remove AN iii.248 (kankhaṃ; v.l. vitarati perhaps to be preferred); Snp 673; Pot. 3rd sg. vihane Snp 975 (cp. Nd i.509) & vihāne Snp 348 = Thag 1268 ■ ger. vihacca: see abhi˚-Pass. vihaññati (q.v.) ■ pp. vihata.
vi + hanati
(nt.) abiding, dwelling Dhs-a 164, Dhs-a 168.
fr. viharati
to stay, abide, dwell, sojourn (in a certain place); in general: to be, to live; appld: to behave lead a life (as such expld with “iriyati” at Vism 16). Synonyms are given at Vb 194 with iriyati vattati, pāleti, yapeti, yāpeti, carati; cp. Vb-a 262. See e.g. DN i.251; Snp 136, Snp 301, Snp 925; Pp 68; Dhs-a 168; DN-a i.70, DN-a i.132; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 78 ■ Special Forms: aor 3rd sg. vihāsi Snp p.16; Pv ii.960; Mvu 5, Mvu 233; Pv-a 54 Pv-a 121; Pv-a 3rd pl. vihiṃsu Thag 925, & vihaṃsu AN ii.21; fut viharissati AN iii.70; vihessati Thag 257; vihissati Thig 181; and vihāhisi Ja i.298 (doubtful reading!), where C. expls as “vijahissati, parihāyissati”; with phrase sukhaṃ vihāhisi cp. dukkhaṃ viharati at AN i.95, and see also vihāhesi ■ pp. not found.
vi + harati
a sort of bird Thag 49 (v.l. cihaciha). The C. expls by “parillaka.”
for vihaga
at Ja vi.78 (lohitaṃ) is poetical for vijahāmi; C. expls as niṭṭhubhāmi, i.e. I spit out.
is ger. of vijahati (q.v.).
the air, sky Pv-a 14. Cases adverbially:; ˚yasā through the air Mvu 12, Mvu 10 & ˚yasaṃ id. Ja iv.47. Cp. vehāyasa & vehāsa;.
cp. Sk. viha & vihāyasa
1. (as m. & adj.) spending one’s time (sojourning or walking about), staying in a place, living place of living, stay, abode (in general) Vv-a 50 (jala˚) Pv-a 22, Pv-a 79; eka˚; living by oneself SN ii.282 sq.; jaṅghā˚ wandering on foot Pv-a 73; divā˚; passing the time of day Snp 679; Pv-a 142. See also below 3 a.
2. (appld meaning) state of life, condition, mode of life (in this meaning almost identical with that of vāsa2), e.g. ariya˚ best condition SN v.326; Snp-a 136; dibba˚; supreme condition (of heart) Mil 225; brahma˚; divine state SN v.326; Snp-a 136; Vism 295 sq. (ch. ix.); phāsu˚; comfort AN iii.119 AN iii.132; sukha˚; happiness SN iii.8; SN v.326; AN i.43; AN ii.23 AN iii.131 sq.; AN iv.111 sq., 230 sq.; v.10 sq. See further DN i.145, DN i.196; DN iii.220 (dibba, brahma, ariya), 250 (cha satata˚), 281; SN ii.273 (jhāna˚); iii.235 (id.); AN iii.294 (˚ṃ kappeti to live one’s life); Pts ii.20; Ne 119 sq. 3. (a) a habitation for a Buddhist mendicant, an abode in the forest (arañña˚), or a hut; a dwelling, habitation lodging (for a bhikkhu), a single room Vin ii.207 sq. DN ii.7; AN iii.51, AN iii.299 (yathāvihāraṃ each to his apartment); Snp 220 (dūra˚ a remote shelter for a bhikkhu) 391; Vism 118 (different kinds; may be taken as c.)-(b) place for convention of the bhikkhus, meeting place; place for rest & recreation (in garden or park DN-a i.133 ■ (c) (later) a larger building for housing bhikkhus, an organized monastery, a Vihāra Vin i.58 Vin iii.47; SN i.185 (˚pāla the guard of the monastery) Ja i.126; Mil 212; Vism 292; Dhp-a i.19 (˚cārikā visit to the monastery), 49 (˚pokkharaṇī), 416; Mvu 19, Mvu 77; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 20, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 141. 151; and passim. See also Dictionary of Names. The modern province Behar bears its name from the vihāras. Viharaka = vihara
fr. viharati
3 (room, hut) Thig 94 (= vasanakaovaraka Thag-a 90).
(adj.) = vihārin; in saddhi˚; co-resident AN iii.70.
(adj.) (-˚) dwelling, living; being in such & such a state or condition DN i.162 (appa-dukkha˚) 251 (evaṃ˚); AN i.24 (araṇa˚), 26 (mettā); Iti 74 (appamāda˚); Snp 45 (sādhu˚), 375; Pv iv.133 (araṇa˚); Pv-a 77, Pv-a 230 (mettā˚); Vv-a 71 ■ eka˚; living alone SN ii.282 sq.; SN iv.35; opp. saddhi˚; together with another; a coresident brother-bhikkhu SN ii.204; SN iv.103; AN ii.239.
fr. vihāra
“he banished” at Ja iv.471 is 3rd sg. aor. Caus. of vijahati (hā ); expld in C. by pabbājesi ■ Another form vihāhisi see under viharati & cp.; viheti2.
to hurt, injure, harass, annoy SN i.165; Iti 86; Snp 117, Snp 451; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 198.
vi + hiṃsati
(f.) a Commentary word for vihiṃsā Vb-a 75. A similar vihiṃsakā occurs at Pv-a 123.
(f.) (& adj.; ˚a ) hurting, injuring, cruelty, injury DN iii.215; DN iii.226 (˚vitakka); SN i.202; SN ii.151 (˚dhātu); AN iii.448; Snp 292 Nd i.207 (˚saññā), 386, 501 (˚vitakka); Vb 86, Vb 363 (˚vitakka); Dhs 1348; Pp 25; Ne 97; Mil 337, Mil 367 Mil 390; Dhs-a 403; Vb-a 74 (˚dhātu), 118 (˚vitakka) Sdhp 510. Neg. avihiṃsā see sep ■ See also vihesā.
abstr. fr. vi + hiṃs, to injure
(adj.) arranged, prepared, disposed, appointed; furnished, equipped Ja vi.201 (loka); Mil 345 (nagara); DN i.45, SN iii.46; Pp 55 (aneka˚); Mvu 10 Mvu 93; Pv-a 51 (suṭṭhu˚). añña˚; engaged upon something else Vin iv.269.
pp. of vidahati
(adj.) = vihita; DN iii.28 sq. (kathaṃ v. aggaññaṃ how as the beginning of things appointed?);- añña˚ engaged upon something else Ja iv.389 (or does it belong to āhāra. in sense of “prepared by somebody else”?).
(f.) in añña˚; being engaged upon something else Dhp-a i.181.
abstr. fr. vihita
(adj.) left, given up, abandoned Sdhp 579.
pp. of vijahati
(adj.) harassing, oppressing, annoying Ja i.504; Ja v.143; Sdhp 89. Neg. a˚ see sep.
fr. viheṭheti
(nt.) harassing, hurting; oppression Vb-a 74; Vv-a 68; Pv-a 232.
fr. viheṭheti
(adj.) oppressing, hurting, doing harm Ja ii.123.
fr. viheṭhana
to oppress, to bring into difficulties, to vex, annoy, plague hurt DN i.116, DN i.135; DN ii.12; Snp 35; Ja i.187; Ja ii.267; Ja iv.375; Mil 6, Mil 14; Dhp-a 191; Vv-a 69 (Pass. ˚iyamāna).
vi + heṭheti, of hīḍ or heḷ to be hostile. Same in BSk., e.g. Mvu iii.360, Divy 42, Divy 145 etc.
to be afraid (of) Ja v.154 (= bhāyati C.). Cp. vibheti.
for bibheti?
to be given up, to disappear, to go awav Ja iv.216 Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly = vi + eti.
contracted Pass. of vijahāti = vihāyati, cp. vihāhesi
(adj.) annoying, vexing, troubling Vin iv.36; Dpvs i.47 ■ f. ˚ikā Vin iv.239, Vin iv.241.
fr. viheseti
(f.) vexation, annoyance, injury; worry MN i.510; MN ii.241 sq.; SN i.136; SN iii.132; SN iv.73 SN v.357; DN iii.240 (a˚); Vin iv.143 (+ vilekhā); AN iii.245 AN iii.291; Snp 247, Snp 275, Snp 277; Vb 369; Ne 25; Mil 295; Dhp-a i.55.
for vihiṃsā
(f.) fright Ja iii.147 (C. says “an expression of fearfullness”).
probably for Sk. *vibhīṣikā, fr. bhī, Epic Sk. bhīṣā, cp. bhīṣma = P. bhiṃsa (q.v.)
to harass, vex, annoy, insult SN iv.63; SN v.346; AN iii.194; Vin iv.36 sq.; Ud 44; Snp 277; Pv iv.147 (vihesaṃ, aor.); iv.149 (vihesayi, aor.).
vi + hiṃs, or Denom. fr. vihesā, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 102
(m. & f.) 1. a wave Ja i.509; Mil 117 (jala˚), 319 (˚puppha wave-flower fig.); Vism 63 (samudda˚); Dāvs iv.46; Dhs-a 116 Vism 143.
2. interval, period of time (cp. “tide” time interval) Ja v.271 (˚antara, in Avīci definition as “uninterrupted state of suffering”). In contrast pair avīci (adj.) uninterrupted, without an interval,; savīci with periods, in defn of jarā at Vb-a 99 & Dhs-a 328, where; avīci means “not changing quickly,” and savīci “changing quickly.” Also in defn of sadā (continuously) as “avīci-santati” at Nd ii.631. Cp. avīci.
cp. late Sk. vīci wave; Vedic vīci only in meaning “deceit”; perhaps connected with Lat. vicis Ags. wīce = E. week, lit. “change,” cp. tide
to fan Ja i.165; Snp-a 487; Vv-a 6 (T. bījati). - Caus. vījeti Dhp-a iv.213; Mvu 5, Mvu 161 ■ Pass. vījiyati: ppr. vījiyamāna getting fanned Ja iii.374 (so read for vijīy˚); Pv-a 176 (so for vijjamāna!) ■ pp. vījita.
vīj
(nt.) a fan, fanning; in vījana-vāta a fanning wind, a breeze Snp-a 174.
fr. vīj, cp. Class. Sk. vījana
(f.) a fan Vv 472 (T. bījanī, v.l. vīj˚); Ja i.46; Vism 310; Dhp-a iv.39; Vv-a 147; Pv-a 176; Kp-a 95. There are 3 kinds of fans mentioned at Vin ii.130, viz. vākamaya˚, usīra˚, mora-piñcha˚; or fans made of bark, of a root (?), and of a peacock’s tail.
fr. vījana, of vīj
fanned Pv iii.117 (˚anga). *Vinati
pp. of vījati
(?), doubtful: see apa˚ & pa˚;. Kern, Toev. s. v. wrong in treating it as a verb “to see.”
(f.) the Indian lute, mandoline SN i.122 = Snp 449 (kacchā bhassati “let the lyre slide down from hollow of his arm” K.S. i.153); Thag 467; SN iv.196 (six parts); AN iii.375; Ja iii.91; Ja v.196, Ja v.281 (named Kokanada “wolf’s howl”); vi.465 = 580; Vv 6419; 8110; Mil 53 (all its var. parts); Vv-a 138 Vv-a 161, Vv-a 210; Pv-a 151 ■ vīṇaṃ vādeti to play the lute Mvu 31, Mvu 82; Thag-a 203.
-daṇḍaka the neck of a lute Ja ii.225. -doṇikā the sounding board of a lute (cp. doṇī1 4) Vism 251; Vb-a 234; Kp-a 45.
cp. Vedic vīṇā
(adj.) deprived of, free from, (being) without. In meaning and use cp. vigata˚. Very frequent as first part of a cpd., as e.g. the foll.:
-accika without a flame, i.e. glowing, aglow (of cinders), usually combd with ˚dhūma “without smoke MN i.365; SN ii.99 (so read for vītacchika ) = iv.188 = MN i.74; DN ii.134; Ja i.15, Ja i.153; Ja iii.447; Ja v.135; Dhp-a ii.68; Vism 301. -iccha free from desire Ja ii.258. -gedha without greed Snp 210, Snp 860, Snp 1100; Nd i.250; Nd ii.606. -taṇha without craving Snp 83, Snp 741, Snp 849, Snp 1041, Snp 1060; Nd i.211 Nd ii.607. -tapo without heat Ja ii.450 ■ (d)dara fearless Thag 525; Dhp 385. -dosa without anger Snp 12. -macchara without envy, unselfish Snp 954; Nd i.444; Ja v.398; Pv iii.115. -mada not conceited So 328 cp. AN ii.120. -mala stainless (cp. vimala) SN iv.47, SN iv.107; DN-a i.237; Mil 16. -moha without bewilderment Snp 13. I have to remark that the reading vīta˚; seems to be well established. It occurs very frequently in the Apadāna. Should we take it in meaning of “excessive”? And are we confronted with an attribute of osadhi, the morning star which points to Babylonian influence (star of the East)? As it occurs in the Vatthugāthās of the Pārāyanavagga, this does not seem improbable -raṃsi rayless (?) Snp 1016 (said of the sun; the expression is not clear. One MS. of Nd ii.at this passage reads pīta˚; i.e. with yellow, i.e. golden, rays; which is to be preferred). Cp. note in Index to Snp-a. -rāga passionless Snp 11, Snp 507, Snp 1071; Pp 32; Pv ii.47; Mil 76 and frequently elsewhere. -lobha without greed Snp 10 Snp 469, Snp 494. -vaṇṇa colourless Snp 1120. -salla without a sting SN iv.64. -sārada not fresh, not unexperienced i.e. wise Iti 123.
vi + ita, pp. of i
woven Vin iii.259 (su˚).
pp. of vāyati1, or vināti
a bird-snare (BR.: “jedes zum Fangen von Wild & Vögeln dienende Gerät”), a decoy bird Thag 139. Kern, Toev. s. v. “vogelstrik.”
fr. vi + tan, according to BR. The word is found in late Sk. (lexicogr.) as vītaṃsa. BR compare Sk avataṃsa (garland: see P. vaṭaṃsa) & uttaṃsa. The etym. is not clear
is the contracted prepositional combn vi + ati, representing an emphatic ati, e.g. in the foll.:
-(k)kama (1) going beyond, transgression, sin Vin iii.112; Vin iv.290; Ja i.412; Ja iv.376; Pp 21; Mil 380 Vism 11, Vism 17; Dhp-a iv.3 ■ (2) going on, course (of time) Pv-a 137 (˚ena by and by; v.l. anukkamena) -kiṇṇa sprinkled, speckled, gay with Ja v.188. -nāmeti to make pass (time), to spend the time, to live, pass wait Ja iii.63, Ja iii.381; Dhp-a ii.57; Vv-a 158; Pv-a 12, Pv-a 21 Pv-a 47, Pv-a 76. -patati to fly past, to flit by, to fly up & down Snp 688; AN v.88 = Mil 392. -missa mingled, mixed (with) MN i.318; DN iii.96; Ja vi.151. -vatta having passed or overcome, gone through; passed, spent SN i.14, SN i.145; SN iii.225; SN iv.52; AN ii.44; Snp 6, Snp 395, Snp 796; Ja i.374; Thag-a 170; Pv-a 21, Pv-a 55, Pv-a 83. -sāreti DN i.52, DN i.90, DN i.118, DN i.152; Snp 419; cp. Mil 19; Ja iv.98 (shortened to sārāṇīyaṃ vītisārimha; expld with sārayimha); v.264. -haraṇa passing (mutually), carrying in between Ja vi.355 (bhojanānaṃ). -harati to associate with (at a meal) SN i.162 -hāra, in pada˚; “taking over or exchange of steps,” a stride SN i.211; AN iv.429; Ja vi.354. Same in BSk. e.g. Mvu i.35; Mvu iii.162.
fr. vi + ati sṛ; not with Childers fr. smṛ; cp. BSk. vyatisārayati to make pass (between), to exchange (greeting), to address, converse (kathaṃ), greet. Often in phrase sārāṇīyaṃ sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ vītisāreti [for which BSk. sammodanīṃ saṃrañjanīṃ vividhāṃ kathāṃ vyatisārayati e.g. Avs ii.140
(f.) 1. street, way, road, path, track AN v.347, AN v.350 sq.; Vv 836; Ja i.158 (garden path); v.350 (dve vīthiyo gahetvā tiṭṭhati, of a house); vi.276 (v and raccha ); Dhp-a i.14; Vv-a 31; Pv-a 54. -antaravīthiyaṃ (loc.) in the middle of the road Ja i.373; Pv-a 96. -˚sabhāga share of road Ja i.422; -˚siṅghāṭaka crossroad Dhp-a iv.4 ■ Of the path of the stars and heavenly bodies Ja i.23; Vv-a 326 ■ Various streets (roads paths) are named either after the professions carried on in them, e.g. dantakāra˚; street of ivory-workers Ja i.320; pesakāra˚; weaver st. Dhp-a i.424; bhatakāra˚ soldier st. Dhp-a i.233 ■ or after the main kind of traffic frequenting these, e.g. nāga˚; elephant road Vv-a 316; miga˚; animal rd. Ja i.372 ■ or after special occasions (like distinguished people passing by this or that road), e.g. buddha˚; the road of the Buddha Dhp-a ii.80; rāja˚; King st. Thag-a 52; Mvu 20, Mvu 38.
2. (t.t in psychology) course, process (of judgment, senseperception or cognition, cp. Cpd. 25, 124, 241 (vinicchaya˚), 266 ■ Vism 187 (kammaṭṭhāna˚); Kp-a 102 (viññāṇa˚). -˚citta process of cognition (lit. processed cognition) Vism 22; Dhs-a 269.
cp. Epic Sk. vīthi, to Idg. *ṷei̯ā- to aim at, as in Lat. via way, Sk. veti to pursue; Lat. venor to hunt Gr. ει ̓́σατο he went
(adj.) (-˚) having (as) a road Mil 322 (satipaṭṭhāna˚, in the city of Righteousness).
fr. vīthi
(adj.) testing, investigating, examining SN iii.6 sq.; Snp 827; Nd i.166; Ja i.369.
fr. vīmaṃsā
(& ˚eti ) “to try to think,” to consider, examine find out, investigate, test, trace, think over Snp 215 (˚amāna), 405; Ja i.128, Ja i.147, Ja i.200; Ja vi.334; Mil 143; Pv-a 145, Pv-a 215, Pv-a 272; Sdhp 91 ■ ger. ˚itvā Ja vi.368 Mvu 5, Mvu 36; Pv-a 155; inf. ˚ituṃ Mvu 37, Mvu 234; Pv-a 30 Pv-a 155, Pv-a 283 (sippaṃ) ■ Caus. II, vīmaṃsāpeti to cause to investigate Ja v.110 ■ Cp. pari˚.
Vedic mīmāṃsate, Desid. of man. The P. form arose through dissimilation m → v, cp. Geiger P.Gr. 46, 4
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) trying, testing; finding out, experiment Vin iii.79; Ja iii.55; Mvu 22 Mvu 78; Pv-a 153.
fr. vīmaṃsati
(f.) consideration, examination, test, investigation, the fourth of the Iddhipādas, q.v. DN iii.77 (˚samādhi), 222; SN v.280; AN i.39, AN i.297; AN iii.37 AN iii.346; AN v.24, AN v.90, AN v.338; Pts i.19; Pts ii.123; Kv 508; Dhs 269 Vb 219 (˚samādhi), 222, 227; Tikp 2; Ne 16 (˚samādhi), 42; DN-a i.106; Snp-a 349 (vīmaṃsa-kāra = sankheyya-kāra) ■ Cp. pari˚.
fr. vīmaṃsati
= vīmaṃsaka Snp 877; Nd i.283; DN-a i.106.
manly, mighty, heroic; a hero SN i.137; Snp 44 Snp 165 (not dhīra), 642, 1096, 1102; Thag 736 (nara˚ hero) Nd ii.609; Dhp-a iv.225 ■ mahā˚; a hero SN i.110, SN i.193 SN iii.83 (of the Arahant) ■ vīra is often an Ep. of the Buddha.
-aṅgarūpa built like a hero, heroic, divine DN i.89 DN ii.16; DN iii.59, DN iii.142, DN iii.145; SN i.89; Snp p.106; expld as “ devaputta-sadisa-kāya ” at DN-a i.250 & Snp-a 450.; The BSk. equivalent is var -anga-rūpin (distorted fr vīr˚), e.g. Mvu i.49; Mvu ii.158; Mvu iii.197.
Vedic vīra; cp. Av. vīra, Lat. vir, virtus “virtue”; Gotu. wair, Ohg, Ags wer; to vayas strength etc.; cp viriya
see viyyati.
Pass. of vināti
(adj.) clean, pure Snp 784, Snp 881. Visati & visam
vi + avadāta, the metric form of vodāta
(indecl.) [both for Vedic viṃśati; cp. Av. vīsaiti, Gr. ει ̓́κοσι, Lat. viginti, Oir. fiche, etc.; fr Idg. *ṷi + komt (decad), thus “two decads.” Cp. vi˚ number 20 ■ Both forms are used indiscriminately-(1) vīsati, e.g. Vin ii.271 (˚vassa, as minimum age of ordination); Snp 457 (catu-vīsat’akkharaṃ); Ja i.89 (˚sahassa bhikkhū); iii.360; Vb-a 191 sq.; Dhp-a i.4 (ekūna˚, 19); ii.9, 54; iii.62 (˚sahassa bhikkhū, as followers); as vīsatiṃ at Dhp-a ii.61 (vassa-sahassāni). (2) vīsaṃ; e.g. Snp 1019 (˚vassa-sata); Iti 99 (jātiyo) Ja i.395 (˚yojana-sata); v.36 (˚ratana-sata); Dhp-a i.8 Dhp-a ii.91 (˚yojana-sataṃ).
rice, paddy Vin iv.264 (as one of the 7 kinds of āmaka-dhañña); Ja i.429; Ja iii.356; Mil 102, Mil 267; Vism 383 (˚tumba); Dhp-a i.125; Dhp-a iii.374 (˚piṭaka).
cp. Vedic vrīhi
to be called DN i.168, DN i.245; Snp 436, Snp 759, Snp 848, Snp 861, Snp 946; Nd i.431; Nd ii.s. v. katheti; Snp-a 204; Dhp-a ii.35. See also vatti ■ pp. vutta.
Pass. of vac
(water) shed, rained Pv i.56; Pv-a 29. See also vaṭṭa & vaṭṭha;.
pp. of vassati1
= vusitavant, Nd ii.179, Nd ii.284, Nd ii.611. Vutthahati & vutthati;
1. to rise, arise; to be produced Vin ii.278 (gabbha).
2. to rise out of (abl.), to emerge from, to come back SN iv.294; Vism 661 (vuṭṭhāti) ■ pp. vuṭṭhita ■ Caus. vuṭṭhāpeti (1) to ordain, rehabilitate Vin iv.226, Vin iv.317 sq. (= upasampādeti). (2) to rouse out of (abl.), to turn away from AN iii.115.
the sandhi form of uṭṭhahati (q.v.), with euphonic v, which however appears in BSk. as vyut˚ (i.e. vi + ud˚); vyuttisṭhate “to come back from sea” Divy 35, and freq. in Avs, e.g. i.242
(nt.) 1. rise, origin Ja i.114 (gabbha˚).
2. ordination, rehabilitation (in the Order) Vin iv.320; Mil 344.
3. (cp. uṭṭhāna 3 rousing, rising out, emerging, emergence; appld as a religious term to revival from jhāna -abstraction (cp Cpd. 67, 215 n. 4; Dhs. trln, § 1332) MN i.302; SN iii.270 SN iv.294; AN iii.311, AN iii.418, AN iii.427 sq.; Vism 661 (in detail), 681 sq. (id.); Dhs 1332; Ne 100; Tikp 272, 346. -˚gāminī (-vipassanā-ñāṇa) “insight of discernment leading to uprising” (Cpd. 67) Vism 661, Vism 681 sq.
the sandhi form of uṭṭhāna
(f.) rehabilitation; in āpatti˚; forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250.
fr. vuṭṭhāna
is an expression for a certain punishment (pain) in purgatory MN i.337 (vuṭṭhānimaṃ nāma vedanaṃ vediyamāna).
?
(f.) rain SN i.172 = Snp 77 (fig. = saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhi); AN iii.370, AN iii.378 (vāta˚); Iti 83; Dhp 14; Ja vi.587 (˚dhārā) Ap 38 (fig.), 52 (amata˚); Mil 416; Vism 37, Vism 234 (salila˚); Mvu 1, Mvu 24; Snp-a 34, Snp-a 224; Pv-a 139 (˚dhārā shower of rain) ■ dubbuṭṭhi lack of rain, drought (opp. suvuṭṭhi ) Ja ii.367 = Ja vi.487; Vism 512.
fr. vṛṣ, see vassati1 & cp. Vedic vṛṣṭi
(f.) = vuṭṭhi; only in cpd. dubbuṭṭhikā time of drought, lack of rain DN i.11; DN-a i.95; Iti 64 sq. (as avuṭṭhika -sama resembling a drought); Dhp-a i.52.
risen (out of), aroused, having come back from (abl.) DN ii.9 (paṭisallāṇā); Snp p.59; SN iv.294.
pp. of vuṭṭhahati; cp. uṭṭhita
(adj.) containing rain, full of rain; the rainy sky Thig 487 (= deva, i.e. rain-god or sky Thag-a 287) Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly = *vyuṣṭi˚, i.e. fr. vi + uṣ (vas) to shine, “luisterrijk,” i.e. lustrous, resplendent. Vuddha & vuddha;
fr. vuṭṭhi, cp. Vedic vṛṣṭimant in same meaning
old (fig. venerable) - 1. vuḍḍha Pv ii.114; Mvu 13, Mvu 2.
2. vuddha MN ii.168; Ja v.140; Snp p.108 (+ mahallaka); DN-a i.283.
pp. of vaḍḍhati
(adj.) old; f. ˚ikā old woman Thig 16. Vuddhi & vuddhi;
vuḍḍha + ka
(f.) increase, growth, furtherance, prosperity.
1. vuḍḍhi Pv-a 22 Often in phrase vuḍḍhi virūḷhi vepulla (all three almost tautological) Mil 51; Vism 129.
2. vuddhi MN i.117 (+ virūḷhi etc.); SN ii.205 sq.; SN iii.53; SN v.94, SN v.97; AN iii.76 (opp. parihāni), 404 (+ virūḷhi), 434 (kusalesu dhammesu); v.123 sq.; Iti 108; Ja v.37 (˚ppatta grown up) Vism 271, Vism 439 (so read for buddhi); Dhp-a ii.82, Dhp-a ii.87 Sdhp 537. *Vunati
a by-form of vaḍḍhi
. The two meanings of the root vṛ; as existing in Sk. are also found in Pāli but only peculiar to the Caus. vāreti (the form aor avari as given by Childers should be read avāriṃsu Mvu 36, Mvu 78). The present tense varati is only found in meaning “to wish” (except in prep. cpds. like saṃvarati to restrain) ■ Defns of vṛ;: Dhtp 255 var varaṇa-sambhattisu; 274 val = saṃvaraṇe (see valaya) 606 var = āvaraṇ’icchāsu.
1. to hinder, obstruct; to conceal, protect (on meanings “hinder” and “conceal” cp. rundhati ); Idg. *ṷer and *ṷel, cp. Gr. ε ̓́λυτρον Sk. varutra, Lat. volvo, aperio etc. See vivarati. The pp. *vuta only in combn with prefixes, like pari˚, saṃ˚ It also appears as *vaṭa in vivaṭa.
2. to wish, desire Idg. *ṷel, cp. Sk. varaṇa, varīyān “better,” Gr. ε ̓́λδομαι to long for, Lat. volo to intend, Goth. wiljan to “will, wilja = E. will ■ Pres. varati (cp. vaṇeti): imper varassu Ja iii.493 (varaṃ take a wish; Pot. vare Pv ii.940 (= vareyyāsi C.); ppr. varamāna Pv ii.940 (= patthayamāna Pv-a 128) ■ pp. does not occur.
we are giving this base as such only from analogy with the Sk. form vrṇāti (vṛṇoti); from the point of view of Pāli grammar we must consider a present tense varati as legitimate (cp. saṃ˚). There are no forms from the base vuṇāti found in the present tense; the Caus vāreti points directly to varati
(& instr.; vuṇhinā ) at Pgdp 13, Pgdp 15, Pgdp 19, Pgdp 35 must be meant for v-uṇha˚ (& v’uṇhena);, i.e. heat (see uṇha ).
said DN-a i.17 (˚ṃ hoti that is to say); Dhp-a ii.21, Dhp-a ii.75, Dhp-a ii.80; Snp-a 174.
-vādin one who speaks what is said (correctly), telling the truth MN i.369; SN ii.33; SN iii.6.
pp. of vatti, vac; cp. utta
sown SN i.134 (khetta); Ja i.340; Ja iii.12; Ja vi.14; Mil 375 (khetta); Pv-a 7, Pv-a 137, Pv-a 139.
pp. of vapati1
shaven MN ii.168 (˚siro). Cp. nivutta2. Vutta-vela
pp. of vapati2
at Ja iv.45 (tena vutta-velāyaṃ & ittarāya vutta-velāya) is by Kern,; Toev. s. v. vutta2 fancifully & wrongly taken as *vyuṣṭa (= vi + uṣṭa, pp. of; vas to shine), i.e. dawned; it is however simply vutta1 = at the time said by him (or her).
(nt.) what has been said, saying; only in title of a canonical book “iti-vuttakaṃ” (“logia”): see under iti.
vutta1 + ka. The P. conneetion seems to be vac, although formally it may be derived fr. vṛt “to happen” etc. (cp. vuttin & vattin, both fr.; vṛt, & vutti) The BSk. equivalent is; vṛttaka “tale” (lit. happening) e.g. Divy 439
at SN i.129 read as vattamāna.
of Dhp 370 is pañca-v-uttari(ṃ), cp. Dhp-a iv.109.
(f.) mode of being or acting, conduct, practice, usage, livelihood, habit SN i.100 (ariya˚; cp. ariya-vāsa); Snp 81 = Mil 228 (= jīvitavutti Snp-a 152); Snp 68, Snp 220, Snp 326, Snp 676; Ja vi.224 (= jīvita-vutti C.); Pv ii.914 (= jīvita Pv-a 120); iv.121 (= jīvikā Pv-a 229); Mil 224, Mil 253; Vv-a 23.
fr. vṛt, cp. vattati; Sk. vṛtti
(adj.) (-˚) living, behaving, acting AN iii.383 (kaṇḍaka˚); Pv-a 120 (dukkha˚); sabhāga˚ living in mutual courtesy or properly, always combd with sappatissa, e.g. Vin i.187; Vin ii.162; AN iii.14 sq.
vutti + ka
(f.) (-˚) condition Vism 310 (āyatta˚).
abstr. formation fr. vutti
(adj.) = vuttika; in sabhāga˚; Vin i.45; Ja i.219. Cp. vattin.
cp. Sk. vṛttin
clothed: not found. More usual nivattha.
pp. of vasati1
having dwelt, lived or spent (time), only in connection with vassa (rainy season) or vāsa (id.: see vāsa2). See e.g. Dhp-a i.7; Pv-a 32, Pv-a 43; Ja i.183 (˚vāsa). With ref. to vassa “year” at Ja iv.317 ■ At Dhp-a i.327 vuttha stands most likely for vuddha (arisen, grown), as also in abstr. vutthattaṃ at Dhp-a i.330 ■ See also parivuttha, pavuttha & vusita;.
pp. of vasati2
(adj.) (-˚) dwelt, lived, only in pubba˚; where he had lived before Mvu 1, Mvu 53 (so for ˚vuttaka ).
vuttha2 + ka
: see vuḍḍha & vuḍḍhi;.
is Pass. of vapati.
to be carried away: Pass. of vahati, q.v. and add refs.: Mil 69; Vism 603 (vuyhare) ■ ppr. vuyhamāna:
1. being drawn MN i.225 (of a calf following its mother’s voice).
2. being carried away (by the current of a river), in danger of drowning Snp 319. pp. vuḷha & vūḷha;.
(adj.) one who is getting drowned, “drownedling Ja iii.507. Vulha & Vulha;
vuyhemāna with disparaging suffix ˚ka
carried away.
1. vuḷha: Vin i.32, Vin i.109. 2. vūḷha: AN iii.69; Ja i.193; Dhp-a ii.265 (udakena). See also būḷha.
pp. of vahati, Pass. vuyhati; but may be vi + ūḷha
at AN iv.170 read with C. at opuniyamāna “sifting” (fr. opunāti ): see remark at AN iv.476.
fulfilled accomplished; (or:) lived, spent (= vuttha); only in phrase vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ (trslnDial. i.93; “the higher life has been fulfilled”) DN i.84 (cp. Dhp i.225 vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ); Iti 115 (ed. vūsita˚); Snp 463 Snp 493; Pp 61 ■ Also at DN i.90 neg. a˚, with ref. to avusitavā, where Rh. D. (Dial. i.112) trsls “ill-bred and “rude,” hardly just. See also arahant ii.A.
Kern, Toev. s. v. vasati takes it as vi + uṣita (of vas2 ), against which speaks meaning of vivasati “to live from home.” Geiger, P.Gr. § 661 & 195 expl;d it as uṣita with prothetic v, as by-form of vuttha. Best fitting in meaning is assumption of vusita being a variant of vosita, with change of o to u in analogy to vuttha; thus = vi + osita “fulfilled, come to an end or to perfection”; cp. pariyosita. Geiger’s expln is supported by phrase brahmacariyaṃ vasati
(nt.) state of perfection DN i.90 (vusitavā-mānin kiṃ aññatra avusitattā = he is proud of his perfection rather from imperfection).
abstr. fr. vusita
(adj.) one who has reached perfection (in chaste living), Ep. of the arahant DN ii.223 (trsln “who has lived ʻthe lifeʼ”): MN i.4; SN iii.61; AN v.16; Snp 514; Nd i.611; Mil 104. On DN i.90 see vusita (end). See also arahant ii.C.
vusita + vant
(adj.) = vusitavant AN iv.340; Snp 1115 (cp. Nd ii.611 = vuṭṭhavā ciṇṇa-caraṇo etc., thus “perfected,” cp. ciṇṇavasin in same meaning).
difficult to explain; perhaps for vasīmant (see vasīvasa) in sense of vasavattin
is Pass. of vasati2 (q.v.).
alienated, withdrawn, drawn away (from), secluded often in phrase eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī etc (see arahant ii.B.), e.g. DN iii.76; SN i.117; SN ii.21, SN ii.244 SN iii.35, SN iii.73 sq.; SN iv.72; AN iv.299. Cp. also AN iv.435 (gaṇasmā v.).
doubtful, whether vi + upakaṭṭha (since the latter is only used of time), or = vavakaṭṭha, with which it is identical in meaning. Cp. also BSk. vyapakṛṣṭa AvS i.233; ii.194; of which it might be a re-translation.
estrangement, alienation, separation, seclusion; always as twofold: kāya˚ citta˚; (of body & of mind), e.g. DN iii.285 (Dial. iii.260 not correctly “serenity”); SN v.67; AN iv.152.
formed fr. vūpakāseti
to draw away, alienate, distract, exclude Vin iv.326; AN v.72 sq ■ Caus. II vūpakāsāpeti to cause to distract or draw away Vin i.49; Vin iv.326 ■ pp. vūpakaṭṭha.
Caus. of vavakassati
= uparati cessation Dhs-a 403.
vi + uparati
appeased, allayed, calmed SN iv.217, SN iv.294; AN i.4 (˚citta); iii.205; Snp 82 Pp 61 (˚citta); Pv-a 113.
pp. of vūpasammati
1. allaying, relief, suppression, mastery, cessation calmness SN iii.32; SN iv.217; SN v.65 (cetaso); DN ii.157 (sankhārā); AN i.4 (id.); ii.162 (papañca˚); v.72; Pp 69; Ja i.392; Dhs-a 403.
2. quenching (of thirst Pv-a 104.
fr. vi + upa + śam; cp. BSk. vyupaśama Divy 578
(nt.) allayment, cessation Ja i.393; Mil 320; Pv-a 37, Pv-a 98.
fr. vi + upa + śam; cp. BSk. vyupaśamana Avs ii.114
1. to be assuaged or quieted SN iv.215.
2. to be suppressed or removed Ja iii.334.
3. to be subdued or extinguished, to go out (of light) Ap. 35 ■ pp. vūpasanta ■ Caus. vūpasāmeti to appease, allay, quiet, suppress, relieve SN v.50; Snp-a 132 (reṇuṃ); Pv-a 20, Pv-a 38 (sokaṃ), 200
vi + upasammati
see vuḷha.
(indecl.) part. of affirmation, emphasizing the preceding word: indeed, truly Vin i.3 (etaṃ ve sukhaṃ); Dhp 63 (sa ve bāḷo ti vuccati), 83 (sabbattha ve), 163 (yaṃ ve… taṃ ve); Snp 1050 Snp 1075, Snp 1082; Dhp-a iii.155 (= yeva). See also have.
cp. Vedic vē, vai
may be enclitic form of tumhe, for the usual vo at Snp 333 (= tumhākaṃ Snp-a 339). See P.T.S. ed. of Sn; cp v.l. ve for vo at Snp 560 (here as particle!).
is the guṇa (increment) form of vi˚; found in many secondary (mostly f. & nt. abstr.) derivations from words with; vi˚; e.g. vekalla, vecikicchin, veneyya, vepulla vematta, vevicchā, veramaṇī, which Bdhgh expls simply as “vi-kārassa ve-kāraṃ katvā veramaṇī” Kp-a 24. Cp. veyy˚.
(adj.) one addicted to dirt, living on dirty food DN i.167; Mil 259 (doubled).
fr. vikaṭa
a kind of arrow MN i.429.
perhaps connected with vikaṇṇaka
(adj.) changed Vv-a 10.
= vikata
(VbhA 63) is a kind of copper: see loha.
(nt.) deficiency Ja v.400; Mil 107; Dhs 223; Dhp-a ii.26 (anga˚ deformity), 79; iii.22; Vv-a 193; Sdhp 5, Sdhp 17 ■ As vekalya at Kp-a 187 (where contrasted to sākalya) ■ jaṇṇū avekallaṃ karoti to keep one’s knees straight Mil 418 (Kern, Toev. s. v trsls “presses tightly together”). See also avekalla. Vekallata & vekalyata
fr. vikala
(f.) deficiency AN iii.441 (a˚); Vism 350 (indriya˚); Ja i.45 (v. 254 (˚lya˚).
abstr. fr. vekalla
is poetical for avekkhiya (= avekkhitvā: see avekkhati) in appaṭivekkhiya not considering Ja iv.4 See the usual paccavekkhati.
quick motion, impulse, force; speed, velocity SN iv.157; AN iii.158 (sara˚); Snp 1074; Mil 202, Mil 258, Mil 391; Pv-a 11, Pv-a 47 (vāta˚) 62 (visa˚), 67, 284 (kamma˚); Sdhp 295 ■ instr vegena (adv.) quickly Dhp-a i.49; another form in same meaning is vegasā, after analogy of thāmasā, balasā etc., e.g. Ja iii.6; v. 117 ■ Cp. saṃ˚.
cp. Vedic vega, fr. vij to tremble
at DN ii.100 (˚missakena, trsln Rh. D. “with the help of thongs”) = SN v.153 (T. reads vedha˚), & Thag 143 (˚missena, trsl;n “violence”) may with Kern, Toev. s. v be taken as veggha = viggha (Sk. vighna), i.e. obstacle hindrance; cp. uparundhati Thag 143. It remains obscure & Kern’s expl;n problematic. Cp. Dial. ii.107.
(adj.) doubting, doubtful AN ii.174 (kankhin + ); SN iii.99 (id.); MN i.18; Snp 510.
fr. vicikicchā
(nt.) confusion, disturbed state of mind Dhtp 460 (in defn of root muh )
fr. vi + citta2
a physician, doctor, medical man, surgeon Ja i.455 Ja iii.142; Kp-a 21; Snp-a 274 (in simile); Vv-a 185, Vv-a 322; Dhp-a i.8; Pv-a 36, Pv-a 86; Sdhp 279, Sdhp 351 ■ hatthi˚; elephantdoctor Ja vi.490; Mvu 25, Mvu 34; visa˚; a physician who cures poison(ous bites) Ja i.310; Ja iv.498.
-kamma medical practice or treatment Ja ii.421 Ja v.253; Vism 384; Dhp-a iii.257, Dhp-a iii.351; Dhp-a iv.172.
fr. vid, *Sk. vaidya, but to Pāli etym. feeling fr. vijjā
(f.) medicine (?) Vin iii.185.
fr. vejja?
wrap, in sīsa˚; head-wrap, turban MN i.244; SN iv.56.
fr. viṣṭ, veṣṭ;
(adj.) surrounding, enveloping DN i.105 (“furbelow” see Dial. i.130); Mvu 11, Mvu 14 (valayanguli˚).
fr. veṭheti
(nt.) 1. surrounding, enveloping Ja vi.489.
2. a turban head-dress DN i.126; AN i.145; AN iii.380 (sīsa˚); Ja v.187; Dhp-a iv.213; Pv-a 161.
3. wrapping, clothing, wrap shawl Ja vi.12 ■ Cp. pali˚.
fr. veṭheti, cp. Epic & Class. Sk. veṣṭhana
enveloped, enclosed, surrounded, wrapped Sdhp 362. Cp. ni˚, pari˚.
pp. of veṭheti
to twist round, envelope, wrap, surround Ja i.5, Ja i.422; Mil 282 ■ Pass. veṭhiyati: see vi˚ ■ pp veṭhita ■ Cp. pali˚.
Vedic veṣṭate, viṣṭ; or veṣṭ; to Lat. virga, branch, lit. twisting
1. a worker in bamboo Pv-a 175.
2. a member of a low & despised class (cp. pukkusa) Vin iv.6; SN i.93 (˚kula); AN ii.85 (id.); iii.385 Pp 51; f. veṇī Ja v.306 (= tacchikā C.); Pv iii.113 (read veṇī for veṇiṃ).
cp. *Sk. vaiṇa, dial.
(f.) a braid of hair, plaited hair, hair twisted into a single braid AN iii.295; Vin ii.266 (dussa˚) Thig 255; Vv 384 (= kesa-veṇi C.). fig. of a “string of people DN i.239 (andha˚). -˚kata plaited, having the hair plaited Ja ii.185; Ja v.431.
cp. Sk. veṇi
bamboo; occurs only in cpds., e.g. -˚gumba thicket of bamboo Dhp-a i.177; -˚tinduka the tree Diospyros Ja v.405 (= timbaru C.); -˚daṇḍaka jungle-rope Ja iii.204 -˚bali a tax to be paid in bamboo (by bamboo workers Dhp-a i.177; ˚-vana bamboo forest Ja v.38.
cp. Vedic veṇu. Another P, form is veḷu (q.v.)
(adj.) full of sophistry, skilled in vitaṇḍā Mil 90 (said of King Milinda).
fr. vitaṇḍā
(nt.) wages, hire; payment, fee, remuneration; tip Ja i.194 (nivāsa˚ rent) Snp 24; Vv-a 141; Dhp-a i.25; Pv-a 112. Most frequently combd with bhatta˚; (q.v.). As vedana at Ja iii.349.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vetana
is grd. of *veti = vināti to weave (q, v.), thus “to be woven,” or what is left to be woven Ja vi.26. inf. vetuṃ Vin ii.150.
vi
the ratan reed, Calamus rotang Ja v.167; Snp-a 451.
Vedic vetasa
at DN i.6 (in the lists of forbidden crafts) refers to some magic art. The proper meaning of the word was already unknown when Bdhgh at DN-a i.84 explained it as “ghana-tāḷaṃ” (cymbal beating) with remark “mantena mata-sarīr’ uṭṭhāpanan ti eke” (some take it to be raising the dead by magic charms). Rh. D. at Dial. i.8 translates “chanting of bards” (cp. vetālika). It is of dialectical origin.
a certain office or occupation at court connected with music or other entertainment, a bard. With other terms in list at Mil 331, some of them obscure and regional. Also at Ja vi.277, where expld as “vetālā [read vettāya? uṭṭhāpake,” i.e. those whose duty it is [by vetāla or vetta] to make (people] rise. The expln is obscure, the uṭṭhāpaka reminds of Bdhgh’s uṭṭhāpana (under vetāla). Kern misunderstands the phrase by translating “chasing bards away.”
dial.; cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vaitālika
to go away, disappear, wane SN iii.135; AN ii.51; Ja iii.154; Dhs-a 329. Cp. vyavayāti.
vi + eti, of i; Sk. vyeti
(& vetulya) a certain dissenting sect (see Mvu. trsln 259, n. 2) in ˚vāda heretic doctrine Mvu 36, Mvu 41; Dpvs 22, 45; -˚vādin an adherent of this doctrine.
cp. *Sk. vaitulya; also called vaipulya, fr. vipula. The P. form is not clear; it probably rests on dial. trsln of a later term
(nt.) twig, rod; creeper; junglerope (cp. veṇu-daṇḍa); cane (calamus). By itself only in standard list of punishments (tortures): vettehi tāḷeti to flog with canes, e.g. AN i.47; AN ii.122; Mil 196 Otherwise freq. in cpds.:
-agga cane-top, sprout of bamboo (cp. kaḷīra) Vism 255 (where Kp-a in id. p. reads ˚ankura); Vb-a 60, Vb-a 239 Vb-a 252. -aṅkura a shoot of bamboo Kp-a 52, Kp-a 67. -āsana cane chair Vv-a 8. -cāra (vettācāra) “stick-wandering” (?) Ja iii.541 (+ sankupatha; C.: vettehi sañcaritabba); Vv 8411 (vettācāraṃ sankupathañ ca maggaṃ expld as vettalatā bandhitvā ācaritabba magga Vv-a 338); better as “jungle-path.” -patha “a jungle full of sticks” (trsln Rh. D.) Mil 280 (+ sankupatha) jungle-path. -bandhana binding with twigs (rope?) creeper-bands SN iii.155; SN v.51 = AN iv.127. -latā cane creeper Ja i.342; Vv-a 8, Vv-a 338. -valli garland of creeper Dāvs iii.40.
cp. Epic Sk. vetra
1. (cp. vediyati & vedanā) (joyful) feeling, religious feeling, enthusiasm awe, emotion, excitement (something like; saṃvega ) DN ii.210 (˚paṭilābha + somanassa-paṭilābha) MN i.465 (uḷāra); Snp 1027 (= pīti Snp-a 585); Ja ii.336 Ja iii.266. attha-veda + dhamma-veda enthusiasm for the truth (for the letter & the spirit) of Buddha’s teaching MN i.37; AN v.329 sq., 333, 349, 352; veda here interpreted as “somanassaṃ” at MN-a i.173 ■ See also cpd ˚jāta.
2. (cp. vedeti & vijjā) (higher) knowledge (as “Buddhist” antithesis to the authority of the “Veda”) insight, revelation, wisdom: that which Bdhgh at MN-a i.173 defines with “ ñāṇa, ” and illustrates with vedagū of Snp 1059; or refers to at DN-a i.139 with defn “vidanti etenā ti vedo.” Thus at Snp 529 & 792 (= vedā vuccanti catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ paññā Nd;1 93), cp. Snp-a 403 ■ As adj. veda Ep. of the Buddha “the knower or the possessor of revelation, at MN i.386. See also vedagū.
3. the Veda(s), the brahmanic canon of authorized religious teaching (revelation) & practice otherwise given as “ gantha ” i.e. “text” at MN-a i.173 & illustrated with “tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū.” The latter formula is frequent in stock phrase describing the accomplishments of a Brahmin, e.g. at DN i.88; MN ii.133; Snp 1019; AN i.163; Dhp-a iii.361. In the older texts only the 3 Vedas (irubbeda = Rg; yaju˚ & sāma˚) are referred to, whereas later (in the Commentaries) we find the 4 mentioned (athabbana added), e.g. the; three at SN iv.118; Ja i.168; Ja ii.47; Ja iii.537; Mil 10; Vism 384; the four at DN-a i.247; Mil 178 ■ Unspecified (sg.): Snp-a 462 As adj. veda “knowing the Vedas” Snp-a 463 (ti˚), cp tevijja ■ The Vedas in this connection are not often mentioned, they are almost identical with the Mantras (see manta ) and are often (in Com.) mentioned either jointly with manta or promiscuously, e.g. Pv ii.613 (the Vedas with the 6 aṅgas, i.e. vedāngas, called manta ); Snp-a 293 (manta-pāragū + veda-pāragū), 322 448.
-antagu “one who has reached the end of knowledge, i.e. one who has obtained perfection in wisdom Vin i.3; Snp 463. -gū one who has attained to highest knowledge (said of the Buddha). Thus different from “tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū, ” which is brahmanic. The expln of vedagū is “catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ” Nd ii.612 & see above 2 ■ SN i.141, SN i.168; SN iv.83, SN iv.206; AN ii.6; AN iv.340; Snp 322, Snp 458, Snp 529, Snp 749, Snp 846, Snp 947, Snp 1049, Snp 1060; Nd i.93 Nd i.204, Nd i.299, Nd i.431. A peculiar meaning of vedagū is that of “soul” (lit. attainer of wisdom) at Mil 54 & 71; -jāta thrilled, filled with enthusiasm, overcome with awe, excited AN ii.63; Snp 995, Snp 1023; Kv 554 = Vv 3427 (= jāta-somanassa Vv-a 156); Ja i.11; Mil 297. -pāragū one who excels in the knowledge of the Vedas, perfected in the Veda Snp-a 293; cp. above 3. -bandhu one who is familiar with the Vedas Snp-a 192.
fr. vid, or more specifically ved as P. root
(adj.) knowing or studying the Vedas Snp-a 462 (brāhmaṇa).
fr. veda 3
(adj.) having feeling, endowed with sensation Vb 419 (a˚ + asaññaka).
fr. vedanā
(f.) feeling, sensation (see on term, e.g. Cpd. 14 Mrs. Rh D. B. Psy., ch. iv.) DN i.45; DN ii.58 (cp. Dial. ii.54), 66 iii.58, 77, 221, 228, 238 (˚upādāna); SN iii.86 sq.; AN i.39, AN i.122, AN i.141; AN ii.79, AN ii.198, AN ii.256; AN iii.245 sq., 450; iv.301 385; Kp iii. (tisso v.); Snp 435, Snp 529, Snp 739, Snp 1111; Nd i.109 Nd ii.551 (tisso v.); Pts i.6, Pts i.50 sq., 145 sq., 153 sq. ii.109 sq., 181 sq.; Vb 135 sq., 294, 401, 403 sq. Dhs 3, Dhs 1348; Ne 27, Ne 65 sq.; 83, 123, 126; Tikp 246 317 sq., 345 sq.; Vism 460 sq.; DN-a i.125; Vb-a 13 sq. 39 sq., 80, 178, 193, 221 (˚ânupassanā, in detail), 263 sq. 382 (various) ■ Three modes of feeling (usually understood whenever mention is made of “ tisso vedanā ”) sukhā (pleasant), dukkhā (painful) adukkha-m-asukhā (indifferent) DN iii.275; SN ii.53, SN ii.82; SN iv.207; AN iii.400; Iti 46; Tikp 317 sq ■ or: kusalā, akusalā, avyākatā Vism 460 ■ Five vedanās: sukhaṃ, dukkhaṃ, somanassaṃ domanassaṃ, upekkhā Vism 461. Categories of 2 to 108 modes of Vedanā, SN iv.223 sq ■ vedanā is one of the 5 khandhas (see khandha ii.B) ■ On relation of old and new sensations (purāṇa˚ → nava˚) see e.g. AN ii.40; AN iii.388; AN iv.167; Vism 33; and see formula under yātrā ■ In the Paṭiccasamuppāda (q.v.) vedanā stands between phassa as condition and taṇhā as result; see e.g. Vism 567 sq.
2. (in special application) painful sensation, suffering, pain (i.e. dukkhavedanā) MN i.59; AN i.153 (sārīrikā bodily pain); ii.116 (id.); iii.143 (id.); Pv i.1015; Mil 253 (kāyikā & cetasikā); Vb-a 101 (maraṇ’ antikā v. agonies of death)- vedan’ aṭṭa afflicted by pain Vin ii.61; Vin iii.100; Ja i.293-As adj. vedana suffering or to be suffered Pv iii.106 (= anubhūyamāna Pv-a 214) ■ vedana at Ja iii.349 is to be read as vetana.
fr. ved˚;: see vedeti; cp. Epic Sk. vedanā
felt, experienced SN i.112; SN ii.65; SN iii.46; AN ii.198; AN iv.415; Vism 460.
pp. of vedeti
(nt.) Name of one of the 9 angas (see nava ) or divisions of the Canon according to matter AN ii.7, AN ii.103, AN ii.178; AN iii.88, AN iii.107, AN iii.361 sq.; AN iv.113; Vin iii.8 Pp 43; Dhs-a 26; DN-a i.24; Pv-a 22. The Dhs-a comprises under this aṅga the 2 suttas so-called in M (43, 44), the Sammādiṭṭhi, Sakkapañha, Sankhārābhājaniya Mahāpuṇṇama etc. Suttas, as catechetical Dhs-a 26 = DN-a i.24 ■ Note. The 2nd part of the word looks like a distortion fr. ariya (cp. mahalla → mah ariya). Or might it be = vedanga?
may be dialectical, obscure as to origin; Bdhgh refers it to Veda 1
& Vedī (f.) ledge, cornice, rail Mvu 32, Mvu 5; Mvu 35, Mvu 2; Mvu 36, Mvu 52 (pāsāṇa˚); 36, 103; Vv 8416 (= vedikā Vv-a 346) ■ See on term Dial. ii.210 Mvu. tsrln 220, 296. Cp. vedikā & velli;.
Vedic vedi sacrificial bench
(f.) (& vediyā ) cornice, ledge, railing DN ii.179; Vin ii.120; Ja iv.229, Ja iv.266; Vv 786 (vediyā vedikā Vv-a 304); 8416 (= vedikā Vv-a 340); Vv-a 275.
fr. vedi
experienced, felt SN iv.205 (sukha & dukkha) = Snp 738.;
pp. of vedeti
Name of a tree Ja v.405; Ja vi.550.
fr. vidisā?
“to sense,” usually in Denom. function (only one Caus. meaning: see aor. avedi ); meaning twofold either intellectually “to know” (cp. veda ), or with ref. to general feeling “to experience” (cp. vedanā ). For the present tense two bases are to be distinguished viz. ved˚; used in both meanings; and vediy˚; (= *vedy˚) a specific Pāli formation after the manner of the 4th (y) class of Sk. verbs, used only in meaning of “experience.” Thus vedeti: (a) to know (as = acc., equal to “to call”) Snp 211 sq. (taṃ muniṃ vedayanti); (b) to feel, to experience SN iv.68 (phuṭṭho vedeti, ceteti sañjānāti); MN i.37; Pv iv.150 (dukkhaṃ = anubhavati Pv-a 241) ■ vediyati: to feel, to experience a sensation or feeling (usually with vedanaṃ or pl. vedanā) MN i.59 MN ii.70 (also Pot. vediyeyya); SN ii.82; SN iii.86 sq.; SN iv.207; AN i.141; AN ii.198 (also ppr. vediyamāna); Ja ii.241; Mil 253 ■ aor. avedi he knew, recognized Ja iii.420 (= aññāsi C.); he made known, i.e. informed Ja iv.35 (= jānāpesi C.); vedi (recognized, knew) Snp 643, Snp 647, Snp 1148 (= aññāsi aphusi paṭivijjhi Nd ii.613); & vedayi Snp 251 (= aññāsi Snp-a 293) ■ Fut. vedissati (shall experience) Pv i.1015 (dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ v.) ■ grd. vediya (to be known Snp 474 (para˚ diṭṭhi held as view by others; expld as “ñāpetabba” Snp-a 410); vedanīya: (a) to be known, intelligible, comprehensible DN i.12; (dhammā nipuṇā… paṇḍita-vedanīyā); ii.36; MN i.487; MN ii.220; (b) to be experienced SN iv.114 (sukha˚ & dukkha˚); AN i.249 (diṭṭhadhamma˚); iv.382; Pv ii.117 (sukha˚-kamma sukha-vipāka Pv-a 150); iii.37 (kamma); iv.129 (of kamma-vipāka = anubhavana-yogga Pv-a 228); Pv-a 145 (kamma); & veditabba to be understood or known DN i.186; Pv-a 71, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 104 ■ pp. vedita & vedayita;.
Vedic vedayati; Denom. or Caus. fr. vid to know or feel
lit. from the Videha country; wise (see connection between Vedeha & ved, vedeti at DN-a i.139, resting on popular etymology) SN ii.215 sq (˚muni, of Ānanda; expld as “vedeha-muni = paṇḍitamuni,” cp. K.S. i.321; trslnK.S. ii.145 “the learned sage”); Mvu 3, Mvu 36 (same phrase; trsln “the sage of the Videha country”); Ap 7 (id.).
= Npl. Vedeha
1. piercing, pricking, hitting AN ii.114 sq. (where it is said of a horse receiving pricks on var. parts, viz. on its hair: loma˚; its flesh: maṃsa˚; ; its bone: aṭṭhi˚) ■ avedha [to vyath! not to be shaken or disturbed, imperturbable Snp 322 (= akampana-sabhāva Snp-a 331).
2. a wound Ja ii.274 sq.
3. a flaw Mil 119 ■ Cp. ubbedha.
adj.-n.) [fr. vidh = vyadh, cp. vyādha
to tremble, quiver, quake, shake SN v.402; Thag 651; Thag 2, Thag 237 (˚amāna); Snp 899, Snp 902 (Pot. vedheyya); Nd i.312, Nd i.467; Ja ii.191 (kampati + ); Mil 254 (+ calati); Vv-a 76 (vedhamānena sarīrena); Dhp-a ii.249 (Pass. vedhiyamāna trembling; v.l. pa˚). Cp. vyadhati, ubbedhati & pavedhati.
for *vethati = vyathati, of vyath
(nt.) piercing Ja iv.29; DN-a i.221.
fr. vidh to pierce
(nt.) widowhood Ja vi.508.
abstr. fr. vidhavā, = Epic Sk. vaidhavya
son of a widow; in two diff. passages of the Jātaka, both times characterized as sukka-cchavī vedhaverā “sons of widows, with white skins,” and at both places misunderstood (or unintelligibly expld) by the Cy., viz. Ja iv.184 (+ thulla-bāhū; C.: vidhavā apatikā tehi vidhavā sarantī ti [ti]vidha-verā ca vedhaverā); vi.508 (C. vidhav’ itthakā; v.l. vidhav-ittikāmā purisā).
for *Sk. vaidhaveya, fr. vidhavā
(f.) shooting, hitting Ja vi.448.
pp. of vedheti, Caus. of vijjhati
(adj.) piercing, shooting, hitting: see akkhaṇa˚.
fr. vidh = vyadh
descended from Vinatā, Ep. of a garuḷa Pts ii.196; Ja vi.260; Dāvs iv.45.
fr. vinata
a nihilist. The Buddha was accused of being aN v. MN i.140.
fr. vi 3 + naya
(adj.) versed in the Vinaya Vin i.235; Vin iii.3 (cp. Vin AN i.135); MN i.140; AN iv.175, AN iv.182 sq.v.190; Mil 341.
fr. vinaya
(adj.) to be instructed, accessible to; instruction, tractable, ready to receive the teaching (of the Buddha). The term is late (Jātaka style & Com. Ja i.182 (Buddha˚), 504; Snp-a 169, Snp-a 510; Dhp-a i.26 Vb-a 79; Vv-a 217; Thag-a 69 (Ap. v. 10). Cp. buddha˚.
= vineyya, grd. of vineti; cp. BSk. vaineya Divy 36, Divy 202 & passim
(nt.) tractableness Ne 99.
fr. veneyya
(nt.) ripening, ripeness, maturity. - (adj.) yielding fruit, resulting in (-˚) AN i.223 (kāmadhātu˚ kamma); iii.416 (sammoha˚ dukkha); Snp 537 (dukkha˚ kamma).
fr. vipakka
(f.) a woman resembling a man (sexually), a man-like woman, androgyn Vin ii.271; Vin iii.129.
vi + purisa + aka
(nt.) full development, abundance, plenty, fullness DN iii.70, DN iii.221, DN iii.285; SN iii.53; AN i.94 (āmisa˚, dhamma˚); iii.8, 404; v.152 sq., 350 sq.; Mil 33, Mil 251; Vism 212 (saddhā˚, sati˚, paññā˚, puñña˚), 619; Dhp-a i.262 (sati˚); Vb-a 290 ■ Often in phrase vuḍḍhi virūḷhi vepulla (see vuḍḍhi), e.g. Vin i.60; Iti 113. Cp. vetulla.
fr. vipula
(f.) = vepulla; AN ii.144 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚); Ap 26, 39; Mil 252 As vepullataṃ (nt.) at AN iii.432.
abstr. formation fr. vepulla
futility, failure Ja iv.451 (opp. sampatti; expld as vipatti C.).
fr. vibhanga
(& ˚iya) (adj.) see a˚.
(& ˚ā) (nt. & f.) thinking over, criticism Dhs 16; Pts i.119; Pp 25; Ne 76.
fr. vibhāvin
(f.) = vibhassikatā, i.e. gossiping Vin iv.241.
(& ˚ya) (adj.-n..) causing disaster or ruin; nt. calumnious speech, bad language DN iii.106 (˚ya); Snp 158 (˚ya); Vv 8440 (˚ka; expld as “sahitānaṃ vinābhāva-karaṇato vebhūtikaṃ,” i.e. pisuṇaṃ Vv-a 347).
fr. vibhūti 1
(nt.) loom or shuttle Dhp-a iii.175; Snp-a 268.
fr. vāyati2, cp. Sk. veman (nt.); Lat. vimen
(nt.) = vema Vin ii.135.
(nt.) middle, centre Ja iv.250; Ja vi.485; Pp 16, Pp 17; Vism 182 (˚bhāga central part) Vv-a 241, Vv-a 277 ■ loc. vemajjhe: (a) in the present, or central interval of saṃsāra Snp 849 (cp. Nd i.213 and majjha 3 b); (b) in two, asunder Vism 178.
fr. vi + majjha
(adj.) in doubt, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.126; Vin ii.65; Vin iv.220, Vin iv.259; Vism 14 (˚sīla). Opp nibbematika.
fr. vimati
(nt.) difference, distinction Mil 410; Vism 195.
fr. vi + matta1
(f.) difference, distinction, discrepancy, disproportion(ateness) MN i.453 MN i.494; SN ii.21; SN iii.101; SN v.200; AN iii.410 sq.; Snp p.102 (puggala˚); Ne 4, Ne 72 sq., 107 sq.; Mil 284, Mil 285. The 8 differences of the var. Buddhas are given at Snp-a 407 sq. as addhāna˚, āyu˚, kula˚, pamāṇa˚, nekkhamma˚ padhāna˚, bodhi˚, raṃsi˚.
abstr. formation fr. vematta
(adj.) having a different mother Ja iv.105 (˚bhāginī); vi.134 (˚bhātaro); Pv-a 19.
vi + ˚mātika
(adj.) having a fairy palace (see vimāna 3) Ja v.2; Dhp-a iii.192.
fr. vimāna1
is a (purely phonetic) diaeretic form of vy˚; for which viy˚ & veyy˚; are used indiscriminately. There is as little difference between viy˚ & veyy˚; as between vi˚ & ve˚; in those cases where (double, as it were abstract nouns are formed from words with ve˚; (vepullatā, vemattatā, etc.), which shows that ve˚; was simply felt as vi˚. Cp. the use of e for i (esp. before y) in cases like alabbhaneyya → ˚iya; addhaneyya → ˚iya; pesuṇeyya → ˚iya, without any difference in meaning.
(adj.) belonging to a tiger Dhp 295 (here simply = vyaggha. i.e. with a tiger as fifth veyya˚ = vya˚ metri causâ; Bdhgh’s expln at Dhp-a iii.455 is forced) ■ (m). a car covered with a tiger’s skin Ja v.259, cp. 377.
fr. vyaggha
(adj.) Ja iv.347.
one who knows the signs, a fortune-teller, soothsayer Ja v.233, Ja v.235 ■ The BSk equivalent is vaipañcanika (Mvu i.207) etc.: see under vipañcita, which may have to be derived (as viyañcita = viyañjita) from vi + añj = vyañjana. See also Kern. Toev. p. 19.
= vyañjanika
= viyatta, i.e. accomplished, clever Ja v.258.
(f.) distinction, cleverness, accomplishment Ja v.258; Ja vi.305.
= viyatti
(nt.) distinction, lucidity; accomplishment DN iii.38 (paññā˚ in wisdom); MN i.82, MN i.175; MN ii.209.
abstr. form (˚ya = ˚ka) fr. veyyatti = viyatti
(m. nt.) 1. (nt.) answer, explanation, exposition DN i.46, DN i.51, DN i.105, DN i.223; DN ii.202; AN iii.125; AN v.50 sq.; Snp 352, Snp 510, Snp 1127; Pp 43, Pp 50; Mil 347; DN-a i.247.
2. (m.) one who is expert in explanation or answer, a grammarian DN i.88; AN iii.125; Snp 595; Mil 236; Snp-a 447.
= vyākaraṇa
(adj.) causing injury or oppression, oppressive, annoying (of pains) MN i.10; AN iii.388; Vism 35 (expld diff. by Bdhgh as “vyābādhato uppannattā veyyābādhikā”).
= vyābādhika
(nt.) money to defray expenses, means Vin ii.157.
fr. vyaya
(nt.) service, attention rendering a service; work, labour, commission, duty Vin i.23; AN iii.41; Ja i.12 (kāya˚); vi.154; Snp-a 466; Vv-a 94; Thag-a 253. -˚kamma doing service, work Ja iii.422; -˚kara servant, agent, (f.) housekeeper Ja iii.327; Vv-a 349; ˚-kārikā (f.) id. Pv-a 65 ■ Cp vyappatha.
corresponds to (although doubtful in what relation) Sk. *vaiyā-pṛtya, abstr. fr. vyāpṛta active, busy (to pṛ; pṛṇoti) = P. vyāvaṭa; it was later retranslated into BSk. as vaiyāvṛtya (as if vi + ā + vṛt ) e.g. Divy 54, Divy 347; Mvu i.298
(nt.) service, waiting on, attention Snp p.104 (kāya˚); Ja iv.463; Ja vi.154, Ja vi.418, Ja vi.503 (dāna˚); Dhp-a i.27 (kāya˚) iii.19 (dāna˚); Dpvs vi.61.
doublet of veyyāvacca; ˚ka = ˚ya
(nt.) hatred, revenge, hostile action, sin AN iv.247; Dhp 5; Ja iv.71; Dhp-a i.50. Pv-a 13 ■ avera absence of enmity, friendliness; (adj. friendly, peaceable, kind DN i.167, DN i.247 (sa˚ & a˚), 251; SN iv.296; AN iv.246; Snp 150. The pañca bhayāni verāni (or vera-bhayā ) or pañca verā (Vbh 378) “the fivefold guilty dread” are the fears connected with sins against the 5 first commandments (sīlāni); see S ii.68; AN iii.204 sq.; AN iv.405 sq.; AN v.182; Iti 57 = Snp 167 (vera-bhay’atīta). Veraka = vera; a
cp. Sk. vaira, der. fr. vīra
Pv iv.138. See also verika.
(nt.) a variety of kingdoms or provinces SN iii.6 (nānā˚-gata bhikkhu a bh. who has travelled much).
fr. vi + rajja
(adj.) belonging to var. kingdoms or provinces, coming from various countries (nānā˚) living in a different country, foreign, alien DN i.113; MN ii.165 (brāhmaṇā); AN iii.263 (bhikkhū); Thag 1037; Vv 8412 (= videsa-vasika Vv-a 338); Mil 359.
fr. verajja
(f.) abstaining from (-˚), absti nence AN ii.217, AN ii.253; AN v.252 sq., 304 sq.; Snp 291; Pp 39 Pp 43; Vism 11; Kp-a 24; Dhp-a i.235, Dhp-a i.305.
fr. viramaṇa; cp. the odd form BSk. vīramaṇī, e.g. Jtm. 213
(& ˚bha) (adj.) attribute of the wind (vāta or pl. vātā ) a wind blowing in high altitudes [cp. BSk. vairambhaka Divy 90] SN ii.231; AN i.137; Th i.597; Ja iii.255, Ja iii.484 Ja vi.326; Nd ii.562; Vb-a 71.
etym.? Probably dialectical, i.e. regional
= vera i. e, inimical; enemy (cp. veraka ) Ja v.229, Ja v.505; Vism 48.
(adj.) bearing hostility, inimical, revengeful Ja iii.177; Pv iv.325 (= veravanto Pv-a 252); Mil 196 Vism 296 (˚puggala), 326 (˚purisa, in simile), 512 (in sim.); Vb-a 89 ■ Neg. averin Dhp 197, Dhp 258.
fr. vera
the sun (lit. “shining forth”) SN i.51; AN ii.50.
= virocana, fr virocati
(f.)
1. time, point of time (often equal to; kāla Pp 13 (uḍḍahana˚); Ja iv.294; Mil 87; Kp-a 181 PugA 187; Snp-a 111 (bhatta˚ meal-time); Dhs-a 219; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 104, Pv-a 109 (aruṇ’ uggamana˚), 129, 155; Vv-a 165 (paccūsa˚ in the early morning).
2. shore, sea-shore Vin ii.237 = AN iv.198; Ja i.212; Mvu 19, Mvu 30.
3. limit boundary AN v.250 (between v. & agyāgāra); Thag 762; Mil 358; Dhs-a 219; in spec. sense as “measure, restriction, control (of character, sīla-velā ) at Dhs 299 (“not to trespass” trsln), and in dogmatic exegesis of ativelaṃ at Nd i.504; cp. Nd ii.462 & Dhs-a 219.
4 heap, multitude (?) Dhs-a 219 (in Npl. Uruvelā which is however *Uruvilvā).;
Vedic velā in meaning 1; Ep. Sk. in meanings 2 & 3
(adj.) “belonging to Velāma,” at DN ii.198 used as a clan-name (f. Velāmikānī), with vv.ll. Vessinī & Vessāyinī (cp. Velāma Np. comb;d with Vessantara at Vb-a 414), and at DN ii.333 classed with khujjā vāmanikā & komārikā (trsln “maidens”; Bdhgh “very young & childish”: see Dial. ii.359); v.l. celāvikā They are some sort of servants, esp. in demand for a noble’s retinue. See also Np. Velāma (the V. sutta at Ja i.228 sq.).
velāma + ika, the word velāma probably a district word
to destroy (?) Dhs-a 219 (cp. Expos. ii.297); expld by viddhaṃseti. More appropriate would be a meaning like “control,” bound restrict.
Denom. fr. velā
(adj.) flashing (of swords) Ja vi.449.
Is it a corruption fr. *veyyāyin = *vyāyin?
is a word peculiar to the Jātaka. At one passage it is expld by the Commentary as “vedi” (i.e. rail, cornice), where it is applied to the slender waist of a woman (cp. vilāka & vilaggita; ): Ja vi.456. At most of the other passages it is expld as “a heap of gold” thus at Ja v.506 (verse: velli-vilāka-majjhā; C.: “ettha vellī ti rāsi vilākamajjhā ti vilagga-majjhā uttattaghana-suvaṇṇa -rāsi -ppabhā c’ eva tanu-dīgha-majjhā ca”), and vi.269 (verse: kañcana-velli-viggaha; C. “suvaṇṇa -rāsi -sassirīka-sarīrā”). At v.398 in the same passage as vi.269 expld in C. as “kañcana-rūpakasadisa-sarīrā”). The idea of “golden” is connected with it throughout.
dial.?
(adj.) crooked, bent; (of hair:) curly Pv-a 189. It is only used with ref. to hair.
-agga with bending (or crooked) tip (of hair), i.e. curled Thig 252 (cp. Thag-a 209); Ja v.203 (= kuñcit’ agga C.); vi.86 (sun-agga-vellita); Pv-a 46, Pv-a 142 ■ Cp kuñcita-kesa Ja i.89.
pp. of vellati, vell to stagger, cp. paṭivellati
a bamboo AN ii.73; Vin iv.35; Ja iv.382 (daṇḍa˚); v.71; Vism 1, Vism 17; Snp-a 76 (= vaṃsa); Vb-a 334.
-agga (veḷagga) the top of a bamboo Vin ii.110 -gumba a bamboo thicket Snp-a 49, Snp-a 75. -daṇḍa a bamboo stick Snp-a 330. -dāna a gift of bamboo Vb 246; Mil 369; Snp-a 311; Kp-a 236; Vb-a 333. -nāḷi (˚nalaka ˚nāḷika) a stalk or shaft of bamboo Vism 260; Kp-a 52 Thag-a 212. -pabba a stalk or section of the b. Ja i.245 Vism 358 = Vb-a 63.
= veṇu, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 433 & Prk. veḷu: Pischel,; Prk. Gr. § 243
a kind of tree Ja v.405 (= vaṃsa-coraka).
fr. veḷu
(nt.) a precious stone, lapis lazuli; cp. the same word “beryl” (with metathesis r → l; not fr. the Sk. form), which the Greeks brought to Europe from India ■ DN i.76; Vin ii.112; SN i.64; AN i.215; AN iv.199, AN iv.203 sq.; Ja iii.437; Pv ii.75 Mvu 11, Mvu 16; Dhp-a ii.220. Often in descriptions of Vimānas, e.g. Vv 21; 121; 171; cp. Vv-a 27, Vv-a 60 ■ Probably through a word-play with veḷu (bamboo; popular etymology) it is said to have the colour of bamboo: see vaṃsa-rāga & vaṃsa-vaṇṇa;. At Ja i.207 a peacock’s neck is described as having the colour of the veḷuriya At Mil 267 (in inventory of “loka”) we have the foll enumeration of precious stones: pavāḷa coral, lohitaṅka ruby, masāragalla cat’s eye, veḷuriya lapis lazuli, vajira diamend. See also under ratana1.
cp. dial. Sk. vaiḍūrya
probably not to veḷu, but another spelling for beḷuva, in ˚laṭṭhikā SN iii.91, as sometimes v.l. veḷuva for beḷuva (q.v.).
cp. Vedic vainava (made of cane)?
(nt.) attribute, epithet; synonym Ne 1 sq., 24, 53 sq., 82, 106; Vism 427; Snp-a 24, Snp-a 447 Cp. adhivacana.
fr. vivacana
(nt.) discolouring Thag-a 85 (Ap. v. 42).
fr. vivaṇṇa
(nt.) 1. state of having no caste, life of an outcast AN v.87≈200. [Cp. BSk. vaivarṇika outcast Divy 424].
2. discolouring, fading waning Ja iii.394.
abstr. fr. vivaṇṇa
wedding-guest Ja ii.420.
fr. vivāha
(nt.) “multifarious wants,” greediness, selfishness, avarice Snp 941 (= pañca macchariyāni Nd i.422, as at Nd ii.614), 1033 (where Ne 11 reads vivicchā); Pp 19, Pp 23; Dhs 1059 Dhs 1122; Nd ii.s. v. taṇhā; Dhs-a 366, Dhs-a 375.
abstr. formation fr. vivicchā
dress, apparel; (more frequently:) disguise, (assumed) appearance Ja i.146 (pakati˚ usual dress), 230 (āyuttaka˚); iii.418 (andha˚) Mil 12; Dhp-a ii.4; Pv-a 62, Pv-a 93 (ummattaka˚), 161 (tunnavāya˚); Sdhp 384; purisa˚ (of women) DN-a i.147.
cp. Sk. veṣa, fr. viṣ to be active
= visama Vv-a 10.
Name of a month (April-May) Mvu 1, Mvu 73; Mvu 29, Mvu 1.
cp. Vedic vaiśākha
(nt.) (the Buddha’s or an Arahant’s) perfect selfconfidence (which is of 4 kinds), self-satisfaction, subject of confidence. The four are given in full at MN i.71 sq. viz. highest knowledge, khīṇāsava state, recognition of the obstacles, recognition & preaching of the way to salvation. See also DN i.110; Ja ii.27; AN ii.13; AN iii.297 sq. AN iv.83, AN iv.210, AN iv.213; MN i.380; Pts ii.194; Nd ii.466b; Dhp-a i.86; DN-a i.278; Kp-a 104; Vv-a 213; Sdhp 593.
abstr. formation fr. visārada, i.e. *vaiśāradya
a Vaiśya (Vessa) Ja vi.15, Ja vi.21, Ja vi.328, Ja vi.490, Ja vi.492. As vessāyana at Snp 455 (where vesiyāna is required). Vesi & Vesiya
= vessa, with ˚na as in gimhāna, vassāna etc.
(f.) a woman of low caste, a harlot, prostitute ■ (a) vesī: Vin iii.138; Ja v.425; in cpd. vesi-dvāra a pleasure house Thig 73 ■ (b) vesiyā Vin iv.278; Snp 108; Vb 247; in cpd. vesiyā-gocara asking alms from a prostitute’s house Dhp-a iii.275; Dhs-a 151; Vb-a 339.
the f. of vessa
(nt.) a house Ja v.84. A trace of the n-stem in loc. vesmani Ja v.60.
Vedic veśman, fr. viś to enter: see visati
a Vaiśya, i.e. a member of the third social (i.e. lower) grade (see vaṇṇa 6), a man of the people DN iii.81, DN iii.95 (origin) SN i.102, SN i.166; SN iv.219; SN v.51; AN i.162; AN ii.194; AN iii.214, AN iii.242 Vb 394; DN-a i.254 (origin) ■ f. vesī (q.v.); vessī (as a member of that caste) DN i.193; AN iii.226, AN iii.229.
cp. Vedic vaiśya, a dial. (local) word
(f.) a Vaiśya woman Snp 314. Vehayasa = vihayasa
fr. vessa
, i.e. air, sky; only used in acc. vehāyasaṃ in function of a loc. (cp. Vv-a 182: vehāyasaṃ = vehāyasa-bhūte hatthi-piṭṭhe), combd with ṭhita (standing in the air) Vv 41; Mvu 1, Mvu 24; Pv-a 14.
the air, sky, heaven; only in the two cases (both used as loc. “in the air”) acc. vehāsaṃ DN iii.27; SN v.283; Vin iii.105; Vv-a 78 & loc.; vehāse Vin i.320.
-kuṭī “air hut” i.e. airy room, “a hut in which a middle-sized man can stand without knocking his head against the ceiling” (expln) Vin iv.46. -gamana going through the air Vism 382; Dhtm 586. -ṭṭha standing in the air DN i.115; DN-a i.284. -ṭṭhita id. DN i.95.
contraction of vehāyasa
occurs only in acc. (= loc.) vehāsayaṃ, equal to vihāyasaṃ at Ja iv.471.
= vehāyasa with metathesis y → s
(indecl.) a particle of emphasis, perhaps = eva, or = vo2 (as dative of interest). The Commentaries explain it as “nipāta,” i.e. particle. Thus at Snp 560 Snp 760.
is enclitic form of tumhe (see under tuvaṃ ), i.e. to you, of you but it is generally interpreted by the C. as “nipāta, i.e. particle (of emphasis or exclamation; i.e. vo1) Thus e.g. at Pv i.53 (cp. Pv-a 26).
cp. Vedic vaḥ, Av. vō, Lat. vos, Gr. υ ̓́μμε
is commonly regarded as the prefix combn vi + ava˚; (i.e. vi + o˚), but in many cases it simply represents ava˚; (= o˚) with v as euphonic (“vorschlag”), as in vonata (= onata), voloketi, vokkanti, vokiṇṇa, voropeti vosāpeti, vosāna, vossagga. In a few cases it corresponds to vi + ud˚; as in vokkamati, vocchijjati voyoga.
1. difference Snp 611. - 2. constituent of being (i.e. the khandhas), usually as eka˚, catu˚ & pañca˚-bhava;, e.g. Kv 261; Vb 137 Tikp 32, 36 sq.; Vism 572; Kp-a 245; Snp-a 19, Snp-a 158 In this meaning vokāra is peculiar to the Abhidhamma and is almost synonymous with vikāra 4, and in the Yamaka with khandha, e.g. pañca v., catu v. etc. 3. worthless thing, trifle SN ii.29.
4. inconvenience disadvantage (cp. vikāra 3) Pv-a 12 (line 1 read: anek ākāra-vokāraṃ).
v(i) + okāra; cp. vikāra
(adj.) covered with, drenched (with); mixed up, full of (instr.) MN i.390; SN ii.29; AN i.123, AN i.148; AN ii.232; Ja i.110; Dhs-a 69 ■ Cp. abbokiṇṇa.
v(i) + okiṇṇa
(adj.) mixed up Mil 300 (kapiniddā-pareto vokiṇṇakaṃ jaggati a person with light sleep, so-called “monkey-doze,” lies confusedly awake i.e. is half asleep, half awake). Rh. D. not quite to the point: “a man still guards his scattered thoughts.”
vokiṇṇa + ka
deviated from (abl.) Iti 36.
pp. of vokkamati
(f.) descent (into the womb), conception Thag 790.
v(i) + akkanti
to turn aside, deviate from (abl.); mostly in ger. vokkamma Vin ii.213; DN i.230; MN iii.117; SN iv.117; Snp 946; Ja i.23; Vism 18 ■ pp vokkanta.
vi + ukkamati
(nt.) turning aside, deviation fr. (abl.) MN i.14; AN i.243.
fr. vokkamati
(adj) is at Ja iii.21 given as syName of vaggu (q.v.).
? doubtful reading
penetrated (into consciousness), investigated, apperceived MN i.478; AN iv.363 (= manodvāre samudācāra-ppatta).
pp. of vi + ocarati
(f.) covering up (entirely) Vb-a 493.
fr. vi + ava + chad
to be cut off SN iii.53 (so read) ■ pp. neg. abbocchinna: see abbhocchinna. (= *avyucch˚).
vi + ud + chijjati, Pass. of chid
(& ˚ṭṭhapana ) (nt.) establishing, synthesis, determination, a momentary stage in the unit called percept (cp. Cpd. 29), always with ˚kicca (or ˚kiriyā) “accomplishing the function of determination Vism 21; Dhs-a 401; DN-a i.194 (v.l. voṭṭhabb˚); Tikp 276 (˚kiriyā).
= vavatth˚
to establish, put up, arrange Ja vi.583.
= vavatthāpeti
(adj.) free from water Vin ii.113.
vi + odaka = udaka
(or ˚dāpeti ) to cleanse, purify Dhp-a ii.162.
Caus. of vodāyati
(adj.) clean, pure MN i.319.
vi + odāta, cp. vīvadāta
(nt.) 1. cleansing, getting bright (of sun & moon) DN i.10 (= visuddhatā DN-a i.95)
2. purity (from the kilesas, or stains of sin), purification sanctification MN i.115 (opp. sankilesa); SN iii.151 (citta˚, adj.; opp. citta-sankilesa); AN iii.418 sq.; AN v.34; Pts i.166; Vb 343; Ne 96, Ne 100, Ne 125 sq.; Vism 51 sq. 89; Vb-a 401; Dhp-a iii.405.
fr. vi + ava + dā4 to clean, cp. BSk. vyavadāna Divy 616; Avs ii.188
(adj.) apt to purify, purifying DN i.195; DN iii.57. Opp. saṅkilesika.
grd. formn from vodāna
(nt.) cleansing, purification Dhp-a iii.237 (= pariyodapana).
fr. vodapeti
at Ja iv.184 appears to be a misreading for codāya (ger. from codeti ) in meaning iṇaṃ codeti to undertake a loan, to lend money at interest (= vaḍḍhiyā inaṃ payojetvā C.), to demand payment for a loan. The v.l. at all places is codāya (= codetvā). See codeti.
to become clean or clear, to be purified or cleansed AN v.169 (fig. saddhammassa) 317 (id.; expld by C. as “vodānaṃ gacchati”); Ja ii.418 (of a precious stone).
vi + ava + dā4 to clean
only at DN iii.43 in phrase ˚ṃ āpajjati in meaning of “making a distinction,” being particular (about food: bhojanesu), having a dainty appetite; expld by “dve bhāge karoti” Bdhgh. It seems to stand for vokāra, unless we take it to be a misspelling for vodāya “cutting off,” fr. vi + ava + dā, thus “separating the food” (?): Suggestive also is the likeness with vosānaṃ āpajjati.
?
defined, fully understood recognized MN i.478; AN iv.363 (= suṭṭhu diṭṭha C.).
pp. of vi + ava + diś, cp. odissa & the BSk. vyapadeśa pretext Divy 435
(adj.) bent down Thag 662.
v(i) + onata
at DN-a i.277 (avopetvā) is to be read with v.l. as copeti, i.e. shake, move, disturb, violate (a rule).
to split; ppr. ˚anto (fig.) hair-splitting DN i.162; MN i.176; aor. vobhindi (lit.) to break, split (one’s head, sīsaṃ) MN i.336.
vi + ava + bhindati
at DN-a i.300 is to be read as vodāpeti (cleanse, purify); v.l. BB vodāpeti; SS cāmāpeti, i.e. to cause to be rinsed, cleanse.
dā
(adj.) miscellaneous, various Vism 87 (˚katā), 88 (˚ka), 104 (˚carita).
v(i) + omissa(ka)
effort (?), application Kp-a 243. Reading doubtful.
vi + uyyoga in sense of uyyutta?
(nt.) depriving (jīvita˚ of life) Ja i.99.
abstr. fr. voropeti
to deprive of (abl.), to take away; only in phrase jīvitā voropeti [which shows that -v- is purely euphonic] to deprive of life, to kill DN i.85; Ja iv.454; DN-a i.236; Dhp-a iv.68; Pv-a 67, Pv-a 105, Pv-a 274.
= oropeti
(nt.) looking at, examination Ja iv.237 (v.l. vi˚).
v(i) + olokana, but cp. BSk. vyavalokana “inspection” Divy 435
to examine, study, scrutinize MN i.213 (with gen.); Vin i.6 (lokaṃ); Kv 591; Dhp-a i.319 (lokaṃ) ii.96 (v.l. oloketi).
v(i) + oloketi; in meaning equal to viloketi & oloketi
(nt.) (food) put down (on cemeteries etc.) for (the spirits of) the departed Vin iv.89.
wrong spelling for *vossaṭṭhika = v(i) + ossaṭṭha + ika
(nt.) 1. (relative) achievement, perfection (in this world), accomplishment MN ii.211 (diṭṭhadhamm’ âbhiññāvosāna-pārami-ppatta); Dhp 423 (cp Dhp-a iv.233); Thag 784 (˚ṃ adhigacchati to reach perfection).
2. stopping, ceasing; in phrase ˚ṃ āpajjati (almost equal to pamāda ) to come to an end (with), to stop, to become careless, to flag MN i.193; Ja iii.5; Pv-a 29; antarā ˚ṃ āpajjati to produce half-way achievement to stop half-way AN v.157, AN v.164; Iti 85. Kern, Toev. s. v quite wrong “to arrive at a conclusion, to be convinced.”
v(i) + osāna
to make end, to bring to an end or a finish Snp-a 46 (desanaṃ).
v(i) + osāpeti
(adj. nt.) belonging to reinstatement AN i.99.
fr. v(i) + osāraṇā
one who has attained (relative) achievement perfected, accomplished, mastering, in phrase abhiññā˚ one who masters special knowledge SN i.167; Dhp 423; Iti 47 = Iti 61 = Iti 81; AN i.165; cp. Dhp-a iv.233: “niṭṭhānaṃ patto vusita-vosānaṃ vā patto etc.”
vi + osita, pp. of ava + sā. See also vusita & vyosita;
(nt.) making impotent (see under vassakamma) DN i.12; DN-a i.97.
relinquishing, relaxation; handing over, donation, gift (see on term as ethical Bdhgh at K.S. i.321) DN iii.190 (issariya˚ handing over of authority), 226; SN iv.365 sq.; SN v.63 sq., 351 (˚rata fond of giving); AN ii.66 (id.); iii.53 (id.); Pts i.109 Pts ii.24, Pts ii.117; Ja vi.213 (kamma˚); Ne 16; Vb 229 Vb 350; Vism 224; Vb-a 317. -sati-vossagga relaxation of attention, inattention, indifference Dhp-a i.228 Dhp-a iii.163, Dhp-a iii.482; Dhp-a iv.43. -pariṇāmi, maturity of surrender SN i.88.
= ossagga; ava + sṛj
to give up, relinquish; to hand over, resign Snp 751 (ger. vossajja; Snp-a 508 reads oss˚; ) Ja v.124 (issariyaṃ vossajjanto; cp. DN iii.190).
= ossaj(j)ati
1. to express, define, decide MN i.499; DN i.202; Mil 218.
2. to decide, govern over (a kingdom), give justice, administrate Ja iv.134 (Bārāṇasiṃ maṃsa-sur-odakaṃ, i.e. provide with; double acc.), 192 (inf. vohātuṃ = voharituṃ C.) ■ Pass. vohariyati to be called Snp-a 26; Pv-a 94; Thag-a 24.
vi + oharati
1. trade, business MN ii.360; Snp 614 (˚ṃ upajīvati); Ja i.495; Ja ii.133, Ja ii.202; Ja v.471; Pv-a 111 Pv-a 278.
2. current appellation, common use (of language), popular logic, common way of defining, usage designation, term, cognomen; (adj.) (-˚) so called Snp-a 383, Snp-a 466, Snp-a 483 (laddha˚ so-called); DN-a i.70; Pv-a 56, Pv-a 231 (laddha˚ padesa, with the name) Vv-a 8, Vv-a 72 (pāṇo ti vohārato satto), 108 (loka nirūḷhāya samaññāya v.)- ariya-vohāra proper (i.e. Buddhist) mode of speech (opp. anariya˚ unbuddhist or vulgar, common speech DN iii.232; AN ii.246; AN iv.307; Vin iv.2; Vb 376, Vb 387 lokiya-vohāra common definition, general way of speech Snp-a 382. On term see also Dhs. trsln § 1306.
3. lawsuit law, lawful obligation; juridical practice, jurisprudence (cp. vohārika) Snp 246 (˚kūṭa fraudulent lawyer); Ja ii.423 (˚ṃ sādheti to claim a debt by way of law, or a lawful debt); vi.229; Dhp-a iii.12 (˚ûpajīvin a lawyer); Snp-a 289.
4. name of a sea-monster, which gets hold of ships Ja v.259.
vi + avahāra
“decider,” one connected with a law-suit or with the law, magistrate, a higher official (mahāmatta) in the law-courts, a judge or justice. At Vin i.74 two classes of mahāmattā (ministers) are given senānāyakā those of defence, and vohārikā of justice cp. Vin ii.158; Vin iii.45 (purāṇa-vohāriko mahāmatto) iv.223.
fr. vohāra
is the semi-vowel (i.e. half-consonantic) form of vi˚; before following a & ā (vya˚, vyā), very rarely ū & o; The prefix vi˚ is very unstable, and a variety of forms are also attached to vy˚, which, after the manner of all consonant-combns in Pāḷi, may apart from its regular form vy˚; appear either as contracted to vv˚; (written v˚; ) like vagga (for vyagga), vaya (for vyaya), vosita (= vyosita), *vvūha (= vyūha, appearing as ˚bhūha), or diaeretic as viy˚; (in poetry) or veyy˚; (popular), e.g. viyañjana, viyārambha, viyāyata; or veyvañjanika veyyākaraṇa, veyyāyika. It further appears as by˚ (like byaggha, byañjana, byappatha, byamha, byāpanna byābādha etc.). In a few cases vya˚; represents (a diaeretic) vi˚; as in vyamhita & vyasanna; and vyā˚; = vi˚ in vyārosa.
at Snp 600 is fut. of vyācikkhati (see viyā˚; ).
(adj.) distracted, confused, bewildered; neg. a˚; SN i.96 (˚mānasa); v.66, 107.
vi + agga, of which the contracted form is vagga2
a tiger DN iii.25; AN iii.101; Snp 416 (˚usabha); Ap 68 (˚rājā); Ja i.357; Ja iii.192 (Subāhu); v.14 (giri-sānuja) ■ f. viyagghinī (biy˚ Mil 67. See also byaggha.
cp. Vedic vyāghra
a hawk SN i.148 (as ˚nisa); Ja vi.538. Another word for “hawk” is sakuṇagghi.
?
(nt.) 1. (accompanying) attribute, distinctive mark, sign characteristic (cp. anu˚) Snp 549, Snp 1017; Thag 819 (metric viyañjana); Ja v.86 (viyañjanena under the pretext) Dhs 1306. gihi˚; characteristic of a layman Snp 44 (cp Snp-a 91); Mil 11; purisa˚; membrum virile Vin ii.269–2. letter (of a word) as opposed to attha (meaning sense, spirit), e, g. DN iii.127; SN iv.281, SN iv.296; SN v.430; AN ii.139 (Cp. savyañjana ); or pada (word), e.g. MN i.213; AN i.59; AN ii.147, AN ii.168, AN ii.182; AN iii.178 sq.; Vin ii.316; Ne 4; Snp-a 177 ■ vyañjanato according to the letter Mil 18 (opp. atthato).
3. condiment, curry Vin ii.214; AN iii.49 (odano anekasūpo aneka-vyañjano); Pv ii.115 (bhatta˚ rice with curry); Pv-a 50 ■ Cp. byañjana.
fr. vi + añj, cp. añjati2 & abbhañjati
(adj.) see ubhato˚ & veyyañjanika;.
fr. vyañjana
to characterise, denote, express, indicate Snp-a 91; Ne 209 (Cy.).
vi + añjati, or añjeti
what is left over, addition, surplus Pv-a 18 (of “ca”), 228 (˚to).
vi + atireka
(adj.) 1. experienced, accomplished, learned, wise, prudent, clever SN iv.174 (paṇḍita + ), 375; AN iii.117, AN iii.258; Ja vi.368; Vv-a 131 (paṇḍita + ); Pv-a 39 (id.) ■ a˚; unskilled foolish (+ bāla) SN iv.380; AN iii.258; Ja i.98.
2. evident manifest Pv-a 266 (˚pākaṭa-bhāva).
cp. viyatta, veyyatta & byatta
(f.) experience, learning, cleverness Mil 349 (as by˚; ); Dhp-a ii.38 (avyattatā foolishness: so correct under avyattatā P.D. i.86).
abstr. fr. vyatta
opposition, reversal; in purisa˚; change of person (gram.) Snp-a 545; vacana˚; reversal of number (i.e. sg. & pl.) DN-a i.141; Snp-a 509.
vi + ati + aya
(nt.) shaking, wavering Dhtp 465 (as defn of tud ).
fr. vyath
to tremble, shake, waver; to be frightened Vin ii.202 (so for vyādhati ); Ja iii.398 (vyadhase; C vyadhasi = kampasi) ■ Caus. vyadheti (& vyādheti); to frighten, confuse Ja iv.166 (= vyādheti bādheti C.)-Fut. vyādhayissati SN i.120 = Thag 46 (by˚). Under byādheti we had given a different derivation (viz Caus. fr. vyādhi ).
in poetry for the usual vedhati of vyath, cp. Goth. wipōn
(adj. nt.) removed, remote; nt. end, finish; only as vyanti˚; in combn with kṛ; and bhū. The spelling is often byanti˚ ■ (1) vyantikaroti to abolish remove, get rid of, destroy MN i.115 (byant’ eva ekāsiṃ) 453 (by˚); DN i.71 (˚kareyya); SN iv.76, SN iv.190; AN iv.195; DN-a i.125, DN-a i.212 ■ Fut. vyantikāhiti Mil 391 (by˚) Dhp-a iv.69 ■ pp. vyantikata Thag 526 ■ (2) vyantibhavati to cease, stop; to come to an end, to be destroyed Kv 597 (by˚); or ˚hoti AN i.141; AN iii.74; Pts i.171 (by˚) Mil 67 (by˚), vyantibhāva destruction, annihilation MN i.93; AN v.292, AN v.297 sq.; Pv iv.173; Kv 544 (by˚) vyantibhuta come to an end Ja v.4.
vi + anta
to depart, to be dispelled Ja ii.407 (ger. ˚gamma ) ■ pp. ˚gata.
vi + apagacchati
departed Ja i.17; Mil 133, Mil 225.
pp. of vyapagacchati
to drive away, expel; ger ˚nujja Snp 66. aor. vyapānudi Thig 318.
vi + apanudati
to be removed or destroyed Ja vi.565.
vi + apa + haññati
(nt.) 1. duty, occupation, activity Snp 158 (khīṇa of the Arahant: having no more duties, cp. vyappathi)
2. way of speaking, speech, utterance Snp 163, Snp 164 (contrasted to citta & kamma; cp. kāya, vācā, mano in same use), expld at Snp-a 206 by vacīkamma; & in def;n of “speech” at Vin iv.2 (see under byappatha ) Dhs-a 324 (expld as vākya-bheda).
perhaps a distortion of *vyāpṛta, for which the usual P. (der.) veyyāvacca (q.v.) in meaning “duty”
(f.) activity, occupation, duty (?) Snp 961. See remarks on byappatha.
cp. Sk. vyāpṛti
(f.) application (of mind), focussing (of attention) Dhs 7.
vi + appanā
(nt.) palace; a celestial mansion, a vimāna, abode for fairies etc. Ja v.454; Ja vi.119, Ja vi.251 (= pura & rāja-nivesa C.); Vv 351 (= bhavana Vv-a 160). Cp. byamha.
etym.?
(adj.) astounded, shocked, awed; dismayed, frightened Ja v.69 (= bhīta C.); vi.243 314.
metric for vimhita
expense, loss, decay SN iv.68, SN iv.140; Mil 393 (as abbaya) avyayena (instr.) safely DN i.72. Cp. veyyāyika vyāyika;.
vi + aya, of i; the assimilation form is vaya2
to go away, disappear Ja v.82.
vi + ava(= apa) + i, cp. apeti & veti;
(nt.) [somewhat doubtful. It has to be compared with vavassagga, although it should be derived fr. sā (cp. pp. vyavasita; or śri ?), thus mixture of sṛj & sā. Cp. a similar difficulty of sā under osāpeti decision, resolution; only used to explain part. handa (exhortation) at Snp-a 200, Snp-a 491 (v.l. vyavasāya: cp vavasāya at DN-a i.237), for which otherwise vavassagga.
(adj.) decided, resolute Snp-a 200.
pp. of vi + ava + sā (or śri ?), cp. vyavasāna
(nt.) misfortune, misery, ruin, destruction, loss DN i.248; SN iii.137 (anaya˚); iv.159; AN i.33 AN v.156 sq., 317 (several); Snp 694 (˚gata ruined); Pv i.64 (= dukkha Pv-a 33); iii.56 (= anattha Pv-a 199); Vb 99 sq., 137; Vb-a 102 (several); Pv-a 4, Pv-a 103, Pv-a 112 Sdhp 499 ■ The 5 vyasanas are: ñāti˚, bhoga˚, roga˚ sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚ or misfortune concerning one’s relations wealth, health, character, views. Thus at DN iii.235; AN iii.147; Vin iv.277.
fr. vy + as
(adj.) having misfortune, unlucky, faring ill Ja v.259.
fr. vyasana
sunk into (loc.), immersed Ja iv.399; Ja v.16 (here doubtful; not, as C. vyasanāpanna; gloss visanna; vv.ll. in C.: vyaccanna viphanna, visatta).
metric (diaeretic) for visanna
1. answered, explained, declared, decided MN i.431 (by˚); AN i.119; SN ii.51, SN ii.223 SN iv.59, SN iv.194; SN v.177; Snp 1023 ■ avyākata unexplained undecided, not declared, indeterminate MN i.431 (by˚) DN i.187, DN i.189; SN ii.222; SN iv.375 sq., 384 sq., 391 sq. Pts ii.108 sq.; Dhs 431, Dhs 576.
2. predicted Ja i.26. 3. settled, determined Ja iii.529 (asinā v. brought to a decision by the sword).
pp. of vyākaroti
(nt.) explanation, definiteness Pv-a 27.
abstr. fr. vyākata
expounder AN iii.81.
n. ag. of vyākaroti; cp. BSk. vyākartṛ Divy 620
(nt.) 1. answer (pañha˚), explanation, exposition AN i.197 AN ii.46; AN iii.119; Snp-a 63, Snp-a 99; Kp-a 75, Kp-a 76.
2. grammar (as one of the 6 angas) Snp-a 447; Pv-a 97.
3. prediction Ja i.34, Ja i.44; Dhp-a iv.120.
fr. vyākaroti; see also veyyākaraṇa
1. to explain, answer (in combn with puṭṭha, asked) DN i.25, DN i.58, DN i.175, DN i.200; Snp 510, Snp 513 sq. 1102, 1116; Mil 318 (byākareyya); Vv-a 71. Fut ˚karissati DN i.236; Snp 993; Pv-a 281. For vyākarissati we have vyakkhissati (of viyācikkhati) at Snp 600 ■ aor sg. vyākāsi Snp 541, Snp 1116, Snp 1127; Pv-a 212; pl. vyākaṃsu Snp 1084; Pv ii.135 ■ grd. vyākātabba DN i.94, DN i.118. 2. to prophesy, predict [cp. BSk. vyākaroti in same sense Divy 65, Divy 131] Ja i.140; Pv iii.55 (aor. ˚ākari) Mvu 6, Mvu 2 (aor. ˚ākaruṃ); Dhp-a iv.120 (˚ākāsi); Pv-a 196 Pv-a 199 (˚ākāsi) ■ pp. vyākata.
vi + ā + kṛ;
see viy˚.
told, announced, set forth, enumerated Snp 1,000.
pp. of v(i)yācikkhati
(adj.) perplexed Ja i.301; Pv-a 160; Vv-a 30; Sdhp 403.
vi + ākula
at AN iii.64 (soto vikkhitto visato + ) is doubtful in reading & meaning (“split”?). It must mean something like “interrupted, diverted.” The vv.ll. are vicchinna & jiṇṇa;.
for vyādiṇṇa, vi + ādiṇṇa?
a huntsman, deer-hunter Mvu 10, Mvu 89 (read either; vyādha-deva god of the h.; or vyādhi˚; demon of maladies); 10, 95.
fr. vyadh: see vedha & vijjhati
sickness, malady, illness, disease AN i.139 (as devadūta), 146, 155 sq.; iii.66; Pts i.59 sq. Pts ii.147; Ja vi.224; Vism 236. Often in sequence jāti jarā vyādhi maraṇa, e.g. AN ii.172; AN iii.74 sq. Vism 232.
see byādhi
(camel) see oṭṭhi˚.
1. affected with an illness, ill Ja v.497; Mil 168. See byādhita.
2. shaken, f. ˚ā as abstr, shakiness, trembling Vb-a 479.
pp. of vyādheti
(nt.) shaking up Vb 352; Vb-a 479 (uppannavyādhitā; i.e. kāya-pphandana).
fr. vyādheti
see vyadhati ■ pp. vyādhita.
(adj.) filling or summing up, combining, completing Pv-a 71 (in expln of “ye keci” anavasesa˚ niddesa).
fr. vyāpeti
(instr.) to go wrong, to fail, disagree; to be troubled; also (trs.) to do harm, to injure SN iii.119; SN iv.184 = Nd ii.40 (by˚); AN iii.101 (bhattaṃ me vyāpajjeyya disagrees with me, makes me ill); Snp 1065 (ākāso avyāpajjamāno not troubled, not getting upset) Nd ii.74 (by˚) ■ pp. vyāpanna ■ Caus. vyāpādeti.
vi + āpajjati
(f.) injuring, doing harm, ill-will Pp 18; Dhs 418 (“getting upset” trsln).
fr. vyāpajjati
(adj.-n..) to be troubled or troubling, doing harm, injuring; only neg. avyāpajjha (& abyābajjha); (adj.) not hurting, peaceful, friendly; (nt.) kindness of heart Vin i.183; MN i.90 (abyābajjhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti) 526; DN i.167, DN i.247, DN i.251; SN iv.296, SN iv.371; AN i.98; AN ii.231 sq. AN iii.285, AN iii.329 sq., 376 sq. Cp. byāpajjha & vyābādha; etc.
perhaps grd. of vyāpajjati; but see also avyāpajjha
(f.) injury, harm; doing harm, malevolence AN v.292 sq.; Pp 18; Ja iv.137; Dhs 418 (“disordered temper” trsln)
fr. vyāpajjati
(adj.) spoilt, disagreeing, gone wrong; corrupt; only with citta, i.e. a corrupted heart, or a malevolent intention; adj. malevolent DN i.139; DN iii.82; AN i.262, AN i.299; opp. avyāpanna (q.v.) See also byāpanna & viyāpanna;.
pp. of vyāpajjati
making bad, doing harm: desire to injure, malevolence, ill-will DN i.71, DN i.246; DN iii.70 sq., 226, 234; SN i.99; SN ii.151; SN iv.343; AN i.194, AN i.280; AN ii.14, AN ii.210; AN iii.92, AN iii.231, AN iii.245; AN iv.437; Vb 86, Vb 363 sq., 391; Pp 17 sq.; Dhs 1137; Vism 7; DN-a i.211; Vb-a 74, Vb-a 118, Vb-a 369. ˚anusaya MN i.433. ˚dosa MN iii.3. ˚dhātu MN iii.62. ˚nīvaraṇa MN ii.203. See under each affix ■ Cp. avyāpāda.
fr. vyāpajjati. See also byāpāda
to spoil Mil 92.
Caus. of vyāpajjati
occupation, business, service, work Ja i.341; Ja v.60; Vism 595. Cp. veyyāvacca, vyappatha (by˚), vyāvaṭa.
vi + ā + pṛ;
one occupied with MN iii.126.
(adj.) pervading, diffused Dhs-a 311.
fr. vi + āp
to make full, pervade, fill, comprise Dhs-a 307; Vv-a 17; Thag-a 287; Pv-a 52 (= pharati) 71 (in expln of “ye keci”).
vi + Caus. of āp
(& byābādha) oppression, injury, harm, hurting; usually in phrase atta˚ & para˚; (disturbing the peace of others of oneself) MN i.89; SN iv.339; AN i.114, AN i.157, AN i.216; AN ii.179-Also at SN iv.159 (pāṇinaṃ vyābādhāya, with v.l. vadhāya). See also byābādha. The corresponding adjectives are (a)vyāpajjha & veyyābādhika; (q.v.).
fr. vi + ā + bādh, but semantically connected with vi + ā + pad, as in vyāpāda & vyāpajjha;
(& bya˚) to do harm, hurt, injure Vin ii.77/78; SN iv.351 sq.; DN-a i.167. The BSk. is vyābādhayate (e.g. Divy 105).
Caus. of vi + ā + badh or distortion fr. vyāpadeti, with which identical in meaning
lit. “to make an outsider,” to keep or to be kept out or away Vin ii.140 (˚bāhiṃsu in Pass. sense; so that they may not be kept away). Oldenberg (on p. 320) suggests reading vyābādhiṃsu, which may be better, viz. “may not be offended” (?). The form is difficult to explain.
vi + ā + bah: see bahati3
(f.) 1. a carrying pole (or flail?) Thag 623; combd with asita (see asita4 in corr. to pt 2) “sickle & pole” MN ii.180; AN iii.5.
2. a flail SN iv.201.
see byā˚
see byāma & add ref. DN ii.18≈Vism 136 (catu˚pamāṇa).
stretched; only neg. a˚ senseless, confused (should it be vyāyatta ?) Ja i.496 (= avyatta C.). See also viyāyata. Vyayama = vayama
vi + āyata
Dhs-a 146.
(adj.) belonging to decay; only neg. a˚; not decaying, imperishable AN ii.51; Ja v.508.
fr. vyaya
see viy˚.
(adj.) opposed, hostile Thig 344; Snp 936. See byāruddha.
pp. of vi + ā + rundh
anger MN iii.78; SN iii.73.
vi + ā + rosa, cp. virosanā
(nt.) fault Thag-a 266.
for vy + alika
(adj.) doing service, active, busy; eager, keen intent on (loc.), busy with AN iv.195 (mayi = worrying about me); Ja iii.315 (su˚); iv.371 (kiccâkiccesu v. uyyatta C.); v.395 (= ussukka); vi.229 (= kāya-veyyāvacca-dān’ ādi-kamma-karaṇena vyāvaṭa C.) ■ dassana˚; keen on a sight, eager to see Ja i.89; Vv-a 213 (preferred to T. reading!) ■ dāna˚; serving in connection with a gift, busy with giving, a “commissioner of gifts,” i.e. a superintendent installed by a higher (rich person (as a king or seṭṭhi) to look after the distribution of all kinds of gifts in connection with a mahādāna. Rh Davids at Dial. ii.372 (following Childers) has quite misunderstood the term in referring it to a vyāvaṭa in meaning of “hindered,” and by translating it as “hindered at the largesse” or “objecting to the largesse. At none of the passages quoted by him has it that meaning. See e.g. DN ii.354; Ja iii.129; Pv ii.950 (dāne v. = ussukkaṃ āpanna Pv-a 135); Pv-a 112 (dāne), 124 (id.); DN-a i.296 (? not found). avyāvaṭa not busy, not bothering about (loc.), unconcerned with, not worrying DN ii.141 (Tathāgatassa sarīre; trsln not to the point “hinder not yourselves”); Vin iii.136. See also separately ■ Note. vyāvaṭa (& a˚); only occur in the meaning given above, and not in the sense of “covered obstructed” [wrongly fr. vṛ; ] as given by Childers Correct the trsln given under byāvaṭa accordingly!
= Sk. vyāpṛta, cp. vyāpāra, byappatha. & veyyāvacca
(adj.) whirling about, flitting (here & there), moving about, pell-mell Ja vi.530.
vi + āviddha
separation, division; always contrasted with samāsa, e.g. Vism 82 (vyāsato separately distributively; opp. samāsato); Kp-a 187.
fr. vi + ās to sit
see byāsatta.
to defile, corrupt, tarnish SN iv.78 (cittaṃ) ■ pp. vyāsitta ibid.
vi + āsiñcati
mixed; only neg. a˚; unmixed, untarnished, undefiled DN i.70; DN-a i.183; Pp 59; Thag 926.
fr. vi + ā + sic
to utter, talk, speak Vin ii.214; Ja ii.177; Ja iv.225 (puṭṭho vyāhāsi, perhaps with v.l. as vyākāsi ). See also avyāharati ■ Cp. paṭi˚.
vi + āharati
1. heap, mass; massing or array, grouping of troops SN v.369 (sambādha˚ a dense crowd, or massed with troops (?); in phrase iddha phīta etc., as given under bāhujañña ); Ja ii.406 (battle array: paduma˚, cakka˚, sakaṭa˚; ).
2. a side street (?), in sandhibbūha Ja vi.276. See also byūha.
fr. vi + vah; see byūha
at Vv-a 104 is not clear (see byūhati ). It looks more like a present tense to viyūḷha in sense “to be bulky,” than a Denom. fr. vyūha as “stand in array. For the regular verb vi + vah see viyūhati. Cp. paṭi˚ saṃyūhati;.
(adj.) perfected; neg. a˚; not perfected, imperfect Thag 784 (aby˚).
S.
= vosita
a euphonic-s-seems to occur in combn ras-agga-saggin (see rasa2). An apparent hiatus-s in ye s-idha Snp 1083, and evaṃ s- ahaṃ Snp 1134 (v.l.) may be an abbreviated su˚; (see su2), unless we take it as a misspelling for p.
the letter s (sa-kāra) Snp-a 23; or the syllable sa Dhp-a ii.6; Pv-a 280.
base of the nom. of the demonstr. pron. that, he she. The form sg. m. sa is rare (e.g. Dhp 142; Snp 89) According to Geiger (P.Gr. § 105) sa occurs in Snp 40 times but so 124 times. In later Pāli sa is almost extinct The final o of so is often changed into v before vowels and a short vowel is lengthened after this v: svājja Snp 998 = so ajja; svāhaṃ Ja i.167 = so ahaṃ; svāyaṃ Vin i.2 = so ayaṃ. The foll. vowel is dropped in so maṃ Iti 57 = so imaṃ ■ A form se is Māgadhism for nt. acc sg. taṃ, found e.g. at DN ii.278, DN ii.279; MN ii.254, MN ii.255, and in combn seyyathā, seyyathīdaṃ (for which taṃyathā Mil 1). An idiomatic use is that of so in meaning of “that (he or somebody),” e.g. “so vata… palipanno paraṃ palipannaṃ uddharissatī ti: n’ etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati” MN i.45; cp. “sā ‘haṃ dhammaṃ nâssosiṃ” that I did not hear the Dh. Vv 405. Or in the sense of a cond. (or causal) part. “if,” or “once,” e.g. sa kho so bhikkhu… upakkileso ti iti viditvā… upakkilesaṃ pajahati “once he has recognised…” MN i.37 Cp. ya˚; ii.2 b. On correl. use with ya˚; (yo so etc.) see ya˚; ii.1.
Idg. *so- (m.), *sā- (f.); nom. sg. to base *to- of the oblique cases; cp. Sk. sa (saḥ), sā; Av. hō, hā; Gr. ὁ, ἡ; Goth. sa, sō; Ags. sē “the” (= that one); pe-s = E thi-s
prefix, used as first pt. of compounds, is the sense of “with,” possessed of, having same as; e.g. sadevaka with the devas Vin i.8; sadhammika having common faith DN ii.273; sajāti having the same origin Ja ii.108. Often opposed to a- and other neg. prefixes (like nir˚; ). Sometimes almost pleonastical (like sa-antara) ■ Of combinations we only mention a few of those in which a vocalic initial of the 2nd pt remains uncontracted. Other examples see under their heading in alph. order. E. g. sa -antara inside Dhp-a iii.788 (for santara Dhp 315); sa -Inda together with Indra DN ii.261, DN ii.274; AN v.325 sq.; ˚-uttara having something beyond, inferior (opp. an˚) DN i.80; DN ii.299 = MN i.59; Dhs 1292, Dhs 1596; Dhs-a 50; ˚-uttaracchada (& ˚chadana); a carpet with awnings above it DN i.7≈; ii.187 (˚ava) AN i.181; Vin i.192; DN-a i.87; -˚udaka with water, wet Vin i.46; -˚udariya born from the same womb, a brother Ja iv.417, cp. sodariya; -˚uddesa with explanation Iti 99 Vism 423 (nāma-gotta-vasena sa-udd.; vaṇṇ’ādi-vasena sākāra); -˚upanisa together with its cause, causally associated SN ii.30; -˚upavajja having a helper MN iii.266 -˚upādāna showing attachment MN ii.265; -˚upādisesa having the substratum of life remaining Snp 354; Iti 38 Ne 92. Opp. anupādisesa; -˚ummi roaring of the billows Iti 57, Iti 114 ■ Note. sa2 & sa;3 are differentiations
of one and the same sa, which is originally the deictic pronoun in the function of identity & close connection See etym. under; saṃ˚.
identical with saṃ˚
(reflex. pron.) own MN i.366; DN ii.209; Snp 905; Ja ii.7 Ja iii.164, Ja iii.323 (loc. samhi lohite), 402 (acc. saṃ his own viz. kinsman; C = sakaṃ janaṃ); iv.249 (saṃ bhātaraṃ) Pv ii.121 = Dhp-a iii.277 (acc. san tanuṃ); instr. sena on one’s own, by oneself Ja v.24 (C. not quite to the point mama santakena). Often in composition, like sadesa one’s own country Dāvs i.10. Cp. saka.
Vedic sva & svayaṃ (= P. sayaṃ); Idg. *seṷo, *sṷe; cp. Av. hava & hva own; Gr. ἑός & ο ̔́ς his own; Lat. sui, suus; Goth. swēs own, sik = Ger. sich himself; etc.
(indecl.) prefix, implying conjunction & completeness; saṃ˚; is after vi˚; (19") the most frequent (16") of all Pāli prefixes. Its primary meaning is “together” (cp. Lat. con˚); hence arises that of a closer connection or a more accentuated action than that expressed by the simple verb (intensifying = thoroughly quite), or noun. Very often merely pleonastic, esp. in combn with other prefixes (e.g. sam-anu˚, sam-ā˚ sam-pa˚). In meaning of “near by, together” it is opposed to para˚; ; as modifying prefix it is contrary to abhi˚; and (more frequently) to vi˚; (e.g. saṃvadati → vivadati), whereas it often equals pa˚; (e.g. pamodati → sammodati), with which it is often combd as sampa˚ and also abhi˚; (e.g. abhivaḍḍhati → saṃvaḍḍhati), with which often combd as abhisaṃ˚ ■ Bdhgh & Dhpāla explain; saṃ˚; by sammā (Snp-a 151; Kp-a 209: so read for samā āgatā), suṭṭhu (see e.g. santasita, santusita) or samantā (= altogether; Snp-a 152, Snp-a 154), or (dogmatically) sakena santena samena (Kp-a 240), or as “ saṃyoga ” Vism 495 ■ In combn with y we find both saṃy˚; and saññ˚. The usual conṭracted form before r is sā˚.
prefix; Idg. *sem one; one & the same, cp. Gr.; ὁμαλός even, α ̔́μα at one, ὁμός together; Sk. sama even, the same; samā in the same way; Av. hama same = Goth. sama, samap together; Lat. simul (= simultaneous), similis “re-sembling.” Also Sk. sa (= sa2 together = Gr. ἁ ἀ-(e.g. α ̓́κοιτις); Av. ha-; and samyak towards one point = P. sammā ■ Analogously to Lat semel “once,” simul, we find sa˚; as numeral base for “one” in Vedic sakṛt “once” = P. sakid (& sakad) sahasra 1000 = P.; sahassa, and in adv. sadā “always, lit. “in one”
(& saññata) lit. drawn together; fig. restrained, self-controlled DN ii.88; SN i.79; Snp 88 Snp 156, Snp 716; Ja i.188; Vv 3411; Mil 213.
-atta having one’s self restrained, self-controlled SN i.14 (for saya˚); Snp 216, Snp 284 (ññ), 723; Pv ii.614 (ññ; = saññata-citta Pv-a 98). -ūru having the thighs pressed together, having firm thighs Ja v.89, Ja v.107 (ññ) 155 (ññ). -cārin living in self-control Dhp 104 (ññ) -pakhuma having the eyelashes close together Vv-a 162.
pp. of saṃyamati
(& saññama) 1. restraint, selfcontrol, abstinence SN i.21, SN i.169; DN i.53; Vin i.3; AN i.155 sq. (kāyena, vācāya, manasā); DN iii.147; Iti 15 (ññ); Snp 264, Snp 655; MN ii.101 (sīla˚); Dhp 25 (saññama dama); DN-a i.160; Dhp-a ii.255 (= catu-pārisuddhi-sīla); Vb-a 332–2. restraint in giving alms saving (of money etc.) stinginess Vin i.272; Pv ii.711 (= sankoca Pv-a 102).
fr. saṃ + yam
to practise self-control SN i.209 (pāṇesu ca saṃyamāmase, trsln “if we can keep our hands off living things”) ■ pp. saṃyata ■ Caus saññāmeti to restrain MN i.365, MN i.507; Dhp 37, Dhp 380. Cp paṭi˚.
saṃ + yamati
(nt.) fastening Ja v.202, Ja v.207.
fr. saṃ + yam
(f.) a kind of ornament Ja v.202 (= maṇisuvaṇṇa-pavāḷa-rajata-mayāni pilandhanāni C.).
fr. last
(f.) begging, what is begged; only in instr. ˚āya (adv.) by begging together by collecting voluntary offerings Vin iii.144 (so read for ˚āyo), 149 (expld incorrectly as “sayaṃ yācitvā”) Ja ii.282 (so read for ˚āyo).
collect. abstr. fr. saṃ + yāc
(nt.) harness Thag 659.
fr. saṃ + yuj
to connect, join with (instr.), unite SN i.72. Pass. saṃyujjati SN iii.70 ■ pp. saṃyutta ■ Caus. saṃyojeti (1) to put together, to endow with DN ii.355; SN v.354; Ja i.277 ■ (2) to couple, to wed someone to (instr.) Ja iii.512 (dārena); iv.7 (id.) ■ pp saṃyojita.
saṃ + yuñjati
(adj.) connected, combined Snp 574 (ññ), 1026.
saṃ + yuta, of yu
1. tied, bound, fettered MN iii.275 (cammena); SN iv.163; AN iv.216 (saṃyojanena s. by bonds to this world); Snp 194 (ññ), 300, 304; Iti 8 Sdhp 211.
2. connected with, mixed with (-˚) Ja i.269 (visa˚) ■ Cp. paṭi˚, vi˚.
pp. of saṃyuñjati
massed, collected, put together, composed or gathered (like a bunch of flowers DN ii.267 (gāthā); MN i.386; DN-a i.38 (spelt saṃvūḷha, i.e. saṃvyūḷha; v.l. sañaḷha i.e. sannaddha).
pp. of saṃyūhati, cp. in similar meaning viyūḷha
to form into a mass, to ball together, to conglomerate AN iv.137 (kheḷapiṇḍaṃ). pp. saṃyūḷha.
saṃ + vyūhati
1. bond, fetter MN i.498; SN i.226; SN iii.70; SN iv.36; AN iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. vi˚); Snp 522 Snp 733; Dhp 384 (= kāmayog’ādayo saṃyogā Dhp-a iv.140)
2. union, association Ja iii.12 (ññ); Vism 495. 3. connection (within the sentence), construction Pv-a 73 (accanta˚), 135 (id.).
fr. saṃ + yuj
(nt.) bond, fetter SN iv.163 etc.; especially the fetters that bind man to the wheel of transmigration Vin i.183; SN i.23; SN v.241, SN v.251; AN i.264 AN iii.443; AN iv.7 sq. (diṭṭhi˚); MN i.483; Dhp 370; Iti 8 (taṇhā) Snp 62, Snp 74, Snp 621; Ja i.275; Ja ii.22; Ne 49; Dhp-a iii.298 Dhp-a iv.49.
The ten fetters are (1) sakkāyadiṭṭhi; (2) vicikicchā (3) sīlabbataparāmāso; (4) kāmacchando; (5) vyāpādo (6) rūparāgo; (7) arūparāgo; (8) māno; (9) uddhaccaṃ (10) avijjā. The first three are the tīṇi saṃyojanāni e.g. MN i.9; AN i.231, AN i.233; DN i.156; DN ii.92 sq., 252 iii.107, 132, 216; SN v.357, SN v.376, SN v.406; Pp 12, Pp 15 Ne 14; Dhs 1002; DN-a i.312. The seven last are the satta saṃyojanāni, Nett. 14. The first five are called orambhāgiyāni -e.g. AN i.232 sq.; AN ii.5, AN ii.133; AN v.17; DN i.156; DN ii.92, DN ii.252; MN i.432; SN v.61, SN v.69; Thig 165 Pp 17. The last five are called uddhambhāgiyāni e.g. AN v.17; SN v.61, SN v.69; Thig 167; Thag-a 159; Pp 22 Ne 14, Ne 49.
A different enumeration of the ten saṃyojanas, at Nd ii.657 = Dhs 1113, Dhs 1463 (kāmarāga, paṭigha, māna diṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāsa, bhavarāga, issā macchariya, avijjā); compare, however, Dhs 1002.
A diff. enumn of seven saṃyojanas at DN iii.254; AN iv.7, viz. anunaya˚, paṭigha˚, diṭṭhi˚, vicikicchā˚ māna˚, bhavarāga˚, avijjā˚. A list of eight is found at MN i.361 sq. Cp. also ajjhatta-saṃyojano & bahiddhāsaṃyojano; puggalo AN i.63 sq.; Pp 22; kiṃ-su-s˚; SN i.39; Snp 1108.
fr. saṃyuñjati
(saññ˚) (adj.) connected with the saṃyojanas, favourable to the saṃyojanas, AN i.50; SN ii.86; SN iii.166 sq.; SN iv.89, SN iv.107; Dhs 584, Dhs 1125, Dhs 1462; Dhs-a 49. Used as a noun, with dhammā understood Snp 363, Snp 375.
fr. saṃyojana
combined, connected with, mixed with Ja i.269 (bhesajja˚).
pp. of saṃyojeti, Caus. of saṃyuñjati
to guard, ward off Sdhp 364.
saṃ + rakkhati
impetuosity, rage Dāvs iv.34. This is the Sanskritic form for the usual P. sārambha.
saṃ + *rambha, fr. rabh, as in rabhasa (q.v.)
passion Ja iv.22. Cp. sārāga.
saṃ + rāga
grown together, healed Ja iii.216; Ja v.344.
pp. of saṃrūhati
to grow Ja iv.429 (= vaḍḍhati).
saṃ + rūhati
to find pleasure in, only in aor. (poetical) samarocayi Snp 290, Snp 306, Snp 405; Ja iv.471.
saṃ + roceti
(nt.) sentence Dhs-a 52.
saṃ + vacana
a year DN ii.327; AN ii.75; AN iv.139, AN iv.252 sq.; Dhp 108; Ja ii.80 Sdhp 239; nom. pl. saṃvaccharāni Ja ii.128.
saṃ + vacchara; cp. Vedic saṃvatsara
(m. & nt.) 1. “rolling on or forward” (opp. vivaṭṭa “rolling back”), with ref. to the development of the Universe & time (kappa) the; ascending aeon (vivaṭṭa the descending cycle), evolution Iti 99; Pp 60; Vism 419; Sdhp 484, Sdhp 485. -˚vivaṭṭa a period within which evolution & dissolution of the world takes place, a complete world-cycle (see also; vivaṭṭa DN i.14; AN ii.142; Iti 15, Iti 99; Pp 60.
saṃ + vaṭṭa;1
1. to be evolved, to be in a process of evolution (opp. vivaṭṭati in devolution) DN i.17 DN iii.84, DN iii.109; AN ii.142; DN-a i.110.
2. to fall to pieces, to come to an end (like the world’s destruction), to pass away, perish, dissolve (intrs.) Ja iii.75 (paṭhavī s.; v.l. saṃvaddh˚); Mil 287 (ākāso ˚eyya). For saṃvaṭṭ˚ at Ja i.189 read saṃvaddh˚.
saṃ + vaṭṭati
(adj.) turning to, being reborn DN i.17.
fr. saṃvaṭṭa(na)
grown up, brought up DN i.75; DN ii.38; Pv-a 66.
pp. of saṃvaḍḍhati
to grow up; ppr. ˚amāna (ddh.) growing up, subsisting Ja i.189 (so far ˚vaṭṭ˚). Caus. ˚vaḍḍheti to rear, nourish, bring up Ja i.231 (ppr pass. ˚vaḍḍhiyamāna).
saṃ + vaḍḍhati
(nt.) praising, praise Ja i.234.
saṃ + vaṇṇana
praised, combd with sambhāvita honoured MN i.110; MN iii.194, MN iii.223.
pp. of saṃvaṇṇeti
to praise Vin iii.73 sq.; Ja v.292 (aor. 3rd pl. ˚vaṇṇayuṃ). Cp. BSk. saṃvarṇayati Divy 115 ■ pp. saṃvaṇṇita.
saṃ + vaṇṇeti
to lead (to), to be useful (for) AN i.54, AN i.58 (ahitāya dukkhāya); Vin i.10 = SN v.421; Iti 71 sq.; Ja i.97; Pot. saṃvatteyya Vin i.13 ■ Often in phrase nibbidāya, virāgāya… nibbānāya saṃvattati e.g. DN i.189; DN ii.251; DN iii.130; SN v.80, SN v.255; AN iii.83, AN iii.326.
saṃ + vattati
(adj.) conducive to, involving AN ii.54, AN ii.65; Iti 82; Kv 618; Ja i.275; Ne 134 = SN v.371 As ˚iya at Pv-a 205.
fr. saṃvattati
to agree MN i.500 (opp. vivadati).
saṃ + vadati
(nt.) a certain magic act performed in order to procure harmony DN i.11; DN-a i.96 cp. Dial. i.23.
fr. saṃvadati
(nt.) increasing, causing to grow Ja iv.16.
fr. saṃ + vṛdh
restraint DN i.57, DN i.70, DN i.89; DN ii.281 (indriya˚); iii.130, 225; AN ii.26; SN iv.189 sq.; Iti 28, Iti 96 Iti 118; Pp 59; Snp 1034; Vin ii.126, Vin ii.192 (āyatiṃ saṃvarāya “for restraint in the future,” in confession formula), Dhp 185; Ne 192; Vism 11, Vism 44; Dhp-a iii.238 Dhp-a iv.86 (˚dvārāni). The fivefold saṃvara: sīla˚, sati˚ ñāṇa˚, khanti˚, viriya˚; i.e. by virtue, mindfulness insight, patience, effort Dhs-a 351; as pātimokkha˚; etc at Vism 7; Vb-a 330 sq. -˚vinaya norm of self-control good conduct Snp-a 8. cātuyāma˚, Jain discipline M l.377.
fr. saṃ + vṛ;
(nt.) covering; obstruction Dhtp 274 (as def. of root val, i.e. vṛ; ).
fr. saṃ + vṛ;
to restrain, hold; to restrain oneself Vin ii.102 (Pot. ˚vareyyāsi); Mil 152 (pāso na saṃvarati) ■ pp. saṃvuta.
saṃ + varati = vuṇāti 1
(f.) the night (poetical DN iii.196; Ja iv.441; Ja v.14, Ja v.269; Ja vi.243.
Vedic śarvarī fr. śarvara speckled; the P. form viâ sabbarī → sāvarī → saṃvarī
to live, to associate, cohabitate AN ii.57; Vin ii.237; Nd ii.423; Pp 65; Dhp 167; Dpvs x.8; Mil 250 ■ Caus. ˚vāseti same meaning Vin iv.137 ■ Cp. upa˚.
saṃ + vasati2
to be fragrant Ja v.206 (cp. vv.ll. on p. 203).
saṃ + vāyati2
1. living with, co-residence Vin i.97; Vin ii.237; Vin iii.28; AN ii.57 sq., 187; iii.164 sq.; iv.172; Ja i.236; Ja iv.317 (piya-saṃvāsaṃ vasi lived together in harmony); Snp 283, Snp 290, Snp 335; Dhp 207, Dhp 302; Sdhp 435. 2. intimacy Ja ii.39.
3. cohabitation, sexual intercourse DN i.97; Ja i.134; Ja ii.108; Snp-a 355.
saṃ + vāsa2
(adj.) living together Vin ii.162; Vin iii.173.
fr. saṃvāsa
one who lives with somebody Snp 22; a˚-bhāva impossibility to co-reside Mil 249.
fr. saṃvāsa
agitated, moved by fear or awe, excited, stirred DN i.50; DN ii.240; AN ii.115; SN iv.290 SN v.270; Ja i.59; Mil 236; Pv-a 31 (˚hadaya).
pp. of saṃvijjati1
(med.) filled with fear or awe, made to tremble; (pass.) felt, realized Snp 935 (= saṃvejita ubbejita Nd i.406).
pp. of saṃvejeti
to be agitated or moved, to be stirred AN ii.114; Iti 30. pp. saṃvigga ■ Caus. saṃvejeti MN i.253; SN i.141; Vin i.32; imper. ˚vejehi SN v.270; aor. ˚vejesi Mil 236 inf. ˚vejetuṃ SN i.197; ger ˚vejetvā Ja i.327; grd. ˚vejanīya that which should cause awe, in ˚āni ṭhānāni places of pilgrimage DN ii.140; AN i.36; AN ii.120; Iti 30 ■ pp. saṃvijita & ˚vejita;.
Vedic vijate, vij; not as simple verb in P.
to be found, to exist, to be DN i.3; Vin ii.122; Ja i.214 (˚amāna); Pv-a 153.
Pass. of saṃvindati
to know; ger. ˚viditvā Ja iii.114; Ja v.172 ■ pp. saṃvidita.
saṃ + vidati: see vindati
to arrange, appoint, fix, settle, provide, prepare DN i.61 (Pot. ˚eyyāma); aor. ˚vidahi Pv-a 198; inf. ˚vidhātuṃ AN ii.35, & ˚vidahituṃ Vin i.287; ger. ˚vidhāya Vin iv.62 sq., 133; Mvu 17, Mvu 37,; ˚vidahitvā Vin i.287; Vin iii.53, Vin iii.64; Ja i.59; Ja v.46; also as Caus. formn ˚vidahetvāna Ja vi.301 ■ pp. saṃvidahita & saṃvihita;.
saṃ + vidahati
(nt.) arrangement, appointment, provision Ja ii.209; DN-a i.148; Dhs-a 111. The word is peculiar to the Commentary style.
for the usual ˚vidhāna
arranged Vin iv.64; Dhp-a i.397.
pp. of saṃvidahati
known Snp 935.
pp. of saṃvidati
one who arranges or provides (cp. vidhātar) DN iii.148.
n. ag. fr. saṃvidahati
(nt.) arranging, providing, arrangement DN i.135; Ja i.140 (rakkhā˚).
fr. saṃvidahati
(adj.) providing, managing; f. ˚ikā Ja i.155.
saṃ + vidhāyaka
taking by arrangement, i.e. theft committed in agreement with others Vin iii.53.
saṃvidhā (short ger. form) + avahāra
to find; ppr. (a)saṃvindaṃ Thag 717 ■ Pass. saṃvijjati (q.v.).
saṃ + vindati
to divide, to share, to communicate DN ii.233; Mil 94, Mil 344; inf. ˚vibhajituṃ Mil 295; Dāvs v.54 ■ pp. saṃvibhatta ■ Caus. ˚vibhājeti Iti 65.
saṃ + vibhajati
divided, shared Thag 9.
pp. of saṃvibhajati
distribution, sharing out DN iii.191; AN i.92, AN i.150; Iti 18 sq., 98, 102; Vv 375; Mil 94 ■ dāna˚; (of gifts) Ja v.331; Vism 306.
saṃ + vibhāga
(adj.) generous, open-handed SN i.43 = Ja iv.110; Ja v.397 (a˚); Mil 207.
fr. saṃvibhāga
(adj.) fully grown, healed up Ja ii.117.
pp. of saṃvirūhati
to germinate, to sprout Mil 99, Mil 125, Mil 130, Mil 375 ■ pp. saṃvirūḷha ■ Caus. ˚virūheti to cause to grow, to nourish Ja iv.429.
saṃ + virūhati
noisy talk; fig. for thundering SN iv.289 (abbha˚).
saṃ + vilāpa
to enter; Caus. saṃveseti (q.v.). Cp. -bhisaṃvisati.
saṃ + visati
one who appoints or assigns DN-a i.112.
saṃ + vissajjetar
to overflow MN ii.117; Mil 36.
saṃ + vissandati
arranged, prepared, provided Ja i.133 (˚ārakkha i.e. protected); in cpd. su˚; well arranged or appointed, fully provided DN ii.75; MN ii.75; DN-a i.147, DN-a i.182; a˚; unappointed Vin i.175; Vism 37.
pp. of saṃvidahati
fanned Dāvs v.18.
saṃ + vījita
1. closed DN i.81.
2. tied up Ja iv.361.
3. restrained, governed, (self-)controlled guarded DN i.250; DN iii.48, DN iii.97; SN ii.231; SN iv.351 sq.; AN i.7 (cittaṃ); ii.25; iii.387; Iti 96, Iti 118; Snp 340 (indriyesu) Dhp 340; DN-a i.181. asaṃvuta unrestrained SN iv.70; AN iii.387; Pp 20, Pp 24; in phrase asaṃvuṭā lokantarikā andhakārā (the world-spaces which are dark & ) ungoverned orderless, not supported, baseless DN ii.12 - su˚; well controlled Vin ii.213; Vin iv.186; SN iv.70; Snp 413; Dhp 8.
-atta self-controlled SN i.66. -indriya having the senses under control Iti 91; Pp 35. -kārin MN ii.260.
pp. of saṃvarati
see saṃyūḷha.
agitation, fear, anxiety; thrill, religious emotion (caused by contemplation of the miseries of this world) DN iii.214; AN i.43; AN ii.33, AN ii.114; SN i.197; SN iii.85; SN v.130, SN v.133; Iti 30; Snp 935; Ja i.138 Nd i.406; Vism 135 = Kp-a 235 (eight objects inducing emotion: birth, old age, illness, death, misery in the apāyas, and the misery caused by saṃsāra in past, present & future stages); Mvu 1, Mvu 4; Mvu 23, Mvu 62; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 22, Pv-a 32, Pv-a 39 Pv-a 76.
fr. saṃ + vij
(adj.) agitating, moving Iti 30.
fr. saṃ + vij
(adj.) apt to cause emotion AN ii.120; Vism 238. See also saṃvijjati1.
fr. saṃvejana
stirred, moved, agitated SN i.197; Nd i.406.
pp. of saṃvejeti
Caus. of saṃvijjati1 (q.v.).
to wrap, stuff, tuck in Vin iv.40.
saṃ + veṭheti
shaken up, confused, trembling Snp 902.
saṃ + vyathita: see vyadhati
(f.) “that which is wound round,” a loin cloth Ja v.306. As saṃvelliya at Vin ii.137, Vin ii.271.
saṃ + velli, cp. vellita
to gather up, bundle together, fold up Vism 327.
fr. saṃ + vell
(f.) lying down, being in bed, sleeping Ja vi.551 sq., 557.
fr. saṃveseti
to lead, conduct AN i.141; Pass. saṃvesiyati to be put to bed (applied to a sick person) MN i.88 = iii. 181;D ii.24. Cp. abhi˚.
Caus. of saṃvisati
see samavossajjati.
business, traffic Vin iii.239; AN ii.187 = SN i.78; AN iii.77; Snp-a 471.
saṃ + vohāra
to trade (with); ppr. ˚vohāramāna [cp. BSk. saṃvyavahāramāna Divy 259; AN ii.188.
Denom. fr. saṃvohāra
contact, connection, association Vin iii.120; AN iii.293 sq. (˚ārāmatā); iv.87 sq., 331; Iti 70; Ja i.376; Ja iv.57; Mil 386; Nd ii.137; Vb-a 340 (an-anulomika˚); Pv-a 5 (pāpamitta˚) ■ Two kinds of contact at Nd ii.659: by sight (dassana˚) and by hearing (savaṇa˚) ■ pada˚; contact of two words, “sandhi Nd i.139; Nd ii.137 (for iti); Snp-a 28 ■ a˚; SN ii.202; Mil 344. -˚jāta one who has come into contact Snp 36.
fr. saṃ + sṛj
1. mixed with (instr.), associating with, joined MN i.480 (opp. vi˚); AN iii.109, AN iii.116 AN iii.258 sq., 393; Pv-a 47.
2. living in society Vin i.200 Vin ii.4; Vin iv.239, Vin iv.294; DN ii.214; Kv 337 = Dhs-a 42; Dhs 1193; Ja ii.105; Dhs-a 49, Dhs-a 72 ■ a˚; not given to society MN i.214; SN i.63; Mil 244; Vism 73.
pp. of saṃ + sṛj
to proclaim, point out Ja v.77; Ja vi.533; Pot. saṃse Ja vi.181; aor. asaṃsi Ja iii.420; Ja iv.395; Ja v.66; & asāsī (Sk. aśaṃsīt) Ja iii.484 Cp. abhi˚.
Vedic śaṃsati, cp. Av. saṃhaiti to proclaim, Lat. censeo = censure; Obulg. χom to say
adhering, clinging DN i.239 (paramparā˚).
pp. of saṃ + sañj
(f.) session, assembly; loc. saṃsati Ja iii.493 (= parisamajjhe C.), 495
fr. saṃ + sad
to sound, in def. of root kitt at Dhtp 579; Dhtm 812.
saṃ + śabd
to run together, to associate DN i.248; DN ii.223; SN ii.158 = Iti 70; SN iv.379; Pp 32 ■ Caus. saṃsandeti to put together; unite, combine Ja i.403; Ja v.216; Mil 131; Dhp-a ii.12; Dhp-a iv.51.
saṃ + syand, cp. BSk. saṃsyandati Avs ii.142 sq., 188
(f.) 1. (lit.) coming together Ja vi.414 (v.l. for T. saṃsandita).
2. (fig.) import application, reference, conclusion (lit. “flowing together”) Tikp 264. opamma˚; application of a simile “tertium comparationis” Vism 326; DN-a i.127. diṭṭha˚ (pucchā) a question with reference to observation Nd ii.s. v. pucchā; Dhs-a 55.
fr. saṃsandati
depressed, exhausted Dhp 280 (= osanna Dhp-a iii.410: see ossanna ).
pp. of saṃsīdati or saṃsandati
(adj.) creeping AN v.289.
fr. saṃ + sṛp
to creep along, to crawl, move AN v.289; Vv-a 278; Dhp-a iv.49.
saṃ + sappati
, the creeping exposition, a discussion of the consequences of certain kinds of kamma AN v.288 sq.
(adj.) = saṃsappa AN iv.172.
doubt AN ii.24; Nd ii.660 (= vicikicchā etc.); Mil 94; Dhs 425.
cp. Vedic saṃśaya
(nt.) doubt Dāvs i.50.
pp. of saṃsayati = saṃ + seti of śi; in meaning = saṃsaya
to move about continuously, to come again and again Ja i.335.
2. to go through one life after the other, to transmigrate DN i.14; DN-a i.105; ppr. saṃsaranto (& saṃsaraṃ); SN iii.149; SN iv.439; Iti 109; Pv-a 166; med. saṃsaramāna Vv 197; ger ˚saritvā SN iii.212; Pp 16 ■ pp. saṃsarita & saṃsita;.
saṃ + sarati, of sṛ;
(nt.) 1. moving about, running; ˚lohita blood in circulation (opp. sannicita˚; ) Vism 261 Kp-a 62; Vb-a 245.
2. a movable curtain, a blind that can be drawn aside Vin ii.153.
fr. saṃ + sṛ;
transmigrated DN ii.90; AN ii.1; Thig 496. a˚ MN i.82.
pp. of saṃsarati
flowing Vv-a 227.
fr. saṃ + sru
Name of a purgatory Vv 5212, cp. Vv-a 226 sq.
fr. saṃsava
to cause to flow together, to pour into (loc.), to put in Ja v.268 (= pakkhipati C.).
fr. saṃ + sru
(f.) a kind of inferior rice Ja vi.530.
cp. *Sk. syavaṃ-sātikā, on which see Kern, Toev. ii.62, s. v.
Caus. of saṃsīdati (q.v.).
lit. “to smoothe,” to fold up (one’s sleeping mat), to leave (one’s bed), in phrase senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā Vin ii.185; Vin iv.24; MN i.457; SN iii.95, SN iii.133; SN iv.288.
Caus. of saṃ + śam
to taste, enjoy Ja iii.201 (aor. samasāyisuṃ: so read for samāsāsisuṃ).
saṃ + sāyati, which stands for sādati (of svad to sweeten). On y → d cp. khāyita → khādita & sankhāyita
1. transmigration, lit. faring on DN i.54; DN ii.206 (here = existence); MN i.81 (saṃsārena suddhi); SN ii.178 sq.; AN i.10; AN ii.12 = AN ii.52; Snp 517; Dhp 60; Ja i.115; Pv ii.1311; Vism 544 (in detail), 578, 603 (˚assa kāraka); Pv-a 63, Pv-a 243. For description of saṃsāra (its endlessness & inevitableness) see e.g. SN ii.178 SN ii.184 sq., 263; iii.149 sq.; Vb-a 134 (anta-virahita); anamatagga (to which add refs. Vb-a 45, Vb-a 182, Vb-a 259 Vb-a 260).
2. moving on, circulation: vacī˚; exchange of words AN i.79.
-cakka [cp. BSk. saṃsāra-cakra] the wheel of tr. Vism 198, Vism 201; Vv-a 105 = Pv-a 7. -dukkha the ill of tr Vism 531; Vb-a 145, Vb-a 149. -bhaya fear of tr. Vb-a 199. -sāgara the ocean of tr. Ja iii.241.
fr. saṃsarati
to be fulfilled Sdhp 451.
saṃ + sidh
= saṃsarita Ja v.56 (cira-ratta˚ = carita anuciṇṇa C.).
dependent Sdhp 306.
pp. of saṃ + śri
(f.) success Dhtp 420.
saṃ + siddhi
entwined Vism 1; Mil 102, Mil 148; Dhp-a iii.198.
pp. of saṃ + sibbati
sinking (down) SN iv.180 (v.l. saṃsāda).
fr. saṃsīdati
1. to sink down, to lose heart DN i.248; AN iii.89 = Pp 65; Thag 681; Ja ii.330.
2. to be at an end (said of a path, magga) Vin iii.131; SN i.1 ■ Caus saṃsādeti: 1. to get tired, give out MN i.214; AN i.288. 2. to drop, fail in AN iv.398 (pañhaṃ, i.e. not answer)
3. to place DN-a i.49.
saṃ + sad
(nt.) = saṃsīda Thag 572 (ogha˚).
fr. saṃsīdati
fallen off, destroyed Snp 44 (˚patta without leaves = patita-patta C.).
saṃ + sīna, pp. of śṛ; to crush, Sk. śīrṇa
(adj.) pure DN i.113; Snp 372, Snp 1107; Nd i.289; Nd ii.661; Ja i.2.
-gahaṇika of pure descent DN i.113; DN-a i.281.
saṃ + suddha
(f.) [saṃ + suddhi) purification Snp 788; Nd i.84.
to beat Ja vi.53, Ja vi.88 (˚amāna).
saṃ + sumbhati
(adj.) indicating Vv-a 244, Vv-a 302.
fr. saṃsūceti
to indicate, show, betray Dāvs v.50; DN-a i.311.
saṃ + sūcay˚, Denom. fr. sūci
sweat, moisture MN i.73; Thag-a 185.
-ja [cp. BSk saṃsvedaja Divy 627] born or arisen from moisture DN iii.230; Mil 128; Kp-a 247; Vb-a 161.
saṃ + seda
(adj.) associating AN ii.245; AN v.113 sq. (sappurisa˚ & asappurisa˚); Mil 93.
fr. saṃ + sev
(f.) associating Dhs 1326 = Pp 20.
fr. saṃsevati
(f.) worshipping, attending Mil 93 (sneha˚).
fr. saṃseva
frequented, inhabited Ja vi.539.
saṃ + sevita
(adj.) = saṃseva Ja i.488.
firm, compact Mil 416; Sdhp 388.
pp. of saṃ + han
DA i.280; see vi˚. Samhanati & samhanti;
pp. of saṃ + hṛ;
1. to join together, reach to Ja v.372.
2. to suppress, allay, destroy AN iv.437 (kaṇḍuṃ) ■ pp. saṃhata.
saṃ + han
(nt.) joining together, closing DN i.11; Ja vi.65.
fr. saṃhanati
collecting; dus˚; hard to collect Vin iii.148; Ja iv.36 (here as dussanghara, on which see Kern, Toev. i.121).
fr. saṃ + hṛ;
(nt.) collecting, gathering Dāvs v.33. Cp. upa˚; & sangharaṇa.;
fr. saṃharati
1. to collect, fold up Vin i.46; Vin ii.117, Vin ii.150; MN iii.169; Ja i.66, Ja i.422; Dāvs iv.12; Pv-a 73–2. to draw together Vin ii.217.
3. to gather up take up Snp-a 369 (rūpaṃ).
4. to heap up Pv iv.14 (saṃharimha = sañcinimha Pv-a 279) ■ asaṃhāriya (grd. which cannot be destroyed (see also saṃhīra ) SN v.219. Caus. II. ˚harāpeti to cause to collect, to make gather or grow Vin iv.259 (lomāni), 260 (id.) ■ Pass. saṃhīrati (q.v.) ■ pp. saṃhata. Cp. upa˚.
saṃ + harati
to laugh with MN ii.223.
san + hasati
(f.) shrinking, decrease, dwindling away DN ii.305 = MN i.49 = SN ii.2 = Dhs 644; Dhs-a 328 Cp. parihāni.
saṃ + hāni
abridgment, compilation Pv-a 114. Cp. upa˚.
fr. saṃ + hṛ;
drawing together, a collector SN ii.185 = Iti 17. sabba˚; a kind of mixed perfume Ja vi.336.
saṃ + hāra + ka
(adj.) movable Vism 124; Snp 28, Snp 321. a˚; Vin iv.272.
fr. saṃ + hṛ;
connected, equipped with, possessed of DN i.5; MN ii.202; SN i.103; Dhp 101 (gāthā anattha-pada˚). Often as attha˚; endowed with profit bringing advantage, profitable DN i.189; SN ii.223 SN iv.330; SN v.417; AN iii.196 sq.; AN v.81; Snp 722. Cp. upa˚.
pp. of sandahati
see sandhīyati.
(& saṃhāriya) that which can be restrained, conquerable Thag 1248; Ja v.81. a˚; immovable unconquerable SN i.193; Vin ii.96; AN iv.141 sq. Thag 649; Snp 1149; Ja iv.283. See also asaṃhāriya.
grd. of saṃharati
to be drawn away or caught in (loc.) MN iii.188 sq. (paccuppannesu dhammesu) Dhs-a 420 (id.); Ja iii.333.
Pass. of saṃharati
(adj.) own DN i.106, DN i.119, DN i.231; DN ii.173 (sakaṃ te “all be your own,” as greeting to the king); MN i.79; Vin i.3, Vin i.249 (ācariyaka); SN v.261 (id.); Snp 861; Iti 76 Nd i.252; Pv i.51 (ghara); ii.61 (bhātā) ■ Opp. assaka2-appassaka having little or nothing as one’s own (= daḷidda) AN i.261; AN ii.203; kamma-ssaka possessing one’s own kamma MN iii.203 sq.; AN v.288; Mil 65; Dhs 1366.
-gavacaṇḍa violent towards one’s own cows, harassing one’s own Pp 47.
sa4 + ka
(m. & nt.) a cart, waggon; a cartload DN ii.110; Vin iii.114; Ja i.191; Mil 238; Pv-a 102; Vb-a 435 (simile of two carts); Snp-a 58 (udaka-bharita˚), 137 (bīja˚). sakaṭāni pajāpeti to cause the carts to go on Ja ii.296.
-gopaka the guardian of the waggon Dhp-a iv.60 -bhāra a cart-load Vv-a 79. -mukha the front or opening of the waggon, used as adj. “facing the waggon or the cart” (?) at DN ii.234, of the earth-that is, India as then known-and at DN ii.235 (comp. Mahāvastu iii.208), of six kingdoms in Northern India. At the second passage B. explains that the six kingdoms all debouched alike on the central kingdom, which was hexagonal in shape. This explanation does not fit the other passage. Could sakaṭa there be used of the constellation Rohinī, which in mediaeval times was called the Cart? Cp. Dial. ii.269. -vāha a cart-load Pv ii.75 -vyūha “the waggon array,” a wedge-shaped phalanx Ja ii.404; Ja iv.343; Vism 384.
cp. Sk. śakaṭa; Vedic śakaṭī
see kasaṭa.
(adj.) having a mole DN i.80; DN-a i.223.
sa + kaṇa + ika
(adj.) thorny, dangerous DN i.135; Thig 352; DN-a i.296.
sa + kaṇṭaka
whispering in the ear, a method of (secretly) taking votes Vin ii.98 sq (salāka-gāha).
sa + kaṇṇa + jappa + ka
(f.) (-˚) one’s own nature, identity, peculiarity: see kamma-ssakatā; & adj.; ˚ssakata. It may also be considered as an abstr. formation fr kamma-ssaka.
abstr. fr. saka
“returning once,” one who will not be reborn on earth more than once; one who has attained the second grade of saving wisdom Vin i.293; DN i.156, DN i.229; DN iii.107; MN i.34; SN iii.168; AN i.120, AN i.232 sq.; AN ii.89, AN ii.134; AN iii.348; AN iv.292 sq., 380 v.138 sq., 372 sq.; Dhp-a iv.66.
sakad = sakid, + āgāmin
(f.) the state of a “oncereturner” DN ii.206.
abstr. fr. last
(adj.) containing a mouthful Vin iv.195.
sa + kabala
is Bdhgh’s expln of attamana (q.v.), e.g. DN-a i.129, DN-a i.255.
saka + mana
(nt.) one’s own occupation DN i.135.
sa4 + kamma
(adj.) one who still has something to do (in order to attain perfection) DN ii.143; Thag 1045; Mil 138. Sakaruna-bhava
sa3 + karaṇīya
being full of compassion Snp-a 318.
sa3 + karuṇa + bhāva
(adj.) all, whole, entire Vin ii.109; Vism 321; Snp-a 132; Pv-a 93, Pv-a 97, Pv-a 111. Cp. sākalya.
cp. Sk. sakala
(f.) a potsherd; a splinter, bit DN ii.341; AN ii.199 = SN iv.197; SN i.27; Mil 179; MN i.259; AN v.9 (˚aggi); Ja iv.430; Mil 134 Kp-a 43 (maccha˚); Ne 23; Dhs-a 319 ■ sakalikaṃ sakalikaṃ in little pieces Vin ii.112 ■ sakalika-hīra a skewer Ja iv.29, Ja iv.30.
fr. sakala = Sk. śakala potsherd
(adj.) faulty, wrong (lit. bitter) Mil 119 (vacana).
sa3 + k.
presence; acc. sakāsaṃ towards, to Snp 326; Ja v.480; Pv-a 237; loc. sakāse in the presence of, before Ja iii.24; Ja iv.281; Ja v.394; Ja vi.282.
sa3 + k. = Sk. kāśa
(nt.) one’s own duty or business Vism 321 (˚pasuta).
sa4 + kicca
(nt.) = sakicca Mil 42; Dhs-a 196 (˚pasuta).
sa4 + kiccaya = kṛtya
(adj.) having something; (appld) with attachment, full of worldly attachment Snp 620; Dhp i.246; Dhp 396 (= rāg’ādīhi kiñcanehi sakiñcana Dhp-a iv.158). Sakid & Sakim
sa3 + kiñcana
(adv.) once. (1) sakiṃ: DN ii.188; Ja i.397; Dhp-a iii.116 (sakiṃvijātā itthi primipara); once more: Mil 238; once for all: Thig 466; Dhp-a ii.44; Thag-a 284 ■ (2) sakid (in composition see also sakad -āgāmin): in sakid eva once only AN ii.238 AN iv.380; Pp 16; Pv-a 243; at once Vin i.31.
fr. sa˚ = saṃ
(adj.) own Ja ii.177 Ja iii.48, Ja iii.49; Ja iv.177.
fr. saka, cp. Sk. svakīya
a bird (esp. with ref. to augury) DN i.71 (pakkhin + ); Vin iii.147; SN i.197; AN ii.209 AN iii.241 sq., 368; Ja ii.111, Ja ii.162 (Kandagala); Kp-a 241 pantha˚; see under pantha ■ f. sakuṇī SN i.44. adj sakuṇa Ja v.503 (maṃsa).
-kulāvaka a bird’s nest Kp-a 56. -patha bird-course Npl. Nd i.155. -pāda bird foot Kp-a 47. -ruta the cry of birds Mil 178. -vatta the habit (i.e. life) of a bird Ja v.254. -vijjā bird craft, augury (i.e. understanding the cries of birds) DN i.9; DN-a i.93. Sakunaka = sakuna
Vedic śakuna
Snp-a 27 ■ f. sakuṇikā DN i.91; Mil 202; Ja i.171; Ja iv.290.
(f.) a kind of hawk (lit. “bird-killer”) SN v.146; Ja ii.59; Mil 365. Cp vyagghīnasa.
sakuṇa + ˚ghi, f. of ˚gha
at Pv-a 123 read saṅkucita.
a bird; a kind of vulture Snp 241; Dhp 92, Dhp 174; Ja iv.225; Ja vi.272.
cp. Sk. śakunta
= sakunta Vin i.137.
(adj.) of the same age; a playmate Ja v.360, Ja v.366.
sa2 + kumāra
a kind of fish Ja v.405.
cp. Epic Sk. śakula
(adj.) able, possible Snp 143. sasakkaṃ (= sa3 + s.) as much as possible, as much as one is able to MN i.415, MN i.514. Sakkacca(m)
fr. śak, cp. Sk. śakya
(adv.) respectfully, carefully, duly, thoroughly; often with uppaṭṭhahati to attend, serve with due honour ■ Vv 125; Mil 305; Ja iv.310. The form sakkaccaṃ is the older and more usual, e.g. at DN ii.356 sq.; SN iv.314; AN ii.147; AN iv.392; Vin iv.190, Vin iv.275; Thag 1054; Ja i.480; Dhp 392; Pv-a 26 Pv-a 121. The BSk. form is satkṛtya, e.g. Mvu i.10 -kārin zealous SN iii.267; Mil 94. -dāna MN iii.24.
orig. ger. of sakkaroti
honoured, duly attendo DN i.114, DN i.116; DN ii.167; Nd 73; Ja i.334; Mil 21; Snp-a 43 Usually combd with garukata, pūjita, mānita.
pp. of sakkaroti
to go; see osakkati & cp;. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 302. Other P. cpds. are ussakkati paṭisakkati;.
ṣvaṣk; Dhtp 9: gamana
(nt.) Śakraship, the position as the ruler of the devas MN iii.65; Ja i.315; Vism 301 (brahmatta + ). ˚rajja a kingdom rivalling Sakka’s Ja i.315.
fr. Sakka = Indra
to honour, esteem, treat with respect, receive hospitably; often combd with garukaroti māneti, pūjeti, e.g. DN i.91, DN i.117; DN iii.84; MN i.126. ppr ˚karonto DN ii.159; Pot. ˚kareyya Iti 110; aor. ˚kari Pv-a 54; ger. ˚katvā Pp 35; Ja vi.14, & ˚kacca (q.v.) ■ pp sakkata ■ Caus. sakkāreti = sakkaroti; Mvu 32, Mvu 44 grd. sakkāreyya Thag 186 (so read for ˚kareyya).
sat + kṛ;
(indecl.) possible (lit. one might be able to); in the older language still used as a Pot., but later reduced to an adv. with infin. E. g. sakkā sāmaaññphalaṃpaññāpetuṃ would one be able to point out a result of samaṇaship DN i.51; khādituṃ na sakkā, one could not eat Ja ii.16; na sakkā maggo akkhātuṃ, the way cannot be shown, Mil 269; sakkā etaṃ mayā ñātuṃ? can I ascertain this? DN i.187; sakkā honti imāni aṭṭha sukhāni vindituṃ, these eight advantages are able to be enjoyed Ja i.8; sakkā etaṃ abhavissa kātuṃ, this would be possible to do, DN i.168; imaṃ sakkā gaṇhituṃ, this one we can take Ja iv.219. See also Snp-a 338, Snp-a 376 (= labbhā) Pv-a 12, Pv-a 69, Pv-a 96.
originally Pot. of sakkoti = Vedic śakyāt; cp. Prk. sakkā with Pischel’s expln in Prk. Gr. § 465. A corresponding formation, similar in meaning, is labbhā (q.v.)
the body in being, the existing body or group (= -nikāya q.v.); as a t.t. in P. psychology almost equal to individuality; identified with the five khandhas MN i.299; SN iii.159; SN iv.259; AN ii.34; Thig 170, Thig 239; Dhs-a 348. See also DN iii.216 (cp. Dial. iii.2161); AN iii.293, AN iii.401; Nd i.109.
-diṭṭhi theory of soul, heresy of individuality, speculation as to the eternity or otherwise of one’s own individuality MN i.300 = MN iii.17 = DhS 1003, SN iii.16 sq In these passages this is explained as the belief that in one or other of the khandhas there is a permanent entity an attā. The same explanation, at greater length, in the Diṭṭhigata Sutta (Pts i.143–151). As delusions about the soul or ghost can arise out of four sorts of bias (see abhinivesa ) concerning each of the five khandhas we have twenty kinds of s˚ diṭṭhi: fifteen of these are kinds of sakkāya-vatthukā sassata-diṭṭhi, and five are kinds of s˚-vatthukā uccheda-diṭṭhi (ibid. 149, 150) Gods as well as men are s˚ pariyāpannā SN iii.85; and so is the eye, Dhs-a 308. When the word diṭṭhi is not expressed it is often implied, Thig 199, Thig 339; Snp 231 S˚ diṭṭhi is the first Bond to be broken on entering the Path (see saṃyojana ); it is identical with the fourth kind of Grasping (see upādāna ); it is opposed to Nibbāna, SN iv.175; is extinguished by the Path, MN i.299; SN iii.159; SN iv.260; and is to be put away by insight Dhs-a 346 ■ See further: DN iii.234; AN iii.438; AN iv.144 sq.; Kv 81; Snp 950; Dhs 1003; and on term Dhs trsln § 1003; K.S. iii.80, n. 3. -nirodha the destruction of the existing body or of individuality AN ii.165 sq. AN iii.246; DN iii.216. -samudaya the rise of individuality DN iii.216; Nd i.109.
sat + kāya, cp. BSk. satkāya Divy 46; Avs i.85. See on expln of term Mrs. Rh. D. in J.R.A.S. 1894, 324; Franke Dīgha trsln p. 45; Geiger P.Gr. § 241; Kern. Toev. ii.52
hospitality, honour, worship Vin i.27, Vin i.183; AN ii.203; Ja i.63; Ja ii.9, Ja ii.104; Dhp 75; Mil 386; Dhs 1121; Vism 270; Snp-a 284; Vb-a 466. ˚ṃ karoti to pay reverence, to say goodbye Dhp-a i.398. Cp. lābha.
fr. sat + kṛ;
is Caus. of sakkaroti (q.v.).
(nt.) possibility; a˚; impossibility Pv-a 48.
abstr. fr. sakkuṇeyya, grd. of sakkoti
to be able. Pres. sakkoti DN i.246; Vin i.31; Mil 4; Dhp-a i.200; sakkati [ = Class. Sk. śakyate] Ne 23 Pot. sakkuṇeyya Ja i.361; Pv-a 106; archaic 1st pl sakkuṇemu Ja v.24; Pv ii.81. ppr. sakkonto Mil 27-Fut. sakkhati Snp 319; sakkhīti [ = Sk. śakṣyati MN i.393; pl. 3rd sakkhinti Snp 28; Snp 2nd sg. sagghasi Snp 834; Snp 3rd sg. sakkhissati Dhp-a iv.87 ■ Aor. asakkhi DN i.96, DN i.236; Pv-a 38; sakkhi Mil 5; Ja v.116; Ja v.1st pl asakkhimha Pv-a 262, & asakkhimhā Vin iii.23; Vin iii.3rd sg also sakkuṇi Mvu 7, Mvu 13 ■ grd. sakkuṇeyya (neg. a˚; (im)possible Ja i.55; Pv-a 122 ■ sakka & sakkā see sep.
śak; def. Dhtp 508 etc. as “sattiyaṃ”: see satti
(f.) 1. gravel, grit Vin iii.147 = Ja ii.284; Ja i.192; AN i.253; DN i.84; Pv iii.228; Dhp-a iv.87.
2. potsherd Vv-a 157; Pv-a 282 Pv-a 285.
3. grain, granule, crystal, in loṇa˚; a salt crystal SN ii.276; Dhp-a i.370; Snp-a 222.
4. (granulated) sugar Ja i.50.
cp. Vedic śarkarā gravel
(f.) in loṇa˚; a piece of salt crystal Vin i.206; Vin ii.237.
fr. sakkharā
(adj.) containing gravel, pebbly, stony AN iv.237.
= sakkharika, fr. sakkharā
(& ˚ikā ) (f.) 1. the orifice of the ear: see kaṇṇa˚.
2. a sort of cake or sweetmeat (cp sanguḷikā) AN iii.76 (T. sakkhalakā; v.l. ˚likā & sankulikā); Vin iii.59; Ja ii.281.
cp. Sk. śaṣkulī
an eyewitness DN ii.237 (nom. sg. sakkhī = with his own eyes, as an eyewitness); Snp 479, Snp 921, Snp 934 (sakkhi dhammaṃ adassi where the corresp. Sk. form would be sākṣād); Ja i.74- kāya-sakkhī a bodily witness, i.e. one who has bodily experienced the 8 vimokkhas AN iv.451; Vism 93, Vism 387 Vism 659 ■ sakkhiṃ karoti [Sk. sākṣī karoti] (1) to see with one’s own eyes SN ii.255; (2) to call upon as a witness (with geName of person) Ja vi.280 (rājāno); Dhp-a ii.69 (Moggallānassa sakkhiṃ katvā); Pv-a 217 (but at 241 as “friendship”). Note. The P. form is rather to be taken as an adv. (“as present”) than adj.: sakkhiṃ sakkhi;, with reduced sakkhi˚; (cp. sakid & sakiṃ). See also; sacchi˚.
-diṭṭha seen face to face MN i.369; DN i.238; Ja vi.233 -puṭṭha asked as a witness Snp 84, Snp 122; Pp 29. -bhabbatā the state of becoming an eyewitness, of experiencing MN i.494; Dhs-a 141. -sāvaka a contemporaneous or personal disciple DN ii.153.
sa3 + akkhin; cp. Sk. sākṣin
(f.) or sakkhi2 (nt.) friendship (with somebody = instr.) SN i.123 = AN v.46 (janena karoti sakkhiṃ make friends with people); Pv iv.157; iv.165 Ja iii.493; Ja iv.478. Cp. sakhya.
cp. Sk. sākhya
: see Dictionary of Names. In cpd. ˚puttiya (belonging to the Sakya son) in general meaning of “a (true) follower of the Buddha,” AN iv.202; Vin i.44; Ud 44; a˚; not a follower of the B. Vin iii.25.
a companion, friend; nom. sakhā Ja ii.29; Ja ii.348; acc. sakhāraṃ Ja ii.348; Ja v.509;; sakhaṃ Ja ii.299; instr. sakhinā Ja iv.41; abl. sakhārasmā Ja iii.534; gen. sakhino Ja vi.478; voc. sakhā Ja iii.295; nom. pl. sakhā Ja iii.323; & sakhāro Ja iii.492 gen. sakhīnaṃ Ja iii.492; Ja iv.42; & sakhānaṃ Ja ii.228 In compn with bhū as sakhi˚ & sakhī˚;, e.g. sakhibhāva friendship Ja vi.424; Pv-a 241; & sakhībhāva Ja iii.493.
Vedic sakhi m. & f.
(f.) a female friend Ja iii.533.
fr. sakhi
(f.) friendship Thag 1018, Thag 1019.
abstr. fr. sakhi
(adj.) kindly in speech, congenial DN i.116; Vin ii.11; Ja i.202, Ja i.376; Mil 207; Pv iv.133 (= mudu Pv-a 230). Cp. sākhalya.
-vācatā use of friendly speech Dhs 1343.
fr. sakhi
(f.) a female friend Ja ii.27, Ja ii.348.
to sakhi
(adj.) with the hoofs Ja i.9; Bdhgh on MN i.78 (see M i.536).
sa3 + khura
(nt.) friendship Ja ii.409; Ja vi.353 sq.
Sk. sākhya; cp. sakkhī
(adj.) fragment Dhp 52.
sa3 + gandha + ka
(adj.) with a foetus, pregnant Mvu 33, Mvu 46.
sa3 + gabbha
(adj.) full of crocodiles Iti 57, Iti 114. As sagāha at SN iv.157.
sa3 + gaha2
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. gāma, + sa2 = saṃ˚) hailing from the same village SN i.36, SN i.60.
(adj.) respectful, usually combd with sappatissa & other syn., e.g. Vin i.45; Iti 10 Vism 19, Vism 221.
sa3 + gārava
(f.) respect Thag 589.
fr. sagārava
(adj.) either “with the string,” or “in one”; Vin i.46 (saguṇaṃ karoti to put together, to fold up; C ekato katvā). This interpretation (as “put together”) is much to be preferred to the one given under guṇa1 1; saguṇaṃ katvā belongs to saṅghāṭiyo, and not to kāyabandhanaṃ, thus: “the upper robes are to be given, putting them into one (bundle).”
either sa3 + guṇa1 1, as given under guṇa1; or sa˚ = saṃ˚ once, as in sakṛt, + guṇa1 2
a cake with sugar Ja vi.524. Cp. saṅguḷikā.
sa3 + guḷa2
companion, mate (lit. having the same activity) Ja ii.31.
sa2 = saṃ, + gocara
a kinsman Ja v.411; cp. vi.500.
sa2 = saṃ, + gotta
1. heaven, the next world, popularly conceived as a place of happiness and long life (cp. the pop. etym. of “suṭṭhu-aggattā sagga” Pv-a 9 “rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggo ti saggo” Vism 427) usually the kām’āvacara-devaloka, sometimes also the 26 heavens (Thag-a 74). Sometimes as sagga ṭhāna (cp ˚loka ), e.g. Ja vi.210 ■ Vin i.223; DN ii.86; DN iii.52, DN iii.146 sq. MN i.22, MN i.483; SN i.12; AN i.55 sq., 292 sq.; ii.83 sq.; iii.244 253 sq.; iv.81; v.135 sq.; Snp 224 (loc. pl. saggesu); Iti 14; Pv i.13; Vism 103, Vism 199.
-āpāya heaven and hell Thig 63; Snp 647. -ārohaṇa (-sopāna) (the stairs) leading to heaven (something like Jacob’s ladder) Vism 10. -kathā discourse or talk about heaven Vin i.15 (cp. anupubbikathā) -kāya the heavenly assembly (of the gods) Ja vi.573. -dvāra heaven’s gate Vism 57. -patha = sagga Ja i.256. -pada heavenly region, heaven Ja ii.5; Ja iv.272 (= saggaloka). -magga the way to heaven Ja vi.287; Dhp-a i.4. -loka the heavenworld MN i.73; Ja iv.272. -saṃvattanika leading to heaven DN iii.66.
Vedic svarga, svar + ga
good quality, virtue Sdhp 313.
sat + guṇa
see sakkoti.
(f.) just or true killing Ja i.177.
sat + ghaccā
(f.) part of a woman’s dress, bodice, girdle (?) Ja v.96 (suvaṇṇa˚).
saṃ + kacchā1
(nt.) a part of clothing, belt, waist-cloth Vin ii.272; Vin iv.345. The C. expln is incorrect
fr. sankacchā
(nt.) a dust heap DN ii.160; SN ii.270; MN i.334. Expld as “sankāra-ṭṭhāna” K.S. ii.203.
unexplained
1. to collect MN i.135; Ja i.254; Ja iv.224; Dhp i.49; Pass. ˚khaḍḍiyati Vism 251 (ppr ˚iyamāna being collected, comprising).
2. to examine scrutinize Ja vi.351 (cintetvā ˚kaḍḍhituṃ).
saṃ + kaḍḍhati
to doubt, hesitate, to be uncertain about pres. (med.) 1st sg. saṅke SN i.111; Ja iii.253 (= āsankāmi C.); vi.312 (na sanke maraṇ’āgamāya); Pot. saṅketha Ja ii.53 = Ja v.85. Pass. saṅkīyati SN iii. = Kv 141; AN iv.246.
śaṅk, Vedic śankate, cp. Lat. cunctor to hesitate; Goth. hāhan = Ags. hangon “to hang”; Oicel. hāētta danger
to name, explain. Pass. saṅkathīyati Dhs-a 390.
saṃ + kathati
gone together with (-˚), gone over to, joined Vin i.60; Vin iv.217.
pp. of sankamati
to cut all round, MN iii.275.
saṃ + kantati
(f.) transition, passage Kv 569; Vism 374 sq.
fr. sankamati
a school of thought (lit. gone over to a faction), a subdivision of the Sabbatthivādins SN v.14; Vism 374 sq.; Mvu 5, Mvu 6; Dpvs 5, 48; Mhbv 97.
fr. sankanta
thought, intention, purpose, plan DN iii.215; SN ii.143 sq.; AN i.281 AN ii.36; Dhp 74; Snp 154, Snp 1144; Nd i.616 (= vitakka ñāṇa paññā buddhi); Dhs 21; Dhp-a ii.78. As equivalent of vitakka also at DN iii.215; AN iv.385; Dhs 7 ■ kāma˚ a lustful thought AN iii.259; AN v.31. paripuṇṇa˚; having one’s intentions fulfilled MN i.192; MN iii.276; DN iii.42; AN v.92, AN v.97 sq.; sara˚; memories & hopes MN i.453; SN iv.76 vyāpāda˚, vihiṃsa˚, malicious, cruel purposes, MN ii.27 sq.; sammā˚; right thoughts or intentions, one of the angas of the 8-fold Path (ariya-magga) Vin i.10; DN ii.312; AN iii.140; Vb-a 117. Sankappa is defd at Dhs-a 124 as (cetaso) abhiniropanā, i.e. application of the mind See on term also Cpd. 238.
saṃ + kḷp, cp. kappeti fig. meaning
1. to imagine; wish AN ii.36; MN i.402; Pp 19.
2. to determine, to think about, strive after Ja iii.449 sq.
Den. fr. sankappa
1. to go on, to pass over to (acc.), to join DN i.55 (ākāsaṃ indriyāni s.); Vin i.54 Vin ii.138 (bhikkhū rukkhā rukkhaṃ s., climb fr. tree to tree); Kv 565 sq. (jhānā jhānaṃ).
2. to transmigrate Mil 71 sq. (+ paṭisandahati) ■ grd. saṅkamanīya to be passed on or transferred Vin i.190; cīvara˚; a dress that should be handed over, which does not belong to one Vin iv.282 ■ pp. saṅkanta ■ Caus. saṅkāmeti (1) to pass over, to cause to go, to move, to shift Vin iii.49 Vin iii.58, Vin iii.59.
2. to come in together (sensations to the heart) Dhs-a 264 ■ Cp. upa˚.
saṃ + kamati
a passage, bridge MN i.439; Vin iii.127; Ja iii.373 (attānaṃ ˚ṃ katvā yo sotthiṃ samatārayi); Mil 91, Mil 229.
fr. saṃ + kram
(nt.) lit. “going over,” i e. step; hence “bridge,” passage, path SN i.110; Vv 5222 775; Pv ii.78; ii.925; Ja vi.120 (papā˚). Cp. upa˚.
fr. sankamati
to tremble, shake Vin i.12; DN ii.12, DN ii.108; Ja i.25 ■ Caus. saṅkampeti id. DN ii.108.
saṃ + kampati
(fight, confusion) wrongly for saṅgara Ne 149, in quot. fr. MN iii.187.
(adj.) blissful Mhbv 4 (sabba˚).
cp. Sk. śankara
(nt.) addition DN-a i.95; MN-a i.2.
fr. saṃ + kal to produce
inciting words, quarrel Ja v.393.
saṃ + kalaha
to become weak, to fail SN i.202 SN ii.277; SN iv.178; AN i.68.
fr. saṃ + kṛṣ, kasati? Or has it anything to do with kasāya?
(adj.) doubtful; wicked Vin ii.236 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.300); SN i.49 = Dhp 312 (expld as “sankāhi saritabba, āsankāhi sarita ussankita, parisankita” Dhp-a iii.485, thus taken as sankā + sṛ; by Bdhgh; of course not cogent); AN ii.239 AN iv.128, AN iv.201; SN i.66 (˚ācāra = “suspecting all” trsln) iv.180; Thag 277; Pp 27.
doubtful, if Vedic sankasuka
(f.) doubt, uncertainty, fear (cp. visanka) Ja vi.158; Dhp-a iii.485.
fr. śaṅk: see sankati
to prepare, get ready, undertake Vin i.137 (vass’āvāsaṃ); SN iv.312.
fr. saṃ + kḷp
to be uncertain about Vin ii.274. Cp pari˚.
Denom. fr. sankā; Dhtp 4 defines saṅk as “sankāyaṃ”
rubbish Vin i.48; Vin iv.265; Ja i.315; Ja ii.196.
-kūṭa rubbish heap, dust heap MN ii.7; Pp 33; Mil 365; Dhp-a i.174. Cp. kacavara & kattara.; -cola a rag picked up from a rubbish heap Ja iv.380. -ṭhāna dust heap Thag 1175, Ja i.244; Vism 250; Dhp-a ii.27. -dhāna id. Dhp 58. -yakkha a rubbish heap demon Ja iv.379.
fr. saṃ + kṛ;
appearance; (-˚) having the appearance of, like, similar Ja ii.150; Ja v.71 Ja v.155, Ja v.370 (puñña˚ = sadisa C.); Bv 17, Bv 21; Mil 2.
saṃ + kāsa, of kāś, cp. okāsa
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) explanation, illustration SN v.430; Ne 5, Ne 8, Ne 38; Snp-a 445 (+ pakāsana).
fr. saṃ + kāś
mixed; impure SN iii.71; AN iv.246.
-parikha having the trenches filled; said of one who is free of saṃsāra MN i.139; AN iii.84; Nd ii.p. 161.
pp. of sankirati
anxious, doubtful Ja v.85; Mvu 7, Mvu 15; Snp-a 60. Cp. pari˚, vi˚.
fr. śaṅk
(nt.) proclaiming, making known Pv-a 164.
saṃ + kittana
(f.) derivation & meaning very doubtful; Bdhgh’s expln at PugA 231 is not to be taken as reliable, viz. “sankittetvā katabhattesu hoti. dubbhikkha-samaye kira acela-kāsāvakā acelakānaṃ atthāya tato tato taṇḍul’ādīni samādapetvā bhattaṃ pacanti ukkaṭṭhâcelako tato na paṭigaṇhāti.” DN i.166 (trslnDial. i.229 “he will not accept food collected, i.e. by the faithful in time of drought”; Neumann “not from the dirty”; Franke “nichts von Mahlzeiten, für die die Mittel durch Aufruf beschafft sind”?); MN i.77; AN ii.206 Pp 55. It may be something like “convocation.”
perhaps saṃ + kitti
(adj.) anxious Mvu 35, Mvu 101.
fr. śaṅk
(adj.) 1. apt to be suspected Iti 67.
2. anxious Ja i.334.
grd. fr. śankati
(nt.) an astrological t.t., denoting the act of or time for collecting or calling in of debts (Bdhgh; doubtful) DN i.11; DN-a i.96; cp Dial. i.23.
fr. saṃ + kirati
to mix together; Pass. saṅkīyati (q.v.); pp. saṅkiṇṇa.
saṃ + kirati
stained, tarnished, impure, corrupt, foul DN i.247; SN ii.271; AN iii.124; AN v.169; Dhp 244; Ja ii.418; Dhs 993, Dhs 1243; Pv iv.123 (kāyena vācāya ca) Dhs-a 319.
pp. of sankilissati
to become soiled or impure DN i.53; SN iii.70; Dhp 165; Ja ii.33, Ja ii.271 ■ pp. saṅkiliṭṭha ■ Caus. saṅkileseti.
saṃ + kilissati, cp. BSk. sankliśyati Divy 57
(nt.) staining, defiling; getting defiled Vv-a 329.
fr. sankilissati
impurity, defilement, corruption, sinfulness Vin i.15; DN i.10, DN i.53, DN i.247 (opp. visuddhi) MN i.402; SN iii.69; AN ii.11; AN iii.418 sq.; AN v.34; Ja i.302; Dhs 993, Dhs 1229; Ne 100; Vism 6, Vism 51, Vism 89; Dhs-a 165.
saṃ + kilesa
(adj.) baneful, sinful DN i.195; DN iii.57; AN ii.172; Dhs 993 (cp. Dhs-a 345); Tikp 333 353.
fr. sankilesa
to become confused or impure SN iii.71; AN ii.29; AN iv.246.
Pass. of sankirati, saṃ + kīr; Sk. ˚kīryate → *kiyyati → P. ˚kīyati
to play or sport DN i.91; AN iv.55, AN iv.343; DN-a i.256.
saṃ + kīḷati
a stake, spike; javelin MN i.337; SN iv.168; Ja vi.112; Dhp-a i.69 ■ ayo˚; an iron stake AN iv.131.
-patha a path full of stakes & sticks Vv 84;11; Ja iii.485 Ja iii.541; Mil 280; Vism 305. -sata a hundred sticks hundreds of sticks Ja vi.112; Vism 153 (both passages same simile with the beating of an ox-hide). -samāhata set with iron spikes, Name of a purgatory MN i.337; Ja vi.453.
cp. Vedic śanku
a stake Vv-a 338. Cp. khāṇuka.
fr. sanku
to become contracted, to shrink Dhs-a 376 ■ pp. ˚kucita ■ Caus. ˚koceti.
saṃ + kucati: see kuñcita
shrunk, contracted, clenched (of the first: ˚hattha) Ja i.275; Ja vi.468 (˚hattha, opposed to pasārita-hattha); DN-a i.287; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 124.
pp. of sankucati
doubled up Ja ii.68; cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 102.
fr. saṃ + *kuṭ kuc, cp. kuṭila
doubled up, shrivelled, shrunk; Ja ii.225; Mil 251, Mil 362; Dhs-a 376; Vism 255 (where Kp-a reads bahala ); Vb-a 238.
= last
(adj.) curved, winding Mil 297.
saṃ + kuṭila
contorted, distorted Pv-a 123.
pp. of saṃ + kuṇḍ: see kuṇḍa
angry DN ii.262.
saṃ + kuddha
shaken, enraged SN i.222.
saṃ + kupita
(adj.) to be shaken, movable; a˚; immovable Thag 649; Snp 1149.
saṃ + kuppa
(adj.) crowded, full Sdhp 603.
saṃ + kula
a kind of cake Ja vi.580.
cp. sakkhali 2 & sanguḷikā
(nt.) = saṅkuli Ja vi.524.
(adj.) contrary; neg. a˚; Ja vi.297 (= appaṭiloma C.).
cp. Sk. sankasuka crumbling up
(adj.) flowering, in blossom Ja v.420; Mil 319.
saṃ + kusumita
intimation, agreement, engagement, appointed place, rendezvous Vin i.298; Mil 212; Ne 15, Ne 18; cp. Cpd. 6, 33. saṅketaṃ gacchati to keep an appointment, to come to the rendezvous Vin ii.265. asaṅketena without appointing a place Vin i.107. vassika˚; the appointed time for keeping the rainy season Vin i.298.
-kamma agreement Vin iii.47, Vin iii.53, Vin iii.78.
saṃ + keta: see ketu
(nt.) = saṅketa, ˚ṭṭhāna place of rendezvous Dhp-a ii.261.
to amuse oneself (with) AN iv.55.
saṃ + keḷāyati
contraction (as a sign of anger or annoyance), grimace (mukha˚) Pv-a 103; also as hattha˚; etc. at Pv-a 124.
saṃ + koca, of kuñc: see kuñcita
(nt.) = saṅkoca Ja iii.57 (mukha˚); Dhp-a iii.270; Dhtp 809.
to contract Ja i.228; Dhs-a 324.
Caus. of sankucati
see sankhepa.
a shell conch; mother-of-pearl; a chank, commonly used as a trumpet DN i.79; DN ii.297 = MN i.58; AN ii.117; AN iv.199; Vv 8110; Ja i.72; Ja ii.110; Ja vi.465, Ja vi.580; Mil 21 (dhamma˚) Dhp-a i.18. Combined with paṇava (small drum) Vism 408; Ja vi.21; or with bheri (large drum) Mil 21; Vism 408.
-ūpama like a shell, i.e. white Ja v.396, cp. vi.572 -kuṭṭhin a kind of leper; whose body becomes as white as mother-of-pearl Dhp-a i.194, Dhp-a i.195. -thāla mother ofpearl (shell-) plate Vism 126 (sudhota˚), 255. -dhama a trumpeter DN i.259 = MN ii.19; MN ii.207 = SN iv.322 -dhamaka a conch blower, trumpeter Ja i.284; Ja vi.7 -nābhi a kind of shell Vin i.203; Vin ii.117. -patta motherof-pearl Dhp-a i.387. -muṇḍika the shell-tonsure, a kind of torture MN i.87; AN i.47; AN ii.122. -mutta mother-ofpearl Ja v.380 (C expls as “shell-jewel & pearl-jewel”) vi.211, 230. -likhita polished like mother-of-pearl bright, perfect DN i.63, DN i.250; SN ii.219; AN v.204; Vin i.181 Pp 57; DN-a i.181; Dhp-a iv.195. See also under likhita & cp. Franke,; Wiener Zeitschrift 1893, 357. -vaṇṇa pearl-white Ja iii.477; MN i.58 = AN iii.324. -sadda the sound of a chank AN ii.186; Vism 408; Dhs 621. -silā “shell-stone,” a precious stone, mother-of-pearl (? Ud 54; Ja iv.85; Pv ii.64. Frequent in BSk., e.g. Avs i.184, Avs i.201, Avs i.205; Divy 291.
cp. Vedic śankha; Gr. κόγξος shell, measure of capacity, & κόξλος; Lat. congius a measure
a water plant (combd with sevāla ) Mil 35. See detail under paṇṇaka 2.
etym.?
1. put together, compound; conditioned, produced by a combination of causes, “created,” brought about as effect of actions in former births SN ii.26; SN iii.56; Vin ii.284; Iti 37, Iti 88; Ja ii.38; Ne 14; Dhs 1085; Dhs-a 47. As nt. that which is produced from a cause, i.e. the saṅkhāras SN i.112; AN i.83, AN i.152; Ne 22. asaṅkhata not put together, not proceeding from a cause Dhs 983 (so read for sankhata), 1086; Ep. of nibbāna “the Unconditioned” (& therefore unproductive of further life AN i.152; SN iv.359 sq.; Kv 317 sq.; Pv iii.710 (= laddhanāma amataṃ Pv-a 207); Mil 270; Dhs 583 (see trsln ibid.), 1439. The discernment of higher jhāna- states as saṅkhata is a preliminary to the attainment of Arahantship MN iii.244. Cp. abhi˚; visankhita; visankhāra
2. cooked, dressed Mvu 32, Mvu 39.
3. embellished Mvu 22, Mvu 29.
-lakkhaṇa properties of the sankhata, i.e. production decay and change AN i.152; Vv-a 29.
pp. of sankharoti; Sk. saṃskṛta
(f.) cookery MN i.448.
cp. Sk. saṃskṛti
destruction, consumption, loss, end Vin i.42; DN ii.283; MN i.152; SN i.2, SN i.124; SN iv.391; Iti 38; Dhp 282 (= vināsa Dhp-a iii.421), 331; Ja ii.52 Ja v.465; Mil 205, Mil 304.
saṃ + khaya
to put together, prepare, work Pv-a 287. a-saṅkhārāna SN i.126. Ger. saṅkharitvā SN ii.269 (v.l. sankhāditvā, as is read at id. p. Vin ii.201). Cp abhi˚ ■ pp. saṅkhata.
saṃ + kṛ;
(f.) a chain Thig 509. aṭṭhi˚; a chain of bones, skeleton AN iii.97. As ˚kaṅkalā at Thig 488.
cp. Sk. śṛnkhalā
(f.) a chain SN i.76; Ja iii.168; Ja vi.3; Nd ii.304iii; Mil 149, Mil 279; Dhp-a iv.54; Pv-a 152 Sometimes saṅkhalika (esp. in composition), e.g. Ja iii.125 (˚bandhana); vi.3; Mil 279 ■ aṭṭhi˚; a chain of bones, a skeleton [cp. BSk. asthi-sankhalikā Mvu i.21] DN ii.296 = MN i.58; Vin iii.105; Ja i.433; Pv ii.1211 Dhp-a iii.479 ■ deva˚; a magic chain Ja ii.128; Ja v.92.
fr. sankhalā
(f.) & Saṅkhyā (f.) 1. enumeration, calculation, estimating DN ii.277; MN i.109; Mil 59 Mil 2. number Dāvs i.25.
3. denomination, definition word, name (cp. on term K.S. i.321) SN iii.71 sq.; SN iv.376 sq.; Nd ii.617 (= uddesa gaṇanā paññatti); Dhs 1306; Mil 25 ■ saṅkhaṃ gacchati to be styled, called or defined; to be put into words DN i.199, DN i.201; Vin ii.239; MN i.190, MN i.487; AN i.68, AN i.244 = AN ii.113; Pp 42; Ne 66 sq. Vism 212, Vism 225, Vism 235, Vism 294 (khy); Snp-a 167 (khy); Dhs-a 11 (khy). saṅkhaṃ gata (cp. sankhāta) is called DN-a i.41 (uyyānaṃ Ambalaṭṭhikā t’eva s. g.). saṅkhaṃ na upeti (nopeti) cannot be called by a name, does not count cannot be defined Iti 54; Snp 209, Snp 749, Snp 911, Snp 1074; Nd i.327; Nd ii.617.
fr. saṃ + khyā
agreed on, reckoned; (-˚) so-called, named DN i.163 (akusala˚ dhammā); iii.65 133 = Vin iii.46 (theyya˚ what is called theft); DN-a i.313 (the sambodhi, by which is meant that of the three higher stages); Dhs-a 378 (khandha-ttaya˚ kāya, cp. Expos. ii.485); Pv-a 40 (medha˚ paññā), 56 (hattha˚ pāṇi), 131 (pariccāga˚ atidāna), 163 (caraṇa˚ guṇa).
-dhamma one who has examined or recognized the dhamma (“they who have mastered well the truth of things” K.S. ii.36), an Ep. of the arahant SN ii.47; SN iv.210; Snp 70 (˚dhammo, with expln Nd ii.618b: “vuccati ñāṇaṃ” etc.; “sankhāta-dh. = ñāta-dhammo,” of the paccekabuddha), 1038 (˚dhammā = vuccanti arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd ii.618a), Dhp 70 (T. sankhata˚, but Dhp-a ii.63 sankhāta˚).
pp. of sankhāyati
to masticate Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269 (reads ˚kharitvā); AN iii.304 sq.; Ja i.507 ■ pp ˚khādita.
saṃ + khādati
chewed, masticated Kp-a 56, Kp-a 257; Vb-a 241 (where Vism 257 reads ˚khāyita ).
pp. of sankhādati
(nt.) & Saṅkhyāna (nt.) calculation, counting DN i.11; MN i.85; DN-a i.95 Dhtp 613 (khy).
fr. saṃ + khyā, cp. sankhā
(nt.) a strong leash Thag-a 292 (where Thig 509 reads saṅkhalā ).
?
a calculator SN iv.376.
fr. saṃ + khyā
& Saṅkhāti 1. to appear Ja v.203 (˚āti).
2. to calculate Snp p.126 (inf. ˚khātuṃ); Dhp 196. ger. saṅkhāya having considered, discriminately carefully, with open mind DN ii.227; DN iii.224 (paṭisevati etc.: with ref. to the 4 apassenāni); SN i.182; Snp 209, Snp 391 Snp 749, Snp 1048 (= jānitvā etc. Nd ii.619); Nd i.327; Dhp 267 (= ñāṇena Dhp-a iii.393); Iti 54. saṅkhā pi deliberately MN i.105 sq.
saṃ + khyā
= sankhādita; Vism 257.
one of the most difficult terms in Buddhist metaphysics, in which the blending of the subjective-objective view of the world and of happening peculiar to the East, is so complete, that it is almost impossible for Occidental terminology to get at the root of its meaning in a translation. We can only convey an idea of its import by representing several sides of its application, without attempting to give a “word” as a def. trsln ■ An exhaustive discussion of the term is given by Franke in his Dīgha translation (pp. 307 sq. esp. 311 sq.); see also the analysis in Cpd. 273–276 ■ Lit “preparation, get up”; appld: coefficient (of consciousness as well as of physical life, cp. viññāṇa), constituent constituent potentiality; (pl.) synergies, cause-combination, as in SN iii.87; discussed, B. Psy., p. 50 sq. (cp. Dhs-a 156, where paraphrased in defn of sa-saṅkhāra with “ussāha, payoga, upāya, paccaya-gahaṇa” ); composition aggregate. 1. Aggregate of the conditions or essential properties for a given process or result-e.g. (i.) the sum of the conditions or properties making up or resulting in life or existence; the essentials or “element” of anything (-˚), e.g. āyusaṅkhāra, life-element DN ii.106; SN ii.266; Pv-a 210; bhavasankhāra, jīvitasaṅkhāra DN ii.99, DN ii.107. (ii.) Essential conditions, antecedents or synergy (co-ordinated activity), mental coefficients requisite for act, speech, thought: kāya˚, vacī˚ citta˚, or mano˚, described respectively as “respiration,” “attention and consideration,” “percepts and feelings,” “because these are (respectively) bound up with,” or “precede” those MN i.301 (cp. 56); SN iv.293 Kv 395 (cp. trsln 227); Vism 530 sq.; Dhs-a 8; Vb-a 142 sq.
2. One of the five khandhas, or constitutional elements of physical life (see khandha), comprising all the citta-sampayutta-cetasikā dhammā-i.e. the mental concomitants, or adjuncts which come, or tend to come, into consciousness at the uprising of a citta or unit of cognition Dhs 1 (cp. MN iii.25). As thus classified, the saṅkhāra’s form the mental factor corresponding to the bodily aggregate or rūpakkhandha, and are in contrast to the three khandhas which represent a single mental function only. But just as kāya stands for both body and action, so do the concrete mental syntheses called saṅkhārā tend to take on the implication of synergies, of purposive intellection, connoted by the term abhisaṅkhāra, q.v ■ e.g. MN iii.99, where saṅkhārā are a purposive, aspiring state of mind to induce a specific rebirth; SN ii.82, where puññaṃ opuññaṃ, āṇeñjaṃ s. abhisankharoti, is, in DN iii.217 & Vb 135, catalogued as the three classes of abhisankhāra SN ii.39, SN ii.360; AN ii.157, where s. is tantamount to sañcetanā; Mil 61, where s., as khandha, is replaced by cetanā (purposive conception). Thus, too, the ss. in the Paṭiccasamuppāda formula are considered as the aggregate of mental conditions which, under the law of kamma, bring about the inception of the paṭisandhiviññāṇa, or first stirring of mental life in a newly begun individual. Lists of the psychologically, or logically distinguishable factors making up the composite saṅkhārakkhandha, with constants and variants, are given for each class of citta in Dhs 62, etc. (N.B ■ Read cetanā for vedanā, § 338. Phassa and cetanā are the two constant factors in the s-kkhandha. These lists may be compared with the later elaboration of the saṅkhāra-elements given at Vism 462 sq.
3. saṅkhārā (pl.) in popular meaning In the famous formula (and in many other connections as e.g. sabbe saṅkhārā ) “aniccā vata sankhārā uppādavaya-dhammino” (D ii.157; SN i.6, SN i.158, SN i.200; SN ii.193 Thag 1159; Ja i.392, cp. Vism 527), which is rendered by Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren, p 385 e.g. ) as “O, transient are our life’s experiences! Their nature ‘tis to rise and pass away,” we have the use of s. in quite a general popular sense of “life, physical or material life”; and sabbe saṅkhārā means “everything, all physical and visible life, all creation.” Taken with caution the term “creation” may be applied as t.t. in the Paṭiccasamuppāda, when we regard avijjā as creating, i.e. producing by spontaneous causality the saṅkhāras, and saṅkhārā as “natura genita atque genitura” (the latter with ref. to the foll. viññāṇa). If we render it by “formations” (cp. Oldenberg’s “Gestaltungen,” Buddha 71920, p. 254), we imply the mental “constitutional element as well as the physical, although the latter in customary materialistic popular philosophy is the predominant factor (cp. the discrepancies of “life eternal and “life is extinct” in one & the same European term) None of the “links” in the Paṭicca-samuppāda meant to the people that which it meant or was supposed to mean in the subtle and schematic philosophy (dhammā duddasā nipuṇā!) of the dogmatists ■ Thus saṅkhārā are in the widest sense the “world of phenomena” (cp below ˚loka), all things which have been made up by pre-existing causes ■ At Pv-a 71 we find saṅkhārā in lit. meaning as “things” (preparations) in defn of ye keci (bhogā) “whatever.” The sabbe s. at SN ii.178 (trsln “all the things of this world”) denote all 5 aggregates exhausting all conditioned things; cp. Kv 226 (trsln “things”); Mvu iv.66 (: the material and transitory world); Dhp 154 (vi-sankhāragataṃ cittaṃ = mind divested of all material things); Dhs-a 304 (trsln “kamma activities,” in connection avijjā-paccaya-s˚); Cpd. 211 n. 3 ■ The defn of saṅkhārā at Vism 526 (as result of avijjā & cause of viññāṇa in the P ■ S.) is: sankhataṃ abhisankharontī ti sankhārā. Api ca: avijjā-paccayā sankhārā sankhāra-saddena āgata-sankhārā ti duvidhā sankhārā; etc. with further def. of the 4 sankhāras. 4. Var. passages for sankhāra in general: DN ii.213 DN iii.221 sq., MN ii.223 (imassa dukkha-nidānassa sankhāraṃ padahato sankhāra-ppadhānā virāgo hoti); SN iii.69 (ekanta-dukkhā sankhārā); iv.216 sq. (sankhārāṇaṃ khaya-dhammatā; id. with vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha etc.); Snp 731 (yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti sabbaṃ sankhāra-paccayā; sankhārānaṃ nirodhena n’atthi dukkhassa sambhavo); Vism 453, Vism 462 sq. (the 51) 529 sq.; Dhp-a iii.264, Dhp-a iii.379; Vb-a 134 (4 fold), 149 (3 fold), 192 (āyūhanā); Pv-a 41 (bhijjana-dhammā). Of passages dealing with the sankhāras as aniccā vayadhammā, anattā, dukkhā etc. the foll. may be mentioned: Vin i.13; SN i.200; SN iii.24; SN iv.216, SN iv.259 SN v.56, SN v.345; MN iii.64, MN iii.108; AN i.286; AN ii.150 sq.; AN iii.83 AN iii.143; AN iv.13, AN iv.100; Iti 38; Dhp 277, Dhp 383; Pts i.37, Pts i.132 Pts ii.48; Pts ii.109 sq.; Nd ii.444, Nd ii.450; also Nd ii.p. 259 (s. v saṅkhārā ).
-upekkhā equanimity among “things” Vism 161 Vism 162. -ūpasama allayment of the constituents of life Dhp 368, Dhp 381; cp. Dhp-a iv.108. -khandha the aggregate of (mental) coefficients DN iii.233; Kv 578; Tikp 61; Dhs-a 345; Vb-a 20, Vb-a 42. -dukkha the evil of material life, constitutional or inherent ill Vb-a 93 (in the classification of the sevenfold sukkha). -paccayā (viññāṇaṃ conditioned by the synergies (is vital consciousness), the second linkage in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.) Vism 577; Vb-a 152 sq. -padhāna concentration on the sankhāras MN ii.223. -majjhattatā = ˚upekkhā Vb-a 283. -loka the material world, the world of formation (or phenomena), creation, loka “per se,” as contrasted to satta-loka, the world of (morally responsible beings, loka “per hominem” Vism 205; Vb-a 456; Snp-a 442.
fr. saṃ + kṛ; not Vedic, but as saṃskāra Epic & Class. Sk. meaning “preparation” and “sacrament, also in philosophical literature “former impression, disposition ” cp. vāsanā
(adj.) having sankhāras AN ii.214 = Dhs 1003.
fr. sankhāra
1. concise, brief Mil 227; Dhs-a 344; instr. saṅkhittena in short, concisely (opp vitthārena) Vin i.10; DN ii.305; SN v.421; Pp 41 Cp. BSk. sankṣiptena Divy 37 etc.
2. concentrated attentive DN i.80 (which at Vism 410 however is expld as “thīna-middh’ ânugata”); SN ii.122; SN v.263; DN ii.299; MN i.59.
3. contracted, thin, slender: ˚majjhā of slender waist Ja v.155 ■ Cp. abhi˚.
pp. of sankhipati
1. to collect, heap together Mvu 1, Mvu 31.
2. to withdraw, put off Dāvs iv.35. 3. to concentrate Ja i.82.
4. to abridge, shorten. pp. saṅkhitta.
saṃ + khipati
(adj.) quick Ja vi.323. Sankhiya-dhamma
saṃ + khippa
form of talk, the trend of talk DN i.2; DN-a i.43. Cp. saṅkhyā.
to be shaken, to be agitated, to stir Ja i.446 (ger. ˚khubhitvā); Dhp-a ii.43, Dhp-a ii.57; aor ˚khubhi Pv-a 93 ■ pp. saṅkhubhita ■ Caus. saṅkhobheti to shake, stir up, agitate Ja i.119, Ja i.350; Ja ii.119.
saṃ + khubbati
shaken, stirred Ja iii.443.
pp. of sankhubhati
1. abridgment, abstract, condensed account (opp. vitthāra ), e.g. Vism 532, Vism 479; Dhp i.125 Kp-a 183; Dhs-a 344; Snp-a 150, Snp-a 160, Snp-a 314; Vb-a 47 Cp. ati˚.
2. the sum of, quintessence of; instr. ˚ena (adv.) by way of, as if, e.g. rāja˚ as if he were king DN-a i.246; bhūmi-ghara˚ in the shape of an earth house DN-a i.260.
3. group, heaping up, amassing, collection pabbata-saṅkhepe in a mountain glen (lit. in the midst of a group of mountains) DN i.84; AN iii.396. bhava˚ amassing of existences Ja i.165 sq., 366, 463; ii.137. 4. aṭavi˚; at AN i.178; AN iii.66 is probably a wrong reading for ˚saṅkopa “inroad of savage tribes.”
saṃ + khepa
(adj.) calculable; only neg. a˚; incalculable SN v.400; AN iii.366; Pv-a 212 -˚kāra acting with a set purpose Snp 351 ■ As grd. of saṅkharoti: see upa˚.
grd. of sankhāyati
(nt.) a hermitage, the residence of Thera Āyupāla Mil 19, Mil 22 etc.
shaking, commotion, upsetting, disturbance Ja i.64; Sdhp 471.
san + khobha
see sankhubhati.
cleaving, clinging, attachment, bond SN i.25, SN i.117 sq.; AN iii.311; AN iv.289; Dhp 170 Dhp 342, etc.; Snp 61, Snp 212, Snp 386, Snp 390, Snp 475, etc.; Dhs 1059; Dhs-a 363; Ja iii.201; the five sangas are rāga, dosa moha, māna, and diṭṭhi, Thag. 633 = Dhp. 370; Dhp-a iv.187; seven sangas, It. 94; Nd i.91, Nd i.432; Nd ii.620.
-ātiga one who has overcome attachment, free from attachment, an Arahant MN i.386; SN i.3, SN i.23; SN iv.158; Iti 58; Snp 250, Snp 473, Snp 621; Dhp-a iv.159.
fr. sañj: see sajjati1
to come together, to meet with; ger. ˚gamma Iti 123; & ˚gantva Snp 290 ■ pp saṅgata.
saṃ + gacchati
(adj.) [sa + angaṇa) sinful Snp 279. Cp. sāngaṇa.
(f.) communication, association, society Vin i.45; AN iii.256; Ja i.106.
-ārāma delighting in society DN ii.78; MN iii.110 Vb-a 474. -ārāmatā delight in company DN ii.78; MN iii.110; AN iii.116, AN iii.293 sq., 310, 422. -rata fond of society DN ii.78; Snp 54; cp. sangaṇike rata Thag 84 -vihāra (sangaṇika˚) living in society AN iii.104; AN iv.342.
saṃ + gaṇa + ikā, cp. BSk. sangaṇikā Mvu ii.355; Divy 464
(adj.) showing kindness, helping Vv-a 59 (˚sīla).
fr. saṃ + grah
1. to comprise Pv-a 80, Pv-a 117; Snp-a 200 (ger. ˚gahetvā), 347 (˚gaṇhitvā).
2. to collect Mvu 10, Mvu 24.
3. to contain, include Mil 40.
4. to compile, abridge Mvu 37, Mvu 244.
5. to take up; to treat kindly, sympathize with, favour, help, protect Vin i.50; Ja ii.6; Ja iv.132; Ja v.426 (aor. ˚gaṇhi), 438 (to favour with one’s love), 510; Mil 234; Kp-a 160. aor. saṅgahesi Mvu 38, Mvu 31; fut. ˚gahissati Ja vi.392 ger. ˚gahetvā Mvu 37, Mvu 244; grd. ˚gahetabba Vin i.50 ppr. Pass. ˚gayhamāna Dhs-a 18 ■ pp. saṅgahita. Caus. II. saṅgaṇhāpeti: see pari˚ (e.g. Ja vi.328).
saṃ + gaṇhāti
1. come together, met Snp 807, Snp 1102 (= samāgata samohita sannipātita Nd ii.621); nt saṅgataṃ association Dhp 207.
2. compact, tightly fastened or closed, well-joined Vv 642 (= nibbivara Vv-a 275).
pp. of sangacchati
(f.) 1. meeting, intercourse Ja iv.98; Ja v.78, Ja v.483. In defn of yajati (= service?) at Dhtp 62 & Dhtm 79.
2. union, combination MN i.111; SN ii.72; SN iv.32 sq., 68 sq.; Vb 138 (= Vb-a 188). 3. accidental occurrence DN i.53; DN-a i.161.
fr. sangacchati
kalyāṇa˚, pāpa˚, united with, MN ii.222, MN ii.227.
adj.
1. meeting, intercourse, association Snp 681; Ja ii.42; Ja iii.488; Ja v.483.
2. sexual intercourse MN i.407; Ja iv.106.
fr. saṃ + gam
1. a promise, agreement Ja iv.105, Ja iv.111, Ja iv.473; Ja v.25, Ja v.479 saṅgaraṃ karoti to make a compact Vin i.247; Ja iv.105 Ja v.479.
2. (also nt.) a fight MN iii.187 = Ne 149; SN v.109.
fr. saṃ + gṛ1 to sing, proclaim, cp. gāyati & gīta
1. collecting, gathering, accumulation Vin i.253; Mvu 35, Mvu 28.
2. comprising collection, inclusion, classification Kv 335 sq. (˚kathā) cp. Kvu. trsln 388 sq.; Vism 191, Vism 368 (eka˚); ˚ṃ gacchati to be comprised, included, or classified Snp-a 7, Snp-a 24, Snp-a 291
3. inclusion, i.e. constitution of consciousness, phase Mil 40.
4. recension, collection of the Scriptures Mvu 4, Mvu 61; Mvu 5, Mvu 95; Mvu 38, Mvu 44; DN-a i.131.
5. (appld) kind disposition, kindliness, sympathy, friendliness, help assistance, protection, favour DN iii.245; Snp 262, Snp 263; AN i.92; Ja i.86 sq.; Ja iii.471; Ja vi.574; DN-a i.318; Vv-a 63 Vv-a 64; Pv-a 196 (˚ṃ karoti). The 4 saṅgaha-vatthūni or objects (characteristics) of sympathy are: dāna, peyyavajja atthacariyā, samānattatā, or liberality, kindly speech, a life of usefulness (Rh. D. at Dial. iii.145 sagacious conduct; 223: justice), impartiality (? better as state of equality, i.e. sensus communis or feeling of common good). The BSk. equivalents (as sangrahavastūni) are dāna, priyavākya, tathārthacaryā, samānasukha-duḥkatā Mvu i.3; and d., p., arthakriyā samānārthatā (= samāna + artha + tā) Lal 30 Cp. Divy 95, Divy 124, Divy 264. The P. refs. are DN iii.152, DN iii.232; AN ii.32, AN ii.248; AN iv.219, AN iv.364; Ja v.330; Snp-a 236, Snp-a 240. See also Kern, Toev. ii.67 s. v.
fr. saṃ + grah
(nt.) restraining, hindrance, bond Iti 73 (both reading & meaning very doubtful).;
fr. saṃ + grah
(adj.) firm, well-supported Ja v.484.
fr. sangaṇhāti
(& ˚gahīta) 1. comprised, included Mil 40 (eka˚); Pv-a 80.
2. collected Mvu 10, Mvu 24.
3. grouped Kv 335 sq.
4. restrained Snp 388 (˚attabhāva); Snp-a 291 (˚atta).
5. kindly disposed Vv 116 = Pv iv.160 (˚attabhāva = paresaṃ sangaṇha-sīla Vv-a 59, i.e. of sympathetic nature).
pp. of sangaṇhāti
a fight, battle DN i.46; DN ii.285; MN i.86, MN i.253; SN i.98; SN iv.308 sq.; AN i.106; AN ii.116; AN iii.94; Vin i.6; Iti 75; Snp 440 Nd ii.199; Pp 68; Ja i.358; Ja ii.11; Mil 332; Vism 401 Cp. vijita˚.
-āvacara whose sphere is the battle, quite at home on the battlefield Ja ii.94, Ja ii.95; Vin v.163 sq., 183 (here said fig. of the bhikkhu) ■ ji (sangāma-j-uttama) victorious in battle Dhp 103 (cp. Dhp-a ii.227 = sangāma-sīsa-yodha) -bheri battle drum Dhp-a iii.298; Dhp-a iv.25. -yodha a warrior Ja i.358.
fr. saṃ + *gam: see grāma; lit. “collection”
to fight to come into conflict with Vin ii.195; Vin iii.108; Iti 75; Ja ii.11, Ja ii.212. aor. ˚gāmesi Ja v.417, Ja v.420 (C. = samāgami cp. sangacchati).
Denom. fr. sangāma; given as special root saṅgām˚; at Dhtp 605 with defn “yuddha”
to chant, proclaim (cp. sangara), to rehearse, to establish the text of the B. scriptures Vin ii.285; DN-a i.25 (Buddha-vacanaṃ) ■ pp. saṅgīta.
saṃ + gāyati
(adj.) connected with the proclamation; dhamma˚-therā the Elders gathered in the council for proclaiming the Doctrine Ja v.56.
fr. sangāyati
(adj.-n.) 1. collecting, collection, Mvu 10, Mvu 24.
2. restraining, self-restraint AN ii.142.
fr. saṃ + grah
(adj.-n.) 1. compiling, collection, making a recension Ja i.1; Mil 369; Vv-a 169 (dhamma˚)
2. treating kindly, compassionate, kind (cp. sangaha 5) AN iv.90; Ja i.203; Ja iii.262.
3. (m.) a charioteer DN ii.268; Ja i.203; Ja ii.257; Ja iv.63.
fr. sangāha
(adj.) 1. comprising, including Ja i.160; Vism 6; DN-a i.94.
2. holding together MN i.322 = AN iii.10.
3. comprehensive, concise Ja ii.236.
= last
sung; uttered, proclaimed, established as the text Vin ii.290; Ja i.1; DN-a i.25 (of the Canon, said to have been rehearsed in seven months)-(nt.) a song, chant, chorus DN ii.138; Ja vi.529.
pp. of sangāyati
(f.) 1. a song, chorus, music Ja i.32 (dibba˚); vi.528 (of birds).
2. proclamation (cp. sangara), rehearsal, general convocation of the Buddhist clergy in order to settle questions of doctrine and to fix the text of the Scriptures. The first Council is alleged to have been held at Rājagaha, Vin ii.284 sq.; Dpvs iv.; Mvu iii.; DN-a i.2 sq.; Snp-a 67, Snp-a 483. The second Council at Vesāli Vin ii.294 sq.; Dpvs iv.27 sq.; Mvu iv.; the third at Pāṭaliputta, Dpvs vii.34 sq.; Mvu v.268 sq. A Council of heretics, the so-called Mahāsaṅgīti, is mentioned Dpvs v.31 sq. 3. text rehearsed, recension Vin ii.290; DN-a i.17; Mil 175 (dhamma˚); text, formula Vin i.95; Vin ii.274, Vin ii.278 On the question of the Councils see especially Franke J.P.T.S. 1908, 1 sq.
-kāra editor of a redaction of the Holy Scriptures Snp-a 42 sq., 292, 394, 413 sq., 504 and passim; Pv-a 49 Pv-a 70, etc. -kāraka id Ja i.345 -kāla the time of the redaction of the Pāli Canon, or of (one of them, probably the last) the Council Tikp 241; Snp-a 580; Vv-a 270 -pariyāya the discourse on the Holy Text DN iii.271 (Rh. D. “scheme of chanting together”).
fr. saṃgāyati; BSk. sangīti Divy 61
(f.) a cake Vin ii.17; Dhp-a ii.75; cp sankulikā AN iii.78.
either = Sk. śaṣkulikā, cp, sakkhali 2, or fr. saguḷa = sanguḷa
to guard; to keep, preserve; to hold on to (acc.) Ja iv.351 (dhanaṃ).
saṃ + gopeti
1. multitude, assemblage Mil 403 (kāka˚); Ja i.52 (sakuṇa˚); Snp 589 (ñāti˚); 680 (deva˚) DN iii.23 (miga˚); Vv 55 (accharā˚ = samūha Vv-a 37) bhikkhu˚; an assembly of Buddhist priests AN i.56, etc. DN i.1, etc.; SN i.236; Sum i.230, 280; Vin i.16; Vin ii.147 bhikkhunī˚; an assembly of nuns SN v.360; Vin i.140 sāvaka˚; an assembly of disciples AN i.208; DN ii.93; SN i.220; Pv-a 195, etc.; samaṇa˚; an assembly of ascetics Snp 550.
2. the Order, the priesthood, the clergy, the Buddhist church AN i.68, AN i.123, etc.; DN i.2, etc.; iii.102 126, 193, 246; SN iv.270 sq.; Snp 227, etc.; Ja ii.147, etc. Dhs 1004; Iti 11, Iti 12, Iti 88; Vin i.102, Vin i.326; Vin ii.164, etc. 3. a larger assemblage, a community AN ii.55 = Sv.400; MN i.231 (cp. gaṇa) ■ On the formula Buddha, Dhamma Sangha see dhamma C 2.
-ānussati meditation on the Order (a kammaṭṭhāna DN iii.250, DN iii.280; AN i.30; Ja i.97. -ārāma a residence for members of the Order Ja i.94; Vb-a 13. -kamma an act or ceremony performed by a chapter of bhikkhus assembled in solemn conclave Vin i.123 (cp. i.53, 143 & expl;n at S.B.E. xxii.7); iii.38 sq.; Ja i.341. -gata gone into the sangha, joining the community MN i.469. -thera senior of the congregation Vin ii.212, Vin ii.303. -bhatta food given to the community of bhikkhus Vin i.58; Vin ii.109 Vin ii.212. -bhinna schismatic Vin v.216. -bheda causing dissension among the Order Vin i.150; Vin ii.180 sq. AN ii.239 sq.; Iti 11; Tikp 167, 171; Ja vi.129; Vb-a 425 sq. -bhedaka causing dissension or divisions schismatic Vin i.89, Vin i.136, Vin i.168; Iti 11. -māmaka devoted to the Sangha Dhp-a i.206. -rāji [ = rāji2 dissension in the Order Vin i.339; Vin ii.203 = Vb-a 428; Vin iv.37.
fr. saṃ + hṛ; lit. “comprising.” The quâsi pop. etym. at Vv-a 233 is “diṭṭhi-sīla-sāmaññena sanghāṭabhāvena sangha”
to rub together, to rub against Vin ii.315 (Bdhgh).
saṃ + ghaṃsati
1. struck, sounded, resounding with (-˚) Ja v.9 (v.l. ṭṭ); Mil 2.
2. pierced together, pegged together constructed Mil 161 (nāvā nānā-dāru˚).
saṃ + ghaṭita, for ˚ghaṭṭita, pp. of ghaṭṭeti
(adj.) knocking against, offending, provoking, making angry Ja vi.295.
fr. saṃ + ghaṭṭ;
(?) bangle Snp 48 (˚yanta ): thus Nd ii.reading for ˚māna (ppr. med. of sanghaṭṭeti).
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) 1. rubbing or striking together, close contact, impact SN iv.215 SN v.212; Ja vi.65; Vism 112; DN-a i.256 (anguli˚). 2. bracelet (?) Snp-a 96 (on Snp 48).
fr. sanghaṭṭeti
1. to knock against Vin ii.208.
2. to sound, to ring Mvu 21, Mvu 29 (˚aghaṭṭayi).
3 to knock together, to rub against each other Ja iv.98 (aṃsena aṃsaṃ samaghaṭṭayimha); Dāvs iii.87.
4. to provoke by scoffing, to make angry Ja vi.295 (paraṃ asanghaṭṭento, C. on asanghaṭṭa); Vv-a 139 (pres. pass ˚ghaṭṭiyati) ■ pp. saṅghaṭ(ṭ)ita.
saṃ + ghaṭṭeti
= saghara one’s own house Ja v.222.
sa4 + ghara
(nt.) accumulation Ja iii.319 (dhana˚).
= saṃharaṇa
1. to bring together, collect, accumulate Ja iii.261; Ja iv.36 (dhanaṃ), 371; v.383. 2. to crush, to pound Ja i.493.
= saṃharati
1. a raft Ja ii.20, Ja ii.332 (nāvā˚) iii.362 (id.), 371. Mil 376. dāru˚; (= nāvā˚) Ja v.194 Ja v.195.
2. junction, union Vv-a 233.
3. collection aggregate Ja iv.15 (upāhana˚); Thag 519 (papañca˚) Freq. as aṭṭhi˚; (cp. sankhalā etc.) a string of bones, i.e. a skeleton Thag 570; Dhp-a iii.112; Ja v.256.
4. a weft, tangle, mass (almost = “robe,” i.e. sanghāṭī), in taṇhā˚-paṭimukka MN i.271; vāda˚-paṭimukka MN i.383 (Neumann “defeat”); diṭṭhi˚-paṭimukka Mil 390. 5. a post, in piṭṭha˚; door-post, lintel Vin ii.120.
fr. saṃ + ghaṭeti, lit. “binding together”; on etym. see Kern, Toev. ii.68
(adj.) wearing a sanghāṭī MN i.281.
fr. sanghāṭī
(f.) one of the three robes of a Buddhist Vin i.46 Vin i.289; Vin ii.78, Vin ii.135, Vin ii.213; DN i.70; DN ii.65; MN i.281; MN ii.45; SN i.175; AN ii.104, AN ii.106 sq., 210; iv.169 sq.; v.123; Pv iv.146; Vb-a 359 (˚cīvara); Pv-a 43.
-cāra wandering about in a sanghāṭī, having deposited the cīvara Vin iv.281. -vāsin dressed in a s. Snp 456.
fr. sanghaṭeti; cp. BSk. sanghāṭī Divy 154, Divy 159, Divy 494
(f.) a loin-cloth Vin iv.339 sq.
1. striking, killing, murder Vin i.137; DN i.141; DN ii.354; MN i.78; AN ii.42 sq.
2. knocking together (cp. sanghaṭṭeti), snapping of the fingers (acchara˚) AN i.34, AN i.38; Ja vi.64.
3. accumulation aggregate, multitude Pv-a 206 (aṭṭhi˚ mass of bones, for the usual ˚sanghāṭa); Ne 28.
4. Name of one of the 8 principle purgatories Ja v.266, Ja v.270.
saṃ + ghāta
(adj.) holding or binding together MN i.322 (+ agga-sangāhika); AN iii.10 (id.); Vin i.70 (“the decisive moment” Vin. Texts i.190).
fr. sanghāta or sanghāṭa
requiring suspension from the Order; a class of offences which can be decided only by a formal sangha-kamma Vin ii.38 sq.; Vin iii.112, Vin iii.186 Vin iv.110 sq., 225 (where explained); AN ii.242; Vism 22; Dhp-a iii.5.
unexplained as regards etym.; Geiger, P.Gr. § 383, after S. Lévi, = sangh’âtisesa; but atisesa does not occur in Pāli
(adj.) belonging to, or connected with the Order Vin i.250.
fr. sangha
(adj.) having a crowd (of followers), the head of an order DN i.47, DN i.116; SN i.68; Mil 4; DN-a i.143 ■ saṅghāsaṅghī (pl.) in crowds, with crowds (redupl. cpd.!), with gaṇi-bhūtā “crowd upon crowd at DN i.112, DN i.128; DN ii.317; DN-a i.280.
fr. sangha
(adj.) 1. resounding (with) Ja vi.60, Ja vi.277 (turiya-tāḷita˚); Mvu 15, Mvu 196; Mvu 29, Mvu 25 (turiya˚); Sdhp 298.
2. proclaimed, announced Pv-a 73.
saṃ + ghuṭṭha
(conj.) if indeed Vin i.88; see sace.
(nt.) one’s own mind or heart DN ii.120; Dhp 183, Dhp 327 = Mil 379.
sa4 + citta
(adj.) of the same mind Ja v.360.
sa2 + citta
(adj.) endowed with mind, intelligent Dhs-a 295.
sa3 + citta + ka
(conj.) if DN i.8, DN i.51; Vin i.7; Dhp 134; Ja i.311 ■ sace… noce if… if not Ja vi.365.
sa2 + ce; cp. sacāca
(adj.) animate, conscious, rational Ja i.74; Mvu 38, Mvu 97.
sa3 + cetana
(adj.) attentive, thoughtful AN i.254 (= citta-sampanna C.).
sa3 + cetasa
(adj.) real, true DN i.182; MN ii.169; MN iii.207; Dhp 408; nt. saccaṃ truly, verily, certainly Mil 120; saccaṃ kira is it really true? DN i.113; Vin i.45, Vin i.60; Ja i.107; saccato truly SN iii.112 ■ (nt. as noun) saccaṃ the truth AN ii.25, AN ii.115 (parama˚); Dhp 393; also: a solemn asseveration Mvu 25, Mvu 18. Sacce patiṭṭhāya keeping to fact, MN i.376 ■ pl. (cattāri) saccāni the (four) truths MN ii.199; AN ii.41, AN ii.176; Snp 883 sq.; Dhs 358 ■ The 4 ariya-saccāni are the truth about dukkha, dukkhasamudaya dukkha-nirodha, and dukkha-nirodha-gāminipaṭipadā. Thus e.g. at Vin i.230; DN ii.304 sq.; DN iii.277; AN i.175 sq.; Vism 494 sq.; Vb-a 116 sq., 141 sq. A shortened statement as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha magga is freq. found, e.g. Vin i.16; see under dukkha B. 1 ■ See also ariyasacca & asacca ■ iminā saccena; in consequence of this truth, i.e. if this be true Ja i.294.
-avhaya deserving his name, Cp. of the Buddha Snp 1133, cp. Nd ii.624. -ādhitthāna determined on truth MN iii.245; DN iii.229. -ānupaṭṭi realization of truth MN ii.173 sq. -ānubodha awakening to truth MN ii.171 sq -ānurakkhaṇa warding of truth, MN ii.176. -ābhinivesa inclination to dogmatize, one of the kāya-ganthas SN v.59; Dhs 1139; Dhs-a 377. -ābhisamaya comprehension of the truth Snp 758; Thag 338; Thag-a 239. -kāra ratification pledge, payment in advance as guarantee Ja i.121. -kiriyā a solemn declaration, a declaration on oath Ja i.214, Ja i.294 Ja iv.31, Ja iv.142; Ja v.94; Mil 120; Mvu 18, Mvu 39 (see trsln p. 125 on term). -ñāṇa knowledge of the truth Vism 510; Dhp-a iv.152. -nāma doing justice to one’s name, bearing a true name, Ep. of the Buddha AN iii.346; AN iv.285, AN iv.289; Pv-a 231. -nikkhama truthful Snp 542. -paṭivedha penetration of the truth Pts ii.57. -vaṅka a certain kind of fish Ja v.405 (the Copenhagen MS. has [sa]sacca-vanka which has been given by Fausböll as sata-vanka) -vacana (1) veracity MN i.403; Dhp i.160; (2) = saccakiriyā Kp-a 169, Kp-a 180. -vajja truthfulness DN i.53; SN iv.349; Ja iv.320. -vācā id. AN ii.228; AN iii.244; Ja i.201 -vādin truthful, speaking the truth DN i.4; DN iii.170; AN ii.209; AN iv.249, AN iv.389; SN i.66; Snp 59; Dhp 217; Mil 120 Nd ii.623; Dhp-a iii.288. -vivaṭṭa revelation of truth Pts i.11. -sandha truthful, reliable DN i.4; DN iii.170; AN ii.209; AN iv.249; DN-a i.73. -sammatā popular truth maxim SN iv.230.
cp. Sk. satya
at AN iv.346 = Vin ii.19 is probably misreading or an old misspelling for sajjāpeti fr. sajjeti, the confusion sac: saj being frequent. Meaning: to undertake fulfil, realize.
(adj.) real, true Mil 226 (the same passage at Pts i.174 & Nd;1 458 spells sacchika). saccik’ aṭṭha truth, reality, the highest truth Kv 1 sq. Dhs-a 4 (nearly = paramaṭṭha); Kp-a 102. Kern in a phantastic interpretation (Toev. ii.49, 50) takes it as sacci-kaṭṭha (= Sk. sāci-kṛṣta) “pulled sideways,” i.e. “misunderstood.”
cp. Sk. satyaka
in fut. saccessati at AN iv.343 is most likely an old mistake for ghaṭṭessati is the same passage at AN iii.343 the meaning is “to touch,” or to approach, disturb It is hardly = saśc “to accompany.”
(adj.) self-willed, headstrong Ja i.421; as sacchandin ibid.
sa4 + chanda
(mūlāni) at AN iii.371 (opp. ummūla) means “roots taking to the soil again.” It is doubtful whether it belongs to chavi “skin.”
seen with one’s own eyes, realized experienced DN i.250; SN v.422 = Vin i.11; Dhp-a iv.117.
pp. of sacchikaroti cp. BSk. sākṣātkṛtaḥ Avs i.210
(adj.) (able) to be realized SN iii.223 sq.; DN iii.230 = AN ii.182 (in four ways by kāya, sati, cakkhu, paññā).
grd: of sacchikaroti
to see with one’s eyes, to realize, to experience for oneself. Pres. ˚karoti DN i.229; SN iv.337; SN v.11, SN v.49 ■ Fut. ˚karissati SN v.10; MN ii.201 (as sacchi vā k.) ■ Aor. sacch’ākāsi SN iv.63; Snp-a 166-Grd. ˚kātabba Vin i.11; SN v.422; & ˚karaṇīya (q.v.)-pp. sacchikata.
cp. Sk. sākṣāt kṛ; the P. form being *saccha˚ (= sa3 + akṣ, as in akkhi), with change of ˚a to ˚i before kṛ. See also sakkhiṃ karoti
(f.) realization, experiencing oath, ordeal, confirmation DN i.100 (etc.) DN i.100; DN iii.255; SN iv.254; AN i.22; AN ii.148; AN iii.101 AN iv.332 sq.; Snp 267; Vism 696 sq.; Dhs 296; Dhp-a iv.63.
fr. sacchikaroti
to let loose, send forth dismiss, give up Snp 386, Snp 390; Ja i.359; Ja v.218 (imper sajāhi); vi.185, 205 ■ infin. saṭṭhuṃ (q.v.); pp. saṭṭha (see vissaṭṭha) ■ Caus. sajjeti (q.v.) ■ For sajj˚ (Caus.) we find sañj˚; in sañjitar.
sṛj, cp. Av. hərəƶaiti to let loose; Sk. sarga pouring out, sṛṣṭi emanation, creation
to embrace DN ii.266 (imper. saja). udakaṃ sajati to embrace the water, poet. for “to descend into the water Ja iv.448 (T. sajāti); vi.198 (C. = abhisiñcati), 205 (C. attano upari sajati [i.e. sajati1] abbhukkirati). On C. readings cp. Kern, Toev ii.51.
svaj; Dhtp 74, Dhtp 549 = ajjana (?) or = sajati1?
a kinsman Ja iv.11 (read ˚parijanaṃ).
sa4 + jana
(adj.-n.) watery, wet; nt. water.
-da giving water, bringing rain (of wind) Vism 10 -dhara holding water, i, e. a cloud Vv-a 223.
sa3 + jala
(f.) (being of) the same class or caste Vin i.87; Ja ii.108 (˚putta).
sa2 + jāti
see sañjitar.
(adj.) endowed with life Mvu 11, Mvu 13.
sa3 + jīva
a minister Ja vi.307, Ja vi.318 (= amacca C.).
for saciva?
(nt.) at SN i.44 is metric spelling for sa-jīvana “same livelihood,” in phrase kiṃsu kamme s. “what is (of) the same livelihood in work, i.e. occupation?” The form is the same as jīvāna at Ja iii.353. Taken wrongly as gen. pl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln (K.S. i.63): “who in their work is mate to sons of men?” following Bdhgh’s wrong interpretation (see K.S. i.321) as “kammena saha jīvantānan; kammadutiyakā nāma honti.”
sa2 = saṃ, + jīvana
(adj.) flaming, ablaze, aglow DN i.95; Vin i.25; AN i.141; Ja i.232; DN-a i.264.
sa3 + joti + bhūta; same BSk., e.g. Mvu i.5
(adj.) prepared, ready Ja i.98 Ja ii.325; Ja iii.271; Mil 351; Pv-a 156, Pv-a 256. Of a bow furnished with a bow-string AN iii.75.
grd. formation fr. sajj = sañj Caus.; cp. the exact likeness of Ger. “fertig”
(adj.) = sajja; Ja iv.45 (gamana˚ ready for going, “fertig”).
1. to cling, to, to be attached SN i.38, SN i.111 (aor. 2 sg. sajjittho); ii.228; AN ii.165; Ja i.376 (id. asajjittho); Snp 522, Snp 536. ppr. (a)sajjamāna (un)-attached Snp 28, Snp 466; Ja iii.352.
2. to hesitate Ja i.376 (asajjitvā without hesitation) ■ pp. satta1 ■ Cp. abhi˚ & vi˚;.
Pass. of sañj or saj to hang. Cp. sanga
(nt.) decking, equipping Thag-a 241.
fr. sṛj
a good man Mil 321.
sat(= sant) + jana
(f.) seat, couch Pv ii.128 (expln at Pv-a 157 doubtful).
orig. grd. of sad
issued, sent off; offered, prepared SN ii.186; Vin iii.137 (here in sense of “happy” sukhita ); Mil 244 (of an arrow: sent); Mvu 17, Mvu 7 Mvu 27, Mvu 16 ■ nt. offering (= upakkhaṭa) DN-a i.294; Pv-a 107.
pp. of sajjeti
(adv.) 1. instantly, speedily, quickly Dāvs iii.37.
2. newly recently Dhp 71 (˚khīra; cp. Dhp-a ii.67). Sajjukam = sajju
Sk. sadyaḥ, sa + dyaḥ, lit. one the same day
: 1. quickly Mvu 7, Mvu 6; Mvu 14, Mvu 62.
2. newly Vv-a 197.
resin Vin i.202.
cp. Sk. sarjarasa; see Geiger, P.Gr. § 192
to send out, prepare, give, equip; to fit up, decorate: dānaṃ to give a donation Dhp-a ii.88; pātheyyaṃ to prepare provisions Ja iii.343; gehe to construct houses Ja i.18; nāṭakāni to arrange ballets Ja i.59; yaññaṃ to set up a sacrifice Ja i.336; dhammasabhaṃ to equip a hall for a religious meeting Ja iii.342; nagaraṃ to decorate the town Ja v.212 paṇṇākāraṃ to send a present Ja iii.10 ■ Caus. II sajjāpeti to cause to be given or prepared Ja i.446; Pv-a 81. Cp. vissajjeti.
Caus. of sṛj (sajati1), Sk. sarjayati
(nt.) silver DN ii.351 (v.l.); SN v.92 (v.l.); AN iii.16. Cp. sajjhu.
-kāra silversmith Mil 331.
cp. Sk. sādhya
repetition, rehearsal study DN iii.241; Vin i.133; Vin ii.194; AN iv.136; SN v.121; Ja i.116, Ja i.436; Ja ii.48; Mil 12, Kp-a 24; Vb-a 250 sq. ˚ṃ karoti to study DN iii.241; AN iii.22; Ja v.54.
cp. Sk. svādhyāya, sva + adhyāya, i.e. sa4 + ajjhaya, cp. ajjhayana & ajjhāyaka
to rehearse, to repeat (aloud or silently), to study Ja i.435; Ja ii.273; Ja iii.216; Ja iv.64; Mil 10 ■ ppr. ˚āyanto Dhp-a iii.347; ger. sajjhāya SN i.202,; sajjhāyitvā Ja iv.477; Ja v.450; Kp-a 97 ■ Caus. sajjhāpeti to cause to learn, to teach Ja iii.28 (of teacher, with adhīyati, of pupil). Caus. II. sajjhāyāpeti id. Mil 10.
Denom. fr. sajjhāya, cp. BSk. svādhyāyita Avs i.287; Avs ii.23
(nt.) silver DN ii.351; SN v.92; Ja vi.48; Mvu 19, Mvu 4; Mvu 27, Mvu 26; Mvu 28, Mvu 33.
cp. sajjha
accumulation, quantity Snp 697; Iti 17 (aṭṭhi˚); Mil 220.
fr. saṃ + ci
passage, way, medium DN-a i.289.
fr. saṃ + car
(nt.) wandering about, meeting meeting-place Ja i.163; Ja iv.335; Mil 359. a˚; impassable Mil 217.
fr. saṃ + car
1. to go about, to wander DN i.83.
2. to meet, unite, come together Ja ii.36 (of the noose of a snare).
3. to move, to rock Ja i.265.
4. to pass Ja i.491 ■ Caus. ˚cāreti to cause to move about Mil 377, Mil 385 ■ Caus. II. ˚carāpeti to cause to go, to emit Ja i.164; to make one’s mind dwell on Vism 187.
saṃ + carati
(nt.) 1. going backwards & forwards, acting as go-between Vin iii.137.
2. intercourse Mil 266.
fr. saṃ + caritar
1. going, movement, passing through Sdhp 244.
2. passages entrance, road Ja i.409; Ja ii.70 Ja ii.122.
saṃ + cāra
to be unsteady or agitated Mil 117. Caus. ˚cāleti to shake Vin iii.127; Ja v.434 ■ pp ˚calita.
saṃ + calati
shaken Mil 224 (a˚).
pp. of sañcalati
(adv.) discriminately, purposely, with intention Vin ii.76; Vin iii.71, Vin iii.112; Vin iv.149, Vin iv.290; DN iii.133; Kv 593; Mil 380; Pv-a 103.
ger. of saṃ + cinteti; ch. BSk. sañcintya Divy 494
accumulated, filled (with) Ja vi.249; Thag-a 282; Sdhp 319.
pp. of sañcināti
(& saṃcayati) to accumulate; ppr. ˚cayanto Mvu 21, Mvu 4; aor. cini˚; Pv-a 202 (puññaṃ), 279 (pl. ˚cinimha) ■ pp. sañcita ■ Cp. abhi˚.
saṃ + cināti
(& ˚ceteti ) to think, find out, plan, devise means DN ii.180, DN ii.245 (aor. samacintesuṃ); Thag 1103 (Pot. ˚cintaye); Ja iii.438 (aor. samacetayi).
saṃ + cinteti
crushed, shattered Bv ii.170 = Ja i.26.
saṃ + cuṇṇa
crushed Ja ii.41; Mil 188; Vism 259.
pp. of sañcuṇṇeti
to crush Ja ii.210, Ja ii.387 (aor. ˚esi); iii.175 (Pot. ˚eyya), 176 (ger. ˚etvā) ■ pp ˚cuṇṇita.
saṃ + cuṇṇeti
(f.) thought, cogitation, perception, intention AN ii.159 (atta˚, para˚); DN iii.231 (id.) SN ii.11, SN ii.40, SN ii.99 (mano˚); ii.39 sq., 247; iii.60, 227 sq. Vb 285; Dhs 70, Dhs 126. Sixfold (i.e. the 6 fold sensory perception, rūpa˚, sadda˚, etc.): DN ii.309; DN iii.244; Pts i.136. Threefold (viz. kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚): Vism 341, Vism 530; Vb-a 144, Vb-a 145.
saṃ + cetanā
(adj.) intentional Vin iii.112; MN iii.207; AN v.292 sq.; a˚ MN i.377.
fr. sañcetanā
(nt.) reflection Dhs 5, Dhs 72.
see ˚
instigated, excited Pv-a 5, Pv-a 68, Pv-a 171, Pv-a 213; Thag-a 207.
saṃ + codita
to move, to stir; a misunderstood term. Found in aor. samacopi (so read for T. samadhosi & v.l. samañcopi) mañcake “he stirred fr. his bed” SN iii.120, SN iii.125; and sañcopa (pret.) Ja v.340 (v.l. for T. sañcesuṃ āsanā; C. expls as “caliṃsu”).
cp. Sk. copati, as α ̔́πας in Mhbh. We should expect copeti in Pāli, fr. cup to stir
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) touching, handling Vin iii.121 (ā); iv.214 (a) (= parāmasanan nāma ito c’ ito ca).
saṃ + copana
covered (with = -˚) MN i.124; Thag 13; Ja i.201; Snp-a 91 (˚patta full of leaves; puppha of flowers). Often in cpd. paduma˚; covered with lotuses (of ponds) Pv ii.120; ii.122; Vv 441; Ja i.222 Ja v.337.
saṃ + channa1
, MN ii.217, MN ii.259.
covered Pv-a 157.
pp. of sañchādeti
to cut, destroy MN iii.275 (Pot. ˚chindeyya); AN ii.33 = SN iii.85 (ger. ˚chinditvā) ■ pp sañchinna.
saṃ + chindati
Vin i.255 (of the kaṭhina, with samaṇḍalīkata “hemmed”). Also in cpd. ˚patta “with leaves destroyed” is Nd ii.reading at Snp 44 (where T. ed. & Snp-a 91 read; saṃsīna ), as well as at Snp 64 (in similar context, where T. ed. reads sañchinna ). The latter passage is expld (Nd ii.625) as “bahula-pattapalāsa saṇḍa-cchāya,” i.e. having thick & dense foliage The same meaning is attached to; sañchinna-patta at Vv-a 288 (with v.l. saṃsīna !), thus evidently in sense of sañchanna. The C. on Snp 64 (viz. Snp-a 117) takes it as sañchanna in introductory story.
pp. of sañchindati
to joke, to jest DN i.91; AN iv.55, AN iv.343; DN-a i.256.
saṃ + jagghati
is the P. correspondent of sajati1 (sṛj), but Sk. sañj = sajjati (to hang on, cling), which at Dhtp 67 Dhtp 397 def;d as saṅga. The Dhtp (64) & Dhtm (82) take; sañj in all meanings of āliṅgana (= sajati2), vissagga (= sajati1), & nimmāna (= sajjeti).
to be born; only in Caus. ˚janeti to cause, produce; realize Pp 16; Sdhp 564 (ger. ˚janayitvāna) ■ pp. sañjāta. See also Pass. saṃjāyati.
saṃ + janati
(nt.) producing; f. ˚ī progenetrix (identical with taṇhā) Dhs 1059; Dhs-a 363.
one who produces SN i.191; SN iii.66.
n. ag. fr. sañjaneti
in ˚ṃ karoti is not clear in dern & meaning; perhaps “to tease, abuse,” see D i.189 (˚riyaṃ); AN i.187; SN ii.282. Probably fr. bhṛ; (Intensive jarbhṛta Vedic! as *jarbhari. See on dern Konow, J.P.T.S. 1909, 42 Kern, Toev. ii.69. The C. on SN ii.282 (K.S. ii.203 expls as “sambharitaṃ nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ akaṃsu upari vijjhiṃsū ti,” i.e. continually touching (or nudging) (phuṭa = phuṭṭha or phoṭita).
having become, produced, arisen Dhs 1035 (+ bhūta & other syn.). ˚-full of, grown into being in a state of Snp 53 (˚khandha = susaṇṭhita˚ Snp-a 103); Vv-a 312, Vv-a 318 (˚gārava full of respect), 324 (˚pasāda).
pp. of sañjanati
(adj.) of the same origin (con-gener) Ja iv.134. Cp. sajāti.
sa2 + jāta
(f.) birth, origin; outcome; produce DN i.227; DN ii.305.
saṃ + jāti
a grove, wood Ja v.417, Ja v.421 (v.l. sañcāriya).
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) knowing, perceiving, recognition Mil 61; DN-a i.211; characteristic, that by which one is distinguished Dhs-a 321. As f. at Dhs 4; Dhs-a 110, Dhs-a 140 (trslnExpos. 185: “the act of perceiving by noting”).
fr. sañjānāti
1. to recognize, perceive, know, to be aware of Vin iii.112; DN ii.12; MN i.111, MN i.473; SN iii.87; AN v.46, AN v.60, AN v.63; Ja i.135; Ja iv.194; Thag-a 110.
2. to think to suppose Ja ii.98.
3. to call, name, nickname DN i.93; Ja i.148 ■ Aor. sañjāni DN-a i.261; ger. saññāya Ja i.187 Ja ii.98; saññatvā MN i.1; and sañjānitvā Ja i.352 ■ Caus saññāpeti (q.v.) ■ pp. saññāta.
saṃ + jānāti
(nt.) the state of having perceived Dhs 4.
fr. sañjānita, pp. Caus. of sañjānāti
at SN iii.66 read sañjanetā.
to be born or produced DN i.220; Ja ii.97; aor. sañjāyi DN ii.209; Vin i.32 ppr. ˚jāyamāna Ja v.384.
saṃ + jāyati, cp. sañjanati
decayed Ja i.503 (v.l.).
saṃ + jiṇṇa
creator, one who assigns to each his station DN i.18, DN i.221; MN i.327; DN-a i.111 (v.l. sajjitar, cp. Sk. sraṣṭar).
n. ag. fr. sajati1, cp. sañjati
(adj.) reviving Thag-a 181 (Ap. v. 23: putta˚).
fr. saṃ + jīv
(f.) evening; only in cpds. ˚ātapa evening sun Vv-a 4, Vv-a 12; ˚ghana evening cloud Thag-a 146 (Ap. v.44); Dāvs v.60.
cp. Sk. sandhyā
is frequent spelling for saṃy˚; (in saṃyojana = saññojana e.g. ), q.v.
(nt.) the state of being a saññā, perceptibility SN iii.87.
abstr. formation fr. saññā
induced, talked over Snp 303, Snp 308
pp. of saññāpeti
(f.) 1. informing, convincing AN i.75; SN i.199; Vin ii.98, Vin ii.199, Vin ii.307; Ja iii.402.
2. appeasing pacification MN i.320.
fr. saññāpeti
(f.) (pl. saññāyo and saññā-e.g. MN i.108) 1. sense, consciousness, perception, being the third khandha Vin i.13; MN i.300; SN iii.3 sq.; Dhs 40 Dhs 58, Dhs 61, Dhs 113; Vb-a 42.
2. sense, perception, discernment recognition, assimilation of sensations, awareness MN i.293; AN iii.443 (nibbāna˚); SN iii.87; Snp 732 (saññāya uparodhanā dukkhakkhayo hoti; expld as “kāmasaññā” Snp-a); Mil 61; Dhs 4; Dhs-a 110, Dhs-a 200 (rūpa perception of material qualities).
3. consciousness DN i.180 sq.; MN i.108; Vb 369 (nānatta˚ c. of diversity see nānatta); Mil 159; Ja iv.391; is previous to ñāṇa DN i.185; a constituent part of nāma SN ii.3, cp. Snp 779 according to later teaching differs from viññāṇa and paññā only as a child’s perceiving differs from (a) an adult’s, (b) an expert’s Vism 436 sq.; Dhs. trsln 7 n 2, 17 n. 2 ■ nevasaññā-nāsaññā neither consciousness nor unconsciousness DN iii.224, DN iii.262 sq.; MN i.41, MN i.160 MN ii.255; MN iii.28, MN iii.44; Pts i.36; Dhs 268, Dhs 582, Dhs 1417; Kv 202 Ne 26, Ne 29; Vism 571.
4. conception, idea, notion DN i.28; DN iii.289 (cp. Dial. iii.263: “concept rather than percept”); MN iii.104; SN i.107; Snp 802, Snp 841; Ja i.368 (ambaphala saññāya in the notion or imagining of mango fruit); Vism 112 (rūpa˚ & aṭṭhika˚).; saññaṃ karoti to imagine, to think Ja ii.71; to take notice, to mind Ja i.117.
5. sign, gesture token, mark Ja i.287 Ja ii.18; paṇṇa˚ a mark of leaves Ja i.153; rajjusaññā a rope used as a mark, a guiding rope, Ja i.287; rukkha-saññaṃ pabbata-saññaṃ karonto, using trees and hills as guiding marks Ja iv.91; saññaṃ dadāti to give the sign (with the whip, for the horse to start) Ja vi.302.
6 saññā is twofold, paṭighasamphassajā and adhivacanasamphassajā i.e. sense impression and recognition (impression of something similar, “association by similarity,” as when a seen person calls up some one we know), Vb 6; Vb-a 19 sq.; threefold, rūpasaññā, paṭighasaññā and nānattasaññā AN ii.184; SN ii.211; cp. Snp 535 or kāma˚, vyāpāda˚, vihiṃsā˚ (as nānatta˚) Vb 369, cp Vb-a 499; fivefold (pañca vimutti-paripācaniyā saññā) anicca˚, anicce dukkha˚, dukkhe anatta˚, pahāna˚ virāga˚ DN iii.243, cp. AN iii.334; there are six perceptions of rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba, and dhamma DN ii.309; SN iii.60; the sevenfold perception, anicca-anatta-, asubha-, ādīnava-, pahāna-, virāga-, and nirodha-saññā, DN ii.79; cp. AN iii.79; the tenfold perception asubha-, maraṇa-, āhāre paṭikkūla-, sabbaloke anabhirata-, anicca-, anicce dukkha-, dukkhe anatta-pahāna-, virāga-, nirodha-saññā AN v.105; the one perception āhāre paṭikkūlasaññā, Cpd. 21.
7. See further (unclassified refs.): DN i.180; DN ii.277 (papañca˚) iii.33, 223; SN ii.143; AN ii.17; AN iv.312; Nd i.193, Nd i.207 Ne 27; Vism 111, Vism 437, Vism 461 sq. (in detail); Vb-a 20 (pañca-dvārikā), 34; Vv-a 110; and on term Cpd. 40 42.
-gata perceptible, the world of sense MN i.38. -bhava conscious existence Vism 572; Vb-a 183. -maya arūpin MN i.410 (opp. manomaya = rūpin). -vedayitanirodha cessation of consciousness and sensation MN i.160 MN i.301; MN iii.45; AN i.41; Kv 202; SN ii.212. -viratta free from consciousness, an Arahant, Snp 847. -vimokkha emancipation from consciousness Snp 1071 sq.; Mil 159 = Vin v.116.
fr. saṃ + jñā
(nt.) 1. perception, knowledge Vv-a 110.
2. token, mark Ja iv.301; DN-a i.46; Vism 244.
3. monument Mvu 19, Mvu 35.
Vedic sañjñāna
skilled MN i.396.
pp. of sañjānāti
(nt.) convincing Ja v.462.
fr. saññāpeti
1. to make known, to teach Ja i.344; Mil 45.
2. to remonstrate with, gain over convince DN i.236; MN i.397; AN i.75; SN iv.313; Vin i.10 Vin ii.197; Mil 316.
3. to appease, conciliate Ja i.479; Pv-a 16. Also saññapeti Ja i.26, etc ■ inf. saññattuṃ Snp 597 ■ pp. saññatta ■ At Ja i.408 read saññāpāpetvā (instead of saññaṃ pāpetvā), or simply saññāpetvā like the parallel text at Ud 17.
Caus. of sañjānāti
(adj.) having perception AN ii.215 = Dhs 1003.
fr. saññā
so-called, named, so-to-speak Mvu 7, Mvu 45; Pv-a 135; Sdhp 72, Sdhp 461. See also aya under niraya.
= saññāta; pp. of sañjānāti
(adj.) (f. saññinī) conscious, being aware of (-˚), perceiving, having perception DN i.31, DN i.180; DN iii.49 DN iii.111, DN iii.140, DN iii.260; SN i.62; AN ii.34, AN ii.48, AN ii.50; AN iii.35; AN iv.427; Dhp 253; Nd i.97, Nd i.138 ■ ālokasaññin having a clear perception DN i.71; AN ii.211; AN v.207; Sum i.211; nānatta conscious of diversity AN iv.39 sq.; paṭhavīsaññin conscious of the earth (kasiṇa), in samādhi AN v.8 sq. paṭhavisaññiniyo (fem. plur.), having a worldly mind DN ii.139; asubhasaññin perceiving the corruption of the world Iti 93; vihiṃsasaññin conscious of the trouble Vin i.7; nevasaññī-nâsaññin neither conscious nor unconscious DN iii.111; AN ii.34; Nd i.97, Nd i.138; Iti 90; DN-a i.119. Cp. vi˚ ■ In composition saññi˚; e.g. ˚gabbha animate production DN i.54; DN-a i.163.
fr. saññā
name of a school maintaining conscious existence after death DN i.31; DN-a i.119; Mhbv 110.
saññin + vāda
a fall, a heap of things fallen; only in cpd. paṇṇa˚; a heap of fallen leaves MN i.21 (= paṇṇa-kacavara MN-a i.120); Ja ii.271.
most likely = Sk. śada (fall), fr. śad to fall; Kern Toev. s. v. equals it to Sk. sūta (or sṛta) of sṛ; (or su ) to run (to impel), as in ussaṭa and visaṭa. The Dhtm (789) gives a root saṭ; in meaning of “visaraṇa,” i.e. profusion, diffusion (cp. visaṭa)
dismissed; in cpd. -˚esana one who has abandoned all longing or research DN iii.269 (cp Dial. iii.247 “has utterly given up quests”); AN ii.41 (so read for saṭh˚; ) ■ saṭṭha at SN iii.84 is to be read seṭṭha, and at SN iv.298 saṭha.
pp. of sajati1
(num. ord.) sixty DN i.45; DN ii.261; Snp 538; Dhp-a iii.412 (ekūna˚). It is found mostly in the same application as cha (group-number) e.g. at Ja i.64 (˚turiya-sahassāni); Vv-a 92 (id.); Ja i.87 (˚yojana); vi.512 (˚sahassa); Dhp-a i.8, Dhp-a i.17, Dhp-a i.26, Dhp-a i.131 (˚sakaṭa). -˚hāyana 60 years old (of elephant) MN i.229; Ja ii.343.
cp. Sk. ṣaṣṭi: see cha
at Ja vi.185 (taṃ asakkhi saṭṭhuṃ) is inf. of sajati1 (sṛj = Sk. sraṣṭuṃ) to dismiss, let loose. The form has caused trouble, since the Com. explains it with gaṇhituṃ “to take.” This has induced Kern (Toev. s. v. to see in it a very old (even pre-Vedic!) form with *sāḍhuṃ as original. Evidently he derives it fr. sah (Epic Sk. soḍhuṃ!), as he trsls it as “to master, overpower ”
(adj.) crafty, treacherous, fraudulent DN ii.258; DN iii.246; MN i.32, MN i.153; SN iv.299; AN ii.41; AN iii.35 AN v.157; Dhp 252; Vin ii.89; Nd i.395; Mil 250; Dāvs ii.88; Dhp-a iii.375; Dhtp 100 (= keṭave) ■ f. saṭhī Pv ii.34. See also kerāṭika, samaya˚, sāṭheyya.
cp. Sk. śaṭha
(f.) craft, wickedness Pp 19.
abstr. fr. saṭha
(adj.) loose, inattentive Dhp 312.
Sk. śithila, which also appears as sithila, e.g. Thag 277
see saṭṭha.
(nt.) a kind of hemp DN ii.350 (v.l.); SN i.115 (do.); cp. sāṇa1 & sāṇī.
-dhovika [perhaps (Kern’s suggestion) sāṇa˚ (v.l.) visāṇa˚?] name of a particular kind of gambol of elephants in water MN i.229, MN i.375. Bdhgh at DN-a i.84 uses the obscure term sāṇa-dhovana-kīḷā to denote a trick of Caṇḍālas. But see sandhovika.
Vedic śaṇa; Gr. κάνναβις = Lat. cannabis; Ags haenep = E. hemp; Ger. hanf.
to sound, to make a noise Snp 721 (T. sanati) = Mil 414; sanate SN i.7 = SN i.203; Ja vi.507; ppr. saṇanto Snp 720 (T. n).
svan; Idg. *sṷenō = Lat. sono, Ags. swin music, swinsian to sing; Ohg. swan = swan
(adv.) softly, gradually Snp 350; Mvu 25, Mvu 84.
cp. Sk. śanaiḥ
(adv.) slowly, gently, gradually DN ii.333; MN i.120; SN i.82, SN i.203; Ja i.9, Ja i.292; Ja ii.103; Mil 117; DN-a i.197; Dhp-a i.60, Dhp-a i.389; Vv-a 36, Vv-a 178.
fr. last
a reed (used for bow-strings) MN i.429. Santhapeti & thapeti;
1. to settle, to establish AN ii.94 (cittaṃ); SN iv.263; Ja i.225; Pv-a 196–2. to call to order DN i.179 (˚āp˚).
3. to adjust, fold up Ja i.304.
Caus. of santiṭṭhati
(nt.) recreation Vism 420 sq.
fr. santiṭṭhati
see santiṭṭhati.
(nt.) 1. configuration, position; composition, nature, shape, form Vin ii.76; MN i.120 (spelt ˚nth˚); AN i.50; AN iv.190 (C. osakkana); Mil 270 Mil 316, Mil 405; Ja i.71, Ja i.291, Ja i.368; Ja ii.108; Vism 184, Vism 225, Vism 243; Dhs-a 321; DN-a i.88 (nth); Snp-a 464 (= linga). su˚; well formed Snp 28 ■ adj. (-˚) having the appearance of megha-vaṇṇa˚; Pv-a 251; chavi˚; appearance of the skin Ja i.489; vaṇṇa˚; outward semblance Ne 27; Ja i.271 sarīra˚; the (material) body Vism 193.
2. fuel Ja ii.330 = Ja iv.471.
3. (usually spelt ˚nth˚) a resting place meeting place, public place (market) (cp. Sk. sansthāna in this meaning). At SN i.201 in phrase nadī-tīresu saṇṭhāne sabhāsu rathiyāsu (i.e. at all public places) SN i.201 reads saṇṭhāne (v.l. santhāne); cp. K.S. i.256 from C.: “a resting place (vissamana-ṭṭhāne) near the city gate, when market-wares had been brought down, trsln “resting by the gates.” This stanza is quoted at Snp-a 20, where the ed. prefers reading panthāne as correct reading (v.l. saṇṭhāne). At MN i.481 (˚nth˚) SN ii.28 (2 fr. b.), it seems to be used in the sense of “end stopping, cessation” = AN iv.190 (the editions of S and A have saṇṭhāna). At Ja vi.113 it is translated by “market place,” the comp. saṇṭhāna-gata being explained by the Comm. by saṇṭhāna-mariyādaṃ gatā, but at Ja vi.360 saṇṭhāna-gata is by the English translator translated “a wealthy man” (vinicchaye ṭhito, Com.), which however, ought to be “in the court house” (cp. vinicchaya-ṭṭhāna), i.e. publicly. In both places there is also v.l. santhāna-˚.
fr. saṃ + sthā
1. established in (-˚), settled, composed Snp 330 (santi-soracca-samādhi˚); Sdhp 458 su˚; firmly or well established Snp 755; Mil 383; in a good position, well situated Dhs-a 65.
2. being composed (as), being of the nature of (-˚), ullumpanasabhāva˚; of a helping disposition DN-a i.177; Pv-a 35.
pp. of santiṭṭhati
(f.) 1. stability, firmness SN v.228; Dhs 11; Vism 206; Dhs-a 143; Sdhp 460.
2. fixing settling Mil 144.
fr. santiṭṭhati
a heap, cluster, multitude; a grove (vana˚ DN i.87; SN iii.108; Vin i.23; Ja i.134 (vana˚); satta˚ teeming with beings Iti 21 ■ Jambu˚; Name of Jambudīpa Snp 352 = Thag 822 (v.l. ˚maṇḍa, which Kern considers to be the correct reading; see Toev. ii.67) ■ saṇḍa˚cārin swarming DN i.166 = MN i.77 = AN ii.206.
dial.; Dhtm 157: gumb’ attha-m-īraṇe; cp. Sk. ṣaṇḍa
(long) pincers, tweezers AN i.210; Ja i.223; Ja iii.138; used to pull out hair MN ii.75; Vin ii.134. Sannika (sanika)
saṃ + ḍaṃsa, fr. ḍasati
an elephant-driver’s hook Ja i.445 (so read for paṇṇ˚; ).
cp. saṇi = Sk. sṛṇi
(adj.) 1. smooth, soft Vin i.202; Vin ii.151; Vv 5018 (= mudu Vv-a 213); Vism 260 = Kp-a 59 saṇhena softly Thag 460.
2. gentle, mild DN ii.259; Snp 853; Ja i.202, Ja i.376; Nd i.234; Pv-a 56, Pv-a 215. Of speech (opp. pharusa harsh) MN i.126; AN iii.196; Dhs 1343. 3. delicate, exquisite Thig 258, Thig 262, Thig 264, Thig 268. Cp pari˚.
-karaṇī “a wooden instrument for smoothing the ground, or a sort of trowel,” Abhp 1007; Ja iv.250 (loc ˚iyaṃ piṃsito); iv.4 (˚ī viya tilāni piṃsamānā); v.271 vi.114 (asani viya viravanto ˚iyaṃ viya piṃsanto); cp Kp-a 59; thus it seems to mean also a sort of instrument for oil-pressing, or a mortar.
cp. Sk. ślakṣṇa
, at Ja iii.394 (of hair growing white “saṇhakasadisā”) according to Kern, Toev. ii.69 (coarse) hempen cloth (= sāṇavāka ), as indicated by v.l. sāṇalāka. Thus a der. fr. saṇa = sāṇa. Kern compares P. tuṇhīra tūṇīra; Sk. śaṇa = śāṇaka. According to Andersen Pāli Glossary “betelnut” (= saṇha).
to brush down, smooth (kese): only as cpd. o˚; at Vin ii.107; Ja iv.219.
Caus. fr. saṇha
(num. card.) a hundred, used as nt (collect.), either-˚ or as apposition, viz. gāma-sataṃ a hundred (ship of) villages Dhp-a i.180; jaṭila-satāni 100 ascetics Vin i.24; jāti˚ DN i.13; or gāthā sataṃ 100 stanzas Dhp 102 ■ Often in sense of “many” or “innumerable,” e.g. ˚kaku, ˚raṃsi, etc.; cp. ˚satāni bahūni Ja iv.310, Ja iv.311.
-kaku having a hundred corners, epithet of a cloud AN iii.34 = SN i.100 (v.l. sattakatu) see J.P.T.S. 1891–93 p. 5. -patta the Indian crane (or woodpecker?) Ja ii.153 Ja ii.388; Mil 404. -padī a centipede AN ii.73; AN iii.101, AN iii.306 AN iv.320; AN v.290; Vin ii.110, Vin ii.148; Mil 272. -pala (Thag 97) see pala. -pāka (-tela) oil mixture, worth 100 pieces Ja iv.281; Dhp-a ii.48; Dhp-a iii.311; see also pāka. -puñña 100, i.e. innumerable merits Vism 211. -pupphā Anethum sowa, a sort of dill or fennel Ja vi.537. -porisa of the height of a hundred men, extremely high, attribute of a hell Vv 52, Vv 12 sq.; name of a hell Ja v.269. -mūlī Asparagus racemosus Abhp 585. -raṃsi “having 100 rays,” the sun Sdhp 590; Ja i.44. -rasabhojana food of 100 flavours Dhp-a iii.96 (v.l. all pass, satta˚) -vaṅka a kind of fish Abhp 672. -vallikā an under-garment arranged like a row of jewelry Vin ii.137. -sahassa one hundred thousand Ja ii.20; Mil 88; Mil 136; Dhp-a ii.86 -sahassima id. SN ii.133.
Vedic śataṃ; cp. Av. satəm, Gr. ἑ κατόν, Lat. centum; Goth. hund = hundred; Idg. *kmtóm fr. dkm̊tóm (= decem), thus ultimately the same as daśa, i.e. decad (of tens)
remembering, mindful, conscious DN i.37; DN ii.94 DN iii.49, DN iii.107, DN iii.222, DN iii.269; MN i.520 (su-ssata & dus-sata) SN iv.211; AN iii.169 (+ sampajāna), 325; iv.311; Snp 741; Dhs 163; DN-a i.211 ■ satokārin cultivator of sati Pts i.175.
pp. of sarati, of smṛ; cp. BSk. smṛta Avs i.228; Avs ii.197
(nt.) a hundred, collection of 100; Ja i.74.
cp. BSk. śataka
(adv.) a hundred times.
cp. dvi-kkhattuṃ, ti-kkhattuṃ etc.
(adj.) continual, chronic. Only in nt. satataṃ (adv.) continually AN iv.14; Iti 116; Snp 507; Mil 70; Pv ii.811 (= nirantaraṃ Pv-a 110); iii.710 (= sabbakālaṃ Pv-a 207); Pv-a 177; and as ˚-in ˚vihāra a chronic state of life, i.e. a behaviour remaining even & the same AN ii.198 = DN iii.250, DN iii.281. Cp. sātacca.
with satrā “completely” & sadā “always” to sa˚ “one”: see saṃ˚; lit. “in one (continuous stretch”
(adv.) in 100 ways, into 100 pieces DN ii.341.
sata + dhā, cp. ekadhā, dvidhā etc.
(f.) memory, recognition, consciousness, DN i.180; DN ii.292; Mil 77–80 intentness of mind, wakefulness of mind, mindfulness alertness, lucidity of mind, self-possession, conscience self-consciousness DN i.19; DN iii.31, DN iii.49, DN iii.213, DN iii.230, DN iii.270 sq. AN i.95; Dhs 14; Nd i.7; Tikp 61; Vb-a 91; Dhs-a 121; Mil 37; upaṭṭhitā sati presence of mind DN iii.252, DN iii.282 DN iii.287; SN ii.231; AN ii.6, AN ii.218; AN iii.199; AN iv.232; Iti 120 parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhāpetuṃ to surround oneself with watchfulness of mind MN iii.89; Vin i.24, satiṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetuṃ to preserve self-possession Ja i.112 Ja iv.215; kāyagatā sati intentness of mind on the body, realization of the impermanency of all things MN iii.89; AN i.43; SN i.188; Mil 248; Mil 336; muṭṭhasati forgetful, careless DN iii.252, DN iii.282; maraṇasati mindfulness as to death AN iv.317 sq.; Ja iv.216; Snp-a 54; Pv-a 61, Pv-a 66. asati not thinking of, forgetfulness Dhs-a 241; instr. asatiyā through forgetfulness, without thinking of it, not intentionally Vin ii.2892. sati (sammā˚) is one of the constituents of the 8-fold Ariyan Path (e g. AN iii.141 sq.; Vb-a 120): see magga 2.
-ādhipateyya (sat˚) dominant mindfulness AN ii.243 sq.; Iti 40. -indriya the sense, faculty, of mindfulness AN ii.149; Dhs 14. -uppāda arising, production of recollection Ja i.98; AN ii.185; MN i.124. -ullapakāyika, a class of devas SN i.16 sq. -paṭṭhāna [BSk. smṛty’upasthāna Divy 126, Divy 182, Divy 208] intent contemplation and mindfulness earnest thought, application of mindfulness there are four satipaṭṭhānas, referring to the body, the sensations, the mind, and phenomena respectively DN ii.83, DN ii.290 sq.; DN iii.101 sq., 127, 221; MN i.56, MN i.339 MN ii.11 etc.; AN ii.218; AN iii.12; AN iv.125 sq., 457 sq.; v.175; SN iii.96, SN iii.153; SN v.9, SN v.166; Dhs 358; Kv 155 (cp. Kvu trsln 104 sq.); Nd i.14, Nd i.45, Nd i.325, Nd i.340; Vism 3; Vb-a 57 Vb-a 214 sq., 417 ■ See on term e.g. Cpd. 179; and in greater detail Dial. ii.322 sq. -vinaya disciplinary proceeding under appeal to the accused monk’s own conscience Vin i.325; Vin ii.79 etc.; MN ii.247; AN i.99. -vepullappatta having attained a clear conscience Vin ii.79 -saṃvara restraint in mindfulness Vism 7; Dhs-a 351; Snp-a 8. -sampajañña mindfulness and self-possession DN i.70; AN ii.210; DN-a i.183 sq. -sambojjhaṅga (e.g. SN v.90) see (sam)bojjhanga. -sammosa loss of mindfulness or memory, lack of concentration or attention DN i.19; Vin ii.114; DN-a i.113; Pp 32; Vism 63; Mil 266.
Vedic smṛti: see etym. under sarati2
(adj.) (-˚) consisting of a hundred, belonging to a hundred; yojanasatika extending one hundred yojanas Vin ii.238; vīsaṃvassasatika of hundred and twenty years’ standing Vin ii.303.
fr. sata1
(f.) mindfulness, memory Dhs-a 405 (-˚).
abstr. formation fr. sati
(adj.) the hundredth SN ii.133; Ja i.167 (pañca˚).
superl. formn fr. sata1
(adj.) mindful, thoughtful, contemplative, pensive; nom. sg. satimā DN i.37; SN i.126; Snp 174; AN ii.35; Dhs 163; Dhp-a iv.117; Pv iv.344; satīmā (in verse) Snp 45; nt. satīmaṃ Snp 211; gen. satimato SN i.208; satīmato SN i.81; Dhp 24; nom. pl. satīmanto DN ii.120; Dhp 91; Dhp-a ii.170; gen. satīmataṃ Dhp 181; Iti 35; satimantānaṃ AN i.24 ■ See also DN iii.77, DN iii.141 DN iii.221 sq.; AN iv.4, AN iv.38, AN iv.300 sq., 457 sq.; Nd i.506; Nd ii.629.
fr. sati
(f.) 1. being Ja iii.251.
2. a good or chaste woman Abhp 237; asatī an unchaste woman Mil 122 = Ja iii.350; Ja v.418; Ja vi.310.
fr. sant, ppr. of as
(adj.) curable, pardonable Mil 192, Mil 221; Vism 425. See tekiccha.
sa3 + tekiccha
(f.) lightning Ja v.14, Ja v.203. Also as sateritā Vv 333; 644; Vv-a 161 (= vijjulatā), 277. As saderitā at Thag 260.
cp. Sk. śatahradā, śata + hrada
hanging, clinging or attached to Vin i.185; DN ii.246; Nd i.23, Nd i.24; Dhp 342; Ja i.376 Cp. āsatta1 & byāsatta;.
pp. of sañj: sajjati
1. (m.) a living being, creature, a sentient & rational beiṅg, a person; DN i.17, DN i.34, DN i.53, DN i.82 DN ii.68; AN i.35 sq., 55 sq.; SN i.135; SN v.41; Vin i.5; Mil 273 Vism 310 (defn: “rūp’ādisu khandhesu chandarāgena sattā visattā ti sattā,” thus = satta1); Ne 161; DN-a i.51, DN-a i.161; Vb-a 144 ■ naraka˚; a being in purgatory (cp. niraya˚) Vism 500.
2. (nt.) soul (= jīvita or viññāṇa) Pv i.81 (gata˚ = vigata-jīvita Pv-a 40). 3. (nt.) substance Vin i.287. nissatta non-substantial phenomenal Dhs-a 38.
-āvāsa abode of sentient beings (see nava1 2) DN iii.263 DN iii.268; AN v.53; Vism 552; Vb-a 168. -ussada (see ussada 4) teeming with life, full of people DN i.87, DN i.111 DN i.131. -loka the world of living creatures Snp-a 263, Snp-a 442 Vism 205. See also saṅkhāra-loka ■ vaṇijjā slave trade DN-a i.235 = AN iii.208 (C.: manussa-vikkaya).
cp, Vedic sattva living being, satvan “strong man, warrior,” fr. sant
cursed, sworn Ja iii.460; Ja v.445.
pp. of sapati to curse; Sk. śapta
(num.) number seven. It is a collective and concluding (serial) number its application has spread from the week of 7 days (or nights), and is based on astronomical conception (Babylon!), this science being regarded as mystic, it invests the number with a peculiar magic nimbus From time-expressions it was transferred to space, esp when originally connected with time (like satta-bhūmaka the 7-storied palace; the Vimānas with 700 towers: see vimāna 2 & 6; or the 7 great lakes: see sara3; ˚yojana 7 miles, cp. the 7 league-boots!). Extremely frequent in folklore and fairy tales (cp. 7 years of famine in Egypt, 7 days’ festivals, dragon with 7 heads, 7 ravens 7 dwarfs, 7 little goats, 7 years enchantment, etc. etc.). For time expressions see in cpds.: ˚āha, ˚māsa, ˚ratta ˚vassa. Cp. Snp 446 (vassāni); Ja ii.91 (kāyā, thick masses); DN-a i.25 (of the Buddh. Scriptures: sattahi māsehi sangītaṃ); Dhp-a ii.34 (dhanāni), 101 (mangalā) the collective expression 7 years, 7 months, 7 days at Ja v.48; the 7X70 ñāṇavatthūni SN ii.59; and the curious enumeration of heptads at DN i.54 ■ Cases: instr sattahi DN i.34; gen. sattannaṃ DN i.56; loc. sattasu DN ii.303 = MN i.61.
-aṅga a couch with 7 members (i.e. four legs, head support, foot support, side) Vin ii.149. -aṭṭha seven or eight Ja ii.101. -āgārika a “seven-houser,” one who turns back from his round, as soon as he has received alms at 7 houses DN i.166. -ālopika a “seven-mouthful, one who does not eat more than 7 bits DN i.166. -āha (nt.) seven days, a week of 7 days [cp. BSk. saptaka Divy 99] DN ii.248; Vin i.1, Vin i.139; Ja i.78; Ja ii.85; Ja iv.360 Ja v.472; Ja vi.37; Dhp-a i.109; Vv-a 63. satta˚ 7 weeks Dhp-a i.86; cp. satta-satta-divasā Ja v.443. -ussada (see ussada 2) having 7 prominences or protuberances (on the body), a sign of a Mahāpurisa DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.151 (i.e. on both hands, on both feet, on both shoulders, on the back). -guṇa sevenfold Mvu 25, Mvu 36. -jaṭa with seven plaits (of hair) Ja v.91 (of a hunter). -tanti having 7 strings, a lute Vv-a 139. -tāla (-matta) (as big as 7 palm trees Dhp-a ii.62, Dhp-a ii.100. -tiṃsa 37 (see bodhipakkhiya-dhammā). -dina a week Mvu 11, Mvu 23. -pakaraṇika mastering the 7 books of the Abhidhamma Ja i.312; Dhp-a iii.223. -patiṭṭha sevenfold firm DN ii.174; Mil 282. -padaṃ for 7 steps Ja vi.351 (Kern, Toev. s. v. “unfailing”). -bhūmaka (pāsāda) (a palace) with 7 stories Mvu 37, Mvu 11; Ja i.58; Ja iv.378; Dhp-a i.180, Dhp-a i.239 Dhp-a iv.209. -māsaṃ (for) seven months Pv-a 20. -yojanika 7 miles in extent Ja v.484. -ratana the 7 royal treasures DN i.88; Iti 15; Ja v.484. -ratta a week Ja vi.230 (dve˚ a fortnight), 304; Snp 570. -vassika 7 years old Mil 9 Mil 310; Dhp-a ii.87, Dhp-a ii.89 (sāmaṇera), 139; Pv-a 53 (Sankicca arahattaṃ patvā); Dhp-a iii.98 (kumāro arahattaṃ patto) Ja v.249. On the age of seven as that of child arahants see Mrs. Rh. D. in Brethren introd. xxx. -vīsati twenty seven Dhp-a i.4.
cp. Vedic sapta, Gr. ἑπτά; Av. hapta; Lat. septem, Goth. sibun = E. seven etc.
(adv.) seven times Vin i.3; Iti 18; sattakkhattuparamaṃ seven times at the utmost; ˚parama one who will not be reborn more than seven times SN ii.134 sq.; AN i.233, AN i.235; AN iv.381 Kv 104; Pp 15 sq.; Ne 189; Kp-a 187; Ja i.239; Dhp-a iii.61, Dhp-a iii.63.
cp. tikkhattuṃ etc.
seventy DN ii.256; Ap 118, 126 & passim. As sattari at SN ii.59; Ap 248 & passim.;
cp. Sk. saptati
(nt.) state of having existence DN i.29.
abstr. fr. satta2
(adv.) in seven pieces DN i.94; DN ii.235; Snp 783; Ja v.33, Ja v.493; Dhp-a i.17, Dhp-a i.41. Cp phalati. Sattapanni-rukkha
fr. satta4, cp. dvidhā
Name of a tree Mvu 30, Mvu 47; cp. sattapaṇṇi-guhā Name of a cave Kp-a 95.
(adj.) best, excellent Snp 356; Ja i.233.
superl. fr. sant
(num. ord.) the seventh DN i.89; Snp 103 ■ f. ˚mī Snp 437. Often in loc. ˚divase on the 7th day Snp 983; Ja i.395; Mil 15; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 74. -˚bhavika one who has reached the 7th existence (or rebirth Kv 475 (cp. trsln 2714).
fr. satta4
(num. card.) seventeen Vin i.77; Vin iv.112 (˚vaggiyā bhikkhū, group of 17).
satta4 + rasa2 = dasa
= sattati, at SN ii.59 sq.
(f.) [cp. Sk. saptalā, name of var. plants, e.g. jasmine, or many-flowered nykkanthes, Halāy. 2, 52 the plantain, and its flower Ja iv.440 (= kadali- puppha C.; so read for kandala˚); and perhaps at Thig 260 for pattali (q.v.), which is expld as kadali (-makula) at Thag-a 211.
Ja v.351. Cp. Lal 520.
a diaeretic sattva
(f.) ability, power Dhtp 508 Usually in phrase yathā satti as much as one can do according to one’s ability Cp i.106; Dhp-a i.399; or yathā sattiṃ DN i.102, or y. sattiyā Dhp-a i.92.
fr. śak, cp. Vedic śakti
(f.) 1. knife, dagger, sword AN iv.130; Ja ii.153; Vism 313 (dīgha-daṇḍa˚ with a long handle); Dhp-a i.189; Dhp-a ii.134 (tikhiṇa˚ a sharp knife). mukha˚; piercing words Ja i.341.
2. a spear, javelin SN i.13; AN ii.117; Ja i.150.
-pañjara lattice work of spears DN ii.164. -laṅghana javelin dance Ja i.430. -simbali-vana the forest of swords (in purgatory) Ja v.453. -sūla a sword stake often in simile ˚ûpamā kāmā SN i.128; AN iii.97; Vism 341 Also Name of a purgatory Ja v.143 sq.
cp. Vedic śakti, orig. identical with satti1
see tala˚.
an enemy Ja v.94 (acc. pl. sattavo); Vism 234 (˚nimmathana).
Vedic śatru
barley-meal, flour Vin ii.116 (satthu); Nd i.372; Ja iii.343 sq.; Pv iii.13; Dhs 646.
-āpaṇa baker’s shop Ja vi.365. -pasibbaka flour sack ˚bhasta id. Ja iii.346.
cp. Sk. śaktu
an enemy Ja iii.154; Mvu 32, Mvu 18.
fr. sattu1
(nt.) a weapon, sword, knife; coll. “arms” DN i.4, DN i.56; Snp 309, Snp 819 (expld as 3: kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚, referring to AN iv.42 at Nd i.151); Ja i.72, Ja i.504; Pv iii.102; Snp-a 458 (˚mukhena); Pv-a 253. Often in combn daṇḍa + sattha (cp daṇḍa 4), coll. for “arms,” Vin i.349; DN i.63; AN iv.249 Nd ii.576 ■ satthaṃ āharati to stab oneself SN i.121 SN iii.123; SN iv.57 sq.
-kamma application of the knife, incision, operation Vin i.205; Snp-a 100. -kāraka an assassin Vin iii.73 -vaṇijjā trade in arms AN iii.208. -hāraka an assassin Vin iii.73; SN iv.62.
cp. Vedic śastra, fr. śas to cut
(nt.) a science, art, lore Mil 3; Snp-a 327, Snp-a 447 ■ vāda˚; science of right belief Snp-a 540; sadda˚; grammar Snp-a 266; supina dream-telling Snp-a 564.
cp. Vedic śāstra, fr. śās to teach
a caravan DN ii.130, DN ii.339; Vin i.152, Vin i.292; Nd i.446; Dhp 123 (appa˚ with a small c.) Mil 351.
-gamanīya (magga) a caravan road Vin iv.63. -vāsa encampment DN ii.340, DN ii.344. -vāsika & ˚vāsin; caravan people Ja i.333. -vāha a caravan leader, a merchant DN ii.342; Vv 847 (cp. Vv-a 337); leader of a band teacher; used as Ep. of the Buddha SN i.192; Iti 80, Iti 108; Vin i.6. In exegesis of term Satthā at Nd i.446 = Nd ii.630 = Vism 208.
sa3 + attha; Sk. sārtha
told, taught Ja ii.298 (v.l. siṭṭha).
pp. of sāsati; śās
(adj.) able, competent Ja iii.173 (= samattha C.).
wrong for satta = śakta
breathed: see vissattha.
cp. Sk. śvasta, śvas
(nt.) a knife, scissors Vin ii.115 (daṇḍa˚, with a handle); Ja v.254 (as one of the 8 parikkhāras); Mil 282. aya˚; at Ja v.338 read ˚paṭṭaka.
-nisādana [cp. Sk. niśātana] knife-sharpening Dhp-a i.308, cp. Mil 282 ˚nisāna [ = Sk. niśāna]. -vāta a cutting pain AN i.101 = AN i.307; Ja iii.445.
fr. sattha1
(adj.) belonging to a caravan, caravan people, merchant Pv-a 274.
fr. sattha3
teacher, master ■ nom. satthā DN i.49; Snp 179; acc. satthāraṃ DN i.163; Snp 153, Snp 343; instr. satthārā DN i.163; instr. satthunā Mvu 32, Mvu 19; gen. satthu DN i.110; Iti 79; Vin i.12 gen. satthuno DN ii.128; Snp 547, Snp 573, loc. satthari Dhs 1004; nom. and acc. pl. satthāro DN i.230; AN i.277; Mil 4; gen. pl. satthārānaṃ Ja i.509 ■ See e.g. DN i.230; AN i.277; Vin i.8; Thig 387 ■ The 6 teachers (as in detail at DN i.52–59 & var. places) are Pūraṇa Kassapa, Makkhali Gosāla, Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta, Ajita-Kesakambalī.
5 teachers at Vin ii.186; AN iii.123.
3 at DN i.230; AN i.277. The Master par excellence is the Buddha DN i.110 DN ii.128; DN iii.119 sq.; AN iii.248; AN iv.120, AN iv.460; Snp 153, Snp 545 Snp 955 (see exegesis in detail at Nd i.446 = Nd ii.630), 1148 Vism 389, Vism 401, Vism 604 ■ gaṇa-satthar leader of a company Ja ii.41, Ja ii.72; satthāra-dassana sight of the Master Snp-a 49; satthu-d-anvaya successor of the M. Snp 556.
Venic śāstṛ, n. ag. fr. śās
(nt. & f.) the thigh Vin ii.161; Thag 151; Vv 8117; Ja ii.408; Ja iii.83; Ja vi.528; antarā˚ between the thighs AN ii.245.
cp. Sk. sakthi
(adj.) belonging to a caravan DN ii.344.
fr. sattha3
see sattu2; satthu˚; see satthar.
“having a teacher,” in atīta˚; whose teacher is dead DN ii.154.
belonging to the whole cpd.
a friend Ja i.365.
?
gold (lit. the colour of the Master) Vin iii.238, Vin iii.240.
satthar˚ + vaṇṇa
(adj.) including the Theras AN ii.169
sa3 + thera
the highest good, ideal DN ii.141; MN i.4; AN v.207 sq.; Dhp 166; Mvu 3, Mvu 24. It may be taken as sa4 + attha (with euphonic -d- ), i.e. one’s own good, as it is expld by Bdhgh at Dhp-a iii.160 (“sake atthe”), & adopted in trsl;n at Dial. ii.154.
sat (= sant) + attha
(adj.) always praised Ja iv.101 (= nicca-pasattha C.).
sadā + thuta
(adj.) fearful, unhappy AN ii.172; MN i.280, MN i.465 = DN iii.57 (reads dd ).
sa3 + dara
a squatting mat with a fringe Vin iv.171.
sa + dasā
a horse of good breed AN i.289.
sat(= sant) + assa
(adv.) always Snp 1041, Snp 1087, Snp 1119; Nd ii.631 (where long stereotype definition); Dhp 79; Pv ii.811 (= sabbakālaṃ yāvajīvaṃ Pv-a 110); ii.937 (= sabbakālaṃ divase divase sāyañ ca pāto ca Pv-a 127) iv.130.
-matta “always revelling,” Name of a palace Ja i.363 sq (cp. Divy 603); a class of devas DN ii.260.
fr. saṃ˚
(adj.) similar, like, equal DN ii.261; SN iii.48 sq.; AN i.125 = Pp 35; Vin i.8; Ja i.191; Dhs 116; Vism 543 = Vb-a 148. Cp. sādisa.
sa2 + disa = dṛśa
see saterita.
(adj.) together with the devas, with the deva world DN i.62; DN iii.76, DN iii.135; Snp 86; Vin i.8 Vin i.11; Dhp 44; DN-a i.174. At Ja i.14 sadevake (loc.) is used in the sense of “in the world of men & gods.”
sa3 + deva + ka
(adj.) together with his queen Mvu 33, Mvu 70.
sa3 + devī + ka
1. sound, noise DN i.79, DN i.152; iii. 102 sq., 146, 234 244 sq., 269, 281; MN iii.56, MN iii.267; AN iii.30 sq.; AN iv.91, AN iv.248; Ja i.3 (ten sounds); Snp 71; Vism 408 (var. kinds); Dhs 621 (udaka˚); Dhp-a ii.7 (udrīyana˚); defd at Vism 446 (“sota-paṭihanana-lakkhaṇa,” etc.) & at Vb-a 45 (“sappatī ti saddo, udāhariyatī ti attho”).
2. voice Ja ii.108.
3. word Vin i.11; Iti 114; Dhp-a i.15 (itthi˚) Vb-a 387 (in nirutti); Snp-a 261, Snp-a 318, Snp-a 335.
-kovida a grammarian or phonetician Snp-a 321 -dhātu element of sound Dhs 707. -naya science of grammar, etymology Kp-a 107. -bheda word analysis Vism 519 sq. -vidū a grammarian Snp-a 169. -vedhin shooting by sound Mvu 23, Mvu 85. -sattha science of words, grammar Snp-a 266. -siddhi analysis or correct formation of a word, grammatical explanation Snp-a 304 Snp-a 551.
cp. late Vedic śabda; BSk. śabda as nt. at Avs i.3
(nt.) making a noise Dhtm 401.
fr. śabd: see saddāyati
(adj.) grassy Thag 211; Ja i.87; vi. 518; Mil 286; Pv ii.1210 (= taruṇa-tiṇa Pv-a 158).
cp. Sk. śādvala
to believe, to have faith DN ii.115 DN ii.244; SN iii.225; Pv ii.83; Ja v.480; Dhp-a ii.27. ppr saddahanto DN-a i.81; Pv-a 148 (a˚), 151 (a˚), 285;; saddahāna SN i.20, SN i.214; Snp 186; Iti 112. Pot. saddheyya Ja ii.446 (= saddaheyya C.); 2nd pl. saddahetha Ja iii.192 Ja iii.3rd pl. saddheyyuṃ SN ii.255. At Ja vi.575 (Pot.) saddahe seems to be used as an exclamation in the sense of “I wonder” (cp. maññe) ■ saddahase at Pv iv.81 is to be read saddāyase (see saddāyati) ■ grd. saddhātabba Ja ii.37; Ja v.480; Pv-a 217; saddahātabba DN ii.346 saddahitabba Mil 310; saddheyya Vin iii.188; and saddhāyitabba (Caus.!) Pv-a 109. A Caus. aor. 2 sg is (mā)… saddahesi Ja vi.136140-ger. saddhāya Ja v.176 (= saddahitvā C.); inf. saddhātuṃ Ja v.445. pp. (Caus.) saddhāyita ■ Caus. II. saddahāpeti to make believe, to convince; Pot. ˚dahāpeyya Ja vi.575; Pv iv.125; fut. ˚dahāpessati Ja i.294.
Vedic śrad-dhā, only in impers. forms grd. śrad-dadhāna; pp. śrad-dhita; inf. śrad-dhā; cp. Av ƶraƶ-dā id.; Lat. cred-(d)o (cp. “creed”); Oir. cretim to believe. Fr. Idg. *kred (= cord˚ heart) + *dhe, lit. to put one’s heart on
(f.) believing, trusting, having faith Nd ii.632; Dhs 12, Dhs 25; Ne 15, Ne 19; Dhp-a i.76.
fr. sad + dhā
cp. Epic Sk. śabdayati & śabdāyati] 1. to make a sound Mil 258; Pv iv.81 (saddāyase read for saddahase); iv.161 (id.) Ud 61 (˚āyamāna noisy).
2. to call, summon (with acc.) Ja iii.288.
Denom. fr. sadda; i.e. śabd
sounded, called Sdhp 100.
pp. of śabd; cp. saddāyati
a leopard Mil 23.
cp. Sk. śārdūla
(adj.) 1. believing faithful DN i.171; SN i.43; SN ii.159 sq.; AN i.150; AN ii.164 AN ii.227 sq.; AN iii.3 sq., 34, 182; iv.38, 145, 314 sq.; v.10 sq. 124 sq.; Snp 188, Snp 371; Dh. 8; Pv i.104; iv.186; Dhp-a ii.82 ■ as(s)addha unbelieving Pv-a 42, Pv-a 54, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 243 passim (see a˚).
2. credulous Snp 853; Dhp 97.
orig. adj. of saddha2, but felt to be adj. of saddhā; cp. BSk. śrāddha Avs i.83, Avs i.383
;a funeral rite in honour of departed relatives connected with meals and gifts to the brahmins DN i.97; AN i.166; AN v.269, AN v.273; DN-a i.267; saddhaṃ pamuñcati to give up offerings, to abandon Brahmanism Vin i.7; DN ii.39; Snp 1146. The word is n. according to Abhp and AN v.269–273; loc. ˚e, DN i.97; Ja ii.360; kaṃ saddhaṃ (acc. in a gāthā), seems to be f.; Com. ib. 360 has saddhā-bhattaṃ, a funeral repast (v.l. saddha-˚) Thus it seems to be confused with saddhā.
cp. Epic Sk. & Sūtra literature śrāddha, fr. śrad-dhā
the true dhamma, the best religion, good practice, the “doctrine of the good” (so Geiger, Pali Dhamma pp. 53, 54, q.v. for detailed discussion of the term) MN i.46; SN v.172 sq.; AN i.69; AN iii.7 sq., 174 sq. 435 sq.; v.169, 317; Snp 1020; Dhp 38; Ja v.483; Dhp-a iv.95. Seven saddhammas: MN i.354, MN i.356; DN iii.252 DN iii.282; AN iv.108 sq ■ Opp. a-saddhamma (q.v.); four a˚ AN ii.47; eight: Vin ii.202.
-garu paying homage to the true religion SN i.140 -savana hearing the (preaching of the) true dhamma DN iii.227, DN iii.274; AN i.279; AN ii.245; AN iv.25 sq., 221; v.115 sq.
sad(= sant) + dhamma, cp. BSk. saddharma, e.g. Jtm 224
(f.) faith (on term cp. Geiger, Saṃyutta trsln ii.452) DN i.63; DN iii.164 sq. SN i.172 = Snp 76; SN v.196; Dhp 144; AN i.150, AN i.210; AN iii.4 sq. 352; iv.23; v.96; Dhs 12; Mil 34 sq.; Tikp 61, 166 277, 282 ■ instr. saddhāya (used as adv.) in faith, by faith in (acc. or gen.) Vin ii.289 (āyasmantānaṃ) Ja v.176 (pabbajita); Pv-a 49 (kammaphalaṃ s.); or shortened to saddhā (-pabbajita) MN i.123; AN i.24; Ja i.130. The same phrase as saddhāya pabbajita at SN i.120 is expld as “saddahitvā” by Bdhgh (see K.S. i.321), thus taking it as ger.
-ānusārin walking according to faith MN i.479; AN i.74 Pp 15; Ne 112, Ne 189. -indriya (saddh˚) the faculty i.e. the moral sense, of faith DN iii.239, DN iii.278; AN ii.149; SN v.193, SN v.377; Dhs 12, Dhs 62, Dhs 75; Ne 19. -cariyā living in faith Vism 101. -deyya a gift in faith DN i.5; Vin i.298; Vin iv.30; DN-a i.81. -vimutta emancipated through faith MN i.478; AN i.74, AN i.118 sq.; Pp 15; Ne 190 -vimutti emancipation through faith Pp 15.
cp. Vedic śraddhā: see saddahati
a believer Sdhp 39.
n. ag. fr. saddahati, i.e. sad + dhātar
(adj.) trustworthy DN ii.320; AN iv.109 (so read for ˚sika); Thig 43 Thig 69.
fr. saddhāya, ger. of saddahati
one who is trusted; nt. that which is believed, faith Pv ii.85 May be misspelling for saddhāyika.
pp. of saddahati; BSk. śraddhayita
(& saddhi˚) (adv.) together; as prep. (following the noun): in company with (instr.) DN i.31; Vin i.32 Vin iii.188 (expld as “ekato”); Ja i.189; Ja ii.273; DN-a i.35; Mil 23; also with loc. DN-a i.15; or gen. Vin ii.154; Ja i.420. As adv. saddhiṃ agamāsi Ja i.154, cp. saddhiṃkīḷita Ja ii.20.
-cara companion Snp 45, Snp 46 (= ekato cara Nd ii.633) Dhp 328. -vihārika (saddhi˚) co-resident, fellow-bhikkhu pupil Vin i.45 sq.; AN iii.70; Ja i.182, Ja i.224; Vism 94; Dhp-a ii.19. -vihārin id. AN ii.239; AN iii.69; Ja i.1; f ˚vihārinī Vin iv.291.
in form = Vedic sadhrīṃ “towards one aim,” but in meaning = Vedic sadhryak (opp. viṣvak, cp. P. visuṃ) “together.” Cp. also Vedic saṃyak = P. sammā. The BSk. is sārdhaṃ, e.g. s vihārin Avs ii.139
(nt.) only in neg. a˚; (q.v.).
abstr. fr. *śraddhya
(adj). wealthy, rich DN i.73; Ja i.334.
sa3 + dhana
one’s own religion or faith MN i.523; Snp 1020; Bv ii.6 = Ja i.3.
sa4 + dhamma
co-religionist DN ii.273.
sa2 + dhamma + ika
a dog; nom. sg sā DN i.166 = MN i.77; SN i.176; SN iii.150; Kv 336. For other forms of the same base see suvāṇa.
cp. Vedic śvā, gen. śunaḥ; Av. spā, Gr. κύων; Lat. canis, Oir. cū, Goth. hunds = hound
(= saṃ) acc. of sa4.
(nt.) dancing (-party) Vin ii.267.
sa3 + nacca
see saṇati.
(adj.) primeval, of old; for ever eternal DN ii.240, DN ii.244; SN i.189 (cp. K.S. i.321: porāṇaka santānaṃ vā paṇḍitānaṃ dhamma); Dhp-a i.51.
for sanātana (cp. purātana); Idg. *seno = Gr. ε ̔́νος old; Sk. sanaḥ in old times; Av. hana old, Lat. seneo, senex (“senile”), senatus; Goth sineigs old; Oir. sen old
(adj.) having a nave (of a wheel) DN ii.17, DN ii.172; AN ii.37; at both places combd with sa-nemika “with a felly” (i.e. complete).
sa3 + nābhi + ka
(adj.) having a name, called Bv ii.194 = Ja i.28.
sa3 + nāma + ika
(adj.) visible DN iii.217; Dhs 1087.
sa3 + nidassana
1. being, existing DN i.61, DN i.152; AN i.176; Iti 62 sq.; Snp 98, Snp 124.
2. good, true SN i.17; Dhp 151. Cases: nom. sg. m. santo Snp 98; Mil 32; Nd ii.635 (= samāna); f. satī (q.v.); nt. santaṃ AN v.8; Pv-a 192 acc. santaṃ DN ii.65; & sataṃ Ja iv.435 (opp. asaṃ); instr satā DN ii.55; loc. sati DN ii.32; AN i.176; AN iii.338; Snp 81; Dhp 146; Iti 85; & sante DN i.61; abl. santato Ne 88; Dhs-a 206 sq ■ pl. nom. santo MN i.24; SN i.71; Snp 450; Iti 62; Dhp 151; nt. santāni DN i.152; acc. sante Snp 94 Snp 665; gen. sataṃ MN i.24; SN i.17; Snp 227; instr. sabbhi DN ii.246; SN i.17, SN i.56; Mil 221 = Ja v.49; Dhp 151; loc santesu ■ Compar. santatara Iti 62; superl. sattama (q.v.).
ppr. of atthi
calmed, tranquil, peaceful, pure DN i.12; Vin i.4; SN i.5; AN ii.18; Snp 746; Pv iv.134 (= upasanta-kilesa Pv-a 230); Mil 232, Mil 409; Vism 155 (˚anga; opp. oḷārik’anga); Dhp-a ii.13; Dhp-a iii.83 ■ nt peace, bliss, nibbāna SN iv.370.
-indriya one whose senses are tranquil AN ii.38; Snp 144; Vin i.195; Ja i.506; -kāya of calmed body Dhp 378; Dhp-a iv.114. -dhamma peaceful condition, quietude Ja i.506; -bhāva id. Mil 265. -mānasa of tranquil mind Vin i.195; Ja i.506. -vāsa peaceful state Dhp-a iv.114 -vutti living a peaceful life Iti 30, Iti 121.
pp. of sammati1
tired, wearied, exhausted Dhp 60; Ja i.498; Pv ii.936 (= parissama-patta Pv-a 127).
pp. of sammati2
(adj.) 1. belonging to Ja i.122; nt. property Ja i.91, Ja i.494; Dhp-a i.346.
2. due to (gen.) Ja iii.408; Ja iv.37.
3. (being in the power of Ja iv.260 (bhaya˚).
fr. sant; cp. BSk. santaka Divy 280 etc.
(adj.) limited (opp. anantika) SN v.272.
sa3 + antaka
(f.) bark Ja v.202 (sattacaṃ?).
?
to frighten, scold, menace Ja i.479; Ja v.94; Thag-a 65; Pv-a 123, Pv-a 195.
saṃ + tajjeti
(adv.) [ satataṃ, or fr. saṃ + tan ] continually, only in cpds.: ˚kārin consistent AN ii.187; ˚vutti of consistent behaviour AN ii.187; MN i.339; ˚sīla steady in character MN i.339.
see sant.
(f.) 1. continuity, duration, subsistence Dhs 643; Ne 79; Mil 72, Mil 185 Vb-a 8, Vb-a 170, Vb-a 173; Vv-a 25; Vism 431, Vism 449. citta˚ continuity of consciousness Kv 458; cp. Cpd. 6, 1531 252 sq.; dhamma˚; continuity of states Mil 40; rūpa˚ of form Vb-a 21; saṅkhāra˚; causal connection of material things Thag 716.
2. lineage Mil 160.
fr. saṃ + tan, lit. stretch
heated, glowing DN ii.335; MN i.453; SN i.169 (divasa˚); Ja iv.118; Mil 325; Pv-a 38 (soka˚).
pp. of santappati
frightened, disturbed Ja iii.77 (= santrasta C.).
pp. of santasati
(& ˚tāneti) to continue AN iii.96 sq.; SN iv.104; Pp 66 sq.; Snp-a 5 (see santāyati).
Caus. of saṃ + tan
to be heated or chafed; fig. to grieve, sorrow MN i.188; Ja iii.153 ■ pp. santatta1 Caus. ˚tāpeti to burn, scorch, torment MN i.128; SN iv.56 sq ■ pp. santāpita.
saṃ + tappati1
satisfied, pleased Ja ii.44; Pv ii.811 (= pīṇita Pv-a 110).
pp. of santappeti
to satisfy, please DN i.109; Vin i.18; Ja i.50, Ja i.272 ■ pp. santappita.
Caus. of saṃ + tappati2
(adj.) inside; in compn ˚uttara inner & outer Vin iii.214; Vin iv.281; ˚uttarena with an inner & outer garment Vin i.298; Thag-a 171 ˚bāhira within & without DN i.74; Dhp 315; Ja i.125; DN-a i.218; Dhp-a iii.488.
sa3 + antara, cp. E. with-in
to be in haste, to be agitated; ppr. ˚amāna (˚rūpa) Ja iii.156, Ja iii.172; Ja vi.12, Ja vi.451.
saṃ + tarati2
(adj.) tranquil Dhp 378.
fr. santa1
to be frightened or terrified, to fear, to be disturbed Mil 92. ppr. santasaṃ Ja vi.306 (a˚) & santasanto Ja iv.101 (a˚); Pot. santase Ja iii.147 Ja v.378; ger. santasitvā Ja ii.398 ■ pp. santasita santatta;.
saṃ + tasati2
frightened Mil 92; Pv-a 260 (= suṭṭhu tasita).
pp. of santasati
(nt.) 1. spreading, ramification, tendril (valli˚) Kp-a 48.
2. one of the 5 celestial trees Ja vi.239 (˚maya made of its flowers).
3. (also m, continuity, succession; lineage SN iii.143; DN-a i.46; Dhs-a 63, Dhs-a 217, Dhs-a 297; Vism 555; Vb-a 164. Cp. citta˚ continuity of consciousness Cpd. 1677.
fr. saṃ + tan
1. (nt.) = santāna 1; Vv-a 94, Vv-a 162 (˚valli a sort of long creeper). mūla˚; a spreading root SN iii.155; Ja i.277.
2. = santāna 2; Vv-a 12. 3. (nt.) a cobweb Vin i.48.
4. offspring SN i.8.
santanā + ka
(adj.-n.) burning; heat, fire; fig. torment, torture Snp 1123 (cp. Nd ii.636); Ja i.502; Mil 97, Mil 324; Vb-a 70 (various), 245 (aggi˚, suriya˚); Sdhp 9, Sdhp 572.
fr. saṃ + tap
heated, aglow Thig 504.
pp. of santāpeti
see santappati.
to preserve (connect?) Vism 688 (better ˚dhāyati) = Snp-a 5 (reads ˚tāneti).
saṃ + tāyati
(nt.) & ˚ī (f.) conveying to the other shore SN iv.174; MN i.134 ■ f. santāraṇī Ap 234 (scil. nāvā).
fr. saṃ + tāreti1
trembling, fear, shock AN ii.33; SN iii.85; Ja i.274; Mil 146, Mil 207; Pv-a 22.
saṃ + tāsa
(adj.) making frightened, inspiring terror Mil 387.
fr. saṃ + tāsana
(adj.) trembling, frightened Dhp 351.
fr. santāsa
(f.) tranquillity, peace Snp 204; DN ii.157; AN ii.24; Dhp 202.
-kamma act of appeasing (the gods), pacification DN i.12; DN-a i.97. -pada “the place of tranquillity” tranquil state, i.e. Nibbāna AN ii.18; Vv-a 219. -vāda an advocate of mental calm Snp 845 (˚vada in verse) Nd i.203.
fr. śam, cp. Sk. ˚śānti
(nt.) vicinity, presence; santikaṃ into the presence of, towards Ja i.91, Ja i.185; santikā from the presence of, from Ja i.43, Ja i.83, Ja i.189; santike in the presence of, before, with DN i.79, DN i.144; Dhp 32 = Mil 408; Snp 379; Vin i.12; SN i.33; Ja v.467; with acc. SN iv.74; with abl. Mvu 205; nibbānasantike Dhp 372; instr. santikena = by, along with Ja ii.301 (if not a mistake instead of santikaṃ or santike?).
-āvacara keeping or being near DN i.206; DN ii.139; Ja i.67.
sa2 + antika
(f.) a kind of game, “spellicans” (Rh. D.); (Kern: knibbelspel) DN i.6; Vin ii.10; Vin iii.180; DN-a i.85.
unclear in origin & meaning
1. to stand, stand still, remain, continue AN iv.101 (udakaṃ = stands still), 282, 302 sq. Pp 31; Ja i.26.
2. to be established, to be put into order Vin ii.11.
3. to stick to, to be fixed or settled to be composed DN ii.206; DN iii.239 (citta); SN v.321; Vin i.9, Vin i.15; Iti 43.
4. to restrain oneself Ja i.438. 5. to wait for (acc.) Dhp-a i.50 ■ Forms: pres. santiṭṭhati DN ii.206; SN iii.133; saṇṭhahati Ja vi.160; & saṇṭhāti Pp 31; Ja iv.469. ppr. saṇṭhahanto Vin i.9; Pot saṇṭhaheyya Vin ii.11; SN v.321. aor. saṇṭhāsi Vin i.15 saṇṭhahiṃsu (3rd pl.) SN ii.224. Inf. saṇṭhātuṃ Ja i.438; Dhp-a i.50 ■ pp. saṇṭhita -Caus. II. saṇṭhapeti (˚ṭhāpeti);.
saṃ + tiṭṭhati
(nt.) investigation, decision; as t.t. denoting a stage in the act of sense-cognition judging an impression (see Cpd. 28, 40, 238) DN-a i.194; Dhs-a 264, Dhs-a 269, Dhs-a 272; Vism 459. As ˚ā (f.) at Ne 82, Ne 191. -˚kicca function of judging Tikp 33 Vism 21, Vism 454.
saṃ + tīraṇa
pleased, happy DN i.60, DN i.71; MN ii.6; AN ii.209; AN iv.232 sq.; AN v.25, AN v.67, AN v.130, AN v.154. mahā˚ the greatly contented one, the Arahant Dhs-a 407.
pp. of santussati
(f.) satisfaction, contentment DN i.71; MN i.13; Snp 265; Dhp 204; AN ii.27, AN ii.31; AN iii.219 sq. 432 (a˚); Dhp-a iv.111.
saṃ + tuṭṭhi
(f.) state of contentment DN iii.115; AN i.12; Pp 25; Vism 53; Dhs 1367 (a˚).
abstr. formation fr. last
(adj.) commeasurable; neg. a˚; Ja vi.283.
metric for ˚tulya, grd. of saṃ + tuleti
contented, pleased, happy SN iii.45 (˚tussit’ attā); Snp 1040; Dhp 362 (= suṭṭhu tusita Dhp-a iv.90); Mhbv 31 (ss).
pp. of santussati
(adj.) content Snp 144.
fr. santussati
to be contented, or pleased, or happy; ppr. ˚amāna Snp 42 ■ pp. santuṭṭha & ˚tusita;.
saṃ + tussati
contentment DN-a i.204.
fr. saṃ + tuṣ
1. spread, strewn with (-˚), covered DN ii.160; Vin iii.32; Snp 401, Snp 668 ■ dhamani˚gatta having the body strewn with veins, emaciated Vin iii.146 = Ja ii.283; Ja i.346, Ja i.350 & passim (see dhamani). Kern,; Toev. s. v. considers santata the right spelling.
2. (nt.) a rug or mat Vin iii.224; Vv 635 (= tiṇa-santharaka Vv-a 262).
pp. of santharati
(adj.) sleeping on a rug Mil 342, Mil 359.
fr. santhata 2
(nt.) 1. appeasing Dhp 275.
2. satisfaction Vv 186.
fr. śam, cp. Sk. śāntvana
at Ja i.122 is to be read saṇdhamati “to blow.”
to restrain oneself, to keep firm Snp 701 (imper. med. 2nd sg. ˚thambhassu) Pp 65; Ja i.255; Ja iii.95 ■ Caus. ˚thambheti to make stiff or rigid, to numb Ja i.10.
saṃ + thambhati
(f.) & ˚thambhitatta (nt.) stiffening, stiffness, rigidity Dhs 636; Dhs-a 324; Ja i.10 (a-santhambhana-bhāva).
abstr. fr. santhambhati
a couch or mat Vin ii.162; AN i.277; Ap 97 (tiṇa˚).
fr. saṃ + str
= santhara; only as tiṇa˚; made of grass Vin i.24; MN i.501; Ja i.360; Vv-a 262.
(adj.) spreading, strewing; ˚vāta a wind which strews things about Snp-a 67.
fr. santharati
to spread, strew DN ii.84 ■ pp. santhata ■ Caus. santhāreti Mvu 29, Mvu 12 ■ Caus. II santharāpeti to cause to be spread Vin iv.39; Mvu 29, Mvu 9.
saṃ + tharati
(adv.) by way of spreading; in sabba˚; so that all is spread, prepared DN ii.84; cp. Vin i.227, Vin i.384.
fr. santhara
acquaintance, intimacy SN i.17; Snp 37, Snp 168, Snp 207, Snp 245; Ja i.158; Ja ii.27, Ja ii.42 Ja ii.180; Dhs 1059; Dhs-a 364; Dhp-a i.235. nom. pl santhavāni Snp 844 = SN iii.9; Ja iv.98. -˚jāta having become acquainted, an acquaintance Nd i.198 ■ a˚vissāsin intimate without being acquainted AN iii.136.
fr. saṃ + stu, cp. santhuta
(nt.) acquaintance Dhs-a 364.
fr. saṃ + thavati
a council hall, a mote hall DN i.91; DN ii.147; AN ii.207; MN i.228, MN i.353, MN i.457; MN iii.207; DN-a i.256; Ja iv.72, Ja iv.147; Vin i.233; Vv-a 298; Dhp-a i.347. Cp. saṇṭhāna 3.
Sk. sansthāgāra
see saṇṭhāna.
spreading, covering, floor(ing) SN i.170; Vin ii.120 (3 kinds of floors: iṭṭhakā˚, silā˚ dāru˚, i.e. of tiles, flags, wood); AN i.136 (paṇṇa˚); Ja vi.24 (id.); Ja i.92; Pts i.176.
2. (cp. paṭi˚) friendly welcome AN i.93 (āmisa˚ & dhamma˚).;
saṃ + thāra
a spread, cover, mat Vin ii.113 (tiṇa˚), 116.
santhāra + ka cp. BSk. sanstāraka Mvu iii.272
(adj.) acquainted, familiar Ja i.365; Ja iii.63 (cira˚); v.448 (so read for santhata); Sdhp 31 Neg. a˚; Ja iii.63, Ja iii.221; Ja vi.310. Cp. santhava.
saṃ + thuta
(adj.) acquainted Vism 78.
fr. santhuta
1. (adj.) thick, dense; in -˚cchāya giving dense shade SN iv.194; Ja i.57, Ja i.249; DN-a i.209. (2) (thick) wood, forest; in -˚vihāra dwelling in the wood, life as a hermit Thag 688.
cp. Sk. sāndra
to flow DN ii.128, DN ii.129 (aor. sandittha); Ja i.18; Ja vi.534 (v.l. sikandati siyandati?); Pv ii.104 (= pavatteti Pv-a 143) ■ Caus sandāpeti to cause to flow Mil 122 ■ pp. sanna. Cp. vissandati & vissandaka;.
syand; Dhtp 149: passavane
(nt.) trappings DN ii.188 (read sandāna?).
a chariot Mvu 21, Mvu 25; Dpvs 14, 56; Vv 642; Ja iv.103; Ja v.264; Ja vi.22.
cp. Vedic syandana
(f.) a chariot Vin iii.49; Vin iv.339; DN-a i.82; Kp-a 50; Vism 255.
fr. syand
is Kern’s proposed reading for santhambhita at Ja vi.207.
fr. Sk. sandarbhati
instructing MN i.145; AN ii.97; AN iv.296; SN v.162; Iti 107; Mil 373.
fr. sandassati, Caus. of sandissati
showing Ja i.67.
to put together, to connect, to fit, to arrange Ja iv.336; Mvu vii.18; ppr. med sandahamāna Dhs-a 113; ger. sandahitvā Ja iv.336 & sandhāya lit. after putting on Ja iv.258 (the arrow on to the bow); fig. with reference to, concerning MN i.503; Ja i.203, Ja i.274; Ja ii.177; Pv-a 87, Pv-a 89, Pv-a 110; towards Ja i.491; Ja iii.295. pp. sandhīyate [& sandhiyyate]; to be put together, to be self-contained Pp 32; to be connected Snp-a 376, Snp-a 572; to reflect upon, to resent Snp 366; to be reconciled Ja ii.114 ■ pp. saṃhita.
saṃ + dahati1
(nt.) applying, placing (an arrow) on the string Mil 352.
fr. saṃ + dhā
(nt.), a cord, tether, fetter DN ii.274; Thag 290; Dhp 398; Snp 622; Ja ii.32; Ud 77 (text sandhāna); Dhp-a iv.161.
saṃ + dāna, fr. dā to bind: see dāma
to break; ger. sandālayitvāna Snp 62.
saṃ + dāleti
seen together, a friend Ja i.106, Ja i.442; Vin iii.42; yathāsandiṭṭhaṃ, where one’s friends live DN ii.98; SN v.152.
pp. of sandissati
(f.) the visible world, worldly gain DN iii.45, DN iii.247; MN i.43; Snp 891; Vin ii.89; Nd i.288, Nd i.300 ˚parāmāsin infected with worldliness MN i.97.
fr. saṃ + dṛś
visible; belonging to, of advantage to, this life, actual DN i.51 DN ii.93, DN ii.217; DN iii.5; MN i.85, MN i.474; AN i.156 sq.; AN ii.56, AN ii.198; SN i.9, SN i.117, SN iv.41, SN iv.339; Snp 567, Snp 1137; Vism 215 sq ■ As sandiṭṭhiyā (f.) at Ja vi.213
cp. BSk. sandṛṣṭika Divy 426
bound, tied, Thag 290 (diṭṭhi-sandāna˚).
fr. saṃ + dā: see sandāna
smeared, indistinct, husky Vin ii.202; DN-a i.282.
saṃ + diddha
& sandīyati to be vexed, to resent SN ii.200 sq.; Ja vi.570 (spelt wrongly sandhīyati C. expls as “manku hoti”).
saṃ + diyyati(= dīyati) = Sk. dīyate of dyati, i.e. dā2 to cut: see dātta
to be seen together with, to be engaged in, or to tally, agree with, to live conformably to (loc., e.g. dhamme) DN i.102; DN ii.75; SN v.177; Snp 50; DN ii.127; Ne 23; ppr. a-saṃdissamāna invisible Dāvs iv.30; Caus. saṃdasseti to teach, instruct DN i.126; DN ii.95; Vin i.18; to compare, verify, DN ii.124; ppr. sandassiyamāna DN ii.124; Ja vi.217 (sunakhesu sandissanti, i.e. they are of no more value).
saṃ + dissati
to kindle Ja v.32.
saṃ + dīpeti
news, message Mvu 18, Mvu 13.
Sk. sandeśa
1. accumulation; the human body Dhp 148.
2. doubt Mil 295.
saṃ + deha
pollution, defilement MN i.17; AN iii.106, AN iii.358; AN v.292; Snp 327.
saṃ + dosa
(nt.) property, belongings MN ii.180.
saṃ + dhana
blown, smelted (of gold) AN i.253.
pp. of sandhamati
to blow, to fan Ja i.122. - pp. sandhanta.
saṃ + dhamati
one who puts together, a conciliator DN i.4; DN iii.171; MN i.345; AN ii.209; Pp 57.
saṃ + dhātar
(nt.) 1. uniting, conciliation, friendship DN-a i.74; Dhs-a 113.
2. bond, fetter Ud 77 (read sandāna? ).
fr. saṃ + dhā
(nt.) combination Vv-a 349.
fr. sandhāpeti, Caus. of sandahati
see sandahati.
(adj.) checking, restraining Vism 205.
fr. sandhāreti
(nt.) checking Mil 352.
fr. sandhāreti
1. to hold, bear, carry Ja iii.184.
2. to hold up, support Ja iv.167.
3. to curb restrain, check Vin ii.212; Ja ii.26, Ja ii.59 ■ dussandhāriya difficult to keep back Ja iii.340.
saṃ + dhāreti
to run through, to transmigrate DN i.14; AN ii.1; SN iii.149; Ja i.503; aor. sandhāvissaṃ Dhp 153 = Ja i.76 (= apar’ âparaṃ anuvicariṃ Dhp-a iii.128).
saṃ + dhāvati
(m. & f.) 1. union, junction Mil 330 (of 2 roads); Bdhgh on SN ii.270 (between 2 houses). 2. breach, break, hole, chasm DN ii.83 = AN v.195; Thag 786; Ja v.459. āloka˚; a window Vin ii.172; sandhiṃ chindati to make a break, to break into a house DN i.52; DN-a i.159.
3. joint, piece, link Ja ii.88; Vism 277 (the 5, of kammaṭṭhāna); Mvu 33, Mvu 11; Mvu 34, Mvu 47; applied to the joints of the body Vism 185 (the 14 mahā˚); Dhs-a 324.
4. connection, combination Vb-a 191 (hetuphala˚ & phalahetu˚ etc.).
5. euphonic junction euphony, “sandhi” Snp-a 76. See pada˚.
6. agreement Mvu 9, Mvu 16.
-cheda (1) housebreaking Ja i.187 sq.; Ja ii.388 ■ (2) one who has brought rebirths (= paṭisandhi) to an end Dhp 97; Dhp-a ii.187; Dhp-a iii.257. -chedaka one who can cut a break, an underminer Ja vi.458. -bheda(ka) causing discord Ja iii.151. -mukha opening of a break (made by burglars) into a house Thag 786; Pv-a 4. -samala (-sankaṭīva) refuse heap of a house-sewer (cp. K.S. ii.181 203) DN ii.160; MN i.334 = SN ii.270.
fr. saṃ + ; dhā
(adj.) (-˚), in pañca˚; having 5 links or pieces Vism 277.
see sandahati.
to shake DN ii.336.
saṃ + dhunāti
to fumigate SN iii.89; Pts ii.167. As sandhūpāyati to cause thick smoke or steam thickly, at Vin i.225; Snp p.15 (= samantā dhūpāyati Snp-a 154).
saṃ + dhūpeti
to clean AN i.253.
saṃ + dhovati
washing; kaṇṇa-sandhovikā khiḍḍā ear-washing sport or gambol (of elephants, with piṭṭhi˚; etc.) AN v.202. So probably for saṇadhovika at MN i.229, MN i.375. Cp. sāṇadhovana (?).
fr. sandhovati
sunk Dhp 327.
pp. of sīdati
flown Ja vi.203 (dadhi˚).
pp. of sandati
the tree Buchanania latifolia Abḥp 556.
lexicogr. Sk. sannakadru
1. bent down, low Ja vi.58 (opp. unnata).
2. bent, prepared Ja v.215 (C. suphassita).
pp. of saṃ + nam, cp. sannāmeti
1. fastened, bound, DN ii.350 (susannaddha); Mil 339.
2. put on, clothed (with Pv iv.136 (˚dussa).
3. armed, accoutred SN ii.284; Ja i.179; Dhp 387; Dhp-a iv.144; Pv-a 154 (˚dhanu-kalāpa).
pp. of sannayhati
to tie, bind, fasten, to arm oneself Ja i.129; to array, arm DN ii.175; Vin i.342; to arrange, fit DN i.96; Ja i.273; aor. sannayhi DN i.96; inf sannayhituṃ Ja i.179; ger. sannayhitvā DN ii.175; Ja ii.77; & sannahitvā Ja i.273.
saṃ + nayhati
to bend MN i.365, MN i.439, MN i.450, MN i.507 = SN iv.188 (kāyaṃ sannāmeyya-i.e. to writhe) Cp. Cpd. 162 n. 5 (“strengthen”?).
Caus. of saṃ + nam
1. dressing, fastening together Pv-a 231.
2. armour, mail SN v.6; Ja ii.443; Th. 1, 543; Ja i.179.
fr. sannay ati
(adj.) resembling, looking like Ja iii.522; Ja v.87 = Ja vi.306; Ja v.169 (C. dassana); vi.240, 279.
saṃ + nikāsa
(nt.) elimination Vb-a 355.
saṃ + nikkhepana
to restrain SN i.238.
saṃ + niggaṇhāti
concussion, knocking against each other Dhs 621.
saṃ + nighāta
accumulation, hoarding AN i.94; AN ii.23; Dhp 92; Vin ii.95; Vin iv.243; Dhp-a ii.171; AN iv.108 Kp-a 62 (lohita).
saṃ + nicaya
accumulated, hoarded Mil 120.
saṃ + nicita
(nt.) 1. conclusion, consummation, Ja ii.166.
2. resolve Ja i.19; Ja i.69; Ja i.187; Ja iv.167; Vin i.255 sq.
3. ascertainment, definite conclusion conviction, Ja vi.324; Vism 43.
saṃ + niṭṭhāna
to strike Ja v.71.
saṃ + nitāḷeti
(nt.) “pricking,” instigating, jeering DN i.189; AN i.187; SN ii.282.
fr. saṃ + ni + tud
(nt.) [saṃ + nidhāna) lit. “putting down together,” proximity Dāvs v.39.
putting together, storing up DN i.6; Snp 306, Snp 924; Nd i.372; -kāra storing DN i.6; -kāraka storing up, store MN i.523; Vin i.209; Vin iv.87; DN iii.235; AN iii.109; AN iv.370. -kata stored up Vin ii.270; put by postponed Vin i.254.
saṃ + nidhi
to assemble, come together Ja i.167; pp. ˚ita. Caus. sannipāteti to bring together convoke DN ii.76; Mil 6; Caus. II. sannipātāpeti to cause to be convoked or called together Ja i.58, Ja i.153, Ja i.271 Ja iii.376; Vin i.44; Vin iii.71.
saṃ + nipatati
come together DN i.2; DN ii.76.
pp. of ˚nipatati
1. union, coincidence SN iv.68 sq.; Mil 60, Mil 123 sq.; Ne 28.
2. assemblage assembly, congregation DN ii.5; Mil 7.
3. union of the humours of the body Mil 303.
4. collocation Dhp 352.
fr. sannipatati
(adj.) resulting from the union of the humours of the body AN ii.87; AN v.110; SN iv.230; Mil 135, Mil 137, Mil 302, Mil 304.
fr. last
(adj.) resembling DN ii.17; Snp 551; Ja i.319.
saṃ + nibha
to appoint, command Mvu 5, Mvu 34.
saṃ + niyojeti
(nt.) handing over, resignation DN-a i.232.
saṃ + niyyātana
(adj.) being (quite) happy together Ja v.405. Sannirumbhati (rundhati)
saṃ + nirata
to restrain, block, impede; ger. sannirumhitvā Ja i.109, Ja i.164 Ja ii.6; Vv-a 217. sannirumbhitvā Ja i.62; Ja ii.341. sannirujjhitvā Vism 143; Pot. sannirundheyya MN i.115. pp. sanniruddha Vism 278.
saṃ + nirumbhati
(nt.) restraining, checking, suppression Ja i.163; DN-a i.193; as ˚bhana at Vb-a 355.
fr. last
returning, return Vin i.139 sq.
= saṃ + nivatta
to live together, to associate AN i.78; pp. sannivuttha.
saṃ + nivasati
to restrain, check; to keep together MN i.115; Thig 366.
saṃ + nivāreti
association, living with; community AN i.78; AN ii.57; DN iii.271; Dhp 206; Ja iv.403 loka-sannivāsa the society of men, all the world Ja i.366 Ja ii.205.
saṃ + nivāsa
living together (with), associating AN iv.303 sq.
pp. of sannivasati
preparation, encampment, settlement Thag-a 257.
saṃ + nivesa
(nt.) position, settlement; pāṭiekka-˚ private, separate Ja i.92.
saṃ + nivesana
(f.) meeting-place Vin i.188; Vin ii.174 = Vin iii.66; sannisajja-ṭṭhāna (n.) the same Vin iii.287.
saṃ + nissajjā
1. sitting down together DN i.2; DN ii.109; Vin ii.296; Ja i.120.
2. (having become settled, established Vin ii.278 (˚gabbhā pregnant).
pp. of sannisīdati
1. (lit.) to sink down, to settle Mil 35.
2. (fig.) to subside, to become quiet MN i.121; SN iv.196; AN ii.157 ■ Caus. sannisādeti to make quiet to calm MN i.116; AN ii.94 ■ Caus. II. sannisīdāpeti to cause to halt Ja iv.258 ■ pp. sannisinna.
saṃ + nisīdati
(f.) dependency, connection Ne 80.
saṃ + nissayatā
based on, connected with, attached to Vism 43, Vism 118, Vism 120, Vism 554 (viññāṇa is “hadaya-vatthu˚”; cp. Vb-a 163).
saṃ + nissita, cp. BSk. sanniśrita
1. put down, placed Mil 326.
2. stored up Thig 409; Thag-a 267.
saṃ + nihita; cp. sannidhi
mixed, put together, kneaded Mvu 29, Mvu 11 & 12.;
pp. fr. sanneti
to mix, knead DN i.74 (Pot. sanneyya); iii.29; Vin i.47 (grd. ˚netabba); MN i.276; SN ii.58 sq.; Ja vi.432 ■ pp. sannīta.
fr. saṃ + neti
(adj.) 1. with Pajāpati. The passage under pajāpati 1. was distorted through copyist’s default. It should read: “only in one formula, with Inda Brahmā, viz. devā sa-indakā sa-brahmakā sa-pajāpatikā DN ii.274 (without sa-brahmakā); SN iii.90; AN v.325. Otherwise sapajāpatika in sense of foll Also at Vb-a 497 with Brahmā.”
2. with one’s wife Vin i.23; Vin iv.62; Ja i.345.
to swear, curse SN i.225; Ja v.104, Ja v.397; Mvu 25, Mvu 113; Vv-a 336 ■ pp satta3.
śap, cp. Dhtp 184 “akkose”
(adj.) having a husband, a woman whose husband is alive Ja vi.158; Pv-a 86.
(f.) having the same husband; a rival wife, a cowife Pv i.66; ii.32.
hostile, rival Thig 347; Thag-a 242; sapattarājā a rival king Ja i.358; Ja ii.94; Ja iii.416; asapatta without enmity Snp 150; sapatta (m.) a rival, foe, Iti 83; AN iv.94 sq.; Ja i.297.
Sk. sapatna
(adj.) hostile, full of enmity DN i.227.
fr. last
with the weight of the wings, carrying one’s wings with oneself DN i.71; MN i.180 MN i.268; AN ii.210; Pug. 58.
sa3 + patta1 + bhāra
(nt.) the state of a co-wife Thig 216; Thag-a 178 ■ Kern, Toev. s.v. proposes reading sā˚.
(f.) a co-wife DN ii.330; Ja i.398; Ja iv.316, Ja iv.491; Thig 224; Dhp-a i.47. asapattī without any co-wife SN iv.249.
Sk. sapatnī
an oath Vin i.347; Ja i.180, Ja i.267; Ja iii.138; Snp-a 418.
fr. śap
(adv.) [fr. phrase sa-padānaṃ-cārikā; i.e. sa2 + gen. pl. of pada (cp. gimhāna). Weber (Ind Str. iii.398) suggests sapadā + naṃ, sapadā being an instr. by-form of sapadā, and naṃ an enclitic. Trenckner (Miln. p. 428) says sapadi + ayana. Kern (Toev. ii.73 agrees on the whole, but expls padānaṃ as pad’āyanaṃ “with the same steps,” i.e. without interruption, constant successive (cp. Lat stante pede & Sk. adv.; sapadi at once). (1) lit. (perhaps a later use) of a bird at Ja v.358 (s. sāliṃ khādanto, without a stop); of a lion at Mil 400 (sapadāna-bhakkha). (2) appld in phrase sapadānaṃ carati to go on uninterrupted alms-begging Vin iv.191; SN iii.238; Snp 413; Ja i.66; Pv iv.344; Vv-a 121; and in phrases sapadāna-cārikā Ja i.89; ˚cārika (adj.) Vin iii.15; ˚cārin MN i.30; MN ii.7; Snp 65; Nd ii.646 Also as adj. sapadāna (piṇḍapāta) Vin ii.214.
(adv.) instantly, at once Dāvs i.62.
sa2 + adv. formn fr. pada
(adj.) 1. provided with possessions DN i.247; Snp 393.
2. having a wife married Ja vi.369.
sa3 + pariggaha
(f.) a cert. class of women, the use of whom renders a person liable to punishment Vin iii.139; AN v.264; MN i.286.
(adj.) with the sprouts Vv-a 173.
sa3 + pallava
“dog-cooker,” an outcast or Caṇḍāla Ja iv.380. Cp. sopāka.
san + pāka; cp. Sk. śvapāka
a snake MN i.130; AN iii.97, AN iii.260 sq.; Snp 768; Ja i.46, Ja i.259, Ja i.310, Ja i.372; Ja v.447 (kaṇha˚); Nd i.7; DN-a i.197; Snp-a 13. Often in similes, e.g. Vism 161, Vism 587; Kp-a 144; Snp-a 226, Snp-a 333. -˚potaka a young snake Vism 500; -˚phaṇa the hood of a snake Kp-a 50 ■ Cp. sappin.
cp. Sk. sarpa, fr. sṛp; “serpent”
(adj.) correlated, having a cause, conditioned DN i.180; AN i.82; Dhs 1083.
sa3 + paccaya
(adj.) wise MN i.225; Snp 591; often as sapañña Iti 36; Snp 90; Ja ii.65.
sa3 + pañña
(adj.) producing reaction, reacting DN iii.217; Dhs 597, Dhs 617, Dhs 648, Dhs 1089; Dhs-a 317; Vism 451.
sa3 + paṭigha
having an equal, comparable, a friend MN i.27.
sa3 + paṭipuggala
(adj.) 1. resembling, like DN ii.215; Ja i.303; Pp 30 sq.; Mil 37.
2. having as (equal) counterparts, evenly mixed with MN i.320 (kaṇhasukka˚); Mil 379 (id.).
sa3 + paṭibhāga
(adj.) reverential, deferential Iti 10; Vin i.45; Vv 8441 (cp. Vv-a 347). See also gārava.
sa + paṭissā, cp. BSk. sapratīśa Divy 333, Divy 484
(adj.) deferential, respectful Dhs-a 125, Dhs-a 127 = Ja i.129, Ja i.131; -tā deference, reverence Dhs 1327 = Pp 24.
sa + paṭissava
to creep, crawl: see saṃ˚.
sṛp, cp. Vedic sarpati, Gr. ε ̔́ρπω, Lat. serpo; Dhtp 194 “gamana”
(adj.) in all places, all round MN i.153.
sa3 + padesa
(nt.) gliding on Dhs-a 133.
fr. sappati
(adj.) accompanied by wonders DN i.198; SN v.261; Ud 63.
sa3 + pāṭihāriya
(adj.) made with wonders, substantiated by wonders, substantiated, well founded DN i.198; DN iii.121 (“has been made a thing of saving grace” Dial. iii.115, q.v.).
sa3 + pāṭihīra + kata
(adj.) containing animate beings Vin iii.125; Ja i.198.
sa3 + pāṇa + ka
(adj.) likely, beneficial fit, suitable AN i.120; SN iii.268; SN iv.23 sq., 133 sq. (Nibbāna˚ paṭipadā); Ja i.182, Ja i.195; Ja ii.436 (kiṃci sappāyaṃ something that did him good, a remedy); Vin i.292 Vin i.302; Mil 215 (sappāyakiriyā, giving a drug). nt something beneficial, benefit, help Vism 34, Vism 87 (˚sevin) Vb-a 265 (various), 271 (˚kathā) ■ Ten sappāyas 10 asappāyas at Dhs-a 168 ■; sappāyāsappāyaṃ what is suitable, and what not Ja i.215, Ja i.471; used as the last part of a compound, meaning what is suitable with reference to: senāsanasappāya (nt.) suitable lodgings Ja i.215.
saṃ + pā (= pra + ā) + i, cp. pāya. The corresponding BSk. form is sāmpreya (= saṃ + pra + i with guṇa), e.g. Avs i.255; Avs iii.110
(f.) agreeableness, suitability, convenience Vism 79, Vism 121 (a˚), 127.
abstr. fr. sappāya
(nt.) clarified butter, ghee DN i.9, DN i.141, DN i.201; AN i.278; AN ii.95, AN ii.207 (˚tela); iii.219; iv.103; Snp 295 (˚tela). Dhs 646; Ja i.184; Ja ii.43; Ja iv.223 (˚tela) Vin i.58, etc. -˚maṇḍa [cp. BSk. sarpimaṇḍa Divy 3 etc.] the scum, froth, cream of clarified butter, the best of ghee DN i.201; AN ii.95; Vv-a 172; Pp 70; its tayo guṇā Mil 322.
Vedic sarpis
(adj.-n.) crawling, creeping; moving along: see pīṭha˚ ■ (f.) sappinī a female snake Ja vi.339 (where the differences between a male and a female snake are discussed).
fr. sappati
(adj.) accompanied by the feeling of joy, joyful AN i.81; Ja i.10; Vism 86 (opp nippītika).
sa3 + pīti + ka
a good, worthy man MN iii.21, MN iii.37; DN iii.252 (the 7 s˚-dhammā), 274, 276, 283; AN ii.217 sq., 239; Dhs 259 = Dhs 1003; Vin i.56; Dhp 54; Pv ii.98; ii.945; iv.187; Ja i.202; equal to ariya MN i.8; SN iii.4; asappurisa = anariya Snp-a 479. sappurisatara a better man SN v.20.
sat (= sant) + purisa
(adj.) bearing fruit, having its reward Dhp 52.
sa3 + phala
(adj.) together with his shield Mvu 25, Mvu 63.
sa3 + phalaka
spotted, variegated Snp 675; Vism 51; Vv-a 253; name of one of the dogs in the Lokantara hell Ja vi.106, Ja vi.247 (Sabálo ca Sāmo ca). asabala, unspotted DN ii.80.
-kārin acting inconsistently AN ii.187.
Vedic śabala (e.g. A. V. 8, 1, 9) = κέρβερος, Weber, Ind. Stud. ii.297
(adj.) whole, entire all, every DN i.4; SN iv.15; Vin i.5; Iti 3; Nd ii.s. v., nom pl. sabbe Snp 66; gen. pl. sabbesaṃ Snp 1030 ■ nt sabbaṃ the (whole) world of sense-experience SN iv.15 cp. MN i.3 ■ At Vism 310 “ sabbe ” is defined as “anavasesa-pariyādānaṃ.” In compn with superlative expressions sabba˚; has the meaning of “(best) of all, quite, very, nothing but, all round; entirely: ˚bāla the greatest fool DN i.59; ˚paṭhama the very first, right in front Pv-a 56; ˚sovaṇṇa nothing but gold Pv i.21ii.911; ˚kaniṭṭha the very youngest Pv-a iii; ˚atthaka in every way useful; ˚saṅgāhika thoroughly comprehensive Snp-a 304 ■ In connection with numerals sabba˚ has the distributive sense of “of each,” i.e. so & so many things of each kind, like; ˚catukka (with four of each said of a gift or sacrifice) Ja iii.44; Dhp-a iii.3; ˚aṭṭhaka (dāna) (a gift consisting of 8 X 8 things) Mil 291. See detail under aṭṭha B 1. a ■ ˚soḷasaka (of 16 each Dhp-a iii.3; ˚sata (of 100 each) Dhp-a ii.6 ■ Cases adverbially: instr. sabbena sabbaṃ altogether all, i.e. with everything [cp. BSk. sarvena sarvaṃ Divy 39, Divy 144 Divy 270; Divy 502] DN ii.57; Pv-a 130; Pv-a 131 ■ abl. sabbato “all round,” in every respect Pv i.111; Ja vi.76; & sabbaso altogether, throughout DN i.34; Snp 288; Dhp 265; Pv-a 119; Nd i.421; Dhp-a iv.100 ■ Derivations: 1. sabbattha everywhere, under all circumstances SN i.134; Dhp 83; Snp 269; Nd 133; Pv-a 1, Pv-a 18, Pv-a 107; Vb-a 372 sq. ˚kaṃ everywhere Ja i.15, Ja i.176, Ja i.172; Dāṭh v.57.
2. sabbathā in every way; sabbathā sabbaṃ completely DN ii.57; SN iv.167.
3. sabbadā always Snp 174, Snp 197 Snp 536; Dhp 202; Pv i.91 (= sabbakālaṃ C.); i.1014 (id.) sabbadā-cana always Iti 36.
4. sabbadhi (fr. Sk *sarvadha = vic̦vadha, Weber, Ind. Str. iii.392) everywhere in every respect DN i.251; DN ii.186; Snp 176; Dhp 90 also sabbadhī Snp 952, Snp 1034; Vin i.38; Vb-a 377 Vism 308 (= sabbattha); Nd i.441, Nd i.443.
-atthaka concerned with everything, a do-all Ja ii.30 Ja ii.74; Dhp-a ii.151 (mahāmatta) ■ profitable to all Mil 373 (T. ṭṭh). of kammaṭṭhāna Snp-a ii.54; Vism 97 -atthika always useful Mil 153. -ābhibhū conquering all Snp 211; Vin i.8. -otuka corresponding to all the seasons DN ii.179; Pv iv.122; Sdhp 248. -kammika (amacca) (a minister) doing all work Vism 130. -kālaṃ always: see sadā ■ ghasa all-devouring Ja i.288 ■ ji all-conquering SN iv.83. -(ñ)jaha abandoning everything SN ii.284; Snp 211; Dhp 353 = Vin i.8. -ññu omniscient MN i.482; MN ii.31, MN ii.126; AN i.220; Mil 74; Vb-a 50; Snp-a 229, Snp-a 424, Snp-a 585; Ja i.214; Ja i.335; ˚tā (f.) omniscience Pp 14 Pp 70; Ja i.2, Ja i.14; Ne 61, Ne 103; also written sabbaññūtā sabbaññutā-ñāṇa (nt.) omniscience Ne 103; DN-a i.99 Vb-a 197. Also written sabbaññū˚; thus Ja i.75 -dassāvin one who sees (i.e. knows) everything MN i.92 -byohāra business, intercourse Ud 65; see saṃvohāra -bhumma universal monarch Ja vi.45. -vidū all wise Snp 177, Snp 211; Vin i.8; Dhp 353. -saṃharaka a kind of perfume “eau de mille fleurs” Ja vi.336. -sādhāraṇa common to all Ja i.301 sq.
Vedic sarva = Av. haurva (complete); Gr. ο ̔́λος (“holo-caust”) whole; Lat. solidus & soldus “solid,” perhaps also Lat. salvus safe
the state of being everywhere; sabbatthatāya on the whole DN i.251; DN ii.187; MN i.38; SN iv.296; AN iii.225 AN v.299, AN v.344. Expld at Vism 308 (with tt).
(nt.) the whole of one’s property Ja iii.105; Ja v.100 (read: sabbasaṃ vā pan’assa haranti) ˚-haraṇa (nt.) confiscation of one’s property Ja iii.105 Ja v.246 (v.l.); sabbassaharaṇadaṇḍa (m.) the same Ja iv.204 (so read instead of sabbappaharaṇa). At some passages sabba (nt.) “all,” seems to be used in the same sense, esp. gen. sabbassa-e.g. Ja iii.50; Ja iv.19 Ja v.324.
sarvasva
(adj.) all, entire DN i.73, DN i.251; DN iii.224; AN iii.27; AN v.299 sq., 344 sq.
cp. BSk. sarvāvant Divy 294, Divy 298, Divy 352
see a˚.
see a˚.
(adj.) including the Brahma world DN i.62; DN iii.76, DN iii.135; AN i.260; AN ii.70; SN v.423; Vin i.11; DN-a i.174.
sa3 + brahma + ka
(adj.-n.) a fellow student DN ii.77; DN iii.241 sq., 245; MN i.101; AN ii.97; Snp 973; Vb-a 281.
sa3 + brahmacārin
(adj.) gone to the hall of assembly AN i.128; Snp 397; Pp 29.
sabhā + gata
(f.) 1. a hall, assemblyroom DN ii.274; AN i.143; SN i.176; Ja i.119; Ja i.157, Ja i.204. 2. a public rest-house, hostelry Ja i.302. dhamma˚ chapel Ja vi.333.
-gata = sabhaggata SN v.394; MN i.286.
Vedic sabhā, cp. K.Z. iv.370
(adj.) common, being of the same division Vin ii.75; like, equal, similar Mil 79; s. āpatti a common offence, shared by all Vin i.126 sq.; vīthisabhāgena in street company, the whole street in common Ja ii.45; opp. visabhāga unusual Ja i.303; different Vism 516; Mil 79.
-ṭṭhāna a common room, a suitable or convenient place Ja i.426; Ja iii.49; Ja v.235. -vuttin living in mutual courtesy, properly, suitably Vin i.45; Ja i.219 a-sabhāgavuttin Ja i.218; sabhāgavuttika Vin ii.162; AN iii.14 sq.; a-sabhāgavuttika ibid.
sa2 + bhāga
honouring, salutation Mil 2.
Dhtp 553: pīti-dassanesu
(nt.) = sabhā Vin iii.200.
1. state (of mind), nature, condition Mil 90, Mil 212, Mil 360; Pv-a 39 (ummattaka˚), 98 (santa˚), 219.
2. character, disposition, behaviour Pv-a 13, Pv-a 35 (ullumpana˚), 220 (lokiya˚).
3. truth reality, sincerity Mil 164; Ja v.459; Ja v.198 (opp. musāvāda); Ja vi.469; sabhāvaṃ sincerely, devotedly Ja vi.486.
-dhamma principle of nature Ja i.214; -dhammatta ˚dhamma Vism 238. -bhūta true Ja iii.20.
sa4 + bhāva
(adj.) wealthy DN i.73.
sa3 + bhoga
property, possession Mil 139.
sa4 + bhoga
(adj.-n..) sharing food (?) Vin iv.95; Snp 102.
sa3 + bhojana
calmness, tranquillity, mental quiet Snp 896. samaṃ carati to become calm quiescent Ja iv.172. Cp. ˚cariyā & ˚cārin;.
fr. śam: see sammati1
fatigue Ja vi.565.
fr. śram: see sammati2
(adj.) 1. even, level Ja i.315; Ja iii.172; Mvu 23, Mvu 51. samaṃ karoti to level Dhp 178; Snp-a 66. Opp. visama.
2. like equal, the same DN i.123, DN i.174; SN i.12; Snp 90, Snp 226, Snp 799 Snp 842; Iti 17, Iti 64; Dhp 306; Mil 4. The compared noun is put in the instr.; or precedes as first part of cpd. 3. impartial, upright, of even mind, just AN i.74, AN i.293 sq. Snp 215, Snp 468, Snp 952.
4. sama˚; foll. by numerals, means “altogether,”. e.g. ˚tiṃsa thirty altogether Bv 18, Bv 18
5. Cases as adv.: instr. samena with justice, impartially (= dhammena K.S. i.321) Dhp 257; Ja i.180; acc. samaṃ equally DN ii.166; together with, at, DN ii.288; Mvu 11 Mvu 12.
-cāga equally liberal AN ii.62. -jana an ordinary man common people MN iii.154 = Vin i.349. -jātika of the same caste Ja i.68. -jīvitā regular life, living economically AN iv.281 sq. -tala level, even Ja i.7; Pv iv.121 (of a pond). -dhāraṇa equal support or sustenance Snp-a 95. -dhura carrying an equal burden, equal Ja i.191; asamadhura incomparable Snp 694 sq.; Ja i.193 But sama-dhura-ggahaṇa “complete imperiousness Vb-a 492 (see yugaggāha). -vāhita evenly borne along (of equanimity) Dhs-a 133. -vibhatta in equal shares Ja i.266. -sama exactly the same DN i.123; DN ii.136 Pp 64; Mil 410; DN-a i.290. -sīsin a kind of puggala lit. “equal-headed,” i.e. one who simultaneously attains an end of craving and of life (cp. PugA 186. The expln in J.P.T.S. 1891, 5 is wrong) Pp 13; Ne 190. -sūpaka with equal curry (when the curry is in quantity of onefourth of the rice) Vin iv.190.
Vedic sama, fr. sa2; see etym. under saṃ˚
(adj.) equal, like, same Mil 122, Mil 410; of the same height (of a seat) Vin ii.169 samakaṃ (adv.) equally Mil 82.
cp. BSk. samaka Divy 585
counted, known Sdhp 70, Sdhp 458.
saṃ + akkhāta
(adj.) being in unity, harmonious MN ii.239; DN iii.172; AN ii.240; AN v.74 sq.; plur. = all unitedly, in common Vin i.105; Ja vi.2731. AN i.70 = AN i.243; Snp 281, Snp 283; Dhp 194; Thig 161; Thag-a 143; Ja i.198 Ja i.209; samaggakaraṇa making for peace DN i.4 = AN ii.209 = Pp 57; DN-a i.74; samagganandin, samaggarata, and samaggārāma, rejoicing in peace, delighting in peace impassioned for peace DN i.4 = AN ii.209 = Pp 57; DN-a i.74; samaggavāsa dwelling in concord Ja i.362; Ja ii.27- samaggi-karoti to harmonize, to conciliate DN iii.161-Cp. sāmaggī etc.
saṃ + agga
(nt.) agreement, consent Vin i.316.
abstr. fr. samagga
(f.) the fact of being endowed or connected with (-˚) Ja iii.95 (paraloka˚); Vb-a 438 (fivefold: āyūhana˚ etc.).
abstr. fr. foll.
(adj.) endowed with, possessing Pp 13, Pp 14; Ja i.303; Mil 342; Vb-a 438 ■ samaṅgibhūta possessed of, provided with DN i.36; AN ii.125; Snp 321; Vin i.15; DN-a i.121; samaṅgi-karoti to provide with Ja vi.266, Ja vi.289, Ja vi.290 (cp. vi.323: akarī samangiṃ).
saṃ + angin
(f.) living in spiritual calm, quietism AN i.55; SN i.96, SN i.101 sq.; Iti 16, Iti 52; Dhp 388; Mil 19; Ja vi.128; Dhp-a iv.145.
sama1 + cariyā
equally liberal AN ii.62.
sama3 + cāga
(śama-) living in peace MN i.289.
possessed of equanimity AN i.65; AN iv.215; Snp-a 174 (˚paṭipadā-sutta).
to sit down together Ja ii.67 (samacchare); iv.356; vi.104, 127.
saṃ + acchati
(adj.) with mangled limbs Snp 673.
sam + ā + chida + gatta
(nt.) a festive gathering, fair a show, theatrical display. Originally a mountain cult as it was esp. held on the mountains near Rājagaha. Ja ii.13; Ja iii.541; Ja vi.277, Ja vi.559; SN v.170; DN-a i.84; Dhp-a iv.59; Dhs-a 255 ■ On character and history of the festival see Hardy, Album Kern pp. 61–66 ■ gir-aggasamajjaṃ mountain fair Vin ii.107, Vin ii.150; Vin iv.85, Vin iv.267, Vin iv.360; Dhp-a i.89, Dhp-a i.113. samajjaṃ karoti or kāreti to hold high revel Ja vi.383.
-ābhicaraṇa visiting fairs DN iii.183. -ṭṭhāna the place of the festival, the arena, Vin ii.150; Ja i.394; -dāna giving festivals Mil 278; -majjhe on the arena SN iv.306 sq.; Ja iii.541; -maṇḍala the circle of the assembly Ja i.283 sq.
cp. Epic Sk. samāja (fr. saṃ + aj ) congregation, gathering, company
(B ˚-guṃ) aor. from sam-adhi-gā. (See samadhigacchati. )
to bend together Vin iv.171, Vin iv.363.
sam + añc
pacified, calm SN i.236.
sama1 + cara
to think SN i.124; see sañcinteti.
(f.) designation, name DN i.202; DN ii.20; MN iii.68; SN ii.191; Snp 611, Snp 648; Ja ii.65; Dhs § 1306; loka˚ a common appellation, a popular expression DN i.202.
saṃ + aññā
designated, known, notorious SN i.65; Snp 118, Snp 820; Nd i.153; Vin ii.203.
saṃ + aññāta
a wanderer, recluse, religieux AN i.67; DN iii.16 DN iii.95 sq., 130 sq.; SN i.45; Dhp 184; of a non-Buddhist (tāpasa) Ja iii.390; an edifying etymology of the word Dhp-a iii.84: “samita-pāpattā s.,” cp. Dhp 265 “samitattā pāpānaṃ ʻsamaṇoʼ ti pavuccati”; four grades mentioned DN ii.151; MN i.63; compare Snp 84 sq.; the state of a Samaṇa is attended by eight sukhas Ja i.7; the Buddha is often mentioned and addressed by nonBuddhists as Samaṇa: thus DN i.4, DN i.87; Snp p.91, Snp p.99; Vin i.8 Vin i.350; Samaṇas often opposed to Brāhmaṇas thus, DN i.13; Iti 58, Iti 60; Sn, p. 90; Vin i.12; Vin ii.110 samaṇabrāhmaṇā, Samaṇas and Brāhmaṇas quite generally: “leaders in religious life” (cp. Dial. ii.165; DN i.5; DN ii.150; AN i.110,
173 sq.; Iti 64; Snp 189; Vin ii.295 samaṇadhammaṃ the duties of a samaṇa AN iii.371; Ja i.106, Ja i.107, Ja i.138; pure-samaṇa a junior who walks before a Bhikkhu Vin ii.32; pacchāsamaṇa one who walks behind Vin i.186; Vin ii.32; AN iii.137 ■ samaṇī a female recluse SN i.133; Thag-a 18; Ja v.424, Ja v.427; Vin iv.235 ■ assamaṇa not a true samaṇa Vin i.96.
-uddesa a novice, a sāmaṇera DN i.151; MN iii.128; SN v.161; Vin iv.139; AN ii.78; AN iii.343. Cp. BSk. śramaṇoddeśa Divy 160. -kuttaka (m.) who wears the dress of a Samaṇa Vin iii.68 sq. (= samaṇa-vesa-dhārako Bdhgh ib. p. 271).
BSk. śramaṇa, fr. śram, but mixed in meaning with śam
a contemptible (little) ascetic, “some sort of samaṇa” DN i.90; MN ii.47, MN ii.210; Snp p.21; Mil 222; DN-a i.254. At AN ii.48 samaṇaka is a slip for sasanaka. Cp. muṇḍaka in form & meaning.;
samaṇa + ka
hemmed Vin i.255 (kaṭhina).
sa + maṇḍala + kata
equality, evenness, normal state Vin i.183; AN iii.375 sq.; Mil 351.
fr. sama3
(adj.) passing beyond, overcoming DN i.34; DN ii.290; MN i.41, MN i.455; Vin i.3; Ja v.454; Vism 111.
saṃ + atikamma
to cross over, to transcend DN i.35; to elapse Mvu 13, Mvu 5; ger. samatikkamma DN i.35; M 41; pp. samatikkanta crossed over, or escaped from SN iii.80; Dhp 195.
saṃ + atikkamati
to stretch over, rise above, to reach beyond Ja iv.411 (ger. samatiggayha).
saṃ + ati + gṛh
(adj.) with even banks (of a pond) Ja v.407.
sama3 + tittha
(adj.) even or level with the border or bank, i.e. quite full, brimful DN i.244 DN ii.89; MN i.435; MN ii.7 = Mil 213; SN ii.134; SN v.170; Ja i.400; Ja i.235, Ja i.393; Mil 121; Vism 170 (pattaṃ ˚tittikaṃ pūretvā; v.l. ˚titthikaṃ); AN iii.403; Vin i.230; Vin iv.190 often written ˚tittika and ˚tittiya. [The form is probably connected with samaicchia-i.e. samaitthia (*samatisthita) in the Deśināmamālā viii.20 (Konow) Compare, however, Rhys Davids’ Buddhist Suttas, p. 1781; ˚-aṃ buñjāmi Mil 213; “I eat (only just) to the full” (opp. to bhiyyo bhuñjāmi) suggests the etymology: sama-titti + ka. Kern, Toev. s. v. as above.]
sama3 + tittha + ika
to despise (aor.) samatimaññi Thig 72.
saṃ + atimaññti
to transcend, overcome Snp 768, cp. Nd i.10.
saṃ + ativattati
to penetrate Dhp 13 = Thag 133.
saṃ + ativijjhati
(nt.) equality AN iii.359; Mvu 3, Mvu 7; equanimity, justice AN i.75.
abstr. fr. sama3
1. accomplished, brought to an end AN ii.193; Snp 781 = paripuṇṇa Nd i.65.
2. [cp. Sk. samasta, pp. of saṃ + as to throw cp. BSk. samasta, e.g. Jtm xxxi.90].complete, entire perfect Mil 349; Snp 881; Snp 1000; Nd i.289, Nd i.298. samattaṃ completely SN v.175; accomplished, full Snp 889.
cp. Sk. samāpta, pp. of saṃ + āp
(adj.) able, strong Ja i.179; Ja i.187; Snp-a 143.
cp. Sk. samartha, saṃ + artha
(adj.) unravelling Mil 1.
cp. Sk. samarthita, saṃ + pp. of arthayati
(adj.) able Sdhp 619.
fr. samattha
1. calm, quietude of heart MN i.33; AN i.61, AN i.95; AN ii.140; AN iii.86 sq. (ceto˚) 116 sq., 449; iv.360; v.99; DN iii.54, DN iii.213, DN iii.273; Dhp-a ii.177; SN iv.362; Dhs 11, Dhs 15, Dhs 54; cessation of the Sankhāras SN i.136; SN iii.133; AN i.133; Snp 732; Vin i.5. 2. settlement of legal questions (adhikaraṇa) Vin ii.93 Vin iv.207; cp. Dhs-a 144; s. paṭivijjhati Pts i.180.
-yānika who makes quietude his vehicle, devoted to quietude, a kind of Arahant; cp. Geiger, Saṃyutta trsln ii.172. -vipassanā introspection (“auto-hypnosis” Cpd. 202) for promoting calm [cp. śamatha-vipaśyanā Divy 95] SN v.52; AN ii.157; Dhp-a iv.140; also separately “calm & intuition,” e.g. MN i.494.
fr. śam, cp. BSk. śamatha
to attain Thag 4; aor. samajjhagā Iti 83; Iti 3rd pl. samajjhagaṃ SN i.103.
saṃ + adhigacchati
1. to reach, to get, obtain; ger. samadhiggayha MN i.506; MN ii.25; SN i.86; Iti 16.
2. to exceed, surpass, to overcome, to master Ja vi.261 (pañhaṃ samadhiggahetvā). Often confounded with samatigaṇhāti.
saṃ + adhigaṇhāti
variant reading SN iii.120 sq.; SN iv.46; the form is aor. of saṃdhū. See sañcopati.
(nt.) suppression Mvu 4, Mvu 35.
fr. śam
(adj.) endowed with mind AN ii.48 (text, samaṇaka); SN i.62.
sa3 + mana + ka
(adj.) immediate; usually in abl. (as adv.); samanantarā immediately, after, just after DN ii.156; Vin i.56; rattibhāga-samanantare at midnight Ja i.101.
-paccaya the relation of immediate contiguity Tikp 3, 61 sq.; Dukp 26; Vism 534.
saṃ + anantara
to walk along together Ja iii.373.
saṃ + anukkamati
to ask for reasons, to question closely DN i.26; MN i.130; AN v.156 sq.; ppr. med samanuggāhiyamāna being pressed MN i.130; AN v.156; Vin iii.91.
saṃ + anugāhati
to approve; samanujānissanti (fut. 3 pl.) MN i.398; SN iv.225; pp. samanuññāta approved, allowed Mvu 8, Mvu 11; aor. 1 sg. samanuññāsin Ja iv.117 (= samanuñño āsiṃ Com. ib. 11715).
saṃ + anujānāti
(adj.) approving DN iii.271; AN ii.253; AN iii.359; AN v.305; SN i.1, SN i.153; SN iv.187; Ja iv.117.
= next
(f.) approval SN i.1; MN i.359.
fr. samanujānāti
to see, perceive, regard DN i.69, DN i.73; DN ii.198; MN i.435 sq.; MN ii.205; Pot. Vin ii.89 ppr. ˚passanto Ja i.140; ppr. med. ˚passamāno DN ii.66; inf ˚passituṃ Vin i.14; rūpaṃ attato samanupassati to regard form as self SN iii.42.
saṃ + anupassati
(f.) considering SN iii.44; Ne 27.
fr. last
to pursue Mvu 10, Mvu 5.
saṃ + anubandhati
to converse or study together DN i.26, DN i.163; MN i.130; AN i.138; AN v.156 sq.; Vin iii.173 sq.; Vin iv.236 sq.; DN-a i.117.
saṃ + anubhāsati
(f.) conversation, repeating together Vin iii.174 sq.; Vin iv.236 sq.
fr. last
to approve; fut. 3 pl. ˚maññissanti MN i.398; SN iv.225; aor. 3 pl. ˚maññiṃsu Ja iv.134.
saṃ + anumaññati
to rejoice at, to approve MN i.398; SN iv.225; Mil 89.
saṃ + anumodati
to cross-question DN i.26, DN i.163; MN i.130; AN i.138; AN v.156; DN-a i.117.
saṃ + anuyuñjati
(saṃ + anussarati] to recollect, call to mind SN iv.196; Vin ii.183.
(adj.) all, entire Snp 672; Mil 3. occurs usually in oblique cases used adverbially, e.g. acc. samantaṃ completely Snp 442; abl. samantā (DN i.222; Ja ii.106; Vin i.32) & samantato (MN i.168 = Vin i.5; Mvu 1, Mvu 29; Vism 185; and in definitions of prefix pari˚; DN-a i.217; Vv-a 236; Pv-a 32) instr. samantena (Thig 487) on all sides, everywhere anywhere; also used as prepositions; thus, samantā Vesāliṃ, everywhere in Vesāli DN ii.98; samantato nagarassa all round the city Mvu 34, Mvu 39; samāsamantato everywhere DN-a i.61.
-cakkhu all-seeing, an epithet of the Buddha MN i.168; Vin i.5; Snp 345, etc.; Mil 111; Nd i.360. -pāsādika all-pleasing, quite serene AN i.24; ˚kā Buddhaghosa’s commentary on the Vinaya Piṭaka DN-a i.84 -bhaddakatta complete auspiciousness, perfect loveliness Snp-a 444; Vb-a 132. -rahita entirely gone Ja i.29 -veda one whose knowledge (of the Veda) is complete Ja vi.213.
saṃ + anta “of complete ends”
the dark of night Vin iv.54; Dhp-a ii.94; SN iii.60.
saṃ + andhakāra
(adj.) followed by, possessed of, endowed with (instr.) DN i.50; DN i.88; Vin i.54 Snp p.78, Snp p.102, Snp p.104. Snp-a 177 (in expln of ending “-in”) 216 (of “-mant”); Pv-a 46, Pv-a 73 ■ nt. abstr. ˚annāgatatta Pv-a 49.
saṃ + anvāgata
to lead, conduct properly, control, pres. sam-anv-āneti MN iii.188; ppr. ˚annānayamāna MN i.477.
samanvā + nī
struck (together), played upon DN ii.171.
saṃ + anvāhata
1. to concentrate the mind on, to consider reflect DN ii.204; MN i.445; AN iii.162 sq., 402 sq.; SN i.114–2. to pay respect to, to honour MN ii.169; Vin i.180.
saṃ + anu + āharati; cp. BSk. samanvāharati
concentration, bringing together MN i.190 sq.; DN-a i.123; Mil 189.
saṃ + anu + āhāra
to seek, to look for, to examine DN i.105; SN iii.124; SN iv.197; Mil 37; DN-a i.274 pres. also samanvesati SN i.122.
saṃ + anvesati
(f.) search, examination MN i.317.
fr. last
(nt.) considering; a˚ SN iii.261.
to consider, ger. ekkhiya Sdhp 536; cp. samavekkh˚.
saṃ + apekkhati
1. made over, consigned Dhp 315; Snp 333; Thig 451.
2. endowed with (-˚) affected with, possessed of Ja v.102 (kaṇṭakena); Pv iv.16 (= allīna Pv-a 265); Pv-a 162 (soka-salla˚-hadaya) Vism 303 (sallena) ■ yasabhoga˚; possessed of fame wealth Dhp 303; dukkhena afflicted with pain Vv 523 pañcehi kāmaguṇehi s. endowed with the 5 pleasures of the senses DN i.36, DN i.60; Vin i.15; DN-a i.121.
pp. of samappeti
to hand over, consign, commit, deposit, give Mvu 7, Mvu 72; Mvu 19, Mvu 30; Mvu 21, Mvu 21; Mvu 34, Mvu 21; Dāvs ii.64 ■ pp. samappita.
saṃ + appeti
struck, beaten (thoroughly) Vism 153; DN-a i.140.
saṃ + abbhāhata
to recollect, to know Ja vi.126.
saṃ + abhijānati
joyful Thig 461.
to inaugurate as a king Mvu 4, Mvu 6; v.14.
saṃ + abhisiñcati
congregation; time, condition, etc ■ At Dhs-a 57 sq we find a detailed expln of the word samaya (s-sadda) with meanings given as follows: (1) samavāya (“harmony in antecedents” trsln), (2) khaṇa (opportunity) (3) kāla (season), (4) samūha (crowd, assembly), (5) hetu (condition), (6) diṭṭhi (opinion). (7) paṭilābha (acquisition), (8) pahāna (elimination), (9) paṭivedha (penetration) Bdhgh illustrates each one with fitting examples cp. Dhs-a 61 ■ We may group as follows: 1. coming together, gathering; a crowd, multitude DN i.178 (˚pavādaka debating hall); ii.254 sq.; Mil 257; Ja i.373; Pv-a 86 (= samāgama). samayā in a crowd Pv iii.34 (so read for samayyā; Pv-a 189 “sangamma”). 2. consorting with, intercourse Mil 163; Dhp-a i.90 sabba˚; consorting with everybody Ja iv.317.
3. time point of time, season DN i.1; Snp 291, Snp 1015; Vin i.15; Vb-a 157 (maraṇa˚); Vism 473 (def.) ■ samayā samayaṃ upādāya from time to time Iti 75. Cases adverbially ekaṃ samayaṃ at one time DN i.47, DN i.87, DN i.111; tena samayena at that time DN i.179; Dhp-a i.90. aparena s. in course of time, later Pv-a 31, Pv-a 68; yasmiṃ samaye at which time DN i.199; Dhs-a 61. ekasmiṃ samaye some time, once Ja i.306. paccūsa˚; at daybreak Pv-a 38; aḍḍharatti˚; at midnight Pv-a 155; cp. ratta˚.
4. proper time, due season, opportunity, occasion Snp 388; Vin iv.77; Bv ii.181; Mvu 22, Mvu 59; Vb-a 283 sq.; aññatra samayā except at due season Vin iii.212; Vin iv.77; samaye at the right time Ja i.27 ■ asamaya inopportune, unseasonable DN iii.263, DN iii.287.
5. coincidence, circumstance MN i.438 akkhara˚; spelling Dhp-a i.181.
6. condition, state extent, sphere (cp. defn of Bdhgh, above 9); taken dogmatically as “ diṭṭhi, ” doctrine, view (equal to above defn 6) Iti 14 (imamhi samaye); Dhp-a i.90 (jānana˚) Dāvs vi.4 (˚antara var. views). bāhira˚; state of an outsider, doctrine of outsiders, i.e. brahmanic Dhp-a iii.392, cp. brāhmaṇānaṃ samaye DN-a i.291; ariyānaṃ samaye Mil 229.
7. end, conclusion, annihilation Snp 876; ˚vimutta finally emancipated AN iii.173; AN v.336 (a˚); Pp 11; cp. Dhs-a 57 ■ Pp. abhi˚.
-vasaṭha at AN ii.41 is to be read as samavasaṭṭha, i.e. thoroughly given up. Thus Kern, Toev. The same passage occurs at DN iii.269 as samavaya-saṭhesana (see under saṭha ).
cp. Sk. samaya, fr. saṃ + i. See also samiti
battle Dāvs iv.1
sa + mara
(adj.) impure, contaminated Vin i.5; samalā (f.) dustbin SN ii.270 (= gāmato gūthanikkhamana-magga, i.e. sewer K.S. ii.203); see sandhi˚.
BSk. samala
to decorate, adorn Mvu 7, Mvu 56; ˚kata pp. Dāvs v.36: ˚karitvā Ja vi.577.
saṃ + alankaroti
ready Snp 345 (˚-ā savanāya sotā).
(adj.) having the shoulders round, one of the lakkhaṇas of a Buddha DN ii.18; DN iii.144, DN iii.164; Dial. ii.15: “his bust is equally rounded.”
sama + vatta + kh., but BSk. sasaṃvṛtta˚
living together with the same duties, on terms of equality Ja i.236.
sama + vatta1 + saṃvāsa
(nt.) concurrence, co-existence Ne 79.
annihilation, termination (?) see samaya (cpd.) & saṭha.
of a goad or spur Thig 210. See samosarati.
(nt.) a storeroom MN i.451.
sama + vāpaka, cp. vapati1
(m.) coming together, combination SN iv.68; Mil 376; Dhs-a 57, Dhs-a 196; Pv-a 104; Vv-a 20, Vv-a 55. samavāyena in common Vv-a 336; khaṇa-s˚ a momentary meeting Ja i.381.
to consider, examine MN i.225; AN ii.32; Iti 30.
saṃ + avekkhati
one who considers Iti 120.
fr. last
(adj.) promoting a good digestion DN ii.177; DN iii.166; MN ii.67; AN iii.65 sq., 103, 153; v.15.
sama + vepākin, cp. vepakka
to transfer, entrust DN ii.231.
read saṃvossajjati !
a name Dāvs v.67.
saṃ + ahvaya
(aor.) Ja iii.201 (text, samāsāsisuṃ, cp. J.P.T.S. 1885, 60; read taṃ asāyisuṃ).
refreshed, relieved Ja iii.189.
saṃ + assattha2
to be refreshed Ja i.176; Caus. samassāseti to relieve, refresh Ja i.175.
saṃ + assasati
refreshing, relief Dhs-a 150 (expln of passaddhi).
saṃ + assāsa
leaning towards Thag 525.
saṃ + assita
(f.) 1. a year Dhp 106; Mvu 7, Mvu 78. - 2. in agginisamā a pyre Snp 668, Snp 670.
Vedic samā
to pull along; to entice; ger. ˚iya Mvu 37, Mvu 145.
saṃ + ākaḍḍhati
covered, filled SN i.6; Mil 342.
saṃ + ākiṇṇa
(adj.) 1. filled, crowded B ii.4 = Ja i.3; Mil 331, Mil 342.
2. crowded together Vin ii.117
3. confused, jumbled together Ja v.302.
saṃ + ākula
to meet together, to assemble Bv ii.171; Snp 222; to associate with, to enter with, to meet, DN ii.354; Snp 834; Ja ii.82; to go to see Vin i.308; to arrive, come Snp 698; aor. 1 sg. ˚gañchiṃ DN ii.354; DN ii.3rd ˚gañchi Dhp 210; Ja ii.62; aor. 2 sg. ˚gamā Snp 834; ger. ˚gamma B ii.171 = Ja i.26; ger. ˚gantvā Vin i.308; pp. samāgata.
saṃ + āgacchati
met, assembled Dhp 337; Snp 222.
pp. of samāgacchati
meeting, meeting with, intercourse AN ii.51; AN iii.31; Mil 204; cohabitation DN ii.268 meeting, assembly Ja ii.107; Mil 349; Dhp-a iii.443 (three: yamaka-pāṭihāriya˚; dev’orohaṇa˚; Gangārohaṇa˚).
saṃ + āgama
to behave, act, practise MN ii.113.
saṃ + ācarati
conduct, behaviour DN ii.279; DN iii.106, DN iii.217; MN ii.113; AN ii.200, AN ii.239; AN iv.82; Snp 279; Vin ii.248; Vin iii.184.
saṃ + ācāra
ardour, zeal AN iii.346.
saṃ + ātapa
instructing, arousing MN i.145; AN ii.97; AN iv.296, AN iv.328 AN v.155; SN v.162; Mil 373; Iti 107; Dhp-a ii.129.
fr. samādapeti; cp. BSk. samādāpaka Divy 142
(nt.) instructing, instigating MN iii.132.
adviser, instigator MN i.16.
to cause to take, to incite, rouse Pp 39, Pp 55; Vin i.250; Vin iii.73; DN-a i.293, DN-a i.300; aor. ˚dapesi DN ii.42, DN ii.95 DN ii.206; Mil 195; Snp 695; ger. ˚dapetvā DN i.126; Vin i.18 ger. samādetvā (sic) Mvu 37, Mvu 201; ppr. pass. ˚dapiyamāna DN ii.42.
saṃ + ādapeti, cp. BSk. samādāpayati Divy 51
to put together SN i.169. jotiṃ s. to kindle a fire Vin iv.115; cittaṃ s. to compose the mind, concentrate MN i.116; pres. samādheti Thig 50; pr. part. samādahaṃ SN v.312; ppr. med. samādahāna SN i.169; aor 3rd pl. samādahaṃsu DN ii.254. Pass samādhiyati to be stayed, composed DN i.73; MN i.37; Mil 289; Caus. II. samādahāpeti Vin iv.115 ■ pp samāhita.
saṃ + ādahati1
1. taking, bringing; asamādānacāra (m.) going for alms without taking with one (the usual set of three robes) Vin i.254.
2. taking upon oneself, undertaking acquiring MN i.305 sq.; AN i.229 sq.; AN ii.52; Ja i.157, Ja i.219; Vin iv.319; Kp-a 16, Kp-a 142. kammasamādāna acquiring for oneself of Karma DN i.82; AN iii.417; AN v.33; SN v.266 SN v.304; Iti 58 sq., 99 sq.; Vb-a 443 sq.
3. resolution vow Vin ii.268; Ja i.233; Mil 352.
taken up, undertaken AN ii.193.
pp. of samādiyati
to take with oneself, to take upon oneself, to undertake DN i.146; imper. samādiya Bv ii.118 = Ja i.20; aor. samādiyi SN i.232; Ja i.219; ger samādiyitvā SN i.232; & samādāya having taken up, i.e. with DN i.71; Pp 58; DN-a i.207; Mvu 1, Mvu 47; having taken upon himself, conforming to DN i.163; DN ii.74; Dhp 266; Snp 792, Snp 898, Snp 962; samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu he adopts and trains himself in the precepts DN i.63; SN v.187; Iti 118; Snp 962 (cp. Nd i.478) ■ pp samādinna.
saṃ + ādiyati1
to indicate, to command DN i.211; Mvu 38, Mvu 59.
saṃ + ādisati
(nt.) putting together, fixing; concentration Vism 84 (= sammā ādhānaṃ ṭhapanaṃ) in defn of samādhi as “samādhān’ aṭṭhena.”
saṃ + ā + dhā
1. concentration; a concentrated, self-collected, intent state of mind and meditation which, concomitant with right living, is a necessary condition to the attainment of higher wisdom and emancipation. In the Subha-suttanta of the Dīgha (DN i.209 sq.) samādhi-khandha (“section on concentration”) is the title otherwise given to the cittasampadā, which, in the ascending order of merit accruing from the life of a samaṇa (see Sāmaññaphala-suttanta, and cp. Dial. i.57 sq.) stands between the sīla-sampadā and the paññā-sampadā. In the Ambaṭṭha-sutta the corresponding terms are sīla, caraṇa, vijjā (D. i.100) Thus samādhi would comprise (a) the guarding of the senses (indriyesu gutta-dvāratā), (b) self-possession (sati-sampajañña), (c) contentment (santuṭṭhi), (d emancipation from the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) (e) the 4 jhānas. In the same way we find samādhi grouped as one of the sampadās at AN iii.12 (sīla˚ samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚), and as samādhi-khandha (with sīla˚ & paññā˚) at DN iii.229 (+ vimutti˚); AN i.125 AN ii.20; AN iii.15; AN v.326; Nd i.21; Nd ii.p. 277 (s. v. sīla) It is defined as cittassa ekaggatā MN i.301; Dhs 15; Dhs-a 118; cp. Cpd. 89 n. 4; identified with avikkhepa Dhs 57, and with samatha Dhs 54 ■ sammā˚; is one the constituents of the eightfold ariya-magga, e.g. DN iii.277 Vb-a 120 sq ■ See further DN ii.123 (ariya); Vin i.97 Vin i.104; SN i.28; Nd i.365; Mil 337; Vism 84 sq. (with definition), 289 (+ vipassanā), 380 (˚vipphārā iddhi) Vb-a 91; Dhp-a i.427; and on term in general Heiler Buddhistische Versenkung 104 sq.
2. Description characterization of; samādhi: Its four nimittas or signs are the four satipaṭṭhānas MN i.301; six conditions and six hindrances AN iii.427; other hindrances MN iii.158. The second jhāna is born from samādhi DN ii.186; it is a condition for attaining kusalā dhammā AN i.115; Mil 38; conducive to insight AN iii.19, AN iii.24 sq., 200; SN iv.80; to seeing heavenly sights etc. DN i.173; to removing mountains etc. AN iii.311; removes the delusions of self AN i.132 sq.; leads to Arahantship AN ii.45 the ānantarika s. Snp 226; cetosamādhi (rapture of mind) DN i.13; AN ii.54; AN iii.51; SN iv.297; citta˚; id. Ne 16. dhammasamādhi almost identical with samatha SN iv.350 sq ■ Two grades of samādhi distinguished viz. upacāra -s. (preparatory concentration) and appanā -s (attainment concentration) DN-a i.217; Vism 126; Cpd. 54, 56 sq.; only the latter results in jhāna; to these a 3rd (preliminary) grade is added as khaṇika˚; (momentary at Vism 144 ■ Three kinds of s. are distinguished suññata or empty, appaṇihita or aimless, and animitta or signless AN i.299; SN iv.360; cp. iv.296; Vin iii.93; Mil 337; cp. 333 sq.; Dhs-a 179 sq., 222 sq., 290 sq. see Yogāvacara’s Manual p. xxvii; samādhi (tayo samādhī) is savitakka savicāra, avitakka vicāramatta or avitakka avicāra DN iii.219; Kv 570; cp. 413; Mil 337; Dhs-a 179 sq.; it is fourfold chanda-, viriya-, citta-, and vīmaṃsā-samādhi DN ii.213; SN v.268 ■ Another fourfold division is that into hāna-bhāgiya, ṭhiti˚, visesa˚ nibbedha˚ DN iii.277 (as “dhammā duppaṭivijjhā”).
-indriya the faculty of concentration AN ii.149; Dhs 15 -khandha the section on s. see above 1. -ja produced by concentration DN i.74; DN iii.13; Vism 158. -parikkhāra requisite to the attainment of samādhi: either 4 (the sammappadhānas) MN i.301; or 7: DN ii.216; DN iii.252; AN iv.40. -bala the power of concentration AN i.94 AN ii.252; DN iii.213, DN iii.253; Dhs 28. -bhāvanā cultivation attainment of samādhi MN i.301; AN ii.44 sq. (four different kinds mentioned); iii.25 sq.; DN iii.222; Vism 371 -saṃvattanika conducive to concentration AN ii.57; SN iv.272 sq.; DN iii.245; Dhs 1344. -sambojjhaṅga the s. constituent of enlightment DN iii.106, DN iii.226, DN iii.252 Vism 134 = Vb-a 283 (with the eleven means of cultivating it).
fr. saṃ + ā + dhā
(adj.) excessive, abundant DN ii.151; Ja ii.383; Ja iv.31.
sama + adhika
is Passive of samādahati.
(adj.) similar, equal, even, same Snp 18, Snp 309; Ja ii.108. Cp. sāmañña1.
Vedic samāna, fr. sama3
1. being, existing DN i.18, DN i.60; Ja i.218; Pv-a 129 (= santo), 167 (id.).
2. a kind of god DN ii.260.
-āsanika entitled to a seat of the same height Vin ii.169. -gatika identical Tikp 35. -bhāva equanimity Snp 702. -vassika having spent the rainy season together Vin i.168 sq. -saṃvāsa living together with equals Dhp 302 (a˚), cp. Dhp-a iii.462. -saṃvāsaka belonging to the same communion Vin i.321. -sīmā the same boundary parish Vin i.321; ˚ma belonging to the same parish Vin ii.300.
ppr. fr. as to be
(adj.) equanimous, of even mind AN iv.364.
samāna + attan
(f.) equanimity, impartiality AN ii.32 = AN ii.248; AN iv.219, AN iv.364; DN iii.152, DN iii.190 sq., 232.
abstr. fr. last
(all) equally, in common Snp 24.
instr. fem. of samāna, used adverbially, Vedic samānyā
brought home, settled Mil 349.
pp. of samāneti
1. to bring together Ja i.68.
2. to bring, produce Ja i.433.
3. to put together, cp. Ja i.120 Ja i.148.
4. to collect, enumerate Ja i.429.
5. to calculate (the time) Ja i.120, Ja i.148; aor. samānayi DN-a i.275 pp. samānīta.
saṃ + āneti
1. to come into, enter upon, attain DN i.215 (samādhiṃ samāpajji); Vin iii.241 (Pot. ˚pajjeyya); samāpattiṃ Ja i.77; arahattamaggaṃ AN ii.42 sq.; Vin i.32; saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ to attain the trance of cessation SN iv.293; kayavikkayaṃ to engage in buying and selling Vin iii.241; sākacchaṃ to engage in conversation DN ii.109; tejodhātuṃ to convert one’s body into fire Vin i.25; Vin ii.76.
2. to become SN iii.86 (aor. 3rd pl. samāpaduṃ) ■ pp. samāpajjita samāpanna;.
saṃ + āpajjati
(nt.) entering upon, passing through (?) Mil 176.
fr. last
attained, reached, got into DN ii.109 (parisā ˚pubbā).
pp. of ˚āpajjati
misprint for sammā˚ AN i.69.
(f.) attainment AN iii.5; SN ii.150 sq.; SN iv.293 (saññā-vedayita-nirodha˚); Dhs 30 Dhs 101; a stage of meditation AN i.94; Dhs 1331; Ja i.343 Ja i.473; Pv-a 61 (mahā-karuṇā˚); Nd i.100, Nd i.106, Nd i.139, Nd i.143 the Buddha acquired anekakoṭisata-sahassā s. Ja i.77. The eight attainments comprise the four Jhānas, the realm of the infinity of space, realm of the infinity of consciousness, realm of nothingness, realm of neither consciousness nor unconsciousness Pts i.8, Pts i.20 sq. Nd i.108, Nd i.328; Bv 192 = Ja i.28, Ja i.54; necessary for becoming a Buddha Ja i.14; acquired by the Buddha Ja i.66 the nine attainments, the preceding and the trance of cessation of perception and sensation SN ii.216, SN ii.222 described MN i.159 sq. etc.; otherwise called anupubbavihārā DN ii.156; AN iv.410, AN iv.448 & passim [cp. Divy 95 etc.] ■ In collocation with jhāna, vimokkha, and samādhi Vin i.97; AN iii.417 sq.; cp. Cpd. 59, 133 n. 3 -˚bhāvanā realizing the attainments Ja i.67; ˚kusalatā success in attainment DN iii.212; Dhs 1331 sq.
fr. saṃ + ā + pad
one who has acquired Ja i.406.
fr. last
(adj.) longing for attainment Kv 502 sq.
samāpatti + esiya, adj. to esikā
having attained, got to, entered, reached SN iv.293 (saññā-nirodhaṃ); AN ii.42 (arahatta-maggaṃ entered the Path); Dhp 264 (icchālobha˚ given to desire); Kv 572 (in special sense attaining the samāpattis).
pp. of samāpajjati
(adj.) possessed of the samāpattis DN-a i.119.
last + ka
to complete, conclude Mvu 5, Mvu 280; Mvu 30, Mvu 55; DN-a i.307 (desanaṃ) ■ pp. samatta2.
saṃ + āpeti
to come together, to be united Ja iii.38.
saṃ + āyāti
combined, united Mil 274.
saṃ + āyuta
combination, conjunction DN-a i.95; Sdhp 45, Sdhp 469.
saṃ + āyoga
(adj.) including Māra Vin i.11 = SN v.423; DN i.250; DN iii.76, DN iii.135 & passim.;
sa3 + māra + ka
undertaken SN iv.197; Dhp 293; Ja ii.61.
pp. of samārabhati
1. undertaking, effort, endeavour, activity AN ii.197 sq. (kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚) Vin iv.67.
2. injuring, killing, slaughter Snp 311; DN i.5; DN-a i.77; AN ii.197; SN v.470; Pp 58; Dhs-a 146- appasamārambha (written ˚rabbha) connected with little (or no) injury (to life) DN i.143. Cp. ārabhati1.
saṃ + ārambha
to begin, undertake MN i.227; Mvu 5, Mvu 79 ■ pp. samāraddha.
saṃ + ārabhati2
to climb up, to ascend, enter; pres. samārohati Ja vi.209 (cp. samorohatī p. 206, read samārohatī); aor. samārūhi Mvu 14, Mvu 38 ■ pp. samārūḷha ■ Caus. samāropeti to raise, cause to enter Mil 85; to put down, enter Ne 4, Ne 206.
saṃ + āruhati
ascended, entered MN i.74.
pp. of samāruhati
one of the Hāras Ne 1, Ne 2, Ne 4, Ne 108, Ne 205 sq., 256 sq.
fr. samāropeti
to speak to, address Ja i.478. At Ja i.51 it seems to mean “to recover the power of speech.” Samavaya = samavaya
saṃ + ālapati
, closely united Ja vi.475 (in verse).
1. compound, combination Vism 82; Snp-a 303; Kp-a 228. Cp. vyāsa.
2. an abridgment Mvu 37, Mvu 244.
fr. saṃ + ās
to sit together, associate; Pot. 3 sg. samāsetha SN i.17, SN i.56 sq.; Ja ii.112; Ja v.483, Ja v.494; Thag 4.
saṃ + āsati
(nt.) sitting together with, company Snp 977.
saṃ + āsana
“exactly the same” at Ud 85 (= DN ii.135) read sama˚.
to obtain, get; ger. samāsajja Ja iii.218.
saṃ + āsādeti
hit, struck Snp 153 (ayosanku˚); Mil 181, Mil 254, Mil 304. Sankusamāhata name of a purgatory MN i.337.
saṃ + āhata
1. put down, fitted Ja iv.337;
2. collected (of mind), settled, composed, firm, attentive DN i.13; SN i.169; AN ii.6 (˚indriya); iii.312, 343 sq.v.3, 93 sq., 329 sq.; Snp 212, Snp 225, Snp 972 etc.; Dhp 362; Iti 119; Pp 35; Vin iii.4; Mil 300; Vism 410; Nd i.501
3. having attained SN i.48 (cp. K.S. i.321 & Mil 352).;
pp. of samādahati
to succeed, prosper, take effect DN i.71; Snp 766 (cp. Nd i.2 = labhati etc.); Bv ii.59; Ja i.14, Ja i.267; Pot. samijjheyyuṃ DN i.71; aor. samijjhi Ja i.68; Fut. samijjhissati Ja i.15 ■ pp. samiddha. Caus. II. ˚ijjhāpeti to endow or invest with (acc.) Ja vi.484.
saṃ + ijjhati
(nt.) fulfilment, success Dhp-a i.112.
fr. samijjhati
ordered, requested Ja vi.12 (= āṇatta C.).
saṃ + ajjhiṭṭha
1. to double up MN i.326.
2. (intrs.) to be moved or shaken Dhp 81 (= calati kampati Dhp-a ii.149). See also sammiñjati.
saṃ + iñjati of ṛñj or ṛj to stretch
(nt.) doubling up, bending back (orig. stretching!) Vism 500 (opp. pasāraṇa). See also sammiñjana.
fr. samiñjati
gathered, assembled Vv 6410; Vv-a 277 ■ nt. as adv. samitaṃ continuously MN i.93; AN iv.13; Iti 116; Mil 70, Mil 116.
saṃ + ita, pp. of sameti
equal (in measure), like SN i.6.
sa + mita, of mā
quiet, appeased Dhp-a iii.84.
pp. of sammati1
arranged, put in order Ja v.201 (= saṃvidahita C.).
pp. of saṃ + śam to labour
(nt.) state of being quieted Dhp 265.
fr. samita3
one who has quieted himself, calm, Snp 449, Snp 520; SN i.62, SN i.188; AN ii.49, AN ii.50. Cp BSk. śamitāvin & samitāvin.;
samita3 + āvin, cp. vijitāvin
(f.) assembly DN ii.256; Dhp 321; Ja iv.351; Pv ii.313 (= sannipāta Pv-a 86); Dhp-a iv.13.
fr. saṃ + i
1. succeeded, successful Vin i.37; Bv ii.4 = Ja i.3; Mil 331.
2. rich, magnificent Ja vi.393; Ja iii.14; samiddhena (adv.) successfully Ja vi.314.
pp. of samijjhati
(f.) success, prosperity Dhp 84; SN i.200.
fr. samijjhati
(adj.) rich in, abounding in Sdhp 421.
samiddhi + ka
(adj.) richly endowed with Thag-a 18 (Ap v.23); fem ■ inī Ja v.90.
fr. samiddhi
(f.) fuel, firewood Snp-a 174.
fr. saṃ + idh; see indhana
collected, composed Vin i.245 = DN i.104 = DN i.238; AN iii.224 = AN iii.229 = DN-a i.273; DN i.241, DN i.272.
= saṃhita
D ii.94: see sāmīcī.
one who meets, assembles; pl. samītāro Ja v.324.
= sametar
(adj.) near, close (to) Snp-a 43 (bhumma-vacana), 174, 437; Kp-a 111; Pv-a 47 (dvāra˚ magga) (nt.) proximity DN i.118. Cases adverbially: acc. ˚aṃ near to Pv-a 107; loc. ˚-e near (with gen.) Snp-a 23, Snp-a 256; Pv-a 10, Pv-a 17, Pv-a 67, Pv-a 120.
-ga approaching Mvu 4, Mvu 27; Mvu 25, Mvu 74. -cara being near Dhs-a 193. -cārin being near DN i.206; DN ii.139 -ṭṭha standing near Mvu 37, Mvu 164.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. samīpa
(adj.) being near Mvu 33, Mvu 52.
samīpa + ka
air, wind Dāvs iv.40.
fr. saṃ + īr
to be moved Vin i.185; Dhp 81; Dhp-a ii.149 ■ pp. samīrita Ja i.393.
saṃ + īrati
stirred, moved Ja i.393.
saṃ + īrita
to move, stir; to be active; to long for, strive after Snp 1064 (cp. Nd ii.651); Vv 51; Vv-a 35; Ja v.388 ■ pp. samīhita.
saṃ + īhati
(nt.) endeavour, striving after, pursuit Ja v.388.
pp. of samīhati
to extol, to praise Snp 132, Snp 438; MN i.498 ■ pp. samukkaṭṭha.
saṃ + ukkaṃsati
exalted AN iv.293; Thag 632.
saṃ + ukkaṭṭha
= ukkācanā Vb 352; Vism 23.
despised, rejected Vin iii.95; Vin iv.27.
saṃ + ukkheṭita
a box, basket Ja i.265, Ja i.372, Ja i.383; Mil 153, Mil 247; Sdhp 360 (read samuggābhaṃ) Samugga-jātaka the 436th Jātaka Ja iii.527 sq. (called Karaṇḍaka-Jātaka ibid.; v.455).
Class. Sk. samudga
to seize, grasp, embrace; ger. samuggahāya Snp 797; Nd i.105 ■ pp. samuggahīta.
saṃ + uggaṇhati
arisen Vv-a 280; Ja iv.403 (text samuggagata).
saṃ + uggata
rise, origin Vb-a 21 (twofold, of the khandhas).
saṃ + uggama
seized, taken up Snp 352, Snp 785, Snp 801, Snp 837, Snp 907; Nd i.76, Nd i.100, Nd i.193.
pp. of samuggaṇhāti
to throw out, eject Vv-a 199; to cry aloud Dāvs v.29.
saṃ + uggirati
uprooting, abolishing, removal DN i.135; MN i.136; AN ii.34; AN iii.407; AN v.198; SN ii.263; SN iii.131; SN iv.31; Vin i.107, Vin i.110; Ja iii.397.
saṃ + ugghāta; BSk. samudghāṭa Lal 36, Lal 571
(adj.) removing Mil 278.
fr. last
abolished, completely removed; nt. abstr. ˚tta Mil 101.
pp. of samugghāteti, see samūhanati
suitable Vin iv.147 (must mean something else here, perhaps “hurt,” or “frightened”) Dāvs v.55.
saṃ + ucita, pp. of uc to be pleased
collection, accumulation Ja ii.235 (the signification of the particle vā); Snp-a 266 (id.) ■ samuccaya-kkhandhaka the third section of Cullavagga Vin ii.38–72.
saṃ + uccaya
see samuñchaka.
to be consolidated, to arise samucchissatha (Conditional) DN ii.63.
derivation and meaning uncertain; Windisch, Buddha’s Geburt, p. 39, n. 1 derives it fr. saṃ + mucchati Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 157
infatuated SN i.187; SN iv.71; Thag 1219. It is better to read pamucchita at all passages.
saṃ + mucchita
to extirpate, abolish, spoil, give up DN i.34; DN ii.74; MN i.101 sq., 360; Ja iv.63. pp. samucchinna.
saṃ + ucchindati
cut off, extirpated DN i.34.
saṃ + ucchinna
cutting off, abolishing, giving up MN i.360; Kp-a 142; sammā s. Pts i.101; ˚pahāna relinquishing by extirpation Vism 5; Snp-a 9; ˚maraṇa dying by extirpation (of saṃsāra) Vism 229; ˚visuddhi Pts ii.3; ˚suññaṃ Pts ii.180.
saṃ + uccheda
(adj.) resplendent Ja i.89, Ja i.92 (pañcavaṇṇa-vattha˚). raṃsi-jāla˚ resplendent with the blaze of rays Vv-a 12, Vv-a 14, Vv-a 166.
saṃ + ujjala
(adj.) straightforward, perfect Snp 352; SN iv.196 (text saṃmuju).
saṃ + uju
(adj.) only as nt. adv. ˚ṃ gleaning, (living) by gleaning SN i.19; Ja iv.466 (˚ṃ carati).
saṃ + uncha + ka
to rise up, to originate; pres. samuṭṭhāti Vin v.1; aor. samuṭṭhahi Mvu 28 Mvu 16 ■ pp. samuṭṭhita ■ Caus. samuṭṭhāpeti to raise to originate, set on foot Ja i.144, Ja i.191, Ja i.318.
saṃ + uṭṭhahati
(nt.) rising, origination, cause; as adj. (-˚) arising from AN ii.87; Dhs 766 sq., 981, 1175; Mil 134, Mil 302, Mil 304; Ja i.207; Ja iv.171; Kp-a 23, Kp-a 31, Kp-a 123 Vism 366.
saṃ + uṭṭhāna
(adj.) originating Dhs-a 263.
fr. last
(f. ˚ikā) occasioning, causing Dhs-a 344; Vv-a 72.
fr. samuṭṭhāpeti
arisen, originated, happened, occurred Ja ii.196; Dhs 1035.
pp. of samuṭṭhahati
to pass over Mil 372.
saṃ + uttarati
(adj.) instigating, inciting, gladdening MN i.146; AN ii.97; AN iv.296, AN iv.328; AN v.155; SN v.162; Iti 107.
fr. samuttejeti
to excite, gladden, to fill with enthusiasm Vin i.18; DN i.126. Cp. BSk. samuttejayati e.g. Divy 80.
saṃ + ud + tij
1. rise, origin DN i.17; DN ii.33, DN ii.308; DN iii.227; AN i.263 (kamma˚); Vin i.10; Snp p.135; Iti 16 (samuddaya metri causa) etc. dukkha˚; the origin of ill, the second ariya-sacca, e.g. DN iii.136; AN i.177 Vism 495 (where samudaya is expld in its parts as sam u + aya); Vb-a 124.
2. bursting forth, effulgence (pabhā˚) Ja i.83.
3. produce, revenue DN i.227.
saṃ + udaya
to result, rise; to be got, to be at hand DN i.116; MN i.104 ■ pp. samudāgata.
saṃ + udāgacchati
arisen, resulted; received SN ii.24; Snp 648 (= āgata C.).
pp. of last
beginning Ja i.2.
saṃ + ud + āgama
1. to be current, to be in use MN i.40 (= kāya-vacī-dvāraṃ sampatta s. MA 182)
2. to occur to, to befall, beset, assail MN i.109, MN i.112 MN i.453; SN ii.273; Iti 31; Vism 343.
3. to behave towards to converse with (instr.), to address Vin i.9; DN ii.154 DN ii.192; AN iii.124, AN iii.131; AN iv.415, AN iv.440; AN v.103; Ja i.192.
4. to practise Ja ii.33 (aor. ˚ācariṃsu).
5. to claim, to boast of Vin iii.91 ■ pp. samudāciṇṇa.
saṃ + ud + ācarati
(nt.) practice Mil 59.
abstr. fr. samudācarita, pp. of samudācarati
behaviour, practice, habit, familiarity Ja iv.22; Snp-a 6; Dhs-a 392; Pv-a 279.
saṃ + ud + ācāra
practised, indulged in Ja ii.33; Tikp 320.
pp. of samudācarati
(adj.) to be procured or attained Ja iii.313 (su˚).
grd. of samudāneti
collected, procured Ja iv.177.
pp. of samudāneti, cp. BSk. samudānīta Mvu i.231
to collect, procure, attain get MN i.104; Snp 295 ■ pp. ˚ānīta.
saṃ + ud + āneti; cp. BSk. samudānayati Divy 26, Divy 50, Divy 490; Avs i.199
multitude, quantity Vv-a 175; the whole Vv-a 276.
fr. saṃ + ud + ā + i
restrained Dhs-a 75.
saṃ + ud + āvaṭa? Better read as saṃ + udāvatta
talk, conversation Mil 344; piya˚; AN v.24, AN v.27, AN v.90 AN v.201, AN v.339; Thag-a 226.
saṃ + udāhāra, cp. BSk. samudāhāra Divy 143
to behold Thag-a 147 (Ap. v.52).
saṃ + udikkhati
1. arisen Dāvs v.4.
2. excited SN i.136.
3. united Vv-a 321.
saṃ + udita1
(nt.) moving MN i.119; DN i.76; Vism 365; Dhs-a 307.
saṃ + udīraṇa in meaning udīreti 1
uttered Ja vi.17.
saṃ + udīrita
to arise; pres. samudayati (v.l. samudīyati) SN ii.78; samudeti AN iii.338; pp. samudita.
saṃ + udeti
a (large) quantity of water, e.g. the Ganges; the sea the ocean DN i.222; MN i.493; AN i.243; AN ii.48 sq. AN iii.240; DN iii.196, DN iii.198; SN i.6, SN i.32, SN i.67; Ja i.230; Ja iv.167 Ja iv.172; Dhp 127; Nd i.353; Snp-a 30; Pv-a 47, Pv-a 104, Pv-a 133 Pv-a 271; explained by adding sāgara, SN ii.32; four oceans SN ii.180, SN ii.187; Thag-a 111. Often characterized as mahā the great ocean, e.g. Vin ii.237; AN i.227; AN ii.55 AN iii.52; AN iv.101; Snp-a 371; Dhp-a iii.44. Eight qualities AN iv.198, AN iv.206; popular etymology Mil 85 sq. (viz “yattakaṃ udakaṃ tattakaṃ loṇaṃ,” and vice versa) the eye etc. (the senses), an ocean which engulfs all beings SN iv.157 (samudda = mahā udakarāsi) ■ Cp sāmuddika.
-akkhāyikā (f.) tales about the origin of the sea cosmogony Vin i.188; MN i.513 sq.; DN i.8; DN-a i.91 -ṭṭhaka situated in the ocean Ja vi.158. -vīci a wave of the ocean Vism 63.
cp. Vedic samudra, fr. saṃ + udra, water
metri causa instead of samudaya Iti 16, Iti 52.
pulled out, eradicated Mvu 59, Mvu 15; Ja vi.309; Sdhp 143.
saṃ + uddhaṭa
(nt.) pulling out, salvation Mil 232.
saṃ + uddharaṇa
to take out or away; to lift up, carry away, save from; aor. samuddhari Ja vi.271 samuddhāsi (aor. thus read instead of samuṭṭhāsi Ja v.70.
saṃ + uddharati
moistened, wet, immersed SN iv.158; cp. the similar passage AN ii.211 with ref. to taṇhā as a snare (pariyonaddha).
saṃ + unna
to raise, elevate, Thag 29.
saṃ + unnameti
to approach Mil 209.
saṃ + upagacchati
to produce; ˚janiyamāna (ppr. pass.) Ne 195.
saṃ + upa + janeti
to serve, help; pres. samupaṭṭhāti Sdhp 283; aor. samupaṭṭhahi Mvu 33 Mvu 95.
saṃ + upaṭṭhahati
set up; heaped, massed, in full swing (of a battle), crowded MN i.253; DN ii.285; SN i.98; Mil 292; Ja i.89.
saṃ + upa + viyūḷha
resembling Mvu 37, Mvu 68; also samūpama Ja i.146; Ja v.155; Ja vi.534.
saṃ + upama
ascended Dāvs iv.42.
saṃ + uparūḷha
adorned Mil 2.
saṃ + upasobhita
to come to; aor. samupāgami Mvu 36, Mvu 91; pp. samupāgata.
saṃ + upāgacchati
come to, arrived at Mvu 37, Mvu 115; Mvu 38, Mvu 12; Ja vi.282; Sdhp 324.
saṃ + upāgata
being on a level with the water Mil 237 (Trenckner conjectures samupodika). The better reading, however, is samupp˚, sama = peace, quiet, thus “producing quiet,” calm.
endowed with, Mil 352.
saṃ + upeta
to arise, to be produced SN iv.218; pp. samuppanna.
saṃ + uppajjati
(f.) origin, arising SN iv.218.
arisen, produced, come about Snp 168, Snp 599; Dhs 1035.
saṃ + uppanna
origin, arising, genesis, coming to be, production Vin ii.96; SN iii.16 sq.; Iti 17; AN iii.406 (dhamma˚); Ja vi.223 (anilūpana-samuppāda, v. read ˚-samuppāta, “swift as the wind”); Vism 521 (sammā & saha uppajjati = samuppāda). Cp. paṭicca˚.;
saṃ + uppāda
(adj.) jumping or bubbling up Snp 670 (˚āso nom. pl.).
fr. saṃ + uppilavati
sprinkled Ja vi.481.
saṃ + ud + phosita
to carry Dāvs iii.3; Dāvs v.35; ppr. samubbahanto Ja vi.21 (making display of).
saṃ + ubbahati2
borne from, produced from Dāvs ii.25.
saṃ + ud + bhūta
energetic, devoted Vv 6333; Vv-a 269.
saṃ + uyyuta
to talk, converse Vin iii.187; Pv-a 237; ppr. samullapanto Ja iii.49.
saṃ + ullapati
(nt.) talking (with), conversation Snp-a 71.
saṃ + ullapana
conversation, talk Mil 351.
= last
1. accumulation, complex AN ii.42; Iti 48; Iti 34; bhassasamuccaya, grandiloquence Snp 245–2. complex form, the body DN ii.157 = SN i.148; Vv3512 (= sarīra Vv-a 164); Dhp 351; Thag 202 (“confluence, i.e. of the 5 factors, trsln); Thig 22, Thig 270; Dhp-a iv.70 Thag-a 98, Thag-a 212; rūpasamussaya the same Thig 102 cp. samuccaya.
saṃ + ud + śri, cp. BSk. samucchraya “body,” Divy 70 = Avs i.162
lifted, raised Ja iii.408.
saṃ + ussāpita
instigated Vv-a 105.
saṃ + ussāhita
1. elevated, erected Ja iii.497. - 2. arrogant, proud, haughty Dhp 147 (interpreted at Dhp-a iii.109 as “compounded,” i.e. the body made up of 300 bones); AN i.199; Snp-a 288 (˚ṃ bhassaṃ high and mighty talk).
saṃ + ussita
to raise, lift up, Pot. samusseyya AN i.199 (here = to be grandiloquent) ■ pp. samussita.
saṃ + ud + śri
is v.l. for su-vūpasanta (?) “calmed,” at Kp-a 21.
saṃ + upasanta
(adj.) including the root Thig 385; Thag-a 256.
sa3 + mūla + ka
multitude, mass, aggregation Ne 195; Pv-a 49, Pv-a 127, Pv-a 157 (= gaṇa), 200 (id.).
fr. saṃ + vah, uh
taken out, removed DN i.136; SN iii.131; Thag 604; Dhp 250; Snp 14, Snp 360; Iti 83; Ja iv.345 (Kern, wrongly, “combined”).
pp. of samūhanati
(nt.) abolition MN iii.151.
abstr. fr. samūhata
to remove, to abolish Vin i.110; DN i.135 sq. (˚hanissati); ii.91 = SN v.432; MN i.47 MN ii.193; SN v.76; Ja i.374 = Snp 360; Snp 14, Snp 369, Snp 1076 sikkhāpadaṃ Vin iii.23; DN ii.154; uposathāgāraṃ to discontinue using a Vihāra as an Uposathāgāra Vin i.107; sīmaṃ to remove the boundary Vin i.110. Pres also samūhanti SN iii.156; Pot. samūhaneyya Vin i.110 imper. samūhantu DN ii.154; & ˚ūhanatu Mil 143; ger samūhanitvā MN i.47; Vin i.107; a˚ MN iii.285; inf. samugghātuṃ Mvu 37, Mvu 32; grd. samūhantabba Vin i.107-Caus. II. samugghātāpeti to cause to be removed, i.e. to put to death Mil 193; samūhanāpeti Mil 142. pp. samūhata & (Caus.); samugghātita.
saṃ + ūhanati2
to gather, collect Mvu 37, Mvu 245.
Caus. of saṃ + uh = vah
to consider, to seek, look for; Pot. samekkhe Ja iv.5; ppr. samekkhamāna Thag 547 & samekkhaṃ Ja ii.65; ger. samekkhiya Mvu 37, Mvu 237.
saṃ + ikkhati
associating with Mil 396; connected with, provided with Mvu 19, Mvu 69; combined, constituted Snp 873, Snp 874.
pp. of sameti
1. to come together, to meet, to assemble Bv ii.199 = Ja i.29.
2. to associate with, to go to DN ii.273; Ja iv.93.
3. to correspond to, to agree DN i.162, DN i.247; Ja i.358; Ja iii.278.
4. to know, consider SN i.186; Nd i.284.
5. to fit in Ja vi.334 ■ imper sametu Ja iv.9320; fut. samessati SN iv.379; Iti 70; aor samiṃsu Bv ii.199; SN ii.158 = Iti 70; & samesuṃ Ja ii.3016 ger. samecca (1) (coming) together with DN ii.273; Ja vi.211, Ja vi.318 ■ (2) having acquired or learnt, knowing SN i.186; Snp 361, Snp 793; AN ii.6 ■ pp. samita & sameta; [ = saṃ + ā + ita].
saṃ + eti
Sii.285; read samāhitā.
moved, set in motion; filled with (-˚), pervaded by Snp 937; Nd i.410; Ja vi.529; Vism 172.
saṃ + erita
besprinkled, covered (with) Ja i.233.
pp. of samokirati
to sprinkle Bv ii.178 = Ja i.27. - pp. samokiṇṇa.
saṃ + okirati
gathered, arranged Ja v.156 (= surocita C.).
saṃ + ocita
strewn all over, spread Vv 816 (vv.ll. samogata and samohata); Ja i.183; Ap 191.
saṃ + otata
to descend Mvu 10, Mvu 57.
saṃ + otarati
(adv.) at the water’s edge Vin i.6 = MN i.169 = DN ii.38.
saṃ + odakaṃ
to put together, supply, apply SN i.7; SN iv.178 sq.; to fix Ne 165, Ne 178; ppr. samodahaṃ SN i.7 = SN iv.179; ger. samodahitvā SN iv.178; & samodhāya Vism 105; Sdhp 588 ■ pp. samohita.
saṃ + odahati
united Vv-a 186 (so read for samm˚), 320; cp. samudita.
(nt.) collocation, combination Bv ii.59 = Ja i.14; SN iv.215 = SN v.212; application (of a story) Ja ii.381. samodhānaṃ gacchati to come together, to combine, to be contained in Vin i.62; MN i.184 = SN i.86; SN v.43, SN v.231 = AN v.21 (Com. odhānapakkhepaṃ) AN iii.364; Snp-a 2; Vism 7; Vb-a 107 samodhānagata wrapped together Mil 362; samodhānaparivāsa a combined, inclusive probation Vin ii.48 sq.
saṃ + odhāna, cp. odahana
(f.) combination, application, pursuance, in vutti˚; Ja iii.541 (so read for vatti˚).
abstr. fr. samodhāna
to combine, put together, connect Ja i.9, Ja i.14; DN-a i.18; Snp-a 167, Snp-a 193, Snp-a 400 especially jātakaṃ s. to apply a Jātaka to the incident Ja i.106, Ja i.171; Ja ii.381 & passim.;
Denom. fr. samodhāna
barricading, torpor Dhs 1157; Dhs-a 379.
saṃ + orodha
to descend; ger. samoruyha Mvu 10, Mvu 35.
saṃ + orohati
(nt.) coming together, meeting, union, junction DN i.237; DN ii.61; SN iii.156; SN v.42 sq., 91; AN iii.364; Mil 38.
saṃ + osaraṇa
1. to flow down together Mil 349.
2. to come together, gather Ja i.178 (see on this Kern, Toev. ii.60).
saṃ + osarati
infatuated Pp 61.
1. put together, joined Ja vi.261 (su˚).
2. connected with, covered with Nd i.149 (for pareta); Mil 346 (raja-panka˚).
pp. of samodahati
to tremble, to be shaken Vin i.12; DN ii.12, DN ii.108; MN i.227; MN iii.120 ■ Caus. sampakampeti to shake DN ii.108.
saṃ + pakampati
indignation Dhs 1060.
saṃ + pakopa
to aspire to, to enter into Mil 35.
saṃ + pakkhandati, cp. BSk. sampraskandati Mvu ii.157
(nt.) aspiration Mil 34 sq.
saṃ + pakkhandana
1. to exert, strain Dhs-a 372.
2. to show a liking for, to favour, befriend Ja vi.294 ■ pp. sampaggahīta.
saṃ + pagganhāti
support, patronage Mvu 4, Mvu 44.
saṃ + paggaha
uplifted Mil 309.
saṃ + paggahīta
assumption, arrogance Dhs 1116.
sound, noise Mhbv 45.
(adj.) abundant, very many AN ii.59, AN ii.61; SN i.110.
saṃ + pacura
(nt.) attention, consideration, discrimination, comprehension, circumspection AN i.13 sq.; AN ii.93; AN iii.307; AN iv.320; AN v.98 sq. SN iii.169; DN iii.213 (sati + samp. opp. to muṭṭha-sacca asampajañña ), 273. Description of it in detail at DN-a i.183 sq. = Vb-a 347 sq., where given as fourfold, viz sātthaka˚, sappāya˚, gocara˚, asammoha˚, with examples Often combined with sati, with which almost synonymous, e.g. at DN i.63; AN i.43; AN ii.44 sq.; AN v.115, AN v.118.
fr. sampajāna, i.e. *sampajānya
(adj.) thoughtful, mindful attentive, deliberate, almost syn. with sata, mindful DN i.37; DN ii.94 sq.; Snp 413, Snp 931; Iti 10, Iti 42; Pp 25; DN iii.49, DN iii.58, DN iii.221, DN iii.224 sq.; AN iv.47 sq., 300 sq., 457 sq. Nd i.395; Nd ii.141. sampajānakārin acting with consideration or full attention DN i.70; DN ii.95, DN ii.292; AN ii.210 AN v.206; Vb-a 347 sq.; DN-a i.184 sq.; sampājanamusāvāda deliberate lie Vin iv.2; Iti 18; DN iii.45; AN i.128 AN iv.370; AN v.265; Ja i.23.
saṃ + pajāna, cp. pajānāti; BSk. samprajāna, Mvu i.206; Mvu ii.360
to know SN v.154; Snp 1055; Nd ii.655.
saṃ + pajānāti
1. to come to, to fall to; to succeed, prosper Ja i.7; Ja ii.105.
2. to turn out, to happen, become DN i.91, DN i.101, DN i.193, DN i.239; Pv-a 192. aor sampādi DN ii.266, DN ii.269 ■ pp. sampanna ■ Caus sampādeti.
saṃ + pajjati
(adj.) in flames, ablaze AN iv.131; Vin i.25; DN i.95; DN ii.335; Ja i.232; Mil 84.
saṃ + pajjalita
(adv.) now Ja iv.432 (= sampati, idāni C.).
loc. fr. saṃ + paṭi + ka
summing up, agreement Kp-a 100.
saṃ + paṭiggaha
to receive, accept Ja i.69; Ja iii.351; Mvu 6, Mvu 34; ovādaṃ s. to comply with an admonition Ja iii.52; sādhū ti s. to say “well” and agree Ja ii.31; Mil 8. Caus. II. sampaṭicchāpeti Ja vi.336.
saṃ + paṭicchati
(nt.) acceptance, agreement Dhs-a 332; Snp-a 176 (“sādhu”); Vism 21; Sdhp 59, Sdhp 62.
fr. last
(f.) squatting down, lying down Thag-a 111.
saṃ + paṭi + nipajjā
to penetrate; Pass. sampaṭivijjhiyati Ne 220.
saṃ + paṭivijjhati
penetration Ne 27, Ne 41, Ne 42, Ne 220.
saṃ + paṭivedha
deliberately SN ii.111; contracted from ger. ˚-saṃkhāya.
to jump about, to fly along or about Ja vi.528 (dumā dumaṃ); imper, sampatantu ib. vi.448 (itarītaraṃ); ppr. sampatanto flying to Ja iii.491. pp. sampatita.
saṃ + patati
now Mil 87; sampatijāta, just born DN ii.15 = MN iii.123. Cp. sampaṭike.
saṃ + paṭi; cp. Sk. samprati
jumping about Ja vi.507.
pp. of sampatati
reached, arrived, come to, present Ja iv.142; Mil 9, Mil 66; Pv-a 12; Kp-a 142; Snp-a 295; Sdhp 56.
pp. of sampāpuṇāti
merged in, given to Ud 75.
read sammattaka (?)
(f.) 1. success, attainment; happiness, bliss, fortune (opp. vipatti ) AN iv.26, AN iv.160; Vism 58 Vism 232; Ja iv.3 (dibba˚); DN-a i.126; three attainments Ja i.105; Mil 96; Dhp-a iii.183 (manussa˚, devaloka˚ nibbāna˚); Ne 126 (sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚; cp sampadā); four Vb-a 439 sq. (gati˚, upadhi˚, kāla˚ payoga˚); six Ja i.105; nine Mil 341.
2. excellency magnificence Snp-a 397; rūpasampatti beauty Ja iii.187 Ja iv.333.
3. honour Mvu 22, Mvu 48.
4. prosperity splendour Ja iv.455; Mvu 38, Mvu 92; s. bhavaloko Pts i.122 Cp. samāpatti & sampadā.;
saṃ + patti2
(f.) entreating, imploring Dhs 1059.
saṃ + patthanā
(f.) 1. attainment, success accomplishment; happiness, good fortune; blessing bliss AN i.38; Pv ii.947 (= sampatti Pv-a 132) ■ Sampadā in its pregnant meaning is applied to the accomplishments of the individual in the course of his religious development. Thus it is used with sīla, citta, & paññā at DN i.171 sq. and many other passages in an almost encyclopedic sense. Here with sīla˚; the whole of the sīlakkhandha (DN i.63 sq.) is understood; citta˚; means the cultivation of the heart & attainments of the mind relating to composure, concentration and religious meditation, otherwise called samādhikkhandha. It includes those stages of meditation which are enum;d under samādhi. With paññā˚; are meant the attainments of higher wisdom and spiritual emancipation connected with supernormal faculties, culminating in Arahantship and extinction of all causes of rebirth otherwise called vijjā (see the 8 items of this under vijjā b.). The same ground as by this 3 fold division is covered by the enumeration of 5 sampadās as sīla˚ samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚, vimutti-ñāṇadassana˚; MN i.145; Pp 54; cp. SN i.139; AN iii.12.
The term sampadā is not restricted to a definite set of accomplishments. It is applied to various such sets besides the one mentioned above. Thus we find a set of 3 sampadās called sīla˚, citta˚ & diṭṭhi˚; at AN i.269, where under sīla the Nos. 1–7 of the 10 sīlas are understood (see sīla 2 a), under citta Nos. 8 & 9, under; diṭṭhi No. 10. sīla & diṭṭhi˚; also at DN iii.213 ■ A set of 8 sampadās is given at AN iv.322 with uṭṭhāna˚, ārakkha˚, kalyāṇamittatā sammājīvitā, saddhā˚, sīla˚, cāga˚, paññā˚; of which the first 4 are expld in detail at AN iv.281 = AN iv.322 as bringing wordly happiness, viz. alertness, wariness, association with good friends, right livelihood; and the last 4 as leading to future bliss (viz. faith in the Buddha, keeping the 5 sīlas, liberality, higher wisdom) at AN iv.284 = AN iv.324 Another set of 5 frequently mentioned is: ñāti˚, bhoga˚ ārogya˚, sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚; (or the blessings, i.e. good fortune of having relatives, possessions, health, good conduct right views) representing the “summa bona” of popular choice, to which is opposed deficiency (vyasana, reverse of the same items. Thus e.g. at AN iii.147; DN iii.235. Three sampadās: kammanta˚, ājīva˚, diṭṭhi,˚; i.e. the 7 sīlas, right living (sammā-ājīva), right views AN i.271-Another three as saddhā˚, sīla˚, paññā˚; at AN i.287. Bdhgh at Dhp-a iii.93, Dhp-a iii.94 speaks of four sampadās, viz vatthu˚, paccaya˚, cetanā˚; guṇâtireka˚; of the blessings of a foundation (for merit), ofmeans (for salvation), of good intentions, of virtue (& merit). -A (later) set of; seven sampadās is given at Ja iv.96 with āgama˚, adhigama˚ pubbahetu˚, attattha-paripucchā˚, titthavāsa˚ yoniso-manasikāra˚, buddh’ûpanissaya˚ ■ Cp. the following: atta˚; SN v.30 sq.; ākappa˚; AN i.38; ājīva˚ AN i.271; DN-a i.235; kamma˚; AN iv.238 sq.; dassana˚ Snp 231; nibbāna˚; Vism 58; bhoga˚; (+ parivāra˚) Dhp-a i.78; yāga˚; Thag-a 40 (Ap. v.7); vijjācaraṇa˚; DN i.99.
2. execution, performance; result, consequence; thus yañña˚; successful performance of a sacrifice DN i.128; Snp 505, Snp 509; piṭaka-sampadāya “on the authority of the Piṭaka tradition,” according to the P.; in exegesis of iti-kira (hearsay) AN i.189 = AN ii.191 = Nd ii.151; and of itihītiha MN i.520 = MN ii.169.
fr. saṃ + pad, cp. BSk. sampadā Divy 401 (devamanuṣya˚), also sampatti
to hand on, give over Ja iv.204 (aor. ˚padāsi).
saṃ + padāti
(nt.) the dative relation Ja v.214 (upayogatthe), 237 (karaṇatthe); Snp-a 499 (˚vacana).
saṃ + padāna
to tear, to cut MN i.450; AN ii.33 = SN iii.85; SN iii.155; Mvu 23, Mvu 10 ■ Act. intrs sampadālati to burst Ja vi.559 (= phalati, C.).
saṃ + padāleti
kindled Sdhp 33.
saṃ + paditta
corrupted, wicked Ja vi.317 (a˚); Sdhp 70.
saṃ + paduṭṭha
to be corrupted, to trespass Vin iv.260; Ja ii.193; pp. sampaduṭṭha.
saṃ + padussati
wickedness Dhs 1060; a-sampadosa innocence Ja vi.317 = Ja vi.321.
saṃ + padosa1
to run away; aor. sampaddavi Ja vi.53 ■ pp. sampadduta.
saṃ + pa + dru
run away Ja vi.53.
pp. of sampaddavati
(˚dhūpāyati, ˚dhūpāti) to send forth (thick) smoke, to fill with smoke or incense to pervade, permeate SN i.169; Vin i.225; Snp p.15; Mil 333. Cp. sandhūpāyati.
saṃ + padhūpāti
1. successful, complete, perfect Vin ii.256; sampannaveyyākaraṇa a full explanation Snp 352.
2. endowed with, possessed of abounding in Vin i.17; Snp 152, Snp 727 (ceto-vimutti˚) Ja i.421; vijjācaraṇasampanna full of wisdom and goodness DN i.49; Snp 164; often used as first part of a compound e.g. sampannavijjācaraṇa Dhp 144; Dhp-a iii.86 sampannasīla virtuous Iti 118; Dhp 57; sampannodaka abounding in water Ja iv.125.
3. sweet, well cooked Vin ii.196; Mil 395.
pp. of sampajjati
(adj.) blooming, blossoming Sdhp 245.
saṃ + pa + phulla
frivolous talk SN v.355.
saṃ + pa + bhāṣ
to shine Mil 338.
saṃ + pa + bhās
altogether crushed or overwhelmed Ja vi.189.
saṃ + pamathita
to crush out Mil 403.
saṃ + pamaddati
(adj.) confounded Snp 762.
saṃ + pamūḷha
to rejoice Vv 368 ■ pp. sampamodita.
saṃ + pamodati
delighted, rejoicing Sdhp 301.
saṃ + pamodita
gone forth, proceeded Dhp 237.
saṃ + payāta
to proceed, to go on; inf. sampayātave Snp 834; pp. sampayāta.
saṃ + payāti
associated with, connected Dhs 1; Kv 337; Dhs-a 42. -˚paccaya the relation of association (opp. vippayutta˚) Vism 539; Vb-a 206 Tikp 6, 20, 53, 65, 152 sq.; Dukp 1 sq.
saṃ + payutta
union, association Vin i.10; SN v.421; DN-a i.96, DN-a i.260.
saṃ + payoga
1. to associate (with) Vin ii.262; MN ii.5.
2. to quarrel Vin ii.5; SN i.239 ■ pp sampayutta.
saṃ + payojeti
future state, the next world Vin ii.162; AN iii.154; AN iv.284 sq.; DN ii.240; SN i.108; Snp 141, Snp 864, Ja i.219; Ja iii.195; Mil 357; Dhp-a ii.50.
fr. saṃ + parā + i
(adj.) belonging to the next world Vin i.179; Vin iii.21; DN ii.240; DN iii.130; AN iii.49, AN iii.364 AN iv.285; MN i.87; Iti 17, Iti 39; Ja ii.74.
fr. last
to pull about, drag along MN i.228.
saṃ + parikaḍḍhati
to cut all round MN iii.275. (Trenckner reads sampakantati.)
saṃ + parikantati
surrounded by Vin iii.86; Mil 155.
saṃ + parikiṇṇa
to make warm, heat, scourge MN i.128, MN i.244 = SN iv.57.
saṃ + paritāpeti
(adj.) broken up Ja vi.113 (˚gatta).
saṃ + paribhinna
to avoid, shun Sdhp 52, Sdhp 208.
saṃ + parivajjeti
(adj.) rolling about Dhp 325.
saṃ + parivatta
(adj.) rolling about grovelling Ja ii.142 (turning somersaults); Dhp-a ii.5, Dhp-a ii.12; Mil 253, Mil 357; samparivattakaṃ (adv.) in a rolling about manner MN ii.138; samparivattakaṃ-samparivattakaṃ continually turning (it) Vin i.50.
saṃ + parivattaka
to turn, to roll about; ppr. samparivattamāna Ja i.140; pp. samparivatta. Caus. samparivatteti [cp. BSk. ˚parivartayati to wring one’s hands Divy 263] to turn over in one’s mind, to ponder over SN v.89.
saṃ + parivattati
to surround, wait upon, attend on Ja i.61; aor. 3rd pl. samparivāresuṃ Ja i.164 ger. samparivārayitvā Ja i.61; ˚etvā (do.) Ja vi.43, Ja vi.108 Cp. sampavāreti.
saṃ + parivāreti
see parivāsita.
(adj.) surrounded, beset with Ja ii.317; Ja iii.360 = SN i.143.
saṃ + pareta
hindrance, obstruction Ne 79.
saṃ + palibodha
broken up SN i.123.
pp. of next
to break, to crack MN i.234; SN i.123; pp. sampalibhagga.
saṃ + pari + bhañj
touched, handled, blotted out, destroyed SN iv.168 sq. = Ja iii.532 = Vism 36.
saṃ + palimaṭṭha
(adj.) wrapped up, enveloped MN i.281.
saṃ + paliveṭhita
to wrap up, envelop; ˚eyya Aiv.131 (kāyaṃ).
saṃ + paliveṭheti
(adj.) intimate, friend DN ii.78; SN i.83, SN i.87; Pp 36.
perhaps saṃ + pari + anka2, contracted to *payyanka → *pavanka
(f.) connection, friendliness, intimacy SN i.87; AN iii.422 (pāpa˚ & kalyāṇa˚); iv.283 sq.; v.24, 199; Dhs 1326; Pp 20, Pp 24; Dhs-a 394. Cp anu˚ Vin ii.88.
fr. last
(adj.) described, praised Ja vi.398.
saṃ + pa + vaṇṇita
an instigator AN iii.133.
saṃ + pavattar
to produce, set going AN iii.222 (saṃvāsaṃ); Mvu 23, Mvu 75.
saṃ + pavatteti
to blow, to be fragrant MN i.212; Ja vi.534; Vv-a 343 (= Vv 8432).
saṃ + pavāti
to make fragrant, Vv 816, 8432; Vv-a 344.
saṃ + pavāyati
(nt.) making fragrant Vv-a 344.
fr. last
to cause to accept, to offer, to regale, serve with; ger. sampavāretvā Vin i.18; Vin ii.128; DN i.109; aor. sampavāresi DN ii.97.
saṃ + pavāreti; cp. BSk. saṃpravārayati Divy 285, Divy 310, etc.; Avs i.90; Mvu iii.142
to be shaken violently, to be highly affected Vin i.12; DN ii.12, DN ii.108; MN i.227 Thig 231; Ja i.25; SN iv.71 ■ Caus. sampavedheti to shake violently DN ii.108; MN i.253; Nd i.316, Nd i.371 (pp. ˚pavedhita).
saṃ + pavedhati
to be shaken Snp 28; Mil 386.
serenity, pleasure DN ii.211, DN ii.222; AN ii.199; MN ii.262.
saṃ + pasāda
(nt.) tranquillizing DN i.37; Dhs 161; Mil 34; Vism 156; Dhs-a 170 (in the description of the second Jhāna); happiness, joy Bv i.35.
saṃ + pasādana
(adj.) leading to serenity, inspiring faith DN iii.99 sq. (the S. Suttanta), 116.
saṃ + pasādaniya
to stretch out, to distract Vism 365 ■ Pass. sampasāriyati AN iv.47; Mil 297; Dhs-a 376.
saṃ + pasāreti
to be tranquillized, reassured DN i.106; MN i.101; DN-a i.275.
saṃ + pasīdati
(nt.) becoming tranquillized Ne 28.
fr. last
to see, behold; to look to, to consider; ppr sampassanto Vin i.42; DN ii.285; sampassaṃ Dhp 290.
saṃ + passati
(adj.) gladdening MN i.146; AN ii.97; AN iv.296, AN iv.328; AN v.155; Iti 107; Mil 373.
fr. next
to be glad; pp. sampahaṭṭha ■ Caus. sampahaṃseti to gladden, delight Vin i.18; DN i.126.
saṃ + pahaṃsati2
(nt.) being glad, pleasure; approval Pts i.167; Vism 148 (˚ā); Kp-a 100 (“evaṃ”); Snp-a 176 (“sādhu”); Sdhp 568.
fr. sampahaṃsati
(adj.) beaten, struck (of metal), refined, wrought SN i.65 (sakusala˚; Bdhgh ukkāmukhe pacitvā s.; K.S. i.321); Snp 686 (sukusala˚ Snp-a 486: “kusalena suvaṇṇakārena sanghaṭṭitaṃ sanghaṭṭentena tāpitaṃ”).
saṃ + pahaṭṭha1
gladdened, joyful Sdhp 301.
saṃ + pahaṭṭha2
clashing, beating together, impact, striking; battle, strife DN ii.166; Pp 66 sq.; DN-a i.150; Mil 161 (ūmi-vega˚), 179 (of two rocks), 224.
saṃ + pahāra
1. what is cooked, a cooked preparation, concoction Vin ii.259 (maṃsa˚ etc.); Vv 435 (kola˚); Vv-a 186.
2. ripeness, development Ja vi.236.
saṃ + pāka
falling together, concurrence, collision Iti 68; kukkuṭasampāta neighbouring, closely adjoining (yasmā gāmā nikkhamitvā kukkuṭo padasā va aññaṃ gāmaṃ gacchati, ayaṃ kukkuṭasampāto ti vuccati) Vin iv.63, Vin iv.358; kukkuṭasampātaka lying close together (lit. like a flock of poultry) AN i.159. Cp. the similar sannipāta.
saṃ + pāta
one who obtains Mil 349.
fr. sampādeti
(nt.) effecting, accomplishment Ne 44; preparing, obtaining Ja i.80.
fr. sampādeti
1. to procure, obtain Vin i.217; Vin ii.214; ekavacanaṃ s. to be able to utter a single word Ja ii.164; kathaṃ s. to be able to talk Ja ii.165 dohaḷe s. to satisfy the longing Mvu 22, Mvu 51.
2. to strive, to try to accomplish one’s aim DN ii.120; SN ii.29
Caus. of sampajjati
(adj.) causing to obtain, leading to, bringing Ja iii.348; Ja vi.235.
fr. sampāpeti
(nt.) reaching, getting to Mil 355, Mil 356 (tīra˚).
fr. sampāpuṇāti
to reach, attain; to come to, meet with; aor. sampāpuṇi Ja i.67; Ja ii.20; pp. sampatta -Caus. sampāpeti to bring, to make attain Vism 303.
saṃ + pāpuṇāti
to be able to explain (DN-a i.117: sampādetvā kathetuṃ sakkuṇoti), to agree, to come to terms, succeed DN i.26; DN ii.284; MN i.85, MN i.96, MN i.472; MN ii.157; AN v.50; SN iv.15 SN iv.67; SN v.109; Vin ii.249 (cp. p. 364); aor. sampāyāsi MN i.239. Cp. sampayāti.
dern not clear; Kern, Toev. i.62 = sampādayati; but more likely = sampāyāti, i.e. sam + pa + ā + yā.
(quite) covered MN i.281.
saṃ + pāruta
to protect Ja iv.127.
saṃ + pāleti
(nt.) combining, connection, addition Vism 159 (of “ca”); Kp-a 228 (id.); Dhs-a 171.
fr. saṃ + piṇḍ˚
brought together, restored Ja i.230; compact, firm Ja v.89.
pp. of sampiṇḍeti
to knead or ball together, combine, unite Vism 159; Kp-a 125, Kp-a 221, Kp-a 230; Dhs-a 177; pp sampiṇḍita.
saṃ + piṇḍeti
(adj.) friendly; sampiyena by mutual consent, in mutual love Snp 123, Snp 290.
saṃ + piya
to receive with joy, to treat kindly, address with love Ja iii.482; ppr. sampiyāyanto Ja i.135; sampiyāyamāna (do.) fondling, being fond of DN ii.223; Ja i.191, Ja i.297, Ja i.361; Ja ii.85; Dhp-a ii.65. aor. 3rd pl. sampiyāyiṃsu Ja vi.127.
saṃ + piyāyati
(f.) intimate relation, great fondness Ja iii.492.
saṃ + piyāyanā
to satisfy, gladden, please; aor. 2nd sg. sampesi Ja iii.253; ger. sampīṇayitvā Dāvs iv.11.
saṃ + pīṇeti
(nt.) trouble, pain; asampīḷaṃ free from trouble Mil 351.
saṃ + pīḷa, cp. pīḷā
troubled; as nt., worry, trouble Mil 368.
pp. of sampīḷeti
to press, to pinch, to worry Vin iii.126; pp. sampīḷita.
saṃ + pīḷeti
to ask DN i.116; ger. sampuccha having made an appointment with SN i.176.
saṃ + pucchati
the hollow of the hand (in posture of veneration), in pāṇi˚; Mvu 37, Mvu 192 i.e. Cūḷavaṃsa (ed. Geiger) p. 15.
cp. saṃ + puṭa (lexicogr. Sk. sampuṭa “round box”) & BSk. sampuṭa in meaning “añjali” at Divy 380, in phrase kṛta-kara-sampuṭah
shrunk, shrivelled MN i.80.
saṃ + puṭita = phuṭita, cp. BSk. sampuṭaka Mvu ii.127
(sampūrṇa) filled, full Snp 279; Bv ii.119 = Ja i.20; Mvu 22, Mvu 60.
in full bloom Pv iv.12 (= niccaṃ pupphita Pv-a 275).
saṃ + pupphita
to honour MN ii.169.
saṃ + purakkharoti
to venerate Mvu 30, Mvu 100.
saṃ + pūjeti
Pass. pūriyati˚; to be filled, ended; aor. sampūri (māso, “it was a full month since…” Ja iv.458.
saṃ + pūreti
(adj.-n.) frivolous; nt. frivolity, foolishness only in connection with expressions of talking, as samphaṃ bhāsati to speak frivolously AN ii.23; Snp 158; samphaṃ giraṃ bh. Ja vi.295; samphaṃ palapati Tikp 167 sq. Also in cpds. ˚palāpa frivolous talk DN i.4; DN iii.69, DN iii.82 DN iii.175, DN iii.269; AN i.269 sq., 298; ii.60, 84, 209; iii.254, 433 iv. 248; v.251 sq., 261 sq.; Tikp 168, 281; DN-a i.76 ˚palāpin talking frivolously DN i.138; DN iii.82; AN i.298 Pp 39, Pp 58.
not clear, if & how connected with Sk. śaśpa, grass. The BSk. has sambhinna-pralāpa for sampha-ppalāpa
(adj.) abounding in fruits SN i.70; SN i.90 = Iti 45.
saṃ + phala
contact, reaction Vin i.3; AN ii.117; DN ii.62; MN i.85; Ja i.502; kāya-s. the touch of the skin DN ii.75; cakkhu-, sota-, ghāna-, jivhā-, kāya-and mano-s. DN ii.58, DN ii.308; SN iv.68 sq.; Vb-a 19.
saṃ + phassa
touched SN iv.97; Av.103; Iti 68.
pp. of samphassati
(adj.) full-blown Ja vi.188.
saṃ + phulla
to touch, to come in contact with; ppr. samphussaṃ Iti 68; ppr. med. samphusamāna Snp 671; Nd ii.199 (reads samphassamāna, where id. p at MN i.85 has rissamāna ); aor. samphusi DN ii.128; inf samphusituṃ Snp 835; DN ii.355; pp. samphuṭṭha.
saṃ + phusati
(f.) touch, contact Thig 367; Dhs 2, Dhs 71.
saṃ + phusanā
(nt.) the state of having been brought into touch with Dhs 2, Dhs 71.
abstr. fr. samphusita
bound together Sdhp 81.
saṃ + baddha
connection, tie DN ii.296 = MN i.58; Snp-a 108, Snp-a 166, Snp-a 249, Snp-a 273, Snp-a 343, Snp-a 516. ˚-kula related family Ja iii.362; a-sambandha (adj.) incompatible (C. on asaññuta Ja iii.266).
saṃ + bandha
to bind together, to unite Vin ii.116; pass. sambajjhati is united, attached to Ja iii.7; ger. sambandhitvā Vin i.274; Vin ii.116 ■ pp sambaddha.
saṃ + bandhati
(nt.) binding together, connection Ja i.328.
saṃ + bandhana
(f.) the art of Sambari, jugglery SN i.239 (trsln “Sambara’s magic art”). Sambara is a king of the Asuras.
sambarī + māyā
(nt.) provision SN ii.98; Ja v.71, Ja v.240; Ja vi.531.
cp. *Sk. śambala
(adj.) many Vin i.32; DN i.2; Ja i.126, Ja i.329; Snp 19; sambahulaṃ karoti to take a plurality vote Ja ii.45.
saṃ + bahula
(f.) a plurality vote Ja ii.45.
fr. sambahula
(adj.) in ˚ṃ karoti = sambahulaṃ karoti Ja ii.197.
1. crowding, pressure, inconvenience from crowding, obstruction Vism 119 janasambādharahita free from crowding Mil 409 kiṭṭhasambādha crowding of corn, the time when the corn is growing thick MN i.115; Ja i.143, Ja i.388 ■ yassa sambādho bhavissati he who finds it too crowded Vin iv.43; asambādha unobstructed Snp 150; atisambādhatā (q.v.) the state of being too narrow Ja i.7; puttadārasambādhasayana a bed encumbered with child and wife Mil 243; cp. SN i.78; (in fig. sense) difficulty trouble SN i.7, SN i.48; Ja iv.488; sambādhapaṭipanna of the eclipsed moon SN i.50. As adjective “crowded, dense sambādho gharavāso life in the family is confined, i.e. a narrow life, full of hindrances DN i.63, DN i.250; SN ii.219 SN v.350; DN-a i.180; s. magga a crowded path Ja i.104 nijana˚ vana Vism 342; s. vyūha SN v.369 ■ atisambādha too confined Dhp-a i.310 (cakkavāḷa) ■ compar. sambādhatara SN v.350; asambādhaṃ comfortably Ja i.80. 2. pudendum masculinum Vin i.216; Vin ii.134; pudendum muliebre Vin iv.259; Snp 609; sambādhaṭṭhāna (nt. pudendum muliebre Ja i.61; Ja iv.260.
cp. Sk. sambādha
to be crowded DN ii.269 (read ˚bādhāyanti).
saṃ + bādheti
1. to rub shampoo Ja i.293; Ja ii.16; Ja iv.431; Ja v.126; also sambāheti Mil 241; Caus. sambāhāpeti to cause to shampoo Vin iv.342; ppr. sambāhanta Ja vi.77; aor. sambāhi Ja i.293 Cp. pari˚.
saṃ + bāhati; Kern, Toev. s. v. disputes relation to vah, but connects it with bāh “press”
(nt.) rubbing, shampooing DN i.7 (as a kind of exercise for wrestlers DN-a i.88); AN i.62; AN iv.54; Mil 241; Ja i.286.
fr. last
a shell DN i.84 = AN i.9; AN iii.395 (sippi˚); Ja ii.100.
cp. Sk. śambuka
to understand, achieve, know Dhs-a 218; inf. sambuddhuṃ Snp 765 (v.l. sambuddhaṃ); Caus. sambodheti to teach, instruct Ja i.142 Cp. sammā˚.
saṃ + bujjhati
1. well understood Snp 765 (various reading, sambuddhuṃ = to know); Ja v.77 (sam & a˚, taken by C. as ppr. “jānanto” & “ajānanto”) susambuddha easily understood Snp 764.
2. one who has thoroughly understood, being enlightened, a Buddha Snp 178 etc., 559; AN ii.4; Dhp 181; SN i.4; Iti 35 etc.
saṃ + buddha
(f.) complete understanding; adj. ˚vant wise Ja iii.361 (= buddhisampanna).
saṃ + buddhi
constituent of Sambodhi (enlightenment), of which there are seven: sati, selfpossession; dhammavicaya, investigation of doctrine viriya, energy; pīti, joy; passaddhi, tranquillity samādhi, concentration; upekhā, equanimity DN ii.79 DN ii.303 sq.; DN iii.106, DN iii.226; MN i.61 sq.; AN iv.23; SN v.110 sq. Nd ii.s. v. Mil 340; Vb-a 135, Vb-a 310. The characteristics of the several constitutents together with var. means of cultivation are given at Vism 132 sq. = Vb-a 275 sq.
saṃ + bojjhanga
enlightenment, highest wisdom, awakening; the insight belonging to the three higher stages of the Path, Vin i.10; DN iii.130 sq., 136 sq. SN ii.223; SN v.214; MN i.16, MN i.241; AN i.258; AN ii.200, AN ii.240 sq. 325 sq.; v.238 sq.; Iti 27; pubbe sambodhā, before attaining insight MN i.17, MN i.163; MN ii.211; MN iii.157; SN ii.5 SN ii.10; SN iv.6, SN iv.8, SN iv.97, SN iv.233; SN v.281; AN i.258; AN iii.82, AN iii.240. abhabba sambodhāya, incapable of insight MN i.200, MN i.241 = AN ii.200. (Cp. Dial. i.190–192.)
-gāmin leading to enlightenment DN iii.264; Snp p.140 -pakkhika belonging to enlightenment AN iv.357. -sukha the bliss of enlightenment AN iv.341 sq.
saṃ + bodha
(nt.) the vocative case Vv-a 12, Vv-a 18.
saṃ + bodhana
(f.) the same as sambodha, the highest enlightenment DN i.156; DN ii.155; Dhp 89 = SN v.29; Snp 478; SN i.68, SN i.181; AN ii.14; Iti 28, Iti 42, Iti 117; Snp-a 73 See also sammā˚.
-agga [˚yagga] the summit of enlightenment Snp 693 -gāmin leading to enlightenment SN v.234; -patta having attained enlightenment, an Arahant Snp 503, Snp 696 -parāyana that which has enlightenment as its aim proceeding towards enlightenment, frequently of the Sotāpanna DN i.156 (discussed in Dialogues i.190 sq.) iii.131 sq.; AN i.232; AN ii.80, AN ii.238; AN iii.211; AN iv.12, AN iv.405; SN v.343, SN v.346; DN-a i.313. -sukha the bliss of enlightenment Kv 209.
saṃ + bodhi1
the same as sambojjhanga AN v.253 sq.; SN v.24; cp. spelling sambodhi-anga at Dhp 89; Dhp-a ii.162.
see sambujjhati.
broken SN i.123; MN i.237. Cp. sampali˚.
saṃ + bhagga
to consort with, love, to be attached, devoted Ja iii.495; ppr. sambhajanto Ja iii.108 Pot. sambhajeyya ibid. (C. samāgaccheyya) ■ pp sambhatta.
saṃ + bhajati
(f.) consorting with Dhs 1326; Pp 20.
saṃ + bhajanā
to split, break Ja v.32; Caus. sambhañjeti to break MN i.237; SN i.123; pass. aor. samabhajjisaṃ Ja v.70 ■ pp. sambhagga ■ Cp. sampali˚.
saṃ + bhañjati
brought together, stored up; (nt.) store, provisions MN i.116; DN iii.190; AN iii.38 = AN iv.266; SN i.35; SN ii.185 = Iti 17; Ja i.338; Thag-a 11.
saṃ + bhata
to subside, to be calmed; only in prep combn paṭippassambhati (q.v.).
śrambh, given as sambh at Dhtp 214 in meaning “vissāsa”
devoted, a friend Ja i.106, Ja i.221; Nd i.226 = Vism 25 ■ yathāsambhattaṃ according to where each one’s companions live DN ii.98; SN v.152.
pp. of sambhajati
(f.) joining, consorting with Dhs 1326; Pp 20.
saṃ + bhatti
confusion, excitement; ˚-patta overwhelmed with excitement Ja iv.433.
saṃ + bhama, fr. bhram
to revolve Dhs-a 307.
saṃ + bhamati
1. origin, birth, production DN ii.107; SN iii.86; AN ii.10, AN ii.18; Snp 724, Snp 741 etc.; Dhp 161; Ja i.168; mātāpettikas˚ born from father and mother DN i.34; Dhs-a 306; natthi sambhavaṃ has not arisen Snp 235.
2. semen virile Ja v.152; Ja vi.160; Mil 124.
-esin seeking birth MN i.48; SN ii.11; Snp 147. Sambhavati, sambhunati & sambhoti;
saṃ + bhava
1. to be produced, to arise DN i.45, DN i.76; SN i.135; SN iv.67; Snp 734 Dāvs v.6; Mil 210.
2. to be adequate, competent DN ii.287; na s. is of no use or avail Mil 152.
3. to be present, to witness Ja i.56.
4. to be together with Ja ii.205 (C. on sambhaj-˚) ■ Pres. ˚-bhuṇati or ˚-bhuṇāti (like abhi-sam-bhuṇā̆ti) in the sense of “to reach” or “to be able to,” capable of Vin i.256 (˚-bhuṇāti); Snp 396 (part. a-sambhuṇanto = asakkonto, C.); also sambhoti Snp 734, DN ii.287; fut. sambhossāma Mvu 5, Mvu 100 ■ aor sambhavi DN i.96; DN i.3rd pl. samabhavuṃ Dāvs v.6; ger sambhuyya having come together with Vv-a 232 ■ pp sambhūta ■ Caus. sambhāveti (q.v.).
saṃ + bhavati
(nt.) coming into existence Ne 28.
fr. sambhavati
“what is carried together,” viz. 1. accumulation, product, preparation; sambhāraseda bringing on sweating by artificial means Vin i.205.
2 materials, requisite ingredients (of food) Mil 258; Ja i.481; Ja v.13, Ja v.506; Ja i.9; Ja ii.18; Ja iv.492; dabba˚ an effective requisite Dhp-a i.321; Dhp-a ii.114; bodhis˚ the necessary conditions for obtaining enlightening Ja i.1; vimokkhas˚ Thag-a 214.
3. constituent part, element SN iv.197; Dhs-a 306.
4. bringing together, collocation SN i.135; Mil 28.
fr. saṃ + bhṛ;
(nt.) supposition, assumption, the meaning of the particle sace Vin i.37219; cp Ja ii.29; Dhp-a ii.77.
fr. sambhāveti
(f.) honour, reverence, intention, confidence Mvu 29, Mvu 55; Dhs-a 163 (= okappanā); Sdhp 224.
fr. sambhāveti
honoured, esteemed MN i.110, MN i.145; Thag-a 200; Ja iii.269 (= bhaddaka); Vb-a 109.
pp. of sambhāveti
1. to undertake, achieve, to be intent on (acc.) Vin i.253; Dhs-a 163.
2. to reach, catch up to (acc.) Vin i.277 Vin ii.300.
3. to produce, effect Mil 49.
4. to consider Ja iii.220.
5. to honour, esteem; grd. ˚bhāvanīya to be honoured or respected, honourable Vv-a 152 MA 156 ■ pp. sambhāvita.
Caus. of sambhavati. The Dhtp (512) gives a special root sambhu in meaning “pāpuṇana”
(f.) conversation, talk; sukha-˚; Ja vi.296 (v.l.); mudu-˚; Ja ii.326 = Ja iv.471 = Ja v.451.
saṃ + bhāsā
to mix Vin i.111 (sīmāya sīmaṃ s. to mix a new boundary with an old one, i.e. to run on a boundary unduly); DN-a i.134 (udakena). pp. sambhinna ■ Cp. sambhejja.
saṃ + bhindati
1. mixed, mixed up Vin i.210; Vin ii.67, Vin ii.68 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.431); Ja i.55; Snp 9 Snp 319 (˚mariyāda-bhāva confusing the dividing lines indistinctness), 325 (id.). Said of a woman (i.e. of indistinct sexuality) Vin ii.271 = Vin iii.129.
2. broken up (?), exhausted Ja i.503 (˚sarīra) ■ asambhinna: 1. unmixed unadulterated Vism 41 (˚khīra-pāyāsa); Ja v.257 (˚khattiyavaṃsa); Dhp-a ii.85 (id.).
2. (of the voice unmixed, i.e. distinct, clear Mil 360.
3. name of a kind of ointment Vin iv.117.
pp. of sambhindati
(adj.) terrified Mil 339; a-sambhīta, fearless Mil 105; Ja iv.92; Ja v.34; Ja vi.302.
saṃ + bhīta
1. to eat together with Vin iv.137.
2. to associate with SN i.162.
saṃ + bhuñjati
see sambhavati.
arisen from, produced Snp 272 (atta˚ self-; cp. Snp-a 304; attabhāva-pariyāye attani s.); SN i.134.
pp. of sambhavati
belonging to the confluence of rivers (said of the water of the ocean), united SN ii.135; SN v.461 (various reading sambhojja).
grd. of sambhindati
mixing up, confusion, contamination DN iii.72; AN i.51 = Iti 36; DN-a i.260 (jāti˚ mixing of caste); Vism 123 (of colours).
saṃ + bheda
eating, living together with Vin i.97; Vin ii.21; Vin iv.137; AN i.92; Snp-a 71; Ja iv.127; Sdhp 435.
saṃ + bhoga
see sambhavati.
a term of familiar address DN i.49, DN i.225; DN-a i.151; Vin ii.161; Ja i.59; Pv-a 204; plur. sammā Vin ii.161.
as to etym. Andersen, P. Reader ii.263 quite plausibly connects it with Vedic śam (indecl.) “hail, which is often used in a vocative sense, esp. in combn śam ca yos ca “hail & blessing!”, but also suggests relation to sammā. Other suggestions see Andersen s. v.
see sammā.
samyak
a cymbal Mil 60; Dhs 621; Ja i.3; Dhs-a 319. - Otherwise as ˚tāḷa a kind of cymbal Thag 893, Thag 911; Vv 353; Vv-a 161; Ja vi.60; Ja vi.277 (-l-).
(nt.) smearing Vism 346.
saṃ + makkhana
smeared Ja v.16; abstr. ˚tta (nt.) Vism 346.
saṃ + makkhita
to smear Vism 346.
saṃ + makkheti
see under sammā˚.
1. to sweep Vin i.46; Vin ii.209; Ja ii.25; Dhp-a i.58; Dhp-a ii.184; Dhp-a iii.168.
2. to rub, polish Ja i.338 ■ pp. sammaṭṭha ■ Caus. II. sammajjāpeti Vin i.240.
saṃ + majjati2
(adj.-n..) sweeping Ja i.67; Snp-a 66 (˚ka); Vv-a 319 (T. sammajja).
fr. last
(f.) a broom Vin ii.129; AN iv.170; Vism 105; Dhp-a iii.7; cp. sammujjanī.
fr. last
see sammannati.
swept, cleaned, polished, smooth Vin iii.119 (su˚); Ja i.10; Ja iii.395 (smooth) Spelt ˚maṭṭa at Mil 15.
pp. of sammajjati
1. considered as MN i.39; SN ii.15; SN iv.127; DN iii.89 (dhamma˚); Vin iv.161, Vin iv.295–2. honoured, revered MN ii.213; Ja i.49; Ja v.79; sādhusammata considered, revered, as good DN i.47; SN iv.398
3. authorized, selected, agreed upon DN iii.93 (mahājana˚) Vin i.111; Vin iii.150.
pp. of sammannati
Dhtp 436 = upasama] 1. to be appeased, calmed; to cease Dhp 5; Pot 3rd pl. sammeyyuṃ SN i.24–2. to rest, to dwell DN i.92; SN i.226; Ja v.396; DN-a i.262 (= vasati); pp. santa ■ Caus. sāmeti to appease suppress, stop, AN ii.24; Iti 82, Iti 83, Iti 117, Iti 183; Dhp 265.
to labour; pres. śamyati; pp. Vedic śamita] to work; to be satisfactory Vin ii.119 (parissāvanaṃ na s.), 278 (navakammaṃ etc. na s.).
Vedic śrāmyati Dhtp 220 = parissama, 436 = kheda] to be weary or fatigued.
intoxicated, maddened, delighted DN ii.266; Dhp 287; Ja iii.188; doting on Ja v.443; rogasammatta tormented by illness Ja v.90 (= ˚pīḷita C.; v.l. ˚patta, as under matta2).
saṃ + matta2
(nt.) correctness, righteousness AN i.121; AN iii.441; Pp 13; Dhs 1029; Ne 44; Ne 96, Ne 112; Kv 609; Dhs-a 45; KvA 141; ˚kārin, attained to proficiency in Mil 191; sammatta-kāritā ibid.-The 8 sammattā are the 8 angas of the ariya-magga (see magga 2 a) DN iii.255; the 10 are the above with the addition of sammā-ñāṇa and ˚vimutti AN v.240.
abstr. fr. sammā
see sammā.
drowsiness after a meal DN ii.195; AN i.3; AN v.83; Ja ii.63; bhatta-˚ SN i.7; Ja vi.57.
saṃ + mada
to trample down Vin i.137; Vin i.286 (cīvaraṃ, to soak, steep); ppr. sammaddanto Vin i.137 (to crush).
saṃ + maddati
to consult together DN i.142; Ja i.269, Ja i.399; DN-a i.135.
saṃ + manteti
1. to assent, to consent to Mvu 3, Mvu 10; DN-a i.11.
2. to agree to, to authorize select Vin iii.150, Vin iii.158, Vin iii.238; Vin iv.50; Mvu 3, Mvu 9; sīmaṃ s to determine, to fix the boundary Vin i.106 sq.
3. to esteem, honour; inf. sammannituṃ Vin iv.50. sammannesi DN i.105 is misprint for samannesi ■ ppr. sammata.
saṃ + man, fr. Vedic manute, manvate, for the usual manyate: see maññati
to touch, seize, grasp, know thoroughly, master SN ii.107; Dhp 374; Mil 325; to think, meditate on (acc.) Ja vi.379; ppr. sammasaṃ ii.107 & sammasanto Mil 379; Ja i.74, Ja i.75; fem. sammasantī Thag-a 62; sammasamāna Mil 219, Mil 325, Mil 398; pp sammasita.
saṃ + masati
grasping, mastering Mil 178; Vism 287, Vism 629 sq.; cp. Cpd. 65, 210.
(nt.) fr. last
grasped, understood, mastered Ja i.78.
pp. of sammasati
one who grasps, sees clearly Snp 69.
a pin of the yoke Abhp 449; a kind of sacrificial instrument Snp-a 321 (sammaṃ ettha pāsantī ti sammāpāso; and sātrā-yāgass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ). Cp. Weber Indische Streifen i.36, and sammāpāsa below.
cp. Sk. śamyā
(indecl.) thoroughly properly, rightly; in the right way, as it ought to be best, perfectly (opp. micchā) DN i.12; Vin i.12; Snp 359 Snp 947; Dhp 89, Dhp 373. Usually as ˚-, like sammā-dhārā even or proper showers (i.e. at the right time) Pv ii.970 especially in connection with constituents of the eightfold Aryan Path, where it is contrasted with micchā see magga 2 a. (e.g. Vb-a 114 sq., 121, 320 sq.). The form sammā is reduced to samma˚; before short vowels (with the insertion of a sandhi -d-, cp. puna-deva), like samma-d-eva properly, in harmony or completeness DN i.110; Vin i.9: Pv-a 139, Pv-a 157; samma-daññā & ˚akkhāta; (see below); and before double consonants arisen from assimilation, like sammag-gata (= samyak + gata). The cpds. we shall divide into two groups, viz. (A) cpds. with samma˚; (B) with sammā˚.
A. -akkhāta well preached Dhp 86. -aññā perfect knowledge Vin i.183; SN i.4; SN iv.128; Dhp 57 (˚vimutta cp. Dhp-a i.434); Iti 38, Iti 79, Iti 93, Iti 95, Iti 108. -attha a proper or good thing or cause Ja vi.16. -ddasa having right views AN ii.18; SN iv.205, SN iv.207; Snp 733; Iti 47, Iti 61, Iti 81 Kv 339. -ggata [cp. BSk. samyaggata Divy 399] who has wandered rightly, perfect MN i.66; who has attained the highest point, an Arahant DN i.55; SN i.76; AN i.269; AN iv.226; AN v.265; Ja iii.305; Iti 87; Ap 218 Also sammāgata Vin ii.20317. -ppajāna having right knowledge Dhp 20; Iti 115. -ppaññā right knowledge true wisdom Vin i.14; Dhp 57, Dhp 190; Snp 143; Iti 17; Mil 39. -ppadhāna [cp. BSk. samyakprahāna Divy 208 right exertion Vin i.22; Dhs 358; Dpvs 18, 5; they are four DN ii.120; MN iii.296; explained MN ii.11 (anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāya; uppannānaṃ pahānāya; anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya; uppannānaṃ ṭhitiyā). B. -ājīva right living, right means of livelihood, right occupation Vin i.10; SN v.421, etc.; formula DN ii.312 (adj.) living in the right way MN i.42; AN ii.89. -kammanta right conduct, right behaviour Vin i.10; SN v.421 etc.; definition DN ii.312; Dhs 300; adj. behaving in the right way MN i.42; AN ii.89. -ñāṇa right knowledge enlightenment, results from right concentration DN ii.217; AN i.292; adj. MN i.42. -ñāṇin possessing the right insight AN ii.89, AN ii.222. -dassana right views Vism 605 -diṭṭhi right views, right belief, the first stage of the noble eightfold path, consists in the knowledge of the four truths DN ii.311; its essence is knowledge Dhs 20, Dhs 297, Dhs 317; cp. Vism 509; comprises the knowledge of the absence of all permanent Being and the reality of universal conditioned Becoming SN ii.17 SN iii.135; and of the impermanence of the 5 Khandhas SN iii.51 = SN iv.142; and of Sīla, of causation and of the destruction of the Āsavas MN i.46
55; how obtained MN i.294; two degrees of MN iii.72; supremely important AN i.30
2 292 sq.; (adj.) Mil i.47. -diṭṭhika having the right belief DN i.139; AN ii.89; AN ii.220 sq.; AN iii.115, AN iii.138 AN iv.290; AN v.124 sq.; SN iv.322. -dvayatānupassin duly considering both-i.e. misery with its origin, the destruction of misery with the path, respectively Snp p.140. -dhārā a heavy shower SN v.379. -paṭipatti right mental disposition AN i.69; Ne 27; Mil 97 sammāpaṭipadā Pp 49 sq.; Dhp-a iv.127; sammāpaṭipanna rightly disposed, having the right view DN i.8, DN i.55; Pp 49 sq. -passaṃ viewing the matter in the right way SN iii.51; SN iv.142. -pāsa [Sk. śamyāprāsa but BSk. śamyaprāśa Divy 634] a kind of sacrifice Snp 303; AN ii.42; AN iv.151; SN i.76; Iti 21; Ja iv.302; Snp-a 321 Cp. sammā1. -manasikāra right, careful, thought DN i.13; DN-a i.104. -vattanā strict, proper, conduct Vin i.46, Vin i.50; Vin ii.5. -vācā right speech Vin i.10; DN-a i.314; definition DN ii.312; Dhs 299; (adj.) speaking properly MN i.42; AN ii.89. -vāyāma right effort Vin i.10; Dhs 13, Dhs 22, Dhs 302; definition DN ii.312; adj. MN i.42; AN ii.89 -vimutta right emancipation AN i.292; ˚vimutti the same DN ii.217; AN ii.196, AN ii.222; (adj.) MN i.42; AN ii.89 -saṅkappa right resolve, right intention Dhp 12; Vin i.10; Dhs 21, Dhs 298; definition DN ii.312; (adj.) MN i.42; AN ii.89 -sati right memory, right mindfulness, self-possession Vin i.10; Dhs 23, Dhs 303; definition DN ii.313; (adj.) MN i.42; AN ii.89. -samādhi right concentration, the last stage of the noble eightfold path Vin i.10; Dhs 24, Dhs 304 definition DN ii.313; adj. MN i.12; AN ii.89. -sampassaṃ having the right view SN iv.142. -sambuddha perfectly enlightened, a universal Buddha Vin i.5; DN i.49; Dhp 187; Ja i.44; Dhp-a i.445; Dhp-a iii.241; Vb-a 436, etc. -sambodhi perfect enlightenment, supreme Buddhaship Vin i.11; DN ii.83; SN i.68, etc.
Vedic samyac (= samyak) & samīś “connected, in one”; see under saṃ˚
(nt.) [fr. saṃ + man ] honour Ja i.182; Ja vi.390; Sdhp 355.
(f.) honouring, veneration DN iii.190; Mil 162, Mil 375, Mil 386.
saṃ + mānanā
(& ˚eti) to bend back, to double up (opp pasārati or sampasāreti) Vin i.5; MN i.57, MN i.168; DN i.70; Ja i.321; Vism 365 (v.l. samiñjeti); DN-a i.196 ■ pp sammiñjita.
saṃ + iñjati, see also samiñjati; cp. BSk. sammiñjayati Divy 473. See also Leumann Album Kern, p. 393
(nt.) bending DN-a i.196 (opp. pasāraṇa); Vb-a 358.
fr. sammiñjati
bent back MN i.326 (spelt samiñjita); AN ii.104, AN ii.106 sq., 210.
pp. of sammiñjati
measured, i.e. just so much, no more or less; ˚-bhānin Thag 209.
saṃ + mita
withered, shrunk MN i.80.
saṃ + milāta
(f.) speaking with smiles Ja iv.24; name of a girl in Benares Ja iii.93 sq.
saṃ + milla = mihita, + bhāsin
(f.) the state of being mixed, confusion Dhs-a 311.
fr. saṃ + missa
(adj.) face to face with, in presence; sammukhaciṇṇa a deed done in a person’s presence Ja iii.27; sammukhā (abl.) 1. face to face before, from before DN ii.155; Snp p.79; Ja i.115; Ja iii.89 (opp. parokkhā); with acc. Bv ii.73 = Ja i.17; with gen DN i.222; DN ii.220; MN i.146.
2. in a full assembly of qualified persons Vin ii.3; loc. sammukhe DN ii.206; Ja v.461. In composition sammukha˚, sammukhā˚ sammukhī˚; (before bhū): ˚bhāva (˚a˚) presence, confrontation Mil 126; (˚ī˚) being face to face with coming into one’s presence DN i.103; MN i.438; AN i.150 ˚bhūta (˚ī˚) being face to face with, confronted DN ii.155; SN iv.94; Vin ii.73; AN iii.404 sq.; AN v.226; one who has realized the saṃyojanas Kv 483; ˚vinaya (˚ā˚) proceeding in presence, requiring the presence of a chapter of priests and of the party accused Vin ii.74, Vin ii.93 sq.; Vin iv.207; AN i.99; Dhs-a 144. See also yebhuyyasikā.
saṃ + mukha
(f.) presence, confrontation Vin ii.93 (sangha˚).
abstr. fr. sammukha
see samucchita.
(f.) a broom Ja i.161; sammuñjanī the same Mil 2.
= sammajjanī
confused MN i.21; SN iv.125; SN v.331; one who has forgotten Vin iv.45 (= na ssarati) iii.16513; ˚ssati id. AN i.280.
saṃ + muṭṭha
(f.) 1. consent, permission Vin iii.199.
2. choice, selection, delegation Vin iii.159. 3. fixing, determination (of boundary) Vin i.106. 4. common consent, general opinion, convention, that which is generally accepted; as ˚-conventional, e.g. ˚sacca conventional truth (as opposed to paramattha˚ the absolute truth) Mil 160; ˚ñāṇa common knowledge DN iii.226; ˚deva what is called a deva Ja i.132; DN-a i.174 see under deva; ˚maraṇa what is commonly called “death” Vism 229 ■ sammuccā (instr.) by convention or common consent Snp 648 (v.l. sammacca = ger. of sammannati).
5. opinion, doctrine Snp 897 (= dvāsaṭṭhī diṭṭhigatāni Nd i.308), 904, 911.
6. definition declaration, statement Vin i.123 (ummattaka˚); AN iv.347 (vādaka˚); Vb-a 164 (bhuñjaka˚).
7. a popular expression, a mere name or word Mil 28. 8. tradition, lore; combd with suti at Mil 3.
fr. saṃ + man
delighted, delighting in Vin i.4; MN i.503; SN iv.390.
pp. of sammodati
to be bewildered, infatuated, muddle-headed Ja iv.385; Mil 42 ■ pp. sammūḷha DN ii.85; MN i.250; AN i.165; Snp 583; Caus. sammoheti to befool Mil 224.
saṃ + muyhati
(nt.) bewilderment DN-a i.193
saṃ + muyhana
M ii.202, read sammuccā (from sammuti).
(f.) forgetfulness Dhs 14 Dhs 1349; Pp 21.
fr. saṃ + mussati
infatuated, bewildered DN ii.85; MN i.250; AN i.165; Snp 583; Ja v.294; Tikp 366.
saṃ + mūḷha
rainy or cloudy weather Ja vi.51, Ja vi.52.
saṃ + megha
odour, fragrance; ekagandha˚, filled with fragrance Ja vi.9.
fr. saṃ + mud
(adj.) polite DN i.116; DN-a i.287; a-sammodaka (f. ˚-ikā) Vin i.34116.
fr. sammodati
1. to rejoice, delight; pp. sammudita (q.v.).
2. to agree with, to exchange friendly greeting with; aor. sammodi Vin i.2; DN i.52; Snp 419; Ja vi.224; ppr. sammodamāna in agreement, on friendly terms Ja i.209; Ja ii.6; ger. sammoditvā Ja ii.107; grd sammodanīya [cp. BSk. sammodanī saṃrañjanī kathā Divy 70, Divy 156 & passim] pleasant, friendly A; v.193; cp Snp 419; Vin i.2; DN i.52 ■ sammodita at Vv-a 186 read samodita.
saṃ + modati
(nt.) satisfaction, compliment; ˚ṃ karoti to exchange politeness, to welcome Vv-a 141, Vv-a 259.
saṃ + modana
bewilderment, confusion DN i.19; AN i.58; AN ii.147; SN ii.224; SN iv.190; Vin ii.114; Mil 266, Mil 289; Vism 63 (sati˚ lapse of memory).
for *sam-mṛṣa, of mṛṣ: see mussati. sammosa after moha & musā → mosa
bewilderment, infatuation, delusion MN i.86, MN i.136; Vin i.183; Nd i.193; AN ii.174; AN iii.54 sq., 416; SN i.24; SN iv.206; Dhs 390.
saṃ + moha
see sammuyhati.
(?) one’s own Ja vi.414 (= saka-raṭṭha C.).
(adv.) self, by oneself Vin i.8; DN i.12; DN-a i.175; Snp 57, Snp 320, etc.; p. 57, 100, etc. Mvu 7, Mvu 63 (for f.). Also with ref. to several people e.g. Dhp-a i.13.
-kata made by itself, spontaneous DN iii.137 (loka) SN ii.19 sq. (dukkha); Ud 69 sq. -jāta born from oneself sprung up spontaneously Ja i.325; Ja ii.129. -pabha radiating light from oneself, a kind of devas DN i.17 DN iii.28 sq., 84 sq.; Snp 404; DN-a i.110 -bhū self-dependent, an epithet of a Buddha Bv xiv.1 = Ja i.39; Mil 214, Mil 227, Mil 236; Vism 234; Snp-a 106 (f. abstr sayambhutā), 135. -vara self-choice Ja v.426. -vasin self-controlled, independent Bv ii.20 = Ja i.5; Dāvs i.22.
see etym. under sa4
at SN i.14 read saṃyatatta.
to lie down: see seti. Caus. II. sayāpeti ibid.
which is given in meaning sevā at Dhtp 289] to lean on; to be supported etc.: only in pp. sita, and in prep. cpd. nissayati.
(adv.) [cp. Sk. sayathā or tadyathā; see sa2. The usual P. form is seyyathā] like, as Thag 412.
(nt.) 1. lying down, sleeping Vism 26; Pv-a 80 (mañca˚).
2. bed, couch Vin i.57, Vin i.72; Vin ii.123; DN i.5, DN i.7; AN i.132; Ja ii.88; Ja v.110 (˚ṃ attharāpeti to spread out a bed); Mil 243, Mil 348; Nd i.372 (˚sannidhi); Pv i.117 (kis˚ = kiṃ˚); Pv-a 78 ■ sayanakalaha a quarrel in the bedroom, a curtain-lecture Ja iii.20; sayanāsana bed seat Iti 112; Dhp 185, etc.: see senāsana.
fr. śī
(nt.) a sleeping-room Vin i.140 sq.; Vin iv.160; Ja i.433; Ja iii.275, Ja iii.276.
is ppr. of sayati lying down (e.g. AN ii.13 sq.): see seti.
made to lie down Vb-a 11.
pp. of sayāpeti
lying down Ja i.338; Ja v.438. sukha˚; lying in a good position, sleeping well, well-embedded (of seeds) AN iii.404 = DN ii.354; Mil 255. sukha-sayitabhāva “having had a good sleep,” being well Ja v.127.
pp. of seti
see sahati.
1. the reed Saccharum sara Mil 342.
2. an arrow (orig. made of that reed) DN i.9; Dhp 304; Mil 396; Dhp-a 216 (visa-pīta).
-tuṇḍa a beak as sharp as an arrow Dhp-a iii.32 -daṇḍaka shaft of an arrow Dhp-a ii.141. -bhaṅga arrow-breaking Vism 411 (in comp.).
cp. Vedic śara
(adj.-n.) [fr. sarati1 1. going, moving, following Snp 3, Snp 901–2. fluid, flow Ja i.359 (pūti˚).
(m ■ nt.) a lake Ja i.221; Ja ii.10; Ja vi.518 (Mucalinda); there are seven great lakes (mahā-sarā viz. Anotatta, Sīhapapāta, Rathakāra, Kaṇṇamuṇḍa Kuṇāla, Chaddanta, Mandākini) AN iv.101; DN i.54; Ja ii.92; DN-a i.164, DN-a i.283; aṇṇava˚; the ocean DN ii.89 cp. AN ii.55; loc. sare Ja ii.80; sarasmiṃ Snp 1092; sarasi Mvu 10, Mvu 7; jātassara a natural lake Ja i.472 sq.
Vedic saras
(adj.) remembering MN i.453; AN ii.21; DN-a i.106. ˚saṅkappa mindfulness and aspiration MN i.453; MN iii.132; SN iv.76, SN iv.137, SN iv.190; Ne 16.
fr. sarati2
sound, voice, intonation, accent Vin ii.108; DN ii.24 sq. AN i.227; Pv ii.124 (of birds’ singing = abhiruda C.) Ja ii.109; Snp 610 (+ vaṇṇa, which is doubtful here whether “complexion” or “speech,” preferably the former); Dhs-a 17; eight qualities DN ii.211, DN ii.227; gītāssara song Vin ii.108; bindussara a sweet voice Snp 350 adj. Ja ii.439; sīhassara with a voice like a lion’s Ja v.296 Ja v.311 (said of a prince). Cp. vissara ■ In combn with vaṇṇa (vowel) at AN iv.307; Mil 340.
-kutti [ = kḷpti; can we compare BSk. svaragupti “depth of voice” Divy 222?] intonation, resonance timbre, melodiousness of voice Vin ii.108 = AN iii.251; Ja vi.293 (Kern, “enamoured behaviour” [?]); Dhs-a 16. Cp. Vin. Texts iii.72. -bhañña intoning, a particular mode of reciting Vin i.196; Vin ii.108, Vin ii.316; Ja ii.109; Dhp-a i.154. -bhāṇa = ˚bhañña Dhp-a ii.95 (v.l. ˚bhañña). -bhāṇaka an intoner, one who intones or recites the sacred texts in the Sarabhañña manner Vin ii.300. -sara an imitative word; sarasaraṃ karoti to make the noise sarasara MN i.128.
Vedic svara, svar, cp. Lat. su-surrus, Ger. surren
(f.) the sun (lit. having rays) Mvu 18, Mvu 68.
fr. sa3 + raṃsi
a vessel, a drinking vessel Ja i.157, Ja i.266; Ja iv.384; DN-a i.134, DN-a i.136; Mvu 32, Mvu 32; Dhp-a ii.85; Dhp-a iii.7.
(adj.) dusty Vin i.48; AN ii.54.
sa + rajo
(nt.) shelter, house Snp 591; refuge, protection DN iii.187; Snp 503; Ja ii.28; DN-a i.229; especially the three refuges-the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Brotherhood-A i.56; DN i.145; Ja i.28; usually combined with verbs like upeti Vv 532; Snp 31; gacchati DN i.116; AN iii.242; Vin i.4; Dhp 190; Snp p.15, Snp p.25; Iti 63; or yāti Snp 179; Dhp 188; asaraṇa, asaraṇībhūta without help and refuge Mil 148. See leṇa 2.
-āgamana = ˚gamana DN i.146; Snp-a 42, Snp-a 157. -gamana (nt.) taking refuge in the three Saraṇas Vin iii.24; SN iv.270.
cp. Vedic śaraṇa protection, shelter, house, śarman id.; śālā hall; to Idj. *kel to hide, as in Lat celo, Gr. καλύπτω to conceal, Oir. celim, Ohg. Ags. helan Goth. huljan to envelop; Ohg. hella = E. hell; also E. hall, and others
(adj.) concomitant with war Dhs 1294; Dhs-a 50.
sa + raṇa
(nt.) remembrance; -tā (f.) remembering Dhs 14, Dhs 23; Pp 21, Pp 25.
fr. smṛ; i.e. sarati2
(nt.) something to be remembered AN i.106.
grd. formation fr. saraṇa2
given by Dhtp 248 as “gati”] to go, flow, run, move along Ja iii.95 (= parihāyati nassati C.); Pot. sare Ja iv.284 ■ aor. asarā Ja vi.199 ■ pp. sarita1 ■ Caus sāreti (1) to make go AN i.141; AN iii.28 = MN i.124 = SN iv.176; Ja iv.99; Mil 378; Vism 207 ■ (2) to rub, to mix Vin ii.116. Also sarāpeti. A Desid. formn is siṃsare (3rd pl. med.) at Vv 647 (= Sk. sisīrṣati), cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 184.
cp. smṛti = sati; Dhtp 248 “cintā”; Lat memor, memoria = memory; Gr. μέριμνα care, μάρτυ witness, martyr; Goth. maúrnan = E. mourn to care etc.] to remember DN ii.234; Vin i.28; Vin ii.79; Ja ii.29. A diaeretic form is sumarati Dhp 324; ger. sumariya Mvu 4, Mvu 65.
1st pl. saremhase Thig 383; med. sare Ja vi.227 imper. sara Thag 445; & sarāhi Mil 79; Mil 3rd sg. saratu Vin i.273 ■ ppr. saraṃ Mvu 3, Mvu 6; & saramāna Vin i.103-aor. sari Ja i.330; fut. sarissati Ja vi.496 ■ ger saritvā Ja i.214 ■ pp. sata2 & sarita;2 ■ Caus. sāreti to remind Vin ii.3 sq., 276; iii.221; sārayamāna, reminding Ja i.50; ppr. pass. sāriyamāna Vin iii.221; w. acc DN ii.234; w. gen. Dhp 324; Ja vi.496; with foll. fut. II (in ˚tā) Vin ii.125, Vin ii.4; Vin iii.44, Vin iii.9, etc ■ Caus. II. sarāpeti Vin iii.44; Mil 37 (with double acc.), 79.
Dhtp 248: hiṃsā] to crush: see seyyati. Caus. sāreti Vin ii.116 (madhu-sitthakena, to pound up, or mix with beeswax). Cp. saritaka.
autumn the season following on the rains Snp 687; Vv 352. ˚-samaya the autumn season DN ii.183; MN i.115; AN iv.102 AN v.22; Iti 20; SN i.65; SN iii.141, SN iii.155; SN v.44; Vv-a 134, Vv-a 161.
Vedic śarad (f.) traces of the cons. decl. only in acc. pl. sarado sataṃ “100 autumns” Ja ii.16
(rohiccasarabhā migā = rohitā sarabhamigā, C. ibid. 538) Sarabhamigajātaka the 483rd Jātaka Ja i.193, Ja i.406 (text Sarabhanga); iv.263 sq.
-pallaṅka “antelope-couch,” a high seat, from which the Bodhisat preaches Ja iii.342 (cp. vara-pallanka Ja iii.364). -pādaka having legs like those of a gazelle Ja i.267.
Vedic śarabha a sort of deer Ja iv.267; Ja vi.537
(adv.) eagerly, quickly Dāvs iv.22, Dāvs iv.34 sq., 43.
sa2 + rabhasaṃ
(f.) a lizard Vin ii.110; AN ii.73; Ja ii.135, Ja ii.147; Snp-a 439.
cp. Sk. saraṭa
the tree Pinus longifolia Ja v.420 (thus read with B instead of salaḷa ).
?
(adj.) 1. having or making a sound, well-sounding Vin i.182; AN iii.375.
2. with a noise Mvu 25, Mvu 38.
sara5 + vant
(adj.) with its essential properties (see rasa) Nd i.43; sarasabhāva a method of exposition Dhs-a 71.
sa3 + rasa
(f.) a large pond Vin ii.201 = SN ii.269; Ja v.46.
Vedic sarasī
(adj.) connected with lust, passionate DN i.79; DN ii.299; MN i.59; Vism 410.
sa3 + rāga
(adj.) including the king Ja i.126; fem ■ ikā Vin ii.188; SN i.162; Ja ii.113, Ja ii.114 (sarājika at Ja iii.453); with the king’s participation Tikp 26 (sassāmika-sarājaka geha).
sa3 + rāja + ka
denomination of a purgatory and its inhabitants SN iv.309 sq. Various readings Parājita and Sarañjita.
(nt.) causing somebody to remember Mil 79.
fr. sarāpeti Caus. of sarati2
a cup, saucer AN i.161; Ja i.8; MN iii.235 for patta); Mil 282; DN-a i.298; Pv-a 244, Pv-a 251.
Sk. śarāva
= sarāva Vin i.203; Vin ii.142, Vin ii.153, Vin ii.222.
according to Payogasiddhi = sarisa (sadisa) cp. sarīvaṇṇa Ja ii.439 (= samāna-vaṇṇa, C.).
(adj.) like, resembling SN i.66; Ja i.443; Ja iii.262.
cp. Sk. sadṛkṣa, fr. sadṛś = P. sadisa
(adj.) in accordance with, like Ja iv.215; Pv-a 206, Pv-a 284. See also kamma˚.
= sarikkha
(f.) resemblance, likeness Ja iii.241 (taṃ˚ being like that); Vv-a 6 (cp. kamma˚).
fr. sarikkha
(nt.) likeness Dhs-a 63; as sarikkhakatta (kamma˚) at Dhs-a 347.
fr. sarikkha
gone, set into motion Dhp 341 (= anusaṭa, payāta Dhp-a iv.49).
pp. of sarati1
remembered Vin ii.85.
pp. of sarati2
(nt.) powdered stone (pāsāna-cuṇṇa) Vin ii.116; saritasipāṭika powder mixed with gum Vin ii.116.
one who remembers DN iii.268, DN iii.286; AN ii.35; SN v.197, SN v.225.
n. ag. fr. sarati2
(f.) a river Dhs 1059; saritaṃ acc. Snp 3; gen. pl. Ja ii.442; nom. pl. saritā Mil 125.
cp. Vedic sarit, fr. sarati1
(adj.) like, resembling Ja v.159.
= sadisa
various reading of siriṃsapa MN i.10 etc.
(nt.) 1. the (physical) body DN i.157; MN i.157; SN iv.286; AN i.50; AN ii.41; AN iii.57 sq., 323 sq. iv.190. Snp 478, Snp 584; Dhp 151; Nd i.181; Ja i.394 (six blemishes); ii.31; antimasarīra one who wears his last body, an Anāgāmin Snp 624; SN i.210; Dhp 400.
2. a dead body, a corpse DN ii.141, DN ii.164; MN iii.91.
3. the bones DN ii.164.
4. relics Vv 63, Vv 32; Vv-a 269.
-aṭṭhaka the bony framework of the body Dhs-a 338 -ābhā radiation of light proceeding from the body, lustre Snp-a 16 (˚ṃ muñcati to send forth), 41 (id.), 140 (id.) -kicca (1) funeral ceremonies, obsequies Ja i.180; Ja ii.5; Vv-a 76, Vv-a 257; Pv-a 74, Pv-a 76, Pv-a 162 ■ (2) “bodily function, satisfying the body’s wants Ja ii.77; Ja iv.37. -davya (= dabba1) fitness of body, good body, beauty Ja ii.137 -dhātu a body relic (of the Buddha) Mvu 13, Mvu 167; Vv-a 165, Vv-a 269. -pabhā lustre of the body Dhp-a i.106 -parikamma attending the body Snp-a 52. -maṃsa the flesh of the body Ja iii.53. -vaṇṇa the (outward) appearance of the body Vism 193. -valañja discharge from the body, faeces Dhp-a ii.55; Dhp-a iv.46 (˚ṭhāna). See valañja -saṅghāta perfection of body Vism 194. -saṇṭhāna constitution of the body, bodily form Vism 193.
Vedic śarīra
(adj.) having a body SN ii.279.
sarīra + vant
resembling Ja ii.439 (v.l. sarīra˚). Cp. sari.
(adj.) 1. of the same form AN i.162; Pp 56.
2. [sa3 + rūpa] having a body AN i.83.
sa2 + rūpa
(nt.) “lake-born,” a lotus Dāvs iii.13.
Sk. saroja, saras + ja
a Brahmā, an archangel Dāvs i.34.
fr. last
(nt.) a lotus Dāvs iii.83.
saras + ruha
(adj.) together with the characteristics Snp 1018.
sa3 + lakkhaṇa
(nt.) own characteristic, that which is consistent with one’s own nature Mil 205 Ne 20. Opp. vilakkhaṇa.
sa1 + lakkhaṇa
(nt.) moving, shaking Vv-a 169; Dhs-a 62 (in defn of kusala as “kucchitānaṃ salan’ādīhi atthehi kusalaṃ”).
fr. śal
a moth Ja v.401; Ud 72 (C.); Vb-a 146.
cp. Sk. śalabha
to shake Dhs-a 39.
Caus. of śal to leap
a kind of sweet-scented tree Ja v.420; Bv ii.51 = Ja i.13; Vv 355; Vv-a 162; Mil 338; MN ii.184.
(f.) 1. an arrow, a dart AN iv.107 (T. has it as nt.).
2. a small stick, peg, thin bar SN iv.168; Dāvs iv.51.
3. blade of a grass MN i.79; Ja i.439.
4. ribs of a parasol Vin iv.338; Snp-a 487; Mil 226.
5. a pencil, small stick (used in painting the eyes with collyrium) Vin i.204; Ja iii.419 (añjana˚). 6. a kind of needle Vin ii.116.
7. a kind of surgical instrument, a stick of caustic Mil 112, Mil 149.
8. a gong stick (of bronze, loha˚) Ja ii.342; Vism 283.
9 membrum virile Ja ii.359.
10. a ticket consisting of slips of wood used in voting and distributing food, vote lot Vin ii.99, Vin ii.176, Vin ii.306; Ja i.123; Pv-a 272 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚) salākaṃ gaṇhāti to take tickets (in order to vote or to be counted) Vin i.117; Vin ii.199; paṭhaman salākaṃ gaṇhanto taking the first vote, first rate AN i.24; salākaṃ gāheti to issue tickets, to take a vote Vin ii.205; salākaṃ dadāti to issue tickets Ja i.123; salākaṃ vāreti to throw lots Ja i.239 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚).
-agga room for distributing food by tickets Ja i.123 Mvu 15, Mvu 205. -odhāniya a case for the ointment-stick Vin i.204. -gāha taking of votes, voting Vin ii.85, Vin ii.98 sq. (3 kinds). -gāhāpaka ticket-issuer, taker of voting tickets Vin ii.84. -bhatta food to be distributed by tickets Vin i.58, Vin i.96; Vin ii.175; Ja i.123; Dhp-a i.53 (eight kinds). -vātapāna a window made with slips of wood Vin ii.148. -vutta “subsisting on blades of grass” (or “by means of food tickets”?) Vin iii.6, Vin iii.67; Vin iv.23; AN i.160; SN iv.323. Cp. BSk. śalākāvṛtti Divy 131. -hattha brush-hand, a kind of play, where the hand is dipped in lac or dye and used as a brush (?) DN i.65; DN-a i.85.
cp. Vedic śalākā
(adj.) fresh, unripe SN i.150 = Snp p.125; Mil 334; Vv-a 288.
cp. *Sk. śalāṭu
one’s own advantage Dhp 365.
sa4 + lābha
(nt.) water Snp 62, Snp 319, Snp 672; Ja i.8; Ja v.169; Vv-a 41; Pv-a 157; Nd ii.665 (“vuccati udakaṃ”); Mil 132 (written saliḷa); Sdhp 168. It is also adj. salilaṃ āpo flowing water Ja vi.534; cp. Mil 114: na tā nadiyo dhuva-salilā.
-dhārā shower of water Mil 117. -vuṭṭhi id. Vism 234.
cp. Sk. salila, to sarati1
(nt.) an arrow, dart MN i.429 (˚ṃ āharati to remove the a); ii.216; SN iv.206; Ja i.180 Ja v.49; Snp 331, Snp 767; Mil 112; Vism 503 (visa˚ sting of poison; cp. Vb-a 104 sallaṃ viya vitujjati); often metaphorically of the piercing sting of craving, evil sorrow etc., e.g. antodosa˚; Mil 323; taṇhā˚; SN i.40, SN i.192 bhava˚; Dhp 351; rāga˚; Dhp-a iii.404; Pv-a 230; soka˚ Snp 985; Pv i.86; Kp-a 153. Cp. also DN ii.283; Snp 51 Snp 334, Snp 938; Ja i.155; Ja iii.157; Dhp-a iv.70. At Nd i.59 seven such stings are given with rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚ māna˚, diṭṭhi˚, soka˚, kathankathā˚ ■ abhūḷha˚; one whose sting of craving or attachment is pulled out DN ii.283; Snp 593; Ja iii.390; Pv i.87 etc. (see abbūḷha). Cp. vi˚.
-katta [*kartṛ cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 90, 4] “one who works on the (poisoned) arrow,” i.e. a surgeon MN i.429 MN ii.216; Snp 562; Iti 101; Mil 110, Mil 169; Vism 136 (in simile); Kp-a 21 (id.). The Buddha is the best surgeon Snp 560; Mil 215. -kattiya surgery DN i.12 (T. ˚ka) DN-a i.98. -bandhana at Thig 347 take as salla bandhana “arrow & prison bond” (Thag-a 242 different) -viddha pierced by an arrow Thag 967; Snp 331; cp ruppati. -santhana removal of the sting Dhp 275 (= nimmathana abbāhana Dhp-a iii.404).
Vedic śalya, cp. śalākā
a porcupine Ja v.489.
cp. *Sk. śalala & śallaka
(f.) the tree Boswellia thurifera (incense tree) Ja iv.92; pl. ˚-iyo Ja vi.535; bahukuṭaja-sallakika Thag 115 (= indasālarukkha [?]).
cp. Class. Sk. śallakī
(f.) discernment, testing Dhs 16, Dhs 292, Dhs 555; Pp 25; Vism 278; Vb-a 254; Dhs-a 147; asallakkaṇa non-discernment SN iii.261.
fr. sallakkheti
realized, thought Dhp-a i.89.
pp. of sallakkheti
to observe, consider Vin i.48, Vin i.271; Ja i.123; Ja ii.8; Vism 150; to examine Ja v.13; to bear in mind Dhs-a 110; Ja vi.566; to understand realize, conclude, think over Ja iv.146; Vv-a 185; Vb-a 53; asallakkhetvā without deliberation Vin ii.215 inadvertently Ja i.209 ■ Caus. II. sallakkhāpeti to cause to be noted Mvu 9, Mvu 24; Dhs-a 121; to persuade, bring to reason Ja vi.393.
saṃ + lakkheti
to talk (with) DN i.90; DN ii.109; Mil 4; sallapeti the same Vin iv.14.
saṃ + lapati
pierced, perforated Ja i.180. Trenckner suggests that this form may have arisen from *sallakīkata (from sallaka, porcupine).
(adj.) light Ja i.277; Ja ii.26; Vism 65; Dhp-a iv.17; sallahukena nakkhattena on lucky nights Ja ii.278; sallahukavuttin whose wants are easily met, frugal Snp 144; DN-a i.207.
saṃ + lahuka
conversation DN i.89; AN ii.182; Ja i.112, Ja i.189; Mil 94. Often in cpd. kathā & allāpa˚.;
saṃ + lāpa
smeared (with) Thag 1175 (mīḷha˚).
saṃ + litta
sluggish, cowering DN ii.255; asallīna active, upright, unshaken DN ii.157; SN i.159; SN iv.125 Cp v.68. paṭi˚.
saṃ + līna
(f.) stolidity Dhs 1156, Dhs 1236.
austere penance, the higher life MN i.13, MN i.40; Vin i.305; Pts i.102, Pts i.103; Pp 69 sq.; DN-a i.82; Vism 69; Mil 360, Mil 380; adj. Vin i.45; sallekhitācāra practising austere penance Mil 230, Mil 244, Mil 348 sq. ˚vutti Vin ii.197; Vism 65 (˚vuttitā). Cp. abhi˚.
fr. saṃ + likh
(f.) = sallekha DN iii.115; Vism 53.
(nt.) the six organs of sense and the six objects-viz., eye ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind; forms, sounds, odouis tastes, tangible things, ideas; occupying the fourth place in the Paṭiccasamuppāda DN ii.32; MN i.52; AN i.176; SN ii.3; Vin i.1; Vism 529, Vism 562 sq., 671; Vb-a 174 Vb-a 176 sq., 319.
ṣaḍ˚ for which ordinarily chal˚: see cha
(adj.) dripping, flowing with (-˚) Pv ii.911 (madhu˚, with honey).
fr. sru, savati
see ˚
a sort of fish Ja v.405. Cp. satavanka & saccavanka.;
(the subject of a) conversation Vin ii.5, Vin ii.22, Vin ii.276.
sa3 + vacanīya
to flow Snp 197, Snp 1034; Ja vi.278; Dhp 370 ■ ppr. fr. savantī Thag-a 109.
sru; cp. Sk. srotas stream; Gr. ῥεϋμα, ῥέω to flow; Ags. strēam = stream; Oir. sruth
(nt.) 1. the ear Snp 1120; Mil 258.
2. hearing DN i.153, DN i.179; AN i.121; SN i.24; Vin i.26; Snp 265, Snp 345; Dhp 182; Ja i.160, Ja i.250; Mil 257 Nd i.188. sussavanaṃ sāvesi she made me hear a good hearing, she taught me a good thing Ja i.61; savanaṭṭhāne within hearing Ja iv.378. dhamma˚; hearing the preaching of the Dhamma Vin i.101 etc.
fr. śru: see suṇāti
(nt.) flowing Dhp 339; Ja iv.288; Ja v.257; savana-gandha of the body, having a tainted odour Thig 466.
fr. savati
(adj.) pleasant to hear DN ii.211; Ja i.96 (-ṇ-); Ja vi.120 = Ja vi.122 (savaneyya).
grd. of suṇāti
(f.) a river Vin ii.238; Bv ii.86 = Ja i.18; Ja vi.485; Mil 319.
cp. Vedic sravat, orig. ppr. of sru, sravati
an aboriginal tribe, a savage Vin i.168; Mil 191.
Epic Sk. śabara, cp. śabala = P. sabala
one’s own will Dhs-a 61 (˚vattitā; cp. Expos. 81).
sa4 + vasa
(adj.) bringing vexation Thig 352; Thag-a 242.
sa3 + vighāta
accompanied by investigation DN i.37 etc., in the description of the first Jhāna. See vicāra.
(adj.) accompanied by lightning DN ii.262.
sa3 + vijju + ka
possessed of consciousness, conscious, animate AN i.83; -ka the same AN i.132; Dhp-a i.6 ■ See viññāṇaka.
accompanied by reasoning DN i.37 etc., in the formula of the first Jhāna. See vitakka.
(adj.) near; (nt.) neighbourhood Dāvs iv.32; Dāvs v.9.
Sk. savidha
(adj.) (able) to be classified Dhs-a 134. Savupadana = sa-upadana
sa3 + vibhatti + ka
(A ii.163): see upādāna.
(adj.) angry DN i.247.
sa3 + vera
(adj.) with the letters Vin i.21; DN i.62; DN-a i.176; Sn. p. 103; Vism 214.
sa3 + vyañjana
(adj.) called, named Dpvs 4, 7; Ap 109.
sa3 + avhaya
a hare, rabbit Dhp 342; Ja iv.85; of the hare in the moon Ja iv.84 sq. sasôlūkā (= sasā ca ulūkā ca) Ja vi.564.
-lakkhaṇa the sign of a hare Ja i.172; Ja iii.55. -lañjana id. Vv-a 314 (˚vant = sasin, the moon). -visāṇa a hare’s horn (an impossibility) Ja iii.477.
Vedic śaśa, with Ohg. haso = E. hare to Lat. canus grey, greyish-brown; cp. Ags. hasu
= sasa Ja ii.26; Ja iv.85; Cp i.101.
as much as one can MN i.415, MN i.514 sq.
sa + sakkaṃ
. cp. Dhtp 301: gati-hiṃsā-pāṇanesu] to slay, slaughter; sassamāna ppr. pass. Ja v.24 (C. = hiṃsamāna) inf. sasituṃ Ja vi.291 (read sāsituṃ from sāsati?). pp sattha.
to breathe (cp. Dhtp 301: pāṇana): see vissasati.
with swords Ja iv.222; Dhs-a 62.
sa3 + sattha
(adj.) with great confusion Mvu 5, Mvu 139.
sa + sambhama
(adj.) with the ingredients or constituents Vism 20, Vism 352, Vism 353.
sa3 + sambhāra
the moon Dāvs iv.29; Ja iii.141; Ja v.33; Vv 811 (= canda Vv-a 314), 823.
Sk. śaśin, fr. śaśa
(adj.) together with the head; sasīsaṃ up to the head DN i.76, DN i.246; Ja i.298; sasīsaka head and all DN ii.324; Sn, p. 80.
sa3 + sīsa
father-in-law Vin iii.137; MN i.168; AN ii.78; Vv-a 69, Vv-a 121; Thig 407 (sassura); Ja i.337 sassu-sasurā mother-and father-in-law Ja ii.347; Ja iii.182 Ja iv.38; Ja vi.510; the form sassura Thig 407 has probably arisen through analogy with sassu ■ f. sasurī Vv-a 69.
Vedic śvaśura, f. śvaśrū (see P. sassū), Idg. *sṷekuros, *sṷekrū; cp. Gr. ἑκυρός & ἑκυρά; Lat. socer socrus; Goth. swaihra & swaíhrō, Ags. swēor & sweger Ohg. swehur & swigar
(adj.) accompanied by an army Mvu 19, Mvu 27.
sa3 + sena + ka
(nt.) corn, crop MN i.116; Ja i.86, Ja i.143, Ja i.152; Ja ii.135; Mil 2; Dhp-a i.97; Snp-a 48; sassasamaya crop time Ja i.143; susassa abounding in corn Vin i.238; pl. m. sassā Ja i.340. ˚-kamma agriculture Ja vi.101; ˚-kāla harvest time Vin iv.264; ˚-ṭṭhāna ˚-khetta Ja vi.297; dussassa (having) bad crops Vin i.238; AN i.160; Kp-a 218 (= dubbhikkhā).
-uddharaṇa lifting the corn Mil 307. -ghāta destroying property SN ii.218 sq.
cp. Vedic sasya
(adj.) eternal, perpetual DN i.13; DN iii.31 sq., 137 sq.; MN i.8, MN i.426; AN i.41; Dhp 255; Dhs 1099; Ja i.468; Mil 413; DN-a i.112; dhuvasassata sure and certain Bv ii.111 sq. = Ja i.19; sassatiyā for ever, Snp 1075 a-sassata Ja v.176; Ja vi.315; sassatāyaṃ adv. (dat.) for ever (?) Ja i.468; Ja v.172; Fausböll takes it = sassatā ayam (following the C.), and writes sassat’āyaṃ.
-diṭṭhi eternalism, the doctrine that soul and world are eternal Dhs 1315; SN ii.20; SN iii.98; Ne 40, Ne 127 -mūla eternalist Dpvs 6, 25. -vāda an eternalist eternalism DN i.13; DN iii.108; SN ii.20; SN iii.99, SN iii.182; SN iv.400 Pp 38; DN-a i.104 sq.; Pts i.155; Vb-a 509. -vādin eternalist Ne 111; Mhbv 110.
Vedic śaśvat
eternalist DN i.17; Mhbv 110 (ekacca˚ partial eternalist); Vin iii.312; ˚-ika Ja v.18, Ja v.19.
fr. sassata
(adv.) for ever and ever DN i.14; MN i.8; SN iii.143; also sassatī samā Ja iii.255; Vv 6314 (explained by sassatīhi samāna, like the eternal things-viz., earth, sun, moon, etc., Vv-a 265); Ja iii.256; DN-a i.105.
cp. Sk. śaśvatīḥ samāḥ
(fem ■ ī) together, with samaṇas and brahmins Vin i.11; DN i.62; DN iii.76, DN iii.135; SN v.423; Snp p.100; DN-a i.174.
imitative of the sound sarasara; chinnasassara giving out a broken or irregular sound of sarasara MN i.128; see J.P.T.S., 1889, p. 209.
(adj.) 1. having a master, belonging to somebody DN ii.176.
2. having a husband married Ja i.177, Ja i.397; Ja iv.190.
sa + sāmin + ka
(adj.) glorious, resplendent Ja i.95; Ja ii.1; Ja iv.189; Ja vi.270.
sa3 + sirī + ka
and Sassu (f.) mother-in-law Vin iii.137; AN ii.78; Thig 407; Snp 125; Ja i.337; Ja iii.425 sq.; Ja v.286 (gen. sassuyā); Dhp-a i.307; Vv-a 110 Vv-a 121; Pv-a 89. sassu-sasure, see sasura; sassudeva worshipping one’s mother-in-law as a god SN i.86; Ja iv.322.
Vedic śvaśrū: see sasura
(indecl.) prep. & prefix, meaning: in conjunction with, together, accompanied by; immediately after (with instr.) Vin i.38; Snp 49, Snp 928 Thig 414 = Thig 425; sahā Snp 231.
-anukkama = sahānukkama with the bridle Dhp 398; Dhp-a iv.161. -āmacca together with the ministers Mvu 5, Mvu 182. -āvudha together with one’s weapons Ja iv.416. -indaka together with Indra DN ii.208, DN ii.221; Vv 301. -ūdaka together with water Ja v.407. -oḍha together with the stolen goods; coraṃ ˚-aṃ gahetvā Vism 180; Mvu 23, Mvu 11 (thena); 35, 11. See oḍḍha-odaka containing water Mvu 4, Mvu 13. -orodha with his harem Mvu 5, Mvu 182; -kathin conversing with (instr. MN i.489. -kāra a sort of fragrant mango Kp-a 53 -gata accompanying, connected with, concomitant Vin i.10; DN ii.186; SN v.421; Kv 337; Dhs-a 157 -ggaṇa together with his companions Dpvs 14, 58 -cetiya containing a Cetiya Mvu 33, Mvu 10. -ja born at the same time Vv 8115. -jāta 1. born at the same time, of equal age Ja i.54; Ja vi.512.
2. arisen at the same time coinciding with (instr.) Kv 337, 620; Vb-a 127. 3. (in ˚paccaya ) the relation of co-nascence, coincidence Dukp 17 sq., 52 sq., 113 sq., 129 sq., 145 sq., 225 sq. 334 sq. and passim; Tikp 36 sq., 62 sq., 107 sq., 243 sq. Vism 535. -jīvin (fem ■ ī) living together with Vin iv.291, Vin iv.325 sq. -dhammika having the same Dhamma co-religionist MN i.64; Nd i.485 (opp. para˚); regarding the Dhamma DN i.94, DN i.161; MN i.368; Vin i.134; Ne 52; DN-a i.263 (= sahetuka, sakāraṇa); that which is in accordance with the dhamma Dhs 1327; MN i.482 ˚ṃ adv. in accordance with the dhamma Vin i.60, Vin i.69 Vin iii.178; Vin iv.141. -dhammiya co-religionist Ne 169 -dhenuka accompanied by a cow Mvu 21, Mvu 18. -nandin rejoicing with Iti 73. -paṃsukīḷita a companion in play a playfellow AN ii.186: Ja i.364; Ja iv.77; Pv-a 30. -pesuṇa together with slander Snp 862 f.; Nd i.257. -bhāvin being at one’s service Ja iii.181 (amacca). -bhū arising together with Dhs 1197; Ne 16; a class of devas DN ii.260 -macchara with envy Snp 862. -yoga = karaṇa-vacana Snp-a 44. -vatthu living together with Thig 414 Thig 425; Thag-a 269. -vāsa living together, associating Vin ii.34; Iti 68. -vāsin living together Ja v.352. -saṅgha together with the Order Mvu 1, Mvu 71. -seyyā sharing the same couch, living together Vin iv.16; Kp-a 190 -sevaka together with the servants Mvu 36, Mvu 43. -sokin sorrowful (?) SN iv.180.
fr. sa3; cp. Vedic saha
(adj.) submitting to, enduring MN i.33; Thag 659; Ja vi.379; sabbasaha Ja v.425, Ja v.431 ■ dussaha hard to endure Sdhp 95, Sdhp 118, Sdhp 196
fr. sah
1. to conquer, defeat, overcome MN i.33; SN iv.157; Snp 942; Dhp 335; Iti 84; Ja i.74; Ja ii.386 (avamānaṃ); iii.423 (id.).
2. to bear, endure Snp 20 Pp 68.
3. to be able DN ii.342 (sayhāmi); Pot. sahe Snp 942; Pot. saheyya MN i.33; saha (imper. excuse forgive, beg your pardon!) Ja iii.109; grd. sayha that which can be endured, able to be done Snp 253; Dāvs ii.29; a-sayha Mil 1148.
sah to prevail
one’s own hand Ja i.68; usually sahatthā (abl.) with one’s own hand Vin i.18; AN i.274; DN i.109; Snp p.107; Ja i.286; Pv ii.98; ii.954; Mil 15 instr. sahatthena id. Pv-a 110, Pv-a 124, Pv-a 135; Ja iii.267 Ja vi.305. Cp. sāhatthika.
sa4 + hattha
(adj.) together with the elephant Mvu 25, Mvu 70.
sa3 + hatthin
(nt.) companionship Vv 477 (= sahabhāva Vv-a 202). -˚ūpaga coming into union with DN i.245.
fr. sahāya, cp. Sk. sāhāyya
(f.) companionship DN i.18, DN i.235; DN ii.206; MN ii.195; MN iii.99; SN iv.306; AN iii.192.
abstr. fr. sahavya
(adv.) forcibly, hastily, suddenly Snp 123; Dhp-a iii.381; Pv-a 40, Pv-a 279 inconsiderately Ja i.173; Ja iii.441. -˚kāra violence DN i.5; DN iii.176; AN ii.209; Pp 58; Ja iv.11; DN-a i.80.
instr. of sahas (Vedic), force
a thousand, used as a singular with a noun in the plural, sahassaṃ vācā Dhp 100; satasahassaṃ vassāni Ja i.29; also in the plural after other numerals cattāri satasahassāni chaḷabhiññā Bv ii.204 = Ja i.29; also with the thing counted in the genitive, accharānaṃ sahassaṃ Mvu 17, Mvu 13; AN i.227; or ˚-, as sahassa-yakkha-parivāra Snp-a 209. In combination with other numerals, sahassa is sometimes inflected like an adjective, saṭṭhisahassā amaccā sixty thousand ministers Ja vi.484; satasahassiyo gāvo 100,000 cows Snp 308; the thing counted then precedes in a compound jāti-sahassaṃ 1,000 births DN i.13; Iti 99 ghaṭa-sahassam pi udakaṃ Mil 189; sindhava-sahasso ratho Ja vi.103; sahassaṃ sahassena a thousand times a thousand Dhp 103; sahassass’ eva in thousands DN ii.87- sahassaṃ (nt.) 1,000 gold pieces Dhp 106; Ja vi.484; Mil 10; satasahassaṃ a hundred thousand Ja i.28 sahassa (adj.) (fem. ī) worth a thousand Ja v.484, Ja v.485 Thag-a 72 (Ap v.45, read sahassayo for ˚aso); epithet of Brahmā, the B. of a thousand world systems MN iii.101 Cp. dasa-sahassī.
-akkha thousand-eyed, the god Sakka SN i.229; Ja vi.203; sahassacakkhu the same Ja v.394, Ja v.407. -aggha worth a thousand Mil 284. -āra having 1,000 spokes DN ii.172. -ṭṭhavikā a purse with 1,000 pieces (of money Vism 383; Ja i.506; Dhp-a ii.37; Vv-a 33 ■ netta thousand-eyed, the god Sakka SN i.226; Snp 346; Ja iii.426; Ja iv.313 Ja v.408; Ja vi.174; Vv 3010; Dhp-a i.17. -bāhu having a thousand arms, said of Ajjuna Ja v.119, Ja v.135, Ja v.145 (˚-rājā) 267, 273; vi.201. -bhaṇḍikā a heap of 1,000 pieces Ja ii.424; Ja iii.60; Ja iv.2. -raṃsi the sun Ja i.183.
Sk. sahasra, see etym. under saṃ˚
(adv.) in a thousand ways AN i.227; Thag 909.
cp. satadhā etc.
(adj.) thousandfold Ja i.17; Ja iv.175 (so for ˚iyo). Sahassi-lokadhatu
fr. sahassa
(f.) a thousandfold world, a world system DN i.46; AN i.228; DN-a i.130; dasasahassī-lokadhātu ten world systems Ja i.51, Ja i.63; cp. dasasahassī and lokadhātu.
at Snp 1096 is of doubtful meaning (“all-seeing”?), it is expld as “spontaneously arisen omniscience” at Nd ii.669 (where spelling is sahajānetta ); lit. “coinciding eye”; Snp-a 598 expls as “sahajāta-sabbaññuta-ñāṇa-cakkhu.”
sahāja + netta
companion, friend DN ii.78; MN i.86; SN iv.288; Pp 36; Snp 35, Snp 45 sq.; Ja ii.29; ˚-kicca assistance (?) Ja v.339; ˚-matta companion Ja iv.76; ˚-sampadā the good luck of having companions Snp 47; adiṭṭha-˚; a friend who has not yet been seen personally Ja i.377; Ja iii.364; bahu-˚; having many friends Vin ii.158; nāhaṃ ettha sahāyo bhavis-sāmi I am not a party to that Ja iii.46; asahāya Mil 225.
cp. Epic Sk. sahāya, fr. saha + i
(adj.) f. ˚yikā companion, ally, friend Vin i.18; DN ii.155; AN ii.79, AN ii.186; Ja i.165; Ja ii.29; Ja v.159 Ja vi.256 (gihī sahāyakā, read gihisahāyakā [?]).
fr. last
(f.) companionship Dhp 61; sahāyatta (nt.) the same Mvu 30, Mvu 21.
abstr. fr. sahāya
1. accompanied with Mvu 7, Mvu 27.
2. united, keeping together DN i.4; Ja iv.347; Pp 57.
3. consistent, sensible, to the point DN i.8; AN ii.138; AN iv.196; SN iii.12; Dhp 19 (at Dhp-a i.157 expld as a name for the Tipiṭaka, thus equalling Sk. saṃhita); Pp 42.
4. close together, thick Thig 254 ■ araṇisahita (nt.) firewood and appurtenances Vin ii.217; DN ii.340 sq.; Ja i.212; Dhp-a ii.246 ■ sahitaṃvata (adj.) having a consistent or perpetual vow i.e. living the holy life Ja v.320 (= sīlācāra-sampanna C.); vi.525 (T. sahitabbata; C. expls as samādinna-vata gahita-tāpasa-vesa). Kern, Toev. ii.51 takes it as a corrupted Sk. śaṃsita-vrata.
pp. of saṃ + dhā, cp. Sk. sahita = saṃhita
one who endures Snp 42.
n. ag. fr. sahati
(adj.) possessing gold Snp 102.
sa + hirañña
(adj.) having a cause, together with the cause Vin i.2; DN i.180; DN-a i.263. See hetu.
sa + hetu
having a cause, accompanied by a cause (especially of good or bad karma) AN i.82; Dhs 1073.
see under saha1. Sā see under San1.
(nt.) 1. vegetable, potherb DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.156; AN i.241, AN i.295; AN ii.206; Pp 55; Vism 70; Vv 3333; Ja iii.225; Ja iv.445; Ja v.103.
2. (m.) name of a tree (Tectona grandis) DN i.92; DN-a i.259; Vism 250 ˚-vatthu ground for cultivation of vegetables Ja iv.446 sāka-paṇṇavaṇṇa “like the colour of vegetable leaf (said of teeth) Ja v.206 (cp. 203).
Epic Sk. śāka
(f.) conversation, talking over, discussing DN i.103; DN ii.109; MN i.72; SN i.79; AN ii.140, AN ii.187 sq. AN iii.81; Snp 266; Mil 19, Mil 24; Dhp-a i.90 (˚aṃ karoti) Ja vi.414.
to converse with, talk over with, discuss DN ii.237 (+ sallapati); ppr. sākacchanto Vin i.169; fut. sākacchissanti Vin ii.75; Vin iii.159 grd. sākacchātabba Vin v.123, Vin v.196; ppr. med. sākacchā yamāna AN ii.189.
Denom. fr. sākacchā
a carter SN i.57; Thig 443 (Thag-a 271 = senaka); Ja iii.104; Mil 66, Mil 164.
fr. sakaṭa1
(nt.) totality; Kp-a 187 (opp. vekalya); sākalya AN i.94 is misprint for sākhalya.
fr. sakala
(adj.) with its characteristics DN i.13; DN iii.111; MN i.35; Pp 60; Vism 423 (+ sa-uddesa).
sa3 + ākāra
a fowler SN ii.256; AN iii.303; Pp 56; Ja i.208. Combd with miga-bandhaka & macchaghātaka at Snp-a 289; with māgavika & maccha-ghātaka at Pp 56.;
fr. sakuṇa
a fowler, bird-catcher AN ii.207; Thig 299; Thag-a 227; DN-a i.162.
fr. sakunta
together with the distinction of letters, with the phonology DN i.88; AN i.163; Sn, p. 101; Mil 10; DN-a i.247 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca).
sa3 + akkhara + pabheda
one with whom one has formerly been friendly Ja v.448. Sakhalya & Sakhalla;
fr. sakhi + purāṇa˚
(nt.) friendship MN i.446 (= tameness); AN i.94; DN iii.213; Dhs 1343; DN-a i.287; Dhs-a 396; Ja iv.57, Ja iv.58 (= maṭṭhavacana “smooth words”).
abstr. from sakhila
(adj.) having branches Ja iii.493.
sākhā + vant
a branch Vin i.28; MN i.135; AN i.152; AN ii.165 AN ii.200 sq.; AN iii.19, AN iii.43 sq., 200; iv.99, 336; v.314 sq.; Snp 791; Ja v.393; Ja ii.44; a spur of a hill AN i.243; AN ii.140; Mil 36; also sākha (nt.) Mvu 1, Mvu 55; Ja i.52; Ja iv.350; Ja i.164 (? yāva aggasākhā) ■ the rib of a parasol Snp 688. adj. sīla-sākha-pasākha whose branches and boughs are like the virtues Ja vi.324. In cpds. sākha˚ & sākhā˚;.
-nagaraka “little town in the branches,” i.e. a suburb, a small town DN ii.146; Ja i.391. -patta-palāsa branches and foliage AN iii.44; -patta-phal’upeta with branches, leaves & fruit AN iii.43. -palāsa id. MN i.488; AN ii.200. -bhaṅga faggots Ja i.158; Ja iii.407; Dhp-a ii.204 Dhp-a iii.375. -miga a monkey Ja ii.73; -ssita living upon branches (i.e. monkey) Ja v.233.
Vedic śākhā, cp. also śanku stick, & Goth. hōha plough
(indecl.) “greeting of welcome,” hail! DN i.179 = MN i.481 (sāgataṃ bhante Bhagavato); DN ii.173; MN i.514 (˚aṃ bhoto Ānandassa) DN-a i.287; Dhp-a iii.293.
su + āgata, orij. nt. = wel-come
the ocean DN i.89; AN ii.56, AN ii.140; AN iii.52; AN v.116 sq.; Vin i.246; Snp 568; Pv-a 29; sāgara ūmi a wave of the ocean, a flood Ja iv.165; ˚-vāri the ocean Ja iv.165; sāgaranta or sāgarapariyanta bounded or surrounded by the ocean (said of the earth) Ja vi.203 ˚-kuṇḍala the same Ja iii.32; Ja vi.278.
cp. Epic Sk. sāgara
(adj.) living in a house, Iti 111; sleeping under the same roof Vin ii.279.
sa3 + agāra
(adj.) full of lust, impure MN i.24 (var. read sangaṇa; this is also the reading at Snp 279 see above).
sa + angaṇa
(nt.) name of a science (“the interpretation of omens to be drawn from dogs”) Mil 178.
sā = śvan, dog; + cakka; cp. sopāka & suva
(adj.) together with one’s teacher DN i.102.
sa3 + ācariya + ka
crooked ways, insincerity DN i.5; DN iii.176; MN i.180; AN ii.209; AN v.206 Pp 58; DN-a i.80.
sāci + yoga; cp. Sk. sāci crooked
(nt.) rule of life, precept governing the monastic life of the Buddhist bhikkhus Vin iii.2416; adj. ˚-samāpanna ibid.; adj. ˚-kara one who supports Ja iv.42 (= sa-ājīvakara, C.).
a garment, cloth Thig 245; sāṭi (f.) the same SN i.115; Dhp 394; Ja i.230 (udaka˚ bathing mantle) 481.
cp. Sk. śāṭa
an outer garment, cloak; cloth Thag-a 246; Ja i.89, Ja i.138, Ja i.195, Ja i.373, Ja i.426; Vism 54 (sāṇa˚), 275 (alla˚); Dhp-a i.393 (thūla˚). Cp. antara˚, alaṃ˚.
-lakkhaṇa prognostication drawn from pieces of cloth Ja i.371.
sāṭa + ka
(f.) = sāṭaka Vin i.292 sq.; Vin ii.31; Vin ii.272, Vin ii.279 (udaka˚ bathing mantle) Ja i.330; Vism 339 (in simile); Mil 240 (cp. MN iii.253). sāṭiya the same Vin ii.177 (˚gāhāpaka receiver of undergarments).
one who dispels, drives away MN i.220; AN v.347 sq., 351, 359.
n. ag. fr. sāṭeti
to cut open, to destroy; fig. to torment: Kern’s proposed reading (see Toev. s. v sāveti) for sāveti at Ja iii.198 (amba-pakkāni); iv.402 (attānaṃ sāṭetvā dāsakammaṃ karissāni); vi.486 (kāyaṃ s.). He compares Mvu iii.385: śāṭeti gātrāni. Cp. visāṭita & visāta;.
śat to cut, destroy
(nt.) craft, treachery MN i.15, MN i.36, MN i.281, MN i.340; AN i.95, AN i.100; Nd i.395; Pp 19, Pp 23; Mil 289. Cp paṭi˚.
abstr. fr. saṭha = *śāṭhya
(nt.) hemp DN ii.350; Mil 267; a coarse hempen cloth Vin i.58; DN i.166; DN iii.41; MN i.78; AN i.240; SN ii.202 SN ii.221; Pp 55; Vism 54 (˚sāṭaka) ■ sāṇavāka the same Thig 252; Ja iii.394 (var. read).
cp. Sk. śāṇa hempen, fr. śaṇa = P. saṇa; cp. bhanga1
having a debt, indebted, fig. subjected to the kilesas, imperfect MN iii.127 = SN ii.221 (= sakilesa sa-iṇa K.S. ii.203); Thag-a 8; cp. anaṇa under aṇa.
sa + iṇa
(nt.) a kind of play DN-a i.84 = saṇadhovikā.
(f.) a curtain Ja iii.462.
fr. sāṇī
(f.) hemp-cloth DN ii.350; Vin iii.17; a screen, curtain, tent Ja i.58, Ja i.148 sq., 178, 419; Dhp-a i.194; Dhp-a ii.49. ˚-pākāra a screen-wall Vin iv.269, Vin iv.279; Ja ii.88; Dhp-a ii.68, Dhp-a ii.71, Dhp-a ii.186; Vv-a 173; Pv-a 283 Mvu 7, Mvu 27; sāṇipasibbaka a sack or bag of hempcloth Vin iii.1710 ■ paṭṭa-sāṇī a screen of fine cloth Ja i.395.
fr. saṇa
(adj.) pleasant, agreeable Iti 114; Ne 27. Often combd with piya, e.g. Iti 114; Vb 103; DN-a i.311 ■ Opp. kaṭuka ■ sāta (nt.) pleasure, joy MN i.508; AN i.81 sq.; SN ii.220; Ja i.410; Dhp 341 (˚sita sāta-nissita Dhp-a iv.49); Snp 867 sq.; Nd i.30 (three, of bhava); Pv ii.113; iv.54 (+ sukha); Dhs 3. asāta disagreeable unpleasant Dhs 1343; Ja i.410; Ja i.288; Ja ii.105; Snp 867 sq.; sātabhakkha Pp 55, read haṭabhakkha.
-odaka with pleasant water DN ii.129; MN i.76; Vin iii.108. -kumbha gold Vv-a 13. See also v.l. under hāṭaka ■ putta a noble son Ja vi.238 (= amacca-putta C.).
cp. *Sk. śāta
name of a kind of bird Ja vi.539 (koṭṭhapokkhara-˚, cp. 540); Snp-a 359 (id.).
(nt.) perseverance MN i.101; SN ii.132; AN iii.249 sq.; AN iv.460 sq.; AN v.17 sq.; Thag 585; Vism 4 Vb-a 346. ˚-kārin persevering SN iii.268, SN iii.271, SN iii.277 sq. Dhp 293; ˚-kiriyatā persevering performance Dhs 1367.
fr. satata
(adv.) continually SN i.17 = SN i.57.
fr. satata
(f.) happiness SN i.17.
abstr. fr. sāta
(adj.) persevering Dhp 23; SN ii.232; Iti 74; Dhp-a i.230.
fr. last
(nt.) tastiness, sweetness AN i.32.
abstr. fr. sāta
(nt.) sweet result (of good words) kalyāṇakamma, Com.) Ja vi.235, Ja vi.237. Is it misspelling for sādhava (fr sādhu)?
(adj.) pleasant Snp 853.
fr. sāta
(adj.) having something in excess DN ii.93.
sa + atireka, cp. BSk. sātirikta Divy 27
(adj.) trespassing Vin i.55.
sa + atisāra
with the meaning, in spirit DN i.62; DN ii.48; Iti 79, Iti 111; Snp p.100; Vin i.21; DN-a i.176; Vism 214.
sa3 + attha
(adj.) (fem ■ ikā) useful Pv-a 12. Satra-yaga
sa + atthaka
identical with sammāpāsa (Snp 303) Snp-a 322 (? conjecture yātrā˚).
(adj.) lethargic, lax MN i.14, MN i.200 sq.; MN iii.6; AN i.71; AN ii.148; AN iii.108, AN iii.179 sq.
śrath, cp. saṭhila & sithila
(nt.) place, house Ja iv.405; Yama-sādanaṃ sampatto come to Yama’s abode: dead Ja iv.405; Ja v.267, Ja v.304; Ja vi.457, Ja vi.505 (do., the MSS. always read ˚-sādhana).
cp. Vedic sādana, fr. sad
(adj.) reverential Mvu 5, Mvu 246; Mvu 15, Mvu 2; Mvu 28, Mvu 25; Mvu 33, Mvu 82; sādariya (nt.) and sādariyatā (f.) showing regard and consideration Pp 24; cp. Dhs 1327.
sa + ādara
(adj.) attached to the world, passionate Dhp 406 = Snp 630; Dhp-a iv.180.
sa + ādāna
one who accepts, appropriates MN iii.126.
n. ag. fr. sādiyati
lit. to enjoy for oneself, to agree to, permit, let take place DN i.166; Vin ii.294; AN iv.54, AN iv.347; SN i.78; SN iv.226 sq.; Pp 55; Mil 95 sq. aor. sādiyi Vin iii.38 sq.; fut. sādiyissati Ja vi.158.
cp. BSk. svādīyati: Mvu ii.145; Med ■ Pass fr. *sādeti, Caus. of svad
(f.) appropriating, accepting Mil 95.
fr. sādiyati
(fem. -sī ) like, similar DN ii.239; Snp 595; Thig 252 (sa˚ for sā˚); Ap 239; Ja iv.97; Mil 217 (with instr.).
fr. sadisa
(adj.) sweet, nice, pleasant Vin ii.196; MN i.114; Thig 273; Snp 102; Ja iv.168; Ja v.5; Dhs 629; asādu (ka) Ja iii.145; Ja iv.509 (text, asādhuka com. on kaṭuka); sādu-karoti makes sweet Ja iii.319; Pot a-sādu-kiyirā makes bitter, ibid. 319; sādu sweet things Vin ii.196; sādu-phala see sādhuphala; for ˚kamyatā see the latter.
Vedic svādu, f. svādvī; fr. svad, cp. Gr. ἡδύς, Lat. suavis, Goth. sūts = E. sweet; also Sk. sūda cook Gr. η ̔́δομαι to enjoy, ήδονή pleasure
(f.) sweetness Dāvs i.40.
fr. sādu
to cause to sink, to throw down Dhp-a i.75 (+ vināseti; v.l. pāteti).
Caus. of sad: see sīdati
to enjoy: see ucchādeti (where better referred to avad ) and chādeti2.
Caus. of svad; given as root in meaning “assādane” at Dhtp 147
(adj.) accomplishing, effecting Ja i.86; Snp-a 394, Snp-a 415; Sdhp 161; iṇa˚; debt-collector Mil 365 bali˚ tax-collector Ja iv.366; Ja v.103, Ja v.105, Ja v.106.
fr. sādh
(f.) effectiveness, efficiency Sdhp 329.
abstr. fr. sādhaka
(adj.-n..) 1. enforcing, proving Ja i.307; DN-a i.105.
2. settling, clearing (a debt) Ja ii.341 (uddhāra˚). In this meaning mixed with sodheti; it is impossible to decide which of the two is to be preferred See iṇa & uddhāra;.
3. yielding, effecting, producing resulting in (-˚) AN iii.156 (laṇḍa˚ dung-producing) DN-a i.273; Vv-a 194; Pv-a 278 (hita˚).
4. materials instrument Vv-a 349; Pv-a 199.
fr. sādh
(adj.) general, common, joint Vin ii.258; Vin iii.35; Thig 505; Ja i.202, Ja i.302; Ja iv.7 (pañca˚-bhāva 5 fold connection); Ne 49 sq.; Pv-a 122, Pv-a 194, Pv-a 265. a˚ Ja i.78; DN-a i.71.
(adj.) having something beyond DN ii.93; Vv 535 (˚vīsati) ˚-porisa exceeding a man’s height MN i.74, MN i.365; AN iii.403.
sa + adhika; cp. BSk. sādhika Divy 44
(adj.) that which can be accomplished Sdhp 258 etc.
fr. sādh
(adj.) 1. good, virtuous, pious Snp 376, Snp 393; Ja i.1; Mvu 37, Mvu 119; Pv-a 116, Pv-a 132 asādhu bad, wicked Dhp 163, Dhp 223; Dhp-a iii.313.
2 good, profitable, proficient, meritorious Dhp 35, Dhp 206 (= sundara, bhaddaka Dhp-a iii.271); DN i.88; Pv ii.97 nt. adv. well, thoroughly Dhp 67; Ja i.1; Mvu 36, Mvu 97 Mvu 37, Mvu 73. Very frequent as interjection, denoting (a request (adhortative, with imper.: sādhu gaccha please go! Mil 18; gacchatha Vv-a 305), to be translated with “come on, welcome, please,” or similar adverbs. Thus e.g. at Pv iv.140 (= āyācane Pv-a 232); Ja i.92; Pv-a 6 Pv-a 35, Pv-a 272; Vv-a 69;-(b) assent & approval; in replies to a question “alright, yes” or similarly; usually with the verbs (in ger.) paṭisuṇitvā, vatvā, sampaṭicchitvā etc Thus e.g. at Ja v.297; Vin i.56; Mil 7; Dhp-a iii.13; Vv-a 149; DN-a i.171; Snp-a 176 (= sampahaṃsane); Pv-a 55, Pv-a 78 and passim.
-kamyatā desire for proficiency Vb-a 477. -kāra saying “well,” approval, cheering, applause Ja i.223; Mil 13, Mil 16, Mil 18; Vv-a 132; Dhp-a i.390; Dhp-a iii.385. -kīḷana a festive play, a sacred festivity Mvu 3, Mvu 11; sādhukīḷita the same Mvu 20, Mvu 36; ˚-divasa Vin iii.285; sādhu-kīḷā Ja iii.434; Ja v.127; sādhu-kīḷikā Ja iii.433. -jīvin leading a virtuous life Iti 71. -phala having wholesome fruits Ja i.272 (read sādu˚). -rūpa good, respectable Dhp 262 -sammata highly honoured DN i.48; SN iv.398; Snp p.90 sq.; Mil 4, Mil 21; DN-a i.143. -sīliya good character Ja ii.137.
Vedic sādhu, fr. sādh
(adv.) well, thoroughly Vin i.46; Vin ii.208; DN i.62 ■ instr. sādhukena (as adv.) willingly (opp. with force) Pv ii.92.
fr. sādhu
1. to accomplish, further, effect Ja ii.236 (Pot. sādhayemase).
2. to make prosperous Pv-a 113, Pv-a 125
3. to arrange, prepare Mvu 7, Mvu 24.
4. to perform execute Ja i.38 (ārāmika-kiccaṃ); DN-a i.194; Mvu 36, Mvu 62 Vism 344 (see udukkhala).
5. to make clear, bring to a (logical) conclusion, to prove Ja ii.306; Snp-a 192 (atthaṃ), 459; Tikp 58; Pv-a 30 (here as much as “is any good”).
6. to collect or clear a debt, to recover (money). In this sense sādheti is mixed up with sodheti, which is regularly found as v.l., is it almost better to substitute sodheti at all passages for sādheti (cp. iṇa, uddhāra), e.g. Ja i.230; Ja ii.341, Ja ii.423; Ja iii.106 Ja iv.45; Dhp-a iii.12 ■ Cp. abhi˚.
Caus. of sādh to succeed. Dhtp 421 = saṃsiddhiyan
(m. and nt.) ridge Vv 3210; Ja iii.172. The commentary on the former passage (Vv-a 136) translates vana wood, that on the latter paṃsupabbata sānupabbata a forest-hill Ja iv.277; Ja vi.415, Ja vi.540; pabbatasānu-˚ Ja iii.175; girisānu-˚ Ja iii.301; Ja iv.195.
Vedic sānu
(adj.) together with followers Dhp 294; Ja vi.172.
sa3 + anucara
(adj.) blameable AN ii.3.
sa + anuvajja
to fill (the mind) completely AN ii.10.
sa (= saṃ) + anuseti
a curse Vv-a 336; Dhp-a i.41.
fr. sap, cp. Sk. śāpa
(nt.) property, wealth DN i.142 DN ii.180; DN iii.190; Vin i.72, Vin i.274; Vin iii.66; Ja i.439, Ja i.466 Thig 340; Thag-a 240; Ja v.117 (sāpateya, var. read sāpatiyya); Dhp-a i.67.
sā (= guṇa of sva) + pateyya (abstr. fr. pati lord), cp. ādhi-pateyya
(adj.) one who has committed a sin (see āpatti) Vin i.125; Vin ii.240; Nd i.102.
sa3 + āpatti + ka
(nt.) a beast of prey Ja ii.126; Ja vi.79.
cp. Sk. śvāpada
(adj.) with reasons DN i.4; AN ii.22; MN i.180; MN iii.34, MN iii.49; Pp 58; DN-a i.76. Opp. anapadesa MN i.287.
sa + apadesa
M ii.183 = 152 (C. = sunakhānaṃ pivanadoṇi a dog’s trough).
longing for DN ii.77; DN iii.43.
sa + apekhā
); DN i.193; MN i.246 (different from kāḷa); Ja vi.187 (˚aṃ mukhaṃ dark, i.e. on account of bad spirits); Vism 422 (opp. to odāta in colour of skin).
2. yellow, of a golden colour, beautiful Ja ii.44 Ja ii.45 (migī); v.215 (suvaṇṇa-sāmā), 366 (suvaṇṇa-vaṇṇa)-f. sāmā, q.v ■ See sabala.
cp. Vedic śyāma black & śyāva brown; Av. syāva; Ags. hāēven blue (= E. heaven); Gr. σκοιός, σκιά (shadow) = Sk. chāyā; Goth. skeinan = shine, etc. 1. black, dark (something like deep brown) Vin iv.120 (kāḷasāma dark blue [?
(nt.) song, sacred song, devotion, worship, propitiation DN ii.288.
perhaps = Vedic sāman
self, of oneself Vin i.16, Vin i.33, Vin i.211 (s. pāka) iv.121; DN i.165; MN i.383; MN ii.211; MN iii.253 (sāmaṃ kantaṃ sāmaṃ vāyitaṃ dussayugaṃ); SN ii.40; SN iv.230 sq.v.390; Snp 270 (asāma-pāka not cooking for oneself), 889; Ja i.150; sāmaññeva, i.e. sāmaṃ yeva Snp p.101.
on etymology, see Andersen Pāli Gloss., p. 268 (contracted from sayamaṃ, Trenckner), cp. Michelson Indog. Forsch., vol. xxiii, p. 235, n. 3 (= avest., hāmō slav., samz)
(nt.) completeness, concord Snp 810; sāmaggiya-rasa Ja iii.21 (“the sweets of concord”); adj. asāmaggiya, unpleasant Ja vi.517 (C. on asammodiya).
fr. samagga
(f.) completeness, a quorum Vin i.105, Vin i.106; meeting, communion Vin i.132 sq. Vin ii.243; unanimity, concord Vin i.97, Vin i.136, Vin i.357; Vin ii.204; DN iii.245 sq.; AN iii.289; Nd i.131; Ja i.328; Iti 12.
abstr. fr. samagga
(adj.) together with the ministers DN i.110.
sa2 + amacca
(nt.) generality; equality, conformity; unity, company Mil 163; Snp-a 449 (jāti identity of descent), 449 (generality, contrasted to visesa detail), 548 (id.); Vv-a 233 (diṭṭhi˚, sīla˚, equality) ˚-gata united DN ii.80; ˚-nāma a name given by general assent Dhs-a 390.
abstr. fr. samāna
(nt.) Samaṇaship DN i.51 sq.; DN iii.72, DN iii.245; MN i.281 sq.; SN v.25; AN ii.27 = Iti 103; Dhp 19 sq., 311; DN-a i.158; Vism 132; adj., in accordance with true Samaṇaship, striving to be a samaṇa Mil 18 Samaṇaship AN i.142 sq.; Pv ii.718 (expld at Pv-a 104 as “honouring the samaṇas”).
-attha the aim of Samaṇaship DN i.230; AN iv.366; MN i.271; SN ii.15; SN iii.93; Ja i.482; -phala advantage resulting from Samaṇaship, fruit of the life of the recluse DN i.51 sq.; Vism 215, Vism 512; Vv-a 71; Vb-a 317 more especially the fruition of the four stages of the Path, sotāpatti-, sakadāgāmi-, anāgāmi-, and arahattaphala SN v.25; DN iii.227, DN iii.277; Dhs 1016; Dhs-a 423; Mil 344, Mil 358; DN-a i.158; three samaññaphalas Kv 112.
abstr. fr. samaṇa
= sāmañña 1 (identity, congruity etc.) Ja vi.371 (vaṇṇa˚); Vism 234 (maraṇa˚).
= sāmañña 2 DN iii.145, DN iii.169; Dhp 332; Dhp-a iii.484; Dhp-a iv.33.
(adj.) worthy of or needful for a Samaṇa Mvu 4, Mvu 26; Mvu 30, Mvu 37; assāmaṇaka unworthy of a Samaṇa Vin i.45.
fr. samaṇa
fem. ˚-rī a novice Vin i.62 sq.; Vin iv.121; SN ii.261; Mil 2 Vb-a 383; are not present at the recital of the Pātimokkha Vin i.135; ˚pabbajjā ordination of a novice Vin i.82. ˚pēsaka superintendent of Sāmaṇeras Vin ii.177; AN iii.275 ■ f., also -˚ā AN iii.276; as -˚ī at Vin i.141.
fr. samaṇa; cp. BSk. śrāmaṇeraka Divy 342
(adj.) able Ja ii.29.
= samattha
(nt.) ability Mvu 37, Mvu 243
abstr. fr. samattha
(adj.) neighbouring, bordering DN i.101; Vin i.46 (āpatti˚ bordering on a transgression) Ja ii.21; Ja iv.124; connected with MN i.95; ˚jappā (or ˚jappana ) roundabout talk Vb 353; Vism 28; Nd i.226 Vb-a 484. abl. sāmantā in the neighbourhood of Vin iii.36; DN ii.339; loc. sāmante the same Ja iv.152 (Kapila-vatthu-˚).
fr. samanta
(adj.) temporary Snp 54; Mil 302 (so read); see sāmāyika.
fr. samaya
(f.) the creeper Ichnocarpus Ja i.60.
sāma1 + latā; Sk. śyāmalatā
(f) a medicinal plant Ja iv.92 (bhisasāmā, C. bhisāni ca sāmākā ca); the Priyangu creeper Ja i.500; Ja v.405.
Sk. śyāmā Halāyudha 2, 38; see sāma1, sāmalatā, and sāmāka
a kind of millet (Panicum frumentaceum) DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.156, MN i.343; AN i.295 AN ii.206; Snp 239; Pp 55; Ja iii.144, Ja iii.371; Ne 141; Dhp-a v.81.
cp. Vedic śyāmāka
a member of an assembly Dāvs iii.27.
fr. Sk. samāja: see samajja
(adj.) consisting in concentration SN i.120.
fr. samādhi
(f.) a black hind Ja ii.44.
(adj.) 1. on a friendly footing, in agreement MN iii.110; Mil 22.
2. occurring in due season, timely Mil 302 sq., 305.
3. temporary AN iii.349 sq.; cp. sāmayika.
fr. samaya
Ja v.489, read sāvi.
1. owner MN i.27; Ja i.194; Vism 63. - 2. husband Vin iii.137; Ja i.307; Ja ii.128; AN ii.58 sq. Pv ii.37.
fr. sāmin
1. owner, ruler, lord, master Vin i.303, Vin i.307; Snp 83; Mvu 37, Mvu 241; Ja v.253 (˚paribhoga, q.v.); Pv iv.66; Vism 63; DN-a i.261; Pv-a 43, Pv-a 65. voc. sāmi “Sir” Ja vi.300; Dhp-a i.20 f. sāminī Ja v.297; Vv-a 225. See also suvāmin ■ assāmin not ruling Mil 253; Pv iv.66.
2. husband Pv-a 31 (sāmi, voc. = “my lord”), 82 ■ f. sāminī wife Mvu 5, Mvu 43; Pv-a 82, Pv-a 276.
-vacana (sāmi˚) the genitive case Ja i.185; Ja iii.98 (upayog’atthe); v.42 (karaṇ’atthe), 444; Vv-a 304; Snp-a 210 (for upayoga), 310 (id.).
cp. Sk. svāmin, fr. sva = sa4
husband Ja i.352; see sāmika.
(adj.) 1. holding food Vin ii.214 = Vin iv.198.
2. fleshly, carnal DN ii.298 = MN i.59; AN i.81; Pts ii.41. Opp. to nirāmisa spiritual (e.g. Pts i.59). Samici & samici;
sa + āmisa
(f.) right, proper course Vin iii.246; DN ii.104; AN ii.56, AN ii.65; SN v.261, SN v.343; Mil 8; Dhp-a i.57.
-kamma proper act, homage Vin ii.22, Vin ii.162, Vin ii.255; AN i.123; AN ii.180; DN iii.83; Ja i.218, Ja i.219; Mil 8. -paṭipadā right course of life MN i.281; AN ii.65. -paṭipanna correct in life DN ii.104; SN i.220; AN ii.56; AN iv.310.
fr. sammā2 = Vedic samyac, of which pl. nom. f. samīcīḥ freq. in R. V.
(adj.) exalting, praising (i.e. the 4 truths), as much as “standard. Kern, Toev. ii.64, takes it to mean “condensed, given in brief.” Usually in phrase ˚ikā dhammadesanā (thus as f. of ˚aka !) e.g. Vin i.16, Vin i.18; Vin ii.156; DN i.110; MN i.380; AN iv.186; AN v.194; DN-a i.277 (expld); Thag-a 137; Pv-a 38 Pv-a 195; Vv-a 50. Only once with ñāṇa at Dhs-a 9.
fr. samukkaṃsati, cp. ukkaṃsaka. The BSk. is sāmutkarṣikī dharmadeśanā Divy 617
(nt.) sea salt Vin i.202; Abhp 461.
fr. samudda
(adj.) seafaring DN i.222; SN iii.155; AN iii.368 (vāṇijā); iv.127 (nāvā); Vism 63; Dhs-a 320 At Ja vi.581 s ■ mahāsankha denotes a kind of trumpet.
fr. samudda
see sammati1.
evening, only adverbially sāyaṃ, at night Vin iii.147; Ja ii.83; Dhp-a i.234; usually opposed to pāto (pātaṃ) in the morning early e.g. sāya-pātaṃ DN ii.188; Mil 419; Ja i.432, Ja i.460 Ja v.462; sāyaṃ-pātaṃ Vin ii.185; Dhp-a ii.66; sāyañ ca pāto ca Pv i.63; ii.937; Pv-a 127; sāya-tatiyaka for the third time in the evening DN i.167; AN ii.206; AN v.263, AN v.266 AN v.268; MN i.343; sāyamāsa supper Ja i.297; Ja v.461; Dhp-a i.204. sāyaṃ as quâsi-nominative: sāyaṃ ahosi Ja vi.505 atisāyaṃ too late Thag 231; Ja ii.362; Ja v.94; sāyataraṃ later in the evening (compar.) Ja vi.366.
cp. Sk. sāyaṃ, on which Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 380, remarks: “this word seems to be the gerund of sā, and to have signified originally ʻhaving finished.ʼ A masc sāya does not exist.” Cp. Vedic ˚sāya
evening DN ii.9; Ja i.144; -˚samayaṃ at evening time DN ii.205; MN i.147; Vin i.21; sāyaṇhasamaye Ja i.148, Ja i.279; Pv-a 33, Pv-a 43 Pv-a 100; ˚-kāle the same Ja iv.120; sāyaṇhe (loc.) Ja i.144 Ja i.237; atisāyaṇha late evening Ja vi.540.
sāyaṃ + aṇha, cp. Sk. sāyāhna
to taste, eat; pres. sāyati Vin ii.121; ppr. sāyanto DN iii.85; grd sāyanīya savoury Vin i.44; SN i.162; ger. sāyitvā SN iv.176; AN iii.163. Cp. saṃsāyati.
svad, Sk. svādate, cp. sādiyati
(nt.) tasting, taste Dhtp 229.
fr. sāyati
the Nāga tree (cp. nāga 3) Ja vi.535 (vāraṇā sā yanā = nāgarukkhā, C., ibid. 535, var. read. vāyana) Kern, Toev. ii.77 conjectures sāsanā “with Asana’s Terminalia’s.”
(adj.) lying, sleeping, resting in (-˚) Dhp 141; MN i.328 (vatthu˚); Thag 501 = Mil 367.
fr. śī
(having) tasted, tasting DN i.70; DN ii.95, DN ii.292; MN i.188, MN i.461; Mil 378; Vism 258 (khāyita + ).
pp. of sāyati, cp. sāditar
(adj.) lying Dhp 325.
fr. śī
1. essential, most excellent, strong AN ii.110; Vin iv.214; Ja iii.368; Pp 53.
2. (m.) the innermost, hardest part of anything, the heart or pith of a tree (see also pheggu) MN i.111; Ja i.331; Mil 413; most excellent kind of wood Vin ii.110; DN ii.182 DN ii.187; sattasārā the elect, the salt of the earth MN iii.69. 3. substance, essence, choicest part (generally at the end of comp.) Vin i.184; AN ii.141; SN iii.83, SN iii.140; Snp 5 Snp 330, Snp 364; Dhp 11 sq.; Pv-a 132, Pv-a 211 (candana˚). sāre patiṭṭhito established, based, on what is essential MN i.31; AN ii.183.
4. value Mil 10; appasāra of small value DN ii.346 ■ asāra worthless Snp 937; nissāra the same Ja ii.163 (pithless); mahāsāra of high value Ja i.384 Ja i.463.
-ādāyin acquiring what is essential SN iv.250. -gandha the odour of the heart of a tree Dhs 625. -gabbha a treasury Ja iii.408; Ja v.331. -gavesin searching for hard wood MN i.111, MN i.233; sārapariyesana the same ibid -dāru strong, durable wood Ja ii.68. -bhaṇḍa(ka) a bundle of one’s best things Ja ii.225. -bhūmi good soil Ja ii.188. -mañjūsā a box made of choice wood Ja iv.335 -maya being of hard or solid wood Ja iii.318 (C. sārarukkhamaya “of sāra wood” trsln). -suvaṇṇa sterling gold Snp-a 448 (in expln of name Bimbisāra). -sūci a needle made of hard wood Ja i.9.
Vedic sāra nt.
(-˚) (adj.) having as most essential Mil 133; a-sāraka rotten (said of wood) Ja ii.163.
fr. sāra
a messenger.
fr. sarati1
in the comp. kaṭa-sāraka a mat Ja iv.248 (v.l.); iv.474; v.97 (cp. osāraka). Sarakkhati = samrakkhati
Thag 729.
(f.) “standing under protection” (?), a category of married women Vin iii.139 (cp MN i.287).
fr. sa3 + rakkha
(nt.) timidity AN iii.127, AN iii.203; AN iv.359, AN iv.364; Mil 24, Mil 72, Mil 196 (parisa˚, cp Nd ii.470); Ja i.334; Ja ii.66; nissārajja undaunted Ja i.274.
abstr. fr. sārada = *sāradya
to be pleased with, to be attached to AN i.260; SN ii.172; SN iii.69 sq.; SN iv.10 sq.
saṃ + raj, cp. BSk. sārajyati, Sk. saṃrajyate, cp. sārāga
(f.) infatuation, feeling infatuated Dhs 389; Ja v.446.
fr. sārajjati
to be embarrassed, perplexed, ashamed SN iii.92; AN iv.359.
Denom. of sārajja
(nt.) infatuation, the state of being infatuated Dhs 389.
= sārajjanā
(f.) reminding, remonstrating with Vin v.158, Vin v.164.
fr. sāreti2
impassioned, enamoured, passionately devoted Vin iii.118; MN ii.160 MN ii.223; SN i.74, SN i.77; Dhp 345; Ja i.288; Ja ii.140; Mvu 10, Mvu 34 (˚mānaso). asāratta unattached Snp 704.
= saṃratta, pp. of sārajjati
charioteer, coachman DN ii.178, DN ii.254; SN i.33; SN v.6; AN ii.112; AN iv.190 sq.; Snp 83; Ja i.59, Ja i.180; Pv iv.33. assadammasārathi a coachman by whom horses are driven, a trainer of horses MN i.124; SN iv.176; purisadammasārathi a coachman of the driving animal called man, a man-trainer Vin i.35; DN i.49; Snp p.103; Iti 79 ■ In similes: Vism 466 Kp-a 21.
fr. sa-ratha; Vedic sārathi
(adj.) autumnal, of the latest harvest, this year’s, fresh AN iii.404 = DN iii.354 (bījāni fresh seeds); AN i.135, AN i.181 (badara-paṇḍu) SN iii.54; SN v.380; Mil 255; Dhp 149 (but at this passage expld as “scattered by the autumn winds” Dhp-a iii.112)- asārada stale, old DN ii.353; SN v.379. Fig. sārada unripe not experienced, immature (see sārajja shyness) opp. visārada (der. vesārajja) experienced, wise, selfconfident; vīta-sārada id. (e.g. AN ii.24; Iti 123) ■ Note: At K.S. iii.46 (= SN iii.54) s. is wrongly taken as sāra + da i.e. “giving sāra”; but seeds do not give sāra: they contain sāra (cp. sāravant). The C expln as sār-ādāyin is nearer the truth, but of course not literal; ˚da is not ā + ˚da, Moreover, the fig. meaning cannot be reconciled with this expln.
Vedic śārada, fr. śarad autumn (of Babyl. origin? cp. Assyr. šabātu corn month)
(adj.) autumnal Vin i.199; Vin ii.41; Dhp 285 = Ja i.183; Vv 6417; Dhp-a iii.428.
fr. sārada
violent, angry AN i.148, AN i.282; SN iv.125; MN i.21; Vism 134 (opp. passaddha-kāya), 282 (˚kāya); Vb-a 283 (id.).
= saṃraddha
going Dhs-a 133.
fr. sarati1
a dog (lit. “son of Saramā”) Mhbv 111.
Vedic sārameya
1. impetuosity, anger AN i.100, AN i.299; AN ii.193; MN i.16; Dhp 133; Ja iv.26; Mil 289 (sasaṃrambha).
2. quarrel Snp 483; Ja ii.223; Ja v.141. 3. pride Thag 759; Vv-a 139.
-kathā angry or haughty talk, imperiousness Dhp 133; MN i.16; Dhp-a iii.57.
= saṃrambha
involving killing or danger to living creatures Vin iii.149; AN ii.42 sq. Cp. samārambha.
sa + ārambha
(adj.) impetuous Ja iii.259.
fr. sārambha
(adj.) valuable, having kernel or pith (said of grain or trees) AN iv.170 (synom. daḷha, opp palāpa); SN v.163; MN i.111 = MN i.233.
fr. sāra
a water bird, Ardea sibirica Vv-a 57, Vv-a 163; at both pass. = koñca.
cp. Epic Sk. sārasa
affection, infatuation Vin ii.258; MN i.17, MN i.498; AN i.264; SN iii.69 sq., 93; Dhs 1059, Dhs 1230; cp. saṃrāga ■ Neg. a˚; Dhs 32, Dhs 312, Dhs 315.
= saṃrāga, fr. saṃ + raj
(adj.) attached to MN i.239 (sukha-˚); sukha-sārāgita ibid. impassioned.
fr. last
(adj.) courteous polite, friendly (making happy, pleasing, gladdening?) only in combn with kathā, dhamma, or dhammakathā e.g. s. kathā polite speech, either in phrase sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sārāṇīyaṃ vītisāreti to exchange greetings of friendliness & courtesy DN i.52; MN i.16 (expldinter alia as “anussariyamānasukhato s.” at MA 110) AN i.55, AN i.281; AN ii.42; cp. BSk. sammodanīṃ saṃrañjanīṃ vividhāṃ k. vyatisārya Avs i.229 ■ sārāṇīyaṃ kathaṃ katheti Dhp-a i.107; Dhp-a iv.87; sārāṇīyā dhammā states of conciliation, fraternal living (Dial. iii.231) DN iii.245; MN i.322; MN ii.250; AN iii.288; AN v.89; Dhs-a 294; Ja v.382 cp. BSk. saṃrañjanīyan dharmaṃ samādāya Divy 404- sārāṇīyaṃ dhammakathaṃ suṇāti Dhp-a iv.168.
the question of derivation is still unsettled. According to Trenckner (Notes 75) fr. saraṇa (i.e. saraṇa1 or sarana2?) with double vṛddhi. Kern (Toev. ii.74) considers the (B) Sk. saṃrañjanīya as the original and derives it fr. saṃ + raj to rejoice, to gladden: see rañjati. The BSk. is divided: Mvu iii.47, Mvu iii.60, Mvu iii.206 etc. has sārāyaṇiya, whereas Avs i.229 & Divy 404 read; saṃrañjanī and saṃrañjanīya (see below) ■ The C. at Ja iv.99 derives it fr. saraṇa3 in explaining sārāṇīyā kathā as “sāritabba-yuttakā kathā”
chessman DN-a i.85.
cp. *Sk. śāri
(adj.) wandering, going after, following, conforming to (loc.) Ja v.15; aniketasārin wandering about houseless Snp 844, Snp 970; anokasārin wandering homeless Dhp 404; Snp 628; diṭṭhisārin a partisan of certain views Snp 911; vaggasārin conforming to a party a partisan Snp 371, Snp 800, Snp 912.
fr. sāreti
(adj.) connected with the body, bodily MN i.10; AN i.168 sq.; AN ii.153; (nt.) bodily relics Mil 341 ˚ṃ cetiyaṃ one of the 3 kinds: paribhogika, s., uddesika Ja iv.228.
fr. sarīra
(nt.) equal state; as adj. fit, suitable, proper Vin i.39, Vin i.287; DN ii.277; SN iv.21 sq.; Ja i.65, Ja i.362; Dhs-a 294; Snp 368 p. 79, 97, 104; Ja iv.404. (a˚) (nt.) Vism 24; Pv-a 269 paribbājaka-s˚, as befits a Wanderer Ja v.228.
abstr. fr. sarūpa, BSk. sārūpya & sāropya
is Caus. of sarati1 as well as sarati2. Cp. vīti˚.
(adj.) healing, curative MN ii.257 (vaṇa-˚).
saṃ + ropin, cp. ropeti1 & rūhati;1
a Sal tree (Shorea robusta) MN i.488; DN ii.134; AN i.202; AN iii.49, AN iii.214; Dhp 162.
-māḷaka an enclosure of Sal trees Ja i.316. -rukkha Sal tree Vv-a 176. -laṭṭhi Sal sprout AN ii.200. -vana Sal grove DN ii.134; MN i.124; SN i.157; Vv 392.
cp. Sk. śāla & sāla
a brother-in-law Ja ii.268.
Sk. syāla + ka
a kind of worm Mil 312.
(adj.) having intentions (on), being attached (to = loc.) Ja iii.332.
sa3 + ālaya
(f.) a large (covered & enclosed) hall large room, house; shed, stable etc., as seen fr. foll examples: aggi˚; a hall with a fire Vin i.25, Vin i.49 = Vin ii.210 āsana˚; hall with seats Dhp-a ii.65; udapāna˚; a shed over the well Vin i.139; Vin ii.122; upaṭṭhāna˚ a service hall Vin i.49, Vin i.139; Vin ii.153, Vin ii.208, Vin ii.210; SN ii.280; SN v.321; Ja i.160 kaṭhina˚; a hall for the kaṭhina Vin ii.117. kīḷa˚; playhouse Ja vi.332; kutūhala˚; a common room DN i.179; SN iv.398. kumbhakāra˚; potter’s hall Dhp-a i.39; gilāna˚ sick room, hospital SN iv.210; Vism 259; jantāghāra˚ (large) bath room Vin i.140; Vin ii.122; dāna˚; a hall for donations Ja i.262; dvāra˚; hall with doors MN i.382 MN ii.66; pāniya˚; a water-room Vin ii.153; bhatta˚; refectory Vism 72; yañña˚; hall of sacrifice PugA 233; rajana˚ dyeing workshop Vism 65; ratha˚; car shed Dhp-a iii.121; hatthi˚; an elephant stable Vin i.277, Vin i.345 Vin ii.194; Ja i.187.
cv. Vedic śālā, cp. Gr. καλία hut, Lat. cella cell, Ohg. halla, E. hall
(nt.) ophthalmology DN i.12, DN i.69; DN-a i.98.
cp. Sk. śālākya in Suśruta
rice DN i.105, DN i.230; DN ii.293; Vin iv.264; MN i.57; AN i.32, AN i.145; AN iii.49; AN iv.108 (+ yavaka), 231; SN v.10, SN v.48; Ja i.66, Ja i.178; Ja iv.276; Ja v.37; Ja vi.531; Mil 251; Snp 240 sq.; Vism 418; pl. ˚-iyo Ja i.325; gen. pl. ˚-inaṃ Ja vi.510 ■ lohitaka˚; red rice Mil 252.
-khetta a rice-field AN i.241; AN iv.278; Vin ii.256; Dhp-a i.97; Dhp-a iii.6. -gabbha ripening (young) rice Dhp-a i.97. -bīja rice seed AN i.32; AN v.213. -bhatta a meal of rice Vism 191. -bhojana rice food Ja i.178.
cp. Sk. śāli
(adj.) belonging to rice Dhp-a iii.33.
fr. sāli
(f.) a kind of bird SN i.190 = Thag 1232; Ja v.110. See sāliya & sāḷikā.
cp. Epic Sk. sārikā crow, usually combd with śuka parrot
(nt.) a sling, catapult (?); slinging stones, throwing potsherds etc. Pv iv.167 Pv-a 285; Ja i.418, Ja i.420; Dhp-a ii.69.
fr. Sk. saṃlepa?
excellent Dāvs i.9.
or sāliyā the maina bird (= sālikā) Ja iii.203; sāliyachāpa (a young bird of that kind), and sāliyacchāpa (i.e. sāliyā which is probably the right form) Ja iii.202. madhu-sāliyā Ja v.8 (= suvaṇṇa-sālika-sakunā C. p. 911) Ja vi.199 (suva-sāliya-˚), 425 (Sāliya-vacana the story of the maina bird, var. read. suva-khaṇḍa; a section of the 546th Jātaka, but sāḷiyā, sālikā, sāliyā is not a paṛrot.
(adj.) fine (rice) Mil 16 (˚ṃ odanaṃ; cp. śālīnaṃ odanaṃ Divy 559).
fr. sāli
(& ˚ūka) (nt.) the edible root of the water-lily Vin i.246; Ja vi.563; Vv-a 142 (˚muṭṭhi).
cp. Sk. śālūka
a dog Ja iv.438 (˚-saṃgha = sunakhagaṇa, C.; spelling ḷ).
but cp. Sk. śālūra a frog
sight, view, sāloke tiṭṭhati to expose oneself to view in an open door Vin ii.267.
sa2 + āloka
a kinsman, a blood relation, usually together with ñāti Vin i.4; DN ii.26, DN ii.345; AN i.139 AN i.222; AN ii.115; Snp p.91; Pv-a 28; Vb-a 108.
fr. sa2 + lohita
a certain dish, perhaps a kind of salad, given as “lambila,” i.e. bitter or astringent at Dhs-a 320 (made of badara or kapiṭṭha ); cp Vin iv.259.
cp. Sk. ṣāḍava, which is given in diff. meaning, viz. “comfits with fruits”
a bird; f. ˚ā the Maina bird Ja i.429; Ja vi.421. Spelt sāḷiyā at Ja vi.425. See sālikā & sāliya;.
juice Vv-a 186.
fr. sru
a hearer, disciple (never an Arahant) DN i.164; DN ii.104; DN iii.47, DN iii.52, DN iii.120 sq., 133; AN i.88; MN i.234; SN ii.26; Iti 75 sq., 79; Ja i.229; Vism 214, Vism 411 ■ fem sāvikā DN ii.105; DN iii.123; Thig 335; SN iv.379; AN i.25 AN i.88. (Cp. ariya-˚, agga-˚, mahā ).
-saṅgha the congregation of the eight Aryas MN ii.120; SN i.220 (cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā) ii.79 sq.; Iti 88.
fr. śru
(nt.) the state of a disciple MN i.379 sq.
abstr. fr. last
(adj.) blameable, faulty DN i.163; DN ii.215; MN i.119; SN v.66, SN v.104 sq.; Snp 534; Pp 30, Pp 41 (nt.) what is censurable, sin Ja i.130; Mil 392; Vb-a 382 (mahā˚ or appa˚, with ref. to var. crimes).
sa + avajja
(f.) guilt Mil 293.
fr. last
(nt.) name of a certain throw in playing at dice Ja vi.281 (v.l. sāvaṭṭa).
(adj.) containing whirlpools Iti 114.
sa3 + āvaṭṭa
(nt.) shouting out, announcement, sound, word Ja ii.352; Sdhp 67.
fr. sāveti
(adj.) with a remainder, incomplete, of an offence which can be done away Vin i.354 Vin ii.88; Vin v.153; AN i.88 ■ Of a text (pāṭha) Kp-a 238; Snp-a 96.
sa3 + avasesa
a porcupine Ja v.489 (MSS. sāmi and sāsi, cp. Manu v.18).
Sk. śvāvidh, see Lüder’s Z.D.M.G. 61, 643
(f.) the Vedic verse Sāvitrī Snp 457, Snp 568 = Vin i.246 (Sāvitthī); Ja iv.184.
one who makes others hear, who tells DN i.56; AN iv.196.
n. ag. fr. sāveti
is Caus. of suṇāti.
asthma AN v.110; Ja vi.295.
Sk. śvāsa, fr. śvas
(adj.) dangerous, fearful, suspicious SN iv.175 (opp. khema); Thig 343; Thag-a 241 Vism 107; Ja i.154; Pv-a 13; Mil 351.
fr. sa3 + āsankā
to instruct, teach, command; tell Ja vi.472 (dūtāni, = pesesi C.); inf săsituṃ Ja vi.291 (= anusāsituṃ C.).
śās, Dhtp 300 = anusiṭṭhi
(nt.) order, message, teaching Ja i.60, Ja i.328; Ja ii.21; Pv iv.354 (Buddhānaṃ); Kp-a 11 sq. the doctrine of the Buddha Vin i.12; DN i.110; DN ii.206; AN i.294; Dhp 381; Snp 482 etc.; Ja i.116. sāsanaṃ āroceti to give a message (dūtassa to the messenger) Vin iii.76.
-antaradhāna the disappearance or decline of the teaching of the Buddha. Said of the doctrine of Kassapa Bhagavā Snp-a 156 (cp. sāsane parihāyamāne Snp-a 223), and with ref. to the Pāli Tipiṭaka Vb-a 432 sq., where 3 periods of the development of the Buddhist doctrine are discussed, viz. sāsana-ṭhita-kāla ˚osakkana-kāla, ˚antaradhāna. -kara complying with one’s order and teaching MN i.129; -kāraka the same Snp 445; -kārin the same AN ii.26; susāsanaṃ dussānaṃ Ja i.239 (English transl.: “true and false doctrine, “good and bad news”). -hara (+ ˚jotaka) taking up (& explaining) an order Snp-a 164.;
cp. Vedic śāsana
a mustard seed SN ii.137; SN v.464; AN v.170; Ja vi.174 (comp. with mt. Meru); Snp 625, Snp 631 p. 122; Dhp 401; DN-a i.93; Dhp-a i.107; Dhp-a ii.51; Dhp-a iv.166 Vism 306 (ār’agge), 633; Pv-a 198 (˚tela). -˚kuṭṭa mustard powder Vin i.205; Vin ii.151.
cp. Sk. sarṣapa
(adj.) connected with the āsavas DN iii.112; AN i.81; Dhs 990, Dhs 1103; Ne 80.
sa3 = āsava
six days (cp. chāha) Ja vi.80 (= chadivasa, C.).
(adj.) with one’s own hand Ja i.168; Dhs-a 97; Snp-a 493; Kp-a 29.
fr. sahattha
contraction of so ahaṃ.
violent, hasty Snp 329; (nt.) violence, arbitrary action, acts of violence Snp 943; Ja vi.284; Mvu 6, Mvu 39; sāhasena arbitrarily AN v.177 opp. a˚; ibid.; Dhp 257; Ja vi.280. sāhasaṃ id. Ja vi.358 (= sāhasena sāhasikaṃ kammaṃ katvā ibid. 359); adv asāhasaṃ = asāhasena Ja iii.319 (C. sāhasiyataṇhāya ibid. 320, if we do not have to read sāhasiyā taṇhāya from sāhasī).
-kiriyā violence Ja iii.321.
fr. sahas power
(adj.) brutal, violent, savage Ja i.187, Ja i.504; Ja ii.11; Pv-a 209; Dhp-a i.17.
fr. sāhasa
(nt.) a brutal act Ja i.412, Ja i.438.
(adj.) with its food SN iii.54 (viññāṇa s.); DN ii.96 (Vesālī s.; trsln “with its subject territory”).
sa + āhāra
(-˚) (adj.) enduring Iti 32. See asayha˚.
fr. sah
(adj.) good, well Vin i.45; SN i.8; Pp 71 sq.; Thag 43; Vv-a 284.
= sādhu
(nt.) a coarse cloth MN i.509 (cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.52; Karpūramañjarī p. 19; J.P.T.S. 1891, 5 and Prākrit sāhulī, Z.D.M.G., xxviii., p. 415).
see āhuneyya.
a strip of ragged cloth Pv iii.16; Pv-a 173; J.P.T.S. 1891, 5; var. read. sāhunda.
= sāhuḷa
(-˚) part. of interrogation; e.g. kaṃ-si Dhp-a i.91.
= svid, for which ordinarily ˚su
(nt.) name of a water plant Ja vi.536 (C. not correct).
Sk. śīrṣaka?
to hope for Dhtp 296 (def. as “icchā”); only in cpd. ā˚; (q.v.).
is Desiderative of sarati1 ■ Siṃsati “to neigh” at Ja v.304 is to be read hiṃsati (for hesati, q.v.).
(f.) the tree Dalbergia sisu (a strong & large tree) S; v.437; Siṃsapā-groves (s ■ vanā are mentioned near Āḷavi AN i.136; near Setavyā DN ii.316 sq.; Dhp-a i.71; Vv-a 297; and near Kosambi SN v.437.
cp. Vedic śiṃśapā
(f.) sand, gravel; suvaṇṇa˚ gold dust AN i.253. Sikayasa-maya
cp. Sk. sikatā
(adj.) [made of tempered steel (said of swords) Ja vi.449 (cp. Note of the trsln p. 546).
(f.) string, string of a balance Vin ii.110; Vin ii.131, Ja i.9; Ja ii.399; Ja iii.13 (text sikkhā); vi.242; Vv-a 244 (muttā˚ string of pearls); Kv 336 sq.
cp. Sk. śikyā
1. to learn, to train oneself (= ghaṭati vāyamati Vism 274) usually combined with the locative, thus sikkhā-padesu s. to train oneself in the Sikkhāpadas DN i.63, DN i.250; Vin i.84; Iti 96, Iti 118; also with the dative, indicating the purpose; thus vinayāya s. to train oneself to give up Snp 974; the thing acquired by training is also put in the accusative; thus nibbānaṃ s. to learn, to train oneself towards Nibbāna Snp 940, Snp 1061; Mil 10; Pot sikkheyyāsi Mil 10; sikkheyyāma DN ii.245; sikkhema Snp 898; sikkhe Snp 974; sikkheyya Snp 930. Fut. sikkhissāmi Vin iv.141; sikkhissāmase Snp 814; ppr. sikkhanto Snp 657; ppr. med. sikkhamāna training oneself Vin iv.141; DN ii.241; Iti 104, Iti 121; sikkhamānā (f.) a young woman undergoing a probationary course of training in order to become a nun Vin i.135, Vin i.139, Vin i.145 Vin i.147, Vin i.167; Vin iv.121; AN iii.276; SN ii.261; grd. sikkhitabba Vin i.83; Ja vi.296; MN i.123; DN ii.138; Mil 10;; sikkha that ought to be learnt Mil 10; inf. sikkhituṃ Vin i.84, Vin i.270; ger. sikkhitvā Mil 219.
2. to want to overcome, to try, tempt DN ii.245 ■ pp. sikkhita. Caus. II. sikkhāpeti to teach, to train Ja i.162, Ja i.187, Ja i.257; DN-a i.261; Mil 32; Pv-a 3, Pv-a 4.
Vedic śikṣati; Desid. to śak: see sakkoti ■ The Dhtp (12) gives “vijj’ opādāna” as meaning
(nt.) training, study Ja i.58.
fr. śikṣ
(f.) 1. study, training, discipline Vin iii.23; DN i.181; AN i.238; SN ii.50, SN ii.131; SN v.378; Dhs 1004; Vb-a 344 (various) ■ sikkhaṃ paccakkhātaka one who has abandoned the precepts Vin i.135, Vin i.167 Vin ii.244 sq. (cp. sikkhā-paccakkhāna Vin ii.279, and sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya Vin iii.24; SN iv.190; sikkhā apaccakkhātā, ibid.); tisso sikkhā SN iii.83; Pts i.46 sq. Mil 133, Mil 237; Nd i.39; explained as adhisīla-, adhicitta-and adhipaññā-sikkhā AN i.234 sq.; Ne 126; with the synonyms saṃvara, samādhi & paññā at Vism 274.; 2. (as one of the 6 Vedāngas) phonology or phonetics combd with nirutti (interpretation, etymology) DN-a i.247 = Snp-a 447.
-ānisaṃsa whose virtue is training, praise of discipline AN ii.243; Iti 40 -ānusantatavutti whose behaviour is thoroughly in accordance with the discipline Ne 112 -kāma anxious for training Vin i.44; DN ii.101; SN v.154 SN v.163; AN i.24, AN i.238; ˚-tā anxiety for training Ja i.161 -samādāna taking the precepts upon oneself Vin i.146; Mil 162; AN i.238 sq.; AN iv.15; AN v.165. -sājīva system of training Vin iii.23 sq.; Pp 57.
Vedic śikṣā
(nt.) set of precepts, “preceptorial,” code of training; instruction, precept, rule
1. in general: DN i.63, DN i.146, DN i.250; MN i.33; AN i.63, AN i.235 sq. AN ii.14, AN ii.250 sq.; AN iii.113, AN iii.262; AN iv.152, 290 sq.; SN ii.224 SN v.187; Vin i.102; Vin ii.95, Vin ii.258; Vin iii.177; Vin iv.141 (sahadhammika), 143 (khudd’ ânukhuddakāni); Iti 96, Iti 118 Vb-a 69 (bhesajja˚); Dhp-a iii.16.
2. in special: the 5 (or 10) rules of morality, or the precepts to be adopted in particular by one who is entering the Buddhist community either as a layman or an initiate. There seem to have been only 5 rules at first, which are the same as the first 5 sīlas (see sīla 2 b): SN ii.167; Vb 285 (expld in detail at Vb-a 381 sq.); Dhp-a i.32 and passim To these were added another 5, so as to make the whole list (the dasasikkhāpadaṃ or ˚padāni) one of 10 (which are not the 10 sīlas!). These are (6) vikāla-bhojanā (-veramaṇī) not eating at the wrong hour; (7) nacca-gītavādita-visūka-dassanā˚; to avoid worldly amusements (8) mālā-gandha-vilepana-dhāraṇa-maṇḍana-vibhūsanaṭṭhānā˚; to use neither unguents nor ornaments; (9 uccā-sayana-mahā-sayanā˚; not to sleep on a high, big bed; (10) jātarūpa rajata-paṭiggahaṇā˚; not to accept any gold or silver: Vin i.83 = Kp ii.; AN i.211, and frequently- dasa-sikkhāpadikā (f.) conforming to the 10 obligations (of a nun) Vin iv.343 (= sāmaṇerī). There is nowhere any mention of the 8 sikkhāpadas as such, but they are called aṭṭhaṅgika uposatha (see sīla 2b) e.g. Mvu 37, Mvu 202 ■ diyaḍḍha-sikkhāpada-sata the 150 precepts, i.e. the Pāṭimokkha AN i.230, AN i.234; Mil 243.
sikkhā + pada, the latter in sense of pada 3. Cp. BSk. śikṣāpada
(adj.) teaching Pv-a 252; Mil 164.
fr. sikkhāpeti
(nt.) teaching Mil 163.
fr. sikkhāpeti
teaching Ja i.432.
trained, taught Vin iv.343 (˚sikkha, adj., trained in… ; chasu dhammesu) Mil 40; Pv-a 263 (˚sippa).
pp. of sikkhati
(adj.-n.) 1. tufted, crested (as birds); Ja v.406; Ja vi.539; Thag 1103 (mayūra); with tonsured hair (as ascetics) Ja iii.311.
2. a peacock Ja v.406; Vv-a 163.
Sk. śikhaṇḍin
the top, summit of a mountain Ja vi.519; Mil 2; a peak Dhp-a iii.364 (˚thūpiyo or ˚thūpikāyo peaked domes); the point or edge of a sword MN i.243; SN iv.56; crest, tuft Ja ii.99; (this is a very difficult reading; it is explained by the C. by sundara (elegant); Trenckner suggests singāra, cp. ii.98) a bud Thig 382.
cp. Sk. śikhara
(f.) a kind of woman (with certain defects of the pudendum) Vin ii.271; Vin iii.129 (text, ˚aṇī).
fr. last
(f.) point, edge MN i.104; crest, topknot DN-a i.89; Ja v.406; of a flame Dhp 308; Dhs-a 124 of fire (aggi˚) Snp 703; Ja v.213; (dhūma˚) Ja vi.206; of a ray of light Ja i.88; in the corn trade, the pyramid of corn at the top of the measuring vessel DN-a i.79; ˚-bandha top-knot DN i.7; vātasikhā (tikkhā a raging blast) Ja iii.484; susikha (adj.) with a beautiful crest Thag 211 (mora), 1136.
Vedic śikhā
a master, adept; proficient, professional Ja vi.449, Ja vi.450.
n. ag. fr. sikkhati
(adj.) crested, tufted Thag 22 (mora); Ja ii.363 (f. ˚inī). Also name of (a) the fire Ja i.215, Ja i.288 (b) the peacock Snp 221, Snp 687.
fr. sikhā
(śṛ˚) a jackal DN ii.295; DN iii.24 sq.; AN i.187; SN ii.230, SN ii.271 SN iv.177 sq. (text singāla); iv.199; Ja i.502; Ja iii.532 (Pūtimaṃsa by name) ■ sigālī (f.) a female jackal Ja i.336 Ja ii.108; Ja iii.333 (called Māyāvī); Mil 365 ■ See also siṅgāla.
cp. Vedic sṛgāla; as loan-word in English = jackal
(adj.) belonging to a jackal Ja ii.108; Ja iii.113 (˚aṃ nādaṃ, cp. segalikaṃ AN i.187, where the Copenhagen MS. has sigālakaṃ corrected to segālakaṃ)-(nt.) a jackal’s roar (sigālakaṃ nadati) DN iii.25. Cp segālaka.
fr. sigāla
(nt.) name of a tree (Hyperanthera moringa) Ja iii.161; Ja v.406.
cp. Vedic śigru, Name of a tribe; as a tree in Suśruta
(nt.) a horn Ja i.57, Ja i.149, Ja i.194; Ja iv.173 (of a cow); Vism 106; VvhA 476.
-dhanu horn-bow Dhp-a i.216. -dhamaka blowing a horn Mil 31.
Vedic śṛnga, cp. Gr. κάρνον, κραγγών; Lat. cornu = E. horn
the young of an animal, calf Ja v.92; cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.31.
erotic sentiment; siṅgāratā (f.) fondness of decorations Ja i.184; an elegant dress, finery Mil 2; (adj.) elegant, graceful (thus read) Ja ii.99 singāra-bhāva being elegant or graceful (said of a horse) Ja ii.98.
cp. Sk. śṛngāra
variant reading instead of sigāla SN ii.231 etc.; Vism 196; Pv iii.52.
(adj.) having horns Ja vi.354 (āvelita-˚ having twisted horns).
fr. singa1
(adj.) having a horn Vin ii.300; Ja iv.173 (= cow); clever, sharp-witted, false Thag 959; AN ii.26; Iti 112; cp. J.P.T.S. 1885, 53.
Vedic śṛngin
a kind of horned bird Ja iii.73; Dhp-a iii.22 (v.l. singala).
(nt.) ginger Vin i.201; Vin iv.35; Ja i.244; Ja iii.225 (alla-˚); Mil 63; Mvu 28, Mvu 21; Dhs-a 320; DN-a i.81. Singi & singi;
Sk. śṛnga + Tamil vera “root,” as E. loan word = ginger
(f.) 1. gold Vin i.38; SN ii.234; Ja i.84.
2. “ginger” in sense of “dainties, sweets Ja iv.352 (= singiver’ ādika uttaribhanga C.; cp. Tamil iñji ginger).
-nada gold Vv 6428; Vv-a 284. -loṇa (-kappa) license as to ginger & salt Vin ii.300, Vin ii.306. -vaṇṇa gold-coloured DN ii.133. -suvaṇṇa gold Vv-a 167.
cp. Sk. śṛngī
(f.) (?) a kind of fish Ja v.406; plur. singū Ja vi.537. According to Abhp. singū is m. and Payogasiddhi gives it as nt.
to sniff, to get scent of SN i.204 = Ja iii.308; DN-a i.38. Cp. upa˚.
siṅgh, given as “ghāyana” at Dhtp 34
(m. and n.) 1. a square, a place where four roads meet Vin i.237, Vin i.287 Vin i.344; Vin iv.271; DN i.83; AN ii.241; AN iv.187, AN iv.376; SN i.212 SN ii.128; SN iv.194; Mil 62, Mil 330, Mil 365; Dhp-a i.317. aya-s˚ perhaps an iron ring (in the shape of a square or triangle MN i.393; Ja v.45.
2. a water plant (Trapa bispinosa? Ja vi.530, Ja vi.563.
cp. Sk. śṛngāṭaka; fr. śṛnga
(f.) mucus of the nose, snot DN ii.293; MN i.187; Snp 196–198 = Ja i.148 (all MSS. of both books-n-instead of-ṇ-); Mil 154, Mil 382; Pv ii.23 Vism 264 & 362 (in detail); Dhp-a i.50; Vb-a 68, Vb-a 247.
Sk. singhāṇaka
to boil (intr.), to sweat; ppr. sijjamāna boiling Ja i.503; Caus. sedeti (q.v.). The Dhtp 162 gives “ pāka ” as meaning of sid ■ pp. sinna (wet) & siddha1 (cooked).
svid, Epic Sk. svidyate
to succeed, to be accomplished, to avail suit Snp-a 310; Pv-a 58, Pv-a 113, Pv-a 254 (inf. sijjhituṃ) ■ pp siddha.
sidh; Epic Sk. sidhyate. The Dhtp gives 2 roots sidh, viz. one as “gamana” (170), the other as “saṃsidhi” (419)
watering, one who waters Vv 797 (amba˚).
fr. siñcati
1. to sprinkle Ja iii.144; Ja v.26; Mvu 37, Mvu 203; Snp-a 66.
2. to bale out a ship Snp 771; Dhp 369. inf. siñcituṃ Ja vi.583 pass. siccati Thag 50 (all MSS. siñcati); imper. siñca Dhp 369; ppr. med. siñcamāna Mvu 37, Mvu 203; ger. sitvā Snp 771 = Ne 6; pp. sitta ■ Caus. seceti to cause to sprinkle Mvu 34, Mvu 45; Caus. II. siñcāpeti Ja ii.20, Ja ii.104. Cp. pari˚.
sic, cp. Av. hinčaiti to pour; Lat. siat “urinate,” Ags. sēon; Ohg. sīhan, Ger. ver-siegen; Gr. ἰκμάς wet Goth saiws = E. sea ■ Dhtp 377: kkharaṇe
(adj.) sprinkling (water) Snp-a 66 (vāta).
fr. siñcati
see vi˚.
pp. of śiṣ; Sk. śiṣṭha
see seyyati.
(adj.) sharp Dāvs i.32.
pp. of śā; Sk. śita
1. (lit.) stuck in or to: hadaya˚ salla Snp 938; Nd i.412.
2. (fig.) reclining, resting, depending on, attached, clinging to DN i.45, DN i.76; DN ii.255; MN i.364 Cp. 100; Ja v.453; Snp 229, Snp 333, Snp 791, Snp 944, Snp 1044. See also asita2.
pp. of sayati2
bound; sātu-˚ Dhp 341 (bound to pleasure); taṇhā-˚ Mil 248. Perhaps as sita2.
pp. of sinoti
(adj.) white Dāvs iii.4.
Sk. sita
(nt.) a smile Vin iii.105; Vin iv.159; SN i.24; SN ii.254; MN ii.45; Thag 630; Ap 21 (pātukari), 22 (˚kamma Dhp-a ii.64 (˚ṃ pātvakāsi); iii.479; Vv-a 68. -˚kāra smiling Ja i.351 (as ˚ākāra).
pp. of smi, cp. vimhāpeti. The other P. form is mihita
sprinkled Dhp 369; Ja iii.144; Vism 109
pp. of siñcati
(nt.) a lump of boiled rice Vin ii.165, Vin ii.214; Ja i.189, Ja i.235; Ja v.387; Ja vi.358 (odana˚), 365 (yāgu˚); Pv-a 99; sitthatelaka oil of beeswax Vin ii.107, Vin ii.151.
-āvakārakaṃ (adv.) scattering the lumps of boiled rice Vin iv.196.
cp. *Sk. siktha
(nt.) beeswax Vin ii.116 (madhu˚).
cp. Sk. sikthaka
(adj.) loose, lax, bending, yielding SN i.49, SN i.77 = Dhp 346 = Ja ii.140; Ja i.179; Ja ii.249; Mil 144; Dhp-a iv.52, Dhp-a iv.56; Pv-a 13. In compn with bhū as sithilī˚; e.g. ˚bhāva lax state Vism 502 = Vb-a 100; ˚bhūta hanging loose Pv-a 47 (so read for sithila˚) -˚hanu a kind of bird MN i.429 ■ Cp. saṭhila.
Vedic śithira, later śithila
boiled, cooked Ja ii.435 (= pakka); v.201 (˚bhojana); Mil 272; Snp-a 27 (˚bhatta = pakk’odana of Snp 18).
a specific Pali formation fr. sijjati (svid ) in meaning “to cook,” in analogy to siddha2
ended, accomplished Mvu 23, Mvu 45, Mvu 78; successful Mil 247 ■ (m.) a kind of semi-divine beings possessed of supernatural faculties, a magician Mil 120, Mil 267 [cp. Sk. siddha Halāyudha 1, 87; Yogasūtra 3, 33; Aufrecht remarks: “This is a post-vedic mythological fiction formed on the analogy of sādhya”].
-attha one who has completed his task Mil 214.
pp. of sijjhati
white mustard Thag-a 181 (Ap. v.24); Ja iii.225; Ja vi.537; Dhp-a ii.273 (in Kisāgotamī story).
Sk. siddhārthaka
(f.) accomplishment, success, prosperity Mvu 29, Mvu 70; Sdhp 14, Sdhp 17, Sdhp 325, Sdhp 469; Pv-a 63 (attha˚ advantage); padasiddhi substantiation of the meaning of the word DN-a i.66; cp. sadda˚.
fr. sidh, Vedic siddhi
(adj.) (-˚) connected with success; nāmasiddhika who thinks luck goes by names Ja i.401 appasiddhika unprofitable, fatal, etc. Ja iv.4, Ja iv.5 (sāgara) vi.34 (samudda).
fr. siddhi
bathed, bathing MN i.39; SN i.169 = SN i.183; Ja v.330.
pp. of sināti
(to bind): see sinoti.
to bathe; imper. sināhi MN i.39; inf. sināyituṃ MN i.39; aor. sināyi Ap 204 ■ pp. sināta.
Vedic snāti, snā. For detail see nahāyati. The Dhtp 426 gives root sinā in meaning “soceyya,” i.e. cleaning
(nt.) bathing MN i.39; SN i.38, SN i.43; SN iv.118; Nd ii.39; Vism 17; Vb-a 337.
fr. snā
(f.) bath-powder (?) MN ii.46, MN ii.151, MN ii.182.
1. wet, moist Vism 171.
2. oily, greasy, fatty Ja i.463, Ja i.481; Snp-a 100 (˚āhāra fattening food).
3. smooth, glossy Ja i.89; Ja iv.350 (of leaves); Mil 133.
4. resplendent charming Thag-a 139.
5. pliable Vin i.279 (kāya, a body with good movement of bowels).
6. affectionate attached, fond, loving Ja i.10; Mil 229, Mil 361; Vb-a 282 (˚puggala-sevanatā).
pp. of siniyhati; cp. Epic Sk. snigdha
(to be moist or sticky, fig.) to feel love, to be attached Vism 317 = Dhs-a 192 (in defn of mettā ). Caus. sineheti (sneheti, snehayati) to lubricate, make oily or tender (through purgatives etc.) Vin i.279 (kāyaṃ); Mil 172; DN-a i.217 (temeti + ); to make pliable, to soften Mil 139 (mānasaṃ) ■ pp. siniddha.
Vedic snihyate, snih; cp. Av. snāēƶaiti it snows = Lat. ninguit, Gr. νείγει; Oir. snigid it rains; Lat. nix snow = Gr. νίγα = Goth, snaiws, Ohg. sneo = snow; Oir snige rain; etc ■ The Dhtp 463 gives the 2 forms sinih & snih; in meaning pīṇana. Cp. sineha
Both forms occur without distinction; sneha more frequently (as archaic) in poetry. - A. sineha: 1. viscous liquid, unctuous moisture, sap SN i.134; AN i.223 sq.; Ja i.108; Dhs 652 (= sinehana Dhs-a 335); Vism 262 (thīna˚ = meda; vilīna˚ = vasā)
2. fat Ja ii.44 (bahu˚); Vb-a 67.
3. affection, love desire, lust Ja i.190; Ja ii.27; Pv-a 82 ■ B. sneha: 1. (oily liquid) DN i.74; Pv iii.52 (anguṭṭha˚, something like milk expld as khīra Pv-a 198).
2. (affection) AN ii.10; SN iv.188 (kāma˚); Snp 36, Snp 209, Snp 943 (= chanda, pema rāga, Nd i.426); Ja iv.11.
-anvaya following an affection Snp 36. -gata anything moist or oily AN iii.394 sq.; Dhs-a 335. -ja sprung from affection Snp 272; SN i.207. -bindu a drop of oil Vism 263. -virecana an oily purgative Ja iii.48.
fr. snih
a friend Mvu 36, Mvu 44.
(nt.) oiling, softening Mil 229; Dhs-a 335. - Cp. senehika.
(adj.) softening, oily; ˚āni bhesajjāni softening medicines Mil 172 (opp lekhaniyāni).
grd. formation fr. sinehana
lustful, covetous Dhp 341; Dhp-a iv.49.
pp. of sineheti
to bind Dhs-a 219 (sinoti bandhatī ti setu). pp. sita3.
sā or si; Vedic syati & sināti; the Dhtp 505 gives si in meaning “bandhana”
(f.) Name of a tree Vism 183, where Kp-a 49 in id. passage reads khajjūrikā. See also Abhp 603 Deśīn viii.29.
etym.?
the tree Vitex negundo DN-a i.252; Dhs-a 14, Dhs-a 317; also spelt sindhavāra Vv-a 177 sinduvārikā Ja vi.269; sindhuvāritā (i.e. sinduvārikā? Ja vi.550 = Ja vi.553; sinduvārita Ja iv.440, Ja iv.442 (v.l. ˚vārakā).
Sk. sinduvāra
belonging to the Sindh, a Sindh horse Ja i.175; Ja ii.96; Ja iii.278; Ja v.259; Dhp-a iv.4 (= Sindhava-raṭṭhe jatā assā); (nt.) rock salt Vin i.202 Sindhavaraṭṭha the Sindh country Thag-a 270; Ja v.260.
Sk. saindhava
see sinduvāra.
1. wet with perspiration Vin i.46, Vin i.51; Vin ii.223.
2. boiled (cp. siddha1) esp in the comp. udaka-sinna-paṇṇa; it occurs in a series of passages Ja iii.142, Ja iii.144; Ja iv.236, Ja iv.238, where Fausböll reads sitta, although the var. readings give also sinna The English translation, p. 149, says “sprinkled with water,” but the text, 238, speaks of leaves which are “sodden” (sedetvā).
pp. of sijjati; Vedic svinna
(f.) 1. pericarp MN i.306; Vv 8433; Vv-a 344; hingu˚ a s. yielding gum Vin i.201. Also written sipātikā; thus ādiṇṇasipātikā with burst pod or fruit skin SN iv.193.
2. a small case receptacle; khura˚ a razor case Vin ii.134. On s. at Pv iii.229 the C. has ekapaṭalā upānahā Pv-a 186.
cp. Sk. sṛpāṭikā, beak, BR.
(nt.) art, branch of knowledge, craft Snp 261; AN iii.225; AN iv.281 sq., 322; DN iii.156, DN iii.189; Ja i.239, Ja i.478; Mil 315; excludes the Vedas Mil 10 sabbasippāni Ja i.356, Ja i.463; Ja ii.53; eight various kinds enumerated MN i.85; twelve crafts Ud 31, cp. dvādasavidha s. Ja i.58; eighteen sippas mentioned Ja ii.243 some sippas are hīna, others ukkaṭṭha Vin iv.6 sq. Vb-a 410. asippa untaught, unqualified Ja iv.177 Ja vi.228 = asippin Mil 250 ■ sippaṃ uggaṇhāti to learn a craft Vv-a 138.
-āyatana object or branch of study, art DN i.51; Mil 78; Vb-a 490 (pāpaka). -uggahaṇa taking up, i.e. learning, a craft Ja iv.7; Pv-a 3. -ṭṭhāna a craft MN i.85 cp. BSk. śilpasthāna Divy 58, Divy 100, Divy 212. -phala result of one’s craft DN i.51. -mada conceit regarding one’s accomplishment Vb-a 468.
cp. Sk. śilpa
= sippa Ja i.420.
one who masters a craft Ja vi.296.
fr. sippa
an artisan Snp 613, Snp 651; Mil 78; Vism 336. Also sippiya Ja vi.396, Ja vi.397.
fr. sippa
(f.) a pearl oyster Ja i.426; Ja ii.100 (sippikasambukaṃ); Vism 362 (in comp.) = Vb-a 68.
fr. sippī
at Thag 49 is difficult to understand. It must mean a kind of bird (˚abhiruta), and may be (so Kern) a misread pippikā (cp. Sk. pippaka & pippīka). See also; Brethren p. 533.
(f.) a pearl oyster Ja ii.100; sippipuṭa oyster shell Ja v.197, Ja v.206. sippi-sambuka oysters and shells DN i.84; MN i.279; AN i.9; AN iii.395.
cp. Prākrit sippī
Name of a tree Ja vi.535.
(nt.) a suture of the skull; plur. ˚-āni Ja vi.339; sibbinī (f.) the same Vin i.274.
fr. sīv
to sew Ja iv.25; Vv-a 251. Pres. also sibbeti Vin ii.116 Vin iv.61, Vin iv.280; ger. sibbetvā Ja i.316; grd. sibbitabba Ja i.9 aor. sibbi Ja iv.25; & sibbesi Vin ii.289; inf. sibbetuṃ Vin i.203 ■ pp. sibbita ■ Caus. II. sibbāpeti Ja ii.197; Vin iv.61.
sīv, Vedic sīvyati. The root is sometimes given as siv, e.g. Dhtp 390, with defn “tantu-santāna”
(nt.) sewing Snp 304 = Ja iv.395; Ja i.220; Ja vi.218. sibbanī (f.) “seamstress” = greed, lust Dhs 1059; AN iii.399; Dhs-a 363; Snp 1040 (see lobha). -˚magga suture Vism 260; Kp-a 60 (id.).
fr. sīv
(nt.) causing to be sewn Vin iv.280.
fr. sibbāpeti
sewn Vin iv.279 (dus˚); Ja iv.20 (su˚); Vb-a 252 (˚rajjukā). Cp. vi˚ & pari˚;.
pp. of sibbati
one who sews MN iii.126.
n. ag. fr. sīv
Dhs 1059, read sibbanī. Cp. sibba.
(f.) the silk-cotton tree Bombax heptaphyllum Ja i.203; Ja iii.397; Vism 206; Dhp-a i.279. ˚-vana a forest of simbali trees Ja i.202; Ja ii.162 (s. ˚-pālibhaddaka-vana); iv.277. sattisimbalivana the sword forest, in purgatory Ja v.453.
cp. Vedic śimbala flower of the B., cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 109
see seyyati.
(nt. and m.) head, nom. siraṃ Thig 255, acc. siraṃ AN i.141; siro Snp 768; sirasaṃ Ja v.434; instr. sirasā Vin i.4; DN i.126; Snp 1027; loc. sirasmiṃ MN i.32; sire DN-a i.97; in compounds siro-A i.138 ■ sirasā paṭiggaṇhāti to accept with reverence Ja i.65; pādesu sirasā nipatati to bow one’s head to another’s feet, to salute respectfully Vin i.4, Vin i.34; Snp p.15, p. 101. siraṃ muñcati to loosen the hair Ja v.434; cp. i.47; mutta˚; with loose hair Kp-a 120 = Vism 415; adho-siraṃ with bowed head, head down AN i.141; AN iv.133; Ja vi.298; cp. avaṃ˚; dvedhā˚ with broken head Ja v.206; muṇḍa˚; a shaven head Dhp-a ii.125.
cp. Vedic śiras, śīan; Av. sarō, Gr. καράρα head, κέρας horn, κρανίον; Lat. cerebrum; Ohg hirni brain
(f.) a bloodvessel, vein Mvu 37, Mvu 136; nerve, tendon, gut Ja v.344, Ja v.364; ˚-jāla the network of veins Ja v.69; Pv-a 68.
Sk. sirā
a (long) creeping animal, serpent, a reptile Vin i.3; Vin ii.110; DN ii.57; MN i.10; SN i.154; AN ii.73 AN ii.117, AN ii.143; AN v.15; Snp 52, Snp 964; Ja i.93; Pv iii.52; Nd i.484 Vb-a 6. -tta (nt.) the state of being a creeping thing DN ii.57.
Sk. sarīsṛpa
(adj.) glorious DN ii.240. Siri (siri)
siri + mant
(f.) 1. splendour, beauty Snp 686 (instr. siriyā); Ja vi.318 (siriṃ dhāreti).
2. luck, glory majesty, prosperity SN i.44 (nom. siri); Ja ii.410 (siriṃ) 466; DN-a i.148; Vv-a 323 (instr. buddha-siriyā). rajjasirī-dāyikā devatā the goddess which gives prosperity to the kingdom Dhp-a ii.17; sirī + lakkhī splendour & luck Ja iii.443.
3. the goddess of luck DN i.11 (see Rh. D Buddhist India 216
222); DN-a i.97; Ja v.112; Mil 191 (˚devatā).
4. the royal bed-chamber (= sirigabbha Ja vi.383 ■ assirī unfortunate Ne 62 = Ud 79 (reads sassar’iva). sassirīka (q.v.) resplendent Snp-a 91 sassirika Ja v.177 (puṇṇa-canda˚); opp. nissirīka (a without splendour Ja vi.225, Ja vi.456; (b) unlucky Vv-a 212 (for alakkhika) ■ The composition form is siri˚.
-gabbha bedroom Ja i.228, Ja i.266; iii. 125; v.214. -corabrāhmaṇa “a brahmin who stole good luck” Ja ii.409 (cp. sirilakkhaṇa-˚). -devatā goddess(es) of luck Mil 191 (+ kalidevatā). -dhara glorious Mvu 5, Mvu 13. -nigguṇḍi a kind of tree Ja vi.535. -vilāsa pomp and splendour Ja iv.232. -vivāda a bedchamber quarrel Ja iii.20 (sayanakalaho ti pi vadanti yeva, C.). -sayana a state couch, royal bed Ja i.398; Ja iii.264; Ja vi.10; Dhp-a ii.86; Pv-a 280.
Vedic śrī
(nt.) the tree Acacia sirissa DN ii.4; SN iv.193; Vv 8432; Vv-a 331, Vv-a 344; ˚-puppha a kind of gem Mil 118. Cp. serīsaka.
cp. Class. Sk. śirṣa
the hair of the head Mvu 1, Mvu 34; Sdhp 286.
Sk. śiras + ruha
(f.) a stone, rock Vin i.28; SN iv.312 sq.; Vin 445; DN-a i.154; Ja v.68; Vism 230 (in comparison) Vb-a 64 (var. kinds); a precious stone, quartz Vin ii.238; Mil 267, Mil 380; Vv 8415 (= phalika˚ Vv-a 339) pada-silā a flag-stone Vin ii.121, Vin ii.154. Cp. sela.
-uccaya a mountain AN iii.346; Thag 692; Ja i.29 Ja vi.272, Ja vi.278; Dāvs v.63. -guḷa a ball of stone, a round stone MN iii.94. -tthambha (sila˚) stone pillar Mvu 15 Mvu 173. -paṭimā stone image Ja iv.95. -paṭṭa a slab of stone, a stone bench Ja i.59; Ja vi.37 (mangala˚); Snp-a 80 Snp-a 117. -pākāra stone wall Vin ii.153. -maya made of stone Ja vi.269, Ja vi.270; Mvu 33, Mvu 22; Mvu 36, Mvu 104. -yūpa a stone column SN v.445; AN iv.404; Mvu 28, Mvu 2. -santhāra stone floor Vin ii.120.
cp. Sk. śilā
to extol, only in Dhtp 30 as root silāgh, with defn “katthana,” i.e. boasting.
Epic Sk. ślāgh
(nt.) a whip snake Ja vi.194 (= nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇasappa).
adhering, connected AN i.103; DN-a i.91; Ja iii.154; Dhs-a 15; Sdhp 489 (a˚).
cp. Sk. śliṣṭa, pp. of śliṣ to clasp, to which śleṣman slime = P. silesuma & semha. The Dhtp (443) expl;s silis by “ālingana”
(f.) adherence, adhesion, junction Nd ii.137 (byañjana˚, of “iti”).
abstr. fr. siliṭṭha
a rat snake Ja vi.194 (= gharasappa).
junction, embrace; a rhetoric figure, riddle, puzzle, pun Ja v.445 (silesūpamā said of women = purisānaṃ cittabandhanena silesasadisā, ibid. 447).
fr. śliṣ
(nt.) phlegm Pv ii.23 (= semha Pv-a 80).
Sk. śleṣman, fr. śliṣ. This the diaeretic form for the usual contracted form semha
fame DN ii.223, DN ii.255; MN i.192; SN ii.226 (lābha-sakkāra˚); AN ii.26 AN ii.143; Snp 438; Vin i.183; Ja iv.223 (= kitti-vaṇṇa); Mil 325; Snp-a 86 (˚bhaṇana, i.e. recitation); pāpasiloka having a bad reputation Vin iv.239; asiloka blame AN iv.364 (˚bhaya); Ja vi.491.
2. a verse Mil 71; Ja v.387.
Vedic śloka Dhtp 8: silok = sanghāta
(adj.) famous MN i.200.
siloka + vant
(adj.-n.) auspicious, happy, fortunate, blest SN i.181; Ja i.5; Ja ii.126; Mil 248; Pv iv.33; Vv 187
2. a worshipper of the god Siva Mil 191; the same as Sivi Ja iii.468.
3. nt. happiness, bliss Snp 115, Snp 478; SN iv.370.
-vijjā knowledge of auspicious charms DN i.9; DN-a i.93 (alternatively explained as knowledge of the cries of jackals); cp. Divy 630 śivāvidyā.
Vedic śiva
(f.) a jackal DN-a i.93.
Sk. śivā
various reading instead of sipāṭikā, which see.
(f.) a palanquin, litter Bv 17, Bv 16 (text savakā); Pv i.111; Vin i.192; ˚-gabbha a room in shape like a palanquin, an alcove Vin ii.152; mañca-˚ Ja v.136, Ja v.262 (a throne palanquin?). suvaṇṇa˚; a golden litter Ja i.52, Ja i.89; Dhp-a i.89; Vism 316.
Epic Sk. śibikā
(adj.) hailing from the Sivi country, a kind of cloth (very valuable) Vin i.278, Vin i.280; Ja iv.401; DN-a i.133. The two latter passages read sīveyyaka.
(adj.) cool, cold Dāvs v.33; Vv-a 132. (m.) cold, cold season Vin ii.47 = Ja i.93.
Sk. śiśira
a pupil; Snp 997, Snp 1028; Dhs-a 32 (˚ânusissā).
cp. Sk. śiṣya, grd. of śiṣ or śās to instruct: see sāsati etc.
to be left, to remain Vv-a 344. Cp. visissati ■ Caus. seseti to leave (over) DN ii.344 (aor. sesesi); Ja i.399; Ja v.107; Dhp-a i.398 (asesetvā without a remainder) ■ pp. siṭṭha: see visiṭṭha.
Pass. of śiṣ to leave; Dhtp 630: visesana
(adj.) quick, rapid, swift MN i.120; AN i.45; Dhp 29; Pp 42; ˚-gāmin walking quickly Snp 381; sīghasota swiftly running DN ii.132; AN ii.199; Snp 319; ˚-vāhana swift (as horses) Ja vi.22; cp. adv sīghataraṃ Mil 82; sīghaṃ (adv.) quickly Mil 147; Vv-a 6; Vb-a 256; usually redupl. sīgha-sīghaṃ very quickly Ja i.103; Pv-a 4.
cp. Epic Sk. śīghra
(adj.) cold, cool DN i.74, DN i.148; DN ii.129; AN ii.117, AN ii.143; Snp 467, Snp 1014; Vin i.31, Vin i.288. (nt.) cold Vin i.3; Ja i.165; Mvu 1, Mvu 28; Snp 52, Snp 966. In compn with kṛ & bhū the form is sīti˚; e.g. sīti-kata made cool Vin ii.122; sīti-bhavati to become cooled tranquillized SN ii.83; SN iii.126; SN iv.213; SN v.319; Snp 1073 (sīti-siyā, Pot. of bhavati); Iti 38; ˚-bhūta, tranquillized Vin i.8; Vin ii.156; SN i.141, SN i.178; Snp 542, Snp 642; AN i.138 AN v.65; DN iii.233; Vv 5324; Pv i.87; iv.132. sīti-bhāva coolness, dispassionateness, calm AN iii.435; Thig 360; Pts ii.43; Vism 248; Vb-a 230; Pv-a 230; Thag-a 244. At Ja ii.163 & v.70 read sīna (“fallen”) for sīta.
-āluka susceptible of cold Vin i.288 (synon. sītabhīruka). -uṇha cold and heat Ja i.10. -odaka with cool water (pokkharaṇī) MN i.76; Pv ii.104; sītodika (˚iya the same Ja iv.438. -bhīruka being a chilly fellow Vin i.28816 (cp. sītāluka).
Vedic śīta
(nt.) sail Ja iv.21. So also in BSk.: Jtm 94. Sitaka = sita
S iv.289 (vāta).
(adj.) cold, cool Ja ii.128; DN-a i.1; Mil 246; tranquil Ja i.3; (nt.) coolness Mil 76, Mil 323; Vv-a 44, Vv-a 68, Vv-a 100; Pv-a 77, Pv-a 244. sītalībhāva becoming cool Sdhp 33.
cp. Vedic śītala
(f.) a furrow Vin i.240 (satta sītāyo); gambhīrasīta with deep mould (khetta) AN iv.237, AN iv.238 (text, ˚-sita).
-āloḷī mud from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206.
see sīta. The word sītisiyāvimokkha Pts ii.43, must be artificial, arisen from the pāda, sīti-siyā vimutto Snp 1073 (on which see expln at Nd ii.678).
to subside, sink; to yield, give way SN i.53; Snp 939 (= saṃsīdati osīdati Nd ii.420); Iti 71; Mvu 35, Mvu 35 Mvu 3rd pl. sīdare Ja ii.393; Pot. sīde Iti 71; fut. sīdissati: see ni˚ ■ pp. sanna ■ Caus. sādeti (q.v.); Caus. II sīdāpeti to cause to sink Sdhp 43 ■ Cp. ni˚, vi˚.
sad, Idg. *si-ƶd-ō, redupl. formation like tiṣṭhati; cp. Lat. sīdo, Gr. ι ̔́ζω; Av. hidaiti ■ The Dhtp (50 gives the 3 meanings of “visaraṇa-gaty-avasādanesu”.
(nt.) sinking Mvu 30, Mvu 54.
fr. sīdati
fallen off, destroyed Mil 117 (˚patta leafless); Ja ii.163 (˚patta, so read for sīta˚). See also saṃsīna.
pp. of śṛ; to crush; Sk. śīrṇa
congealed; cold, frosty MN i.79.
pp. of sīyati; Sk. śīna
(nt.) the Beri disease (elephantiasis) morbid enlargement of the legs; hence sīpadin and sīpadika suffering from that disease Vin i.91, Vin i.322.
Sk. slīpada
(f.) a woman Ja iv.310; Ja vi.142.
(f.) boundary, limit, parish Vin i.106 sq., 309, 340; Nd i.99 (four); Dhp-a iv.115 (mālaka˚); antosīmaṃ within the boundary Vin i.132, Vin i.167; ekasīmāya within one boundary, in the same parish Ja i.425; nissīmaṃ outside the boundary Vin i.122, Vin i.132; bahisīmagata gone outside the boundary Vin i.255. bhinnasīma transgressing the bounds (of decency) Mil 122 ■ In compn sīma˚ & sīmā˚;.
-anta a boundary Mvu 25, Mvu 87; sin Snp 484; Ja iv.311 -antarikā the interval between the boundaries Ja i.265 Vism 74. -ātiga transgressing the limits of sin, conquering sin Snp 795; Nd i.99. -kata bounded, restricted Nd ii.p. 153 (cp. pariyanta). -ṭṭha dwelling within the boundary Vin i.255. -samugghāta removal, abolishing of a boundary Mvu 37, Mvu 33. -sambheda mixing up of the boundary lines Vism 193, Vism 307, Vism 315.
cp. Sk. sīmā
to congeal or freeze: see visīyati & visīveti; ■ pp. sīna2.
for Sk. śyāyati
plough Thag-a 270 (= nangala).
Vedic sīra
(nt.) 1. nature, character, habit behaviour; usually as-˚ in adj. function “being of such a nature,” like, having the character of…, e.g. adāna˚; of stingy character, illiberal Snp 244; Pv-a 68 (+ maccharin); kiṃ˚; of what behaviour? Pv ii.913 keḷi˚; tricky Pv-a 241; damana˚; one who conquers Pv-a 251; parisuddha˚; of excellent character AN iii.124 pāpa˚; wicked Snp 246; bhaṇana˚; wont to speak Dhp-a iv.93; vāda˚; quarrelsome Snp 381 sq ■ dussīla (of) bad character DN iii.235; Dhs 1327; Pp 20, Pp 53; Pv ii.82 (noun); ii.969 (adj.); Dhp-a ii.252; Dhp-a iv.3; Sdhp 338; Mil 257; opp. susīla SN i.141.
2. moral practice, good character, Buddhist ethics, code of morality. (a) The dasa-sīla or 10 items of good character (not “commandments”) are (1) pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, i.e. abstinence from taking life; (2) adinn’ādānā (from) taking what is not given to one; (3) abrahmacariyā adultery (oṭherwise called kāmesu micchā-cārā ); (4) musāvādā telling lies; (5) pisuna-vācāya slander; (6) pharusa-vācāya harsh or impolite speech; (7) samphappalāpā frivolous and senseless talk; (8) abhijjhāya covetousness (9) byāpādā malevolence; (10) micchādiṭṭhiyā heretic views ■ Of these 10 we sometimes find only the first 7 designated as “sīla” per se, or good character generally See e.g. AN i.269 (where called sīla-sampadā); ii.83 sq (not called “sīla”), & sampadā ■ (b) The pañca-sīla or 5 items of good behaviour are Nos. 1
4 of dasa-sīla and (5) abstaining from any state of indolence arising from (the use of) intoxicants, viz. surā-meraya-majjapamāda-ṭṭhānā veramaṇī. These five also from the first half of the 10 sikkha-padāni. They are a sort of preliminary condition to any higher development after conforming to the teaching of the Buddha (saraṇaṃgamana) and as such often mentioned when a new follower is “officially” installed, e.g. Bv ii.190: saraṇâgamane kañci nivesesi Tathāgato kañci pañcasu sīlesu sīle dasavidhe paraṃ. From Pv iv.176 sq. (as also fr. Kp ii. as following upon Kp i.) it is evident that the sikkhāpadāni are meant in this connection (either 5 or 10), and not the sīlaṃ, cp. also Pv iv.350 sq., although at the above passage of Bv and at Ja i.28 as well as at Mvu 18, Mvu 10 the expression dasa-sīla is used: evidently a later development of the term as regards dasa-sīla (cp. Mvu trsln 122, n. 3), which through the identity of the 5 sīlas & sikkhāpadas was transferred to the 10 sikkhāpadas. These 5 are often simply called; pañca dhammā, e.g. at AN iii.203 sq., 208 sq. Without a special title they are mentioned in connection with the “saraṇaṃ gata” formula e.g. at AN iv.266. Similarly the 10 sīlas (as above a) are only called dhammā at AN ii.253 sq.; AN v.260; nor are they designated as sīla at AN ii.221 ■ pañcasu sīlesu samādapeti to instruct in the 5 sīlas (alias sikkhāpadāni) Vin ii.162 ■ (c) The only standard enumerations of the 5 or 10 sīlas are found at two places in the Saṃyutta and correspond with those given in the Niddesa. See on the 10 (as given under a) SN iv.342 & Nd;2 s. v. sīla; on the 5 (also as under b SN ii.68 & Nd;2 s. v. The so-called 10 sīlas (Childers) as found at Kp ii. (under the name of dasa-sikkhāpada are of late origin & served as memorial verses for the use of novices. Strictly speaking they should not be called; dasa-sīla ■ The eightfold sīla or the eight pledges which are recommended to the Buddhist layman (cp Mil 333 mentioned below) are the sikkhāpadas Nos 1
8 (see sikkhāpada), which in the Canon however do not occur under the name of sīla nor sikkhāpada, but as aṭṭhaṅga-samannāgata uposatha (or aṭṭhaṅgika u. “the fast-day with its 8 constituents.” They are discussed in detail at AN iv.248 sq., with a poetical setting of the eight at AN iv.254 = Snp 400, Snp 401-(d) Three special tracts on morality are found in the Canon. The Cullasīla (DN i.3 sq.) consists first of the items (dasa) sīla 1-7 then follow specific injunctions as to practices of daily living & special conduct, of which the first 5 (omitting the introductory item of bījagāma-bhūtagāma-samārambha) form the second 5 sikkhāpadāni. Upon the; Culla˚; follows the Majjhima˚; (DN i.5 sq.) & then the; Mahāsīla DN i.9 sq. The whole of these 3 sīlas is called sīlakkhandha and is (in the Sāmaññaphala sutta e.g. ) grouped with samādhi- and paññākkhandha: DN i.206 sq.; at AN v.205, AN v.206 sīla-kkhandha refers to the Culla-sīla only The three (s., samādhi & paññā) are often mentioned together, e.g. DN ii.81, DN ii.84; Iti 51; DN-a i.57 ■ The characteristic of a kalyāṇa-mitta is endowment with saddhā, sīla, cāga, paññā AN iv.282. These four are counted as constituents of future bliss AN iv.282, and form the 4 sampadās ibid. 322. In another connection at MN iii.99; Vism 19. They are, with suta (foll. after sīla) characteristic of the merit of the devatās AN i.210 sq (under devat’ânussati) ■ At Mil 333 sīla is classed as: saraṇa˚, pañca˚, aṭṭhanga˚, dasanga˚, pātimokkhasaṃvara˚ all of which expressions refer to the sikkhāpadas and not to the sīlas ■ At Mil 336 sq. sīla functions as one of the 7 ratanas (the 5 as given under sampadā up to vimuttiñāṇadassana; plus paṭisambhidā and bojjhanga) ■ cattāro sīlakkhandhā “4 sections of morality” Mil 243; Vism 15 & Dhs-a 168 (here as pātimokkha-saṃvara, indriya-saṃvara, ājīvapārisuddhi, paccaya-sannissita. The same with ref to catubbidha sīla at Ja iii.195). See also under cpds. At Pts i.46 sq. we find the fivefold grouping as (1 pāṇâtipatassa pahānaṃ, (2) veramaṇī, (3) cetanā (4) saṃvara, (5) avītikkama, which is commented on at Vism 49 ■ A fourfold sīla (referring to the sikkhāpada is given at Vism 15 as bhikkhu˚, bhikkhunī˚, anupasampanna˚ gahaṭṭha˚ ■ On sīla and adhisīla see e.g. AN i.229 sq.; Vb-a 413 sq ■ The division of sīla at Ja iii.195 is a distinction of a simple sīla as “saṃvara, of twofold sīla as “ caritta-vāritta, ” threefold as “ kāyika, vācasika, mānasika, ” and fourfold as above under cattāro sīlakkhandhā ■ See further generally: Pts i.42 sq.; Vism 3 sq.; Tikp 154, 165 sq., 269, 277; Nd i.14, Nd i.188 (expld as “pātimokkha-saṃvara”); Nd ii.p. 277 Vb-a 143.
-aṅga constituent of morality (applied to the pañcasikkhāpadaṃ) Vb-a 381. -ācāra practice of morality Ja i.187; Ja ii.3. -kathā exposition of the duties of morality Vin i.15; AN i.125; Ja i.188. -kkhandha all that belongs to moral practices, body of morality as forming the first constituent of the 5 khandhas or groups (+ samādhi˚ paññā˚, vimutti˚, ñāṇadassana-kkhandha), which make up the 5 sampadās or whole range of religious development; see e.g. Nd i.21, Nd i.39; Nd ii.p. 277 ■ Vin. 162 sq. iii.164; AN i.124, AN i.291; AN ii.20; SN i.99 sq.; Iti 51, Iti 107 Ne 90 sq., 128; Mil 243; Dhp-a iii.417. -gandha the fragrance of good works Dhp 55; Vism 58. -caraṇa moral life Ja iv.328, Ja iv.332. -tittha having good behaviour as its banks SN i.169, SN i.183 (trsln Mrs. Rh. D. “with virtue’s strand for bathing”). -bbata [ = vata2] good works and ceremonial observances Dhp 271; AN i.225; SN iv.118; Ud 71; Snp 231, etc.; sīlavata the same Snp 212 Snp 782, Snp 790, Snp 797, Snp 803, Snp 899; Iti 79 sq.; ˚-parāmāsa the contagion of mere rule and ritual, the infatuation of good works, the delusion that they suffice Vin i.184; MN i.433; Dhs 1005; AN iii.377; AN iv.144 sq.; Nd i.98; Dukp 245 282 sq.; Dhs-a 348; see also expln at Cpd. 171, n. 4. sīlabbatupādāna grasping after works and rites DN ii.58; Dhs 1005, Dhs 1216; Vism 569; Vb-a 181 sq ■ The old form sīlavata still preserves the original good sense, as much as “observing the rules of good conduct,” “being of virtuous behaviour.” Thus at Thag 12; Snp 212, Snp 782 (expld in detail at Nd i.66), 790, 797, 803; Iti 79; Ja vi.491 (ariya˚). -bheda a breach of morality Ja i.296 -mattaka a matter of mere morality DN i.3; DN-a i.55 -maya consisting in morality Iti 51; Vv-a 10 (see maya defn 6). -vatta morality, virtue SN i.143; cp. Ja iii.360 -vipatti moral transgression Vin i.171 sq.; DN ii.85; AN i.95; AN i.268 sq.; AN iii.252; Pp 21; Vism 54, Vism 57. -vipanna trespassing DN ii.85; Pp 21; Vin i.227. -vīmaṃsaka testing one’s reputation Ja i.369; Ja ii.429; Ja iii.100, Ja iii.193 -saṃvara self-restraint in conduct DN i.69; Dhs 1342; DN-a i.182. -saṃvuta living under moral self-restraint Dhp 281. -sampatti accomplishment or attainment by moral living Vism 57. -sampadā practice of morality Vin i.227; DN ii.86; MN i.194, MN i.201 sq.; AN i.95, AN i.269 sq. AN ii.66; Pug. 25, 54. -sampanna practising morality virtuous Vin i.228; DN i.63; DN ii.86; MN i.354; Thig 196 Thag-a 168; DN-a i.182.
cp. Sk. śīla. It is interesting to note that the Dhtp puts down a root sīl in meaning of samādhi (No 268) and upadhāraṇa (615)
(f.) (-˚) character(istic), nature, capacity Dhp-a iii.272.
abstr. fr. sīla
(adj.) virtuous, observing the moral precepts DN iii.77, DN iii.259 sq., 285; AN i.150; AN ii.58, AN ii.76 AN iii.206 sq., 262 sq.; iv.290 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 71 sq. Vism 58; DN-a i.286; Tikp 279 ■ nom. sg. sīlavā DN i.114; SN i.166; Iti 63; Pp 26, Pp 53; Ja i.187; acc ■ vantaṃ Vin iii.133; Snp 624; instr ■ vatā SN iii.167; gen ■ vato SN iv.303; nom. pl ■ vanto Pp 13; Dhs 1328; Ne 191 acc. pl ■ vante Ja i.187; instr ■ vantehi DN ii.80; gen. pl-vantānaṃ MN i.334; gen. pl ■ vataṃ Dhp 56; Ja i.144; f -vatī DN ii.12; Thig 449. compar. -vantatara Ja ii.3.
sīla + vant
(adj.) (-˚) = sīlin Ja vi.64.
fr. sīla
(adj.) having a disposition or character; ariyasīlin having the virtue of an Ārya DN i.115; DN-a i.286; niddāsīlin drowsy, Snp 96; vuddhasīlin increased in virtue DN i.114; sabhāsīlin fond of society Snp 96.
fr. sīla
(nt.) conduct, behaviour, character; said of bad behaviour, e.g. Ja iii.74 = Ja iv.71; emphasized as dussīlya, e.g. SN v.384; AN i.105; AN v.145 sq.; opp. sādhu-sīliya Ja ii.137 (= sundara-sīla-bhāva C.).
abstr. fr. sīla, Sk. śīlya for śailya
(f.) a cemetery, place where dead bodies are thrown to rot away Vin iii.36; DN ii.295 sq.; AN iii.268 AN iii.323; Ja i.146; Pv iii.52 (= susāna Pv-a 198); Vism 181 Vism 240; Pv-a 195. Sivana & siveti;
etym. doubtful; perhaps = *Sk. śivālaya; Kern derives it as śīvan “lying” + atthi “bone, problematic
: see vi˚.
(nt.) lead DN ii.351; SN v.92; Mil 331; Vb-a 63 (= kāḷa-tipu); a leaden coin Ja i.7; ˚-kāra a worker in lead Mil 331; ˚-maya leaden Vin i.190.
cp. Sk. sīsa
(nt.) 1. the head (of the body) Vin i.8; AN i.207; Snp 199, Snp 208, p. 80; Ja i.74 Ja ii.103; sīsaṃ nahāta, one who has performed an ablution of the head DN ii.172; Pv-a 82; āditta-sīsa, one whose turban has caught fire SN i.108; SN iii.143; SN v.440; AN ii.93 sīsato towards the head Mvu 25, Mvu 93; adho-sīsa, head first Ja i.233.
2. highest part, top, front: bhūmi˚; hill place of vantage Dpvs 15, 26; Ja ii.406; caṅkamana˚ head of the cloister Vism 121; saṅgāma˚; front of the battle Pp 69; Ja i.387; megha˚; head of the cloud Ja i.103. In this sense also opposed to pāda (foot), e.g. sopāṇa˚; head (& foot) of the stairs Dhp-a i.115. Contrasted with sama (plain) Pts i.101 sq.
3. chief point Pts i.102.
4. panicle, ear (of rice or crops) AN iv.169; DN-a i.118.
5. head, heading (as subdivision of a subject), as “chanda-sīsa citta-sīsa” grouped under chanda & citta Vism 376. Usually instr; ˚sīsena “under the heading (or category) of,” e.g. citta˚; Vism 3; paribhoga˚; Ja ii.24; saññā˚; Dhs-a 200; kammaṭṭhāna˚; Dhp-a iii.159.
-ānulokin looking ahead, looking attentively after something MN i.147. -ābādha disease of the head Vin i.270 sq.; Ja vi.331. -ābhitāpa heat in the head, headache Vin i.204. -kaṭāha a skull DN ii.297 = MN i.58 Vism 260 = Kp-a 60; Kp-a 49. -kalanda Mil 292 [Signification unknown; cp. kalanda a squirrel and kalandaka Ja vi.227; a blanket [cushion?] or kerchief. -cchavi the skin of the head Vin i.277. -cola a headcloth turban Mvu 35, Mvu 53. -cchejja resulting in decapitation AN ii.241. -ccheda decapitation, death Ja i.167; Mil 358. -ppacālakaṃ swaying the head about Vin iv.188. -paramparāya with heads close together Dhp-a i.49. -virecana purging to relieve the head DN i.12; DN-a i.98. -veṭha head wrap SN iv.56. -veṭhana headcloth turban MN ii.193; sīsaveṭha id. MN i.244 = SN iv.56 -vedanā headache MN i.243; MN ii.193.
Vedic śīrṣa: see under sira
(nt.) head, as adj ■ ˚ heading, with the head towards; uttarasīsaka head northwards DN ii.137 pācīna˚ (of Māyā’s couch: eastward) Ja i.50. heṭṭhāsīsaka head downwards Ja iii.13; dhammasīsaka worshipping righteousness beyond everything Mil 47, Mil 117.
= sīsa
1. a lion DN ii.255; SN i.16; AN ii.33, AN ii.245; AN iii.121; Snp 72; Ja i.165; Mil 400; Nd ii.679 (= migarājā) Vb-a 256, Vb-a 398 (with pop. etym. “sahanato ca hananato ca sīho ti vuccati”); Ja v.425 (women like the lion) Kp-a 140; often used as an epithet of the Buddha AN ii.24; AN iii.122; SN i.28; Iti 123; fem. sīhī lioness Ja ii.27 Ja iii.149, and sīhinī Mil 67.
-āsana a throne Mvu 5, Mvu 62; Mvu 25, Mvu 98. -kuṇḍala “lion’s ear-ring,” a very precious ear-ring Ja v.348; Snp-a 138 also as ˚mukha-kuṇḍala at Ja v.438. -camma lion’s hide AN iv.393. -tela “lion-oil,” a precious oil Kp-a 198 -nāda a lion’s roar, the Buddha’s preaching, a song of ecstasy, a shout of exultation “halleluiah” AN ii.33; MN i.71; DN i.161, DN i.175; SN ii.27, SN ii.55; Ja 119; Mil 22; Dhp-a ii.43, Dhp-a ii.178; Vb-a 398; (= seṭṭha-nāda abhīta-nāda); Snp-a 163, Snp-a 203. -nādika one who utters a lion’s roar, a song of ecstasy AN i.23. -pañjara a window Ja i.304; Ja ii.31; Dhp-a i.191. -papātaka “lion’s cliff,” Name of one of the great lakes in the Himavā Snp-a 407 and passim. -piṭṭhe on top of the lion Ja ii.244. -potaka a young lion Ja iii.149. -mukha “lion’s mouth,” an ornament at the side of the nave of the king’s chariot Kp-a 172. See also ˚kuṇḍala. -ratha a chariot drawn by lions Mil 121. -vikkīḷita the lion’s play, the attitude of the Buddhas and Arahants Ne 2, Ne 4, Ne 7, Ne 124. -seyyā lying like a lion, on the right side DN ii.134; AN i.114; AN ii.40 AN ii.244; Ja i.119, Ja i.330; Vb-a 345; Dhp-a i.357. -ssara having a voice like a lion Ja v.284, Ja v.296 etc. (said of a prince). -hanu having a jaw like a lion, of a Buddha DN iii.144, DN iii.175; Bv xiii.1 = Ja i.38.
Vedic siṃha
Ceylon; (adj.) Singhalese Mvu 7, Mvu 44 sq.; 37, 62; 37, 175; Dhvs 9, 1; Kp-a 47, Kp-a 50, Kp-a 78; Snp-a 30, Snp-a 53 sq. 397. -˚kuddāla a Singhalese hoe Vism 255; Vb-a 238 -˚dīpa Ceylon Ja vi.30; Dhs-a 103; DN-a i.1; Kp-a 132 -˚bhāsā Singhalese (language) DN-a i.1; Tikp 259. See Dict. of Names.
(adj.) Singhalese Snp-a 397.
fr. last
(indecl.) a part. of exclamation “shoo!”; usually repeated su su Ja ii.250; Ja vi.165 (of the hissing of a snake); Thag-a 110 (scaring somebody away), 305 (sound of puffing). Sometimes as sū sū, e.g. Tikp 280 (of a snake), cp. sūkara ■ Denom susumāyati (q.v.).
onomat.
(indecl.) a particle, combd with adj., nouns, and certain verb forms, to express the notion of “well, happily, thorough” (cp. E. well-bred wel-come, wel-fare); opp. du˚. It often acts as simple intensive prefix (cp. saṃ˚) in the sense of “very,” and is thus also combd with concepts which in themselves denote a deficiency or bad quality (cp. su-pāpika “very wicked”) and the prefix du˚; (e.g. su-duj-jaya, su-duddasa, su-dub-bala) ■ Our usual practice is to register words with su˚; under the simple word, whenever the character of the composition is evident at first sight (cp du˚; ). For convenience of the student however we give in the foll. a few compns as illustrating the use of su˚.
-kaṭa well done, good, virtuous DN i.55; Mil 5; sukata the same DN i.27; (nt.) a good deed, virtue Dhp 314; AN iii.245. -kara feasible, easy DN i.250; Dhp 163; Snp p.123; na sukaro so Bhagavā amhehi upasaṃkamituṃ SN i.9. -kiccha great trouble, pain Ja iv.451. -kittika well expounded Snp 1057. -kumāra delicate, lovely Mvu 59, Mvu 29; see sukhumāla. -kumālatta loveliness DN-a i.282. -kusala very skilful Ja i.220; -khara very hard (-hearted) Ja vi.508. (= suṭṭhu khara C.). -khetta a good field DN ii.353; AN i.135; SN i.21. -gajjin shrieking beautifully (of peacocks) Thag 211. -gandha fragrant Ja ii.20; pleasant odour Dhs 625. -gandhi = sugandha Ja 100. -gandhika fragrant Mvu 7, Mvu 27; Ja i.266. -gahana a good grip, tight seizing Ja i.223. -gahita and suggahīta, grasped tightly, attentive AN ii.148, AN ii.169; AN iii.179; Ja i.163, Ja i.222. -ggava virtuous Ja iv.53 (probably misspelling for suggata) ■ ghara having a nice house Ja vi.418, Ja vi.420. -carita well conducted, right, good Dhp 168 sq. (nt.) good conduct, virtue, merit AN i.49 sq. 57, 102; DN iii.52, DN iii.96, DN iii.152 sq., 169; Dhp 231; Iti 55 Iti 59 sq.; Pts i.115; Vism 199. -citta much variegated Dhp 151; Dhp-a iii.122. -cchanna well covered Dhp 14 -cchavi having a lovely skin, pleasant to the skin DN iii.159; Ja v.215; Ja vi.269. -jana a good man Mvu 1, Mvu 85 -jāta well born, of noble birth DN i.93; Snp 548 sq. -jāti of noble family Mvu 24, Mvu 50. -jīva easy to live Dhp 244 -tanu having a slender waist Vv 6412 (= sundara-sarīra Vv-a 280). -danta well subdued, tamed DN ii.254; Dhp 94; AN iv.376. -dassa easily seen Dhp 252; (m.) a kind of gods, found in the fourteenth rūpa-brahmaloka DN ii.52; Pp 17; Kv 207. -diṭṭha well seen Snp 178 p. 143. -divasa a lucky day Ja iv.209. -dujjaya difficult to win Mvu 26, Mvu 3. -duttara very difficult to escape from AN v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Dhp 86; Snp 358. -dukkara very difficult to do Ja v.31. -duccaja very hard to give up Ja vi.473. -duddasa very difficult to see Vin i.5 Thag 1098; Dhp 36; Dhp-a i.300; used as an epithet of Nibbāna SN iv.369. -duppadhaṃsiya very difficult to overwhelm DN iii.176. -dubbala very weak Snp 4 -dullabha very difficult to obtain Snp 138; Vv 4419 Vism 2; Vv-a 20. -desika a good guide Mil 354; Dhs-a 123; Vism 465. -desita well preached Dhp 44; Snp 88, Snp 230. -ddiṭṭha [ = su + uddiṭṭha] well set out Vin i.129; Ja iv.192. -ddhanta well blown MN iii.243; Dhs-a 326; = saṃdhanta AN i.253; Vin ii.59. -dhammatā good nature, good character, goodness, virtue Ja ii.159; Ja v.357; Ja vi.527. -dhota well washed, thoroughly clean Ja i.331. -nandī (scil. vedanā) pleasing, pleasurable SN i.53. -naya easily deducted, clearly understood AN iii.179 = sunnaya AN ii.148; iii. 179 (v.l.). -nahāta well bathed, well groomed DN i.104; as sunhāta at SN i.79 -nimmadaya easily overcome D 243 and sq. -nisita well whetted or sharpened Ja iv.118; as ˚nissita at Ja vi.248. -nisit-agga with a very sharp point Vv-a 227 -nīta well understood AN i.59. -pakka thoroughly ripe Mvu 15, Mvu 38. -paṇṇasālā a beautiful hut Ja i.7. -patittha having beautiful banks DN ii.129; Ud 83 = sūpatittha MN i.76. See also under sūpatittha ■ parikammakata well prepared, well polished DN i.76; AN ii.201; DN-a i.221 -pariccaja easy to give away Ja iii.68. -parimaṇḍala well rounded, complete Mvu 37, Mvu 225. -parihīna thoroughly bereft, quite done for Iti 35. -pāpa-kammin very wicked Ja v.143. -pāpa-dhamma very wicked Vv 521. -pāpika very sinful, wicked AN ii.203. -pāyita well saturated, i.e. hardened (of a sword) Ja iv.118 Cp. suthita ■ pāsiya easily threaded (of a needle Ja iii.282. -picchita well polished, shiny, slippery Ja v.197 (cp. Sk. picchala?). Dutoit “fest gepresst (pīḷ ?), so also Kern, Toev. ii.85. C. expls as suphassita-pipi good to drink Ja vi.526. -pīta see suthita ■ pubbaṇha a good morning AN i.294. -posatā good nature Vin i.45. -ppaṭikāra easy requital AN i.123. -ppaṭipanna well conducted AN ii.56; Pp 48 ■ tā, good conduct Ne 50. -ppaṭippatāḷita well played on DN ii.171; AN iv.263. -ppaṭividdha thoroughly understood AN ii.185 -ppatiṭṭhita firmly established Iti 77; Snp 444. -ppatīta well pleased Mvu 24, Mvu 64. -ppadhaṃsiya easily assaulted or overwhelmed DN iii.176; SN ii.264. Cp. ˚duppadhaṃsiya. -ppadhota thoroughly cleansed DN ii.324. -ppabhāta a good daybreak Snp 178. -ppameyya easily fathomed DN i.266; Pp 35. -ppavādita (music) well played Vv 39. -ppavāyita well woven, evenly woven Vin iii.259. -ppavedita well preached Iti 78; Thig 341; Thag-a 240. -ppasanna thoroughly full of faith Mvu 34, Mvu 74. -ppahāra a good blow Ja iii.83. -phassita agreeable to touch, very soft Ja i.220; Ja v.197 (C. for supicchita); smooth Vv-a 275. -bahu very much, very many Mvu 20, Mvu 9; Mvu 30, Mvu 18; Mvu 34, Mvu 15; Mvu 37, Mvu 48. -bāḷhika see bāḷhika ■ bbata virtuous, devout DN i.52; SN i.236; Snp 220; Dhp 95; Ja vi.493; Dhp-a ii.177; Dhp-a iii.99; Pv-a 226; Vv-a 151. -bbināya easy to understand Nd 326 -bbuṭṭhi abundant rainfall Mvu 15, Mvu 97; Dhp-a i.52 -kā the same DN i.11. -brahā very big Ja iv.111. -bhara easily supported, frugal; -tā frugality Vin i.45; Vin ii.2; MN i.13. -bhikkha having plenty of food (nt.) plenty DN i.11. -˚vāca called plenty, renowned for great liberality Iti 66. -bhūmi good soil MN i.124. -majja well polished Ja iii.282. -majjhantika a good noon AN i.294. -mati wise Mvu 15, Mvu 214. -matikata well harrowed AN i.239. -mada very joyful Ja v.328. -mana glad, happy DN i.3; DN iii.269; AN ii.198; Snp 222, Snp 1028; Dhp 68; Vism 174. kind, friendly Ja iv.217 (opp. disa) -manohara very charming Mvu 26, Mvu 17. -manta well-advised, careful Mil 318. -mānasa joyful Vin i.25 Mvu 1, Mvu 76. -māpita well built Ja i.7. -mutta happily released DN ii.162. -medha wise Vin i.5; MN i.142; AN ii.49 and sq.; Dhp 208; Snp 117, Snp 211 etc.; Iti 33; Nd i.453. -medhasa wise DN ii.267; AN ii.70; Dhp 29. -yiṭṭha well sacrificed AN ii.44. -yutta well suited, suitable Ja i.296. -ratta very red Ja i.119; Dhp-a i.249. -rabhi fragrant SN iv.71; Vv 8432; Ja i.119; AN iii.238; Vv 4412 538, 716; Pv ii.123; Vism 195 (˚vilepana); Vv-a 237; Pv-a 77; Davs iv.40; Mil 358. -˚karaṇḍaka fragrance box, a fragrant box Thig 253; Thag-a 209. -ruci resplendent Snp 548. -ruddha very fierce Ja v.425, Ja v.431 (read ˚rudda) ■ rūpin handsome Mvu 22, Mvu 20. -rosita nicely anointed Ja v.173. -laddha well taken; (nt.) a good gain, bliss Vin i.17; Iti 77. -labha easy to be obtained Iti 102; Ja i.66; Ja vi.125; Pv-a 87. -vaca of nice speech, compliant MN i.43, MN i.126; Snp 143; AN iii.78; Ja i.224 Often with padakkhiṇaggāhin (q.v.). See also subbaca & abstr. der.; sovacassa ■ vatthi [i.e. su + asti] hail well-being Cp. 100 = Ja iv.31; cp. sotthi ■ vammita well harnessed Ja i.179. -vavatthāpita well known, ascertained Ja i.279; Mil 10. -vānaya [i.e. su-v-ānaya easily brought, easy to catch Ja i.80, Ja i.124, Ja i.238. -viggaha of a fine figure, handsome Mvu 19, Mvu 28. -vijāna easily known Snp 92; Ja iv.217. -viññāpaya easy to instruct Vin i.6. -vidūravidūra very far off AN ii.50 -vibhatta well divided and arranged Snp 305. -vilitta well perfumed DN i.104. -vimhita very dismayed Ja vi.270. -visada very clean or clear Snp-a 195. -visama very uneven, dangerous Th ii.352; Thag-a 242. -vihīna thoroughly bereft Ja i.144. -vuṭṭhikā abundance of rain Ja ii.80; Snp-a 27; DN-a i.95; see subbuṭṭhikā-vositaṃ happily ended Ja iv.314. -saṅkhata well prepared AN ii.63. -saññā (f.) having a good understanding Ja v.304; Ja vi.49, Ja vi.52, Ja vi.503 (for ˚soññā? C. sussoṇiya, i.e. having beautiful hips); Ap 307 (id.). -saññata thoroughly restrained Ja i.188. -saṇṭhāna having a good consistence, well made Snp 28. -sattha well trained Ja iii.4. -sandhi having a lovely opening Ja v.204 -samāgata thoroughly applied to AN iv.271 (aṭṭhanga˚ i.e. uposatha). -samāraddha thoroughly undertaken DN ii.103; SN ii.264 sq.; Dhp 293; Dhp-a iii.452. -samāhita well grounded, steadfast DN ii.120; Dhp 10; Dhp-a iv.114; Iti 113; -atta of steadfast mind SN i.4, SN i.29 -samucchinna thoroughly eradicated MN i.102. -samuṭṭhāpaya easily raised SN v.113. -samudānaya easy to accomplish Ja iii.313. -sambuddha easy to understand Vin i.5; Snp 764; SN i.136. -sāyaṇha a good, blissful evening AN i.294. -sikkhita well learnt, thoroughly acquired Snp 261; easily trained, docile Ja i.444; Ja ii.43 -sikkhāpita well taught, trained Ja i.444. -sippika a skilful workman Mvu 34, Mvu 72. -sīla moral, virtuous SN i.141. -sukka very white, resplendent DN ii.18 DN iii.144; Snp 548. -seyya lying on soft beds SN ii.268 -ssata well remembered MN i.520. -ssara melodious Vv 364; Snp-a 355. -ssavana good news Ja i.61. -ssoṇi having beautiful hips Ja iv.19; Ja v.7, Ja v.294; cp. sussoṇiya Ja vi.503, & see; ˚saññā ■ hajja friend SN iv.59; Dhp 219; Snp 37; Ja i.274; AN iv.96; Dhp-a iii.293. -hada friendly good- hearted a friend DN iii.187 (= sundara-hadaya C. Ja iv.76; Ja vi.382; suhadā a woman with child Ja v.330 -hanna modesty Ja i.421. See hanna ■ huṭṭhita [su uṭṭhita] well risen Snp 178. -huta well offered, burnt as a sacrifical offering AN ii.44.
Vedic su˚, cp. Gr. εὐ-
(indecl.) (-˚) a particle of interrogation, often added to interrogative pronouns; thus kaṃ su SN i.45; kena ssu SN i.39; kissa ssu SN i.39, SN i.161 (so read for kissassa); ko su Snp 173, Snp 181; kiṃ su Snp 1108; kathaṃ su Snp 183, Snp 185 Snp 1077; it is often also used as a pleonastic particle in narration; thus tadā su then DN ii.212; hatthe su sati when the hand is there SN iv.171. It often takes the forms ssu and assu; thus tyassu = te assu DN ii.287 yassāhaṃ = ye assu ahaṃ DN ii.284 n. 5; api ssu Vin i.5 Vin ii.7, Vin ii.76; tad-assu = tadā su then Ja i.196; tay’assu three Snp 231; āditt’assu kindled DN ii.264; nāssu not Snp 291 Snp 295, Snp 297, Snp 309; sv-assu = so su Ja i.196. Euphonic ṃ is sometimes added yehi-ṃ-su Ja vi.564 n. 3; kacciṃ-su Snp 1045, Snp 1079.
*ssu, fr. Vedic svid, interrog. part., of which other forms are si and sudaṃ. It also stands for Vedic sma, deictic part. of emphasis, for which also sa & assa;
a crocodile SN iv.198; Thig 241; Thag-a 204; Ja ii.158 sq.; Vism 446; Snp-a 207 (˚kucchi); Dhp-a iii.194 ■ ˚rī (f.) a female crocodile Ja ii.159; suṃsumārinī (f.) Mil 67; suṃsumārapatitena vandeti to fall down in salutation DN-a i.291.
cp. Sk. śiśumāra, lit. child-killing
a parrot Ja i.458; Ja ii.132; instead of suka read sūka SN v.10. See suva.
Vedic śuka, fr. śuc
planet, star Ud. 9 = Ne 150; (nt.) semen, sukkavisaṭṭhi emission of semen Vin ii.38; Vin iii.112; Vin iv.30; Kv 163.
Vedic śukra; fr. śuc
(adj.) white, bright; bright, pure, good SN ii.240; SN v.66, SN v.104; Dhp 87; Dhs 1303; Iti 36; Ja i.129; Mil 200; sukkadhamma Ja i.129; kaṇhāsukkaṃ evil and good Snp 526; Sukkā a class of gods DN ii.260.
-aṃsa bright lot, fortune Dhp 72; Dhp-a ii.73. -chavi having a white skin Ja iv.184; Ja vi.508; at both pass. said of the sons of widows. -pakkha [cp. BSk. śukla-pakṣa Divy 38] the bright fortnight of a month AN ii.19; Mil 388; Ja iv.26 (opp. kāḷa-pakkha); the bright half, the good opportunity Thig 358; Thag-a 2.
Vedic śukla
(adj.) dry, dried up DN ii.347; Ja i.228, Ja i.326; Ja iii.435; Ja v.106; Mil 261, Mil 407. Cp pari˚, vi˚.
-kaddama dried mud Mvu 17, Mvu 35. -kantāra desert Ja v.70. -vipassaka “dry-visioned” Cpd. 55, 75; with diff. expln Geiger, Saṃyutta tsrln ii.172 n. 1.
Vedic śuṣka, fr. śuṣ
to be dried up Mil 152; Ja v.472; ppr. sukkhanto getting dry Ja i.498; ppr. med sukkhamāna wasting away Ja i.104; Caus. II. sukkhāpeti SN i.8; Vin iv.86; Ja i.201, Ja i.380; Ja ii.56; DN-a i.262 see also pubbāpeti ■ pp. sukkhita.
fr. śuṣka dry; śuṣ
(nt.) drying up Ja iii.390 (assu-˚).
fr. sukkha
(nt.) drying, making dry Ja vi.420.
fr. sukkhāpeti
dried up, emaciated Mil 303. Cp. pari˚.
pp. of sukkhati
(adj.-n.) agreeable, pleasant, blest Vin i.3; Dhp 118, Dhp 194, Dhp 331; Snp 383; paṭipadā, pleasant path, easy progress AN ii.149 sq.; Dhs 178; kaṇṇa-s. pleasant to the ear DN i.4; happy, pleased DN ii.233 ■ nt. sukhaṃ wellbeing happiness, ease; ideal, success Vin i.294; DN i.73 sq.; MN i.37; SN i.5; AN iii.355 (deva-manussānaṃ) Iti 47; Dhp 2; Snp 67; Dhs 10; Dhs-a 117; Pv-a 207 (lokiya worldly happiness) ■ kāyika sukkha bodily welfare Tikp 283; cp. Cpd. 1121; sāmisaṃ s. material happiness AN i.81; AN iii.412; Vb-a 268. On relation to pīti (joy see Vism 145 (sankhāra-kkhandha-sangahitā pīti vedanā-kkhandha-sangahitaṃ sukhaṃ) and Cpd. 56 243 ■ Defined further at Vism 145 & 461 (iṭṭha-phoṭṭhabb-ânubhavana-lakkhaṇaṃ; i.e. of the kind of experiencing pleasant contacts) ■ Two kinds, viz kāyika & cetasika; at Pts i.188; several other pairs at AN i.80; three (praise, wealth, heaven) Iti 67; another three (manussa˚, dibba˚, nibbāna˚) Dhp-a iii.51; four (possessing, making good use of possessions, having no debts, living a blameless life) AN ii.69 ■ gātha -bandhana-sukh’atthaṃ for the beauty of the verse Ja ii.224-Opp. asukha DN iii.222, DN iii.246; Snp 738; or dukkha, with which often combd (e.g. Snp 67, Snp 873, with spelling dukha at both pass.) ■ Cases: instr. sukhena with comfort happily, through happiness Thag 220; Dhs-a 406; acc sukhaṃ comfortably, in happiness; yathā s. according to liking Pv-a 133; sukhaṃ seti to rest in ease, to lie well SN i.41; AN i.136; Dhp 19, Dhp 201; Ja i.141. Cp. sukhasayita-s. edhati to thrive, prosper SN i.217; Dhp 193; Snp 298; cp. sukham-edha Vin iii.137 (with Kern’s remarks Toev. ii.83). s. viharati to live happily AN i.96; AN iii.3; Dhp 379 ■ Der. sokhya.
-atthin fem ■ nī longing for happiness Mvu 6, Mvu 4 -āvaha bringing happiness, conducive to ease SN i.2 sq. 55; Dhp 35; Ja ii.42. -indriya the faculty of ease SN v.209 sq.; Dhs 452; Iti 15, Iti 52. -udraya (sometimes spelt ˚undriya ) having a happy result AN i.97; Pts i.80; Pv iv.178 (= sukha-vipāka Pv-a 243); Vv 318. -ūpaharaṇa happy offering, luxury Ja i.231. -edhita read as sukhe ṭhita (i.e. being happy) at Vin iii.13 & S; v.351 (v.l. sukhe ṭhita); also at Dhp-a i.165; cp. Ja vi.219. -esin looking for pleasure Dhp 341. -kāma longing for happiness MN i.341; SN iv.172, SN iv.188. -da giving pleasure Snp 297 -dhamma a good state MN i.447. -nisinna comfortably seated Ja iv.125. -paṭisaṃvedin experiencing happiness Pp 61. -ppatta come to well-being, happy Ja iii.112 -pharaṇatā diffusion of well-being, ease Ne 89 (among the constituents of samādhi). -bhāgiya participating in happiness Ne 120 sq., 125 sq., 239 (the four s. dhammā are indriyasaṃvara, tapasaṃkhāta puññadhamma, bojjhangabhāvanā and sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggasankhāta nibbāna). -bhūmi a soil of ease, source of ease Dhs 984; Dhs-a 346. -yānaka an easy-going cart Dhp-a 325 -vinicchaya discernment of happiness MN iii.230 sq -vipāka resulting in happiness, ease DN i.51; AN i.98; DN-a i.158. -vihāra dwelling at ease SN v.326. -vihārin dwelling at ease, well at ease DN i.75; Dhs 163; Ja i.140 -saṃvāsa pleasant to associate with Dhp 207. -saññin conceiving happiness, considering as happiness AN ii.52 -samuddaya origin of bliss Iti 16, Iti 52. -samphassa pleasant to touch Dhs 648. -sammata deemed a pleasure Snp 760. -sayita well embedded (in soil), of seeds AN iii.404 = DN ii.354.
Vedic sukha; in R. V. only of ratha; later generally
luxurious living Vin i.1012 (kāma-˚). See under kāma˚.
same in BSk.
to be pleased Ja ii.31 (asukhāyamāna being displeased with).
Denom. fr. sukha
happy, blest, glad SN i.52; SN iii.11 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); iv.180; Snp 1029; Pv ii.811; healthy Mvu 37, Mvu 128; ˚-atta [ātman happy, easy Snp 145.
pp. of sukheti
(adj.) happy, at ease DN i.31, DN i.73, DN i.108; AN ii.185; SN i.20, SN i.170; SN iii.83; Dhp 177; Snp 145; being well, unhurt Ja iii.541; fem. -nī DN ii.13; MN ii.126.
fr. sukha
(adj.) subtle, minute Vin i.14; DN i.182; SN iv.202; AN ii.171; Dhs 676; Thig 266; Dhp 125 = Snp 662; Vism 274, Vism 488 (˚rūpā). fine, exquisite DN ii.17, DN ii.188; Mil 313; susukhuma, very subtle Thag 71 = Thag 210 (˚-nipuṇattha-dassin); cp. sokhumma; khoma-˚, kappāsa-˚, kambala-˚ (n.?) the finest sorts of linen, cotton stuff, woolwork (resp.) Mil 105 ■ Der sokhumma.
-acchika fine-meshed DN i.45; DN-a i.127; Ap 21 (jāla) -diṭṭhi subtle view Iti 75. -dhāra with fine edge Mil 105.
Epic Sk. sūkṣma
= sukhuma Pts i.185.
(nt.) fineness, delicacy DN ii.17 sq.
abstr. fr. sukhuma
(adj.) tender, delicate, refined, delicately nurtured AN i.145; AN ii.86 sq.; AN iii.130; Vin i.15, Vin i.179; Vin ii.180; beautifully young, graceful Ja i.397; Snp 298; samaṇa-˚ a soft, graceful Samaṇa AN ii.87; fem. sukhumālinī Thig 217; Mil 68, & sukhumālī Ja vi.514.
cp. Sk. su-kumāra
(f.) delicate constitution Ja v.295; Dhp-a iii.283 (ati˚).
abstr. fr. sukhumāla
to make happy DN i.51; SN iv.331; DN-a i.157; also sukhayati Dhs-a 117; Caus. II. sukhāpeti DN ii.202; Mil 79 ■ pp. sukhita.
Caus. fr. sukha
faring well, happy, having a happy life after death (gati): see under gata; cp. Vism 424 (s. sugati-gata). Freq. Ep. of the Buddha (see Dict. of Names).
-aṅgula a Buddha-inch, an inch according to the standard accepted by Buddhists Vin iv.168. -ālaya imitation of the Buddha Ja i.490, Ja i.491; Ja ii.38, Ja ii.148, Ja ii.162 Ja iii.112. -ovāda a discourse of the Blessed one Ja i.119 Ja i.349; Ja ii.9, Ja ii.13, Ja ii.46; Ja iii.368. -vidatthi a Buddha-span, a span of the accepted length Vin iii.149; Vin iv.173. -vinaya the discipline of the Buddha AN ii.147.
su + gata
(f.) happiness, bliss, a happy fate (see detail under gati ) Vin ii.162, Vin ii.195; DN i.143; DN ii.141 Pp 60; Iti 24, Iti 77, Iti 112; AN iii.5, AN iii.205; AN v.268; Vism 427 (where defd as “sundarā gati” & distinguished fr; sagga as including “manussagati,” whereas sagga is “devagati”); Vb-a 158; Dhp-a i.153 ■ suggati (in verses), Dhp 18; DN ii.202 (printed as prose); Ja iv.436 (= sagga C.); vi.224. Kern, Toev. ii.83 expld suggati as svargati, analogous to svar-ga (= sagga); doubtful Cp. duggati.
su + gati
(adj.) righteous Dhp 126; Ja i.219 = Vin ii.162 (suggatī).
fr. sugati
(m. and nt.) 1. toll, tax, customs Vin iii.52; Vin iv.131; AN i.54 sq.; Dhp-a ii.2; Ja iv.132; Ja vi.347; Pv-a iii.
2. gain, profit Thig 25 Thag-a 32.
3. purchase-price of a wife Thig 420; Ja vi.266; Mil 47 sq ■ odhisunka stake Ja vi.279 ˚-gahana Ja v.254; a-suṃkâraha Ja v.254.
-ghāta customs’ frontier Vin iii.47, Vin iii.52. -ṭṭhāna taxing place, customs’ house Vin iii.62; Mil 359 -sāyika (?) customs’ officer Mil 365 (read perhaps ˚sādhaka or ˚sālika?).
cp. Vedic śulka, nt.
a receiver of customs Ja v.254.
sunka + ika
(nt.) price paid for a wife Ja vi.266.
abstr. fr. sunka
(adj.) pure, clean, white DN i.4; AN i.293; Snp 226, Snp 410 ■ opp. asuci impure AN iii.226; AN v.109 AN v.266 ■ (nt.) purity, pure things Ja i.22; goodness, merit Dp 245; a tree used for making foot-boards Vv-a 8.
-kamma whose actions are pure Dhp 24. -gandha having a sweet perfume Dhp 58; Dhp-a i.445. -gavesin longing for purity SN i.205; Dhp-a iii.354. -ghaṭika read sūcighaṭikā at Vin ii.237. -ghara Vin ii.301 sq.; see sūcighara. -jātika of clean descent Ja ii.11. -bhojana pure food Snp 128. -mhita having a pleasant, serene smile Vv 1810; 5025; 6412; Vv-a 96, Vv-a 280 (also explained as a name); Ja iv.107. -vasana wearing clean, bright clothes Snp 679.
Vedic śuci
(adj.) pure, an epithet of the Buddha AN iv.340.
suci + mant
(f.) a sacrificial ladle DN i.120, DN i.138; SN i.169; DN-a i.289, DN-a i.299.
Vedic sruc, f.
to become clean or pure MN i.39; SN i.34, SN i.166; Nd i.85; Vism 3; cp. pari˚ ■ pp. suddha -Caus. sodheti (q.v.).
śudh which the Dhtp (417) defines as “soceyye,” i.e. from cleansing
(nt.) purification Vism 44.
fr. sujjhati
(adj.) 1. empty, uninhabited DN i.17; DN ii.202; SN i.180; SN iv.173; DN-a i.110; Mil 5.
2. empty, devoid of reality, unsubstantial, phenomenal MN i.435; SN iii.167; SN iv.54, SN iv.296; Snp 1119; Nd i.439 (loka).
3. empty, void, useless MN i.483; SN iv.54, SN iv.297; Dāvs v.17; Mil 96; Vism 594 sq. (of nāmarūpa, in simile with suñña dāruyanta) suññasuñña empty of permanent substance Pts ii.178 asuñña not empty Mil 130 ■ nt. suññaṃ emptiness annihilation, Nibbāna Vism 513 (three nirodha-suññāni); abl. ˚to from the point of view of the “Empty Nd ii.680 (long exegesis of suññato at Snp 1119); Vism 512 Vb-a 89, Vb-a 261; Kp-a 74.
-āgāra an empty place, an uninhabited spot, solitude Vin i.97, Vin i.228; Vin ii.158, Vin ii.183; Vin iii.70, Vin iii.91 sq.; DN i.175; DN ii.86 DN ii.291, MN i.33; SN iv.133, SN iv.359 sq.; AN iii.353; AN iv.139, AN iv.392 AN iv.437; AN v.109, AN v.207, AN v.323 sq.; Iti 39; Ja iii.191; Mil 344 Vism 270; Nd ii.94. -gāma an empty (deserted) village (in similes) Vism 484; Vb-a 48; Dhs 597; Dhs-a 309 ˚tthāna Vism 353; Vb-a 57.
cp. Sk. śūnya, fr. Vedic śūna, nt., void
(adj.) void, empty, devoid of lusts, evil dispositions, and karma, but especially of soul, ego Thig 46; Thag-a 50; Dhs 344; Mvu 37, Mvu 7; nibbāna Dhs-a 221; phassa SN iv.295; vimokkha Dhp 92; Dhp-a ii.172; Mil 413 vimokkha samādhi, and samāpatti Vin iii.92 sq. Vin iv.25 sq.; samādhi (contemplation of emptiness, see Cpd. 216) DN iii.219 (one of. three samādhis); SN iv.360 SN iv.363; Mil 337; anupassanā Pts ii.43 sq.
i.e. the abl. suññato used as adj. nom.
(f.) emptiness, “void,” unsubstantiality, phenomenality; freedom from lust, ill-will and dullness, Nibbāna MN iii.111; Kv 232; Dhs-a 221; Ne 118 sq., 123 sq., 126; Mil 16; Vism 333 (n’atthi; suñña; vivitta; i, e. abhāva, suññatā, vivitt’ ākāra), 578 (12 fold, relating to the Paṭiccasamuppāda) 653 sq.; Vb-a 262 (atta˚, attaniya˚, niccabhāva˚).
-pakāsana the gospel of emptiness DN-a i.99, DN-a i.123; -paṭisaṃyutta relating to the Void, connected with Nibbāna AN i.72 = AN iii.107 = SN ii.267; DN-a i.100 sq.; Mil 16 -vihāra dwelling in the concept of emptiness Vin ii.304; MN iii.104, MN iii.294. See on term e.g. Cpd. 69; Kvu trsln 142, n. 4.
abstr. fr. suñña
(nt.) emptiness, the state of being devoid Dhs-a 221.
abstr. fr. suñña
(indecl.) well; the usual C. expln of the prefix su2 Pv-a 19, Pv-a 51, Pv-a 52, Pv-a 58, Pv-a 77, Pv-a 103 etc. s. tāta well, father Ja i.170; s. kataṃ you have done well Ja i.287; DN-a i.297; suṭṭhutaraṃ still more Ja i.229; Snp-a 418.
cp. Sk. suṣṭhu, fr. su˚
(f.) excellence AN i.98 sq.; Ne 50.
abstr. fr. suṭṭhu
“dog,” preferable spelling for suna, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 931.
(suṇoti) to hear. Pres. suṇāti DN i.62, DN i.152; SN v.265; Snp 696; Iti 98; Mil 5 ■ suṇoti Ja iv.443; Pot. suṇeyya Vin i.7; DN i.79; suṇe Ja iv.240; Imper. suṇa SN iii.121; sunāhi Snp p.21; suṇohi DN i.62; Snp 997; Snp 3rd sg. suṇātu Vin i.56; Vin i.1st pl. suṇāma Snp 354; suṇoma Snp 350, Snp 988, Snp 1110; Pv iv.131.
2nd pl. suṇātha DN i.131; DN ii.76; Iti 41; Snp 385; Pv-a 13. suṇotha Snp 997; Mil 1.
3rd pl suṇantu Vin i.5 ■ ppr. sunanto Snp 1023; DN-a i.261 savaṃ Ja iii.244 ■ inf. sotuṃ DN ii.2; Snp 384; suṇitum Mil 91 ■ Fut. sossati DN ii.131, DN ii.265; Ja ii.107; Ja ii.63 Ap 156; Vv-a 187; Vv-a 1st sg. sussaṃ Snp 694.
2nd sg. sossi Ja vi.423 ■ aor. 1st sg. assuṃ Ja iii.572.
2nd sg. assu Ja iii.541.
3rd sg. suṇi Ja iv.336; assosi DN i.87, DN i.152 Snp p.103; Snp p.1st pl. assumha Ja ii.79.
2nd pl. assuttha SN i.157; SN ii.230. 3rd pl. assosuṃ Vin i.18; DN i.111. ger. sutvā Vin i.12; DN i.4; Snp 30. sutvāna Vin i.19; DN ii.30; Snp 202. suṇitvā Ja v.96; Mvu 23, Mvu 80. suṇiya Mvu 23, Mvu 101 ■ Pass. sūyati MN i.30; Ja i.72, Ja i.86; Mil 152. suyyati Ja iv.141; Ja iv.160; Ja v.459. 3rd pl. sūyare Ja vi.528 ■ Grd. savanīya what should be heard, agreeable to the ear DN ii.211. sotabba DN i.175; DN ii.346. pp. suta: see separately ■ Caus. sāveti to cause to hear to tell, declare, announce Ja i.344; Mvu 5, Mvu 238; Pv-a 200; Vv-a 66. nāmaṃ s. to shout out one’s name Vin i.36; DN-a i.262; maṃ dāsī ti sāvaya announce me to be your slave Ja iii.437; cp. Ja iv.402 (but see on this passage and on Ja iii.198; Ja vi.486 Kern’s proposed reading sāṭeti ); to cause to be heard, to play DN ii.265. Caus also suṇāpeti Dhp-a i.206 ■ Desiderative sussūsati (often written sussūyati) DN i.230; MN iii.133 (text sussūsanti), AN iv.393 (do.) ■ ppr. sussusaṃ Snp 189 (var read., text sussussā); sussūsamāna Snp 383; aor. sussūsiṃsu Vin i.10; fut. sussūsissanti Vin i.150; SN ii.267 (text sussu-).
śru, Vedic śṛṇoti; cp. Gr. κλέω to praise; Lat. clueo to be called; Oir. clunim to hear; Goth hliup attention, hliuma hearing, and many others
(f.) a daughter-in-law Vin i.240; Vin iii.136; DN ii.148; MN i.186, MN i.253; Ja vi.498; Vv 135 (= puttassa bhariyā Vv-a 61); Dhp-a i.355; Dhp-a iv.8; Pv ii.46 (pl. suṇisāyo so read for sūtisāye) ■ suṇhā the same Vin ii.10; AN iv.91; Thig 406; Ja ii.347; Ja vi.506; Pv iv.3.43
Vedic snuṣā; cp. Gr. νυός; Ohg. snur; Ags. snoru; Lat. nurus
1. heard; in special sense “received through inspiration or revelation” learned; taught A 97 sq.; DN iii.164 sq., 241 sq.; freq in phrase “iti me sutaṃ” thus have I heard, I have received this on (religious) authority, e.g. Iti 22 sq. (nt.) sacred lore, inspired tradition, revelation; learning religious knowledge MN iii.99; AN i.210 sq.; AN ii.6 sq. SN iv.250; Ja ii.42; Ja v.450, Ja v.485; Mil 248 ■ appa-ssuta one who has little learning AN ii.6 sq., 218; iii.181 v.40, 152; bahu-ssuta one who has much learning famous for inspired knowledge AN ii.6 sq.; AN iii.113 sq. 182 sq., 261 sq.; SN ii.159. See bahu. asuta not heard Vin i.238; Pv iv.161; Ja iii.233; also as assuta Ja i.390 (˚pubba never heard before); iii.233 ■ na suta pubbaṃ a thing never heard of before Ja iii.285. dussuta MN i.228; sussuta MN iii.104.
2. renowned Ja ii.442.
-ādhāra holding (i.e. keeping in mind, preserving) the sacred learning Ja iii.193; Ja vi.287. -kavi a Vedic poet a poet of sacred songs AN ii.230. -dhana the treasure of revelation DN iii.163, DN iii.251; AN iii.53; AN iv.4 sq.; Vv-a 113 -dhara remembering what has been heard (or taught in the Scriptures) AN ii.23 (+ ˚sannicaya); iii.152, 261 sq -maya consisting in learning (or resting on sacred tradition), one of the 3 kinds of knowledge (paññā) viz. cintā-mayā, s ■ m., bhāvanā-mayā paññā DN iii.219 Vb 324 (expld at Vism 439); as ˚mayī at Pts i.4, Pts i.22 sq. Ne 8, Ne 50, Ne 60. -ssava far-renowned (Ep. of the Buddha Snp 353.
pp. of suṇāti; cp. Vedic śruta
son Mvu 1, Mvu 47; fem. sutā daughter, Thig 384.
Sk. suta, pp. of sū (or su ) to generate
(nt.) the fact of having heard or learnt Snp-a 166.
abstr. fr. suta1
(adj.) easily contented AN i.87; Pp 26 (opp. dut˚).
su + grd. of tappati2
(adj.) one who is learned in religious knowledge Vin i.14; AN ii.178; AN iii.55; AN iv.68, AN iv.157; SN iii.57; Tikp 279; Snp 70 (= āgama-sampanna Snp-a 124) 90, 371; sutavanta-nimmita founded by learned, pious men Mil 1; assutavant, unlearned MN i.1 (˚vā puthujjano laymen); Dhs 1003; AN iii.54; AN iv.157.
suta1 + vant
(f.) 1. hearing, tradition, inspiration, knowledge of the Vedas Snp 839, Snp 1078; Mil 3 (+ sammuti); Mvu 1, Mvu 3. 2. rumour; sutivasena by hearsay, as a story, through tradition Ja iii.285, Ja iii.476; Ja vi.100.
3. a sound, tone Vv-a 139 (dvāvīsati suti-bhedā 22 kinds of sound).
cp. śruti revelation as opp. to smṛti tradition
(adj.) easy to endure Ja 524.
fr. su + titikkhā
asleep Vin iii.117; Vin v.205; DN i.70; DN ii.130; Dhp 47; Iti 41; Ja v.328 ■ (nt.) sleep DN ii.95; MN i.448; SN iv.169. In phrase ˚-pabuddha “awakened from sleep” referring to the awakening (entrance) in the deva-world, e.g. Vism 314 (brahmalokaṃ uppajjati) Dhp-a i.28 (kanaka-vimāne nibbatti); iii.7 (id.); cp SN i.143.
pp. of supati
(nt.) 1. a thread, string DN i.76; DN ii.13; Vin ii.150; Pv ii.111 (= kappāsiyā sutta Pv-a 146); Ja i.52 ■ fig. for taṇhā at Dhs 1059; Dhs-a 364 ■ kāḷa˚; a carpenter’s measuring line Ja ii.405; Mil 413; dīgha˚; with long thread Ja v.389; makkaṭa˚ spider’s thread Vism 136; yantā˚; string of a machine Vb-a 241 ■ Mentioned with kappāsa as barter for cīvara at Vin iii.216.
2. the (discursive, narrational part of the Buddhist Scriptures containing the suttas or dialogues, later called Sutta-piṭaka (cp. Suttanta) As such complementary to the Vinaya. The fanciful expln of the word at Dhs-a 19 is: “atthānaṃ sūcanto suvuttato savanato ‘tha sūdanato suttāṇā-sutta-sabhāgato ca suttaṃ Suttan ti akkhātaṃ.”-D ii.124; Vin ii.97; Vb-a 130 (+ vinaya); Snp-a 159, Snp-a 310 (compared with Vinaya & Abhidhamma).
3. one of the divisions of the Scriptures (see; navanga ) AN ii.103, AN ii.178; AN iii.177 AN iii.361 sq.; Mil 263.
4. a rule, a clause (of the Pātimokkha) Vin i.65, Vin i.68; Vin ii.68, Vin ii.95; Vin iii.327.
5. a chapter division, dialogue (of a Buddh. text), text, discourse (see also suttanta ) SN iii.221 (pl. suttā), 253; v.46; Ne 118; Dhs-a 28. suttaso chapter by chapter AN v.72, AN v.81 suttato according to the suttas Vism 562 = Vb-a 173
6. an ancient verse, quotation Ja i.288, Ja i.307, Ja i.314. 7. book of rules, lore, text book Ja i.194 (go˚ lore of cows); ii.46 (hatthi˚ elephant trainer’s handbook).
-anta 1. a chapter of the Scriptures, a text, a discourse a sutta, dialogue Vin i.140 sq., 169; ii.75 iii.159; iv.344; AN i.60, AN i.69, AN i.72; AN ii.147; SN ii.267 = AN iii.107 (suttantā kavi-katā kāveyyā citt’akkharā cittavyañjanā bāhirakā sāvaka-bhāsitā); Vism 246 sq. (three suttantas helpful for kāyagatā sati).
2. the Suttantapiṭaka, opp. to the Vinaya Vism 272 (˚aṭṭhakathā opp to Vinay’aṭṭhakathā). As ˚piṭaka e.g. at Kp-a 12 Vb-a 431. See Proper Names. -kantikā (scil. itthi a woman spinner Pv-a 75; as ˚kantī at Ja ii.79. -kāra a cotton-spinner Mil 331. -guḷa a ball of string DN i.54; MN iii.95; Pv iv.329; Pv-a 145. -jāla a web of thread, a spider’s web Nd ii.260. -bhikkhā begging for thread Pv-a 145. -maya made of threads, i.e. a net Snp-a 115 Snp-a 263. -rajjuka a string of threads Vism 253; Vb-a 236 -lūkha roughly sewn together Vin i.287, Vin i.297. -vāda a division of the Sabbatthavādins Dpvs 5, 48; Mvu 5, Mvu 6 Mhbv 97. -vibhaṅga classification of rules Vin ii.97 Also title of a portion of the Vinaya Piṭaka.
Vedic sūtra, fr. sīv to sew
(nt.) a string Vin ii.271; Pv-a 145; a string of jewels or beads Vin ii.106; Vin iii.48; Dhs-a 321 a term for lust Dhs-a 364.
fr. sutta
versed in the Suttantas. A suttantika bhikkhu is one who knows the Suttas (contrasted with vinayadhara who knows the rules of the Vinaya) Vin ii.75 Cp. dhamma C 1 & piṭaka ■ Vin i.169; Vin ii.75, Vin ii.161 Vin iii.159; Ja i.218; Mil 341; Vism 41, Vism 72, Vism 93; Kp-a 151 -duka the Suttanta pairs, the pairs of terms occurring in the Suttantas Dhs 1296 sq.; -vatthūni the physical bases of spiritual exercise in the Suttantas Pts i.186.
(f.) in kuruvindakasutti a powder for rubbing the body Vin ii.107; see sotti.
cp. Sk. śukti, given as pearl-shell (Suśruta), and as a perfume
(f.) a good saying Sdhp 340, Sdhp 617.
Sk. sūkti
(?) beaten out, Mil 415 (with vv.ll. suthiketa, suphita & supita). Should we read su-poṭhita? Kern; Toev. ii.85 proposes su-pīta “well saturated” (with which cp. supāyita Ja iv.118, said of a sword).
(indecl.) a deictic (seemingly pleonastic) particle in combn with demonstr. pronouns and adverbs; untranslatable, unless by “even, just,” e.g. tapassī sudaṃ homi, lūkha ssudaṃ [sic] homi etc. MN i.77 = Ja i.390; cp. itthaṃ sudaṃ thus Snp p.59; tatra sudaṃ there Vin i.4, Vin i.34; Vin iv.108; DN i.87 DN ii.91; Iti 15; api ssudaṃ DN ii.264; SN i.119; api sudaṃ SN i.113; sā ssudam SN ii.255.
= Vedic svid, influenced by sma: see su3
(see detail under vaṇṇa 6) a Sūdra Vin ii.239; DN i.104; DN iii.81, DN iii.95 sq. (origin); MN i.384; AN i.162; AN ii.194; SN i.102; Pp 60; Snp 314; fem. suddī DN i.241; AN iii.226, AN iii.229; Vin iii.133.
cp. Vedic śūdra
1. clean, pure, Vin i.16; Vin ii.152; DN i.110; Snp 476.
2. purified, pure of heart MN i.39; Dhp 125, Dhp 412; Snp 90
3. simple, mere, unmixed, nothing but SN i.135; Dhs-a 72; Ja ii.252 (˚daṇḍaka just the stick).
-antaparivāsa a probation of complete purification Vin ii.59 sq. -ājīva clean livelihood Vb-a 116; Dhp-a iv.111. -ājīvin living a pure life Dp 366. -ānupassin considering what is pure Snp 788; Nd i.85. -āvāsa pure abode, name of a heaven and of the devas inhabiting it DN ii.50; Vism 392. Five are enumd at DN iii.237 viz. Avihā, Atappā, Sudassā, Sudassī, Akaniṭṭhā; cp MN iii.103. -āvāsakāyika belonging to the pure abode epithet of the Suddhāvāsa devas Vin ii.302; DN ii.253; SN i.26. -pīti whose joy is pure Mvu 29, Mvu 49. -buddhi of pure intellect Ja i.1. -vaṃsatā purity of lineage Mvu 59, Mvu 25. -vasana wearing pure clothes Thig 338 Thag-a 239. -vālukā white sand Mvu 19, Mvu 37. -saṅkhārapuñja a mere heap of sankhāras SN i.135.
pp. of sujjhati
(nt.) a trifle, a minor offence, less than a Sanghādisesa Vin ii.67.
suddha + ka
(f.) purity Snp 435.
abstr. fr. suddha
(nt.) purity DN ii.14; Vism 44.
abstr. fr. suddha
(f.) purity, purification, genuineness, sterling quality DN i.54; MN i.80; MN ii.132, MN ii.147; SN i.166, SN i.169 SN i.182; SN iv.372; Thig 293; Dhp-a iii.158 (v.l. visuddhi) Vv-a 60 (payoga˚); Vism 43 (fourfold: desanā˚, saṃvara˚ pariyeṭṭhi˚, paccavekkhaṇa˚); Dhs 1005; Snp 478 suddhiṃvada stating purity, Snp 910; Nd i.326; suddhināya leading to purity Snp 910. Cp. pari˚, vi˚.
-magga the path of purification (cp. visuddhi˚) SN i.103.
fr. śudh
(adj.) 1. connected with purification Dhs 519–522; udaka-s. pure by use of water SN i.182; Vin i.196; udakasuddhikā (f.) cleaning by water Vin iv.262; susāna-s. fastidious in the matter of cemeteries Ja ii.54.
2. pure, simple; orthodox, schematized justified Nd i.89 (vatta˚); Vism 63 (ekato & ubhato), 64 (id.); Dhs-a 185 (jhāna).
suddhi + ka
(f.) 1. the food of the gods, ambrosia Ja v.396; Vism 258 = Kp-a 56 (sakkhara˚).
2. lime plaster, whitewash, cement Vin ii.154; ˚-kamma whitewashing coating of cement Ja vi.432; Mvu 38, Mvu 74.
cp. Sk. sudhā
swollen Vin ii.253; AN iv.275, AN iv.470.
Sk. śūna, pp. of śū to swell
a dog, also written suṇa Ja vi.353, Ja vi.357 (cp. sunakha).
Sk. śuna; see suvāṇa
a dog AN i.48; AN ii.122; Thig 509; Ja i.175, Ja i.189; Ja ii.128, Ja ii.246; Pv-a 151, Pv-a 206 ■ rukkha˚ some sort of animal Ja vi.538. fem. sunakhī a bitch Ja iv.400 ■ Names of some dogs in the Jātakas are Kaṇha (or Mahā˚) Ja iv.183; Caturakkha iii.535; Jambuka Pingiya ibid.; Bhattabhuñjana ii.246. Cp. suvāṇa.
cp. Sk. śunaka; the BSk. form is also sunakha, e.g. Mvu iii.361, Mvu iii.369
beautifully curled at the ends (of hair) Ja vi.86.
su + agga + vellita; perhaps originally suv-agga˚
(adj.) beautiful, good, nice, well Ja ii.11, Ja ii.98; Snp-a 410, Snp-a 493 (cp. parovara) It is very frequent as Commentary word, e.g. for prefix su˚; Pv-a 57, Pv-a 77; Vv-a 111; for subha Pv-a 14, Pv-a 44; for sādhu ṢnA 176; for sobhana Pv-a 49; for seyyo Pv-a 130.
cp. Epic & Class. Sk. sundara
“Fairwing” a kind of fairy bird, a mythical creature (cp. garuḷa), imagined as winged, considered as foe to the nāgas DN ii.259; SN i.148; Ja i.202; Ja ii.13, Ja ii.107; Ja iii.91, Ja iii.187, Ja iii.188; Ja vi.256, Ja vi.257 Vism 155 (˚rājā), 400; Nd i.92, Nd i.448; Dhp-a i.280; Pv-a 272; DN-a i.51; Mvu 14, Mvu 40; Mvu 19, Mvu 20. Four kinds SN iii.246.
Vedic suparṇa
(suppati, soppati ) to sleep; supati Snp 110; Ja ii.61 (sukhaṃ supati he sleeps well); v.215; Pv ii.938; suppati SN i.107; soppati SN i.107, SN i.110; Pot. supe SN i.111; ppr supanto Vin i.15; ppr. med. suppamāna Ja iii.404; aor supi Mil 894; Vin ii.78; Pv-a 195 (sukhaṃ); inf. sottuṃ SN i.111; pp. supita; also sutta1 & sotta;.
svap; Vedic svapiti & svapati; svapna sleep or dream (see supina), with which cp. Gr. υ ̔́πνος sleep = Av. xvafna, Lat. somnus, Ags. swefn. Dhtp 481 “saye”
a dog DN ii.295 = MN i.58, MN i.88; Snp 201; Mil 147. Spelt supāna at Ja iv.400.
= suvāṇa
J iv.118 (read: supāyita ). See under su˚.
sleeping; (nt.) sleep SN i.198 (ko attho supitena) = Snp 331; Snp-a 338; Pv ii.61 (so read for supina?).
pp. of supati
(m. & nt.) a dream, vision DN i.9, DN i.54; SN i.198; SN iv.117 (supine in a dream; v.l. supinena); Snp 360, Snp 807, Snp 927 Nd i.126; Ja i.334 sq., 374; v.42; DN-a i.92, DN-a i.164; Vv 4414 Vb-a 407 (by 4 reasons), 408 (who has dreams); Dhp-a i.215. The five dreams of the Buddha AN iii.240; Ja i.69 dussupina an unpleasant dream Ja i.335; Pv-a 105 (of Ajātasattu); maṅgala˚; a lucky dream Ja vi.330; mahā˚ṃ passati to have (lit. see) a great vision Ja i.336 sq (the 16 great visions); ˚ṃ ādisati to tell a dream Nd i.381- Supina at Pv ii.61 read supita.
-anta [anta pleonastic, cp. Thag-a 258 “supinam eva supinantaṃ”] a dream; abl. ˚ante in a dream Thig 394; Ja v.328 (spelt suppante; C. sopp˚; expld as “supinena”) instr. ˚antena id. Vin ii.125; Vin iii.112; Ja v.40; Ja vi.131 Thag-a 258; Kp-a 175; Snp-a 80. -pāṭhaka a dream-teller astrologer Nd i.381. -sattha science of dream-telling oneiromantics Snp-a 564.
Vedic svapna; the contracted P. form is soppa
a dream Vin ii.25; DN ii.333; MN i.365; Ja v.354; DN-a i.92.
supina + ka
read Mil 415 for suthita (Kern’s suggestion). See under su˚.
well beaten; perhaps at Mil 415 for suthita (said of iron); (nt.) a good thrashing Dhp-a i.48.
su + poṭhita
a winnowing basket Ud 68; Ja i.502; Ja ii.428; Vism 109 (+ sarāva), 123; Mil 282; Dhp-a i.174 (kattara˚); ii.131; Mvu 30, Mvu 9. ˚-ka a toy basket, little sieve Dhs-a 321 (+ musalaka).
cp. Vedic śūrpa
(f.) in mugga-s. pea-soup talk, sugared words Mil 370. See under mugga.
fr. sūpa
see under soppa.
at Ja v.408 is doubtful in spelling & meaning. Perhaps to be read; “suplavantaṃ” gliding along beautifully; C. expld as “sukhena plavan’atthaṃ.”
(adj.) compliant, meek AN iii.180. See also suvaca (under su˚). Der. sovacassa.
su + vaca
(adj.) having beautiful eyebrows Ja iv.18 (= subhamukhā C.).
su + bhū, Sk. bhrū, see bhūkuṭi
(adj.) shining, bright, beautiful DN i.76 = DN ii.13 = MN iii.102; Dhs 250; DN-a i.221; auspicious, lucky, pleasant Snp 341; Iti 80 good Snp 824, Snp 910; subhato maññati to consider as a good thing Snp 199; Ja i.146; cp. SN iv.111; (nt.) welfare good, pleasantness, cleanliness, beauty, pleasure ■ vasena for pleasure’s sake Ja i.303, Ja i.304; asubha anything repulsive disgusting or unpleasant SN i.188; SN v.320; subhâsubha pleasant and unpleasant Mil 136; Ja iii.243 (niraya = subhānaṃ asubhaṃ unpleasant for the good C.); cp. below subhāsubha.
-aṅgana with beautiful courts Ja vi.272. -āsubha good and bad, pleasant & unpleasant Dhp 409 = Snp 633.; -kiṇṇa the lustrous devas, a class of devas DN ii.69; MN i.2. 329 390; iii.102; AN i.122; Ja iii.358; Kv 207; also written ˚kiṇha AN ii.231, AN ii.233; AN iv.40, AN iv.401; Vism 414, Vism 420 sq. Vb-a 520; Kp-a 86. -gati going to bliss, to heaven Mvu 25, Mvu 115. -ṭṭhāyin existing or remaining, continuing in glory DN i.17; DN-a i.110; AN v.60. -dhātu the element of splendour SN ii.150. -nimitta auspicious sign auspiciousness as an object of one’s thought MN i.26; AN i.3, AN i.87, AN i.200; SN v.64, SN v.103; Vism 20. -saññā perception or notion of what is pleasant or beautiful Ne 27 Opp. asubhasaññā concept of repulsiveness AN i.42 AN ii.17; AN iii.79; AN iv.46; AN v.106. See asubha ■ saññin considering as beautiful AN ii.52.
Vedic śubhas fr. subh; cp. sobhati
(adj.) lucky; ˚karaṇa making happy or beloved (by charms) DN i.11; DN-a i.96 ■ Der. sobhagga
su + bhaga
the great-flowered jasmine Ja i.62; Ja iv.455; Dhp-a iv.12. In composition sumana˚.
-dāma a wreath of jasmine Ja iv.455. -paṭṭa cloth with jasmine pattern Ja i.62. -puppha j. flower Mil 291; Vv-a 147. -makula a j. bud Dhp-a iii.371. -mālā garland of j. Vv-a 142.
see sarati2.
(& sumhati) to push, throw over, strike Ja iii.185 (sumh˚); vi.549. pp. sumbhita ■ Cp. ā˚, pari˚.
; sumbh (?), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 60, 128. The Dhtm (306 & 548) only says “saṃsumbhane.” The BSk. form is subhati Mvu i.14
knocked over, fallen (over) Pv-a 174.
pp. of sumbhati
is Passive of suṇāti.
god Snp 681 (= deva Snp-a 484); name of a Bodhisatta Ja v.12, Ja v.13 surakaññā a goddess, a heavenly maid Ja v.407 (= devadhītā, C.); surinda the king of gods Mhbv 28. Opp asura.
cp. Epic Sk. sura probably after asura
(adj.) (in good sense:) well-loving, devoted: see soracca; (in bad sense:) sexual intercourse thus wrongly for soracca at Ja iii.442 C., with expln as “dussīlya.” Cp. sūrata.
su + rata
(f.) spirituous (intoxicating) liquor (“drink”) Vin ii.295; Vin ii.301; Vin iv.110; DN i.146; AN i.212 AN i.295; Iti 63; Ja i.199, Ja i.252 (tikhiṇaṃ suraṃ yojetvā mixing a sharp drink); Dhp-a ii.9; Dhp 247; as nt. at Ja vi.23 (v.l. surā as gloss) ■ Five kinds of surā are mentioned viz. piṭṭha˚, pūva˚, odana˚ (odaniya˚), kiṇṇapakkhitta˚ sambhāra-saṃyutta˚ Vv-a 73; Vb-a 381.
-ādhiṭṭhaka addicted to drink Ja v.427. -geha a drinking house Ja i.302. -ghaṭa a pitcher of liquor Ja iii.477. -ghara = ˚geha Ja v.367. -chaṇa a drinking festival Ja i.489; Dhp-a iii.100. -dhutta a drunkard Snp 106; Ja i.268; Ja iii.260. -nakkhatta a drinking festival Ja 362; Snp-a 185. -pāna drinking strong liquor Ja i.50 Ja iv.23; Vb-a 383. -pāyikā a woman drinking liquor Ja v.11. -pipāsita thirsty after strong drink SN ii.110 -pīta one who has drunk liquor Ja i.426. -mada tipsiness intoxication AN iv.213; Ja i.352, Ja i.362. -meraya (-pāna (drinking) rum & spirits AN i.261; AN ii.53. See also (pañca-sikkhāpada. -vitthaka bowl for drinking spirits Ja v.427; Dhp-a iii.66. -soṇḍa a drunkard Dhp-a iii.129. -soṇḍaka id. Ja v.433.
Vedic surā
1. the sun Vin i.2; DN ii.319; Snp 687; AN i.227; SN v.29 sq. Ja ii.73; Vism 231 (in simile), 416 (the seventh sun), 417 (myth of pop. etym.), 690 (in sim.); Mil 299; Kp-a 21 (bāla˚, in simile); Pv-a 137, Pv-a 211; Vb-a 519; size of the sun Dhs-a 318; suriyaṃ uṭṭhāpeti to go on till sunrise Ja i.318.
2. the sun as a god DN ii.259; SN i.51; Ja iv.63 etc.; vi.89, 90, 201, 247, 263, etc.
-atthaṅgamana sunset Vv-a 295. -uggamana sunrise Mvu 23, Mvu 22; Ja i.107. -kanta the sun-gem, a kind of gem Mil 118. -ggāha eclipse of the sun DN i.10; Ja i.374. -maṇḍala the orb of the sun AN i.283; Dhs 617 -rasmi a sunbeam Ja i.502. -vattika a sun-worshipper Nd i.89.
Vedic sūrya cp. suvar light, heaven; Idg. *sāṷel, as in Gr. η ̔́λιος, Lat. sōl., Goth. sauil sun; Oir. sūil “eye” cp. also Gr. σέλας splendour, σελήνη moon, & many others, for which see Walde,; Lat. Wtb. s. v. sōl
(indecl.) a hissing sound (“suru”); surusuru-kārakaṃ (adv.) after the manner of making hissing sounds (when eating) Vin ii.214; Vin iv.197.
onamat.
a subterranean passage Mvu 7, Mvu 15.
a corruption of σϋριγς
(f.) a medicinal plant Vin i.201; cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.40.
cp. Sk. surasī, “basilienkraut” BR; fr. surasa
(f.) a kind of small deer Ja vi.437, Ja vi.438.
a parrot Ja i.324; Ja iv.277 sq.; Ja vi.421; Ja vi.431 sq. (the two: Pupphaka & Sattigumba); Dhp-a i.284 (˚rājā). fem. suvī Ja vi.421.
cp. Sk. śuka
of good colour, good, favoured, beautiful DN i.82; Dhs 223; Iti 99; AN iv.255; Pp 60; Ja i.226; suvaṇṇa (nt.) gold SN iv.325 sq.; Snp 48, Snp 686 Nd ii.687 (= jātarūpa); Kp-a 240; Vv-a 104; often together with hirañña Vin iii.16, Vin iii.48; DN ii.179; ˚-āni pl precious things Ja i.206 ■ Cp. soṇṇa.
-iṭṭhakā gilt tiles Dhp-a iii.29, Dhp-a iii.61; Vv-a 157. -kāra goldsmith DN i.78; MN ii.18; MN iii.243; AN i.253 sq.; Ja i.182 Ja v.438 sq.; Nd i.478; Vism 376 (in sim.); Dhp-a iii.340; Snp-a 15; Vb-a 222 (in sim.). -gabbha a safe (-room for gold Dhp-a iv.105. -guhā “golden cave,” Name of a cave Snp-a 66. -toraṇa gilt spire Vb-a 112. -paṭṭa a golden (writing) slab Ja iv.7; Snp-a 228, Snp-a 578; Dhp-a iv.89. -paṇaka a golden diadem Mil 210. -pabbata Name of a mountain Snp-a 358. -passa id. Snp-a 66. -pādukā golden slippers Vin i.15. -maya made of gold Ja i.146 -mālā golden garland Dhp-a i.388. -meṇḍaka a golden ram Dhp-a iii.364; Dhp-a iv.217; -bhiṅkāra a g. vase Mhbv 154 -bhūmi “gold-land,” Name of Cambodia Nd i.155. -rājahaṃsa golden-coloured royal mallard Ja i.342. -vaṇṇa gold-coloured (of the body of the Yathāgata) DN iii.143 DN iii.159; Ja ii.104; Ja iv.333; Dhp-a iii.113. -vīthi golden street (in Indra’s town) Ja v.386. -sivikā a g. litter Dhp-a iii.164 -haṃsa golden swan Ja i.207; Ja ii.353; Snp-a 277, Snp-a 349.
Sk. suvarṇa
(f.) beauty of colour or complexion Pp 34.
abstr. fr. suvaṇṇa
(& suvāna) a dog MN iii.91 (= supāṇa MN i.58); Ja vi.247 (the 2 dogs of hell: Sabala & Sāma); Vism 259 (= supāṇa Kp-a 58). As suvā˚; at Sdhp 379, Sdhp 408 ■ See also the var. forms san, suṇa suna, sunakha, supāṇa, soṇa.
-doṇi a dog’s (feeding) trough Vism 344, Vism 358; Vb-a 62. -piṇḍa a dog biscuit Vism 344. -vamathu dog’s vomit Vism 344 (= suvā-vanta Sdhp 379).
cp. Sk. śvan, also śvāna (f. śvānī): fr. Vedic acc. śuvānaṃ, of śvan. For etym. cp. Gr. κύων, Av. spā, Lat. canis, Oir. cū, Goth. hunds
easy to bring SN i.124 = Ja i.80.
su-v-ānaya
a master Snp 666.
metric for sāmin
see sve.
(nt.) a cemetery Vin i.15, Vin i.50; Vin ii.146; DN i.71; AN i.241; AN ii.210; Pp 59; Ja i.175; Nd i.466; Nd ii.342; Vism 76, Vism 180; Pv-a 80, Pv-a 92, Pv-a 163, Pv-a 195 sq āmaka-s. a place where the corpses are left to rot Ja i.61, Ja i.372; Ja vi.10; Dhp-a i.176. Cp. sosānika.
-aggi a cemetery fire Vism 54. -gopaka the cemetery keeper Dhp-a i.69. -vaḍḍhana augmenting the cemetery fit to be thrown into the cemetery Thig 380. Cp kaṭasi˚.
cp. Vedic śmaśāna
(adj.) employed in a cemetery Mvu 10, Mvu 91.
fr. last
(adj.-n..) perforated, full of holes, hollow Ja i.146; Snp 199; Ja i.172, Ja i.442; DN-a i.261; Mil 112; Vism 194 = Dhs-a 199; Kp-a 172; asusira Dhp-a ii.148 (Bdhgh for eka-ghaṇa). (nt.) a hole; Pv-a 62.
Sk. śuṣira
a boy, youngster, lad Vin iii.147 = Ja ii.284; Vv 6414 (= dahara C.); Snp 420; DN i.115; MN i.82; AN ii.22; Ja ii.57; ājānīya-susūpama MN i.445 read ājānīy-ass-ūpama (cp. Thag 72) ■ In phrase susukāḷa the susu is a double su˚, in meaning “very, very black” (see under kāḷa-kesa), e.g. DN i.115 = MN i.82; AN ii.22 = AN iii.66 = Ja ii.57; expld as suṭṭhu-kāḷa DN-a i.284- susunāga a young elephant DN ii.254.
cp. Sk. śiśu
the sound susu, hissing Ja iii.347 (cp. su and sū); Thag-a 189.
the name of a sort of water animal (alligator or seacow?) Ja vi.537 (plur. susū) = v.255 (kumbhīlā makasā susū).
(f.) an alligator Vin i.200; AN ii.123 (where id. p. at Nd ii.470 has suṃsumāra); MN i.459; Mil 196.
to be dried, to wither Snp 434; Ja i.503; Ja ii.424; Ja vi.5 (being thirsty); ppr. med. sussamāna Ja i.498; Snp 434; fut sussissati Ja i.48; ger. sussitvā Ja ii.5, Ja ii.339; Pv-a 152. Cp vissussati & sukkhati ■ Caus.; soseti (q.v.).
Vedic śuṣyati; śuṣ (= sosana Dhtp 457)
(adj.) wishing to hear or learn, obedient SN i.6; Ja iv.134.
to wish to hear, to listen, attend DN i.230; AN i.72; AN iv.393; aor. sussūsimsu Vin i.10; ppr. med. sussūsamāna Snp 383.
Desid. fr. suṇāti; Sk. śuśrūṣati
(f.) wish to hear, obedience, attendance DN iii.189; AN v.136; Thag 588; Snp 186; Ja iii.526; Mil 115.
Class. Sk. śuśrūṣā
(adj.) obedient, trusting Ja iii.525.
cp. Epic Sk. śuśrūṣin
(f.) happiness Ja iii.158.
sukha + tā
(adj.) satiated MN i.30; Ja i.266, Ja i.361; Ja v.384; Mil 249.
su + hita
(indecl.) an onomat. part. “shoo,” applied to hissing sounds: see su1. Also doubled: sū sū Dhp-a i.171 Dhp-a iii.352. Cp. sūkara & sūsūyati.;
the awn of barley etc. SN v.10, SN v.48; AN i.8.
cp. Sk. śūka
a hog, pig Vin i.200; DN i.5; AN ii.42 (kukkuṭa + ), 209; Iti 36; Ja i.197 (Muṇika); ii.419 (Sālūka); iii.287 (Cullatuṇḍila Mahā-tuṇḍila); Mil 118, Mil 267; Vb-a 11 (vara-sayane sayāpita) ■ f. sūkarī Ja ii.406 (read vañjha˚).
-antaka a kind of girdle Vin ii.136. -maṃsa pork AN iii.49 (sampanna-kolaka). -maddava is with Franke (Dīgha trsln 222 sq.) to be interpreted as “soft (tender boar’s flesh.” So also Oldenberg (Reden des B. 1922 100) & Fleet (;J.R.A.S. 1906, 656 & 881). Scarcely with Rh. D. (;Dial. ii.137, with note) as “quantity of truffles DN ii.127; Ud 81 sq.; Mil 175. -potaka the young of a pig Ja v.19. -sāli a kind of wild rice Ja vi.531 (v.l. sukasāli).
Sk. sūkara, perhaps as sū + kara; cp. Av. hū pig, Gr. ̔ϋς; Lat. sūs; Ags. sū = E. sow
a pig-killer, pork-butcher SN ii.257; AN ii.207; AN iii.303; Pp 56; Thig 242; Ja vi.111; Thag-a 204.
fr. sūkara; BSk. saukarika Divy 505
an informer, slanderer SN ii.257 (= pesuñña-kāraka C.); Snp 246. Cp. saṃ˚.
fr. sūc to point out
(nt.) indicating, exhibiting Dhtp 592 (for gandh ).
(f.) a needle Vin ii.115, Vin ii.117, Vin ii.177; SN ii.215 sq., 257; Ja i.111, Ja i.248 Vism 284 (in simile); a hairpin Thig 254; Ja i.9; a small door-bolt, a pin to secure the bolt MN i.126; Thig 116; Ja i.360; Ja v.294 (so for suci); Thag-a 117; cross-bar of a rail, railing [cp. BSk. sūcī Divy 221] DN ii.179.
-kāra a needle-maker SN ii.216. -ghaṭikā a small bolt to a door Vin ii.237; Ud 52; AN iv.206; Ja i.346 Ja vi.444; Vism 394. -ghara a needle case Vin ii.301 sq. Vin iv.123, Vin iv.167; SN ii.231; Ja i.170. -nāḷikā a needle-case made of bamboo Vin ii.116. -mukha “needle-mouthed, a mosquito Abhp 646; a sort of intestinal worm; ˚ā pāṇā (in the Gūthaniraya purgatory) MN iii.185. -loma needle-haired, having hair like needles SN ii.257; name of a Yakkha at Gayā SN i.207; Snp p.48; Snp-a 551; Vism 208. -vatta needle-faced, having a mouth like a needle Pgdp 55. -vāṇijaka a needle-seller SN ii.215.
cp. Sk. sūci; doubtful whether to sīv
(f.) 1. a needle; (fig.) hunger Pv ii.83; Pv-a 107.
2. a small bolt to a door Vin ii.120, Vin ii.148. sūcik’aṭṭha whose bones are like needles (?) Pv iii.23 Pv-a 180 (sūcigātā ti vā pāṭho. Vijjhanatthena sūcikā ti laddhanāmāya khuppipāsāya ajjhāpīḷitā. Sūcikaṇṭhā ti keci paṭhanti. Sūcichiddasadisā mukhadvārā ti attho).
fr. sūci
(adj.) upright Snp 143 = Kp ix.1 (= suṭṭhu uju Kp-a 236).
su + uju
(f.) a slaughter-house Ja vi.62; see sūnā.
a charioteer Ja iv.408; a bard, panegyrist Ja i.60; Ja v.258.
Sk. sūta
(nt.) a lying-in-chamber Ja iv.188; Ja vi.485; Vism 259 (Kp-a pasūti˚); Vb-a 33, Vb-a 242.
sūti + ghara
a cook DN i.51; SN v.149 sq.; Ja v.292; DN-a i.157; Vism 150 (in simile); Pv ii.937, 950. Sudaka = suda
Sk. sūda; for etym. see sādu
(cook) Ja v.507.
swollen Mil 35719; Ja vi.555; often wrongly spelt suna (q.v.) Vin ii.253 = AN iv.275 (cp. Leumann Gött. Anz., 1899, p. 595); Dhs-a 197 (suna-bhāva).
Sk. śūna
(f.) a slaughter-house Vin i.202; Vin ii.267; asisūnā the same Vin ii.26; MN i.130, MN i.143; also sūna Ja vi.111; and sūṇā Ja v.303; sūnāpaṇa Ja vi.111; sūnaghara Vin iii.59; sūna-nissita Vin iii.151; sūnakāraghara Vb-a 252.
Sk. sūnā
a son, child Mvu 38, Mvu 87.
Vedic sūnu, fr. sū, cp. sūti
broth, soup, curry Vin ii.77, Vin ii.214 sq. Vin iv.192; DN i.105; SN v.129 sq. (their var. flavours) AN iii.49 (aneka˚); Ja ii.66; Vism 343. samasūpaka with equal curry Vin iv.192. Also nt. Vin i.23921 (-āni) and f. sūpi Ja iv.352 (bidalasūpiyo); sūpavyañjanaka a vessel for curry and sauce Vin i.240.
-vyañjana curry Ja i.197.
Vedic sūpa, cp. Ags. sūpan = Ger. saufen; Ohg. sūf = soup
(adj.) with beautiful banks. Usually spelt su˚; as if su + patittha (see patittha), e.g. Vin iii.108; Ja vi.518, Ja vi.555 (= sobhana˚); DN ii.129; Ud 83; Pv ii.120 (= sundara-tittha Pv-a 77). But sū˚; at MN i.76, MN i.283 Ap 333.
su + upatittha, the latter = tittha, cp. upavana: vana
= su + upadhārita well-known Mil 10.
a cook DN-a i.157; Ja vi.62 (v.l.), 277.
sūpa + ika
(adj.) having curry, together with curry Ja iii.328.
fr. sūpa
(nt.) 1. belonging to soup, broth, soup MN i.448; SN iii.146.
2. curry DN ii.198 Nd ii.314; Dhp-a iv.209.
-paṇṇa curry leaf, curry stuff Vism 250 = Vb-a 233; Ja i.98, Ja i.99; -sāka a potherb for making curry Ja iv.445.
fr. sūpa = Sk. sūpya
is passive of suṇāti.
valiant, courageous SN i.21; Ja i.262, Ja i.320; Ja ii.119; (m.) a hero, a valiant man DN i.51 DN i.89; DN iii.59, DN iii.142, DN iii.145 sq; AN iv.107, AN iv.110; Snp 831; DA 157 250; (nt.) valour SN v.227, read sūriya.
-kathā a tale about heroes DN i.8; DN-a i.90. -kāka the valiant crow Dhp-a iii.352. -bhāva strength, valour Ja i.130; Vism 417 (in def. of suriya).
Vedic śūra, fr. śū
the sun Thag-a 150 (Ap v.90); Ja v.56.
Vedic sūra
soft, mild Ja vi.286; Mhbv 75; kindly disposed SN iv.305. Cp. surata & sorata;.
= surata
(adj.) wise Mvu 26, Mvu 23.
fr. sūra1
(nt.) valour SN v.227 (text, sūra); Ja i.282; Mil 4.
abstr. fr. sūra1
(m. and nt.) 1. a sharp-pointed instrument, a stake Thig 488; SN v.411; Pv iv.16; Vism 489 (in compar.), 646 (khadira˚, ayo˚, suvaṇṇa˚); Thag-a 288; Ja i.143, Ja i.326; sūle uttāseti to impale AN i.48; Ja i.326 Ja ii.443; Ja iv.29; appeti the same Ja iii.34; Ja vi.17, or āropeti Pv-a 220. ayasūla an iron stake Ja iv.29; Snp 667; cp. asi˚ & satti˚;.
2. a spit Ja i.211; roasted on a spit, roasted meat Ja iii.220; maṃsa˚; the same, or perhaps a spit with roasted meat Ja iii.52, Ja iii.220.
3. an acute, sharp pain Dhs-a 397; sūlā (f.) the same AN v.1105 Cp. defn of sūl as “rujā” at Dhtp 272.
-āropana impaling, execution Mil 197, Mil 290. -koṭi the point of the stake Dhp-a ii.240.
cp. Vedic śūla
(adj.) magnificent Mvu 28, Mvu 1.
su + uḷāra
to make a hissing sound “sū sū” (of a snake) Dhp-a ii.257 (v.l. susumāyati).
Denom. fr. sū
(pron.) = taṃ: see under sa2.
sprinkling Ja i.93 (suvaṇṇa-rasa-s.piñjara).
fr. sic, see siñcati
(nt.) a sandbank Dāvs i.32.
Sk. saikata
(f.) (?) Ja vi.536 (nīlapupphi-˚, C. nīlapupphīti ādikā pupphavalliyo).
(& sekkha) belonging to training, in want of training, imperfect Vin i.17, Vin i.248; Vin iii.24; Dhs 1016; one who has still to learn, denotes one who has not yet attained Arahantship DN ii.143; MN i.4, MN i.144; AN i.63; Pp 14; Iti 9 sq., 53, 71; Snp 970 Snp 1038 = SN ii.47; definition AN i.231; SN v.14, SN v.145, SN v.175 SN v.229 sq., 298, 327; Nd i.493 (sikkhatī ti sekkho, etc. = Nd ii.689; Vb-a 328. s. pāṭipadā the path of the student MN i.354; MN iii.76, MN iii.300; s. sīla the moral practice of the student AN i.219 sq.; AN ii.6, AN ii.86 sq.; asekha not to be trained, adept, perfect Vin i.62 sq.; Vin iii.24 Pp 14 (= arahant). See asekha.
-bala the strength of the disciple, of five kinds AN ii.150 -sammata esteemed to be under discipline, educated Vin iv.179.
cp. Sk. śaikṣa; fr. siks, sikkhati
(?) quick Ja vi.199 (v.l. sīghavant).
connected with training; s. dhamma rule of good breeding Vin iv.185 sq.
fr. sekha
(nt.) a jackal’s cry AN i.187 sq. (˚ṃ nadati); cp. sigālika.
fr. sigāla
sprinkling Ja vi.69; neg. asecanaka (q.v.).
fr. seceti
see siñcati.
= sa-icchā, Sdhp 249.
best, excellent DN i.18, DN i.99; SN iii.13; Snp 47, Snp 181, Snp 822, Snp 907; Dhp 1, Dhp 26; Ja i.443; Nd i.84 = Nd ii.502 (with syn.) Ja i.88; cp. seṭṭhatara Ja v.148.
-kamma excellent, pious deeds Mvu 59, Mvu 9. -sammata considered the best Ja iii.111.
foreman of a guild, treasurer, banker, “City man”, wealthy merchant Vin i.15 sq. 271 sq.; ii.110 sq., 157; SN i.89; Ja i.122; Ja ii.367 etc. Rājagaha˚ the merchant of Rājagaha Vin ii.154; Ja iv.37; Bārāṇasi˚ the merchant of Benares Ja i.242 Ja i.269; jana-pada-seṭṭhi a commercial man of the country Ja iv.37; seṭṭhi gahapati Vin i.273; SN i.92; there were families of seṭṭhis Vin i.18; Ja iv.62; ˚-ṭṭhāna the position of a seṭṭhi Ja ii.122, Ja ii.231; hereditary Ja i.231 Ja i.243; Ja ii.64; Ja iii.475; Ja iv.62 etc.; seṭṭhānuseṭṭhī treasurers and under-treasurers Vin i.18; see Vinaya Texts i.102.
fr. seṭṭha, Sk. śreṣṭhin
(nt.) the office of treasurer or (wholesale) merchant SN i.92.
abstr. fr. seṭṭhi
(f.) 1. a guild Vin iv.226; Ja i.267, Ja i.314; Ja iv.43; Dāvs ii.124; their number was eighteen Ja vi.22, Ja vi.427; Vb-a 466. ˚-pamukha the head of a guild Ja ii.12 (text seni-)
2. a division of an army Ja vi.583; ratha-˚ Ja vi.81, Ja vi.49 seṇimokkha the chief of an army Ja vi.371 (cp. senā and seniya).
Class. Sk. śreṇi in meaning “guild”; Vedic = row
(adj.) white DN ii.297 = MN i.58; Snp 689; AN iii.241; Vb-a 63 (opp kāḷa); Ja i.175; Pv-a 157, Pv-a 215. name of a mountain in the Himālayas SN i.67 = Mil 242; an elephant of King Pasenadi AN iii.345.
-aṅga white bodied Mvu 10, Mvu 54. -aṭṭhika lit. (having white bones, (suffering from) famine [cp. BSk. śvetāsthi Divy 131] Vin iii.6; Vin iv.23; SN iv.323; AN i.160; AN iv.279. f. mildew Vin ii.256; Ja v.401. -odaka clear (transparent water Pv ii.120. -kambala white blanket Ja iv.353 -kamma whitewashing Ja vi.432. -kuṭṭha white leprosy Ja v.69; Ja vi.196. -geru Name of a plant Ja vi.535. -cchatta a white parasol, an emblem of royalty DN ii.19; AN i.145; Ja i.177, Ja i.267; Pv-a 74; Dhp-a i.167; Dhp-a iii.120. -pacchāda with white covering SN iv.292 = Ud 76 = Dhs-a 397 -puppha “white-flowered,” Name of a tree (Vitex trifolia? Ja v.422 (= piyaka). -vārī (& ˚vārisa); names of plants or trees Ja vi.535, Ja vi.536.
Vedic śveta & śvitra; cp. Av. spaēta white; Lith. szaitýti to make light; Ohg. hwīz = E. white
(adj.) white, transparent DN ii.129; MN i.76, MN i.167, MN i.283.
seta + ka
a tree Ja vi.535; setacchakūṭa adj. Ja vi.539 (sakuṇa).
(f. ) a tree Ja vi.335.
?
to lie down, to sleep; (applied) to be in a condition, to dwell, behave etc ■ Pres. seti SN i.41, SN i.47, SN i.198 (kiṃ sesi why do you lie asleep? Cp. Pv ii.61); Ja i.141; Dhp 79 Dhp 168; Snp 200; Vv-a 42; sayati Vin i.57; Ja ii.53; DN-a i.261. Pot. sayeyya Pv ii.3,9 & saye Iti 120. ppr sayaṃ Iti 82, Iti 117; Snp 193; sayāna (med.) DN i.90; DN ii.292; MN i.57; Iti 117; Snp 1145; & semāna DN ii.24; MN i.88; SN i.121; Ja i.180; also sayamāna Thag 95 ■ Fut sessati SN i.83; Snp 970; Dhp-a i.320 ■ Aor. sesi Ja v.70 settha Snp 970; sayi Ja vi.197, asayittha Ja i.335 ■ Inf sayituṃ Pv-a 157; ger. sayitvā Ja ii.77 ■ pp. sayita (q.v.) ■ Caus. II. sayāpeti to make lie down, to bed on a couch etc. Ja i.245; Ja v.461; Mvu 31, Mvu 35; Pv-a 104-pp. sayāpita ■ sukhaṃ seti to be at ease or happy SN i.212; Ja v.242 (raṭṭhaṃ i.e. is prosperous); opp dukkhaṃ s. to be miserable AN i.137.
śī, Vedic śete & śayate; cp. Av. saēte = Gr. κεϊται to lie, ὠ κεανός (“ocean”) = Sk. ā-śayānah, κοιμάω to put to sleep; Ags. hāēman to marry; also Lat cīvis = citizen. The Dhtp simply defines as saya (374).
a causeway bridge Vin i.230 = DN ii.89, Ja i.199; Vism 412 (simile) Dhp-a i.83; Snp-a 357; Pv-a 102, Pv-a 151, Pv-a 215. uttāra˚- a bridge for crossing over MN i.134; SN iv.174; Mil 194 naḷa-˚; a bamboo bridge Thag 7.
-kāraka a bridge-maker, one who paves the way SN i.33; Kv 345. -ghāta pulling down of the bridge (leading to something) Vin i.59; Vin iii.6; AN i.220, AN i.261 AN ii.145 sq.; Dhs 299; Dhs-a 219; DN-a i.305; Nd ii.462; Dhp-a iv.36.
Vedic setu, to si or sā (see sinoti); cp. Av. haētu dam; Lat. saeta; Ags. sāda rope; etc.
sweat DN ii.293; AN ii.67 sq. Iti 76; Snp 196; Ja i.118, Ja i.138, Ja i.146, Ja i.243; in detaiḷ (physiologically) at Vism 262, Vism 360; Vb-a 66, Vb-a 245 sweating for medicinal purposes, mahā˚ a great steambath; sambhāra˚ bringing about sweating by the use of herbs, etc.; seda-kamma sweating Vin i.205 ■ pl sedā drops of perspiration Dhp-a i.253.
-āvakkhitta earned in the sweat of the brow AN ii.67 sq., AN iii.45, AN iii.76; AN iv.95, AN iv.282. -gata sweat-covered, sweating Vv-a 305. -mala the stain of sweat Ja iii.290; Vb-a 276 -yūsa sweat Vism 195.
Vedic sveda, fr. svid, cp. Av. xvaēda, Gr. ἰδρώς, Lat. sudor, Ags. svāt = E. sweat
(adj.) sweating, transpiring DN ii.265.
fr. seda
moistened Ja i.52 (su˚). Cp. pari˚.
pp. of sedeti
to cause to transpire, to heat, to steam Ja iv.238; Ja v.271; Kp-a 52, Kp-a 67; Vin iii.82 (aor sedesi); ger. sedetvā Ja i.324; Ja ii.74; pp. sedita. Caus II sedāpeti Ja iii.122.
Caus. of sijjati
lying, sleeping; couch, bed Ja v.96 (= sayana).
= sayana
a hawk Ja i.273; Ja ii.51, Ja ii.60; Dhp-a ii.267.
Sk. śyena
a carter Thag-a 271 (= sākaṭika of Thig 443).
= sena2 Ja iv.58, Ja iv.291; Ja vi.246.
an army Vin i.241; Vin iv.104 sq. (where described as consisting of hatthī assā, rathā, pattī), 160; SN i.112; AN iii.397; AN v.82; Ja ii.94; Mil 4; Nd i.95 (Māra˚), 174 (id.).
-gutta [sena˚] a high official, a minister of war, only in cpd. mahā-˚; Ja vi.2, Ja vi.54; mahāsenaguttaṭṭhāna the position of a generalissimo Ja v.115. -nāyaka a general Vin i.73. -pacca the position as general Mvu 38, Mvu 81 -pati a general Vin i.233 sq.; Snp 556; AN iii.38; AN iv.79; Ja i.133; Ja iv.43; dhamma-˚; a general of the Dhamma Mil 343; Dhp-a iii.305. -patika a general AN iii.76, AN iii.78, AN iii.300 -byūha massing of troops, grouping & fitting up an army Vin iv.107; DN i.6; Pts ii.213; DN-a i.85 (-vyūha).
Vedic senā2 perhaps fr. si to bind
a general; only in cpd. ˚-kuṭilatā strategy (lit. crookedness of a general) Dhs-a 151.
(nt.) sleeping and sitting, bed & chair, dwelling, lodging Vin i.196, Vin i.294, Vin i.356; Vin ii.146 Vin ii.150 (˚parikkhāra-dussa); iii.88 etc.; DN ii.77; AN i.60; Iti 103, Iti 109; DN-a i.208; Ja i.217; Vb-a 365 (= seti c’eva āsati ca etthā ti senāsanaṃ). See also panta.
-gāha allotment of lodging-places Vin ii.167. -gāhāpaka house-steward Vin ii.167. -cārikā a wandering from lodging to lodging Vin i.182, Vin i.203; Vin iii.21; Ja 126 -paññāpaka regulator of lodging-places Vin ii.75, Vin ii.176 Vin iii.158 sq.; Vin iv.38. -paṭibāhana keeping out of the lodging Ja i.217. -paviveka secluson in respect of lodging AN i.240 sq. -vatta rule of conduct in respect of dwelling Vin ii.220.
sayana + āsana
belonging to an army, soldier Ja i.314.
fr. senā
at Vin i.200 is to be read senehika (fr. sineha), i.e. greasy.
(f.) name of a tree, Gmelina arborea Ja i.173, Ja i.174; Dhp-a i.145.
Sk. śrīparṇī, lit. having lucky leaves
lying Thag 14; Dhp-a i.16.
semāna + ka; ppr. of seti
(nt.) phlegm Vin ii.137; DN ii.14, DN ii.293; AN ii.87; AN iii.101; AN iv.320; Snp 198, Snp 434; Mil 112, Mil 303 Physiologically in detail at Vism 359; Vb-a 65, Vb-a 244.
= silesuma
some sort of animal (monkey?) (explained by makkaṭa) MN i.429.
(adj.) a man of phlegmatic humour Mil 298.
fr. semha
(adj.) better, excellent; nom. masc. seyyo SN iii.48 sq.; Snp 918; Dhp 308; Dhs 1116; Ja i.180; nom. fem. seyyasi Ja v.393; nom. neut. seyyo often used as a noun, meaning good, happiness, wellbeing Vin i.33; DN i.184; DN ii.330; Snp 427, Snp 440; Dhp 76 Dhp 100; Ja ii.44; Ja vi.4 (maraṇaṃ eva seyyo, with abl. of compar. rajjato); Pv ii.943 (dhanaṃ); iv.16 (jīvitaṃ) nom. fem. seyyā Ja v.94; nom. acc. neutr. seyyaṃ Ja ii.402 Ja iii.237; abl. as adv. seyyaso “still better” Dhp 43; Ja ii.402; Ja iv.241. Superl. seṭṭha.
Sk. śreyas, compar. formn
(adj.) lying MN i.433, see uttānaseyyaka and gabbhaseyyaka.
fr. seyyā
to crush Ja i.174. See also sarati3 & vi˚; ■ pp. siṇṇa: see vi˚.
śṛ; Vedic śṛṇāti & śīryate
(adv.) as, just as, s. pi Vin i.5; DN i.45; Iti 90, Iti 113; Ja i.339; seyyathīdaṃ as follows “i.e.” or “viz.” Vin i.10; DN i.89; DN ii.91; SN v.421; Iti 99.
= taṃ yathā, with Māgadhī se˚ for ta˚; cp. sayathā & taṃyathā
(f.) a bed, couch MN i.502; AN i.296; Vin ii.167 (˚aggena by the surplus in beds); Snp 29, Snp 152 Snp 535; Dhp 305, Dhp 309; Pv ii.311; iv.12; Ja vi.197 (gilāna sick-bed). Four kinds AN ii.244; Vb-a 345. seyyaṃ kappeti to lie down Vin iv.15, Vin iv.18 sq ■ Combd with āvasatha, e.g. at AN ii.85, AN ii.203; AN iii.385; AN iv.60; AN v.271 sq-As-˚ used in adj. sense of “lying down, resting, viz. ussūra˚; sleeping beyond sunrise DN iii.184 = Dhp-a ii.227; divā˚; noon-day rest DN i.112, DN i.167; sīha˚; like a lion DN ii.134; AN iv.87; dukkha˚; sleeping uncomfortably Dhp-a iv.8.
Sk. śayyā; fr. śī
(f.) independence, freedom Snp 39 sq.
fr. serin
(adj.) self-willed, independent, according to one’s liking MN i.506; Thag 1144; Pv iv.187 Ja i.5.
cp. Sk. svairin
(adj.) lodging at one’s own choice MN i.469 sq.; Vism 66 (˚sukhaṃ).
serin + vihāra
(adj.) made of Sirīsa wood, name of a hall DN ii.356 sq.; Vv 8453; Vv-a 331, Vv-a 351.
fr. sirīsa
a festival in honour of the Serīsaka Vimāna Vv 8437, 53
name of a tree (Barleria cristata) Ja iii.253.
rocky Dhp 8; (m.) rock, stone, crystal SN i.127; DN ii.39; AN iii.346; Dhp 81; Ja ii.14; Vin i.4 sq.; Vin iii.147; Ja ii.284.
-guḷa a rocky ball Ja i.147. -maya made of rock (crystal?), of the bowl of the Buddha Snp-a 139, Snp-a 159.
fr. silā
“rocky,” a kind of copper (cp. pisāca) Vb-a 63.
sela + ka
(selita) shouting, noise, row Ja ii.218. To this belongs the doubtful der. selissaka (nt.) noise row, mad pranks at SN iv.117 (v.l. seleyyaka).
pp. of seḷeti
to make a noise, shout, cry exultantly Snp 682; Ja v.67; Bv i.36. pp. seḷita ■ Other, diff. explns of the word see in J.P.T.S. 1885, p. 54.
according to Kern, Toev. ii.78 for sveḷayati, cp. Oir. fét whistle, music etc. Idg. *sveiƶd
serving, following; a servant, dependent Ja ii.12, Ja ii.125, Ja ii.420; Snp-a 453. See vipakkha˚.
1. to serve, associate with, resort to Vin ii.203; AN i.124 sq.; Snp 57, Snp 75; Pp 33; Iti 107; Ja iii.525; Snp-a 169.
2. to practice, embrace, make use of Vin i.10 = SN v.421; DN iii.157; SN i.12; MN iii.45; Dhp 167, Dhp 293 Dhp 310; Snp 72, Snp 391, Snp 927; Nd i.383, Nd i.481; Ja i.152, Ja i.361; aor asevissaṃ Ja iv.178 ■ pp. sevita: see ā˚, vi˚.
sev
(-˚) (f.) = sevanā Vb-a 282 sq.
abstr, fr. sevati
(f.) following, associating with Snp 259; Dhs 1326; Pp 20; Dhtp 285 (as nt.); cohabiting Vin iii.29.
fr. sevati
(f.) service, resorting to SN i.110; Thag-a 179.
fr. sev
the plant Blyxa octandra moss, AN iii.187, AN iii.232, AN iii.235; Ja ii.150 = Dhp-a i.144; Ja iii.520; Ja iv.71; Ja v.462; Mil 35; Dhp-a iii.199 Tikp 12 (in sim.). (m. and nt.) Ja v.37; -mālaka (or -mālika ) who makes garlands of Blyxa octandra AN v.263; SN iv.312 ■ Often combd with another waterplant paṇaka (see under paṇṇaka), e.g. AN iii.187 Vism 261 (simile); Vb-a 244 (id.); Kp-a 61 (cp. Schubring, Kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.).
cp. Epic Sk. śaivala & saivāla
(adj.) serving, practising Snp 749; Iti 54. See vipakkha˚.
fr. sev
to cause to fall, to throw down Ja iii.198 (doubtful; C-expls as pāteti & gives saveti as gloss; v.l. also sādeti).
= sāveti, Caus. of; sru to make glide
remaining, left DN ii.48; Snp 217, Snp 354; Ja ii.128; (nt.) remainder Pv-a 14, Pv-a 70; ˚-ka the same Mvu 10, Mvu 36 Mvu 22, Mvu 42; Mvu 25, Mvu 19.
fr. śiṣ
: see sissati.
see seti.
is instr. pl. of sa4 (his own): Dhp 136; Dhp-a iii.64.
the flame of fire, later in sense of “burning grief” grief, sorrow, mourning; defd as “socanā socitattaṃ anto-soko… cetaso parijjhāyanā domanassaṃ” at Pts i.38 = Nd i.128 = Nd ii.694; shorter as “ñāti-vyasan’ ādīhi phuṭṭhassa citta-santāpo” at Vism 503 = Vb-a Cp. the foll.: Vin i.6; DN i.6; DN ii.305, DN ii.103; SN i.110, SN i.123 SN i.137; AN i.51, AN i.144; AN ii.21; AN v.141; Snp 584, Snp 586; Ja i.189; Snp-a 155; Dhp-a ii.166; Kp-a 153 (abbūḷha˚); Pv i.43 (= citta-santāpa Pv-a 18); Pv-a 6, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 38, Pv-a 42, Pv-a 61 ■ asoka without grief: see viraja. See also dukkha B iii.1 b.
-aggi the fire of sorrow Pv-a 41. pl. -divasā the days of mourning (at the king’s court after the death of the queen) Snp-a 89. -parideva sorrow and lamenting AN iii.32, AN iii.326 sq.; AN v.216 sq.; Vism 503; Nd i.128. -pariddava id. Vv 8430. -pareta overcome with grief Pv i.86 -vinaya dispelling of grief Pv-a 39. -vinodana id. Pv-a 61. -salla the dart or sting of sorrow AN iii.54, AN iii.58 Nd i.59, Nd i.414; Pv i.86; Pv-a 93, Pv-a 162.
fr. śuc, to gleam (which to the Dhtp however is known only in meaning “soka”: Dhtp 39); cp. Vedic śoka.
(f.) a woman who plays the fool, a comedian Vin iv.285; Ja vi.580 (where C. expls as “grief-dispellers”).
soka + ajjhāyaka; this soka perhaps *sūka, as in visūka?
(adj.) sorrowful Mvu 19, Mvu 15.
soka + vant
(adj.) sorrowful; a-˚ free from sorrow Thag-a 229.
soka + ika
(adj.) (fem. ˚nī) sorrowful Dhp 28.
fr. soka
(nt.) happiness Snp 61; Ja v.205.
abstr. der. fr. sukha
(nt.) fineness, minuteness AN ii.17; Thag 437. At AN ii.18 with double suffix ˚tā.
abstr. fr. sukhuma
(nt.) the white water-lily (Nymphaea lotus) Ja v.419; Ja vi.518 Ja vi.537 (seta-sogandhiyehi) ■ As m. designation of a purgatory AN v.173; SN i.152; Snp p.126.
Sk. saugandhika; fr. sugandha
1. to mourn, grieve Snp 34; Dhp 15; Ja i.168; Pv i.87 (+ rodati); i.1015; i.122; Mil 11; pres 3rd pl. socare Snp 445; Dhp 225; ppr. socamāna Ja ii.75; ppr. asocaṃ not grieving SN i.116; mā soci do not sorrow DN ii.144; Ja vi.190; plur. mā socayittha do not grieve DN ii.158 Caus. socayati to cause to grieve DN i.52; SN i.116 Thag 743 (ger. ˚ayitvā); Mil 226; soceti Ja ii.8 ■ pp socita ■ Caus. II. socāpayati the same SN i.116.
Vedic śocati, śuc, said of the gleaming of a fire
(nt.) sorrow, mourning Pv-a 18, Pv-a 62; -nā (f.) the same DN ii.306; SN i.108 = Snp 34; Nd ii.694.
fr. śuc
(nt.) grief Thig 462.
fr. socati
(nt.) sorrowfulness DN ii.306; Pts i.38 = Nd ii.694.
grieving AN iv.294 (socī ca = socicca).
fr. socati
deplorable Sdhp 262.
= Sk. śocya
(nt.) purity SN i.78; AN i.94; AN ii.188; AN v.263; Vism 8; Ja i.214; Mil 115, Mil 207 is threefold AN i.271; Iti 55; DN iii.219; further subdivided AN v.264, AN v.266 sq. In meaning of “cleaning, washing given in the Dhtp as def. of roots for washing, bathing etc. (khal, nahā, sinā, sudh).
abstr. fr. śuc, *śaucya
(nt.) nobility, high birth Ja ii.137.
abstr. fr. sujāta
a dog Ja i.146; Ja vi.107 (= sunakha); Snp 675; Vism 191; Dhp-a iii.255 (+ sigāla); soṇi (f.) a bitch Mvu 7, Mvu 8 = sona Iti 36.
see suvāṇa
a kind of tree; the Bodhi trees of the Buddhas Paduma and Nārada Bv ix.22; Bv x.24; Ja i.36, Ja i.37.
cp. śyonāka
(nt.) blood Thig 467; DN-a i.120; Vism 259.
Sk. śoṇita, fr. śoṇa red
(f.) 1. the buttock Snp 609; Ja v.155, Ja v.216, Ja v.302.
2. a bitch, see soṇa1.
cp. Sk. śroṇī
addicted to drink, intoxicated, a drunkard DN ii.172; Ja v.436, Ja v.499; Mil 345; Vism 316 a-soṇḍa AN iii.38; AN iv.266; Ja v.166; (fem ■ ī) itthisoṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Snp 112 (? better “one who is addicted to women”; Snp-a 172 expls to that effect, cp. Ja ii.431 itthi-surā-maṃsa-soṇḍa); yuddhasoṇḍa Ja i.204; dāsi-soṇḍa a libertine Ja v.436 (+ surā˚) dhamma-soṇḍatā affectionate attachment to the law Ja v.482.
cp. Sk. śauṇḍa
in cpd. surā˚; a drunkard Ja v.433; Ja vi.30.
soṇḍa + ka
(f.) an elephant’s trunk Vin ii.201; = SN ii.269; MN i.415; AN iv.87 (uccā˚ fig. of a bhikkhu] Ja i.50, Ja i.187; Ja iv.91; Ja v.37; Dhp-a i.58; Mil 368; soṇḍa (m. the same SN i.104.
Sk. śuṇḍā
1. a distiller and seller of spirituous liquors; MN i.228 = MN i.374.
2. a drunkard Mil 93.
fr. soṇḍa
(f.) 1. tendril of a creeper SN i.106; Mil 374. - 2. peppered meat SN ii.98 (cp. Sanskrit śauṇḍī long pepper).
3. in udaka˚; Kp-a 65 (= sondī1) a tank.
(f.) a natural tank in a rock Ja i.462; Dhp-a ii.56 (soṇḍi); udaka-˚; Ja iv.333; Vism 119; Kp-a 65 (soṇḍikā).
(f.) the neck of a tortoise SN iv.177 (soṇḍi-pañcamāni angāni); Mil 371; the hood of a snake Ja vi.166 (nāgā soṇḍi-katā).
(nt.) gold; (adj.) golden Mvu 5, Mvu 87; Vv 54, 367.
-ālaṅkāra with golden ornaments Ja ii.48. -dhaja with golden flags Ja ii.48. -bhiṅkāra a golden vase Sdhp 513. -maya golden, made of gold Ja vi.203 -vālukā gold dust Ja vi.278.
the contracted form of suvaṇṇa, cp. sovaṇṇa
(nt.) ear, the organ of hearing Vin i.9, Vin i.34; DN i.21; Snp 345 (nom pl. sotā); Vism 444 (defined); Dhs 601; Dhs-a 310-dibba-sota the divine ear (cp. dibba-cakkhu) DN i.79 DN i.154; DN iii.38, DN iii.281; dhamma˚ the ear of the Dhamma AN iii.285 sq., 350; v.140; SN ii.43; sotaṃ odahati to listen (carefully) DN i.230; ohita -s. with open ears AN iv.115 AN v.154; Ja i.129.
-añjana a kind of ointment made with antimony Vin i.203. -ānugata following on hearing, acquired by hearing AN ii.185. -āyatana the sense of hearing Dhs 601 sq.; DN ii.243, DN ii.280, DN ii.290. -āvadhāna giving ear attention MN ii.175. -indriya the faculty of hearing Dhs 604; DN iii.239. -dvāra “door of the ear,” auditory sensation Vb-a 41. -dhātu the ear element, the ear Vin ii.299; DN i.79; SN ii.121; AN i.255 (dibba˚); iii.17 (id.); v.199; Vb 334; Vism 407 (defd); Dhs 601, Dhs 604; Mil 6. -viññāṇa auditory cognition, perception through the ear Dhs 443. -viññeyya cognizable by hearing DN ii.281; Dhs 467; Kp-a 101.
Vedic śrotas & śrotra; fr. śru: see suṇāti
(m. & nt.) 1. stream, flood, torrent Snp 433; Iti 144; Ja i.323; sīgha-s having a quick current DN ii.132; Snp 319; metaphorically the stream of cravings Snp 715 (chinna˚; cp. Mvu iii.88 chinna-srota), 1034; SN iv.292; MN i.226 (sotaṃ chetvā); Iti 114; denotes noble eightfold path SN v.347 bhava -s. torrent of rebirth SN i.15; SN iv.128; viññāṇa-s flux of mind, DN iii.105; nom. sing. soto SN iv.291 sq.v.347; nom. plur. sotā Snp 1034; acc. plur. sotāni Snp 433; plur. sotāyo (f. [?], or wrong reading instead of sotāso, sotāse [?]) Ja iv.287, Ja iv.288.
2. passage, aperture (of body, as eyes, ears, etc.), in kaṇṇa˚; orifice of the ear, and nāsa˚; nostril, e.g. DN i.106; Snp p.108; Ja i.163, Ja i.164 (heṭṭhā-nāsika-s.); Vism 400 (dakkhiṇa˚ vāma-kaṇṇa-s.).;
-āpatti entering upon the stream, i.e. the noble eightfold path (SN v.347), conversion Vin ii.93 etc. By it the first three Saṃyojanas are broken SN v.357, SN v.376 It has four phases (angas): faith in the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Order, and, further, the noble Sīlas SN ii.68 sq.; SN v.362 sq.; AN iii.12; AN iv.405; DN iii.227 (in detail). Another set of four angas consists of sappurisa-saṃsevā, saddhammasavana, yonisomanasikāra, and dhammânudhammapaṭipatti SN v.347, SN v.404. -phala the effect of having entered upon the stream, the fruit of conversion Vin i.293; Vin ii.183; MN i.325; AN i.44; AN iii.441 AN iv.292 sq., 372 sq.; DN i.229; DN iii.227; SN iii.168, SN iii.225 SN v.410 sq.; Pp 13; Dhp-a iii.192; Dhp-a iv.5; Pv-a 22, Pv-a 38 Pv-a 66, Pv-a 142. -magga the way to conversion, the lower stage of conversion DN-a i.237; Ja i.97; Vb-a 307; see magga -āpanna one who has entered the stream, a convert Vin ii.161, Vin ii.240; Vin iii.10; DN i.156; DN iii.107 sq., 132, 227; AN ii.89; SN ii.68; SN iii.203 sq., 225 sq.; v.193 sq. DN-a i.313; Vism 6, Vism 709; Pv-a 5, Pv-a 153. The converted is endowed with āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, and ādhipateyya SN v.390; he is called wealthy and glorious SN v.402; conversion excludes rebirth in purgatory, among animals and petas, as well as in other places of misery; he is a-vinipāta-dhamma: DN i.156; DN ii.200; SN v.193 sq., 343; AN i.232; AN ii.238; AN iii.331 sq.; AN iv.405 sq., AN v.182; MN iii.81 or khīṇa-niraya: AN iii.211; AN iv.405 sq. (+ khīṇa-tiracchānayoni etc.). The converted man is sure to attain the sambodhi (niyato sambodhipārāyano DN i.156, discussed in Dial. i.190
192).
Vedic srotas, nt., fr.; sru; see savati
scorched Ja i.390 = MN i.79, read so tatto (cp. MN i.536). See sosīta.
a hearer DN i.56; AN ii.116; AN iii.161 sq ■ sotā used as a feminine noun Thag-a 200 (Ap v.3).
n. ag. fr. suṇāti
having ears, nom. pl. sotavanto SN i.138; Vin i.7; DN ii.39.
sota1 + vant
wish or wishing to hear AN i.150; AN iv.115; Vism 444; f. abstr. ˚kamyatā desire to listen AN v.145 sq., Snp-a 135.
sotuṃ (= inf. of suṇāti) + kāma
asleep SN i.170.
pp. of supati, for sutta
(f.) a shell (?) filled with chunam and lac, used for scratching the back, a back-scratcher acting as a sponge MN ii.46; AN i.208; see sutti e.g. Vin ii.107.
Sk. śukti
well versed in sacred learning, a learned man MN i.280; Snp 533 sq. See sotthiya.
= *śrotriya
see supati.
(nt.) blessing, well-fare Snp 258; AN iv.271, AN iv.285; Ja v.29 (where the metre requires sotthayanaṃ, as at iv.75); vi.139.
cp. Sk. svastyayana
(f.) well-being, safety, bless ing AN iii.38 = AN iv.266 (“brings future happiness”) Ja i.335; s. hotu hail! DN i.96; sotthiṃ in safety, safely Dhp 219 (= anupaddavena Dhp-a iii.293); Pv iv.64 (= nirupaddava Pv-a 262); Snp 269; sotthinā safely prosperously DN i.72, DN i.96; DN ii.346; MN i.135; Ja ii.87; Ja iii.201 suvatthi the same Ja iv.32. See sotthika & sovatthika;.
-kamma a blessing Ja i.343. -kāra an utterer of blessings, a herald Ja vi.43. -gata safe wandering, prosperous journey Mvu 8, Mvu 10; sotthigamana the same Ja i.272. -bhāva well-being, prosperity, safety Ja i.209 Ja iii.44; Dhp-a ii.58; Pv-a 250. -vācaka utterer of blessings a herald Mil 359. -sālā a hospital Mvu 10, Mvu 101.
Sk. svasti = su + asti
(& ˚iya) (adj.) happy, auspicious, blessed, safe Vv-a 95; Dhp-a ii.227 (˚iya; in phrase dīgha˚ one who is happy for long [?]).
fr. sotthi
a learned man, a brahmin Dhp 295; Thag-a 200 (Ap v.6); Ja iv.301, Ja iv.303; Ja v.466.
(nt.) a childbirth rag Vism 63.
der.?
(adj.) lucky, happy, safe Vv 8452.
sotthi + vant
(adj.) containing water Mvu 30, Mvu 38; Mvu 37, Mvu 200.
sa + udaka
(adj.) having a common origin (in the same mother’s womb), born of the same mother a brother Ja i.308; Ja iv.434; Pv-a 94 (bhātā).
sa + udariya
one who cleanses Mvu 10, Mvu 90; Pv-a 7.
fr. sodheti
(nt.) cleansing Vism 276 (as f. ˚nā); examining Ja i.292; payment (see uddhāra ) Ja i.321.
fr. sodheti
to make clean, to purify Vin i.47; MN i.39; Dhp 141; DN-a i.261, DN-a i.135; to examine, search Ja i.200, Ja i.291; Ja ii.123; Ja iii.528; to search for, to seek Ja ii.135; to clean away, to remove Ja iv.404; to correct Ja ii.48; to clear a debt: in this meaning mixed with sādheti (q.v.) in phrases iṇaṃ s. and uddhāraṃ s.; we read iṇaṃ sodheti at Pv-a 276; uddhāraṃ sodheti at Ja iv.45; otherwise sādheti ■ Caus. II. sodhāpeti to cause to clean, to clean Vin iii.208, Vin iii.248 = Vin i.206; Ja i.305 Ja ii.19; Pass. sodhīyati to be cleansed, to be adorned Bv ii.40 sq. = Ja i.12.
Caus. of sujjhati
dog Iti 36; see soṇa.
= sa + upadhika.
= sa + upavāhana.
a man of a very low caste, an outcast Snp 137. See also sapāka.
= sapāka; śva + pāka
(m. and nt.) stairs, staircase Vin ii.117, Vin ii.152; DN ii.178; Ja i.330, Ja i.348; Ja iv.265; Vism 10; Vv-a 188; Pv-a 156, Pv-a 275; Vv 785; dhura-sopāna the highest step of a staircase (? Ja i.330.
-kaliṅgara flight of steps Vin ii.128 (v.l. sopāṇakaḷevara as at MN ii.92). -panti a flight or row of steps, a ladder Vism 392 (three). -pāda the foot of the steps (opp. ˚sīsa ) Dhp-a i.115. -phalaka a step of a staircase Ja i.330.
cp. Sk. sopāna; Aufrecht “sa + upāyana”
(nt.) sleep, dream SN i.110; AN i.261 (i.e. laziness). ˚ante in a dream Ja v.329 (C. reading for T suppante).
= supina
see supati.
a hole, (deep) pit DN ii.127; MN i.11; AN i.243; AN ii.140; AN iii.389 (see papāta); v.114 sq. Ja vi.166; Thag 229; Snp-a 355, Snp-a 479; a water-pool SN ii.32; Snp 720; Vism 186; as adj. at SN iii.109 (+ papāta), i.e. “deep”; kussobbha a small collection of water SN ii.32 SN ii.118; Snp 720; mahāsobbha the ocean SN ii.32, SN ii.118.
cp. Sk. śvabhra
(nt.) prosperity, beauty Thig 72; Ja i.51, Ja i.475; Ja ii.158; Ja iv.133. As sobhagyatā at DN-a i.161.
abstr. fr. subhaga
the tree Hyperanthica moringa Ja v.405; sobhañjanaka the same Ja iii.161 (= siggurukkha, C.) vi.535.
(nt.) 1. a kind of edging on a girdle Vin ii.136.
2. beauty, ornament Mil 356.
fr. śubh
(adj.) 1. adorning, shining, embellishing AN ii.8, AN ii.225; very often spelt sobhana Ja i.257; Thag-a 244; nagara-sobhaṇā (or ˚iṇī ) a courtesan Ja ii.367 Ja iii.435, Ja iii.475; Mil 350; Pv-a 4.
2. good Mil 46 (text ˚na); Cpd. 96; 101; 106.
fr. śubh
1. to shine, to be splendid, look beautiful Ja i.89; Ja ii.93; sobhetha let your light shine (with foll. yaṃ “in that… ”) Vin i.187, Vin i.349 = Vin ii.162; Ja iii.487 = SN i.217; ppr. ˚māna Vism 58. aor. sobhi Ja i.143; Caus. sobheti to make resplendent, adorn, grace AN ii.7; Snp 421; Ja i.43; Mil 1; Vism 79 (ppr. sobhayanto); to make clear DN ii.105.
śubh, Vedic śobhate
(nt.) a kind of game, fairy scenes DN i.6, DN i.13; DN-a i.84.
(f.) splendour, radiance, beauty Mvu 33, Mvu 30; Ja iv.333; Thag-a 226; Mil 356.
fr. śubh; Sk. śobhā
a sort of magician or trickster, clown Ja vi.277 (sobhiyā ti nagarasobhanā sampannarūpā purisā; not correct C.).
cp. Sk. śaubhika; BSk. śobhika Mvu iii.113
(nt.) mental ease, happiness, joy DN i.3; DN ii.278; DN iii.270; MN i.85, MN i.313; SN iv.232; AN ii.69; AN iii.207, AN iii.238; Dhp 341; Snp 67; Pp 59 Vb-a 73; Pv-a 6, Pv-a 14, Pv-a 133; DN-a i.53; it is more than sukha DN ii.214; defined at Vism 461 (iṭṭh’ārammaṇ’ ânubhavana-lakkhaṇaṃ, etc.). A syName of it is veda 1 On term see also Cpd. 277.
-indriya the faculty of pleasure DN iii.224; SN v.209 sq.; Dhs 18.
fr. su + mano; cp. domanassa
(adj.) satisfied, pleased, contented Vv-a 351.
Caus. pp. formation fr. somanassa
a certain species of tree Ja vi.530.
soma + rukkha
(f.) a puppet, doll Thig 390; explained as sombhakā Thag-a 257.
(adj.) pleasing, agreeable, gentle Dāvs i.42; DN-a i.247; Dhs-a 127; Vv-a 205; Snp-a 456; Vism 168.
Sk. saumya, fr. soma
(nt.) gentleness, restraint, meekness AN ii.68, AN ii.113; AN iii.248; SN i.100, SN i.172, SN i.222; Snp 78, Snp 292; Dhs 1342; Ja iii.442; Ja iv.302; Mil 162; Vv-a 347 Often combd with khanti forbearance (q.v.) ■ soracciya (nt.) the same Ja iii.453.
fr. sorata
(adj.) [ = su + rata, with so˚ for sū˚, which latter is customary for su˚ before r (cp. dūr˚ for dur˚). See du1 2 and Geiger, P.Gr. § 11 ■ The (B)Sk. is sūrata gentle, kind, humble, self-restrained MN i.125; SN i.65 SN iv.305 (text, sūrata); AN ii.43; AN iii.349, AN iii.393 sq.; Snp 309 Snp 515, Snp 540; Ja iv.303; Dhp-a i.56.
(num. card.) sixteen DN i.128; Snp 1006; Ja i.78 (lekhā); ii.87; iii.342 (atappiya-vatthūni); v.175 vi.37; Mil 11 (palibodhā); Dhp-a i.129 (˚salākā); iv.208 (˚karīsa-matta). instr. soḷasahi DN i.31, & soḷasehi DN i.139; gen. soḷasannaṃ Ja iv.124. Very frequent in measures of time & space.; -˚vassa˚; (16 years… Ja i.231, Ja i.285; Ja ii.43; Ja iv.7; Ja vi.10, Ja vi.486; Dhp-a i.25 and passim. The fem. ˚-sī acts as num. ord. “sixteenth, in phrase kalaṃ nagghati soḷasiṃ he is not worth a sixteenth particle of AN iv.252; SN iii.156; SN v.44, SN v.343; Dhp 70; Iti 19.
Sk. ṣoḍaśa
sixteen times DN-a i.261; Dhp-a i.353 = Mvu 6, Mvu 37.
sixteenth Mvu 2, Mvu 29; Vism 292.
(adj.) connected with heaven Vin i.294; DN i.51; AN ii.54, AN ii.68; AN iii.46, AN iii.51, AN iii.259; AN iv.245; SN i.90; DN-a i.158.
fr. sagga = *svarga; cp. the similar formation dovārika = dvāra
(nt.) gentleness, suavity DN iii.267; AN ii.148; AN iii.180; Ne 40; Ne 127; ˚-karaṇa making for gentleness MN i.96; AN ii.148 = AN iii.180.
fr. suvaca, in analogy to dovacassa
(f.) = sovacassa MN i.126; DN iii.212, DN iii.274; AN i.83; AN iii.310, AN iii.423 sq., 449; iv.29; Snp 266; Dhs 1327 Pp 24. Sovaccasāya & sovacassiya; the same (Dhs 1327 Pp 24).
(adj.) golden DN ii.210; AN iv.393; Pv-a ii.121; Ja i.226; ˚-maya golden Vin i.39; Vin ii.116; DN ii.170 etc.; Ja ii.112.
fr. suvaṇṇa
(adj.) golden Ja i.226.
= sovaṇṇaka
(adj.) safe MN i.117; Vv 187 (= sotthika Vv-a 95); Ja vi.339 (in the shape of a svastika?); Pv iv.33 (= sotthi-bhāva-vāha Pv-a 250). -ālaṅkāra a kind of auspicious mark Ja vi.488.
either fr. sotthi with diaeresis, or fr. su + atthi + ka = Sk. svastika
(nt.) sour gruel Vin i.210; SN ii.111; Vv 198; PugA 232.
dialectical?
drying up, consumption Vin i.71; Vism 345.
fr. śuṣ
(nt.) causing to dry (in surgery) Mil 353.
fr. soseti
(adj.) connected with a cemetery, bier-like Vin ii.149; m., one who lives in or near a cemetery AN iii.220; Pp 69 sq.; Mil 342; Vism 61 sq. Dhp-a i.69.
fr. susāna
(adj.) well reinstated (opp. dosārita) Vin i.322.
su + osārita
(adj.) afflicted with pulmonary consumption Vin i.93; Vin iv.8.
fr. sosa
at Ja i.390 means either “thoroughly chilled” or “well wetted.” It is expld as “him’odakena su-sīto suṭṭhu tinto.” Perhaps we have to read so sīta, or sīna (cp. sīna2), or sinna. The corresponding sotatta (expld as “suriya-santāpena su-tatto”) should then be so tatto.
to cause to dry or wither Mvu 21, Mvu 28; Vism 120. See vi˚.
Caus. of sussati
is Fut. of suṇāti.
a friend Mvu 38, Mvu 98. See also suhada.
Sk. sauhṛda, fr. su + hṛd
see sineha.
being of good disposition Vin i.6.
su + ākāra
well preached Vin i.12, Vin i.187 Vin ii.199; MN i.67; AN i.34; AN ii.56; Snp 567. Opp. durakkhāta Vism 213 (in detail).
su + akkhāta; on the long ā cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 7; BSk. svākhyāta
1. welcome Vin ii.11; Thig 337; Thag-a 236.
2. learnt by heart Vin ii.95, Vin ii.249; AN iv.140 (pātimokkhāni). See sāgata.
su + āgata
relating to the morrow; dat. ˚-nāya for the following day Vin i.27; DN i.125; Ja i.11; Dhp-a i.314; Dhp-a iv.12.
cp. Sk. śvastana; Geiger, P.Gr. § 6, 54
easily overcome Snp 785; Nd i.76.
su + ativatta
= so assu Ja i.196.
= so ahaṃ.
(adv.) to-morrow Vin ii.77; DN i.108, DN i.205; Ja i.32, Ja i.243; Ja ii.47; Vv-a 230; svedivasa Dhp-a i.103. The diaeretic form is suve, e.g. Pv iv.15; Mvu 29, Mvu 17; and doubled suve suve day after day Dhp 229; Dhp-a iii.329; Ja v.507.
H.
cp. Sk. śvas
an emphatic particle “hey, oh, hallo I say” Vin ii.109; Snp 666; iti ha, thus Vin i.5, Vin i.12; DN i.1; a common beginning to traditional instruction Snp 1053; itihītihaṃ (saying), “thus and thus” Snp 1084; Snp-a 416 (ha-kāra); Pv-a 4 (ha re), 58 (gloss for su ).
freq. in Rigveda, as gha or ha, Idg. *gho, *ghe; cp. Lat. hi-c, Sk. hi
(indecl.) an exclamation “I say, hey, hallo, look here!” Vv 508 (= nipāta Vv-a 212); Ja v.422; Vv-a 77. Sometimes as han ti, e.g. Ja v.203; Dhp-a iii.108. See also handa & hambho;. In combn iti haṃ (= iti) Snp 783; Nd i.71; or with other part. like haṃ dhī Dhp-a i.179, Dhp-a i.216 (here as haṃ di ).
cp. Sk. haṃ
bristling: see lomahaṃsa Snp 270 etc.
fr. haṃsati
1. a water-bird, swan SN i.148; Snp 221, Snp 350, Snp 1134; Dhp 91, Dhp 175; Dhp-a ii.170; Ja ii.176 sq.; Snp-a 277; Pv ii.123; iii.34. Considered as (suvaṇṇa-) rāja-haṃsa (“golden royal swan”) to be king of the birds: Ja i.207; Ja ii.353; Vism 650 ■ At Snp-a 277 Bdhgh gives various kinds of haṃsa’s, viz. harita˚ tamba˚, khīra˚, kāḷa˚, pāka˚, suvaṇṇa˚ ■ pāka˚; a species of water bird Ja v.356; Ja vi.539; Snp-a 277 ■ f haṃsī Dāvs v.24 (rāja˚).
2. a kind of building Ja i.92.
-potaka a young swan Vism 153 (in simile). -rāja the king of swans Vv 358; Vin iv.259.
cp. Sk. haṃsa = Lat. (h)anser “goose,” Gr. ξήν = Ags. gōs = E. goose, Ger. gans
to bristle, stand on end (said of the hair) Vin iii.8; MN i.79; Caus. haṃseti to cause to bristle Ja v.154 ■ pp. haṭṭha.
cp. Vedic harṣate Idg. *ĝher to bristle (of hair), as in Lat. horreo (“horrid, horripilation”), ēr hedgehog (“bristler”) = Gr. ξήρ id.; Lat. hirtus, hispidus “rough”; Ags. gorst = gorse; Ger. granne & many others, for which see Walde,; Lat. Wtb. s. v. ēr ■ The Dhtp (309) defines as “tuṭṭhi.” See also ghaṃsati2 pahaṃsati2, pahaṭṭha2, pahaṃsita2
(adj.-n..) bristling, see lomahaṃsa Snp 270 etc.
fr. hṛṣ
(indecl.) = hañci if, in case that Ja vi.343.
?
see paṭi˚.
(adj.) killing, in bhūnahacca killing an embryo AN iv.98; Ja vi.579 = Ja vi.587; Mil 314 (text bhūta-)
fr. han
(indecl.) if Kv 1. Hannati & hanchati;
haṃ + ci
see hanati.
taken, carried off Vin iv.23; Ja i.498. haṭa-haṭa-kesa with dishevelled hair SN i.115.
pp. of harati
a kind of water-plant, Pistia stratiotes DN i.166; MN i.78, MN i.156; Pp 55 (text sāta-) AN i.241, AN i.295 (v.l. sāta; cp. hāṭaka).
cp. Sk. haṭha & haṭa
1. bristling, standing on end MN i.83; Dāvs v.64; lomahaṭṭhajāta (cp. ˚loma) with bristling hairs, excited DN ii.240; Snp p.14.
2. joyful happy Vin i.15; Snp 1017; Ja i.31, Ja i.335; Ja ii.32; often combd with either tuṭṭha (e.g. Ja vi.427; Pv-a 113), or pahaṭṭha (Dhp-a iii.292).
pp. of haṃsati
violence.
only as lexicogr. word; Dhtp 101 = balakkāra
struck, killed DN ii.131; destroyed, spoilt, injured Vin i.25; Dhs 264; Ja ii.175; reṇuhata struck with dust, covered with dust Vin i.32; hatatta (nt.) the state of being destroyed Dhp 390; hatāvakāsa who has cut off every occasion (for good and evil) Dhp 97; Dhp-a ii.188; hatāvasesaka surviving DN i.135 pakkha˚; a cripple (q.v.); ˚vikkhittaka slain & cut up killed & dismembered Vism 179, Vism 194 ■; hata is also used in sense of med., i.e. one who has destroyed or killed e.g. nāga˚; slayer of a nāga Vin ii.195; ˚antarāya one who removes an obstacle Pv-a 1 ■ ahata unsoiled, clean new DN ii.160; Ja i.50; Dāvs ii.39.
pp. of hanti
(f.) destruction Dāvs iv.17.
fr. han
1. hand DN i.124; AN i.47; Snp 610; Ja vi.40 ■ forearm Vin iv.221; of animals SN v.148; Ja i.149; ˚pāda hand and foot MN i.523; AN i.47; Ja ii.117; Pv-a 241; Dhp-a iv.7. sahassa˚; thousand-armed Mvu 30, Mvu 75; pañca˚; having five hands Ja v.425; Ja v.431 (mukhassa ceva catunnaṃ ca caranāṇaṃ vasena etaṃ vuttaṃ); kata˚; a practised hand, practised (of an archer) SN i.62; AN ii.48; Ja iv.211 ■ hatthe karoti to bring under one’s hand, to take possession of, to subdue Ja vi.490; hatthaṃ gacchati to come under somebody’s hand, to come under the sway of Ja i.179; hatthaga being in the power of; hatthagata fallen into the hand or possession of, hatthappatta what one can put one’s hand on, i.e. “before his very eyes” Vin i.15. As ˚hattha in hand,-handed; e.g. daṇḍa˚; stick in hand Ja i.59; ritta˚; empty-handed Sdhp 309; vīṇā˚; lute in hand Mvu 30, Mvu 75. Cp. sa˚; with one’s own hand. 2. the hand as measure, a cubit Ja i.34, Ja i.233 (asīti˚, q.v.) Mvu 38, Mvu 52; Vism 92 (nava˚ sāṭaka).
3. a handful a tuft (of hair) Vv-a 197.
-aṅguli finger Pv-a 124 (+ pādanguli toe). -aṭṭhika hand-bone Kp-a 49. -antara a cubit Vism 124. -āpalekhana licking the hands (to clean them after eating-cp. the 52nd Sekhiya Vin iv.198) DN i.166 DN iii.40; MN i.77, MN i.238, MN i.307; AN i.295 (v.l. ˚āva˚); Pp 55 -ābharaṇa bracelet Vin ii.106. -ābhijappana (nt. incantations to make a man throw up his hands DN i.11; DN-a i.97. -ālaṅkāra a (wrist) bracelet wristlet Vv-a 167. -kacchapaka making a hollow hand Ja iii.505. -kamma manual work, craft, workmanship labour Ja i.220; Dhp-a i.98, Dhp-a i.395; Dhp-a iv.64. -gata received come into the possession of Ja i.446; Ja ii.94, Ja ii.105; Vv-a 149; (nt.) possession Ja vi.392. -gahaṇa seizing by the hand Vin iv.220. -cchinna whose hand is cut off MN i.523; Mil 5. -ccheda cutting off the hand Ja i.155 (read sugatiyā va hatthacchedādi). -cchedana = ˚cheda Ja iv.192; Dhp-a iii.482. -tala palm of the hand Vv-a 7 -ttha [cp. Sk. hasta-stha, of sthā ] lit. standing in the hand of somebody, being in somebody’s power (cp hattha-gata); used as abstr. hatthattha (nt.) power captivity, ˚ṃ gacchati & āgacchati; to come into the power of (gen.), to be at the mercy of [cp. hattha-gata & hatthaṃ gacchati] Ja ii.383 (āyanti hatthatthaṃ) iv.420, 459; v.346 (˚ṃ āgata). As pp. hatth-attha-gata in somebody’s power Ja i.244; Ja iii.204; Ja vi.582. An abstr. is further formed fr. hatthattha as hatthatthatā Ja v.349 (˚taṃ gata). The BSk. equivalent is hastatvaṃ Mvu ii.182. -pajjotikā hand-illumination, scorching of the hand (by holding it in a torch), a kind of punishment MN i.87; AN i.47; AN ii.122; Mil 197; Nd i.154. -patāpaka a coal-pan, heating of the hand Vv 3332; Vv-a 147; see mandāmukhi ■ pasāraṇa stretching out one’s hand Vism 569. -pāsa the side of the hand, vicinity Vin iv.221, Vin iv.230. -bandha a bracelet DN i.7; DN-a i.89 -vaṭṭaka hand-cart Vin ii.276. -vikāra motion of the hand Ja iv.491. -sāra hand-wealth, movable property Dhp-a i.240; Ja i.114; DN-a i.216.
fr. hṛ; cp. Vedic hasta
a handful, a quantity (lit. a little hand) Vv 455 (= kalāpa Vv-a 197).
hattha + ka
an elephant Vin i.218, Vin i.352; Vin ii.194 sq (Nālāgiri) = Ja v.335 (nom. sg. hatthī; gen. hatthissa) DN i.5; AN ii.209; Ja i.358; Ja ii.102; Dhp-a i.59 (correct haṭṭhi!), 80 (acc. pl. hatthī); size of an elephant Mil 312; one of the seven treasures DN i.89; DN ii.174; often mentioned together with horses (˚ass’ādayo), e.g. AN iv.107; MN iii.104; Vism 269; Dhp-a i.392. ekacārika-h., an elephant who wanders alone, a royal elephant Ja iii.175; caṇḍa h. rogue elephant MN i.519; DN-a i.37- hatthinī (f.) a she-elephant Dhp 105. hatthinikā (f. the same Vin i.277; DN i.49; DN-a i.147.
-atthara elephant rug Vin i.192; DN i.7; AN i.181 -ācariya elephant trainer Vin i.345; Ja ii.94, Ja ii.221, Ja ii.411 Ja iv.91; Mil 201. -āroha mounted on an elephant, an elephant-driver DN i.51; SN iv.310. -ālaṅkāra elephant’s trappings Ja ii.46. -kanta = manta el. charm Dhp-a i.163 -kantavīṇā lute enticing an elephant Dhp-a i.163. -kalabha the young of an elephant AN iv.435. -kumbha the frontal globe of an elephant Ja ii.245. -kula elephant species, ten enumd at Vb-a 397. -kkhandha the shoulder or back of an elephant Ja i.313; Mvu vi.24; Pv-a 75. 178. -gopaka an elephant’s groom or keeper Ja i.187. -damaka elephant tamer MN iii.132, MN iii.136; Snp-a 161. -damma an elephant in training MN iii.222 -nakha a sort of turrent projecting over the approach to a gate; ˚ka provided with such turrets, or supported on pillars with capitals of elephant heads Vin ii.169 -pada an elephant’s foot MN i.176, MN i.184; SN v.43; Ja i.94 -pākāra “elephant-wall,” wall of the upper storey with figures of elephants in relief Mvu 33, Mvu 5. See Geiger Mvu trsln 228, n. 2. -ppabhinna a furious elephant Dhp 326; MN i.236. -bandha Ja i.135 = hatthibhaṇḍa -bhaṇḍa an elephant-keeper Vin i.85; Vin ii.194. -magga elephant track Ja ii.102. -maṅgala an elephant festival Ja ii.46. -matta only as big as an elephant Ja i.303 -māraka elephant hunter Dhp-a i.80. -meṇḍa an elephant’s groom Ja iii.431; Ja v.287; Ja vi.498. -yāna an elephant carriage, a riding elephant DN i.49; DN-a i.147; Pv-a 55. -yuddha combat of elephants (as a theatrical show) DN i.6. -rūpaka elephant image or picture, toy elephant (+ assa˚) Dhp-a ii.69. -laṇḍa elephant dung Dhp-a iv.156. -liṅgasakuṇa a vulture with a bill like an elephant’s trunk Dhp-a i.164. -vatta elephant habit Nd i.92. -sālā elephant stable Vin i.277; Vin ii.194; Dhp-a i.393. -sippa the elephant lore, the professional knowledge of elephant-training Ja ii.221 sq. -sutta an elephant-trainer’s manual Ja ii.46 (cp. Mallinātha on Raghuv. vi.27). -soṇḍaka “elephant trunk,” an under-garment arranged with appendages like elephant trunks Vin ii.137.
Vedic hastin, lit. endowed with a hand, i.e. having a trunk
gone to the heart, learnt by heart Mil 10 -gama [˚ngama] heart-stirring, pleasant, agreeable DN i.4; DN iii.173; MN i.345; AN ii.209; AN v.205; Vin iii.77 Nd i.446; Dhs. 1343; DN-a i.75. -pariḷāha heart-glow Mil 318. -phālana bursting of the heart Ja i.282 -maṃsa the flesh of the heart, the heart Ja i.278, Ja i.347 Ja ii.159 etc. (very frequent in the Jātakas); Dhp-a i.5 Dhp-a ii.90. -bheda “heart-break,” a certain trick in cheating with measures DN-a i.79. -vañcana deluding the heart Snp-a 183 (cp. Ja vi.388 hadaya-tthena), -vatthu (1 the substance of the heart Mil 281; Dhs-a 140 (2) “heart-basis,” the heart as basis of mind, sensorium commune Tikp 17, 26, 53 sq., 62, 256; Vism 447; Snp-a 228; Dhs-a 257, Dhs-a 264. See the discussion at Dhs. trsln lxxxvi. and Cpd. 277 sq. -santāpa heart-burn i.e. grief, sorrow Vism 54. -ssita stuck in the heart (of salla, dart) Snp 938; Nd i.411.
Vedic hṛdaya, hṛd = Av. ƶərədā, not the same as Lat. cor(dem), but perhaps = Lat. haru entrails (haruspex). See K.Z. xl.419].the heart.
1. the physical organ DN ii.293; SN i.207 (ettha uro hadayan ti vuttaṃ Dhs-a 140); in detail: Vism 256, Vism 356; Vb-a 60, Vb-a 239. 2. the heart as seat of thought and feeling, esp. of strong emotion (as in Vedas!), which shows itself in the action of the heart SN i.199. Thus defined as “cintā” at Dhtm 535 (as had ), or as “hadayaṃ vuccati cittaṃ, with ster. expln “mano mānasa paṇḍara” etc. Dhs 17 Nd i.412. Cp. Dhs-a 140 (cittaṃ abbhantar’ aṭṭhena hadayan ti vuttaṃ) ■ With citta at Snp p.32 (hadayaṃ te phalessāmi “I shall break your heart”); hadayaṃ phalitaṃ a broken heart Ja i.65; Dhp-a i.173. chinna h id. Ja v.180. hadayassa santi calmness of h. AN v.64 sq. hadayā hadayaṃ aññāya tacchati MN i.32. h. nibbāyi the heart (i.e. anger) cooled down Ja vi.349; h. me avakaḍḍhati my heart is distraught Ja iv.415 ■ duhadaya bad-hearted Ja vi.469.
-aṭṭhi a bone of the heart Kp-a 49, Kp-a 50 (so read for pādaṭṭhi, see App. to Pj 1.); Vism 255; Snp-a 116. -gata [˚ngata
(indecl.) see haṃ.
(& hanti) 1. to strike, to thresh SN iv.201; Ja iv.102.
-2. to kill DN i.123; AN iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaṃ); Snp 125; Dhp 405; maggaṃ˚; to slay travellers on the road Ja i.274; Ja iii.220.
-3. to destroy to remove Snp 118; Dhp 72 ■ Forms: Pres. 1st sg hanāmi Ja ii.273; Ja ii.2nd sg. hanāsi Ja iii.199; Ja v.460; Ja v.3rd sg. hanti Snp 118; AN iv.97; Dhp-a ii.73 (= vināseti) Dhp 72; hanāti Ja v.461; hanati Ja i.432; Ja i.1st pl. hanāma Ja i.200; Ja i.3rd pl. hananti Snp 669. Imper. hana Ja iii.185 hanassu Ja v.311; hanantu Ja iv.42; Dhp 355; Ja i.368 Pot. hane Snp 394, Snp 400; haneyya DN i.123; Snp 705. ppr a-hanaṃ not killing DN i.116; hananto Ja i.274. fut hanissati Ja iv.102; hañchati Ja iv.102; hañchema Ja ii.418. aor. hani Mvu 25, Mvu 64; Mvu 3rd pl. haniṃsu Snp 295; Ja i.256; ger. hantvā Snp 121; Dhp 294 sq.; hanitvāna Ja iii.185 ■ Pass. haññati DN ii.352; SN iv.175; Snp 312; Ja i.371; Ja iv.102; Dhp-a ii.28. ppr. haññamāna SN iv.201 grd. hantabba DN ii.173. aor. pass. haññiṃsu DN i.141 fut. haññissati DN-a i.134 ■ Caus. hanāpeti to cause to slay, destroy Ja i.262; DN-a i.159; ghātāpeti Vin i.277 ghāteti to cause to slay Dhp 405; Snp 629; a-ghātayaṃ not causing to kill SN i.116; Pot. ghātaye Snp 705; ghātayeyya Snp 394; aor. aghātayi Snp 308; ghātayi Snp 309 pass. ghātīyati Mil 186. See also ghāteti. Cp. upahanati, vihanati; ˚gha, ghāta etc., paligha.
; han or ghan to smite, Idg. *gṷhen, as in Av. jainti to kill; Gr. χείνω to strike, φόνος murder Lat. de-fendo “defend” & of-fendo; Ohg. gundea Ags. gūd “battle.” The Dhtp (363 & 429) gives “hiṃsā” as meaning of han
for had, probably from pp. hanna. The Dhtm (535) gives had in meaning of “uccāra ussagga” to empty the bowels Pv iv.88 (= vaccaṃ osajjate Pv-a 268) ■ pp. hanna. Cp. ūhanati2 & ohanati;.
(nt.) killing, striking, injuring Mvu 3, Mvu 42.
fr. hanati
(f.) the jaw DN i.11; Ja i.28 (mahā˚), 498; Snp-a 30 (˚sañcalana) Vb-a 145 (˚sañcopana). ˚-saṃhanana jaw-binding, incantations to bring on dumbness DN i.11; DN-a i.97.
Vedic hanu; cp. Lat. gena jaw, Gr. γένυς chin, Goth. kinnus = Ger. kinn = E. chin, Oir. gin mouth
(f.) the jaw Ja i.498; DN-a i.97; Mil 229; also nt. Vin ii.266; Ja i.461; Ja ii.127; Ja iv.188; -˚aṭṭhika the jaw bone Ja i.265 sq.; Vism 251; Vb-a 58; Kp-a 49; Snp-a 116.
fr. hanu
a striker, one who kills DN i.56; AN ii.116 sq.; AN iii.161 sq.; SN i.85; Dhp 389.
n. ag. fr. hanati
(indecl.) an exhortative-emphatic particle used like Gr. α ̓́γε δή or French allons, voilà: well then, now, come along, alas! It is constructed with 1st pres. & fut., or imper, 2;nd person DN i.106, DN i.142; DN ii.288; Snp 153, Snp 701, Snp 1132; Ja i.88, Ja i.221, Ja i.233 Ja iii.135; DN-a i.237 (= vavasāy’atthe nipāto); Nd ii.697 (= padasandhi); Pv i.103 (= gaṇha Pv-a 49); ii.321 (= upasagg’atthe nipāta Pv-a 88); Dhp-a i.16, Dhp-a i.410 (handa je); Snp-a 200 (vvavasāne), 491 (id.); Vv-a 230 (hand’ âhaṃ gamissāmi).
cp. Sk. hanta, haṃ + ta
(nt.) easing oneself, emptying of the bowels; su˚ a good (i.e. modest) performance of bodily evacuation, i.e. modesty Ja i.421.
pp. of hanati2
(indecl.) a particle expressing surprise or haughtiness Ja i.184, Ja i.494. See also ambho.
haṃ + bho
(nt.) customarily given as “a long, storied mansion which has an upper chamber placed on the top,” a larger building, pāsāda, (store-house Vin i.58, Vin i.96, Vin i.239; Vin ii.146 (with vihāra, aḍḍhayoga pāsāda, guhā, as the 5 lenāni), 152, 195; Mil 393 Nd i.226 = Vism 25. ˚-gabbha a chamber on the upper storey Vin ii.152.
cp. Vedic harmya house & BSk. harmikā “summer-house” (?) Divy 244
1. a horse Vv 641; Ja ii.98; Mil 2.
2. speed MN i.446. -˚vāhin drawn by horses Ja vi.125.
cp. Vedic haya, fr. hi to impel. A diff. etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. haedus
(adj.) (-˚) taking, fetching; vayo˚; bringing age (said of grey hairs) Ja i.138; du˚; SN i.36.
fr. hṛ;
(nt.) taking, seizing, removing Ja i.117, Ja i.118, Ja i.232; DN-a i.71. kucchi˚; n. filling of the belly Ja i.277 ˚bhatta a meal to take along Dhp-a ii.144.
fr. hṛ;
(nt.) goods in transit, movable goods Vin iii.51.
fr. haraṇa
(f.) 1. a nerve conveying a stimulus (lit. “carrier”); only used with rasa˚; nerve of taste Vin ii.137; usually given as “a hundred thousand” in number, e.g. Ja v.4, Ja v.293, Ja v.458; Dhp-a i.134.
2. in kaṇṇamala˚; an instrument to remove the wax from the ear Vin ii.135. Cp. hāraka.
fr. haraṇa
1. to carry Ja ii.176; Dhp 124; to take with one DN i.8, DN i.142; opposed to paccāharati Vb-a 349–354; Snp-a 52
58.
2. to bring Ja i.208; to offer Ja i.238; Snp 223.
3. to take, gather (fruits) Mil 263.
4. to fetch, buy Ja i.291 (mama santikā).
5. to carry away to remove DN ii.160, DN ii.166; Ja i.282; Snp 469; Mvu 1, Mvu 26 to do away with, to abolish Ja i.345.
6. to take away by force, to plunder, steal DN i.52; Ja i.187; Ja v.254. 7. to take off, to destroy Ja i.222 (jīvitaṃ), 310 (visaṃ) to kill Ja i.281 ■ Forms: aor. ahāsi Snp 469 sq.; Dhp 3; Ja iv.308; cp. upasaṃhāsi SN v.214; pahāsi, pariyudāhāsi ajjhupāhari; ger. haritvā DN ii.160; hātūna Ja iv.280 (= haritvā C.); inf. harituṃ Ja i.187; hātave Thag 186 hātuṃ: see voharati; hattuṃ: see āharati; Fut. hāhiti Ja vi.500 (= harissati). -Pass. harīyati MN i.33; hīrati Ja v.254; pret. ahīratha Ja v.253; grd. haritabba Ja i.187 Ja i.281 ■ pp. haṭa ■ Caus. hāreti to cause to take Snp 395; to cause to be removed, to remove Ja i.345; Ja ii.176 Ja iii.431 (somebody out of office); hāretabba that which should be taken out of the way Ja i.298; Caus. II. harāpeti to cause to be brought, to offer Vin i.245; Ja ii.38 to cause to be taken (as a fine) Mil 193.
Idg. *ĝher; in meaning “take” cp. Gr. ξείρ hand; in meaning “comprise” cp. Lat. cohors. Gr. ξόρτος; Ags. geard = yard ■ The Dhtm expls har laconically by “haraṇa”
1. to be ashamed Vin i.88; Vin ii.292; DN i.213; MN i.120; SN iv.62; Iti 43; Pv i.102 ppr. harāyanto Nd i.466, & harāyamāna Ja iv.171; Nd ii.566. Often combd with aṭṭiyati (q.v.). See also hiriyati.
2. [in this meaning = Vedic hṛ; to be angry Pres. hṛṇīte] to be depressed or vexed, to be cross, to worry (cp. hiriyati) Ja v.366 (ppr. hariyyamāna); Thag 1173 (mā hari “don’t worry”).
Denom. fr. hiri (= hrī), cp. Vedic hrī to be ashamed, Pres. jihreti ■ The Dhtp (438) gives roots hiri & hara; in meaning “lajjā”
(adj.) green, tawny Dhs 617; Dhs-a 317 ˚-ssavaṇṇa gold-coloured Ja ii.33 (= hari-samāna-vaṇṇa suvaṇṇa˚ C.).
-candana yellow sandal Vv 831; Dhp-a i.28; -tāla yellow orpiment Thig 393; Dhp-a iii.29; Dhp-a iv.113; -ttaca gold-coloured Thig 333; Thag-a 235; -pada gold foot yellow leg, a deer Ja iii.184.
Idg. *ĝhel, as in Lat. helvus yellow, holus cabbage; Sk. harita, hariṇa pale (yellow or green), hiri (yellow); Av. ƶairi; Gr. ξλόος green, ξλόη “greens” Ags. geolo = E. yellow. Also the words for “gold” hāṭaka & hiraṇya
a deer Ja ii.26.
fr. hari
(adj.) 1. green, pale(-green), yellowish. It is expld by Dhpāla as nīla (e.g. Vv-a 197; Pv-a 158), and its connotation is not fixed ■ Vin i.137; DN i.148; SN i.5; Ja i.86, Ja i.87; Ja ii.26, Ja ii.110; Pv ii.1210 (bank of a pond); Vv 457 (˚patta, with green leaves, of a lotus) Ja ii.110 (of wheat); Snp-a 277 (˚haṃsa yellow, i.e. golden swan).
2. green, fresh Vin iii.16; AN v.234 (kusa) nt. (collectively) vegetables, greens Vin 266 (here applied to a field of fresh (i.e. green) wheat or cereal in general, as indicated by expln “haritaṃ nāma pubbaṇṇaṃ aparaṇṇaṃ” etc.); cp. haritapaṇṇa vegetables Snp-a 283.
3. haritā (f.) gold Thag 164 = Ja ii.334 (˚maya made of gold; but expld as “harita-maṇi-parikkhata” by C.).
4. Two cpds., rather odd in form, are haritāmātar “son of a green frog” Ja ii.238 (in verse) and haritupattā (bhūmi) “covered with green” MN i.343; Ja i.50, Ja i.399.
see hari for etym.
(nt.) a pot-herb DN ii.342.
harita + ka
(nt.) greenness Vin i.96.
abstr. fr. harita
yellow myrobalan (Terminalia citrina or chebula) Vin i.201, Vin i.206; Ja i.80; Ja iv.363; Mil 11; Dhs-a 320 (T. harīṭaka); Vv-a 5 (ṭ) ˚-kī (f.) the myrobalan tree Vin i.30; MN iii.127. pūtiharīṭakī Vism 40; ˚paṇṇika all kinds of greens Vin ii.267.
cp. Epic Sk. harītaka
(f.) a pea MN i.245; Ja v.405 (= aparaṇṇajā ti 406); vi.537; hareṇuka-yūsa pea-soup MN i.245 (one of the 4 kinds of soup).
cp. Sk. hareṇukā
= hi alaṃ (q.v.); “halaṃ dāni pakāsituṃ” why should I preach? Vin i.5 = DN ii.36 = MN i.168 = SN i.136.
a kind of deadly poison, usually as ˚visa Ja i.271, Ja i.273, Ja i.380; Ja iii.103 Ja v.465; Mil 256; Vism 57; Thag-a 287.
onomat.; cp. Sk. halāhala
(nt.) uproar, tumult Ja i.47 sq.; Mil 122. Cp. kolāhala. Halidda & Haliddi
onomat.
(f.) turmeric. - 1. haliddā: Vin i.201; Ja v.89.
2. haliddī (haliddi˚ MN i.127; AN iii.230, AN iii.233; SN ii.101; Kp-a 64; ˚rāga like the colour of turmeric, or like the t. dye, i.e. not fast quickly changing & fading Ja iii.148 (of citta), cp. Ja iii.524 sq.
cp. Sk. haridrā
calling, challenge Dāvs ii.14.
cp. Vedc hava; hū or hvā to call
(indecl.) indeed, certainly Vin i.2; DN ii.168; SN i.169; Snp 120, Snp 181, Snp 323, Snp 462; Dhp 104, Dhp 151, Dhp 177, Dhp 382; Ja i.31, Ja i.365; Dhp-a ii.228.
ha + ve
(nt.) an oblation, offering SN i.169; Snp 463 sq.; 490.
Vedic havya; fr. hū to sacrifice
1. to laugh, to be merry; pres hasati Bv i.28; Mvu 35, Mvu 59; hassati Snp 328, Snp 829; ppr hasamāna is preferable v.l. at Ja iv.281 for bhāsamāna aor. hasi Ja ii.103; Dhp-a ii.17 ■ Caus. hāseti [i.e. both fr. has & hṛṣ ] to cause to laugh; to please, to gladden Mvu 32, Mvu 46; Ja vi.217, Ja vi.304; Dhp-a ii.85; aor. hāsesi Vin iii.84; ppr. hāsayamana making merry Ja i.163, Ja i.209 Ja i.210; ger. hāsayitvāna Mil 1 ■ Caus. II. hāsāpeti Snp-a 401; Ja vi.311. Cp. pari˚, pa˚.
2. to neigh (of horses) Ja i.62; Ja vi.581 (strange aor. hasissiṃsu, expld as hasiṃsu by C.) ■ pp. hasita (& haṭṭha).;
owing to similarity of meaning the two roots has to laugh (Sk. hasati, pp. hasita) & hṛṣ to be excited (Sk. hṛṣyati, pp. hṛṣita & hṛṣṭa) have become mixed in Pāli (see also hāsa) ■ The usual (differentiated) correspondent of Sk. hṛṣyati is; haṃsati. The Dhtp (309) gives haṃsa (= harṣa) with tuṭṭhi, and (310 hasa with hasana
(nt.) laughter Dhtp 31.
fr. hasati
(adj.) laughing, merry Mvu 35, Mvu 55; (nt.) as adv. ˚ṃ jokingly, for fun Vin i.185.
ppr. of hasati + ka
laughing, merry; (nt.) laughter, mirth AN i.261; Pv iii.35 (= hasitavant hasita-mukhin C.); Mil 297 Bv i.28; Ja i.62 (? read hesita); iii.223; Vism 20.
-uppāda “genesis of mirth,” aesthetic faculty Tikp 276; see Cpd. 20 sq.
pp. of hasati, representing both Sk. hasita & hṛṣita
(adj.) is rather doubtful (“of charming speech”? or “smiling”?). It occurs in (corrupted verse at Ja vi.503 = Ap 40 (& 307), which is to be read as “aḷāra-bhamukhā (or ˚pamhā) hasulā sussoññā tanu-majjhimā.” See Kern’s remarks at Toev. s. v hasula.
fr. has
(adj.-n..) ridiculous Snp 328; (nt.) 1. laughter, mirth DN i.19; Snp 926; DN-a i.72; Pv-a 226; Dhp-a iii.258; Mil 266.
2. a joke, jest hassā pi, even in fun MN i.415; hassena pi the same Ja v.481; Mil 220; ˚vasena in jest Ja i.439.
fr. has, cp. Sk. hāsya
(indecl.) an exclamation of grief, alas! Thag-a 154 (Ap v.154); Vv-a 323, Vv-a 324.
(nt.) gold AN i.215; AN iv.255, AN iv.258, AN iv.262 (where T reads haṭaka, with sātaka as v.l. at all passages); Thig 382; Ja v.90.
cp. Sk. hāṭaka, connected with hari; cp. Goth. gulp = E. gold
at Ne 7, Ne 32 may be interpreted as grd. of hā to go (pres. jihīte). The C. expls it as “gametabba netabba” (i.e. to be understood). Doubtful.
see harati.
(nt.) relinquishing, giving up, falling off; decrease, diminution, degradation AN ii.167 AN iii.349 sq. (opp. visesa), 427; Vism 11.
-gāmin going into disgrace or insignificance AN iii.349 sq. -bhāgiya conducive to relinquishing (of perversity and ignorance) DN iii.272 sq.; AN ii.167; Ne 77; Vism 85.
fr. hā, cp. Sk. hāna
(f.) 1. decrease, loss AN ii.434; AN v.123 sq.; SN i.111; SN ii.206, SN ii.242; Ja i.338, Ja i.346.
2. falling off, waste Mvu 33, Mvu 103. Cp. saṃ˚, pari˚.
cp. Sk. hāni
at Ja v.433 is with Kern. Toev. i.132 (giving the passage without ref.) to be read as hāpaka “neglectful.
i.e. fr. hāpeti1
cultivated, attended, worshipped Ja iv.221; Ja v.158 (aggihuttaṃ ahāpitaṃ; C. wrongly hāpita); v.201 = vi.565. On all passages & their relation to Com. & BSk. see Kern,; Toev. i.132, 133.
pp. of hāpeti2
1. to neglect, omit AN iii.44 (ahāpayaṃ); iv.25; Dhp 166; Ja ii.437; Ja iv.182; ahāpetvā without omitting anything, i.e. fully AN ii.77; Ja iv.132; DN-a i.99. atthaṃ hāpeti to lose one’s advantage, to fail Snp 37; Ja i.251. 2. to postpone, delay (the performance of… ) Ja iii.448 Vism 129.
3. to cause to reduce, to beat down Ja i.124; Ja ii.31.
4. to be lost Snp 90 (? read hāyati ).
Caus. of hā to leave: see jahati; to which add fut. 2nd sg. hāhasi Ja iii.172; and aor. jahi Ja iv.314 Ja v.469
to sacrifice to worship, keep up, cultivate Ja v.195 (aggiṃ; = juhati C.). See Kern, Toev. i.133 ■ pp. hāpita.
in form = Sk. (Sūtras) hāvayati, Caus. of juhoti (see juhati), but in meaning = juhoti
is Pass. of jahati, in sense of “to be left behind,” as well as “to diminish, dwindle or waste away, disappear,” e.g. Nd i.147 (+ pari˚, antaradhāyati); Mil 297 (+ khīyati); ppr. hāyamāna Nd ii.543 Cp. hāyana.
hā
(nt.) diminution, decay, decrease DN i.54; DN-a i.165. Opposed to vaḍḍhana (increase) at MN i.518.
fr. hā
(nt.) year; in saṭṭhi˚; 60 years old (of an elephant) MN i.229; Ja ii.343; Ja vi.448, Ja vi.581.
Vedic hāyana
(adj.) abandoning, leaving behind Snp 755 = Iti 62 (maccu˚).
fr. hā
1. that which may be taken; grasping, taking; grasp, handful, booty. In cpd. ˚hārin taking all that can be taken, rapacious, ravaging Ja vi.581 (of an army; Kern, Toev. i.133 wrong in trsln “magnificent or something like it”). Of a river: tearing, rapid AN iii.64; AN iv.137; Vism 231.
2. category; name of the first sections of the Netti Pakaraṇa Ne 1 sq., 195.
fr. harati
(adj.) carrying, taking, getting; removing (f. hārikā) MN i.385; Ja i.134, Ja i.479; Pv ii.91 (dhana˚) Snp-a 259 (maṃsa˚) ■ mala˚; an instrument for removing ear-wax Ap 303; cp. haraṇī. sattha˚; a dagger carrier assassin Vin iii.73; SN iv.62. See also vallī.
fr. hāra
(adj.) attractive, charming SN iv.316; Ja i.204 (˚sadda).
fr. hṛ; cp. Sk. hāri
(adj.) carrying DN ii.348.
fr. hāra
(adj.) 1. taking, carrying (f. hārinī ) Ja i.133; Pv ii.310 (nom. pl. f. hārī); Pv-a 113.
2 robbing Ja i.204 ■ Cp. hāra˚.
fr. hāra
(adj.) carrying Vv 509; Thag-a 200; Vv-a 212.
fr. hāra
(adj.) dyed with turmeric; a˚; undyed, i.e. not changing colour Ja iii.88; cp. iii.148.
fr. haliddā
laughter; mirth, joy Dhp 146; DN-a i.228 = Snp-a 155 (“āmeṇḍita”); Ja i.33 Ja ii.82; Ja v.112; Mil 390. See also ahāsa.
-kara giving pleasure, causing joy Mil 252. -kkhaya ceasing of laughter Dhtp 439 (in defn of gilāna, illness) -dhamma merriment, sporting Vin iv.112.
fr. has, cp. Sk. hāsa & harṣa
(adj.) giving joy or pleasure Mil 149.
fr. has or hṛṣ; cp. Sk. harṣanīya
(of uncertain origin) occurs with hāsa˚; in combn with ˚pañña and is customarily taken in meaning “of bright knowledge” (i.e. hāsa + paññā), wise, clever The syn. javana-pañña points to a meaning like “quick-witted,” thus implying “quick” also in hāsu. Kern Toev. i.134 puts forth the ingenious expln that hāsu is a “cockneyism” for āsu = Sk. āśu “quick,” which does not otherwise occur in Pāli. Thus his expln remains problematic ■ See e.g. MN iii.25; SN i.63; SN v.376; Ja iv.136; Ja vi.255, Ja vi.329 ■ Abstr. ˚tā wisdom SN v.412; AN i.45.
see hasati.
is 2nd sg. fut. of jahati (e.g. Ja iii.172); in cpd. also ˚hāhisi: see vijahati.
is fut. of harati.
(indecl.) for, because; indeed, surely Vin i.13; DN i.4; Dhp 5; Snp 21; Pv ii.118; ii.710 (= hi saddo avadhāraṇe Pv-a 103); Snp-a 377 (= hi-kāro nipāto padapūraṇa-matto); Pv-a 70, Pv-a 76. In verse Ja iv.495. h’etaṃ = hi etaṃ; no h’etaṃ not so DN i.3. hevaṃ = hi evaṃ.
cp. Sk. hi
1. to hurt, injure DN ii.243; SN i.70; Snp 515; Dhp 132; Pv ii.99 (= bādheti C.); iii.42 (= paribādheti C.); Snp-a 460.
2. to kill MN i.39; Dhp 270 ■ Caus. II. hiṃsāpeti Pv-a 123 ■ Cp vi˚.
hiṃs, Vedic hinasti & hiṃsanti
(nt.) striking, hurting, killing Mvu 15, Mvu 28.
fr. hiṃs
(f.) injury, killing Ja i.445; Dhtp 387. hiṃsa-mano wish to destroy Dhp 390. Opp. a˚.
Vedic hiṃsā
one who hurts DN ii.243; Ja iv.121.
n. ag. fr. hiṃsati
(f.) hiccup Sdhp 279.
cp. Epic Sk. hikkā, fr. hikk to sob; onomat.
= hikkā, Vb-a 70.
hik + kāra
(indecl.) an exclamation of surprise or wonder Ja vi.529 (C. hin ti kāraṇaṃ).
hiṃ = hi, + kāra, i.e. the syllable “hiṃ”
(nt.) the plant asafetida Vin i.201; Vv-a 186.
-cuṇṇa powder of asafetida Dhp-a iv.171. -rāja a sort of bird Ja vi.539.
Sk. hingu
vermilion; as jāti˚; Ja v.67. 416; Vv-a4, 168. Also as ˚ikā (f.) Vv-a 324.
cp. Sk. hingula, nt.
vermilion Mvu 27, Mvu 18.
Sk. hinguli
to roam Dhtp 108 (= āhiṇḍana). See ā˚.
*Sk. hiṇḍ
(adj.) useful, suitable, beneficial, friendly AN i.58, AN i.155 sq.; AN ii.191; DN iii.211 sq.; Dhp 163-(m.) a friend, benefactor Mvu 3, Mvu 37 ■ (nt.) benefit blessing, good Vin i.4; Snp 233; AN ii.96 sq., 176; Iti 78; Snp-a 500 ■ Opp. ahita AN i.194; MN i.332.
-ānukampin friendly & compassionate DN i.4, DN i.227; Snp 693; Ja i.241, Ja i.244. -ūpacāra beneficial conduct saving goodness Ja i.172. -esin desiring another’s welfare, well-wishing MN ii.238; SN iv.359; SN v.157; ˚tā seeking another’s welfare, solicitude Dhs 1056; Dhs-a 362; Vv-a 260. -kara a benefactor Mvu 4, Mvu 65.
pp. of dahati1
to send; only in cpd. pahiṇati.
hi, hinoti
a kind of palm, Phoenix paludosa Vin i.190; Dhp-a iii.451.
hiṃ + tāla
man, only found in the Niddesa in stock defn of jantu or nara; both spellings (with & without h) occur; see Nd i.3 = Nd ii.249.
probably for indagu, inda + gu (= ˚ga), i.e. sprung from Indra. The h perhaps fr. hindu. The spelling h˚; is a corrupt one
(adj.-n.) cold frosty Dhs-a 317 ■ (nt.) ice, snow Ja iii.55.
-pāta-samaya the season of snow-fall Vin i.31, Vin i.288; MN i.79; Ja i.390; Mil 396. -vāta a snow or ice wind Ja i.390.
cp. Vedic hima; Gr. ξεϊμα & ξειμών winter, ξιών snow; Av. ƶaya winter; Lat. hiems etc.
(adj.) snowy Ja v.63 (= himayutta C.). (m.) Himavā the Himālaya: see Dict. of Names.
hima + vant
(adv.) yesterday Vin i.28; Vin ii.77; Ja i.70, Ja i.237; Ja v.461 Ja vi.352, Ja vi.386; Mil 9. In sequence ajja hiyyo pare it seems to mean “to-morrow”; thus at Vin iv.63, Vin iv.69; Ja iv.481 (= sve C.). See para 2. c.
Vedic hyaḥ, Gr. ξχές, Lat. heri; Goth. gistradagis “to-morrow,” E. yester-day, Ger. gestern etc.
(nt.) gold Vin i.245, Vin i.276; Vin ii.159; AN iv.393; Snp 285, Snp 307, Snp 769; Nd ii.11; gold-piece SN i.89; Ja i.92. Often together with suvaṇṇa Vin i.150; DN ii.179; h˚-suvaṇṇaṃ gold & money MN iii.175; Ja i.341 ˚olokana (-kamma) valuation of gold Ja ii.272. Hiri & hiri
Vedic hiraṇya; see etym. under hari & cp. Av. ƶaranya gold
(f.) sense of shame, bashfulness, shyness SN i.33; DN iii.212; AN i.51, AN i.95; AN iii.4 sq., 331, 352 iv.11, 29; Snp 77, Snp 253, Snp 719; Pp 71; Pv iv.73; Ja i.129 Ja i.207; Ne 50, Ne 82; Vism 8. Expld Pp 23 sq.; is one of the cāga-dhana’s: see cāga (cp. Jtm 311) ■ Often contrasted to & combined with; ottappa (cp. below) fear of sin: AN i.51; DN iii.284; SN ii.206; Iti 36; Ne 39; their difference is expld at Vism 464 (“kāya-duccarit’ ādīhi hiriyatī ti hiri; lajjāy’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; tehi yeva ottappatī ti ottappaṃ; pāpato ubbegass’ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ”); Ja i.129 sq.; Dhs-a 124.
-ottappa shame & fear of sin MN i.271; SN ii.220; Iti 34; AN ii.78; Ja i.127, Ja i.206; Tikp 61; Vism 221; Dhp-a iii.73 Frequently spelt otappa, e.g. Ja i.129; Iti 36. -kopīna a loin cloth MN i.10; Vism 31, Vism 195. -nisedha restrained by conscience SN i.7, SN i.168 = Snp 462; Dhp 143; Dhp-a iii.86 -bala the power of conscientiousness AN ii.150; Dhs 30 Dhs 101. -mana modest in heart, conscientious DN ii.78; MN i.43; SN ii.159.
cp. Vedic hrī
(& hirīka) (adj.) having shame, only as-˚ in neg. ahirika shameless, unscrupulous AN i.51, AN i.85 AN ii.219; Pp 19; Iti 27 (˚īka); Ja i.258 (chinna˚ id.); nt ˚ṃ unscrupulousness Pp 19.
fr. hiri
(& hirīmant) (adj.) bashful, modest, shy DN iii.252, DN iii.282; SN ii.207 sq.; SN iv.243 sq.; AN ii.218 AN ii.227; AN iii.2 sq., 7 sq., 112; iv.2 sq., 38, 109; v.124, 148; Iti 97; Pp 23.
fr. hiri
(m. & nt.) shame, conscientiousness Vv-a 194.; Hiriyati (hiriyati)
fr. hiri
to blush, to be shy; to feel conscientious scruple, to be ashamed Pp 20, Pp 24; Mil 171; Vism 464 (hirīyati); Dhs-a 149.
see harāyati
(nt.) a kind of Andropogon (sort of perfume) Ja vi.537; DN-a i.81.
cp. Sk. hrīvera
to refresh oneself, to be glad Dhtp 152 (= sukha), 591 (id.).
hlād
1. inferior, low; poor, miserable; vile, base, abject, contemptible, despicable Vin i.10; DN i.82 DN i.98; SN ii.154 (hīnaṃ dhātuṃ paṭicca uppajjati hīnā saññā); iii.47; iv.88, 309 (citta h. duggata); DN iii.106 DN iii.111 sq., 215 (dhātu); AN ii.154; AN iii.349 sq.; AN v.59 sq. Snp 799, Snp 903 sq.; Nd i.48, Nd i.103, Nd i.107, Nd i.146; Ja ii.6; Pv iv.127 (opp. paṇīta); Vv 2413 (= lāmaka Vv-a 116); Dhs 1025; Dhs-a 45; Mil 288; Vism 13; Dhp-a iii.163 ■ Often opposed to ukkaṭṭha (exalted, decent, noble), e.g. Vin iv.6; Ja i.20, Ja i.22; Ja iii.218; Vb-a 410; or in graduated sequence hīna (→ majjhima) → paṇīta (i.e. low, medium excellent), e.g. Vism 11, Vism 85 sq., 424, 473. See majjhima.
2. deprived of, wanting, lacking Snp 725; Iti 106 (ceto-vimutti˚); Pp 35 ■ hīnāya āvattati to turn to the lower, to give up orders, return to secular life Vin i.17; SN ii.231; SN iv.191; Ud 21; AN iii.393 sq. MN i.460; Snp p.92; Pp 66; hīnāya vattati id. Ja i.276 hīnāy’āvatta one who returns to the world MN i.460, MN i.462; SN ii.50; SN iv.103; Nd i.147.
-ādhimutta having low inclinations Ja iii.87; Pp 26 ˚ika id. SN ii.157; Iti 70. -kāya inferior assembly Vv-a 298 (here meaning Yamaloka); Pv-a 5. -jacca low-born, low-caste Ja ii.5; Ja iii.452; Ja v.19, Ja v.257. -vāda one whose doctrine is defective Snp 827; Nd i.167. -viriya lacking in energy Iti 116; Dhp-a i.75; Dhp-a ii.260.
pp. of jahati
is Pass. of jahati.
1. a necklace (?) Vv-a 176.
2. a small piece, splinter Ja iv.30 (sakalika˚); hīrahīraṃ karoti to cut to pieces, to chop up Ja i.9; Dhp-a i.224 (+ khaṇḍâkhaṇḍaṃ).
cp. late Sk. hīra
a splinter; tāla˚ “palm-splinter,” a name for a class of worms Vism 258.
hīra + ka, cp. lexic. Sk. hīraka “diamond”
is Pass. of harati.
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) scorn(ing), disdain, contempt Mil 357; DN-a i.276 (of part. “re”: hīlana-vasena āmantanaṃ); as ˚ā at Vb 353 (+ ohīḷanā); Vb-a 486.
fr. hīḍ
despised, looked down upon, scorned Vin iv.6; Mil 227, Mil 251; Vism 424 (+ ohīḷita oññāta etc.); DN-a i.256.
pp. of hīḷeti
1. to be vexed, to grieve SN i.308; to vex, grieve Vv 8446. 2. to scorn, disdain, to feel contempt for, despise DN ii.275; Snp 713 (appaṃ dānaṃ na hīḷeyya); Ja ii.258; DN-a i.256 (= vambheti); Dhp-a iv.97; Mil 169 (+ garahati) ■ pp. hīḷita.
Vedic hīḍ or hel to be hostile; cp. Av. ƶēaša awful; Goth. us-geisnan to be terrified. Connected also with hiṃsati ■ The Dhtp (637) defines by “nindā”
(indecl.) the sound “huṃ” an utterance of discontent or refusal Dhp-a iii.108 = Vv-a 77; Vism 96. Cp. haṃ huṅkāra growling, grumbling Vism 105. huṅkaroti to grumble Dhp-a i.173. huṅkaraṇa = ˚kāra Dhp-a i.173 sq See also huhuṅka.
the sound uttered by a jackal Ja iii.113.
sacrificed, worshipped, offered Vin i.36 = Ja i.83; DN i.55; Ja i.83 (nt. “oblation”); Vv 3426 (su˚, + sudinna, suyiṭṭha); Pp 21; Dhs 1215; DN-a i.165; Dhp-a ii.234.
-āsana [cp. Sk. hutāśana] the fire, lit. “oblation-eater” Dāvs ii.43; Vism 171 (= aggi).
pp. of juhati
(nt.) sacrifice: see aggi˚.
cp. Vedic hotra
is grd. of juhati “to be sacrificed,” or “venerable” Vism 219 (= āhuneyya).
“it may be” Vin i.8; = huveyya MN i.171. See bhavati.
(adv.) there, in the other world, in another existence. As prep. with acc. “on the other side of,” i.e. before Snp 1084; Nd i.109; usually in connection idha vā huraṃ vā in this world or the other SN i.12; Dhp 20; Snp 224 = Ja i.96; hurāhuraṃ from existence to existence Dhp 334; Thag 399; Vism 107; Dhp-a iv.43-The expln by Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 105 may be discarded as improbable.
of uncertain origin
(adj.) saying “huṃ, huṃ,” i.e. grumbly, rough; ˚jātika one who has a grumbly nature, said of the brahmins Vin i.2; Ud 3 (“proud of his caste Seidenstūcker). nihuhuṅka (= nis + h.) not grumbly (or proud), gentle Vin i.3; Ud 3. Thus also Kern Toev. i.137; differently Hardy in J.P.T.S. 1901, 42 (“uttering & putting confidence into the word huṃ” Bdhgh (Vin i.362) says: “diṭṭha-mangaliko mānavasena kodhavasena ca huhun ti karonto vicarati.”
fr. huṃ
(f.) calling, challenging SN i.208.
fr. hū, hvā “to call,” cp. avhayati
(indecl.) a vocative (exclam.) particle “eh,” “here,” hey MN i.125, MN i.126 (+ je); Dhp-a i.176 (double).
(adv.) below, from below Pts i.84; Dhs 1282, Dhs 1284, Mvu 5, Mvu 64.
fr. heṭṭhā
(indecl.) down, below, underneath Vin i.15; DN i.198; Iti 114; Ja i.71; Vv-a 78; Pv-a 113. As prep. with gen (abl.) or cpd. “under” Ja i.176; Ja ii.103; lower in the manuscript, i.e. before, above Ja i.137, Ja i.206, Ja i.350; Vv-a 203; lower, farther on Ja i.235.
-āsana a lower seat Ja i.176. -nāsika-(sota) the lower nostril Ja i.164. -bhāga lower part Ja i.209, Ja i.484. -mañce underneath the bed Ja i.197 (˚mañcato from under the bed); ii.275, 419; iv.365. -vāta the wind below, a wind blowing underneath Ja i.481. -sīsaka head downwards Ja iii.13.
cp. Vedic adhastāt = adhaḥ + abl. suff. ˚tāt
(adj.) lower, lowest Vin iv.168; Dhs 1016; Tikp 41; Pv-a 281; Sdhp 238, Sdhp 240, Sdhp 256. ˚tala the lowest level Ja i.202.
compar ■ superl. formation fr. heṭṭhā
(adj.-n.) one who harasses, a robber Ja iv.495, Ja iv.498. Cp. vi˚.
fr. heṭheti
(f.) harassing DN ii.243; Vb-a 75.
fr. heṭheti
to harass, worry, injure Ja iv.446, Ja iv.471; Pv iii.52 (= bādheti Pv-a 198) ppr. a-heṭhayaṃ Dhp 49; SN i.21. med. a-heṭhayāna SN i.7; SN iv.179; ger. heṭhayitvāna Ja iii.480 ■ pp. heṭhayita Ja iv.447.
Vedic heḍ = hel or hīḍ (see hīḷeti)
= hi etaṃ.
1. cause, reason, condition SN i.134; AN iii.440 sq.; Dhs 595, Dhs 1053; Vism 450 Tikp 11, 233, 239. In the older use paccaya and hetu are almost identical as synonyms, e.g. n’atthi hetu n’atthi paccayo DN i.53; aṭṭha hetū aṭṭha paccayā DN iii.284 sq.; cp. SN iii.69 sq.; DN ii.107; MN i.407; AN i.55 sq., 66, 200; iv.151 sq.; but later they were differentiated (see Mrs. Rh. D., Tikp introd. p. xi. sq.). The diff. between the two is expld e.g. at Ne 78 sq.; Dhs-a 303 ■ There are a number of other terms, with which hetu is often combd, apparently without distinction in meaning, e.g. hetu paccaya kāraṇa Nd ii.617 (s. v. sankhā); mūla h. nidāna sambhava pabhava samuṭṭhāna āhāra ārammaṇa paccaya samudaya frequent in the Niddesa (see Nd ii.p. 231, s. v. mūla). In the Abhidhamma we find hetu as “moral condition referring to the 6 mūlas or bases of good & bad kamma viz.; lobha, dosa, moha and their opposites: Dhs 1053 sq. Kv 532 sq ■ Four kinds of hetu are distinguished at Dhs-a 303 = Vb-a 402, viz. hetu˚, paccaya˚, uttama˚ sādhāraṇa˚. Another 4 at Tikp 27, viz. kusala˚ akusala˚, vipāka˚, kiriya˚, and 9 at Tikp 252, viz kusala˚, akusala˚, avyākata˚, in 3X3 constellations (cp Dhs-a 303) ■ On term in detail see Cpd. 279 sq.; Dhs trsln §§ 1053, 1075 ■ abl. hetuso from or by way of (its) cause SN v.304; AN iii.417 ■ acc. hetu (-˚) (elliptically as adv.) on account of, for the sake of (with gen.) e.g. dāsa-kammakara-porisassa hetu MN ii.187; kissa hetu why? AN iii.303; AN iv.393; Snp 1131; Pv ii.81 (= kiṃ nimittaṃ Pv-a 106); pubbe kata˚; by reason (or in consequence) of what was formerly done AN i.173 sq.; dhana˚ for the sake of gain Snp 122.
2. suitability for the attainment of Arahantship, one of the 8 conditions precedent to becoming a Buddha Bv ii.59 = Ja i.14, Ja i.44. 3. logic Mil 3.
-paccaya the moral causal relation, the first of the 24 Paccayas in the Paṭṭhāna Tikp 1 sq., 23 sq., 60 sq., 287 320; Dukp 8, 41 sq.; Vism 532; Vb-a 174. -pabhava arising from a cause, conditioned Vin i.40; Dhp-a i.92 -vāda the theory of cause, as adj. “proclaimer of a cause,” name of a sect MN i.409; opp. ahetu-vāda “denier of a cause” (also a sect) MN i.408; ahetu-vādin id. Ja v.228 Ja v.241 (= Jtm 149).
Vedic hetu, fr. hi to impel
(adj.) (-˚) connected with a cause, causing or caused, conditioned by, consisting in Mvu 1, Mvu 45 (maṇi-pallanka˚); Dhs 1009 (pahātabba˚); Vb-a 17 (du˚, ti˚). usually as sa˚; and a˚; (with & without a moral condition) AN i.82; Vism 454 sq.; Dukp 24 sq sa˚; Dhs 1073 (trsln “having root-conditions as concomitants”); Kv 533 (“accompanied by moral conditions”); a˚; SN iii.210 (˚vāda, as a “diṭṭhi”); Vism 450.
fr. hetu
(nt.) reason, consequence; abl. in consequence of (-˚) Vism 424 (diṭṭhivisuddhi˚).
abstr. formation fr. hetu
see bhavati.
(nt.) gold DN ii.187; Ja vi.574.
-jāla golden netting (as cover of chariots etc.) AN iv.393; Vv 351, 362 (˚ka). -vaṇṇa golden-coloured DN ii.134 Thig 333; Thag-a 235; Dhs-a 317.
cp. Epic Sk. heman
winter AN iv.138; Ja i.86; Mil 274.
hema(= hima) + anta
(adj.) destined for the winter, wintry, icy cold Vin i.15, Vin i.31 (rattiyo), 288; MN i.79; SN v.51; AN iv.127; Vism 73.
fr. hemanta
(adj.) belonging to, living in the Himālaya Ja i.506; Ja iv.374, Ja iv.437; ˚vatika id. Dpvs v.54. Herannika (& aka);
fr. himavant
goldsmith (? for which suvaṇṇakāra!), banker, money-changer Vism 515 = Vb-a 91; Ja i.369; Ja iii.193; DN-a i.315; Mil 331 (goldsmith?).
-phalaka the bench (i.e. table, counter) of a money changer or banker Vism 437 = Vb-a 115; Ja ii.429 Ja iii.193 sq.
fr. hirañña, cp. BSk. hairaṇyika Divy 501; Mvu iii.443
see hi.
to neigh Ja i.51, Ja i.62 (here hasati ); v.304 (T. siṃsati for hiṃsati; C. expls hiṃsati as “hessati,” cp. abhihiṃsanā for ˚hesanā). pp. hesita.
both heṣ (Vedic) & hreṣ (Epic Sk.); in Pāli confused with hṛṣ (hasati): see hasati2
(f.) neighing, neigh Dāvs v.56.
fr. hesati
(nt.) neighing Ja i.62 (here as hasita ); Mvu 23, Mvu 72.
pp. of hesati
is: 1. Fut. of bhavati, e.g. Ja iii.279.
2. Fut. of jahati, e.g. Ja iv.415; Ja vi.441.
is Fut. 3rd sg. of bhavati, e.g. Bv ii.10 = Ja i.4 (v. 20).
etc. see bhavati.
(nt.) (function of) offering; aggi˚; the sacrificial fire Snp-a 436 (v.l. BB ˚hutta).
Vedic hotra
(m. & nt.) oblation DN i.9; DN-a i.93 (lohita˚).
fr.; hu, juhati
an astrologer Mvu 35, Mvu 71.
late Sk. horā “hour” (in astrol. literature, fr. Gr. ω ̔́ρα: cp. Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Lit. iii.569 sq.) + pāṭhaka, i.e. expert